Nuevo Testament o Griego Por Palabra

INTRODUCCIN NUEVO TESTAMENTO GRIEGO Scriveners Textus Receptus 1894 Preparado y editado por Dr. Maurice A. Robinson.
INTRODUCCIN Todo la edicin del griego Textus Receptus 1894 Scrivener, texto del Nuevo Testamento probablemente subyace la Versin autorizada (King James) de 1611 se incluye en este documento. Este texto apareci por primera vez bajo la direccin de la FHA Scrivener como "El Nuevo Testamento en el griego original de acuerdo con el texto de su sermn en la Versin Autorizada" (Cambridge: University Press, 1894, rep ed 1902..). El texto de Scrivener ha sido reproducido en el griego del Nuevo Testamento publicado por la Sociedad Bblica Trinitaria como " : El Nuevo Testamento. El texto griego subyacente a la Versin Ingls Autorizado de 1611 (Londres: Sociedad Bblica Trinitaria, 1977). La edicin de la Trinidad (actualmente en prensa) se reproduce sin cambios el texto original Scrivener de 1894, que haba construido artificialmente Scrivener de varios primeros impresos ediciones griegas. Propsito Scrivener era proporcionar (290 aos despus!) Un texto griego que ms se podra decir que la base del texto Ingls de la versin autorizada de 1611, un texto que podra ser utilizado para ilustrar claramente las diferencias entre el griego subyacente de la AV 1611 y el de la versin revisada de Ingls 1881. Un procedimiento similar se realiza tambin por R.V.G. Tasker en 1964, cuando trat de reconstruir el texto griego subyacente de la Nueva Biblia en Ingls de su texto Ingls, ya que de lo contrario los traductores no haban proporcionado edicin griega de los suyos. Debido a esto, el texto de Scrivener 1894 no debe considerarse en modo alguno un producto de crtica textual aplicada y, ciertamente, no es equivalente a la forma de autgrafos de texto del Nuevo Testamento, lo que no era intencin de Scrivener. Por el contrario, la edicin Scrivener simplemente "montado" el texto que aparece en el Autorizada (King
James) Versin de 1611 a las lecturas que se encuentran en diversas ediciones impresas del Textus Receptus. El principal de estos fueron Theodore Beza edicin de 1598 y Robert Stephens ediciones de 1550 y 1551, que se sabe que han sido utilizados por las traductores del King James (Rey Jaime). Ediciones de Beza (nueve diferentes) se vieron variaciones sobre los de Stephens, y las ediciones de Stephens (cuatro diferentes) eran bsicamente reproducciones editadas de las ediciones 1527 y 1535 de Erasmus. Scrivener libremente prestado del griego de otras primeras ediciones impresas Textus Receptus para construir su texto, sobre todo cuando el texto en Ingls de la versin autorizada no corresponden claramente a la griega encontrada en las ediciones primarios utilizados por los traductores de la versin autorizada del punto anterior. En algunos lugares, la versin autorizada al parecer sac de las lecturas de la Vulgata Latina y el texto Ingls no se ajusta a CUALQUIER texto impreso griego temprano. Scrivener ha elegido en este caso para seguir el ms cercano posible texto griego impreso, pero no intent volver a traducir de la parte posterior del latn al griego (como Erasmus ha sido criticado por hacer en el Apocalipsis). As, en Jn 10:16 la Versin Autorizada sigue la Vulgata Latina mediante la lectura de "un solo rebao" (en latn, unum ovile, requiriendo como el griego, que debe ser restaurada como "subyacente", la versin autorizada). Scrivener en vez sigui a la lectura de TODOS los primeros impresos los textos griegos, todos los manuscritos conocidos griegos, padres, y otras versiones iniciales, e impresos , o "un solo rebao"-aunque esto no refleje exactamente subyacente texto griego la AV, tal era lo ms honestamente Scrivener podra venir sin tener que realizar re-traduccin del latn al griego. Tenga en cuenta que hay una serie de lugares donde el texto griego Scrivener parece reconstruir pasajes en cursiva en la versin autorizada (por ejemplo, Mc 8:14, 9:42; Jn 8:6, Hechos 1:4, 26:18, 1 Jn 2, : 23; 3:16; Apocalipsis 16:14; 19:14, 18). Algunos de estos lugares en cursiva reflejan en realidad las variantes textuales conocidos por los traductores de la versin autorizada; otros lugares reflejan las palabras suministradas por los traductores audiovisuales en los que haba insuficiente o nula evidencia de los manuscritos griegos. Muchos de estos pasajes, sin embargo, no estn subrayadas en la impresin original de 1611 AV, y Scrivener aparentemente seguido ese formato no en cursiva como la base para su restauracin. Muchos de estos pasajes en cursiva que no fueron tan marcados en el original de 1611 de impresin se aadieron en las revisiones posteriores de Blayney y otros, a travs de 1769. La
mayora de las lecturas reconstruidas en cursiva Scrivener fueron atrados sin embargo a partir de uno o otro de los primeros edicin impresa griego, en lugar de ser una nueva traduccin del Ingls al griego koin. Esta edicin Scrivener del "Textus Receptus" o "Texto Recibido", aunque artificialmente construido, sin embargo, refleja un acuerdo general con otros textos griegos los primeros impresos tambin llamado por ese nombre. Estos incluyen ediciones como las de Erasmus 1516, la Polglota Complutense de 1514/1522, Colinaeus 1534, Stephens 1546, Beza 1565, y (aquella de la que se obtiene el trmino "Textus Receptus") Elzevir 1633. Como se mencion anteriormente, George Ricker Berry observ correctamente que "En su mayora son una y la misma cosa, y [cualquiera] de ellos puede ser referido como el Textus Receptus" (Berry, "Interlineal", p.ii). Todos estos primeros impresos del Nuevo Testamento griego estrechamente paralelo al texto del Ingls-idioma autorizado (o King James) Versin de 1611, ya que esa versin se basa estrechamente en Beza 1598, que difera poco de sus predecesores Texto Recibido. Estas mismas ediciones griegas TR todos en general, reflejan la "bizantino" (tambin llamado la "mayora" o "tradicional") Textform que predomin durante todo el perodo de la copia manual de los manuscritos griegos del Nuevo Testamento. El usuario debe tener en cuenta que el escribiente 1894 TR Edition no est de acuerdo con las modernas ediciones crticas como la publicada por las Sociedades Bblicas Unidas o las distintas ediciones de NestleAland. Esas ediciones seguir una predominantemente "alejandrino" texto griego, a diferencia de la Textform bizantino que generalmente subyace en todas las ediciones TR. Tenga en cuenta, sin embargo, que + 85% del texto de TODOS los griegos ediciones del Nuevo Testamento es el mismo. Tambin hay que reconocer que el NO edicin impresa Receptus texto griego est de acuerdo al 100% con la tradicin del manuscrito bizantino agregado (mayora / texto tradicional), ni con el texto griego supone que la base de la versin autorizada. Sin embargo, todos los textos impresos Receptus se aproximan al Textform bizantino lo suficientemente cerca (alrededor del 98% de acuerdo) para reclamar una identidad casi total de la lectura entre las formas Receptus y la mayora de los manuscritos. Las diferencias significativas entre los textos modernos crticos, la versin autorizada, y el bizantino formato texto (mayora) son los ms claramente presentado en el NU-texto y las notas de M-texto adjunto a
las ediciones de la "Nueva Versin King James", publicado por Thomas Nelson Co. Sin nmero de verso o versculo que se encuentra en la versin autorizada que falta en la edicin 1894 Scrivener TR.
CGTS Concordant Greek Text Sublinear

version 1.5 2009 Concordant Publishing Concern adapted for Scriveners Textus Receptus 1894 Scripture4all Foundation
CGTS
Concordancia sublineal del texto griego versin 1.5 2009 Preocupacin Publishing Concordante adaptado para escribientes Textus Receptus 1894 - Fundacin Scripture4all
The CGTS is characterized by its uniformity, its exactitude and its vivid reflection of the Greek, and aims to be as nearly Greek as can be understood by an English reader. With very few exceptions (such as 'after' for WITH and 'make' for DO) the CGTS is uniform in its renderings, that is, wherever a given Greek word occurs, the same English word is beneath it at all times. Where the Greek is alike, the English is likewise.
Los CGTS se caracteriza por su uniformidad, su exactitud y su reflejo vivo de la griega, y su objetivo es ser lo ms griego como puede ser comprendido por un lector de Ingls. Con muy pocas excepciones (como el "despus" de CON y 'make' para hacer) el CGTS es uniforme en sus representaciones, es decir, cuando una determinada palabra griega ocurre, la palabra misma Ingls est por debajo de l en todo momento. Cuando el griego es igual, el Ingls es lo mismo.
On the other hand, the CGTS also registers almost all the differences in the Greek. For instance, there are two negatives, but they are never confused. is always NOT, is always NO. CAPITALS, common type and italics are used in the CGTS. The CAPITALS carry the reader as close to the elements, which compose the Greek language, as possible. Common type is used for words when the STANDARD would not be intelligible. For example, , COOL, is rendered 'soul'. The common type is also used for parts of words where no true English standard can be found.
Por otro lado, los CGTS tambin registran casi todas las diferencias en el griego. Por ejemplo, hay dos aspectos negativos, pero nunca se confunden. NO es siempre, siempre es NO. Capiteles, de tipo comn y en cursiva se utilizan en las CGTS. Los capiteles llevar al lector lo ms cerca posible de los elementos que componen la lengua griega, como sea posible. Tipo comn se utiliza para las palabras cuando la norma no sera inteligible. Por ejemplo, COOL, se representa el "alma". El tipo comn tambin se utiliza para partes de palabras donde no estndar Ingls verdadera se puede encontrar.
En Ingls no tiene forma de la voz media, lo que hace que el sujeto objeto de una accin, esta forma se expresa en el pasivo con letras cursivas. Mateo 4:4
As English has no form for the Middle voice, which makes the subject the object of an action, this form is expressed in the passive with italic letters.
Matthew 4:4
As the participle has no number in English, this is indicated by adding one for the singular and ones for the plural. Thus we have in Revelation 1:3 'one-readING' , in which the one- denotes the singular and the -ING the participle of the verb 'read'.
Como el participio no tiene ningn nmero en Ingls, esto se indica mediante la adicin de uno para el singular y el plural para los. As tenemos en Apocalipsis 1:3 'one-lectura ", en la que el uno representa el singular y el ING-el participio del verbo" leer ".
Revelation 1:3
Apocalipsis 1:3
As English has no form for the indefinite (aorist) participle, it is distinguished by putting the 'ing' in italics.
En Ingls no tiene forma de lo indefinido (aoristo) participio, que se distingue por poner el 'ing' en cursiva.
John 1:22
Juan 1:22
Parsing para ScrTR versin 1,1 Adaptado de Robinsons (Scrivener Textus Receptus 1894)
Parsing Part of speech: v Verb vi indicative (mood) vn infinitive (mood) vm imperative (mood) vs subjunctive (mood) vo optative (mood) vp Verb participle n_ Noun ni Indeclinable Noun a_ Adjective t_ definite Article p Pronoun (2 columns) pd Demonstrative pi Interrogative pk Correlative px Indefinite pp Personal ps Possessive pf Reflexive pq Correlative or interrogative pr Relative pc Reciprocal
Parsing Parte del discurso:

v Verbos vi indicativo (estado de nimo) vn infinitivo (estado de nimo) vm imperativo (estado de nimo) vs subjuntivo (estado de nimo) vo optativo (estado de nimo) vp verbo participio n_ Sustantivo ni Sustantivo indeclinable a_ Adjetivo t_ artculo definido p Pronombre (2 columnas) pd Demostrativo pi Interrogativo pk correlativa px Indefinida pp Personal ps posesivo pf reflexiva pq correlativa o interrogativo pr relativa pc Recproca
Adv Adverb or - and particle Adv Adverbio o - y partcula combined combinado Part Particle Parte de partculas Conj Conjunction Conj Conjuncin Inj Interjection Inj Interjeccin Prep Preposition Prep Preposicin Aramaic Aramaic Aramaic Arameo Hebrew Hebrew Hebrew Hebreo
Parse Code
Parse Cdigo
Nouns Sustantivos Pronouns Pronombres Adjectives case number gender Adjetivos caso nmero adicional de extra gnero Verb + mood tense voice person Verbo + tenso estado de nimo voz number extra persona adicional nmero Verb Participle tense voice case Participio Verbo voz tensa caso number gender extra nmero extra de gnero Case Caso Nom nominative (5-case system only!) Gen genitive Dat dative Acc accusative Voc Vocative Person 1 2 3 Number sg Singular pl Plural Gender m masculine
sg Singular pl Plural Gnero m masculino
Nom
nominativo (5-casos nico sistema!)
Genitivo Gen Dat dativo Acc acusativo Vocativo Voc Persona 1 2 3

Nmero
f feminine n neuter Tense Pres present Impf imperfect Fut future Aor Aorist Perf Perfect Plup pluperfect 2Fut second Future 2Aor second Aorist 2Perf second Perfect 2Plup second pluperfect txx No Tense Stated Voice act active mid middle pas passive mid/pas either middle or passive midD middle Deponent pasD passive Deponent midD/pasD middle or passive Deponent im-Act impersonal active vxx No Voice Stated Mood vi indicative vm imperative vs subjunctive vo optative vn infinitive Extra (with verb) MidS middle significance Con contracted form Tra transitive Att attic Greek form
f femenino n neutro Tenso Pres presente impf Imperfecto Fut futuro Ao Aoristo Perf Perfecto Plup pluscuamperfecto Futuro segundo 2Fut Aoristo segundo 2Aor 2Perf segundo Perfecto 2Plup segundo pluscuamperfecto txx No Tense Dicho Voz acto activo A mediados medio pas pasivo mid/pas medio o pasivo MIdD medio deponente pasD Deponente pasivo midD/pasD deponente medio o pasivo im-Act activo impersonal vxx No voz Dicho Modo vi indicativo vm imperativo vs subjuntivo vo optativo vn infinitivo Extra (con verbo) MidS medio significacin Con forma contracto Tra transitivo Att formadel griego tico
Apo apocopated form Irr irregular or impure form Extra () Con Contracted form Att Attic Greek form Cmp Comparative Neg particles as Part) Int Interrogative
Apo Apcope Irr irregular o forma impura Adicional ()
Con forma Contracto Att forma griego tico Cmp comparativo Negative (used only with Neg negativo (slo se utiliza con partculas como Parte) Int Interrogativo
EL NUEVO TESTAMENTO GRIEGO CDIGOS declinacin de sustantivos, CONJUNCIONES Y PARTCULAS
adjetivos,
preposiciones,
Derivado de "Nuevo Lxico Griego Analtico" Perschbacher de Maurice A. Robinson 01 de julio 1995
Los cdigos que siguen reflejan un compendio original y correccin de los cdigos de anlisis utilizados en Wesley J. Perschbacher, _The New Analytical griego Lexicon_ (Peabody, MA: Hendrickson, 1990), cuyo volumen es en s misma una revisin actualizada y corregida del griego original, _Analytical Lexicon_ por Samuel Davidson (London: Samuel Bagster and Sons, 1859). Muchos no verbales Nuevas formas Testamento griego (por ejemplo, sustantivos, adjetivos, conjunciones, preposiciones y partculas) puede ser disminuido en ms de una manera. Siguiendo el ejemplo de Davidson y Perschbacher, dadas las declinaciones reflejan nicamente aquellas formas que realmente ocurren en el Nuevo Testamento griego. Adaptado versin 1.0 por Scripture4all Foundation.
1:1 biblos
biblos
n_ Nom Sg f
genesews ihsou genesis iEsous

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
cristou uiou christos huios

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
dauid uiou dauid huios

ni proper n_ Gen Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
SCROLL
OF-generating of-lineage
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
SON
of-DAVID SON of-David

egennhsen ton gennaO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
of-ABRAHAM of-Abraham
iakwb iakwb de iakOb iakOb de
ni proper
ni proper
Conj
1:2 abraam
abraam
ni proper

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
isaak isaak de isaak isaak de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj
t_ Acc Sg m
ABRAHAM generatES begets

THE
ISAAC
ISAAC
YET generatES begets
THE
JACOB
JACOB
YET
ioudan ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous autou adelphos autos

n_ Acc Pl m
pp Gen Sg m
. The book of the generation of Jesus Christ, the son of David, the son of Abraham. Genealoga de Jesucristo, hijo de David, hijo de Abrahn. 2 Abraham begat Isaac; and Isaac begat Jacob; and Jacob begat Judas and his brethren; Abrahn engendr a Isaac. Isaac engendr a Jacob. Jacob engendr a Judas y a sus hermanos.
generatES begets
THE
JUDAS
AND
THE
brothers
OF-him
1:3 ioudas
ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj

fares kai ton phares kai ho

ni proper
Conj
t_ Acc Sg m
zara zara
ni proper
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qamar thamar
ni proper
fares phares
ni proper
JUDAS
THE
PHARES AND
THE
ZARA
OUT OF-THE
THAMAR PHARES
de de
Conj

esrwm esrwm de hesrOm hesrOm de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

aram aram
ni proper
And Judas begat Phares and Zara of Thamar; and Phares begat Esrom; and Esrom begat Aram; Judas engendr de Tamar a Fars y a Zara. Fars engendr a Esrn. Esrn engendr a Arn.
THE
ESROM
ESROM
THE
ARAM
1:4 aram
aram
ni proper
de de
Conj

aminadab aminadab de aminadab aminadab de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

naasswn naassOn
ni proper
And Aram begat Aminadab; and Aminadab begat Naasson; and Naasson begat Salmon;
Arn engendr a Aminadab. Aminadab engendr a Naasn. Nassn engendr a Salmn.
ARAM
THE
AMINADAB
AMINADAB
THE
NAASSON
naasswn de naassOn de
ni proper
Conj

salmwn salmOn
ni proper
NAASSON
THE
SALMON
1:5 salmwn de
salmOn
ni proper
de
Conj

boes boes
ni proper
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
racab boes rhachab boes

ni proper
ni proper
de de
Conj
egennhsen gennaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
And Salmon begat Booz of Rachab; and Booz begat Obed of Ruth; and Obed begat Jesse;
SALMON

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
BOAZ
OUT OF-THE
RAHAB
BOAZ

iessai iessai
ni proper
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwbhd ek iObEd ek
ni proper
Prep
rouq rhouth
ni proper
iwbhd de iObEd de
ni proper
Conj

THE
OBED
OUT OF-THE
RUTH
OBED
THE
JESSE
Salmn engendr de Rahab a Booz. Booz engendr de Rut a Obed. Obed engendr a Jes. Jes engendr al rey David.
1:6 iessai de
iessai
ni proper
de
Conj

dauid ton dauid ho

ni proper
t_ Acc Sg m
basilea dauid de basileus dauid de

n_ Acc Sg m
ni proper
Conj
egennhsen gennaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
JESSE

solomwna ek solomOn ek
n_ Acc Sg m
Prep
THE
DAVID
THE
KING
DAVID
And Jesse begat David the king; and David the king begat Solomon of her [that had been the wife] of Urias;
El rey David engendr a Salomn , de la que fue mujer de Uras.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouriou ourias
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
SOLOMON
OUT OF-THE- one OF-THE of-the-onef

URIAH
1:7 solomwn de
solomOn
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
roboam roboam de rhoboam rhoboam de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

abia abia
ni proper
And Solomon begat Roboam; and Roboam begat Abia; and Abia begat Asa;
Salomn engendr a Roboam. Roboam engendr a Abas. Abas engendr a As.
SOLOMON
THE
ROBOAM
ROBOAM
THE
ABIA
abia abia
ni proper
de de
Conj

asaf asaph
ni proper
ABIA

de de
Conj
THE
ASAPH
1:8 asaf
asaph
ni proper

iwsafat iwsafat de iOsaphat iOsaphat de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

iwram iOram
ni proper
And Asa begat Josaphat; and Josaphat begat Joram; and Joram begat Ozias;
ASAPH
THE
JOSAPHAT
JOSAPHAT
THE
JORAM
As engendr a Josafat. Josafat engendr a Joram. Joram engendr a Ozas.
WHNA : Lemma_t 2.0.2 / Parsing 2.0 / CGTS 1.4 / CGES_id 2.1
AV
2008 Scripture4all Foundation - www.scripture4all.org
iwram de iOram de
ni proper
Conj

ozian ozias
n_ Acc Sg m
JORAM

de de
Conj
THE
OZIAS
WH
1:9 ozias
ozias
n_ Nom Sg m

iwaqam iwaqam de iOatham iOatham de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

acas
And Ozias begat Joatham; and Joatham begat Achaz; and Achaz begat Ezekias;
OZIAS
WH
NA

acaz achaz
ni proper
NA
THE
JOATHAM
JOATHAM
THE
acas
acaz achaz
ni proper
de de
Conj

ezekian hezekias
n_ Acc Sg m
Ozas engendr a Joatam. Joatam engendr a Acaz. Acaz engendr a Ezequas .
ACHAZ
ACHAZ
THE
HEZEKIAH
1:10 ezekias
hezekias
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj

manassh manasshs de manassEs manassEs de

n_ Acc Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
Conj

amws amOs
ni proper
10 And Ezekias begat Manasses; and Manasses begat Amon; and Amon begat Josias;
HEZEKIAH
THE
MANASSEH
MANASSEH
THE
AMOS
amws de amOs de
ni proper
Conj

iwsian iOsias
n_ Acc Sg m
Ezequas engendr a Manass. Mana-ss engendr a Amn. Amn engendr a Josas.
AMOS

de de
Conj
THE
JOSIAH
1:11 iwsias
iOsias
n_ Nom Sg m

ieconian kai tous iechonias kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m
Conj
t_ Acc Pl m

n_ Acc Pl m
pp Gen Sg m
epi epi
Prep
JOSIAH
THE
JECHONIAS
AND
THE
brothers
OF-him
ON
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
metoikesias babulwnos metoikesia babulOn

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
11 And Josias begat Jechonias and his brethren, about the time they were carried away to Babylon: Josas engendr a Jeconas y a sus hermanos cerca del tiempo de la transportacin de los judos a Babilonia.
OF-THE the
after-HOMEing exile
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-BABYLON
1:12 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
metoikesian babulwnos ieconias egennhsen ton metoikesia babulOn iechonias gennaO ho

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
n_ Nom Sg m
salaqihl salathiEl
ni proper
after
YET THE
after-HOMEing exile
OF-BABYLON
JECHONIAS
generatES begets
THE
SALATHIEL
salaqihl de salathiEl de
ni proper
Conj

zorobabel zorobabel
ni proper
SALATHIEL
THE
ZOROBABEL
12 And after they were brought to Babylon, Jechonias begat Salathiel; and Salathiel begat Zorobabel; Y despus que fueron transportados a Babilonia, Jeconas engendr a Salatiel. Salatiel engendr a Zorobabel.
1:13 zorobabel de
zorobabel
ni proper
de
Conj

abioud abioud de abioud abioud de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

eliakim eliakim
ni proper
ZOROBABEL

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
ABIUD
ABIUD
THE
ELIAKIM
13 And Zorobabel begat Abiud; and Abiud begat Eliakim; and Eliakim begat Azor;
eliakim de eliakim de
ni proper
Conj
azwr azOr
ni proper
t_ Acc Sg m
Zorobabel engendr a Abiud. Abiud engendr a Eliacim. Eliacim engendr a Azor.
ELIAKIM
THE
AZOR
1:14 azwr de
azOr
ni proper
de
Conj

sadwk sadwk de sadOk sadOk de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

acim achim
ni proper
acim achim
ni proper
14 And Azor begat Sadoc; and Sadoc begat Achim; and Achim begat Eliud;
AZOR
THE
SADOK
SADOK
THE
ACHIM
ACHIM
de de
Conj

elioud elioud
ni proper
Azor engendr a Sadoc. Sadoc engendr a Aquim. Aquim engendr a Eliud.
THE
ELIUD
1:15 elioud de
elioud
ni proper
de
Conj

eleazar eleazar de eleazar eleazar de

ni proper
ni proper
Conj

matqan matthan
ni proper
15 And Eliud begat Eleazar; and Eleazar begat Matthan; and Matthan begat Jacob;
ELIUD

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
ELEAZAR
ELEAZAR
THE
MATTHAN
matqan de matthan de
ni proper
Conj
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
Eliud engendr a Eleazar. Eleazar engendr a Matn. Matn engendr a Jacob .
t_ Acc Sg m
MATTHAN
THE
JACOB
AV
1:16 iakwb de
iakOb
ni proper
de
Conj

iwshf ton iOsEph ho

ni proper
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
marias maria
n_ Gen Sg f
ex ek
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
JACOB

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
JOSEPH
THE
MAN husband
OF-MARY
OUT OF-WHOM of-whom(f)
16 And Jacob begat Joseph the husband of Mary, of whom was born Jesus, who is called Christ.
egennhqh gennaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
WAS-generatED JESUS was-born
THE
One-beING-said one-being-said
geneai genea
apo apo
ANOINTED Christ
ews dauid geneai heOs dauid genea
dekatessares kai dekatessares kai
Y Jacob engendr a Jos, el esposo de Mara, de la cual naci Jess , el llamado Cristo .
17 So all the generations from Abraham to David [are] a_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Prep ni proper Conj ni proper n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Conj fourteen generations; and from ALL THEN THE generations FROM ABRAHAM TILL DAVID generations TEN-FOUR AND David until the carrying away fourteen into Babylon [are] fourteen generations; and from the apo dauid ews ths metoikesias babulwnos geneai dekatessares kai apo carrying away into Babylon apo dauid heOs ho metoikesia babulOn genea dekatessares kai apo unto Christ [are] fourteen Prep ni proper Conj t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Conj Prep generations. FROM DAVID TILL OF-THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON generations TEN-FOUR AND FROM As son catorce todas las generaciones the exile fourteen desde Abrahn hasta David; y las de ths metoikesias babulwnos ews tou cristou geneai dekatessares David hasta la transportacin de los ho metoikesia babulOn heOs ho christos genea dekatessares judos a Babilonia catorce t_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f generaciones; y tambin catorce las THE after-HOMEing OF-BABYLON TILL OF-THE ANOINTED generations TEN-FOUR generaciones desde la transportacin a exile the Christ fourteen Babilonia hasta Cristo . WH NA 18 . Now the birth of Jesus 1:18 tou de ihsou ihsou cristou h genesis outws hn ho de iEsous christos ho genesis houtOs eimi Christ was on this wise: When t_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Adv vi impf vxx 3 Sg as his mother Mary was OF-THE YET JESUS ANOINTED THE generating thus WAS espoused to Joseph, before Christ birth they came together, she was found with child of the Holy mnhsteuqeishs ths mhtros autou marias tw iwshf prin h Ghost.
1:17 pasai
pas
oun oun
ai ho
abraam abraam
mnEsteuO
ho
mEtEr
autos
maria
ho
iOsEph
prin
Adv
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f
pp Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg f
t_ Dat Sg m
ni proper
Part
OF-BEING-espousED
THE
MOTHER
OF-him
MARY
to-THE
JOSEPH
ERE
OR than
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
sunelqein sunerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
autous eureqh autos heuriskO

pp Acc Pl m
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
gastri ecousa gastEr echO

n_ Dat Sg f
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
TO-BE-TOGETHER-COMING them to-be-coming-together

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
she-WAS-FOUND IN
BELLY
HAVING
OUT OF-spirit (BLOW-effect) of-spirit
El nacimiento de Cristo fue de esta manera: Estando desposada su madre Mara con Jos, sin que antes hubiesen estado juntos, se hall que haba concebido en su seno por obra del Espritu Santo.
HOLY
1:19 iwshf de
iOsEph
ni proper
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
dikaios dikaios
a_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj
Part Neg
JOSEPH
YET THE
MAN husband
OF-her
JUST
BEING
AND
NO
19 Then Joseph her husband, being a just [man], and not willing to make her a publick example, was minded to put her away privily.
qelwn thelO
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
deigmatisai eboulhqh deigmatizO boulomai

vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
laqra apolusai lathra apoluO

Adv
vn Aor Act
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
WILLING
her
TO-SHOWize to-make-a-show
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
WAS-COUNSELED covertly intended
TO-FROM-LOOSE her to-dismiss

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
Mas Jos, su esposo, siendo como era justo, y no queriendo infamarla deliber dejarla secretamente.
20 But while he thought on these things, behold, the angel of the Lord appeared unto him in a dream, saying, Joseph, thou son of David, fear not to take unto thee Mary thy wife: for that which is conceived in her is of the Holy Ghost.
1:20 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
enqumhqentos idou enthumeomai idou

vp Aor pasD Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
these YET OF-him these-things

kat kata
Prep
OF-BEING-IN-FELT of-brooding
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master (SANCTIONer) lo ! of-Lord

iwshf uios iOsEph huios
ni proper
n_ Nom Sg m
onar onar
ni other
efanh phainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
legwn legO
dauid mh dauid mE
ni proper Part Neg
according-to TRANCE APPEARed
to-him
sayING
JOSEPH
SON
of-DAVID NO of-David
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fobhqhs phobeO
vs Aor pasD 2 Sg
paralabein paralambanO
vn 2Aor Act
marian maria
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika sou gunE su

n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
gar en gar en
Conj
Prep
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-afraid TO-BE-BESIDE-GETTING MARY to-be-accepting

auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
THE
WOMAN wife
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
OF-YOU
THE
for
IN
gennhqen gennaO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
ek ek
Prep
pneumatos estin pneuma eimi

n_ Gen Sg n
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
Estando l en este pensamiento, he aqu que un ngel del Seor le apareci en sueos diciendo: Jos, hijo de David, no tengas recelo en recibir a Mara tu esposa en tu casa, porque lo que se ha engendrado en su vientre es obra del Espritu Santo.
her
BEING-generatED
OUT OF-spirit
IS
HOLY
AV
1 - 2
1:21 texetai
tiktO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kaleseis kai kaleO

Conj
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
she-SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH YET SON
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE
NAME
OF-Him
21 And she shall bring forth a son, and thou shalt call his name JESUS: for he shall save his people from their sins.
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar swsei gar sOzO

Conj
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
JESUS
He
for
SHALL-BE-SAVING THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
FROM THE
misses sins
As que tendr un hijo a quien pondrs por nombre Jess ; pues l es el que ha de salvar a su pueblo, o librarle, de sus pecados.
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
1:22 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
upo hupo
Prep
this
YET WHOLE
HAS-BECOME
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled

legontos legO
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
BEING-declarED
by
22 Now all this was done, that it might be fulfilled which was spoken of the Lord by the prophet, saying,
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
Todo lo cual se hizo en cumplimiento de lo que pronunci el Seor por el profeta, que dice:
Master Lord
THRU THE through

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
BEFORE-AVERer sayING prophet

parqenos en parthenos en
n_ Nom Sg f
Prep
1:23 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gastri exei gastEr echO

n_ Dat Sg f
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai texetai kai tiktO

Conj
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo !
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
virgin
IN
BELLY
SHALL-BE-HAVING AND
SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH she-shall-be-bringing-forth
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kalesousin kai kaleO

Conj
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
emmanouhl o emmanouEl hos

ni proper
pr Nom Sg n
23 Behold, a virgin shall be with child, and shall bring forth a son, and they shall call his name Emmanuel, which being interpreted is, God with us.
SON
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE
NAME
OF-Him
EMMANUEL
WHICH
IS
meqermhneuomenon meq methermEneuO meta

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
Sabed que una virgen concebir y tendr un hijo, a quien pondrn por nombre Emmanuel, que tra ducido significa Dios con nosotros.
beING-after-TRANSLATED being-construed
WITH US
WH
NA
THE
God (PLACer) God

iwshf apo iOsEph apo
ni proper
Prep
1:24 egerqeis
egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
upnou hupnos
n_ Gen Sg m
epoihsen ws poieO hOs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
Adv
BEING-ROUSED
YET
THE
JOSEPH
FROM THE
SLEEP
he-DOES
AS
24 Then Joseph being raised from sleep did as the angel of the Lord had bidden him, and took unto him his wife:
prosetaxen autw prostassO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai parelaben thn kai paralambanO ho

Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
Con esto Jos, al despertarse, hizo lo que le mand el ngel del Seor, y recibi a su esposa.
TOWARD-SETS bids
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to-him him
THE
MESSENGER OF-Master of-Lord
AND
BESIDE-GOT he-accepted
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
WH
NA
1:25 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
eginwsken authn ginOskO autos

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
ews heOs
Conj
ou
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
eteken tiktO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
NOT
KNEW he-knew
her
TILL
OF-WHICH which
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
she-BROUGHT-FORTH SON
25 And knew her not till she had brought forth her firstborn son: and he called his name JESUS.
kai ekalesen to kai kaleO ho

Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
he-CALLS
THE
NAME
OF-Him
JESUS
Y sin haberla conocido o tocado, dio a luz su hijo primognito, y le puso el nombre de Jess.
AV
2:1 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
gennhqentos en gennaO en
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m Prep
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias en ioudaia en
n_ Gen Sg f
Prep
hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
OF-THE
YET JESUS
BEING-generatED being-born
IN
BETHLEHEM OF-THE
JUDEA
IN
DAYS
. Now when Jesus was born in Bethlehem of Judaea in the days of Herod the king, behold, there came wise men from the east to Jerusalem,
Habiendo, pues, nacido Jess en Beln de Jud, reinando Herodes, he aqu que unos magos vinieron del oriente a Jerusaln,
hrwdou tou hErOdEs ho

n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
basilews idou basileus idou

n_ Gen Sg m
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
magoi magos
n_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
anatolwn paregenonto eis anatolE paraginomai eis

n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Prep
OF-HEROD
THE
KING
BE-PERCEIVING MAGians lo ! magi
FROM risings east
BESIDE-BECAME came-along
INTO
ierosoluma ierosoluma
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
2:2 legontes
legO
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
pou pou
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tecqeis tiktO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
basileus twn basileus ho

n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Gen Pl m
sayING
?-where IS where ?
gar autou gar autos
Conj
THE
BEING-BROUGHT-FORTH KING
OF-THE
Saying, Where is he that is born King of the Jews? for we have seen his star in the east, and are come to worship him.
preguntando: Dnde est el nacido rey de los judos? Porque nosotros vimos en oriente su estrella, y hemos venido con el fin de adorarle.
ioudaiwn eidomen ioudaios eidO

a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
astera astEr
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anatolh kai hlqomen anatolE kai erchomai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
pp Gen Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews
WE-PERCEIVED for
OF-Him
THE
GLEAMer star
IN
THE
rising east
AND
WE-CAME
proskunhsai autw proskuneO autos

vn Aor Act
pp Dat Sg m
TO-worship
to-Him
2:3 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus hrwdhs basileus hErOdEs

n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
etaracqh tarassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai pasa kai pas

Conj
a_ Nom Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
HEARing
YET THE
KING
HEROD
WAS-DISTURBED AND
EVERY all
JERUSALEM
When Herod the king had heard [these things], he was troubled, and all Jerusalem with him.
Oyendo esto el rey Herodes, se turb, y con l toda Jerusaln
met autou meta autos

Prep
pp Gen Sg m
WITH him
2:4 kai sunagagwn

kai
Conj
sunagO
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

a_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
arciereis archiereus
n_ Acc Pl m
kai grammateis tou kai grammateus ho

Conj
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
TOGETHER-LEADING ALL gathering

par para
Prep
THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WRITers scribes
OF-THE
PEOPLE
And when he had gathered all the chief priests and scribes of the people together, he demanded of them where Christ should be born.
Y convocando a todos los prncipes de los sacerdotes y a los escribas del pueblo, les preguntaba en dnde haba de nacer el Cristo , o Mesas.
epunqaneto punthanomai
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
pou pou
Part Int
cristos gennatai christos gennaO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
he-ASCERTAINED-UP BESIDE them he-ascertained
?-where THE where ?

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IS-beING-generatED is-being-born
ioudaias outws gar ioudaia houtOs gar
n_ Gen Sg f
Adv
Conj
2:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
And they said unto him, In Bethlehem of Judaea: for thus it is written by the prophet,
A lo cual ellos respondieron: En Beln de Jud; que as est escrito en el profeta:
THE
YET THEY-say
to-him
IN
BETHLEHEM OF-THE
JUDEA
thus
for
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
HAS-been-WRITTEN THRU THE through
BEFORE-AVERer prophet
gh gE
n_ Voc Sg f
2:6 kai su
kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
oudamws oudamOs
Adv
elacisth elachistos
a_ Nom Sg f
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
AND
YOU
BETHLEHEM LAND
of-JUDA of-Judah
ek ek
Prep
NOT-YET-SIMULTANEOUSly INFERIOR-most ARE in-no-respect least you-are

gar exeleusetai gar exerchomai
Conj
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
hgemosin hEgemOn
n_ Dat Pl m
iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
hgoumenos hEgeomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
And thou Bethlehem, [in] the land of Juda, art not the least among the princes of Juda: for out of thee shall come a Governor, that shall rule my people Israel.
IN THE among
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
ones-LEADING of-JUDA governors of-Judah

poimanei poimainO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OUT OF-YOU
for
SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING One-LEADING shall-be-coming-out one-governing

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
israhl israEl
ni proper
Y t, Beln tierra de Jud, no eres ciertamente la menor entre las principales ciudades de Jud, porque de ti es de donde ha de salir el caudillo que rija mi pueblo de Israel.
WHO-ANY who-any
SHALL-BE-SHEPHERDING THE
PEOPLE
OF-ME
THE
ISRAEL
AV
2:7 tote hrwdhs

tote
Adv
hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
laqra kalesas lathra kaleO

Adv
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
magous hkribwsen magos akriboO

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
par para
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
then
HEROD
covertly
CALLing
THE
MAGians magi
makES-EXACT BESIDE them ascertains-exactly
Then Herod, when he had privily called the wise men, enquired of them diligently what time the star appeared.
Entonces Herodes , llamando en secreto, o a solas, a los magos, averigu cuidadosamente e ellos el tiempo en que la estrella les apareci.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
fainomenou phainO
vp Pres mid/pas Gen Sg m
asteros astEr
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
TIME
OF-THE
APPEARING
OF-GLEAMer of-star
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
2:8 kai pemyas

kai
Conj
pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autous eis autos eis

pp Acc Pl m
Prep
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
poreuqentes poreuomai
vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m
exetasate exetazO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
SENDing
them
INTO BETHLEHEM said he-said

paidiou epan paidion epan
n_ Gen Sg n
Conj
BEING-GONE
OUT-INTERROGATE inquire-ye !
apaggeilate moi apaggellO egO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
akribws peri akribOs peri

Adv Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
de de
Conj
eurhte heuriskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
And he sent them to Bethlehem, and said, Go and search diligently for the young child; and when ye have found [him], bring me word again, that I may come and worship him also.
Y encaminndoles a Beln, les dijo: Id e informaos puntualmente de lo que hay de ese nio, y habindole hallado, dadme aviso, para ir yo tambin a adorarle.
EXACTly accurately
opws hopOs
Adv
ABOUT THE concerning

kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
little-boy
ON-[IF]-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-FINDING FROM-MESSAGE if-ever report-ye !

proskunhsw proskuneO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
to-ME
elqwn erchomai
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WHICH-how AND-I so-that also-I
COMING
SHOULD-BE-worshipING to-Him him

basilews eporeuqhsan kai idou basileus poreuomai kai idou
n_ Gen Sg m
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Conj
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
2:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akousantes tou akouO ho

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET ones-HEARing ones-hearing

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
OF-THE
KING
WERE-GONE went
anatolh prohgen anatolE proagO
n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
asthr astEr
n_ Nom Sg m
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autous ews autos heOs

pp Acc Pl m
Conj
. When they had heard the king, they departed; and, lo, the star, which they saw in the east, went before them, till it came and stood over where the young child was.
Luego que oyeron esto al rey, partieron. Y he aqu que la estrella que haban visto en oriente iba delante de ellos, hasta cuando, llegando sobre el sitio en que estaba el nio, se par.
GLEAMer star
elqwn erchomai
WHICH
THEY-PERCEIVED IN
THE
rising east
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
BEFORE-LED them preceded

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
TILL
estaqh histEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
epanw ou epanO hou

Adv Adv
paidion paidion
n_ Nom Sg n
COMING
it-WAS-STOOD ON-UP it-was-standing over

de de
Conj
where WAS
THE
little-boy
2:10 idontes
eidO
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
astera astEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ecarhsan chairO
vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
megalhn sfodra mega sphodra

a_ Acc Sg f
Adv
PERCEIVING
YET THE
GLEAMer star
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-WERE-JOYed JOY they-rejoiced

eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
GREAT
VEHEMENT tremendously
meta meta
Prep
2:11 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
COMING
INTO THE
HOME house
THEY-PERCEIVED THE
little-boy (-or-girl) WITH little-boy

kai kai
Conj
marias maria
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
mhtros autou mEtEr autos

n_ Gen Sg f
pp Gen Sg n
kai pesontes kai piptO

Conj
prosekunhsan autw proskuneO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
pp Dat Sg m
MARY
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
AND
FALLING
THEY-worship
to-Him him
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
10 When they saw the star, they rejoiced with exceeding great joy. A la vista de la estrella se regocijaron por extremo; 11 And when they were come into the house, they saw the young child with Mary his mother, and fell down, and worshipped him: and when they had opened their treasures, they presented unto him gifts; gold, and frankincense, and myrrh.
anoixantes anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
qhsaurous thEsauros
n_ Acc Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
proshnegkan prospherO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
dwra dOron
n_ Acc Pl n
UP-OPENing opening
cruson chrusos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
PLACED-INTO-MORROWS OF-them treasures

kai smurnan kai smurna
Conj
n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him they-bring-to him
oblations approach-presents
y entrando en la casa hallaron al nio con Mara, su madre, y postrndose le adoraron; y abiertos sus cofres le ofrecieron presentes de oro, incienso y mirra.
kai libanon kai libanos

Conj
n_ Acc Sg m
GOLD
AND
frankincense AND
MYRRH
2:12 kai crhmatisqentes kat

kai
Conj
chrEmatizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
kata
Prep
onar onar
ni other
mh mE
Part Neg
anakamyai pros anakamptO pros

vn Aor Act Prep
hrwdhn di hErOdEs dia

n_ Acc Sg m
Prep
AND
BEING-apprizED being-apprised
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
according-to TRANCE NO
TO-UP-BOW to-go-back
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
TOWARD HEROD
THRU through
12 And being warned of God in a dream that they should not return to Herod, they departed into their own country another way.
allhs allos
a_ Gen Sg f
anecwrhsan eis anachOreO eis

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
other
WAY
THEY-UP-SPACE they-retire
INTO THE
SPACE country
OF-them
Y habiendo recibido en sueos un aviso del cielo para que no volviesen a Herodes , regresaron a su pas por otro camino.
AV
2:13 anacwrhsantwn de
anachOreO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
fainetai phainO
vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg
kat kata
Prep
OF-UP-SPACing of-retiring
onar onar
ni other
YET OF-them
BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master lo ! of-Lord

egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
IS-APPEARING
according-to
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
iwshf legwn iOsEph legO

ni proper
paralabe paralambanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion kai paidion kai

n_ Acc Sg n
Conj
TRANCE to-THE
JOSEPH
sayING
BEING-ROUSED
BE-BESIDE-GETTING THE be-you-taking-along !
little-boy
AND
13 . And when they were departed, behold, the angel of the Lord appeareth to Joseph in a dream, saying, Arise, and take the young child and his mother, and flee into Egypt, and be thou there until I bring thee word: for Herod will seek the young child to destroy him.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera autou mEtEr autos

n_ Acc Sg f
pp Gen Sg m
kai feuge kai pheugO

Conj
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
aigupton kai isqi aiguptos kai eimi

n_ Acc Sg f
Conj
vm Pres vxx 2 Sg
ekei ews an ekei heOs an

Adv
Conj
Part
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
AND
BE-FLEEING be-you-fleeing !
INTO EGYPT
AND
YOU-BE be-you !
there
TILL
EVER
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar hrwdhs gar hErOdEs

Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
zhtein zEteO
vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion tou paidion ho

n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Gen Sg m
Despus que ellos partieron, un ngel del Seor apareci en sueos a Jos, dicindole: Levntate, toma al nio y a su madre, y huye a Egipto, y estate all hasta cuando yo te avise; porque Herodes buscar al nio para matarlo.
I-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU
IS-ABOUTING for is-being-about
HEROD
TO-BE-SEEKING THE
little-boy
OF-THE
apolesai auto apollumi autos

vn Aor Act
pp Acc Sg n
TO-destroy
Him it
de de
Conj
2:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
parelaben paralambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion kai thn paidion kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n
Conj
t_ Acc Sg f

n_ Acc Sg f
pp Gen Sg m
14 When he arose, he took the young child and his mother by night, and departed into Egypt:
THE
YET BEING-ROUSED
he-BESIDE-GOT THE he-took-along

aigupton aiguptos
n_ Acc Sg f
little-boy
AND
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
nuktos kai anecwrhsen eis nux kai anachOreO eis

n_ Gen Sg f
Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
Levantndose Jos, tom al nio y a su madre de noche y se retir a Egipto,
OF-NIGHT
AND
UP-SPACES retires
INTO EGYPT
2:15 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei ews ths ekei heOs ho

Adv
Conj
t_ Gen Sg f
teleuths hrwdou ina teleutE hErOdEs hina

n_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg m
Conj
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
he-WAS
there
TILL
OF-THE the
dia dia
Prep
decease
OF-HEROD

ex ek
Prep
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
upo kuriou hupo kurios

Prep
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
legontos legO
aiguptou aiguptos
n_ Gen Sg f
15 And was there until the death of Herod: that it might be fulfilled which was spoken of the Lord by the prophet, saying, Out of Egypt have I called my son.
BEING-declarED
by
Master Lord
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
THRU THE through

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OUT OF-EGYPT
ekalesa kaleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
donde se mantuvo hasta la muerte de Herodes; de suerte que se cumpli lo que dijo el Seor por boca del profeta: Yo llam de Egipto a mi hijo.
I-CALL
THE
SON
OF-ME
2:16 tote hrwdhs

tote
Adv
hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
oti enepaicqh hoti empaizO

Conj
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
upo twn hupo ho

Prep
t_ Gen Pl m
magwn magos
n_ Gen Pl m
equmwqh thumoO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
then
HEROD
PERCEIVING
that
he-WAS-IN-sportED by he-was-scoffed-at
THE
MAGians magi
en en
Prep
WAS-furious
lian kai aposteilas lian kai apostellO

Adv
Conj
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
aneilen anaireO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pantas tous pas ho

a_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
paidas tous pais ho

n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
kai en kai en
Conj
Prep
VERY
AND
commissioning dispatching
oriois horion
n_ Dat Pl n
UP-LIFTED he-massacred
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
ALL
THE
boys
THE
IN
BETHLEHEM AND
IN
16 . Then Herod, when he saw that he was mocked of the wise men, was exceeding wroth, and sent forth, and slew all the children that were in Bethlehem, and in all the coasts thereof, from two years old and under, according to the time which he had diligently enquired of the wise men.
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
apo apo
Prep
dietous dietEs
a_ Gen Sg m
kai katwterw kata kai katO kata

Conj
Adv Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
ALL
THE
boundaries OF-her
FROM TWO-YEARS AND
DOWN-more below
according-to THE
TIME
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
hkribwsen akriboO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
magwn magos
n_ Gen Pl m
WHICH
he-makES-EXACT BESIDE THE he-ascertains-exactly

rhqen ereO
MAGians magi
dia dia
Prep
Entretanto Herodes , vindose burlado de los magos, se irrit sobremanera, y mand matar a todos los nios que haba en Beln y en toda su comarca, de dos aos abajo, conforme al tiempo de la aparicin de la estrella, que haba averiguado de los magos.
17 Then was fulfilled that which was spoken by Jeremy the prophet, saying,
2:17 tote eplhrwqh to

tote
Adv
plEroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ieremiou tou ieremias ho

n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
then
WAS-FILLED was-fulfilled
THE
BEING-declarED
THRU JEREMIAH through
THE
Se vio cumplido entonces lo que predijo el profeta Jeremas, diciendo:
AV
legontos legO
sayING
2:18 fwnh
phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
rama rhama
ni proper
hkousqh akouO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
klauqmos kai odurmos polus klauthmos kai odurmos polus

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
rachl klaiousa rhachEl klaiO

ni proper
SOUND
IN
RAMA
IS-HEARD
LAMENTing lamentation
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
PAIN-GUSH anguish
much
RACHEL LAMENTING
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
kai ouk kai ou

Conj
Part Neg
paraklhqhnai parakaleO
vn Aor Pas
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj
Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE
offsprings children
OF-her
AND
NOT
WILLED she-would
TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLED that to-be-consoled

aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
THEY-ARE
2:19 teleuthsantos de
teleutaO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hrwdou idou hErOdEs idou

n_ Gen Sg m
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
fainetai phainO
OF-deceasing
YET OF-THE
HEROD
BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master lo ! of-Lord
IS-APPEARING
kat kata
Prep
onar onar
ni other
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
iwshf en iOsEph en
ni proper
Prep
aiguptw aiguptos
n_ Dat Sg f
18 In Rama was there a voice heard, lamentation, and weeping, and great mourning, Rachel weeping [for] her children, and would not be comforted, because they are not. Hasta en Ram se oyeron las voces, muchos lloros y alaridos: Es Raquel que llora sus hijos, sin querer consolarse porque ya no existen. 19 . But when Herod was dead, behold, an angel of the Lord appeareth in a dream to Joseph in Egypt, Despus de la muerte de Herodes , un ngel del Seor apareci en sueos a Jos en Egipto,
according-to TRANCE to-THE
JOSEPH
IN
EGYPT
2:20 legwn
legO
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

n_ Acc Sg n
Conj
t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
sayING
BEING-ROUSED
BE-BESIDE-GETTING THE be-you-taking-along !

ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
little-boy
AND
THE
MOTHER
20 Saying, Arise, and take the young child and his mother, and go into the land of Israel: for they are dead which sought the young child's life.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai poreuou kai poreuomai

Conj
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
israhl israEl
ni proper
teqnhkasin thnEskO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
gar oi gar ho
Conj
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
AND
BE-GOING be-you-going !
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
INTO LAND
of-ISRAEL THEY-HAVE-DIED for of-Israel
THE
Despus de la muerte de Herodes , un ngel del Seor apareci en sueos a Jos en Egipto,
zhtountes zEteO
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
paidiou paidion
n_ Gen Sg n
ones-SEEKING ones-seeking
THE
soul
OF-THE
little-boy
2:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

n_ Acc Sg n
Conj
t_ Acc Sg f

n_ Acc Sg f
pp Gen Sg m
THE
YET BEING-ROUSED
he-BESIDE-GOT THE he-took-along
little-boy
AND
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
21 And he arose, and took the young child and his mother, and came into the land of Israel.
kai eishlqen kai eiserchomai

Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
israhl israEl
ni proper
Jos levantndose, tom al nio y a su madre y vino a tierra de Israel,
AND
INTO-CAME entered
INTO LAND
of-ISRAEL of-Israel
ioudaias anti ioudaia anti
n_ Gen Sg f
Prep
2:22 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
oti arcelaos basileuei ths hoti archelaos basileuO ho

Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
t_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
HEARing
YET that
Archelaus
IS-reignING
OF-THE
JUDEA
INSTEAD OF-THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hrwdou efobhqh hErOdEs phobeO

n_ Gen Sg m
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
ekei apelqein ekei aperchomai

Adv
vn 2Aor Act
crhmatisqeis de chrEmatizO de
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
Conj
kat kata
Prep
22 But when he heard that Archelaus did reign in Judaea in the room of his father Herod, he was afraid to go thither: notwithstanding, being warned of God in a dream, he turned aside into the parts of Galilee:
FATHER
OF-him
HEROD
he-WAS-afraid
there
TO-BE-FROM-COMING BEING-apprizED to-be-passing-forth

galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
YET according-to
onar onar
ni other
anecwrhsen eis anachOreO eis

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
mas oyendo que Arquelao reinaba en Judea, en lugar de su padre Herodes , temi ir all y avisado entre sueos se retir a tierra de Galilea.
TRANCE he-UP-SPACES he-retires
INTO THE
PARTS
OF-THE
GALILEE
2:23 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
katwkhsen katoikeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
legomenhn legO
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg f
nazaret opws nazareth hopOs

ni proper
Adv
AND
COMING
he-DOWN-HOMES INTO city he-dwells

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
beING-said
NAZARETH
WHICH-how so-that
23 And he came and dwelt in a city called Nazareth: that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophets, He shall be called a Nazarene.
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
oti nazwraios hoti nazOraios

Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled
BEING-declarED
THRU THE through
BEFORE-AVERers that prophets
NAZARENE
Y vino a morar en una ciudad llamada Nazaret; cumplindose de este modo el dicho de los profetas: Ser llamado Nazareno.
AV
2 - 3
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
AV
3:1 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ekeinais paraginetai hEmera ekeinos paraginomai

n_ Dat Pl f
pd Dat Pl f
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
iwannhs o iOannEs ho
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
baptisths baptistEs
n_ Nom Sg m
IN
YET THE
DAYS
those
IS-BESIDE-BECOMING JOHN is-coming-along

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
DIPist baptist
khrusswn kErussO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
. In those days came John the Baptist, preaching in the wilderness of Judaea, En aquella temporada se dej ver Juan Bautista predicando en el desierto de Judea,
PROCLAIMING heralding
IN
THE
DESOLATE OF-THE wilderness

metanoeite metanoeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
JUDEA
3:2
NA
kai kai
Conj
legwn legO
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia twn basileia ho

n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Gen Pl m
And saying, Repent ye: for the kingdom of heaven is at hand.

y diciendo: Haced penitencia, porque est cerca el reino de los cielos.
AND
sayING
BE-YE-after-MINDING HAS-NEARED for be-ye-repenting ! has-drawn-near
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
heavens
3:3 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

Conj
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
rhqeis ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
this
for
IS
THE
one-BEING-declarED THRU ISAIAH one-being-declared through

en en
Prep
THE
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
legontos legO
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
bowntos boaO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
etoimasate thn hetoimazO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
sayING
SOUND voice
OF-IMPLORING-one IN of-one-imploring
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
DESOLATE make-YE-READY wilderness make-ready-ye !

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
WAY road
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
euqeias poieite euthus poieO

a_ Acc Pl f
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tribous tribos
n_ Acc Pl f
For this is he that was spoken of by the prophet Esaias, saying, The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight. Este es aquel de quien se dijo por el profeta Isaas: Es la voz del que clama en el desierto, diciendo: Preparad el camino del Seor. Haced derechas sus sendas.
OF-Master of-Lord
straight
BE-YE-makING THE be-ye-making !

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WEAR (ways) OF-Him highways

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
3:4 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
iwannhs eicen iOannEs echO

n_ Nom Sg m
vi impf Act 3 Sg
enduma autou enduma autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tricwn thrix
n_ Gen Pl f
he
YET THE
JOHN
HAD
THE
IN-SLIP apparel
osfun osphus
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
FROM HAIR hairs

de de
Conj
And the same John had his raiment of camel's hair, and a leathern girdle about his loins; and his meat was locusts and wild honey.
Traa Juan un vestido de pelos de camello y un cinto de cuero a sus lomos, y su comida eran langostas y miel silvestre.
kamhlou kai zwnhn kamElos kai zOnE

n_ Gen Sg m
Conj
n_ Acc Sg f
dermatinhn peri dermatinos peri

a_ Acc Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
trofh trophE
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-CAMEL
AND
GIRDle
SKIN leather
ABOUT THE
LOIN
OF-him
THE
YET NURTURE nourishment
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akrides kai meli akris kai meli

n_ Nom Pl f
Conj
n_ Nom Sg n
agrion agrios
a_ Nom Sg n
WAS
OF-him
LOCUSTS
AND
HONEY
FIELD wild
ierosoluma kai pasa ierosoluma kai pas
n_ Nom Sg f
Conj
a_ Nom Sg f
3:5 tote exeporeueto

tote
Adv
ekporeuomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ioudaia kai ioudaia kai

n_ Nom Sg f
Conj
then
OUT-WENT went-out
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
TOWARD him
JERUSALEM
AND
EVERY entire
THE
JUDEA
AND
Then went out to him Jerusalem, and all Judaea, and all the region round about Jordan,
Iban, pues, a encontrarle las gentes de Jerusaln y de toda la Judea, y de toda la ribera del Jordn;
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
pericwros tou perichOros ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou iordanEs
n_ Gen Sg m
EVERY entire
THE
ABOUT-SPACE country-about
en en
Prep
OF-THE
JORDAN
3:6 kai ebaptizonto

kai
Conj
baptizO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
iordanh potamw up autou iordanEs potamos hupo autos

n_ Dat Sg m
n_ Dat Sg m
Prep
pp Gen Sg m
exomologoumenoi exomologeO
vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
AND
THEY-were-DIPizED IN they-were-baptized
amartias autwn hamartia autos
n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Pl m
THE
JORDAN
river
by
him
OUT-avowING confessing
And were baptized of him in Jordan, confessing their sins. y reciban de l el bautismo en el Jordn, confesando sus pecados.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
misses sins
OF-them
3:7 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
pollous twn polus ho

a_ Acc Pl m
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn ercomenous pharisaios kai saddoukaios erchomai

n_ Gen Pl m
Conj
n_ Gen Pl m
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
PERCEIVING
YET MANY
OF-THE
PHARISEES
AND
SADDUCEES
COMING
. But when he saw many of the Pharisees and Sadducees come to his baptism, he said unto them, O generation of vipers, who hath warned you to
AV
epi to epi ho
Prep
t_ Acc Sg n
baptisma baptisma
n_ Acc Sg n
NA
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois gennhmata ecidnwn tis autos genEma echidna tis

pp Dat Pl m
n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f
pi Nom Sg m
flee from the wrath to come?

Pero como viese venir a su bautismo muchos de los fariseos y saduceos, les dijo: Oh raza de vboras!, quin os ha enseado que con solas exterioridades podis huir de la ira que os amena -za?
8
ON
THE
DIPism baptism
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-him
he-said
to-them
product progeny !
orghs orgE
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-VIPERS
ANY who
upedeixen hupodeiknumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
fugein pheugO
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
melloushs mellO
vp Pres Act Gen Sg f
UNDER-SHOWS to-YOU(p) intimates to-ye
TO-BE-FLEEING FROM THE
beING-ABOUT impending
metanoias metanoia
n_ Gen Sg f
INDIGNATION
3:8 poihsate oun

poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
axion axios
a_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
Bring forth therefore fruits meet for repentance:

Haced, pues, frutos dignos de penitencia;
DO-YE produce-ye !
THEN FRUIT
WORTHY
OF-THE
after-MIND repentance
en en
Prep
3:9 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
doxhte dokeO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
legein legO
vn Pres Act
eautois patera heautou patEr

pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-SEEMING TO-BE-sayING IN selves ye-should-be-presuming among yourselves

gar umin gar humeis
Conj
pp 2 Dat Pl
FATHER
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
abraam abraam
ni proper
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti dunatai hoti dunamai

Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
And think not to say within yourselves, We have Abraham to [our] father: for I say unto you, that God is able of these stones to raise up children unto Abraham.
ABRAHAM I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
IS-ABLE
THE
God
OUT OF-THE
liqwn lithos
n_ Gen Pl m
toutwn egeirai houtos egeirO

pd Gen Pl m
vn Aor Act
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
y dejaos de decir interiormente: Tenemos por padre a Abrahn; porque yo os digo que poderoso es Dios para hacer que nazcan de estas mismas piedras hijos de Abrahn.
STONES
these
TO-ROUSE offsprings children

de de
Conj
to-THE
ABRAHAM
3:10 hdh
EdE
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
axinh axinE
n_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
dendrwn keitai dendron keimai

n_ Gen Pl n
ALREADY YET THE
AX
TOWARD THE
ROOT
OF-THE
TREES
IS-LYING
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
dendron mh dendron mE
n_ Nom Sg n
Part Neg
poioun poieO
vp Pres Act Nom Sg n
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
ekkoptetai ekkoptO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj
Prep
10 And now also the axe is laid unto the root of the trees: therefore every tree which bringeth not forth good fruit is hewn down, and cast into the fire.
EVERY
THEN TREE
NO
DOING doproducing
FRUIT
IDEAL
IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND is-being-hewn-down
INTO
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
balletai ballO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
Mirad que ya el hacha est aplicada a la raz de los rboles; y todo rbol que no produce buen fruto, ser cortado y echado al fuego.
FIRE
IS-beING-CAST
3:11 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
men men
Part
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
baptizw baptizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
eis eis
Prep
metanoian o metanoia ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
opisw opisO
Adv
INDEED YOU(p) ye
ercomenos erchomai
AM-DIPizING am-baptizing
IN
water
INTO after-MIND repentance

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE-One the-one
ouk ou
Part Neg
YET BEHIND after

eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
iscuroteros mou ischuros egO

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp 1 Gen Sg
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
11 I indeed baptize you with water unto repentance: but he that cometh after me is mightier than I, whose shoes I am not worthy to bear: he shall baptize you with the Holy Ghost, and [with] fire:
ME
COMING
STRONGER stronger-one
OF-ME
IS
OF-WHOM
NOT
I-AM
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
upodhmata bastasai autos hupodEma bastazO autos

n_ Acc Pl n
vn Aor Act
pp Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
baptisei baptizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
enough competent
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
THE
sandals
TO-BEAR
He
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-DIPizING IN shall-be-baptizing
spirit
kai puri kai pur

Conj
n_ Dat Sg n
Yo a la verdad os bautizo con agua para moveros a la penitencia; pero el que ha de venir despus de m es ms poderoso que yo, y no soy yo digno siquiera de llevarle las sandalias; l es quien ha de bautizaros en el Espritu Santo y en el fuego.
HOLY
AND
to-FIRE
3:12 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ptuon ptuon
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
OF-WHOM
THE
WINNOWING-SHOVEL IN
THE
HAND
OF-Him
AND
diakaqariei diakatharizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg Att
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alwna halOn
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai sunaxei kai sunagO

Conj
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
12 Whose fan [is] in his hand, and he will throughly purge his floor, and gather his wheat into the garner; but he will burn up the chaff with unquenchable fire.
He-SHALL-BE-THRU-cleansING THE he-shall-be-scouring
THRESHing-floor OF-Him
AND
SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING THE shall-be-gathering
El tiene en sus manos la pala, y limpiar perfectamente su era; y su trigo lo meter en el granero; mas las pajas quemars en un fuego inextinguible.
AV
3 - 4
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apoqhkhn to apothEkE ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
acuron katakausei achuron katakaiO

n_ Acc Sg n
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
GRAIN
OF-Him
INTO THE
FROM-PLACE barn
THE
YET CHAFF
He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-BURNING he-shall-be-burning-up
puri pur
n_ Dat Sg n
asbestw asbestos
a_ Dat Sg n
to-FIRE
UN-EXTINGUISHed unextinguished
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
3:13 tote paraginetai

tote
Adv
paraginomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias epi ton galilaia epi ho

n_ Gen Sg f
Prep
t_ Acc Sg m
13 . Then cometh Jesus from Galilee to Jordan unto John, to be baptized of him.
then
IS-BESIDE-BECOMING THE is-coming-along

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
FROM THE
GALILEE
ON
THE
iordanhn pros iordanEs pros

n_ Acc Sg m
Prep
iwannhn tou iOannEs ho

n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
baptisqhnai up autou baptizO hupo autos

vn Aor Pas Prep
pp Gen Sg m
Por este tiempo vino Jess de Galilea al Jordn en busca de Juan para ser de l bautizado.
JORDAN
TOWARD THE
NA
JOHN
OF-THE
TO-BE-DIPizED to-be-baptized
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
by
him
3:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
diekwluen diakOluO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET
JOHN
THRU-FORBADE Him prohibited
sayING
need
14 But John forbad him, saying, I have need to be baptized of thee, and comest thou to me?
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
upo sou hupo su

Prep
pp 2 Gen Sg
baptisqhnai kai su baptizO kai su

vn Aor Pas Conj
pp 2 Nom Sg
erch erchomai
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AM-HAVING
by
YOU
de de
Conj
AND
YOU
ARE-COMING
WH
NA
TOWARD ME
NA
Juan se resista a ello, diciendo: Yo debo ser bautizado de ti, y t vienes a m?

15 And Jesus answering said unto him, Suffer [it to be so] now: for thus it becometh us to fulfil all righteousness. Then he suffered him.
3:15 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
TOWARD him
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
arti arti
Adv
outws gar prepon houtOs gar prepO

Adv
Conj
vp Pres im-Act Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
plhrwsai pasan plEroO pas

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg f
FROM-LET let-you !
at-PRESENT thus
for
BEHOOVING
it-IS
to-US
TO-FILL to-fulfill
EVERY all
dikaiosunhn tote afihsin dikaiosunE tote aphiEmi

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
A lo cual respondi Jess, diciendo: Djame hacer ahora, que as es como conviene que nosotros cumplamos toda justicia. Juan entonces condescendi con l.
JUSTice righteousness
then
he-IS-FROM-LETTING Him he-is-letting

de de
Conj
3:16 baptisqeis
baptizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
udatos kai hudOr kai

n_ Gen Sg n
Conj
BEING-DIPizED being-baptized
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
NA
straightway UP-STEPPed stepped-up

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
FROM THE
water
WH
AND
hnewcqhsan anoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ouranoi kai eiden ouranos kai eidO

n_ Nom Pl m
Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pneuma
16 And Jesus, when he was baptized, went up straightway out of the water: and, lo, the heavens were opened unto him, and he saw the Spirit of God descending like a dove, and lighting upon him:
BE-PERCEIVING WERE-UP-OPENED lo ! were-opened

NA
to-Him
THE
heavens
AND
He-PERCEIVED
NA
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
NA
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
NA
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
katabainon katabainO
vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
wsei peristeran hOsei peristera

Adv
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
spirit
OF-THE
God
DOWN-STEPPING AS-IF descending
DOVE
AND
Bautizado, pues, Jess, al instante que sali del agua se le abrieron los cielos, y vio bajar al Espritu de Dios a manera de paloma y posar sobre l.
ercomenon erchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
COMING
ON
Him
3:17 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn legousa ouranos legO

n_ Gen Pl m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
BE-PERCEIVING SOUND lo ! voice

uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-THE
heavens
sayING
this
IS
17 And lo a voice from heaven, saying, This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaphtos en agapEtos en
a_ Nom Sg m
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
eudokhsa eudokeO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
IN
WHOM
I-WELL-SEEM I-delight
Y se oy una voz del cielo que deca: Este es mi hijo amado, en quien he puesto toda mi complacencia.
AV
4:1 tote
tote
Adv
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
anhcqh anagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg f
upo tou hupo ho

Prep
t_ Gen Sg n
. Then was Jesus led up of the Spirit into the wilderness to be tempted of the devil.
En aquella sazn, Jess fue conducido del espritu de Dios al desierto, para que fuese tentado all por el diablo.
then
THE
JESUS
WAS-UP-LED INTO THE was-led-up

diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
DESOLATE by wilderness
THE
pneumatos peirasqhnai upo tou pneuma peirazO hupo ho

n_ Gen Sg n
vn Aor Pas
Prep
t_ Gen Sg m
spirit
TO-BE-triED
by
THE
THRU-CASTer Adversary
4:2 kai nhsteusas

kai
Conj
nEsteuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hmeras tesserakonta kai nuktas tesserakonta usteron hEmera tesserakonta kai nux tesserakonta husteron
n_ Acc Pl f
ni numeral Conj
n_ Acc Pl f
ni numeral Adv
And when he had fasted forty days and forty nights, he was afterward an hungred.
Y Y despus despusde dehaber haberayunado ayunado cuarenta cuarenta das das con con cuarenta cuarenta noches, noches,tuvo tuvohambre. hambre.
AND
fasting
DAYS
FOUR-TY forty
AND
NIGHTS
FOUR-TY forty
subsequently
epeinasen peinaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-HUNGERS
4:3 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
peirazwn peirazO
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
THE
NA
one-tryING one-trying
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
said
to-Him
IF
SON
YOU-ARE
And when the tempter came to him, he said, If thou be the Son of God, command that these stones be made bread.
Entonces, acercndose el tentador, le dijo: Si eres el Hijo de Dios, di que esas piedras se conviertan en panes.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eipon
ina hina
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
liqoi lithos
n_ Nom Pl m
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
artoi artos
n_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
God
BE-sayING be-you-saying !
THAT THE
STONES
these
BREADS cakes-of-bread
genwntai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
MAY-BE-BECOMING
4:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
apokriqeis apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ep epi
Prep
artw artos
n_ Dat Sg m
monw monos
a_ Dat Sg m
THE
YET answerING
He-said
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN NOT
ON
BREAD
ONLY alone
dia dia
Prep
But he answered and said, It is written, Man shall not live by bread alone, but by every word that proceedeth out of the mouth of God.
Mas Jess le respondi: Escrito est: No slo de pan vive el hombre, sino de toda palabra o disposicin que sale de la boca de Dios.
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos all epi panti anthrOpos alla epi pas

n_ Nom Sg m
Conj
Prep
a_ Dat Sg n
rhmati rhEma
n_ Dat Sg n
ekporeuomenw ekporeuomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg n
SHALL-BE-LIVING THE
human
but
ON
EVERY
declaration OUT-GOING going-out
THRU through
stomatos qeou stoma theos

n_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg m
MOUTH
OF-God
4:5 tote paralambanei

tote
Adv
paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agian hagios
a_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
then
IS-BESIDE-GETTING Him is-taking-along

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE
THRU-CASTer INTO THE Adversary

ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
HOLY
city
AND
Then the devil taketh him up into the holy city, and setteth him on a pinnacle of the temple,
Despus de esto lo transport el diablo a la santa ciudad de Jerusaln, y lo puso sobre lo alto del templo;
esthsen histEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
epi to epi ho
Prep
t_ Acc Sg n
pterugion tou pterugion ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
STANDS
Him
ON
THE
flyer-let little-wing
ei ei
Cond
OF-THE
SACRED-place sanctuary
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
4:6 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
bale ballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
IF
SON
YOU-ARE
OF-THE
God
BE-CASTING be-you-casting !
enteleitai entellomai
vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Sg
seauton katw gegraptai seautou katO graphO

pf 3 Acc Sg m
Prep
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar oti tois gar hoti ho

Conj
Conj
t_ Dat Pl m
aggelois aggelos
n_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
And saith unto him, If thou be the Son of God, cast thyself down: for it is written, He shall give his angels charge concerning thee: and in [their] hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone.
y le dijo: Si eres el Hijo de Dios, chate de aqu abajo; pues est escrito: Que te ha encomendado a sus ngeles, los cuales te tomarn en las palmas de sus manos para que tu pie no tropiece contra alguna piedra.
YOURself
DOWN
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for
that
to-THE
MESSENGERS OF-Him
SHALL-BE-beING-directED
peri peri
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai epi ceirwn arousin kai epi cheir airO

Conj
Prep
n_ Gen Pl f
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
mhpote mEpote
Adv
ABOUT YOU concerning
AND
ON
HANDS
THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING YOU
NO-?-when lest-at-some-time
AV
proskoyhs proskoptO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
pros pros
Prep
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
poda pous
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-STRIKING TOWARD STONE you-should-be-dashing-against
THE
FOOT
OF-YOU
4:7 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
palin gegraptai palin graphO

Adv
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ekpeiraseis ekpeirazO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
Jesus said unto him, It is written again, Thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God.
Le replic Jess: Tambin est escrito: No tentars al Seor tu Dios.
AVERRed
to-him
THE
JESUS
AGAIN
YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-tryING you-shall-be-putting-on-trial
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
Master Lord
THE
God
OF-YOU
4:8 palin paralambanei

palin
Adv
paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
uyhlon lian kai hupsElos lian kai

a_ Acc Sg n
Adv
Conj
AGAIN
IS-BESIDE-GETTING Him is-taking-along

pasas pas
a_ Acc Pl f
THE
THRU-CASTer INTO mountain Adversary

kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
HIGH
VERY
AND
Again, the devil taketh him up into an exceeding high mountain, and sheweth him all the kingdoms of the world, and the glory of them;
Todava le subi el diablo a un monte muy encumbrado, y le mostr todos los reinos del mundo y la gloria de ellos.
deiknusin autw deiknumi autos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pp Dat Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
basileias tou basileia ho

n_ Acc Pl f
t_ Gen Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
IS-SHOWING
to-Him
ALL
THE
KINGdoms
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
AND
THE
esteem glory
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl f
OF-them
4:9 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ean ean
Cond
peswn piptO
And saith unto him, All these things will I give thee, if thou wilt fall down and worship me.
le dijo: Todo esto te dar si de hinojos me adorares.
AND
he-said
to-Him
these
to-YOU
ALL
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING IF-EVER FALLING falling-down
proskunhshs proskuneO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-worshipING to-ME me
4:10 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
satana satanas
n_ Voc Sg m
then
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
BE-UNDER-LEADING SATAN (adversary) be-you-going-away ! Satan !

sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
10 Then saith Jesus unto him, Get thee hence, Satan: for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve.
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar kurion gar kurios

Conj
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
proskunhseis proskuneO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kai autw kai autos

Conj
pp Dat Sg m
Master Lord
THE
God
OF-YOU
YOU-SHALL-BE-worshipING AND
to-Him
Djole entonces Jess: Aprtate, Satans, porque escrito est: Al Seor tu Dios adorars y a El solo dars culto.
monw monos
a_ Dat Sg m
latreuseis latreuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ONLY
YOU-SHALL-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE you-shall-be-offering-divine-service
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
4:11 tote afihsin

tote
Adv
aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai idou kai idou

Conj
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
11 Then the devil leaveth him, and, behold, angels came and ministered unto him.
then
IS-FROM-LETTING Him is-leaving
THE
THRU-CASTer AND Adversary
BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGERS lo !
Entonces el diablo le dej, y llegaron ngeles y le servan.
proshlqon proserchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai dihkonoun autw kai diakoneO autos

Conj
vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
TOWARD-CAME AND approached
THRU-SERVED waited-on
de de
Conj
to-Him him
4:12 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oti iwannhs paredoqh hoti iOannEs paradidOmi

Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
HEARing
YET that
JOHN
WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN He-UP-SPACES was-given-up he-retires

elqwn erchomai
INTO THE
GALILEE
4:13 kai katalipwn

kai
Conj
kataleipO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
nazara nazareth
ni proper
katwkhsen katoikeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
kafarnaoum kapharnaoum
ni proper
AND
leavING
THE
NAZARETH COMING
He-DOWN-HOMES INTO CAPERNAUM he-dwells
12 . Now when Jesus had heard that John was cast into prison, he departed into Galilee; Habiendo odo que Juan haba sido preso, se retir a Galilea. 13 And leaving Nazareth, he came and dwelt in Capernaum, which is upon the sea coast, in the borders of Zabulon and Nephthalim: Dejando a Nazaret, se fue a morar en Cafarnam, ciudad situada a orillas del mar, en los trminos de Zabuln y Neftal,
AV
Matthew 4
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraqalassian en parathalassios en
a_ Acc Sg f Prep
oriois horion
n_ Dat Pl n
zaboulwn kai nefqalim zaboulOn kai nephthalim

ni proper Conj
ni proper
THE
BESIDE-SEA by-the-seaside
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN
boundaries of-ZABULON of-Zebulon

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
of-NEPHTHALIM of-Nephthalim
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
4:14 ina
hina
Conj
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
14 That it might be fulfilled which was spoken by Esaias the prophet, saying,

legontos legO
BEING-declarED
THRU ISAIAH through
THE
para que se cumpliese lo que anunci el profeta Isaas, que dice:
sayING
4:15 gh
gE
n_ Voc Sg f
zaboulwn kai gh zaboulOn kai gE

ni proper Conj
n_ Voc Sg f
nefqalim odon nephthalim hodos

ni proper n_ Acc Sg f
qalasshs peran thalassa peran

n_ Gen Sg f
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
LAND
ZABULON of-Zebulon
AND
LAND
NEPHTHALIM of-Nephthalim
WAY road
OF-SEA
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
15 The land of Zabulon, and the land of Nephthalim, [by] the way of the sea, beyond Jordan, Galilee of the Gentiles;
iordanou galilaia twn iordanEs galilaia ho

n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Voc Sg f
t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
JORDAN
GALILEE
OF-THE
NATIONS
WH
NA
Tierra de Zabuln y tierra de Neftal, camino del mar, al otro lado del Jordn, Galilea de los gentiles!
4:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kaqhmenos kathEmai
en en
Prep
skotia
skotei skotos
n_ Dat Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
PEOPLE
THE
one-sittING sitting
kaqhmenois kathEmai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
IN
DARKness
LIGHT
16 The people which sat in darkness saw great light; and to them which sat in the region and shadow of death light is sprung up.
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mega mega
a_ Acc Sg n
kai tois kai ho

Conj
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
cwra chOra
n_ Dat Sg f
kai skia kai skia

Conj
n_ Dat Sg f
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
PERCEIVED
GREAT
AND
to-THE
ones-sittING ones-sitting
IN
SPACE province
AND
SHADE shadow
OF-DEATH
El pueblo que habitaba en tinieblas vio una gran luz, y para los que habitaban en la regin de mortales sombras, una luz se levant.
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
aneteilen autois anatellO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
LIGHT
UP-risES arises
to-them
4:17 apo
apo
Prep
tote hrxato tote archO

Adv
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
khrussein kErussO
vn Pres Act
kai legein kai legO

Conj
vn Pres Act
FROM then
begins
THE
JESUS
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING AND to-be-heralding

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-sayING
metanoeite metanoeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj
t_ Nom Sg f

n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Gen Pl m
17 From that time Jesus began to preach, and to say, Repent: for the kingdom of heaven is at hand. Desde entonces comenz Jess a predicar y a decir: Convertios, porque se acerca el reino de Dios.
BE-YE-after-MINDING HAS-NEARED for be-ye-repenting ! has-drawn-near
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
4:18 peripatwn
peripateO
de de
Conj
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan ths thalassa ho

n_ Acc Sg f
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias eiden galilaia eidO

n_ Gen Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
ABOUT-TREADING walking
YET BESIDE THE
SEA
OF-THE
GALILEE
He-PERCEIVED TWO
adelfous simwna ton adelphos simOn ho

n_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
legomenon legO
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai andrean ton kai andreas ho

Conj
n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon adelphos
n_ Acc Sg m
18 . And Jesus, walking by the sea of Galilee, saw two brethren, Simon called Peter, and Andrew his brother, casting a net into the sea: for they were fishers.
brothers
SIMON
THE
beING-said
Peter (ROCK) AND Peter

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ANDREW
THE
brother
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ballontas ballO
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
amfiblhstron eis amphiblEstron eis

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
qalassan hsan thalassa eimi

n_ Acc Sg f
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar alieis gar halieus

Conj
n_ Nom Pl m
Caminando, pues, junto al mar de Galilea, vio a dos hermanos, Simn, que se llamaba Pedro, y Andrs, su hermano, los cuales echaban la red en el mar, pues eran pescadores;"
OF-him
CASTING
ENVELOPE-CASTer purse-net
autois deute autos deute
pp Dat Pl m
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
INTO THE
SEA
THEY-WERE for
fishers
4:19 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
kai poihsw kai poieO

Conj
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
alieis halieus
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
HITHER hither-ye !
BEHIND after
ME
AND
I-SHALL-BE-makING YOU(p) ye
19 And he saith unto them, Follow me, and I will make you fishers of men.
fishers
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
y les dijo: Venid en pos de m y os har pescadores de hombres.
OF-humans
AV
Matthew 4
4:20 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
euqews afentes eutheOs aphiEmi

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
diktua hkolouqhsan autw diktuon akoloutheO autos

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
20 And they straightway left [their] nets, and followed him.
THE
YET immediately
FROM-LETTING leaving
THE
NETS
THEY-follow
to-Him him
Ellos dejaron al instante las redes y le siguieron.

21 And going on from thence, he saw other two brethren, James [the son] of Zebedee, and John his brother, in a ship with Zebedee their father, mending their nets; and he called them.
4:21 kai probas

kai
Conj
probainO
ekeiqen eiden ekeithen eidO

Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
allous duo allos duo

a_ Acc Pl m ni numeral
adelfous iakwbon ton adelphos iakObos ho

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
AND
BEFORE-STEPPing advancing
thence
He-PERCEIVED others
TWO
brothers
JACOBUS James tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
zebedaiou kai iwannhn ton zebedaios kai iOannEs ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon autou adelphos autos

n_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
meta meta
Prep
OF-THE
ZEBEDEE
AND
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-him
IN
THE
FLOATer ship
WITH
zebedaiou tou zebedaios ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
katartizontas ta katartizO ho
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
diktua autwn diktuon autos

n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Pl m
kai kai
Conj
ZEBEDEE
OF-THE the
FATHER
OF-them
DOWN-EQUIPPING adjusting
THE
NETS
OF-them
AND
Pasando ms adelante, vio a otros dos hermanos, Santiago el de Zebedeo y Juan, su hermano, que en la barca, con Zebedeo, su padre, componan las redes, y los llam.
ekalesen autous kaleO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
He-CALLS
them
4:22 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
euqews afentes eutheOs aphiEmi

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai ton ploion kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
22 And they immediately left the ship and their father, and followed him.
THE
YET immediately
THE
FLOATer ship
AND
THE
FATHER
OF-them
Ellos, dejando luego la barca y a su padre, le siguieron.
hkolouqhsan autw akoloutheO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
THEY-follow
to-Him him en en
Prep
4:23 kai perihgen

kai
Conj
periagO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia didaskwn galilaia didaskO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
AND
He-ABOUT-LED IN he-went-about kai khrusswn kai kErussO

Conj
WHOLE
THE
GALILEE
TEACHING
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS synagogues
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
euaggelion euaggelion
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias kai qerapeuwn basileia kai therapeuO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
23 . And Jesus went about all Galilee, teaching in their synagogues, and preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing all manner of sickness and all manner of disease among the people.
OF-them
AND
PROCLAIMING heralding kai pasan kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
KINGdom
AND
curING
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
noson nosos
n_ Acc Sg f
malakian en malakia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
Recorra toda la Galilea, enseando en las sinagogas, predicando el evangelio del Reino y curando en el pueblo toda enfermedad y toda dolencia.
EVERY
DISEASE
AND
EVERY
SOFTness weakness akoh akoE

n_ Nom Sg f
IN THE among autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
PEOPLE
4:24 kai aphlqen

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
surian suria
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AND
FROM-CAME came-forth
THE
HEARing tidings
OF-Him
INTO WHOLE
THE
SYRIA
AND
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
kakws econtas kakOs echO

Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
poikilais nosois poikilos nosos

a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
kai kai
Conj
THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him they-bring-to him basanois sunecomenous basanos sunechO

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m
ALL
NA
THE the-ones kai kai

Conj
EVILly illness
HAVING
to-VARIOUS
DISEASES AND
24 And his fame went throughout all Syria: and they brought unto him all sick people that were taken with divers diseases and torments, and those which were possessed with devils, and those which were lunatick, and those that had the palsy; and he healed them.
daimonizomenous kai selhniazomenous kai daimonizomai kai selEniazomai kai

vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Conj
ORDEALS torments
pressING
AND
ones-beING-demonizED ones-being-demonized
AND
ones-beING-MOONizED ones-being-lunatics
AND
paralutikous kai eqerapeusen autous paralutikos kai therapeuO autos

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
Extendindose su fama por toda la Siria, y le traan a todos los que padecan algn mal, los atacados de diferentes enfermedades y dolores y los endemoniados, lunticos, paralticos, y los curaba.
paralytics
AND
He-curES
them
4:25 kai hkolouqhsan autw

kai
Conj
akoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai galilaia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
AND
follow
to-Him him
THRONGS
MANY vast
FROM THE
GALILEE
AND
25 And there followed him great multitudes of people from Galilee, and [from] Decapolis, and [from] Jerusalem, and [from] Judaea, and [from]
Grandes muchedumbres le seguan de Galilea y de la Decpolis, y de Jerusaln y de Judea, y del otro lado del Jordn.
WHNA : Lemma_t 2.0.2 / Parsing 2.0 / CGTS 1.4 / CGES_id 2.1 AV 2008 Scripture4all Foundation - www.scripture4all.org
Matthew 4 - Matthew 5
dekapolews kai ierosolumwn kai ioudaias kai peran dekapolis kai ierosoluma kai ioudaia kai peran
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou iordanEs
n_ Gen Sg m
beyond Jordan.
Decapolis
AND
JERUSALEM
AND
JUDEA
AND
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
AV
Matthew 5
5:1 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous anebh ochlos anabainO

n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kaqisantos kai kathizO

Conj vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
PERCEIVING
YET THE
WH
THRONGS
NA
He-UP-STEPPed INTO THE he-ascended oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
mountain
AND
OF-being-seated
. And seeing the multitudes, he went up into a mountain: and when he was set, his disciples came unto him:
Viendo a la muchedumbre, subi a un monte, y cuando se hubo sentado, se le acercaron sus discpulos;"
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
proshlqan proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
maqhtai autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
Him
TOWARD-COME came-to to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
to-Him him stoma stoma

n_ Acc Sg n
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
5:2 kai anoixas

kai
Conj
anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
edidasken autous legwn didaskO autos legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
And he opened his mouth, and taught them, saying,

y abriendo (El) su boca, los enseaba, diciendo.
AND
UP-OPENing opening
THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
He-TAUGHT
them
sayING
5:3 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ptwcoi tw ptOchos ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati oti autwn pneuma hoti autos

n_ Dat Sg n Conj pp Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
. Blessed [are] the poor in spirit: for theirs is the kingdom of heaven.
Bienaventurados los pobres de espritu, porque suyo es el reino de los cielos.
HAPPY happy-are
THE
POOR-ones poor-ones ouranwn ouranos

n_ Gen Pl m
to-THE
spirit
that
OF-them
IS
THE

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
5:4 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
penqountes pentheO
oti autoi hoti autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
paraklhqhsontai parakaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
HAPPY happy-are
THE
MOURNING-ones ones-mourning praeis praus

a_ Nom Pl m
that
they
SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-CALLED shall-be-being-consoled klhronomhsousin klEronomeO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
5:5 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

Conj pp Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
HAPPY happy-are
THE
MEEK meek-ones
that
they
SHALL-BE-tenantING THE shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
LAND
5:6 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
peinwntes peinaO
kai diywntes kai dipsaO

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
dikaiosunhn oti autoi dikaiosunE hoti autos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj pp Nom Pl m
HAPPY happy-are
THE
ones-HUNGERING ones-hungering
AND
THIRSTING
THE
that
they
cortasqhsontai chortazO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
Blessed [are] they that mourn: for they shall be comforted. Bienaventurados los mansos, porque ellos poseern la tierra. 5 Blessed [are] the meek: for they shall inherit the earth. Bienaventurados los que lloran, porque ellos sern consolados. 6 Blessed [are] they which do hunger and thirst after righteousness: for they shall be filled. Bienaventurados los que tienen hambre y sed de justicia, porque ellos sern hartos.
SHALL-BE-BEING-satisfiED
5:7 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
elehmones oti autoi eleEmOn hoti autos

a_ Nom Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m
elehqhsontai eleaO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
Blessed [are] the merciful: for they shall obtain mercy.
HAPPY happy-are
THE
MERCIful merciful-ones kaqaroi th katharos ho

a_ Nom Pl m
that
they
SHALL-BE-BEING-MERCIED shall-be-being-shown-mercy ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
5:8 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kardia oti autoi kardia hoti autos

n_ Dat Sg f Conj pp Nom Pl m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
Bienaventurados los misericordiosos, porque ellos alcanzarn misericordia. 8 Blessed [are] the pure in heart: for they shall see God. Bienaventurados los limpios de corazn, porque ellos vern a Dios.
t_ Dat Sg f
HAPPY happy-are oyontai optomai

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
THE
clean clean-ones
to-THE
HEART
that
they
THE
God
SHALL-BE-VIEWING shall-be-seeing
5:9 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eirhnopoioi oti eirEnopoios hoti

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
WH
autoi
NA
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
Blessed [are] the peacemakers: for they shall be called the children of God.
HAPPY happy-are klhqhsontai kaleO

vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
THE
PEACE-makers
that
they
SONS
OF-God
Bienaventurados los pacficos, porque ellos sern llamados hijos de Dios.
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED
5:10 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dediwgmenoi diOkO
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
eneken heneken
Adv
dikaiosunhs oti autwn dikaiosunE hoti autos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pp Gen Pl m
HAPPY happy-are
THE
ones-HAVING-been-CHASED on-account-of OF-JUSTice ones-having-been-persecuted righteousness
that
OF-them
10 Blessed [are] they which are persecuted for righteousness'sake: for theirs is the kingdom of heaven.
Bienaventurados los que padecen persecucin por la justicia, porque suyo es el reino de los cielos.
AV
Matthew 5
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
5:11 makarioi este

makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
otan hotan
Conj
oneidiswsin oneidizO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai kai
Conj
HAPPY
YE-ARE
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-REPROACHING YOU(p) whenever ye kai eipwsin kai legO

Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
WH
11 Blessed are ye, when [men] shall revile you, and persecute [you], and shall say all manner of evil against you falsely, for my sake.
diwxwsin diOkO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
ponhron kaq ponEros kata

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
yeudomenoi
THEY-SHOULD-BE-CHASING AND they-should-be-persecuting

NA
THEY-MAY-BE-sayING EVERY
wicked
DOWN OF-YOU(p) against ye
yeudomenoi pseudomai
vp Pres mid/pas Nom Pl m
eneken heneken
Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
Bienaventurados seris cuando os insulten y persigan y con mentira digan contra vosotros todo gnero de mal por m.
FALSifyING
on-account-of OF-ME me kai agalliasqe kai agalliaO

Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
5:12 cairete
chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
misqos misthos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
BE-YE-JOYING AND be-ye-rejoicing !
BE-beING-exultED be-ye-exulting !
that
THE
HIRE wages
OF-YOU(p) much of-ye vast tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
IN
THE
12 Rejoice, and be exceeding glad: for great [is] your reward in heaven: for so persecuted they the prophets which were before you.
ouranois outws gar ediwxan ouranos houtOs gar diOkO

n_ Dat Pl m Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
pro pro
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
heavens
thus
for
THEY-CHASE THE they-persecute to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
BEFORE-AVERers THE prophets ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
BEFORE YOU(p) ye de de
Conj
5:13 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
alas halas
n_ Nom Sg n
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ean ean
Cond
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
alas halas
n_ Nom Sg n
YOU(p) ye mwranqh mOrainO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ARE
THE
SALT
OF-THE
LAND earth
IF-EVER YET THE
SALT
en en
Prep
tini tis
pi Dat Sg n
alisqhsetai halizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
iscuei ischuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eti eti
Adv
13 . Ye are the salt of the earth: but if the salt have lost his savour, wherewith shall it be salted? it is thenceforth good for nothing, but to be cast out, and to be trodden under foot of men.
MAY-BE-BEING-made-INSIPID IN
ANY what ? exw exO

Adv
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-SALTED INTO NOT-YET-ONE it-IS-beING-STRONG STILL nothing it-is-availing katapateisqai katapateO

vn Pres Pas
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
blhqen ballO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
upo hupo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
IF
NO
BEING-CAST
OUT TO-BE-beING-tramplED UNDER THE outside by to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
humans
5:14 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
YOU(p) ye
14 Ye are the light of the world. A city that is set on an hill cannot be hid.
ARE
THE
LIGHT
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
NOT
IS-ABLE can
city
krubhnai epanw orous kruptO epanO oros

vn 2Aor Pas Adv n_ Gen Sg n
keimenh keimai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg f
TO-BE-HID
ON-UP upon
OF-mountain LYING mountain being-located lucnon kai tiqeasin luchnos kai tithEmi
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
5:15 oude
oude
Adv
kaiousin kaiO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
modion modios
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-BURNING LAMP neither all epi thn alla epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg f
AND
ARE-PLACING it him pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
UNDER THE
MEASURE peck-measure
15 Neither do men light a candle, and put it under a bushel, but on a candlestick; and it giveth light unto all that are in the house.
lucnian kai lampei luchnia kai lampO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
but
ON
THE
LAMPstand
AND
it-IS-SHINING she-is-shining fws phOs

n_ Nom Sg n
to-ALL
THE-ones IN the-ones emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
THE
HOME house anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
16 Let your light so shine before men, that they may see your good works, and glorify your Father which is in heaven.
5:16 outws lamyatw to

houtOs
Adv
lampO
vm Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
thus
LET-SHINE let-it-shine ! idwsin eidO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
LIGHT
OF-YOU(p) IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE of-ye in-front-of the ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
humans
opws hopOs
Adv
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kala kalos
a_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
kai doxaswsin kai doxazO

Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH-how THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING OF-YOU(p) THE so-that of-ye
IDEAL
ACTS
AND
SHOULD-BE-esteemING should-be-glorifying
AV
Matthew 5
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
IN
THE
heavens
5:17 mh
mE
Part Neg
nomishte nomizO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
oti hlqon hoti erchomai

Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
katalusai kataluO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-inferrING that
I-CAME
TO-DOWN-LOOSE THE to-demolish alla plhrwsai alla plEroO

Conj vn Aor Act
LAW
OR
THE
17 . Think not that I am come to destroy the law, or the prophets: I am not come to destroy, but to fulfil.
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
katalusai kataluO
vn Aor Act
BEFORE-AVERers NOT prophets
I-CAME
TO-DOWN-LOOSE but to-demolish umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
TO-FILL to-fulfill o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
5:18 amhn gar legw

amEn
Hebrew
gar
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouranos kai ouranos kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
AMEN verily h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
for
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
TILL
EVER MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE may-be-passing-by mia heis

n_ Nom Sg f
heaven
AND
18 For verily I say unto you, Till heaven and earth pass, one jot or one tittle shall in no wise pass from the law, till all be fulfilled.
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
iwta en iOta heis

ni letter n_ Nom Sg n
h E
Part
keraia keraia
n_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
LAND earth tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IOTA
ONE
OR
WH
ONE
NA
horn serif panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING may-be-passing-by
apo apo
Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ews heOs
Conj
an
an an
Part
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
FROM THE
LAW
TILL
EVER
ALL
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
5:19 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
lush luO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
entolwn toutwn twn entolE houtos ho

n_ Gen Pl f pd Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
WHO
IF-EVER THEN SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ONE should-be-annulling outws tous houtOs ho

Adv t_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
directions precepts
these
THE
elacistwn kai didaxh elachistos kai didaskO

a_ Gen Pl f Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpous elacistos anthrOpos elachistos

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg m
INFERIOR-most least klhqhsetai kaleO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
AND
SHOULD-BE-TEACHING thus
THE
humans
INFERIOR-most least-one d de
Conj
19 Whosoever therefore shall break one of these least commandments, and shall teach men so, he shall be called the least in the kingdom of heaven: but whosoever shall do and teach [them], the same shall be called great in the kingdom of heaven.
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn os ouranos hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED IN he-shall-be-being-called poihsh poieO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
WHO
YET EVER
kai didaxh kai didaskO

Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
SHOULD-BE-DOING AND
SHOULD-BE-TEACHING this-one this-one ouranwn ouranos

n_ Gen Pl m
GREAT
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED IN
THE

KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
5:20 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
perisseush perisseuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
IF-EVER NO
SHOULD-BE-exceedING OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye mh mE

Part Neg
dikaiosunh pleion dikaiosunE polus

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn kai farisaiwn ou grammateus kai pharisaios ou

n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg
20 For I say unto you, That except your righteousness shall exceed [the righteousness] of the scribes and Pharisees, ye shall in no case enter into the kingdom of heaven.
JUSTice righteousness eiselqhte eiserchomai

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
MORE
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
AND
PHARISEES
NOT
NO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian twn basileia ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE ye-may-be-entering
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
5:21 hkousate oti erreqh

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
arcaiois ou archaios ou
a_ Dat Pl m Part Neg
foneuseis phoneuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
YE-HEAR
that
it-WAS-declarED to-THE
ORIGINals ancients
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-MURDERING WHO
21 . Ye have heard that it was said by them of old time, Thou shalt not kill; and whosoever shall kill shall be in danger of the judgment:
AV
Matthew 5
d de
Conj
an an
Part
foneush phoneuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
enocos enochos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-MURDERING liable
SHALL-BE
to-THE
JUDGing
5:22 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti pas hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
orgizomenos orgizO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
YET AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye estai eimi
that
EVERY
THE-one the-one os hos
beING-INDIGNANT being-angry d de
Conj
to-THE
adelfw autou adelphos autos

n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Sg m
enocos enochos
a_ Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
an an
Part
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
pr Nom Sg m
brother
OF-him
liable
SHALL-BE
to-THE
JUDGing
WHO
YET EVER MAY-BE-sayING
22 But I say unto you, That whosoever is angry with his brother without a cause shall be in danger of the judgment: and whosoever shall say to his brother, Raca, shall be in danger of the council: but whosoever shall say, Thou fool, shall be in danger of hell fire.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

raka rhaka
Aramaic
enocos enochos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw os sunedrion hos

n_ Dat Sg n pr Nom Sg m
to-THE
brother
OF-him
RAKA (Heb,empty) liable Raka ! enocos enochos

a_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE
to-THE
Sanhedrin
WHO
d de
Conj
an an
Part
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mwre mOros
a_ Voc Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
geennan tou geenna ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
puros pur
n_ Gen Sg n
YET EVER MAY-BE-sayING INSIPID ! Stupid !
liable
SHALL-BE
INTO THE
GEHENNA
OF-THE
FIRE
5:23 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
prosferhs prospherO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dwron dOron
n_ Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
IF-EVER THEN YOU-MAY-BE-TOWARD-CARRYING THE you-may-be-offering qusiasthrion kakei thusiastErion kakei

n_ Acc Sg n Adv Con
oblation OF-YOU approach-present oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ON
THE
23 Therefore if thou bring thy gift to the altar, and there rememberest that thy brother hath ought against thee;
mnhsqhs mnaomai
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
adelfos sou adelphos su

n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
SACRIFICE-place altar ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND-there YOU-SHOULD-BE-BEING-REMINDED that
THE
brother
OF-YOU
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
kata sou kata su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
IS-HAVING
ANY anything
DOWN against
OF-YOU you dwron dOron

n_ Acc Sg n
5:24 afes
aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekei to ekei ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
emprosqen emprosthen
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qusiasthriou thusiastErion
n_ Gen Sg n
FROM-LET leave-you ! kai upage kai hupagO

Conj vm Pres Act 2 Sg
there
THE
oblation OF-YOU approach-present diallaghqi diallassO

vm 2Aor Pas 2 Sg
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
SACRIFICE-place altar kai tote kai tote

Conj Adv
24 Leave there thy gift before the altar, and go thy way; first be reconciled to thy brother, and then come and offer thy gift.
prwton prOton
Adv
adelfw sou adelphos su

n_ Dat Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
BE-UNDER-LEADING BEFORE-most YOU-BE-THRU-CHANGED to-THE be-you-going-away ! first be-you-placated ! prosfere prospherO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
brother
OF-YOU
AND
then
elqwn erchomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dwron dOron
n_ Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
COMING
BE-TOWARD-CARRYING THE be-you-offering ! eunown eunoeO

oblation OF-YOU approach-present antidikw antidikos

n_ Dat Sg m
5:25 isqi
eimi
vm Pres vxx 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tacu tachus
Adv
ews otou heOs hostis

Conj pr Gen Sg n Att
YOU-BE be-you ! ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
WELL-MINDING humoring met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
to-THE
INSTEAD-JUSTer OF-YOU plaintiff odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
SWIFTLY TILL quickly paradw paradidOmi
OF-WHICH-ANY which-any
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhpote mEpote
Adv
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
25 Agree with thine adversary quickly, whiles thou art in the way with him; lest at any time the adversary deliver thee to the judge, and the judge deliver thee to the officer, and thou be cast into prison.
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU-ARE
WITH him
IN
THE
WAY
NO-?-when YOU lest-at-some-time kriths kritEs

n_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING may-be-giving-up tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
antidikos antidikos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
krith kritEs
n_ Dat Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uphreth kai eis hupEretEs kai eis

n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep
THE
INSTEAD-JUSTer to-THE plaintiff blhqhsh ballO

vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
JUDGer judge
AND
THE
JUDGer judge
to-THE
subservient deputy
AND
INTO
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
GUARD-house YOU-SHOULD-BE-BEING-CAST jail
AV
Matthew 5
5:26 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
exelqhs exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekeiqen ews an ekeithen heOs an

Adv Conj Part
AMEN verily apodws apodidOmi

vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
NOT
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence you-may-be-coming-out
TILL
EVER
26 Verily I say unto thee, Thou shalt by no means come out thence, till thou hast paid the uttermost farthing.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
escaton kodranthn eschatos kodrantEs

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING THE you-may-be-paying
LAST
QUADRANS

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
moiceuseis moicheuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
27 . Ye have heard that it was said by them of old time, Thou shalt not commit adultery:
YE-HEAR
that
it-WAS-declarED NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-ADULTERING you-shall-be-committing-adultery oti pas hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
5:28 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
blepwn blepO
gunaika pros gunE pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
YET AM-sayING
WH
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NA
that
EVERY
THE
one-lookING one-looking authn autos
WOMAN
TOWARD
28 But I say unto you, That whosoever looketh on a woman to lust after her hath committed adultery with her already in his heart.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
epiqumhsai epithumeO
vn Aor Act
authn
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
emoiceusen moicheuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pp Acc Sg f
THE
TO-ON-FEEL to-lust
her
ALREADY commits-ADULTERY her commits-adultery
IN
THE
kardia autou kardia autos

n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
HEART
OF-him
5:29 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ofqalmos sou ophthalmos su

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dexios dexios
a_ Nom Sg m
skandalizei se skandalizO su
vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Sg
IF
YET THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
THE
RIGHT
IS-SNARING
YOU
exele exaireO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai bale kai ballO

Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
apo apo
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar soi gar su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
29 And if thy right eye offend thee, pluck it out, and cast [it] from thee: for it is profitable for thee that one of thy members should perish, and not [that] thy whole body should be cast into hell.
BE-OUT-LIFTING it be-you-wrenching-out ! him apolhtai apollumi

vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
AND
BE-CASTING FROM YOU be-you-casting ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
it-IS-beING-expedient for
to-YOU
THAT
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
melwn melos
n_ Gen Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED ONE should-be-perishing swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
MEMBERS OF-YOU
AND
NO
WHOLE
THE
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
blhqh ballO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
geennan geenna
n_ Acc Sg f
BODY
OF-YOU
MAY-BE-BEING-CAST INTO GEHENNA
5:30 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
dexia dexios
a_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
ekkoyon ekkoptO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
AND
IF
THE
RIGHT
OF-YOU
HAND
IS-SNARING
YOU
OUT-STRIKE strike-off-you !
her
kai bale kai ballO

apo apo
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar soi gar su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
apolhtai apollumi
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
30 And if thy right hand offend thee, cut it off, and cast [it] from thee: for it is profitable for thee that one of thy members should perish, and not [that] thy whole body should be cast into hell.
AND
BE-CASTING FROM YOU be-you-casting ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
it-IS-beING-expedient for
to-YOU
THAT SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED should-be-perishing swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
melwn melos
n_ Gen Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
ONE
OF-THE
MEMBERS OF-YOU
AND
NO
WHOLE
THE
BODY
OF-YOU
INTO
geennan apelqh geenna aperchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
GEHENNA
MAY-BE-FROM-COMING may-be-passing-away de de
Conj
5:31 erreqh
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
apolush apoluO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika autou gunE autos

n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg m
it-WAS-declarED YET WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE should-be-dismissing
WOMAN wife
OF-him
31 It hath been said, Whosoever shall put away his wife, let him give her a writing of divorcement:
AV
Matthew 5
dotw didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
apostasion apostasion
n_ Acc Sg n
LET-him-BE-GIVING to-her let-him-be-giving !
FROM-STAND divorce umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
5:32 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti pas hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apoluwn apoluO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
YET AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
EVERY
THE
one-FROM-LOOSING THE one-dismissing poiei poieO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg

parektos parektos
Adv
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
porneias porneia
n_ Gen Sg f
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
moiceuqhnai moicheuO
vn Aor Pas
32 But I say unto you, That whosoever shall put away his wife, saving for the cause of fornication, causeth her to commit adultery: and whosoever shall marry her that is divorced committeth adultery.
WOMAN wife
WH
OF-him
NA
BESIDE-OUTed OF-saying outside of-case os hos

pr Nom Sg m
OF-PROSTITUTION IS-makING
her
TO-BE-ADULTERED
WH
kai
kai kai
Conj
ean ean
Cond
apolelumenhn apoluO
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f
gamhsh gameO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
moicatai
AND
NA
WHO
IF-EVER one-HAVING-been-FROM-LOOSED SHOULD-BE-MARRYING one-having-been-dismissed(f)
moicatai moichaomai
IS-committING-ADULTERY is-committing-adultery
5:33 palin hkousate oti erreqh

palin
Adv
akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
arcaiois ouk archaios ou

epiorkhseis epiorkeO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
AGAIN
YE-HEAR
that
it-WAS-declarED to-THE
ORIGINals ancients
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-ON-OATHING you-shall-be-perjuring
33 . Again, ye have heard that it hath been said by them of old time, Thou shalt not forswear thyself, but shalt perform unto the Lord thine oaths:
apodwseis apodidOmi
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
orkous sou horkos su

n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING YET to-THE you-shall-be-paying
Master Lord mh mE
Part Neg
THE
OATHS
OF-YOU
5:34 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
omosai omnuO
vn Aor Act
olws mhte holOs mEte

Adv Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw ouranos
n_ Dat Sg m
YET AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
34 But I say unto you, Swear not at all; neither by heaven; for it is God's throne:
NO
TO-SWEAR WHOLly at-all
NO-BESIDES IN neither
THE
heaven
oti qronos hoti thronos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
that
THRONE
it-IS
OF-THE
God
5:35 mhte
mEte
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
oti upopodion estin hoti hupopodion eimi

Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
NO-BESIDES IN nor mhte mEte

Conj
THE
LAND earth
that
UNDER-FOOT footstool estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
it-IS
OF-THE
FEET
OF-Him
35 Nor by the earth; for it is his footstool: neither by Jerusalem; for it is the city of the great King.
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma oti polis ierosoluma hoti polis

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
megalou basilews mega basileus

a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
NO-BESIDES INTO JERUSALEM nor
that
city
it-IS
OF-THE
GREAT
KING
5:36 mhte
mEte
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kefalh sou kephalE su

n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
omoshs omnuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
NO-BESIDES IN nor dunasai dunamai

THE
HEAD
OF-YOU
YOU-SHOULD-BE-SWEARING that
NOT
36 Neither shalt thou swear by thy head, because thou canst not make one hair white or black.
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
trica thrix
n_ Acc Sg f
leukhn poihsai h leukos poieO E

a_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act Part
melainan melas
a_ Acc Sg f
YOU-ARE-ABLE
ONE
HAIR
WHITE
TO-make
OR
BLACK
5:37 estw
eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
nai nai ou nai nai ou

Part Part Part Neg
ou ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
LET-BE let-him-be !
YET THE
saying word tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-YOU(p) YEA of-ye ponhrou estin ponEros eimi

a_ Gen Sg m
YEA
NOT not
NOT not
THE
YET
37 But let your communication be, Yea, yea; Nay, nay: for whatsoever is more than these cometh of evil.
perisson toutwn ek perissos houtos ek

a_ Nom Sg n pd Gen Pl m Prep
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
excessive excess
OF-these
OUT OF-THE
wicked wicked-one
IS
AV
Matthew 5

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ofqalmon anti ophthalmos anti

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
ofqalmou kai odonta anti ophthalmos kai odous anti

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep
38 . Ye have heard that it hath been said, An eye for an eye, and a tooth for a tooth:
YE-HEAR
that
it-WAS-declarED VIEWer eye
INSTEAD OF-VIEWer of-eye
AND
TOOTH
INSTEAD
odontos odous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-TOOTH
5:39 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
antisthnai tw anthistEmi ho
vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m
ponhrw ponEros
a_ Dat Sg m
all ostis alla hostis

Conj pr Nom Sg m
YET AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NO
TO-withSTAND
to-THE
wicked but wicked-person streyon strephO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
WHO-ANY anyone-who kai kai

Conj
39 But I say unto you, That ye resist not evil: but whosoever shall smite thee on thy right cheek, turn to him the other also.
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
rapizei rhapizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dexian siagona dexios siagOn

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
YOU
IS-SLAPPING
INTO THE
RIGHT
CHEEK
OF-YOU
TURN turn-you !
to-him
AND also
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
allhn allos
a_ Acc Sg f
THE
other
5:40 kai tw
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qelonti thelO
vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kriqhnai krinO
vn Aor Pas
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
citwna sou chitOn su

n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
to-THE
one-WILLING one-willing autw autos
YOU
TO-BE-JUDGED AND to-sue imation himation

n_ Acc Sg n
THE
TUNIC
OF-YOU
40 And if any man will sue thee at the law, and take away thy coat, let him have [thy] cloke also.
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
pp Dat Sg m
TO-BE-GETTING FROM-LET to-be-obtaining leave-you !
to-him
AND also
THE
cloak
5:41 kai ostis

kai
Conj
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
aggareusei aggareuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
milion milion
n_ Acc Sg n
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
met meta
Prep
41 And whosoever shall compel thee to go a mile, go with him twain.
AND
WHO-ANY YOU anyone-who duo duo

ni numeral
SHALL-BE-DRAFTING MILE (1000 paces) ONE shall-be-conscripting mile
BE-UNDER-LEADING WITH be-you-going-away !
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
him
TWO
5:42 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aitounti aiteO
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
qelonta thelO
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
to-THE
one-REQUESTING one-requesting
YOU
BE-GIVING be-you-giving !
AND
THE
one-WILLING one-willing
FROM YOU
42 Give to him that asketh thee, and from him that would borrow of thee turn not thou away.
danisasqai mh daneizO mE
vn Aor Mid Part Neg
apostrafhs apostrephO
vs 2Aor Pas 2 Sg
TO-be-LOANED to-borrow
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-TURNING you-may-be-turning-away agaphseis agapaO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
plhsion sou plEsion su

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
YE-HEAR
that
it-WAS-declarED YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE
NIGH-one associate
OF-YOU
AND
43 . Ye have heard that it hath been said, Thou shalt love thy neighbour, and hate thine enemy.
mishseis miseO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ecqron echthros
a_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-HATING THE
enemy
OF-YOU
5:44 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
agapate agapaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ecqrous umwn echthros humeis

a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
kai kai
Conj
YET AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
BE-YE-LOVING THE be-ye-loving ! diwkontwn diOkO

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
enemies
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
proseucesqe proseuchomai
vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
uper huper
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
44 But I say unto you, Love your enemies, bless them that curse you, do good to them that hate you, and pray for them which despitefully use you, and persecute you;
BE-YE-prayING be-ye-praying !
OVER THE for-the-sake-of
ones-CHASING ones-persecuting
YOU(p) ye
AV
5:45 opws
hopOs
Adv
genhsqe ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
WHICH-how YE-MAY-BE-BECOMING SONS so-that oti ton hoti ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE-One of-ye the-one
IN
heavens
hlion hElios
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
anatellei epi ponhrous kai agaqous kai brecei anatellO epi ponEros kai agathos kai brechO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
45 That ye may be the children of your Father which is in heaven: for he maketh his sun to rise on the evil and on the good, and sendeth rain on the just and on the unjust.
that
THE
SUN
OF-Him
IS-UP-risING is-rising
ON
wicked wicked-ones
AND
GOOD good-ones
AND
IS-RAINING it-is-raining
epi dikaious kai adikous epi dikaios kai adikos

Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
ON
JUST just-ones
AND
UN-JUST unjust-ones tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
5:46 ean
ean
Cond
gar agaphshte gar agapaO

agapwntas agapaO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
IF-EVER for
YE-SHOULD-BE-LOVING THE
ones-LOVING ones-loving to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
ANY what ?
HIRE wages
46 For if ye love them which love you, what reward have ye? do not even the publicans the same?
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ouci ouchi
Part Int
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YE-ARE-HAVING NOT(emph.) AND also
THE
tribute-collectors THE
SAME
ARE-DOING
5:47 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
aspashsqe aspazomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous umwn adelphos humeis

n_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
monon ti monon tis

Adv pi Acc Sg n
perisson perissos
a_ Acc Sg n
AND
IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-greetING THE
brothers
OF-YOU(p) ONLY of-ye auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
ANY what
excessive
47 And if ye salute your brethren only, what do ye more [than others]? do not even the publicans so?
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ouci ouchi
Part Int
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
eqnikoi ethnikos
a_ Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YE-ARE-DOING NOT(emph.) AND also
THE
NATIONics THE ones-of-the-nations
SAME
ARE-DOING
5:48 esesqe
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
teleioi ws o teleios hOs ho

a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios ouranios
a_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE
THEN YOU(p) ye
mature perfect
AS
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
48 Be ye therefore perfect, even as your Father which is in heaven is perfect.
heavenly
teleios estin teleios eimi

a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mature perfect
IS
AV
Matthew 6
6:1 prosecete
prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dikaiosunhn umwn dikaiosunE humeis

n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
Prep
BE-YE-heedING be-ye-heeding ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
YET
THE
JUSTice righteousness to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU(p) NO of-ye autois ei autos ei

pp Dat Pl m Cond
TO-BE-DOING IN-TOWARD-PLACE in-front-of de de

Conj
. Take heed that ye do not your alms before men, to be seen of them: otherwise ye have no reward of your Father which is in heaven.
anqrwpwn pros anthrOpos pros

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
qeaqhnai theaomai
vn Aor Pas
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE the ouk ou

Part Neg
humans
TOWARD THE
TO-BE-gazED to-them to-be-gazed-at patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
IF
YET NO
SURELY HIRE wages ouranois ouranos

n_ Dat Pl m
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING BESIDE THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
IN
THE
heavens
6:2 otan
hotan
Conj
oun oun
Conj
poihs poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
elehmosunhn mh eleEmosunE mE
n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg
salpishs salpizO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
when-EVER THEN YOU-MAY-BE-DOING alms whenever emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-TRUMPETING
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
wsper oi hOsper ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
upokritai poiousin en hupokritEs poieO en

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
Therefore when thou doest [thine] alms, do not sound a trumpet before thee, as the hypocrites do in the synagogues and in the streets, that they may have glory of men. Verily I say unto you, They have their reward.
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU in-front-of you kai en kai en

Conj Prep
AS-EVEN even-as
THE
hypocrites
ARE-DOING
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS synagogues anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
rumais opws rhumE hopOs

n_ Dat Pl f Adv
doxasqwsin doxazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
AND
IN
THE
streets
WHICH-how THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED by so-that they-should-be-being-glorified apecousin apechO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE
humans
amhn legw amEn legO

Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE they-are-collecting elehmosunhn mh eleEmosunE mE

HIRE wages gnwtw ginOskO
OF-them
6:3 sou
su
pp 2 Gen Sg
de de
Conj
poiountos poieO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
aristera aristeros
a_ Nom Sg f
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
But when thou doest alms, let not thy left hand know what thy right hand doeth:
OF-YOU
YET DOING
alms
NO
LET-BE-KNOWING THE let-her-be-knowing !
best (left-hand) left-hand
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
dexia dexios
a_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
ANY what h eimi
IS-DOING
THE
RIGHT right-hand h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-YOU
6:4 opws
hopOs
Adv
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
elehmosunh en eleEmosunE en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kruptw kai o kruptos kai ho

a_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
WHICH-how MAY-BE so-that pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU
THE
alms
IN
THE
HIDDen hiding
AND
THE
That thine alms may be in secret: and thy Father which seeth in secret himself shall reward thee openly.
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
blepwn blepO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kruptw apodwsei kruptos apodidOmi

a_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
FATHER
OF-YOU
THE
One-lookING one-observing ouk ou

Part Neg
IN
THE
HIDDen hiding ws oi hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Pl m
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU shall-be-paying you upokritai oti hupokritEs hoti

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
5
6:5 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
proseuchsqe proseuchomai
vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
esesqe eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
AND
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-prayING whenever en en

Prep
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE AS
THE
hypocrites
that
filousin phileO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
gwniais twn gOnia ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
plateiwn plateia
n_ Gen Pl f
. And when thou prayest, thou shalt not be as the hypocrites [are]: for they love to pray standing in the synagogues and in the corners of the streets, that they may be seen of men. Verily I say unto you, They have their reward.
THEY-ARE-beING-FOND IN they-are-being-fond-of estwtes histEmi

vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS AND synagogues fanwsin phainO
IN
THE
CORNERS
OF-THE
BROADS squares
proseucesqai opws proseuchomai hopOs

vn Pres midD/pasD Adv
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois amhn anthrOpos amEn

n_ Dat Pl m Hebrew
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
HAVING-STOOD standing legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
TO-BE-prayING
WHICH-how THEY-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE so-that ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
humans
AMEN verily
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apecousin apechO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE they-are-collecting
HIRE wages
OF-them
AV
Matthew 6
6:6 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
otan hotan
Conj
proseuch proseuchomai
vs Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
eiselqe eiserchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tameion tameion
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU
YET when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-prayING BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE whenever be-you-entering ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
STOREROOM OF-YOU
kai kleisas kai kleiO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
proseuxai proseuchomai
vm Aor midD 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
But thou, when thou prayest, enter into thy closet, and when thou hast shut thy door, pray to thy Father which is in secret; and thy Father which seeth in secret shall reward thee openly.
AND
LOCKing
THE
DOOR
OF-YOU
pray pray-you ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
to-THE
FATHER
OF-YOU
to-THE-One to-the-one tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kruptw kai o kruptos kai ho

pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
blepwn blepO
en en
Prep
IN
THE
HIDDen hiding
AND
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU
THE
One-lookING one-observing
IN
THE
kruptw apodwsei kruptos apodidOmi

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
HIDDen hiding
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU shall-be-paying de de

Conj
6:7 proseucomenoi
proseuchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
battaloghshte battologeO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
wsper oi hOsper ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
eqnikoi ethnikos
a_ Nom Pl m
prayING
YET NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-STUTTER-sayING AS-EVEN ye-should-be-using-useless-repetitions even-as th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
THE
NATIONics ones-of-the-nations
But when ye pray, use not vain repetitions, as the heathen [do]: for they think that they shall be heard for their much speaking.
dokousin dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
gar oti en gar hoti en

Conj Conj Prep
polulogia autwn polulogia autos

n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Pl m
eisakousqhsontai eisakouO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-SEEMING for they-are-supposing
that
IN
THE
much-sayING loquacity
OF-them
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-INTO-HEARD they-shall-be-being-hearkened-to gar gar

Conj
WH WH
6:8 mh
mE
Part Neg
oun oun
Conj
omoiwqhte homoioO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
autois oiden autos eidO

pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
o qeos
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NO
THEN YE-MAY-BE-BEING-LIKenED to-them ye-may-be-being-like them umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
HAS-PERCEIVED for is-aware pro pro

Prep
THE
Be not ye therefore like unto them: for your Father knoweth what things ye have need of, before ye ask him.
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
aithsai aiteO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) OF-WHICH NEED of-ye proseucesqe proseuchomai

YE-ARE-HAVING BEFORE OF-THE the umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
TO-REQUEST Him
6:9 outws oun

houtOs
Adv
oun
Conj
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
thus
THEN BE-prayING be-ye-praying ! to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
YOU(p) ye onoma onoma

n_ Nom Sg n
FATHER !
OF-US
THE
IN
THE
heavens
. After this manner therefore pray ye: Our Father which art in heaven, Hallowed be thy name.
agiasqhtw hagiazO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
LET-BE-BEING-HOLYizED THE let-it-be-being-hallowed !
NAME
OF-YOU
6:10 elqetw
erchomai
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia sou basileia su

n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
genhqhtw ginomai
vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
10 Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done in earth, as [it is] in heaven.
LET-BE-COMING THE let-her-be-coming ! ws en hOs en

Adv Prep
KINGdom
OF-YOU
LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE let-it-be-being-become !
WILL
OF-YOU
ouranw kai epi ghs ouranos kai epi gE

n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f
AS
IN
heaven
AND also
ON
LAND earth ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
6:11 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
epiousion dos epiousios didOmi

a_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
11 Give us this day our daily bread.
THE
BREAD
OF-US
THE
ON-BEINGed dole
to-US
toDAY
6:12 kai afes

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ofeilhmata hmwn opheilEma hemeis

n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Pl
ws kai hmeis hOs kai hEmeis

Adv Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
afhkamen aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
12 And forgive us our debts, as we forgive our debtors.
AND
FROM-LET remit-you !
to-US
THE
OWES debts
OF-US
AS
AND also
WE
FROM-LET remit
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ofeiletais hmwn opheiletEs hemeis

n_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
to-THE
OWErs debtors
OF-US
AV
Matthew 6
6:13 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
eisenegkhs eispherO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
peirasmon alla rusai peirasmos alla rhuomai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vm Aor midD 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
AND
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING US you-may-be-bringing-into ponhrou ponEros

a_ Gen Sg m
INTO trial
but
rescue rescue-you !
US
13 And lead us not into temptation, but deliver us from evil: For thine is the kingdom, and the power, and the glory, for ever. Amen.
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
FROM THE
wicked wicked-one gar afhte gar aphiEmi

6:14 ean
ean
Cond
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois ta anthrOpos ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata autwn paraptOma autos

14 For if ye forgive men their trespasses, your heavenly Father will also forgive you:
IF-EVER for
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-THE ye-may-be-forgiving the kai umin kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
humans
THE
BESIDE-FALLS offenses ouranios ouranios

a_ Nom Sg m
OF-them
afhsei aphiEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING AND shall-be-forgiving also
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye anqrwpois anthrOpos

n_ Dat Pl m
WH
heavenly
WH
6:15 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
afhte aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ta paraptwmata
IF-EVER YET NO
WH
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-THE ye-may-be-forgiving the o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
humans
15 But if ye forgive not men their trespasses, neither will your Father forgive your trespasses.
autwn
oude oude
Adv
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
afhsei aphiEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata paraptOma
n_ Acc Pl n
NOT-YET THE neither umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING THE of-ye shall-be-forgiving
BESIDE-FALLS offenses
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
6:16 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
nhsteuhte nEsteuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
ws oi hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
upokritai hupokritEs
n_ Nom Pl m
when-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-fastING NO whenever skuqrwpoi skuthrOpos

a_ Nom Pl m
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! gar ta gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
AS
THE
hypocrites
afanizousin aphanizO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
proswpa autwn prosOpon autos

opws hopOs
Adv
16 . Moreover when ye fast, be not, as the hypocrites, of a sad countenance: for they disfigure their faces, that they may appear unto men to fast. Verily I say unto you, They have their reward.
SAD-VIEWers THEY-ARE-UN-APPEARizING for of-a-sad-countenance they-are-disguising fanwsin phainO

vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
faces
OF-them
WHICH-how so-that umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois nhsteuontes amhn legw anthrOpos nEsteuO amEn legO

n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THEY-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE
humans
fastING
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
apecousin apechO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THEY-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE they-are-collecting
HIRE wages
OF-them
6:17 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
nhsteuwn nEsteuO
aleiyai aleiphO
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn kai to kephalE kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg n
17 But thou, when thou fastest, anoint thine head, and wash thy face;
YOU
YET fastING
RUB rub-you !
OF-YOU
THE
HEAD
AND
THE
proswpon sou prosOpon su

n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
niyai niptO
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
face
OF-YOU
WASH wash-you ! fanhs phainO

vs 2Aor Pas 2 Sg
6:18 opws
hopOs
Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois nhsteuwn anthrOpos nEsteuO

n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
alla tw alla ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
WHICH-how NO so-that patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
YOU-MAY-BE-APPEARING to-THE
humans
fastING
but
to-THE
18 That thou appear not unto men to fast, but unto thy Father which is in secret: and thy Father, which seeth in secret, shall reward thee openly.
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
krufaiw kai o kruphaios kai ho

pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FATHER
OF-YOU
to-THE-One IN the-one
THE
HIDDen hiding
AND
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU
THE
AV
Matthew 6
blepwn blepO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
krufaiw apodwsei kruphaios apodidOmi

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
One-lookING one-observing
IN
THE
HIDDen hiding
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU shall-be-paying you umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
6:19 mh
mE
Part Neg
qhsaurizete thEsaurizO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
qhsaurous thEsauros
n_ Acc Pl m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
NO
YE-BE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-YOU(p) be-ye-hoarding ! to-ye shs sEs

n_ Nom Sg m
PLACED-INTO-MORROWS ON treasures kai opou kai hopou

Conj Adv
THE
LAND earth
19 . Lay not up for yourselves treasures upon earth, where moth and rust doth corrupt, and where thieves break through and steal:
opou hopou
Adv
kai brwsis kai brOsis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
afanizei aphanizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kleptai kleptEs
n_ Nom Pl m
THE-?-where MOTH wheree diorussousin diorussO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
AND
FEEDing corrosion
IS-UN-APPEARizING AND is-causing-to-disappear
THE-?-where thieves wheree
kai kleptousin kai kleptO

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-THRU-EXCAVATING AND are-burrowing
ARE-stealING
6:20 qhsaurizete
thEsaurizO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
qhsaurous thEsauros
n_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
ouranw opou ouranos hopou

n_ Dat Sg m Adv
YE-BE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW YET to-YOU(p) be-ye-hoarding ! to-ye oute oute

Conj
PLACED-INTO-MORROWS IN treasures afanizei aphanizO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
heaven
THE-?-where wheree kleptai ou kleptEs ou

n_ Nom Pl m Part Neg
20 But lay up for yourselves treasures in heaven, where neither moth nor rust doth corrupt, and where thieves do not break through nor steal:
shs sEs
n_ Nom Sg m
oute oute
Conj
brwsis brOsis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai opou kai hopou

Conj Adv
NOT-BESIDES MOTH neither diorussousin diorussO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
NOT-BESIDES FEEDing nor corrosion oude oude

Adv
IS-UN-APPEARizING AND is-causing-to-disappear
THE-?-where thieves wheree
NOT
kleptousin kleptO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-THRU-EXCAVATING NOT-YET ARE-stealING are-burrowing nor
6:21 opou
hopou
Adv
gar estin gar eimi

Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qhsauros thEsauros
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ekei estai ekei eimi

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
WH
kai
21 For where your treasure is, there will your heart be also.
THE-?-where for wherever

NA
IS
THE
PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-YOU treasure
there
SHALL-BE
kai kai
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
AND also
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
6:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lucnos luchnos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos estin sOma eimi

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ofqalmos ean ophthalmos ean

n_ Nom Sg m Cond
oun oun
Conj
THE
LAMP
OF-THE
BODY
IS
THE
VIEWer eye to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
IF-EVER THEN
22 The light of the body is the eye: if therefore thine eye be single, thy whole body shall be full of light.
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

aplous haplous
a_ Nom Sg m
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
MAY-BE
THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
UN-COMPOUND WHOLE single
THE
BODY
OF-YOU
fwteinon estai phOteinos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
luminous
SHALL-BE
6:23 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ponhros h ponEros eimi

a_ Nom Sg m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
IF-EVER YET THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
wicked
MAY-BE
WHOLE
THE
23 But if thine eye be evil, thy whole body shall be full of darkness. If therefore the light that is in thee be darkness, how great [is] that darkness!
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
skoteinon estai skoteinos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
BODY
OF-YOU
DARK
SHALL-BE
IF
THEN THE
LIGHT
THE
IN
YOU
skotos skotos
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
skotos skotos
n_ Nom Sg n
poson posos
pq Nom Sg n
DARKness
IS
THE
DARKness
how-much how-much ?
AV
Matthew 6
6:24 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
dunatai dunamai
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl m
kuriois douleuein kurios douleuO

n_ Dat Pl m vn Pres Act
h E
Part
gar ton gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one can mishsei miseO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to-TWO
masters lords agaphsei agapaO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-SLAVING OR for either h E

Part
THE
ONE
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
anqexetai antechomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
24 No man can serve two masters: for either he will hate the one, and love the other; or else he will hold to the one, and despise the other. Ye cannot serve God and mammon.
he-SHALL-BE-HATING AND
THE
DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-LOVING OR
OF-ONE one
he-SHALL-BE-upholdING AND
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eterou heteros
a_ Gen Sg m
katafronhsei kataphroneO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
douleuein douleuO
vn Pres Act
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE the mamwna mamOnas

n_ Dat Sg n
DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-despisING NOT
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
to-God
TO-BE-SLAVING AND
to-MAMMON
6:25 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
merimnate merimnaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THRU this because-of ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NO
BE-YE-beING-anxious to-THE be-ye-worrying ! mhde mEde

Conj
soul
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
faghte esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
h E
Part
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
pihte pinO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati umwn sOma humeis

n_ Dat Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
25 . Therefore I say unto you, Take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat, or what ye shall drink; nor yet for your body, what ye shall put on. Is not the life more than meat, and the body than raiment?
ANY what ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
YE-MAY-BE-EATING
OR
ANY what ouci ouchi

Part Int
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING
NO-YET to-THE nor-yet pleion polus

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
BODY
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
endushsqe enduO
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ANY what trofhs trophE

n_ Gen Sg f
YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING NOT(emph.) THE ye-should-be-putting-on kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
soul
MORE
IS
OF-THE
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
endumatos enduma
n_ Gen Sg n
NURTURE AND nourishment
THE
BODY
OF-THE
IN-SLIP apparel tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
6:26 embleyate eis

emblepO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Acc Pl n
ouranou oti ou ouranos hoti ou

n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg
speirousin speirO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
IN-look look-at-ye ! oude oude

Adv
INTO THE
flyers OF-THE flying-creatures sunagousin sunagO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
heaven
that
NOT
THEY-ARE-SOWING
qerizousin therizO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oude oude
Adv
eis eis
Prep
apoqhkas apothEkE
n_ Acc Pl f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
26 Behold the fowls of the air: for they sow not, neither do they reap, nor gather into barns; yet your heavenly Father feedeth them. Are ye not much better than they?
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-reapING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-LEADING INTO FROM-PLACES AND neither nor they-are-gathering barns pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios trefei ouranios trephO

a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
ouc ou
Part Neg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
mallon mallon
Adv
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye autwn autos

pp Gen Pl n
heavenly
IS-NURTURING them is-nourishing
NOT
YOU(p) ye
RATHER more
diaferete diapherO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ARE-THRU-CARRYING OF-them are-being-of-consequence
6:27 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
merimnwn merimnaO
dunatai dunamai
prosqeinai epi thn prostithEmi epi ho

vn 2Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ANY who
YET OUT OF-YOU(p) beING-anxious of-ye worrying phcun pEchus

n_ Acc Sg m
27 Which of you by taking thought can add one cubit unto his stature?
IS-ABLE
TO-add
ON
THE
hlikian autou hElikia autos

ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
PRIME stature
OF-him
CUBIT
ONE
6:28 kai peri

kai
Conj
peri
Prep
endumatos ti enduma tis

n_ Gen Sg n pi Acc Sg n
merimnate merimnaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
katamaqete katamanthanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
krina krinon
n_ Acc Pl n
AND
ABOUT IN-SLIP apparel
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-beING-anxious BE-YE-DOWN-LEARNING THE ye-are-worrying be-ye-studying !
ANEMONES
28 And why take ye thought for raiment? Consider the lilies of the field, how they grow; they toil not, neither do they spin:
AV
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
pws auxanousin pOs auxanO

Adv vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
kopiwsin kopiaO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oude oude
Adv
nhqousin nEthO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-THE
FIELD
how
THEY-ARE-GROWING NOT
THEY-ARE-toilING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-SPINNING nor pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
6:29 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti oude hoti oude

Conj Adv
solomwn en solomOn en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT-YET SOLOMON
IN
EVERY all
THE
esteem glory
OF-him
29 And yet I say unto you, That even Solomon in all his glory was not arrayed like one of these.
periebaleto ws en periballO hOs heis

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Sg n
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
was-ABOUT-CAST was-clothed
AS
ONE
OF-these
6:30 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
corton chortos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
shmeron onta sEmeron eimi

Adv vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m
kai aurion kai aurion

Conj Adv
eis eis
Prep
IF
YET THE
FODDER grass o ho
OF-THE
FIELD
toDAY
BEING
AND
MORROW INTO tomorrow
klibanon ballomenon klibanos ballO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
outws amfiennusin houtOs amphiennumi

Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
pollw mallon polus mallon

a_ Dat Sg n Adv
30 Wherefore, if God so clothe the grass of the field, which to day is, and to morrow is cast into the oven, [shall he] not much more [clothe] you, O ye of little faith?
t_ Nom Sg m
STOVE
beING-CAST
THE
God
thus
IS-ENVELOPING-IN NOT is-garbing
to-much much
RATHER
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oligopistoi oligopistos
a_ Voc Pl m
YOU(p) ye
FEW-BELIEVing-ones scant-of-faith-ones ! oun oun

Conj
6:31 mh
mE
Part Neg
merimnhshte merimnaO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
legontes legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
fagwmen esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
h E
Part
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
NO
THEN YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious sayING ye-should-be-worrying h E

Part
ANY what ?
WE-MAY-BE-EATING OR
ANY what ?
31 Therefore take no thought, saying, What shall we eat? or, What shall we drink? or, Wherewithal shall we be clothed?
piwmen pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
peribalwmeqa periballO
vs 2Aor Mid 1 Pl
WE-MAY-BE-DRINKING OR
ANY what ? ta ho
WE-MAY-BE-beING-ABOUT-CAST we-may-be-being-clothed eqnh ethnos

n_ Nom Pl n
6:32 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
gar tauta gar houtos

Conj pd Acc Pl n
epizhtousin oiden epizEteO eidO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl vi Perf Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Pl n
ALL
for
these
THE
NATIONS
ARE-ON-SEEKING are-seeking-for
HAS-PERCEIVED for is-aware toutwn houtos

pd Gen Pl n
THE
32 (For after all these things do the Gentiles seek:) for your heavenly Father knoweth that ye have need of all these things.
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios oti crhzete ouranios hoti chrEzO

a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
apantwn hapas
a_ Gen Pl n
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye de de

Conj
heavenly
that
YE-ARE-needING OF-these OF-ALL(emph.) of-these-things all(emph.)

NA
6:33 zhteite
zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
prwton prOton
Adv
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NA
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
YE-BE-SEEKING YET BEFORE-most THE be-ye-seeking ! first dikaiosunhn autou dikaiosunE autos
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
33 But seek ye first the kingdom of God, and his righteousness; and all these things shall be added unto you.
kai tauta kai houtos

Conj pd Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
prosteqhsetai prostithEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-Him
AND
these ALL these-things eis eis

Prep
SHALL-BE-BEING-addED to-YOU(p) to-ye thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
6:34 mh
mE
Part Neg
oun oun
Conj
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
aurion aurion
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar aurion gar aurion

Conj Adv
NO
THEN YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious INTO THE ye-should-be-worrying eauths heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg f
MORROW THE
for
MORROW
34 Take therefore no thought for the morrow: for the morrow shall take thought for the things of itself. Sufficient unto the day [is] the evil thereof.
merimnhsei merimnaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
arketon th arketos ho
a_ Nom Sg n t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kakia kakia
n_ Nom Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-beING-anxious OF-self shall-be-be worrying of-herself
SUFFICient
to-THE
DAY
THE
EVIL
OF-her
AV
Matthew 7
7:1 mh
mE
Part Neg
krinete krinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
kriqhte krinO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
. Judge not, that ye be not judged.
NO
BE-JUDGING be-ye-judging ! w hos

pr Dat Sg n
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUDGED
7:2 en
en
Prep
gar krimati krinete gar krima krinO

Conj n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kriqhsesqe krinO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
metrw metron
n_ Dat Sg n
IN
WHICH
for
JUDGment
YE-ARE-JUDGING YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-JUDGED AND
IN
WHICH
MEASURE
For with what judgment ye judge, ye shall be judged: and with what measure ye mete, it shall be measured to you again.
metreite metreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
metrhqhsetai metreO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-ARE-MEASURING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-MEASURED to-YOU(p) to-ye
7:3 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
karfos to karphos ho
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ofqalmw tou ophthalmos ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
ANY why ?
YET YOU-ARE-lookING THE you-are-observing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
SHRIVEL mote tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
IN
THE
VIEWer eye ou ou
Part Neg
OF-THE
And why beholdest thou the mote that is in thy brother's eye, but considerest not the beam that is in thine own eye?
adelfou sou adelphos su

n_ Gen Sg m pp 2 Gen Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
sw sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
ofqalmw dokon ophthalmos dokos

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
brother
OF-YOU
THE
YET IN
THE
YOUR
VIEWer eye
BEAM
NOT
katanoeis katanoeO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-DOWN-MINDING you-are-considering
7:4 h
E
Part
pws ereis pOs ereO

Adv Int vi Fut Act 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekbalw ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
OR
how how ?
YOU-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE
brother
OF-YOU
FROM-LET let-you ! h ho
I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING I-should-be-extracting dokos dokos

n_ Nom Sg f
Or how wilt thou say to thy brother, Let me pull out the mote out of thine eye; and, behold, a beam [is] in thine own eye?
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
karfos ek karphos ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ofqalmou sou ophthalmos su

kai idou kai idou

en en
Prep
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
SHRIVEL mote
OUT OF-THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
AND
BEAM
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ofqalmw sou ophthalmos su

THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
7:5 upokrita ekbale

hupokritEs
n_ Voc Sg m
ekballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ofqalmou sou ophthalmos su

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dokon dokos
n_ Acc Sg f
hypocrite hypocrite !
BE-OUT-CASTING BEFORE-most OUT OF-THE be-you-extracting ! first ekbalein ekballO

vn 2Aor Act
VIEWer eye to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU
THE
BEAM
Thou hypocrite, first cast out the beam out of thine own eye; and then shalt thou see clearly to cast out the mote out of thy brother's eye.
kai tote diableyeis kai tote diablepO

Conj Adv vi Fut Act 2 Sg
karfos ek karphos ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ofqalmou ophthalmos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
then
YOU-SHALL-BE-THRU-lookING TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE you-shall-be-being-keen-sighted to-be-extracting adelfou sou adelphos su

SHRIVEL mote
OUT OF-THE
VIEWer eye
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
brother
OF-YOU
7:6 mh
mE
Part Neg
dwte didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kusin kuOn
n_ Dat Pl m
mhde mEde
Conj
balhte ballO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
NO
YE-MAY-BE-GIVING THE
HOLY
to-THE
dogs
NO-YET YE-SHOULD-BE-CASTING THE nor-yet katapathsousin katapateO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
margaritas umwn margaritEs humeis

Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
coirwn mhpote choiros mEpote

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
Give not that which is holy unto the dogs, neither cast ye your pearls before swine, lest they trample them under their feet, and turn again and rend you.
PEARLS
OF-YOU(p) IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE of-ye in-front-of the tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
HOGS
NO-?-when THEY-SHALL-BE-tramplING lest-at-some-time rhxwsin rhEgnumi

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
posin pous
n_ Dat Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai strafentes kai strephO

Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
them
IN
THE
FEET
OF-them
AND
BEING-TURNED
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BURSTING YOU(p) they-should-be-tearing ye
AV
Matthew 7
7:7 aiteite
aiteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai doqhsetai kai didOmi

Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
zhteite zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai eurhsete kai heuriskO

Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
BE-REQUESTING AND be-ye-requesting ! krouete krouO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-SEEKING AND be-ye-seeking !
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING
. Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you:
kai anoighsetai kai anoigO

Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
BE-KNOCKING AND be-ye-knocking !
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED to-YOU(p) it-shall-be-being opened to-ye aitwn aiteO

7:8 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
zhtwn zEteO
EVERY
for
THE
one-REQUESTING one-requesting krouonti krouO

IS-GETTING-UP AND is-obtaining
THE
one-SEEKING one-seeking
For every one that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall be opened.
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
anoighsetai anoigO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
IS-FINDING
AND
to-THE
NA
one-KNOCKING one-knocking ex ek
Prep
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED it-shall-be-being opened umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
7:9 h
E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpos on anthrOpos hos

n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m
aithsei aiteO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OR
ANY what ? uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
IS
OUT OF-YOU(p) human of-ye arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
Or what man is there of you, whom if his son ask bread, will he give him a stone?
WHOM
SHALL-BE-REQUESTING
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
epidwsei epididOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
SON
OF-him
BREAD
NO
STONE
SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him he-shall-be-handing him epidwsei epididOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
7:10 h
E
Part
kai icqun kai ichthus

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
aithsei aiteO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
ofin ophis
n_ Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
10 Or if he ask a fish, will he give him a serpent?
OR
AND also oun oun

Conj
FISH
SHALL-BE-REQUESTING NO he-shall-be-requesting ponhroi ontes ponEros eimi

a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
serpent
SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him he-shall-be-handing him domata agaqa doma agathos

n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n
7:11 ei
ei
Cond
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
didonai didOmi
vn Pres Act
IF
THEN YOU(p) ye teknois umwn teknon humeis

n_ Dat Pl n
wicked
BEING
HAVE-PERCEIVED GIFTS
GOOD
TO-BE-GIVING
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
posw posos
pq Dat Sg n
mallon o mallon ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
11 If ye then, being evil, know how to give good gifts unto your children, how much more shall your Father which is in heaven give good things to them that ask him?
pp 2 Gen Pl
to-THE
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) how-much of-ye agaqa agathos

a_ Acc Pl n
RATHER
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
IN
THE
ouranois dwsei ouranos didOmi

n_ Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
aitousin aiteO
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
heavens
SHALL-BE-GIVING GOODS to-THE good-things oun oun

Conj
ones-REQUESTING Him ones-requesting ina hina

Conj
7:12 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
qelhte thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
poiwsin poieO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ALL
THEN as-much-as IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-WILLING THAT MAY-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) whatever to-ye poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
12 . Therefore all things whatsoever ye would that men should do to you, do ye even so to them: for this is the law and the prophets.
anqrwpoi outws kai umeis anthrOpos houtOs kai humeis

n_ Nom Pl m Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
autois outos autos houtos

pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
humans
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
BE-DOING be-ye-doing !
to-them
this
for
IS
THE
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
LAW
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
7:13 eiselqate dia

eiserchomai
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
dia
Prep
stenhs pulhs stenos pulE

a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
oti plateia hoti platus

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
NA
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
NA
pulh pulE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
INTO-COME-YE THRU THE enter-ye ! through eurucwros euruchOros

n_ Nom Sg f
CRAMPED GATE
that
BROAD
THE
GATE
AND
13 Enter ye in at the strait gate: for wide [is] the gate, and broad [is] the way, that leadeth to destruction, and many there be which go in thereat:
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
odos hodos
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apagousa apagO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apwleian kai apOleia kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
WELL-GUSH-SPACED THE spacious
WAY
THE
one-FROM-LEADING INTO THE leading-away
destruction
AND
AV
Matthew 7
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eisercomenoi eiserchomai
di dia
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
MANY
WH
ARE
NA
THE
ones-INTO-COMING ones-entering stenh stenos

a_ Nom Sg f
THRU her through kai teqlimmenh kai thlibO

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f
7:14
oti
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pulh pulE
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ANY what odos hodos

n_ Nom Sg f
CRAMPED
THE
GATE
AND
HAVING-been-CONSTRICTED THE having-been-narrowed kai oligoi kai oligos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
14 Because strait [is] the gate, and narrow [is] the way, which leadeth unto life, and few there be that find it.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apagousa apagO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
WAY
THE
one-FROM-LEADING INTO THE leading-away
LIFE
AND
FEW
ARE
THE
euriskontes authn heuriskO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg f
ones-FINDING ones-finding
her
7:15 prosecete apo

prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
yeudoprofhtwn pseudoprophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
oitines ercontai hostis erchomai

pr Nom Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
BE-YE-heedING be-ye-heeding ! en en
Prep
FROM THE
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers WHO-ANY false-prophets who-any de de

Conj
ARE-COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
15 . Beware of false prophets, which come to you in sheep's clothing, but inwardly they are ravening wolves.
endumasin probatwn eswqen enduma probaton esOthen

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Pl n Adv
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
lukoi lukos
n_ Nom Pl m
arpages harpax
a_ Nom Pl m
IN
IN-SLIPS apparel(p) twn ho
OF-sheep of-sheep(p)
INTO-PLACE YET THEY-ARE inside epignwsesqe epiginOskO

vi Fut midD 2 Pl
WOLVES
SNATCHing rapacious
16 Ye shall know them by their fruits. Do men gather grapes of thorns, or figs of thistles?
7:16 apo
apo
Prep
karpwn autwn karpos autos

n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m
autous mhti autos mEti

pp Acc Pl m Part Int
t_ Gen Pl m
FROM THE
FRUITS
OF-them
YE-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING them ye-shall-be-recognizing stafulas h staphulE E

n_ Acc Pl f Part
NO-ANY not ? tribolwn tribolos

n_ Gen Pl m
sullegousin sullegO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
akanqwn akantha
n_ Gen Pl f
apo apo
Prep
suka sukon
n_ Acc Pl n
THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-collectING FROM POINT-FLOWERS GRAPES they-are-culling thorns
OR
FROM THREE-CASTS FIGS star-thistles to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
7:17 outws pan

houtOs
Adv
pas
a_ Nom Sg n
dendron agaqon dendron agathos

n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
karpous kalous poiei karpos kalos poieO

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
thus
EVERY
TREE
GOOD
FRUITS
IDEAL
IS-DOING is-producing
THE
YET
17 Even so every good tree bringeth forth good fruit; but a corrupt tree bringeth forth evil fruit.
sapron sapros
a_ Nom Sg n
dendron karpous ponhrous poiei dendron karpos ponEros poieO

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ROTTen
TREE
FRUITS
wicked noxious
IS-DOING is-producing karpous ponhrous karpos ponEros

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
WH
7:18 ou
ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
dendron agaqon dendron agathos

enegkein
NOT
NA
IS-ABLE can oude oude

Adv
TREE
GOOD
FRUITS
wicked noxious
18 A good tree cannot bring forth evil fruit, neither [can] a corrupt tree bring forth good fruit.
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
dendron sapron dendron sapros

karpous kalous poiein karpos kalos poieO

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
TO-BE-DOING to-be-producing
NOT-YET TREE neither dendron mh dendron mE

n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg
ROTTen
FRUITS
IDEAL
TO-BE-DOING to-be-producing ekkoptetai ekkoptO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
7:19 pan
pas
a_ Nom Sg n
poioun poieO
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
19 Every tree that bringeth not forth good fruit is hewn down, and cast into the fire.
EVERY
TREE
NO
DOING doproducing
FRUIT
IDEAL
IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND is-being-hewn-down
INTO
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
balletai ballO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
FIRE
IS-beING-CAST
7:20 ara
ara
Part
ge ge
Part
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
karpwn autwn karpos autos

epignwsesqe epiginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
20 Wherefore by their fruits ye shall know them.
CONSEQUENTLY SURELY FROM THE
FRUITS
OF-them
YE-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING them ye-shall-be-recognizing
AV
Matthew 7
7:21 ou
ou
Part Neg
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legwn legO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
eiseleusetai eiserchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
NOT
EVERY
THE
one-sayING one-saying
to-ME
Master ! Lord !
Master ! Lord !
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING shall-be-entering to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

ouranwn all o ouranos alla ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
poiwn poieO
qelhma thelEma
n_ Acc Sg n
21 . Not every one that saith unto me, Lord, Lord, shall enter into the kingdom of heaven; but he that doeth the will of my Father which is in heaven.
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
but
THE
one-DOING one-doing
THE
WILL
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE
IN
THE
heavens
7:22 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
erousin ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
ekeinh th ekeinos ho
pd Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
MANY
SHALL-BE-declarING to-ME
IN
that
THE
DAY
Master ! Lord !
Master ! Lord !
NOT
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
sw sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
onomati eprofhteusamen kai tw onoma prophEteuO kai ho

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg m
sw sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
onomati daimonia onoma daimonion

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Pl n
22 Many will say to me in that day, Lord, Lord, have we not prophesied in thy name? and in thy name have cast out devils? and in thy name done many wonderful works?
to-THE
YOUR
NAME
WE-BEFORE-AVER we-prophesy sw sos

ps 2 Dat Sg
AND
to-THE
YOUR
NAME
demons
exebalomen kai tw ekballO kai ho

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Dat Sg m
onomati dunameis onoma dunamis

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Pl f
pollas epoihsamen polus poieO

a_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-OUT-CAST we-cast-out
AND
to-THE
YOUR
NAME
ABILITIES MANY powerful-deeds
WE-DO
7:23 kai tote omologhsw

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
homologeO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
autois oti oudepote autos hoti oudepote

pp Dat Pl m Conj Adv
egnwn ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
then
I-SHALL-BE-avowING to-them
that
NOT-YET-?-when I-KNEW never thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YOU(p) ye anomian anomia

n_ Acc Sg f
23 And then will I profess unto them, I never knew you: depart from me, ye that work iniquity.
apocwreite apochOreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ergazomenoi ergazomai
BE-YE-FROM-SPACING FROM ME be-ye-departing !
THE
ones-ACTING ones-working mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
THE
UN-LAWness lawlessness
WH
7:24 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous logos
n_ Acc Pl m
toutous
EVERY every-one
NA
THEN WHO-ANY who-any kai poiei kai poieO

Conj
IS-HEARING
OF-ME
THE
sayings
24 Therefore whosoever heareth these sayings of mine, and doeth them, I will liken him unto a wise man, which built his house upon a rock:
toutous houtos
pd Acc Pl m
autous omoiwqhsetai autos homoioO

pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
fronimw ostis phronimos hostis

a_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
these
AND
IS-DOING
them
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIKenED to-MAN
DISPOSED prudent
WHO-ANY who-any
wkodomhsen autou oikodomeO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
petran petra
n_ Acc Sg f
HOME-BUILDS builds
OF-him
THE
HOME house broch brochE

n_ Nom Sg f
ON
THE
ROCK
7:25 kai katebh

kai
Conj
katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kai hlqon kai erchomai

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
potamoi kai epneusan potamos kai pneO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
DOWN-STEPPed THE descended anemoi anemos

n_ Nom Pl m
RAIN
AND
CAME
THE
rivers
AND
BLOW
25 And the rain descended, and the floods came, and the winds blew, and beat upon that house; and it fell not: for it was founded upon a rock.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai prosepesan kai prospiptO

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh kai ouk ekeinos kai ou

pd Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
WINDS
AND
THEY-TOWARD-FALL to-THE they-lunge petran petra

n_ Acc Sg f
HOME house
that
AND
NOT
it-FALLS she-falls
teqemeliwto themelioO
vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
gar epi thn gar epi ho

it-HAD-been-foundED for she-had-been-founded
ON
THE
ROCK
7:26 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
akouwn akouO
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous kai mh logos houtos kai mE

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg
AND
EVERY
THE
one-HEARING one-hearing
OF-ME
THE
sayings
these
AND
NO
26 And every one that heareth these sayings of mine, and doeth them not, shall be likened unto a foolish man, which built his house upon the
AV
poiwn poieO
autous omoiwqhsetai autos homoioO

pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
mwrw mOros
a_ Dat Sg m
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
wkodomhsen oikodomeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
sand:
DOING
them
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIKenED to-MAN
INSIPID stupid
WHO-ANY who-any
HOME-BUILDS builds
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ammon ammos
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
THE
HOME house h ho
ON
THE
SAND
7:27 kai katebh

kai
Conj
katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
broch brochE
n_ Nom Sg f

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
potamoi kai epneusan potamos kai pneO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
DOWN-STEPPed THE descended anemoi anemos

n_ Nom Pl m
RAIN
AND
CAME
THE
rivers
AND
BLOW
27 And the rain descended, and the floods came, and the winds blew, and beat upon that house; and it fell: and great was the fall of it.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai prosekoyan kai proskoptO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh kai epesen ekeinos kai piptO

pd Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE
WINDS
AND
THEY-TOWARD-STRIKE to-THE they-dash-against the megalh mega

a_ Nom Sg f
HOME house
that
AND
it-FALLS she-falls
AND
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ptwsis auths ptOsis autos

n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg f
WAS
THE
FALL
OF-her
GREAT
7:28 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ote etelesen o hote teleO ho

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous logos houtos

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m
AND
it-BECAME
when
FINISHES
THE
JESUS
THE
sayings
these
28 And it came to pass, when Jesus had ended these sayings, the people were astonished at his doctrine:
exeplhssonto oi ekplEssO ho
vi impf Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
didach autou didachE autos

were-astonishED
THE
THRONGS
ON
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
7:29 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar didaskwn gar didaskO

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
autous ws exousian ecwn autos hOs exousia echO

pp Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
ws hOs
Adv
29 For he taught them as [one] having authority, and not as the scribes.
He-WAS
for
One-TEACHING teaching
them
AS
authority
HAVING one-having
AND
NOT
AS
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis autwn grammateus autos

n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m
THE
WRITers scribes
OF-them
AV
Matthew 8
8:1 katabantos
katabainO
vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n

ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
. When he was come down from the mountain, great multitudes followed him.
OF-DOWN-STEPPing YET OF-Him of-descending polloi polus

a_ Nom Pl m
FROM THE
mountain
follow
to-Him him
THRONGS
MANY vast
8:2 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
lepros lepros
a_ Nom Sg m
proselqwn proserchomai
prosekunei autw proskuneO autos

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
legwn legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING leper lo ! qelhs thelO

vs Pres Act 2 Sg
TOWARD-COMING approaching dunasai dunamai

worshipED
to-Him him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
And, behold, there came a leper and worshipped him, saying, Lord, if thou wilt, thou canst make me clean.
ean ean
Cond
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kaqarisai katharizO
vn Aor Act
IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-WILLING YOU-ARE-ABLE you-can
ME
TO-cleanse
8:3 kai ekteinas

kai
Conj
ekteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
OUT-STRETCHing THE stretching-out
HAND
He-TOUCHES
OF-him him h ho
sayING
I-AM-WILLING
And Jesus put forth [his] hand, and touched him, saying, I will; be thou clean. And immediately his leprosy was cleansed.
kaqarisqhti katharizO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
kai euqews ekaqarisqh autou kai eutheOs katharizO autos

Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
lepra lepra
n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Nom Sg f
BE-BEING-cleansED AND be-you-being-cleansed !
immediately
IS-cleansED
OF-him
THE
leprosy
8:4 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ora horaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
eiphs legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
alla alla
Conj
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
BE-SEEING be-you-seeing ! ierei hiereus

n_ Dat Sg m
to-NO-YET-ONE YOU-MAY-BE-sayING but to-no-one you-may-be-telling
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
seauton deixon seautou deiknumi

pf 3 Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai prosenegkon to kai prospherO ho

Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
And Jesus saith unto him, See thou tell no man; but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer the gift that Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.
BE-UNDER-LEADING YOURself be-you-going-away ! dwron dOron

n_ Acc Sg n
SHOW show-you !
to-THE
SACRED-one AND priest eis eis

Prep
TOWARD-CARRY offer-you !
THE
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
prosetaxen mwushs prostassO mOusEs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
marturion autois marturion autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m
oblation WHICH approach-present
TOWARD-SETS bids autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
MOSES
INTO witness testimony
to-them
8:5 eiselqontos de
eiserchomai
de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
kafarnaoum proshlqen kapharnaoum proserchomai

ni proper vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ekatontarcos hekatontarchEs
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-INTO-COMING of-entering parakalwn parakaleO

YET OF-Him
INTO CAPERNAUM
TOWARD-CAME to-Him came-to him
HUNDRED-chief centurion
. And when Jesus was entered into Capernaum, there came unto him a centurion, beseeching him,
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-CALLING entreating
Him
8:6 kai legwn

kai
Conj
legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
beblhtai ballO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
And saying, Lord, my servant lieth at home sick of the palsy, grievously tormented.
AND
sayING
Master ! Lord !
THE
boy
OF-ME
HAS-been-CAST IN is-prostrate
THE
HOME house
paralutikos deinws basanizomenos paralutikos deinOs basanizO

a_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
paralytic
NA
DREADly dreadfully kai kai

Conj
beING-ORDEALizED being-tormented autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
8:7
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
elqwn erchomai
qerapeusw therapeuO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
And Jesus saith unto him, I will come and heal him.
AND
WH
He-IS-sayING
WH
to-him
NA NA
COMING
SHALL-BE-curING him
8:8
apokriqeis de
kai apokriqeis kai apokrinomai

Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarcos efh hekatontarchEs phEmi

n_ Nom Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
answerING
THE
AVERRed
Master ! Lord !
The centurion answered and said, Lord, I am not worthy that thou shouldest come under my roof: but speak the word only, and my servant shall be
AV
Matthew 8
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
steghn eiselqhs stegE eiserchomai

alla alla
Conj
healed.
NOT
I-AM
enough competent logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
THAT OF-ME
UNDER THE
EXCLUDer YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING but roof you-may-be-entering o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
monon eipe monon legO

Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai iaqhsetai kai iaomai

pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ONLY
to-saying word
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEALED THE
boy
WH
OF-ME
8:9 kai gar egw

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
anqrwpos eimi anthrOpos eimi

n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
upo hupo
Prep
exousian exousia
n_ Acc Sg f
tassomenos
AND also ecwn echO
for
human
AM
UNDER authority
up hupo
Prep
emauton stratiwtas kai legw emautou stratiOtEs kai legO

pf 1 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg
toutw poreuqhti houtos poreuomai

pd Dat Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
For I am a man under authority, having soldiers under me: and I say to this [man], Go, and he goeth; and to another, Come, and he cometh; and to my servant, Do this, and he doeth [it].
HAVING
UNDER MYself
WARriors soldiers ercou erchomai

AND
I-AM-sayING
to-this-one to-this-one
BE-BEING-GONE AND be-you-being-gone ! doulw doulos

n_ Dat Sg m
poreuetai poreuomai
kai allw kai allos

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
kai ercetai kai erchomai

Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
he-IS-GOING
AND
to-other to-another touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
BE-COMING be-you-coming ! kai poiei kai poieO

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
he-IS-COMING
AND
to-THE
SLAVE
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
poihson poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
OF-ME
DO do-you !
this
AND
he-IS-DOING
8:10 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eqaumasen kai eipen thaumazO kai legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
HEARing
YET THE
JESUS
He-MARVELS
AND
said
to-THE
10 When Jesus heard [it], he marvelled, and said to them that followed, Verily I say unto you, I have not found so great faith, no, not in Israel.
akolouqousin amhn legw akoloutheO amEn legO

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
par para
Prep
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg m
tosauthn pistin en tosoutos pistis en

pd Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ones-followING ones-following tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
BESIDE to-NOT-YET-ONE so-much no-one
BELIEF faith
IN
israhl euron israEl heuriskO

THE
ISRAEL
I-FOUND
8:11 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti polloi hoti polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
anatolwn kai dusmwn hxousin anatolE kai dusmE hEkO

n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
MANY
FROM risings east
AND
west
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING
kai anakliqhsontai kai anaklinO

Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
meta abraam meta abraam

Prep ni proper
kai isaak kai iakwb en kai isaak kai iakOb en

Conj ni proper Conj ni proper Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
basileia basileia
n_ Dat Sg f
11 And I say unto you, That many shall come from the east and west, and shall sit down with Abraham, and Isaac, and Jacob, in the kingdom of heaven.
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-reCLINED WITH
ABRAHAM AND
ISAAC
AND
JACOB
IN
THE
KINGdom
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
heavens
8:12 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias ekblhqhsontai basileia ekballO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
skotos skotos
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET SONS
OF-THE
KINGdom
SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-CAST INTO THE shall-be-being-cast-out klauqmos kai o klauthmos kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
DARK darkness
12 But the children of the kingdom shall be cast out into outer darkness: there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
exwteron ekei estai exOteros ekei eimi

a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
brugmos twn brugmos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
THE
OUTer
there
SHALL-BE
THE
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
odontwn odous
n_ Gen Pl m
TEETH
AV
Matthew 8
8:13 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ekatontarch upage hekatontarchEs hupagO

n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ws hOs
Adv
AND
said
THE
JESUS
to-THE
HUNDRED-chief centurion o ho
YOU-BE-UNDER-LEADING AS be-you-going-away ! pais pais

n_ Nom Sg m
episteusas genhqhtw pisteuO ginomai

vi Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai iaqh kai iaomai

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
13 And Jesus said unto the centurion, Go thy way; and as thou hast believed, [so] be it done unto thee. And his servant was healed in the selfsame hour.
t_ Nom Sg m
YOU-BELIEVE
NA
LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU let-it-be-being-become ! en en

Prep
AND
WAS-HEALED THE
boy
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
OF-him
IN
THE
HOUR
that
8:14 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
COMING
THE
JESUS
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-Peter
He-PERCEIVED THE
14 . And when Jesus was come into Peter's house, he saw his wife's mother laid, and sick of a fever.
penqeran penthera
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
beblhmenhn ballO
kai puressousan kai puressO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
mother-IN-LAW OF-him
HAVING-been-CAST AND being-prostrate ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
beING-feverish
8:15 kai hyato

kai
Conj
haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
kai afhken kai aphiEmi

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
puretos kai puretos kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
AND
He-TOUCHES
OF-THE the
HAND
OF-her
AND
FROM-LETS leaves
her
THE
fever
AND
15 And he touched her hand, and the fever left her: and she arose, and ministered unto them.
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai dihkonei kai diakoneO

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
she-WAS-ROUSED AND
THRU-SERVED to-Him waited-on him genomenhs ginomai

vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f
8:16 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
daimonizomenous pollous daimonizomai polus

vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
OF-evening YET BECOMING
THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him they-bring-to him
ones-demonizING ones-being-demonized
MANY
kai exebalen kai ekballO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pneumata logw pneuma logos

n_ Acc Pl n n_ Dat Sg m
kai pantas tous kai pas ho

Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m

16 When the even was come, they brought unto him many that were possessed with devils: and he cast out the spirits with [his] word, and healed all that were sick:
AND
He-OUT-CAST THE he-cast-out
spirits
to-saying to-word
AND
ALL
THE the-ones
EVILly illness
HAVING
eqerapeusen therapeuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-curES
8:17 opws
hopOs
Adv
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE so-that may-be-being-fulfilled legontos legO

BEING-declarED
THRU ISAIAH through elaben lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet nosous nosos

n_ Acc Pl f
17 That it might be fulfilled which was spoken by Esaias the prophet, saying, Himself took our infirmities, and bare [our] sicknesses.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
asqeneias astheneia
n_ Acc Pl f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
OF-sayING saying ebastasen bastazO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He
THE
UN-FIRMnesses OF-US infirmities
GOT took
AND
THE
DISEASES
BEARS he-bears
8:18 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
peri peri
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ekeleusen keleuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
PERCEIVING
YET THE
JESUS
THRONG
ABOUT Him
He-ORDERS
18 . Now when Jesus saw great multitudes about him, he gave commandment to depart unto the other side.
apelqein aperchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE to-be-coming-away
OTHER-SIDE
AV
Matthew 8
8:19 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
grammateus eipen grammateus legO

n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
didaskale didaskalos
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
ONE
WRITer scribe ean ean

Cond
said
to-Him
TEACHer !
19 And a certain scribe came, and said unto him, Master, I will follow thee whithersoever thou goest.
akolouqhsw akoloutheO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
aperch aperchomai
I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU you
THE-?-where IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING wherever you-may-be-coming-away o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
8:20 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
alwpekes fwleous ecousin alOpEx phOleos echO

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
THE
JACKALS
BURROWS
ARE-HAVING
20 And Jesus saith unto him, The foxes have holes, and the birds of the air [have] nests; but the Son of man hath not where to lay [his] head.
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kataskhnwseis o ouranos kataskEnOsis ho

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
flyers OF-THE flying-creatures ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
heaven
DOWN-BOOTHS roosts kefalhn klinh kephalE klinO

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou ouk anthrOpos ou

n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg
pou pou
Part Int
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
human
NOT
IS-HAVING
?-where THE where ? maqhtwn mathEtEs

n_ Gen Pl m
HEAD
NA
He-MAY-BE-deCLINING he-may-be-reclining eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8:21 eteros
heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
21 And another of his disciples said unto him, Lord, suffer me first to go and bury my father.
DIFFERENT YET OF-THE different-one epitreyon moi epitrepO egO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
LEARNers disciples apelqein aperchomai

vn 2Aor Act
OF-Him
said
to-Him
Master ! Lord ! patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
prwton prOton
Adv
kai qayai kai thaptO

Conj vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
permit permit-you !
to-ME me de de
Conj
BEFORE-most TO-BE-FROM-COMING AND first to-be-coming-away ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
TO-entomb THE
FATHER
OF-ME
8:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
akolouqei akoloutheO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai afes kai aphiEmi

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
22 But Jesus said unto him, Follow me; and let the dead bury their dead.
THE
YET JESUS
IS-sayING
to-him
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me
AND
FROM-LET leave-you !
THE
nekrous qayai nekros thaptO

a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
nekrous nekros
a_ Acc Pl m
DEAD dead-ones
TO-entomb THE
OF-selves DEAD of-themselves dead-ones autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
8:23 kai embanti

kai
Conj
embainO
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
NA
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion hkolouqhsan autw ploion akoloutheO autos

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
23 . And when he was entered into a ship, his disciples followed him.
AND
to-IN-STEPPing to-stepping-in
Him
INTO
THE
FLOATer ship
follow
to-Him him
THE

LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
8:24 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
seismos megas seismos mega

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh wste thalassa hOste

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
AND
BE-PERCEIVING QUAKing lo ! ploion ploion

n_ Nom Sg n
GREAT
BECAME occurred
IN
THE
SEA
AS-BESIDES so-that de de
Conj
24 And, behold, there arose a great tempest in the sea, insomuch that the ship was covered with the waves: but he was asleep.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kaluptesqai kaluptO
vn Pres Pas
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl n
kumatwn autos kuma autos

n_ Gen Pl n pp Nom Sg m
ekaqeuden katheudO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
FLOATer ship
TO-BE-beING-COVERED by
THE
BILLOWS
He
YET DOWN-LOUNGED drowsed swson sOzO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
25 And his disciples came to [him], and awoke him, saying, Lord, save us: we perish.
8:25 kai proselqontes hgeiran

kai
Conj
proserchomai
egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
THEY-ROUSE Him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
SAVE save-you !
apollumeqa apollumi
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
WE-ARE-beING-destroyED we-are-perishing
AV
Matthew 8
8:26 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg n
deiloi deilos
a_ Nom Pl m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
a_ Voc Pl m
tote tote
Adv
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
ANY why ?
DREADers timid
YE-ARE
FEW-BELIEVing-ones then scant-of-faith-ones ! qalassh kai egeneto thalassa kai ginomai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
26 And he saith unto them, Why are ye fearful, O ye of little faith? Then he arose, and rebuked the winds and the sea; and there was a great calm.
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
epetimhsen tois epitimaO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
anemois kai th anemos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
BEING-ROUSED
He-rebukES
to-THE the
WINDS
AND
to-THE the
SEA
AND
BECAME
galhnh galEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
CALM
GREAT
8:27 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
anqrwpoi eqaumasan legontes anthrOpos thaumazO legO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
potapos potapos
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
THE
YET humans
MARVEL
sayING
?-where-FROM IS what-manner-of upakouousin hupakouO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
this this-man
that
27 But the men marvelled, saying, What manner of man is this, that even the winds and the sea obey him!
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
anemoi anemos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
qalassa autw thalassa autos

n_ Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg m
AND also
THE
WINDS
AND
THE
SEA
to-Him him peran peran

Adv
ARE-obeyING
8:28 kai elqontos

kai
Conj
erchomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
OF-COMING
Him
INTO THE
OTHER-SIDE INTO THE
SPACE country twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE
gadarhnwn uphnthsan autw gadarEnos hupantaO autos

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
daimonizomenoi daimonizomai
ek ek
Prep
mnhmeiwn mnEmeion
n_ Gen Pl n
28 . And when he was come to the other side into the country of the Gergesenes, there met him two possessed with devils, coming out of the tombs, exceeding fierce, so that no man might pass by that way.
GADARENES
UNDER-meet meet
to-Him him
TWO
demonizING-ones ones-being-demonized mh mE
Part Neg
OUT OF-THE
memorial-vaults tombs
exercomenoi exerchomai
calepoi chalepos
a_ Nom Pl m
lian wste lian hOste

Adv Conj
iscuein ischuO
vn Pres Act
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
OUT-COMING coming-out parelqein parerchomai

vn 2Aor Act
FEROCIOUS VERY
AS-BESIDES NO so-that ekeinhs ekeinos

pd Gen Sg f
TO-BE-beING-STRONG ANY
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING THRU THE to-be-passing-by through
WAY road
that
8:29 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekraxan krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING THEY-CRY lo ! qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
sayING
ANY what ? kairou kairos

n_ Gen Sg m
to-US
AND
to-YOU
SON !
29 And, behold, they cried out, saying, What have we to do with thee, Jesus, thou Son of God? art thou come hither to torment us before the time?
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hlqes erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wde pro hOde pro

Adv Prep
basanisai basanizO
vn Aor Act
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
OF-THE
God
YOU-CAME
here
BEFORE SEASON
TO-ORDEALize US to-torment coirwn pollwn boskomenh choiros polus boskO

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
30 And there was a good way off from them an herd of many swine feeding.
8:30 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
makran ap makran apo

Adv Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
agelh agelE
n_ Nom Sg f
WAS
YET FAR
FROM them
HERD
OF-HOGS
MANY
beING-HERBED grazing ei ei
Cond
8:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
daimones parekaloun auton daimOn parakaleO autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
ekballeis ekballO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
THE
YET demons
BESIDE-CALLED entreated eis eis

Prep
Him
sayING
IF
YOU-ARE-OUT-CASTING you-are-casting-out
31 So the devils besought him, saying, If thou cast us out, suffer us to go away into the herd of swine.
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
aposteilon hmas apostellO hEmeis

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agelhn twn agelE ho

coirwn choiros
n_ Gen Pl m
US
commission dispatch-you !
US
INTO THE
HERD
OF-THE
HOGS
8:32 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois upagete autos hupagO

pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
exelqontes exerchomai
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
AND
He-said
to-them
BE-UNDER-LEADING THE be-ye-going-away !
YET OUT-COMING coming-out
THEY-FROM-CAME INTO they-came-away
32 And he said unto them, Go. And when they were come out, they went into the herd of swine: and, behold, the whole herd of swine ran violently
AV
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
coirous kai idou choiros kai idou

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wrmhsen hormaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agelh agelE
n_ Nom Sg f
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
down a steep place into the sea, and perished in the waters.
THE
HOGS
AND
BE-PERCEIVING RUSHES lo !
EVERY entire
THE
HERD
DOWN
THE
krhmnou eis krEmnos eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai apeqanon thalassa kai apothnEskO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
udasin hudOr
n_ Dat Pl n
HANG precipice
INTO THE
SEA
AND
THEY-FROM-DIED IN died
THE
waters
8:33 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
boskontes boskO
efugon pheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai apelqontes kai aperchomai

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET ones-HERBING graziers panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
FLED
AND
FROM-COMING coming-away
INTO THE
city
33 And they that kept them fled, and went their ways into the city, and told every thing, and what was befallen to the possessed of the devils.
aphggeilan apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
daimonizomenwn daimonizomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE ALL they-report
AND
THE the(p) h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
ones-demonizING ones-being-demonized exhlqen exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8:34 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
upanthsin tw hupantEsis ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING EVERY lo ! entire kai idontes kai eidO

THE
city
OUT-CAME came-out opws hopOs

Adv
INTO UNDER-meeting to-THE meeting metabh metabainO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
34 And, behold, the whole city came out to meet Jesus: and when they saw him, they besought [him] that he would depart out of their coasts.
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
parekalesan parakaleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
JESUS
AND
PERCEIVING
Him
THEY-BESIDE-CALL WHICH-how He-MAY-BE-after-STEPPING FROM they-entreat so-that he-may-be-proceeding
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THE
boundaries OF-them
AV
Matthew 9
9:1 kai embas

kai
Conj
embainO
eis eis
Prep
ploion dieperasen kai hlqen ploion diaperaO kai erchomai

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
. And he entered into a ship, and passed over, and came into his own city.
AND
IN-STEPPing stepping-in
INTO FLOATer ship
He-ferriES he-ferries-over
AND
CAME
INTO THE
OWN
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
city
9:2 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
proseferon prospherO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
paralutikon epi klinhs paralutikos epi klinE

a_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f
beblhmenon ballO
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING THEY-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him lo ! they-brought-to him o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
paralytic
ON
couch
HAVING-been-CAST prostrate tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai idwn kai eidO

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin autwn pistis autos

n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
And, behold, they brought to him a man sick of the palsy, lying on a bed: and Jesus seeing their faith said unto the sick of the palsy; Son, be of good cheer; thy sins be forgiven thee.
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
JESUS
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-them
He-said
to-THE
paralutikw qarsei paralutikos tharseO

a_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
teknon afientai teknon aphiEmi

n_ Voc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
amartiai hamartia
n_ Nom Pl f
paralytic
YOU-BE-COURAGE-ING offspring be-you-having-courage ! child ! tines tis

px Nom Pl m
ARE-beING-FROM-LET OF-YOU are-being-pardoned grammatewn eipan grammateus legO

n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
misses sins
3
9:3 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
eautois outos heautou houtos

pf 3 Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg m
And, behold, certain of the scribes said within themselves, This [man] blasphemeth.
AND
BE-PERCEIVING ANY lo ! some
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
say
IN selves among themselves
this-One this-man
blasfhmei blasphEmeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-HARM-AVERRING is-blaspheming
9:4 kai
kai
Conj
WH
eidws
NA
idwn eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
enqumhseis autwn enthumEsis autos

And Jesus knowing their thoughts said, Wherefore think ye evil in your hearts?
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
JESUS
THE
IN-FEELings sentiments kardiais umwn kardia humeis

n_ Dat Pl f
OF-them
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
enqumeisqe enthumeomai
ponhra en ponEros en
a_ Acc Pl n Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
pp 2 Gen Pl
said
THAT ANY why ? gar estin gar eimi

Conj
YE-ARE-IN-FEELING wickeds ye-are-brooding wicked(p)
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
9:5 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
eukopwteron eipein eukopOteros legO

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vn 2Aor Act
afientai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
For whether is easier, to say, [Thy] sins be forgiven thee; or to say, Arise, and walk?
ANY what ? amartiai h hamartia E

n_ Nom Pl f
for
IS
easier
TO-BE-sayING ARE-beING-FROM-LET OF-YOU are-being-pardoned kai peripatei kai peripateO

THE
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
Part
misses sins
OR
TO-BE-sayING BE-ROUSING be-you-rising ! eidhte eidO

vs Perf Act 2 Pl
AND
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
9:6 ina
hina
Conj
de de
Conj
oti exousian ecei hoti exousia echO

Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THAT YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING that
authority
IS-HAVING
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou epi ths anthrOpos epi ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
afienai aphiEmi
vn Pres Act
amartias tote legei hamartia tote legO

n_ Acc Pl f Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
But that ye may know that the Son of man hath power on earth to forgive sins, (then saith he to the sick of the palsy,) Arise, take up thy bed, and go unto thine house.
human
ON
THE
WH
LAND earth
NA
TO-FROM-LET misses to-pardon sins aron airO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
then
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
paralutikw paralutikos
a_ Dat Sg m
egeire
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
klinhn kai klinE kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
paralytic
BEING-ROUSED
LIFT pick-up-you ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
THE
couch
AND
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-you-going-away !
HOME house
OF-YOU
AV
Matthew 9
9:7 kai egerqeis

kai
Conj
egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
And he arose, and departed to his house.
AND
BEING-ROUSED
he-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
HOME house
OF-him
9:8 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
efobhqhsan phobeO
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
kai edoxasan ton kai doxazO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
PERCEIVING
YET THE
THRONGS
THEY-WERE-afraid AND
THEY-esteem they-glorify
THE
God
But when the multitudes saw [it], they marvelled, and glorified God, which had given such power unto men.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
donta didOmi
vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
exousian toiauthn tois exousia toioutos ho

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
One-GIVING one-giving
authority
such
to-THE
humans
9:9 kai paragwn

kai
Conj
paragO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeiqen eiden ekeithen eidO

anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BESIDE-LEADING passing-by
THE
JESUS
thence
He-PERCEIVED human
kaqhmenon kathEmai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
telwnion maqqaion legomenon telOnion maththaios legO

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
kai legei kai legO

. And as Jesus passed forth from thence, he saw a man, named Matthew, sitting at the receipt of custom: and he saith unto him, Follow me. And he arose, and followed him.
sittING
ON onat akolouqei akoloutheO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
THE
tribute-office
MATTHEW
beING-said
AND
He-IS-sayING
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai anastas kai anistEmi

hkolouqhsen autw akoloutheO autos

to-him
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
UP-STANDing rising
he-follows
to-Him him oikia oikia

n_ Dat Sg f
9:10 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
anakeimenou anakeimai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kai idou kai idou

AND
BECAME it-became telwnai telOnEs

n_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
UP-LYING lying-back-at-table
IN
THE
HOME house
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo ! tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
10 And it came to pass, as Jesus sat at meat in the house, behold, many publicans and sinners came and sat down with him and his disciples.
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai amartwloi elqontes kai hamartOlos erchomai

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
sunanekeinto sunanakeimai
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
MANY
tribute-collectors AND
missers sinners
COMING
TOGETHER-UP-LAID to-THE lay-back-at-the-table-together-with
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg m
JESUS
AND
to-THE
LEARNers disciples oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
9:11 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
farisaioi elegon pharisaios legO

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

dia dia
Prep
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
PHARISEES
said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-Him
THRU because-of
11 And when the Pharisees saw [it], they said unto his disciples, Why eateth your Master with publicans and sinners?
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
telwnwn telOnEs
n_ Gen Pl m
kai amartwlwn esqiei kai hamartOlos esthiO

Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
didaskalos didaskalos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANY what ? umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
WITH
THE
missers sinners
IS-EATING
THE
TEACHer
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
9:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET HEARing
He-said
NOT
need
ARE-HAVING THE
12 But when Jesus heard [that], he said unto them, They that be whole need not a physician, but they that are sick.
iscuontes ischuO
iatrou iatros
n_ Gen Sg m
all oi alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
kakws econtes kakOs echO

Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ones-beING-STRONG OF-HEALer ones-being-strong of-physician
but
THE-ones the-ones ti tis
EVILly illness
HAVING
9:13 poreuqentes de
poreuomai
de
Conj
maqete manthanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
pi Nom Sg n
BEING-GONE
YET BE-LEARNING ANY be-ye-learning ! what
IS this-is
MERCY
I-AM-WILLING AND
NOT
13 But go ye and learn what [that] meaneth, I will have mercy, and not sacrifice: for I am not come to call the righteous, but sinners to
AV
Matthew 9
qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
gar hlqon gar erchomai

kalesai dikaious alla amartwlous kaleO dikaios alla hamartOlos

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
repentance.
SACRIFICE NOT
for
I-CAME
TO-CALL
JUST-ones just-ones oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
but
missers sinners dia dia

Prep
14 . Then came to him the disciples of John, saying, Why do we and the Pharisees fast oft, but thy disciples fast not?
9:14 tote prosercontai

tote
Adv
proserchomai
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
maqhtai iwannou legontes mathEtEs iOannEs legO

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
then
ARE-TOWARD-COMING to-Him coming-to him hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-JOHN
NA
sayING
THRU because-of oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi nhsteuomen pharisaios nEsteuO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
ANY what ?
WE
AND
THE
PHARISEES
ARE-fastING
much
THE
YET
maqhtai sou mathEtEs su

n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
nhsteuousin nEsteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
NOT
ARE-fastING
9:15 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dunantai dunamai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
NO
ARE-ABLE can estin eimi
THE
SONS
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
numfwnos numphOn
n_ Gen Sg m
penqein pentheO
vn Pres Act
ef epi
Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
met autwn meta autos

Prep pp Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
15 And Jesus said unto them, Can the children of the bridechamber mourn, as long as the bridegroom is with them? but the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken from them, and then shall they fast.
OF-THE
BRIDal-chamber TO-BE-MOURNING ON
as-much-as WITH them
IS
THE
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
eleusontai erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
otan hotan
Conj
aparqh apairO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
BRIDE-groom SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS bridegroom o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them whenever may-be-being-taken-away
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai tote nhsteusousin kai tote nEsteuO

Conj Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THE
BRIDE-groom AND bridegroom de de

Conj
then
THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING
9:16 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
epiballei epiballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epiblhma epiblEma
n_ Acc Sg n
rakous rhakos
n_ Gen Sg n
agnafou agnaphos
a_ Gen Sg n
epi imatiw palaiw epi himation palaios

Prep n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE YET IS-ON-CASTING ON-CAST-effect OF-BURSTer OF-UN-CARDED ON no-one is-patching patch of-shred unshrunk airei airO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
cloak
OLD
16 No man putteth a piece of new cloth unto an old garment, for that which is put in to fill it up taketh from the garment, and the rent is made worse.
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma autou plErOma autos

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg n
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
imatiou kai ceiron himation kai cheirOn

n_ Gen Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n
scisma schisma
n_ Nom Sg n
IS-LIFTING
for
THE
FILLing
OF-it it
FROM THE
cloak
AND
WORSE
SPLIT rent
ginetai ginomai
IS-BECOMING
9:17 oude
oude
Adv
ballousin ballO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
neon neos
a_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
palaious ei palaios ei
a_ Acc Pl m Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
NOT-YET THEY-ARE-CASTING WINE neither ge ge

Part
YOUNG fresh
INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD wine-skins kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
IF
YET NO
rhgnuntai rhEgnumi
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
askoi askos
n_ Nom Pl m
oinos oinos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekceitai ekcheO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
17 Neither do men put new wine into old bottles: else the bottles break, and the wine runneth out, and the bottles perish: but they put new wine into new bottles, and both are preserved.
SURELY ARE-beING-BURST THE are-bursting oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
BOTTLES (of-skin) AND wine-skins
THE
WINE
IS-beING-OUT-POURED AND is-spilling neon neos

a_ Acc Sg m
askoi askos
n_ Nom Pl m
apolluntai apollumi
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
alla ballousin alla ballO

oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
THE
BOTTLES (of-skin) ARE-beING-destroyED but wine-skins are-perishing
THEY-ARE-CASTING WINE they-are-draining
YOUNG fresh
INTO
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
kainous kai amfoteroi sunthrountai kainos kai amphoteroi suntEreO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
BOTTLES (of-skin) NEW wine-skins
AND
both
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-KEPT are-being-preserved
AV
Matthew 9
9:18 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
autois idou autos idou

pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
eis
WH
proselqwn
these OF-Him these-things

NA
TALKING speaking
to-them
BE-PERCEIVING chief lo ! legwn legO

eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
elqwn erchomai

oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr thugatEr
n_ Nom Sg f
18 . While he spake these things unto them, behold, there came a certain ruler, and worshipped him, saying, My daughter is even now dead: but come and lay thy hand upon her, and she shall live.
ONE
COMING
he-worshipED worshiped
to-Him him
sayING
that
THE
DAUGHTER
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
arti arti
Adv
eteleuthsen alla elqwn teleutaO alla erchomai

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
epiqes epitithEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME
at-PRESENT deceasES just-now ep epi

Prep
but
COMING
BE-ON-PLACING THE be-placing-on-you !
HAND
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai zhsetai kai zaO

Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg
OF-YOU
ON
her
AND
she-SHALL-BE-LIVING
WH NA
9:19 kai egerqeis

kai
Conj
egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hkolouqei
hkolouqhsen akoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
19 And Jesus arose, and followed him, and [so did] his disciples.
AND
BEING-ROUSED
THE
JESUS
follows
to-him him
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
9:20 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
aimorroousa dwdeka eth haimorrhoeO dOdeka etos

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f ni numeral n_ Nom Pl n
proselqousa opisqen proserchomai opisthen

vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Adv
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN lo ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
BLOOD-GUSHING having-hemorrhage
TWO-TEN twelve
YEARS
BEHIND-PLACE from-behind
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kraspedou tou kraspedon ho

n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
imatiou autou himation autos

n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m
20 And, behold, a woman, which was diseased with an issue of blood twelve years, came behind [him], and touched the hem of his garment:
she-TOUCHES OF-THE touches the
HANG-FOOT tassel eauth heautou

pf 3 Dat Sg f
OF-THE
cloak
OF-Him
9:21 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
ean ean
Cond
monon aywmai monon haptO

Adv vs Aor Mid 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
imatiou himation
n_ Gen Sg n
21 For she said within herself, If I may but touch his garment, I shall be whole.
she-said
for
IN
self herself
IF-EVER ONLY
I-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING OF-THE the
cloak
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
swqhsomai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
OF-Him
I-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
9:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
strafeis strephO
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m
kai idwn kai eidO

authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
YET JESUS
BEING-TURNED
AND
PERCEIVING
her
said
qarsei tharseO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
qugater h thugatEr ho
n_ Voc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai eswqh kai sOzO

22 But Jesus turned him about, and when he saw her, he said, Daughter, be of good comfort; thy faith hath made thee whole. And the woman was made whole from that hour.
BE-COURAGE-ING DAUGHTER be-you-having-courage ! daughter ! h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
THE
BELIEF faith wras hOra

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-YOU
HAS-SAVED
YOU
AND
WAS-SAVED
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs ekeinos
pd Gen Sg f
THE
WOMAN
FROM THE
HOUR
that
9:23 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
arcontos kai archOn kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
AND
COMING
THE
JESUS
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-THE
chief
AND
23 And when Jesus came into the ruler's house, and saw the minstrels and the people making a noise,
idwn eidO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aulhtas aulEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
qoruboumenon thorubeO
PERCEIVING
THE
FLAGEOLETers AND flutists
THE
THRONG
TUMULTING making-a-tumult
AV
Matthew 9
9:24 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
anacwreite anachOreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
gar apeqanen to gar apothnEskO ho

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
korasion alla korasion alla

n_ Nom Sg n Conj
He-said
BE-YE-UP-SPACING NOT be-ye-retiring ! kai kategelwn kai katagelaO

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
for
FROM-DIED died autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
maiden
but
24 He said unto them, Give place: for the maid is not dead, but sleepeth. And they laughed him to scorn.
kaqeudei katheudO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
she-IS-DOWN-LOUNGING AND she-is-drowsing
THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him they-ridiculed him o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
9:25 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
exeblhqh ekballO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
eiselqwn eiserchomai
ekrathsen ths krateO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
when
YET WAS-OUT-CAST THE was-cast-out kai hgerqh kai egeirO

THRONG
INTO-COMING entering
He-HOLDS
OF-THE the
HAND
25 But when the people were put forth, he went in, and took her by the hand, and the maid arose.
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
korasion korasion
n_ Nom Sg n
OF-her
AND
WAS-ROUSED THE
maiden
9:26 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fhmh phEmE
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
ekeinhn ekeinos
pd Acc Sg f
26 And the fame hereof went abroad into all that land.
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
AVERment fame ekeiqen tw ekeithen ho

Adv
this
INTO WHOLE
THE
LAND
NA
that
9:27 kai paragonti

kai
Conj
paragO
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
hkolouqhsan akoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
to-BESIDE-LEADING thence to-passing-by krazontes krazO

THE
JESUS
follow
WH
to-Him him hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
TWO
27 . And when Jesus departed thence, two blind men followed him, crying, and saying, [Thou] Son of David, have mercy on us.
tufloi tuphlos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai legontes kai legO

elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
uie
NA
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
BLIND-ones CRYING blind-men
AND
sayING
BE-MERCIFUL-to US be-you-merciful ! oikian oikia

n_ Acc Sg f
SON
of-DAVID of-David kai kai

Conj
28 And when he was come into the house, the blind men came to him: and Jesus saith unto them, Believe ye that I am able to do this? They said unto him, Yea, Lord.
9:28 elqonti
erchomai
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tufloi tuphlos
a_ Nom Pl m
to-COMING
YET INTO THE
HOME house
THE
BLIND-ones AND blind-men touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pisteuete pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti dunamai hoti dunamai

poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
YE-ARE-BELIEVING that
I-AM-ABLE
this
TO-DO
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
nai kurie nai kurios

Part n_ Voc Sg m
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him
YEA yes twn ho
Master ! Lord ! ofqalmwn autwn ophthalmos autos

9:29 tote hyato

tote
Adv
haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legwn legO
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
t_ Gen Pl m
29 Then touched he their eyes, saying, According to your faith be it unto you.
then
He-TOUCHES
OF-THE the
VIEWers eyes umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-them
sayING
according-to THE
BELIEF faith
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
genhqhtw ginomai
vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
OF-YOU(p) LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU(p) of-ye let-it-be-being-become ! to-ye
9:30 kai hnewcqhsan

kai
Conj
anoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi kai enebrimhqh autois o ophthalmos kai embrimaomai autos ho

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
AND
WERE-UP-OPENED OF-them were-opened legwn legO

THE
VIEWers eyes
AND
IN-THUNDERS mutters
to-them
THE
30 And their eyes were opened; and Jesus straitly charged them, saying, See [that] no man know [it].
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
orate horaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
ginwsketw ginOskO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
JESUS
sayING
BE-SEEING be-ye-seeing ! exelqontes exerchomai

NO-YET-ONE LET-BE-KNOWING no-one let-him-be-knowing ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
9:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
diefhmisan diaphEmizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
31 But they, when they were departed, spread abroad his fame in all that country.
THE
YET OUT-COMING coming-out
THEY-THRU-AVERize Him they-blaze-abroad
IN
WHOLE
THE
LAND
AV
Matthew 9
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
that
9:32 autwn
autos
pp Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
exercomenwn exerchomai
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
32 As they went out, behold, they brought to him a dumb man possessed with a devil.
OF-them
NA
YET OUT-COMING coming-out kwfon kOphos

a_ Acc Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING THEY-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him lo ! they-bring-to him
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
daimonizomenon daimonizomai
human
MUTE deaf-mute
demonizING-one being-demonized tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
9:33 kai ekblhqentos

kai
Conj
ekballO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
daimoniou elalhsen o daimonion laleO ho

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
kwfos kOphos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
OF-BEING-OUT-CAST THE of-being-cast-out ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
demon
TALKS speaks oudepote oudepote

Adv
THE
MUTE AND deaf-mute-man outws en houtOs en

Adv Prep
33 And when the devil was cast out, the dumb spake: and the multitudes marvelled, saying, It was never so seen in Israel.
eqaumasan oi thaumazO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
legontes legO
efanh phainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
MARVEL
THE
THRONGS
sayING
NOT-YET-?-when APPEARed never t-appeared
thus
IN
THE
israhl israEl
ni proper
ISRAEL
WH NA
9:34
oi
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
farisaioi elegon pharisaios legO

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
arconti twn archOn ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n
daimoniwn daimonion
n_ Gen Pl n
34 But the Pharisees said, He casteth out devils through the prince of the devils.
THE
YET PHARISEES
WH
said
NA
IN
THE
chief
OF-THE
demons
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
He-IS-OUT-CASTING THE he-is-casting-out
demons
9:35 kai perihgen

kai
Conj
periagO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
poleis pasas polis pas

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
ABOUT-LED went-about en en
Prep
THE
JESUS
THE
cities
ALL
AND
THE
VILLAGES
didaskwn didaskO
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai khrusswn kai kErussO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
35 . And Jesus went about all the cities and villages, teaching in their synagogues, and preaching the gospel of the kingdom, and healing every sickness and every disease among the people.
TEACHING
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them synagogues pasan pas

a_ Acc Sg f
AND
PROCLAIMING heralding kai pasan kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
THE
WELL-MESSAGE
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias kai qerapeuwn basileia kai therapeuO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
noson nosos
n_ Acc Sg f
malakian malakia
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
KINGdom
AND
curING
EVERY
DISEASE
AND
EVERY
SOFTness weakness autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
9:36 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous esplagcnisqh ochlos splagchnizomai

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
oti hsan hoti eimi

Conj vi impf vxx 3 Pl
PERCEIVING
YET THE
THRONGS
He-IS-compassionatED ABOUT them he-is-moved-with-compassion econta echO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl n
that
THEY-WERE
eskulmenoi skullO
kai errimmenoi kai rhiptO

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
wsei probata mh hOsei probaton mE

Adv n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg
poimena poimEn
n_ Acc Sg m
36 But when he saw the multitudes, he was moved with compassion on them, because they fainted, and were scattered abroad, as sheep having no shepherd.
HAVING-been-FLAYED AND having-been-bothered
HAVING-been-TOSSED AS-IF
sheep sheep(p) o ho
NO
HAVING
SHEPHERD
9:37 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

men men
Part
qerismos polus therismos polus

t_ Nom Sg m
then
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THE
INDEED harvest
much vast
37 Then saith he unto his disciples, The harvest truly [is] plenteous, but the labourers [are] few;
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ergatai oligoi ergatEs oligos

n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET ACTers workers
FEW
AV
9:38 dehqhte
deomai
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qerismou opws therismos hopOs

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
38 Pray ye therefore the Lord of the harvest, that he will send forth labourers into his harvest.
BE-BINDING THEN OF-THE be-ye-beseeching ! the ekbalh ekballO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
Master Lord ton ho
OF-THE
harvest
WHICH-how so-that
ergatas eis ergatEs eis

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
qerismon autou therismos autos

t_ Acc Sg m
He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING ACTers he-should-be-ejecting workers
INTO THE
harvest
OF-Him
AV
Matthew 10
10:1 kai proskalesamenos tous

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
vp Aor midD Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka maqhtas autou dOdeka mathEtEs autos

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
He-GIVES
to-them them
exousian pneumatwn akaqartwn wste exousia pneuma akathartos hOste

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Conj
ekballein ekballO
vn Pres Act
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
kai qerapeuein kai therapeuO

Conj vn Pres Act
. And when he had called unto [him] his twelve disciples, he gave them power [against] unclean spirits, to cast them out, and to heal all manner of sickness and all manner of disease.
authority
OF-spirits
UN-clean unclean
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-OUT-CASTING them so-as to-be-casting-out
AND
TO-BE-curING
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
noson nosos
n_ Acc Sg f
kai pasan kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
malakian malakia
n_ Acc Sg f
EVERY
DISEASE
AND
EVERY
SOFTness weakness onomata estin onoma eimi

n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
10:2 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
dwdeka apostolwn ta dOdeka apostolos ho

ni numeral n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
YET TWO-TEN twelve
commissioners apostles
THE
NAMES
IS
these
BEFORE-most first kai kai

Conj
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai andreas o kai andreas ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos autou adelphos autos

n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Sg m
Now the names of the twelve apostles are these; The first, Simon, who is called Peter, and Andrew his brother; James [the son] of Zebedee, and John his brother;
SIMON
THE
beING-said one-being-said tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ANDREW
THE
brother
OF-him
AND
iakwbos o iakObos ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
zebedaiou kai iwannhs o zebedaios kai iOannEs ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos autou adelphos autos

JACOBUS James
THE
OF-THE
ZEBEDEE
AND
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-him
10:3 filippos kai barqolomaios qwmas

philippos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai
Conj
bartholomaios
n_ Nom Sg m
thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
kai maqqaios o kai maththaios ho

telwnhs telOnEs
n_ Nom Sg m
iakwbos iakObos
n_ Nom Sg m
Philip
AND
Bartholomew
THOMAS
AND
MATTHEW
THE
tribute-collector JACOBUS James
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
alfaiou kai qaddaios halphaios kai thaddaios

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
Philip, and Bartholomew; Thomas, and Matthew the publican; James [the son] of Alphaeus, and Lebbaeus, whose surname was Thaddaeus;
THE
OF-THE
ALPHEUS
AND
THADDEUS
10:4 simwn
simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kananaios kai ioudas kananaios kai ioudas

n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iskariwths o iskariOthEs ho
kai kai
Conj
Simon the Canaanite, and Judas Iscariot, who also betrayed him.
SIMON
THE
CANANITE
AND
JUDAS
THE
ISCARIOT
THE-one the-one
AND also
paradous paradidOmi
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-GIVING betraying
Him
10:5 toutous tous

houtos
pd Acc Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka apesteilen o dOdeka apostellO ho

ni numeral vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
paraggeilas paraggellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
these
THE
TWO-TEN twelve odon hodos

n_ Acc Sg f
commissions
THE
JESUS
charging
to-them them polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
. These twelve Jesus sent forth, and commanded them, saying, Go not into the way of the Gentiles, and into [any] city of the Samaritans enter ye not:
legwn legO
eis eis
Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
apelqhte aperchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
sayING
INTO WAY road
OF-NATIONS NO
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING AND ye-may-be-passing-forth
INTO city
samareitwn mh samaritEs mE
n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg
eiselqhte eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-SAMARItans
NO
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING ye-may-be-entering de de
Conj
10:6 poreuesqe
poreuomai
mallon pros mallon pros

Adv Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
probata ta probaton ho
n_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n
apolwlota apollumi
vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl n
But go rather to the lost sheep of the house of Israel.
BE-YE-GOING be-ye-going ! oikou oikos

n_ Gen Sg m
YET RATHER
TOWARD THE
sheep sheep(p)
THE
HAVING-been-destroyED having-been-lost
israhl israEl
ni proper
OF-HOME of-house
of-ISRAEL of-Israel
AV
Matthew 10
10:7 poreuomenoi
poreuomai
de de
Conj
khrussete kErussO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
legontes legO
oti hggiken hoti eggizO

Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia basileia
n_ Nom Sg f
And as ye go, preach, saying, The kingdom of heaven is at hand.
GOING
YET BE-PROCLAIMING sayING be-ye-heralding !
that
HAS-NEARED THE has-drawn-near
KINGdom
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
heavens
10:8 asqenountas
astheneO
qerapeuete nekrous egeirete therapeuO nekros egeirO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
leprous kaqarizete daimonia lepros katharizO daimonion

a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl n
ones-beING-UN-FIRM BE-curING ones-being-infirm be-ye-curing ! ekballete ekballO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
DEAD-ones dead-ones
BE-ROUSING be-ye-rousing !
lepers
BE-cleansING be-ye-cleansing !
demons
Heal the sick, cleanse the lepers, raise the dead, cast out devils: freely ye have received, freely give.
dwrean elabete dOrean lambanO

Adv vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
dwrean dote dOrean didOmi

Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
BE-OUT-CASTING gratuitously be-ye-casting-out !
YE-GOT
gratuitously
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving ! mhde mEde

Conj
10:9 mh
mE
Part Neg
kthshsqe ktaomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
cruson chrusos
n_ Acc Sg m
arguron mhde arguros mEde

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
calkon chalkos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
Provide neither gold, nor silver, nor brass in your purses,
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-ACQUIRING GOLD
NO-YET SILVER nor-yet
NO-YET COPPER nor-yet
INTO THE
zwnas umwn zOnE humeis

n_ Acc Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
GIRDles
OF-YOU(p) of-ye phran pEra

n_ Acc Sg f
10:10 mh
mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
mhde mEde
Conj
duo duo
ni numeral
citwnas mhde chitOn mEde

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
upodhmata mhde hupodEma mEde

n_ Acc Pl n Conj
NO
BAG (beggar's) INTO WAY beggar's-bag road gar o gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
NO-YET TWO nor-yet
TUNICS
NO-YET sandals nor-yet autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
NO-YET nor-yet
10 Nor scrip for [your] journey, neither two coats, neither shoes, nor yet staves: for the workman is worthy of his meat.
rabdon axios rhabdos axios

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg m
ergaths ths ergatEs ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
ROD club
WORTHY
for
THE
ACTer worker polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
NURTURE OF-him nourishment eiselqhte eiserchomai

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
10:11 eis
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
d de
Conj
an an
Part
h E
Part
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
exetasate exetazO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
INTO WHICH
YET EVER city
OR
VILLAGE
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING OUT-INTERROGATE ANY ye-may-be-entering inquire-ye ! who ews an heOs an

Conj Part
11 And into whatsoever city or town ye shall enter, enquire who in it is worthy; and there abide till ye go thence.
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kakei kakei
Adv Con
meinate menO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
exelqhte exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
IN
her
WORTHY
IS
AND-there REMAIN remain-ye ! de de

Conj
TILL
EVER YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING ye-may-be-coming-out

12 And when ye come into an house, salute it.
10:12 eisercomenoi
eiserchomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
aspasasqe authn aspazomai autos

vm Aor midD 2 Pl pp Acc Sg f
YET INTO THE
HOME house oikia oikia
greet salute-ye ! axia axios

a_ Nom Sg f
her
10:13 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
men men
Part
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elqatw erchomai
vm Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
IF-EVER INDEED MAY-BE
THE
HOME house h eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
WORTHY
LET-BE-COMING THE let-be-coming ! h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
PEACE
WH
13 And if the house be worthy, let your peace come upon it: but if it be not worthy, let your peace return to you.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ep epi
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
axia axios
a_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ef
OF-YOU(p) ON of-ye
NA
her
IF-EVER YET NO
MAY-BE she-may-be
WORTHY
THE
PEACE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
epistrafhtw epistrephO
vm 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
TOWARD
YOU(p) ye
LET-BE-BEING-ON-TURNED let-her-be-being-turned-back ! an an
Part
10:14 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mhde mEde
Conj
akoush akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
WHO
EVER NO
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) ye
NO-YET SHOULD-BE-HEARING THE nor-yet
14 And whosoever shall not receive you, nor hear your words, when ye depart out of that house or city, shake off the dust of your feet.
AV
Matthew 10
logous umwn logos humeis

exw exO
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
oikias oikia
n_ Gen Sg f
h E
Part
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews ekeinhs polis ekeinos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
sayings words
OF-YOU(p) OUT-COMING of-ye coming-out
OUT OF-THE outside podwn pous

n_ Gen Pl m
HOME house umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
OR
OF-THE
city
that
ektinaxate ton ektinassO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
koniorton twn koniortos ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
OUT-QUIVER shake-off-ye !
THE
DUST
OF-THE
FEET
OF-YOU(p) of-ye gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
10:15 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anektoteron estai anektos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
sodomwn kai gomorrwn sodoma kai gomorrha

n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl n
AMEN verily en en
Prep
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye th ho
more-tolerable
it-SHALL-BE
to-LAND
OF-SODOM
AND
OF-GOMORRAH
15 Verily I say unto you, It shall be more tolerable for the land of Sodom and Gomorrha in the day of judgment, than for that city.
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
krisews h krisis E
n_ Gen Sg f Part
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
t_ Dat Sg f
IN
DAY
OF-JUDGing OR to-THE than egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
city
that
10:16 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ws probata en hOs probaton en

Adv n_ Nom Pl n Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
lukwn lukos
n_ Gen Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! ginesqe ginomai

AM-commissionING YOU(p) am-dispatching ye fronimoi ws oi phronimos hOs ho

a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Pl m
AS
sheep sheep(p)
IN
MIDst
OF-WOLVES
16 . Behold, I send you forth as sheep in the midst of wolves: be ye therefore wise as serpents, and harmless as doves.
oun oun
Conj
ofeis ophis
n_ Nom Pl m
kai akeraioi ws ai kai akeraios hOs ho

Conj a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Nom Pl f
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! peristerai peristera

n_ Nom Pl f
THEN DISPOSED prudent
AS
THE
serpents
AND
UN-blendED artless
AS
THE
DOVES
10:17 prosecete de
prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn paradwsousin anthrOpos paradidOmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
gar umas gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
BE-heedING be-ye-heeding ! sunedria kai en sunedrion kai en

n_ Acc Pl n Conj
YET FROM THE
humans
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING for they-shall-be-giving-up autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
YOU(p) ye
INTO
17 But beware of men: for they will deliver you up to the councils, and they will scourge you in their synagogues;
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
mastigwsousin mastigoO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
Prep
Sanhedrins
AND
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS OF-them synagogues
THEY-SHALL-BE-scourgING YOU(p) ye eneken heneken

Adv
10:18 kai epi hgemonas de

kai
Conj
epi
Prep
hEgemOn
n_ Acc Pl m
de
Conj
kai basileis acqhsesqe kai basileus agO

Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
AND also
ON
LEADers governors
YET AND
KINGS
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-LED on-account-of OF-ME ye-shall-be-being-led me
INTO
18 And ye shall be brought before governors and kings for my sake, for a testimony against them and the Gentiles.
marturion autois kai tois marturion autos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin ethnos
n_ Dat Pl n
witness testimony
to-them
AND
to-THE
NATIONS
10:19 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
paradwsin paradidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
pws h pOs E
Adv Int Part
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YOU(p) whenever they-may-be-giving-up ye ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious how ye-should-be-worrying how ? en en

Prep
OR
19 But when they deliver you up, take no thought how or what ye shall speak: for it shall be given you in that same hour what ye shall speak.
lalhshte laleO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
ANY what ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
YE-SHOULD-BE-TALKING SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN for ye-should-be-speaking it-shall-be-being-given lalhshte laleO

vs Aor Act 2 Pl
to-YOU(p) ye
IN
that
THE
HOUR
ANY what
YE-SHOULD-BE-TALKING ye-should-be-speaking gar umeis gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
10:20 ou
ou
Part Neg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
lalountes laleO
alla to alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NOT
for
YOU(p) ye
20 For it is not ye that speak, but the Spirit of your Father which speaketh in you.
ARE
THE
ones-TALKING ones-speaking
but
THE
spirit
OF-THE
AV
Matthew 10
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
laloun laleO
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
One-TALKING one-speaking de de
Conj
IN
YOU(p) ye qanaton kai pathr thanatos kai patEr

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
10:21 paradwsei
paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
adelfos adelfon eis adelphos adelphos eis

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep
teknon kai teknon kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YET brother shall-be-giving-up epanasthsontai epanistEmi

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
brother
INTO DEATH
AND
FATHER
offspring child
AND
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
epi goneis epi goneus

Prep n_ Acc Pl m
kai qanatwsousin kai thanatoO

autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
21 And the brother shall deliver up the brother to death, and the father the child: and the children shall rise up against [their] parents, and cause them to be put to death.
SHALL-BE-ON-UP-STANDING offsprings shall-be-rising-up children
ON
parents
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-(causing-to)-DIE them shall-be-putting-to-death to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
10:22 kai esesqe

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
misoumenoi miseO
vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
upo pantwn dia hupo pas dia

Prep a_ Gen Pl m Prep
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
AND
YE-SHALL-BE beING-HATED
by
ALL
THRU THE because-of outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
NAME
OF-ME
22 And ye shall be hated of all [men] for my name's sake: but he that endureth to the end shall be saved.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
upomeinas hupomenO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE-one the-one
YET UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one enduring consummation this-one de de

Conj
SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
10:23 otan
hotan
Conj
diwkwsin diOkO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
feugete pheugO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-CHASING YOU(p) whenever they-may-be-persecuting ye thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
IN
THE
city
this
BE-FLEEING be-ye-fleeing ! tas ho
INTO
eteran heteros
a_ Acc Sg f
amhn gar legw amEn gar legO

Hebrew Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
teleshte teleO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
23 But when they persecute you in this city, flee ye into another: for verily I say unto you, Ye shall not have gone over the cities of Israel, till the Son of man be come.
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
DIFFERENT AMEN different-one verily

WH
for
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
NA
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-FINISHING THE
poleis polis
n_ Acc Pl f
tou
NA
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl ews israEl heOs

ni proper Conj
an an
Part
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
cities
OF-THE
ISRAEL
TILL
EVER
MAY-BE-COMING THE
SON
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
human
10:24 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
maqhths uper ton mathEtEs huper ho

n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
didaskalon oude didaskalos oude

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
uper huper
Prep
24 The disciple is not above [his] master, nor the servant above his lord.
NOT
IS
LEARNer disciple autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OVER above
THE
TEACHer
NOT-YET SLAVE neither
OVER above
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
master lord
OF-him
10:25 arketon tw
arketos
a_ Nom Sg n
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
maqhth ina mathEtEs hina

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ws o hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
didaskalos autou didaskalos autos

SUFFICient
to-THE
LEARNer disciple ws o hOs ho

Adv
THAT he-MAY-BE-BECOMING AS
THE
TEACHer
OF-him
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikodespothn oikodespotEs
n_ Acc Sg m
25 It is enough for the disciple that he be as his master, and the servant as his lord. If they have called the master of the house Beelzebub, how much more [shall they call] them of his household?
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
SLAVE
AS
THE
master lord
OF-him
IF
THE
HOME-OWNER householder autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
beelzeboul epekalesan posw beelzeboul epikaleO posos

ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Pl pq Dat Sg n
mallon tous mallon ho

Adv t_ Acc Pl m
oikiakous oikiakos
n_ Acc Pl m
BEELZEBOUL
THEY-ON-CALL they-surname oun oun

Conj
to-how-much RATHER how-much
THE
HOME-ics OF-him ones-of-the-household gar estin gar eimi

10:26 mh
mE
Part Neg
fobhqhte phobeO
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
autous ouden autos oudeis

pp Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
kekalummenon kaluptO
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n
NO
THEN YE-BE-BEING-afraid-of them be-ye-being-afraid-of !
NOT-YET-ONE for nothing
IS
HAVING-been-COVERED
26 Fear them not therefore: for there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; and hid, that shall not be known.
AV
Matthew 10
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
apokalufqhsetai apokaluptO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai krupton o kai kruptos hos

Conj a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
gnwsqhsetai ginOskO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
WHICH
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED AND shall-be-being-revealed legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
HIDDen
WHICH
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN
10:27 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
skotia eipate skotia legO

n_ Dat Sg f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fwti phOs
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
WHICH
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IN
THE
DARKness
say say-ye !
IN
THE
LIGHT
AND
27 What I tell you in darkness, [that] speak ye in light: and what ye hear in the ear, [that] preach ye upon the housetops.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ous ous
n_ Acc Sg n
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
khruxate epi twn kErussO epi ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl n
dwmatwn dOma
n_ Gen Pl n
WHICH
INTO THE
WH
EAR
YE-ARE-HEARING PROCLAIM herald-ye !

NA
ON
THE
WH
housetops
10:28 kai mh
kai
Conj
fobhqhte
mE
Part Neg
fobeisqe phobeO
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apokteinontwn
AND
NA
NO
BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing ! to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
FROM THE
28 And fear not them which kill the body, but are not able to kill the soul: but rather fear him which is able to destroy both soul and body in hell.
apoktennontwn apokteinO
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
dunamenwn dunamai
ones-FROM-KILLING ones-killing
THE
BODY
THE
YET soul
NO
OF-beING-ABLE being-able kai yuchn kai psuchE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
apokteinai fobeisqe apokteinO phobeO

vn Aor Act vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
de de
Conj
mallon ton mallon ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg m
dunamenon dunamai
kai kai
Conj
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill swma sOma

n_ Acc Sg n
BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing !
YET RATHER
THE
One-beING-ABLE one-being-able
AND
soul
AND
apolesai en apollumi en
vn Aor Act Prep
geennh geenna
n_ Dat Sg f
BODY
TO-destroy
IN
GEHENNA
10:29 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
duo duo
ni numeral
strouqia assariou strouthion assarion

n_ Nom Pl n n_ Gen Sg n
pwleitai pOleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai en kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ex ek
Prep
autwn ou autos ou
pp Gen Pl n Part Neg
NOT(emph.) TWO not(emph.) ? peseitai piptO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
PASSERINES sparrows ghn gE
OF-ASSARION IS-beING-SOLD AND of-penny aneu aneu

Prep
ONE
OUT OF-them
NOT
29 Are not two sparrows sold for a farthing? and one of them shall not fall on the ground without your Father.
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
n_ Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE-FALLING ON
THE
LAND earth
WITHOUT OF-THE the
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) of-ye hriqmhmenai arithmeO

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f
30 But the very hairs of your head are all numbered.
10:30 umwn
humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
de de
Conj
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
trices ths thrix ho

n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f
kefalhs pasai kephalE pas

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl f
OF-YOU(p) YET AND of-ye also eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE
HAIRS
OF-THE
HEAD
ALL
HAVING-been-NUMBERED
ARE
10:31 mh
mE
Part Neg
oun oun
Conj
fobeisqe phobeO
pollwn strouqiwn diaferete polus strouthion diapherO

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
NO
THEN BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing ! oun oun

Conj
OF-MANY
PASSERINES sparrows en en
Prep
ARE-THRU-CARRYING YOU(p) are-of-more-consequence ye emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
31 Fear ye not therefore, ye are of more value than many sparrows.
10:32 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
omologhsei homologeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
EVERY every-one omologhsw homologeO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
THEN WHO-ANY who-any kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
SHALL-BE-avowING IN
ME
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
humans
32 Whosoever therefore shall confess me before men, him will I confess also before my Father which is in heaven.
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
Prep
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-avowING AND-I also-I en en

Prep
WH
IN
him
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the
FATHER
OF-ME
THE
tois
NA
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
IN
THE
heavens
AV
Matthew 10
10:33 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
WH
de
NA
d de
Conj
NA
an an
Part
arnhshtai arneomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WHO-ANY who-any
YET EVER
SHOULD-BE-disownING ME
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
33 But whosoever shall deny me before men, him will I also deny before my Father which is in heaven.
anqrwpwn arnhsomai anthrOpos arneomai

n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut midD 1 Sg
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Prep
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
humans
SHALL-BE-disownING AND-I also-I en en

Prep
WH
him
FATHER
OF-ME
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tois
NA
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
IN
THE
heavens
10:34 mh
mE
Part Neg
nomishte nomizO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
oti hlqon hoti erchomai

balein ballO
vn 2Aor Act
eirhnhn epi thn eirEnE epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
34 Think not that I am come to send peace on earth: I came not to send peace, but a sword.
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-inferrING that
I-CAME
TO-BE-CASTING PEACE
ON
THE
LAND earth
ouk ou
Part Neg
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
balein ballO
vn 2Aor Act
eirhnhn alla macairan eirEnE alla machaira

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f
NOT
I-CAME
TO-BE-CASTING PEACE
but
sword
10:35 hlqon
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
gar dicasai gar dichazO

Conj vn Aor Act
anqrwpon kata tou anthrOpos kata ho

n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai qugatera kai thugatEr

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
I-CAME
for
TO-TWO-ize human to-pit
DOWN against
OF-THE the
FATHER
OF-him
AND
DAUGHTER
35 For I am come to set a man at variance against his father, and the daughter against her mother, and the daughter in law against her mother in law.
kata ths kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
mhtros auths mEtEr autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg f
kai numfhn kai numphE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
kata ths kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
penqeras penthera
n_ Gen Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
DOWN against
OF-THE the
MOTHER
OF-her
AND
BRIDE DOWN daughter-in-law against
OF-THE the
mother-IN-LAW OF-her
10:36 kai ecqroi

kai
Conj
echthros
a_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou oi anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
oikiakoi oikiakos
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
36 And a man's foes [shall be] they of his own household.
AND
enemies
OF-THE
human
THE
HOME-ics OF-him ones-of-the-household ouk ou

Part Neg
10:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filwn phileO
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
mhtera uper eme mEtEr huper egO

n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
THE
one-beING-FOND one-being-fond-of kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
FATHER
OR
MOTHER
OVER above
ME
NOT
IS
OF-ME
37 He that loveth father or mother more than me is not worthy of me: and he that loveth son or daughter more than me is not worthy of me.
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
filwn phileO
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
qugatera uper eme thugatEr huper egO

n_ Acc Sg f Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
WORTHY
AND
THE
one-beING-FOND one-being-fond-of axios axios

a_ Nom Sg m
SON
OR
DAUGHTER
OVER above
ME
NOT
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
IS
OF-ME
WORTHY
10:38 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
stauron autou stauros autos

kai akolouqei opisw kai akoloutheO opisO

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv
38 And he that taketh not his cross, and followeth after me, is not worthy of me.
AND
WHO
NOT
IS-GETTING-UP THE is-taking mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
pale cross
OF-him
AND
IS-followING
BEHIND after
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
ME
NOT
IS
OF-ME
WORTHY
10:39 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eurwn heuriskO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apolesei apollumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
39 He that findeth his life shall lose it: and he that loseth his life for my sake shall find it.
THE
one-FINDING one-finding apolesas apollumi

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
soul
OF-him
SHALL-BE-destroyING her
AND
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eneken heneken
Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
THE
one-destroying one-destroying
THE
soul
OF-him
on-account-of OF-ME me
SHALL-BE-FINDING her
AV
10:40 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
decomenos dechomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
decetai dechomai
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
one-RECEIVING one-receiving decetai dechomai

YOU(p) ye ton ho
ME
IS-RECEIVING
AND
THE-one the-one
ME
40 He that receiveth you receiveth me, and he that receiveth me receiveth him that sent me.
decomenos dechomai
aposteilanta me apostellO egO

vp Aor Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
t_ Acc Sg m
RECEIVING
IS-RECEIVING
THE-One the-one
commissioning
ME
10:41 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
decomenos dechomai
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
one-RECEIVING one-receiving lhmyetai lambanO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
BEFORE-AVERer INTO NAME prophet kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
OF-BEFORE-AVERer HIRE of-prophet wages dikaion eis dikaios eis

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
decomenos dechomai
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
41 He that receiveth a prophet in the name of a prophet shall receive a prophet's reward; and he that receiveth a righteous man in the name of a righteous man shall receive a righteous man's reward.
OF-BEFORE-AVERer SHALL-BE-GETTING AND of-prophet shall-be-obtaining dikaiou dikaios

a_ Gen Sg m
THE
one-RECEIVING one-receiving
JUST-one just-man
INTO NAME
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
dikaiou dikaios
a_ Gen Sg m
lhmyetai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
OF-JUST-one HIRE of-just-man wages
OF-JUST-one SHALL-BE-GETTING of-just-man shall-be-obtaining an an

Part
10:42 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
potish potizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mikrwn mikros
a_ Gen Pl m
toutwn pothrion houtos potErion

pd Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
AND
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-DRINKizING ONE should-be-giving-to-drink onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE
LITTLE-ones these little-ones umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
DRINK-cup cup
yucrou psuchros
a_ Gen Sg n
monon eis monon eis

Adv Prep
maqhtou amhn legw mathEtEs amEn legO

n_ Gen Sg m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
42 And whosoever shall give to drink unto one of these little ones a cup of cold [water] only in the name of a disciple, verily I say unto you, he shall in no wise lose his reward.
OF-COOL ONLY of-cool-water apolesh apollumi

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO NAME
OF-LEARNer of-disciple misqon misthos

n_ Acc Sg m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
NO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE he-should-be-losing
HIRE wages
OF-him
AV
Matthew 11
11:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
diatasswn diatassO
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
AND
it-BECAME
when
FINISHES
THE
JESUS
prescribING
to-THE
TWO-TEN twelve en en
Prep

metebh metabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekeiqen tou ekeithen ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
kai khrussein kai kErussO

Conj vn Pres Act
. And it came to pass, when Jesus had made an end of commanding his twelve disciples, he departed thence to teach and to preach in their cities.
LEARNers disciples tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
OF-Him
He-after-STEPPed thence he-proceeded
OF-THE
TO-BE-TEACHING AND
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING IN to-be-heralding
polesin autwn polis autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Pl m
THE
cities
OF-them
11:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
iwannhs akousas iOannEs akouO

n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
desmwthriw ta desmOtErion ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
Now when John had heard in the prison the works of Christ, he sent two of his disciples,
THE
YET JOHN
HEARing
IN
THE
BIND-place prison
THE
ACTS works
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou pemyas christos pempO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
SENDing
THRU THE through ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-him
11:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ercomenos erchomai
h E
Part
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
And said unto him, Art thou he that should come, or do we look for another?
said
to-Him
YOU
ARE
THE
One-COMING one-coming
OR
DIFFERENT different-one
prosdokwmen prosdokaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING we-may-be-hoping
11:4 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois poreuqentes autos poreuomai

pp Dat Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m
apaggeilate apaggellO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
to-them
BEING-GONE
FROM-MESSAGE report-ye !
Jesus answered and said unto them, Go and shew John again those things which ye do hear and see:
iwannh a iOannEs hos

n_ Dat Sg m pr Acc Pl n
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai blepete kai blepO

to-JOHN
WHICH
YE-ARE-HEARING AND
YE-ARE-lookING are-observing peripatousin peripateO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
11:5 tufloi
tuphlos
a_ Nom Pl m
anablepousin kai cwloi anablepO kai chOlos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
leproi lepros
a_ Nom Pl m
kaqarizontai katharizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
BLIND-ones ARE-UP-lookING blind-ones are-receiving-sight kwfoi kOphos

a_ Nom Pl m
AND
LAME-ones lame-ones
ARE-ABOUT-TREADING lepers are-walking
ARE-beING-cleansED AND
akouousin kai nekroi akouO kai nekros

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m
egeirontai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai ptwcoi euaggelizontai kai ptOchos euaggelizO

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
The blind receive their sight, and the lame walk, the lepers are cleansed, and the deaf hear, the dead are raised up, and the poor have the gospel preached to them.
MUTE-ones ARE-HEARING deaf-mutes
AND
DEAD-ones ARE-beING-ROUSED AND dead-ones os hos

pr Nom Sg m
POOR-ones poor-ones
ARE-beING-WELL-MESSAGizED are-being-brought-the-well-message en en
Prep
11:6 kai makarios estin

kai
Conj
makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
skandalisqh skandalizO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
And blessed is [he], whosoever shall not be offended in me.
AND
HAPPY
he-IS
WHO
IF-EVER NO
MAY-BE-BEING-SNARED IN
ME
11:7 toutwn de
houtos
pd Gen Pl m
de
Conj
poreuomenwn poreuomai
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
OF-these
YET GOING
begins
THE
JESUS
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
oclois peri ochlos peri

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
iwannou ti iOannEs tis

n_ Gen Sg m pi Acc Sg n
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg f
qeasasqai kalamon theaomai kalamos

vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg m
. And as they departed, Jesus began to say unto the multitudes concerning John, What went ye out into the wilderness to see? A reed shaken with the wind?
THRONGS ABOUT JOHN
ANY what ?
YE-OUT-COME INTO THE ye-come-out
DESOLATE TO-gaze wilderness to-gaze-at
REED
upo anemou hupo anemos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
saleuomenon saleuO
by
WIND
beING-SHAKEN
AV
Matthew 11
11:8 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
anqrwpon en anthrOpos en
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
malakois malakos
a_ Dat Pl n
but
ANY what ?
YE-OUT-COME TO-BE-PERCEIVING human ye-come-out idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
IN
SOFTnesses soft-garments forountes phoreO

But what went ye out for to see? A man clothed in soft raiment? behold, they that wear soft [clothing] are in kings'houses.
hmfiesmenon amphiennumi
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
malaka malakos
a_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
HAVING-been-ENVELOPED-IN BE-PERCEIVING THE-ones having-been-garbed lo ! the-ones oikois oikos

n_ Dat Pl m
THE
SOFTnesses CARRYING soft-garments wearing
IN
THE
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
basilewn basileus
n_ Gen Pl m
NA
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
HOMES houses
OF-THE
KINGS
ARE
WH WH NA NA
11:9 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
profhthn idein
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
nai nai
Part
But what went ye out for to see? A prophet? yea, I say unto you, and more than a prophet.
but
ANY what ? umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-OUT-COME ye-come-out kai perissoteron profhtou kai perissos prophEtEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg n Cmp n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-PERCEIVING BEFORE-AVERer prophet
YEA yes
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
more-excessive exceedingly-more peri peri

Prep
OF-BEFORE-AVERer of-prophet gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
11:10 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
this-one this-one apostellw apostellO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
IS
ABOUT WHOM
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! pro pro

Prep
10 For this is [he], of whom it is written, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, which shall prepare thy way before thee.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
proswpou sou prosOpon su

n_ Gen Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
AM-commissionING THE am-dispatching kataskeuasei kataskeuazO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
MESSENGER OF-ME
BEFORE face
OF-YOU
WHO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
SHALL-BE-constructING THE
WAY road umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-YOU
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU in-front-of you en en

Prep
11:11 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eghgertai egeirO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gennhtois gunaikwn gennEtos gunE

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl f
AMEN verily meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
HAS-been-ROUSED IN ones-generated among ones-born de de

Conj
OF-WOMEN
iwannou tou iOannEs ho

baptistou o baptistEs ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
mikroteros en mikros en
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
basileia basileia
n_ Dat Sg f
11 Verily I say unto you, Among them that are born of women there hath not risen a greater than John the Baptist: notwithstanding he that is least in the kingdom of heaven is greater than he.
GREATER
OF-JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
YET LITTLER smaller-one
IN
THE
KINGdom
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn meizwn ouranos mega

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE
heavens
GREATER
OF-him
IS
11:12 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn iwannou tou hEmera iOannEs ho

n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
baptistou ews arti baptistEs heOs arti

n_ Gen Sg m Conj Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
FROM YET THE
DAYS
OF-JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist kai biastai kai biastEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
TILL
at-PRESENT THE
12 And from the Baptist kingdom of violence, and by force.
the days of John until now the heaven suffereth the violent take it

ouranwn biazetai ouranos biazO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
arpazousin harpazO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
IS-beING-FORCED AND is-being-violently-forced profhtai prophEtEs

n_ Nom Pl m
FORCEful-ones ARE-SNATCHING her violent-ones nomos nomos

n_ Nom Sg m
11:13 pantes gar oi

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ews iwannou heOs iOannEs

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
13 For all the prophets and the law prophesied until John.
ALL
for
THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets
THE
LAW
TILL
OF-JOHN John
eprofhteusan prophEteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVER prophesy
AV
Matthew 11
11:14 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
dexasqai autos dechomai autos

vn Aor midD pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mellwn mellO
14 And if ye will receive [it], this is Elias, which was for to come.
AND
IF
YE-ARE-WILLING TO-RECEIVE
he
IS
ELIAS Elijah
THE
one-beING-ABOUT one-being-about
ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
TO-BE-COMING
11:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
akouetw akouO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
15 He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
THE
one-HAVING one-having de de
Conj
EARS
LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
11:16 tini
tis
pi Dat Sg n
omoiwsw homoioO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
genean tauthn omoia genea houtos homoios

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-ANY to-what ? paidiois paidion

n_ Dat Pl n
YET I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE
generation this
LIKE
it-IS she-is prosfwnounta tois prosphOneO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl n t_ Dat Pl n
16 . But whereunto shall I liken this generation? It is like unto children sitting in the markets, and calling unto their fellows,
kaqhmenois kathEmai
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
agorais a agora hos

n_ Dat Pl f pr Nom Pl n
to-little-boys-and-girls sittING
IN
THE
BUY-places WHICH markets which(p)
TOWARD-SOUNDING shouting-to
to-THE the
eterois heteros
a_ Dat Pl n
DIFFERENT-ones different-ones
11:17 legousin
legO
hulhsamen auleO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
wrchsasqe eqrhnhsamen kai ouk orcheomai thrEneO kai ou

vi Aor midD 2 Pl vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj Part Neg
ARE-sayING
WE-FLAGEOLET to-YOU(p) we-flute to-ye
AND
NOT
YE-DANCE
WE-DIRGE we-wail
AND
NOT
17 And saying, We have piped unto you, and ye have not danced; we have mourned unto you, and ye have not lamented.
ekoyasqe koptO
vi Aor Mid 2 Pl
YE-STRIKE-(yourselves) ye-grieve
11:18 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gar iwannhs mhte gar iOannEs mEte

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj
esqiwn esthiO
mhte mEte
Conj
pinwn pinO
kai kai
Conj
18 For John came neither eating nor drinking, and they say, He hath a devil.
CAME
for
JOHN
NO-BESIDES EATING neither
NO-BESIDES DRINKING nor
AND
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
daimonion ecei daimonion echO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-ARE-sayING demon
he-IS-HAVING
11:19 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou esqiwn anthrOpos esthiO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kai pinwn kai pinO

CAME
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
EATING
AND
DRINKING
kai legousin kai legO

idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anqrwpos fagos anthrOpos phagos

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
kai oinopoths telwnwn kai oinopotEs telOnEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl m
19 The Son of man came eating and drinking, and they say, Behold a man gluttonous, and a winebibber, a friend of publicans and sinners. But wisdom is justified of her children.
AND
THEY-ARE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING human lo !
EATer gluttonous h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
WINE-DRINKer
OF-tribute-collectors
filos philos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai amartwlwn kai edikaiwqh kai hamartOlos kai dikaioO

Conj a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
FOND-One friend
AND
OF-missers of-sinners
AND
WAS-JUSTIFIED THE
WISDOM
FROM THE
ACTS
OF-her
11:20 tote hrxato

tote
Adv
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
oneidizein oneidizO
vn Pres Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
poleis en polis en
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
egenonto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
then
He-begins
TO-BE-REPROACHING THE
cities
IN
WHICH
BECAME occurred
THE
20 Then began he to upbraid the cities wherein most of his mighty works were done, because they repented not:
pleistai dunameis polus dunamis

a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
metenohsan metanoeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
MOST
ABILITIES OF-Him powerful-deeds
that
NOT
THEY-after-MIND they-repent
AV
Matthew 11
11:21 ouai soi

ouai
Inj
su
pp 2 Dat Sg
corazin ouai soi chorazin ouai su

ni proper Inj pp 2 Dat Sg
bhqsaida oti ei bEthsaida hoti ei

ni proper Conj Cond
en en
Prep
turw turos
n_ Dat Sg f
kai sidwni kai sidOn

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
WOE woe ! egenonto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
to-YOU
CHORAZIN
WOE woe ! ai ho
to-YOU
BETHSAIDA
that
IF
IN
TYRE
AND
SIDON
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
dunameis dunamis
n_ Nom Pl f
genomenai ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
palai an palai an
Adv Part
en en
Prep
21 Woe unto thee, Chorazin! woe unto thee, Bethsaida! for if the mighty works, which were done in you, had been done in Tyre and Sidon, they would have repented long ago in sackcloth and ashes.
t_ Nom Pl f
BECAME occurred sakkw sakkos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
ABILITIES THE powerful-deeds kai spodw kai spodos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
BECOMING occurring
IN
YOU(p) ye
OLD long-ago
EVER IN
metenohsan metanoeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
SACKCLOTH-of-hair AND sackcloth
ASHES
THEY-after-MIND they-repent turw turos

n_ Dat Sg f
11:22 plhn
plEn
Adv
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai sidwni anektoteron estai kai sidOn anektos eimi

Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
MOREly I-AM-sayING moreover krisews h krisis E

n_ Gen Sg f Part
to-YOU(p) to-ye
to-TYRE
AND
SIDON to-Sidon
more-tolerable
it-SHALL-BE
IN
DAY
22 But I say unto you, It shall be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the day of judgment, than for you.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-JUDGing OR to-YOU(p) than to-ye
11:23 kai su
kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
kafarnaoum mh kapharnaoum mE
ni proper Part Neg
ews ouranou uywqhsh heOs ouranos hupsoO

Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
ews heOs
Conj
AND
YOU
CAPERNAUM
NO
TILL
heaven
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED TILL you-shall-be-being-exalted en en

Prep
adou hadEs
n_ Gen Sg m
katabhsh katabainO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
oti ei hoti ei
Conj Cond
sodomois egenhqhsan sodoma ginomai

n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
23 And thou, Capernaum, which art exalted unto heaven, shalt be brought down to hell: for if the mighty works, which have been done in thee, had been done in Sodom, it would have remained until this day.
OF-UN-PERCEIVED YOU-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STEPPING that unseen you-shall-be-descending dunameis dunamis

n_ Nom Pl f
IF
IN
SODOM
WERE-BECOMED THE had-occurred mecri ths mechri ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
genomenai ginomai
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
an an
Part
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
ABILITIES THE powerful-deeds
BECOMING occurring umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
YOU
REMAINS it-remains
EVER UNTO
THE
toDAY
11:24 plhn
plEn
Adv
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti gh hoti gE
Conj n_ Dat Sg f
sodomwn anektoteron estai sodoma anektos eimi

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
MOREly I-AM-sayING moreover krisews h krisis E

n_ Gen Sg f Part
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
to-LAND
OF-SODOM
more-tolerable
it-SHALL-BE
IN
DAY
24 But I say unto you, That it shall be more tolerable for the land of Sodom in the day of judgment, than for thee.
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
OF-JUDGing OR to-YOU than
11:25 en
en
Prep
ekeinw tw ekeinos ho
pd Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
IN
that
THE
SEASON
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
exomologoumai soi exomologeO su

vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai ths ouranos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
oti hoti
Conj
25 . At that time Jesus answered and said, I thank thee, O Father, Lord of heaven and earth, because thou hast hid these things from the wise and prudent, and hast revealed them unto babes.
I-AM-OUT-avowING I-am-acclaiming ekruyas kruptO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg
to-YOU you apo apo

Prep
FATHER !
Master ! Lord !
OF-THE
heaven
AND
OF-THE
LAND earth
that
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
sofwn sophos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai sunetwn kai sunetos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
kai apekaluyas kai apokaluptO

auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
nhpiois nEpios
a_ Dat Pl m
YOU-HIDE
these FROM WISE these-things wise-ones pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
intelligent AND intelligent-ones
YOU-FROM-COVER them you-reveal egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
to-minors
11:26 nai o
nai
Part
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oti outws eudokia hoti houtOs eudokia

Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg f
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
26 Even so, Father: for so it seemed good in thy sight.
YEA
THE
FATHER
that
thus
WELL-SEEMing it-BECAME delight upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU in-front-of you mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
11:27 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
paredoqh paradidOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai oudeis kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ALL
to-ME
WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN by was-given-up
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
27 All things are delivered unto me of my Father: and no man knoweth the Son, but the Father; neither knoweth any man the Father, save the Son,
AV
epiginwskei ton epiginOskO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
and [he] to whomsoever the Son will reveal [him].
IS-ON-KNOWING is-recognizing tis tis

px Nom Sg m
THE
SON
IF
NO
THE
FATHER
NOT-YET THE neither ean ean

Cond
FATHER
epiginwskei ei epiginOskO ei
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai w kai hos

Conj pr Dat Sg m
boulhtai boulomai
ANY anyone o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-ON-KNOWING is-recognizing uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
IF
NO
THE
SON
AND
to-WHOM
IF-EVER MAY-BE-intendING
apokaluyai apokaluptO
vn Aor Act
THE
SON
TO-FROM-COVER to-unveil pros pros

Prep
11:28 deute
deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kopiwntes kopiaO
kai pefortismenoi kai phortizO

28 Come unto me, all [ye] that labour and are heavy laden, and I will give you rest.
HITHER hither-ye ! kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
TOWARD ME
ALL
THE-ones the
toilING ones-toiling
AND
HAVING-been-CARRYizED having-been-laden
anapausw anapauO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND-I
SHALL-BE-UP-CEASING YOU(p) shall-be-giving-rest ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
11:29 arate
airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
zugon zugos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai maqete kai manthanO

Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti hoti
Conj
LIFT lift-ye ! praus praus

a_ Nom Sg m
THE
YOKE
OF-ME
ON YOU(p) upon ye
AND
BE-LEARNING FROM ME be-ye-learning ! anapausin anapausis

n_ Acc Sg f
that
29 Take my yoke upon you, and learn of me; for I am meek and lowly in heart: and ye shall find rest unto your souls.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai tapeinos th kai tapeinos ho

Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
kardia kai eurhsete kardia kai heuriskO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
MEEK
I-AM
AND
humble
to-THE
HEART
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING UP-CEASing rest
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
yucais umwn psuchE humeis

n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
to-THE
souls
OF-YOU(p) of-ye gar zugos gar zugos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
11:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
crhstos kai to chrEstos kai ho

a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n
fortion mou phortion egO

n_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
elafron elaphros
a_ Nom Sg n
30 For my yoke [is] easy, and my burden is light.
THE
for
YOKE
OF-ME
kind kindly
AND
THE
load
OF-ME
LIGHT
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
AV
Matthew 12
12:1 en
en
Prep
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
eporeuqh poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin dia sabbaton dia

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
IN
that
THE
SEASON
went
THE
JESUS
to-THE
SABBATHS
THRU through
. At that time Jesus went on the sabbath day through the corn; and his disciples were an hungred, and began to pluck the ears of corn, and to eat.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sporimwn oi sporimos ho
a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj

epeinasan kai hrxanto peinaO kai archO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl
tillein tillO
vn Pres Act
THE
SOWings
THE
YET LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
HUNGER
AND
begin they-begin
TO-BE-PLUCKING
stacuas stachus
n_ Acc Pl m
kai esqiein kai esthiO

Conj vn Pres Act
EARS-(of-plants) AND ears-of-grain
TO-BE-EATING
12:2 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
farisaioi idontes pharisaios eidO

n_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET PHARISEES
PERCEIVING
say
to-Him
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! en en
Prep
But when the Pharisees saw [it], they said unto him, Behold, thy disciples do that which is not lawful to do upon the sabbath day.

poiousin o poieO hos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pr Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
sabbatw sabbaton
n_ Dat Sg n
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
ARE-DOING
WHICH
NOT
it-IS-allowed is-allowed
TO-BE-DOING IN
SABBATH
12:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ouk autos ou

pp Dat Pl m Part Neg
anegnwte ti anaginOskO tis

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n
epoihsen dauid ote poieO dauid hote

vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Adv
THE
YET He-said
to-them
NOT
YE-read(past) ye-did-read
ANY what
DOES
DAVID
when
But he said unto them, Have ye not read what David did, when he was an hungred, and they that were with him;
epeinasen kai oi peinaO kai ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
he-HUNGERS
AND
THE-ones the-ones
WITH him
12:4 pws eishlqen

pOs
Adv
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
artous ths artos ho

n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
how
he-INTO-CAME INTO THE he-entered efagon esthiO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
HOME house ouk ou

Part Neg
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
BREADS bread(p) fagein esthiO

vn 2Aor Act
OF-THE
proqesews prothesis
n_ Gen Sg f
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
exon exesti
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
How he entered into the house of God, and did eat the shewbread, which was not lawful for him to eat, neither for them which were with him, but only for the priests?
BEFORE-PLACing THEY-ATE
WHICH
NOT
allowING
WAS it-was iereusin hiereus

n_ Dat Pl m
to-him
TO-BE-EATING
oude oude
Adv
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
monois monos
a_ Dat Pl m
NOT-YET to-THE-ones WITH him neither to-the-ones
IF
NO
to-THE
SACRED-ones ONLY priests sabbasin oi sabbaton ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Nom Pl m
12:5 h
E
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
anegnwte en anaginOskO en
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti tois hoti ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
iereis hiereus
n_ Nom Pl m
OR
NOT
YE-read(past) ye-did-read ierw hieron

n_ Dat Sg n
IN
THE
LAW
that
to-THE
SABBATHS
THE
SACRED-ones priests
Or have ye not read in the law, how that on the sabbath days the priests in the temple profane the sabbath, and are blameless?
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sabbaton bebhlousin kai anaitioi eisin sabbaton bebEloO kai anaitios eimi
n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
IN
THE
SACRED-place THE sanctuary de de

Conj
SABBATH
ARE-profanING
AND
UN-caused faultless
THEY-ARE are wde hOde

Adv
6
12:6 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti tou hoti ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
meizon mega
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye egnwkeite ginOskO

vi Plup Act 2 Pl
But I say unto you, That in this place is [one] greater than the temple.
that
OF-THE
SACRED-place GREATer sanctuary greater-one eleos eleos

n_ Acc Sg n
IS
here
12:7 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
IF
YET YE-HAD-KNOWN ANY what
IS this-is anaitious anaitios

a_ Acc Pl m
MERCY
I-AM-WILLING AND
NOT
SACRIFICE NOT
But if ye had known what [this] meaneth, I will have mercy, and not sacrifice, ye would not have condemned the guiltless.
an an
Part
katedikasate tous katadikazO ho

vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
EVER YE-convict
THE
UN-caused faultless-ones
AV
Matthew 12
12:8 kurios
kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou o sabbaton ho
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
For the Son of man is Lord even of the sabbath day.
Master Lord
for
IS
OF-THE
SABBATH
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
12:9 kai metabas

kai
Conj
metabainO
ekeiqen hlqen ekeithen erchomai

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
And when he was departed thence, he went into their synagogue:
AND
after-STEPPing proceeding
thence
He-CAME
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them synagogue xhran xEros

n_ Acc Sg f
12:10 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anqrwpos ceira anthrOpos cheir

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
ecwn echO
kai ephrwthsan kai eperOtaO

AND
BE-PERCEIVING human lo ! legontes legO

HAND
HAVING
DRY withered sabbasin sabbaton

n_ Dat Pl n
WH
AND
THEY-inquire-of
NA
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
qerapeuein
qerapeusai therapeuO
vn Aor Act
10 And, behold, there was a man which had [his] hand withered. And they asked him, saying, Is it lawful to heal on the sabbath days? that they might accuse him.
Him
sayING
IF
it-IS-allowed
to-THE
SABBATHS
TO-cure
ina hina
Conj
kathgorhswsin katEgoreO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-accusING OF-Him him
12:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois tis autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg m
WH
estai
NA
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
YET He-said
to-them
ANY what ? probaton en probaton heis

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
SHALL-BE
OUT OF-YOU(p) of-ye
anqrwpos os anthrOpos hos

n_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m
exei echO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai ean kai ean

Conj Cond
empesh empiptO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
11 And he said unto them, What man shall there be among you, that shall have one sheep, and if it fall into a pit on the sabbath day, will he not lay hold on it, and lift [it] out?
human
WHO
SHALL-BE-HAVING sheep
ONE
AND
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-IN-FALLING should-be-falling-in auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin eis sabbaton eis

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
boqunon ouci bothunos ouchi

n_ Acc Sg m Part Int
krathsei krateO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
this
to-THE
SABBATHS
INTO PIT
NOT(emph.) SHALL-BE-HOLDING it not(emph.) ? shall-be-taking-hold
AND
egerei egeirO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-ROUSING shall-be-raising
12:12 posw
posos
pq Dat Sg n
oun oun
Conj
diaferei diapherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos probatou wste anthrOpos probaton hOste

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg n Conj
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
how-much THEN IS-THRU-CARRYING human to-how-much is-being-of-consequence sabbasin kalws poiein sabbaton kalOs poieO
n_ Dat Pl n Adv vn Pres Act
OF-sheep
AS-BESIDES IS-allowed so-that it-is-allowed
to-THE
12 How much then is a man better than a sheep? Wherefore it is lawful to do well on the sabbath days.
SABBATHS
IDEALly
TO-BE-DOING
12:13 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw ekteinon anthrOpos ekteinO

n_ Dat Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
then
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
human
OUT-STRETCH OF-YOU stretch-out-you ! ws h hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg f
THE
HAND
AND
13 Then saith he to the man, Stretch forth thine hand. And he stretched [it] forth; and it was restored whole, like as the other.
exeteinen ekteinO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai apekatestaqh ugihs kai apokathistEmi hugiEs

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg f
allh allos
a_ Nom Sg f
he-OUT-STRETCHES AND he-stretches-out
it-WAS-restorED she-was-restored de de
Conj
SOUND
AS
THE
other
12:14 exelqontes
exerchomai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi sumboulion pharisaios sumboulion

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kat kata
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OUT-COMING coming-out opws hopOs

Adv
YET THE
PHARISEES
TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT consultation held
DOWN OF-Him against him
14 . Then the Pharisees went out, and held a council against him, how they might destroy him.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apoleswsin apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH-how Him so-that
THEY-SHOULD-BE-destroyING
AV
Matthew 12
12:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
gnous ginOskO
anecwrhsen ekeiqen kai hkolouqhsan anachOreO ekeithen kai akoloutheO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
YET JESUS
NA
KNOWING
UP-SPACES retires
thence
AND
follow
15 But when Jesus knew [it], he withdrew himself from thence: and great multitudes followed him, and he healed them all;
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai eqerapeusen autous pantas kai therapeuO autos pas

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
to-Him him
THRONGS
MANY vast
AND
He-curES
them
ALL
12:16 kai epetimhsen autois ina

kai
Conj
epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
faneron auton phaneros autos

a_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m
poihswsin poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
16 And charged them that they should not make him known:
AND
He-rebukES he-warns plhrwqh plEroO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to-them them to ho
THAT NO
apparent manifest
Him
THEY-SHOULD-BE-makING
12:17 ina
hina
Conj
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Sg n
17 That it might be fulfilled which was spoken by Esaias the prophet, saying,
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled legontos legO

BEING-declarED
THRU ISAIAH through
THE
OF-sayING saying
12:18 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
hretisa hairetizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaphtos agapEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
NA
Boy
OF-ME
WHOM
I-prefer
THE
beLOVED
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eudokhsen h eudokeO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
qhsw tithEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
18 Behold my servant, whom I have chosen; my beloved, in whom my soul is well pleased: I will put my spirit upon him, and he shall shew judgment to the Gentiles.
OF-ME
INTO
WHOM
WELL-SEEMS delights
THE
soul
OF-ME
I-SHALL-BE-PLACING THE
pneuma mou pneuma egO

ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai krisin kai krisis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin apaggelei ethnos apaggellO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
spirit
OF-ME
ON
Him
AND
JUDGing
to-THE
NATIONS
He-SHALL-BE-FROM-MESSAGING he-shall-be-reporting oude oude

Adv
12:19 ouk
ou
Part Neg
erisei erizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
kraugasei kraugazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
akousei akouO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
19 He shall not strive, nor cry; neither shall any man hear his voice in the streets.
NOT
He-SHALL-BE-STRIFEizING NOT-YET He-SHALL-BE-clamorING NOT-YET SHALL-BE-HEARING ANY he-shall-be-brawling nor neither anyone plateiais thn plateia ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
fwnhn autou phOnE autos

IN
THE
BROADS squares
THE
SOUND voice
OF-Him
12:20 kalamon suntetrimmenon ou

kalamos
n_ Acc Sg m
suntribO
ou
Part Neg
kateaxei katagnumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai linon kai linon

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
REED
HAVING-been-crushED having-been-bruised ou ou
Part Neg
NOT
He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-FRACTURING AND he-shall-be-fracturing ews an heOs an

Conj Part
FLAX
20 A bruised reed shall he not break, and smoking flax shall he not quench, till he send forth judgment unto victory.
tufomenon tuphO
vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
sbesei sbennumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ekbalh ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
nikos nikos
n_ Acc Sg n
SMOULDERING
NOT
He-SHALL-BE-EXTINGUISHING TILL
EVER He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING INTO CONQUEST he-should-be-casting-out victory
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
krisin krisis
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
JUDGing
12:21 kai tw
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg n
onomati autou onoma autos

n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Sg m
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
elpiousin elpizO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
21 And in his name shall the Gentiles trust.
AND
to-THE
WH
NAME
OF-Him
WH
NATIONS
WH
SHALL-BE-EXPECTING shall-be-relying-on
WH WH WH
12:22 tote
tote
Adv
proshnegkan autw daimonizomenon tuflon kai kwfon
then
22 . Then was brought unto him one possessed with a devil, blind, and dumb: and he healed him, insomuch that the blind and dumb both spake and
AV
Matthew 12
NA
proshnecqh prospherO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NA
daimonizomenos daimonizomai
NA
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
NA
kai kwfos kai kOphos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
NA
kai kai
Conj
saw.
WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him was-brought-to him eqerapeusen auton therapeuO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
one-demonizING one-being-demonized ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BLIND
AND
MUTE
AND
wste hOste
Conj
kwfon kOphos
a_ Acc Sg m
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
kai blepein kai blepO

Conj vn Pres Act
He-curES
him
AS-BESIDES THE so-that pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
MUTE mute-man ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-TALKING AND to-be-speaking kai elegon kai legO

TO-BE-lookING to-be-observing outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
12:23 kai existanto

kai
Conj
existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mhti mEti
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
23 And all the people were amazed, and said, Is not this the son of David?
AND
are-OUT-STOOD ALL are-amazed uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
THRONGS
AND
said they-said
NO-ANY this-One not ? this-one
IS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
THE
SON
of-DAVID of-David de de
Conj
12:24 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi akousantes eipon pharisaios akouO legO

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
YET PHARISEES
HEARing
said
this-One this-man
NOT
IS-OUT-CASTING THE is-casting-out
24 But when the Pharisees heard [it], they said, This [fellow] doth not cast out devils, but by Beelzebub the prince of the devils.
daimonia ei daimonion ei
n_ Acc Pl n Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
beelzeboul arconti twn beelzeboul archOn ho

ni proper n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl n
daimoniwn daimonion
n_ Gen Pl n
demons
IF
NO
IN
THE
BEELZEBOUL
chief
OF-THE
demons
12:25 eidws
eidO
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
enqumhseis autwn enthumEsis autos

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois pasa autos pas

pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg f
HAVING-PERCEIVED YET THE
IN-FEELings sentiments eauths heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg f
OF-them
He-said
to-them
EVERY
basileia merisqeisa basileia merizO

n_ Nom Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
kaq kata
Prep
erhmoutai erEmoO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai pasa kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
h E
Part
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
25 And Jesus knew their thoughts, and said unto them, Every kingdom divided against itself is brought to desolation; and every city or house divided against itself shall not stand:
KINGdom
BEING-PARTED
DOWN OF-self against herself ou ou

Part Neg
IS-beING-DESOLATED AND
EVERY
city
OR
HOME house
merisqeisa merizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
kaq kata
Prep
eauths heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg f
staqhsetai histEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
BEING-PARTED
DOWN OF-self against herself o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD shall-be-standing ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
12:26 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
satanan satanas
n_ Acc Sg m
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
AND
IF
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) THE Satan staqhsetai histEmi

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SATAN (adversary) IS-OUT-CASTING ON Satan is-casting-out basileia autou basileia autos

n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
self himself
26 And if Satan cast out Satan, he is divided against himself; how shall then his kingdom stand?
emerisqh merizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pws oun pOs oun

Adv Int Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
he-IS-PARTED how how ?
THEN SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD THE shall-be-standing en en

Prep
KINGdom
OF-him
12:27 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
beelzeboul ekballw beelzeboul ekballO

ni proper vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia oi daimonion ho
n_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
IF
IN
BEELZEBOUL
AM-OUT-CASTING THE am-casting-out touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
demons
THE
SONS
27 And if I by Beelzebub cast out devils, by whom do your children cast [them] out? therefore they shall be your judges.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
ekballousin ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
dia dia
Prep
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
kritai kritEs
n_ Nom Pl m
esontai umwn eimi humeis

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
ANY whom ? en en
Prep
ARE-OUT-CASTING THRU this are-casting-out because-of pneumati qeou pneuma theos

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
they
JUDGers judges ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
28 But if I cast out devils by the Spirit of God, then the kingdom of God is come unto you.
12:28 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ekballw ekballO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
IF
YET IN
spirit
OF-God
AM-OUT-CASTING THE am-casting-out basileia tou basileia ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
demons
ara ara
Part
efqasen phthanO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
CONSEQUENTLY OUTSTRIPS ON outstrips-in-time
YOU(p) ye
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AV
Matthew 12
12:29 h
E
Part
pws dunatai pOs dunamai

Adv Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eiselqein eiserchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OR
how how ?
IS-ABLE can skeuh skeuos

n_ Acc Pl n
ANY anyone
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering arpasai harpazO

vn Aor Act
HOME house prwton prOton

Adv
OF-THE
29 Or else how can one enter into a strong man's house, and spoil his goods, except he first bind the strong man? and then he will spoil his house.
iscurou ischuros
a_ Gen Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
STRONG-one AND strong-one dhsh deO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
INSTRUMENTS OF-him gear ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
TO-SNATCH IF-EVER NO
BEFORE-most first autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
iscuron ischuros
a_ Acc Sg m
kai tote thn kai tote ho

Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
he-SHOULD-BE-BINDING THE
STRONG-one AND strong-one
then
THE
HOME house
OF-him
diarpasei diarpazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SNATCHING he-shall-be-plundering
12:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
wn eimi
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
kat kata
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
THE-one the-one mh mE
Part Neg
NO
BEING
WITH ME
DOWN OF-ME against me
IS
AND
THE-one the-one
30 He that is not with me is against me; and he that gathereth not with me scattereth abroad.
sunagwn sunagO
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
skorpizei skorpizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NO
TOGETHER-LEADING WITH ME gathering touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
IS-SCATTERING
12:31 dia
dia
Prep
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
amartia kai blasfhmia hamartia kai blasphEmia

n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THRU this because-of afeqhsetai aphiEmi

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
EVERY
missing sin de de
Conj
AND
HARM-AVERment blasphemy pneumatos blasfhmia pneuma blasphEmia

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois h anthrOpos ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
31 Wherefore I say unto you, All manner of sin and blasphemy shall be forgiven unto men: but the blasphemy [against] the [Holy] Ghost shall not be forgiven unto men.
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-THE shall-be-being-pardoned the ouk ou

Part Neg
humans
THE
YET OF-THE
spirit
HARM-AVERment blasphemy
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET shall-be-being-pardoned ean ean

Cond
12:32 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
WHO
IF-EVER MAY-BE-sayING saying word autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
DOWN against an an
Part
OF-THE the
SON
OF-THE
human
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
32 And whosoever speaketh a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but whosoever speaketh against the Holy Ghost, it shall not be forgiven him, neither in this world, neither in the [world] to come.
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him it-shall-be-being-pardoned him tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
WHO
YET EVER MAY-BE-sayING DOWN against autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE the
spirit
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
oute oute
Conj
en en
Prep
toutw tw houtos ho
THE
HOLY
NOT
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him it-shall-be-being-pardoned him tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
NOT-BESIDES IN neither
this
THE
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
oute oute
Conj
en en
Prep
mellonti mellO
eon
NOT-BESIDES IN nor poihsate to poieO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
THE
one-beING-ABOUT one-impending dendron kalon dendron kalos

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
12:33 h
E
Part
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
t_ Acc Sg n
OR make either make-ye ! poihsate to poieO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
THE
TREE
IDEAL
AND
THE
FRUIT
OF-it
IDEAL
OR
33 Either make the tree good, and his fruit good; or else make the tree corrupt, and his fruit corrupt: for the tree is known by [his] fruit.
dendron sapron kai ton dendron sapros kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
sapron sapros
a_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
gar gar
Conj
make make-ye !
THE
TREE
ROTTen
AND
THE
FRUIT
OF-it
ROTTen
OUT for
AV
Matthew 12
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
karpou karpos
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
dendron ginwsketai dendron ginOskO

n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
OF-THE
FRUIT
THE
TREE
IS-beING-KNOWN
12:34 gennhmata ecidnwn pws dunasqe

genEma
n_ Voc Pl n
echidna
n_ Gen Pl f
pOs
Adv Int
dunamai
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
ponhroi ponEros
a_ Nom Pl m
product progeny ! ontes eimi

vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
OF-VIPERS
how how ?
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
GOODS good(p)
TO-BE-TALKING wicked to-be-speaking wicked-ones kardias to kardia ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg n
34 O generation of vipers, how can ye, being evil, speak good things? for out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh.
ek ek
Prep
gar tou gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
perisseumatos ths perisseuma ho

n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
stoma stoma
n_ Nom Sg n
BEING
OUT for
OF-THE
excess superabundance
OF-THE
HEART
THE
MOUTH
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-TALKING is-speaking
12:35 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaqos agathos
a_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ek anthrOpos ek
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg m
qhsaurou thEsauros
n_ Gen Sg m
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
GOOD
human
OUT OF-THE
GOOD
PLACED-INTO-MORROW IS-OUT-CASTING treasure is-extracting ponhrou qhsaurou ponEros thEsauros

35 A good man out of the good treasure of the heart bringeth forth good things: and an evil man out of the evil treasure bringeth forth evil things.
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ponhros anqrwpos ek ponEros anthrOpos ek

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
GOODS AND good-things ekballei ekballO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
wicked
human
OUT OF-THE
wicked
PLACED-INTO-MORROW treasure
ponhra ponEros
a_ Acc Pl n
IS-OUT-CASTING wickeds is-extracting wicked-things
12:36 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti pan hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
argon argos
a_ Nom Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
lalhsousin laleO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
EVERY
declaration
UN-ACTive idle autou autos

pp Gen Sg n
WHICH
SHALL-BE-TALKING shall-be-speaking en en
Prep
36 But I say unto you, That every idle word that men shall speak, they shall give account thereof in the day of judgment.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi apodwsousin anthrOpos apodidOmi

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
peri peri
Prep
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
krisews krisis
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
humans
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING ABOUT it they-shall-be-rendering concerning logwn logos

n_ Gen Pl m
saying account
IN
DAY
OF-JUDGing
12:37 ek
ek
Prep
gar twn gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
dikaiwqhsh dikaioO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
37 For by thy words thou shalt be justified, and by thy words thou shalt be condemned.
OUT for
OF-THE
sayings words
OF-YOU
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED AND
OUT OF-THE
sayings words
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
katadikasqhsh katadikazO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
OF-YOU
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-convictED
12:38 tote apekriqhsan autw

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn kai farisaiwn grammateus kai pharisaios

n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
then
answerED
to-Him him
ANY some
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
AND
PHARISEES
38 . Then certain of the scribes and of the Pharisees answered, saying, Master, we would see a sign from thee.
legontes legO
didaskale qelomen didaskalos thelO

n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
apo apo
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
shmeion idein sEmeion eidO

n_ Acc Sg n vn 2Aor Act
sayING
TEACHer !
WE-ARE-WILLING FROM YOU
SIGN
TO-BE-PERCEIVING
12:39 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois genea autos genea

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg f
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Sg f
kai moicalis kai moichalis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
generation
wicked
AND
ADULTERess an-adulteress to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
shmeion epizhtei sEmeion epizEteO

kai shmeion ou kai sEmeion ou

Conj n_ Nom Sg n Part Neg
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
39 But he answered and said unto them, An evil and adulterous generation seeketh after a sign; and there shall no sign be given to it, but the sign of the prophet Jonas:
SIGN
IS-ON-SEEKING AND is-seeking-for
SIGN
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her
IF
NO
THE
AV
Matthew 12
shmeion iwna sEmeion iOnas

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
SIGN
of-JONA of-Jonah
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet iwnas iOnas

n_ Nom Sg m
12:40 wsper gar hn

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
koilia tou koilia ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
khtous kEtos
n_ Gen Sg n
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
AS-EVEN even-as
for
WAS
JONA Jonah
IN
THE
CAVITY bowel o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
SEA-MONSTER THREE
40 For as Jonas was three days and three nights in the whale's belly; so shall the Son of man be three days and three nights in the heart of the earth.
hmeras kai treis hEmera kai treis

n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f
nuktas outws estai nux houtOs eimi

n_ Acc Pl f Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou en anthrOpos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
DAYS
AND
THREE
NIGHTS
thus
SHALL-BE
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia ths kardia ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
hmeras kai treis hEmera kai treis

nuktas nux
n_ Acc Pl f
THE
HEART
OF-THE
LAND earth
THREE
DAYS
AND
THREE
NIGHTS
12:41 andres
anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
nineuitai anasthsontai nineuitEs anistEmi

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
meta ths meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
MEN
NINEVITES
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN shall-be-rising authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
JUDGing
WITH
THE
generation
tauths kai katakrinousin houtos kai katakrinO

pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oti metenohsan eis hoti metanoeO eis

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
khrugma kErugma
n_ Acc Sg n
41 The men of Nineveh shall rise in judgment with this generation, and shall condemn it: because they repented at the preaching of Jonas; and, behold, a greater than Jonas [is] here.
this
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her they-shall-be-condemning pleion polus

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
that
INTO THE
PROCLAMATION heralding
iwna iOnas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai idou kai idou

iwna iOnas
n_ Gen Sg m
wde hOde
Adv
of-JONA of-Jonah
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MORE lo ! egerqhsetai egeirO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
of-JONA of-Jonah
here
12:42 basilissa notou

basilissa
n_ Nom Sg f
notos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
meta ths meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
KINGess queen
OF-SOUTH
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED IN
THE
JUDGing
WITH
THE
generation
tauths kai katakrinei houtos kai katakrinO

pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
oti hlqen hoti erchomai

ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
peratwn ths peras ho

n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
42 The queen of the south shall rise up in the judgment with this generation, and shall condemn it: for she came from the uttermost parts of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon; and, behold, a greater than Solomon [is] here.
this
AND
SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her shall-be-condemning
that
she-CAME
OUT OF-THE
ends
OF-THE
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
akousai thn akouO ho

vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f
sofian solomwnos kai idou sophia solomOn kai idou

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pleion polus
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
solomwnos solomOn
n_ Gen Sg m
LAND earth wde hOde

Adv
TO-HEAR
THE
WISDOM
OF-SOLOMON
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MORE lo !
OF-SOLOMON
here
12:43 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
akaqarton pneuma akathartos pneuma

a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
exelqh exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
when-EVER YET THE whenever diercetai dierchomai

UN-clean unclean anudrwn topwn anudros topos

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
spirit
MAY-BE-OUT-COMING FROM THE may-be-coming-out anapausin kai ouc anapausis kai ou

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Part Neg
human
43 When the unclean spirit is gone out of a man, he walketh through dry places, seeking rest, and findeth none.
di dia
Prep
zhtoun zEteO
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
it-IS-THRU-COMING it-is-passing-through
THRU UN-WET through waterless eis eis

Prep
PLACES
SEEKING
UP-CEASing rest epistreyw epistrephO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
AND
NOT
it-IS-FINDING
12:44 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oqen hothen
Adv
then
it-IS-sayING
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-ME
I-SHALL-BE-ON-TURNING WHICH-PLACE I-shall-be-turning-back whence

WH
44 Then he saith, I will return into my house from whence I came out; and when he is come, he findeth [it] empty, swept, and garnished.
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kai elqon kai erchomai

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg n
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
scolazonta scholazO
kai
sesarwmenon saroO
kai kai
Conj
I-OUT-CAME I-came-out
AND
COMING
it-IS-FINDING
LEISURING being-unoccupied
HAVING-been-SWEPT AND
AV
kekosmhmenon kosmeO
HAVING-been-SYSTEMED having-been-decorated
12:45 tote poreuetai

tote
Adv
poreuomai
kai paralambanei kai paralambanO

meq meta
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
epta hepta
ni numeral
etera heteros
a_ Acc Pl n
pneumata pneuma
n_ Acc Pl n
then
it-IS-GOING
AND
IS-BESIDE-GETTING WITH self is-taking-along itself katoikei katoikeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SEVEN
DIFFERENT spirits
ponhrotera eautou ponEros heautou

a_ Acc Pl n Cmp pf 3 Gen Sg m
kai eiselqonta kai eiserchomai

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n
ekei kai ginetai ekei kai ginomai

Adv Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
45 Then goeth he, and taketh with himself seven other spirits more wicked than himself, and they enter in and dwell there: and the last [state] of that man is worse than the first. Even so shall it be also unto this wicked generation.
more-wicked
OF-self of-itself
AND
it-IS-DOWN-HOMING there it-is-dwelling
AND
IS-BECOMING
THE
escata tou eschatos ho

a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ekeinou ceirona twn anthrOpos ekeinos cheirOn ho

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
prwtwn prOtos
a_ Gen Pl n
outws estai houtOs eimi

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
LAST last(p) th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
human
that
WORSE
OF-THE
BEFORE-most thus first
it-SHALL-BE
AND also
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ponhra ponEros
a_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
generation this
THE
wicked
12:46 eti
eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
oclois idou ochlos idou

n_ Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking
to-THE
THRONGS BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! zhtountes zEteO

MOTHER
AND
46 . While he yet talked to the people, behold, [his] mother and his brethren stood without, desiring to speak with him.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi autou adelphos autos

eisthkeisan exw histEmi exO

vi Plup Act 3 Pl Adv
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
THE
brothers
NA
OF-Him
NA NA
HAD-STOOD stood tis tis

px Nom Sg m
NA
OUT SEEKING outside

NA
to-Him
NA NA
TO-TALK to-speak
NA
12:47
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
NA
kai kai
Conj
said
NA NA NA
YET ANY someone

NA
to-Him
NA
NA NA
MOTHER
NA
OF-YOU
AND
47 Then one said unto him, Behold, thy mother and thy brethren stand without, desiring to speak with thee.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi sou adelphos su

exw exO
Adv
esthkasin zhtountes histEmi zEteO

vi Perf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
THE
brothers
OF-YOU
OUT HAVE-STOOD outside stand eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SEEKING
to-YOU
TO-TALK to-speak autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
12:48 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
legonti legO
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-THE
one-sayING one-saying eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
to-Him
ANY who ?
48 But he answered and said unto him that told him, Who is my mother? and who are my brethren?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai tines kai tis

Conj pi Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi mou adelphos egO

IS
THE
MOTHER
OF-ME
AND
ANY who(p) ?
WH
ARE
NA
THE
brothers
OF-ME
12:49 kai ekteinas

kai
Conj
ekteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
autou
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epi epi
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
OUT-STRETCHing THE stretching-out eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HAND
OF-Him
ON THE onover kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
LEARNers disciples
49 And he stretched forth his hand toward his disciples, and said, Behold my mother and my brethren!
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg

OF-Him
He-said
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! gar an gar an

Conj Part
MOTHER
OF-ME
AND
THE
brothers
OF-ME
12:50 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qelhma tou thelEma ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WHO-ANY for anyone-who en en

Prep
EVER SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
WILL
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE the-one
50 For whosoever shall do the will of my Father which is in heaven, the same is my brother, and sister, and mother.
ouranois autos ouranos autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
adelfos kai adelfh kai mhthr adelphos kai adelphE kai mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IN
heavens
he
OF-ME
brother
AND
sister
AND
MOTHER
IS
AV
Matthew 13
13:1 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh exelqwn ekeinos exerchomai

pd Dat Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
oikias oikia
n_ Gen Sg f
. The same day went Jesus out of the house, and sat by the sea side.
IN
THE
DAY
that
OUT-COMING coming-out qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
JESUS
OF-THE
HOME house
ekaqhto kathEmai
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sat
BESIDE THE
SEA
13:2 kai sunhcqhsan

kai
Conj
sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
wste hOste
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
AND
WERE-TOGETHER-LED TOWARD Him were-gathered kaqhsqai kathEmai

vn Pres midD/pasD
THRONGS
MANY vast
AS-BESIDES Him so-that oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
INTO
And great multitudes were gathered together unto him, so that he went into a ship, and sat; and the whole multitude stood on the shore.
ploion embanta ploion embainO

n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
kai pas kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
aigialon aigialos
n_ Acc Sg m
FLOATer ship
TO-BE-sittING
AND
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
ON
THE
BEACH
eisthkei histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
HAD-STOOD stood
13:3 kai elalhsen autois polla

kai
Conj
laleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
parabolais legwn parabolE legO

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
He-TALKS he-speaks o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-them
MANY IN many-things tou ho
BESIDE-CASTS parables speirein speirO

vn Pres Act
sayING
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
And he spake many things unto them in parables, saying, Behold, a sower went forth to sow;
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
speirwn speirO
t_ Gen Sg m
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
one-SOWING one-sowing speirein speirO

vn Pres Act
OF-THE
TO-BE-SOWING
13:4 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
a hos
pr Nom Pl n
men men
Part
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
IN
THE
TO-BE-SOWING him
WHICH which(p)
INDEED FALLS
BESIDE THE
WAY road
And when he sowed, some [seeds] fell by the way side, and the fowls came and devoured them up:
kai elqonta kai erchomai

ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
katefagen auta katesthiO autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl n
AND
COMING
THE
flyers DOWN-ATE flying-creatures devoured epi ta epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl n
them
13:5 alla
allos
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
petrwdh petrOdes
a_ Acc Pl n
opou hopou
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
others
YET FALLS it-falls
ON
THE
ROCK-PERCEIVEDS THE-?-where NOT rocky-places wheree to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
it-HAD
LAND earth ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
Some fell upon stony places, where they had not much earth: and forthwith they sprung up, because they had no deepness of earth:
pollhn kai euqews exaneteilen dia polus kai eutheOs exanatellO dia
a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
mh mE
Part Neg
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
baqos bathos
n_ Acc Sg n
much
AND
immediately
it-OUT-risES it-shoots-up
THRU THE because-of
NO
TO-BE-HAVING DEPTH
OF-LAND of-earth
6
13:6 hliou
hElios
n_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
anateilantos ekaumatisqh kai dia anatellO kaumatizO kai dia

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
OF-SUN
YET UP-rising rising
it-IS-BURNizED it-is-scorched
AND
THRU THE because-of
NO
TO-BE-HAVING
And when the sun was up, they were scorched; and because they had no root, they withered away.
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
exhranqh xErainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ROOT
it-IS-DRIED it-is-withered de de
Conj
13:7 alla
allos
a_ Nom Pl n
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi tas epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl f
akanqas akantha
n_ Acc Pl f
kai anebhsan ai kai anabainO ho

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
akanqai akantha
n_ Nom Pl f
And some fell among thorns; and the thorns sprung up, and choked them:
others
WH
YET FALLS it-falls

NA
ON
THE
POINT-FLOWERS AND thorns
UP-STEPPed came-up
THE
POINT-FLOWERS thorns
kai kai
Conj
apepnixan
epnixan pnigO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
AND
CHOKE
them
AV
Matthew 13
13:8 alla
allos
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f
kai edidou kai didOmi

karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
others
YET FALLS it-falls ekaton o hekaton hos

ni numeral
ON
THE
LAND earth
THE
IDEAL
AND
GAVE
FRUIT
But other fell into good ground, and brought forth fruit, some an hundredfold, some sixtyfold, some thirtyfold.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
men men
Part
de de
Conj
exhkonta o hexEkonta hos

ni numeral pr Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
triakonta triakonta
ni numeral
pr Acc Sg n
WHICH
INDEED HUNDRED WHICH
YET SIX-TY sixty akouetw akouO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
WHICH
YET THREE-TY thirtyfold

9
13:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
Who hath ears to hear, let him hear.
THE
one-HAVING one-having
EARS
LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing ! maqhtai eipan mathEtEs legO

n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
13:10 kai proselqontes oi

kai
Conj
proserchomai
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
10 And the disciples came, and said unto him, Why speakest thou unto them in parables?
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
say
to-Him
THRU ANY because-of what ?
IN
parabolais laleis parabolE laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 2 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
BESIDE-CASTS parables
YOU-ARE-TALKING to-them you-are-speaking de de

Conj
13:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
oti umin hoti humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
dedotai didOmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
that
to-YOU(p) to-ye
HAS-been-GIVEN
11 He answered and said unto them, Because it is given unto you to know the mysteries of the kingdom of heaven, but to them it is not given.
gnwnai ta ginOskO ho
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n
musthria mustErion
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias twn basileia ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn ekeinois de ouranos ekeinos de

n_ Gen Pl m pd Dat Pl m Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
TO-KNOW
THE
CLOSE-KEEPS OF-THE secrets
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-those
YET NOT
dedotai didOmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
it-HAS-been-GIVEN
13:12 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
gar ecei gar echO

doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai perisseuqhsetai kai perisseuO

WHO-ANY for anyone-who ostis hostis

pr Nom Sg m
IS-HAVING
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-him
AND
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-exceedED he-shall-be-having-a-superfluity ap apo

Prep
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arqhsetai airO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
12 For whosoever hath, to him shall be given, and he shall have more abundance: but whosoever hath not, from him shall be taken away even that he hath.
WHO-ANY YET NOT anyone-who
IS-HAVING
AND also
WHICH
he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM him shall-be-being-taken-away oti blepontes hoti blepO

13:13 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
parabolais autois lalw parabolE autos laleO

n_ Dat Pl f pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
THRU this because-of blepousin blepO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
IN
BESIDE-CASTS parables ouk ou

Part Neg
to-them
I-AM-TALKING that I-am-speaking oude oude

Adv
lookING observing suniousin suniEmi

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
NOT
13 Therefore speak I to them in parables: because they seeing see not; and hearing they hear not, neither do they understand.
kai akouontes kai akouO

akouousin akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-lookING AND they-are-observing
HEARING
NOT
THEY-ARE-HEARING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-understandING neither profhteia prophEteia

n_ Nom Sg f
13:14 kai anaplhroutai autois h

kai
Conj
anaplEroO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
legousa legO
AND
IS-beING-UP-FILLED is-being-filled-up akousete akouO

vi Fut Act 2 Pl
to-them
THE
BEFORE-AVERment OF-ISAIAH prophecy mh mE

Part Neg
THE
sayING
akoh akoE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
sunhte suniEmi
vs 2Aor vxx 2 Pl
kai blepontes kai blepO

14 And in them is fulfilled the prophecy of Esaias, which saith, By hearing ye shall hear, and shall not understand; and seeing ye shall see, and shall not perceive:
to-HEARing YE-SHALL-BE-HEARING AND
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-understandING AND may-be-understanding
lookING observing
bleyete blepO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-lookING AND ye-shall-be-observing
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING may-be-perceiving
AV
Matthew 13
13:15 epacunqh
pachunO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou kai tois houtos kai ho

pd Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl n
wsin ous
n_ Dat Pl n
IS-STOUTenED for
THE
HEART
OF-THE
PEOPLE
this
AND
to-THE
EARS
barews hkousan kai tous bareOs akouO kai ho

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous autwn ophthalmos autos

n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Pl m
ekammusan mhpote kammuO mEpote

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv
HEAVIly
THEY-HEAR AND
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-them
THEY-shut
NO-?-when lest-at-some-time akouswsin akouO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
15 For this people's heart is waxed gross, and [their] ears are dull of hearing, and their eyes they have closed; lest at any time they should see with [their] eyes, and hear with [their] ears, and should understand with [their] heart, and should be converted, and I should heal them.
idwsin eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ofqalmois kai tois ophthalmos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl n
wsin ous
n_ Dat Pl n
kai kai
Conj
THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING to-THE
VIEWers eyes
AND
to-THE
EARS
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING AND should-be-hearing kai iasomai kai iaomai

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia sunwsin kardia suniEmi

n_ Dat Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai epistreywsin kai epistrephO

to-THE
HEART
THEY-MAY-BE-understandING AND may-be-understanding
THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING AND should-be-turning-about
I-SHALL-BE-HEALING
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
13:16 umwn
humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
de de
Conj
makarioi oi makarios ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi oti blepousin ophthalmos hoti blepO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
wta ous
n_ Nom Pl n
OF-YOU(p) YET HAPPY of-ye happy-are

WH
16 But blessed [are] your eyes, for they see: and your ears, for they hear.
THE
VIEWers eyes
that
THEY-ARE-lookING AND they-are-observing
THE
EARS
umwn
NA
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
oti akouousin hoti akouO

OF-YOU(p) of-ye
that
THEY-ARE-HEARING
13:17 amhn gar legw

amEn
Hebrew
gar
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai dikaioi epequmhsan kai dikaios epithumeO

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AMEN verily idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
for
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
MANY
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets eidan eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
JUST just-men
ON-FEEL yearn
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
kai akousai a kai akouO hos

Conj vn Aor Act pr Acc Pl n
17 For verily I say unto you, That many prophets and righteous [men] have desired to see [those things] which ye see, and have not seen [them]; and to hear [those things] which ye hear, and have not heard [them].
TO-BE-PERCEIVING WHICH which(p) akouete akouO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-lookING AND ye-are-observing hkousan akouO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
NOT
THEY-PERCEIVE AND
TO-HEAR
WHICH which(p)
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
YE-ARE-HEARING AND
NOT
THEY-HEAR
13:18 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oun oun
Conj
akousate thn akouO ho

parabolhn tou parabolE ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
speirantos speirO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
18 Hear ye therefore parable of the sower.
the
YOU(p) ye
THEN HEAR hear-ye !
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
SOWING one-sowing sunientos suniEmi

19 When any one heareth the word of the kingdom, and understandeth [it] not, then cometh the wicked [one], and catcheth away that which was sown in his heart. This is he which received seed by the way side.
13:19 pantos akouontos

pas
a_ Gen Sg m
akouO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias kai mh basileia kai mE

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Part Neg
OF-EVERY
one-HEARING one-hearing o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
saying word
OF-THE
KINGdom
AND
NO
OF-understandING understanding en en
Prep
ercetai erchomai
ponhros kai arpazei ponEros kai harpazO

a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
esparmenon speirO
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
IS-COMING
THE
wicked-one wicked-one estin eimi
AND
IS-SNATCHING THE
HAVING-been-SOWN IN
THE

outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
spareis speirO
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HEART
OF-him
this
IS
THE-one the-one petrwdh petrOdes

a_ Acc Pl n
BESIDE THE
WAY road outos houtos
BEING-SOWN
13:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epi ta epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Pl n
spareis speirO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pd Nom Sg m
THE the-one
YET ON
THE
ROCK-PERCEIVEDS BEING-SOWN rocky-places
this
IS
THE-one the-one
20 But he that received seed into stony places, same is he that heareth word, and anon with receiveth it;
the the the joy
AV
Matthew 13
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
akouwn akouO
kai euqus kai euthus

Conj Adv
meta caras meta chara

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
lambanwn lambanO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE
saying word ecei echO
HEARING
AND
straightway WITH
JOY
GETTING-UP getting
him
13:21 ouk
ou
Part Neg
de de
Conj
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
alla proskairos alla proskairos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
IS-HAVING he-is-having de de
Conj
YET ROOT
IN
self himself
but
TOWARD-SEASON IS temporary ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
genomenhs ginomai
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
h E
Part
diwgmou diOgmos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
21 Yet hath he not root in himself, but dureth for a while: for when tribulation or persecution ariseth because of the word, by and by he is offended.
OF-BECOMING
YET CONSTRICTION OR of-affliction
OF-CHASE-ing THRU THE of-persecution because-of
saying word
straightway
skandalizetai skandalizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
he-IS-beING-SNARED
13:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akanqas akantha
n_ Acc Pl f
spareis speirO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE the-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET INTO THE
POINT-FLOWERS BEING-SOWN thorns kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
this
IS
THE-one the-one kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
akouwn akouO
merimna tou merimna ho

aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
22 He also that received seed among the thorns is he that heareth the word; and the care of this world, and the deceitfulness of riches, choke the word, and he becometh unfruitful.
THE
saying word tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
HEARING
AND
THE
anxiety worry ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
eon
AND
THE
apath apatE
n_ Nom Sg f
ploutou sumpnigei ploutos sumpnigO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai akarpos kai akarpos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
SEDUCtion OF-THE
RICHES
IS-TOGETHER-CHOKING THE is-stifling
saying word
AND
UN-FRUITful unfruitful
ginetai ginomai
it-IS-BECOMING
13:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
spareis speirO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE the-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET ON
THE
IDEAL
LAND earth
BEING-SOWN
this
IS
THE-one the-one kai kai

Conj
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
akouwn akouO
kai sunieis kai suniEmi

os hos
pr Nom Sg m
dh dE
Part
karpoforei karpophoreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
23 But he that received seed into the good ground is he that heareth the word, and understandeth [it]; which also beareth fruit, and bringeth forth, some an hundredfold, some sixty, some thirty.
THE
saying word o hos
HEARING
AND
understandING
WHO
BIND IS-FRUIT-CARRYING AND by-all-means is-bearing-fruit de de

Conj
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
men men
Part
ekaton o hekaton hos

ni numeral pr Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
exhkonta o hexEkonta hos

ni numeral pr Nom Sg n
triakonta triakonta
ni numeral
pr Nom Sg n
IS-DOING is-producing
WHICH
INDEED HUNDRED WHICH
YET SIX-TY sixty autois legwn autos legO

pp Dat Pl m
WHICH
YET THREE-TY thirtyfold h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
24 . Another parable put he forth unto them, saying, The kingdom of heaven is likened unto a man which sowed good seed in his field:
13:24 allhn
allos
a_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn pareqhken parabolE paratithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
wmoiwqh homoioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
other another
BESIDE-CAST parable
He-BESIDE-PLACES to-them he-places-before them
sayING
WAS-LIKenED THE

ouranwn anqrwpw speiranti ouranos anthrOpos speirO

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
sperma en sperma en
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-human
SOW ing
IDEAL
seed
IN
THE
FIELD
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
13:25 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kaqeudein katheudO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
anqrwpous hlqen anthrOpos erchomai

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
YET THE
TO-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING THE to-be-drowsing
humans
CAME
OF-him
THE
25 But while men slept, his enemy came and sowed tares among the wheat, and went his way.
AV
Matthew 13
ecqros echthros
a_ Nom Sg m
kai epespeiren zizania kai epispeirO zizanion

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl n
ana meson ana mesos

Prep a_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sitou sitos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai aphlqen kai aperchomai

enemy
AND
ON-SOWS sows-over
BEARDED-DARNELS UP
MIDst
OF-THE the
GRAIN
AND
FROM-CAME came-away
26 But when the blade was sprung up, and brought forth fruit, then appeared the tares also.
13:26 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
eblasthsen o blastanO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
cortos chortos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai karpon kai karpos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
epoihsen tote efanh poieO tote phainO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
when
YET GERMINATES
THE
FODDER blade
AND
FRUIT
DOES produces
then
APPEARed
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
zizania zizanion
n_ Nom Pl n
AND also
THE
BEARDED-DARNELS
13:27 proselqontes de
proserchomai
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oikodespotou eipon oikodespotEs legO

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
TOWARD-COMING approaching kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
YET THE
SLAVES
OF-THE
HOME-OWNER householder tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
said
to-him
27 So the servants of the householder came and said unto him, Sir, didst not thou sow good seed in thy field? from whence then hath it tares?
ouci ouchi
Part Int
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
sperma espeiras en sperma speirO en

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Sg Prep
sw sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
poqen pothen
Adv Int
master ! Lord ! oun oun

Conj
NOT(emph.) IDEAL
seed
YOU-SOW
IN
THE
YOUR
FIELD
?-WHICH-PLACE whence ?
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
zizania zizanion
n_ Acc Pl n
THEN IS-HAVING he-is-having
BEARDED-DARNELS
13:28 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autois ecqros autos echthros

pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos touto anthrOpos houtos

n_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Sg n
epoihsen oi poieO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
THE
WH WH
YET he-AVERRed
NA
to-them
NA
enemy
NA
human
this
DOES
THE
YET
28 He said unto them, An enemy hath done this. The servants said unto him, Wilt thou then that we go and gather them up?
autw legousin
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
legousin autw legO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
apelqontes aperchomai
SLAVES
ARE-sayING
to-him
YOU-ARE-WILLING THEN FROM-COMING coming-away
sullexwmen sullegO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
WE-SHOULD-BE-TOGETHER-collectING them we-should-be-culling
13:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mhpote mEpote
Adv
sullegontes sullegO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
zizania zizanion
n_ Acc Pl n
29 But he said, Nay; lest while ye gather up the tares, ye root up also the wheat with them.
THE
YET he-IS-AVERRING NOT not ama hama

Adv
NO-?-when TOGETHER-collectING THE lest-at-some-time culling autois ton autos ho

pp Dat Pl n t_ Acc Sg m
BEARDED-DARNELS
ekrizwshte ekrizoO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
YE-SHOULD-BE-OUT-ROOTING SIMULTANEOUS to-them ye-should-be-rooting-up at-the-same-time
THE
GRAIN
13:30 afete
aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
sunauxanesqai sunauxanomai
vn Pres Pas
amfotera ews tou amphoteroi heOs ho

a_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Gen Sg m
qerismou kai en therismos kai en

n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep
FROM-LET leave-ye ! kairw kairos

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GROWING-UP both to-be-growing-up-together qerismou erw therismos ereO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
TILL until tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE the
harvest
AND
IN
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeristais sullexate theristEs sullegO

n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
prwton prOton
Adv
30 Let both grow together until the harvest: and in the time of harvest I will say to the reapers, Gather ye together first the tares, and bind them in bundles to burn them: but gather the wheat into my barn.
SEASON
OF-THE
harvest
I-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE
WH
reapers
NA
TOGETHER-collect BEFORE-most cull-ye ! first desmas pros desmE pros

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
zizania zizanion
n_ Acc Pl n
kai dhsate kai deO

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
eis
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
BEARDED-DARNELS AND
BIND bind-ye ! de de
Conj
them
WH
INTO
NA
bundles
TOWARD THE
katakausai auta katakaiO autos

vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
sunagete
sunagagete sunagO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
TO-DOWN-BURN them to-burn-up
THE
YET GRAIN
BE-TOGETHER-LEADING be-ye-gathering !
INTO THE
AV
Matthew 13
apoqhkhn mou apothEkE egO

FROM-PLACE barn
OF-ME
13:31 allhn
allos
a_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn pareqhken parabolE paratithEmi

autois legwn autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
omoia homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
other another
BESIDE-CAST parable
He-BESIDE-PLACES to-them he-places-before them
sayING
LIKE
IS
THE

ouranwn kokkw ouranos kokkos

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m
sinapews on sinapi hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Acc Sg m
labwn lambanO
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
31 Another parable put he forth unto them, saying, The kingdom of heaven is like to a grain of mustard seed, which a man took, and sowed in his field:
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD
WHICH
GETTING
human
espeiren en speirO en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SOWS
IN
THE
FIELD
OF-him
13:32 o
hos
pr Nom Sg n
mikroteron men mikros men

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp Part
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pantwn twn pas ho

a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
spermatwn otan sperma hotan

n_ Gen Pl n Conj
de de
Conj
WHICH
LITTLER smaller meizon mega
INDEED IS
OF-ALL
OF-THE the
seeds
when-EVER YET whenever dendron dendron

n_ Nom Sg n
auxhqh auxanO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
lacanwn estin lachanon eimi

n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ginetai kai ginomai

32 Which indeed is the least of all seeds: but when it is grown, it is the greatest among herbs, and becometh a tree, so that the birds of the air come and lodge in the branches thereof.
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
MAY-BE-BEING-GROWN GREATer it-may-be-being-grown wste hOste

Conj
OF-THE
GREENS
IS
AND
IS-BECOMING
TREE
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai kataskhnoun ouranos kai kataskEnoO

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-COMING THE so-that tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
flyers OF-THE flying-creatures
heaven
AND
TO-BE-DOWN-BOOTHING IN to-be-roosting among
kladois autou klados autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg n
THE
boughs
OF-it
WH WH NA NA
13:33 allhn
allos
a_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn parabolE
n_ Acc Sg f
elalhsen autois
elalhsen autois laleO autos

omoia homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
other another h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
BESIDE-CAST parable ouranwn zumh ouranos zumE

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f
He-TALKS he-speaks hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
to-them
LIKE
IS

labousa lambanO
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
enekruyen egkruptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
33 Another parable spake he unto them; The kingdom of heaven is like unto leaven, which a woman took, and hid in three measures of meal, till the whole was leavened.
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-FERMENT WHICH to-leaven ezumwqh zumoO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
GETTING
WOMAN
she-IN-HIDES hides-in
eis eis
Prep
aleurou sata aleuron saton

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Pl n
tria treis
n_ Acc Pl n
ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg n
INTO OF-MEAL
SATONS seahs panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
THREE
TILL
OF-WHICH WAS-FERMENTED WHOLE which was-leavened ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
13:34 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
elalhsen o laleO ho
en en
Prep
parabolais tois parabolE ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl m
oclois kai ochlos kai

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
these ALL these-things cwris chOris

Adv
TALKS speaks
THE
JESUS
IN
to-THE
THRONGS AND
34 All these things spake Jesus unto the multitude in parables; and without a parable spake he not unto them:
parabolhs ouden parabolE oudeis

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Sg n
elalei laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
apart-from BESIDE-CAST parable
NOT-YET-ONE He-TALKED nothing he-spoke to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
to-them
13:35 opws
hopOs
Adv
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE so-that may-be-being-fulfilled legontos legO

BEING-declarED
THRU THE through stoma stoma

n_ Acc Sg n
BEFORE-AVERer prophet mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
anoixw anoigO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
parabolais to parabolE ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg n
35 That it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophet, saying, I will open my mouth in parables; I will utter things which have been kept secret from the foundation of the world.
sayING
I-SHALL-BE-UP-OPENING IN I-shall-be-opening
THE
MOUTH
OF-ME
AV
Matthew 13
ereuxomai ereugomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
kekrummena kruptO
vp Perf Pas Acc Pl n
apo apo
Prep
katabolhs katabolE
n_ Gen Sg f
NA
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-BELCHING HAVING-been-HID FROM DOWN-CASTing I-shall-be-emitting things-having-been-hid disruption
OF-SYSTEM of-world eis eis

Prep
13:36 tote afeis

tote
Adv
aphiEmi
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous hlqen ochlos erchomai

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
then
FROM-LETTING leaving autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE
THRONGS
He-CAME
INTO THE
HOME house
AND
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

legontes legO
diasafhson hmin diasapheO hemeis

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
36 Then Jesus sent the multitude away, and went into the house: and his disciples came unto him, saying, Declare unto us the parable of the tares of the field.
TOWARD-CAME to-Him came-to him parabolhn twn parabolE ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n
THE
LEARNers disciples tou ho
OF-Him
sayING
THRU-LUCID elucidate-you !
to-US
THE
zizaniwn zizanion
n_ Gen Pl n
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
BESIDE-CAST parable
OF-THE
BEARDED-DARNELS OF-THE
FIELD
13:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
37 He answered and said unto them, He that soweth the good seed is the Son of man;
THE
YET answerING
He-said
THE
One-SOWING one-sowing
THE
IDEAL
sperma estin sperma eimi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
seed
IS
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
13:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
agros agros
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
YET FIELD
IS
THE
SYSTEM world
THE
YET IDEAL
seed
38 The field is the world; the good seed are the children of the kingdom; but the tares are the children of the wicked [one];
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias ta basileia ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
zizania zizanion
n_ Nom Pl n
these
ARE
THE
SONS
OF-THE
KINGdom
THE
YET BEARDED-DARNELS
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ponhrou ponEros
a_ Gen Sg m
ARE
THE
SONS
OF-THE
wicked-one wicked-one speiras speirO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
13:39 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ecqros echthros
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET enemy
THE the-one
SOW ing
them
IS
THE
39 The enemy that sowed them is the devil; the harvest is the end of the world; and the reapers are the angels.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qerismos sunteleia therismos sunteleia

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
qeristai theristEs
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET harvest
TOGETHER-FINISH OF-eon conclusion
IS
THE
YET reapers
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
MESSENGERS ARE
13:40 wsper oun

hOsper
Adv
oun
Conj
sullegetai sullegO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
zizania zizanion
n_ Nom Pl n
kai puri kai pur

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
AS-EVEN even-as
WH
THEN IS-beING-TOGETHER-collectED THE is-being-culled

NA
BEARDED-DARNELS AND
to-FIRE
40 As therefore the tares are gathered and burned in the fire; so shall it be in the end of this world.
katakaietai
katakaietai katakaiO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunteleia sunteleia
n_ Dat Sg f
IS-beING-DOWN-BURNED is-being-burned-up tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
thus
it-SHALL-BE
IN
THE
TOGETHER-FINISH conclusion
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
eon
AV
Matthew 13
13:41 apostelei
apostellO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou tous anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-commissionING THE shall-be-dispatching kai sullexousin kai sullegO

SON
OF-THE
human
THE
MESSENGERS OF-Him
41 The Son of man shall send forth his angels, and they shall gather out of his kingdom all things that offend, and them which do iniquity;
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias autou basileia autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-collectING OUT OF-THE they-shall-be-culling poiountas poieO

KINGdom
OF-Him
ALL
THE
skandala kai tous skandalon kai ho

n_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
anomian anomia
n_ Acc Sg f
SNARES
AND
THE-ones the-ones
DOING
THE
UN-LAWness lawlessness thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
13:42 kai balousin

kai
Conj
ballO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl

pp Acc Pl m Prep
kaminon tou kaminos ho

puros pur
n_ Gen Sg n
ekei ekei
Adv
42 And shall cast them into a furnace of fire: there shall be wailing and gnashing of teeth.
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-CASTING them
INTO THE
BURNer furnace
OF-THE
FIRE
there
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
klauqmos kai o klauthmos kai ho


odontwn odous
n_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE
THE
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
TEETH
13:43 tote oi
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dikaioi eklamyousin dikaios eklampO

a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
ws o hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
then
THE
JUST just-ones patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-OUT-SHINING AS shall-be-shining-out autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
SUN
IN
THE
43 Then shall the righteous shine forth as the sun in the kingdom of their Father. Who hath ears to hear, let him hear.
basileia tou basileia ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
akouetw akouO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
KINGdom
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-them
THE
EARS
LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing !
44 . Again, the kingdom of heaven is like unto treasure hid in a field; the which when a man hath found, he hideth, and for joy thereof goeth and selleth all that he hath, and buyeth that field.
13:44 omoia
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn qhsaurw ouranos thEsauros

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m
LIKE
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-PLACE-INTO-MORROW to-treasure anqrwpos ekruyen anthrOpos kruptO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kekrummenw kruptO
vp Perf Pas Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eurwn heuriskO
kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
HAVING-been-HID
IN
THE
FIELD
WHICH
FINDING
human
NA
HIDES he-hides osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
AND
FROM
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
upagei hupagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai pwlei kai pOleO

panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
JOY
OF-it of-him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IS-UNDER-LEADING AND is-going-away agron agros

n_ Acc Sg m
IS-SELLING
ALL
as-much-as he-IS-HAVING whatever
kai agorazei kai agorazO

ekeinon ekeinos
pd Acc Sg m
AND
IS-BUYING
THE
FIELD
that
NA
13:45 palin omoia

palin
Adv
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpw anthrOpos
n_ Dat Sg m
45 Again, the kingdom of heaven is like unto a merchant man, seeking goodly pearls:
AGAIN
LIKE
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-human
emporw zhtounti emporos zEteO

n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
kalous margaritas kalos margaritEs

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
merchant
SEEKING
IDEAL
PEARLS
13:46 eurwn
heuriskO
de de
Conj
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
polutimon margarithn apelqwn polutimos margaritEs aperchomai

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
pepraken pipraskO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
FINDING
YET ONE
MUCH-VALUED very-precious
PEARL
he-HAS-disposED-of
46 Who, when he had found one pearl of great price, went and sold all that he had, and bought it.
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai hgorasen auton kai agorazO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
ALL
as-much-as he-HAD whatever
AND
BUYS
SAME him
AV
Matthew 13
13:47 palin omoia

palin
Adv
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn saghnh blhqeish ouranos sagEnE ballO

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f vp Aor Pas Dat Sg f
AGAIN
LIKE
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-SEINE to-dragnet
BEING-CAST
47 Again, the kingdom of heaven is like unto a net, that was cast into the sea, and gathered of every kind:
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai ek thalassa kai ek

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep
pantos genous pas genos

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
sunagagoush sunagO
vp 2Aor Act Dat Sg f
INTO THE
SEA
AND
OUT OF-EVERY
breed species
TOGETHER-LEADING gathering aigialon kai kaqisantes aigialos kai kathizO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
48 Which, when it was full, they drew to shore, and sat down, and gathered the good into vessels, but cast the bad away.
13:48 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
ote eplhrwqh anabibasantes epi ton hote plEroO anabibazO epi ho

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
WHICH
when
it-WAS-FILLED
UP-STEPizing hauling-up eis eis

Prep
ON
THE
BEACH
AND
being-seated
sunelexan sullegO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kala kalos
a_ Acc Pl n
aggh aggos
n_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
sapra sapros
a_ Acc Pl n
exw ebalon exO ballO

THEY-TOGETHER-collect THE they-cull
IDEAL ideal(p) en en
Prep
INTO CROCKS
THE
YET ROTTen rotten(p) tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OUT
THEY-CAST(past)
13:49 outws estai

houtOs
Adv
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunteleia sunteleia
n_ Dat Sg f
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
exeleusontai exerchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
thus
it-SHALL-BE
IN
THE
TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE conclusion tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
eon
SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING shall-be-coming-out mesou mesos

a_ Gen Sg n
49 So shall it be at the end of the world: the angels shall come forth, and sever the wicked from among the just,
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai aforiousin kai aphorizO

Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
ponhrous ek ponEros ek
a_ Acc Pl m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
THE
MESSENGERS AND
SHALL-BE-FROM-definING THE shall-be-severing
wicked wicked-ones
OUT OF-MIDst
OF-THE
dikaiwn dikaios
a_ Gen Pl m
JUST just-ones
13:50 kai balousin

kai
Conj
ballO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl

pp Acc Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kaminon tou kaminos ho

puros pur
n_ Gen Sg n
ekei ekei
Adv
50 And shall cast them into the furnace of fire: there shall be wailing and gnashing of teeth.
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-CASTING them
INTO THE
BURNer furnace
OF-THE
FIRE
there
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m


odontwn odous
n_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE
THE
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
TEETH
13:51 sunhkate tauta

suniEmi
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
nai nai
Part
51 Jesus saith unto them, Have ye understood all these things? They say unto him, Yea, Lord.
YE-understand
these ALL these-things eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YEA yes pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
13:52 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
autois dia autos dia

pp Dat Pl m Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
grammateus grammateus
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET He-said
to-them
THRU this because-of
EVERY
WRITer scribe estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
maqhteuqeis mathEteuO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

ouranwn omoios ouranos homoios

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpw anthrOpos
n_ Dat Sg m
52 Then said he unto them, Therefore every scribe [which is] instructed unto the kingdom of heaven is like unto a man [that is] an householder, which bringeth forth out of his treasure [things] new and old.
BEING-made-LEARNer to-THE being-made-disciple oikodespoth ostis oikodespotEs hostis

n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
LIKE
IS
to-human
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qhsaurou thEsauros
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kaina kainos
a_ Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
HOME-OWNER householder palaia palaios

a_ Acc Pl n
WHO-ANY who-any
IS-OUT-CASTING OUT OF-THE is-extracting
PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-him treasure
NEW AND new-things
OLD
13:53 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
parabolas tautas parabolE houtos

n_ Acc Pl f pd Acc Pl f
53 . And it came to pass, [that] when Jesus had finished these parables, he departed thence.
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred
when
FINISHES
THE
JESUS
THE
BESIDE-CASTS these parables
AV
methren metairO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ekeiqen ekeithen
Adv
He-WITH-LIFTS thence he-withdraws
13:54 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
patrida patris
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
edidasken autous en didaskO autos en

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
COMING
INTO THE
FATHER[-place] OF-Him own-country ekplhssesqai ekplEssO

vn Pres Pas
He-TAUGHT
them
IN
THE
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
wste hOste
Conj
autous kai legein autos kai legO

pp Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres Act
poqen pothen
Adv Int
54 And when he was come into his own country, he taught them in their synagogue, insomuch that they were astonished, and said, Whence hath this [man] this wisdom, and [these] mighty works?
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them synagogue toutw h houtos ho

pd Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-beING-astonishED them so-that auth houtos

pd Nom Sg f
AND
TO-BE-sayING ?-WHICH-PLACE whence ?
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
dunameis dunamis
n_ Nom Pl f
to-this-One to-this-one
THE
WISDOM
this
AND
THE
ABILITIES powerful-deeds tektonos uios tektOn huios

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
13:55 ouc
ou
Part Neg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouc ou
Part Neg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
NOT
this
IS
THE
OF-THE
ARTisan carpenter
SON
NOT
THE
55 Is not this the carpenter's son? is not his mother called Mary? and his brethren, James, and Joses, and Simon, and Judas?
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legetai legO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
mariam kai oi maria kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Nom Pl m

iakwbos kai iwshf iakObos kai iOsEph

n_ Nom Sg m Conj ni proper
MOTHER
OF-Him
IS-beING-said
MARIAM Mary
AND
THE
brothers
OF-Him
JACOBUS James
AND
JOSEPH
kai simwn kai simOn

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kai ioudas kai ioudas

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
AND
SIMON
AND
JUDAS
13:56 kai ai
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
adelfai autou adelphE autos

n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg m
ouci ouchi
Part Int
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
pros pros
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
AND
THE
sisters
OF-Him
NOT(emph.) ALL not(emph.) ? panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
56 And his sisters, are they not all with us? Whence then hath this [man] all these things?
TOWARD US
ARE they-are
poqen pothen
Adv Int
oun oun
Conj
toutw tauta houtos houtos

pd Dat Sg m pd Nom Pl n
?-WHICH-PLACE THEN to-this-One whence ? to-this-one
these ALL these-things autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
13:57 kai eskandalizonto en

kai
Conj
skandalizO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
en
Prep
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ouk autos ou

AND
THEY-were-SNARED
IN
Him
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
NOT
57 And they were offended in him. But Jesus said unto them, A prophet is not without honour, save in his own country, and in his own house.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
atimos atimos
a_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
patridi patris
n_ Dat Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
IS
BEFORE-AVERer UN-VALUED IF prophet dishonored autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
NO
IN
THE
FATHER[-place] AND own-country
IN
THE
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
HOME house
OF-him
13:58 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
epoihsen ekei dunameis poieO ekei dunamis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Pl f
pollas dia polus dia

a_ Acc Pl f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apistian autwn apistia autos

58 And he did not many mighty works there because of their unbelief.
AND
NOT
He-DOES
there
ABILITIES MANY powerful-deeds
THRU THE because-of
UN-BELIEF unbelief
OF-them
AV
Matthew 14
14:1 en
en
Prep
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tetraarchs thn tetraarchEs ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
. At that time Herod the tetrarch heard of the fame of Jesus,
IN
that
THE
SEASON
HEARS
HEROD
THE
FOURth-chief tetrarch
THE
akohn akoE
n_ Acc Sg f
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
HEARing tidings
OF-JESUS
14:2 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
paisin pais
n_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
he-said said
to-THE
boys pages
OF-him
this
IS
JOHN
THE
And said unto his servants, This is John the Baptist; he is risen from the dead; and therefore mighty works do shew forth themselves in him.
baptisths autos baptistEs autos

n_ Nom Sg m pp Nom Sg m
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn kai dia nekros kai dia

a_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
DIPist baptist dunameis dunamis

n_ Nom Pl f
he
WAS-ROUSED FROM THE
DEAD dead-ones
AND
THE
energousin en energeO en
vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ABILITIES ARE-IN-ACTING powerful-deeds are-operating
IN
him
NA
14:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar hrwdhs gar hErOdEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
krathsas krateO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn edhsen iOannEs deO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THE
for
HEROD
HOLDing
THE
JOHN
BINDS
him
AND
For Herod had laid hold on John, and bound him, and put [him] in prison for Herodias'sake, his brother Philip's wife.
en en
Prep
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
apeqeto apotithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
hrwdiada thn hErOdias ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika filippou tou gunE philippos ho

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
IN
GUARD-house FROM-PLACED THRU HERODIAS jail put-away because-of
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-Philip
THE
adelfou autou adelphos autos

n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
brother
OF-him
14:4 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs autw iOannEs autos

n_ Nom Sg m pp Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
For John said unto him, It is not lawful for thee to have her.
said
for
THE
JOHN
to-him
NOT
IS-allowed it-is-allowed
to-YOU you
TO-BE-HAVING
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
her
14:5 kai qelwn

kai
Conj
thelO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apokteinai efobhqh apokteinO phobeO

vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti ws hoti hOs

Conj Adv
AND
WILLING
him
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill
he-WAS-afraid-of THE
THRONG
that
AS
And when he would have put him to death, he feared the multitude, because they counted him as a prophet.
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERer him prophet
THEY-HAD
14:6 genesiois
genesia
n_ Dat Pl n
de de
Conj
genomenois ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Dat Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hrwdou wrchsato h hErOdEs orcheomai ho

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr thugatEr
n_ Nom Sg f
to-birthdays YET BECOMING to-birthday-celebrations ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
HEROD
DANCES
THE
DAUGHTER
But when Herod's birthday was kept, the daughter of Herodias danced before them, and pleased Herod.
hrwdiados en hErOdias en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
kai hresen kai areskO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
hrwdh hErOdEs
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
HERODIAS
IN
THE
MIDst
AND
PLEASES
to-THE the
HEROD
14:7 oqen
hothen
Adv
meq meta
Prep
orkou horkos
n_ Gen Sg m
wmologhsen auth homologeO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg f
dounai o didOmi hos

vn 2Aor Act pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
Whereupon he promised with an oath to give her whatsoever she would ask.
WHICH-PLACE WITH OATH whence
he-avows
to-her
TO-GIVE
WHICH
IF-EVER
AV
Matthew 14
aithshtai aiteO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
she-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING
14:8 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
probibasqeisa probibazO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
upo ths hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
mhtros auths mEtEr autos

dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
YET BEING-BEFORE-have-STEPizED by being-egged-on wde epi pinaki thn hOde epi pinax ho
Adv Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
THE
MOTHER
OF-her
BE-GIVING be-you-giving ! baptistou baptistEs

n_ Gen Sg m
to-ME
And she, being before instructed of her mother, said, Give me here John Baptist's head in a charger.
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kefalhn iwannou tou kephalE iOannEs ho

she-IS-AVERRING here
ON
BOARD platter o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
HEAD
OF-JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist
9
14:9 kai luphqeis

kai
Conj
lupeO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
basileus dia basileus dia

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
orkous kai tous horkos kai ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m
AND
BEING-SORROWED THE being-sorry
KING
THRU THE because-of
OATHS
AND
THE
And the king was sorry: nevertheless for the oath's sake, and them which sat with him at meat, he commanded [it] to be given [her].
sunanakeimenous sunanakeimai
ekeleusen doqhnai keleuO didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING he-ORDERS ones-lying-back-at-table-together
TO-BE-GIVEN
NA
14:10 kai pemyas

kai
Conj
pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
apekefalisen apokephalizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn en iOannEs en
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
10 And he sent, and beheaded John in the prison.
AND
SENDing
he-FROM-HEADizES he-beheads h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
JOHN
IN
THE
GUARD-house jail tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
11 And his head was brought in a charger, and given to the damsel: and she brought [it] to her mother.
14:11 kai hnecqh

kai
Conj
pherO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kefalh autou kephalE autos

epi pinaki kai edoqh epi pinax kai didOmi

Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND
WAS-CARRIED THE was-brought th ho
HEAD
OF-him
ON
BOARD platter
AND
it-WAS-GIVEN to-THE was-given
korasiw kai hnegken korasion kai pherO

n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
t_ Dat Sg f
maiden
AND
she-CARRIES to-THE
MOTHER
OF-her
14:12 kai proselqontes oi

kai
Conj
proserchomai
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

hran airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ptwma kai ptOma kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
12 And his disciples came, and took up the body, and buried it, and went and told Jesus.
AND
WH
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-him
LIFT take-away
THE
corpse
AND
eqayan thaptO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton
NA
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai elqontes kai erchomai

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
entomb
SAME him de de
Conj
AND
COMING
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE to-THE they-report ploiw ploion

n_ Dat Sg n
JESUS
14:13 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
anecwrhsen ekeiqen en anachOreO ekeithen en

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep
eis eis
Prep
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
HEARing hearing-it topon topos

n_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
JESUS
UP-SPACES retires
thence
IN
FLOATer ship
INTO DESOLATE wilderness pezh pezE

Adv
kat kata
Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
kai akousantes oi kai akouO ho

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m

13 . When Jesus heard [of it], he departed thence by ship into a desert place apart: and when the people had heard [thereof], they followed him on foot out of the cities.
PLACE
according-to OWN
AND
HEARing
THE
THRONGS
follow
to-Him him
aFOOT
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
polewn polis
n_ Gen Pl f
FROM THE
cities
14:14 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai esplagcnisqh kai splagchnizomai

Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out
He-PERCEIVED MANY vast
THRONG
AND
He-IS-compassionatED ON he-is-moved-with-compassion
14 And Jesus went forth, and saw a great multitude, and was moved with compassion toward them, and he healed their sick.
autois kai eqerapeusen tous autos kai therapeuO ho

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
arrwstous arrhOstos
a_ Acc Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
them
AND
curES he-cures
THE
UN-FARE-WELLS OF-them ones-ailing
AV
Matthew 14
14:15 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai legontes mathEtEs legO

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
TOWARD-CAME to-Him came-to him topos topos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
LEARNers disciples hdh EdE

Adv
sayING
erhmos erEmos
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
parhlqen parerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apoluson apoluO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
15 And when it was evening, his disciples came to him, saying, This is a desert place, and the time is now past; send the multitude away, that they may go into the villages, and buy themselves victuals.
DESOLATE wilderness tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
IS
THE
PLACE
AND
THE
HOUR
ALREADY BESIDE-CAME FROM-LOOSE passed-by dismiss-you ! agoraswsin agorazO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
oclous ina ochlos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
THE
THRONGS
THAT FROM-COMING coming-away
INTO THE
VILLAGES THEY-SHOULD-BE-BUYING to-selves themselves
brwmata brOma
n_ Acc Pl n
FOODS
WH NA
14:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ou autos ou
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
16 But Jesus said unto them, They need not depart; give ye them to eat.
THE
YET
JESUS
said
to-them
NOT
need
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
apelqein aperchomai
vn 2Aor Act
dote didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
autois umeis autos humeis

pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
THEY-ARE-HAVING TO-BE-FROM-COMING BE-GIVING to-be-coming-away be-ye-giving !
to-them them ouk ou

Part Neg
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-EATING
14:17 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
wde ei hOde ei
Adv Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
pente pente
ni numeral
17 And they say unto him, We have here but five loaves, and two fishes.
THE
YET THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him
NOT
WE-ARE-HAVING here
IF
NO
FIVE
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
kai duo kai duo

Conj ni numeral
icquas ichthus
n_ Acc Pl m
BREADS AND cakes-of-bread
TWO
FISHES
14:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ferete pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
wde autous hOde autos

Adv pp Acc Pl m
18 He said, Bring them hither to me.
THE
YET He-said
BE-CARRYING to-ME be-ye-bringing ! tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
here
them
14:19 kai keleusas

kai
Conj
keleuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oclous anakliqhnai ochlos anaklinO

n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Pas
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
cortou chortos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
ORDERing
THE
THRONGS
TO-BE-UP-CLINED ON to-recline kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
THE
FODDER grass eis eis

Prep
labwn lambanO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pente artous pente artos

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
icquas anableyas ichthus anablepO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
19 And he commanded the multitude to sit down on the grass, and took the five loaves, and the two fishes, and looking up to heaven, he blessed, and brake, and gave the loaves to [his] disciples, and the disciples to the multitude.
GETTING taking ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
FIVE
THE
TWO
FISHES
UP-looking looking-up
INTO
ouranon euloghsen kai klasas ouranos eulogeO kai klaO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais tous mathEtEs ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
THE
heaven
He-blessES
AND
BREAKing
GIVES he-gives oclois ochlos

n_ Dat Pl m
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
THE
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
maqhtai tois mathEtEs ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
BREADS THE cakes-of-bread
YET LEARNers disciples pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
to-THE
THRONGS
14:20 kai efagon

kai
Conj
esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ecortasqhsan kai hran kai chortazO kai airO

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
perisseuon perisseuO
AND
ATE they-ate
ALL
AND
ARE-satisfiED
AND
THEY-LIFT they-pick-up
THE
exceedING being-superfluous
20 And they did all eat, and were filled: and they took up of the fragments that remained twelve baskets full.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
klasmatwn dwdeka kofinous plhreis klasma dOdeka kophinos plErEs

n_ Gen Pl n ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
BREAKS fragments
TWO-TEN twelve
PANNIERS
FULL
AV
Matthew 14
14:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
esqiontes esthiO
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
wsei pentakiscilioi cwris hOsei pentakischilioi chOris

Adv n_ Nom Pl m Adv
21 And they that had eaten were about five thousand men, beside women and children.
THE
YET ones-EATING ones-eating
WERE
MEN
AS-IF about
FIVE-times-THOUSAND five-thousand
apart-from
gunaikwn kai paidiwn gunE kai paidion

n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n
WOMEN
AND
WH
little-boys-and-girls
NA
14:22 kai
kai
Conj
euqews
euqews eutheOs
Adv
hnagkasen anagkazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas embhnai mathEtEs embainO

n_ Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
AND
NA
immediately
He-necessitatES THE he-compels auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
LEARNers disciples eis eis

Prep
TO-IN-STEP INTO to-step-in peran peran

Adv
22 . And straightway Jesus constrained his disciples to get into a ship, and to go before him unto the other side, while he sent the multitudes away.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai proagein ploion kai proagO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ews heOs
Conj
THE
FLOATer ship apolush apoluO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING Him to-be-preceding tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
INTO THE
OTHER-SIDE TILL
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
oclous ochlos
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-WHICH He-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE which he-should-be-dismissing
THRONGS
14:23 kai apolusas

kai
Conj
apoluO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous anebh ochlos anabainO

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
kat kata
Prep
AND
FROM-LOOSing dismissing
THE
THRONGS
He-UP-STEPPed INTO THE he-ascended monos monos

a_ Nom Sg m
mountain
according-to
23 And when he had sent the multitudes away, he went up into a mountain apart to pray: and when the evening was come, he was there alone.
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
proseuxasqai oyias proseuchomai opsios

vn Aor midD a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei ekei
Adv
OWN
TO-pray
ONLY alone
He-WAS
there
14:24 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
ploion ploion
n_ Nom Sg n
hdh EdE
Adv
stadious pollous apo stadion polus apo

n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
apeicen apechO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
YET FLOATer ship
ALREADY stadia
MANY
FROM THE
LAND
FROM-HAD was-away anemos anemos

n_ Nom Sg m
24 But the ship was now in the midst of the sea, tossed with waves: for the wind was contrary.
basanizomenon upo twn basanizO hupo ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl n
kumatwn hn kuma eimi

n_ Gen Pl n vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar enantios o gar enantios ho

Conj a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
beING-ORDEALizED being-tormented
by
THE
BILLOWS
WAS
for
IN-INSTEAD contrary pros pros

Prep
THE
WIND
14:25 tetarth de
tetartos
a_ Dat Sg f
de
Conj
fulakh ths phulakE ho

nuktos hlqen nux erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous peripatwn autos peripateO

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
25 And in the fourth watch of the night Jesus went unto them, walking on the sea.
to-FOURth
YET GUARD watch qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
NIGHT
He-CAME
TOWARD them
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ON
THE
SEA
14:26 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
maqhtai idontes mathEtEs eidO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs peripatounta thalassa peripateO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
THE
YET LEARNers disciples legontes legO

PERCEIVING
Him
ON
THE
SEA
ABOUT-TREADING walking fobou phobos

n_ Gen Sg m
26 And when the disciples saw him walking on the sea, they were troubled, saying, It is a spirit; and they cried out for fear.
etaracqhsan tarassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
oti fantasma estin hoti phantasma eimi

kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WERE-DISTURBED sayING
that
APPEAR-effect it-IS phantom
AND
FROM THE
FEAR
ekraxan krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-CRY they-cry-out
14:27 euqus
euthus
Adv
de de
Conj
elalhsen laleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

qarseite tharseO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
27 But straightway Jesus spake unto them, saying, Be of good cheer; it is I; be not afraid.
straightway YET TALKS speaks
THE
JESUS
to-them
sayING
BE-YE-COURAGE-ING be-ye-having-courage !
AV
Matthew 14
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
fobeisqe phobeO
AM
NO
WH WH
14:28 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o petros eipen autw
WH
WH
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
answerING
NA
YET
to-Him him su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
THE
Peter
28 And Peter answered him and said, Lord, if it be thou, bid me come unto thee on the water.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
keleuson me keleuO egO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
said
Master ! Lord ! epi ta epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl n
IF
YOU
ARE
ORDER order-you !
ME
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
udata hudOr
n_ Acc Pl n
YOU
ON
THE
waters
14:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
elqe erchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai katabas kai katabainO

apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
NA
YET He-said
BE-COMING AND be-you-coming !
DOWN-STEPPing descending
FROM THE
FLOATer ship pros pros

Prep
29 And he said, Come. And when Peter was come down out of the ship, he walked on the water, to go to Jesus.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
periepathsen epi ta peripateO epi ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Pl n
udata hudOr
n_ Acc Pl n
kai hlqen kai erchomai

THE
Peter
ABOUT-TREADS walks
ON
THE
waters
AND
CAME
TOWARD
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
JESUS
NA
14:30 blepwn
blepO
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anemon anemos
n_ Acc Sg m
iscuron ischuros
a_ Acc Sg m
efobhqh phobeO
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
kai arxamenos kai archO

Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
lookING observing katapontizesqai katapontizO

vn Pres Pas
YET THE
WIND
STRONG
he-WAS-afraid
AND
beginning
30 But when he saw the wind boisterous, he was afraid; and beginning to sink, he cried, saying, Lord, save me.
ekraxen krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
swson sOzO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
TO-BE-DOWN-MARINE-ING he-CRIES to-be-sinking
sayING
Master ! Lord ! ekteinas ekteinO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
SAVE save-you ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ME
14:31 euqews de
eutheOs
Adv
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
epelabeto autou epilambanomai autos

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
immediately
YET THE
JESUS
OUT-STRETCHing THE stretching-out eis eis

Prep
HAND
ON-GOT got-hold
OF-him
31 And immediately Jesus stretched forth [his] hand, and caught him, and said unto him, O thou of little faith, wherefore didst thou doubt?
kai legei kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oligopiste oligopistos
a_ Voc Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
edistasas distazO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
FEW-BELIEVing ! INTO ANY scant-of-faith-one ! why ? autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
YOU-TWO-STAND you-hesitate anemos anemos

n_ Nom Sg m
32 And when they were come into the ship, the wind ceased.
14:32 kai anabantwn

kai
Conj
anabainO
vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ekopasen o ploion kopazO ho

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
AND
OF-UP-STEPPing of-going-up de de
Conj
OF-them
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
STRIKES flags
THE
WIND
14:33 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
prosekunhsan autw proskuneO autos

legontes legO
alhqws alEthOs
Adv
THE-ones the-ones qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
YET IN
THE
FLOATer ship
worship
to-Him him
sayING
TRUly
33 Then they that were in the ship came and worshipped him, saying, Of a truth thou art the Son of God.
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
OF-God
SON
YOU-ARE
14:34 kai diaperasantes hlqon

kai
Conj
diaperaO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
gennhsaret gennEsaret
ni proper
34 . And when they were gone over, they came into the land of Gennesaret.
AND
ferrying
THEY-CAME
ON
THE
LAND
INTO GENNESARET
AV
14:35 kai epignontes

kai
Conj
epiginOskO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
topou topos
n_ Gen Sg m
ekeinou apesteilan ekeinos apostellO

pd Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
ON-KNOWING recognizing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
Him
THE
MEN
OF-THE
PLACE
that
THEY-commission dispatch
eis eis
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
pericwron ekeinhn kai proshnegkan autw perichOros ekeinos kai prospherO autos
a_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

35 And when the men of that place had knowledge of him, they sent out into all that country round about, and brought unto him all that were diseased;
INTO WHOLE
THE
that
AND
TOWARD-CARRY they-bring-to
to-Him him
ALL
THE the-ones

EVILly illness
HAVING
WH NA
14:36 kai parekaloun

kai
Conj
auton
parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
monon aywntai monon haptO

Adv vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
AND
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED they-entreated kraspedou tou kraspedon ho

Him
THAT ONLY
THEY-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING
36 And besought him that they might only touch the hem of his garment: and as many as touched were made perfectly whole.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

kai osoi kai hosos

Conj pk Nom Pl m
hyanto haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
dieswqhsan diasOzO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
OF-THE the
HANG-FOOT tassel
OF-THE
cloak
OF-Him
AND
as-many-as TOUCH
WERE-THRU-SAVED were-saved-through
AV
Matthew 15
15:1 tote prosercontai

tote
Adv
proserchomai
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ierosolumwn farisaioi kai ierosoluma pharisaios kai

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m Conj
. Then came to Jesus scribes and Pharisees, which were of Jerusalem, saying,
then
ARE-TOWARD-COMING to-THE are-coming-to the
JESUS
FROM JERUSALEM
PHARISEES
AND
grammateis legontes grammateus legO

WRITers scribes
sayING
15:2 dia
dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

parabainousin parabainO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paradosin paradosis
n_ Acc Sg f
THRU ANY because-of what ? twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
ARE-BESIDE-STEPPING THE are-transgressing tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
tradition
NA
Why do thy disciples transgress the tradition of the elders? for they wash not their hands when they eat bread.
presbuterwn ou presbuteros ou
a_ Gen Pl m Part Neg
gar niptontai gar niptO

Conj vi Pres Mid 3 Pl
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
otan hotan
Conj
OF-THE
SENIORS elders esqiwsin esthiO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
NOT
for
THEY-ARE-WASHING THE
HANDS
OF-them
when-EVER whenever
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
BREAD
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
15:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

pp Dat Pl m Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
THRU ANY because-of what ? dia dia

Prep
AND also
YOU(p) ye
But he answered and said unto them, Why do ye also transgress the commandment of God by your tradition?
parabainete parabainO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
entolhn tou entolE ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paradosin umwn paradosis humeis

ARE-BESIDE-STEPPING THE are-transgressing
direction precept eipen legO
OF-THE
God
THRU THE because-of ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
tradition
OF-YOU(p) of-ye mhtera mEtEr

n_ Acc Sg f
4
15:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar qeos gar theos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tima timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
for
God
said
BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring ! h E

Part
FATHER
AND
THE
MOTHER
For God commanded, saying, Honour thy father and mother: and, He that curseth father or mother, let him die the death.
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kakologwn kakologeO
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mhtera qanatw teleutatw mEtEr thanatos teleutaO

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
THE
one-EVIL-sayING one-speaking-evil de de
Conj
FATHER
OR
MOTHER
to-DEATH
LET-BE-deceasING let-him-be-deceasing ! patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
15:5 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
YOU(p) ye dwron dOron

n_ Nom Sg n
YET ARE-sayING
WHO
EVER MAY-BE-sayING to-THE
FATHER
OR
to-THE
MOTHER
But ye say, Whosoever shall say to [his] father or [his] mother, [It is] a gift, by whatsoever thou mightest be profited by me;
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
ex ek
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
wfelhqhs OpheleO
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
IF-EVER OUT OF-ME
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-benefitED
15:6 ou
ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
timhsei timaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai hkurwsate kai akuroO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NOT
NO
he-SHALL-BE-VALUING THE he-shall-be-honoring qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
FATHER
OF-him
AND
YE-UN-SANCTION THE ye-invalidate
And honour not his father or his mother, [he shall be free]. Thus have ye made the commandment of God of none effect by your tradition.
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

saying word
OF-THE
God
THRU THE because-of
tradition
OF-YOU(p) of-ye hsaias Esaias

n_ Nom Sg m
15:7 upokritai kalws eprofhteusen peri

hupokritEs
n_ Voc Pl m
kalOs
Adv
prophEteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
legwn legO
hypocrites hypocrites !
IDEALly
BEFORE-AVERS prophesies outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
ABOUT YOU(p) ye ceilesin me cheilos egO

n_ Dat Pl n
[Ye] hypocrites, well did Esaias prophesy of you, saying,
ISAIAH
sayING
15:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
tima timaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
PEOPLE
this
to-THE
LIPS
ME
IS-VALUING is-honoring
THE
YET HEART
This people draweth nigh unto me with their mouth, and honoureth me with [their] lips; but their heart is far from me.
AV
Matthew 15
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
porrw porrhO
Adv
apecei apechO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-them
forward IS-FROM-HAVING FROM ME at-a-distance is-being-away sebontai sebomai

15:9 mathn de
matEn
Adv
de
Conj
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
didaskontes didaskalias entalmata didaskO didaskalia entalma

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl n
But in vain they do worship me, teaching [for] doctrines the commandments of men.
VAIN in-vain anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
YET THEY-ARE-REVERING ME
TEACHING
TEACHings
directions
OF-humans
15:10 kai proskalesamenos ton

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois akouete autos akouO

kai kai
Conj
10 . And he called the multitude, and said unto them, Hear, and understand:
AND
THE
THRONG
He-said
to-them
BE-HEARING be-ye-hearing !
AND
suniete suniEmi
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-understandING be-ye-understanding !
15:11 ou
ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eisercomenon eiserchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
koinoi koinoO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NOT
THE
INTO-COMING thing-entering
INTO THE
MOUTH
IS-COMMONING THE is-contaminating stomatos touto stoma houtos

n_ Gen Sg n pd Nom Sg n
11 Not that which goeth into the mouth defileth a man; but that which cometh out of the mouth, this defileth a man.
anqrwpon alla to anthrOpos alla ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n
ekporeuomenon ekporeuomai
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
koinoi koinoO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
human
but
THE
OUT-GOING thing-going-out
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
this
IS-COMMONING is-contaminating
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
human
15:12 tote proselqontes oi

tote
Adv
proserchomai
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai legousin autw mathEtEs legO autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
then
THE
LEARNers disciples
ARE-sayING
to-Him
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED that you-are-aware
12 Then came his disciples, and said unto him, Knowest thou that the Pharisees were offended, after they heard this saying?
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi akousantes ton pharisaios akouO ho

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
eskandalisqhsan skandalizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
PHARISEES
HEARing
THE
saying word pasa pas
ARE-SNARED
15:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
futeia hn phuteia hos

n_ Nom Sg f pr Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
efuteusen phuteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
a_ Nom Sg f
THE
YET answerING
He-said
EVERY
plant
WHICH
NOT
plants
13 But he answered and said, Every plant, which my heavenly Father hath not planted, shall be rooted up.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios ekrizwqhsetai ouranios ekrizoO

a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE
heavenly
SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-ROOTED shall-be-being-uprooted odhgoi hodEgos

n_ Nom Pl m
NA
15:14 afete
aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
autous tufloi eisin autos tuphlos eimi

pp Acc Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
tuflwn tuphlos
a_ Gen Pl m
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
FROM-LET leave-ye ! tuflon ean tuphlos ean

a_ Acc Sg m Cond
them
BLIND
THEY-ARE
WAY-LEADers guides
OF-BLIND of-blind-ones
BLIND blind-one
YET
14 Let them alone: they be blind leaders of the blind. And if the blind lead the blind, both shall fall into the ditch.
odhgh hodEgeO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
amfoteroi eis amphoteroi eis

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
boqunon pesountai bothunos piptO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
BLIND blind-one
IF-EVER MAY-BE-WAY-LEADING both may-be-guiding de de

Conj
INTO PIT
SHALL-BE-FALLING
15:15 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
frason phrazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
15 Then answered Peter and said unto him, Declare unto us this parable.
answerING
YET THE
Peter
said
to-Him
DECIPHER decipher-you !
to-US
THE
AV
Matthew 15
parabolhn parabolE
n_ Acc Sg f
NA
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
BESIDE-CAST parable
this
15:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
akmhn akmEn
n_ Acc Sg f

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
asunetoi este asunetos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
16 And Jesus said, Are ye also yet without understanding?
THE
YET He-said
POINT AND at-this-point-of-time also oti pan hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
YOU(p) ye
UN-intelligent unintelligent
ARE
15:17 ou
ou
Part Neg
noeite noeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eisporeuomenon eisporeuomai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
NOT
YE-ARE-MINDING that ye-are-apprehending koilian cwrei koilia chOreO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
EVERY
THE
INTO-GOING thing-going-into
INTO THE
MOUTH
17 Do not ye yet understand, that whatsoever entereth in at the mouth goeth into the belly, and is cast out into the draught?
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
afedrwna ekballetai aphedrOn ekballO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
INTO THE
CAVITY bowel de de
Conj
IS-SPACING AND is-becoming-contents ek ek

Prep
INTO FROM-SETTLE IS-beING-OUT-CAST latrine is-being-evacuated tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
15:18 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ekporeuomena ekporeuomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl n
stomatos ek stoma ek
n_ Gen Sg n Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kardias kardia
n_ Gen Sg f
THE the-things exercetai exerchomai
YET OUT-GOINGS going-out kakeina kakeinos

pd Nom Pl n
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OUT OF-THE
HEART
18 But those things which proceed out of the mouth come forth from the heart; and they defile the man.
koinoi koinoO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
IS-OUT-COMING is-coming-out
AND-those IS-COMMONING THE and-those-things is-contaminating kardias exercontai kardia exerchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
human
15:19 ek
ek
Prep
gar ths gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
dialogismoi ponhroi fonoi dialogismos ponEros phonos

n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
moiceiai moicheia
n_ Nom Pl f
OUT for
OF-THE
HEART
ARE-OUT-COMING are-coming-out
THRU-accounts reasonings
wicked
MURDERS
ADULTERIES
19 For out of the heart proceed evil thoughts, murders, adulteries, fornications, thefts, false witness, blasphemies:
porneiai porneia
n_ Nom Pl f
klopai yeudomarturiai blasfhmiai klopE pseudomarturia blasphEmia

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
PROSTITUTIONS thefts
FALSE-witnesses false-testimonies ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
HARM-AVERments calumnies ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
15:20 tauta
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
koinounta koinoO
anqrwpon to anthrOpos ho
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
aniptois aniptos
a_ Dat Pl m
these
IS
THE the-things ou ou
Part Neg
COMMONING contaminating ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
human
THE
YET to-UN-WASHED to-unwashed
20 These are [the things] which defile a man: but to eat with unwashen hands defileth not a man.
cersin fagein cheir esthiO

n_ Dat Pl f vn 2Aor Act
koinoi koinoO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
HANDS
TO-BE-EATING NOT
IS-COMMONING THE is-contaminating ekeiqen o ekeithen ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
human
15:21 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
21 . Then Jesus went thence, and departed into the coasts of Tyre and Sidon.
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out kai sidwnos kai sidOn

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
thence
THE
JESUS
UP-SPACES retires
INTO THE
PARTS
turou turos
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-TYRE
AND
OF-SIDON
15:22 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
cananaia apo chananaios apo

a_ Nom Sg f Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
ekeinwn exelqousa ekeinos exerchomai

pd Gen Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN lo ! legousa legO

CANAANitish
FROM THE
boundaries those
OUT-COMING coming-out qugathr thugatEr

n_ Nom Sg f
ekrazen krazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
dauid h dauid ho
ni proper t_ Nom Sg f
22 And, behold, a woman of Canaan came out of the same coasts, and cried unto him, saying, Have mercy on me, O Lord, [thou] Son of David; my daughter is grievously vexed with a devil.
CRIED
sayING
BE-MERCIFUL-to ME be-you-merciful !
Master ! Lord !
SON
of-DAVID THE of-David
DAUGHTER
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kakws daimonizetai kakOs daimonizomai

Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
OF-ME
EVILly
IS-beING-demonizED
AV
Matthew 15
15:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
apekriqh apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai proselqontes oi kai proserchomai ho

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET NOT
He-answerED
to-her her
saying word
AND
THE
23 But he answered her not a word. And his disciples came and besought him, saying, Send her away; for she crieth after us.

hrwtoun auton erOtaO autos

vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
apoluson authn apoluO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f
oti krazei hoti krazO

LEARNers disciples opisqen opisthen

Adv
OF-Him
askED
Him
sayING
FROM-LOOSE dismiss-you !
her
that
she-IS-CRYING
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
BEHIND-PLACE OF-US after us
15:24 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
apestalhn apostellO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
24 But he answered and said, I am not sent but unto the lost sheep of the house of Israel.
THE
YET answerING
He-said
NOT
I-WAS-commissionED IF
NO
INTO THE
apolwlota apollumi
vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl n
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
sheep sheep(p)
THE
HAVING-been-destroyED OF-HOME having-been-lost of-house de de

Conj
of-ISRAEL of-Israel legousa legO

15:25 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elqousa erchomai

kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
bohqei boEtheO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
25 Then came she and worshipped him, saying, Lord, help me.
THE
YET COMING
she-worshipED
to-Him him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
BE-helpING be-you-helping !
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME me
15:26 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
THE
YET answerING
He-said
NOT
it-IS
IDEAL
TO-BE-GETTING to-be-taking
26 But he answered and said, It is not meet to take the children's bread, and to cast [it] to dogs.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
teknwn kai balein teknon kai ballO

n_ Gen Pl n Conj vn 2Aor Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
kunariois kunarion
n_ Dat Pl n
THE
BREAD
OF-THE
offsprings children
AND
TO-BE-CASTING to-THE
WH NA
dogs (dim) puppies gar gar

Conj
15:27 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

Part n_ Voc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
gar
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
kunaria kunarion
n_ Nom Pl n
THE
YET she-said
YEA yes
Master ! Lord !
AND also piptontwn piptO

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n
for
THE
dogs (dim) puppies trapezhs twn trapeza ho

27 And she said, Truth, Lord: yet the dogs eat of the crumbs which fall from their masters'table.
esqiei esthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
yiciwn twn psichion ho

n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IS-EATING
FROM THE
SCRAPS
OF-THE the-ones
FALLING
FROM THE
table
OF-THE
kuriwn autwn kurios autos

n_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl n
masters
OF-them
15:28 tote apokriqeis

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
w gunai O gunE
Inj n_ Voc Sg f
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
then
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
to-her
o!
WOMAN !
GREAT
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
genhqhtw ginomai
vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ws qeleis hOs thelO

kai iaqh kai iaomai

28 Then Jesus answered and said unto her, O woman, great [is] thy faith: be it unto thee even as thou wilt. And her daughter was made whole from that very hour.
OF-YOU
THE
BELIEF faith
LET-it-BE-BEING-BECOME to-YOU let-it-be-being-become ! apo apo

Prep
AS
YOU-ARE-WILLING AND
WAS-HEALED
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr auths thugatEr autos

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs ekeinos
pd Gen Sg f
THE
DAUGHTER
OF-her
FROM THE
HOUR
that
AV
Matthew 15
15:29 kai metabas

kai
Conj
metabainO
ekeiqen o ekeithen ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan thalassa
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
thence
THE
JESUS
CAME
BESIDE THE
SEA
29 . And Jesus departed from thence, and came nigh unto the sea of Galilee; and went up into a mountain, and sat down there.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai anabas galilaia kai anabainO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
ekaqhto kathEmai
ekei ekei
Adv
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
UP-STEPPing ascending ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
INTO THE
mountain
He-sat
there
15:30 kai proshlqon

kai
Conj
proserchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
econtes echO
meq meta
Prep
eautwn cwlous heautou chOlos

pf 3 Gen Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
AND
WH

WH NA
THRONGS
NA
MANY vast
HAVING
WITH selves themselves
LAME-ones lame-ones
kullous tuflous
tuflous kullous tuphlos kullos

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
kwfous kai eterous kOphos kai heteros

a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
pollous kai polus kai

a_ Acc Pl m Conj
30 And great multitudes came unto him, having with them [those that were] lame, blind, dumb, maimed, and many others, and cast them down at Jesus'feet; and he healed them:
BLIND-ones blind-ones erriyan rhiptO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
MAIMED-ones maimed-ones podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
MUTES deaf-mutes
AND
DIFFERENT-ones MANY different-ones
AND
autous para autos para

pp Acc Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai eqerapeusen autous kai therapeuO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
THEY-TOSS them
BESIDE THE
FEET
OF-Him
AND
He-curES
them
15:31 wste
hOste
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
qaumasai blepontas thaumazO blepO

vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
kwfous lalountas kOphos laleO

a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
AS-BESIDES THE so-that

NA
THRONG
TO-MARVEL
lookING observing
MUTES deaf-mutes
TALKING speaking kai kai

Conj
kullous kullos
a_ Acc Pl m
NA
ugieis hugiEs
a_ Acc Pl m
kai cwlous peripatountas kai tuflous blepontas kai chOlos peripateO kai tuphlos blepO
Conj a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
31 Insomuch that the multitude wondered, when they saw the dumb to speak, the maimed to be whole, the lame to walk, and the blind to see: and they glorified the God of Israel.
MAIMED-ones SOUND-ones maimed-ones sound edoxasan doxazO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
LAME-ones lame-ones israhl israEl

ni proper
AND
BLIND-ones blind-ones
lookING observing
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-esteemize THE they-glorify
God
of-ISRAEL of-Israel proskalesamenos tous proskaleomai ho

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
15:32 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
maqhtas autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
YET JESUS
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
THE
LEARNers disciples
WH
OF-Him
NA
said
splagcnizomai splagchnizomai
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
hdh
hdh EdE
Adv
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
I-AM-beING-compassionatED ON I-am-being-moved-with-compassion prosmenousin prosmenO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE
THRONG
that
ALREADY
DAYS
THREE
32 Then Jesus called his disciples [unto him], and said, I have compassion on the multitude, because they continue with me now three days, and have nothing to eat: and I will not send them away fasting, lest they faint in the way.
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
fagwsin esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
THEY-ARE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-ME they-are-remaining-with me apolusai apoluO

vn Aor Act
AND
NOT
THEY-ARE-HAVING ANY anything mhpote mEpote

Adv
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING AND
autous nhsteis ou autos nEstis ou

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ekluqwsin ekluO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
TO-FROM-LOOSE them to-dismiss en en

Prep
fasting
NOT
I-AM-WILLING NO-?-when THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-OUT-LOOSED lest-at-some-time they-may-be-fainting
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
THE
WAY
15:33 kai legousin autw

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai poqen mathEtEs pothen

n_ Nom Pl m Adv Int
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
erhmia erEmia
n_ Dat Sg f
artoi artos
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
ARE-sayING
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
?-WHICH-PLACE to-US whence ?
IN
DESOLATE BREADS wilderness bread(p)
33 And his disciples say unto him, Whence should we have so much bread in the wilderness, as to fill so great a multitude?
tosoutoi wste tosoutos hOste

pd Nom Pl m Conj
cortasai oclon chortazO ochlos

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m
tosouton tosoutos
pd Acc Sg m
so-much
AS-BESIDES TO-satisfy so-as
THRONG
so-much
AV
15:34 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
posous artous posos artos

pq Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
how-many
BREADS YE-ARE-HAVING THE cakes-of-bread
34 And Jesus saith unto them, How many loaves have ye? And they said, Seven, and a few little fishes.
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epta hepta
ni numeral
kai oliga kai oligos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
icqudia ichthudion
n_ Acc Pl n
YET THEY-say
SEVEN
AND
FEW
FISHES (dim) small-fishes oclw ochlos

n_ Dat Sg m
15:35 kai paraggeilas

kai
Conj
paraggellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anapesein anapiptO
vn 2Aor Act
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
35 And he commanded the multitude to sit down on the ground.
AND
charging
to-THE the tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THRONG
TO-BE-UP-FALLING ON to-be-leaning-back kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
THE
LAND earth
36 And he took the seven loaves and the fishes, and gave thanks, and brake [them], and gave to his disciples, and the disciples to the multitude.
15:36 elaben
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epta hepta
ni numeral
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
icquas kai eucaristhsas ichthus kai eucharisteO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
He-GOT he-took eklasen klaiO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
SEVEN
BREADS AND cakes-of-bread maqhtais oi mathEtEs ho

n_ Dat Pl m
THE
FISHES
AND
thanking giving-thanks oclois ochlos

n_ Dat Pl m

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
maqhtai tois mathEtEs ho

t_ Nom Pl m
He-BREAKS
AND
GAVE
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
THE
to-THE
THRONGS
15:37 kai efagon

kai
Conj
esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kai ecortasqhsan kai to kai chortazO kai ho

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg n
perisseuon perisseuO
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
AND
THEY-ATE
ALL
AND
ARE-satisfiED
AND
THE
exceedING being-superfluous
OF-THE
37 And they did all eat, and were filled: and they took up of the broken [meat] that was left seven baskets full.
klasmatwn hran klasma airO

n_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl
epta hepta
ni numeral
spuridas plhreis spuris plErEs

BREAKS fragments
THEY-LIFT they-pick-up de de
Conj
SEVEN
HAMPERS
FULL
15:38 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
esqiontes esthiO
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
tetrakiscilioi tetrakischilioi
n_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
cwris chOris
Adv
gunaikwn gunE
n_ Gen Pl f
38 And they that did eat were four thousand men, beside women and children.
THE-ones the kai paidiwn kai paidion

Conj n_ Gen Pl n
YET EATING ones-eating
WERE
FOUR-times-THOUSAND MEN four-thousand
apart-from WOMEN
AND
15:39 kai apolusas

kai
Conj
apoluO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous enebh ochlos embainO

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai hlqen ploion kai erchomai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
FROM-LOOSing dismissing oria horion

n_ Acc Pl n
THE
THRONGS
He-IN-STEPPed INTO THE he-stepped-in
FLOATer ship
AND
CAME
39 And he sent away the multitude, and took ship, and came into the coasts of Magdala.
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
magadan magadan
ni proper
INTO THE
boundaries of-MAGADAN of-Magadan
AV
Matthew 16
16:1 kai proselqontes

kai
Conj
WH
oi
NA
proserchomai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi kai saddoukaioi peirazontes pharisaios kai saddoukaios peirazO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching shmeion ek sEmeion ek

n_ Acc Sg n
THE
PHARISEES
AND
SADDUCEES
tryING
. The Pharisees also with the Sadducees came, and tempting desired him that he would shew them a sign from heaven.
ephrwthsan auton eperOtaO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou epideixai autois ouranos epideiknumi autos

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m
Prep
THEY-inquire-of inquire-of
Him
SIGN
OUT OF-THE
heaven
TO-ON-SHOW to-exhibit
WH
to-them
NA
16:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
oyias
oyias opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
He answered and said unto them, When it is evening, ye say, [It will be] fair weather: for the sky is red.
genomenhs ginomai
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eudia eudia
n_ Nom Sg f
purrazei vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos ouranos
n_ Nom Sg m
16:3 kai prwi shmeron ceimwn

kai
Conj
prOi
Adv
sEmeron
Adv
cheimOn
n_ Nom Sg m
purrazei vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar stugnazwn gar stugnazO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos to ouranos ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
men proswpon tou prosOpon ho

Part n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ginwskete diakrinein ta ouranos ginOskO diakrinO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl vn Pres Act t_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
shmeia twn sEmeion ho

n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl m
And in the morning, [It will be] foul weather to day: for the sky is red and lowring. O [ye] hypocrites, ye can discern the face of the sky; but can ye not [discern] the signs of the times?
WH
NA
kairwn kairos
n_ Gen Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe
dunasqe dunamai
16:4 genea
genea
n_ Nom Sg f
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Sg f
kai moicalis shmeion epizhtei kai moichalis sEmeion epizEteO

Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg

generation
wicked
AND
ADULTERess an-adulteress ei ei
Cond
SIGN
IS-ON-SEEKING AND is-seeking-for shmeion iwna sEmeion iOnas

n_ Nom Sg n
SIGN
NOT
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kai katalipwn kai kataleipO

A wicked and adulterous generation seeketh after a sign; and there shall no sign be given unto it, but the sign of the prophet Jonas. And he left them, and departed.
n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her
IF
NO
THE
SIGN
of-JONA of-Jonah
AND
leavING
autous aphlqen autos aperchomai

pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
them
He-FROM-CAME he-came-away oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
16:5 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
maqhtai eis mathEtEs eis

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
epelaqonto artous epilanthanomai artos

vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl m
AND
COMING
THE
LEARNers disciples
INTO THE
OTHER-SIDE THEY-forgot
BREADS bread(p)
. And when his disciples were come to the other side, they had forgotten to take bread.
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-GETTING
16:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois orate autos horaO

kai prosecete apo kai prosechO apo

Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
BE-SEEING be-ye-seeing !
AND
BE-heedING be-ye-heeding !
FROM THE
Then Jesus said unto them, Take heed and beware of the leaven of the Pharisees and of the Sadducees.
zumhs zumE
n_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn pharisaios kai saddoukaios

FERMENT OF-THE leaven
PHARISEES
AND
SADDUCEES
16:7 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
dielogizonto dialogizomai
en en
Prep
eautois legontes heautou legO

pf 3 Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
oti artous ouk hoti artos ou

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg
THE
YET THEY-THRU-accountED IN selves they-reasoned among themselves
sayING
that
BREADS bread(p)
NOT
And they reasoned among themselves, saying, [It is] because we have taken no bread.
AV
Matthew 16
elabomen lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-GOT
16:8 gnous
ginOskO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
dialogizesqe dialogizomai
en en
Prep
KNOWING
YET THE
JESUS
He-said
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN ye-are-reasoning among
[Which] when Jesus perceived, he said unto them, O ye of little faith, why reason ye among yourselves, because ye have brought no bread?
eautois oligopistoi heautou oligopistos

pf 3 Dat Pl m a_ Voc Pl m

ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
selves yourselves
FEW-BELIEVing-ones that scant-of-faith-ones ! noeite noeO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
BREADS bread(p) oude oude

Adv
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING
16:9 oupw
oupO
Adv
mnhmoneuete mnEmoneuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-MINDING NOT-YET YE-ARE-rememberING THE ye-are-apprehending neither pentakisciliwn kai posous kofinous elabete pentakischilioi kai posos kophinos lambanO
n_ Gen Pl m Conj pq Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
FIVE
BREADS OF-THE cakes-of-bread
Do ye not yet understand, neither remember the five loaves of the five thousand, and how many baskets ye took up?
AND
how-many
PANNIERS
YE-GOT
16:10 oude
oude
Adv
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
epta hepta
ni numeral
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
tetrakisciliwn kai posas tetrakischilioi kai posos

n_ Gen Pl m Conj pq Acc Pl f
spuridas spuris
n_ Acc Pl f
10 Neither the seven loaves of the four thousand, and how many baskets ye took up?
NOT-YET THE neither elabete lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
SEVEN
BREADS OF-THE cakes-of-bread
FOUR-times-THOUSAND AND four-thousand
how-many HAMPERS
YE-GOT
16:11 pws ou
pOs
Adv Int
ou
Part Neg
noeite noeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
peri peri
Prep
artwn artos
n_ Gen Pl m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
prosecete prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
how how ? de de
Conj
NOT
YE-ARE-MINDING that ye-are-apprehending zumhs zumE

n_ Gen Sg f
NOT
ABOUT BREADS concerning bread(p)
I-said
to-YOU(p) to-ye
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn pharisaios kai saddoukaios

11 How is it that ye do not understand that I spake [it] not to you concerning bread, that ye should beware of the leaven of the Pharisees and of the Sadducees?
YET FROM THE
FERMENT OF-THE leaven oti ouk hoti ou

Conj
PHARISEES
AND
SADDUCEES
WH
16:12 tote sunhkan

tote
Adv
suniEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
prosecein prosechO
vn Pres Act
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
zumhs zumE
n_ Gen Sg f
twn
Part Neg
then
WH
THEY-understand that
NA NA
NOT
He-said
TO-BE-heedING FROM THE
FERMENT leaven farisaiwn kai pharisaios kai

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
12 Then understood they how that he bade [them] not beware of the leaven of bread, but of the doctrine of the Pharisees and of the Sadducees.
artwn
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
artwn artos
n_ Gen Pl m
alla apo alla apo

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
didachs twn didachE ho

OF-THE
BREADS bread(p)
but
FROM THE
TEACHing
OF-THE
PHARISEES
AND
saddoukaiwn saddoukaios
n_ Gen Pl m
SADDUCEES
16:13 elqwn
erchomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
kaisareias ths kaisareia ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
COMING
YET THE
JESUS
INTO THE
PARTS
OF-CAESAREA
OF-THE
13 . When Jesus came into the coasts of Caesarea Philippi, he asked his disciples, saying, Whom do men say that I the Son of man am?
filippou hrwta philippos erOtaO

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

legwn legO
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
legousin oi legO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
Philip
askED he-asked
THE
LEARNers disciples uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-Him
sayING
ANY who ?
ARE-sayING
THE
anqrwpoi einai anthrOpos eimi

n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres vxx
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
humans
TO-BE
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
AV
Matthew 16
16:14 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
iwannhn ton iOannEs ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
baptisthn alloi baptistEs allos

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
THE
YET THEY-say
THE the-ones
INDEED JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist profhtwn prophEtEs

n_ Gen Pl m
others
YET
14 And they said, Some [say that thou art] John the Baptist: some, Elias; and others, Jeremias, or one of the prophets.
hlian Elias
n_ Acc Sg m
eteroi heteros
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ieremian h ieremias E
n_ Acc Sg m Part
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ELIAS Elijah
DIFFERENT-ones YET JEREMIAH different-ones autois umeis autos humeis

OR
ONE
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets legete legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
16:15 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
15 He saith unto them, But whom say ye that I am?
He-IS-sayING
to-them
YOU(p) ye simwn simOn

n_ Nom Sg m
YET ANY who ? petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
ME
ARE-sayING ye-are-saying su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
TO-BE
16:16 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
16 And Simon Peter answered and said, Thou art the Christ, the Son of the living God.
answerING
YET SIMON
Peter
said
YOU
ARE
THE
cristos o christos ho
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
zwntos zaO
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
THE
LIVING
16:17 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
makarios ei makarios eimi

answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-him
HAPPY
YOU-ARE
simwn simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
bariwna bariOnas
ni proper
oti sarx hoti sarx

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kai aima kai haima

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
apekaluyen apokaluptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
17 And Jesus answered and said unto him, Blessed art thou, Simon Barjona: for flesh and blood hath not revealed [it] unto thee, but my Father which is in heaven.
SIMON
BAR (Aramaic SON) -JONA (Hebrew DOVE) that Bar-Jonah all o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
FLESH
AND
BLOOD
WH
NOT
NA
it-FROM-COVERS reveals ouranois ouranos

n_ Dat Pl m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
to-YOU
but
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE the-one oti su hoti su

Conj
IN
THE
heavens
16:18 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
de de
Conj
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai epi kai epi

Conj Prep
pp 2 Nom Sg
AND-I also-I tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
YET to-YOU
AM-sayING
that
YOU
ARE
ON
18 And I say also unto thee, That thou art Peter, and upon this rock I will build my church; and the gates of hell shall not prevail against it.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
petra petra
n_ Dat Sg f
oikodomhsw oikodomeO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian kai pulai ekklEsia kai pulE

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Pl f
this
THE
ROCK
I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING OF-ME I-shall-be-building katiscusousin katischuO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
AND
GATES
adou hadEs
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
OF-UN-PERCEIVED NOT of-unseen
SHALL-BE-DOWN-STRONG-ING OF-her shall-be-prevailing soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
16:19 dwsw
didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kleidas ths kleis ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg f
basileias twn basileia ho

ouranwn kai ouranos kai

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU
THE
LOCKers keys epi ths epi ho

Prep
OF-THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
AND
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
dhshs deO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
dedemenon deO
en en
Prep
19 And I will give unto thee the keys of the kingdom of heaven: and whatsoever thou shalt bind on earth shall be bound in heaven: and whatsoever thou shalt loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven.
t_ Gen Sg f
WHICH
IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-BINDING ON
THE
LAND earth
SHALL-BE
HAVING-been-BOUND IN
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois kai o ouranos kai hos

n_ Dat Pl m Conj pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
lushs luO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
THE
heavens
AND
WHICH
IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ON
THE
LAND earth
SHALL-BE
lelumenon luO
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
HAVING-been-LOOSED IN
THE
heavens
AV
Matthew 16
16:20 tote
tote
Adv
WH
epetimhsen
NA
diesteilato diastellO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais ina mathEtEs hina

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
then
He-THRU-PUTS he-cautions oti autos hoti autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
to-THE the o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
LEARNers disciples cristos christos

n_ Nom Sg m
THAT to-NO-YET-ONE to-no-one
20 Then charged he his disciples that they should tell no man that he was Jesus the Christ.
eipwsin legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEY-MAY-BE-sayING that
He
IS
WH WH
THE
ANOINTED Christ
NA
16:21 apo
apo
Prep
tote hrxato tote archO

Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous cristos
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
deiknuein deiknumi
vn Pres Act
FROM then
begins
THE
JESUS
TO-BE-SHOWING
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

oti dei hoti deO

Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma apelqein ierosoluma aperchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Act
21 . From that time forth began Jesus to shew unto his disciples, how that he must go unto Jerusalem, and suffer many things of the elders and chief priests and scribes, and be killed, and be raised again the third day.
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
that
it-IS-BINDING
Him
INTO JERUSALEM
TO-BE-FROM-COMING to-be-coming-away kai kai

Conj
kai polla kai polus

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn kai arcierewn presbuteros kai archiereus

a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
AND
much
TO-BE-EMOTIONING FROM THE to-be-suffering kai th kai ho

Conj
SENIORS elders trith tritos

a_ Dat Sg f
AND
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests egerqhnai egeirO

vn Aor Pas
grammatewn kai apoktanqhnai grammateus kai apokteinO

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Pas
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
t_ Dat Sg f
WRITers scribes
AND
TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND to-be-killed o ho
to-THE
third
DAY
TO-BE-ROUSED
16:22 kai proslabomenos auton

kai
Conj
proslambanO
vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m
autos
pp Acc Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
epitiman epitimaO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
TOWARD-GETTING taking-to-him ilews hileOs

a_ Nom Sg m Att
Him
THE
Peter
he-begins
TO-BE-rebukING to-Him him soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
22 Then Peter took him, and began to rebuke him, saying, Be it far from thee, Lord: this shall not be unto thee.
legwn legO
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
sayING
PROPITIOUS propitious-be-it de de
Conj
to-YOU
Master ! Lord ! eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT
NO
SHALL-BE
to-YOU
this
16:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
strafeis strephO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
opisw opisO
Adv
THE
YET BEING-TURNED
He-said
to-THE
Peter
BE-UNDER-LEADING BEHIND be-you-going-away ! froneis phroneO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
satana satanas
n_ Voc Sg m
skandalon ei skandalon eimi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
23 But he turned, and said unto Peter, Get thee behind me, Satan: thou art an offence unto me: for thou savourest not the things that be of God, but those that be of men.
ME
SATAN (adversary) SNARE Satan ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YOU-ARE
OF-ME
that
NOT
YOU-ARE-beING-DISPOSed-to
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alla ta alla ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
THE the(p)
OF-THE
God
WH NA
but
THE the(p) ihsous iEsous
OF-THE
humans
16:24 tote
tote
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

ei ei
Cond
n_ Nom Sg m
then
THE
JESUS
said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
IF
24 . Then said Jesus unto his disciples, If any [man] will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross, and follow me.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
aparnhsasqw eauton aparneomai heautou

vm Aor midD 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m
kai aratw kai airO

Conj vm Aor Act 3 Sg
ANY anyone ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IS-WILLING
BEHIND after
ME
TO-BE-COMING LET-him-renounce let-him-renounce ! moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
self himself
AND
LET-him-LIFT let-him-pick-up !

kai akolouqeitw kai akoloutheO

THE
pale cross
OF-him
AND
LET-him-BE-followING to-ME let-him-be-following ! me thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
16:25 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar ean gar ean

Conj Cond
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
swsai apolesei sOzO apollumi

vn Aor Act vi Fut Act 3 Sg
WHO
for
IF-EVER MAY-BE-WILLING THE
soul
OF-him
TO-SAVE SHALL-BE-destroyING
25 For whosoever will save his life shall lose it: and whosoever will lose his life for my sake shall find it.
AV
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
apolesh apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eneken heneken
Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
her
WHO
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE
soul
OF-him
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE-FINDING her
16:26 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar wfelhqhsetai gar OpheleO

anqrwpos ean anthrOpos ean

n_ Nom Sg m Cond
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ANY what ? kerdhsh kerdainO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
for
SHALL-BE-BEING-benefitED human
IF-EVER THE
SYSTEM world h E
Part
WHOLE
26 For what is a man profited, if he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own soul? or what shall a man give in exchange for his soul?
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
zhmiwqh zEmioO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHOULD-BE-GAINING THE
YET soul
OF-him
MAY-BE-BEING-FINED OR may-be-forfeiting
ANY what ?
SHALL-BE-GIVING
anqrwpos antallagma anthrOpos antallagma

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
human
INSTEAD-CHANGE OF-THE in-exchange gar o gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
soul
OF-him
16:27 mellei
mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ercesqai anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
IS-ABOUT is-being-about tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
for
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
TO-BE-COMING
IN
THE
esteem glory
27 For the Son of man shall come in the glory of his Father with his angels; and then he shall reward every man according to his works.
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai tote kai tote

Conj Adv
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-Him
WITH
THE
MESSENGERS OF-Him
AND
then
apodwsei apodidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ekastw kata hekastos kata

a_ Dat Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
praxin praxis
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
He-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-EACH he-shall-be-paying each-one
according-to THE
PRACTISing OF-him practice tines tis

px Nom Pl m
16:28 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti eisin hoti eimi

Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
wde estwtwn hOde histEmi

Adv vp Perf Act Gen Pl m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ARE
ANY some
OF-THE-ones here of-the-ones idwsin eidO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
HAVING-STOOD standing ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
28 Verily I say unto you, There be some standing here, which shall not taste of death, till they see the Son of man coming in his kingdom.
oitines ou hostis ou
pr Nom Pl m Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
geuswntai geuomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl
qanatou ews an thanatos heOs an

n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part
WHO-ANY who-any uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH death
TILL
EVER THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ercomenon anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
basileia autou basileia autos

SON
OF-THE
human
COMING
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-Him
AV
Matthew 17
17:1 kai meq hmeras ex

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
hex
ni numeral
paralambanei paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
after
DAYS
SIX
IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE is-taking-aside adelfon autou adelphos autos

JESUS
THE
Peter
AND
. And after six days Jesus taketh Peter, James, and John his brother, and bringeth them up into an high mountain apart,
iakwbon kai iwannhn ton iakObos kai iOannEs ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
kai anaferei kai anapherO


pp Acc Pl m Prep
JACOBUS James oros oros

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-him
AND
He-IS-UP-CARRYING them is-bringing-up
INTO
uyhlon kat hupsElos kata

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
mountain
HIGH
according-to OWN
17:2 kai metemorfwqh

kai
Conj
metamorphoO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai elamyen kai lampO

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
proswpon prosOpon
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
He-WAS-after-FORMED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them he-was-transformed in-front-of them ws o hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
AND
SHINES
THE
face
And was transfigured before them: and his face did shine as the sun, and his raiment was white as the light.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
imatia himation
n_ Nom Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
leuka leukos
a_ Nom Pl n
ws hOs
Adv
OF-Him
AS
THE
SUN
THE
YET GARMENTS OF-Him
BECAME
WHITE
AS
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
LIGHT
17:3 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autois mwushs autos mOusEs

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
kai hlias kai Elias

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
sullalountes met sullaleO meta

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep
And, behold, there appeared unto them Moses and Elias talking with him.
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WAS-VIEWED to-them lo ! was-seen
MOSES
AND
ELIAS Elijah
TOGETHER-TALKING conferring
WITH
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
Him
17:4 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
answerING
YET THE
Peter
said
to-THE
JESUS
Master ! Lord ! wde treis hOde treis

Adv n_ Acc Pl f
IDEAL
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
wde einai hOde eimi

Adv vn Pres vxx
ei ei
Cond
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
skhnas skEnE
n_ Acc Pl f
Then answered Peter, and said unto Jesus, Lord, it is good for us to be here: if thou wilt, let us make here three tabernacles; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias.
it-IS
US
here
TO-BE
IF
YOU-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-makING here
THREE
BOOTHS tabernacles
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai mwusei mian kai mOusEs heis

Conj n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
kai hlia kai Elias

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
to-YOU
ONE
AND
to-MOSES
ONE
AND
to-ELIAS to-Elijah
ONE
17:5 eti
eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
nefelh nephelE
n_ Nom Sg f
fwteinh epeskiasen autous kai phOteinos episkiazO autos kai

a_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj
STILL OF-him
TALKING speaking ek ek
Prep
BE-PERCEIVING CLOUD lo ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
luminous
ON-SHADES overshadows estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
them
AND
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
nefelhs legousa nephelE legO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
While he yet spake, behold, a bright cloud overshadowed them: and behold a voice out of the cloud, which said, This is my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased; hear ye him.
BE-PERCEIVING SOUND lo ! voice uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-THE
CLOUD
sayING
this
IS
THE
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
eudokhsa akouete eudokeO akouO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
IN
WHOM
OF-Him
17:6 kai akousantes oi

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai epesan mathEtEs piptO

epi proswpon autwn epi prosOpon autos

Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Pl m
kai kai
Conj
And when the disciples heard [it], they fell on their face, and were sore afraid.
AND
HEARing
THE
LEARNers disciples
FALL
ON
face
OF-them
AND
AV
Matthew 17
efobhqhsan phobeO
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
sfodra sphodra
Adv
THEY-WERE-afraid VEHEMENT tremendously
17:7 kai proshlqen

kai
Conj
proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ayamenos kai haptO

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
And Jesus came and touched them, and said, Arise, and be not afraid.
AND
TOWARD-CAME THE approached kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
JESUS
AND
TOUCHing
OF-them them
He-said
egerqhte egeirO
vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
fobeisqe phobeO
BE-BEING-ROUSED AND be-ye-being-roused !
NO
BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing ! tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
17:8 eparantes
epairO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de de
Conj

oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
And when they had lifted up their eyes, they saw no man, save Jesus only.
ON-LIFTing lifting-up auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
YET THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-them
NOT-YET-ONE THEY-PERCEIVED IF no-one
NO
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
monon monon
Adv
SAME him
JESUS
ONLY
17:9 kai katabainontwn autwn

kai
Conj
katabainO
autos
pp Gen Pl m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
eneteilato autois o entellomai autos ho

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
AND
OF-DOWN-STEPPING of-descending legwn legO

OF-them
OUT OF-THE
mountain
directs
to-them them ews ou heOs hos

Conj
THE
And as they came down from the mountain, Jesus charged them, saying, Tell the vision to no man, until the Son of man be risen again from the dead.
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
eiphte legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
orama horama
n_ Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pr Gen Sg m
JESUS
sayING
to-NO-YET-ONE YE-MAY-BE-sayING THE to-no-one ye-may-be-telling anqrwpou ek anthrOpos ek

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
sight vision
TILL
OF-WHICH THE which
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
egerqh egeirO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
SON
OF-THE
human
OUT OF-DEAD-ones MAY-BE-BEING-ROUSED of-dead-ones oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
17:10 kai ephrwthsan auton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m

ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
inquire-of
Him
THE
LEARNers disciples dei deO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
sayING
ANY why ? prwton prOton

Adv
THEN THE
10 And his disciples asked him, saying, Why then say the scribes that Elias must first come?
grammateis legousin oti hlian grammateus legO hoti Elias

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
WRITers scribes
ARE-sayING
that
ELIAS Elijah
IS-BINDING must eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-COMING BEFORE-most first men men

Part
17:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
ercetai erchomai
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET answerING
He-said
ELIAS Elijah
INDEED IS-COMING
AND
11 And Jesus answered and said unto them, Elias truly shall first come, and restore all things.
apokatasthsei panta apokathistEmi pas

vi Fut Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-restorING
ALL all-things de de
Conj
17:12 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti hlias hoti Elias

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
hdh EdE
Adv
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
epegnwsan epiginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ELIAS Elijah osa hosos
ALREADY CAME
AND
NOT
THEY-ON-KNOW they-recognize uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
alla epoihsan en alla poieO en

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hqelhsan outws kai o thelO houtOs kai ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m
12 But I say unto you, That Elias is come already, and they knew him not, but have done unto him whatsoever they listed. Likewise shall also the Son of man suffer of them.
pk Acc Pl n
him
but
THEY-DO
IN
him
as-much-as THEY-WILL whatever up hupo

Prep
thus
AND also
THE
SON
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou mellei anthrOpos mellO

pascein paschO
vn Pres Act
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-THE
human
IS-ABOUT is-being-about
TO-BE-EMOTIONING UNDER them to-be-suffering by
AV
Matthew 17
17:13 tote sunhkan oi

tote
Adv
suniEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai oti peri mathEtEs hoti peri

n_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep
iwannou tou iOannEs ho

baptistou baptistEs
n_ Gen Sg m
13 Then the disciples understood that he spake unto them of John the Baptist.
then
understand
THE
LEARNers disciples
that
ABOUT JOHN concerning
THE
DIPist baptist
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
He-said
to-them
17:14 kai elqontwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
proshlqen proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
OF-COMING of-coming-them auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE
THRONG
human
14 . And when they were come to the multitude, there came to him a [certain] man, kneeling down to him, and saying,
gonupetwn gonupeteO
KNEE-FALLING falling-on-his-knees
Him before-him kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
17:15 kai legwn

kai
Conj
legO
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
AND
sayING
Master ! Lord ! kai kakws kai kakOs

Conj Adv
BE-MERCIFUL OF-ME be-you-merciful !

WH
THE
SON
that
15 Lord, have mercy on my son: for he is lunatick, and sore vexed: for ofttimes he falleth into the fire, and oft into the water.
selhniazetai selEniazomai
ecei
NA
pascei paschO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pollakis gar piptei pollakis gar piptO

Adv Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
he-IS-beING-MOONizED AND he-is-a-lunatic to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
EVILly
IS-EMOTIONING is-suffering to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
MANY-times often
for
he-IS-FALLING INTO
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
kai pollakis eis kai pollakis eis

Conj Adv Prep
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
FIRE
AND
MANY-times often auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
INTO THE
water
17:16 kai proshnegka

kai
Conj
prospherO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais sou mathEtEs su

n_ Dat Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hdunhqhsan dunamai
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Att
16 And I brought him to thy disciples, and they could not cure him.
AND
I-TOWARD-CARRY him I-bring-to qerapeusai therapeuO

vn Aor Act
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
AND
NOT
THEY-WERE-enABLED they-could
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him
TO-cure
17:17 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
w genea O genea
Inj n_ Voc Sg f
apistos apistos
a_ Voc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
o!
generation UN-BELIEVing AND generation ! unbelieving ! ews pote anexomai heOs pote anechomai
Conj Part Int vi Fut midD 1 Sg
diestrammenh diastrephO
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f
ews pote meq heOs pote meta

Conj Part Int Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
esomai eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
17 Then Jesus answered and said, O faithless and perverse generation, how long shall I be with you? how long shall I suffer you? bring him hither to me.
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED TILL having-been-perverted umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
?-when when ?
WITH YOU(p) ye wde hOde

Adv
I-SHALL-BE
TILL
?-when when ?
I-SHALL-BE-toleratING I-shall-bear
ferete pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
OF-YOU(p) BE-CARRYING to-ME of-ye be-ye-bringing !
him
here
17:18 kai epetimhsen autw

kai
Conj
epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai exhlqen kai exerchomai

ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
rebukES
to-it it
THE
JESUS
AND
OUT-CAME came-out ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
FROM him
THE
18 And Jesus rebuked the devil; and he departed out of him: and the child was cured from that very hour.
daimonion kai eqerapeuqh o daimonion kai therapeuO ho

n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs ekeinos
pd Gen Sg f
demon
AND
WAS-curED
THE
boy
FROM THE
HOUR
that
17:19 tote proselqontes oi

tote
Adv
proserchomai
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai tw mathEtEs ho
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
kat kata
Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
19 Then came the disciples to Jesus apart, and said, Why could not we cast him out?
then
TOWARD-COMING coming-to
THE
LEARNers disciples
to-THE
JESUS
according-to OWN
said
AV
Matthew 17
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdunhqhmen ekbalein dunamai ekballO

vi Aor pasD 1 Pl Att vn 2Aor Act
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
WE
NOT
WERE-enABLED could autois dia autos dia

pp Dat Pl m Prep
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING it to-be-casting-out thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
17:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oligopistian umwn oligopistia humeis

amhn gar amEn gar

Hebrew Conj
THE
YET He-IS-sayING
to-them
THRU THE because-of
FEW-BELIEVing scant-faith
OF-YOU(p) AMEN of-ye verily
for
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ean ean
Cond
echte echO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
pistin ws kokkon pistis hOs kokkos

n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Acc Sg m
sinapews ereite sinapi ereO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-HAVING BELIEF faith enqen enthen

Adv
AS
KERNEL
OF-MUSTARD
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING
20 And Jesus said unto them, Because of your unbelief: for verily I say unto you, If ye have faith as a grain of mustard seed, ye shall say unto this mountain, Remove hence to yonder place; and it shall remove; and nothing shall be impossible unto you.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw metaba houtos metabainO

pd Dat Sg n vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekei kai metabhsetai ekei kai metabainO

Adv Conj vi Fut midD 3 Sg
kai ouden kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
to-THE
mountain
this
after-STEP proceed-you !
IN-PLACE there hence
AND
it-SHALL-BE-after-STEPPING AND it-shall-be-proceeding
NOT-YET-ONE nothing
adunathsei adunateO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
SHALL-BE-UN-ABLE to-YOU(p) shall-be-impossible to-ye
17:21
21 Howbeit this kind goeth not out but by prayer and fasting.
. .
.
. .
.
17:22 sustrefomenwn
sustrephO
vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia eipen galilaia legO

n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
OF-TOGETHER-TURNING YET them of-conspiring of-them ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
GALILEE
said
to-them
THE
22 . And while they abode in Galilee, Jesus said unto them, The Son of man shall be betrayed into the hands of men:
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou paradidosqai anthrOpos paradidOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Pas
eis eis
Prep
JESUS
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
TO-BE-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO to-be-being-given-up
ceiras anqrwpwn cheir anthrOpos

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m
HANDS
OF-humans
17:23 kai apoktenousin

kai
Conj
apokteinO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him they-shall-be-killing kai eluphqhsan kai lupeO

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
AND
to-THE
third
DAY
23 And they shall kill him, and the third day he shall be raised again. And they were exceeding sorry.
egerqhsetai egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
sfodra sphodra
Adv
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED AND
THEY-WERE-SORROWED VEHEMENT and-they-were-sorry tremendously eis eis

Prep
17:24 elqontwn
erchomai
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kafarnaoum proshlqon kapharnaoum proserchomai

ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
didracma didrachmon
n_ Acc Pl n
OF-COMING
YET them
INTO CAPERNAUM
TOWARD-CAME THE-ones approached the-ones o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
TWO-drachma double-drachma ou ou
Part Neg
24 . And when they were come to Capernaum, they that received tribute [money] came to Peter, and said, Doth not your master pay tribute?
lambanontes tw lambanO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
kai eipan kai legO

didaskalos umwn didaskalos humeis

n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
GETTING-UP getting telei teleO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-THE
WH NA
Peter
AND
THEY-say say
THE
TEACHer
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
ta
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
didracma didrachmon
n_ Acc Pl n
IS-FINISHING is-settling-tribute
THE
TWO-drachma double-drachma
AV
17:25 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
nai kai elqonta nai kai erchomai

Part Conj vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
proefqasen prophthanO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
he-IS-sayING
YEA yes
AND
COMING
INTO THE
HOME house dokei dokeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEFORE-OUTSTRIPS him forestalls simwn simOn

n_ Voc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legwn legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
basileis basileus
n_ Nom Pl m
25 He saith, Yes. And when he was come into the house, Jesus prevented him, saying, What thinkest thou, Simon? of whom do the kings of the earth take custom or tribute? of their own children, or of strangers?
THE
JESUS
sayING
ANY what ?
to-YOU
it-IS-SEEMING SIMON
THE
KINGS
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
apo apo
Prep
tinwn tis
pi Gen Pl m
lambanousin telh lambanO telos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n
h E
Part
khnson kEnsos
n_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
LAND earth h E
Part
FROM ANY whom(p) ? apo apo

Prep
ARE-GETTING-UP they-are-getting
FINISHES OR tribute(p)
POLL-TAX
FROM THE
SONS
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
allotriwn allotrios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-them
OR
FROM THE
other-placed-ones outsiders apo apo

Prep
17:26 eipontos
legO
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
allotriwn allotrios
a_ Gen Pl m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
26 Peter saith unto him, Of strangers. Jesus saith unto him, Then are the children free.
OF-sayING of-his-saying ara ara

Part
YET FROM THE
other-placed-ones AVERRed outsiders oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
to-him
THE
JESUS
ge ge
Part
eleuqeroi eisin eleutheros eimi

uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
CONSEQUENTLY SURELY FREE-ones free
ARE
THE
SONS
17:27 ina
hina
Conj
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
skandaliswmen skandalizO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
autous poreuqeis autos poreuomai

pp Acc Pl m vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
qalassan thalassa
n_ Acc Sg f
THAT YET NO
WE-SHOULD-BE-SNARING them
BEING-GONE
INTO SEA
bale ballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
agkistron kai ton agkistron kai ho

anabanta anabainO
prwton prOton
Adv
icqun ichthus
n_ Acc Sg m
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
BE-CASTING fish-hook be-you-casting ! anoixas anoigO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
THE
UP-STEPPing ascending eurhseis heuriskO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg
BEFORE-most FISH first
LIFT pick-up-you !
AND
27 Notwithstanding, lest we should offend them, go thou to the sea, and cast an hook, and take up the fish that first cometh up; and when thou hast opened his mouth, thou shalt find a piece of money: that take, and give unto them for me and thee.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
stathra ekeinon statEr ekeinos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m
UP-OPENing opening labwn lambanO

THE
MOUTH
OF-it of-him
YOU-SHALL-BE-FINDING stater
that
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
autois anti autos anti

pp Dat Pl m Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai sou kai su

Conj pp 2 Gen Sg
GETTING
to-them
INSTEAD OF-ME
AND
YOU of-you
AV
Matthew 18
18:1 en
en
Prep
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
that
THE
HOUR
TOWARD-CAME THE approached meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
LEARNers disciples estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-THE
JESUS
. At the same time came the disciples unto Jesus, saying, Who is the greatest in the kingdom of heaven?
legontes legO
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ara ara
Part Int
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

sayING
ANY who ?
CONSEQUENTLY GREATER greatest
IS
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
heavens
18:2 kai proskalesamenos paidion

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
esthsen histEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
And Jesus called a little child unto him, and set him in the midst of them,
AND
little-boy (-or-girl) He-STANDS
it
IN
MIDst
OF-them
18:3 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
strafhte strephO
vs 2Aor Pas 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
AND
said
AMEN verily ws ta hOs ho

Adv
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye ou ou
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-TURNING AND
And said, Verily I say unto you, Except ye be converted, and become as little children, ye shall not enter into the kingdom of heaven.
genhsqe ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl
paidia paidion
n_ Acc Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
t_ Acc Pl n
Part Neg
MAY-BE-BECOMING AS
THE
little-boys-or-girls NOT little-boys-and-girls
NO
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE ye-may-be-entering

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
18:4 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
tapeinwsei tapeinoO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
ws to hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
WHO-ANY who-any estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEN SHALL-BE-makING-LOW self shall-be-humbling himself meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
AS
THE
little-boy (-or-girl) this
this-one this-one
Whosoever therefore shall humble himself as this little child, the same is greatest in the kingdom of heaven.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
IS
THE
GREATER greatest ean ean

Cond
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
18:5 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
toiouto epi tw toioutos epi ho

pd Acc Sg n Prep t_ Dat Sg n
And whoso shall receive one such little child in my name receiveth me.
AND
WHO
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING ONE
little-boy (-or-girl) such
ON
THE
onomati mou onoma egO

n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
decetai dechomai
NAME
OF-ME
ME
IS-RECEIVING
18:6 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
skandalish skandalizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mikrwn mikros
a_ Gen Pl m
toutwn twn houtos ho

pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
WHO
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-SNARING ONE
OF-THE
LITTLE-ones these little-ones kremasqh kremannumi

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE
pisteuontwn eis pisteuO eis

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mulos mulos
n_ Nom Sg m
But whoso shall offend one of these little ones which believe in me, it were better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, and [that] he were drowned in the depth of the sea.
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing onikos onikos

a_ Nom Sg m
INTO ME
it-IS-beING-expedient to-him
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-HANGED MILL(stone) mill-stone kai katapontisqh kai katapontizO

Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
trachlon autou trachElos autos

en en
Prep
ASSic ABOUT THE requiring-an-ass-to-turn-it tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
NECK
OF-him
AND
SHOULD-BE-BEING-DOWN-MARINED IN he-should-be-being-sunk
pelagei ths pelagos ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs thalassa
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
OCEAN
OF-THE
SEA
AV
Matthew 18
18:7 ouai tw
ouai
Inj
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
skandalwn anagkh skandalon anagkE

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg f
gar elqein gar erchomai

Conj vn 2Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WOE woe !
to-THE
SYSTEM world
FROM THE
SNARES
necessity
for
TO-BE-COMING THE
. Woe unto the world because of offences! for it must needs be that offences come; but woe to that man by whom the offence cometh!
skandala plhn skandalon plEn

n_ Acc Pl n Adv
ouai tw ouai ho
Inj t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw di anthrOpos dia

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
skandalon skandalon
n_ Nom Sg n
SNARES
MOREly WOE moreover woe !
to-THE
human
THRU WHOM through
THE
SNARE
ercetai erchomai
IS-COMING
18:8 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
h E
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pous pous
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
skandalizei skandalizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IF
YET THE
HAND
OF-YOU
OR
THE
FOOT
OF-YOU
IS-SNARING
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ekkoyon ekkoptO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai bale kai ballO

apo apo
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
Wherefore if thy hand or thy foot offend thee, cut them off, and cast [them] from thee: it is better for thee to enter into life halt or maimed, rather than having two hands or two feet to be cast into everlasting fire.
YOU
OUT-STRIKE strike-off-you !
it him thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
BE-CASTING FROM YOU be-you-casting ! kullon h kullos E

a_ Acc Sg m Part
IDEAL
to-YOU
it-IS
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
cwlon chOlos
a_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
duo duo
ni numeral
ceiras h cheir E
n_ Acc Pl f Part
duo duo
ni numeral
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
LIFE
MAIMED
OR
LAME
OR TWO than to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
HANDS
OR
TWO
econta echO
blhqhnai eis ballO eis

vn Aor Pas Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg n
FEET
HAVING
TO-BE-CAST
INTO THE
FIRE
THE
eonian
18:9 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

exele exaireO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
IF
THE
VIEWer eye sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
IS-SNARING
YOU
BE-OUT-LIFTING it be-you-wrenching-out ! him thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
kai bale kai ballO

apo apo
Prep
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
monofqalmon eis monophthalmos eis

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
And if thine eye offend thee, pluck it out, and cast [it] from thee: it is better for thee to enter into life with one eye, rather than having two eyes to be cast into hell fire.
AND
BE-CASTING FROM YOU be-you-casting ! eiselqein eiserchomai

vn 2Aor Act
IDEAL
to-YOU
it-IS
ONLY-VIEWer one-eyed
INTO THE
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
h E
Part
duo duo
ni numeral
ofqalmous econta ophthalmos echO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl n
blhqhnai eis ballO eis

vn Aor Pas Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
LIFE
TO-BE-INTO-COMING OR TWO to-be-entering than puros pur

n_ Gen Sg n
VIEWers eyes
HAVING
TO-BE-CAST
INTO THE
geennan tou geenna ho

GEHENNA
OF-THE
FIRE
18:10 orate
horaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
katafronhshte kataphroneO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mikrwn mikros
a_ Gen Pl m
toutwn legw houtos legO

pd Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
BE-SEEING be-ye-seeing ! gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-despisING OF-ONE one aggeloi aggelos

n_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
LITTLE-ones these little-ones
I-AM-sayING
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
ouranois dia ouranos dia

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
pantos blepousin pas blepO

a_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl
10 Take heed that ye despise not one of these little ones; for I say unto you, That in heaven their angels do always behold the face of my Father which is in heaven.
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
THE
MESSENGERS OF-them
IN
heavens
THRU EVERY during all ouranois ouranos

n_ Dat Pl m
ARE-lookING are-observing
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon tou prosOpon ho

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
THE
face
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE the-one
IN
heavens
18:11
11 For the Son of man is come to save that which was lost.
AV
Matthew 18
18:12 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
anqrwpw ekaton anthrOpos hekaton

n_ Dat Sg m ni numeral
ANY what ?
to-YOU(p) to-ye
it-IS-SEEMING IF-EVER it-MAY-BE-BECOMING to-ANY it-may-be-occurring en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
human
HUNDRED
probata kai planhqh probaton kai planaO

n_ Nom Pl n Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
autwn ouci autos ouchi

pp Gen Pl n Part Int
afhsei aphiEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
12 How think ye? if a man have an hundred sheep, and one of them be gone astray, doth he not leave the ninety and nine, and goeth into the mountains, and seeketh that which is gone astray?
sheep sheep(p) ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
MAY-BE-BEING-STRAYED ONE may-be-being-gone-astray epi ta epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl n
OUT OF-them
NOT(emph.) he-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING he-shall-be-leaving zhtei zEteO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
enenhkonta ennea enenEkonta ennea

ni numeral ni numeral
orh oros
n_ Acc Pl n
kai poreuqeis kai poreuomai

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
NINEty
NINE
ON
THE
mountains AND
BEING-GONE
IS-SEEKING
THE
planwmenon planaO
one-beING-STRAYED one-being-gone-astray
18:13 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
eurein heuriskO
vn 2Aor Act
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti hoti
Conj
AND
IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-BECOMING TO-BE-FINDING it
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye mh mE
that
13 And if so be that he find it, verily I say unto you, he rejoiceth more of that [sheep], than of the ninety and nine which went not astray.
cairei chairO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
mallon h mallon E
Adv Part
epi tois epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Pl n

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
Part Neg
he-IS-JOYING ON he-is-rejoicing
it
RATHER
OR ON than
THE
NINEty
NINE
THE-ones NO the
peplanhmenois planaO
vp Perf Pas Dat Pl n
HAVING-been-STRAYED
WH
18:14 outws ouk

houtOs
Adv
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou
thus
NA
NOT
IS it-is en en
Prep
WILL
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the apolhtai apollumi

vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
FATHER
14 Even so it is not the will of your Father which is in heaven, that one of these little ones should perish.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranois ina ouranos hina

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mikrwn mikros
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-YOU(p) of-ye toutwn houtos

pd Gen Pl m
THE the-one
IN
heavens
THAT SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED ONE should-be-perishing
OF-THE
LITTLE-ones little-ones
these
NA NA
18:15 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
amarthsh hamartanO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

IF-EVER YET SHOULD-BE-missING should-be-sinning upage hupagO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
INTO YOU
THE
brother
OF-YOU
elegxon elegchO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
metaxu sou metaxu su

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
kai autou kai autos

Conj pp Gen Sg m
monou monos
a_ Gen Sg m
ean ean
Cond
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
15 . Moreover if thy brother shall trespass against thee, go and tell him his fault between thee and him alone: if he shall hear thee, thou hast gained thy brother.
BE-UNDER-LEADING EXPOSE be-you-going-away ! expose-you ! akoush akouO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
him
between
YOU
AND
him
ONLY alone
IF-EVER OF-YOU you
ekerdhsas ton kerdainO ho

adelfon sou adelphos su

he-SHOULD-BE-HEARING YOU-GAIN
THE
brother
OF-YOU
18:16 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
akoush akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
eti eti
Adv
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
IF-EVER YET NO
he-SHOULD-BE-HEARING BE-BESIDE-GETTING WITH be-you-taking-along ! marturwn h martus E

n_ Gen Pl m Part
YOU
STILL ONE
OR
16 But if he will not hear [thee, then] take with thee one or two more, that in the mouth of two or three witnesses every word may be established.
duo duo
ni numeral
ina hina
Conj
epi stomatos duo epi stoma duo

Prep n_ Gen Sg n ni numeral
triwn treis
n_ Gen Pl m
staqh histEmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
TWO
THAT ON
MOUTH
TWO of-two
witnesses
OR
OF-THREE MAY-BE-BEING-STOOD EVERY may-be-being-established
AV
Matthew 18
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
declaration
WH NA
18:17 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
parakoush parakouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eipon
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
IF-EVER YET he-SHOULD-BE-disobeyING OF-them them ean ean

Cond
BE-sayING be-you-telling ! estw eimi

vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia wsper hOsper

Adv
de de
Conj
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias parakoush ekklEsia parakouO

n_ Gen Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
17 And if he shall neglect to hear them, tell [it] unto the church: but if he neglect to hear the church, let him be unto thee as an heathen man and a publican.
IF-EVER YET AND also o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE the
OUT-CALLED ecclesia kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-disobeyING LET-him-BE let-him-be ! telwnhs telOnEs

n_ Nom Sg m
to-YOU
AS-EVEN even-as
eqnikos ethnikos
a_ Nom Sg m
THE
NATIONic AND one-of-the-nations umin humeis
THE
tribute-collector
18:18 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
dhshte deO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
pp 2 Dat Pl
AMEN verily estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye en en
Prep
as-much-as IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-BINDING ON
THE
LAND earth epi epi

Prep
dedemena deO
vp Perf Pas Nom Pl n
ouranw kai osa ouranos kai hosos

n_ Dat Sg m Conj pk Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
lushte luO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
18 Verily I say unto you, Whatsoever ye shall bind on earth shall be bound in heaven: and whatsoever ye shall loose on earth shall be loosed in heaven.
SHALL-BE
HAVING-been-BOUND IN
heaven
AND
as-much-as IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-LOOSING ON
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
lelumena luO
en en
Prep
ouranw ouranos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
LAND earth
SHALL-BE
HAVING-been-LOOSED IN
heaven
18:19 palin
palin
Adv
amhn amEn
Hebrew
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
duo duo
ni numeral
sumfwnhswsin ex sumphOneO ek
vs Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AGAIN
AMEN verily ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
IF-EVER TWO
SHOULD-BE-agreeING
OUT OF-YOU(p) of-ye
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
peri peri
Prep
pantos pragmatos ou pas pragma hos

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n pr Gen Sg n
ean ean
Cond
aithswntai aiteO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
19 Again I say unto you, That if two of you shall agree on earth as touching any thing that they shall ask, it shall be done for them of my Father which is in heaven.
ON
THE
LAND earth
ABOUT EVERY concerning everyany autois para autos para

pp Dat Pl m Prep
PRACTISE matter patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-WHICH IF-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING which mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
genhsetai ginomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
it-SHALL-BE-BECOMING to-them
BESIDE THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE the-one
IN
heavens
18:20 ou
hou
Adv
gar eisin gar eimi

duo duo
ni numeral
h E
Part
treis treis
n_ Nom Pl m
sunhgmenoi sunagO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
20 For where two or three are gathered together in my name, there am I in the midst of them.
where for
ARE
TWO
OR
THREE
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-LED INTO THE having-been-gathered
MY
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
ekei eimi ekei eimi

Adv vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
NAME
there
I-AM
IN
MIDst
OF-them
WH NA
18:21 tote proselqwn

tote
Adv
proserchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
then
TOWARD-COMING approaching amarthsei hamartanO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
Peter
said
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
21 . Then came Peter to him, and said, Lord, how oft shall my brother sin against me, and I forgive him? till seven times?
posakis posakis
Adv
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos mou adelphos egO

kai kai
Conj
how-many-times SHALL-BE-missing INTO ME how-many-times ? shall-be-sinning afhsw aphiEmi

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
THE
brother
OF-ME
AND
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ews eptakis heOs heptakis

Conj Adv
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING to-him I-shall-be-pardoning him
TILL
SEVEN-times
AV
Matthew 18
18:22 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ews eptakis heOs heptakis

Conj Adv
alla alla
Conj
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
NOT
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
TILL
SEVEN-times but
22 Jesus saith unto him, I say not unto thee, Until seven times: but, Until seventy times seven.
ews ebdomhkontakis epta heOs hebdomEkontakis hepta

Conj Adv ni numeral
TILL
SEVEN-TY-times seventy-times touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
SEVEN
18:23 dia
dia
Prep
wmoiwqh homoioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn anqrwpw basilei ouranos anthrOpos basileus

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
THRU this because-of os hos

pr Nom Sg m
WAS-LIKenED THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-human
KING
23 Therefore is the kingdom of heaven likened unto a certain king, which would take account of his servants.
hqelhsen sunarai thelO sunairO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
doulwn autou doulos autos

WHO
WILLS
TO-TOGETHER-LIFT saying to-settle account de de

Conj
WITH
THE
WH
SLAVES
WH
OF-him
WH
18:24 arxamenou
archO
vp Aor Mid Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
sunairein sunairO
vn Pres Act
proshcqh eis autw
OF-beginning
NA
YET OF-him
NA NA
TO-BE-TOGETHER-LIFTING to-be-settling eis heis

n_ Nom Sg m
24 And when he had begun to reckon, one was brought unto him, which owed him ten thousand talents.
proshnecqh prospherO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ofeileths muriwn opheiletEs murioi

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Gen Pl m
talantwn talanton
n_ Gen Pl n
WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED to-him was-brought-to him
ONE
OWEr debtor
OF-MYRIADS OF-WEIGHTS of-ten-thousands of-talents o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
18:25 mh
mE
Part Neg
econtos echO
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apodounai ekeleusen auton apodidOmi keleuO autos

vn 2Aor Act vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
NO
OF-HAVING
YET him
TO-FROM-GIVE to-pay
ORDERS
him
THE
master lord ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
25 But forasmuch as he had not to pay, his lord commanded him to be sold, and his wife, and children, and all that he had, and payment to be made.
praqhnai pipraskO
vn Aor Pas
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika kai ta gunE kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
TO-BE-disposED-of AND
THE
WOMAN wife
AND
THE
offsprings children
AND
ALL
as-much-as he-IS-HAVING whatever
kai apodoqhnai kai apodidOmi

Conj vn Aor Pas
AND
TO-BE-FROM-GIVEN to-be-paid oun oun

Conj
18:26 peswn
piptO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m

legwn legO
FALLING falling-down makroqumhson ep makrothumeO epi

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep
THEN THE
SLAVE
he-worshipED worshiped apodwsw apodidOmi

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
to-him him soi su
sayING
26 The servant therefore fell down, and worshipped him, saying, Lord, have patience with me, and I will pay thee all.
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
pp 2 Dat Sg
FAR-FEEL-YOU be-you-patient !
ON
ME
AND
ALL
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU I-shall-be-paying you kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
18:27 splagcnisqeis
splagchnizomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
doulou doulos
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
ekeinou
BEING-compassionatED YET THE being-moved-with-compassion

NA
master lord kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE
SLAVE
27 Then the lord of that servant was moved with compassion, and loosed him, and forgave him the debt.
ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg m
apelusen apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
daneion afhken daneion aphiEmi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
that
FROM-LOOSES him dismisses de de

Conj
AND
THE
LOAN
he-FROM-LETS to-him remits euren heuriskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
18:28 exelqwn
exerchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
OUT-COMING coming-out sundoulwn sundoulos

n_ Gen Pl m
YET THE
SLAVE
that
FOUND
ONE
OF-THE
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
wfeilen opheilO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ekaton dhnaria kai krathsas hekaton dEnarion kai krateO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
28 But the same servant went out, and found one of his fellowservants, which owed him an hundred pence: and he laid hands on him, and took [him] by the throat, saying, Pay me that thou owest.
TOGETHER-SLAVES OF-him fellow-slaves
WHO
OWED
to-him him
HUNDRED DENARII
AND
HOLDing
AV
Matthew 18
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epnigen pnigO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
apodos apodidOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ei ei
Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ofeileis opheilO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
him
he-CHOKED sayING he-choked-him oun oun

Conj
BE-FROM-GIVING IF be-you-paying ! o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ANY anything
YOU-ARE-OWING
18:29 peswn
piptO
sundoulos sundoulos
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
parekalei parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
FALLING falling-down legwn legO

THEN THE
TOGETHER-SLAVE OF-him fellow-slave emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
he-BESIDE-CALLED him entreated soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
29 And his fellowservant fell down at his feet, and besought him, saying, Have patience with me, and I will pay thee all.
makroqumhson ep makrothumeO epi

kai apodwsw kai apodidOmi

Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
sayING
FAR-FEEL-YOU be-you-patient ! de de
Conj
ON
ME
AND
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU I-shall-be-paying you ebalen ballO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
18:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
alla apelqwn alla aperchomai

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
30 And he would not: but went and cast him into prison, till he should pay the debt.
THE
YET NOT
he-WILLED he-would
but
he-CASTS
him
INTO
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
ews apodw heOs apodidOmi

Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ofeilomenon opheilO
GUARD-house TILL jail
he-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING THE he-may-be-paying oun oun

Conj
beING-OWED
18:31 idontes
eidO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sundouloi sundoulos
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
genomena ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n
PERCEIVING
THEN THE
TOGETHER-SLAVES OF-him fellow-slaves kai elqontes kai erchomai

THE
BECOMING(p) occurring(p) tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
31 So when his fellowservants saw what was done, they were very sorry, and came and told unto their lord all that was done.
eluphqhsan lupeO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
sfodra sphodra
Adv
diesafhsan diasapheO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
THEY-WERE-SORROWED VEHEMENT AND they-were-sorry tremendously panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
COMING
THEY-THRU-LUCID to-THE they-elucidate
master lord
OF-selves of-themselves
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
genomena ginomai
ALL
THE
BECOMING(p) occurring(p) o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
18:32 tote proskalesamenos auton

tote
Adv
proskaleomai
autos
pp Acc Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
then
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to ponhre ponEros

a_ Voc Sg m
him
THE
master lord
OF-him
IS-sayING
to-him
32 Then his lord, after that he had called him, said unto him, O thou wicked servant, I forgave thee all that debt, because thou desiredst me:
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ofeilhn ekeinhn afhka opheilE ekeinos aphiEmi

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
epei parekalesas epei parakaleO

SLAVE !
wicked !
EVERY entire
THE
OWED debt
that
I-FROM-LET I-remit
to-YOU
since
YOU-BESIDE-CALL you-entreat
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
18:33 ouk
ou
Part Neg
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
kai se kai su
Conj pp 2 Acc Sg
elehsai eleaO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sundoulon sundoulos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ws hOs
Adv
NOT
it-WAS-BINDING AND also se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
TO-be-MERCIFUL-to THE
TOGETHER-SLAVE OF-YOU fellow-slave
AS
33 Shouldest not thou also have had compassion on thy fellowservant, even as I had pity on thee?
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
hlehsa eleaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AND-I also-I
YOU
am-MERCIFUL am-merciful-to o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
18:34 kai orgisqeis

kai
Conj
orgizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
paredwken auton paradidOmi autos

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
AND
BEING-INDIGNANT
THE
NA
master lord ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
OF-him
BESIDE-GIVES gives-up pan pas
him
to-THE
34 And his lord was wroth, and delivered him to the tormentors, till he should pay all that was due unto him.
basanistais ews basanistEs heOs

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
WH
ou
apodw apodidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ofeilomenon opheilO
a_ Acc Sg n
ORDEALers tormentors
TILL
OF-WHICH which
he-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING EVERY he-may-be-paying all
THE
beING-OWED
AV
18:35 outws kai o

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios poihsei ouranios poieO

a_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
thus
AND also
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THE
heavenly
SHALL-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) to-ye apo apo

Prep
35 So likewise shall my heavenly Father do also unto you, if ye from your hearts forgive not every one his brother their trespasses.
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
afhte aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ekastos tw hekastos ho
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING EACH ye-may-be-pardoning each-one
to-THE the
brother
OF-him
FROM THE
kardiwn umwn kardia humeis

n_ Gen Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Matthew 19
19:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous logos houtos

AND
it-BECAME it-occurred apo apo

Prep
when
FINISHES
THE
JESUS
THE
sayings
these
methren metairO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai hlqen galilaia kai erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
oria horion
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
. And it came to pass, [that] when Jesus had finished these sayings, he departed from Galilee, and came into the coasts of Judaea beyond Jordan;
He-WITH-LIFTS FROM THE he-withdraws ioudaias peran ioudaia peran

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
GALILEE
AND
CAME
INTO THE
boundaries OF-THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou iordanEs
n_ Gen Sg m
JUDEA
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
19:2 kai hkolouqhsan autw

kai
Conj
akoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai eqerapeusen autous ekei kai therapeuO autos ekei

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv
And great multitudes followed him; and he healed them there.
AND
follow
to-Him him autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THRONGS
MANY vast
AND
He-curES
them
there
19:3 kai proshlqon

kai
Conj
proserchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
farisaioi peirazontes pharisaios peirazO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai legontes kai legO

ei ei
Cond
AND

NA
PHARISEES
tryING
Him
AND
sayING
IF
. The Pharisees also came unto him, tempting him, and saying unto him, Is it lawful for a man to put away his wife for every cause?
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
anqrwpw anthrOpos
n_ Dat Sg m
apolusai apoluO
vn Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

kata kata
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
it-IS-allowed
to-human
TO-FROM-LOOSE THE to-dismiss
WOMAN wife
OF-him
according-to EVERY
aitian aitia
n_ Acc Sg f
cause
19:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
anegnwte oti o anaginOskO hoti ho

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ktisas ktizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
YET answerING
He-said
NOT
that
THE
One-CREATing one-creating
And he answered and said unto them, Have ye not read, that he which made [them] at the beginning made them male and female,
ap apo
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
arsen arsEn
n_ Acc Sg n
kai qhlu kai thElus

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
epoihsen autous poieO autos

FROM ORIGINal beginning
MALE
AND
female
makES
them
19:5 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eneka heneken
Adv
toutou kataleiyei houtos kataleipO

pd Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos ton anthrOpos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-said
on-account-of OF-this this
SHALL-BE-leavING human
THE
FATHER
AND
And said, For this cause shall a man leave father and mother, and shall cleave to his wife: and they twain shall be one flesh?
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera kai kollhqhsetai mEtEr kai kollaO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki autou gunE autos

kai esontai oi kai eimi ho

Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
THE
MOTHER
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-JOINED to-THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
AND
SHALL-BE
THE
duo duo
ni numeral
eis eis
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
TWO
INTO FLESH
ONE
19:6 wste
hOste
Conj
ouketi ouketi
Adv
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
duo duo
ni numeral
alla sarx alla sarx

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AS-BESIDES NOT-STILL THEY-ARE so-that not-longer qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
TWO
but
FLESH
ONE
WHICH
THEN THE
Wherefore they are no more twain, but one flesh. What therefore God hath joined together, let not man put asunder.
sunezeuxen suzeugnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos mh anthrOpos mE
n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg
cwrizetw chOrizO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
God
TOGETHER-YOKES human yokes-together autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
NO
LET-BE-SPACizING let-him-be-separating ! mwushs mOusEs

n_ Nom Sg m
19:7 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eneteilato dounai biblion entellomai didOmi biblion

vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg n
ANY why ?
THEN MOSES
directs
TO-GIVE
SCROLLet
They say unto him, Why did Moses then command to give a writing of divorcement, and to put her away?
AV
Matthew 19
apostasiou kai apolusai apostasion kai apoluO

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vn Aor Act
NA
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
OF-FROM-STAND of-divorce
AND
TO-FROM-LOOSE to-dismiss
her
19:8 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois oti mwushs autos hoti mOusEs

pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sklhrokardian umwn sklErokardia humeis

epetreyen epitrepO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-IS-sayING
to-them
that
MOSES
TOWARD THE
HARD-HEART hardheartedness archs archE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-YOU(p) permits of-ye ou ou

Part Neg
He saith unto them, Moses because of the hardness of your hearts suffered you to put away your wives: but from the beginning it was not so.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apolusai apoluO
vn Aor Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
gunaikas umwn gunE humeis

ap apo
Prep
de de
Conj
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
to-YOU(p) ye outws houtOs

Adv
TO-FROM-LOOSE THE to-dismiss
WOMEN wives
OF-YOU(p) FROM ORIGINal of-ye beginning
YET NOT
it-HAS-BECOME
thus
19:9 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti os hoti hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
apolush apoluO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE should-be-dismissing allhn allos

a_ Acc Sg f
WOMAN wife
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
epi porneia epi porneia

Prep n_ Dat Sg f
kai gamhsh kai gameO

moicatai moichaomai
And I say unto you, Whosoever shall put away his wife, except [it be] for fornication, and shall marry another, committeth adultery: and whoso marrieth her which is put away doth commit adultery.
OF-him
NO
ON
PROSTITUTION AND
SHOULD-BE-MARRYING other another

NA
IS-committING-ADULTERY is-committing-adultery ei ei
Cond
19:10 legousin autw

legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
outws estin houtOs eimi

ARE-sayING
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
IF
thus
IS
10 His disciples say unto him, If the case of the man be so with [his] wife, it is not good to marry.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
aitia aitia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou meta ths anthrOpos meta ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos ou gunE ou
n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
cause
OF-THE
human
WITH
THE
WOMAN
NOT
it-IS-beING-expedient
gamhsai gameO
vn Aor Act
TO-MARRY
19:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ou autos ou
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
cwrousin chOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
NA
YET He-said
to-them
NOT
ALL
ARE-SPACING THE are-containing
saying
11 But he said unto them, All [men] cannot receive this saying, save [they] to whom it is given.
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
all ois alla hos

Conj pr Dat Pl m
dedotai didOmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
this
but
to-WHOM it-HAS-been-GIVEN
19:12 eisin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
gar eunoucoi oitines ek gar eunouchos hostis ek

Conj n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m Prep
koilias mhtros koilia mEtEr

egennhqhsan outws kai gennaO houtOs kai

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Adv Conj
ARE there-are eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
for
EUNUCHS
WHO-ANY who-any
OUT OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER WERE-generatED of-womb were-born
thus
AND
eunoucoi oitines eunoucisqhsan upo twn eunouchos hostis eunouchizO hupo ho

n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn kai eisin anthrOpos kai eimi

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ARE there-are
EUNUCHS
WHO-ANY who-any
ARE-EUNUCHED are-emasculated
by
THE
humans
AND
ARE there-are ouranwn ouranos

n_ Gen Pl m
12 For there are some eunuchs, which were so born from [their] mother's womb: and there are some eunuchs, which were made eunuchs of men: and there be eunuchs, which have made themselves eunuchs for the kingdom of heaven's sake. He that is able to receive [it], let him receive [it].
eunoucoi oitines eunoucisan eautous dia eunouchos hostis eunouchizO heautou dia
n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

EUNUCHS
WHO-ANY who-any dunamenos dunamai
EUNUCH emasculate
selves themselves cwrein chOreO

vn Pres Act
THRU THE because-of cwreitw chOreO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-beING-ABLE one-being-able
TO-BE-SPACING LET-him-BE-SPACING to-be-containing-it let-him-be-containing-it !
AV
Matthew 19
19:13 tote proshnecqhsan

tote
Adv
prospherO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
paidia paidion
n_ Nom Pl n
ina hina
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
then
WERE-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him were-brought-to him
little-boys-and-girls THAT THE
HANDS
13 . Then were there brought unto him little children, that he should put [his] hands on them, and pray: and the disciples rebuked them.
epiqh epitithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois kai proseuxhtai autos kai proseuchomai

pp Dat Pl n Conj vs Aor midD 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
maqhtai epetimhsan mathEtEs epitimaO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
He-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING to-them he-may-be-placing-on them autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
AND
He-SHOULD-BE-prayING THE should-be-praying
rebuke
to-them them
19:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paidia paidion
n_ Acc Pl n
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
THE
YET JESUS
said
FROM-LET leave-ye ! pros pros

Prep
THE
little-boys-and-girls AND
NO
14 But Jesus said, Suffer little children, and forbid them not, to come unto me: for of such is the kingdom of heaven.
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
gar toioutwn estin gar toioutos eimi

Conj pd Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-YE-FORBIDDING them be-ye-forbidding ! h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD ME
OF-THE
for
such such(p)
IS

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
19:15 kai epiqeis

kai
Conj
epitithEmi
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras autois eporeuqh cheir autos poreuomai

n_ Acc Pl f pp Dat Pl n vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
ekeiqen ekeithen
Adv
15 And he laid [his] hands on them, and departed thence.
AND
ON-PLACING placing-on
THE
HANDS
to-them
He-WAS-GONE thence he-went autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
19:16 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
didaskale ti didaskalos tis

n_ Voc Sg m pi Acc Sg n
AND
BE-PERCEIVING ONE lo ! ina hina

Conj
TOWARD-COMING coming-to scw echO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
to-Him him zwhn zOE

n_ Acc Sg f
said
TEACHer !
ANY what
16 . And, behold, one came and said unto him, Good Master, what good thing shall I do, that I may have eternal life?
agaqon poihsw agathos poieO

a_ Acc Sg n vs Aor Act 1 Sg
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
GOOD
I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT I-SHOULD-BE-HAVING LIFE
eonian
19:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
erwtas erOtaO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
THE
YET He-said
to-him
ANY why ? agaqos agathos
ME
YOU-ARE-askING ABOUT THE concerning de de

Conj
17 And he said unto him, Why callest thou me good? [there is] none good but one, [that is], God: but if thou wilt enter into life, keep the commandments.
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg n
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
a_ Nom Sg m
GOOD
ONE
IS
WH NA
THE
GOOD
IF
YET YOU-ARE-WILLING INTO THE
LIFE
vn 2Aor Act
threi
thrhson tEreO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
entolas entolE
n_ Acc Pl f
TO-BE-INTO-COMING to-be-entering
KEEP keep-you ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE
directions precepts de de
Conj
19:18 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
poias poios
pi Acc Pl f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
efh
NA
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
OF-?-THE-WHICH THE which(p) ? ou ou

Part Neg
YET JESUS
said
THE
ou ou
Part Neg
foneuseis phoneuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
moiceuseis moicheuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
kleyeis kleptO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
18 He saith unto him, Which? Jesus said, Thou shalt do no murder, Thou shalt not commit adultery, Thou shalt not steal, Thou shalt not bear false witness,
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-MURDERING NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-ADULTERING NOT you-shall-be-committing-adultery
YOU-SHALL-BE-stealING NOT
yeudomarturhseis pseudomartureO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-FALSE-witnessING you-shall-be-testifying-falsely
AV
Matthew 19
19:19 tima
timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera kai agaphseis mEtEr kai agapaO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
19 Honour thy father and [thy] mother: and, Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.
BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring ! plhsion sou plEsion su

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
FATHER
AND
THE
MOTHER
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING THE
ws seauton hOs seautou

Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
NIGH-one associate
OF-YOU
AS
YOURself
WH WH NA NA
19:20 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
neaniskos neaniskos
n_ Nom Sg m
tauta panta
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
YOUTH
ALL
these
20 The young man saith unto him, All these things have I kept from my youth up: what lack I yet?
efulaxa phulassO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eti eti
Adv
usterw hustereO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg Con
I-GUARD I-maintain
ANY what ?
STILL I-AM-WANTING I-am-being-deficient autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
19:21 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
teleios einai teleios eimi

a_ Nom Sg m vn Pres vxx
AVERRed
to-him
THE
JESUS
IF
YOU-ARE-WILLING mature perfect kai dos kai didOmi

TO-BE
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
pwlhson pOleO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
uparconta huparchO
vp Pres Act Acc Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
21 Jesus said unto him, If thou wilt be perfect, go [and] sell that thou hast, and give to the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven: and come [and] follow me.
BE-UNDER-LEADING SELL be-you-going-away ! sell-you ! ptwcois kai exeis ptOchos kai echO
a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg
OF-YOU
THE
belongINGS possessions en en
Prep
AND
to-THE
qhsauron thEsauros
n_ Acc Sg m
ouranois kai deuro ouranos kai deuro

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg
POOR poor-ones akolouqei akoloutheO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING PLACED-INTO-MORROW IN treasure
heavens
AND
HITHER hither-you !
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
YOU-BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me
19:22 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
neaniskos ton neaniskos ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
WH
touton
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HEARing
YET THE
YOUTH
THE
saying
he-FROM-CAME he-came-away polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
22 But when the young man heard that saying, he went away sorrowful: for he had great possessions.
lupoumenos lupeO
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar ecwn gar echO

kthmata ktEma
n_ Acc Pl n
SORROWING
he-WAS
for
HAVING
ACQUISITIONS MANY
19:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-THE

Prep
OF-Him
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
23 . Then said Jesus unto his disciples, Verily I say unto you, That a rich man shall hardly enter into the kingdom of heaven.
oti plousios duskolws eiseleusetai hoti plousios duskolOs eiserchomai

Conj a_ Nom Sg m Adv vi Fut midD 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

ouranwn ouranos
n_ Gen Pl m
that
RICH rich-man
ILL-VICTUALly squeamishly legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE shall-be-entering umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
WH
19:24 palin de
palin
Adv
de
Conj
eukopwteron estin eukopOteros eimi

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kamhlon dia kamElos dia

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
trhmatos
AGAIN
WH WH
YET I-AM-sayING
WH WH
to-YOU(p) to-ye
easier
NA
it-IS
NA
CAMEL
NA
THRU through
NA
24 And again I say unto you, It is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God.
rafidos eiselqein h plousion
truphmatos rafidos dielqein trupEma rhaphis dierchomai

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act
h E
NA
plousion plousios
a_ Acc Sg m
Part
BORE
NA
OF-SEWer of-needle qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-THRU-COMING OR RICH to-be-coming-through than rich-man
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian tou basileia ho

INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AV
Matthew 19
19:25 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai exeplhssonto sfodra mathEtEs ekplEssO sphodra

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Pas 3 Pl Adv
legontes legO
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
HEARing
YET THE
LEARNers disciples swqhnai sOzO

vn Aor Pas
were-astonishED
VEHEMENT sayING tremendously
ANY who
25 When his disciples heard [it], they were exceedingly amazed, saying, Who then can be saved?
ara ara
Part Int
dunatai dunamai
CONSEQUENTLY IS-ABLE can
TO-BE-SAVED
19:26 embleyas
emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois para autos para

pp Dat Pl m Prep
anqrwpois touto anthrOpos houtos

n_ Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg n
IN-looking looking-at-them adunaton estin adunatos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-them
BESIDE humans
this
26 But Jesus beheld [them], and said unto them, With men this is impossible; but with God all things are possible.
para para
Prep
de de
Conj
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
dunata dunatos
a_ Nom Pl n
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
UN-ABLE impossible
IS
BESIDE YET God
ALL all-things petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
ABLE possible autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
19:27 tote apokriqeis

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
then
answerING
THE
Peter
said
to-Him
BE-PERCEIVING WE lo ! estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
27 Then answered Peter and said unto him, Behold, we have forsaken all, and followed thee; what shall we have therefore?
afhkamen panta aphiEmi pas

vi Aor Act 1 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
kai hkolouqhsamen soi kai akoloutheO su

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
ara ara
Part Int
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
FROM-LET leave
ALL
AND
follow
to-YOU you eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ANY what
CONSEQUENTLY SHALL-BE
to-US
19:28 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
autois amhn legw autos amEn legO

pp Dat Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti umeis hoti humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
YOU(p) ye
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akolouqhsantes moi akoloutheO egO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp 1 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paliggenesia otan paliggenesia hotan

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
kaqish kathizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
28 And Jesus said unto them, Verily I say unto you, That ye which have followed me, in the regeneration when the Son of man shall sit in the throne of his glory, ye also shall sit upon twelve thrones, judging the twelve tribes of Israel.
THE
ones-following ones-following uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
to-ME me tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
AGAIN-BECOMing renascence doxhs doxa

n_ Gen Sg f
when-EVER SHOULD-BE-seatING whenever should-be-being-seated autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou epi qronou anthrOpos epi thronos

n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m
kaqhsesqe kathEmai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
ON
THRONE
OF-esteem OF-Him of-glory tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
SHALL-BE-beING-seatED shall-be-sitting

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
epi dwdeka qronous krinontes epi dOdeka thronos krinO

Prep ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
dwdeka fulas tou dOdeka phulE ho

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ON
TWO-TEN twelve
THRONES
JUDGING
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
tribes
OF-THE
israhl israEl
ni proper
ISRAEL
19:29 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oikias h oikia E
n_ Acc Pl f Part
adelfous h adelphos E
n_ Acc Pl m Part
adelfas h adelphE E
n_ Acc Pl f Part
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
EVERY every-one
WHO-ANY who-any h E
Part
FROM-LETS leaves
HOMES houses
OR
brothers
WH
OR
WH
sisters
OR
WH
FATHER
h E
Part
mhtera h mEtEr E
n_ Acc Sg f Part
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
agrous eneken agros heneken

n_ Acc Pl m Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
emou onomatos pollaplasiona
29 And every one that hath forsaken houses, or brethren, or sisters, or father, or mother, or wife, or children, or lands, for my name's sake, shall receive an hundredfold, and shall inherit everlasting life.
OR
NA
MOTHER
OR
NA
offsprings children
NA
OR
FIELDS
on-account-of OF-THE the lhmyetai lambanO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
onomatos mou onoma egO

ekatontaplasiona hekatontaplasiOn
a_ Acc Pl n
kai zwhn kai zOE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
NAME
OF-ME
HUNDRED-FOLD
SHALL-BE-GETTING AND
LIFE
eonian
klhronomhsei klEronomeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-tenantING shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of
AV
19:30 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
esontai prwtoi eimi prOtos

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
escatoi kai escatoi prwtoi eschatos kai eschatos prOtos

a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
30 But many [that are] first shall be last; and the last [shall be] first.
MANY
YET SHALL-BE
BEFORE-mosts LASTS first-ones last-ones
AND
LASTS last-ones
BEFORE-mosts first-ones
AV
Matthew 20
20:1 omoia
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
gar estin gar eimi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn anqrwpw oikodespoth ouranos anthrOpos oikodespotEs

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
LIKE
for
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-human
HOME-OWNER householder ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
. For the kingdom of heaven is like unto a man [that is] an householder, which went out early in the morning to hire labourers into his vineyard.
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ama hama
Adv
prwi prOi
Adv
misqwsasqai ergatas eis misthoO ergatEs eis

vn Aor Mid n_ Acc Pl m Prep
WHO-ANY who-any
OUT-CAME came-out
SIMULTANEOUS morning TO-HIRE at-the-same-time in-the-morning
ACTers workers
INTO THE
ampelwna autou ampelOn autos

VINEyard
OF-him
20:2 sumfwnhsas de
sumphOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de
Conj
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
ergatwn ek ergatEs ek
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
dhnariou dEnarion
n_ Gen Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
agreeing
YET WITH
THE
ACTers workers
OUT OF-DENARIUS THE
DAY
And when he had agreed with the labourers for a penny a day, he sent them into his vineyard.
apesteilen autous eis apostellO autos eis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ampelwna autou ampelOn autos

he-commissions he-dispatches
them
INTO THE
VINEyard
OF-him
20:3 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
peri peri
Prep
trithn wran tritos hOra

eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
allous estwtas allos histEmi

a_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Act Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out agora agora

n_ Dat Sg f
ABOUT third
HOUR
he-PERCEIVED others
HAVING-STOOD standing
IN
And he went out about the third hour, and saw others standing idle in the marketplace,
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
argous argos
a_ Acc Pl m
THE
BUY-place UN-ACTive market idle upagete hupagO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
20:4 kai ekeinois eipen

kai
Conj
ekeinos
pd Dat Pl m
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ampelwna kai ampelOn kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
AND
to-those
he-said
BE-UNDER-LEADING AND be-ye-going-away ! also dikaion dwsw dikaios didOmi

a_ Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg
YOU(p) ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
INTO THE
VINEyard
AND
And said unto them; Go ye also into the vineyard, and whatsoever is right I will give you. And they went their way.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
WHICH
IF-EVER MAY-BE
JUST
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) to-ye de de

Conj
20:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
palin palin
Adv
exelqwn exerchomai
peri peri
Prep
ekthn hektos
a_ Acc Sg f
kai enathn kai enatos

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
Again he went out about the sixth and ninth hour, and did likewise.
THE-ones the wran hOra

n_ Acc Sg f
YET FROM-CAME AGAIN they-came-away
YET
ABOUT SIXth
AND
NINth
epoihsen wsautws poieO hOsautOs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
HOUR
he-DOES
AS-SAMEly similarly thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
20:6 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
endekathn exelqwn hendekatos exerchomai

a_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
allous estwtas allos histEmi

a_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Act Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
ABOUT YET THE
ONE-TENth eleventh
he-FOUND
others
AND
And about the eleventh hour he went out, and found others standing idle, and saith unto them, Why stand ye here all the day idle?
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n
wde esthkate hOde histEmi

Adv vi Perf Act 2 Pl
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran argoi hEmera argos

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl m
he-IS-sayING
to-them
ANY why ? autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
here
YE-HAVE-STOOD WHOLE ye-stand hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
THE
DAY
UN-ACTive idle autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
7
20:7 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oti oudeis hoti oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
emisqwsato legei misthoO legO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-ARE-sayING to-him
that
NOT-YET-ONE US no-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
HIRES
he-IS-sayING
to-them
They say unto him, Because no man hath hired us. He saith unto them, Go ye also into the vineyard; and whatsoever is right, [that] shall ye receive.
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
ampelwna ampelOn
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-UNDER-LEADING AND be-ye-going-away ! also
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
VINEyard
AV
Matthew 20
20:8 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos tw ampelOn ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
IS-sayING
THE
master lord
OF-THE
VINEyard
NA
to-THE
epitropw autou epitropos autos

kaleson kaleO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ergatas kai apodos ergatEs kai apodidOmi

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
So when even was come, the lord of the vineyard saith unto his steward, Call the labourers, and give them [their] hire, beginning from the last unto the first.
permitter manager misqon misthos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-him
CALL call-you ! apo apo

Prep
THE
ACTers workers
AND
BE-FROM-GIVING be-you-paying ! prwtwn prOtos

a_ Gen Pl m
to-them them
THE
arxamenos archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
escatwn ews twn eschatos heOs ho

a_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
HIRE wages
beginning
WH WH
FROM THE
NA NA
LAST last-ones oi ho
TILL
OF-THE the peri peri

Prep
BEFORE-most first-ones thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
20:9
elqontes de
kai elqontes kai erchomai

endekathn wran hendekatos hOra

t_ Nom Pl m
AND
COMING
THE-ones the-ones
ABOUT THE
ONE-TENth eleventh
HOUR
And when they came that [were hired] about the eleventh hour, they received every man a penny.
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ana ana
Prep
dhnarion dEnarion
n_ Acc Sg n
GOT
UP DENARIUS apiece oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
20:10 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
prwtoi prOtos
a_ Nom Pl m
enomisan oti pleion nomizO hoti polus

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
lhmyontai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
AND
COMING
THE-ones the to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
BEFORE-most infer first-ones dhnarion kai autoi dEnarion kai autos

n_ Acc Sg n Conj pp Nom Pl m
that
MORE
THEY-SHALL-BE-GETTING
10 But when the first came, they supposed that they should have received more; and they likewise received every man a penny.
kai elabon kai lambanO

ana ana
Prep
AND
GOT
THE
UP DENARIUS apiece de de
Conj
AND also
they
20:11 labontes
lambanO
egogguzon gogguzO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
oikodespotou oikodespotEs
n_ Gen Sg m
11 And when they had received [it], they murmured against the goodman of the house,
GETTING
YET THEY-MURMURED DOWN against outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
OF-THE the
HOME-OWNER householder wran hOra

n_ Acc Sg f
20:12 legontes
legO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
escatoi mian eschatos heis

a_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
epoihsan kai isous poieO kai isos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl m
sayING
WH WH
these
NA NA
THE
LAST last-ones
ONE
HOUR
DO
AND
EQUAL
12 Saying, These last have wrought [but] one hour, and thou hast made them equal unto us, which have borne the burden and heat of the day.
autous hmin
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
epoihsas tois poieO ho

bastasasin to bastazO ho
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
baros baros
n_ Acc Sg n
to-US
them
YOU-DO you-make kauswna kausOn

n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE the
ones-BEARing ones-bearing
THE
HEAVY burden
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
DAY
AND
THE
BURNing scorching-heat eni heis

n_ Dat Sg m
20:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
etaire hetairos
n_ Voc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
adikw adikeO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
YET answerING
to-ONE one
OF-them
he-said
COMRADE ! NOT
I-AM-injurING
13 But he answered one of them, and said, Friend, I do thee no wrong: didst not thou agree with me for a penny?
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ouci ouchi
Part Int
dhnariou dEnarion
n_ Gen Sg n
sunefwnhsas moi sumphOneO egO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
YOU
NOT(emph.) OF-DENARIUS YOU-agree not(emph.) ? to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
to-ME
20:14 aron
airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
son sos
ps 2 Acc Sg
kai upage kai hupagO

qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
toutw tw houtos ho
14 Take [that] thine [is], and go thy way: I will give unto this last, even as unto thee.
LIFT pick-up-you !
THE
YOUR yours
AND
BE-UNDER-LEADING I-AM-WILLING YET to-this be-you-going-away !
THE
escatw dounai ws kai soi eschatos didOmi hOs kai su

a_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act Adv Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
LAST last-one
TO-GIVE
AS
AND also
to-YOU
AV
Matthew 20
20:15
NA
h E
ouk ou
Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
poihsai en poieO en
vn Aor Act Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
Part
OR
NOT
IS-allowed it-is-allowed ofqalmos sou ophthalmos su

n_ Nom Sg m
to-ME me
WHICH
I-AM-WILLING TO-DO
IN
THE
15 Is it not lawful for me to do what I will with mine own? Is thine eye evil, because I am good?
emois emos
ps 1 Dat Pl
h E
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ponhros estin ponEros eimi

oti hoti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
agaqos agathos
a_ Nom Sg m
pp 2 Gen Sg
MY(p)
OR
THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
wicked
IS
that I seeing-that
GOOD
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AM
20:16 outws esontai oi

houtOs
Adv
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
escatoi prwtoi eschatos prOtos

a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
prwtoi prOtos
a_ Nom Pl m
escatoi eschatos
a_ Nom Pl m
16 So the last shall be first, and the first last: for many be called, but few chosen.
thus
WH
SHALL-BE
WH WH
THE
LAST last-ones
NA NA
BEFORE-most AND first-ones

NA
THE
BEFORE-most LAST first-ones last-ones ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
20:17
mellwn de anabainein
kai anabainwn kai anabainO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
UP-STEPPING going-up kat kata

Prep
THE
JESUS
INTO JERUSALEM
17 . And Jesus going up to Jerusalem took the twelve disciples apart in the way, and said unto them,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
He-BESIDE-GOT THE he-took-aside eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
TWO-TEN twelve
LEARNers disciples
according-to OWN
AND
IN
THE
WAY road
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
He-said
to-them
20:18 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anabainomen anabainO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma kai o ierosoluma kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING WE-ARE-UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM lo ! we-are-going-up anqrwpou paradoqhsetai anthrOpos paradidOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
AND
THE
SON
OF-THE
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
arciereusin archiereus
n_ Dat Pl m
kai grammateusin kai kai grammateus kai

Conj n_ Dat Pl m Conj
18 Behold, we go up to Jerusalem; and the Son of man shall be betrayed unto the chief priests and unto the scribes, and they shall condemn him to death,
human
SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE shall-be-being-given-up auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WH

NA
WRITers scribes
AND
katakrinousin katakrinO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
qanatw
qanatw thanatos
n_ Dat Sg m
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING Him they-shall-be-condemning
to-DEATH
20:19 kai paradwsousin

kai
Conj
paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin eis ethnos eis

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
empaixai kai empaizO kai

vn Aor Act Conj
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him they-shall-be-giving-up
to-THE
NATIONS
INTO THE
TO-IN-sport to-scoff-at
AND
19 And shall deliver him to the Gentiles to mock, and to scourge, and to crucify [him]: and the third day he shall rise again.
mastigwsai kai staurwsai kai th mastigoO kai stauroO kai ho

vn Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act Conj t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
egerqhsetai egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
TO-scourge
AND
TO-impale to-crucify autw autos
AND
to-THE
third
DAY
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED
20:20 tote proshlqen

tote
Adv
proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
zebedaiou meta zebedaios meta

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
pp Dat Sg m
then
TOWARD-CAME to-Him came-to him uiwn huios

n_ Gen Pl m
THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
SONS
OF-ZEBEDEE
WITH
20 . Then came to him the mother of Zebedee's children with her sons, worshipping [him], and desiring a certain thing of him.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
proskunousa kai aitousa proskuneO kai aiteO

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
SONS
OF-her
worshipING worshipingf auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
AND
REQUESTING requestingf qeleis thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ANY something legei legO
FROM Him
20:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
YET He-said
to-her
ANY what ?
YOU-ARE-WILLING she-IS-sayING to-Him
21 And he said unto her, What wilt thou? She saith unto him, Grant that these my two sons may sit, the one on thy right hand, and the other on the left,
AV
Matthew 20
ina hina
Conj
kaqiswsin kathizO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
in thy kingdom.
THAT SHOULD-BE-seatING these should-be-being-seated

NA
THE
TWO
SONS
OF-ME
ONE
OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p)
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai eis kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
euwnumwn sou euOnumos su

a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

OF-YOU
AND
ONE
OUT OF-left of-left(p) o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-YOU
20:22 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY ye-are-aware what egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
aiteisqe aiteO
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl
dunasqe dunamai
piein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pothrion o potErion hos

n_ Acc Sg n pr Acc Sg n
22 But Jesus answered and said, Ye know not what ye ask. Are ye able to drink of the cup that I shall drink of, and to be baptized with the baptism that I am baptized with? They say unto him, We are able.
YE-ARE-REQUESTING YE-ARE-ABLE
TO-BE-DRINKING THE
DRINK-cup cup dunameqa dunamai

WHICH
mellw mellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pinein pinO
vn Pres Act
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AM-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-DRINKING THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him
WE-ARE-ABLE
20:23 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois to autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
men men
Part
pothrion mou potErion egO

piesqe pinO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
He-IS-sayING
to-them
THE
INDEED DRINK-cup cup kai ex kai ek

Conj Prep
OF-ME
YE-SHALL-BE-DRINKING THE
YET
kaqisai kathizO
vn Aor Act
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn mou dexios egO

euwnumwn ouk euOnumos ou

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
emon emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
TO-be-seated OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p)

NA
OF-ME
AND
OUT OF-left of-left(p)
NOT
IS
MY mine upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
23 And he saith unto them, Ye shall drink indeed of my cup, and be baptized with the baptism that I am baptized with: but to sit on my right hand, and on my left, is not mine to give, but [it shall be given to them] for whom it is prepared of my Father.
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
dounai all ois didOmi alla hos

vn 2Aor Act Conj pr Dat Pl m
htoimastai hetoimazO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
this
TO-GIVE
but
to-WHOM it-HAS-been-made-READY by it-shall-be-given-to-them-to-whom
THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FATHER
OF-ME

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
deka deka
ni numeral
hganakthsan peri aganakteO peri

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
adelfwn adelphos
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
HEARing hearing-of-it de de
Conj
THE
TEN
resent
TWO
brothers
24 And when the ten heard [it], they were moved with indignation against the two brethren.
20:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
proskalesamenos autous eipen proskaleomai autos legO

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
THE
YET JESUS
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him eqnwn ethnos

n_ Gen Pl n
them
said
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware megaloi mega

a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
arcontes twn archOn ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl n
katakurieuousin autwn kai oi katakurieuO autos kai ho

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl m
25 But Jesus called them [unto him], and said, Ye know that the princes of the Gentiles exercise dominion over them, and they that are great exercise authority upon them.
THE
chiefs
OF-THE
NATIONS
ARE-DOWN-masterING are-lording-it-over
OF-them them
AND
THE
GREAT-ones great-men
katexousiazousin autwn katexousiazO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl n
ARE-coercING
OF-them them outws houtOs

Adv
WH
20:26 ouc
ou
Part Neg
estin
NA
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
all os alla hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
WH
an
NA
ean ean
Cond
NOT
thus
it-SHALL-BE
IN YOU(p) among ye estai eimi
but
WHO
IF-EVER
26 But it shall not be so among you: but whosoever will be great among you, let him be your minister;
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
MAY-BE-WILLING IN YOU(p) among ye
GREAT
TO-BE-BECOMING he-SHALL-BE OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVitor shall-be of-ye servant
AV
Matthew 20
20:27 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
WHO
EVER MAY-BE-WILLING IN YOU(p) among ye
TO-BE
BEFORE-most he-SHALL-BE OF-YOU(p) foremost shall-be of-ye
27 And whosoever will be chief among you, let him be your servant:
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
SLAVE
20:28 wsper o
hOsper
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
diakonhqhnai diakoneO
vn Aor Pas
AS-EVEN even-as
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
NOT
CAME
TO-BE-THRU-SERVED to-be-served pollwn polus

a_ Gen Pl m
28 Even as the Son of man came not to be ministered unto, but to minister, and to give his life a ransom for many.
alla diakonhsai alla diakoneO

Conj vn Aor Act
kai dounai thn kai didOmi ho

Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lutron anti lutron anti

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
but
TO-THRU-SERVE AND to-serve
TO-GIVE
THE
soul
OF-Him
LOOSener ransom
INSTEAD OF-MANY insteadfor many oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
29 . And as they departed from Jericho, a great multitude followed him.
20:29 kai ekporeuomenwn

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
iericw hkolouqhsen autw ierichO akoloutheO autos

ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
AND
OF-OUT-GOING of-going-out
OF-them
FROM JERICHO
follows
to-Him him
THRONG
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
MANY vast
20:30 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
tufloi tuphlos
a_ Nom Pl m
kaqhmenoi kathEmai
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING TWO lo !
BLIND-ones sittING blind-men paragei paragO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BESIDE THE
WH
WAY road kurie elehson hmas

WH WH
akousantes oti ihsous akouO hoti iEsous

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ekraxan krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
30 And, behold, two blind men sitting by the way side, when they heard that Jesus passed by, cried out, saying, Have mercy on us, O Lord, [thou] Son of David.
HEARing
NA
that
NA
JESUS
NA
IS-BESIDE-LEADING THEY-CRY is-passing-by cry kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
sayING
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
BE-MERCIFUL-to US be-you-merciful-to !
Master ! Lord ! oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
SON
of-DAVID of-David siwphswsin siOpaO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
20:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epetimhsen autois ina epitimaO autos hina

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET THRONG
rebukES
WH
to-them them
WH
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-beING-SILENT THE

WH NA NA
de de
Conj
meizon ekraxan mega krazO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
kurie elehson hmas
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
31 And the multitude rebuked them, because they should hold their peace: but they cried the more, saying, Have mercy on us, O Lord, [thou] Son of David.
YET GREATer louder

NA
THEY-CRY
sayING
BE-MERCIFUL-to US be-you-merciful-to !
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
Master ! Lord !
SON
of-DAVID of-David
WH
20:32 kai stas

kai
Conj
NA
histEmi
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
efwnhsen autous kai eipen phOneO autos kai legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
32 And Jesus stood still, and called them, and said, What will ye that I shall do unto you?
AND
STANDing
THE
JESUS
SOUNDS summons
them
AND
said
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) to-ye autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
20:33 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
anoigwsin anoigO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi hmwn ophthalmos hemeis

n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
33 They say unto him, Lord, that our eyes may be opened.
Master ! Lord !
THAT MAY-BE-UP-OPENING THE may-be-opening-by-themselves
VIEWers eyes
OF-US
AV
20:34 splagcnisqeis
splagchnizomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ommatwn autwn omma autos

n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Pl m
BEING-compassionatED YET THE being-moved-with-compassion kai euqews anebleyan kai eutheOs anablepO
Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
JESUS
TOUCHES
OF-THE the
eyes
OF-them
34 So Jesus had compassion [on them], and touched their eyes: and immediately their eyes received sight, and they followed him.
kai hkolouqhsan autw kai akoloutheO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
AND
immediately
THEY-UP-look AND they-receive-sight
THEY-follow
to-Him him
AV
Matthew 21
21:1 kai ote hggisan

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
eggizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma kai hlqon ierosoluma kai erchomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
bhqfagh bEthphagE
ni proper
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
when
THEY-NEAR INTO JERUSALEM they-draw-near elaiwn tote ihsous elaia tote iEsous
n_ Gen Pl f Adv n_ Nom Sg m
AND
CAME
INTO BETHPHAGE INTO THE
. And when they drew nigh unto Jerusalem, and were come to Bethphage, unto the mount of Olives, then sent Jesus two disciples,
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
apesteilen duo apostellO duo

vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni numeral
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
mountain Mount
OF-THE
OLIVES
then
JESUS
commissions dispatches eis eis

Prep
TWO
LEARNers disciples thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
21:2 legwn
legO
autois poreuesqe autos poreuomai

pp Dat Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
katenanti katenanti
Adv
sayING
to-them
BE-YE-GOING be-ye-going !
INTO THE
VILLAGE
THE-one the-one
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD facing met auths meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai euqews eurhsete kai eutheOs heuriskO

onon onos
n_ Acc Sg f
dedemenhn deO
kai pwlon kai pOlos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
Saying unto them, Go into the village over against you, and straightway ye shall find an ass tied, and a colt with her: loose [them], and bring [them] unto me.
OF-YOU(p) AND ye lusantes luO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
immediately
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING ASS
HAVING-been-BOUND AND
COLT
WITH her
agagete agO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
LOOSing loosing-them
BE-LEADING to-ME be-ye-leading-them ! tis tis

px Nom Sg m
21:3 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ereite ereO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
AND
IF-EVER ANY anyone autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye ecei echO
MAY-BE-sayING ANY anything euqus euthus

Adv
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING that
THE
And if any [man] say ought unto you, ye shall say, The Lord hath need of them; and straightway he will send them.
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
apostelei apostellO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
Master Lord
OF-them
need
IS-HAVING
straightway YET he-SHALL-BE-commissionING them he-shall-be-dispatching plhrwqh plEroO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
21:4 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
All this was done, that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophet, saying,
this
YET HAS-BECOME has-occurred legontos legO

BEING-declarED
THRU THE through
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
21:5 eipate
legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qugatri siwn thugatEr siOn

n_ Dat Sg f ni proper
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus sou basileus su

say say-ye ! ercetai erchomai

to-THE
DAUGHTER of-SION BE-PERCEIVING THE of-Sion lo ! praus praus

a_ Nom Sg m
KING
OF-YOU
Tell ye the daughter of Sion, Behold, thy King cometh unto thee, meek, and sitting upon an ass, and a colt the foal of an ass.
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai epibebhkws kai epibainO

Conj vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
epi onon epi onos

Prep n_ Acc Sg f
kai epi pwlon kai epi pOlos

Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg m
IS-COMING
to-YOU
MEEK
AND
HAVING-ON-STEPPED ON having-mounted
ASS
AND
ON
COLT
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
upozugiou hupozugion
n_ Gen Sg n
SON foal
OF-UNDER-YOKE of-yokebeast oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
21:6 poreuqentes de
poreuomai
de
Conj
maqhtai kai poihsantes mathEtEs kai poieO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
sunetaxen suntassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
And the disciples went, and did as Jesus commanded them,
BEING-GONE
YET THE
LEARNers disciples
AND
DOing
according-AS TOGETHER-SETS arranges-with
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
to-them them
THE
JESUS
21:7 hgagon
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
onon onos
n_ Acc Sg f
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai epeqhkan kai epitithEmi

ep epi
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THEY-LED led
THE
ASS
AND
THE
COLT
AND
THEY-ON-PLACE ON place-on
them
THE
And brought the ass, and the colt, and put on them their clothes, and they set [him] thereon.
AV
Matthew 21
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
kai epekaqisen epanw autwn kai epikathizO epanO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv pp Gen Pl m
GARMENTS AND
He-ON-seats he-is-seated-on de de
Conj
ON-UP upon
OF-them them estrwsan eautwn strOnnumi heautou

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Gen Pl m
21:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pleistos oclos polus ochlos

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
YET MOST
THRONG STREW of-the-throng
OF-selves THE of-themselves twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
GARMENTS IN
THE
And a very great multitude spread their garments in the way; others cut down branches from the trees, and strawed [them] in the way.
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ekopton kladous apo koptO klados apo

vi impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl m Prep
dendrwn kai estrwnnuon en dendron kai strOnnumi en

n_ Gen Pl n Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
WAY road th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
others
YET STRUCK chopped
boughs
FROM THE
TREES
AND
STREWED strewed-them
IN
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
WAY
21:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
proagontes proagO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
akolouqountes akoloutheO
THE
YET THRONGS
THE the-ones
BEFORE-LEADING preceding uiw huios

n_ Dat Sg m
Him
AND
THE-ones the-ones
followING
ekrazon krazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
wsanna tw hOsanna ho
Hebrew t_ Dat Sg m
dauid euloghmenos dauid eulogeO

ni proper vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
And the multitudes that went before, and that followed, cried, saying, Hosanna to the Son of David: Blessed [is] he that cometh in the name of the Lord; Hosanna in the highest.
CRIED
sayING
HOSANNA
to-THE
SON
of-DAVID beING-blessED of-David tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
THE
ercomenos erchomai
en en
Prep
onomati kuriou onoma kurios

wsanna en hOsanna en
Hebrew Prep
uyistois hupsistos
a_ Dat Pl n
IN
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord eis eis

Prep
HOSANNA
IN
THE
HIGHest-ones highest-ones pasa pas

a_ Nom Sg f
21:10 kai eiselqontos autou

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
autos
pp Gen Sg m
ierosoluma eseisqh ierosoluma seiO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
10 And when he was come into Jerusalem, all the city was moved, saying, Who is this?
AND
OF-INTO-COMING of-entering tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
OF-Him
INTO JERUSALEM
IS-QUAKED
EVERY entire
THE
city
legousa legO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
sayING
ANY who ? de de
Conj
IS
this
21:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
11 And the multitude said, This is Jesus the prophet of Nazareth of Galilee.
THE
YET THRONGS
said
this
IS
THE
BEFORE-AVERer JESUS prophet
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
nazareq ths nazareth ho

ni proper t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
THE the-one
FROM NAZARETH OF-THE
GALILEE
21:12 kai eishlqen

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai exebalen kai ekballO

pantas tous pas ho

AND
INTO-CAME entered
JESUS
INTO THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary ierw hieron

n_ Dat Sg n
He-OUT-CAST ALL cast-out
THE
pwlountas pOleO
kai agorazontas en kai agorazO en

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
trapezas twn trapeza ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m
12 . And Jesus went into the temple of God, and cast out all them that sold and bought in the temple, and overthrew the tables of the moneychangers, and the seats of them that sold doves,
ones-SELLING ones-selling
AND
ones-BUYING ones-buying
IN
THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary kaqedras kathedra

n_ Acc Pl f
THE
tables
OF-THE
kollubistwn katestreyen kai tas kollubistEs katastrephO kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
pwlountwn tas pOleO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
LOPPers brokers peristeras peristera

n_ Acc Pl f
He-DOWN-TURNS he-overturns
AND
THE
DOWN-SETTLES OF-THE seats
THE
DOVES
AV
Matthew 21
21:13 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois gegraptai autos graphO

pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THE
HOME house poieite poieO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-ME
HOME house
13 And said unto them, It is written, My house shall be called the house of prayer; but ye have made it a den of thieves.
proseuchs klhqhsetai proseuchE kaleO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
sphlaion lhstwn spElaion lEstEs

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
OF-prayer
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED YOU(p) ye autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
YET it him
ARE-makING CAVE
OF-ROBBERS
21:14 kai proshlqon

kai
Conj
proserchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tufloi kai cwloi tuphlos kai chOlos

a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
14 And the blind and the lame came to him in the temple; and he healed them.
AND
BLIND blind-ones
AND
LAME lame-ones
IN
THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary
eqerapeusen autous therapeuO autos

He-curES
them
21:15 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis ta grammateus ho
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
qaumasia thaumasios
a_ Acc Pl n
PERCEIVING
YET THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests paidas tous pais ho

n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
THE
WRITers scribes en en
Prep
THE
MARVELS
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
epoihsen kai tous poieO kai ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Acc Pl m
krazontas krazO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
15 And when the chief priests and scribes saw the wonderful things that he did, and the children crying in the temple, and saying, Hosanna to the Son of David; they were sore displeased,
WHICH
He-DOES
AND
THE
boys
THE
CRYING
IN
THE
legontas legO
wsanna tw hOsanna ho
Hebrew t_ Dat Sg m
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
dauid hganakthsan dauid aganakteO

sayING
HOSANNA
to-THE
SON
of-DAVID THEY-resent of-David they-resent-it ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
21:16 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
akoueis akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
legousin o legO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
AND
say
to-Him
YOU-ARE-HEARING ANY what ?
these
ARE-sayING
THE
YET
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois nai oudepote autos nai oudepote

pp Dat Pl m Part Adv
anegnwte oti ek anaginOskO hoti ek

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Prep
stomatos nhpiwn stoma nEpios

n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Pl m
16 And said unto him, Hearest thou what these say? And Jesus saith unto them, Yea; have ye never read, Out of the mouth of babes and sucklings thou hast perfected praise?
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-them
YEA yes
NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) never ye-did-read ainon ainos

n_ Acc Sg m
that
OUT OF-MOUTH
OF-minors
kai qhlazontwn kathrtisw kai thElazO katartizO

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vi Aor Mid 2 Sg
AND
OF-sucklings sucklings
YOU-DOWN-EQUIP PRAISE you-attune autous exhlqen autos exerchomai

21:17 kai katalipwn

kai
Conj
kataleipO
exw ths exO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
polews eis polis eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
bhqanian kai bEthania kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
17 And he left them, and went out of the city into Bethany; and he lodged there.
AND
leavING
them
He-OUT-CAME OUT he-came-out
OF-THE
city
INTO BETHANY
AND
hulisqh aulizomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
ekei ekei
Adv
IS-COURTizED there is-camped-out
21:18 prwi
prOi
Adv
de de
Conj
WH
epanagagwn
NA
epanagwn epanagO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
epeinasen peinaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
18 . Now in the morning as he returned into the city, he hungered.
morning YET to-morning
ON-UP-LEADING leading-back sukhn sukE

n_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE
city
He-HUNGERS
21:19 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AND
PERCEIVING
FIG-tree
ONE
ON
THE
WAY roadside
He-CAME
ON
her
AND
WH
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
fulla phullon
n_ Acc Pl n
monon kai legei monon kai legO

auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ou
19 And when he saw a fig tree in the way, he came to it, and found nothing thereon, but leaves only, and said unto it, Let no fruit grow on thee henceforward for ever. And presently the fig tree withered away.
NOT-YET-ONE FOUND nothing
IN
her
IF
NO
leaves
ONLY
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-her
AV
Matthew 21
mhketi mEketi
Adv
ek ek
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
karpos karpos
n_ Nom Sg m
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
NO-NOT-STILL OUT OF-YOU by-no-means-longer exhranqh xErainO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
FRUIT
MAY-BE-BECOMING INTO THE
eon
AND
paracrhma h parachrEma ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
sukh sukE
n_ Nom Sg f
IS-DRIED is-withered
instantly
THE
FIG-tree
21:20 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai eqaumasan legontes mathEtEs thaumazO legO

pws paracrhma pOs parachrEma

Adv Int Adv
AND
PERCEIVING perceiving-it h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
LEARNers disciples
MARVEL
sayING
how how ?
instantly
20 And when the disciples saw [it], they marvelled, saying, How soon is the fig tree withered away!
exhranqh xErainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
sukh sukE
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
FIG-tree
21:21 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-them
AMEN verily ou ou
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ean ean
Cond
echte echO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
pistin kai mh pistis kai mE

diakriqhte diakrinO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
monon to monon ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
Part Neg
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-HAVING BELIEF faith ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
NO
MAY-BE-BEING-THRU-JUDGED NOT ye-may-be-doubting tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
ONLY
THE
21 Jesus answered and said unto them, Verily I say unto you, If ye have faith, and doubt not, ye shall not only do this [which is done] to the fig tree, but also if ye shall say unto this mountain, Be thou removed, and be thou cast into the sea; it shall be done.
sukhs sukE
n_ Gen Sg f
poihsete poieO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
alla kan alla kan

Conj Cond Con
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw eiphte houtos legO

pd Dat Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-THE
FIG-tree
YE-SHALL-BE-DOING but
AND-[IF]-EVER to-THE also-if-ever eis eis

Prep
mountain
this
YE-MAY-BE-sayING
arqhti airO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
kai blhqhti kai ballO

Conj vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan genhsetai thalassa ginomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg
BE-BEING-LIFTED AND be-you-being-picked-up !
BE-BEING-CAST INTO THE be-you-being-cast ! an an

Part
SEA
it-SHALL-BE-BECOMING it-shall-be-occurring en en
Prep
21:22 kai panta

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
aithshte aiteO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
proseuch proseuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
22 And all things, whatsoever ye shall ask in prayer, believing, ye shall receive.
AND
ALL all-things
as-much-as EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING IN
THE
prayer
pisteuontes lhmyesqe pisteuO lambanO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi Fut midD 2 Pl
BELIEVING
YE-SHALL-BE-GETTING
21:23 kai elqontos

kai
Conj
erchomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
OF-COMING
OF-Him
INTO THE
SACRED-place TOWARD-CAME to-Him sanctuary came-to him presbuteroi tou presbuteros ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
didaskonti didaskO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
23 . And when he was come into the temple, the chief priests and the elders of the people came unto him as he was teaching, and said, By what authority doest thou these things? and who gave thee this authority?
to-TEACHING while-teaching legontes legO

THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests poia poios

pi Dat Sg f
THE
SENIORS elders poieis poieO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-THE
PEOPLE
en en
Prep
exousia tauta exousia houtos

n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl n
kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
sayING
IN
?-THE-WHICH authority which ? exousian tauthn exousia houtos

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f
these YOU-ARE-DOING AND these-things
ANY who ?
to-YOU you
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
GIVES
THE
authority
WH
this
NA
21:24 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois erwthsw autos erOtaO

pp Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
answerING
YET
THE
JESUS
said
to-them
I-SHALL-BE-askING shall-be-asking
24 And Jesus answered and said unto them, I also will ask you one thing, which if ye tell me, I in like wise will tell you by what authority I do these
AV
Matthew 21
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
ean ean
Cond
eiphte legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
things.

pp 2 Dat Pl
AND-I also-I erw ereO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
saying word en en
Prep
ONE
WHOM which
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-sayING to-ME ye-may-be-telling me poiw poieO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND-I also-I
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f

to-YOU(p) to-ye
SHALL-BE-declarING IN
?-THE-WHICH authority which ?
these I-AM-DOING these-things hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
21:25 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
baptisma to baptisma ho
n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
iwannou poqen iOannEs pothen

n_ Gen Sg m Adv Int
ex ek
Prep
ouranou h ouranos E
n_ Gen Sg m Part
ex ek
Prep
THE
DIPism baptism de de
Conj
THE
OF-JOHN
?-WHICH-PLACE it-WAS whence ? eautois legontes heautou legO

pf 3 Dat Pl m
OUT OF-heaven
OR
OUT
anqrwpwn oi anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
dielogizonto en dialogizomai en
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep
ean ean
Cond
25 The baptism of John, whence was it? from heaven, or of men? And they reasoned with themselves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven; he will say unto us, Why did ye not then believe him?
OF-humans
THE-ones the-ones ex ek
Prep
YET THRU-accountED reasoned ouranou erei ouranos ereO

IN selves among themselves hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
sayING
IF-EVER
eipwmen legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-heaven
He-SHALL-BE-declarING to-US
THEN NOT
episteusate autw pisteuO autos

YE-BELIEVE
to-him him de de
Conj
21:26 ean
ean
Cond
eipwmen legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn foboumeqa anthrOpos phobeO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
26 But if we shall say, Of men; we fear the people; for all hold John as a prophet.
IF-EVER YET WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-humans
WE-ARE-FEARING
THE
THRONG
ALL
gar ws profhthn gar hOs prophEtEs

Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn iOannEs
n_ Acc Sg m
for
AS
BEFORE-AVERer ARE-HAVING THE prophet ihsou iEsous
JOHN
21:27 kai apokriqentes tw

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
answerING
to-THE
JESUS
THEY-say
NOT
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AVERRed we-are-aware en en

Prep
27 And they answered Jesus, and said, We cannot tell. And he said unto them, Neither tell I you by what authority I do these things.
autois kai autos autos kai autos

pp Dat Pl m Conj pp Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
exousia exousia
n_ Dat Sg f
to-them
AND also
He
NOT-YET I neither
AM-sayING am-telling
to-YOU(p) ye
IN
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
these I-AM-DOING these-things
21:28 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos eicen anthrOpos echO

n_ Nom Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
NA
kai kai
Conj
ANY what ? proselqwn proserchomai
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
it-IS-SEEMING human
HAD
offsprings children
TWO
AND
28 . But what think ye? A [certain] man had two sons; and he came to the first, and said, Son, go work to day in my vineyard.
prwtw prOtos
a_ Dat Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
teknon upage teknon hupagO

n_ Voc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Sg
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
TOWARD-COMING coming-to ergazou ergazomai
to-THE the en en
Prep
BEFORE-most he-said first tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
offspring child !
BE-UNDER-LEADING toDAY be-you-going-away !
ampelwni ampelOn
n_ Dat Sg m
BE-ACTING be-you-working !
IN
THE
VINEyard
WH WH WH WH NA NA
21:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
egw kurie kai ouk
ou ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
29 He answered and said, I will not: but afterward he repented, and went.
THE
YET answerING
he-said
NOT
I-AM-WILLING
AV
Matthew 21
usteron de husteron de
Adv Conj
NA
NA
metamelhqeis metamelomai
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
subsequently YET BEING-after-CARED regretting-it
he-FROM-CAME he-went-forth
WH
21:30 proselqwn
proserchomai
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
deuterw
NA
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
wsautws o hOsautOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD-COMING coming-to de de
Conj
YET to-THE the eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WH WH WH
DIFFERENT
WH
he-said
AS-SAMEly similarly
NA
THE
NA
30 And he came to the second, and said likewise. And he answered and said, I [go], sir: and went not.
ou qelw usteron metamelhqeis
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
YET answerING
NA NA
he-said
master ! lord !
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
NOT
FROM-CAME he-went-forth ek ek
Prep
21:31 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
epoihsen to poieO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
ANY which ? legousin legO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OUT OF-THE
WH
TWO
DOES
NA
THE
WILL
OF-THE
FATHER
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
usteros
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
31 Whether of them twain did the will of [his] father? They say unto him, The first. Jesus saith unto them, Verily I say unto you, That the publicans and the harlots go into the kingdom of God before you.
THEY-ARE-sayING THE
BEFORE-most first-one oti oi hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
pornai pornE
n_ Nom Pl f
proagousin proagO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
AMEN verily umas humeis
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
THE
THE
PROSTITUTES ARE-BEFORE-LEADING are-preceding
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
21:32 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gar iwannhs pros gar iOannEs pros

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
dikaiosunhs kai ouk dikaiosunE kai ou

CAME
for
JOHN
TOWARD YOU(p) ye de de
Conj
IN
WAY
OF-JUSTice of-righteousness pornai pornE

n_ Nom Pl f
AND
NOT

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
episteusan pisteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
32 For John came unto you in the way of righteousness, and ye believed him not: but the publicans and the harlots believed him: and ye, when ye had seen [it], repented not afterward, that ye might believe him.
YE-BELIEVE
to-him him umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
YET tribute-collectors AND
THE
PROSTITUTES BELIEVE
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
idontes eidO
oude oude
Adv
metemelhqhte metamelomai
vi Aor pasD 2 Pl
usteron tou husteron ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
to-him him
YOU(p) ye
YET PERCEIVING perceiving-it
NOT-YET YE-WERE-after-CARED subsequently OF-THE not-yeteven regretted
pisteusai autw pisteuO autos

vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
TO-BELIEVE
to-him him parabolhn akousate anqrwpos hn parabolE akouO anthrOpos eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
21:33 allhn
allos
a_ Acc Sg f
oikodespoths ostis oikodespotEs hostis

n_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m
other another
BESIDE-CAST parable
HEAR hear-ye !
human
WAS
HOME-OWNer householder
WHO-ANY who-any en en
Prep
efuteusen ampelwna kai fragmon autw phuteuO ampelOn kai phragmos autos
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m pp Dat Sg m
perieqhken kai wruxen peritithEmi kai orussO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
33 . Hear another parable: There was a certain householder, which planted a vineyard, and hedged it round about, and digged a winepress in it, and built a tower, and let it out to husbandmen, and went into a far country:
plants
VINEyard
AND
BARRIER stone-dike
to-it him it
ABOUT-PLACES AND places-about auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
EXCAVATES IN
it
him it
lhnon lEnos
n_ Acc Sg f
kai wkodomhsen purgon kai oikodomeO purgos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
kai exedeto kai ekdidOmi

Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
gewrgois geOrgos
n_ Dat Pl m
kai apedhmhsen kai apodEmeO

TROUGH
AND
HOME-BUILDS builds
TOWER
AND
OUT-GAVE leased
it
him it
to-LAND-ACTers AND to-farmers
travels
AV
Matthew 21
21:34 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
hggisen eggizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
karpwn apesteilen tous karpos apostellO ho

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
when
YET NEARS draws-near pros pros

Prep
THE
SEASON
OF-THE
FRUITS
he-commissions he-dispatches tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
34 And when the time of the fruit drew near, he sent his servants to the husbandmen, that they might receive the fruits of it.
doulous autou doulos autos

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gewrgous labein geOrgos lambanO

karpous autou karpos autos

SLAVES
OF-him
TOWARD THE
LAND-ACTers farmers gewrgoi geOrgos

n_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-GETTING THE
FRUITS
OF-him
21:35 kai labontes

kai
Conj
lambanO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
men men
Part
AND
GETTING taking on hos

pr Acc Sg m
THE
LAND-ACTers THE farmers on hos

pr Acc Sg m
SLAVES
OF-him
WHOM whichone
INDEED
35 And the husbandmen took his servants, and beat one, and killed another, and stoned another.
edeiran derO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
apekteinan apokteinO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
eliqobolhsan lithoboleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THEY-SKIN they-lash
WHOM whichone
YET THEY-FROM-KILL WHOM whichone they-kill
YET THEY-STONE-CAST they-pelt-with-stones twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
21:36 palin apesteilen allous doulous pleionas

palin
Adv
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
allos
a_ Acc Pl m
doulos
n_ Acc Pl m
polus
a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
prwtwn prOtos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai epoihsan kai poieO

AGAIN
others
SLAVES
MORE
OF-THE
BEFORE-most AND first-ones
THEY-DO
36 Again, he sent other servants more than the first: and they did unto them likewise.
autois wsautws autos hOsautOs

pp Dat Pl m Adv
to-them
AS-SAMEly similarly apesteilen pros apostellO pros

21:37 usteron de
husteron
Adv
de
Conj
autous ton autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO
37 But last of all he sent unto them his son, saying, They will reverence my son.
subsequently YET he-commissions he-dispatches entraphsontai entrepO

vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl
TOWARD them
THE
SON
OF-him
sayING
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
THEY-SHALL-BE-abashING THE they-shall-be-respecting
SON
OF-ME
21:38 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
gewrgoi geOrgos
n_ Nom Pl m
idontes eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
THE
YET LAND-ACTers PERCEIVING farmers estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
SON
said
IN selves among themselves auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
38 But when the husbandmen saw the son, they said among themselves, This is the heir; come, let us kill him, and let us seize on his inheritance.
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
klhronomos klEronomos
n_ Nom Sg m
deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
apokteinwmen apokteinO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
kai kai
Conj
this
IS
THE
tenant HITHER enjoyer-of-the-allotment hither-ye ! klhronomian klEronomia

n_ Acc Sg f
WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING him we-may-be-killing
AND
scwmen echO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
WE-SHOULD-BE-HAVING THE
tenancy OF-him enjoyment-of-the-allotment auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
21:39 kai labontes

kai
Conj
lambanO
exebalon ekballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
exw tou exO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos kai ampelOn kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
AND
GETTING taking
him
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) OUT they-cast-out(past)-him
39 And they caught him, and cast [him] out of the vineyard, and slew [him].
OF-THE
VINEyard
AND
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-KILL they-kill-him
21:40 otan
hotan
Conj
oun oun
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos ti ampelOn tis

40 When the lord therefore of the vineyard cometh, what will he do unto those husbandmen?
when-EVER THEN MAY-BE-COMING THE whenever poihsei poieO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
master lord
OF-THE
VINEyard
ANY what ?
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
gewrgois ekeinois geOrgos ekeinos

n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m
he-SHALL-BE-DOING to-THE
LAND-ACTers farmers
those
AV
Matthew 21
21:41 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kakous kakws apolesei kakos kakOs apollumi

a_ Acc Pl m Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autous kai ton autos kai ho

pp Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg m
EVIL-ones evil-men
EVILly
he-SHALL-BE-destroyING them
AND
THE
ampelwna ekdwsetai ampelOn ekdidOmi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Sg
allois gewrgois oitines apodwsousin allos geOrgos hostis apodidOmi

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
41 They say unto him, He will miserably destroy those wicked men, and will let out [his] vineyard unto other husbandmen, which shall render him the fruits in their seasons.
VINEyard
SHALL-BE-OUT-GIVING to-others he-shall-be-leasing karpous en karpos en

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
LAND-ACTers farmers
WHO-ANY who-any
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-him shall-be-rendering
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kairois autwn kairos autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Pl m
THE
FRUITS
IN
THE
SEASONS
OF-them
21:42 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oudepote oudepote
Adv
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
grafais graphE
n_ Dat Pl f
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) never ye-did-read oikodomountes outos oikodomeO houtos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pd Nom Sg m
IN
THE
WRITings scriptures eis eis

Prep
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
apedokimasan oi apodokimazO ho
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
42 Jesus saith unto them, Did ye never read in the scriptures, The stone which the builders rejected, the same is become the head of the corner: this is the Lord's doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes?
STONE
WHICH
FROM-test reject para para

Prep
THE
ones-HOME-BUILDING ones-building auth houtos

pd Nom Sg f
this this-one
WAS-BECOME INTO
kefalhn gwnias kephalE gOnia

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai estin kai eimi

qaumasth en thaumastos en
a_ Nom Sg f Prep
HEAD
OF-CORNER BESIDE Master Lord
BECAME
this
AND
it-IS
MARVELous
IN
ofqalmois hmwn ophthalmos hemeis

VIEWers eyes
OF-US
21:43 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti arqhsetai hoti airO

af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THRU this because-of basileia tou basileia ho

I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM YOU(p) shall-be-being-taken-away ye eqnei ethnos

n_ Dat Sg n
THE
43 Therefore say I unto you, The kingdom of God shall be taken from you, and given to a nation bringing forth the fruits thereof.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

poiounti poieO
vp Pres Act Dat Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-NATION DOING shall-be-being-given producing
THE
karpous auths karpos autos

n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg f
FRUITS
OF-her
21:44
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
peswn piptO
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
AND
THE
one-FALLING one-falling ef epi

Prep
ON
THE
STONE
this
44 And whosoever shall fall on this stone shall be broken: but on whomsoever it shall fall, it will grind him to powder.
sunqlasqhsetai sunthlaO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
pesh piptO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
likmhsei likmaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHER-SHATTERED ON shall-be-being-shattered auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WHOM
YET EVER it-SHOULD-BE-FALLING it-SHALL-BE-WINNOWING it-shall-be-scattering-like-chaff
him

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi tas pharisaios ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
parabolas parabolE
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
HEARing
THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
PHARISEES
THE
45 And when the chief priests and Pharisees had heard his parables, they perceived that he spake of them.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti peri hoti peri

Conj Prep
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-Him
THEY-KNOW know
that
ABOUT them concerning
He-IS-sayING he-is-saying-this
AV
21:46 kai zhtountes

kai
Conj
zEteO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
krathsai efobhqhsan krateO phobeO

vn Aor Act vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous epei eis ochlos epei eis

n_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep
AND
SEEKING
Him
TO-HOLD
THEY-WERE-afraid-of THE
THRONGS
since
INTO
46 But when they sought to lay hands on him, they feared the multitude, because they took him for a prophet.
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERer Him prophet
THEY-HAD
AV
Matthew 22
22:1 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
palin eipen palin legO

en en
Prep
parabolais autois parabolE autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Dat Pl m
. And Jesus answered and spake unto them again by parables, and said,
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
AGAIN
said spoke
IN
to-them
legwn legO
sayING
22:2 wmoiwqh h
homoioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn anqrwpw basilei ostis ouranos anthrOpos basileus hostis

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
The kingdom of heaven is like unto a certain king, which made a marriage for his son,
WAS-LIKenED THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-human
KING
WHO-ANY who-any
makES
gamous gamos
n_ Acc Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
MARRIAGES to-THE wedding-festivities
SON
OF-him
22:3 kai apesteilen tous

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Acc Pl m

kalesai tous kaleO ho

vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m
keklhmenous kaleO
vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m
AND
commissions he-dispatches gamous gamos

n_ Acc Pl m
THE
SLAVES
OF-him
TO-CALL
THE
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED ones-having-been-invited
And sent forth his servants to call them that were bidden to the wedding: and they would not come.
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hqelon thelO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
INTO THE
MARRIAGES AND wedding-festivities
NOT
THEY-WILLED TO-BE-COMING they-would eipate legO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
22:4 palin apesteilen allous doulous legwn

palin
Adv
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
allos
a_ Acc Pl m
doulos
n_ Acc Pl m
legO
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
AGAIN
others
SLAVES
sayING
say say-ye ! htoimaka hetoimazO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
to-THE
keklhmenois kaleO
vp Perf Pas Dat Pl m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ariston mou ariston egO

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
Again, he sent forth other servants, saying, Tell them which are bidden, Behold, I have prepared my dinner: my oxen and [my] fatlings [are] killed, and all things [are] ready: come unto the marriage.
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BE-PERCEIVING THE ones-having-been-invited lo ! tauroi tauros

n_ Nom Pl m
LUNCH luncheon
OF-ME
I-HAVE-made-READY THE
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
sitista sitistos
a_ Nom Pl n
tequmena thuO
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
etoima hetoimos
a_ Nom Pl n
BULLS
OF-ME
AND
THE
GRAINlings HAVING-been-SACRIFICED AND grain-fed-animals
ALL all-things
READY ready(p)
deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gamous gamos
n_ Acc Pl m
HITHER hither-ye !
INTO THE
MARRIAGES wedding-festivities os hos

pr Nom Sg m
22:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
amelhsantes aphlqon ameleO aperchomai

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
men men
Part
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
THE-ones the os hos

pr Nom Sg m
YET UN-CARing
FROM-CAME WHO they-came-away whichone emporian autou emporia autos

INDEED INTO THE
OWN
FIELD
But they made light of [it], and went their ways, one to his farm, another to his merchandise:
de de
Conj
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
WHO whichone
YET ON
THE
merchandise
OF-him
22:6 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
krathsantes tous krateO ho

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m

ubrisan hubrizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
And the remnant took his servants, and entreated [them] spitefully, and slew [them].
THE
YET rest rest(p)
HOLDing taking-hold-of
THE
SLAVES
OF-him
THEY-OUTRAGE AND outrage-them
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-KILL kill-them
22:7 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
basileus wrgisqh basileus orgizO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai pemyas kai pempO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
strateumata autou strateuma autos

n_ Acc Pl n pp Gen Sg m
THE
YET KING
IS-INDIGNANT AND is-angered
SENDing
THE
WAR-troops troops
OF-him
But when the king heard [thereof], he was wroth: and he sent forth his armies, and destroyed those murderers, and burned up their city.
AV
Matthew 22
apwlesen tous apollumi ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
foneis phoneus
n_ Acc Pl m
ekeinous kai thn ekeinos kai ho

pd Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eneprhsen emprEthO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
destroys
THE
MURDERERS those
AND
THE
city
OF-them
IN-INFLAMES sets-in-flames etoimos hetoimos

a_ Nom Sg m
8
22:8 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
doulois autou doulos autos

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
gamos gamos
n_ Nom Sg m
then
he-IS-sayING
to-THE
SLAVES
OF-him
THE
INDEED MARRIAGE wedding axioi axios

a_ Nom Pl m
READY
Then saith he to his servants, The wedding is ready, but they which were bidden were not worthy.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
keklhmenoi kaleO
ouk ou
Part Neg
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
IS
THE
YET ones-HAVING-been-CALLED NOT ones-having-been-invited oun oun

Conj
WERE
WORTHY
22:9 poreuesqe
poreuomai
epi tas epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl f
diexodous diexodos
n_ Acc Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
odwn hodos
n_ Gen Pl f
kai osous kai hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl m
ean ean
Cond
Go ye therefore into the highways, and as many as ye shall find, bid to the marriage.
YE-BE-beING-GONE be-ye-going ! eurhte heuriskO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
THEN ON
THE
THRU-OUT-WAYS OF-THE exits gamous gamos

n_ Acc Pl m
WAYS roads
AND
as-many-as IF-EVER
kalesate eis kaleO eis

vm Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
YE-MAY-BE-FINDING CALL call-ye !
INTO THE
MARRIAGES wedding-festivities ekeinoi eis ekeinos eis

pd Nom Pl m Prep
22:10 kai exelqontes

kai
Conj
exerchomai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
odous sunhgagon hodos sunagO

n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out euron heuriskO
THE
SLAVES
those
INTO THE
WAYS roads
THEY-TOGETHER-LED they-gathered
pantas ous pas hos

a_ Acc Pl m pr Acc Pl m
ponhrous te ponEros te
a_ Acc Pl m Part
kai agaqous kai eplhsqh o kai agathos kai plEthO (pimplEmi) ho

Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
10 So those servants went out into the highways, and gathered together all as many as they found, both bad and good: and the wedding was furnished with guests.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ALL
WH
WHOM
NA
THEY-FOUND wicked-ones wicked-ones anakeimenwn anakeimai
BESIDES AND
GOOD-ones good-ones
AND
IS-FILLED
THE
numfwn
gamos gamos
n_ Nom Sg m
MARRIAGE wedding
OF-UP-LYING-ones of-ones-lying-back-at-table o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
22:11 eiselqwn
eiserchomai
de de
Conj
basileus qeasasqai tous basileus theaomai ho

n_ Nom Sg m vn Aor midD t_ Acc Pl m
anakeimenous anakeimai
INTO-COMING entering eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET THE
KING
TO-gaze to-gaze-at
THE
ones-UP-LYING ones-lying-back-at-table
11 And when the king came in to see the guests, he saw there a man which had not on a wedding garment:
ekei anqrwpon ouk ekei anthrOpos ou

Adv n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
endedumenon enduO
vp Perf Mid Acc Sg m
enduma gamou enduma gamos

he-PERCEIVED there
human
NOT
HAVING-IN-SLIPPED IN-SLIP having-put-on apparel pws eishlqes pOs eiserchomai

Adv Int vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
OF-MARRIAGE of-wedding wde mh hOde mE

Adv Part Neg
22:12 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
etaire hetairos
n_ Voc Sg m
ecwn echO
AND
he-IS-sayING
to-him
COMRADE ! how how ? de de

Conj
YOU-INTO-CAME here you-entered
NO
HAVING
12 And he saith unto him, Friend, how camest thou in hither not having a wedding garment? And he was speechless.
enduma gamou enduma gamos

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
efimwqh phimoO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN-SLIP apparel
OF-MARRIAGE THE of-wedding
YET WAS-MUZZLED he-was-still tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
22:13 tote o
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus eipen basileus legO

diakonois diakonos
n_ Dat Pl m
dhsantes deO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
then
THE
KING
said
to-THE
THRU-SERVitors BINDing servants to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
OF-him
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
kai ceiras ekbalete kai cheir ekballO

Conj n_ Acc Pl f vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
skotos to skotos ho
exwteron exOteros
a_ Acc Sg n
13 Then said the king to the servants, Bind him hand and foot, and take him away, and cast [him] into outer darkness; there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.
FEET
AND
HANDS
BE-YE-OUT-CASTING him be-ye-casting-out ! klauqmos kai o klauthmos kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
INTO THE
DARKness
THE
OUTer

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

odontwn odous
n_ Gen Pl m
t_ Nom Sg m
there
SHALL-BE
THE
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
TEETH
AV
Matthew 22
22:14 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
gar eisin gar eimi

klhtoi klEtos
a_ Nom Pl m
oligoi oligos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eklektoi eklektos
a_ Nom Pl m
14 For many are called, but few [are] chosen.
MANY
for
ARE
CALLED
FEW
YET chosen
22:15 tote poreuqentes oi

tote
Adv
poreuomai
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi sumboulion pharisaios sumboulion

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
opws hopOs
Adv
then
BEING-GONE
THE
PHARISEES
TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT consultation held
WHICH-how so-that
15 . Then went the Pharisees, and took counsel how they might entangle him in [his] talk.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pagideuswsin pagideuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
Him
THEY-SHOULD-BE-FASTENING IN they-should-be-trapping autw autos
saying word tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
22:16 kai apostellousin

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
maqhtas autwn mathEtEs autos

meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
pp Dat Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-commissionING to-Him they-are-dispatching

WH
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-them
WITH
THE
hrwdianwn hErOdianoi
n_ Gen Pl m
legontas
NA
legontes legO
didaskale oidamen didaskalos eidO

n_ Voc Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti alhqhs hoti alEthEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
16 And they sent out unto him their disciples with the Herodians, saying, Master, we know that thou art true, and teachest the way of God in truth, neither carest thou for any [man]: for thou regardest not the person of men.
HERODians
sayING
TEACHer !
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware alhqeia didaskeis alEtheia didaskO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg
TRUE
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
YOU-ARE
AND
THE
WAY
OF-THE
God
IN
TRUTH
YOU-ARE-TEACHING AND are-teaching eis eis

Prep
NOT
melei melei
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
peri peri
Prep
oudenos oudeis
a_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
gar blepeis gar blepO

proswpon prosOpon
n_ Acc Sg n
it-IS-CARING
to-YOU
ABOUT OF-NOT-YET-ONE NOT concerning anyone
for
YOU-ARE-lookING INTO face
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-humans
WH NA
22:17
eipon
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
dounai didOmi
vn 2Aor Act
BE-sayING be-you-telling ! khnson kEnsos

n_ Acc Sg m
THEN to-US us
ANY what ?
to-YOU
it-IS-SEEMING it-IS-allowed
TO-GIVE
17 Tell us therefore, What thinkest thou? Is it lawful to give tribute unto Caesar, or not?
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
ou ou
Part Neg
POLL-TAX
to-CEASAR OR
NOT
22:18 gnous
ginOskO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ponhrian autwn ponEria autos

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
18 But Jesus perceived their wickedness, and said, Why tempt ye me, [ye] hypocrites?
KNOWING
YET THE
JESUS
THE
wickedness
OF-them
He-said said
ANY why ?
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
peirazete upokritai peirazO hupokritEs

vi Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Voc Pl m
ME
YE-ARE-tryING
hypocrites hypocrites ! to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
22:19 epideixate moi

epideiknumi
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
nomisma tou nomisma ho

khnsou kEnsos
n_ Gen Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
19 Shew me the tribute money. And they brought unto him a penny.
ON-SHOW exhibit-ye ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
to-ME
THE
currency
OF-THE
POLL-TAX
THE-ones the
YET TOWARD-CARRY they-bring-to
dhnarion dEnarion
n_ Acc Sg n
to-Him him
DENARIUS
22:20 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois tinos autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eikwn eikOn
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
epigrafh epigraphE
n_ Nom Sg f
20 And he saith unto them, Whose [is] this image and superscription?
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
OF-ANY of-whom ?
THE
image
this
AND
THE
ON-WRITing inscription
AV
Matthew 22
22:21 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kaisaros tote legei kaisar tote legO

n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois apodote autos apodidOmi

pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
THEY-ARE-sayING
to-Him
OF-CEASAR
then
He-IS-sayING
to-them
BE-YE-FROM-GIVING THEN be-ye-paying !
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kaisaros kaisari kaisar kaisar

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
21 They say unto him, Caesar's. Then saith he unto them, Render therefore unto Caesar the things which are Caesar's; and unto God the things that are God's.
THE the(p)
OF-CEASAR
to-CEASAR AND
THE the(p)
OF-THE
God
to-THE
God
22:22 kai akousantes eqaumasan kai afentes

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
thaumazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai
Conj
aphiEmi
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
aphlqan aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
22 When they had heard [these words], they marvelled, and left him, and went their way.
AND
HEARing hearing-it ekeinh th ekeinos ho

pd Dat Sg f
THEY-MARVEL
AND
FROM-LETTING leaving autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
Him
THEY-FROM-COME they-come-away mh mE
Part Neg
23 . The same day came to him the Sadducees, which say that there is no resurrection, and asked him,
22:23 en
en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
saddoukaioi legontes saddoukaios legO

t_ Dat Sg f
IN
that
THE
DAY
SADDUCEES
ones-sayING ones-saying
NO
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
anastasin kai ephrwthsan auton anastasis kai eperOtaO autos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE
UP-STANDing resurrection
AND
THEY-inquire-of
Him
22:24 legontes
legO
didaskale mwushs didaskalos mOusEs

n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
sayING
TEACHer !
MOSES
said
IF-EVER ANY anyone adelfos autou adelphos autos

n_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING NO may-be-dying thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
24 Saying, Master, Moses said, If a man die, having no children, his brother shall marry his wife, and raise up seed unto his brother.
ecwn echO
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
epigambreusei epigambreuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
pp Gen Sg m
HAVING
offsprings children
SHALL-BE-ON-MARRYING THE shall-be-marrying sperma tw sperma ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg m
brother
OF-him
THE
WOMAN wife
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai anasthsei kai anistEmi


OF-him
AND
he-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING seed shall-be-raising-up de de

Conj
to-THE
brother
OF-him
22:25 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
par para
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
epta hepta
ni numeral
adelfoi kai o adelphos kai ho

n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
ghmas gameO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THEY-WERE YET BESIDE US were eteleuthsen kai mh teleutaO kai mE

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg
SEVEN
brothers
AND
THE
BEFORE-most MARRYing first thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
25 Now there were with us seven brethren: and the first, when he had married a wife, deceased, and, having no issue, left his wife unto his brother:
ecwn echO
sperma afhken sperma aphiEmi


deceasES
AND
NO
HAVING
seed
FROM-LETS he-leaves
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

to-THE
brother
OF-him
22:26 omoiws kai o

homoiOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
deuteros kai o deuteros kai ho

a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tritos tritos
a_ Nom Sg m
ews twn heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
epta hepta
ni numeral
26 Likewise the second also, and the third, unto the seventh.
LIKE-AS likewise
AND also
THE
second
AND
THE
third
TILL
OF-THE the
SEVEN
22:27 usteron de
husteron
Adv
de
Conj
pantwn apeqanen h pas apothnEskO ho

a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
27 And last of all the woman died also.
subsequently YET OF-ALL
FROM-DIED died
THE
WOMAN
22:28 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anastasei oun anastasis oun

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
epta hepta
ni numeral
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar gar
Conj
28 Therefore in the resurrection whose wife shall she be of the seven? for they all had her.
IN
THE
THEN OF-ANY of-which ?
OF-THE
SEVEN
SHALL-BE she-shall-be
WOMAN wife
ALL
for
escon echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
have-HAD
her
AV
Matthew 22
22:29 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois planasqe autos planaO

pp Dat Pl m vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-them
YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED NO ye-are-being-deceived qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
29 Jesus answered and said unto them, Ye do err, not knowing the scriptures, nor the power of God.
eidotes eidO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas mhde graphE mEde

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dunamin tou dunamis ho

HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-acquainted with
WRITings scriptures
NO-YET THE nor-yet
ABILITY power gamousin gameO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-THE
God
22:30 en
en
Prep
gar th gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
anastasei oute anastasis oute

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
oute oute
Conj
IN
for
THE
NOT-BESIDES THEY-ARE-MARRYING NOT-BESIDES neither nor en en

Prep
30 For in the resurrection they neither marry, nor are given in marriage, but are as the angels of God in heaven.
gamizontai gamizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
all ws aggeloi alla hOs aggelos

Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw eisin ouranos eimi

n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-MARRYizING but they-are-being-given-in marriage
AS
MESSENGERS IN
THE
heaven
THEY-ARE are anegnwte to anaginOskO ho

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
31 But as touching the resurrection of the dead, have ye not read that which was spoken unto you by God, saying,
22:31 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anastasews twn anastasis ho

nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ABOUT YET THE concerning rhqen ereO

vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n
UP-STANDing resurrection upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
DEAD-ones NOT dead-ones
THE
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
legontos legO
BEING-declarED
to-YOU(p) to-ye eimi eimi
by
THE
God
sayING
22:32 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
isaak isaak
ni proper
kai kai
Conj
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AM
THE
God
of-ABRAHAM AND of-Abraham o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
of-ISAAC AND of-Isaac alla alla

Conj
32 I am the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob? God is not the God of the dead, but of the living.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
THE
God
of-JACOB NOT of-Jacob
IS he-is
THE
God
OF-DEAD-ones but of-dead-ones
zwntwn zaO
OF-LIVING-ones of-ones-living

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
exeplhssonto ekplEssO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f

33 And when the multitude heard [this], they were astonished at his doctrine.
AND
HEARing hearing-it de de
Conj
THE
THRONGS
THEY-were-astonishED ON were-astonished
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
22:34 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi akousantes oti efimwsen tous pharisaios akouO hoti phimoO ho

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
saddoukaious saddoukaios
n_ Acc Pl m
THE
YET PHARISEES
HEARing
that
He-MUZZLES
THE
SADDUCEES
34 . But when the Pharisees had heard that he had put the Sadducees to silence, they were gathered together.
sunhcqhsan sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
WERE-TOGETHER-LED ON were-gathered
THE
SAME same-place ex ek
Prep
22:35 kai ephrwthsen eis

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WH
nomikos
NA
nomikos nomikos
a_ Nom Sg m
peirazwn peirazO
AND
inquirES-of inquires
ONE
OUT OF-them
LAWer learned-in-the-law
tryING
35 Then one of them, [which was] a lawyer, asked [him a question], tempting him, and saying,
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
22:36 didaskale poia

didaskalos
n_ Voc Sg m
poios
pi Nom Sg f
entolh megalh entolE mega

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
36 Master, which [is] the great commandment in the law?
TEACHer !
?-THE-WHICH direction which ? precept
GREAT
IN
THE
LAW
AV
Matthew 22
22:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
agaphseis agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
YET He-AVERRed
NA
to-him
YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master Lord kai en kai en

Conj Prep
THE
God
OF-YOU
37 Jesus said unto him, Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind.
en en
Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia sou kardia su

olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
IN
WHOLE
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
AND
IN
WHOLE
THE
soul
OF-YOU
AND
IN
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dianoia dianoia
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
WHOLE
THE
THRU-MIND OF-YOU comprehension estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
22:38 auth
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
kai prwth kai prOtos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
entolh entolE
n_ Nom Sg f
38 This is the first and great commandment.
this
IS
NA
THE
GREAT
AND
BEFORE-most direction foremost precept ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
22:39 deutera
deuteros
a_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
omoia homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
agaphseis agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
ws hOs
Adv
39 And the second [is] like unto it, Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.
second
YET
LIKE
to-her herit
NIGH-one associate
OF-YOU
AS
seauton seautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
YOURself
22:40 en
en
Prep
tautais tais houtos ho

pd Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl f
entolais olos entolE holos

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
krematai kremannumi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
40 On these two commandments hang all the law and the prophets.
IN
these
THE
TWO
directions precepts
WHOLE
THE
LAW
IS-HANGING
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets de de
Conj
22:41 sunhgmenwn
sunagO
vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn ephrwthsen autous o pharisaios eperOtaO autos ho

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
41 . While the Pharisees were gathered together, Jesus asked them,
OF-HAVING-TOGETHER-LED YET THE of-having-been-gathered ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
PHARISEES
inquirES-of
them
THE
JESUS
22:42 legwn
legO
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou tinos christos tis

n_ Gen Sg m pi Gen Sg m
sayING
ANY what ?
to-YOU(p) to-ye
it-IS-SEEMING ABOUT THE concerning tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
OF-ANY of-whom ?
42 Saying, What think ye of Christ? whose son is he? They say unto him, [The Son] of David.
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
SON
He-IS
OF-THE
DAVID
22:43 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois pws oun autos pOs oun

pp Dat Pl m Adv Int Conj
dauid en dauid en
ni proper Prep
pneumati kalei pneuma kaleO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
43 He saith unto them, How then doth David in spirit call him Lord, saying,
He-IS-sayING
to-them
how how ?
THEN DAVID
IN
spirit
IS-CALLING
Him
Master Lord
legwn legO
sayING
22:44 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kaqou kathEmai
ek ek
Prep

said
Master Lord
to-THE
Master Lord
OF-ME
BE-sittING be-you-sitting !
OF-ME
44 The LORD said unto my Lord, Sit thou on my right hand, till I make thine enemies thy footstool?
AV
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
qw tithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ecqrous sou echthros su

a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Sg
upokatw hupokatO
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
TILL
EVER I-MAY-BE-PLACING THE
enemies
OF-YOU
UNDER-DOWN OF-THE underneath the pws uios pOs huios

Adv Int n_ Nom Sg m
FEET
OF-YOU
22:45 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
dauid kalei dauid kaleO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
45 If David then call him Lord, how is he his son?
IF
THEN DAVID
IS-CALLING
Him
Master Lord
how how ?
SON
OF-him
He-IS
22:46 kai oudeis

kai
Conj
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
edunato dunamai
apokriqhnai autw apokrinomai autos

vn Aor pasD pp Dat Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
oude oude
Adv
etolmhsen tolmaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
NOT-YET-ONE was-ABLE no-one ap apo

Prep
TO-answer
to-Him him
saying word
NOT-YET DARES neither ouketi ouketi

Adv
46 And no man was able to answer him a word, neither durst any [man] from that day forth ask him any more [questions].
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ekeinhs ths ekeinos ho

pd Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
eperwthsai auton eperOtaO autos

vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
ANY anyone
FROM that
THE
DAY
TO-inquire-of
Him
NOT-STILL not-longer
AV
Matthew 23
23:1 tote
tote
Adv
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
elalhsen tois laleO ho

oclois kai tois ochlos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais mathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
. Then spake Jesus to the multitude, and to his disciples,
then
THE
JESUS
TALKS speaks
to-THE
THRONGS AND
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
23:2 legwn
legO
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
mwusews kaqedras mOusEs kathedra

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f
ekaqisan oi kathizO ho
grammateis kai grammateus kai

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
Saying, The scribes and the Pharisees sit in Moses'seat:
sayING
ON
THE
of-MOSES of-Moses
DOWN-SETTLE are-seated seat
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi pharisaios
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
PHARISEES
23:3 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
oun oun
Conj
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
eipwsin legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
poihsate kai threite poieO kai tEreO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ALL
THEN as-much-as IF-EVER THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) to-ye de de

Conj
DO do-ye !
AND
BE-KEEPING be-ye-keeping-it !
All therefore whatsoever they bid you observe, [that] observe and do; but do not ye after their works: for they say, and do not.
kata kata
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
gar kai ou gar kai ou

Conj Conj Part Neg
according-to YET THE
ACTS
OF-them
NO
THEY-ARE-sayING for
AND
NOT
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-DOING are-doing
23:4 desmeuousin
desmeuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
fortia barea phortion barus

NA
kai dusbastakta kai dusbastaktos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
NA
kai epitiqeasin kai epitithEmi

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Att
THEY-ARE-BINDING YET loads
HEAVY
AND
ILL-BEARic hard-to-bear de de
Conj
AND
THEY-ARE-ON-PLACING are-placing-on-them ou ou
Part Neg
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
wmous Omos
n_ Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn autoi anthrOpos autos

n_ Gen Pl m pp Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
daktulw autwn daktulos autos

n_ Dat Sg m pp Gen Pl m
For they bind heavy burdens and grievous to be borne, and lay [them] on men's shoulders; but they [themselves] will not move them with one of their fingers.
ON
THE
SHOULDERS OF-THE
humans
they
YET to-THE
FINGER
OF-them
NOT
qelousin kinhsai auta thelO kineO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl n
ARE-WILLING TO-STIR
them
23:5 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qeaqhnai theaomai
vn Aor Pas
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ALL
YET THE
ACTS works
OF-them
THEY-ARE-DOING TOWARD THE
TO-BE-gazED to-THE to-be-gazed-at
But all their works they do for to be seen of men: they make broad their phylacteries, and enlarge the borders of their garments,
anqrwpois platunousin anthrOpos platunO

n_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
gar ta gar ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
fulakthria autwn phulaktErion autos

kai megalunousin kai megalunO

humans
THEY-ARE-BROADenING for
THE
amulets
OF-them
AND
THEY-ARE-magnifyING are-magnifying
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kraspeda kraspedon
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
HANG-FOOTS tassels de de
Conj
23:6 filousin
phileO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prwtoklisian en prOtoklisia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
deipnois kai tas deipnon kai ho

n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl f
And love the uppermost rooms at feasts, and the chief seats in the synagogues,
THEY-ARE-beING-FOND YET THE they-are-being-fond-of prwtokaqedrias prOtokathedria

n_ Acc Pl f
BEFORE-most-CLINE first-reclining-place sunagwgais sunagOgE

n_ Dat Pl f
IN
THE
DINners
AND
THE
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLES IN front-seats
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS synagogues
AV
Matthew 23
23:7 kai tous

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aspasmous en aspasmos en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
agorais kai kaleisqai agora kai kaleO

n_ Dat Pl f Conj vn Pres Pas
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
And greetings in the markets, and to be called of men, Rabbi, Rabbi.
AND
THE
greetings salutations
IN
THE
BUY-places AND markets
TO-BE-beING-CALLED by
THE
anqrwpwn rabbi anthrOpos rhabbi

n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
humans
RABBI
23:8 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
klhqhte kaleO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
rabbi eis rhabbi heis

Hebrew n_ Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye
YET NO
MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED RABBI
ONE
for
IS
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
But be not ye called Rabbi: for one is your Master, [even] Christ; and all ye are brethren.
didaskalos pantes didaskalos pas

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
adelfoi este adelphos eimi

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
TEACHer
ALL
YET YOU(p) ye mh mE
Part Neg
brothers brethren
ARE
23:9 kai patera

kai
Conj
patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kaleshte kaleO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
AND
FATHER
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-CALLING OF-YOU(p) ON of-ye pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
LAND earth
ONE
for
And call no [man] your father upon the earth: for one is your Father, which is in heaven.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranios ouranios
a_ Nom Sg m
IS
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye klhqhte kaleO

vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
FATHER
THE
heavenly
23:10 mhde
mEde
Conj
kaqhghtai kathEgEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
oti kaqhghths umwn hoti kathEgEtEs humeis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
NO-YET YE-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED DOWN-LEADers that nor-yet preceptors o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
DOWN-LEADer preceptor
OF-YOU(p) IS of-ye
10 Neither be ye called masters: for one is your Master, [even] Christ.
ONE
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
ANOINTED Christ de de
Conj
23:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET GREATER
OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE of-ye eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVitor of-ye servant tapeinwqhsetai tapeinoO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
11 But he that is greatest among you shall be your servant.
23:12 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
uywsei hupsoO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai ostis kai hostis

Conj pr Nom Sg m
WHO-ANY YET SHALL-BE-HEIGHTenING self anyone-who shall-be-exalting himself tapeinwsei tapeinoO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND shall-be-being-humbled
WHO-ANY anyone-who
12 And whosoever shall exalt himself shall be abased; and he that shall humble himself shall be exalted.
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
uywqhsetai hupsoO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-makING-LOW self shall-be-humbling himself
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED shall-be-being-exalted grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti kleiete grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti kleiO
n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
23:13 ouai de
ouai
Inj
de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WOE woe !
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITers scribes !
AND
PHARISEES Pharisees ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
that
YE-ARE-LOCKING THE

ouranwn emprosqen ouranos emprosthen

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
anqrwpwn umeis anthrOpos humeis

n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
gar ouk gar ou

Conj Part Neg
13 . But woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye shut up the kingdom of heaven against men: for ye neither go in [yourselves], neither suffer ye them that are entering to go in.
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the eisercomenous eiserchomai

humans
YOU(p) ye
for
NOT
eisercesqe eiserchomai
oude oude
Adv
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
afiete aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
vn 2Aor Act
ARE-INTO-COMING are-entering
NOT-YET THE neither
ones-INTO-COMING ones-entering
YE-ARE-FROM-LETTING TO-BE-INTO-COMING ye-are-letting to-be-entering

14 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye devour widows'houses, and for a pretence make long prayer: therefore ye shall receive the
23:14
AV
Matthew 23
23:15 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti periagete grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti periagO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WOE woe !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITers scribes ! xhran xEros

n_ Acc Sg f
AND
PHARISEES Pharisees !
that
YE-ARE-ABOUT-LEADING THE ye-are-going-about
qalassan kai thn thalassa kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
poihsai ena poieO heis

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m
proshluton kai otan prosElutos kai hotan

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Conj
greater damnation. 15 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye compass sea and land to make one proselyte, and when he is made, ye make him twofold more the child of hell than yourselves.
SEA
AND
THE
DRY dry-land
TO-make
ONE
TOWARD-COMer proselyte geennhs geenna

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
when-EVER whenever
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
diploteron umwn diplous humeis

a_ Acc Sg m Cmp pp 2 Gen Pl
he-MAY-BE-BECOMING YE-ARE-makING him
SON
OF-GEHENNA more-double more-than-double legontes legO

OF-YOU(p) of-ye an an
Part
16 Woe unto you, [ye] blind guides, which say, Whosoever shall swear by the temple, it is nothing; but whosoever shall swear by the gold of the temple, he is a debtor!
23:16 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
odhgoi hodEgos
n_ Voc Pl m
tufloi oi tuphlos ho
a_ Voc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
WOE woe ! omosh omnuO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WAY-LEADers BLIND guides ! blind ! en en

Prep
THE
ones-sayING ones-saying estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WHO
EVER
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
naw naos
n_ Dat Sg m
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN
THE
TEMPLE
NOT-YET-ONE it-IS nothing tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
WHO
YET EVER
omosh omnuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
crusw chrusos
n_ Dat Sg m
naou naos
n_ Gen Sg m
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN
THE
GOLD
OF-THE
TEMPLE
IS-OWING
23:17 mwroi
mOros
a_ Voc Pl m
kai tufloi tis kai tuphlos tis

Conj a_ Voc Pl m pi Nom Sg m
gar meizwn gar mega

Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
crusos chrusos
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
INSIPID-ones AND stupid-ones ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
BLIND blind-ones !
ANY which ? agiasas hagiazO
for
GREATER
IS
THE
GOLD
OR
17 [Ye] fools and blind: for whether is greater, the gold, or the temple that sanctifieth the gold?
naos naos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
cruson chrusos
n_ Acc Sg m
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
TEMPLE
THE
HOLYizing hallowing omosh omnuO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
GOLD
23:18 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
qusiasthriw ouden thusiastErion oudeis

n_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN
THE
SACRIFICE-place altar tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE it-IS nothing epanw autou epanO autos

Adv pp Gen Sg n
18 And, Whosoever shall swear by the altar, it is nothing; but whosoever sweareth by the gift that is upon it, he is guilty.
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
omosh omnuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
dwrw dOron
n_ Dat Sg n
WHO
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-SWEARING IN
THE
oblation to-THE approach-present the
ON-UP upon
OF-it it
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-OWING
23:19 tufloi
tuphlos
a_ Voc Pl m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
gar meizon gar mega

Conj a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
dwron dOron
n_ Nom Sg n
h E
Part
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qusiasthrion thusiastErion
n_ Nom Sg n
BLIND-ones ANY blind-ones ! which ? to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
for
GREATer
THE
oblation OR approach-present
THE
SACRIFICE-place altar
19 [Ye] fools and blind: for whether [is] greater, the gift, or the altar that sanctifieth the gift?
agiazon hagiazO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dwron dOron
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
HOLYizING hallowing oun oun

Conj
THE
oblation approach-present en en
Prep
23:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
omosas omnuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
qusiasthriw omnuei thusiastErion omnuO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
20 Whoso therefore shall swear by the altar, sweareth by it, and by all things thereon.
THE the-one en en
Prep
THEN one-SWEARing swearing tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
IN
THE
IS-SWEARING IN
it
AND
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
epanw autou epanO autos

Adv pp Gen Sg n
IN
ALL
THE
ON-UP upon
OF-it it
AV
Matthew 23
23:21 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
omosas omnuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
naw naos
n_ Dat Sg m
omnuei omnuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
21 And whoso shall swear by the temple, sweareth by it, and by him that dwelleth therein.
AND
THE
one-SWEARing one-swearing auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IN
THE
TEMPLE
IS-SWEARING IN
it
him it
AND
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
katoikounti katoikeO
THE
One-DOWN-HOMING it him it one-dwelling-in omosas omnuO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
23:22 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw omnuei ouranos omnuO

n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qronw thronos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
THE
one-SWEARing one-swearing kai en kai en

Conj Prep
IN
THE
heaven
IS-SWEARING IN
THE
THRONE
22 And he that shall swear by heaven, sweareth by the throne of God, and by him that sitteth thereon.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kaqhmenw kathEmai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg m
epanw autou epanO autos

Adv pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
AND
IN
THE
One-sittING one-sitting
ON-UP upon
OF-it him it to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
23 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye pay tithe of mint and anise and cummin, and have omitted the weightier [matters] of the law, judgment, mercy, and faith: these ought ye to have done, and not to leave the other undone.
23:23 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti apodekatoute grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti apodekatoO
WOE woe ! hduosmon hEduosmon

n_ Acc Sg n
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITers scribes !
AND
that
YE-ARE-FROM-TENthING THE ye-are-taking-tithes-from ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
anhqon kai to anEthon kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n
kuminon kai afhkate kuminon kai aphiEmi

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl
barutera barus
a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
GRATIFY-ODOR AND mint tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
DILL
AND
THE
CUMIN
AND
YE-FROM-LET THE more-HEAVY ye-leave the-things weightier pistin tauta pistis houtos
n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Pl n
WH
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
krisin krisis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
de
OF-THE
NA
LAW
THE
JUDGing
AND
THE
MERCY
WH
AND
THE
NA
BELIEF faith afienai aphiEmi

vn Pres Act
these these-things
de de
Conj
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
poihsai kakeina poieO kakeinos

vn Aor Act pd Nom Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
afeinai
YET
it-WAS-BINDING TO-DO
NA
AND-those NO and-those-things oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
TO-FROM-LET to-leave ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
23:24 odhgoi
hodEgos
n_ Voc Pl m
tufloi tuphlos
a_ Voc Pl m
diulizontes diulizO
kwnwpa thn kOnOps ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
24 [Ye] blind guides, which strain at a gnat, and swallow a camel.
WAY-LEADers BLIND guides ! blind ! kamhlon katapinontes kamElos katapinO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
THE
ones-THRU-STRAINING THE ones-straining-out
MIDGE gnat
THE
YET
CAMEL
DOWN-DRINKING ones-swallowing grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti kaqarizete grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti katharizO
23:25 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
WOE woe ! exwqen exOthen

Adv

t_ Gen Sg n
WRITers scribes !
AND
that
YE-ARE-cleansING THE
pothriou kai ths potErion kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg f
paroyidos paropsis
n_ Gen Sg f
eswqen esOthen
Adv
de de
Conj
gemousin gemO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
25 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye make clean the outside of the cup and of the platter, but within they are full of extortion and excess.
OUT-PLACE OF-THE outside ex ek

Prep
DRINK-cup cup
AND
OF-THE
BESIDE-PROVISION INTO-PLACE YET THEY-ARE-beING-REPLETE plate inside they-are-brimming
arpaghs harpagE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai akrasias kai akrasia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
OUT OF-SNATCHing AND of-rapacity
UN-HOLD of-incontinence kaqarison prwton katharizO prOton

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Adv
23:26 farisaie tufle

pharisaios
n_ Voc Sg m
tuphlos
a_ Voc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
entos tou entos ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg n
pothriou potErion
n_ Gen Sg n
WH
kai
PHARISEE !
WH WH
BLIND !
cleanse cleanse-you ! ina hina

Conj
BEFORE-most THE first kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
INside
OF-THE
DRINK-cup cup kaqaron katharos

a_ Nom Sg n
26 [Thou] blind Pharisee, cleanse first that [which is] within the cup and platter, that the outside of them may be clean also.
ths paroyidos
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ektos autou ektos autos

Adv pp Gen Sg n
THAT MAY-BE-BECOMING AND also
THE
OUTside
OF-it
clean
AV
Matthew 23
23:27 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti paromoiazete grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti paromoiazO
WOE woe ! tafois taphos

n_ Dat Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITers scribes !
AND
hypocrites hypocrites ! men men

Part
that
YE-ARE-BESIDE-LIKEizING ye-are-resembling wraioi hOraios

a_ Nom Pl m
kekoniamenois koniaO
oitines exwqen hostis exOthen

pr Nom Pl m Adv
fainontai phainO
vi Pres mid/pas 3 Pl
eswqen esOthen
Adv
27 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye are like unto whited sepulchres, which indeed appear beautiful outward, but are within full of dead [men's] bones, and of all uncleanness.
to-sepulchers HAVING-been-whitewashED WHO-ANY sepulchers which-any de de

Conj
OUT-PLACE INDEED ARE-APPEARING beautiful outside kai pashs kai pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg f
INTO-PLACE inside
gemousin gemO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ostewn nekrwn osteon nekros

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl m
akaqarsias akatharsia
n_ Gen Sg f
YET THEY-ARE-beING-REPLETE OF-BONES they-are-being-crammed
OF-DEAD-ones AND of-dead-ones men men

Part
OF-EVERY UN-cleanness of-all uncleanness tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
23:28 outws kai umeis

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
exwqen exOthen
Adv
fainesqe phainO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
anqrwpois dikaioi anthrOpos dikaios

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
thus
AND also de de
Conj
YOU(p) ye
OUT-PLACE INDEED ARE-APPEARING to-THE outside mestoi mestos

a_ Nom Pl m
humans
JUST
28 Even so ye also outwardly appear righteous unto men, but within ye are full of hypocrisy and iniquity.
eswqen esOthen
Adv
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
upokrisews kai anomias hupokrisis kai anomia

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
INTO-PLACE YET YE-ARE inside
DISTENDED OF-hypocrisy
AND
OF-UN-LAWness lawlessness tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
29 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! because ye build the tombs of the prophets, and garnish the sepulchres of the righteous,
23:29 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grammateis kai farisaioi upokritai oti oikodomeite grammateus kai pharisaios hupokritEs hoti oikodomeO
WOE woe !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITers scribes ! profhtwn prophEtEs

n_ Gen Pl m
AND
hypocrites hypocrites ! ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
that
YE-ARE-HOME-BUILDING THE ye-are-building twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
tafous twn taphos ho

n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
kai kosmeite kai kosmeO

mnhmeia mnEmeion
n_ Acc Pl n
dikaiwn dikaios
a_ Gen Pl m
sepulchers
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets ei ei

Cond
YE-ARE-SYSTEMING THE are-adorning en en

Prep
memorial-vaults OF-THE tombs
JUST
23:30 kai legete

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
hmeqa eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais twn hEmera ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Pl m
paterwn hmwn patEr hemeis

n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
YE-ARE-sayING IF
WE-WERE
IN
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
NOT
30 And say, If we had been in the days of our fathers, we would not have been partakers with them in the blood of the prophets.
an an
Part
hmeqa eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
koinwnoi en koinOnos en
a_ Nom Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
aimati haima
n_ Dat Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
EVER WE-WERE
OF-them
communioners participants
IN
THE
BLOOD
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
23:31 wste
hOste
Conj
martureite martureO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
oti uioi hoti huios

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
foneusantwn phoneuO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
AS-BESIDES YE-ARE-witnessING to-selves that so-that ye-are-testifying to-yourselves tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
SONS
YE-ARE
OF-THE
ones-MURDERing ones-murdering
31 Wherefore ye be witnesses unto yourselves, that ye are the children of them which killed the prophets.
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets plhrwsate to plEroO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
23:32 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
metron twn metron ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl m
paterwn umwn patEr humeis

32 Fill ye up then the measure of your fathers.
AND
YOU(p) ye
FILL-YE fill-full-ye !
THE
MEASURE OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
23:33 ofeis
ophis
n_ Voc Pl m
gennhmata ecidnwn pws fughte genEma echidna pOs pheugO

n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f Adv Int vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
krisews ths krisis ho

serpents serpents ! geennhs geenna

n_ Gen Sg f
products progeny !
OF-VIPERS
how how ?
YE-MAY-BE-FLEEING FROM THE
JUDGing
OF-THE
33 [Ye] serpents, [ye] generation of vipers, how can ye escape the damnation of hell?
GEHENNA
23:34 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING I lo !
AM-commissionING TOWARD YOU(p) am-dispatching ye
BEFORE-AVERers prophets
34 . Wherefore, behold, I send unto you prophets, and wise men, and scribes: and [some] of them ye shall kill and crucify; and [some] of them
AV
Matthew 23
kai sofous kai grammateis ex kai sophos kai grammateus ek

Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apokteneite apokteinO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
kai staurwsete kai stauroO

shall ye scourge in your synagogues, and persecute [them] from city to city:
AND
WISE-ones wise-men
AND
WRITers scribes
OUT OF-them
YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING AND ye-shall-be-killing sunagwgais sunagOgE

n_ Dat Pl f
YE-SHALL-BE-impalING ye-shall-be-crucifying kai kai

Conj
kai ex kai ek
Conj Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
mastigwsete mastigoO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
OUT OF-them
YE-SHALL-BE-scourgING IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS OF-YOU(p) AND synagogues of-ye
diwxete diOkO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
polews eis polis eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
YE-SHALL-BE-CHASING FROM city ye-shall-be-persecuting
INTO city
23:35 opws
hopOs
Adv
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
dikaion ekcunnomenon dikaios ekcheO

a_ Nom Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
epi epi
Prep
WHICH-how MAY-BE-COMING ON so-that ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye
EVERY all
BLOOD
JUST
beING-OUT-POURED ON being-shed aimatos haima

n_ Gen Sg n
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos abel haima abel

n_ Gen Sg n ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dikaiou ews tou dikaios heOs ho

a_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n
35 That upon you may come all the righteous blood shed upon the earth, from the blood of righteous Abel unto the blood of Zacharias son of Barachias, whom ye slew between the temple and the altar.
THE
LAND earth
FROM THE
BLOOD
of-ABEL THE of-Abel
JUST just-one
TILL until
OF-THE the naou naos
BLOOD
zacariou zacharias
n_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
baraciou barachias
n_ Gen Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
efoneusate metaxu tou phoneuO metaxu ho

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ZACHARIAS SON
OF-BARACHIAS WHOM
YE-MURDER
between
THE
TEMPLE
AND
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qusiasthriou thusiastErion
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
SACRIFICE-place altar umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
23:36 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
hxei hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
genean genea
n_ Acc Sg f
AMEN verily tauthn houtos

pd Acc Sg f
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
36 Verily I say unto you, All these things shall come upon this generation.
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING these ALL these-things
ON
THE
generation
this
23:37 ierousalhm ierousalhm h

ierosoluma
ni proper
ierosoluma
ni proper
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apokteinousa tous apokteinO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
JERUSALEM
JERUSALEM
THE
one-FROM-KILLING one-killing pros pros

Prep
THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets posakis posakis

Adv
liqobolousa lithoboleO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
apestalmenous apostellO
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
hqelhsa thelO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
37 O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, [thou] that killest the prophets, and stonest them which are sent unto thee, how often would I have gathered thy children together, even as a hen gathereth her chickens under [her] wings, and ye would not!
STONE-CASTING THE one-pelting-with-stones episunagagein episunagO

vn 2Aor Act
ones-HAVING-been-commissionED TOWARD her ones-having-been-dispatched ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
how-many-times I-WILL how-many-times ?
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
tropon ornis tropos ornis

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE to-be-assembling episunagei episunagO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
offspring children nossia nossion

n_ Acc Pl n
OF-YOU
WH
WHICH
NA
manner
BIRD hen tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
auths
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
upo hupo
Prep
pterugas kai pterux kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
IS-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE is-assembling ouk ou

Part Neg
YOUNG brood
OF-her
UNDER THE
flyers wings
AND
hqelhsate thelO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
NOT
YE-WILL
NA
23:38 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
afietai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
erhmos erEmos
a_ Nom Sg m
38 Behold, your house is left unto you desolate.
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-FROM-LET to-YOU(p) lo ! is-being-left to-ye
THE
HOME house
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
DESOLATE
AV
23:39 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ap apo
Prep
arti arti
Adv
ews heOs
Conj
I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
NO
ME
YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING FROM at-PRESENT TILL
39 For I say unto you, Ye shall not see me henceforth, till ye shall say, Blessed [is] he that cometh in the name of the Lord.
an an
Part
eiphte legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
euloghmenos eulogeO
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
en en
Prep

EVER YE-MAY-BE-sayING beING-blessED
THE
IN
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
AV
Matthew 24
24:1 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
eporeueto poreuomai
kai kai
Conj
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
JESUS
FROM THE
SACRED-place WENT sanctuary tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
AND
. And Jesus went out, and departed from the temple: and his disciples came to [him] for to shew him the buildings of the temple.
vi Aor Act 3 Pl

epideixai autw epideiknumi autos

vn Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
oikodomas oikodomE
n_ Acc Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
TOWARD-CAME THE approached ierou hieron

n_ Gen Sg n
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
TO-ON-SHOW to-exhibit
to-Him
THE
HOME-BUILDings OF-THE buildings
24:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ou autos ou
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
NOT
YE-ARE-lookING these ye-are-observing wde liqos hOde lithos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
ALL
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
afeqh aphiEmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
epi liqon epi lithos

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
And Jesus said unto them, See ye not all these things? verily I say unto you, There shall not be left here one stone upon another, that shall not be thrown down.
AMEN verily os hos
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET here may-be-being-left
STONE
ON
STONE
ou ou
Part Neg
kataluqhsetai kataluO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
pr Nom Sg m
WHICH
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED shall-be-being-demolished de de
Conj
24:3 kaqhmenou
kathEmai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
elaiwn proshlqon elaia proserchomai

n_ Gen Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-sittING
YET OF-Him
ON
THE
mountain Mount
OF-THE
WH
OLIVES
NA
TOWARD-CAME came-to hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai kat mathEtEs kata

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
legontes legO
eipon
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
And as he sat upon the mount of Olives, the disciples came unto him privately, saying, Tell us, when shall these things be? and what [shall be] the sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world?
to-Him him
THE
LEARNers disciples estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
according-to OWN
sayING
BE-sayING be-you-telling ! shs sos

ps 2 Gen Sg
to-US us
pote tauta pote houtos

Part Int pd Nom Pl n
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion ths sEmeion ho

n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
parousias kai parousia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
?-when when ?
these SHALL-BE these-things tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
ANY what ?
THE
SIGN
OF-THE
YOUR
BESIDE-BEING presence
AND
sunteleias sunteleia
n_ Gen Sg f
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE of-conclusion
eon
24:4 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois blepete autos blepO

mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
. And Jesus answered and said unto them, Take heed that no man deceive you.
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
to-them
BE-lookING NO be-ye-bewaring !
ANY anyone
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
planhsh planaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye
SHOULD-BE-STRAYING should-be-deceiving gar eleusontai gar erchomai

Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl
24:5 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n

legontes legO
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
For many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many.
MANY
for
SHALL-BE-COMING ON
THE
NAME
OF-ME
sayING
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos kai pollous planhsousin christos kai polus planaO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
AM
THE
Conj
AND
MANY
THEY-SHALL-BE-STRAYING shall-be-deceiving polemous kai akoas polemos kai akoE

n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f
24:6 mellhsete
mellO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
polemwn orate polemos horaO

n_ Gen Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-ABOUT YET TO-BE-HEARING BATTLES
AND
HEARings OF-BATTLES tidings
And ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars: see that ye be not troubled: for all [these things] must come to pass, but the end is not yet.
AV
Matthew 24
mh mE
Part Neg
qroeisqe throeO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gar genesqai gar ginomai

Conj vn 2Aor midD
all oupw alla oupO

Conj Adv
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
NO
BE-beING-ALARMED it-IS-BINDING be-ye-being-alarmed !
for
TO-BE-BECOMING but to-be-occurring
NOT-as-yet IS
THE
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
FINISH consummation
24:7 egerqhsetai
egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
gar eqnos gar ethnos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
epi eqnos epi ethnos

Prep n_ Acc Sg n
kai basileia epi basileian kai kai basileia epi basileia kai
Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED for
NATION
ON
NATION
AND
KINGdom
ON
KINGdom
AND
For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be famines, and pestilences, and earthquakes, in divers places.
esontai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
limoi limos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai seismoi kai seismos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
kata kata
Prep
topous topos
n_ Acc Pl m
SHALL-BE FAMINES there-shall-be
AND
QUAKings according-to PLACES earthquakes arch archE

n_ Nom Sg f
24:8 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
wdinwn Odin
n_ Gen Pl f
All these [are] the beginning of sorrows.
ALL
YET these
ORIGINal beginning
OF-travails of-pangs umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
24:9 tote paradwsousin

tote
Adv
paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
qliyin thlipsis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai apoktenousin kai apokteinO

then
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YOU(p) they-shall-be-giving-up ye kai esesqe kai eimi

Conj vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
INTO CONSTRICTION AND affliction
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING they-shall-be-killing dia dia

Prep
Then shall they deliver you up to be afflicted, and shall kill you: and ye shall be hated of all nations for my name's sake.
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
misoumenoi miseO
upo pantwn twn hupo pas ho

Prep a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
by
ALL
OF-THE
NATIONS
THRU THE because-of
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
NAME
OF-ME
24:10 kai tote skandalisqhsontai polloi

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
skandalizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai allhlous paradwsousin kai allElOn paradidOmi

Conj pc Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
AND
then
SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED
MANY
AND
one-another
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING AND they-shall-be-giving-up
10 And then shall many be offended, and shall betray one another, and shall hate one another.
mishsousin miseO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
THEY-SHALL-BE-HATING one-another
24:11 kai polloi

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
yeudoprofhtai pseudoprophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
egerqhsontai egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
kai planhsousin kai planaO

pollous polus
a_ Acc Pl m
11 And many false prophets shall rise, and shall deceive many.
AND
MANY
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED AND false-prophets to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
SHALL-BE-STRAYING MANY they-shall-be-deceiving h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
12 And because iniquity shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold.
24:12 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
plhqunqhnai thn plEthunO ho

vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg f
anomian anomia
n_ Acc Sg f
yughsetai psuchO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
AND
THRU THE because-of twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-multipliED
THE
UN-LAWness SHALL-BE-BEING-COOLED THE lawlessness shall-be-cooling
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl m
LOVE
OF-THE
MANY
24:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
upomeinas hupomenO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
13 But he that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.
THE
YET one-UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one one-enduring consummation this-one touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
24:14 kai khrucqhsetai

kai
Conj
kErussO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias en basileia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED this shall-be-being-heralded
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
KINGdom
IN
14 And this gospel of the kingdom shall be preached in all the world for a witness unto all nations; and then shall the end come.
AV
Matthew 24
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikoumenh eis oikoumenE eis

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
marturion pasin marturion pas

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin kai tote ethnos kai tote

n_ Dat Pl n Conj Adv
WHOLE
THE
beING-HOMED inhabited-earth to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
to-ALL
THE
NATIONS
AND
then
hxei hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING THE
FINISH consummation idhte eidO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
24:15 otan
hotan
Conj
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
bdelugma bdelugma
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
erhmwsews to erEmOsis ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg n
when-EVER THEN YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE whenever rhqen ereO

vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n
ABOMINATION OF-THE
DESOLATing desolation en en
Prep
THE
dia dia
Prep
danihl tou daniEl ho

ni proper t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
estos histEmi
vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg n
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg m
15 When ye therefore shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, stand in the holy place, (whoso readeth, let him understand:)
BEING-declarED
THRU DANIEL through
THE
BEFORE-AVERer HAVING-STOOD prophet standing
IN
PLACE
HOLY
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anaginwskwn noeitw anaginOskO noeO

vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
one-readING one-reading en en
Prep
LET-BE-MINDING let-him-be-apprehending ! th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
24:16 tote oi
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaia feugetwsan eis ioudaia pheugO eis

n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
orh oros
n_ Acc Pl n
16 Then let them which be in Judaea flee into the mountains:
then
THE-ones the-ones
IN
THE
JUDEA
LET-BE-FLEEING INTO THE let-them-be-fleeing ! katabatw katabainO

vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mountains
24:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
dwmatos mh dOma mE
n_ Gen Sg n Part Neg
arai airO
vn Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ek ek
Prep
17 Let him which is on the housetop not come down to take any thing out of his house:
THE the-one ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
ON
THE
housetop
NO
LET-BE-DOWN-STEPPING TO-LIFT THE OUT let-him-be-descending ! to-take-away the-things
oikias oikia
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
HOME house
OF-him
24:18 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
epistreyatw opisw arai epistrephO opisO airO

vm Aor Act 3 Sg Adv vn Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
18 Neither let him which is in the field return back to take his clothes.
AND
THE the-one
IN
THE
FIELD
NO
LET-him-ON-TURN let-him-turn-back !
BEHIND
TO-LIFT THE to-pick-up
imation autou himation autos

cloak
OF-him
24:19 ouai de
ouai
Inj
de
Conj
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep
gastri ecousais gastEr echO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
qhlazousais en thElazO en
vp Pres Act Dat Pl f Prep
19 And woe unto them that are with child, and to them that give suck in those days!
WOE woe !
YET to-THE-ones IN to-the-ones hmerais hEmera

n_ Dat Pl f
BELLY
HAVING
AND
to-THE-ones sucklING to-the-ones
IN
ekeinais tais ekeinos ho

those
THE
DAYS
24:20 proseucesqe
proseuchomai
de de
Conj
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fugh phugE
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ceimwnos cheimOn
n_ Gen Sg m
BE-YE-prayING be-ye-praying ! mhde mEde

Conj
YET THAT NO
MAY-BE-BECOMING THE may-be-occurring
FLIGHT
OF-YOU(p) OF-WINTER of-ye
20 But pray ye that your flight be not in the winter, neither on the sabbath day:
sabbatw sabbaton
n_ Dat Sg n
NO-YET to-SABBATH nor-yet
24:21 estai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
gar tote qliyis gar tote thlipsis

megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
oia hoios
pr Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE
for
then
CONSTRICTION GREAT affliction
THE-WHICH NOT such-as
HAS-BECOME has-occurred
21 For then shall be great tribulation, such as was not since the beginning of the world to this time, no, nor ever shall be.
AV
Matthew 24
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
ews tou heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
nun oud nun oude

Adv Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
OF-SYSTEM TILL of-world
OF-THE the mh mE
Part Neg
NOW NOT-YET NOT neither ekolobwqhsan ai koloboO ho

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
NO
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring ekeinai ouk ekeinos ou

pd Nom Pl f Part Neg
24:22 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
an an
Part
eswqh sOzO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
t_ Nom Pl f
AND
IF
NO
WERE-LOPPED were-discounted dia dia

Prep
THE
DAYS
those
NOT not
EVER WAS-SAVED
22 And except those days should be shortened, there should no flesh be saved: but for the elect's sake those days shall be shortened.
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous kolobwqhsontai eklektos koloboO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
EVERY at-all ekeinai ekeinos

pd Nom Pl f
FLESH
THRU YET THE because-of
chosen-ones chosen-ones
SHALL-BE-BEING-LOPPED THE shall-be-being-discounted
DAYS
those
24:23 tote ean

tote
Adv
ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wde o hOde ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
cristos h christos E
n_ Nom Sg m Part
then
IF-EVER ANY anyone pisteushte pisteuO

vs Aor Act 2 Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
23 Then if any man shall say unto you, Lo, here [is] Christ, or there; believe [it] not.
MAY-BE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING here lo !
THE
ANOINTED Christ
OR
wde mh hOde mE
Adv Part Neg
here
NO not
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING ye-should-be-believing-it gar yeudocristoi gar pseudochristos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
24:24 egerqhsontai
egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
kai yeudoprofhtai kai pseudoprophEtEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
FALSE-ANOINTED-ones AND false-christs
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers AND false-prophets

WH
dwsousin didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
shmeia megala kai terata wste sEmeion mega kai teras hOste
n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n Conj
planasqai
NA
planhsai planaO
vn Aor Act
ei ei
Cond
24 For there shall arise false Christs, and false prophets, and shall shew great signs and wonders; insomuch that, if [it were] possible, they shall deceive the very elect.
THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING SIGNS
GREAT
AND
MIRACLES AS-BESIDES so-as
TO-STRAY to-deceive
IF
dunaton kai tous dunatos kai ho

a_ Nom Sg n Conj t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous eklektos
a_ Acc Pl m
ABLE possible
AND also
THE
chosen-ones chosen-ones proeirhka proereO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
24:25 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
25 Behold, I have told you before.
BE-PERCEIVING I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED to-YOU(p) lo ! I-have-declared-it-beforehand to-ye
24:26 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
eipwsin legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IF-EVER THEN THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) to-ye mh mE

Part Neg
BE-PERCEIVING IN lo ! tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
THE
DESOLATE He-IS wilderness mh mE

Part Neg
26 Wherefore if they shall say unto you, Behold, he is in the desert; go not forth: behold, [he is] in the secret chambers; believe [it] not.
exelqhte exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
tameiois tameion
n_ Dat Pl n
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
NO not
YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING BE-PERCEIVING IN ye-may-be-coming-out lo ! astraph astrapE

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
STOREROOMS NO not apo apo

Prep
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING ye-should-be-believing-it
27 For as the lightning cometh out of the east, and shineth even unto the west; so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.
24:27 wsper gar h

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
exercetai exerchomai
anatolwn kai fainetai anatolE kai phainO

n_ Gen Pl f Conj vi Pres mid/pas 3 Sg
AS-EVEN even-as ews heOs

Conj
for
THE
GLEAM-FLING IS-OUT-COMING lightning is-coming-out h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
FROM UP-risings east tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
IS-APPEARING
dusmwn outws estai dusmE houtOs eimi

n_ Gen Pl f Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
parousia parousia
n_ Nom Sg f
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
TILL OF-west as-far-as west anqrwpou anthrOpos

n_ Gen Sg m
thus
SHALL-BE
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-THE presence
SON
OF-THE
human
AV
Matthew 24
24:28 opou
hopou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ptwma ptOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ekei sunacqhsontai ekei sunagO

Adv vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
28 For wheresoever the carcase is, there will the eagles be gathered together.
THE-?-where IF-EVER MAY-BE wherever oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
THE
corpse
there
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHETHER-LED shall-be-being-gathered
aetoi aetos
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
VULTURES
24:29 euqews de
eutheOs
Adv
de
Conj
meta thn meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
qliyin thlipsis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn ekeinwn o hEmera ekeinos ho

n_ Gen Pl f pd Gen Pl f t_ Nom Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
immediately
YET after
THE
CONSTRICTION OF-THE affliction selhnh selEnE

n_ Nom Sg f
DAYS
those
THE
SUN
skotisqhsetai skotizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
feggos auths pheggos autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg f
29 Immediately after the tribulation of those days shall the sun be darkened, and the moon shall not give her light, and the stars shall fall from heaven, and the powers of the heavens shall be shaken:
SHALL-BE-BEING-DARKenED AND
THE
MOON
NOT
SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
BEAM
OF-her
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
asteres pesountai astEr piptO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai ai ouranos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl f
dunameis dunamis
n_ Nom Pl f
AND
THE
GLEAMers stars
SHALL-BE-FALLING FROM THE
heaven
AND
THE
ABILITIES powers
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn saleuqhsontai ouranos saleuO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
OF-THE
heavens
SHALL-BE-BEING-SHAKEN
24:30 kai tote fanhsetai

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
phainO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion tou sEmeion ho

n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
then
SHALL-BE-APPEARING THE
SIGN
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
human
en en
Prep
ouranw kai tote koyontai ouranos kai tote koptO

n_ Dat Sg m Conj Adv vi Fut midD 3 Pl
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
fulai phulE
n_ Nom Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
30 And then shall appear the sign of the Son of man in heaven: and then shall all the tribes of the earth mourn, and they shall see the Son of man coming in the clouds of heaven with power and great glory.
IN
heaven
AND
then
SHALL-BE-STRIKING ( selves ) ALL shall-be-grieving uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
tribes
OF-THE
LAND
AND
oyontai optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ercomenon anthrOpos erchomai

epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE they-shall-be-seeing nefelwn tou nephelE ho

n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
SON
OF-THE
human
COMING
ON
THE
ouranou meta dunamews kai doxhs ouranos meta dunamis kai doxa
n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
pollhs polus
a_ Gen Sg f
CLOUDS
OF-THE
heaven
WITH
ABILITY power
AND
esteem glory autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
much
24:31 kai apostelei

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
meta salpiggos megalhs meta salpigx mega

Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
AND
He-SHALL-BE-commissionING THE he-shall-be-dispatching
MESSENGERS OF-Him
WITH
TRUMPET
GREAT loud tessarwn tessares

n_ Gen Pl m
kai episunaxousin kai episunagO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous autou eklektos autos

a_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
31 And he shall send his angels with a great sound of a trumpet, and they shall gather together his elect from the four winds, from one end of heaven to the other.
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING THE they-shall-be-assembling akrwn akron

n_ Gen Pl n
chosen-ones chosen-ones twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
OF-Him
OUT OF-THE
FOUR
anemwn ap anemos apo

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
ouranwn ews ouranos heOs

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
akrwn akron
n_ Gen Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WINDS
FROM EXTREMITIES OF-heavens
TILL
THE
EXTREMITIES OF-them
24:32 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sukhs sukE
n_ Gen Sg f
maqete manthanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn otan parabolE hotan

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
hdh EdE
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM YET OF-THE the klados klados

n_ Nom Sg m
FIG-tree
BE-LEARNING THE be-ye-learning ! apalos hapalos

a_ Nom Sg m
BESIDE-CAST parable fulla phullon

n_ Acc Pl n
when-EVER ALREADY THE whenever ekfuh ekphuO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
32 . Now learn a parable of the fig tree; When his branch is yet tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer [is] nigh:
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
bough
OF-her
MAY-BE-BECOMING TENDER
AND
THE
leaves
MAY-BE-OUT-SPROUTING may-be-sprouting-out
AV
Matthew 24
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eggus to hoti eggus ho

Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg n
qeros theros
n_ Nom Sg n
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
NEAR
THE
WARM summer idhte eidO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
otan hotan
Conj
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING ALL whenever epi qurais epi thura

Prep n_ Dat Pl f
these these-things
33 So likewise ye, when ye shall see all these things, know that it is near, [even] at the doors.
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl / vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eggus estin hoti eggus eimi

Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-YE-KNOWING be-ye-knowing !
that
NEAR
He-IS
ON onat mh mE
Part Neg
DOORS
24:34 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f
AMEN verily auth houtos

pd Nom Sg f
I-AM-sayING
WH
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NA
34 Verily I say unto you, This generation shall not pass, till all these things be fulfilled.
that
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE may-be-passing-by genhtai ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
generation
ews heOs
Conj
an
an an
Part
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
this
TILL
EVER
ALL
these MAY-BE-BECOMING these-things may-be-occurring gh gE

n_ Nom Sg f
24:35 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos kai h ouranos kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg f
pareleusetai parerchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
35 Heaven and earth shall pass away, but my words shall not pass away.
THE
heaven
AND
THE
LAND earth
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE shall-be-passing-by
YET sayings words
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
parelqwsin parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-ME
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING may-be-passing-by ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
24:36 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs kai wras ekeinos kai hOra

pd Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
ABOUT YET THE concerning oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
DAY
that
AND
HOUR
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-PERCEIVED NOT-YET no-one is-aware neither uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
36 But of that day and hour knoweth no [man], no, not the angels of heaven, but my Father only.
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn oude ouranos oude

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
MESSENGERS OF-THE
heavens
NOT-YET THE nor
SON
IF
NO
THE
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
FATHER
ONLY
24:37 wsper gar ai

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nwe nOe
ni proper

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
parousia parousia
n_ Nom Sg f
37 But as the days of Noe [were], so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.
AS-EVEN even-as tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
for
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
NOAH
thus
SHALL-BE
THE
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
human
24:38 ws gar hsan

hOs
Adv
gar
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
ekeinais ekeinos
pd Dat Pl f
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AS
for
THEY-WERE IN
THE
DAYS
those
to-THE the
BEFORE THE
kataklusmou trwgontes kataklusmos trOgO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
kai pinontes kai pinO

gamountes gameO
kai gamizontes kai gamizO

acri achri
Prep
38 For as in the days that were before the flood they were eating and drinking, marrying and giving in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark,
DOWN-SURGE deluge hs hos

pr Gen Sg f
CHEWING masticating eishlqen eiserchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
DRINKING
MARRYING
AND
MARRYizING giving-in-marriage
UNTIL
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
nwe nOe
ni proper
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kibwton kibOtos
n_ Acc Sg f
WHICH
DAY
INTO-CAME entered
NOAH
INTO THE
ARK
AV
Matthew 24
24:39 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ews hlqen heOs erchomai

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kataklusmos kai hren kataklusmos kai airO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
NOT
THEY-KNOW
TILL
CAME
NA
THE
DOWN-SURGE deluge parousia parousia

n_ Nom Sg f
AND
LIFTS takes-away uiou huios

n_ Gen Sg m
39 And knew not until the flood came, and took them all away; so shall also the coming of the Son of man be.
apantas hapas
a_ Acc Pl m

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ALL(emph.) thus all(emph.)-them anqrwpou anthrOpos

n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE
AND also
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
WH WH NA NA
24:40 tote
tote
Adv
esontai duo
duo duo
ni numeral
esontai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
40 Then shall two be in the field; the one shall be taken, and the other left.
then
TWO
SHALL-BE
IN
THE
FIELD
ONE
paralambanetai paralambanO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai eis kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
afietai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-BESIDE-GOTTEN AND is-being-taken-along
ONE
IS-beING-FROM-LET is-being-left tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
24:41 duo
duo
ni numeral
alhqousai alEthO
vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
mulw mulos
n_ Dat Sg m
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
paralambanetai paralambanO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai mia kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
TWO
GRINDING
IN
THE
MILLstone millstone
ONE
IS-beING-BESIDE-GOTTEN AND is-being-taken-along
ONE
41 Two [women shall be] grinding at the mill; the one shall be taken, and the other left.
afietai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-FROM-LET is-being-left
24:42 grhgoreite oun

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
42 Watch therefore: for ye know not what hour your Lord doth come.
BE-watchING be-ye-watching ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
THEN that
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-THE-WHICH DAY ye-are-aware which ?
THE
Master Lord
ercetai erchomai
OF-YOU(p) IS-COMING of-ye
24:43 ekeino
ekeinos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
ginwskete ginOskO
oti ei hoti ei
Conj Cond
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikodespoths oikodespotEs
n_ Nom Sg m
that
YET BE-YE-KNOWING be-ye-knowing ! fulakh o phulakE ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
that
IF
HAD-PERCEIVED THE were-aware egrhgorhsen an grEgoreO an

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part
HOME-OWNer householder kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
klepths ercetai kleptEs erchomai

n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
an an
Part
43 But know this, that if the goodman of the house had known in what watch the thief would come, he would have watched, and would not have suffered his house to be broken up.
?-THE-WHICH GUARD which ? watch eiasen eaO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
thief
IS-COMING
he-watchES
EVER AND
NOT
EVER
diorucqhnai diorussO
vn Aor Pas
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
LEAVES lets
TO-BE-THRU-EXCAVATED THE to-be-burrowed touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
HOME house ginesqe ginomai
OF-him
24:44 dia
dia
Prep

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
etoimoi oti h hetoimos hoti hos

a_ Nom Pl m Conj pr Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
THRU this because-of dokeite dokeO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
AND also o ho
YOU(p) ye
44 Therefore be ye also ready: for in such an hour as ye think not the Son of man cometh.
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
READY ready-ones
that
to-WHICH NOT
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou ercetai anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-SEEMING HOUR ye-are-supposing
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-COMING
24:45 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
ara ara
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai fronimos on kai phronimos hos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m
ANY who ?
CONSEQUENTLY IS
THE
BELIEVing faithful
SLAVE
AND
DISPOSED prudent
WHOM
45 Who then is a faithful and wise servant, whom his lord hath made ruler over his household, to give them meat in due season?
AV
katesthsen o kathistEmi ho
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
epi epi
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
oiketeias autou oiketeia autos

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dounai didOmi
vn 2Aor Act
DOWN-STANDS constitutes autois thn autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
THE
master lord en en
Prep
ON THE onover kairw kairos

n_ Dat Sg m
HOME household
OF-him
OF-THE
TO-GIVE
trofhn trophE
n_ Acc Sg f
t_ Acc Sg f
to-them them
THE
NURTURE IN nourishment
SEASON
24:46 makarios o
makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
elqwn erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
46 Blessed [is] that servant, whom his lord when he cometh shall find so doing.
HAPPY happy-is autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
SLAVE
that
WHOM
COMING
THE
master lord
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
outws poiounta houtOs poieO

Adv vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
OF-him
SHALL-BE-FINDING thus
DOING
24:47 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti epi hoti epi

Conj Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
uparcousin autou huparchO autos

vp Pres Act Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye auton autos
47 Verily I say unto you, That he shall make him ruler over all his goods.
that
ON ALL onover
THE
belongINGS possessions
OF-him
katasthsei kathistEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
pp Acc Sg m
he-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING him he-shall-be-constituting
24:48 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kakos kakos
a_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
48 But and if that evil servant shall say in his heart, My lord delayeth his coming;
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-sayING THE
EVIL
SLAVE
that
IN
THE
HEART
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cronizei chronizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-him
IS-delayING
OF-ME
THE
master lord tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
24:49 kai arxhtai

kai
Conj
archO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
tuptein tuptO
vn Pres Act
sundoulous sundoulos
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
esqih esthiO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
49 And shall begin to smite [his] fellowservants, and to eat and drink with the drunken;
AND
he-SHOULD-BE-beginnING TO-BE-BEATING THE should-be-beginning meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
TOGETHER-SLAVES OF-him fellow-slaves
MAY-BE-EATING YET
kai pinh kai pinO

Conj vs Pres Act 3 Sg
mequontwn methuO
AND
MAY-BE-DRINKING WITH
THE
ones-beING-DRUNK ones-being-drunk kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
24:50 hxei
hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
doulou ekeinou en doulos ekeinos en

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
master lord kai en kai en

Conj Prep
OF-THE
SLAVE
that
IN
DAY
to-WHICH
50 The lord of that servant shall come in a day when he looketh not for [him], and in an hour that he is not aware of,
ou ou
Part Neg
prosdoka prosdokaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
ginwskei ginOskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
he-IS-TOWARD-SEEMING AND he-is-hoping
IN
HOUR
to-WHICH NOT which meros meros
he-IS-KNOWING
24:51 kai dicotomhsei

kai
Conj
dichotomeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
SHALL-BE-TWO-CUTTING him shall-be-cutting-asunder
AND
THE
PART
OF-him
WITH
THE
51 And shall cut him asunder, and appoint [him] his portion with the hypocrites: there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.
upokritwn qhsei hupokritEs tithEmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Sg

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

brugmos brugmos
n_ Nom Sg m
hypocrites
he-SHALL-BE-PLACING there shall-be-appointing odontwn odous

n_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE
THE
AND
THE
GNASHing
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
TEETH
AV
Matthew 25
25:1 tote omoiwqhsetai

tote
Adv
homoioO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

ouranwn deka ouranos deka

n_ Gen Pl m ni numeral
parqenois parthenos
n_ Dat Pl f
then
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIKenED THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
heavens
to-TEN
virgins
. Then shall the kingdom of heaven be likened unto ten virgins, which took their lamps, and went forth to meet the bridegroom.
aitines labousai hostis lambanO

pr Nom Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
lampadas eautwn lampas heautou

n_ Acc Pl f pf 3 Gen Pl m
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
upanthsin tou hupantEsis ho

WHO-ANY who-any numfiou numphios

n_ Gen Sg m
GETTING
THE
SHINers torches
OF-selves OUT-CAME of-themselves came-out
INTO UNDER-meeting OF-THE meeting
BRIDE-groom bridegroom
25:2 pente de
pente
ni numeral
de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
autwn hsan autos eimi

pp Gen Pl f vi impf vxx 3 Pl
mwrai mOros
a_ Nom Pl f
kai pente fronimoi kai pente phronimos

Conj ni numeral a_ Nom Pl f
And five of them were wise, and five [were] foolish.
FIVE
YET OUT OF-them
WERE
INSIPID stupid tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
AND
FIVE
DISPOSED prudent
WH
25:3 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
gar mwrai gar mOros

Conj a_ Nom Pl f
labousai lambanO
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl f
lampadas lampas
n_ Acc Pl f
autwn
NA
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl f
ouk ou
Part Neg
They that [were] foolish took their lamps, and took no oil with them:
THE
for
INSIPID-ones GETTING stupid-ones eautwn elaion heautou elaion

pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
THE
SHINers torches
OF-them
NOT
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
meq meta
Prep
THEY-GOT
WITH selves themselves de de

Conj
OLIVE-oil oil elabon lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
25:4 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
fronimoi phronimos
a_ Nom Pl f
elaion elaion
n_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
aggeiois meta twn aggeion meta ho

n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Gen Pl f
But the wise took oil in their vessels with their lamps.
THE
YET DISPOSED-ones GOT prudent-ones
OLIVE-oil oil
IN
THE
CROCKS
WITH
THE
lampadwn eautwn lampas heautou

n_ Gen Pl f pf 3 Gen Pl m
SHINers torches
OF-selves of-themselves tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
25:5 cronizontos de
chronizO
de
Conj
numfiou numphios
n_ Gen Sg m
enustaxan pasai nustazO pas

vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl f
kai ekaqeudon kai katheudO

While the bridegroom tarried, they all slumbered and slept.
OF-delayING
YET OF-THE
BRIDE-groom THEY-NOD bridegroom gegonen ginomai

vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
ALL
AND
THEY-DOWN-LOUNGED drowsed numfios numphios

n_ Nom Sg m
6
25:6 meshs
mesos
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
nuktos kraugh nux kraugE

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-MIDst of-middle exercesqe exerchomai
YET OF-NIGHT
clamor
NA
BRIDE-groom bridegroom
And at midnight there was a cry made, Behold, the bridegroom cometh; go ye out to meet him.
eis eis
Prep
apanthsin apantEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
BE-YE-OUT-COMING INTO FROM-meeting be-ye-coming-out ! meeting
OF-him
25:7 tote hgerqhsan

tote
Adv
egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
parqenoi ekeinai kai ekosmhsan tas parthenos ekeinos kai kosmeO ho

n_ Nom Pl f pd Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
Then all those virgins arose, and trimmed their lamps.
then
WERE-ROUSED ALL
THE
virgins
those
AND
THEY-SYSTEM they-adorn
THE
lampadas eautwn lampas heautou

n_ Acc Pl f pf 3 Gen Pl m
SHINers torches
OF-selves of-themselves de de
Conj
25:8 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
mwrai mOros
a_ Nom Pl f
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
fronimois phronimos
a_ Dat Pl f
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
dote didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
And the foolish said unto the wise, Give us of your oil; for our lamps are gone out.
THE
YET INSIPID-ones to-THE stupid-ones umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
DISPOSED-ones say prudent-ones
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving ! sbennuntai sbennumi

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
to-US us
OUT OF-THE
elaiou elaion
n_ Gen Sg n
oti ai hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
lampades hmwn lampas hemeis

n_ Nom Pl f pp 1 Gen Pl
OLIVE-oil oil
OF-YOU(p) that of-ye
THE
SHINErs torches
OF-US
ARE-beING-EXTINGUISHED are-going-out
AV
Matthew 25
25:9 apekriqhsan de
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
de
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
fronimoi phronimos
a_ Nom Pl f
legousai legO
mhpote mEpote
Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
answerED
YET THE
DISPOSED-ones sayING prudent-ones kai umin kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
NO-?-when NOT no-lest-at-some-time mallon pros mallon pros

Adv Prep
NO
But the wise answered, saying, [Not so]; lest there be not enough for us and you: but go ye rather to them that sell, and buy for yourselves.
arkesh arkeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
poreuesqe poreuomai
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
SHOULD-BE-SUFFICING to-US should-be-being-sufficient pwlountas pOleO

AND
to-YOU(p) to-ye
BE-GOING be-ye-going !
RATHER
TOWARD THE
kai agorasate eautais kai agorazO heautou

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl f
AND
BUY buy-ye ! de de
Conj
to-selves to-yourselves autwn agorasai hlqen autos agorazO erchomai

pp Gen Pl f vn Aor Act vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
25:10 apercomenwn
aperchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
OF-FROM-COMING of-coming-away etoimoi hetoimos

a_ Nom Pl f
YET OF-them
TO-BUY
CAME
THE
BRIDE-groom AND bridegroom kai ekleisqh h kai kleiO ho

THE
10 And while they went to buy, the bridegroom came; and they that were ready went in with him to the marriage: and the door was shut.
eishlqon met autou eiserchomai meta autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gamous gamos
n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Nom Sg f
READY-ones INTO-CAME ready-ones entered qura thura

n_ Nom Sg f
WITH him
INTO THE
MARRIAGES AND wedding-festivities
IS-LOCKED
THE
DOOR
25:11 usteron de
husteron
Adv
de
Conj
ercontai erchomai
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
loipai parqenoi legousai loipon parthenos legO

a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
11 Afterward came also the other virgins, saying, Lord, Lord, open to us.
subsequently YET ARE-COMING
AND also
THE
rest
virgins of-the-virgins
sayING
master ! Lord !
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
anoixon anoigO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
master ! Lord !
UP-OPEN open-you ! de de
Conj
to-US
25:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THE
YET answerING
he-said
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
12 But he answered and said, Verily I say unto you, I know you not.
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-acquainted-with
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran oude hEmera oude

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
BE-watchING be-ye-watching !
THEN that
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE ye-are-aware-of
DAY
NOT-YET THE neither idious idios

a_ Acc Pl m
HOUR
13 Watch therefore, for ye know neither the day nor the hour wherein the Son of man cometh.
25:14 wsper gar anqrwpos apodhmwn

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
apodEmeO
ekalesen tous kaleO ho

doulous kai doulos kai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
AS-EVEN even-as
for
human
travelING
CALLS he-calls autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
OWN
SLAVES
AND
14 . For [the kingdom of heaven is] as a man travelling into a far country, [who] called his own servants, and delivered unto them his goods.
paredwken autois ta paradidOmi autos ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
uparconta huparchO
BESIDE-GIVES gives-over
to-them
THE
belongINGS possessions edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-him
25:15 kai w
kai
Conj
hos
pr Dat Sg m
men men
Part
pente talanta w pente talanton hos

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n pr Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
duo duo
ni numeral
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
AND
to-WHOM INDEED he-GIVES to-whichone ekastw kata hekastos kata

a_ Dat Sg m Prep
FIVE
talents
to-WHOM YET TWO to-whichone
to-WHOM YET to-whichone
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
dunamin kai apedhmhsen euqews dunamis kai apodEmeO eutheOs

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
15 And unto one he gave five talents, to another two, and to another one; to every man according to his several ability; and straightway took his journey.
ONE
to-EACH
according-to THE
OWN
ABILITY
AND
travels he-travels
immediately
AV
Matthew 25
25:16 poreuqeis
poreuomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pente talanta labwn pente talanton lambanO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
hrgasato ergazomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
BEING-GONE
THE-one the-one
THE
FIVE
talents
GETTING
ACTS trades
IN
16 Then he that had received the five talents went and traded with the same, and made [them] other five talents.
autois kai ekerdhsen alla autos kai kerdainO allos

pp Dat Pl n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
pente pente
ni numeral
them
AND
GAINS
others
FIVE
25:17 wsautws o
hOsautOs
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
ekerdhsen alla kerdainO allos

duo duo
ni numeral
17 And likewise he that [had received] two, he also gained other two.
AS-SAME-AS similarly
THE-one the-one de de
Conj
THE
TWO
GAINS
others
TWO
25:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
labwn lambanO
apelqwn aperchomai
wruxen orussO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
18 But he that had received one went and digged in the earth, and hid his lord's money.
THE-one the-one ekruyen kruptO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
YET THE
ONE
GETTING
FROM-COMING coming-away autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
EXCAVATES LAND earth
AND
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
argurion tou argurion ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
HIDES
THE
SILVER
OF-THE
master lord
OF-him
25:19 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
ercetai erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
doulwn doulos
n_ Gen Pl m
19 After a long time the lord of those servants cometh, and reckoneth with them.
after
YET much
TIME
IS-COMING
THE
master lord
OF-THE
SLAVES
ekeinwn kai sunairei ekeinos kai sunairO

pd Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
those
AND
he-IS-TOGETHER-LIFTING saying is-settling account o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WITH them
25:20 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pente talanta labwn pente talanton lambanO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
proshnegken prospherO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
THE-one the-one
THE
FIVE
talents
GETTING
TOWARD-CARRIES brings-to-him paredwkas paradidOmi

vi Aor Act 2 Sg
alla allos
a_ Acc Pl n
pente talanta legwn pente talanton legO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pente talanta moi pente talanton egO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Dat Sg
20 And so he that had received five talents came and brought other five talents, saying, Lord, thou deliveredst unto me five talents: behold, I have gained beside them five talents more.
others
FIVE
talents
sayING
master ! Lord !
FIVE
talents
to-ME
YOU-BESIDE-GIVE you-give-over
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
alla allos
a_ Acc Pl n
pente talanta ekerdhsa pente talanton kerdainO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING others lo !
FIVE
talents
I-GAIN
25:21 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eu eu
Adv
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
agaqe agathos
a_ Voc Sg m
kai piste kai pistos

Conj a_ Voc Sg m
AVERRed
to-him
THE
master lord epi epi

Prep
OF-him
WELL SLAVE ! well-done
GOOD !
AND
BELIEVing ! faithful !
epi epi
Prep
oliga oligos
a_ Acc Pl n
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
pollwn se polus su
a_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Acc Sg
katasthsw kathistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
21 His lord said unto him, Well done, [thou] good and faithful servant: thou hast been faithful over a few things, I will make thee ruler over many things: enter thou into the joy of thy lord.
ON FEW onover eiselqe eiserchomai

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-WERE
BELIEVing faithful caran chara

n_ Acc Sg f
ON MANY onover tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YOU
I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING I-shall-be-constituting sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE be-you-entering !
JOY
NA
OF-THE
master lord ta ho
OF-YOU
25:22 proselqwn
proserchomai
de de
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
talanta eipen talanton legO

n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
t_ Acc Pl n
TOWARD-COMING approaching duo duo

ni numeral
YET
AND also
THE-one the-one ide eidO
THE
TWO
talents
said
master ! Lord !
talanta moi talanton egO

n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Dat Sg
paredwkas paradidOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
alla allos
a_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
talanta ekerdhsa talanton kerdainO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Sg
22 He also that had received two talents came and said, Lord, thou deliveredst unto me two talents: behold, I have gained two other talents beside them.
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
TWO
talents
to-ME
YOU-BESIDE-GIVE BE-PERCEIVING others you-give-over lo !
TWO
talents
I-GAIN
AV
Matthew 25
25:23 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eu eu
Adv
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
agaqe agathos
a_ Voc Sg m
kai piste kai pistos

Conj a_ Voc Sg m
AVERRed
to-him
THE
master lord epi epi

Prep
OF-him
WELL SLAVE ! well-done
GOOD !
AND
BELIEVing ! faithful !
epi epi
Prep
oliga oligos
a_ Acc Pl n
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
pollwn se polus su
a_ Gen Pl n pp 2 Acc Sg
katasthsw kathistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
23 His lord said unto him, Well done, good and faithful servant; thou hast been faithful over a few things, I will make thee ruler over many things: enter thou into the joy of thy lord.
ON FEW onover eiselqe eiserchomai

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-WERE
BELIEVing faithful caran chara

n_ Acc Sg f
ON MANY onover tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YOU
I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING I-shall-be-constituting sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE be-you-entering !
JOY
OF-THE
master lord en heis
OF-YOU
25:24 proselqwn
proserchomai
de de
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
talanton eilhfws talanton lambanO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
n_ Acc Sg n
TOWARD-COMING approaching kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
YET AND also se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
THE-one the-one
THE
ONE
talent
HAVING-GOTTEN
said
egnwn ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
oti sklhros ei hoti sklEros eimi

Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
anqrwpos qerizwn anthrOpos therizO

n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
24 Then he which had received the one talent came and said, Lord, I knew thee that thou art an hard man, reaping where thou hast not sown, and gathering where thou hast not strawed:
master ! Lord ! ouk ou

Part Neg
I-KNEW
YOU
that
HARD
YOU-ARE
human
reapING
THE-?-where wheree
espeiras kai sunagwn speirO kai sunagO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
oqen hothen
Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
dieskorpisas diaskorpizO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
NOT
YOU-SOW
AND
TOGETHER-LEADING WHICH-PLACE NOT gathering whence apelqwn aperchomai

YOU-THRU-SCATTER you-scatter talanton sou talanton su

25:25 kai fobhqeis

kai
Conj
phobeO
ekruya kruptO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
BEING-afraid
FROM-COMING coming-away eceis echO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
I-HIDE
THE
talent
OF-YOU
IN
THE
25 And I was afraid, and went and hid thy talent in the earth: lo, [there] thou hast [that is] thine.
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
son sos
ps 2 Acc Sg
LAND earth
BE-PERCEIVING YOU-ARE-HAVING THE lo ! de de

Conj
YOUR yours autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
25:26 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ponhre ponEros
a_ Voc Sg m
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
answerING
YET THE
master lord oti qerizw hoti therizO

Conj
OF-him
said
to-him
wicked !
SLAVE !
kai oknhre kai oknEros

Conj a_ Voc Sg m
hdeis eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
espeira speirO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
26 His lord answered and said unto him, [Thou] wicked and slothful servant, thou knewest that I reap where I sowed not, and gather where I have not strawed:
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
SLOTHful !
YOU-HAD-PERCEIVED that you-were-aware oqen hothen

Adv
I-AM-reapING
THE-?-where NOT wheree
I-SOW
AND
sunagw sunagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dieskorpisa diaskorpizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
I-AM-TOGETHER-LEADING WHICH-PLACE NOT I-am-gathering whence
I-THRU-SCATTER I-scatter ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
25:27 edei
deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
oun oun
Conj
balein ballO
vn 2Aor Act
arguria mou argurion egO

n_ Acc Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
trapezitais trapezitEs
n_ Dat Pl m
it-WAS-BINDING YOU
THEN TO-BE-CASTING THE to-be-depositing ekomisamhn an komizO an

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Part
SILVERS
OF-ME
to-THE
bankers
27 Thou oughtest therefore to have put my money to the exchangers, and [then] at my coming I should have received mine own with usury.
kai elqwn kai erchomai

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
sun sun
Prep
tokw tokos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
COMING
am-requitED recover ap apo

Prep
EVER THE
MY mine
TOGETHER to-BRING-FORTH togetherwith interest tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
28 Take therefore the talent from him, and give [it] unto him which hath ten talents.
25:28 arate
airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
talanton kai dote talanton kai didOmi

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
LIFT-YE THEN FROM him take-away-ye ! econti echO

THE
talent
AND
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving !
to-THE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
deka deka
ni numeral
talanta talanton
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
TEN
talents
AV
Matthew 25
25:29 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
gar econti gar echO

Conj vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai perisseuqhsetai kai perisseuO

to-THE
for
one-HAVING one-having econtos echO
EVERY
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-exceedED he-shall-be-having-a-superfluity ap apo

Prep
29 For unto every one that hath shall be given, and he shall have abundance: but from him that hath not shall be taken away even that which he hath.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arqhsetai airO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
OF-THE-one YET NO of-the-one autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
HAVING
AND also
WHICH
he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM shall-be-being-taken-away
him
25:30 kai ton

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
acreion doulon ekbalete achreios doulos ekballO

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
skotos to skotos ho
exwteron exOteros
a_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
UN-USED useless o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SLAVE
BE-OUT-CASTING INTO THE be-ye-casting-out !
DARKness
THE
OUTer
30 And cast ye the unprofitable servant into outer darkness: there shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth.

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg


odontwn odous
n_ Gen Pl m
there
SHALL-BE
THE
LAMENTing lamentation o ho
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
TEETH
25:31 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou en anthrOpos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
t_ Nom Sg m
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-COMING THE whenever autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
SON
OF-THE
human
IN
THE
esteem glory epi epi

Prep
31 . When the Son of man shall come in his glory, and all the holy angels with him, then shall he sit upon the throne of his glory:
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
tote kaqisei tote kathizO

Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OF-Him
AND
ALL
THE
MESSENGERS WITH Him
then
He-SHALL-BE-seatING ON he-shall-be-being-seated
qronou thronos
n_ Gen Sg m
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THRONE
OF-esteem OF-Him of-glory emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
25:32 kai sunacqhsontai

kai
Conj
sunagO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHETHER-LED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-Him shall-be-being-gathered in-front-of him autous ap autos apo

pp Acc Pl m Prep
ALL
THE
NATIONS
32 And before him shall be gathered all nations: and he shall separate them one from another, as a shepherd divideth [his] sheep from the goats:
kai aforisei kai aphorizO

allhlwn wsper o allElOn hOsper ho

pc Gen Pl n Adv t_ Nom Sg m
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
aforizei aphorizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
He-SHALL-BE-FROM-definING them he-shall-be-severing probata apo probaton apo

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
FROM one-another
AS-EVEN even-as
THE
SHEPHERD IS-FROM-definING is-severing
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
erifwn eriphos
n_ Gen Pl m
THE
sheep sheep(p)
FROM THE
KIDS
25:33 kai sthsei

kai
Conj
histEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
men men
Part
probata ek probaton ek
n_ Acc Pl n Prep
dexiwn autou dexios autos

a_ Gen Pl m pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
33 And he shall set the sheep on his right hand, but the goats on the left.
AND
SHALL-BE-STANDING THE he-shall-be-standing euwnumwn euOnumos

a_ Gen Pl m
INDEED sheep sheep(p)
OF-Him
THE
YET
erifia eriphion
n_ Acc Pl n
ex ek
Prep
KIDS
OUT OF-left of-left(p) o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
25:34 tote erei

tote
Adv
ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
basileus tois basileus ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl n
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn autou dexios autos

deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
then
SHALL-BE-declarING THE
KING
to-THE-ones OUT OF-RIGHT to-the-ones of-right(p) mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-Him
HITHER hither-ye !
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
euloghmenoi eulogeO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
klhronomhsate klEronomeO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
34 Then shall the King say unto them on his right hand, Come, ye blessed of my Father, inherit the kingdom prepared for you from the foundation of the world:
THE
ones-beING-BLESSED OF-THE ones-being-blessed
FATHER
OF-ME
tenant THE enjoy-the-allotment-ye-of !
AV
Matthew 25
htoimasmenhn hetoimazO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
basileian apo basileia apo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
katabolhs kosmou katabolE kosmos

HAVING-been-made-READY to-YOU(p) to-ye
KINGdom
FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM disruption of-world fagein esthiO

vn 2Aor Act
25:35 epeinasa gar kai edwkate moi

peinaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
gar
Conj
kai
Conj
didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ediyhsa dipsaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai epotisate me kai potizO egO

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
I-HUNGER
for
AND
YE-GIVE
to-ME me me egO
TO-BE-EATING I-THIRST
AND
YE-DRINKize ye-give-to-drink
ME
35 For I was an hungred, and ye gave me meat: I was thirsty, and ye gave me drink: I was a stranger, and ye took me in:
xenos xenos
a_ Nom Sg m
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
kai sunhgagete kai sunagO

pp 1 Acc Sg
LODGer stranger
I-WAS
AND
YE-TOGETHER-LED ME ye-took-in me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
25:36 gumnos
gumnos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai periebalete kai periballO

hsqenhsa astheneO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai epeskeyasqe me kai episkeptomai egO

Conj vi Aor midD 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
NAKED
AND
YE-ABOUT-CAST(past) ME ye-clothed kai hlqate kai erchomai

I-am-UN-FIRM AND I-am-infirm me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-ON-NOTE ye-visit
ME
IN
36 Naked, and ye clothed me: I was sick, and ye visited me: I was in prison, and ye came unto me.
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
GUARD-house I-WAS jail
AND
YE-COME
TOWARD ME
25:37 tote apokriqhsontai autw

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
vi Fut pasD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dikaioi legontes dikaios legO

a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pote pote
Part Int
then
SHALL-BE-answerING
to-Him him
THE
JUST just-ones
sayING
Master ! Lord !
?-when when ?
37 Then shall the righteous answer him, saying, Lord, when saw we thee an hungred, and fed [thee]? or thirsty, and gave [thee] drink?
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
eidomen eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
peinwnta peinaO
kai eqreyamen h kai trephO E

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl Part
diywnta dipsaO
kai epotisamen kai potizO

YOU
WE-PERCEIVED HUNGERING
AND
WE-NURTURE we-nourish
OR
THIRSTING
AND
WE-DRINKize we-give-to-drink kai kai

Conj
38 When saw we thee a stranger, and took [thee] in? or naked, and clothed [thee]?
25:38 pote de
pote
Part Int
de
Conj
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
eidomen eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
xenon xenos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai sunhgagomen kai sunagO

h E
Part
gumnon gumnos
a_ Acc Sg m
?-when when ?
YET YOU
WE-PERCEIVED LODGer stranger
AND
WE-TOGETHER-LED OR we-took-in
NAKED
AND
periebalomen periballO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-ABOUT-CAST(past) we-clothed
25:39 pote de
pote
Part Int
de
Conj
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
eidomen eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
asqenounta astheneO
h E
Part
en en
Prep
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai hlqomen kai erchomai

39 Or when saw we thee sick, or in prison, and came unto thee?
?-when when ? pros pros

Prep
YET YOU
WE-PERCEIVED UN-FIRM infirm
OR
IN
GUARD-house AND jail
WE-CAME
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
TOWARD YOU
25:40 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus erei basileus ereO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg

AND
answerING
THE
KING
SHALL-BE-declarING to-them
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ef epi
Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
epoihsate eni poieO heis

vi Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m

adelfwn mou adelphos egO

n_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
40 And the King shall answer and say unto them, Verily I say unto you, Inasmuch as ye have done [it] unto one of the least of these my brethren, ye have done [it] unto me.
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ON
as-much-as YE-DO
to-ONE
OF-these
THE
brothers
OF-ME
THE
elacistwn emoi elachistos egO

a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Dat Sg
epoihsate poieO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
INFERIOR-most least
to-ME
YE-DO
25:41 tote erei

tote
Adv
ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
ex ek
Prep
euwnumwn poreuesqe euOnumos poreuomai

a_ Gen Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
then
He-SHALL-BE-declarING AND also
to-THE OUT OF-left to-the-ones of-left(p)
FROM ME
41 Then shall he say also unto them on the left hand, Depart from me, ye cursed, into everlasting fire, prepared for the devil and his angels:
AV
NA
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kathramenoi kataraomai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg n
THE
ones-HAVING-been-DOWN-EXECRATED INTO THE ones-having-been-cursed htoimasmenon hetoimazO

FIRE
THE
eonian
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
diabolw diabolos
a_ Dat Sg m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
aggelois aggelos
n_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
HAVING-been-made-READY to-THE thing-having-been-made-ready
to-THE the
MESSENGERS OF-him
WH
25:42 epeinasa gar kai ouk

peinaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
gar
Conj
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
edwkate moi didOmi egO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
kai
ediyhsa dipsaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
I-HUNGER
for
AND
NOT
YE-GIVE
to-ME me
TO-BE-EATING
I-THIRST
AND
42 For I was an hungred, and ye gave me no meat: I was thirsty, and ye gave me no drink:
ouk ou
Part Neg
epotisate me potizO egO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
NOT
YE-DRINKize ye-give-to-drink
ME
25:43 xenos
xenos
a_ Nom Sg m
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
sunhgagete sunagO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
gumnos gumnos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
LODGer stranger periebalete periballO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
I-WAS
AND
NOT
YE-TOGETHER-LED ME ye-took-in fulakh phulakE

n_ Dat Sg f
NAKED
AND
NOT
43 I was a stranger, and ye took me not in: naked, and ye clothed me not: sick, and in prison, and ye visited me not.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
asqenhs kai en asthenEs kai en

a_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
epeskeyasqe me episkeptomai egO

vi Aor midD 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-ABOUT-CAST(past) ME ye-clothed
UN-FIRM infirm
AND
IN
GUARD-house AND jail legontes legO

NOT
YE-ON-NOTE ye-visit pote se pote su

Part Int
ME
25:44 tote apokriqhsontai kai autoi

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
vi Fut pasD 3 Pl
kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pp 2 Acc Sg
then
SHALL-BE-answerING
AND also h E
Part
they
sayING
Master ! Lord ! xenon xenos

a_ Acc Sg m
?-when when ? h E
Part
YOU
eidomen eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
peinwnta peinaO
diywnta dipsaO
h E
Part
h E
Part
gumnon gumnos
a_ Acc Sg m
asqenh asthenEs
a_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
en en
Prep
44 Then shall they also answer him, saying, Lord, when saw we thee an hungred, or athirst, or a stranger, or naked, or sick, or in prison, and did not minister unto thee?
WE-PERCEIVED HUNGERING
OR
THIRSTING
OR
LODGer stranger
OR
NAKED
OR
UN-FIRM infirm
OR
IN
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
dihkonhsamen soi diakoneO su

NOT
WE-THRU-SERVE we-serve
to-YOU you amhn legw amEn legO

25:45 tote apokriqhsetai

tote
Adv
apokrinomai
vi Fut pasD 3 Sg

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ef epi
Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
then
He-SHALL-BE-answerING to-them them
sayING
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ON
as-much-as
45 Then shall he answer them, saying, Verily I say unto you, Inasmuch as ye did [it] not to one of the least of these, ye did [it] not to me.
ouk ou
Part Neg
epoihsate eni poieO heis

vi Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m

elacistwn oude elachistos oude

a_ Gen Pl m Adv
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
epoihsate poieO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
NOT
YE-DO
to-ONE
OF-these
THE
INFERIOR-most least kolasin kolasis

n_ Acc Sg f
NOT-YET to-ME neither de de

Conj
YE-DO
25:46 kai apeleusontai

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
aiwnion oi aiOnios ho
a_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m
dikaioi eis dikaios eis

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
AND
SHALL-BE-FROM-COMING these shall-be-coming-away these-ones
INTO CHASTENing eonian
THE
YET JUST just-ones
INTO
46 And these shall go away into everlasting punishment: but the righteous into life eternal.
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
LIFE
eonian
AV
Matthew 26
26:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

logous logos
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
when
FINISHES
THE
JESUS
ALL
THE
sayings
. And it came to pass, when Jesus had finished all these sayings, he said unto his disciples,
toutous eipen houtos legO

pd Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

these
He-said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
26:2 oidate
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti meta duo hoti meta duo

Conj Prep ni numeral
hmeras to hEmera ho
n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
ginetai ginomai
kai kai
Conj
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
after
TWO
DAYS
THE
PASSOVER IS-BECOMING
AND
Ye know that after two days is [the feast of] the passover, and the Son of man is betrayed to be crucified.
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou paradidotai anthrOpos paradidOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
staurwqhnai stauroO
vn Aor Pas
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO THE is-being-given-up arciereis archiereus

n_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-impalED to-be-crucified presbuteroi tou presbuteros ho

3
26:3 tote sunhcqhsan

tote
Adv
sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
then
WERE-TOGETHER-LED THE were-gathered eis eis

Prep
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
SENIORS elders legomenou legO

vp Pres Pas Gen Sg m
OF-THE
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aulhn aulE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kaiafa kaiaphas
n_ Gen Sg m
Then assembled together the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders of the people, unto the palace of the high priest, who was called Caiaphas,
PEOPLE
INTO THE
COURT courtyard
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one THE chief-priest ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
beING-said one-being-said krathswsin krateO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
CAIAPHAS
26:4 kai sunebouleusanto

kai
Conj
sumbouleuO
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl
ina hina
Conj
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
dolw dolos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
And consulted that they might take Jesus by subtilty, and kill [him].
AND
THEY-TOGETHER-COUNSEL THAT THE they-consult
JESUS
to-FRAUD to-guile
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HOLDING AND they-should-be-laying-hold-of
apokteinwsin apokteinO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING may-be-killing-him
26:5 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
qorubos genhtai thorubos ginomai

n_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
But they said, Not on the feast [day], lest there be an uproar among the people.
THEY-said
YET NO
IN
THE
FESTIVAL THAT NO
TUMULT
MAY-BE-BECOMING IN may-be-occurring among
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
PEOPLE
26:6 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
genomenou ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
bhqania en bEthania en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
simwnos tou simOn ho

. Now when Jesus was in Bethany, in the house of Simon the leper,
OF-THE
YET JESUS
BECOMING coming-to-be
IN
BETHANY
IN
HOME house
OF-SIMON
THE
leprou lepros
a_ Gen Sg m
leper
26:7 proshlqen
proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ecousa echO
alabastron murou alabastron muron

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n
barutimou barutimos
a_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
TOWARD-CAME to-Him came-to him kateceen katacheO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WOMAN
HAVING
ALABASTER alabaster-vase anakeimenou anakeimai
OF-ATTAR
OF-HEAVY-VALUE AND very-precious
There came unto him a woman having an alabaster box of very precious ointment, and poured it on his head, as he sat [at meat].
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
kefalhs autou kephalE autos

she-DOWN-POURS ON she-pours-down-it
THE
HEAD
OF-Him
OF-UP-LYING of-lying-back-at-table eis eis

Prep
26:8 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai hganakthsan legontes mathEtEs aganakteO legO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
PERCEIVING perceiving-it
YET THE
LEARNers disciples
THEY-resent resent-it
sayING
INTO ANY what ?
THE
But when his disciples saw [it], they had indignation, saying, To what purpose [is] this waste?
AV
Matthew 26
apwleia auth apOleia houtos

n_ Nom Sg f pd Nom Sg f
destruction
this
26:9 edunato
dunamai
gar touto gar houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg n
praqhnai pipraskO
vn Aor Pas
pollou kai doqhnai polus kai didOmi

a_ Gen Sg n Conj vn Aor Pas
ptwcois ptOchos
a_ Dat Pl m
For this ointment might have been sold for much, and given to the poor.
was-ABLE could
for
this
TO-BE-disposED-of OF-much
AND
TO-BE-GIVEN to-POOR to-poor-ones kopous kopos

n_ Acc Pl m
10 When Jesus understood [it], he said unto them, Why trouble ye the woman? for she hath wrought a good work upon me.
26:10 gnous
ginOskO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

KNOWING knowing-it parecete parechO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-them
ANY why ? eis eis

Prep
toils weariness(p) eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki ergon gunE ergon

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg n
gar kalon gar kalos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
hrgasato ergazomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
YE-ARE-tenderING to-THE ye-are-affording the
WOMAN
ACT work
for
IDEAL
she-ACTS she-works meq meta

Prep
INTO ME
26:11 pantote gar tous

pantote
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ptwcous ecete ptOchos echO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eautwn eme heautou egO

pf 3 Gen Pl m pp 1 Acc Sg
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
11 For ye have the poor always with you; but me ye have not always.
always
for
THE
POOR poor-ones
YE-ARE-HAVING WITH selves yourselves
ME
YET NOT
pantote ecete pantote echO

always
YE-ARE-HAVING
26:12 balousa
ballO
gar auth gar houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
muron muron
n_ Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos mou sOma egO

12 For in that she hath poured this ointment on my body, she did [it] for my burial.
CASTING spraying pros pros

Prep
for
this-one this-one(f)
THE
ATTAR
this
ON
THE
BODY
OF-ME
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
entafiasai me entaphiazO egO

vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWARD THE
TO-IN-sepulcher to-bury umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
ME
DOES she-does ean ean

Cond
26:13 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
khrucqh kErussO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
n_ Nom Sg n
AMEN verily touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE-?-where IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED THE wherever may-be-being-heralded kosmw kosmos

n_ Dat Sg m
WELL-MESSAGE
en en
Prep
olw holos
a_ Dat Sg m
lalhqhsetai laleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
epoihsen auth poieO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg f
13 Verily I say unto you, Wheresoever this gospel shall be preached in the whole world, [there] shall also this, that this woman hath done, be told for a memorial of her.
this
IN
WHOLE
THE
SYSTEM world
SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED AND shall-be-being-spoken also
WHICH
DOES
this-one this-one(f)
eis eis
Prep
mnhmosunon auths mnEmosunon autos

INTO REMINDer memorial
OF-her
26:14 tote poreuqeis

tote
Adv
poreuomai
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka o dOdeka ho
ni numeral t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
14 . Then one of the twelve, called Judas Iscariot, went unto the chief priests,
then
BEING-GONE
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
THE
one-beING-said one-being-said
JUDAS
iskariwths pros iskariOthEs pros

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
ISCARIOT
TOWARD THE
chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
26:15 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
dounai kagw didOmi kagO

vn 2Aor Act pp 1 Nom Sg Con
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
said
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-WILLING to-ME me oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
TO-GIVE
AND-I
to-YOU(p) to-ye triakonta arguria triakonta argurion

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n
15 And said [unto them], What will ye give me, and I will deliver him unto you? And they covenanted with him for thirty pieces of silver.
paradwsw paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
esthsan histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him shall-be-giving-up
THE-ones the
YET STAND they-weigh
to-him
THREE-TY thirty
SILVERS pieces-of-silver
AV
Matthew 26
26:16 kai apo

kai
Conj
apo
Prep
tote ezhtei tote zEteO

Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg
eukairian eukairia
n_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
paradw paradidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
16 And from that time he sought opportunity to betray him.
AND
FROM then
he-SOUGHT
WELL-SEASON THAT Him opportunity azumwn azumos

a_ Gen Pl n
he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING he-may-be-giving-up oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
26:17 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
prwth prOtos
a_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to-THE
YET BEFORE-most OF-THE first pou pou

Part Int
UN-FERMENTEDS TOWARD-CAME THE unleavened-bread(p) approached etoimaswmen hetoimazO

vs Aor Act 1 Pl
LEARNers disciples soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
to-THE
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
legontes legO
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
17 . Now the first [day] of the [feast of] unleavened bread the disciples came to Jesus, saying unto him, Where wilt thou that we prepare for thee to eat the passover?
JESUS
sayING
?-where YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY to-YOU where ?
TO-BE-EATING
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
THE
PASSOVER
26:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
deina deina
a_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET He-said
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-ye-going-away ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
city
TOWARD THE
SO-AND-SO
kai eipate kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
didaskalos legei didaskalos legO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
18 And he said, Go into the city to such a man, and say unto him, The Master saith, My time is at hand; I will keep the passover at thy house with my disciples.
AND
say say-ye !
to-him
THE
TEACHer
IS-sayING
THE
SEASON OF-ME appointed-time meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
eggus estin eggus eimi

pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
NEAR
IS
TOWARD YOU
I-AM-DOING THE I-am-doholding
PASSOVER WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
26:19 kai epoihsan oi

kai
Conj
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai ws sunetaxen mathEtEs hOs suntassO

n_ Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
19 And the disciples did as Jesus had appointed them; and they made ready the passover.
AND
DO
THE
LEARNers disciples
AS
TOGETHER-SETS to-them arranges-with them
THE
JESUS
AND
htoimasan hetoimazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
THEY-make-READY THE
PASSOVER
WH
26:20 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
anekeito anakeimai
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
maqhtwn
20 Now when the even was come, he sat down with the twelve.
He-was-UP-LAID WITH he-was-lying-back-at-table
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
26:21 kai esqiontwn

kai
Conj
esthiO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti eis hoti heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
AND
OF-EATING
OF-them
He-said
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
21 And as they did eat, he said, Verily I say unto you, that one of you shall betray me.
that
ONE
OUT
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
paradwsei paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING ME of-ye shall-be-giving-up
26:22 kai lupoumenoi

kai
Conj
lupeO
sfodra sphodra
Adv
hrxanto archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
legein legO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ekastos mhti hekastos mEti

a_ Nom Sg m Part Int
AND
SORROWING ones-sorrowing
VEHEMENT begin tremendously they-begin
TO-BE-sayING to-Him
ONE
EACH
NO-ANY not ?
22 And they were exceeding sorrowful, and began every one of them to say unto him, Lord, is it I?
AV
Matthew 26
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
AM
Master ! Lord ! de de
Conj
26:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
embayas embaptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET answerING
He-said
THE
one-IN-DIPPing one-dipping-in paradwsei paradidOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
WITH ME
THE
23 And he answered and said, He that dippeth [his] hand with me in the dish, the same shall betray me.
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
trubliw outos trublion houtos

n_ Dat Sg n pd Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
HAND
IN
THE
DISH
this-one this-one tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ME
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING shall-be-giving-up kaqws kathOs

Adv
24 The Son of man goeth as it is written of him: but woe unto that man by whom the Son of man is betrayed! it had been good for that man if he had not been born.
26:24 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou upagei anthrOpos hupagO

THE
INDEED SON
OF-THE
human
IS-UNDER-LEADING according-AS is-going-away tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ouai de ouai de
Inj Conj
anqrwpw ekeinw di anthrOpos ekeinos dia

n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ABOUT Him concerning o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WOE woe !
YET to-THE
human
that
THRU WHOM through hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN IDEAL is-being-given-up
it-WAS
to-Him
IF
ouk ou
Part Neg
egennhqh gennaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ekeinos anthrOpos ekeinos

n_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
NOT
WAS-generatED THE was-born de de

Conj
human
that
26:25 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paradidous paradidOmi
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mhti mEti
Part Int
answerING
YET JUDAS
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
said
NO-ANY not ?
25 Then Judas, which betrayed him, answered and said, Master, is it I? He said unto him, Thou hast said.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
rabbi rhabbi
Hebrew
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
eipas legO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AM
RABBI ! He-IS-sayING Rabbi de de

Conj
to-him
YOU
say say-it ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
26:26 esqiontwn
esthiO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
labwn lambanO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
OF-EATING
YET OF-them
GETTING taking
THE
JESUS
BREAD
AND
26 . And as they were eating, Jesus took bread, and blessed [it], and brake [it], and gave [it] to the disciples, and said, Take, eat; this is my body.
euloghsas eulogeO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eklasen klaiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai dous kai didOmi

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais eipen mathEtEs legO

n_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
labete lambanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
blessing
He-BREAKS he-breaks-it touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
AND
GIVING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
said
BE-GETTING be-ye-taking !
fagete esthiO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
BE-EATING be-ye-eating !
this
IS
THE
BODY
WH NA
OF-ME
26:27 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
pothrion potErion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai
kai kai
Conj
eucaristhsas edwken eucharisteO didOmi

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
27 And he took the cup, and gave thanks, and gave [it] to them, saying, Drink ye all of it;
AND
GETTING taking piete pinO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
DRINK-cup cup ex ek
Prep
AND
thanking giving-thanks
He-GIVES he-gives-it
to-them
legwn legO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
sayING
BE-DRINKING OUT OF-it be-ye-drinking ! gar estin gar eimi

ALL
26:28 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
diaqhkhs to diathEkE ho
this
for
IS
THE
BLOOD
OF-ME
OF-THE
covenant
THE
28 For this is my blood of the new testament, which is shed for many for the remission of sins.
AV
Matthew 26
peri peri
Prep
pollwn ekcunnomenon polus ekcheO

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
afesin aphesis
n_ Acc Sg f
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
ABOUT MANY concerning
beING-OUT-POURED INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses being-shed pardon of-sins de de

Conj
26:29 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
piw pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ap apo
Prep
arti arti
Adv
ek ek
Prep
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg n
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
NO
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING FROM at-PRESENT OUT OF-this
29 But I say unto you, I will not drink henceforth of this fruit of the vine, until that day when I drink it new with you in my Father's kingdom.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
genhmatos ths genEma ho

ampelou ampelos
n_ Gen Sg f
ews ths heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs otan ekeinos hotan

pd Gen Sg f Conj
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
THE
product
OF-THE
GRAPE-VINE TILL grapevine kainon kainos

a_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE the
DAY
that
when-EVER it whenever patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
pinw pinO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING WITH YOU(p) ye
NEW
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
26:30 kai umnhsantes exhlqon

kai
Conj
humneO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
elaiwn elaia
n_ Gen Pl f
30 And when they had sung an hymn, they went out into the mount of Olives.
AND
HYMNing singing-a-hymn
THEY-OUT-CAME INTO THE they-came-out autois o autos ho

mountain Mount pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
OLIVES
26:31 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
skandalisqhsesqe en skandalizO en
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl Prep
then
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
ALL
YOU(p) ye gar pataxw gar patassO

IN
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
poimena poimEn
n_ Acc Sg m
31 . Then saith Jesus unto them, All ye shall be offended because of me this night: for it is written, I will smite the shepherd, and the sheep of the flock shall be scattered abroad.
ME
IN
THE
NIGHT
this
I-SHALL-BE-SMITING THE
SHEPHERD
kai diaskorpisqhsontai kai diaskorpizO

ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
probata ths probaton ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
poimnhs poimnE
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-SCATTERED THE shall-be-being-scattered to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
sheep sheep(p) me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-THE
SHEEP-herd flock umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
26:32 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
egerqhnai egeirO
vn Aor Pas
proaxw proagO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
32 But after I am risen again, I will go before you into Galilee.
after
YET THE
TO-BE-ROUSED ME
I-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) I-shall-be-preceding ye
INTO THE
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
GALILEE
26:33 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
answerING
YET THE
Peter
said
to-Him
IF
ALL
33 Peter answered and said unto him, Though all [men] shall be offended because of thee, [yet] will I never be offended.
skandalisqhsontai en skandalizO en
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
oudepote oudepote
Adv
skandalisqhsomai skandalizO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
IN
YOU
NOT-YET-?-when SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED never amhn legw amEn legO

26:34 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
AVERRed
to-him
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
that
IN
this
34 Jesus said unto him, Verily I say unto thee, That this night, before the cock crow, thou shalt deny me thrice.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
prin alektora fwnhsai tris prin alektOr phOneO tris

Adv n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Adv
aparnhsh aparneomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
NIGHT
ERE
UN-LAYer cock o ho
TO-SOUND to-crow petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
THRice YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME
26:35 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kan kan
Cond Con
deh deO
vs Pres im-Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
sun sun
Prep
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
Peter
AND-[IF]-EVER MAY-BE-BINDING ME and-if-ever it-may-be-binding
TOGETHER togetherwith
35 Peter said unto him, Though I should die with thee, yet will I not deny thee. Likewise also said all the disciples.
AV
Matthew 26
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
apoqanein apothnEskO
vn 2Aor Act
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
aparnhsomai aparneomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
omoiws kai pantes homoiOs kai pas

Adv Conj a_ Nom Pl m
to-YOU you oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-FROM-DYING NOT to-be-dying maqhtai eipan mathEtEs legO

NO
YOU
I-SHALL-BE-renouncING LIKE-AS likewise
AND also
ALL
THE
LEARNers disciples
say
26:36 tote ercetai

tote
Adv
erchomai

Prep pp Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
cwrion legomenon chOrion legO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
then
IS-COMING
WITH them
THE
JESUS
INTO freehold
beING-said
36 . Then cometh Jesus with them unto a place called Gethsemane, and saith unto the disciples, Sit ye here, while I go and pray yonder.
geqshmani kai legei gethsEmani kai legO

ni proper Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais kaqisate autou mathEtEs kathizO autou

n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
ews heOs
Conj
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
GETHSEMANE AND
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
BE-seated be-ye-seated !
OF-SAME TILL here
OF-WHICH which
apelqwn aperchomai
ekei proseuxwmai ekei proseuchomai

Adv vs Aor midD 1 Sg
there
I-SHOULD-BE-prayING
26:37 kai paralabwn

kai
Conj
paralambanO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
zebedaiou zebedaios
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along lupeisqai lupeO

vn Pres Pas
THE
Peter
AND
THE
TWO
SONS
OF-ZEBEDEE
37 And he took with him Peter and the two sons of Zebedee, and began to be sorrowful and very heavy.
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai adhmonein kai adEmoneO

Conj vn Pres Act
He-begins
TO-BE-SORROWING AND to-be-being-sorrowful
TO-BE-depressING to-be-being-depressed estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
26:38 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois perilupos autos perilupos

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ews heOs
Conj
then
He-IS-sayING
to-them
ABOUT-SORROWed IS sorrow-stricken
THE
soul
OF-ME
TILL
38 Then saith he unto them, My soul is exceeding sorrowful, even unto death: tarry ye here, and watch with me.
qanatou meinate thanatos menO

n_ Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
wde kai grhgoreite met emou hOde kai grEgoreO meta egO
Adv Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-DEATH death
REMAIN remain-ye !
here
AND
BE-watchING be-ye-watching ! epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WITH ME
26:39 kai proelqwn

kai
Conj
proerchomai
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg m
epi proswpon autou epi prosOpon autos

Prep n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
proseucomenos proseuchomai
AND
BEFORE-COMING coming-forward
LITTLE
He-FALLS
ON
face
OF-Him
prayING
kai legwn kai legO

pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ei ei
Cond
dunaton estin dunatos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
parelqatw parerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
39 And he went a little further, and fell on his face, and prayed, saying, O my Father, if it be possible, let this cup pass from me: nevertheless not as I will, but as thou [wilt].
AND
sayING
FATHER !
OF-ME
IF
ABLE possible ws egw hOs egO

Adv
it-IS
LET-BESIDE-COME FROM OF-ME let-it-pass-by ! me all ws su alla hOs su

Conj Adv pp 2 Nom Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pothrion touto potErion houtos

n_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n
plhn plEn
Adv
ouc ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pp 1 Nom Sg
THE
DRINK-cup cup
this
MOREly NOT however pros pros

Prep
AS
AM-WILLING
but
AS
YOU
26:40 kai ercetai

kai
Conj
erchomai
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas kai euriskei mathEtEs kai heuriskO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autous kaqeudontas autos katheudO

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
AND
He-IS-COMING
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples
AND
IS-FINDING
them
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing grhgorhsai grEgoreO

vn Aor Act
40 And he cometh unto the disciples, and findeth them asleep, and saith unto Peter, What, could ye not watch with me one hour?
kai legei kai legO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
outws ouk houtOs ou

Adv Part Neg
iscusate ischuO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
Peter
thus
NOT
YE-are-STRONG ONE
HOUR
TO-watch
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
WITH ME
AV
Matthew 26
26:41 grhgoreite kai proseucesqe

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai
Conj
proseuchomai
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
peirasmon peirasmos
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-watchING be-ye-watching ! to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
BE-prayING be-ye-praying ! proqumon prothumos

a_ Nom Sg n
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO trial ye-may-be-entering sarx sarx

n_ Nom Sg f
41 Watch and pray, that ye enter not into temptation: the spirit indeed [is] willing, but the flesh [is] weak.
men men
Part
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
asqenhs asthenEs
a_ Nom Sg f
THE
INDEED spirit
BEFORE-FEEL THE eager
YET FLESH
UN-FIRM infirm
WH
26:42 palin ek
palin
Adv
ek
Prep
deuterou apelqwn deuteros aperchomai

a_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
proshuxato proseuchomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legwn
NA
legwn legO
AGAIN
OUT OF-second of-second-time ei ei

Cond
FROM-COMING coming-away dunatai dunamai

He-prays
sayING
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
parelqein parerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
42 He went away again the second time, and prayed, saying, O my Father, if this cup may not pass away from me, except I drink it, thy will be done.
FATHER !
OF-ME
IF
NOT
IS-ABLE can
this
TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING IF-EVER NO to-be-passing-by qelhma thelEma

n_ Nom Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
piw pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
genhqhtw ginomai
vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
it
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE let-it-be-being-become ! palin euren palin heuriskO

WILL
OF-YOU
26:43 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
autous kaqeudontas hsan autos katheudO eimi

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar autwn gar autos

Conj pp Gen Pl m
43 And he came and found them asleep again: for their eyes were heavy.
AND
COMING
AGAIN
He-FOUND
them
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing
WERE
for
OF-them
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi bebarhmenoi ophthalmos bareO

n_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
THE
VIEWers eyes
HAVING-been-HEAVIED
26:44 kai afeis

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
autous palin apelqwn autos palin aperchomai

pp Acc Pl m Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
proshuxato ek proseuchomai ek
vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep
tritou tritos
a_ Gen Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
FROM-LETTING leaving logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
them
AGAIN
He-prays
OUT OF-third THE of-third-time
44 And he left them, and went away again, and prayed the third time, saying the same words.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipwn legO
palin palin
Adv
SAME
saying word
sayING
AGAIN
26:45 tote ercetai

tote
Adv
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas kai legei mathEtEs kai legO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
then
He-IS-COMING
TOWARD THE
NA
LEARNers disciples
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
kaqeudete katheudO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
loipon loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
kai anapauesqe kai anapauO

Conj vi Pres Mid 2 Pl / vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
45 Then cometh he to his disciples, and saith unto them, Sleep on now, and take [your] rest: behold, the hour is at hand, and the Son of man is betrayed into the hands of sinners.
BE-DOWN-LOUNGING ye-are-drowsing hggiken eggizO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
THE
rest AND furthermore uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
BE-UP-CEASING ye-are-resting tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m

HAS-NEARED THE has-drawn-near eis eis

Prep
HOUR
AND
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN is-being-given-up
ceiras amartwlwn cheir hamartOlos

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Gen Pl m
INTO HANDS
OF-missers of-sinners agwmen agO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
26:46 egeiresqe
egeirO
vm Pres mid/pas 2 Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
46 Rise, let us be going: behold, he is at hand that doth betray me.
BE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING HAS-NEARED THE be-ye-being-roused ! we-may-be-going lo ! has-drawn-near me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
one-BESIDE-GIVING one-giving-up
ME
AV
Matthew 26
26:47 kai eti

kai
Conj
eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
AND
STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING JUDAS lo ! polus polus

a_ Nom Sg m
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve apo apo

Prep
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai met autou kai meta autos

Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m
meta macairwn kai xulwn meta machaira kai xulon

Prep n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n
47 . And while he yet spake, lo, Judas, one of the twelve, came, and with him a great multitude with swords and staves, from the chief priests and elders of the people.
CAME
AND
WITH him
THRONG
MANY vast
WITH
swords
AND
WOODS cudgels
FROM
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcierewn archiereus
n_ Gen Pl m
kai presbuterwn tou kai presbuteros ho

Conj a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests de de

Conj
SENIORS elders auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
PEOPLE
26:48 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois shmeion legwn autos sEmeion legO

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
THE
YET one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up an an

Part
GIVES
to-them them
SIGN
sayING
48 Now he that betrayed him gave them a sign, saying, Whomsoever I shall kiss, that same is he: hold him fast.
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
filhsw phileO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
krathsate auton krateO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
WHOM
EVER I-SHOULD-BE-beING-FOND He I-should-be-kissing tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
it-IS it-is ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
HOLD hold-ye ! eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
Him
26:49 kai euqews proselqwn

kai
Conj
eutheOs
Adv
proserchomai
caire chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
rabbi kai rhabbi kai

Hebrew Conj
49 And forthwith he came to Jesus, and said, Hail, master; and kissed him.
AND
immediately
to-THE the
JESUS
he-said
BE-JOYING RABBI be-you-rejoicing !
AND
katefilhsen auton kataphileO autos

he-DOWN-FONDS he-kisses-fondly
Him
26:50 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
etaire hetairos
n_ Voc Sg m
ef epi
Prep
o hos
pr Nom Sg m
parei pareimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-him
COMRADE ! ON
WHICH
YOU-ARE-BESIDE-BEING you-are-present ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
50 And Jesus said unto Friend, wherefore art come? Then came they, laid hands on Jesus, and him.
him, thou and took
tote proselqontes epebalon tote proserchomai epiballO

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras epi ton cheir epi ho

n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kai ekrathsan kai krateO

then
THEY-ON-CAST(past) THE they-laid-on
HANDS
ON
THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-HOLD hold
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
26:51 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
meta ihsou meta iEsous

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
ekteinas ekteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING ONE lo !
OF-THE-ones WITH of-the-ones
JESUS
OUT-STRETCHing THE stretching-out ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
HAND
apespasen thn apospaO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
macairan autou machaira autos

kai pataxas kai patassO

doulon tou doulos ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
51 And, behold, one of them which were with Jesus stretched out [his] hand, and drew his sword, and struck a servant of the high priest's, and smote off his ear.
FROM-PULLS pulls arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
sword
OF-him
AND
SMITing
THE
SLAVE
OF-THE
afeilen aphaireO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
wtion Otion
n_ Acc Sg n
chief-SACRED-one he-FROM-LIFTS OF-him chief-priest amputates
THE
EARlobe ear-lobe ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
26:52 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apostreyon thn apostrephO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
macairan sou machaira su

then
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
YOU-FROM-TURN THE turn-away-you ! labontes lambanO

sword
OF-YOU
52 Then said Jesus unto him, Put up again thy sword into his place: for all they that take the sword shall perish with the sword.
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar oi gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
macairan en machaira en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
macairh machaira
n_ Dat Sg f
INTO THE
PLACE
OF-her
ALL
for
THE
ones-GETTING ones-taking
sword
IN
sword
AV
Matthew 26
apolountai apollumi
vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED shall-be-perishing
26:53 h
E
Part
dokeis dokeO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
dunamai dunamai
parakalesai ton parakaleO ho

vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OR
YOU-ARE-SEEMING that you-are-supposing
NOT
I-AM-ABLE
TO-BESIDE-CALL to-entreat pleiw polus

a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
53 Thinkest thou that I cannot now pray to my Father, and he shall presently give me more than twelve legions of angels?
kai parasthsei kai paristEmi

moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
arti arti
Adv
dwdeka legiwnas dOdeka legeOn

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f
AND
He-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-STANDING to-ME he-shall-be-stationing-beside me
at-PRESENT MORE more-than
TWO-TEN twelve
LEGIONS (Latin) legions
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-MESSENGERS
26:54 pws oun

pOs
Adv Int
oun
Conj
plhrwqwsin plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
grafai graphE
n_ Nom Pl f
oti hoti
Conj
outws dei houtOs deO

Adv vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
54 But how then shall the scriptures be fulfilled, that thus it must be?
how how ? genesqai ginomai

vn 2Aor midD
THEN MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled
WRITings scriptures
that thus seeing-that
it-IS-BINDING it-must
TO-BE-BECOMING to-be-occurring
26:55 en
en
Prep
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
oclois ws epi ochlos hOs epi

n_ Dat Pl m Adv Prep
IN
that
THE
HOUR
said
THE
JESUS
to-THE
THRONGS AS
ON
lhsthn lEstEs
n_ Acc Sg m
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl

sullabein sullambanO
vn 2Aor Act
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kaq kata
Prep
55 In that same hour said Jesus to the multitudes, Are ye come out as against a thief with swords and staves for to take me? I sat daily with you teaching in the temple, and ye laid no hold on me.
ROBBER
YE-OUT-COME WITH ye-come-out tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
swords
AND
WOODS cudgels
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING ME to-be-apprehending kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
according-to
hmeran en hEmera en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
ekaqezomhn kathezomai
didaskwn didaskO
ekrathsate krateO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
DAY
IN
THE
SACRED-place I-was-seatED sanctuary
TEACHING
AND
NOT
YE-HOLD
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
26:56 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
plhrwqwsin plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
grafai graphE
n_ Nom Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
this
YET WHOLE
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled afentes aphiEmi

WRITings scriptures
OF-THE
56 But all this was done, that the scriptures of the prophets might be fulfilled. Then all the disciples forsook him, and fled.
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
tote oi tote ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai pantes mathEtEs pas

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
efugon pheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERers then prophets
THE
LEARNers disciples
ALL
Him
FLED
26:57 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
krathsantes ton krateO ho

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
aphgagon pros apagO pros

kaiafan ton kaiaphas ho

THE
YET ones-HOLDing ones-holding opou hopou

Adv
THE
JESUS
FROM-LED led-away-him
TOWARD CAIAPHAS
THE
57 . And they that had laid hold on Jesus led [him] away to Caiaphas the high priest, where the scribes and the elders were assembled.
arcierea archiereus
n_ Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis kai oi grammateus kai ho

n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi sunhcqhsan presbuteros sunagO

a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
chief-SACRED-one THE-?-where THE chief-priest wheree
WRITers scribes
AND
THE
WH
SENIORS elders
NA
WERE-TOGETHER-LED were-gathered makroqen ews ths makrothen heOs ho

Adv Conj t_ Gen Sg f
58 But Peter followed him afar off unto the high priest's palace, and went in, and sat with the servants, to see the end.
26:58 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
hkolouqei autw akoloutheO autos

apo
apo apo
Prep
THE
YET Peter
followED
to-Him him
FROM
FAR-PLACE afar
TILL
OF-THE the
AV
Matthew 26
aulhs aulE
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
arcierews archiereus
n_ Gen Sg m
kai eiselqwn kai eiserchomai

esw ekaqhto esO kathEmai

Adv vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
COURT courtyard
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
INTO-COMING entering telos telos

n_ Acc Sg n
within
he-sat
WITH
THE
uphretwn idein hupEretEs eidO

n_ Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act
subservients deputies
TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE
FINISH consummation kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
26:59 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Pl m
sunedrion olon sunedrion holos

ezhtoun zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests
THE
Sanhedrin
WHOLE
SOUGHT
59 Now the chief priests, and elders, and all the council, sought false witness against Jesus, to put him to death;
yeudomarturian kata tou pseudomarturia kata ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
opws hopOs
Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
qanatwswsin thanatoO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
FALSE-witness false-testimony
DOWN against euron heuriskO
OF-THE the
JESUS
WHICH-how Him so-that
THEY-SHOULD-BE-( causING-to )-DIE they-should-be-putting-to-death

60 But found none: yea, though many false witnesses came, [yet] found they none. At the last came two false witnesses,
26:60 kai ouc

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
pollwn proselqontwn yeudomarturwn polus proserchomai pseudomartur

a_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
NOT
THEY-FOUND OF-MANY
(26:61)
FALSE-witnesses
26:61 usteron de
husteron
Adv
de
Conj
proselqontes duo proserchomai duo

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m ni numeral
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
subsequently YET TOWARD-COMING approaching dunamai dunamai

TWO
say
this-One this-one qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AVERRed
61 And said, This [fellow] said, I am able to destroy the temple of God, and to build it in three days.
katalusai kataluO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
triwn treis
n_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn hEmera
n_ Gen Pl f
I-AM-ABLE
TO-DOWN-LOOSE THE to-demolish
TEMPLE
OF-THE
God
AND
THRU THREE during
DAYS
oikodomhsai oikodomeO
vn Aor Act
TO-HOME-BUILD to-build
26:62 kai anastas

kai
Conj
anistEmi
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arciereus archiereus
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
AND
UP-STANDing rising ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
THE
chief-SACRED-one said chief-priest sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
to-Him
NOT-YET-ONE nothing
62 And the high priest arose, and said unto him, Answerest thou nothing? what [is it which] these witness against thee?
apokrinh apokrinomai
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
katamarturousin katamartureO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YOU-ARE-answerING ANY what ?
these
OF-YOU you esiwpa siOpaO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
ARE-DOWN-witnessING are-testifying-against kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
26:63 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
YET JESUS
WAS-SILENT
AND
THE
chief-SACRED-one said chief-priest tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-Him
exorkizw exorkizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kata kata
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
zwntos zaO
ina hina
Conj
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
63 But Jesus held his peace. And the high priest answered and said unto him, I adjure thee by the living God, that thou tell us whether thou be the Christ, the Son of God.
I-AM-OUT-OATHizING YOU I-am-exorcising eiphs legO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
DOWN OF-THE in-accord-with the su su

pp 2 Nom Sg
God
THE
LIVING
THAT to-US us uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
YOU-MAY-BE-sayING IF you-may-be-telling qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
YOU
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
26:64 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
eipas legO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
plhn plEn
Adv
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
YOU
say say-it
MOREly I-AM-sayING moreover
to-YOU(p) to-ye
64 Jesus saith unto him, Thou hast said: nevertheless I say unto you, Hereafter shall ye see the Son of man sitting on the right hand of power, and
AV
Matthew 26
ap apo
Prep
arti arti
Adv
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou kaqhmenon anthrOpos kathEmai

coming heaven.
in
the
clouds
of
FROM at-PRESENT YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE ye-shall-be-seeing ek ek

Prep
SON
OF-THE
human
sittING
dexiwn ths dexios ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
dunamews kai ercomenon dunamis kai erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
nefelwn tou nephelE ho

OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p) ouranou ouranos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
ABILITY power
AND
COMING
ON
OF-THE the
CLOUDS
OF-THE
heaven
26:65 tote o
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
dierrhxen diarrhEgnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO
then
THE
chief-SACRED-one THRU-BURSTS THE chief-priest tears eti eti

Adv
GARMENTS OF-him
sayING
eblasfhmhsen ti blasphEmeO tis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
marturwn ide martus eidO

n_ Gen Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
nun hkousate nun akouO

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl
65 Then the high priest rent his clothes, saying, He hath spoken blasphemy; what further need have we of witnesses? behold, now ye have heard his blasphemy.
He-HARM-AVERS he-blasphemes thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ANY what ?
STILL need
WE-ARE-HAVING OF-witnesses
BE-PERCEIVING NOW YE-HEAR lo !
blasfhmian blasphEmia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
HARM-AVERment blasphemy umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
26:66 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
apokriqentes eipan apokrinomai legO

vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
enocos enochos
a_ Nom Sg m
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANY why ? estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
66 What think ye? They answered and said, He is guilty of death.
it-IS-SEEMING THE
YET answerING
THEY-say
liable
OF-DEATH
He-IS
26:67 tote eneptusan eis

tote
Adv
emptuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon autou prosOpon autos

kai ekolafisan kai kolaphizO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
then
THEY-IN-SPIT they-spit-in de de
Conj
INTO THE
face
OF-Him
AND
THEY-FROM-CHASTEN Him buffet
67 Then did they spit in his face, and buffeted him; and others smote [him] with the palms of their hands,
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
erapisan rhapizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE-ones the
YET SLAP they-slap profhteuson hmin prophEteuO hemeis

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
26:68 legontes
legO
criste christos
n_ Voc Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
68 Saying, Prophesy unto us, thou Christ, Who is he that smote thee?
sayING
BEFORE-AVER prophesy-you ! se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
to-US
ANOINTED ! ANY Christ ! who ?
IS
THE
paisas paiO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
one-HITTing one-hitting
YOU
26:69 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ekaqhto kathEmai
exw exO
Adv
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
aulh aulE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai proshlqen kai proserchomai

THE
YET Peter
sat
OUT IN outside kai su kai su

Conj
THE
COURT courtyard
AND
TOWARD-CAME came-to tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
69 . Now Peter sat without in the palace: and a damsel came unto him, saying, Thou also wast with Jesus of Galilee.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
paidiskh legousa paidiskE legO

n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
hsqa eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
pp 2 Nom Sg
to-him him
ONE
maid
sayING
AND also
YOU
WERE
WITH
JESUS
THE
galilaiou galilaios
n_ Gen Sg m
GALILEAN
AV
26:70 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
Prep
pantwn legwn pas legO

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
70 But he denied before [them] all, saying, I know not what thou sayest.
THE
YET he-disowns
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ALL in-front-of all
sayING
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-aware
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ANY what ?
YOU-ARE-sayING
26:71 exelqonta
exerchomai
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pulwna eiden pulOn eidO

n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
allh allos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai legei kai legO

OUT-COMING coming-out(m.) tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
YET INTO THE
GATE
PERCEIVED
him
other(f) another(f) nazwraiou nazOraios

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
she-IS-sayING
ekei outos ekei houtos

Adv pd Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
71 And when he was gone out into the porch, another [maid] saw him, and said unto them that were there, This [fellow] was also with Jesus of Nazareth.
to-THE-ones there to-the-men
this-one this-one
WAS
WITH
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
26:72 kai palin hrnhsato

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
meta orkou meta horkos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
72 And again he denied with an oath, I do not know the man.
AND
AGAIN
he-disowns
WITH
OATH
that
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE I-am-acquainted-with eipon legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
human
26:73 meta mikron

meta
Prep
mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
proselqontes oi proserchomai ho
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
estwtes histEmi
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
after
LITTLE
YET TOWARD-COMING approaching ex ek

Prep
THE
ones-HAVING-STOOD said ones-standing ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
to-THE
73 And after a while came unto [him] they that stood by, and said to Peter, Surely thou also art [one] of them; for thy speech bewrayeth thee.
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
alhqws kai su alEthOs kai su

Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai gar h kai gar ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg f
lalia lalia
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
Peter
TRUly
AND also
YOU
OUT OF-them
ARE
AND also
for
THE
TALK speech
OF-YOU
dhlon dElos
a_ Acc Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
EVIDENT
YOU
IS-makING
26:74 tote hrxato

tote
Adv
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kataqematizein kai omnuein katathematizO kai omnuO

vn Pres Act Conj vn Pres Act
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
then
he-begins
TO-BE-damnING
AND
TO-BE-SWEARING that
NOT
74 Then began he to curse and to swear, [saying], I know not the man. And immediately the cock crew.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon kai euqews alektwr efwnhsen anthrOpos kai eutheOs alektOr phOneO
n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
human
AND
immediately
UN-LAYer cock tou ho
SOUNDS crows rhmatos ihsou rhEma iEsous

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
26:75 kai emnhsqh

kai
Conj
mnaomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eirhkotos ereO
vp Perf Act Gen Sg n Att
oti hoti
Conj
t_ Gen Sg n
AND
IS-REMINDED THE
Peter
OF-THE
declaration
OF-JESUS
OF-HAVING-declarED that
75 And Peter remembered the word of Jesus, which said unto him, Before the cock crow, thou shalt deny me thrice. And he went out, and wept bitterly.
prin alektora fwnhsai tris prin alektOr phOneO tris

aparnhsh aparneomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai exelqwn kai exerchomai

exw exO
Adv
ERE
UN-LAYer cock
TO-SOUND to-crow
THRice YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME
AND
OUT outside
eklausen pikrws klaiO pikrOs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
he-LAMENTS
BITTERly
AV
Matthew 27
27:1 prwias
prOia
n_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
sumboulion sumboulion
n_ Acc Sg n
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-morning YET BECOMING
TOGETHER-COUNSEL GOT consultation held presbuteroi tou presbuteros ho

ALL
THE
. When the morning was come, all the chief priests and elders of the people took counsel against Jesus to put him to death:
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests wste hOste

Conj
THE

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
PEOPLE
DOWN against
OF-THE the
JESUS
qanatwsai thanatoO
vn Aor Act
AS-BESIDES TO-( cause-to )-DIE Him so-as to-put-to-death
27:2 kai dhsantes

kai
Conj
deO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
aphgagon apagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai paredwkan kai paradidOmi

pilatw tw pilatos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
hgemoni hEgemOn
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
BINDing
Him
THEY-FROM-LED AND they-led-away-him ioudas ioudas

n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-BESIDE-GIVE to-PILATE give-up-him

NA
THE
LEADer governor oti hoti

Conj
And when they had bound him, they led [him] away, and delivered him to Pontius Pilate the governor. Then Judas, which had betrayed him, when he saw that he was condemned, repented himself, and brought again the thirty pieces of silver to the chief priests and elders,
27:3 tote idwn

tote
Adv
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WH
paradous
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
then
PERCEIVING
JUDAS
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING one-giving-up triakonta arguria triakonta argurion

Him
that
katekriqh katakrinO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
metamelhqeis estreyen ta metamelomai strephO ho

vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
He-WAS-DOWN-JUDGED BEING-after-CARED he-was-condemned regretting arciereusin archiereus

n_ Dat Pl m
he-TURNS he-returns
THE
THREE-TY thirty
SILVERS to-THE pieces-of-silver
kai presbuterois kai presbuteros

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
SENIORS elders hmarton hamartanO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
27:4 legwn
legO
paradous paradidOmi
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
WH
dikaion
NA
aqwon athOos
a_ Acc Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
sayING
I-missED I-sinned ti tis

pi Nom Sg n
BESIDE-GIVING giving-up hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
BLOOD
UN-PENAL innocent
THE
YET
Saying, I have sinned in that I have betrayed the innocent blood. And they said, What [is that] to us? see thou [to that].
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oyh optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
THEY-say
ANY what ?
TOWARD US
YOU
SHOULD-BE-VIEWING you-should-be-seeing-to-that eis eis

Prep
27:5 kai riyas

kai
Conj
rhiptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
arguria argurion
n_ Acc Pl n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
anecwrhsen kai anachOreO kai

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
AND
TOSSing
THE
SILVERS INTO THE pieces-of-silver
TEMPLE
he-UP-SPACES he-retires
AND
And he cast down the pieces of silver in the temple, and departed, and went and hanged himself.
apelqwn aperchomai
aphgxato apagchO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
is-FROM-COMPRESSED he-strangles-himself de de
Conj
27:6 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
labontes lambanO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
arguria argurion
n_ Acc Pl n
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones GETTING chief-priests taking balein ballO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
SILVERS say pieces-of-silver epei timh epei timE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
NOT
And the chief priests took the silver pieces, and said, It is not lawful for to put them into the treasury, because it is the price of blood.
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
korbanan korban
n_ Acc Sg m
aimatos haima
n_ Gen Sg n
it-IS-allowed
TO-BE-CASTING them
INTO THE
CORBAN (oblation) since corban
VALUE price
OF-BLOOD
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
it-IS
27:7 sumboulion
sumboulion
n_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
labontes lambanO
hgorasan ex agorazO ek
autwn ton autos ho

pp Gen Pl n t_ Acc Sg m
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
And they took counsel, and bought with them the potter's field, to bury strangers in.
TOGETHER-COUNSEL YET GETTING consultation holding
THEY-BUY
OUT OF-them
THE
FIELD
OF-THE
AV
Matthew 27
keramews eis kerameus eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
tafhn taphE
n_ Acc Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
xenois xenos
a_ Dat Pl m
potter
INTO sepulcher
to-THE
LODGers strangers agros agros

n_ Nom Sg m
27:8 dio
dio
Conj
eklhqh kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
agros agros
n_ Nom Sg m
aimatos ews ths haima heOs ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg f
Wherefore that field was called, The field of blood, unto this day.
THRU-WHICH WAS-CALLED THE wherefore shmeron sEmeron

Adv
FIELD
that
FIELD
OF-BLOOD
TILL
OF-THE the
toDAY
27:9 tote eplhrwqh to

tote
Adv
plEroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhqen ereO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
ieremiou tou ieremias ho

profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
then
WAS-FILLED was-fulfilled
THE
BEING-declarED
THRU JEREMIAH through
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
legontos legO
kai elabon kai lambanO

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl / vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
triakonta arguria triakonta argurion

timhn timE
n_ Acc Sg f
Then was fulfilled that which was spoken by Jeremy the prophet, saying, And they took the thirty pieces of silver, the price of him that was valued, whom they of the children of Israel did value;
sayING
AND
THEY-GOT
THE
THREE-TY thirty
SILVERS THE pieces-of-silver uiwn huios

n_ Gen Pl m
VALUE price
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tetimhmenou timaO
vp Perf Pas Gen Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
etimhsanto apo timaO apo

vi Aor Mid 3 Pl Prep
israhl israEl
ni proper
OF-THE
one-HAVING-been-VALUED WHOM one-having-been-valued auta autos

pp Acc Pl n
THEY-VALUE
FROM SONS
of-ISRAEL of-Israel
10 And gave them for the potter's field, as the Lord appointed me.
27:10 kai edwkan

kai
Conj
didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
keramews kaqa kerameus katha

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
AND
THEY-GIVE
them
INTO THE
FIELD
OF-THE
potter
according-to-WHICH according-as
sunetaxen suntassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-SETS to-ME arranges-with me
Master Lord ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
27:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
estaqh histEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hgemonos kai ephrwthsen hEgemOn kai eperOtaO

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
YET JESUS
WAS-STOOD IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE was-standing in-front-of the legwn legO

LEADer governor o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
inquirES-of
11 . And Jesus stood before the governor: and the governor asked him, saying, Art thou the King of the Jews? And Jesus said unto him, Thou sayest.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hgemwn hEgemOn
n_ Nom Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg

Him
THE
LEADer governor de de
Conj
sayING
YOU
ARE
THE
KING
OF-THE
ioudaiwn o ioudaios ho
a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
YET JESUS
AVERRed
YOU
ARE-sayING are-saying-it arcierewn archiereus

n_ Gen Pl m
27:12 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kathgoreisqai auton katEgoreO autos

vn Pres Pas pp Acc Sg m
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
kai kai
Conj
12 And when he was accused of the chief priests and elders, he answered nothing.
AND
IN
THE
TO-BE-accusED
Him
by
THE
presbuterwn ouden presbuteros oudeis

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
apekrinato apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
SENIORS elders
NOT-YET-ONE He-answers nothing autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
27:13 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos ouk pilatos ou

akoueis akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
posa posos
pq Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
then
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
PILATE
NOT
YOU-ARE-HEARING how-many OF-YOU how-much you
13 Then said Pilate unto him, Hearest thou not how many things they witness against thee?
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-DOWN-witnessING they-are-testifying-against
AV
Matthew 27
27:14 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pros pros
Prep
oude oude
Adv
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
wste hOste
Conj
14 And he answered him to never a word; insomuch that the governor marvelled greatly.
AND
NOT
He-answerED
to-him him
TOWARD NOT-YET ONE
declaration AS-BESIDES so-that
qaumazein thaumazO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
hgemona lian hEgemOn lian

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
TO-BE-MARVELING THE
LEADer governor
VERY very-much o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
27:15 kata
kata
Prep
de de
Conj
eorthn eiwqei heortE ethO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Plup Act 3 Sg
hgemwn hEgemOn
n_ Nom Sg m
apoluein apoluO
vn Pres Act
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
according-to YET FESTIVAL
HAD-CUSTOMED THE had-been-accustomed hqelon thelO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
LEADer governor
TO-BE-FROM-LOOSING ONE to-be-releasing
15 Now at [that] feast the governor was wont to release unto the people a prisoner, whom they would.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
desmion on desmios hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m
to-THE
THRONG
BOUND-one prisoner de de
Conj
WHOM
THEY-WILLED they-would
NA
27:16 eicon
echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tote desmion epishmon legomenon tote desmios episEmos legO

Adv n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
barabban barabbas
n_ Acc Sg m
16 And they had then a notable prisoner, called Barabbas.
THEY-HAD
YET then
BOUND-one prisoner oun oun

Conj
ON-SIGNED notorious eipen legO
beING-said
Jesus
Bar-Abbas
27:17 sunhgmenwn
sunagO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
autois o autos ho
pilatos tina pilatos tis

n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-HAVING-TOGETHER-LED THEN them of-having-been-gathered of-them qelete thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
said
WH
to-them
NA
THE
NA
PILATE
ANY whom ? barabban h barabbas E

n_ Acc Sg m Part
17 Therefore when they were gathered together, Pilate said unto them, Whom will ye that I release unto you? Barabbas, or Jesus which is called Christ?
apolusw apoluO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
YE-ARE-WILLING I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-releasing to-ye ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
Jesus
THE
Bar-Abbas
OR
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
legomenon legO
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
THE
beING-said one-being-said
ANOINTED Christ fqonon paredwkan phthonos paradidOmi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
27:18 hdei
eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
gar oti dia gar hoti dia

Conj Conj Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
18 For he knew that for envy they had delivered him.
he-HAD-PERCEIVED for he-was-aware
that
THRU ENVY because-of autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THEY-BESIDE-GIVE Him they-give-up bhmatos apesteilen pros bEma apostellO pros

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
27:19 kaqhmenou
kathEmai
de de
Conj
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
OF-sittING
YET OF-him
ON
THE
platform dais soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
commissions dispatches kai tw kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg m
TOWARD him
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legousa legO
mhden mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg n
dikaiw ekeinw dikaios ekeinos

a_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m
19 When he was set down on the judgment seat, his wife sent unto him, saying, Have thou nothing to do with that just man: for I have suffered many things this day in a dream because of him.
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
sayING
NO-YET-ONE to-YOU nothing onar onar

ni other
AND
to-THE the
JUST-One just-man
that
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
gar epaqon gar paschO

shmeron kat sEmeron kata

Adv Prep
di dia
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
much
for
I-EMOTIONED toDAY I-suffered de de

Conj
according-to TRANCE THRU Him because-of kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
27:20 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi epeisan presbuteros peithO

a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous ina ochlos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
SENIORS elders de de
Conj
PERSUADE
THE
THRONGS
THAT
20 But the chief priests and elders persuaded the multitude that they should ask Barabbas, and destroy Jesus.
aithswntai aiteO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
barabban ton barabbas ho

ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
apoleswsin apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING THE
Bar-Abbas
THE
YET JESUS
27:21 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hgemwn hEgemOn
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois tina autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg m
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
answerING
YET THE
LEADer governor
said
to-them
ANY which ?
YE-ARE-WILLING FROM
21 The governor answered and said unto them, Whether of the twain will ye that I release unto you? They said, Barabbas.
AV
Matthew 27
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
apolusw apoluO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
barabban barabbas
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
TWO
I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-releasing to-ye autois o autos ho

THE
YET THEY-say
THE
Bar-Abbas
27:22 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pilatos ti pilatos tis

n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
PILATE
ANY what ?
THEN I-SHALL-BE-DOING JESUS
THE
22 Pilate saith unto them, What shall I do then with Jesus which is called Christ? [They] all say unto him, Let him be crucified.
legomenon legO
criston legousin christos legO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
staurwqhtw stauroO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
Conj
THEY-ARE-sayING ALL
LET-Him-BE-BEING-impalED let-him-be-being-crucified ! epoihsen oi poieO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m
27:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar kakon gar kakos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
perissws perissOs
Adv
THE
YET he-AVERRed
ANY what ?
for
EVIL
He-DOES
THE-ones the
YET exceedingly
23 And the governor said, Why, what evil hath he done? But they cried out the more, saying, Let him be crucified.
ekrazon krazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
staurwqhtw stauroO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
CRIED they-cried
sayING
LET-Him-BE-BEING-impalED let-him-be-being-crucified ! de de
Conj
27:24 idwn
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos oti ouden pilatos hoti oudeis

n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg n
wfelei OpheleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
alla mallon alla mallon

Conj Adv
PERCEIVING
YET THE
PILATE
that
NOT-YET-ONE it-IS-benefitING but nothing apeniyato aponiptO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
RATHER
WH
qorubos ginetai thorubos ginomai

labwn lambanO
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
katenanti
24 When Pilate saw that he could prevail nothing, but [that] rather a tumult was made, he took water, and washed [his] hands before the multitude, saying, I am innocent of the blood of this just person: see ye [to it].
TUMULT
NA
IS-BECOMING is-occurring tou ho
GETTING
water
he-FROM-WASHES THE he-washes-off aqwos athOos

a_ Nom Sg m
HANDS
apenanti apenanti
Adv
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
legwn legO
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
t_ Gen Sg m
FROM-IN-INSTEAD in-front-of
OF-THE the
THRONG
sayING
UN-PENAL innocent
I-AM
FROM THE
aimatos toutou umeis haima houtos humeis

n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg m pp 2 Nom Pl
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
BLOOD
OF-this-One of-this-man
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-VIEWING shall-be-seeing-to-it pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
25 Then answered all the people, and said, His blood [be] on us, and on our children.
AND
answerING
EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
said
THE
BLOOD
OF-Him
ef epi
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai epi ta kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ON
US
AND
ON
THE
offsprings children
OF-US
27:26 tote apelusen

tote
Adv
apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ton autos ho

pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
barabban ton barabbas ho

de de
Conj
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
fragellwsas phragelloO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
then
he-FROM-LOOSES to-them he-releases ina hina

Conj
THE
Bar-Abbas
THE
YET JESUS
WHIPPing
26 . Then released he Barabbas unto them: and when he had scourged Jesus, he delivered [him] to be crucified.
paredwken paradidOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
staurwqh stauroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
he-BESIDE-GIVES THAT He-MAY-BE-BEING-impalED he-gives-over-him he-may-be-being-crucified
27:27 tote oi
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
stratiwtai tou stratiOtEs ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
hgemonos paralabontes ton hEgemOn paralambanO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
then
THE
WARriors soldiers
OF-THE
LEADer governor olhn holos

a_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
JESUS
INTO
27 Then the soldiers of the governor took Jesus into the common hall, and gathered unto him the whole band [of soldiers].
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
praitwrion sunhgagon praitOrion sunagO

n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
speiran speira
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
PRETORIUM
TOGETHER-LED ON gathered
Him
WHOLE
THE
BAND squadron
AV
Matthew 27
27:28 kai ekdusantes auton

kai
Conj
ekduO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autos
pp Acc Sg m
clamuda kokkinhn perieqhkan chlamus kokkinos peritithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
28 And they stripped him, and put on him a scarlet robe.
AND
OUT-SLIPPing stripping
Him
MANTLE
scarlet
THEY-ABOUT-PLACE to-Him they-place-about him epeqhkan epitithEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
27:29 kai plexantes

kai
Conj
plekO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
stefanon ex stephanos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
akanqwn akantha
n_ Gen Pl f
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
kefalhs kephalE
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
BRAIDing
WREATH
OUT OF-POINT-FLOWERS THEY-ON-PLACE ON of-thorns they-place-on dexia dexios

a_ Dat Sg f
THE
HEAD
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kalamon en kai kalamos en

Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai gonupethsantes emprosqen kai gonupeteO emprosthen

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep
29 And when they had platted a crown of thorns, they put [it] upon his head, and a reed in his right hand: and they bowed the knee before him, and mocked him, saying, Hail, King of the Jews!
OF-Him
AND
REED
IN
THE
RIGHT right-hand
OF-Him
AND
KNEE-FALLing falling-on-their-knees basileu twn basileus ho

n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
IN-TOWARD-PLACE in-front-of ioudaiwn ioudaios

a_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
enepaixan autw empaizO autos

legontes legO
caire chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-Him him
THEY-IN-sport they-scoff-at
to-Him him
sayING
BE-JOYING KING ! be-you-rejoicing ! elabon lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews eis eis

Prep
30 And they spit upon him, and took the reed, and smote him on the head.
27:30 kai emptusantes eis

kai
Conj
emptuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kalamon kai etupton kalamos kai tuptO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
IN-SPITTing spitting-in
INTO Him
THEY-GOT
THE
REED
AND
THEY-BEAT(past) INTO beat(past)
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn autou kephalE autos

THE
HEAD
OF-Him
27:31 kai ote enepaixan autw

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
empaizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
exedusan ekduO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
clamuda kai enedusan chlamus kai enduO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
when
THEY-IN-sport they-scoff-at imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
to-Him him autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THEY-OUT-SLIP Him they-strip kai aphgagon kai apagO

THE of-the auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
MANTLE
AND
THEY-IN-SLIP put-on
31 And after that they had mocked him, they took the robe off from him, and put his own raiment on him, and led him away to crucify [him].
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
staurwsai stauroO
vn Aor Act
Him
THE
GARMENTS OF-Him
AND
THEY-FROM-LED Him led-away
INTO THE
TO-impale to-crucify
32 And as they came out, they found a man of Cyrene, Simon by name: him they compelled to bear his cross.
27:32 exercomenoi
exerchomai
de de
Conj
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
anqrwpon kurhnaion onomati simwna touton anthrOpos kurEnaios onoma simOn houtos
n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m
OUT-COMING coming-out hggareusan ina aggareuO hina

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
YET THEY-FOUND human
CYRENIAN
to-NAME
SIMON
this-one this-man
arh airO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

THEY-DRAFT they-conscript
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING THE he-should-be-picking-up eis eis

Prep
pale cross
OF-Him
27:33 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
legomenon legO
golgoqa o golgotha hos

n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kraniou kranion
n_ Gen Sg n
33 . And when they were come unto a place called Golgotha, that is to say, a place of a skull,
AND
COMING
INTO PLACE
beING-said
GOLGOTHA
WHICH
IS
OF-SKULL
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
PLACE
beING-said
27:34 edwkan
didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
piein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
meta colhs meta cholE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
memigmenon mignumi
kai kai
Conj
THEY-GIVE
to-Him him ouk ou

Part Neg
TO-BE-DRINKING WINE
WITH
BILE
HAVING-been-MIXED AND
34 They gave him vinegar to drink mingled with gall: and when he had tasted [thereof], he would not drink.
geusamenos geuomai
hqelhsen piein thelO pinO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
TASTing
NOT
He-WILLS
TO-BE-DRINKING
27:35 staurwsantes de
stauroO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
diemerisanto ta diamerizO ho
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ballontes ballO
impaling crucifying
YET Him
THEY-THRU-PART they-divide
THE
GARMENTS OF-Him
CASTING
35 And they crucified him, and parted his garments, casting lots: that it might be fulfilled which was spoken by the prophet, They parted my
AV
Matthew 27
klhron klEros
n_ Acc Sg m
garments among them, and upon my vesture did they cast lots.
LOT
27:36 kai kaqhmenoi

kai
Conj
kathEmai
ethroun tEreO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ekei ekei
Adv
36 And sitting down watched him there;
they
AND
sittING
THEY-KEPT
Him
there
27:37 kai epeqhkan

kai
Conj
epitithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
epanw ths epanO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aitian autou aitia autos

AND
THEY-ON-PLACE ON-UP they-place-on above outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
OF-THE the
HEAD
OF-Him
THE
cause charge
OF-Him
37 And set up over his head his accusation written, THIS IS JESUS THE KING OF THE JEWS.
gegrammenhn graphO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
HAVING-been-WRITTEN this
IS
JESUS
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews dexiwn kai dexios kai

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
38 Then were there two thieves crucified with him, one on the right hand, and another on the left.
27:38 tote staurountai

tote
Adv
stauroO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
lhstai lEstEs
n_ Nom Pl m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
then
ARE-beING-impalED TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith are-being-crucified him ex ek

Prep
TWO
ROBBERS
ONE
AND
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
euwnumwn euOnumos
a_ Gen Pl m
ONE
OUT OF-left of-left(p) de de

Conj
27:39 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
paraporeuomenoi eblasfhmoun auton paraporeuomai blasphEmeO autos

vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
kinountes kineO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kefalas kephalE
n_ Acc Pl f
39 And they that passed by reviled him, wagging their heads,
THE-ones the-ones autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
YET BESIDE-GOING going-by
HARM-AVERRED blasphemed
Him
STIRRING wagging
THE
HEADS
OF-them
27:40 kai legontes

kai
Conj
legO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kataluwn kataluO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
trisin treis
n_ Dat Pl f
AND
sayING
THE
One-DOWN-LOOSING THE one-demolishing seauton ei seautou ei

pf 3 Acc Sg m Cond
TEMPLE
AND
IN
THREE
hmerais oikodomwn hEmera oikodomeO

swson sOzO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
40 And saying, Thou that destroyest the temple, and buildest [it] in three days, save thyself. If thou be the Son of God, come down from the cross.
DAYS
NA
HOME-BUILDING building kai kai

Conj
SAVE save-you ! apo apo

Prep
YOURself
IF
SON
YOU-ARE
OF-THE
God
katabhqi katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
staurou stauros
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
BE-DOWN-STEPPING FROM THE be-you-descending !

WH
pale cross arciereis archiereus

n_ Nom Pl m
27:41 omoiws
homoiOs
Adv
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
empaizontes meta twn empaizO meta ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m
41 Likewise also the chief priests mocking [him], with the scribes and elders, said,
LIKE-AS likewise
AND also
THE
chief-SACRED-ones IN-sportING chief-priests scoffing
WITH
THE
grammatewn kai presbuterwn elegon grammateus kai presbuteros legO

n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
WRITers scribes
AND
SENIORS elders eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
said
27:42 allous eswsen

allos
a_ Acc Pl m
sOzO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
swsai basileus israhl sOzO basileus israEl

vn Aor Act n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
others
He-SAVES
self himself
NOT
He-IS-ABLE he-can tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
TO-SAVE KING
of-ISRAEL of-Israel ep epi

Prep
42 He saved others; himself he cannot save. If he be the King of Israel, let him now come down from the cross, and we will believe him.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
katabatw katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
nun apo nun apo

Adv Prep
staurou kai pisteusomen stauros kai pisteuO

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 1 Pl
He-IS
LET-Him-BE-DOWN-STEPPING NOW FROM THE let-him-be-descending !
pale cross
AND
WE-SHALL-BE-BELIEVING ON
AV
Matthew 27
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
27:43 pepoiqen
peithO
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
rusasqw rhuomai
vm Aor midD 3 Sg
nun ei nun ei
Adv Cond
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
He-HAS-confidence ON
THE
God
LET-Him-rescue let-him-rescue ! uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
NOW IF
He-IS-WILLING Him
43 He trusted in God; let him deliver him now, if he will have him: for he said, I am the Son of God.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gar oti qeou gar hoti theos

Conj Conj n_ Gen Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
He-said
for
that
OF-God
I-AM
SON
27:44 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
d de
Conj
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
lhstai lEstEs
n_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sustaurwqentes sustauroO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
44 The thieves also, which were crucified with him, cast the same in his teeth.
THE
YET SAME
AND also
THE
ROBBERS
THE
BEING-TOGETHER-impalED TOGETHER ones-being-crucified-together togetherwith
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
wneidizon auton oneidizO autos

to-Him him
REPROACHED
Him
27:45 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
ekths hektos
a_ Gen Sg f
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
skotos skotos
n_ Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi epi
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
ews heOs
Conj
45 Now from the sixth hour there was darkness over all the land unto the ninth hour.
FROM YET SIXth
HOUR
DARKness
it-BECAME became
ON EVERY onover entire
THE
LAND
TILL
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
enaths enatos
a_ Gen Sg f
HOUR
OF-NINth ninth de de
Conj
27:46 peri
peri
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enathn wran enatos hOra

WH
ebohsen
NA
anebohsen anaboaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT YET THE
NINth
HOUR
WH WH NA
UP-IMPLORES exclaims hli Eli

Hebrew
NA
THE
JESUS
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh legwn mega legO

a_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
elwi elwi
hli Eli
Hebrew
lema sabacqani lema sabachthani

Aramaic Aramaic
46 And about the ninth hour Jesus cried with a loud voice, saying, Eli, Eli, lama sabachthani? that is to say, My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me?
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud tout houtos

pd Nom Sg n
sayING
ELI
ELI
LEMA
SABACHTHANI ( Aramaic ) sabachthani me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qee theos
n_ Voc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
qee theos
n_ Voc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
egkatelipes egkataleipO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
this
IS
God !
OF-ME
God !
OF-ME
THAT ANY why ?
ME
YOU-abandonED you-did-forsake oti hlian hoti Elias

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
47 Some of them that stood there, when they heard [that], said, This [man] calleth for Elias.
27:47 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ekei esthkotwn ekei histEmi

akousantes elegon akouO legO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
ANY some fwnei phOneO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YET OF-THE-ones there of-the-ones outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
HEARing hearing-it
said
that
ELIAS Elijah
IS-SOUNDING this-One is-summoning this-man
27:48 kai euqews dramwn

kai
Conj
eutheOs
Adv
trechO
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai labwn kai lambanO

spoggon spoggos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
immediately
RUNNING
ONE
OUT OF-them
AND
GETTING
SPONGE
48 And straightway one of them ran, and took a spunge, and filled [it] with vinegar, and put [it] on a reed, and gave him to drink.
plhsas plEthO (pimplEmi)

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
te te
Part
oxous oxos
n_ Gen Sg n
kai periqeis kai peritithEmi

kalamw epotizen auton kalamos potizO autos

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
FILLing filling-it
BESIDES vinegar
AND
WH
ABOUT-PLACING sticking-it-on
NA
to-REED reed afes aphiEmi
DRINKizED gave-to-drink idwmen eidO
Him
27:49 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
eipan
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ei ei
Cond
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
49 The rest said, Let be, let us see whether Elias will come to save him.
THE
YET rest rest(p)
said
FROM-LET let-off-you !
WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING IF
AV
Matthew 27
ercetai erchomai
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
swswn sOzO
vp Fut Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
WH
allos de labwn logchn enuxen
WH
WH
WH
WH
IS-COMING
WH WH WH
ELIAS Elijah
WH
SAVING
WH WH
Him
WH WH
autou thn pleuran kai exhlqen udwr kai aima
27:50 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
palin kraxas palin krazO

Adv vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh afhken mega aphiEmi

a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
50 . Jesus, when he had cried again with a loud voice, yielded up the ghost.
THE
YET JESUS
AGAIN
CRYing
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud
FROM-LETS lets-off
THE
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
spirit
WH
27:51 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
katapetasma tou katapetasma ho

naou naos
n_ Gen Sg m
escisqh schizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ap
AND
NA
DOWN-EXPANDer curtain duo duo

ni numeral
OF-THE
TEMPLE
IS-SPLIT is-rent eseisqh seiO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
51 And, behold, the veil of the temple was rent in twain from the top to the bottom; and the earth did quake, and the rocks rent;
ap apo
Prep
anwqen ews katw eis anOthen heOs katO eis

Adv Conj Adv Prep
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
FROM
UP-PLACE above
TILL
DOWN bottom
INTO TWO
AND
THE
LAND earth
IS-QUAKED
AND
THE
petrai escisqhsan petra schizO

n_ Nom Pl f vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ROCKS
ARE-SPLIT are-rent mnhmeia mnEmeion

n_ Nom Pl n
27:52 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
anewcqhsan anoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
kai polla kai polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
swmata twn sOma ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl m
52 And the graves were opened; and many bodies of the saints which slept arose,
AND
THE
memorial-vaults WERE-UP-OPENED AND tombs were-opened agiwn hagios

a_ Gen Pl m
MANY
BODIES
OF-THE
kekoimhmenwn koimaO
hgerqhsan egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
HAVING-been-reposED HOLY-ones WERE-ROUSED having-been-put-to-repose saints
27:53 kai exelqontes

kai
Conj
exerchomai
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
mnhmeiwn mnEmeion
n_ Gen Pl n
meta thn meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
egersin autou egersis autos

AND
OUT-COMING coming-out eis eis

Prep
OUT OF-THE
memorial-vaults after tombs polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
ROUSing
OF-Him
53 And came out of the graves after his resurrection, and went into the holy city, and appeared unto many.
eishlqon eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agian hagios
a_ Acc Sg f
kai enefanisqhsan pollois kai emphanizO polus

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Dat Pl m
THEY-INTO-CAME INTO THE they-entered
HOLY
city
AND
ARE-IN-APPEARizED are-disclosed met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
to-MANY
27:54 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ekatontarcos kai oi hekatontarchEs kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
thrountes tEreO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET HUNDRED-chief centurion idontes eidO

AND
THE-ones the-ones
WITH him
WH
KEEPING
NA
THE
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
seismon kai ta seismos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl n
ginomena
genomena ginomai
54 Now when the centurion, and they that were with him, watching Jesus, saw the earthquake, and those things that were done, they feared greatly, saying, Truly this was the Son of God.
JESUS
PERCEIVING
THE
QUAKing earthquake
AND
THE
BECOMING(p) occurrences uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
efobhqhsan sfodra phobeO sphodra

vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Adv
legontes legO
alhqws qeou alEthOs theos

Adv n_ Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
WERE-afraid
VEHEMENT sayING tremendously de de

Conj
TRUly
OF-God
SON
WAS
this-One this-one aitines hostis

pr Nom Pl f
55 And many women were there beholding afar off, which followed Jesus from Galilee, ministering unto him:
27:55 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ekei gunaikes pollai apo ekei gunE polus apo

Adv n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f Prep
makroqen qewrousai makrothen theOreO

Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
WERE
YET there
WOMEN
MANY
FROM FAR-PLACE afar
beholdING
WHO-ANY who-any
AV
Matthew 27
hkolouqhsan tw akoloutheO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias diakonousai autw galilaia diakoneO autos

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f pp Dat Sg m
follow
to-THE the ais hos

pr Dat Pl f
JESUS
FROM THE
GALILEE
THRU-SERVING dispensing
to-Him
27:56 en
en
Prep
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh kai maria magdalEnE kai maria

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
IN WHOM among
WAS
MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
MARY
THE
OF-THE
56 Among which was Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James and Joses, and the mother of Zebedee's children.
iakwbou kai iwshf iakObos kai iOsEph

n_ Gen Sg m Conj ni proper
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
zebedaiou zebedaios
n_ Gen Sg m
JACOBUS James
AND
of-JOSEPH MOTHER of-Joseph de de

Conj
AND
THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
SONS
OF-ZEBEDEE
27:57 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos plousios apo anthrOpos plousios apo

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Prep
arimaqaias arimathaia
n_ Gen Sg f
CAME
human
RICH
FROM ARIMATHEA
57 . When the even was come, there came a rich man of Arimathaea, named Joseph, who also himself was Jesus'disciple:
tounoma tounoma
Adv Con
iwshf os iOsEph hos

ni proper pr Nom Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
emaqhteuqh mathEteuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE-NAME JOSEPH named
WHO
AND also tw ho
SAME shimself
was-made-LEARNer to-THE was-made-disciple
JESUS
27:58 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
pilatw hthsato to pilatos aiteO ho

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Dat Sg m
this-one this-one ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE the
PILATE
REQUESTS
THE
BODY
OF-THE
58 He went to Pilate, and begged the body of Jesus. Then Pilate commanded the body to be delivered.
tote o tote ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos ekeleusen apodoqhnai pilatos keleuO apodidOmi

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
JESUS
then
THE
PILATE
ORDERS
TO-BE-FROM-GIVEN to-be-given-up o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
27:59 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
iwshf enetulixen auto iOsEph entulissO autos

ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
59 And when Joseph had taken the body, he wrapped it in a clean linen cloth,
AND
GETTING
THE
BODY
THE
JOSEPH
IN-FOLDS folds-up
it
IN
sindoni sindOn
n_ Dat Sg f
kaqara katharos
a_ Dat Sg f
linen-wrapper clean
27:60 kai eqhken

kai
Conj
tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kainw kainos
a_ Dat Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
elatomhsen latomeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
PLACES
it
IN
THE
NEW
OF-him
memorial-vault WHICH tomb th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
he-quarriES
60 And laid it in his own new tomb, which he had hewn out in the rock: and he rolled a great stone to the door of the sepulchre, and departed.
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
petra petra
n_ Dat Sg f
kai proskulisas liqon kai proskuliO lithos

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
megan mega
a_ Acc Sg m
qura thura
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
IN
THE
ROCK
AND
TOWARD-ROLLing rolling-on
STONE
GREAT large
to-THE
DOOR
OF-THE
memorial-vault tomb
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he-FROM-CAME he-came-away
27:61 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ekei mariam h ekei maria ho

Adv ni proper t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh kai h magdalEnE kai ho

n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f
allh allos
a_ Nom Sg f
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
WAS
YET there
MARIAM Mary
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
THE
other
MARY
61 And there was Mary Magdalene, and the other Mary, sitting over against the sepulchre.
kaqhmenai kathEmai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f
apenanti apenanti
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tafou taphos
n_ Gen Sg m
sittING
FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE in-front-of the de de

Conj
sepulcher
27:62 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
meta thn meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
paraskeuhn paraskeuE
n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW WHICH-ANY IS which-any
after
THE
preparation
62 Now the next day, that followed the day of the preparation, the chief priests and Pharisees came together unto Pilate,
AV
sunhcqhsan sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi pros pharisaios pros

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
pilaton pilatos
n_ Acc Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER-LED THE were-gathered
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests emnhsqhmen mnaomai

vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
THE
PHARISEES
TOWARD PILATE
27:63 legontes
legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
oti ekeinos hoti ekeinos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
planos planos
a_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sayING
master ! Lord !
WE-ARE-REMINDED that
that-One that
THE
STRAYer deceiver
said
63 Saying, Sir, we remember that that deceiver said, while he was yet alive, After three days I will rise again.
eti eti
Adv
zwn zaO
meta treis meta treis

Prep n_ Acc Pl f
hmeras egeiromai hEmera egeirO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
STILL LIVING
after
THREE
DAYS
I-SHALL-BE-beING-ROUSED
27:64 keleuson oun

keleuO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
oun
Conj
asfalisqhnai asphalizO
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tafon taphos
n_ Acc Sg m
ews ths heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
triths hmeras tritos hEmera

ORDER order-you ! mhpote mEpote

Adv
THEN TO-BE-UN-TOTTERED THE to-be-secured elqontes erchomai

sepulcher
NA
TILL
OF-THE the
third
DAY
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kleywsin kleptO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
64 Command therefore that the sepulchre be made sure until the third day, lest his disciples come by night, and steal him away, and say unto the people, He is risen from the dead: so the last error shall be worse than the first.
NO-?-when COMING lest-at-some-time eipwsin legO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
LEARNers disciples hgerqh egeirO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-Him
SHOULD-BE-stealING Him
AND
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
kai estai kai eimi

Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
THEY-MAY-BE-sayING to-THE may-be-saying h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
PEOPLE
He-WAS-ROUSED FROM THE
DEAD-ones AND dead-ones
SHALL-BE
escath planh eschatos planE

a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
ceirwn cheirOn
a_ Nom Sg f Cmp
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
prwths prOtos
a_ Gen Sg f
THE
LAST
STRAYing deception
WORSE worse-than
OF-THE the
BEFORE-most first koustwdian koustOdia

n_ Acc Sg f
27:65 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
pilatos ecete pilatos echO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
65 Pilate said unto them, Ye have a watch: go your way, make [it] as sure as ye can.
AVERRed
to-them
THE
PILATE
YE-ARE-HAVING CUSTODIAN (Latin) BE-UNDER-LEADING detail be-ye-going-away !
asfalisasqe ws oidate asphalizO hOs eidO

vm Aor midD 2 Pl Adv vi Perf Act 2 Pl
UN-TOTTER secure-ye !
AS
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ye-are-aware poreuqentes poreuomai

27:66 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hsfalisanto ton asphalizO ho

vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
tafon taphos
n_ Acc Sg m
sfragisantes ton sphragizO ho

66 So they went, and made the sepulchre sure, sealing the stone, and setting a watch.
THE
YET BEING-GONE
THEY-UN-TOTTER they-secure
THE
sepulcher
SEALing
THE
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
meta ths meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
koustwdias koustOdia
n_ Gen Sg f
STONE
WITH
THE
CUSTODIAN (Latin) detail
AV
Matthew 28
28:1 oye
opse
Adv
de de
Conj
sabbatwn sabbaton
n_ Gen Pl n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epifwskoush eis epiphOskO eis

vp Pres Act Dat Sg f Prep
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
sabbatwn sabbaton
n_ Gen Pl n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
evening YET OF-SABBATHS to-THE

WH NA
ON-LIGHTING lighting-up
INTO ONE one-day allh allos

a_ Nom Sg f
OF-SABBATHS CAME
. In the end of the sabbath, as it began to dawn toward the first [day] of the week, came Mary Magdalene and the other Mary to see the sepulchre.
maria
mariam maria
ni proper
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh kai h magdalEnE kai ho

maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
qewrhsai ton theOreO ho

MARIAM Mary tafon taphos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
THE
other
MARY
TO-behold
THE
sepulcher
28:2 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
seismos egeneto seismos ginomai

n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
gar kuriou gar kurios

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
katabas katabainO
AND
BE-PERCEIVING QUAKing lo ! earthquake
BECAME occurred
GREAT
MESSENGER for
OF-Master of-Lord
DOWN-STEPPing descending epanw epanO

Adv
ex ek
Prep
ouranou kai proselqwn ouranos kai proserchomai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
apekulisen ton apokuliO ho

liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ekaqhto kai kathEmai

Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
And, behold, there was a great earthquake: for the angel of the Lord descended from heaven, and came and rolled back the stone from the door, and sat upon it.
OUT OF-heaven
AND
FROM-ROLLS rolls-away
THE
STONE
AND
sat
ON-UP upon
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-it him it
28:3 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eidea eidea
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ws astraph hOs astrapE

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
enduma enduma
n_ Nom Sg n
His countenance was like lightning, and his raiment white as snow:
WAS
YET THE
PERCEPtion OF-him
AS
GLEAM-FLING AND lightning
THE
IN-SLIP apparel
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
leukon leukos
a_ Nom Sg n
ws ciwn hOs chiOn

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
OF-him
WHITE
AS
SNOW
28:4 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
fobou phobos
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eseisqhsan oi seiO ho
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
thrountes tEreO
kai kai
Conj
And for fear of him the keepers did shake, and became as dead [men].
FROM YET THE
FEAR
OF-him
ARE-QUAKED
THE
ones-KEEPING ones-keeping
AND
egenhqhsan ws nekroi ginomai hOs nekros

vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Adv a_ Nom Pl m
WERE-BECOME
AS
DEAD-ones dead-ones de de
Conj
28:5 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
gunaixin mh gunE mE
n_ Dat Pl f Part Neg
answerING
YET THE
MESSENGER said
to-THE
WOMEN
NO
And the angel answered and said unto the women, Fear not ye: for I know that ye seek Jesus, which was crucified.
fobeisqe phobeO
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
gar oti ihsoun gar hoti iEsous

Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
estaurwmenon stauroO
BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing ! zhteite zEteO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for I-am-aware
that
JESUS
THE
One-HAVING-been-impalED one-having-been-crucified
YE-ARE-SEEKING
28:6 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
wde hgerqh hOde egeirO

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
gar kaqws gar kathOs

Conj Adv
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
idete eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
He is not here: for he is risen, as he said. Come, see the place where the Lord lay.
NOT
He-IS
here
He-WAS-ROUSED for
according-AS He-said
HITHER hither-ye !
BE-PERCEIVING be-ye-perceiving !
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
ekeito keimai
THE
PLACE
THE-?-where He-LAY wheree
AV
Matthew 28
28:7 kai tacu

kai
Conj
tachus
Adv
poreuqeisai poreuomai
vp Aor pasD Nom Pl f
eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

oti hgerqh hoti egeirO

AND
SWIFTLY BEING-GONE
say say-ye !
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
that
He-WAS-ROUSED
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
kai idou kai idou

proagei proagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
And go quickly, and tell his disciples that he is risen from the dead; and, behold, he goeth before you into Galilee; there shall ye see him: lo, I have told you.
FROM THE
DEAD-ones AND dead-ones oyesqe optomai

vi Fut midD 2 Pl
BE-PERCEIVING He-IS-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) lo ! he-is-preceding ye idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
INTO THE
GALILEE
ekei auton ekei autos

Adv pp Acc Sg m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
there
Him
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING BE-PERCEIVING I-said ye-shall-be-seeing lo ! I-told tacu tachus

Adv
to-YOU(p) ye meta fobou meta phobos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
28:8 kai apelqousai

kai
Conj
aperchomai
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
kai caras kai chara

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
AND
SWIFTLY FROM THE
memorial-vault WITH tomb maqhtais autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Dat Pl m
FEAR
AND
JOY
And they departed quickly from the sepulchre with fear and great joy; and did run to bring his disciples word.
megalhs edramon mega trechO

a_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
apaggeilai apaggellO
vn Aor Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pp Gen Sg m
GREAT
THEY-RAN
TO-FROM-MESSAGE to-THE to-report ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
28:9 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
uphnthsen autais legwn hupantaO autos legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
cairete chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
de de
Conj
AND
BE-PERCEIVING JESUS lo !
UNDER-meets meets
to-them them
sayING
BE-JOYING THE be-ye-rejoicing !
YET
And as they went to tell his disciples, behold, Jesus met them, saying, All hail. And they came and held him by the feet, and worshipped him.
proselqousai proserchomai
ekrathsan autou krateO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
kai prosekunhsan autw kai proskuneO autos

ones-TOWARD-COMING HOLD approaching they-hold
OF-Him
THE
FEET
AND
THEY-worship
to-Him him upagete hupagO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
10 Then said Jesus unto them, Be not afraid: go tell my brethren that they go into Galilee, and there shall they see me.
28:10 tote legei

tote
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autais o autos ho
pp Dat Pl f t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
fobeisqe phobeO
then
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
NO
BE-UNDER-LEADING be-ye-going-away ! eis eis

Prep
apaggeilate tois apaggellO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
adelfois mou adelphos egO

ina hina
Conj
apelqwsin aperchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
brothers brethren me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-ME
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE they-may-be-coming-away
galilaian kakei galilaia kakei

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Con
oyontai optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
GALILEE
AND-there ME
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING they-shall-be-seeing de de
Conj
28:11 poreuomenwn
poreuomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl f
autwn idou autos idou

pp Gen Pl f vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
koustwdias koustOdia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-GOING
YET OF-them
BE-PERCEIVING ANY lo ! some aphggeilan apaggellO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-THE
CUSTODIAN (Latin) detail apanta ta hapas ho

a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Pl n
11 . Now when they were going, behold, some of the watch came into the city, and shewed unto the chief priests all the things that were done.
elqontes erchomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
n_ Dat Pl m
COMING
INTO THE
city
FROM-MESSAGE to-THE report
chief-SACRED-ones ALL(emph.) chief-priests
THE
genomena ginomai
BECOMING(p) things-occurring
28:12 kai sunacqentes

kai
Conj
sunagO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn sumboulion presbuteros sumboulion

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
te te
Part
AND
BEING-TOGETHER-LED WITH being-gathered arguria argurion

n_ Acc Pl n
THE
SENIORS elders tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
TOGETHER-COUNSEL BESIDES consultation stratiwtais stratiOtEs

n_ Dat Pl m
12 And when they were assembled with the elders, and had taken counsel, they gave large money unto the soldiers,
labontes lambanO
ikana hikanos
a_ Acc Pl n
edwkan didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
GETTING holding
SILVERS enough THEY-GIVE pieces-of-silver considerable
to-THE
WARriors soldiers
AV
Matthew 28
28:13 legontes
legO
eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

nuktos elqontes nux erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
sayING
say say-ye ! hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
that
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
OF-NIGHT
COMING
13 Saying, Say ye, His disciples came by night, and stole him [away] while we slept.
ekleyan auton kleptO autos

koimwmenwn koimaO
steal
Him
OF-US
reposING
28:14 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
akousqh akouO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
hgemonos hmeis hEgemOn hEmeis

n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Nom Pl
14 And if this come to the governor's ears, we will persuade him, and secure you.
AND
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-BEING-HEARD this

NA
ON
THE
LEADer governor
WE
peisomen peithO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai umas kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
amerimnous poihsomen amerimnos poieO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Pl
SHALL-BE-PERSUADING
him
AND
NA
YOU(p) ye
UN-anxious without-worry arguria argurion

n_ Acc Pl n
WE-SHALL-BE-makING
28:15 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
labontes lambanO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
epoihsan ws edidacqhsan poieO hOs didaskO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
YET GETTING
THE
SILVERS THEY-DO pieces-of-silver para para

Prep
AS
THEY-WERE-TAUGHT
15 So they took the money, and did as they were taught: and this saying is commonly reported among the Jews until this day.
kai diefhmisqh kai diaphEmizO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ioudaiois mecri ths ioudaios mechri ho

a_ Dat Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg f
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
AND
IS-THRU-AVERizED THE is-blazed-abroad
saying word
this
BESIDE JUDA-ans Jews
UNTO
THE
toDAY
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
DAY
28:16 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
endeka maqhtai eporeuqhsan eis hendeka mathEtEs poreuomai eis

ni numeral n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian eis galilaia eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET ONE-TEN eleven ou hou

Adv
LEARNers disciples
WERE-GONE went ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
INTO THE
GALILEE
INTO THE
16 . Then the eleven disciples went away into Galilee, into a mountain where Jesus had appointed them.
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
etaxato tassO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
mountain
where SETS arranges-with
to-them them auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE
JESUS
28:17 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
prosekunhsan oi proskuneO ho
de de
Conj
edistasan distazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
17 And when they saw him, they worshipped him: but some doubted.
AND
PERCEIVING
Him
THEY-worship
THE
YET THEY-TWO-STAND they-hesitate edoqh didOmi

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
18 And Jesus came and spake unto them, saying, All power is given unto me in heaven and in earth.
28:18 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
elalhsen autois legwn laleO autos legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching pasa pas

a_ Nom Sg f
THE
JESUS
TALKS speaks
to-them
sayING
WAS-GIVEN
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
exousia en exousia en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
ouranw kai epi ouranos kai epi

n_ Dat Sg m Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
to-ME
EVERY all
authority
IN
heaven
AND
ON
THE
LAND earth eqnh ethnos

n_ Acc Pl n
28:19 poreuqentes oun

poreuomai
oun
Conj
maqhteusate panta mathEteuO pas

vm Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
baptizontes autous baptizO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Pl m
BEING-GONE
THEN make-LEARNers disciple-ye ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ALL
THE
NATIONS
DIPizING baptizing
them
19 Go ye therefore, and teach all nations, baptizing them in the name of the Father, and of the Son, and of the Holy Ghost:
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
INTO THE
NAME
OF-THE
FATHER
AND
OF-THE
SON
AND
OF-THE
HOLY
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
spirit
AV
Matthew 28 - Mark 1
28:20 didaskontes autous threin

didaskO
autos
pp Acc Pl m
tEreO
vn Pres Act
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eneteilamhn umin entellomai humeis

vi Aor midD 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
kai kai
Conj
TEACHING
them
TO-BE-KEEPING ALL
as-much-as I-direct whatever pasas pas

a_ Acc Pl f
to-YOU(p) ye
AND
20 Teaching them to observe all things whatsoever I have commanded you: and, lo, I am with you alway, [even] unto the end of the world. Amen.
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras ews ths hEmera heOs ho

n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Gen Sg f
BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! sunteleias sunteleia

n_ Gen Sg f
WITH YOU(p) ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AM
ALL
THE
DAYS
TILL
OF-THE the
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-FINISH OF-THE conclusion
eon
AV
Mark 1
Mark
1:1 arch
archE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou ihsou euaggelion iEsous

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
NA
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
NA
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
. The beginning of the gospel of Jesus Christ, the Son of God;
ORIGINal beginning
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ hsaia Esaias

n_ Dat Sg m
SON
OF-God
1:2 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
profhth prophEtEs
n_ Dat Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN IN
THE
ISAIAH
THE
BEFORE-AVERer BE-PERCEIVING prophet lo ! os hos

pr Nom Sg m
As it is written in the prophets, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, which shall prepare thy way before thee.
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pro pro
Prep

I-AM-commissionING THE I-am-dispatching kataskeuasei kataskeuazO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
MESSENGER OF-ME
BEFORE face
OF-YOU
WHO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
WAY road en en
Prep
OF-YOU
1:3 fwnh
phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
bowntos boaO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f

odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
SOUND voice
OF-IMPLORING-one IN of-one-imploring tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
DESOLATE make-READY wilderness make-ready-ye ! autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
WAY road
OF-Master of-Lord
The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight.
euqeias poieite euthus poieO

a_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tribous tribos
n_ Acc Pl f
straight
BE-makING be-ye-making !
THE
WEAR (ways) OF-Him highways

WH
1:4 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
baptizwn baptizO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
NA
kai kai
Conj
BECAME came-to-be khrusswn kErussO

JOHN
THE
one-DIPizING one-baptizing afesin aphesis

n_ Acc Sg f
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness
AND
John did baptize in the wilderness, and preach the baptism of repentance for the remission of sins.
baptisma metanoias eis baptisma metanoia eis

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Prep
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
DIPism baptism
OF-after-MIND of-repentance pros pros

Prep
INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses pardon of-sins pasa pas

a_ Nom Sg f
1:5 kai exeporeueto

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ioudaia cwra ioudaia chOra

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
AND
OUT-WENT went-out
TOWARD him
EVERY entire
THE
JUDEA
SPACE province tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
THE
And there went out unto him all the land of Judaea, and they of Jerusalem, and were all baptized of him in the river of Jordan, confessing their sins.
ierosolumitai pantes ierosolumitEs pas

kai ebaptizonto kai baptizO

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
iordanh potamw iordanEs potamos

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
JERUSALEMites
ALL
AND
THEY-were-DIPizED by they-were-baptized
him
IN
THE
JORDAN
river
exomologoumenoi tas exomologeO ho

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f

THE
misses sins
OF-them
1:6 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs endedumenos iOannEs enduO

n_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Mid Nom Sg m
tricas kamhlou kai zwnhn thrix kamElos kai zOnE

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AND
WAS
THE
JOHN
HAVING-IN-SLIPPED HAIR having-dressed hairs autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OF-CAMEL
AND
GIRDle
And John was clothed with camel's hair, and with a girdle of a skin about his loins; and he did eat locusts and wild honey;
dermatinhn peri dermatinos peri

a_ Acc Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
osfun osphus
n_ Acc Sg f
kai esqiwn kai esthiO

akridas kai meli akris kai meli

n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Sg n
SKIN leather agrion agrios

a_ Acc Sg n
ABOUT THE
LOIN
OF-him
AND
EATING
LOCUSTS
AND
HONEY
FIELD wild
AV
Mark 1
1:7 kai ekhrussen

kai
Conj
kErussO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
ercetai erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

opisw opisO
Adv
AND
WH
he-PROCLAIMED sayING he-heralded

NA
IS-COMING
THE
One-STRONGER stronger-one kuyas kuptO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
OF-ME
BEHIND after ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
And preached, saying, There cometh one mightier than I after me, the latchet of whose shoes I am not worthy to stoop down and unloose.
mou
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
lusai luO
vn Aor Act
ME
OF-WHOM
NOT
I-AM
enough competent
BENDing stooping
TO-LOOSE THE
imanta himas
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
upodhmatwn autou hupodEma autos

n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg m
STRAP thong
OF-THE
sandals
OF-Him
NA
1:8 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ebaptisa umas baptizO humeis

vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
baptisei baptizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
DIPize baptize
YOU(p) ye
to-water
He
YET SHALL-BE-DIPizING YOU(p) shall-be-baptizing ye
I indeed have baptized you with water: but he shall baptize you with the Holy Ghost.
IN
pneumati agiw pneuma hagios

n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg n
spirit
HOLY
1:9 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep

hmerais hlqen hEmera erchomai

n_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
nazaret nazareth
ni proper
AND
IN
those
THE
DAYS
CAME
JESUS
FROM NAZARETH
. And it came to pass in those days, that Jesus came from Nazareth of Galilee, and was baptized of John in Jordan.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai ebaptisqh eis galilaia kai baptizO eis

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iordanhn upo iwannou iordanEs hupo iOannEs

n_ Acc Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
He-IS-DIPizED is-baptized ek ek
Prep
INTO THE
JORDAN
by
JOHN
1:10 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
anabainwn anabainO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
udatos eiden hudOr eidO

n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
scizomenous tous schizO ho

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
AND
straightway UP-STEPPING stepping-up
OUT OF-THE
water
he-PERCEIVED beING-SPLIT being-rent eis eis

Prep
THE
10 And straightway coming up out of the water, he saw the heavens opened, and the Spirit like a dove descending upon him:
ouranous kai to ouranos kai ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma ws peristeran katabainon pneuma hOs peristera katabainO

n_ Acc Sg n Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
heavens
AND
THE
WH
spirit
AS
NA
DOVE
DOWN-STEPPING INTO Him descending ek ek

Prep
1:11 kai fwnh

kai
Conj
egeneto
phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn su ouranos su
n_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
AND
SOUND voice uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
BECAME
OUT OF-THE
heavens
YOU
ARE
11 And there came a voice from heaven, [saying], Thou art my beloved Son, in whom I am well pleased.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
eudokhsa eudokeO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
IN
YOU
I-WELL-SEEM I-delight eis eis

Prep
1:12 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ekballei ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg f
12 And immediately the Spirit driveth him into the wilderness.
AND
straightway THE
spirit
Him
IS-OUT-CASTING INTO THE is-ejecting
DESOLATE wilderness
13 And he was there in the wilderness forty days, tempted of Satan; and was with the wild beasts; and the angels ministered unto him.
1:13 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
tesserakonta hmeras peirazomenos upo tesserakonta hEmera peirazO hupo

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
AND
He-WAS
IN
THE
DESOLATE FOUR-TY wilderness forty meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl n
DAYS
beING-triED
by
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
satana satanas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai hn kai eimi

Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
qhriwn thErion
n_ Gen Pl n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
SATAN (adversary) AND Satan
He-WAS
WITH
THE
WILD-BEASTS AND
THE
MESSENGERS
dihkonoun autw diakoneO autos

THRU-SERVED served
to-Him him
AV
Mark 1
1:14
WH
kai meta
WH
NA
meta de meta de
Prep Conj
NA
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paradoqhnai paradidOmi
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn hlqen iOannEs erchomai

after
YET
THE
TO-BE-BESIDE-GIVEN THE to-be-given-up to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
JOHN
CAME
14 . Now after that John was put in prison, Jesus came into Galilee, preaching the gospel of the kingdom of God,
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian khrusswn galilaia kErussO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
JESUS
INTO THE
GALILEE
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
WH WH NA NA
1:15
kai legwn
kai legwn kai legO

oti peplhrwtai o hoti plEroO ho

Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
sayING
that
HAS-been-FILLED has-been-fulfilled metanoeite metanoeO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
SEASON era
AND
15 And saying, The time is fulfilled, and the kingdom of God is at hand: repent ye, and believe the gospel.
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai pisteuete en kai pisteuO en

Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
HAS-NEARED THE has-drawn-near euaggeliw euaggelion

n_ Dat Sg n
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
BE-after-MINDING AND be-ye-repenting !
BE-BELIEVING be-ye-believing !
IN
THE
WELL-MESSAGE
1:16 kai paragwn

kai
Conj
paragO
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias eiden galilaia eidO

simwna simOn
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BESIDE-LEADING passing-by
BESIDE THE
SEA
OF-THE
GALILEE
He-PERCEIVED SIMON
16 Now as he walked by the sea of Galilee, he saw Simon and Andrew his brother casting a net into the sea: for they were fishers.

Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon simwnos amfiballontas en adelphos simOn amphiballO en

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh hsan thalassa eimi

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Pl
AND
ANDREW
THE
brother
OF-SIMON
ENVELOPE-CASTING purse-netting
IN
THE
SEA
THEY-WERE
gar alieis gar halieus

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
for
fishers
1:17 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
HITHER hither-ye ! anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
BEHIND after
ME
AND
17 And Jesus said unto them, Come ye after me, and I will make you to become fishers of men.
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
alieis halieus
n_ Acc Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-makING YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-BECOMING fishers
OF-humans
1:18 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
afentes aphiEmi
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
diktua hkolouqhsan autw diktuon akoloutheO autos

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
18 And straightway forsook their nets, followed him.
they and
AND
straightway FROM-LETTING leaving
THE
NETS
THEY-follow
to-Him him tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
1:19 kai probas

kai
Conj
probainO
oligon eiden oligos eidO

iakwbon ton iakObos ho

zebedaiou kai zebedaios kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
AND
BEFORE-STEPPing advancing
FEW slightly
He-PERCEIVED JACOBUS James kai autous en kai autos en

Conj pp Acc Pl m
THE
OF-THE
ZEBEDEE
AND


tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
katartizontas katartizO
19 And when he had gone a little further thence, he saw James the [son] of Zebedee, and John his brother, who also were in the ship mending their nets.
Prep
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-him
AND also
them they
IN
THE
FLOATer ship
DOWN-EQUIPPING adjusting
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
diktua diktuon
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
NETS
AV
Mark 1
1:20 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
ekalesen autous kai afentes kaleO autos kai aphiEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
AND
straightway He-CALLS
them
AND
THE
FATHER
OF-them
20 And straightway he called them: and they left their father Zebedee in the ship with the hired servants, and went after him.
zebedaion en zebedaios en
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
misqwtwn aphlqon misthOtos aperchomai

opisw autou opisO autos

Adv pp Gen Sg m
ZEBEDEE
IN
THE
FLOATer ship eis eis

Prep
WITH
THE
HIRED-ones hirelings
THEY-FROM-CAME BEHIND they-came-away after tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
Him
1:21 kai eisporeuontai

kai
Conj
eisporeuomai
kafarnaoum kai euqus kapharnaoum kai euthus

ni proper Conj Adv
sabbasin eiselqwn sabbaton eiserchomai

n_ Dat Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-INTO-GOING INTO CAPERNAUM they-are-going-into sunagwghn sunagOgE

n_ Acc Sg f
AND
straightway to-THE
SABBATHS
21 And they went into Capernaum; and straightway on the sabbath day he entered into the synagogue, and taught.
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
edidasken didaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD He-TAUGHT synagogue epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
1:22 kai exeplhssonto

kai
Conj
ekplEssO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar didaskwn gar didaskO

AND
THEY-were-astonishED ON
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
He-WAS
for
TEACHING
22 And they were astonished at his doctrine: for he taught them as one that had authority, and not as the scribes.
autous ws exousian ecwn autos hOs exousia echO

pp Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
ws oi hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis grammateus
n_ Nom Pl m
them
AS
authority
HAVING one-having en en
Prep
AND
NOT
AS
THE
WRITers scribes anqrwpos en anthrOpos en

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
1:23 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
23 . And there was in their synagogue a man with an unclean spirit; and he cried out,
AND
straightway WAS there-was
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-them synagogue
human
IN
spirit
akaqartw kai anekraxen akathartos kai anakrazO

a_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
UN-clean unclean
AND
he-UP-CRIES he-cries-out ti tis

pi Nom Sg n
1:24 legwn
legO
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
ihsou iEsous
n_ Voc Sg m
nazarhne hlqes nazarEnos erchomai

n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
apolesai apollumi
vn Aor Act
sayING
ANY what ? se su
to-US
AND
to-YOU
JESUS Jesus ! o ho
NAZAREAN !
YOU-CAME
TO-destroy
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
agios hagios
a_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
24 Saying, Let [us] alone; what have we to do with thee, thou Jesus of Nazareth? art thou come to destroy us? I know thee who thou art, the Holy One of God.
pp 2 Acc Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
US
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU I-am-aware-of
ANY who o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ARE you-are ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
WH
HOLY-One holy-one
NA
OF-THE
God

kai
Conj
legwn
epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Sg m
legwn legO
25 And Jesus rebuked him, saying, Hold thy peace, and come out of him.
AND
rebukES
to-him him kai exelqe kai exerchomai

THE
JESUS
sayING
fimwqhti phimoO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
ex ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
BE-BEING-MUZZLED AND be-you-still !
BE-OUT-COMING OUT OF-him be-you-coming-out ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
1:26 kai sparaxan

kai
Conj
sparassO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
akaqarton kai fwnhsan akathartos kai phOneO

a_ Nom Sg n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg n
26 And when the unclean spirit had torn him, and cried with a loud voice, he came out of him.
AND
CONVULSing
him
THE
spirit
THE
UN-clean unclean
AND
SOUNDing shouting
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh exhlqen mega exerchomai

a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
it-OUT-CAME it-came-out
OUT OF-him
WH NA
1:27 kai eqambhqhsan apantes wste

kai
Conj
thambeO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
hapas
a_ Nom Pl m
hOste
Conj
suzhtein suzEteO
vn Pres Act
autous
pros pros
Prep
AND
WERE-AWED
ALL(emph.)
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING so-as to-be-discussing
TOWARD
27 And they were all amazed, insomuch that they questioned among themselves, saying, What thing is this? what new doctrine [is] this? for with
AV
Mark 1
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
legontas legO
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
didach didachE
n_ Nom Sg f
kainh kainos
a_ Nom Sg f
kat kata
Prep
exousian exousia
n_ Acc Sg f
authority commandeth he even the unclean spirits, and they do obey him.
selves themselves kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
sayING
ANY what ?
IS
this
TEACHing
NEW
according-to authority
pneumasin tois pneuma ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n
akaqartois epitassei akathartos epitassO

a_ Dat Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai upakouousin kai hupakouO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND also
to-THE the
spirits
THE
UN-clean unclean akoh akoE

n_ Nom Sg f
He-IS-enjoinING AND
THEY-ARE-obeyING to-Him him olhn holos

a_ Acc Sg f
1:28 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
pantacou eis pantachou eis

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
28 And immediately his fame spread abroad throughout all the region round about Galilee.
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
HEARing tidings
OF-Him
straightway EVERY-where everywhere
INTO WHOLE
THE
pericwron ths perichOros ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
GALILEE
1:29 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sunagwghs sunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
straightway OUT OF-THE
TOGETHER-LEAD OUT-COMING synagogue coming-out
THEY-CAME
INTO THE
HOME
29 . And forthwith, when they were come out of the synagogue, they entered into the house of Simon and Andrew, with James and John.
simwnos kai andreou meta iakwbou kai iwannou simOn kai andreas meta iakObos kai iOannEs
n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
OF-SIMON
AND
ANDREW
WITH
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
1:30 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
penqera penthera
n_ Nom Sg f
simwnos katekeito simOn katakeimai

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
puressousa puressO

Conj Adv
30 But Simon's wife's mother lay sick of a fever, and anon they tell him of her.
THE
YET mother-IN-LAW OF-SIMON
was-DOWN-LAID was-laid-down
beING-feverish
AND
straightway
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
peri peri
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him they-are-telling him
ABOUT her
1:31 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
krathsas krateO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
kai afhken kai aphiEmi

AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
He-ROUSES
her
HOLDing
OF-THE the
HAND
AND
FROM-LETS leaves
31 And he came and took her by the hand, and lifted her up; and immediately the fever left her, and she ministered unto them.
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
puretos kai dihkonei puretos kai diakoneO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
her
THE
fever
AND
she-THRU-SERVED to-them she-waited-on them ote hote

Adv
WH
1:32 oyias
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
edusen
NA
edu dunO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
when
SLIPPED set kakws econtas kakOs echO

Adv
THE
SUN
32 And at even, when the sun did set, they brought unto him all that were diseased, and them that were possessed with devils.
eferon pherO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-CARRIED TOWARD Him they-brought daimonizomenous daimonizomai

ALL
THE-ones the-ones
EVILly illness
HAVING
AND
THE
ones-beING-demonizED ones-being-demonized
1:33 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
olh holos
a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
episunhgmenh episunagO
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
33 And all the city was gathered together at the door.
AND
WAS
WHOLE
THE
city
HAVING-been-ON-TOGETHER-LED TOWARD THE having-been-assembled
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
DOOR
AV
Mark 1
1:34 kai eqerapeusen pollous kakws econtas

kai
Conj
therapeuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
polus
a_ Acc Pl m
kakOs
Adv
echO
poikilais nosois poikilos nosos

a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
kai daimonia kai daimonion

Conj n_ Acc Pl n
AND
He-curES
MANY many-ones kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
EVILly illness hfien aphiEmi

vi impf Act 3 Sg
HAVING
to-VARIOUS
DISEASES AND
demons
34 And he healed many that were sick of divers diseases, and cast out many devils; and suffered not the devils to speak, because they knew him.
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
exebalen ekballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia oti daimonion hoti

n_ Acc Pl n Conj
MANY
He-OUT-CAST AND he-cast-out
NOT
He-FROM-LET TO-BE-TALKING THE he-let to-be-speaking

WH
demons
that
hdeisan eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
criston einai
WH
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED Him they-were-aware-of
1:35 kai prwi

kai
Conj
prOi
Adv
ennuca ennuchon
Adv
lian anastas lian anistEmi

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
kai aphlqen
WH
NA
kai kai
Conj
AND
NA
morning IN-NIGHTS VERY in-the-morning eis eis

Prep
UP-STANDing rising kakei kakei

Adv Con
He-OUT-CAME he-came-out proshuceto proseuchomai

AND
35 And in the morning, rising up a great while before day, he went out, and departed into a solitary place, and there prayed.
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
FROM-CAME came-away
INTO DESOLATE PLACE
AND-there He-prayED
1:36 kai katediwxen auton

kai
Conj
katadiOkO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
36 And Simon and they that were with him followed after him.
AND
DOWN-CHASES trails
Him
SIMON
AND
THE-ones the-ones
WITH him
1:37 kai euron

kai
Conj
heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai legousin autw kai legO autos

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
oti pantes hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
zhtousin zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
37 And when they had found him, they said unto him, All [men] seek for thee.
AND
THEY-FOUND Him
AND
ARE-sayING
to-Him
that
ALL
ARE-SEEKING YOU
1:38 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois agwmen autos agO

pp Dat Pl m vs Pres Act 1 Pl
allacou eis allachou eis

Adv Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ecomenas echO
vp Pres Pas Acc Pl f
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
WE-MAY-BE-LEADING other-SOIL we-may-be-going elsewhere eis eis

Prep
INTO THE
HAVING next gar exhlqon gar exerchomai

38 And he said unto them, Let us go into the next towns, that I may preach there also: for therefore came I forth.
kwmopoleis ina kOmopolis hina

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
kai ekei khruxw kai ekei kErussO

Conj Adv vs Aor Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
VILLAGE-cities towns
THAT AND also
there
I-SHOULD-BE-PROCLAIMING INTO this I-should-be-heralding eis eis

Prep
for
I-OUT-CAME I-came-out eis eis

Prep
1:39 kai hlqen

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
khrusswn kErussO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
39 And he preached in their synagogues throughout all Galilee, and cast out devils.
AND
He-CAME
INTO THE
INTO WHOLE
THE
galilaian kai ta galilaia kai ho

daimonia ekballwn daimonion ekballO

n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
GALILEE
AND
THE
demons
OUT-CASTING casting-out auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
1:40 kai ercetai

kai
Conj
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
lepros lepros
a_ Nom Sg m
parakalwn parakaleO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
IS-COMING
NA
TOWARD Him
leper
BESIDE-CALLING entreating oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
Him
AND
40 . And there came a leper to him, beseeching him, and kneeling down to him, and saying unto him, If thou wilt, thou canst make me clean.
gonupetwn gonupeteO
kai kai
Conj
legwn legO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
qelhs thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
KNEE-FALLING falling-on-his-knees dunasai dunamai

AND
sayING
to-Him
that
IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-WILLING
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kaqarisai katharizO
vn Aor Act
YOU-ARE-ABLE you-can
ME
TO-cleanse
1:41 kai splagcnisqeis

kai
Conj
splagchnizomai
ekteinas ekteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
BEING-compassionatED OUT-STRETCHing THE being-moved-with-compassion stretching-out
HAND
OF-Him
He-TOUCHES
AND
41 And Jesus, moved compassion, put forth hand, and touched him, saith unto him, I will; be clean.
with [his] and thou
AV
Mark 1 - Mark 2
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
IS-sayING
to-him
I-AM-WILLING BE-BEING-cleansED be-you-being-cleansed ! aphlqen aperchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
1:42 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
lepra lepra
n_ Nom Sg f
kai ekaqarisqh kai katharizO

AND
straightway FROM-CAME came-away
FROM him
THE
leprosy
AND
he-IS-cleansED
42 And as soon as he had spoken, immediately the leprosy departed from him, and he was cleansed.
1:43 kai embrimhsamenos autw

kai
Conj
embrimaomai
autos
pp Dat Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
exebalen ekballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
43 And he straitly charged him, and forthwith sent him away;
AND
IN-THUNDERing muttering autw autos
to-him
straightway He-OUT-CAST him he-cast-out mhdeni mEdeis

a_ Dat Sg m
1:44 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ora horaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
eiphs legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
alla alla
Conj
pp Dat Sg m
AND
He-IS-sayING is-saying
to-him
BE-SEEING be-you-seeing !
to-NO-YET-ONE NO-YET-ONE YOU-MAY-BE-sayING but to-anyone nothing ierei hiereus

n_ Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
seauton deixon seautou deiknumi

pf 3 Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai prosenegke kai prospherO

peri peri
Prep
44 And saith unto him, See thou say nothing to any man: but go thy way, shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing those things which Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.
BE-UNDER-LEADING YOURself be-you-going-away ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SHOW show-you ! a hos
to-THE
SACRED-one AND priest
TOWARD-CARRY-YOU ABOUT bring-you ! concerning eis eis

Prep
kaqarismou sou katharismos su



pr Acc Pl n
THE
cleansing
OF-YOU
WHICH which(p)
TOWARD-SETS bids
MOSES
INTO witness testimony polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
to-them
1:45 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
exelqwn exerchomai
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
khrussein kErussO
vn Pres Act
kai kai
Conj
THE-one the diafhmizein diaphEmizO

vn Pres Act
YET OUT-COMING coming-out ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
he-begins
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING much to-be-heralding mhketi mEketi

Adv
AND
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
45 But he went out, and began to publish [it] much, and to blaze abroad the matter, insomuch that Jesus could no more openly enter into the city, but was without in desert places: and they came to him from every quarter.
TO-BE-THRU-AVERRizING THE to-be-blazing-abroad fanerws eis phanerOs eis

Adv Prep
saying word eiselqein eiserchomai

vn 2Aor Act
AS-BESIDES NO-NOT-STILL Him so-that by-no-means-longer all exw alla exO

Conj Adv
TO-BE-enABLED
WH
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ep epi
Prep
erhmois topois erEmos topos

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
hn
APPEARly manifestly
NA
INTO city
TO-BE-INTO-COMING but to-be-entering pros pros

Prep
OUT ON outside auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
DESOLATE PLACES
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai hrconto kai erchomai

Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
pantoqen pantothen
Adv
WAS
AND
THEY-CAME
TOWARD Him
EVERY-WHICH-PLACE from-every-side
AV
Mark 2
2:1 kai eiselqwn

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
kafarnaoum di kapharnaoum dia

ni proper Prep
hmerwn hkousqh hEmera akouO

n_ Gen Pl f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
AGAIN
INTO CAPERNAUM
THRU DAYS during
it-IS-HEARD
that
IN
HOME house
. And again he entered into Capernaum after [some] days; and it was noised that he was in the house.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
He-IS
2:2 kai sunhcqhsan

kai
Conj
sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
wste hOste
Conj
mhketi mEketi
Adv
cwrein chOreO
vn Pres Act
mhde mEde
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
WERE-TOGETHER-LED MANY were-gathered thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
AS-BESIDES NO-NOT-STILL TO-BE-SPACING NO-YET THE so-that by-no-means-still to-be-room not-yeteven the(p) autois ton autos ho
pros pros
Prep
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
kai elalei kai laleO

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
And straightway many were gathered together, insomuch that there was no room to receive [them], no, not so much as about the door: and he preached the word unto them.
TOWARD THE
DOOR
AND
He-TALKED he-spoke
to-them
THE
saying word paralutikon airomenon paralutikos airO

a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
2:3 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
ferontes pherO
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
And they come unto him, bringing one sick of the palsy, which was borne of four.
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING CARRYING bringing
TOWARD Him
paralytic
beING-LIFTED
by
tessarwn tessares
n_ Gen Pl m
FOUR four-men
2:4 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
dunamenoi dunamai
prosenegkai prospherO
vn 2Aor Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
NO
beING-ABLE
TO-TOWARD-CARRY to-Him to-carry steghn opou stegE hopou

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
THRU THE because-of
THRONG
apestegasan apostegazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai exoruxantes calwsin kai exorussO chalaO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
And when they could not come nigh unto him for the press, they uncovered the roof where he was: and when they had broken [it] up, they let down the bed wherein the sick of the palsy lay.
THEY-FROM-EXCLUDE THE they-unroof ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
EXCLUDer THE-?-where He-WAS roof wheree o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
AND
OUT-EXCAVATing scooping-out-it
THEY-ARE-LOWERING
krabatton opou krabattos hopou

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
paralutikos katekeito paralutikos katakeimai

a_ Nom Sg m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE
PALLET
THE-?-where THE whereon o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
paralytic
was-DOWN-LAID was-laid-down pistin autwn pistis autos

2:5 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
JESUS
THE
BELIEF faith ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
OF-them
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
When Jesus saw their faith, he said unto the sick of the palsy, Son, thy sins be forgiven thee.
paralutikw teknon afientai paralutikos teknon aphiEmi

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Voc Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
amartiai hamartia
n_ Nom Pl f
paralytic
offspring child ! de de
Conj
ARE-beING-FROM-LET OF-YOU are-being-pardoned twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
misses sins kai kai

Conj
6
2:6 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
grammatewn ekei kaqhmenoi grammateus ekei kathEmai

n_ Gen Pl m Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
But there were certain of the scribes sitting there, and reasoning in their hearts,
WERE there-were
YET ANY some en en

Prep
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
there
sittING
AND
dialogizomenoi dialogizomai
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
kardiais autwn kardia autos

THRU-accountING reasoning
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-them
2:7 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
outws lalei houtOs laleO

blasfhmei blasphEmeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
Why doth this [man] thus speak blasphemies? who can forgive sins but God only?
ANY what ? afienai aphiEmi

vn Pres Act
this-One this-man
thus
IS-TALKING is-speaking mh mE
Part Neg
He-IS-HARM-AVERRING ANY he-is-blaspheming who ? o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IS-ABLE
amartias ei hamartia ei
n_ Acc Pl f Cond
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
TO-FROM-LET misses to-pardon sins
IF
NO
ONE
THE
God
AV
Mark 2
2:8 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
epignous epiginOskO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati autou pneuma autos

oti hoti
Conj
AND
WH
straightway ON-KNOWING recognizing

NA
THE
JESUS
to-THE
spirit
OF-Him
WH
that
And immediately when Jesus perceived in his spirit that they so reasoned within themselves, he said unto them, Why reason ye these things in your hearts?
outws
outws houtOs
Adv
dialogizontai dialogizomai
en en
Prep
eautois legei heautou legO

pf 3 Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois
thus
NA
THEY-ARE-THRU-accountING IN they-are-reasoning tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
selves themselves en en
Prep
He-IS-sayING
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
kardiais umwn kardia humeis

to-them
ANY why ? estin eimi
these YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN these-things ye-are-reasoning eukopwteron eipein eukopOteros legO

THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
9
2:9 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paralutikw afientai paralutikos aphiEmi

a_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ANY what ? sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
IS
easier
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
WH WH
paralytic
NA
ARE-beING-FROM-LET are-being-pardoned
NA
Whether is it easier to say to the sick of the palsy, [Thy] sins be forgiven thee; or to say, Arise, and take up thy bed, and walk?
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
amartiai h hamartia E
n_ Nom Pl f Part
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
egeirou
kai
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
OF-YOU
THE
misses sins
OR
TO-BE-sayING
BE-ROUSING be-you-rising !
AND
LIFT pick-up-you !
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
krabatton sou krabattos su

kai peripatei kai peripateO

THE
PALLET
OF-YOU
AND
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! oti exousian ecei hoti exousia echO

2:10 ina
hina
Conj
de de
Conj
eidhte eidO
vs Perf Act 2 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
authority
IS-HAVING
THE
SON
OF-THE
10 But that ye may know that the Son of man hath power on earth to forgive sins, (he saith to the sick of the palsy,)
anqrwpou afienai anthrOpos aphiEmi

n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act
amartias epi ths hamartia epi ho

n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paralutikw paralutikos
a_ Dat Sg m
human
TO-FROM-LET misses to-pardon sins legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ON
OF-THE the
LAND earth ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
paralytic
2:11 soi
su
pp 2 Dat Sg
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg

kai kai
Conj
11 I say unto thee, Arise, and take up thy bed, and go thy way into thine house.
to-YOU
I-AM-sayING
BE-ROUSING be-you-rising ! oikon oikos
LIFT pick-up-you ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
PALLET
OF-YOU
AND
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
n_ Acc Sg m
HOME house
OF-YOU
2:12 kai hgerqh

kai
Conj
egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg

Conj Adv
aras airO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
krabatton exhlqen krabattos exerchomai

AND
he-WAS-ROUSED AND
straightway LIFTing picking-up existasqai existEmi

vn Pres Mid
THE
PALLET
he-OUT-CAME he-came-out ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
Prep
pantwn wste pas hOste

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
pantas kai doxazein pas kai doxazO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vn Pres Act
12 And immediately he arose, took up the bed, and went forth before them all; insomuch that they were all amazed, and glorified God, saying, We never saw it on this fashion.
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ALL in-front-of all qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-OUT-STANDING ALL so-that to-be-being-amazed

NA
AND
TO-BE-esteemizING THE to-be-glorifying eidomen eidO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
legontas
legontas legO
oti outws oudepote hoti houtOs oudepote

Conj Adv Adv
God
sayING
that
thus
NOT-YET-?-when WE-PERCEIVED never o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
2:13 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
palin para palin para

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai pas thalassa kai pas

n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
He-OUT-CAME AGAIN he-came-out pros pros

Prep
BESIDE THE
SEA
AND
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
13 . And he went forth again by the sea side; and all the multitude resorted unto him, and he taught them.
hrceto erchomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai edidasken autous kai didaskO autos

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
CAME
TOWARD Him
AND
He-TAUGHT
them
AV
Mark 2
2:14 kai paragwn

kai
Conj
paragO
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
leuin leui
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
alfaiou kaqhmenon halphaios kathEmai

AND
BESIDE-LEADING passing-along
He-PERCEIVED LEVI
THE
OF-THE
ALPHEUS
sittING
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
telwnion kai legei telOnion kai legO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg

14 And as he passed by, he saw Levi the [son] of Alphaeus sitting at the receipt of custom, and said unto him, Follow me. And he arose and followed him.
ON
THE
tribute-office
AND
IS-sayING he-is-saying
to-him
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me
AND
UP-STANDing rising
hkolouqhsen autw akoloutheO autos

he-follows
to-Him him katakeisqai katakeimai

vn Pres midD/pasD
2:15 kai ginetai

kai
Conj
ginomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai polloi kai polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
AND
IS-BECOMING it-is-occurring
TO-BE-DOWN-LYING Him to-be-lying-down
IN
THE
HOME house ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-him
AND also
MANY
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai amartwloi sunanekeinto kai hamartOlos sunanakeimai

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
15 And it came to pass, that, as Jesus sat at meat in his house, many publicans and sinners sat also together with Jesus and his disciples: for there were many, and they followed him.
missers sinners hsan eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Pl
TOGETHER-UP-LAID to-THE lay-back-at-the-table-together-with the gar polloi gar polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
JESUS
AND
to-THE the

kai hkolouqoun autw kai akoloutheO autos

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THEY-WERE for
MANY
AND
THEY-followED
to-Him him oti esqiei hoti esthiO

2:16 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis twn grammateus ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn idontes pharisaios eidO

n_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
meta meta
Prep
AND
THE
WRITers scribes
OF-THE
PHARISEES
PERCEIVING
that
He-IS-EATING WITH
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
amartwlwn kai telwnwn hamartOlos kai telOnEs

elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

oti meta hoti meta

Conj Prep
16 And when the scribes and Pharisees saw him eat with publicans and sinners, they said unto his disciples, How is it that he eateth and drinketh with publicans and sinners?
THE
missers sinners telwnwn telOnEs

n_ Gen Pl m
AND
tribute-collectors said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
that
WITH
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kai amartwlwn esqiei kai hamartOlos esthiO

Conj a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
missers sinners
He-IS-EATING
2:17 kai akousas

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
oti hoti
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
HEARing hearing-it oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-them
that
NOT
need
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
iscuontes ischuO
iatrou iatros
n_ Gen Sg m
all oi alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

ouk ou
Part Neg
17 When Jesus heard [it], saith unto them, They that whole have no need of physician, but they that sick: I came not to call righteous, but sinners repentance.
he are the are the to
ARE-HAVING THE
ones-beING-STRONG OF-HEALer ones-being-strong of-physician
but
THE-ones the-ones
EVILly illness
HAVING
NOT
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kalesai dikaious alla amartwlous kaleO dikaios alla hamartOlos

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m
I-CAME
TO-CALL
JUST-ones just-ones oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
but
missers sinners farisaioi nhsteuontes kai pharisaios nEsteuO kai

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj
18 . And the disciples of John and of the Pharisees used to fast: and they come and say unto him, Why do the disciples of John and of the Pharisees fast, but thy disciples fast not?
2:18 kai hsan

kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
maqhtai iwannou kai oi mathEtEs iOannEs kai ho

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
AND
WERE
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-JOHN
AND
THE
PHARISEES
fastING
AND
ercontai erchomai

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai iwannou kai mathEtEs iOannEs kai

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
THEY-ARE-COMING AND
THEY-ARE-sayING to-Him are-saying
THE
LEARNers disciples soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
OF-JOHN
WH
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai twn mathEtEs ho

farisaiwn nhsteuousin oi pharisaios nEsteuO ho

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
maqhtai
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-THE
PHARISEES
ARE-fastING
THE
YET to-YOU
AV
Mark 2
NA
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
nhsteuousin nEsteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
LEARNers disciples
NOT
ARE-fastING
2:19 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dunantai dunamai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
NO
ARE-ABLE can met autwn meta autos

Prep pp Gen Pl m
THE
SONS
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
numfwnos numphOn
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
nhsteuein nEsteuO
vn Pres Act
19 And Jesus said unto them, Can the children of the bridechamber fast, while the bridegroom is with them? as long as they have the bridegroom with them, they cannot fast.
OF-THE
BRIDal-chamber IN
WHICH
THE
BRIDE-groom WITH them bridegroom numfion numphios

n_ Acc Sg m
IS
TO-BE-fastING
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
dunantai dunamai
as-much-as TIME whatever nhsteuein nEsteuO

vn Pres Act
THEY-ARE-HAVING THE
BRIDE-groom WITH them bridegroom
NOT
ARE-ABLE they-can
TO-BE-fastING
2:20 eleusontai
erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
otan hotan
Conj
aparqh apairO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS
when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them whenever may-be-being-taken-away en en

Prep
THE
20 But the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them, and then shall they fast in those days.
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai tote nhsteusousin kai tote nEsteuO

hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
BRIDE-groom AND bridegroom
then
THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING IN
that
THE
DAY
2:21 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
epiblhma epiblEma
n_ Acc Sg n
rakous rhakos
n_ Gen Sg n
agnafou agnaphos
a_ Gen Sg n
epiraptei epirrhaptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epi imation palaion ei epi himation palaios ei

Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Cond
NOT-YET-ONE ON-CAST-effect OF-BURSTer OF-UN-CARDED IS-ON-SEWING ON no-one patch of-shred unshrunk is-sewing-on de de
Conj
cloak
OLD
IF
mh mE
Part Neg
airei airO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma ap plErOma apo

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kainon kainos
a_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
palaiou palaios
a_ Gen Sg n
21 No man also seweth a piece of new cloth on an old garment: else the new piece that filled it up taketh away from the old, and the rent is made worse.
YET NO
IS-LIFTING is-taking-away scisma schisma

n_ Nom Sg n
THE
FILLing
FROM it
THE
NEW
OF-THE
OLD
kai ceiron kai cheirOn

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
ginetai ginomai
AND
WORSE
SPLIT rent
IS-BECOMING
2:22 kai oudeis

kai
Conj
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
ballei ballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
neon neos
a_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
a_ Acc Pl m Cond
de de
Conj
AND
NOT-YET-ONE IS-CASTING no-one is-draining o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WINE
YOUNG fresh tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD wine-skins askous askos

n_ Acc Pl m
IF
YET
mh mE
Part Neg
rhxei rhEgnumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
oinos oinos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
oinos oinos
n_ Nom Sg m
22 And no man putteth new wine into old bottles: else the new wine doth burst the bottles, and the wine is spilled, and the bottles will be marred: but new wine must be put into new bottles.
NO
SHALL-BE-BURSTING THE
WINE
THE
WH
BOTTLES (of-skin) AND wine-skins alla

NA
THE
WINE
apollutai apollumi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
askoi askos
n_ Nom Pl m
alla alla
Conj
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
neon neos
a_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
IS-beING-destroyED AND is-perishing askous askos

n_ Acc Pl m
WH
THE
BOTTLES (of-skin) wine-skins

NA
but
WINE
YOUNG fresh
INTO
kainous
kainous kainos
a_ Acc Pl m
NEW
WH NA
2:23 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin sabbaton
n_ Dat Pl n
diaporeuesqai
paraporeuesqai paraporeuomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
AND
BECAME it-occurred
Him
IN
THE
SABBATHS
TO-BE-BESIDE-GOING to-be-going-by
23 And it came to pass, that he went through the corn fields on the sabbath day; and his disciples began, as they went, to pluck the ears of corn.
AV
Mark 2 - Mark 3
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sporimwn kai oi sporimos kai ho

a_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m

hrxanto archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
THRU THE through tillontes tillO

SOWings
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
begin
WAY path
TO-BE-DOING to-be-making
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
stacuas stachus
n_ Acc Pl m
PLUCKING
THE
EARS-(of-plants) ears-of-grain farisaioi elegon pharisaios legO

2:24 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
AND
THE
PHARISEES
said
to-Him
BE-PERCEIVING ANY lo ! why ?
THEY-ARE-DOING to-THE
24 And the Pharisees said unto him, Behold, why do they on the sabbath day that which is not lawful?
sabbasin o sabbaton hos

n_ Dat Pl n pr Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
SABBATHS
WHICH
NOT
it-IS-allowed is-allowed anegnwte ti anaginOskO tis

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n
2:25 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois oudepote autos oudepote

pp Dat Pl m Adv
epoihsen dauid ote poieO dauid hote

vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Adv
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
NOT-YET-?-when YE-read(past) never ye-did-read kai oi kai ho

Conj
ANY what ?
DOES
DAVID
when
25 And he said unto them, Have ye never read what David did, when he had need, and was an hungred, he, and they that were with him?
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
escen echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai epeinasen autos kai peinaO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Pl m
need
he-has-HAD
WH NA
AND
HUNGERS
he
AND
THE-ones the-ones oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
WITH him
2:26
pws
pws pOs
Adv
eishlqen eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi abiaqar epi abiathar

Prep ni proper
how
he-INTO-CAME INTO THE he-entered artous ths artos ho

HOME house
OF-THE
God
ON
ABIATHAR
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
proqesews prothesis
n_ Gen Sg f
efagen esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
26 How he went into the house of God in the days of Abiathar the high priest, and did eat the shewbread, which is not lawful to eat but for the priests, and gave also to them which were with him?
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest exestin exesti

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
THE
BREADS bread(p) ei ei
Cond
OF-THE
BEFORE-PLACing ATE
WHICH
NOT
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
mh mE
Part Neg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
iereis hiereus
n_ Acc Pl m
kai edwken kai didOmi

kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
it-IS-allowed is-allowed sun sun

Prep
TO-BE-EATING IF
NO
THE
SACRED-ones AND priests
he-GIVES
AND also
to-THE-ones to-the-ones
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ousin eimi
vp Pres vxx Dat Pl m
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him
BEING
2:27 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois to autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg n
sabbaton dia sabbaton dia

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon egeneto anthrOpos ginomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
27 And he said unto them, The sabbath was made for man, and not man for the sabbath:
AND
He-said
to-them
THE
SABBATH
THRU THE because-of sabbaton sabbaton

n_ Acc Sg n
human
BECAME
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos dia anthrOpos dia

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
NOT
THE
human
THRU THE because-of o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
SABBATH
2:28 wste
hOste
Conj
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou kai tou anthrOpos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg n
28 Therefore the Son of man is Lord also of the sabbath.
AS-BESIDES Master so-that Lord sabbatou sabbaton

n_ Gen Sg n
IS
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
AND also
OF-THE
SABBATH
AV
Mark 3
3:1 kai eishlqen

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
NA
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai hn kai eimi

ekei anqrwpos ekei anthrOpos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
AND
He-INTO-CAME AGAIN he-entered ecwn echO
INTO
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD AND synagogue
WAS
there
human
. And he entered again into the synagogue; and there was a man there which had a withered hand.
exhrammenhn xErainO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-DRIED HAVING having-been-withered
THE
HAND
3:2 kai parethroun

kai
Conj
paratEreO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin qerapeusei sabbaton therapeuO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
AND
THEY-BESIDE-KEPT Him they-scrutinized autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
IF
to-THE
SABBATHS
He-SHALL-BE-curING him
THAT
And they watched him, whether he would heal him on the sabbath day; that they might accuse him.
kathgorhswsin katEgoreO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-accusING OF-Him him
3:3 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw tw anthrOpos ho
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WH
ceira econti xhran
WH
WH
NA
xhran xEros
n_ Acc Sg f
And he saith unto the man which had the withered hand, Stand forth.
AND
NA
He-IS-sayING
NA
to-THE
human
THE-one the-one eis eis

Prep
THE
DRY withered
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
econti echO
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
HAND
HAVING
BE-ROUSING be-you-rising ! autois exestin autos exesti

pp Dat Pl m
INTO THE
MIDst
WH NA
3:4 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin sabbaton
n_ Dat Pl n
agaqopoihsai
agaqon agathos
a_ Acc Sg n
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
AND
NA
He-IS-sayING
to-them
it-IS-allowed
to-THE
SABBATHS
GOOD
And he saith unto them, Is it lawful to do good on the sabbath days, or to do evil? to save life, or to kill? But they held their peace.
poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
h E
Part
kakopoihsai yuchn kakopoieO psuchE

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f
swsai h sOzO E
vn Aor Act Part
apokteinai oi apokteinO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
esiwpwn siOpaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
TO-DO
OR
TO-EVIL-DO to-do-evil
soul
TO-SAVE OR
THE-ones the
YET were-SILENT they-were-silent epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
5
3:5 kai peribleyamenos autous met orghs

kai
Conj
periblepO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
autos
pp Acc Pl m
meta
Prep
orgE
n_ Gen Sg f
sullupoumenos sullupeomai
AND
ABOUT-looking looking-about ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
them on-them
WITH INDIGNATION TOGETHER-SORROWING commiserating legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ON
THE
pwrwsei pOrOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
kardias autwn kardia autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Gen Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw ekteinon anthrOpos ekteinO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
CALLOUSness OF-THE
WH
HEART
OF-them
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
human
OUT-STRETCH THE stretch-out-you ! ceir cheir

n_ Nom Sg f
And when he had looked round about on them with anger, being grieved for the hardness of their hearts, he saith unto the man, Stretch forth thine hand. And he stretched [it] out: and his hand was restored whole as the other.
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
sou
kai exeteinen kai ekteinO

kai apekatestaqh h kai apokathistEmi ho

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HAND
AND
he-OUT-STRETCHES AND he-stretches-out oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
WAS-restorED
THE
HAND
OF-him
3:6 kai exelqontes

kai
Conj
exerchomai
farisaioi euqus pharisaios euthus

n_ Nom Pl m Adv
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
hrwdianwn hErOdianoi
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
THE
PHARISEES
straightway WITH
THE
HERODians
And the Pharisees went forth, and straightway took counsel with the Herodians against him, how they might destroy him.
n_ Acc Sg n
edidoun didOmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
kat kata
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
opws hopOs
Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apoleswsin apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
TOGETHER-COUNSEL THEY-GAVE consultation
DOWN OF-Him against him meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
WHICH-how Him so-that maqhtwn autou mathEtEs autos

3:7 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
anecwrhsen pros anachOreO pros

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
JESUS
WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-Him
UP-SPACES retires
WH
TOWARD THE
But Jesus withdrew himself with his disciples to the sea: and a great multitude from Galilee followed him, and from Judaea,
qalassan kai polu thalassa kai polus

n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
apo apo
Prep
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
hkolouqhsen
SEA
AND
MANY vast
multitude
FROM THE
GALILEE
AV
Mark 3
NA
hkolouqhsen akoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
follows
AND
FROM THE
JUDEA
3:8 kai apo

kai
Conj
apo
Prep
ierosolumwn kai apo ierosoluma kai apo

n_ Gen Pl n Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
idoumaias kai peran idoumaia kai peran

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
FROM JERUSALEM
AND
FROM THE
IDUMEA
AND
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
iordanou kai peri iordanEs kai peri

turon turos
n_ Acc Sg f
kai sidwna plhqos kai sidOn plEthos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg n
polu polus
a_ Nom Sg n
akouontes akouO
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
And from Jerusalem, and from Idumaea, and [from] beyond Jordan; and they about Tyre and Sidon, a great multitude, when they had heard what great things he did, came unto him.
JORDAN
WH
AND
NA
ABOUT TYRE
AND
SIDON
multitude
MANY vast
HEARING
as-much-as how-much
poiei
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
He-DID
CAME
TOWARD Him
3:9 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

ina hina
Conj
ploiarion proskarterh ploiarion proskartereO

n_ Nom Sg n vs Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
He-said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples ina hina

Conj
OF-Him
THAT FLOATer (dim) boat
MAY-BE-perseverING to-Him may-be-waiting-on him
And he spake to his disciples, that a small ship should wait on him because of the multitude, lest they should throng him.
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
qlibwsin thlibO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THRU THE because-of
THRONG
THAT NO
THEY-MAY-BE-CONSTRICTING Him they-may-be-crowding epipiptein epipiptO

vn Pres Act
3:10 pollous gar eqerapeusen wste

polus
a_ Acc Pl m
gar
Conj
therapeuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hOste
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
MANY
for
He-curES
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-ON-FALLING to-Him so-that to-be-falling-on him eicon echO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
THAT OF-Him him
10 For he had healed many; insomuch that they pressed upon him for to touch him, as many as had plagues.
aywntai haptO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
osoi hosos
pk Nom Pl m
mastigas mastix
n_ Acc Pl f
SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING as-many-as HAD they-should-be-touching
scourges
3:11 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
pneumata ta pneuma ho
n_ Nom Pl n t_ Nom Pl n
akaqarta otan akathartos hotan

a_ Nom Pl n Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eqewroun prosepipton theOreO prospiptO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
THE
spirits
WH
THE
UN-clean unclean
NA
when-EVER Him whenever oti su hoti su

Conj
THEY-beheld
TOWARD-FELL prostrated o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 And unclean spirits, when they saw him, fell down before him, and cried, saying, Thou art the Son of God.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai ekrazon kai krazO

legonta
legontes legO
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
pp 2 Nom Sg
to-Him
AND
CRIED
sayING
that
YOU
ARE
THE
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
SON
OF-THE
God
3:12 kai polla

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
epetima epitimaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois ina autos hina

pp Dat Pl m Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
faneron poihswsin phaneros poieO

a_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Pl
12 And he straitly charged them that they should not make him known.
AND
MANY much
He-rebukED he-warned
to-them them to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THAT NO
Him
apparent manifest
THEY-SHOULD-BE-makING
3:13 kai anabainei

kai
Conj
anabainO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
kai proskaleitai kai proskaleomai

ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
He-IS-UP-STEPPING INTO THE he-is-ascending kai aphlqon kai aperchomai

mountain
AND
IS-TOWARD-CALLING WHOM is-calling-to-him
WILLED would
13 . And he goeth up into a mountain, and calleth [unto him] whom he would: and they came unto him.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
He
AND
THEY-FROM-CAME TOWARD Him they-came-away

WH
3:14 kai epoihsen dwdeka

kai
Conj
ous kai apostolous wnomasen
WH
WH
WH
NA
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
dOdeka
ni numeral
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
NA
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-makES
TWO-TEN twelve
WHOM
AND also
14 And he ordained twelve, that they should be with him, and that he might send them forth to preach,
AV
Mark 3
apostolous wnomasen apostolos onomazO

NA
ina hina
Conj
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl

Prep pp Gen Sg m
kai ina kai hina

Conj Conj
apostellh apostellO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
He-NAMES
THAT THEY-MAY-BE WITH Him
AND
THAT He-MAY-BE-commissionING
autous khrussein autos kErussO

pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
them
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING to-be-heralding exousian ekballein exousia ekballO

n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act
3:15 kai ecein

kai
Conj
echO
vn Pres Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia (3:16) daimonion

n_ Acc Pl n
WH
kai epoihsen
WH
15 And to have power to heal sicknesses, and to cast out devils:
AND
WH WH
TO-BE-HAVING authority
NA NA
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE to-be-casting-out

NA NA
demons
tous dwdeka
kai epoihsen tous kai poieO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
AND
He-makES
THE
TWO-TEN twelve petron petros

n_ Acc Sg m
16 And Simon he surnamed Peter;
3:16 kai epeqhken onoma

kai
Conj
epitithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
ON-PLACES he-places-on
NAME
to-THE
SIMON
Peter (ROCK) Peter adelfon tou adelphos ho

17 And James the [son] of Zebedee, and John the brother of James; and he surnamed them Boanerges, which is, The sons of thunder:
3:17 kai iakwbon ton

kai
Conj
iakObos
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
zebedaiou kai iwannhn ton zebedaios kai iOannEs ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
AND
JACOBUS James
THE
OF-THE
ZEBEDEE
WH
AND
NA
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-THE
iakwbou kai epeqhken iakObos kai epitithEmi

autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
onoma
onomata onoma
n_ Acc Pl n
boanhrges o boanErges hos

ni proper pr Nom Sg n
JACOBUS James estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND also
He-ON-PLACES to-them he-places-on them bronths brontE

n_ Gen Sg f
NAMES
BOANERGES
WHICH
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
IS
SONS
OF-THUNDER
3:18 kai andrean kai filippon kai barqolomaion kai maqqaion kai qwman
kai
Conj
andreas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
philippos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
bartholomaios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
maththaios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
thOmas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
ANDREW
AND
Philip
AND
Bartholomew
AND
MATTHEW
AND
THOMAS
AND

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
alfaiou kai qaddaion kai simwna ton halphaios kai thaddaios kai simOn ho
n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
kananaion kananaios
n_ Acc Sg m
18 And Andrew, and Philip, and Bartholomew, and Matthew, and Thomas, and James the [son] of Alphaeus, and Thaddaeus, and Simon the Canaanite,
JACOBUS James
THE
OF-THE
ALPHEUS
AND
THADDEUS
AND
SIMON
THE
CANANITE
3:19 kai ioudan

kai
Conj
ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
iskariwq os iskariOthEs hos

kai paredwken auton kai paradidOmi autos

(3:20)

19 And Judas Iscariot, which also betrayed him: and they went into an house.
AND
JUDAS
ISCARIOT
WHO
AND also
BESIDE-GIVES gives-up
Him
AND
He-IS-COMING
eis eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO HOME house
3:20 kai sunercetai

kai
Conj
sunerchomai
palin palin
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
20 And the multitude cometh together again, so that they could not so much as eat bread.
AND
IS-TOGETHER-COMING AGAIN is-coming-together arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
THRONG
AS-BESIDES NO so-that
TO-BE-enABLED
autous mhde autos mEde

pp Acc Pl m Conj
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
them
NO-YET BREAD not-yeteven
TO-BE-EATING

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
par para
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
krathsai auton krateO autos

elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
gar gar
Conj
AND
HEARing hearing-it
THE-ones the-ones
BESIDE OF-Him him
OUT-CAME came-out
TO-HOLD
SAME him it
THEY-said
for
21 And when his friends heard [of it], they went out to lay hold on him: for they said, He is beside himself.
AV
Mark 3
oti exesth hoti existEmi

that
it-WAS-OUT-STOOD it-was-beside-itself grammateis oi grammateus ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
3:22 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ierosolumwn katabantes ierosoluma katabainO

n_ Gen Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
AND
THE
WRITers scribes
THE
FROM JERUSALEM
said
that
22 . And the scribes which came down from Jerusalem said, He hath Beelzebub, and by the prince of the devils casteth he out devils.
beelzeboul ecei beelzeboul echO

kai oti en kai hoti en

Conj Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

daimoniwn ekballei daimonion ekballO

n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEELZEBOUL
He-IS-HAVING AND
that
IN
THE
chief
OF-THE
demons
He-IS-OUT-CASTING he-is-casting-out
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
demons
3:23 kai proskalesamenos autous en

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
autos
pp Acc Pl m
en
Prep
parabolais elegen parabolE legO

n_ Dat Pl f vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois pws autos pOs

pp Dat Pl m Adv Int
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him satanas satanas

n_ Nom Sg m
them
IN
He-said
to-them
how how ?
23 And he called them [unto him], and said unto them in parables, How can Satan cast out Satan?
dunatai dunamai
satanan satanas
n_ Acc Sg m
ekballein ekballO
vn Pres Act
IS-ABLE can
SATAN (Heb. adversary) SATAN (adversary) TO-BE-OUT-CASTING Satan Satan to-be-casting-out basileia ef basileia epi
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
3:24 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
eauthn heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg f
merisqh merizO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
24 And if a kingdom be divided against itself, that kingdom cannot stand.
AND
IF-EVER KINGdom
ON
self herself
SHOULD-BE-BEING-PARTED NOT
IS-ABLE
staqhnai histEmi
vn Aor Pas
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia ekeinh basileia ekeinos

TO-BE-STOOD THE to-stand
KINGdom
that
3:25 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
ef epi
Prep
eauthn heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg f
merisqh merizO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dunhsetai dunamai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
25 And if a house be divided against itself, that house cannot stand.
AND
IF-EVER HOME house ekeinh ekeinos

pd Nom Sg f
WH
ON
self herself
NA
SHOULD-BE-BEING-PARTED NOT
SHALL-BE-ABLE THE
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
sthnai
staqhnai histEmi
vn Aor Pas
HOME house
that
TO-BE-STOOD to-stand o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
3:26 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
anesth anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
kai emerisqh kai merizO

ou ou
Part Neg
26 And if Satan rise up against himself, and be divided, he cannot stand, but hath an end.
AND
IF
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) UP-STOOD Satan rose alla telos alla telos
Conj n_ Acc Sg n
ON
self himself
AND
IS-PARTED
NOT
dunatai dunamai
sthnai histEmi
vn 2Aor Act
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
he-IS-ABLE
TO-STAND but
FINISH IS-HAVING consummation oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
3:27 all ou
alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iscurou ischuros
a_ Gen Sg m
but
NOT
IS-ABLE
NOT-YET-ONE INTO THE no-one skeuh skeuos

n_ Acc Pl n
HOME house ean ean

Cond
OF-THE
STRONG-one strong-one prwton prOton

Adv
27 No man can enter into a strong man's house, and spoil his goods, except he will first bind the strong man; and then he will spoil his house.
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
diarpasai diarpazO
vn Aor Act
mh mE
Part Neg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
INTO-COMING entering iscuron ischuros

a_ Acc Sg m
THE
INSTRUMENTS OF-him gear
TO-THRU-SNATCH IF-EVER NO to-plunder oikian oikia

n_ Acc Sg f
BEFORE-most THE first
dhsh deO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
kai tote thn kai tote ho

Conj Adv t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
diarpasei diarpazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
STRONG-one he-SHOULD-BE-BINDING AND strong-one
then
THE
HOME house
OF-him
he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SNATCHING he-shall-be-plundering
AV
Mark 3
3:28 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti panta hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
uiois huios
n_ Dat Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ALL
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-THE shall-be-being-pardoned the blasfhmiai blasphEmia

n_ Nom Pl f
SONS
OF-THE
28 Verily I say unto you, All sins shall be forgiven unto the sons of men, and blasphemies wherewith soever they shall blaspheme:
anqrwpwn ta anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl n
amarthmata kai ai hamartEma kai ho

n_ Nom Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl f
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
humans
THE
miss-effects penalties-of-sins
AND
THE
HARM-AVERments as-much-as IF-EVER blasphemies whatever
blasfhmhswsin blasphEmeO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HARM-AVERRING they-should-be-blaspheming
3:29 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
blasfhmhsh blasphEmeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma to pneuma ho
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
WHO
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-HARM-AVERRING INTO THE should-be-blaspheming afesin aphesis

n_ Acc Sg f
spirit
THE
HOLY
NOT
29 But he that shall blaspheme against the Holy Ghost hath never forgiveness, but is in danger of eternal damnation:
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
alla enocos alla enochos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
aiwniou aiOnios
a_ Gen Sg f
IS-HAVING
FROM-LETTing INTO THE pardon
eon
but
liable
IS
OF-eonian
amarthmatos hamartEma
n_ Gen Sg n
miss-effect penalty-of-the-sin
3:30 oti elegon

hoti
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
pneuma akaqarton ecei pneuma akathartos echO

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
30 Because they said, He hath an unclean spirit.
that
THEY-said
WH
spirit
NA
UN-clean unclean ercetai erchomai

He-IS-HAVING
3:31 kai
kai
Conj
ercontai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
IS-COMING
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
AND
THE
brothers
31 . There came then his brethren and his mother, and, standing without, sent unto him, calling him.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai exw kai exO

Conj Adv
sthkontes stEkO
apesteilan apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kalountes kaleO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
OF-Him
AND
OUT STANDING outside peri peri

Prep
THEY-commission TOWARD Him they-dispatch auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
CALLING
Him
3:32 kai ekaqhto

kai
Conj
kathEmai
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
sat
ABOUT Him
THRONG
AND
NA NA
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
NA
32 And the multitude sat about him, and they said unto him, Behold, thy mother and thy brethren without seek for thee.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi sou adelphos su

kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
adelfai adelphE
n_ Nom Pl f
THE
NA
MOTHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
brothers
OF-YOU
AND
THE
sisters
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
exw exO
Adv
zhtousin zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-YOU
OUT ARE-SEEKING YOU outside autois legei autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
3:33 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
33 And he answered them, saying, Who is my mother, or my brethren?
AND
answerING
to-them them
NA
He-IS-sayING
ANY who ?
IS
THE
MOTHER
OF-ME
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
AND
THE
brothers
OF-ME
3:34 kai peribleyamenos tous

kai
Conj
periblepO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
peri peri
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kuklw kuklO
n_ Dat Sg m
kaqhmenous kathEmai
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
ABOUT-looking looking-about
THE-ones ABOUT Him on-the-ones
to-AROUND sittING
He-IS-sayING
34 And he looked round about on them which sat about him, and said, Behold my mother and my brethren!
AV
Mark 3 - Mark 4
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

MOTHER
NA
OF-ME
AND
THE
brothers
OF-ME
3:35 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
an an
Part
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
WHO
for
EVER SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
WILL
OF-THE
God
this-one this-one
35 For whosoever shall do the will of God, the same is my brother, and my sister, and mother.

kai adelfh kai mhthr kai adelphE kai mEtEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
brother
OF-ME
AND
sister
AND
MOTHER
IS
AV
Mark 4
4:1 kai palin hrxato

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai sunagetai thalassa kai sunagO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
AND
AGAIN
He-begins
TO-BE-TEACHING BESIDE THE
SEA
AND
IS-beING-TOGETHER-LED is-being-gathered
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
pleistos polus
a_ Nom Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ploion embanta ploion embainO

n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
. And he began again to teach by the sea side: and there was gathered unto him a great multitude, so that he entered into a ship, and sat in the sea; and the whole multitude was by the sea on the land.
TOWARD Him
THRONG
MOST AS-BESIDES Him most-numerous so-that qalassh kai pas thalassa kai pas
n_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m
INTO FLOATer ship oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
IN-STEPPing stepping-in thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
kaqhsqai kathEmai
vn Pres midD/pasD
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
TO-BE-sittING
IN
THE
SEA
AND
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
TOWARD THE
qalassan epi ths thalassa epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
SEA
ON
THE
LAND
WERE
4:2 kai edidasken autous en

kai
Conj
didaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
en
Prep
parabolais polla parabolE polus

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Acc Pl n
kai elegen kai legO

autois en autos en
pp Dat Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
And he taught them many things by parables, and said unto them in his doctrine,
AND
He-TAUGHT
them
IN
MANY AND many-things
said
to-them
IN
THE

TEACHing
OF-Him
4:3 akouete
akouO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
speirai speirO
vn Aor Act
Hearken; Behold, there went out a sower to sow:
BE-YE-HEARING BE-PERCEIVING OUT-CAME be-ye-hearing ! lo ! came-out
THE
one-SOWING one-sowing o hos

pr Nom Sg n
TO-SOW
4:4 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
speirein speirO
vn Pres Act
men men
Part
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
BECAME it-occurred kai hlqen kai erchomai

Conj
IN
THE
TO-BE-SOWING WHICH
INDEED FALLS
BESIDE THE
And it came to pass, as he sowed, some fell by the way side, and the fowls of the air came and devoured it up.
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
kai katefagen auto kai katesthiO autos

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WAY road
AND
CAME
THE
flyers AND flying-creatures epi to epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg n
DOWN-ATE devoured
it
WH
4:5 kai allo

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Nom Sg n
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
petrwdes petrOdes
a_ Acc Sg n
kai
opou hopou
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
other
FALLS
ON
THE
ROCK-PERCEIVED rocky-place exaneteilen dia exanatellO dia

THE-?-where NOT where ? to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
And some fell on stony ground, where it had not much earth; and immediately it sprang up, because it had no depth of earth:
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
pollhn kai euqus polus kai euthus

a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
it-HAD
LAND earth ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
much
AND
straightway OUT-UP-risES it-shoots-up
THRU THE because-of
NO
TO-BE-HAVING
baqos bathos
n_ Acc Sg n
DEPTH
OF-LAND of-earth hlios hElios

n_ Nom Sg m
4:6 kai ote aneteilen o

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
anatellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekaumatisqh kai dia kaumatizO kai dia

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
But when the sun was up, it was scorched; and because it had no root, it withered away.
AND
when
UP-risES rises rizan rhiza

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
SUN
it-IS-BURNizED it-is-scorched
AND
THRU THE because-of
NO
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
exhranqh xErainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
TO-BE-HAVING ROOT
it-IS-DRIED it-is-withered epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
4:7 kai allo

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akanqas akantha
n_ Acc Pl f
kai anebhsan ai kai anabainO ho

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
akanqai akantha
n_ Nom Pl f
AND
other
FALLS
INTO THE
UP-STEPPed came-up
THE
POINT-FLOWERS thorns
And some fell among thorns, and the thorns grew up, and choked it, and it yielded no fruit.
AV
Mark 4
kai sunepnixan kai sumpnigO

auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kai karpon kai karpos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
TOGETHER-CHOKE it stifle epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
FRUIT
NOT
it-GIVES
4:8 kai alla

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Nom Pl n
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f

karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
other
FALLS
INTO THE
LAND earth
THE
WH
IDEAL
NA
AND
it-GAVE
FRUIT
anabainonta anabainO
kai auxanomena kai auxanO

Conj vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n
kai eferen kai pherO

eis
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
triakonta kai triakonta kai

ni numeral Conj
And other fell on good ground, and did yield fruit that sprang up and increased; and brought forth, some thirty, and some sixty, and some an hundred.
UP-STEPPING coming-up en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
AND
beING-GROWN-UP AND growing-up
CARRIED brought-forth
ONE
THREE-TY thirty
AND
exhkonta kai en hexEkonta kai heis

ni numeral Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ekaton hekaton
ni numeral
ONE
SIX-TY sixty
AND
ONE
HUNDRED hundred-fold ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
4:9 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
akouetw akouO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
And he said unto them, He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
AND
He-said
WHO
IS-HAVING
EARS
TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing ! hrwtwn erOtaO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
4:10 kai ote egeneto

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
monas monos
a_ Acc Pl f
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
peri peri
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
when
He-BECAME he-came-to-be
according-to ONLY alone(p)
askED
Him
THE-ones the-ones
ABOUT Him
10 And when he was alone, they that were about him with the twelve asked of him the parable.
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
dwdeka tas dOdeka ho

ni numeral t_ Acc Pl f
parabolas parabolE
n_ Acc Pl f
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the
TWO-TEN twelve
THE
BESIDE-CASTS parables to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
4:11 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois umin autos humeis

pp Dat Pl m pp 2 Dat Pl
musthrion dedotai mustErion didOmi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias basileia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
He-said
to-them
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret exw exO

Adv
HAS-been-GIVEN OF-THE
KINGdom
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ekeinois de ekeinos de
pd Dat Pl m Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
parabolais ta parabolE ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
11 And he said unto them, Unto you it is given to know the mystery of the kingdom of God: but unto them that are without, all [these] things are done in parables:
OF-THE
God
to-those
YET THE-ones OUT IN the-ones outside
THE
ALL
ginetai ginomai
IS-BECOMING is-occurring
4:12 ina
hina
Conj
blepontes blepO
blepwsin blepO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
idwsin eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl

THAT lookING observing akouwsin akouO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-lookING AND they-may-be-observing kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
NO
MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND
HEARING
suniwsin suniEmi
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
mhpote mEpote
Adv
epistreywsin epistrephO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
12 That seeing they may see, and not perceive; and hearing they may hear, and not understand; lest at any time they should be converted, and [their] sins should be forgiven them.
THEY-MAY-BE-HEARING AND
NO
MAY-BE-understandING NO-?-when THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING AND lest-at-some-time they-should-be-turning-about
afeqh aphiEmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-them it-may-be-being-pardoned them
4:13 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ouk autos ou

oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn tauthn kai pws parabolE houtos kai pOs

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj Adv Int
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
this
AND
how how ?
13 And he said unto them, Know ye not this parable? and how then will ye know all parables?
pasas pas
a_ Acc Pl f
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
parabolas gnwsesqe parabolE ginOskO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Fut midD 2 Pl
ALL
THE
BESIDE-CASTS YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING parables
AV
Mark 4
4:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
speirei speirO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
14
The sower soweth the word.
THE
one-SOWING one-sowing de de
Conj
THE
saying word para para

Prep
IS-SOWING
4:15 outoi
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
opou hopou
Adv
speiretai speirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
these
YET ARE
THE-ones the-ones akouswsin akouO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
BESIDE THE
WAY road
THE-?-where IS-beING-SOWN THE wheree o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai otan kai hotan

Conj Conj
euqus euthus
Adv
ercetai erchomai
15 And these are they by the way side, where the word is sown; but when they have heard, Satan cometh immediately, and taketh away the word that was sown in their hearts.
saying word satanas satanas

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING straightway IS-COMING whenever kai airei kai airO

THE
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
esparmenon speirO
eis eis
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
SATAN (Heb. adversary) AND Satan
IS-LIFTING is-taking-away
WH
THE
saying word oi ho
THE
HAVING-been-SOWN INTO them
4:16 kai outoi

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
omoiws
epi ta epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Pl n
petrwdh petrOdes
a_ Acc Pl n
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
these
ARE
THE the-ones otan hotan

Conj
ON
THE
ROCK-PERCEIVEDS rocky-places logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
16 And these are they likewise which are sown on stony ground; who, when they have heard the word, immediately receive it with gladness;
speiromenoi speirO
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
akouswsin akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
meta meta
Prep
beING-SOWN
WHO
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING THE whenever
saying word
straightway WITH
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
lambanousin auton lambanO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
JOY
ARE-GETTING-UP they-are-getting
it
him it
4:17 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
eautois alla proskairoi heautou alla proskairos

pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
AND
NOT
THEY-ARE-HAVING ROOT
IN
selves themselves h E
Part
but
TOWARD-SEASONS ARE temporary ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
eita eita
Adv
genomenhs ginomai
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
diwgmou dia diOgmos dia

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
17 And have no root in themselves, and so endure but for a time: afterward, when affliction or persecution ariseth for the word's sake, immediately they are offended.
THEREAFTER OF-BECOMING
OF-CONSTRICTION OR affliction
OF-CHASing persecution
THRU THE because-of
saying word
straightway
skandalizontai skandalizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-beING-SNARED
4:18 kai alloi

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akanqas akantha
n_ Acc Pl f
speiromenoi speirO
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
18 And these are they which are sown among thorns; such as hear the word,
AND
others
ARE
THE-ones the-ones logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
POINT-FLOWERS beING-SOWN thorns
these
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
akousantes akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ARE
THE-ones the-ones
THE
saying word
HEARing
4:19 kai ai
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
merimnai tou merimna ho

n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
apath apatE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ploutou kai ploutos kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
AND
THE
anxieties worries ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
eon
AND
THE
SEDUCtion OF-THE
RICHES
AND
19 And the cares of this world, and the deceitfulness of riches, and the lusts of other things entering in, choke the word, and it becometh unfruitful.
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
peri peri
Prep
loipa loipon
a_ Acc Pl n
epiqumiai eisporeuomenai epithumia eisporeuomai

n_ Nom Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f
sumpnigousin sumpnigO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
ABOUT THE
rest
ON-FEELings desires
INTO-GOING going-in
ARE-TOGETHER-CHOKING THE are-stifling
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai akarpos ginetai kai akarpos ginomai

Conj a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
saying word
AND
UN-FRUITful it-IS-BECOMING unfruitful
AV
Mark 4
4:20 kai ekeinoi eisin

kai
Conj
ekeinos
pd Nom Pl m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f
sparentes speirO
vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m
AND
those
ARE
THE-ones the-ones logon logos
ON
THE
LAND earth
THE
IDEAL
BEING-SOWN
oitines akouousin ton hostis akouO ho

pr Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
kai paradecontai kai paradechomai

Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
kai karpoforousin kai karpophoreO

20 And these are they which are sown on good ground; such as hear the word, and receive [it], and bring forth fruit, some thirtyfold, some sixty, and some an hundred.
n_ Acc Sg m
WHO-ANY who-any en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
ARE-HEARING
THE
saying word
WH
AND
NA
ARE-BESIDE-RECEIVING AND are-assenting-to-it exhkonta kai hexEkonta kai

ni numeral Conj
ARE-FRUIT-CARRYING are-bearing-fruit
WH
triakonta kai triakonta kai

ni numeral Conj
en
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
en
NA
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
ONE
THREE-TY thirty
AND
ONE
SIX-TY sixty
AND
ONE
ekaton hekaton
ni numeral
HUNDRED hundred-fold
4:21 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
WH
oti
mhti mEti
Part Int
ercetai erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lucnos luchnos
n_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
upo hupo
Prep
AND
He-said
to-them
NO-ANY IS-COMING not ? h E

Part
THE
LAMP
THAT UNDER
21 . And he said unto them, Is a candle brought to be put under a bushel, or under a bed? and not to be set on a candlestick?
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
modion modios
n_ Acc Sg m
teqh tithEmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
klinhn ouc klinE ou

ina hina
Conj
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
THE
MEASURE he-MAY-BE-BEING-PLACED OR peck-measure heit-may-be-being-placed
UNDER THE
couch
NOT
THAT ON
THE
lucnian teqh luchnia tithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
LAMPstand
MAY-BE-BEING-PLACED heit-may-be-being-placed gar estin gar eimi

4:22 ou
ou
Part Neg
krupton ean kruptos ean

a_ Nom Sg n Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ina hina
Conj
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
NOT nothing egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
for
IS
HIDDen
IF-EVER NO
THAT it-MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR NOT-YET it-may-be-being-manifested neither eis eis

Prep
22 For there is nothing hid, which shall not be manifested; neither was any thing kept secret, but that it should come abroad.
apokrufon all ina apokruphos alla hina

a_ Nom Sg n Conj Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
faneron phaneros
a_ Acc Sg m
it-BECAME
FROM-HIDDen concealed tis tis

px Nom Sg m
but
THAT it-MAY-BE-COMING INTO apparent manifestation wta ous

n_ Acc Pl n
4:23 ei
ei
Cond
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
akouetw akouO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
23 If any man have ears to hear, let him hear.
IF
ANY anyone
IS-HAVING
EARS
TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing ! ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
4:24 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg

akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
metrw metron
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
He-said
to-them
BE-lookING ANY be-ye-bewaring ! what umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-ARE-HEARING IN
WHICH
MEASURE
metreite metreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
metrhqhsetai metreO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai prosteqhsetai kai prostithEmi

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
24 And he said unto them, Take heed what ye hear: with what measure ye mete, it shall be measured to you: and unto you that hear shall more be given.
YE-ARE-MEASURING it-SHALL-BE-BEING-MEASURED to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-addED to-YOU(p) to-ye kai os kai hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
4:25 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar ecei gar echO

doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WHO
for
IS-HAVING
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-him
AND
WHO
NOT
IS-HAVING
25 For he that hath, to him shall be given: and he that hath not, from him shall be taken even that which he hath.
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arqhsetai airO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND also
WHICH
he-IS-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM him shall-be-being-taken-away outws estin houtOs eimi

4:26 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ws anqrwpos hOs anthrOpos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
AND
He-said
thus
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AS
human
26 And he said, So is the kingdom of God, as if a man should cast seed into the ground;
AV
Mark 4
balh ballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sporon sporos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
SHOULD-BE-CASTING THE
seed
ON
THE
LAND earth nukta nux

n_ Acc Sg f
4:27 kai kaqeudh

kai
Conj
katheudO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kai egeirhtai kai egeirO

Conj vs Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai hmeran kai o kai hEmera kai ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
AND
he-MAY-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING AND he-may-be-drowsing blasta blastanO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-beING-ROUSED NIGHT
AND
DAY
AND
THE
27 And should sleep, and rise night and day, and the seed should spring and grow up, he knoweth not how.
sporos sporos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai mhkunhtai kai mEkunO

ws ouk hOs ou
Adv Part Neg
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
seed
MAY-BE-GERMINATING AND
MAY-BE-LENGTHENING AS
NOT
HAS-PERCEIVED he is-aware corton chortos

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
4:28 automath
automatos
a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
karpoforei karpophoreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
eiten stacun
WH
SAME-IMPELLED THE spontaneously

WH
LAND earth
NA
IS-FRUIT-CARRYING BEFORE-most FODDER is-bearing-fruit first blade

NA
28 For the earth bringeth forth fruit of herself; first the blade, then the ear, after that the full corn in the ear.
eiten plhrh
WH
NA
eita eita
Adv
stacun stachus
n_ Acc Sg m
eita eita
Adv
NA
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg m
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THEREAFTER EAR (of-plant) THEREAFTER ear stacui stachus

n_ Dat Sg m
FULL
GRAIN
IN
THE
EAR (of-plant) ear
4:29 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
paradoi paradidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
karpos karpos
n_ Nom Sg m
euqus euthus
Adv
apostellei apostellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING THE whenever may-be-giving-way drepanon oti paresthken drepanon hoti paristEmi
n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg
FRUIT
straightway he-IS-commissionING THE he-is-dispatching
29 But when the fruit is brought forth, immediately he putteth in the sickle, because the harvest is come.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qerismos therismos
n_ Nom Sg m
SICKLE
that
HAS-BESIDE-STOOD THE is-present pws omoiwswmen pOs homoioO

Adv Int vs Aor Act 1 Pl
harvest
4:30 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
h E
Part
en en
Prep
AND
He-said
how how ?
WE-SHOULD-BE-LIKenING THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
OR
IN
30 And he said, Whereunto shall we liken the kingdom of God? or with what comparison shall we compare it?
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
parabolh parabolE
n_ Dat Sg f
qwmen tithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ANY what ?
her
BESIDE-CAST MAY-WE-BE-PLACING parable we-may-be-placing sinapews os sinapi hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Nom Sg m
4:31 ws kokkw
hOs
Adv
kokkos
n_ Dat Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
sparh speirO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
AS
to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD kernel
WHICH
when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BEING-SOWN ON whenever spermatwn twn sperma ho

THE
LAND earth
31 [It is] like a grain of mustard seed, which, when it is sown in the earth, is less than all the seeds that be in the earth:
mikroteron on mikros hos

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp pr Acc Sg m
pantwn twn pas ho

epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
LITTLER smaller
WHICH
OF-ALL
THE
seeds
OF-THE the
ON
THE
LAND earth meizon mega

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
4:32 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
sparh speirO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
anabainei anabainO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg

pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl n
AND
when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BEING-SOWN IS-UP-STEPPING AND whenever it-is-coming-up lacanwn kai poiei lachanon kai poieO
n_ Gen Pl n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-BECOMING
GREATer
OF-ALL
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
kladous megalous wste klados mega hOste

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
32 But when it is sown, it groweth up, and becometh greater than all herbs, and shooteth out great branches; so that the fowls of the air may lodge under the shadow of it.
THE
GREENS
AND
IS-makING
boughs
GREAT
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-enABLED so-that
UNDER THE
skian skia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kataskhnoun ouranos kataskEnoO

SHADE
OF-it
THE
heaven
TO-BE-DOWN-BOOTHING to-be-roosting
AV
Mark 4
4:33 kai toiautais parabolais pollais elalei

kai
Conj
toioutos
pd Dat Pl f
parabolE
n_ Dat Pl f
polus
a_ Dat Pl f
laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois ton autos ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
AND
to-such
BESIDE-CASTS parables akouein akouO

vn Pres Act
MANY
He-TALKED he-spoke
to-them
THE
saying word
according-AS
33 And with many such parables spake he the word unto them, as they were able to hear [it].
hdunanto dunamai
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Att
THEY-were-ABLE
TO-BE-HEARING to-be-hearing-it de de
Conj
4:34 cwris
chOris
Adv
parabolhs ouk parabolE ou

elalei laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois kat autos kata

pp Dat Pl m Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
apart-from YET BESIDE-CAST parable idiois idios

a_ Dat Pl m
NOT
He-TALKED he-spoke
to-them
according-to OWN
YET to-THE
34 But without a parable spake he not unto them: and when they were alone, he expounded all things to his disciples.
maqhtais epeluen mathEtEs epiluO

n_ Dat Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
OWN
LEARNers disciples
He-ON-LOOSED ALL he-explained autois en autos en

pp Dat Pl m Prep
4:35 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
oyias opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
IN
that
THE
DAY
OF-evening BECOMING
35 . And the same day, when the even was come, he saith unto them, Let us pass over unto the other side.
dielqwmen dierchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING INTO THE we-may-be-passing-through
OTHER-SIDE
4:36 kai afentes

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
paralambanousin paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ws hn hOs eimi
Adv vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
AND
FROM-LETTING leaving ploiw ploion

n_ Dat Sg n
THE
THRONG
THEY-ARE-BESIDE-GETTING Him they-are-taking-along hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AS
He-WAS
IN
36 And when they had sent away the multitude, they took him even as he was in the ship. And there were also with him other little ships.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kai alla kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
ploia ploion
n_ Nom Pl n

Prep pp Gen Sg m
THE
FLOATer ship
AND
other
FLOATers ships lailay lailaps

n_ Nom Sg f
WAS
WITH Him
4:37 kai ginetai

kai
Conj
ginomai
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
anemou anemos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
kumata epeballen eis kuma epiballO eis

n_ Nom Pl n vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
AND
IS-BECOMING there-is-occurring ploion wste ploion hOste

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
storm
GREAT
OF-WIND
AND
THE
BILLOWS
ON-CAST dashed
INTO
37 And there arose a great storm of wind, and the waves beat into the ship, so that it was now full.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hdh EdE
Adv
gemizesqai gemizO
vn Pres Pas
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
FLOATer ship
AS-BESIDES ALREADY TO-BE-beING-REPLETizED THE so-that to-be-being-filled-to-the-brim hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
FLOATer ship proskefalaion proskephalaion

n_ Acc Sg n
38 And he was in the hinder part of the ship, asleep on a pillow: and they awake him, and say unto him, Master, carest thou not that we perish?
4:38 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
prumnh epi to prumna epi ho

n_ Dat Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n
AND
He
WAS
IN
THE
STERN
ON
THE
TOWARD-HEAD cushion didaskale ou didaskalos ou

n_ Voc Sg m Part Neg
kaqeudwn katheudO
kai egeirousin kai egeirO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai legousin autw kai legO autos

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing melei melei

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
AND
THEY-ARE-ROUSING Him
AND
ARE-sayING
to-Him
TEACHer !
NOT
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti apollumeqa hoti apollumi

IS-CARING it-is-caring
to-YOU
that
WE-ARE-beING-destroyED we-are-perishing epetimhsen tw epitimaO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
4:39 kai diegerqeis

kai
Conj
diegeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
anemw anemos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh thalassa
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
BEING-THRU-ROUSED He-rebukES being-roused pefimwso phimoO

vm Perf Pas 2 Sg
to-THE the
WIND
AND
said
to-THE
SEA
39 And he arose, and rebuked the wind, and said unto the sea, Peace, be still. And the wind ceased, and there was a great calm.
siwpa siOpaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai ekopasen o kai kopazO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
anemos anemos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai egeneto kai ginomai

Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
galhnh galEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
BE-beING-SILENT BE-HAVE-been-MUZZLED AND be-you-silent ! be-you-still !
STRIKES flags
THE
WIND
AND
BECAME
CALM
AV
Mark 4 - Mark 5
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
GREAT
4:40 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg n
deiloi deilos
a_ Nom Pl m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
oupw oupO
Adv
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
40 And he said unto them, Why are ye so fearful? how is it that ye have no faith?
AND
He-said
to-them
ANY why ?
DREADers timid
YE-ARE
NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-HAVING BELIEF faith pros pros

Prep
4:41 kai efobhqhsan

kai
Conj
phobeO
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
megan mega
a_ Acc Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

allhlous tis allElOn tis

pc Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-WERE-afraid FEAR
GREAT
AND
THEY-said
TOWARD one-another
ANY who ? qalassa thalassa

n_ Nom Sg f
41 And they feared exceedingly, and said one to another, What manner of man is this, that even the wind and the sea obey him?
ara ara
Part Int
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oti kai o hoti kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m
anemos anemos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
CONSEQUENTLY this this-man upakouei autw hupakouO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
IS
that
AND also
THE
WIND
AND
THE
SEA
IS-obeyING
to-Him him
AV
Mark 5
5:1 kai hlqon

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs eis thalassa eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
. And they came over unto the other side of the sea, into the country of the Gadarenes.
AND
THEY-CAME
INTO THE
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
SEA
INTO THE
SPACE country
OF-THE
gerashnwn gerasEnos
n_ Gen Pl m
GERASENES
WH NA
5:2 kai exelqontos

kai
Conj
exerchomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
euqus
euqus euthus
Adv
uphnthsen hupantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
OF-OUT-COMING of-coming-out ek ek
Prep
OF-Him
OUT OF-THE
FLOATer ship
straightway
UNDER-meets meets
And when he was come out of the ship, immediately there met him out of the tombs a man with an unclean spirit,
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
mnhmeiwn mnEmeion
n_ Gen Pl n
anqrwpos en anthrOpos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
pneumati akaqartw pneuma akathartos

to-Him him
OUT OF-THE
memorial-vaults human tombs katoikhsin eicen katoikEsis echO

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
IN
spirit
UN-clean unclean mnhmasin mnEma

n_ Dat Pl n
5:3 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
kai oude kai oude

Conj Adv
WHO
THE
DOWN-HOMEing dwelling oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
HAD
IN THE among auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
memorial-tombs AND tombs dhsai deO

vn Aor Act
NOT-YET not-yeteven
Who had [his] dwelling among the tombs; and no man could bind him, no, not with chains:
alusei halusis
n_ Dat Sg f
ouketi ouketi
Adv
edunato dunamai
to-UN-LOOSE NOT-STILL NOT-YET-ONE was-ABLE to-chain not-longer anyone
him
TO-BIND
5:4 dia
dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pollakis pedais kai alusesin pollakis pedE kai halusis

Adv n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f
dedesqai deO
vn Perf Pas
kai kai
Conj
THRU THE because-of diespasqai diaspaO

vn Perf Pas
him
MANY-times often tas ho
to-fetters
AND
to-UN-LOOSES TO-HAVE-been-BOUND AND to-chains kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
aluseis halusis
n_ Acc Pl f
pedas suntetrifqai pedE suntribO

n_ Acc Pl f vn Perf Pas
Because that he had been often bound with fetters and chains, and the chains had been plucked asunder by him, and the fetters broken in pieces: neither could any [man] tame him.
t_ Acc Pl f
TO-HAVE-been-THRU-PULLED by to-have-been-pulled-to-pieces kai oudeis kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
him
THE
UN-LOOSES AND chains
THE
fetters
TO-HAVE-been-crushED
iscuen ischuO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
damasai damazO
vn Aor Act
AND
NOT-YET-ONE was-STRONG him no-one
TO-TAME
5:5 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
pantos nuktos kai hmeras pas nux kai hEmera

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
mnhmasin mnEma
n_ Dat Pl n
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
AND
THRU EVERY during all
NIGHT
AND
DAY
IN THE among
memorial-tombs AND tombs liqois lithos

n_ Dat Pl m
IN
THE
And always, night and day, he was in the mountains, and in the tombs, crying, and cutting himself with stones.
oresin hn oros eimi

n_ Dat Pl n vi impf vxx 3 Sg
krazwn krazO
kai katakoptwn kai katakoptO

eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
mountains he-WAS
CRYING
AND
DOWN-STRIKING gashing apo apo

Prep
self himself
to-STONES
5:6 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
makroqen edramen makrothen trechO

kai prosekunhsen kai proskuneO

But when he saw Jesus afar off, he ran and worshipped him,
AND
WH
PERCEIVING
NA
THE
JESUS
FROM FAR-PLACE afar
he-RAN
AND
worships
auton
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him him
5:7 kai kraxas

kai
Conj
krazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh legei mega legO

a_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
ihsou iEsous
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
CRYing
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
ANY what ?
to-ME
AND
to-YOU
JESUS !
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uyistou orkizw hupsistos horkizO

a_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
And cried with a loud voice, and said, What have I to do with thee, Jesus, [thou] Son of the most high God? I adjure thee by God, that thou torment me not.
SON !
OF-THE
God
THE
HIGHest Most-High
I-AM-OATHizING YOU I-am-adjuring
THE
God
NO
AV
Mark 5
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
basanishs basanizO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
ME
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ORDEALizING you-should-be-tormenting gar autw gar autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
5:8 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
akaqarton ek akathartos ek
a_ Nom Sg n Prep
For he said unto him, Come out of the man, [thou] unclean spirit.
He-said
for
to-it
BE-OUT-COMING THE be-you-coming-out !
spirit
THE
UN-clean unclean
OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
human
5:9 kai ephrwta

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai legei kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legiwn legeOn
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
He-inquirED-of him
ANY what ?
NAME
to-YOU
AND
it-IS-sayING
to-Him
LEGION
And he asked him, What [is] thy name? And he answered, saying, My name [is] Legion: for we are many.
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
NAME
to-ME
that
MANY
WE-ARE
5:10 kai parekalei

kai
Conj
parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
aposteilh apostellO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
exw exO
Adv
10 And he besought him much that he would not send them away out of the country.
AND
it-BESIDE-CALLED Him it-entreated cwras chOra

n_ Gen Sg f
much
THAT NO
them
He-SHOULD-BE-commissionING OUT he-should-be-dispatching
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
SPACE country de de
Conj
5:11 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei pros ekei pros

Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
agelh agelE
n_ Nom Sg f
coirwn megalh choiros mega

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg f
boskomenh boskO
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
11 Now there was there nigh unto the mountains a great herd of swine feeding.
WAS
YET there
TOWARD THE
mountain
HERD
OF-HOGS
GREAT
beING-HERBED grazing coirous choiros

n_ Acc Pl m
12 And all the devils besought him, saying, Send us into the swine, that we may enter into them.
5:12 kai parekalesan

kai
Conj
parakaleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
pemyon pempO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
THEY-BESIDE-CALL Him they-entreat autous eiselqwmen autos eiserchomai

pp Acc Pl m vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
sayING
SEND send-you !
US
INTO THE
HOGS
ina hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
THAT INTO them
WE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING we-may-be-entering ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
5:13 kai epetreyen autois kai exelqonta

kai
Conj
epitrepO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
kai
Conj
exerchomai
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n
akaqarta akathartos
a_ Nom Pl n
AND
He-permits
to-them them
AND
THE
spirits
THE
UN-clean unclean krhmnou krEmnos

n_ Gen Sg m
eishlqon eis eiserchomai eis

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
coirous kai wrmhsen choiros kai hormaO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agelh agelE
n_ Nom Sg f
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
13 And forthwith Jesus gave them leave. And the unclean spirits went out, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the sea, (they were about two thousand;) and were choked in the sea.
INTO-CAME entered eis eis

Prep
INTO THE
HOGS
AND
RUSHES
THE
HERD
DOWN
THE
HANG precipice
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan ws discilioi thalassa hOs dischilioi

n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Nom Pl m
kai epnigonto kai pnigO

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh thalassa
n_ Dat Sg f
INTO THE
SEA
AS
TWO-THOUSAND AND
THEY-were-CHOKED IN
THE
SEA
5:14 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
boskontes boskO
autous efugon autos pheugO

pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai aphggeilan kai apaggellO

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
ones-HERBING ones-grazing tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
them
FLED
AND
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE INTO THE they-report-it ti tis

pi Nom Sg n
14 And they that fed the swine fled, and told [it] in the city, and in the country. And they went out to see what it was that was done.
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
agrous kai hlqon agros kai erchomai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
city
AND
INTO THE
FIELDS
AND
THEY-CAME
TO-BE-PERCEIVING ANY what ?
IS
AV
Mark 5
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gegonos ginomai
vp 2Perf Act Nom Sg n
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred pros pros

Prep
5:15 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai qewrousin kai theOreO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING TOWARD THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-ARE-beholdING THE are-beholding kai swfronounta ton kai sOphroneO ho

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
daimonizomenon daimonizomai
kaqhmenon kathEmai
imatismenon himatizO
15 And they come to Jesus, and see him that was possessed with the devil, and had the legion, sitting, and clothed, and in his right mind: and they were afraid.
demonizING-one one-being-demonized eschkota echO

vp Perf Act Acc Sg m
sittING
beING-GARMENTED AND
beING-sane
THE
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
legiwna kai efobhqhsan legeOn kai phobeO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
one-HAVING-HAD one-having-had
THE
LEGION
AND
THEY-WERE-afraid
5:16 kai dihghsanto autois oi

kai
Conj
diEgeomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
idontes eidO
pws egeneto pOs ginomai

Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
relate
to-them
THE
ones-PERCEIVING ones-perceiving-it coirwn choiros

n_ Gen Pl m
how
it-BECAME
to-THE
16 And they that saw [it] told them how it befell to him that was possessed with the devil, and [also] concerning the swine.
daimonizomenw daimonizomai
kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
demonizING-one one-being-demonized
AND
HOGS
5:17 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
parakalein parakaleO
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apelqein aperchomai
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
17 And they began to pray him to depart out of their coasts.
AND
THEY-begin
TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLING Him to-be-entreating
TO-BE-FROM-COMING FROM THE to-be-coming-away
boundaries
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
5:18 kai embainontos autou

kai
Conj
embainO
autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion parekalei ploion parakaleO

n_ Acc Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
OF-IN-STEPPING of-stepping-in ina hina

Conj
OF-Him
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
BESIDE-CALLED Him entreated
THE
18 And when he was come into the ship, he that had been possessed with the devil prayed him that he might be with him.
daimonisqeis daimonizomai

Prep pp Gen Sg m
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
one-BEING-demonizED THAT WITH Him one-being-demonized
he-MAY-BE
5:19 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
alla legei alla legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
NOT
He-FROM-LETS him he-lets pros pros

Prep
but
He-IS-sayING
to-him
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-you-going-away ! autois osa autos hosos

pp Dat Pl m pk Acc Pl n
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
sous sos
ps 2 Acc Pl
kai apaggeilon kai apaggellO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
19 Howbeit Jesus suffered him not, but saith unto him, Go home to thy friends, and tell them how great things the Lord hath done for thee, and hath had compassion on thee.
HOME
OF-YOU
TOWARD THE
YOURS
AND
FROM-MESSAGE to-them report-you ! se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
as-much-as THE
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
pepoihken kai hlehsen poieO kai eleaO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
Master Lord
to-YOU
HAS-DONE
AND
is-MERCIFUL-to YOU
5:20 kai aphlqen

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai hrxato kai archO

Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg
khrussein kErussO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dekapolei osa dekapolis hosos

n_ Dat Sg f pk Acc Pl n
AND
he-FROM-CAME AND he-came-away o ho
begins
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING IN to-be-heralding kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
THE
Decapolis
as-much-as
20 And he departed, and began to publish in Decapolis how great things Jesus had done for him: and all [men] did marvel.
epoihsen autw poieO autos

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eqaumazon thaumazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
t_ Nom Sg m
DOES
to-him
THE
JESUS
AND
ALL
MARVELED
AV
Mark 5
5:21 kai diaperasantos tou

kai
Conj
diaperaO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
en tw ploiw
WH
WH
NA
en en
Prep
NA
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
NA
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
OF-ferrying
OF-THE
JESUS
IN
THE
FLOATer ship kai kai

Conj
21 . And when Jesus was passed over again by ship unto the other side, much people gathered unto him: and he was nigh unto the sea.
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
sunhcqh sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AGAIN
INTO THE
OTHER-SIDE WAS-TOGETHER-LED THRONG was-gathered thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
MANY vast
ON
Him
AND
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
para para
Prep
qalassan thalassa
n_ Acc Sg f
He-WAS
BESIDE THE
SEA
5:22 kai ercetai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcisunagwgwn archisunagOgos
n_ Gen Pl m
onomati iairos onoma iaeiros

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
IS-COMING
ONE
OF-THE
chiefs-of-TOGETHER-LEAD to-NAME chiefs-of-the-synagogue tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
JAIRUS
AND
22 And, behold, there cometh one of the rulers of the synagogue, Jairus by name; and when he saw him, he fell at his feet,
idwn eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
piptei piptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
PERCEIVING
Him
IS-FALLING he-is-falling auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE
FEET
OF-Him
5:23 kai parakalei

kai
Conj
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
legwn legO
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
qugatrion thugatrion
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
he-IS-BESIDE-CALLING Him he-is-entreating escatws ecei eschatOs echO

much
sayING
that
THE
DAUGHER (dim) little-daughter tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
elqwn erchomai
epiqhs epitithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
23 And besought him greatly, saying, My little daughter lieth at the point of death: [I pray thee], come and lay thy hands on her, that she may be healed; and she shall live.
OF-ME
LASTly
IS-HAVING
THAT COMING
YOU-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING THE you-may-be-placing-on
HANDS
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
swqh sOzO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai zhsh kai zaO

to-her
THAT she-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED AND
SHOULD-BE-LIVING
5:24 kai aphlqen

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

Prep pp Gen Sg m
kai hkolouqei autw kai akoloutheO autos

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
24 And [Jesus] went with him; and much people followed him, and thronged him.
AND
He-FROM-CAME WITH him he-came-away auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
followED
to-Him him
THRONG
MANY vast
AND
suneqlibon sunthlibO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
THEY-TOGETHER-CONSTRICTED Him they-crowded
5:25 kai gunh

kai
Conj
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ousa eimi
vp Pres vxx Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
rusei rhusis
n_ Dat Sg f
aimatos dwdeka eth haima dOdeka etos

n_ Gen Sg n ni numeral n_ Nom Pl n
25 And a certain woman, which had an issue of blood twelve years,
AND
WOMAN
BEING
IN
GUSHing
OF-BLOOD
TWO-TEN twelve
YEARS
5:26 kai polla

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
paqousa paschO
upo hupo
Prep
pollwn iatrwn kai dapanhsasa ta polus iatros kai dapanaO ho

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl n
par para
Prep
AND
much
EMOTIONING suffering kai mhden kai mEdeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
UNDER MANY
HEALers physicians
AND
SPENDing
THE
BESIDE
26 And had suffered many things of many physicians, and had spent all that she had, and was nothing bettered, but rather grew worse,
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
wfelhqeisa alla mallon eis OpheleO alla mallon eis

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f Conj Adv Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ceiron cheirOn
a_ Acc Sg n
her
ALL
AND
NO-YET-ONE BEING-benefitED nothing
but
RATHER
INTO THE
WORSE
elqousa erchomai
COMING
WH
5:27 akousasa
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
ta
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
elqousa erchomai
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
HEARing
ABOUT THE
JESUS
COMING
IN
THE
THRONG
27 When she had heard of Jesus, came in the press behind, and touched his garment.
AV
Mark 5
opisqen opisthen
Adv
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

BEHIND-PLACE she-TOUCHES OF-THE from-behind touches the
cloak
OF-Him
5:28 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar oti ean gar hoti ean

Conj Conj Cond
aywmai haptO
vs Aor Mid 1 Sg
kan kan
Cond Con
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
imatiwn autou himation autos

28 For she said, If I may touch but his clothes, I shall be whole.
she-said
for
that
IF-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING AND-[IF]-EVER OF-THE and-if-ever the
GARMENTS
OF-Him
swqhsomai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
5:29 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
exhranqh xErainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
phgh pEgE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos auths haima autos

n_ Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg f
kai egnw kai ginOskO

AND
straightway IS-DRIED
THE
SPRING
OF-THE
BLOOD
OF-her
AND
she-KNEW
29 And straightway the fountain of her blood was dried up; and she felt in [her] body that she was healed of that plague.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati oti iatai sOma hoti iaomai

n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
mastigos mastix
n_ Gen Sg f
to-THE
BODY
that
she-HAS-been-HEALED FROM THE
scourge
5:30 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
epignous epiginOskO
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ex ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
straightway THE
JESUS
ON-KNOWING recognizing en en
Prep
IN
Self himself
THE
OUT OF-Him
30 And Jesus, immediately knowing in himself that virtue had gone out of him, turned him about in the press, and said, Who touched my clothes?
dunamin exelqousan dunamis exerchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg f
epistrafeis epistrephO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ABILITY power hyato haptO
OUT-COMING coming-out twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
BEING-ON-TURNED being-turned-about imatiwn himation

n_ Gen Pl n
IN
THE
THRONG
He-said said
ANY who ?
OF-ME
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
TOUCHES
THE
GARMENTS
5:31 kai elegon

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
said
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
YOU-ARE-lookING THE you-are-observing mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
THRONG
31 And his disciples said unto him, Thou seest the multitude thronging thee, and sayest thou, Who touched me?
sunqlibonta sunthlibO
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai legeis kai legO

tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
TOGETHER-CONSTRICTING YOU crowding
AND
YOU-ARE-sayING ANY who ? thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME me
TOUCHES
5:32 kai perieblepeto idein

kai
Conj
periblepO
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
eidO
vn 2Aor Act
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poihsasan poieO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg f
32 And he looked round about to see her that had done this thing.
AND
He-ABOUT-lookED he-looked-about de de
Conj
TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE-one the-one fobhqeisa phobeO

vp Aor pasD Nom Sg f
this
DOing
5:33 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai tremousa kai tremO

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
eiduia eidO
vp Perf Act Nom Sg f
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
THE
YET WOMAN
BEING-afraid
AND
TREMBLING
HAVING-PERCEIVED WHICH being-aware kai eipen kai legO

33 But the woman fearing trembling, knowing what done in her, came and down before him, and told all the truth.
and was fell him
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai prosepesen autw kai prospiptO autos

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
HAS-BECOME has-occurred thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-her
CAME
AND
TOWARD-FALLS prostrates
to-Him
AND
said told
to-Him him
EVERY entire
alhqeian alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
TRUTH
5:34 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
qugathr h thugatEr ho
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
YET He-said
to-her
DAUGHTER daughter !
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU
HAS-SAVED
YOU
34 And he said unto her, Daughter, thy faith hath made thee whole; go in peace, and be whole of thy plague.
AV
Mark 5
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
eirhnhn kai isqi eirEnE kai eimi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Pres vxx 2 Sg
ugihs hugiEs
a_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
mastigos sou mastix su

n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Sg
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO PEACE be-you-going-away !
AND
YOU-BE be-you ! ercontai erchomai
SOUND
FROM THE
scourge
OF-YOU
5:35 eti
eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
arcisunagwgou archisunagOgos
n_ Gen Sg m
STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking
THEY-ARE-COMING FROM THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD chief-of-the-synagogue eti eti

Adv
legontes legO
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr sou thugatEr su

apeqanen ti apothnEskO tis

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n
skulleis skullO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
35 . While he yet spake, there came from the ruler of the synagogue's [house certain] which said, Thy daughter is dead: why troublest thou the Master any further?
sayING
that
THE
DAUGHTER
OF-YOU
FROM-DIED died
ANY why ?
STILL YOU-ARE-FLAYING you-are-bothering
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
didaskalon didaskalos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
TEACHer
5:36 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
parakousas parakouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
laloumenon laleO
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
YET JESUS
BESIDE-HEARing disregarding mh mE
Part Neg
THE
saying word
beING-TALKED being-spoken
IS-sayING
36 As soon as Jesus heard the word that was spoken, he saith unto the ruler of the synagogue, Be not afraid, only believe.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
arcisunagwgw archisunagOgos
n_ Dat Sg m
fobou phobeO
monon pisteue monon pisteuO

Adv vm Pres Act 2 Sg
to-THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD NO chief-of-the-synagogue afhken aphiEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
BE-FEARING be-you-fearing !
ONLY
BE-BELIEVING be-you-believing ! mh mE
Part Neg
5:37 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
sunakolouqhsai ei sunakoloutheO ei
vn Aor Act Cond
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
NOT
He-FROM-LETS NOT-YET-ONE WITH Him he-lets anyone
TO-TOGETHER-follow to-follow-together
IF
NO
THE
37 And he suffered no man to follow him, save Peter, and James, and John the brother of James.
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai iakwbon kai iwannhn ton kai iakObos kai iOannEs ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon iakwbou adelphos iakObos

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
Peter
AND
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
THE
brother
OF-JACOBUS of-James arcisunagwgou archisunagOgos

n_ Gen Sg m
5:38 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai qewrei kai theOreO

AND
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO THE
HOME house
OF-THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD AND chief-of-the-synagogue
He-IS-beholdING
38 And he cometh to the house of the ruler of the synagogue, and seeth the tumult, and them that wept and wailed greatly.
qorubon kai klaiontas thorubos kai klaiO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
kai alalazontas polla kai alalazO polus

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
TUMULT
AND
LAMENTING ones-lamenting
AND
SCREAMING
much
5:39 kai eiselqwn

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

qorubeisqe thorubeO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
kai klaiete kai klaiO

AND
INTO-COMING entering paidion ouk paidion ou

He-IS-sayING
to-them
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-TUMULTING AND ye-are-making-tumult
YE-ARE-LAMENTING
39 And when he was come in, he saith unto them, Why make ye this ado, and weep? the damsel is not dead, but sleepeth.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
apeqanen alla kaqeudei apothnEskO alla katheudO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
little-girl
NOT
FROM-DIED died autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
but
IS-DOWN-LOUNGING she-is-drowsing de de
Conj
5:40 kai kategelwn

kai
Conj
katagelaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ekbalwn ekballO
pantas paralambanei pas paralambanO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him they-ridiculed him patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
He
YET OUT-CASTING casting-out
ALL them-all
IS-BESIDE-GETTING is-taking-along kai kai

Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
paidiou kai thn paidion kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera kai tous mEtEr kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
40 And they laughed him to scorn. But when he had put them all out, he taketh the father and the mother of the damsel, and them that were with him, and entereth in where the damsel was lying.
THE
FATHER
OF-THE
little-girl
AND
THE
MOTHER
AND
THE-ones the-ones
WITH Him
AND
eisporeuetai eisporeuomai
opou hopou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Nom Sg n
He-IS-INTO-GOING he-is-going-into
THE-?-where WAS wheree
THE
little-girl
AV
Mark 5 - Mark 6
5:41 kai krathsas

kai
Conj
krateO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
paidiou legei paidion legO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
taliqa koum talitha koum

Aramaic Aramaic
AND
HOLDing
OF-THE the
HAND
OF-THE
little-girl
He-IS-sayING
to-her
TALITHA
COUM coumi
41 And he took the damsel by the hand, and said unto her, Talitha cumi; which is, being interpreted, Damsel, I say unto thee, arise.
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
meqermhneuomenon to methermEneuO ho
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
korasion soi korasion su

n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
WHICH
IS
beING-after-TRANSLATED being-construed anesth anistEmi

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
maiden
to-YOU
I-AM-sayING
BE-ROUSING be-you-rousing ! gar etwn gar etos

Conj n_ Gen Pl n
42 And straightway the damsel arose, and walked; for she was [of the age] of twelve years. And they were astonished with a great astonishment.
5:42 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
korasion kai periepatei korasion kai peripateO

n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
straightway UP-STOOD rose
THE
maiden
WH
AND
NA
she-ABOUT-TROD she-WAS walked ekstasei ekstasis

n_ Dat Sg f
for
OF-YEARS
dwdeka kai exesthsan dOdeka kai existEmi

ni numeral Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
euqus
euqus euthus
Adv
megalh mega
a_ Dat Sg f
TWO-TEN twelve
AND
THEY-OUT-STOOD they-were-beside-themselves ina hina

Conj
straightway
to-OUT-STANDing GREAT to-amazement gnoi ginOskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
5:43 kai diesteilato autois polla

kai
Conj
diastellO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-THRU-PUTS he-cautions doqhnai didOmi

vn Aor Pas
to-them them auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
much
THAT NO-YET-ONE MAY-BE-KNOWING this no-one
AND
43 And he charged them straitly that no man should know it; and commanded that something should be given her to eat.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
He-said
TO-BE-GIVEN to-her
TO-BE-EATING
AV
Mark 6
6:1 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekeiqen kai ercetai ekeithen kai erchomai

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
patrida patris
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-OUT-CAME thence he-came-out oi ho
AND
He-IS-COMING is-coming
INTO THE
FATHER[-place] OF-Him own-country
AND
. And he went out from thence, and came into his own country; and his disciples follow him.
akolouqousin autw akoloutheO autos


t_ Nom Pl m
ARE-followING
to-Him him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
6:2 kai genomenou

kai
Conj
ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg n
sabbatou hrxato sabbaton archO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor midD 3 Sg
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AND
WH
OF-BECOMING
OF-SABBATH
He-begins
TO-BE-TEACHING IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD AND synagogue toutw houtos

pd Dat Sg m
oi
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
akouontes akouO
exeplhssonto legontes ekplEssO legO

vi impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
poqen pothen
Adv Int
MANY majority tauta houtos

pd Nom Pl n
HEARING
were-astonishED
sayING
?-WHICH-PLACE to-this-One whence ? to-this-man toutw kai ai houtos kai ho

pd Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl f
And when the sabbath day was come, he began to teach in the synagogue: and many hearing [him] were astonished, saying, From whence hath this [man] these things? and what wisdom [is] this which is given unto him, that even such mighty works are wrought by his hands?
kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doqeisa didOmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
these AND these-things dunameis dunamis

n_ Nom Pl f
ANY what ?
THE
WISDOM
THE
BEING-GIVEN
to-this-One to-this-man
AND
THE
toiautai dia toioutos dia

pd Nom Pl f Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ceirwn autou cheir autos

n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Sg m
ginomenai ginomai
ABILITIES such powerful-deeds
THRU THE through estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HANDS
OF-Him
BECOMING occurring uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
6:3 ouc
ou
Part Neg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tektwn o tektOn ho
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
marias maria
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
NOT
this
IS
THE
ARTisan carpenter
THE
SON
OF-THE
MARY
AND
adelfos iakwbou adelphos iakObos

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
kai iwshtos kai iouda kai iOsEs kai ioudas

Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
kai simwnos kai ouk kai simOn kai ou

Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
Is not this the carpenter, the son of Mary, the brother of James, and Joses, and of Juda, and Simon? and are not his sisters here with us? And they were offended at him.
brother
OF-JACOBUS AND of-James adelfai autou adelphE autos

n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg m
OF-JOSES
AND
OF-JUDAS
AND
OF-SIMON
AND
NOT
ARE
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
wde pros hOde pros

Adv Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai eskandalizonto en kai skandalizO en

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
sisters
OF-Him
here
TOWARD US
AND
THEY-were-SNARED
IN
Him
6:4 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
atimos atimos
a_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
that
NOT
IS
BEFORE-AVERer UN-VALUED prophet dishonored suggeneusin suggenEs

a_ Dat Pl m
But Jesus said unto them, A prophet is not without honour, but in his own country, and among his own kin, and in his own house.
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
patridi patris
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
IF
NO
IN
THE
FATHER[-place] OF-him own-country autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
IN THE among
TOGETHER-generateds OF-him relatives
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
IN
THE
HOME
OF-him
6:5 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
edunato dunamai
ekei poihsai oudemian ekei poieO oudeis

Adv vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg f
dunamin dunamis
n_ Acc Sg f
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
oligois oligos
a_ Dat Pl m
AND
NOT
He-was-ABLE he-could epiqeis epitithEmi

there
TO-DO
NOT-YET-ONE ABILITY IF powerful-deed
NO
to-FEW
And he could there do no mighty work, save that he laid his hands upon a few sick folk, and healed [them].
arrwstois arrhOstos
a_ Dat Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras eqerapeusen cheir therapeuO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
UN-FARE-WELLS ON-PLACING ones-ailing placing-on
THE
NA
HANDS
He-curES
6:6 kai
kai
Conj
WH
eqaumasen
eqaumazen thaumazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apistian autwn apistia autos

kai perihgen kai periagO

AND
He-MARVELED
THRU THE because-of
UN-BELIEF unbelief
OF-them
AND
He-ABOUT-LED he-went-about
And he marvelled because of their unbelief. And he went round about the villages, teaching.
AV
Mark 6
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
kuklw kuklO
n_ Dat Sg m
didaskwn didaskO
THE
VILLAGES to-AROUND TEACHING around tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
6:7 kai proskaleitai

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
dwdeka kai hrxato dOdeka kai archO

ni numeral Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autous apostellein autos apostellO

AND
He-IS-TOWARD-CALLING THE he-is-calling-to-him duo duo

ni numeral
TWO-TEN twelve
AND
begins he-begins
them
TO-BE-commissionING to-be-dispatching akaqartwn akathartos

a_ Gen Pl n
. And he called [unto him] the twelve, and began to send them forth by two and two; and gave them power over unclean spirits;
duo duo
ni numeral

autois exousian twn autos exousia ho

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n
pneumatwn twn pneuma ho

TWO
TWO
AND
GAVE
to-them them
authority
OF-THE
spirits
THE
UN-clean unclean ei ei
Cond
6:8 kai parhggeilen autois ina

kai
Conj
paraggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
hina
Conj
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
airwsin airO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
AND
He-chargES
to-them them arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
THAT NO-YET-ONE THEY-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING INTO WAY nothing they-should-be-picking-up road mh mE

Part Neg
IF
NO
And commanded them that they should take nothing for [their] journey, save a staff only; no scrip, no bread, no money in [their] purse:
rabdon monon mh rhabdos monon mE

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Part Neg
phran pEra
n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
zwnhn zOnE
n_ Acc Sg f
calkon chalkos
n_ Acc Sg m
ROD staff
ONLY
NO
BREAD
NO
BAG (beggar's) NO beggar's-bag kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
INTO THE
WH
GIRDle
COPPER
6:9 alla upodedemenous

alla
Conj
hupodeO
sandalia sandalion
n_ Acc Pl n
endusasqai
But [be] shod with sandals; and not put on two coats.
but
NA
HAVING-been-UNDER-BOUND PLANK-BINDettes AND having-been-bound-on soles duo duo

ni numeral
NO
endushsqe enduO
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
citwnas chitOn
n_ Acc Pl m
YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING ye-should-be-putting-on
TWO
TUNICS
6:10 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois opou autos hopou

pp Dat Pl m Adv
ean ean
Cond
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
ekei ekei
Adv
AND
He-said
to-them
THE-?-where IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO HOME wherever ye-may-be-entering house ekeiqen ekeithen
Adv
there
10 And he said unto them, In what place soever ye enter into an house, there abide till ye depart from that place.
menete menO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
exelqhte exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
BE-REMAINING TILL be-ye-remaining !
EVER YE-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence ye-may-be-coming-out an an

Part
6:11 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mhde mEde
Conj
AND
WHO which
EVER PLACE
NO
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) ye
NO-YET nor-yet coun choos

n_ Acc Sg m
akouswsin akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ekporeuomenoi ekporeuomai
ekeiqen ektinaxate ton ekeithen ektinassO ho

Adv vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING OF-YOU(p) OUT-GOING ye going-out ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
thence
OUT-QUIVER shake-off-ye !
THE
SOIL
11 And whosoever shall not receive you, nor hear you, when ye depart thence, shake off the dust under your feet for a testimony against them. Verily I say unto you, It shall be more tolerable for Sodom and Gomorrha in the day of judgment, than for that city.
upokatw hupokatO
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep

THE
UNDER-DOWN OF-THE underneath the
FEET
OF-YOU(p) INTO witness of-ye testimony ina hina

Conj
to-them
6:12 kai exelqontes

kai
Conj
exerchomai
ekhruxan kErussO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
metanowsin metanoeO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
12 And they went out, and preached that men should repent.
AND
THEY-PROCLAIM THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-after-MINDING they-herald they-should-be-repenting exeballon ekballO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
6:13 kai daimonia polla

kai
Conj
daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
kai hleifon kai aleiphO

elaiw elaion
n_ Dat Sg n
pollous polus
a_ Acc Pl m
AND
demons
MANY
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) AND they-cast-out(past)
THEY-RUBBED to-OLIVE-oil MANY to-oil
13 And they cast out many devils, and anointed with oil many that were sick, and healed [them].
arrwstous arrhOstos
a_ Acc Pl m
kai eqerapeuon kai therapeuO

UN-FARE-WELLS AND ones-ailing
THEY-curED cured-them
AV
Mark 6
6:14 kai hkousen

kai
Conj
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus hrwdhs basileus hErOdEs

faneron gar egeneto phaneros gar ginomai

a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
HEARS
THE
KING
HEROD
apparent manifest
for
BECAME
THE
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

oti iwannhs o hoti iOannEs ho

baptizwn baptizO
eghgertai egeirO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
14 . And king Herod heard [of him]; (for his name was spread abroad:) and he said, That John the Baptist was risen from the dead, and therefore mighty works do shew forth themselves in him.
NAME
OF-Him
AND
THEY-said
that
JOHN
THE
one-DIPizING one-baptizing dunameis dunamis

n_ Nom Pl f
HAS-been-ROUSED OUT
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
energousin ai energeO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
OF-DEAD-ones AND of-dead-ones
THRU this because-of elegon legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
ARE-IN-ACTING are-operating oti hlias hoti Elias

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
THE
ABILITIES IN powerful-deeds alloi allos

a_ Nom Pl m
him
6:15 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
others
YET said
that
ELIAS Elijah
He-IS
others
YET said
that
15 Others said, That it is Elias. And others said, That it is a prophet, or as one of the prophets.
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
ws eis hOs heis

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
BEFORE-AVERer AS prophet
ONE
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
6:16 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apekefalisa apokephalizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
HEARing hearing-this iwannhn outos iOannEs houtos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Nom Sg m
YET THE
HEROD
said
WHOM
FROM-HEADize behead
16 But when Herod heard [thereof], he said, It is John, whom I beheaded: he is risen from the dead.
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
JOHN
this this-one
WAS-ROUSED
6:17 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
aposteilas apostellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ekrathsen ton krateO ho

iwannhn kai iOannEs kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
he
for
THE
HEROD
commissioning dispatching dia dia

Prep
HOLDS
THE
JOHN
AND
edhsen deO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
hrwdiada thn hErOdias ho

gunaika filippou tou gunE philippos ho

17 For Herod himself had sent forth and laid hold upon John, and bound him in prison for Herodias'sake, his brother Philip's wife: for he had married her.
BINDS
him
IN
GUARD-house THRU HERODIAS jail because-of egamhsen gameO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-Philip
THE

oti authn hoti autos

Conj pp Acc Sg f
brother
OF-him
that
her
he-MARRIES
6:18 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs tw iOannEs ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
hrwdh hErOdEs
n_ Dat Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
18 For John had said unto Herod, It is not lawful for thee to have thy brother's wife.
said
for
THE
JOHN
to-THE
HEROD
that
NOT
it-IS-allowed
to-YOU you
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika tou gunE ho


TO-BE-HAVING THE
WOMAN wife
OF-THE
brother
OF-YOU
6:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
hrwdias eneicen hErOdias enechO

n_ Nom Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai hqelen kai thelO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apokteinai kai apokteinO kai

vn Aor Act Conj
THE
YET HERODIAS
IN-HAD hemmed-in
to-him him
AND
WILLED
him
AND
19 Therefore Herodias had a quarrel against him, and would have killed him; but she could not:
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdunato dunamai
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Att
NOT
was-ABLE she-could gar hrwdhs gar hErOdEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
6:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
efobeito phobeO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn eidws iOannEs eidO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE
for
HEROD
FEARED
THE
JOHN
HAVING-PERCEIVED him being-aware
20 For Herod feared John, knowing that he was a just man and an holy, and observed him; and when he heard him, he did many things, and heard him
AV
Mark 6
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
dikaion kai agion dikaios kai hagios

a_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg m
kai sunethrei kai suntEreO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai akousas kai akouO

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
gladly.
MAN
JUST
AND
HOLY
AND
TOGETHER-KEPT him he-preserved hkouen akouO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
HEARing
OF-him him
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
hporei aporeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai hdews kai hEdeOs

Conj Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
much
he-was-perplexED AND
GRATIFYly OF-him with-relish him eukairou eukairos

a_ Gen Sg f
he-HEARD heard ote hrwdhs hote hErOdEs

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
6:21 kai genomenhs

kai
Conj
ginomai
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
genesiois genesia
n_ Dat Pl n
AND
OF-BECOMING
DAY of-day
WELL-SEASONED when opportune
HEROD
to-THE
birthdays birthday-celebrations ciliarcois chiliarchos

n_ Dat Pl m
21 And when a convenient day was come, that Herod on his birthday made a supper to his lords, high captains, and chief [estates] of Galilee;
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
deipnon epoihsen tois deipnon poieO ho

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
megistasin autou megistanes autos

kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
OF-him
DINner
makES
to-THE
GREATest-ones magnates
OF-him
AND
to-THE the
THOUSAND-chiefs AND captains
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
prwtois prOtos
a_ Dat Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
to-THE the
BEFORE-most OF-THE foremost-men
GALILEE
6:22 kai eiselqoushs ths

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg f
ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qugatros autou thugatEr autos

hrwdiados kai orchsamenhs hErOdias kai orcheomai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Aor midD Gen Sg f
AND
OF-INTO-COMING of-entering tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
DAUGHTER
OF-him
OF-HERODIAS
AND
OF-DANCing
WH WH
hresen areskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hrwdh hErOdEs
n_ Dat Sg m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
sunanakeimenois sunanakeimai
WH WH
o de basileus eipen
22 And when the daughter of the said Herodias came in, and danced, and pleased Herod and them that sat with him, the king said unto the damsel, Ask of me whatsoever thou wilt, and I will give [it] thee.
she-PLEASES to-THE the

NA
HEROD
NA
AND
to-THE the tw ho
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING ones-lying-back-at-table-together korasiw aithson korasion aiteO

n_ Dat Sg n vm Aor Act 2 Sg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus basileus
n_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
t_ Dat Sg n
said
THE
KING
to-THE
maiden
REQUEST ME request-you-of !
WHICH
IF-EVER
qelhs thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
kai dwsw kai didOmi

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-WILLING AND you-may-be-willing
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU I-shall-be-giving-it

NA
6:23 kai wmosen

kai
Conj
omnuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
he-SWEARS
to-her
much
WHICH
ANY what
IF-EVER ME
23 And he sware unto her, Whatsoever thou shalt ask of me, I will give [it] thee, unto the half of my kingdom.
aithshs aiteO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ews hmisous heOs hEmisu

Conj a_ Gen Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias basileia
n_ Gen Sg f
YOU-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU
TILL
OF-HALF-EQUAL OF-THE half
KINGdom
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
6:24 kai exelqousa

kai
Conj
exerchomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
aithswmai aiteO
vs Aor Mid 1 Sg
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out de de
Conj
she-said
to-THE
MOTHER
OF-her
ANY what ?
I-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING
24 And she went forth, and said unto her mother, What shall I ask? And she said, The head of John the Baptist.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

baptizontos baptizO
THE
YET she-said
THE
HEAD
OF-JOHN
OF-THE the
one-DIPizING one-baptizing basilea hthsato basileus aiteO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
25 And she came in straightway with haste unto the king, and asked, saying, I will that thou give me by and by in a charger the head of John the
6:25 kai eiselqousa

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
euqus euthus
Adv
meta spoudhs pros meta spoudE pros

Prep n_ Gen Sg f Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
straightway WITH
DILIGENCE
TOWARD THE
KING
she-REQUESTS
AV
Mark 6
legousa legO
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
exauths dws exautEs didOmi

Adv vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
epi pinaki thn epi pinax ho

Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
Baptist.
sayING
I-AM-WILLING THAT forthwith
YOU-MAY-BE-GIVING to-ME me
ON
BOARD platter
THE

baptistou baptistEs
n_ Gen Sg m
HEAD
OF-JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
6:26 kai perilupos

kai
Conj
perilupos
a_ Nom Sg m
genomenos ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m
basileus dia basileus dia

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
orkous kai horkos kai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
AND
ABOUT-SORROW BECOMING sorrow-stricken anakeimenous anakeimai

THE
KING
THRU THE because-of authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
OATHS
AND
26 And the king was exceeding sorry; [yet] for his oath's sake, and for their sakes which sat with him, he would not reject her.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hqelhsen aqethsai thelO atheteO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act
THE
NOT
he-WILLS
TO-UN-PLACE SAME to-repudiate her basileus spekoulatora epetaxen enegkai basileus spekoulatOr epitassO pherO
n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
27 And immediately the king sent an executioner, and commanded his head to be brought: and he went and beheaded him in the prison,
6:27 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
aposteilas apostellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
straightway commissioning dispatching kefalhn autou kephalE autos

THE
KING
life-guardsman
enjoins
TO-CARRY to-bring
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
HEAD
OF-him
6:28 kai apelqwn

kai
Conj
aperchomai
apekefalisen auton apokephalizO autos

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
(6:28)
kai hnegken kai pherO

AND
he-FROM-HEADizES he-beheads
him
IN
THE
GUARD-house jail tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
CARRIES
28 And brought his head in a charger, and gave it to the damsel: and the damsel gave it to her mother.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

epi pinaki kai edwken epi pinax kai didOmi

Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
korasiw kai korasion kai

n_ Dat Sg n Conj
THE
HEAD
OF-him
ON
BOARD platter authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
AND
GIVES
it
herit
to-THE
maiden
AND
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
korasion edwken korasion didOmi

n_ Nom Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
THE
maiden
GIVES
it
herit
to-THE
MOTHER
OF-her

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai hran kai airO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ptwma ptOma
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
HEARing hearing-of-it kai eqhkan kai tithEmi

THE
LEARNers disciples en en
Prep
OF-him
CAME
AND
LIFT take-away
THE
corpse
29 And when his disciples heard [of it], they came and took up his corpse, and laid it in a tomb.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
OF-him
AND
THEY-PLACE it
IN
memorial-vault tomb apostoloi pros apostolos pros

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
6:30 kai sunagontai

kai
Conj
sunagO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-LED THE are-being-gathered autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
commissioners apostles osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
TOWARD THE
JESUS
AND
30 . And the apostles gathered themselves together unto Jesus, and told him all things, both what they had done, and what they had taught.
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
epoihsan kai osa poieO kai hosos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pk Acc Pl n
edidaxan didaskO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE to-Him they-report
ALL
as-much-as THEY-DO whatever umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
AND
as-much-as THEY- TEACH whatever they-teach idian idios

a_ Acc Sg f
6:31 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois deute autos deute

pp Dat Pl m vm txx vxx 2 Pl
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
kat kata
Prep
eis eis
Prep
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
HITHER hither-ye !
YOU(p) ye
SAME yourselves gar oi gar ho

Conj
according-to OWN
INTO DESOLATE
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai anapausasqe oligon hsan kai anapauO oligos eimi

Conj vm Aor Mid 2 Pl Adv vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ercomenoi erchomai
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
31 And he said unto them, Come ye yourselves apart into a desert place, and rest a while: for there were many coming and going, and they had no leisure so much as to eat.
t_ Nom Pl m
PLACE
AND
UP-CEASE-YE rest-ye !
FEW briefly
WERE
for
THE-ones the-ones
COMING
AND
THE-ones the-ones
AV
Mark 6
upagontes hupagO
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai oude kai oude

Conj Adv
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
eukairoun eukaireO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
UNDER-LEADING going-away
MANY
AND
NOT-YET TO-BE-EATING THEY-WELL-SEASONED they-had-opportunity tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
6:32 kai aphlqon

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
eis eis
Prep
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
kat kata
Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
32 And they departed into a desert place by ship privately.
AND
THEY-FROM-CAME IN they-came-away
THE
FLOATer ship
INTO DESOLATE PLACE

WH NA
according-to OWN
6:33 kai eidon

kai
Conj
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autous upagontas autos hupagO

kai kai
Conj
egnwsan
epegnwsan epiginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
AND
THEY-PERCEIVED them
UNDER-LEADING going-away
AND
THEY-ON-KNOW recognize-them ekei kai prohlqon ekei kai proerchomai

Adv Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
MANY
33 And the people saw them departing, and many knew him, and ran afoot thither out of all cities, and outwent them, and came together unto him.
kai pezh kai pezE

Conj Adv
apo apo
Prep
paswn twn pas ho

a_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
polewn sunedramon polis suntrechO

n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
aFOOT FROM ALL
THE
cities
THEY-TOGETHER-RAN there they-ran-together
AND
THEY-BEFORE-CAME came-before
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
6:34 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai esplagcnisqh kai splagchnizomai

ep epi
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
AND
He-PERCEIVED MANY vast econta echO
THRONG
AND
He-IS-compassionatED ON he-is-moved-with-compassion
them
oti hsan hoti eimi

ws probata mh hOs probaton mE

Adv n_ Nom Pl n Part Neg
poimena kai hrxato poimEn kai archO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
34 And Jesus, when he came out, saw much people, and was moved with compassion toward them, because they were as sheep not having a shepherd: and he began to teach them many things.
that
THEY-WERE AS
sheep sheep(p)
NO
HAVING
SHEPHERD
AND
He-begins
TO-BE-TEACHING
autous polla autos polus

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
them
much many-things wras hOra

n_ Gen Sg f
6:35 kai hdh

kai
Conj
EdE
Adv
pollhs polus
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
proselqontes autw proserchomai autos

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
ALREADY OF-HOUR
much BECOMING much-advanced oti erhmos hoti erEmos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD-COMING coming-to o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-Him him
THE
35 And when the day was now far spent, his disciples came unto him, and said, This is a desert place, and now the time [is] far passed:

elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai hdh kai EdE

Conj Adv
LEARNers disciples wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-Him
said
that
DESOLATE
IS
THE
PLACE
AND
ALREADY
pollh polus
a_ Nom Sg f
HOUR
MANY much-advanced apelqontes aperchomai

6:36 apoluson autous ina

apoluO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kuklw kuklO
n_ Dat Sg m
agrous kai kwmas agros kai kOmE

FROM-LOOSE dismiss-you ! agoraswsin agorazO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
them
THAT FROM-COMING coming-away eautois ti heautou tis

pf 3 Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n
INTO THE
to-AROUND FIELDS around
AND
VILLAGES
36 Send them away, that they may go into the country round about, and into the villages, and buy themselves bread: for they have nothing to eat.
fagwsin esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BUYING to-selves themselves
ANY
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
6:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois dote autos didOmi


THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
to-them them
YOU(p) ye dhnariwn dEnarion

n_ Gen Pl n
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
agoraswmen agorazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
37 He answered and said unto them, Give ye them to eat. And they say unto him, Shall we go and buy two hundred pennyworth of bread, and give them to eat?
TO-BE-EATING AND
WE-SHOULD-BE-BUYING OF-DENARII
AV
Mark 6
diakosiwn artous kai dwsomen diakosioi artos kai didOmi

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 1 Pl
autois fagein autos esthiO

pp Dat Pl m vn 2Aor Act
TWO-hundred
BREADS bread(p) de de
Conj
AND
WE-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-them them autois posous autos posos

pp Dat Pl m pq Acc Pl m
WH
TO-BE-EATING
WH NA NA
6:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ecete artous
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
YET He-IS-sayING
to-them
how-many how-many ? legousin legO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
BREADS YE-ARE-HAVING cakes-of-bread pente kai duo pente kai duo

ni numeral Conj ni numeral
38 He saith unto them, How many loaves have ye? go and see. And when they knew, they say, Five, and two fishes.
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
idete eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai gnontes kai ginOskO

icquas ichthus
n_ Acc Pl m
BE-UNDER-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING AND be-ye-going-away ! be-ye-perceiving !
KNOWING
NA
THEY-ARE-sayING FIVE
AND
TWO
FISHES
6:39 kai epetaxen autois

kai
Conj
WH
anakliqhnai
epitassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
anaklinai anaklinO
vn Aor Act
pantas sumposia pas sumposion

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n
AND
He-enjoins
to-them them clwrw chlOros

a_ Dat Sg m
TO-UP-CLINE to-recline cortw chortos

n_ Dat Sg m
ALL them-all
TOGETHER-DRINK company
39 And he commanded them to make all sit down by companies upon the green grass.
sumposia sumposion
n_ Acc Pl n
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg m
TOGETHER-DRINK ON company
THE
GREEN
FODDER grass ekaton kai kata hekaton kai kata

ni numeral Conj Prep
6:40 kai anepesan

kai
Conj
anapiptO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
prasiai prasiai kata prasia prasia kata

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Prep
penthkonta pentEkonta
ni numeral
40 And they sat down in ranks, by hundreds, and by fifties.
AND
THEY-UP-FALL PRACTISE they-lean-back plot tous ho
PRACTISE plot
according-to HUNDRED AND
according-to FIVE-ty fifty duo duo

ni numeral
6:41 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO

kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
icquas ichthus
n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
GETTING taking eis eis

Prep
THE
FIVE
THE
TWO
FISHES
anableyas anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon euloghsen kai kateklasen tous ouranos eulogeO kai kataklaO ho

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
41 And when he had taken the five loaves and the two fishes, he looked up to heaven, and blessed, and brake the loaves, and gave [them] to his disciples to set before them; and the two fishes divided he among them all.
UP-looking looking-up edidou didOmi

vi impf Act 3 Sg
INTO THE
heaven
NA
He-blessES
AND
DOWN-BREAKS breaks-up
THE
BREADS AND cakes-of-bread autois kai autos kai

pp Dat Pl m Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais mathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
paratiqwsin paratithEmi
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
GAVE
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BESIDE-PLACING to-them they-may-be-placing-before them
AND
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
icquas emerisen pasin ichthus merizO pas

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m
THE
TWO
FISHES
He-PARTS
to-ALL
6:42 kai efagon

kai
Conj
esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kai ecortasqhsan kai chortazO

42 And they did all eat, and were filled.
AND
THEY-ATE
ALL
AND
ARE-satisfiED
6:43 kai hran

kai
Conj
airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
klasmata dwdeka kofinwn klasma dOdeka kophinos

n_ Acc Pl n ni numeral n_ Gen Pl m
plhrwmata kai apo plErOma kai apo

n_ Acc Pl n Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
icquwn ichthus
n_ Gen Pl m
43 And they took up twelve baskets full of the fragments, and of the fishes.
AND
BREAKS fragments oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
TWO-TEN twelve fagontes esthiO
OF-PANNIERS FILLings panniers filled-up

WH
AND
NA
FROM THE
NA
FISHES
6:44 kai hsan

kai
Conj
tous artous
WH
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
44 And they that did eat of the loaves were about five thousand men.
AND
WERE
THE
ones-EATING ones-eating
THE
BREADS cakes-of-bread
pentakiscilioi andres pentakischilioi anEr

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
MEN
6:45 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
hnagkasen anagkazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

embhnai embainO
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
straightway He-necessitatES THE he-compels
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
TO-IN-STEP INTO THE to-step-in
FLOATer ship
45 . And straightway he constrained his disciples to get into the ship, and to go to the other side before unto Bethsaida, while he sent away
AV
Mark 6
kai proagein kai proagO

Conj vn Pres Act
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
pros pros
Prep
bhqsaidan ews autos bEthsaida heOs autos

ni proper Conj pp Nom Sg m
the people.
AND
TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING INTO THE to-be-preceding ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OTHER-SIDE TOWARD BETHSAIDA
TILL
He
apoluei apoluO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
IS-FROM-LOOSING THE is-dismissing
THRONG
6:46 kai apotaxamenos autois aphlqen

kai
Conj
apotassomai
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
autos
pp Dat Pl m
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
proseuxasqai proseuchomai
vn Aor midD
46 And when he had sent them away, he departed into a mountain to pray.
AND
FROM-SETTing taking-leave
to-them
He-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
mountain
TO-pray
6:47 kai oyias

kai
Conj
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
47 And when even was come, the ship was in the midst of the sea, and he alone on the land.
AND
OF-evening BECOMING
WAS
THE
FLOATer ship ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
MIDst middle
OF-THE
qalasshs kai autos thalassa kai autos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pp Nom Sg m
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
SEA
AND
He
ONLY alone
ON
THE
LAND
6:48 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
autous basanizomenous en autos basanizO en

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
elaunein elaunO
vn Pres Act
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar gar
Conj
AND
PERCEIVING
them
beING-ORDEALizED being-tormented
IN
THE
TO-BE-DRIVING WAS to-be-rowing nuktos nux

n_ Gen Sg f
for
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anemos anemos
n_ Nom Sg m
enantios autois peri enantios autos peri

a_ Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Prep
tetarthn fulakhn ths tetartos phulakE ho

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
48 And he saw them toiling in rowing; for the wind was contrary unto them: and about the fourth watch of the night he cometh unto them, walking upon the sea, and would have passed by them.
THE
WIND
IN-INSTEAD contrary pros pros

Prep
to-them
ABOUT FOURth
GUARD watch
OF-THE
NIGHT
ercetai erchomai
autous peripatwn autos peripateO

epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs kai hqelen thalassa kai thelO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
He-IS-COMING
TOWARD them
ON
THE
SEA
AND
WILLED he-willed
vn 2Aor Act
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING them to-be-passing-by
6:49 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
idontes eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs peripatounta edoxan thalassa peripateO dokeO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
YET PERCEIVING ones-perceiving
Him
ON
THE
SEA
THEY-SEEM suppose
49 But when they saw him walking upon the sea, they supposed it had been a spirit, and cried out:
oti fantasma estin hoti phantasma eimi

kai anekraxan kai anakrazO

that
APPEAR-effect He-IS phantom
AND
THEY-UP-CRY they-cry-out kai etaracqhsan kai tarassO

6:50 pantes gar auton

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
autos
pp Acc Sg m
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
euqus euthus
Adv
ALL
for
Him
THEY-PERCEIVED AND
WERE-DISTURBED THE
YET straightway
elalhsen met autwn laleO meta autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
kai legei kai legO

autois qarseite autos tharseO

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
50 For they all saw him, and were troubled. And immediately he talked with them, and saith unto them, Be of good cheer: it is I; be not afraid.
He-TALKS he-speaks fobeisqe phobeO
WITH them
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
BE-YE-COURAGE-ING I be-ye-having-courage !
AM
NO
6:51 kai anebh

kai
Conj
anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep

pp Acc Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai ekopasen o ploion kai kopazO ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
AND
UP-STEPPed he-stepped-up
TOWARD them
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
AND
STRIKES flags
THE
51 And he went up unto them into the ship; and the wind ceased: and they were sore amazed in themselves beyond measure, and wondered.
AV
Mark 6 - Mark 7
anemos anemos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai lian kai lian

Conj Adv
NA
ek ek
Prep
NA
perissou perissos
a_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
eautois existanto heautou existEmi

pf 3 Dat Pl m vi impf Mid 3 Pl
WIND
AND
VERY
OUT OF-excessive
IN selves among themselves artois all hn artos alla eimi

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
THEY-are-OUT-STOOD they-are-amazed autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
6:52 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar sunhkan gar suniEmi

epi tois epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Pl m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
52 For they considered not [the miracle] of the loaves: for their heart was hardened.
NOT
for
THEY-understand ON
THE
BREADS bread(p)
but
WAS
OF-them
THE
HEART
pepwrwmenh pOroO
HAVING-been-CALLOUSED
6:53 kai diaperasantes epi thn

kai
Conj
diaperaO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
gennhsaret kai gennEsaret kai

ni proper Conj
AND
ferrying
ON
THE
LAND
THEY-CAME
INTO GENNESARET
AND
53 And when they had passed over, they came into the land of Gennesaret, and drew to the shore.
proswrmisqhsan prosormizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ARE-TOWARD-RUSHED are-moored
6:54 kai exelqontwn autwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
autos
pp Gen Pl m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
euqus euthus
Adv
epignontes epiginOskO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
54 And when they were come out of the ship, straightway they knew him,
AND
OF-OUT-COMING of-coming-out
them of-them thn ho
OUT OF-THE
FLOATer ship
straightway ON-KNOWING recognizing epi tois epi ho

Prep
Him
6:55 periedramon olhn

peritrechO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
holos
a_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
ekeinhn kai hrxanto ekeinos kai archO

pd Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl
t_ Acc Sg f
t_ Dat Pl m
ABOUT-RAN ran-about
WHOLE
THE
SPACE country
that
AND
THEY-begin
ON
THE
55 And ran through that whole region round about, and began to carry about in beds those that were sick, where they heard he was.
krabattois tous krabattos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl m

periferein peripherO
vn Pres Act
opou hopou
Adv
hkouon akouO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
PALLETS
THE-ones the-ones
EVILly illness
HAVING
TO-BE-ABOUT-CARRYING THE-?-where THEY-HEARD that to-be-carrying-about wheree
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
He-IS
6:56 kai opou

kai
Conj
hopou
Adv
an an
Part
eiseporeueto eis eisporeuomai eis

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
h E
Part
eis eis
Prep
poleis h polis E
n_ Acc Pl f Part
eis eis
Prep
agrous en agros en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
AND
THE-?-where EVER He-INTO-WENT wherever he-went-into
INTO VILLAGES OR
INTO cities
OR
INTO FIELDS
IN
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
agorais etiqesan tous agora tithEmi ho

n_ Dat Pl f vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
asqenountas astheneO
kai parekaloun kai parakaleO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
56 And whithersoever he entered, into villages, or cities, or country, they laid the sick in the streets, and besought him that they might touch if it were but the border of his garment: and as many as touched him were made whole.
THE
BUY-places THEY-PLACE markets tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
THE
ones-beING-UN-FIRM AND ones-being-infirm
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him they-entreated aywntai haptO

vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
THAT
kan kan
Cond Con


kai kai
Conj
AND-[IF]-EVER OF-THE and-if-ever the osoi hosos

pk Nom Pl m
HANG-FOOT tassel autou autos
OF-THE
cloak
OF-Him
THEY-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING AND
an an
Part
hyanto haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
eswzonto sOzO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
pp Gen Sg m
as-many-as EVER TOUCH
OF-it him it
were-SAVED
AV
Mark 7
7:1 kai sunagontai

kai
Conj
sunagO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi kai tines pharisaios kai tis

n_ Nom Pl m Conj px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-LED TOWARD Him are-being-gathered apo apo

Prep
THE
PHARISEES
AND
ANY some
OF-THE
. Then came together unto him the Pharisees, and certain of the scribes, which came from Jerusalem.
grammatewn elqontes grammateus erchomai

n_ Gen Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
ierosolumwn ierosoluma
n_ Gen Pl n
WRITers scribes
COMING
FROM JERUSALEM
7:2 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

oti koinais hoti koinos

Conj a_ Dat Pl f
cersin cheir
n_ Dat Pl f
AND
PERCEIVING
ANY some
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples tous ho
OF-Him
that
to-COMMON HANDS to-contaminated
And when they saw some of his disciples eat bread with defiled, that is to say, with unwashen, hands, they found fault.
tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx
aniptois aniptos
a_ Dat Pl m
esqiousin esthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
this
IS
to-UN-WASHED THEY-ARE-EATING THE to-unwashed gar farisaioi kai pantes gar pharisaios kai pas
Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
BREADS bread(p) ioudaioi ean ioudaios ean

a_ Nom Pl m Cond
7:3 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
pugmh pugmE
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
for
PHARISEES
AND
ALL
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
IF-EVER NO
to-FIST
For the Pharisees, and all the Jews, except they wash [their] hands oft, eat not, holding the tradition of the elders.
niywntai niptO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras ouk cheir ou

n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg
esqiousin kratountes esthiO krateO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paradosin paradosis
n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-SHOULD-BE-WASHING THE
HANDS
NOT
ARE-EATING
HOLDING
THE
tradition
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn presbuteros
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
SENIORS elders agoras agora

n_ Gen Sg f
7:4 kai ap
kai
Conj
apo
Prep
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
WH
rantiswntai
NA
baptiswntai baptizO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
FROM BUY-place market
IF-EVER NO
THEY-SHOULD-BE-beING-DIPizED they-should-be-being-baptized estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT
esqiousin esthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai alla kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
polla polus
a_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
parelabon paralambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kratein krateO
vn Pres Act
And [when they come] from the market, except they wash, they eat not. And many other things there be, which they have received to hold, [as] the washing of cups, and pots, brasen vessels, and of tables.
THEY-ARE-EATING AND
others MANY other-things
it-IS there-is
WHICH
THEY-BESIDE-GOT TO-BE-HOLDING they-accepted

NA
baptismous pothriwn baptismos potErion

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl n
kai xestwn kai calkiwn kai xestEs kai chalkion

Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl n
kai klinwn kai klinE

Conj n_ Gen Pl f
NA
DIPPings baptisms
OF-DRINK-cups AND of-cups
OF-EWERS AND ewers oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
OF-COPPERS copper-vessels
AND
OF-couches
7:5 kai eperwtwsin auton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
farisaioi kai oi pharisaios kai ho

grammateis dia grammateus dia

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
AND
ARE-inquirING-of
Him
THE
PHARISEES
AND
THE
WRITers scribes kata kata

Prep
THRU because-of paradosin paradosis

n_ Acc Sg f
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
peripatousin peripateO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Then the Pharisees and scribes asked him, Why walk not thy disciples according to the tradition of the elders, but eat bread with unwashen hands?
ANY what ? twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
NOT
ARE-ABOUT-TREADING THE are-walking
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
according-to THE
tradition
presbuterwn alla koinais presbuteros alla koinos

a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Dat Pl f
cersin esqiousin cheir esthiO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
SENIORS elders de de
Conj
but
to-COMMON HANDS to-contaminated
THEY-ARE-EATING THE are-eating
BREAD
7:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois kalws eprofhteusen hsaias autos kalOs prophEteuO Esaias

pp Dat Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
YET He-said
to-them
IDEALly
BEFORE-AVERS prophesies
WH
ISAIAH
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
upokritwn ws gegraptai hupokritEs hOs graphO

n_ Gen Pl m Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti
NA
oti hoti
Conj
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
He answered and said unto them, Well hath Esaias prophesied of you hypocrites, as it is written, This people honoureth me with [their] lips, but their heart is far from me.
THE
hypocrites
AS
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN
that
this
THE
PEOPLE
AV
Mark 7
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ceilesin me cheilos egO

n_ Dat Pl n pp 1 Acc Sg
tima timaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
porrw porrhO
Adv
apecei apechO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-THE
LIPS
ME
THE
YET HEART
OF-them
forward IS-FROM-HAVING at-a-distance is-being-away
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FROM ME
7:7 mathn de
matEn
Adv
de
Conj
sebontai sebomai
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
didaskontes didaskalias entalmata didaskO didaskalia entalma

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl n
VAIN in-vain anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
YET THEY-ARE-REVERING ME
TEACHING
TEACHings
directions
Howbeit in vain do they worship me, teaching [for] doctrines the commandments of men.
OF-humans
7:8 afentes
aphiEmi
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
krateite krateO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paradosin paradosis
n_ Acc Sg f
FROM-LETTING leaving twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
direction precept
OF-THE
God
YE-ARE-HOLDING THE
tradition
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
For laying aside the commandment of God, ye hold the tradition of men, [as] the washing of pots and cups: and many other such like things ye do.
OF-THE
humans
7:9 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois kalws aqeteite autos kalOs atheteO

pp Dat Pl m Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
He-said
to-them
IDEALly
YE-ARE-UN-PLACING THE ye-are-repudiating

WH
direction precept
OF-THE
God
And he said unto them, Full well ye reject the commandment of God, that ye may keep your own tradition.
ina hina
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

thrhshte
NA
sthshte histEmi
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
THAT THE
tradition
OF-YOU(p) of-ye tima timaO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
YE-SHOULD-BE-STANDING ye-should-be-establishing ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
7:10 mwushs gar eipen

mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
MOSES
for
said
BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring ! kakologwn kakologeO

FATHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
MOTHER
10 For Moses said, Honour thy father and thy mother; and, Whoso curseth father or mother, let him die the death:
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
mhtera qanatw teleutatw mEtEr thanatos teleutaO

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-YOU
AND
THE-one the de de
Conj
EVIL-sayING one-speaking-evil ean ean

Cond
FATHER
OR
MOTHER
to-DEATH
LET-him-BE-deceasING let-him-be-deceasing ! patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
7:11 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos tw anthrOpos ho
h E
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YOU(p) ye mhtri mEtEr

n_ Dat Sg f
YET ARE-sayING
IF-EVER MAY-BE-sayING human
to-THE
FATHER
OR
to-THE
korban korban
Hebrew
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dwron dOron
n_ Nom Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
ex ek
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
11 But ye say, If a man shall say to his father or mother, [It is] Corban, that is to say, a gift, by whatsoever thou mightest be profited by me; [he shall be free].
MOTHER
CORBAN (Hebrew) WHICH corban
IS
IF-EVER OUT OF-ME
wfelhqhs OpheleO
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-benefitED
7:12 ouketi
ouketi
Adv
afiete aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
poihsai tw poieO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
12 And ye suffer him no more to do ought for his father or his mother;
NOT-STILL YE-ARE-FROM-LETTING him not-longer ye-are-letting mhtri mEtEr

n_ Dat Sg f
NOT-YET-ONE TO-DO anything
to-THE
FATHER
OR
to-THE
MOTHER
AV
Mark 7
7:13 akurountes
akuroO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paradosei umwn paradosis humeis

n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
UN-SANCTIONING invalidating
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
to-THE
tradition
OF-YOU(p) to-WHICH of-ye which
13 Making the word of God of none effect through your tradition, which ye have delivered: and many such like things do ye.
paredwkate kai paromoia toiauta polla paradidOmi kai paromoios toioutos polus
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl n pd Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-BESIDE-GIVE ye-give-over
AND
BESIDE-LIKE like-things
such
MANY
YE-ARE-DOING
7:14 kai proskalesamenos palin ton

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
palin
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois akousate mou autos akouO egO

pp Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Gen Sg
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him kai sunete kai suniEmi

Conj vm 2Aor vxx 2 Pl
AGAIN
THE
THRONG
He-said
to-them
HEAR-YE hear-ye !
OF-ME me
14 And when he had called all the people [unto him], he said unto them, Hearken unto me every one [of you], and understand:
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ALL
AND
BE-understandING be-ye-understanding ! estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
7:15 ouden
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
exwqen exOthen
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou eisporeuomenon anthrOpos eisporeuomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IS nothing there-is o hos

pr Nom Sg n
OUT-PLACE OF-THE outside koinwsai auton koinoO autos

human
INTO-GOING going-into ek ek
Prep
INTO him
dunatai dunamai
alla ta alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
15 There is nothing from without a man, that entering into him can defile him: but the things which come out of him, those are they that defile the man.
WHICH
IS-ABLE can
TO-COMMON him to-contaminate estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
but
THE the-things ton ho
OUT OF-THE
human
ekporeuomena ekporeuomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
koinounta koinoO
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
OUT-GOINGS going-out
IS
THE the(p)
COMMONING contaminating
THE
human
7:16
16 If any man have ears to hear, let him hear.
. .
.
. .
.
7:17 kai ote eishlqen

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
ephrwtwn auton eperOtaO autos

AND
when
He-INTO-CAME INTO HOME he-entered house thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
FROM THE
THRONG
inquirED-of
Him
17 And when he was entered into the house from the people, his disciples asked him concerning the parable.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

parabolhn parabolE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable asunetoi este asunetos eimi

7:18 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois outws kai umeis autos houtOs kai humeis

pp Dat Pl m Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ARE
NOT
noeite noeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti pan hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
exwqen exOthen
Adv
eisporeuomenon eisporeuomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
18 And he saith unto them, Are ye so without understanding also? Do ye not perceive, that whatsoever thing from without entereth into the man, [it] cannot defile him;
YE-ARE-MINDING that ye-are-apprehending ou ou

Part Neg
EVERY everything auton autos
THE
OUT-PLACE INTO-GOING outside going-into
INTO THE
human
dunatai dunamai
koinwsai koinoO
vn Aor Act
pp Acc Sg m
NOT
IS-ABLE can
him
TO-COMMON to-contaminate autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
7:19 oti ouk

hoti
Conj
ou
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian all eis kardia alla eis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
koilian koilia
n_ Acc Sg f
that
NOT
it-IS-INTO-GOING it-is-going-into
OF-him
INTO THE
HEART
but
INTO THE
CAVITY bowel
19 Because it entereth not into his heart, but into the belly, and goeth out into the draught, purging all meats?
AV
Mark 7
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
afedrwna ekporeuetai aphedrOn ekporeuomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
kaqarizwn katharizO
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
brwmata brOma
n_ Acc Pl n
AND
INTO THE
FROM-SETTLE it-IS-OUT-GOING latrine it-is-going-out de de

Conj
cleansING
ALL
THE
FOODS
7:20 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ekporeuomenon anthrOpos ekporeuomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n
ekeino ekeinos
pd Nom Sg n
20 And he said, That which cometh out of the man, that defileth the man.
He-said
YET that
THE
OUT OF-THE
human
OUT-GOING going-out
that
koinoi koinoO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
IS-COMMONING THE is-contaminating
human
7:21 eswqen
esOthen
Adv
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kardias twn kardia ho

anqrwpwn oi anthrOpos ho
dialogismoi dialogismos
n_ Nom Pl m
INTO-PLACE for inside oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
OUT OF-THE
HEART
OF-THE
humans
THE
21 For from within, out of the heart of men, proceed evil thoughts, adulteries, fornications, murders,
kakoi kakos
a_ Nom Pl m
ekporeuontai porneiai ekporeuomai porneia

vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl f
klopai fonoi klopE phonos

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl m
THE
EVIL
ARE-OUT-GOING are-going-out pleonexiai pleonexia

n_ Nom Pl f
PROSTITUTIONS thefts
MURDERS
7:22 moiceiai
moicheia
n_ Nom Pl f
ponhriai ponEria
n_ Nom Pl f
dolos dolos
n_ Nom Sg m
aselgeia ofqalmos ponhros aselgeia ophthalmos ponEros

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
ADULTERIES MORE-HAVEings wickeds FRAUD greed(p) wickednesses guile blasfhmia blasphEmia

n_ Nom Sg f
wantonness
VIEWer eye
wicked
22 Thefts, covetousness, wickedness, deceit, lasciviousness, an evil eye, blasphemy, pride, foolishness:
uperhfania huperEphania
n_ Nom Sg f
afrosunh aphrosunE
n_ Nom Sg f
HARM-AVERment OVER-APPEARance UN-DISPOSition calumny pride imprudence
7:23 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Pl n
eswqen esOthen
Adv
ekporeuetai ekporeuomai
kai koinoi kai koinoO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
23 All these evil things come from within, and defile the man.
ALL
these
THE
wicked INTO-PLACE IS-OUT-GOING wicked-things inside is-going-out
AND
IS-COMMONING THE is-contaminating
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
human
WH
7:24 ekeiqen de
ekeithen
Adv
de
Conj
anastas anistEmi
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
oria horion
n_ Acc Pl n
turou turos
n_ Gen Sg f
kai
thence
WH
YET UP-STANDing rising kai eiselqwn kai eiserchomai

Conj
He-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away eis eis

Prep
boundaries OF-TYRE
sidwnos
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gnwnai kai ouk ginOskO kai ou

vn 2Aor Act Conj Part Neg
24 . And from thence he arose, and went into the borders of Tyre and Sidon, and entered into an house, and would have no man know [it]: but he could not be hid.
AND
WH NA
INTO HOME house laqein lanthanO

vn 2Aor Act
NOT-YET-ONE He-WILLED no-one
TO-KNOW
AND
NOT
hdunasqh
hdunhqh dunamai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg Att
He-WAS-enABLED he-could
TO-BE-OBLIVIOUSING to-be-eluding-them gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
7:25 all euqus

alla
Conj
euthus
Adv
akousasa akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
but
straightway HEARing
WOMAN
ABOUT Him
OF-WHOM HAD
THE
25 For a [certain] woman, whose young daughter had an unclean spirit, heard of him, and came and fell at his feet:
qugatrion auths thugatrion autos

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg f
pneuma akaqarton elqousa pneuma akathartos erchomai

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
prosepesen pros prospiptO pros

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
DAUGHER (dim) OF-her little-daughter podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
spirit
UN-clean unclean
COMING
TOWARD-FALLS prostrates
TOWARD THE
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
FEET
OF-Him
AV
Mark 7
7:26 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ellhnis surofoinikissa tw hellEnis surophoinikissa ho

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Sg n
genei genos
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET WOMAN
WAS
GREEK
SYRIA-PHOENICIAN Syro-Phoenician
to-THE
breed race ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
26 The woman was a Greek, a Syrophenician by nation; and she besought him that he would cast forth the devil out of her daughter.
hrwta erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
daimonion ekbalh daimonion ekballO

n_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
qugatros thugatEr
n_ Gen Sg f
she-askED
Him
THAT THE
demon
He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING OUT OF-THE he-should-be-casting-out
DAUGHTER
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
OF-her
7:27 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
cortasqhnai ta chortazO ho
vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
ou ou
Part Neg
gar gar
Conj
AND
He-said
to-her
FROM-LET let-you ! ton ho
BEFORE-most TO-BE-satisfiED first arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
offsprings children
NOT
for
27 But Jesus said unto her, Let the children first be filled: for it is not meet to take the children's bread, and to cast [it] unto the dogs.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
teknwn kai tois teknon kai ho

n_ Gen Pl n Conj t_ Dat Pl n
kunariois kunarion
n_ Dat Pl n
t_ Acc Sg m
it-IS
IDEAL
TO-BE-GETTING THE to-be-taking
BREAD
OF-THE
offsprings children
AND
to-THE
dogs (dim) puppies
balein ballO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-CASTING
WH
7:28 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai legei kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
nai
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
THE
YET she-answerED
AND
IS-sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
AND also
THE
28 And she answered and said unto him, Yes, Lord: yet the dogs under the table eat of the children's crumbs.
kunaria upokatw kunarion hupokatO

n_ Nom Pl n Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
trapezhs esqiousin apo trapeza esthiO apo

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
yiciwn twn psichion ho

dogs (dim) puppies paidiwn paidion

n_ Gen Pl n
table
ARE-EATING
FROM THE
SCRAPS
OF-THE
7:29 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
dia dia
Prep
touton ton houtos ho

pd Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
exelhluqen exerchomai
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
AND
He-said
to-her
THRU this because-of to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
THE
saying
BE-UNDER-LEADING HAS-OUT-COME be-you-going-away ! has-come-out
29 And he said unto her, For this saying go thy way; the devil is gone out of thy daughter.
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qugatros sou thugatEr su

daimonion daimonion
n_ Nom Sg n
OUT OF-THE
DAUGHTER
OF-YOU
THE
demon
7:30 kai apelqousa

kai
Conj
aperchomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-her
she-FOUND
THE
little-girl
30 And when she was come to her house, she found the devil gone out, and her daughter laid upon the bed.
beblhmenon ballO
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
klinhn kai to klinE kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg n
daimonion exelhluqos daimonion exerchomai

n_ Nom Sg n vp Perf Act Acc Sg n
HAVING-been-CAST ON prostrate
THE
couch
AND
THE
demon
HAVING-OUT-COME having-come-out hlqen erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
7:31 kai palin exelqwn

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
exerchomai
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
turou turos
n_ Gen Sg f
dia dia
Prep
sidwnos sidOn
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
AGAIN
OUT OF-THE
boundaries OF-TYRE
He-CAME
THRU SIDON through dekapolews dekapolis

n_ Gen Sg f
31 . And again, departing from the coasts of Tyre and Sidon, he came unto the sea of Galilee, through the midst of the coasts of Decapolis.
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

galilaias ana meson galilaia ana mesos

n_ Gen Sg f Prep a_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
INTO THE
SEA
OF-THE
GALILEE
UP
MIDst
OF-THE
boundaries TEN-city (Decapolis) of-Decapolis
AV
Mark 7 - Mark 8
7:32 kai ferousin

kai
Conj
pherO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kwfon kOphos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai mogilalon kai mogilalos

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
kai parakalousin kai parakaleO

AND
THEY-ARE-CARRYING to-Him they-are-bringing ina hina

Conj
MUTE deaf-mute autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
DIFFICULTY-TALKer AND stammering ceira cheir

n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING they-are-entreating
32 And they bring unto him one that was deaf, and had an impediment in his speech; and they beseech him to put his hand upon him.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epiqh epitithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Him
THAT He-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING to-him he-may-be-placing-on him apo apo

Prep
THE
HAND
7:33 kai apolabomenos auton

kai
Conj
apolambanO
autos
pp Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
kat kata
Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
FROM-GETTING getting-away
him
FROM THE
THRONG
according-to OWN
He-CASTS he-thrusts hyato haptO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
33 And he took him aside from the multitude, and put his fingers into his ears, and he spit, and touched his tongue;
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
daktulous autou daktulos autos

eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai ptusas kai ptuO

THE
FINGERS
OF-Him
INTO THE
EARS
OF-him
AND
SPITTing
TOUCHES
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
glwsshs autou glOssa autos

OF-THE the
TONGUE
OF-him
7:34 kai anableyas

kai
Conj
anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon estenaxen kai legei ouranos stenazO kai legO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
34 And looking up to heaven, he sighed, and saith unto him, Ephphatha, that is, Be opened.
AND
UP-looking looking-up o hos

pr Nom Sg n
INTO THE
heaven
He-groans
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
effaqa ephphatha
Aramaic
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dianoicqhti dianoigO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
EPHPHATHA WHICH
NA
IS
BE-BEING-THRU-UP-OPENed be-you-being-opened-up ! hnoighsan anoigO

vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
7:35 kai
kai
Conj
euqews eutheOs
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
akoai akoE
n_ Nom Pl f
kai eluqh kai luO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
immediately
WERE-UP-OPENed OF-him were-opened kai elalei kai laleO

Conj
THE
HEARings hearing(p)
AND
WAS-LOOSED THE
35 And straightway his ears were opened, and the string of his tongue was loosed, and he spake plain.
desmos desmos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
glwsshs autou glOssa autos

orqws orthOs
Adv
vi impf Act 3 Sg
BOND
OF-THE
TONGUE
OF-him
AND
he-TALKED he-spoke
ERECTly correctly legwsin legO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
7:36 kai diesteilato autois ina

kai
Conj
diastellO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
hina
Conj
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
He-THRU-PUTS he-cautions
to-them them
THAT to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-MAY-BE-sayING as-much-as YET to-them no-one they-may-be-telling them
36 And he charged them that they should tell no man: but the more he charged them, so much the more a great deal they published [it];
diestelleto autoi diastellO autos

vi impf Mid 3 Sg pp Nom Pl m
mallon perissoteron ekhrusson mallon perissos kErussO

Adv a_ Acc Sg n Cmp vi impf Act 3 Pl
He-THRU-PUT he-cautioned
they
RATHER
more-excessive more-exceedingly
PROCLAIMED heralded-it kalws panta kalOs pas

Adv a_ Acc Pl n
7:37 kai uperperissws exeplhssonto

kai
Conj
huperperissOs
Adv
ekplEssO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
legontes legO
pepoihken kai poieO kai

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj
AND
OVER-excessively superexceedingly kwfous poiei kOphos poieO

a_ Acc Pl m
THEY-were-astonishED sayING
NA
IDEALly
ALL all-things
He-HAS-DONE
AND also
37 And were beyond measure astonished, saying, He hath done all things well: he maketh both the deaf to hear, and the dumb to speak.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
kai kai
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
alalous lalein alalos laleO

a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
MUTES deaf-mutes
He-IS-makING TO-BE-HEARING AND
THE
UN-TALKS dumb-ones
TO-BE-TALKING to-be-speaking
AV
Mark 8
8:1 en
en
Prep

hmerais palin pollou oclou hEmera palin polus ochlos

n_ Dat Pl f Adv a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
ontos eimi
vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
IN
those
THE
DAYS
AGAIN
OF-MANY of-vast
THRONG
BEING
AND
NO
. In those days the multitude being very great, and having nothing to eat, Jesus called his disciples [unto him], and saith unto them,
econtwn echO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
fagwsin esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
proskalesamenos tous proskaleomai ho

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas legei mathEtEs legO

n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-HAVING
ANY anything
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him
THE
LEARNers disciples
He-IS-sayING
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
to-them
8:2 splagcnizomai
splagchnizomai
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti hdh hoti EdE

Conj Adv
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
I-AM-beING-compassionatED ON I-am-being-moved-with-compassion prosmenousin prosmenO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE
THRONG
that
ALREADY DAYS
THREE
I have compassion on the multitude, because they have now been with me three days, and have nothing to eat:
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
fagwsin esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-ME they-are-remaining-with me
AND
NOT
THEY-ARE-HAVING ANY anything
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
8:3 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
apolusw apoluO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
autous nhsteis eis autos nEstis eis

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
AND
IF-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING them I-should-be-dismissing en en

Prep
fasting
INTO HOME
OF-them
And if I send them away fasting to their own houses, they will faint by the way: for divers of them came from far.
ekluqhsontai ekluO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
kai tines kai tis

Conj px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
makroqen makrothen
Adv
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-LOOSED IN they-shall-be-fainting
WH
THE
WAY road
AND
ANY some
OF-them
FROM FAR-PLACE afar
eisin
NA
hkasin hEkO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
HAVE-ARRIVED
8:4 kai apekriqhsan autw

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

oti poqen hoti pothen

Conj Adv Int
toutous houtos
pd Acc Pl m
AND
answerED
to-Him him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
that
?-WHICH-PLACE these whence ? these-men
And his disciples answered him, From whence can a man satisfy these [men] with bread here in the wilderness?
dunhsetai dunamai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
wde cortasai artwn hOde chortazO artos

Adv vn Aor Act n_ Gen Pl m
ep epi
Prep
erhmias erEmia
n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-ABLE ANY can anyone
here
TO-satisfy
OF-BREADS ON of-bread(p) ecete echO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
DESOLATE wilderness oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
8:5 kai hrwta

kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autous posous autos posos

pp Acc Pl m pq Acc Pl m
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epta hepta
ni numeral
And he asked them, How many loaves have ye? And they said, Seven.
AND
He-askED
them
how-many YE-ARE-HAVING BREADS THE how-many ? cakes-of-bread oclw ochlos

n_ Dat Sg m
YET THEY-say
SEVEN
8:6 kai paraggellei tw

kai
Conj
paraggellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anapesein anapiptO
vn 2Aor Act
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-IS-chargING
to-THE the epta hepta

ni numeral
THRONG
TO-BE-UP-FALLING ON to-be-leaning-back
THE
LAND earth
AND
labwn lambanO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
eucaristhsas eklasen eucharisteO klaiO


tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
And he commanded the people to sit down on the ground: and he took the seven loaves, and gave thanks, and brake, and gave to his disciples to set before [them]; and they did set [them] before the people.
GETTING taking
THE
SEVEN
BREADS thanking cakes-of-bread giving-thanks
He-BREAKS
AND
He-GAVE gave tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to-THE

ina hina
Conj
paratiqwsin paratithEmi
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
kai pareqhkan kai paratithEmi

oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BESIDE-PLACING AND they-may-be-placing-them-before-them icqudia ichthudion

n_ Acc Pl n
THEY-BESIDE-PLACE to-THE they-place-them-before the eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THRONG
8:7 kai eicon

kai
Conj
echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oliga oligos
a_ Acc Pl n
kai euloghsas kai eulogeO

auta autos
pp Acc Pl n

Conj pd Acc Pl n
AND
THEY-HAD
FISHES (dim) FEW small-fishes
AND
blessing
them
He-said
AND also
these
And they had a few small fishes: and he blessed, and commanded to set them also before [them].
AV
Mark 8
paratiqenai paratithEmi
vn Aor Pas
TO-BESIDE-PLACE to-place-before-them
8:8 kai efagon

kai
Conj
esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ecortasqhsan kai hran kai chortazO kai airO

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
perisseumata klasmatwn epta perisseuma klasma hepta

n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl n ni numeral
AND
THEY-ATE
AND
ARE-satisfiED
AND
excess surplus
OF-BREAKS of-fragments
SEVEN
So they did eat, and were filled: and they took up of the broken [meat] that was left seven baskets.
spuridas spuris
n_ Acc Pl f
HAMPERS
8:9 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ws hOs
Adv
tetrakiscilioi tetrakischilioi
n_ Nom Pl m
kai apelusen kai apoluO

autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
And they that had eaten were about four thousand: and he sent them away.
THEY-WERE YET AS FOUR-times-THOUSAND AND about four-thousand
He-FROM-LOOSES them he-dismisses ploion meta twn ploion meta ho

n_ Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Pl m
8:10 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
embas embainO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

AND
straightway IN-STEPPing stepping-in eis eis

Prep
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
10 . And straightway he entered into a ship with his disciples, and came into the parts of Dalmanutha.
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
dalmanouqa dalmanoutha
ni proper
He-CAME
INTO THE
PARTS
DALMANUTHA of-Dalmanutha suzhtein suzEteO

vn Pres Act
8:11 kai exhlqon

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi kai hrxanto pharisaios kai archO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
OUT-CAME came-out par para

Prep
THE
PHARISEES
AND
THEY-begin
TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING to-Him to-be-discussing ouranou peirazontes ouranos peirazO

11 And the Pharisees came forth, and began to question with him, seeking of him a sign from heaven, tempting him.
zhtountes zEteO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
shmeion apo sEmeion apo

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
SEEKING
BESIDE Him
SIGN
FROM THE
heaven
tryING
Him
8:12 kai anastenaxas tw

kai
Conj
anastenazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati autou pneuma autos

legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
UP-groaning sighing zhtei zEteO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-THE
spirit
OF-Him
NA
He-IS-sayING
ANY why ?
THE
generation
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
shmeion amhn legw sEmeion amEn legO

n_ Acc Sg n Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ei ei
Cond
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
12 And he sighed deeply in his spirit, and saith, Why doth this generation seek after a sign? verily I say unto you, There shall no sign be given unto this generation.
this
IS-SEEKING
SIGN
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IF
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-THE
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
shmeion sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
generation this
SIGN
8:13 kai afeis

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
autous palin embas autos palin embainO

pp Acc Pl m Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peran peran
Adv
13 And he left them, and entering into the ship again departed to the other side.
AND
them
AGAIN
He-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away mh mE

Part Neg
OTHER-SIDE
8:14 kai epelaqonto labein

kai
Conj
epilanthanomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
artous kai ei artos kai ei

n_ Acc Pl m Conj Cond
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
THEY-forgot
TO-BE-GETTING BREADS bread(p) tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
AND
IF
NO
ONE
BREAD NOT cake-of-bread
14 Now [the disciples] had forgotten to take bread, neither had they in the ship with them more than one loaf.
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
meq meta
Prep
eautwn en heautou en
pf 3 Gen Pl m Prep
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
THEY-HAD
IN
THE
FLOATer ship orate horaO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
8:15 kai diestelleto autois legwn

kai
Conj
diastellO
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
legO
blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
He-THRU-PUT he-cautioned
to-them them
sayING
BE-lookING FROM THE be-ye-bewaring !
15 And he charged them, saying, Take heed, beware of the leaven of the Pharisees, and [of] the leaven of Herod.
AV
Mark 8
zumhs zumE
n_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn kai ths pharisaios kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
zumhs zumE
n_ Gen Sg f
hrwdou hErOdEs
n_ Gen Sg m
FERMENT OF-THE leaven
PHARISEES
AND
OF-THE the
FERMENT OF-HEROD leaven ecousin echO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
16 And they reasoned among themselves, saying, [It is] because we have no bread.
8:16 kai dielogizonto

kai
Conj
dialogizomai
pros pros
Prep
allhlous oti artous ouk allElOn hoti artos ou

pc Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg
AND
THEY-THRU-accountED TOWARD one-another they-reasoned legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
that
BREADS bread(p)
NOT
THEY-ARE-HAVING
8:17 kai gnous

kai
Conj
ginOskO
autois ti autos tis


AND
KNOWING knowing-it oupw oupO

Adv
He-IS-sayING
to-them
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING that ye-are-reasoning pepwrwmenhn pOroO

BREADS bread(p)
NOT
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
noeite noeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oude oude
Adv
suniete suniEmi
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
17 And when Jesus knew [it], he saith unto them, Why reason ye, because ye have no bread? perceive ye not yet, neither understand? have ye your heart yet hardened?
YE-ARE-HAVING NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-MINDING NOT-YET YE-ARE-understandING HAVING-been-CALLOUSED ye-are-apprehending neither are-understanding ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian umwn kardia humeis

YE-ARE-HAVING THE
HEART
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ou ou
Part Neg
8:18 ofqalmous econtes

ophthalmos
n_ Acc Pl m
echO
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai wta kai ous

Conj n_ Acc Pl n
econtes echO
ouk ou
Part Neg
18 Having eyes, see ye not? and having ears, hear ye not? and do ye not remember?
VIEWers eyes akouete akouO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
HAVING
NOT
YE-ARE-lookING AND ye-are-observing
EARS
HAVING
NOT
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-HEARING AND
NOT
YE-ARE-rememberING
8:19 ote tous

hote
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Pl m

eklasa klaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pentakiscilious posous pentakischilioi posos

n_ Acc Pl m pq Acc Pl m
when
THE
FIVE
BREADS I-BREAK cakes-of-bread
INTO THE
FIVE-times-THOUSAND five-thousand autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
how-many how-many ?
19 When I brake the five loaves among five thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? They say unto him, Twelve.
kofinous klasmatwn plhreis hrate kophinos klasma plErEs airO

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl n a_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Pl
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
PANNIERS
OF-BREAKS of-fragments epta hepta

ni numeral
FULL
YE-LIFT ye-pick-up tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
TWO-TEN twelve spuridwn plhrwmata spuris plErOma

n_ Gen Pl f n_ Acc Pl n
20 And when the seven among four thousand, how many baskets full of fragments took ye up? And they said, Seven.
8:20 ote tous

hote
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eis eis
Prep
tetrakiscilious poswn tetrakischilioi posos

n_ Acc Pl m pq Gen Pl n
when
THE
SEVEN
INTO THE
FOUR-times-THOUSAND four-thousand
WH
OF-how-many HAMPERS how-many ? epta hepta

ni numeral
FILLing filled-up
klasmatwn hrate klasma airO


autw
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
YE-LIFT ye-pick-up
AND
THEY-ARE-sayING
to-Him
SEVEN
8:21 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois oupw autos oupO

pp Dat Pl m Adv
suniete suniEmi
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
21 And he said unto them, How is it that ye do not understand?
AND
He-said
to-them
NOT-as-yet YE-ARE-understandING
8:22 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
bhqsaidan kai ferousin bEthsaida kai pherO

ni proper Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tuflon kai tuphlos kai

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO BETHSAIDA
AND
THEY-ARE-CARRYING to-Him they-are-bringing ayhtai haptO

vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
BLIND blind-man
AND
22 . And he cometh to Bethsaida; and they bring a blind man unto him, and besought him to touch him.
parakalousin parakaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THEY-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING Him are-entreating
THAT OF-him him ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
He-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING
8:23 kai epilabomenos

kai
Conj
epilambanomai
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tuflou exhnegken tuphlos ekpherO

a_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exw exO
Adv
AND
ON-GETTING getting-hold
OF-THE
HAND
OF-THE
BLIND blind-man
He-OUT-CARRIES him he-brings-forth
OUT
23 And he took the blind man by the hand, and led him out of the town; and when he had spit on his eyes, and put his hands upon him, he asked him if he
AV
Mark 8
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kwmhs kOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ptusas kai ptuO

eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ommata autou omma autos

epiqeis epitithEmi
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
saw ought.
OF-THE
VILLAGE
AND
SPITTing
INTO THE
eyes
OF-him
THE
ceiras autw cheir autos

n_ Acc Pl f pp Dat Sg m
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
HANDS
to-him
He-inquirED-of him
IF
ANY anything
YOU-ARE-lookING you-are-observing anqrwpous oti ws dendra anthrOpos hoti hOs dendron

n_ Acc Pl m Conj Adv n_ Acc Pl n
24 And he looked up, and said, I see men as trees, walking.
8:24 kai anableyas

kai
Conj
anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
blepw blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
UP-looking looking-up
he-said
I-AM-lookING THE I-am-observing
humans
that
AS
TREES
orw horaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
peripatountas peripateO
I-AM-SEEING
ABOUT-TREADING ones-walking palin palin

Adv
WH
8:25 eita
eita
Adv
eqhken
NA
epeqhken epitithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras epi tous cheir epi ho

n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous ophthalmos
n_ Acc Pl m
THEREAFTER AGAIN
He-ON-PLACES he-places-on
THE
HANDS
ON
THE
VIEWers eyes apanta hapas

a_ Acc Pl n
25 After that he put [his] hands again upon his eyes, and made him look up: and he was restored, and saw every man clearly.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai diebleyen kai diablepO

kai apekatesth kai eneblepen thlaugws kai apokathistEmi kai emblepO tElaugOs
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg Adv
OF-him
AND
he-THRU-looks AND he-is-keen-sighted
he-IS-restorED is-restored eis eis

Prep
AND
he-IN-lookED he-looked-at legwn legO
FINISH-RADIANCEly ALL(emph.) distinctly mhde mEde

Conj
8:26 kai apesteilen auton

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
He-commissions he-dispatches eiselqhs eiserchomai

vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
him
INTO HOME
OF-him
sayING
NO-YET INTO THE nor-yet
26 And he sent him away to his house, saying, Neither go into the town, nor tell [it] to any in the town.
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
VILLAGE
YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING you-may-be-entering o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
8:27 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
JESUS
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-Him
INTO THE
VILLAGES
kaisareias ths kaisareia ho

filippou kai en philippos kai en

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
27 . And Jesus went out, and his disciples, into the towns of Caesarea Philippi: and by the way he asked his disciples, saying unto them, Whom do men say that I am?
OF-CAESAREA
OF-THE
Philippi Philip
AND
IN
THE
WAY
He-inquirED-of THE
LEARNers disciples
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
legousin oi legO ho
anqrwpoi einai anthrOpos eimi

n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres vxx
OF-Him
sayING
to-them
ANY who ?
ME
ARE-sayING
WH
THE
NA
humans
TO-BE
8:28 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legontes legO
oti
oti hoti
Conj

THE
YET THEY-say
to-Him
ones-sayING ones-saying alloi allos

a_ Nom Pl m
that
JOHN
THE
28 And they answered, John the Baptist: but some [say], Elias; and others, One of the prophets.
baptisthn kai alloi baptistEs kai allos

n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
hlian Elias
n_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
oti eis hoti heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
DIPist baptist
AND
others
ELIAS Elijah
others
YET that
ONE
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets legete legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
8:29 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autous umeis autos humeis

pp Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
AND
He
inquirED-of
them
YOU(p) ye legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YET ANY who ? autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
ME
ARE-sayING ye-are-saying ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
TO-BE
29 And he saith unto them, But whom say ye that I am? And Peter answereth and saith unto him, Thou art the Christ.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
answerING
THE
Peter
IS-sayING
to-Him
YOU
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Mark 8
8:30 kai epetimhsen autois ina

kai
Conj
epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
hina
Conj
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
legwsin legO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
30 And he charged them that they should tell no man of him.
AND
He-rebukES he-warns
to-them them didaskein didaskO

vn Pres Act
THAT to-NO-YET-ONE THEY-MAY-BE-sayING ABOUT Him no-one they-may-be-telling autous oti dei autos hoti deO
pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
8:31 kai hrxato

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
e-begins he-begins
TO-BE-TEACHING them
that
it-IS-BINDING must
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou polla anthrOpos polus

n_ Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl n
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
kai apodokimasqhnai upo twn kai apodokimazO hupo ho

Conj vn Aor Pas Prep t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn kai presbuteros kai

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
31 And he began to teach them, that the Son of man must suffer many things, and be rejected of the elders, and [of] the chief priests, and scribes, and be killed, and after three days rise again.
human
much
TO-BE-EMOTIONING AND to-be-suffering kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-FROM-testED to-be-rejected
by
THE
SENIORS elders kai meta treis kai meta treis

Conj Prep
AND
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
n_ Gen Pl m

n_ Acc Pl f
THE
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND to-be-killed
after
THREE
hmeras anasthnai hEmera anistEmi

n_ Acc Pl f vn 2Aor Act
DAYS
TO-UP-STAND to-rise logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
8:32 kai parrhsia ton

kai
Conj
parrhEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
elalei laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai proslabomenos o kai proslambanO ho

Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
32 And he spake that saying openly. And Peter took him, and began to rebuke him.
AND
to-boldness
THE
saying word
He-TALKED he-spoke autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
TOWARD-GETTING taking-to-him
THE
Peter
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
epitiman epitimaO
vn Pres Act
Him
begins
TO-BE-rebukING to-Him him de de

Conj
8:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epistrafeis epistrephO
kai idwn kai eidO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

THE
YET BEING-ON-TURNED being-turned-about kai legei kai legO

Conj
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
epetimhsen petrw epitimaO petros

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
satana satanas
n_ Voc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
33 But when he had turned about and looked on his disciples, he rebuked Peter, saying, Get thee behind me, Satan: for thou savourest not the things that be of God, but the things that be of men.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-rebukES
to-Peter Peter
AND
IS-sayING
BE-UNDER-LEADING BEHIND be-you-going-away ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-ME me
SATAN (adversary) that satan ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
froneis phroneO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alla ta alla ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
NOT
YOU-ARE-beING-DISPOSed-to THE OF-THE the-things oclon ochlos

n_ Acc Sg m
God
but
THE OF-THE the-things
humans
8:34 kai proskalesamenos ton

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him autois ei autos ei

pp Dat Pl m Cond
THE
THRONG
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
LEARNers disciples
WH
OF-Him
NA
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
elqein
akolouqein akoloutheO
vn Pres Act
34 And when he had called the people [unto him] with his disciples also, he said unto them, Whosoever will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross, and follow me.
He-said
to-them
IF
ANY anyone
IS-WILLING
BEHIND after
OF-ME me
TO-BE-followING
aparnhsasqw eauton aparneomai heautou

kai aratw kai airO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

kai akolouqeitw kai akoloutheO

LET-him-renounce let-him-renounce ! moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
self himself
AND
LET-him-LIFT THE let-him-pick-up !
pale cross
OF-him
AND
LET-him-BE-followING let-him-be-following !
to-ME me
8:35 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar ean gar ean

Conj Cond
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WH
eautou yuchn
WH
NA
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
NA
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
WHO
for
IF-EVER MAY-BE-WILLING THE
soul
OF-him
35 For whosoever will save his life shall lose it; but whosoever shall lose his life for my sake and the gospel's, the same shall save it.
AV
Mark 8 - Mark 9

authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
apolesei apollumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
TO-SAVE SHALL-BE-destroyING her

WH WH NA
WHO
NA
YET EVER SHALL-BE-destroyING THE
soul
OF-him
eneken heneken
Adv
emou kai
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou swsei euaggelion sOzO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
on-account-of
ME
AND
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE SHALL-BE-SAVING her
8:36 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar wfelei gar OpheleO

anqrwpon kerdhsai ton anthrOpos kerdainO ho

n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
36 For what shall it profit a man, if he shall gain the whole world, and lose his own soul?
ANY what ?
for
IS-benefitING it-is-benefiting yuchn psuchE

n_ Acc Sg f
human
TO-GAIN
THE
SYSTEM world
WHOLE
AND
zhmiwqhnai thn zEmioO ho

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
TO-BE-FINED to-forfeit
THE
soul
OF-him
8:37 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar doi gar didOmi

anqrwpos antallagma ths anthrOpos antallagma ho

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
37 Or what shall a man give in exchange for his soul?
ANY what ?
for
MAY-BE-GIVING human
exCHANGE in-exchange me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-THE
soul
OF-him
8:38 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar ean gar ean

Conj Cond
epaiscunqh epaischunomai
vs Aor pasD 3 Sg
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
emous emos
ps 1 Acc Pl
logous en logos en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
WHO
for
IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ON-VILED ME may-be-being-ashamed-of tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
AND
THE
MY
sayings words uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
moicalidi kai amartwlw kai o moichalis kai hamartOlos kai ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
38 Whosoever therefore shall be ashamed of me and of my words in this adulterous and sinful generation; of him also shall the Son of man be ashamed, when he cometh in the glory of his Father with the holy angels.
THE
generation this
THE
ADULTERess
AND
misser sinner(f) elqh erchomai
AND also
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou epaiscunqhsetai anthrOpos epaischunomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut pasD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
human
SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-VILED him shall-be-being-ashamed-of patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
when-EVER He-MAY-BE-COMING IN whenever aggelwn aggelos

n_ Gen Pl m
THE
esteem glory
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-Him
WITH
THE
MESSENGERS THE
HOLY
AV
Mark 9
9:1 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti eisin hoti eimi

tines tis
px Nom Pl m
wde twn hOde ho

Adv t_ Gen Pl m
AND
He-said
to-them
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ARE there-are
ANY some
here
OF-THE
esthkotwn histEmi
vp Perf Act Gen Pl m
oitines ou hostis ou
pr Nom Pl m Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
geuswntai geuomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl

. And he said unto them, Verily I say unto you, That there be some of them that stand here, which shall not taste of death, till they have seen the kingdom of God come with power.
ones-HAVING-STOOD WHO-ANY ones-standing who-any idwsin eidO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH death qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
EVER
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

elhluquian erchomai
vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
dunamei dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
HAVING-COME
IN
ABILITY power kai kai

Conj
2
9:2 kai meta hmeras ex

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
hex
ni numeral
paralambanei paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
after
DAYS
SIX
NA
IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE is-taking-aside ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
THE
Peter
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iakwbon kai iakObos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
iwannhn kai anaferei iOannEs kai anapherO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg

pp Acc Pl m Prep
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
And after six days Jesus taketh [with him] Peter, and James, and John, and leadeth them up into an high mountain apart by themselves: and he was transfigured before them.
THE
JACOBUS James
AND
THE
JOHN
AND
IS-UP-CARRYING them is-bringing-up emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
INTO mountain
uyhlon kat hupsElos kata

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
monous kai metemorfwqh monos kai metamorphoO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
HIGH
according-to OWN
ONLY alone(p) autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
He-WAS-after-FORMED IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them he-was-transformed in-front-of them stilbonta stilbO

9:3 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Nom Pl n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
leuka leukos
a_ Nom Pl n
lian oia lian hoios

Adv pr Nom Pl n
AND
THE
GARMENTS OF-Him
BECAME
GLISTENING
WHITE
VERY
THE-WHICH such-as
And his raiment became shining, exceeding white as snow; so as no fuller on earth can white them.
gnafeus epi ths gnapheus epi ho

n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
outws leukanai houtOs leukainO

Adv vn Aor Act
CARDer fuller
ON
THE
LAND earth
NOT
IS-ABLE
thus
TO-WHITen
9:4 kai wfqh

kai
Conj
optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autois hlias autos Elias

sun sun
Prep
mwusei kai hsan mOusEs kai eimi

n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi impf vxx 3 Pl
sullalountes sullaleO
And there appeared unto them Elias with Moses: and they were talking with Jesus.
AND
WAS-VIEWED to-them was-seen ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
ELIAS Elijah
TOGETHER to-MOSES togetherwith Moses
AND
THEY-WERE TOGETHER-TALKING conferring
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
JESUS
9:5 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
rabbi kalon rhabbi kalos

Hebrew a_ Nom Sg n
AND
answerING
THE
Peter
IS-sayING
to-THE
JESUS
RABBI
IDEAL
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
wde einai hOde eimi

Adv vn Pres vxx
kai poihswmen kai poieO

treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
skhnas skEnE
n_ Acc Pl f
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
And Peter answered and said to Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias.
it-IS
US
here
TO-BE
AND
WE-SHOULD-BE-makING THREE
BOOTHS to-YOU tabernacles
ONE
kai mwusei mian kai mOusEs heis

Conj n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
kai hlia kai Elias

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
to-MOSES
ONE
AND
to-ELIAS to-Elijah ti tis
ONE
9:6 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar hdei gar eidO

Conj vi Plup Act 3 Sg
apokriqh apokrinomai
vs Aor pasD 3 Sg
ekfoboi gar egenonto ekphobos gar ginomai

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
For he wist not what to say; for they were sore afraid.
pi Acc Sg n
NOT
for
he-HAD-PERCEIVED ANY he-was-aware what nefelh nephelE

n_ Nom Sg f
he-MAY-BE-answerING OUT-FEAR terrified
for
THEY-BECAME
9:7 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
episkiazousa autois kai egeneto episkiazO autos kai ginomai

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
BECAME
CLOUD
ON-SHADING overshadowing
to-them them
AND
BECAME
SOUND voice
OUT OF-THE
And there was a cloud that overshadowed them: and a voice came out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him.
AV
Mark 9
nefelhs outos nephelE houtos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaphtos akouete agapEtos akouO

a_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
CLOUD
this
IS
THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him him
9:8 kai exapina

kai
Conj
exapina
Adv
peribleyamenoi ouketi periblepO ouketi

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m Adv
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WH
meq eautwn
WH
AND
WH WH
OUT-UN-APPEARly ABOUT-looking suddenly looking-about

WH WH WH NA NA
NOT-STILL NOT-YET-ONE THEY-PERCEIVED not-longer anyone

NA
And suddenly, when they had looked round about, they saw no man any more, save Jesus only with themselves.
ei mh ton ihsoun monon
alla ton alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
NA
monon monos
a_ Acc Sg m
NA
meq meta
Prep
NA
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
but
THE
JESUS
ONLY

9
9:9 kai katabainontwn autwn

kai
Conj
katabainO
autos
pp Gen Pl m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
diesteilato autois ina diastellO autos hina

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Conj
AND
OF-DOWN-STEPPING of-descending a hos

pr Acc Pl n
them
OUT OF-THE
mountain
He-THRU-PUTS he-cautions ei ei
Cond
to-them them o ho
THAT
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
dihghswntai diEgeomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
otan hotan
Conj
And as they came down from the mountain, he charged them that they should tell no man what things they had seen, till the Son of man were risen from the dead.
t_ Nom Sg m
to-NO-YET-ONE WHICH to-no-one which(p) uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-PERCEIVED THEY-SHOULD-BE-relatING IF
NO
when-EVER THE whenever
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ek anthrOpos ek
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
anasth anistEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SON
OF-THE
human
OUT OF-DEAD-ones MAY-BE-UP-STANDING of-dead-ones may-be-rising ekrathsan pros krateO pros

9:10 kai ton

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
eautous suzhtountes heautou suzEteO

pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
AND
THE
saying word ek ek
Prep
THEY-HOLD
TOWARD selves themselves anasthnai anistEmi

vn 2Aor Act
TOGETHER-SEEKING ANY discussing what ?
10 And they kept that saying with themselves, questioning one with another what the rising from the dead should mean.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
IS
THE
OUT OF-DEAD-ones TO-UP-STAND of-dead-ones to-rise auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
9:11 kai ephrwtwn

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
oti legousin oi hoti legO ho

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis oti grammateus hoti

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
11 And they asked him, saying, Why say the scribes that Elias must first come?
AND
THEY-inquirED-of Him
sayING
that
ARE-sayING
THE
WRITers scribes
that
hlian Elias
n_ Acc Sg m
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
prwton prOton
Adv
ELIAS Elijah
it-IS-BINDING must de de
Conj
TO-BE-COMING BEFORE-most first autois hlias autos Elias

9:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
men men
Part
elqwn erchomai
prwton prOton
Adv
THE
YET He-AVERRed
to-them
ELIAS Elijah
INDEED COMING
BEFORE-most first uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
apokaqistanei panta apokathistEmi pas

vi Pres Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl n
kai pws gegraptai kai pOs graphO

Conj Adv Int vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
12 And he answered and told them, Elias verily cometh first, and restoreth all things; and how it is written of the Son of man, that he must suffer many things, and be set at nought.
IS-restorING
ALL
AND
how how ?
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ON
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou ina anthrOpos hina

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
paqh paschO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai exoudenhqh kai exoudenoO

human
THAT much
He-MAY-BE-EMOTIONING AND he-may-be-suffering umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
MAY-BE-BEING-scornED
9:13 alla legw

alla
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti kai hlias hoti kai Elias

Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m
elhluqen erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
kai epoihsan autw kai poieO autos

but
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
AND also
ELIAS Elijah
HAS-COME
AND
THEY-DO
to-him
13 But I say unto you, That Elias is indeed come, and they have done unto him whatsoever they listed, as it is written of him.
AV
Mark 9
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
hqelon thelO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
as-much-as THEY-WILLED according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ON whatever
him
9:14 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas eidon mathEtEs eidO

n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
peri peri
Prep
AND
COMING
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples pros pros

Prep
THEY-PERCEIVED THRONG
MANY vast
ABOUT
14 . And when he came to [his] disciples, he saw a great multitude about them, and the scribes questioning with them.
autous kai grammateis suzhtountas autos kai grammateus suzEteO

pp Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
AND
WRITers scribes pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-SEEKING TOWARD them discussing o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
9:15 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
idontes eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exeqambhqhsan kai ekthambeomai kai

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Conj
AND
straightway EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
PERCEIVING
Him
WERE-OUT-AWED were-overawed
AND
15 And straightway all the people, when they beheld him, were greatly amazed, and running to [him] saluted him.
prostrecontes hspazonto prostrechO aspazomai

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD-RACING racing-to-him
THEY-greetED they-saluted
Him
9:16 kai ephrwthsen autous ti

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
tis
pi Acc Sg n
suzhteite suzEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
16 And he asked the scribes, What question ye with them?
AND
He-inquirES-of
them
ANY what ? eis heis

n_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-TOGETHER-SEEKING TOWARD them ye-are-discussing ek ek

Prep
9:17 kai apekriqh

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
didaskale hnegka didaskalos pherO

n_ Voc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
answerED
to-Him him pros pros

Prep
ONE
OUT OF-THE
THRONG
TEACHer !
I-CARRY I-bring
THE
17 And one of the multitude answered and said, Master, I have brought unto thee my son, which hath a dumb spirit;
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
econta echO
pneuma alalon pneuma alalos

SON
OF-ME
TOWARD YOU
HAVING
spirit
UN-TALK dumb rhssei rhEgnumi

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
9:18 kai opou

kai
Conj
hopou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
katalabh katalambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
THE-?-where IF-EVER him wherever kai trizei kai trizO

it-MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING it-IS-BURSTING him it-may-be-getting-down it-is-tearing tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
AND
afrizei aphrizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
odontas kai xhrainetai odous kai xErainO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai eipa kai legO

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
18 And wheresoever he taketh him, he teareth him: and he foameth, and gnasheth with his teeth, and pineth away: and I spake to thy disciples that they should cast him out; and they could not.
he-IS-FROTHizING AND he-is-frothing maqhtais sou mathEtEs su

IS-GRATING
THE
TEETH
AND
he-IS-beING-DRIED AND he-is-withering-away kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
I-say
to-THE
ina hina
Conj
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ekbalwsin ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
iscusan ischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
THAT it
THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING AND they-should-be-casting-out autois legei autos legO

NOT
THEY-are-STRONG
9:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
w genea O genea
Inj n_ Voc Sg f
apistos apistos
a_ Voc Sg f
ews pote heOs pote

Conj Part Int
THE
YET answerING
to-them
He-IS-sayING
o!
generation UN-BELIEVing TILL generation ! unbelieving ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
?-when when ? pros pros

Prep
19 He answereth him, and saith, O faithless generation, how long shall I be with you? how long shall I suffer you? bring him unto me.
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
esomai eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
ews pote anexomai heOs pote anechomai

Conj Part Int vi Fut midD 1 Sg
ferete pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD YOU(p) ye me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
I-SHALL-BE
TILL
?-when when ?
I-SHALL-BE-toleratING OF-YOU(p) BE-CARRYING him I-shall-be-bearing-with ye be-ye-bringing !
TOWARD
ME
9:20 kai hnegkan

kai
Conj
pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai idwn kai eidO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
THEY-CARRY him they-bring
TOWARD Him
AND
PERCEIVING
Him
THE
spirit
20 And they brought him unto him: and when he saw him, straightway the spirit tare him; and he fell on the ground, and wallowed foaming.
AV
Mark 9
euqus euthus
Adv
sunesparaxen susparassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai peswn kai piptO

epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ekulieto kuliO
vi impf mid/pas 3 Sg
straightway TOGETHER-CONVULSES him violently-convulses afrizwn aphrizO

AND
FALLING
ON
THE
LAND earth
he-ROLLED he-wallowed
FROTHizING frothing
9:21 kai ephrwthsen ton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
posos posos
pq Nom Sg m
cronos chronos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ws hOs
Adv
AND
He-inquirES-of
THE
FATHER
OF-him
how-long how-much ? ek ek
Prep
TIME
it-IS
AS since
21 And he asked his father, How long is it ago since this came unto him? And he said, Of a child.
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
paidioqen paidiothen
Adv
this
HAS-BECOME
to-him
THE
YET he-said
OUT OF-little-boy-PLACE of-being-little-boy kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
9:22 kai pollakis kai eis

kai
Conj
pollakis
Adv
kai
Conj
eis
Prep
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
udata hudOr
n_ Acc Pl n
ina hina
Conj
AND
MANY-times often
AND also
INTO FIRE
him
it-CASTS
AND
INTO waters
THAT
22 And ofttimes it hath cast him into the fire, and into the waters, to destroy him: but if thou canst do any thing, have compassion on us, and help us.
apolesh apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
all ei alla ei
Conj Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
dunh dunamai
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Con
bohqhson boEtheO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
it-SHOULD-BE-destroyING him
but
IF
ANY in-any-way
YOU-ARE-ABLE
help help-you !
to-US us
splagcnisqeis splagchnizomai
ef epi
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
BEING-compassionatED ON having-compassion
US
9:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ei ei
Cond
dunh dunamai
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
23 Jesus said unto him, If thou canst believe, all things [are] possible to him that believeth.
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-him
THE
IF
YOU-ARE-ABLE
ALL
dunata tw dunatos ho
a_ Nom Pl n t_ Dat Sg m
pisteuonti pisteuO
ABLE possible
to-THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
9:24 euqus
euthus
Adv
kraxas krazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
paidiou elegen paidion legO

n_ Gen Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
pisteuw pisteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
straightway CRYing
THE
FATHER
OF-THE
little-boy
said
I-AM-BELIEVING
24 And straightway the father of the child cried out, and said with tears, Lord, I believe; help thou mine unbelief.
bohqei boEtheO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
apistia apistia
n_ Dat Sg f
BE-helpING OF-ME be-you-helping !
to-THE
UN-BELIEF unbelief ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
9:25 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oti episuntrecei hoti episuntrechO

oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
epetimhsen epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
PERCEIVING
YET THE
JESUS
that
IS-ON-TOGETHER-RACING THRONG is-racing-on-together autw autos

pp Dat Sg n
He-rebukES
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati tw pneuma ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n
akaqartw legwn akathartos legO

a_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
alalon alalos
a_ Nom Sg n
kai kai
Conj
25 When Jesus saw that the people came running together, he rebuked the foul spirit, saying unto him, [Thou] dumb and deaf spirit, I charge thee, come out of him, and enter no more into him.
to-THE the kwfon kOphos

a_ Nom Sg n
spirit
THE
UN-clean unclean
sayING
to-it
THE
UN-TALK dumb autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
epitassw soi epitassO su

vi Pres Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ex ek
Prep
kai kai
Conj
MUTE deaf-mute mhketi mEketi

Adv
spirit
AM-enjoinING
to-YOU you auton autos
BE-OUT-COMING OUT OF-him be-you-coming-out !
AND
eiselqhs eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
pp Acc Sg m
NO-NOT-STILL YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO him by-no-means-longer you-may-be-entering
AV
Mark 9
9:26 kai kraxas

kai
Conj
krazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kai polla kai polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
sparaxas sparassO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

wsei hOsei
Adv
AND
CRYing
AND
much
CONVULSing convulsing-him
AND
he-BECAME
AS-IF
26 And [the spirit] cried, and rent him sore, and came out of him: and he was as one dead; insomuch that many said, He is dead.
nekros nekros
a_ Nom Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pollous legein polus legO

a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
oti apeqanen hoti apothnEskO

DEAD
AS-BESIDES THE so-that de de

Conj
MANY majority krathsas krateO
TO-BE-sayING that
he-FROM-DIED he-died autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
9:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
27 But Jesus took him by the hand, and lifted him up; and he arose.
THE
YET JESUS
HOLDing
OF-THE
HAND
OF-him
ROUSES
him
AND
anesth anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he-UP-STOOD he-rose
9:28 kai eiselqontos autou

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

kat kata
Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
AND
OF-INTO-COMING of-entering
OF-Him
INTO HOME house ouk ou

Part Neg
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
according-to OWN
28 And when he was come into the house, his disciples asked him privately, Why could not we cast him out?
ephrwtwn auton eperOtaO autos

oti hmeis hoti hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
hdunhqhmen ekbalein dunamai ekballO

vi Aor pasD 1 Pl Att vn 2Aor Act
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
inquirED-of
Him
that
WE
NOT
WERE-enABLED could genos genos

n_ Nom Sg n
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING it to-be-casting-out en en
Prep
9:29 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois touto autos houtos

pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg n
dunatai dunamai
AND
He-said
to-them
this
THE
breed species
IN
to-NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE nothing can
29 And he said unto them, This kind can come forth by nothing, but by prayer and fasting.
exelqein exerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
proseuch proseuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
TO-BE-OUT-COMING IF to-be-coming-out
NO
IN
prayer
WH NA
9:30 kakeiqen exelqontes

kakeithen
Adv Con
eporeuonto
exerchomai
pareporeuonto paraporeuomai
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND-thence
OUT-COMING coming-out ina hina

Conj
THEY-BESIDE-WENT they-went-along tis tis

px Nom Sg m
THRU THE through
GALILEE
30 . And they departed thence, and passed through Galilee; and he would not that any man should know [it].
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gnoi ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
NOT
He-WILLED
THAT ANY anyone
MAY-BE-KNOWING
WH NA
9:31 edidasken gar tous

didaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m

kai elegen kai legO

autois
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
He-TAUGHT
for
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
said
to-them
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

eis eis
Prep
ceiras anqrwpwn kai cheir anthrOpos kai

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m Conj
31 For he taught his disciples, and said unto them, The Son of man is delivered into the hands of men, and they shall kill him; and after that he is killed, he shall rise the third day.
that
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO HANDS is-being-given-up meta treis meta treis

Prep n_ Acc Pl m
OF-humans
AND
apoktenousin apokteinO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai apoktanqeis kai apokteinO

Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him they-shall-be-killing anasthsetai anistEmi

vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
AND
BEING-FROM-KILLED after being-killed
THREE
DAYS
He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING he-shall-be-rising
9:32 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hgnooun agnoeO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai efobounto kai phobeO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eperwthsai eperOtaO
vn Aor Act
32 But they understood not that saying, and were afraid to ask him.
THE-ones the
YET UN-KNEW THE they-were-ignorant-of
declaration AND
THEY-FEARED
Him
TO-inquire-of
AV
Mark 9
9:33 kai hlqon

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
kafarnaoum kai en kapharnaoum kai en

ni proper Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
genomenos ginomai
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
THEY-CAME
INTO CAPERNAUM
AND
IN
THE
HOME house
BECOMING
He-inquirED-of
33 And he came to Capernaum: and being in the house he asked them, What was it that ye disputed among yourselves by the way?
autous ti autos tis

pp Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
dielogizesqe dialogizomai
them
ANY what ? de de
Conj
IN
THE
WAY road pros pros

Prep
YE-THRU-accountED ye-reasoned allhlous gar dielecqhsan allElOn gar dialegomai

pc Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
9:34 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
esiwpwn siOpaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
THE-ones the tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
YET were-SILENT TOWARD one-another they-were-silent
for
THEY-WERE-THRU-said IN they-argued
THE
WAY road
34 But they held their peace: for by the way they had disputed among themselves, who [should be] the greatest.
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ANY who ?
GREATER greatest efwnhsen tous phOneO ho

9:35 kai kaqisas

kai
Conj
kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
dwdeka kai legei dOdeka kai legO

ni numeral Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ei autos ei
pp Dat Pl m Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
AND
being-seated
He-SOUNDS he-summons einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
IF
ANY anyone
35 And he sat down, and called the twelve, and saith unto them, If any man desire to be first, [the same] shall be last of all, and servant of all.
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
pantwn escatos kai pantwn diakonos pas eschatos kai pas diakonos
a_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
IS-WILLING
BEFORE-most TO-BE first
he-SHALL-BE OF-ALL
LAST
AND
OF-ALL
THRU-SERVitor servant kai kai

Conj
36 And he took a child, and set him in the midst of them: and when he had taken him in his arms, he said unto them,
9:36 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
esthsen histEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
AND
GETTING taking
little-boy (-or-girl) He-STANDS
it
IN
MIDst
OF-them
AND
enagkalisamenos auto enagkalizomai autos

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
IN-CLASPing clasping-in-his-arms
it
WH
said
NA
to-them
9:37 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
en
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
toioutwn paidiwn toioutos paidion

pd Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
WHO
EVER
ONE
OF-THE
such
little-boys-or-girls SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING
37 Whosoever shall receive one of such children in my name, receiveth me: and whosoever shall receive me, receiveth not me, but him that sent me.
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n

eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
decetai dechomai
kai os kai hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ON
THE
NAME
OF-ME
ME
IS-RECEIVING
AND
WHO
EVER ME
dechtai dechomai
ouk ou
Part Neg
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
decetai dechomai
alla ton alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m

MAY-BE-RECEIVING
NOT
ME
IS-RECEIVING
but
THE
One-commissioning one-commissioning tina tis

px Acc Sg m
ME
9:38 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs didaskale eidomen iOannEs didaskalos eidO

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AVERRed
to-Him
THE
JOHN
TEACHer !
WE-PERCEIVED ANY someone
IN
THE
onomati sou onoma su

ekballonta ekballO
daimonia kai ekwluomen auton daimonion kai kOluO autos

n_ Acc Pl n Conj vi impf Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
38 And John answered him, saying, Master, we saw one casting out devils in thy name, and he followeth not us: and we forbad him, because he followeth not us.
NAME
OF-YOU
OUT-CASTING casting-out
demons
AND
WE-FORBADE
him
that
NOT
hkolouqei hmin akoloutheO hemeis

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
he-followED
to-US us de de
Conj
9:39 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
gar gar
Conj
THE
YET JESUS
said
NO
BE-FORBIDDING him be-ye-forbidding !
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one
39 But Jesus said, Forbid him not: for there is no man which shall do a miracle in my name, that can lightly speak evil of me.
AV
Mark 9
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
dunamin dunamis
n_ Acc Sg f
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n

kai kai
Conj
IS there-is dunhsetai dunamai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
WHO
SHALL-BE-DOING ABILITY ON powerful-deed kakologhsai me kakologeO egO

THE
NAME
OF-ME
AND
tacu tachus
Adv
SHALL-BE-ABLE SWIFTLY TO-EVIL-say to-speak-evil-of
ME
9:40 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar ouk gar ou

Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kaq kata
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
uper huper
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
40 For he that is not against us is on our part.
WHO
for
NOT
IS
DOWN OF-US against us umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
OVER US for-the-sake-of
IS
9:41 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar an gar an
Conj Part
potish potizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pothrion udatos en potErion hudOr en

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Prep
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
WHO
for
EVER SHOULD-BE-DRINKizING YOU(p) should-be-giving-to-drink ye este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
DRINK-cup cup umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-water
IN
NAME
41 . For whosoever shall give you a cup of water to drink in my name, because ye belong to Christ, verily I say unto you, he shall not lose his reward.
oti hoti
Conj
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
amhn legw amEn legO

oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
that OF-ANOINTED YE-ARE seeing-that of-Christ apolesh apollumi

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
AMEN verily misqon misthos

n_ Acc Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT
NO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE he-should-be-losing
HIRE wages skandalish skandalizO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-him
9:42 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mikrwn mikros
a_ Gen Pl m

AND
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-SNARING ONE

NA NA
OF-THE
LITTLE little-ones autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
these
THE
pisteuontwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mallon ei mallon ei
Adv Cond
42 And whosoever shall offend one of [these] little ones that believe in me, it is better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, and he were cast into the sea.
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing perikeitai perikeimai

INTO ME
IDEAL
it-IS
to-him
RATHER
IF
mulos mulos
n_ Nom Sg m
onikos onikos
a_ Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

kai kai
Conj
IS-ABOUT-LYING is-lying-about beblhtai ballO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
MILL(stone) mill-stone eis eis

Prep
ASSic ABOUT THE requiring-an-ass-to-turn-it qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
NECK
OF-him
AND
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
he-HAS-been-CAST INTO THE

WH
SEA
NA
9:43 kai ean

kai
Conj
skandalish
ean
Cond
skandalizh skandalizO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
IF-EVER
MAY-BE-SNARING
YOU
THE
HAND
OF-YOU
apokoyon authn apokoptO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg f
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kullon eiselqein kullos eiserchomai

a_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
43 And if thy hand offend thee, cut it off: it is better for thee to enter into life maimed, than having two hands to go into hell, into the fire that never shall be quenched:
FROM-STRIKE her strike-off-you ! zwhn zOE

n_ Acc Sg f
IDEAL
it-IS
YOU
MAIMED
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering eis eis

Prep
h E
Part
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
duo duo
ni numeral
ceiras econta cheir echO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
apelqein aperchomai
vn 2Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
geennan geenna
n_ Acc Sg f
LIFE
OR THE than to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
TWO
HANDS
HAVING
TO-BE-FROM-COMING INTO THE to-be-coming-away
GEHENNA
eis eis
Prep
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
asbeston asbestos
a_ Acc Sg n
INTO THE
FIRE
THE
UN-EXTINGUISHed unextinguished
44 Where their worm dieth not, and the fire is not quenched.
9:44
AV
Mark 9 - Mark 10
9:45 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pous pous
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
apokoyon auton apokoptO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Sg m
AND
IF-EVER THE
FOOT
OF-YOU
MAY-BE-SNARING YOU
FROM-STRIKE it strike-off-you ! him cwlon chOlos

a_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
h E
Part
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
45 And if thy foot offend thee, cut it off: it is better for thee to enter halt into life, than having two feet to be cast into hell, into the fire that never shall be quenched:
IDEAL
it-IS
YOU
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering blhqhnai eis ballO eis

vn Aor Pas Prep
LIFE
LAME
OR THE than
duo duo
ni numeral
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
econta echO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
geennan geenna
n_ Acc Sg f
TWO
FEET
HAVING
TO-BE-CAST
INTO THE
GEHENNA
9:46
. .
.
. .
.
9:47 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ekbale ekballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
IF-EVER THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
MAY-BE-SNARING YOU
BE-OUT-CASTING it be-you-extracting ! him thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
monofqalmon eiselqein monophthalmos eiserchomai

a_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
47 And if thine eye offend thee, pluck it out: it is better for thee to enter into the kingdom of God with one eye, than having two eyes to be cast into hell fire:
IDEAL
YOU
it-IS
ONLY-VIEWer one-eyed duo duo

ni numeral
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering blhqhnai eis ballO eis

vn Aor Pas Prep
KINGdom
NA
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
h E
Part
ofqalmous econta ophthalmos echO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
God
OR TWO than
VIEWers eyes
HAVING
TO-BE-CAST
INTO
THE
geennan geenna
n_ Acc Sg f
GEHENNA
9:48 opou
hopou
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
skwlhx skOlEx
n_ Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
teleuta teleutaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pur pur
n_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
THE-?-where THE wheree sbennutai sbennumi

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
WORM
OF-them
NOT
IS-deceasING
AND
THE
FIRE
NOT
IS-beING-EXTINGUISHED is-going-out
9:49 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar puri gar pur

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
alisqhsetai halizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
49 For every one shall be salted with fire, and every sacrifice shall be salted with salt.
EVERY every-one
for
to-FIRE
SHALL-BE-BEING-SALTED
9:50 kalon
kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
alas halas
n_ Nom Sg n
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
alas halas
n_ Nom Sg n
analon analos
a_ Nom Sg n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
IDEAL
THE
SALT
IF-EVER YET THE
SALT
UN-SALT savorless
MAY-BE-BECOMING IN
50 Salt [is] good: but if the salt have lost his saltness, wherewith will ye season it? Have salt in yourselves, and have peace one with another.
tini tis
pi Dat Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
artusete artuO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
ecete echO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
eautois ala heautou halas

pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
kai eirhneuete kai eirEneuO

Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ANY what ? en en
Prep
it
YE-SHALL-BE-seasonING BE-HAVING be-ye-having !
IN
selves yourselves
SALT
AND
BE-beING-at-PEACE be-ye-being-at-peace !
allhlois allElOn
pc Dat Pl m
IN one-another among
AV
Mark 10
10:1 kai ekeiqen anastas

kai
Conj
ekeithen
Adv
anistEmi
ercetai erchomai
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
oria horion
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
WH
thence UP-STANDing from-thence rising

NA
He-IS-COMING
INTO THE
boundaries OF-THE
JUDEA
kai
kai kai
Conj
peran peran
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou kai sumporeuontai iordanEs kai sumporeuomai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
palin ocloi palin ochlos

Adv n_ Nom Pl m
. And he arose from thence, and cometh into the coasts of Judaea by the farther side of Jordan: and the people resort unto him again; and, as he was wont, he taught them again.
AND
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
AND
ARE-TOGETHER-GOING AGAIN are-going-together
THRONGS
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai ws eiwqei kai hOs ethO

Conj Adv vi Plup Act 3 Sg
palin edidasken autous palin didaskO autos

Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
TOWARD Him
WH
AND
AS
He-HAD-CUSTOMED AGAIN he-had-been-accustomed

WH NA
He-TAUGHT
NA
them
10:2 kai
kai
Conj
proselqontes farisaioi
proselqontes farisaioi proserchomai pharisaios

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
ephrwtwn eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
TOWARD-COMING approaching ei ei
Cond
PHARISEES
inquirED-of
And the Pharisees came to him, and asked him, Is it lawful for a man to put away [his] wife? tempting him.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
gunaika apolusai gunE apoluO

n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act
peirazontes peirazO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
IF
it-IS-allowed
to-MAN to-husband
WOMAN wife
TO-FROM-LOOSE tryING to-dismiss autois ti autos tis

Him
10:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eneteilato mwushs entellomai mOusEs

vi Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET answerING
He-said
to-them
ANY what ?
to-YOU(p) ye
And he answered and said unto them, What did Moses command you?
directs
MOSES
10:4 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epetreyen mwushs epitrepO mOusEs

biblion apostasiou grayai biblion apostasion graphO

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Act
kai kai
Conj
THE-ones the apolusai apoluO

vn Aor Act
YET say they-say
permits
MOSES
SCROLLet
OF-FROM-STAND of-divorce
TO-WRITE AND
And they said, Moses suffered to write a bill of divorcement, and to put [her] away.
TO-FROM-LOOSE to-dismiss-her
10:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois pros autos pros

pp Dat Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sklhrokardian umwn sklErokardia humeis

THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
TOWARD THE
HARD-HEART hardheartedness
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
And Jesus answered and said unto them, For the hardness of your heart he wrote you this precept.
egrayen graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
entolhn tauthn entolE houtos

he-WRITES
to-YOU(p) to-ye de de
Conj
THE
direction precept ktisews ktisis

n_ Gen Sg f
this
WH
10:6 apo
apo
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
arsen arsEn
n_ Acc Sg n
kai qhlu kai thElus

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autous
But from the beginning of the creation God made them male and female.
FROM YET ORIGINal beginning

NA
OF-CREATION MALE
AND
female
He-makES
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
10:7 eneken
heneken
Adv

anqrwpos ton anthrOpos ho

patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
For this cause shall a man leave his father and mother, and cleave to his wife;
on-account-of this
NA NA
NA
THE
NA
FATHER
NA
OF-him
NA
AND
THE
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
kai proskollhqhsetai kai proskollaO

pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

MOTHER
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOWARD-JOINED TOWARD THE shall-be-being-joined-to duo duo

ni numeral
WOMAN wife wste hOste

Conj
OF-him
10:8 kai esontai oi

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
ouketi ouketi
Adv
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
And they twain shall be one flesh: so then they are no more twain, but one flesh.
AND
SHALL-BE
THE
TWO
INTO FLESH
ONE
AS-BESIDES NOT-STILL THEY-ARE so-that not-longer
AV
Mark 10
duo duo
ni numeral
alla mia alla heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
TWO
but
ONE
FLESH
10:9 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
sunezeuxen suzeugnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos mh anthrOpos mE
cwrizetw chOrizO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
What therefore God hath joined together, let not man put asunder.
WHICH
THEN THE
God
TOGETHER-YOKES human yokes-together palin oi palin ho

Adv t_ Nom Pl m
NO
LET-BE-SPACizING let-him-be-separating !
10 And in the house his disciples asked him again of the same [matter].
10:10 kai eis

kai
Conj
eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
maqhtai peri mathEtEs peri

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
toutou ephrwtwn houtos eperOtaO

pd Gen Sg n vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
INTO THE
HOME house
AGAIN
THE
LEARNers disciples
ABOUT this concerning
inquirED-of
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
10:11 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois os autos hos

pp Dat Pl m pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
apolush apoluO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING THE should-be-dismissing ep epi

Prep
WOMAN wife
OF-him
11 And he saith unto them, Whosoever shall put away his wife, and marry another, committeth adultery against her.
kai gamhsh kai gameO

allhn allos
a_ Acc Sg f
moicatai moichaomai
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
AND
SHOULD-BE-MARRYING other another auth autos

pp Nom Sg f
IS-committING-ADULTERY ON is-committing-adultery ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
her
10:12 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
apolusasa apoluO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
gamhsh gameO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
allon allos
a_ Acc Sg m
AND
IF-EVER she
FROM-LOOSing dismissing
THE
MAN husband
OF-her
SHOULD-BE-MARRYING other another
12 And if a woman shall put away her husband, and be married to another, she committeth adultery.
moicatai moichaomai
she-IS-committING-ADULTERY she-is-committing-adultery
10:13 kai proseferon

kai
Conj
prospherO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
paidia paidion
n_ Acc Pl n
ina hina
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ayhtai haptO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
AND
THEY-TOWARD-CARRIED to-Him they-brought-to him de de

Conj
little-boys-and-girls THAT OF-them them
He-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING
13 . And they brought young children to him, that he should touch them: and [his] disciples rebuked those that brought [them].
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai epetimhsan autois mathEtEs epitimaO autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m
THE
rebuke
to-them them ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
10:14 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hganakthsen kai eipen aganakteO kai legO

autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
PERCEIVING perceiving-it afete aphiEmi

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YET THE
JESUS
resents resents-it pros pros

Prep
AND
said
to-them
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paidia paidion
n_ Acc Pl n
ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
14 But when Jesus saw [it], he was much displeased, and said unto them, Suffer the little children to come unto me, and forbid them not: for of such is the kingdom of God.
FROM-LET let-ye ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
THE
little-boys-and-girls TO-BE-COMING
TOWARD ME
NO
BE-FORBIDDING them be-ye-forbidding !

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
for
such such(p)
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
10:15 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
AMEN verily tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WHO
EVER NO
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING THE
KINGdom
15 Verily I say unto you, Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God as a little child, he shall not enter therein.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ws paidion hOs paidion

Adv n_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
eiselqh eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
OF-THE
God
AS
little-boy (-or-girl) NOT
NO
MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO her herit he-may-be-entering
AV
Mark 10
10:16 kai enagkalisamenos auta

kai
Conj
enagkalizomai
autos
pp Acc Pl n
kateulogei kateulogeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tiqeis tithEmi
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras ep cheir epi

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
16 And he took them up in his arms, put [his] hands upon them, and blessed them.
AND
IN-CLASPing clasping-in-his-arms
them
He-IS-DOWN-blessING PLACING he-is-benedictory-blessing
THE
HANDS
ON
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
them
10:17 kai ekporeuomenou

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
prosdramwn prostrechO
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
OF-OUT-GOING of-going-out
OF-Him
INTO WAY road auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD-RUNNING ONE running-toward ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
AND
gonupethsas auton gonupeteO autos

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
didaskale agaqe didaskalos agathos

n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
17 . And when he was gone forth into the way, there came one running, and kneeled to him, and asked him, Good Master, what shall I do that I may inherit eternal life?
KNEE-FALLing falling-on-his-knees zwhn zOE

n_ Acc Sg f
Him
inquirED-of
Him
TEACHer !
GOOD !
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT
aiwnion klhronomhsw aiOnios klEronomeO

a_ Acc Sg f vs Aor Act 1 Sg
LIFE
eonian
I-SHOULD-BE-tenantING I-should-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of de de
Conj
10:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
agaqon agathos
a_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-him
ANY why ? qeos theos
ME
YOU-ARE-sayING GOOD
18 And Jesus said unto him, Why callest thou me good? [there is] none good but one, [that is], God.
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
agaqos agathos
a_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE GOOD no-one
IF
NO
ONE
THE
God
10:19 tas
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
entolas oidas entolE eidO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Perf Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
foneushs phoneuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
directions precepts
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED NO you-are-acquainted-with mh mE
Part Neg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-MURDERING NO
moiceushs moicheuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
kleyhs kleptO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
yeudomarturhshs pseudomartureO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
19 Thou knowest the commandments, Do not commit adultery, Do not kill, Do not steal, Do not bear false witness, Defraud not, Honour thy father and mother.
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ADULTERING NO you-should-be-committing-adultery aposterhshs apostereO

vs Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-stealING NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-FALSE-witnessING NO you-should-be-testifying-falsely kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
tima timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
YOU-SHOULD-BE-deprivING BE-VALUING THE you-should-be-cheating be-you-honoring !
FATHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
MOTHER
10:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
didaskale tauta didaskalos houtos

n_ Voc Sg m pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
efulaxamhn ek phulassO ek
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Prep
THE
YET he-AVERRed
to-Him
TEACHer !
these
ALL
I-GUARD I-maintain
OUT
20 And he answered and said unto him, Master, all these have I observed from my youth.
neothtos mou neotEs egO

OF-YOUTH
OF-ME
10:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
embleyas emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hgaphsen auton agapaO autos

kai eipen kai legO

THE
YET JESUS
IN-looking looking-at usterei hustereO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-him him upage hupagO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
LOVES
him
AND
said
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
pwlhson pOleO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
21 Then Jesus beholding him loved him, and said unto him, One thing thou lackest: go thy way, sell whatsoever thou hast, and give to the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven: and come, take up the cross, and follow me.
to-him
ONE one-thing
YOU
IS-WANTING BE-UNDER-LEADING as-much-as YOU-ARE-HAVING SELL is-being-deficient be-you-going-away ! whatever sell-you ! ptwcois kai exeis ptOchos kai echO
a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kai dos kai didOmi

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
qhsauron thEsauros
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
ouranw ouranos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
to-THE
POOR poor-ones
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING PLACED-INTO-MORROW IN treasure
heaven
AV
Mark 10
kai deuro kai deuro

Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
AND
HITHER hither-you !
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me de de

Conj
10:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
stugnasas stugnazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
lupoumenos lupeO
22 And he was sad at that saying, and went away grieved: for he had great possessions.
THE
YET SOMBERing being-somber gar ecwn gar echO

ON
THE
saying word polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
he-FROM-CAME SORROWING he-came-away
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kthmata ktEma
n_ Acc Pl n
he-WAS
for
HAVING one-having
ACQUISITIONS MANY
10:23 kai peribleyamenos o

kai
Conj
periblepO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

pws pOs
Adv
AND
ABOUT-looking looking-about ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
how
23 And Jesus looked round about, and saith unto his disciples, How hardly shall they that have riches enter into the kingdom of God!
duskolws oi duskolOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
crhmata econtes chrEma echO

n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

ILL-VICTUALly squeamishly qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE-ones the-ones
THE
moneys money(p)
HAVING
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
eiseleusontai eiserchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
God
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING shall-be-entering de de
Conj
10:24 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai eqambounto epi tois mathEtEs thambeO epi ho

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Pas 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m
logois autou logos autos

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THE
WERE-AWED were-awed legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ON
THE
sayings words
OF-Him
THE
YET
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
palin apokriqeis palin apokrinomai

Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
autois tekna autos teknon

pp Dat Pl m n_ Voc Pl n
pws duskolon pOs duskolos

Adv a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
24 And the disciples were astonished at his words. But Jesus answereth again, and saith unto them, Children, how hard is it for them that trust in riches to enter into the kingdom of God!
JESUS
AGAIN
answerING
IS-sayING
to-them
offsprings children !
how
ILL-VICTUALED it-IS squeamish
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
vn 2Aor Act
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
WH
10:25 eukopwteron estin

eukopOteros
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kamhlon dia kamElos dia

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
trumalias
NA
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
NA
trumalias trumalia
n_ Gen Sg f
easier
NA
it-IS
CAMEL
THRU through h E
Part
THE
BORE eye
25 It is easier for a camel to go through the eye of a needle, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
rafidos dielqein rhaphis dierchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act
plousion eis plousios eis

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

OF-THE
SEWer needle eiselqein eiserchomai

vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-THRU-COMING OR RICH to-be-passing-through than rich-man
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
TO-BE-INTO-COMING to-be-entering de de
Conj
10:26 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
perissws exeplhssonto legontes perissOs ekplEssO legO

Adv vi impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
pros pros
Prep
WH
auton
NA
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
THE-ones the kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
YET exceedingly
were-astonishED they-were-astonished swqhnai sOzO

vn Aor Pas
sayING
TOWARD
selves themselves
26 And they were astonished out of measure, saying among themselves, Who then can be saved?
dunatai dunamai
AND
ANY who ?
IS-ABLE can
TO-BE-SAVED
10:27 embleyas
emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
anqrwpois adunaton anthrOpos adunatos

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
IN-looking looking-at
to-them them
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
BESIDE humans
UN-ABLE impossible
27 And Jesus looking upon them saith, With men [it is] impossible, but not with God: for with God all things are possible.
AV
Mark 10
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
para para
Prep
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
gar dunata para gar dunatos para

Conj a_ Nom Pl n Prep
WH
tw
NA
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
but
NOT
BESIDE God
ALL
for
ABLE possible
BESIDE
THE
God
10:28 hrxato
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legein legO
vn Pres Act
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
afhkamen aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
28 Then Peter began to say unto him, Lo, we have left all, and have followed thee.
begins
TO-BE-sayING THE
Peter
to-Him
BE-PERCEIVING WE lo !
FROM-LET leave
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai hkolouqhkamen soi kai akoloutheO su

Conj vi Perf Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Sg
ALL
AND
follow
to-YOU you ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
10:29 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
AVERRed
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT-YET-ONE IS no-one there-is patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
WHO
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
h E
Part
n_ Acc Pl m Part
adelfas h adelphE E
n_ Acc Pl f Part
mhtera h mEtEr E
n_ Acc Sg f Part
h E
Part
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
h E
Part
29 And Jesus answered and said, Verily I say unto you, There is no man that hath left house, or brethren, or sisters, or father, or mother, or wife, or children, or lands, for my sake, and the gospel's,
FROM-LETS leaves
HOME house
OR
brothers
OR
WH
sisters
OR
NA
MOTHER
OR
FATHER
OR
offsprings children
OR
agrous eneken agros heneken

n_ Acc Pl m Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
eneken
eneken heneken
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou euaggelion
n_ Gen Sg n
FIELDS
on-account-of OF-ME me mh mE
Part Neg
AND
on-account-of
OF-THE the tw ho
WELL-MESSAGE
10:30 ean
ean
Cond
labh lambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekatontaplasiona nun en hekatontaplasiOn nun en

a_ Acc Pl n Adv Prep
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg m
t_ Dat Sg m
IF-EVER NO
MAY-BE-GETTING HUNDRED-FOLD
NOW IN
THE
SEASON era
this
oikias kai adelfous kai adelfas kai mhteras kai tekna oikia kai adelphos kai adelphE kai mEtEr kai teknon
n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl n
kai agrous meta kai agros meta

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Prep
30 But he shall receive an hundredfold now in this time, houses, and brethren, and sisters, and mothers, and children, and lands, with persecutions; and in the world to come eternal life.
HOMES houses
AND
brothers
AND
sisters
AND
MOTHERS
AND
offsprings children
AND
FIELDS
WITH
diwgmwn kai en diOgmos kai en

n_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ercomenw erchomai
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
CHASEings persecutions
AND
IN
THE
eon
THE
COMING
LIFE
eonian
10:31 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj

escatoi kai eschatos kai

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
escatoi prwtoi eschatos prOtos

31 But many [that are] first shall be last; and the last first.
MANY
YET SHALL-BE
BEFORE-most LAST first-ones last-ones odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
THE
LAST last-ones
BEFORE-most first-ones
32 . And they were in the way going up to Jerusalem; and Jesus went before them: and they were amazed; and as they followed, they were afraid. And he took again the twelve, and began to tell them what things should happen unto him,
10:32 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anabainontes eis anabainO eis

ierosoluma kai hn ierosoluma kai eimi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THEY-WERE YET IN
THE
WAY road
UP-STEPPING going-up
INTO JERUSALEM
AND
WAS
proagwn proagO
autous o autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eqambounto kai thambeO

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akolouqountes akoloutheO
BEFORE-LEADING preceding efobounto phobeO

them
THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-were-AWED THE-ones the-ones dwdeka hrxato dOdeka archO

ni numeral vi Aor midD 3 Sg
YET followING
kai paralabwn kai paralambanO

palin tous palin ho

Adv t_ Acc Pl m
autois legein autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vn Pres Act
FEARED
AND
BESIDE-GETTING taking-aside autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AGAIN
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
He-begins
to-them them
TO-BE-sayING to-be-telling
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mellonta mellO
sumbainein sumbainO
vn Pres Act
THE beING-ABOUT the-things
to-Him him
TO-BE-befallING
10:33 oti idou

hoti
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma kai o ierosoluma kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
that
BE-PERCEIVING WE-ARE-UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM lo ! we-are-going-up
AND
THE
SON
OF-THE
33 [Saying], Behold, we go up to Jerusalem; and the Son of man shall be delivered unto the chief priests, and unto the scribes; and they shall
AV
Mark 10
anqrwpou paradoqhsetai anthrOpos paradidOmi

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
n_ Dat Pl m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
grammateusin kai grammateus kai

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
condemn him to death, and shall deliver him to the Gentiles:
human
SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE shall-be-being-given-up auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-THE
WRITers scribes auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
katakrinousin katakrinO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
qanatw kai paradwsousin thanatos kai paradidOmi

n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING Him they-shall-be-condemning eqnesin ethnos

n_ Dat Pl n
to-DEATH
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him they-shall-be-giving-up
to-THE
NATIONS
10:34 kai empaixousin

kai
Conj
empaizO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai emptusousin kai emptuO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-IN-sportING to-Him they-shall-be-scoffing-at him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-IN-SPITTING to-Him shall-be-spitting-in kai meta treis kai meta treis

Conj Prep
AND
34 And they shall mock him, and shall scourge him, and shall spit upon him, and shall kill him: and the third day he shall rise again.
mastigwsousin mastigoO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kai apoktenousin kai apokteinO

hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
n_ Acc Pl m
THEY-SHALL-BE-scourgING Him shall-be-scourging anasthsetai anistEmi

vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING AND shall-be-killing-him
after
THREE
DAYS
He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING he-shall-be-rising
10:35 kai prosporeuontai autw

kai
Conj
prosporeuomai
autos
pp Dat Sg m
iakwbos kai iwannhs oi iakObos kai iOannEs ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
WH
duo
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
ARE-TOWARD-GOING are-going-to

pp Dat Sg m
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
THE
SONS
35 And James and John, the sons of Zebedee, come unto him, saying, Master, we would that thou shouldest do for us whatsoever we shall desire.
zebedaiou legontes zebedaios legO

didaskale qelomen didaskalos thelO

n_ Voc Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ina hina
Conj
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
OF-ZEBEDEE
sayING
to-Him
TEACHer !
WE-ARE-WILLING THAT WHICH
IF-EVER
aithswmen aiteO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
poihshs poieO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING YOU we-should-be-requesting-of
YOU-SHOULD-BE-DOING to-US
NA
10:36 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
36 And he said unto them, What would ye that I should do for you?
THE
YET He-said
to-them
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-WILLING
ME
I-SHALL-BE-DOING
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
10:37 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ek ek
Prep
THE-ones the
YET say they-say ex ek

Prep
to-Him
BE-GIVING to-US be-you-granting !
THAT ONE
OF-YOU
OUT
37 They said unto him, Grant unto us that we may sit, one on thy right hand, and the other on thy left hand, in thy glory.
dexiwn kai eis dexios kai heis

a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
aristerwn kaqiswmen aristeros kathizO

a_ Gen Pl m vs Aor Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-RIGHT of-right(p)
AND
ONE
OUT OF-left of-left(p) ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
WE-SHOULD-BE-seatING IN we-should-be-being-seated autois ouk autos ou

THE
esteem glory ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
OF-YOU
10:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY ye-are-aware what pothrion o potErion hos

aiteisqe aiteO
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl
dunasqe dunamai
piein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
38 But Jesus said unto them, Ye know not what ye ask: can ye drink of the cup that I drink of? and be baptized with the baptism that I am baptized with?
YE-ARE-REQUESTING YE-ARE-ABLE
TO-BE-DRINKING THE
DRINK-cup cup
WHICH
AV
Mark 10
pinw pinO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
baptisma o baptisma hos

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
baptizomai baptizO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
baptisqhnai baptizO
vn Aor Pas
AM-DRINKING OR
THE
DIPism baptism eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WHICH
AM-beING-DIPizED TO-BE-DIPizED am-being-baptized to-be-baptized o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
10:39 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dunameqa dunamai
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
YET THEY-say
to-Him
WE-ARE-ABLE
THE
YET JESUS
said
autois to autos ho

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
pinw pinO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
piesqe pinO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
39 And they said unto him, We can. And Jesus said unto them, Ye shall indeed drink of the cup that I drink of; and with the baptism that I am baptized withal shall ye be baptized:
to-them
THE
DRINK-cup cup egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
WHICH
AM-DRINKING YE-SHALL-BE-DRINKING AND
THE

baptizomai baptizO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
baptisqhsesqe baptizO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
DIPism baptism
WHICH
AM-beING-DIPizED YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-DIPizED am-being-baptized ye-shall-be-being-baptized ek ek

Prep
10:40 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
kaqisai kathizO
vn Aor Act

h E
Part
ex ek
Prep
euwnumwn ouk euOnumos ou

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
YET TO-be-seated OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p) dounai all ois didOmi alla hos
vn 2Aor Act Conj pr Dat Pl m
OF-ME
OR
NOT
IS
40 But to sit on my right hand and on my left hand is not mine to give; but [it shall be given to them] for whom it is prepared.
emon emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
htoimastai hetoimazO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
MY mine
TO-GIVE
but
to-WHOM it-HAS-been-made-READY it-shall-be-given-to-them-to-whom deka deka

ni numeral

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
hrxanto archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
aganaktein aganakteO
vn Pres Act
peri peri
Prep
iakwbou kai iakObos kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
AND
HEARing hearing-of-it
THE
TEN
begin
TO-BE-resentING ABOUT JACOBUS to-be-being-resentful concerning James
AND
41 And when the ten heard [it], they began to be much displeased with James and John.
iwannou iOannEs
n_ Gen Sg m
JOHN
10:42 kai proskalesamenos autous o

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
autos
pp Acc Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him oti oi hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
them
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-them
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
dokountes dokeO
arcein archO
vn Pres Act
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
katakurieuousin katakurieuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
42 But Jesus called them [to him], and saith unto them, Ye know that they which are accounted to rule over the Gentiles exercise lordship over them; and their great ones exercise authority upon them.
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
ones-SEEMING ones-presuming autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
TO-BE-chief OF-THE to-be-being-chief
NATIONS
ARE-DOWN-masterING are-lording-it-over
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
megaloi mega
a_ Nom Pl m
katexousiazousin autwn katexousiazO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m
OF-them them
AND
THE
GREAT-ones OF-them great-men estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ARE-coercING
OF-them them an an
Part
10:43 ouc
ou
Part Neg
outws de houtOs de
Adv Conj
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
all os alla hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
NOT
thus
YET it-IS
IN YOU(p) among ye estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
but
WHO
EVER MAY-BE-WILLING GREAT
43 But so shall it not be among you: but whosoever will be great among you, shall be your minister:
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-BECOMING IN YOU(p) among ye
SHALL-BE
OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVitor of-ye servant en en

Prep
10:44 kai os
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
AND
WHO
EVER MAY-BE-WILLING IN YOU(p) among ye
44 And whosoever of you will be the chiefest, shall be servant of all.
TO-BE
BEFORE-most SHALL-BE foremost
OF-ALL
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
SLAVE
AV
Mark 10
10:45 kai gar o

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
diakonhqhnai diakoneO
vn Aor Pas
AND also
for
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
NOT
CAME
TO-BE-THRU-SERVED to-be-served pollwn polus

a_ Gen Pl m
45 For even the Son of man came not to be ministered unto, but to minister, and to give his life a ransom for many.
alla diakonhsai alla diakoneO

Conj vn Aor Act
kai dounai thn kai didOmi ho

Conj vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lutron anti lutron anti

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
but
TO-THRU-SERVE AND to-serve
TO-GIVE
THE
soul
OF-Him
LOOSener ransom
INSTEAD OF-MANY insteadfor many apo apo

Prep
10:46 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
iericw kai ekporeuomenou ierichO kai ekporeuomai

ni proper Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
iericw kai ierichO kai

ni proper Conj
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO JERICHO
AND
OF-OUT-GOING of-going-out ikanou hikanos

a_ Gen Sg m
OF-Him
FROM JERICHO
AND
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

kai oclou kai ochlos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
timaiou timaios
n_ Gen Sg m
46 . And they came to Jericho: and as he went out of Jericho with his disciples and a great number of people, blind Bartimaeus, the son of Timaeus, sat by the highway side begging.
THE of-the
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
OF-THRONG enough THE considerable ekaqhto kathEmai

SON
OF-TIMEUS
bartimaios tuflos bartimaios tuphlos

prosaiths prosaitEs
n_ Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
BAR-TIMEUS
BLIND
TOWARD-REQUESTer sat beggar oti ihsous hoti iEsous

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
BESIDE THE
WAY road hrxato archO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
47 And when he heard that it was Jesus of Nazareth, he began to cry out, and say, Jesus, [thou] Son of David, have mercy on me.
10:47 kai akousas

kai
Conj
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nazarhnos estin nazarEnos eimi

AND
HEARing
that
JESUS
THE
NAZAREAN
it-IS
he-begins
krazein krazO
vn Pres Act
kai legein kai legO

Conj vn Pres Act
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m
dauid ihsou dauid iEsous

ni proper n_ Voc Sg m
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
TO-BE-CRYING AND
TO-BE-sayING SON !
of-DAVID JESUS ! of-David ina hina

Conj
BE-MERCIFUL-to ME be-you-merciful-to ! o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
10:48 kai epetimwn autw

kai
Conj
epitimaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
siwphsh siOpaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg n
AND
rebukED
to-him him uie huios

n_ Voc Sg m
MANY
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-beING-SILENT THE
YET to-much
48 And many charged him that he should hold his peace: but he cried the more a great deal, [Thou] Son of David, have mercy on me.
mallon ekrazen mallon krazO

dauid elehson dauid eleaO

ni proper vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
RATHER
he-CRIED
SON !
of-DAVID BE-MERCIFUL-to ME of-David be-you-merciful-to ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
10:49 kai stas

kai
Conj
histEmi
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
fwnhsate auton phOneO autos

kai kai
Conj
AND
STANDing
THE
JESUS
said
SOUND summon-ye ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
him
AND
49 And Jesus stood still, and commanded him to be called. And they call the blind man, saying unto him, Be of good comfort, rise; he calleth thee.
fwnousin phOneO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tuflon legontes tuphlos legO

a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
qarsei tharseO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
THEY-ARE-SOUNDING THE they-are-summoning fwnei phOneO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BLIND blind-man
sayING
to-him
BE-COURAGE-ING BE-ROUSING be-you-having-courage ! be-you-rousing !
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
He-IS-SOUNDING YOU he-is-summoning
10:50 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
apobalwn apoballO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

anaphdhsas anapEdaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
50 And he, casting away his garment, rose, and came to Jesus.
THE
YET FROM-CASTING casting-off ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
cloak
OF-him
UP-SPRINGing springing-up
he-CAME
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE
JESUS

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
AND
answerING
to-him him
THE
JESUS
said
ANY what ?
to-YOU
51 And Jesus answered and said unto him, What wilt thou that I should do unto thee? The blind man said unto him, Lord, that I might receive my sight.
AV
Mark 10 - Mark 11
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbouni ina rhabbouni hina

Aramaic Conj
YOU-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-DOING THE
YET BLIND blind-man
said
to-Him
RABBONI
THAT
anableyw anablepO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-UP-lookING I-should-be-receiving-sight
10:52 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
THE
JESUS
said
to-him
BE-UNDER-LEADING THE be-you-going-away ! kai hkolouqei autw kai akoloutheO autos

BELIEF faith en en
Prep
OF-YOU
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg

Conj Adv
anebleyen anablepO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
52 And Jesus said unto him, Go thy way; thy faith hath made thee whole. And immediately he received his sight, and followed Jesus in the way.
HAS-SAVED
YOU
AND
straightway he-UP-looks AND he-receives-sight
followED
to-Him him
IN
THE
WAY road
AV
Mark 11
11:1 kai ote eggizousin

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
eggizO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma eis ierosoluma eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
bhqfagh bEthphagE
ni proper
kai bhqanian pros kai bEthania pros

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep
AND
when
THEY-ARE-NEARING INTO JERUSALEM they-are-drawing-near twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
INTO BETHPHAGE AND
BETHANY
TOWARD
. And when they came nigh to Jerusalem, unto Bethphage and Bethany, at the mount of Olives, he sendeth forth two of his disciples,
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
elaiwn apostellei elaia apostellO

n_ Gen Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

THE
mountain Mount
OF-THE
OLIVES
He-IS-commissionING TWO he-is-dispatching eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-Him
11:2 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois upagete autos hupagO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
katenanti katenanti
Adv
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-ye-going-away ! eis eis

Prep
VILLAGE
THE
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD facing pwlon pOlos

n_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl

Conj Adv
eisporeuomenoi eisporeuomai
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
eurhsete heuriskO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
And saith unto them, Go your way into the village over against you: and as soon as ye be entered into it, ye shall find a colt tied, whereon never man sat; loose him, and bring [him].
OF-YOU(p) AND ye dedemenon deO

straightway INTO-GOING going-into ef epi

Prep
INTO her herit oupw oupO

Adv
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING COLT
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
anqrwpwn ekaqisen lusate anthrOpos kathizO luO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-BOUND ON
WHICH
NOT-YET-ONE NOT-as-yet OF-humans no-one
is-seated
LOOSE loose-ye !
it
him it
kai ferete kai pherO

AND
BE-CARRYING be-ye-bringing-him ! tis tis

px Nom Sg m
11:3 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
IF-EVER ANY anyone kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
MAY-BE-sayING ANY what ? ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YE-ARE-DOING this
say say-ye ! apostellei apostellO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
And if any man say unto you, Why do ye this? say ye that the Lord hath need of him; and straightway he will send him hither.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f

Conj Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him it
palin palin
Adv
THE
Master Lord
OF-it of-himit
need
IS-HAVING
AND
straightway it
He-IS-commissionING AGAIN he-is-dispatching
wde hOde
Adv
here
11:4 kai aphlqon

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai euron kai heuriskO

pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
dedemenon deO
pros pros
Prep
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
exw exO
Adv
epi epi
Prep
AND
THEY-FROM-CAME AND they-came-away amfodou amphodon

n_ Gen Sg n
THEY-FOUND COLT found
HAVING-been-BOUND TOWARD DOOR
OUT ON outside
And they went their way, and found the colt tied by the door without in a place where two ways met; and they loose him.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kai luousin kai luO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him it
THE
ENVELOPE-WAY AND encircling-road twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THEY-ARE-LOOSING it
11:5 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
ekei esthkotwn ekei histEmi

elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autois ti autos tis

poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
And certain of them that stood there said unto them, What do ye, loosing the colt?
AND
ANY some
OF-THE-ones there of-the-ones ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
said
to-them
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-DOING
luontes luO
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
LOOSING
THE
COLT
11:6 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autois kaqws autos kathOs

pp Dat Pl m Adv
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
And they said unto them even as Jesus had commanded: and they let them go.
THE
YET THEY-say they-told autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
to-them them
according-AS said
THE
JESUS
AND
afhkan aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-LET them they-let-off
AV
Mark 11
11:7 kai ferousin

kai
Conj
pherO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai epiballousin kai epiballO

And they brought the colt to Jesus, and cast their garments on him; and he sat upon him.
AND
THEY-ARE-CARRYING THE they-are-bringing ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
COLT
TOWARD THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-ARE-ON-CASTING they-are-casting-on
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai ekaqisen ep kai kathizO epi

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to-it him it
THE
GARMENTS OF-them
AND
He-is-seated
ON
it
him it
11:8 kai polloi

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
estrwsan eis strOnnumi eis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
AND
MANY
THE
GARMENTS OF-them
STREW
INTO THE
WAY road
others
YET
And many spread their garments in the way: and others cut down branches off the trees, and strawed [them] in the way.
stibadas koyantes stibadas koptO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
agrwn agros
n_ Gen Pl m
soft-foliage
STRIKing chopping-it
OUT OF-THE
FIELDS
11:9 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
proagontes proagO
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
akolouqountes ekrazon akoloutheO krazO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
wsanna hOsanna
Hebrew
AND
THE
ones-BEFORE-LEADING AND ones-preceding o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
ones-followING ones-following en en
Prep
CRIED
HOSANNA
And they that went before, and they that followed, cried, saying, Hosanna; Blessed [is] he that cometh in the name of the Lord:
euloghmenos eulogeO
ercomenos erchomai

beING-blessED
THE
One-COMING one-coming h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IN
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
11:10 euloghmenh
eulogeO
ercomenh erchomai

hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
dauid dauid
ni proper
beING-blessED
THE
COMING
KINGdom
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-US
DAVID
10 Blessed [be] the kingdom of our father David, that cometh in the name of the Lord: Hosanna in the highest.
wsanna en hOsanna en
Hebrew Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
uyistois hupsistos
a_ Dat Pl n
HOSANNA
IN
THE
HIGHest-ones highest(p) eis eis

Prep
11:11 kai eishlqen

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ierosoluma eis ierosoluma eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai peribleyamenos kai periblepO

AND
He-INTO-CAME INTO JERUSALEM he-entered

WH
INTO THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
ABOUT-looking looking-about eis eis

Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
oye
NA
oyias opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
oushs eimi
vp Pres vxx Gen Sg f
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
bhqanian bEthania
n_ Acc Sg f
11 And Jesus entered into Jerusalem, and into the temple: and when he had looked round about upon all things, and now the eventide was come, he went out unto Bethany with the twelve.
ALL
evening of-evening dwdeka dOdeka

ni numeral
ALREADY OF-BEING being
THE
HOUR
He-OUT-CAME INTO BETHANY he-came-out
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
WITH
THE
TWO-TEN twelve epaurion epaurion

Adv
11:12 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
exelqontwn autwn exerchomai autos

vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
bhqanias epeinasen bEthania peinaO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
12 . And on the morrow, when they were come from Bethany, he was hungry:
AND
to-THE
ON-MORROW OF-OUT-COMING of-coming-out sukhn sukE

n_ Acc Sg f
them
FROM BETHANY
He-HUNGERS
11:13 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
apo apo
Prep
makroqen ecousan makrothen echO

Adv vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
fulla phullon
n_ Acc Pl n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
AND
PERCEIVING
FIG-tree
FROM FAR-PLACE afar en en

Prep
HAVING
leaves
He-CAME
IF
ara ara
Part
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
kai elqwn kai erchomai

ep epi
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
13 And seeing a fig tree afar off having leaves, he came, if haply he might find any thing thereon: and when he came to it, he found nothing but leaves; for the time of figs was not [yet].
CONSEQUENTLY ANY anything ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
He-SHALL-BE-FINDING IN
her herit o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
COMING
ON
her herit sukwn sukon

n_ Gen Pl n
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
fulla phullon
n_ Acc Pl n
gar kairos gar kairos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE He-FOUND nothing
IF
NO
leaves
THE
for
SEASON
NOT
WAS it-was
OF-FIGS
AV
Mark 11

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
mhketi mEketi
Adv
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
answerING
He-said
to-her to-herit
NO-STILL INTO THE by-no-means-still oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
eon
OUT OF-YOU
14 And Jesus answered and said unto it, No man eat fruit of thee hereafter for ever. And his disciples heard [it].
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
fagoi esthiO
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai hkouon kai akouO


NO-YET-ONE FRUIT anyone
MAY-he-BE-EATING AND
HEARD
THE

Prep
OF-Him
11:15 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma kai eiselqwn ierosoluma kai eiserchomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO JERUSALEM
AND
INTO-COMING entering kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
INTO THE
SACRED-place sanctuary tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ekballein ekballO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pwlountas pOleO
agorazontas en agorazO en
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep
15 And they come to Jerusalem: and Jesus went into the temple, and began to cast out them that sold and bought in the temple, and overthrew the tables of the moneychangers, and the seats of them that sold doves;
He-begins
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE to-be-casting-out kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
AND
THE
ones-BUYING ones-buying
IN
THE
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
trapezas twn trapeza ho

kollubistwn kai tas kollubistEs kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl f
kaqedras kathedra
n_ Acc Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
THE
tables
OF-THE
LOPPers brokers
AND
THE
DOWN-SETTLES OF-THE seats
pwlountwn tas pOleO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
peristeras katestreyen peristera katastrephO

THE
DOVES
He-DOWN-TURNS he-overturns ina hina

Conj
11:16 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
hfien aphiEmi
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
dienegkh diapherO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
skeuos skeuos
n_ Acc Sg n
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
16 And would not suffer that any man should carry [any] vessel through the temple.
AND
NOT
FROM-LET THAT ANY he-gave-leave anyone
MAY-BE-THRU-CARRYING INSTRUMENT THRU THE may-be-carrying-through vessel through
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
11:17 kai edidasken kai elegen

kai
Conj
NA
didaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
AND
He-TAUGHT
AND
said
to-them
NOT
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN that
THE
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
proseuchs klhqhsetai proseuchE kaleO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin ethnos
n_ Dat Pl n
17 And he taught, saying unto them, Is it not written, My house shall be called of all nations the house of prayer? but ye have made it a den of thieves.
HOME house umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
OF-ME
HOME house
OF-prayer
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED to-ALL
THE
NATIONS
de de
Conj
pepoihkate auton poieO autos

vi Perf Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
sphlaion lhstwn spElaion lEstEs

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
YOU(p) ye
YET HAVE-made
it
him it
CAVE
OF-ROBBERS
11:18 kai hkousan oi

kai
Conj
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis kai ezhtoun grammateus kai zEteO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
pws pOs
Adv Int
AND
HEAR
THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests efobounto phobeO

THE
WRITers scribes pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-SOUGHT how how ? oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apoleswsin apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
gar auton gar autos

Conj pp Acc Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
18 And the scribes and chief priests heard [it], and sought how they might destroy him: for they feared him, because all the people was astonished at his doctrine.
Him
THEY-SHOULD-BE-destroyING THEY-FEARED
for
Him
EVERY entire
for
THE
THRONG
exeplhsseto epi th ekplEssO epi ho

vi impf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Dat Sg f

was-astonishED
ON
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
11:19 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
oye opse
Adv
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
exeporeuonto exw ekporeuomai exO

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews polis
n_ Gen Sg f
19 And when even was come, he went out of the city.
AND
when-EVER evening BECAME whenever it-became
THEY-OUT-WENT they-went-out
OUT OF-THE outside the
city
AV
Mark 11
11:20 kai paraporeuomenoi prwi

kai
Conj
paraporeuomai
prOi
Adv
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sukhn sukE
n_ Acc Sg f
exhrammenhn xErainO
ek ek
Prep
20 And in the morning, as they passed by, they saw the fig tree dried up from the roots.
AND
BESIDE-GOING going-by
morning THEY-PERCEIVED THE in-the-morning
FIG-tree
HAVING-been-DRIED OUT having-been-withered
rizwn rhiza
n_ Gen Pl f
OF-ROOTS
11:21 kai anamnhsqeis

kai
Conj
anamimnEskO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbi ide rhabbi eidO

Hebrew vm Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
BEING-UP-REMINDED THE recollecting hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
Peter
IS-sayING
to-Him
RABBI
21 And Peter calling to remembrance saith unto him, Master, behold, the fig tree which thou cursedst is withered away.
sukh sukE
n_ Nom Sg f
kathrasw kataraomai
vi Aor midD 2 Sg
exhrantai xErainO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
FIG-tree
WHICH
YOU-DOWN-EXECRATE HAS-DRIED you-curse has-withered o ho

t_ Nom Sg m

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ecete autos echO

pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
22 And Jesus answering saith unto them, Have faith in God.
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-them
BE-YE-HAVING BELIEF be-ye-having ! faith
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-God
11:23 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti os hoti hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg n
AMEN verily arqhti airO

vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
WHO
EVER MAY-BE-sayING to-THE
mountain
this
kai blhqhti kai ballO

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai mh thalassa kai mE

BE-BEING-LIFTED AND be-you-being-picked-up ! diakriqh diakrinO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
BE-BEING-CAST INTO THE be-you-being-cast ! en en

Prep
SEA
AND
NO
23 For verily I say unto you, That whosoever shall say unto this mountain, Be thou removed, and be thou cast into the sea; and shall not doubt in his heart, but shall believe that those things which he saith shall come to pass; he shall have whatsoever he saith.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

alla pisteuh alla pisteuO

oti o hoti hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-BEING-THRU-JUDGED IN may-be-doubting lalei laleO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
HEART
OF-him
but
MAY-BE-BELIEVING that should-be-believing
WHICH
ginetai ginomai
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
he-IS-TALKING IS-BECOMING he-is-speaking is-occurring
SHALL-BE it-shall-be legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to-him
11:24 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
kai aiteisqe kai aiteO

I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ALL all-things umin humeis
as-much-as YE-ARE-prayING whatever
AND
REQUESTING are-requesting
24 Therefore I say unto you, What things soever ye desire, when ye pray, believe that ye receive [them], and ye shall have [them].
pisteuete oti elabete pisteuO hoti lambanO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai estai kai eimi

pp 2 Dat Pl
that
YE-GOT ye-obtained sthkete stEkO
AND
it-SHALL-BE
to-YOU(p) to-ye afiete aphiEmi

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
11:25 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
proseucomenoi proseuchomai
ei ei
Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
when-EVER YE-ARE-STANDING-firm prayING whenever ye-may-be-standing-firm kata tinos kata tis

Prep px Gen Sg m
BE-FROM-LETTING IF be-ye-forgiving ! pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
ANY anything en en
Prep
25 And when ye stand praying, forgive, if ye have ought against any: that your Father also which is in heaven may forgive you your trespasses.
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
YE-ARE-HAVING DOWN against ouranois afh ouranos aphiEmi

n_ Dat Pl m
OF-ANY anyone
THAT AND also umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye the-one
IN
THE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata umwn paraptOma humeis

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
heavens
MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING to-YOU(p) may-be-forgiving ye
THE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Mark 11
11:26
26 But if ye do not forgive, neither will your Father which is in heaven forgive your trespasses.
. .
.
. .
.
11:27 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
ierosoluma kai en ierosoluma kai en

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING AGAIN
INTO JERUSALEM
AND
IN
THE
SACRED-place sanctuary arciereis archiereus

n_ Nom Pl m
27 . And they come again to Jerusalem: and as he was walking in the temple, there come to him the chief priests, and the scribes, and the elders,
peripatountos autou peripateO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
ercontai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
OF-ABOUT-TREADING of-walking oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
ARE-COMING
TOWARD Him
THE

presbuteroi presbuteros
a_ Nom Pl m
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
THE
SENIORS elders poia poios

pi Dat Sg f
11:28 kai elegon

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en en
Prep

poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
h E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-said
to-Him
IN
these YOU-ARE-DOING OR these-things tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
ANY who ?
28 And say unto him, By what authority doest thou these things? and who gave thee this authority to do these things?
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exousian tauthn ina exousia houtos hina

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj
poihs poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
to-YOU you
GIVES
THE
authority
this
THAT these YOU-MAY-BE-DOING these-things umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
11:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois eperwthsw autos eperOtaO

pp Dat Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
I-SHALL-BE-inquirING-of YOU(p) ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
ONE
saying word
kai apokriqhte moi kai apokrinomai egO

Conj vm Aor pasD 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
kai erw kai ereO

en en
Prep
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f

29 And Jesus answered and said unto them, I will also ask of you one question, and answer me, and I will tell you by what authority I do these things.
AND
BE-answerING be-ye-answering !
to-ME me
AND
I-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU(p) to-ye
IN
these these-things
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-DOING
11:30 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
baptisma to baptisma ho
iwannou ex iOannEs ek
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
ouranou hn ouranos eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h E
Part
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
30 The baptism of John, was [it] from heaven, or of men? answer me.
THE
DIPism baptism
THE
OF-JOHN
OUT OF-heaven
it-WAS
OR
OUT OF-humans
apokriqhte moi apokrinomai egO

vm Aor pasD 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
BE-answerING be-ye-answering !
to-ME me pros pros

Prep
11:31 kai dielogizonto

kai
Conj
dialogizomai
eautous legontes heautou legO

ean ean
Cond
eipwmen legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ex ek
Prep
AND
THEY-THRU-accountED TOWARD selves they-reasoned themselves dia dia

Prep
sayING
IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT
31 And they reasoned with themselves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven; he will say, Why then did ye not believe him?
ouranou erei ouranos ereO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg

OF-heaven
He-SHALL-BE-declarING THRU ANY because-of what ? ex ek

Prep
THEN
NOT
YE-BELIEVE
to-him him apantes gar hapas gar

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
32 But if we shall say, Of men; they feared the people: for all [men] counted John, that he was a prophet indeed.
11:32 alla eipwmen

alla
Conj
legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
anqrwpwn efobounto anthrOpos phobeO

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
but
WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-humans
THEY-FEARED
THE
THRONG
ALL(emph.)
for
AV
Mark 11 - Mark 12
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn ontws oti profhths iOannEs ontOs hoti prophEtEs

n_ Acc Sg m Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
HAD
THE
JOHN
BEINGly really
that
BEFORE-AVERer he-WAS prophet legousin legO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
11:33 kai apokriqentes tw

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
kai kai
Conj
AND
answerING
to-THE
JESUS
THEY-ARE-sayING NOT
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AND we-are-aware umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois oude autos oude

pp Dat Pl m Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
33 And they answered and said unto Jesus, We cannot tell. And Jesus answering saith unto them, Neither do I tell you by what authority I do these things.
THE
JESUS
IS-sayING
to-them
NOT-YET I neither
to-YOU(p) ye
IN
?-THE-WHICH which ?

poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
authority
these I-AM-DOING these-things
AV
Mark 12
12:1 kai hrxato

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois en autos en
pp Dat Pl m Prep
parabolais lalein parabolE laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Act
ampelwna anqrwpos ampelOn anthrOpos

AND
He-begins
to-them
IN
TO-BE-TALKING VINEyard to-be-speaking upolhnion hupolEnion

n_ Acc Sg n
human
efuteusen kai perieqhken fragmon kai wruxen phuteuO kai peritithEmi phragmos kai orussO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai wkodomhsen kai oikodomeO

. And he began to speak unto them by parables. A [certain] man planted a vineyard, and set an hedge about [it], and digged [a place for] the winefat, and built a tower, and let it out to husbandmen, and went into a far country.
plants
AND
ABOUT-PLACES BARRIER he-places-about stone-dike auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
EXCAVATES UNDER-TROUGH AND vat kai apedhmhsen kai apodEmeO

HOME-BUILDS builds
purgon purgos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai exedeto kai ekdidOmi

gewrgois geOrgos
n_ Dat Pl m
TOWER
AND
OUT-GAVE leased
him him it
to-LAND-ACTers AND to-farmers tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
travels
12:2 kai apesteilen pros

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pros
Prep
gewrgous tw geOrgos ho
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
doulon ina doulos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
para para
Prep
AND
he-commissions he-dispatches gewrgwn geOrgos

n_ Gen Pl m
TOWARD THE
LAND-ACTers farmers apo apo

Prep
to-THE
SEASON
SLAVE
THAT BESIDE
And at the season he sent to the husbandmen a servant, that he might receive from the husbandmen of the fruit of the vineyard.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
labh lambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
karpwn tou karpos ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos ampelOn
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
LAND-ACTers he-MAY-BE-GETTING FROM THE farmers auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
FRUITS
OF-THE
VINEyard
12:3 kai labontes

kai
Conj
lambanO
edeiran derO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai apesteilan kai apostellO

kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg m
And they caught [him], and beat him, and sent [him] away empty.
AND
GETTING taking
him
THEY-SKIN AND they-lash-him
THEY-commission EMPTY dispatch-him doulon kakeinon ekefaliwsan doulos kakeinos kephalaioO

n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
4
12:4 kai palin apesteilen pros

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pros
Prep
autous allon autos allos

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
AND
AGAIN
TOWARD them
other another
SLAVE
AND-that-one and-that-one
THEY-HEAD they-hit-his-head
kai htimasan kai atimazO

And again he sent unto them another servant; and at him they cast stones, and wounded [him] in the head, and sent [him] away shamefully handled.
AND
THEY-UN-VALUE they-dishonor-him apesteilen kakeinon apekteinan apostellO kakeinos apokteinO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
12:5 kai allon

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai pollous allous ous kai polus allos ho

Conj a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
AND
other another
he-commissions he-dispatches ous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
AND-that-one and-that-one de de
Conj
THEY-FROM-KILL AND they-kill
MANY
others
THE-ones the-ones
And again he sent another; and him they killed, and many others; beating some, and killing some.
men men
Part
derontes derO
apoktennontes apokteinO
INDEED SKINNING lashing
THE-ones the-ones eicen echO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
YET FROM-KILLING killing uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
12:6 eti
eti
Adv
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
agaphton apesteilen auton agapEtos apostellO autos

a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
escaton pros eschatos pros

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
STILL ONE
he-HAD
SON
beLOVED
he-commissions he-dispatches ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
him
LAST
TOWARD
Having yet therefore one son, his wellbeloved, he sent him also last unto them, saying, They will reverence my son.
autous legwn autos legO

oti entraphsontai hoti entrepO

Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
them
sayING
that
THEY-SHALL-BE-abashING THE they-shall-be-respecting pros pros

Prep
SON
OF-ME
12:7 ekeinoi de
ekeinos
pd Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gewrgoi geOrgos
n_ Nom Pl m
eautous eipan heautou legO

pf 3 Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti outos hoti houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
those
YET THE
LAND-ACTers TOWARD selves farmers themselves deute deute

vm txx vxx 2 Pl
say
that
this
IS
But those husbandmen said among themselves, This is the heir; come, let us kill him, and the inheritance shall be ours.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai hmwn kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Gen Pl
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
THE
tenant HITHER enjoyer-of-the-allotment hither-ye ! klhronomia klEronomia

n_ Nom Sg f
WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING him we-may-be-killing
AND
OF-US
SHALL-BE
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
tenancy enjoyment-of-the-allotment
AV
Mark 12
12:8 kai labontes

kai
Conj
lambanO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai exebalon kai ekballO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exw tou exO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
AND
GETTING taking-him
THEY-FROM-KILL him they-kill
AND
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) him they-cast-out (past)
And they took him, and killed [him], and cast [him] out of the vineyard.
OUT
OF-THE
ampelwnos ampelOn
n_ Gen Sg m
VINEyard
NA
12:9 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos ampelOn
n_ Gen Sg m
ANY what ? eleusetai erchomai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
THEN
SHALL-BE-DOING THE
master lord
OF-THE
VINEyard
What shall therefore the lord of the vineyard do? he will come and destroy the husbandmen, and will give the vineyard unto others.
kai apolesei kai apollumi

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gewrgous kai dwsei geOrgos kai didOmi

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
he-SHALL-BE-COMING AND
SHALL-BE-destroyING THE
LAND-ACTers farmers
AND
SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
ampelwna allois ampelOn allos

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Dat Pl m
VINEyard
to-others
12:10 oude
oude
Adv
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
grafhn tauthn anegnwte liqon graphE houtos anaginOskO lithos

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
NOT-YET THE
WRITing scripture
this
YE-read(past) ye-did-read eis eis

Prep
STONE
WHICH
FROM-test reject
THE
10 And have ye not read this scripture; The stone which the builders rejected is become the head of the corner:
oikodomountes outos oikodomeO houtos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pd Nom Sg m
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg

ones-HOME-BUILDING ones-building
this
WAS-BECOME INTO HEAD
OF-CORNER
12:11 para
para
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
kai estin kai eimi

qaumasth en thaumastos en
a_ Nom Sg f Prep
ofqalmois ophthalmos
n_ Dat Pl m
11 This was the Lord's doing, and it is marvellous in our eyes?
BESIDE OF-Master Lord hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
BECAME
this
AND
it-IS
MARVELous
IN
VIEWers eyes
OF-US
12:12 kai ezhtoun

kai
Conj
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
krathsai kai efobhqhsan krateO kai phobeO

vn Aor Act Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
THEY-SOUGHT Him
TO-HOLD
AND
THRONG
THEY-KNOW
gar oti pros gar hoti pros

Conj Conj Prep
autous thn autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn eipen parabolE legO

n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai afentes kai aphiEmi

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
12 And they sought to lay hold on him, but feared the people: for they knew that he had spoken the parable against them: and they left him, and went their way.
for
that
TOWARD them
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
He-said he-spoke
AND
Him
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-CAME they-came-away
12:13 kai apostellousin

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn kai twn pharisaios kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
AND
THEY-ARE-commissionING TOWARD Him they-are-dispatching auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
ANY some
OF-THE
PHARISEES
AND
OF-THE
13 . And they send unto him certain of the Pharisees and of the Herodians, to catch him in [his] words.
hrwdianwn ina hErOdianoi hina

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
agreuswsin agreuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
HERODians
THAT Him
THEY-SHOULD-BE-CATCHING to-saying to-word legousin legO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
12:14 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

oti alhqhs hoti alEthEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
AND
COMING
TEACHer !
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware
TRUE
14 And when they were come, they say unto him, Master, we know that thou art true, and carest for no man: for thou regardest not the person of
AV
Mark 12
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
melei melei
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
peri peri
Prep
oudenos oudeis
a_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
gar blepeis gar blepO

eis eis
Prep
men, but teachest the way of God in truth: Is it lawful to give tribute to Caesar, or not?
YOU-ARE
AND
NOT
to-YOU
ABOUT NOT-YET-ONE NOT anyone odon hodos

n_ Acc Sg f
for
YOU-ARE-lookING INTO
proswpon anqrwpwn all ep prosOpon anthrOpos alla epi

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep
alhqeias thn alEtheia ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
face
OF-humans
but
ON
TRUTH
THE
WAY
OF-THE
God
didaskeis didaskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
dounai khnson didOmi kEnsos

vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
ou ou
Part Neg
YOU-ARE-TEACHING it-IS-allowed are-teaching
TO-GIVE
POLL-TAX
to-CEASAR OR
NOT
12:15 dwmen
didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
h E
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
dwmen didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
(12:15)
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eidws eidO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING OR
NO
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING
THE
YET HAVING-PERCEIVED OF-them
15 Shall we give, or shall we not give? But he, knowing their hypocrisy, said unto them, Why tempt ye me? bring me a penny, that I may see [it].
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
upokrisin eipen hupokrisis legO

autois ti autos tis

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
peirazete ferete peirazO pherO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl vm Pres Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
hypocrisy
He-said
to-them
ANY why ?
ME
YE-ARE-tryING
BE-YE-CARRYING to-ME be-ye-bringing ! me
dhnarion ina dEnarion hina

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
idw eidO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
DENARIUS
THAT I-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING I-may-be-perceiving-it de de

Conj
12:16 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
hnegkan pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai legei kai legO

autois tinos autos tis

pp Dat Pl m pi Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eikwn eikOn
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET THEY-CARRY AND they-bring-it epigrafh oi epigraphE ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Pl m
He-IS-sayING
to-them
OF-ANY of-whom ? kaisaros kaisar

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
image
this
AND
16 And they brought [it]. And he saith unto them, Whose [is] this image and superscription? And they said unto him, Caesar's.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
ON-WRITing inscription de de
Conj
THE
YET THEY-say
to-Him
NA
OF-CEASAR
12:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kaisaros apodote kaisar apodidOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
THE
YET JESUS
said
to-them
THE the(p) qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-CEASAR
BE-FROM-GIVING be-ye-rendering ! ep epi

Prep
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai exeqaumazon kai ekthaumazO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
17 And Jesus answering said unto them, Render to Caesar the things that are Caesar's, and to God the things that are God's. And they marvelled at him.
to-CEASAR AND
THE the(p)
OF-THE
God
to-THE
God
AND
THEY-OUT-MARVELED ON they-were-astounded
Him
12:18 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
saddoukaioi pros saddoukaios pros

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oitines legousin anastasin hostis legO anastasis

pr Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
AND
ARE-COMING
SADDUCEES
TOWARD Him
WHO-ANY who-any
ARE-sayING
18 . Then come unto him the Sadducees, which say there is no resurrection; and they asked him, saying,
mh mE
Part Neg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
kai ephrwtwn kai eperOtaO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
NO
TO-BE
AND
THEY-inquirED-of Him
sayING
12:19 didaskale mwushs egrayen

didaskalos
n_ Voc Sg m
mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
TEACHer !
MOSES
WRITES
to-US
that
IF-EVER OF-ANY of-anyone afh aphiEmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
brother
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kataliph kai kataleipO

gunaika kai mh gunE kai mE

teknon ina teknon hina

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
19 Master, Moses wrote unto us, If a man's brother die, and leave [his] wife [behind him], and leave no children, that his brother should take his wife, and raise up seed unto his brother.
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING AND may-be-dying labh lambanO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-leavING WOMAN wife adelfos autou adelphos autos

AND
NO
MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING offspring may-be-leaving child gunaika kai exanasthsh gunE kai exanistEmi
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THAT
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
MAY-BE-GETTING THE may-be-taking
brother
OF-him
THE
WOMAN wife
AND
SHOULD-BE-OUT-UP-STANDING should-be-raising-up
AV
Mark 12
sperma tw sperma ho

seed
to-THE
brother
OF-him
12:20 epta
hepta
ni numeral
adelfoi hsan adelphos eimi

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gunaika kai gunE kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
20 Now there were seven brethren: and the first took a wife, and dying left no seed.
SEVEN
brothers
WERE there-were afhken aphiEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
THE
BEFORE-most GOT first
WOMAN wife
AND
apoqnhskwn apothnEskO
ouk ou
Part Neg
sperma sperma
n_ Acc Sg n
FROM-DYING dying
NOT
FROM-LETS leaves
seed
12:21 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
deuteros elaben deuteros lambanO

a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai apeqanen mh kai apothnEskO mE

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg
katalipwn kataleipO
21 And the second took her, and died, neither left he any seed: and the third likewise.
AND
THE
second second-one tritos tritos
GOT
her
AND
FROM-DIED died
NO
leavING
sperma kai o sperma kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m
wsautws hOsautOs
Adv
a_ Nom Sg m
seed
AND
THE
third third-one epta hepta

ni numeral
AS-SAMEly similarly afhkan aphiEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
12:22 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
sperma escaton pantwn kai h sperma eschatos pas kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n a_ Gen Pl n Conj t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
22 And the seven had her, and left no seed: last of all the woman died also.
AND
THE
SEVEN
NOT
FROM-LET leave
seed
LAST
OF-ALL
AND also
THE
WOMAN
apeqanen apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
FROM-DIED died
12:23 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anastasei anastasis
n_ Dat Sg f
NA
otan hotan
Conj
NA
anastwsin anistEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
IN
THE
UP-STANDing resurrection oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
when-EVER THEY-MAY-BE-UP-STANDING whenever they-may-be-rising gar epta gar hepta

Conj ni numeral
OF-ANY of-which
OF-them
23 In the resurrection therefore, when they shall rise, whose wife shall she be of them? for the seven had her to wife.
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
escon echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE she-shall-be
WOMAN wife
THE
for
SEVEN
have-HAD
her
WOMAN wife touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
12:24 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
dia dia
Prep
planasqe planaO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
AVERRed
to-them
THE
JESUS
NOT
THRU this because-of dunamin tou dunamis ho

n_ Acc Sg f
YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED ye-are-being-deceived qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
24 And Jesus answering said unto them, Do ye not therefore err, because ye know not the scriptures, neither the power of God?
mh mE
Part Neg
eidotes eidO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas mhde graphE mEde

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
t_ Gen Sg m
NO
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-acquainted with gar ek gar ek

Conj Prep
WRITings scriptures
NO-YET THE nor-yet
ABILITY power oute oute

Conj
OF-THE
God
12:25 otan
hotan
Conj
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
anastwsin anistEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
gamousin gameO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
when-EVER for whenever oute oute

Conj
OUT OF-DEAD-ones THEY-MAY-BE-UP-STANDING NOT-BESIDES THEY-ARE-MARRYING of-dead-ones they-may-be-rising neither all eisin alla eimi
25 For when they shall rise from the dead, they neither marry, nor are given in marriage; but are as the angels which are in heaven.
gamizontai gamizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ws aggeloi hOs aggelos

Adv n_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
NOT-BESIDES THEY-ARE-MARRYizING but nor they-are-giving-in-marriage
THEY-ARE are
AS
MESSENGERS IN
THE
heavens
12:26 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
oti egeirontai hoti egeirO

Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ABOUT YET THE concerning biblw biblos

n_ Dat Sg f
DEAD-ones that dead-ones batou batos
THEY-ARE-beING-ROUSED NOT
YE-read(past) ye-did-read o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
mwusews epi tou mOusEs epi ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
pws eipen pOs legO

Adv Int vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
26 And as touching the dead, that they rise: have ye not read in the book of Moses, how in the bush God spake unto him, saying, I [am] the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob?
n_ Gen Sg m
SCROLL
of-MOSES of-Moses
ON
OF-THE the
THORN-BUSH how how ?
said spoke
to-him
THE
God
AV
Mark 12
legwn legO
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai kai
Conj
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
isaak isaak
ni proper
sayING
NA
I I-am o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
of-ABRAHAM AND of-Abraham
THE
God
of-ISAAC of-Isaac
kai kai
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
AND
THE
God
of-JACOB of-Jacob nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
12:27 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
alla zwntwn alla zaO

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
planasqe planaO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
27 He is not the God of the dead, but the God of the living: ye therefore do greatly err.
NOT
IS he-is
God
OF-DEAD-ones but of-dead-ones twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
OF-LIVING-ones of-ones-living
much
YE-ARE-beING-STRAYED ye-are-being-deceived autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
28 . And one of the scribes came, and having heard them reasoning together, and perceiving that he had answered them well, asked him, Which is the first commandment of all?
12:28 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
grammatewn akousas grammateus akouO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
WH
ONE
NA
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
HEARing
OF-them them autois ephrwthsen autos eperOtaO

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
suzhtountwn suzEteO
eidws
idwn eidO
oti kalws apekriqh hoti kalOs apokrinomai

Conj Adv vi Aor midD 3 Sg
TOGETHER-SEEKING discussing auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
PERCEIVING
that
IDEALly
He-answerED
to-them them
inquirES-of
poia poios
pi Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
entolh prwth entolE prOtos

pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl f
Him
?-THE-WHICH IS which ? o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
direction precept ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-most OF-ALL foremost estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
12:29 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
oti prwth hoti prOtos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
akoue akouO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
israhl kurios israEl kurios

ni proper n_ Nom Sg m
answerED
THE
JESUS
that
BEFORE-most IS foremost estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-HEARING ISRAEL be-you-hearing !
Master Lord
29 And Jesus answered him, The first of all the commandments [is], Hear, O Israel; The Lord our God is one Lord:
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
OF-US
Master Lord kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
ONE
IS
NA
12:30 kai agaphseis

kai
Conj
agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ex ek
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master Lord kai ex kai ek

Conj Prep
THE
God
OF-YOU
OUT OF-WHOLE
THE
kardias sou kardia su

olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai ex kai ek
Conj Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
30 And thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy mind, and with all thy strength: this [is] the first commandment.
HEART
OF-YOU
AND
OUT OF-WHOLE THE
soul
OF-YOU
AND
OUT OF-WHOLE THE
dianoias dianoia
n_ Gen Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai ex kai ek
Conj Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
iscuos ischus
n_ Gen Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
THRU-MIND OF-YOU comprehension
AND
OUT OF-WHOLE THE
STRENGTH OF-YOU
12:31 deutera auth

deuteros
a_ Nom Sg f
autos
pp Nom Sg f
agaphseis agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg

Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
second
to-her to-herit
NIGH-one associate estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-YOU
AS
YOURself
31 And the second [is] like, [namely] this, Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself. There is none other commandment greater than these.
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg f Cmp
toutwn allh houtos allos

pd Gen Pl f a_ Nom Sg f
entolh ouk entolE ou

n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg
GREATER
NA
OF-these
other another
direction precept o ho
NOT
IS
12:32
kai kai
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
grammateus kalws didaskale ep grammateus kalOs didaskalos epi

n_ Nom Sg m Adv n_ Voc Sg m Prep
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
to-Him
THE
WRITer scribe kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
IDEALly
TEACHer !
ON
32 And the scribe said unto him, Well, Master, thou hast said the truth: for there is one God; and there is none other but he:
alhqeias eipes alEtheia legO

oti eis hoti heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
plhn plEn
Adv
TRUTH
YOU-said
that
ONE
He-IS
AND
NOT not
IS there-is
other
MOREly more-than
AV
Mark 12
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him him
12:33 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agapan agapaO
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ex ek
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
NA
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kardias kai ex kardia kai ek

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Prep
AND
THE
TO-BE-LOVING Him
OUT OF-WHOLE
THE
HEART
AND
OUT
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sunesews kai ex sunesis kai ek

olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
iscuos ischus
n_ Gen Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
agapan agapaO
vn Pres Act
33 And to love him with all the heart, and with all the understanding, and with all the soul, and with all the strength, and to love [his] neighbour as himself, is more than all whole burnt offerings and sacrifices.
OF-WHOLE THE
understanding
AND
OUT OF-WHOLE THE
STRENGTH AND
THE
TO-BE-LOVING
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
plhsion ws eauton plEsion hOs heautou

Adv Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
perissoteron estin perissos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pantwn twn pas ho

THE
NIGH-one associate
AS
self himself
more-excessive excessively-more
IS
OF-ALL
THE
olokautwmatwn kai qusiwn holokautOma kai thusia

n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl f
WHOLE-BURNS ascent-offerings
AND
SACRIFICES
WH NA
12:34 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
auton
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oti nounecws hoti nounechOs

Conj Adv
AND
THE
JESUS
PERCEIVING
WH
him
NA
that
MIND-HAVINGly apprehendingly ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
makran makran
Adv
ei
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
apo apo
Prep
34 And when Jesus saw that he answered discreetly, he said unto him, Thou art not far from the kingdom of God. And no man after that durst ask him [any question].
he-answerED
said
to-him
NOT
FAR
YOU-ARE
FROM THE

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ouketi ouketi
Adv
etolma tolmaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eperwthsai eperOtaO
vn Aor Act
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
NOT-YET-ONE NOT-STILL DARED no-one any-longer ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
Him
TO-inquire-of

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
didaskwn didaskO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
TEACHING
IN
THE
35 . And Jesus answered and said, while he taught in the temple, How say the scribes that Christ is the Son of David?
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
pws legousin oi pOs legO ho

Adv Int vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis oti o grammateus hoti ho

cristos uios christos huios

dauid dauid
ni proper
SACRED-place how sanctuary how ? estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ARE-sayING
THE
WRITers scribes
that
THE
ANOINTED Christ
SON
of-DAVID of-David
IS
12:36 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
dauid eipen dauid legO

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg m
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he
DAVID
said
IN
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
said
36 For David himself said by the Holy Ghost, The LORD said to my Lord, Sit thou on my right hand, till I make thine enemies thy footstool.
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kaqou kathEmai
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
Master Lord qw tithEmi
to-THE
Master Lord tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
OF-ME
BE-sittING be-you-sitting ! upokatw hupokatO

Adv
OUT OF-RIGHT(p) OF-ME
TILL
EVER

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
I-MAY-BE-PLACING THE
enemies
OF-YOU
UNDER-DOWN OF-THE underneath the kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
FEET
OF-YOU
12:37 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
dauid legei dauid legO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai poqen kai pothen

Conj Adv Int
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
he
DAVID
IS-sayING is-terming
Him
Master Lord
AND
?-WHICH-PLACE OF-him whence ?
He-IS
37 David therefore himself calleth him Lord; and whence is he [then] his son? And the common people heard him gladly.
AV
Mark 12
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
hkouen akouO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hdews hEdeOs
Adv
SON
AND
THE
MANY vast
THRONG
HEARD
OF-Him him apo apo

Prep
GRATIFYly with-relish grammatewn grammateus

n_ Gen Pl m
38 And he said unto them in his doctrine, Beware of the scribes, which love to go in long clothing, and [love] salutations in the marketplaces,
12:38 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
IN
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
He-said
BE-lookING FROM THE be-ye-bewaring ! kai aspasmous en kai aspasmos en

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Prep
WRITers scribes tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
qelontwn thelO
en en
Prep
stolais peripatein stolE peripateO

n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Act
THE
ones-WILLING ones-willing
IN
robes
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING AND to-be-walking
greetings salutations
IN
THE
agorais agora
n_ Dat Pl f
BUY-places markets
12:39 kai prwtokaqedrias

kai
Conj
prOtokathedria
n_ Acc Pl f
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
kai prwtoklisias kai prOtoklisia

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
39 And the chief seats in the synagogues, and the uppermost rooms at feasts:
AND
BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLES IN front-seats
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS AND synagogues
BEFORE-most-CLINES IN first-reclining-places
THE
deipnois deipnon
n_ Dat Pl n
DINners
12:40 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
katesqiontes tas katesthiO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
oikias twn oikia ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
chrwn chEra
n_ Gen Pl f
kai profasei kai prophasis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
makra makros
a_ Acc Pl n
THE
ones-DOWN-EATING ones-devouring outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
THE
HOMES houses
OF-THE
WIDOWS
AND
to-BEFORE-APPEARance FAR to-pretense prolix(p)
40 Which devour widows'houses, and for a pretence make long prayers: these shall receive greater damnation.
lhmyontai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
perissoteron krima perissos krima

a_ Acc Sg n Cmp n_ Acc Sg n
prayING ones-praying
these
SHALL-BE-GETTING more-excessive
JUDGment
12:41 kai kaqisas

kai
Conj
kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
katenanti katenanti
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
gazofulakiou gazophulakion
n_ Gen Sg n
eqewrei theOreO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
pws o pOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
AND
being-seated
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE facing the calkon chalkos

n_ Acc Sg m
EXCHEQUER-GUARD He-beheld treasury kai polloi kai polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
how
THE
41 . And Jesus sat over against the treasury, and beheld how the people cast money into the treasury: and many that were rich cast in much.
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
ballei ballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gazofulakion gazophulakion
n_ Acc Sg n
plousioi plousios
a_ Nom Pl m
THRONG
IS-CASTING
COPPER
INTO THE
EXCHEQUER-GUARD AND treasury
MANY
RICH rich-ones
eballon ballO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
CAST
much
12:42 kai elqousa

kai
Conj
erchomai
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
chra chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
ptwch ptOchos
a_ Nom Sg f
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
lepta lepton
n_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
AND
COMING
ONE
WIDOW
POOR
CASTS
leptons mites
TWO
WHICH
42 And there came a certain poor widow, and she threw in two mites, which make a farthing.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kodranths kodrantEs
n_ Nom Sg m
IS
QUADRANS
12:43 kai proskalesamenos tous

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
ho
t_ Acc Pl m

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois amhn autos amEn

pp Dat Pl m Hebrew
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
LEARNers disciples chra chEra

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-Him
He-said
to-them
AMEN verily pantwn pas

a_ Gen Pl m
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ptwch ptOchos
a_ Nom Sg f
pleion polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
43 And he called [unto him] his disciples, and saith unto them, Verily I say unto you, That this poor widow hath cast more in, than all they which have cast into the treasury:
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
THE
WIDOW
this
THE
POOR
MORE
OF-ALL
AV
Mark 12 - Mark 13
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ballontwn ballO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
CASTS
OF-THE
ones-CASTING ones-casting tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
INTO THE
EXCHEQUER-GUARD treasury auth autos

pp Nom Sg f
12:44 pantes gar ek

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
ek
Prep
perisseuontos autois ebalon perisseuO autos ballO

vp Pres Act Gen Sg n pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
ALL
for
OUT OF-THE
exceedING superfluity panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
to-them
CAST(past)
this-one she olon holos

a_ Acc Sg m
YET OUT
44 For all [they] did cast in of their abundance; but she of her want did cast in all that she had, [even] all her living.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
usterhsews auths husterEsis autos

osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
WANTing want auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
OF-her
ALL
as-much-as she-HAD
CASTS
WHOLE
THE
bion bios
n_ Acc Sg m
livelihood
OF-her
AV
Mark 13
13:1 kai ekporeuomenou

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
OF-OUT-GOING of-going-out maqhtwn autou mathEtEs autos

OF-Him
OUT OF-THE
SACRED-place IS-sayING sanctuary potapoi potapos

a_ Nom Pl m
to-Him
ONE
. And as he went out of the temple, one of his disciples saith unto him, Master, see what manner of stones and what buildings [are here]!
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
didaskale ide didaskalos eidO

n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
liqoi lithos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai potapai kai potapos

Conj a_ Nom Pl f
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
TEACHer !
BE-PERCEIVING ?-where-FROM STONES lo ! what-manner-of
AND
?-where-FROM what-manner-of
oikodomai oikodomE
n_ Nom Pl f
HOME-BUILDings buildings
13:2 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
tautas tas houtos ho

pd Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f
megalas mega
a_ Acc Pl f
AND
THE
JESUS
said
to-him
YOU-ARE-lookING these you-are-observing wde liqos hOde lithos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
THE
GREAT
And Jesus answering said unto him, Seest thou these great buildings? there shall not be left one stone upon another, that shall not be thrown down.
oikodomas oikodomE
n_ Acc Pl f
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
afeqh aphiEmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
HOME-BUILDings NOT buildings mh mE

Part Neg
NO
MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LET here may-be-being-left
STONE
ON
STONE
WHICH
NOT
kataluqh kataluO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
NO
MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED may-be-being-demolished autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
13:3 kai kaqhmenou

kai
Conj
kathEmai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
elaiwn katenanti elaia katenanti

n_ Gen Pl f Adv
AND
OF-sittING
OF-Him
INTO THE
mountain Mount idian idios

a_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
OLIVES
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD facing
And as he sat upon the mount of Olives over against the temple, Peter and James and John and Andrew asked him privately,
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kat kata
Prep
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai iakwbos kai kai iakObos kai

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj
OF-THE the
SACRED-place inquirED-of sanctuary
Him
according-to OWN
Peter
AND
JACOBUS James
AND
iwannhs kai andreas iOannEs kai andreas

JOHN
AND
ANDREW
13:4 eipon
legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pote tauta pote houtos

Part Int pd Nom Pl n
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion otan sEmeion hotan

n_ Nom Sg n Conj
say tell-you ! mellh mellO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
to-US us tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
?-when when ?
these SHALL-BE these-things panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
AND
ANY what ?
THE
SIGN
when-EVER whenever
Tell us, when shall these things be? and what [shall be] the sign when all these things shall be fulfilled?
sunteleisqai sunteleO
vn Pres Pas
MAY-BE-ABOUT these TO-BE-beING-concludED ALL may-be-being-about these-things
13:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legein legO
vn Pres Act

mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
. And Jesus answering them began to say, Take heed lest any [man] deceive you:
THE
YET JESUS
begins
TO-BE-sayING to-them
BE-lookING NO be-ye-bewaring !
ANY any-man
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
planhsh planaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye
SHOULD-BE-STRAYING should-be-deceiving eleusontai erchomai

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
13:6 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n

legontes legO
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
For many shall come in my name, saying, I am [Christ]; and shall deceive many.
MANY
SHALL-BE-COMING ON
THE
NAME
OF-ME
sayING
that
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai pollous planhsousin kai polus planaO

Conj a_ Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
AM
AND
MANY
THEY-SHALL-BE-STRAYING shall-be-deceiving
AV
Mark 13
13:7 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
akoushte akouO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
polemous kai akoas polemos kai akoE

polemwn mh polemos mE
when-EVER YET YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING BATTLES whenever qroeisqe throeO

vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
AND
HEARings OF-BATTLES tidings to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
NO
And when ye shall hear of wars and rumours of wars, be ye not troubled: for [such things] must needs be; but the end [shall] not [be] yet.
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
all oupw alla oupO

Conj Adv
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
BE-beING-ALARMED it-IS-BINDING be-ye-being-alarmed ! it-must
TO-BE-BECOMING but to-be-occurring ep epi

Prep
NOT-as-yet THE
FINISH consummation
8
13:8 egerqhsetai
egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
gar eqnos gar ethnos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai basileia epi basileian esontai kai basileia epi basileia eimi
Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
NATION
ON
NATION
AND
KINGdom
ON
KINGdom
SHALL-BE there-shall-be
seismoi seismos
n_ Nom Pl m
kata kata
Prep
topous esontai topos eimi

n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
limoi limos
n_ Nom Pl m
arch archE
n_ Nom Sg f
wdinwn tauta Odin houtos

n_ Gen Pl f pd Nom Pl n
For nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom: and there shall be earthquakes in divers places, and there shall be famines and troubles: these [are] the beginnings of sorrows.
QUAKings according-to PLACES earthquakes
SHALL-BE FAMINES there-shall-be
ORIGINal beginning
OF-travails of-pangs
these these-are umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
13:9 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
eautous paradwsousin heautou paradidOmi

pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
sunedria kai sunedrion kai

n_ Acc Pl n Conj
BE-YE-lookING YET YOU(p) be-ye-looking ! ye eis eis

Prep
selves themselves
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING YOU(p) they-shall-be-giving-up ye
INTO Sanhedrins
AND
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
darhsesqe derO
vi 2Fut Pas 2 Pl
kai epi hgemonwn kai basilewn kai epi hEgemOn kai basileus
Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m
But take heed to yourselves: for they shall deliver you up to councils; and in the synagogues ye shall be beaten: and ye shall be brought before rulers and kings for my sake, for a testimony against them.
INTO TOGETHER-LEADS YE-SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED AND synagogues ye-shall-be-being-lashed staqhsesqe histEmi

vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
ON
LEADers governors
AND
KINGS
eneken heneken
Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep

YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD on-account-of OF-ME ye-shall-be-standing me
INTO witness testimony prwton prOton

Adv
to-them
13:10 kai eis

kai
Conj
eis
Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
khrucqhnai kErussO
vn Aor Pas
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
10 And the gospel must first be published among all nations.
AND
INTO ALL
THE
NATIONS
BEFORE-most IS-BINDING first must
TO-BE-PROCLAIMED THE to-be-heralded
n_ Nom Sg n
WELL-MESSAGE
13:11 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
agwsin agO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
paradidontes mh paradidOmi mE
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg
promerimnate promerimnaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
when-EVER THEY-MAY-BE-LEADING YOU(p) whenever ye all o alla hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
BESIDE-GIVING giving-over-ye doqh didOmi

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
NO
BE-YE-beING-BEFORE-anxious be-ye-worrying-beforehand ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
lalhshte laleO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
ean ean
Cond
en en
Prep
11 But when they shall lead [you], and deliver you up, take no thought beforehand what ye shall speak, neither do ye premeditate: but whatsoever shall be given you in that hour, that speak ye: for it is not ye that speak, but the Holy Ghost.
ANY what ? wra hOra

n_ Dat Sg f
YE-SHOULD-BE-TALKING but ye-should-be-speaking touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
WHICH
IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) to-ye umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
IN
that
THE
laleite laleO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
gar este gar eimi

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
lalountes laleO
alla alla
Conj
HOUR
this
YE-BE-TALKING NOT be-ye-speaking ! to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
for
ARE
YOU(p) ye
THE
ones-TALKING ones-speaking
but
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
13:12 kai paradwsei

kai
Conj
paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
adelfos adelfon eis adelphos adelphos eis

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Prep
qanaton kai pathr thanatos kai patEr

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
teknon teknon
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING brother shall-be-giving-up tekna teknon

n_ Nom Pl n
brother
INTO DEATH
AND
FATHER
offspring child autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
kai epanasthsontai kai epanistEmi

epi goneis epi goneus

Prep n_ Acc Pl m

12 Now the brother shall betray the brother to death, and the father the son; and children shall rise up against [their] parents, and shall cause them to be put to death.
AND
SHALL-BE-ON-UP-STANDING offsprings shall-be-rising-up children
ON
parents
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-(causing-to)-DIE them shall-be-putting-to-death
AV
Mark 13
13:13 kai esesqe

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
misoumenoi miseO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
AND
by
ALL
THRU THE because-of outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
NAME
OF-ME
13 And ye shall be hated of all [men] for my name's sake: but he that shall endure unto the end, the same shall be saved.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
upomeinas hupomenO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE
YET one-UNDER-REMAINing INTO FINISH this-one one-enduring consummation this-one de de

Conj
13:14 otan
hotan
Conj
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
bdelugma bdelugma
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
erhmwsews esthkota erEmOsis histEmi

n_ Gen Sg f vp Perf Act Acc Sg m
when-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE whenever opou hopou

Adv
ABOMINATION OF-THE
DESOLATing desolation
HAVING-STOOD standing en en
Prep
ou ou
Part Neg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anaginwskwn noeitw anaginOskO noeO

vp Pres Act Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
tote oi tote ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
14 . But when ye shall see the abomination of desolation, spoken of by Daniel the prophet, standing where it ought not, (let him that readeth understand,) then let them that be in Judaea flee to the mountains:
THE-?-where NOT wheree th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
it-IS-BINDING it-must
THE
one-readING one-reading ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
LET-BE-MINDING then let-him-be-apprehending !
THE-ones the-ones
IN

orh oros
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
JUDEA
LET-BE-FLEEING INTO THE let-them-be-fleeing !

NA
mountains
13:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
dwmatos mh dOma mE
katabatw katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mhde mEde
Conj
THE-one the-one eiselqatw eiserchomai

vm Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
YET
WH
ON
NA
THE
NA
housetop
NO
LET-BE-DOWN-STEPPING NO-YET let-him-be-descending ! neither oikias oikia

n_ Gen Sg f
15 And let him that is on the housetop not go down into the house, neither enter [therein], to take any thing out of his house:
ti arai
arai airO
vn Aor Act
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
LET-INTO-COME let-him-enter !
TO-LIFT ANY to-pick-up anything eis eis

Prep
OUT OF-THE
HOME house
OF-him
13:16 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
epistreyatw eis epistrephO eis

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
opisw arai opisO airO

Adv vn Aor Act
16 And let him that is in the field not turn back again for to take up his garment.
AND
THE-one the-one
INTO THE
FIELD
NO
LET-ON-TURN let-him-turn-back !
INTO THE BEHIND the-things
TO-LIFT to-pick-up
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

THE
cloak
OF-him
13:17 ouai de
ouai
Inj
de
Conj
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep

kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
ekeinais ekeinos
pd Dat Pl f
17 But woe to them that are with child, and to them that give suck in those days!
WOE woe ! tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
YET to-THE-ones IN to-the-ones
BELLY
HAVING
AND
to-THE
ones-sucklING ones-suckling
IN
those
hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
THE
DAYS
13:18 proseucesqe
proseuchomai
de de
Conj
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ceimwnos cheimOn
n_ Gen Sg m
18 And pray ye that your flight be not in the winter.
YET THAT NO
it-MAY-BE-BECOMING OF-WINTER it-may-be-occurring ekeinai qliyis ekeinos thlipsis

pd Nom Pl f n_ Nom Sg f
13:19 esontai gar ai

eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
oia hoios
pr Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE
for
THE
DAYS
those
CONSTRICTION THE-WHICH NOT affliction such-as ektisen ktizO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
HAS-BECOME has-occurred ews tou heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
19 For [in] those days shall be affliction, such as was not from the beginning of the creation which God created unto this time, neither shall be.
toiauth ap toioutos apo

pd Nom Sg f Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
ktisews ktisis
n_ Gen Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
nun nun
Adv
such
FROM ORIGINal beginning mh mE

Part Neg
OF-CREATION WHICH
CREATES
THE
God
TILL
OF-THE the
NOW
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
AND
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring
AV
Mark 13
13:20 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ekolobwsen kurios koloboO kurios

tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras ouk hEmera ou

an an
Part
eswqh sOzO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
AND
IF
NO
LOPPS discounts tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
Master Lord
THE
DAYS
NOT not
EVER WAS-SAVED
EVERY at-all
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
eklektous ous eklektos hos

exelexato ekolobwsen tas eklegO koloboO ho

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f
20 And except that the Lord had shortened those days, no flesh should be saved: but for the elect's sake, whom he hath chosen, he hath shortened the days.
FLESH
but
THRU THE because-of
chosen chosen-ones
WHOM
He-choosES
He-LOPPS he-discounts
THE
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
DAYS
13:21 kai tote ean

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
wde o hOde ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
then
IF-EVER ANY anyone ekei mh ekei mE

Adv Part Neg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
MAY-BE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING here lo !
THE
ANOINTED Christ
21 And then if any man shall say to you, Lo, here [is] Christ; or, lo, [he is] there; believe [him] not:
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
pisteuete pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-PERCEIVING there lo !
NO
BE-BELIEVING be-ye-believing ! gar yeudocristoi gar pseudochristos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
13:22 egerqhsontai
egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
kai yeudoprofhtai kai pseudoprophEtEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
FALSE-ANOINTED-ones AND false-christs to ho
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers AND false-prophets apoplanan apoplanaO

vn Pres Act
22 For false Christs and false prophets shall rise, and shall shew signs and wonders, to seduce, if [it were] possible, even the elect.
dwsousin didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
shmeia kai terata pros sEmeion kai teras pros

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n Prep
ei ei
Cond
dunaton dunatos
a_ Nom Sg n
t_ Acc Sg n
THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES TOWARD THE
TO-BE-FROM-STRAYING IF to-be-leading-astray
ABLE possible
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous eklektos
a_ Acc Pl m
THE
chosen-ones chosen-ones de de
Conj
13:23 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
proeirhka proereO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
23 But take ye heed: behold, I have foretold you all things.
YOU(p) ye
YET BE-lookING I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED to-YOU(p) be-ye-bewaring ! I-have-declared-it-beforehand to-ye ekeinais tais ekeinos ho
ALL
13:24 alla en
alla
Conj
en
Prep
hmerais meta thn hEmera meta ho

n_ Dat Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg f
qliyin thlipsis
n_ Acc Sg f
ekeinhn o ekeinos ho
pd Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
but
IN
those
THE
DAYS
after
THE
CONSTRICTION that affliction ou ou

Part Neg
THE
24 . But in those days, after that tribulation, the sun shall be darkened, and the moon shall not give her light,
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
skotisqhsetai skotizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
selhnh selEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
feggos pheggos
n_ Acc Sg n
SUN
SHALL-BE-BEING-DARKenED AND
THE
MOON
NOT
SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
BEAM
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
OF-her
13:25 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
asteres esontai ek astEr eimi ek

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou piptontes ouranos piptO

kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
25 And the stars of heaven shall fall, and the powers that are in heaven shall be shaken.
AND
THE
GLEAMers stars en en
Prep
SHALL-BE
OUT OF-THE
heaven
FALLING
AND
THE
dunameis ai dunamis ho
n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois saleuqhsontai ouranos saleuO

n_ Dat Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
ABILITIES powers
THE
IN
THE
heavens
13:26 kai tote oyontai

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
then
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE they-shall-be-seeing
SON
OF-THE
human
26 And then shall they see the Son of man coming in the clouds with great power and glory.
AV
Mark 13
ercomenon erchomai
en en
Prep
nefelais meta dunamews pollhs kai doxhs nephelE meta dunamis polus kai doxa
n_ Dat Pl f Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
COMING
IN
CLOUDS
WITH
ABILITY power tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
much
AND
esteem glory
27 And then shall he send his angels, and shall gather together his elect from the four winds, from the uttermost part of the earth to the uttermost part of heaven.
13:27 kai tote apostelei

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
apostellO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
kai episunaxei kai episunagO

AND
then
He-SHALL-BE-commissionING THE he-shall-be-dispatching autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
MESSENGERS AND
He-SHALL-BE-ON-TOGETHER-LEADING he-shall-be-assembling akrou akron

n_ Gen Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous eklektos
a_ Acc Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
tessarwn anemwn ap tessares anemos apo

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Prep
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
OF-Him
OUT OF-THE
FOUR
WINDS
FROM EXTREMITY OF-LAND of-earth
ews akrou heOs akron

Conj n_ Gen Sg n
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
EXTREMITY OF-heaven
13:28 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sukhs sukE
n_ Gen Sg f
maqete manthanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn otan parabolE hotan

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
hdh EdE
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM YET THE
FIG-tree
BE-LEARNING THE be-ye-learning !
BESIDE-CAST parable
when-EVER ALREADY THE whenever ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
28 . Now learn a parable of the fig tree; When her branch is yet tender, and putteth forth leaves, ye know that summer is near:
klados klados
n_ Nom Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
apalos hapalos
a_ Nom Sg m
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai ekfuh kai ekphuO

fulla phullon
n_ Acc Pl n
bough
OF-her
TENDER
MAY-BE-BECOMING AND
MAY-BE-OUT-SPROUTING THE may-be-sprouting-out
leaves
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eggus to hoti eggus ho

qeros theros
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
NEAR
THE
WARM summer idhte eidO
IS

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
otan hotan
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ginomena ginomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl n
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING these BECOMING whenever these-things occurring(p) epi qurais epi thura
Prep n_ Dat Pl f
29 So ye in like manner, when ye shall see these things come to pass, know that it is nigh, [even] at the doors.
ginwskete ginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl

BE-YE-KNOWING that be-ye-knowing !
NEAR
He-IS
ON
DOORS
13:30 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f

pd Nom Sg f
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
30 Verily I say unto you, that this generation shall not pass, till all these things be done.
that
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE may-be-passing-by
generation
mecris ou mechri hos

Adv pr Gen Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
this
UNTO
OF-WHICH these ALL which these-things ouranos kai h ouranos kai ho

MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring pareleusontai parerchomai

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
13:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
31 Heaven and earth shall pass away: but my words shall not pass away.
THE
heaven
NA
AND
THE
LAND earth
YET sayings words
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
pareleusontai parerchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
OF-ME
NOT
NO
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-COMING shall-be-passing-by hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
13:32 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs h ekeinos E
pd Gen Sg f Part
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ABOUT YET THE concerning oude oude

Adv
DAY
that
OR
THE
HOUR
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-PERCEIVED no-one is-aware ei ei

Cond
32 But of that day and [that] hour knoweth no man, no, not the angels which are in heaven, neither the Son, but the Father.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
ouranw oude ouranos oude

n_ Dat Sg m Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET THE neither
MESSENGERS IN
heaven
NOT-YET THE nor
SON
IF
NO
THE
AV
Mark 13 - Mark 14
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
FATHER
13:33 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
agrupneite agrupneO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
gar pote o gar pote ho

Conj Part Int t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
33 Take ye heed, watch and pray: for ye know not when the time is.
BE-lookING BE-YE-beING-vigilant NOT be-ye-bewaring ! be-ye-being-vigilant !

WH
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for ye-are-aware
?-when when ?
THE
SEASON era
estin
NA
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
13:34 ws anqrwpos apodhmos afeis

hOs
Adv
anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
apodEmos
a_ Nom Sg m
aphiEmi
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai dous kai didOmi

AS
human
traveler
FROM-LETTING leaving thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
HOME
OF-him
AND
GIVING
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
doulois autou doulos autos

exousian ekastw to exousia hekastos ho

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
34 [For the Son of man is] as a man taking a far journey, who left his house, and gave authority to his servants, and to every man his work, and commanded the porter to watch.
to-THE the tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
SLAVES
OF-him
THE
authority
to-EACH
THE
work
OF-him
AND
qurwrw thurOros
n_ Dat Sg m
eneteilato ina entellomai hina

vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj
grhgorh grEgoreO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
to-THE the
DOOR-SEE-er he-directs doorkeeper ouk ou

Part Neg
THAT he-MAY-BE-watchING

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
gar pote o gar pote ho

Conj Part Int t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
BE-watchING be-ye-watching ! oikias oikia

n_ Gen Sg f
THEN NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for ye-are-aware oye opse

Adv
?-when when ?
THE
master lord
OF-THE
ercetai erchomai
h E
Part
h E
Part
mesonuktion h mesonuktion E
n_ Acc Sg n Part
alektorofwnias h alektorophOnia E
n_ Gen Sg f Part
prwi prOi
Adv
35 Watch ye therefore: for ye know not when the master of the house cometh, at even, or at midnight, or at the cockcrowing, or in the morning:
HOME house
IS-COMING
OR
evening OR
MID-NIGHT midnight
OR
OF-UN-LAY-SOUNDING of-cockcrowing kaqeudontas katheudO

OR
morning in-the-morning
36 Lest coming suddenly he find you sleeping.
13:36 mh
mE
Part Neg
elqwn erchomai
exaifnhs eurh exaiphnEs heuriskO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
NO
COMING
suddenly
he-MAY-BE-FINDING YOU(p) ye pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing
37 And what I say unto you I say unto all, Watch.
13:37 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
grhgoreite grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
WHICH
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
I-AM-sayING
to-ALL
I-AM-sayING
AV
Mark 14
14:1 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
azuma azumos
a_ Nom Pl n
meta duo meta duo

Prep ni numeral
hmeras kai hEmera kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
it-WAS
YET THE
PASSOVER AND
THE
UN-FERMENTEDS after unleavened-breads
TWO
DAYS
AND
ezhtoun zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis pws auton grammateus pOs autos

n_ Nom Pl m Adv Int pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
dolw dolos
n_ Dat Sg m
. After two days was [the feast of] the passover, and of unleavened bread: and the chief priests and the scribes sought how they might take him by craft, and put [him] to death.
SOUGHT
THE
THE
WRITers scribes
how how ?
Him
IN
FRAUD guile
krathsantes apokteinwsin krateO apokteinO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Pl
HOLDing laying-hold
THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING they-may-be-killing gar mh gar mE

Conj Part Neg
14:2 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
mhpote mEpote
Adv
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
qorubos tou thorubos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
But they said, Not on the feast [day], lest there be an uproar of the people.
THEY-said
for
NO
IN
THE
FESTIVAL NO-?-when SHALL-BE TUMULT lest-at-some-time there-shall-be
OF-THE
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
PEOPLE
14:3 kai ontos

kai
Conj
eimi
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
bhqania en bEthania en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
simwnos tou simOn ho

AND
OF-BEING
OF-Him
IN
BETHANY
IN
THE
HOME house ecousa echO
OF-SIMON
THE
leprou lepros
a_ Gen Sg m
katakeimenou katakeimai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
alabastron alabastron
n_ Acc Sg n
And being in Bethany in the house of Simon the leper, as he sat at meat, there came a woman having an alabaster box of ointment of spikenard very precious; and she brake the box, and poured [it] on his head.
leper
OF-DOWN-LYING of-lying-down
OF-Him
CAME
WOMAN
HAVING
ALABASTER alabaster-vase alabastron kateceen alabastron katacheO

murou muron
n_ Gen Sg n
nardou pistikhs polutelous suntriyasa thn nardos pistikos polutelEs suntribO ho

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
OF-ATTAR
NARD
BELIEVic veritable kefalhs kephalE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-MUCH-FINISH costly
crushing
THE
ALABASTER alabaster-vase
she-DOWN-POURS she-pours-down-it
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-Him
OF-THE the
HEAD
14:4 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
aganaktountes pros aganakteO pros

eautous eis heautou eis

pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
WERE
YET ANY some tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
resentING
TOWARD selves themselves gegonen ginomai

vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
INTO ANY what ?
THE
And there were some that had indignation within themselves, and said, Why was this waste of the ointment made?
apwleia auth apOleia houtos

murou muron
n_ Gen Sg n
destruction
this
OF-THE
ATTAR
HAS-BECOME has-occurred to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
14:5 hdunato
dunamai
gar touto gar houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg n
muron muron
n_ Nom Sg n
praqhnai pipraskO
vn Aor Pas
epanw dhnariwn epanO dEnarion

Adv n_ Gen Pl n
was-ABLE could
for
this
THE
ATTAR
TO-BE-disposED-of ON-UP over auth autos
OF-DENARII denarii
For it might have been sold for more than three hundred pence, and have been given to the poor. And they murmured against her.
triakosiwn kai doqhnai triakosioi kai didOmi

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ptwcois kai enebrimwnto ptOchos kai embrimaomai

a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
pp Dat Sg f
THREE-hundred
AND
TO-BE-GIVEN to-THE
POOR poor-ones afete aphiEmi
AND
THEY-IN-THUNDERED to-her they-muttered ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
14:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
kopous kopos
n_ Acc Pl m
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
THE
YET JESUS
said
FROM-LET leave-ye ! hrgasato ergazomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
her
ANY why ?
to-her her
toils weariness(p)
And Jesus said, Let her alone; why trouble ye her? she hath wrought a good work on me.
parecete parechO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
YE-ARE-tenderING IDEAL ye-are-affording
work
she-works
IN
ME
AV
Mark 14
14:7 pantote gar tous

pantote
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ptwcous ecete ptOchos echO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
meq meta
Prep
eautwn kai otan heautou kai hotan

pf 3 Gen Pl m Conj Conj
always
for
THE
POOR poor-ones autois autos

pp Dat Pl m

WH
AND
when-EVER whenever de de
Conj
For ye have the poor with you always, and whensoever ye will ye may do them good: but me ye have not always.
qelhte thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
dunasqe dunamai
pantote
eu eu
Adv
poihsai eme poieO egO

ou ou
Part Neg
YE-MAY-BE-WILLING YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can pantote ecete pantote echO

to-them
WELL TO-DO
ME
YET NOT
always
YE-ARE-HAVING
14:8 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
escen echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epoihsen proelaben poieO prolambanO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
murisai murizO
vn Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
WHICH
she-has-HAD
she-DOES
she-BEFORE-GETS TO-ATTARize THE she-gets-beforehand to-anoint-with-attar
BODY
OF-ME
She hath done what she could: she is come aforehand to anoint my body to the burying.
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
entafiasmon entaphiasmos
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
IN-sepulchering burial legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
14:9 amhn de
amEn
Hebrew
de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
opou hopou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
khrucqh kErussO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AMEN verily
YET I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye ton ho
THE-?-where IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED THE wherever may-be-being-heralded kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
n_ Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
epoihsen auth poieO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg f
Verily I say unto you, Wheresoever this gospel shall be preached throughout the whole world, [this] also that she hath done shall be spoken of for a memorial of her.
t_ Acc Sg m
WELL-MESSAGE INTO WHOLE
THE
SYSTEM world
AND also
WHICH
she-DOES does
this she
lalhqhsetai laleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
mnhmosunon auths mnEmosunon autos

SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED INTO REMINDer shall-be-being-spoken-of memorial
OF-her
14:10 kai ioudas

kai
Conj
ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
iskariwq o iskariOthEs ho
ni proper t_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka aphlqen dOdeka aperchomai

ni numeral vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
AND
JUDAS
ISCARIOT
THE
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
FROM-CAME came-away
TOWARD
10 And Judas Iscariot, one of the twelve, went unto the chief priests, to betray him unto them.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
ina hina
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
paradoi paradidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
chief-SACRED-ones THAT Him chief-priests de de

Conj
he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING to-them he-may-be-giving-up kai ephggeilanto autw kai epaggellomai autos

Conj vi Aor midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
14:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akousantes ecarhsan akouO chairO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl
argurion argurion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET HEARing
THEY-WERE-JOYed AND they-rejoiced eukairws eukairOs

Adv
THEY-promise promise paradoi paradidOmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to-him him
SILVER
11 And when they heard [it], they were glad, and promised to give him money. And he sought how he might conveniently betray him.
dounai kai ezhtei didOmi kai zEteO

vn 2Aor Act Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
pws auton pOs autos

Adv Int pp Acc Sg m
TO-GIVE
AND
he-SOUGHT
how how ?
Him
WELL-SEASONly he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING opportunely he-may-be-giving-up twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
14:12 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
prwth prOtos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
azumwn azumos
a_ Gen Pl n
ote to hote ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
AND
to-THE
BEFORE-most DAY first legousin autw legO autos

OF-THE
UN-FERMENTEDS when unleavened-bread(p) maqhtai autou mathEtEs autos

THE
PASSOVER
equon thuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pou pou
Part Int
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
12 . And the first day of unleavened bread, when they killed the passover, his disciples said unto him, Where wilt thou that we go and prepare that thou mayest eat the passover?
THEY-SACRIFICED ARE-sayING
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples ina hina

Conj
OF-Him
?-where YOU-ARE-WILLING where ? to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
etoimaswmen hetoimazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
faghs esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pasca pascha
Aramaic
WE-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY THAT YOU-MAY-BE-EATING THE
PASSOVER
AV
Mark 14
14:13 kai apostellei

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

kai legei kai legO

autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
He-IS-commissionING TWO he-is-dispatching eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
to-them
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai apanthsei kai apantaO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
13 And he sendeth forth two of his disciples, and saith unto them, Go ye into the city, and there shall meet you a man bearing a pitcher of water: follow him.
BE-YE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-ye-going-away ! keramion udatos bastazwn keramion hudOr bastazO
city
AND
SHALL-BE-FROM-meetING to-YOU(p) shall-be-meeting ye
human
akolouqhsate autw akoloutheO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m
HOLDer (dim) jar
OF-water
BEARING
follow follow-ye ! eiselqh eiserchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to-him him eipate legO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
14:14 kai opou

kai
Conj
hopou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikodespoth oti oikodespotEs hoti

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
AND
THE-?-where IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING say wherever he-may-be-entering say-ye ! didaskalos legei didaskalos legO
to-THE
HOME-OWNER householder mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
that
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kataluma kataluma
n_ Nom Sg n
opou hopou
Adv
14 And wheresoever he shall go in, say ye to the goodman of the house, The Master saith, Where is the guestchamber, where I shall eat the passover with my disciples?
THE
TEACHer
IS-sayING
?-where IS where ? maqhtwn mou mathEtEs egO

THE
DOWN-LOOSE OF-ME caravansary
THE-?-where wheree
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
fagw esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
PASSOVER WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples deixei deiknumi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OF-ME
I-MAY-BE-EATING
14:15 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anagaion mega anagaion mega

estrwmenon strOnnumi
AND
he
to-YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-SHOWING UP-LAND upper-room
GREAT large
HAVING-been-STREWN with-places-having-been-spread
15 And he will shew you a large upper room furnished [and] prepared: there make ready for us.
etoimon kai ekei etoimasate hmin hetoimos kai ekei hetoimazO hemeis
a_ Acc Sg n Conj Adv vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl
READY
AND
there
make-YE-READY make-ready-ye ! oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
to-US
14:16 kai exhlqon

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
maqhtai kai hlqon mathEtEs kai erchomai

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f

AND
OUT-CAME came-out eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
LEARNers disciples
AND
CAME
INTO THE
city
AND
THEY-FOUND
16 And his disciples went forth, and came into the city, and found as he had said unto them: and they made ready the passover.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
autois kai htoimasan autos kai hetoimazO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
to-them
AND
THEY-make-READY THE
PASSOVER
14:17 kai oyias

kai
Conj
opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
ercetai erchomai
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
17 And in the evening he cometh with the twelve.
AND
OF-evening BECOMING
He-IS-COMING
WITH
THE
TWO-TEN twelve ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
14:18 kai anakeimenwn

kai
Conj
anakeimai
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai esqiontwn kai esthiO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amhn amEn
Hebrew
AND
OF-UP-LYING of-lying-back-at-table umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-them
AND
OF-EATING
THE
JESUS
said
AMEN verily
18 And as they sat and did eat, Jesus said, Verily I say unto you, One of you which eateth with me shall betray me.
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti eis hoti heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ONE
OUT OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING ME of-ye shall-be-giving-up
THE
esqiwn esthiO
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
one-EATING one-eating
WITH ME
14:19 hrxanto
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
lupeisqai lupeO
vn Pres Pas
kai legein kai legO

Conj vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
mhti mEti
Part Int
THEY-begin
TO-BE-SORROWING AND to-be-being-sorrowful
TO-BE-sayING to-Him
ONE
according-to ONE
NO-ANY not ?
19 And they began to be sorrowful, and to say unto him one by one, [Is] it I? and another [said, Is] it I?
AV
Mark 14
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
14:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois eis autos heis

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka o dOdeka ho
embaptomenos embaptO
vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m
THE
YET He-said
to-them
WH
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
THE
one-IN-DIPPING one-dipping-in
20 And he answered and said unto them, [It is] one of the twelve, that dippeth with me in the dish.
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en
trublion trublion
n_ Acc Sg n
WITH ME
INTO THE
DISH
14:21 oti
hoti
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou upagei anthrOpos hupagO

kaqws kathOs
Adv
that THE seeing-that gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
INDEED SON
OF-THE
human
IS-UNDER-LEADING according-AS is-going-away anqrwpw ekeinw di anthrOpos ekeinos dia

peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ouai de ouai de
Inj Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
21 The Son of man indeed goeth, as it is written of him: but woe to that man by whom the Son of man is betrayed! good were it for that man if he had never been born.
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ABOUT Him concerning o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WOE woe !
YET to-THE
human
that
THRU WHOM through autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
ei ei
Cond
ouk ou
Part Neg
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN IDEAL is-being-given-up
to-Him
IF
NOT
egennhqh gennaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ekeinos anthrOpos ekeinos

WAS-generatED THE was-born
human
that
14:22 kai esqiontwn

kai
Conj
esthiO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
labwn lambanO
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
euloghsas eulogeO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eklasen klaiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
OF-EATING
OF-them
GETTING taking labete lambanO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
BREAD
blessing
He-BREAKS he-breaks-it to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
22 And as they did eat, Jesus took bread, and blessed, and brake [it], and gave to them, and said, Take, eat: this is my body.
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois kai eipen autos kai legO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
GIVES
to-them
AND
said
this
IS
THE
BODY
OF-ME
14:23 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
pothrion eucaristhsas edwken potErion eucharisteO didOmi

n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois kai epion autos kai pinO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ex ek
Prep
AND
GETTING taking pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
DRINK-cup cup
He-GIVES he-gives-it
to-them
AND
THEY-DRANK OUT
23 And he took the cup, and when he had given thanks, he gave [it] to them: and they all drank of it.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
OF-it
ALL
14:24 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
He-said
to-them
this
IS
THE
BLOOD
OF-ME
OF-THE
24 And he said unto them, This is my blood of the new testament, which is shed for many.
diaqhkhs to diathEkE ho
ekcunnomenon ekcheO
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
uper huper
Prep
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl m
covenant
THE
beING-OUT-POURED OVER MANY being-shed for-the-sake-of umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
14:25 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti ouketi hoti ouketi

Conj Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
piw pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye ampelou ampelos

n_ Gen Sg f
that
NOT-STILL NOT not-longer
NO
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING OUT OF-THE
25 Verily I say unto you, I will drink no more of the fruit of the vine, until that day that I drink it new in the kingdom of God.

ews ths heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs otan ekeinos hotan

pd Gen Sg f Conj
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
product
OF-THE
GRAPE-VINE TILL grapevine
OF-THE the
DAY
that
when-EVER it whenever
AV
Mark 14
pinw pinO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
kainon kainos
a_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING NEW
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
14:26 kai umnhsantes exhlqon

kai
Conj
humneO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
elaiwn elaia
n_ Gen Pl f
26 And when they had sung an hymn, they went out into the mount of Olives.
AND
HYMNing singing-a-hymn
THEY-OUT-CAME INTO THE they-came-out autois o autos ho

mountain Mount
OF-THE
OLIVES
14:27 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti pantes hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
skandalisqhsesqe skandalizO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
that
ALL
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-SNARED that
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
pataxw patassO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
poimena kai ta poimEn kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl n
probata probaton
n_ Nom Pl n
27 And Jesus saith unto them, All ye shall be offended because of me this night: for it is written, I will smite the shepherd, and the sheep shall be scattered.
HAS-been-WRITTEN I-SHALL-BE-SMITING THE it-has-been-written diaskorpisqhsontai diaskorpizO

vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
SHEPHERD
AND
THE
sheep sheep(p)
SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-SCATTERED shall-be-being-scattered
14:28 alla meta to

alla
Conj
meta
Prep
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
egerqhnai egeirO
vn Aor Pas
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
proaxw proagO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
28 But after that I am risen, I will go before you into Galilee.
but
after
THE
TO-BE-ROUSED ME
I-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) I-shall-be-preceding ye
INTO THE
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
GALILEE
14:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
skandalisqhsontai skandalizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
29 But Peter said unto him, Although all shall be offended, yet [will] not I.
THE
YET Peter
AVERRed
to-Him
IF
AND
ALL
all alla
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
but NOT nevertheless
14:30 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
amhn legw amEn legO

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti su hoti su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
that
YOU
30 And Jesus saith unto him, Verily I say unto thee, That this day, [even] in this night, before the cock crow twice, thou shalt deny me thrice.
shmeron tauth sEmeron houtos

Adv pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
prin h prin E
Adv Part
dis alektora fwnhsai tris dis alektOr phOneO tris

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
toDAY
this to-this
THE
NIGHT
ERE
OR twice than
UN-LAYer cock
TO-SOUND to-crow
THRice ME
aparnhsh aparneomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
SHALL-BE-renouncING
14:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ekperissws elalei ekperissOs laleO

ean ean
Cond
deh deO
vs Pres im-Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
YET OUT-excessively extravagantly soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
he-TALKED he-spoke ou ou
Part Neg
IF-EVER it-MAY-BE-BINDING ME
WH
31 But he spake the more vehemently, If I should die with thee, I will not deny thee in any wise. Likewise also said they all.
sunapoqanein sunapothnEskO
vn 2Aor Act
mh mE
Part Neg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
aparnhsomai aparneomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
wsautws hOsautOs
Adv
de
TO-BE-TOGETHER-FROM-DYING to-YOU to-be-dying-together

NA
NOT
NO
YOU
I-SHALL-BE-renouncING AS-SAMEly similarly
de de
Conj
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
YET
AND also
ALL
said
AV
Mark 14
14:32 kai ercontai

kai
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
cwrion ou chOrion hos

n_ Acc Sg n pr Gen Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
geqshmani kai gethsEmani kai

ni proper Conj
AND
THEY-ARE-COMING INTO freehold
OF-WHICH THE
NAME
GETHSEMANE AND
32 . And they came to a place which was named Gethsemane: and he saith to his disciples, Sit ye here, while I shall pray.
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

kaqisate wde ews proseuxwmai kathizO hOde heOs proseuchomai

vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj vs Aor midD 1 Sg
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
BE-seated be-ye-seated ! petron petros

n_ Acc Sg m
here
WH
TILL while
I-SHOULD-BE-prayING
NA
14:33 kai paralambanei

kai
Conj
paralambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
ton
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iakwbon kai iakObos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
AND
WH
He-IS-BESIDE-GETTING THE he-is-taking-aside

NA
Peter
AND
THE
JACOBUS James
AND
33 And he taketh with him Peter and James and John, and began to be sore amazed, and to be very heavy;
ton
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn met autou iOannEs meta autos

n_ Acc Sg m Prep pp Gen Sg m

ekqambeisqai ekthambeomai
vn Pres Pas
kai kai
Conj
THE
JOHN
WITH Him
AND
begins he-begins
TO-BE-beING-OUT-AWED AND to-be-being-overawed
adhmonein adEmoneO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-depressING to-be-being-depressed
14:34 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois perilupos autos perilupos

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ews heOs
Conj
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
ABOUT-SORROWed IS sorrow-stricken
THE
soul
OF-ME
TILL
34 And saith unto them, My soul is exceeding sorrowful unto death: tarry ye here, and watch.
qanatou meinate thanatos menO

n_ Gen Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
wde kai grhgoreite hOde kai grEgoreO

Adv Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-DEATH death
REMAIN remain-ye !
here
AND
BE-watchING be-ye-watching ! epipten piptO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
14:35 kai proelqwn

kai
Conj
proerchomai
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai proshuceto kai proseuchomai

ina hina
Conj
AND
BEFORE-COMING coming-forward
LITTLE
He-FELL
ON
THE
LAND earth h ho
AND
He-prayED prayed wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
THAT
35 And he went little, and fell on and prayed that, possible, the hour from him.
forward a the ground, if it were might pass
ei ei
Cond
dunaton estin dunatos eimi

parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Sg f
IF
ABLE possible
it-IS
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING FROM Him may-be-passing-by abba abba

ni proper
THE
HOUR
14:36 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
dunata soi dunatos su

a_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg
parenegke parapherO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
He-said
ABBA
THE
FATHER
ALL all-things ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
ABLE possible egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
to-YOU
BESIDE-CARRY THE carry-aside-you ! alla ti alla tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
36 And he said, Abba, Father, all things [are] possible unto thee; take away this cup from me: nevertheless not what I will, but what thou wilt.
pothrion touto potErion houtos

ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
DRINK-cup cup su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
this
FROM ME
but
NOT
ANY what
AM-WILLING
but
ANY what
YOU
14:37 kai ercetai

kai
Conj
erchomai
kai euriskei kai heuriskO

autous kaqeudontas kai legei autos katheudO kai legO

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
He-IS-COMING
AND
IS-FINDING
them
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing iscusas ischuO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
37 And he cometh, and findeth them sleeping, and saith unto Peter, Simon, sleepest thou? couldest not thou watch one hour?
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
kaqeudeis katheudO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
grhgorhsai grEgoreO
vn Aor Act
Peter
SIMON
YOU-ARE-DOWN-LOUNGING NOT you-are-drowsing ina hina

Conj
YOU-are-STRONG ONE
HOUR
TO-watch
14:38 grhgoreite kai proseucesqe

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai
Conj
proseuchomai
mh mE
Part Neg
elqhte erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
peirasmon to peirasmos ho
AND
BE-prayING be-ye-praying !
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-COMING INTO trial
THE
38 Watch ye and pray, lest ye enter into temptation. The spirit truly [is] ready, but the flesh [is] weak.
AV
Mark 14
men men
Part
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
proqumon prothumos
a_ Nom Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
asqenhs asthenEs
a_ Nom Sg f
INDEED spirit
BEFORE-FEEL THE is-eager
YET FLESH
UN-FIRM is-infirm
WH
14:39 kai palin apelqwn

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
aperchomai
proshuxato proseuchomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ton auton logon eipwn
WH
WH
WH
NA
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
39 And again he went away, and prayed, and spake the same words.
AND
NA
AGAIN
NA
NA
He-prays
THE
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
eipwn legO
SAME
saying word
sayING
14:40 kai palin elqwn

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
erchomai
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous kaqeudontas hsan autos katheudO eimi

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar autwn gar autos

Conj pp Gen Pl m
AND
AGAIN
COMING
He-FOUND
them
DOWN-LOUNGING drowsing hdeisan eidO

vi Plup Act 3 Pl
WERE
for
OF-them
40 And when he returned, he found them asleep again, (for their eyes were heavy,) neither wist they what to answer him.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi katabarunomenoi kai ouk ophthalmos katabarunO kai ou

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
THE
VIEWers eyes
beING-DOWN-HEAVIED being-torpid autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
NOT
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED ANY they-were-aware what
apokriqwsin apokrinomai
vs Aor pasD 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-answerING to-Him him
14:41 kai ercetai

kai
Conj
erchomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
triton kai legei tritos kai legO

a_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois kaqeudete autos katheudO

pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl / vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
WH
He-IS-COMING
NA
THE
third third-time
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
BE-DOWN-LOUNGING ye-are-drowsing hlqen erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
loipon loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
kai anapauesqe kai anapauO

Conj vi Pres Mid 2 Pl / vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
apecei apechO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
41 And he cometh the third time, and saith unto them, Sleep on now, and take [your] rest: it is enough, the hour is come; behold, the Son of man is betrayed into the hands of sinners.
THE
rest AND furthermore
BE-UP-CEASING ye-are-resting o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
it-IS-FROM-HAVING CAME it-is-having-its-fill uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
paradidotai paradidOmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou eis anthrOpos eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
HOUR
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN THE lo ! is-being-given-up amartwlwn hamartOlos

a_ Gen Pl m
SON
OF-THE
human
INTO THE
ceiras twn cheir ho

HANDS
OF-THE
missers sinners agwmen agO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
14:42 egeiresqe
egeirO
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
42 Rise up, let us go; lo, he that betrayeth me is at hand.
BE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING THE be-ye-being-roused ! we-may-be-going lo ! hggiken eggizO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
one-BESIDE-GIVING ME one-giving-up
HAS-NEARED has-drawn-near
14:43 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
eti eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
paraginetai paraginomai
WH
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
straightway STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking
IS-BESIDE-BECOMING is-coming-along oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
JUDAS
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka kai met autou dOdeka kai meta autos

ni numeral Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m

43 . And immediately, while he yet spake, cometh Judas, one of the twelve, and with him a great multitude with swords and staves, from the chief priests and the scribes and the elders.
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve arcierewn archiereus

n_ Gen Pl m
AND
WITH him
THRONG
WITH
swords
AND
WOODS cudgels
para para
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn kai twn grammateus kai ho

presbuterwn presbuteros
a_ Gen Pl m
BESIDE THE
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
THE
SENIORS elders
AV
Mark 14
14:44 dedwkei
didOmi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg Att
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
susshmon sussEmon
n_ Acc Sg n
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
HAD-GIVEN
YET THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up filhsw phileO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
TOGETHER-SIGN to-them signal estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
44 And he that betrayed him had given them a token, saying, Whomsoever I shall kiss, that same is he; take him, and lead [him] away safely.
legwn legO
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
an an
Part
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
krathsate auton krateO autos

sayING
WHOM
EVER I-SHOULD-BE-beING-FOND He I-should-be-kissing asfalws asphalOs

Adv
it-IS
HOLD hold-ye !
Him
kai apagete kai apagO

AND
BE-YE-FROM-LEADING UN-TOTTERly be-ye-leading-away-him ! securely euqus euthus

Adv
14:45 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
rabbi kai rhabbi kai

Hebrew Conj
AND
COMING
straightway TOWARD-COMING coming-to
to-Him him
he-IS-sayING
RABBI
AND
45 And as soon as he was come, he goeth straightway to him, and saith, Master, master; and kissed him.
katefilhsen auton kataphileO autos

he-DOWN-FONDS he-kisses-fondly
Him
14:46 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
epebalon epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f

kai ekrathsan auton kai krateO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
46 And they laid their hands on him, and took him.
THE-ones the
YET ON-CAST(past) THE they-laid-on de de

Conj
HANDS
to-Him
AND
HOLD
Him
14:47 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
paresthkotwn paristEmi
spasamenos spaO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ONE
YET
ANY certain ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD PULLing ones-standing-by arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
47 And one of them that stood by drew a sword, and smote a servant of the high priest, and cut off his ear.
macairan epaisen machaira paiO

doulon tou doulos ho

kai afeilen kai aphaireO

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
sword
HITS
THE
SLAVE
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest
he-FROM-LIFTS OF-him amputates
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
wtarion Otarion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
EARlobe ear-lobe o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ws epi lhsthn autos hOs epi lEstEs

pp Dat Pl m Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg m
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
to-them
AS
ON
ROBBER
48 And Jesus answered and said unto them, Are ye come out, as against a thief, with swords and [with] staves to take me?
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl

vn 2Aor Act
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-OUT-COME WITH ye-come-out
swords
AND
WOODS cudgels pros pros

Prep
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING ME to-be-apprehending umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
14:49 kaq
kata
Prep
hmeran hmhn hEmera eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf vxx 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
didaskwn didaskO
kai kai
Conj
according-to DAY
I-WAS
TOWARD YOU(p) ye all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
IN
THE
SACRED-place TEACHING sanctuary grafai graphE

n_ Nom Pl f
AND
49 I was daily with you in the temple teaching, and ye took me not: but the scriptures must be fulfilled.
ouk ou
Part Neg
ekrathsate me krateO egO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
plhrwqwsin plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
NOT
YE-HOLD
ME
but
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled efugon pheugO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WRITings scriptures
50 And they all forsook him, and fled.
14:50 kai afentes

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
AND
Him
THEY-FLED
ALL
14:51 kai neaniskos tis

kai
Conj
neaniskos
n_ Nom Sg m
tis
px Nom Sg m
sunhkolouqei sunakoloutheO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
peribeblhmenos periballO
sindona sindOn
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
YOUTH
ANY certain
WAS-TOGETHER-followING to-Him was-following-with him
HAVING-been-ABOUT-CAST linen-wrapper having-been-clothed
51 And there followed him a certain young man, having a linen cloth cast about [his] naked [body]; and the young men laid hold on him:
AV
Mark 14
epi gumnou epi gumnos

Prep a_ Gen Sg n
kai kratousin kai krateO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ON
NAKED AND naked-body de de

Conj
THEY-ARE-HOLDING him
14:52 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
katalipwn kataleipO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sindona sindOn
n_ Acc Sg f
gumnos gumnos
a_ Nom Sg m
efugen pheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
52 And he left the linen cloth, and fled from them naked.
THE
YET one-leavING one-leaving ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
linen-wrapper NAKED
FLED he-fled arcierea archiereus

n_ Acc Sg m
14:53 kai aphgagon

kai
Conj
apagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
THEY-FROM-LED THE they-led-away pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
JESUS
TOWARD THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
53 . And they led Jesus away to the high priest: and with him were assembled all the chief priests and the elders and the scribes.
sunercontai sunerchomai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi kai oi presbuteros kai ho

a_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ARE-TOGETHER-COMING ALL are-coming-together grammateis grammateus

n_ Nom Pl m
THE
THE
SENIORS elders
AND
THE
WRITers scribes
14:54 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
makroqen hkolouqhsen autw makrothen akoloutheO autos

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
ews esw eis heOs esO eis

Conj Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
Peter
FROM FAR-PLACE afar kai hn kai eimi

follows
to-Him him
TILL
within
INTO THE
54 And Peter followed him afar off, even into the palace of the high priest: and he sat with the servants, and warmed himself at the fire.
aulhn aulE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
sugkaqhmenos sugkathEmai
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
uphretwn hupEretEs
n_ Gen Pl m
COURT courtyard
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest to ho
he-WAS
TOGETHER-sittING sitting-together
WITH
THE
kai qermainomenos pros kai thermainO pros

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Prep
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
WARMING warming-himself de de
Conj
TOWARD THE
LIGHT
14:55 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai olon kai holos

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sunedrion ezhtoun sunedrion zEteO

n_ Nom Sg n vi impf Act 3 Pl
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests marturian eis marturia eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
WHOLE
THE
Sanhedrin
SOUGHT
DOWN against
OF-THE the
55 And the chief priests and all the council sought for witness against Jesus to put him to death; and found none.
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qanatwsai thanatoO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
huriskon heuriskO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
JESUS
witness testimony
INTO THE
TO-( cause-to )-DIE Him to-put-to-death autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
NOT
THEY-FOUND
14:56 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
gar eyeudomarturoun kat gar pseudomartureO kata

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
kai isai kai isos

Conj a_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
marturiai marturia
n_ Nom Pl f
56 For many bare false witness against him, but their witness agreed not together.
MANY
for
FALSE-witnessED testified-falsely
DOWN OF-Him against him
AND
EQUAL consistent
THE
witnesses testimonies
ouk ou
Part Neg
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
NOT
WERE
14:57 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
anastantes anistEmi
eyeudomarturoun kat pseudomartureO kata

vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legontes legO
57 And there arose certain, and bare false witness against him, saying,
AND
ANY some
UP-STANDing rising
FALSE-witnessED testified-falsely legontos legO
DOWN OF-Him against him oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
sayING
14:58 oti hmeis

hoti
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
hkousamen autou akouO autos

vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp Gen Sg m
katalusw kataluO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
that
WE
HEAR
OF-Him him
sayING
that
SHALL-BE-DOWN-LOOSING shall-be-demolishing triwn treis

n_ Gen Pl f
58 We heard him say, I will destroy this temple that is made with hands, and within three days I will build another made without hands.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m

ceiropoihton kai dia cheiropoiEtos kai dia

a_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep
hmerwn allon hEmera allos

n_ Gen Pl f a_ Acc Sg m
THE
TEMPLE
this
THE
HAND-made made-by-hands
AND
THRU THREE during
DAYS
other another
AV
Mark 14
aceiropoihton oikodomhsw acheiropoiEtos oikodomeO

a_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
UN-HAND-made not-made-by-hands
I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING I-shall-be-building outws ish houtOs isos

Adv a_ Nom Sg f
14:59 kai oude

kai
Conj
oude
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marturia autwn marturia autos

n_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m
59 But neither so did their witness agree together.
AND
NOT-YET thus neither
EQUAL consistent o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WAS
THE
witness testimony meson mesos

a_ Acc Sg n
OF-them
14:60 kai anastas

kai
Conj
anistEmi
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ephrwthsen ton eperOtaO ho

AND
UP-STANDing rising legwn legO

THE
chief-SACRED-one INTO MIDst chief-priest apokrinh apokrinomai

inquirES-of
THE
60 And the high priest stood up in the midst, and asked Jesus, saying, Answerest thou nothing? what [is it which] these witness against thee?
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
JESUS
sayING
NOT
YOU-ARE-answerING NOT-YET-ONE ANY anything what ?
these
OF-YOU you
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-DOWN-witnessING are-testifying-against
14:61 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
esiwpa siOpaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
apekrinato ouden apokrinomai oudeis

vi Aor midD 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
palin o palin ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET He-WAS-SILENT AND
NOT
answers
NOT-YET-ONE AGAIN anything autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE
61 But he held his peace, and answered nothing. Again the high priest asked him, and said unto him, Art thou the Christ, the Son of the Blessed?
n_ Nom Sg m
ephrwta eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai legei kai legO

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
chief-SACRED-one inquirED-of chief-priest cristos o christos ho

Him
AND
IS-sayING
to-Him
YOU
ARE
THE
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
euloghtou eulogEtos
a_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
blessed
14:62 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai oyesqe kai optomai

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET JESUS
said
AM
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE ye-shall-be-seeing dunamews kai dunamis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
62 And Jesus said, I am: and ye shall see the Son of man sitting on the right hand of power, and coming in the clouds of heaven.
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
dexiwn kaqhmenon dexios kathEmai

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
SON
OF-THE
human
sittING
OF-THE
ABILITY power
AND
ercomenon erchomai
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
nefelwn tou nephelE ho

ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
COMING
WITH
THE
CLOUDS
OF-THE
heaven
14:63 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
diarrhxas diarrhEgnumi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
citwnas autou chitOn autos

legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
63 Then the high priest rent his clothes, and saith, What need we any further witnesses?
THE
YET chief-SACRED-one THRU-BURSTing chief-priest tearing creian chreia

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
TUNICS
OF-him
IS-sayING
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eti eti
Adv
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
marturwn martus
n_ Gen Pl m
ANY what ?
STILL need
WE-ARE-HAVING OF-witnesses
14:64 hkousate ths

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Gen Sg f
blasfhmias blasphEmia
n_ Gen Sg f
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
fainetai phainO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
YE-HEAR
OF-THE the
HARM-AVERment ANY blasphemy what ? einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
to-YOU(p) to-ye
it-IS-APPEARING
THE
YET ALL
64 Ye have heard the blasphemy: what think ye? And they all condemned him to be guilty of death.
katekrinan auton katakrinO autos

enocon enochos
a_ Acc Sg m
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
DOWN-JUDGE they-condemn
Him
liable
TO-BE
OF-DEATH
AV
Mark 14
14:65 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
emptuein emptuO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai perikaluptein kai perikaluptO

Conj vn Pres Act
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
begin
ANY some
TO-BE-IN-SPITTING to-Him to-be-spitting-in auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
TO-BE-ABOUT-COVERING OF-Him to-be-covering-about autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon kai kolafizein prosOpon kai kolaphizO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vn Pres Act
kai legein kai legO

Conj vn Pres Act
65 And some began to spit on him, and to cover his face, and to buffet him, and to say unto him, Prophesy: and the servants did strike him with the palms of their hands.
THE
face
AND
TO-BE-FROM-CHASTISING Him to-be-buffeting
AND
TO-BE-sayING to-Him
profhteuson kai oi prophEteuO kai ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai rapismasin auton hupEretEs rhapisma autos

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Dat Pl n pp Acc Sg m
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVER prophesy-you !
AND
THE
subservients deputies tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-SLAPS
Him
GOT took aulh aulE

n_ Dat Sg f
14:66 kai ontos

kai
Conj
eimi
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
katw en katO en
Adv Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ercetai erchomai
66 . And as Peter was beneath in the palace, there cometh one of the maids of the high priest:
AND
OF-BEING
THE
Peter
DOWN below arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
COURT courtyard
IS-COMING
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
paidiskwn tou paidiskE ho

ONE
OF-THE
maids
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest qermainomenon embleyasa thermainO emblepO

vp Pres Mid Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
14:67 kai idousa

kai
Conj
eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
Peter
WARMING warming-himself tou ho
IN-looking looking-at ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
to-him him
she-IS-sayING
67 And when she saw Peter warming himself, she looked upon him, and said, And thou also wast with Jesus of Nazareth.
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
nazarhnou hsqa nazarEnos eimi

t_ Gen Sg m
AND also
YOU
WITH
THE
NAZAREAN
WERE
THE
JESUS
14:68 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legwn legO
oute oute
Conj
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oute oute
Conj
THE
YET he-disowns he-denies su su

pp 2 Nom Sg
sayING
NOT-BESIDES I-HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-BESIDES neither I-am-aware nor kai exhlqen kai exerchomai
68 But he denied, saying, I know not, neither understand I what thou sayest. And he went out into the porch; and the cock crew.
epistamai epistamai
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
exw exO
Adv
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proaulion proaulion
n_ Acc Sg n
I-AM-adeptING I-am-being-adept-in
NA NA
YOU
NA
ANY what ?
ARE-sayING
AND
he-OUT-CAME OUT INTO THE he-came-out outside
BEFORE-COURT forecourt
kai alektwr efwnhsen kai alektOr phOneO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
UN-LAYer cock
SOUNDS crows paidiskh idousa paidiskE eidO

n_ Nom Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
14:69 kai h
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
palin legein palin legO

Adv vn Pres Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
69 And a maid saw him again, and began to say to them that stood by, This is [one] of them.
AND
THE
maid
PERCEIVING
him
begins
AGAIN
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
parestwsin paristEmi
vp Perf Act Dat Pl m

Conj pd Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD that ones-standing-by
this-one this-one
OUT OF-them
IS
14:70 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
palin hrneito palin arneomai

Adv vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
kai meta mikron kai meta mikros

Conj Prep a_ Acc Sg m
palin oi palin ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET AGAIN
he-disOWNED he-denied tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
after
LITTLE
AGAIN
THE
parestwtes paristEmi
vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Con
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
alhqws ex alEthOs ek
Adv Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai gar kai gar

Conj Conj
70 And he denied it again. And a little after, they that stood by said again to Peter, Surely thou art [one] of them: for thou art a Galilaean, and thy speech agreeth [thereto].
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD said ones-standing-by galilaios ei galilaios eimi

to-THE
Peter
TRUly
OUT OF-them
YOU-ARE
AND also
for
GALILEAN
YOU-ARE
AV
Mark 14 - Mark 15
14:71 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
anaqematizein anathematizO
vn Pres Act
kai omnunai kai omnuO

Conj vn Aor Act
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
71 But he began to curse and to swear, [saying], I know not this man of whom ye speak.
THE
YET he-begins
TO-BE-anathematizING AND
TO-SWEAR that to-be-swearing
NOT
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon touton on anthrOpos houtos hos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
human
this
WHOM
YE-ARE-sayING
14:72 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
ek ek
Prep
deuterou alektwr efwnhsen kai anemnhsqh deuteros alektOr phOneO kai anamimnEskO
a_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
straightway OUT OF-second of-second-time to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
UN-LAYer cock
SOUNDS crows autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
IS-UP-REMINDED THE recollects oti prin alektora hoti prin alektOr

Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
ws eipen hOs legO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
72 And the second time the cock crew. And Peter called to mind the word that Jesus said unto him, Before the cock crow twice, thou shalt deny me thrice. And when he thought thereon, he wept.
Peter
WH WH
THE
declaration AS
NA NA
said
to-him
THE
JESUS
that
ERE
UN-LAYer cock
dis fwnhsai
fwnhsai dis phOneO dis

vn Aor Act Adv
tris tris
Adv
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
aparnhsh aparneomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
kai epibalwn kai epiballO

TO-SOUND to-crow eklaien klaiO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
twice
THRice ME
YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING AND
ON-CASTING reflecting
he-LAMENTED
AV
Mark 15
15:1 kai euqus

kai
Conj
euthus
Adv
prwi prOi
Adv
n_ Acc Sg n
poihsantes poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
meta meta
Prep
AND
straightway morning TOGETHER-COUNSEL DOing doholding in-the-morning consultation presbuterwn kai grammatewn kai olon presbuteros kai grammateus kai holos
a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg n
THE
chief-SACRED-ones WITH chief-priests sunedrion dhsantes sunedrion deO

n_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
. And straightway in the morning the chief priests held a consultation with the elders and scribes and the whole council, and bound Jesus, and carried [him] away, and delivered [him] to Pilate.
THE
SENIORS elders ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
WRITers scribes
AND
WHOLE
THE
Sanhedrin
BINDing
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aphnegkan apopherO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai paredwkan kai paradidOmi

pilatw pilatos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
JESUS
THEY-FROM-CARRY AND they-carry-away-him o ho
THEY-BESIDE-GIVE to-PILATE give-over-him pilatos su pilatos su

n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
15:2 kai ephrwthsen auton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus basileus
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
inquirES-of
Him
THE
PILATE
YOU
ARE
THE
KING
And Pilate asked him, Art thou the King of the Jews? And he answering said unto him, Thou sayest [it].
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
YET answerING
to-him him
He-IS-sayING
YOU
ARE-sayING are-saying-it
3
15:3 kai kathgoroun autou

kai
Conj
katEgoreO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Gen Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
And the chief priests accused him of many things: but he answered nothing.
AND
accusED
OF-Him him
THE
chief-SACRED-ones much chief-priests of-many-things auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WH
15:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos palin ephrwta pilatos palin eperOtaO

n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg
legwn
NA
legwn legO
ouk ou
Part Neg
THE
YET PILATE
AGAIN
inquirED-of
Him
sayING
NOT
And Pilate asked him again, saying, Answerest thou nothing? behold how many things they witness against thee.
apokrinh apokrinomai
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
posa posos
pq Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kathgorousin katEgoreO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YOU-ARE-answerING NOT-YET-ONE BE-PERCEIVING how-much OF-YOU anything lo ! of-how-many-things you
THEY-ARE-accusING
15:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouketi ouketi
Adv
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
wste hOste
Conj
qaumazein thaumazO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
But Jesus yet answered nothing; so that Pilate marvelled.
THE
YET JESUS
NOT-STILL NOT-YET-ONE answerED not-longer anything
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-MARVELING THE so-that
pilaton pilatos
n_ Acc Sg m
PILATE
15:6 kata
kata
Prep
de de
Conj
eorthn apeluen heortE apoluO

autois ena autos heis

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
desmion on desmios hos

according-to YET FESTIVAL
he-FROM-LOOSED to-them he-released
ONE
BOUND-one prisoner
WHOM
Now at [that] feast he released unto them one prisoner, whomsoever they desired.
parhtounto paraiteomai
THEY-BESIDE-REQUESTED they-excused
15:7 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
barabbas meta twn barabbas meta ho

n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m
stasiastwn stasiastEs
n_ Gen Pl m
WAS there-was dedemenos deO

YET THE
one-beING-said one-being-said th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
Bar-Abbas
WITH
THE
STANDers insurrectionists
oitines en hostis en
pr Nom Pl m Prep
stasei stasis
n_ Dat Sg f
fonon phonos
n_ Acc Sg m
pepoihkeisan poieO
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
And there was [one] named Barabbas, [which lay] bound with them that had made insurrection with him, who had committed murder in the insurrection.
HAVING-been-BOUND WHO-ANY who-any
IN
THE
STANDing MURDER insurrection oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
HAD-DONE
15:8 kai anabas

kai
Conj
anabainO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
aiteisqai aiteO
vn Pres Mid
kaqws kathOs
Adv
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
UP-STEPPing stepping-up
THE
THRONG
begins
TO-BE-REQUESTING according-AS he-DID
And the multitude crying aloud began to desire [him to do] as he had ever done unto them.
AV
Mark 15
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
to-them
15:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos apekriqh pilatos apokrinomai

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg

qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
But Pilate answered them, saying, Will ye that I release unto you the King of the Jews?
THE
YET PILATE
answerED
to-them them
sayING
YE-ARE-WILLING
apolusw apoluO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
basilea twn basileus ho

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-releasing to-ye
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
WH
15:10 eginwsken gar oti dia

ginOskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar
Conj
hoti
Conj
dia
Prep
fqonon paradedwkeisan auton phthonos paradidOmi autos

n_ Acc Sg m vi Plup Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
oi arciereis
WH
10 For he knew that the chief priests had delivered him for envy.
he-KNEW
NA NA
for
that
THRU ENVY because-of
HAD-BESIDE-GIVEN had-given-up
Him
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests de de
Conj
15:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
aneseisan ton anaseiO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mallon ton mallon ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones UP-QUAKE chief-priests excite autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
THE
THRONG
THAT RATHER
THE
11 But the chief priests moved the people, that he should rather release Barabbas unto them.
barabban apolush barabbas apoluO

n_ Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg
Bar-Abbas
he-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-them he-should-be-releasing de de

Conj
15:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos palin apokriqeis pilatos palin apokrinomai

n_ Nom Sg m Adv vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

oun oun
Conj
THE
WH WH
YET PILATE
WH
AGAIN
NA
answerING
NA
said
NA
to-them
NA
ANY what ? legete legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THEN
12 And Pilate answered and said again unto them, What will ye then that I shall do [unto him] whom ye call the King of the Jews?
poihsw
on
legete
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
YE-ARE-WILLING
I-SHALL-BE-DOING
WHOM
YE-ARE-sayING ye-are-terming
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews staurwson auton stauroO autos

13 And they cried out again, Crucify him.
15:13 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
palin ekraxan palin krazO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
YET AGAIN
THEY-CRY
impale-YOU crucify-you !
Him
15:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos elegen pilatos legO

autois ti autos tis

gar epoihsen kakon gar poieO kakos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET PILATE
said
to-them
ANY what ?
for
He-DOES
EVIL
THE
14 Then Pilate said unto them, Why, what evil hath he done? And they cried out the more exceedingly, Crucify him.
de de
Conj
perissws ekraxan perissOs krazO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
staurwson auton stauroO autos

YET exceedingly
THEY-CRY
Him
15:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos boulomenos pilatos boulomai

n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ikanon hikanos
a_ Acc Sg n
poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
THE
YET PILATE
intendING
to-THE
THRONG
THE
enough
TO-DO
15 . And [so] Pilate, willing to content the people, released Barabbas unto them, and delivered Jesus, when he had scourged [him], to be crucified.
apelusen apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ton autos ho

barabban kai paredwken ton barabbas kai paradidOmi ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
fragellwsas phragelloO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
FROM-LOOSES to-them releases
THE
Bar-Abbas
AND
THE
JESUS
WHIPPing whipping-him
AV
Mark 15
ina hina
Conj
staurwqh stauroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
THAT He-MAY-BE-BEING-impalED he-may-be-being-crucified
15:16 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
stratiwtai aphgagon auton stratiOtEs apagO autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
esw ths esO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
aulhs aulE
n_ Gen Sg f
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
THE
YET WARriors soldiers
FROM-LED led-away
Him
within
OF-THE the thn ho
COURT courtyard
WHICH
16 And the soldiers led him away into the hall, called Praetorium; and they call together the whole band.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
praitwrion kai sugkalousin praitOrion kai sugkaleO

n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
speiran speira
n_ Acc Sg f
t_ Acc Sg f
IS
PRETORIUM
AND
THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-CALLING WHOLE they-are-calling-together auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE
BAND squadron autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
17 And they clothed him with purple, and platted a crown of thorns, and put it about his [head],
15:17 kai endiduskousin

kai
Conj
endiduskO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
porfuran kai peritiqeasin porphura kai peritithEmi

AND
THEY-ARE-IN-SLIPPING Him they-are-dressing akanqinon akanthinos

a_ Acc Sg m
PURPLE
AND
THEY-ARE-ABOUT-PLACING to-Him they-are-placing-about him
plexantes plekO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
stefanon stephanos
n_ Acc Sg m
BRAIDing
POINT-FLOWERy WREATH thorny aspazesqai auton aspazomai autos

vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m
15:18 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
caire chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
basileu twn basileus ho

n_ Voc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
18 And began to salute him, Hail, King of the Jews!
AND
THEY-begin
TO-BE-greetING to-be-saluting autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
Him
BE-JOYING KING ! be-you-rejoicing !
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
15:19 kai etupton

kai
Conj
tuptO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn kalamw kai eneptuon kephalE kalamos kai emptuO

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
AND
THEY-BEAT(past) OF-Him
THE
HEAD
to-REED
AND
THEY-IN-SPAT to-Him spat-in
AND
19 And they smote him on the head with a reed, and did spit upon him, and bowing [their] knees worshipped him.
tiqentes tithEmi
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
gonata prosekunoun autw gonu proskuneO autos

n_ Acc Pl n vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
PLACING
THE
KNEES
THEY-worshipED
to-Him him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
15:20 kai ote enepaixan autw

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
empaizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
exedusan ekduO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
porfuran kai enedusan porphura kai enduO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
when
THEY-IN-sport they-scoff-at imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
to-Him him autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THEY-OUT-SLIP Him they-strip kai exagousin kai exagO

THE of-the
PURPLE
AND
THEY-IN-SLIP put-on
20 And when they had mocked him, they took off the purple from him, and put his own clothes on him, and led him out to crucify him.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
Him
THE
GARMENTS OF-Him
AND
THEY-ARE-OUT-LEADING Him they-are-leading-out
THAT
staurwswsin stauroO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-impalING Him they-should-be-crucifying
15:21 kai aggareuousin

kai
Conj
aggareuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
paragonta paragO
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
simwna kurhnaion ercomenon simOn kurEnaios erchomai

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-DRAFTING BESIDE-LEADING they-are-conscripting one-passing-along ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
ANY certain
SIMON
CYRENIAN
COMING
21 And they compel one Simon a Cyrenian, who passed by, coming out of the country, the father of Alexander and Rufus, to bear his cross.
ap apo
Prep
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
alexandrou kai roufou alexandros kai rhouphos

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
arh airO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
FROM FIELD
THE
FATHER
OF-ALEXANDER
AND
OF-RUFUS Rufus
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING THE he-should-be-picking-up

pale cross
OF-Him
15:22 kai ferousin

kai
Conj
pherO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
golgoqan topon golgotha topos

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg m
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
THEY-ARE-CARRYING Him they-are-bringing
ON
THE
GOLGOTHA
PLACE
WHICH
IS
22 . And they bring him unto the place Golgotha, which is, being interpreted, The place of a skull.
AV
Mark 15
WH
meqermhneuomenos
NA
meqermhneuomenon methermEneuO
kraniou topos kranion topos

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
OF-SKULL
PLACE
15:23 kai edidoun autw

kai
Conj
didOmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
esmurnismenon smurnizO
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
23 And they gave him to drink wine mingled with myrrh: but he received [it] not.
AND
THEY-GAVE
to-Him him
HAVING-been-MYRRHizED WINE having-been-blended-with-myrrh auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WHO which ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
YET NOT
GOT he-took autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
24 And when they had crucified him, they parted his garments, casting lots upon them, what every man should take.
15:24 kai staurousin

kai
Conj
stauroO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai diamerizontai kai diamerizO

imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
AND
THEY-ARE-impalING Him they-are-crucifying klhron klEros

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-THRU-PARTING THE they-are-dividing ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
GARMENTS OF-Him
ballontes ballO
ep epi
Prep
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
arh airO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
CASTING
LOT
ON
them
ANY who ?
ANY anything
SHOULD-BE-LIFTING should-be-taking-away
25 And it was the third hour, and they crucified him.
15:25 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai estaurwsan auton kai stauroO autos

WAS it-was
YET HOUR
third
AND
THEY-impale they-crucify aitias aitia

n_ Gen Sg f
Him
15:26 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epigrafh ths epigraphE ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epigegrammenh epigraphO
AND
WAS
THE
ON-WRITing inscription ioudaiwn ioudaios

a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
cause charge
OF-Him
HAVING-been-ON-WRITTEN having-been-inscribed
26 And the superscription of his accusation was written over, THE KING OF THE JEWS.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews staurousin stauroO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
15:27 kai sun

kai
Conj
sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
lhstas ena lEstEs heis

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn kai dexios kai

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
AND
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him ex ek

Prep
THEY-ARE-impalING TWO they-are-crucifying
ROBBERS
ONE
AND
27 And with him they crucify two thieves; the one on his right hand, and the other on his left.
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
euwnumwn autou euOnumos autos

ONE
OF-Him
15:28
28 And the scripture was fulfilled, which saith, And he was numbered with the transgressors.
. .
.
. .
.
15:29 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
paraporeuomenoi eblasfhmoun auton paraporeuomai blasphEmeO autos

vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
kinountes kineO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
AND
THE-ones the
BESIDE-GOING ones-going-by kai legontes kai legO

HARM-AVERRED blasphemed oua oua

Inj
Him
STIRRING wagging ton ho
THE
29 And they that passed by railed on him, wagging their heads, and saying, Ah, thou that destroyest the temple, and buildest [it] in three days,
kefalas autwn kephalE autos

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kataluwn kataluO
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
t_ Acc Sg m
HEADS
OF-them
AND
WH
sayING
NA
AHA ! THE
One-DOWN-LOOSING THE one-demolishing
TEMPLE
AND
oikodomwn oikodomeO
en
en en
Prep
trisin hmerais treis hEmera

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
HOME-BUILDING building-it
IN
THREE
DAYS
15:30 swson
sOzO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton katabas seautou katabainO

pf 3 Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
staurou stauros
n_ Gen Sg m
30 Save thyself, and down from the cross.
come
SAVE save-you !
YOURself
FROM THE
pale cross
AV
Mark 15
15:31 omoiws kai oi

homoiOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
empaizontes pros empaizO pros

allhlous meta twn allElOn meta ho

pc Acc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Pl m
LIKE-AS likewise
AND also
THE
chief-SACRED-ones IN-sportING chief-priests scoffing allous eswsen allos sOzO

a_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWARD one-another
WITH
THE
31 Likewise also the chief priests mocking said among themselves with the scribes, He saved others; himself he cannot save.
grammatewn elegon grammateus legO

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
swsai sOzO
vn Aor Act
WRITers scribes
said
others
He-SAVES
self himself
NOT
He-IS-ABLE he-can
TO-SAVE
15:32 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus israhl basileus israEl

n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
katabatw katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
nun apo nun apo

Adv Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
ANOINTED Christ idwmen eidO
THE
KING
of-ISRAEL LET-BE-DOWN-STEPPING NOW FROM THE of-Israel let-him-be-descending ! kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
32 Let Christ the King of Israel descend now from the cross, that we may see and believe. And they that were crucified with him reviled him.
staurou ina stauros hina

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
kai pisteuswmen kai pisteuO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
pale cross
THAT WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND
WE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING AND should-be-believing wneidizon auton oneidizO autos

THE-ones the
sunestaurwmenoi sustauroO
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-impalED TOGETHER to-Him ones-having-been-crucified-together togetherwith him
REPROACHED
Him
15:33 kai genomenhs

kai
Conj
ginomai
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
ekths hektos
a_ Gen Sg f
skotos skotos
n_ Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
OF-BECOMING
HOUR of-hour enaths enatos

a_ Gen Sg f
SIXth
DARKness
BECAME
ON WHOLE onover
THE
33 . And when the sixth hour was come, there was darkness over the whole land until the ninth hour.
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
ews wras heOs hOra

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
LAND
TILL
HOUR
OF-NINth ninth wra hOra

n_ Dat Sg f
15:34 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
enath enatos
a_ Dat Sg f
ebohsen boaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh elwi elwi mega elOi elOi

a_ Dat Sg f Aramaic Aramaic
AND
WH
to-THE
NA
NINth
HOUR
IMPLORES
THE
JESUS
ELOI
ELOI
lama
lema lema
Aramaic
sabacqani sabachthani
Aramaic
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
meqermhneuomenon o methermEneuO ho
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
34 And at the ninth hour Jesus cried with a loud voice, saying, Eloi, Eloi, lama sabachthani? which is, being interpreted, My God, my God, why hast thou forsaken me?
LEMA
SABACHTHANI ( Aramaic ) WHICH sabachthani

WH WH
IS
NA
beING-after-TRANSLATED being-construed qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
NA
THE
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o qeos mou
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
God
OF-ME
THE
God
OF-ME
INTO ANY why ?
egkatelipes me egkataleipO egO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
YOU-abandonED you-did-forsake
ME
15:35 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
paresthkotwn paristEmi
akousantes elegon akouO legO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
35 And some of them that stood by, when they heard [it], said, Behold, he calleth Elias.
AND
ANY some fwnei phOneO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-THE
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD HEARing ones-standing-by hearing-it
said
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
hlian Elias
n_ Acc Sg m
ELIAS Elijah
He-IS-SOUNDING he-is-summoning de de
Conj
15:36 dramwn
trechO
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
NA
kai kai
Conj
gemisas gemizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
spoggon oxous spoggos oxos

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg n
RUNNING
YET ANY someone
AND
REPLETizing soaking legwn legO

SPONGE
OF-vinegar
periqeis peritithEmi
kalamw epotizen auton kalamos potizO autos

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
idwmen eidO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
36 And one ran and filled a spunge full of vinegar, and put [it] on a reed, and gave him to drink, saying, Let alone; let us see whether Elias will come to take him down.
ABOUT-PLACING sticking-it-on
to-REED reed
DRINKizED gave-to-drink
Him
sayING
FROM-LET let-off-ye !
WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
AV
Mark 15
ei ei
Cond
ercetai erchomai
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
kaqelein kathaireO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IF
IS-COMING
ELIAS Elijah de de
Conj
TO-BE-DOWN-LIFTING Him to-be-taking-down afeis aphiEmi

15:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
fwnhn megalhn exepneusen phOnE mega ekpneO

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
37 And Jesus cried with a loud voice, and gave up the ghost.
THE
YET JESUS
FROM-LETTING letting-out
SOUND
GREAT loud escisqh schizO
expirES
15:38 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n

naou naos
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
duo duo
ni numeral
ap apo
Prep
anwqen anOthen
Adv
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
38 And the veil of the temple was rent in twain from the top to the bottom.
AND
THE
DOWN-EXPANDer curtain
OF-THE
TEMPLE
IS-SPLIT is-rent
INTO TWO
FROM UP-PLACE above
ews katw heOs katO

Conj Adv
TILL
DOWN bottom de de
Conj
15:39 idwn
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kenturiwn o kenturiOn ho
paresthkws paristEmi
ex ek
Prep
PERCEIVING
YET THE
CENTURION
THE
one-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD OUT one-standing-by alhqws outos alEthOs houtos

Adv pd Nom Sg m
enantias enantios
a_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti outws exepneusen eipen hoti houtOs ekpneO legO

Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
39 And when the centurion, which stood over against him, saw that he so cried out, and gave up the ghost, he said, Truly this man was the Son of God.
OF-IN-INSTEAD OF-Him of-opposite-of him anqrwpos uios anthrOpos huios

that
thus
He-expirES
said
TRUly
this
THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
human
SON
OF-God
WAS
WH
15:40 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kai gunaikes apo kai gunE apo

Conj n_ Nom Pl f Prep
makroqen qewrousai makrothen theOreO

Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
kai kai
Conj
mariam
WERE there-were
NA
YET AND also h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
WOMEN
FROM FAR-PLACE afar h ho
beholdING
IN WHOM among tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND also kai kai

Conj
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f

iakwbou iakObos
n_ Gen Sg m
mikrou mikros
a_ Gen Sg m
40 There were also women looking on afar off: among whom was Mary Magdalene, and Mary the mother of James the less and of Joses, and Salome;
t_ Nom Sg f
MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
MARY
THE
OF-JACOBUS THE of-James
LITTLE
AND
iwshtos mhthr iOsEs mEtEr

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
kai salwmh kai salOmE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
OF-JOSES
MOTHER
AND
SALOME
15:41 ai
hos
pr Nom Pl f
ote hn hote eimi

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia hkolouqoun autw galilaia akoloutheO autos

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
kai dihkonoun kai diakoneO

WHO
when
He-WAS
IN
THE
GALILEE
followED

pp Dat Sg m
AND
THRU-SERVED dispensed
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai allai kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Pl f
pollai ai polus ho
a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f
sunanabasai sunanabainO
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
41 (Who also, when he was in Galilee, followed him, and ministered unto him;) and many other women which came up with him unto Jerusalem.
to-Him
AND
others
MANY
THE
ones-TOGETHER-UP-STEPPing to-Him ones-ascending-with him epei hn epei eimi

INTO JERUSALEM
15:42 kai hdh

kai
Conj
EdE
Adv
oyias opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
genomenhs ginomai
paraskeuh o paraskeuE hos

n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
ALREADY evening of-evening
OF-BECOMING becoming
since
it-WAS
preparation
WHICH
IS
42 . And now when the even was come, because it was the preparation, that is, the day before the sabbath,
prosabbaton prosabbaton
n_ Nom Sg n
BEFORE-SABBATH before-the-sabbath
15:43 elqwn
erchomai
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
arimaqaias euschmwn arimathaia euschEmOn

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg m
bouleuths bouleutEs
n_ Nom Sg m
COMING
JOSEPH
THE
FROM ARIMATHEA
WELL-FIGURED COUNSELlor respectable counselor
43 Joseph of Arimathaea, an honourable counsellor, which also waited for the kingdom of God, came, and went in boldly unto Pilate, and craved the
AV
Mark 15 - Mark 16
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
prosdecomenos prosdechomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
body of Jesus.
WHO
AND also
he
WAS
TOWARD-RECEIVING anticipating ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
tolmhsas tolmaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
pilaton kai hthsato to pilatos kai aiteO ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
DARing
INTO-CAME entered
TOWARD THE
PILATE
AND
REQUESTS
THE
BODY
OF-THE
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
JESUS
15:44 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos eqaumasen ei pilatos thaumazO ei

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Cond
hdh EdE
Adv
teqnhken kai proskalesamenos thnEskO kai proskaleomai

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m
THE
YET PILATE
MARVELS
IF
ALREADY He-HAS-DIED
WH NA
AND
44 And Pilate marvelled if he were already dead: and calling [unto him] the centurion, he asked him whether he had been any while dead.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kenturiwna ephrwthsen auton kenturiOn eperOtaO autos

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
hdh
palai palai
Adv
apeqanen apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
CENTURION
he-inquirES-of
him
IF
OLD long-ago
He-FROM-DIED he-died ptwma tw ptOma ho

45 And when he knew [it] of the centurion, he gave the body to Joseph.
15:45 kai gnous

kai
Conj
ginOskO
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kenturiwnos edwrhsato to kenturiOn dOreomai ho

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
AND
KNOWING knowing-it
FROM THE
CENTURION
he-presents
THE
corpse
to-THE
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
JOSEPH
15:46 kai agorasas

kai
Conj
agorazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
sindona sindOn
n_ Acc Sg f
kaqelwn kathaireO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eneilhsen th eneileO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
sindoni sindOn
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AND
BUYing
linen-wrapper DOWN-LIFTING taking-down en en

Prep
WH
Him
he-IN-WHIRLS he-wraps-him hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to-THE
linen-wrapper AND
eqhken tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mnhmati
NA
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
lelatomhmenon ek latomeO ek
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep
46 And he bought fine linen, and took him down, and wrapped him in the linen, and laid him in a sepulchre which was hewn out of a rock, and rolled a stone unto the door of the sepulchre.
PLACES
Him
IN
memorial-vault tomb epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
WHICH
WAS
HAVING-been-quarriED
OUT
petras kai prosekulisen liqon petra kai proskuliO lithos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-ROCK
AND
TOWARD-ROLLS he-rolls-to de de
Conj
STONE
ON
THE
DOOR
OF-THE
memorial-vault tomb iwshtos eqewroun iOsEs theOreO

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf Act 3 Pl
47 And Mary Magdalene and Mary [the mother] of Joses beheld where he was laid.
15:47 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
YET MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
MARY
THE
OF-JOSES
beheld
pou pou
Part
teqeitai tithEmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
?-where He-HAS-been-PLACED where ?
AV
Mark 16
16:1 kai diagenomenou

kai
Conj
diaginomai
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou sabbaton
n_ Gen Sg n
WH
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh kai magdalEnE kai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
AND
OF-THRU-BECOMING OF-THE of-elapsing h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
SABBATH
MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
AND
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iakwbou kai salwmh hgorasan arwmata ina iakObos kai salOmE agorazO arOma hina
n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n Conj
elqousai erchomai
. And when the sabbath was past, Mary Magdalene, and Mary the [mother] of James, and Salome, had bought sweet spices, that they might come and anoint him.
MARY
THE
OF-THE
JACOBUS James
AND
SALOME
BUY
SPICES
THAT COMING
aleiywsin aleiphO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-RUBBING Him
WH NA
16:2 kai lian

kai
Conj
lian
Adv
prwi prOi
Adv
th
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn ercontai sabbaton erchomai

n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
AND
VERY morning very-early in-the-morning mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
to-THE
ONE one-day hliou hElios
OF-THE
SABBATHS
THEY-ARE-COMING
And very early in morning the first [day] of week, they came unto sepulchre at the rising of sun.
the the the the
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
anateilantos tou anatellO ho

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
ON
THE
memorial-vault OF-UP-rising tomb of-rising pros pros

Prep
OF-THE
SUN
16:3 kai elegon

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eautas tis heautou tis

pf 3 Acc Pl f pi Nom Sg m
apokulisei apokuliO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-said
TOWARD selves themselves tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-FROM-ROLLING to-US shall-be-rolling-away
THE
STONE
And they said among themselves, Who shall roll us away the stone from the door of the sepulchre?
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
quras thura
n_ Gen Sg f
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
OUT OF-THE
DOOR
OF-THE
memorial-vault tomb oti hoti

Conj
WH
16:4 kai anableyasai qewrousin

kai
Conj
anakekulistai
NA
anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl f
theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
apokekulistai apokuliO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
And when they looked, they saw that the stone was rolled away: for it was very great.
AND
UP-looking looking-up liqos lithos

n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-ARE-beholdING that
HAS-been-FROM-ROLLED has-been-rolled-away sfodra sphodra

Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar megas gar mega

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
THE
STONE
it-WAS
for
GREAT
VEHEMENT tremendously eidon eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
16:5 kai eiselqousai eis

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
neaniskon kaqhmenon neaniskos kathEmai

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
AND
INTO THE
memorial-vault THEY-PERCEIVED YOUTH tomb
sittING
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
dexiois peribeblhmenon dexios periballO

a_ Dat Pl n vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
stolhn leukhn kai exeqambhqhsan stolE leukos kai ekthambeomai

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
And entering into the sepulchre, they saw a young man sitting on the right side, clothed in a long white garment; and they were affrighted.
IN
THE
RIGHTS right(p) de de
Conj
HAVING-been-ABOUT-CAST robe having-been-clothed legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WHITE
AND
THEY-WERE-OUT-AWED they-were-overawed ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
16:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autais mh autos mE
pp Dat Pl f Part Neg
ekqambeisqe ekthambeomai
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
YET he-IS-sayING
to-them
NO
YE-BE-beING-OUT-AWED JESUS be-ye-being-overawed ! hgerqh egeirO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
YE-ARE-SEEKING
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nazarhnon ton nazarEnos ho

estaurwmenon stauroO
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
wde hOde
Adv
And he saith unto them, Be not affrighted: Ye seek Jesus of Nazareth, which was crucified: he is risen; he is not here: behold the place where they laid him.
THE
NAZAREAN
THE
One-HAVING-been-impalED He-WAS-ROUSED NOT one-having-been-crucified opou hopou

Adv
He-IS
here
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
BE-PERCEIVING THE be-you-perceiving !
PLACE
THE-?-where THEY-PLACE Him wheree tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
16:7 alla upagete

alla
Conj
hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl

kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
but
BE-UNDER-LEADING say be-ye-going-away ! say-ye !
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
to-THE
Peter
But go your way, tell his disciples and Peter that he goeth before you into Galilee: there shall ye see him, as he said unto you.
AV
Mark 16
oti proagei hoti proagO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian ekei auton galilaia ekei autos

n_ Acc Sg f Adv pp Acc Sg m
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
that
He-IS-BEFORE-LEADING YOU(p) he-is-preceding ye eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO THE
GALILEE
there
Him
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING ye-shall-be-seeing
kaqws kathOs
Adv
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye efugon pheugO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
16:8 kai exelqousai

kai
Conj
exerchomai
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar autas tromos gar autos tromos

Conj pp Acc Pl f n_ Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-FLED
FROM THE
memorial-vault it-HAD tomb eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
for
them
TREMBLing
kai ekstasis kai ekstasis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kai oudeni kai oudeis

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
efobounto phobeO
gar gar
Conj
And they went out quickly, and fled from the sepulchre; for they trembled and were amazed: neither said they any thing to any [man]; for they were afraid.
AND
OUT-STANDing AND amazement anastas anistEmi

to-NOT-YET-ONE NOT-YET-ONE THEY-say to-anyone nothing de de

Conj
THEY-FEARED
for
16:9
prwi prOi
Adv
prwth prOtos
a_ Dat Sg f
sabbatou efanh sabbaton phainO

n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
maria maria
n_ Dat Sg f
UP-STANDing rising th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YET to-morning BEFORE-most OF-SABBATH in-the-morning to-first-day hs hos

pr Gen Sg f
He-APPEARed BEFORE-most to-MARY first
. Now when [Jesus] was risen early the first [day] of the week, he appeared first to Mary Magdalene, out of whom he had cast seven devils.
magdalhnh par magdalEnE para

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
ekbeblhkei ekballO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
epta hepta
ni numeral
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
MAGDALENE
BESIDE WHOM
He-HAD-OUT-CAST SEVEN he-had-cast-out tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
demons
16:10 ekeinh
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg f
poreuqeisa poreuomai
aphggeilen apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg

Prep pp Gen Sg m
genomenois ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Dat Pl m
10 [And] she went and told them that had been with him, as they mourned and wept.
that-one that-one(f) penqousin pentheO

BEING-GONE
FROM-MESSAGES to-THE-ones WITH Him reports to-the-ones
BECOMING
kai klaiousin kai klaiO

Conj vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
MOURNING ones-mourning
AND
LAMENTING
16:11 kakeinoi akousantes oti zh

kakeinos
pd Nom Pl m
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
hoti
Conj
zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai eqeaqh kai theaomai

up auths hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg f
hpisthsan apisteO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND-those
HEARing
that
He-IS-LIVING
AND
WAS-gazED by was-gazed-upon
her
UN-BELIEVE disbelieve en en
Prep
11 And they, when they had heard that he was alive, and had been seen of her, believed not.
16:12 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
peripatousin efanerwqh peripateO phaneroO

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
after
YET these to-TWO these-things morfh morphE

n_ Dat Sg f
OUT OF-them
ABOUT-TREADING ones-walking
He-WAS-made-APPEAR IN he-was-manifested
12 After that he appeared in another form unto two of them, as they walked, and went into the country.
etera heteros
a_ Dat Sg f
poreuomenois poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
DIFFERENT FORM
to-ones-GOING ones-going
INTO FIELD
16:13 kakeinoi apelqontes

kakeinos
pd Nom Pl m
aperchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
loipois oude loipon oude

a_ Dat Pl m Adv
ekeinois episteusan ekeinos pisteuO

pd Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
13 And they went and told [it] unto the residue: neither believed they them.
AND-those
FROM-COMING coming-away de de
Conj
FROM-MESSAGE to-THE report
rest rest(p)
NOT-YET to-those neither those endeka efanerwqh hendeka phaneroO

ni numeral vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
THEY-BELIEVE
16:14 usteron
husteron
Adv
anakeimenois anakeimai
autois tois autos ho

pp Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
subsequently
YET
to-UP-LYING to-lying-back-at-table apistian autwn apistia autos

them
to-THE
ONE-TEN eleven
He-WAS-made-APPEAR AND he-was-manifested qeasamenois theaomai

vp Aor midD Dat Pl m
wneidisen oneidizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kai sklhrokardian oti tois kai sklErokardia hoti ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl m
14 . Afterward he appeared unto the eleven as they sat at meat, and upbraided them with their unbelief and hardness of heart, because they believed not them which had seen him after he was risen.
He-REPROACHES THE
UN-BELIEF unbelief
WH
OF-them
WH
AND
HARD-HEART hardheartedness ouk ou

Part Neg
that
to-THE the
ones-gazing ones-gazing-on
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eghgermenon egeirO
ek nekrwn
episteusan pisteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
Him
HAVING-been-ROUSED
NOT
THEY-BELIEVE
AV
Mark 16
16:15 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
apanta khruxate hapas kErussO

a_ Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
He-said
to-them
BEING-GONE
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
ALL(emph.)
PROCLAIM herald-ye !
15 And he said unto them, Go ye into all the world, and preach the gospel to every creature.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ktisei ktisis
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
WELL-MESSAGE to-EVERY THE to-entire pisteusas pisteuO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
CREATION
16:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai baptisqeis kai baptizO

swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THE
one-BELIEVing one-believing
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED THE
YET
16 He that believeth and is baptized shall be saved; but he that believeth not shall be damned.
apisthsas apisteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
katakriqhsetai katakrinO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
one-UN-BELIEVing one-disbelieving
SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-JUDGED shall-be-being-condemned de de
Conj
16:17 shmeia
sEmeion
n_ Nom Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteusasin pisteuO
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m
WH
akolouqhsei tauta
WH
NA
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
SIGNS
NA
YET to-THE
ones-BELIEVing ones-believing en en
Prep
these
17 And these signs shall follow them that believe; In my name shall they cast out devils; they shall speak with new tongues;
parakolouqhsei parakoloutheO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

daimonia ekbalousin daimonion ekballO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-followING shall-be-fully-following
IN
THE
NAME
NA
OF-ME
demons
THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-CASTING they-shall-be-casting-out
glwssais lalhsousin glOssa laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kainais kainos
a_ Dat Pl f
to-TONGUES to-languages
THEY-SHALL-BE-TALKING they-shall-be-speaking tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
NEW
16:18
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
cersin cheir
n_ Dat Pl f
ofeis ophis
n_ Acc Pl m
arousin airO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kan kan
Cond Con
qanasimon ti thanasimon tis

a_ Acc Sg n px Acc Sg n
AND
IN
THE
HANDS
serpents
THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING AND-[IF]-EVER DEATHly they-shall-be-picking-up and-if-ever deadly epi arrwstous epi arrhOstos
Prep a_ Acc Pl m
ANY anything ceiras cheir

n_ Acc Pl f
18 They shall take up serpents; and if they drink any deadly thing, it shall not hurt them; they shall lay hands on the sick, and they shall recover.
piwsin pinO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
autous blayh autos blaptO

pp Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THEY-MAY-BE-DRINKING NOT
NO
them
it-SHOULD-BE-HARMING ON
UN-FARE-WELLS HANDS ones-ailing
epiqhsousin epitithEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kai kalws exousin kai kalOs echO

THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-PLACING AND they-shall-be-placing-on
IDEALly
THEY-SHALL-BE-HAVING
WH NA
16:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ihsous
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
meta to meta ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
THE
INDEED THEN Master Lord eis eis

Prep
JESUS
after
THE
TO-TALK to-speak qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
19 . So then after the Lord had spoken unto them, he was received up into heaven, and sat on the right hand of God.
autois anelhmfqh autos analambanO

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon kai ekaqisen ek ouranos kai kathizO ek

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
dexiwn tou dexios ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
to-them
WAS-UP-GOTTEN INTO THE was-taken-up exelqontes exerchomai

heaven
AND
is-seated
OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p) kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
16:20 ekeinoi de
ekeinos
pd Nom Pl m
de
Conj
ekhruxan pantacou tou kErussO pantachou ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Gen Sg m
sunergountos sunergeO
those
YET OUT-COMING coming-away logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
PROCLAIM herald dia dia

Prep
EVERY-SOIL everywhere twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE the
Master Lord
TOGETHER-ACTING working-together
20 And they went forth, and preached every where, the Lord working with [them], and confirming the word with signs following. Amen.
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
bebaiountos bebaioO
epakolouqountwn shmeiwn epakoloutheO sEmeion

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
AND
THE
saying word de de
Conj
OF-confirmING confirming
THRU THE through
ON-followING following-up petron petros

n_ Acc Sg m
SIGNS
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
parhggelmena tois paraggellO ho

vp Perf Pas Acc Pl n t_ Dat Pl m
peri ton peri ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
suntomws exhggeilan suntomOs exaggellO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AV
Mark 16 - Luke 1
meta de meta de
Prep Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apo anatolhs kai acri dusews apo anatolE kai achri dusis
Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg m
exapesteilen di exapostellO dia

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai afqarton khrugma ths kai aphthartos kErugma ho

Conj a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
aiwniou aiOnios
a_ Gen Sg f
WH
NA
NA
swthrias
swthrias amhn sOtEria amEn

n_ Gen Sg f Hebrew
AV
Luke 1
Luke
1:1 epeidhper
epeidEper
Conj
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
epeceirhsan anataxasqai dihghsin peri epicheireO anatassomai diEgEsis peri

vi Aor Act 3 Pl vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg f Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
ON-IF-BIND-EVEN MANY since-in-fact-even peplhroforhmenwn plErophoreO

vp Perf Pas Gen Pl n
ON-HAND take-in-hand en en
Prep
TO-UP-SET to-compose pragmatwn pragma

n_ Gen Pl n
relation narrative
ABOUT OF-THE concerning the
. Forasmuch as many have taken in hand to set forth in order a declaration of those things which are most surely believed among us,
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
HAVING-been-FULL-CARRIED IN US having-been-fully-assured among
PRACTISES matters oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
1:2 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
paredosan hmin paradidOmi hemeis

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Pl
ap apo
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
autoptai autoptEs
a_ Nom Pl m
kai uphretai kai hupEretEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
according-AS BESIDE-GIVE give-over genomenoi ginomai

vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m
to-US
THE-ones the-ones
SAME-VIEWERS AND eyewitnesses
Even as they delivered them unto us, which from the beginning were eyewitnesses, and ministers of the word;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
BECOMING
OF-THE
saying word parhkolouqhkoti anwqen parakoloutheO anOthen

vp Perf Act Dat Sg m Adv
1:3 edoxen
dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kamoi kagO
pp 1 Dat Sg Con
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
akribws kaqexhs akribOs kathexEs

Adv Adv
it-SEEMS
AND-to-ME also-to-me
HAVING-BESIDE-followED having-fully-followed qeofile theophilos

n_ Voc Sg m
UP-PLACE to-ALL from-the-very-first all
EXACTly accurately
according-to-next consecutively
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
grayai graphO
vn Aor Act
kratiste kratistos
a_ Voc Sg m
It seemed good to me also, having had perfect understanding of all things from the very first, to write unto thee in order, most excellent Theophilus,
to-YOU
TO-WRITE MOST-HOLDing ! Theophilus ! (God-FOND) most-mighty ! Theophilus ! epignws epiginOskO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
1:4 ina
hina
Conj
peri peri
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
kathchqhs katEcheO
vi Aor Pas 2 Sg
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
asfaleian asphaleia
n_ Acc Sg f
THAT YOU-MAY-BE-ON-KNOWING ABOUT WHICH you-may-be-recognizing concerning
YOU-WERE-instructED sayings words
THE
UN-TOTTER certainty
That thou mightest know the certainty of those things, wherein thou hast been instructed. . There was in the days of Herod, the king of Judaea, a certain priest named Zacharias, of the course of Abia: and his wife [was] of the daughters of Aaron, and her name [was] Elisabeth.
1:5 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais hrwdou basilews ths hEmera hErOdEs basileus ho

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias iereus ioudaia hiereus

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m
it-BECAME IN there-came-to-be tis tis

px Nom Sg m
THE
DAYS
OF-HEROD
KING
OF-THE
JUDEA
SACRED-one priest ek ek
Prep
onomati zacarias ex onoma zacharias ek

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m Prep
efhmerias abia ephEmeria abia

n_ Gen Sg f ni proper
kai gunh kai gunE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ANY certain
to-NAME
ZACHARIAS
OUT OF-ON-DAY of-routine onoma onoma

n_ Nom Sg n
ABIA of-Abia auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
AND
WOMAN wife
to-him
OUT OF-THE
qugaterwn aarwn thugatEr aarOn

n_ Gen Pl f ni proper
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
elisabet elisabet
ni proper
DAUGHTERS
of-AARON AND of-Aaron de de

Conj
THE
NAME
OF-her
ELIZABETH
1:6 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
dikaioi amfoteroi enantion tou dikaios amphoteroi enantion ho

a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
poreuomenoi poreuomai
en en
Prep
THEY-WERE YET JUST
both
IN-INSTEAD in-front-of
OF-THE the
God
GOING
IN
And they were both righteous before God, walking in all the commandments and ordinances of the Lord blameless.
pasais tais pas ho

a_ Dat Pl f t_ Dat Pl f
entolais kai dikaiwmasin tou entolE kai dikaiOma ho

n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
amemptoi amemptos
a_ Nom Pl m
ALL
THE
directions precepts hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
JUST-effects just-statutes
OF-THE
Master Lord hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
UN-BLAMEable blameless
WH
1:7 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
autois teknon autos teknon

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg n
kaqoti kathoti
Adv
NA
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
NOT
WAS
to-them
offspring child
DOWN-that WAS forasmuch-as en en

Prep
THE
And they had no child, because that Elisabeth was barren, and they both were [now] well stricken in years.
elisabet steira elisabet steiros

ni proper n_ Nom Sg f
kai amfoteroi probebhkotes kai amphoteroi probainO

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais autwn hEmera autos

ELIZABETH
STERILE barren
AND
both
HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN having-advanced
THE
DAYS
OF-them
AV
Luke 1
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
WERE
1:8 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ierateuein hierateuO
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
taxei taxis
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
YET IN
THE
TO-BE-SACREDING him to-be-doing-priestly-duties tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
SETTing order
OF-THE
And it came to pass, that while he executed the priest's office before God in the order of his course,
efhmerias autou ephEmeria autos

enanti enanti
Adv
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ON-DAY routine
OF-him
IN-INSTEAD OF-THE in-front-of the eqos ethos

n_ Acc Sg n
God
1:9 kata
kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ierateias elacen hierateia lagchanO

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qumiasai thumiaO
vn Aor Act
according-to THE
CUSTOM
OF-THE
SACREDing priestly-office tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
he-CHANCED-UPON OF-THE he-chanced on
TO-SACRIFICE-(incense) to-burn-incense
According to the custom of the priest's office, his lot was to burn incense when he went into the temple of the Lord.
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
TEMPLE
OF-THE
Master Lord tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
1:10 kai pan

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
proseucomenon proseuchomai
exw exO
Adv
10 And the whole multitude of the people were praying without at the time of incense.
AND
EVERY entire wra hOra

n_ Dat Sg f
THE
multitude
WAS
OF-THE
PEOPLE
prayING
OUT outside
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qumiamatos thumiama
n_ Gen Sg n
to-THE
HOUR
OF-THE
incense
1:11 wfqh
optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
estws histEmi
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn tou dexios ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
WAS-VIEWED YET to-him there-was-seen qusiasthriou tou thusiastErion ho

OF-THE
11 And there appeared unto him an angel of the Lord standing on the right side of the altar of incense.
qumiamatos thumiama
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
incense
1:12 kai etaracqh

kai
Conj
tarassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
zacarias idwn zacharias eidO

n_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
kai fobos kai phobos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
epepesen ep epipiptO epi

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
12 And when Zacharias saw [him], he was troubled, and fear fell upon him.
AND
WAS-DISTURBED ZACHARIAS
PERCEIVING perceiving-it o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
FEAR
ON-FALLS falls-on fobou phobeO
ON
him
1:13 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
zacaria zacharias
n_ Voc Sg m
said
YET TOWARD him
THE
MESSENGER NO
BE-FEARING be-you-fearing ! gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
ZACHARIAS
dioti dioti
Conj
eishkousqh h eisakouO ho
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
dehsis deEsis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
elisabet elisabet
ni proper
13 But the angel said unto him, Fear not, Zacharias: for thy prayer is heard; and thy wife Elisabeth shall bear thee a son, and thou shalt call his name John.
THRU-that IS-INTO-HEARD because-that is-hearkened-to gennhsei gennaO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
petition
OF-YOU
AND
THE
WOMAN wife to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU
ELIZABETH
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai kaleseis kai kaleO

onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-generatING SON shall-be-bearing iwannhn iOannEs

n_ Acc Sg m
to-YOU
AND
NAME
OF-him
JOHN
1:14 kai estai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai agalliasis kai polloi kai agalliasis kai polus

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
genesei genesis
n_ Dat Sg f
14 And thou shalt have joy and gladness; and many shall rejoice at his birth.
AND
SHALL-BE JOY there-shall-be
to-YOU
AND
exulting exultation
AND
MANY
ON
THE
generating birth
AV
Luke 1
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
carhsontai chairO
vi 2Fut pasD 3 Pl
OF-him
SHALL-BE-JOYING shall-be-rejoicing gar megas gar mega

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
1:15 estai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
enwpion enOpion
Adv
NA
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai oinon kai oinos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
he-SHALL-BE for
GREAT
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-THE the
Master Lord
AND
WINE
AND
sikera sikera
ni other
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
pih pinO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai pneumatos agiou kai pneuma hagios

Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
plhsqhsetai plEthO (pimplEmi)

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
eti eti
Adv
15 For he shall be great in the sight of the Lord, and shall drink neither wine nor strong drink; and he shall be filled with the Holy Ghost, even from his mother's womb.
INTOXICANT NOT
NO
he-MAY-BE-DRINKING AND
OF-spirit
HOLY
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED STILL
ek ek
Prep

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OUT OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER OF-him of-womb
1:16 kai pollous twn

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Acc Pl m
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
epistreyei epistrephO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
epi kurion epi kurios

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
16 And many of the children of Israel shall he turn to the Lord their God.
AND
MANY
OF-THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL he-SHALL-BE-ON-TURNING ON of-Israel he-shall-be-turning-back
Master Lord
THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
God
OF-them
1:17 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
proeleusetai proerchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
enwpion autou enOpion autos

Adv pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
pneumati kai dunamei pneuma kai dunamis

n_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg f
AND
he
SHALL-BE-BEFORE-COMING IN-VIEW shall-be-coming-before in-sight-of
OF-Him him
IN
spirit
AND
ABILITY power fronhsei phronEsis

n_ Dat Sg f
hliou Elias
n_ Gen Sg m
epistreyai kardias paterwn epistrephO kardia patEr

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m
epi tekna epi teknon

Prep n_ Acc Pl n
kai apeiqeis kai apeithEs

Conj a_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
17 And he shall go before him in the spirit and power of Elias, to turn the hearts of the fathers to the children, and the disobedient to the wisdom of the just; to make ready a people prepared for the Lord.
OF-ELIAS of-Elijah dikaiwn dikaios

a_ Gen Pl m
TO-ON-TURN to-turn-back etoimasai hetoimazO

vn Aor Act
HEARTS
OF-FATHERS ON
offsprings children
AND
UN-PERSUADable IN ones-stubborn
DISPOSition prudence
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
kateskeuasmenon kataskeuazO
OF-JUST-ones TO-make-READY to-Master of-just-ones to-Lord
PEOPLE
HAVING-been-constructED having-been-formed aggelon aggelos

n_ Acc Sg m
1:18 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
zacarias pros zacharias pros

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kata kata
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
gnwsomai ginOskO
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
AND
said
ZACHARIAS
TOWARD THE
MESSENGER according-to ANY what ? gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-KNOWING
18 And Zacharias said unto the angel, Whereby shall I know this? for I am an old man, and my wife well stricken in years.
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar eimi gar eimi

presbuths kai h presbutEs kai ho

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
this
for
AM
SENIOR aged tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
AND
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-ME
probebhkuia probainO
en en
Prep
hmerais auths hEmera autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg f
HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN having-advanced
THE
DAYS
OF-her
1:19 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AND
answerING
THE
MESSENGER said
to-him
AM
gabrihl o gabriEl ho
enwpion tou enOpion ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai apestalhn kai apostellO

Conj vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg
19 And the angel answering said unto him, I am Gabriel, that stand in the presence of God; and am sent to speak unto thee, and to shew thee these glad tidings.
GABRIEL
THE
one-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore one-standing-by se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-THE the soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
God
AND
I-WAS-commissionED I-was-dispatched
lalhsai pros laleO pros

vn Aor Act Prep
kai euaggelisasqai kai euaggelizO

Conj vn Aor Mid
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
TO-TALK to-speak
TOWARD YOU
AND
TO-WELL-MESSAGize to-YOU to-bring-the-well-message
these of-these-things
AV
Luke 1
1:20 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
esh eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
siwpwn siOpaO
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
dunamenos dunamai
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
AND
BE-PERCEIVING YOU-SHALL-BE beING-SILENT lo ! one-being-silent hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
NO
beING-ABLE
TO-TALK to-speak episteusas pisteuO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg
acri hs achri hos

Prep pr Gen Sg f
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
anq anti
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
20 And, behold, thou shalt be dumb, and not able to speak, until the day that these things shall be performed, because thou believest not my words, which shall be fulfilled in their season.
UNTIL WHICH
DAY
MAY-BE-BECOMING these INSTEAD OF-WHICH NOT may-be-occurring these-things corresponding-to which(p) oitines plhrwqhsontai hostis plEroO
pr Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
YOU-BELIEVE
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
logois mou logos egO

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
to-THE the
sayings words
OF-ME
WHO-ANY which-any laos laos
SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED INTO THE shall-be-being-fulfilled prosdokwn prosdokaO

SEASON
OF-them
1:21 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
zacarian kai eqaumazon zacharias kai thaumazO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
n_ Nom Sg m
21 And the people waited for Zacharias, and marvelled that he tarried so long in the temple.
AND
WAS
THE
PEOPLE
TOWARD-SEEMING THE hoping-for naw naos

n_ Dat Sg m
ZACHARIAS
AND
THEY-MARVELED
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cronizein chronizO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IN
THE
TO-BE-delayING IN
THE
TEMPLE
him
1:22 exelqwn
exerchomai
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
edunato dunamai
lalhsai autois kai epegnwsan laleO autos kai epiginOskO

vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
YET NOT
he-was-ABLE
TO-TALK to-speak
to-them
AND
THEY-ON-KNOW that they-recognize dianeuwn dianeuO

optasian ewraken optasia horaO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Act 3 Sg Att
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
naw naos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
22 And when he came out, he could not speak unto them: and they perceived that he had seen a vision in the temple: for he beckoned unto them, and remained speechless.
VIEW apparition
he-HAS-SEEN
IN
THE
TEMPLE
AND
he
WAS
THRU-NODDING motioning
autois kai diemenen autos kai diamenO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
kwfos kOphos
a_ Nom Sg m
to-them
AND
THRU-REMAINED MUTE continued ws eplhsqhsan ai hOs plEthO (pimplEmi) ho

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
1:23 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
leitourgias autou leitourgia autos

AND
it-BECAME it-occurred eis eis

Prep
AS
ARE-FILLED are-fulfilled oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
officiation ministry
OF-him
23 And it came to pass, that, as soon as the days of his ministration were accomplished, he departed to his own house.
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
he-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away
HOME
OF-him
1:24 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tautas tas houtos ho

pd Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras sunelaben hEmera sullambanO

n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
elisabet h elisabet ho
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
24 And after those days his wife Elisabeth conceived, and hid herself five months, saying,
after
YET these
THE
DAYS
TOGETHER-GOT ELIZABETH conceived
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
kai periekruben eauthn kai perikruptO heautou

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg f
mhnas mEn
n_ Acc Pl m
pente legousa pente legO

ni numeral vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
AND
ABOUT-HID kept-close
herself
MONTHS
FIVE
sayING
1:25 oti outws moi

hoti
Conj
houtOs
Adv
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pepoihken kurios poieO kurios

vi Perf Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
hmerais ais hEmera hos

n_ Dat Pl f pr Dat Pl f
epeiden epeidon
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
that
thus
to-ME
HAS-DONE
Master Lord en en
Prep
IN
DAYS
to-WHICH He-ON-PERCEIVED he-took-notice
25 Thus hath the Lord dealt with me in the days wherein he looked on [me], to take away my reproach among men.
afelein aphaireO
vn 2Aor Act
oneidos mou oneidos egO

anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
TO-BE-FROM-LIFTING REPROACH OF-ME to-be-eliminating
IN humans among ektw hektos

a_ Dat Sg m
1:26 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
mhni mEn
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
apestalh apostellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
gabrihl gabriEl
ni proper
IN
YET THE
MONTH
THE
SIXth
WAS-commissioned THE was-dispatched
MESSENGER GABRIEL
26 . And in the sixth month the angel Gabriel was sent from God unto a city of Galilee, named Nazareth,
AV
Luke 1
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias h galilaia hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Dat Sg f
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
nazareq nazareth
ni proper
FROM THE
God
INTO city
OF-THE
GALILEE
to-WHICH NAME
NAZARETH
1:27 pros
pros
Prep
parqenon emnhsteumenhn parthenos mnEsteuO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
iwshf ex iOsEph ek
ni proper Prep
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD virgin
HAVING-been-espousED to-MAN
to-WHOM
NAME
JOSEPH
OUT OF-HOME of-house
27 To a virgin espoused to a man whose name was Joseph, of the house of David; and the virgin's name [was] Mary.
dauid kai to dauid kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parqenou mariam parthenos maria

of-DAVID AND of-David
THE
NAME
OF-THE
virgin
MARIAM Mary caire chairO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
1:28 kai eiselqwn

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
pros pros
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kecaritwmenh charitoO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
INTO-COMING entering meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
TOWARD her
he-said
BE-JOYING HAVING-been-gracED THE be-you-rejoicing ! having-been-favored-one
28 And the angel came in unto her, and said, Hail, [thou that art] highly favoured, the Lord [is] with thee: blessed [art] thou among women.
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
Master Lord
WITH
YOU
1:29 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
dietaracqh diatarassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai dielogizeto kai dialogizomai

potapos potapos
a_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET ON
THE
saying word
she-WAS-THRU-DISTURBED AND she-was-agitated
THRU-accountED reasoned
?-where-FROM what-manner-of
29 And when she saw [him], she was troubled at his saying, and cast in her mind what manner of salutation this should be.
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aspasmos outos aspasmos houtos

MAY-BE
THE
greeting salutation o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
this
1:30 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
mariam eures maria heuriskO

30 And the angel said unto her, Fear not, Mary: for thou hast found favour with God.
AND
said
THE
MESSENGER to-her
NO
MARIAM Mary
YOU-FOUND
gar carin gar charis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
for
grace favor
BESIDE THE
God
1:31 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
sullhmyh sullambanO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
en en
Prep
gastri kai texh gastEr kai tiktO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Fut midD 2 Sg
AND
BE-PERCEIVING YOU-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING IN lo ! you-shall-be-conceiving kai kaleseis kai kaleO

BELLY
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-BRINGING-FORTH shall-be-bringing-forth
31 And, behold, thou shalt conceive in thy womb, and bring forth a son, and shalt call his name JESUS.
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
SON
AND
NAME
OF-Him
JESUS
1:32 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
kai uios kai huios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
uyistou klhqhsetai hupsistos kaleO

a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
this-One this-one dwsei didOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE
GREAT
AND
SON
OF-HIGHest of-Most-High qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED AND he-shall-be-being-called qronon thronos

n_ Acc Sg m
32 He shall be great, and shall be called the Son of the Highest: and the Lord God shall give unto him the throne of his father David:
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dauid tou dauid ho

SHALL-BE-GIVING to-Him him patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
Master Lord
THE
God
THE
THRONE
of-DAVID THE of-David
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
FATHER
OF-Him
1:33 kai basileusei

kai
Conj
basileuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas kai ths aiOn kai ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
AND
He-SHALL-BE-reignING ON
THE
HOME house
of-JACOB INTO THE of-Jacob
eons
AND
OF-THE
33 And he shall reign over the house of Jacob for ever; and of his kingdom there shall be no end.
AV
Luke 1
basileias autou basileia autos

ouk ou
Part Neg
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
KINGdom
OF-Him
NOT
SHALL-BE FINISH there-shall-be consummation ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
1:34 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
mariam pros maria pros

ni proper Prep
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
pws estai pOs eimi

Adv Int vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
epei epei
Conj
34 Then said Mary unto the angel, How shall this be, seeing I know not a man?
said
YET MARIAM Mary ou ou

Part Neg
TOWARD THE
MESSENGER how how ?
SHALL-BE
this
since
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ginwskw ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
MAN
NOT
I-AM-KNOWING
1:35 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
AND
answerING
THE
MESSENGER said
to-her
spirit
HOLY
epeleusetai eperchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
epi se epi su
Prep pp 2 Acc Sg
kai dunamis uyistou episkiasei kai dunamis hupsistos episkiazO

Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
35 And the angel answered and said unto her, The Holy Ghost shall come upon thee, and the power of the Highest shall overshadow thee: therefore also that holy thing which shall be born of thee shall be called the Son of God.
SHALL-BE-ON-COMING ON shall-be-coming-on dio dio

Conj
YOU
AND
ABILITY power
OF-HIGHest of-Most-High
SHALL-BE-ON-SHADING to-YOU shall-be-overshadowing you uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
gennwmenon gennaO
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THRU-WHICH AND wherefore also
THE
One-beING-generatED HOLY being-generated holy-thing elisabet h elisabet ho

SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED SON
OF-God
1:36 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
suggenis suggenEs
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai auth kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING ELIZABETH lo ! uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
TOGETHER-generated OF-YOU relative auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
AND also
she
36 And, behold, thy cousin Elisabeth, she hath also conceived a son in her old age: and this is the sixth month with her, who was called barren.
suneilhfen sullambanO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
ghrei gEras
n_ Dat Sg n
kai outos kai houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
mhn mEn
n_ Nom Sg m
ektos hektos
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HAS-TOGETHER-GOT SON has-conceived auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
IN
VETERAN OF-her decrepitude steira steiros

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
this
MONTH
SIXth
IS
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kaloumenh kaleO
vp Pres Pas Dat Sg f
to-her
THE
one-beING-CALLED STERILE being-called barren ouk ou

Part Neg
1:37 oti
hoti
Conj
adunathsei adunateO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
37 For with God nothing shall be impossible.
that NOT seeing-that not
SHALL-BE-UN-ABLE BESIDE THE shall-be-impossible mariam idou maria idou

ni proper vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
God
EVERY at-all kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
declaration
1:38 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doulh doulE
n_ Nom Sg f
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
said
YET MARIAM Mary to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
SLAVE(f)
OF-Master of-Lord auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING to-ME
38 And Mary said, Behold the handmaid of the Lord; be it unto me according to thy word. And the angel departed from her.
kata kata
Prep
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n

ap apo
Prep
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
according-to THE
declaration OF-YOU
AND
FROM-CAME came-away
FROM her
THE
MESSENGER
1:39 anastasa
anistEmi
de de
Conj
mariam en maria en
ni proper Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tautais eporeuqh hEmera houtos poreuomai

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
UP-STANDing rising oreinhn oreinos

a_ Acc Sg f
YET MARIAM Mary
IN
THE
DAYS
these
WAS-GONE went
INTO THE
39 . And Mary arose in those days, and went into the hill country with haste, into a city of Juda;
meta spoudhs eis meta spoudE eis

polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
mountainous WITH mountainous-region
DILIGENCE
INTO city
of-JUDA of-Judah zacariou zacharias

n_ Gen Sg m
1:40 kai eishlqen

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai hspasato thn kai aspazomai ho

Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
elisabet elisabet
ni proper
40 And entered into the house of Zacharias, and saluted Elisabeth.
AND
she-INTO-CAME INTO THE she-entered
HOME house
OF-ZACHARIAS AND
greets salutes
THE
ELIZABETH
AV
Luke 1
1:41 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ws hkousen hOs akouO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aspasmon ths aspasmos ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
marias maria
n_ Gen Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elisabet elisabet
ni proper
AND
AS
HEARS
THE
greeting salutation
OF-THE
MARY
THE
ELIZABETH
eskirthsen to skirtaO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
brefos brephos
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
koilia auths koilia autos

n_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg f
kai eplhsqh pneumatos kai plEthO (pimplEmi) pneuma

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg n
41 And it came to pass, that, when Elisabeth heard the salutation of Mary, the babe leaped in her womb; and Elisabeth was filled with the Holy Ghost:
JUMPS
THE
BABE
IN
THE
CAVITY womb
OF-her
AND
IS-FILLED
OF-spirit
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elisabet elisabet
ni proper
HOLY
THE
ELIZABETH
1:42 kai anefwnhsen kraugh megalh kai eipen

kai
Conj
anaphOneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kraugE
n_ Dat Sg f
mega
a_ Dat Sg f
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
euloghmenh eulogeO
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
AND
she-UP-SOUNDS she-shouts-out
CRY to-cry
GREAT loud o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
beING-blessED
YOU
IN among
42 And she spake out with a loud voice, and said, Blessed [art] thou among women, and blessed [is] the fruit of thy womb.
gunaixin kai euloghmenos gunE kai eulogeO

n_ Dat Pl f Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
karpos karpos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
koilias sou koilia su

WOMEN
AND
beING-blessED
THE
FRUIT
OF-THE
CAVITY womb h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-YOU
1:43 kai poqen

kai
Conj
pothen
Adv Int
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
ina hina
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
43 And whence [is] this to me, that the mother of my Lord should come to me?
AND
?-WHICH-PLACE to-ME whence ? mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
this
THAT MAY-BE-COMING THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
Master Lord
OF-ME
TOWARD ME
1:44 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gar ws egeneto gar hOs ginomai

Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aspasmou sou aspasmos su

eis eis
Prep
BE-PERCEIVING for lo ! ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AS
BECAME
THE
SOUND
OF-THE
greeting salutation brefos brephos

n_ Nom Sg n
OF-YOU
INTO
44 For, lo, as soon as the voice of thy salutation sounded in mine ears, the babe leaped in my womb for joy.
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eskirthsen en skirtaO en
agalliasei to agalliasis ho
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
koilia koilia
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
EARS
OF-ME
JUMPS
IN
exulting exultation
THE
BABE
IN
THE
CAVITY womb
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
1:45 kai makaria h

kai
Conj
makarios
a_ Nom Sg f
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pisteusasa oti pisteuO hoti

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
teleiwsis tois teleiOsis ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Pl n
AND
HAPPY happy-is
THE
one-BELIEVing one-believing(f) para para

Prep
that SHALL-BE maturing seeing-that there-shall-be
to-THE to-the-things
45 And blessed [is] she that believed: for there shall be a performance of those things which were told her from the Lord.
lelalhmenois laleO
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-TALKED to-her having-been-spoken
BESIDE Master Lord yuch psuchE

n_ Nom Sg f
1:46 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mariam megalunei h maria megalunO ho

ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
46 And Mary said, My soul doth magnify the Lord,
AND
said
MARIAM Mary
IS-magnifyING
THE
soul
OF-ME
THE
Master Lord tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
1:47 kai hgalliasen to

kai
Conj
agalliaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
swthri sOtEr
n_ Dat Sg m
47 And my spirit hath rejoiced in God my Saviour.
AND
exults
THE
spirit
OF-ME
ON
THE
God
THE
SAViour
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
AV
Luke 1
1:48 oti epebleyen epi thn

hoti
Conj
epiblepO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tapeinwsin ths tapeinOsis ho

doulhs autou doulE autos

idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gar gar
Conj
that
He-ON-looks he-looks-on
ON
THE
LOWness humiliation me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-THE
SLAVE(f)
OF-Him
BE-PERCEIVING for lo !
48 For he hath regarded the low estate of his handmaiden: for, behold, from henceforth all generations shall call me blessed.
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun makariousin nun makarizO

Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
geneai genea
n_ Nom Pl f
FROM THE
NOW SHALL-BE-HAPPYizING ME shall-be-counting-happy megala mega

a_ Acc Pl n
ALL
THE
generations
1:49 oti epoihsen moi

hoti
Conj
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dunatos kai agion dunatos kai hagios

a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
that
DOES
to-ME
GREAT(p) THE great-things
49 For he that is mighty hath done to me great things; and holy [is] his name.
ABLE-One Powerful-One
AND
HOLY
THE
NAME
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
1:50 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eleos eleos
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
geneas genea
n_ Acc Pl f
kai geneas kai genea

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
foboumenois phobeO
50 And his mercy [is] on them that fear him from generation to generation.
AND
THE
MERCY
OF-Him
INTO generations AND
generations to-THE
ones-FEARING ones-fearing
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
1:51 epoihsen kratos en

poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kratos
n_ Acc Sg n
en
Prep
bracioni autou brachiOn autos

dieskorpisen diaskorpizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
uperhfanous dianoia huperEphanos dianoia

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg f
He-DOES
HOLDing mightily
IN
(upper)-arm upper-arm
OF-Him
He-THRU-SCATTERS OVER-APPEARing he-scatters proud-ones
to-THRU-MIND to-comprehension
51 He hath shewed strength with his arm; he hath scattered the proud in the imagination of their hearts.

OF-HEART
OF-them
1:52 kaqeilen
kathaireO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dunastas apo dunastEs apo

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
qronwn kai uywsen thronos kai hupsoO

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tapeinous tapeinos
a_ Acc Pl m
52 He hath put down the mighty from [their] seats, and exalted them of low degree.
He-DOWN-LIFTS ABLErs he-pulls-down potentates
FROM THRONES
AND
HEIGHTens exalts
LOW-ones humble-ones kenous kenos

a_ Acc Pl m
53 He hath filled the hungry with good things; and the rich he hath sent empty away.
1:53 peinwntas
peinaO
eneplhsen agaqwn emplEmi agathos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl m
kai ploutountas exapesteilen kai plouteO exapostellO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
HUNGERING-ones He-IN-FILLS ones-hungering he-fills
OF-GOODS AND of-good-things autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ones-beING-RICH ones-being-rich mnhsqhnai mnaomai

vn Aor Pas
He-OUT-FROM-PUTS EMPTY he-sends-away empty(p) eleous eleos

n_ Gen Sg n
54 He hath holpen his servant Israel, in remembrance of [his] mercy;
1:54 antelabeto israhl paidos

antilambanomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
israEl
ni proper
pais
n_ Gen Sg m
He-supportED
ISRAEL
boy
OF-Him
TO-BE-REMINDED OF-MERCY
1:55 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
elalhsen pros laleO pros

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras hmwn patEr hemeis

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
55 As he spake to our fathers, to Abraham, and to his seed for ever.
according-AS He-TALKS he-speaks spermati autou sperma autos

TOWARD THE
FATHERS
OF-US
to-THE
ABRAHAM AND
to-THE
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
seed
OF-him
INTO THE
eon
1:56 emeinen
menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
mariam sun maria sun

ni proper Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ws hOs
Adv
mhnas mEn
n_ Acc Pl m
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
kai upestreyen eis kai hupostrephO eis

56 And Mary abode with her about three months, and returned to her own house.
REMAINS
YET MARIAM Mary auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
TOGETHER to-her togetherwith her
AS MONTHS about
THREE
AND
reTURNS
INTO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
HOME
OF-her
AV
Luke 1
1:57 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
elisabet eplhsqh o elisabet plEthO (pimplEmi) ho

ni proper vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
cronos chronos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tekein tiktO
vn 2Aor Act
to-THE
YET ELIZABETH
IS-FILLED is-fulfilled
THE
TIME
OF-THE
TO-BE-BRINGING-FORTH
57 . Now Elisabeth's full time came that she should be delivered; and she brought forth a son.
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai egennhsen uion kai gennaO huios

her
AND
she-generatES she-bears
SON
1:58 kai hkousan oi

kai
Conj
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
perioikoi perioikos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
suggeneis suggenEs
a_ Nom Pl m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
oti hoti
Conj
AND
HEAR
THE
ABOUT-HOMES AND homes-about to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THE
TOGETHER-generateds OF-her relatives met auths meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg f
that
58 And her neighbours and her cousins heard how the Lord had shewed great mercy upon her; and they rejoiced with her.
emegalunen kurios megalunO kurios

vi impf Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai sunecairon kai sugchairO

magnifiES
Master Lord
THE
MERCY
OF-Him
WITH her
AND
THEY-TOGETHER-JOYED they-rejoiced-togetherwith
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
to-her her
1:59 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ogdoh ogdoos
a_ Dat Sg f
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
peritemein peritemnO
vn 2Aor Act
AND
BECAME it-occurred
IN
THE
DAY
THE
EIGHTh
THEY-CAME
TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING to-be-circumcising patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
59 And it came to pass, that on the eighth day they came to circumcise the child; and they called him Zacharias, after the name of his father.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion kai ekaloun paidion kai kaleO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
onomati tou onoma ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
little-boy
AND
THEY-CALLED him ithim
ON
THE
NAME
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-him
zacarian zacharias
n_ Acc Sg m
ZACHARIAS
1:60 kai apokriqeisa

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
alla alla
Conj
AND
answerING
THE
MOTHER
OF-him
said
NOT(emph.) but
60 And his mother answered and said, Not [so]; but he shall be called John.
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED JOHN
1:61 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
suggeneias suggeneia
n_ Gen Sg f
61 And they said unto her, There is none of thy kindred that is called by this name.
AND
THEY-say
TOWARD her
that
NOT-YET-ONE IS not-one there-is onomati toutw onoma houtos

n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n
OUT OF-THE
TOGETHER-generated relationship
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kaleitai kaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
OF-YOU
WHO
IS-beING-CALLED to-THE
NAME
this
1:62 eneneuon
enneuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
an an
Part
qeloi thelO
vo Pres Act 3 Sg
62 And they made signs to his father, how he would have him called.
THEY-IN-NODDED YET to-THE they-nodded kaleisqai kaleO

vn Pres Pas
FATHER
OF-him
THE
ANY what ?
EVER he-MAY-BE-WILLING
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
TO-BE-beING-CALLED it ithim
1:63 kai aithsas

kai
Conj
aiteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
pinakidion egrayen pinakidion graphO

legwn legO
iwannhs estin iOannEs eimi

onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
REQUESTing
tablet writing-tablet
he-WRITES
sayING
JOHN
IS
NAME
63 And he asked for a writing table, and wrote, saying, His name is John. And they marvelled all.
AV
Luke 1
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai eqaumasan pantes kai thaumazO pas

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
OF-him
AND
THEY-MARVEL
ALL
1:64 anewcqh
anoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
paracrhma kai h parachrEma kai ho

Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f
glwssa glOssa
n_ Nom Sg f
WAS-UP-OPENED YET THE was-opened autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
MOUTH
OF-him
instantly
AND
THE
TONGUE
64 And his mouth was opened immediately, and his tongue [loosed], and he spake, and praised God.
kai elalei kai laleO

eulogwn eulogeO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-him
AND
he-TALKED he-spoke
blessING
THE
God
1:65 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi pantas fobos epi pas phobos

Prep a_ Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
perioikountas autous kai en perioikeO autos kai en

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m Conj Prep
AND
BECAME
ON
ALL
FEAR
THE-ones the
ABOUT-HOMING ones-homing-about
them
AND
IN
65 And fear came on all that dwelt round about them: and all these sayings were noised abroad throughout all the hill country of Judaea.
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oreinh oreinos
a_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias dielaleito ioudaia dialaleO

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Pas 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Nom Pl n
WHOLE
THE
mountainous OF-THE mountainous-region
JUDEA
was-THRU-TALKED ALL was-talked-about
THE
declarations
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
these
1:66 kai eqento

kai
Conj
tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akousantes en akouO en
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia autwn kardia autos

AND
PLACED pondered ti tis
ALL
THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
IN
THE
HEART
OF-them
66 And all they that heard [them] laid [them] up in their hearts, saying, What manner of child shall this be! And the hand of the Lord was with him.
legontes legO
ara ara
Part Int
paidion touto paidion houtos

n_ Nom Sg n pd Nom Sg n
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai gar ceir kai gar cheir

Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg f
pi Nom Sg n
sayING
ANY what ? hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
CONSEQUENTLY THE
little-boy
this
SHALL-BE
AND also
for
HAND
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
OF-Master of-Lord
WAS
WITH it him pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
1:67 kai zacarias o

kai
Conj
zacharias
n_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eplhsqh pneumatos agiou plEthO (pimplEmi) pneuma hagios

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
67 . And his father Zacharias was filled with the Holy Ghost, and prophesied, saying,
AND
ZACHARIAS
THE
FATHER
OF-it of-him
IS-FILLED
OF-spirit
HOLY
AND
eprofhteusen legwn prophEteuO legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERS prophesies
sayING
1:68 euloghtos kurios

eulogEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl oti epeskeyato kai israEl hoti episkeptomai kai

ni proper Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj
68 Blessed [be] the Lord God of Israel; for he hath visited and redeemed his people,
blessed
Master Lord
THE
God
OF-THE
ISRAEL
that
He-ON-NOTES he-visits
AND
epoihsen lutrwsin tw poieO lutrOsis ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
DOES makes
LOOSening redemption
to-THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
1:69 kai hgeiren

kai
Conj
egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
keras keras
n_ Acc Sg n
swthrias hmin sOtEria hemeis

n_ Gen Sg f pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
dauid paidos dauid pais

ni proper n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
69 And hath raised up an horn of salvation for us in the house of his servant David;
AND
ROUSES
horn
OF-SAVing of-salvation
to-US
IN
HOME house agiwn hagios

a_ Gen Pl m
of-DAVID boy of-David ap apo

Prep
OF-Him
1:70 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
elalhsen dia laleO dia

stomatos twn stoma ho

n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Pl m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
70 As he spake by the mouth of his holy prophets, which have been since the world began:
according-AS He-TALKS he-speaks
THRU MOUTH through
OF-THE
HOLY
FROM eon
AV
Luke 1
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
1:71 swthrian ex
sOtEria
n_ Acc Sg f
ek
Prep
ecqrwn echthros
a_ Gen Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
pantwn twn pas ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
misountwn miseO
71 That we should be saved from our enemies, and from the hand of all that hate us;
SAVing salvation hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
OUT OF-enemies OF-US
AND
OUT OF-HAND
OF-ALL
THE
ones-HATING ones-hating
US
1:72 poihsai eleos

poieO
vn Aor Act
eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m

kai mnhsqhnai kai mnaomai

Conj vn Aor Pas
diaqhkhs diathEkE
n_ Gen Sg f
72 To perform the mercy [promised] to our fathers, and to remember his holy covenant;
TO-DO
MERCY
WITH
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
AND
TO-BE-REMINDED OF-covenant
agias hagios
a_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HOLY
OF-Him
1:73 orkon
horkos
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
wmosen omnuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
abraam abraam
ni proper
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
dounai didOmi
vn 2Aor Act
73 The oath which he sware to our father Abraham,
OATH
WHICH
He-SWEARS TOWARD ABRAHAM THE
FATHER
OF-US
OF-THE
TO-GIVE to-grant
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to-US
1:74 afobws ek
aphobOs
Adv
ek
Prep
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
ecqrwn echthros
a_ Gen Pl m
rusqentas rhuomai
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl m
latreuein latreuO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
UN-FEARly fearlessly
OUT OF-HAND
OF-enemies BEING-rescuED
TO-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE to-Him to-be-offering-divine-service pasais tais pas ho

74 That he would grant unto us, that we being delivered out of the hand of our enemies might serve him without fear,
1:75 en
en
Prep
osiothti kai dikaiosunh enwpion autou hosiotEs kai dikaiosunE enOpion autos
n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Adv pp Gen Sg m
hmerais hmwn hEmera hemeis

75 In holiness and righteousness before him, all the days of our life.
IN
BENIGNity
AND
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-Him him
to-ALL all
THE
DAYS
OF-US
1:76 kai su
kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
paidion profhths paidion prophEtEs

n_ Voc Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
uyistou klhqhsh hupsistos kaleO

a_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
AND also
YOU
YET little-boy
BEFORE-AVERer OF-HIGHest prophet of-Most-High
76 And thou, child, shalt be called the prophet of the Highest: for thou shalt go before the face of the Lord to prepare his ways;
proporeush proporeuomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
gar enwpion kuriou gar enOpion kurios

Conj Adv n_ Gen Sg m
etoimasai hetoimazO
vn Aor Act
odous autou hodos autos

n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-GOING for you-shall-be-going-before
IN-VIEW OF-Master in-the-sight-of Lord swthrias tw sOtEria ho

n_ Gen Sg f
TO-make-READY WAYS roads law laos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-Him
1:77 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dounai gnwsin didOmi gnOsis

vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
afesei aphesis
n_ Dat Sg f
t_ Dat Sg m
77 To give knowledge of salvation unto his people by the remission of their sins,
OF-THE
TO-GIVE
KNOWledge OF-SAVing of-salvation
to-THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
IN
FROM-LETTing pardon
amartiwn autwn hamartia autos

n_ Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl m
OF-misses of-sins
OF-them
1:78 dia
dia
Prep
splagcna eleous splagchnon eleos

n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
episkeyetai episkeptomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
THRU compassions because-of anatolh ex anatolE ek

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
OF-MERCY OF-God
OF-US
IN
WHICH which(p)
SHALL-BE-ON-NOTING US shall-be-visiting
78 Through the tender mercy of our God; whereby the dayspring from on high hath visited us,
uyous hupsos
n_ Gen Sg n
rising dayspring
OUT OF-HIGH
AV
Luke 1 - Luke 2
1:79 epifanai
epiphainO
vn Aor Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
skotei kai skia skotos kai skia

n_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg f
qanatou kaqhmenois thanatos kathEmai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
TO-ON-APPEAR to-THE-ones IN to-make-its-advent to-the-ones kateuqunai kateuthunO

vn Aor Act
DARK darkness hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
AND
SHADE shadow odon hodos

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-DEATH
sittING
OF-THE
79 To give light to them that sit in darkness and [in] the shadow of death, to guide our feet into the way of peace.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
eis eis
Prep
eirhnhs eirEnE
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-DOWN-straighten THE to-direct
FEET
OF-US
INTO WAY path
OF-PEACE
1:80 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
paidion huxanen paidion auxanO

n_ Nom Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai ekrataiouto pneumati kai hn kai krataioO pneuma kai eimi

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
THE
YET little-boy
GROWS-UP
AND
was-staunch
to-spirit
AND
WAS
IN
80 And the child grew, and waxed strong in spirit, and was in the deserts till the day of his shewing unto Israel.
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
erhmois erEmos
a_ Dat Pl f
ews hmeras heOs hEmera

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
anadeixews autou anadeixis autos

pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
THE
DESOLATES TILL wildernesses
OF-DAY day
OF-UP-SHOWing of-indication
OF-him
TOWARD THE
ISRAEL
AV
Luke 2
2:1 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ekeinais exhlqen hEmera ekeinos exerchomai

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dogma dogma
n_ Nom Sg n
para para
Prep
kaisaros kaisar
n_ Gen Sg m
BECAME it-occurred augoustou augoustos

n_ Gen Sg m
YET IN
THE
DAYS
those
OUT-CAME came-out thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
decree
BESIDE CEASAR Caesar
. And it came to pass in those days, that there went out a decree from Caesar Augustus, that all the world should be taxed.
apografesqai apographO
vn Pres mid/pas
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn oikoumenE
n_ Acc Sg f
AUGUSTUS (Latin) TO-BE-beING-FROM-WRITTEN EVERY Augustus to-be-being-registered entire
THE
beING-HOMED inhabited-earth surias suria

n_ Gen Sg f
2:2 auth
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
apografh apographE
n_ Nom Sg f
prwth prOtos
a_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
hgemoneuontos ths hEgemoneuO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
kurhniou kurEnios
n_ Gen Sg m
([And] this taxing was first made when Cyrenius was governor of Syria.)
this
FROM-WRITing BEFORE-most BECAME registration first occurred pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
OF-LEADershipING of-being-governor
OF-THE
SYRIA
OF-QUIRINIUS Quirinius eautou heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg m
3
2:3 kai eporeuonto

kai
Conj
poreuomai
apografesqai apographO
vn Pres Pas
ekastos eis hekastos eis

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
And all went to be taxed, every one into his own city.
AND
WENT
ALL
TO-BE-beING-FROM-WRITTEN EACH to-be-being-registered each-one
INTO THE
OF-self of-himself
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
city
2:4 anebh
anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai iwshf apo kai iOsEph apo

Conj ni proper Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias ek galilaia ek
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
polews nazareq eis polis nazareth eis

n_ Gen Sg f ni proper Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
UP-STEPPed went-up ioudaian eis ioudaia eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
YET AND also polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
JOSEPH
FROM THE
GALILEE
OUT OF-city
NAZARETH INTO THE of-Nazareth to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
dauid htis dauid hostis

ni proper pr Nom Sg f
kaleitai kaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
dia dia
Prep
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
And Joseph also went up from Galilee, out of the city of Nazareth, into Judaea, unto the city of David, which is called Bethlehem; (because he was of the house and lineage of David:)
JUDEA
INTO city
of-DAVID WHO-ANY IS-beING-CALLED BETHLEHEM THRU THE of-David which-any because-of kai patrias kai patria
Conj n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ex ek
Prep
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
him
OUT OF-HOME of-house
AND
OF-FATHERhood of-DAVID of-kindred of-David mariam maria

ni proper
2:5 apograyasqai
apographO
vn Aor Mid
sun sun
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
emnhsteumenh mnEsteuO
vp Perf Pas Dat Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oush eimi
vp Pres vxx Dat Sg f
To be taxed with Mary his espoused wife, being great with child.
TO-BE-FROM-WRITTEN TOGETHER to-MARIAM THE togetherwith to-be-registered Mary egkuw egkuos

n_ Dat Sg f
one-HAVING-been-espousED to-him one-having-been-espoused(f)
BEING being(f)
to-IN-TEEM parturient
2:6 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
autous ekei eplhsqhsan ai autos ekei plEthO (pimplEmi) ho

pp Acc Pl m Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
BECAME it-came-to-pass tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YET IN
THE
TO-BE
them
there
ARE-FILLED are-fulfilled
THE
DAYS
And so it was, that, while they were there, the days were accomplished that she should be delivered.
tekein tiktO
vn 2Aor Act
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
OF-THE
TO-BE-BRINGING-FORTH her
2:7 kai eteken

kai
Conj
tiktO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
prwtotokon prOtotokos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
she-BROUGHT-FORTH THE
SON
OF-her
THE
BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH AND firstborn fatnh phatnE

n_ Dat Sg f
esparganwsen auton sparganoO autos

kai aneklinen auton kai anaklinO autos

en en
Prep
dioti dioti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
And she brought forth her firstborn son, and wrapped him in swaddling clothes, and laid him in a manger; because there was no room for them in the inn.
SWADDLES
Him
AND
UP-CLINES cradles
Him
IN
MANGER
THRU-that NOT because-that
WAS there-was
autois topos autos topos

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
katalumati kataluma
n_ Dat Sg n
to-them
PLACE
IN
THE
DOWN-LOOSE caravansary
AV
Luke 2
2:8 kai poimenes hsan

kai
Conj
poimEn
n_ Nom Pl m
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cwra chOra
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
agraulountes agrauleO
kai kai
Conj
AND
SHEPHERDS
WERE
IN
THE
SPACE district
to-THE the thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
SAME
FIELD-COURTING AND ones-being-in-the-field-fold autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
. And there were in the same country shepherds abiding in the field, keeping watch over their flock by night.
fulassontes fulakas phulassO phulakE

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
nuktos epi nux epi

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
poimnhn poimnE
n_ Acc Sg f
GUARDING maintaining
GUARD-houses OF-THE watches kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
NIGHT
ON THE onover
SHEEP-herd OF-them flock kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
2:9 kai aggelos

kai
Conj
aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
epesth ephistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois kai doxa autos kai doxa

pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
perielamyen perilampO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
ON-STOOD stood-by fobon phobos

n_ Acc Sg m
to-them them megan mega

a_ Acc Sg m
AND
esteem glory
OF-Master of-Lord
ABOUT-SHINES shines-about
And, lo, the angel of the Lord came upon them, and the glory of the Lord shone round about them: and they were sore afraid.
autous kai efobhqhsan autos kai phobeO

pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
them
AND
THEY-WERE-afraid FEAR
GREAT
2:10 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
fobeisqe phobeO
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gar gar
Conj
AND
said
to-them
THE
MESSENGER NO
YE-BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing ! estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING for lo ! tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
10 And the angel said unto them, Fear not: for, behold, I bring you good tidings of great joy, which shall be to all people.
euaggelizomai euaggelizO
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
megalhn htis mega hostis

a_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg f
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-WELL-MESSAGizING to-YOU(p) I-am-bringing-a-well-message to-ye
JOY of-joy umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
GREAT
WHICH-ANY SHALL-BE which-any os hos

pr Nom Sg m
to-EVERY to-entire estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
PEOPLE
2:11 oti etecqh

hoti
Conj
tiktO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
shmeron swthr sEmeron sOtEr

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
that
WAS-BROUGHT-FORTH to-YOU(p) to-ye en en

Prep
toDAY
SAViour
WHO
IS
ANOINTED Christ
11 For unto you is born this day in the city of David a Saviour, which is Christ the Lord.
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
dauid dauid
ni proper
Master Lord
IN
city
of-DAVID of-David umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
NA
2:12 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion eurhsete sEmeion heuriskO

n_ Nom Sg n vi Fut Act 2 Pl
brefos brephos
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
this
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
SIGN
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING BABE
12 And this [shall be] a sign unto you; Ye shall find the babe wrapped in swaddling clothes, lying in a manger.
esparganwmenon sparganoO
kai keimenon kai keimai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
fatnh phatnE
n_ Dat Sg f
HAVING-been-SWADDLED AND
LYING
IN
MANGER
2:13 kai exaifnhs egeneto

kai
Conj
exaiphnEs
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aggelw aggelos
n_ Dat Sg m
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
stratias ouraniou stratia ouranios

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
AND
suddenly
BECAME TOGETHER to-THE there-came-to-be togetherwith the qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
MESSENGER multitude
OF-host
heavenly
13 And suddenly there was with the angel a multitude of the heavenly host praising God, and saying,
ainountwn aineO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai legontwn kai legO

PRAISING
THE
God
AND
sayING
2:14 doxa
doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
uyistois qew hupsistos theos

a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Sg m
kai epi ghs kai epi gE

Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
14 Glory to God in the highest, and on earth peace, good will toward men.
esteem glory eudokias eudokia

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
HIGHest-ones highest(p)
to-God
AND
ON
LAND earth
PEACE
IN
humans
OF-WELL-SEEMing of-delight
2:15 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ws aphlqon hOs aperchomai

ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon oi ouranos ho
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
AND
BECAME it-occurred
AS
FROM-CAME came-away
FROM them
INTO THE
heaven
THE
15 And it came to pass, as the angels were gone away from them into heaven, the shepherds said one to another, Let us now go even unto
AV
Luke 2
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
poimenes elaloun poimEn laleO

pros pros
Prep
allhlous dielqwmen allElOn dierchomai

pc Acc Pl m vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
dh dE
Part
MESSENGERS THE
SHEPHERDS
TALKED spoke
TOWARD one-another
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING BIND we-may-be-passing-through by-all-means to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
Bethlehem, and see this thing which is come to pass, which the Lord hath made known unto us.
ews bhqleem heOs bEthleem

Conj ni proper
kai idwmen kai eidO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gegonos ginomai
TILL
BETHLEHEM AND
WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
declaration this
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-come-to-pass
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
egnwrisen hmin gnOrizO hemeis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
WHICH
THE
Master Lord
KNOWizES makes-known
to-US
2:16 kai hlqan

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
speusantes kai aneuran speudO kai aneuriskO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
te te
Part
mariam kai ton maria kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Acc Sg m
16 And they came with haste, and found Mary, and Joseph, and the babe lying in a manger.
AND
THEY-COME
being-DILIGENT hurrying brefos brephos

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THEY-UP-FIND THE they-found-out en en

Prep
BESIDES MARIAM bsboth Mary fatnh phatnE

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
THE
iwshf kai to iOsEph kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Acc Sg n
keimenon keimai
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
JOSEPH
AND
THE
BABE
LYING
IN
THE
MANGER
2:17 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
egnwrisan gnOrizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
rhmatos tou rhEma ho

lalhqentos laleO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
PERCEIVING perceiving-it autois peri autos peri

pp Dat Pl m Prep
YET THEY-KNOWize ABOUT THE they-make-known concerning tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
declaration
THE
BEING-TALKED being-spoken
17 And when they had seen [it], they made known abroad the saying which was told them concerning this child.
paidiou toutou paidion houtos

n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg n
to-them
little-boy
this
2:18 kai pantes oi

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akousantes eqaumasan peri akouO thaumazO peri

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
lalhqentwn upo laleO hupo

vp Aor Pas Gen Pl n Prep
AND
ALL
THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
MARVEL
BEING-TALKED being-spoken
by
18 And all they that heard [it] wondered at those things which were told them by the shepherds.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
poimenwn pros poimEn pros

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
THE
SHEPHERDS
TOWARD them
WH NA
2:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
maria
mariam maria
ni proper
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
sunethrei suntEreO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
19 But Mary kept all these things, and pondered [them] in her heart.
THE
YET
MARIAM Mary en en
Prep
ALL
TOGETHER-KEPT THE preserved
declarations these
sumballousa sumballO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia auths kardia autos

TOGETHER-CASTING IN parleying-them
THE
HEART
OF-her
2:20 kai upestreyan oi

kai
Conj
hupostrephO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
poimenes doxazontes poimEn doxazO

kai ainountes kai aineO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
reTURN
THE
SHEPHERDS
esteemizING glorifying
AND
PRAISING
THE
20 And the shepherds returned, glorifying and praising God for all the things that they had heard and seen, as it was told unto them.
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi pasin epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Pl n
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
hkousan kai eidon akouO kai eidO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
elalhqh laleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
God
ON
ALL
to-WHICH THEY-HEAR AND which
PERCEIVED
according-AS WAS-TALKED TOWARD it-was-spoken
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
2:21 kai ote eplhsqhsan hmerai

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
plEthO (pimplEmi)
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
oktw oktO
ni numeral
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
peritemein peritemnO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
when
DAYS
EIGHT
OF-THE
TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING Him to-be-circumcising
AND also
21 . And when eight days were accomplished for the circumcising of the child, his name was called JESUS, which was so named of the
AV
Luke 2
eklhqh kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
klhqen kaleO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
angel before he was conceived in the womb.
WAS-CALLED THE
NAME
OF-Him
JESUS
THE
BEING-CALLED
by
THE
aggelou aggelos
n_ Gen Sg m
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sullhmfqhnai sullambanO
vn Aor Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
koilia koilia
n_ Dat Sg f
MESSENGER BEFORE THE
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GOTTEN Him to-be-conceived hmerai hEmera

n_ Nom Pl f
IN
THE
CAVITY womb kata kata

Prep
2:22 kai ote eplhsqhsan ai

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
plEthO (pimplEmi)
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kaqarismou autwn katharismos autos

n_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
when
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
cleansing
OF-them
according-to THE
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
mwusews anhgagon mOusEs anagO

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Att
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma parasthsai ierosoluma paristEmi

n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
22 And when the days of her purification according to the law of Moses were accomplished, they brought him to Jerusalem, to present [him] to the Lord;
LAW
of-MOSES of-Moses
THEY-UP-LED they-brought-up
Him
INTO JERUSALEM
TO-BESIDE-STAND to-THE to-present-him arsen arsEn

n_ Nom Sg n
Master Lord
23 (As it is written in the law of the Lord, Every male that openeth the womb shall be called holy to the Lord;)
2:23 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
oti pan hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
dianoigon dianoigO
LAW
OF-Master of-Lord
that
EVERY
MALE
THRU-UP-OPENING opening-up
mhtran agion mEtra hagios

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
matrix
HOLY
to-THE
Master Lord
2:24 kai tou

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dounai qusian didOmi thusia

vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eirhmenon ereO
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n Att
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
OF-THE
TO-GIVE
SACRIFICE according-to THE
HAVING-been-declarED IN
THE
LAW
24 And to offer a sacrifice according to that which is said in the law of the Lord, A pair of turtledoves, or two young pigeons.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
zeugos zeugos
n_ Nom Sg n
trugonwn h trugOn E
n_ Gen Pl f Part
duo duo
ni numeral
nossous peristerwn nossos peristera

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl f
OF-Master of-Lord
YOKE pair
OF-COO-ers of-turtle-doves
OR
TWO
YOUNGling squabs en en
Prep
OF-DOVES
2:25 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anqrwpos hn anthrOpos eimi

ierousalhm w ierosoluma hos

ni proper pr Dat Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
sumewn sumeOn
ni proper
AND
BE-PERCEIVING human lo ! anqrwpos outos anthrOpos houtos

n_ Nom Sg m
WAS there-was dikaios dikaios

a_ Nom Sg m
IN
JERUSALEM
to-WHOM
NAME
SIMEON
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kai eulabhs prosdecomenos kai eulabEs prosdechomai

Conj a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
paraklhsin paraklEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
25 . And, behold, there was a man in Jerusalem, whose name [was] Simeon; and the same man [was] just and devout, waiting for the consolation of Israel: and the Holy Ghost was upon him.
pd Nom Sg m
AND
THE
human
this
JUST
AND
pious
TOWARD-RECEIVING anticipating auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-CALLing consolation
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl kai pneuma israEl kai pneuma

ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
ep epi
Prep
OF-THE
ISRAEL
AND
spirit
WAS
HOLY
ON
him
2:26 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kecrhmatismenon upo tou chrEmatizO hupo ho

vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos tou pneuma ho

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
AND
WAS it-was
to-him
HAVING-been-apprizED having-been-apprised qanaton prin thanatos prin

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
by
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
26 And it was revealed unto him by the Holy Ghost, that he should not see death, before he had seen the Lord's Christ.
mh mE
Part Neg
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
h E
Part
an an
Part
idh eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
NO
TO-BE-PERCEIVING DEATH to-be-being-aquainted-with
ERE
OR than
EVER MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE he-may-be-acquainted-with
ANOINTED Christ
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-Master of-Lord
2:27 kai hlqen

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati eis pneuma eis

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
he-CAME
IN
THE
spirit
INTO THE
IN
THE
27 And he came by the Spirit into the temple: and when the parents brought in the child Jesus, to do for him after the custom of the law,
AV
Luke 2
eisagagein eisagO
vn 2Aor Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
goneis goneus
n_ Acc Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion ihsoun paidion iEsous

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
poihsai autous poieO autos

vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m
TO-BE-INTO-LEADING THE to-be-bringing-in kata kata

Prep
parents
THE
little-boy
JESUS
OF-THE
TO-DO
them
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eiqismenon ethizO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
according-to THE
HAVING-been-acCUSTOMED OF-THE having-been-accustomed edexato dechomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
LAW
ABOUT Him concerning kai euloghsen kai eulogeO

28 Then took he him up in his arms, and blessed God, and said,
2:28 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
agkalas agkalE
n_ Acc Pl f
AND also ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
he
RECEIVES
Him ithim
INTO THE
CLASP-in-arms AND clasping-in-his-arms-him
blessES he-blesses
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

THE
God
AND
said
2:29 nun apolueis

nun
Adv
apoluO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
doulon sou doulos su

despota kata despotEs kata

n_ Voc Sg m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
29 Lord, now lettest thou thy servant depart in peace, according to thy word:
NOW YOU-ARE-FROM-LOOSING THE you-are-dismissing sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
SLAVE
OF-YOU
OWNer !
according-to THE
declaration
en en
Prep
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-YOU
IN
PEACE
2:30 oti eidon

hoti
Conj
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi mou ophthalmos egO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swthrion sou sOtErios su

a_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Sg
30 For mine eyes have seen thy salvation,
that
PERCEIVED
THE
VIEWers eyes kata kata

Prep
OF-ME
THE
SAVing salvation
OF-YOU
2:31 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
htoimasas hetoimazO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
proswpon pantwn twn prosOpon pas ho

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
lawn laos
n_ Gen Pl m
31 Which thou hast prepared before the face of all people;
WHICH
YOU-make-READY according-to face suiting eis eis

Prep
OF-ALL
THE
PEOPLES
2:32 fws
phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
apokaluyin eqnwn apokalupsis ethnos

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl n
kai doxan kai doxa

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
israhl israEl
ni proper
32 A light to lighten the Gentiles, and the glory of thy people Israel.
LIGHT
INTO FROM-COVERing revelation o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-NATIONS AND
esteem glory kai h kai ho

Conj
OF-PEOPLE OF-YOU
ISRAEL
2:33 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
qaumazontes epi thaumazO epi

t_ Nom Sg f
33 And Joseph and his mother marvelled at those things which were spoken of him.
AND
WAS
THE
FATHER
OF-Him
AND
THE
MOTHER
MARVELING
ON
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
laloumenois peri laleO peri

vp Pres Pas Dat Pl n Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
ABOUT Him concerning pros pros

Prep
2:34 kai euloghsen autous sumewn kai eipen

kai
Conj
eulogeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
sumeOn
ni proper
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mariam thn maria ho

ni proper t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
blessES
them
SIMEON
AND
said
TOWARD MARIAM Mary eis eis

Prep
THE
MOTHER
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
keitai keimai
ptwsin kai anastasin pollwn en ptOsis kai anastasis polus en

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Gen Pl m Prep
34 And Simeon blessed them, and said unto Mary his mother, Behold, this [child] is set for the fall and rising again of many in Israel; and for a sign which shall be spoken against;
OF-Him
BE-PERCEIVING this-One lo ! this-one israhl kai eis israEl kai eis

ni proper Conj Prep
IS-LYING
INTO FALL
AND
UP-STANDing rising
OF-MANY
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
shmeion antilegomenon sEmeion antilegO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
THE
ISRAEL
AND
INTO SIGN
NA
beING-contradictED
2:35 kai sou

kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Gen Sg
de de
Conj
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
dieleusetai dierchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
romfaia rhomphaia
n_ Nom Sg f
AND also
OF-YOU
YET
SAME selfown
THE
soul
SHALL-BE-THRU-COMING SABER shall-be-passing-through saber-blade
35 (Yea, a sword shall pierce through thy own soul also,) that the thoughts of many hearts may be revealed.
AV
Luke 2
opws hopOs
Adv
an an
Part
apokalufqwsin apokaluptO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ek ek
Prep
pollwn kardiwn dialogismoi polus kardia dialogismos

a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Pl m
WHICH-how EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED OUT OF-MANY so-that may-be-being-revealed
HEARTS
THRU-accounts reasonings fulhs phulE

n_ Gen Sg f
2:36 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
anna hanna
n_ Nom Sg f
profhtis prophEtis
n_ Nom Sg f
qugathr fanouhl ek thugatEr phanouEl ek

n_ Nom Sg f ni proper Prep
ashr asEr
ni proper
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
AND
WAS there-was
ANNA Hannah en en
Prep
BEFORE-AVERess DAUGHTER prophetess hmerais pollais zhsasa hEmera polus zaO

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
of-PHANUEL of-Phanuel
OUT OF-tribe
of-ASER this-one of-Asher she eth etos

n_ Acc Pl n
probebhkuia probainO
meta andros meta anEr

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
epta hepta
ni numeral
36 And there was one Anna, a prophetess, the daughter of Phanuel, of the tribe of Aser: she was of a great age, and had lived with an husband seven years from her virginity;
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
HAVING-BEFORE-STEPPED IN one-having-advanced apo apo

Prep
DAYS
MANY
LIVing
WITH
MAN husband
YEARS
SEVEN
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parqenias auths parthenia autos

FROM THE
virginity
OF-her
2:37 kai auth

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg f
chra chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
ews etwn heOs etos

Conj n_ Gen Pl n
ogdohkonta tessarwn h ogdoEkonta tessares hos

ni numeral n_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
she
WIDOW
TILL
OF-YEARS EIGHTy
FOUR
WHO
NOT
afistato aphistEmi
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
nhsteiais kai dehsesin latreuousa nEsteia kai deEsis latreuO

n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
nukta nux
n_ Acc Sg f
37 And she [was] a widow of about fourscore and four years, which departed not from the temple, but served [God] with fastings and prayers night and day.
is-FROM-STOOD withdraws kai hmeran kai hEmera

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
SACRED-place to-fasts sanctuary
AND
to-petitions petitions
offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE NIGHT offering-divine-service
AND
DAY
2:38 kai auth

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
epistasa ephistEmi
anqwmologeito tw anthomologeomai ho
vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
to-SAME
THE
HOUR
ON-STANDing standing-by tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
she-INSTEAD-avowED she-made-a-response prosdecomenois prosdechomai

to-THE
God
AND
38 And she coming in that instant gave thanks likewise unto the Lord, and spake of him to all them that looked for redemption in Jerusalem.
elalei laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
lutrwsin ierousalhm lutrOsis ierosoluma

n_ Acc Sg f ni proper
TALKED spoke
ABOUT Him concerning
to-ALL
THE
ones-TOWARD-RECEIVING LOOSening ones-anticipating redemption kata kata

Prep
to-JERUSALEM to-Jerusalem epestreyan epistrephO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
39 And when they had performed all things according to the law of the Lord, they returned into Galilee, to their own city Nazareth.
2:39 kai ws etelesan

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
teleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
AS
THEY-FINISH ALL they-accomplish galilaian eis galilaia eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
THE according-to THE the-things polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
LAW
OF-Master of-Lord
THEY-ON-TURN they-return
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
nazareq nazareth
ni proper
INTO THE
GALILEE
INTO city
OF-selves NAZARETH of-themselves kai ekrataiouto plhroumenon kai krataioO plEroO

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
2:40 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
paidion huxanen paidion auxanO

n_ Nom Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET little-boy
GROWS-UP
AND
was-staunch
beING-FILLED
to-WISDOM AND
40 And the child grew, and waxed strong in spirit, filled with wisdom: and the grace of God was upon him.
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
grace
OF-God
WAS
ON
it ithim goneis goneus

n_ Nom Pl m
2:41 kai eporeuonto

kai
Conj
poreuomai
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kat kata
Prep
etos etos
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm ierosoluma
ni proper
41 . Now his parents went to Jerusalem every year at the feast of the passover.
AND
WENT
THE
parents
OF-Him
according-to YEAR
INTO JERUSALEM
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pasca pascha
Aramaic
to-THE
FESTIVAL OF-THE
PASSOVER
AV
Luke 2

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
dwdeka anabainontwn autwn dOdeka anabainO autos

ni numeral vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
when
BECAME he-became eorths heortE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-YEARS TWO-TEN twelve
OF-UP-STEPPING of-going-up
OF-them
according-to THE
42 And when he was twelve years old, they went up to Jerusalem after the custom of the feast.
eqos ethos
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
CUSTOM
OF-THE
FESTIVAL
2:43 kai teleiwsantwn tas

kai
Conj
teleioO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras en hEmera en
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
upostrefein autous upemeinen hupostrephO autos hupomenO

vn Pres Act pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
OF-maturing of-finishing o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
DAYS
IN
THE
TO-BE-reTURNING
them
UNDER-REMAINS remains-behind goneis goneus

n_ Nom Pl m
43 And when they had fulfilled the days, as they returned, the child Jesus tarried behind in Jerusalem; and Joseph and his mother knew not [of it].
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
ierousalhm kai ouk ierosoluma kai ou

ni proper Conj Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
JESUS
THE
boy
IN
JERUSALEM
AND
NOT
KNOW know-it
THE
parents
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
2:44 nomisantes
nomizO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunodia sunodia
n_ Dat Sg f
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
inferring
YET Him
TO-BE
IN
THE
TOGETHER-WAY THEY-CAME caravan kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
OF-DAY
WAY
44 But they, supposing him to have been in the company, went a day's journey; and they sought him among [their] kinsfolk and acquaintance.
kai anezhtoun kai anazEteO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
suggeneusin suggenEs
a_ Dat Pl m
gnwstois gnOstos
a_ Dat Pl m
AND
THEY-UP-SOUGHT Him they-hunted eurontes heuriskO
IN THE among
TOGETHER-generateds AND relatives
to-THE the
KNOWN known-ones
45 And when they found him not, they turned back again to Jerusalem, seeking him.
2:45 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
upestreyan eis hupostrephO eis

ierousalhm anazhtountes auton ierosoluma anazEteO autos

ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
AND
NO
FINDING
THEY-reTURN
INTO JERUSALEM
UP-SEEKING hunting en en
Prep
Him
2:46 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
meta hmeras treis meta hEmera treis

Prep n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
after
DAYS
THREE
THEY-FOUND Him
IN
THE
SACRED-place sanctuary autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
kaqezomenon kathezomai
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
didaskalwn kai akouonta didaskalos kai akouO

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
46 And it came to pass, that after three days they found him in the temple, sitting in the midst of the doctors, both hearing them, and asking them questions.
beING-seatED
IN
MIDst
OF-THE
TEACHers
AND
HEARING
OF-them them
AND
eperwtwnta autous eperOtaO autos

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pp Acc Pl m
inquirING-of
them
2:47 existanto
existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akouontes akouO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
sunesei sunesis
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
47 And all that heard him were astonished at his understanding and answers.
are-OUT-STOOD YET ALL are-amazed tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing
OF-Him him
ON
to-THE the
understanding AND
apokrisesin autou apokrisis autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg m
to-THE the
answerings answers
OF-Him
2:48 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exeplaghsan ekplEssO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
kai eipen kai legO

pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
PERCEIVING
Him
THEY-were-astonished AND
said
TOWARD Him
THE
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
teknon ti teknon tis

n_ Voc Sg n pi Acc Sg n
epoihsas hmin poieO hemeis

outws idou houtOs idou

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
48 And when they saw him, they were amazed: and his mother said unto him, Son, why hast thou thus dealt with us? behold, thy father and I have sought thee sorrowing.
MOTHER
OF-Him
offspring child !
ANY why ?
YOU-DO
to-US
thus
AV
Luke 2 - Luke 3
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
WH
kai egw odunwmenoi zhtoumen
WH
WH
WH
NA
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
NA
odunwmenoi odunaO
FATHER
NA
OF-YOU
AND-I
beING-PAINED ones-being-pained
ezhtoumen zEteO
vi impf Act 1 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
SOUGHT
YOU
2:49 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous ti autos tis

pp Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg n
oti ezhteite me hoti zEteO egO

Conj vi impf Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdeite eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Pl
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
ANY why ? mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
that
YE-SOUGHT
ME
NOT
YE-HAD-PERCEIVED
49 And he said unto them, How is it that ye sought me? wist ye not that I must be about my Father's business?
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
that
IN THE OF-THE among the-things ou ou

Part Neg
FATHER
OF-ME
IS-BINDING it-is-binding rhma rhEma

n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE
ME
2:50 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
sunhkan to suniEmi ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
elalhsen autois laleO autos

50 And they understood not the saying which he spake unto them.
AND
they
NOT
understand
THE
declaration WHICH
He-TALKS he-speaks
to-them
2:51 kai katebh

kai
Conj
katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

Prep pp Gen Pl m

eis eis
Prep
nazareq kai hn nazareth kai eimi

ni proper Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
He-DOWN-STEPPed WITH them he-descended
AND
CAME
INTO NAZARETH AND
WAS
51 And he went down with them, and came to Nazareth, and was subject unto them: but his mother kept all these sayings in her heart.
upotassomenos autois kai h hupotassO autos kai ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
diethrei diatEreO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
beING-UNDER-SET being-subject rhmata rhEma

n_ Acc Pl n
to-them
AND
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
THRU-KEPT carefully-kept
ALL
THE
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia auths kardia autos

declarations IN
THE
HEART
OF-her
WH NA NA
2:52 kai ihsous

kai
Conj
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
proekopten prokoptO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
th
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai hlikia kai hElikia

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
kai cariti kai charis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
52 And Jesus increased in wisdom and stature, and in favour with God and man.
AND
JESUS
progressED
IN
THE
WISDOM
AND
to-PRIME stature
AND
to-grace favor
para para
Prep
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai anqrwpois kai anthrOpos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
BESIDE God
AND
to-humans humans
AV
Luke 3
3:1 en
en
Prep
etei etos
n_ Dat Sg n
de de
Conj
pentekaidekatw ths pentekaidekatos ho

a_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
hgemonias tiberiou hEgemonia tiberios

kaisaros kaisar
n_ Gen Sg m
IN
YEAR
YET FIVE-AND-TENth fifteenth
OF-THE
LEADership government
OF-TIBERIUS CEASAR Caesar
hgemoneuontos pontiou pilatou ths hEgemoneuO pontios pilatos ho

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias kai tetraarcountos ths ioudaia kai tetraarcheO ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
OF-LEADershipING of-being-governor
OF-Pontius Pontius
PILATE
OF-THE
JUDEA
AND
OF-FOURth-chiefING of-being-tetrarch
OF-THE
. Now in the fifteenth year of the reign of Tiberius Caesar, Pontius Pilate being governor of Judaea, and Herod being tetrarch of Galilee, and his brother Philip tetrarch of Ituraea and of the region of Trachonitis, and Lysanias the tetrarch of Abilene,
galilaias hrwdou filippou de galilaia hErOdEs philippos de

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

tetraarcountos ths tetraarcheO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
GALILEE
OF-HEROD Herod
OF-Philip
YET THE
brother
OF-him
FOURTth-chiefING being-tetrarch abilhnhs abilEnE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
itouraias kai tracwnitidos cwras itouraia kai trachOnitis chOra

a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
kai lusaniou ths kai lusanias ho

Conj n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
ITUREA
AND
Trachonitis
OF-SPACE AND province
OF-LYSANIAS OF-THE
ABILENE
tetraarcountos tetraarcheO
FOURTth-chiefING being-tetrarch
3:2 epi arcierews

epi
Prep
archiereus
n_ Gen Sg m
anna hannas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kaiafa kai kaiaphas

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi iwannhn epi iOannEs

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
ON
chief-SACRED-one of-ANNAS chief-priest Hannas zacariou zacharias

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
of-CAIAPHAS BECAME Caiaphas erhmw erEmos

a_ Dat Sg f
declaration
OF-God
ON
JOHN
Annas and Caiaphas being the high priests, the word of God came unto John the son of Zacharias in the wilderness.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
OF-ZACHARIAS SON
IN
THE
NA
DESOLATE wilderness thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
3:3 kai hlqen

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
pericwron tou perichOros ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou iordanEs
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
CAME he-came
INTO EVERY entire
THE
ABOUT-SPACE country-about afesin aphesis

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
JORDAN
And he came into all the country about Jordan, preaching the baptism of repentance for the remission of sins;
khrusswn kErussO
baptisma metanoias eis baptisma metanoia eis

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Prep
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
DIPism baptism
OF-after-MIND of-repentance en en
Prep
INTO FROM-LETTing OF-misses pardon of-sins logwn logos

n_ Gen Pl m
3:4 ws gegraptai
hOs
Adv
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
biblw biblos
n_ Dat Sg f
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
AS
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN IN
SCROLL
OF-sayings OF-ISAIAH
THE
BEFORE-AVERer SOUND prophet voice kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
bowntos boaO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f

odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
euqeias euthus
a_ Acc Pl f
As it is written in the book of the words of Esaias the prophet, saying, The voice of one crying in the wilderness, Prepare ye the way of the Lord, make his paths straight.
OF-IMPLORING-one IN of-one-imploring poieite poieO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
DESOLATE make-YE-READY wilderness make-ready-ye ! autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
WAY road
OF-Master of-Lord
straight
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
tribous tribos
n_ Acc Pl f
BE-YE-makING THE be-ye-making !
WEAR (ways) OF-Him highways plhrwqhsetai plEroO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
3:5 pasa
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
faragx pharagx
n_ Nom Sg f
kai pan kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
oros oros
n_ Nom Sg n
kai bounos kai bounos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
EVERY
RAVINE
SHALL-BE-BEING-FILLED AND
EVERY
mountain
WH
AND
HILL
NA
tapeinwqhsetai tapeinoO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai estai kai eimi

ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
skolia skolios
a_ Nom Pl n
eis eis
Prep
euqeias
euqeian euthus
a_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
Every valley shall be filled, and every mountain and hill shall be brought low; and the crooked shall be made straight, and the rough ways [shall be] made smooth;
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND
SHALL-BE
THE
CROOKED INTO crooked(p)
straight
AND
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
traceiai eis trachus eis

a_ Nom Pl f Prep
odous leias hodos leios

THE
ROUGHS rough(p)
INTO WAYS roads
SMOOTH
AV
Luke 3
3:6 kai oyetai

kai
Conj
optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swthrion tou sOtErios ho

a_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
And all flesh shall see the salvation of God.
AND
SHALL-BE-VIEWING EVERY shall-be-seeing all oun oun

Conj
FLESH
THE
SAVing salvation
OF-THE
God
3:7 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ekporeuomenois ekporeuomai
oclois baptisqhnai up autou ochlos baptizO hupo autos

n_ Dat Pl m vn Aor Pas Prep pp Gen Sg m
he-said
THEN to-THE
OUT-GOING ones-going-out upedeixen hupodeiknumi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THRONGS TO-BE-DIPizED to-be-baptized umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
by
him
Then said he to the multitude that came forth to be baptized of him, O generation of vipers, who hath warned you to flee from the wrath to come?
gennhmata ecidnwn tis genEma echidna tis

n_ Voc Pl n n_ Gen Pl f pi Nom Sg m
fugein pheugO
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
melloushs mellO
products progeny ! orghs orgE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-VIPERS
ANY who ?
UNDER-SHOWS to-YOU(p) intimates to-ye
TO-BE-FLEEING FROM THE
INDIGNATION
3:8 poihsate oun

poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
karpous axious karpos axios

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
metanoias kai mh metanoia kai mE

arxhsqe archO
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
DO produce-ye ! legein legO

vn Pres Act
THEN FRUITS
WORTHY
OF-THE
after-MINDing repentance ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-beginnING
en en
Prep
eautois patera heautou patEr

pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
abraam abraam
ni proper
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
Bring forth therefore fruits worthy of repentance, and begin not to say within yourselves, We have Abraham to [our] father: for I say unto you, That God is able of these stones to raise up children unto Abraham.
TO-BE-sayING IN selves among yourselves oti dunatai hoti dunamai

FATHER
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
ABRAHAM I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye tekna teknon

n_ Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
liqwn lithos
n_ Gen Pl m
toutwn egeirai houtos egeirO

pd Gen Pl m vn Aor Act
that
IS-ABLE
THE
God
OUT OF-THE
STONES
these
TO-ROUSE offsprings children
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
to-THE
ABRAHAM
3:9 hdh
EdE
Adv
de de
Conj
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
axinh axinE
n_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
dendrwn dendron
n_ Gen Pl n
ALREADY YET AND also keitai keimai

THE
AX
TOWARD THE
ROOT
OF-THE
TREES
WH
And now also the axe is laid unto the root of the trees: every tree therefore which bringeth not forth good fruit is hewn down, and cast into the fire.
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
dendron mh dendron mE
poioun poieO
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
kalon
IS-LYING
NA
EVERY
THEN TREE
NO
DOING doproducing balletai ballO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
FRUIT
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
ekkoptetai ekkoptO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
IDEAL
IS-beING-OUT-STRIKen AND is-being-hewn-down oi ho
INTO FIRE
IS-beING-CAST
3:10 kai ephrwtwn auton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
legontes legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
10 And the people asked him, saying, What shall we do then?
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
inquirED-of
him
THE
THRONGS
sayING
ANY what ?
THEN
poihswmen poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOING
3:11 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ecwn echO
duo duo
ni numeral
citwnas chitOn
n_ Acc Pl m
answerING
YET he-said
to-them
THE
one-HAVING one-having ecwn echO
TWO
TUNICS
11 He answereth and saith unto them, He that hath two coats, let him impart to him that hath none; and he that hath meat, let him do likewise.
metadotw metadidOmi
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
econti echO
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
brwmata brOma
n_ Acc Pl n
LET-BE-WITH-GIVING to-THE let-him-be-sharing ! to-the-one
NO
HAVING
AND
THE
FOODS
AV
Luke 3
omoiws poieitw homoiOs poieO

LIKE-AS likewise
LET-BE-DOING let-him-be-doing ! de de
Conj
3:12 hlqon
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai telwnai kai telOnEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
baptisqhnai kai eipan baptizO kai legO

vn Aor Pas Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
12 Then came also publicans to be baptized, and said unto him, Master, what shall we do?
CAME
YET AND also
tribute-collectors TO-BE-DIPizED to-be-baptized
AND
THEY-say
TOWARD him

poihswmen poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
TEACHer !
ANY what ? de de
Conj
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOING
3:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous mhden autos mEdeis

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
pleon polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
para para
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
13 And he said unto them, Exact no more than that which is appointed you.
THE
YET he-said
TOWARD them
NO-YET-ONE MORE nothing
BESIDE THE
diatetagmenon diatassO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
prassete prassO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
HAVING-been-prescribED to-YOU(p) to-ye
YE-BE-PRACTISING be-ye-imposing ! kai strateuomenoi legontes kai strateuO legO

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
3:14 ephrwtwn de
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihswmen poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
inquirED-of
YET him
AND also
ones-WARRING soldiers
sayING
ANY what ?
SHOULD-BE-DOING
kai hmeis kai hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
kai eipen kai legO

autois mhdena autos mEdeis

pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
diaseishte diaseiO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
mhde mEde
Conj
14 And the soldiers likewise demanded of him, saying, And what shall we do? And he said unto them, Do violence to no man, neither accuse [any] falsely; and be content with your wages.
AND
WE
AND
he-said
to-them
NO-YET-ONE YE-SHOULD-BE-THRU-QUAKING NO-YET no-one ye-should-be-intimidating neither tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
sukofanthshte sukophanteO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
kai arkeisqe kai arkeO

Conj vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
oywniois opsOnion
n_ Dat Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
YE-SHOULD-BE-FIG-ALLEGING AND ye-should-be-blackmailing
YE-BE-beING-SUFFICED to-THE be-ye-being-sufficed ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
PROVISION-PURCHASES OF-YOU(p) rations of-ye pantwn en pas en

a_ Gen Pl m Prep
3:15 prosdokwntos
prosdokaO
de de
Conj
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai dialogizomenwn kai dialogizomai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
OF-TOWARD-SEEMING YET THE of-hoping kardiais autwn kardia autos

PEOPLE
AND
OF-THRU-accountING of-reasoning autos autos

pp Nom Sg m
ALL
IN
THE
15 . And as the people were in expectation, and all men mused in their hearts of John, whether he were the Christ, or not;
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iwannou mhpote iOannEs mEpote

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
HEARTS
OF-them
JOHN
NO-?-when he lest-at-some-time
MAY-BE
THE
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
3:16 apekrinato legwn

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legO
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs egw iOannEs egO

n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg
men men
Part
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
answers
sayING
to-ALL
THE
JOHN
INDEED to-water
baptizw baptizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ercetai erchomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
16 John answered, saying unto [them] all, I indeed baptize you with water; but one mightier than I cometh, the latchet of whose shoes I am not worthy to unloose: he shall baptize you with the Holy Ghost and with fire:
AM-DIPizING am-baptizing eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
YOU(p) ye ikanos hikanos
IS-COMING
YET THE
STRONGER stronger-one twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
OF-ME
OF-WHOM
NOT
lusai luO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
imanta himas
n_ Acc Sg m
upodhmatwn autou hupodEma autos

autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m
I-AM
enough competent baptisei baptizO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
TO-LOOSE THE
STRAP thong
OF-THE
sandals
OF-Him
He
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep

kai puri kai pur

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-DIPizING IN shall-be-baptizing
spirit
HOLY
AND
FIRE
AV
Luke 3
3:17 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ptuon ptuon
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
diakaqarai diakathairO
vn Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-WHOM
THE
WINNOWING-SHOVEL IN
THE
HAND
OF-Him
TO-THRU-cleanse THE to-scour eis eis

Prep
alwna halOn
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai sunagagein kai sunagO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apoqhkhn apothEkE
n_ Acc Sg f
17 Whose fan [is] in his hand, and he will throughly purge his floor, and will gather the wheat into his garner; but the chaff he will burn with fire unquenchable.
THRESHing-floor OF-Him
AND
TO-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING THE to-be-gathering
GRAIN
INTO THE
FROM-PLACE barn
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
acuron katakausei achuron katakaiO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
puri pur
n_ Dat Sg n
asbestw asbestos
a_ Dat Sg n
OF-Him
THE
YET CHAFF
He-SHALL-BE-DOWN-BURNING to-FIRE he-shall-be-burning-up parakalwn parakaleO

UN-EXTINGUISHed unextinguished ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
18 And many other things in his exhortation preached he unto the people.
3:18 polla
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
kai etera kai heteros

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
euhggelizeto euaggelizO
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
MANY
INDEED THEN AND also
DIFFERENT BESIDE-CALLING different-things entreating
he-WELL-MESSAGizED THE he-brought-the-well-message to-the
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
PEOPLE
3:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tetraarchs elegcomenos tetraarchEs elegchO

n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
peri peri
Prep
THE
YET HEROD
THE
beING-EXPOSED
by
him
ABOUT concerning pantwn wn pas hos

a_ Gen Pl n pr Gen Pl n
19 But Herod the tetrarch, being reproved by him for Herodias his brother Philip's wife, and for all the evils which Herod had done,
hrwdiados ths hErOdias ho

gunaikos tou gunE ho


kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
HERODIAS
THE
WOMAN wife o ho
OF-THE
brother
OF-him
AND
ABOUT ALL concerning
OF-WHICH which
epoihsen ponhrwn poieO ponEros

vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Gen Pl n
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
DOES
OF-wickednesses THE wicked-things
HEROD
NA
3:20 proseqhken kai touto

prostithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
epi pasin epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Pl n
kai kai
Conj
katekleisen ton katakleiO ho

iwannhn iOannEs
n_ Acc Sg m
20 Added yet this above all, that he shut up John in prison.
adds
AND also
this
ON
ALL
AND
DOWN-LOCKS he-locks-up
THE
JOHN
en en
Prep
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
GUARD-house jail de de
Conj
3:21 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
baptisqhnai apanta ton baptizO hapas ho

vn Aor Pas a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ihsou kai iEsous

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
BECAME it-occurred
YET IN
THE
ALL(emph.)
THE
PEOPLE
AND
JESUS of-Jesus
21 . Now when all the people were baptized, it came to pass, that Jesus also being baptized, and praying, the heaven was opened,
baptisqentos kai proseucomenou baptizO kai proseuchomai

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
anewcqhnai anoigO
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-BEING-DIPizED being-baptized
AND
prayING
TO-BE-UP-OPENED THE to-be-opened pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
heaven
3:22 kai katabhnai

kai
Conj
katabainO
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
swmatikw eidei sOmatikos eidos

a_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n
ws hOs
Adv
AND
TO-DOWN-STEP THE to-descend auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
spirit
THE
HOLY
to-BODYic to-bodily su su
perception
AS
peristeran ep peristera epi

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
kai fwnhn ex kai phOnE ek

ouranou genesqai ouranos ginomai

n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor midD
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
22 And the Holy Ghost descended in a bodily shape like a dove upon him, and a voice came from heaven, which said, Thou art my beloved Son; in thee I am well pleased.
pp 2 Nom Sg
DOVE
ON
Him
AND
SOUND voice
OUT OF-heaven
TO-BE-BECOMING YOU
ARE
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
eudokhsa eudokeO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
IN
YOU
AV
Luke 3
3:23 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
arcomenos archO
wsei etwn hOsei etos

Adv n_ Gen Pl n
triakonta triakonta
ni numeral
AND
He
WAS
JESUS
beginnING one-beginning
AS-IF about
OF-YEARS THREE-TY years thirty hli hEli

ni proper
23 And Jesus himself began to be about thirty years of age, being (as was supposed) the son of Joseph, which was [the son] of Heli,
wn eimi
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ws enomizeto iwshf tou hOs nomizO iOsEph ho

Adv vi impf Pas 3 Sg ni proper t_ Gen Sg m
BEING
SON
AS
was-LAWizED was-legalized leui leui

ni proper
JOSEPH of-Joseph
OF-THE
ELI
3:24 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
maqqat tou maththat ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
melci tou melchi ho

iannai tou iannai ho

iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
OF-THE
MATTHAT
OF-THE
LEVI
OF-THE
MELCHI Mechi
OF-THE
JANNAI
OF-THE
JOSEPH
3:25 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mattaqiou tou mattathias ho

amws tou amOs ho

naoum tou naoum ho

esli hesli
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
naggai naggai
ni proper
OF-THE
MATTATHIAS
OF-THE
AMOS
OF-THE
NAUM Nahum
OF-THE
ESLI
OF-THE
NAGGAI
3:26 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
maaq maath
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mattaqiou tou mattathias ho

semein tou semein ho

iwshc tou iOsEch ho

iwda iOda
ni proper
OF-THE
MAATH
OF-THE
MATTATHIAS
OF-THE
SEMEIN Shemei
OF-THE
JOSECH
OF-THE
JODA
3:27 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iwanan tou iOanan ho

rhsa rhEsa
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
zorobabel tou zorobabel ho

salaqihl tou salathiEl ho

OF-THE
JOANAN
OF-THE
RHESA
OF-THE
ZOROBABEL
OF-THE
SALATHIEL
OF-THE
nhri nEri
ni proper
24 Which was [the son] of Matthat, which was [the son] of Levi, which was [the son] of Melchi, which was [the son] of Janna, which was [the son] of Joseph, 25 Which was [the son] of Mattathias, which was [the son] of Amos, which was [the son] of Naum, which was [the son] of Esli, which was [the son] of Nagge, 26 Which was [the son] of Maath, which was [the son] of Mattathias, which was [the son] of Semei, which was [the son] of Joseph, which was [the son] of Juda, 27 Which was [the son] of Joanna, which was [the son] of Rhesa, which was [the son] of Zorobabel, which was [the son] of Salathiel, which was [the son] of Neri,
NERI
3:28 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
melci tou melchi ho

addi addi
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kwsam tou kOsam ho

elmadam tou elmadam ho

hr Er
ni proper
OF-THE
MELCHI Mechi ihsou iEsous
OF-THE
ADDI
OF-THE
COSAM
OF-THE
ELMADAM
OF-THE
ER
3:29 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eliezer tou eliezer ho

iwrim tou iOrim ho

maqqat tou maththat ho

leui leui
ni proper
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
JESUS
OF-THE
ELIEZER
OF-THE
JORIM
OF-THE
MATTHAT
OF-THE
LEVI
3:30 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sumewn tou sumeOn ho

iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iwshf tou iOsEph ho

iwnam tou iOnam ho

eliakim eliakim
ni proper
OF-THE
SIMEON
OF-THE
JUDA Judah
OF-THE
JOSEPH
OF-THE
JONAM
OF-THE
ELIAKIM
3:31 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
melea tou melea ho

menna tou menna ho

mattaqa tou mattatha ho

naqam natham
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dauid dauid
ni proper
OF-THE
MELEA
OF-THE
MENNA
OF-THE
MATTATHA
OF-THE
NATHAM OF-THE Nathan sala sala

ni proper
DAVID
3:32 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iessai tou iessai ho

iwbhd tou iObEd ho

boos boes
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
naasswn naassOn
ni proper
OF-THE
JESSE
NA
OF-THE
NA
OBED
OF-THE
BOAZ
OF-THE
SALA
OF-THE
NAASSON
3:33 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aminadab tou aminadab ho

admin tou admin ho

arni arni
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
esrwm tou hesrOm ho

OF-THE
AMINADAB
OF-THE
ADMIN
OF-THE
ARNI
OF-THE
ESROM
OF-THE
fares tou phares ho

iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
28 Which was [the son] of Melchi, which was [the son] of Addi, which was [the son] of Cosam, which was [the son] of Elmodam, which was [the son] of Er, 29 Which was [the son] of Jose, which was [the son] of Eliezer, which was [the son] of Jorim, which was [the son] of Matthat, which was [the son] of Levi, 30 Which was [the son] of Simeon, which was [the son] of Juda, which was [the son] of Joseph, which was [the son] of Jonan, which was [the son] of Eliakim, 31 Which was [the son] of Melea, which was [the son] of Menan, which was [the son] of Mattatha, which was [the son] of Nathan, which was [the son] of David, 32 Which was [the son] of Jesse, which was [the son] of Obed, which was [the son] of Booz, which was [the son] of Salmon, which was [the son] of Naasson, 33 Which was [the son] of Aminadab, which was [the son] of Aram, which was [the son] of Esrom, which was [the son] of Phares, which was [the son] of Juda,
PHARES OF-THE
JUDA Judah iakwb tou iakOb ho

3:34 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
isaak tou isaak ho

abraam abraam
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qara thara
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nacwr nachOr
ni proper
OF-THE
JACOB
OF-THE
ISAAC
OF-THE
ABRAHAM OF-THE
THARA Tera
OF-THE
NACHOR Nahor
34 Which was [the son] of Jacob, which was [the son] of Isaac, which was [the son] of Abraham, which was [the son] of Thara, which was [the son]
AV
Luke 3 - Luke 4
3:35 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
serouc tou serouch ho

ragau tou rhagau ho

falek tou phalek ho

eber eber
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sala sala
ni proper
OF-THE
SERUCH Serug
OF-THE
RAGAU Reu
OF-THE
PHALEC Peleg shm sEm

ni proper
OF-THE
EBER
OF-THE
SALA
3:36 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kainam tou kainam ho

arfaxad tou arphaxad ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nwe nOe
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
lamec lamech
ni proper
OF-THE
CAINAN
OF-THE
ARPHAXAD
OF-THE
SEM Shem
OF-THE
NOAH
OF-THE
LAMECH
3:37 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
maqousala tou mathousala ho

enwc tou henOch ho

iaret tou iaret ho

malelehl tou maleleEl ho

OF-THE
MATHUSALA Methuselah
OF-THE
ENOCH
OF-THE
JARED
OF-THE
MALELEEL
OF-THE
kainam kainam
ni proper
of Nachor, 35 Which was [the son] of Saruch, which was [the son] of Ragau, which was [the son] of Phalec, which was [the son] of Heber, which was [the son] of Sala, 36 Which was [the son] of Cainan, which was [the son] of Arphaxad, which was [the son] of Sem, which was [the son] of Noe, which was [the son] of Lamech, 37 Which was [the son] of Mathusala, which was [the son] of Enoch, which was [the son] of Jared, which was [the son] of Maleleel, which was [the son] of Cainan,
CAINAN
3:38 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enws tou enOs ho

shq sEth
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
adam adam
ni proper
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
ENOS Enosh
OF-THE
SETH
OF-THE
ADAM
OF-THE
God
38 Which was [the son] Enos, which was [the son] Seth, which was [the son] Adam, which was [the son] God.
of of of of
AV
Luke 4
4:1 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg m
pneumatos agiou pneuma hagios

n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
upestreyen apo hupostrephO apo

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou kai iordanEs kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
JESUS
YET FULL
OF-spirit
HOLY
reTURNS
FROM THE
JORDAN
AND
. And Jesus being full of the Holy Ghost returned from Jordan, and was led by the Spirit into the wilderness,
hgeto agO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati en pneuma en
n_ Dat Sg n Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
was-LED
IN
THE
spirit
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness diabolou diabolos

a_ Gen Sg m
4:2 hmeras tesserakonta peirazomenos upo tou

hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
tesserakonta
ni numeral
peirazO
hupo
Prep
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
efagen esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
DAYS
FOUR-TY forty en en
Prep
beING-triED
by
THE
NOT
He-ATE
Being forty days tempted of the devil. And in those days he did eat nothing: and when they were ended, he afterward hungered.
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ekeinais kai suntelesqeiswn autwn epeinasen hEmera ekeinos kai sunteleO autos peinaO
n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f Conj vp Aor Pas Gen Pl f pp Gen Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE IN anything
THE
DAYS
those
AND
OF-BEING-concludED
them
He-HUNGERS
4:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
said
YET to-Him
THE
THRU-CASTer IF Adversary genhtai ginomai
SON
YOU-ARE
OF-THE
God
And the devil said unto him, If thou be the Son of God, command this stone that it be made bread.
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
liqw lithos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw ina houtos hina

pd Dat Sg m Conj
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
to-THE
STONE
this
THAT it-MAY-BE-BECOMING BREAD
4:4 kai apekriqh

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
ep epi
Prep
AND
answerED
TOWARD him
THE
JESUS
NOT
ON
And Jesus answered him, saying, It is written, That man shall not live by bread alone, but by every word of God.
artw artos
n_ Dat Sg m
monw monos
a_ Dat Sg m
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
BREAD
ONLY alone
SHALL-BE-LIVING THE
human
4:5 kai anagagwn

kai
Conj
anagO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
edeixen deiknumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pasas pas
a_ Acc Pl f
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
basileias ths basileia ho

AND
UP-LEADING leading-up en en
Prep
Him
he-SHOWS
to-Him him
ALL
THE
KINGdoms
OF-THE
And the devil, taking him up into an high mountain, shewed unto him all the kingdoms of the world in a moment of time.
oikoumenhs oikoumenE
n_ Gen Sg f
stigmh cronou stigmE chronos

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
OF-beING-HOMED IN inhabited-earth
PRICK instant autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-TIME
4:6 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exousian exousia
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
said
to-Him
THE
THRU-CASTer to-YOU Adversary doxan doxa

n_ Acc Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
authority
And the devil said unto him, All this power will I give thee, and the glory of them: for that is delivered unto me; and to whomsoever I will I give it.
tauthn apasan houtos hapas

pd Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
autwn oti emoi autos hoti egO

pp Gen Pl f Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
paradedotai paradidOmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
this
EVERY(emph.) AND all(emph.) ean ean

Cond
THE
esteem glory didwmi didOmi

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-them
that
to-ME
HAS-been-BESIDE-GIVEN AND it-has-been-given-up
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
qelw thelO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
to-WHOM
IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-WILLING I-AM-GIVING
her herit enwpion emou enOpion egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
4:7 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oun oun
Conj
ean ean
Cond
proskunhshs proskuneO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
If thou therefore wilt worship me, all shall be thine.
YOU
THEN IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-worshipING IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore should-be-worshiping
OF-ME me
SHALL-BE it-shall-be
OF-YOU
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
EVERY all
AV
Luke 4
4:8 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
to-him
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN Master Lord monw monos

a_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
proskunhseis proskuneO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kai autw kai autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
And Jesus answered and said unto him, Get thee behind me, Satan: for it is written, Thou shalt worship the Lord thy God, and him only shalt thou serve.
THE
God
OF-YOU
YOU-SHALL-BE-worshipING AND
to-Him
ONLY
latreuseis latreuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE you-shall-be-offering-divine-service
4:9 hgagen
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm kai esthsen ierosoluma kai histEmi

ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
pterugion pterugion
n_ Acc Sg n
he-LED
YET Him
INTO JERUSALEM
WH
AND
STANDS
NA
ON
THE
flyer-let little-wing ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
kai eipen kai legO

autw
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
And he brought him to Jerusalem, and set him on a pinnacle of the temple, and said unto him, If thou be the Son of God, cast thyself down from hence:
OF-THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
said he-said
to-Him
IF
SON
YOU-ARE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
bale ballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton enteuqen katw seautou enteuthen katO

pf 3 Acc Sg m Adv Adv
OF-THE
God
BE-CASTING YOURself be-you-casting ! gar oti tois gar hoti ho

Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl m
hence
DOWN
4:10 gegraptai
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
aggelois aggelos
n_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
enteleitai entellomai
vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
10 For it is written, He shall give his angels charge over thee, to keep thee:
that
to-THE
MESSENGERS OF-Him
SHALL-BE-beING-directED ABOUT it-shall-be-being-directed concerning
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
diafulaxai se diaphulassO su
YOU
OF-THE
TO-protect
YOU
4:11 kai oti epi ceirwn arousin

kai
Conj
hoti
Conj
epi
Prep
cheir
n_ Gen Pl f
airO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
mhpote mEpote
Adv
AND
that
ON
HANDS
THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING YOU
NO-?-when lest-at-some-time poda pous

n_ Acc Sg m
11 And in [their] hands they shall bear thee up, lest at any time thou dash thy foot against a stone.
proskoyhs proskoptO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
pros pros
Prep
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-STRIKING TOWARD STONE you-should-be-dashing-against
THE
FOOT
OF-YOU
4:12 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti eirhtai hoti ereO

Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
12 And Jesus answering said unto him, It is said, Thou shalt not tempt the Lord thy God.
AND
answerING
said
to-him
THE
JESUS
that
it-HAS-been-declarED NOT
ekpeiraseis ekpeirazO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-tryING Master you-shall-be-putting-on-trial Lord
THE
God
OF-YOU
4:13 kai suntelesas

kai
Conj
sunteleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
peirasmon o peirasmos ho
n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
apesth aphistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
concluding
EVERY
trial
THE
THRU-CASTer FROM-STOOD FROM Him Adversary withdrew
13 And when the devil had ended all the temptation, he departed from him for a season.
acri kairou achri kairos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
UNTIL SEASON appointed-time
4:14 kai upestreyen o

kai
Conj
hupostrephO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dunamei tou dunamis ho

pneumatos eis pneuma eis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
AND
reTURNS
THE
JESUS
IN
THE
ABILITY power
OF-THE
spirit
INTO
14 . And Jesus returned in the power of the Spirit into Galilee: and there went out a fame of him through all the region round about.
AV
Luke 4
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian kai fhmh galilaia kai phEmE

exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kaq kata
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pericwrou peri perichOros peri

a_ Gen Sg f Prep
THE
GALILEE
AND
AVERment fame
OUT-CAME came-out
DOWN WHOLE
OF-THE
ABOUT concerning
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
Him
4:15 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
edidasken en didaskO en
vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
doxazomenos doxazO
upo hupo
Prep
15 And he taught in their synagogues, being glorified of all.
AND
He
TAUGHT
IN
THE
beING-esteemizED being-glorified
by
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
ALL
4:16 kai hlqen

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
nazara nazareth
ni proper
ou hou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
teqrammenos trephO

AND
He-CAME
INTO NAZARETH where He-WAS
HAVING-been-NURTURED AND having-been-reared th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
He-INTO-CAME he-entered
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eiwqos ethO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn eis sabbaton eis

n_ Gen Pl n Prep
16 And he came to Nazareth, where he had been brought up: and, as his custom was, he went into the synagogue on the sabbath day, and stood up for to read.
according-to THE
HAVING-CUSTOMED to-Him having-been-customed kai anesth kai anistEmi

IN
THE
DAY
OF-THE
SABBATHS
INTO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
anagnwnai anaginOskO
vn 2Aor Act
THE
He-UP-STOOD TO-read rose biblion biblion

n_ Nom Sg n
4:17 kai epedoqh

kai
Conj
epididOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
WH
anoixas
AND
NA
WAS-ON-GIVEN to-Him was-handed to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
SCROLLet
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERer ISAIAH prophet

WH
AND
17 And there was delivered unto him the book of the prophet Esaias. And when he had opened the book, he found the place where it was written,
anaptuxas anaptussO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
biblion euren biblion heuriskO

n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton
NA
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ou hou
Adv
UP-ROTATing unfurling hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
SCROLLet
He-FOUND
THE
PLACE
where
gegrammenon graphO
it-WAS
HAVING-been-WRITTEN
4:18 pneuma
pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ep epi
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
eineken heneken
Adv
ecrisen chriO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
euaggelisasqai euaggelizO
vn Aor Mid
spirit
OF-Master of-Lord
ON
ME
OF-WHICH on-account-of He-ANOINTS ME which khruxai kErussO

vn Aor Act
TO-WELL-MESSAGize to-bring-the-well-message kai tuflois kai tuphlos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
ptwcois ptOchos
a_ Dat Pl m
apestalken apostellO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
aicmalwtois afesin aichmalOtos aphesis

n_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
to-POOR-ones He-HAS-commissionED ME to-poor-ones anableyin anablepsis

n_ Acc Sg f
TO-PROCLAIM to-captives to-herald en en

Prep
FROM-LETTing AND pardon
to-BLIND-ones to-blind-ones
18 The Spirit of the Lord [is] upon me, because he hath anointed me to preach the gospel to the poor; he hath sent me to heal the brokenhearted, to preach deliverance to the captives, and recovering of sight to the blind, to set at liberty them that are bruised,
aposteilai teqrausmenous apostellO thrauO

vn Aor Act vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m
afesei aphesis
n_ Dat Sg f
UP-looking TO-commission receiving-of-sight to-dispatch
ones-HAVING-been-SHIVERED IN ones-having-been-oppressed dekton dektos

a_ Acc Sg m
FROM-LETTing pardon
19 To preach the acceptable year of the Lord.
4:19 khruxai
kErussO
vn Aor Act
eniauton kuriou eniautos kurios

TO-PROCLAIM year to-herald
OF-Master of-Lord to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
RECEIVable acceptable tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
4:20 kai ptuxas

kai
Conj
ptussO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
biblion apodous biblion apodidOmi

n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
uphreth ekaqisen kai hupEretEs kathizO kai

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
AND
ROTATing furling
THE
SCROLLet
FROM-GIVING giving-back-it
to-THE
subservient deputy
He-is-seated
AND
20 And he closed the book, and he gave [it] again to the minister, and sat down. And the eyes of all them that were in the synagogue were fastened
AV
Luke 4
pantwn oi pas ho
ofqalmoi en ophthalmos en
n_ Nom Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
atenizontes autw atenizO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
on him.
OF-ALL
THE
VIEWers eyes de de
Conj
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD WERE synagogue
STRETCHING looking-intently
to-Him
4:21 hrxato
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legein legO
vn Pres Act
pros pros
Prep
autous oti shmeron peplhrwtai h autos hoti sEmeron plEroO ho

pp Acc Pl m Conj Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
21 And he began to say unto them, This day is this scripture fulfilled in your ears.
He-begins
YET TO-BE-sayING TOWARD them
that
toDAY
HAS-been-FILLED has-been-fulfilled
THE
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
wsin ous
n_ Dat Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
WRITing scripture
this
IN
THE
EARS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye kai eqaumazon epi tois kai thaumazO epi ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Dat Pl m
4:22 kai pantes emarturoun autw

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
martureO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
logois ths logos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
AND
ALL
witnessED testified
to-Him
AND
MARVELED
ON
THE
sayings words
OF-THE
22 And all bare him witness, and wondered at the gracious words which proceeded out of his mouth. And they said, Is not this Joseph's son?
caritos tois charis ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
ekporeuomenois ekporeuomai
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
stomatos autou stoma autos

kai elegon kai legO

grace
to-THE the uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
OUT-GOING ones-issuing estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
AND
THEY-said
ouci ouchi
Part Int
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
NOT(emph.) SON
IS
of-JOSEPH this of-Joseph pros pros

Prep
4:23 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous pantws ereite autos pantOs ereO

pp Acc Pl m Adv vi Fut Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn parabolE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
ALL-ly undoubtedly
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING to-ME
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable eis eis

Prep
tauthn iatre houtos iatros

pd Acc Sg f n_ Voc Sg m
qerapeuson seauton osa therapeuO seautou hosos

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m pk Acc Pl n
hkousamen genomena akouO ginomai

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
23 And he said unto them, Ye will surely say unto me this proverb, Physician, heal thyself: whatsoever we have heard done in Capernaum, do also here in thy country.
this
HEALer ! physician !
cure cure-you !
YOURself
as-much-as WE-HEAR whatever th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
BECOMING occurring(p) sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
INTO THE
kafarnaoum poihson kapharnaoum poieO

kai wde en kai hOde en

Conj Adv Prep
patridi patris
n_ Dat Sg f
CAPERNAUM
DO do-you ! de de
Conj
AND also
here
IN
THE
FATHER[-place] OF-YOU own-country oti oudeis hoti oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
4:24 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
dektos dektos
a_ Nom Sg m
He-said
YET AMEN verily en en

Prep
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
24 And he said, Verily I say unto you, No prophet is accepted in his own country.
that
NOT-YET-ONE BEFORE-AVERer RECEIVable not-one prophet acceptable
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
patridi patris
n_ Dat Sg f
IS
IN
THE
FATHER[-place] OF-him own-country legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
4:25 ep
epi
Prep
alhqeias de alEtheia de
n_ Gen Sg f Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pollai chrai polus chEra

a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
ON
TRUTH
YET I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
MANY
WIDOWS
WERE
IN
NA
THE
DAYS
hliou Elias
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
israhl ote ekleisqh o israEl hote kleiO ho

ni proper Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos ouranos
n_ Nom Sg m
epi epi
Prep
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
tria treis
n_ Acc Pl n
25 But I tell you of a truth, many widows were in Israel in the days of Elias, when the heaven was shut up three years and six months, when great famine was throughout all the land;
OF-ELIAS of-Elijah
IN
THE
ISRAEL
when
IS-LOCKED
THE
heaven
ON
YEARS
THREE
kai mhnas kai mEn

Conj n_ Acc Pl m
ex hex
ni numeral
ws egeneto hOs ginomai

limos limos
n_ Nom Sg m
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
epi epi
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
MONTHS
SIX
AS
BECAME came-to-be
FAMINE
GREAT
ON EVERY onover entire ei ei

Cond
THE
LAND
4:26 kai pros

kai
Conj
pros
Prep
oudemian oudeis
a_ Acc Sg f
autwn epemfqh autos pempO

pp Gen Pl f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
sarepta ths sarepta ho

AND
TOWARD NOT-YET-ONE OF-them none
WAS-SENT
ELIAS Elijah
IF
NO
INTO SAREPTA
OF-THE
26 But unto none of them was Elias sent, save unto Sarepta, [a city] of Sidon, unto a woman [that was] a widow.
AV
Luke 4
sidwnias pros sidOnios pros

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
gunaika chran gunE chEra

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
SIDONIA
TOWARD WOMAN
WIDOW
4:27 kai polloi

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
leproi lepros
a_ Nom Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
israhl epi elisaiou tou israEl epi elisaios ho

ni proper Prep n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
AND
MANY
lepers
WERE
IN
THE
ISRAEL
ON
ELISSAIOS Elisha naiman o naiman ho

ni proper
OF-THE the suros suros

n_ Nom Sg m
27 And many lepers were in Israel in the time of Eliseus the prophet; and none of them was cleansed, saving Naaman the Syrian.
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ekaqarisqh ei katharizO ei
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
t_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer AND prophet
NOT-YET-ONE OF-them none
IS-cleansED
IF
NO
NAAMAN
THE
SYRIAN
4:28 kai eplhsqhsan pantes qumou

kai
Conj
plEthO (pimplEmi)
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
thumos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
akouontes akouO
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
AND
ARE-FILLED
ALL all-men
OF-fury
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD HEARING synagogue exw exO

Adv
these these-things
28 And all they in the synagogue, when they heard these things, were filled with wrath,
4:29 kai anastantes

kai
Conj
anistEmi
exebalon ekballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai hgagon polis kai agO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
UP-STANDing rising
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) Him they-cast-out (past) orous oros

n_ Gen Sg n
OUT OF-THE outside ou hos

pr Gen Sg n
city
AND
THEY-LED
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ews ofruos tou heOs ophrus ho

Conj n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
ef epi
Prep
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
wkodomhto oikodomeO
vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
29 And rose up, and thrust him out of the city, and led him unto the brow of the hill whereon their city was built, that they might cast him down headlong.
Him
TILL
OF-BROW brow
OF-THE
mountain
ON
OF-WHICH THE which
city
HAD-been-HOME-BUILDED had-been-built
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
wste hOste
Conj
katakrhmnisai katakrEmnizO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
OF-them
AS-BESIDES TO-DOWN-HANG Him so-as to-push-over-the-precipice de de

Conj
4:30 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
dielqwn dierchomai
dia dia
Prep
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eporeueto poreuomai
30 But he passing through the midst of them went his way,
He
YET THRU-COMING passing-through eis eis

Prep
THRU MIDst through
OF-them
WENT
4:31 kai kathlqen

kai
Conj
katerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kafarnaoum polin kapharnaoum polis

ni proper n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai hn galilaia kai eimi

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
He-DOWN-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM he-came-down autous en autos en

pp Acc Pl m Prep
city
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
He-WAS
31 . And came down to Capernaum, a city of Galilee, and taught them on the sabbath days.
didaskwn didaskO
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin sabbaton
n_ Dat Pl n
TEACHING
them
IN
THE
SABBATHS
4:32 kai exeplhssonto

kai
Conj
ekplEssO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f

oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
exousia hn exousia eimi

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Sg
32 And they were astonished at his doctrine: for his word was with power.
AND
THEY-were-astonishED ON
THE
TEACHing
OF-Him
that
IN
authority
WAS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
saying word th ho
OF-Him
4:33 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpos ecwn anthrOpos echO

pneuma daimoniou pneuma daimonion

t_ Dat Sg f
AND
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD WAS synagogue megalh mega

a_ Dat Sg f
human
HAVING
spirit
OF-demon
33 And in the synagogue there was a man, which had a spirit of an unclean devil, and cried out with a loud voice,
akaqartou kai anekraxen fwnh akathartos kai anakrazO phOnE

a_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg f
UN-clean unclean
AND
he-UP-CRIES it-cries-out hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud ihsou iEsous

n_ Voc Sg m
4:34 ea
ea
Inj
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
nazarhne hlqes nazarEnos erchomai

n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
apolesai hmas apollumi hEmeis

vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Pl
HA ! ANY what ?
to-US
AND
to-YOU
JESUS !
NAZAREAN !
YOU-CAME
TO-destroy
US
34 Saying, Let [us] alone; what have we to do with thee, [thou] Jesus of Nazareth? art thou come to destroy us? I know thee who thou art; the Holy
AV
Luke 4
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agios hagios
a_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
One of God.
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU I-am-aware-of
ANY who ? o ho
ARE you-are
THE
HOLY-One holy-one legwn legO
OF-THE
God

kai
Conj
epitimaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Dat Sg n
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
fimwqhti phimoO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
rebukES
to-it it autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
JESUS
sayING
BE-BEING-MUZZLED AND be-you-still ! to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ap apo
Prep
kai riyan kai rhiptO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
daimonion eis daimonion eis

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
35 And Jesus rebuked him, saying, Hold thy peace, and come out of him. And when the devil had thrown him in the midst, he came out of him, and hurt him not.
BE-OUT-COMING FROM him be-you-coming-out ! meson mesos

a_ Acc Sg n
AND
TOSSing pitching mhden mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
him
THE
demon
INTO THE
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
blayan blaptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
MIDst
OUT-CAME came-out
FROM him
NO-YET-ONE HARMing nothing
him
4:36 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
qambos thambos
n_ Nom Sg n
epi pantas kai sunelaloun epi pas kai sullaleO

Prep a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
AND
BECAME
AWE
ON
ALL
AND
THEY-TOGETHER-TALKED TOWARD one-another they-conferred oti en hoti en

Conj Prep
legontes legO
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
exousia kai dunamei exousia kai dunamis

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f
36 And they were all amazed, and spake among themselves, saying, What a word [is] this! for with authority and power he commandeth the unclean spirits, and they come out.
sayING
ANY what ? tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
THE
saying word
this
that
IN
authority
AND
ABILITY power
epitassei epitassO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
akaqartois pneumasin kai exercontai akathartos pneuma kai exerchomai

a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
He-IS-enjoinING to-THE the
UN-clean unclean hcos Echos

n_ Nom Sg m
spirits
AND
THEY-ARE-OUT-COMING they-are-coming-out eis eis

Prep
4:37 kai exeporeueto

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
37 And the fame of him went out into every place of the country round about.
AND
OUT-WENT went-out
RESOUND hubbub
INTO EVERY
PLACE
OF-THE
pericwrou perichOros
a_ Gen Sg f
4:38 anastas
anistEmi
de de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sunagwghs sunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
UP-STANDing rising simwnos penqera simOn penthera

YET FROM THE
TOGETHER-LEAD He-INTO-CAME INTO THE synagogue he-entered simwnos hn simOn eimi

HOME house
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sunecomenh sunechO
puretw megalw puretos mega

n_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m
38 And he arose out of the synagogue, and entered into Simon's house. And Simon's wife's mother was taken with a great fever; and they besought him for her.
OF-SIMON
mother-IN-LAW YET OF-THE
SIMON
WAS
beING-pressED
to-fever
GREAT high
kai hrwthsan auton kai erOtaO autos

peri peri
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
AND
THEY-ask
Him
ABOUT her
4:39 kai epistas

kai
Conj
ephistEmi
epanw auths epanO autos

Adv pp Gen Sg f
epetimhsen tw epitimaO ho
puretw kai afhken puretos kai aphiEmi

n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
ON-STANDing standing-by paracrhma de parachrEma de

Adv Conj
ON-UP over
OF-her her
He-rebukES
to-THE the autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
fever
AND
it-FROM-LETS it-leaves
39 And he stood over her, and rebuked the fever; and it left her: and immediately she arose and ministered unto them.
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
anastasa anistEmi
dihkonei diakoneO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
her
instantly
YET UP-STANDing rising de de

Conj
she-THRU-SERVED to-them she-served them apantes osoi hapas hosos

a_ Nom Pl m pk Nom Pl m
4:40 dunontos
dunO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hliou hElios
n_ Gen Sg m
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
OF-SLIPPING of-setting
YET OF-THE
SUN
ALL(emph.)
as-many-as HAD whoever
ones-beING-UN-FIRM ones-being-infirm
40 Now when the sun was setting, all they that had any sick with divers diseases brought them unto him; and he laid his hands on every one of
AV
Luke 4 - Luke 5
nosois nosos
n_ Dat Pl f
poikilais hgagon poikilos agO

a_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autous pros autos pros

pp Acc Pl m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
ekastw hekastos
a_ Dat Sg m
them, and healed them.
to-DISEASES VARIOUS
LED
them
TOWARD Him
THE
YET ONE to-one
to-EACH each
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras epitiqeis cheir epitithEmi

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
eqerapeuen autous therapeuO autos

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
OF-them
THE
HANDS
BEING-ON-PLACED HE-curED being-placed-on kai daimonia apo kai daimonion apo

Conj n_ Nom Pl n Prep
them
WH NA
4:41 exhrceto
exerchomai
de de
Conj
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl m
krazonta
kraugazonta kraugazO
kai kai
Conj
OUT-CAME came-out legonta legO

YET AND also oti su hoti su

Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
demons
FROM MANY
clamorING
AND
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
41 And devils also came out of many, crying out, and saying, Thou art Christ the Son of God. And he rebuking [them] suffered them not to speak: for they knew that he was Christ.
sayING
that
YOU
ARE
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
AND
epitimwn epitimaO
ouk ou
Part Neg
eia eaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
oti hdeisan hoti eidO

Conj vi Plup Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
rebukING rebuking-them
NOT
He-LEFT he-let einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
them
TO-BE-TALKING that to-be-speaking
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED THE
criston auton christos autos

n_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
Him
TO-BE
4:42 genomenhs
ginomai
de de
Conj
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
exelqwn exerchomai
eporeuqh poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
OF-BECOMING
YET DAY of-day
He-WAS-GONE INTO DESOLATE PLACE he-went ews autou heOs autos

Conj pp Gen Sg m
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
epezhtoun auton epizEteO autos


kai kateicon kai katechO

42 And when it was day, he departed and went into a desert place: and the people sought him, and came unto him, and stayed him, that he should not depart from them.
THE
THRONGS
ON-SOUGHT sought-for mh mE
Part Neg
Him
AND
THEY-CAME
TILL
OF-Him him
AND
THEY-DOWN-HAD detained
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
poreuesqai ap poreuomai apo

vn Pres midD/pasD Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
Him
OF-THE
NO
TO-BE-GOING
FROM them
4:43 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous oti kai tais autos hoti kai ho

pp Acc Pl m Conj Conj t_ Dat Pl f
eterais heteros
a_ Dat Pl f
polesin polis
n_ Dat Pl f
THE
YET He-said
TOWARD them
that
AND also
to-THE
DIFFERENT cities
43 And he said unto them, I must preach the kingdom of God to other cities also: for therefore am I sent.
vn Aor Mid
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti epi hoti epi

Conj Prep
TO-WELL-MESSAGize ME to-bring-the-well-message touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
it-IS-BINDING
THE of-the
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
that
ON
apestalhn apostellO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg
this
I-WAS-commissionED
4:44 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
khrusswn kErussO
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
44 And he preached in the synagogues of Galilee.
AND
He-WAS
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEADS OF-THE synagogues
JUDEA
AV
Luke 5
5:1 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
epikeisqai epikeimai
vn Pres midD/pasD
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai akouein kai akouO

Conj vn Pres Act
BECAME it-occurred ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET IN
THE
THE
THRONG
TO-BE-ON-LYING to-Him to-be-being-importune hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
TO-BE-HEARING
. And it came to pass, that, as the people pressed upon him to hear the word of God, he stood by the lake of Gennesaret,
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
estws histEmi
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
AND also
He
WAS
BESIDE THE
limnhn gennhsaret limnE gennEsaret

LAKE
GENNESARET
WH WH NA NA
5:2 kai eiden

kai
Conj
ploia duo
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
ploia ploion
n_ Acc Pl n
estwta histEmi
vp Perf Act Acc Pl n
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
limnhn limnE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
He-PERCEIVED
TWO
FLOATers ships
HAVING-STOOD standing ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
BESIDE THE
LAKE
And saw two ships standing by the lake: but the fishermen were gone out of them, and were washing [their] nets.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
alieis halieus
n_ Nom Pl m
ap apo
Prep
autwn apobantes autos apobainO

pp Gen Pl n vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
eplunon plunO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
diktua diktuon
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
YET fishers
FROM them
FROM-STEPPing stepping-off twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
PLUNGED rinsed
THE
NETS
5:3 embas
embainO
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
ploiwn o ploion hos

n_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
simwnos simOn
n_ Gen Sg m
IN-STEPPing stepping-in hrwthsen auton erOtaO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
YET INTO ONE
OF-THE
FLOATers ships
WHICH
WAS
OF-SIMON
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
epanagagein epanagO
vn 2Aor Act
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg m
kaqisas kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
And he entered into one of the ships, which was Simon's, and prayed him that he would thrust out a little from the land. And he sat down, and taught the people out of the ship.
pp Acc Sg m
He-asks
him
FROM THE
LAND
TO-BE-ON-UP-LEADING FEW to-be-backing-up slightly
being-seated
YET OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
edidasken tous didaskO ho

vi impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
oclous ochlos
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
FLOATer ship
He-TAUGHT
THE
THRONGS
5:4 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
epausato lalwn pauO laleO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
simwna simOn
n_ Acc Sg m
AS
YET He-CEASES
TALKING speaking to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
He-said
TOWARD THE
SIMON
Now when he had left speaking, he said unto Simon, Launch out into the deep, and let down your nets for a draught.
epanagage epanagO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
baqos bathos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai calasate ta kai chalaO ho

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
diktua umwn diktuon humeis

eis eis
Prep
YOU-BE-ON-UP-LEADING INTO THE be-you-backing-up ! agran agra

n_ Acc Sg f
DEPTH
AND
LOWER lower-ye !
THE
NETS
OF-YOU(p) INTO of-ye
CATCH
5:5 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epistata di epistatEs dia

n_ Voc Sg m Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
nuktos nux
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
answerING
SIMON
said
Adept ! Doctor ! tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
THRU WHOLE through rhmati rhEma

n_ Dat Sg n
NIGHT
kopiasantes ouden kopiaO oudeis

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
elabomen epi de lambanO epi de

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep Conj
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
calasw chalaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
And Simon answering said unto him, Master, we have toiled all the night, and have taken nothing: nevertheless at thy word I will let down the net.
toiling
NOT-YET-ONE WE-GOT nothing diktua diktuon

n_ Acc Pl n
ON
YET THE
declaration OF-YOU
I-SHALL-BE-LOWERING
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
NETS
5:6 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poihsantes poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
sunekleisan sugkleiO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
plhqos icquwn polu plEthos ichthus polus

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
dierrhsseto diarrhEgnumi
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
AND
this
DOing
THEY-TOGETHER-LOCK multitude they-impound
OF-FISHES MANY vast
was-THRU-BURSTED tore-through
And when they had this done, they inclosed a great multitude of fishes: and their net brake.
AV
Luke 5
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
diktua autwn diktuon autos

n_ Nom Pl n pp Gen Pl m
YET THE
NETS
OF-them
5:7 kai kateneusan

kai
Conj
kataneuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
metocois en metochos en
a_ Dat Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg n
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
THEY-DOWN-NOD to-THE they-beckon sullabesqai sullambanO

vn 2Aor Mid
WITH-HAVers partners
IN
THE
DIFFERENT FLOATer ship
OF-THE
elqontas erchomai
vp 2Aor Act Acc Pl m
autois kai hlqon autos kai erchomai

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai eplhsan amfotera kai plEthO (pimplEmi) amphoteroi

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n
And they beckoned unto [their] partners, which were in the other ship, that they should come and help them. And they came, and filled both the ships, so that they began to sink.
COMING ones-coming ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING to-them to-be-helping them wste hOste

Conj
AND
THEY-CAME
AND
THEY-FILL
both
ploia ploion
n_ Acc Pl n
buqizesqai buthizO
vn Pres Pas
auta autos
pp Nom Pl n
THE
FLOATers AS-BESIDES TO-BE-beING-SUBMERGED them ships so-that to-be-being-swamped de de

Conj
5:8 idwn
eidO
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
prosepesen tois prospiptO ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n
gonasin ihsou gonu iEsous

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Sg m
PERCEIVING perceiving-it legwn legO

YET SIMON
Peter
TOWARD-FALLS prostrates emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
to-THE
KNEES
OF-JESUS
When Simon Peter saw [it], he fell down at Jesus'knees, saying, Depart from me; for I am a sinful man, O Lord.
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ap apo
Prep
oti anhr hoti anEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
amartwlos eimi hamartOlos eimi

kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
sayING
BE-OUT-COMING FROM ME be-you-coming-away ! gar periescen gar periechO

that
MAN
misser sinner sun sun

Prep
I-AM
Master ! Lord ! epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
9
5:9 qambos
thambos
n_ Nom Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai pantas tous kai pas ho

Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AWE
for
ABOUT-has-HAD him engulfs icquwn wn ichthus hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Gen Pl m
AND
ALL
THE-ones the-ones
ON
THE
For he was astonished, and all that were with him, at the draught of the fishes which they had taken:
agra agra
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sunelabon sullambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
CATCH
OF-THE
FISHES
OF-WHICH THEY-TOGETHER-GOT which they-jointly-took zebedaiou oi zebedaios hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Nom Pl m
5:10 omoiws de
homoiOs
Adv
de
Conj
kai iakwbon kai iwannhn uious kai iakObos kai iOannEs huios
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
LIKE-AS likewise
YET AND also
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
SONS
OF-ZEBEDEE
WHICH who
NA
WERE
koinwnoi tw koinOnos ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
simwna simOn
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
10 And so [was] also James, and John, the sons of Zebedee, which were partners with Simon. And Jesus said unto Simon, Fear not; from henceforth thou shalt catch men.
communioners mates ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
SIMON
AND
said
TOWARD THE
SIMON
THE
mh mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun anqrwpous esh nun anthrOpos eimi

Adv n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
zwgrwn zOgreO
JESUS
NO
YOU-BE-FEARING be-you-fearing !
FROM THE
NOW humans
YOU-SHALL-BE LIVE-CATCHING catching-alive afentes aphiEmi

5:11 kai katagagontes ta

kai
Conj
katagO
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ploia ploion
n_ Acc Pl n
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
11 And when they had brought their ships to land, they forsook all, and followed him.
AND
DOWN-LEADING landing
THE
FLOATers ON ships
THE
LAND
ALL

THEY-follow
to-Him him en en
Prep
5:12 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
polewn kai polis kai

n_ Gen Pl f Conj
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
TO-BE
Him
IN
ONE
OF-THE
cities
AND
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg m
lepras idwn lepra eidO

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
peswn piptO
12 . And it came to pass, when he was in a certain city, behold a man full of leprosy: who seeing Jesus fell on [his] face, and besought him, saying, Lord, if thou wilt, thou canst make me clean.
BE-PERCEIVING MAN lo !
FULL
OF-leprosy PERCEIVING
YET THE
JESUS
FALLING
AV
Luke 5
epi proswpon edehqh epi prosOpon deomai

Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ean ean
Cond
qelhs thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
ON
face
he-WAS-BOUND OF-Him he-besought him me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
sayING
Master ! Lord !
IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-WILLING
dunasai dunamai
kaqarisai katharizO
vn Aor Act
ME
TO-cleanse
5:13 kai ekteinas

kai
Conj
ekteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
legwn legO
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
OUT-STRETCHing THE stretching-out
HAND
He-TOUCHES
OF-him him aphlqen aperchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sayING
I-AM-WILLING
13 And he put forth [his] hand, and touched him, saying, I will: be thou clean. And immediately the leprosy departed from him.
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
kai euqews h kai eutheOs ho

Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg f
lepra lepra
n_ Nom Sg f
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
YOU-BE-BEING-cleansED AND be-you-being-cleansed !
immediately
THE
leprosy
FROM-CAME came-away eipein legO

vn 2Aor Act
FROM him
5:14 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
parhggeilen autw paraggellO autos

mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
alla apelqwn alla aperchomai

AND
He
chargES
to-him him ierei hiereus

n_ Dat Sg m
to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING but to-no-one to-be-telling kai prosenegke kai prospherO

FROM-COMING coming-away tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
deixon deiknumi
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton tw seautou ho
pf 3 Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
peri peri
Prep
kaqarismou katharismos
n_ Gen Sg m
14 And he charged him to tell no man: but go, and shew thyself to the priest, and offer for thy cleansing, according as Moses commanded, for a testimony unto them.
SHOW show-you ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
YOURself
to-THE
SACRED-one AND priest
TOWARD-CARRY-YOU ABOUT THE bring-you ! concerning marturion autois marturion autos

cleansing
kaqws kathOs
Adv

eis eis
Prep
OF-YOU
according-AS TOWARD-SETS bids de de

Conj
MOSES
INTO witness testimony logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
to-them
5:15 dihrceto
dierchomai
mallon o mallon ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai sunhrconto kai sunerchomai

THRU-CAME passed-through ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
YET RATHER
THE
saying account
ABOUT Him concerning twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
AND
TOGETHER-CAME came-together
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
kai qerapeuesqai apo kai therapeuO apo

Conj vn Pres Pas Prep
asqeneiwn autwn astheneia autos

15 But so much the more went there a fame abroad of him: and great multitudes came together to hear, and to be healed by him of their infirmities.
THRONGS
MANY vast de de
Conj
TO-BE-HEARING AND
TO-BE-beING-curED
FROM THE
UN-FIRMS infirmities
OF-them
5:16 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
upocwrwn hupochOreO
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
erhmois erEmos
a_ Dat Pl f
kai proseucomenos kai proseuchomai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
16 And he withdrew himself into the wilderness, and prayed.
He
YET WAS
UNDER-SPACING retreating mia heis

n_ Dat Sg f
IN
THE
DESOLATES AND wildernesses hn eimi
prayING
5:17 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn kai autos hEmera kai autos

n_ Gen Pl f Conj pp Nom Sg m
didaskwn didaskO
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
BECAME it-occurred
IN
ONE
OF-THE
DAYS
AND
He
WAS
TEACHING
kai hsan kai eimi

kaqhmenoi kathEmai
farisaioi kai nomodidaskaloi oi pharisaios kai nomodidaskalos hos

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
AND
WERE
sittING
PHARISEES
AND
LAW-TEACHers teachers-of-the-law
WHO
WERE
17 . And it came to pass on a certain day, as he was teaching, that there were Pharisees and doctors of the law sitting by, which were come out of every town of Galilee, and Judaea, and Jerusalem: and the power of the Lord was [present] to heal them.
elhluqotes erchomai
vp 2Perf Act Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
kwmhs kOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai ioudaias kai ierousalhm galilaia kai ioudaia kai ierosoluma
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj ni proper
HAVING-COME
OUT OF-EVERY VILLAGE
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
OF-JUDEA
AND
JERUSALEM
kai dunamis kuriou kai dunamis kurios

Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
iasqai iaomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
ABILITY power
OF-Master of-Lord
WAS there-was andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
INTO THE
TO-BE-HEALING
Him
5:18 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ferontes pherO
epi klinhs epi klinE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
anqrwpon os anthrOpos hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MEN lo !
CARRYING
ON
couch
human
WHO
WAS
18 And, behold, men brought in a bed a man which was taken with a palsy: and they sought [means] to bring him in, and to lay [him] before him.
AV
Luke 5
paralelumenos paraluO
kai ezhtoun kai zEteO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eisenegkein eispherO
vn 2Aor Act
kai qeinai kai tithEmi

Conj vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-paralyzED AND
THEY-SOUGHT him
TO-BE-INTO-CARRYING AND to-be-carrying-in
TO-PLACE
him

Adv pp Gen Sg m
IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore
OF-Him him eurontes heuriskO

5:19 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
poias poios
pi Gen Sg f
eisenegkwsin eispherO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
AND
NO
FINDING
OF-?-THE-WHICH THEY-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING him how? they-may-be-carrying-in epi to epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg n
THRU because-of
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
anabantes anabainO
dwma dOma
n_ Acc Sg n
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
keramwn kaqhkan keramos kathiEmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
19 And when they could not find by what [way] they might bring him in because of the multitude, they went upon the housetop, and let him down through the tiling with [his] couch into the midst before Jesus.
THE
THRONG
UP-STEPPing going-up tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ON
THE
housetop
THRU THE through
potteries tiles
THEY-DOWN-LET they-let-down tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
sun sun
Prep
klinidiw eis klinidion eis

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
him
cot
INTO THE
MIDst
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the anqrwpe afewntai anthrOpos aphiEmi

n_ Voc Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
JESUS
5:20 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin autwn pistis autos

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
20 And when he saw their faith, he said unto him, Man, thy sins are forgiven thee.
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-them
He-said
human !
HAVE-been-FROM-LET have-been-pardoned
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
amartiai sou hamartia su

n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Sg
to-YOU you
THE
misses sins
OF-YOU
5:21 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
dialogizesqai dialogizomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

n_ Nom Pl m
AND
begin
TO-BE-THRU-accountING THE to-be-reasoning tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
WRITers scribes os hos

pr Nom Sg m
AND
THE
PHARISEES
legontes legO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
n_ Acc Pl f
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
21 And the scribes and the Pharisees began to reason, saying, Who is this which speaketh blasphemies? Who can forgive sins, but God alone?
sayING
ANY who ?
IS
this
WHO
IS-TALKING is-speaking monos monos

a_ Nom Sg m
HARM-AVERments ANY blasphemies who ? qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
amartias afeinai hamartia aphiEmi

n_ Acc Pl f vn Aor Pas
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-ABLE
misses sins de de
Conj
TO-FROM-LET IF to-pardon o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NO
ONLY
THE
God
5:22 epignous
epiginOskO
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dialogismous autwn dialogismos autos

ON-KNOWING recognizing eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
THE
THRU-accounts reasonings en en
Prep
OF-them
answerING
22 But when Jesus perceived their thoughts, he answering said unto them, What reason ye in your hearts?
pros pros
Prep
autous ti autos tis

tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

said
TOWARD them
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-THRU-accountING IN ye-are-reasoning
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
23 Whether is easier, to say, Thy sins be forgiven thee; or to say, Rise up and walk?
5:23 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eukopwteron eipein eukopOteros legO

afewntai aphiEmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ANY what ?
IS
easier
TO-BE-sayING HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-YOU have-been-forgiven you egeire egeirO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
THE
amartiai sou hamartia su

h E
Part
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act

misses sins
OF-YOU
OR
TO-BE-sayING BE-ROUSING AND be-you-rousing ! oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
5:24 ina
hina
Conj
de de
Conj
eidhte eidO
vs Perf Act 2 Pl
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou exousian anthrOpos exousia

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
authority
24 But that ye may know that the Son of man hath power upon earth to forgive sins, (he said unto the sick of the palsy,) I say unto thee, Arise, and take
AV
Luke 5
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
afienai aphiEmi
vn Pres Act
amartias eipen hamartia legO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
up thy couch, and go into thine house.
IS-HAVING
ON
THE
LAND earth soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
TO-FROM-LET misses to-pardon sins legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
He-said
to-THE
paralelumenw paraluO
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai aras kai airO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
klinidion klinidion
n_ Acc Sg n
one-HAVING-been-paralyzED to-YOU one-having-been-paralyzed sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
I-AM-sayING
BE-ROUSING AND be-you-rousing ! oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
LIFTing picking-up
THE
cot
poreuou poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-YOU
5:25 kai paracrhma anastas

kai
Conj
parachrEma
Adv
anistEmi
enwpion autwn enOpion autos

Adv pp Gen Pl m
aras airO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ef epi
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
AND
instantly
UP-STANDing rising aphlqen aperchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-them them
LIFTing picking-up doxazwn doxazO
ON
WHICH
25 And immediately he rose up before them, and took up that whereon he lay, and departed to his own house, glorifying God.
katekeito katakeimai
eis eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
he-was-DOWN-LAID he-was-laid-down
he-FROM-CAME INTO THE he-came-away elaben lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HOME house
OF-him
esteemizING glorifying ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
God
5:26 kai ekstasis

kai
Conj
ekstasis
n_ Nom Sg f
apantas kai edoxazon hapas kai doxazO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
OUT-STANDing GOT amazement took-hold-of fobou phobos

n_ Gen Sg m
ALL(emph.)
AND
THEY-esteemizED THE they-glorified paradoxa paradoxos

a_ Acc Pl n
God
AND
26 And they were all amazed, and they glorified God, and were filled with fear, saying, We have seen strange things to day.
eplhsqhsan plEthO (pimplEmi)

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
legontes legO
oti eidomen hoti eidO

shmeron sEmeron
Adv
THEY-ARE-FILLED OF-FEAR are-filled
sayING
that
WE-PERCEIVED BESIDE-esteems toDAY baffling-things telwnhn telOnEs

n_ Acc Sg m
5:27 kai meta tauta

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai eqeasato kai theaomai

onomati leuin onoma leui

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
AND
after
these He-OUT-CAME AND these-things he-came-out epi to epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg n
gazES gazes-at
tribute-collector to-NAME
LEVI
27 . And after these things he went forth, and saw a publican, named Levi, sitting at the receipt of custom: and he said unto him, Follow me.
kaqhmenon kathEmai
telwnion kai eipen telOnion kai legO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
sittING
ON
THE
tribute-office
AND
He-said
to-him
YOU-BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me

28 And he left all, rose up, and followed him.
5:28 kai katalipwn

kai
Conj
kataleipO
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
anastas anistEmi
hkolouqei autw akoloutheO autos

AND
leavING
ALL
UP-STANDing rising megalhn leuis mega leui

a_ Acc Sg f
he-followED
to-Him him en en
Prep
5:29 kai epoihsen dochn

kai
Conj
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
dochE
n_ Acc Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
makES
RECEPTION GREAT
LEVI
to-Him
IN
THE
HOME house hsan eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Pl
OF-him
AND
29 And Levi made him a great feast in his own house: and there was a great company of publicans and of others that sat down with them.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
telwnwn telOnEs
n_ Gen Pl m
kai allwn kai allos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
WAS there-was
THRONG
MANY vast
OF-tribute-collectors AND
OF-others
WHO
WERE
WITH them
katakeimenoi katakeimai
DOWN-LYING lying-down
5:30 kai egogguzon oi

kai
Conj
gogguzO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

grammateis autwn grammateus autos

pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
MURMURED
THE
PHARISEES
AND
THE
WRITers scribes meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
OF-them
TOWARD THE
30 But their scribes and Pharisees murmured against his disciples, saying, Why do ye eat and drink with publicans and sinners?

legontes legO
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
telwnwn telOnEs
n_ Gen Pl m
kai kai
Conj
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
sayING
WITH
THE
AV
Luke 5
amartwlwn esqiete hamartOlos esthiO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai pinete kai pinO

missers sinners
YE-ARE-EATING AND
WH
YE-ARE-DRINKING
NA
5:31 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous ou autos ou
pp Acc Pl m Part Neg
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
TOWARD them
NOT
31 And Jesus answering said unto them, They that are whole need not a physician; but they that are sick.
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ugiainontes hugiainO
iatrou iatros
n_ Gen Sg m
alla oi alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

need
ARE-HAVING THE
ones-beING-SOUND OF-HEALer ones-being-sound of-physician
but
THE the-ones
EVILly illness
ones-HAVING having
32 I came not to call the righteous, but sinners to repentance.
5:32 ouk
ou
Part Neg
elhluqa erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
kalesai dikaious alla amartwlous eis kaleO dikaios alla hamartOlos eis
vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep
metanoian metanoia
n_ Acc Sg f
NOT
I-HAVE-COME
TO-CALL
JUST-ones just-ones auton autos
but
missers sinners oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
INTO after-MIND repentance

33 And they said unto him, Why do the disciples of John fast often, and make prayers, and likewise [the disciples] of the Pharisees; but thine eat and drink?
5:33 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
maqhtai iwannou nhsteuousin mathEtEs iOannEs nEsteuO

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
pp Acc Sg m
THE-ones the pukna puknos

a_ Acc Pl n
YET say they-say
TOWARD Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-JOHN
ARE-fastING
kai dehseis poiountai kai deEsis poieO

Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Mid 3 Pl
omoiws kai oi homoiOs kai ho

Adv Conj t_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn oi pharisaios ho
FREQUENT AND frequently de de

Conj
petitions
THEY-ARE-makING LIKE-AS are-making likewise
AND also
THE-ones the-ones
OF-THE
PHARISEES
THE the-ones
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
esqiousin kai pinousin esthiO kai pinO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YET to-YOU
ARE-EATING
AND
ARE-DRINKING
5:34 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous mh autos mE
dunasqe dunamai
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THE
YET JESUS
said
TOWARD them
NO
ARE-ABLE ye-can met autwn meta autos

Prep pp Gen Pl m
THE
34 And he said unto them, Can ye make the children of the bridechamber fast, while the bridegroom is with them?
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
numfwnos numphOn
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
SONS
OF-THE
BRIDal-chamber IN
WHICH
THE
BRIDE-groom WITH them bridegroom
IS
poihsai nhsteusai poieO nEsteuO

vn Aor Act vn Aor Act
TO-make
TO-fast
5:35 eleusontai
erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
kai otan kai hotan

Conj Conj
aparqh apairO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-COMING YET DAYS
AND also
when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED FROM them whenever may-be-being-taken-away en en

Prep
THE
35 But the days will come, when the bridegroom shall be taken away from them, and then shall they fast in those days.
numfios numphios
n_ Nom Sg m
tote nhsteusousin tote nEsteuO

Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl

hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
BRIDE-groom then bridegroom
THEY-SHALL-BE-fastING IN
those
THE
DAYS
5:36 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai parabolhn pros kai parabolE pros

autous oti oudeis autos hoti oudeis

pp Acc Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg f
epiblhma epiblEma
n_ Acc Sg n
apo apo
Prep
He-said
YET AND also
BESIDE-CAST parable
TOWARD them
that
NOT-YET-ONE ON-CAST-effect FROM no-one patch de de

Conj
imatiou kainou himation kainos

scisas schizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epiballei epiballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epi imation palaion ei epi himation palaios ei

Prep n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
36 And he spake also a parable unto them; No man putteth a piece of a new garment upon an old; if otherwise, then both the new maketh a rent, and the piece that was [taken] out of the new agreeth not with the old.
cloak
NEW
SPLITTing rending scisei schizO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
IS-ON-CASTING ON is-patching kai tw kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg n
cloak
OLD
IF
YET NO
SURELY
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
kainon kainos
a_ Acc Sg n
palaiw ou palaios ou
a_ Dat Sg n Part Neg
sumfwnhsei sumphOneO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND also
THE
NEW
SHALL-BE-SPLITTING AND shall-be-rending
to-THE
OLD
NOT
SHALL-BE-agreeING THE
AV
Luke 5 - Luke 6
epiblhma epiblEma
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kainou kainos
a_ Gen Sg n
ON-CAST-effect THE patch
FROM THE
NEW
5:37 kai oudeis

kai
Conj
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
ballei ballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
neon neos
a_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
a_ Acc Pl m Cond
de de
Conj
AND
NOT-YET-ONE IS-CASTING no-one is-draining rhxei rhEgnumi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
WINE
YOUNG fresh oinos oinos

n_ Nom Sg m
INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) OLD wine-skins o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IF
YET
37 And no man putteth new wine into old bottles; else the new wine will burst the bottles, and be spilled, and the bottles shall perish.
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
neos neos
a_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
NO
SURELY SHALL-BE-BURSTING THE
WINE
THE
YOUNG fresh
THE
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
ekcuqhsetai ekcheO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
askoi askos
n_ Nom Pl m
apolountai apollumi
vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
AND
it
SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-POURED AND shall-be-being-spilled neon neos

a_ Acc Sg m
THE
BOTTLES (of-skin) SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED wine-skins shall-be-perishing kainous blhteon kainos blEteos

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
38 But new wine must be put into new bottles; and both are preserved.
5:38 alla oinon

alla
Conj
oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
askous askos
n_ Acc Pl m
but
WH
WINE
YOUNG fresh
NA
INTO BOTTLES (of-skin) NEW wine-skins

NA
CASTable is-drained palaion qelei palaios thelO

a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
5:39
oudeis
kai kai
Conj
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
piwn pinO
neon neos
a_ Acc Sg m
AND
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
DRINKING
WH
OLD
NA
IS-WILLING
YOUNG fresh
39 No man also having drunk old [wine] straightway desireth new: for he saith, The old is better.
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
palaios crhstos palaios chrEstos

a_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
estin
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
for
THE
OLD
kind mellower
IS
AV
Luke 6
6:1 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
sabbatw diaporeuesqai auton sabbaton diaporeuomai autos

n_ Dat Sg n vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
sporimwn kai etillon sporimos kai tillO

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
BECAME it-occurred oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
YET IN
SABBATH
TO-BE-THRU-GOING to-be-going-through tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
Him
THRU SOWings through ywcontes psOchO

AND
PLUCKED

kai hsqion kai esthiO

stacuas stachus
n_ Acc Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
. And it came to pass on the second sabbath after the first, that he went through the corn fields; and his disciples plucked the ears of corn, and did eat, rubbing [them] in [their] hands.
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
ATE
THE
EARS-(of-plants) STROKE-HAVING to-THE ears-of-grain rubbing-together-them
cersin cheir
n_ Dat Pl f
HANDS
6:2 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn eipan pharisaios legO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
ANY YET OF-THE certain-ones exestin exesti

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
PHARISEES
say
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-DOING WHICH
NOT
And certain of the Pharisees said unto them, Why do ye that which is not lawful to do on the sabbath days?
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin sabbaton
n_ Dat Pl n
IS-allowed
to-THE
SABBATHS
WH NA
6:3 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
pros pros
Prep
autous eipen autos legO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
AND
answerING
TOWARD them
said
THE
JESUS
NOT-YET not-yeteven met meta

Prep
And Jesus answering them said, Have ye not read so much as this, what David did, when himself was an hungred, and they which were with him;
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
anegnwte o anaginOskO hos

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pr Acc Sg n
epoihsen dauid ote epeinasen autos poieO dauid hote peinaO autos
vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
this
NA
WHICH
DOES
DAVID
when
HUNGERS he-hungers
he
AND
THE the-ones
WITH
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ontes eimi
him
BEING
6:4
ws hOs
Adv
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
artous ths artos ho

AS how
he-INTO-CAME INTO THE he-entered labwn lambanO

HOME house
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
BREADS bread(p) ous hos
OF-THE
proqesews prothesis
n_ Gen Sg f
efagen esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
How he went into the house of God, and did take and eat the shewbread, and gave also to them that were with him; which it is not lawful to eat but for the priests alone?
pr Acc Pl m
BEFORE-PLACing GETTING taking ouk ou

Part Neg
he-ATE
AND
GIVES
to-THE-ones WITH him to-the-ones iereis hiereus

n_ Acc Pl m
WHOM whom(p)
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
monous tous monos ho

NOT
IS-allowed
TO-BE-EATING IF
NO
ONLY
THE
SACRED-ones priests sabbatou o sabbaton ho

n_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
6:5 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois kurios autos kurios

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
And he said unto them, That the Son of man is Lord also of the sabbath.
AND
He-said
to-them
Master Lord
IS
OF-THE
SABBATH
THE
SON
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
human
6:6 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg n
sabbatw eiselqein sabbaton eiserchomai

n_ Dat Sg n vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
BECAME it-occurred sunagwghn sunagOgE

n_ Acc Sg f
YET IN
DIFFERENT SABBATH
TO-BE-INTO-COMING Him to-be-entering
INTO THE
kai didaskein kai didaskO

Conj vn Pres Act
kai hn kai eimi

anqrwpos ekei kai h anthrOpos ekei kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
And it came to pass also on another sabbath, that he entered into the synagogue and taught: and there was a man whose right hand was withered.
TO-BE-TEACHING AND
WAS there-was
human
there
AND
THE
HAND
AV
Luke 6
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
dexia dexios
a_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
xhra xEros
a_ Nom Sg f
OF-him
THE
RIGHT
WAS
DRY withered oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
6:7 parethrounto de
paratEreO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

farisaioi ei pharisaios ei
n_ Nom Pl m Cond
en en
Prep
BESIDE-KEPT scrutinized tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
YET Him
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
THE
PHARISEES
IF
IN
And the scribes and Pharisees watched him, whether he would heal on the sabbath day; that they might find an accusation against him.
sabbatw qerapeuei ina sabbaton therapeuO hina

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj
eurwsin heuriskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kathgorein autou katEgoreO autos

vn Pres Act pp Gen Sg m
THE
SABBATH
He-IS-curING
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FINDING TO-BE-accusING OF-Him him tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
6:8 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
dialogismous autwn dialogismos autos

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
He
YET HAD-PERCEIVED THE
THRU-accounts reasonings thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-them
He-said
YET to-THE
But he knew their thoughts, and said to the man which had the withered hand, Rise up, and stand forth in the midst. And he arose and stood forth.
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
xhran xEros
n_ Acc Sg f
econti echO
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai sthqi kai histEmi

eis eis
Prep
MAN
THE
DRY withered
HAVING
THE
HAND
BE-ROUSING AND be-you-rousing !
BE-STANDING INTO be-you-standing !
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n

esth histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
MIDst
AND
UP-STANDing rising
WH
he-STOOD
6:9 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
autous eperwtw autos eperOtaO

pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ei ei
Cond
said
YET
THE
JESUS
TOWARD them
I-AM-inquirING-of YOU(p) ye swsai h sOzO E

vn Aor Act Part
IF
Then said Jesus unto them, I will ask you one thing; Is it lawful on the sabbath days to do good, or to do evil? to save life, or to destroy [it]?
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sabbatw agaqopoihsai h sabbaton agathopoieO E

n_ Dat Sg n vn Aor Act Part
kakopoihsai yuchn kakopoieO psuchE

it-IS-allowed
to-THE
SABBATH
TO-GOOD-DO to-do-good
OR
TO-EVIL-DO to-do-evil
soul
TO-SAVE OR
apolesai apollumi
vn Aor Act
TO-destroy
6:10 kai peribleyamenos pantas autous eipen

kai
Conj
periblepO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
pas
a_ Acc Pl m
autos
pp Acc Pl m
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ekteinon ekteinO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
ABOUT-looking looking-about o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ALL
them
He-said
to-him
OUT-STRETCH THE stretch-out-you ! ceir cheir

n_ Nom Sg f
HAND
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
de de
Conj
epoihsen kai apekatestaqh h poieO kai apokathistEmi ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
10 And looking round about upon them all, he said unto the man, Stretch forth thy hand. And he did so: and his hand was restored whole as the other.
OF-YOU
THE
YET he-DOES
AND
WAS-restorED
THE
HAND
OF-him
6:11 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eplhsqhsan anoias plEthO (pimplEmi) anoia

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f
kai dielaloun pros kai dialaleO pros

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
allhlous ti allElOn tis

pc Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n
an an
Part
they
YET ARE-FILLED
OF-UN-MIND AND of-folly
THRU-TALKED talked-about
TOWARD one-another
ANY what ?
EVER
11 And they were filled with madness; and communed one with another what they might do to Jesus.
poihsaien poieO
vo Aor Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
MAY-THEY-BE-DOING to-THE
JESUS
6:12 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tautais exelqein hEmera houtos exerchomai

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
BECAME it-occurred oros oros

n_ Acc Sg n
YET IN
THE
DAYS
these
TO-BE-OUT-COMING Him to-be-coming-out en en

Prep
INTO THE
12 . And it came to pass in those days, that he went out into a mountain to pray, and continued all night in prayer to God.
proseuxasqai kai hn proseuchomai kai eimi

vn Aor midD Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
dianuktereuwn dianuktereuO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
proseuch tou proseuchE ho

mountain
TO-pray
AND
He-WAS
THRU-NIGHTING IN one-being-throughout-the-night
THE
prayer
OF-THE
AV
Luke 6
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
prosefwnhsen prosphOneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

kai kai
Conj
AND
when
it-BECAME
DAY
He-TOWARD-SOUNDS THE he-shouts-to
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
13 And when it was day, he called [unto him] his disciples: and of them he chose twelve, whom also he named apostles;
eklexamenos ap eklegO apo

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
dwdeka ous dOdeka hos

ni numeral pr Acc Pl m
kai apostolous wnomasen kai apostolos onomazO

Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
choosing
FROM them
TWO-TEN twelve
WHOM
AND also
NAMES he-names adelfon autou adelphos autos

14 Simon, (whom he also named Peter,) and Andrew his brother, James and John, Philip and Bartholomew,
6:14 simwna on
simOn
n_ Acc Sg m
hos
pr Acc Sg m
kai wnomasen petron kai onomazO petros


Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
SIMON
WHOM
AND also
He-NAMES
ANDREW
THE
brother
OF-him
kai iakwbon kai iwannhn kai filippon kai barqolomaion kai iakObos kai iOannEs kai philippos kai bartholomaios
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
AND
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
AND
Philip
WH
AND
NA
Bartholomew
6:15 kai maqqaion kai qwman

kai
Conj
kai
maththaios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
thOmas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
iakwbon alfaiou iakObos halphaios

kai simwna kai simOn

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
15 Matthew and Thomas, James the [son] of Alphaeus, and Simon called Zelotes,
AND
MATTHEW
AND
THOMAS
AND
JACOBUS James
OF-ALPHEUS AND
SIMON
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kaloumenon kaleO
zhlwthn zElOtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
one-beING-CALLED BOILer one-being-called Zealot iakwbou iakObos

n_ Gen Sg m
6:16 kai ioudan

kai
Conj
ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ioudan kai ioudas

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
iskariwq os iskariOthEs hos

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
prodoths prodotEs
n_ Nom Sg m
16 And Judas [the brother] of James, and Judas Iscariot, which also was the traitor.
AND
JUDAS
OF-JACOBUS AND of-James
JUDAS
ISCARIOT
WHO
BECAME
BEFORE-GIVER traitor
17 And he came down with them, and stood in the plain, and the company of his disciples, and a great multitude of people out of all Judaea and Jerusalem, and from the sea coast of Tyre and Sidon, which came to hear him, and to be healed of their diseases;
6:17 kai katabas

kai
Conj
katabainO

Prep pp Gen Pl m
esth histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi topou epi topos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
pedinou kai oclos pedinos kai ochlos

a_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
AND
DOWN-STEPPing descending maqhtwn mathEtEs

n_ Gen Pl m
WITH them
He-STOOD
ON
PLACE
FOOT even laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THRONG
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai plhqos kai plEthos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
polu polus
a_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
MANY vast ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-LEARNers OF-Him of-disciples
AND
multitude
MANY vast
OF-THE
PEOPLE
FROM EVERY entire kai sidwnos (6:18) kai sidOn

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias kai ierousalhm kai ths ioudaia kai ierosoluma kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj ni proper Conj t_ Gen Sg f
paraliou paralios
a_ Gen Sg f
turou turos
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE the oi hos

pr Nom Pl m
JUDEA
AND
JERUSALEM
AND
OF-THE the
BESIDE-SALTED OF-TYRE maritime Tyre apo apo

Prep
AND
OF-SIDON Sidon autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
akousai autou akouO autos

vn Aor Act pp Gen Sg m
kai iaqhnai kai iaomai

Conj vn Aor Pas
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
noswn nosos
n_ Gen Pl f
WHO
CAME
TO-HEAR
OF-Him him
AND
TO-BE-HEALED FROM THE
DISEASES OF-them
6:18 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
enocloumenoi apo enochleO apo

vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep
pneumatwn akaqartwn eqerapeuonto pneuma akathartos therapeuO

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n vi impf Pas 3 Pl
18 And they that were vexed with unclean spirits: and they were healed.
AND
THE
ones-beING-annoyED ones-being-annoyed o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM spirits
UN-clean unclean aptesqai haptO

vn Pres Mid
were-curED
6:19 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
ezhtoun zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti dunamis par hoti dunamis para

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep
AND
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
SOUGHT
TO-BE-TOUCHING OF-Him him pantas pas

a_ Acc Pl m
that
ABILITY power
BESIDE
19 And the whole multitude sought to touch him: for there went virtue out of him, and healed [them] all.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
exhrceto exerchomai
kai iato kai iaomai

Him
OUT-CAME came-out
AND
He-HEALED
ALL them-all
AV
Luke 6
6:20 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
eparas epairO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous autou ophthalmos autos

eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
He
ON-LIFTing lifting-up makarioi oi makarios ho

a_ Nom Pl m
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-Him
INTO THE
LEARNers disciples h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
20 . And he lifted up his eyes on his disciples, and said, Blessed [be ye] poor: for yours is the kingdom of God.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ptwcoi oti umetera estin ptOchos hoti humeteros eimi

a_ Nom Pl m Conj ps 2 Nom Sg vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
basileia basileia
n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
said
HAPPY happy-are
THE
POOR-ones poor-ones
that
YOUR-more yours(emph.)
IS
THE
KINGdom
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
6:21 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
peinwntes peinaO
nun oti cortasqhsesqe nun hoti chortazO

Adv Conj vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
HAPPY happy-are klaiontes klaiO

THE
ones-HUNGERING ones-hungering
NOW that
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-satisfiED HAPPY happy-are
THE
21 Blessed [are ye] that hunger now: for ye shall be filled. Blessed [are ye] that weep now: for ye shall laugh.
nun oti gelasete nun hoti gelaO

Adv Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
ones-LAMENTING ones-lamenting
NOW that
YE-SHALL-BE-LAUGHING
6:22 makarioi este

makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
otan hotan
Conj
mishswsin miseO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi kai otan anthrOpos kai hotan

n_ Nom Pl m Conj Conj
HAPPY
YE-ARE
when-EVER SHOULD-BE-HATING YOU(p) whenever ye umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
THE
humans
AND
when-EVER whenever
aforiswsin aphorizO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
kai oneidiswsin kai oneidizO

kai kai
Conj
22 Blessed are ye, when men shall hate you, and when they shall separate you [from their company], and shall reproach [you], and cast out your name as evil, for the Son of man's sake.
THEY-SHOULD-BE-FROM-definING YOU(p) they-should-be-severing ye ekbalwsin ekballO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
THEY-SHOULD-BE-REPROACHING AND
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ws ponhron eneka hOs ponEros heneken

Adv a_ Acc Sg n Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING THE they-should-be-casting-out tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
NAME
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye
wicked
on-account-of OF-THE the
SON
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
human
6:23 carhte
chairO
vm 2Aor pasD 2 Pl
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
kai skirthsate idou kai skirtaO idou

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
YE-MAY-BE-JOYING IN ye-may-be-rejoicing misqos misthos

n_ Nom Sg m
that
THE
DAY
AND
JUMP frisk-ye ! ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
BE-PERCEIVING for lo ! auta autos

pp Acc Pl n
THE
23 Rejoice ye in that day, and leap for joy: for, behold, your reward [is] great in heaven: for in the like manner did their fathers unto the prophets.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw kata ouranos kata

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
gar gar
Conj
HIRE wages epoioun poieO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU(p) much of-ye vast tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
IN
THE
heaven
according-to THE
SAME for same-manner(p)
profhtais prophEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres autwn patEr autos

DID
to-THE
BEFORE-AVERers THE prophets tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
FATHERS
OF-them
6:24 plhn
plEn
Adv
ouai umin ouai humeis

Inj pp 2 Dat Pl
plousiois oti apecete plousios hoti apechO

a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
MOREly WOE moreover woe ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
24 But woe unto you that are rich! for ye have received your consolation.
THE
RICH-ones rich-ones
that
YE-ARE-FROM-HAVING THE ye-are-collecting
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
6:25 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
empeplhsmenoi emplEmi
nun oti peinasete nun hoti peinaO

ouai ouai
Inj
WOE woe !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
ones-HAVING-been-IN-FILLED NOW that ones-having-been-filled
YE-SHALL-BE-HUNGERING WOE woe !
25 Woe unto you that are full! for ye shall hunger. Woe unto you that laugh now! for ye shall mourn and weep.
AV
Luke 6
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gelwntes gelaO
nun oti penqhsete nun hoti pentheO

kai klausete kai klaiO

THE
ones-LAUGHING ones-laughing
NOW that
WH WH
YE-SHALL-BE-MOURNING AND
NA NA
YE-SHALL-BE-LAMENTING
6:26 ouai otan

ouai
Inj
kalws umas
hotan
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kalws kalOs
Adv
eipwsin legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
WOE woe !
when-EVER whenever ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
YOU(p) ye auta autos

pp Acc Pl n
IDEALly fine-things
MAY-BE-sayING ALL
THE
26 Woe unto you, when all men shall speak well of you! for so did their fathers to the false prophets.
anqrwpoi kata anthrOpos kata

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
gar epoioun gar poieO

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
yeudoprofhtais pseudoprophEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
humans
according-to THE
SAME for same-manner(p)
DID
to-THE
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERers THE false-prophets
pateres autwn patEr autos

FATHERS
OF-them
6:27 alla umin

alla
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
akouousin akouO
agapate agapaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ecqrous umwn echthros humeis

but
to-YOU(p) to-ye
I-AM-sayING
to-THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
BE-LOVING be-ye-loving !
THE
enemies
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
27 . But I say unto you which hear, Love your enemies, do good to them which hate you,
kalws poieite kalOs poieO

Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
misousin miseO
IDEALly
to-THE
ones-HATING ones-hating katarwmenous kataraomai
YOU(p) ye umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
6:28 eulogeite tous

eulogeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
peri peri
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
BE-blessING be-ye-blessing !
THE
ones-DOWN-EXECRATING YOU(p) ones-cursing ye
28 Bless them that curse you, and pray for them which despitefully use you.
ephreazontwn umas epEreazO humeis

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
ones-traducING ones-traducing
YOU(p) ye tuptonti tuptO

6:29 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
siagona parece siagOn parechO

n_ Acc Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
allhn allos
a_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
one-BEATING one-beating tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YOU
ON
THE
CHEEK
BE-tenderING AND be-you-tendering ! also
THE
other
29 And unto him that smiteth thee on the [one] cheek offer also the other; and him that taketh away thy cloke forbid not [to take thy] coat also.
kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
airontos airO
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
imation kai ton himation kai ho

citwna mh chitOn mE
n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
AND
FROM THE
one-LIFTING one-taking-away
OF-YOU
THE
cloak
AND also
THE
TUNIC
NO
kwlushs kOluO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-FORBIDDING you-should-be-preventing
6:30 panti
pas
a_ Dat Sg m
aitounti aiteO
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
didou didOmi
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
airontos airO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-EVERY
one-REQUESTING one-requesting apaitei apaiteO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU
AND
FROM THE
one-LIFTING one-taking-away
THE
30 Give to every man that asketh of thee; and of him that taketh away thy goods ask [them] not again.
sa sos
ps 2 Acc Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
YOUR(p)
NO
BE-FROM-REQUESTING be-you-demanding-it ! qelete thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
6:31 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
ina hina
Conj
poiwsin poieO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi poieite anthrOpos poieO

n_ Nom Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
according-AS YE-ARE-WILLING THAT MAY-BE-DOING to-YOU(p) to-ye
31 And as ye would that men should do to you, do ye also to them likewise.
THE
humans
YE-BE-DOING be-ye-doing !
autois omoiws autos homoiOs

pp Dat Pl m Adv
to-them
LIKE-AS likewise
AV
Luke 6
6:32 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
agapate agapaO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agapwntas agapaO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
poia poios
pi Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
IF
YE-ARE-LOVING THE
ones-LOVING ones-loving
YOU(p) ye
?-THE-WHICH to-YOU(p) what ? to-ye
grace thanks
32 For if ye love them which love you, what thank have ye? for sinners also love those that love them.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai gar oi kai gar ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m
amartwloi tous hamartOlos ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
agapwntas agapaO
autous agapwsin autos agapaO

pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
it-IS
AND also gar gar

Conj
for
THE
missers sinners agaqopoihte agathopoieO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
them
ARE-LOVING
6:33 kai
kai
Conj
ean ean
Cond
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agaqopoiountas umas agathopoieO humeis

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
poia poios
pi Nom Sg f
AND
for
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-GOOD-DOING THE ye-may-be-doing-good estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ones-GOOD-DOING ones-doing-good auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye
?-THE-WHICH what ?
33 And if ye do good to them which do good to you, what thank have ye? for sinners also do even the same.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
amartwloi to hamartOlos ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
grace thanks
it-IS
AND also
THE
missers sinners par para

Prep
THE
SAME
ARE-DOING
6:34 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
danishte daneizO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
elpizete elpizO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
poia poios
pi Nom Sg f
AND
IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-LENDING BESIDE WHOM whom(p) caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
YE-ARE-EXPECTING TO-BE-GETTING ?-THE-WHICH what ?
34 And if ye lend [to them] of whom ye hope to receive, what thank have ye? for sinners also lend to sinners, to receive as much again.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai amartwloi amartwlois danizousin ina kai hamartOlos hamartOlos daneizO hina
Conj a_ Nom Pl m a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj
to-YOU(p) to-ye
grace thanks
it-IS
AND also ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
missers sinners
to-missers to-sinners
ARE-LENDING
THAT
apolabwsin apolambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
isa isos
a_ Acc Pl n
THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-GETTING THE they-may-be-getting-back
EQUAL(p) equivalent(p) ecqrous umwn echthros humeis

6:35 plhn
plEn
Adv
agapate agapaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kai agaqopoieite kai danizete kai agathopoieO kai daneizO

Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
MOREly BE-LOVING moreover be-ye-loving ! mhden mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
THE
enemies
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
BE-GOOD-DOING be-ye-doing-good ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
BE-LENDING be-ye-lending ! kai kai

Conj
apelpizontes kai estai apelpizO kai eimi

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
misqos misthos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
35 But love ye your enemies, and do good, and lend, hoping for nothing again; and your reward shall be great, and ye shall be the children of the Highest: for he is kind unto the unthankful and [to] the evil.
NO-YET-ONE FROM-EXPECTING nothing expecting-from esesqe eimi

vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
AND
SHALL-BE
THE
HIRE wages
OF-YOU(p) much of-ye vast epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
AND
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
uyistou oti autos hupsistos hoti autos

a_ Gen Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m
crhstos estin chrEstos eimi

acaristous acharistos
a_ Acc Pl m
YE-SHALL-BE SONS
OF-HIGHest of-Most-High
that
He
kind
IS
ON
THE
UN-grateful ungrateful-ones
kai ponhrous kai ponEros

Conj a_ Acc Pl m
AND
wicked wicked-ones oiktirmones kaqws oiktirmOn kathOs

a_ Nom Pl m Adv
NA
6:36 ginesqe
ginomai
kai kai
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
36 Be ye therefore merciful, as your Father also is merciful.
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! oiktirmwn estin oiktirmOn eimi

a_ Nom Sg m
PITIful
according-AS
AND also
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
PITIful
IS
6:37 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
krinete krinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
kriqhte krinO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
AND
NO
BE-JUDGING be-ye-judging !
AND
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUDGED AND
NO
37 . Judge not, and ye shall not be judged: condemn not, and ye shall not be condemned: forgive, and ye shall be forgiven:
katadikazete kai ou katadikazO kai ou

vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
katadikasqhte katadikazO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
apoluete apoluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
BE-YE-convictING be-ye-convicting !
AND
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-convictED YE-BE-FROM-LOOSING AND be-ye-releasing !
AV
Luke 6
apoluqhsesqe apoluO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LOOSED ye-shall-be-being-released
6:38 didote
didOmi
vm Pres Act 2 Pl

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
metron kalon metron kalos

pepiesmenon piezO
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving ! sesaleumenon saleuO

AND
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) to-ye
MEASURE IDEAL
HAVING-been-SQUEEZED
uperekcunnomenon dwsousin uperekchunnO didOmi

vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kolpon umwn kolpos humeis

n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
38 Give, and it shall be given unto you; good measure, pressed down, and shaken together, and running over, shall men give into your bosom. For with the same measure that ye mete withal it shall be measured to you again.
HAVING-been-SHAKEN beING-OVER-OUT-POURED THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING INTO THE running-over w hos

pr Dat Sg n
BOSOM
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
gar metrw gar metron

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
metreite metreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
antimetrhqhsetai antimetreO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-WHICH for
MEASURE YE-ARE-MEASURING SHALL-BE-BEING-INSTEAD-MEASURED to-YOU(p) it-shall-be-being-measured-again to-ye de de

Conj
6:39 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai parabolhn autois mhti kai parabolE autos mEti

Conj n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Pl m Part Int
dunatai dunamai
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
tuflon tuphlos
a_ Acc Sg m
He-said he-told odhgein hodEgeO

vn Pres Act
YET AND also ouci ouchi

Part Int
BESIDE-CAST parable
to-them
NO-ANY IS-ABLE not ? can boqunon empesountai bothunos empiptO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 3 Pl
BLIND blind-one
BLIND blind-one
39 And he spake a parable unto them, Can the blind lead the blind? shall they not both fall into the ditch?

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
TO-BE-WAY-LEADING NOT(emph.) both to-be-guiding not(emph.) ?
INTO PIT
SHALL-BE-IN-FALLING shall-be-falling-in didaskalon kathrtismenos didaskalos katartizO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
6:40 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
maqhths uper ton mathEtEs huper ho

n_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
40 The disciple is not above his master: but every one that is perfect shall be as his master.
NOT
IS
LEARNer disciple ws o hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
OVER above
THE
TEACHer
HAVING-been-DOWN-EQUIPPED YET having-been-adjusted
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
didaskalos autou didaskalos autos

EVERY every-one
SHALL-BE
AS
THE
TEACHer
OF-him
6:41 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

ANY why ?
YET YOU-ARE-lookING THE you-are-observing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
SHRIVEL mote thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
IN
THE
VIEWer eye
OF-THE
41 And why beholdest thou the mote that is in thy brother's eye, but perceivest not the beam that is in thine own eye?

de de
Conj
dokon dokos
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
idiw idios
a_ Dat Sg m
ofqalmw ou ophthalmos ou
n_ Dat Sg m Part Neg
brother
OF-YOU
THE
YET BEAM
THE
IN
THE
OWN
VIEWer eye
NOT
katanoeis katanoeO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-DOWN-MINDING you-are-considering
6:42 pws dunasai

pOs
Adv Int
dunamai
legein legO
vn Pres Act
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

adelfe afes adelphos aphiEmi

n_ Voc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
how how ? ekbalw ekballO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
YOU-ARE-ABLE you-can to ho
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
brother
OF-YOU
brother !
FROM-LET let-you ! autos autos

pp Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

t_ Acc Sg n
I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING THE I-should-be-extracting thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
SHRIVEL mote
THE-one the
IN
THE
VIEWer eye blepwn blepO

OF-YOU
SAME yourself
42 Either how canst thou say to thy brother, Brother, let me pull out the mote that is in thine eye, when thou thyself beholdest not the beam that is in thine own eye? Thou hypocrite, cast out first the beam out of thine own eye, and then shalt thou see clearly to pull out the mote that is in thy brother's eye.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

dokon dokos
n_ Acc Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
upokrita hupokritEs
n_ Voc Sg m
THE
IN
THE
VIEWer eye thn ho
OF-YOU
BEAM
NOT
lookING observing ofqalmou sou ophthalmos su

n_ Gen Sg m
hypocrite hypocrite ! kai tote kai tote

Conj Adv
ekbale ekballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
dokon dokos
n_ Acc Sg f
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Acc Sg f
pp 2 Gen Sg
BE-OUT-CASTING BEFORE-most THE be-you-extracting ! first
BEAM
OUT OF-THE
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
AND
then
AV
Luke 6
diableyeis diablepO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

adelfou adelphos
n_ Gen Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-THRU-lookING THE you-shall-be-being-keen-sighted sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
SHRIVEL mote
THE
IN
THE
VIEWer eye
OF-THE
brother
ekbalein ekballO
vn 2Aor Act
OF-YOU
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING to-be-extracting gar estin gar eimi

6:43 ou
ou
Part Neg
dendron kalon dendron kalos

poioun poieO
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
sapron sapros
a_ Acc Sg m
oude oude
Adv
NOT
for
IS
TREE
IDEAL
makING doproducing karpon karpos

n_ Acc Sg m
FRUIT
ROTTen
NOT-YET neither
43 For a good tree bringeth not forth corrupt fruit; neither doth a corrupt tree bring forth good fruit.
palin dendron sapron palin dendron sapros

Adv n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
poioun poieO
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
AGAIN
TREE
ROTTen
makING doproducing tou ho
FRUIT
IDEAL
6:44 ekaston gar dendron ek

hekastos
a_ Nom Sg n
gar
Conj
dendron
n_ Nom Sg n
ek
Prep
idiou idios
a_ Gen Sg m
karpou karpos
n_ Gen Sg m
ginwsketai ginOskO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gar ex gar ek
Conj Prep
t_ Gen Sg m
EACH
for
TREE
OUT OF-THE
OWN
FRUIT
IS-beING-KNOWN NOT
for
OUT
44 For every tree is known by his own fruit. For of thorns men do not gather figs, nor of a bramble bush gather they grapes.
akanqwn akantha
n_ Gen Pl f
sullegousin sullegO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
suka sukon
n_ Acc Pl n
oude oude
Adv
ek ek
Prep
batou batos
n_ Gen Sg m
stafulhn staphulE
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-POINT-FLOWERS THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-collectING FIGS of-thorns they-are-culling trugwsin trugaO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
NOT-YET OUT OF-THORN-BUSH GRAPE neither
THEY-ARE-CROPPING they-are-picking
6:45 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaqos agathos
a_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg m
qhsaurou thEsauros
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
GOOD
human
OUT OF-THE
GOOD
PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-THE treasure ponhros ek ponEros ek

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
kardias proferei kardia propherO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon kai o agathos kai ho

a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ponhrou ponEros
a_ Gen Sg m
45 A good man out of the good treasure of his heart bringeth forth that which is good; and an evil man out of the evil treasure of his heart bringeth forth that which is evil: for of the abundance of the heart his mouth speaketh.
HEART
IS-BEFORE-CARRYING THE is-bringing-forth to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
GOOD
AND
THE
wicked wicked-one
OUT OF-THE
wicked
proferei propherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ponhron ek ponEros ek
a_ Acc Sg n Prep
gar perisseumatos kardias lalei gar perisseuma kardia laleO

Conj n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
IS-BEFORE-CARRYING THE is-bringing-forth stoma stoma

n_ Nom Sg n
wicked
OUT for
OF-excess of-superabundance
OF-HEART
THE
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
MOUTH
OF-him
6:46 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kaleite kaleO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
46 And why call ye me, Lord, Lord, and do not the things which I say?
ANY why ? legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
YET ME
YE-ARE-CALLING Master ! Lord !
Master ! Lord !
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-DOING WHICH are-doing which(p)
I-AM-sayING
6:47 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai akouwn kai akouO

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
EVERY
THE
one-COMING one-coming kai poiwn kai poieO

TOWARD ME
AND
HEARING
OF-ME
47 Whosoever cometh to me, and heareth my sayings, and doeth them, I will shew you to whom he is like:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
autous upodeixw autos hupodeiknumi

pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
THE
sayings words
AND
DOING
them
I-SHALL-BE-UNDER-SHOWING to-YOU(p) I-shall-be-intimating to-ye
to-ANY to-whom ?
AV
Luke 6 - Luke 7
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
omoios homoios
a_ Nom Sg m
he-IS
LIKE
6:48 omoios
homoios
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpw oikodomounti oikian anthrOpos oikodomeO oikia

n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
eskayen skaptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
LIKE
he-IS
to-human
HOME-BUILDING building
HOME house
WHO
DIGS
AND
ebaqunen kai eqhken bathunO kai tithEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
qemelion epi thn themelios epi ho

n_ Acc Sg m Prep t_ Acc Sg f
petran plhmmurhs petra plEmmura

de de
Conj
genomenhs ginomai
48 He is like a man which built an house, and digged deep, and laid the foundation on a rock: and when the flood arose, the stream beat vehemently upon that house, and could not shake it: for it was founded upon a rock.
DEEPens
AND
PLACES
foundation
ON
THE
ROCK
OF-FULL-TRICKLE YET OF-BECOMING of-inundation occurring iscusen ischuO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
proserhxen prosrEgnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
potamos th potamos ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh kai ouk ekeinos kai ou

pd Dat Sg f Conj Part Neg
saleusai saleuO
vn Aor Act
TOWARD-BURSTS THE bursts-through authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
river
to-THE
HOME house
that
AND
NOT
it-is-STRONG TO-SHAKE
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kalws oikodomhsqai kalOs oikodomeO

Adv vn Perf Pas
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
her herit
THRU THE because-of de de

Conj
IDEALly
TO-BE-beING-HOME-BUILDED her herit to-be-being-built kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
6:49 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
omoios homoios
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpw anthrOpos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
YET one-HEARing one-hearing
AND
NO
DOing
LIKE
IS
to-human human proserhxen prosrEgnumi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oikodomhsanti oikian oikodomeO oikia

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
cwris chOris
Adv
qemeliou h themelios hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Dat Sg f
49 But he that heareth, and doeth not, is like a man that without a foundation built an house upon the earth; against which the stream did beat vehemently, and immediately it fell; and the ruin of that house was great.
HOME-BUILDing building o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
HOME house
ON
THE
LAND earth sunepesen sumpiptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apart-from foundation without kai egeneto kai ginomai

to-WHICH TOWARD-BURSTS bursts-through to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
potamos kai euqus potamos kai euthus

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv
rhgma rhEgma
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
river
AND
straightway it-TOGETHER-FALLS AND it-collapses
BECAME
THE
BURST crash
OF-THE
oikias oikia
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs mega ekeinos mega

pd Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg n
HOME house
that
GREAT
AV
Luke 7
7:1 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
eplhrwsen panta plEroO pas

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akoas akoE
n_ Acc Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ON-IF-BIND He-FILLS since-in-fact he-completes laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
ALL
THE
declarations OF-Him
INTO THE
HEARing OF-THE hearing(p)
. Now when he had ended all his sayings in the audience of the people, he entered into Capernaum.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ni proper
PEOPLE
He-INTO-CAME INTO CAPERNAUM he-entered tinos tis

px Gen Sg m
7:2 ekatontarcou de
hekatontarchEs
n_ Gen Sg m
de
Conj
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kakws ecwn kakOs echO

Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
hmellen mellO
vi impf Act 3 Sg Att
teleutan teleutaO
vn Pres Act
OF-HUNDRED-chief of-centurion os hos

pr Nom Sg m
YET OF-ANY certain autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
SLAVE
EVILly illness
HAVING
WAS-ABOUT
TO-BE-deceasING
And a certain centurion's servant, who was dear unto him, was sick, and ready to die.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
entimos entimos
a_ Nom Sg m
WHO
WAS
to-him
IN-VALUED held-in-honor tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
7:3 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
peri peri
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
apesteilen pros apostellO pros

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
HEARing
YET ABOUT THE concerning
JESUS
he-commissions he-dispatches auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD Him
And when he heard he sent unto him the the Jews, beseeching he would come and servant.
of Jesus, elders of him that heal his
presbuterous twn presbuteros ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn erwtwn ioudaios erOtaO

opws hopOs
Adv
elqwn erchomai
SENIORS elders diaswsh diasOzO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
askING
Him
WHICH-how COMING so-that
doulon autou doulos autos

He-SHOULD-BE-THRU-SAVING THE he-should-be-saving-through
SLAVE
OF-him
7:4 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
paragenomenoi paraginomai
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
parekaloun auton parakaleO autos

THE
YET ones-BESIDE-COMING TOWARD THE ones-coming-along oti axios hoti axios

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
JESUS
BESIDE-CALLED entreated parexh parechO
Him
And when they came to Jesus, they besought him instantly, saying, That he was worthy for whom he should do this:
spoudaiws legontes spoudaiOs legO

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
vi 2Fut midD 3 Sg / vs Aor Act 3 Sg
DILIGENTly
sayING
that
WORTHY
he-IS
to-WHOM
He-SHOULD-BE-tenderING
this
7:5 agapa
agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
For he loveth our nation, and he hath built us a synagogue.
he-IS-LOVING for
THE
NATION
OF-US
AND
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD he synagogue
wkodomhsen hmin oikodomeO hemeis

HOME-BUILDS builds
to-US us de de
Conj
7:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eporeueto poreuomai
sun sun
Prep
autois hdh autos EdE

pp Dat Pl m Adv
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
THE
YET JESUS
WENT
TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them oikias oikia

n_ Gen Sg f
ALREADY YET OF-Him
NOT
makran apecontos makran apechO

Adv vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epemyen pempO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
filous philos
a_ Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarchs hekatontarchEs
n_ Nom Sg m
Then Jesus went with them. And when he was now not far from the house, the centurion sent friends to him, saying unto him, Lord, trouble not thyself: for I am not worthy that thou shouldest enter under my roof:
FAR
OF-FROM-HAVING being-away autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
FROM THE
HOME house mh mE
Part Neg
SENDS
FOND-ones THE friends ou ou

Part Neg
HUNDRED-chief centurion eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
legwn legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
skullou skullO
vm Pres Pas 2 Sg
gar ikanos gar hikanos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
NO
BE-FLAYING (self) NOT be-you-bothering !
for
enough
I-AM
THAT
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
steghn mou stegE egO

eiselqhs eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
UNDER THE
EXCLUDer OF-ME roof
YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING you-may-be-entering
AV
Luke 7
7:7 dio
dio
Conj
oude oude
Adv
emauton hxiwsa emautou axioO

pf 1 Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
alla eipe alla legO

THRU-WHICH NOT-YET MYself wherefore neither logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
I-am-WORTHY TOWARD YOU I-count-worthy o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-COMING but
Wherefore neither thought I myself worthy to come unto thee: but say in a word, and my servant shall be healed.
kai iaqhtw kai iaomai

pais pais
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to-saying to-word
AND
LET-BE-BEING-HEALED THE let-him-be-being-healed ! anqrwpos eimi anthrOpos eimi

n_ Nom Sg m
boy
OF-ME
7:8 kai gar egw

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
upo hupo
Prep
exousian tassomenos exousia tassO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AND also up hupo

Prep
for
human
AM
UNDER authority
beING-SET
HAVING
emauton stratiwtas kai legw emautou stratiOtEs kai legO

pf 1 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg
toutw poreuqhti houtos poreuomai

pd Dat Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
kai poreuetai kai poreuomai

For I also am a man set under authority, having under me soldiers, and I say unto one, Go, and he goeth; and to another, Come, and he cometh; and to my servant, Do this, and he doeth [it].
UNDER MYself
WARriors soldiers ercou erchomai

AND
I-AM-sayING
to-this to-this-one
BE-BEING-GONE AND be-you-being-gone ! doulw doulos

n_ Dat Sg m
he-IS-GOING
kai allw kai allos

Conj a_ Dat Sg m

kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
poihson poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
to-other to-another
BE-COMING be-you-coming !
AND
he-IS-COMING
AND
to-THE
SLAVE
OF-ME
DO do-you !
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kai poiei kai poieO

this
AND
he-IS-DOING he-is-doing-it de de
Conj
7:9 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eqaumasen auton thaumazO autos

kai strafeis kai strephO

Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m
HEARing
YET these THE these-things oclw ochlos
JESUS
MARVELS marvels-at legw legO
him
AND
BEING-TURNED
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
akolouqounti autw akoloutheO autos

vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp Dat Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oude oude
Adv
en en
Prep
When Jesus heard these things, he marvelled at him, and turned him about, and said unto the people that followed him, I say unto you, I have not found so great faith, no, not in Israel.
n_ Dat Sg m
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to-THE
followING
Him
THRONG
said
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT-YET IN not-yeteven
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
israhl tosauthn pistin euron israEl tosoutos pistis heuriskO

ni proper pd Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
ISRAEL
so-much
BELIEF faith ton ho
I-FOUND
7:10 kai upostreyantes eis

kai
Conj
hupostrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pemfqentes pempO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
reTURNing
INTO THE
HOME house
THE
ones-BEING-SENT ones-being-sent
FOUND
THE
10 And they that were sent, returning to the house, found the servant whole that had been sick.
doulon ugiainonta doulos hugiainO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
SLAVE
beING-SOUND
7:11 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
exhs eporeuqh hexEs poreuomai

Adv vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kaloumenhn kaleO
nain nain
ni proper
kai kai
Conj
AND
IN
THE
next
He-WAS-GONE INTO city he-went
beING-CALLED
NAIN
AND
11 . And it came to pass the day after, that he went into a city called Nain; and many of his disciples went with him, and much people.
suneporeuonto autw sumporeuomai autos

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

kai oclos kai ochlos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-WENT went-with
to-Him him hggisen eggizO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
LEARNers disciples pulh pulE

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-Him
AND
THRONG
MANY vast exekomizeto ekkomizO

vi impf Pas 3 Sg
12 Now when he came nigh to the gate of the city, behold, there was a dead man carried out, the only son of his mother, and she was a widow: and much people of the city was with her.
7:12 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai idou polis kai idou

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AS
YET He-NEARS
to-THE the
GATE
OF-THE
city
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WAS-OUT-FETCHED lo ! there-was-fetched-out kai auth kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg f
teqnhkws thnEskO
monogenhs monogenEs
a_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
HAVING-DIED one-having-died
ONLY-generated SON only-begotten
to-THE
MOTHER
OF-him
AND
she
WAS
AV
Luke 7
chra chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
kai oclos kai ochlos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews ikanos polis hikanos

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
sun sun
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
WIDOW
AND
THRONG
OF-THE
city
enough WAS considerable kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER to-her togetherwith her ep epi

Prep
7:13 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
esplagcnisqh splagchnizomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
13 And when the Lord saw her, he had compassion on her, and said unto her, Weep not.
AND
PERCEIVING
her
THE
Master Lord
IS-compassionatED ON is-moved-with-compassion
her
AND
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
klaie klaiO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
said
to-her
NO
BE-LAMENTING be-you-lamenting ! hyato haptO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
7:14 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sorou soros
n_ Gen Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
bastazontes esthsan bastazO histEmi

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
He-TOUCHES
OF-THE the legw legO
BIER
THE
YET ones-BEARING ones-bearing-it
STAND
14 And he came and touched the bier: and they that bare [him] stood still. And he said, Young man, I say unto thee, Arise.
kai eipen kai legO

neaniske soi neaniskos su

n_ Voc Sg m pp 2 Dat Sg
egerqhti egeirO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
He-said
YOUTH !
to-YOU
I-AM-sayING
BE-BEING-ROUSED be-you-being-roused ! lalein laleO

vn Pres Act
7:15 kai anekaqisen o

kai
Conj
anakathizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nekros nekros
a_ Nom Sg m


15 And he that was dead sat up, and began to speak. And he delivered him to his mother.
AND
is-UP-seated sits-up th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
DEAD dead-one
AND
begins
TO-BE-TALKING AND to-be-speaking
He-GIVES
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
him
to-THE
MOTHER
OF-him
7:16 elaben
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
pantas kai edoxazon ton pas kai doxazO ho

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
legontes legO
oti hoti
Conj
GOT
YET FEAR
ALL
AND
esteemizED they-glorified
THE
God
sayING
that
16 And there came a fear on all: and they glorified God, saying, That a great prophet is risen up among us; and, That God hath visited his people.
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai oti epeskeyato o kai hoti episkeptomai ho

Conj Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer GREAT prophet ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
WAS-ROUSED IN US among
AND
that
ON-NOTES visits
THE
God
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
7:17 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ioudaia peri ioudaia peri

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
AND
OUT-CAME came-out kai pash kai pas

Conj
THE
saying
this
IN
WHOLE
THE
JUDEA
ABOUT concerning
17 And this rumour of him went forth throughout all Judaea, and throughout all the region round about.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pericwrw perichOros
a_ Dat Sg f
a_ Dat Sg f
Him
AND
to-EVERY THE to-entire
ABOUT-SPACE country-about maqhtai autou mathEtEs autos

7:18 kai aphggeilan

kai
Conj
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
iwannh oi iOannEs ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
peri peri
Prep
pantwn toutwn pas houtos

a_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n
18 And the disciples of John shewed him of all these things.
AND
FROM-MESSAGE to-JOHN report
THE
LEARNers disciples tinas tis

px Acc Pl m
OF-him
ABOUT ALL concerning o ho
OF-these these-things iwannhs iOannEs

n_ Nom Sg m
19 . And John calling [unto him] two of his disciples sent [them] to Jesus, saying, Art thou he that should come? or look we for another?
7:19 kai proskalesamenos duo

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
duo
ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

t_ Nom Sg m
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him pros pros

Prep
TWO
ANY OF-THE certain-ones legwn legO

LEARNers disciples ei eimi
OF-him
THE
JOHN
epemyen pempO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
SENDS
TOWARD THE
Master Lord
sayING
YOU
ARE
THE
AV
Luke 7
ercomenos erchomai
h E
Part
WH
eteron
NA
allon allos
a_ Acc Sg m
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
OR
other another-one pros pros

Prep
WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING we-may-be-hoping-for andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
7:20 paragenomenoi de
paraginomai
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along
YET TOWARD Him
THE
MEN
say
JOHN
THE
20 When the men were come unto him, they said, John Baptist hath sent us unto thee, saying, Art thou he that should come? or look we for another?
baptisths apesteilen hmas baptistEs apostellO hEmeis

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
legwn legO
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
DIPist baptist o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
commissions dispatches ercomenos erchomai
US
TOWARD YOU
sayING
YOU
ARE
h E
Part
allon allos
a_ Acc Sg m
vs Pres Act 1 Pl / vi Pres Act 1 Pl
THE
One-COMING one-coming ekeinh th ekeinos ho

OR
other WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-SEEMING another-one we-may-be-hoping-for eqerapeusen pollous apo therapeuO polus apo
vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m Prep
7:21 en
en
Prep
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
noswn nosos
n_ Gen Pl f
kai mastigwn kai kai mastix kai

Conj n_ Gen Pl f Conj
IN
that
THE
HOUR
He-curES
MANY many-ones
FROM DISEASES AND
scourges
AND
21 And in that same hour he cured many of [their] infirmities and plagues, and of evil spirits; and unto many [that were] blind he gave sight.
pneumatwn ponhrwn kai tuflois pneuma ponEros kai tuphlos

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n Conj a_ Dat Pl m
pollois ecarisato polus charizomai

a_ Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
blepein blepO
vn Pres Act
spirits
wicked
AND
to-BLIND-ones MANY to-blind-ones
He-gracES TO-BE-lookING he-graciously-grants to-be-observing apaggeilate iwannh a apaggellO iOannEs hos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m pr Acc Pl n
22 Then Jesus answering said unto them, Go your way, and tell John what things ye have seen and heard; how that the blind see, the lame walk, the lepers are cleansed, the deaf hear, the dead are raised, to the poor the gospel is preached.
7:22 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

AND
answerING
He-said
to-them
BEING-GONE
to-JOHN
WHICH which(p) leproi lepros

a_ Nom Pl m
eidete eidO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai hkousate tufloi kai akouO tuphlos

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
anablepousin cwloi anablepO chOlos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
peripatousin peripateO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
YE-PERCEIVED AND
YE-HEAR
BLIND-ones ARE-UP-lookING blind-ones are-receiving-sight akouousin nekroi akouO nekros

vi Pres Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
LAME-ones lame-ones egeirontai egeirO

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ARE-ABOUT-TREADING lepers are-walking ptwcoi ptOchos

a_ Nom Pl m
kaqarizontai katharizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai kwfoi kai kOphos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ARE-beING-cleansED AND
MUTES deaf-mutes
ARE-HEARING
DEAD-ones ARE-beING-ROUSED POOR-ones dead-ones poor-ones
euaggelizontai euaggelizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ARE-beING-WELL-MESSAGizED are-being-brought-the-well-message
7:23 kai makarios estin

kai
Conj
makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
skandalisqh skandalizO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
23 And blessed whosoever shall offended in me.
is [he], not be
AND
HAPPY
he-IS
WHO
IF-EVER NO
MAY-BE-BEING-SNARED IN
ME
7:24 apelqontwn de
aperchomai
de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
iwannou hrxato iOannEs archO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legein legO
vn Pres Act
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
OF-FROM-COMING YET THE of-coming-away of-the oclous peri ochlos peri

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
MESSENGERS OF-JOHN
He-begins
TO-BE-sayING TOWARD THE
iwannou ti iOannEs tis

exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg f
qeasasqai kalamon theaomai kalamos

vn Aor midD n_ Acc Sg m
24 And when the messengers of John were departed, he began to speak unto the people concerning John, What went ye out into the wilderness for to see? A reed shaken with the wind?
THRONGS
ABOUT JOHN concerning
ANY what ?
YE-OUT-COME INTO THE ye-come-out
DESOLATE TO-gaze wilderness to-gaze-at
REED
upo anemou hupo anemos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
saleuomenon saleuO
by
WIND
beING-SHAKEN
7:25 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
malakois imatiois malakos himation

a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
but
ANY what ?
YE-OUT-COME TO-BE-PERCEIVING human ye-come-out
IN
SOFT
GARMENTS
25 But what went ye out for to see? A man clothed in soft raiment? Behold, they which are gorgeously apparelled, and live delicately, are in
AV
Luke 7
hmfiesmenon amphiennumi
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
imatismw endoxw himatismos endoxos

kai trufh kai truphE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
kings'courts.
HAVING-been-ENVELOPED-IN BE-PERCEIVING THE-ones having-been-garbed lo ! the-ones uparcontes huparchO

IN
GARMENTing vesture
IN-esteemed AND glorious
to-ENERVATION to-luxury
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
basileiois eisin basileios eimi

a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
belongING inhering
IN THE among
KINGish royal-ones idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
ARE
7:26 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
exhlqate exerchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
nai legw nai legO

Part vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai kai
Conj
but
ANY what ?
YE-OUT-COME TO-BE-PERCEIVING BEFORE-AVERer YEA ye-come-out prophet yes
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
26 But what went ye out for to see? A prophet? Yea, I say unto you, and much more than a prophet.
perissoteron profhtou perissos prophEtEs

a_ Acc Sg m Cmp n_ Gen Sg m
more-excessive exceedingly-more
OF-BEFORE-AVERer of-prophet estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
7:27 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
this this-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IS
ABOUT WHOM concerning mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-commissionING lo ! I-am-dispatching os hos

pr Nom Sg m
27 This is [he], of whom it is written, Behold, I send my messenger before thy face, which shall prepare thy way before thee.
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
pro pro
Prep

kataskeuasei kataskeuazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
MESSENGER OF-ME
BEFORE face
OF-YOU
WHO
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
WAY road
OF-YOU
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU in-front-of you umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
7:28 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
en en
Prep
gennhtois gunaikwn iwannou oudeis gennEtos gunE iOannEs oudeis

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg f
I-AM-sayING
Conj
GREATER greater-one
IN generated(p) among ones-born th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
OF-WOMEN
OF-JOHN
NOT-YET-ONE not-one meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
28 For I say unto you, Among those that are born of women there is not a greater prophet than John the Baptist: but he that is least in the kingdom of God is greater than he.
IS there-is autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
YET LITTLER smaller-one
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
GREATER
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-him
IS
7:29 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
edikaiwsan dikaioO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
EVERY entire qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
PEOPLE
HEARing
AND also
THE
tribute-collectors THEY-JUSTIFY justify
29 And all the people that heard [him], and the publicans, justified God, being baptized with the baptism of John.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
baptisqentes to baptizO ho
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
baptisma iwannou baptisma iOannEs

THE
God
BEING-DIPizED being-baptized de de
Conj
THE
DIPism baptism
OF-JOHN
7:30 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

nomikoi thn nomikos ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
boulhn tou boulE ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
YET PHARISEES
AND
THE
LAWers lawyers
THE
COUNSEL
OF-THE
God
30 But the Pharisees and lawyers rejected the counsel of God against themselves, being not baptized of him.
hqethsan eis atheteO eis

eautous mh heautou mE
pf 3 Acc Pl m Part Neg
baptisqentes up autou baptizO hupo autos

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m
UN-PLACE repudiate
INTO selves themselves oun oun

Conj
NO
BEING-DIPizED being-baptized tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
by
him
7:31 tini
tis
pi Dat Sg n
omoiwsw homoioO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
anqrwpous ths anthrOpos ho

geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths kai houtos kai

pd Gen Sg f Conj
to-ANY THEN I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE to-whom ?
humans
OF-THE
generation
this
AND
31 And the Lord said, Whereunto then shall I liken the men of this generation? and to what are they like?
AV
Luke 7
tini tis
pi Dat Sg n
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
omoioi homoios
a_ Nom Pl m
to-ANY THEY-ARE to-whom ?
LIKE
7:32 omoioi
homoios
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
paidiois paidion
n_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
en en
Prep
agora agora
n_ Dat Sg f
kaqhmenois kathEmai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl n
kai kai
Conj
LIKE
THEY-ARE
to-little-boys-and-girls THE-ones IN the-ones allhlois a allElOn hos

pc Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl n
BUY-place sittING market hulhsamen auleO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
AND
prosfwnousin prosphOneO
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m / vi Pres Act 3 Pl
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
32 They are like unto children sitting in the marketplace, and calling one to another, and saying, We have piped unto you, and ye have not danced; we have mourned to you, and ye have not wept.
TOWARD-SOUNDING shouting-to
to-one-another one-another
WHICH which(p)
IS-sayING
WE-FLAGEOLET to-YOU(p) we-flute to-ye
AND
NOT
wrchsasqe eqrhnhsamen kai ouk orcheomai thrEneO kai ou

vi Aor midD 2 Pl vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj Part Neg
eklausate klaiO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-DANCE
WE-DIRGE we-wail
AND
NOT
YE-LAMENT
7:33 elhluqen
erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
gar iwannhs o gar iOannEs ho

baptisths mh baptistEs mE
esqiwn esthiO
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
mhte mEte
Conj
HAS-COME
for
JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist
NO
EATING
BREAD
NO-BESIDES neither
33 For John the Baptist came neither eating bread nor drinking wine; and ye say, He hath a devil.
pinwn pinO
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai legete kai legO


DRINKING
WINE
AND
YE-ARE-sayING demon
he-IS-HAVING
7:34 elhluqen
erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou esqiwn anthrOpos esthiO

kai pinwn kai pinO

HAS-COME
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
EATING
AND
DRINKING
34 The Son of man is come eating and drinking; and ye say, Behold a gluttonous man, and a winebibber, a friend of publicans and sinners!
kai legete kai legO

idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anqrwpos fagos anthrOpos phagos

kai oinopoths filos kai oinopotEs philos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
telwnwn telOnEs
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
YE-ARE-sayING BE-PERCEIVING human lo !
EATer gluttonous
AND
WINE-DRINKer
FOND-One friend
OF-tribute-collectors
kai amartwlwn kai hamartOlos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
AND
OF-missers of-sinners h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
7:35 kai edikaiwqh

kai
Conj
dikaioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
pantwn twn pas ho

teknwn auths teknon autos

n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg f
35 But wisdom is justified of all her children.
AND
WAS-JUSTIFIED THE
WISDOM
FROM ALL
THE
offsprings children fagh esthiO
OF-her
7:36 hrwta
erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn ina pharisaios hina

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
met meta
Prep
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
askED
YET ANY certain-one kai eiselqwn kai eiserchomai

Him
OF-THE
PHARISEES
THAT He-MAY-BE-EATING WITH
36 . And one of the Pharisees desired him that he would eat with him. And he went into the Pharisee's house, and sat down to meat.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
farisaiou katekliqh pharisaios kataklinO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
him
AND
INTO-COMING entering gunh gunE
INTO THE
HOME house hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE
PHARISEE
He-WAS-DOWN-CLINED he-reclined amartwlos kai hamartOlos kai

a_ Nom Sg f Conj
37 And, behold, a woman in the city, which was a sinner, when she knew that [Jesus] sat at meat in the Pharisee's house, brought an alabaster box of ointment,
7:37 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN lo !
WHO-ANY WAS who-any en en

Prep
IN
THE
city
misser sinner
AND
epignousa epiginOskO
oti katakeitai hoti katakeimai

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
farisaiou komisasa pharisaios komizO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
ON-KNOWING recognizing
that
He-IS-DOWN-LYING he-is-lying-down
IN
THE
HOME house
OF-THE
PHARISEE
FETCHing
alabastron murou alabastron muron

ALABASTER alabaster-vase
OF-ATTAR
AV
Luke 7
7:38 kai stasa

kai
Conj
histEmi
opisw para opisO para

Adv Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
klaiousa klaiO
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
AND
STANDing
BEHIND
BESIDE THE
FEET
OF-Him
LAMENTING
to-THE
dakrusin hrxato dakru archO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor midD 3 Sg
brecein brechO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
qrixin ths thrix ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Sg f
38 And stood at his feet behind [him] weeping, and began to wash his feet with tears, and did wipe [them] with the hairs of her head, and kissed his feet, and anointed [them] with the ointment.
TEARS
begins she-begins
TO-BE-RAINING THE
FEET
OF-Him
AND
to-THE
HAIRS
OF-THE
kefalhs auths kephalE autos

exemassen ekmassO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai katefilei kai kataphileO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai hleifen kai aleiphO

HEAD
OF-her
she-OUT-WIPED AND she-wiped-off-them
DOWN-FONDED THE fondly-kissed
FEET
OF-Him
AND
RUBBED rubbed-them
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
murw muron
n_ Dat Sg n
to-THE
ATTAR
7:39 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
farisaios o pharisaios ho
kalesas kaleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
PERCEIVING perceiving-it eautw heautou

pf 3 Dat Sg m
YET THE
PHARISEE
THE
one-CALLing one-inviting
WH
Him
he-said said
IN
legwn legO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
eginwsken an ginOskO an
vi impf Act 3 Sg Part
39 Now when the Pharisee which had bidden him saw [it], he spake within himself, saying, This man, if he were a prophet, would have known who and what manner of woman [this is] that toucheth him: for she is a sinner.
himself
sayING
this-One this-one h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IF
He-WAS
BEFORE-AVERer KNEW prophet aptetai haptO

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
EVER
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
kai potaph kai potapos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
ANY who ?
AND
?-where-FROM THE what-manner-of
WOMAN
WHO-ANY IS-TOUCHING OF-Him who-any him
that seeing-that
amartwlos estin hamartOlos eimi

a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
misser sinner
she-IS
7:40 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said
TOWARD him
SIMON
I-AM-HAVING
40 And Jesus answering said unto him, Simon, I have somewhat to say unto thee. And he saith, Master, say on.
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
didaskale eipe didaskalos legO

fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-YOU
ANY something
TO-BE-sayING THE
YET TEACHer !
BE-sayING he-IS-AVERRING be-you-saying-it ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
7:41 duo
duo
ni numeral
creofeiletai hsan chreopheiletEs eimi

danisth tini daneistEs tis

n_ Dat Sg m px Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
wfeilen opheilO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
TWO
USE-OWers debtors-paying-usury
WERE
to-LOANER to-creditor eteros heteros

a_ Nom Sg m
ANY certain
THE
ONE
OWED
41 There was a certain creditor which had two debtors: the one owed five hundred pence, and the other fifty.
dhnaria pentakosia o dEnarion pentakosioi ho

n_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ni numeral
DENARII
FIVE-hundred
THE
YET DIFFERENT FIVE-ty different-one fifty apodounai amfoterois ecarisato apodidOmi amphoteroi charizomai
vn 2Aor Act a_ Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
7:42 mh
mE
Part Neg
econtwn echO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
NO
OF-HAVING
them
TO-FROM-GIVE to-pay auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-both
he-gracES ANY he-deals-graciously which
THEN
42 And when they had nothing to pay, he frankly forgave them both. Tell me therefore, which of them will love him most?
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
pleion polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
agaphsei agapaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OF-them
MORE
SHALL-BE-LOVING him
7:43 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
upolambanw hupolambanO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti w hoti hos

Conj pr Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pleion polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
answerING
SIMON
said
I-AM-UNDER-GETTING that I-am-taking-it
to-WHOM
THE
MORE
43 Simon answered and said, I suppose that [he], to whom he forgave most. And he said unto him, Thou hast rightly judged.
AV
Luke 7
ecarisato charizomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
orqws ekrinas orthOs krinO

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Sg
he-gracES THE he-deals-graciously
YET He-said
to-him
ERECTly correctly
YOU-JUDGE you-decide simwni simOn

n_ Dat Sg m
7:44 kai strafeis

kai
Conj
strephO
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika tw gunE ho
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
blepeis blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
AND
BEING-TURNED
TOWARD THE
WOMAN
to-THE
SIMON
He-AVERRed
YOU-ARE-lookING you-are-observing epi epi

Prep
tauthn thn houtos ho

pd Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika eishlqon gunE eiserchomai

sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
this
THE
WOMAN
I-INTO-CAME I-entered auth autos

pp Nom Sg f
OF-YOU
INTO THE
HOME house
water
to-ME
ON
44 And he turned to the woman, and said unto Simon, Seest thou this woman? I entered into thine house, thou gavest me no water for my feet: but she hath washed my feet with tears, and wiped [them] with the hairs of her head.
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
dakrusin ebrexen dakru brechO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
FEET
NOT
YOU-GIVE
this-one she
YET to-THE
TEARS
RAINS
OF-ME
THE
FEET
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
qrixin auths thrix autos

exemaxen ekmassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
to-THE
HAIRS
OF-her
OUT-WIPES wipes-off-them edwkas didOmi

vi Aor Act 2 Sg
7:45 filhma
philEma
n_ Acc Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
af apo
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
FOND-effect to-ME kiss dielipen dialeipO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT
YOU-GIVE
this-one she
YET FROM WHICH
I-INTO-CAME I-entered
NOT
45 Thou gavest me no kiss: but this woman since the time I came in hath not ceased to kiss my feet.
katafilousa mou kataphileO egO

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
THRU-LACKED DOWN-FONDING did-intermit fondly-kissing
OF-ME
THE
FEET
7:46 elaiw
elaion
n_ Dat Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn mou kephalE egO

ouk ou
Part Neg
hleiyas aleiphO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
murw muron
n_ Dat Sg n
hleiyen aleiphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-OLIVE-oil THE to-oil tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
HEAD
OF-ME
NOT
YOU-RUB
this-one she
YET to-ATTAR
RUBS
46 My head with oil thou didst not anoint: but this woman hath anointed my feet with ointment.
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
THE
FEET
OF-ME
7:47 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg n
carin charin
Adv
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
afewntai aphiEmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
amartiai auths hamartia autos

n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Sg f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
OF-WHICH grace I-AM-sayING on-behalf pollai oti hgaphsen polu polus hoti agapaO polus
a_ Nom Pl f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-YOU
HAVE-been-FROM-LET THE have-been-pardoned de de

Conj
misses sins
OF-her
THE
47 Wherefore I say unto thee, Her sins, which are many, are forgiven; for she loved much: but to whom little is forgiven, [the same] loveth little.
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg n
afietai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg n
agapa agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
a_ Acc Sg n
MANY
that
she-LOVES
much
to-WHOM
YET FEW
IS-beING-FROM-LET FEW is-being-pardoned ai ho

t_ Nom Pl f
IS-LOVING
7:48 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
afewntai aphiEmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
amartiai hamartia
n_ Nom Pl f
48 And he said unto her, Thy sins are forgiven.
He-said
YET to-her
HAVE-been-FROM-LET OF-YOU have-been-forgiven sunanakeimenoi sunanakeimai

THE
misses sins en en
Prep
7:49 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
eautois tis heautou tis

pf 3 Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg m
AND
begin
THE
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING TO-BE-sayING IN selves ones-lying-back-at-table-together among themselves kai amartias afihsin kai hamartia aphiEmi
Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ANY who ?
49 And they that sat at meat with him began to say within themselves, Who is this that forgiveth sins also?
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
this
IS
WHO
AND also thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
misses sins
IS-FROM-LETTING is-pardoning pistis pistis

n_ Nom Sg f
7:50 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
gunaika h gunE ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
50 And he said to the woman, Thy faith hath saved thee; go in peace.
He-said
YET TOWARD THE
WOMAN
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU
HAS-SAVED
YOU
AV
Luke 7 - Luke 8
poreuou poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
eirhnhn eirEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
INTO PEACE
AV
Luke 8
8:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kaqexhs kathexEs
Adv
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
diwdeuen kata diodeuO kata

polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
IN
THE
according-to-next AND consecutively also
He
THRU-WAYS traverses
according-to city
kai kwmhn kai kOmE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
khrusswn kErussO
kai euaggelizomenos thn kai euaggelizO ho

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
. And it came to pass afterward, that he went throughout every city and village, preaching and shewing the glad tidings of the kingdom of God: and the twelve [were] with him,
AND
VILLAGE
PROCLAIMING heralding dwdeka sun dOdeka sun

ni numeral Prep
AND
WELL-MESSAGizING bringing-the-well-message autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE of-the
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
AND
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him ai hos

pr Nom Pl f
8:2 kai gunaikes tines

kai
Conj
gunE
n_ Nom Pl f
tis
px Nom Pl f
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
teqerapeumenai apo therapeuO apo

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f Prep
pneumatwn ponhrwn pneuma ponEros

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n
AND
WOMEN
ANY some
WHO
WERE
HAVING-been-curED
FROM spirits
wicked
And certain women, which had been healed of evil spirits and infirmities, Mary called Magdalene, out of whom went seven devils,
kai asqeneiwn maria kai astheneia maria

Conj n_ Gen Pl f n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kaloumenh kaleO
magdalhnh af magdalEnE apo

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
daimonia epta daimonion hepta

n_ Nom Pl n ni numeral
AND
MARY
THE
beING-CALLED
MAGDALENE
FROM WHOM
demons
SEVEN
exelhluqei exerchomai
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
HAD-OUT-COME had-come-out
8:3 kai iwanna gunh

kai
Conj
iOanna
n_ Gen Sg f
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
couza chouzas
n_ Gen Sg m
epitropou hrwdou kai sousanna kai eterai epitropos hErOdEs kai sousanna kai heteros
n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl f
AND
JOANNA
WOMAN wife
OF-CHUSA of-Chuza
permitter manager
OF-HEROD
AND
SUSANNA
AND
DIFFERENT different-ones
And Joanna the wife of Chuza Herod's steward, and Susanna, and many others, which ministered unto him of their substance.
pollai aitines dihkonoun autois ek polus hostis diakoneO autos ek

a_ Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
uparcontwn autais huparchO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n pp Dat Pl f
MANY
WHO-ANY who-any
THRU-SERVED dispensed de de
Conj
to-them
OUT OF-THE
belongINGS possessions kata kata

Prep
to-them
8:4 suniontos
suneimi
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
pollou kai twn polus kai ho

a_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-TOGETHER-BEING YET OF-THRONG MANY of-being-together vast epiporeuomenwn epiporeuomai

AND
OF-THE
according-to city
. And when much people were gathered together, and were come to him out of every city, he spake by a parable:
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
parabolhs parabolE
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-ON-GOING ones-going-on
TOWARD Him
He-said
THRU BESIDE-CAST through parable speirai ton speirO ho

8:5 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sporon sporos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
OUT-CAME came-out tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
one-SOWING one-sowing auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
TO-SOW
THE
seed
OF-him
AND
IN
A sower went out to sow his seed: and as he sowed, some fell by the way side; and it was trodden down, and the fowls of the air devoured it.
speirein speirO
vn Pres Act
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
men men
Part
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
TO-BE-SOWING him
WHICH
INDEED FALLS
BESIDE THE
WAY road
AND
katepathqh kai ta katapateO kai ho

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou katefagen auto ouranos katesthiO autos

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n
it-WAS-tramplED was-trampled
AND
THE
heaven
DOWN-ATE devoured
it
8:6 kai eteron

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
katepesen epi thn katapiptO epi ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f
petran kai fuen petra kai phuO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg n
exhranqh xErainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
AND
DIFFERENT DOWN-FALLS falls-down mh mE

Part Neg
ON
THE
ROCK
AND
BEING-SPROUTED sprouting
THRU because-of
And some fell upon a rock; and as soon as it was sprung up, it withered away, because it lacked moisture.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
ikmada ikmas
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
NO
TO-BE-HAVING MOISTURE
AV
Luke 8
8:7 kai eteron

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
akanqwn akantha
n_ Gen Pl f
kai sumfueisai kai sumphuO

Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl f
And some fell among thorns; and the thorns sprang up with it, and choked it.
AND
DIFFERENT FALLS
IN
MIDst
OF-THE
BEING-TOGETHER-SPROUTED sprouting-together
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
akanqai akantha
n_ Nom Pl f
apepnixan auto apopnigO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg n
THE
POINT-FLOWERS FROM-CHOKE thorns smother epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
it
8:8 kai eteron

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaqhn kai fuen agathos kai phuO

a_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg n
AND
DIFFERENT FALLS
INTO THE
LAND earth
THE
GOOD
AND
BEING-SPROUTED sprouting o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epoihsen karpon poieO karpos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m
ekatontaplasiona tauta hekatontaplasiOn houtos

a_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Pl n
legwn legO
efwnei phOneO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
And other fell on good ground, and sprang up, and bare fruit an hundredfold. And when he had said these things, he cried, He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
makES produces ecwn echO
FRUIT
HUNDRED-FOLD
these sayING these-things akouetw akouO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
He-SOUNDED THE he-shouted
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
EARS
TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
8:9 ephrwtwn de
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
And his disciples asked him, saying, What might this parable be?
inquirED-of
YET Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
ANY what ?
this
MAY-BE
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
parabolh parabolE
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable de de
Conj
8:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dedotai didOmi
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gnwnai ta ginOskO ho
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n
musthria mustErion
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
YET He-said
to-YOU(p) to-ye tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
it-HAS-been-GIVEN TO-KNOW
THE
CLOSE-KEEPS OF-THE secrets blepontes blepO


qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
loipois en loipon en
a_ Dat Pl m Prep
parabolais ina parabolE hina

n_ Dat Pl f Conj
10 And he said, Unto you it is given to know the mysteries of the kingdom of God: but to others in parables; that seeing they might not see, and hearing they might not understand.
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
to-THE
YET rest rest(p) mh mE

Part Neg
IN
THAT lookING observing
mh mE
Part Neg
blepwsin blepO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl

suniwsin suniEmi
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
NO
THEY-MAY-BE-lookING AND they-may-be-observing de de

Conj
HEARING
NO
THEY-MAY-BE-understandING
8:11 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
parabolh parabolE
n_ Nom Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sporos sporos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 Now the parable is this: The seed is the word of God.
IS
YET this
THE
BESIDE-CAST THE parable
seed
IS
THE
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
saying word
OF-THE
God
8:12 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akousantes eita akouO eita

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv
THE the-ones ercetai erchomai
YET BESIDE THE
WAY road
ARE
THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
THEREAFTER
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai airei kai airO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kardias kardia
n_ Gen Sg f
12 Those by the way side are they that hear; then cometh the devil, and taketh away the word out of their hearts, lest they should believe and be saved.
IS-COMING
THE
THE
saying word
FROM THE
HEART
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteusantes swqwsin pisteuO sOzO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
OF-them
THAT NO
BELIEVing
THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED
AV
Luke 8
8:13 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
petras oi petra hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Pl m
otan hotan
Conj
akouswsin akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
meta meta
Prep
THE the-ones caras chara

n_ Gen Sg f
YET ON
THE
ROCK
WHO who(p)
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING WITH whenever rizan rhiza

n_ Acc Sg f
decontai dechomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai outoi kai houtos

Conj pd Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
13 They on the rock [are they], which, when they hear, receive the word with joy; and these have no root, which for a while believe, and in time of temptation fall away.
JOY
ARE-RECEIVING
THE
saying word
AND
these
ROOT
NOT
ARE-HAVING WHO
pros pros
Prep
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
pisteuousin kai en pisteuO kai en

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj Prep
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
peirasmou afistantai peirasmos aphistEmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
TOWARD SEASON
ARE-BELIEVING
AND
IN
SEASON
OF-trial
THEY-ARE-FROM-STANDING are-withdrawing outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
8:14 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akanqas akantha
n_ Acc Pl f
peson piptO
vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg n
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET INTO THE
POINT-FLOWERS FALLING thorns
these
ARE
THE
akousantes kai upo akouO kai hupo

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj Prep
merimnwn kai ploutou kai hdonwn merimna kai ploutos kai hEdonE
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
biou bios
n_ Gen Sg m
14 And that which fell among thorns are they, which, when they have heard, go forth, and are choked with cares and riches and pleasures of [this] life, and bring no fruit to perfection.
ones-HEARing ones-hearing poreuomenoi poreuomai
AND
UNDER anxieties by worries sumpnigontai sumpnigO

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
AND
RICHES
AND
GRATIFIcations OF-THE
livelihood life
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
telesforousin telesphoreO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
GOING
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-CHOKED AND are-being-stifled de de

Conj
NOT
ARE-FINISH-CARRYING are-bringing-it-to-maturity eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
8:15 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kalh kalos
a_ Dat Sg f
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
oitines en hostis en
pr Nom Pl m Prep
kardia kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
YET IN
THE
IDEAL
LAND earth
these
ARE
WHO-ANY who-any
IN
HEART
15 But that on the good ground are they, which in an honest and good heart, having heard the word, keep [it], and bring forth fruit with patience.
kalh kalos
a_ Dat Sg f
kai agaqh kai agathos

Conj a_ Dat Sg f
akousantes ton akouO ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
katecousin katechO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai karpoforousin kai karpophoreO

IDEAL
AND
GOOD
HEARing
THE
saying word
ARE-DOWN-HAVING AND are-retaining-it
ARE-FRUIT-CARRYING are-bearing-fruit
en en
Prep
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
UNDER-REMAINing endurance de de
Conj
8:16 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
lucnon ayas luchnos haptO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kaluptei auton kaluptO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
skeuei skeuos
n_ Dat Sg n
h E
Part
upokatw hupokatO
Adv
NOT-YET-ONE YET LAMP no-one klinhs klinE

n_ Gen Sg f
TOUCHing lighting
IS-COVERING
it
him it
to-INSTRUMENT OR to-vessel
UNDER-DOWN underneath
tiqhsin tithEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
all epi lucnias tiqhsin alla epi luchnia tithEmi

Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
16 No man, when he hath lighted a candle, covereth it with a vessel, or putteth [it] under a bed; but setteth [it] on a candlestick, that they which enter in may see the light.
OF-couch couch
IS-PLACING is-placing-it to ho
but
ON
LAMPstand
IS-PLACING is-placing-it
THAT THE
ones-INTO-GOING ones-going-in
blepwsin blepO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-lookING THE may-be-observing
LIGHT
8:17 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

krupton o kruptos hos

a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
faneron genhsetai phaneros ginomai

a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut midD 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
NOT nothing
for
IS
HIDDen
WHICH
NOT
apparent
SHALL-BE-BECOMING NOT-YET neither faneron elqh phaneros erchomai

a_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
17 For nothing is secret, that shall not be made manifest; neither [any thing] hid, that shall not be known and come abroad.
apokrufon o apokruphos hos

ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
gnwsqh ginOskO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
FROM-HIDDen concealed
WHICH
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-BEING-KNOWN AND
INTO apparent
MAY-BE-COMING
8:18 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
pws akouete pOs akouO

os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
gar ech gar echO

doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
YE-BE-lookING THEN how be-ye-bewaring !
YE-ARE-HEARING WHO
EVER for
MAY-BE-HAVING SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN
18 Take heed therefore how ye hear: for whosoever hath, to him shall be given; and whosoever hath not, from him shall be taken even that which
AV
Luke 8
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai os kai hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
ech echO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
he seemeth to have.
to-him
AND
WHO
EVER NO
MAY-BE-HAVING AND also
WHICH
he-IS-SEEMING TO-BE-HAVING he-is-supposing
arqhsetai airO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM him shall-be-being-taken-away
8:19 paregeneto de
paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

BESIDE-BECAME YET TOWARD Him came-along kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
THE
MOTHER
AND
THE
brothers
OF-Him
19 Then came to him [his] mother and his brethren, and could not come at him for the press.
hdunanto dunamai
suntucein suntugchanO
vn 2Aor Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
NOT
THEY-were-ABLE
TO-BE-TOGETHER-HAPPENING to-Him to-be-falling-in-with him de de

Conj
THRU THE because-of kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
THRONG
8:20 aphggelh
apaggellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
it-WAS-FROM-MESSAGed YET to-Him it-was-reported sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
MOTHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
brothers
20 And it was told him [by certain] which said, Thy mother and thy brethren stand without, desiring to see thee.
esthkasin exw histEmi exO

vi Perf Act 3 Pl Adv
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
qelontes thelO
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-YOU
HAVE-STOOD stand de de
Conj
OUT TO-BE-PERCEIVING WILLING outside ones-willing eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU
8:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
autous mhthr autos mEtEr

pp Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET answerING
He-said
TOWARD them
MOTHER
OF-ME
AND
21 And he answered and said unto them, My mother and my brethren are these which hear the word of God, and do it.

outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
brothers
OF-ME
these
ARE
THE-ones the-ones
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
akouontes akouO
kai poiountes kai poieO

HEARING
AND
DOING doing-it en en
Prep
8:22 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn kai autos hEmera kai autos

n_ Gen Pl f Conj pp Nom Sg m
enebh embainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ploion kai ploion kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
it-BECAME it-occurred oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
YET IN
ONE
OF-THE
DAYS
AND
He
IN-STEPPed stepped-in
INTO FLOATer ship eis eis

Prep
AND

kai eipen kai legO

pros pros
Prep
autous dielqwmen autos dierchomai

pp Acc Pl m vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
22 . Now it came to pass on a certain day, that he went into a ship with his disciples: and he said unto them, Let us go over unto the other side of the lake. And they launched forth.
THE
LEARNers disciples peran peran

Adv
OF-Him
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING INTO we-may-be-passing-through
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
limnhs limnE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai anhcqhsan kai anagO

THE
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
LAKE
AND
THEY-WERE-UP-LED they-set-out kai katebh kai katabainO

8:23 pleontwn
pleO
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
afupnwsen aphupnoO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
lailay lailaps
n_ Nom Sg f
anemou anemos
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
OF-FLOATING of-sailing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YET OF-them
He-FROM-SLEEPS AND he-falls-asleep
DOWN-STEPPed storm descended
OF-WIND
INTO
23 But as they sailed he fell asleep: and there came down a storm of wind on the lake; and they were filled [with water], and were in jeopardy.
limnhn kai suneplhrounto limnE kai sumplEroO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl
kai ekinduneuon kai kinduneuO

THE
LAKE
AND
THEY-were-TOGETHER-FILLED AND they-were-foundered dihgeiran diegeirO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-DANGERED they-were-in-danger legontes legO

proserchomai
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epistata epistata epistatEs epistatEs

n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
YET THEY-THRU-ROUSE Him they-rouse
sayING
Adept ! Doctor !
Adept ! Doctor !
24 And they came to him, and awoke him, saying, Master, master, we perish. Then he arose, and rebuked the wind and the raging of the water:
AV
Luke 8
apollumeqa apollumi
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
diegerqeis diegeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
epetimhsen tw epitimaO ho
anemw anemos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
and they ceased, and there was a calm.
WE-ARE-beING-destroyED THE we-are-perishing tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
YET BEING-THRU-ROUSED He-rebukES being-roused
to-THE the
WIND
AND
kludwni tou kludOn ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg n
udatos kai epausanto kai egeneto hudOr kai pauO kai ginomai
n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
galhnh galEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
to-THE the
SURGE surging de de
Conj
OF-THE
water
AND
THEY-CEASE
AND
it-BECAME
CALM
8:25 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois pou autos pou

pp Dat Pl m Part Int
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
fobhqentes phobeO
de de
Conj
eqaumasan thaumazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
He-said
YET to-them
?-where THE where ?
BELIEF faith ara ara

Part Int
OF-YOU(p) BEING-afraid of-ye outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
YET THEY-MARVEL
legontes legO
pros pros
Prep
allhlous tis allElOn tis

pc Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oti kai hoti kai

Conj Conj
25 And he said unto them, Where is your faith? And they being afraid wondered, saying one to another, What manner of man is this! for he commandeth even the winds and water, and they obey him.
sayING
TOWARD one-another
ANY who ?
CONSEQUENTLY this
IS
that
AND also
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anemois epitassei anemos epitassO

n_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
kai upakouousin kai hupakouO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-THE the
WINDS
He-IS-enjoinING AND
to-THE the
water
AND
THEY-ARE-obeyING to-Him him gerashnwn htis gerasEnos hostis

n_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Sg f
8:26 kai katepleusan

kai
Conj
katapleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
26 And they arrived at the country of the Gadarenes, which is over against Galilee.
AND
THEY-DOWN-FLOAT INTO THE they-sail-down ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
SPACE country
OF-THE
GERASENES
WHICH-ANY IS which-any
antipera antiperan
Adv
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
INSTEAD-OTHER-SIDE OF-THE across-from the
GALILEE
8:27 exelqonti
exerchomai
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
uphnthsen anhr hupantaO anEr

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
to-OUT-COMING to-coming-out ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YET Him
ON
THE
LAND
UNDER-meets there-meets ikanw hikanos

a_ Dat Sg m
MAN
ANY certain
OUT
polews ecwn polis echO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
daimonia kai cronw daimonion kai chronos

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
enedusato enduO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
27 And when he went forth to land, there met him out of the city a certain man, which had devils long time, and ware no clothes, neither abode in [any] house, but in the tombs.
OF-THE
city
HAVING
demons
AND
to-TIME
enough NOT considerable tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
IN-SLIPS puts-on
imation kai en himation kai en

n_ Acc Sg n Conj Prep
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
emenen menO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
all en alla en
Conj Prep
mnhmasin mnEma
n_ Dat Pl n
cloak
AND
IN
HOME house de de
Conj
NOT
REMAINED
but
IN
THE
memorial-tombs tombs autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
8:28 idwn
eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
anakraxas anakrazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
prosepesen prospiptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai fwnh kai phOnE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
PERCEIVING
YET THE
JESUS
UP-CRYing crying-out
he-TOWARD-FALLS to-Him he-prostrates ihsou iEsous

n_ Voc Sg m
AND
WH
to-SOUND to-voice
megalh eipen mega legO

a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m
WH
tou qeou
28 When he saw Jesus, he cried out, and fell down before him, and with a loud voice said, What have I to do with thee, Jesus, [thou] Son of God most high? I beseech thee, torment me not.
GREAT loud
NA
said
NA
ANY what ? tou ho
to-ME
AND
to-YOU
JESUS !
SON !
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
uyistou deomai hupsistos deomai

a_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
OF-THE the
HIGHest Most-High
I-AM-beseechING
OF-YOU you
NO
ME
basanishs basanizO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ORDEALizING you-should-be-tormenting
8:29
WH
parhggellen
NA
parhggeilen paraggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
akaqartw akathartos
a_ Dat Sg n
He-chargES
for
to-THE
spirit
THE
UN-clean unclean
29 (For he had commanded the unclean spirit to come out of the man. For oftentimes it had caught him: and he was kept bound with chains and in
AV
Luke 8
exelqein exerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou pollois gar cronois sunhrpakei anthrOpos polus gar chronos sunarpazO
n_ Gen Sg m a_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl m vi Plup Act 3 Sg
fetters; and he brake the bands, and was driven of the devil into the wilderness.)
TO-BE-OUT-COMING FROM THE to-be-coming-out auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
human
to-MANY many
for
TIMES
it-HAD-TOGETHER-SNATCHED it-had-gripped
kai edesmeueto alusesin kai desmeuO halusis

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg n_ Dat Pl f
kai pedais fulassomenos kai diarrhsswn kai pedE phulassO kai diarrhEgnumi
Conj n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
him
AND
he-WAS-BOUND
to-UN-LOOSES AND to-chains

WH
to-fetters
beING-GUARDED
AND
THRU-BURSTING bursting-through erhmous erEmos

a_ Acc Pl f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
desma desmos
n_ Acc Pl n
hlauneto elaunO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
apo
NA
upo hupo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
daimoniou eis daimonion eis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
BONDS
he-was-DRIVEN
by
THE
demon
INTO THE
DESOLATES desolate-places estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
30 And Jesus asked him, saying, What is thy name? And he said, Legion: because many devils were entered into him.
8:30 ephrwthsen de
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
inquirES-of
YET him
THE
JESUS
ANY what ?
to-YOU
NAME
IS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
legiwn oti eishlqen legeOn hoti eiserchomai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
daimonia polla daimonion polus

n_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE
YET said he-said
LEGION
that
INTO-CAME entered mh mE
Part Neg
demons
MANY
INTO him
8:31 kai parekaloun

kai
Conj
parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
epitaxh epitassO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autois eis autos eis

pp Dat Pl n Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
31 And they besought him that he would not command them to go out into the deep.
AND
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED Him they-entreated
THAT NO
He-SHOULD-BE-enjoinING to-them them
INTO THE
abusson apelqein abussos aperchomai

abyss
TO-BE-FROM-COMING to-be-coming-away de de
Conj
8:32 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei agelh ekei agelE

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
coirwn ikanwn choiros hikanos

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
boskomenh boskO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
WAS
YET there
HERD
OF-HOGS
enough beING-HERBED considerable grazing autois eis autos eis

pp Dat Pl n Prep
IN
THE
mountain
AND
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
epitreyh epitrepO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ekeinous eiselqein ekeinos eiserchomai

pd Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
32 And there was there an herd of many swine feeding on the mountain: and they besought him that he would suffer them to enter into them. And he suffered them.
THEY-BESIDE-CALL Him they-entreat
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-permittING to-them them
INTO those
kai epetreyen autois kai epitrepO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl n
AND
He-permits
to-them them de de
Conj
8:33 exelqonta
exerchomai
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
daimonia apo daimonion apo

n_ Nom Pl n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou eishlqon eis anthrOpos eiserchomai eis

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
YET THE
demons
FROM THE
human
INTO-CAME entered thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE
33 Then went the devils out of the man, and entered into the swine: and the herd ran violently down a steep place into the lake, and were choked.
coirous kai wrmhsen choiros kai hormaO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agelh agelE
n_ Nom Sg f
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
krhmnou eis krEmnos eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
limnhn kai limnE kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
HOGS
AND
RUSHES
THE
HERD
DOWN
THE
HANG precipice
INTO THE
LAKE
AND
apepnigh apopnigO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
WAS-FROM-CHOKed was-smothered
8:34 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
boskontes boskO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gegonos ginomai
efugon pheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
PERCEIVING
YET THE
ones-HERBING graziers polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred agrous agros

n_ Acc Pl m
THEY-FLED fled
AND
34 When they that fed [them] saw what was done, they fled, and went and told [it] in the city and in the country.
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE INTO THE report-it
city
AND
INTO THE
FIELDS
AV
Luke 8
8:35 exhlqon
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gegonos ginomai

pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THEY-OUT-CAME YET TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE they-came-out ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-CAME
TOWARD THE

kaqhmenon kathEmai
anqrwpon af anthrOpos apo

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
35 Then they went out to see what was done; and came to Jesus, and found the man, out of whom the devils were departed, sitting at the feet of Jesus, clothed, and in his right mind: and they were afraid.
JESUS
AND
THEY-FOUND sittING found imatismenon himatizO

THE
human
FROM WHOM
THE
WH
daimonia exhlqen daimonion exerchomai

n_ Nom Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai swfronounta para kai sOphroneO para

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
tou
demons
NA
OUT-CAME came-out ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
beING-GARMENTED AND
beING-sane
BESIDE THE
FEET
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai efobhqhsan kai phobeO

Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
OF-THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-WERE-afraid
8:36 aphggeilan
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
autois oi autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
idontes eidO
pws eswqh pOs sOzO

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM-MESSAGE YET to-them report daimonisqeis daimonizomai

THE
ones-PERCEIVING ones-perceiving
how
WAS-SAVED
THE
36 They also which saw [it] told them by what means he that was possessed of the devils was healed.
one-BEING-demonizED one-being-demonized
8:37 kai hrwthsen auton

kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Sg m
apan hapas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pericwrou twn perichOros ho

a_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
AND
asks
Him
EVERY(emph.) THE entire(emph.) ap apo

Prep
multitude
OF-THE
OF-THE
gerashnwn apelqein gerasEnos aperchomai

n_ Gen Pl m vn 2Aor Act
autwn oti fobw autos hoti phobos

pp Gen Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg m
megalw suneiconto mega sunechO

a_ Dat Sg m vi impf Pas 3 Pl
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
37 Then the whole multitude of the country of the Gadarenes round about besought him to depart from them; for they were taken with great fear: and he went up into the ship, and returned back again.
GERASENES
TO-BE-FROM-COMING FROM them to-be-coming-away eis eis

Prep
that
to-FEAR
GREAT
THEY-were-pressED He
de de
Conj
embas embainO
ploion upestreyen ploion hupostrephO

YET IN-STEPPing stepping-in
INTO FLOATer ship de de

Conj
reTURNS
8:38 edeito
deomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
af apo
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
exelhluqei ta exerchomai ho
vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl n
besought
YET OF-Him him sun sun

Prep
THE
MAN
FROM WHOM
HAD-OUT-COME had-come-out legwn legO

THE
38 Now the man out of whom the devils were departed besought him that he might be with him: but Jesus sent him away, saying,
daimonia einai daimonion eimi

n_ Nom Pl n vn Pres vxx
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
apelusen apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
demons
TO-BE
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him eis eis

Prep
He-FROM-LOOSES YET him he-dismisses oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
sayING
8:39 upostrefe
hupostrephO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai dihgou kai diEgeomai

Conj vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU-BE-reTURNING INTO THE be-you-returning ! epoihsen o poieO ho

HOME
OF-YOU
AND
BE-relatING be-you-relating ! olhn holos

a_ Acc Sg f
as-much-as to-YOU how-much polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m

kaq kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
39 Return to thine own house, and shew how great things God hath done unto thee. And he went his way, and published throughout the whole city how great things Jesus had done unto him.
DOES
THE
God
AND
he-FROM-CAME according-to WHOLE he-came-away down o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
city
khrusswn kErussO
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
epoihsen autw poieO autos

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
as-much-as DOES how-much tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
to-him
THE
JESUS
8:40 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
upostrefein ton hupostrephO ho

vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
apedexato auton apodechomai autos

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
YET THE
TO-BE-reTURNING
THE
JESUS
welcomES
Him
THE
40 . And it came to pass, that, when Jesus was returned, the people [gladly] received him: for they were all waiting for him.
AV
Luke 8
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar pantes gar pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
prosdokwntes auton prosdokaO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
THRONG
THEY-WERE for
ALL
TOWARD-SEEMING hoping-for anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
Him
8:41 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
iairos iaeiros
n_ Nom Sg m

Conj pd Nom Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING CAME lo ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
MAN
to-WHOM
NAME
JAIRUS
AND
this this-one podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
sunagwghs sunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
uphrcen huparchO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai peswn kai piptO

para para
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
41 And, behold, there came a man named Jairus, and he was a ruler of the synagogue: and he fell down at Jesus'feet, and besought him that he would come into his house:
chief chieftainship
NA
OF-THE
TOGETHER-LEAD belongED synagogue possessed ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
FALLING
BESIDE THE
FEET
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
parekalei parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
JESUS
he-BESIDE-CALLED Him he-entreated
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering
HOME house
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
8:42 oti qugathr monogenhs

hoti
Conj
thugatEr
n_ Nom Sg f
monogenEs
a_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
dwdeka kai auth dOdeka kai houtos

ni numeral Conj pd Nom Sg f
that
DAUGHTER
ONLY-generated WAS only-begotten tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
to-him
AS OF-YEARS TWO-TEN about twelve auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
this she
42 For he had one only daughter, about twelve years of age, and she lay a dying. But as he went the people thronged him.
apeqnhsken en apothnEskO en
de de
Conj
upagein hupagO
vn Pres Act
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
sunepnigon sumpnigO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
FROM-DIED died auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IN
YET THE
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING Him to-be-going-away
THE
THRONGS
TOGETHER-CHOKED stifled
Him
8:43 kai gunh

kai
Conj
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ousa eimi
en en
Prep
rusei rhusis
n_ Dat Sg f
aimatos apo haima apo

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
dwdeka htis dOdeka hostis

ni numeral pr Nom Sg f
AND
NA
WOMAN
NA
BEING
IN
NA
GUSHing
OF-BLOOD
NA NA
FROM YEARS
TWO-TEN twelve
WHO-ANY who-any ap apo

Prep
43 And a woman having an issue of blood twelve years, which had spent all her living upon physicians, neither could be healed of any,
iatrois iatros
n_ Dat Pl m
prosanalwsasa prosanaliskO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
bion bios
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
iscusen ischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-HEALers TOWARD-UP-CONSUMing WHOLE to-physicians consuming oudenos oudeis

a_ Gen Sg m
THE
livelihood
NOT
is-STRONG
FROM
qerapeuqhnai therapeuO
vn Aor Pas
NOT-YET-ONE TO-BE-curED anyone
8:44 proselqousa opisqen

proserchomai
opisthen
Adv
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n


BEHIND-PLACE she-TOUCHES OF-THE from-behind the h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
HANG-FOOT tassel
OF-THE
cloak
OF-Him
44 Came behind [him], and touched the border of his garment: and immediately her issue of blood stanched.
kai paracrhma esth kai parachrEma histEmi

Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
rusis rhusis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos auths haima autos

AND
instantly
STOOD was-stanched o ho
THE
GUSHing
OF-THE
BLOOD
OF-her
8:45 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ayamenos haptO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
THE
JESUS
ANY who ? o ho
THE
one-TOUCHing one-touching petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ME me ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
arnoumenwn arneomai
de de
Conj
pantwn eipen pas legO

a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epistata oi epistatEs ho
n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
45 And Jesus said, Who touched me? When all denied, Peter and they that were with him said, Master, the multitude throng thee and press [thee], and sayest thou, Who touched me?
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-disownING of-denying
YET ALL
said
THE
Peter
Adept ! Doctor !
THE
THRONGS
AV
Luke 8
sunecousin se sunechO su
vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Sg
kai apoqlibousin kai apothlibO

ARE-pressING
YOU
AND
THEY-ARE-FROM-CONSTRICTING they-are-jostling eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8:46 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hyato haptO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar egnwn gar ginOskO

46 And Jesus said, Somebody hath touched me: for I perceive that virtue is gone out of me.
THE
YET JESUS
said
TOUCHES
OF-ME me
ANY someone
for
KNEW
dunamin exelhluquian ap dunamis exerchomai apo

n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Act Acc Sg f Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ABILITY power
HAVING-OUT-COME having-come-out de de
Conj
FROM ME
8:47 idousa
eidO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
elaqen lanthanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tremousa tremO
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
PERCEIVING
YET THE
WOMAN
that
NOT
she-was-OBLIVIOUS TREMBLING
CAME
kai prospesousa autw kai prospiptO autos

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f pp Dat Sg m
di dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
aitian hyato aitia haptO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
47 And when the woman saw that she was not hid, she came trembling, and falling down before him, she declared unto him before all the people for what cause she had touched him, and how she was healed immediately.
AND
TOWARD-FALLING prostrating
to-Him
THRU WHICH because-of laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
cause
she-TOUCHES OF-Him him paracrhma parachrEma

Adv
she-FROM-MESSAGES she-reports
enwpion pantos enOpion pas

Adv a_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai ws iaqh kai hOs iaomai

Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN-VIEW OF-EVERY in-the-sight-of entire
THE
PEOPLE
AND
AS so
WAS-HEALED instantly
8:48 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
qugathr h thugatEr ho
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
YET He-said
to-her
DAUGHTER daughter !
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU
HAS-SAVED
YOU
48 And he said unto her, Daughter, be of good comfort: thy faith hath made thee whole; go in peace.
poreuou poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
eirhnhn eirEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
INTO PEACE
8:49 eti
eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
ercetai erchomai
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking legwn legO

IS-COMING
ANY someone
BESIDE THE
49 While he yet spake, there cometh one from the ruler of the synagogue's [house], saying to him, Thy daughter is dead; trouble not the Master.
arcisunagwgou archisunagOgos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti teqnhken h hoti thnEskO ho

Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr sou thugatEr su

mhketi mEketi
Adv
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD sayING chief-of-the-synagogue skulle skullO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
that
HAS-DIED
THE
DAUGHTER
OF-YOU
NO-NOT-STILL by-no-means-longer
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
didaskalon didaskalos
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-FLAYING THE be-you-bothering !
TEACHer
8:50 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
monon monon
Adv
THE
YET JESUS
HEARing hearing-it
answerED
to-him him
NO
ONLY
50 But when Jesus heard [it], he answered him, saying, Fear not: believe only, and she shall be made whole.
pisteuson kai swqhsetai pisteuO kai sOzO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
BELIEVE believe-you !
AND
she-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
8:51 elqwn
erchomai
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
vn 2Aor Act
tina tis
px Acc Pl n
COMING
YET INTO THE
HOME house
NOT
He-FROM-LETS TO-BE-INTO-COMING ANY he-lets to-be-entering anyone patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
51 And when he came into the house, he suffered no man to go in, save Peter, and James, and John, and the father and the mother of the maiden.
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai iwannhn kai iakwbon kai ton kai iOannEs kai iakObos kai ho
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him
IF
NO
Peter
AND
JOHN
AND
JACOBUS James
AND
THE
FATHER
AV
Luke 8 - Luke 9
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
paidos kai thn pais kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
girl
AND
THE
MOTHER
8:52 eklaion
klaiO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kai ekoptonto kai koptO

Conj vi impf Mid 3 Pl
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
52 And all wept, and bewailed her: but he said, Weep not; she is not dead, but sleepeth.
LAMENTED
YET ALL
AND
THEY-STRUCK-(themselves) her they-grieved-for alla kaqeudei alla katheudO

THE
YET He-said
NO
klaiete klaiO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
gar apeqanen gar apothnEskO

BE-YE-LAMENTING NOT be-ye-lamenting !
for
she-FROM-DIED but she-died autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
she-IS-DOWN-LOUNGING she-is-drowsing oti apeqanen hoti apothnEskO

53 And they laughed him to scorn, knowing that she was dead.
8:53 kai kategelwn

kai
Conj
katagelaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eidotes eidO
AND
THEY-DOWN-LAUGHED OF-Him they-ridiculed him de de

Conj
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
she-FROM-DIED she-died efwnhsen legwn phOneO legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
8:54 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
krathsas krateO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
54 And he put them all out, and took her by the hand, and called, saying, Maid, arise.
He
YET HOLDing
OF-THE the
HAND
OF-her
SOUNDS shouts
sayING
THE
pais pais
n_ Nom Sg f
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
girl
BE-ROUSING be-you-rousing ! pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
8:55 kai epestreyen to

kai
Conj
epistrephO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
kai anesth kai anistEmi

paracrhma kai parachrEma kai

Adv Conj
AND
ON-TURNS turns-back auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
THE
spirit
OF-her
AND
she-UP-STOOD instantly she-rose
AND
55 And her spirit came again, and she arose straightway: and he commanded to give her meat.
dietaxen diatassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
doqhnai didOmi
vn Aor Pas
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
He-prescribES to-her
TO-BE-GIVEN TO-BE-EATING
8:56 kai exesthsan oi

kai
Conj
existEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
parhggeilen autois paraggellO autos

AND
OUT-STOOD were-amazed eipein legO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
parents
OF-her
THE
YET He-chargES
to-them them
56 And her parents were astonished: but he charged them that they should tell no man what was done.
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gegonos ginomai
to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING THE no-one to-be-telling
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred
AV
Luke 9
9:1 sugkalesamenos de
sugkaleO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka edwken dOdeka didOmi

ni numeral vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois dunamin kai exousian epi autos dunamis kai exousia epi
pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep
TOGETHER-CALLing calling-together panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
YET THE
TWO-TEN twelve
He-GIVES
to-them them
ABILITY power
AND
authority
ON
. Then he called his twelve disciples together, and gave them power and authority over all devils, and to cure diseases.
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia kai nosous qerapeuein daimonion kai nosos therapeuO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f vn Pres Act
ALL
THE
demons
AND
DISEASES
TO-BE-curING
9:2 kai apesteilen autous khrussein

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
kErussO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
And he sent them to preach the kingdom of God, and to heal the sick.
AND
He-commissions
NA
them
NA
TO-BE-PROCLAIMING THE to-be-heralding asqeneis asthenEs

a_ Acc Pl m
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
iasqai iaomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
TO-BE-HEALING
THE
UN-FIRM infirm autous mhden autos mEdeis

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
9:3 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
airete airO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
mhte mEte
Conj
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
NO-YET-ONE BE-LIFTING INTO THE nothing be-ye-picking-up ! arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
WAY road
NO-BESIDES neither
And he said unto them, Take nothing for [your] journey, neither staves, nor scrip, neither bread, neither money; neither have two coats apiece.
rabdon mhte rhabdos mEte

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
phran pEra
n_ Acc Sg f
mhte mEte
Conj
mhte mEte
Conj
argurion mhte argurion mEte

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
ROD staff
NA
NO-BESIDES BAG (beggar's) NO-BESIDES BREAD nor beggar's-bag nor ana ana
Prep
NO-BESIDES SILVER nor
NO-BESIDES nor
duo duo
ni numeral
citwnas ecein chitOn echO

n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
UP apiece
TWO
TUNICS
TO-BE-HAVING
9:4 kai eis

kai
Conj
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
an an
Part
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ekei menete ekei menO

kai ekeiqen kai ekeithen

Conj Adv
And whatsoever house ye enter into, there abide, and thence depart.
AND
INTO WHICH
EVER HOME house
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING there ye-may-be-entering
BE-YE-REMAINING AND be-ye-remaining !
thence
exercesqe exerchomai
BE-YE-OUT-COMING be-ye-coming-out !
9:5 kai osoi

kai
Conj
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
an an
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
decwntai dechomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
as-many-as EVER NO whoever
MAY-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) ye koniorton apo koniortos apo

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
OUT-COMING coming-out podwn pous

n_ Gen Pl m
FROM THE
And whosoever will not receive you, when ye go out of that city, shake off the very dust from your feet for a testimony against them.
polews ekeinhs ton polis ekeinos ho

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
apotinassete apotinassO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
city
that
THE
DUST
FROM THE
FEET
OF-YOU(p) BE-YE-FROM-QUIVERING of-ye be-ye-twitching-off !
eis eis
Prep
marturion ep marturion epi

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
ON
them
9:6 exercomenoi
exerchomai
de de
Conj
dihrconto dierchomai
kata kata
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
euaggelizomenoi kai euaggelizO kai

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m Conj
YET THEY-THRU-CAME they-passed-through
according-to THE
VILLAGES WELL-MESSAGizING AND bringing-the-well-message
And they departed, and went through the towns, preaching the gospel, and healing every where.
qerapeuontes pantacou therapeuO pantachou

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv
curING
EVERY-SOIL everywhere de de
Conj
9:7 hkousen
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tetraarchs ta tetraarchEs ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
ginomena ginomai
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
HEARS
YET HEROD
THE
THE
BECOMING(p) occurring(p)
ALL
AND
Now Herod the tetrarch heard of all that was done by him: and he was perplexed, because that it was said of some, that John was risen from
AV
Luke 9
dihporei diaporeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
legesqai legO
vn Pres Pas
upo tinwn hupo tis

Prep px Gen Pl m
oti iwannhs hgerqh hoti iOannEs egeirO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
the dead;
was-bewilderED THRU THE because-of nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-beING-said by
ANY some
that
JOHN
WAS-ROUSED OUT
OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones
9:8 upo tinwn

hupo
Prep
tis
px Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
oti hlias hoti Elias

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
efanh phainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
allwn allos
a_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
oti profhths hoti prophEtEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
by
ANY some
YET that
ELIAS Elijah
APPEARed
OF-others
YET that
BEFORE-AVERer ANY prophet some
And of some, that Elias had appeared; and of others, that one of the old prophets was risen again.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcaiwn anesth archaios anistEmi

OF-THE
ORIGINals ancients de de
Conj
UP-STOOD rose
WH
9:9 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
iwannhn egw iOannEs egO

n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg
apekefalisa tis apokephalizO tis

vi Aor Act 1 Sg pi Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
said
YET
HEROD
JOHN
FROM-HEADize behead
ANY who ?
YET
And Herod said, John have I beheaded: but who is this, of whom I hear such things? And he desired to see him.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
akouw akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
toiauta kai ezhtei toioutos kai zEteO

pd Acc Pl n Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
IS
this
ABOUT WHOM
I-AM-HEARING such such-things
AND
SOUGHT he-sought
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-PERCEIVING Him to-be-becoming-acquainted-with
9:10 kai upostreyantes oi

kai
Conj
hupostrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi dihghsanto autw apostolos diEgeomai autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
epoihsan poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
reTURNing
THE
commissioners apostles kat kata

Prep
relate
to-Him
as-much-as THEY-DO whatever polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
kai paralabwn kai paralambanO

autous upecwrhsen autos hupochOreO

pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
kaloumenhn kaleO
10 . And the apostles, when they were returned, told him all that they had done. And he took them, and went aside privately into a desert place belonging to the city called Bethsaida.
AND
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along
them
He-UNDER-SPACES according-to OWN he-retreats
INTO city
beING-CALLED
bhqsaida bEthsaida
ni proper
BETHSAIDA
9:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
gnontes ginOskO

kai apodexamenos kai apodechomai

Conj vp Aor midD Nom Sg m
THE
YET THRONGS
KNOWING knowing-it ths ho
follow
to-Him him basileias tou basileia ho

AND
FROM-RECEIVing welcoming kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
autous elalei autos laleO

pp Acc Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois peri autos peri

pp Dat Pl m Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
11 And the people, when they knew [it], followed him: and he received them, and spake unto them of the kingdom of God, and healed them that had need of healing.
t_ Gen Sg f
them
He-TALKED he-spoke econtas echO
to-them
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
THE-ones the-ones
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
qerapeias iato therapeia iaomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
need
HAVING
OF-cure
He-HEALED
9:12 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
klinein klinO
vn Pres Act
proselqontes de proserchomai de
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
THE
YET DAY
begins
TO-BE-deCLINING TOWARD-COMING approaching oclon ochlos

n_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
TWO-TEN twelve kuklw kuklO

n_ Dat Sg m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
apoluson ton apoluO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
12 And when the day began to wear away, then came the twelve, and said unto him, Send the multitude away, that they may go into the towns and country round about, and lodge, and get victuals: for we are here in a desert place.
say
to-Him
FROM-LOOSE dismiss-you !
THE
THRONG
THAT BEING-GONE
INTO THE
to-AROUND
AV
Luke 9
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
kai agrous kataluswsin kai agros kataluO

Conj n_ Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 3 Pl
kai eurwsin kai heuriskO

episitismon oti episitismos hoti

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
VILLAGES AND
FIELDS
THEY-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-LOOSING AND they-should-be-putting-up-for-the-night topw topos

n_ Dat Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-FINDING ON-GRAIN forage
that
wde en hOde en
Adv Prep
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
here
IN
DESOLATE PLACE
WE-ARE
WH WH NA
9:13 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous dote autos didOmi

pp Acc Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
fagein umeis
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
He-said
NA
YET TOWARD them
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving ! ouk ou

Part Neg
to-them them hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
YOU(p) ye pleion polus

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
h E
Part
artoi artos
n_ Nom Pl m
13 But he said unto them, Give ye them to eat. And they said, We have no more but five loaves and two fishes; except we should go and buy meat for all this people.
TO-BE-EATING
THE
YET THEY-say
NOT
ARE
to-US
MORE
OR BREADS than cakes-of-bread eis eis

Prep
pente kai icques pente kai ichthus

ni numeral Conj n_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
ei ei
Cond
mhti mEti
Part Int
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
agoraswmen agorazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
FIVE
AND
FISHES
TWO
IF
NO-ANY BEING-GONE not ?
WE
SHOULD-BE-BUYING INTO
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton brwmata houtos brOma

pd Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl n
ALL
THE
PEOPLE
this
FOODS
9:14 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar wsei andres gar hOsei anEr

Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m
pentakiscilioi eipen pentakischilioi legO

n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-WERE for
AS-IF about
MEN
He-said
WH
YET TOWARD THE

NA
14 For they were about five thousand men. And he said to his disciples, Make them sit down by fifties in a company.

kataklinate autous klisias katakluzO autos klisia

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl f
wsei
wsei hOsei
Adv
ana ana
Prep
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
DOWN-CLINE cause-to-recline-ye !
them
CLINES groups
AS-IF about
UP apiece
ni numeral
FIVE-ty fifty
9:15 kai epoihsan outws kai kateklinan

kai
Conj
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
kataklinO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
apantas hapas
a_ Acc Pl m
15 And they did so, and made them all sit down.
AND
THEY-DO
thus
AND
THEY-DOWN-CLINE ALL(emph.) cause-to-recline pente artous pente artos

9:16 labwn
lambanO
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
icquas ichthus
n_ Acc Pl m
GETTING taking anableyas anablepO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
YET THE
FIVE
THE
TWO
FISHES
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon euloghsen autous kai kateklasen kai edidou ouranos eulogeO autos kai kataklaO kai didOmi
n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
16 Then he took the five loaves and the two fishes, and looking up to heaven, he blessed them, and brake, and gave to the disciples to set before the multitude.
UP-looking looking-up tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
INTO THE
heaven
He-blessES
them
AND
DOWN-BREAKS breaks-up-them
AND
GAVE
maqhtais paraqeinai mathEtEs paratithEmi

n_ Dat Pl m vn 2Aor Act
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
TO-BESIDE-PLACE to-THE to-place-before the
THRONG
9:17 kai efagon

kai
Conj
esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ecortasqhsan pantes kai chortazO pas

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
kai hrqh kai airO

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
perisseusan perisseuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg n
AND
THEY-ATE
AND
ARE-satisfiED
ALL
AND
WAS-LIFTED THE was-picked-up
exceeding superfluous
17 And they did eat, and were all filled: and there was taken up of fragments that remained to them twelve baskets.
autois klasmatwn kofinoi dwdeka autos klasma kophinos dOdeka

pp Dat Pl m n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m ni numeral
to-them
PANNIERS
TWO-TEN twelve
AV
Luke 9
9:18 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kata kata
Prep
monas monos
a_ Acc Pl f
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred autw autos
IN
THE
TO-BE
Him
prayING
according-to ONLY alone(p) tina tis

pi Acc Sg m
18 . And it came to pass, as he was alone praying, his disciples were with him: and he asked them, saying, Whom say the people that I am?
sunhsan suneimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai kai ephrwthsen autous legwn mathEtEs kai eperOtaO autos legO
n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
pp Dat Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER to-Him with-him me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
WH WH WH
THE
LEARNers disciples
NA
AND
NA
He-inquirES-of
NA
them
sayING
ANY who ?
oi ocloi legousin
legousin oi legO ho
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ME
ARE-sayING
THE
THRONGS
TO-BE
9:19 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
apokriqentes eipan apokrinomai legO

vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl

baptisthn alloi baptistEs allos

de de
Conj
THE
YET answerING
say they-say
JOHN
THE
DIPist baptist
others
YET
19 They answering said, John the Baptist; but some [say], Elias; and others [say], that one of the old prophets is risen again.
hlian Elias
n_ Acc Sg m
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcaiwn anesth archaios anistEmi

ELIAS Elijah
others
YET that
BEFORE-AVERer ANY prophet some de de

Conj
OF-THE
ORIGINals ancients legete legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
UP-STOOD rose einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
9:20 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj

tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
He-said
YET to-them
YOU(p) ye ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
YET ANY who ? criston tou christos ho

n_ Acc Sg m
ME
ARE-sayING ye-are-saying qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE
Peter
YET
20 He said unto them, But whom say ye that I am? Peter answering said, The Christ of God.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
t_ Gen Sg m
answerING
said
THE
ANOINTED Christ
OF-THE
God
9:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epitimhsas epitimaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autois parhggeilen mhdeni autos paraggellO mEdeis

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Dat Sg m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
21 And he straitly charged them, and commanded [them] to tell no man that thing;
THE
YET rebuking warning oti dei hoti deO

Conj
to-them them
He-chargES
to-NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-sayING this no-one to-be-telling tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
9:22 eipwn
legO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpou polla anthrOpos polus

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
sayING
that
it-IS-BINDING must
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
much
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
kai apodokimasqhnai apo kai apodokimazO apo

Conj vn Aor Pas Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn kai arcierewn presbuteros kai archiereus

kai kai
Conj
22 Saying, The Son of man must suffer many things, and be rejected of the elders and chief priests and scribes, and be slain, and be raised the third day.
TO-BE-EMOTIONING AND to-be-suffering
FROM THE
SENIORS elders hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
AND

kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
egerqhnai egeirO
vn Aor Pas
WRITers scribes
AND
TO-BE-FROM-KILLED AND to-be-killed pros pros

Prep
to-THE
third
DAY
TO-BE-ROUSED
9:23 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pantas ei pas ei
a_ Acc Pl m Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
He-said
YET TOWARD ALL
IF
ANY anyone ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IS-WILLING
BEHIND after
ME
TO-BE-COMING
23 And he said to [them] all, If any [man] will come after me, let him deny himself, and take up his cross daily, and follow me.
arnhsasqw eauton arneomai heautou

kai aratw kai airO


kaq kata
Prep
hmeran kai hEmera kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
LET-him-disown let-him-disown !
self himself moi egO
AND
LET-him-LIFT THE let-him-pick-up !
pale cross
OF-him
according-to DAY
AND
akolouqeitw akoloutheO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
pp 1 Dat Sg
LET-him-BE-followING to-ME let-him-be-following ! me
9:24 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar an gar an
Conj Part
qelh thelO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m

WHO
for
EVER SHOULD-BE-WILLING THE may-be-willing
soul
OF-him
TO-SAVE SHALL-BE-destroyING
24 For whosoever will save his life shall lose it: but whosoever will lose his life for my sake, the same shall save it.
AV
Luke 9
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
apolesh apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eneken heneken
Adv
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
her
WHO
YET EVER SHOULD-BE-destroyING THE
soul
OF-him
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
swsei sOzO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
this-one this-one
SHALL-BE-SAVING her
9:25 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar wfeleitai gar OpheleO

Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
anqrwpos kerdhsas anthrOpos kerdainO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ANY what ? eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
for
IS-beING-benefitED human
GAINing
THE
SYSTEM world
WHOLE
25 For what is a man advantaged, if he gain the whole world, and lose himself, or be cast away?
de de
Conj
apolesas apollumi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
h E
Part
zhmiwqeis zEmioO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
self himself
YET destroying
OR
BEING-FINED forfeiting me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
9:26 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
gar an gar an
Conj Part
vs Aor pasD 3 Sg
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
emous emos
ps 1 Acc Pl
logous touton logos houtos

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Sg m
WHO
for
EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ON-VILED ME may-be-being-ashamed-of tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE of-the
MY
sayings words elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
this of-this-one en en
Prep
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou epaiscunqhsetai anthrOpos epaischunomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut pasD 3 Sg
otan hotan
Conj
26 For whosoever shall be ashamed of me and of my words, of him shall the Son of man be ashamed, when he shall come in his own glory, and [in his] Father's, and of the holy angels.
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-VILED when-EVER He-MAY-BE-COMING IN shall-be-being-ashamed whenever patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
AND
OF-THE
FATHER
AND
OF-THE
HOLY
MESSENGERS
9:27 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
alhqws eisin alEthOs eimi

Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
autou autou
Adv
esthkotwn histEmi
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye mh mE

Part Neg
TRUly
THEY-ARE there-are
ANY some
OF-THE-ones OF-SAME HAVING-STOOD of-the-ones here standing idwsin eidO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
27 But I tell you of a truth, there be some standing here, which shall not taste of death, till they see the kingdom of God.
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
geuswntai geuomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WHO
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-TASTING OF-DEATH death qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
EVER THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE

KINGdom
OF-THE
God
NA
9:28 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
meta tous meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous wsei hmerai logos houtos hOsei hEmera

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Adv n_ Nom Pl f
oktw oktO
ni numeral
kai kai
Conj
BECAME it-occurred paralabwn paralambanO

YET after
THE
sayings
these
AS-IF about
DAYS
EIGHT
AND also oros oros

n_ Acc Sg n
28 . And it came to pass about an eight days after these sayings, he took Peter and John and James, and went up into a mountain to pray.
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai iwannhn kai iakwbon anebh kai iOannEs kai iakObos anabainO
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along proseuxasqai proseuchomai

vn Aor midD
Peter
AND
JOHN
AND
JACOBUS James
He-UP-STEPPed INTO THE he-ascended
mountain
TO-pray
9:29 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
proseucesqai auton proseuchomai autos

vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eidos eidos
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
AND
BECAME
IN
THE
TO-BE-prayING
Him
THE
PERCEPtion OF-THE
29 And as he prayed, the fashion of his countenance was altered, and his raiment [was] white [and] glistering.
proswpou autou prosOpon autos

eteron heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
imatismos autou himatismos autos

leukos leukos
a_ Nom Sg m
face
OF-Him
DIFFERENT AND
THE
GARMENTing vesture
OF-Him
WHITE
AV
Luke 9
exastraptwn exastraptO
OUT-GLEAM-FLINGING glittering
9:30 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
sunelaloun sullaleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oitines hsan hostis eimi

pr Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
30 And, behold, there talked with him two men, which were Moses and Elias:
AND
TWO
TOGETHER-TALKED to-Him conferred-with him
WHO-ANY who-any
WERE
MOSES
kai hlias kai Elias

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
AND
ELIAS Elijah ofqentes optomai

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
9:31 oi
hos
pr Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exodon autou exodos autos

hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
WHO
BEING-VIEWED being-seen plhroun plEroO

vn Pres Act
IN
esteem glory
said
THE
OUT-WAY exodus
OF-Him
WHICH
31 Who appeared in glory, and spake of his decease which he should accomplish at Jerusalem.
hmellen mellO
en en
Prep
ni proper
He-WAS-ABOUT TO-BE-FILLING IN to-be-completing
JERUSALEM
9:32 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
bebarhmenoi bareO
THE
YET Peter
AND
THE the-ones eidon eidO
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
WERE
HAVING-been-HEAVIED
upnw hupnos
n_ Dat Sg m
diagrhgorhsantes de diagrEgoreO de
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
32 But Peter and they that were with him were heavy with sleep: and when they were awake, they saw his glory, and the two men that stood with him.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
to-SLEEP
THRU-ROUSing becoming-alert
YET THEY-PERCEIVED THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
AND
THE
TWO
andras tous anEr ho

sunestwtas sunistEmi
vp Perf Act Acc Pl m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
MEN
THE
HAVING-TOGETHER-STOOD to-Him standing-togetherwith him en en

Prep
9:33 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
diacwrizesqai diachOrizomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
autous ap autos apo

pp Acc Pl m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
BECAME it-occurred petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
TO-BE-beING-THRU-SPACEizED them to-be-being-detached ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
FROM Him
said
o ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
epistata kalon epistatEs kalos

n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
wde hOde
Adv
33 And it came to pass, as they departed from him, Peter said unto Jesus, Master, it is good for us to be here: and let us make three tabernacles; one for thee, and one for Moses, and one for Elias: not knowing what he said.
THE
Peter
TOWARD THE
JESUS
Adept ! Doctor ! treis treis

n_ Nom Pl m
IDEAL
it-IS
US
here
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
kai poihswmen kai poieO

skhnas skEnE
n_ Acc Pl f
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai mian kai heis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
mwusei kai mOusEs kai

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
TO-BE
AND
WE-SHOULD-BE-makING BOOTHS THREE tabernacles mh mE

Part Neg
ONE
to-YOU
AND
ONE
to-MOSES
AND
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
hlia Elias
n_ Dat Sg m
eidws eidO
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ONE
to-ELIAS to-Elijah de de
Conj
NO
HAVING-PERCEIVED WHICH being-aware legontos legO

he-IS-sayING
9:34 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
nefelh nephelE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai epeskiazen autous kai episkiazO autos

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m
these YET OF-him these-things efobhqhsan phobeO

vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
sayING
BECAME
CLOUD
AND
ON-SHADED overshadowed nefelhn nephelE

n_ Acc Sg f
them
34 While he thus spake, there came a cloud, and overshadowed them: and they feared as they entered into the cloud.
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
vn 2Aor Act

pp Acc Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-WERE-afraid YET IN
THE
TO-BE-INTO-COMING them to-be-entering ek ek

Prep
INTO THE
CLOUD
9:35 kai fwnh

kai
Conj
phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
nefelhs legousa nephelE legO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
35 And there came a voice out of the cloud, saying, This is my beloved Son: hear him.
AND
SOUND voice
BECAME
OUT OF-THE
CLOUD
sayING
this
IS
AV
Luke 9
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eklelegmenos eklegO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akouete akouO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
One-HAVING-been-chosen OF-Him one-having-been-chosen him thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
BE-HEARING be-ye-hearing ! ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
9:36 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
fwnhn eureqh phOnE heuriskO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
IN
THE
TO-BE-BECOMING THE
SOUND voice
WAS-FOUND
JESUS
ONLY alone
AND
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
esighsan kai oudeni sigaO kai oudeis

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj a_ Dat Sg m
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep

hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
36 And when the voice was past, Jesus was found alone. And they kept [it] close, and told no man in those days any of those things which they had seen.
they
HUSH
AND
to-NOT-YET-ONE THEY-FROM-MESSAGE IN to-no-one they-report
those
THE
DAYS
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
ewrakan horaO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
NOT-YET-ONE OF-WHICH THEY-HAVE-SEEN anything
9:37 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
exhs hmera hexEs hEmera

Adv n_ Dat Sg f
katelqontwn autwn katerchomai autos

vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
BECAME it-occurred sunhnthsen sunantaO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
YET to-THE
next
DAY
OF-DOWN-COMING of-coming-down
OF-them
FROM THE
mountain
37 . And it came to pass, that on the next day, when they were come down from the hill, much people met him.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-meets to-Him meets-with him
THRONG
MANY vast apo apo

Prep
9:38 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
ebohsen boaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MAN lo ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
FROM THE
THRONG
IMPLORES
sayING
TEACHer !
38 And, behold, a man of the company cried out, saying, Master, I beseech thee, look upon my son: for he is mine only child.
deomai deomai
epibleyai epi ton epiblepO epi ho

vn Aor Act Prep t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti monogenhs hoti monogenEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-beseechING
OF-YOU you
TO-ON-look look-on-you !
ON
THE
SON
OF-ME
that
ONLY-generated only-begotten
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-ME
he-IS
9:39 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai exaifnhs krazei kai exaiphnEs krazO

Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
BE-PERCEIVING spirit lo ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IS-GETTING-UP him is-getting kai kai

Conj
WH
AND
NA
suddenly
he-IS-CRYING AND
39 And, lo, a spirit taketh him, and he suddenly crieth out; and it teareth him that he foameth again, and bruising him hardly departeth from him.
sparassei sparassO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
meta afrou meta aphros

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
molis
mogis mogis
Adv
apocwrei apochOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
it-IS-CONVULSING him
WITH
FROTH
AND
DIFFICULTly with-difficulty
IS-FROM-SPACING FROM is-departing
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
suntribon suntribO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him
crushING
him
9:40 kai edehqhn

kai
Conj
deomai
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn sou mathEtEs su

ina hina
Conj
ekbalwsin ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
40 And I besought thy disciples to cast him out; and they could not.
AND
I-besought
OF-THE the
LEARNers disciples
OF-YOU
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING it they-should-be-casting-out
AND
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdunhqhsan dunamai
NOT
THEY-WERE-enABLED they-could de de
Conj
9:41 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
w genea O genea
Inj n_ Voc Sg f
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
answerING
YET THE
JESUS
said
o!
generation UN-BELIEVing AND generation ! unbelieving
41 And Jesus answering said, O faithless and perverse generation, how long shall I be with you, and suffer you? Bring thy son hither.
AV
Luke 9
diestrammenh diastrephO
ews pote esomai heOs pote eimi

Conj Part Int vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai anexomai kai anechomai

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED TILL having-been-perverted prosagage prosagO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
?-when when ?
I-SHALL-BE
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
AND
I-SHALL-BE-toleratING OF-YOU(p) I-shall-be-bearing-with ye
wde ton hOde ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
BE-TOWARD-LEADING here be-you-leading-toward !
THE
SON
OF-YOU
9:42 eti
eti
Adv
de de
Conj
prosercomenou proserchomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
errhxen rhEgnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
daimonion kai daimonion kai

n_ Nom Sg n Conj
STILL YET OF-TOWARD-COMING of-approaching sunesparaxen susparassO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-him
BURSTS tears
him
THE
demon
AND
epetimhsen de epitimaO de
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
42 And as he was yet a coming, the devil threw him down, and tare [him]. And Jesus rebuked the unclean spirit, and healed the child, and delivered him again to his father.
TOGETHER-CONVULSES rebukES violently-convulses akaqartw kai iasato akathartos kai iaomai

a_ Dat Sg n Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
to-THE the
spirit
THE
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paida pais
n_ Acc Sg m
kai apedwken auton kai apodidOmi autos

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
UN-clean unclean autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
He-HEALS
THE
boy
AND
FROM-GIVES gives-back
him
to-THE
FATHER
OF-him
9:43 exeplhssonto de
ekplEssO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
megaleiothti tou megaleiotEs ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
were-astonishED
YET ALL
ON
THE
magnificence
OF-THE
God
OF-ALL
43 . And they were all amazed at the mighty power of God. But while they wondered every one at all things which Jesus did, he said unto his disciples,
de de
Conj
qaumazontwn epi pasin thaumazO epi pas

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Prep a_ Dat Pl n
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
YET OF-MARVELING marveling autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ON
ALL
to-WHICH He-DID which
He-said
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
9:44 qesqe
tithEmi
vm 2Aor Mid 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous o logos houtos ho

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
BE-PLACING be-ye-placing ! gar uios gar huios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
EARS
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye paradidosqai paradidOmi

vn Pres Pas
sayings
these
THE
44 Let these sayings sink down into your ears: for the Son of man shall be delivered into the hands of men.
anqrwpou mellei anthrOpos mellO

eis eis
Prep
ceiras anqrwpwn cheir anthrOpos

for
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-ABOUT is-being-about to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO HANDS to-be-being-given-up touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
OF-humans
9:45 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hgnooun agnoeO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai hn kai eimi

THE
YET THEY-UN-KNEW THE they-were-ignorant-of ap apo

Prep
declaration this
AND
WAS it-was auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
45 But they understood not this saying, and it was hid from them, that they perceived it not: and they feared to ask him of that saying.
parakekalummenon parakaluptO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
aisqwntai aisthanomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
HAVING-been-BESIDE-COVERED FROM them having-been-screened efobounto phobeO

THAT NO
THEY-MAY-BE-SENSING it
AND
erwthsai auton erOtaO autos

peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
rhmatos toutou rhEma houtos

THEY-FEARED
TO-ask
Him
ABOUT THE concerning autois to autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
declaration
this
9:46 eishlqen
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
dialogismos en dialogismos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
an an
Part
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg n
46 Then there arose a reasoning among them, which of them should be greatest.
INTO-CAME entered
YET THRU-account reasoning
IN them among
THE
ANY who ?
EVER MAY-BE
AV
Luke 9
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
GREATER greatest
OF-them
9:47 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eidws eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dialogismon ths dialogismos ho


47 And Jesus, perceiving the thought of their heart, took a child, and set him by him,
THE
YET JESUS
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE
THRU-account reasoning par para

Prep
OF-THE
HEART
OF-them
epilabomenos epilambanomai
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
esthsen histEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
ON-GETTING getting-hold-of
little-boy (-or-girl) STANDS
it
BESIDE Self himself dexhtai dechomai

vs Aor midD 3 Sg
9:48 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois os autos hos

pp Dat Pl m pr Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
said
to-them
WHO
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING this
THE
little-boy (-or-girl)
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n

eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
decetai dechomai
kai os kai hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
48 And said unto them, Whosoever shall receive this child in my name receiveth me: and whosoever shall receive me receiveth him that sent me: for he that is least among you all, the same shall be great.
ON
THE
NAME
OF-ME
ME
IS-RECEIVING
AND
WHO
EVER ME
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
decetai dechomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING IS-RECEIVING
THE
One-commissioning one-commissioning outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
ME
THE
for
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
uparcwn huparchO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
LITTLER one-smaller
IN ALL among de de
Conj
to-YOU(p) ye
belongING inherently
this-one this-one
IS
GREAT
9:49 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
iwannhs eipen iOannEs legO

epistata eidomen epistatEs eidO

n_ Voc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
answerING
YET JOHN
said
Adept ! Doctor !
WE-PERCEIVED ANY someone
IN
THE
49 And John answered and said, Master, we saw one casting out devils in thy name; and we forbad him, because he followeth not with us.

ekballonta ekballO
daimonia kai ekwluomen auton daimonion kai kOluO autos

n_ Acc Pl n Conj vi impf Act 1 Pl pp Acc Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
NAME
OF-YOU
OUT-CASTING casting-out hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
demons
AND
WE-FORBADE
him
that
NOT
akolouqei meq akoloutheO meta

vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep
he-IS-followING
WITH US
NA
9:50 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
50 And Jesus said unto him, Forbid [him] not: for he that is not against us is for us.
said
YET TOWARD him
THE
JESUS
NO
BE-YE-FORBIDDING WHO be-ye-forbidding !
gar ouk gar ou

Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kaq kata
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
uper huper
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
for
NOT
IS
DOWN OF-YOU(p) OVER YOU(p) against ye for-the-sake-of ye de de

Conj
IS
9:51 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
sumplhrousqai sumplEroO
vn Pres Pas
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras ths hEmera ho

YET IN
THE
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-FILLED THE to-be-being-fulfilled to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
DAYS
OF-THE
51 . And it came to pass, when the time was come that he should be received up, he stedfastly set his face to go to Jerusalem,
analhmyews autou analEpsis autos

kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
proswpon esthrisen prosOpon stErizO

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
poreuesqai poreuomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
UP-GETTing taking-up eis eis

Prep
OF-Him
AND
He
THE
face
STANDS-fast OF-THE fixes-steadfastly
TO-BE-GOING
ni proper
INTO JERUSALEM
AV
Luke 9
9:52 kai apesteilen aggelous

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
pro pro
Prep

kai poreuqentes kai poreuomai

Conj vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m
AND
He-commissions he-dispatches eis eis

Prep
MESSENGERS BEFORE face
OF-Him
AND
BEING-GONE
52 And sent messengers before his face: and they went, and entered into a village of the Samaritans, to make ready for him.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
samaritwn ws etoimasai samaritEs hOs hetoimazO

n_ Gen Pl m Adv vn Aor Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THEY-INTO-CAME INTO VILLAGE they-entered
OF-SAMARItans
AS
TO-make-READY to-Him
9:53 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
edexanto dechomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
NOT
THEY-RECEIVE Him
that
THE
face
OF-Him
WAS
53 And they did not receive him, because his face was as though he would go to Jerusalem.
poreuomenon poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
ni proper
GOING
INTO JERUSALEM
9:54 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai iakwbos kai iwannhs eipan mathEtEs iakObos kai iOannEs legO
n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
PERCEIVING perceiving-it qeleis thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YET THE
LEARNers disciples pur pur

n_ Acc Sg n
JACOBUS James
AND
JOHN
say
Master ! Lord !
eipwmen legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
katabhnai katabainO
vn 2Aor Act
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai ouranos kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
54 And when his disciples James and John saw [this], they said, Lord, wilt thou that we command fire to come down from heaven, and consume them, even as Elias did?
YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-MAY-BE-sayING FIRE
TO-DOWN-STEP FROM THE to-descend
heaven
AND
analwsai analiskO
vn Aor Act
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
TO-UP-CONSUME them to-consume
9:55 strafeis
strephO
de de
Conj
epetimhsen autois epitimaO autos

55 But he turned, and rebuked them, and said, Ye know not what manner of spirit ye are of.
BEING-TURNED
YET He-rebukES
to-them them kwmhn kOmE

n_ Acc Sg f
56 For the Son of man is not come to destroy men's lives, but to save [them]. And they went to another village.
9:56 kai eporeuqhsan

kai
Conj
poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
eteran heteros
a_ Acc Sg f
AND
THEY-WERE-GONE INTO DIFFERENT VILLAGE they-went autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
9:57 kai poreuomenwn

kai
Conj
poreuomai
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
AND
OF-GOING
OF-them
IN
THE
WAY road
said
ANY someone
TOWARD
57 . And it came to pass, that, as they went in the way, a certain [man] said unto him, Lord, I will follow thee whithersoever thou goest.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
opou hopou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
aperch aperchomai
Him
I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU you autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE-?-where IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING wherever you-may-be-coming-away

WH
9:58 kai eipen

kai
Conj
NA
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
alwpekes fwleous alOpEx phOleos

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Acc Pl m
AND
said
to-him
THE
JESUS
THE
JACKALS
BURROWS
58 And Jesus said unto him, Foxes have holes, and birds of the air [have] nests; but the Son of man hath not where to lay [his] head.
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kataskhnwseis o ouranos kataskEnOsis ho

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Pl f t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ARE-HAVING AND
THE
flyers OF-THE flying-creatures anqrwpou ouk anthrOpos ou

heaven
DOWN-BOOTHS roosts thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pou pou
Part Int
kefalhn klinh kephalE klinO

n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres Act 3 Sg
SON
OF-THE
human
NOT
IS-HAVING
?-where THE where ? moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
HEAD
MAY-BE-deCLINING he-may-be-reclining de de
Conj
9:59 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
He-said
YET TOWARD DIFFERENT BE-followING to-ME different-one be-you-following ! me
THE
YET said he-said
59 And he said unto another, Follow me. But he said, Lord, suffer me first to go and bury my father.
AV
Luke 9 - Luke 10
WH
epitreyon moi prwton apelqonti
WH
WH
WH
NA
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
NA
epitreyon moi epitrepO egO

NA
NA
apelqonti aperchomai
Master ! Lord !
NA
permit permit-you !
to-ME me
to-FROM-COMING coming-away
prwton prOton
Adv
qayai thaptO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
BEFORE-most first
TO-entomb THE
FATHER
OF-ME
9:60 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
nekrous qayai nekros thaptO

a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
He-said
YET to-him
FROM-LET let-you !
THE
DEAD dead-ones thn ho
TO-entomb THE
OF-selves of-themselves qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
60 Jesus said unto him, Let the dead bury their dead: but go thou and preach the kingdom of God.
nekrous su nekros su
a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
apelqwn aperchomai
diaggelle diaggellO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg

t_ Acc Sg f
DEAD dead-ones
YOU
YET FROM-COMING coming-away de de

Conj
BE-publishING THE be-you-publishing ! soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
9:61 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai eteros kai heteros

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
prwton prOton
Adv
de de
Conj
said
YET AND also
DIFFERENT I-SHALL-BE-followING to-YOU different-one you eis eis

Prep
Master ! Lord ! oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
BEFORE-most YET first mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
61 And another also said, Lord, I will follow thee; but let me first go bid them farewell, which are at home at my house.

apotaxasqai tois apotassomai ho

vn Aor Mid t_ Dat Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
permit permit-you !
to-ME me de de
Conj
TO-FROM-SET to-take-leave pros pros

Prep
to-THE INTO THE to-the-ones o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
HOME
OF-ME
9:62 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
epibalwn epiballO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
said
YET
TOWARD him
THE
JESUS
NOT-YET-ONE ON-CASTING no-one putting-forth opisw euqetos opisO euthetos

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
THE
62 And Jesus said unto him, No man, having put his hand to the plough, and looking back, is fit for the kingdom of God.
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
ep epi
Prep
arotron kai blepwn arotron kai blepO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
HAND
ON
PLOW
AND
lookING
INTO THE BEHIND the-things
WELL-PLACED IS fit
to-THE

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AV
Luke 10
10:1 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
anedeixen o anadeiknumi ho
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eterous heteros
a_ Acc Pl m
ebdomhkonta hebdomEkonta
ni numeral
duo duo
ni numeral
after
YET these UP-SHOWS these-things indicates
THE
Master Lord duo duo

ni numeral
DIFFERENT SEVENTY different-ones pro pro

Prep
TWO
kai apesteilen autous ana duo kai apostellO autos ana duo
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep ni numeral

eis eis
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
. After these things the Lord appointed other seventy also, and sent them two and two before his face into every city and place, whither he himself would come.
AND
He-commissions he-dispatches
them
UP
TWO
TWO
BEFORE face
OF-Him
INTO EVERY
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai topon kai topos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ou hou
Adv
hmellen mellO
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
city
AND
PLACE
where WAS-ABOUT
He
TO-BE-COMING
10:2 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous o autos ho
men men
Part
qerismos polus therismos polus

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
He-said
YET TOWARD them
THE
INDEED harvest
MANY vast
THE
YET
ergatai oligoi ergatEs oligos

dehqhte deomai
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qerismou opws therismos hopOs

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
Therefore said he unto them, The harvest truly [is] great, but the labourers [are] few: pray ye therefore the Lord of the harvest, that he would send forth labourers into his harvest.
ACTers workers
FEW
BE-BINDING THEN THE be-ye-beseeching ! eis eis

Prep
Master Lord
OF-THE
harvest
WHICH-how so-that
ergatas ekbalh ergatEs ekballO

n_ Acc Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qerismon autou therismos autos

ACTers workers
He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING INTO THE he-should-be-ejecting idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
harvest
OF-Him
10:3 upagete
hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ws arnas hOs arEn

Adv n_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
lukwn lukos
n_ Gen Pl m
BE-UNDER-LEADING BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-commissionING YOU(p) be-ye-going-away ! lo ! I-am-dispatching ye
Go your ways: behold, I send you forth as lambs among wolves.
AS
LAMBS
IN
MIDst
OF-WOLVES
10:4 mh
mE
Part Neg
bastazete bastazO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ballantion mh ballantion mE
n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg
phran pEra
n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
upodhmata kai mhdena hupodEma kai mEdeis

n_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Sg m
Carry neither purse, nor scrip, nor shoes: and salute no man by the way.
NO
YE-BE-BEARING purse be-ye-bearing ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
NO
BAG (beggar's) NO beggar's-bag
sandals
AND
NO-YET-ONE no-one
kata kata
Prep
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
aspashsqe aspazomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
according-to THE
WAY
YE-SHOULD-BE-greetING
10:5 eis
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
d de
Conj
an an
Part
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
prwton prOton
Adv
legete legO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
And into whatsoever house ye enter, first say, Peace [be] to this house.
INTO WHICH
YET EVER YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING HOME ye-may-be-entering house toutw houtos

pd Dat Sg m
BEFORE-most BE-sayING first be-ye-saying !
PEACE
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
HOME household
this
10:6 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
ekei h ekei eimi

Adv vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
eirhnhs epanapahsetai ep eirEnE epanapauomai epi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
IF-EVER there
MAY-BE
SON
OF-PEACE
SHALL-BE-ON-restING shall-be-resting-on anakamyei anakamptO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ON
him him it
THE
And if the son of peace be there, your peace shall rest upon it: if not, it shall turn to you again.
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
PEACE
OF-YOU(p) IF of-ye auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
YET NO
SURELY ON
YOU(p) ye
it-SHALL-BE-UP-BOWING it-shall-be-coming-back esqiontes esthiO

10:7 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
menete menO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai pinontes kai pinO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
IN
SAME
YET THE
HOME house gar o gar ho

Conj
BE-YE-REMAINING EATING be-ye-remaining ! ergaths tou ergatEs ho

AND
DRINKING
THE the-things
par para
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
misqou misthos
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
And in the same house remain, eating and drinking such things as they give: for the labourer is worthy of his hire. Go not from house to house.
t_ Nom Sg m
BESIDE them
WORTHY
for
THE
ACTer worker
OF-THE
HIRE wages
OF-him
NO
AV
Luke 10
metabainete metabainO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ex ek
Prep
oikias oikia
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
BE-YE-after-STEPPING OUT OF-HOME be-ye-proceeding ! of-house
INTO HOME house eiserchsqe eiserchomai

10:8 kai eis

kai
Conj
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
an an
Part
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai decwntai kai dechomai

Conj vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
INTO WHICH
EVER city
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING AND ye-may-be-entering umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) ye
And into whatsoever city ye enter, and they receive you, eat such things as are set before you:
esqiete esthiO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paratiqemena paratithEmi
vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n
THE beING-BESIDE-PLACED to-YOU(p) the-things being-placed-before ye en en

Prep
10:9 kai qerapeuete tous

kai
Conj
therapeuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
asqeneis kai legete asthenEs kai legO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
autois hggiken autos eggizO

pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
AND
BE-curING be-ye-curing ! h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE the-ones
IN
her herit
UN-FIRM infirm qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
BE-sayING be-ye-saying !
to-them
HAS-NEARED has-drawn-near
And heal the sick that are therein, and say unto them, The kingdom of God is come nigh unto you.
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl

ON
YOU(p) ye
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
10:10 eis
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
d de
Conj
an an
Part
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
decwntai dechomai
INTO WHICH
YET EVER city
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING AND ye-may-be-entering plateias auths plateia autos

n_ Acc Pl f pp Gen Sg f
NO
THEY-MAY-BE-RECEIVING
10 But into whatsoever city ye enter, and they receive you not, go your ways out into the streets of the same, and say,
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
BROADS squares
OF-her of-herit
say-YE say-ye ! hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
10:11 kai ton

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
koniorton ton koniortos ho

kollhqenta kollaO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews umwn polis humeis

n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
AND also eis eis

Prep
THE
DUST
THE
BEING-JOINED clinging umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
to-US
OUT OF-THE
city
OF-YOU(p) of-ye oti hoti

Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
apomassomeqa apomassO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
plhn plEn
Adv
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ginwskete ginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
11 Even the very dust of your city, which cleaveth on us, we do wipe off against you: notwithstanding be ye sure of this, that the kingdom of God is come nigh unto you.
INTO THE
FEET
WE-ARE-FROM-WIPING to-YOU(p) we-are-wiping-off to-ye basileia tou basileia ho

MOREly this moreover
BE-YE-KNOWING that be-ye-knowing !
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
HAS-NEARED THE has-drawn-near
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
10:12 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti sodomois en hoti sodoma en

Conj n_ Dat Pl n Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh anektoteron ekeinos anektos

pd Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
that
to-SODOM
IN
THE
DAY
that
more-tolerable
12 But I say unto you, that it shall be more tolerable in that day for Sodom, than for that city.
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
h E
Part
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
it-SHALL-BE
OR to-THE than
city
that
10:13 ouai soi

ouai
Inj
su
pp 2 Dat Sg
corazin ouai soi chorazin ouai su

ni proper Inj pp 2 Dat Sg
bhqsaida oti ei bEthsaida hoti ei

ni proper Conj Cond
en en
Prep
turw turos
n_ Dat Sg f
kai sidwni kai sidOn

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
WOE woe !
to-YOU
CHORAZIN
WOE woe !
to-YOU
BETHSAIDA
that
IF
IN
TYRE
AND
SIDON
egenhqhsan ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
dunameis dunamis
n_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
genomenai ginomai
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
palai an palai an
Adv Part
en en
Prep
13 Woe unto thee, Chorazin! woe unto thee, Bethsaida! for if the mighty works had been done in Tyre and Sidon, which have been done in you, they had a great while ago repented, sitting in sackcloth and ashes.
WERE-BECOMED THE had-occurred sakkw sakkos

n_ Dat Sg m
ABILITIES THE powerful-deeds kaqhmenoi kathEmai
ones-BECOMING ones-occurring
IN
YOU(p) ye
OLD long-ago
EVER IN
kai spodw kai spodos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
metenohsan metanoeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
SACKCLOTH-of-hair AND sackcloth
ASHES
sittING
AV
Luke 10
10:14 plhn
plEn
Adv
turw turos
n_ Dat Sg f
kai sidwni anektoteron estai kai sidOn anektos eimi

Conj n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg n Cmp vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
h E
Part
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
MOREly to-TYRE moreover
AND
to-SIDON Sidon
more-tolerable
it-SHALL-BE
IN
THE
JUDGing
OR to-YOU(p) than to-ye ews tou heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
14 But it shall be more tolerable for Tyre and Sidon at the judgment, than for you.
10:15 kai su
kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
kafarnaoum mh kapharnaoum mE
ni proper Part Neg
ews ouranou uywqhsh heOs ouranos hupsoO

Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
15 And thou, Capernaum, which art exalted to heaven, shalt be thrust down to hell.
AND
YOU
CAPERNAUM
NO
TILL
OF-heaven heaven
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED TILL you-shall-be-being-exalted
OF-THE the
adou hadEs
n_ Gen Sg m
katabhsh katabainO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
UN-PERCEIVED YOU-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STEPPING unseen you-shall-be-descending
10:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
akouwn akouO
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
aqetwn atheteO
THE
one-HEARING one-hearing aqetei atheteO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-YOU(p) OF-ME ye me o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-HEARING
AND
THE
one-UN-PLACING one-repudiating aqetei atheteO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
16 He that heareth you heareth me; and he that despiseth you despiseth me; and he that despiseth me despiseth him that sent me.
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
de de
Conj
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
aqetwn atheteO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
YOU(p) ye
ME
IS-UN-PLACING THE-one is-repudiating the-one
YET ME
UN-PLACING repudiating
IS-UN-PLACING THE is-repudiating

One-commissioning one-commissioning
ME
10:17 upestreyan de
hupostrephO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ebdomhkonta hebdomEkonta
ni numeral
duo duo
ni numeral

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
legontes legO
reTURN
YET THE
SEVENTY
TWO
WITH
JOY
sayING
17 . And the seventy returned again with joy, saying, Lord, even the devils are subject unto us through thy name.
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
daimonia upotassetai daimonion hupotassO

n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

Master ! Lord !
AND also
THE
demons
IS-beING-UNDER-SET to-US is-being-subject
IN
THE
NAME
OF-YOU
10:18 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autois eqewroun ton autos theOreO ho

pp Dat Pl m vi impf Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
satanan satanas
n_ Acc Sg m
ws astraphn hOs astrapE

Adv n_ Acc Sg f
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
18 And he said unto them, I beheld Satan as lightning fall from heaven.
He-said
YET to-them
I-beheld
THE
SATAN (adversary) AS Satan
GLEAM-FLING OUT OF-THE lightning
ouranou pesonta ouranos piptO

n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
heaven
FALLING
10:19 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
dedwka didOmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exousian tou exousia ho

patein pateO
vn Pres Act
epanw epanO
Adv
BE-PERCEIVING I-HAVE-GIVEN to-YOU(p) lo ! ye ofewn ophis

n_ Gen Pl m
THE
authority
OF-THE
TO-BE-TREADING ON-UP upon ecqrou echthros

a_ Gen Sg m
kai skorpiwn kai skorpios

Conj n_ Gen Pl m
kai epi kai epi

Conj Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dunamin tou dunamis ho

kai kai
Conj
19 Behold, I give unto you power to tread on serpents and scorpions, and over all the power of the enemy: and nothing shall by any means hurt you.
OF-serpents AND serpents ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
OF-SCATTER-VENOMS AND scorpions ou ou

Part Neg
ON EVERY onover entire

NA
THE
ABILITY power
OF-THE
enemy
AND
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
WH
adikhsei
adikhsh adikeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE YOU(p) nothing ye
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-injurING
10:20 plhn
plEn
Adv
en en
Prep
toutw mh houtos mE
pd Dat Sg n Part Neg
cairete chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti ta hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
pneumata umin pneuma humeis

n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl
MOREly IN moreover upotassetai hupotassO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
this
NO
BE-JOYING that be-ye-rejoicing ! de de

Conj
THE
spirits
to-YOU(p) to-ye eggegraptai eggraphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
20 Notwithstanding in this rejoice not, that the spirits are subject unto you; but rather rejoice, because your names are written in heaven.
cairete chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti ta hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
onomata umwn onoma humeis

n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
IS-beING-UNDER-SET BE-JOYING YET that is-being-subject be-ye-rejoicing !
THE
NAMES
OF-YOU(p) HAS-been-IN-WRITTEN IN of-ye has-been-engraven
AV
Luke 10
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
heavens
NA
10:21 en
en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
hgalliasato agalliaO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
IN
this
THE
HOUR
He-exults
IN
THE
spirit
THE
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
kai eipen kai legO

exomologoumai soi exomologeO su

vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai ouranos kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
HOLY
AND
said
I-AM-OUT-avowING I-am-acclaiming oti apekruyas hoti apokruptO

to-YOU you apo apo

Prep
FATHER !
Master ! Lord !
OF-THE
heaven
AND
21 In that hour Jesus rejoiced in spirit, and said, I thank thee, O Father, Lord of heaven and earth, that thou hast hid these things from the wise and prudent, and hast revealed them unto babes: even so, Father; for so it seemed good in thy sight.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
sofwn sophos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai sunetwn kai sunetos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE
LAND earth
that
YOU-FROM-HIDE these FROM WISE you-conceal these-things wise-ones nhpiois nai o nEpios nai ho
a_ Dat Pl m Part t_ Nom Sg m
AND
intelligent AND intelligent-ones outws eudokia houtOs eudokia

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
apekaluyas apokaluptO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
YOU-FROM-COVER them you-reveal egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
to-minors
YEA
THE
FATHER
that thus seeing-that
WELL-SEEMing delight
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
it-BECAME
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-YOU in-front-of you moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
10:22 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
paredoqh paradidOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ALL
to-ME
WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN by was-given-up estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
NOT-YET-ONE no-one kai kai

Conj
ginwskei tis ginOskO tis

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
22 All things are delivered to me of my Father: and no man knoweth who the Son is, but the Father; and who the Father is, but the Son, and [he] to whom the Son will reveal [him].
IS-KNOWING
ANY who ?
IS
THE
SON
IF
NO
THE
FATHER
AND
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai w kai hos

Conj pr Dat Sg m
ean ean
Cond
ANY who ?
IS
THE
FATHER
IF
NO
THE
SON
AND
to-WHOM
IF-EVER
boulhtai boulomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
apokaluyai apokaluptO
vn Aor Act
MAY-BE-intendING
THE
SON
TO-FROM-COVER to-unveil-him tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
10:23 kai strafeis

kai
Conj
strephO
pros pros
Prep
maqhtas kat mathEtEs kata

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
makarioi makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
AND
BEING-TURNED
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples a hos

pr Acc Pl n
according-to OWN
He-said
HAPPY happy-are
23 And he turned [his] disciples, privately, Blessed eyes which see the ye see:
him unto and said [are] the things that
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi oi ophthalmos ho
blepontes blepO
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
VIEWers eyes
THE
lookING observing oti polloi hoti polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
WHICH which(p)
YE-ARE-lookING ye-are-observing kai basileis hqelhsan kai basileus thelO

Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
24 For I tell you, that many prophets and kings have desired to see those things which ye see, and have not seen [them]; and to hear those things which ye hear, and have not heard [them].
10:24 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
MANY
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
KINGS
WILL
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eidan eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai akousai a kai akouO hos

Conj vn Aor Act pr Acc Pl n
TO-BE-PERCEIVING WHICH which(p) akouete akouO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye
ARE-lookING AND are-observing
NOT
THEY-PERCEIVE AND
TO-HEAR
WHICH which(p)
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hkousan akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YE-ARE-HEARING AND
NOT
THEY-HEAR
AV
Luke 10
10:25 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
nomikos tis nomikos tis

a_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m
anesth anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekpeirazwn ekpeirazO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legwn legO
AND
BE-PERCEIVING LAWer lo ! lawyer poihsas poieO
ANY certain zwhn zOE

n_ Acc Sg f
UP-STOOD rose
OUT-tryING putting-on-trial
Him
sayING
25 . And, behold, a certain lawyer stood up, and tempted him, saying, Master, what shall I do to inherit eternal life?


a_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 1 Sg / vs Aor Act 1 Sg
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
TEACHer !
ANY what ? de de
Conj
DOing
LIFE
eonian
I-SHOULD-BE-tenantING I-should-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
10:26 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
26 He said unto him, What is written in the law? how readest thou?
THE
YET He-said
TOWARD him
IN
THE
LAW
ANY what ?
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN has-been-written
pws anaginwskeis pOs anaginOskO

Adv Int vi Pres Act 2 Sg
how how ?
YOU-ARE-readING
10:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
agaphseis agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET answerING
NA
said he-said ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YOU-SHALL-BE-LOVING Master Lord kardias sou kardia su

THE
God
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ex ek
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
27 And he answering said, Thou shalt love the Lord thy God with all thy heart, and with all thy soul, and with all thy strength, and with all thy mind; and thy neighbour as thyself.
OF-YOU
OUT OF-WHOLE
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
AND
IN
WHOLE
THE
soul
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
iscui ischus
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dianoia dianoia
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-YOU
AND
IN
WHOLE
THE
STRENGTH OF-YOU
AND
IN
WHOLE
THE
THRU-MIND comprehension
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg

Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
OF-YOU
AND
THE
NIGH-one associate autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-YOU
AS
YOURself
10:28 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
orqws apekriqhs touto orthOs apokrinomai houtos

Adv vi Aor midD 2 Sg pd Acc Sg n
poiei poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai zhsh kai zaO

28 And he said unto him, Thou hast answered right: this do, and thou shalt live.
He-said
YET to-him
ERECTly correctly
YOU-answerED this
BE-DOING be-you-doing ! eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-LIVING
10:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qelwn thelO
dikaiwsai eauton dikaioO heautou

vn Aor Act pf 3 Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
29 But he, willing to justify himself, said unto Jesus, And who is my neighbour?
THE
YET WILLING
TO-JUSTIFY
self himself
said he-said
TOWARD THE
JESUS
kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
plhsion plEsion
Adv
AND
ANY who ?
IS
OF-ME
NIGH-one associate ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
10:30 upolabwn
hupolambanO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpos tis anthrOpos tis

n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m
katebainen katabainO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
UNDER-GETTING taking-up-him ierousalhm eis ierosoluma eis

ni proper Prep
THE
JESUS
said
human
ANY certain
DOWN-STEPPED FROM descended
iericw kai lhstais ierichO kai lEstEs

ni proper Conj n_ Dat Pl m
periepesen oi peripiptO hos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pr Nom Pl m
kai ekdusantes auton kai ekduO autos

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
30 And Jesus answering said, A certain [man] went down from Jerusalem to Jericho, and fell among thieves, which stripped him of his raiment, and wounded [him], and departed, leaving [him] half dead.
JERUSALEM
INTO JERICHO
AND
to-ROBBERS ABOUT-FALLS he-falls-among afentes aphiEmi

WHO
AND
OUT-SLIPPing stripping
him
kai plhgas epiqentes kai plEgE epitithEmi

Conj n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hmiqanh hEmithanEs
a_ Acc Sg m
AND
BLOWS
ON-PLACING placing-on-him sugkurian sugkuria

n_ Acc Sg f
FROM-CAME came-away de de
Conj
FROM-LETTING leaving-him tis tis
HALF-DEAD
WH NA
10:31 kata
kata
Prep
iereus hiereus
n_ Nom Sg m
katebainen katabainO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
en
en en
Prep
px Nom Sg m
according-to TOGETHER-SANCTION YET SACRED-one ANY acby coincidence priest certain
DOWN-STEPPED descended
IN
31 And by chance there came down a certain priest that way: and when he saw him, he passed by on the other side.
AV
Luke 10
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh kai idwn ekeinos kai eidO

pd Dat Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
antiparhlqen antiparerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
WAY road
that
AND
PERCEIVING
NA
him
INSTEAD-BESIDE-CAME passed-by-on-the-other-side kata kata

Prep
10:32 omoiws de
homoiOs
Adv
de
Conj
kai leuiths kai leuitEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
genomenos ginomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
LIKE-AS likewise elqwn erchomai

YET AND also
LEVITE
BECOMING
according-to THE acto
PLACE
32 And likewise a Levite, when he was at the place, came and looked [on him], and passed by on the other side.
kai idwn kai eidO

antiparhlqen antiparerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
COMING
AND
PERCEIVING perceiving-him tis tis

px Nom Sg m
INSTEAD-BESIDE-CAME passed-by-on-the-other-side odeuwn hodeuO

10:33 samariths de
samaritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kat kata
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
SAMARItan
YET ANY certain esplagcnisqh splagchnizomai

vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
WAYING being-on-his-way
CAME
according-to him downby
AND
33 But a certain Samaritan, as he journeyed, came where he was: and when he saw him, he had compassion [on him],
idwn eidO
PERCEIVING perceiving-him
he-IS-compassionatED he-is-moved-with-compassion katedhsen katadeO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
10:34 kai proselqwn

kai
Conj
proserchomai
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
traumata autou trauma autos

epicewn epicheO
elaion elaion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
TOWARD-COMING coming-to-him epibibasas epibibazO
he-DOWN-BINDS THE he-bandages de de

Conj
WOUNDS
OF-him
ON-POURING pouring-on kthnos ktEnos

n_ Acc Sg n
OLIVE-oil oil
34 And went to [him], and bound up his wounds, pouring in oil and wine, and set him on his own beast, and brought him to an inn, and took care of him.
kai oinon kai oinos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg n
hgagen agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
WINE
ON-STEPizing mounting eis eis

Prep
YET him
ON
THE
OWN
ACQUISITION he-LED beast
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pandoceion pandocheion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai epemelhqh kai epimeleomai

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
him
INTO EVERY-RECEIVing AND khan aurion aurion

Adv
WAS-ON-CARED OF-him had-cared-for him

WH
10:35 kai epi thn

kai
Conj
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekbalwn ekballO
duo dhnaria edwken
WH
WH
NA
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
duo duo
ni numeral
AND
NA
ON
THE
MORROW OUT-CASTING extracting pandocei pandocheus

n_ Dat Sg m
he-GIVES
TWO
dhnaria dEnarion
n_ Acc Pl n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

epimelhqhti epimeleomai
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
35 And on the morrow when he departed, he took out two pence, and gave [them] to the host, and said unto him, Take care of him; and whatsoever thou spendest more, when I come again, I will repay thee.
DENARII
to-THE
EVERY-RECEIVER AND khan-keeper
said
BE-BEING-ON-CARED OF-him be-you-caring-for ! him egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
WHICH
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
an an
Part
prosdapanhshs prosdapanaO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
epanercesqai epanerchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ANY what
EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-SPENDING I you-should-be-expending soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
IN
THE
TO-BE-ON-UP-COMING ME to-be-coming-back
apodwsw apodidOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-YOU shall-be-paying you
10:36 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m

triwn treis
n_ Gen Pl m
plhsion dokei plEsion dokeO

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
gegonenai ginomai
vn 2Perf Act
ANY which ? tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-these
OF-THE the eis eis

Prep
THREE
NIGH-one associate
IS-SEEMING
to-YOU
TO-HAVE-BECOME
36 Which now of these three, thinkest thou, was neighbour unto him that fell among the thieves?
empesontos empiptO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
lhstas lEstEs
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
one-IN-FALLING one-falling-in de de
Conj
INTO THE
ROBBERS
10:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n

Prep pp Gen Sg m
THE
YET said he-said
THE
one-DOing one-doing
THE
MERCY WITH him merciful-thing
37 And he said, He that shewed mercy on him. Then said Jesus unto him, Go, and do thou likewise.
AV
Luke 10 - Luke 11
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
poreuou poreuomai
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
said
YET to-him
THE
JESUS
AND
YOU
poiei poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
omoiws homoiOs
Adv
BE-DOING be-you-doing !
LIKE-AS likewise de de
Conj
10:38 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
poreuesqai autous autos poreuomai autos autos

vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m pp Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
IN
YET THE
TO-BE-GOING
them
He
INTO-CAME entered auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
INTO VILLAGE
WH WH WH
ANY certain
38 . Now it came to pass, as they went, that he entered into a certain village: and a certain woman named Martha received him into her house.
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
onomati marqa onoma martha

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg f
upedexato hupodechomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
eis thn oikian
WOMAN
YET ANY certain
to-NAME
MARTHA
UNDER-RECEIVES Him entertains mariam maria

ni proper
10:39 kai thde

kai
Conj
hode
pd Dat Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
adelfh kaloumenh adelphE kaleO

n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
h hos
pr Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
39 And she had a sister called Mary, which also sat at Jesus'feet, and heard his word.
AND also
to-THE-YET WAS yet-to-this-one tous ho
sister
beING-CALLED
MARIAM Mary kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
WHO
AND also ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
parakaqesqeisa pros parakathezomai pros

vp Aor pasD Nom Sg f Prep
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hkouen akouO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Acc Pl m
BEING-BESIDE-seatED being-seated-beside autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
TOWARD THE
FEET
OF-THE
Master Lord
HEARD
THE
saying word
OF-Him
10:40 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f
periespato perispaO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
pollhn diakonian polus diakonia

epistasa ephistEmi
de de
Conj
THE
YET MARTHA
was-ABOUT-PULLED ABOUT MANY was-distracted much melei melei

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
THRU-SERVice ON-STANDing serving standing-by adelfh mou adelphE egO

YET
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
monhn monos
a_ Acc Sg f
40 But Martha was cumbered about much serving, and came to him, and said, Lord, dost thou not care that my sister hath left me to serve alone? bid her therefore that she help me.
said she-said me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
Master ! Lord !
WH
NOT
WH
WH
to-YOU
NA
that
THE
NA
sister
OF-ME
NA
ONLY alone
kateleipen diakonein eipon
katelipen diakonein kataleipO diakoneO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg vn Pres Act
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ME
left
TO-BE-THRU-SERVING BE-sayING to-be-serving be-you-saying !
oun oun
Conj
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
sunantilabhtai sunantilambanomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THEN to-her
THAT to-ME me de de
Conj
MAY-BE-TOGETHER-supportING she-may-be-aiding eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
10:41 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
marqa martha
n_ Voc Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Voc Sg f
answerING
YET said
to-her
THE
Master Lord polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
MARTHA Martha !
MARTHA Martha !
41 And Jesus answered and said unto her, Martha, Martha, thou art careful and troubled about many things:
merimnas merimnaO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai qorubazh kai thorubazO

peri peri
Prep
YOU-ARE-beING-anxious AND you-are-worrying
YOU-ARE-beING-TUMULTED ABOUT MANY you-are-being-in-tumult many-things

WH WH WH NA
10:42
WH
oligwn de estin creia h enos
WH
WH
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg n
NA
de de
Conj
NA
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NA
creia chreia
n_ Nom Sg f
mariam gar maria gar

ni proper Conj
OF-ONE YET IS of-one-thing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
need
MARIAM Mary auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
for
42 But one thing is needful: and Mary hath chosen that good part, which shall not be taken away from her.
agaqhn merida exelexato htis agathos meris eklegO hostis

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pr Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
afaireqhsetai aphaireO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE
GOOD
PART
choosES
WHICH-ANY NOT which-any
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LIFTED OF-her shall-be-wrested-from her
AV
Luke 11
11:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
AND
BECAME it-occurred
IN
THE
TO-BE
Him
IN
PLACE
ANY certain pros pros

Prep
prayING
ws epausato eipen hOs pauO legO

Adv vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
. And it came to pass, that, as he was praying in a certain place, when he ceased, one of his disciples said unto him, Lord, teach us to pray, as John also taught his disciples.
AS
He-CEASES
said
ANY certain-one
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
TOWARD Him
Master ! Lord ! maqhtas mathEtEs

n_ Acc Pl m
didaxon didaskO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
proseucesqai kaqws proseuchomai kathOs

vn Pres midD/pasD Adv
kai iwannhs edidaxen tous kai iOannEs didaskO ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
TEACH teach-you ! autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
US
TO-BE-prayING
according-AS AND also
JOHN
TEACHES
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-him
11:2 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autois otan autos hotan

pp Dat Pl m Conj
proseuchsqe proseuchomai
legete legO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
agiasqhtw hagiazO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
He-said
YET to-them
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-prayING whenever elqetw erchomai

vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
FATHER !
LET-BE-BEING-HOLYizED let-it-be-being-hallowed !
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

And he said unto them, When ye pray, say, Our Father which art in heaven, Hallowed be thy name. Thy kingdom come. Thy will be done, as in heaven, so in earth.
THE
NAME
OF-YOU
LET-BE-COMING THE let-her-be-coming ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
KINGdom
OF-YOU
11:3 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
epiousion didou epiousios didOmi

a_ Acc Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kaq kata
Prep
Give us day by day our daily bread.
THE
BREAD
OF-US
THE
ON-BEINGed dole
to-US us
THE
according-to
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
DAY
11:4 kai afes

kai
Conj
aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
amartias hmwn hamartia hemeis

kai gar autoi kai gar autos

Conj Conj pp Nom Pl m
afiomen aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
AND
FROM-LET pardon-you ! ofeilonti opheilO
to-US us hmin hemeis
THE
misses sins
OF-US
AND also
for
SAME ourselves hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
WE-ARE-FROM-LETTING we-are-pardoning eis eis

Prep
And forgive us our sins; for we also forgive every one that is indebted to us. And lead us not into temptation; but deliver us from evil.
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
eisenegkhs eispherO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
peirasmon peirasmos
n_ Acc Sg m
pp 1 Dat Pl
to-EVERY every
one-OWING one-owing
to-US us pros pros

Prep
AND
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING US you-may-be-bringing-into ex ek
Prep
INTO trial
11:5 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous tis autos tis

pp Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
exei echO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
filon philos
a_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
ANY who ?
OUT OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-HAVING FOND-one of-ye friend autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
And he said unto them, Which of you shall have a friend, and shall go unto him at midnight, and say unto him, Friend, lend me three loaves;
poreusetai poreuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mesonuktiou kai eiph mesonuktion kai legO

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
file philos
n_ Voc Sg m
crhson chraomai
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
SHALL-BE-GOING TOWARD him
OF-MID-NIGHT of-midnight
AND
MAY-BE-sayING to-him
FOND-one ! USE friend ! let-use-you !
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
artous artos
n_ Acc Pl m
to-ME me
THREE
BREADS cakes-of-bread filos philos

a_ Nom Sg m
11:6 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
paregeneto paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
For a friend of mine in his journey is come to me, and I have nothing to set before him?
ON-IF-BIND FOND-One since-in-fact friend ecw echO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-ME
BESIDE-BECAME OUT OF-WAY came-along of-road autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
TOWARD ME
AND
NOT nothing
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
paraqhsw paratithEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
I-AM-HAVING
WHICH
I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-PLACING to-him I-shall-be-placing-before him
AV
Luke 11
11:7 kakeinos eswqen

kakeinos
pd Nom Sg m
esOthen
Adv
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kopous kopos
n_ Acc Pl m
parece parechO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
AND-that-one and-that-one hdh EdE

Adv
INTO-PLACE answerING inside qura thura

n_ Nom Sg f
MAY-BE-sayING NO
to-ME me
toils BE-tenderING weariness(p) be-you-affording ! mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kekleistai kleiO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
paidia paidion
n_ Nom Pl n
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
And he from within shall answer and say, Trouble me not: the door is now shut, and my children are with me in bed; I cannot rise and give thee.
ALREADY THE
DOOR
HAS-been-LOCKED AND
THE
little-boys-and-girls OF-ME
WITH ME
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
koithn eisin koitE eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
dunamai dunamai
anastas anistEmi
dounai soi didOmi su

vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg
INTO THE
LIE-ing bed umin humeis
ARE
NOT
I-AM-ABLING I-can dwsei didOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
UP-STANDing rising autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
TO-GIVE
to-YOU
11:8 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
anastas anistEmi
dia dia
Prep
pp 2 Dat Pl
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye filon philos
IF
AND NOT even autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him he-shall-be-giving ge ge

Part
UP-STANDing rising anaideian autou anaideia autos

n_ Acc Sg f
THRU because-of
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
I say unto you, Though he will not rise and give him, because he is his friend, yet because of his importunity he will rise and give him as many as he needeth.
a_ Acc Sg m
pp Gen Sg m
THE
TO-BE
FOND-one friend dwsei didOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OF-him
THRU SURELY THE because-of oswn hosos

pk Gen Pl m
UN-MODESTY pestering
OF-him
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
crhzei chrEzO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEING-ROUSED
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him he-shall-be-giving him umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-as-much-as he-IS-needING whatever aiteite aiteO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
11:9 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
zhteite zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND-I
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AM-sayING
BE-REQUESTING AND be-ye-requesting ! kai anoighsetai kai anoigO

Conj vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-YOU(p) to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-SEEKING be-ye-seeking !
And I say unto you, Ask, and it shall be given you; seek, and ye shall find; knock, and it shall be opened unto you.
kai eurhsete kai heuriskO

krouete krouO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING BE-KNOCKING AND be-ye-knocking ! gar o gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED to-YOU(p) it-shall-be-being opened to-ye lambanei lambanO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
11:10 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
aitwn aiteO
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
zhtwn zEteO
EVERY
for
THE
one-REQUESTING one-requesting krouonti krouO

WH
IS-GETTING-UP AND is-obtaining

NA
THE
one-SEEKING one-seeking
10 For every one that asketh receiveth; and he that seeketh findeth; and to him that knocketh it shall be opened.
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
anoighsetai
anoighsetai anoigO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
IS-FINDING
AND
to-THE
one-KNOCKING one-knocking umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-UP-OPENED it-shall-be-being opened patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
11:11 tina
tis
pi Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aithsei aiteO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ANY any ? icqun ichthus

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
YET OUT OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye mh

NA
FATHER
SHALL-BE-REQUESTING THE
SON
11 If a son shall ask bread of any of you that is a father, will he give him a stone? or if [he ask] a fish, will he for a fish give him a serpent?
kai kai
Conj
anti anti
Prep
icquos ichthus
n_ Gen Sg m
ofin ophis
n_ Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
epidwsei epididOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
FISH
AND
INSTEAD FISH of-fish won Oon

n_ Acc Sg n
serpent
to-him him
SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING he-shall-be-handing autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
11:12 h
E
Part
kai aithsei kai aiteO

epidwsei epididOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
skorpion skorpios
n_ Acc Sg m
12 Or if he shall ask an egg, will he offer him a scorpion?
OR
AND also oun oun

Conj
SHALL-BE-REQUESTING EGG he-shall-be-requesting umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
he-SHALL-BE-ON-GIVING to-him he-shall-be-handing him oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
SCATTER-VENOM scorpion didonai didOmi

vn Pres Act
13 If ye then, being evil, know how to give good gifts unto your children: how much more shall [your] heavenly Father give the Holy Spirit to them that ask him?
11:13 ei
ei
Cond
ponhroi uparcontes ponEros huparchO

domata agaqa doma agathos

IF
THEN YOU(p) ye teknois umwn teknon humeis

n_ Dat Pl n
wicked
belongING being-inherently mallon o mallon ho

Adv
HAVE-PERCEIVED GIFTS are-aware pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
GOOD
TO-BE-GIVING
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
posw posos
pq Dat Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
pp 2 Gen Pl
t_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) to-how-much RATHER of-ye how-much
THE
FATHER
THE the-one
OUT OF-heaven
AV
Luke 11
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
pneuma agion pneuma hagios

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
aitousin aiteO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
SHALL-BE-GIVING spirit
HOLY
to-THE
ones-REQUESTING Him ones-requesting

NA
11:14 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekballwn ekballO
daimonion daimonion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai auto kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg n
NA
NA
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kwfon kOphos
a_ Nom Sg n
AND
He-WAS
OUT-CASTING casting-out tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
demon
AND
it
WAS
MUTE mute-one kwfos kOphos

a_ Nom Sg m
14 . And he was casting out a devil, and it was dumb. And it came to pass, when the devil was gone out, the dumb spake; and the people wondered.
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
daimoniou exelqontos daimonion exerchomai

n_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg n
elalhsen o laleO ho
kai kai
Conj
BECAME it-occurred
YET OF-THE
demon
OUT-COMING of-coming-out
TALKS speaks
THE
MUTE mute-man
AND
eqaumasan oi thaumazO ho
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
MARVEL
THE
THRONGS
11:15 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
beelzeboul tw beelzeboul ho
ni proper t_ Dat Sg m

ANY some
YET OUT OF-them
said
IN
BEELZEBOUL
to-THE the
chief-one chief
OF-THE
15 But some of them said, He casteth out devils through Beelzebub the chief of the devils.
daimoniwn ekballei daimonion ekballO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
demons
He-IS-OUT-CASTING THE he-is-casting-out de de

Conj
demons
11:16 eteroi
heteros
a_ Nom Pl m
peirazontes peirazO
shmeion ex sEmeion ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
ouranou ezhtoun ouranos zEteO

par para
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
16 And others, tempting [him], sought of him a sign from heaven.
DIFFERENT YET tryING different-ones trying-him
SIGN
OUT OF-heaven
SOUGHT
BESIDE Him
11:17 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eidws eidO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
dianohmata eipen dianoEma legO

n_ Acc Pl n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
He
YET HAVING-PERCEIVED OF-them being-aware basileia ef basileia epi

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
THE
THRU-MINDS cogitations erhmoutai erEmoO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
said
to-them
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
eauthn heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg f
diamerisqeisa diamerizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
kai oikos kai oikos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
epi epi
Prep
17 But he, knowing their thoughts, said unto them, Every kingdom divided against itself is brought to desolation; and a house [divided] against a house falleth.
EVERY
KINGdom
ON
herself heritself
BEING-THRU-PARTED IS-beING-DESOLATED AND being-divided
HOME house
ON
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
piptei piptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
HOME house
IS-FALLING
11:18 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
ef epi
Prep
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
diemerisqh diamerizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pws pOs
Adv Int
IF
YET AND also
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) ON Satan basileia autou basileia autos

self himself
IS-THRU-PARTED how is-divided how ? legete legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
18 If Satan also be divided against himself, how shall his kingdom stand? because ye say that I cast out devils through Beelzebub.
staqhsetai histEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oti hoti
Conj
en en
Prep
beelzeboul beelzeboul
ni proper
SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD THE shall-be-standing ekballein ekballO

vn Pres Act
KINGdom
OF-him
that YE-ARE-sayING IN seeing-that
BEELZEBOUL
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING ME to-be-casting-out
THE
demons
11:19 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
beelzeboul ekballw beelzeboul ekballO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia oi daimonion ho
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
IF
YET I
IN
BEELZEBOUL
AM-OUT-CASTING THE am-casting-out touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
demons
THE
SONS
19 And if I by Beelzebub cast out devils, by whom do your sons cast [them] out? therefore shall they be your judges.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
ekballousin ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
dia dia
Prep
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kritai kritEs
n_ Nom Pl m
esontai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
ANY whom ?
ARE-OUT-CASTING THRU this are-casting-out-them because-of
they
OF-YOU(p) JUDGers of-ye judges
SHALL-BE
AV
Luke 11
11:20 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
daktulw qeou daktulos theos

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ekballw ekballO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
daimonia daimonion
n_ Acc Pl n
IF
YET IN
FINGER
OF-God
AM-OUT-CASTING THE am-casting-out basileia tou basileia ho

demons
20 But if I with the finger of God cast out devils, no doubt the kingdom of God is come upon you.
ara ara
Part
efqasen phthanO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
CONSEQUENTLY OUTSTRIPS ON outstrips-in-time
YOU(p) ye
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
11:21 otan
hotan
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iscuros ischuros
a_ Nom Sg m
kaqwplismenos kathoplizO
fulassh phulassO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
21 When a strong man armed keepeth his palace, his goods are in peace:
when-EVER THE whenever eautou heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg m
STRONG-one HAVING-been-DOWN-IMPLEMENTED MAY-BE-GUARDING THE strong-one having-been-armed en en

Prep
aulhn aulE
n_ Acc Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Dat Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
uparconta huparchO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-self of-himself
COURT courtyard
IN
PEACE
IS
THE
OF-him
11:22 epan
epan
Conj
de de
Conj
iscuroteros autou ischuros autos

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp pp Gen Sg m
epelqwn eperchomai
nikhsh nikaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ON-[IF]-EVER YET STRONGER if-ever stronger-one thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
ON-COMING coming-on ef epi

Prep
SHOULD-BE-CONQUERING him
22 But when a stronger than he shall come upon him, and overcome him, he taketh from him all his armour wherein he trusted, and divideth his spoils.
panoplian panoplia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
airei airO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
epepoiqei peithO
vi 2Plup Act 3 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
THE
EVERY-IMPLEMENT OF-him panoply autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
IS-LIFTING ON he-is-taking-away
WHICH
he-HAD-confidence AND
THE
skula skulon
n_ Acc Pl n
diadidwsin diadidOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
FLAYS (pelts) OF-him spoils
IS-THRU-GIVING is-distributing wn eimi

11:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
kat kata
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
THE-one the-one mh mE
Part Neg
NO
BEING
WITH ME
DOWN OF-ME against me
IS
AND
THE-one the-one
23 He that is not with me is against me: and he that gathereth not with me scattereth.
sunagwn sunagO
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
skorpizei skorpizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NO
TOGETHER-LEADING WITH ME assembling to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
IS-SCATTERING
11:24 otan
hotan
Conj
akaqarton pneuma akathartos pneuma

a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
exelqh exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
when-EVER THE whenever diercetai dierchomai

UN-clean unclean
spirit
MAY-BE-OUT-COMING FROM THE may-be-coming-out zhtoun zEteO

human
di dia
Prep
anudrwn topwn anudros topos

anapausin kai mh anapausis kai mE

24 When the unclean spirit is gone out of a man, he walketh through dry places, seeking rest; and finding none, he saith, I will return unto my house whence I came out.
it-IS-THRU-COMING it-is-passing-through euriskon heuriskO

THRU UN-WET through waterless tote tote

Adv
PLACES
SEEKING
UP-CEASing rest eis eis

Prep
AND
NO
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
upostreyw hupostrephO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FINDING
then
IS-sayING it-is-saying
I-SHALL-BE-reTURNING INTO THE
HOME
OF-ME
oqen hothen
Adv
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
WHICH-PLACE I-OUT-CAME whence I-came-out
11:25 kai elqon

kai
Conj
erchomai
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
scolazonta
sesarwmenon saroO
kai kai
Conj
25 And when he cometh, he findeth [it] swept and garnished.
AND
COMING
it-IS-FINDING it-is-finding-it
HAVING-been-SWEPT AND
kekosmhmenon kosmeO
HAVING-been-SYSTEMED having-been-decorated
AV
Luke 11
11:26 tote poreuetai

tote
Adv
poreuomai
kai paralambanei kai paralambanO

etera heteros
a_ Acc Pl n
pneumata ponhrotera eautou pneuma ponEros heautou

n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Cmp pf 3 Gen Sg m
then
it-IS-GOING
AND
IS-BESIDE-GETTING DIFFERENT spirits is-taking-along ekei kai ginetai ekei kai ginomai
more-wicked
OF-self of-itself
epta hepta
ni numeral
kai eiselqonta kai eiserchomai

katoikei katoikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
escata tou eschatos ho

a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
26 Then goeth he, and taketh [to him] seven other spirits more wicked than himself; and they enter in, and dwell there: and the last [state] of that man is worse than the first.
SEVEN
AND
IS-DOWN-HOMING there it-is-dwelling
AND
IS-BECOMING
THE
LAST last(p)
OF-THE
anqrwpou ekeinou ceirona twn anthrOpos ekeinos cheirOn ho

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
prwtwn prOtos
a_ Gen Pl n
human
that
WORSE
OF-THE
BEFORE-most first auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
11:27 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eparasa epairO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
BECAME it-occurred fwnhn gunh phOnE gunE

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
YET IN
THE
TO-BE-sayING Him
these ON-LIFTing these-things lifting-up autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
ANY certain koilia koilia

n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
makaria h makarios ho
a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
27 . And it came to pass, as he spake these things, a certain woman of the company lifted up her voice, and said unto him, Blessed [is] the womb that bare thee, and the paps which thou hast sucked.
SOUND her-voice h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
WOMAN
OUT OF-THE
THRONG
said
to-Him
HAPPY
THE
CAVITY womb
bastasasa bastazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai mastoi kai mastos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
eqhlasas thElazO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
one-BEARing bearing de de
Conj
YOU
AND
BREASTS
WHICH
YOU-suckle
11:28 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
menoun menoun
Part
akouontes akouO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
28 But he said, Yea rather, blessed [are] they that hear the word of God, and keep it.
He
YET said
INDEED-THEN HAPPY happy-are
THE
THE
saying word
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai fulassontes kai phulassO

OF-THE
God
AND
GUARDING maintaining-it epaqroizomenwn hrxato epathroizO archO

vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
11:29 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
oclwn ochlos
n_ Gen Pl m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
YET THRONGS beING-ON-CONVENED being-convened-for ponhra ponEros

a_ Nom Sg f
He-begins
TO-BE-sayING THE
generation
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
shmeion zhtei sEmeion zEteO


29 . And when the people were gathered thick together, he began to say, This is an evil generation: they seek a sign; and there shall no sign be given it, but the sign of Jonas the prophet.
this
generation
wicked
IS
SIGN
it-IS-SEEKING AND sheit-is-seeking shmeion iwna sEmeion iOnas

n_ Nom Sg n
SIGN
NOT
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-her to-herit
IF
NO
WH
THE
SIGN
of-JONA of-Jonah tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
11:30 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gar egeneto gar ginomai

iwnas iOnas
n_ Nom Sg m
nineuitais shmeion outws nineuitEs sEmeion houtOs

n_ Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg n Adv
according-AS for
BECAME
JONA Jonah tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
NINEVITES
SIGN
thus
30 For as Jonas was a sign unto the Ninevites, so shall also the Son of man be to this generation.
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou th anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
SHALL-BE
AND also
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
to-THE
generation this
11:31 basilissa notou

basilissa
n_ Nom Sg f
notos
n_ Gen Sg m
egerqhsetai egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
andrwn anEr
n_ Gen Pl m
KINGess queen ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-SOUTH
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED IN
THE
JUDGing
WITH
THE
MEN
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths kai katakrinei houtos kai katakrinO

pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autous oti hlqen autos hoti erchomai

pp Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
31 The queen of the south shall rise up in the judgment with the men of this generation, and condemn them: for she came from the utmost parts of the earth to hear the wisdom of Solomon; and, behold, a greater than Solomon [is] here.
OF-THE
generation
this
AND
SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING them shall-be-condemning
that
she-CAME
OUT OF-THE
AV
Luke 11
peratwn ths peras ho

n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
akousai thn akouO ho

sofian solomwnos kai idou sophia solomOn kai idou

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ends
OF-THE
LAND earth
TO-HEAR
THE
WISDOM
OF-SOLOMON
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
pleion polus
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
solomwnos wde solomOn hOde

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
MORE
OF-SOLOMON
here
11:32 andres
anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
nineuitai anasthsontai nineuitEs anistEmi

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
krisei krisis
n_ Dat Sg f
meta ths meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
MEN
NINEVITES
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN shall-be-rising authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
JUDGing
WITH
THE
generation
tauths kai katakrinousin houtos kai katakrinO

pd Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oti metenohsan eis hoti metanoeO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
khrugma kErugma
n_ Acc Sg n
32 The men of Nineve shall rise up in the judgment with this generation, and shall condemn it: for they repented at the preaching of Jonas; and, behold, a greater than Jonas [is] here.
this
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-JUDGING her herit they-shall-be-condemning pleion polus

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
that
INTO THE
PROCLAMATION heralding
iwna iOnas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai idou kai idou

iwna iOnas
n_ Gen Sg m
wde hOde
Adv
of-JONA of-Jonah
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MORE lo ! lucnon ayas luchnos haptO

of-JONA of-Jonah eis eis

Prep
here
WH WH WH
11:33 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
krupthn tiqhsin kruptE tithEmi

oude upo ton
NOT-YET-ONE LAMP no-one

WH
TOUCHing lighting
NA
INTO HIDing
NA
IS-PLACING is-placing-it lucnian ina luchnia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
modion
NA
oude oude
Adv
NA
upo hupo
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
modion modios
n_ Acc Sg m
all epi thn alla epi ho

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
33 No man, when he hath lighted a candle, putteth [it] in a secret place, neither under a bushel, but on a candlestick, that they which come in may see the light.
NOT-YET UNDER THE neither eisporeuomenoi eisporeuomai

MEASURE peck-measure blepwsin blepO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
but
ON
THE
LAMPstand
THAT THE
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
ones-INTO-GOING ones-going-in
THE
LIGHT
MAY-BE-lookING may-be-observing swmatos estin sOma eimi

11:34 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lucnos luchnos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

THE
LAMP
OF-THE
BODY
IS
THE
VIEWer eye kai olon kai holos

Conj
OF-YOU
otan hotan
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

aplous haplous
a_ Nom Sg m
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
34 The light of the body is the eye: therefore when thine eye is single, thy whole body also is full of light; but when [thine eye] is evil, thy body also [is] full of darkness.
a_ Nom Sg n
when-EVER THE whenever swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
VIEWer eye
OF-YOU
UN-COMPOUND MAY-BE single epan epan

Conj
AND also
WHOLE
THE
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
fwteinon estin phOteinos eimi

de de
Conj
ponhros h ponEros eimi

kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
BODY
OF-YOU
LIGHTed luminous skoteinon skoteinos

a_ Nom Sg n
IS
ON-[IF]-EVER YET wicked if-ever
MAY-BE it-may-be
AND also
THE
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
BODY
OF-YOU
DARK
11:35 skopei
skopeO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
skotos skotos
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
35 Take heed therefore that the light which is in thee be not darkness.
BE-NOTING be-you-noting !
THEN NO
THE
LIGHT
THE
IN
YOU
DARKness
IS
11:36 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
fwteinon mh phOteinos mE
a_ Nom Sg n Part Neg
econ echO
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
IF
THEN THE
BODY
OF-YOU
WHOLE
LIGHTed luminous ws otan hOs hotan

Adv Conj
NO
HAVING
PART
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
skoteinon estai skoteinos eimi

a_ Acc Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
fwteinon olon phOteinos holos

a_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lucnos luchnos
n_ Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
36 If thy whole body therefore [be] full of light, having no part dark, the whole shall be full of light, as when the bright shining of a candle doth give thee light.
ANY
DARK
SHALL-BE
LIGHTed luminous
WHOLE
AS
when-EVER THE whenever
LAMP
to-THE
AV
Luke 11
astraph astrapE
n_ Dat Sg f
fwtizh phOtizO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
GLEAM-FLING MAY-BE-LIGHTenING YOU flashing may-be-illuminating
11:37 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
lalhsai erwta laleO erOtaO

vn Aor Act vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
farisaios opws pharisaios hopOs

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
IN
YET THE
TO-TALK to-speak par para

Prep
IS-askING
Him
PHARISEE
WHICH-how so-that
37 . And as he spake, a certain Pharisee besought him to dine with him: and he went in, and sat down to meat.
aristhsh aristaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
anepesen anapiptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
He-SHOULD-BE-LUNCHING BESIDE to-him him
YET He-UP-FALLS he-leans-back-at-table prwton prOton

Adv
11:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
farisaios idwn pharisaios eidO

eqaumasen oti ou thaumazO hoti ou

ebaptisqh baptizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
38 And when the Pharisee saw [it], he marvelled that he had not first washed before dinner.
THE
YET PHARISEE
MARVELS
that
NOT
BEFORE-most He-IS-DIPizED first he-is-baptized
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aristou ariston
n_ Gen Sg n
BEFORE THE
LUNCH luncheon de de
Conj
11:39 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
nun umeis nun humeis

Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
said
YET THE
Master Lord
TOWARD him
NOW YOU(p) ye
THE
PHARISEES
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
exwqen exOthen
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pothriou kai tou potErion kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg m
pinakos kaqarizete to pinax katharizO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
39 And the Lord said unto him, Now do ye Pharisees make clean the outside of the cup and the platter; but your inward part is full of ravening and wickedness.
THE
OUT-PLACE OF-THE outside umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
DRINK-cup cup
AND
OF-THE the
BOARD platter
ARE-cleansING
THE
YET
eswqen esOthen
Adv
gemei gemO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arpaghs harpagE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ponhrias kai ponEria

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
INTO-PLACE OF-YOU(p) IS-beING-REPLETE OF-SNATCHing AND inside of-ye is-brimming of-rapacity
OF-wickedness wickedness exwqen exOthen

Adv
11:40 afrones
aphrOn
a_ Voc Pl m
ouc ou
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eswqen esOthen
Adv
40 [Ye] fools, did not he that made that which is without make that which is within also?
UN-DISPOSED ! NOT imprudent-ones ! epoihsen poieO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
One-making one-making
THE
OUT-PLACE AND outside also
THE
INTO-PLACE inside
makES
11:41 plhn
plEn
Adv
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
enonta eneimi
vp Pres vxx Acc Pl n
dote didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
elehmosunhn kai idou eleEmosunE kai idou

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
41 But rather give alms of such things as ye have; and, behold, all things are clean unto you.
MOREly THE however the(p) kaqara katharos

a_ Nom Pl n
IN-BEING within estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alms
AND
BE-PERCEIVING ALL lo !
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
clean
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IS
11:42 alla ouai umin

alla
Conj
ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
farisaiois oti apodekatoute pharisaios hoti apodekatoO

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hduosmon hEduosmon
n_ Acc Sg n
but
WOE woe !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
PHARISEES
that
YE-ARE-FROM-TENthING THE ye-are-taking-tithes-from thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
GRATIFY-ODOR mint krisin krisis

n_ Acc Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
phganon kai pan pEganon kai pas

n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n
lacanon kai parercesqe lachanon kai parerchomai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
42 But woe unto you, Pharisees! for ye tithe mint and rue and all manner of herbs, and pass over judgment and the love of God: these ought ye to have done, and not to leave the other undone.
AND
THE
RUE
AND
EVERY
GREEN
AND
YE-ARE-BESIDE-COMING THE ye-are-passing-by
JUDGing
AND
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn tou agapE ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
poihsai kakeina mh poieO kakeinos mE

vn Aor Act pd Nom Pl n Part Neg
THE
LOVE
OF-THE
God
these
YET it-WAS-BINDING TO-DO
AND-those
NO
AV
Luke 11
pareinai pareimi
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-BESIDE-BEING to-be-present
11:43 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
farisaiois oti agapate pharisaios hoti agapaO

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prwtokaqedrian prOtokathedria
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
WOE woe ! tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
PHARISEES
that
YE-ARE-LOVING THE
BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLE IN front-seat
43 Woe unto you, Pharisees! for ye love the uppermost seats in the synagogues, and greetings in the markets.
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
aspasmous en aspasmos en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
agorais agora
n_ Dat Pl f
THE
THE
greetings salutations ws ta hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Pl n
IN
THE
BUY-places markets ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
11:44 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti este hoti eimi

mnhmeia mnEmeion
n_ Nom Pl n
adhla adElos
a_ Nom Pl n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
WOE woe ! anqrwpoi anthrOpos

n_ Nom Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WH
that
NA
YE-ARE
AS
THE
memorial-vaults THE tombs epanw epanO

Adv
UN-EVIDENT AND obscure oidasin eidO

vi Perf Act 3 Pl
THE
44 Woe unto you, scribes and Pharisees, hypocrites! for ye are as graves which appear not, and the men that walk over [them] are not aware [of them].
oi
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
peripatountes peripateO
ouk ou
Part Neg
humans
THE
ones-ABOUT-TREADING ON-UP NOT ones-walking upon-them tis tis

px Nom Sg m
THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED are-aware-of-it autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
11:45 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nomikwn legei nomikos legO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
n_ Voc Sg m
answerING
YET ANY certain-one kai hmas kai hEmeis

Conj
OF-THE
LAWers lawyers
IS-sayING
to-Him
TEACHer !
45 Then answered one of the lawyers, and said unto him, Master, thus saying thou reproachest us also.
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
legwn legO
ubrizeis hubrizO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
pp 1 Acc Pl
these sayING these-things
AND also de de
Conj
US
YOU-ARE-OUTRAGING
11:46 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai umin kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
nomikois ouai oti fortizete nomikos ouai hoti phortizO

a_ Dat Pl m Inj Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
YET He-said
AND also
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
LAWers lawyers
WOE woe ! eni heis

n_ Dat Sg m
that
YE-ARE-CARRYizING ye-are-loading daktulwn daktulos

n_ Gen Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
anqrwpous fortia dusbastakta kai autoi anthrOpos phortion dusbastaktos kai autos
n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n Conj pp Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
46 And he said, Woe unto you also, [ye] lawyers! for ye lade men with burdens grievous to be borne, and ye yourselves touch not the burdens with one of your fingers.
THE
humans
loads
ILL-BEARic hard-to-bear tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
AND
SAME yourselves
to-ONE
OF-THE
FINGERS
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
prosyauete prospsauO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
fortiois phortion
n_ Dat Pl n
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
YE-ARE-TOWARD-STROKING to-THE ye-are-touching the oti oikodomeite hoti oikodomeO

loads
11:47 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mnhmeia mnEmeion
n_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
WOE woe ! oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
47 Woe unto you! for ye build the sepulchres of the prophets, and your fathers killed them.
that
YE-ARE-HOME-BUILDING THE ye-are-building
memorial-vaults OF-THE tombs
de de
Conj
pateres umwn patEr humeis

apekteinan autous apokteinO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m
THE
YET FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) FROM-KILL of-ye kill
them
11:48 ara
ara
Part
martures este martus eimi

kai suneudokeite kai suneudokeO

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ergois ergon
n_ Dat Pl n
CONSEQUENTLY witnesses
YE-ARE
AND
YE-ARE-TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING to-THE are-endorsing the apekteinan autous umeis apokteinO autos humeis
vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
ACTS
48 Truly ye bear witness that ye allow the deeds of your fathers: for they indeed killed them, and ye build their sepulchres.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
paterwn umwn patEr humeis


Conj pp Nom Pl m
men men
Part
de de
Conj
OF-THE
FATHERS
they
INDEED FROM-KILL kill
them
YOU(p) ye
YET
oikodomeite oikodomeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ARE-HOME-BUILDING are-building
AV
Luke 11 - Luke 12
11:49 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THRU this because-of apostelw apostellO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
AND also eis eis

Prep
THE
WISDOM
OF-THE
God
said
49 Therefore also said the wisdom of God, I will send them prophets and apostles, and [some] of them they shall slay and persecute:
autous profhtas autos prophEtEs

pp Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
kai apostolous kai ex kai apostolos kai ek

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-commissionING INTO them I-shall-be-dispatching apoktenousin apokteinO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
AND
OUT OF-them
kai diwxousin kai diOkO

THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING AND they-shall-be-killing
THEY-SHALL-BE-CHASING they-shall-be-persecuting to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
11:50 ina
hina
Conj
ekzhthqh ekzEteO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
pantwn twn pas ho

profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-OUT-SOUGHT THE may-be-being-exacted ekkecumenon ekcheO

BLOOD
OF-ALL
OF-THE the
BEFORE-AVERers THE prophets tauths houtos

pd Gen Sg f
50 That the blood of all the prophets, which was shed from the foundation of the world, may be required of this generation;
apo apo
Prep

apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-been-OUT-POURED FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM FROM THE being-shed disruption of-world
generation
this
11:51 apo
apo
Prep
aimatos abel haima abel

ews aimatos zacariou heOs haima zacharias

Conj n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
apolomenou apollumi
vp 2Aor Mid Gen Sg m
metaxu metaxu
Adv
FROM BLOOD
of-ABEL TILL of-Abel
BLOOD
OF-ZACHARIAS THE
one-beING-destroyED between one-perishing umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qusiasthriou kai tou thusiastErion kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg m
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
nai legw nai legO

51 From the blood of Abel unto the blood of Zacharias, which perished between the altar and the temple: verily I say unto you, It shall be required of this generation.
THE
AND
THE
HOME house geneas genea

n_ Gen Sg f
YEA
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ekzhthqhsetai ekzEteO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
tauths houtos
pd Gen Sg f
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-SOUGHT FROM THE it-shall-be-being-exacted
generation
this
11:52 ouai umin

ouai
Inj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
nomikois oti hrate nomikos hoti airO

a_ Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kleida ths kleis ho

gnwsews gnOsis
n_ Gen Sg f
WOE woe ! autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye ouk ou

Part Neg
THE
LAWers lawyers
that
YE-LIFT THE ye-take-away eisercomenous eiserchomai

LOCKer key
OF-THE
KNOWledge
52 Woe unto you, lawyers! for ye have taken away the key of knowledge: ye entered not in yourselves, and them that were entering in ye hindered.
eishlqate eiserchomai
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
ekwlusate kOluO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
SAME yourselves
NOT
YE-INTO-COME AND ye-enter
THE
ones-INTO-COMING ones-entering autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
YE-FORBID ye-prevent oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
11:53 kakeiqen
kakeithen
Adv Con
exelqontos exerchomai
hrxanto archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl

AND-OUT-BE-PLACED OF-OUT-COMING and-thence of-coming-out farisaioi deinws enecein pharisaios deinOs enechO
n_ Nom Pl m Adv vn Pres Act
OF-Him
begin
THE
WRITers scribes auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
THE
53 And as he said these things unto them, the scribes and the Pharisees began to urge [him] vehemently, and to provoke him to speak of many things:
kai apostomatizein kai apostomatizO

Conj vn Pres Act
peri peri
Prep
pleionwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n Cmp
PHARISEES
DREADly dreadfully
TO-BE-IN-HAVING AND to-be-hemming-in-him qhreusai thEreuO

vn Aor Act
TO-BE-FROM-MOUTHizING Him to-be-quizzing ti tis

px Acc Sg n
ABOUT MORE more-things stomatos autou stoma autos

54 Laying wait for him, and seeking to catch something out of his mouth, that they might accuse him.
11:54 enedreuontes auton

enedreuO
autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ambushING
Him
TO-WILD-BEAST (hunt) ANY to-pounce-upon something
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
AV
Luke 12
12:1 en
en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
episunacqeiswn episunagO
vp Aor Pas Gen Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
muriadwn murias
n_ Gen Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
IN
WHICH
OF-BEING-ON-TOGETHER-LED OF-THE of-being-assembled allhlous hrxato allElOn archO

pc Acc Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
MYRIADS OF-THE tens-of-thousands pros pros

Prep
THRONG
AS-BESIDES so-as
katapatein katapateO
vn Pres Act
legein legO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

TO-BE-DOWN-TREADING one-another to-be-trampling prwton prOton

Adv
He-begins
TO-BE-sayING TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-Him
. In the mean time, when there were gathered together an innumerable multitude of people, insomuch that they trode one upon another, he began to say unto his disciples first of all, Beware ye of the leaven of the Pharisees, which is hypocrisy.
prosecete eautois prosechO heautou

vm Pres Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
zumhs zumE
n_ Gen Sg f
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
upokrisis hupokrisis
n_ Nom Sg f
BEFORE-most BE-YE-heedING first be-ye-heeding ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
to-selves FROM THE to-yourselves
FERMENT WHO-ANY IS leaven which-any
hypocrisy
farisaiwn pharisaios
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
PHARISEES
12:2 ouden
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
sugkekalummenon sugkaluptO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
NOT-YET-ONE YET HAVING-been-TOGETHER-COVERED IS nothing having-been-covered-up apokalufqhsetai apokaluptO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
WHICH
NOT
For there is nothing covered, that shall not be revealed; neither hid, that shall not be known.
kai krupton o kai kruptos hos

Conj a_ Nom Sg n pr Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
gnwsqhsetai ginOskO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED AND shall-be-being-revealed
HIDDen
WHICH
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN
12:3 anq
anti
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
skotia eipate skotia legO

n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fwti phOs
n_ Dat Sg n
INSTEAD OF-WHICH as-much-as IN corresponding-to which whatever akousqhsetai akouO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE
DARKness
YE-say
IN
THE
LIGHT
kai o kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ous ous
n_ Acc Sg n
elalhsate en laleO en
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
Therefore whatsoever ye have spoken in darkness shall be heard in the light; and that which ye have spoken in the ear in closets shall be proclaimed upon the housetops.
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEARD AND
WHICH
TOWARD THE
EAR
YE-TALK ye-speak
IN
THE
tameiois tameion
n_ Dat Pl n
khrucqhsetai kErussO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl n
dwmatwn dOma
n_ Gen Pl n
STOREROOMS SHALL-BE-BEING-PROCLAIMED ON shall-be-being-heralded
THE
housetops
12:4 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
filois philos
a_ Dat Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
fobhqhte phobeO
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
FOND-ones OF-ME friends kai meta tauta kai meta houtos

Conj Prep pd Acc Pl n
NO
YE-BE-BEING-afraid FROM THE be-ye-being-afraid ! econtwn echO

And I say unto you my friends, Be not afraid of them that kill the body, and after that have no more that they can do.
apokteinontwn to apokteinO ho
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
perissoteron perissos
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
ones-FROM-KILLING ones-killing ti tis

px Acc Sg n
THE
BODY
AND
after
these
NO
OF-HAVING having
more-excessive
poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
ANY anything
TO-DO
12:5 upodeixw
hupodeiknumi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
fobhqhte phobeO
vs Aor pasD 2 Pl
fobhqhte phobeO
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-UNDER-SHOWING YET to-YOU(p) I-shall-be-intimating to-ye meta to meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg n
ANY whom ?
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-afraid YE-BE-BEING-afraid THE ye-may-be-being-afraid-of be-ye-being-afraid-of ! the-one eis eis

Prep
But I will forewarn you whom ye shall fear: Fear him, which after he hath killed hath power to cast into hell; yea, I say unto you, Fear him.
apokteinai econta apokteinO echO

vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
exousian embalein exousia emballO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
geennan geenna
n_ Acc Sg f
after
THE
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
HAVING
authority
TO-BE-IN-CASTING INTO THE to-be-casting-into
GEHENNA
nai legw nai legO

touton fobhqhte houtos phobeO

pd Acc Sg m vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
YEA
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
this-One this-one
YE-BE-BEING-afraid be-ye-being-afraid-of !
AV
Luke 12
12:6 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
pente strouqia pwlountai pente strouthion pOleO

ni numeral n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
assariwn assarion
n_ Gen Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
kai en kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl n
NOT(emph.) FIVE not(emph.) ? ouk ou

Part Neg
PASSERINES sparrows
ARE-beING-SOLD OF-ASSARIONS TWO of-pence enwpion tou enOpion ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
AND
ONE
OUT OF-them
Are not five sparrows sold for two farthings, and not one of them is forgotten before God?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
epilelhsmenon epilanthanomai
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
IS
HAVING-been-forgotten IN-VIEW in-sight-of trices ths thrix ho

n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE the
God
12:7 alla kai ai

alla
Conj
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
kefalhs umwn kephalE humeis

pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
hriqmhntai arithmeO
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
but
AND THE even
HAIRS
OF-THE
HEAD
OF-YOU(p) ALL of-ye
HAVE-been-NUMBERED NO
But even the very hairs of your head are all numbered. Fear not therefore: ye are of more value than many sparrows.
fobeisqe phobeO
pollwn strouqiwn diaferete polus strouthion diapherO

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-MANY many de de
Conj
PASSERINES sparrows pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-THRU-CARRYING ye-are-being-of-more-consequence-than os hos

pr Nom Sg m
12:8 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
an an
Part
WH
omologhsei
NA
omologhsh homologeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
EVERY every-one
WHO
EVER
SHOULD-BE-avowING
IN
Also I say unto you, Whosoever shall confess me before men, him shall the Son of man also confess before the angels of God:
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn kai o anthrOpos kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
ME
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the en en

Prep
humans
AND also twn ho
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
omologhsei homologeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
Prep
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-avowING IN
him
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
MESSENGERS OF-THE
God
12:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
arnhsamenos arneomai
enwpion twn enOpion ho

Adv t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
But he that denieth me before men shall be denied before the angels of God.
THE
YET one-disowning one-disowning
ME
IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore aggelwn aggelos

n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE the tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
humans
aparnhqhsetai aparneomai
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg

Adv t_ Gen Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-renouncED IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore
OF-THE the
MESSENGERS OF-THE
God
12:10 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
erei ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
EVERY every-one
WHO
SHALL-BE-declarING saying word autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
INTO THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou afeqhsetai anthrOpos aphiEmi

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
10 And whosoever shall speak a word against the Son of man, it shall be forgiven him: but unto him that blasphemeth against the Holy Ghost it shall not be forgiven.
human
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-him it-shall-be-being-pardoned him afeqhsetai aphiEmi

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
to-THE the-one
YET INTO THE
HOLY
spirit
blasfhmhsanti ouk blasphEmeO ou

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m Part Neg
one-HARM-AVERRing blaspheming
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET it-shall-be-being-pardoned umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
12:11 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
eisferwsin eispherO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
epi tas epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl f
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
when-EVER YET THEY-MAY-BE-INTO-CARRYING YOU(p) whenever they-may-be-bringing-into ye arcas archE

n_ Acc Pl f
ON
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS AND synagogues pws pOs

Adv Int
WH WH
THE
NA
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
exousias mh exousia mE
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
h ti
NA
h E
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
11 And when they bring you unto the synagogues, and [unto] magistrates, and powers, take ye no thought how or what thing ye shall answer, or what ye shall say:
Part
ORIGINals AND chiefs
THE
authorities
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-anxious how ye-should-be-worrying how ? eiphte legO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
OR
ANY what ?
apologhshsqe apologeomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
h E
Part
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
YE-SHOULD-BE-FROM-sayING OR ye-should-be-defending
ANY what ?
YE-MAY-BE-sayING
AV
Luke 12
12:12 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar agion gar hagios

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
didaxei didaskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
for
HOLY
spirit
SHALL-BE-TEACHING YOU(p) ye
12 For the Holy Ghost shall teach you in the same hour what ye ought to say.
IN
SAME
THE
HOUR
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
WHICH which(p)
IS-BINDING
TO-BE-sayING
12:13 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
didaskale eipe didaskalos legO

said
YET ANY someone adelfw mou adelphos egO

OUT OF-THE
THRONG
to-Him
TEACHer !
13 . And one of the company said unto him, Master, speak to my brother, that he divide the inheritance with me.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
merisasqai met emou merizO meta egO

vn Aor Mid Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
klhronomian klEronomia
n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
brother
OF-ME
TO-PART
WITH ME
THE
tenancy enjoyment-of-the-allotment me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
12:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anqrwpe tis anthrOpos tis

n_ Voc Sg m pi Nom Sg m
katesthsen krithn kathistEmi kritEs

h E
Part
14 And he said unto him, Man, who made me a judge or a divider over you?
THE
YET He-said
to-him
human !
ANY who ?
ME
DOWN-STANDS constitutes
JUDGer judge
OR
meristhn ef meristEs epi

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
PARTer
ON YOU(p) onover ye de de
Conj
12:15 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous orate autos horaO

pp Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai fulassesqe apo kai phulassO apo

Conj vm Pres Mid 2 Pl Prep
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
He-said
YET TOWARD them
AND
BE-GUARDING be-ye-guarding ! h ho
FROM EVERY all zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
pleonexias oti ouk pleonexia hoti ou

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
perisseuein tini perisseuO tis

vn Pres Act px Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
15 And he said unto them, Take heed, and beware of covetousness: for a man's life consisteth not in the abundance of the things which he possesseth.
t_ Nom Sg f
MORE-HAVing greed estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
that
NOT
IN
THE
TO-BE-exceedING superfluity
to-ANY-one THE to-anyone
LIFE
OF-him
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
uparcontwn autw huparchO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n pp Dat Sg m
IS
OUT OF-THE
to-him
12:16 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
parabolhn pros parabolE pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
autous legwn autos legO

anqrwpou tinos anthrOpos tis

n_ Gen Sg m px Gen Sg m
He-said he-told
YET BESIDE-CAST parable h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
TOWARD them
sayING
OF-human
ANY certain
16 And he spake a parable unto them, saying, The ground of a certain rich man brought forth plentifully:
plousiou euforhsen plousios euphoreO

a_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
cwra chOra
n_ Nom Sg f
RICH
WELL-CARRIES THE bears-well en en

Prep
SPACE country-place eautw heautou

pf 3 Dat Sg m
12:17 kai dielogizeto

kai
Conj
dialogizomai
legwn legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
he-THRU-accountED he-reasoned pou pou

Part Int
IN
self himself
sayING
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-DOING that NOT seeing-that
17 And he thought within himself, saying, What shall I do, because I have no room where to bestow my fruits?
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
sunaxw sunagO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
karpous mou karpos egO

I-AM-HAVING
?-where I-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING THE where ? I-shall-be-gathering touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
FRUITS
OF-ME
12:18 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kaqelw kathaireO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
apoqhkas apothEkE
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
he-said
this
I-SHALL-BE-DOING I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-LIFTING OF-ME I-shall-be-pulling-down kai sunaxw kai sunagO

THE
FROM-PLACES barns ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
18 And he said, This will I do: I will pull down my barns, and build greater; and there will I bestow all my fruits and my goods.
kai meizonas kai mega

Conj a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
oikodomhsw oikodomeO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ekei panta ekei pas

Adv a_ Acc Pl n
AND
GREATer greater-ones
I-SHALL-BE-HOME-BUILDING AND I-shall-be-building
I-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING there I-shall-be-gathering
ALL
THE
AV
Luke 12
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
GRAIN
AND
THE
GOODS
OF-ME
12:19 kai erw

kai
Conj
ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
yuch psuchE
n_ Voc Sg f
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
AND
WH
I-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE
NA
soul
OF-ME
soul soul ! polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
YOU-ARE-HAVING MANY
GOODS good-things
WH
19 And I will say to my soul, Soul, thou hast much goods laid up for many years; take thine ease, eat, drink, [and] be merry.
keimena
keimena keimai
eis eis
Prep
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
anapauou anapauO
vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
fage esthiO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pie
LYING being-laid-up
NA
INTO YEARS
MANY
BE-UP-CEASING BE-EATING be-you-resting ! be-you-eating !
pie pinO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eufrainou euphrainO
vm Pres Pas 2 Sg
BE-DRINKING be-you-drinking !
BE-beING-glad be-making-merry-you ! de de
Conj
12:20 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
afrwn aphrOn
a_ Voc Sg m
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
said
YET to-him
WH
THE
NA
God
UN-DISPOSED to-this imprudent-one ! apo apo

Prep
THE
NIGHT
THE
20 But God said unto him, [Thou] fool, this night thy soul shall be required of thee: then whose shall those things be, which thou hast provided?
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
aitousin
apaitousin apaiteO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
a hos
pr Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
soul
OF-YOU
THEY-ARE-FROM-REQUESTING they-are-demanding tini tis

pi Dat Sg m
FROM YOU
WHICH which(p)
YET
htoimasas hetoimazO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
YOU-make-READY ANY whose ?
SHALL-BE it-shall-be o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
12:21
WH
outws
NA
outws houtOs
Adv
qhsaurizwn thEsaurizO
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
21 So [is] he that layeth up treasure for himself, and is not rich toward God.
thus
WH NA
THE
one-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-self one-hoarding to-himself
AND
NO
INTO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ploutwn
ploutwn plouteO
God
beING-RICH
12:22 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
He-said
YET TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples yuch psuchE

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-Him
THRU this because-of faghte esthiO

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
I-AM-sayING
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
merimnate merimnaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
mhde mEde
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
22 . And he said unto his disciples, Therefore I say unto you, Take no thought for your life, what ye shall eat; neither for the body, what ye shall put on.
to-YOU(p) to-ye swmati sOma

n_ Dat Sg n
NO
WH
BE-YE-beING-anxious to-THE be-ye-worrying ! umwn ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
soul
ANY what ?
YE-MAY-BE-EATING NO-YET to-THE nor-yet
endushsqe enduO
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
BODY
ANY what ? gar yuch gar psuchE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING ye-should-be-putting-on estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
12:23 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pleion polus
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
23 The life is more than meat, and the body [is more] than raiment.
THE
for
soul
MORE
IS
OF-THE
NURTURE AND nourishment
THE
BODY
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
endumatos enduma
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
IN-SLIP apparel korakas oti ou korax hoti ou

n_ Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg
12:24 katanohsate tous

katanoeO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
speirousin speirO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oude oude
Adv
qerizousin therizO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
DOWN-MIND-YE consider-ye !
THE
RAVENS
that
NOT
THEY-ARE-SOWING NOT-YET THEY-ARE-reapING neither
24 Consider the ravens: for they neither sow nor reap; which neither have storehouse nor barn; and God feedeth them: how much more are ye
AV
Luke 12
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tameion tameion
n_ Nom Sg n
oude oude
Adv
apoqhkh apothEkE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
trefei trephO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
better than the fowls?
to-WHICH NOT to-which(p) autous posw autos posos

pp Acc Pl m
IS there-is
STOREROOM NOT-YET FROM-PLACE AND nor barn diaferete diapherO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
God
IS-NURTURING
mallon umeis mallon humeis

Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
peteinwn peteinon
n_ Gen Pl n
pq Dat Sg n
them
to-how-much RATHER how-much more de de

Conj
YOU(p) ye
ARE-THRU-CARRYING OF-THE are-being-of-consequence than the dunatai dunamai

flyers flying-creatures hlikian hElikia

n_ Acc Sg f
25 And which of you with taking thought can add to his stature one cubit?
12:25 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
merimnwn merimnaO
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ANY who ? autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
YET OUT OF-YOU(p) beING-anxious of-ye worrying prosqeinai phcun prostithEmi pEchus
IS-ABLING is-able
ON
THE
PRIME stature
OF-him
TO-add
CUBIT
12:26 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
oude oude
Adv
elaciston dunasqe elachistos dunamai

a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
peri peri
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
loipwn loipon
a_ Gen Pl n
26 If ye then be not able to do that thing which is least, why take ye thought for the rest?
IF
THEN NOT-YET INFERIOR-most not-yeteven least
YE-ARE-ABLING ye-are-able
ANY why ?
ABOUT THE
rest rest(p)
merimnate merimnaO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-beING-anxious ye-are-worrying
12:27 katanohsate ta
katanoeO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
krina krinon
n_ Acc Pl n
pws auxanei pOs auxanO

ou ou
Part Neg
kopia kopiaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
DOWN-MIND-YE consider-ye ! nhqei nEthO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
ANEMONES how
it-IS-GROWING-UP NOT it-is-growing solomwn en solomOn en

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
it-IS-toilING
NOT-YET neither doxh doxa

n_ Dat Sg f
27 Consider the lilies how they grow: they toil not, they spin not; and yet I say unto you, that Solomon in all his glory was not arrayed like one of these.
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oude oude
Adv
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
it-IS-SPINNING I-AM-sayING
YET to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT-YET SOLOMON not-yeteven
IN
EVERY all
THE
esteem glory
OF-him
periebaleto ws en periballO hOs heis

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg Adv n_ Acc Sg n
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
was-ABOUT-CAST was-clothed
AS
ONE
OF-these
12:28 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
corton chortos
n_ Acc Sg m
onta eimi
vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m
shmeron kai aurion sEmeron kai aurion

Adv Conj Adv
eis eis
Prep
IF
YET IN
FIELD
THE
FODDER grass qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
BEING
toDAY
AND
MORROW INTO tomorrow mallon umas mallon humeis

Adv pp 2 Acc Pl
klibanon ballomenon klibanos ballO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
outws amfiezei houtOs amphiazO

posw posos
pq Dat Sg n
28 If then God so clothe the grass, which is to day in the field, and to morrow is cast into the oven; how much more [will he clothe] you, O ye of little faith?
STOVE
beING-CAST
THE
God
thus
IS-ENVELOPING to-how-much RATHER is-garbing how-much
YOU(p) ye
a_ Voc Pl m
FEW-BELIEVing-ones scant-of-faith-ones !
12:29 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
zhteite zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
faghte esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
pihte pinO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
YOU(p) ye
NO
BE-SEEKING ANY be-ye-seeking ! what ?
YE-MAY-BE-EATING AND
ANY what ?
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING
29 And seek not ye what ye shall eat, or what ye shall drink, neither be ye of doubtful mind.
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
metewrizesqe meteOrizO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
AND
NO
YE-BE-beING-WITH-AIRizED be-ye-being-in-suspense ! gar panta gar pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
12:30 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
epizhtousin umwn epizEteO humeis

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Gen Pl
de de
Conj
these for these-things
ALL
THE
NATIONS
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
ARE-ON-SEEKING are-seeking-for
OF-YOU(p) YET of-ye
30 For all these things do the nations of the world seek after: and your Father knoweth that ye have need of these things.
AV
Luke 12
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
oti crhzete hoti chrEzO

toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
THE
FATHER
HAS-PERCEIVED that is-aware thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YE-ARE-needING OF-these these-things kai tauta kai houtos

Conj pd Nom Pl n
12:31 plhn
plEn
Adv
zhteite zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
basileian autou basileia autos

prosteqhsetai prostithEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
31 But rather seek ye the kingdom of God; and all these things shall be added unto you.
MOREly BE-YE-SEEKING THE however be-ye-seeking ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
KINGdom
OF-Him
AND
these SHALL-BE-BEING-addED these-things
to-YOU(p) to-ye
12:32 mh
mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
mikron mikros
a_ Nom Sg n
poimnion oti eudokhsen o poimnion hoti eudokeO ho

n_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
32 Fear not, little flock; for it is your Father's good pleasure to give you the kingdom.
NO
BE-FEARING be-you-fearing ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
LITTLE
flocklet
that
WELL-SEEMS it-delights
THE
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
dounai umin didOmi humeis

vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) TO-GIVE of-ye
to-YOU(p) ye
THE
KINGdom
12:33 pwlhsate ta
pOleO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
uparconta huparchO
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai dote kai didOmi

elehmosunhn poihsate eleEmosunE poieO

n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl
SELL-YE sell-ye !
THE
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
alms
make make-ye ! tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
eautois ballantia mh heautou ballantion mE

pf 3 Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg
palaioumena qhsauron palaioO thEsauros

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n n_ Acc Sg m
anekleipton en anekleiptos en
a_ Acc Sg m Prep
33 Sell that ye have, and give alms; provide yourselves bags which wax not old, a treasure in the heavens that faileth not, where no thief approacheth, neither moth corrupteth.
to-selves yourselves
purses
NO
beING-OLDED aging
PLACED-INTO-MORROW UN-OUT-LACKed treasure not-default eggizei eggizO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IN
THE
ouranois opou ouranos hopou

n_ Dat Pl m Adv
klepths ouk kleptEs ou

oude oude
Adv
shs sEs
n_ Nom Sg m
diafqeirei diaphtheirO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
heavens
WHICH-where thief wheree gar estin gar eimi

NOT
IS-NEARING
NOT-YET MOTH neither umwn humeis
IS-THRU-CORRUPTING is-causing-decay ekei kai h ekei kai ho

34 For where your treasure is, there will your heart be also.
12:34 opou
hopou
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qhsauros thEsauros
n_ Nom Sg m
pp 2 Gen Pl
WHICH-where for wherever kardia kardia

n_ Nom Sg f
IS
THE
PLACED-INTO-MORROW OF-YOU(p) there treasure of-ye
AND also
THE
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
HEART
OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE of-ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
12:35 estwsan
eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
osfues periezwsmenai osphus perizOnnumi

n_ Nom Pl f vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
lucnoi luchnos
n_ Nom Pl m
LET-BE let-them-be ! kaiomenoi kaiO

vp Pres Pas Nom Pl f
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
35 Let your loins be girded about, and [your] lights burning;
LOINS
HAVING-been-ABOUT-GIRDED AND having-been-girded-about
THE
LAMPS
BURNING
12:36 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
omoioi homoios
a_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpois prosdecomenois anthrOpos prosdechomai

n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
pote pote
Part Int
AND
YOU(p) ye
LIKE
to-humans humans twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
TOWARD-RECEIVING anticipating gamwn gamos

n_ Gen Pl m
THE
master lord
OF-selves ?-when of-themselves when ?
analush analuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ina hina
Conj
elqontos erchomai
kai krousantos kai krouO

36 And ye yourselves like unto men that wait for their lord, when he will return from the wedding; that when he cometh and knocketh, they may open unto him immediately.
he-SHOULD-BE-UP-LOOSING OUT OF-THE he-should-be-breaking-loose euqews anoixwsin eutheOs anoigO

Adv vs Aor Act 3 Pl
MARRIAGES THAT OF-COMING wedding-festivities autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
KNOCKing
immediately
THEY-SHOULD-BE-UP-OPENING to-him they-should-be-opening
AV
Luke 12
12:37 makarioi oi
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
ekeinoi ous ekeinos hos

pd Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl m
elqwn erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
HAPPY happy-are eurhsei heuriskO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
SLAVES
those
WHOM
COMING
THE
master Lord kai kai

Conj
grhgorountas amhn legw grEgoreO amEn legO

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti perizwsetai hoti perizOnnumi

Conj vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
37 Blessed [are] those servants, whom the lord when he cometh shall find watching: verily I say unto you, that he shall gird himself, and make them to sit down to meat, and will come forth and serve them.
SHALL-BE-FINDING watchING
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
he-SHALL-BE-ABOUT-GIRDING AND he-shall-be-girding-about-himself autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
anaklinei anaklinO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autous kai parelqwn autos kai parerchomai

pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
diakonhsei diakoneO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-reCLINING them shall-be-causing-to-recline
AND
BESIDE-COMING coming-by
he-SHALL-BE-THRU-SERVING to-them shall-be-serving them en en

Prep
12:38 kan
kan
Cond Con
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
deutera kan deuteros kan

a_ Dat Sg f Cond Con
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
AND-[IF]-EVER IN and-if-ever elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
second
AND-[IF]-EVER IN and-if-ever
THE
third
GUARD watch
38 And if he shall come in the second watch, or come in the third watch, and find [them] so, blessed are those servants.
kai eurh kai heuriskO

outws makarioi eisin houtOs makarios eimi

Adv a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ekeinoi ekeinos
pd Nom Pl m
he-MAY-BE-COMING AND
MAY-BE-FINDING thus may-be-finding-them oti ei hoti ei

Conj Cond
HAPPY
ARE
those those-ones oikodespoths oikodespotEs

n_ Nom Sg m
39 And this know, that if the goodman of the house had known what hour the thief would come, he would have watched, and not have suffered his house to be broken through.
12:39 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
ginwskete ginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
this
YET YE-ARE-KNOWING that
IF
HAD-PERCEIVED THE were-aware

WH
HOME-OWNer householder
WH WH WH
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
klepths ercetai kleptEs erchomai

egrhgorhsen an kai ouk
? to-THE-WHICH HOUR to-which ?

NA
THE
thief
IS-COMING
ouk ou
Part Neg
NA
an an
Part
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
diorucqhnai diorussO
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
NOT
EVER
he-FROM-LETS TO-BE-THRU-EXCAVATED THE he-lets to-be-burrowed ginesqe ginomai

HOME house wra hOra

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-him
12:40 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
etoimoi oti h hetoimos hoti hos

a_ Nom Pl m Conj pr Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
dokeite dokeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
AND also o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
40 Be ye therefore ready also: for the Son of man cometh at an hour when ye think not.
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
READY
that
to-WHICH HOUR
NOT
YE-ARE-SEEMING ye-are-supposing
anqrwpou ercetai anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
IS-COMING
12:41 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parabolhn parabolE
n_ Acc Sg f
41 . Then Peter said unto him, Lord, speakest thou this parable unto us, or even to all?
said
YET THE
Peter
Master ! Lord ! pantas pas

a_ Acc Pl m
TOWARD US
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
tauthn legeis houtos legO

pd Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg
h E
Part
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
this
YOU-ARE-sayING OR
AND also
TOWARD ALL
12:42 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ara ara
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
THE
Master Lord
ANY who ?
CONSEQUENTLY IS
THE
BELIEVing faithful epi epi

Prep
oikonomos o oikonomos ho
fronimos on phronimos hos

a_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
42 And the Lord said, Who then is that faithful and wise steward, whom [his] lord shall make ruler over his household, to give [them their] portion of meat in due season?
HOME-LAWer administrator ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
DISPOSED prudent
WHOM
SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING THE shall-be-constituting didonai didOmi

vn Pres Act
master lord
ON onover
qerapeias autou therapeia autos

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sitometrion sitometrion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
cure attendance
OF-him
OF-THE
TO-BE-GIVING IN to-be-giving-them
SEASON
THE
GRAIN-MEASURE measure-of-grain
AV
Luke 12
12:43 makarios o
makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
elqwn erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
43 Blessed [is] that servant, whom his lord when he cometh shall find so doing.
HAPPY happy-is autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
SLAVE
that
WHOM
COMING
THE
master lord
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
poiounta poieO
outws houtOs
Adv
OF-him
SHALL-BE-FINDING DOING
thus
12:44 alhqws legw

alEthOs
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti epi hoti epi

Conj Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
uparcousin autou huparchO autos

vp Pres Act Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m
TRUly
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
44 Of a truth I say unto you, that he will make him ruler over all that he hath.
that
ON ALL onover
THE
OF-him
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING him he-shall-be-constituting
12:45 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-sayING THE
SLAVE
that
IN
THE
HEART
OF-him
cronizei chronizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
kai arxhtai kai archO

Conj vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
tuptein tuptO
vn Pres Act
45 But and if that servant say in his heart, My lord delayeth his coming; and shall begin to beat the menservants and maidens, and to eat and drink, and to be drunken;
IS-delayING
THE
master lord
OF-ME
TO-BE-COMING
AND
SHOULD-BE-beginnING TO-BE-BEATING he-should-be-beginning kai pinein kai pinO

Conj vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
paidas kai tas pais kai ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl f
paidiskas esqiein paidiskE esthiO

n_ Acc Pl f vn Pres Act
te te
Part
kai kai
Conj
THE
boys
AND
THE
maids
TO-BE-EATING BESIDES AND
TO-BE-DRINKING AND
mequskesqai methuskO
vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-beING-DRUNK
12:46 hxei
hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
doulou ekeinou en doulos ekeinos en

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
master lord kai en kai en

Conj Prep
OF-THE
SLAVE
that
IN
DAY
to-WHICH
ou ou
Part Neg
prosdoka prosdokaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
ginwskei ginOskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
46 The lord of that servant will come in a day when he looketh not for [him], and at an hour when he is not aware, and will cut him in sunder, and will appoint him his portion with the unbelievers.
NOT
he-IS-TOWARD-SEEMING AND he-is-hoping auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IN
HOUR
to-WHICH NOT
he-IS-KNOWING AND
dicotomhsei dichotomeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
apistwn apistos
a_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-TWO-CUTTING him shall-be-cutting-asunder qhsei tithEmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
AND
THE
PART
OF-him
WITH
THE
ones-UN-BELIEVing unfaithful-ones
SHALL-BE-PLACING shall-be-appointing
12:47 ekeinos de
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gnous ginOskO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

that
YET THE
SLAVE
THE
one-KNOWING one-knowing h E
Part
THE
WILL
OF-THE
47 And that servant, which knew his lord's will, and prepared not [himself], neither did according to his will, shall be beaten with many [stripes].
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
etoimasas hetoimazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Acc Sg n
master lord autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
AND
NO
making-READY
OR
DOing
TOWARD THE
WILL
darhsetai derO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
pollas polus
a_ Acc Pl f
OF-him
SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED MANY shall-be-being-lashed many-ones
AV
Luke 12
12:48 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
gnous ginOskO
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
axia axios
a_ Acc Pl n
plhgwn plEgE
n_ Gen Pl f
THE the-one darhsetai derO

vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
YET NO
one-KNOWING knowing de de
Conj
DOing
YET WORTHY deserving edoqh didOmi

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-BLOWS blows polu polus

a_ Nom Sg n
oligas panti oligos pas

a_ Acc Pl f a_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
SHALL-BE-beING-SKINNED FEW shall-be-being-lashed few-ones zhthqhsetai zEteO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
to-EVERY YET to-WHOM to-everyone autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
WAS-GIVEN
MANY much
MANY much polu polus

a_ Acc Sg n
48 But he that knew not, and did commit things worthy of stripes, shall be beaten with few [stripes]. For unto whomsoever much is given, of him shall be much required: and to whom men have committed much, of him they will ask the more.
par para
Prep
kai w kai hos

Conj pr Dat Sg m
pareqento paratithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
perissoteron perissos
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
SHALL-BE-BEING-SOUGHT BESIDE OF-him him aithsousin aiteO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
AND
to-WHOM
THEY-BESIDE-PLACED MANY they-committed much
more-excessive more-excessively
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-SHALL-BE-REQUESTING him they-shall-be-requesting-of
12:49 pur
pur
n_ Acc Sg n
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
balein ballO
vn 2Aor Act
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
49 I am come to send fire on the earth; and what will I, if it be already kindled?
FIRE
I-CAME
TO-BE-CASTING ON
THE
LAND earth
AND
ANY what ?
I-AM-WILLING IF
hdh EdE
Adv
anhfqh anaptO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ALREADY it-WAS-UP-TOUCHED it-was-kindled
12:50 baptisma de
baptisma
n_ Acc Sg n
de
Conj
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
baptisqhnai kai pws sunecomai baptizO kai pOs sunechO

vn Aor Pas Conj Adv vi Pres Pas 1 Sg

DIPism baptism telesqh teleO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
YET I-AM-HAVING
TO-BE-DIPizED to-be-baptized-with
AND
how
I-AM-beING-pressED TILL
50 But I have a baptism to be baptized with; and how am I straitened till it be accomplished!
it-SHOULD-BE-BEING-FINISHED it-should-be-being-accomplished
12:51 dokeite
dokeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eirhnhn paregenomhn hoti eirEnE paraginomai

Conj n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
dounai en didOmi en
vn 2Aor Act Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
YE-ARE-SEEMING that ye-are-supposing legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
PEACE
I-BESIDE-BECAME TO-GIVE I-came-along
IN
THE
LAND earth
NOT(emph.)
51 Suppose ye that I am come to give peace on earth? I tell you, Nay; but rather division:
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
all h alla E
Conj Part
diamerismon diamerismos
n_ Acc Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
but
OR THRU-PARTing rather division tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
12:52 esontai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
gar apo gar apo

Conj Prep
nun pente en nun pente en

Adv ni numeral Prep
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
diamemerismenoi diamerizO
SHALL-BE for there-shall-be treis treis

n_ Nom Pl m
FROM THE
NOW FIVE
IN
ONE
HOME
HAVING-been-THRU-PARTED having-been-divided
52 For from henceforth there shall be five in one house divided, three against two, and two against three.
epi dusin epi duo

Prep n_ Dat Pl m
kai duo kai duo

Conj ni numeral
epi trisin epi treis

Prep n_ Dat Pl m
THREE
ON
TWO
AND
TWO
ON
THREE
12:53 diamerisqhsontai
diamerizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
epi uiw epi huios

Prep n_ Dat Sg m
kai uios kai huios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
epi patri epi patEr

Prep n_ Dat Sg m
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-THRU-PARTED FATHER shall-be-being-divided epi epi

Prep
NA
ON
SON
AND
SON
ON
FATHER
MOTHER
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qugatera kai qugathr epi thn thugatEr kai thugatEr epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera penqera mEtEr penthera

epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ON
THE
DAUGHTER
AND
DAUGHTER
ON
THE
MOTHER
mother-IN-LAW ON
THE
53 The father shall be divided against the son, and the son against the father; the mother against the daughter, and the daughter against the mother; the mother in law against her daughter in law, and the daughter in law against her mother in law.
numfhn numphE
n_ Acc Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
kai numfh kai numphE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
penqeran penthera
n_ Acc Sg f
BRIDE OF-her daughter-in-law
AND
BRIDE ON daughter-in-law
THE
mother-IN-LAW
AV
Luke 12
12:54 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
oclois otan ochlos hotan

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
NA
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
He-said
YET AND also
to-THE
THRONGS when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING whenever oti ombros hoti ombros

Conj
THE
54 . And he said also to the people, When ye see a cloud rise out of the west, straightway ye say, There cometh a shower; and so it is.
nefelhn anatellousan epi dusmwn euqews legete nephelE anatellO epi dusmE eutheOs legO
n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Pl f Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ercetai erchomai
n_ Nom Sg m
CLOUD
UP-risING rising
ON
west
immediately
YE-ARE-sayING that
rainstorm
IS-COMING

outws houtOs
Adv
AND
it-IS-BECOMING it-is-occurring
thus
12:55 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
noton notos
n_ Acc Sg m
pneonta pneO
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti kauswn hoti kausOn

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
55 And when [ye see] the south wind blow, ye say, There will be heat; and it cometh to pass.
AND
when-EVER SOUTH whenever south-wind
BLOWING
YE-ARE-sayING that
BURNing SHALL-BE AND scorching-heat there-shall-be
ginetai ginomai
it-IS-BECOMING it-is-occurring
12:56 upokritai to
hupokritEs
n_ Voc Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon ths prosOpon ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
hypocrites hypocrites ! oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
THE
face aspect
OF-THE
LAND earth de de
Conj
AND
OF-THE
heaven sky oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
56 [Ye] hypocrites, ye can discern the face of the sky and of the earth; but how is it that ye do not discern this time?
dokimazein ton dokimazO ho

vn Pres Act t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton pws ouk houtos pOs ou

pd Acc Sg m Adv Int Part Neg
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED TO-BE-testING ye-are-aware dokimazein dokimazO

vn Pres Act
THE
SEASON era
YET this
how how ?
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ye-are-aware
TO-BE-testING
12:57 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
kai af kai apo

Conj Prep
eautwn ou heautou ou
pf 3 Gen Pl m Part Neg
krinete krinO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dikaion dikaios
a_ Acc Sg n
57 Yea, and why even of yourselves judge ye not what is right?
ANY why ?
YET AND FROM selves even yourselves
NOT
YE-ARE-JUDGING THE ye-are-deciding antidikou antidikos

n_ Gen Sg m
JUST
12:58 ws gar upageis

hOs
Adv
gar
Conj
hupagO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ep epi
Prep
arconta en archOn en
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
AS
for
YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING WITH you-are-going-away dos didOmi

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
INSTEAD-JUSTer OF-YOU plaintiff

WH
ON
chief magistrate
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
ergasian aphllacqai ergasia apallassO

n_ Acc Sg f vn Perf Pas
ap
NA
ap apo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
WAY
BE-GIVING be-you-giving ! katasurh katasurO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ACTion
TO-BE-FROM-CHANGED to-be-cleared se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
FROM
him
58 When thou goest with thine adversary to the magistrate, [as thou art] in the way, give diligence that thou mayest be delivered from him; lest he hale thee to the judge, and the judge deliver thee to the officer, and the officer cast thee into prison.
mhpote mEpote
Adv
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
krithn kritEs
n_ Acc Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kriths kritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
NO-?-when he-MAY-BE-DOWN-DRAGGING YOU lest-at-some-time he-may-be-dragging se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
TOWARD THE
JUDGer judge
AND
THE
JUDGer judge
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
praktori kai o praktOr kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
praktwr se praktOr su
n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING to-THE shall-be-giving-over eis eis

Prep
PRACTISer sheriff
AND
THE
PRACTISer sheriff
YOU
balei ballO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE-CASTING INTO GUARD-house jail
12:59 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
exelqhs exerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekeiqen ews kai to ekeithen heOs kai ho

Adv Conj Conj t_ Acc Sg n
59 I tell thee, thou shalt not depart thence, till thou hast paid the very last mite.
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
NOT
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-OUT-COMING thence you-may-be-coming-out
TILL
AND THE even
AV
Luke 12 - Luke 13
escaton lepton apodws eschatos lepton apodidOmi

a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
LAST
lepton mite
YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING you-may-be-paying
AV
Luke 13
13:1 parhsan
pareimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
apaggellontes autw apaggellO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
WERE-BESIDE-BEING YET ANY there-were-present some peri peri

Prep
IN
SAME
THE
SEASON occasion
FROM-MESSAGING reporting
to-Him
. There were present at that season some that told him of the Galilaeans, whose blood Pilate had mingled with their sacrifices.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
galilaiwn wn galilaios hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
pilatos emixen pilatos mignumi

meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
ABOUT THE concerning qusiwn thusia

n_ Gen Pl f
GALILEANS
OF-WHOM THE
BLOOD
PILATE
MIXES
WITH
THE
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
SACRIFICES OF-them
13:2 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois dokeite autos dokeO

pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
galilaioi outoi galilaios houtos

n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m
AND
answerING
He-said
to-them
YE-ARE-SEEMING that ye-are-supposing
THE
GALILEANS
these
amartwloi para hamartOlos para

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
pantas tous pas ho

galilaious egenonto galilaios ginomai

n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
And Jesus answering said unto them, Suppose ye that these Galilaeans were sinners above all the Galilaeans, because they suffered such things?
missers sinners peponqasin paschO

vi 2Perf Act 3 Pl
BESIDE ALL beyond
THE
GALILEANS
BECAME
that these seeing-that these-things
THEY-HAVE-EMOTIONED they-have-suffered
13:3 ouci
ouchi
Part Neg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
all ean alla ean

Conj Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
metanohte metanoeO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
omoiws homoiOs
Adv
NOT(emph.) I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
I tell you, Nay: but, except ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish.
but
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-after-MINDING ALL ye-may-be-repenting
LIKE-AS likewise
apoleisqe apollumi
vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED ye-shall-be-perishing
13:4 h
E
Part
ekeinoi oi ekeinos ho
pd Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
dekaoktw ef deka+ epi

ni numeral Prep
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
purgos purgos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OR
those
THE
TEN-EIGHT eighteen
ON
WHOM
FALLS
THE
TOWER
IN
THE
Or those eighteen, upon whom the tower in Siloam fell, and slew them, think ye that they were sinners above all men that dwelt in Jerusalem?
silwam kai apekteinen autous dokeite silOam kai apokteinO autos dokeO
ni proper Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl

Conj pp Nom Pl m
ofeiletai egenonto opheiletEs ginomai

n_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
SILOAM
AND
FROM-KILLS kills
them
YE-ARE-SEEMING that ye-are-supposing
they
OWErs debtors
BECAME
para para
Prep
pantas tous pas ho

anqrwpous tous anthrOpos ho

katoikountas ierousalhm katoikeO ierosoluma

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m ni proper
BESIDE ALL beyond
THE
humans
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING JERUSALEM ones-dwelling mh mE

Part Neg
WH
13:5 ouci
ouchi
Part Neg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
all ean alla ean

Conj Cond
metanohshte
NA
metanohte metanoeO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
NOT(emph.) I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
I tell you, Nay: but, except ye repent, ye shall all likewise perish.
but
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-after-MINDING ye-may-be-repenting
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
wsautws apoleisqe hOsautOs apollumi

Adv vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
ALL
AS-SAME-AS similarly de de
Conj
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED ye-shall-be-perishing tauthn thn houtos ho

13:6 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
parabolhn sukhn parabolE sukE

eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
pefuteumenhn phuteuO
He-said he-told en en
Prep
YET this
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable kai hlqen kai erchomai

FIG-tree
HAD
ANY certain-man karpon karpos

n_ Acc Sg m
HAVING-been-plantED
. He spake also this parable; A certain [man] had a fig tree planted in his vineyard; and he came and sought fruit thereon, and found none.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ampelwni autou ampelOn autos

zhtwn zEteO
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
IN
THE
VINEyard
OF-him
AND
he-CAME
SEEKING
FRUIT
IN
her herit
AND
AV
Luke 13
ouc ou
Part Neg
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT
he-FOUND
13:7 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ampelourgon ampelourgos
a_ Acc Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tria treis
n_ Acc Pl n
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
af apo
Prep
he-said
YET TOWARD THE
GRAPE-VINE-ACTer BE-PERCEIVING THREE vineyardist lo ! karpon karpos

n_ Acc Sg m
YEARS
FROM
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
ercomai erchomai
zhtwn zEteO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sukh sukE
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
Then said he unto the dresser of his vineyard, Behold, these three years I come seeking fruit on this fig tree, and find none: cut it down; why cumbereth it the ground?
WHICH
I-AM-COMING
SEEKING
NA
FRUIT
IN
THE
FIG-tree
this
AND
NOT
euriskw heuriskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ekkoyon ekkoptO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
I-AM-FINDING OUT-STRIKE hew-down-you ! katargei katargeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEN
her herit
THAT ANY why ?
AND also
THE
LAND
IS-DOWN-UN-ACTING it-is-wasting
13:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE-one the touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
YET answerING
IS-sayING he-is-saying ews otou heOs hostis

to-him
master ! Lord !
FROM-LET leave-you ! peri peri

Prep
her herit kai kai

Conj
AND also
And he answering said unto him, Lord, let it alone this year also, till I shall dig about it, and dung [it]:
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
etos etos
n_ Acc Sg n
skayw skaptO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
this
THE
YEAR
TILL
OF-WHICH-ANY I-SHALL-BE-DIGGING ABOUT her herit which-any
AND
balw ballO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kopria kopria
n_ Acc Pl n
I-SHOULD-BE-CASTING MANURE
13:9 kan
kan
Cond Con
men men
Part
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mellon mellO
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
And if it bear fruit, [well]: and if not, [then] after that thou shalt cut it down.
AND-[IF]-EVER INDEED it-SHOULD-BE-DOING FRUIT and-if-ever it-should-be-producing ge ge

Part
INTO THE
beING-ABOUT impending-year
IF
YET NO
ekkoyeis ekkoptO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
SURELY YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-STRIKING her herit you-shall-be-hewing-down
13:10 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
didaskwn didaskO
en en
Prep
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
sunagwgwn sunagOgE
n_ Gen Pl f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sabbasin sabbaton
n_ Dat Pl n
10 . And he was teaching in one of the synagogues on the sabbath.
He-WAS
YET TEACHING
IN
ONE
OF-THE
TOGETHER-LEADS IN synagogues asqeneias astheneia

n_ Gen Sg f
THE
SABBATHS
13:11 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
pneuma ecousa pneuma echO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
dekaoktw kai deka+ kai

ni numeral Conj
AND
BE-PERCEIVING WOMAN lo ! sugkuptousa sugkuptO

spirit
HAVING
OF-UN-FIRMness YEARS of-infirmity anakuyai eis anakuptO eis

vn Aor Act Prep
TEN-EIGHT eighteen to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
11 And, behold, there was a woman which had a spirit of infirmity eighteen years, and was bowed together, and could in no wise lift up [herself].
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
dunamenh dunamai
she-WAS
TOGETHER-BENDING AND being-bent-together
NO
beING-ABLE
TO-UP-BEND to-unbend
INTO THE
panteles pantelEs
a_ Acc Sg n
EVERY-FINISH uttermost
13:12 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
prosefwnhsen kai eipen prosphOneO kai legO

auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
PERCEIVING
YET her
THE
JESUS
TOWARD-SOUNDS shouts-to
AND
said
to-her
12 And when Jesus saw her, he called [her to him], and said unto her, Woman, thou art loosed from thine infirmity.
AV
Luke 13
gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
apolelusai apoluO
vi Perf Pas 2 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
asqeneias sou astheneia su

WOMAN !
YOU-HAVE-been-FROM-LOOSED OF-THE you-have-been-released auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
UN-FIRMness infirmity
OF-YOU
13:13 kai epeqhken

kai
Conj
epitithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras kai paracrhma anwrqwqh cheir kai parachrEma anorthoO

n_ Acc Pl f Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
He-ON-PLACES to-her he-places-on her qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
HANDS
AND
instantly
she-WAS-UP-ERECTED AND she-was-made-erect-again
13 And he laid [his] hands on her: and immediately she was made straight, and glorified God.
edoxazen ton doxazO ho

vi impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
esteemizED she-glorified
THE
God
13:14 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arcisunagwgos archisunagOgos
n_ Nom Sg m
aganaktwn aganakteO
oti tw hoti ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
sabbatw sabbaton
n_ Dat Sg n
answerING
YET THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD resentING chief-of-the-synagogue elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
that
to-THE
SABBATH
eqerapeusen o therapeuO ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti ex hoti hex

Conj ni numeral
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
curES
THE
JESUS
he-said said en en
Prep
to-THE
THRONG
that
SIX
DAYS
ARE there-are
14 And the ruler of the synagogue answered with indignation, because that Jesus had healed on the sabbath day, and said unto the people, There are six days in which men ought to work: in them therefore come and be healed, and not on the sabbath day.
en en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
ergazesqai ergazomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
autais oun autos oun

pp Dat Pl f Conj
ercomenoi erchomai
qerapeuesqe therapeuO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
IN
WHICH
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-workING
IN
them
THEN COMING
BE-YE-beING-curED be-ye-being-cured !
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou sabbaton
n_ Gen Sg n
AND
NO
to-THE
DAY
OF-THE
SABBATH
13:15 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

upokritai ekastos hupokritEs hekastos

n_ Voc Pl m a_ Nom Sg m
answerED
YET to-him him sabbatw ou sabbaton ou

n_ Dat Sg n
THE
Master Lord luei luO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
said
hypocrites hypocrites ! autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
EACH
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
boun bous
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
onon onos
n_ Acc Sg m
15 The Lord then answered him, and said, [Thou] hypocrite, doth not each one of you on the sabbath loose his ox or [his] ass from the stall, and lead [him] away to watering?
Part Neg
OF-YOU(p) to-THE of-ye apo apo

Prep
SABBATH
NOT
WH
IS-LOOSING he-is-loosing
NA
THE
OX
OF-him
OR
THE
ASS
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fatnhs kai phatnE kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
apagwn
apagagwn apagO
potizei potizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
FROM THE
MANGER
AND
FROM-LEADING leading-away-it ousan eimi

vp Pres vxx Acc Sg f
it-IS-DRINKizING is-giving-to-drink-it hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
13:16 tauthn de
houtos
pd Acc Sg f
de
Conj
qugatera abraam thugatEr abraam

edhsen deO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
this this-woman satanas satanas

n_ Nom Sg m
YET DAUGHTER
of-ABRAHAM BEING of-Abraham deka deka

ni numeral
WHOM
BINDS
THE
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai oktw kai oktO

Conj ni numeral
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
luqhnai luO
vn Aor Pas
16 And ought not this woman, being a daughter of Abraham, whom Satan hath bound, lo, these eighteen years, be loosed from this bond on the sabbath day?
SATAN (Heb. adversary) BE-PERCEIVING TEN Satan lo ! apo apo

Prep
AND
EIGHT
YEARS
NOT
it-WAS-BINDING TO-BE-LOOSED she-must
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
desmou desmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou th houtos ho
pd Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou sabbaton
n_ Gen Sg n
FROM THE
BOND
this
to-THE
DAY
OF-THE
SABBATH
13:17 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
legontos legO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kathscunonto pantes kataischunO pas

vi impf Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
these OF-sayING these-things autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-Him
were-DOWN-VILED were-mortified o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ALL
THE
17 And when he had said these things, all his adversaries were ashamed: and all the people rejoiced for all the glorious things that were done by him.
antikeimenoi antikeimai
kai pas kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
ecairen chairO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
epi pasin epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ones-opposING ones-opposing
to-Him him
AND
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
JOYED rejoiced
ON
ALL
THE
AV
Luke 13
endoxois tois endoxos ho

a_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl n
ginomenois ginomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl n
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
IN-esteemeds THE glorious-things
BECOMING
by
Him
13:18 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
omoia homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
18 . Then said he, Unto what is the kingdom of God like? and whereunto shall I resemble it?
He-said
THEN to-ANY to-what ?
LIKE
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
omoiwsw homoioO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
to-ANY to-what ?
I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING her herit estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
13:19 omoia
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
kokkw kokkos
n_ Dat Sg m
sinapews on sinapi hos

labwn lambanO
anqrwpos ebalen anthrOpos ballO

LIKE
it-IS
to-KERNEL OF-MUSTARD
WHICH
GETTING
human
CASTS
eis eis
Prep
khpon kEpos
n_ Acc Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
kai huxhsen kai auxanO


eis eis
Prep
dendron kai ta dendron kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Pl n
19 It is like a grain of mustard seed, which a man took, and cast into his garden; and it grew, and waxed a great tree; and the fowls of the air lodged in the branches of it.
INTO GARDEN
OF-self of-selfhim tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
it-GROWS
AND
BECAME
INTO TREE
AND
THE
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
ouranou kateskhnwsen en ouranos kataskEnoO en

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kladois autou klados autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg n
heaven
DOWN-BOOTHS roosts tini tis

pi Dat Sg n
IN THE among thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
boughs
OF-it
13:20 kai palin eipen

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
omoiwsw homoioO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
20 And again he said, Whereunto shall I liken the kingdom of God?
AND
AGAIN
He-said
to-ANY to-what ? zumh zumE

n_ Dat Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-LIKenING THE
KINGdom
WH
OF-THE
God
13:21 omoia
homoios
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
labousa lambanO
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ekruyen
LIKE
NA
it-IS
to-FERMENT WHICH to-leaven eis eis

Prep
GETTING
WOMAN
21 It is like leaven, which a woman took and hid in three measures of meal, till the whole was leavened.
enekruyen egkruptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
aleurou sata aleuron saton

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Pl n
tria treis
n_ Acc Pl n
ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
ezumwqh zumoO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg n
IN-HIDES hides-in
INTO OF-MEAL
SATONS seahs
THREE
TILL
OF-WHICH WAS-FERMENTED WHOLE which was-leavened didaskwn didaskO

13:22 kai dieporeueto

kai
Conj
diaporeuomai
kata kata
Prep
poleis kai kwmas polis kai kOmE

kai poreian kai poreia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AND
He-THRU-WENT he-went-through eis eis

Prep
according-to cities
AND
VILLAGES TEACHING
AND
GOing
22 And he went through the cities and villages, teaching, and journeying toward Jerusalem.
poioumenos poieO
n_ Acc Sg f
DOING making
INTO JERUSALEM
13:23 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
oligoi oligos
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
swzomenoi sOzO
23 . Then said one unto him, Lord, are there few that be saved? And he said unto them,
said
YET ANY someone de de

Conj
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
IF
FEW
THE
ones-beING-SAVED ones-being-saved
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
THE
YET He-said
TOWARD them
13:24 agwnizesqe
agOnizomai
vn 2Aor Act
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
stenhs quras stenos thura


Conj a_ Nom Pl m
BE-CONTENDING be-ye-struggling ! legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
TO-BE-INTO-COMING THRU THE to-be-entering through zhthsousin zEteO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
CRAMPED DOOR
that
MANY
24 Strive to enter in at the strait gate: for many, I say unto you, will seek to enter in, and shall not be able.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
vn 2Aor Act
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
iscusousin ischuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
SHALL-BE-SEEKING TO-BE-INTO-COMING AND to-be-entering
NOT
THEY-SHALL-BE-beING-STRONG shall-be-being-strong
AV
Luke 13
13:25 af
apo
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
an an
Part
egerqh egeirO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikodespoths kai oikodespotEs kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
FROM WHICH
EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ROUSED THE
HOME-OWNer householder exw exO

Adv
AND
apokleish apokleiO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
kai arxhsqe kai archO

Conj vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
estanai histEmi
vn Perf Act
kai kai
Conj
25 When once the master of the house is risen up, and hath shut to the door, and ye begin to stand without, and to knock at the door, saying, Lord, Lord, open unto us; and he shall answer and say unto you, I know you not whence ye are:
SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOCKING THE should-be-latching krouein krouO

vn Pres Act
DOOR
AND
YE-SHOULD-BE-beginnING OUT TO-HAVE-STOOD AND outside to-stand kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
legontes legO
anoixon anoigO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai apokriqeis kai apokrinomai

TO-BE-KNOCKING THE
DOOR
sayING
Master ! Lord ! umas humeis
UP-OPEN open-you ! poqen pothen

Adv Int
to-US
AND
answerING
erei ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
pp 2 Acc Pl
He-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YOU(p) I-am-acquainted-with ye legein legO

vn Pres Act
?-WHICH-PLACE YE-ARE whence ? kai epiomen kai pinO

13:26 tote arxesqe

tote
Adv
archO
vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
efagomen enwpion sou esthiO enOpion su

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
then
SHOULD-YE-BE-beginnING TO-BE-sayING WE-ATE ye-should-be-beginning plateiais hmwn plateia hemeis

IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-YOU you
AND
WE-DRANK
AND
26 Then shall ye begin to say, We have eaten and drunk in thy presence, and thou hast taught in our streets.
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
edidaxas didaskO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
IN
THE
BROADS squares
OF-US
YOU-TEACH
NA
13:27 kai erei

kai
Conj
ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
He-SHALL-BE-declarING sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye ap apo

Prep
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-acquainted-with pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
YOU(p) ye
27 But he shall say, I tell you, I know you not whence ye are; depart from me, all [ye] workers of iniquity.
poqen pothen
Adv Int
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
aposthte aphistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ergatai adikias ergatEs adikia

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg f
?-WHICH-PLACE YE-ARE whence ?
BE-YE-FROM-STANDING FROM ME be-ye-withdrawing ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
ALL
ACTers workers
OF-UN-JUSTness of-injustice odontwn odous

n_ Gen Pl m
28 There shall be weeping and gnashing of teeth, when ye shall see Abraham, and Isaac, and Jacob, and all the prophets, in the kingdom of God, and you [yourselves] thrust out.
13:28 ekei estai

ekei
Adv
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg


there
SHALL-BE
THE
LAMENTing lamentation abraam abraam

ni proper
AND
THE
GNASHing
OF-THE
TEETH
otan hotan
Conj
oyhsqe optomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
kai isaak kai iakwb kai pantas tous kai isaak kai iakOb kai pas ho
Conj ni proper Conj ni proper Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
when-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-VIEWING ABRAHAM AND whenever ye-should-be-seeing profhtas prophEtEs

n_ Acc Pl m
ISAAC
AND
JACOB
AND
ALL
THE
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
de de
Conj
ekballomenous exw ekballO exO

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Adv
BEFORE-AVERers IN prophets
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
YOU(p) ye
YET beING-OUT-CAST being-cast-out borra borrhas

n_ Gen Sg m
OUT outside kai kai

Conj
29 And they shall come from the east, and [from] the west, and from the north, and [from] the south, and shall sit down in the kingdom of God.
13:29 kai hxousin

kai
Conj
hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
anatolwn kai dusmwn kai apo anatolE kai dusmE kai apo
n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl f Conj Prep
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-ARRIVING FROM risings ( east ) east kai anakliqhsontai kai anaklinO

AND
west
AND
FROM NORTH
AND
notou notos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
SOUTH
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-reCLINED IN they-shall-be-being-made-to-recline eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
13:30 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
escatoi oi eschatos hos

a_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m

kai eisin kai eimi

30 And, behold, there are last which shall be first, and there are first which shall be last.
AND
BE-PERCEIVING THEY-ARE lo ! oi hos

pr Nom Pl m
LAST-ones last-ones
WHO
SHALL-BE
BEFORE-most-ones AND first-ones
THEY-ARE
prwtoi prOtos
a_ Nom Pl m
esontai escatoi eimi eschatos

BEFORE-most-ones WHO first-ones
SHALL-BE
LAST-ones last-ones
AV
Luke 13 - Luke 14
13:31 en
en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
proshlqan proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
farisaioi legontes pharisaios legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
IN
SAME
THE
HOUR
TOWARD-COME ANY approached some
PHARISEES
sayING
to-Him
31 . The same day there came certain of the Pharisees, saying unto him, Get thee out, and depart hence: for Herod will kill thee.
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg

enteuqen oti hrwdhs enteuthen hoti hErOdEs

Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
BE-OUT-COMING AND be-you-coming-out ! apokteinai apokteinO

vn Aor Act
hence
that
HEROD
IS-WILLING
YOU
13:32 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

eipate legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alwpeki tauth alOpEx houtos

n_ Dat Sg f pd Dat Sg f
AND
He-said
to-them
BEING-GONE
say say-ye !
to-THE
JACKAL
this
32 And he said unto them, Go ye, and tell that fox, Behold, I cast out devils, and I do cures to day and to morrow, and the third [day] I shall be perfected.
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekballw ekballO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
daimonia kai iaseis apotelw daimonion kai iasis apoteleO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Adv Conj Adv
BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-OUT-CASTING demons lo ! I-am-casting-out kai th kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg f
AND
HEALings I-AM-FROM-FINISHING toDAY I-am-performing
AND
MORROW tomorrow
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
teleioumai teleioO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
AND
to-THE
third third-day dei deO
I-AM-beING-maturED I-am-being-perfected me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
13:33 plhn
plEn
Adv

Adv Conj Adv
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
ecomenh echO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
MOREly it-IS-BINDING moreover poreuesqai oti ouk poreuomai hoti ou

vn Pres midD/pasD Conj Part Neg
ME
toDAY
AND
MORROW AND tomorrow
to-THE
HAVING one-having exw exO

Adv
33 Nevertheless I must walk to day, and to morrow, and the [day] following: for it cannot be that a prophet perish out of Jerusalem.
endecetai endechomai
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
apolesqai apollumi
vn 2Aor Mid
ni proper
TO-BE-GOING
that
NOT
it-IS-IN-RECEIVING it-is-being-credible
BEFORE-AVERer TO-BE-beING-destroyED OUT of-JERUSALEM prophet to-be-perishing outside of-Jerusalem apokteinousa tous apokteinO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl m
13:34 ierousalhm ierousalhm h

ierosoluma
ni proper
ierosoluma
ni proper
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
JERUSALEM
JERUSALEM
THE
one-FROM-KILLING one-killing pros pros

Prep
THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets posakis posakis

Adv
liqobolousa lithoboleO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
apestalmenous apostellO
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
hqelhsa thelO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
34 O Jerusalem, Jerusalem, which killest the prophets, and stonest them that are sent unto thee; how often would I have gathered thy children together, as a hen [doth gather] her brood under [her] wings, and ye would not!
STONE-CASTING THE one-pelting-with-stones episunaxai episunagO

vn Aor Act
ones-HAVING-been-commissionED TOWARD her ones-having-been-dispatched tekna teknon

n_ Acc Pl n
how-many-times I-WILL how-many-times ? thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
tropon ornis tropos ornis

eauths heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg f
TO-ON-TOGETHER-LEAD THE to-assemble nossian upo nossia hupo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
offsprings children
OF-YOU
WHICH
manner
BIRD hen
THE
OF-self of-herself
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
pterugas kai ouk pterux kai ou

n_ Acc Pl f Conj Part Neg
hqelhsate thelO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YOUNG brood
UNDER THE
flyers wings
AND
NOT
YE-WILL
13:35 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
afietai aphiEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
BE-PERCEIVING IS-beING-FROM-LET to-YOU(p) lo ! is-being-left to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
HOME house ews heOs

Conj
OF-YOU(p) I-AM-sayING of-ye

NA
YET
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hxei hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
NA
ote hote
Adv
35 Behold, your house is left unto you desolate: and verily I say unto you, Ye shall not see me, until [the time] come when ye shall say, Blessed [is] he that cometh in the name of the Lord.
to-YOU(p) to-ye eiphte legO
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING ME
TILL
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING when
euloghmenos eulogeO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
en en
Prep

vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-sayING beING-blessED
THE
IN
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
AV
Luke 14
14:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
IN
THE
TO-BE-COMING Him
INTO HOME house arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-ANY OF-THE of-certain-one kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
. And it came to pass, as he went into the house of one of the chief Pharisees to eat bread on the sabbath day, that they watched him.
arcontwn archOn
n_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn sabbatw fagein pharisaios sabbaton esthiO

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg n vn 2Aor Act
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
chiefs
OF-THE
PHARISEES
to-SABBATH
TO-BE-EATING BREAD
AND
they
WERE
parathroumenoi auton paratithEmi autos

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-KEEPING scrutinizing
Him
14:2 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
udrwpikos emprosqen hudrOpikos emprosthen

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
And, behold, there was a certain man before him which had the dropsy.
AND
BE-PERCEIVING human lo ! o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ANY certain ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
WAS
WET-VIEWic dropsical pros pros

Prep
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-Him in-front-of him nomikous kai nomikos kai

a_ Acc Pl m Conj
3
14:3 kai apokriqeis

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
answerING
THE
JESUS
said spoke tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
TOWARD THE
LAWers lawyers ou ou
Part Neg
AND
And Jesus answering spake unto the lawyers and Pharisees, saying, Is it lawful to heal on the sabbath day?
farisaious legwn pharisaios legO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
sabbatw qerapeusai h sabbaton therapeuO E

n_ Dat Sg n vn Aor Act Part
PHARISEES
sayING
it-IS-allowed
to-THE
SABBATH
TO-cure
OR
NOT
14:4 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hsucasan kai epilabomenos hEsuchazO kai epilambanomai

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m
iasato iaomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai apelusen kai apoluO

And they held their peace. And he took [him], and healed him, and let him go;
THE-ones the
YET QUIETize they-are-quiet
AND
ON-GETTING getting-hold-of-him tinos tis

pi Gen Sg m
He-HEALS
him
AND
FROM-LOOSES dismisses-him eis eis

Prep
14:5 kai pros

kai
Conj
pros
Prep

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
bous bous
n_ Nom Sg m
frear phrear
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
TOWARD them
He-said
OF-ANY of-whom ?
OF-YOU(p) SON of-ye auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OR
OX
INTO WELL
And answered them, saying, Which of you shall have an ass or an ox fallen into a pit, and will not straightway pull him out on the sabbath day?
peseitai piptO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
euqews anaspasei eutheOs anaspaO

Adv vi Fut Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
SHALL-BE-FALLING AND
NOT
immediately
he-SHALL-BE-UP-PULLING him he-shall-be-pulling-up
IN
DAY
OF-THE
sabbatou sabbaton
n_ Gen Sg n
SABBATH
14:6 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
iscusan ischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
antapokriqhnai pros antapokrinomai pros

vn Aor pasD Prep
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
And they could not answer him again to these things.
AND
NOT
THEY-are-STRONG TO-INSTEAD-answer to-answer-again-him de de

Conj
TOWARD these these-things parabolhn epecwn parabolE epechO

14:7 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
keklhmenous kaleO
pws pOs
Adv
He-said he-told tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
YET TOWARD THE
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BESIDE-CAST ones-having-been-invited parable pros pros

Prep
ON-HAVING attending
how
. And he put forth a parable to those which were bidden, when he marked how they chose out the chief rooms; saying unto them,
prwtoklisias prOtoklisia
n_ Acc Pl f
exelegonto legwn eklegO legO

vi impf Mid 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
THE
BEFORE-most-CLINES THEY-chose first-reclining-places klhqhs kaleO

vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
sayING
TOWARD them
14:8 otan
hotan
Conj
upo tinos hupo tis

Prep px Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
gamous gamos
n_ Acc Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED by whenever you-may-be-being-invited katakliqhs kataklinO

vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
ANY anyone
INTO MARRIAGES NO wedding-festivities entimoteros entimos

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
When thou art bidden of any [man] to a wedding, sit not down in the highest room; lest a more honourable man than thou be bidden of him;
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prwtoklisian mhpote prOtoklisia mEpote

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-CLINED INTO THE you-may-be-being-reclined
BEFORE-most-CLINE first-reclining-place
NO-?-when more-IN-VALUED lest-at-some-time one-more-held-in-honor
AV
Luke 14
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
keklhmenos kaleO
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
OF-YOU
MAY-BE
HAVING-been-CALLED by having-been-invited o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
him
14:9 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai auton kai autos

Conj pp Acc Sg m
kalesas kaleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
erei ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
AND
COMING
THE the-one
YOU
AND
him
CALLing inviting
he-SHALL-BE-declarING
And he that bade thee and him come and say to thee, Give this man place; and thou begin with shame to take the lowest room.
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
toutw topon houtos topos

pd Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
kai tote arxh kai tote archO

Conj Adv vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
meta aiscunhs meta aischunE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
to-YOU
to-this-one this-man
PLACE
AND
then
YOU-SHOULD-BE-beginnING WITH
VILEness shame
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
escaton topon eschatos topos

katecein katechO
vn Pres Act
THE
LAST
PLACE
TO-BE-DOWN-HAVING to-be-retaining poreuqeis poreuomai

14:10 all otan

alla
Conj
hotan
Conj
klhqhs kaleO
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
anapese anapiptO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
but
when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-CALLED BEING-GONE whenever you-may-be-being-invited ina hina

Conj
UP-FALL INTO THE be-leaning-back-at-table-you ! keklhkws kaleO

escaton topon eschatos topos

otan hotan
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
10 But when thou art bidden, go and sit down in the lowest room; that when he that bade thee cometh, he may say unto thee, Friend, go up higher: then shalt thou have worship in the presence of them that sit at meat with thee.
LAST
PLACE
THAT when-EVER MAY-BE-COMING THE whenever soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
one-HAVING-CALLED YOU one-having-invited anwteron tote estai anOteron tote eimi

a_ Acc Sg n Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
erei ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
file philos
n_ Voc Sg m
prosanabhqi prosanabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU
FOND-one ! BE-TOWARD-UP-STEPPING UPPer friend ! step-up-you ! further sunanakeimenwn sunanakeimai

then
SHALL-BE
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
enwpion pantwn twn enOpion pas ho

Adv a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
to-YOU
esteem glory
IN-VIEW OF-ALL in-the-sight-of all o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE the
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING to-YOU ones-lying-back-at-table-togetherwith you eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
14:11 oti pas

hoti
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
uywn hupsoO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
that
EVERY
THE
one-HEIGHTenING one-exalting uywqhsetai hupsoO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
self himself
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW AND shall-be-being-humbled
THE
11 For whosoever exalteth himself shall be abased; and he that humbleth himself shall be exalted.
tapeinwn tapeinoO
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
one-makING-LOW one-humbling
self himself de de
Conj
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED shall-be-being-exalted kai tw kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg m
14:12 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
keklhkoti kaleO
vp Perf Act Dat Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
poihs poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
He-said
YET AND also
to-THE
one-HAVING-CALLED Him one-having-invited fwnei phOneO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-makING whenever filous philos

a_ Acc Pl m
ariston h ariston E
n_ Nom Sg n Part
deipnon mh deipnon mE
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
mhde mEde
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
12 Then said he also to him that bade him, When thou makest a dinner or a supper, call not thy friends, nor thy brethren, neither thy kinsmen, nor [thy] rich neighbours; lest they also bid thee again, and a recompence be made thee.
LUNCH luncheon
OR
DINner
NO
YOU-BE-SOUNDING THE be-you-summoning ! tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
FOND-ones OF-YOU friends sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
NO-YET THE nor-yet geitonas plousious geitOn plousios

adelfous sou adelphos su

mhde mEde
Conj
suggeneis suggenEs
a_ Acc Pl m
mhde mEde
Conj
brothers
OF-YOU
NO-YET THE nor-yet
TOGETHER-generateds OF-YOU relatives se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
NO-YET NEIGHBORS nor-yet neighbors(f)
RICH
mhpote mEpote
Adv
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
antikaleswsin antikaleO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
kai genhtai kai ginomai

Conj vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
antapodoma antapodoma
n_ Acc Sg n
NO-?-when AND lest-at-some-time also soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
they
SHOULD-BE-INSTEAD-CALLING YOU should-be-inviting-in-return
AND
MAY-BE-BECOMING repayment
to-YOU
AV
Luke 14
14:13 all otan

alla
Conj
hotan
Conj
dochn dochE
n_ Acc Sg f
poihs poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
kalei kaleO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ptwcous anapeirous cwlous ptOchos anapEros chOlos

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
13 But when thou makest a feast, call the poor, the maimed, the lame, the blind:
but
when-EVER RECEPTION YOU-MAY-BE-makING BE-CALLING whenever be-you-inviting !
POOR-ones poor-ones
UP-CRIPPLES crippled-ones
LAME-ones lame-ones
tuflous tuphlos
a_ Acc Pl m
14:14 kai makarios esh

kai
Conj
makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
antapodounai soi antapodidOmi su

vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg
AND
HAPPY
YOU-SHALL-BE that
NOT nothing th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THEY-ARE-HAVING TO-repay
to-YOU you
14 And thou shalt be blessed; for they cannot recompense thee: for thou shalt be recompensed at the resurrection of the just.
antapodoqhsetai gar soi antapodidOmi gar su

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
anastasei twn anastasis ho

dikaiwn dikaios
a_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-BEING-repaid it-shall-be-being-repaid
for
to-YOU you tis tis

px Nom Sg m
IN
THE
OF-THE
JUST-ones just-ones tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
14:15 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sunanakeimenwn sunanakeimai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HEARing
YET ANY someone
OF-THE
ones-TOGETHER-UP-LYING these said ones-lying-back-at-table-togetherwith-him these-things arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
15 . And when one of them that sat at meat with him heard these things, he said unto him, Blessed [is] he that shall eat bread in the kingdom of God.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
makarios ostis makarios hostis

a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m
fagetai esthiO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to-Him
HAPPY happy-is de de
Conj
WHO-ANY who-any eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-EATING BREAD
IN
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
14:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
deipnon mega deipnon mega

16 Then said he unto him, A certain man made a great supper, and bade many:
THE
YET He-said
to-him
human
ANY certain
made
DINner
GREAT
kai ekalesen pollous kai kaleO polus

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m
AND
CALLS invites
MANY
14:17 kai apesteilen ton

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
doulon autou doulos autos

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
deipnou deipnon
n_ Gen Sg n
AND
he-commissions he-dispatches tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THE
SLAVE
OF-him
to-THE
HOUR
OF-THE
DINner
17 And sent his servant at supper time to say to them that were bidden, Come; for all things are now ready.
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
keklhmenois kaleO
ercesqe erchomai
oti hdh hoti EdE

Conj Adv
etoima hetoimos
a_ Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED BE-COMING ones-having-been-invited be-ye-coming ! apo apo

Prep
that
ALREADY READY ready(p) prwtos prOtos

a_ Nom Sg m
it-IS
14:18 kai hrxanto

kai
Conj
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
mias heis
n_ Gen Sg f
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
paraiteisqai o paraiteomai ho
vn Pres midD/pasD t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
THEY-begin
FROM ONE ALL one-motive kai ecw kai echO

TO-BE-refusING THE to-be-making-excuse anagkhn exelqwn anagkE exerchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
BEFORE-most said first idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
agron agros
n_ Acc Sg m
hgorasa agorazO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him it
18 And they all with one [consent] began to make excuse. The first said unto him, I have bought a piece of ground, and I must needs go and see it: I pray thee have me excused.
to-him
FIELD
I-BUY
AND
I-AM-HAVING
necessity
TO-BE-PERCEIVING it
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ece echO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
parhthmenon paraiteomai
I-AM-askING
YOU
BE-HAVING be-you-having ! eipen legO
ME
HAVING-been-refusED having-been-excused zeugh zeugos

n_ Acc Pl n
14:19 kai eteros

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
bown bous
n_ Gen Pl m
hgorasa agorazO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
pente kai poreuomai pente kai poreuomai

ni numeral Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
DIFFERENT-one said different-one erwtw erOtaO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
YOKES yoke se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-OXEN
I-BUY
FIVE
AND
I-AM-GOING
19 And another said, I have bought five yoke of oxen, and I go to prove them: I pray thee have me excused.
dokimasai auta dokimazO autos

ece echO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
parhthmenon paraiteomai
TO-test
them
I-AM-askING
YOU
BE-HAVING be-you-having !
ME
HAVING-been-refusED having-been-excused
AV
Luke 14
14:20 kai eteros

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gunaika eghma gunE gameO

kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
20 And another said, I have married a wife, and therefore I cannot come.
AND
DIFFERENT-one said different-one elqein erchomai

vn 2Aor Act
WOMAN wife
I-MARRY
AND
NOT
dunamai dunamai
I-AM-ABLE I-can
TO-BE-COMING
14:21 kai paragenomenos o

kai
Conj
paraginomai
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along tote orgisqeis tote orgizO

Adv
THE
SLAVE
he-FROM-MESSAGES to-THE reports
master lord tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-him
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikodespoths eipen oikodespotEs legO

doulw doulos
n_ Dat Sg m
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
these then these-things autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
BEING-INDIGNANT
THE
HOME-OWNer householder tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
said
to-THE
SLAVE
21 So that servant came, and shewed his lord these things. Then the master of the house being angry said to his servant, Go out quickly into the streets and lanes of the city, and bring in hither the poor, and the maimed, and the halt, and the blind.
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
tacews eis tacheOs eis

Adv Prep
plateias kai rumas plateia kai rhumE

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai polis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
OF-him
BE-OUT-COMING SWIFTly be-you-coming-out ! quickly
INTO THE
BROADS squares
AND
streets
OF-THE
city
AND
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ptwcous kai anapeirous kai tuflous kai cwlous eisagage ptOchos kai anapEros kai tuphlos kai chOlos eisagO
a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wde hOde
Adv
THE
POOR-ones poor-ones
AND
UP-CRIPPLES crippled-ones
AND
AND
LAME-ones lame-ones o hos
INTO-LEAD lead-in-you !
here
14:22 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
epetaxas kai eti epitassO kai eti

vi Aor Act 2 Sg Conj Adv
pr Nom Sg m
AND
said
THE
SLAVE
master ! Lord !
HAS-BECOME
WHICH
YOU-enjoin
AND
STILL
22 And the servant said, Lord, it is done as thou hast commanded, and yet there is room.
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
PLACE
IS there-is o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
14:23 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
doulon exelqe doulos exerchomai

n_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
AND
said
THE
master lord
TOWARD THE
SLAVE
BE-OUT-COMING INTO THE be-you-coming-out ! gemisqh gemizO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
23 And the lord said unto the servant, Go out into the highways and hedges, and compel [them] to come in, that my house may be filled.
odous kai fragmous kai anagkason hodos kai phragmos kai anagkazO
n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg
vn 2Aor Act
ina hina
Conj
WAYS roads mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
AND
BARRIERS stone-dikes
AND
necessitate TO-BE-INTO-COMING THAT SHOULD-BE-BEING-REPLETizED compel-you-them ! to-be-entering should-be-being-crammed
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ME
THE
HOME house gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
14:24 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
andrwn ekeinwn twn anEr ekeinos ho

n_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT-YET-ONE OF-THE not-one mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
MEN
those
OF-THE the
24 For I say unto you, That none of those men which were bidden shall taste of my supper.
keklhmenwn kaleO
geusetai geuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
deipnou deipnon
n_ Gen Sg n
ones-HAVING-been-CALLED SHALL-BE-TASTING OF-ME ones-having-been-invited
THE
DINner
14:25 suneporeuonto de
sumporeuomai
de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai strafeis kai strephO

Conj vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
25 . And there went great multitudes with him: and he turned, and said unto them,
TOGETHER-WENT went-with autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
YET to-Him him
THRONGS
MANY vast
AND
BEING-TURNED
He-said
TOWARD
them
AV
Luke 14
14:26 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ercetai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
misei miseO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
IF
ANY anyone kai thn kai ho

Conj
IS-COMING
TOWARD ME
AND
NOT
IS-HATING
THE
FATHER
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
mhtera kai thn mEtEr kai ho

gunaika kai ta gunE kai ho

tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
26 If any [man] come to me, and hate not his father, and mother, and wife, and children, and brethren, and sisters, yea, and his own life also, he cannot be my disciple.
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-self of-selfhim
AND
THE
MOTHER
AND
THE
WOMAN wife te te
Part
AND
THE
offsprings children
AND
THE
adelfous kai tas adelphos kai ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl f
adelfas eti adelphE eti

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
brothers
AND
THE
sisters
STILL BESIDES AND also maqhths mathEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
soul
OF-self of-selfhim
NOT
dunatai dunamai
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
IS-ABLE he-can
TO-BE
OF-ME
LEARNer disciple ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
14:27 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
bastazei bastazO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
stauron eautou stauros heautou

n_ Acc Sg m pf 3 Gen Sg m

opisw opisO
Adv
27 And whosoever doth not bear his cross, and come after me, cannot be my disciple.
WHO-ANY NOT anyone-who mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
IS-BEARING
THE
pale cross mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-self of-selfhim maqhths mathEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
IS-COMING
BEHIND after
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ME
NOT
IS-ABLE can gar ex gar ek

Conj Prep
TO-BE
OF-ME
LEARNer disciple purgon purgos

n_ Acc Sg m
14:28 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
qelwn thelO
oikodomhsai ouci oikodomeO ouchi

vn Aor Act Part Int
prwton prOton
Adv
ANY which ? kaqisas kathizO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
for
OUT OF-YOU(p) WILLING of-ye thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
TOWER
TO-HOME-BUILD to-build eis eis

Prep
NOT(emph.) BEFORE-most not(emph.) ? first
28 For which of you, intending to build a tower, sitteth not down first, and counteth the cost, whether he have [sufficient] to finish [it]?
yhfizei psEphizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
dapanhn ei dapanE ei
n_ Acc Sg f Cond
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
apartismon apartismos
n_ Acc Sg m
being-seated
IS-PEBBLING is-calculating mhpote mEpote

Adv
THE
expense
IF
he-IS-HAVING INTO FROM-EQUIPPing wherewithal qemelion kai mh themelios kai mE

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg
14:29 ina
hina
Conj
qentos tithEmi
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
iscuontos ischuO
THAT NO-?-when OF-PLACING lest-at-some-time ektelesai ekteleO

vn Aor Act
OF-it of-him
foundation
AND
NO
OF-beING-STRONG
29 Lest haply, after he hath laid the foundation, and is not able to finish [it], all that behold [it] begin to mock him,
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
qewrountes theOreO
arxwntai archO
vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
empaizein empaizO
vn Pres Act
TO-OUT-FINISH ALL to-finish-up
THE
ones-beholdING ones-beholding o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SHOULD-BE-beginnING to-him him anqrwpos hrxato anthrOpos archO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
TO-BE-IN-sportING to-be-scoffing-at oikodomein oikodomeO

vn Pres Act
14:30 legontes
legO

Conj pd Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
30 Saying, This man began to build, and was not able to finish.
sayING
that
this
THE
human
begins
TO-BE-HOME-BUILDING AND to-be-building
ouk ou
Part Neg
iscusen ischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ektelesai ekteleO
vn Aor Act
NOT
is-STRONG
TO-OUT-FINISH to-finish-up basileus poreuomenos basileus poreuomai

14:31 h
E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
basilei sumbalein basileus sumballO

n_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor Act
OR
ANY what ?
KING
GOING
to-DIFFERENT KING
TO-BE-TOGETHER-CASTING to-be-engaging ei ei
Cond
eis eis
Prep
polemon ouci polemos ouchi

kaqisas kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
prwton prOton
Adv
bouleusetai bouleuO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
dunatos dunatos
a_ Nom Sg m
31 Or what king, going to make war against another king, sitteth not down first, and consulteth whether he be able with ten thousand to meet him that cometh against him with twenty thousand?
INTO BATTLE
NOT(emph.) being-seated not(emph.) ? en en

Prep
BEFORE-most SHALL-BE-COUNSELLING IF first shall-be-planning tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
ABLE
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
deka deka
ni numeral
ciliasin upanthsai chilias hupantaO

n_ Dat Pl f vn Aor Act
meta eikosi meta eikosi

Prep n_ Nom Pl m
ciliadwn chilias
n_ Nom Pl f
he-IS
IN
TEN
THOUSAND
TO-UNDER-meet to-THE to-meet the-one
WITH
TWENTY
THOUSAND
AV
Luke 14 - Luke 15
ercomenw erchomai
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
one-COMING coming
ON
him
14:32 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
eti eti
Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
porrw porrhO
Adv
ontos eimi
presbeian aposteilas presbeia apostellO

IF
YET NO
NA
SURELY STILL OF-him
forward BEING at-a-distance
embassy
32 Or else, while the other is yet a great way off, he sendeth an ambassage, and desireth conditions of peace.
erwta erOtaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
eirhnhn eirEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
IS-askING he-is-asking
THE the-terms pas pas
TOWARD PEACE
14:33 outws oun

houtOs
Adv
oun
Conj
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
apotassetai pasin apotassomai pas

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
a_ Nom Sg m
thus
THEN EVERY every-one uparcousin ou huparchO ou

vp Pres Act Dat Pl n Part Neg
OUT OF-YOU(p) WHO of-ye dunatai dunamai

NOT
IS-FROM-SETTING is-taking-leave maqhths mathEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
to-ALL
THE
33 So likewise, whosoever he be of you that forsaketh not all that he hath, he cannot be my disciple.
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-self of-selfhim
belongINGS possessions oun oun

Conj
NOT
IS-ABLE can alas halas

n_ Nom Sg n
TO-BE
OF-ME
LEARNer disciple alas halas

n_ Nom Sg n
34 Salt [is] good: but if the salt have lost his savour, wherewith shall it be seasoned?
14:34 kalon
kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
IDEAL
THEN THE
SALT
IF-EVER YET AND THE even artuqhsetai artuO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SALT
mwranqh mOrainO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tini tis
pi Dat Sg n
MAY-BE-BEING-made-INSIPID IN
ANY what ?
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-seasonED
14:35 oute
oute
Conj
eis eis
Prep
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
oute oute
Conj
eis eis
Prep
koprian euqeton kopria euthetos

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
exw exO
Adv
NOT-BESIDES INTO LAND neither ballousin ballO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
NOT-BESIDES INTO MANURE nor ecwn echO

WELL-PLACED it-IS fit akouein akouO

vn Pres Act
OUT outside
35 It is neither fit for the land, nor yet for the dunghill; [but] men cast it out. He that hath ears to hear, let him hear.
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
akouetw akouO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-ARE-CASTING it
THE
EARS
TO-BE-HEARING LET-him-BE-HEARING let-him-be-hearing !
AV
Luke 15
15:1 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eggizontes eggizO
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
telwnai telOnEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
. Then drew near unto him all the publicans and sinners for to hear him.
WERE
YET to-Him
NEARING drawing-near autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ALL
THE
THE
amartwloi akouein hamartOlos akouO

a_ Nom Pl m vn Pres Act
missers sinners
TO-BE-HEARING OF-Him him oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
15:2 kai diegogguzon

kai
Conj
diagogguzO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
te te
Part

grammateis legontes grammateus legO

AND
THRU-MURMURED THE grumbled
BESIDES PHARISEES bsboth
AND
THE
WRITers scribes autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
sayING
And the Pharisees and scribes murmured, saying, This man receiveth sinners, and eateth with them.

Conj pd Nom Sg m
amartwlous prosdecetai hamartOlos prosdechomai

a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
kai sunesqiei kai sunesthiO

that
this-one this-man
missers sinners de de
Conj
IS-TOWARD-RECEIVING AND is-receiving autous thn autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
IS-TOGETHER-EATING to-them is-eating-with them

3
15:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
parabolhn tauthn legwn parabolE houtos legO

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
And he spake this parable unto them, saying,
He-said he-told
YET TOWARD them
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
this
sayING
15:4 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ex anthrOpos ek
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ecwn echO
ekaton probata kai apolesas hekaton probaton kai apollumi

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ANY what ? ex ek
Prep
human
OUT OF-YOU(p) HAVING of-ye ou ou

Part Neg
HUNDRED sheep sheep(p) enenhkonta ennea enenEkonta ennea

AND
destroying losing erhmw erEmos

a_ Dat Sg f
autwn en autos heis

pp Gen Pl n n_ Acc Sg n
kataleipei ta kataleipO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
What man of you, having an hundred sheep, if he lose one of them, doth not leave the ninety and nine in the wilderness, and go after that which is lost, until he find it?
OUT OF-them
ONE
NOT
IS-leavING
THE
NINEty
NINE
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness
kai poreuetai kai poreuomai

epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
apolwlos apollumi
ews eurh heOs heuriskO

auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
AND
IS-GOING
ON
THE
one-HAVING-destroyED TILL one-being-lost epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
he-MAY-BE-FINDING it
15:5 kai eurwn

kai
Conj
heuriskO
epitiqhsin epitithEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
wmous Omos
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cairwn chairO
And when he hath found [it], he layeth [it] on his shoulders, rejoicing.
AND
FINDING finding-it
he-IS-ON-PLACING ON he-is-placing-on-it eis eis

Prep
THE
SHOULDERS OF-him
JOYING rejoicing tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
15:6 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
sugkalei sugkaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
filous philos
a_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
AND
COMING
INTO THE
HOME house
he-IS-TOGETHER-CALLING THE he-is-calling-together moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
FOND-ones AND friends oti euron hoti heuriskO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
geitonas legwn geitOn legO

autois sugcarhte autos sugchairO

pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor pasD 2 Pl
And when he cometh home, he calleth together [his] friends and neighbours, saying unto them, Rejoice with me; for I have found my sheep which was lost.
THE
NEIGHBORS neighbors(f)
sayING
to-them
BE-TOGETHER-JOYING to-ME be-ye-rejoicing-togetherwith ! me
that
I-FOUND
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
probaton mou probaton egO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
apolwlos apollumi
THE
sheep
OF-ME
THE
one-HAVING-destroyED one-being-lost en en
Prep
15:7 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti outws cara hoti houtOs chara

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw estai ouranos eimi

n_ Dat Sg m vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
epi epi
Prep
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
thus
JOY
IN
THE
heaven
SHALL-BE ON ONE there-shall-be onover creian chreia

n_ Acc Sg f
amartwlw metanoounti h hamartOlos metanoeO E

a_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m Part
epi epi
Prep

dikaiois oitines ou dikaios hostis ou

a_ Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl m Part Neg
I say unto you, that likewise joy shall be in heaven over one sinner that repenteth, more than over ninety and nine just persons, which need no repentance.
misser sinner ecousin echO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
to-after-MINDING repenting metanoias metanoia

n_ Gen Sg f
OR ON NINEty than onover
NINE
JUST-ones just-ones
WHO-ANY who-any
NOT
need
ARE-HAVING OF-after-MIND of-repentance
AV
Luke 15
15:8 h
E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
dracmas ecousa drachmE echO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
deka deka
ni numeral
ean ean
Cond
apolesh apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
OR
ANY what ?
WOMAN
drachmas
HAVING
TEN
IF-EVER she-SHOULD-BE-destroyING she-should-be-losing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
dracmhn mian drachmE heis

ouci ouchi
Part Int
aptei haptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
lucnon kai saroi luchnos kai saroO

oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
Either what woman having ten pieces of silver, if she lose one piece, doth not light a candle, and sweep the house, and seek diligently till she find [it]?
drachma
ONE
NOT(emph.) IS-TOUCHING LAMP not(emph.) ? is-lighting eurh heuriskO
AND
IS-SWEEPING THE
HOME house
AND
zhtei zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epimelws ews ou epimelOs heOs hos

Adv Conj pr Gen Sg m
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
IS-SEEKING
ON-CAREly carefully
TILL
OF-WHICH she-MAY-BE-FINDING which she-may-be-finding-it tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
15:9 kai eurousa

kai
Conj
heuriskO
sugkalei sugkaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
filas philos
n_ Acc Pl f
kai geitonas legousa kai geitOn legO

Conj n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
AND
FINDING finding-it moi egO
IS-TOGETHER-CALLING THE she-is-calling-together oti euron hoti heuriskO

FOND-ones AND friends(f)
NEIGHBORS neighbors(f)
sayING
sugcarhte sugchairO
vm 2Aor pasD 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dracmhn hn drachmE hos

n_ Acc Sg f pr Acc Sg f
apwlesa apollumi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
And when she hath found [it], she calleth [her] friends and [her] neighbours together, saying, Rejoice with me; for I have found the piece which I had lost.
pp 1 Dat Sg
BE-TOGETHER-JOYING to-ME be-ye-rejoicing-togetherwith ! me
that
I-FOUND
THE
drachma
WHICH
I-destroy I-lose aggelwn aggelos

n_ Gen Pl m
10 Likewise, I say unto you, there is joy in the presence of the angels of God over one sinner that repenteth.
15:10 outws legw

houtOs
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ginetai ginomai
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f

Adv t_ Gen Pl m
thus
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye eni heis

n_ Dat Sg m
IS-BECOMING there-is-becoming
JOY
IN-VIEW OF-THE in-the-sight-of the
MESSENGERS
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi epi
Prep
amartwlw metanoounti hamartOlos metanoeO

a_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
OF-THE
God
ON ONE onover de de
Conj
misser sinner
after-MINDING repenting eicen echO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
15:11 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

duo duo
ni numeral
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
11 . And he said, A certain man had two sons:
He-said
YET human
ANY certain newteros neos

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
HAD
TWO
SONS
15:12 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
said
THE
YOUNGer
OF-them
to-THE
FATHER
FATHER !
BE-GIVING be-you-giving ! autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
12 And the younger of them said to [his] father, Father, give me the portion of goods that falleth [to me]. And he divided unto them [his] living.
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
epiballon epiballO
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ousias o ousia ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
dieilen diaireO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to-ME me ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
ON-CASTING accruing
PART
OF-THE
BEING estate
THE
YET he-apportionED to-them
bion bios
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
livelihood
15:13 kai met ou

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
ou
Part Neg
pollas hmeras sunagagwn polus hEmera sunagO

a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
newteros neos
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
AND
after
NOT
MANY
DAYS
TOGETHER-LEADING ALL gathering-together
THE
YOUNGer
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
apedhmhsen eis apodEmeO eis

cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
makran kai ekei dieskorpisen thn makros kai ekei diaskorpizO ho

a_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
ousian ousia
n_ Acc Sg f
13 And not many days after the younger son gathered all together, and took his journey into a far country, and there wasted his substance with riotous living.
SON
travels
INTO SPACE country aswtws asOtOs

Adv
FAR
AND
there
THRU-SCATTERS dissipates
THE
BEING estate
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
zwn zaO
OF-him
LIVING
profligately
15:14 dapanhsantos de
dapanaO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
limos limos
n_ Nom Sg m
iscura ischuros
a_ Nom Sg f
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-SPENDing
YET OF-him him
ALL
BECAME occurred
FAMINE
STRONG severe
according-to THE
14 And when he had spent all, there arose a mighty famine in that land; and he began to be in want.
AV
Luke 15
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
ekeinhn kai autos ekeinos kai autos

pd Acc Sg f Conj pp Nom Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ustereisqai hustereO
vn Pres Pas
SPACE country
that
AND
he
begins
TO-BE-WANTING to-be-being-in-want eni heis

n_ Dat Sg m
15:15 kai poreuqeis

kai
Conj
poreuomai
ekollhqh kollaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
politwn ths politEs ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
cwras chOra
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinhs ekeinos
pd Gen Sg f
AND
BEING-GONE
he-WAS-JOINED to-ONE
OF-THE
citizens
OF-THE
SPACE country
that
15 And he went and joined himself to a citizen of that country; and he sent him into his fields to feed swine.
kai epemyen kai pempO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agrous autou agros autos

boskein boskO
vn Pres Act
coirous choiros
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
he-SENDS
him
INTO THE
FIELDS
OF-him
TO-BE-HERBING HOGS to-be-grazing wn hos

pr Gen Pl n
15:16 kai epequmei cortasqhnai ek

kai
Conj
epithumeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
chortazO
vn Aor Pas
ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
keratiwn keration
n_ Gen Pl n
hsqion esthiO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
he-ON-FELT he-yearned
TO-BE-satisfiED
OUT OF-THE
little-carob-pods OF-WHICH ATE which
THE
16 And he would fain have filled his belly with the husks that the swine did eat: and no man gave unto him.
coiroi choiros
n_ Nom Pl m

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
edidou didOmi
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
HOGS
AND
NOT-YET-ONE GAVE no-one de de

Conj
to-him
15:17 eis
eis
Prep
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
elqwn erchomai
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
posoi posos
pq Nom Pl m
misqioi misthios
a_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
INTO self himself mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
YET COMING
he-AVERRed
how-many HIRED-ones OF-THE how-many ? hired-men limw limos

n_ Dat Sg m
FATHER
perisseuontai artwn perisseuO artos

vi Pres Mid 3 Pl n_ Gen Pl m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
wde apollumai hOde apollumi

Adv vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
17 And when he came to himself, he said, How many hired servants of my father's have bread enough and to spare, and I perish with hunger!
OF-ME
ARE-beING-exceedED are-being-surfeited
OF-BREADS I of-bread(p) pros pros

Prep
YET to-FAMINE
here
AM-beING-destroyED am-perishing kai erw kai ereO

18 I will arise and go to my father, and will say unto him, Father, I have sinned against heaven, and before thee,
15:18 anastas
anistEmi
poreusomai poreuomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
UP-STANDing rising autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-GOING TOWARD THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
I-SHALL-BE-declarING
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
hmarton hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon kai enwpion sou ouranos kai enOpion su

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
to-him
FATHER !
I-missED I-sinned
INTO THE
heaven
AND
IN-VIEW in-sight-of sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU you poihson poieO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
15:19 ouketi
ouketi
Adv
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
klhqhnai kaleO
vn Aor Pas
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ws hOs
Adv
19 And am no more worthy to be called thy son: make me as one of thy hired servants.
NOT-STILL I-AM not-longer ena heis

n_ Acc Sg m
WORTHY
TO-BE-CALLED SON
OF-YOU
make make-you !
ME
AS
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
misqiwn sou misthios su

ONE
OF-THE
HIRED-ones hired-men
OF-YOU
15:20 kai anastas

kai
Conj
anistEmi
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
eti eti
Adv
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
UP-STANDing rising
he-CAME
TOWARD THE
FATHER
OF-self of-selfhim autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
STILL YET OF-him
makran apecontos makran apechO

Adv vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
20 And he arose, and came to his father. But when he was yet a great way off, his father saw him, and had compassion, and ran, and fell on his neck, and kissed him.
FAR
FROM-HAVING being-away
PERCEIVED
him
THE
FATHER
OF-him
AND
esplagcnisqh splagchnizomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
kai dramwn kai trechO

epepesen epi ton epipiptO epi ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m

kai kai
Conj
IS-compassionatED AND is-moved-with-compassion katefilhsen auton kataphileO autos

RUNNING
ON-FALLS falls-on
ON
THE
NECK
OF-him
AND
DOWN-FONDS fondly-kisses
him
AV
Luke 15
15:21 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
hmarton hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
said
YET THE
SON
to-him
FATHER !
I-missED I-sinned
INTO THE
heaven
21 And the son said unto him, Father, I have sinned against heaven, and in thy sight, and am no more worthy to be called thy son.
kai enwpion sou kai enOpion su

Conj Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
ouketi ouketi
Adv
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
klhqhnai kaleO
vn Aor Pas
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
AND
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
WH WH
OF-YOU you
WH WH
NOT-STILL I-AM not-longer

WH WH
WORTHY
WH
TO-BE-CALLED SON
OF-YOU
poihson me ws ena twn misqiwn sou
15:22 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

tacu tachus
Adv
said
YET THE
FATHER
TOWARD THE
SLAVES
OF-him
SWIFT quick !
22 But the father said to his servants, Bring forth the best robe, and put [it] on him; and put a ring on his hand, and shoes on [his] feet:
exenegkate stolhn thn ekpherO stolE ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
prwthn prOtos
a_ Acc Sg f
kai endusate auton kai enduO autos

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
kai dote kai didOmi

OUT-CARRY bring-forth-ye !
robe
THE
BEFORE-most AND first ceira cheir

n_ Acc Sg f
IN-SLIP-YE put-on-ye-it !
him
AND
BE-GIVING be-ye-giving ! podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
daktulion eis daktulios eis

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai upodhmata eis kai hupodEma eis

Conj n_ Acc Pl n Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
FINGERed-ring ring
INTO THE
HAND
OF-him
AND
sandals
INTO THE
FEET
15:23 kai ferete

kai
Conj
pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
moscon ton moschos ho

a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
siteuton qusate siteutos thuO

a_ Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
kai fagontes kai esthiO

23 And bring hither the fatted calf, and kill [it]; and let us eat, and be merry:
AND
BE-CARRYING THE be-ye-bringing !
CATTLE calf
THE
GRAINed grain-fed
SACRIFICE AND sacrifice-ye-it !
EATING
eufranqwmen euphrainO
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
WE-MAY-BE-BEING-gladdenED we-may-be-making-merry
15:24 oti outos

hoti
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
nekros nekros
a_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai anezhsen kai anazaO

that
this
THE
SON
OF-ME
DEAD
WAS
AND
UP-LIVES revives
24 For this my son was dead, and is alive again; he was lost, and is found. And they began to be merry.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
apolwlws apollumi
vp 2Perf Act Nom Sg m
kai eureqh kai heuriskO

kai hrxanto kai archO

Conj vi Aor midD 3 Pl
eufrainesqai euphrainO
vn Pres Pas
WAS he-was
HAVING-destroyED being-lost de de
Conj
AND
WAS-FOUND
AND
THEY-begin
TO-BE-beING-glad to-make-merry presbuteros en presbuteros en

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
15:25 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
WAS
YET THE
SON
OF-him
THE
SENIOR elder sumfwnias sumphOnia

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
FIELD
AND
25 Now his elder son was in the field: and as he came and drew nigh to the house, he heard musick and dancing.
ws ercomenos hOs erchomai

Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
hggisen eggizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AS
COMING
he-NEARS
to-THE the
HOME house
he-HEARS
OF-TOGETHER-SOUNDing AND music
corwn choros
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-CHORUS choral-dancing
15:26 kai proskalesamenos ena

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
paidwn epunqaneto pais punthanomai

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
an an
Part
26 And he called one of the servants, and asked what these things meant.
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him tauta houtos

pd Nom Pl n
ONE
OF-THE
boys
he-ASCERTAINED-UP ANY he-inquired-to-ascertain what ?
EVER
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
MAY-BE
these
AV
Luke 15
15:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m

hkei hEkO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET said he-said o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-him
that
THE
brother
OF-YOU
IS-ARRIVING
AND
27 And he said unto him, Thy brother is come; and thy father hath killed the fatted calf, because he hath received him safe and sound.
equsen thuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
moscon ton moschos ho

a_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
siteuton oti siteutos hoti

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
SACRIFICES THE
FATHER
OF-YOU
THE
CATTLE calf
THE
GRAINed grain-fed
that seeing-that
ugiainonta hugiainO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apelaben apolambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
beING-SOUND
him
he-FROM-GOT he-got-back de de
Conj
15:28 wrgisqh
orgizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
vn 2Aor Act
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
he-IS-INDIGNANT YET AND
NOT
he-WILLED would auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-INTO-COMING THE to-be-entering
YET FATHER
28 And he was angry, and would not go in: therefore came his father out, and intreated him.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
exelqwn exerchomai
parekalei parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
OF-him
OUT-COMING coming-out de de
Conj
BESIDE-CALLED him entreated eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
15:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
YET answerING
said he-said soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
to-THE
FATHER
OF-him
BE-PERCEIVING lo ! parhlqon parerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tosauta eth tosoutos etos

pd Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
douleuw douleuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai oudepote kai oudepote

Conj Adv
entolhn sou entolE su

kai kai
Conj
29 And he answering said to [his] father, Lo, these many years do I serve thee, neither transgressed I at any time thy commandment: and yet thou never gavest me a kid, that I might make merry with my friends:
so-much so-many emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
YEARS
I-AM-SLAVING to-YOU
AND
NOT-YET-?-when direction never precept meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
OF-YOU
I-BESIDE-CAME AND I-passed-by
oudepote oudepote
Adv
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
erifon eriphos
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
filwn philos
a_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to-ME me
NOT-YET-?-when YOU-GIVE never
KID
THAT WITH
THE
FOND-ones OF-ME friends
eufranqw euphrainO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
I-MAY-BE-BEING-gladdenED I-may-be-making-merry
15:30 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
katafagwn katesthiO
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
when
YET THE
SON
OF-YOU
this
THE
one-DOWN-EATING OF-YOU one-devouring autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
30 But as soon as this thy son was come, which hath devoured thy living with harlots, thou hast killed for him the fatted calf.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
bion bios
n_ Acc Sg m
meta pornwn meta pornE

Prep n_ Gen Pl f
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
equsas thuO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
siteuton siteutos
a_ Acc Sg m
THE
livelihood
WITH
PROSTITUTES CAME
YOU-SACRIFICE to-him
THE
GRAINed grain-fed
moscon moschos
a_ Acc Sg m
CATTLE calf
15:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
teknon su teknon su
n_ Voc Sg n pp 2 Nom Sg
pantote met emou pantote meta egO

Adv Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
31 And he said unto him, Son, thou art ever with me, and all that I have is thine.
THE
YET said he-said ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
to-him
offspring child ! estin eimi
YOU
always
WITH ME
ARE
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
ema emos
ps 1 Nom Pl
sa sos
ps 2 Nom Pl
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
ALL
THE
MINE mine(p)
YOUR(p) yours(p)
IS
15:32 eufranqhnai de
euphrainO
vn Aor Pas
de
Conj
kai carhnai kai chairO

Conj vn 2Aor pasD
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

TO-BE-gladdenED to-be-merry
YET AND
TO-JOY to-rejoice
WAS-BINDING it-was-binding
that THE seeing-that
brother
OF-YOU
32 It was meet that we should make merry, and be glad: for this thy brother was dead, and is alive again; and was lost, and is found.
AV
Luke 15 - Luke 16
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
nekros nekros
a_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai ezhsen kai zaO

kai apolwlws kai apollumi

Conj vp 2Perf Act Nom Sg m
kai eureqh kai heuriskO

this
DEAD
WAS
AND
LIVES
AND
HAVING-destroyED being-lost
AND
WAS-FOUND
AV
Luke 16
16:1 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas anqrwpos tis mathEtEs anthrOpos tis

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
He-said
YET AND also
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples
human
ANY certain dieblhqh diaballO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
WAS there-was autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
plousios os plousios hos

a_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg m
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oikonomon kai outos oikonomos kai houtos

n_ Acc Sg m Conj pd Nom Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
. And he said also unto his disciples, There was a certain rich man, which had a steward; and the same was accused unto him that he had wasted his goods.
RICH
WHO
HAD
HOME-LAWer administrator
AND
this-one this-man
WAS-THRU-CASTED to-him was-accused-by-an-adversary
AS
diaskorpizwn ta diaskorpizO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
uparconta huparchO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THRU-SCATTERING dissipating
THE
belongINGS possessions auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-him
16:2 kai fwnhsas

kai
Conj
phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
akouw akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
AND
SOUNDing summoning apodos apodidOmi

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
him
he-said
to-him
ANY what ?
this
I-AM-HEARING ABOUT concerning ou ou

Part Neg
And he called him, and said unto him, How is it that I hear this of thee? give an account of thy stewardship; for thou mayest be no longer steward.
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
oikonomias sou oikonomia su

gar gar
Conj
YOU
BE-FROM-GIVING THE be-you-rendering ! eti eti

Adv
saying account
OF-THE
HOME-LAW stewardship
OF-YOU
NOT not
for
dunh dunamai
oikonomein oikonomeO
vn Pres Act
YOU-MAY-BE-ABLE you-can
STILL TO-BE-HOME-LAWING longer to-be-being-steward de de

Conj
16:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikonomos ti oikonomos tis

n_ Nom Sg m pi Acc Sg n
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
said
YET IN
self himself
THE
HOME-LAWer administrator thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-DOING that seeing-that emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
Then the steward said within himself, What shall I do? for my lord taketh away from me the stewardship: I cannot dig; to beg I am ashamed.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
afaireitai aphaireO
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
oikonomian ap oikonomia apo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
THE
master lord ouk ou

Part Neg
OF-ME
SHALL-BE-FROM-LIFTING THE shall-be-wresting epaitein epaiteO

vn Pres Act
HOME-LAW stewardship aiscunomai aischunO

FROM ME
skaptein skaptO
vn Pres Act
iscuw ischuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
TO-BE-DIGGING NOT
I-AM-beING-STRONG TO-BE-ON-REQUESTING I-AM-beING-VILED to-be-being-a-mendicant I-am-being-ashamed poihsw poieO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
16:4 egnwn
ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
otan hotan
Conj
metastaqw methistEmi
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
I-KNEW
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT when-EVER I-MAY-BE-BEING-after-STOOD OUT OF-THE whenever I-may-be-being-deposed me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
I am resolved what to do, that, when I am put out of the stewardship, they may receive me into their houses.
oikonomias dexwntai oikonomia dechomai

n_ Gen Sg f vs Aor midD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oikous oikos
n_ Acc Pl m
WH
eautwn
NA
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
HOME-LAW stewardship
THEY-SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING ME
INTO THE
HOMES
OF-them
16:5 kai proskalesamenos ena

kai
Conj
proskaleomai
heis
n_ Acc Sg m
ekaston twn hekastos ho

a_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
creofeiletwn tou chreopheiletEs ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
ONE
EACH
OF-THE
USE-OWErs debtors-paying-usury tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
master lord mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
So he called every one of his lord's debtors [unto him], and said unto the first, How much owest thou unto my lord?
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
prwtw prOtos
a_ Dat Sg m
poson posos
pq Acc Sg n
ofeileis opheilO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-self of-selfhim
he-said
to-THE
BEFORE-most how-much YOU-ARE-OWING to-THE first how-much ? ekaton batous elaiou hekaton batos elaion
ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg n
master lord eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-ME
16:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
YET he-said
HUNDRED BATHS
OF-OLIVE-oil THE of-oil
YET said he-said
to-him
And he said, An hundred measures of oil. And he said unto him, Take thy bill, and sit down quickly, and write fifty.
dexai dechomai
vm Aor midD 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
grammata kai kaqisas gramma kai kathizO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tacews grayon tacheOs graphO

Adv vm Aor Act 2 Sg
RECEIVE receive-you !
OF-YOU
THE
WRITings bills
AND
being-seated
SWIFTly quickly
WRITE write-you !
AV
Luke 16
ni numeral
FIVE-ty fifty
16:7 epeita
epeita
Adv
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
poson posos
pq Acc Sg n
ofeileis opheilO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ON-THEREAFTER to-DIFFERENT he-said thereupon to-different-one eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU
YET how-much ARE-OWING how-much ? you-are-owing autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE
YET
ekaton korous sitou hekaton koros sitos

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
dexai dechomai
vm Aor midD 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
Then said he to another, And how much owest thou? And he said, An hundred measures of wheat. And he said unto him, Take thy bill, and write fourscore.
he-said
HUNDRED CORS
OF-GRAIN
he-IS-sayING
to-him
OF-YOU
THE
grammata kai grayon gramma kai graphO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ogdohkonta ogdoEkonta
ni numeral
WRITings bills
AND
WRITE write-you !
EIGHTy
16:8 kai ephnesen o

kai
Conj
epaineO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikonomon ths oikonomos ho

adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
oti hoti
Conj
AND
ON-PRAISES applauds
THE
master lord
THE
HOME-LAWer administrator tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
UN-JUSTness that injustice
fronimws epoihsen oti oi phronimOs poieO hoti ho

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou fronimwteroi houtos phronimos

pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
And the lord commended the unjust steward, because he had done wisely: for the children of this world are in their generation wiser than the children of light.
DISPOSEDly prudently uper tous huper ho

Prep
he-DOES
that
THE
SONS
OF-THE
eon
this
more-DISPOSED more-prudent eautwn heautou

pf 3 Gen Pl m
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
genean thn genea ho

eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
t_ Acc Pl m
OVER above
THE
SONS
OF-THE
LIGHT
INTO THE
generation THE
OF-selves ARE of-themselves ek ek

Prep
16:9 kai egw

kai
Conj
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
poihsate filous poieO philos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Acc Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mamwna mamOnas
Aramaic
AND
to-YOU(p) to-ye ina hina

Conj
AM-sayING
to-selves make to-yourselves make-ye !
FOND-ones OUT OF-THE friends umas humeis
MAMMON
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
otan hotan
Conj
ekliph ekleipO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dexwntai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
And I say unto you, Make to yourselves friends of the mammon of unrighteousness; that, when ye fail, they may receive you into everlasting habitations.
pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE
UN-JUSTness THAT when-EVER it-MAY-BE-OUT-LACKING THEY-SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING YOU(p) injustice whenever it-may-be-defaulting ye aiwnious skhnas aiOnios skEnE
a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
INTO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
eonian
BOOTHS tabernacles pistos pistos

a_ Nom Sg m
16:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
elacistw elachistos
a_ Dat Sg n
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
pollw pistos polus pistos

a_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
THE
BELIEVing faithful-one adikos adikos
IN
INFERIOR-most AND least-thing also kai en kai en

Conj Prep
IN
MANY much
BELIEVing faithful
IS
AND
THE the-one
10 He that is faithful in that which is least is faithful also in much: and he that is unjust in the least is unjust also in much.
en en
Prep
elacistw elachistos
a_ Dat Sg n
pollw adikos polus adikos

a_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
a_ Nom Sg m
IN
INFERIOR-most UN-JUST least-thing unjust oun oun

Conj
AND also
IN
MANY much
UN-JUST unjust
IS
16:11 ei
ei
Cond
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
adikw adikos
a_ Dat Sg n
mamwna pistoi ouk mamOnas pistos ou

Aramaic a_ Nom Pl f Part Neg
egenesqe ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
alhqinon alEthinos
a_ Acc Sg n
IF
THEN IN
THE
UN-JUST unjust
MAMMON
BELIEVing faithful
NOT
YE-BECAME
THE
TRUE
11 If therefore ye have not been faithful in the unrighteous mammon, who will commit to your trust the true [riches]?
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pisteusei pisteuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-BELIEVING shall-be-entrusting tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
16:12 kai ei
kai
Conj
ei
Cond
allotriw allotrios
a_ Dat Sg m
pistoi ouk pistos ou

a_ Nom Pl f Part Neg
egenesqe ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
WH
hmeteron tis
WH
Prep
AND
IF
IN
THE
other-placed-one BELIEVing outsider faithful
NOT
YE-BECAME
THE
12 And if ye have not been faithful in that which is another man's, who shall give you that which is your own?
AV
Luke 16
dwsei umin
WH
NA
umeteron tis humeteros tis

ps 2 Acc Sg pi Nom Sg m
NA
NA
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
NA
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
YOUR-more yours
ANY who ?
to-YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-GIVING
16:13 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
oikeths oiketEs
n_ Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl m
kuriois douleuein kurios douleuO

h E
Part
gar gar
Conj
NOT-YET-ONE domestic (servant) IS-ABLE not-one domestic can ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
to-TWO
masters lords
TO-BE-SLAVING OR for either h E

Part
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
mishsei miseO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
agaphsei agapaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
13 No servant can serve two masters: for either he will hate the one, and love the other; or else he will hold to the one, and despise the other. Ye cannot serve God and mammon.
THE
ONE
he-SHALL-BE-HATING AND
THE
DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-LOVING OR shall-be-loving ou ou

Part Neg
OF-ONE one qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
anqexetai antechomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
eterou heteros
a_ Gen Sg m
katafronhsei kataphroneO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
dunasqe dunamai
he-SHALL-BE-upholdING AND
OF-THE the
DIFFERENT he-SHALL-BE-despisING NOT shall-be-despising
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
to-God
douleuein douleuO
vn Pres Act
kai mamwna kai mamOnas

Conj Aramaic
TO-BE-SLAVING AND
to-MAMMON mammon tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
16:14 hkouon
akouO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi filarguroi pharisaios philarguros

uparcontes huparchO
kai kai
Conj
14 And the Pharisees also, who were covetous, heard all these things: and they derided him.
HEARD
YET these ALL these-things
THE
PHARISEES
FOND-SILVER-ones belongING AND fond-of-money ones-being-inherently
exemukthrizon auton ekmuktErizO autos

THEY-OUT-NOSED they-scouted
Him
16:15 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dikaiountes eautous enwpion dikaioO heautou enOpion

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pf 3 Acc Pl m Adv
AND
He-said
to-them
YOU(p) ye de de
Conj
ARE
THE
ones-JUSTIFYING ones-justifying
selves themselves
IN-VIEW in-the-sight-of oti hoti

Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn o anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ginwskei tas ginOskO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f
kardias umwn kardia humeis

15 And he said unto them, Ye are they which justify yourselves before men; but God knoweth your hearts: for that which is highly esteemed among men is abomination in the sight of God.
OF-THE the to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
humans
THE
YET God
IS-KNOWING
THE
HEARTS
en en
Prep
anqrwpois uyhlon anthrOpos hupsElos

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
bdelugma bdelugma
n_ Nom Sg n

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
IN humans among nomos nomos

n_ Nom Sg m
HIGH
ABOMINATION IN-VIEW OF-THE in-the-sight-of the profhtai prophEtEs

n_ Nom Pl m
God
16:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
mecri iwannou apo mechri iOannEs apo

Adv n_ Gen Sg m Prep
tote h tote ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
THE
LAW
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers UNTO prophets
OF-JOHN John
FROM then
THE
16 The law and the prophets [were] until John: since that time the kingdom of God is preached, and every man presseth into it.

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
euaggelizetai euaggelizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai pas kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
IS-beING-WELL-MESSAGizED AND is-being-brought-the-well-message
EVERY every-one
INTO her herit
biazetai biazO
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
IS-beING-FORCED is-violently-forcing
16:17 eukopwteron de
eukopOteros
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon kai thn ouranos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
17 And it is easier for heaven and earth to pass, than one tittle of the law to fail.
easier
YET it-IS
THE
heaven
AND
THE
LAND earth
vn 2Aor Act
h E
Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
keraian pesein keraia piptO

TO-BE-BESIDE-COMING OR OF-THE to-be-passing-by than
LAW
ONE
horn serif
TO-BE-FALLING
AV
Luke 16
16:18 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apoluwn apoluO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

kai gamwn kai gameO

EVERY
THE
one-FROM-LOOSING THE one-dismissing kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
WOMAN wife
OF-him
AND
MARRYING
eteran heteros
a_ Acc Sg f
moiceuei moicheuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
apolelumenhn apoluO
apo apo
Prep
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
18 Whosoever putteth away his wife, and marrieth another, committeth adultery: and whosoever marrieth her that is put away from [her] husband committeth adultery.
DIFFERENT IS-ADULTERING AND different-one is-committing-adultery gamwn gameO

THE the-one
one-HAVING-been-FROM-LOOSED FROM MAN one-having-been-dismissed(f) husband
moiceuei moicheuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
MARRYING
IS-ADULTERING is-committing-adultery tis tis

px Nom Sg m
16:19 anqrwpos de
anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
plousios kai enedidusketo porfuran kai plousios kai endiduskO porphura kai
a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi impf Mid 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f Conj
human
YET ANY certain
WAS
RICH
AND
was-IN-SLIPPED was-dressed
PURPLE
AND
19 . There was a certain rich man, which was clothed in purple and fine linen, and fared sumptuously every day:
busson eufrainomenos kaq bussos euphrainO kata

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
hmeran lamprws hEmera lamprOs

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
COTTON cambric
beING-gladdenED making-merry tis tis
according-to DAY
SHINingly splendidly pros pros

Prep
16:20 ptwcos de
ptOchos
a_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
onomati lazaros ebeblhto onoma lazaros ballO

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pulwna pulOn
n_ Acc Sg m
px Nom Sg m
POOR poor-man autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
YET ANY certain
to-NAME
LAZARUS
HAD-been-CAST TOWARD THE
GATE portal
20 And there was a certain beggar named Lazarus, which was laid at his gate, full of sores,
eilkwmenos helkomai
OF-him
HAVING-been-ulceratED having-ulcers cortasqhnai apo chortazO apo

vn Aor Pas Prep
16:21 kai epiqumwn

kai
Conj
epithumeO
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
piptontwn piptO
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
trapezhs trapeza
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
ON-FEELING yearning
TO-BE-satisfiED
FROM THE
FALLING things-falling ercomenoi erchomai

FROM THE
table
21 And desiring to be fed with the crumbs which fell from the rich man's table: moreover the dogs came and licked his sores.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
plousiou alla kai oi plousios alla kai ho

a_ Gen Sg m Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m
kunes kuOn
n_ Nom Pl m
epeleicon ta epileichO ho
vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
RICH-one rich-man autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
but
AND also
THE
dogs
COMING
ON-LICKED licked
THE
elkh helkos
n_ Acc Pl n
ulcers
OF-him
16:22 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ptwcon kai apenecqhnai ptOchos kai apopherO

a_ Acc Sg m Conj vn Aor Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
BECAME
YET TO-BE-FROM-DYING THE to-be-dying eis eis

Prep
POOR poor-man
AND
TO-BE-FROM-CARRIED him to-be-carried-away kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
by
22 And it came to pass, that the beggar died, and was carried by the angels into Abraham's bosom: the rich man also died, and was buried;
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kolpon abraam kolpos abraam

n_ Acc Sg m ni proper
apeqanen de apothnEskO de
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
THE
MESSENGERS INTO THE
BOSOM
of-ABRAHAM FROM-DIED of-Abraham died
YET AND also
THE
plousios kai etafh plousios kai thaptO

a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
RICH rich-man
AND
WAS-entombed
16:23 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
adh hadEs
n_ Dat Sg m
eparas epairO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

AND
IN
THE
UN-PERCEIVED ON-LIFTing unseen lifting-up basanois ora basanos horaO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-him
23 And in hell he lift up his eyes, being in torments, and seeth Abraham afar off, and Lazarus in his bosom.
uparcwn huparchO
en en
Prep
abraam abraam
ni proper
apo apo
Prep
makroqen kai lazaron en makrothen kai lazaros en

Adv Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
belongING existing
IN
ORDEALS torments
he-IS-SEEING ABRAHAM FROM FAR-PLACE afar
AND
LAZARUS
IN
THE
AV
Luke 16
kolpois autou kolpos autos

BOSOMS bosoms
OF-him
16:24 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
fwnhsas phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
elehson eleaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
he
SOUNDing shouting bayh baptO
said
FATHER !
ABRAHAM BE-MERCIFUL-to ME be-you-merciful-to ! akron akron

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
pemyon pempO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
lazaron ina lazaros hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
daktulou autou daktulos autos

24 And he cried and said, Father Abraham, have mercy on me, and send Lazarus, that he may dip the tip of his finger in water, and cool my tongue; for I am tormented in this flame.
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
SEND send-you !
LAZARUS
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-DIPPING THE
EXTREMITY OF-THE tip
FINGER
OF-him
udatos kai katayuxh hudOr kai katapsuchO

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
glwssan mou glOssa egO

oti odunwmai hoti odunaO

en en
Prep
OF-water
AND
SHOULD-BE-DOWN-COOLING THE should-be-cooling tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
TONGUE
OF-ME
that
I-AM-beING-PAINED IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
flogi phlox
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
BLAZE flame
this
16:25 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
abraam abraam
ni proper
teknon mnhsqhti teknon mnaomai

n_ Voc Sg n vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
oti apelabes hoti apolambanO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
said
YET ABRAHAM offspring child ! en en

Prep
BE-BEING-REMINDED that be-you-being-reminded !
YOU-FROM-GOT THE you-got kaka kakos

a_ Acc Pl n
GOODS good-things nun de nun de

Adv Conj
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai lazaros omoiws ta kai lazaros homoiOs ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Acc Pl n
wde hOde
Adv
25 But Abraham said, Son, remember that thou in thy lifetime receivedst thy good things, and likewise Lazarus evil things: but now he is comforted, and thou art tormented.
OF-YOU
IN
THE
LIFE
OF-YOU
AND
LAZARUS
LIKE-AS likewise
THE
EVILS evil-things
NOW YET here
parakaleitai parakaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
odunasai odunaO
vi Pres Pas 2 Sg Irr
he-IS-beING-BESIDE-CALLED YOU he-is-being-consoled
YET ARE-beING-PAINED
16:26 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
toutois metaxu hmwn houtos metaxu hemeis

pd Dat Pl n Adv pp 1 Gen Pl
kai umwn kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
casma chasma
n_ Acc Sg n
mega mega
a_ Acc Sg n
AND
IN
ALL
these
between
US
AND
YOU(p) ye
GAPE chasm enqen enthen

Adv
GREAT
esthriktai stErizO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
opws hopOs
Adv
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
qelontes thelO
diabhnai diabainO
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
26 And beside all this, between us and you there is a great gulf fixed: so that they which would pass from hence to you cannot; neither can they pass to us, that [would come] from thence.
HAS-been-STOOD-fast WHICH-how THE has-been-established so-that dunwntai dunamai

ones-WILLING ones-willing hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
TO-THRU-STEP IN-PLACE TOWARD YOU(p) to-cross hence ye diaperwsin diaperaO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
NO
mhde mEde
Conj
ekeiqen pros ekeithen pros

Adv Prep
MAY-BE-ABLE
NO-YET thence nor-yet de de

Conj
TOWARD US
MAY-BE-ferryING they-may-be-ferrying pater patEr

n_ Voc Sg m
16:27 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
oun oun
Conj
ina hina
Conj
pemyhs pempO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
he-said
YET I-AM-askING
YOU
THEN FATHER !
THAT YOU-SHOULD-BE-SENDING him
27 Then he said, I pray thee therefore, father, that thou wouldest send him to my father's house:
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
16:28 ecw
echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar pente adelfous opws gar pente adelphos hopOs

Conj ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m Adv
diamarturhtai diamarturomai

pp Dat Pl m Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
I-AM-HAVING
for
FIVE
brothers
WHICH-how he-MAY-BE-THRU-witnessING to-them so-that he-may-be-certifying topon topos

n_ Acc Sg m
THAT NO
28 For I have five brethren; that he may testify unto them, lest they also come into this place of torment.
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
elqwsin erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
touton ths houtos ho

pd Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
basanou basanos
n_ Gen Sg f
AND also
they
MAY-BE-COMING INTO THE
PLACE
this
OF-THE
ORDEAL torment
AV
Luke 16 - Luke 17
16:29 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
abraam abraam
ni proper
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
mwusea kai tous mOusEs kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
29 Abraham saith unto him, They have Moses and the prophets; let them hear them.
IS-sayING
YET ABRAHAM THEY-ARE-HAVING MOSES
AND
THE
akousatwsan autwn akouO autos

vm Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m
LET-THEM-HEAR let-them-hear !
OF-them them de de
Conj
16:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
all ean alla ean

Conj Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
THE
YET he-said
NOT(emph.) FATHER !
ABRAHAM but
IF-EVER ANY someone
FROM DEAD-ones dead-ones
30 And he said, Nay, father Abraham: but if one went unto them from the dead, they will repent.
poreuqh poreuomai
vs Aor pasD 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous metanohsousin autos metanoeO

pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
MAY-BE-BEING-GONE TOWARD them
THEY-SHALL-BE-after-MINDING they-shall-be-repenting ei ei
Cond
16:31 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mwusews kai twn mOusEs kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
he-said
YET to-him
IF
of-MOSES Moses tis tis

px Nom Sg m
AND
OF-THE the
BEFORE-AVERers NOT prophets anasth anistEmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
31 And he said unto him, If they hear not Moses and the prophets, neither will they be persuaded, though one rose from the dead.
akouousin akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oud oude
Adv
ean ean
Cond
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
THEY-ARE-HEARING NOT-YET IF-EVER ANY neither someone peisqhsontai peithO

vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
OUT OF-DEAD-ones MAY-BE-UP-STANDING of-dead-ones may-be-rising
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-PERSUADED
AV
Luke 17
17:1 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

anendekton anendektos
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
He-said
YET TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples plhn plEn

Adv
OF-Him
UN-IN-RECEIVable it-IS incredible ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
OF-THE
. Then said he unto the disciples, It is impossible but that offences will come: but woe [unto him], through whom they come!
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
skandala mh skandalon mE
n_ Acc Pl n Part Neg
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ouai di ouai dia

Inj Prep
ercetai erchomai
THE
SNARES
NO
TO-BE-COMING MOREly WOE moreover woe ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THRU WHOM through
it-IS-COMING
17:2 lusitelei
lusiteleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
liqos lithos
n_ Nom Sg m
mulikos perikeitai mulikos perikeimai

a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
it-IS-LOOSE-tribute-ING to-him it-is-being-advantage trachlon autou trachElos autos

IF
STONE
MILLic of-a-mill eis eis

Prep
IS-ABOUT-LYING is-lying-about qalassan h thalassa E

n_ Acc Sg f Part
ABOUT THE
It were better for him that a millstone were hanged about his neck, and he cast into the sea, than that he should offend one of these little ones.
kai erriptai kai rhiptO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
NECK
OF-him
AND
he-HAS-been-TOSSED INTO THE he-has-been-pitched mikrwn mikros

a_ Gen Pl m
SEA
OR THAT than
skandalish skandalizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
toutwn ena houtos heis

pd Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-SNARING OF-THE
LITTLE-ones these little-ones amarth hamartanO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ONE
17:3 prosecete eautois ean

prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
ean
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

epitimhson epitimaO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
BE-heedING be-ye-heeding ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
to-selves IF-EVER MAY-BE-missING THE to-yourselves may-be-sinning metanohsh metanoeO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
brother
OF-YOU
rebuke rebuke-you !
Take heed to yourselves: If thy brother trespass against thee, rebuke him; and if he repent, forgive him.
kai ean kai ean

Conj Cond
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-him him
AND
IF-EVER he-SHOULD-BE-after-MINDING FROM-LET he-should-be-repenting forgive-you ! eptakis heptakis

Adv
to-him him eis eis

Prep
17:4 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
amarthsh hamartanO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai eptakis kai heptakis

Conj Adv
AND
IF-EVER SEVEN-times OF-THE
DAY
he-SHOULD-BE-missING INTO YOU he-should-be-sinning legwn legO

AND
SEVEN-times
And if he trespass against thee seven times in a day, and seven times in a day turn again to thee, saying, I repent; thou shalt forgive him.
epistreyh epistrephO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
metanow metanoeO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
afhseis aphiEmi
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
he-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING TOWARD YOU he-should-be-turning-about autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
sayING
I-AM-after-MINDING YOU-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING I-am-repenting you-shall-be-forgiving
to-him him
17:5 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi tw apostolos ho
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
prosqes prostithEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
And the apostles said unto the Lord, Increase our faith.
AND
say
THE
commissioners apostles kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
Master Lord
add add-you !
to-US
BELIEF faith sinapews sinapi

n_ Gen Sg n
6
17:6 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pistin ws kokkon pistis hOs kokkos

n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Acc Sg m
said
YET THE
Master Lord sukaminw sukaminos

a_ Dat Sg m
IF
YE-ARE-HAVING BELIEF faith ekrizwqhti ekrizoO

vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
AS
KERNEL
OF-MUSTARD
elegete legO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
an an
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
kai futeuqhti kai phuteuO

en en
Prep
And the Lord said, If ye had faith as a grain of mustard seed, ye might say unto this sycamine tree, Be thou plucked up by the root, and be thou planted in the sea; and it should obey you.
YE-said
EVER to-THE
black-mulberry
this
BE-BEING-OUT-ROOTED AND be-you-being-uprooted ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-BEING-plantED IN be-you-being-planted !
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh kai uphkousen an thalassa kai hupakouO an

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part
THE
SEA
AND
it-obeys sheit-obeys umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
EVER to-YOU(p) ye doulon ecwn doulos echO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
17:7 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
arotriwnta arotriaO
h E
Part
poimainonta poimainO
ANY who ?
YET OUT OF-YOU(p) SLAVE of-ye
HAVING
PLOWING
OR
SHEPHERDING tending-sheep
But which of you, having a servant plowing or feeding cattle, will say unto him by and by, when he is come from the field, Go and sit down to meat?
AV
Luke 17
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
eiselqonti eiserchomai
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
erei ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
euqews eutheOs
Adv
WHO
to-INTO-COMING to-entering anapese anapiptO
OUT OF-THE
FIELD
SHALL-BE-declarING to-him
immediately
parelqwn parerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
BESIDE-COMING coming-by
UP-FALL be-leaning-back-at-table-you ! erei ereO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
17:8 all ouci

alla
Conj
ouchi
Part Int
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
etoimason hetoimazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
deipnhsw deipneO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
but
NOT(emph.) he-SHALL-BE-declarING to-him not(emph.) ? diakonei diakoneO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
make-READY ANY I-SHOULD-BE-DINING AND make-ready-you ! something ews fagw heOs esthiO
perizwsamenos perizOnnumi
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai piw kai pinO

kai meta kai meta

Conj Prep
And will not rather say unto him, Make ready wherewith I may sup, and gird thyself, and serve me, till I have eaten and drunken; and afterward thou shalt eat and drink?
beING-ABOUT-GIRDED BE-THRU-SERVING to-ME being-girded be-you-serving ! me tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
TILL
I-MAY-BE-EATING AND
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING AND
after
fagesai esthiO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
kai piesai kai pinO

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
these
YOU-SHALL-BE-EATING AND shall-be-eating ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-DRINKING YOU shall-be-drinking tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
17:9 mh
mE
Part Neg
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
doulw doulos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
epoihsen ta poieO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
diatacqenta diatassO
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl n
NO
IS-HAVING
grace thanks
to-THE
SLAVE
that he-DOES seeing-that panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
THE BEING-prescribED the-things ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
Doth he thank that servant because he did the things that were commanded him? I trow not.

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
otan hotan
Conj
poihshte poieO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
diatacqenta umin diatassO humeis

vp Aor Pas Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
when-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-DOING ALL whenever acreioi esmen achreios eimi

THE BEING-prescribED the-things
to-YOU(p) ye
legete legO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti douloi hoti doulos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
wfeilomen poihsai pepoihkamen opheilO poieO poieO

vi impf Act 1 Pl vn Aor Act vi Perf Act 1 Pl
10 So likewise ye, when ye shall have done all those things which are commanded you, say, We are unprofitable servants: we have done that which was our duty to do.
that
SLAVES
UN-USE useless en en
Prep
WE-ARE
WHICH
WE-OWED we-ought
TO-DO
WE-HAVE-DONE
17:11 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
poreuesqai eis poreuomai eis

ierousalhm kai autos ierosoluma kai autos

ni proper Conj pp Nom Sg m
AND
BECAME it-occurred dia dia

Prep
IN
THE
TO-BE-GOING
INTO JERUSALEM
AND also
He
11 . And it came to pass, as he went to Jerusalem, that he passed through the midst of Samaria and Galilee.
dihrceto dierchomai
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
samareias kai galilaias samareia kai galilaia

THRU-CAME passed-through
THRU MIDst through
OF-SAMARIA
AND
OF-GALILEE Galilee kwmhn kOmE

n_ Acc Sg f
17:12 kai eisercomenou

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
aphnthsan apantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
OF-INTO-COMING of-entering andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
Him
WH
INTO ANY certain anesthsan
VILLAGE
NA
FROM-meet meet porrwqen porrhOthen

Adv
to-Him him
12 And as he entered into a certain village, there met him ten men that were lepers, which stood afar off:
deka deka
ni numeral
leproi lepros
a_ Nom Pl m
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
esthsan histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
TEN
lepers
MEN
WHO
STAND
forward-PLACE at-a-distance epistata elehson epistatEs eleaO

13 And they lifted up [their] voices, and said, Jesus, Master, have mercy on us.
17:13 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
hran airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
fwnhn phOnE
n_ Acc Sg f
legontes legO
ihsou iEsous
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
they
LIFT
SOUND sayING their-voices
JESUS !
Adept ! Doctor !
BE-MERCIFUL-to be-you-merciful-to !
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
US
17:14 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

epideixate eautous tois epideiknumi heautou ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
AND
He-said
to-them
BEING-GONE
ON-SHOW exhibit-ye !
selves yourselves
to-THE
14 And when he saw [them], he said unto them, Go shew yourselves unto the priests. And it came to pass, that, as they went, they were cleansed.
AV
Luke 17
iereusin hiereus
n_ Dat Pl m

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
upagein hupagO
vn Pres Act
autous ekaqarisqhsan autos katharizO

pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
SACRED-ones AND priests
BECAME it-became de de
Conj
IN
THE
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING them to-be-going-away oti iaqh hoti iaomai

THEY-ARE-cleansED
17:15 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
idwn eidO
upestreyen meta hupostrephO meta

ONE
YET OUT OF-them
PERCEIVING
that
he-WAS-HEALED reTURNS
WITH
15 And one of them, when he saw that he was healed, turned back, and with a loud voice glorified God,
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
megalhs doxazwn mega doxazO

a_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
SOUND voice
GREAT loud
esteemizING glorifying
THE
God
17:16 kai epesen

kai
Conj
piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi proswpon para epi prosOpon para

Prep n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eucaristwn eucharisteO
16 And fell down on [his] face at his feet, giving him thanks: and he was a Samaritan.
AND
he-FALLS
ON
face his-face
BESIDE THE
FEET
OF-Him
thankING
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
samariths samaritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
to-Him him
AND
he
WAS
SAMARItan
WH NA
17:17 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouc
ouci ouchi
Part Int
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
deka deka
ni numeral
answerING
YET THE
WH
JESUS
NA
said
NOT(emph.) not(emph.) ? pou pou

Part Int
17 And Jesus answering said, Were there not ten cleansed? but where [are] the nine?
THE
TEN
ekaqarisqhsan oi katharizO ho
de
de de
Conj
ennea ennea
ni numeral
ARE-cleansED
THE
YET
NINE
?-where where ? tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
17:18 ouc
ou
Part Neg
eureqhsan upostreyantes dounai doxan heuriskO hupostrephO didOmi doxa

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
18 There are not found that returned to give glory to God, save this stranger.
NOT
WERE-FOUND
reTURNing ones-returning
TO-GIVE
esteem glory
to-THE
God
IF
NO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
allogenhs outos allogenEs houtos

a_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
THE
other-generated foreigner
this
17:19 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anastas anistEmi
poreuou poreuomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
19 And he said unto him, Arise, go thy way: thy faith hath made thee whole.
AND
He-said
to-him
UP-STANDing rising
YOU-BE-GOING be-you-going !
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
HAS-SAVED
YOU
17:20 eperwthqeis de
eperOtaO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
de
Conj
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn pote ercetai pharisaios pote erchomai

n_ Gen Pl m Part Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia basileia
n_ Nom Sg f
BEING-inquirED-of
YET by
THE
PHARISEES
?-when when ?
IS-COMING
THE
KINGdom
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois kai eipen autos kai legO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ercetai erchomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
20 . And when he was demanded of the Pharisees, when the kingdom of God should come, he answered them and said, The kingdom of God cometh not with observation:
OF-THE
God
He-answerED
to-them them
AND
said
NOT
IS-COMING
THE

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
meta parathrhsews meta paratErEsis

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
WITH
BESIDE-KEEPing scrutiny idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
17:21 oude
oude
Adv
erousin ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
wde h hOde E
Adv Part
ekei idou ekei idou

gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
NOT-YET THEY-SHALL-BE-declarING BE-PERCEIVING here neither lo !
OR
there
BE-PERCEIVING for lo !
THE
21 Neither shall they say, Lo here! or, lo there! for, behold, the kingdom of God is within you.
AV
Luke 17

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
entos umwn entos humeis

Adv pp 2 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
INside
OF-YOU(p) IS of-ye maqhtas eleusontai mathEtEs erchomai

n_ Acc Pl m vi Fut midD 3 Pl
17:22 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
ote hote
Adv
He-said
YET TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples
SHALL-BE-COMING DAYS
when
22 And he said unto the disciples, The days will come, when ye shall desire to see one of the days of the Son of man, and ye shall not see [it].
epiqumhsete epithumeO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn tou hEmera ho

uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-ON-FEELING ONE ye-shall-be-yearning idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
OF-THE
DAYS
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
human
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
TO-BE-PERCEIVING AND
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING ye-shall-be-seeing-it umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
17:23 kai erousin

kai
Conj
ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ekei ekei
Adv
WH
NA
h E
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
wde hOde
Adv
Part
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-declarING to-YOU(p) to-ye

WH
23 And they shall say to you, See here; or, see there: go not after [them], nor follow [them].
BE-PERCEIVING there lo !
NA
OR
BE-PERCEIVING here lo !
mh mE
Part Neg
apelqhte mhde
WH
NA
apelqhte aperchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
mhde mEde
Conj
diwxhte diOkO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
NO
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING NO-YET ye-may-be-coming-away nor-yet astraph astrapE

n_ Nom Sg f
YE-SHOULD-BE-CHASING ye-should-be-pursuing ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
17:24 wsper gar h

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
astraptousa ek astraptO ek
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep
upo hupo
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
AS-EVEN even-as eis eis

Prep
for
THE
GLEAM-FLING GLEAM-FLINGING lightning flashing
OUT OF-THE
UNDER THE
heaven
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
up hupo
Prep
ouranon lampei ouranos lampO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
24 For as the lightning, that lighteneth out of the one [part] under heaven, shineth unto the other [part] under heaven; so shall also the Son of man be in his day.
INTO THE
UNDER heaven
NA NA
IS-SHINING
NA NA
thus
SHALL-BE
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
human
IN
THE
DAY
OF-Him
17:25 prwton
prOton
Adv
de de
Conj
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
kai apodokimasqhnai kai apodokimazO

Conj vn Aor Pas
25 But first must he suffer many things, and be rejected of this generation.
BEFORE-most YET it-IS-BINDING first apo apo

Prep
Him
much TO-BE-EMOTIONING AND many-things to-be-suffering
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths houtos
pd Gen Sg f
FROM THE
generation
this
17:26 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais nwe hEmera nOe

n_ Dat Pl f ni proper

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
26 And as it was in the days of Noe, so shall it be also in the days of the Son of man.
AND
according-AS BECAME it-occurred uiou huios
IN
THE
DAYS
of-NOAH thus of-Noah
it-SHALL-BE
AND also
IN
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tou hEmera ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
human
17:27 hsqion
esthiO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
epinon pinO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
egamoun gameO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
egamizonto gamizO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
acri hs achri hos

Prep pr Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THEY-ATE
THEY-DRANK THEY-MARRIED THEY-MARRYizED UNTIL WHICH they-gave-in-marriage kibwton kai hlqen kibOtos kai erchomai
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
DAY
INTO-CAME entered
nwe nOe
ni proper
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kataklusmos kai apwlesen kataklusmos kai apollumi

27 They did eat, they drank, they married wives, they were given in marriage, until the day that Noe entered into the ark, and the flood came, and destroyed them all.
NOAH
INTO THE
ARK
AND
CAME
THE
DOWN-SURGE deluge
AND
destroys
AV
Luke 17
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
ALL them-all
17:28 omoiws kaqws

homoiOs
Adv
kathOs
Adv
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais lwt hEmera lOt

n_ Dat Pl f ni proper
hsqion esthiO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
epinon pinO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
LIKE-AS likewise hgorazon agorazO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
according-AS it-BECAME it-occurred
IN
THE
DAYS
of-LOT of-Lot
THEY-ATE
THEY-DRANK
28 Likewise also as it was in the days of Lot; they did eat, they drank, they bought, they sold, they planted, they builded;
epwloun efuteuon wkodomoun pOleO phuteuO oikodomeO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vi impf Act 3 Pl vi impf Act 3 Pl
THEY-BOUGHT THEY-SOLD
THEY-plantED
THEY-HOME-BUILDED they-built lwt lOt

ni proper
17:29 h
hos
pr Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
sodomwn ebrexen sodoma brechO

n_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
kai qeion kai theion

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
to-WHICH YET DAY
OUT-CAME came-out
LOT
FROM SODOM
RAINS
FIRE
AND
sulphur
29 But the same day that Lot went out of Sodom it rained fire and brimstone from heaven, and destroyed [them] all.
ap apo
Prep
ouranou kai apwlesen pantas ouranos kai apollumi pas

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Pl m
FROM heaven
AND
destroys
ALL them-all estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
17:30 kata
kata
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
30 Even thus shall it be in the day when the Son of man is revealed.
according-to THE
SAME same(p)
SHALL-BE it-shall-be
to-WHICH DAY
THE
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou apokaluptetai anthrOpos apokaluptO

human
IS-beING-FROM-COVERED is-being-unveiled ekeinh th ekeinos ho

17:31 en
en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
dwmatos kai ta dOma kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Nom Pl n
IN
that
THE
DAY
WHO
SHALL-BE
ON
THE
housetop
AND
THE
skeuh skeuos
n_ Nom Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
katabatw katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
arai airO
vn Aor Act
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
31 In that day, he which shall be upon the housetop, and his stuff in the house, let him not come down to take it away: and he that is in the field, let him likewise not return back.
INSTRUMENTS OF-him gear o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
HOME house
NO
LET-him-BE-DOWN-STEPPING TO-LIFT them let-him-be-descending ! to-pick-up it(p) ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
AND
en en
Prep
agrw agros
n_ Dat Sg m
omoiws mh homoiOs mE
Adv Part Neg
epistreyatw eis epistrephO eis

opisw opisO
Adv
THE the-one
IN
FIELD
LIKE-AS likewise ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
NO
LET-him-ON-TURN let-him-turn-back !
INTO THE the(p)
BEHIND
17:32 mnhmoneuete
mnEmoneuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
gunaikos lwt gunE lOt

32
Remember Lot's wife.
BE-YE-rememberING OF-THE be-ye-remembering ! the
WOMAN wife
of-LOT of-Lot thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
17:33 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
zhthsh zEteO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
peripoihsasqai peripoieO
vn Aor Mid
WHO
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-SEEKING THE
soul
WH
OF-him
NA
TO-ABOUT-DO to-procure
33 Whosoever shall seek to save his life shall lose it; and whosoever shall lose his life shall preserve it.
apolesei apollumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
apolesei
apolesh apollumi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-destroyING her herit zwogonhsei zOogoneO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
WHO
YET EVER
SHOULD-BE-destroyING should-be-destroying-it
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
SHALL-BE-LIVE-parentING her herit shall-be-causing-to-live
17:34 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
esontai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
duo duo
ni numeral
epi klinhs epi klinE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
WH
mias
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
to-this
THE
NIGHT
SHALL-BE TWO there-shall-be
ON
couch
34 I tell you, in that night there shall be two [men] in one bed; the one shall be taken, and the other shall be left.
AV
Luke 17 - Luke 18
NA
mias heis
n_ Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
paralhmfqhsetai paralambanO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
ONE
THE
ONE
SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GOTTEN AND shall-be-being-taken-along
THE
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET shall-be-being-left
17:35 esontai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
duo duo
ni numeral
alhqousai alEthO
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
35 Two [women] shall be grinding together; the one shall be taken, and the other left.
SHALL-BE TWO there-shall-be paralhmfqhsetai paralambanO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
GRINDING women-grinding h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ON
THE
SAME THE same-place afeqhsetai aphiEmi

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
ONE one(f)
de de
Conj
etera heteros
a_ Nom Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GOTTEN THE shall-be-being-taken-along
YET DIFFERENT SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET different-one(f) shall-be-being-left

36 Two [men] shall be in the field; the one shall be taken, and the other left.
17:36
. .
.
. .
.
17:37 kai apokriqentes legousin

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
answerING
?-where Master ! where ? Lord ! aetoi aetos

n_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET He-said
autois opou autos hopou

pp Dat Pl m Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ekei kai oi ekei kai ho

37 And they answered and said unto him, Where, Lord? And he said unto them, Wheresoever the body [is], thither will the eagles be gathered together.
to-them
THE-?-where THE wherever
BODY
there
AND also
THE
VULTURES
episunacqhsontai episunagO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-TOGETHER-LED shall-be-being-assembled
AV
Luke 18
18:1 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
parabolhn autois pros parabolE autos pros

n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dein deO
vn Pres im-Act
pantote pantote
Adv
He-said he-told
YET BESIDE-CAST parable
to-them them
TOWARD THE
TO-BE-BINDING always
. And he spake a parable unto them [to this end], that men ought always to pray, and not to faint;
proseucesqai autous kai mh proseuchomai autos kai mE

vn Pres midD/pasD pp Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg
egkakein egkakeO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-prayING
them
AND
NO
TO-BE-IN-EVILING to-be-being-despondent hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
18:2 legwn
legO
kriths kritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tini tis
px Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
Saying, There was in a city a judge, which feared not God, neither regarded man:
sayING
JUDGer judge
ANY certain
WAS
IN
ANY certain
city
THE
God
mh mE
Part Neg
foboumenos phobeO
kai anqrwpon mh kai anthrOpos mE

Conj n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
entrepomenos entrepO
NO
FEARING
AND
human
NO
abashING respecting ekeinh kai hrceto ekeinos kai erchomai

pd Dat Sg f Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
18:3 chra
chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
pros pros
Prep
WIDOW
YET WAS there-was
IN
THE
city
that
AND
she-CAME
TOWARD
And there was a widow in that city; and she came unto him, saying, Avenge me of mine adversary.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legousa legO
ekdikhson me ekdikeO egO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
antidikou antidikos
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
him
sayING
OUT-JUST avenge-you ! hqelen thelO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
ME
FROM THE
WH
INSTEAD-JUSTer OF-ME plaintiff

WH NA
18:4 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
epi cronon epi chronos

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
meta meta
Prep
tauta de
de de
Conj
NA
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
AND
NOT
he-WILLED he-would kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
ON
TIME
after
YET these
he-said
IN
And he would not for a while: but afterward he said within himself, Though I fear not God, nor regard man;
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
foboumai phobeO
oude oude
Adv
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
self himself
IF
AND THE even
God
NOT
I-AM-FEARING
NOT-YET human nor
entrepomai entrepO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
I-AM-beING-abashED I-am-respecting
18:5 dia
dia
Prep
ge ge
Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
parecein parechO
vn Pres Act
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kopon kopos
n_ Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
chran chEra
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
THRU SURELY THE because-of ekdikhsw ekdikeO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
TO-BE-tenderING to-ME to-be-affording me ina hina

Conj
toil weariness
THE
WIDOW
this
Yet because this widow troubleth me, I will avenge her, lest by her continual coming she weary me.
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
ercomenh erchomai
upwpiazh hupOpiazO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-OUT-JUSTING her I-shall-be-avenging me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
THAT NO
INTO FINISH COMING consummation
she-MAY-BE-belaborING
ME
18:6 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
akousate ti akouO tis

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kriths kritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
And the Lord said, Hear what the unjust judge saith.
said
YET THE
Master Lord
HEAR hear-ye !
ANY what ?
THE
JUDGer judge
OF-THE
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
UN-JUSTness IS-sayING injustice
18:7 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekdikhsin twn ekdikEsis ho

THE
YET God
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
OUT-JUSTing avenging
OF-THE
And shall not God avenge his own elect, which cry day and night unto him, though he bear long with them?
AV
Luke 18
eklektwn autou eklektos autos

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
bowntwn boaO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
kai nuktos kai makroqumei kai nux kai makrothumeO

Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
CHOSEN-ones chosen-ones ep epi

Prep
OF-Him
THE
ones-IMPLORING ones-imploring
to-Him him
OF-DAY day
AND
OF-NIGHT night
AND
IS-FAR-FEELING he-is-being-patient
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ON
them
18:8 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti poihsei hoti poieO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekdikhsin autwn ekdikEsis autos

en en
Prep
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye uios huios
that
He-SHALL-BE-DOING THE
OF-them
IN
SWIFTness
I tell you that he will avenge them speedily. Nevertheless when the Son of man cometh, shall he find faith on the earth?
plhn plEn
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou elqwn anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
ara ara
Part Int
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
n_ Nom Sg m
MOREly THE moreover thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
SON
OF-THE
human
COMING
CONSEQUENTLY He-SHALL-BE-FINDING
pistin epi ths pistis epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
BELIEF faith
ON
THE
LAND earth tinas tis

px Acc Pl m
18:9 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pepoiqotas peithO
vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl m
ef epi
Prep
eautois oti heautou hoti

pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj
He-said
YET AND also
TOWARD ANY some
THE
HAVING-confidence ON ones-having-confidence loipous thn loipon ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
selves themselves
that
. And he spake this parable unto certain which trusted in themselves that they were righteous, and despised others:
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
dikaioi kai exouqenountas tous dikaios kai exoutheneO ho

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
parabolhn tauthn parabolE houtos

THEY-ARE
JUST
AND
scornING
THE
rest rest(p) ieron hieron

n_ Acc Sg n
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
this
NA
18:10 anqrwpoi duo

anthrOpos
n_ Nom Pl m
duo
ni numeral
anebhsan eis anabainO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proseuxasqai proseuchomai
vn Aor midD
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
humans
TWO
UP-STEPPed went-up
INTO THE
SACRED-place TO-pray sanctuary telwnhs telOnEs

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
10 Two men went up into the temple to pray; the one a Pharisee, and the other a publican.
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
farisaios kai o pharisaios kai ho

eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
ONE
PHARISEE
AND
THE
DIFFERENT tribute-collector different-one

WH
18:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
farisaios staqeis pharisaios histEmi

n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
tauta pros eauton
WH
WH
NA
pros pros
Prep
NA
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
THE
NA
PHARISEE
BEING-STOOD standing o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD self himself eucaristw soi eucharisteO su

tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
proshuceto proseuchomai
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
11 The Pharisee stood and prayed thus with himself, God, I thank thee, that I am not as other men [are], extortioners, unjust, adulterers, or even as this publican.
these
prayED
THE
God
I-AM-thankING
to-YOU you
that
NOT
I-AM
wsper oi hOsper ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn arpages adikoi anthrOpos harpax adikos

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
moicoi moichos
n_ Nom Pl m
h E
Part
kai ws kai hOs

Conj Adv
AS-EVEN even-as outos houtos
THE
rest rest(p)
OF-THE
humans
SNATCHers UN-JUST rapacious unjust
ADULTERers OR
AND AS even
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
telwnhs telOnEs
n_ Nom Sg m
pd Nom Sg m
this
THE
tribute-collector
WH NA
18:12 nhsteuw dis tou

nEsteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dis
Adv
ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou sabbaton
n_ Gen Sg n
apodekateuw
apodekatw apodekatoO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
12 I fast twice in the week, I give tithes of all that I possess.
I-AM-fastING
twice
OF-THE
SABBATH
I-AM-FROM-TENthING I-am-taking-tithes-from
ALL
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
ktwmai ktaomai
as-much-as I-AM-ACQUIRING whatever
AV
Luke 18
18:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
telwnhs telOnEs
n_ Nom Sg m
makroqen estws makrothen histEmi

Adv vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THE
YET tribute-collector FAR-PLACE afar-off eis eis

Prep
NOT
WILLED would to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
NOT-YET THE not-yeteven sthqos stEthos

n_ Acc Sg n
WH
ofqalmous eparai ophthalmos epairO

n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon all etupten ouranos alla tuptO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
eautou
13 And the publican, standing afar off, would not lift up so much as [his] eyes unto heaven, but smote upon his breast, saying, God be merciful to me a sinner.
VIEWers eyes
NA
TO-ON-LIFT INTO THE to-lift-up legwn legO

heaven
but
BEAT(past)
THE
CHEST
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ilasqhti hilaskomai
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-him
sayING
THE
God
BE-BEING-PROPITIATED to-ME bemake-you-a-propitiatory-shelter !
THE
amartwlw hamartOlos
a_ Dat Sg m
misser sinner
18:14 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
katebh katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
dedikaiwmenos dikaioO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
DOWN-STEPPed this-one descended this-man o ho
HAVING-been-JUSTIFIED INTO THE
HOME
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
par para
Prep
ekeinon oti pas ekeinos hoti pas

pd Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
uywn hupsoO
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
14 I tell you, this man went down to his house justified [rather] than the other: for every one that exalteth himself shall be abased; and he that humbleth himself shall be exalted.
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-him
BESIDE that-one that-one o ho
that
EVERY
THE
one-HEIGHTenING one-exalting eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
self himself
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tapeinwn tapeinoO
uywqhsetai hupsoO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-LOW THE shall-be-being-humbled
YET one-makING-LOW one-humbling de de

Conj
self himself brefh brephos

n_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED shall-be-being-exalted ina hina

Conj
18:15 proseferon
prospherO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
autwn apthtai autos haptO

pp Gen Pl n vs Pres Mid 3 Sg
THEY-TOWARD-CARRIED YET to-Him they-brought-to him idontes eidO

AND also
THE
BABES
THAT OF-them them
He-MAY-BE-TOUCHING
15 . And they brought unto him also infants, that he would touch them: but when [his] disciples saw [it], they rebuked them.
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai epetimwn autois mathEtEs epitimaO autos

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m
YET THE
LEARNers disciples
rebukED
to-them them
WH
18:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
prosekalesato proskaleomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
auta
NA
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
legwn legO
THE
YET JESUS
TOWARD-CALLS calls-toward-him ercesqai erchomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
them
sayING
16 But Jesus called them [unto him], and said, Suffer little children to come unto me, and forbid them not: for of such is the kingdom of God.
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paidia paidion
n_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
FROM-LET let-ye ! auta autos

pp Acc Pl n
THE
little-boys-and-girls TO-BE-COMING
TOWARD ME
AND
NO
BE-FORBIDDING be-ye-forbidding ! qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

them
OF-THE
for
such such(p) umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
18:17 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
dexhtai dechomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
AMEN verily tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WHO
EVER NO
SHOULD-BE-RECEIVING THE
KINGdom
17 Verily I say unto you, Whosoever shall not receive the kingdom of God as a little child shall in no wise enter therein.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ws paidion hOs paidion

Adv n_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
eiselqh eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
OF-THE
God
AS
little-boy (-or-girl) NOT
NO
MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO her herit may-be-entering legwn legO

18:18 kai ephrwthsen tis

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tis
px Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
didaskale agaqe didaskalos agathos

n_ Voc Sg m a_ Voc Sg m
AND
inquirES-of
ANY certain
Him
chief
sayING
TEACHer !
GOOD !
18 . And a certain ruler asked him, saying, Good Master, what shall I do to inherit eternal life?
AV
Luke 18
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f

a_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 1 Sg / vs Aor Act 1 Sg
ANY what ?
DOing
LIFE
eonian
I-SHOULD-BE-tenantING I-should-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
18:19 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
agaqon agathos
a_ Acc Sg m
said
YET to-him
THE
JESUS
WH
ANY why ? o
NA
ME
YOU-ARE-sayING GOOD you-are-terming qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
19 And Jesus said unto him, Why callest thou me good? none [is] good, save one, [that is], God.
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
agaqos agathos
a_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE GOOD no-one
IF
NO
ONE
THE
God
18:20 tas
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
entolas oidas entolE eidO

mh mE
Part Neg
moiceushs moicheuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
directions precepts
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED NO you-are-acquainted-with mh mE
Part Neg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ADULTERING NO you-should-be-committing-adultery mh mE
Part Neg
foneushs phoneuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
kleyhs kleptO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
yeudomarturhshs pseudomartureO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
20 Thou knowest the commandments, Do not commit adultery, Do not kill, Do not steal, Do not bear false witness, Honour thy father and thy mother.
YOU-SHOULD-BE-MURDERING NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-stealING NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-FALSE-witnessING you-should-be-testifying-falsely
tima timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera mEtEr
n_ Acc Sg f
BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring !
FATHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
MOTHER
18:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
efulaxa phulassO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
neothtos neotEs
n_ Gen Sg f
21 And he said, All these have I kept from my youth up.
THE
YET he-said
these
ALL
I-GUARD I-maintain eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OUT OF-YOUTH
18:22 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eti eti
Adv
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
HEARing hearing-this leipei leipO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-him
STILL ONE one-thing
to-YOU
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
pwlhson pOleO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
kai diados kai diadidOmi

ptwcois ptOchos
a_ Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
22 Now when Jesus heard these things, he said unto him, Yet lackest thou one thing: sell all that thou hast, and distribute unto the poor, and thou shalt have treasure in heaven: and come, follow me.
IS-LACKING
ALL
as-much-as YOU-ARE-HAVING SELL whatever sell-you ! qhsauron thEsauros

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BE-THRU-GIVING to-POOR-ones AND be-you-distributing ! to-poor-ones akolouqei akoloutheO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
exeis echO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois kai deuro ouranos kai deuro

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING PLACED-INTO-MORROW IN treasure moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
heavens
AND
HITHER hither-you !
YOU-BE-followING be-you-following !
to-ME me
18:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
perilupos perilupos
a_ Nom Sg m
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar gar
Conj
23 And when he heard this, he was very sorrowful: for he was very rich.
THE
YET one-HEARing hearing
these ABOUT-SORROW WAS-BECOMED he-WAS these-things sorrow-stricken he-was-become
for
plousios sfodra plousios sphodra

a_ Nom Sg m Adv
RICH
VEHEMENTLY tremendously de de
Conj
18:24 idwn
eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
WH
WH
ihsous
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
perilupon perilupos
a_ Acc Sg m
PERCEIVING
NA
YET him
THE
JESUS
ABOUT-SORROW sorrow-stricken
24 And when Jesus saw that he was very sorrowful, he said, How hardly shall they that have riches enter into the kingdom of God!
genomenon ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pws duskolws oi pOs duskolOs ho

Adv Adv t_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
crhmata econtes chrEma echO

n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
BECOMING
He-said said
how
ILL-VICTUALly squeamishly
THE-ones the-ones
THE
moneys money(p)
HAVING
AV
Luke 18
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eisporeuontai eisporeuomai
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
ARE-INTO-GOING are-going-into kamhlon dia kamElos dia

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
18:25 eukopwteron gar estin

eukopOteros
a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
gar
Conj
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
trhmatos belonhs eiselqein trEma belonE eiserchomai

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act
easier
for
IS it-is
CAMEL
THRU BORE through eye qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-bodkin
25 For it is easier for a camel to go through a needle's eye, than for a rich man to enter into the kingdom of God.
h E
Part
plousion eis plousios eis

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

vn 2Aor Act
OR RICH than rich-man
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
TO-BE-INTO-COMING to-be-entering dunatai dunamai

18:26 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akousantes kai tis akouO kai tis

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj pi Nom Sg m
swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
26 And they that heard [it] said, Who then can be saved?
say
YET THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing-it ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
AND
ANY who ?
IS-ABLE can
TO-BE-SAVED
18:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
adunata para adunatos para

a_ Nom Pl n Prep
anqrwpois dunata para anthrOpos dunatos para

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
27 And he said, The things which are impossible with men are possible with God.
THE
YET He-said
THE the-things
UN-ABLES impossible
BESIDE humans
ABLE possible
BESIDE THE
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
God
IS
18:28 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
afentes aphiEmi
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
28 Then Peter said, Lo, we have left all, and followed thee.
said
YET THE
Peter
BE-PERCEIVING WE lo !
THE
OWN own(p)
hkolouqhsamen soi akoloutheO su

follow
to-YOU you de de
Conj
18:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
YET He-said
to-them
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT-YET-ONE IS no-one there-is h E

Part
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
h E
Part
gunaika h gunE E
n_ Acc Sg f Part
n_ Acc Pl m Part
goneis goneus
n_ Acc Pl m
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
eneken heneken
Adv
29 And he said unto them, Verily I say unto you, There is no man that hath left house, or parents, or brethren, or wife, or children, for the kingdom of God's sake,
WHO
FROM-LETS leaves
HOME house
OR
WOMAN wife
OR
brothers
OR
parents
OR
offsprings children
on-account-of
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE the
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
WH NA
18:30 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
labh
apolabh apolambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pollaplasiona en pollaplasiOn en
a_ Acc Pl n Prep
WHO
NOT(emph.) NO
MAY-BE-FROM-GETTING may-be-getting-back tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
MANY-FOLD manyfold ercomenw erchomai

IN
30 Who shall not receive manifold more in this present time, and in the world to come life everlasting.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw kai en houtos kai en

pd Dat Sg m Conj Prep
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
SEASON era
this
AND
IN
THE
eon
THE
COMING
LIFE
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
eonian
18:31 paralabwn
paralambanO
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka eipen dOdeka legO

ni numeral vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous idou autos idou

pp Acc Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
BESIDE-GETTING taking-aside
YET THE
TWO-TEN twelve
He-said
TOWARD them
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
31 . Then he took [unto him] the twelve, and said unto them, Behold, we go up to Jerusalem, and all things that are written by the prophets concerning the
AV
Luke 18
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm kai telesqhsetai ierosoluma kai teleO

ni proper Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
Son of man accomplished.
shall
be
WE-ARE-UP-STEPPING INTO JERUSALEM we-are-going-up gegrammena graphO

AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-FINISHED ALL shall-be-being-accomplished tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
THE the-things tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-WRITTEN THRU THE through
BEFORE-AVERers to-THE prophets gar tois gar ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
SON
OF-THE
human
18:32 paradoqhsetai
paradidOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
eqnesin kai empaicqhsetai ethnos kai empaizO

n_ Dat Pl n Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN for he-shall-be-being-given-up ubrisqhsetai hubrizO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
to-THE
NATIONS
AND
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-sportED AND shall-be-being-scoffed-at
32 For he shall be delivered unto the Gentiles, and shall be mocked, and spitefully entreated, and spitted on:
kai emptusqhsetai kai emptuO

He-SHALL-BE-BEING-OUTRAGED AND shall-be-being-outraged
He-SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-SPAT shall-be-being-spat-inupon auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
18:33 kai mastigwsantes apoktenousin

kai
Conj
mastigoO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
apokteinO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
scourging scourging-him
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Him they-shall-be-killing
AND
to-THE
DAY
THE
33 And they shall scourge [him], and put him to death: and the third day he shall rise again.
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
anasthsetai anistEmi
vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
third
He-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING he-shall-be-rising ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
18:34 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
sunhkan kai hn suniEmi kai eimi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
they
NOT-YET-ONE OF-these understand nothing of-these-things ap apo

Prep
AND
WAS
THE
declaration
34 And they understood none of these things: and this saying was hid from them, neither knew they the things which were spoken.
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
kekrummenon kruptO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
eginwskon ta ginOskO ho
vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
legomena legO
this
HAVING-been-HID
FROM them
AND
NOT
THEY-KNEW
THE beING-said the-things iericw tuflos ierichO tuphlos

ni proper a_ Nom Sg m
18:35 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
eggizein eggizO
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
BECAME it-occurred ekaqhto kathEmai

YET IN
THE
TO-BE-NEARING Him
INTO JERICHO
BLIND blind-man
ANY certain
35 . And it came to pass, that as he was come nigh unto Jericho, a certain blind man sat by the way side begging:
para para
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
epaitwn epaiteO
sat
BESIDE THE
WAY road
ON-REQUESTING being-a-mendicant diaporeuomenou diaporeuomai

18:36 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
36 And hearing the multitude pass by, he asked what it meant.
HEARing
YET OF-THRONG THRU-GOING throng going-through
he-ASCERTAINED-UP ANY he-ascertained what ?
MAY-BE
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
this
18:37 aphggeilan
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oti ihsous hoti iEsous

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nazwraios parercetai nazOraios parerchomai

37 And they told him, that Jesus of Nazareth passeth by.
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE YET to-him they-report
that
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
IS-BESIDE-COMING is-passing-by me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
38 And he cried, saying, Jesus, [thou] Son of David, have mercy on me.
18:38 kai ebohsen

kai
Conj
boaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
ihsou iEsous
n_ Voc Sg m
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m

AND
he-IMPLORES sayING
JESUS !
SON !
of-DAVID BE-MERCIFUL-to ME of-David be-you-merciful-to ! ina hina

Conj
18:39 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
proagontes proagO
epetimwn autw epitimaO autos

sighsh sigaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
AND
THE
ones-BEFORE-LEADING rebukED ones-preceding
to-him him
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-HUSHING he
39 And they which went before rebuked him, that he should hold his peace: but he cried so much the more, [Thou] Son of David, have mercy on me.
AV
Luke 18 - Luke 19
de de
Conj
pollw mallon ekrazen polus mallon krazO

a_ Dat Sg n Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg
uie huios
n_ Voc Sg m

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
YET to-much much
RATHER the-more
CRIED
NA
SON !
of-DAVID BE-MERCIFUL-to ME of-David be-you-merciful-to ! ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
18:40 staqeis
histEmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekeleusen auton keleuO autos

acqhnai pros agO pros

vn Aor Pas Prep
BEING-STOOD standing auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
YET
THE
JESUS
ORDERS
him
TO-BE-LED
TOWARD
40 And Jesus stood, and commanded him to be brought unto him: and when he was come near, he asked him,
eggisantos eggizO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ephrwthsen auton eperOtaO autos

Him
OF-NEARing of-drawing-near soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
YET him of-him qeleis thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
He-inquirES-of
him
18:41 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
ANY what ? anableyw anablepO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
to-YOU
YOU-ARE-WILLING I-SHALL-BE-DOING THE
YET he-said
Master ! Lord !
THAT
41 Saying, What wilt thou that I shall do unto thee? And he said, Lord, that I may receive my sight.
I-SHOULD-BE-UP-lookING I-should-be-receiving-sight
18:42 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anableyon anablepO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
42 And Jesus said unto him, Receive thy sight: thy faith hath saved thee.
AND
THE
JESUS
said
to-him
UP-look THE receive-sight-you !
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU
seswken sOzO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
HAS-SAVED
YOU
18:43 kai paracrhma anebleyen

kai
Conj
parachrEma
Adv
anablepO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai hkolouqei autw kai akoloutheO autos

doxazwn doxazO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
instantly
he-UP-looks AND he-receives-sight laos laos

n_ Nom Sg m
followED
to-Him him edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
esteemizING glorifying ainon ainos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
God
43 And immediately he received his sight, and followed him, glorifying God: and all the people, when they saw [it], gave praise unto God.
kai pas kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
GIVES
PRAISE
to-THE
God
AV
Luke 19
19:1 kai eiselqwn

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
dihrceto dierchomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
iericw ierichO
ni proper
. And [Jesus] entered and passed through Jericho.
AND
He-THRU-CAME he-passed-trough anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
JERICHO
19:2 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
onomati kaloumenos onoma kaleO

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
zakcaios kai autos zakchaios kai autos

n_ Nom Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
to-NAME
beING-CALLED
ZACCHEUS
AND
he
WAS
And, behold, [there was] a man named Zacchaeus, which was the chief among the publicans, and he was rich.
arcitelwnhs kai autos architelOnEs kai autos

n_ Nom Sg m Conj pp Nom Sg m
plousios plousios
a_ Nom Sg m
chief-tribute-collector
AND
he
RICH
19:3 kai ezhtei

kai
Conj
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
AND
he-SOUGHT
JESUS
ANY who ? hlikia hElikia

n_ Dat Sg f
He-IS
AND
NOT
And he sought to see Jesus who he was; and could not for the press, because he was little of stature.
hdunato dunamai
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti th hoti ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
mikros mikros
a_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
was-ABLE
FROM THE
THRONG
that
to-THE
PRIME stature anebh anabainO
LITTLE
he-WAS
19:4 kai prodramwn

kai
Conj
protrechO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
Adv
epi sukomorean ina epi sukomorea hina

Prep n_ Acc Sg f Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
BEFORE-RUNNING running-before
INTO THE
IN-TOWARD-PLACE he-UP-STEPPed ON in-front he-climbed-up diercesqai dierchomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
FIG-MULBERRY
THAT
And he ran before, and climbed up into a sycomore tree to see him: for he was to pass that [way].
idh eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oti ekeinhs hmellen hoti ekeinos mellO

Conj pd Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg Att
he-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING Him
that
OF-that that-way
WAS-ABOUT he-was-about
TO-BE-THRU-COMING to-be-passing-through
WH
19:5 kai ws hlqen

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
anableyas anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
AS
He-CAME
ON
THE
PLACE
UP-looking looking-up katabhqi katabainO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
JESUS
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
zakcaie zakchaios
n_ Voc Sg m
speusas speudO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
shmeron gar en sEmeron gar en

Adv Conj Prep
And when Jesus came to the place, he looked up, and saw him, and said unto him, Zacchaeus, make haste, and come down; for to day I must abide at thy house.
said
TOWARD him
ZACCHEUS ! being-DILIGENT
DOWN-STEP toDAY be-you-descending !
for
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
meinai menO
vn Aor Act
THE
HOME house
OF-YOU
it-IS-BINDING
ME
TO-REMAIN
19:6 kai speusas

kai
Conj
speudO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
katebh katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai upedexato kai hupodechomai

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
cairwn chairO
And he made haste, and came down, and received him joyfully.
AND
being-DILIGENT
he-DOWN-STEPPed AND he-descended pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
UNDER-RECEIVES Him entertains legontes legO

JOYING rejoicing oti para hoti para

Conj Prep
19:7 kai idontes

kai
Conj
eidO
diegogguzon diagogguzO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
amartwlw hamartOlos
a_ Dat Sg m
AND
PERCEIVING perceiving-it eishlqen eiserchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ALL
THRU-MURMURED sayING grumbled
that
BESIDE misser sinning
And when they saw [it], they all murmured, saying, That he was gone to be guest with a man that is a sinner.
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
katalusai kataluO
vn Aor Act
MAN
He-INTO-CAME TO-DOWN-LOOSE he-entered to-put-up-for-the-night de de

Conj
19:8 staqeis
histEmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
zakcaios eipen zakchaios legO

pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
BEING-STOOD standing hmisia hEmisu

a_ Acc Pl n
YET ZACCHEUS
said
TOWARD THE
WH
Master Lord
NA
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! ptwcois ptOchos

a_ Dat Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
uparcontwn kurie huparchO kurios

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n n_ Voc Sg m
tois
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
And Zacchaeus stood, and said unto the Lord; Behold, Lord, the half of my goods I give to the poor; and if I have taken any thing from any man by false accusation, I restore [him] fourfold.
HALF-EQUAL OF-ME half(p)
OF-THE
Master ! Lord !
to-THE
POOR-ones poor-ones
AV
Luke 19
didwmi didOmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai ei kai ei
Conj Cond
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
esukofanthsa apodidwmi sukophanteO apodidOmi

vi Aor Act 1 Sg vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tetraploun tetraplous
a_ Acc Sg n
I-AM-GIVING
AND
IF
OF-ANY of-anyone pros pros

Prep
ANY anything auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
I-FIG-ALLEGE I-blackmail
WH
I-AM-FROM-GIVING quadruple I-am-giving-back fourfold ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
19:9 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oti shmeron swthria hoti sEmeron sOtEria

said
YET TOWARD him
THE
JESUS
that
toDAY
SAVing salvation
And Jesus said unto him, This day is salvation come to this house, forsomuch as he also is a son of Abraham.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw egeneto houtos ginomai

pd Dat Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kaqoti kathoti
Adv
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
to-THE
WH
HOME
NA
this
BECAME
DOWN-that AND forasmuch-as also
he
SON
estin
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
19:10 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou zhthsai kai swsai to anthrOpos zEteO kai sOzO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Conj vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n
10 For the Son of man is come to seek and to save that which was lost.
CAME
for
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
TO-SEEK
AND
TO-SAVE THE
apolwlos apollumi
one-HAVING-destroyED being-lost
19:11 akouontwn
akouO
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
prosqeis prostithEmi
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
parabolhn dia parabolE dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
OF-HEARING
YET them of-them
these addING these-things
He-said he-told
BESIDE-CAST parable
THRU because-of
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eggus einai eggus eimi

Adv vn Pres vxx
ierousalhm auton ierosoluma autos

ni proper pp Acc Sg m
kai dokein kai dokeO

Conj vn Pres Act
autous oti paracrhma autos hoti parachrEma

pp Acc Pl m Conj Adv
11 . And as they heard these things, he added and spake a parable, because he was nigh to Jerusalem, and because they thought that the kingdom of God should immediately appear.
THE
NEAR
TO-BE
JERUSALEM
Him
AND
TO-BE-SEEMING them to-be-supposing
that
instantly
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
anafainesqai anaphainO
vn Pres Pas
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
TO-BE-UP-APPEARING to-be-looming-up eugenhs eugenEs

a_ Nom Sg m
19:12 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj

eporeuqh poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
makran makros
a_ Acc Sg f
He-said
THEN human
ANY certain
WELL-generated WAS-GONE noble went
INTO SPACE country
FAR
12 He said therefore, A certain nobleman went into a far country to receive for himself a kingdom, and to return.
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
basileian kai upostreyai basileia kai hupostrephO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vn Aor Act
TO-BE-GETTING to-self to-be-obtaining to-himself
KINGdom
AND
TO-reTURN
19:13 kalesas
kaleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
deka deka
ni numeral
doulous eautou doulos heautou

n_ Acc Pl m pf 3 Gen Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois deka autos deka

pp Dat Pl m ni numeral
mnas mna
n_ Acc Pl f
kai kai
Conj
CALLing
YET TEN
SLAVES
WH
OF-self of-selfhim
he-GIVES
NA
to-them
TEN
MINAS
AND
13 And he called his ten servants, and delivered them ten pounds, and said unto them, Occupy till I come.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
pragmateusasqai
pragmateusasqe pragmateuomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
said
TOWARD them
PRACTISE go-into-business-ye !
IN
WHICH
ercomai erchomai
I-AM-COMING
19:14 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
politai autou politEs autos

emisoun miseO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

presbeian presbeia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET citizens
OF-him
HATED
him
AND
THEY-commission embassy they-dispatch
14 But his citizens hated him, and sent a message after him, saying, We will not have this [man] to reign over us.
AV
Luke 19

Adv pp Gen Sg m
legontes legO
ou ou
Part Neg
qelomen thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
touton basileusai ef houtos basileuO epi

pd Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
BEHIND after
him
sayING
NOT
WE-ARE-WILLING this-one this-man auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TO-reign
ON US onover thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
15 And it came to pass, that when he was returned, having received the kingdom, then he commanded these servants to be called unto him, to whom he had given the money, that he might know how much every man had gained by trading.
19:15 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
epanelqein epanerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
labonta lambanO
AND
BECAME it-occurred
IN
THE
TO-BE-ON-UP-COMING him to-be-coming-back autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
GETTING obtaining
THE
basileian kai eipen basileia kai legO

fwnhqhnai phOneO
vn Aor Pas
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
doulous toutous ois doulos houtos hos

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m pr Dat Pl m
KINGdom
AND also to ho
said he-said
TO-BE-SOUNDED to-him to-summon argurion ina argurion hina

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
THE
SLAVES
these
to-WHOM
dedwkei didOmi
gnoi ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
diepragmateusanto diapragmateuomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
t_ Acc Sg n
he-HAD-GIVEN
THE
SILVER
THAT he-MAY-BE-KNOWING ANY what ? prwtos prOtos

a_ Nom Sg m
THEY-THRU-PRACTISE they-do-business kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
19:16 paregeneto de
paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legwn legO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mna mna
n_ Nom Sg f
16 Then came the first, saying, Lord, thy pound hath gained ten pounds.
BESIDE-BECAME YET THE came-along sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
BEFORE-most sayING first-one
Master ! Lord !
THE
MINA
deka deka
ni numeral
proshrgasato mnas prosergazomai mna

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl f
OF-YOU
TEN
TOWARD-ACTS earns autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
MINAS
19:17 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
euge euge
Adv
agaqe agathos
a_ Voc Sg m
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
elacistw elachistos
a_ Dat Sg n
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
AND
he-said
to-him
WELL-SURELY GOOD ! well-done !
SLAVE !
that
IN
INFERIOR-most BELIEVing least faithful
17 And he said unto him, Well, thou good servant: because thou hast been faithful in a very little, have thou authority over ten cities.
egenou ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 2 Sg
isqi eimi
vm Pres vxx 2 Sg
exousian ecwn exousia echO

epanw deka epanO deka

Adv ni numeral
polewn polis
n_ Gen Pl f
YOU-BECAME
YOU-BE be-you ! o ho
authority
HAVING
ON-UP over
TEN
OF-cities cities mna mna

n_ Nom Sg f
19:18 kai hlqen

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
deuteros legwn deuteros legO

a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
18 And the second came, saying, Lord, thy pound hath gained five pounds.
AND
CAME
THE
second second-one
sayING
THE
MINA
OF-YOU
Master ! Lord !
epoihsen pente mnas poieO pente mna

vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f
makES
FIVE
MINAS
19:19 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai toutw kai su kai houtos kai su

Conj pd Dat Sg m Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
epanw ginou epanO ginomai

Adv vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
pente polewn pente polis

ni numeral n_ Gen Pl f
19 And he said likewise to him, Be thou also over five cities.
he-said
YET AND also
to-this-one to-this-one
AND
OF-YOU you legwn legO
ON-UP over
BE-BECOMING be-you-becoming ! kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
FIVE
OF-cities cities h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
20 And another came, saying, Lord, behold, [here is] thy pound, which I have kept laid up in a napkin:
19:20 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
THE
DIFFERENT CAME different-one hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
sayING
Master ! Lord ! en en
Prep
mna mna
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eicon echO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
apokeimenhn apokeimai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg f
soudariw soudarion
n_ Dat Sg n
MINA
OF-YOU
WHICH
I-HAD
beING-reservED
IN
handkerchief
19:21 efoboumhn
phobeO
gar se gar su
Conj pp 2 Acc Sg
oti anqrwpos austhros ei hoti anthrOpos austEros eimi

Conj n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
aireis airO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
I-FEARED
for
YOU
that
human
STRINGENT harsh o hos

pr Acc Sg n
YOU-ARE
YOU-ARE-LIFTING you-are-picking-up
21 For I feared thee, because thou art an austere man: thou takest up that thou layedst not down, and reapest that thou didst not sow.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
eqhkas tithEmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
kai qerizeis kai therizO

ouk ou
Part Neg
espeiras speirO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
WHICH
NOT
YOU-PLACE you-lay-down
AND
YOU-ARE-reapING WHICH
NOT
YOU-SOW
AV
Luke 19
19:22 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
stomatos sou stoma su

krinw krinO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ponhre ponEros
a_ Voc Sg m
he-IS-sayING
to-him
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-YOU
I-SHALL-BE-JUDGING YOU
wicked !
doule doulos
n_ Voc Sg m
hdeis eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
anqrwpos austhros eimi anthrOpos austEros eimi

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
airwn airO
22 And he saith unto him, Out of thine own mouth will I judge thee, [thou] wicked servant. Thou knewest that I was an austere man, taking up that I laid not down, and reaping that I did not sow:
SLAVE !
YOU-HAD-PERCEIVED that you-were-aware ouk ou

Part Neg
human
STRINGENT harsh ouk ou

Part Neg
AM
LIFTING picking-up
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
eqhka tithEmi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai qerizwn kai therizO

o hos
pr Acc Sg n
espeira speirO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
WHICH
NOT
I-PLACE I-lay-down ti tis
AND
reapING
WHICH
NOT
I-SOW
19:23 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
ouk ou
Part Neg
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
argurion epi trapezan argurion epi trapeza

n_ Acc Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg f
pi Acc Sg n
AND
THRU ANY because-of what ? elqwn erchomai

NOT
YOU-GIVE
OF-ME
THE
SILVER
ON
table bank
23 Wherefore then gavest not thou my money into the bank, that at my coming I might have required mine own with usury?
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
sun sun
Prep
tokw tokos
n_ Dat Sg m
an an
Part
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
epraxa prassO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AND-I
COMING
TOGETHER to-BRING-FORTH EVER it togetherwith interest eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
I-PRACTISE utilize ap apo

Prep
19:24 kai tois

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
arate airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mnan mna
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
to-THE
HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD he-said ones-standing-by tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
LIFT FROM him take-away-ye ! econti echO

THE
MINA
24 And he said unto them that stood by, Take from him the pound, and give [it] to him that hath ten pounds.
kai dote kai didOmi

tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
deka deka
ni numeral
mnas mna
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
BE-GIVING to-THE-one THE be-ye-giving-it ! to-the-one autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
TEN
MINAS
HAVING
19:25 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
deka deka
ni numeral
mnas mna
n_ Acc Pl f
25 (And they said unto him, Lord, he hath ten pounds.)
AND
THEY-say
to-him
master ! Lord !
he-IS-HAVING TEN
MINAS
19:26 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti panti hoti pas

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
econti echO
doqhsetai didOmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
de de
Conj
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
to-EVERY-one THE to-everyone kai o kai hos

Conj pr Nom Sg n
HAVING
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN FROM YET
26 For I say unto you, That unto every one which hath shall be given; and from him that hath not, even that he hath shall be taken away from him.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
econtos echO
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arqhsetai airO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE the-one
NO
HAVING
AND also
WHICH
IS-HAVING he-is-having
SHALL-BE-BEING-LIFTED shall-be-being-taken-away mh mE
Part Neg
19:27 plhn
plEn
Adv
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ecqrous mou echthros egO

toutous tous houtos ho

pd Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
qelhsantas me thelO egO

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m pp 1 Acc Sg
MOREly THE moreover basileusai ep basileuO epi

vn Aor Act Prep
enemies
OF-ME
these
THE-ones the-ones
NO
WILLing
ME
27 But those mine enemies, which would not that I should reign over them, bring hither, and slay [them] before me.
autous agagete autos agO

pp Acc Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
wde kai katasfaxate autous emprosqen hOde kai katasphazO autos emprosthen
Adv Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Acc Pl m Prep
TO-reign
ON them onover
BE-LEADING here be-ye-leading-them !
AND
DOWN-SLAY slay-ye !
them
IN-TOWARD-PLACE in-front-of
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME me
19:28 kai eipwn

kai
Conj
legO
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eporeueto poreuomai
Adv
anabainwn anabainO
eis eis
Prep
28 . And when he had thus spoken, he went before, ascending up to Jerusalem.
AND
sayING
these He-WENT these-things
IN-TOWARD-PLACE UP-STEPPING in-front going-up
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
AV
Luke 19
19:29 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ws hggisen hOs eggizO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
bhqfagh bEthphagE
ni proper
kai kai
Conj
WH
bhqania
NA
bhqanian bEthania
n_ Acc Sg f
pros pros
Prep
AND
BECAME it-occurred to ho
AS
He-NEARS
INTO BETHPHAGE AND
BETHANY
TOWARD
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
kaloumenon kaleO
elaiwn elaia
n_ Gen Pl f
apesteilen duo apostellO duo

vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
29 And it came to pass, when he was come nigh to Bethphage and Bethany, at the mount called [the mount] of Olives, he sent two of his disciples,
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
mountain mount
THE
beING-CALLED
OF-OLIVES He-commissions he-dispatches eis eis

Prep
TWO
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples h hos

pr Dat Sg f
30 Saying, Go ye into the village over against [you]; in the which at your entering ye shall find a colt tied, whereon yet never man sat: loose him, and bring [him hither].
19:30 legwn
legO
upagete hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
katenanti katenanti
Adv
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
sayING
BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-ye-going-away ! eurhsete heuriskO

vi Fut Act 2 Pl
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD VILLAGE facing dedemenon deO

IN
WHICH
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
ef epi
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
INTO-GOING going-into
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING COLT
HAVING-been-BOUND ON
WHICH
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
pwpote anqrwpwn ekaqisen kai lusantes pOpote anthrOpos kathizO kai luO
Adv n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
agagete agO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
?-AS-?-when OF-humans ever
is-seated
AND
LOOSing
it him dia dia

Prep
BE-LEADING be-ye-leading-him-hither ! ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
19:31 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
erwta erOtaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
luete luO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
outws houtOs
Adv
AND
IF-EVER ANY anyone oti o hoti ho

Conj
YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-askING THRU ANY because-of why ? kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-LOOSING thus ye-are-loosing-him
31 And if any man ask you, Why do ye loose [him]? thus shall ye say unto him, Because the Lord hath need of him.
ereite ereO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING that
THE
Master Lord
OF-it of-him
need
IS-HAVING
19:32 apelqontes
aperchomai
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apestalmenoi apostellO
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
32 And they that were sent went their way, and found even as he had said unto them.
FROM-COMING coming-away autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
YET THE
ones-HAVING-been-commissionED FOUND ones-having-been-dispatched
to-them
19:33 luontwn
luO
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kurioi kurios
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-LOOSING
YET OF-them
THE
COLT
say
THE
masters
OF-it of-him
33 And as they were loosing the colt, the owners thereof said unto them, Why loose ye the colt?
pros pros
Prep
autous ti autos tis

luete luO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD them
ANY why ? de de
Conj
YE-ARE-LOOSING THE
COLT
19:34 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
34 And they said, The Lord hath need of him.
THE
YET say they-say auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
that
THE
Master Lord ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-it of-him
need
IS-HAVING
19:35 kai hgagon

kai
Conj
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai epiriyantes autwn kai epirrhiptO autos

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
THEY-LED
it him
TOWARD THE
JESUS
AND
ON-TOSSing tossing-on
OF-them
THE
35 And they brought him to Jesus: and they cast their garments upon the colt, and they set Jesus thereon.
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
pwlon pOlos
n_ Acc Sg m
epebibasan epibibazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
GARMENTS ON
THE
COLT
THEY-ON-STEPize THE they-mount autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
JESUS
WH
19:36 poreuomenou
poreuomai
de de
Conj
upestrwnnuon hupostrOnnumi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
eautwn
36 And as he went, they spread their clothes in the way.
OF-GOING
YET OF-Him
THEY-UNDER-STREWED THE they-strewed-under
GARMENTS
AV
Luke 19
NA
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-them
IN
THE
WAY road de de
Conj
19:37 eggizontos
eggizO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hdh EdE
Adv
pros pros
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
katabasei tou katabasis ho

orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-NEARING of-drawing-near twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
YET OF-Him
ALREADY TOWARD THE
DOWN-STEP descent twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
mountain mount
elaiwn hrxanto elaia archO

n_ Gen Pl f vi Aor midD 3 Pl
apan hapas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
maqhtwn cairontes mathEtEs chairO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
37 And when he was come nigh, even now at the descent of the mount of Olives, the whole multitude of the disciples began to rejoice and praise God with a loud voice for all the mighty works that they had seen;
OF-THE
OLIVES
THEY-begin begin ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
EVERY(emph.) THE entire(emph.) fwnh phOnE

n_ Dat Sg f
multitude
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
JOYING rejoicing eidon eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ainein aineO
vn Pres Act
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
megalh peri mega peri

a_ Dat Sg f Prep
paswn wn pas hos

a_ Gen Pl f pr Gen Pl f
TO-BE-PRAISING THE
God
OF-WHICH THEY-PERCEIVED which
dunamewn dunamis
n_ Gen Pl f
ABILITIES powerful-deeds
19:38 legontes
legO
euloghmenos eulogeO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus en basileus en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
sayING
beING-blessED
THE
COMING
THE
KING
IN
38 Saying, Blessed [be] the King that cometh in the name of the Lord: peace in heaven, and glory in the highest.

en en
Prep
ouranw eirhnh ouranos eirEnE

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
kai doxa kai doxa

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
uyistois hupsistos
a_ Dat Pl n
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
IN
heaven
PEACE
AND
esteem glory tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
HIGHest-ones highest(p) eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
19:39 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn apo pharisaios apo

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
ANY some
OF-THE
PHARISEES
FROM THE
THRONG
say
TOWARD Him
39 And some of the Pharisees from among the multitude said unto him, Master, rebuke thy disciples.
didaskale epitimhson tois didaskalos epitimaO ho

n_ Voc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais sou mathEtEs su

TEACHer !
rebuke rebuke-you !
to-THE the eipen legO
LEARNers disciples legw legO
OF-YOU

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ean ean
Cond
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
siwphsousin siOpaO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
answerING
He-said
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IF-EVER these
SHALL-BE-beING-SILENT
40 And he answered and said unto them, I tell you that, if these should hold their peace, the stones would immediately cry out.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
liqoi lithos
n_ Nom Pl m
kraxousin krazO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THE
STONES
SHALL-BE-CRYING
19:41 kai ws hggisen

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
eggizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
idwn eidO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
eklausen ep klaiO epi

authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
41 . And when he was come near, he beheld the city, and wept over it,
AND
AS
He-NEARS PERCEIVING he-draws-near oti ei hoti ei

Conj Cond
THE
city
He-LAMENTS
ON her onover herit kai su kai su

Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
19:42 legwn
legO
egnws ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sayING
that
IF
YOU-KNEW
IN
THE
DAY
this
AND YOU even
THE the-things
pros pros
Prep
eirhnhn nun de eirEnE nun de

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Conj
ekrubh kruptO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
ofqalmwn sou ophthalmos su

42 Saying, If thou hadst known, even thou, at least in this thy day, the things [which belong] unto thy peace! but now they are hid from thine eyes.
TOWARD PEACE
NOW YET it-WAS-HID
FROM VIEWers eyes epi se epi su

Prep pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-YOU
19:43 oti hxousin

hoti
Conj
hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
kai parembalousin kai paremballO

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
that
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING DAYS
ON
YOU
AND
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-IN-CASTING THE shall-be-casting-up
43 For the days shall come upon thee, that thine enemies shall cast a trench about thee, and compass thee round, and keep thee in on every side,
AV
Luke 19 - Luke 20
ecqroi echthros
a_ Nom Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
caraka charax
n_ Acc Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai perikuklwsousin kai perikukloO

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
enemies
OF-YOU
PALISADE rampart se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
to-YOU
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-ABOUT-AROUNDING YOU shall-be-surrounding
AND
sunexousin sunechO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
pantoqen pantothen
Adv
THEY-SHALL-BE-pressING YOU shall-be-pressing
EVERY-WHICH-PLACE from-every-side se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
19:44 kai edafiousin

kai
Conj
edaphizO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-LEVELING YOU shall-be-leveling liqon lithos

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
offsprings children en en
Prep
OF-YOU
IN
YOU
AND
NOT
afhsousin aphiEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
anq anti
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
44 And shall lay thee even with the ground, and thy children within thee; and they shall not leave in thee one stone upon another; because thou knewest not the time of thy visitation.
THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING STONE they-shall-be-leaving egnws ginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ON
STONE
IN
YOU
INSTEAD OF-WHICH NOT corresponding-to which
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
episkophs sou episkopE su

YOU-KNEW
THE
SEASON era eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
ON-NOTing visitation ieron hieron

n_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU
19:45 kai eiselqwn

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ekballein ekballO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
INTO THE
SACRED-place He-begins sanctuary
TO-BE-OUT-CASTING THE to-be-casting-out
45 And he went into the temple, and began to cast out them that sold therein, and them that bought;
pwlountas pOleO
19:46 legwn
legO
autois gegraptai autos graphO

pp Dat Pl m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai estai kai eimi

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
sayING
to-them
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN AND also de de

Conj
SHALL-BE
THE
HOME house
OF-ME
46 Saying unto them, It is written, My house is the house of prayer: but ye have made it a den of thieves.
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
proseuchs umeis proseuchE humeis

n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Nom Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him it
epoihsate sphlaion lhstwn poieO spElaion lEstEs

vi Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
HOME house
OF-prayer
YOU(p) ye
YET it
make
CAVE
OF-ROBBERS
19:47 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
didaskwn didaskO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kaq kata
Prep
hmeran en hEmera en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
He-WAS
TEACHING
THE
according-to DAY
IN
THE
SACRED-place sanctuary apolesai kai apollumi kai

vn Aor Act Conj
47 And he taught daily in the temple. But the chief priests and the scribes and the chief of the people sought to destroy him,
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis ezhtoun grammateus zEteO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE
YET chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests prwtoi prOtos

a_ Nom Pl m
THE
WRITers scribes
SOUGHT
Him
TO-destroy
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
BEFORE-most OF-THE foremost-ones euriskon heuriskO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
PEOPLE
19:48 kai ouc

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihswsin poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
AND
NOT
THEY-FOUND THE
ANY what ? akouwn akouO
THEY-SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
PEOPLE
for
48 And could not find what they might do: for all the people were very attentive to hear him.
apas hapas
a_ Nom Sg m
exekremato autou ekkremamai autos

vi impf Mid 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
EVERY(emph.) OUT-HUNG all(emph.) hung-on
OF-Him him
HEARING
AV
Luke 20
20:1 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn didaskontos autou hEmera didaskO autos

n_ Gen Pl f vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred ierw hieron

n_ Dat Sg n
IN
ONE
OF-THE
DAYS
OF-TEACHING
OF-Him
THE
PEOPLE
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kai euaggelizomenou kai euaggelizO

Conj vp Pres Mid Gen Sg m
epesthsan oi ephistEmi ho
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
. And it came to pass, [that] on one of those days, as he taught the people in the temple, and preached the gospel, the chief priests and the scribes came upon [him] with the elders,
IN
THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary grammateis sun grammateus sun

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
OF-WELL-MESSAGizING ON-STAND of-bringing-the-well-message stand-by tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THE
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
presbuterois presbuteros
a_ Dat Pl m
THE
WRITers scribes
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the legontes legO


pp Acc Sg m
20:2 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
AND
THEY-say
sayING speaking poieis poieO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
TOWARD Him
say tell-you ! estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-US us
IN
?-THE-WHICH which ? soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
And spake unto him, saying, Tell us, by what authority doest thou these things? or who is he that gave thee this authority?

h E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dous didOmi
authority
these YOU-ARE-DOING OR these-things exousian tauthn exousia houtos

ANY who ?
IS
THE
one-GIVING one-giving
to-YOU you
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
authority
this
20:3 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous erwthsw autos erOtaO

pp Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
answerING
YET He-said
TOWARD them
I-SHALL-BE-askING YOU(p) shall-be-asking ye
And he answered and said unto them, I will also ask you one thing; and answer me:
AND-I also-I
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eipate kai legO

moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
saying word
AND
YE-say tell-ye !
to-ME me ouranou hn ouranos eimi

20:4 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
baptisma iwannou ex baptisma iOannEs ek

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Prep
h E
Part
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
The baptism of John, was it from heaven, or of men?
THE
Conj
OF-JOHN
OUT OF-heaven
it-WAS
OR
OUT OF-humans
20:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sunelogisanto pros sullogizomai pros

vi Aor midD 3 Pl Prep
eautous legontes heautou legO

oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
THE-ones the eipwmen legO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
YET TOGETHER-account they-reckon-together ex ek

Prep
TOWARD selves themselves dia dia

Prep
sayING
that
IF-EVER
And they reasoned with themselves, saying, If we shall say, From heaven; he will say, Why then believed ye him not?
ouranou erei ouranos ereO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
episteusate pisteuO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-heaven
He-SHALL-BE-declarING THRU ANY because-of what ?
NOT
YE-BELIEVE
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-him him
20:6 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
eipwmen legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn o anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
apas hapas
a_ Nom Sg m
IF-EVER YET WE-MAY-BE-sayING OUT OF-humans
THE
PEOPLE
EVERY(emph.) all(emph.) iwannhn profhthn iOannEs prophEtEs

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
But and if we say, Of men; all the people will stone us: for they be persuaded that John was a prophet.
kataliqasei katalithazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
pepeismenos peithO
gar estin gar eimi

SHALL-BE-DOWN-STONING US shall-be-stoning einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
HAVING-been-PERSUADED for
IS it-is
JOHN
TO-BE
AV
Luke 20
20:7 kai apekriqhsan mh

kai
Conj
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
mE
Part Neg
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
poqen pothen
Adv Int
And they answered, that they could not tell whence [it was].
AND
THEY-answerED
NO
TO-PERCEIVE ?-WHICH-PLACE to-be-aware whence ? eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
20:8 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
autois oude autos oude

pp Dat Pl m Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
AND
THE
JESUS
said
to-them
NOT-YET I neither
to-YOU(p) ye
And Jesus said unto them, Neither tell I you by what authority I do these things.
IN
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f

poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
these I-AM-DOING these-things pros pros

Prep
20:9 hrxato
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
legein legO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

He-begins
YET TOWARD THE

NA
PEOPLE
TO-BE-sayING THE to-be-telling
BESIDE-CAST parable auton autos
this
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
efuteusen ampelwna kai exedeto phuteuO ampelOn kai ekdidOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
gewrgois geOrgos
n_ Dat Pl m
. Then began he to speak to the people this parable; A certain man planted a vineyard, and let it forth to husbandmen, and went into a far country for a long time.
pp Acc Sg m
human
ANY certain
plants
VINEyard
AND
OUT-GAVE leased
it
him it
to-LAND-ACTers to-farmers
kai apedhmhsen cronous ikanous kai apodEmeO chronos hikanos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
AND
travels
TIMES times
enough considerable tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
20:10 kai kairw

kai
Conj
kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
apesteilen pros apostellO pros

gewrgous doulon ina geOrgos doulos hina

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m Conj
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
to-SEASON he-commissions he-dispatches tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD THE
LAND-ACTers farmers autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
SLAVE
THAT FROM THE
karpou karpos
n_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos dwsousin ampelOn didOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
gewrgoi geOrgos
n_ Nom Pl m
10 And at the season he sent a servant to the husbandmen, that they should give him of the fruit of the vineyard: but the husbandmen beat him, and sent [him] away empty.
FRUIT
OF-THE
VINEyard
THEY-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him him deirantes derO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
THE
YET LAND-ACTers farmers
exapesteilan auton exapostellO autos

kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg m
OUT-FROM-PUT send-away
him
SKINNing lashing-him
EMPTY
20:11 kai proseqeto eteron

kai
Conj
prostithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
pemyai doulon oi pempO doulos ho

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kakeinon deirantes kakeinos derO

pd Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
AND
he-addED he-proceeded
DIFFERENT TO-SEND
SLAVE
THE
YET AND-that-one also-that-one
SKINNing lashing
AND
11 And again he sent another servant: and they beat him also, and entreated [him] shamefully, and sent [him] away empty.
atimasantes exapesteilan atimazO exapostellO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg m
UN-VALUing dishonoring
THEY-OUT-FROM-PUT EMPTY they-send-away-him pemyai oi pempO ho

20:12 kai proseqeto triton

kai
Conj
prostithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
tritos
a_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
kai touton traumatisantes kai houtos traumatizO

Conj pd Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
12 And again he sent a third: and they wounded him also, and cast [him] out.
AND
addED he-proceeded
third third-one
TO-SEND
THE
YET AND also
this-one this-one
WOUNDing
exebalon ekballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) they-cast-out(past)-him
20:13 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos ti ampelOn tis

poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
said
YET THE
master lord uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
VINEyard
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-DOING
13 Then said the lord of the vineyard, What shall I do? I will send my beloved son: it may be they will reverence [him] when they see him.
pemyw pempO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agaphton isws agapEtos isOs

a_ Acc Sg m Adv
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-SENDING THE
SON
OF-ME
THE
beLOVED
EQUALly this-one equally-of-me this-one
AV
Luke 20
entraphsontai entrepO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-abashING they-shall-be-respecting
20:14 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gewrgoi geOrgos
n_ Nom Pl m
dielogizonto pros dialogizomai pros

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
PERCEIVING
YET him
THE
LAND-ACTers THRU-accountED farmers they-reasoned klhronomos klEronomos

n_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD one-another
14 But when the husbandmen saw him, they reasoned among themselves, saying, This is the heir: come, let us kill him, that the inheritance may be ours.
legontes legO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
sayING
this
IS
THE
tenant WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING him enjoyer-of-the-allotment we-may-be-killing
ina hina
Conj
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
klhronomia klEronomia
n_ Nom Sg f
THAT OF-US
MAY-BE-BECOMING THE
tenancy enjoyment-of-the-allotment exw exO

Adv
20:15 kai ekbalontes

kai
Conj
ekballO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos apekteinan ampelOn apokteinO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
AND
OUT-CASTING casting-out autois o autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
him
OUT OF-THE outside kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
VINEyard
THEY-FROM-KILL ANY they-kill-him what ?
THEN
15 So they cast him out of the vineyard, and killed [him]. What therefore shall the lord of the vineyard do unto them?
poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ampelwnos ampelOn
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-DOING to-them
THE
master lord
OF-THE
VINEyard
20:16 eleusetai
erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
kai apolesei kai apollumi

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gewrgous toutous kai dwsei geOrgos houtos kai didOmi

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-COMING AND
SHALL-BE-destroyING THE
LAND-ACTers farmers eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
these
AND
SHALL-BE-GIVING
16 He shall come and destroy these husbandmen, and shall give the vineyard to others. And when they heard [it], they said, God forbid.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ampelwna allois akousantes de ampelOn allos akouO de

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THE
VINEyard
to-others
HEARing hearing-it
YET THEY-say
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
20:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
embleyas emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autois eipen autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
YET IN-looking looking-at touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
to-them them liqon lithos

n_ Acc Sg m
said he-said
ANY what ?
THEN IS
THE
17 And he beheld them, and said, What is this then that is written, The stone which the builders rejected, the same is become the head of the corner?
gegrammenon graphO
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
oikodomountes oikodomeO
HAVING-been-WRITTEN this
STONE
WHICH
FROM-test reject
THE
ones-HOME-BUILDING ones-building
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep

this
WAS-BECOMED INTO HEAD was-become o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-CORNER
20:18 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
peswn piptO
ep epi
Prep
ekeinon ton ekeinos ho

liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
EVERY
THE
one-FALLING one-falling ef epi

Prep
ON
that
THE
STONE
18 Whosoever shall fall upon that stone shall be broken; but on whomsoever it shall fall, it will grind him to powder.
sunqlasqhsetai sunthlaO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
pesh piptO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
likmhsei likmaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOGETHER-SHATTERED ON shall-be-being-shattered auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WHOM
YET EVER it-SHOULD-BE-FALLING it-SHALL-BE-WINNOWING it-shall-be-scattering-like-chaff
him
20:19 kai ezhthsan oi

kai
Conj
zEteO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

n_ Nom Pl m
epibalein epiballO
vn 2Aor Act
ep epi
Prep
AND
SEEK
THE
WRITers scribes
AND
THE
chief-SACRED-ones TO-BE-ON-CASTING ON chief-priests to-be-laying-on
19 And the chief priests and the scribes the same hour sought to lay hands on him; and they feared the people: for they perceived that he had
AV
Luke 20
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras en cheir en
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
spoken this parable against them.
Him
THE
HANDS
IN
this
THE
HOUR
AND
PEOPLE
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
gar oti pros gar hoti pros

Conj Conj Prep

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

THEY-KNOW
for
that
TOWARD them
He-said he-told
THE
BESIDE-CAST parable
this
20:20 kai parathrhsantes apesteilan egkaqetous upokrinomenous

kai
Conj
paratithEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
egkathetos
a_ Acc Pl m
hupokrinomai
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
AND
BESIDE-KEEPing scrutinizing-him ina hina

Conj
THEY-commission IN-DOWN-LETS they-dispatch eavesdroppers epilabwntai epilambanomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
hypocritING feigning logou logos

n_ Gen Sg m
themselves
dikaious einai dikaios eimi

a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
paradounai paradidOmi
vn 2Aor Act
20 . And they watched [him], and sent forth spies, which should feign themselves just men, that they might take hold of his words, that so they might deliver him unto the power and authority of the governor.
JUST just-men auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-ON-GETTING OF-Him they-may-be-getting-hold arch archE

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-saying of-word
AS-BESIDES TO-BESIDE-GIVE so-as to-give-up
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
exousia tou exousia ho

hgemonos hEgemOn
n_ Gen Sg m
Him
to-THE
ORIGINal AND sovereignty
to-THE the
authority jurisdiction
OF-THE
LEADer governor oti orqws hoti orthOs

Conj Adv
21 And they asked him, saying, Master, we know that thou sayest and teachest rightly, neither acceptest thou the person [of any], but teachest the way of God truly:
20:21 kai ephrwthsan auton

kai
Conj
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO

AND
THEY-inquire-of
Him
sayING
TEACHer !
ERECTly correctly
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai didaskeis kai didaskO

kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
lambaneis lambanO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
proswpon all ep prosOpon alla epi

YOU-ARE-sayING AND
YOU-ARE-TEACHING AND
NOT
YOU-ARE-GETTING-UP face you-are-taking surface-view didaskeis didaskO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
but
ON

odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
TRUTH
THE
WAY
OF-THE
God
YOU-ARE-TEACHING
20:22 exestin
exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
foron phoros
n_ Acc Sg m
dounai h didOmi E
vn 2Aor Act Part
ou ou
Part Neg
22 Is it lawful for us to give tribute unto Caesar, or no?
it-IS-allowed
US
to-CEASAR tax
TO-GIVE
OR
NOT
20:23 katanohsas
katanoeO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
panourgian eipen panourgia legO

pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
23 But he perceived their craftiness, and said unto them, Why tempt ye me?
DOWN-MINDing considering
YET OF-them
THE
cleverness craftiness ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-said
TOWARD them
20:24 deixate
deiknumi
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
dhnarion tinos dEnarion tis

n_ Acc Sg n pi Gen Sg m
eikona kai epigrafhn oi eikOn kai epigraphE ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
SHOW show-ye ! eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
to-ME me
DENARIUS
OF-ANY of-whom
it-IS-HAVING
image
AND
THE
YET
24 Shew me a penny. Whose image and superscription hath it? They answered and said, Caesar's.
kaisaros kaisar
n_ Gen Sg m
THEY-say
OF-CEASAR
20:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous toinun autos toinun

pp Acc Pl m Part
apodote apodidOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kaisaros kaisar
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
YET He-said
TOWARD them
to-THE-NOW BE-FROM-GIVING THE now-then be-ye-rendering ! the(p) qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-CEASAR
25 And he said Render therefore the things which and unto God the be God's.
unto them, unto Caesar be Caesar's, things which
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to-CEASAR AND
THE the(p)
OF-THE
God
to-THE
God
WH NA
20:26 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
iscusan ischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
epilabesqai epilambanomai
vn 2Aor midD
tou
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
rhmatos enantion rhEma enantion

n_ Gen Sg n Adv
AND
NOT
THEY-are-STRONG TO-BE-ON-GETTING to-be-getting-hold
OF-Him
declaration
26 And they could not take hold of his words before the people: and they marvelled at his answer, and held their peace.
AV
Luke 20
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai qaumasantes epi th kai thaumazO epi ho

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
apokrisei autou apokrisis autos

esighsan sigaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-THE the
PEOPLE
AND
MARVELing
ON
THE
answer
OF-Him
WH
THEY-HUSH
proserchomai
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
saddoukaiwn oi saddoukaios ho
legontes
NA
YET ANY some
OF-THE
SADDUCEES
THE
27 . Then came to [him] certain of the Sadducees, which deny that there is any resurrection; and they asked him,
antilegontes antilegO
anastasin mh anastasis mE
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ephrwthsan auton eperOtaO autos

ones-INSTEAD-sayING ones-contradicting
NO
TO-BE
THEY-inquire-of
Him
20:28 legontes
legO
didaskale mwushs didaskalos mOusEs

n_ Voc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
egrayen graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ean ean
Cond
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
sayING
TEACHer !
MOSES
WRITES
to-US
IF-EVER OF-ANY anyone's
brother
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ecwn echO
gunaika kai outos gunE kai houtos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg m
ateknos h ateknos eimi

ina hina
Conj
28 Saying, Master, Moses wrote unto us, If any man's brother die, having a wife, and he die without children, that his brother should take his wife, and raise up seed unto his brother.
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING HAVING may-be-dying labh lambanO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WOMAN wife adelfos autou adelphos autos

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
this this-one
UN-offspring childless
MAY-BE
THAT
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika kai exanasthsh gunE kai exanistEmi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pp Gen Sg m
MAY-BE-GETTING THE
brother
OF-him
THE
WOMAN wife
AND
SHOULD-BE-OUT-UP-STANDING should-be-raising-up
sperma tw sperma ho

seed
to-THE
brother
OF-him
20:29 epta
hepta
ni numeral
oun oun
Conj
adelfoi hsan adelphos eimi

kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
labwn lambanO
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
SEVEN
THEN brothers
THEY-WERE AND there-were
THE
BEFORE-most GETTING first
WOMAN wife
29 There were therefore seven brethren: and the first took a wife, and died without children.
apeqanen ateknos apothnEskO ateknos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m
FROM-DIED died
UN-offspring childless deuteros deuteros

a_ Nom Sg m
30 And the second took her to wife, and he died childless.
20:30 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
second
20:31 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tritos tritos
a_ Nom Sg m
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
wsautws de hOsautOs de
Adv Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
epta hepta
ni numeral
ou ou
Part Neg
AND
THE
third
GOT
her
AS-SAMEly similarly
YET AND also
THE
SEVEN
NOT
31 And the third took her; and in like manner the seven also: and they left no children, and died.
katelipon tekna kataleipO teknon

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n
kai apeqanon kai apothnEskO

left
offsprings children
AND
THEY-FROM-DIED they-died gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
20:32 usteron kai h

husteron
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apeqanen apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
32 Last of all the woman died also.
subsequently AND also
THE
WOMAN
FROM-DIED died anastasei tinos anastasis tis

n_ Dat Sg f pi Gen Sg m
20:33 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ginetai ginomai
33 Therefore in the resurrection whose wife of them is she? for seven had her to wife.
THE
WOMAN
THEN IN
THE
UP-STANDing resurrection authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
OF-ANY of-which ?
OF-them
she-IS-BECOMING
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar epta gar hepta

Conj ni numeral
escon echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
WOMAN wife
THE
for
SEVEN
have-HAD
her
WOMAN wife
AV
Luke 20
20:34 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
THE
SONS
OF-THE
eon
34 And Jesus answering said unto them, The children of this world marry, and are given in marriage:
toutou gamousin houtos gameO

pd Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai gamiskontai kai gamiskO

this
ARE-MARRYING AND
ARE-beING-MARRYizED are-being-given-in-marriage tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
20:35 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kataxiwqentes kataxioO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
ekeinou tucein ekeinos tugchanO

pd Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET ones-BEING-DOWN-WORTHIED OF-THE ones-being-deemed-worthy the ek ek

Prep
eon
that
TO-BE-HAPPENING AND to-be-happening-upon oute oute

Conj
35 But they which shall be accounted worthy to obtain that world, and the resurrection from the dead, neither marry, nor are given in marriage:
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anastasews ths anastasis ho

nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
oute oute
Conj
gamousin gameO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OF-THE the
OF-THE the
OUT OF-DEAD-ones NOT-BESIDES ARE-MARRYING NOT-BESIDES of-dead-ones neither nor
gamizontai gamizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
ARE-MARRYizING are-giving-in-marriage
20:36 oude
oude
Adv
gar apoqanein gar apothnEskO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
eti eti
Adv
dunantai dunamai
isaggeloi isaggelos
a_ Nom Pl m
gar eisin gar eimi

kai kai
Conj
NOT-YET for neither uioi huios

n_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-FROM-DYING STILL THEY-ARE-ABLE to-be-dying they-can qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
EQUAL-MESSENGERS for equal-to-messengers ontes eimi

THEY-ARE
AND
36 Neither can they die any more: for they are equal unto the angels; and are the children of God, being the children of the resurrection.
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anastasews uioi anastasis huios

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl m
SONS
THEY-ARE are
OF-God
OF-THE
UP-STANDing resurrection nekroi nekros

a_ Nom Pl m
SONS
BEING
20:37 oti de
hoti
Conj
de
Conj
egeirontai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kai mwushs kai mOusEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
emhnusen epi ths mEnuO epi ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Sg f
that
YET ARE-beING-ROUSED THE
DEAD-ones AND MOSES dead-ones even ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
DIVULGES
ON
OF-THE the isaak isaak

ni proper
batou batos
n_ Gen Sg m
ws legei hOs legO

kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai qeon kai theos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
37 Now that the dead are raised, even Moses shewed at the bush, when he calleth the Lord the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob.
THORN-BUSH AS
he-IS-sayING he-is-terming
Master Lord
THE
God
of-ABRAHAM AND of-Abraham
God
of-ISAAC AND of-Isaac
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
God
of-JACOB of-Jacob de de
Conj
20:38 qeos
theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
alla zwntwn alla zaO

pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar autw gar autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
38 For he is not a God of the dead, but of the living: for all live unto him.
God
YET NOT
IS he-is
OF-DEAD-ones but of-dead-ones
OF-LIVING of-ones-living
ALL
for
to-Him
zwsin zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-LIVING
20:39 apokriqentes de
apokrinomai
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn eipan grammateus legO

didaskale kalws didaskalos kalOs

n_ Voc Sg m Adv
39 . Then certain of the scribes answering said, Master, thou hast well said.
answerING
YET ANY some
OF-THE
WRITers scribes
say
TEACHer !
IDEALly
eipas legO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-say
20:40 ouketi
ouketi
Adv
gar etolmwn eperwtan gar tolmaO eperOtaO

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
40 And after that they durst not ask him any [question at all].
NOT-STILL for not-longer
THEY-DARED TO-BE-inquirING-of Him
NOT-YET-ONE anything
AV
Luke 20 - Luke 21
20:41 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous pws legousin autos pOs legO

pp Acc Pl m Adv Int vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston einai christos eimi

n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
dauid dauid
ni proper
41 And he said unto them, How say they that Christ is David's son?
He-said
YET TOWARD them
how how ?
THEY-ARE-sayING THE
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE
of-DAVID of-David
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
SON
20:42 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar dauid legei gar dauid legO

Conj ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
biblw biblos
n_ Dat Sg f
yalmwn eipen psalmos legO

n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
he
for
DAVID
IS-sayING
IN
SCROLL
OF-psalms
said
Master Lord
to-THE
42 And David himself saith in the book of Psalms, The LORD said unto my Lord, Sit thou on my right hand,
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kaqou kathEmai
ek ek
Prep

Master Lord
OF-ME
BE-sittING be-you-sitting ! qw tithEmi

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p) tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
OF-ME
20:43 ews an
heOs
Conj
an
Part

upopodion twn hupopodion ho

podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
43 Till I make thine enemies thy footstool.
TILL
enemies
OF-YOU
UNDER-FOOT footstool
OF-THE
FEET
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
WH WH NA NA
20:44 dauid oun

dauid
ni proper
auton kurion
oun
Conj
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kalei kaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai pws autou kai pOs autos

Conj Adv Int pp Gen Sg m
44 David therefore calleth him Lord, how is he then his son?
DAVID
THEN
Master Lord
Him
IS-CALLING
AND
how how ?
OF-him
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
SON
He-IS
20:45 akouontos
akouO
de de
Conj
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais mathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
45 Then in the audience of all the people he said unto his disciples,
OF-HEARING
NA
YET OF-EVERY of-entire
THE
PEOPLE
He-said
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
20:46 prosecete apo

prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn twn grammateus ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
qelontwn thelO
peripatein peripateO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
FROM THE
WRITers scribes aspasmous en aspasmos en

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
THE
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN to-be-walking
stolais kai filountwn stolE kai phileO

n_ Dat Pl f Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
agorais kai prwtokaqedrias agora kai prOtokathedria

n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f
46 Beware of the scribes, which desire to walk in long robes, and love greetings in the markets, and the highest seats in the synagogues, and the chief rooms at feasts;
robes
AND
OF-beING-FOND-of greetings ones-being-fond-of salutations
IN
THE
BUY-places AND markets tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
BEFORE-most-DOWN-SETTLES front-seats
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
kai prwtoklisias kai prOtoklisia

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
en en
Prep
deipnois deipnon
n_ Dat Pl n
IN
THE
BEFORE-most-CLINES IN first-reclining-places oikias twn oikia ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
THE
DINners
20:47 oi
hos
pr Nom Pl m
katesqiousin tas katesthiO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
chrwn chEra
n_ Gen Pl f
kai profasei kai prophasis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
makra makros
a_ Acc Pl n
WHO
ARE-DOWN-EATING THE are-devouring lhmyontai lambanO

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
HOMES
OF-THE
WIDOWS
AND
to-BEFORE-APPEARance FAR to-pretense prolix(p)
47 Which devour widows'houses, and for a shew make long prayers: the same shall receive greater damnation.
proseucontai outoi proseuchomai houtos

vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl pd Nom Pl m
perissoteron krima perissos krima

a_ Acc Sg n Cmp n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-ARE-prayING are-praying
these
SHALL-BE-GETTING more-excessive
JUDGment
AV
Luke 21
21:1 anableyas
anablepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ballontas ballO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
. And he looked up, and saw the rich men casting their gifts into the treasury.
UP-looking looking-up ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
YET He-PERCEIVED THE
ones-CASTING casting
INTO THE
EXCHEQUER-GUARD treasury
dwra dOron
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
plousious plousios
a_ Acc Pl m
THE
oblations OF-them approach-presents de de

Conj
RICH rich-ones chran chEra

n_ Acc Sg f
21:2 eiden
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
penicran ballousan penichros ballO

a_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
ekei lepta ekei lepton

Adv n_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
And he saw also a certain poor widow casting in thither two mites.
PERCEIVED he-perceived
YET ANY certain
WIDOW
DRUDGE
CASTING
there
leptons mites
TWO
21:3 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
alhqws legw alEthOs legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
chra chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
He-said
TRUly
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
And he said, Of a truth I say unto you, that this poor widow hath cast in more than they all:
that
THE
WIDOW
this
THE
ptwch ptOchos
a_ Nom Sg f
pleion polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
pantwn ebalen pas ballO

POOR
MORE
OF-ALL
CASTS
21:4 pantes gar outoi

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
perisseuontos autois ebalon perisseuO autos ballO

vp Pres Act Gen Sg n pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ALL
for
these
OUT OF-THE
exceedING superfluity
to-them
CAST(past)
INTO THE
For all these have of their abundance cast in unto the offerings of God: but she of her penury hath cast in all the living that she had.
dwra dOron
n_ Acc Pl n
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
usterhmatos auths husterEma autos

panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
bion bios
n_ Acc Sg m
oblations this-one approach-presents she on hos

pr Acc Sg m
YET OUT OF-THE
WANT
OF-her
ALL
THE
livelihood
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WHICH
she-HAD
CASTS
21:5 kai tinwn

kai
Conj
tis
px Gen Pl m
legontwn legO
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
oti liqois hoti lithos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
kalois kai kalos kai

a_ Dat Pl m Conj
AND
OF-ANY of-some
sayING
ABOUT THE concerning eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SACRED-place that sanctuary
to-STONES IDEAL
AND
. And as some spake of the temple, how it was adorned with goodly stones and gifts, he said,
anaqhmasin kekosmhtai anathema kosmeO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
UP-PLACings votive-offerings
HAS-been-SYSTEMED He-said it-has-been-adorned a hos

pr Acc Pl n
21:6 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eleusontai erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
ouk ou
Part Neg
these WHICH these-things afeqhsetai aphiEmi

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
YE-ARE-beholdING THEY-SHALL-BE-COMING DAYS there-shall-be-coming liqos lithos

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
WHICH
NOT
[As for] these things which ye behold, the days will come, in the which there shall not be left one stone upon another, that shall not be thrown down.
epi liqw epi lithos

Prep n_ Dat Sg m
WH
wde
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET STONE shall-be-being-left kataluqhsetai kataluO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
ON
STONE
WHICH
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED shall-be-being-demolished
21:7 ephrwthsan de
eperOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
didaskale pote oun didaskalos pote oun

n_ Voc Sg m Part Int Conj
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
THEY-inquire-of
YET Him
sayING
TEACHer !
?-when when ?
THEN these SHALL-BE these-things ginesqai ginomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
And they asked him, saying, Master, but when shall these things be? and what sign [will there be] when these things shall come to pass?
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion otan sEmeion hotan

n_ Nom Sg n Conj
mellh mellO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
AND
ANY what ?
THE
SIGN
when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-ABOUT these TO-BE-BECOMING whenever these-things to-be-occurring
AV
Luke 21
21:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
planhqhte planaO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
gar gar
Conj
THE
YET He-said
YE-BE-lookING NO be-ye-bewaring ! onomati mou onoma egO

YE-MAY-BE-BEING-STRAYED MANY ye-may-be-being-deceived legontes legO

for
eleusontai erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
And he said, Take heed that ye be not deceived: for many shall come in my name, saying, I am [Christ]; and the time draweth near: go ye not therefore after them.
SHALL-BE-COMING ON
THE
NAME
OF-ME
sayING
AM
AND
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
poreuqhte poreuomai
vs Aor pasD 2 Pl
opisw autwn opisO autos

Adv pp Gen Pl m
THE
SEASON
HAS-NEARED NO has-drawn-near akoushte akouO

vs Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-GONE BEHIND after
them
21:9 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
polemous kai akatastasias polemos kai akatastasia

mh mE
Part Neg
when-EVER YET YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING BATTLES whenever ptohqhte ptoeO

vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
AND
UN-DOWN-STANDings NO turbulences prwton prOton

Adv
But when ye shall hear of wars and commotions, be not terrified: for these things must first come to pass; but the end [is] not by and by.
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg

Conj pd Nom Pl n
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-DISMAYED IS-BINDING must euqews to eutheOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg n
for
these TO-BE-BECOMING BEFORE-most but these-things to-be-occurring first
NOT
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
immediately
THE
FINISH consummation autois egerqhsetai autos egeirO

pp Dat Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
21:10 tote elegen

tote
Adv
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
eqnos ethnos
n_ Nom Sg n
ep epi
Prep
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai basileia kai basileia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
10 Then said he unto them, Nation shall rise against nation, and kingdom against kingdom:
then
He-said
to-them
SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED NATION
ON
NATION
AND
KINGdom
epi basileian epi basileia

Prep n_ Acc Sg f
ON
KINGdom
WH WH WH NA NA
21:11 seismoi te
seismos
n_ Nom Pl m
te
Part
megaloi kai kata mega kai kata

a_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep
topous topos
n_ Acc Pl m
loimoi kai limoi
limoi limos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
QUAKings BESIDES GREAT earthquakes great(p)

NA
AND
according-to PLACES
FAMINES
AND
11 And great earthquakes shall be in divers places, and famines, and pestilences; and fearful sights and great signs shall there be from heaven.
loimoi loimos
n_ Nom Pl m
esontai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
fobhtra te phobEtron te
n_ Nom Pl n Part
kai ap kai apo

Conj Prep
ouranou shmeia ouranos sEmeion

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Pl n
megala mega
a_ Nom Pl n
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
PESTILENCES
THEY-SHALL-BE FEARfuls there-shall-be fearful-sights de de

Conj
BESIDES AND also
FROM heaven
SIGNS
GREAT
SHALL-BE there-shall-be ceiras cheir

n_ Acc Pl f
12 But before all these, they shall lay their hands on you, and persecute [you], delivering [you] up to the synagogues, and into prisons, being brought before kings and rulers for my name's sake.
21:12 pro
pro
Prep
toutwn pantwn epibalousin houtos pas epiballO

pd Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Pl
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
BEFORE YET OF-these these-things autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
ALL
THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-CASTING ON they-shall-be-laying-on paradidontes eis paradidOmi eis

YOU(p) ye
THE
HANDS
kai diwxousin kai diOkO

tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
kai fulakas kai phulakE

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
OF-them
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-CHASING BESIDE-GIVING they-shall-be-persecuting-ye giving-up-ye
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEADS AND synagogues onomatos mou onoma egO

n_ Gen Sg n
GUARD-houses jails
apagomenous epi basileis kai hgemonas eneken apagO epi basileus kai hEgemOn heneken
vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Prep n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pp 1 Gen Sg
beING-FROM-LED being-led-off
ON
KINGS
AND
LEADers governors eis eis

Prep
NAME
OF-ME
21:13 apobhsetai
apobainO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
marturion marturion
n_ Acc Sg n
13 And it shall turn to you for a testimony.
it-SHALL-BE-FROM-STEPPING to-YOU(p) it-shall-be-eventuating to-ye
INTO witness testimony kardiais umwn kardia humeis

21:14 qete
tithEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
mh mE
Part Neg
promeletan promeletaO
vn Pres Act
BE-PLACING THEN IN be-ye-pondering !
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) NO of-ye
14 Settle [it] therefore in your hearts, not to meditate before what ye shall answer:
TO-BE-BEFORE-CARING to-be-premeditating
AV
Luke 21
apologhqhnai apologeomai
vn Aor pasD
TO-BE-FROM-said to-be-defended
21:15 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar dwsw gar didOmi

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai sofian h kai sophia hos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f pr Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
for
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) ye antisthnai h anthistEmi E

vn 2Aor Act Part
MOUTH
AND
WISDOM
to-WHICH NOT which antikeimenoi antikeimai

15 For I will give you a mouth and wisdom, which all your adversaries shall not be able to gainsay nor resist.
dunhsontai dunamai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
anteipein antilegO
vn 2Aor Act
apantes oi hapas ho
THEY-SHALL-BE-ABLE TO-withSTAND shall-be-able umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OR
TO-BE-contradictING ALL(emph.)
THE
to-YOU(p) ye
21:16 paradoqhsesqe
paradidOmi
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
de de
Conj
kai upo gonewn kai adelfwn kai suggenwn kai hupo goneus kai adelphos kai suggenEs
Conj Prep n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
YE-SHALL-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN YET AND ye-shall-be-being-given-up also kai filwn kai philos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
by
parents
AND
brothers
AND
TOGETHER-generateds relatives
16 And ye shall be betrayed both by parents, and brethren, and kinsfolks, and friends; and [some] of you shall they cause to be put to death.

ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
FOND-ones AND friends
THEY-SHALL-BE-(causing-to)-DIE OUT OF-YOU(p) they-shall-be-putting-to-death of-ye misoumenoi miseO

21:17 kai esesqe

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Pl

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
17 And ye shall be hated of all [men] for my name's sake.
AND
by
ALL
THRU THE because-of ou ou

Part Neg
NAME
OF-ME
21:18 kai qrix

kai
Conj
thrix
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kefalhs umwn kephalE humeis

mh mE
Part Neg
apolhtai apollumi
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
18 But there shall not an hair of your head perish.
AND
HAIR
OUT OF-THE
HEAD
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye

WH
NO
NA
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED should-be-perishing tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
21:19 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kthsesqe
kthsasqe ktaomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
yucas psuchE
n_ Acc Pl f
19 In your patience possess ye your souls.
IN
THE
UNDER-REMAINing OF-YOU(p) endurance of-ye
YE-SHALL-BE-ACQUIRING
THE
souls
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
21:20 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kukloumenhn kukloO
upo stratopedwn ierousalhm hupo stratopedon ierosoluma

Prep n_ Gen Pl n ni proper
when-EVER YET YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING beING-surROUNDED by whenever tote gnwte tote ginOskO

Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
WAR-FEET encampments
JERUSALEM
20 . And when ye shall see Jerusalem compassed with armies, then know that the desolation thereof is nigh.
oti hggiken hoti eggizO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
erhmwsis auths erEmOsis autos

then
BE-KNOWING that be-ye-knowing ! en en
HAS-NEARED THE has-drawn-near th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
DESOLATing desolation
OF-her
21:21 tote oi
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
orh oros
n_ Acc Pl n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
Prep
then
THE-ones the-ones auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
IN
THE
JUDEA
LET-BE-FLEEING INTO THE let-them-be-fleeing ! kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
mountains AND
THE-ones the-ones mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
ekcwreitwsan ekchOreO
vm Pres Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
cwrais chOra
n_ Dat Pl f
21 Then let them which are in Judaea flee to the mountains; and let them which are in the midst of it depart out; and let not them that are in the countries enter thereinto.
IN
MIDst
OF-her
LET-BE-OUT-SPACING AND let-them-be-coming-out-into-the-country ! authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE-ones the-ones
IN
THE
SPACES NO country-places
eisercesqwsan eis eiserchomai eis

vm Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl Prep
LET-BE-INTO-COMING INTO her let-them-be-entering !
AV
Luke 21
21:22 oti hmerai

hoti
Conj
hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
ekdikhsews autai ekdikEsis houtos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Nom Pl f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
plhsqhnai panta plEthO (pimplEmi) pas

vn Aor Pas a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
that
DAYS
OF-OUT-JUSTing of-avenging
these
ARE
OF-THE
TO-BE-FILLED to-be-fulfilled
ALL
THE the-things
22 For these be the days of vengeance, that all things which are written may be fulfilled.
gegrammena graphO
HAVING-been-WRITTEN
21:23 ouai tais

ouai
Inj
ho
t_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep

kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
ekeinais ekeinos
pd Dat Pl f
WOE woe ! tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
to-THE IN to-the-ones
BELLY
HAVING
AND
to-THE
ones-sucklING ones-suckling ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
those
hmerais estai hEmera eimi

n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
gar anagkh gar anagkE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
kai orgh kai orgE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
23 But woe unto them that are with child, and to them that give suck, in those days! for there shall be great distress in the land, and wrath upon this people.
THE
DAYS
SHALL-BE for there-shall-be toutw houtos

pd Dat Sg m
necessity
GREAT
ON
THE
LAND
AND
INDIGNATION
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
PEOPLE
this
21:24 kai pesountai

kai
Conj
piptO
vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
stomati macairhs kai aicmalwtisqhsontai stoma machaira kai aichmalOtizO

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-FALLING to-MOUTH to-edge
OF-sword
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-capturizED INTO THE they-shall-be-being-led-into-captivity upo eqnwn hupo ethnos

Prep n_ Gen Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai ierousalhm estai kai ierosoluma eimi

Conj ni proper vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
patoumenh pateO
acris ou achri hos

Prep pr Gen Sg m
24 And they shall fall by the edge of the sword, and shall be led away captive into all nations: and Jerusalem shall be trodden down of the Gentiles, until the times of the Gentiles be fulfilled.
NATIONS
ALL
AND
JERUSALEM
WH WH
SHALL-BE
beING-TRODDEN
by
NATIONS
UNTIL
WHICH
plhrwqwsin plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
kai esontai
kairoi kairos
n_ Nom Pl m
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED may-be-being-fulfilled
SEASONS eras shmeia sEmeion

n_ Nom Pl n
OF-NATIONS
21:25 kai esontai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
hliw hElios
n_ Dat Sg m
kai selhnh kai astrois kai selEnE kai astron

Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Pl n
kai epi ths kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE SIGNS there-shall-be sunoch eqnwn sunochE ethnos

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl n
IN
SUN
AND
MOON
AND
GLEAMers AND constellations
ON
OF-THE the
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
aporia hcous aporia Echos

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg n
qalasshs kai salou thalassa kai salos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg m
25 And there shall be signs in the sun, and in the moon, and in the stars; and upon the earth distress of nations, with perplexity; the sea and the waves roaring;
LAND earth
pressure
OF-NATIONS IN
perplexity
OF-RESOUND OF-SEA of-resounding fobou phobos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
OF-SHAKing
21:26 apoyucontwn anqrwpwn apo

apopsuchO
anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
apo
Prep
kai prosdokias kai prosdokia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
OF-FROM-COOLING of-chilling epercomenwn eperchomai

OF-humans
FROM FEAR
AND
TOWARD-SEEMing OF-THE apprehensiveness of-the-ones ouranwn ouranos

n_ Gen Pl m
26 Men's hearts failing them for fear, and for looking after those things which are coming on the earth: for the powers of heaven shall be shaken.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikoumenh ai oikoumenE ho
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Pl f
gar dunameis twn gar dunamis ho

Conj n_ Nom Pl f t_ Gen Pl m
ON-COMING coming-on saleuqhsontai saleuO

vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
to-THE the
beING-HOMED inhabited-earth
THE
for
ABILITIES powers
OF-THE
heavens
21:27 kai tote oyontai

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
27 And then shall they see the Son of man coming in a cloud with power and great glory.
AND
then
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE they-shall-be-seeing en en

Prep
SON
OF-THE
human
ercomenon erchomai
nefelh meta dunamews kai doxhs nephelE meta dunamis kai doxa
n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f
pollhs polus
a_ Gen Sg f
COMING
IN
CLOUD
WITH
ABILITY power
AND
esteem glory
much
AV
Luke 21
21:28 arcomenwn
archO
vp Pres Mid Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
toutwn ginesqai houtos ginomai

pd Gen Pl m vn Pres midD/pasD
anakuyate kai eparate anakuptO kai epairO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
OF-beginnING
YET OF-these these-things dioti dioti

Conj
TO-BE-BECOMING UP-BEND to-be-occurring unbend-ye ! h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
AND
ON-LIFT lift-up-ye !
THE
28 And when these things begin to come to pass, then look up, and lift up your heads; for your redemption draweth nigh.
kefalas umwn kephalE humeis

eggizei eggizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
apolutrwsis umwn apolutrOsis humeis

n_ Nom Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
HEADS
OF-YOU(p) THRU-that IS-NEARING THE of-ye because-that is-drawing-near parabolhn autois idete parabolE autos eidO
n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Pl m
FROM-LOOSening deliverance thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU(p) of-ye sukhn sukE

n_ Acc Sg f
21:29 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
29 . And he spake to them a parable; Behold the fig tree, and all the trees;
AND
He-said he-told
BESIDE-CAST parable
to-them them
BE-PERCEIVING THE be-ye-perceiving !
FIG-tree
AND
ALL
THE
dendra dendron
n_ Acc Pl n
TREES
21:30 otan
hotan
Conj
probalwsin proballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hdh EdE
Adv
blepontes blepO
af apo
Prep
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEFORE-CASTING ALREADY lookING whenever they-should-be-budding observing ginwskete ginOskO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
FROM selves yourselves
30 When they now shoot forth, ye see and know of your own selves that summer is now nigh at hand.
oti hdh hoti EdE

Conj Adv
eggus to eggus ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
qeros theros
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
ALREADY NEAR
THE
WARM summer
IS

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
otan hotan
Conj
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ginomena ginomai
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING these BECOMING whenever these-things occurring h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
31 So likewise ye, when ye see these things come to pass, know ye that the kingdom of God is nigh at hand.
ginwskete ginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl


qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
NEAR
IS
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
21:32 amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
parelqh parerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
genea genea
n_ Nom Sg f

pd Nom Sg f
I-AM-sayING
WH
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NA
32 Verily I say unto you, This generation shall not pass away, till all be fulfilled.
that
NOT
NO
MAY-BE-BESIDE-COMING THE may-be-passing-by
generation
ews heOs
Conj
an
an an
Part
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
this
TILL
EVER
ALL
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
21:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos kai h ouranos kai ho

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
33 Heaven and earth shall pass away: but my words shall not pass away.
THE
heaven
AND
THE
LAND earth
YET sayings words
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
OF-ME
NOT
NO
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-COMING shall-be-passing-by eautois heautou

pf 3 Dat Pl m
21:34 prosecete de
prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de
Conj
mhpote mEpote
Adv
barhqwsin bareO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
WH
ai kardiai umwn
WH
WH
NA
YET to-selves NO-?-when MAY-BE-BEING-HEAVIED to-yourselves lest-at-some-time may-be-being-burdened

NA
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
NA
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
kardiai kardia
n_ Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
kraipalh kraipalE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai meqh kai methE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
kai merimnais biwtikais kai merimna biOtikos

Conj n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
34 And take heed to yourselves, lest at any time your hearts be overcharged with surfeiting, and drunkenness, and cares of this life, and [so] that day come upon you unawares.
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye kai episth kai ephistEmi

HEARTS
IN
SKULL-WRESTLE AND crapulence aifnidios aiphnidios

a_ Nom Sg m
DRUNKenness AND
to-anxieties worries ekeinh ekeinos

pd Nom Sg f
livelihoodic of-life's-affairs
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
MAY-BE-ON-STANDING ON may-be-standing-by
YOU(p) ye
UN-APPEAR-PERCEIVED THE unawares
DAY
that
AV
Luke 21 - Luke 22
21:35 ws pagis
hOs
Adv
pagis
n_ Nom Sg f
epeiseleusetai epeiserchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
gar epi pantas tous gar epi pas ho

Conj Prep a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
kaqhmenous kathEmai
epi epi
Prep
35 For as a snare shall it come on all them that dwell on the face of the whole earth.
AS
FASTENer trap
it-SHALL-BE-ON-INTO-COMING for it-shall-be-intruding ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
ON
ALL
THE
ones-sittiNG ones-sitting
ON
proswpon pashs prosOpon pas

n_ Acc Sg n a_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
face surface
OF-EVERY THE of-entire de de

Conj
LAND earth en en
Prep
21:36 agrupneite
agrupneO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
deomenoi deomai
ina hina
Conj
katiscushte katischuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-YE-beING-vigilant YET IN be-ye-being-vigilant ! ekfugein ekpheugO

vn 2Aor Act
EVERY
SEASON occasion
beseechING
THAT YE-MAY-BE-prevailING
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mellonta mellO
ginesqai ginomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
kai staqhnai kai histEmi

Conj vn Aor Pas
36 Watch ye therefore, and pray always, that ye may be accounted worthy to escape all these things that shall come to pass, and to stand before the Son of man.
TO-BE-OUT-FLEEING these ALL to-be-escaping these-things emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
THE
beING-ABOUT being-about(p) anqrwpou anthrOpos

n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-BECOMING AND to-be-occurring
TO-BE-STOOD to-stand
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
SON
OF-THE
human
21:37 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras en hEmera en
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
didaskwn didaskO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
de de
Conj
He-WAS
YET THE
DAYS
IN
THE
SACRED-place TEACHING sanctuary eis eis

Prep
THE
YET
37 And in the day time he was teaching in the temple; and at night he went out, and abode in the mount that is called [the mount] of Olives.
nuktas exercomenos nux exerchomai

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
hulizeto aulizomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kaloumenon kaleO
NIGHTS
He-COURTizED he-camped-out
INTO THE
mountain mount
THE
one-beING-CALLED one-being-called
elaiwn elaia
n_ Gen Pl f
OF-OLIVES
21:38 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
wrqrizen pros orthrizO pros

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
38 And all the people came early in the morning to him in the temple, for to hear him.
AND
EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
EARLYizED came-early
TOWARD Him
IN
THE
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
TO-BE-HEARING OF-Him him
AV
Luke 22
22:1 hggizen
eggizO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
azumwn azumos
a_ Gen Pl n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
legomenh legO
pasca pascha
Aramaic
. Now the feast of unleavened bread drew nigh, which is called the Passover.
NEARED drew-near
YET THE
FESTIVAL
OF-THE
UN-FERMENTEDS THE unleavened-bread(p) kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
one-beING-said one-being-said pws pOs

Adv Int
PASSOVER
22:2 kai ezhtoun oi

kai
Conj
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
grammateis to grammateus ho
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
AND
SOUGHT
THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests efobounto phobeO

THE
WRITers scribes laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
how how ?
And the chief priests and scribes sought how they might kill him; for they feared the people.
anelwsin anaireO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
gar ton gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
THEY-MAY-BE-UP-LIFTING Him they-may-be-assassinating
THEY-FEARED
for
THE
PEOPLE
22:3 eishlqen
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ioudan ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kaloumenon kaleO
iskariwthn iskariOthEs
n_ Acc Sg m
Then entered Satan into Judas surnamed Iscariot, being of the number of the twelve.
INTO-CAME entered onta eimi

YET SATAN (Heb. adversary) INTO JUDAS Satan ek ek

Prep
THE
one-beING-CALLED ISCARIOT one-being-called
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ariqmou twn arithmos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
BEING
OUT OF-THE
NUMBER
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve arciereusin archiereus

n_ Dat Pl m
22:4 kai apelqwn

kai
Conj
aperchomai
sunelalhsen sullaleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kai strathgois to kai stratEgos ho

Conj n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
AND
he-TOGETHER-TALKS to-THE he-confers-with the auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
officers
THE
And he went his way, and communed with the chief priests and captains, how he might betray him unto them.
pws autois paradw pOs autos paradidOmi

Adv Int pp Dat Pl m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
how how ?
to-them
he-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him he-may-be-giving-up kai suneqento kai suntithEmi

Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
22:5 kai ecarhsan

kai
Conj
chairO
vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
argurion dounai argurion didOmi

And they were glad, and covenanted to give him money.
AND
THEY-WERE-JOYed AND they-rejoiced
THEY-TOGETHER-PLACED to-him they-agreed him eukairian eukairia

n_ Acc Sg f
SILVER
TO-GIVE
22:6 kai exwmologhsen kai ezhtei

kai
Conj
exomologeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai
Conj
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
paradounai auton paradidOmi autos

vn 2Aor Act pp Acc Sg m
ater ater
Prep
AND
he-OUT-AVOWS he-acquiesces autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
AND
SOUGHT
WELL-SEASON OF-THE opportunity
TO-BESIDE-GIVE Him to-give-up
MINUS
And he promised, and sought opportunity to betray him unto them in the absence of the multitude.
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THRONG to-them throng
22:7 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
azumwn azumos
a_ Gen Pl n
NA
en en
Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
. Then came the day of unleavened bread, when the passover must be killed.
CAME
YET THE
DAY
OF-THE
UN-FERMENTEDS unleavened-bread(p)
IN
WHICH
it-WAS-BINDING must
quesqai thuO
vn Pres Pas
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
TO-BE-beING-SACRIFICED THE
PASSOVER
22:8 kai apesteilen petron kai iwannhn eipwn

kai
Conj
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai
Conj
iOannEs
n_ Acc Sg m
legO
etoimasate hetoimazO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
And he sent Peter and John, saying, Go and prepare us the passover, that we may eat.
AND
He-commissions he-dispatches to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
Peter
AND
JOHN
sayING
BEING-GONE
make-READY make-ready-ye !
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pasca pascha
Aramaic
ina hina
Conj
fagwmen esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
to-US
THE
PASSOVER THAT WE-MAY-BE-EATING
22:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
etoimaswmen hetoimazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
And they said unto him, Where wilt thou that we prepare?
THE
YET THEY-say
to-Him
?-where YOU-ARE-WILLING WE-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY where ?
AV
Luke 22
22:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois idou autos idou

pp Dat Pl m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eiselqontwn umwn eiserchomai humeis

vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET He-said
to-them
BE-PERCEIVING OF-INTO-COMING lo ! of-entering
OF-YOU(p) INTO THE of-ye
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
sunanthsei sunantaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anqrwpos keramion udatos bastazwn anthrOpos keramion hudOr bastazO

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
10 And he said unto them, Behold, when ye are entered into the city, there shall a man meet you, bearing a pitcher of water; follow him into the house where he entereth in.
city
SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-meetING to-YOU(p) shall-be-meeting-with ye eis eis

Prep
human
HOLDer (dim) jar eis eis

Prep
OF-water
BEARING
akolouqhsate autw akoloutheO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
follow follow-ye !
to-him him
INTO THE
HOME house
INTO WHICH
he-IS-INTO-GOING he-is-going-into oikias oikia

n_ Gen Sg f
22:11 kai ereite

kai
Conj
ereO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikodespoth ths oikodespotEs ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-declarING to-THE
HOME-OWNER householder to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
HOME house opou hopou

Adv
IS-sayING
to-YOU
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
didaskalos pou didaskalos pou

n_ Nom Sg m Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kataluma kataluma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
11 And ye shall say unto the goodman of the house, The Master saith unto thee, Where is the guestchamber, where I shall eat the passover with my disciples?
THE
TEACHer
?-where IS where ? fagw esthiO
THE
DOWN-LOOSE THE-?-where THE caravansary wheree
PASSOVER
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mou mathEtEs egO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-ME
I-MAY-BE-EATING
22:12 kakeinos umin

kakeinos
pd Nom Sg m
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
deixei deiknumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
anagaion mega anagaion mega

estrwmenon strOnnumi
ekei ekei
Adv
AND-that-one and-that-man etoimasate hetoimazO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
to-YOU(p) ye
12 And he shall shew you a large upper room furnished: there make ready.
SHALL-BE-SHOWING UP-LAND upper-room
GREAT large
HAVING-been-STREWN there with-places-having-been-spread
make-YE-READY make-ready-ye !
22:13 apelqontes
aperchomai
de de
Conj
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
eirhkei ereO
autois kai htoimasan autos kai hetoimazO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
13 And they went, and found as he had said unto them: and they made ready the passover.
FROM-COMING coming-away to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
YET THEY-FOUND according-AS He-HAD-declarED to-them
AND
THEY-make-READY
pasca pascha
Aramaic
THE
PASSOVER

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
anepesen anapiptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi apostolos
n_ Nom Pl m
14 And when the hour was come, he sat down, and the twelve apostles with him.
AND
when
BECAME
THE
HOUR
He-UP-FALLS AND he-leans-back-at-table
THE
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
22:15 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous epiqumia autos epithumia

pp Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg f
epequmhsa touto epithumeO houtos

vi Aor Act 1 Sg pd Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
AND
He-said
TOWARD them
to-ON-FEELing I-ON-FEEL to-yearning I-yearn tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
this
THE
PASSOVER
15 And he said unto them, With desire I have desired to eat this passover with you before I suffer:
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
pro pro
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-EATING WITH YOU(p) ye
BEFORE THE
ME
TO-BE-EMOTIONING to-be-suffering fagw esthiO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
22:16 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n

I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT
NO
I-MAY-BE-EATING it of-it
TILL
16 For I say unto you, I will not any more eat thereof, until it be fulfilled in the kingdom of God.
AV
Luke 22
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
it-MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED IN it-may-be-being-fulfilled
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
22:17 kai dexamenos

kai
Conj
dechomai
pothrion eucaristhsas eipen potErion eucharisteO legO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
labete lambanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
AND
RECEIVing
DRINK-cup cup eautous heautou

pf 3 Acc Pl m
He-said
this
AND
17 And he took the cup, and gave thanks, and said, Take this, and divide [it] among yourselves:
diamerisate eis diamerizO eis

THRU-PART-YE divide-ye-it !
INTO selves yourselves gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
NA
22:18 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
piw pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
nun nun
Adv
I-AM-sayING
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT
NO
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING FROM THE
NOW
18 For I say unto you, I will not drink of the fruit of the vine, until the kingdom of God shall come.
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

ampelou ampelos
n_ Gen Sg f
ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

FROM THE
product
OF-THE
GRAPE-VINE TILL grapevine
OF-WHICH THE which
KINGdom
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
God
MAY-BE-COMING
22:19 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
eucaristhsas eklasen eucharisteO klaiO


autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
GETTING taking touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
BREAD
thanking giving-thanks to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
He-BREAKS he-breaks-it swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
AND
GIVES
WH NA
to-them
legwn legO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
19 And he took bread, and gave thanks, and brake [it], and gave unto them, saying, This is my body which is given for you: this do in remembrance of me.
sayING
this
IS
THE
BODY
OF-ME
THE
uper huper
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
didomenon didOmi
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
anamnhsin anamnEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye
beING-GIVEN
this
INTO THE
MY of-me
UP-REMINDing recollection touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
20 Likewise also the cup after supper, saying, This cup [is] the new testament in my blood, which is shed for you.
22:20 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pothrion wsautws meta to potErion hOsautOs meta ho

n_ Nom Sg n Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n
deipnhsai legwn deipneO legO

vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AND also to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
DRINK-cup cup
AS-SAMEly similarly kainh kainos

a_ Nom Sg f
after
THE
TO-DINE
sayING
this
pothrion h potErion ho
n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg f
diaqhkh en diathEkE en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
aimati haima
n_ Dat Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
DRINK-cup cup umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
WH
NEW
covenant
NA
IN
THE
BLOOD
OF-ME
THE
uper huper
Prep
ekcunnomenon
ekcunnomenon ekcheO
beING-OUT-POURED being-shed h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
22:21 plhn
plEn
Adv
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
paradidontos me paradidOmi egO

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
21 . But, behold, the hand of him that betrayeth me [is] with me on the table.
MOREly BE-PERCEIVING THE moreover lo ! epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
HAND
OF-THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING one-giving-up
ME
WITH ME
trapezhs trapeza
n_ Gen Sg f
ON
THE
table
22:22 oti
hoti
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou kata anthrOpos kata

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
SON
INDEED OF-THE
human
according-to THE
22 And truly the Son of man goeth, as it was determined: but woe unto that man by whom he is betrayed!
AV
Luke 22
wrismenon horizO
poreuetai poreuomai
plhn plEn
Adv
ouai tw ouai ho
Inj t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw ekeinw di anthrOpos ekeinos dia

ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-definED IS-GOING having-been-specified paradidotai paradidOmi

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
MOREly WOE however woe !
to-THE
human
that
THRU WHOM through
He-IS-be-ING-BESIDE-GIVEN he-is-being-given-up
22:23 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
hrxanto archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
suzhtein suzEteO
vn Pres Act
pros pros
Prep
eautous to heautou ho
pf 3 Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
AND
they
begin
TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING TOWARD selves to-be-discussing themselves ex ek

Prep
THE
ANY which ?
23 And they began to enquire among themselves, which of them it was that should do this thing.
ara ara
Part Int
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
mellwn mellO
prassein prassO
vn Pres Act
CONSEQUENTLY MAY-BE it-may-be
OUT OF-them
THE the-one en en
Prep
this this-thing
beING-ABOUT
TO-BE-PRACTISING to-be-committing autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
22:24 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai filoneikia kai philoneikia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
autois to autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg n
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BECAME there-became einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
YET AND also
FOND-CONQUER IN them rivalry among
THE
ANY which ?
OF-them
IS-SEEMING
24 And there was also a strife among them, which of them should be accounted the greatest.
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
TO-BE
GREATER greatest de de
Conj
22:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois oi autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
basileis twn basileus ho

eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
kurieuousin kurieuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE
YET He-said
to-them
THE
KINGS
OF-THE
NATIONS
ARE-masterING are-being-lord
25 And he said unto them, The kings of the Gentiles exercise lordship over them; and they that exercise authority upon them are called benefactors.
autwn kai oi autos kai ho

pp Gen Pl n Conj t_ Nom Pl m
exousiazontes exousiazO
autwn euergetai kalountai autos euergetEs kaleO

pp Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
OF-them
AND
THE
ones-authorityizING OF-them ones-exercising-authority ouc ou

Part Neg
WELL-ACTers benefactors meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ARE-beING-CALLED
22:26 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
outws all o houtOs alla ho

Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ginesqw ginomai
YOU(p) ye ws o hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
YET NOT
thus
but
THE
GREATER greatest
IN YOU(p) among ye ws o hOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
LET-BE-BECOMING let-him-be-becoming ! diakonwn diakoneO

26 But ye [shall] not [be] so: but he that is greatest among you, let him be as the younger; and he that is chief, as he that doth serve.
newteros neos
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
hgoumenos hEgeomai
AS
THE
YOUNGer youngest gar meizwn gar mega

Conj
AND
THE
one-LEADING one-leading anakeimenos anakeimai

AS
THE
one-THRU-SERVING one-serving diakonwn diakoneO

27 For whether [is] greater, he that sitteth at meat, or he that serveth? [is] not he that sitteth at meat? but I am among you as he that serveth.
22:27 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ANY who ? ouci ouchi

Part Int
for
GREATER
THE
one-UP-LYING one-lying-back-at-table egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
OR
THE
one-THRU-SERVING one-serving eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anakeimenos anakeimai
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ws hOs
Adv
NOT(emph.) THE not(emph.) ? o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
one-UP-LYING one-lying-back-at-table
YET IN
MIDst
OF-YOU(p) AM of-ye
AS
diakonwn diakoneO
THE
one-THRU-SERVING one-serving de de
Conj
22:28 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
diamemenhkotes diamenO
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
YOU(p) ye
28 Ye are they which have continued with me in my temptations.
YET ARE
THE
ones-HAVING-THRU-REMAINED WITH ME ones-having-continued
IN
THE
peirasmois mou peirasmos egO

trials
OF-ME
AV
Luke 22
22:29 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
diatiqemai umin diatithEmi humeis

vi Pres Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
dieqeto diatithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
AND-I
AM-covenantING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
29 And I appoint unto you a kingdom, as my Father hath appointed unto me;
according-AS covenantED
to-ME
THE
FATHER
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME
KINGdom
22:30 ina
hina
Conj
esqhte esthiO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
kai pinhte kai pinO

Conj vs Pres Act 2 Pl
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
trapezhs mou trapeza egO

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THAT YE-MAY-BE-EATING AND

WH
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING ON
NA
THE
table
OF-ME
IN
THE
30 That ye may eat and drink at my table in my kingdom, and sit on thrones judging the twelve tribes of Israel.
basileia mou basileia egO

kai kai
Conj
kaqhsqe
kaqhsesqe kathEmai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
epi qronwn tas epi thronos ho

Prep n_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
KINGdom
OF-ME
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-sittING
ON
THRONES
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
fulas krinontes phulE krinO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
tribes
JUDGING
OF-THE
ISRAEL
22:31 simwn
simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
exhthsato exaiteO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
SIMON Simon ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SIMON Simon !
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! siton sitos

n_ Acc Sg m
SATAN (Heb. adversary) OUT-REQUESTS YOU(p) Satan claims ye
31 And the Lord said, Simon, Simon, behold, Satan hath desired [to have] you, that he may sift [you] as wheat:
siniasai ws ton siniazO hOs ho

vn Aor Act Adv t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
TO-QUAKE to-sift de de
Conj
AS
THE
GRAIN
22:32 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
edehqhn deomai
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ekliph ekleipO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
YET besought
THAT NO
MAY-BE-OUT-LACKING THE may-be-defaulting tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
32 But I have prayed for thee, that thy faith fail not: and when thou art converted, strengthen thy brethren.
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
pote epistreyas pote epistrephO

Part vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
sthrison stErizO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
BELIEF faith sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
AND
YOU
?-when once
ON-TURNing turning-back
STAND-fast-YOU THE establish-you !
brothers brethren
OF-YOU
22:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
etoimos eimi hetoimos eimi

kai kai
Conj
33 And he said unto him, Lord, I am ready to go with thee, both into prison, and to death.
THE
YET he-said
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
WITH
YOU
READY
I-AM
AND also
eis eis
Prep
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
qanaton poreuesqai thanatos poreuomai

n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
INTO GUARD-house AND jail
INTO DEATH
TO-BE-GOING
22:34 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
petre petros
n_ Voc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
fwnhsei phOneO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
THE
YET He-said
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
Peter !
NOT
SHALL-BE-SOUNDING toDAY shall-be-crowing
34 And he said, I tell thee, Peter, the cock shall not crow this day, before that thou shalt thrice deny that thou knowest me.
alektwr ews tris alektOr heOs tris

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
aparnhsh aparneomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
UN-LAYer cock
TILL
THRice ME
YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING TO-PERCEIVE you-shall-be-abjuring to-be-acquainted-with ater ballantiou kai ater ballantion kai
Prep n_ Gen Sg n Conj
35 And he said unto them, When I sent you without purse, and scrip, and shoes, lacked ye any thing? And they said, Nothing.
22:35 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ote apesteila umas autos hote apostellO humeis

pp Dat Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
He-said
to-them
when
I-commission I-dispatch
YOU(p) ye
MINUS OF-purse purse
AND
AV
Luke 22
phras pEra
n_ Gen Sg f
kai upodhmatwn mh kai hupodEma mE

Conj n_ Gen Pl n Part Neg
tinos tis
px Gen Sg n
usterhsate oi hustereO ho
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-BAG (beggar's) AND beggar's-bag ouqenos oudeis

a_ Gen Sg n
OF-sandals sandals
NO
OF-ANY anything
YE-WANT
THE-ones the
YET say they-say
OF-NOT-YET-ONE nothing
22:36 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autois alla nun o autos alla nun ho

pp Dat Pl m Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
ballantion aratw ballantion airO

n_ Acc Sg n vm Aor Act 3 Sg
He-said
YET to-them
but
NOW THE
one-HAVING one-having ecwn echO

purse
LET-him-LIFT let-him-pick-up-it ! imation himation

n_ Acc Sg n
omoiws kai phran homoiOs kai pEra

Adv Conj n_ Acc Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
pwlhsatw to pOleO ho
vm Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
36 Then said he unto them, But now, he that hath a purse, let him take [it], and likewise [his] scrip: and he that hath no sword, let him sell his garment, and buy one.
LIKE-AS likewise autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND also
BAG (beggar's) AND beggar's-bag
THE-one the-one
NO
HAVING
LET-him-SELL let-him-sell !
THE
cloak
kai agorasatw macairan kai agorazO machaira

Conj vm Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
AND
LET-him-BUY let-him-buy ! gar umin gar humeis

Conj
sword
22:37 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti touto hoti houtos

Conj pd Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gegrammenon graphO
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
pp 2 Dat Pl
I-AM-sayING
for
Prep
that
this
THE
HAVING-been-WRITTEN IS-BINDING must elogisqh logizomai

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
telesqhnai teleO
vn Aor Pas
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kai meta anomwn kai meta anomos

Conj Prep a_ Gen Pl m
kai gar to kai gar ho

Conj Conj t_ Acc Sg n
37 For I say unto you, that this that is written must yet be accomplished in me, And he was reckoned among the transgressors: for the things concerning me have an end.
TO-BE-BEING-FINISHED IN to-be-being-accomplished peri peri

Prep
ME
THE-one the ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
WITH
UN-LAWeds IS-accountED AND lawless-ones he-is-reckoned also
for
THE
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
ABOUT ME concerning
FINISH IS-HAVING consummation de de

Conj
22:38 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
macairai wde duo machaira hOde duo

n_ Nom Pl f Adv ni numeral
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
38 And they said, Lord, behold, here [are] two swords. And he said unto them, It is enough.
THE-ones the eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET say they-say
Master ! Lord ! estin eimi
BE-PERCEIVING swords lo !
here
TWO
THE
YET
autois ikanon autos hikanos

pp Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg n
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
He-said
to-them
enough
it-IS
22:39 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
eporeuqh poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eqos ethos
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
AND
He-WAS-GONE according-to THE he-went autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
WH
CUSTOM
INTO THE
mountain mount
OF-THE
39 . And he came out, and went, as he was wont, to the mount of Olives; and his disciples also followed him.
elaiwn hkolouqhsan de elaia akoloutheO de

n_ Gen Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
OLIVES
follow
YET to-Him him de de

Conj
AND also topou topos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
LEARNers disciples autois proseucesqe autos proseuchomai

22:40 genomenos
ginomai
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
BECOMING coming-to-be eiselqein eiserchomai

vn 2Aor Act
YET ON
THE
PLACE
He-said
to-them
NO
40 And when he was at the place, he said unto them, Pray that ye enter not into temptation.
eis eis
Prep
peirasmon peirasmos
n_ Acc Sg m
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO trial to-be-entering
22:41 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
apespasqh apospaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
wsei liqou hOsei lithos

Adv n_ Gen Sg m
bolhn bolE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai qeis kai tithEmi

41 And he was withdrawn from them about a stone's cast, and kneeled down, and prayed,
AND
He
IS-FROM-PULLED FROM them is-pulled-away
AS-IF about
OF-STONE
CAST throw
AND
PLACING
AV
Luke 22
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
gonata proshuceto gonu proseuchomai

n_ Acc Pl n vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE
KNEES
He-prayED
22:42 legwn
legO
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
boulei boulomai
parenegke parapherO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pothrion potErion
n_ Acc Sg n
sayING
FATHER !
IF
YOU-ARE-intendING
BESIDE-CARRY this carry-aside-you ! alla to alla ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
THE
DRINK-cup cup
42 Saying, Father, if thou be willing, remove this cup from me: nevertheless not my will, but thine, be done.
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
plhn plEn
Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
son sos
ps 2 Nom Sg
FROM ME
MOREly NO however
THE
WILL
OF-ME
but
THE
YOUR
ginesqw ginomai
LET-BE-BECOMING let-it-be-becoming !
22:43
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
apo tou
WH
NA
ap apo
Prep
ouranou eniscuwn ouranos enischuO

43 And there appeared an angel unto him from heaven, strengthening him.
WAS-VIEWED YET to-Him was-seen auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
MESSENGER
FROM
heaven
IN-STRENGTHenING strengthening
Him
22:44 kai genomenos

kai
Conj
ginomai
en en
Prep
agwnia ektenesteron proshuceto agOnia ektenEs proseuchomai

n_ Dat Sg f Adv vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg

AND
BECOMING coming-to-be idrws hidrOs

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
CONTEST struggle
OUT-STRETCH-more He-prayED more-earnestly
AND
BECAME
44 And being in an agony he prayed more earnestly: and his sweat was as it were great drops of blood falling down to the ground.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
wsei qromboi aimatos katabainontes epi thn hOsei thrombos haima katabainO epi ho
Adv n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg f
THE
SWEAT-GUSH OF-Him sweat
AS-IF
CLOTS
OF-BLOOD
DOWN-STEPPING descending
ON
THE
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
LAND earth
22:45 kai anastas

kai
Conj
anistEmi
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
proseuchs elqwn proseuchE erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
UP-STANDing rising
FROM THE
prayer
COMING
TOWARD THE
LEARNers disciples
45 And when he rose up from prayer, and was come to his disciples, he found them sleeping for sorrow,
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
koimwmenous autous apo koimaO autos apo

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
luphs lupE
n_ Gen Sg f
He-FOUND
reposING
them
FROM THE
SORROW
22:46 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

kaqeudete katheudO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
anastantes anistEmi
46 And said unto them, Why sleep ye? rise and pray, lest ye enter into temptation.
AND
He-said
to-them
ANY why ? eis eis

Prep
YE-ARE-DOWN-LOUNGING UP-STANDing ye-are-drowsing rising peirasmon peirasmos

n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-INTO-COMING INTO trial ye-may-be-entering autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
22:47 eti
eti
Adv
lalountos laleO
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
STILL OF-Him
TALKING speaking twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING THRONG lo ! dwdeka prohrceto dOdeka proerchomai

ni numeral vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
AND
THE
one-beING-said one-being-said tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
autous kai hggisen autos kai eggizO

pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
47 . And while he yet spake, behold a multitude, and he that was called Judas, one of the twelve, went before them, and drew near unto Jesus to kiss him.
JUDAS
ONE
OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
BEFORE-CAME came-before
them
AND
NEARS draws-near
to-THE
AV
Luke 22
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
filhsai phileO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
JESUS
TO-be-FOND Him to-kiss de de

Conj
22:48 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
iouda ioudas
n_ Voc Sg m
filhmati philEma
n_ Dat Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
48 But Jesus said unto him, Judas, betrayest thou the Son of man with a kiss?
JESUS
YET said
to-him
JUDAS Judas !
to-FOND-effect THE to-kiss
SON
OF-THE
anqrwpou paradidws anthrOpos paradidOmi

human
YOU-ARE-BESIDE-GIVING you-are-giving-up de de
Conj
22:49 idontes
eidO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
peri peri
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
esomenon eimi
vp Fut vxx Acc Sg n
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
PERCEIVING
YET THE-ones the-ones en en

Prep
ABOUT Him
THE
SHALL-BE-BEING THEY-say
Master ! Lord !
49 When they which were about him saw what would follow, they said unto him, Lord, shall we smite with the sword?
ei ei
Cond
pataxomen patassO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
macairh machaira
n_ Dat Sg f
IF
WE-SHALL-BE-SMITING IN
sword
22:50 kai epataxen eis

kai
Conj
patassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
50 And one of them smote the servant of the high priest, and cut off his right ear.
AND
SMITES
ONE
ANY certain to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OUT OF-them
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one THE chief-priest dexion dexios

a_ Acc Sg n
doulon kai afeilen doulos kai aphaireO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ous ous
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
SLAVE
AND
he-FROM-LIFTS THE amputates de de

Conj
WH
EAR
NA
OF-him
THE
RIGHT
22:51 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eate eaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ews toutou heOs houtos

Conj pd Gen Sg n
answerING
YET
THE
JESUS
said
BE-LEAVING be-ye-leaving !
TILL
OF-this this
51 And Jesus answered and said, Suffer ye thus far. And he touched his ear, and healed him.
kai ayamenos kai haptO

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
wtiou Otion
n_ Gen Sg n
iasato iaomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
TOUCHing
OF-THE the de de
Conj
EARshell earlobe pros pros

Prep
He-HEALS
him
22:52 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
paragenomenous paraginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Pl m
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
n_ Acc Pl m
said
YET JESUS
TOWARD THE
ones-BESIDE-BECOMING ON ones-coming-along
Him
chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests exhlqate exerchomai

vi Aor Act 2 Pl
kai strathgous tou kai stratEgos ho

Conj n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
kai presbuterous ws epi lhsthn kai presbuteros hOs epi lEstEs

Conj a_ Acc Pl m Adv Prep n_ Acc Sg m
52 Then Jesus said unto the chief priests, and captains of the temple, and the elders, which were come to him, Be ye come out, as against a thief, with swords and staves?
AND
officers
OF-THE
SENIORS elders
AS
ON
ROBBER
YE-OUT-COME ye-come-out

WITH
swords
AND
WOODS cudgels mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
22:53 kaq
kata
Prep
hmeran ontos hEmera eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
according-to DAY
OF-BEING
OF-ME
WITH YOU(p) ye all auth alla houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg f
IN
THE
SACRED-place NOT sanctuary umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
53 When I was daily with you in the temple, ye stretched forth no hands against me: but this is your hour, and the power of darkness.
exeteinate ekteinO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras ep cheir epi

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
YE-OUT-STRETCH THE ye-stretch-out wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
HANDS
ON
ME
but
this
IS
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
exousia tou exousia ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
skotous skotos
n_ Gen Sg n
HOUR
AND
THE
authority jurisdiction
OF-THE
DARKness
AV
Luke 22
22:54 sullabontes
sullambanO
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hgagon agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai eishgagon kai eisagO

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-GETTING YET Him apprehending arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
THEY-LED they-led-him
AND
THEY-INTO-LED INTO THE they-led-him-into
HOME house
OF-THE
54 . Then took they him, and led [him], and brought him into the high priest's house. And Peter followed afar off.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
hkolouqei makroqen akoloutheO makrothen

vi impf Act 3 Sg Adv
chief-SACRED-one THE chief-priest
YET Peter
followED
FAR-PLACE afar-off ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
22:55 periayantwn
periaptO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
aulhs aulE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai sugkaqisantwn kai sugkathizO

Conj vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
OF-ABOUT-TOUCHing YET FIRE of-ones-kindling ekaqhto kathEmai

IN
MIDst
OF-THE
COURT courtyard
AND
OF-being-TOGETHER-seated of-ones-being-seated-together
55 And when they had kindled a fire in the midst of the hall, and were set down together, Peter sat down among them.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
mesos mesos
a_ Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
sat
THE
Peter
MIDst
OF-them
22:56 idousa
eidO
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
paidiskh tis paidiskE tis

n_ Nom Sg f px Nom Sg f
kaqhmenon kathEmai
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
PERCEIVING
YET him
maid
ANY certain
sittING
TOWARD THE
56 But a certain maid beheld him as he sat by the fire, and earnestly looked upon him, and said, This man was also with him.
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
kai atenisasa kai atenizO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

Conj pd Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
LIGHT
AND
STRETCHing looking-intently de de
Conj
to-him
said
AND also ouk ou

Part Neg
this-one this-man oida eidO
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WAS
22:57 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
legwn legO
gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
57 And he denied him, saying, Woman, I know him not.
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THE
YET he-disowns he-denies
sayING
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED Him I-am-acquainted-with auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WOMAN !
22:58 kai meta bracu

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
brachus
a_ Acc Sg n
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ex ek
Prep
AND
after
BIT
DIFFERENT PERCEIVING different-one o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
him
AVERRed
AND also
YOU
OUT
58 And after a little while another saw him, and said, Thou art also of them. And Peter said, Man, I am not.
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpe ouk anthrOpos ou

eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
OF-them
ARE
THE
YET Peter
AVERRed
human !
NOT
I-AM
22:59 kai diastashs

kai
Conj
diistEmi
wsei wras hOsei hOra

Adv n_ Gen Sg f
mias heis
n_ Gen Sg f
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
diiscurizeto diischurizomai
AND
OF-THRU-STANDING AS-IF of-being-interval about ep epi

Prep
OF-HOUR
ONE
other
ANY some hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
was-THRU-STRONG stoutly-insisted kai gar galilaios kai gar galilaios

Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg m
59 And about the space of one hour after another confidently affirmed, saying, Of a truth this [fellow] also was with him: for he is a Galilaean.
legwn legO
alhqeias kai outos alEtheia kai houtos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
sayING
ON
TRUTH
AND also
this-one this-man
WITH Him
WAS
AND also
for
GALILEAN
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
he-IS
22:60 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpe ouk anthrOpos ou

oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
said
YET THE
Peter
human !
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED WHICH I-am-aware efwnhsen alektwr phOneO alektOr

60 And Peter said, Man, I know not what thou sayest. And immediately, while he yet spake, the cock crew.
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai paracrhma eti kai parachrEma eti

Conj Adv Adv
lalountos laleO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
YOU-ARE-sayING AND
instantly
STILL OF-TALKING of-speaking o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-him
SOUNDS crows
UN-LAYer cock kai kai

Conj
61 And the Lord turned, and looked upon Peter. And Peter remembered the word of the Lord, how he had said unto him, Before the cock crow,
22:61 kai strafeis

kai
Conj
strephO
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
enebleyen tw emblepO ho
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
BEING-TURNED
THE
Master Lord
IN-looks looks-at
to-THE the
Peter
AND
AV
Luke 22
upemnhsqh hupomimnEskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ws eipen hOs legO

thou shalt deny me thrice.
IS-UNDER-REMINDED THE is-reminded autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
Peter
OF-THE
declaration
OF-THE
Master Lord
AS
He-said
oti prin alektora fwnhsai shmeron aparnhsh hoti prin alektOr phOneO sEmeron aparneomai
Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act Adv vi Fut midD 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tris tris
Adv
to-him
that
WH
ERE
NA
UN-LAYer cock exelqwn exerchomai
TO-SOUND to-crow exw exO

Adv
toDAY
YOU-SHALL-BE-renouncING ME
WH NA
THRice
22:62
kai
kai kai
Conj
eklausen klaiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pikrws
pikrws pikrOs
Adv
62 And Peter went out, and wept bitterly.
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
OUT he-LAMENTS outside sunecontes sunechO

BITTERly
22:63 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
enepaizon autw empaizO autos

63 . And the men that held Jesus mocked him, and smote [him].
AND
THE
MEN
THE
ones-pressING ones-pressing
Him
IN-sportED scoffed-at
to-Him him
derontes derO
SKINNING lashing-him
22:64 kai perikaluyantes auton

kai
Conj
perikaluptO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autos
pp Acc Sg m
ephrwtwn eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
profhteuson tis prophEteuO tis

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pi Nom Sg m
AND
ABOUT-COVERing covering-about o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
Him
THEY-inquirED-of sayING they-inquired-of-him se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
BEFORE-AVER prophesy-you !
ANY who ?
64 And when they had blindfolded him, they struck him on the face, and asked him, saying, Prophesy, who is it that smote thee?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
paisas paiO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
IS
THE
one-HITTing one-hitting polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
YOU
22:65 kai etera

kai
Conj
heteros
a_ Acc Pl n
blasfhmountes elegon blasphEmeO legO

eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
65 And many blasphemously against him.
other things spake they
AND
DIFFERENT MANY different-things
HARM-AVERRING blaspheming hmera hEmera

n_ Nom Sg f
THEY-said
INTO Him
22:66 kai ws egeneto

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
sunhcqh sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
presbuterion tou presbuterion ho

AND
AS
it-BECAME
DAY
WAS-TOGETHER-LED THE was-gathered
SENIORship eldership auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
66 And as soon as it was day, the elders of the people and the chief priests and the scribes came together, and led him into their council, saying,
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Nom Pl m
te te
Part
kai grammateis kai aphgagon kai grammateus kai apagO

Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
PEOPLE
chief-SACRED-ones BESIDES AND bsboth chief-priests legontes legO

WRITers scribes
AND
THEY-FROM-LED Him they-led-away
INTO THE
sunedrion autwn sunedrion autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Pl m
Sanhedrin
OF-them
sayING
22:67 ei
ei
Cond
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos eipon christos legO

n_ Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
67 Art thou the Christ? tell us. And he said unto them, If I tell you, ye will not believe:
IF
YOU
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ mh mE
Part Neg
say tell-you !
to-US us
He-said
YET to-them
ean ean
Cond
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
IF-EVER to-YOU(p) ye
I-MAY-BE-sayING NOT I-may-be-telling erwthsw erOtaO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
22:68 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
apokriqhte apokrinomai
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
68 And if I also ask [you], ye will not answer me, nor let [me] go.
IF-EVER YET I-SHOULD-BE-askING NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-answerING
22:69 apo
apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun de nun de
Adv Conj
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
69 Hereafter shall the Son of man sit on the right hand of the power of God.
FROM THE
NOW YET SHALL-BE
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
AV
Luke 22 - Luke 23
kaqhmenos kathEmai
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn ths dexios ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
dunamews tou dunamis ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
sittING
OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p) de de

Conj
OF-THE
ABILITY power ei eimi
OF-THE
God
22:70 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
THEY-say
YET ALL
YOU
THEN ARE
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
70 Then said they all, Art thou then the Son of God? And he said unto them, Ye say that I am.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous efh autos phEmi

pp Acc Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
THE
YET TOWARD them
He-AVERRed
YOU(p) ye ecomen echO
ARE-sayING
that
AM
22:71 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eti eti
Adv
marturias creian marturia chreia

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar gar
Conj
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
THE-ones the
YET say they-say tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
ANY what ?
STILL WE-ARE-HAVING OF-witness of-testimony
need
SAME ourselves
for
71 And they said, What need we any further witness? for we ourselves have heard of his own mouth.
hkousamen apo akouO apo


WE-HEAR
FROM THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
AV
Luke 23
23:1 kai anastan

kai
Conj
anistEmi
apan hapas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
hgagon agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi epi
Prep
AND
UP-STANDing rising pilaton pilatos

n_ Acc Sg m
EVERY(emph.) THE entire(emph.)
. And the whole multitude of them arose, and led him unto Pilate.
multitude
OF-them
LED
Him
ON
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
PILATE
23:2 hrxanto
archO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kathgorein autou katEgoreO autos

vn Pres Act pp Gen Sg m
legontes legO
touton euramen houtos heuriskO

pd Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
diastrefonta diastrephO
THEY-begin
YET TO-BE-accusING OF-Him him hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
sayING
this-one this-man
WE-FIND
THRU-TURNING perverting kai legonta kai legO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kwluonta kai kOluO

forous kaisari phoros kaisar

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg m
didonai didOmi
vn Pres Act
And they began to accuse him, saying, We found this [fellow] perverting the nation, and forbidding to give tribute to Caesar, saying that he himself is Christ a King.
THE
NATION
OF-US
AND
FORBIDDING
taxes
to-CEASAR TO-BE-GIVING AND
sayING
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
criston basilea einai christos basileus eimi

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
self himself
Conj
KING
TO-BE
23:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos hrwthsen auton pilatos erOtaO autos

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
legwn legO
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET PILATE
asks
Him
sayING
YOU
ARE
THE
And Pilate asked him, saying, Art thou the King of the Jews? And he answered him and said, Thou sayest [it].

de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
YET answerING
to-him him
He-AVERRed
YOU
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ARE-sayING are-saying-it
23:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pilatos eipen pilatos legO

pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
oclous ochlos
n_ Acc Pl m
Then said Pilate to the chief priests and [to] the people, I find no fault in this man.
THE
YET PILATE
said
TOWARD THE
THE
THRONGS
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
euriskw heuriskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
aition aition
a_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw toutw anthrOpos houtos

n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE I-AM-FINDING cause not-one fault
IN
THE
human
this
23:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
episcuon epischuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
oti anaseiei hoti anaseiO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE-ones the didaskwn didaskO
YET WERE-ON-STRONGED sayING they-were-insistent kaq kata

Prep
that
He-IS-UP-QUAKING THE he-is-exciting apo apo

Prep
PEOPLE
And they were the more fierce, saying, He stirreth up the people, teaching throughout all Jewry, beginning from Galilee to this place.
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias kai arxamenos ioudaia kai archO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
TEACHING
DOWN WHOLE
OF-THE
JUDEA
AND beginning even
FROM THE
GALILEE
ews heOs
Conj
wde hOde
Adv
TILL here as-far-as
23:6 pilatos de
pilatos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ephrwthsen ei eperOtaO ei
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Cond
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
When Pilate heard of Galilee, he asked whether the man were a Galilaean.
PILATE
YET HEARing hearing-this
inquirES-of inquires
IF
THE
human
galilaios estin galilaios eimi

GALILEAN
IS
AV
Luke 23
23:7 kai epignous

kai
Conj
epiginOskO
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
exousias hrwdou estin exousia hErOdEs eimi

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anepemyen anapempO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
ON-KNOWING realizing pros pros

Prep
that
OUT OF-THE
authority jurisdiction kai auton kai autos

Conj
OF-HEROD
He-IS
he-UP-SENDS he-sends-up tautais houtos

pd Dat Pl f
And as soon as he knew that he belonged unto Herod's jurisdiction, he sent him to Herod, who himself also was at Jerusalem at that time.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hrwdhn onta hErOdEs eimi

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
ierosolumois en ierosoluma en
n_ Dat Pl n Prep
pp Acc Sg m
Him
TOWARD HEROD
BEING
AND also
him
IN
JERUSALEM
IN
these
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais hEmera
n_ Dat Pl f
THE
DAYS
23:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ecarh chairO
vi 2Aor pasD 3 Sg
lian lian
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
YET HEROD
PERCEIVING
THE
JESUS
WAS-JOYED rejoiced
VERY he-WAS very-much dia dia

Prep
gar ex gar ek
Conj Prep
ikanwn hikanos
a_ Gen Pl m
cronwn qelwn chronos thelO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
And when Herod saw Jesus, he was exceeding glad: for he was desirous to see him of a long [season], because he had heard many things of him; and he hoped to have seen some miracle done by him.
for
OUT OF-enough TIMES of-considerable times peri peri

Prep
WILLING
TO-BE-PERCEIVING Him to-be-becoming-acquainted-with ti tis

px Acc Sg n
THRU THE because-of up hupo

Prep
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai hlpizen kai elpizO

shmeion idein sEmeion eidO

TO-BE-HEARING ABOUT Him concerning autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
he-EXPECTED ANY some
SIGN
TO-BE-PERCEIVING by
ginomenon ginomai
Him
BECOMING occurring auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
23:9 ephrwta de
eperOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
en en
Prep
logois ikanois autos logos hikanos autos

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
apekrinato apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
Then he questioned with him in many words; but he answered him nothing.
he-inquirED-of YET Him
IN
sayings words
enoughs ample
He
YET NOT-YET-ONE answers nothing
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-him him
23:10 eisthkeisan de
histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
grammateis eutonws grammateus eutonOs

n_ Nom Pl m Adv
10 And the chief priests and scribes stood and vehemently accused him.
HAD-STOOD stood
YET THE
THE
WRITers scribes
WELL-STRETCHly strenuously
kathgorountes autou katEgoreO autos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
accusING
OF-Him him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
NA
23:11 exouqenhsas de
exoutheneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
scorning
YET Him
AND also
THE
HEROD
11 And Herod with his men of war set him at nought, and mocked [him], and arrayed him in a gorgeous robe, and sent him again to Pilate.
strateumasin autou strateuma autos

n_ Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m
kai empaixas kai empaizO

peribalwn periballO
esqhta lampran anepemyen esthEs lampros anapempO

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WAR-troops troops auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-him
AND
IN-sporting scoffing-at-him
ABOUT-CASTING clothing-him
GARMENT attire
SHINing splendid
he-UP-SENDS sends-back
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pilatw pilatos
n_ Dat Sg m
Him
to-THE
PILATE
23:12 egenonto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
filoi philos
a_ Nom Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos en pilatos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
BECAME
YET FOND-ones THE friends
BESIDES HEROD bsboth
AND
THE
PILATE
IN
12 And the same day Pilate and Herod were made friends together: for before they were at enmity between themselves.
AV
Luke 23
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
met allhlwn prouphrcon meta allElOn prouparchO

Prep pc Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
ecqra echthra
n_ Dat Sg f
ontes eimi
SAME
THE
DAY
WITH one-another
THEY-BEFORE-belongED for they-were-inherently-before
IN
enmity
BEING
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
TOWARD them themselves
23:13 pilatos de
pilatos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
sugkalesamenos tous sugkaleO ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
arcontas kai archOn kai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
13 . And Pilate, when he had called together the chief priests and the rulers and the people,
PILATE
YET TOGETHER-CALLing calling-together
THE
THE
chiefs
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
PEOPLE
23:14 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous proshnegkate autos prospherO

pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon touton ws anthrOpos houtos hOs

n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Sg m Adv
said
TOWARD them
YE-TOWARD-CARRY to-ME ye-bring-to me kai idou kai idou

THE
human
this
AS
apostrefonta ton apostrephO ho

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
enwpion umwn enOpion humeis

Adv pp 2 Gen Pl
14 Said unto them, Ye have brought this man unto me, as one that perverteth the people: and, behold, I, having examined [him] before you, have found no fault in this man touching those things whereof ye accuse him:
FROM-TURNING one-turning-away anakrinas anakrinO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
PEOPLE
AND
BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-YOU(p) ye wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
ouqen oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
anqrwpw toutw aition anthrOpos houtos aition

n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n
examining examining-him
NOT-YET-ONE FOUND not-one I-found autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
IN
THE
human
this
cause fault
OF-WHICH
kathgoreite kat katEgoreO kata

YE-ARE-accusING
DOWN OF-Him against him hrwdhs hErOdEs

n_ Nom Sg m
23:15 all oude

alla
Conj
oude
Adv
anepemyen gar auton anapempO gar autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai idou kai idou

but NOT-YET HEROD butnay neither ouden oudeis

a_ Nom Sg n
he-UP-SENDS he-sends-back
for
Him
TOWARD US
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
15 No, nor yet Herod: for I sent you to him; and, lo, nothing worthy of death is done unto him.
axion axios
a_ Nom Sg n
qanatou estin thanatos eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pepragmenon prassO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE WORTHY nothing deserving
OF-DEATH
IS
HAVING-been-PRACTISED to-Him having-been-committed by-him apolusw apoluO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
16 I will therefore chastise him, and release [him].
23:16 paideusas
paideuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
disciplining
THEN Him
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-LOOSING I-shall-be-releasing-him
17 (For of necessity he must release one unto them at the feast.)
23:17
. .
.
. .
.
23:18 anekragon
anakrazO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
pamplhqei pamplEthei
Adv
legontes legO
aire airO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
touton apoluson de houtos apoluO de

pd Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj
THEY-UP-CRIED YET EVERY-FULL sayING they-cried-out all-as-one-multitude hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
BE-LIFTING take-away-you !
this-One this-man
FROM-LOOSE release-you !
YET
18 And they cried out all at once, saying, Away with this [man], and release unto us Barabbas:
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
barabban barabbas
n_ Acc Sg m
to-US
THE
Bar-Abbas
AV
Luke 23
23:19 ostis
hostis
pr Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
stasin stasis
n_ Acc Sg f
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
genomenhn ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
19 (Who for a certain sedition made in the city, and for murder, was cast into prison.)
WHO-ANY who-any fonon phonos

n_ Acc Sg m
WAS
THRU STANDing ANY because-of insurrection certain en en

Prep
BECOMING occurring
IN
THE
city
AND
blhqeis ballO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
MURDER
BEING-CAST
IN
THE
GUARD-house jail apolusai apoluO

vn Aor Act
20 Pilate therefore, willing to release Jesus, spake again to them.
23:20 palin de
palin
Adv
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos prosefwnhsen autois qelwn pilatos prosphOneO autos thelO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AGAIN
YET THE
PILATE
TOWARD-SOUNDS shouts-to
to-them them
WILLING
TO-FROM-LOOSE to-release
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
JESUS
23:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
epefwnoun legontes epiphOneO legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
staurou stauroO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
staurou stauroO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
21 But they cried, saying, Crucify [him], crucify him.
THE-ones the
YET ON-SOUNDED they-retorted de de

Conj
sayING
BE-YOU--impalING BE-YOU--impalING Him be-you-crucifying ! be-you-crucifying ! pros pros

Prep
23:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
triton eipen tritos legO

a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous ti autos tis

gar kakon gar kakos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
YET third third-time ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
he-said
TOWARD them
ANY what ? en en
Prep
for
EVIL
DOES
22 And he said unto them the third time, Why, what evil hath he done? I have found no cause of death in him: I will therefore chastise him, and let [him] go.
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
aition aition
a_ Acc Sg n
qanatou euron thanatos heuriskO

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
paideusas paideuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
this-One this-man apolusw apoluO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE cause not-one
OF-DEATH
I-FOUND
IN
Him
disciplining
THEN Him
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-LOOSING I-shall-be-releasing-him
23:23 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
epekeinto epikeimai
fwnais phOnE
n_ Dat Pl f
megalais aitoumenoi mega aiteO

a_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
staurwqhnai stauroO
vn Aor Pas
THE-ones the
YET ON-LAY they-importuned ai ho

t_ Nom Pl f
to-SOUNDS GREAT to-voices loud autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
REQUESTING
Him
TO-BE-impalED to-be-crucified
23 And they were instant with loud voices, requiring that he might be crucified. And the voices of them and of the chief priests prevailed.
kai katiscuon kai katischuO

fwnai phOnE
n_ Nom Pl f
AND
DOWN-STRONGED THE prevailed
SOUNDS voices
OF-them
23:24 kai pilatos epekrinen genesqai

kai
Conj
pilatos
n_ Nom Sg m
epikrinO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
aithma aitEma
n_ Nom Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
24 And Pilate gave sentence that it should be as they required.
AND
PILATE
ON-JUDGES adjudges de de
Conj
TO-BE-BECOMING THE to-be-occurring dia dia

Prep
REQUEST-effect OF-them request beblhmenon ballO

23:25 apelusen
apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
stasin stasis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai fonon kai phonos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
FROM-LOOSES YET THE-one he-releases the-one on hos

pr Acc Sg m
THRU STANDing AND because-of insurrection de de

Conj
MURDER
HAVING-been-CAST INTO GUARD-house jail tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
25 And he released unto them him that for sedition and murder was cast into prison, whom they had desired; but he delivered Jesus to their will.
htounto aiteO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
paredwken paradidOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
qelhmati autwn thelEma autos

n_ Dat Sg n pp Gen Pl m
WHOM
THEY-REQUESTED THE
YET JESUS
he-BESIDE-GIVES to-THE he-gives-up simwna tina simOn tis

n_ Acc Sg m
WILL
OF-them
23:26 kai ws aphgagon

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
apagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epilabomenoi epilambanomai
kurhnaion kurEnaios
n_ Acc Sg m
px Acc Sg m
AND
AS
THEY-FROM-LED Him they-led-away ap apo

Prep
ON-GETTING getting-hold-of epeqhkan epitithEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
SIMON
ANY certain
CYRENIAN
ercomenon erchomai
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
stauron ferein stauros pherO

n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres Act
26 . And as they led him away, they laid hold upon one Simon, a Cyrenian, coming out of the country, and on him they laid the cross, that he might bear [it] after Jesus.
COMING
FROM FIELD
THEY-ON-PLACE to-him they-place-on him
THE
pale cross
TO-BE-CARRYING
AV
Luke 23
opisqen opisthen
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
BEHIND-PLACE OF-THE behind the
JESUS
23:27 hkolouqei de
akoloutheO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
polu polus
a_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai gunaikwn ai kai gunE hos

Conj n_ Gen Pl f pr Nom Pl f
followED
YET to-Him him
MANY vast
multitude
OF-THE
PEOPLE
AND
OF-WOMEN
WHO
27 And there followed him a great company of people, and of women, which also bewailed and lamented him.
ekoptonto koptO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
kai eqrhnoun auton kai thrEneO autos

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
STRUCK-(themselves) AND grieved
DIRGED wailed-over de de
Conj
Him
NA
23:28 strafeis
strephO
pros pros
Prep
autas autos
pp Acc Pl f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qugateres thugatEr
n_ Voc Pl f
BEING-TURNED
YET TOWARD them
THE
JESUS
said
DAUGHTERS daughters ! kai epi kai epi

Conj Prep
28 But Jesus turning unto them said, Daughters of Jerusalem, weep not for me, but weep for yourselves, and for your children.
ierousalhm mh ierosoluma mE
ni proper Part Neg
klaiete klaiO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ep epi
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
plhn plEn
Adv
ef epi
Prep
eautas klaiete heautou klaiO

pf 3 Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Pl
of-JERUSALEM of-Jerusalem ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
NO
BE-LAMENTING ON ME be-ye-lamenting ! onover umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
MOREly ON selves however onover yourselves
BE-YE-LAMENTING AND be-ye-lamenting !
ON onover
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ercontai erchomai

23:29 oti idou

hoti
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
erousin ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
makariai makarios
a_ Nom Pl f
that
BE-PERCEIVING ARE-COMING lo ! steirai kai ai steiros kai ho

n_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Pl f
DAYS
IN
WHICH
THEY-SHALL-BE-declarING HAPPY happy-are oi hos

pr Nom Pl m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
koiliai ai koilia hos

n_ Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f
ouk ou
Part Neg
egennhsan kai mastoi gennaO kai mastos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj n_ Nom Pl m
29 For, behold, the days are coming, in the which they shall say, Blessed [are] the barren, and the wombs that never bare, and the paps which never gave suck.
THE
STERILE barren(p) eqreyan trephO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
THE
CAVITIES wombs
WHICH
NOT
generate bear
AND
BREASTS
WHO which
ouk ou
Part Neg
NOT
NURTURE nourish legein legO

vn Pres Act
23:30 tote arxontai

tote
Adv
archO
vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
oresin pesete oros piptO

n_ Dat Pl n vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ef epi
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai kai
Conj
30 Then shall they begin to say to the mountains, Fall on us; and to the hills, Cover us.
then
THEY-SHALL-BE-beginnING TO-BE-sayING to-THE
mountains BE-YE-FALLING ON be-ye-falling !
US
AND
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
bounois kaluyate hmas bounos kaluptO hEmeis

n_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Pl
to-THE
HILLS
COVER cover-ye ! en en
Prep
NA
US
23:31 oti ei
hoti
Conj
ei
Cond
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ugrw hugros
a_ Dat Sg n
xulw xulon
n_ Dat Sg n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
31 For if they do these things in a green tree, what shall be done in the dry?
that
IF
IN
THE
WET
WOOD
these THEY-ARE-DOING IN these-things
THE
xhrw xEros
a_ Dat Sg n
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
DRY withered
ANY what ?
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring de de
Conj
23:32 hgonto
agO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
kai eteroi kai heteros

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
kakourgoi duo kakourgos duo

a_ Nom Pl m ni numeral
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anaireqhnai anaireO
vn Aor Pas
32 . And there were also two other, malefactors, led with him to be put to death.
were-LED
YET AND also
DIFFERENT EVIL-ACTers different-ones malefactors epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
TWO
TOGETHER to-Him togetherwith him kaloumenon kaleO

TO-BE-UP-LIFTED to-be-despatched kranion ekei kranion ekei

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
33 And when they were come to the place, which is called Calvary, there they crucified him, and the malefactors, one on the right hand, and the other
23:33 kai ote hlqon

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
when
THEY-CAME
ON
THE
PLACE
THE
beING-CALLED
SKULL
there
AV
Luke 23
estaurwsan auton stauroO autos

kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
kakourgous on kakourgos hos

a_ Acc Pl m pr Acc Sg m
men men
Part
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn on dexios hos

a_ Gen Pl m pr Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
on the left.
THEY-impale they-crucify ex ek
Prep
Him
AND
THE
EVIL-ACTers malefactors
WHOM
INDEED OUT OF-RIGHT of-right(p)
WHOM
YET
aristerwn aristeros
a_ Gen Pl m
OUT OF-best (left) of-left(p)
23:34
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
autois ou autos ou
gar gar
Conj
THE
YET JESUS
said
FATHER !
FROM-LET forgive-you !
to-them them ta ho
NOT
for
34 Then said Jesus, Father, forgive them; for they know not what they do. And they parted his raiment, and cast lots.
oidasin eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
diamerizomenoi de diamerizO de
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
t_ Acc Pl n
THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY they-are-aware what ? ebalon ballO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WH
THEY-ARE-DOING
NA
beING-THRU-PARTED dividing
YET THE
GARMENTS OF-Him
klhron
klhrous klEros
n_ Acc Pl m
THEY-CAST(past)
LOTS
23:35 kai eisthkei

kai
Conj
histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
qewrwn theOreO
exemukthrizon de ekmuktErizO de
vi impf Act 3 Pl Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
AND
HAD-STOOD stood
THE
PEOPLE
beholdING
OUT-NOSED scouted eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
YET AND also ei ei

Cond
THE
arcontes legontes archOn legO

allous eswsen allos sOzO

swsatw sOzO
vm Aor Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
35 And the people stood beholding. And the rulers also with them derided [him], saying, He saved others; let him save himself, if he be Christ, the chosen of God.
chiefs
sayING
others
He-SAVES
LET-Him-SAVE self let-him-save ! himself eklektos eklektos

a_ Nom Sg m
IF
this
IS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos tou christos ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
ANOINTED Christ
OF-THE
God
THE
chosen chosen-one stratiwtai prosercomenoi stratiOtEs proserchomai

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
23:36 enepaixan de
empaizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
oxos oxos
n_ Acc Sg n
36 And the soldiers also mocked him, coming to him, and offering him vinegar,
THEY-IN-sport scoff-at prosferontes prospherO

YET to-Him him autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND also
THE
WARriors soldiers
vinegar
TOWARD-CARRYING to-Him bringing-to him
23:37 kai legontes

kai
Conj
legO
ei ei
Cond
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
37 And saying, If thou be the king of the Jews, save thyself.
AND
sayING
IF
YOU
ARE
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
swson sOzO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton seautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
SAVE save-you !
YOURself
23:38 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai epigrafh ep kai epigraphE epi

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
WAS there-was outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
YET AND also
ON Him onover
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
38 And a superscription also was written over him in letters of Greek, and Latin, and Hebrew, THIS IS THE KING OF THE JEWS.
this this-man
23:39 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kremasqentwn kakourgwn eblasfhmei kremannumi kakourgos blasphEmeO

vp Aor Pas Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ONE
YET OF-THE
BEING-HANGED
EVIL-ACTers malefactors
HARM-AVERRED Him blasphemed
39 And one of the malefactors which were hanged railed on him, saying, If thou be Christ, save thyself and us.
AV
Luke 23
NA
legwn legO
ouci ouchi
Part Int
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos swson christos sOzO

n_ Nom Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton seautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
sayING
NOT(emph.) YOU not(emph.) ?
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
SAVE save-you !
YOURself
kai hmas kai hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Acc Pl
AND
US
23:40 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
epitimwn epitimaO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
answerING
YET THE
DIFFERENT-one rebukING different-one qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
to-him him autw autos

pp Dat Sg n
AVERRed
NOT-YET
40 But the other answering rebuked him, saying, Dost not thou fear God, seeing thou art in the same condemnation?
fobh phobeO
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
krimati ei krima eimi

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
ARE-FEARING
YOU
THE
God
that
IN
THE
SAME
JUDGment
YOU-ARE
23:41 kai hmeis

kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
men men
Part
dikaiws axia dikaiOs axios

Adv a_ Acc Pl n
gar wn gar hos

Conj pr Gen Pl n
epraxamen apolambanomen prassO apolambanO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vi Pres Act 1 Pl
AND
WE
INDEED JUSTly
WORTHY deserts epraxen prassO
for
OF-WHICH WE-PRACTISE we-commit
WE-ARE-FROM-GETTING we-are-getting-back
41 And we indeed justly; for we receive the due reward of our deeds: but this man hath done nothing amiss.
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
atopon atopos
a_ Acc Sg n
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
this-One this-man
YET NOT-YET-ONE UN-PLACED PRACTISES nothing amiss commits ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
23:42 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
mnhsqhti mnaomai
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
otan hotan
Conj
elqhs erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
42 And he said unto Jesus, Lord, remember me when thou comest into thy kingdom.
AND
he-said
to-JESUS
BE-BEING-REMINDED OF-ME be-you-being-reminded !
when-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-COMING INTO whenever
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian sou basileia su

THE
KINGdom
OF-YOU
23:43 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
amhn soi amEn su

Hebrew pp 2 Dat Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
shmeron met emou sEmeron meta egO

Adv Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
esh eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
AND
He-said
to-him
AMEN verily
to-YOU
I-AM-sayING
toDAY
WITH ME
YOU-SHALL-BE
43 And Jesus said unto him, Verily I say unto thee, To day shalt thou be with me in paradise.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paradeisw paradeisos
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
THE
PARK paradise hdh EdE

Adv
23:44 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
wsei wra hOsei hOra

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
ekth hektos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai skotos kai skotos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
AND
WAS it-was
ALREADY AS-IF about ews wras heOs hOra

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
HOUR
SIXth
AND
DARKness
BECAME
ON WHOLE onover
44 . And it was about the sixth hour, and there was a darkness over all the earth until the ninth hour.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
enaths enatos
a_ Gen Sg f
THE
LAND
TILL
HOUR
WH
OF-NINth ninth
NA
23:45 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hliou hElios
n_ Gen Sg m
ekleipontos
eklipontos ekleipO
escisqh schizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
45 And the sun was darkened, and the veil of the temple was rent in the midst.
OF-THE
SUN
OUT-LACKING of-defaulting naou naos

n_ Gen Sg m
IS-SPLIT is-rent
YET THE

meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
DOWN-EXPANDer curtain
OF-THE
TEMPLE
MIDst in-the-middle megalh o mega ho

a_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
23:46 kai fwnhsas

kai
Conj
phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
AND
SOUNDing shouting
THE
JESUS
said
FATHER !
INTO HANDS
46 And when Jesus had cried with a loud voice, he said, Father, into thy hands I commend my spirit: and having said thus, he gave up
AV
Luke 23
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
paratiqemai paratithEmi
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
eipwn legO
the ghost.
OF-YOU
I-AM-BESIDE-PLACING THE I-am-committing
spirit
OF-ME
this
YET sayING
exepneusen ekpneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-expirES
23:47 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarchs to hekatontarchEs ho
genomenon ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg n
edoxazen doxazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
PERCEIVING
YET THE
HUNDRED-chief centurion ontws o ontOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
THE
BECOMING occurring
he-esteemizED glorified dikaios dikaios

a_ Nom Sg m
47 Now when the centurion saw what was done, he glorified God, saying, Certainly this was a righteous man.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
legwn legO
anqrwpos outos anthrOpos houtos

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
God
sayING
BEINGly really
THE
human
this
JUST
WAS
23:48 kai pantes oi

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sumparagenomenoi sumparaginomai
ocloi ochlos
n_ Nom Pl m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
qewrian tauthn theOria houtos

AND
ALL
THE
TOGETHER-BESIDE-BECOMING THRONGS coming-along-together genomena ginomai

ON
THE
beholding
this
48 And all the people that came together to that sight, beholding the things which were done, smote their breasts, and returned.
qewrhsantes ta theOreO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
tuptontes tuptO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sthqh stEthos
n_ Acc Pl n
upestrefon hupostrephO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
beholding
THE BECOMING(p) the-things occurring pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
BEATING ones-beating oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
CHESTS
reTURNED
histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
gnwstoi autw gnOstos autos

a_ Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
makroqen kai gunaikes makrothen kai gunE

Adv Conj n_ Nom Pl f
HAD-STOOD stood ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
YET ALL
THE
KNOWN known-ones apo apo

Prep
to-Him
FROM FAR-PLACE afar-off
AND
WOMEN
49 And all his acquaintance, and the women that followed him from Galilee, stood afar off, beholding these things.
sunakolouqousai sunakoloutheO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias orwsai galilaia horaO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
THE
ones-TOGETHER-followING to-Him ones-following-with him anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
FROM THE
GALILEE
SEEING
these these-things
NA
23:50 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
onomati iwshf bouleuths uparcwn onoma iOsEph bouleutEs huparchO

n_ Dat Sg n ni proper n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MAN lo ! agaqos agathos

a_ Nom Sg m
to-NAME
JOSEPH
COUNSELlor counselor
belongING
AND
50 . And, behold, [there was] a man named Joseph, a counsellor; [and he was] a good man, and a just:
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kai dikaios kai dikaios

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
MAN
GOOD
AND
JUST
23:51 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
sugkatateqeimenos sugkatatithemai
vp Perf midD/pasD Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
boulh boulE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
this-one this-one praxei praxis

n_ Dat Sg f
NOT
WAS
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-DOWN-PLACED to-THE having-been-concurred ioudaiwn os ioudaios hos

a_ Gen Pl m
COUNSEL AND
to-THE
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
arimaqaias polews twn arimathaia polis ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
prosedeceto prosdechomai
51 (The same had not consented to the counsel and deed of them;) [he was] of Arimathaea, a city of the Jews: who also himself waited for the kingdom of God.
pr Nom Sg m
PRACTISing OF-them practise thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
FROM ARIMATHEA
city
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
WHO
TOWARD-RECEIVED anticipated

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
23:52 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pilatw hthsato to pilatos aiteO ho

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
52 This [man] went unto Pilate, and begged the body of Jesus.
this-one this-man ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE the
PILATE
REQUESTS
THE
BODY
OF-THE
JESUS
AV
Luke 23 - Luke 24
23:53 kai kaqelwn

kai
Conj
kathaireO
enetulixen auto entulissO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg n
sindoni sindOn
n_ Dat Sg f
kai eqhken kai tithEmi

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
AND
DOWN-LIFTING taking-down-it laxeutw laxeutos

a_ Dat Sg n
he-IN-FOLDS he-folds-up ou hou

Adv
it
to-linen-wrapper AND
PLACES he-places
Him
IN
53 And he took it down, and wrapped it in linen, and laid it in a sepulchre that was hewn in stone, wherein never man before was laid.
mnhmati mnEma
n_ Dat Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
oupw oupO
Adv
keimenos keimai
memorial-tomb BEDROCK-HEWN where NOT tomb rock-hewn
WAS
NOT-YET-ONE NOT-as-yet LYING anyone

54 And that day was the preparation, and the sabbath drew on.
23:54 kai hmera

kai
Conj
hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
paraskeuhs kai sabbaton epefwsken paraskeuE kai sabbaton epiphOskO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
DAY
it-WAS
OF-preparation
AND
SABBATH
ON-LIGHTED lighted-up sunelhluquiai sunerchomai

vp Perf Act Nom Pl f
55 And the women also, which came with him from Galilee, followed after, and beheld the sepulchre, and how his body was laid.
23:55 katakolouqhsasai de
katakoloutheO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl f
de
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
gunaikes aitines hsan gunE hostis eimi

n_ Nom Pl f pr Nom Pl f vi impf vxx 3 Pl
DOWN-following following-after ek ek
Prep
YET THE
WOMEN
WHO-ANY who-any
WERE
HAVING-COME-TOGETHER
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias autw galilaia autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Dat Sg m
eqeasanto to theaomai ho
vi Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai ws eteqh kai hOs tithEmi

OUT OF-THE
GALILEE
to-Him with-him
gaze gaze-at
THE
memorial-vault AND tomb
AS how
WAS-PLACED
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
BODY
OF-Him
23:56 upostreyasai de
hupostrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl f
de
Conj
htoimasan hetoimazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
arwmata kai mura arOma kai muron

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
men men
Part
reTURNing
YET THEY-make-READY SPICES
AND
ATTARS
AND
THE
INDEED
56 And they returned, and prepared spices and ointments; and rested the sabbath day according to the commandment.
sabbaton hsucasan sabbaton hEsuchazO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
entolhn entolE
n_ Acc Sg f
SABBATH
THEY-QUIETize according-to THE they-are-quiet
direction precept
AV
Luke 24
24:1 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn orqrou sabbaton orthros

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Sg m
baqews bathus
a_ Gen Sg m
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
mnhma mnEma
n_ Acc Sg n
to-THE
YET ONE one-day ferousai pherO

OF-THE
SABBATHS
OF-EARLY
DEEPly depths
ON
THE
memorial-tomb tomb
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
htoimasan hetoimazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
arwmata arOma
n_ Acc Pl n
. Now upon the first [day] of the week, very early in the morning, they came unto the sepulchre, bringing the spices which they had prepared, and certain [others] with them.
THEY-CAME
CARRYING bringing de de
Conj
WHICH which(p) ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THEY-make-READY SPICES
24:2 euron
heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
apokekulismenon apokuliO
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
And they found the stone rolled away from the sepulchre.
THEY-FOUND YET THE
STONE
HAVING-been-FROM-ROLLED FROM THE having-been-rolled-away to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
memorial-vault tomb
WH WH
24:3 eiselqousai de
eiserchomai
de
Conj
ouc ou
Part Neg
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
WH
tou kuriou ihsou
And they entered in, and found not the body of the Lord Jesus.
NA
YET NOT
NA
THEY-FOUND THE
BODY
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NA
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
24:4 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aporeisqai aporeO
vn Pres Mid
autas peri autos peri

pp Acc Pl f Prep
toutou kai houtos kai

pd Gen Sg n Conj
AND
it-BECAME it-occurred andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
IN
THE
TO-BE-BEING-perplexED them
ABOUT this concerning astraptoush astraptO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
And it came to pass, as they were much perplexed thereabout, behold, two men stood by them in shining garments:
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
epesthsan autais en ephistEmi autos en

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl f Prep
esqhti esthEs
n_ Dat Sg f
TWO
ON-STAND stand-by
to-them them
IN
GARMENT GLEAM-FLINGING attire flashing ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
24:5 emfobwn
emphobos
a_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
genomenwn ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Gen Pl f
autwn kai klinouswn autos kai klinO

pp Gen Pl f Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl f
proswpa eis prosOpon eis

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
OF-IN-FEARING YET BECOMING of-affrighted thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
them of-them
AND
OF-deCLINING of-inclining zhteite zEteO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
faces
INTO
And as they were afraid, and bowed down [their] faces to the earth, they said unto them, Why seek ye the living among the dead?
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
autas ti autos tis

pp Acc Pl f pi Acc Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
zwnta zaO
THE
LAND earth
THEY-say
TOWARD them
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-SEEKING THE
LIVING one-living
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
WITH
THE
WH
DEAD-ones dead-ones
WH WH WH WH NA
24:6
ouk estin wde alla hgerqh
ouk ou
Part Neg
NA
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NA
wde alla hgerqh hOde alla egeirO

Adv Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
NA
NA
NOT
He-IS
here
but
He-WAS-ROUSED
He is not here, but is risen: remember how he spake unto you when he was yet in Galilee,
mnhsqhte mnaomai
vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
ws elalhsen umin hOs laleO humeis

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
eti eti
Adv
wn eimi
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia galilaia
n_ Dat Sg f
BE-YE-BEING-REMINDED AS be-ye-being-reminded ! how
He-TALKS he-speaks uion huios
STILL BEING
IN
THE
GALILEE
24:7 legwn
legO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpou oti dei anthrOpos hoti deO

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
paradoqhnai paradidOmi
vn Aor Pas
n_ Acc Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
sayING
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
that
it-IS-BINDING must
TO-BE-BESIDE-GIVEN to-be-given-up hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
Saying, The Son of man must be delivered into the hands of sinful men, and be crucified, and the third day rise again.
eis eis
Prep
ceiras anqrwpwn amartwlwn kai staurwqhnai kai th cheir anthrOpos hamartOlos kai stauroO kai ho
n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Pas Conj t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
INTO HANDS
OF-humans
missers sinning-ones
AND
TO-BE-impalED to-be-crucified
AND
to-THE
third
DAY
anasthnai anistEmi
vn 2Aor Act
TO-UP-STAND to-rise
AV
Luke 24
24:8 kai emnhsqhsan

kai
Conj
mnaomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
rhmatwn autou rhEma autos

And they remembered his words,
AND
THEY-ARE-REMINDED OF-THE
WH
declarations
WH WH
OF-Him
NA NA NA
24:9 kai upostreyasai

kai
Conj
apo tou mnhmeiou
hupostrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl f
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
AND
reTURNing
FROM THE
memorial-vault tomb tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
And returned from the sepulchre, and told all these things unto the eleven, and to all the rest.
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
endeka kai pasin hendeka kai pas

ni numeral Conj a_ Dat Pl m
loipois loipon
a_ Dat Pl m
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE these ALL they-report these-things
to-THE
ONE-TEN eleven
AND
to-ALL
THE
rest rest(p) h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
10 It was Mary Magdalene, and Joanna, and Mary [the mother] of James, and other [women that were] with them, which told these things unto the apostles.
24:10 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh maria magdalEnE maria

kai iwanna kai maria kai iOanna kai maria

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
WERE they-were iakwbou iakObos

n_ Gen Sg m
YET THE
MAGDALENE
MARY
AND
JOANNA
AND
MARY
THE
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
loipai loipon
a_ Nom Pl f
sun sun
Prep
autais elegon autos legO

pp Dat Pl f vi impf Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
OF-JACOBUS AND of-James
THE
rest TOGETHER to-them rest(p)-of-the-women togetherwith them
THEY-said who-told
TOWARD THE
apostolous tauta apostolos houtos

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl n
these these-things wsei lhros hOsei lEros

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
24:11 kai efanhsan enwpion autwn

kai
Conj
phainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
enOpion
Adv
autos
pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
kai kai
Conj
11 And their words seemed to them as idle tales, and they believed them not.
AND
APPEARed
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-them them
AS-IF
OBLIVION-GUSH THE nonsense
declarations these
AND
hpistoun apisteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autais autos
pp Dat Pl f
THEY-UN-BELIEVED to-them they-disbelieved them
24:12
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
anastas anistEmi
edramen trechO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET Peter
UP-STANDing rising oqonia othonion

n_ Acc Pl n
RAN
ON
THE
memorial-vault tomb pros pros

Prep
kai parakuyas kai parakuptO

blepei blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mona monos
a_ Acc Pl n

eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
12 Then arose Peter, and ran unto the sepulchre; and stooping down, he beheld the linen clothes laid by themselves, and departed, wondering in himself at that which was come to pass.
AND
BESIDE-BENDing peering-in to ho
IS-lookING THE he-is-observing

WH
SHEETS (dim) ONLY swathings

NA
AND
he-FROM-CAME TOWARD self he-came-away himself
qaumazwn thaumazO
gegonos
gegonos ginomai
t_ Acc Sg n
MARVELING
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred duo duo

ni numeral
24:13 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
AND
BE-PERCEIVING TWO lo ! eis eis

Prep
OUT OF-them
IN
SAME
THE
DAY
WERE
13 . And, behold, two of them went that same day to a village called Emmaus, which was from Jerusalem [about] threescore furlongs.
poreuomenoi poreuomai
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
apecousan apechO
vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
stadious exhkonta apo stadion hexEkonta apo

n_ Acc Pl n ni numeral Prep
ni proper
GOING
INTO VILLAGE
FROM-HAVING being-away
stadia
SIX-TY sixty
FROM JERUSALEM
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
emmaous emmaous
ni proper
WHICH
NAME
EMMAUS
24:14 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
wmiloun pros homileO pros

allhlous peri allElOn peri

pc Acc Pl m Prep
pantwn twn pas ho

sumbebhkotwn sumbainO
vp Perf Act Gen Pl n
14 And they talked together of all these things which had happened.
AND
they
conversED
TOWARD one-another
OF-THE HAVING-befallen of-the-things
AV
Luke 24
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
these
24:15 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
omilein homileO
vn Pres Act
autous kai suzhtein autos kai suzEteO

AND
WH
NA
IN
THE
TO-BE-conversING them
AND
TO-BE-TOGETHER-SEEKING to-be-discussing
15 And it came to pass, that, while they communed [together] and reasoned, Jesus himself drew near, and went with them.
kai
kai kai
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eggisas eggizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
suneporeueto autois sumporeuomai autos

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
AND also
SAME shimself de de
Conj
JESUS
NEARing drawing-near
TOGETHER-WENT went-togetherwith mh mE
Part Neg
to-them them epignwnai auton epiginOskO autos

16 But their eyes were holden that they should not know him.
24:16 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi autwn ophthalmos autos

ekratounto tou krateO ho

vi impf Pas 3 Pl t_ Gen Sg m
THE
YET VIEWers eyes de de

Conj
OF-them
were-HELD
OF-THE
NO
TO-ON-KNOW to-recognize outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
Him
24:17 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous tines autos tis

pp Acc Pl m pi Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
He-said
YET TOWARD them
ANY what ?
THE
sayings words
these
WHICH
17 And he said unto them, What manner of communications [are] these that ye have one to another, as ye walk, and are sad?
antiballete antiballO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pros pros
Prep
allhlous peripatountes kai estaqhsan allElOn peripateO kai histEmi

pc Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
YE-ARE-INSTEAD-CASTING TOWARD one-another ye-are-bandying skuqrwpoi skuthrOpos

a_ Nom Pl m
ABOUT-TREADING ones-walking
AND
THEY-WERE-STOOD they-stood
SAD-VIEWers with-a-sad-countenance
24:18 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
onomati kleopas eipen onoma kleopas legO

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
answerING
YET ONE
to-NAME
CLEOPAS
said
TOWARD Him
YOU
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
paroikeis paroikeO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ierousalhm kai ouk ierosoluma kai ou

ni proper Conj Part Neg
egnws ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
genomena ginomai
en en
Prep
18 And the one of them, whose name was Cleopas, answering said unto him, Art thou only a stranger in Jerusalem, and hast not known the things which are come to pass there in these days?
ONLY alone auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
ARE-BESIDE-HOMING JERUSALEM are-sojourning in-Jerusalem en en

Prep
AND
NOT
YOU-KNEW
THE BECOMING(p) the-things occurring
IN
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tautais hEmera houtos

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f
her
IN
THE
DAYS
these
24:19 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois poia autos poios

pp Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
AND
He-said
to-them
?-THE-WHICH THE-ones which ? the egeneto ginomai
YET say they-say anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
to-Him
THE ABOUT the-things concerning dunatos en dunatos en

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nazarhnou os nazarEnos hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Nom Sg m
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
19 And he said unto them, What things? And they said unto him, Concerning Jesus of Nazareth, which was a prophet mighty in deed and word before God and all the people:
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
JESUS
THE
NAZAREAN
WHO
BECAME came-to-be qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
MAN
BEFORE-AVERer ABLE prophet powerful tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
kai logw kai logos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
enantion tou enantion ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
kai pantos kai pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
ACT work
AND
saying word te te
Part
OF-THE the
God
AND
OF-EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
24:20 opws
hopOs
Adv
paredwkan auton paradidOmi autos

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
arcontes archOn
n_ Nom Pl m
WHICH-how BESIDES BESIDE-GIVE bsboth so-that give-up hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
Him
THE
THE
chiefs
20 And how the chief priests and our rulers delivered him to be condemned to death, and have crucified him.
eis eis
Prep
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
qanatou kai estaurwsan auton thanatos kai stauroO autos

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
OF-US
INTO JUDGment OF-DEATH
AND
THEY-impale they-crucify
Him
AV
Luke 24
24:21 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
hlpizomen oti autos elpizO hoti autos

vi impf Act 1 Pl Conj pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mellwn mellO
WE
YET EXPECTED
that
He
IS
THE
One-beING-ABOUT one-being-about pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl n
21 But we trusted that it had been he which should have redeemed Israel: and beside all this, to day is the third day since these things were done.
lutrousqai lutroO
vn Pres Mid
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
israhl alla ge israEl alla ge

ni proper Conj Part
kai sun kai sun

Conj Prep
toutois trithn houtos tritos

pd Dat Pl n a_ Acc Sg f
TO-BE-LOOSenING THE to-be-redeeming tauthn hmeran agei houtos hEmera agO

pd Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
ISRAEL
but
SURELY AND also ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
TOGETHER to-ALL with-all egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
these
third
af apo
Prep
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
this
DAY
it-IS-LEADING FROM WHICH
these BECAME these-things occurred hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
24:22 alla kai gunaikes tines

alla
Conj
kai
Conj
gunE
n_ Nom Pl f
tis
px Nom Pl f
ex ek
Prep
exesthsan hmas existEmi hEmeis

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp 1 Acc Pl
genomenai ginomai
but
AND also
WOMEN
ANY some mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
OUT OF-US
OUT-STAND amaze
US
22 Yea, and certain women also of our company made us astonished, which were early at the sepulchre;
orqrinai epi to orthrinos epi ho

a_ Nom Pl f Prep t_ Acc Sg n
EARLY
ON
THE
memorial-vault tomb to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
24:23 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
eurousai heuriskO
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
legousai legO
kai kai
Conj
AND
NO
FINDING
THE
BODY
OF-Him
THEY-CAME
sayING
AND also
23 And when they found not his body, they came, saying, that they had also seen a vision of angels, which said that he was alive.
optasian aggelwn optasia aggelos

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Pl m
ewrakenai horaO
vn Perf Act Acc Att
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
legousin auton legO autos

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
VIEW apparition
OF-MESSENGERS TO-HAVE-SEEN WHO
ARE-sayING
Him
TO-BE-LIVING
24:24 kai aphlqon

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sun sun
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
AND
FROM-CAME came-away
ANY some
OF-THE TOGETHER to-US of-the-ones togetherwith us

NA
ON
THE
memorial-vault AND tomb auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
24 And certain of them which were with us went to the sepulchre, and found [it] even so as the women had said: but him they saw not.
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
outws kaqws houtOs kathOs

Adv Adv
kai kai
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
gunaikes eipon gunE legO

n_ Nom Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
THEY-FOUND thus they-found-it eidon eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
according-AS
AND also
THE
WOMEN
said
Him
YET NOT
THEY-PERCEIVED
24:25 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous w anohtoi autos O anoEtos

pp Acc Pl m Inj a_ Voc Pl m
kai bradeis th kai bradus ho

Conj a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
He
said
TOWARD them
o!
UN-MINDing AND foolish-ones !
TARDY tardy-ones
to-THE
HEART
25 Then he said unto them, O fools, and slow of heart to believe all that the prophets have spoken:
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pisteuein pisteuO
vn Pres Act
epi pasin epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Pl n
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
elalhsan oi laleO ho
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
TO-BE-BELIEVING ON
ALL
WHICH
TALK speak
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets criston kai eiselqein christos kai eiserchomai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vn 2Aor Act
26 Ought not Christ to have suffered these things, and to enter into his glory?
24:26 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NOT(emph.) these it-WAS-BINDING TO-BE-EMOTIONING THE not(emph.) ? these-things must to-be-suffering eis eis
Prep
ANOINTED Christ
AND
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
INTO THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
24:27 kai arxamenos

kai
Conj
archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
mwusews kai apo mOusEs kai apo

pantwn twn pas ho

profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
beginning
FROM MOSES
AND
FROM ALL
THE
27 And beginning at Moses and all the prophets, he expounded unto them in all the scriptures the things concerning himself.
AV
Luke 24
diermhneusen diermEneuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois en autos en
pp Dat Pl m Prep
pasais tais pas ho

grafais ta graphE ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
He-THRU-TRANSLATES to-them he-interprets
IN
ALL
THE
WRITings scriptures
THE ABOUT Self the-things concerning himself kai autos kai autos
Conj pp Nom Sg m
28 And they drew nigh unto the village, whither they went: and he made as though he would have gone further.
24:28 kai hggisan

kai
Conj
eggizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
ou hou
Adv
eporeuonto poreuomai
AND
THEY-NEAR INTO THE they-draw-near
VILLAGE
where THEY-WENT
AND
He
prosepoihsato porrwteron poreuesqai prospoieO porrhO poreuomai

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg Adv Con vn Pres midD/pasD
TOWARD-DOES does-as-though
forward-more further
TO-BE-GOING
24:29 kai parebiasanto

kai
Conj
parabiazomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legontes legO
meinon menO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
meq meta
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
oti pros hoti pros

Conj Prep
AND
THEY-BESIDE-FORCE Him they-urge estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
sayING
REMAIN remain-you ! h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
WITH US
that
TOWARD
29 But they constrained him, saying, Abide with us: for it is toward evening, and the day is far spent. And he went in to tarry with them.
esperan hespera
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kekliken kai klinO

hdh EdE
Adv
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
EVENING-STAR it-IS dusk meinai menO

vn Aor Act
AND
HAS-declinED ALREADY THE
DAY
AND
He-INTO-CAME OF-THE he-entered
sun sun
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
TO-REMAIN TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them
24:30 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
katakliqhnai kataklinO
vn Aor Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
labwn lambanO
AND
BECAME it-occurred arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
THE
TO-BE-DOWN-CLINED Him to-be-reclined-at-table
WITH them
GETTING taking
30 And it came to pass, as he sat at meat with them, he took bread, and blessed [it], and brake, and gave to them.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
euloghsen kai klasas eulogeO kai klaO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epedidou autois epididOmi autos

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m
THE
BREAD
He-blessES he-blesses-it de de
Conj
AND
BREAKing
ON-GAVE he-handed-it
to-them
24:31 autwn
autos
pp Gen Pl m
dihnoicqhsan dianoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi kai epegnwsan ophthalmos kai epiginOskO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
31 And their eyes were opened, and they knew him; and he vanished out of their sight.
OF-them
YET WERE-THRU-UP-OPENED THE were-opened-up egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
VIEWers eyes
AND
THEY-ON-KNOW Him they-recognize
AND
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
afantos aphantos
a_ Nom Sg m
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
He
UN-APPEARed BECAME unapparent pros pros

Prep
FROM them
24:32 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
allhlous ouci allElOn ouchi

pc Acc Pl m Part Int
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kaiomenh kaiO
AND
THEY-say
NA
TOWARD one-another
NA
NOT(emph.) THE not(emph.) ? hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
HEART
OF-US
BURNING
32 And they said one to another, Did not our heart burn within us, while he talked with us by the way, and while he opened to us the scriptures?
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ws elalei hOs laleO

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
odw hodos
n_ Dat Sg f
ws hOs
Adv
WAS
IN
US
AS
He-TALKED he-spoke
to-US
IN
THE
WAY road
AS
dihnoigen dianoigO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas graphE
n_ Acc Pl f
He-THRU-UP-OPENED to-US he-opened-up
THE
WRITings scriptures th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
24:33 kai anastantes

kai
Conj
anistEmi
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f

ierousalhm kai ierosoluma kai

ni proper Conj
AND
UP-STANDing rising
to-SAME
THE
HOUR
THEY-reTURN
INTO JERUSALEM
AND
33 And they rose up the same hour, and returned to Jerusalem, and found the eleven gathered together, and them that were with them,
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hqroismenous athroizO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
endeka kai tous hendeka kai ho

ni numeral Conj t_ Acc Pl m
sun sun
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
THEY-FOUND HAVING-been-CONVENED THE found
ONE-TEN eleven
AND
THE the-ones
TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them
AV
Luke 24
24:34 legontas
legO
oti ontws hgerqh hoti ontOs egeirO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai wfqh kai optomai

simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
34 Saying, The Lord is risen indeed, and hath appeared to Simon.
sayING ones-saying
that
BEINGly really
WAS-ROUSED THE
Master Lord odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
WAS-VIEWED to-SIMON was-seen autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
35 And they told what things [were done] in the way, and how he was known of them in breaking of bread.
24:35 kai autoi

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
exhgounto exEgeomai
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kai ws egnwsqh kai hOs ginOskO

AND
they
unfoldED
THE IN the-things artou artos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
WAY road
AND
AS how
He-IS-KNOWN to-them
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
klasei tou klasis ho

IN
THE
BREAKing OF-THE
BREAD
24:36 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
lalountwn laleO
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
esth histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
these YET OF-them these-things

WH WH WH WH
TALKING speaking
WH NA
He
NA
STOOD
NA
IN
NA
MIDst
NA
OF-them
36 . And as they thus spake, Jesus himself stood in the midst of them, and saith unto them, Peace [be] unto you.
kai legei autois eirhnh umin
kai legei kai legO

autois eirhnh autos eirEnE

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
PEACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
37 But they were terrified and affrighted, and supposed that they had seen a spirit.
24:37 ptohqentes de
ptoeO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
de
Conj
kai emfoboi genomenoi kai emphobos ginomai

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m
edokoun dokeO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
pneuma qewrein pneuma theOreO

n_ Acc Sg n vn Pres Act
BEING-DISMAYED YET AND
IN-FEAR affrighted
BECOMING
THEY-SEEMED spirit they-supposed este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
TO-BE-beholdING
24:38 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

tetaragmenoi tarassO
kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
38 And he said unto them, Why are ye troubled? and why do thoughts arise in your hearts?
AND
He-said
to-them
ANY why ? th ho
HAVING-been-DISTURBED YE-ARE
AND
dialogismoi anabainousin en dialogismos anabainO en

n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
kardia umwn kardia humeis

t_ Dat Sg f
ARE-UP-STEPPING IN are-coming-up tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
HEART
OF-YOU(p) of-ye podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
24:39 idete
eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ceiras mou cheir egO

n_ Acc Pl f pp 1 Gen Sg
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
BE-PERCEIVING THE be-ye-perceiving ! eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
HANDS
OF-ME
AND
THE
FEET
OF-ME
that
39 Behold my hands and my feet, that it is I myself: handle me, and see; for a spirit hath not flesh and bones, as ye see me have.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
yhlafhsate me psElaphaO egO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Sg
kai idete kai eidO

oti pneuma hoti pneuma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
AM
He
STROKE-TOUCH handle-ye ! ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ME
AND
BE-PERCEIVING that be-ye-perceiving !
spirit
FLESH
AND
ostea osteon
n_ Acc Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
econta echO
BONES
NOT
WH
IS-HAVING
NA
according-AS ME
YE-ARE-beholdING HAVING
24:40
kai
kai kai
Conj
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipwn legO
edeixen deiknumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois tas autos ho

pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras kai cheir kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
40 And when he had thus spoken, he shewed them [his] hands and [his] feet.
AND
WH
this
NA
sayING
He-SHOWS
to-them them
THE
HANDS
AND
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
THE
FEET
24:41 eti
eti
Adv
de de
Conj
apistountwn autwn apisteO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
kai qaumazontwn eipen kai thaumazO legO

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
STILL YET OF-UN-BELIEVING of-disbelieving autois ecete autos echO

pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-them
FROM THE
JOY
AND
OF-MARVELING marveling
He-said
41 And while they yet believed not for joy, and wondered, he said unto them, Have ye here any meat?
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
brwsimon enqade brOsimos enthade

a_ Acc Sg n Adv
to-them
YE-ARE-HAVING ANY
FOOD
IN-PLACE-YET in-this-place
AV
Luke 24
24:42 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
epedwkan autw epididOmi autos

icquos ichthus
n_ Gen Sg m
optou optos
a_ Gen Sg m
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
42 And they gave him a piece of a broiled fish, and of an honeycomb.
THE-ones the
YET ON-GIVE they-hand
to-Him him
OF-FISH
BROILed
PART
24:43 kai labwn

kai
Conj
lambanO
enwpion autwn enOpion autos

Adv pp Gen Pl m
efagen esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
43 And he took [it], and did eat before them.
AND
GETTING taking-it de de
Conj
IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore pros pros

Prep
OF-them them
He-ATE
24:44 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous outoi autos houtos

pp Acc Pl m pd Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
elalhsa laleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
He-said
YET TOWARD them
these
THE
sayings words oti dei hoti deO

Conj
OF-ME
WHICH
I-TALK I-speak
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eti eti
Adv
wn eimi
sun sun
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
plhrwqhnai plEroO
vn Aor Pas
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
44 And he said unto them, These [are] the words which I spake unto you, while I was yet with you, that all things must be fulfilled, which were written in the law of Moses, and [in] the prophets, and [in] the psalms, concerning me.
TOWARD YOU(p) ye panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
STILL BEING
TOGETHER to-YOU(p) togetherwith ye en en

Prep
that
IS-BINDING must
TO-BE-FILLED to-be-fulfilled
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
gegrammena graphO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
mwusews kai tois mOusEs kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
ALL
THE HAVING-been-WRITTEN IN the-things kai yalmois peri kai psalmos peri

Conj n_ Dat Pl m Prep
THE
LAW
of-MOSES of-Moses
AND
THE
profhtais prophEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
psalms
ABOUT ME concerning autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
24:45 tote dihnoixen

tote
Adv
dianoigO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sunienai suniEmi
vn Pres Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas graphE
n_ Acc Pl f
45 Then opened he their understanding, that they might understand the scriptures,
then
He-THRU-UP-OPENS OF-them he-opens-up
THE
MIND
OF-THE
TO-understand THE
WRITings scriptures
46 And said unto them, Thus it is written, and thus it behoved Christ to suffer, and to rise from the dead the third day:
24:46 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois oti outws gegraptai autos hoti houtOs graphO

pp Dat Pl m Conj Adv vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
He-said
to-them
that
thus
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN TO-BE-EMOTIONING THE to-be-suffering th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
criston kai anasthnai ek christos kai anistEmi ek

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vn 2Aor Act Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
AND
TO-UP-STAND to-rise
OUT OF-DEAD-ones to-THE of-dead-ones epi tw epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg n
third
DAY
24:47 kai khrucqhnai

kai
Conj
kErussO
vn Aor Pas

metanoian eis metanoia eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
afesin aphesis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
TO-BE-PROCLAIMED ON to-be-heralded panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
THE
NAME
OF-Him
after-MIND repentance apo apo

Prep
INTO FROM-LETTing pardon
47 And that repentance and remission of sins should be preached in his name among all nations, beginning at Jerusalem.
amartiwn eis hamartia eis

n_ Gen Pl f Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
arxamenoi archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
ni proper
OF-misses of-sins
INTO ALL
THE
NATIONS
beginning
FROM JERUSALEM
24:48 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
martures toutwn martus houtos

n_ Nom Pl m pd Gen Pl n
48 And ye are witnesses of these things.
YOU(p) ye
witnesses
WH WH
OF-these of-these-things
WH NA
24:49 kai
kai
Conj
idou egw exapostellw
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
NA
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
NA
apostellw apostellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo ! patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
AM-commissionING am-dispatching de de
Conj
THE
49 And, behold, I send the promise of my Father upon you: but tarry ye in the city of Jerusalem, until ye be endued with power from on high.
epaggelian tou epaggelia ho

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
kaqisate en kathizO en
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
promise
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
ON
YOU(p) ye ex ek
Prep
YOU(p) ye
YET BE-seated be-ye-seated ! dunamin dunamis

n_ Acc Sg f
IN
THE
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
endushsqe enduO
vs Aor Mid 2 Pl
uyous hupsos
n_ Gen Sg n
city
TILL
OF-WHICH YE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING OUT OF-HIGH which ye-should-be-putting-on
ABILITY power
AV
Luke 24 - John 1
24:50 exhgagen
exagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
NA
exw exO
Adv
ews heOs
Conj
pros pros
Prep
bhqanian kai eparas bEthania kai epairO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
50 . And he led them out as far as to Bethany, and he lifted up his hands, and blessed them.
He-OUT-LED he-led-out tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
YET them
OUT outside
TILL TOWARD BETHANY as-far-as
AND
ON-LIFTing lifting-up
ceiras autou cheir autos

euloghsen autous eulogeO autos

THE
HANDS
OF-Him
He-blessES
them
24:51 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
eulogein eulogeO
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autous diesth autos diistEmi

ap apo
Prep
AND
WH WH
IN
THE
WH
TO-BE-blessING Him
WH WH
them
NA NA
He-THRU-STOOD FROM he-put-an-interval

NA
51 And it came to pass, while he blessed them, he was parted from them, and carried up into heaven.
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai anefereto eis ton ouranon
kai anefereto kai anapherO

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
NA
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
them
NA
AND
He-was-UP-CARRIED INTO THE he-was-carried-up
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
heaven
WH WH NA NA
24:52 kai autoi

kai
Conj
proskunhsantes auton
autos
pp Nom Pl m
proskunhsantes auton proskuneO autos

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
52 And they worshipped him, and returned to Jerusalem with great joy:
AND
they
worshiping
Him

ierousalhm meta caras ierosoluma meta chara

ni proper Prep n_ Gen Sg f
megalhs mega
a_ Gen Sg f
reTURN
INTO JERUSALEM
WITH
JOY
GREAT
24:53 kai hsan

kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
dia dia
Prep
pantos en pas en
a_ Gen Sg n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
eulogountes ton eulogeO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
53 And were continually in the temple, praising and blessing God. Amen.
AND
THEY-WERE THRU EVERY during all
IN
THE
SACRED-place blessING sanctuary
THE
God
AV
John 1
John
1:1 en
en
Prep
arch archE
n_ Dat Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
. In the beginning was the Word, and the Word was with God, and the Word was God.
IN
ORIGINal beginning qeon theos
WAS
THE
saying word hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
THE
saying word
WAS
TOWARD
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai qeos kai theos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
God
AND
God
WAS
THE
saying word qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
2
1:2 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
arch archE
n_ Dat Sg f
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
The same was beginning with God.
in
the
this
WAS
IN
ORIGINal beginning
TOWARD THE
God
1:3 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai cwris kai chOris

Conj Adv
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
All things were made by him; and without him was not any thing made that was made.
ALL all-things o hos

pr Nom Sg n
THRU SAME through him
BECAME came-to-be
AND
apart-from SAME him
BECAME came-to-be
NOT-YET ONE not-yeteven one-thing
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
WHICH
HAS-BECOME has-come-to-be autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
1:4 en
en
Prep
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
In him was life; and the life was the light of men.
IN
SAME him
LIFE
WAS
AND
THE
LIFE
WAS
THE
LIGHT
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
humans
1:5 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
skotia fainei skotia phainO

kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
skotia skotia
n_ Nom Sg f
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
. And the light shineth in darkness; and the darkness comprehended it not.
AND
THE
LIGHT
IN
THE
DARKness
IS-APPEARING AND
THE
DARKness
it
ou ou
Part Neg
katelaben katalambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NOT
DOWN-GOT grasped anqrwpos apestalmenos anthrOpos apostellO

n_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
1:6 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
para para
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
There was a man sent from God, whose name [was] John.
BECAME human there-came-to-be
HAVING-been-commissionED BESIDE God
NAME
to-him
JOHN
1:7 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
marturian ina marturia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
marturhsh martureO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
this-one this-one ina hina

Conj
CAME
INTO witness testimony di dia

Prep
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-witnessING ABOUT THE he-should-be-testifying concerning autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
LIGHT
The same came for a witness, to bear witness of the Light, that all [men] through him might believe.
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
pisteuswsin pisteuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THAT ALL
SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING THRU SAME through him hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
1:8 ouk
ou
Part Neg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
all alla
Conj
ina hina
Conj
marturhsh martureO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
He was not that Light, but [was sent] to bear witness of that Light.
NOT
WAS
that-one that-one
THE
LIGHT
but THAT he-SHOULD-BE-witnessING ABOUT but-he-came he-should-be-testifying concerning
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
LIGHT
AV
John 1
1:9 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
alhqinon o alEthinos hos

fwtizei phOtizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
[That] was the true Light, which lighteth every man that cometh into the world.
it-WAS
THE
LIGHT
THE
TRUE
WHICH
IS-LIGHTenING EVERY is-enlightening
anqrwpon ercomenon anthrOpos erchomai

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
human
COMING
INTO THE
SYSTEM world kosmos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg m
1:10 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
10 He was in the world, and the world was made by him, and the world knew him not.
IN
THE
SYSTEM world auton autos
He-WAS
AND
THE
SYSTEM world
THRU SAME through him
BECAME came-to-be
AND
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
egnw ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pp Acc Sg m
THE
SYSTEM world ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
Him
NOT
KNEW
1:11 eis
eis
Prep
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
idioi idios
a_ Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
11 He came unto his own, and his own received him not.
INTO THE
OWN He-CAME own-things de de

Conj
AND
THE
OWN-ones own-ones
Him
NOT
BESIDE-GOT accepted qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
12 But as many as received him, to them gave he power to become the sons of God, [even] to them that believe on his name:
1:12 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois exousian tekna autos exousia teknon

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Pl n
as-many-as YET GOT whoever obtained genesqai ginomai

vn 2Aor midD
Him
He-GIVES
to-them
authority right autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
offsprings children
OF-God
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin eis pisteuO eis

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE-BECOMING to-THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing ex ek
Prep
INTO THE
NAME
OF-Him
1:13 oi
hos
pr Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
aimatwn oude haima oude

n_ Gen Pl n Adv
ek ek
Prep
qelhmatos sarkos thelEma sarx

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
oude oude
Adv
ek ek
Prep
WHO who(p)
NOT
OUT OF-BLOODS
NOT-YET OUT OF-WILL neither egennhqhsan gennaO

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
OF-FLESH NOT-YET OUT neither
13 Which were born, not of blood, nor of the will of the flesh, nor of the will of man, but of God.
qelhmatos andros thelEma anEr

all ek alla ek
Conj Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-WILL
OF-MAN
but
OUT OF-God
WERE-generatED were-begotten kai eskhnwsen en kai skEnoO en

1:14 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai kai
Conj
AND
THE
saying word doxan doxa
FLESH
BECAME
AND
BOOTHS tabernacles
IN US among para para

Prep
AND
eqeasameqa thn theaomai ho

vi Aor midD 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
ws monogenous hOs monogenEs

Adv a_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg f
14 And the Word was made flesh, and dwelt among us, (and we beheld his glory, the glory as of the only begotten of the Father,) full of grace and truth.
n_ Acc Sg f
WE-gaze we-gaze-at
THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
esteem glory
AS
OF-ONLY-generated BESIDE FATHER of-only-begotten-one
FULL
caritos kai alhqeias charis kai alEtheia

OF-grace
AND
TRUTH
1:15 iwannhs marturei

iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
martureO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kekragen kai krazO

Conj vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
JOHN
IS-witnessING is-testifying
WH WH

NA
AND
he-HAS-CRIED sayING has-cried o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
this-One this-one ercomenos erchomai

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o eipwn
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
NA
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
15 . John bare witness of him, and cried, saying, This was he of whom I spake, He that cometh after me is preferred before me: for he was before me.
WAS
WHOM
I-said
THE-One the-one
BEHIND after
ME
COMING
Prep
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
oti prwtos hoti prOtos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ME in-front-of me
HAS-BECOME that has-come-to-be
BEFORE-most OF-ME former
He-WAS
AV
John 1
1:16 oti ek
hoti
Conj
ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
plhrwmatos autou plErOma autos

hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
elabomen kai carin lambanO kai charis

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj n_ Acc Sg f
16 And of his fulness have all we received, and grace for grace.
that
OUT OF-THE
FILLing
OF-Him
WE
ALL
GOT obtained
AND also
grace
anti anti
Prep
caritos charis
n_ Gen Sg f
INSTEAD OF-grace insteadfor grace
1:17 oti o
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
mwusews edoqh mOusEs didOmi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
17 For the law was given by Moses, [but] grace and truth came by Jesus Christ.
that
THE
LAW
THRU MOSES through cristou egeneto christos ginomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
WAS-GIVEN
THE
grace
AND
THE
alhqeia dia alEtheia dia

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
TRUTH
THRU JESUS through oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
ANOINTED Christ ewraken horaO
BECAME
1:18 qeon
theos
n_ Acc Sg m
pwpote monogenhs pOpote monogenEs

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Perf Act 3 Sg Att
God
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-SEEN no-one eis eis

Prep
?-AS-?-when ONLY-generated God ever only-begotten patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
18 No man hath seen God at any time; the only begotten Son, which is in the bosom of the Father, he hath declared [him].
wn eimi
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kolpon tou kolpos ho

ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
exhghsato exEgeomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
One-BEING one-being
INTO THE
BOSOM
OF-THE
FATHER
that-One that-one
unfolds unfolds-him
19 . And this is the record of John, when the Jews sent priests and Levites from Jerusalem to ask him, Who art thou?
1:19 kai auth

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marturia tou marturia ho

iwannou ote apesteilan iOannEs hote apostellO

n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
WH
this
WH
IS
NA NA
THE
witness testimony oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
JOHN
when
commission dispatch
pros auton
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ioudaioi ex ioudaios ek
a_ Nom Pl m Prep
ierosolumwn iereis ierosoluma hiereus

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Acc Pl m
TOWARD him
THE
JUDA-ans Jews su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
OUT OF-JERUSALEM
SACRED-ones priests
kai leuitas ina kai leuitEs hina

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj
erwthswsin erOtaO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
AND
LEVITES
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-askING him
YOU
ANY who ?
ARE you-are ouk ou

Part Neg
20 And he confessed, and denied not; but confessed, I am not the Christ.
1:20 kai wmologhsen kai ouk

kai
Conj
homologeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai wmologhsen oti egw kai homologeO hoti egO

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
he-avows
AND
NOT
disowns denies
AND
avows
that
NOT
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
AM
THE
ANOINTED Christ ti tis

pi Nom Sg n
1:21 kai hrwthsan auton

kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
oun oun
Conj
WH
su
NA
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
hlias Elias
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
THEY-ask
him
ANY what ? o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THEN
YOU
ELIAS Elijah su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ARE
AND
21 And they asked him, What then? Art thou Elias? And he saith, I am not. Art thou that prophet? And he answered, No.
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai apekriqh kai apokrinomai

he-IS-sayING
NOT
I-AM
THE
BEFORE-AVERer ARE prophet
YOU
AND
he-answerED
ou ou
Part Neg
NOT not
1:22 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
ina hina
Conj
apokrisin dwmen apokrisis didOmi

n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
THEY-say
THEN to-him
ANY who ?
YOU-ARE
THAT answer
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING to-THE
22 Then said they unto him, Who art thou? that we may give an answer to them that sent us. What sayest thou of thyself?
AV
John 1
pemyasin pempO
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
peri peri
Prep
seautou seautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
ones-SENDing ones-sending
US
ANY what ? egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
YOU-ARE-sayING ABOUT YOURself concerning bowntos boaO

1:23 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
euqunate thn euthunO ho

he-AVERRed
SOUND voice kaqws kathOs

Adv
OF-IMPLORING-one IN of-one-imploring hsaias Esaias

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
DESOLATE straighten-YE wilderness straighten-ye ! profhths prophEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
23 He said, I [am] the voice of one crying in the wilderness, Make straight the way of the Lord, as said the prophet Esaias.
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WAY road
OF-Master of-Lord
according-AS said
ISAIAH
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet farisaiwn pharisaios

n_ Gen Pl m
24 And they which were sent were of the Pharisees.
1:24 kai apestalmenoi

kai
Conj
apostellO
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
HAVING-been-commissionED THEY-WERE OUT OF-THE ones-having-been-dispatched there-were kai eipan kai legO
PHARISEES

kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
baptizeis baptizO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ei ei
Cond
AND
THEY-ask
him
AND
THEY-say say
to-him
ANY why ? hlias Elias

n_ Nom Sg m
THEN YOU-ARE-DIPizING IF you-are-baptizing oude oude

Adv
25 And they asked him, and said unto him, Why baptizest thou then, if thou be not that Christ, nor Elias, neither that prophet?
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos oude christos oude

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
YOU
NOT
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
NOT-YET ELIAS neither Elijah
NOT-YET THE nor
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
1:26 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
iwannhs legwn iOannEs legO

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
baptizw baptizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
answerED
to-them them
WH
THE
NA
JOHN
sayING
AM-DIPizING am-baptizing ouk ou

Part Neg
IN
water
26 John answered them, saying, I baptize with water: but there standeth one among you, whom ye know not;
mesos mesos
a_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
sthkei
esthken histEmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
MIDst in midst
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
NA
HAS-STOOD he-stands opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
WHOM
YOU(p) ye ou hos
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED are-aware-of ouk ou

Part Neg
1:27
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
pr Gen Sg m
THE-One the-one egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
BEHIND after ina hina

Conj
ME
COMING
OF-WHOM
NOT
AM
27 He it is, who coming after me is preferred before me, whose shoe's latchet I am not worthy to unloose.
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
lusw luO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
imanta himas
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
WORTHY
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-LOOSING OF-Him
THE
STRAP thong
OF-THE
upodhmatos hupodEma
n_ Gen Sg n
sandal
1:28 tauta
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
en en
Prep
bhqania egeneto bEthania ginomai

n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
peran peran
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou opou iordanEs hopou

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
28 These things were done in Bethabara beyond Jordan, where John was baptizing.
these IN these-things o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
BETHANY
BECAME occurred
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
iwannhs baptizwn iOannEs baptizO

THE
JOHN
DIPizING baptizing blepei blepO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
1:29 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ercomenon erchomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
to-THE
ON-MORROW he-IS-lookING THE he-is-observing
JESUS
COMING
TOWARD him
AND
29 . The next day John seeth Jesus coming unto him, and saith, Behold the Lamb of God, which taketh away the sin of the world.
AV
John 1
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
amnos amnos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
airwn airO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
IS-sayING
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
LAMB
OF-THE
God
THE
One-LIFTING one-taking-away
THE
amartian tou hamartia ho

missing sin
OF-THE
SYSTEM world uper ou huper hos

Prep pr Gen Sg m
1:30 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
opisw mou opisO egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
ercetai erchomai
this
IS he-is os hos
pr Nom Sg m
OVER
WHOM
said
BEHIND after oti prwtos hoti prOtos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
OF-ME me mou egO
IS-COMING
30 This is he of whom I said, After me cometh a man which is preferred before me: for he was before me.
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
Prep
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
pp 1 Gen Sg
MAN
WHO
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ME in-front-of me ouk ou

Part Neg
HAS-BECOME that has-come-to-be all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
BEFORE-most OF-ME former
He-WAS
1:31 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
hdein eidO
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND-I
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED Him was-aware-of hlqon erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
but
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR to-THE he-may-be-being-manifested udati hudOr

n_ Dat Sg n
31 And I knew him not: but that he should be made manifest to Israel, therefore am I come baptizing with water.
israhl dia israEl dia

ni proper Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
baptizwn baptizO
ISRAEL
CAME
IN
water
DIPizING baptizing to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
1:32 kai emarturhsen iwannhs legwn

kai
Conj
martureO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
legO
oti teqeamai hoti theaomai

Conj vi Perf midD/pasD 1 Sg
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
witnessES testifies
JOHN
sayING
that
I-HAVE-gazED I-have-gazed-upon ep epi

Prep
THE
spirit
32 And John bare record, saying, I saw the Spirit descending from heaven like a dove, and it abode upon him.
ws peristeran ex hOs peristera ek

Adv n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ouranou kai emeinen ouranos kai menO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
DOWN-STEPPING AS descending
DOVE
OUT OF-heaven
AND
it-REMAINS
ON
Him
1:33 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdein eidO
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
all o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AND-I
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED Him was-aware-of ekeinos ekeinos

pd Nom Sg m
but
THE
One-SENDing one-sending ef epi

Prep
ME
baptizein baptizO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
udati hudOr
n_ Dat Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
an an
Part
idhs eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
33 And I knew him not: but he that sent me to baptize with water, the same said unto me, Upon whom thou shalt see the Spirit descending, and remaining on him, the same is he which baptizeth with the Holy Ghost.
TO-BE-DIPizING IN to-be-baptizing to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
water
that-One that-one
to-ME
said
ON
WHOM
EVER YOU-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
pneuma katabainon pneuma katabainO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
kai menon kai menO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
spirit
DOWN-STEPPING AND descending en en

Prep
REMAINING
ON
Him
This this-one
IS
THE
baptizwn baptizO

One-DIPizING one-baptizing
IN
spirit
HOLY
1:34 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
ewraka horaO
kai memarturhka oti outos kai martureO hoti houtos

Conj vi Perf Act 1 Sg Conj pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
34 And I saw, and bare record that this is the Son of God.
AND-I
HAVE-SEEN
AND
HAVE-witnessED have-testified
that
This this-one
IS
THE
SON
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
NA
1:35 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
palin eisthkei palin histEmi

Adv vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs kai ek iOannEs kai ek

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
35 Again the next day after John stood, and two of his disciples;
to-THE
ON-MORROW AGAIN
HAD-STOOD stood
THE
JOHN
AND
OUT OF-THE
AV
John 1

duo duo
ni numeral
LEARNers disciples
OF-him
TWO
1:36 kai embleyas

kai
Conj
emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
peripatounti legei peripateO legO

vp Pres Act Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
36 And looking upon Jesus as he walked, he saith, Behold the Lamb of God!
AND
IN-looking looking-at tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-THE the qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
JESUS
he-IS-sayING
amnos amnos
n_ Nom Sg m
LAMB
OF-THE
God
1:37 kai hkousan oi

kai
Conj
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral

lalountos laleO
kai hkolouqhsan kai akoloutheO

37 . And the two disciples heard him speak, and they followed Jesus.
AND
HEAR
THE
TWO
LEARNers disciples
OF-him him
TALKING speaking
AND
THEY-follow
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE the
JESUS
1:38 strafeis
strephO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai qeasamenos kai theaomai

autous akolouqountas autos akoloutheO

BEING-TURNED
YET THE
JESUS
AND
gazing gazing-at de de
Conj
them
followING
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ti autos tis

zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbi o rhabbi hos

Hebrew pr Nom Sg n
38 Then Jesus turned, and saw them following, and saith unto them, What seek ye? They said unto him, Rabbi, (which is to say, being interpreted, Master,) where dwellest thou?
He-IS-sayING is-saying legetai legO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
to-them
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-SEEKING THE-ones the
YET say they-say meneis menO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
to-Him
RABBI
WHICH
meqermhneuomenon didaskale pou methermEneuO didaskalos pou

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n n_ Voc Sg m Part Int
IS-beING-said
TEACHer !
?-where YOU-ARE-REMAINING where ? kai oyesqe kai optomai

1:39 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ercesqe autos erchomai

hlqan erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
kai kai
Conj
He-IS-sayING
to-them
BE-COMING be-ye-coming ! kai par kai para

Conj Prep
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THEY-COME ye-shall-be-seeing emeinan menO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEN AND
39 He saith unto them, Come and see. They came and saw where he dwelt, and abode with him that day: for it was about the tenth hour.
eidan eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pou pou
Part
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran ekeinhn hEmera ekeinos

PERCEIVE
?-where He-IS-REMAINING AND where ? hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
BESIDE Him
THEY-REMAIN THE
DAY
that
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ws hOs
Adv
dekath dekatos
n_ Nom Sg f
HOUR
WAS it-was
AS TENth about andreas o andreas ho

1:40 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
adelfos simwnos petrou adelphos simOn petros

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WAS
ANDREW
THE
brother
OF-SIMON
Peter
ONE
OUT OF-THE
40 One of the two which heard John [speak], and followed him, was Andrew, Simon Peter's brother.
duo duo
ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
akousantwn para akouO para

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m Prep
iwannou kai akolouqhsantwn autw iOannEs kai akoloutheO autos

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Gen Pl m pp Dat Sg m
TWO
OF-THE the
ones-HEARing ones-hearing outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
BESIDE JOHN
AND
OF-following following idion idios

a_ Acc Sg m
to-Him him simwna kai simOn kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
41 He first findeth his own brother Simon, and saith unto him, We have found the Messias, which is, being interpreted, the Christ.
1:41 euriskei
heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon ton adelphos ho

IS-FINDING
this-one this-one
BEFORE-most THE first ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
brother
THE
OWN
SIMON
AND
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eurhkamen heuriskO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
messian o messias hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
meqermhneuomenon methermEneuO
IS-sayING
to-him
WE-HAVE-FOUND THE
MESSIAH
WHICH
IS
AV
John 1
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:42 hgagen
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
embleyas emblepO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
he-LED
him
TOWARD THE
JESUS
IN-looking looking-at uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
to-him him iwannou su iOannEs su

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
JESUS
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
42 And he brought him to Jesus. And when Jesus beheld him, he said, Thou art Simon the son of Jona: thou shalt be called Cephas, which is by interpretation, A stone.
pp 2 Nom Sg
said
YOU
ARE
SIMON
THE
SON
OF-JOHN
YOU
klhqhsh kaleO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
khfas kEphas
n_ Nom Sg m
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
ermhneuetai hermEneuO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED CEPHAS
WHICH
IS-beING-TRANSLATED Peter
1:43 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
hqelhsen exelqein thelO exerchomai

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian kai euriskei galilaia kai heuriskO

to-THE
ON-MORROW He-WILLS
TO-BE-OUT-COMING INTO THE to-be-coming-away o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
GALILEE
AND
He-IS-FINDING
43 . The day following Jesus would go forth into Galilee, and findeth Philip, and saith unto him, Follow me.
filippon kai legei philippos kai legO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
Philip
AND
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
1:44 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filippos apo philippos apo

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
bhqsaida ek bEthsaida ek
ni proper Prep
polews andreou polis andreas

44 Now Philip was of Bethsaida, the city of Andrew and Peter.
WAS
YET THE
Philip
FROM BETHSAIDA
OUT OF-THE
city
OF-ANDREW
kai petrou kai petros

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
AND
Peter
1:45 euriskei
heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
filippos ton philippos ho

naqanahl kai legei nathanaEl kai legO

ni proper Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
egrayen graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
IS-FINDING
Philip
THE
NATHANAEL
AND
he-IS-sayING is-saying
to-him
WHOM
WRITES
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
eurhkamen heuriskO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
45 Philip findeth Nathanael, and saith unto him, We have found him, of whom Moses in the law, and the prophets, did write, Jesus of Nazareth, the son of Joseph.
MOSES
IN
THE
LAW
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers WE-HAVE-FOUND JESUS prophets
SON
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iwshf ton iOsEph ho

ni proper t_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
nazaret nazareth
ni proper
OF-THE
JOSEPH
THE-One the-one
FROM NAZARETH
1:46 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
naqanahl ek nathanaEl ek
ni proper Prep
nazaret nazareth
ni proper
dunatai dunamai
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
agaqon agathos
a_ Nom Sg n
AND
said
to-him
NATHANAEL
WH NA
OUT of-NAZARETH IS-ABLE of-Nazareth can filippos ercou philippos erchomai

n_ Nom Sg m
ANY anything kai kai

Conj
GOOD
46 And Nathanael said unto him, Can there any good thing come out of Nazareth? Philip saith unto him, Come and see.
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
Philip
AND
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING be-you-perceiving !
1:47 eiden
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naqanahl ercomenon nathanaEl erchomai

ni proper vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
PERCEIVED
THE
JESUS
THE
NATHANAEL
COMING
TOWARD
47 Jesus saw Nathanael coming to him, and saith of him, Behold an Israelite indeed, in whom is no guile!
AV
John 1 - John 2
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai legei kai legO

peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
alhqws israhliths en alEthOs israElitEs en

Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
Him
AND
He-IS-sayING is-saying estin eimi
ABOUT him concerning
BE-PERCEIVING TRUly lo !
ISRAELITE
IN
WHOM
dolos dolos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
FRAUD guile
NOT
IS there-is autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
1:48 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
naqanahl poqen nathanaEl pothen

ni proper Adv Int
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ginwskeis ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
IS-sayING
to-Him
NATHANAEL
?-WHICH-PLACE ME whence ? pro pro

Prep
YOU-ARE-KNOWING answerED
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
filippon fwnhsai philippos phOneO

n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
48 Nathanael saith unto him, Whence knowest thou me? Jesus answered and said unto him, Before that Philip called thee, when thou wast under the fig tree, I saw thee.
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
BEFORE THE
YOU
Philip
TO-SOUND to-summon
onta eimi
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sukhn sukE
n_ Acc Sg f
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
BEING
UNDER THE
FIG-tree
I-PERCEIVED
YOU
1:49 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
naqanahl rabbi su nathanaEl rhabbi su

ni proper Hebrew pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
answerED
to-Him him
NATHANAEL
RABBI
YOU
ARE
THE
SON
OF-THE
49 Nathanael answered and saith unto him, Rabbi, thou art the Son of God; thou art the King of Israel.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
basileus ei basileus eimi

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
God
YOU
KING
ARE
OF-THE
ISRAEL
1:50 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti hoti
Conj
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
that I-said seeing-that pisteueis pisteuO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
to-YOU
that
50 Jesus answered and said unto him, Because I said unto thee, I saw thee under the fig tree, believest thou? thou shalt see greater things than these.
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
upokatw hupokatO
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sukhs sukE
n_ Gen Sg f
meizw mega
a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
I-PERCEIVED
YOU
FIG-tree
YOU-ARE-BELIEVING GREATer greater-things
OF-these
oyh optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
YOU-SHOULD-BE-VIEWING you-should-be-seeing
1:51 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
amhn amhn legw amEn amEn legO

Hebrew Hebrew vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-him
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING

t_ Gen Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE ye-shall-be-seeing qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
ouranon anewgota ouranos anoigO

n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Perf Pas Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
anabainontas kai anabainO kai

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Conj
51 And he saith unto him, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Hereafter ye shall see heaven open, and the angels of God ascending and descending upon the Son of man.
heaven
HAVING-UP-OPENED AND having-opened
THE
MESSENGERS OF-THE
God
UP-STEPPING ascending
AND
katabainontas epi ton katabainO epi ho

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
ON
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
AV
John 2
2:1 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
gamos gamos
n_ Nom Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
kana kana
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
to-THE
DAY
THE
third
MARRIAGE wedding ihsou iEsous
BECAME occurred ekei ekei

Adv
IN
CANA
OF-THE
GALILEE
. And the third day there was a marriage in Cana of Galilee; and the mother of Jesus was there:
kai hn kai eimi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
WAS
THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
JESUS
there
2:2 eklhqh
kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
And both Jesus was called, and his disciples, to the marriage.
WAS-CALLED YET AND also gamon gamos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
JESUS
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
INTO THE
MARRIAGE wedding
2:3 kai usterhsantos oinou

kai
Conj
hustereO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
oinos
n_ Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
And when they wanted wine, the mother of Jesus saith unto him, They have no wine.
AND
OF-WANTing of-being-deficient oinon oinos

n_ Acc Sg m
WINE of-wine ecousin echO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
IS-sayING
THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
JESUS
TOWARD
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
Him
WH
WINE
NA
NOT
THEY-ARE-HAVING
2:4
kai
kai kai
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai soi kai su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
Jesus saith unto her, Woman, what have I to do with thee? mine hour is not yet come.
AND
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
ANY what ?
to-ME
AND
to-YOU
gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
oupw oupO
Adv
hkei hEkO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
WOMAN !
NOT-as-yet IS-ARRIVING
THE
HOUR
OF-ME
2:5 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
diakonois diakonos
n_ Dat Pl m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
an an
Part
His mother saith unto the servants, Whatsoever he saith unto you, do [it].
IS-sayING
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
to-THE
THRU-SERVitors WHICH servants
ANY anything
EVER
legh legO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
poihsate poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
He-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) to-ye
DO do-ye ! ex hex
ni numeral
2:6 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ekei liqinai udriai ekei lithinos hudria

Adv a_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
kata kata
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kaqarismon twn katharismos ho

WERE there-were
YET there
STONE
water-pots
SIX
according-to THE in-accord-with metrhtas duo metrEtEs duo

n_ Acc Pl m ni numeral
cleansing
OF-THE
And there were set there six waterpots of stone, after the manner of the purifying of the Jews, containing two or three firkins apiece.
ioudaiwn keimenai ioudaios keimai

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl f
cwrousai chOreO
ana ana
Prep
h E
Part
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
JUDA-ans Jews
LYING
SPACING containing ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
UP MEASURers apiece measures gemisate gemizO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
TWO
OR
THREE
2:7 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
udrias udatos kai hudria hudOr kai

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg n Conj
Jesus saith unto them, Fill the waterpots with water. And they filled them up to the brim.
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
REPLETize THE fill-to-the-brim-ye !
water-pots
OF-water
AND
egemisan gemizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autas ews anw autos heOs anO

pp Acc Pl f Conj Adv
THEY-REPLETize them they-fill-to-the-brim
TILL
UP
2:8 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois antlhsate nun kai ferete autos antleO nun kai pherO
pp Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
arcitriklinw architriklinos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
He-IS-sayING
to-them
BAIL draw-ye !
NOW AND
BE-CARRYING to-THE be-ye-bringing !
chief-THREE-CLINer chief-of-the-dining-room
And he saith unto them, Draw out now, and bear unto the governor of the feast. And they bare [it].
AV
John 2
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hnegkan pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
YET THEY-CARRY they-bring-it egeusato geuomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
2:9 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arcitriklinos architriklinos
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
gegenhmenon ginomai
AS
YET TASTES
THE
chief-THREE-CLINer THE chief-of-the-dining-room estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
water
WINE
HAVING-BECOME
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
poqen pothen
Adv Int
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
diakonoi diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
hdeisan eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
When the ruler of the feast had tasted the water that was made wine, and knew not whence it was: (but the servants which drew the water knew;) the governor of the feast called the bridegroom,
AND
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE IS was-aware whence ? it-is hntlhkotes antleO

THE
YET THRU-SERVitors HAD-PERCEIVED servants were-aware ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
fwnei phOneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
numfion numphios
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
ones-HAVING-BAILED THE ones-having-drawn
water
IS-SOUNDING THE is-summoning
BRIDE-groom THE bridegroom
arcitriklinos architriklinos
n_ Nom Sg m
chief-THREE-CLINer chief-of-the-dining-room
2:10 kai legei

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos prwton anthrOpos prOton

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
to-him
EVERY
human
BEFORE-most THE first ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IDEAL
WINE
tiqhsin tithEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai otan kai hotan

Conj Conj
mequsqwsin methuO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
elassw elasson
a_ Acc Sg m Cmp
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
tethrhkas tEreO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
10 And saith unto him, Every man at the beginning doth set forth good wine; and when men have well drunk, then that which is worse: [but] thou hast kept the good wine until now.
IS-PLACING
AND
when-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEING-DRUNK THE whenever oinon oinos

n_ Acc Sg m
INFERIOR
YOU
HAVE-KEPT
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
ews arti heOs arti

Conj Adv
THE
IDEAL
WINE
TILL
at-PRESENT
2:11 tauthn epoihsen archn

houtos
pd Acc Sg f
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
archE
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
shmeiwn o sEmeion ho
n_ Gen Pl n t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
kana kana
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
this
DOES
ORIGINal beginning
OF-THE
SIGNS
THE
JESUS
IN
CANA
OF-THE
11 This beginning of miracles did Jesus in Cana of Galilee, and manifested forth his glory; and his disciples believed on him.
galilaias kai efanerwsen thn galilaia kai phaneroO ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai episteusan eis kai pisteuO eis

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
GALILEE
AND
makES-APPEAR manifests
THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
AND
BELIEVE
INTO Him
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
2:12 meta touto

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
katebh katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
kafarnaoum autos kapharnaoum autos

ni proper pp Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
after
this
He-DOWN-STEPPed INTO CAPERNAUM he-descended adelfoi adelphos

n_ Nom Pl m
NA
He
AND
THE
MOTHER
12 . After this he went down to Capernaum, he, and his mother, and his brethren, and his disciples: and they continued there not many days.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

kai ekei kai ekei

Conj Adv
OF-Him
AND
THE
brothers
OF-Him
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
there
emeinan menO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
pollas hmeras polus hEmera

THEY-REMAIN NOT
MANY
DAYS
2:13 kai eggus hn

kai
Conj
eggus
Adv
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai anebh ioudaios kai anabainO

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
13 And the Jews'passover was at hand, and Jesus went up to Jerusalem,
AND
NEAR
WAS
THE
PASSOVER OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
UP-STEPPed went-up
INTO
AV
John 2
ierosoluma o ierosoluma ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
JERUSALEM
THE
JESUS
2:14 kai euren

kai
Conj
heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pwlountas pOleO
boas bous
n_ Acc Pl m
kai probata kai probaton

Conj n_ Acc Pl n
AND
He-FOUND
IN
THE
SACRED-place THE sanctuary
OXEN
AND
sheep sheep(p)
14 And found in the temple those that sold oxen and sheep and doves, and the changers of money sitting:
kai peristeras kai tous kai peristera kai ho

Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Pl m
kermatistas kaqhmenous kermatistEs kathEmai

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
AND
DOVES
AND
THE
CLIPists money-changers
sittING
2:15 kai poihsas

kai
Conj
poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
fragellion ek phragellion ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
scoiniwn pantas exebalen schoinion pas ekballO

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
AND
making
WHIP
OUT OF-RUSHES of-ropes
ALL
He-OUT-CAST OUT OF-THE he-cast-out kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
te te
Part
probata kai tous probaton kai ho

boas bous
n_ Acc Pl m
kollubistwn kollubistEs
n_ Gen Pl m
15 And when he had made a scourge of small cords, he drove them all out of the temple, and the sheep, and the oxen; and poured out the changers'money, and overthrew the tables;
SACRED-place THE sanctuary execeen ekcheO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
BESIDES sheep bsboth sheep(p)

WH NA
AND
NA
THE
OXEN
AND
OF-THE
LOPPers brokers
ta kermata
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kerma kerma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
trapezas anetreyen trapeza anatrepO

He-OUT-POURS he-pours-out
THE
CLIP-effect money-change
AND
THE
tables
He-UP-REVERTS subverts tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
16 And said unto them that sold doves, Take these things hence; make not my Father's house an house of merchandise.
2:16 kai tois

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
peristeras pwlousin peristera pOleO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
arate airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
to-THE-ones THE to-the-ones poieite poieO
DOVES
SELLING
He-said
LIFT-YE these take-away-ye ! these-things mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
enteuqen mh enteuthen mE
Adv Part Neg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
hence
NO
THE
HOME house
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
HOME house
emporiou emporion
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-store
2:17 emnhsqhsan oi
mnaomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

oti gegrammenon hoti graphO

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ARE-REMINDED
THE
LEARNers disciples sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-Him
that
HAVING-been-WRITTEN it-IS
THE
17 And his disciples remembered that it was written, The zeal of thine house hath eaten me up.
zhlos zElos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
katafagetai katesthiO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
BOILing zeal
OF-THE
HOME house oi ho
OF-YOU
SHALL-BE-DOWN-EATING ME shall-be-devouring autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
2:18 apekriqhsan oun

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
oun
Conj
ioudaioi kai eipan ioudaios kai legO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
shmeion sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Nom Pl m
answerED
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
AND
say
to-Him
ANY what ?
SIGN
18 Then answered the Jews and said unto him, What sign shewest thou unto us, seeing that thou doest these things?
deiknueis deiknumi
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
oti hoti
Conj
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-SHOWING to-US us
that these YOU-ARE-DOING seeing-that these-things kai eipen kai legO

2:19 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
autois lusate autos luO

pp Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton kai houtos kai

pd Acc Sg m Conj
answerED
WH NA
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
LOOSE-YE raze-ye ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE
TEMPLE
this
AND
19 Jesus answered and said unto them, Destroy this temple, and in three days I will raise it up.
en
en en
Prep
trisin hmerais egerw treis hEmera egeirO

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 1 Sg
IN
THREE
DAYS
I-SHALL-BE-ROUSING it him it I-shall-be-raising-up
AV
John 2 - John 3
2:20 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi tesserakonta kai ex ioudaios tesserakonta kai hex

a_ Nom Pl m ni numeral Conj ni numeral
etesin oikodomhqh etos oikodomeO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
say
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews kai su kai su

Conj
FOUR-TY forty en en
Prep
AND
SIX
to-YEARS
WAS-HOME-BUILDED was-built auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
20 Then said the Jews, Forty and six years was this temple in building, and wilt thou rear it up in three days?
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
naos naos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
trisin hmerais egereis treis hEmera egeirO

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 2 Sg
pp 2 Nom Sg
THE
TEMPLE
this
AND
YOU
IN
THREE
DAYS
SHALL-BE-ROUSING it him it shall-be-raising-up swmatos autou sOma autos

21 But he spake of the temple of his body.
2:21 ekeinos de
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
de
Conj
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
naou naos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
that-One that-one
YET said said-it hgerqh egeirO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ABOUT THE concerning ek ek

Prep
TEMPLE
OF-THE
BODY
OF-Him
2:22 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
emnhsqhsan oi mnaomai ho

oti hoti
Conj
when
THEN He-WAS-ROUSED OUT OF-DEAD-ones ARE-REMINDED of-dead-ones elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
LEARNers disciples logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-Him
that
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kai episteusan th kai pisteuO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
22 When therefore he was risen from the dead, his disciples remembered that he had said this unto them; and they believed the scripture, and the word which Jesus had said.
this
He-said
AND
THEY-BELIEVE
to-THE the
WRITing scripture
AND
to-THE the
saying word
WHICH
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
said
THE
JESUS
2:23 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
n_ Dat Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pasca pascha
Aramaic
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AS
YET He-WAS
IN
THE
JERUSALEM
IN
THE
PASSOVER IN
THE
23 . Now when he was in Jerusalem at the passover, in the feast [day], many believed in his name, when they saw the miracles which he did.
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
episteusan eis pisteuO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
qewrountes theOreO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
FESTIVAL MANY
BELIEVE
INTO THE
NAME
OF-Him
beholdING
OF-Him
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
shmeia a sEmeion hos

n_ Acc Pl n pr Acc Pl n
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
SIGNS
WHICH
He-DID
2:24 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
episteuen auton pisteuO autos

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m

pp Dat Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
24 But Jesus did not commit himself unto them, because he knew all [men],
SAME shimself ginwskein ginOskO

vn Pres Act
YET JESUS
NOT
BELIEVED entrusted
Him himself
to-them
THRU THE because-of
Him
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
TO-BE-KNOWING ALL all-men
2:25 kai oti ou

kai
Conj
hoti
Conj
ou
Part Neg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
marturhsh martureO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
25 And needed not that any should testify of man: for he knew what was in man.
AND
that
NOT
need
He-HAD
THAT ANY anyone hn eimi
SHOULD-BE-witnessING ABOUT THE should-be-testifying concerning en en

Prep
anqrwpou autos anthrOpos autos

n_ Gen Sg m pp Nom Sg m
gar eginwsken ti gar ginOskO tis

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg pi Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw anthrOpos
n_ Dat Sg m
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
human
He
for
KNEW
ANY what ?
WAS
IN
THE
human
AV
John 3
3:1 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn nikodhmos pharisaios nikodEmos

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
. There was a man of the Pharisees, named Nicodemus, a ruler of the Jews:
WAS there-was autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
YET human
OUT OF-THE
PHARISEES
Nicodemus (CONQUER-PUBLICer) NAME Nicodemus
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
to-him
chief
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews pros pros

Prep
3:2 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
nuktos kai eipen nux kai legO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbi rhabbi
Hebrew
this-one this-one oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
CAME
TOWARD Him
OF-NIGHT
AND
said
to-Him
RABBI
oti apo hoti apo

Conj Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
elhluqas erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 2 Sg
didaskalos oudeis didaskalos oudeis

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg f
gar gar
Conj
The same came to Jesus by night, and said unto him, Rabbi, we know that thou art a teacher come from God: for no man can do these miracles that thou doest, except God be with him.
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware dunatai dunamai

FROM God
YOU-HAVE-COME TEACHer
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one su su

pp 2 Nom Sg
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
shmeia poiein sEmeion poieO

n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
IS-ABLE can h eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
these
THE
SIGNS
TO-BE-DOING WHICH
YOU
ARE-DOING
IF-EVER NO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
MAY-BE
THE
God
WITH Him
3:3 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ean ean
Cond
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
IF-EVER
Jesus answered and said unto him, Verily, verily, I say unto thee, Except a man be born again, he cannot see the kingdom of God.
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
gennhqh gennaO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
anwqen ou anOthen ou
Adv Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
NO
ANY anyone
MAY-BE-BEING-generatED UP-PLACE may-be-being-begotten anew qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
he-IS-ABLE he-can

KINGdom
OF-THE
God
3:4 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nikodhmos pws dunatai nikodEmos pOs dunamai

n_ Nom Sg m Adv Int vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
TOWARD Him
THE
Nicodemus
how how ?
IS-ABLE can eis eis

Prep
human
Nicodemus saith unto him, How can a man be born when he is old? can he enter the second time into his mother's womb, and be born?
gennhqhnai gennaO
vn Aor Pas
gerwn gerOn
n_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
mh mE
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
koilian ths koilia ho

TO-BE-generatED VETERAN to-be-begotten mhtros autou mEtEr autos

BEING
NO
he-IS-ABLE he-can
INTO THE
CAVITY womb
OF-THE
deuteron eiselqein deuteros eiserchomai

Adv vn 2Aor Act
kai gennhqhnai kai gennaO

Conj vn Aor Pas
MOTHER
OF-him
second second-time
WH
TO-BE-INTO-COMING AND to-be-entering
TO-BE-generatED to-be-begotten soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
3:5 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
answerED
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
IF-EVER NO
ANY anyone
Jesus answered, Verily, verily, I say unto thee, Except a man be born of water and [of] the Spirit, he cannot enter into the kingdom of God.
gennhqh gennaO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
udatos kai pneumatos ou hudOr kai pneuma ou

n_ Gen Sg n Conj n_ Gen Sg n Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
vn 2Aor Act
MAY-BE-BEING-generatED OUT OF-water may-be-being-begotten eis eis

Prep
AND
OF-spirit
NOT
he-IS-ABLE he-can
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AV
John 3
3:6 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gegennhmenon gennaO
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos sarx sarx sarx

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
That which is born of the flesh is flesh; and that which is born of the Spirit is spirit.
THE
HAVING-been-generatED OUT OF-THE having-been-begotten ek ek

Prep
FLESH
FLESH
IS
AND
THE
gegennhmenon gennaO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma pneuma pneuma

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HAVING-been-generatED OUT OF-THE having-been-begotten
spirit
spirit
IS
3:7 mh
mE
Part Neg
qaumashs thaumazO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
oti eipon hoti legO

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
gennhqhnai gennaO
vn Aor Pas
Marvel not that I said unto thee, Ye must be born again.
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-MARVELING that
I-said
to-YOU
it-IS-BINDING must
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-generatED to-be-begotten
anwqen anOthen
Adv
UP-PLACE anew
3:8 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
opou hopou
Adv
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pnei pneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f

n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg n
THE
spirit blast
THE-?-where it-IS-WILLING wheree oidas eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Sg
IS-BLOWING
AND
THE
SOUND
OF-it
akoueis akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
poqen pothen
Adv Int
ercetai erchomai
kai pou kai pou

Conj Part Int
The wind bloweth where it listeth, and thou hearest the sound thereof, but canst not tell whence it cometh, and whither it goeth: so is every one that is born of the Spirit.
YOU-ARE-HEARING but
NOT
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE it-IS-COMING you-are-aware whence ? pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
AND
?-where where ? tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
upagei hupagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
outws estin houtOs eimi

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gegennhmenos gennaO
ek ek
Prep
it-IS-UNDER-LEADING thus it-is-going-away pneumatos pneuma

n_ Gen Sg n
IS
EVERY
THE
one-HAVING-been-generatED OUT OF-THE one-having-been-begotten
spirit
3:9 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
nikodhmos kai eipen nikodEmos kai legO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
Nicodemus answered and said unto him, How can these things be?
answerED
Nicodemus
AND
said
to-Him
how how ?
IS-ABLE can
these these-things
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
TO-BE-BECOMING
3:10 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
didaskalos didaskalos
n_ Nom Sg m
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
YOU
ARE
THE
TEACHer
10 Jesus answered and said unto him, Art thou a master of Israel, and knowest not these things?
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
israhl kai tauta israEl kai houtos

ni proper Conj pd Acc Pl n
ou ou
Part Neg
ginwskeis ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-THE
ISRAEL
AND
these NOT these-things soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU-ARE-KNOWING
3:11 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti o hoti hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
laloumen laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai kai
Conj
AMEN verily o hos

pr Acc Sg n
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
that
WHICH
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED WE-ARE-TALKING AND we-are-speaking marturian hmwn marturia hemeis

11 Verily, thee, We know, and seen; and witness.
verily, I say unto speak that we do testify that we have ye receive not our
ewrakamen horaO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl Att
marturoumen martureO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
lambanete lambanO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
WHICH
WE-HAVE-SEEN WE-ARE-witnessING AND we-are-testifying ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
THE
witness testimony kai ou kai ou

Conj Part Neg
OF-US
NOT
YE-ARE-GETTING-[UP] ye-are-getting pws ean pOs ean

Adv Int Cond
12 If I have told you earthly things, and ye believe not, how shall ye believe, if I tell you [of] heavenly things?
3:12 ei
ei
Cond
epigeia epigeios
a_ Acc Pl n
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
IF
THE
ON-LAND(p) I-said terrestrial-things I-told
to-YOU(p) ye
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-BELIEVING how how ?
IF-EVER
AV
John 3
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
epourania pisteusete epouranios pisteuO

a_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Act 2 Pl
I-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) I-may-be-telling ye
THE
ON-heavenly(p) celestial-things eis eis

Prep
YE-SHALL-BE-BELIEVING
3:13 kai oudeis

kai
Conj
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
anabebhken anabainO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ei ouranos ei
n_ Acc Sg m Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-UP-STEPPED INTO THE no-one has-ascended o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
heaven
IF
NO
THE the-one
OUT OF-THE
13 And no man hath ascended up to heaven, but he that came down from heaven, [even] the Son of man which is in heaven.
ouranou katabas ouranos katabainO

uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
heaven
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
3:14 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
uywsen hupsoO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ofin ophis
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
outws houtOs
Adv
AND
according-AS MOSES
HEIGHTens exalts ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
serpent
IN
THE
DESOLATE thus wilderness
14 And as Moses lifted up the serpent in the wilderness, even so must the Son of man be lifted up:
uywqhnai hupsoO
vn Aor Pas
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-HEIGHTenED it-IS-BINDING to-be-exalted must
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
3:15 ina
hina
Conj
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ech echO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
15 That whosoever believeth in him should not perish, but have eternal life.
THAT EVERY
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing qeos theos
IN
Him
MAY-BE-HAVING LIFE
eonian
3:16 outws gar hgaphsen o

houtOs
Adv
gar
Conj
agapaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
thus
for
LOVES
THE
God
THE
SYSTEM world
AS-BESIDES THE so-that eis eis

Prep
SON
16 For God so loved the world, that he gave his only begotten Son, that whosoever believeth in him should not perish, but have everlasting life.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
monogenh monogenEs
a_ Acc Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
ONLY-generated He-GIVES only-begotten all ech alla echO

Conj
THAT EVERY
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing
INTO Him
NO
apolhtai apollumi
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED but should-be-perishing
MAY-BE-HAVING LIFE
eonian
3:17 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar apesteilen o gar apostellO ho

qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
for
commissions dispatches ton ho
THE
God
THE
SON
INTO THE
SYSTEM world kosmos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg m
17 For God sent not his Son into the world to condemn the world; but that the world through him might be saved.
ina hina
Conj
krinh krinO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
swqh sOzO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-JUDGING THE
SYSTEM world
but
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED THE
SYSTEM world
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THRU Him through
3:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
krinetai krinO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing hdh EdE

Adv
INTO Him
NOT
IS-beING-JUDGED THE-one the-one pepisteuken eis pisteuO eis

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Prep
YET
NO
pisteuwn pisteuO
kekritai krinO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti mh hoti mE
Conj Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
18 He that believeth on him is not condemned: but he that believeth not is condemned already, because he hath not believed in the name of the only begotten Son of God.
BELIEVING
ALREADY HAS-been-JUDGED that
NO
he-HAS-BELIEVED
INTO THE
NAME
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
monogenous uiou monogenEs huios

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
ONLY-generated only-begotten
SON
OF-THE
God
AV
John 3
3:19 auth
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
krisis krisis
n_ Nom Sg f
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
elhluqen erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
this
YET IS
THE
JUDGing
that
THE
LIGHT
HAS-COME
INTO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai hgaphsan oi kai agapaO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi mallon to anthrOpos mallon ho

n_ Nom Pl m Adv t_ Acc Sg n
skotos h skotos E
n_ Acc Sg n Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
19 And this is the condemnation, that light is come into the world, and men loved darkness rather than light, because their deeds were evil.
THE
SYSTEM world hn eimi
AND
LOVE
THE
humans
RATHER
THE
DARKness
OR THE than
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
gar autwn gar autos

Conj pp Gen Pl m
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
LIGHT
WAS
for
OF-them
wicked
THE
ACTS
3:20 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
faula phaulos
a_ Acc Pl n
prasswn prassO
misei miseO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
EVERY
for
THE the-one to ho
FOUL PRACTISING bad-things committing fws phOs

n_ Acc Sg n
IS-HATING
THE
LIGHT
AND
NOT
20 For every one that doeth evil hateth the light, neither cometh to the light, lest his deeds should be reproved.
ercetai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
elegcqh elegchO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
t_ Acc Sg n
IS-COMING
TOWARD THE
LIGHT
THAT NO
MAY-BE-BEING-EXPOSED THE
ACTS
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
3:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
poiwn poieO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian ercetai alEtheia erchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET one-DOING one-doing
THE
TRUTH
IS-COMING
TOWARD THE
LIGHT
21 But he that doeth truth cometh to the light, that his deeds may be made manifest, that they are wrought in God.
ina hina
Conj
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR OF-him may-be-being-made-manifest eirgasmena ergazomai

THE
ACTS
that
IN
God
it-IS
HAVING-been-ACTED having-been-wrought
3:22 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

eis eis
Prep
after
these CAME these-things ioudaian ghn Ioudaios gE

THE
JESUS
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
INTO
22 . After these things came Jesus and his disciples into the land of Judaea; and there he tarried with them, and baptized.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kai ekei dietriben met autwn kai ekei diatribO meta autos
Conj Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
kai ebaptizen kai baptizO

THE
JUDEA
LAND
AND
WH
there
NA
He-tarriED
WITH them
AND
DIPizED baptized en en
Prep
3:23 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs baptizwn iOannEs baptizO

ainwn eggus ainOn eggus

ni proper Adv
WAS
YET AND also saleim oti udata saleim hoti hudOr

ni proper Conj n_ Nom Pl n
THE
JOHN
DIPizING baptizing
IN
ENON
NEAR
23 And John also was baptizing in Aenon near to Salim, because there was much water there: and they came, and were baptized.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
polla polus
a_ Nom Pl n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei kai pareginonto ekei kai paraginomai

Adv Conj vi impf midD 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE the
SALIM
that
waters waters
MANY much
WAS
there
AND
THEY-BESIDE-BECAME AND they-came-along
ebaptizonto baptizO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
were-DIPizED were-baptized
3:24 oupw
oupO
Adv
gar hn gar eimi

beblhmenos ballO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
24 For John was not yet cast into prison.
NOT-as-yet for
WAS
HAVING-been-CAST INTO THE
GUARD-house jail
THE
JOHN
AV
John 3
3:25 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
zhthsis ek zEtEsis ek
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn iwannou meta ioudaiou peri mathEtEs iOannEs meta ioudaios peri
n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Sg m Prep
BECAME there-occurred kaqarismou katharismos

n_ Gen Sg m
THEN SEEKing questioning
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-JOHN
WITH
JUDA-an Jew
ABOUT concerning
25 Then there arose a question between [some] of John's disciples and the Jews about purifying.
cleansing
3:26 kai hlqon

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn kai eipan iOannEs kai legO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbi os rhabbi hos

Hebrew pr Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-CAME
TOWARD THE
JOHN
AND
THEY-say say
to-him
RABBI
WHO
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
peran peran
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou w iordanEs hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Dat Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
memarturhkas martureO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
26 And they came unto John, and said unto him, Rabbi, he that was with thee beyond Jordan, to whom thou barest witness, behold, the same baptizeth, and all [men] come to him.
WAS
WITH
YOU
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
to-WHOM
YOU
HAVE-witnessED have-testified auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
baptizei baptizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ercontai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
BE-PERCEIVING this-One lo ! this-one
IS-DIPizING is-baptizing
AND
ALL
ARE-COMING
TOWARD Him
3:27 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
iwannhs kai eipen iOannEs kai legO

ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
anqrwpos lambanein anthrOpos lambanO

n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act
answerED
WH NA
JOHN
NA
AND
said
NOT
IS-ABLE can
human
TO-BE-GETTING-UP to-be-getting autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
27 John answered and said, A man can receive nothing, except it be given him from heaven.
ouden
oude oude
Adv
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
dedomenon didOmi
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NOT-YET ONE
IF-EVER NO
it-MAY-BE
HAVING-been-GIVEN to-him him
OUT OF-THE
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
heaven
WH NA
3:28 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
martureite oti eipon martureO hoti legO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
egw
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
SAME yourselves eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
YOU(p) ye o ho
to-ME
ARE-witnessING are-testifying
that
I-said
that
NOT
28 Ye yourselves bear me witness, that I said, I am not the Christ, but that I am sent before him.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
cristos all oti apestalmenos christos alla hoti apostellO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
AM
THE
ANOINTED Christ
but
that
HAVING-been-commissionED I-AM having-been-dispatched
Prep
ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg m
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-that-One in-front-of that-one
3:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
numfhn numfios numphE numphios

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
filos philos
a_ Nom Sg m
THE
One-HAVING one-having numfiou numphios

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
BRIDE
BRIDE-groom IS bridegroom kai akouwn kai akouO

THE
YET FOND-one friend cara chara

n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
esthkws histEmi
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cairei chairO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
29 He that hath the bride is the bridegroom: but the friend of the bridegroom, which standeth and heareth him, rejoiceth greatly because of the bridegroom's voice: this my joy therefore is fulfilled.
OF-THE
BRIDE-groom THE bridegroom thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
one-HAVING-STOOD AND one-standing numfiou numphios

n_ Gen Sg m
HEARING
OF-Him him h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
JOY to-joy h ho
IS-JOYING is-rejoicing
dia dia
Prep
fwnhn tou phOnE ho

auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Nom Sg f
THRU THE because-of emh emos

ps 1 Nom Sg
SOUND voice
OF-THE
BRIDE-groom this bridegroom
THEN THE
JOY
THE
peplhrwtai plEroO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
MY
AV
John 3
3:30 ekeinon dei

ekeinos
pd Acc Sg m
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
auxanein auxanO
vn Pres Act
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
de de
Conj
elattousqai elattoO
vn Pres Pas
30 He must increase, but I [must] decrease.
that-One that-one
IS-BINDING must
TO-BE-GROWING-UP ME to-be-growing
YET TO-BE-beING-made-INFERIOR
3:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anwqen ercomenos anOthen erchomai

epanw pantwn estin epanO pas eimi

Adv a_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE-One the-one wn eimi
UP-PLACE from-above ek ek
Prep
COMING
ON-UP over ek ek
Prep
OF-ALL all ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
IS
THE
31 He that cometh from above is above all: he that is of the earth is earthly, and speaketh of the earth: he that cometh from heaven is above all.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
one-BEING one-being ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
OUT OF-THE
LAND earth ek ek
Prep
OUT OF-THE
LAND earth
IS
AND
OUT OF-THE
WH WH
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ercomenos ouranos erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
epanw pantwn
LAND earth
WH
NA
THE-One the-one
NA
OUT OF-THE
NA
heaven
COMING
estin
epanw pantwn estin epanO pas eimi

Adv a_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ON-UP over
OF-ALL all
IS
3:32 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
ewraken horaO
kai hkousen kai akouO

touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
marturei martureO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
marturian marturia
n_ Acc Sg f
32 And what he hath seen and heard, that he testifieth; and no man receiveth his testimony.
WHICH
He-HAS-SEEN
AND
HEARS
this
He-IS-witnessING AND he-is-testifying
THE
witness testimony
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-Him
NOT-YET-ONE IS-GETTING-UP no-one is-getting labwn lambanO

3:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marturian esfragisen oti o marturia sphragizO hoti ho

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
33 He that hath received his testimony hath set to his seal that God is true.
THE
one-GETTING one-getting alhqhs alEthEs

a_ Nom Sg m
OF-Him
THE
witness testimony
SEALS sets-his-seal
that
THE
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
God
TRUE
IS
3:34 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
gar apesteilen o gar apostellO ho

qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
WHOM
for
commissions
THE
God
THE
declarations OF-THE
God
34 For he whom God hath sent speaketh the words of God: for God giveth not the Spirit by measure [unto him].
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
metrou metron
n_ Gen Sg n
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
NOT
for
OUT OF-MEASURE He-IS-GIVING THE
spirit
3:35 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
agapa agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
dedwken en didOmi en
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
35 The Father loveth the Son, and hath given all things into his hand.
THE
FATHER
IS-LOVING
THE
SON
AND
ALL
HAS-GIVEN
IN
THE
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HAND
OF-Him
3:36 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion o aiOnios ho
a_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
INTO THE
SON
IS-HAVING
LIFE
eonian
THE
36 He that believeth on the Son hath everlasting life: and he that believeth not the Son shall not see life; but the wrath of God abideth on him.
de de
Conj
apeiqwn apeitheO
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oyetai optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
all h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
orgh orgE
n_ Nom Sg f
YET UN-PERSUADING one-being-stubborn
to-THE
SON
NOT
SHALL-BE-VIEWING LIFE shall-be-seeing
but
THE
INDIGNATION
AV
John 3 - John 4
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
God
IS-REMAINING ON
him
AV
John 4
4:1 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
egnw ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
WH
kurios
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hkousan oi hoti akouO ho

n_ Nom Pl m
AS
THEN KNEW
THE
JESUS
that
HEAR
WH
THE
NA
PHARISEES
. When therefore the Lord knew how the Pharisees had heard that Jesus made and baptized more disciples than John,

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
pleionas polus
a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
maqhtas poiei mathEtEs poieO

kai baptizei kai baptizO

h E
iwannhs iOannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
Part
that
JESUS
MORE
LEARNers disciples ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
IS-makING
AND
IS-DIPizING is-baptizing
OR than
JOHN
4:2 kaitoige
kaitoige
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ebaptizen all oi baptizO alla ho

vi impf Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m

(Though Jesus himself baptized not, but his disciples,)
AND-to-THE-SURELY JESUS though-to-be-sure
SAME shimself
NOT
DIPizED baptized
but
THE
LEARNers disciples galilaian galilaia

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-Him
4:3 afhken
aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ioudaian kai aphlqen ioudaia kai aperchomai

palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
He left Judaea, and departed again into Galilee.
He-FROM-LETS THE he-leaves
JUDEA
AND
FROM-CAME came-away
AGAIN
INTO THE
GALILEE
4:4 edei
deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
diercesqai dierchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
samareias samareia
n_ Gen Sg f
. And he must needs go through Samaria.
it-WAS-BINDING YET Him
TO-BE-THRU-COMING THRU THE to-be-passing-through through eis eis

Prep
SAMARIA
4:5 ercetai
erchomai
oun oun
Conj
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
samareias legomenhn samareia legO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Pas Acc Sg f
sucar suchar
ni proper
plhsion plEsion
Adv
He-IS-COMING
THEN INTO city
OF-THE
SAMARIA
beING-said
SYCHAR NIGH
Then cometh he to a city of Samaria, which is called Sychar, near to the parcel of ground that Jacob gave to his son Joseph.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
cwriou o chOrion hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Acc Sg n
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
iwshf tw iOsEph ho
ni proper t_ Dat Sg m
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE the
freehold
WHICH
GIVES
JACOB
to-THE
JOSEPH
THE
SON
OF-him
4:6 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ekei phgh ekei pEgE

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iakwb o iakOb ho
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kekopiakws kopiaO
ek ek
Prep
WAS
YET there
SPRING
OF-THE
JACOB
THE
THEN JESUS
HAVING-toilED being-wearied hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
OUT
Now Jacob's well was there. Jesus therefore, being wearied with [his] journey, sat thus on the well: [and] it was about the sixth hour.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
odoiporias ekaqezeto hodoiporia kathezomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
outws epi th houtOs epi ho

Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg f
phgh pEgE
n_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ws hOs
Adv
OF-THE
WAYS-GO journey
was-seatED
thus
ON
THE
SPRING
HOUR
WAS it-was
AS about
ekth hektos
a_ Nom Sg f
SIXth
4:7 ercetai
erchomai
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
samareias antlhsai udwr samareia antleO hudOr

n_ Gen Sg f vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
IS-COMING
WOMAN
OUT OF-THE
SAMARIA
TO-BAIL to-draw
water
IS-sayING
to-her
There cometh a woman of Samaria to draw water: Jesus saith unto her, Give me to drink.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
THE
JESUS
to-ME me
TO-BE-DRINKING
4:8 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar maqhtai autou gar mathEtEs autos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m pp Gen Sg m
apelhluqeisan eis aperchomai eis

vi Plup Act 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
trofas trophE
n_ Acc Pl f
(For his disciples were gone away unto the city to buy meat.)
THE
for
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
HAD-FROM-COME had-come-away
INTO THE
city
THAT NURTURE nourishment(p)
agoraswsin agorazO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BUYING
4:9 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
samaritis pws su samaritis pOs su

n_ Nom Sg f Adv Int pp 2 Nom Sg
ioudaios ioudaios
a_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
THEN to-Him
THE
WOMAN
THE
SAMARItan
how how ?
YOU
JUDA-an Jew
Then saith the woman of Samaria unto him, How is it that thou, being a Jew, askest drink of me, which am a woman of Samaria? for the
AV
John 4
wn eimi
par para
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
aiteis aiteO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
gunaikos samaritidos gunE samaritis

Jews have no dealings with the Samaritans.
BEING
BESIDE ME
WH NA
TO-BE-DRINKING ARE-REQUESTING OF-WOMAN woman gar sugcrwntai gar sugchraomai

OF-SAMARItan Samaritan
oushs eimi
ou
ou ou
Part Neg
ioudaioi ioudaios
a_ Nom Pl m
WH
samaritais
BEING
NA
NOT
for
ARE-TOGETHER-USING JUDA-ans are-being-beholden-to Jews
samaritais samaritEs
n_ Dat Pl m
to-SAMARItans Samaritans
4:10 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ei ei
Cond
hdeis eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dwrean dOrea
n_ Acc Sg f
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-her
IF
YOU-HAD-PERCEIVED THE you-were-aware-of legwn legO

gratuity
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
10 Jesus answered and said unto her, If thou knewest the gift of God, and who it is that saith to thee, Give me to drink; thou wouldest have asked of him, and he would have given thee living water.
OF-THE
God
AND
ANY who su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
IS it-is an an
Part
THE
One-sayING one-saying auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-YOU
BE-GIVING be-you-giving ! soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pein pinO
vn 2Aor Act
hthsas aiteO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg

an an
Part
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
to-ME me zwn zaO
TO-BE-DRINKING YOU
EVER REQUEST
Him
AND
He-GIVES
EVER to-YOU you
water
LIVING
NA NA
4:11 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
oute oute
Conj
antlhma antlEma
n_ Acc Sg n
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
WOMAN
Master ! Lord ! baqu bathus

a_ Nom Sg n
NOT-BESIDES BAILer not-bseven bucket poqen pothen

Adv Int
11 The woman saith unto him, Sir, thou hast nothing to draw with, and the well is deep: from whence then hast thou that living water?
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
frear phrear
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-HAVING AND
THE
WELL
IS
DEEP
?-WHICH-PLACE THEN YOU-ARE-HAVING whence ?
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
zwn zaO
THE
water
THE
LIVING
4:12 mh
mE
Part Neg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
iakwb os iakOb hos

NO
YOU
GREATER
ARE
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-US
JACOB
WHO
12 Art thou greater than our father Jacob, which gave us the well, and drank thereof himself, and his children, and his cattle?
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
frear phrear
n_ Acc Sg n
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
epien pinO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
GIVES
to-US us autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
WELL
AND
SAME shimself
OUT OF-it
DRANK he-drank
AND
THE
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
qremmata thremma
n_ Nom Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SONS
OF-him
AND
THE the(p)
NURTURED OF-him what-is-nourished(p) auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
4:13 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pinwn pinO
ek ek
Prep
13 Jesus answered and said unto her, Whosoever drinketh of this water shall thirst again:
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-her
EVERY
THE
one-DRINKING one-drinking
OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
udatos toutou diyhsei hudOr houtos dipsaO

n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
palin palin
Adv
OF-THE
water
this
SHALL-BE-THIRSTING AGAIN
AV
John 4
4:14 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
d de
Conj
an an
Part
pih pinO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
udatos ou hudOr hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Gen Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
WHO
YET EVER MAY-BE-DRINKING OUT OF-THE
water
OF-WHICH I which alla to alla ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
SHALL-BE-GIVING
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
diyhsei dipsaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
udwr hudOr
n_ Nom Sg n
14 But whosoever drinketh of the water that I shall give him shall never thirst; but the water that I shall give him shall be in him a well of water springing up into everlasting life.
to-him him o hos

pr Acc Sg n
NOT
NO
SHALL-BE-THIRSTING INTO THE
eon
but
THE
water
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
genhsetai ginomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
phgh pEgE
n_ Nom Sg f
udatos hudOr
n_ Gen Sg n
WHICH
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him him eis eis

Prep
SHALL-BE-BECOMING IN
him
SPRING
OF-water
allomenou hallomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg n
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
LEAPING welling-up
INTO LIFE
eonian
4:15 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
IS-sayING
TOWARD Him
THE
WOMAN
Master ! Lord !
YOU-BE-GIVING to-ME be-you-giving ! me enqade enthade

Adv
this
15 The woman saith unto him, Sir, give me this water, that I thirst not, neither come hither to draw.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
diyw dipsaO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
mhde mEde
Conj
diercwmai dierchomai
antlein antleO
vn Pres Act
THE
water
THAT NO
I-MAY-BE-THIRSTING NO-YET I-AM-THRU-COMING nor-yet I-am-coming-through fwnhson phOneO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
WH WH WH
IN-PLACE-YET TO-BE-BAILING in-this-place to-be-drawing

NA
4:16 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
sou ton andra
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NA
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
16 Jesus saith unto her, Go, call thy husband, and come hither.
He-IS-sayING
NA
to-her
BE-UNDER-LEADING SOUND-YOU be-you-going-away ! summon-you ! enqade enthade

Adv
THE
MAN husband
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai elqe kai erchomai

OF-YOU
AND
YOU-BE-COMING IN-PLACE-YET be-you-coming ! in-this-place h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
4:17 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai eipen kai legO

WH
autw
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
answerED
THE
WOMAN
AND
said
to-Him
NOT
I-AM-HAVING
17 The woman answered and said, I have no husband. Jesus said unto her, Thou hast well said, I have no husband:
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kalws eipas kalOs legO

oti andra hoti anEr

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
MAN husband ecw echO
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
IDEALly
YOU-say
that
MAN husband
NOT
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-HAVING
4:18 pente gar andras esces

pente
ni numeral
gar
Conj
anEr
n_ Acc Pl m
echO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai nun on kai nun hos

Conj Adv pr Acc Sg m
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
FIVE
for
MEN husbands
YOU-have-HAD AND
NOW WHOM
YOU-ARE-HAVING NOT
IS he-is
18 For thou hast had five husbands; and he whom thou now hast is not thy husband: in that saidst thou truly.
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
alhqes eirhkas alEthEs ereO

a_ Acc Sg n vi Perf Act 2 Sg Att
OF-YOU
MAN husband
this
TRUE truly h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
YOU-HAVE-declarED
4:19 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
qewrw theOreO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
19 The woman saith unto him, Sir, I perceive that thou art a prophet.
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
WOMAN
Master ! Lord !
I-AM-beholdING that
BEFORE-AVERer ARE prophet
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
YOU
AV
John 4
4:20 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres hmwn patEr hemeis

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw prosekunhsan kai umeis houtos proskuneO kai humeis

pd Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
IN
THE
mountain
this
worship
AND
YOU(p) ye
20 Our fathers worshipped in this mountain; and ye say, that in Jerusalem is the place where men ought to worship.
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
ierosolumois estin ierosoluma eimi

n_ Dat Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
proskunein proskuneO
vn Pres Act
ARE-sayING
that
IN
JERUSALEM
IS
THE
PLACE
THE-?-where TO-BE-worshipING wheree
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
it-IS-BINDING
4:21 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pisteue pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
oti ercetai hoti erchomai

IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
BE-BELIEVING to-ME be-you-believing ! me orei oros

n_ Dat Sg n
WOMAN !
that
IS-COMING
21 Jesus saith unto her, Woman, believe me, the hour cometh, when ye shall neither in this mountain, nor yet at Jerusalem, worship the Father.
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ote oute hote oute

Adv Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
toutw oute houtos oute

pd Dat Sg n Conj
en en
Prep
ierosolumois ierosoluma
n_ Dat Pl n
HOUR
when
NOT-BESIDES IN neither tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
mountain
this
NOT-BESIDES IN nor
JERUSALEM
proskunhsete proskuneO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-worshipING to-THE the
FATHER
4:22 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
proskuneite o proskuneO hos

ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
proskunoumen o proskuneO hos

YOU(p) ye oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ARE-worshipING
WHICH
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED WE ye-are-aware-of twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
ARE-worshipING
WHICH
22 Ye worship ye know not what: we know what we worship: for salvation is of the Jews.
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
swthria ek sOtEria ek
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
ioudaiwn estin ioudaios eimi

a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
SAVing salvation wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
OUT OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews ote oi hote ho

Adv
IS
4:23 alla ercetai

alla
Conj
erchomai
kai nun estin kai nun eimi

alhqinoi alEthinos
a_ Nom Pl m
t_ Nom Pl m
but
IS-COMING
HOUR
AND
NOW IS
when
THE
TRUE
proskunhtai proskunhsousin tw proskunEtEs proskuneO ho

n_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
pneumati kai alhqeia kai gar pneuma kai alEtheia kai gar
n_ Dat Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj Conj
23 But the hour cometh, and now is, when the true worshippers shall worship the Father in spirit and in truth: for the Father seeketh such to worship him.
worshipers
SHALL-BE-worshipING
to-THE the
FATHER
IN
spirit
AND
TRUTH to-truth
AND also
for
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
toioutous zhtei toioutos zEteO

pd Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
proskunountas auton proskuneO autos

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Sg m
THE
FATHER
such
IS-SEEKING
THE
ones-worshipING ones-worshiping
Him
4:24 pneuma
pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
proskunountas auton proskuneO autos

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
pneumati kai pneuma kai

n_ Dat Sg n Conj
24 God [is] a Spirit: and they that worship him must worship [him] in spirit and in truth.
spirit
THE
God
AND
THE
ones-worshipING ones-worshiping
Him
IN
spirit
AND
alhqeia dei alEtheia deO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
vn Pres Act
TRUTH to-truth
IS-BINDING must autw autos
TO-BE-worshipING
4:25 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oti messias ercetai hoti messias erchomai

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
pp Dat Sg m
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
WOMAN
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
MESSIAH
IS-COMING
25 The woman saith unto him, I know that Messias cometh, which is called Christ: when he is come, he will tell us all things.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
cristos otan christos hotan

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
anaggelei anaggellO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
ANOINTED Christ
when-EVER MAY-BE-COMING that-One whenever that-one
He-SHALL-BE-UP-MESSAGING he-shall-be-informing
AV
John 4
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
apanta hapas
a_ Acc Pl n
to-US us
ALL(emph.) all(emph.)-things auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
4:26 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lalwn laleO
26 Jesus saith unto her, I that speak unto thee am [he].
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
AM
THE
One-TALKING one-speaking
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
to-YOU
4:27 kai epi toutw hlqan

kai
Conj
epi
Prep
houtos
pd Dat Sg m
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

kai eqaumazon kai thaumazO

oti meta hoti meta

Conj Prep
AND
ON
this
COME
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
AND
THEY-MARVELED that
WITH
27 . And upon this came his disciples, and marvelled that he talked with the woman: yet no man said, What seekest thou? or, Why talkest thou with her?
gunaikos elalei gunE laleO

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
mentoi eipen mentoi legO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
zhteis zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
h E
Part
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
WOMAN
He-TALKED he-spoke
NOT-YET-ONE howbeit no-one
said
ANY what ?
YOU-ARE-SEEKING OR
ANY why ?
laleis laleO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
met auths meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg f
YOU-ARE-TALKING WITH her you-are-speaking
4:28 afhken
aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
udrian auths hudria autos

n_ Acc Sg f pp Gen Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
FROM-LETS leaves polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
THEN THE
water-pot
OF-her
THE
WOMAN
AND
she-FROM-CAME INTO THE came-away
28 The woman then left her waterpot, and went her way into the city, and saith to the men,
kai legei kai legO

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
city
AND
IS-sayING
to-THE
humans
WH
4:29 deute
deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
idete eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
anqrwpon os anthrOpos hos

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
29 Come, see a man, which told me all things that ever I did: is not this the Christ?
HITHER hither-ye !
NA
BE-PERCEIVING human be-ye-perceiving ! epoihsa poieO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
WHO
said told o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-ME me
ALL
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
mhti mEti
Part Int
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
as-much-as whatever
I-DO
NO-ANY this not ? ek ek

Prep
IS
THE
ANOINTED Christ pros pros

Prep
4:30 exhlqon
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai hrconto polis kai erchomai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
30 Then they went out of the city, and came unto him.
THEY-OUT-CAME OUT OF-THE they-came-out
city
AND
THEY-CAME came oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
TOWARD Him
4:31 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
metaxu hrwtwn metaxu erOtaO

Adv vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

rabbi rhabbi
Hebrew
31 In the mean while his disciples prayed him, saying, Master, eat.
IN
THE
between meantime
askED
Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
sayING
RABBI
fage esthiO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
BE-EATING be-you-eating !
4:32 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois egw autos egO

pp Dat Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg
brwsin ecw brOsis echO

fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
32 But he said unto them, I have meat to eat that ye know not of.
THE
YET said he-said ouk ou

Part Neg
to-them
FEEDing food
AM-HAVING
TO-BE-EATING WHICH
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED are-aware
AV
John 4
4:33 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai pros mathEtEs pros

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
allhlous mh allElOn mE
pc Acc Pl m Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
hnegken pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
33 Therefore said the disciples one to another, Hath any man brought him [ought] to eat?
said
THEN THE
LEARNers disciples
TOWARD one-another
NO
ANY anyone
CARRIES brings
to-Him him
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-EATING
4:34 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
emon emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
brwma brOma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
MY
FOOD
IS
THAT
34 Jesus saith unto them, My meat is to do the will of him that sent me, and to finish his work.
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai teleiwsw kai teleioO

I-SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
WILL
OF-THE
One-SENDing one-sending
ME
AND
I-SHOULD-BE-maturING I-should-be-perfecting
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-Him
THE
work
4:35 ouc
ou
Part Neg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eti hoti eti

Conj Adv
tetramhnos estin tetramEnos eimi

kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qerismos therismos
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
YOU(p) ye
ARE-sayING
that
STILL FOUR-MONTH four-months umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
it-IS
AND
THE
harvest
ercetai erchomai
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eparate epairO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous umwn ophthalmos humeis

kai kai
Conj
35 Say not ye, There are yet four months, and [then] cometh harvest? behold, I say unto you, Lift up your eyes, and look on the fields; for they are white already to harvest.
IS-COMING
BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-sayING lo ! tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
to-YOU(p) to-ye
ON-LIFT-YE lift-up-ye ! pros pros

Prep
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
qeasasqe theaomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
cwras chOra
n_ Acc Pl f
oti leukai eisin hoti leukos eimi

Conj a_ Nom Pl f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
qerismon hdh therismos EdE

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
gaze-YE gaze-ye-on !
THE
SPACES that countrysides
WHITE
THEY-ARE
TOWARD harvest
ALREADY
4:36 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qerizwn therizO
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai sunagei kai sunagO

karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
THE
one-reapING one-reaping aiwnion ina aiOnios hina

a_ Acc Sg f Conj
HIRE wages o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-GETTING-UP AND is-getting omou homou

Adv
IS-TOGETHER-LEADING FRUIT is-gathering cairh chairO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
INTO
36 And he that reapeth receiveth wages, and gathereth fruit unto life eternal: that both he that soweth and he that reapeth may rejoice together.
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
speirwn speirO
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
LIFE
eonian
THAT THE
one-SOWING one-sowing
LIKEwise MAY-BE-JOYING AND may-be-rejoicing
THE
qerizwn therizO
one-reapING one-reaping
4:37 en
en
Prep
gar toutw o gar houtos ho

Conj pd Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqinos oti allos alEthinos hoti allos

a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
37 And herein is that saying true, One soweth, and another reapeth.
IN
for
this
THE
saying
IS
TRUE
that
other another
IS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
kai allos kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qerizwn therizO
THE
AND
other another
THE
one-reapING one-reaping o hos

pr Acc Sg n
4:38 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apesteila umas apostellO humeis

qerizein therizO
vn Pres Act
ouc ou
Part Neg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
kekopiakate kopiaO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
commission
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-reapING WHICH
NOT
YOU(p) ye autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
HAVE-toilED
38 I sent you to reap that whereon ye bestowed no labour: other men laboured, and ye are entered into their labours.
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
kekopiakasin kai umeis kopiaO kai humeis

vi Perf Act 3 Pl Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kopon kopos
n_ Acc Sg m
eiselhluqate eiserchomai
vi 2Perf Act 2 Pl
others
HAVE-toilED
AND
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
toil
OF-them
HAVE-INTO-COME have-entered
AV
John 4
4:39 ek
ek
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews ekeinhs polloi polis ekeinos polus

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
OUT YET OF-THE
city
that
MANY
BELIEVE
INTO Him
OF-THE
39 And many of the Samaritans of that city believed on him for the saying of the woman, which testified, He told me all that ever I did.
samaritwn dia samaritEs dia

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos marturoushs oti eipen gunE martureO hoti legO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SAMARItans
THRU THE because-of panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
saying word epoihsa poieO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
OF-THE
WOMAN
witnessING testifying
that
He-said he-told
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
to-ME me
ALL
WHICH
I-DO
4:40 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
samaritai hrwtwn samaritEs erOtaO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
meinai menO
vn Aor Act
AS
THEN CAME
TOWARD Him
THE
SAMARItans
THEY-askED Him
TO-REMAIN
40 So when the Samaritans were come unto him, they besought him that he would tarry with them: and he abode there two days.
par para
Prep
autois kai emeinen autos kai menO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ekei duo ekei duo

Adv ni numeral
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
BESIDE them
AND
He-REMAINS there
TWO
DAYS
4:41 kai pollw

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Dat Sg m
pleious polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
episteusan dia pisteuO dia

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
41 And many more believed because of his own word;
AND
to-MANY many te te
Part
MORE
BELIEVE
THRU THE because-of

WH
saying word ouketi ouketi

Adv
OF-Him
4:42 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki elegon gunE legO

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti
NA
oti hoti
Conj
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
shn sos
ps 2 Acc Sg
to-THE
BESIDES WOMAN
THEY-said
that
NOT-STILL THRU THE not-longer because-of
YOU your
lalian pisteuomen lalia pisteuO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Pl
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar akhkoamen gar akouO

Conj vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl Att
kai oidamen kai eidO

Conj vi Perf Act 1 Pl

Conj pd Nom Sg m
42 And said unto the woman, Now we believe, not because of thy saying: for we have heard [him] ourselves, and know that this is indeed the Christ, the Saviour of the world.
TALK speaking estin eimi
WE-ARE-BELIEVING SAME ourselves alhqws o alEthOs ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg m
for
WE-HAVE-HEARD AND we-have-heard-him tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
this
swthr sOtEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
TRUly
THE
SAViour
OF-THE
SYSTEM world ekeiqen eis ekeithen eis

Adv Prep
4:43 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
duo duo
ni numeral
hmeras exhlqen hEmera exerchomai

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
43 . Now after two days he departed thence, and went into Galilee.
after
YET THE
TWO
DAYS
He-OUT-CAME thence he-came-out
INTO THE
GALILEE
4:44 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar ihsous gar iEsous

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
emarturhsen oti profhths martureO hoti prophEtEs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
patridi patris
n_ Dat Sg f
44 For Jesus himself testified, that a prophet hath no honour in his own country.
SAME shimself timhn timE

n_ Acc Sg f
for
JESUS
witnessES testifies
that
BEFORE-AVERer IN prophet
THE
OWN
FATHER[-place] own-country
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
VALUE honor
NOT
IS-HAVING
4:45 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian edexanto auton galilaia dechomai autos

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
galilaioi galilaios
n_ Nom Pl m
when
THEN He-CAME
INTO THE
GALILEE
RECEIVE
Him
THE
GALILEANS
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ewrakotes horaO
vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Att
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
epoihsen en poieO en
n_ Dat Pl n Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
45 Then when he was come into Galilee, the Galilaeans received him, having seen all the things that he did at Jerusalem at the feast: for they also went unto the feast.
ALL
HAVING-SEEN
as-much-as He-DOES whatever eis eis

Prep
IN
JERUSALEM
IN
THE
FESTIVAL AND also
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eorthn heortE
n_ Acc Sg f
they
for
CAME
INTO THE
FESTIVAL
AV
John 4
4:46 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kana kana
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias opou galilaia hopou

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
He-CAME
THEN AGAIN
INTO THE
CANA
OF-THE
GALILEE
THE-?-where He-makES wheree o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
oinon oinos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai hn kai eimi

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
basilikos ou basilikos hos

a_ Nom Sg m pr Gen Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
46 So Jesus came again into Cana of Galilee, where he made the water wine. And there was a certain nobleman, whose son was sick at Capernaum.
THE
water
WINE
AND
WAS there-was
ANY certain
KINGic courtier
OF-WHOM
THE
SON
hsqenei astheneO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
ni proper
was-UN-FIRM IN was-infirm
CAPERNAUM
4:47 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
hkei hEkO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias eis ioudaia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
this-one this-man
HEARing
that
JESUS
IS-ARRIVING
OUT OF-THE
JUDEA
INTO THE
galilaian aphlqen galilaia aperchomai

pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai hrwta kai erOtaO

ina hina
Conj
katabh katabainO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
47 When he heard that Jesus was come out of Judaea into Galilee, he went unto him, and besought him that he would come down, and heal his son: for he was at the point of death.
GALILEE
FROM-CAME came-away
TOWARD Him
AND
askED
THAT He-MAY-BE-DOWN-STEPPING AND he-may-be-descending gar apoqnhskein gar apothnEskO

Conj vn Pres Act
iashtai iaomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
hmellen mellO
SHOULD-BE-HEALING OF-him
THE
SON
he-WAS-ABOUT
for
TO-BE-FROM-DYING to-be-dying mh mE
Part Neg
4:48 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ean ean
Cond
shmeia kai terata sEmeion kai teras

48 Then said Jesus unto him, Except ye see signs and wonders, ye will not believe.
said
THEN THE
JESUS
TOWARD him
IF-EVER NO
SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING NOT
NO
4:49 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basilikos kurie basilikos kurios

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
katabhqi katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
prin prin
Adv
49 The nobleman saith unto him, Sir, come down ere my child die.
IS-sayING
TOWARD Him
THE
KINGic courtier
Master ! Lord !
BE-DOWN-STEPPING ERE be-you-descending !
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paidion mou paidion egO

TO-BE-FROM-DYING THE to-be-dying
little-boy
OF-ME
4:50 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
poreuou poreuomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
YOU-BE-GOING be-you-going ! logw logos
THE
SON
OF-YOU
50 Jesus saith unto him, Go thy way; thy son liveth. And the man believed the word that Jesus had spoken unto him, and he went his way.
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
episteusen o pisteuO ho
anqrwpos tw anthrOpos ho
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
n_ Dat Sg m
IS-LIVING
BELIEVES
THE
human
to-THE the
saying word
WHICH
said
to-him
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eporeueto kai poreuomai

THE
JESUS
AND
he-WENT
4:51 hdh
EdE
Adv
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
katabainontos oi katabainO ho
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
uphnthsan autw hupantaO autos

ALREADY YET OF-him
DOWN-STEPPING descending pais pais

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
SLAVES
OF-him
UNDER-meet meet
to-him him
51 And as he was now going down, his servants met him, and told [him], saying, Thy son liveth.
legontes legO
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
sayING
that
THE
boy
OF-him
IS-LIVING
AV
John 4 - John 5
4:52 epuqeto
punthanomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
par para
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
komyoteron escen kompsoteron echO

he-ASCERTAINED THEN THE
HOUR
BESIDE them
IN
WHICH
NEATer better auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
he-has-HAD
52 Then enquired he of them the hour when he began to amend. And they said unto him, Yesterday at the seventh hour the fever left him.
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oti ecqes hoti echthes

Conj Adv
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
ebdomhn afhken hebdomos aphiEmi

a_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THEY-say
THEN to-him
that
YESTERDAY HOUR at-hour
SEVENth
FROM-LETS leaves
him
THE
puretos puretos
n_ Nom Sg m
fever
NA
4:53 egnw
ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
en en
Prep
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
KNEW
THEN THE
FATHER
that
IN
that
THE
HOUR
IN
WHICH
53 So the father knew that [it was] at the same hour, in the which Jesus said unto him, Thy son liveth: and himself believed, and his whole house.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
said
to-him
THE
JESUS
THE
SON
OF-YOU
IS-LIVING
AND
episteusen autos pisteuO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
olh holos
a_ Nom Sg f
BELIEVES he-believes
he
AND
THE
HOME house
OF-him
WHOLE
4:54 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
palin deuteron shmeion epoihsen o palin deuteros sEmeion poieO ho

Adv a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
elqwn erchomai
this
YET
AGAIN
second
SIGN
DOES
THE
JESUS
COMING
54 This [is] again the second miracle [that] Jesus did, when he was come out of Judaea into Galilee.
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galilaian galilaia
n_ Acc Sg f
OUT OF-THE
JUDEA
INTO THE
GALILEE
AV
John 5
5:1 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
eorth heortE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai anebh ioudaios kai anabainO

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
. After this there was a feast of the Jews; and Jesus went up to Jerusalem.
after
these WAS these-things there-was
FESTIVAL
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
UP-STEPPed went-up
JESUS
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
5:2 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ierosolumois epi th ierosoluma epi ho

n_ Dat Pl n Prep t_ Dat Sg f
probatikh kolumbhqra h probatikos kolumbEthra ho

a_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
IS there-is epilegomenh epilegO

YET IN
THE
JERUSALEM
ON
THE
sheep (gate) sheep-gate
SWIMMing-pool pool
THE
Now there is at Jerusalem by the sheep [market] a pool, which is called in the Hebrew tongue Bethesda, having five porches.
ebraisti bhqzaqa pente stoas ecousa hebraisti bEthzatha pente stoa echO
Adv ni proper ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
one-beING-ON-said one-being-termed
to-HEBREW in-Hebrew
Bethesda
FIVE
porticos
HAVING
5:3 en
en
Prep
tautais katekeito houtos katakeimai

pd Dat Pl f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
asqenountwn astheneO
tuflwn cwlwn tuphlos chOlos

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
IN
these
was-DOWN-LAID was-laid-down
multitude
OF-THE
ones-beING-UN-FIRM OF-BLIND ones-being-infirm of-blind-ones
OF-LAME lame-ones
In these lay a great multitude of impotent folk, of blind, halt, withered, waiting for the moving of the water.
xhrwn xEros
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-DRY withered-ones
5:4
. .
.
. .
.
For an angel went down at a certain season into the pool, and troubled the water: whosoever then first after the troubling of the water stepped in was made whole of whatsoever disease he had.
5:5 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ekei triakonta anthrOpos ekei triakonta

n_ Nom Sg m Adv ni numeral
kai kai
Conj
oktw oktO
ni numeral
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
And a certain man was there, which had an infirmity thirty and eight years.
WAS
YET ANY certain en en

Prep
human
there
THREE-TY thirty
AND
EIGHT
YEARS
ecwn echO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HAVING
IN
THE
UN-FIRMness OF-him infirmity o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
5:6 touton idwn

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
eidO
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
katakeimenon katakeimai
kai gnous kai ginOskO

oti hoti
Conj
this-one this-one polun polus

a_ Acc Sg m
PERCEIVING
THE
JESUS
DOWN-LYING lying-down autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND
KNOWING
that
When Jesus saw him lie, and knew that he had been now a long time [in that case], he saith unto him, Wilt thou be made whole?
hdh EdE
Adv
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ugihs hugiEs
a_ Nom Sg m
much
ALREADY TIME
he-IS-HAVING He-IS-sayING is-saying
to-him
YOU-ARE-WILLING SOUND
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
TO-BE-BECOMING
5:7 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
asqenwn astheneO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
anqrwpon ouk anthrOpos ou

ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
answerED
to-Him him
THE
one-beING-UN-FIRM Master ! one-being-infirm Lord ! to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
human
NOT
I-AM-HAVING
THAT
otan hotan
Conj
taracqh tarassO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
udwr hudOr
n_ Nom Sg n
balh ballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
The impotent man answered him, Sir, I have no man, when the water is troubled, to put me into the pool: but while I am coming, another steppeth down before me.
when-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-DISTURBED THE whenever
water
he-SHOULD-BE-CASTING ME should-be-casting
INTO THE
AV
John 5
kolumbhqran en kolumbEthra en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
ercomai erchomai
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
pro pro
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
SWIMMing-pool pool katabainei katabainO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IN
WHICH
YET AM-COMING
other another
BEFORE ME
IS-DOWN-STEPPING is-descending
5:8 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
krabatton krabattos
n_ Acc Sg m
Jesus saith unto him, Rise, take up thy bed, and walk.
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
YOU-BE-ROUSING LIFT-YOU be-you-rousing ! pick-up-you !
THE
PALLET
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg

OF-YOU
AND
YOU-BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! ugihs hugiEs

a_ Nom Sg m
5:9 kai euqews egeneto

kai
Conj
eutheOs
Adv
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos kai hren anthrOpos kai airO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
immediately
BECAME
SOUND
THE
human
AND
LIFTS picks-up
THE
And immediately the man was made whole, and took up his bed, and walked: and on the same day was the sabbath.
krabatton autou krabattos autos

kai periepatei hn kai peripateO eimi

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
sabbaton en sabbaton en
n_ Nom Sg n Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
PALLET
OF-him
AND
ABOUT-TROD walked
it-WAS
YET SABBATH
IN
that
THE
DAY
5:10 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi tw ioudaios ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
teqerapeumenw therapeuO
sabbaton estin sabbaton eimi

n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews arai airO

vn Aor Act
to-THE
one-HAVING-been-curED SABBATH one-having-been-cured krabatton krabattos

n_ Acc Sg m
NA
it-IS
AND
10 The Jews therefore said unto him that was cured, It is the sabbath day: it is not lawful for thee to carry [thy] bed.
ouk ou
Part Neg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
NOT
it-IS-allowed
WH NA
to-YOU you de de
Conj
TO-LIFT THE to-pick-up apekriqh apokrinomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
PALLET
OF-YOU
5:11
os
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autois o autos ho
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ugih hugiEs
a_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET answerED he-answered eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to-them them ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
ME
SOUND
11 He answered them, He that made me whole, the same said unto me, Take up thy bed, and walk.
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg


that-One that-one
to-ME
said
LIFT-YOU pick-up-you ! tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
THE
PALLET
OF-YOU
AND
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! eipwn legO

12 Then asked they him, What man is that which said unto thee, Take up thy bed, and walk?
5:12 hrwthsan auton

erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos o anthrOpos ho
THEY-ask
him
ANY who ?
IS
THE
human
THE
One-sayING one-saying
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
aron airO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg

to-YOU
LIFT-YOU pick-up-you ! de de
Conj
AND
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! ouk ou

Part Neg
5:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iaqeis iaomai
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
THE
YET one-BEING-HEALED NOT one-being-healed exeneusen oclou ekneuO ochlos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg m
HAD-PERCEIVED ANY who ? en en

Prep
He-IS
THE
for
13 And he that was healed wist not who it was: for Jesus had conveyed himself away, a multitude being in [that] place.
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ontos eimi
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
JESUS
OUT-NODS evades
OF-THRONG BEING
WH
IN
NA
THE
PLACE
5:14 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
euriskei heuriskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
after
these IS-FINDING these-things
him
THE
JESUS
IN
THE
14 Afterward Jesus findeth him in the temple, and said unto him, Behold, thou art made whole: sin no more, lest a worse thing come unto thee.
AV
John 5
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ugihs hugiEs
a_ Nom Sg m
gegonas ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 2 Sg
mhketi mEketi
Adv
SACRED-place AND sanctuary amartane hamartanO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
He-said said mh mE
Part Neg
to-him
BE-PERCEIVING SOUND lo ! soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
YOU-HAVE-BECOME NO-NOT-STILL by-no-means-longer
ina hina
Conj
ceiron cheirOn
a_ Nom Sg n
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
YOU-BE-missING THAT NO be-you-sinning !
WORSE
to-YOU
ANY something
WH
MAY-BE-BECOMING
NA
5:15 aphlqen
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos kai anthrOpos kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
eipen
anhggeilen anaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois oti ioudaios hoti

a_ Dat Pl m Conj
15 The man departed, and told the Jews that it was Jesus, which had made him whole.
FROM-CAME came-away ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
human
AND
UP-MESSAGES informs auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-THE the
JUDA-ans Jews
that
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ugih hugiEs
a_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
IS
THE
One-making one-making ediwkon oi diOkO ho

vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
him
SOUND
5:16 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ioudaioi ton ioudaios ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
oti tauta hoti houtos

Conj pd Acc Pl n
AND
THRU this because-of en en

Prep
CHASED persecuted
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
JESUS
that
these these-things
16 And therefore did the Jews persecute Jesus, and sought to slay him, because he had done these things on the sabbath day.
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
sabbatw sabbaton
n_ Dat Sg n
He-DID
IN
SABBATH
NA
5:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apekrinato autois o apokrinomai autos ho

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ews heOs
Conj
17 . But Jesus answered them, My Father worketh hitherto, and I work.
THE
YET
JESUS
answers
to-them them
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
TILL
arti arti
Adv
ergazetai ergazomai
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
ergazomai ergazomai
at-PRESENT IS-workING
AND-I
AM-workING
5:18 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
mallon ezhtoun mallon zEteO

Adv vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi apokteinai oti ioudaios apokteinO hoti

a_ Nom Pl m vn Aor Act Conj
THRU this because-of ou ou

Part Neg
THEN RATHER the-more to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
SOUGHT
Him
THE
JUDA-ans Jews idion idios

a_ Acc Sg m
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
that
monon eluen monon luO

sabbaton alla kai patera sabbaton alla kai patEr

n_ Acc Sg n Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
18 Therefore the Jews sought the more to kill him, because he not only had broken the sabbath, but said also that God was his Father, making himself equal with God.
NOT
ONLY
He-LOOSED he-annulled
THE
SABBATH
but
AND also
FATHER
OWN
He-said said
THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ison isos
a_ Acc Sg m
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
poiwn poieO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
God
EQUAL
Self himself
makING
WH WH NA
to-THE
God
NA
5:19 apekrinato oun

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ihsous
oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai elegen kai legO

autois amhn autos amEn

pp Dat Pl m Hebrew
answers
THEN
THE
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
AMEN verily eautou heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg m
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
af apo
Prep
19 Then answered Jesus and said unto them, Verily, verily, I say unto you, The Son can do nothing of himself, but what he seeth the Father do: for what things soever he doeth, these also doeth the Son likewise.
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye mh mE
Part Neg
NOT
IS-ABLE can bleph blepO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
SON
TO-BE-DOING FROM Self himself poiounta poieO

ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
NOT-YET-ONE IF-EVER NO anything gar an gar an

Conj Part
ANY what ?
MAY-BE-lookING THE he-may-be-observing tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
FATHER
DOING
WHICH which(p)
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
poih poieO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
omoiws poiei homoiOs poieO

for
EVER that-One that-one
MAY-BE-DOING these AND these-things also
THE
SON
LIKE-AS likewise
IS-DOING
AV
John 5
5:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar pathr gar patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
filei phileO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
deiknusin autw deiknumi autos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
THE
for
FATHER
IS-beING-FOND THE is-being-fond-of kai meizona kai mega

Conj a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
SON
AND
ALL
IS-SHOWING
to-Him him erga ergon

n_ Acc Pl n
20 For the Father loveth the Son, and sheweth him all things that himself doeth: and he will shew him greater works than these, that ye may marvel.
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
toutwn deixei houtos deiknumi

pd Gen Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WHICH
He
IS-DOING
AND
GREATer
OF-these
He-SHALL-BE-SHOWING to-Him him
ACTS works
ina hina
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
qaumazhte thaumazO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
THAT YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-MARVELING
5:21 wsper gar o

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
egeirei egeirO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
nekrous kai zwopoiei nekros kai zOopoieO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
outws houtOs
Adv
AS-EVEN even-as kai o kai ho

Conj
for
THE
FATHER
IS-ROUSING
THE
DEAD-ones dead-ones
AND
IS-makING-LIVE thus is-vivifying
21 For as the Father raiseth up the dead, and quickeneth [them]; even so the Son quickeneth whom he will.
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
zwopoiei zOopoieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
AND also
THE
SON
WHOM
IS-WILLING he-is-willing krinei krinO
IS-makING-LIVE is-vivifying oudena oudeis

a_ Acc Sg m
5:22 oude
oude
Adv
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
krisin krisis
n_ Acc Sg f
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
22 For the Father judgeth no man, but hath committed all judgment unto the Son:
NOT-YET for neither dedwken tw didOmi ho

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
THE
FATHER
IS-JUDGING
NOT-YET-ONE but anyone
THE
JUDGing
EVERY all
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
t_ Dat Sg m
HAS-GIVEN
to-THE
SON
5:23 ina
hina
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
timwsin timaO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
timwsin timaO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THAT ALL
MAY-BE-VALUING THE may-be-honoring mh mE

Part Neg
SON
according-AS THEY-ARE-VALUING THE they-are-honoring uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
timwn timaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
tima timaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
23 That all [men] should honour the Son, even as they honour the Father. He that honoureth not the Son honoureth not the Father which hath sent him.
FATHER
THE-one the-one
NO
VALUING honoring auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE
SON
NOT
THE
FATHER
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
THE
Him
5:24 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
akouwn akouO
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
THE-one the-one me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
saying word zwhn zOE
OF-ME
HEARING
kai pisteuwn kai pisteuO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pemyanti pempO
vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
aiwnion kai eis aiOnios kai eis

a_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep
24 Verily, verily, I say unto you, He that heareth my word, and believeth on him that sent me, hath everlasting life, and shall not come into condemnation; but is passed from death unto life.
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
BELIEVING
to-THE the ercetai erchomai
ME
IS-HAVING
LIFE
eonian
AND
INTO
krisin krisis
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
alla metabebhken alla metabainO

ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou eis thanatos eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
JUDGing
NOT
IS-COMING
but
HAS-after-STEPPED OUT OF-THE has-proceeded
DEATH
INTO THE
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
LIFE
5:25 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
kai nun estin kai nun eimi

ote hote
Adv
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
IS-COMING
HOUR
AND
NOW IS
when
25 Verily, verily, I say unto you, The hour is coming, and now is, when the dead shall hear the voice of the Son of God: and they that hear shall
AV
John 5
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
akousousin akouO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
live.
THE
DEAD-ones SHALL-BE-HEARING OF-THE dead-ones the akousantes zhsousin akouO zaO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
SOUND voice
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
God
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing
SHALL-BE-LIVING
5:26 wsper gar o

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
outws kai tw houtOs kai ho

Adv Conj t_ Dat Sg m
26 For as the Father hath life in himself; so hath he given to the Son to have life in himself;
AS-EVEN even-as uiw huios

n_ Dat Sg m
for
THE
FATHER
IS-HAVING
LIFE
IN
Self himself
thus
AND also
to-THE
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
SON
He-GIVES
LIFE
TO-BE-HAVING IN
Self himself poiein poieO

vn Pres Act
5:27 kai exousian edwken

kai
Conj
exousia
n_ Acc Sg f
didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
krisin krisis
n_ Acc Sg f
oti hoti
Conj
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
authority
He-GIVES
to-Him him
JUDGing
TO-BE-DOING that SON seeing-that
OF-human
27 And hath given him authority to execute judgment also, because he is the Son of man.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
He-IS
5:28 mh
mE
Part Neg
qaumazete thaumazO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n

wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
NO
BE-MARVELING this be-ye-marveling-at ! en en

Prep
that
IS-COMING
HOUR
IN
WHICH
ALL
28 Marvel not at this: for the hour is coming, in the which all that are in the graves shall hear his voice,
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
mnhmeiois mnEmeion
n_ Dat Pl n
akousousin akouO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE-ones the-ones
IN
THE
memorial-vaults SHALL-BE-HEARING OF-THE tombs the oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
SOUND voice
OF-Him
5:29 kai ekporeusontai

kai
Conj
ekporeuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
poihsantes poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
anastasin anastasis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-GOING THE-ones shall-be-going-out the-ones oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
NA
THE
GOOD good(p) praxantes prassO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
DOing
INTO UP-STANDing resurrection anastasin krisews anastasis krisis

29 And shall come forth; they that have done good, unto the resurrection of life; and they that have done evil, unto the resurrection of damnation.
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
faula phaulos
a_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
OF-LIFE
THE-ones the-ones dunamai dunamai
YET
THE
FOUL PRACTISing bad-things committing poiein poieO

vn Pres Act
INTO UP-STANDing resurrection emautou ouden emautou oudeis

pf 1 Gen Sg m a_ Acc Sg n
OF-JUDGing
5:30 ou
ou
Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ap apo
Prep
kaqws kathOs
Adv
NOT
AM-ABLE can krinw krinO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
TO-BE-DOING FROM MYself
NOT-YET-ONE according-AS anything dikaia dikaios

a_ Nom Sg f
akouw akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
krisis krisis
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
30 I can of mine own self do nothing: as I hear, I judge: and my judgment is just; because I seek not mine own will, but the will of the Father which hath sent me.
I-AM-HEARING I-AM-JUDGING AND
THE
JUDGing
THE
MY
JUST
IS
that
ou ou
Part Neg
zhtw zEteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qelhma to thelEma ho
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
alla to alla ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n

NOT
I-AM-SEEKING THE
WILL
THE
MY
but
THE
WILL
OF-THE
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
5:31 ean
ean
Cond
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
marturw martureO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
emautou h emautou ho
pf 1 Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
marturia mou marturia egO

ouk ou
Part Neg
31 . If I bear witness of myself, my witness is not true.
IF-EVER I
MAY-BE-witnessING ABOUT MYself may-be-testifying concerning
THE
witness testimony
OF-ME
NOT
AV
John 5
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg f
IS
TRUE
5:32 allos
allos
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
marturwn martureO
peri peri
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai oida kai eidO

oti hoti
Conj
other another alhqhs alEthEs

a_ Nom Sg f
IS there-is h ho
THE the-one
witnessING testifying
ABOUT ME concerning marturei martureO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware
32 There is another that beareth witness of me; and I know that the witness which he witnesseth of me is true.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
marturia hn marturia hos

n_ Nom Sg f pr Acc Sg f
peri peri
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
t_ Nom Sg f
TRUE
IS
THE
witness testimony pros pros

Prep
WHICH
He-IS-witnessING ABOUT ME he-is-testifying concerning alhqeia alEtheia

n_ Dat Sg f
33 Ye sent unto John, and he bare witness unto the truth.
5:33 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
apestalkate apostellO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
iwannhn kai memarturhken th iOannEs kai martureO ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
YOU(p) ye
HAVE-commissionED TOWARD JOHN have-dispatched de de

Conj
AND
he-HAS-witnessED he-has-testified
to-THE
TRUTH
5:34 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
para para
Prep
anqrwpou thn anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
marturian lambanw marturia lambanO

alla tauta alla houtos

Conj pd Acc Pl n
34 But I receive not testimony from man: but these things I say, that ye might be saved.
YET NOT
BESIDE human
THE
witness testimony
AM-GETTING-UP but am-getting
these these-things
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
swqhte sOzO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
I-AM-sayING
THAT YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED
5:35 ekeinos hn
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lucnos luchnos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kaiomenos kaiO
kai fainwn kai phainO

that-one that-one umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
WAS
THE
LAMP
THE
BURNING
AND
APPEARING
35 He was a burning and a shining light: and ye were willing for a season to rejoice in his light.
de de
Conj
hqelhsate agalliaqhnai pros thelO agalliaO pros

vi Aor Act 2 Pl vn Aor pasD Prep
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fwti phOs
n_ Dat Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
YET WILL
TO-BE-exultED to-exult ecw echO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
TOWARD HOUR
IN
THE
LIGHT
OF-it of-him gar gar

Conj
36 But I have greater witness than [that] of John: for the works which the Father hath given me to finish, the same works that I do, bear witness of me, that the Father hath sent me.
5:36 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marturian meizw marturia mega

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f Cmp
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iwannou ta iOannEs ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl n
YET AM-HAVING
THE
witness testimony o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
GREATer
OF-THE
JOHN
THE
for
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
dedwken moi didOmi egO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
teleiwsw teleioO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
ACTS works auta autos

pp Nom Pl n
WHICH
HAS-GIVEN
to-ME me a hos
pr Acc Pl n
THE
FATHER
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-maturING them I-should-be-perfecting peri peri

Prep
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
marturei martureO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
they THE themselves pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
ACTS works
WHICH
I-AM-DOING
ABOUT ME concerning
that
THE
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
FATHER
ME
HAS-commissionED
5:37 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
memarturhken peri martureO peri

AND
THE
ME
FATHER
that-One that-one
HAS-witnessED has-testified oute oute

Conj
ABOUT concerning eidos eidos

n_ Acc Sg n
37 And the Father himself, which hath sent me, hath borne witness of me. Ye have neither heard his voice at any time, nor seen his shape.
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oute oute
Conj

pwpote akhkoate pOpote akouO

Adv vi 2Perf Act 2 Pl Att
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ME
NOT-BESIDES SOUND neither voice
OF-Him
?-AS-?-when YE-HAVE-HEARD NOT-BESIDES PERCEPtion OF-Him ever nor
ewrakate horaO
YE-HAVE-SEEN
AV
John 5
5:38 kai ton

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
menonta menO
oti hoti
Conj
AND
THE
saying word
OF-Him
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING IN
YOU(p) ye
38 And ye have not his word abiding in you: for whom he hath sent, him ye believe not.
REMAINING
that
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
apesteilen ekeinos apostellO ekeinos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pd Nom Sg m
toutw umeis houtos humeis

pd Dat Sg m pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
WHOM
He-commissions commissions
that-One that-one tas ho
to-this-One this-one
YOU(p) ye
NOT
ARE-BELIEVING
5:39 eraunate
ereunaO
grafas oti umeis graphE hoti humeis

n_ Acc Pl f Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
dokeite dokeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
autais zwhn autos zOE

pp Dat Pl f n_ Acc Sg f
t_ Acc Pl f
YE-ARE-SEARCHING
THE
WRITings scriptures
that
YOU(p) ye ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
ARE-SEEMING IN are-supposing
them
LIFE
39 Search the scriptures; for in them ye think ye have eternal life: and they are they which testify of me.
aiwnion ecein aiOnios echO

a_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act
kai ekeinai eisin kai ekeinos eimi

Conj pd Nom Pl f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
marturousai peri martureO peri

vp Pres Act Nom Pl f Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eonian
TO-BE-HAVING AND
those
ARE
THE
ones-witnessING ones-testifying me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
ABOUT ME concerning echte echO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
40 And ye will not come to me, that ye might have life.
5:40 kai ou
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
ina hina
Conj
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-WILLING TO-BE-COMING TOWARD ME
THAT LIFE
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING
5:41 doxan
doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
para para
Prep
anqrwpwn ou anthrOpos ou
lambanw lambanO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
41 I receive not honour from men.
esteem glory
BESIDE humans
NOT
I-AM-GETTING-UP I-am-getting agaphn tou agapE ho

5:42 alla egnwka

alla
Conj
ginOskO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oti thn hoti ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
but
I-HAVE-KNOWN YOU(p) ye
42 But I know you, that ye have not the love of God in you.
that
THE
LOVE
OF-THE
God
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING
en en
Prep
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
IN
selves yourselves elhluqa erchomai

vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
5:43 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
HAVE-COME
IN
THE
NAME
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
NOT
43 I am come in my Father's name, and ye receive me not: if another shall come in his own name, him ye will receive.
lambanete lambanO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ean ean
Cond
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
onomati tw onoma ho
YE-ARE-GETTING-[UP] ME ye-are-getting idiw idios

a_ Dat Sg n
IF-EVER other another
MAY-BE-COMING IN
THE
NAME
to-THE the
ekeinon lhmyesqe ekeinos lambanO

pd Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 2 Pl
OWN
that-one that-one
YE-SHALL-BE-GETTING
5:44 pws dunasqe

pOs
Adv Int
dunamai
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
pisteusai doxan pisteuO doxa

para para
Prep
allhlwn lambanontes kai allElOn lambanO kai

pc Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj
how how ? thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ARE-ABLE can thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YOU(p) ye para para

Prep
TO-BELIEVE
esteem glory
WH
BESIDE one-another
NA
GETTING-UP getting ou ou
Part Neg
AND
44 How can ye believe, which receive honour one of another, and seek not the honour that [cometh] from God only?
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
monou monos
a_ Gen Sg m
qeou
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
esteem glory
THE
BESIDE THE
ONLY alone
God
NOT
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-SEEKING are-seeking
5:45 mh
mE
Part Neg
dokeite dokeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
kathgorhsw katEgoreO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
NO
YE-ARE-SEEMING that be-ye-supposing !
SHALL-BE-accusING OF-YOU(p) TOWARD THE ye
FATHER
45 Do not think that I will accuse you to the Father: there is [one] that accuseth you, [even] Moses, in whom ye trust.
AV
John 5 - John 6
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kathgorwn katEgoreO
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
hlpikate elpizO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
IS
THE
one-accusING one-accusing
OF-YOU(p) MOSES ye
INTO WHOM
YOU(p) ye peri peri

Prep
HAVE-EXPECTED have-relied-on gar emou gar egO

Conj pp 1 Gen Sg
46 For had ye believed Moses, ye would have believed me: for he wrote of me.
5:46 ei
ei
Cond
gar episteuete mwusei episteuete an gar pisteuO mOusEs pisteuO an

Conj vi impf Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 2 Pl Part
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
IF
for
YE-BELIEVED
to-MOSES Moses
YE-BELIEVED
EVER to-ME me
ABOUT for concerning
OF-ME me
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
egrayen graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
that-one that-one
WRITES
5:47 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ekeinou grammasin ou ekeinos gramma ou

pd Gen Sg m n_ Dat Pl n Part Neg
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pws tois pOs ho

Adv Int t_ Dat Pl n
emois emos
ps 1 Dat Pl
IF
YET to-THE the
OF-that-one of-that-one
WRITings
NOT
YE-ARE-BELIEVING how how ?
to-THE the
MY(p)
47 But if ye believe not his writings, how shall ye believe my words?
rhmasin pisteusete rhEma pisteuO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Act 2 Pl
declarations YE-SHALL-BE-BELIEVING
AV
John 6
6:1 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
peran peran
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs ths thalassa ho

. After these things Jesus went over the sea of Galilee, which is [the sea] of Tiberias.
after
these FROM-CAME these-things came-away
THE
JESUS
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
SEA
OF-THE
galilaias ths galilaia ho

tiberiados tiberias
n_ Gen Sg f
GALILEE
OF-THE
TIBERIAS
6:2 hkolouqei de
akoloutheO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
oti eqewroun ta hoti theOreO ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n

followED
YET to-Him him epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
THRONG
MANY vast
that
THEY-beheld
THE
SIGNS
WHICH
And a great multitude followed him, because they saw his miracles which he did on them that were diseased.
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
asqenountwn astheneO
He-DID
ON
THE
ones-beING-UN-FIRM ones-being-infirm eis eis

Prep
6:3 anhlqen
anerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ekei ekaqhto kai ekei kathEmai

Conj Adv vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
And Jesus went up into a mountain, and there he sat with his disciples.
UP-CAME came-up
YET INTO THE
mountain
JESUS
AND
there
He-sat
WITH
THE

LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
6:4 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
eggus to eggus ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
And the passover, a feast of the Jews, was nigh.
WAS
YET NEAR
THE
PASSOVER THE
FESTIVAL
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews oti hoti

Conj
5
6:5 eparas
epairO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous o ophthalmos ho
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai qeasamenos kai theaomai

ON-LIFTing lifting-up polus polus

a_ Nom Sg m
THEN THE
VIEWers eyes pros pros

Prep
THE
JESUS
AND
gazing
that
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
ercetai erchomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
filippon philippos
n_ Acc Sg m
When Jesus then lifted up [his] eyes, and saw a great company come unto him, he saith unto Philip, Whence shall we buy bread, that these may eat?
MANY vast poqen pothen

Adv Int
THRONG
IS-COMING
TOWARD Him
He-IS-sayING is-saying fagwsin esthiO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
TOWARD Philip
agoraswmen agorazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
artous ina artos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
?-WHICH-PLACE WE-SHOULD-BE-BUYING BREADS whence ? bread(p)
THAT MAY-BE-EATING these
6:6 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
peirazwn peirazO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar hdei gar eidO

Conj vi Plup Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
And this he said to prove him: for he himself knew what he would do.
this
YET He-said
tryING
him
He
for
HAD-PERCEIVED ANY was-aware what ?
emellen mellO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
He-WAS-ABOUT TO-BE-DOING
NA
6:7 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filippos diakosiwn philippos diakosioi

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl n
dhnariwn artoi dEnarion artos

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
answerED
to-Him him autois ina autos hina

pp Dat Pl m Conj
THE
Philip
OF-TWO-hundred DENARII
NA
BREADS bread(p)
NOT
Philip answered him, Two hundred pennyworth of bread is not sufficient for them, that every one of them may take a little.
arkousin arkeO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ekastos bracu hekastos brachus

a_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
labh lambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ARE-SUFFICING to-them are-being-sufficient
THAT EACH
BIT
ANY some maqhtwn autou mathEtEs autos

n_ Gen Pl m
MAY-BE-GETTING
6:8 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
andreas o andreas ho
pp Gen Sg m
One of his disciples, Andrew, Simon Peter's brother, saith unto him,
IS-sayING
to-Him
ONE
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
ANDREW
THE
AV
John 6
adelfos simwnos petrou adelphos simOn petros

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
brother
OF-SIMON
Peter
6:9 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
paidarion wde os paidarion hOde hos

n_ Nom Sg n Adv pr Nom Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg

kriqinous kai krithinos kai

a_ Acc Pl m Conj
IS there-is duo duo

ni numeral
lad
here
WHO
IS-HAVING
FIVE
BREADS OF-barley cakes-of-bread of-barley(p) tosoutous tosoutos

pd Acc Pl m
AND
There is a lad here, which hath five barley loaves, and two small fishes: but what are they among so many?
oyaria opsarion
n_ Acc Pl n
alla tauta alla houtos

Conj pd Nom Pl n
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
TWO
PROVISIONS but food-fishes o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
these
ANY what ?
IS
INTO so-many
6:10 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
poihsate tous poieO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
anqrwpous anapesein anthrOpos anapiptO

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
said
THE
JESUS
make make-ye ! topw topos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
humans
TO-BE-UP-FALLING WAS to-be-leaning-back there-was oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
10 And Jesus said, Make the men sit down. Now there was much grass in the place. So the men sat down, in number about five thousand.
de de
Conj
cortos chortos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anepesan oun anapiptO oun

andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
YET FODDER grass ariqmon ws arithmos hOs

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
MANY much
IN
THE
PLACE
UP-FALL lean-back
THEN THE
MEN
THE
pentakiscilioi pentakischilioi
n_ Nom Pl m
NUMBER
AS FIVE-times-THOUSAND about five-thousand oun oun

Conj
6:11 elaben
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
artous o artos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eucaristhsas diedwken kai eucharisteO diadidOmi

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
GOT took tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THEN THE
BREADS bread(p)
THE
JESUS
AND
thanking giving-thanks oson hosos

pk Acc Sg n
He-THRU-GIVES he-distributes-it hqelon thelO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
anakeimenois anakeimai
omoiws kai ek homoiOs kai ek

Adv Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oyariwn opsarion
n_ Gen Pl n
11 And Jesus took the loaves; and when he had given thanks, he distributed to the disciples, and the disciples to them that were set down; and likewise of the fishes as much as they would.
to-THE
ones-UP-LYING ones-lying-back
LIKE-AS likewise legei legO
AND also
OUT OF-THE
PROVISIONS as-much-as THEY-WILLED food-fishes sunagagete sunagO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
12 When they were filled, he said unto his disciples, Gather up the fragments that remain, that nothing be lost.
6:12 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
eneplhsqhsan emplEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AS
YET THEY-ARE-IN-FILLED He-IS-sayING they-are-filled perisseusanta klasmata ina perisseuO klasma hina
vp Aor Act Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n Conj
to-THE
LEARNers disciples ti tis

px Acc Sg n
OF-Him
YE-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING be-ye-gathering !
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
apolhtai apollumi
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
THE
exceeding superfluous
BREAKS fragments oun oun

Conj
THAT NO
ANY some
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED should-be-perishing twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
13 Therefore they gathered [them] together, and filled twelve baskets with the fragments of the five barley loaves, which remained over and above unto them that had eaten.
6:13 sunhgagon
sunagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai egemisan kai gemizO

dwdeka kofinous klasmatwn ek dOdeka kophinos klasma ek

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl n Prep
THEY-TOGETHER-LED THEN AND they-gathered-them pente artwn pente artos

ni numeral n_ Gen Pl m
THEY-REPLETize TWO-TEN cram twelve
PANNIERS
OUT OF-THE
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kriqinwn a krithinos hos

a_ Gen Pl m pr Acc Pl n
eperisseusan tois perisseuO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
bebrwkosin bibrOskO
FIVE
BREADS OF-THE cakes-of-bread oun oun

Conj
barley barley(p)
WHICH
THEY-exceed are-superfluous
WH WH
to-THE
WH
ones-HAVING-FED ones-having-fed
NA
6:14 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi idontes anthrOpos eidO

a epoihsen shmeia
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
NA
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
NA
THEN humans
PERCEIVING
WHICH
He-DOES
14 Then those men, when they had seen the miracle that Jesus did, said, This is of a truth that prophet that should come into the world.
shmeion sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl

Conj pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqws o alEthOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SIGN
said
that
this
IS
TRUly
THE
BEFORE-AVERer THE prophet
ercomenos erchomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
AV
John 6
6:15 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
gnous ginOskO
oti mellousin hoti mellO

ercesqai erchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
kai arpazein kai harpazO

Conj vn Pres Act
JESUS
THEN KNOWING
that
THEY-ARE-ABOUT TO-BE-COMING they-are-being-about
AND
TO-BE-SNATCHING
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
poihswsin poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
basilea anecwrhsen palin eis basileus anachOreO palin eis

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
15 . When Jesus therefore perceived that they would come and take him by force, to make him a king, he departed again into a mountain himself alone.
Him
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-makING KING they-should-be-making-him monos monos

a_ Nom Sg m
He-UP-SPACES he-retires
AGAIN
INTO THE
mountain
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
SAME shimself
ONLY alone oyia opsios

a_ Nom Sg f
6:16 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
katebhsan katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
16 And when even was [now] come, his disciples went down unto the sea,
AS
YET evening
it-BECAME
DOWN-STEPPed THE descended
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
ON
THE
qalassan thalassa
n_ Acc Sg f
SEA
6:17 kai embantes

kai
Conj
embainO
eis eis
Prep
ploion hrconto ploion erchomai

n_ Acc Sg n vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
peran peran
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs eis thalassa eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
AND
IN-STEPPing stepping-into
INTO FLOATer ship hdh EdE

Adv
THEY-CAME
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
SEA
INTO
17 And entered into a ship, and went over the sea toward Capernaum. And it was now dark, and Jesus was not come to them.
kafarnaoum kai skotia kapharnaoum kai skotia

ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg f
egegonei ginomai
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
kai oupw kai oupO

Conj Adv
elhluqei pros erchomai pros

vi Plup Act 3 Sg Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
CAPERNAUM
AND
DARKness
ALREADY HAD-BECOME AND
NOT-as-yet HAD-COME
TOWARD them
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
JESUS
6:18 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
te te
Part
qalassa anemou thalassa anemos

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
megalou pneontos mega pneO

a_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
diegeireto diegeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
18 And the sea arose by reason of a great wind that blew.
THE
BESIDES SEA
OF-WIND
GREAT
BLOWING of-blowing pente h pente E

ni numeral Part
was-THRU-ROUSED was-roused triakonta qewrousin triakonta theOreO

ni numeral vi Pres Act 3 Pl
19 So when they had rowed about five and twenty or thirty furlongs, they see Jesus walking on the sea, and drawing nigh unto the ship: and they were afraid.
6:19 elhlakotes
elaunO
oun oun
Conj
ws hOs
Adv
stadious eikosi stadion eikosi

n_ Acc Pl n n_ Nom Pl m
HAVING-DRIVEN having-rowed ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THEN AS stadia about
TWENTY
FIVE
OR
THREE-TY thirty
THEY-ARE-beholdING
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
peripatounta epi ths peripateO epi ho

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs kai eggus tou thalassa kai eggus ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
JESUS
ON
THE
SEA
AND
NEAR
OF-THE the
FLOATer ship
ginomenon ginomai

AND
THEY-WERE-afraid
6:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg

eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
fobeisqe phobeO
20 But he saith unto them, It is I; be not afraid.
THE
YET IS-sayING he-is-saying oun oun

Conj
to-them
AM
NO
YE-BE-FEARING be-ye-fearing !
21 Then they willingly received him into the ship: and immediately the ship was at the land whither they went.
6:21 hqelon
thelO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai euqews egeneto ploion kai eutheOs ginomai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THEY-WILLED THEN TO-BE-GETTING Him to-be-taking to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
INTO THE
FLOATer ship uphgon hupagO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
immediately
BECAME came-to-be
ploion ploion
n_ Nom Sg n
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
THE
FLOATer ship
ON
THE
LAND
INTO WHICH
THEY-UNDER-LED they-went-away
AV
John 6
6:22 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
esthkws histEmi
peran peran
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
to-THE
ON-MORROW THE
THRONG
THE
HAVING-STOOD standing ouk ou

Part Neg
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
qalasshs eidon thalassa eidO

n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti ploiarion allo hoti ploiarion allos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei ei ekei ei
Adv Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
SEA
PERCEIVED
that
FLOATer (dim) boat
other
NOT
WAS
there
IF
NO
ONE
22 . The day following, when the people which stood on the other side of the sea saw that there was none other boat there, save that one whereinto his disciples were entered, and that Jesus went not with his disciples into the boat, but [that] his disciples were gone away alone;
kai oti ou kai hoti ou

Conj Conj Part Neg
suneishlqen suneiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

o ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
AND
that
NOT
TOGETHER-INTO-CAME to-THE entered-togetherwith the oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
THE
JESUS
INTO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion alla monoi ploion alla monos

n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Nom Pl m

aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
FLOATer ship
but
ONLY alone
WH
THE
NA
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
FROM-CAME came-away topou topos

n_ Gen Sg m
23 (Howbeit there came other boats from Tiberias nigh unto the place where they did eat bread, after that the Lord had given thanks:)
6:23 alla hlqen

alla
Conj
ploia
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ploiaria ploiarion
n_ Nom Pl n
ek ek
Prep
tiberiados eggus tou tiberias eggus ho

n_ Gen Sg f Adv t_ Gen Sg m
but
CAME
FLOATers (dim) boats ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OUT OF-TIBERIAS
NEAR
OF-THE the
PLACE
opou hopou
Adv
efagon esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
eucaristhsantos tou eucharisteO ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
THE-?-where THEY-ATE wheree
THE
BREAD
OF-thanking
OF-THE the ouk ou

Part Neg
Master Lord estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
6:24 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ekei oude ekei oude

Adv Adv
when
THEN PERCEIVED
THE
THRONG
that
JESUS
NOT
IS
there
NOT-YET neither eis eis

Prep
24 When the people therefore saw that Jesus was not there, neither his disciples, they also took shipping, and came to Capernaum, seeking for Jesus.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

enebhsan autoi embainO autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ploiaria ploiarion
n_ Acc Pl n

THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
IN-STEPPed stepped-into ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
they
INTO THE
FLOATers (dim) AND boats
THEY-CAME came
INTO
kafarnaoum zhtountes kapharnaoum zEteO

ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
CAPERNAUM
SEEKING
THE
JESUS
6:25 kai eurontes

kai
Conj
heuriskO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
peran peran
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs eipon thalassa legO

n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
rabbi rhabbi
Hebrew
AND
FINDING
Him
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
SEA
THEY-said
to-Him
RABBI
25 And when they had found him on the other side of the sea, they said unto him, Rabbi, when camest thou hither?
pote wde gegonas pote hOde ginomai

Part Int Adv vi 2Perf Act 2 Sg
?-when when ?
here
YOU-HAVE-BECOME
6:26 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO


umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
answerED
to-them them me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
JESUS
AND
said
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING

t_ Gen Pl m
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ouc ou
Part Neg
oti eidete hoti eidO

shmeia all oti efagete sEmeion alla hoti esthiO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ek ek
Prep
26 Jesus answered them and said, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Ye seek me, not because ye saw the miracles, but because ye did eat of the loaves, and were filled.
YE-ARE-SEEKING ME
NOT
that
YE-PERCEIVED SIGNS
but
that
YE-ATE
OUT OF-THE
artwn artos
n_ Gen Pl m
kai ecortasqhte kai chortazO

BREADS bread(p)
AND
ARE-satisfiED
6:27 ergazesqe
ergazomai
mh mE
Part Neg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
brwsin thn brOsis ho

apollumenhn alla thn apollumi alla ho

vp Pres Mid Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
brwsin brOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
BE-YE-ACTING be-ye-working !
NO
THE for-the
FEEDing food
THE
beING-destroyED perishing
but
THE for-the
FEEDing food
27 Labour not for the meat which perisheth, but for that meat which endureth unto everlasting life, which the Son of man shall give unto you: for
AV
John 6
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
menousan menO
eis eis
Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion hn aiOnios hos

a_ Acc Sg f pr Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
him hath sealed.
God
the
Father
THE
REMAINING
INTO LIFE
eonian
WHICH
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
touton gar o houtos gar ho

pd Acc Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
esfragisen o sphragizO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
SHALL-BE-GIVING this-One this-one oun oun

Conj
for
THE
FATHER
SEALS
THE
God
6:28 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poiwmen poieO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
ina hina
Conj
ergazwmeqa ergazomai
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
28 . Then said they unto him, What shall we do, that we might work the works of God?
THEY-said
THEN TOWARD Him
ANY what ?
WE-MAY-BE-DOING THAT WE-MAY-BE-workING THE
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
works
OF-THE
God
WH NA
6:29 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO


estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
answerED
THE
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
this
IS
29 Jesus answered and said unto them, This is the work of God, that ye believe on him whom he hath sent.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
pisteuhte pisteuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
apesteilen apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
work
OF-THE
God
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BELIEVING INTO WHOM
He-commissions commissions
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
that-One that-one
6:30 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
shmeion ina sEmeion hina

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
THEY-said
THEN to-Him
ANY what ?
THEN ARE-DOING
YOU
SIGN
THAT
30 They said therefore him, What sign shewest then, that we may see, believe thee? what dost work?
unto thou and thou
idwmen eidO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
kai pisteuswmen kai pisteuO

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
ergazh ergazomai
WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND
WE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING to-YOU you to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
ANY what ? en en
Prep
YOU-ARE-workING
6:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

manna efagon manna esthiO

Hebrew vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
kaqws kathOs
Adv
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
THE
MANNA
ATE
IN
THE
DESOLATE according-AS wilderness autois fagein autos esthiO

pp Dat Pl m vn 2Aor Act
31 Our fathers did eat manna in the desert; as it is written, He gave them bread from heaven to eat.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegrammenon graphO
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou edwken ouranos didOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
IS it-is
HAVING-been-WRITTEN BREAD
OUT OF-THE
heaven
He-GIVES
to-them them umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
TO-BE-EATING
6:32 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

ou ou
Part Neg
said
WH
THEN to-them
NA
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
edwken
dedwken didOmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou all ouranos alla

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
32 Then Jesus said unto them, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Moses gave you not that bread from heaven; but my Father giveth you the true bread from heaven.
MOSES
HAS-GIVEN
to-YOU(p) ye
THE
BREAD
OUT OF-THE
heaven
but
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
IS-GIVING
to-YOU(p) ye
THE
BREAD
OUT OF-THE
heaven
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
alhqinon alEthinos
a_ Acc Sg m
THE
TRUE
AV
John 6
6:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar artos gar artos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
katabainwn katabainO
ek ek
Prep
THE
for
BREAD
OF-THE
God
IS
THE
DOWN-STEPPING one-descending
OUT
33 For the bread of God is he which cometh down from heaven, and giveth life unto the world.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai zwhn ouranos kai zOE

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f
didous didOmi
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
heaven
AND
LIFE
GIVING
to-THE
SYSTEM world hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
6:34 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pantote dos pantote didOmi

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
34 Then said they unto him, Lord, evermore give us this bread.
THEY-said
THEN TOWARD Him
Master ! Lord !
always
to-US us
THE
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
BREAD
this
6:35 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
AM
THE
BREAD
OF-THE
35 And Jesus said unto them, I am the bread of life: he that cometh to me shall never hunger; and he that believeth on me shall never thirst.
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
pros pros
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
peinash peinaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
LIFE
THE
one-COMING one-coming eis eis

Prep
TOWARD ME
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-HUNGERING AND
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
diyhsei dipsaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
pwpote pOpote
Adv
THE
INTO ME
NOT
NO
SHALL-BE-THIRSTING ?-AS-?-when ever me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
6:36 all eipon

alla
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti kai ewrakate hoti kai horaO

Conj Conj vi Perf Act 2 Pl Att
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
but
I-said
to-YOU(p) to-ye
36 But I said unto you, That ye also have seen me, and believe not.
that
AND also moi egO
YE-HAVE-SEEN
ME
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-BELIEVING
6:37 pan
pas
a_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hxei hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
pp 1 Dat Sg
EVERY all kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
WHICH
IS-GIVING
to-ME
THE
WH NA
FATHER
TOWARD ME
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING
37 All that the Father giveth me shall come to me; and him that cometh to me I will in no wise cast out.
ercomenon erchomai
pros pros
Prep
me
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
ekbalw ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
THE
one-COMING one-coming
TOWARD
ME
NOT
NO
I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING I-should-be-casting-out
exw exO
Adv
OUT outside
6:38 oti katabebhka

hoti
Conj
katabainO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouc ouranos ou

ina hina
Conj
poiw poieO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
that
I-HAVE-DOWN-STEPPED FROM THE I-have-descended emon emos

ps 1 Acc Sg
heaven
NOT
THAT I-MAY-BE-DOING THE
38 For I came down from heaven, not to do mine own will, but the will of him that sent me.
qelhma to thelEma ho
alla to alla ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n

pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
WILL
THE
MY
but
THE
WILL
OF-THE
One-SENDing one-sending pemyantos pempO

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
ME
6:39 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ina hina
Conj
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
this
YET IS
THE
WILL
OF-THE
One-SENDing one-sending ex ek
Prep
ME
THAT EVERY all
39 And this is the Father's will which hath sent me, that of all which he hath given me I should lose nothing, but should raise it up again at the last day.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
dedwken didOmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
apolesw apollumi
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
alla alla
Conj
WHICH
He-HAS-GIVEN to-ME
NO nothing
I-SHOULD-BE-destroyING OUT OF-SAME I-should-be-losing of-it
but
AV
John 6
anasthsw anistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
NA
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
escath hmera eschatos hEmera

a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING SAME I-shall-be-raising it
IN
THE
LAST
DAY
6:40 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar estin gar eimi

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
this
for
IS
THE
WILL
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
THAT EVERY
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qewrwn theOreO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m

eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ech echO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
40 And this is the will of him that sent me, that every one which seeth the Son, and believeth on him, may have everlasting life: and I will raise him up at the last day.
THE
one-beholdING one-beholding
THE
SON
AND
BELIEVING
INTO Him
NA
MAY-BE-HAVING
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion kai anasthsw aiOnios kai anistEmi

a_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
escath eschatos
a_ Dat Sg f
LIFE
eonian
AND
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING him shall-be-raising
IN
THE
LAST
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
DAY
6:41 egogguzon oun

gogguzO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi peri ioudaios peri

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti eipen hoti legO

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
MURMURED
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT Him concerning katabas katabainO

that
He-said
41 The Jews then murmured at him, because he said, I am the bread which came down from heaven.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
AM
THE
BREAD
WH
THE
NA
One-DOWN-STEPPing OUT OF-THE descending outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
heaven
6:42 kai elegon

kai
Conj
ouci
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ouc ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
THEY-said
NOT
this
IS
JESUS
THE
SON
42 And they said, Is not this Jesus, the son of Joseph, whose father and mother we know? how is it then that he saith, I came down from heaven?
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera pws nun mEtEr pOs nun

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Int Adv
of-JOSEPH OF-WHOM of-Joseph legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WE
HAVE-PERCEIVED THE are-acquainted-with tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
FATHER
AND
THE
MOTHER
how how ?
NOW
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
ouranou katabebhka ouranos katabainO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Sg
He-IS-sayING
that
OUT OF-THE
heaven
I-HAVE-DOWN-STEPPED I-have-descended autois mh autos mE

6:43 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

gogguzete gogguzO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
met allhlwn meta allElOn

Prep pc Gen Pl m
43 Jesus therefore answered and said unto them, Murmur not among yourselves.
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
NO
BE-YE-MURMURING WITH one-another be-ye-murmuring ! ean ean

Cond
6:44 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
dunatai dunamai
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one can pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
IF-EVER NO
THE
44 No man can come to me, except the Father which hath sent me draw him: and I will raise him up at the last day.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
elkush helkuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
FATHER
THE
One-SENDing one-sending auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
ME
SHOULD-BE-DRAWING him
AND-I
anasthsw anistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

IN
THE
LAST
DAY
6:45 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegrammenon graphO
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
profhtais prophEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
kai esontai kai eimi

pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
IS it-is
HAVING-been-WRITTEN IN
THE
THEY-SHALL-BE ALL
45 It is written in the prophets, And they shall be all taught of God. Every man therefore that hath heard, and hath learned of the Father, cometh unto me.
AV
John 6
didaktoi qeou didaktos theos

a_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
TEACHed taught maqwn manthanO
OF-God
EVERY
THE
one-HEARing one-hearing eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
BESIDE THE
FATHER
AND
ercetai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
LEARNING
IS-COMING
TOWARD ME
6:46 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti ton hoti ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ewraken horaO
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
46 Not that any man hath seen the Father, save he which is of God, he hath seen the Father.
NOT
that
WH
THE
NA
FATHER
HAS-SEEN
ANY anyone
IF
NO
THE
BEING one-being
para para
Prep
tou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ewraken horaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
BESIDE
THE
God
this-One this-one o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
HAS-SEEN
THE
FATHER
6:47 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pisteuwn pisteuO
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
47 Verily, verily, I say unto you, He that believeth on me hath everlasting life.
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
IS-HAVING
LIFE
eonian
6:48 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
48
I am that bread of life.
AM
THE
BREAD
OF-THE
LIFE
6:49 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

efagon esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
manna kai manna kai

Hebrew Conj
49 Your fathers did eat manna in the wilderness, and are dead.
THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) ATE of-ye
IN
THE
DESOLATE THE wilderness
MANNA
AND
apeqanon apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-DIED they-died
6:50 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou katabainwn ouranos katabainO

this
IS
THE
BREAD
THE
OUT OF-THE
heaven
50 This is the bread which cometh down from heaven, that a man may eat thereof, and not die.
ina hina
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
fagh esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THAT ANY anyone
OUT OF-it of-himit eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
MAY-BE-EATING AND
NO
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING may-be-dying zwn zaO

6:51 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AM
THE
BREAD
THE
LIVING
THE
OUT OF-THE

ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
fagh esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
toutou tou houtos ho

pd Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
artou artos
n_ Gen Sg m
51 I am the living bread which came down from heaven: if any man eat of this bread, he shall live for ever: and the bread that I will give is my flesh, which I will give for the life of the world.
heaven
DOWN-STEPPing descending eis eis

Prep
IF-EVER ANY anyone aiwna aiOn

n_ Acc Sg m
MAY-BE-EATING OUT OF-this
THE
BREAD
zhsei zaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
he-SHALL-BE-LIVING INTO THE
eon
AND also
THE
BREAD
YET WHICH
dwsw didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
uper huper
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
FLESH
OF-ME
IS
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
LIFE
AV
John 6
6:52 emaconto
machomai
oun oun
Conj
pros pros
Prep
allhlous oi allElOn ho
pc Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi legontes ioudaios legO

pws pOs
Adv Int
FOUGHT
THEN TOWARD one-another
THE
JUDA-ans Jews sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
sayING
how how ? fagein esthiO

vn 2Aor Act
52 The Jews therefore strove among themselves, saying, How can this man give us [his] flesh to eat?
dunatai dunamai
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
dounai thn didOmi ho

vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
IS-ABLE can
this-One this-one oun oun

Conj
to-US us
TO-GIVE
WH NA
THE
FLESH
OF-Him
TO-BE-EATING
6:53 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
said
THEN to-them
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
53 Then Jesus said unto them, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except ye eat the flesh of the Son of man, and drink his blood, ye have no life in you.
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
faghte esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou kai anthrOpos kai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-EATING THE
FLESH
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
human
AND
pihte pinO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING OF-Him
THE
BLOOD
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING LIFE
IN
selves yourselves mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
6:54 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
trwgwn trOgO
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kai pinwn kai pinO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
one-CHEWING one-masticating ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-ME
THE
FLESH
AND
DRINKING
OF-ME
THE
54 Whoso eateth my flesh, and drinketh my blood, hath eternal life; and I will raise him up at the last day.
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion kagw aiOnios kagO

a_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Nom Sg Con
anasthsw anistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
BLOOD
IS-HAVING
LIFE
eonian
AND-I
to-THE

LAST
DAY
6:55 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar sarx gar sarx

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
brwsis brOsis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
55 For my flesh is meat indeed, and my blood is drink indeed.
THE
for
FLESH
OF-ME
TRUE
IS
FEEDing food
AND
THE
BLOOD
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
posis posis
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-ME
TRUE
IS
DRINKing drink mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
6:56 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
trwgwn trOgO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kai pinwn kai pinO

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
56 He that eateth my flesh, and drinketh my blood, dwelleth in me, and I in him.
THE
one-CHEWING one-masticating en en
Prep
OF-ME
THE
FLESH
AND
DRINKING
OF-ME
THE
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
BLOOD
IN
ME
IS-REMAINING AND-I
IN
him
6:57 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
apesteilen me apostellO egO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
zwn zaO
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
according-AS commissions
ME
THE
LIVING
FATHER
AND-I also-I kakeinos kakeinos

pd Nom Sg m
57 As the living Father hath sent me, and I live by the Father: so he that eateth me, even he shall live by me.
zw zaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
trwgwn trOgO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AM-LIVING
THRU THE because-of di dia

Prep
FATHER
AND
THE
one-CHEWING one-masticating
ME
AND-that-one also-that-one
zhsei zaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-LIVING THRU ME because-of
AV
John 6
6:58 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep

ou ou
Part Neg
this
IS
THE
BREAD
THE
OUT OF-heaven
DOWN-STEPPing descending trwgwn trOgO

NOT
58 This is that bread which came down from heaven: not as your fathers did eat manna, and are dead: he that eateth of this bread shall live for ever.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
efagon esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres kai apeqanon patEr kai apothnEskO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
according-AS ATE
THE
FATHERS
AND
THEY-FROM-DIED THE died aiwna aiOn

n_ Acc Sg m
this
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
zhsei zaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
BREAD
SHALL-BE-LIVING INTO THE
eon
6:59 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
didaskwn didaskO
en en
Prep
ni proper
59 These things said he in the synagogue, as he taught in Capernaum.
these He-said these-things
IN
TOGETHER-LEAD TEACHING synagogue twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
IN
CAPERNAUM
6:60 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
akousantes ek akouO ek

eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
sklhros sklEros
a_ Nom Sg m
MANY
THEN HEARing hearing-this o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
say
HARD
60 . Many therefore of his disciples, when they had heard [this], said, This is an hard saying; who can hear it?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
IS
THE
saying
this
ANY who ? ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
IS-ABLE can en en
Prep
OF-it him it
TO-BE-HEARING
6:61 eidws
eidO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
oti gogguzousin peri hoti gogguzO peri

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Prep
HAVING-PERCEIVED YET THE being-aware toutou oi houtos ho

pd Gen Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
JESUS
IN
Self himself
that
ARE-MURMURING ABOUT concerning umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
61 When Jesus knew in himself that his disciples murmured at it, he said unto them, Doth this offend you?

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

skandalizei skandalizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
this
THE
LEARNers disciples qewrhte theOreO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-Him
He-said said ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
to-them
this
YOU(p) ye
IS-SNARING
6:62 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anabainonta anthrOpos anabainO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
62 [What] and if ye shall see the Son of man ascend up where he was before?
IF-EVER THEN YE-MAY-BE-beholdING THE
SON
OF-THE
human
UP-STEPPING ascending
opou hopou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
proteron proteron
a_ Nom Sg n
THE-?-where He-WAS wheree
THE
BEFORE-more formerly to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
6:63 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
zwopoioun zOopoieO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
wfelei OpheleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
spirit
IS
THE
makING-LIVE vivifying egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
THE
FLESH
NOT
IS-benefitING
63 It is the spirit that quickeneth; the flesh profiteth nothing: the words that I speak unto you, [they] are spirit, and [they] are life.
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
lelalhka laleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
NOT-YET-ONE THE anything zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
declarations WHICH
HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) have-spoken to-ye
spirit
IS
AND
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
LIFE
IS
6:64 all eisin

alla
Conj
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuousin hdei pisteuO eidO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl vi Plup Act 3 Sg
gar gar
Conj
but
THEY-ARE there-are o ho
OUT OF-YOU(p) ANY of-ye some ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
WHO
NOT
ARE-BELIEVING
HAD-PERCEIVED for
64 But there are some of you that believe not. For Jesus knew from the beginning who they were that believed not, and who should betray him.
ex ek
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
tines tis
pi Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteuontes kai pisteuO kai

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj
t_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-ORIGINal THE of-beginning
JESUS
ANY who(p) ?
ARE
THE the-ones
NO
ones-BELIEVING believing
AND
AV
John 6
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paradwswn paradidOmi
vp Fut Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ANY who ?
IS
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING(fut) Him one-giving-up touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
6:65 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
eirhka ereO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
dunatai dunamai
AND
He-said
THRU this because-of me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
I-HAVE-declarED to-YOU(p) to-ye mh mE

Part Neg
that
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one can autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
65 And he said, Therefore said I unto you, that no man can come unto me, except it were given unto him of my Father.
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
ean ean
Cond
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
dedomenon didOmi
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
IF-EVER NO
MAY-BE it-may-be
HAVING-been-GIVEN to-him him
OUT OF-THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
FATHER
WH NA
6:66 ek
ek
Prep
toutou polloi houtos polus

pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
ek
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
66 From that [time] many of his disciples went back, and walked no more with him.
OUT OF-this
MANY
OUT
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
FROM-CAME came-away
INTO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
opisw kai ouketi opisO kai ouketi

Adv Conj Adv

Prep pp Gen Sg m
periepatoun peripateO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
THE the(p)
BEHIND
AND
NOT-STILL WITH Him not-longer o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT-TROD walked tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
6:67 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
dwdeka mh dOdeka mE
ni numeral Part Neg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
67 Then said Jesus unto the twelve, Will ye also go away?
said
THEN THE
JESUS
to-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
NO
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ARE-WILLING
upagein hupagO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING to-be-going-away
6:68 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
apeleusomeqa aperchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
answerED
to-Him him
SIMON
Peter
Master ! Lord !
TOWARD ANY whom ?
WE-SHALL-BE-FROM-COMING we-shall-be-coming-away
68 Then Simon Peter answered him, Lord, to whom shall we go? thou hast the words of eternal life.
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
aiwniou eceis aiOnios echO

a_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 2 Sg
declarations OF-LIFE
eonian
YOU-ARE-HAVING
6:69 kai hmeis

kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
pepisteukamen kai egnwkamen pisteuO kai ginOskO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl Conj vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti su hoti su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
69 And we believe and are sure that thou art that Christ, the Son of the living God.
AND
WE
HAVE-BELIEVED
AND
WE-HAVE-KNOWN that
YOU
ARE
THE
agios hagios
a_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
HOLY-One holy-one
OF-THE
God
6:70 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
answerED
to-them them
THE
JESUS
NOT
YOU(p) ye estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
70 Jesus answered them, Have not I chosen you twelve, and one of you is a devil?
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
exelexamhn kai ex eklegO kai ek

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Conj Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
diabolos diabolos
a_ Nom Sg m
choose
AND
OUT OF-YOU(p) ONE of-ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THRU-CASTer IS adversary simwnos iskariwtou outos simOn iskariOthEs houtos

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m pd Nom Sg m
6:71 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ioudan ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
gar emellen gar mellO

said he-said-it
YET THE of-the
JUDAS
OF-SIMON
ISCARIOT
this-one this-man
for
WAS-ABOUT
71 He spake of Judas Iscariot [the son] of Simon: for he it was that should betray him, being one of the twelve.
AV
John 6 - John 7
paradidonai paradidOmi
vn Pres Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
TO-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him to-be-giving-up
ONE
OUT OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
AV
John 7
7:1 kai meta tauta

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
periepatei peripateO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia galilaia
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
after
these ABOUT-TROD these-things walked en en

Prep
THE
JESUS
IN
THE
GALILEE
. After these things Jesus walked in Galilee: for he would not walk in Jewry, because the Jews sought to kill him.
ou ou
Part Neg
gar hqelen gar thelO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ioudaia peripatein ioudaia peripateO

n_ Dat Sg f vn Pres Act
oti ezhtoun hoti zEteO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
NOT
for
He-WILLED he-would
IN
THE
JUDEA
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING that to-be-walking
SOUGHT
Him
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi apokteinai ioudaios apokteinO

a_ Nom Pl m vn Aor Act
THE
JUDA-ans Jews de de
Conj
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill eggus h eggus ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg f
7:2 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
eorth heortE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn h ioudaios ho
a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
skhnophgia skEnopEgia
n_ Nom Sg f
Now the Jews'feast tabernacles was at hand.
of
it-WAS was
YET NEAR
THE
FESTIVAL
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
BOOTH-FASTENing Tabernacles enteuqen enteuthen

Adv
3
7:3 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

metabhqi metabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
said
THEN TOWARD Him
THE
brothers
OF-Him
BE-with-STEPPING hence be-you-proceeding ! maqhtai sou mathEtEs su

His brethren therefore said unto him, Depart hence, and go into Judaea, that thy disciples also may see the works that thou doest.
kai upage kai hupagO

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ioudaian ina ioudaia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
AND

WH
JUDEA
THAT AND also ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
THE
LEARNers disciples poieis poieO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-YOU
qewrhsousin theOreO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
sou
NA
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-beholdING should-be-beholding
OF-YOU
THE
ACTS works
WHICH
YOU-ARE-DOING
7:4 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
gar ti gar tis

Conj px Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
kruptw poiei kruptos poieO

a_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai zhtei kai zEteO

autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
parrhsia parrhEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
ANY anything
IN
HIDDen hiding
IS-DOING
AND
IS-SEEKING
he
IN
boldness publicity
For [there is] no man [that] doeth any thing in secret, and he himself seeketh to be known openly. If thou do these things, shew thyself to the world.
ei ei
Cond
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
fanerwson seauton tw phaneroO seautou ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE
IF
these YOU-ARE-DOING make-APPEAR these-things manifest-you ! gar oi gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
YOURself
to-THE
SYSTEM world
5
7:5 oude
oude
Adv

episteuon eis pisteuO eis

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
For neither did his brethren believe in him.
NOT-YET for not-yeteven
THE
brothers
OF-Him
BELIEVED
INTO Him
7:6 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
emos emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
Then Jesus said unto them, My time is not yet come: but your time is alway ready.
IS-sayING
THEN to-them
THE
JESUS
THE
SEASON
THE
MY
oupw oupO
Adv
parestin pareimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
umeteros pantote estin humeteros pantote eimi

ps 2 Nom Sg Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT-as-yet IS-BESIDE-BEING THE is-being-present etoimos hetoimos

a_ Nom Sg m
YET SEASON
THE
YOUR-more yours
always
IS
READY
7:7 ou
ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
misein miseO
vn Pres Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
de de
Conj
misei miseO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
IS-ABLE can marturw martureO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
SYSTEM world autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
TO-BE-HATING YOU(p) ye oti ta hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl n
ME
YET it-IS-HATING
The world cannot hate you; but me it hateth, because I testify of it, that the works thereof are evil.
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
peri peri
Prep
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Pl n
that
AM-witnessING ABOUT it am-testifying concerning himit
that
THE
ACTS
OF-it of-himit
wicked wicked(p)
AV
John 7
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
WH NA
7:8 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
anabhte anabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eorthn egw heortE egO

n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Nom Sg
oupw
ouk ou
Part Neg
anabainw anabainO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
YOU(p) ye thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Go ye up unto this feast: I go not up yet unto this feast; for my time is not yet full come.
UP-STEP go-up-ye !
INTO THE
FESTIVAL
NOT
AM-UP-STEPPING INTO am-going-up
eorthn tauthn oti o heortE houtos hoti ho

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
emos emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
kairos kairos
n_ Nom Sg m
oupw oupO
Adv
peplhrwtai plEroO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
THE
FESTIVAL
this
that
THE
WH
MY
NA
SEASON
NOT-as-yet HAS-been-FILLED has-been-fulfilled emeinen menO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
7:9 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
eipwn legO
autois
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
galilaia galilaia
n_ Dat Sg f
When he had said these words unto them, he abode [still] in Galilee.
these YET sayING these-things
He
REMAINS
IN
THE
GALILEE
7:10 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
anebhsan oi anabainO ho
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eorthn tote kai heortE tote kai

AS
YET UP-STEPPed went-up anebh anabainO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
brothers
OF-Him
WH
INTO THE
NA
FESTIVAL
then
AND also
10 But when his brethren were gone up, then went he also up unto the feast, not openly, but as it were in secret.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
fanerws alla phanerOs alla

Adv Conj
ws
ws hOs
Adv
en en
Prep
kruptw kruptos
a_ Dat Sg n
He
UP-STEPPed went-up oun oun

Conj
NOT
APPEARly apparently
but
AS
IN
HIDDen hiding kai elegon kai legO

7:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ezhtoun ioudaios zEteO

a_ Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
pou pou
Part Int
11 Then the Jews sought him at the feast, and said, Where is he?
THE
THEN JUDA-ans Jews ekeinos ekeinos

pd Nom Sg m
SOUGHT
Him
IN
THE
FESTIVAL AND
THEY-said said
?-where where ?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
that-One that-one autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
7:12 kai goggusmos peri

kai
Conj
goggusmos
n_ Nom Sg m
peri
Prep
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
oclois oi ochlos ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
AND
MURMURing
ABOUT Him concerning estin eimi
WAS there-was alloi allos
much
IN THE among elegon legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
THRONGS THE
men men
Part
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti agaqos hoti agathos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
alla alla
Conj
12 And there was much murmuring among the people concerning him: for some said, He is a good man: others said, Nay; but he deceiveth the people.
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
a_ Nom Pl m
INDEED said they-said plana planaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
that
GOOD
He-IS
others
YET
said
NOT not
but
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
He-IS-STRAYING THE he-is-deceiving
THRONG
7:13 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
mentoi parrhsia elalei mentoi parrhEsia laleO

Conj n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
13 Howbeit no man spake openly of him for fear of the Jews.
NOT-YET-ONE howbeit no-one twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
to-boldness
TALKED spoke
THRU THE because-of
FEAR
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews de de
Conj
7:14 hdh
EdE
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eorths mesoushs heortE mesoO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg f
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
14 . Now about the midst of the feast Jesus went up into the temple, and taught.
ALREADY YET OF-THE at-length kai edidasken kai didaskO

FESTIVAL
OF-beING-MID of-being-midway
UP-STEPPed went-up
JESUS
INTO THE
AND
TAUGHT
AV
John 7
7:15 eqaumazon oun

thaumazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi legontes ioudaios legO

pws outos pOs houtos

Adv Int pd Nom Sg m
grammata gramma
n_ Acc Pl n
15 And the Jews marvelled, saying, How knoweth this man letters, having never learned?
MARVELED
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews
sayING
how how ?
this-One this-one
WRITings letters
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
memaqhkws manthanO
HAS-PERCEIVED NO is-acquainted-with
HAVING-LEARNED
NA
7:16 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
16 Jesus answered them, and said, My doctrine is not mine, but his that sent me.
answerED
THEN to-them them estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
JESUS
AND
said
THE
MY
didach didachE
n_ Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
alla tou alla ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
TEACHing
NOT
IS
MY mine qelh thelO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
but
OF-THE
ME
7:17 ean
ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qelhma autou thelEma autos

poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
gnwsetai ginOskO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
IF-EVER ANY anyone peri peri

Prep
MAY-BE-WILLING THE
WILL
OF-Him
TO-BE-DOING he-SHALL-BE-KNOWING
17 If any man will do his will, he shall know of the doctrine, whether it be of God, or [whether] I speak of myself.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
didachs poteron didachE poteron

n_ Gen Sg f Adv Int
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h E
Part
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ap apo
Prep
ABOUT THE concerning emautou lalw emautou laleO

pf 1 Gen Sg m
TEACHing
?-WHICH-more OUT OF-THE whether
God
IS it-is
OR
FROM
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
MYself
AM-TALKING am-speaking af apo

Prep
7:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
lalwn laleO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
zhtei zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE-one the-one o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM self himself zhtwn zEteO

TALKING speaking thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
esteem glory
THE
OWN
IS-SEEKING
18 He that speaketh of himself seeketh his own glory: but he that seeketh his glory that sent him, the same is true, and no unrighteousness is in him.
de de
Conj
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
THE
YET One-SEEKING one-seeking estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
esteem glory en en
Prep
OF-THE
One-SENDing one-sending estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
Him
this-One this-one
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg m
kai adikia kai adikia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
TRUE
IS
AND
WH
UN-JUSTness IN injustice
NA
Him
NOT
IS
7:19 ou
ou
Part Neg
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
edwken
dedwken didOmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ex ek
Prep
NOT
MOSES
HAS-GIVEN
to-YOU(p) to-ye me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
LAW
AND
NOT-YET-ONE OUT not-one
19 Did not Moses give you the law, and [yet] none of you keepeth the law? Why go ye about to kill me?
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
apokteinai apokteinO
vn Aor Act
OF-YOU(p) IS-DOING of-ye
THE
LAW
ANY why ?
ME
YE-ARE-SEEKING TO-FROM-KILL to-kill tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
7:20 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
daimonion eceis daimonion echO

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
zhtei zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
20 The people answered and said, Thou hast a devil: who goeth about to kill thee?
answerED
THE
THRONG
demon
YOU-ARE-HAVING ANY who ?
YOU
IS-SEEKING
vn Aor Act
7:21 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autois en autos heis

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
epoihsa poieO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
21 Jesus answered and said unto them, I have done one work, and ye all marvel.
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
ONE
ACT
I-DO
AND
ALL
AV
John 7
qaumazete thaumazO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-MARVELING
7:22 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
dedwken umin didOmi humeis

vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ouc ou
Part Neg
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
THRU this because-of tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
MOSES
HAS-GIVEN
to-YOU(p) ye twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing NOT circumcision

WH
that
NA
OUT
22 Moses therefore gave unto you circumcision; (not because it is of Moses, but of the fathers;) and ye on the sabbath day circumcise a man.
mwusews estin mOusEs eimi

all ek alla ek
Conj Prep
paterwn kai patEr kai

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
en
en en
Prep
sabbatw sabbaton
n_ Dat Sg n
OF-THE
MOSES
IS it-is anqrwpon anthrOpos

n_ Acc Sg m
but
OUT OF-THE
FATHERS
AND
IN
SABBATH
peritemnete peritemnO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-ABOUT-CUTTING human ye-are-circumcising
7:23 ei
ei
Cond
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
sabbatw ina sabbaton hina

n_ Dat Sg n Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
IF
ABOUT-CUTTing IS-GETTING-UP circumcision is-getting o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
human
IN
SABBATH
THAT NO
luqh luO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
mwusews emoi mOusEs egO

n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Dat Sg
colate cholaO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
23 If a man on the sabbath day receive circumcision, that the law of Moses should not be broken; are ye angry at me, because I have made a man every whit whole on the sabbath day?
MAY-BE-BEING-LOOSED THE may-be-being-annulled anqrwpon ugih anthrOpos hugiEs

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
LAW
of-MOSES of-Moses sabbatw sabbaton

n_ Dat Sg n
to-ME
YE-ARE-BILE-ING that WHOLE ye-are-raising-bile seeing-that
epoihsa poieO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
human
SOUND
I-make
IN
SABBATH
7:24 mh
mE
Part Neg
krinete krinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kat kata
Prep
oyin opsis
n_ Acc Sg f
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
dikaian krisin dikaios krisis

krinete krinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
24 Judge not according to the appearance, but judge righteous judgment.
NO
YE-BE-JUDGING according-to VIEW but be-ye-judging ! countenance oun oun

Conj
THE
JUST
JUDGing
YE-BE-JUDGING be-ye-judging ! estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
25 Then said some of them of Jerusalem, Is not this he, whom they seek to kill?
7:25 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ierosolumitwn ouc ierosolumitEs ou

outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
said
THEN ANY some zhtousin zEteO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
OUT OF-THE
JERUSALEMites
NOT
this this-one
IS
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
vn Aor Act
WHOM
THEY-ARE-SEEKING TO-FROM-KILL to-kill parrhsia lalei parrhEsia laleO

7:26 kai ide

kai
Conj
eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
AND
BE-PERCEIVING to-boldness lo ! alhqws egnwsan alEthOs ginOskO

He-IS-TALKING AND he-is-speaking oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
NOT-YET-ONE to-Him nothing
ARE-sayING they-are-saying estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
26 But, lo, he speaketh boldly, and they say nothing unto him. Do the rulers know indeed that this is the very Christ?
mhpote mEpote
Adv
arcontes oti outos archOn hoti houtos

n_ Nom Pl m Conj pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NO-?-when TRUly lest-at-some-time cristos christos

n_ Nom Sg m
KNOW
THE
chiefs
that
this
IS
THE
ANOINTED Christ
7:27 alla touton oidamen

alla
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg m
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
poqen pothen
Adv Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
but
this-One this-man erchtai erchomai
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE He-IS we-are-aware whence ? oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
THE
YET ANOINTED Christ
27 Howbeit we know this man whence he is: but when Christ cometh, no man knoweth whence he is.
otan hotan
Conj
ginwskei poqen ginOskO pothen

vi Pres Act 3 Sg Adv Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
when-EVER He-MAY-BE-COMING whenever
NOT-YET-ONE IS-KNOWING no-one
?-WHICH-PLACE He-IS whence ?
AV
John 7
7:28 ekraxen
krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
didaskwn didaskO
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
CRIES
THEN IN
THE
SACRED-place TEACHING sanctuary kai oidate kai eidO

THE
JESUS
AND
legwn legO
kame kagO
pp 1 Acc Sg Con
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
poqen pothen
Adv Int
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
28 Then cried Jesus in the temple as he taught, saying, Ye both know me, and ye know whence I am: and I am not come of myself, but he that sent me is true, whom ye know not.
sayING
AND-ME also-me emautou ouk emautou ou

pf 1 Gen Sg m Part Neg
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AND ye-are-acquainted-with elhluqa erchomai

vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE I-AM ye-are-aware whence ? alhqinos o alEthinos ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
kai ap kai apo

Conj Prep
all estin alla eimi

pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
FROM MYself
NOT
I-HAVE-COME
but
IS
TRUE
THE
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
ME
WHOM
YOU(p) ye oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED are-acquainted-with oti par hoti para

Conj Prep
7:29 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kakeinos me kakeinos egO

pd Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
29 But I know him: for I am from him, and he hath sent me.
HAVE-PERCEIVED Him am-acquainted-with
that
BESIDE Him
I-AM
AND-that-One ME and-that-one
apesteilen apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
commissions
7:30 ezhtoun
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
piasai kai oudeis piazO kai oudeis

vn Aor Act Conj a_ Nom Sg f
epebalen epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-SOUGHT THEN Him
TO-arrest
AND
NOT-YET-ONE ON-CAST no-one laid-on autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ON
Him
THE
30 Then they sought to take him: but no man laid hands on him, because his hour was not yet come.
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
oti oupw hoti oupO

Conj Adv
elhluqei h erchomai ho
vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
HAND
that
NOT-as-yet HAD-COME
THE
HOUR
OF-Him
7:31 ek
ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-THE
THRONG
YET MANY
BELIEVE
INTO Him
AND
THEY-said said wn hos

pr Gen Pl n
THE
31 And many of the people believed on him, and said, When Christ cometh, will he do more miracles than these which this [man] hath done?
cristos otan christos hotan

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
pleiona polus
a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
shmeia poihsei sEmeion poieO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ epoihsen poieO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
when-EVER MAY-BE-COMING NO whenever he-may-be-coming
MORE
SIGNS
SHALL-BE-DOING OF-WHICH this-One this-man
DOES
7:32 hkousan oi
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi tou pharisaios ho

oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
gogguzontos peri gogguzO peri

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HEAR
THE
PHARISEES
OF-THE the
THRONG
MURMURING
ABOUT Him concerning farisaioi uphretas ina pharisaios hupEretEs hina

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj
32 The Pharisees heard that the people murmured such things concerning him; and the Pharisees and the chief priests sent officers to take him.
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
kai apesteilan oi kai apostellO ho

n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
these AND these-things piaswsin piazO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
commission dispatch
THE
THE
PHARISEES
THAT
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-arrestING Him
7:33 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eti eti
Adv
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg m
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
said
THEN THE
JESUS
STILL TIME
LITTLE
WITH YOU(p) ye
I-AM
AND
33 Then said Jesus unto them, Yet a little while am I with you, and [then] I go unto him that sent me.
AV
John 7
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
I-AM-UNDER-LEADING TOWARD THE I-am-going-away
One-SENDing one-sending kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
ME
WH NA
7:34 zhthsete
zEteO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eurhsete heuriskO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
me
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
34 Ye shall seek me, and shall not find [me]: and where I am, [thither] ye cannot come.
YE-SHALL-BE-SEEKING ME
AND
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING
ME
AND
opou hopou
Adv
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
THE-?-where AM wheree
YOU(p) ye
NOT
ARE-ABLE can
TO-BE-COMING
7:35 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi pros ioudaios pros

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
eautous pou heautou pou

pf 3 Acc Pl m Part Int
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews ouc ou

Part Neg
TOWARD selves themselves auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
?-where this-One where ? this-one mh mE

Part Neg
IS-ABOUT is-being-about diasporan diaspora

n_ Acc Sg f
poreuesqai oti hmeis poreuomai hoti hEmeis

vn Pres midD/pasD Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
eurhsomen heuriskO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
35 Then said the Jews among themselves, Whither will he go, that we shall not find him? will he go unto the dispersed among the Gentiles, and teach the Gentiles?
TO-BE-GOING
that
WE
NOT
SHALL-BE-FINDING Him
NO
INTO THE
THRU-SOWing dispersion
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ellhnwn mellei hellEn mellO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
poreuesqai kai didaskein poreuomai kai didaskO

vn Pres midD/pasD Conj vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ellhnas hellEn
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
GREEKS
He-IS-ABOUT TO-BE-GOING he-is-being-about o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
AND
TO-BE-TEACHING THE
GREEKS
7:36 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
zhthsete zEteO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
ANY what ? me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
IS
THE
saying word
WH
this
NA
WHICH
He-said
YE-SHALL-BE-SEEKING
36 What [manner of] saying is this that he said, Ye shall seek me, and shall not find [me]: and where I am, [thither] ye cannot come?
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
eurhsete heuriskO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
me
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai opou kai hopou

Conj Adv
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ME
AND
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING
ME
AND
THE-?-where AM wheree
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
YOU(p) ye
NOT
ARE-ABLE can th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
TO-BE-COMING
7:37 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
megalh ths mega ho

a_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
eorths eisthkei heortE histEmi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
YET THE
LAST
DAY
THE
GREAT
OF-THE
FESTIVAL
HAD-STOOD stood ercesqw erchomai
THE
37 . In the last day, that great [day] of the feast, Jesus stood and cried, saying, If any man thirst, let him come unto me, and drink.
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ekraxen kai krazO

legwn legO
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
diya dipsaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
JESUS
AND
CRIES
sayING
IF-EVER ANY anyone
MAY-BE-THIRSTING LET-BE-COMING let-him-be-coming !
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai pinetw kai pinO

TOWARD ME
AND
LET-him-BE-DRINKING let-him-be-drinking ! eis eis

Prep
7:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
potamoi potamos
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing koilias autou koilia autos

n_ Gen Sg f
INTO ME
according-AS said
THE
WRITing scripture
rivers
38 He that believeth on me, as the scripture hath said, out of his belly shall flow rivers of living water.
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
reusousin rheO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
udatos zwntos hudOr zaO

n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Gen Sg n
pp Gen Sg m
OUT OF-THE
CAVITY bowel de de
Conj
OF-him
SHALL-BE-GUSHING OF-water
LIVING
WH NA
7:39 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
ou
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
emellon mellO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
this
YET He-said
spirit
WHICH
WERE-ABOUT
39 (But this spake he of the Spirit, which they that believe on him should receive: for the Holy Ghost was not yet [given]; because that Jesus was
AV
John 7
lambanein lambanO
vn Pres Act
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pisteusantes eis pisteuO eis

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oupw oupO
Adv
gar hn gar eimi

pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
not yet glorified.)
TO-BE-GETTING-UP THE to-be-getting ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
WH
ones-BELIEVing ones-believing
NA
INTO Him
NOT-as-yet for
WAS
spirit
that
oupw
oudepw oudepO
Adv
edoxasqh doxazO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
JESUS
NOT-YET-as-yet not-as-yet tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IS-esteemizED is-glorified akousantes twn akouO ho

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
7:40 ek
ek
Prep
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
oun oun
Conj
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
toutwn elegon houtos legO

pd Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
OUT OF-THE
WH
THRONG
THEN HEARing ones-hearing alhqws o alEthOs ho

Adv
OF-THE the
sayings
these
THEY-said said
40 Many of the people therefore, when they heard this saying, said, Of a truth this is the Prophet.
oti
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
this
IS
TRUly
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet cristos oi christos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
7:41 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
41 Others said, This is the Christ. But some said, Shall Christ come out of Galilee?
others
said
this
IS
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
YET THEY-said
NO
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias o galilaia ho
cristos ercetai christos erchomai

for
OUT OF-THE
GALILEE
THE
ANOINTED Christ oti ek hoti ek

Conj Prep
IS-COMING
7:42 ouc
ou
Part Neg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
spermatos dauid kai apo sperma dauid kai apo

n_ Gen Sg n ni proper Conj Prep
NOT
THE
WRITing scripture kwmhs kOmE

n_ Gen Sg f
said
that
OUT OF-THE
seed
of-DAVID AND of-David o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
FROM
42 Hath not the scripture said, That Christ cometh of the seed of David, and out of the town of Bethlehem, where David was?
bhqleem bEthleem
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
opou hopou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
dauid ercetai dauid erchomai

ni proper vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
BETHLEHEM OF-THE the
VILLAGE
THE-?-where WAS wheree en en

Prep
DAVID
IS-COMING
THE
ANOINTED Christ
43 So there was a division among the people because of him.
7:43 scisma
schisma
n_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
di dia
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
SPLIT schism
THEN BECAME IN there-came-to-be de de

Conj
THE
THRONG
THRU Him because-of all oudeis alla oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
WH
7:44 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
hqelon thelO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
piasai auton piazO autos

ebalen
44 And some of them would have taken him; but no man laid hands on him.
ANY some
NA
YET WILLED
OUT OF-them
TO-arrest
Him
but
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
epebalen epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
ON-CAST laid-on
ON
Him
THE
HANDS
7:45 hlqon
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai pros hupEretEs pros

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
kai farisaious kai kai pharisaios kai

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj
CAME
THEN THE
subservients deputies ti tis
TOWARD THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests hgagete agO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
PHARISEES
AND
45 . Then came the officers to the chief priests and Pharisees; and they said unto them, Why have ye not brought him?
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autois ekeinoi dia autos ekeinos dia

pp Dat Pl m pd Nom Pl m Prep
ouk ou
Part Neg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pi Acc Sg n
said
to-them
those
NOT
YE-LED
Him
7:46 apekriqhsan oi
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai oudepote hupEretEs oudepote

n_ Nom Pl m Adv
elalhsen outws anqrwpos laleO houtOs anthrOpos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv n_ Nom Sg m
46 The officers answered, Never man spake like this man.
answerED
THE
WH
NOT-YET-?-when TALKS never speaks

NA
thus
human

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autois
oun
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi mh pharisaios mE

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
answerED
THEN
to-them them
THE
PHARISEES
NO
AND also
YOU(p) ye
47 Then answered them the Pharisees, Are ye also deceived?
AV
John 7 - John 8
peplanhsqe planaO
vi Perf Pas 2 Pl
HAVE-been-STRAYED have-been-deceived
7:48 mh
mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcontwn episteusen eis archOn pisteuO eis

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h E
Part
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
48 Have any of the rulers or of the Pharisees believed on him?
NO
ANY
OUT OF-THE
chiefs
BELIEVES
INTO Him
OR
OUT OF-THE
n_ Gen Pl m
PHARISEES
7:49 alla o
alla
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
ginwskwn ginOskO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
49 But this knoweth not cursed.
people who the law are
but
THE
THRONG
this
THE
NO
KNOWING
THE
LAW
eparatoi eparatos
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ON-EXECRATED ARE accursed they-are
7:50 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
nikodhmos pros nikodEmos pros

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
autous o autos ho
elqwn erchomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
50 Nicodemus saith unto them, (he that came to Jesus by night, being one of them,)
IS-sayING
NA
Nicodemus
TOWARD them
THE
one-COMING one-coming ex ek
Prep
TOWARD Him
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proteron proteron
a_ Acc Sg n
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THE
BEFORE-more ONE formerly o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
BEING
OUT OF-them
7:51 mh
mE
Part Neg
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
krinei krinO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon ean anthrOpos ean

n_ Acc Sg m Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
51 Doth our law judge [any] man, before it hear him, and know what he doeth?
NO
THE
LAW
OF-US
IS-JUDGING
THE
human
IF-EVER NO
akoush akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
par para
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai gnw kai ginOskO

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SHOULD-BE-HEARING BEFORE-most BESIDE him it-should-be-hearing first
AND
MAY-BE-KNOWING ANY what ? kai su kai su

Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
he-IS-DOING
7:52 apekriqhsan kai eipan

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias galilaia
n_ Gen Sg f
THEY-answerED
AND
say
to-him
NO
AND also
YOU
OUT OF-THE
GALILEE
52 They answered and said unto him, Art thou also of Galilee? Search, and look: for out of Galilee ariseth no prophet.
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
eraunhson kai ide ereunaO kai eidO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias profhths galilaia prophEtEs

ouk ou
Part Neg
ARE
SEARCH search-you !
AND
BE-PERCEIVING that be-you-perceiving !
OUT OF-THE
GALILEE
BEFORE-AVERer NOT prophet
egeiretai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-ROUSED
7:53
kai eporeuqhsan ekastos eis kai poreuomai hekastos eis

Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Pl a_ Nom Sg m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
53 And every man went unto his own house.
AND
WERE-GONE they-went
EACH
INTO THE
HOME
OF-him
AV
John 8
8:1 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eporeuqh poreuomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oros oros
n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
elaiwn elaia
n_ Gen Pl f
. Jesus went unto the mount of Olives.
JESUS
YET WAS-GONE went de de

Conj
INTO THE
mountain mount eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
OLIVES
WH NA
8:2 orqrou
orthros
n_ Gen Sg m
palin paregeneto palin paraginomai

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai
kai kai
Conj
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
OF-EARLY
YET AGAIN
He-BESIDE-BECAME INTO THE he-came-along pros pros

Prep
SACRED-place sanctuary kai kaqisas kai kathizO

AND
EVERY entire
And early in the morning he came again into the temple, and all the people came unto him; and he sat down, and taught them.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
hrceto erchomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
edidasken didaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
WH
PEOPLE
NA
CAME
TOWARD Him
AND
seating being-seated
He-TAUGHT
autous
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
8:3 agousin
agO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

farisaioi gunaika epi moiceia pharisaios gunE epi moicheia

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Dat Sg f
ARE-LEADING YET THE
WRITers scribes kai sthsantes kai histEmi

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
AND
THE
PHARISEES
WOMAN
ON
ADULTERY
And the scribes and Pharisees brought unto him a woman taken in adultery; and when they had set her in the midst,
kateilhmmenhn katalambanO
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
HAVING-been-DOWN-GOTTEN AND having-been-overtaken
STANDing
her
IN
MIDst
8:4 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
didaskale auth didaskalos houtos

n_ Voc Sg m pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kateilhptai katalambanO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
They say unto him, Master, this woman was taken in adultery, in the very act.
TEACHer !
this
THE
WOMAN
HAS-been-DOWN-GOTTEN ON has-been-overtaken
autofwrw moiceuomenh autophOros moicheuO

a_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
SAME-DETECT detected
ADULTERING committing-adultery tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
8:5 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
WH
hmin
NA
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
eneteilato tas entellomai ho

vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl f
IN
YET THE
LAW
to-US us su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
MOSES
directs
THE
Now Moses in the law commanded us, that such should be stoned: but what sayest thou?
toiautas liqazein toioutos lithazO

pd Acc Pl f vn Pres Act
oun oun
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
such such(f)(p)
TO-BE-STONING YOU
WH NA
THEN ANY what ? elegon legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
ARE-sayING you-are-saying auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
8:6
touto
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
peirazontes peirazO
ina hina
Conj
ecwsin echO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
this
WH NA
YET THEY-said
tryING
Him
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-HAVING
kathgorein katEgoreO
vn Pres Act
autou
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
katw kuyas katO kuptO

Prep vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
This they said, tempting him, that they might have to accuse him. But Jesus stooped down, and with [his] finger wrote on the ground, [as though he heard them not].
TO-BE-accusING
OF-Him him thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET JESUS
DOWN
BENDing stooping
to-THE
daktulw kategrafen eis daktulos katagraphO eis

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
FINGER
DOWN-WROTE wrote-down epemenon epimenO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
INTO THE
LAND earth
WH
8:7 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
erwtwntes erOtaO
auton
NA
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
anekuyen anakuptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
AS
YET THEY-ON-REMAINED askING they-persisted

WH
Him
He-UP-BENDS AND he-unbends prwtos prOtos

a_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois
NA
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anamarthtos umwn anamartEtos humeis

a_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
ep epi
Prep
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
So when they continued asking him, he lifted up himself, and said unto them, He that is without sin among you, let him first cast a stone at her.
said
to-them
THE
one-UN-missing sinless-one
OF-YOU(p) BEFORE-most ON of-ye first
her
AV
John 8
baletw ballO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
LET-BE-CASTING STONE let-him-be-casting !
8:8 kai palin katakuyas

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
katakuptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
egrafen graphO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
And again he stooped down, and wrote on the ground.
AND
AGAIN
DOWN-BENDing stooping-down
He-WROTE
INTO THE
LAND earth kaq kata

Prep
8:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akousantes exhrconto akouO exerchomai

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
arxamenoi archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
THE
YET ones-HEARing hearing-it
THEY-OUT-CAME they-came-out
ONE
according-to ONE acby kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
beginning
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
presbuterwn kai kateleifqh monos presbuteros kai kataleipO monos

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
And they which heard [it], being convicted by [their own] conscience, went out one by one, beginning at the eldest, [even] unto the last: and Jesus was left alone, and the woman standing in the midst.
FROM THE
SENIORS elders
AND
WAS-left he-was-left
ONLY alone
AND also
THE
WOMAN
IN
MIDst
ousa eimi
BEING
8:10 anakuyas
anakuptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
pou pou
Part Int
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
UP-BENDing unbending oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
YET THE
JESUS
said
to-her
WOMAN !
?-where THEY-ARE where ?
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
katekrinen katakrinO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
10 When Jesus had lifted up himself, and saw none but the woman, he said unto her, Woman, where are those thine accusers? hath no man condemned thee?
NOT-YET-ONE YOU no-one
DOWN-JUDGES condemns eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8:11 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
THE
YET she-said
NOT-YET-ONE Master ! no-one Lord ! poreuou poreuomai
said
NA
YET THE
JESUS
NOT-YET neither
11 She said, No man, Lord. And Jesus said unto her, Neither do I condemn thee: go, and sin no more.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
katakrinw katakrinO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun nun
Adv
YOU
AM-DOWN-JUDGING YOU-BE-GOING am-condemning be-you-going ! amartane hamartanO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
AND
FROM THE
NOW
mhketi mEketi
Adv
NO-NOT-STILL BE-missING by-no-means-longer be-you-sinning !
8:12 palin oun

palin
Adv
oun
Conj
autois elalhsen autos laleO

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legwn legO
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
AGAIN
THEN to-them
TALKS speaks tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
JESUS
sayING
WH NA
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
akolouqwn akoloutheO
moi
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
12 . Then spake Jesus again unto them, saying, I am the light of the world: he that followeth me shall not walk in darkness, but shall have the light of life.
AM
THE
LIGHT
OF-THE
SYSTEM world en en
Prep
THE
one-followING one-following
to-ME me to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
peripathsh peripateO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
skotia all exei skotia alla echO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN should-be-walking zwhs zOE

n_ Gen Sg f
THE
DARKness
but
SHALL-BE-HAVING THE
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
LIGHT
OF-THE
LIFE
8:13 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi su pharisaios su
n_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Nom Sg
peri peri
Prep
seautou martureis seautou martureO

pf 3 Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg
said
THEN to-Him
THE
PHARISEES
YOU
ABOUT YOURself concerning
ARE-witnessING are-testifying
13 The Pharisees therefore said unto him, Thou bearest record of thyself; thy record is not true.
AV
John 8
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marturia sou marturia su

ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg f
THE
witness testimony
OF-YOU
NOT
IS
TRUE
8:14 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autois kan autos kan

pp Dat Pl m Cond Con
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
marturw martureO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-them
AND-[IF]-EVER I and-if-ever marturia mou marturia egO

MAY-BE-witnessING may-be-testifying oti oida hoti eidO

peri peri
Prep
emautou alhqhs emautou alEthEs

pf 1 Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
14 Jesus answered and said unto them, Though I bear record of myself, [yet] my record is true: for I know whence I came, and whither I go; but ye cannot tell whence I come, and whither I go.
ABOUT MYself concerning poqen pothen

Adv Int
TRUE
IS
THE
witness testimony
OF-ME
that
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-aware oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kai pou kai pou

Conj Part Int
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
?-WHICH-PLACE I-CAME whence ? poqen pothen

Adv Int
AND
?-where I-AM-UNDER-LEADING YOU(p) where ? I-am-going-away ye h E

Part
YET NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED are-aware
ercomai erchomai
pou pou
Part Int
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
?-WHICH-PLACE I-AM-COMING whence ?
OR
?-where I-AM-UNDER-LEADING whither ? I-am-going-away krinete krinO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
8:15 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
krinw krinO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
15 Ye judge after the flesh; I judge no man.
YOU(p) ye
according-to THE
FLESH
ARE-JUDGING I
NOT
AM-JUDGING
NOT-YET-ONE anyone alhqinh alEthinos

a_ Nom Sg f
16 And yet if I judge, my judgment is true: for I am not alone, but I and the Father that sent me.
8:16 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
krinw krinO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
krisis krisis
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
AND
IF-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-JUDGING YET I should-be-judging oti monos hoti monos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
THE
JUDGing
THE
MY
TRUE
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
all egw alla egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
IS
that
WH
ONLY alone
NA
NOT
I-AM
but
AND
THE
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pathr
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ME
FATHER
8:17 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
umeterw gegraptai humeteros graphO

ps 2 Dat Sg vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti duo hoti duo

Conj ni numeral
17 It is also written in your law, that the testimony of two men is true.
AND also
IN
THE
LAW
YET THE
YOUR-more of-yours estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
HAS-been-WRITTEN that it-has-been-written
TWO
anqrwpwn h anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
marturia alhqhs marturia alEthEs

OF-humans
THE
witness testimony o ho
TRUE
IS
8:18 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
marturwn martureO
peri peri
Prep
emautou kai marturei emautou kai martureO

pf 1 Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
t_ Nom Sg m
18 I am one that bear witness of myself, and the Father that sent me beareth witness of me.
AM
THE
One-witnessING one-testifying me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
ABOUT MYself concerning
AND
ABOUT concerning
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ME
THE
One-SENDing one-sending oun oun

Conj
ME
FATHER
8:19 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
THEY-said
THEN to-Him
?-where IS where ? oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
THE
FATHER
OF-YOU
answerED
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oute oute
Conj
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
oute oute
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ei ei
Cond
19 Then said they unto him, Where is thy Father? Jesus answered, Ye neither know me, nor my Father: if ye had known me, ye should have known my Father also.
JESUS
NOT-BESIDES ME neither
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-BESIDES THE ye-are-acquainted-with nor with-the
FATHER
OF-ME
IF
AV
John 8
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hdeite eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
an an
Part
hdeite eidO
vi Plup Act 2 Pl
ME
YE-HAD-PERCEIVED AND ye-were-acquainted-with also rhmata rhEma

n_ Acc Pl n
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
EVER YE-HAD-PERCEIVED ye-were-acquainted-with gazofulakiw gazophulakion

n_ Dat Sg n
8:20 tauta ta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
elalhsen en laleO en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
didaskwn didaskO
en en
Prep
these
THE
declarations He-TALKS he-speaks kai oudeis kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
IN
THE
EXCHEQUER-GUARD TEACHING treasury oti oupw hoti oupO

Conj Adv
IN
20 These words spake Jesus in the treasury, as he taught in the temple: and no man laid hands on him; for his hour was not yet come.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
epiasen piazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
elhluqei h erchomai ho
vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
THE
SACRED-place AND sanctuary autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE arrests no-one
Him
that
NOT-as-yet HAD-COME
THE
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
HOUR
OF-Him
8:21 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
palin autois egw palin autos egO

Adv pp Dat Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai zhthsete kai zEteO

He-said
THEN AGAIN
to-them
AM-UNDER-LEADING AND am-going-away apoqaneisqe apothnEskO

vi Fut midD 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-SEEKING
21 . Then said Jesus again unto them, I go my way, and ye shall seek me, and shall die in your sins: whither I go, ye cannot come.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
amartia umwn hamartia humeis

opou hopou
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ME
AND
IN
THE
missing sin ou ou
Part Neg
OF-YOU(p) YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-DYING THE-?-where I of-ye ye-shall-be-dying wheree dunasqe dunamai

upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
AM-UNDER-LEADING YOU(p) am-going-away ye
NOT
ARE-ABLE can ioudaioi mhti ioudaios mEti

a_ Nom Pl m Part Int
TO-BE-COMING
8:22 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apoktenei apokteinO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
22 Then said the Jews, Will he kill himself? because he saith, Whither I go, ye cannot come.
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews upagw hupagO
NO-ANY SHALL-BE-FROM-KILLING Self not ? he-shall-be-killing himself umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
that seeing-that elqein erchomai

vn 2Aor Act
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
He-IS-sayING
THE-?-where I wheree
AM-UNDER-LEADING YOU(p) am-going-away ye ek ek

Prep
NOT
ARE-ABLE can egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
TO-BE-COMING
8:23 kai elegen

kai
Conj
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
katw este katO eimi

ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
He-said
to-them
YOU(p) ye ek ek
Prep
OUT OF-THE of-the(p)
DOWN below kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
ARE
OUT OF-THE of-the(p) ouk ou

Part Neg
23 And he said unto them, Ye are from beneath; I am from above: ye are of this world; I am not of this world.
anw eimi anO eimi

umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
toutou tou houtos ho

pd Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
UP above eimi eimi
AM
YOU(p) ye ek ek
Prep
OUT OF-this
THE
SYSTEM world
ARE
NOT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg m
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
AM
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
8:24 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti apoqaneisqe hoti apothnEskO

en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
amartiais umwn hamartia humeis

I-said
THEN to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-DYING IN ye-shall-be-dying oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
THE
misses sins apoqaneisqe apothnEskO

vi Fut midD 2 Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye en en
Prep
24 I said therefore unto you, that ye shall die in your sins: for if ye believe not that I am [he], ye shall die in your sins.
ean ean
Cond
gar mh gar mE
Conj Part Neg
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
IF-EVER for
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that
AM
YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-DYING IN ye-shall-be-dying
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

THE
misses sins
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
John 8
8:25 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
WH
THEY-said
NA
THEN to-Him
YOU
ANY who ? o hos

pr Acc Sg n
ARE you-are ti tis

px Nom Sg n
said
to-them
25 Then said they unto him, Who art thou? And Jesus saith unto them, Even [the same] that I said unto you from the beginning.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
archn archE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai lalw kai laleO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
JESUS
THE
ORIGINal beginning umwn humeis
WHICH
ANY
AND also
I-AM-TALKING to-YOU(p) I-am-speaking to-ye all o alla ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
26 I have many things to say and to judge of you: but he that sent me is true; and I speak to the world those things which I have heard of him.
8:26 polla
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
kai krinein kai krinO

Conj vn Pres Act
pp 2 Gen Pl
much
I-AM-HAVING
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye alhqhs alEthEs

a_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-TALKING AND to-be-speaking kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
TO-BE-JUDGING but
THE
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
hkousa akouO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
par para
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
One-SENDing one-sending tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
ME
TRUE
IS
AND-I
WHICH which(p)
I-HEAR
BESIDE Him
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
these I-AM-TALKING INTO THE these-things am-speaking
SYSTEM world patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
8:27 ouk
ou
Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti ton hoti ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
autois elegen autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
27 They understood not that he spake to them of the Father.
NOT
THEY-KNOW
that
THE
NA
FATHER
to-them
He-said
8:28 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
uywshte hupsoO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
said
THEN
to-them
THE
JESUS
when-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-HEIGHTenING whenever ye-should-be-exalting oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou tote gnwsesqe anthrOpos tote ginOskO

n_ Gen Sg m Adv vi Fut midD 2 Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
28 Then said Jesus unto them, When ye have lifted up the Son of man, then shall ye know that I am [he], and [that] I do nothing of myself; but as my Father hath taught me, I speak these things.
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
then
YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING that
AM
kai ap kai apo

Conj Prep
emautou poiw emautou poieO

pf 1 Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
alla kaqws alla kathOs

Conj Adv
edidaxen me didaskO egO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
FROM MYself
I-AM-DOING
NOT-YET-ONE but nothing
according-AS TEACHES
ME
THE
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
FATHER
these I-AM-TALKING these-things I-am-speaking pemyas pempO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
8:29 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
THE
One-SENDing one-sending oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
ME
WITH ME
IS
NOT
He-FROM-LETS he-leaves
29 And he that sent me is with me: the Father hath not left me alone; for I do always those things that please him.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
monon monos
a_ Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
aresta arestos
a_ Acc Pl n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pantote pantote
Adv
ME
ONLY alone
that
THE PLEASing(p) to-Him the-things pleasing polloi polus

a_ Nom Pl m
AM-DOING
always
8:30 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
30 As he spake these words, many believed on him.
these OF-Him these-things
TALKING of-speaking o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
MANY
BELIEVE
INTO Him
8:31 elegen
legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pepisteukotas pisteuO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
said
THEN THE
JESUS
TOWARD THE
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED to-Him having-believed him tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
31 . Then said Jesus to those Jews which believed on him, If ye continue in my word, [then] are ye my disciples indeed;
ioudaious ean ioudaios ean

a_ Acc Pl m Cond
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
meinhte menO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
emw emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
JUDA-ans Jews
IF-EVER YOU(p) ye
SHOULD-BE-REMAINING IN
THE
saying word
THE
MY
AV
John 8
alhqws maqhtai mou alEthOs mathEtEs egO

Adv n_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
TRUly
LEARNers disciples
OF-ME
YE-ARE
8:32 kai gnwsesqe

kai
Conj
ginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian kai h alEtheia kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f
alhqeia eleuqerwsei alEtheia eleutheroO

n_ Nom Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING THE
TRUTH
AND
THE
TRUTH
SHALL-BE-FREEING YOU(p) shall-be-making-free ye kai oudeni kai oudeis

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
32 And ye shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.
8:33 apekriqhsan pros

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
abraam abraam
ni proper
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
THEY-answerED
TOWARD Him
seed
of-ABRAHAM WE-ARE of-Abraham legeis legO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
AND
to-NOT-YET-ONE to-no-one
33 They answered Abraham's seed, never in bondage how sayest thou, made free?
him, We be and were to any man: Ye shall be
dedouleukamen pwpote pws su douleuO pOpote pOs su

vi Perf Act 1 Pl Adv Adv Int pp 2 Nom Sg
oti eleuqeroi genhsesqe hoti eleutheros ginomai

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut midD 2 Pl
WE-HAVE-SLAVED
?-AS-?-when how ever how ? autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
WH
YOU
NA
ARE-sayING
that
FREE
YE-SHALL-BE-BECOMING
8:34 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti hoti
Conj
answerED
to-them them poiwn poieO

THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WH
that
34 Jesus answered them, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Whosoever committeth sin is the servant of sin.
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
amartian doulos hamartia doulos

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ths
EVERY
WH
THE
NA
one-DOING one-doing ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
NA
THE
missing sin
SLAVE
IS
amartias
amartias hamartia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
missing sin ou ou
Part Neg
8:35 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
35 And the servant abideth not in the house for ever: [but] the Son abideth ever.
THE
YET SLAVE
NOT
IS-REMAINING IN
THE
HOME house
INTO THE
eon
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
SON
IS-REMAINING INTO THE
eon
8:36 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eleuqerwsh eleutheroO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ontws eleuqeroi esesqe ontOs eleutheros eimi

Adv a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
IF-EVER THEN THE
SON
YOU(p) ye abraam abraam

ni proper
36 If the Son therefore shall make you free, ye shall be free indeed.
SHOULD-BE-FREEING BEINGly should-be-making-free really este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
FREE
YE-SHALL-BE
8:37 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oti sperma hoti sperma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
alla zhteite alla zEteO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware apokteinai oti o apokteinO hoti ho

vn Aor Act Conj
seed
of-ABRAHAM YE-ARE of-Abraham o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
but
YE-ARE-SEEKING ME
37 I know that ye are Abraham's seed; but ye seek to kill me, because my word hath no place in you.
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
emos emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
cwrei chOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
t_ Nom Sg m
that
THE
saying word ewraka horaO

THE
MY
NOT
IS-SPACING has-room
IN
YOU(p) ye oun oun

Conj
38 . I speak that which I have seen with my Father: and ye do that which ye have seen with your father.
8:38 a
hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
WHICH which(p) a hos

pr Acc Pl n
HAVE-SEEN
BESIDE THE
FATHER
I-AM-TALKING AND I-am-speaking also
YOU(p) ye
THEN
hkousate para akouO para

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
WHICH which(p)
YE-HEAR
BESIDE THE
FATHER
ARE-DOING

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
abraam abraam
ni proper
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEY-answerED
AND
say
to-Him
THE
FATHER
OF-US
ABRAHAM IS
39 They answered and said unto him, Abraham is our father. Jesus saith unto them, If ye were Abraham's children, ye would do the works of
AV
John 8
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
Abraham.
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
WH
JESUS
NA
IF
offsprings children
OF-THE
ABRAHAM YE-ARE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
poieite
epoieite poieO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
THE
ACTS works
OF-THE
ABRAHAM
YE-DID
8:40 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
apokteinai anqrwpon os apokteinO anthrOpos hos

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
NOW YET YE-ARE-SEEKING ME
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill para para

Prep
human
WHO
THE
TRUTH
40 But now ye seek to kill me, a man that hath told you the truth, which I have heard of God: this did not Abraham.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
lelalhka laleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
hkousa akouO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
abraam abraam
ni proper
ouk ou
Part Neg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
HAVE-TALKED WHICH I-have-spoken
I-HEAR
BESIDE THE
God
this
ABRAHAM NOT
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
DOES
NA
8:41 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
YOU(p) ye autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
ARE-DOING
THE
ACTS works
OF-THE
WH WH
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) THEY-say of-ye

NA
THEN
41 Ye do the deeds of your father. Then said they to him, We be not born of fornication; we have one Father, [even] God.
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ek ek
Prep
porneias porneia
n_ Gen Sg f
ouk egennhqhmen
ou ou
Part Neg
NA
gegennhmeqa gennaO
vi Perf Pas 1 Pl
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
to-Him
WE
OUT OF-PROSTITUTION
NOT
WERE-generatED were-born
ONE
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
FATHER
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
WH
God
NA
8:42 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
IF
THE
God
FATHER
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
hgapate agapaO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
an an
Part
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
42 Jesus said unto them, If God were your Father, ye would love me: for I proceeded forth and came from God; neither came I of myself, but he sent me.
OF-YOU(p) WAS of-ye kai hkw kai hEkO

YE-LOVED
EVER ME
for
OUT OF-THE
God
OUT-CAME came-forth apesteilen apostellO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
gar ap gar apo

Conj Prep
emautou elhluqa emautou erchomai

pf 1 Gen Sg m vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
all ekeinos alla ekeinos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
AM-ARRIVING NOT-YET for neither ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
FROM MYself
I-HAVE-COME
but
that-One that-one
ME
commissions
8:43 dia
dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
lalian thn lalia ho

emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
43 Why do ye not understand my speech? [even] because ye cannot hear my word.
THRU ANY because-of what ? dunasqe dunamai

THE
TALK speech ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
MY
NOT
YE-ARE-KNOWING that NOT seeing-that
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
TO-BE-HEARING THE
saying word tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
MY
8:44 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
epiqumias epithumia
n_ Acc Pl f
YOU(p) ye tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OUT OF-THE
FATHER
THE
THRU-CASTer ARE Adversary poiein poieO

vn Pres Act
AND
THE
ON-FEELings desires
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
anqrwpoktonos hn anthrOpoktonos eimi

a_ Nom Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) YE-ARE-WILLING TO-BE-DOING that-one of-ye that-one
human-KILLER
WAS
44 Ye are of [your] father the devil, and the lusts of your father ye will do. He was a murderer from the beginning, and abode not in the truth, because there is no truth in him. When he speaketh a lie, he speaketh of his own: for he is a liar, and the father of it.
AV
John 8
ap apo
Prep
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia ouk alEtheia ou

n_ Dat Sg f Part Neg
esthken histEmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Nom Sg f
FROM ORIGINal beginning en en

Prep
AND
IN
THE
TRUTH
NOT
HAS-STOOD stands
that
NOT
IS
TRUTH
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
lalh laleO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
yeudos ek pseudos ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
idiwn idios
a_ Gen Pl n
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IN
him
when-EVER he-MAY-BE-TALKING THE whenever he-may-be-speaking kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
FALSEhood OUT OF-THE lie autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OWN own(p)
he-IS-TALKING he-is-speaking
oti yeusths estin hoti pseustEs eimi

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
that
FALSifier liar
he-IS
AND
THE
FATHER
OF-it
8:45 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
oti hoti
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian legw alEtheia legO

ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
45 And because I tell [you] the truth, ye believe me not.
YET that THE seeing-that ex ek

Prep
TRUTH
I-AM-sayING I-am-telling peri peri

Prep
NOT
YE-ARE-BELIEVING to-ME me alhqeian legw alEtheia legO

46 . Which of you convinceth me of sin? And if I say the truth, why do ye not believe me?
8:46 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
elegcei elegchO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
amartias ei hamartia ei
n_ Gen Sg f Cond
ANY who ? dia dia

Prep
OUT OF-YOU(p) IS-EXPOSING ME of-ye ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
ABOUT missing concerning sin
IF
TRUTH
I-AM-sayING I-am-telling
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuete moi pisteuO egO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
YOU(p) ye wn eimi
NOT
ARE-BELIEVING to-ME me ek ek
Prep
8:47 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
one-BEING one-being dia dia

Prep
OUT OF-THE
God
THE
declarations OF-THE
God
47 He that is of God heareth God's words: ye therefore hear [them] not, because ye are not of God.
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
IS-HEARING
YOU(p) ye
NOT
ARE-HEARING that OUT OF-THE seeing-that
God
NOT
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
YE-ARE
8:48 apekriqhsan oi
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi kai eipan ioudaios kai legO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
kalws legomen kalOs legO

answerED
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
say
to-Him
NOT
IDEALly
ARE-sayING
48 Then answered the Jews, and said unto him, Say we not well that thou art a Samaritan, and hast a devil?
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oti samariths ei hoti samaritEs eimi

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
kai daimonion eceis kai daimonion echO

Conj n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg
WE
that
SAMARItan
ARE
YOU
AND
demon
YOU-ARE-HAVING
8:49 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
daimonion ouk daimonion ou

ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
alla timw alla timaO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
49 Jesus answered, I have not a devil; but I honour my Father, and ye do dishonour me.
answerED
JESUS
demon
NOT
AM-HAVING
but
I-AM-VALUING THE I-am-honoring
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
atimazete atimazO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
YOU(p) ye zhtw zEteO
ARE-UN-VALUING ME are-dishonoring thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
8:50 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
50 And I seek not mine own glory: there is one that seeketh and judgeth.
YET NOT
AM-SEEKING
THE
esteem glory
OF-ME
He-IS
THE
zhtwn zEteO
kai krinwn kai krinO

One-SEEKING one-seeking-it
AND
JUDGING
AV
John 8
8:51 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
AMEN verily thrhsh tEreO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
51 . Verily, verily, I say unto you, If a man keep my saying, he shall never see death.
IF-EVER ANY anyone qewrhsh theOreO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
MY
saying word ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
qanaton ou thanatos ou
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
SHOULD-BE-KEEPING DEATH
NA
NOT
NO
he-SHOULD-BE-beholdING INTO THE
eon
8:52 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi nun egnwkamen ioudaios nun ginOskO

a_ Nom Pl m Adv vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti daimonion hoti daimonion

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
said
THEN
to-Him
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
NOW WE-HAVE-KNOWN that
demon
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
abraam abraam
ni proper
apeqanen kai oi apothnEskO kai ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ean ean
Cond
52 Then said the Jews unto him, Now we know that thou hast a devil. Abraham is dead, and the prophets; and thou sayest, If a man keep my saying, he shall never taste of death.
YOU-ARE-HAVING ABRAHAM FROM-DIED died tis tis

px Nom Sg m
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets ou ou

Part Neg
YOU
ARE-sayING
IF-EVER
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thrhsh tEreO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
geushtai geuomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
ANY anyone
THE
saying word ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-ME
SHOULD-BE-KEEPING NOT
NO
he-SHOULD-BE-TASTING

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-DEATH death
INTO THE
eon
8:53 mh
mE
Part Neg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
abraam abraam
ni proper
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
NO
YOU
GREATER
ARE
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-US
ABRAHAM WHO-ANY who-any
53 Art thou greater than our father Abraham, which is dead? and the prophets are dead: whom makest thou thyself?
apeqanen kai oi apothnEskO kai ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
apeqanon tina apothnEskO tis

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pi Acc Sg m
seauton poieis seautou poieO

pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg
FROM-DIED died
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers FROM-DIED prophets died ean ean

Cond
ANY whom ?
YOURself
YOU-ARE-makING
8:54 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
doxasw doxazO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
emauton h emautou ho
pf 1 Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
answerED
JESUS
IF-EVER I
SHOULD-BE-esteemING MYself should-be-glorifying o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
esteem glory
54 Jesus answered, If I honour myself, my honour is nothing: it is my Father that honoureth me; of whom ye say, that he is your God:
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-ME
NOT-YET-ONE IS nothing me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
IS it-is on hos
pr Acc Sg m
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
WH
THE
NA
doxazwn doxazO
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti qeos hoti theos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
umwn
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
One-esteemING one-glorifying estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ME
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
ARE-sayING
that
God
OF-US
He-IS
8:55 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
egnwkate ginOskO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kan kan
Cond Con
AND
NOT
YE-HAVE-KNOWN Him
YET HAVE-PERCEIVED Him am-acquainted-with auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND-[IF]-EVER and-if-ever yeusths pseustEs

n_ Nom Sg m
55 Yet ye have not known him; but I know him: and if I should say, I know him not, I shall be a liar like unto you: but I know him, and keep his saying.
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
esomai eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
omoios homoios
a_ Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
I-MAY-BE-sayING that
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED Him I-am-acquainted-with auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
I-SHALL-BE
LIKE
to-YOU(p) ye
FALSifier liar
alla oida alla eidO

kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thrw tEreO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
but
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED Him I-am-acquainted-with
AND
THE
saying word
OF-Him
I-AM-KEEPING
AV
John 8 - John 9
8:56 abraam
abraam
ni proper
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
hgalliasato ina agalliaO hina

vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj
idh eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ABRAHAM THE
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) exults of-ye
56 Your father Abraham rejoiced to see my day: and he saw [it], and was glad.
THAT he-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE he-may-be-acquainted-with kai ecarh kai chairO

Conj vi 2Aor pasD 3 Sg
hmeran thn hEmera ho

emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
kai eiden kai eidO

DAY
THE
MY
AND
he-PERCEIVED AND he-was-acquainted-with-it ioudaioi pros ioudaios pros

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
WAS-JOYED rejoiced penthkonta eth pentEkonta etos

8:57 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oupw oupO
Adv
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews ewrakas horaO

TOWARD Him
FIVE-ty fifty
YEARS
NOT-as-yet
57 Then said the Jews unto him, Thou art not yet fifty years old, and hast thou seen Abraham?
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai abraam kai abraam

Conj ni proper
YOU-ARE-HAVING AND
ABRAHAM YOU-HAVE-SEEN
8:58 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ihsous autos iEsous


umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
prin abraam prin abraam

Adv ni proper
said
to-them
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
58 Jesus said unto them, Verily, verily, I say unto you, Before Abraham was, I am.
ERE
ABRAHAM
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
TO-BE-BECOMING I to-come-into-being
AM
8:59 hran
airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
liqous ina lithos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
balwsin ballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THEY-LIFT they-pick-up ekrubh kruptO

vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
THEN STONES
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-CASTING ON
Him
JESUS
YET

ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
59 Then took they up stones to cast at him: but Jesus hid himself, and went out of the temple, going through the midst of them, and so passed by.
WAS-HID
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
OUT OF-THE
AV
John 9
9:1 kai paragwn

kai
Conj
paragO
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
anqrwpon tuflon ek anthrOpos tuphlos ek

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep
geneths genetE
n_ Gen Sg f
. And as [Jesus] passed by, he saw a man which was blind from [his] birth.
AND
BESIDE-LEADING passing-along
He-PERCEIVED human
BLIND
OUT OF-generating of-birth legontes legO


kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

rabbi tis rhabbi tis

Hebrew pi Nom Sg m
AND
ask
Him
THE
LEARNers disciples goneis goneus

n_ Nom Pl m
OF-Him
sayING
RABBI
ANY who ?
And his disciples asked him, saying, Master, who did sin, this man, or his parents, that he was born blind?
hmarten hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
h E
Part
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
gennhqh gennaO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
missED sinned
this-one this-man
OR
THE
parents
OF-him
THAT BLIND
he-MAY-BE-BEING-generatED he-may-be-being-born oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
9:3 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oute oute
Conj
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hmarten hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oute oute
Conj
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
answerED
JESUS
NOT-BESIDES this-one neither this-man ta ho
missED sinned erga ergon
NOT-BESIDES THE nor tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
parents
Jesus answered, Neither hath this man sinned, nor his parents: but that the works of God should be made manifest in him.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
t_ Nom Pl n
n_ Nom Pl n
OF-him
but
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR THE he-may-be-being-manifested dei deO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
ACTS works tou ho
OF-THE
God
IN
SAME him ews heOs

Conj
4
9:4 hmas
hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
vn Pres midD/pasD
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
t_ Gen Sg m
US
IS-BINDING it-is-binding estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-BE-workING
THE
works
OF-THE
One-SENDing one-sending dunatai dunamai

ME
TILL while
I must work the works of him that sent me, while it is day: the night cometh, when no man can work.
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
ercetai erchomai
nux nux
n_ Nom Sg f
ote oudeis hote oudeis

Adv a_ Nom Sg f
vn Pres midD/pasD
DAY
IS it-is en en
Prep
IS-COMING
NIGHT
when
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one can eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
TO-BE-workING
9:5 otan
hotan
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
w eimi
vs Pres vxx 1 Sg
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
As long as I am in the world, I am the light of the world.
when-EVER IN whenever
THE
SYSTEM world
I-MAY-BE
LIGHT
I-AM
OF-THE
SYSTEM world ek ek
Prep
9:6 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
eptusen camai ptuO chamai

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
kai epoihsen phlon kai poieO pElos

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
these sayING these-things ptusmatos kai ptusma kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
WH
He-SPITS
NA
ON-GROUND AND
makES
MUD
OUT OF-THE
When he had thus spoken, he spat on the ground, and made clay of the spittle, and he anointed the eyes of the blind man with the clay,
epeqhken
epecrisen epichriO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
phlon pElos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
SPITTle
AND
He-ON-ANOINTS anoints
OF-him him
THE
MUD
ON
THE
n_ Acc Pl m
VIEWers eyes
9:7 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
niyai niptO
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kolumbhqran tou kolumbEthra ho

AND
He-said said
to-him
BE-UNDER-LEADING WASH be-you-going-away ! wash-you ! apestalmenos apostellO

INTO THE
SWIMMing-pool pool oun oun

Conj
OF-THE
And said unto him, Go, wash in the pool of Siloam, (which is by interpretation, Sent.) He went his way therefore, and washed, and came seeing.
silwam o silOam hos

ni proper pr Nom Sg n
ermhneuetai hermEneuO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai eniyato kai niptO

Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
SILOAM
WHICH
IS-beING-TRANSLATED HAVING-been-commissionED he-FROM-CAME THEN AND he-came-away blepwn blepO

WASHES

AND
CAME
lookING observing oun oun

Conj
9:8 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
geitones kai oi geitOn kai ho

qewrountes theOreO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proteron proteron
a_ Acc Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
THE
THEN NEIGHBORS
AND
THE
ones-beholdING ones-beholding
him
THE
BEFORE-more that formerly
. The neighbours therefore, and they which before had seen him that he was blind, said, Is not this he that sat and begged?
AV
John 9
prosaiths prosaitEs
n_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ouc ou
Part Neg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD-REQUESTer he-WAS beggar kaqhmenos kathEmai

said
NOT
this
IS
THE
kai prosaitwn kai prosaiteO

one-sittING one-sitting
AND
TOWARD-REQUESTING begging oti outos hoti houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
9:9 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
alla omoios alla homoios

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
others
said
that
this
he-IS
others
said
NOT(emph.) but
Some said, This is he: others [said], He is like him: [but] he said, I am [he].
LIKE
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
to-him him
he-IS
that-one that-one oun oun

Conj
said
that
AM
9:10 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pws pOs
Adv Int
oun oun
Conj
hnewcqhsan anoigO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi ophthalmos
n_ Nom Pl m
10 Therefore said they unto him, How were thine eyes opened?
THEY-said
THEN to-him
how how ? o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THEN
WERE-UP-OPENED OF-YOU were-opened legomenos legO
THE
VIEWers eyes ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
9:11 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
phlon pElos
n_ Acc Sg m
answerED
that-one that-one
THE
human
THE
JESUS
MUD
epoihsen kai epecrisen mou poieO kai epichriO egO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous kai eipen ophthalmos kai legO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oti hoti
Conj
11 He answered and said, A man that is called Jesus made clay, and anointed mine eyes, and said unto me, Go to the pool of Siloam, and wash: and I went and washed, and I received sight.
makES
AND
ON-ANOINTS anoints eis eis

Prep
OF-ME
THE
VIEWers eyes
AND
said
to-ME
that
upage hupagO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
silwam kai niyai silOam kai niptO

ni proper Conj vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
apelqwn aperchomai
oun oun
Conj
kai kai
Conj
YOU-BE-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE be-you-going-away ! niyamenos niptO

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
SILOAM
AND
WASH wash-you !
THEN AND
anebleya anablepO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
WASHing
I-UP-look I-receive-sight autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
9:12 kai eipan

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pou pou
Part Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
12 Then said they unto him, Where is he? He said, I know not.
AND
THEY-say
to-him
?-where IS where ? pros pros

Prep
that-One that-man tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
he-IS-sayING
NOT
13 . They brought to the Pharisees him that aforetime was blind.
9:13 agousin
agO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
farisaious ton pharisaios ho

n_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
pote tuflon pote tuphlos

Part a_ Acc Sg m
THEY-ARE-LEADING him
TOWARD THE
PHARISEES
THE the-one phlon pElos

n_ Acc Sg m
?-when once
BLIND
9:14 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
sabbaton en sabbaton en
n_ Nom Sg n Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
epoihsen o poieO ho
14 And it was the sabbath day when Jesus made the clay, and opened his eyes.
it-WAS
YET SABBATH
IN
WHICH
DAY
THE
MUD
makES
THE
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai anewxen kai anoigO

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
JESUS
AND
UP-OPENS opens
OF-him
THE
VIEWers eyes farisaioi pws anebleyen pharisaios pOs anablepO

n_ Nom Pl m Adv Int vi Aor Act 3 Sg
9:15 palin oun

palin
Adv
oun
Conj
hrwtwn erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
AGAIN
THEN THEY-askED him asked autois phlon autos pElos

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
AND also
THE
PHARISEES
how how ?
he-UP-looks THE he-receives-sight
YET
15 Then again the Pharisees also asked him how he had received his sight. He said unto them, He put clay upon mine eyes, and I washed, and do see.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epeqhken epitithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous kai eniyamhn ophthalmos kai niptO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Mid 1 Sg
said he-said
to-them
MUD
He-ON-PLACES OF-ME he-places-on me
ON
THE
VIEWers eyes
AND
I-WASH
AV
John 9
kai blepw kai blepO

AND
I-AM-lookING I-am-observing oun oun

Conj
9:16 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn tines pharisaios tis

n_ Gen Pl m px Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
said
THEN OUT OF-THE
PHARISEES
ANY some
NOT
IS
this-One this alloi allos

a_ Nom Pl m
BESIDE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos oti to anthrOpos hoti ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n
sabbaton ou sabbaton ou
threi tEreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
16 Therefore said some of the Pharisees, This man is not of God, because he keepeth not the sabbath day. Others said, How can a man that is a sinner do such miracles? And there was a division among them.
God
THE
human
that
THE
SABBATH
NOT
He-IS-KEEPING others
YET
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl

anqrwpos amartwlos toiauta shmeia poiein anthrOpos hamartOlos toioutos sEmeion poieO
n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres Act
kai kai
Conj
said
how how ? hn eimi
IS-ABLE can en en
Prep
human
misser sinning
such
SIGNS
TO-BE-DOING AND
scisma schisma
n_ Nom Sg n
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
SPLIT schism
WAS there-was
IN them among oun oun

Conj
9:17 legousin
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
tuflw palin ti tuphlos palin tis

a_ Dat Sg m Adv pi Acc Sg n
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
peri peri
Prep
THEY-ARE-sayING THEN to-THE
BLIND blind-one sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
AGAIN
ANY what ?
YOU
ARE-sayING
ABOUT concerning oti hoti

Conj
17 They say unto the blind man again, What sayest thou of him, that he hath opened thine eyes? He said, He is a prophet.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
hnewxen anoigO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous o ophthalmos ho
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
Him
that He-UP-OPENS OF-YOU seeing-that he-opens estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes
THE
YET he-said
that
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer He-IS prophet
9:18 ouk
ou
Part Neg
episteusan oun pisteuO oun

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti hn hoti eimi

tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
NOT
BELIEVE
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews
ABOUT him concerning goneis goneus

n_ Acc Pl m
that
he-WAS
BLIND
kai anebleyen ews otou kai anablepO heOs hostis

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pr Gen Sg n Att
efwnhsan tous phOneO ho

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
18 But the Jews did not believe concerning him, that he had been blind, and received his sight, until they called the parents of him that had received his sight.
AND
UP-looks receives-sight
TILL
OF-WHICH-ANY THEY-SOUND which-any they-summon
THE
parents
OF-him
OF-THE the
anableyantos anablepO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
one-UP-looking one-receiving-sight
9:19 kai hrwthsan autous legontes

kai
Conj
erOtaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Pl m
legO
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
THEY-ask
them
sayING
this
IS
THE
SON
OF-YOU(p) of-ye arti arti

Adv
19 And they asked them, saying, Is this your son, who ye say was born blind? how then doth he now see?
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti tuflos hoti tuphlos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
egennhqh gennaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pws oun pOs oun

Adv Int Conj
blepei blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
ARE-sayING
that
BLIND
he-WAS-generatED how he-was-born how ? autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THEN he-IS-lookING at-PRESENT he-is-observing oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
kai eipan kai legO

oti hoti
Conj
answerED
THEN THE
parents
OF-him
AND
say
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware egennhqh gennaO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
20 His parents answered them and said, We know that this is our son, and that he was born blind:
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai oti tuflos kai hoti tuphlos

Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg m
this
IS
THE
SON
OF-US
AND
that
BLIND
he-WAS-generatED he-was-born
AV
John 9
9:21 pws de
pOs
Adv Int
de
Conj
nun blepei nun blepO

ouk ou
Part Neg
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
h E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
hnoixen anoigO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
how how ? tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
YET NOW he-IS-lookING NOT he-is-observing ouk ou

Part Neg
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED OR we-are-aware oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ANY who ?
UP-OPENS opens
OF-him
21 But by what means he now seeth, we know not; or who hath opened his eyes, we know not: he is of age; ask him: he shall speak for himself.
ofqalmous hmeis ophthalmos hEmeis

n_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Nom Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
erwthsate hlikian ecei erOtaO hElikia echO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes peri peri

Prep
WE
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED him are-aware
ask-YE ask-ye !
PRIME stature
he-IS-HAVING
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
lalhsei laleO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
he
ABOUT self concerning himself eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-TALKING shall-be-speaking oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
9:22 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
efobounto phobeO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
these say these-things ioudaious hdh ioudaios EdE

a_ Acc Pl m Adv
THE
parents
OF-him
that THEY-FEARED seeing-that ioudaioi ina ioudaios hina

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
THE
gar suneteqeinto gar suntithEmi

Conj vi Plup Mid 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
22 These [words] spake his parents, because they feared the Jews: for the Jews had agreed already, that if any man did confess that he was Christ, he should be put out of the synagogue.
JUDA-ans Jews auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
ALREADY for
HAD-TOGETHER-PLACED THE had-agreed criston aposunagwgos christos aposunagOgos

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews genhtai ginomai
THAT IF-EVER ANY anyone
omologhsh homologeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
Him
SHOULD-BE-avowING ANOINTED Christ touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
FROM-TOGETHER-LED he-MAY-BE-BECOMING put-out-of-the-synagogue autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
9:23 dia
dia
Prep
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oti hlikian ecei hoti hElikia echO

23 Therefore said his parents, He is of age; ask him.
THRU this because-of auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE
parents
OF-him
say
that
PRIME stature
IS-HAVING he-is-having
eperwthsate eperOtaO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
him
inquire-YE inquire-ye-of ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
9:24 efwnhsan oun

phOneO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
anqrwpon ek anthrOpos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
deuterou os deuteros hos

a_ Gen Sg n pr Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THEY-SOUND they-summon eipan legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEN THE
human
OUT OF-second of-second-time tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
WHO
WAS
BLIND
AND
24 Then again called they the man that was blind, and said unto him, Give God the praise: we know that this man is a sinner.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dos didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
THEY-say
to-him
esteem glory
to-THE
God
WE
HAVE-PERCEIVED that are-aware
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos amartwlos estin anthrOpos hamartOlos eimi

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
this
THE
human
misser sinner ei ei
Cond
IS
9:25 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
amartwlos estin hamartOlos eimi

ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
answerED
THEN that-one that-one oti tuflos hoti tuphlos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
IF
misser sinner
IS he-is arti arti

Adv
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED ONE I-am-aware one-thing
25 He answered and said, Whether he be a sinner [or no], I know not: one thing I know, that, whereas I was blind, now I see.
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
wn eimi
blepw blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware-of
BLIND
BEING
at-PRESENT I-AM-lookING I-am-observing epoihsen soi poieO su

9:26 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
pws hnoixen pOs anoigO

Adv Int vi Aor Act 3 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
26 Then said they to him again, What did he to thee? how opened he thine eyes?
THEY-said
THEN to-him
ANY what ?
He-DOES
to-YOU
how how ?
He-UP-OPENS OF-YOU he-opens
THE
n_ Acc Pl m
VIEWers eyes
AV
John 9
9:27 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois eipon autos legO

pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
hdh EdE
Adv
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hkousate ti akouO tis

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pi Acc Sg n
palin palin
Adv
he-answerED
to-them them akouein akouO

vn Pres Act
I-said I-told mh mE
Part Neg
to-YOU(p) ye
ALREADY AND
NOT
YE-HEAR
ANY why ?
AGAIN
27 He answered them, I have told you already, and ye did not hear: wherefore would ye hear [it] again? will ye also be his disciples?
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
maqhtai genesqai mathEtEs ginomai

n_ Nom Pl m vn 2Aor midD
YE-ARE-WILLING TO-BE-HEARING NO
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ARE-WILLING OF-Him
LEARNers disciples
TO-BE-BECOMING
9:28 kai eloidorhsan auton

kai
Conj
loidoreO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai eipon kai legO

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
maqhths ei mathEtEs eimi

ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg m
28 Then they reviled him, and said, Thou art his disciple; but we are Moses'disciples.
AND
THEY-say-SPEAR they-revile de de
Conj
him
AND
said
YOU
LEARNer disciple
ARE
OF-that-one of-that-man
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mwusews esmen mOusEs eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
WE
YET OF-THE
MOSES
ARE
LEARNers disciples qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
9:29 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti mwusei lelalhken o hoti mOusEs laleO ho

Conj n_ Dat Sg m vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
touton de houtos de
pd Acc Sg m Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
WE
HAVE-PERCEIVED that are-aware poqen pothen

Adv Int
to-MOSES
HAS-TALKED has-spoken
THE
God
this-one this-man
YET NOT
29 We know that God spake unto Moses: [as for] this [fellow], we know not from whence he is.
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE He-IS we-are-aware whence ?
9:30 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos kai eipen anthrOpos kai legO

autois en autos en
pp Dat Pl m Prep
toutw gar to houtos gar ho

pd Dat Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg n
answerED
THE
human
AND
said
to-them
IN
this
for
THE
30 The man answered and said unto them, Why herein is a marvellous thing, that ye know not from whence he is, and [yet] he hath opened mine eyes.
qaumaston estin thaumastos eimi

oti umeis hoti humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
poqen pothen
Adv Int
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
MARVELous marvelous-thing hnoixen anoigO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
IS
that
YOU(p) ye
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-WHICH-PLACE He-IS are-aware whence ?
AND
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
He-UP-OPENS OF-ME he-opens
THE
VIEWers eyes
WH WH
9:31 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
o qeos amartwlwn
WH
NA
amartwlwn o hamartOlos ho
NA
NA
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware ouk ou

Part Neg
missers sinners tis tis

px Nom Sg m
THE
God
31 Now we know that God heareth not sinners: but if any man be a worshipper of God, and doeth his will, him he heareth.
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
all ean alla ean

Conj Cond
qeosebhs theosebEs
a_ Nom Sg m
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n

NOT
IS-HEARING
but
IF-EVER ANY anyone
God-REVERer MAY-BE reverer-of-God
AND
THE
WILL
OF-Him
poih poieO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
toutou akouei houtos akouO

pd Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-DOING OF-this-one this-one
He-IS-HEARING
9:32 ek
ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hkousqh akouO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
oti hnewxen hoti anoigO

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ofqalmous tuflou ophthalmos tuphlos

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Gen Sg m
OUT OF-THE
eon
NOT
it-IS-HEARD
that
UP-OPENS opens
ANY anyone
VIEWers eyes
OF-BLIND
32 Since the world began was it not heard that any man opened the eyes of one that was born blind.
gegennhmenou gennaO
vp Perf Pas Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-generatED one-having-been-born
9:33 ei
ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
para para
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdunato dunamai
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
33 If this man were not of God, he could do nothing.
IF
NO
WAS
this-One this-man
BESIDE God
NOT
He-was-ABLE he-could
TO-BE-DOING
AV
John 9
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE anything

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
amartiais su hamartia su
n_ Dat Pl f pp 2 Nom Sg
egennhqhs gennaO
vi Aor Pas 2 Sg
olos holos
a_ Nom Sg m
THEY-answerED
AND
say
to-him
IN
misses sins
YOU
WERE-generatED WHOLE were-born wholly exw exO

Adv
34 They answered and said unto him, Thou wast altogether born in sins, and dost thou teach us? And they cast him out.
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
didaskeis didaskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai exebalon kai ekballO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
YOU
ARE-TEACHING US
AND
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) him they-cast-out (past) auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OUT outside kai eurwn kai heuriskO

9:35 hkousen
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti exebalon hoti ekballO

exw exO
Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
HEARS
JESUS
that
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) him they-cast-out (past) eis eis

Prep
OUT AND outside tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
FINDING
him
35 . Jesus heard that they had cast him out; and when he had found him, he said unto him, Dost thou believe on the Son of God?
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
pisteueis pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
He-said
YOU
ARE-BELIEVING INTO THE

WH WH NA
SON
NA
OF-THE
human
9:36 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
kai eipen
kai eipen kai legO

kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
36 He answered and said, Who is he, Lord, that I might believe on him?
answerED
that-one that-one pisteusw pisteuO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
said
AND
ANY who ?
He-IS
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Master ! Lord !
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING INTO Him
9:37 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ewrakas kai horaO

Conj vi Perf Act 2 Sg Att
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
37 And Jesus said unto him, Thou hast both seen him, and it is he that talketh with thee.
said
to-him
THE
JESUS
AND also estin eimi
YOU-HAVE-SEEN Him
AND
THE
lalwn laleO
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
One-TALKING one-speaking
WITH
YOU
that-One that-one pisteuw pisteuO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
IS it-is kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
9:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai prosekunhsen autw kai proskuneO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
38 And he said, Lord, I believe. And he worshipped him.
THE
YET AVERRed he-averred o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-BELIEVING Master ! Lord ! ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
he-worships
to-Him him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
9:39 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eis eis
Prep
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
said
THE
JESUS
INTO JUDGment I
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
39 . And Jesus said, For judgment I am come into this world, that they which see not might see; and that they which see might be made blind.
touton hlqon houtos erchomai

pd Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
blepontes blepO
blepwsin blepO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
this
CAME
THAT THE-ones the-ones tufloi genwntai tuphlos ginomai

a_ Nom Pl m vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
NO
lookING observing
MAY-BE-lookING AND may-be-observing
THE-ones the-ones
blepontes blepO
lookING observing
BLIND
MAY-BE-BECOMING
9:40 hkousan ek
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn tauta pharisaios houtos

n_ Gen Pl m pd Acc Pl n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
ontes eimi
kai kai
Conj
HEAR
OUT OF-THE
PHARISEES
these THE-ones these-things the-ones tufloi esmen tuphlos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m
WITH Him
BEING
AND
40 And [some] of the Pharisees which were with him heard these words, and said unto him, Are we blind also?
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
THEY-said
to-Him
NO not
AND also
WE
BLIND
ARE
AV
John 9 - John 10
9:41 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tufloi hte tuphlos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 2 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
an an
Part
said
to-them
THE
JESUS
IF
BLIND
YE-WERE
NOT
EVER
41 Jesus said unto them, If ye were blind, ye should have no sin: but now ye say, We see; therefore your sin remaineth.
eicete echO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
amartian nun de hamartia nun de

legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti blepomen hoti blepO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
amartia umwn hamartia humeis

YE-HAD
missing sin
NOW YET YE-ARE-sayING that
WE-ARE-lookING THE we-are-observing
missing sin
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-REMAINING
AV
John 10
10:1 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
eisercomenos eiserchomai
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AMEN verily quras thura

n_ Gen Sg f
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
THE-one the-one
NO
THRU THE through allacoqen ekeinos allachothen ekeinos

Adv pd Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aulhn aulE
n_ Acc Sg f
probatwn alla anabainwn probaton alla anabainO

n_ Gen Pl n Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
. Verily, verily, I say unto you, He that entereth not by the door into the sheepfold, but climbeth up some other way, the same is a thief and a robber.
t_ Gen Pl n
DOOR
INTO THE
COURT fold
OF-THE
sheep sheep(p)
but
UP-STEPPING climbing-up
other-whence elsewhere
that-one that-one
klepths estin kleptEs eimi

kai lhsths kai lEstEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
thief
IS
AND
ROBBER
10:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eisercomenos eiserchomai
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
quras thura
n_ Gen Sg f
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
But he that entereth in by the door is the shepherd of the sheep.
THE-one the-one probatwn probaton

n_ Gen Pl n
YET INTO-COMING entering
THRU THE through
DOOR
SHEPHERD IS
OF-THE
sheep sheep(p)
10:3 toutw o
houtos
pd Dat Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qurwros thurOros
n_ Nom Sg m
anoigei anoigO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
probata ths probaton ho

fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
to-this-one to-this-one autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
DOOR-SEE-er IS-UP-OPENING AND doorkeeper is-opening kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
THE
sheep sheep(p) kat kata

Prep
OF-THE the
SOUND voice kai kai

Conj
To him the porter openeth; and the sheep hear his voice: and he calleth his own sheep by name, and leadeth them out.
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
probata fwnei probaton phOneO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-him
IS-HEARING
AND
THE
OWN
sheep sheep(p)
He-IS-SOUNDING according-to NAME downby he-is-summoning
AND
exagei exagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
IS-OUT-LEADING them is-leading-out
10:4 otan
hotan
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ekbalh ekballO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl n
when-EVER THE whenever poreuetai poreuomai

OWN
ALL
he-SHOULD-BE-OUT-CASTING IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them he-should-be-ejecting in-front-of them akolouqei oti oidasin akoloutheO hoti eidO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj vi Perf Act 3 Pl
And when he putteth forth his own sheep, he goeth before them, and the sheep follow him: for they know his voice.
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
probata autw probaton autos

n_ Acc Pl n pp Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
he-IS-GOING
AND
THE
sheep sheep(p)
to-him him
IS-followING
that
THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE they-are-acquainted-with

SOUND voice
OF-him
10:5 allotriw
allotrios
a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
akolouqhsousin akoloutheO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
alla feuxontai alla pheugO

ap apo
Prep
to-other-placed-one YET NOT outsider autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
NO
THEY-SHALL-BE-followING but
THEY-SHALL-BE-FLEEING FROM
And a stranger will they not follow, but will flee from him: for they know not the voice of strangers.
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
oidasin eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
allotriwn allotrios
a_ Gen Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
fwnhn phOnE
n_ Acc Sg f
him
that
NOT
THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED OF-THE they-are-acquainted-with paroimian eipen paroimia legO

other-placed-ones THE outsiders ihsous iEsous
SOUND voice ekeinoi de ekeinos de

pd Nom Pl m Conj
10:6 tauthn thn

houtos
pd Acc Sg f
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autois o autos ho
ouk ou
Part Neg
n_ Nom Sg m
this
THE
proverb
said told a hos

pr Acc Pl n
to-them them elalei laleO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
JESUS
those
YET NOT
This parable spake Jesus unto them: but they understood not what things they were which he spake unto them.
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tina tis
pi Nom Pl n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
KNOW
ANY WAS what-things ? it-was
WHICH which(p)
He-TALKED he-spoke
to-them
AV
John 10
10:7 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
palin palin
Adv
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
said
NA
THEN AGAIN
THE
JESUS
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Then said Jesus unto them again, Verily, verily, I say unto you, I am the door of the sheep.
oti hoti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qura thura
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
probatwn probaton
n_ Gen Pl n
that
AM
THE
WH
DOOR
WH
OF-THE
NA
sheep sheep(p)
NA
10:8 pantes osoi

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pro emou
pro pro
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kleptai eisin kleptEs eimi

All that ever came before me are thieves and robbers: but the sheep did not hear them.
ALL
as-many-as CAME whoever all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
BEFORE OF-ME me ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
thieves
ARE
kai lhstai kai lEstEs

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
hkousan autwn akouO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Pl m
probata probaton
n_ Nom Pl n
AND
ROBBERS
but
NOT
HEAR
OF-them them qura thura

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
sheep sheep(p) emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
10:9 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
di dia
Prep
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eiselqh eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AM
THE
DOOR
THRU ME through
IF-EVER ANY anyone
MAY-BE-INTO-COMING may-be-entering
I am the door: by me if any man enter in, he shall be saved, and shall go in and out, and find pasture.
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kai eiseleusetai kai eiserchomai

kai exeleusetai kai exerchomai

kai nomhn kai nomE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED AND
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING AND shall-be-entering
SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING AND shall-be-coming-out
pasture
eurhsei heuriskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-FINDING
10:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
klepths ouk kleptEs ou

ercetai erchomai
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ina hina
Conj
kleyh kleptO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE
thief
NOT
IS-COMING
IF
NO
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-stealING AND
qush thuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
kai apolesh kai apollumi

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
10 The thief cometh not, but for to steal, and to kill, and to destroy: I am come that they might have life, and that they might have [it] more abundantly.
SHOULD-BE-SACRIFICING AND
SHOULD-BE-destroyING I
CAME
THAT LIFE
ecwsin echO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
kai perisson kai perissos

Conj Adv
ecwsin echO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-HAVING AND
excessive THEY-MAY-BE-HAVING superabundantly they-may-be-having-it o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
10:11 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kalos kalos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 I am the good shepherd: the good shepherd giveth his life for the sheep.
AM
THE
SHEPHERD THE
IDEAL
THE
SHEPHERD THE
kalos kalos
a_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tiqhsin tithEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
uper huper
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
probatwn probaton
n_ Gen Pl n
IDEAL
THE
soul
OF-Him
IS-PLACING is-laying-down wn eimi
OVER THE for-the-sake-of poimhn poimEn

n_ Nom Sg m
sheep sheep(p) ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
10:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
misqwtos kai ouk misthOtos kai ou

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Part Neg
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
HIRED-one hireling probata idia probaton idios

n_ Nom Pl n a_ Nom Pl n
AND also
NOT
BEING
SHEPHERD OF-WHOM
NOT
IS
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
qewrei theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
lukon lukos
n_ Acc Sg m
ercomenon erchomai
kai kai
Conj
12 But he that is an hireling, and not the shepherd, whose own the sheep are not, seeth the wolf coming, and leaveth the sheep, and fleeth: and the wolf catcheth them, and scattereth the sheep.
THE
sheep sheep(p) ta ho
OWN
IS-beholdING
THE
WOLF
COMING
AND
afihsin aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
probata kai feugei probaton kai pheugO

n_ Acc Pl n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
lukos lukos
n_ Nom Sg m
arpazei harpazO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
t_ Acc Pl n
IS-FROM-LETTING THE is-leaving
sheep sheep(p)
AND
IS-FLEEING
AND
THE
WOLF
IS-SNATCHING them
AV
John 10
kai skorpizei kai skorpizO

AND
IS-SCATTERING
10:13 oti misqwtos estin

hoti
Conj
misthOtos
n_ Nom Sg m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
melei melei
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
peri peri
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
13 The hireling fleeth, because he is an hireling, and careth not for the sheep.
that
HIRED-one hireling
he-IS
AND
NOT
to-him
probatwn probaton
n_ Gen Pl n
sheep sheep(p)
10:14 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kalos kalos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai ginwskw kai ginOskO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
14 I am the good shepherd, and know my [sheep], and am known of mine.
AM
THE
SHEPHERD THE
IDEAL
AND
I-AM-KNOWING THE
ema emos
ps 1 Acc Pl
kai ginwskousin kai ginOskO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ema emos
ps 1 Acc Pl
MY mine(p)
AND
THEY-ARE-KNOWING ME are-knowing ginwskei me ginOskO egO

THE
MY mine(p) pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
10:15 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
ginwskw ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
according-AS IS-KNOWING
ME
THE
FATHER
AND-I
AM-KNOWING THE
15 As the Father knoweth me, even so know I the Father: and I lay down my life for the sheep.
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tiqhmi tithEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
uper huper
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
probatwn probaton
n_ Gen Pl n
FATHER
AND
THE
soul
OF-ME
I-AM-PLACING OVER THE I-am-laying-down for-the-sake-of a hos

pr Nom Pl n
sheep sheep(p) ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
10:16 kai alla

kai
Conj
allos
a_ Acc Pl n
probata ecw probaton echO

ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
aulhs aulE
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
other
sheep sheep(p)
I-AM-HAVING
WHICH which(p)
NOT
IS
OUT OF-THE
COURT fold
tauths kakeina dei houtos kakeinos deO

pd Gen Sg f pd Nom Pl n vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
agagein agO
vn 2Aor Act
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
16 And other sheep I have, which are not of this fold: them also I must bring, and they shall hear my voice; and there shall be one fold, [and] one shepherd.
this
AND-those also-those
IS-BINDING it-is-binding
ME
TO-BE-LEADING AND
OF-THE the
SOUND voice eis heis

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ME
akousousin akouO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
kai genhsontai kai ginomai

mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
poimnh poimnE
n_ Nom Sg f
poimhn poimEn
n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-SHALL-BE-HEARING AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-BECOMING ONE
SHEEP-herd ONE flock agapa agapaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SHEPHERD
10:17 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
tiqhmi tithEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THRU this because-of thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ME
THE
FATHER
IS-LOVING
that I seeing-that
AM-PLACING am-laying-down
17 Therefore doth my Father love me, because I lay down my life, that I might take it again.
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
palin labw palin lambanO

authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
THE
soul
OF-ME
WH
THAT AGAIN
NA
I-MAY-BE-GETTING her herit authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
10:18 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
hren
airei airO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ap apo
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
all egw alla egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
tiqhmi tithEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE no-one authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
her herit
FROM ME
but
AM-PLACING am-laying-down
ap apo
Prep
emautou exousian ecw emautou exousia echO

pf 1 Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Sg
qeinai tithEmi
vn 2Aor Act
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai exousian ecw kai exousia echO

18 No man taketh it from me, but I lay it down of myself. I have power to lay it down, and I have power to take it again. This commandment have I received of my Father.
her herit
FROM MYself
authority right authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
I-AM-HAVING
TO-PLACE her to-lay-down herit entolhn elabon entolE lambanO

n_ Acc Sg f
AND
authority right para para

Prep
I-AM-HAVING
palin labein palin lambanO

Adv vn 2Aor Act

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
AGAIN
TO-BE-GETTING her herit
this
THE
direction precept
I-GOT
BESIDE THE
FATHER
AV
John 10
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
10:19 scisma
schisma
n_ Nom Sg n
palin egeneto palin ginomai

en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois dia ioudaios dia

a_ Dat Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous logos
n_ Acc Pl m
19 . There was a division therefore again among the Jews for these sayings.
SPLIT schism toutous houtos

pd Acc Pl m
AGAIN
BECAME
IN THE among
JUDA-ans Jews
THRU THE because-of
sayings words
these
10:20 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m

kai mainetai kai mainomai

20 And many of them said, He hath a devil, and is mad; why hear ye him?
said
YET MANY
OUT OF-them
demon
He-IS-HAVING AND
IS-beING-MAD he-is-being-mad
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ANY why ?
OF-Him him
YE-ARE-HEARING
10:21 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Nom Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
daimonizomenou daimonizomai
others
said
these
THE
declarations NOT
IS
OF-demonizING of-one-being-demonized
21 Others said, These are not the words of him that hath a devil. Can a devil open the eyes of the blind?
mh mE
Part Neg
daimonion dunatai daimonion dunamai

n_ Nom Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
tuflwn ofqalmous anoixai tuphlos ophthalmos anoigO

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
NO
demon
IS-ABLE can tote ta tote ho

Adv t_ Nom Pl n
VIEWers eyes tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
TO-UP-OPEN to-open ierosolumois ceimwn ierosoluma cheimOn

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Nom Sg m
10:22 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
egkainia en egkainia en
n_ Nom Pl n Prep
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
22 . And it was at Jerusalem the feast of the dedication, and it was winter.
BECAME
then
THE
WH
IN-NEWings Dedications
NA
IN
THE
JERUSALEM
WINTER
WAS it-was en en
Prep
10:23 kai periepatei

kai
Conj
peripateO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
23 And Jesus walked in the temple in Solomon's porch.
AND
ABOUT-TROD walked solomwnos solomOn

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
JESUS
IN
THE
SACRED-place IN sanctuary
THE
stoa stoa
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
portico
OF-THE
SOLOMON
10:24 ekuklwsan oun

kukloO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi kai elegon ioudaios kai legO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ews pote heOs pote

Conj Part Int
surROUND
THEN Him
THE
JUDA-ans Jews ei ei
Cond
AND
THEY-said
to-Him
TILL
?-when when ?
WH
24 Then came the Jews round about him, and said unto him, How long dost thou make us to doubt? If thou be the Christ, tell us plainly.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
aireis airO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipon
THE
NA
soul
OF-US
YOU-ARE-LIFTING IF
YOU
ARE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
parrhsia parrhEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
BE-sayING be-you-telling !
to-US us
to-boldness
WH NA
10:25 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
answerED
to-them them ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
THE
JESUS
I-said I-told en en
Prep
to-YOU(p) ye tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
NOT
25 Jesus answered them, I told you, and ye believed not: the works that I do in my Father's name, they bear witness of me.
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

YE-ARE-BELIEVING THE
ACTS works
WHICH
AM-DOING
IN
THE
NAME
OF-THE
AV
John 10
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
marturei martureO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FATHER
OF-ME
these
ABOUT ME concerning ouk ou

Part Neg
10:26 alla umeis

alla
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuete oti pisteuO hoti

vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
probatwn probaton
n_ Gen Pl n
but
YOU(p) ye emwn emos

ps 1 Gen Pl
26 But ye believe not, because ye are not of my sheep, as I said unto you.
NOT
ARE-BELIEVING that NOT seeing-that
YE-ARE
OUT OF-THE
sheep sheep(p)
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
THE
MY
10:27 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ema emos
ps 1 Nom Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
akouousin kagw akouO kagO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg Con
27 My sheep hear my voice, and I know them, and they follow me:
THE
sheep sheep(p) auta autos

pp Acc Pl n
THE
MY
OF-THE the
SOUND voice
OF-ME
ARE-HEARING
AND-I
ginwskw ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai akolouqousin moi kai akoloutheO egO

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
AM-KNOWING them
AND
THEY-ARE-followING
to-ME me aiwnion kai ou aiOnios kai ou

a_ Acc Sg f Conj Part Neg
10:28 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
didwmi didOmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
autois zwhn autos zOE

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
AND-I
AM-GIVING
to-them them eis eis

Prep
LIFE
eonian
AND
NOT
NO
28 And I give unto them eternal life; and they shall never perish, neither shall any [man] pluck them out of my hand.
apolwntai apollumi
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
arpasei harpazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED INTO THE
eon
AND
NOT
SHALL-BE-SNATCHING ANY anyone
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
them
OUT OF-THE
HAND
OF-ME
10:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
o hos
pr Nom Sg m
dedwken didOmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pantwn meizon pas mega

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg n Cmp
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
WHICH who
HAS-GIVEN to-ME has-given-them arpazein harpazO

vn Pres Act
OF-ALL
GREATer
29 My Father, which gave [them] me, is greater than all; and no [man] is able to pluck [them] out of my Father's hand.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
dunatai dunamai
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
IS
AND
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one
TO-BE-SNATCHING OUT OF-THE to-be-snatching-them
HAND
OF-THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
FATHER
10:30 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
30
I and [my] Father are one.
AND
THE
FATHER
ONE
ARE we-are ioudaioi ina ioudaios hina

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
10:31 ebastasan palin liqous oi

bastazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
palin
Adv
lithos
n_ Acc Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
liqaswsin lithazO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
31 Then the Jews took up stones again to stone him.
BEAR
AGAIN
STONES
THE
JUDA-ans Jews polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-STONING Him

WH WH WH NA
10:32 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
edeixa umin kala
kala kalos
a_ Acc Pl n
answerED
NA NA
to-them them ek ek
Prep
THE
JESUS
MANY
ACTS
IDEAL
32 Jesus answered them, Many good works have I shewed you from my Father; for which of those works do ye stone me?
edeixa deiknumi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
poion poios
pi Acc Sg n
autwn ergon autos ergon

pp Gen Pl n n_ Acc Sg n
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
I-SHOW
to-YOU(p) ye
OUT OF-THE
FATHER
THRU ?-THE-WHICH OF-them because-of what ?
ACT
ME
AV
John 10
liqazete lithazO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-STONING
10:33 apekriqhsan autw

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
kalou kalos
a_ Gen Sg n
ergou ergon
n_ Gen Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
answerED
to-Him him se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
ABOUT IDEAL concerning kai oti su kai hoti su

Conj Conj
ACT
NOT
liqazomen lithazO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
alla peri alla peri

Conj Prep
n_ Gen Sg f
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
33 The Jews answered him, saying, For a good work we stone thee not; but for blasphemy; and because that thou, being a man, makest thyself God.
pp 2 Nom Sg
WE-ARE-STONING YOU
but
ABOUT HARM-AVERment AND concerning blasphemy seauton qeon seautou theos

pf 3 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
that
YOU
human
wn eimi
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
BEING
ARE-makING
YOURself
God
10:34 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegrammenon graphO
en en
Prep
34 Jesus answered them, Is it not written in your law, I said, Ye are gods?
answerED
to-them them umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
JESUS
NOT
IS it-is qeoi theos

n_ Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
eipa legO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
THE
LAW
say
gods
YE-ARE
10:35 ei
ei
Cond
ekeinous eipen ekeinos legO

pd Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qeous theos
n_ Acc Pl m
pros pros
Prep
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
IF
those
He-said
gods
TOWARD WHOM
THE
saying word grafh graphE

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
God
35 If he called them gods, unto whom the word of God came, and the scripture cannot be broken;
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
luqhnai luO
vn Aor Pas
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
BECAME
AND
NOT
IS-ABLE can pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-LOOSED THE to-be-annulled hgiasen hagiazO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WRITing scripture ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
10:36 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai apesteilen eis kai apostellO eis

kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
WHOM
THE
FATHER
HOLYizES hallows oti hoti

Conj
AND
commissions dispatches uios huios
INTO THE
SYSTEM world qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
36 Say ye of him, whom the Father hath sanctified, and sent into the world, Thou blasphemest; because I said, I am the Son of God?
legete legO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti blasfhmeis hoti blasphEmeO

eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
ARE-sayING
that
YOU-ARE-HARM-AVERRING that I-said you-are-blaspheming seeing-that
SON
OF-THE
God
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
I-AM
10:37 ei
ei
Cond
ou ou
Part Neg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteuete pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
37 If I do not the works of my Father, believe me not.
IF
NOT
I-AM-DOING
THE
ACTS works
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
NO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME me
10:38 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kan kan
Cond Con
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteuhte pisteuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ergois ergon
n_ Dat Pl n
IF
YET I-AM-DOING
AND-[IF]-EVER to-ME and-if-ever me
NO
YE-MAY-BE-BELIEVING to-THE the oti en hoti en

Conj Prep
ACTS works o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
38 But if I do, though ye believe not me, believe the works: that ye may know, and believe, that the Father [is] in me, and I in him.
pisteuete ina pisteuO hina

vm Pres Act 2 Pl Conj
gnwte ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai ginwskhte kai ginOskO

emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THAT YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING AND
YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING that
IN
ME
THE
AV
John 10 - John 11
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
FATHER
AND-I
IN
THE
FATHER
10:39 ezhtoun
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
palin piasai kai exhlqen palin piazO kai exerchomai

Adv vn Aor Act Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
39 . Therefore they sought again to take him: but he escaped out of their hand,
THEY-SOUGHT
THEN
Him
AGAIN
TO-arrest
AND
He-OUT-CAME OUT OF-THE he-came-out
HAND
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
10:40 kai aphlqen

kai
Conj
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
palin peran palin peran

Adv Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iordanou eis iordanEs eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
AND
He-FROM-CAME AGAIN he-came-away iwannhs to iOannEs ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
JORDAN
INTO THE
WH NA
PLACE
THE-?-where wheree ekei ekei

Adv
40 And went away again beyond Jordan into the place where John at first baptized; and there he abode.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
prwton prOtos
a_ Nom Sg n
baptizwn baptizO
kai kai
Conj
emenen
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WAS
JOHN
THE
BEFORE-most DIPizING formerly baptizing pros pros

Prep
AND
He-REMAINS
there
10:41 kai polloi

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

oti iwannhs men hoti iOannEs men

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Part
shmeion sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
MANY
CAME
TOWARD Him
AND
THEY-said
that
JOHN
INDEED SIGN
41 And many resorted unto him, and said, John did no miracle: but all things that John spake of this man were true.
epoihsen ouden poieO oudeis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
iwannhs peri iOannEs peri

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
toutou alhqh houtos alEthEs

pd Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl n
DOES
NOT-YET-ONE ALL not-one
YET as-much-as said whatever
JOHN
ABOUT this-One concerning this-one
TRUE
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
WAS
10:42 kai polloi

kai
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ekei ekei
Adv
42 And many believed on him there.
AND
MANY
BELIEVE
INTO Him
there
AV
John 11
11:1 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
asqenwn astheneO
lazaros apo lazaros apo

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
bhqanias ek bEthania ek
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kwmhs kOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
WAS there-was marias maria

n_ Gen Sg f
YET ANY certain-man ths ho
beING-UN-FIRM being-infirm
LAZARUS
FROM BETHANY
OUT OF-THE
VILLAGE
. Now a certain [man] was sick, [named] Lazarus, of Bethany, the town of Mary and her sister Martha.
kai marqas kai martha

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
adelfhs auths adelphE autos

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-MARY
AND
OF-MARTHA THE Martha de de

Conj
sister
OF-her
11:2 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
mariam h maria ho
aleiyasa aleiphO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
murw muron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
WAS it-was ekmaxasa ekmassO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
YET MARIAM Mary tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
one-RUBBing one-rubbing tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
THE
Master Lord hs hos
to-ATTAR
AND
(It was [that] Mary which anointed the Lord with ointment, and wiped his feet with her hair, whose brother Lazarus was sick.)
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
pr Gen Sg f
OUT-WIPing wiping-off
THE
FEET
OF-Him
to-THE
HAIR hairs
OF-her
OF-WHOM THE
brother
lazaros hsqenei lazaros astheneO

LAZARUS
was-UN-FIRM was-infirm ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
11:3 apesteilan oun

apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
adelfai pros adelphE pros

n_ Nom Pl f Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legousai legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
Therefore his sisters sent unto him, saying, Lord, behold, he whom thou lovest is sick.
commission dispatch ide eidO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
THEN THE
sisters
TOWARD Him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
fileis phileO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
asqenei astheneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING WHOM lo !
YOU-ARE-beING-FOND IS-beING-UN-FIRM you-are-being-fond-of is-being-infirm de de

Conj
11:4 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
HEARing hearing-it estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
said
this
THE
UN-FIRMness NOT infirmity qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
When Jesus heard [that], he said, This sickness is not unto death, but for the glory of God, that the Son of God might be glorified thereby.
pros pros
Prep
qanaton all uper ths thanatos alla huper ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
IS
TOWARD DEATH
but
OVER for uios huios
THE
esteem glory qeou theos
OF-THE
God
THAT
doxasqh doxazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED THE should-be-being-glorified
SON
OF-THE
God
THRU it through herit adelfhn auths adelphE autos

11:5 hgapa
agapaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marqan kai thn martha kai ho

kai kai
Conj
Now Jesus loved Martha, and her sister, and Lazarus.
LOVED
YET THE
JESUS
THE
MARTHA
AND
THE
sister
OF-her
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
lazaron lazaros
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
LAZARUS
11:6 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oti asqenei hoti astheneO

tote men tote men

Adv Part
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
AS
THEN He-HEARS
that
he-IS-beING-UN-FIRM then he-is-being-infirm hmeras hEmera

n_ Acc Pl f
INDEED He-REMAINS IN
WHICH
When he had heard therefore that he was sick, he abode two days still in the same place where he was.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
He-WAS
to-PLACE place
TWO
DAYS
11:7 epeita
epeita
Adv
meta touto meta houtos

Prep pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais agwmen mathEtEs agO

n_ Dat Pl m vs Pres Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Then after that saith he to [his] disciples, Let us go into Judaea again.
ON-THEREAFTER after thereupon
this
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
WE-MAY-BE-LEADING INTO THE we-may-be-going
AV
John 11
ioudaian palin ioudaia palin

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
JUDEA
AGAIN
11:8 legousin autw

legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai rabbi nun ezhtoun mathEtEs rhabbi nun zEteO

n_ Nom Pl m Hebrew Adv vi impf Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
liqasai oi lithazO ho
ARE-sayING
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
RABBI
NOW SOUGHT
YOU
TO-STONE
THE
[His] disciples say unto him, Master, the Jews of late sought to stone thee; and goest thou thither again?
ioudaioi kai palin upageis ioudaios kai palin hupagO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ekei ekei
Adv
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
AGAIN
YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING there you-are-going-away ouci ouchi

Part Int
11:9 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
dwdeka wrai dOdeka hOra

ni numeral n_ Nom Pl f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ean ean
Cond
answerED
JESUS
NOT(emph.) TWO-TEN not(emph.) ? twelve en en

Prep
HOURS
ARE there-are ou ou
Part Neg
OF-THE
DAY
IF-EVER
Jesus answered, Are there not twelve hours in the day? If any man walk in the day, he stumbleth not, because he seeth the light of this world.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
peripath peripateO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
proskoptei proskoptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
ANY anyone fws phOs

n_ Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN may-be-walking tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
DAY
NOT
he-IS-TOWARD-STRIKING that he-is-stumbling
THE
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou blepei houtos blepO

LIGHT
OF-THE
SYSTEM world tis tis

px Nom Sg m
this
he-IS-lookING he-is-observing en en
Prep
11:10 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
peripath peripateO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
10 But if a man walk in the night, he stumbleth, because there is no light in him.
IF-EVER YET ANY anyone to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
MAY-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN may-be-walking estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
NIGHT
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
LIGHT
NOT
IS
IN
him
11:11 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai meta touto kai meta houtos

Conj Prep pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois lazaros o autos lazaros ho

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
these He-said these-things filos philos

a_ Nom Sg m
AND
after
this
He-IS-sayING
to-them
LAZARUS
THE
11 These things said he: and after that he saith unto them, Our friend Lazarus sleepeth; but I go, that I may awake him out of sleep.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kekoimhtai koimaO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
alla poreuomai alla poreuomai

ina hina
Conj
exupnisw exupnizO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
FOND-one friend
OF-US
HAS-been-reposED but has-repose oun oun

Conj
I-AM-GOING
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-SLEEPizING him I-should-be-awakening-out-of-sleep kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
11:12 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai autw mathEtEs autos

n_ Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
kekoimhtai koimaO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
12 Then said his disciples, Lord, if he sleep, he shall do well.
say
THEN THE
LEARNers disciples
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
IF
he-HAS-been-reposED he-has-repose
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
11:13 eirhkei
ereO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou autou thanatos autos

ekeinoi de ekeinos de
pd Nom Pl m Conj
HAD-declarED
YET THE
JESUS
DEATH
OF-him
those
YET
13 Howbeit Jesus spake of his death: but they thought that he had spoken of taking of rest in sleep.
edoxan dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oti peri hoti peri

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
koimhsews tou koimEsis ho

upnou hupnos
n_ Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SEEM suppose
that

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
LIE-ing repose autois o autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
OF-THE
SLEEP
He-IS-sayING he-is-saying-it
14 Then said Jesus unto them plainly, Lazarus is dead.
11:14 tote oun

tote
Adv
oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
parrhsia lazaros apeqanen parrhEsia lazaros apothnEskO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
then
THEN said
to-them
THE
JESUS
to-boldness
LAZARUS
FROM-DIED died
AV
John 11
11:15 kai cairw

kai
Conj
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
AND
I-AM-JOYING I-am-rejoicing
THRU YOU(p) because-of ye pros pros

Prep
THAT YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that NOT seeing-that auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
I-WAS
15 And I am glad for your sakes that I was not there, to the intent ye may believe; nevertheless let us go unto him.
ekei alla agwmen ekei alla agO

Adv Conj vs Pres Act 1 Pl
there
but
WE-MAY-BE-LEADING TOWARD him we-may-be-going oun oun

Conj
11:16 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qwmas thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
didumos didumos
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
summaqhtais summathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
said
THEN THOMAS
THE
twin (Didymus) to-THE Didymus met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-LEARNers fellow-disciples
16 Then said Thomas, which is called Didymus, unto his fellowdisciples, Let us also go, that we may die with him.
agwmen agO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
ina hina
Conj
apoqanwmen apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
MAY-BE-LEADING AND may-be-going also
WE
THAT WE-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING WITH Him we-may-be-dying o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
11:17 elqwn
erchomai
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tessaras hdh tessares EdE

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
17 . Then when Jesus came, he found that he had [lain] in the grave four days already.
COMING
THEN THE
JESUS
FOUND
him
FOUR
ALREADY DAYS
econta echO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
HAVING
IN
THE
NA
memorial-vault tomb h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
11:18 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
bhqania eggus twn bEthania eggus ho

n_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Gen Pl n
ierosolumwn ws ierosoluma hOs

n_ Gen Pl n Adv
apo apo
Prep
18 Now Bethany was nigh unto Jerusalem, about fifteen furlongs off:
WAS
YET
THE
BETHANY
NEAR
OF-THE the
JERUSALEM
AS FROM about off
stadiwn dekapente stadion dekapente

n_ Gen Pl n ni numeral
stadia
TEN-FIVE fifteen de de
Conj
11:19 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn elhluqeisan pros ioudaios erchomai pros

a_ Gen Pl m vi Plup Act 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marqan kai martha kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
MANY
YET OUT OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
HAD-COME
TOWARD THE
MARTHA
AND
19 And many of the Jews came to Martha and Mary, to comfort them concerning their brother.
mariam ina maria hina

ni proper Conj
paramuqhswntai paramutheomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl

pp Acc Pl f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
adelfou adelphos
n_ Gen Sg m
MARIAM Mary
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-CLOSING them they-should-be-comforting oun oun

Conj
ABOUT THE concerning ercetai erchomai
brother
11:20 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
uphnthsen hupantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
THEN MARTHA
AS
she-HEARS
that
JESUS
IS-COMING
UNDER-meets meets
20 Then Martha, as soon as she heard that Jesus was coming, went and met him: but Mary sat [still] in the house.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mariam de maria de
ni proper Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
ekaqezeto kathezomai
to-Him him
MARIAM Mary
YET IN
THE
HOME house marqa martha

n_ Nom Sg f
was-seatED
NA
11:21 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
21 Then said Martha unto Jesus, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother had not died.
said
THEN THE
MARTHA
TOWARD
THE
JESUS
Master ! Lord !
IF
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
wde ouk hOde ou

Adv Part Neg
an an
Part
apeqanen o apothnEskO ho
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m

YOU-WERE
here
NA
NOT
EVER FROM-DIED died kai nun oida kai nun eidO

Conj Adv vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THE
brother
OF-ME
11:22
alla alla
Conj
oti osa hoti hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl n
an an
Part
aithsh aiteO
vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
22 But I know, that even now, whatsoever thou wilt ask of God, God will give [it] thee.
but
AND NOW I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that even I-am-aware
as-much-as EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING whatever you-should-be-requesting-of
AV
John 11
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU
THE
God
11:23 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

23 Jesus saith unto her, Thy brother shall rise again.
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING THE shall-be-rising oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
brother
OF-YOU
11:24 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f
oti anasthsetai hoti anistEmi

en en
Prep
24 Martha saith unto him, I know that he shall rise again in the resurrection at the last day.
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
MARTHA
he-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN he-shall-be-rising
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anastasei en anastasis en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

THE
IN
THE
LAST
DAY
11:25 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
anastasis kai anastasis kai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
said
to-her
THE
JESUS
AM
THE
UP-STANDing resurrection apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
25 Jesus said unto her, I am the resurrection, and the life: he that believeth in me, though he were dead, yet shall he live:
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kan kan
Cond Con
THE
LIFE
THE
INTO ME
AND-[IF]-EVER he-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING even-if-ever he-may-be-dying
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-LIVING
11:26 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
zwn zaO

eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
26 And whosoever liveth and believeth in me shall never die. Believest thou this?
AND
EVERY
THE
one-LIVING one-living aiwna aiOn

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BELIEVING
INTO ME
NOT
NO
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pisteueis pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING INTO THE may-be-dying
eon
YOU-ARE-BELIEVING this
11:27 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

Part n_ Voc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
pepisteuka oti su pisteuO hoti su

vi Perf Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
she-IS-sayING to-Him
YEA yes
Master ! Lord ! uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
HAVE-BELIEVED
that
YOU
ARE
27 She saith unto him, Yea, Lord: I believe that thou art the Christ, the Son of God, which should come into the world.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
THE the-one
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
ercomenos erchomai
COMING
11:28 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipousa legO
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai efwnhsen mariam thn kai phOneO maria ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper t_ Acc Sg f
adelfhn adelphE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
this
sayING
she-FROM-CAME AND she-came-away o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
SOUNDS summons
MARIAM Mary
THE
sister
28 And when she had so said, she went her way, and called Mary her sister secretly, saying, The Master is come, and calleth for thee.
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
laqra eipousa lathra legO

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
didaskalos parestin didaskalos pareimi

kai fwnei kai phOneO

OF-her
covertly
sayING
THE
TEACHer
IS-BESIDE-BEING AND is-being-present
He-IS-SOUNDING is-summoning
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
AV
John 11
11:29 ekeinh
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg f
de de
Conj

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tacu tachus
Adv
kai hrceto kai erchomai

pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
29 As soon as she heard [that], she arose quickly, and came unto him.
that-one that-one(f)
YET AS
she-HEARS
she-WAS-ROUSED SWIFTLY AND was-roused ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
CAME
TOWARD Him
11:30 oupw
oupO
Adv
de de
Conj
elhluqei o erchomai ho
vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
all hn alla eimi

eti eti
Adv
NOT-as-yet YET HAD-COME
THE
JESUS
INTO THE
VILLAGE
but
WAS
STILL
30 Now Jesus was not yet come into the town, but was in that place where Martha met him.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
uphnthsen autw hupantaO autos

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f
IN
THE
PLACE
THE-?-where UNDER-meets wheree meets ioudaioi oi ioudaios ho

to-Him him
THE
MARTHA
11:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
ontes eimi

Prep pp Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
THEN JUDA-ans Jews authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
ones-BEING ones-being thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
WITH her
IN
THE
HOME house
AND
paramuqoumenoi paramutheomai
idontes eidO
mariam oti tacews anesth maria hoti tacheOs anistEmi

ni proper Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
31 The Jews then which were with her in the house, and comforted her, when they saw Mary, that she rose up hastily and went out, followed her, saying, She goeth unto the grave to weep there.
BESIDE-CLOSING comforting exhlqen exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
her
PERCEIVING
THE
MARIAM Mary
that
SWIFTly quickly
she-UP-STOOD AND she-rose eis eis

Prep
hkolouqhsan auth akoloutheO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg f
doxantes dokeO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
oti upagei hoti hupagO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OUT-CAME came-out mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-follow follow ina hina

Conj
to-her her
SEEMing supposing ekei ekei

Adv
that
she-IS-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE she-is-going-away
klaush klaiO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
memorial-vault THAT she-SHOULD-BE-LAMENTING there tomb
11:32 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
mariam ws hlqen maria hOs erchomai

ni proper Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
idousa eidO
THE
THEN MARIAM Mary epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AS
she-CAME
THE-?-where WAS wheree podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
JESUS
PERCEIVING
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
legousa legO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
32 Then when Mary was come where Jesus was, and saw him, she fell down at his feet, saying unto him, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother had not died.
Him
FALLS
OF-Him
TOWARD THE
FEET
sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
IF
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
wde ouk hOde ou

Adv Part Neg
an an
Part
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
YOU-WERE
here
NOT
EVER OF-ME
FROM-DIED died authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
brother
11:33 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ws eiden hOs eidO

klaiousan klaiO
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
sunelqontas sunerchomai
JESUS
THEN AS
He-PERCEIVED her
LAMENTING
AND
THE
TOGETHER-COMING coming-togetherwith
33 . When Jesus therefore her weeping, and the Jews weeping which came with he groaned in the spirit, was troubled,
saw also her, and
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ioudaious klaiontas ioudaios klaiO

enebrimhsato tw embrimaomai ho
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati kai etaraxen pneuma kai tarassO

to-her her eauton heautou
JUDA-ans Jews
LAMENTING
IN-THUNDERS mutters
to-THE
spirit
AND
DISTURBS
pf 3 Acc Sg m
Self himself
11:34 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pou pou
Part Int
teqeikate tithEmi
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
34 And said, Where have ye laid him? They said unto him, Lord, come and see.
AND
He-said
?-where YE-HAVE-PLACED him where ? kai ide kai eidO

Master ! Lord !
ercou erchomai
AND
AV
John 11
11:35 edakrusen o
dakruO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
35
Jesus wept.
weeps
THE
JESUS
11:36 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ide ioudaios eidO

a_ Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
pws efilei pOs phileO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
36 Then said the Jews, Behold how he loved him!
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews eipan legO
BE-PERCEIVING how lo ! ouk ou

Part Neg
He-WAS-FOND him he-was-fond-of outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
11:37 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
edunato dunamai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ANY some anoixas anoigO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
YET OUT OF-them
say
NOT
was-ABLE could
this this-man
THE
37 And some of them said, Could not this man, which opened the eyes of the blind, have caused that even this man should not have died?
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous tou ophthalmos ho

tuflou poihsai ina tuphlos poieO hina

a_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Conj

Conj pd Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
One-UP-OPENing one-opening apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-THE
BLIND blind-man
TO-DO to-make
THAT AND also
this-one this-man
NO
SHOULD-BE-FROM-DYING may-be-dying
11:38 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
palin embrimwmenos palin embrimaomai

en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
ercetai erchomai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
JESUS
THEN AGAIN
beING-IN-THUNDERED muttering
IN
Self himself epekeito epikeimai
IS-COMING
INTO THE
38 Jesus therefore again groaning in himself cometh to the grave. It was a cave, and a stone lay upon it.
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
sphlaion kai liqos spElaion kai lithos

n_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
memorial-vault WAS tomb it-was
YET CAVE
AND
STONE
was-ON-LAID was-laid-on liqon lithos

n_ Acc Sg m
ON
it
11:39 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
arate airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IS-sayING
THE
JESUS
LIFT-YE THE take-away-ye ! kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
STONE
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
adelfh tou adelphE ho

teteleuthkotos marqa teleutaO martha

vp Perf Act Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
ozei ozO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tetartaios tetartaios
a_ Nom Sg m
39 Jesus said, Take ye away the stone. Martha, the sister of him that was dead, saith unto him, Lord, by this time he stinketh: for he hath been [dead] four days.
sister
OF-THE
HAVING-deceasED one-having-deceased
MARTHA
Master ! Lord !
ALREADY he-IS-ODORING FOURth he-is-smelling fourth-day
gar estin gar eimi

for
it-IS
11:40 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
NOT
I-said
to-YOU
that
IF-EVER
40 Jesus saith unto her, Said I not unto thee, that, if thou wouldest believe, thou shouldest see the glory of God?
pisteushs pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
oyh optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
YOU-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING YOU-SHOULD-BE-VIEWING THE you-should-be-seeing
esteem glory de de
Conj
OF-THE
God
11:41 hran
airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hren airO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-LIFT THEN THE they-take-away ofqalmous anw kai eipen ophthalmos anO kai legO
n_ Acc Pl m Adv Conj
STONE
THE
YET JESUS
LIFTS
THE
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
eucaristw soi eucharisteO su

oti hkousas hoti akouO

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
41 Then they took away the stone [from the place] where the dead was laid. And Jesus lifted up [his] eyes, and said, Father, I thank thee that thou hast heard me.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
VIEWers eyes
UP
AND
said
FATHER !
I-AM-thankING
to-YOU you
that
YOU-HEAR
OF-ME me
42 And I knew that thou hearest me always: but because of the people which stand by I said [it], that they may believe that thou hast sent me.
11:42 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
hdein eidO
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
oti pantote mou hoti pantote egO

akoueis akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
YET HAD-PERCEIVED that was-aware
always
OF-ME me
YOU-ARE-HEARING but
THRU because-of
AV
John 11
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
periestwta periistEmi
vp Perf Act Acc Sg m Con
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pisteuswsin pisteuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
THE
THRONG
THE
ones-HAVING-ABOUT-STOOD I-said standing-about I-said-it
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
apesteilas apostellO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU
ME
commission
11:43 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh ekraugasen lazare mega kraugazO lazaros

a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
deuro deuro
vm txx vxx 2 Sg
exw exO
Adv
43 And when he thus had spoken, he cried with a loud voice, Lazarus, come forth.
AND
these sayING these-things o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud teqnhkws thnEskO

He-clamors
LAZARUS !
HITHER hither-you ! kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
OUT outside
44 And he that was dead came forth, bound hand and foot with graveclothes: and his face was bound about with a napkin. Jesus saith unto them, Loose him, and let him go.
11:44 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dedemenos deO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
one-HAVING-DIED one-having-died kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
HAVING-been-BOUND THE
FEET
AND
THE
ceiras keiriais cheir keiria

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
oyis opsis
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
soudariw periededeto soudarion perideO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
HANDS
to-SHEARings AND to-winding-sheets

WH
THE
WH
VIEW OF-him countenance

NA
to-handkerchief
NA
HAD-been-ABOUT-BOUND had-been-bound-about lusate luO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
ihsous autois
autois o autos ho
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
LOOSE-YE loose-ye !
him
AND
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
upagein hupagO
vn Pres Act
FROM-LET let-ye !
him
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING to-be-going-away oun oun

Conj
11:45 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn oi ioudaios ho
elqontes erchomai
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mariam maria
ni proper
MANY
THEN OUT OF-THE

WH NA
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
ones-COMING ones-coming
TOWARD THE
MARIAM Mary
45 . Then many of the Jews which came to Mary, and had seen the things which Jesus did, believed on him.
kai qeasamenoi kai theaomai

Conj vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
epoihsen episteusan eis poieO pisteuO eis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
Conj
WHICH which(p) ex ek
Prep
He-DOES
THEY-BELIEVE believe pros pros

Prep
INTO Him
11:46 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
farisaious kai eipan pharisaios kai legO

ANY some autois a autos hos

pp Dat Pl m
YET OUT OF-them
FROM-CAME came-away
TOWARD THE
PHARISEES
AND
say told
46 But some of them went their ways to the Pharisees, and told them what things Jesus had done.
epoihsen ihsous poieO iEsous

pr Acc Pl n
to-them them
WHICH DOES which-things oun oun

Conj
JESUS
11:47 sunhgagon
sunagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi sunedrion kai pharisaios sunedrion kai

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Conj
TOGETHER-LED THEN THE gathered elegon legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests oti hoti

Conj
THE
PHARISEES
Sanhedrin
AND
47 Then gathered the chief priests and the Pharisees a council, and said, What do we? for this man doeth many miracles.
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poioumen poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos polla anthrOpos polus

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-said said shmeia sEmeion

n_ Acc Pl n
ANY what ?
WE-ARE-DOING that this seeing-that
THE
human
MANY
IS-DOING
SIGNS
11:48 ean
ean
Cond
afwmen aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
outws pantes houtOs pas

Adv a_ Nom Pl m
pisteusousin pisteuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING Him we-should-be-leaving
thus
ALL
SHALL-BE-BELIEVING INTO Him
48 If we let him thus alone, all [men] will believe on him: and the Romans shall come and take away both our place and nation.
AV
John 11
kai eleusontai kai erchomai

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
rwmaioi kai arousin rhOmaios kai airO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
SHALL-BE-COMING THE
ROMANS
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING OF-US shall-be-taking-away
AND
THE
PLACE
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
NATION
11:49 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kaiafas arciereus kaiaphas archiereus

wn eimi
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ONE
YET ANY certain
OUT OF-them
CAIAPHAS
chief-SACRED-one BEING chief-priest oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
OF-THE
49 And one of them, [named] Caiaphas, being the high priest that same year, said unto them, Ye know nothing at all,
eniautou ekeinou eipen eniautos ekeinos legO

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

ouk ou
Part Neg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
year
that
said
to-them
YOU(p) ye
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-YET-ONE are-aware-of anything ina hina

Conj
11:50 oude
oude
Adv
logizesqe logizomai
oti sumferei hoti sumpherO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET YE-ARE-accountING that neither ye-are-reckoning apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
it-IS-beING-expedient to-YOU(p) to-ye laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
THAT ONE
human
50 Nor consider that it is expedient for us, that one man should die for the people, and that the whole nation perish not.
uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Nom Sg n
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING OVER THE may-be-dying for-the-sake-of apolhtai apollumi

vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
PEOPLE
AND
NO
WHOLE
THE
NATION
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED should-be-perishing
11:51 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
af apo
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
alla arciereus alla archiereus

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
this
YET FROM self himself
NOT
he-said
but
chief-SACRED-one BEING chief-priest ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
51 And this spake he not of himself: but being high priest that year, he prophesied that Jesus should die for that nation;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eniautou ekeinou eprofhteusen oti emellen eniautos ekeinos prophEteuO hoti mellO
n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
apoqnhskein apothnEskO
vn Pres Act
OF-THE
year
that
he-BEFORE-AVERS he-prophesies
that
WAS-ABOUT
JESUS
TO-BE-FROM-DYING to-be-dying
uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n
NATION
11:52 kai ouc

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
uper tou huper ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n
monon all ina monon alla hina

Adv Conj Conj
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
NOT
OVER for
THE
NATION
ONLY
but
THAT AND also
THE
offsprings children eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
52 And not for that nation only, but that also he should gather together in one the children of God that were scattered abroad.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
dieskorpismena diaskorpizO
sunagagh sunagO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
God
THE
ones-HAVING-been-THRU-SCATTERED MAY-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING INTO ONE having-been-scattered he-may-be-gathering ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
11:53 ap
apo
Prep
ekeinhs oun ekeinos oun

pd Gen Sg f Conj
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ebouleusanto ina bouleuO hina

vi Aor midD 3 Pl Conj
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
53 Then from that day forth they took counsel together for to put him to death.
FROM that
THEN THE
DAY
THEY-COUNSEL they-plan
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING they-may-be-killing
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
11:54 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouketi ouketi
Adv
parrhsia periepatei en parrhEsia peripateO en

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois ioudaios
a_ Dat Pl m
THE
THEN JESUS
NOT-STILL to-boldness not-longer
ABOUT-TROD walked
IN THE among
JUDA-ans Jews
54 Jesus therefore walked no more openly among the Jews; but went thence unto a country near to the wilderness, into a city called Ephraim, and there
AV
John 11 - John 12
alla aphlqen alla aperchomai

ekeiqen eis ekeithen eis

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
eggus ths eggus ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
erhmou erEmos
a_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
efraim ephraim
ni proper
continued with his disciples.
but
FROM-CAME came-away
thence
INTO THE
SPACE country
NEAR
OF-THE the
DESOLATE INTO EPHRAIM wilderness
legomenhn legO
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kakei kakei
Adv Con
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
beING-said
city
AND-there He-REMAINS WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples ioudaiwn kai anebhsan polloi ioudaios kai anabainO polus
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
55 And the Jews'passover was nigh at hand: and many went out of the country up to Jerusalem before the passover, to purify themselves.
11:55 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
eggus to eggus ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WAS
YET NEAR
THE
PASSOVER OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews pasca pascha

Aramaic
AND
UP-STEPPed went-up
MANY
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma ek ierosoluma ek
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
cwras chOra
n_ Gen Sg f
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
agniswsin hagnizO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
INTO JERUSALEM
OUT OF-THE
SPACE country
BEFORE THE
PASSOVER THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-PURifyING
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
selves themselves
11:56 ezhtoun
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

met allhlwn en meta allElOn en

Prep pc Gen Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
THEY-SOUGHT THEN THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-said said umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
WITH one-another
IN
THE
56 Then sought they for Jesus, and spake among themselves, as they stood in the temple, What think ye, that he will not come to the feast?
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
esthkotes histEmi
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
SACRED-place HAVING-STOOD sanctuary standing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ANY what ?
it-IS-SEEMING to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT
NO
He-MAY-BE-COMING INTO
eorthn heortE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
FESTIVAL
11:57 dedwkeisan de
didOmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl Att
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi entolas ina pharisaios entolE hina

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Conj
HAD-GIVEN
YET THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests pou pou

Part Int
THE
PHARISEES
directions
THAT
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
gnw ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mhnush mEnuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
opws hopOs
Adv
57 Now both the chief priests and the Pharisees had given a commandment, that, if any man knew where he were, he should shew [it], that they might take him.
IF-EVER ANY anyone piaswsin piazO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
MAY-BE-KNOWING ?-where He-IS where ? auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-DIVULGING WHICH-how he-should-be-divulging-it so-that
AV
John 12
12:1 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
pro pro
Prep
ex hex
ni numeral

pasca pascha
Aramaic
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
THE
THEN JESUS
BEFORE SIX
DAYS
OF-THE
PASSOVER CAME
INTO
. Then Jesus six days before the passover came to Bethany, where Lazarus was which had been dead, whom he raised from the dead.
bhqanian opou bEthania hopou

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
lazaros on lazaros hos

hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
BETHANY
THE-?-where WAS wheree autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
LAZARUS
WHOM
ROUSES
OUT OF-DEAD-ones JESUS of-dead-ones marqa martha

n_ Nom Sg f
12:2 epoihsan oun

poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
deipnon ekei kai h deipnon ekei kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg f
dihkonei diakoneO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THEY-make
THEN to-Him
DINner
there
AND
THE
MARTHA
THRU-SERVED THE served autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
YET
There they made him a supper; and Martha served: but Lazarus was one of them that sat at the table with him.
lazaros eis lazaros heis

hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anakeimenwn anakeimai
sun sun
Prep
LAZARUS
ONE
WAS
OUT OF-THE
ones-UP-LYING ones-lying-back-at-table litran murou litra muron

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg n

3
12:3 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
mariam labousa maria lambanO

ni proper vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
nardou pistikhs polutimou nardos pistikos polutimos

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
THE
THEN MARIAM Mary tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
GETTING taking
WH
POUND OF-ATTAR pound-troy

NA
NARD
OF-BELIEVic veritable
OF-MUCH-VALUE very-precious qrixin thrix

n_ Dat Pl f
hleiyen aleiphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
tou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai exemaxen tais kai ekmassO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl f
Then took Mary a pound of ointment of spikenard, very costly, and anointed the feet of Jesus, and wiped his feet with her hair: and the house was filled with the odour of the ointment.
RUBS
THE
FEET
OF-THE
JESUS
AND
OUT-WIPES wipes-off
to-THE
HAIR hairs osmhs osmE

n_ Gen Sg f
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
eplhrwqh ek plEroO ek
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-her
THE
FEET
OF-Him
THE
YET HOME house
WAS-FILLED
OUT OF-THE
ODOR
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
murou muron
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
ATTAR
WH NA NA
12:4 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de
de de
Conj
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iskariwths eis iskariOthEs heis

ek ek
Prep
IS-sayING
YET
JUDAS
THE
ISCARIOT
ONE
OUT
Then saith one of his disciples, Judas Iscariot, Simon's [son], which should betray him,
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mellwn mellO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
paradidonai paradidOmi
vn Pres Act
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples ti tis
OF-Him
THE
one-beING-ABOUT one-being-about muron muron

n_ Nom Sg n
Him
TO-BE-BESIDE-GIVING to-be-giving-up triakosiwn triakosioi

n_ Gen Pl m
5
12:5 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
epraqh pipraskO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pi Acc Sg n
Why was not this ointment sold for three hundred pence, and given to the poor?
this
THE
ATTAR
NOT
WAS-disposED-of OF-THREE-hundred
dhnariwn kai edoqh dEnarion kai didOmi

n_ Gen Pl n Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ptwcois ptOchos
a_ Dat Pl m
DENARII
AND
WAS-GIVEN
to-POOR-ones to-poor-ones ouc ou

Part Neg
12:6 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oti peri hoti peri

Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ptwcwn emelen ptOchos melei

a_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
all alla
Conj
said he-said
YET this
NOT
that
POOR-ones poor-ones
CARED it-cared ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-him
but
This he said, not that he cared for the poor; but because he was a thief, and had the bag, and bare what was put therein.
oti klepths hn hoti kleptEs eimi

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
glwssokomon ecwn glOssokomon echO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
ballomena ballO
that
thief
he-WAS
AND
THE
TONGUE-FETCHer coffer
HAVING
THE the(p)
beING-CAST being-cast(p)-into-it
ebastazen bastazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
BORE
AV
John 12
12:7 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
afes aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
Then said Jesus, Let her alone: against the day of my burying hath she kept this.
said
THEN THE
JESUS
FROM-LET let-off-you !
her
THAT INTO THE
DAY
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
entafiasmou mou entaphiasmos egO

thrhsh tEreO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
OF-THE
IN-sepulchering burial
OF-ME
she-SHOULD-BE-KEEPING it
12:8 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ptwcous gar pantote ecete ptOchos gar pantote echO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl
meq meta
Prep
eautwn eme heautou egO

pf 3 Gen Pl m pp 1 Acc Sg
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
For the poor always ye have with you; but me ye have not always.
THE
POOR-ones poor-ones
for
always
ME
YET NOT
pantote ecete pantote echO

always
YE-ARE-HAVING
WH NA
12:9 egnw
ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn oti ioudaios hoti

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
KNEW
THEN
THE
THRONG
MANY vast
OUT OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
that
ekei estin ekei eimi


ou ou
Part Neg
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m

Adv Conj Conj
kai kai
Conj
Much people of the Jews therefore knew that he was there: and they came not for Jesus'sake only, but that they might see Lazarus also, whom he had raised from the dead.
there
He-IS
AND
THEY-CAME
NOT
THRU THE because-of on hos

pr Acc Sg m
JESUS
ONLY
but
THAT AND also
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
lazaron idwsin lazaros eidO

n_ Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
THE
LAZARUS
THEY-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING WHOM they-may-be-become-acquainted-with oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
He-ROUSES
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones lazaron lazaros

n_ Acc Sg m
10 But the chief priests consulted that they might put Lazarus also to death;
12:10 ebouleusanto de
bouleuO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
de
Conj
n_ Nom Pl m
ina hina
Conj
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
COUNSEL plan apokteinwsin apokteinO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
YET THE
chief-SACRED-ones THAT AND chief-priests also
THE
LAZARUS
THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING they-may-be-killing
12:11 oti polloi

hoti
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
di dia
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
uphgon hupagO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai episteuon ioudaios kai pisteuO

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
11 Because that by reason of him many of the Jews went away, and believed on Jesus.
that
MANY
THRU him because-of
UNDER-LED went-away
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
THEY-BELIEVED INTO believed
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
JESUS
12:12 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
elqwn erchomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
ON-MORROW THE
THRONG
MANY vast
NA
THE
ones-COMING one-coming ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
INTO THE
12 . On the next day much people that were come to the feast, when they heard that Jesus was coming to Jerusalem,
eorthn akousantes oti ercetai heortE akouO hoti erchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
FESTIVAL
HEARing
that
IS-COMING
THE
JESUS
INTO JERUSALEM
12:13 elabon
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
baia baion
n_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
foinikwn kai exhlqon phoinix kai exerchomai

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
upanthsin autw hupantEsis autos

n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Sg m
THEY-GOT got
THE
FRONDS
OF-THE
PALMS
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
INTO UNDER-meeting to-Him meeting him en en

Prep
kai ekraugazon wsanna euloghmenos kai kraugazO hOsanna eulogeO

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Hebrew vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
13 Took branches of palm trees, and went forth to meet him, and cried, Hosanna: Blessed [is] the King of Israel that cometh in the name of the Lord.
AND
THEY-clamored
HOSANNA
beING-blessED
THE
IN
NAME
AV
John 12
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus tou basileus ho

israhl israEl
ni proper
OF-Master of-Lord
AND
THE
KING
OF-THE
ISRAEL
12:14 eurwn
heuriskO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
onarion ekaqisen ep onarion kathizO epi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
FINDING
YET THE
JESUS
ASS (dim) little-ass
14 And Jesus, when he had found a young ass, sat thereon; as it is written,
is-seated
ON
it
according-AS
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegrammenon graphO
IS it-is
HAVING-been-WRITTEN
12:15 mh
mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
qugathr siwn thugatEr siOn

n_ Voc Sg f ni proper
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus sou basileus su

15 Fear not, daughter of Sion: behold, thy King cometh, sitting on an ass's colt.
NO
BE-FEARING be-you-fearing ! kaqhmenos kathEmai
DAUGHTER daughter !
of-SION BE-PERCEIVING THE of-Sion lo ! onou onos

n_ Gen Sg f
KING
OF-YOU
ercetai erchomai
epi pwlon epi pOlos

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
IS-COMING
sittING
ON
COLT
OF-ASS
12:16 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai to mathEtEs ho
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
prwton prOtos
a_ Acc Sg n
all ote alla hote

Conj Adv
these NOT these-things edoxasqh doxazO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
THEY-KNOW know
OF-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples oti tauta hoti houtos

Conj pd Nom Pl n
THE
BEFORE-most but first ep epi

Prep
when
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tote emnhsqhsan tote mnaomai

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
16 These things understood not his disciples at the first: but when Jesus was glorified, then remembered they that these things were written of him, and [that] they had done these things unto him.
IS-esteemizED JESUS is-glorified gegrammena graphO

then
THEY-ARE-REMINDED that
these WAS these-things
ON
Him

Conj pd Acc Pl n
epoihsan autw poieO autos

HAVING-been-WRITTEN AND
these THEY-DO these-things o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-Him
12:17 emarturei oun

martureO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
oun
Conj
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi

Prep pp Gen Sg m
ote hote
Adv
witnessED testified ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THEN THE
THRONG
THE
BEING
WITH Him
when
17 The people therefore that was with him when he called Lazarus out of his grave, and raised him from the dead, bare record.
lazaron efwnhsen ek lazaros phOneO ek

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
kai hgeiren kai egeirO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
THE
LAZARUS
He-SOUNDS he-summons
OUT OF-THE
ROUSES
him
OUT
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
12:18 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
WH
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
THRU this because-of hkousan touto akouO houtos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pd Acc Sg n
AND also auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
UNDER-meets meets
to-Him him
THE
THRONG
that
18 For this cause the people also met him, for that they heard that he had done this miracle.
pepoihkenai to poieO ho
vn Perf Act t_ Acc Sg n
shmeion sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-HEAR this
Him
TO-HAVE-DONE
THE
SIGN
12:19 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
farisaioi eipan pharisaios legO

pros pros
Prep
eautous qewreite heautou theOreO

pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl / vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
THE
THEN PHARISEES
say
TOWARD selves themselves o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE-beholdING
that
NOT
19 The Pharisees therefore said among themselves, Perceive ye how ye prevail nothing? behold, the world is gone after him.
wfeleite OpheleO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m

Adv pp Gen Sg m
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YE-ARE-benefitING NOT-YET-ONE BE-PERCEIVING THE anything lo !
SYSTEM world
BEHIND after
Him
FROM-CAME came-away
AV
John 12
12:20 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ellhnes tines hellEn tis

n_ Nom Pl m px Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anabainontwn ina anabainO hina

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj
20 . And there were certain Greeks among them that came up to worship at the feast:
THEY-WERE YET GREEKS there-were proskunhswsin proskuneO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ANY some th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OUT OF-THE
ones-UP-STEPPING ones-going-up
THAT
en en
Prep
eorth heortE
n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-SHOULD-BE-worshipING IN
THE
FESTIVAL
12:21 outoi
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
filippw tw philippos ho
apo apo
Prep
bhqsaida ths bEthsaida ho

ni proper t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai galilaia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
these
THEN TOWARD-CAME to-Philip came-to Philip auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THE the-one qelomen thelO
FROM BETHSAIDA
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
21 The same came therefore to Philip, which was of Bethsaida of Galilee, and desired him, saying, Sir, we would see Jesus.
hrwtwn erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
THEY-askED him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
WE-ARE-WILLING THE
JESUS
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-PERCEIVING to-be-becoming-acquainted-with
12:22 ercetai
erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filippos kai legei philippos kai legO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
andrea andreas
n_ Dat Sg m
ercetai erchomai
22 Philip cometh and telleth Andrew: and again Andrew and Philip tell Jesus.
IS-COMING
THE
Philip
AND
he-IS-sayING is-telling
to-THE the
ANDREW
IS-COMING
andreas kai filippos kai legousin andreas kai philippos kai legO
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
ANDREW
AND
Philip
AND
THEY-ARE-sayING to-THE are-telling the
JESUS
12:23 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apokrinetai apokrinomai

elhluqen erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
YET JESUS
IS-answerING
to-them them uios huios
sayING
HAS-COME
THE
23 And Jesus answered them, saying, The hour is come, that the Son of man should be glorified.
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ina hina
Conj
doxasqh doxazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
HOUR
THAT SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED THE should-be-being-glorified umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
SON
OF-THE
human
12:24 amhn amhn legw

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kokkos kokkos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
sitou sitos
n_ Gen Sg m
AMEN verily peswn piptO
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye ghn gE

n_ Acc Sg f
IF-EVER NO
THE
KERNEL
OF-THE
GRAIN
24 Verily, verily, I say unto you, Except a corn of wheat fall into the ground and die, it abideth alone: but if it die, it bringeth forth much fruit.
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
FALLING
INTO THE
LAND earth
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING SAME heit may-be-dying ferei pherO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ONLY alone
IS-REMAINING IF-EVER
de de
Conj
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
YET it-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING much it-may-be-dying
FRUIT
it-IS-CARRYING it-is-bringing-forth yuchn psuchE

n_ Acc Sg f
12:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filwn phileO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apolluei authn apollumi autos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-beING-FOND one-being-fond-of thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
soul
OF-him
IS-destroyING
her herit
AND
THE
25 He that loveth his life shall lose it; and he that hateth his life in this world shall keep it unto life eternal.
miswn miseO
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw eis houtos eis

pd Dat Sg m Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
one-HATING one-hating
THE
soul
OF-him
IN
THE
SYSTEM world
this
INTO LIFE
aiwnion fulaxei aiOnios phulassO

a_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
eonian
SHALL-BE-GUARDING her herit
AV
John 12
12:26 ean
ean
Cond
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
diakonh diakoneO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
akolouqeitw akoloutheO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
kai opou kai hopou

Conj Adv
IF-EVER to-ME me eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ANY anyone
MAY-BE-THRU-SERVING to-ME may-be-serving me diakonos diakonos

n_ Nom Sg m
LET-him-BE-followING AND let-him-be-following ! emos emos

ps 1 Nom Sg
THE-?-where wheree ean ean

Cond
26 If any man serve me, let him follow me; and where I am, there shall also my servant be: if any man serve me, him will [my] Father honour.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ekei kai o ekei kai ho

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
AM
there
AND also
THE
THRU-SERVitor THE servant timhsei timaO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
MY
SHALL-BE
IF-EVER
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
diakonh diakoneO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ANY anyone
to-ME me
MAY-BE-THRU-SERVING SHALL-BE-VALUING him may-be-serving shall-be-honoring yuch psuchE

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
FATHER
12:27 nun h
nun
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tetaraktai tarassO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
NOW THE
soul
OF-ME
HAS-been-DISTURBED AND
ANY what ?
I-MAY-BE-sayING FATHER !
27 . Now is my soul troubled; and what shall I say? Father, save me from this hour: but for this cause came I unto this hour.
swson sOzO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths alla dia houtos alla dia

pd Gen Sg f Conj Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
SAVE save-you ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ME
OUT OF-THE
HOUR
this
but
I-CAME
INTO
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
THE
HOUR
this
12:28 pater
patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
doxason doxazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
FATHER !
esteemize glorify-you !
OF-YOU
THE
NAME
CAME
THEN SOUND voice
OUT OF-THE
28 Father, glorify thy name. Then came there a voice from heaven, [saying], I have both glorified [it], and will glorify [it] again.
ouranou kai edoxasa ouranos kai doxazO

kai palin doxasw kai palin doxazO

Conj Adv vi Fut Act 1 Sg
heaven
AND also
I-esteemize I-glorify-it
WH
AND
NA
AGAIN
I-SHALL-BE-esteemizING I-shall-be-glorifying-it o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
12:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun
oun oun
Conj
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
estws histEmi
kai akousas kai akouO

THE
THEN
THRONG
THE
HAVING-STOOD standing aggelos aggelos

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
HEARing hearing-it lelalhken laleO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
29 The people therefore, that stood by, and heard [it], said that it thundered: others said, An angel spake to him.
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
bronthn gegonenai brontE ginomai

n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Perf Act
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
said
THUNDER thunderclap
TO-HAVE-BECOME others
WH WH WH NA
said
NA
MESSENGER to-Him
NA
HAS-TALKED has-spoken di dia

Prep
12:30 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai eipen ihsous
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

ou ou
Part Neg
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
30 Jesus answered and said, This voice came not because of me, but for your sakes.
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
NOT
THRU ME because-of
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
alla di alla dia

Conj Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
THE
SOUND voice
this
HAS-BECOME
but
THRU YOU(p) because-of ye toutou nun o houtos nun ho

pd Gen Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m
12:31 nun krisis

nun
Adv
krisis
n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
31 Now is the judgment of this world: now shall the prince of this world be cast out.
NOW JUDGing
IS
OF-THE
SYSTEM world exw exO

Adv
this
NOW THE
chief
OF-THE
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou ekblhqhsetai houtos ekballO

pd Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SYSTEM world
this
SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-CAST OUT shall-be-being-cast-out outside ean ean

Cond
12:32 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
uywqw hupsoO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
32 And I, if I be lifted up from the earth, will draw all [men] unto me.
AND-I
IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED OUT OF-THE I-may-be-being-exalted
LAND earth
ALL
AV
John 12
elkusw helkuO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
emauton emautou
pf 1 Acc Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-DRAWING TOWARD MYself shall-be-drawing
12:33 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
shmainwn sEmainO
poiw poios
pi Dat Sg m
qanatw hmellen thanatos mellO

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg Att
33 This he said, signifying what death he should die.
this
YET He-said
SIGNifyING
?-to-THE-WHICH DEATH to-what ?
He-WAS-ABOUT
vn Pres Act
12:34 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
hkousamen ek akouO ek
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
answerED
THEN to-Him him
THE
THRONG
WE
HEAR
OUT OF-THE
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
cristos menei christos menO

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
kai pws legeis kai pOs legO

Conj Adv Int vi Pres Act 2 Sg
34 The people answered him, We have heard out of the law that Christ abideth for ever: and how sayest thou, The Son of man must be lifted up? who is this Son of man?
LAW
that
THE
ANOINTED Christ
eon
AND
how how ?
ARE-sayING
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oti dei hoti deO

uywqhnai hupsoO
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou tis anthrOpos tis

n_ Gen Sg m pi Nom Sg m
YOU
that
it-IS-BINDING must o ho
TO-BE-HEIGHTenED THE to-be-exalted uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
SON
OF-THE
human
ANY who ?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
IS
this
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
12:35 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois o autos ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eti eti
Adv
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
said
THEN to-them
THE
JESUS
STILL LITTLE
TIME
THE
LIGHT
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
peripateite peripateO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ws to hOs ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
35 Then Jesus said unto them, Yet a little while is the light with you. Walk while ye have the light, lest darkness come upon you: for he that walketh in darkness knoweth not whither he goeth.
IN YOU(p) among ye skotia skotia

n_ Nom Sg f
IS
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING AS be-ye-walking ! katalabh katalambanO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
LIGHT
YE-ARE-HAVING THAT NO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
peripatwn peripateO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
skotia skotia
n_ Dat Sg f
DARKness
YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING AND may-be-overtaking pou pou

Part Int
THE
one-ABOUT-TREADING IN one-walking
THE
DARKness
ouk ou
Part Neg
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
upagei hupagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
HAS-PERCEIVED ?-where he-IS-UNDER-LEADING is-aware where ? he-is-going-away fws phOs

n_ Acc Sg n
12:36 ws to
hOs
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pisteuete pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
AS
THE
LIGHT
YE-ARE-HAVING BE-YE-BELIEVING INTO THE be-ye-believing ! tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
LIGHT
THAT SONS
36 While ye have light, believe in the light, that ye may be the children of light. These things spake Jesus, and departed, and did hide himself from them.
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
genhsqe ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl
elalhsen ihsous laleO iEsous

kai apelqwn kai aperchomai

ekrubh kruptO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-LIGHT
YE-MAY-BE-BECOMING these TALKS these-things speaks
JESUS
AND
WAS-HID he-was-hid
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
FROM them
12:37 tosauta de
tosoutos
pd Acc Pl n
de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
shmeia pepoihkotos emprosqen sEmeion poieO emprosthen

n_ Acc Pl n vp Perf Act Gen Sg m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
37 . But though he had done so many miracles before them, yet they believed not on him:
so-much so-many
YET OF-Him
SIGNS
OF-HAVING-DONE
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-them in-front-of them
NOT
AV
John 12
episteuon pisteuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-BELIEVED INTO Him
12:38 ina
hina
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
THAT THE
saying word tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
OF-ISAIAH
THE
BEFORE-AVERer MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED WHICH prophet may-be-being-fulfilled akoh akoE

n_ Dat Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
episteusen th pisteuO ho
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
braciwn brachiOn
n_ Nom Sg m
38 That the saying of Esaias the prophet might be fulfilled, which he spake, Lord, who hath believed our report? and to whom hath the arm of the Lord been revealed?
he-said
Master ! Lord ! tini tis

pi Dat Sg m
ANY who ?
BELIEVES
to-THE the
HEARing tidings
OF-US
AND
THE
upper-arm
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
apekalufqh apokaluptO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-Master of-Lord
to-ANY to-whom ?
WAS-FROM-COVERED it-was-revealed ouk ou

Part Neg
12:39 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
hdunanto dunamai
pisteuein pisteuO
vn Pres Act
oti hoti
Conj

39 Therefore they could not believe, because that Esaias said again,
THRU this because-of hsaias Esaias

n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
THEY-were-ABLE they-could
TO-BE-BELIEVING that AGAIN seeing-that
said
ISAIAH
12:40 tetuflwken autwn

tuphloO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Gen Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous kai epwrwsen ophthalmos kai pOroO

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
He-HAS-BLINDED
OF-them
THE

t_ Dat Pl m
AND
He-CALLOUSES OF-them callouses
THE
kardian ina kardia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
idwsin eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ofqalmois kai nohswsin ophthalmos kai noeO

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vs Aor Act 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
40 He hath blinded their eyes, and hardened their heart; that they should not see with [their] eyes, nor understand with [their] heart, and be converted, and I should heal them.
HEART
THAT NO
VIEWers eyes autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
AND
SHOULD-BE-MINDING to-THE should-be-apprehending
kardia kai strafwsin kardia kai strephO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
kai iasomai kai iaomai

HEART
AND
MAY-BE-TURNING AND
I-SHALL-BE-HEALING them
12:41 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hsaias Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
41 These things said Esaias, when he saw his glory, and spake of him.
these said these-things elalhsen peri laleO peri

ISAIAH
that he-PERCEIVED THE seeing-that
esteem glory
OF-Him
AND
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
TALKS speaks
ABOUT Him concerning twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
12:42 omws mentoi kai ek

homOs
Conj
mentoi
Conj
kai
Conj
ek
Prep
arcontwn polloi archOn polus

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Pl m

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
alla alla
Conj
LIKE-AS howbeit likewise dia dia

Prep
AND also
OUT OF-THE
chiefs
MANY
BELIEVE
INTO Him
but
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
farisaious ouc pharisaios ou

n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg
wmologoun ina homologeO hina

vi impf Act 3 Pl Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
aposunagwgoi aposunagOgos
a_ Nom Pl m
42 . Nevertheless among the chief rulers also many believed on him; but because of the Pharisees they did not confess [him], lest they should be put out of the synagogue:
THRU THE because-of genwntai ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
PHARISEES
NOT
THEY-avowED they-avowed-it
THAT NO
FROM-TOGETHER-LED put-out-of-synagogue(p)
THEY-MAY-BE-BECOMING
12:43 hgaphsan gar thn

agapaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn mallon hper anthrOpos mallon Eper

n_ Gen Pl m Adv Part
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
43 For they loved the praise of men more than the praise of God.
THEY-LOVE
for
THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
humans
RATHER
OR-EVEN THE than-even
esteem glory
AV
John 12
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
12:44 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ekraxen krazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai eipen kai legO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
JESUS
YET CRIES
AND
said
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
INTO ME
NOT
44 . Jesus cried and said, He that believeth on me, believeth not on me, but on him that sent me.
pisteuei pisteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
alla eis alla eis

Conj Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
IS-BELIEVING INTO ME
but
INTO THE
One-SENDing one-sending qewrei theOreO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ME
12:45 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qewrwn theOreO
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
45 And he that seeth me seeth him that sent me.
AND
THE
one-beholdING one-beholding fws phOs

n_ Acc Sg n
ME
IS-beholdING
THE
One-SENDing one-sending ina hina

Conj
ME
12:46 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
elhluqa erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
LIGHT
INTO THE
SYSTEM world th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
HAVE-COME
THAT EVERY
THE
46 I am come a light into the world, that whosoever believeth on me should not abide in darkness.
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
skotia mh skotia mE
meinh menO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO ME
IN
THE
DARKness
NO
SHOULD-BE-REMAINING
12:47 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
akoush akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
rhmatwn kai mh rhEma kai mE

n_ Gen Pl n Conj Part Neg
AND
IF-EVER ANY anyone egw egO
OF-ME
SHOULD-BE-HEARING THE
declarations
AND
NO
47 And if any man hear my words, and believe not, I judge him not: for I came not to judge the world, but to save the world.
fulaxh phulassO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
krinw krinO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg / vi Pres Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg

ina hina
Conj
pp 1 Nom Sg
SHOULD-BE-GUARDING I should-be-maintaining-them krinw krinO

vs Pres Act 1 Sg
NOT
AM-JUDGING
him
NOT
for
I-CAME
THAT
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
swsw sOzO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
I-SHOULD-BE-JUDGING THE
SYSTEM world eme egO
but
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-SAVING THE
SYSTEM world rhmata rhEma

n_ Acc Pl n
12:48 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aqetwn atheteO
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
lambanwn lambanO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
one-UN-PLACING one-repudiating ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
ME
AND
NO
GETTING-UP getting logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
declarations OF-ME
48 He that rejecteth me, and receiveth not my words, hath one that judgeth him: the word that I have spoken, the same shall judge him in the last day.
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
krinonta krinO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
elalhsa laleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
IS-HAVING
THE
one-JUDGING one-judging auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
him
THE
saying word
WHICH
I-TALK I-speak
that
krinei krinO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

SHALL-BE-JUDGING him
IN
THE
LAST
DAY
12:49 oti
hoti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ex ek
Prep
emautou ouk emautou ou

elalhsa laleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
all o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
that I seeing-that pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-MYself
NOT
TALK speak
but
THE
One-SENDing one-sending kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
ME
49 For I have not spoken of myself; but the Father which sent me, he gave me a commandment, what I should say, and what I should speak.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
entolhn dedwken ti entolE didOmi tis

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Act 3 Sg pi Acc Sg n
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
FATHER
He
to-ME me
direction precept
HAS-GIVEN
ANY what ?
I-MAY-BE-sayING AND
ANY what ?
lalhsw laleO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-TALKING I-should-be-speaking
AV
John 12 - John 13
12:50 kai oida

kai
Conj
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
entolh autou entolE autos

zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
aiwnios estin aiOnios eimi

AND
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
THE
direction precept kaqws kathOs

Adv
OF-Him
LIFE
eonian
IS
50 And I know that his commandment is life everlasting: whatsoever I speak therefore, even as the Father said unto me, so I speak.
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
oun oun
Conj
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eirhken ereO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
outws houtOs
Adv
WHICH which(p) lalw laleO
THEN I
AM-TALKING am-speaking
according-AS HAS-declarED
to-ME
THE
FATHER
thus
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-TALKING I-am-speaking
AV
John 13
13:1 pro
pro
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eorths tou heortE ho

pasca pascha
Aramaic
eidws eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
BEFORE YET THE
FESTIVAL
OF-THE
PASSOVER HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-aware metabh metabainO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
JESUS
that
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ina hina
Conj
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
. Now before the feast of the passover, when Jesus knew that his hour was come that he should depart out of this world unto the Father, having loved his own which were in the world, he loved them unto the end.
CAME
OF-Him
THE
HOUR
THAT He-MAY-BE-after-STEPPING OUT OF-THE he-may-be-proceeding agaphsas agapaO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
SYSTEM world en en
Prep
toutou pros houtos pros

pd Gen Sg m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
idious idios
a_ Acc Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
this
TOWARD THE
FATHER
LOVing
THE
OWN own(p)
THE-ones the-ones
IN
THE
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
hgaphsen autous agapaO autos

SYSTEM world
INTO FINISH He-LOVES consummation
them
13:2 kai deipnou ginomenou

kai
Conj
deipnon
n_ Gen Sg n
ginomai
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
hdh EdE
Adv
beblhkotos ballO
vp Perf Act Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
AND
OF-DINner
BECOMING of-becoming paradoi paradidOmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-THE
THRU-CASTer ALREADY HAVING-CAST Adversary ioudas ioudas

n_ Nom Sg m
INTO
And supper being ended, the devil having now put into the heart of Judas Iscariot, Simon's [son], to betray him;
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian ina kardia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
simwnos simOn
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
iskariwths
THE
NA
HEART
THAT MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING Him he-may-be-giving-up
JUDAS
OF-SIMON
iskariwtou iskariOthEs
n_ Gen Sg m
ISCARIOT
13:3 eidws
eidO
oti panta hoti pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware kai oti apo kai hoti apo

Conj Conj Prep
ALL
GIVES
to-Him
THE
FATHER
INTO THE
HANDS
Jesus knowing that the Father had given all things into his hands, and that he was come from God, and went to God;
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
upagei hupagO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
that
FROM God
He-OUT-CAME AND he-came-out ek ek

Prep
TOWARD THE
God
IS-UNDER-LEADING is-going-away imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
13:4 egeiretai
egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
deipnou kai tiqhsin deipnon kai tithEmi

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
He-IS-beING-ROUSED OUT OF-THE is-rising labwn lambanO

DINner
AND
IS-PLACING is-laying-down
THE
GARMENTS AND
He riseth from supper, and laid aside his garments; and took a towel, and girded himself.
lention diezwsen lention diazOnnumi

eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
GETTING
CLOTH
He-THRU-GIRDS Self he-girds himself udwr hudOr

n_ Acc Sg n
13:5 eita
eita
Adv
ballei ballO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nipthra niptEr
n_ Acc Sg m

niptein niptO
vn Pres Act
THEREAFTER He-IS-CASTING water he-is-draining tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
INTO THE
WASH-basin AND basin tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
begins
TO-BE-WASHING
After that he poureth water into a bason, and began to wash the disciples'feet, and to wipe [them] with the towel wherewith he was girded.
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn kai ekmassein mathEtEs kai ekmassO

n_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Pres Act
lentiw w lention hos

n_ Dat Sg n pr Dat Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
FEET
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
AND
TO-BE-OUT-WIPING to-THE to-be-wiping-off-them
CLOTH
to-WHICH He-WAS
diezwsmenos diazOnnumi
HAVING-been-THRU-GIRDED having-been-girded
13:6 ercetai
erchomai
oun oun
Conj
pros pros
Prep
simwna petron simOn petros

legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
Then cometh he to Simon Peter: and Peter saith unto him, Lord, dost thou wash my feet?
He-IS-COMING
THEN TOWARD SIMON
Peter
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
YOU
AV
John 13
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
nipteis niptO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-ME
ARE-WASHING THE
FEET
13:7 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
WHICH
AM-DOING
YOU
Jesus answered and said unto him, What I do thou knowest not now; but thou shalt know hereafter.
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
arti arti
Adv
gnwsh ginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
de de
Conj
meta tauta meta houtos

Prep pd Acc Pl n
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED at-PRESENT YOU-SHALL-BE-KNOWING YET after you-are-aware autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
these these-things mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
13:8 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
niyhs niptO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
IS-sayING
to-Him
Peter
NOT
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-WASHING OF-ME
THE
Peter saith unto him, Thou shalt never wash my feet. Jesus answered him, If I wash thee not, thou hast no part with me.
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
niyw niptO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
FEET
INTO THE
eon
answerED
JESUS
to-him him
IF-EVER NO
I-SHOULD-BE-WASHING
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
YOU
NOT
ARE-HAVING PART you-are-having autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
WITH ME
13:9 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
monon monon
Adv
Simon Peter saith unto him, Lord, not my feet only, but also [my] hands and [my] head.
IS-sayING
to-Him
SIMON
Peter
Master ! Lord ! kefalhn kephalE

n_ Acc Sg f
NO
THE
FEET
OF-ME
ONLY
alla kai tas alla kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras kai thn cheir kai ho

n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
but
AND also
THE
HANDS
AND
NA
THE
HEAD
13:10 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
leloumenos louO
ouk ou
Part Neg
IS-sayING
to-him
WH WH
THE
WH WH
JESUS
NA
THE
NA
one-HAVING-been-BATHED NOT one-having-been-bathed

NA
10 Jesus saith to him, He that is washed needeth not save to wash [his] feet, but is clean every whit: and ye are clean, but not all.
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ei mh tous podas
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
NA
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
niyasqai all niptO alla

vn Aor Mid Conj
IS-HAVING
need
IF
NO
THE
FEET
TO-WASH
but
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kaqaros olos katharos holos


Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
kaqaroi este katharos eimi

all ouci alla ouchi

Conj Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
IS
clean
WHOLE wholly gar ton gar ho

Conj
AND
YOU(p) ye
clean
ARE
but
NOT(emph.) ALL
13:11 hdei
eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
paradidonta paradidOmi
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
t_ Acc Sg m
11 For he knew who should betray him; therefore said he, Ye are not all clean.
He-HAD-PERCEIVED for he-was-aware ouci ouchi

Part Neg
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up
He-said
that
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kaqaroi este katharos eimi

NOT(emph.) ALL
clean
YE-ARE
WH NA
13:12 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
eniyen niptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai
kai kai
Conj
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
when
THEN He-WASHES THE
FEET
OF-them
AND
GOT took
THE
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai anepesen kai anapiptO


autois ginwskete autos ginOskO

pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl / vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
12 So after he had washed their feet, and had taken his garments, and was set down again, he said unto them, Know ye what I have done to you?
GARMENTS OF-Him
AND
UP-FALLS leans-back
AGAIN
He-said
to-them
YE-ARE-KNOWING
ANY what ?
AV
John 13
pepoihka poieO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
I-HAVE-DONE to-YOU(p) to-ye
13:13 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
fwneite phOneO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
didaskalos kai o didaskalos kai ho

kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
YOU(p) ye
13 Ye call me Master and Lord: and ye say well; for [so] I am.
ARE-SOUNDING ME are-shouting-to eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
THE
TEACHer
AND
THE
Master Lord
AND
kalws legete kalOs legO

gar gar
Conj
IDEALly
YE-ARE-sayING I-AM
for
13:14 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eniya niptO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
IF
THEN I
WASH
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
FEET
THE
Master Lord tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
AND
THE
14 If I then, [your] Lord and Master, have washed your feet; ye also ought to wash one another's feet.
didaskalos kai umeis didaskalos kai humeis

n_ Nom Sg m Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
ofeilete allhlwn opheilO allElOn

vi Pres Act 2 Pl pc Gen Pl m
niptein niptO
vn Pres Act
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
TEACHer
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ARE-OWING ought umin humeis
OF-one-another TO-BE-WASHING THE
FEET
13:15 upodeigma gar edwka

hupodeigma
n_ Acc Sg n
gar
Conj
didOmi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
epoihsa poieO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai kai
Conj
pp 2 Dat Pl
UNDER-SHOW example umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
for
I-GIVE
to-YOU(p) ye
THAT according-AS I
DO
to-YOU(p) to-ye
15 For I have given you an example, that ye should do as I have done to you.
AND also
poihte poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-DOING

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AMEN verily kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
IS
SLAVE
GREATER
OF-THE
16 Verily, verily, I say unto you, The servant is not greater than his lord; neither he that is sent greater than he that sent him.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oude oude
Adv
apostolos meizwn apostolos mega

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
master lord
OF-him
NOT-YET commissioner neither apostle oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
GREATER
OF-THE
one-SENDing one-sending poihte poieO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
him
13:17 ei
ei
Cond
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
makarioi este makarios eimi

ean ean
Cond
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
17 If ye know these things, happy are ye if ye do them.
IF
these YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED HAPPY these-things ye-are-aware-of peri peri

Prep
YE-ARE
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-DOING them
13:18 ou
ou
Part Neg
pantwn umwn pas humeis

a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
tinas tis
pi Acc Pl m
NOT
ABOUT ALL concerning h ho
OF-YOU(p) I-AM-sayING of-ye grafh graphE

n_ Nom Sg f
HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY am-aware whom(p) ? o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
exelexamhn all ina eklegO alla hina

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Conj Conj
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
trwgwn trOgO
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
18 . I speak not of you all: I know whom I have chosen: but that the scripture may be fulfilled, He that eateth bread with me hath lifted up his heel against me.
t_ Nom Sg f
I-choose
but
THAT THE
WRITing scripture ep epi

Prep
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ephren epairO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pternan autou pterna autos

THE
BREAD
ON-LIFTS lifts-up legw legO
ON
ME
THE
HEEL
OF-him
WH
13:19 ap
apo
Prep
arti arti
Adv
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
ina hina
Conj
pisteuhte
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
FROM at-PRESENT I-AM-sayING I-am-telling

NA
to-YOU(p) ye
BEFORE OF-THE the
TO-BE-BECOMING THAT to-be-occurring eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
19 Now I tell you before it come, that, when it is come to pass, ye may believe that I am [he].
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
otan hotan
Conj
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BECOMING that whenever
AM
AV
John 13

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lambanwn lambanO
an an
Part
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
pemyw pempO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
AMEN verily eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
Conj
THE
one-GETTING-UP one-taking lambanwn lambanO

EVER ANY anyone lambanei lambanO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-SENDING
20 Verily, verily, I say unto you, He that receiveth whomsoever I send receiveth me; and he that receiveth me receiveth him that sent me.
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
ME
IS-GETTING-UP THE is-taking the-one
YET ME
GETTING-UP taking
IS-GETTING-UP THE is-taking
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
NA
13:21 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
etaracqh tarassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
these sayING these-things kai emarturhsen kai eipen kai martureO kai legO
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
JESUS
WAS-DISTURBED to-THE
spirit
21 When Jesus had thus said, he was troubled in spirit, and testified, and said, Verily, verily, I say unto you, that one of you shall betray me.

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti eis hoti heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
AND
witnessES testifies
AND
said
AMEN verily me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
ONE
OUT
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OF-YOU(p) SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING ME of-ye shall-be-giving-up
13:22 eblepon
blepO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
allhlous oi allElOn ho
pc Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai aporoumenoi mathEtEs aporeO

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
peri peri
Prep
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg m
22 Then the disciples looked one on another, doubting of whom he spake.
lookED
INTO one-another
THE
LEARNers disciples
beING-perplexED
ABOUT ANY concerning whom
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-IS-sayING he-is-saying-this
13:23 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
anakeimenos anakeimai
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
23 Now there was leaning on Jesus'bosom one of his disciples, whom Jesus loved.
WAS
UP-LYING lying-back tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ONE
OUT OF-THE
WH NA
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
IN
THE
kolpw kolpos
n_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
hgapa agapaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
BOSOM
OF-THE
JESUS
WHOM
LOVED
WH
THE
WH WH
JESUS
WH WH WH
13:24 neuei
neuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
toutw simwn houtos simOn

pd Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai legei autw eipe tis estin
IS-NODDING
NA
THEN to-this-one to-this-one

NA
SIMON
NA
Peter
24 Simon Peter therefore beckoned to him, that he should ask who it should be of whom he spake.
puqesqai punthanomai
vn 2Aor midD
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
NA
an an
Part
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-ASCERTAINING ANY who ?
EVER MAY-he-BE he-may-be

NA
ABOUT WHOM concerning
He-IS-sayING he-is-saying-this sthqos tou stEthos ho

13:25 anapeswn
anapiptO
oun oun
Conj
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
outws epi to houtOs epi ho

Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
25 He then lying on Jesus'breast saith unto him, Lord, who is it?
UP-FALLING leaning-back legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEN
that-one that-one tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
thus
ON
THE
CHEST
OF-THE
JESUS
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS-sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
WH
ANY who ? o ho
it-IS
13:26 apokrinetai
apokrinomai
oun
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-answerING
THE
JESUS
that-one that-one
it-IS
to-WHOM
26 Jesus answered, He it is, to whom I shall give a sop, when I have dipped [it]. And when he had dipped the sop, he gave [it] to Judas Iscariot, [the son]
AV
John 13
bayw baptO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ywmion psOmion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai dwsw kai didOmi

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
bayas baptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
WH
to
of Simon.
SHALL-BE-DIPPING THE
WH WH WH
MORSEL (dim) AND little-morsel

NA
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-him shall-be-giving-it

NA
DIPPing
NA
THEN
ywmion lambanei kai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
NA
ywmion psOmion
n_ Acc Sg n
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
iouda ioudas
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
MORSEL (dim) little-morsel
He-IS-GETTING-UP AND he-is-taking-it
IS-GIVING is-giving-it
to-JUDAS
simwnos iskariwtou simOn iskariOthEs

OF-SIMON
ISCARIOT
13:27 kai meta to

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ywmion psOmion
n_ Acc Sg n
tote eishlqen tote eiserchomai

eis eis
Prep
ekeinon o ekeinos ho
pd Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
AND
after
THE
MORSEL (dim) then little-morsel oun oun

Conj
INTO-CAME entered
NA
INTO that-one that-man ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
27 And after the sop Satan entered into him. Then said Jesus unto him, That thou doest, do quickly.
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
poieis poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
SATAN (Heb. adversary) IS-sayING Satan poihson poieO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
THEN to-him
THE
JESUS
WHICH
YOU-ARE-DOING
tacion tachus
Adv Con
DO do-you !
SWIFTerly more-quickly de de
Conj
13:28 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
egnw ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anakeimenwn anakeimai
pros pros
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
28 Now no man at the table knew for what intent he spake this unto him.
this
YET
NOT-YET-ONE KNEW no-one
OF-THE
TOWARD ANY what ?
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
He-said
to-him
13:29 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
gar edokoun epei to gar dokeO epei ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg n
glwssokomon eicen glOssokomon echO

ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
ANY some legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
for
SEEMED supposed
NA
since
THE
TONGUE-FETCHer coffer agorason agorazO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
HAD
JUDAS
that
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
29 For some [of them] thought, because Judas had the bag, that Jesus had said unto him, Buy [those things] that we have need of against the feast; or, that he should give something to the poor.
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
BUY buy-you ! ti tis

px Acc Sg n
OF-WHICH need
WE-ARE-HAVING
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eorthn h heortE E
n_ Acc Sg f Part
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ptwcois ina ptOchos hina

a_ Dat Pl m Conj
dw didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO THE
FESTIVAL
OR
to-THE
POOR poor-ones ywmion psOmion

n_ Acc Sg n
THAT ANY something ekeinos ekeinos

pd Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-GIVING he-may-be-giving euqus euthus

Adv
13:30 labwn
lambanO
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
GETTING
THEN THE
MORSEL (dim) that-one little-morsel that-man
30 He then having received the sop went immediately out: and it was night.
OUT-CAME came-out
straightway WAS it-was
YET
nux nux
n_ Nom Sg f
NIGHT
13:31 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
nun edoxasqh nun doxazO

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
when
THEN he-OUT-CAME IS-sayING he-came-out qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
JESUS
NOW IS-esteemizED THE is-glorified en en

Prep
SON
OF-THE
31 . Therefore, when he was gone out, Jesus said, Now is the Son of man glorified, and God is glorified in him.
anqrwpou kai o anthrOpos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
edoxasqh doxazO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
human
AND
THE
God
IS-esteemizED IN is-glorified
Him
AV
John 13
13:32
NA
ei ei
Cond
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
edoxasqh en doxazO en
NA
NA
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
IF
THE
God
IS-esteemED is-glorified autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
IN
Him
AND also doxasei doxazO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
God
32 If God be glorified in him, God shall also glorify him in himself, and shall straightway glorify him.
doxasei doxazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep

Conj Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
SHALL-BE-esteemING Him shall-be-glorifying
IN
Him himself meq meta

Prep
AND
straightway SHALL-BE-esteemizING Him shall-be-glorifying eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
13:33 teknia
teknion
n_ Voc Pl n
eti eti
Adv
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
zhthsete zEteO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
little-offsprings STILL LITTLE little-children ! kaqws kathOs

Adv
WITH YOU(p) ye
I-AM
YE-SHALL-BE-SEEKING ME
AND
33 Little children, yet a little while I am with you. Ye shall seek me: and as I said unto the Jews, Whither I go, ye cannot come; so now I say to you.
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois oti opou ioudaios hoti hopou

a_ Dat Pl m Conj Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
according-AS I-said
to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
that
THE-?-where I wheree legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AM-UNDER-LEADING YOU(p) am-going-away ye arti arti

Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
kai umin kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
NOT
ARE-ABLE can
TO-BE-COMING AND also
to-YOU(p) to-ye ina hina

Conj
I-AM-sayING I-am-saying-it agapate agapaO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
at-PRESENT
13:34 entolhn kainhn didwmi

entolE
n_ Acc Sg f
kainos
a_ Acc Sg f
didOmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
allhlous kaqws allElOn kathOs

pc Acc Pl m Adv
hgaphsa agapaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
direction precept umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
NEW
I-AM-GIVING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THAT BE-YE-LOVING one-another be-ye-loving !
according-AS I-LOVE
34 A new commandment I give unto you, That ye love one another; as I have loved you, that ye also love one another.
ina hina
Conj

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
agapate agapaO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
YOU(p) ye
THAT AND also
YOU(p) ye
one-another
13:35 en
en
Prep
toutw gnwsontai houtos ginOskO

pd Dat Sg n vi Fut midD 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oti emoi hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
maqhtai este mathEtEs eimi

ean ean
Cond
35 By this shall all [men] know that ye are my disciples, if ye have love one to another.
IN
this
SHALL-BE-KNOWING ALL
that
to-ME
LEARNers disciples
YE-ARE
IF-EVER
agaphn echte agapE echO

n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
allhlois allElOn
pc Dat Pl m
LOVE
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING IN one-another among autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
13:36 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
upageis hupagO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
IS-sayING
NA
to-Him
SIMON
Peter
Master ! Lord !
?-where YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING answerED where ? you-are-going-away ou ou

Part Neg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dunasai dunamai
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
nun nun
Adv
36 . Simon Peter said unto him, Lord, whither goest thou? Jesus answered him, Whither I go, thou canst not follow me now; but thou shalt follow me afterwards.
to-him him
JESUS
THE-?-where I-AM-UNDER-LEADING NOT wheree I-am-going-away de de

Conj
to-ME me
NOW
akolouqhsai akolouqhseis akoloutheO akoloutheO

usteron husteron
Adv
TO-follow
YOU-SHALL-BE-followING YET subsequently

WH NA
13:37 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
IS-sayING
to-Him
WH
THE
NA
Peter
Master ! Lord ! arti arti

Adv
THRU ANY because-of what ? thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
NOT
37 Peter said unto him, Lord, why cannot I follow thee now? I will lay down my life for thy sake.
dunamai dunamai
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
akolouqein
akolouqhsai akoloutheO
vn Aor Act
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
I-AM-ABLE I-can uper huper

Prep
to-YOU you sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
TO-follow
at-PRESENT THE
soul
OF-ME
qhsw tithEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
OVER YOU for-the-sake-of
I-SHALL-BE-PLACING I-shall-be-laying-down
AV
John 13 - John 14
13:38 apokrinetai
apokrinomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
uper huper
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
IS-answerING
JESUS
THE
soul
OF-YOU
OVER ME for-the-sake-of mh mE
Part Neg
38 Jesus answered him, Wilt thou lay down thy life for my sake? Verily, verily, I say unto thee, The cock shall not crow, till thou hast denied me thrice.
qhseis tithEmi
vi Fut Act 2 Sg

soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
alektwr fwnhsh alektOr phOneO

n_ Nom Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-PLACING AMEN you-shall-be-laying-down verily ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
NOT
NO
UN-LAYer cock
SHOULD-BE-SOUNDING should-be-crowing
arnhsh arneomai
vs Aor midD 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tris tris
Adv
TILL
OF-WHICH YOU-SHALL-BE-disownING ME which you-shall-be-renouncing
THRice
AV
John 14
14:1 mh
mE
Part Neg
tarassesqw tarassO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
pisteuete pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NO
LET-BE-beING-DISTURBED OF-YOU(p) THE let-her-be-being-disturbed ! of-ye kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
. Let not your heart be troubled: ye believe in God, believe also in me.
HEART
INTO THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pisteuete pisteuO
God
AND
INTO ME
BE-BELIEVING be-ye-believing ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
14:2 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
monai monE
a_ Nom Pl f
pollai eisin polus eimi

a_ Nom Pl f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
IN
THE
HOME house an an
Part
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-ME
REMAINS abodes
MANY
ARE
IF
YET
In my Father's house are many mansions: if [it were] not [so], I would have told you. I go to prepare a place for you.
mh mE
Part Neg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti poreuomai hoti poreuomai

etoimasai hetoimazO
vn Aor Act
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
NO
I-said I-told
EVER to-YOU(p) ye poreuqw poreuomai

vs Aor pasD 1 Sg
that
I-AM-GOING
TO-make-READY PLACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
14:3 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
kai etoimasw kai hetoimazO

topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
palin palin
Adv
AND
IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-BEING-GONE AND
I-SHOULD-BE-makING-READY PLACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AGAIN
And if I go and prepare a place for you, I will come again, and receive you unto myself; that where I am, [there] ye may be also.
ercomai erchomai
kai paralhmyomai kai paralambanO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
pros pros
Prep
emauton ina emautou hina

pf 1 Acc Sg m Conj
opou hopou
Adv
I-AM-COMING
AND
I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GETTING YOU(p) I-shall-be-taking-along ye kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
TOWARD MYself
THAT THE-?-where wheree
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
hte eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
AM
AND also
WH
YOU(p) ye
NA
MAY-BE
14:4 kai opou

kai
Conj
egw
hopou
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
. And whither I go ye know, and the way ye know.
AND
THE-?-where wheree autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AM-UNDER-LEADING YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE am-going-away ye-are-aware kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
WAY
14:5 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
qwmas thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
pou pou
Part Int
IS-sayING
to-Him
THOMAS
WH
Master ! Lord !
WH
NOT
WH
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-where we-are-aware where ?

NA
Thomas saith unto him, Lord, we know not whither thou goest; and how can we know the way?
upageis hupagO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
pws pOs
Adv Int
oidamen thn odon
dunameqa dunamai
NA
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
NA
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING how you-are-going-away how ?

NA
WE-ARE-ABLE we-can
THE
WAY
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
TO-PERCEIVE to-be-aware-of
14:6 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
odos hodos
n_ Nom Sg f
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
AM
THE
WAY
Jesus saith unto him, I am the way, the truth, and the life: no man cometh unto the Father, but by me.
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
alhqeia kai h alEtheia kai ho

zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
ercetai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
TRUTH
AND
THE
LIFE
NOT-YET-ONE IS-COMING no-one
TOWARD THE
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
di dia
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FATHER
IF
WH
NO
THRU ME through
NA
14:7 ei
ei
Cond
egnwkeite
egnwkate ginOskO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
WH
an
IF
YE-HAVE-KNOWN
ME
AND also
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
If ye had known me, ye should have known my Father also: and from henceforth ye know him, and have seen him.
AV
John 14
hdeite
NA
gnwsesqe ginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
NA
kai kai
Conj
ap apo
Prep
arti arti
Adv
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai ewrakate kai horaO

Conj vi Perf Act 2 Pl Att
YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING AND
NA
FROM at-PRESENT YE-ARE-KNOWING Him
AND
YE-HAVE-SEEN
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
14:8 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
filippos kurie philippos kurios

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
deixon deiknumi
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
Philip saith unto him, Lord, shew us the Father, and it sufficeth us.
IS-sayING
to-Him
Philip
Master ! Lord !
SHOW show-you !
to-US us
THE
FATHER
AND
arkei arkeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
it-IS-SUFFICING to-US us
14:9 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
tosouton cronon
WH
NA
tosoutw tosoutos
pd Dat Sg m
IS-sayING
NA
to-him
THE
JESUS
so-much
cronw chronos
n_ Dat Sg m
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
egnwkas ginOskO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
filippe o philippos ho
n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
Jesus saith unto him, Have I been so long time with you, and yet hast thou not known me, Philip? he that hath seen me hath seen the Father; and how sayest thou [then], Shew us the Father?
TIME
WITH YOU(p) ye eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
I-AM
AND
NOT
YOU-HAVE-KNOWN ME
Philip !
THE
ewrakws horaO
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Att
ewraken horaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
pws su pOs su
Adv Int pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
deixon deiknumi
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
one-HAVING-SEEN one-having-seen hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
ME
HAS-SEEN
THE
FATHER
how how ?
YOU
ARE-sayING
SHOW show-you !
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
to-US us
THE
FATHER
14:10 ou
ou
Part Neg
pisteueis pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
NOT
YOU-ARE-BELIEVING that
IN
THE
FATHER
AND
THE
FATHER
IN
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ap apo
Prep
emautou emautou
pf 1 Gen Sg m
10 Believest thou not that I am in the Father, and the Father in me? the words that I speak unto you I speak not of myself: but the Father that dwelleth in me, he doeth the works.
ME
IS
THE
declarations WHICH
AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
FROM MYself
ou ou
Part Neg
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
menwn menO
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
NOT
I-AM-TALKING THE I-am-speaking autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
YET FATHER
IN
ME
REMAINING
IS-DOING he-is-doing
THE
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
ACTS works
OF-Him
14:11 pisteuete moi

pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
BE-BELIEVING be-ye-believing ! emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME me mh mE
Part Neg
that
IN
THE
FATHER
AND
THE
FATHER
IN
11 Believe me that I [am] in the Father, and the Father in me: or else believe me for the very works'sake.
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
dia dia
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
pisteuete pisteuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ME
IF
YET NO
THRU THE because-of umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
ACTS works o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
SAME BE-BELIEVING themselves be-ye-believing ! pisteuwn pisteuO


amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
INTO ME
THE
ACTS works
12 . Verily, verily, I say unto you, He that believeth on me, the works that I do shall he do also; and greater [works] than these shall he do; because I go
AV
John 14
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kakeinos poihsei kakeinos poieO

pd Nom Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai meizona kai mega

Conj a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
unto my Father.
WHICH
AM-DOING
AND-that-one also-that-one pros pros

Prep
SHALL-BE-DOING AND
GREATer
OF-these
poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
poreuomai poreuomai
he-SHALL-BE-DOING that
TOWARD THE
FATHER
AM-GOING
14:13 kai o
kai
Conj
hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
an an
Part
aithshte aiteO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

AND
WHICH
ANY what ina hina

Conj
EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING IN
THE
NAME
OF-ME
13 And whatsoever ye shall ask in my name, that will I do, that the Father may be glorified in the Son.
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
doxasqh doxazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
this
I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED THE should-be-being-glorified ti tis

px Acc Sg n
FATHER
IN
THE
SON
14:14 ean
ean
Cond
aithshte aiteO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
WH
me
NA
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
14 If ye shall ask any thing in my name, I will do [it].
IF-EVER ANY anything mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
WH
YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING ye-should-be-requesting-of
NA
ME
IN
THE
NAME
touto
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
poihsw poieO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
OF-ME
SHALL-BE-DOING
14:15 ean
ean
Cond
agapate agapaO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
entolas tas entolE ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f
emas emos
ps 1 Acc Pl
thrhsete tEreO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
15 . If ye love me, keep my commandments.
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-LOVING ME
THE
directions precepts patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MY
YE-SHALL-BE-KEEPING
14:16 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
erwthsw erOtaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai allon kai allos

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
paraklhton dwsei paraklEtos didOmi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
AND-I
SHALL-BE-askING THE
WH WH WH WH WH
FATHER
WH
AND
NA
other another
NA
BESIDE-CALLer consoler
NA
He-SHALL-BE-GIVING
NA
16 And I will pray the Father, and he shall give you another Comforter, that he may abide with you for ever;
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
h meq umwn eis ton aiwna
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
NA
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
to-YOU(p) ye
NA
THAT
WITH YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
eon
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
it-MAY-BE he-may-be
14:17 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma ths pneuma ho

alhqeias o alEtheia hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
THE
spirit
OF-THE
TRUTH
WHICH
THE
SYSTEM world
NOT
IS-ABLE can ginwskete ginOskO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
qewrei theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
oude oude
Adv
ginwskei umeis ginOskO humeis

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 2 Nom Pl
17 [Even] the Spirit of truth; whom the world cannot receive, because it seeth him not, neither knoweth him: but ye know him; for he dwelleth with you, and shall be in you.
TO-BE-GETTING that
NOT
it-IS-beholdING it
NOT-YET IS-KNOWING neither kai en kai en

Conj Prep
YOU(p) ye
NA
ARE-KNOWING
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
oti par hoti para

Conj Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
WH
estin
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
it
that
BESIDE to-YOU(p) ye afhsw aphiEmi

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
it-IS-REMAINING AND
IN
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE
14:18 ouk
ou
Part Neg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
orfanous ercomai orphanos erchomai

a_ Acc Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
NOT
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-LETTING YOU(p) I-shall-be-leaving ye mikron mikros

a_ Acc Sg n
BEREAVED
I-AM-COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
18 . I will not leave you comfortless: I will come to you.
14:19 eti
eti
Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ouketi ouketi
Adv
qewrei theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
STILL LITTLE
AND
THE
SYSTEM world
ME
NOT-STILL IS-beholdING not-longer
YOU(p) ye
YET
19 Yet a little while, and the world seeth me no more; but ye see me: because I live, ye shall live also.
AV
John 14
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
oti hoti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
zw zaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
zhsete zaO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
ARE-beholdING ME
that I seeing-that hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
WH
AM-LIVING
WH
AND also
YOU(p) ye
NA
SHALL-BE-LIVING
NA
14:20 en
en
Prep
umeis gnwsesqe
gnwsesqe ginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oti hoti
Conj
IN
that
THE
DAY
SHALL-BE-KNOWING YOU(p) ye mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
20 At that day ye shall know that I [am] in my Father, and ye in me, and I in you.
that
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
YOU(p) ye
IN
ME
AND-I
IN
YOU(p) ye
21 He that hath my commandments, and keepeth them, he it is that loveth me: and he that loveth me shall be loved of my Father, and I will love him, and will manifest myself to him.
14:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
entolas mou entolE egO

kai thrwn kai tEreO

autas ekeinos autos ekeinos

pp Acc Pl f pd Nom Sg m
THE
one-HAVING one-having o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
directions precepts me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
OF-ME
AND
KEEPING
them
that-one that-one
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
agapwn agapaO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
agapwn agapaO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
IS
THE
one-LOVING one-loving upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
ME
THE
YET one-LOVING one-loving kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
ME
agaphqhsetai agapaO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
agaphsw agapaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
SHALL-BE-BEING-LOVED by
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
AND-I
SHALL-BE-LOVING him
AND
emfanisw emphanizO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
emauton emautou
pf 1 Acc Sg m
SHALL-BE-IN-APPEARizING to-him shall-be-disclosing
MYself
NA
14:22 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
ouc ou
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
iskariwths kurie iskariOthEs kurios

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
IS-sayING
to-Him
JUDAS
NOT
THE
ISCARIOT
Master ! Lord !
AND
22 Judas saith unto him, not Iscariot, Lord, how is it that thou wilt manifest thyself unto us, and not unto the world?
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
oti hmin hoti hemeis

Conj pp 1 Dat Pl
melleis mellO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
emfanizein emphanizO
vn Pres Act
seauton kai ouci seautou kai ouchi

pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj Part Int
ANY what ? tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
HAS-BECOME has-occurred kosmw kosmos

n_ Dat Sg m
that
to-US
YOU-ARE-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-IN-APPEARizING YOURself to-be-disclosing
AND
NOT(emph.)
to-THE
SYSTEM world ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
14:23 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
agapa agapaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
answerED
JESUS
AND
said
to-him
IF-EVER ANY-one anyone pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
IS-LOVING
ME
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thrhsei tEreO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
agaphsei agapaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
23 Jesus answered and said unto him, If a man love me, he will keep my words: and my Father will love him, and we will come unto him, and make our abode with him.
THE
saying word
OF-ME
he-SHALL-BE-KEEPING AND
THE
FATHER
OF-ME
SHALL-BE-LOVING
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eleusomeqa erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
kai monhn kai monE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
par para
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
him
AND
TOWARD him
WE-SHALL-BE-COMING AND
REMAIN abode
BESIDE him
poihsomeqa poieO
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
WE-SHALL-BE-makING shall-be-making
14:24 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
agapwn agapaO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous mou logos egO

ou ou
Part Neg
threi tEreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE-one the-one
NO
LOVING
ME
THE
sayings words
OF-ME
NOT
IS-KEEPING
AND
24 He that loveth me not keepeth not my sayings: and the word which ye hear is not mine, but the Father's which sent me.
AV
John 14
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
emos emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
alla tou alla ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
THE
saying word me egO
WHICH
YE-ARE-HEARING NOT
IS
MY mine
but
OF-THE
pemyantos pempO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
FATHER
14:25 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
lelalhka laleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
par para
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
menwn menO
these I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) these-things I-have-spoken to-ye
BESIDE YOU(p) ye pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
25 . These things have I spoken unto you, being [yet] present with you.
REMAINING
14:26 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
paraklhtos to paraklEtos ho
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
pemyei pempO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
YET BESIDE-CALLer consoler pathr patEr

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
WHICH
SHALL-BE-SENDING
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
didaxei didaskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
26 But the Comforter, [which is] the Holy Ghost, whom the Father will send in my name, he shall teach you all things, and bring all things to your remembrance, whatsoever I have said unto you.
THE
FATHER
IN
THE
NAME
OF-ME
that that-one eipon legO
SHALL-BE-TEACHING ALL
WH
kai upomnhsei kai hupomimnEskO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
pp 2 Dat Pl
AND
SHALL-BE-UNDER-REMINDING YOU(p) shall-be-reminding ye

NA
ALL
WHICH
said
to-YOU(p) to-ye
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
14:27 eirhnhn afihmi

eirEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
aphiEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eirhnhn thn eirEnE ho

emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
didwmi didOmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
PEACE
I-AM-FROM-LETTING to-YOU(p) I-am-leaving to-ye kosmos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg m
PEACE
THE
MY
I-AM-GIVING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
kaqws kathOs
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
didwmi didOmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
27 Peace I leave with you, my peace I give unto you: not as the world giveth, give I unto you. Let not your heart be troubled, neither let it be afraid.
according-AS THE
SYSTEM world umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
IS-GIVING
AM-GIVING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NO
tarassesqw tarassO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
mhde mEde
Conj
deiliatw deiliaO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LET-BE-beING-DISTURBED OF-YOU(p) THE let-her-be-being-disturbed ! of-ye
HEART
NO-YET LET-BE-DREADING neither let-her-be-being-timid ! upagw hupagO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
14:28 hkousate oti egw

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
hoti
Conj
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai ercomai kai erchomai

YE-HEAR
that
said
to-YOU(p) to-ye ecarhte chairO

vi 2Aor pasD 2 Pl
I-AM-UNDER-LEADING AND I-am-going-away an an

Part
I-AM-COMING
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ei ei
Cond
hgapate agapaO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
oti poreuomai hoti poreuomai

pros pros
Prep
28 . Ye have heard how I said unto you, I go away, and come [again] unto you. If ye loved me, ye would rejoice, because I said, I go unto the Father: for my Father is greater than I.
TOWARD YOU(p) ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IF
YE-LOVED
ME
YE-WERE-JOYED EVER that ye-rejoiced meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
I-AM-GOING
TOWARD
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
FATHER
that
THE
FATHER
GREATER
OF-ME
IS
14:29 kai nun eirhka

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
ereO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
prin genesqai prin ginomai

Adv vn 2Aor midD
ina hina
Conj
otan hotan
Conj
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
AND
NOW I-HAVE-declarED to-YOU(p) I-have-declared-it to-ye
ERE
TO-BE-BECOMING THAT when-EVER it-MAY-BE-BECOMING to-be-occurring whenever it-may-be-occurring
29 And now I have told you before it come to pass, that, when it is come to pass, ye might believe.
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
AV
John 14 - John 15
14:30 ouketi
ouketi
Adv
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
lalhsw laleO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ercetai erchomai
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NOT-STILL much not-longer kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-TALKING WITH YOU(p) I-shall-be-speaking ye kai en kai en

Conj Prep
IS-COMING
for
THE
OF-THE
30 Hereafter I will not talk much with you: for the prince of this world cometh, and hath nothing in me.
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
SYSTEM world
chief
AND
IN
ME
NOT
it-IS-HAVING is-having kosmos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE anything ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
14:31 all ina

alla
Conj
hina
Conj
gnw ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oti agapw hoti agapaO

Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg Con
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
but
THAT MAY-BE-KNOWING THE

WH WH NA
SYSTEM world
that
I-AM-LOVING
THE
FATHER
AND
31 But that the world may know that I love the Father; and as the Father gave me commandment, even so I do. Arise, let us go hence.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
entolhn edwken
eneteilato entellomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
outws houtOs
Adv
according-AS
directs
to-ME me enteuqen enteuthen

Adv
THE
FATHER
thus
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
egeiresqe egeirO
agwmen agO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
I-AM-DOING
YE-BE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-LEADING hence be-ye-being-roused ! we-may-be-going
AV
John 15
15:1 egw
egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I eimi eimi G1510 vi Pres vxx 1 Sg AM h hE G3588 t_ Nom Sg f THE ampelos ampelos G288 n_ Nom Sg f GRAPE-VINE grapevine h hE G3588 t_ Nom Sg f THE alhqinh alEthinE G228 a_ Nom Sg f TRUE kai kai G2532 Conj AND o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE pathr patEr G3962 n_ Nom Sg m FATHER
1
. I am the true vine, and my Father is the husbandman.
mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME
o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE
gewrgos geOrgos G1092 n_ Nom Sg m LAND-ACTer farmer en en G1722 Prep IN
estin estin G2076 vi Pres vxx 3 Sg IS
15:2 pan
pan G3956 a_ Acc Sg n EVERY
klhma klEma G2814 n_ Acc Sg n BREAK branch
emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg ME
mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO
feron pheron G5342 vp Pres Act Acc Sg n CARRYING bringing-forth
karpon karpon G2590 n_ Acc Sg m FRUIT
airei airei G142 vi Pres Act 3 Sg He-IS-LIFTING he-is-taking-away ina hina G2443 Conj THAT
auto auto G846 pp Acc Sg n it
Every branch in me that beareth not fruit he taketh away: and every [branch] that beareth fruit, he purgeth it, that it may bring forth more fruit.
kai kai G2532 Conj AND
pan pan G3956 a_ Acc Sg n EVERY
to to G3588 t_ Acc Sg n THE-one the-one
feron pheron G5342 vp Pres Act Acc Sg n CARRYING bringing-forth
kaqairei kathairei G2508 vi Pres Act 3 Sg He-IS-cleansING
auto auto G846 pp Acc Sg n it
pleiona pleiona G4119 a_ Acc Sg m Cmp MORE
ferh pherE G5342 vs Pres Act 3 Sg it-MAY-BE-CARRYING it-may-be-bringing-forth umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye kaqaroi katharoi G2513 a_ Nom Pl m clean este este G2075 vi Pres vxx 2 Pl ARE dia dia G1223 Prep THRU because-of ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE logon logon G3056 n_ Acc Sg m saying word on hon G3739 pr Acc Sg m WHICH lelalhka lelalEka G2980 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-TALKED I-have-spoken
3
15:3 hdh
EdE G2235 Adv ALREADY
Now ye are clean through the word which I have spoken unto you.
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) to-ye
15:4 meinate
meinate G3306 vm Aor Act 2 Pl REMAIN-YE remain-ye ! ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT
en en G1722 Prep IN
kagw kagO G2504 pp 1 Nom Sg Con AND-I also-I
en en G1722 Prep IN
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl YOU(p) ye af aph G575 Prep FROM
kaqws kathOs G2531 Adv according-AS
to to G3588 t_ Nom Sg n THE
klhma klEma G2814 n_ Nom Sg n BREAK branch mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO
Abide in me, and I in you. As the branch cannot bear fruit of itself, except it abide in the vine; no more can ye, except ye abide in me.
dunatai dunatai G1410 vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg IS-ABLE can en en G1722 Prep IN
ferein pherein G5342 vn Pres Act TO-BE-CARRYING to-be-bringing-forth outws houtOs G3779 Adv thus
eautou heautou G1438 pf 3 Gen Sg m self itself umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye
ean ean G1437 Cond IF-EVER
meinh meinE G3306 vs Aor Act 3 Sg it-SHOULD-BE REMAINING it-should-be-remaining emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg ME
th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f THE
ampelw ampelO G288 n_ Dat Sg f GRAPE-VINE grapevine
oude oude G3761 Adv NOT-YET neither
en en G1722 Prep IN
meinhte meinEte G3306 vs Aor Act 2 Pl YE-SHOULD-BE REMAINING ye-should-be-remaining eimi eimi G1510 vi Pres vxx 1 Sg AM h hE G3588 t_ Nom Sg f THE ampelos ampelos G288 n_ Nom Sg f GRAPE-VINE grapevine en en G1722 Prep IN umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye autw autO G846 pp Dat Sg m him ta ta G3588 t_ Nom Pl n THE klhmata klEmata G2814 n_ Nom Pl n BREAKS branches ferei pherei G5342 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-CARRYING is-bringing-forth o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE
5
15:5 egw
egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I
I am the vine, ye [are] the branches: He that abideth in me, and I in him, the same bringeth forth much fruit: for without me ye can do nothing.
menwn menOn G3306 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m one-REMAINING one-remaining
en en G1722 Prep IN
kagw kagO G2504 pp 1 Nom Sg Con AND-I
outos houtos G3778 pd Nom Sg m this-one this-one
ScrTR : ScrTR_t 1.0 / Strong 1.0 / Parsing 1.1 / CGTS 1.5 / CGES_id 2.3
Translation : AV
John 15
polun polun G4183 a_ Acc Sg m much oti hoti G3754 Conj that cwris chOris G5565 Adv apart-from emou emou G1700 pp 1 Gen Sg ME ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT dunasqe dunasthe G1410 vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can en en G1722 Prep IN poiein poiein G4160 vn Pres Act TO-BE-DOING ouden ouden G3762 a_ Acc Sg n NOT-YET-ONE anything eblhqh eblEthE G906 vi Aor Pas 3 Sg he-WAS-CAST exw exO G1854 Adv OUT outside kai kai G2532 Conj AND ws hOs G5613 Adv AS
6
15:6 ean
ean G1437 Cond IF-EVER
tis tis G5100 px Nom Sg m ANY anyone kai kai G2532 Conj AND
meinh meinE G3306 vs Aor Act 3 Sg SHOULD-BE-REMAINING
If a man abide not in me, he is cast forth as a branch, and is withered; and men gather them, and cast [them] into the fire, and they are burned.
klhma klEma G2814 n_ Nom Sg n BREAK branch
exhranqh exEranthE G3583 vi Aor Pas 3 Sg IS-DRIED is-withered kai kai G2532 Conj AND
sunagousin sunagousin G4863 vi Pres Act 3 Pl THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-LEADING they-are-gathering
auta auta G846 pp Acc Pl n them
eis eis G1519 Prep INTO
pur pur G4442 n_ Acc Sg n FIRE
ballousin ballousin G906 vi Pres Act 3 Pl THEY-ARE-CASTING they-are-casting-them
kaietai kaietai G2545 vi Pres Pas 3 Sg he-IS-beING-BURNED it-is-being-burned en en G1722 Prep IN emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg ME kai kai G2532 Conj AND ta ta G3588 t_ Nom Pl n THE rhmata rEmata G4487 n_ Nom Pl n declarations mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME en en G1722 Prep IN
7
15:7 ean
meinhte meinEte G3306 vs Aor Act 2 Pl YE-SHOULD-BE-REMAINING
If ye abide in me, and my words abide in you, ye shall ask what ye will, and it shall be done unto you.
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl YOU(p) ye
o ho G3739 pr Acc Sg n WHICH
qelhte thelEte G2309 vs Pres Act 2 Pl YE-MAY-BE-WILLING
aithsesqe aitEsesthe G154 vi Fut Mid 2 Pl YE-SHALL-BE-REQUESTING
genhsetai genEsetai G1096 vi Fut midD 3 Sg it-SHALL-BE-BECOMING it-shall-be-occurring
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) to-ye edoxasqh edoxasthE G1392 vi Aor Pas 3 Sg IS-esteemizED is-glorified o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE pathr patEr G3962 n_ Nom Sg m FATHER mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME ina hina G2443 Conj THAT karpon karpon G2590 n_ Acc Sg m FRUIT polun polun G4183 a_ Acc Sg m much
8
15:8 en
en G1722 Prep IN
toutw toutO G5129 pd Dat Sg n this
Herein is my Father glorified, that ye bear much fruit; so shall ye be my disciples.
ferhte pherEte G5342 vs Pres Act 2 Pl YE-MAY-BE-CARRYING ye-may-be-bringing-forth
genhsesqe genEsesthe G1096 vi Fut midD 2 Pl YE-SHALL-BE-BECOMING
emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg to-ME
maqhtai mathEtai G3101 n_ Nom Pl m LEARNers disciples kagw kagO G2504 pp 1 Nom Sg Con AND-I also-I hgaphsa EgapEsa G25 vi Aor Act 1 Sg LOVE umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye
9
15:9 kaqws
kathOs G2531 Adv according-AS
hgaphsen EgapEsen G25 vi Aor Act 3 Sg LOVES
me me G3165 pp 1 Acc Sg ME
pathr patEr G3962 n_ Nom Sg m FATHER
. As the Father hath loved me, so have I loved you: continue ye in my love.
meinate meinate G3306 vm Aor Act 2 Pl REMAIN remain-ye !
en en G1722 Prep IN
agaph agapE G26 n_ Dat Sg f LOVE
emh emE G1699 ps 1 Dat Sg MY
15:10 ean
tas tas G3588 t_ Acc Pl f THE
entolas entolas G1785 n_ Acc Pl f directions precepts
thrhshte tErEsEte G5083 vs Aor Act 2 Pl YE-SHOULD-BE-KEEPING
meneite meneite G3306 vi Fut Act 2 Pl YE-SHALL-BE-REMAINING
en en G1722 Prep IN
10 If ye keep my commandments, ye shall abide in my love; even as I have kept my Father's commandments, and abide in his love.
agaph agapE G26 n_ Dat Sg f LOVE
egw egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I
entolas entolas G1785 n_ Acc Pl f directions precepts
tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m OF-THE
patros patros G3962 n_ Gen Sg m FATHER
Translation : AV
John 15
mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME tethrhka tetErEka G5083 vi Perf Act 1 Sg HAVE-KEPT kai kai G2532 Conj AND menw menO G3306 vi Pres Act 1 Sg I-AM-REMAINING am-remaining umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) to-ye autou autou G846 pp Gen Sg m OF-Him en en G1722 Prep IN th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f THE agaph agapE G26 n_ Dat Sg f LOVE
15:11 tauta
tauta G5023 pd Acc Pl n these these-things
lelalhka lelalEka G2980 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-TALKED I-have-spoken kai kai G2532 Conj AND
ina hina G2443 Conj THAT
h hE G3588 t_ Nom Sg f THE
cara chara G5479 n_ Nom Sg f JOY
emh emE G1699 ps 1 Nom Sg MY
en en G1722 Prep IN
11 These things have I spoken unto you, that my joy might remain in you, and [that] your joy might be full.
umwn humOn G5216 pp 2 Gen Pl OF-YOU(p) of-ye
plhrwqh plErOthE G4137 vs Aor Pas 3 Sg MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED
15:12 auth
hautE G3778 pd Nom Sg f this
entolh entolE G1785 n_ Nom Sg f direction precept
emh emE G1699 ps 1 Nom Sg MY
agapate agapate G25 vs Pres Act 2 Pl BE-YE-LOVING ye-may-be-loving
12 This is my commandment, That ye love one another, as I have loved you.
allhlous allElous G240 pc Acc Pl m one-another
hgaphsa EgapEsa G25 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-LOVE
umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye oudeis oudeis G3762 a_ Nom Sg m NOT-YET-ONE no-one filwn philOn G5384 a_ Gen Pl m FOND-ones friends ecei echei G2192 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-HAVING ina hina G2443 Conj THAT tis tis G5100 px Nom Sg m ANY anyone thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE yuchn psuchEn G5590 n_ Acc Sg f soul
13 Greater love hath no man than this, that a man lay down his life for his friends.
15:13 meizona
meizona G3173 a_ Acc Sg f Cmp GREATer
tauths tautEs G3778 pd Gen Sg f OF-this
agaphn agapEn G26 n_ Acc Sg f LOVE
autou autou G846 pp Gen Sg m OF-him
qh thE G5087 vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg MAY-BE-PLACING may-be-laying-down filoi philoi G5384 a_ Nom Pl m FOND-ones friends umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) ye
uper huper G5228 Prep OVER for
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m THE
15:14 umeis
humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye entellomai entellomai G1781 vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg AM-directING
este este G2075 vi Pres vxx 2 Pl ARE
poihte poiEte G4160 vs Pres Act 2 Pl YE-MAY-BE-DOING
osa hosa G3745 pk Acc Pl n as-much-as whatever
14 Ye are my friends, if ye do whatsoever I command you.
15:15 ouketi
ouketi G3765 Adv NOT-STILL not-longer ti ti G5101 pi Acc Sg n ANY what ? panta panta G3956 a_ Acc Pl n ALL
umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p)
legw legO G3004 vi Pres Act 1 Sg I-AM-sayING I-am-terming
doulous doulous G1401 n_ Acc Pl m SLAVES
oti hoti G3754 Conj that
doulos doulos G1401 n_ Nom Sg m SLAVE
ouk ouk G3756 Part Neg NOT
oiden oiden G1492 vi Perf Act 3 Sg HAS-PERCEIVED is-aware filous philous G5384 a_ Acc Pl m FOND-ones friends oti hoti G3754 Conj that
poiei poiei G4160 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-DOING
kurios kurios G2962 n_ Nom Sg m master lord
umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye
de de G1161 Conj YET
eirhka eirEka G2046 vi Perf Act 1 Sg Att I-HAVE-declarED
15 Henceforth I call you not servants; for the servant knoweth not what his lord doeth: but I have called you friends; for all things that I have heard of my Father I have made known unto you.
a ha G3739 pr Acc Pl n WHICH
hkousa Ekousa G191 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-HEAR
para para G3844 Prep BESIDE
tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m THE
egnwrisa egnOrisa G1107 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-KNOWize I-make-known
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) to-ye umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye kai kai G2532 Conj AND
16 Ye have not chosen me, but I have chosen you, and ordained you, that ye should go and bring forth fruit, and [that] your fruit should remain: that
15:16 ouc
ouch G3756 Part Neg NOT
umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye
exelexasqe exelexasthe G1586 vi Aor Mid 2 Pl choose
all all G235 Conj but
exelexamhn exelexamEn G1586 vi Aor Mid 1 Sg choose
Translation : AV
John 15
eqhka ethEka G5087 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-PLACE I-appoint o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye ina hina G2443 Conj THAT umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye umwn humOn G5216 pp 2 Gen Pl OF-YOU(p) of-ye ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE upaghte hupagEte G5217 vs Pres Act 2 Pl MAY-BE-UNDER-LEADING may-be-going-away menh menE G3306 vs Pres Act 3 Sg MAY-BE-REMAINING kai kai G2532 Conj AND karpon karpon G2590 n_ Acc Sg m FRUIT ferhte pherEte G5342 vs Pres Act 2 Pl MAY-BE-CARRYING may-be-bringing-forth ti ti G5100 px Acc Sg n ANY anything kai kai G2532 Conj AND
whatsoever ye shall ask of the Father in my name, he may give it you.
karpos karpos G2590 n_ Nom Sg m FRUIT
o ho G3739 pr Acc Sg n WHICH
an an G302 Part EVER
aithshte aitEsEte G154 vs Aor Act 2 Pl YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING
patera patera G3962 n_ Acc Sg m FATHER
en en G1722 Prep IN
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg n THE
onomati onomati G3686 n_ Dat Sg n NAME
dw dO G1325 vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg He-MAY-BE-GIVING he-may-be-giving-it
15:17 tauta
tauta G5023 pd Acc Pl n these these-things
entellomai entellomai G1781 vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg I-AM-directING
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) ye umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye
agapate agapate G25 vs Pres Act 2 Pl YE-MAY-BE-LOVING
17 These things I command you, that ye love one another.
15:18 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
kosmos kosmos G2889 n_ Nom Sg m SYSTEM world
misei misei G3404 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-HATING
ginwskete ginOskete G1097 vi Pres Act 2 Pl YE-ARE-KNOWING
eme eme G1691 pp 1 Acc Sg ME
prwton prOton G4412 Adv BEFORE-most before
18 . If the world hate you, ye know that it hated me before [it hated] you.
umwn humOn G5216 pp 2 Gen Pl OF-YOU(p) ye
memishken memisEken G3404 vi Perf Act 3 Sg it-HAS-HATED
15:19 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
ek ek G1537 Prep OUT
kosmou kosmou G2889 n_ Gen Sg m SYSTEM world ek ek G1537 Prep OUT
hte Ete G2258 vi Impf vxx 2 Pl YE-WERE
kosmos kosmos G2889 n_ Nom Sg m SYSTEM world
to to G3588 t_ Acc Sg n THE
idion idion G2398 a_ Acc Sg n OWN
19 If ye were of the world, the world would love his own: but because ye are not of the world, but I have chosen you out of the world, therefore the world hateth you.
efilei ephilei G5368 vi Impf Act 3 Sg WAS-FOND was-fond-of exelexamhn exelexamEn G1586 vi Aor Mid 1 Sg choose
oti hoti G3754 Conj that seeing-that umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye
kosmou kosmou G2889 n_ Gen Sg m SYSTEM world
este este G2075 vi Pres vxx 2 Pl YE-ARE
all all G235 Conj but
kosmou kosmou G2889 n_ Gen Sg m SYSTEM world
dia dia G1223 Prep THRU because-of
touto touto G5124 pd Acc Sg n this
umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye
kosmos kosmos G2889 n_ Nom Sg m SYSTEM world tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m OF-THE the logou logou G3056 n_ Gen Sg m saying word ou hou G3739 pr Gen Sg m OF-WHICH which egw egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I eipon eipon G2036 vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg said umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) to-ye ouk ouk G3756 Part Neg NOT
20 Remember the word that I said unto you, The servant is not greater than his lord. If they have persecuted me, they will also persecute you; if they have kept my saying, they will keep yours also.
15:20 mnhmoneuete
mnEmoneuete G3421 vm Pres Act 2 Pl BE-YE-rememberING be-ye-remembering ! estin estin G2076 vi Pres vxx 3 Sg IS doulos doulos G1401 n_ Nom Sg m SLAVE
meizwn meizOn G3187 a_ Nom Sg m Cmp GREATER
kuriou kuriou G2962 n_ Gen Sg m master lord
ei ei G1487 Cond IF
ediwxan ediOxan G1377 vi Aor Act 3 Pl THEY-CHASE they-persecute
Translation : AV
John 15
kai kai G2532 Conj AND also umas humas G5209 pp 2 Acc Pl YOU(p) ye diwxousin diOxousin G1377 vi Fut Act 3 Pl THEY-SHALL-BE-CHASING they-shall-be-persecuting ei ei G1487 Cond IF ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE logon logon G3056 n_ Acc Sg m saying word mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME ethrhsan etErEsan G5083 vi Aor Act 3 Pl THEY-KEEP kai kai G2532 Conj AND also
ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE
umeteron humeteron G5212 ps 2 Acc Pl YOUR-more yours
thrhsousin tErEsousin G5083 vi Fut Act 3 Pl THEY-SHALL-BE-KEEPING
15:21 alla tauta

alla G235 Conj but tauta G5023 pd Acc Pl n these these-things
panta panta G3956 a_ Acc Pl n ALL
poihsousin poiEsousin G4160 vi Fut Act 3 Pl THEY-SHALL-BE-DOING
dia dia G1223 Prep THRU because-of
onoma onoma G3686 n_ Acc Sg n NAME
21 But all these things will they do unto you for my name's sake, because they know not him that sent me.
oti hoti G3754 Conj that seeing-that
oidasin oidasin G1492 vi Perf Act 3 Pl THEY-HAVE-PERCEIVED they-are-acquainted-with hlqon Elthon G2064 vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg I-CAME
pemyanta pempsanta G3992 vp Aor Act Acc Sg m One-SENDing one-sending autois autois G846 pp Dat Pl m to-them
15:22 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
elalhsa elalEsa G2980 vi Aor Act 1 Sg TALK speak
amartian hamartian G266 n_ Acc Sg f missing sin
eicon eichon G2192 vi Impf Act 3 Pl THEY-HAD
nun nun G3568 Adv NOW
22 If I had not come and spoken unto them, they had not had sin: but now they have no cloke for their sin.
profasin prophasin G4392 n_ Acc Sg f BEFORE-APPEARance pretense eme eme G1691 pp 1 Acc Sg ME
ecousin echousin G2192 vi Pres Act 3 Pl THEY-ARE-HAVING
peri peri G4012 Prep ABOUT concerning
ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f THE
amartias hamartias G266 n_ Gen Sg f missing sin mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME
autwn autOn G846 pp Gen Pl m OF-them
15:23 o
ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one
miswn misOn G3404 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m HATING
kai kai G2532 Conj AND also
23 He that hateth me hateth my Father also.
15:24 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
ta ta G3588 t_ Acc Pl n THE
erga erga G2041 n_ Acc Pl n ACTS works
epoihsa epoiEsa G4160 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-DO
en en G1722 Prep IN among nun nun G3568 Adv NOW
autois autois G846 pp Dat Pl m them
a ha G3739 pr Acc Pl n WHICH which(p) kai kai G2532 Conj AND also
oudeis oudeis G3762 a_ Nom Sg m NOT-YET-ONE no-one
allos allos G243 a_ Nom Sg m other
24 If I had not done among them the works which none other man did, they had not had sin: but now have they both seen and hated both me and my Father.
pepoihken pepoiEken G4160 vi Perf Act 3 Sg HAS-DONE
amartian hamartian G266 n_ Acc Sg f missing sin kai kai G2532 Conj AND
eicon eichon G2192 vi Impf Act 3 Pl THEY-HAD
ewrakasin heOrakasin G3708 vi Perf Act 3 Pl Att THEY-HAVE-SEEN
memishkasin memisEkasin G3404 vi Perf Act 3 Pl THEY-HAVE-HATED
15:25 all
all G235 Conj but
plhrwqh plErOthE G4137 vs Aor Pas 3 Sg MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED may-be-being-fulfilled autwn autOn G846 pp Gen Pl m OF-them oti hoti G3754 Conj that
logos logos G3056 n_ Nom Sg m saying word
gegrammenos gegrammenos G1125 vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m HAVING-been-WRITTEN
en en G1722 Prep IN
25 But [this cometh to pass], that the word might be fulfilled that is written in their law, They hated me without a cause.
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m THE
nomw nomO G3551 n_ Dat Sg m LAW
emishsan emisEsan G3404 vi Aor Act 3 Pl THEY-HATE
dwrean dOrean G1432 Adv gratuitously
15:26 otan
hotan G3752 Conj when-EVER whenever
elqh elthE G2064 vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg MAY-BE-COMING
paraklhtos paraklEtos G3875 n_ Nom Sg m BESIDE-CALLer consoler
on hon G3739 pr Acc Sg m WHOM
pemyw pempsO G3992 vi Fut Act 1 Sg SHALL-BE-SENDING
26 . But when the Comforter is come, whom I will send unto you from the Father, [even] the Spirit of truth, which proceedeth from the Father, he
Translation : AV
John 15 - John 16
umin humin G5213 pp 2 Dat Pl to-YOU(p) ye tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m THE para para G3844 Prep BESIDE tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m THE patros patros G3962 n_ Gen Sg m FATHER to to G3588 t_ Nom Sg n THE pneuma pneuma G4151 n_ Nom Sg n spirit ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE alhqeias alEtheias G225 n_ Gen Sg f TRUTH o ho G3739 pr Nom Sg n WHICH para para G3844 Prep BESIDE
shall testify of me:
ekporeuetai ekporeuetai G1607 vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg IS-OUT-GOING is-going-out de de G1161 Conj YET
ekeinos ekeinos G1565 pd Nom Sg m that that-one
marturhsei marturEsei G3140 vi Fut Act 3 Sg SHALL-BE-witnessING shall-be-testifying ap ap G575 Prep FROM archs archEs G746 n_ Gen Sg f ORIGINal beginning
peri peri G4012 Prep ABOUT concerning met met G3326 Prep WITH
emou emou G1700 pp 1 Gen Sg ME
15:27 kai
kai G2532 Conj AND also
umeis humeis G5210 pp 2 Nom Pl YOU(p) ye
martureite martureite G3140 vi Pres Act 2 Pl ARE-witnessING are-testifying
oti hoti G3754 Conj that seeing-that
emou emou G1700 pp 1 Gen Sg ME
este este G2075 vi Pres vxx 2 Pl YE-ARE
27 And ye also shall bear witness, because ye have been with me from the beginning.
Translation : AV
John 16
16:1 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
lelalhka laleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
skandalisqhte skandalizO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
these I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) these-things I-have-spoken to-ye
. These things have I spoken unto you, that ye should not be offended.
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-SNARED
16:2 aposunagwgous
aposunagOgos
a_ Acc Pl m
poihsousin poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
all ercetai alla erchomai

wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ina hina
Conj
FROM-TOGETHER-LEADS THEY-SHALL-BE-DOING YOU(p) put-out-of-synagogue-ones ye pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
but
IS-COMING
HOUR
THAT
They shall put you out of the synagogues: yea, the time cometh, that whosoever killeth you will think that he doeth God service.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apokteinas apokteinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
WH
umas
NA
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
doxh dokeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
latreian latreia
n_ Acc Sg f
EVERY
THE
one-FROM-KILLing one-killing tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
YOU(p) ye
SHOULD-BE-SEEMING DIVINE-SERVICE should-be-supposing
prosferein prospherO
vn Pres Act
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-TOWARD-CARRYING to-THE to-be-offering
God
16:3 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poihsousin poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
oude oude
Adv
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
And these things will they do unto you, because they have not known the Father, nor me.
AND
these THEY-SHALL-BE-DOING that these-things lelalhka laleO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
NOT
THEY-KNOW
THE
FATHER
NOT-YET ME nor wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
4
16:4 alla tauta

alla
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
otan hotan
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
but
these I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) these-things I-have-spoken to-ye autwn oti autos hoti
pp Gen Pl n Conj
THAT when-EVER MAY-BE-COMING THE whenever egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
HOUR
autwn mnhmoneuhte autos mnEmoneuO

pp Gen Pl n vs Pres Act 2 Pl
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
But these things have I told you, that when the time shall come, ye may remember that I told you of them. And these things I said not unto you at the beginning, because I was with you.
OF-them
YE-MAY-BE-rememberING OF-them them ex ek

Prep
that I seeing-that oti hoti

Conj
said told meq meta

Prep
to-YOU(p) ye hmhn eimi

vi impf vxx 1 Sg
these YET these-things
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
to-YOU(p) ye
OUT OF-ORIGINal NOT of-beginning upagw hupagO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-said I-told pros pros

Prep
that WITH YOU(p) seeing-that ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
I-WAS
16:5 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
pemyanta pempO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ex ek
Prep
But now I go my way to him that sent me; and none of you asketh me, Whither goest thou?
NOW YET I-AM-UNDER-LEADING TOWARD THE I-am-going-away umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
ME
AND
NOT-YET-ONE OUT not-one
erwta erOtaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pou pou
Part Int
upageis hupagO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
OF-YOU(p) IS-askING of-ye
ME
?-where YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING where ? you-are-going-away lelalhka laleO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
16:6 all oti

alla
Conj
hoti
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
luph lupE
n_ Nom Sg f
peplhrwken umwn plEroO humeis

vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl
but
that these I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) seeing-that these-things I-have-spoken to-ye kardian kardia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
SORROW
HAS-FILLED
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
But because I have said these things unto you, sorrow hath filled your heart.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
HEART
16:7 all egw

alla
Conj
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian legw alEtheia legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
but
THE
TRUTH
AM-sayING am-telling gar mh gar mE

Conj Part Neg
to-YOU(p) ye apelqw aperchomai

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
it-IS-beING-expedient to-YOU(p) to-ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THAT
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apelqw aperchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ean ean
Cond
paraklhtos paraklEtos
n_ Nom Sg m
. Nevertheless I tell you the truth; It is expedient for you that I go away: for if I go not away, the Comforter will not come unto you; but if I depart, I will send him unto you.
I
WH WH
MAY-BE-FROM-COMING IF-EVER for may-be-coming-away ou mh elqh

WH NA
NO
I-MAY-BE-FROM-COMING THE I-may-be-coming-away umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
BESIDE-CALLer consoler poreuqw poreuomai

vs Aor pasD 1 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
NA
eleusetai erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
NOT
SHALL-BE-COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
IF-EVER YET I-MAY-BE-BEING-GONE
AV
John 16
pemyw pempO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
I-SHALL-BE-SENDING him
TOWARD YOU(p) ye ekeinos ekeinos

pd Nom Sg m
16:8 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
elegxei elegchO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
peri peri
Prep
amartias kai hamartia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
AND
COMING
that that-one
SHALL-BE-EXPOSING THE
SYSTEM world
AND
And when he is come, he will reprove the world of sin, and of righteousness, and of judgment:
peri peri
Prep
dikaiosunhs kai peri dikaiosunE kai peri

krisews krisis
n_ Gen Sg f
ABOUT JUSTice concerning righteousness
AND
ABOUT JUDGing concerning oti hoti

Conj
16:9 peri
peri
Prep
amartias men hamartia men

n_ Gen Sg f Part
ou ou
Part Neg
pisteuousin pisteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
Of sin, because they believe not on me;
INDEED that NOT seeing-that oti hoti

Conj
THEY-ARE-BELIEVING INTO ME
16:10 peri
peri
Prep
dikaiosunhs de dikaiosunE de
n_ Gen Sg f Conj
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai kai
Conj
10 Of righteousness, because I go to my Father, and ye see me no more;
ABOUT JUSTice concerning righteousness ouketi ouketi

Adv
YET that TOWARD THE seeing-that me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
FATHER
I-AM-UNDER-LEADING AND I-am-going-away
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
NOT-STILL YE-ARE-beholdING ME not-longer
16:11 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
krisews oti krisis hoti

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arcwn archOn
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg m
11 Of judgment, because the prince of this world is judged.
ABOUT YET JUDGing concerning kekritai krinO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
chief
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
HAS-been-JUDGED
16:12 eti
eti
Adv
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
legein legO
vn Pres Act
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
bastazein bastazO
vn Pres Act
STILL much
I-AM-HAVING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
12 I have yet many things to say unto you, but ye cannot bear them now.
TO-BE-sayING but
NOT
YE-ARE-ABLE
TO-BE-BEARING to-be-bearing-it
arti arti
Adv
at-PRESENT
16:13 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-COMING that whenever that-one odhghsei hodEgeO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
WH
spirit
WH
OF-THE
NA NA
TRUTH
NA NA
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
WH
eis thn alhqeian pasan
WH
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia pash alEtheia pas

n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f
13 Howbeit when he, the Spirit of truth, is come, he will guide you into all truth: for he shall not speak of himself; but whatsoever he shall hear, [that] shall he speak: and he will shew you things to come.
it-SHALL-BE-WAY-LEADING YOU(p) it-shall-be-guiding ye ou ou

Part Neg
IN
WH
THE
NA
TRUTH
EVERY all
gar lalhsei gar laleO

af apo
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
all osa alla hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl n
akouei
akousei akouO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
NOT
for
it-SHALL-BE-TALKING FROM self it-shall-be-speaking itself kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
but
as-much-as whatever anaggelei anaggellO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
it-SHALL-BE-HEARING
lalhsei laleO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ercomena erchomai
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
it-SHALL-BE-TALKING AND it-shall-be-speaking
THE of-the
COMING(p) things-coming oti hoti

Conj
it-SHALL-BE-UP-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) it-shall-be-informing ye ek ek

Prep
16:14 ekeinos eme

ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
doxasei doxazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
lhmyetai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
14 He shall glorify me: for he shall receive of mine, and shall shew [it] unto you.
that that-one
ME
SHALL-BE-esteemizING that OUT OF-THE shall-be-glorifying seeing-that
ME mine
it-SHALL-BE-GETTING
AV
John 16
kai anaggelei kai anaggellO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
AND
SHALL-BE-UP-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) shall-be-informing ye osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
16:15 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ema emos
ps 1 Nom Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ALL
as-much-as IS-HAVING whatever oti ek hoti ek

Conj Prep
THE
FATHER
MY mine(p)
IS
THRU this because-of umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
15 All things that the Father hath are mine: therefore said I, that he shall take of mine, and shall shew [it] unto you.
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai anaggelei kai anaggellO

I-said
that
OUT OF-THE
ME mine qewreite theOreO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
it-IS-GETTING-UP AND it-is-getting me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-UP-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) shall-be-informing ye kai kai

Conj
16 . A little while, and ye shall not see me: and again, a little while, and ye shall see me, because I go to the Father.
16:16 mikron
mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
kai ouketi kai ouketi

Conj Adv
kai palin mikron kai palin mikros

Conj Adv a_ Acc Sg n
LITTLE
AND
NOT-STILL YE-ARE-beholdING ME not-longer me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
AGAIN
LITTLE
AND
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING ME ye-shall-be-seeing
16:17 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

pros pros
Prep
allhlous ti allElOn tis

pc Acc Pl m pi Nom Sg n
say some-say estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEN OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples hmin hemeis
OF-Him
TOWARD one-another
ANY what ? me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
17 Then said [some] of his disciples among themselves, What is this that he saith unto us, A little while, and ye shall not see me: and again, a little while, and ye shall see me: and, Because I go to the Father?
pp 1 Dat Pl
IS
this
WHICH
He-IS-sayING
to-US
LITTLE
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-beholdING ME


me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai oti upagw kai hoti hupagO

Conj Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
AND
AGAIN
LITTLE
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING ME ye-shall-be-seeing
AND
that
I-AM-UNDER-LEADING TOWARD I-am-going-away
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
FATHER
WH WH NA NA
16:18 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
o legei
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-said
NA
THEN ANY what ? ouk ou

Part Neg
IS
this
WH WH NA
WHICH
NA
He-IS-sayING
18 They said therefore, What is this that he saith, A little while? we cannot tell what he saith.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ti lalei
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
LITTLE
NOT
NA
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED we-are-aware-of ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
ANY what ? oti hqelon hoti thelO

He-IS-TALKING he-is-speaking erwtan erOtaO

vn Pres Act
16:19 egnw
ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
KNEW
THE
JESUS
that
THEY-WILLED Him
TO-BE-askING AND
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois peri autos peri

pp Dat Pl m Prep
toutou zhteite houtos zEteO

pd Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
met allhlwn oti eipon meta allElOn hoti legO

Prep pc Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
19 Now Jesus knew that they were desirous to ask him, and said unto them, Do ye enquire among yourselves of that I said, A little while, and ye shall not see me: and again, a little while, and ye shall see me?
He-said
to-them
ABOUT this concerning me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
YE-ARE-SEEKING WITH one-another
that
I-said
LITTLE
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl


me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
NOT
YE-ARE-beholdING ME
AND
AGAIN
LITTLE
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING ME ye-shall-be-seeing kai qrhnhsete kai thrEneO


amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti klausete hoti klaiO

umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
SHALL-BE-LAMENTING AND
SHALL-BE-DIRGING YOU(p) shall-be-wailing ye
20 Verily, verily, I say unto you, That ye shall weep and lament, but the world shall rejoice: and ye shall be sorrowful, but your sorrow
AV
John 16
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
carhsetai chairO
vi 2Fut pasD 3 Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
luphqhsesqe lupeO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
all h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
luph lupE
n_ Nom Sg f
shall be turned into joy.
THE
YET SYSTEM world eis eis

Prep
SHALL-BE-JOYING YOU(p) shall-be-rejoicing ye genhsetai ginomai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-BEING-SORROWED but
THE
SORROW
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU(p) INTO JOY of-ye
SHALL-BE-BECOMING
16:21 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
otan hotan
Conj
tikth tiktO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
luphn lupE
n_ Acc Sg f
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
THE
WOMAN
when-EVER she-MAY-BE-BRINGING-FORTH SORROW IS-HAVING whenever auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
that seeing-that to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
otan hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
gennhsh gennaO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
paidion paidion
n_ Acc Sg n
21 A woman when she is in travail hath sorrow, because her hour is come: but as soon as she is delivered of the child, she remembereth no more the anguish, for joy that a man is born into the world.
CAME
THE
HOUR
OF-her
when-EVER YET she-SHOULD-BE-generatING THE whenever she-should-be-bearing dia dia

Prep
little-boy (-or-girl)
ouketi ouketi
Adv
mnhmoneuei mnEmoneuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
oti egennhqh hoti gennaO

NOT-STILL she-IS-rememberING OF-THE not-longer the anqrwpos eis anthrOpos eis

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
CONSTRICTION THRU THE affliction because-of
JOY
that
WAS-generatED was-born
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
human
INTO THE
SYSTEM world nun men nun men

Adv Part
16:22 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oun oun
Conj
luphn lupE
n_ Acc Sg f
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
palin de palin de
Adv Conj
oyomai optomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AND also
YOU(p) ye
THEN NOW INDEED SORROW ARE-HAVING AGAIN
YET I-SHALL-BE-VIEWING YOU(p) I-shall-be-seeing ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
22 And ye now therefore sorrow: but I will see again, and your heart rejoice, and your joy no taketh from you.
have you shall man
kai carhsetai kai chairO

Conj vi 2Fut pasD 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
WH
arei
AND
NA
SHALL-BE-JOYING OF-YOU(p) THE shall-be-rejoicing of-ye af apo

Prep
HEART
AND
THE
JOY
OF-YOU(p) NOT-YET-ONE of-ye no-one
airei airO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
FROM YOU(p) ye ekeinh th ekeinos ho

16:23 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
erwthsete erOtaO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
amhn amEn
Hebrew
AND
IN
that
THE
DAY
ME
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE-askING NOT-YET-ONE AMEN anything verily ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
23 . And in that day ye shall ask me nothing. Verily, verily, I say unto you, Whatsoever ye shall ask the Father in my name, he will give [it] you.
amhn legw amEn legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
an an
Part
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
aithshte aiteO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
WH
dwsei
AMEN verily
WH
I-AM-sayING
WH WH WH
to-YOU(p) to-ye
EVER ANY what

WH NA
YE-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING THE
NA NA NA NA
FATHER
NA
umin en tw onomati mou
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
THE
NAME
OF-ME
He-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) he-shall-be-giving-it to-ye onomati mou onoma egO

24 Hitherto have ye asked nothing in my name: ask, and ye shall receive, that your joy may be full.
16:24 ews arti

heOs
Conj
arti
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
hthsate aiteO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
TILL
at-PRESENT NOT
YE-REQUEST NOT-YET-ONE IN anything ina hina

Conj
THE
NAME
OF-ME
aiteite aiteO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai lhmyesqe kai lambanO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
BE-REQUESTING AND be-ye-requesting ! peplhrwmenh plEroO

YE-SHALL-BE-GETTING THAT THE ye-shall-be-obtaining
JOY
OF-YOU(p) MAY-BE of-ye
HAVING-been-FILLED
AV
John 16
16:25 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
paroimiais lelalhka paroimia laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ercetai erchomai
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ote ouketi hote ouketi

Adv Adv
these IN these-things en en
Prep
proverbs
I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) I-have-spoken to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IS-COMING
HOUR
when
NOT-STILL not-longer
paroimiais lalhsw paroimia laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 1 Sg
alla parrhsia peri alla parrhEsia peri

Conj n_ Dat Sg f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
25 These things have I spoken unto you in proverbs: but the time cometh, when I shall no more speak unto you in proverbs, but I shall shew you plainly of the Father.
IN
proverbs
I-SHALL-BE-TALKING to-YOU(p) I-shall-be-speaking to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
but
to-boldness
FATHER
apaggelw apaggellO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) I-shall-be-reporting to-ye
16:26 en
en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

aithsesqe aiteO
vi Fut Mid 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
IN
that
THE
DAY
IN
THE
NAME
OF-ME
YE-SHALL-BE-REQUESTING AND
26 At that day ye shall ask in my name: and I say not unto you, that I will pray the Father for you:
ou ou
Part Neg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
erwthsw erOtaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
NOT
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
SHALL-BE-askING THE
FATHER
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
27 For the Father himself loveth you, because ye have loved me, and have believed that I came out from God.
16:27 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
filei phileO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oti hoti
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
SAME shimself
for
THE
FATHER
IS-beING-FOND YOU(p) is-being-fond-of ye para para

Prep
that YOU(p) seeing-that ye

WH
ME
NA
pefilhkate kai pepisteukate oti egw phileO kai pisteuO hoti egO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj vi Perf Act 2 Pl Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
tou patros
WH
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
HAVE-been-FOND AND have-been-fond-of

NA
YE-HAVE-BELIEVED have-believed
that
BESIDE
OF-THE the
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
God
OUT-CAME came-out
WH
16:28 exhlqon
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ek
NA
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai elhluqa kai erchomai

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
I-OUT-CAME I-came-out palin afihmi palin aphiEmi

BESIDE
OF-THE the kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
FATHER
AND
I-HAVE-COME have-come pros pros

Prep
INTO THE
SYSTEM world patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
28 . I came forth from the Father, and am come into the world: again, I leave the world, and go to the Father.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai poreuomai kai poreuomai

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AGAIN
I-AM-FROM-LETTING THE I-am-leaving
SYSTEM world
AND
I-AM-GOING am-going
TOWARD THE
FATHER
16:29 legousin oi
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m

ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
nun en nun en
Adv Prep
parrhsia laleis parrhEsia laleO

29 His disciples said unto him, Lo, now speakest thou plainly, and speakest no proverb.
ARE-sayING
THE
LEARNers disciples legeis legO
OF-Him
BE-PERCEIVING NOW IN lo !
boldness
YOU-ARE-TALKING you-are-speaking
kai paroimian oudemian kai paroimia oudeis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
AND
proverb
NOT-YET-ONE YOU-ARE-sayING not-one you-are-telling oti oidas hoti eidO

16:30 nun oidamen

nun
Adv
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
NOW WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware ina hina

Conj
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED ALL you-are-aware-of all-things en en

Prep
AND
NOT
need
YOU-ARE-HAVING are-having qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
30 Now are we sure that thou knowest all things, and needest not that any man should ask thee: by this we believe that thou camest forth from God.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
erwta erOtaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
toutw pisteuomen houtos pisteuO

pd Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Pl
oti apo hoti apo

Conj Prep
THAT ANY anyone exhlqes exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU
MAY-BE-askING IN
this
WE-ARE-BELIEVING that
FROM God
YOU-OUT-CAME you-came-out
AV
John 16 - John 17
16:31 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autois ihsous autos iEsous

arti arti
Adv
pisteuete pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
31 Jesus answered them, Do ye now believe?
answerED
to-them them
JESUS
at-PRESENT YE-ARE-BELIEVING
16:32 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ercetai erchomai
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
kai elhluqen kai erchomai

ina hina
Conj
skorpisqhte skorpizO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
BE-PERCEIVING IS-COMING lo ! ekastos eis hekastos eis

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
HOUR
AND
HAS-COME
THAT YE-SHOULD-BE-BEING-SCATTERED
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
kame kagO
pp 1 Acc Sg Con
monon monos
a_ Acc Sg m
afhte aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
32 Behold, the hour cometh, yea, is now come, that ye shall be scattered, every man to his own, and shall leave me alone: and yet I am not alone, because the Father is with me.
EACH each-man eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
INTO THE
OWN own(p) oti o hoti ho

Conj
AND-ME
ONLY alone
YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING AND ye-may-be-leaving estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
I-AM
ONLY alone
that
THE
FATHER
WITH ME
IS
16:33 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
lelalhka laleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
eirhnhn echte eirEnE echO

n_ Acc Sg f vs Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
these I-HAVE-TALKED to-YOU(p) these-things I-have-spoken to-ye kosmw kosmos

n_ Dat Sg m
THAT IN
ME
PEACE
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING IN
THE
qliyin thlipsis
n_ Acc Sg f
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
alla qarseite alla tharseO

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
nenikhka nikaO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
33 These things I have spoken unto you, that in me ye might have peace. In the world ye shall have tribulation: but be of good cheer; I have overcome the world.
SYSTEM world kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
CONSTRICTION YE-ARE-HAVING but affliction
BE-YE-COURAGE-ING I be-ye-having-courage !
HAVE-CONQUERED THE
SYSTEM world
AV
John 17
17:1 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
elalhsen ihsous laleO iEsous

kai eparas kai epairO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m

eis eis
Prep
these TALKS these-things speaks ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
AND
ON-LIFTing lifting-up elhluqen erchomai

vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes wra hOra

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-Him
INTO
ouranon eipen ouranos legO

pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doxason doxazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
. These words spake Jesus, and lifted up his eyes to heaven, and said, Father, the hour is come; glorify thy Son, that thy Son also may glorify thee:
THE
heaven
said he-said ina hina

Conj
FATHER !
HAS-COME
THE
HOUR
esteemize glorify-you !
OF-YOU
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
doxash doxazO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
SON
THAT THE
SON
SHOULD-BE-esteemING YOU should-be-glorifying sarkos ina sarx hina

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
17:2 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
exousian pashs exousia pas

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
according-AS YOU-GIVE
to-Him him
WH
authority
NA
OF-EVERY FLESH of-all
THAT EVERY everything
WHICH
As thou hast given him power over all flesh, that he should give eternal life to as many as thou hast given him.
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dwsei
dwsh didOmi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autois zwhn autos zOE

aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-Him
He-SHOULD-BE-GIVING
to-them
LIFE
eonian
17:3 auth
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
aiwnios zwh aiOnios zOE

ina hina
Conj
ginwskwsin ginOskO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
SAME this ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET IS
THE
eonian
LIFE
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-KNOWING YOU
And this is life eternal, that they might know thee the only true God, and Jesus Christ, whom thou hast sent.
monon monos
a_ Acc Sg m
alhqinon qeon alEthinos theos

kai on kai hos

Conj pr Acc Sg m
apesteilas ihsoun apostellO iEsous

criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
ONLY
TRUE
God
AND
WHOM
YOU-commission
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ teleiwsas teleioO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
4
17:4 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
edoxasa doxazO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
I have glorified thee on the earth: I have finished the work which thou gavest me to do.
YOU
esteemize glorify moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
ON
THE
LAND earth
THE
ACT work
maturing finishing
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
ina hina
Conj
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me me egO
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-DOING
17:5 kai nun doxason

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
doxazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
para para
Prep
seautw th seautou ho
pf 3 Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
NOW esteemize glorify-you ! pro pro

Prep
ME
YOU
FATHER !
BESIDE YOURself
to-THE
esteem glory
WHICH
And now, O Father, glorify thou me with thine own self with the glory which I had with thee before the world was.
eicon echO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
para para
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
I-HAD
BEFORE OF-THE the
THE
SYSTEM world onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE
BESIDE YOU
17:6 efanerwsa sou

phaneroO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
su
pp 2 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois ous anthrOpos hos

n_ Dat Pl m pr Acc Pl m
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
I-make-APPEAR I-manifest ek ek
Prep
OF-YOU
THE
NAME
to-THE
humans
WHOM
YOU-GIVE
to-ME me
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
kamoi kagO
pp 1 Dat Sg Con
autous edwkas autos didOmi

kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
. I have manifested thy name unto the men which thou gavest me out of the world: thine they were, and thou gavest them me; and they have kept thy word.
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
to-YOU
THEY-WERE AND-to-ME
them
YOU-GIVE
AND
THE
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tethrhkan tEreO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
saying word
OF-YOU
THEY-HAVE-KEPT
WH NA
17:7 nun egnwkan

nun
Adv
ginOskO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
oti panta hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
edwkas
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
para para
Prep
Now they have known that all things whatsoever thou hast given me are of thee.
NOW THEY-HAVE-KNOWN that
ALL all-things
as-much-as whatever
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN
to-ME me
BESIDE
AV
John 17
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
YOU
ARE
17:8 oti ta
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
edwkas didOmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
dedwka didOmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
autois kai autoi autos kai autos

pp Dat Pl m Conj pp Nom Pl m
that
THE
declarations WHICH
YOU-GIVE
to-ME me sou su
I-HAVE-GIVEN to-them them exhlqon exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
they
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai egnwsan kai ginOskO

alhqws oti para alEthOs hoti para

Adv Conj Prep
kai episteusan oti kai pisteuO hoti

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj
For I have given unto them the words which thou gavest me; and they have received [them], and have known surely that I came out from thee, and they have believed that thou didst send me.
pp 2 Gen Sg
GOT took-them su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
AND
THEY-KNOW know
TRUly
that
BESIDE YOU
AND
THEY-BELIEVE
that
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU
ME
commission
17:9 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
peri peri
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
alla alla
Conj
ABOUT them concerning wn hos

pr Gen Pl m
AM-askING
NOT
ABOUT THE concerning eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
SYSTEM world
I-AM-askING
but
I pray for them: I pray not for the world, but for them which thou hast given me; for they are thine.
peri peri
Prep
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oti soi hoti su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
ABOUT WHOM concerning whom(p)
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me ema emos

ps 1 Nom Pl
that
to-YOU
THEY-ARE
17:10 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
sa sos
ps 2 Nom Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
sa sos
ps 2 Nom Pl
ema emos
ps 1 Nom Pl
kai kai
Conj
10 And all mine are thine, and thine are mine; and I am glorified in them.
AND
THE
MY mine(p) en en
Prep
ALL
YOUR your(p)
IS
AND
THE
YOUR your(p)
MY mine(p)
AND
dedoxasmai doxazO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
I-HAVE-been-esteemizED IN I-have-been-glorified
them
17:11 kai ouketi

kai
Conj
ouketi
Adv
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
NOT-STILL I-AM not-longer kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
IN
THE
SYSTEM world ercomai erchomai
AND
they
IN
THE
SYSTEM world thrhson tEreO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
agie hagios
a_ Voc Sg m
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
11 . And now I am no more in the world, but these are in the world, and I come to thee. Holy Father, keep through thine own name those whom thou hast given me, that they may be one, as we [are].
ARE
AND-I
TOWARD YOU
AM-COMING
FATHER !
HOLY !
KEEP keep-you ! en heis
them
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

w hos
pr Dat Sg n
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
n_ Nom Sg n
IN
THE
NAME
OF-YOU
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME
THAT THEY-MAY-BE ONE
kaqws kathOs
Adv
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
according-AS WE we-are
17:12 ote hmhn

hote
Adv
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg

Prep pp Gen Pl m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ethroun tEreO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
when
I-WAS
WITH them
KEPT
them
IN
THE
NAME
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai efulaxa kai phulassO


Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
12 While I was with them in the world, I kept them in thy name: those that thou gavest me I have kept, and none of them is lost, but the son of perdition; that the scripture might be fulfilled.
OF-YOU
WHOM which ei ei
Cond
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me mh mE
Part Neg
AND
I-GUARD I-guard-them
AND
NOT-YET-ONE OUT OF-them not-one h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
apwleto apollumi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
apwleias ina apOleia hina

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
was-destroyED IF perished
NO
THE
SON
OF-THE
destruction
THAT THE
WRITing scripture
AV
John 17
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED may-be-being-fulfilled
17:13 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ercomai erchomai

Conj pd Acc Pl n
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
NOW YET TOWARD YOU
I-AM-COMING
AND
these I-AM-TALKING IN these-things I-am-speaking emhn emos

ps 1 Acc Sg
THE
13 And now come I to thee; and these things I speak in the world, that they might have my joy fulfilled in themselves.
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
ecwsin echO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
peplhrwmenhn en plEroO en
vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f Prep
SYSTEM world eautois heautou

pf 3 Dat Pl m
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-HAVING THE
JOY
THE
MY
HAVING-been-FILLED having-been-filled-full
IN
selves themselves
17:14 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
dedwka didOmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
autois ton autos ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
HAVE-GIVEN
to-them them
THE
saying word ek ek
Prep
OF-YOU
AND
THE
SYSTEM world egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
14 I have given them thy word; and the world hath hated them, because they are not of the world, even as I am not of the world.
emishsen autous oti ouk miseO autos hoti ou

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
HATES
them
that
NOT
THEY-ARE
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
according-AS I
NOT
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
AM
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world ina hina

Conj
17:15 ouk
ou
Part Neg
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
arhs airO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
autous ek autos ek
pp Acc Pl m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
NOT
I-AM-askING
THAT YOU-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING them you-should-be-taking-away autous ek autos ek

pp Acc Pl m Prep
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
but
THAT
15 I pray not that thou shouldest take them out of the world, but that thou shouldest keep them from the evil.
thrhshs tEreO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ponhrou ponEros
a_ Gen Sg m
YOU-SHOULD-BE-KEEPING them
OUT OF-THE
wicked wicked-one kaqws kathOs

Adv
17:16 ek
ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
16 They are not of the world, even as I am not of the world.
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
NOT
THEY-ARE
according-AS I
NOT
AM
OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
SYSTEM world autous en autos en

pp Acc Pl m Prep
17:17 agiason
hagiazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia o alEtheia ho
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sos sos
ps 2 Nom Sg
17 . Sanctify them through thy truth: thy word is truth.
HOLYize hallow-you ! alhqeia estin alEtheia eimi

n_ Nom Sg f
them
IN
THE
TRUTH
THE
saying word
THE
YOUR
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TRUTH
IS
17:18 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
apesteilas eis apostellO eis

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
apesteila apostellO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
18 As thou hast sent me into the world, even so have I also sent them into the world.
according-AS ME
YOU-commission you-dispatch kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
AND-I also-I
commission dispatch

pp Acc Pl m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
them
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
AV
John 17
17:19 kai uper

kai
Conj
huper
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WH
egw
NA
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
agiazw hagiazO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
emauton ina emautou hina

pf 1 Acc Sg m Conj
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
AND
OVER them for-the-sake-of hgiasmenoi hagiazO

AM-HOLYizING MYself am-hallowing
THAT MAY-BE
19 And for their sakes I sanctify myself, that they also might be sanctified through the truth.
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Dat Sg f
AND also
they
HAVING-been-HOLYizED IN having-been-hallowed peri peri

Prep
TRUTH
17:20 ou
ou
Part Neg
toutwn de houtos de
pd Gen Pl m Conj
erwtw erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
monon alla kai peri monon alla kai peri

Adv Conj Conj Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
NOT
ABOUT these concerning these-men tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YET I-AM-askING
ONLY
but
AND also
20 . Neither pray I for these alone, but for them also which shall believe on me through their word;
pisteuontwn dia pisteuO dia

logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing
THRU THE through en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
saying word wsin eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
OF-them
INTO ME
WH NA
17:21 ina
hina
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
pathr
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
en en
Prep
THAT ALL
ONE
THEY-MAY-BE according-AS YOU
FATHER !
IN
21 That they all may be one; as thou, Father, [art] in me, and I in thee, that they also may be one in us: that the world may believe that thou hast sent me.
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
ina hina
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ME
AND-I
IN
YOU
THAT AND also me egO
they
IN
US
MAY-BE
THAT THE
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
pisteuh pisteuO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
oti su hoti su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
pp 1 Acc Sg
SYSTEM world
MAY-BE-BELIEVING that should-be-believing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YOU
ME
commission
17:22 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
dedwka didOmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg

pp Dat Pl m Conj
AND-I
THE
esteem glory kaqws kathOs

Adv
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
I-HAVE-GIVEN to-them have-given them
THAT
22 And the glory which thou gavest me I have given them; that they may be one, even as we are one:
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
THEY-MAY-BE ONE
according-AS WE we-are autois kai su autos kai su

pp Dat Pl m Conj
ONE
17:23 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
en en
Prep
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
teteleiwmenoi teleioO
pp 2 Nom Sg
IN
them
AND
YOU
IN
ME
THAT THEY-MAY-BE HAVING-been-maturED having-been-perfected oti su hoti su

Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
eis eis
Prep
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
ginwskh ginOskO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
23 I in them, and thou in me, that they may be made perfect in one; and that the world may know that thou hast sent me, and hast loved them, as thou hast loved me.
INTO ONE
THAT MAY-BE-KNOWING THE
SYSTEM world
that
YOU
ME
commission
kai hgaphsas autous kaqws kai agapaO autos kathOs

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp Acc Pl m Adv
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hgaphsas agapaO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
YOU-LOVE
WH
them
NA
according-AS ME
YOU-LOVE
17:24
pathr
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
opou hopou
Adv
FATHER !
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
I-AM-WILLING THAT THE-?-where the-where ina hina

Conj
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kakeinoi wsin kakeinos eimi

pd Nom Pl m vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
qewrwsin theOreO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
24 . Father, I will that they also, whom thou hast given me, be with me where I am; that they may behold my glory, which thou hast given me: for thou lovedst me before the foundation of the world.
AM
AND-those also-those emhn emos

ps 1 Acc Sg
MAY-BE
WITH ME
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-beholdING THE
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oti hgaphsas me hoti agapaO egO

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
pro pro
Prep
esteem glory
THE
MY
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN to-ME me
that
YOU-LOVE
ME
BEFORE
AV
John 17 - John 18

DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM disruption of-world
17:25
WH
pathr
NA
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
dikaie dikaios
a_ Voc Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
egnw ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
FATHER !
JUST ! just-one !
AND also
THE
SYSTEM world egnwsan ginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
YOU
NOT
KNEW
25 O righteous Father, the world hath not known thee: but I have known thee, and these have known that thou hast sent me.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
egnwn ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg

Conj pd Nom Pl m
oti su hoti su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
YET YOU
KNEW
AND
these these-ones
KNOW
that
YOU
ME
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
commission
17:26 kai egnwrisa autois to

kai
Conj
gnOrizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
autos
pp Dat Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai gnwrisw kai gnOrizO

ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
I-KNOWize I-make-known hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
to-them
THE
NAME
OF-YOU
AND
I-SHALL-BE-KNOWizING THAT THE I-shall-be-making-known-it kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
26 And I have declared unto them thy name, and will declare [it]: that the love wherewith thou hast loved me may be in them, and I in them.
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
hgaphsas me agapaO egO

en en
Prep
autois h autos eimi

pp Dat Pl m vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
LOVE
WHICH
YOU-LOVE
ME
IN
them
MAY-BE
AND-I
IN
them
AV
John 18
18:1 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m

these sayING these-things peran peran

Adv
JESUS
WH
OUT-CAME came-out
NA
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the kedrwn opou kedrOn hopou

ni proper Adv
LEARNers disciples hn eimi
OF-Him
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ceimarrou cheimarrhos
n_ Gen Sg m
twn
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
khpos kEpos
n_ Nom Sg m
. When Jesus had spoken these words, he went forth with his disciples over the brook Cedron, where was a garden, into the which he entered, and his disciples.
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
OTHER-SIDE OF-THE
WINTER-GUSH winter-brook autos autos

pp Nom Sg m
THE
KEDRON
GARDEN
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

INTO WHICH
He-INTO-CAME He he-entered de de
Conj
AND
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
18:2 hdei
eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
HAD-PERCEIVED YET AND was-acquainted-with also oti pollakis sunhcqh hoti pollakis sunagO
JUDAS
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up ekei meta twn ekei meta ho

Adv Prep t_ Gen Pl m
THE
PLACE
And Judas also, which betrayed him, knew the place: for Jesus ofttimes resorted thither with his disciples.
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m

that
MANY-times often
WAS-TOGETHER-LED JESUS was-gathered oun oun

Conj
there
WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
18:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
labwn lambanO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
speiran kai ek speira kai ek

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
n_ Gen Pl m
THE
WH
THEN JUDAS
NA
GETTING
THE
BAND squad
AND
OUT OF-THE
chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests
kai kai
Conj
ek
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn uphretas ercetai pharisaios hupEretEs erchomai

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
ekei meta fanwn ekei meta phanos

Adv Prep n_ Gen Pl m
Judas then, having received a band [of men] and officers from the chief priests and Pharisees, cometh thither with lanterns and torches and weapons.
AND
OUT
OF-THE
PHARISEES
IS-COMING
there
WITH
APPEARers lanterns
kai lampadwn kai oplwn kai lampas kai hoplon

Conj n_ Gen Pl f Conj n_ Gen Pl n
AND
SHINers torches
AND
IMPLEMENTS weapons panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
18:4 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
eidws eidO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ercomena erchomai
ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
JESUS
THEN HAVING-PERCEIVED ALL being-aware-of kai legei kai legO

THE
COMING(p) things-coming
ON
Him
Jesus therefore, knowing all things that should come upon him, went forth, and said unto them, Whom seek ye?
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OUT-CAME came-out
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
ANY whom ? ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YE-ARE-SEEKING

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
nazwraion legei nazOraios legO


THEY-answerED
to-Him him de de
Conj
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
He-IS-sayING
to-them
They answered him, Jesus of Nazareth. Jesus saith unto them, I am [he]. And Judas also, which betrayed him, stood with them.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
eisthkei histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
AM
HAD-STOOD stood eipen legO
YET AND also
JUDAS
THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING Him one-giving-up eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
WITH them
18:6 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj

aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
opisw opisO
Adv
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AS
THEN He-said
to-them
AM
THEY-FROM-CAME INTO THE they-dropped the(p)
BEHIND
As soon then as he had said unto them, I am [he], they went backward, and fell to the ground.
kai epesan kai piptO

camai chamai
Adv
AND
FALL
ON-GROUND
18:7 palin oun

palin
Adv
oun
Conj
ephrwthsen autous tina eperOtaO autos tis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg m
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
Then asked he them again, Whom seek ye? And they said, Jesus of Nazareth.
AGAIN
THEN He-inquirES-of
them
ANY whom ?
YE-ARE-SEEKING THE-ones the
YET say they-say
AV
John 18
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nazwraion nazOraios
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
18:8 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
answerED
JESUS
I-said
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
AM
IF
THEN ME
Jesus answered, I have told you that I am [he]: if therefore ye seek me, let these go their way:
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
toutous upagein houtos hupagO

pd Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
YE-ARE-SEEKING FROM-LET let-ye !
these these-men o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING to-be-going-away logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
18:9 ina
hina
Conj
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oti ous hoti hos

Conj pr Acc Pl m
dedwkas didOmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE may-be-being-fulfilled moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
saying
WHICH
He-said
that
WHOM
YOU-HAVE-GIVEN
That the saying might be fulfilled, which he spake, Of them which thou gavest me have I lost none.
ouk ou
Part Neg
apwlesa ex apollumi ek
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
to-ME me
NOT
I-destroy I-lose oun oun

Conj
OUT OF-them
NOT-YET-ONE anyone macairan eilkusen authn machaira helkuO autos

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
18:10 simwn
simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
kai epaisen kai paiO

SIMON
THEN Peter
HAVING
sword
DRAWS
her herit to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
HITS
10 Then Simon Peter having a sword drew it, and smote the high priest's servant, and cut off his right ear. The servant's name was Malchus.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
doulon kai apekoyen doulos kai apokoptO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
wtarion Otarion
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one SLAVE chief-priest hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
FROM-STRIKES OF-him strikes-off doulw doulos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
EARlobe ear-lobe
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dexion dexios
a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
malcos malchos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
RIGHT
WAS
YET NAME
to-THE
SLAVE
MALCHUS
18:11 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
bale ballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
macairan machaira
n_ Acc Sg f
said
THEN THE
JESUS
to-THE
Peter
BE-CASTING THE be-you-thrusting ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
sword
11 Then said Jesus unto Peter, Put up thy sword into the sheath: the cup which my Father hath given me, shall I not drink it?
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qhkhn thEkE
n_ Acc Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

dedwken moi didOmi egO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
INTO THE
scabbard
THE
DRINK-cup cup
WHICH
HAS-GIVEN
to-ME me
THE
FATHER
NOT
mh mE
Part Neg
piw pinO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
NO
I-MAY-BE-DRINKING it
18:12 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
speira speira
n_ Nom Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ciliarcos chiliarchos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai twn hupEretEs ho

THE
THEN BAND squad
AND
THE
THOUSAND-chief AND captain kai edhsan kai deO

THE
OF-THE
12 Then the band and the captain and officers of the Jews took Jesus, and bound him,
ioudaiwn sunelabon ioudaios sullambanO

a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews
TOGETHER-GOT THE apprehended pros pros

Prep
JESUS
AND
THEY-BIND
Him
18:13 kai hgagon

kai
Conj
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
annan hannas
n_ Acc Sg m
prwton prOton
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar penqeros tou gar pentheros ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
kaiafa kaiaphas
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THEY-LED led-him hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
TOWARD ANNAS Hannas arciereus archiereus

n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-most he-WAS first tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
for
father-IN-LAW
OF-THE
CAIAPHAS
13 . And led him away to Annas first; for he was father in law to Caiaphas, which was the high priest that same year.
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
eniautou ekeinou eniautos ekeinos

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m
WHO
WAS
chief-SACRED-one OF-THE chief-priest
year
that
AV
John 18
18:14 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kaiafas o kaiaphas ho
sumbouleusas sumbouleuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois oti ioudaios hoti

a_ Dat Pl m Conj
it-WAS
YET CAIAPHAS
THE
one-TOGETHER-COUNSELLing to-THE one-advising the uper huper

Prep
JUDA-ans Jews laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
that
14 Now Caiaphas was which gave counsel to Jews, that it was expedient one man should die for people.
he, the that the
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon apoqanein anthrOpos apothnEskO

n_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
it-IS-beING-expedient ONE
human
TO-BE-FROM-DYING OVER THE to-be-dying for-the-sake-of ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
PEOPLE
18:15 hkolouqei de
akoloutheO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai allos kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
maqhths o mathEtEs ho
followED
YET to-THE the hn eimi
JESUS
SIMON
Peter
AND
other another
LEARNer disciple
THE
de de
Conj
maqhths ekeinos mathEtEs ekeinos

gnwstos tw gnOstos ho
arcierei archiereus
n_ Dat Sg m
kai suneishlqen kai suneiserchomai

15 And Simon Peter followed Jesus, and [so did] another disciple: that disciple was known unto the high priest, and went in with Jesus into the palace of the high priest.
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
YET LEARNer disciple tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
that
WAS
KNOWN
to-THE
he-TOGETHER-INTO-CAME he-entered-togetherwith
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aulhn aulE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE the
JESUS
INTO THE
COURT courtyard eisthkei histEmi

vi Plup Act 3 Sg
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
18:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
qura thura
n_ Dat Sg f
exw exO
Adv
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
THE
YET Peter
HAD-STOOD stood allos allos

a_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD THE
DOOR
OUT OUT-CAME outside came-out arcierews archiereus

n_ Gen Sg m
THEN
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gnwstos tou gnOstos ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
16 But Peter stood at the door without. Then went out that other disciple, which was known unto the high priest, and spake unto her that kept the door, and brought in Peter.
THE
LEARNer disciple th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
other
THE the-one
KNOWN
OF-THE
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qurwrw thurOros
n_ Dat Sg f
kai eishgagen ton kai eisagO ho

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
said told
to-THE the
DOOR-SEE-er AND doorkeeper oun oun

Conj
INTO-LED he-led-in h ho
THE
Peter
18:17 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
paidiskh h paidiskE ho
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
qurwros thurOros
n_ Nom Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
kai kai
Conj
t_ Nom Sg f
IS-sayING
THEN to-THE
Peter
THE
maid
THE
DOOR-SEE-er NO doorkeeper(f)
AND also
17 Then saith the damsel that kept the door unto Peter, Art not thou also [one] of this man's disciples? He saith, I am not.
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn ei mathEtEs eimi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou toutou legei anthrOpos houtos legO

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YOU
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
ARE
OF-THE
human
this
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
that-one that-one
NOT
I-AM
histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai anqrakian hupEretEs anthrakia

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
HAD-STOOD stood-there
YET THE
SLAVES
AND
THE
subservients deputies hn eimi
EMBER (charcoal) charcoal-fire de de

Conj
pepoihkotes oti yucos poieO hoti psuchos

vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai eqermainonto kai thermainO

kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
18 And the servants and officers stood there, who had made a fire of coals; for it was cold: and they warmed themselves: and Peter stood with them, and warmed himself.
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
HAVING-made ones-having-made petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
that
cold
it-WAS
AND
THEY-WARMED WAS they-warmed-themselves
YET AND also
THE

Prep pp Gen Pl m
estws histEmi
kai qermainomenos kai thermainO

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m
Peter
WITH them
HAVING-STOOD standing arciereus archiereus

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
WARMING warming-himself ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
18:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
hrwthsen ton erOtaO ho

peri peri
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
19 The high priest then asked Jesus of his disciples, and of his doctrine.
THE
THEN chief-SACRED-one asks chief-priest
THE
JESUS
LEARNers disciples
AV
John 18
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
didachs autou didachE autos

OF-Him
AND
ABOUT THE concerning autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
TEACHing
OF-Him
18:20 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
parrhsia lelalhka parrhEsia laleO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Perf Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
answerED
to-him him en en
Prep
JESUS
to-boldness
HAVE-TALKED to-THE have-spoken ierw hieron

n_ Dat Sg n
SYSTEM world
pantote edidaxa pantote didaskO

Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
opou hopou
Adv
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
20 Jesus answered him, I spake openly to the world; I ever taught in the synagogue, and in the temple, whither the Jews always resort; and in secret have I said nothing.
always
TEACH
IN
IN
THE
SACRED-place THE-?-where ALL sanctuary wheree ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi sunercontai ioudaios sunerchomai

a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
kruptw elalhsa kruptos laleO

a_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
JUDA-ans Jews me egO
ARE-TOGETHER-COMING AND are-coming-together erwtas erOtaO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
IN
HIDDen hiding
I-TALK I-speak akhkootas akouO
NOT-YET-ONE nothing ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
18:21 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
erwthson tous erOtaO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
elalhsa laleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
pp 1 Acc Sg
vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl m Att
ANY why ? autois ide autos eidO

pp Dat Pl m
ME
YOU-ARE-askING ask ask-you ! outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
THE
ones-HAVING-HEARD ANY ones-having-heard what ? eipon legO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
I-TALK I-speak
21 Why askest thou me? ask them which heard me, what I have said unto them: behold, they know what I said.
oidasin eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
to-them
BE-PERCEIVING these lo ! de de
Conj
HAVE-PERCEIVED WHICH are-aware which(p) eipontos legO

said
18:22 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uphretwn hupEretEs
n_ Gen Pl m
these YET OF-Him these-things edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
sayING of-saying ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
ONE
HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD OF-THE standing-by outws apokrinh houtOs apokrinomai

rapisma tw rhapisma ho
eipwn legO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
22 And when he had thus spoken, one of the officers which stood by struck Jesus with the palm of his hand, saying, Answerest thou the high priest so?
GIVES
SLAP
to-THE the
JESUS
sayING
thus
YOU-ARE-answerING to-THE the
arcierei archiereus
n_ Dat Sg m
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest
18:23 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
kakws elalhsa kakOs laleO

Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg
marturhson peri martureO peri

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
answerED
to-him him de de
Conj
JESUS
IF
EVILly
I-TALK I-speak
witness-YOU testify-you !
23 Jesus answered him, If I have spoken evil, bear witness of the evil: but if well, why smitest thou me?
kakou kakos
a_ Gen Sg n
ei ei
Cond
kalws ti kalOs tis

Adv pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
dereis derO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
EVIL
IF
YET IDEALly
ANY why ? auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
ME
YOU-ARE-SKINNING you-are-lashing annas hannas

n_ Nom Sg m
18:24 apesteilen oun

apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dedemenon deO
pros pros
Prep
kaiafan kaiaphas
n_ Acc Sg m
24 Now Annas had sent him bound unto Caiaphas the high priest.
commissions dispatches ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THEN Him
THE
ANNAS Hannas
HAVING-been-BOUND TOWARD CAIAPHAS
arcierea archiereus
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest de de
Conj
18:25 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
estws histEmi
kai qermainomenos eipon kai thermainO legO

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
WAS
YET SIMON
Peter
HAVING-STOOD standing twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
AND
WARMING warming-himself ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
THEY-said
THEN
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ek ek
Prep

hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
25 And Simon Peter stood and warmed himself. They said therefore unto him, Art not thou also [one] of his disciples? He denied [it], and said, I am not.
to-him
NO
AND also
YOU
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
ARE
he-disowns disowns
AV
John 18
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
that-one that-one
AND
said
NOT
I-AM
18:26 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
doulwn tou doulos ho

n_ Gen Sg m
suggenhs suggenEs
a_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
ONE
OUT OF-THE
SLAVES
OF-THE
chief-SACRED-one TOGETHER-generated chief-priest relative wtion Otion

n_ Acc Sg n
26 One of the servants of the high priest, being [his] kinsman whose ear Peter cut off, saith, Did not I see thee in the garden with him?
wn eimi
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
apekoyen apokoptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
BEING
OF-WHOM
FROM-STRIKES Peter strikes-off khpw kEpos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
EARlobe ear-lobe
NOT
YOU
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m

Prep pp Gen Sg m
PERCEIVED
IN
THE
GARDEN
WITH Him
18:27 palin oun

palin
Adv
oun
Conj
hrnhsato arneomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai euqews alektwr efwnhsen kai eutheOs alektOr phOneO

Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
27 Peter then denied again: and immediately the cock crew.
AGAIN
THEN disowns
Peter
AND
immediately
UN-LAYer cock
SOUNDS crows eis eis

Prep
18:28 agousin
agO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kaiafa kaiaphas
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THEY-ARE-LEADING THEN THE
JESUS
FROM THE
CAIAPHAS
INTO THE
praitwrion hn praitOrion eimi

n_ Acc Sg n vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
prwi prOi
Adv
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eishlqon eis eiserchomai eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
praitwrion praitOrion
n_ Acc Sg n
28 . Then led they Jesus from Caiaphas unto the hall of judgment: and it was early; and they themselves went not into the judgment hall, lest they should be defiled; but that they might eat the passover.
PRETORIUM
it-WAS
YET morning AND
they
NOT
INTO-CAME entered to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
INTO THE
PRETORIUM
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
mianqwsin miainO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
alla fagwsin alla esthiO

pasca pascha
Aramaic
THAT NO
THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-DEFILED but
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING THE may-be-eating pros pros

Prep
PASSOVER
18:29 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos exw pilatos exO

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
autous kai fhsin autos kai phEmi

pp Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tina tis
pi Acc Sg f
OUT-CAME came-out
THEN THE
PILATE
NA
OUT TOWARD them outside tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
IS-AVERRING ANY what ?
29 Pilate then went out unto them, and said, What accusation bring ye against this man?
kathgorian ferete katEgoria pherO

kata kata
Prep
anqrwpou toutou anthrOpos houtos

accusation
YE-ARE-CARRYING ye-are-bringing
DOWN against autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE the ei ei
Cond
human
this

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
THEY-answerED
AND
THEY-say say soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
to-him
IF
NO
WAS
this-One this-man
EVIL
30 They answered and said unto him, If he were not a malefactor, we would not have delivered him up unto thee.
poiwn poieO
ouk ou
Part Neg
an an
Part
paredwkamen auton paradidOmi autos

DOING
NOT
EVER to-YOU
WE-BESIDE-GIVE we-give-up
NA
Him
18:31 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos labete pilatos lambanO

n_ Nom Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
kai kai
Conj
said
THEN to-them
THE
PILATE
BE-GETTING be-ye-taking ! eipon legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
Him
YOU(p) ye oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
kata kata
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
krinate krinO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
31 Then said Pilate unto them, Take ye him, and judge him according to your law. The Jews therefore said unto him, It is not lawful for us to put any man to death:
according-to THE
LAW
OF-YOU(p) JUDGE-YE of-ye judge-ye ! exestin exesti

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
Him
said
to-him
THE
ioudaioi hmin ioudaios hemeis

a_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Dat Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
apokteinai oudena apokteinO oudeis

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews
to-US
NOT
IS-allowed it-is-allowed
NOT-YET-ONE anyone
AV
John 18
18:32 ina
hina
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THAT THE
saying word poiw poios

pi Dat Sg m
OF-THE
JESUS
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED WHICH may-be-being-fulfilled apoqnhskein apothnEskO

vn Pres Act
He-said
32 That the saying of Jesus might be fulfilled, which he spake, signifying what death he should die.
shmainwn sEmainO
qanatw hmellen thanatos mellO

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg Att
SIGNifyING
?-to-THE-WHICH DEATH to-what ? oun oun

Conj
He-WAS-ABOUT TO-BE-FROM-DYING to-be-dying to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
18:33 eishlqen
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
palin eis palin eis

Adv Prep
praitwrion o praitOrion ho
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos kai efwnhsen pilatos kai phOneO

INTO-CAME entered ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THEN AGAIN
INTO THE
PRETORIUM
THE
PILATE
AND
SOUNDS summons
33 Then Pilate entered into the judgment hall again, and called Jesus, and said unto him, Art thou the King of the Jews?
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

THE
JESUS
AND
said
to-Him
YOU
ARE
THE
KING
OF-THE
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
JUDA-ans Jews
18:34 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
seautou su seautou su
pf 3 Gen Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
h E
Part
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
34 Jesus answered him, Sayest thou this thing of thyself, or did others tell it thee of me?
answerED
JESUS
FROM YOURself
YOU
this
ARE-sayING
OR
others
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
peri peri
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
said told
to-YOU you o ho
ABOUT ME concerning pilatos mhti pilatos mEti

18:35 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ioudaios eimi ioudaios eimi

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Nom Sg n
t_ Nom Sg m
answerED
THE
PILATE
NO-ANY I
JUDA-an Jew paredwkan se paradidOmi su

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AM
THE
NATION
35 Pilate answered, Am I a Jew? Thine own nation and the chief priests have delivered thee unto me: what hast thou done?
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
son sos
ps 2 Nom Sg
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
YOUR
AND
THE
chief-SACRED-ones BESIDE-GIVE chief-priests give-up
YOU
to-ME
ANY what ?
epoihsas poieO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-DO
18:36 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
basileia h basileia ho
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
answerED
JESUS
THE
KINGdom
THE
MY
NOT
IS
OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou ei houtos ei
pd Gen Sg m Cond
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou hn houtos eimi

pd Gen Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
36 Jesus answered, My kingdom is not of this world: if my kingdom were of this world, then would my servants fight, that I should not be delivered to the Jews: but now is my kingdom not from hence.
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
IF
OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
WAS
THE
WH
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai oi hupEretEs ho
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
hgwnizonto agOnizomai
an
KINGdom
NA
THE
MY
THE
THE
to-ME
CONTENDED
an an
Part
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
paradoqw paradidOmi
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois nun de ioudaios nun de

a_ Dat Pl m Adv Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
EVER
THAT NO
I-MAY-BE-BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE I-may-be-being-given-up ouk ou

Part Neg
JUDA-ans Jews
NOW YET THE
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
enteuqen enteuthen
Adv
KINGdom
THE
MY
NOT
IS
hence
AV
John 18 - John 19
18:37 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos oukoun pilatos oukoun

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
basileus ei basileus eimi

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
said
THEN to-Him
WH NA
THE
PILATE
NOT-THEN KING
ARE
YOU
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
oti basileus eimi hoti basileus eimi

answerED
THE
JESUS
YOU
ARE-sayING
that
KING
AM
37 Pilate therefore said unto him, Art thou a king then? Jesus answered, Thou sayest that I am a king. To this end was I born, and for this cause came I into the world, that I should bear witness unto the truth. Every one that is of the truth heareth my voice.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eis eis
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gegennhmai gennaO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
elhluqa erchomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO this
I-HAVE-been-generatED AND I-have-been-born th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
INTO this
I-HAVE-COME
INTO THE
SYSTEM world ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
ina hina
Conj
marturhsw martureO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
alhqeia pas alEtheia pas

n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
ek ek
Prep
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-witnessING to-THE I-should-be-testifying alhqeias akouei alEtheia akouO

TRUTH
EVERY
THE
one-BEING one-being
OUT OF-THE
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
TRUTH
IS-HEARING
OF-ME
THE
SOUND voice pilatos ti pilatos tis

n_ Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg n
18:38 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqeia kai touto alEtheia kai houtos

n_ Nom Sg f Conj pd Acc Sg n
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
PILATE
ANY what ? tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
IS
TRUTH
AND
this
38 Pilate saith unto him, What is truth? And when he had said this, he went out again unto the Jews, and saith unto them, I find in him no fault [at all].
eipwn legO
palin exhlqen palin exerchomai

pros pros
Prep
ioudaious kai legei ioudaios kai legO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
sayING
AGAIN
he-OUT-CAME TOWARD THE he-came-out euriskw heuriskO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
JUDA-ans Jews aitian aitia

n_ Acc Sg f
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
oudemian oudeis
a_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE AM-FINDING not-one de de

Conj
IN
Him
cause fault ina hina

Conj
18:39 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
sunhqeia sunEtheia
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
apolusw apoluO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IS it-is
WH
YET TOGETHER-CUSTOM to-YOU(p) usage to-ye

NA
THAT ONE
I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-releasing to-ye apolusw apoluO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
39 But ye have a custom, that I should release unto you one at the passover: will ye therefore that I release unto you the King of the Jews?
en
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pasca pascha
Aramaic
boulesqe boulomai
oun oun
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
THE
PASSOVER YE-ARE-intendING
THEN I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-releasing to-ye
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews palin legontes palin legO

18:40 ekraugasan oun

kraugazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
touton alla ton houtos alla ho

pd Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m
barabban barabbas
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-clamor
THEN AGAIN
sayING
NO
this-One this-one
but
THE
Bar-Abbas
40 Then cried they all again, saying, Not this man, but Barabbas. Now Barabbas was a robber.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
barabbas lhsths barabbas lEstEs

WAS
YET THE
Bar-Abbas
ROBBER
AV
John 19
19:1 tote oun

tote
Adv
oun
Conj
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos ton pilatos ho

ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai emastigwsen kai mastigoO

. Then Pilate therefore took Jesus, and scourged [him].
then
THEN GOT took
THE
PILATE
THE
JESUS
AND
scourgES scourges-him epeqhkan epitithEmi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
2
19:2 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
stratiwtai plexantes stratiOtEs plekO

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
stefanon ex stephanos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
akanqwn akantha
n_ Gen Pl f
AND
THE
WARriors soldiers
BRAIDing
WREATH
OUT OF-POINT-FLOWERS ON-PLACE of-thorns place-it-on auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
And the soldiers platted a crown of thorns, and put [it] on his head, and they put on him a purple robe,
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kefalh kai imation porfuroun periebalon kephalE kai himation porphurous periballO
n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-Him
to-THE the
HEAD
AND
cloak with-cloak auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
PURPLE
THEY-ABOUT-CAST(past) Him they-clothed caire chairO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
19:3 kai hrconto

kai
Conj
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
kai elegon kai legO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus basileus
n_ Nom Sg m
And said, Hail, King of the Jews! and they smote him with their hands.
AND
THEY-CAME
TOWARD Him
AND
THEY-said said rapismata rhapisma

n_ Acc Pl n
BE-JOYING THE be-you-rejoicing !
KING
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai edidosan autw ioudaios kai didOmi autos

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
THEY-GIVE give o ho
to-Him him
SLAPS
19:4 kai exhlqen

kai
Conj
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
palin exw palin exO

Adv Adv
pilatos kai legei pilatos kai legO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois ide autos eidO

pp Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
OUT-CAME came-out umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
AGAIN
OUT THE outside exw exO

Adv
PILATE
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
BE-PERCEIVING lo ! aitian euriskw aitia heuriskO

Pilate therefore went forth again, and saith unto them, Behold, I bring him forth to you, that ye may know that I find no fault in him.
agw agO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
gnwte ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oti oudemian hoti oudeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
I-AM-LEADING to-YOU(p) to-ye en en

Prep
Him
OUT THAT YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING that outside
NOT-YET-ONE cause not-one fault
I-AM-FINDING
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
IN
Him
WH NA
19:5 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
exw exO
Adv
forwn phoreO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
OUT-CAME came-out akanqinon akanthinos

a_ Acc Sg m
THEN
THE
JESUS
OUT wearING outside
THE
Then came Jesus forth, wearing the crown of thorns, and the purple robe. And [Pilate] saith unto them, Behold the man!
stefanon kai to stephanos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n
porfuroun imation kai legei porphurous himation kai legO

a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
POINT-FLOWERy WREATH thorny idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
THE
PURPLE
cloak
AND
he-IS-sayING
to-them
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
human
19:6 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
uphretai hupEretEs
n_ Nom Pl m
when
THEN PERCEIVED
Him
THE
THE
subservients deputies pilatos pilatos

n_ Nom Sg m
ekraugasan legontes kraugazO legO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
staurwson staurwson legei stauroO stauroO legO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
When the chief priests therefore and officers saw him, they cried out, saying, Crucify [him], crucify [him]. Pilate saith unto them, Take ye him, and crucify [him]: for I find no fault in him.
THEY-clamor
sayING
impale-YOU crucify-you ! umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
PILATE
labete lambanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai staurwsate egw kai stauroO egO

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg
gar ouc gar ou

Conj Part Neg
euriskw heuriskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
BE-GETTING be-ye-taking ! aitian aitia

n_ Acc Sg f
Him
YOU(p) ye
AND
impale-YE crucify-ye-him !
for
NOT
AM-FINDING
IN
Him
cause fault
AV
John 19

apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi hmeis ioudaios hEmeis

a_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Nom Pl
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai kata kai kata

Conj Prep
answerED
to-him him ofeilei opheilO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
WE
LAW
ARE-HAVING AND
according-to
The Jews answered him, We have a law, and by our law he ought to die, because he made himself the Son of God.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
vn 2Aor Act
oti uion hoti huios

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
epoihsen poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
LAW
He-IS-OWING TO-BE-FROM-DYING that he-ought to-be-dying hkousen akouO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
SON
OF-God
self himself
He-makES
19:8 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos touton ton pilatos houtos ho

n_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
mallon efobhqh mallon phobeO

Adv vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
When Pilate therefore heard that saying, he was the more afraid;
when
THEN HEARS
THE
PILATE
this
THE
saying
RATHER the-more tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
he-WAS-afraid
19:9 kai eishlqen

kai
Conj
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
praitwrion palin kai legei praitOrion palin kai legO

n_ Acc Sg n Adv Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
he-INTO-CAME INTO THE he-entered ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
PRETORIUM
AGAIN
AND
IS-sayING
to-THE
JESUS
And went again into the judgment hall, and saith unto Jesus, Whence art thou? But Jesus gave him no answer.
poqen pothen
Adv Int
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
apokrisin ouk apokrisis ou

edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
?-WHICH-PLACE ARE whence ? autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
YOU
THE
YET JESUS
answer
NOT
GIVES
to-him him
19:10 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos emoi pilatos egO

n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Dat Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
laleis laleO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
IS-sayING
THEN to-Him
THE
PILATE
to-ME
NOT
YOU-ARE-TALKING NOT you-are-speaking kai exousian ecw kai exousia echO

10 Then saith Pilate unto Speakest thou not unto knowest thou not that I power to crucify thee, and power to release thee?
him, me? have have
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
oti exousian ecw hoti exousia echO

apolusai apoluO
vn Aor Act
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED that you-are-aware staurwsai se stauroO su

authority
I-AM-HAVING
TO-FROM-LOOSE YOU to-release
AND
authority
I-AM-HAVING
TO-impale to-crucify
YOU
WH NA
19:11 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
autw
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eices echO
vi impf Act 2 Sg
exousian kat exousia kata

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
answerED
to-him him ei ei
Cond
JESUS
NOT
YOU-ARE-HAVING authority
DOWN against touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oudemian oudeis
a_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
dedomenon didOmi
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
anwqen dia anOthen dia

Adv Prep
11 Jesus answered, Thou couldest have no power [at all] against me, except it were given thee from above: therefore he that delivered me unto thee hath the greater sin.
OF-ME me o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IF any paradous paradidOmi

NO
WAS it-was soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
HAVING-been-GIVEN to-YOU
UP-PLACE from-above
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
meizona mega
a_ Acc Sg f Cmp
amartian ecei hamartia echO

THE
one-BESIDE-GIVING ME one-giving-up toutou o houtos ho

pd Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
to-YOU
GREATer
missing sin apolusai apoluO

vn Aor Act
IS-HAVING
19:12 ek
ek
Prep
pilatos ezhtei pilatos zEteO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
OUT OF-this
THE
PILATE
SOUGHT
TO-FROM-LOOSE Him to-release touton apolushs houtos apoluO

pd Acc Sg m vs Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
YET
ioudaioi ekraugasan legontes ioudaios kraugazO legO

a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ean ean
Cond
ouk ou
Part Neg
12 And from thenceforth Pilate sought to release him: but the Jews cried out, saying, If thou let this man go, thou art not Caesar's friend: whosoever maketh himself a king speaketh against Caesar.
JUDA-ans Jews ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
clamor
sayING
IF-EVER this-One this-man kaisaros pas kaisar pas

n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
YOU-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LOOSING NOT you-should-be-releasing basilea eauton basileus heautou

n_ Acc Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m
filos philos
a_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poiwn poieO
YOU-ARE
FOND-one friend
OF-THE
CEASAR Caesar
EVERY
THE-one the-one
KING
self himself
makING
AV
John 19
antilegei antilegO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
IS-contradictING to-THE the
CEASAR Caesar pilatos akousas pilatos akouO

19:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
toutwn hgagen houtos agO

pd Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
exw exO
Adv
THE
THEN PILATE
HEARing
OF-THE the
sayings words topon topos

n_ Acc Sg m
these
LED
OUT outside liqostrwton lithostrOton

a_ Acc Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ekaqisen epi bhmatos eis kai kathizO epi bEma eis
Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg n Prep
legomenon legO
13 When Pilate therefore heard that saying, he brought Jesus forth, and sat down in the judgment seat in a place that is called the Pavement, but in the Hebrew, Gabbatha.
THE
JESUS
AND
he-is-seated is-seated
ON
platform dais
INTO PLACE
beING-said
STONE-STREW Pavement
ebraisti de hebraisti de
Adv Conj
gabbaqa gabbatha
ni proper
to-HEBREW in-Hebrew
YET GABBATHA
19:14 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
paraskeuh tou paraskeuE ho

pasca pascha
Aramaic
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ws hOs
Adv
ekth hektos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
WAS it-was legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YET preparation
OF-THE
PASSOVER HOUR
WAS
AS SIXth about
AND
14 And it was the preparation of the passover, and about the sixth hour: and he saith unto the Jews, Behold your King!
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois ide ioudaios eidO

a_ Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus umwn basileus humeis

he-IS-sayING
to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! aron airO
KING
OF-YOU(p) of-ye legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
15 But they cried out, Away with [him], away with [him], crucify him. Pilate saith unto them, Shall I crucify your King? The chief priests answered, We have no king but Caesar.
19:15 ekraugasan oun

kraugazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
ekeinoi aron ekeinos airO

pd Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
staurwson auton stauroO autos

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
clamor
THEN those those-ones pilatos ton pilatos ho

n_ Nom Sg m
LIFT-YOU LIFT-YOU impale-YOU take-away-you ! take-away-you ! crucify-you ! basilea umwn basileus humeis
Him
IS-sayING
autois o autos ho
staurwsw stauroO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
apekriqhsan apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
t_ Acc Sg m
to-them
THE
PILATE
THE
KING
OF-YOU(p) I-SHALL-BE-impalING answerED of-ye I-shall-be-crucifying basilea ei basileus ei

n_ Acc Sg m Cond
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
kaisara kaisar
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
chief-SACRED-ones NOT chief-priests paredwken paradidOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WE-ARE-HAVING KING
IF
NO
CAESAR
19:16 tote oun

tote
Adv
oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m

pp Dat Pl m Conj
staurwqh stauroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
then
THEN he-BESIDE-GIVES Him he-gives-up ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
to-them
THAT He-MAY-BE-BEING-impalED THEY-BESIDE-GOT he-may-be-being-crucified they-took-along
16 . Then delivered he him therefore unto them to be crucified. And they took Jesus, and led [him] away.
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THEN THE
JESUS
19:17 kai bastazwn

kai
Conj
bastazO
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
stauron exhlqen stauros exerchomai

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
legomenon legO
AND
BEARING
to-Self himself o hos

pr Nom Sg n
THE
pale cross
He-OUT-CAME INTO THE he-came-out
beING-said
17 And he bearing his cross went forth into a place called [the place] of a skull, which is called in the Hebrew Golgotha:
kraniou topon kranion topos

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
legetai legO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ebraisti golgoqa hebraisti golgotha

Adv n_ Acc Sg f
OF-SKULL
PLACE
WHICH
IS-beING-said
to-HEBREW in-Hebrew
GOLGOTHA
19:18 opou
hopou
Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
estaurwsan kai met autou stauroO kai meta autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Prep pp Gen Sg m
allous duo allos duo

a_ Acc Pl m ni numeral
enteuqen kai enteuthen kai

Adv Conj
THE-?-where Him wheree enteuqen meson enteuthen mesos

Adv a_ Acc Sg n
THEY-impale they-crucify de de
Conj
AND
WITH Him
others
TWO
hence
AND
18 Where they crucified him, and two other with him, on either side one, and Jesus in the midst.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
hence
MIDst
YET THE
JESUS
AV
John 19
19:19 egrayen
graphO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai titlon o kai titlos ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos kai eqhken pilatos kai tithEmi

epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
staurou stauros
n_ Gen Sg m
WRITES
YET AND also
TITLE
THE
PILATE
AND
PLACES places-it
ON
THE
pale cross
19 . And Pilate wrote a title, and put [it] on the cross. And the writing was, JESUS OF NAZARETH THE KING OF THE JEWS.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
gegrammenon graphO
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nazwraios o nazOraios ho

WAS it-was ioudaiwn ioudaios

a_ Gen Pl m
YET HAVING-been-WRITTEN JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
THE
KING
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
19:20 touton oun

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
titlon polloi titlos polus

anegnwsan twn anaginOskO ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn oti eggus ioudaios hoti eggus

a_ Gen Pl m Conj Adv
this
THEN THE
TITLE
MANY
read
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
that
NEAR
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews opou polis hopou

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
estaurwqh o stauroO ho
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
20 This title then read many of the Jews: for the place where Jesus was crucified was nigh to the city: and it was written in Hebrew, [and] Greek, [and] Latin.
WAS
THE
PLACE
OF-THE the
city
THE-?-where WAS-impalED wheree was-crucified
THE
JESUS
kai hn kai eimi

gegrammenon graphO
ebraisti rwmaisti ellhnisti hebraisti rhOmaisti hellEnisti

Adv Adv Adv
AND
WAS it-was
HAVING-been-WRITTEN to-HEBREW in-Hebrew oun oun

Conj
to-ROMISTIC in-Latin
to-GREEK in-Greek twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
19:21 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pilatw oi pilatos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
ioudaiwn mh ioudaios mE
said
THEN to-THE
PILATE
THE
chief-SACRED-ones OF-THE chief-priests
JUDA-ans Jews eipen legO
NO
21 Then said the chief priests of the Jews to Pilate, Write not, The King of the Jews; but that he said, I am King of the Jews.
grafe graphO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

ioudaiwn all oti ekeinos ioudaios alla hoti ekeinos

a_ Gen Pl m Conj Conj pd Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU-BE-WRITING THE be-you-writing ! basileus basileus

n_ Nom Sg m
WH WH
KING
WH
OF-THE
NA
JUDA-ans Jews
NA
but
NA
that
that-one that-one
said
twn ioudaiwn eimi
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
KING
I-AM
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews gegrafa graphO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
22 Pilate answered, What I have written I have written.
19:22 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pilatos o pilatos hos

n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg n
gegrafa graphO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
answerED
THE
PILATE
WHICH
I-HAVE-WRITTEN I-HAVE-WRITTEN
19:23 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
stratiwtai ote estaurwsan ton stratiOtEs hote stauroO ho

n_ Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
THEN WARriors soldiers autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
when
THEY-impale they-crucify
THE
JESUS
GOT took
THE
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
kai epoihsan tessara merh kai poieO tessares meros

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
ekastw stratiwth meros hekastos stratiOtEs meros

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg n
kai kai
Conj
23 Then the soldiers, when they had crucified Jesus, took his garments, and made four parts, to every soldier a part; and also [his] coat: now the coat was without seam, woven from the top throughout.
GARMENTS OF-Him
AND
THEY-make make de de
Conj
FOUR
PARTS
to-EACH
WARrior soldier ek ek
Prep
PART
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
citwna hn chitOn eimi

n_ Acc Sg m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
citwn chitOn
n_ Nom Sg m
arafos araphos
a_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anwqen anOthen
Adv
THE
TUNIC
WAS
YET THE
TUNIC
UN-SEWED seamless
OUT OF-THE
UP-PLACE above
ufantos di huphantos dia

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
olou holos
a_ Gen Sg m
WOVEN
THRU WHOLE through oun oun

Conj
19:24 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
allhlous mh allElOn mE
pc Acc Pl m Part Neg
sciswmen schizO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
alla alla
Conj
THEY-say
THEN TOWARD one-another
NO
WE-SHOULD-BE-SPLITTING it him it we-should-be-rending
but
24 They said therefore among themselves, Let us not rend it, but cast lots for it, whose it shall be: that the scripture might be fulfilled, which saith,
AV
John 19
lacwmen lagchanO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
WE-MAY-BE-CHANCING-ON ABOUT it we-may-be-taking-chances concerning himit plhrwqh plEroO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
NA
OF-ANY of-whom ?
it-SHALL-BE
THAT THE
WRITing scripture imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
They parted my raiment among them, and for my vesture they did cast lots. These things therefore the soldiers did.
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
NA
legousa legO
diemerisanto ta diamerizO ho
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED may-be-being-fulfilled eautois heautou

pf 3 Dat Pl m
THE
sayING
THEY-THRU-PART they-divide ebalon ballO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
GARMENTS OF-ME
kai epi ton kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg m
imatismon mou himatismos egO

klhron klEros
n_ Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
to-selves AND to-themselves
ON
THE
GARMENTing vesture epoihsan poieO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-ME
THEY-CAST(past) LOT
THE
INDEED THEN
stratiwtai tauta stratiOtEs houtos

n_ Nom Pl m pd Acc Pl n
WARriors soldiers
these DO these-things para para

Prep
histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
staurw tou stauros ho

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
HAD-STOOD there-stood kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
YET BESIDE THE
pale cross
OF-THE
JESUS
THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
25 Now there stood by the cross of Jesus his mother, and his mother's sister, Mary the [wife] of Cleophas, and Mary Magdalene.
adelfh ths adelphE ho

mhtros autou mEtEr autos

maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
klwpa klOpas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
THE
sister
OF-THE
MOTHER
OF-Him
MARY
THE
OF-THE
CLOPAS
AND
maria maria
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh magdalEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
19:26 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
idwn eidO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera kai ton mEtEr kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg m
maqhthn mathEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
JESUS
THEN PERCEIVING
THE
MOTHER
AND
THE
LEARNer disciple gunai gunE

n_ Voc Sg f
26 When Jesus therefore saw his mother, and the disciple standing by, whom he loved, he saith unto his mother, Woman, behold thy son!
parestwta paristEmi
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
hgapa agapaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
ide eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD WHOM standing-by o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
He-LOVED
IS-sayING
to-THE
MOTHER
WOMAN !
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
SON
OF-YOU
19:27 eita
eita
Adv
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
maqhth ide mathEtEs eidO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
THEREAFTER He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNer disciple o ho
MOTHER
OF-YOU
AND
27 Then saith he to the disciple, Behold thy mother! And from that hour that disciple took her unto his own [home].
ap apo
Prep
ekeinhs ths ekeinos ho

wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
maqhths authn mathEtEs autos

n_ Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
t_ Nom Sg m
FROM that
THE
HOUR
GOT took o ho
THE
LEARNer disciple ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
her
INTO THE
OWN own(p)
28 After this, Jesus knowing that all things were now accomplished, that the scripture might be fulfilled, saith, I thirst.
19:28 meta touto

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eidws eidO
oti hdh hoti EdE

Conj Adv
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
t_ Nom Sg m
after
this
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-aware ina hina

Conj
JESUS
that
ALREADY ALL
tetelestai teleO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
teleiwqh teleioO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
diyw dipsaO
HAS-been-FINISHED THAT MAY-BE-BEING-maturED THE has-been-accomplished may-be-being-perfected
WRITing scripture
I-AM-THIRSTING
19:29 skeuos
skeuos
n_ Nom Sg n
ekeito keimai
oxous oxos
n_ Gen Sg n
meston mestos
a_ Nom Sg n
spoggon oun spoggos oun

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
meston mestos
a_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
oxous oxos
n_ Gen Sg n
INSTRUMENT LAY vessel
OF-vinegar
DISTENDED SPONGE
THEN DISTENDED OF-THE
vinegar
29 Now there was set a vessel full of vinegar: and they filled a spunge with vinegar, and put [it] upon hyssop, and put [it] to his mouth.
AV
John 19
usswpw periqentes hussOpos peritithEmi

n_ Dat Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
stomati stoma
n_ Dat Sg n
to-HYSSOP
ABOUT-PLACING sticking-on elaben lambanO
THEY-TOWARD-CARRY OF-Him they-carry-it-toward to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
to-THE the
MOUTH
19:30 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
oxos oxos
n_ Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
when
THEN GOT took
THE
vinegar
THE
JESUS
He-said
30 When Jesus therefore had received the vinegar, he said, It is finished: and he bowed his head, and gave up the ghost.
tetelestai teleO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai klinas kai klinO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn paredwken kephalE paradidOmi

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
it-HAS-been-FINISHED AND it-has-been-accomplished
deCLINing reclining
THE
HEAD
He-BESIDE-GIVES THE he-gives-up ina hina

Conj
spirit
19:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
ioudaioi epei paraskeuh hn ioudaios epei paraskeuE eimi

a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
meinh menO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
THEN JUDA-ans Jews staurou ta stauros ho

n_ Gen Sg m
since
preparation
it-WAS
THAT NO
SHOULD-BE-REMAINING
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
swmata en sOma en
n_ Nom Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sabbatw hn sabbaton eimi

n_ Dat Sg n vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar megalh gar mega

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
t_ Nom Pl n
ON
THE
pale cross hmera hEmera

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
BODIES
IN
THE
SABBATH
WAS
for
GREAT
31 . The Jews therefore, because it was the preparation, that the bodies should not remain upon the cross on the sabbath day, (for that sabbath day was an high day,) besought Pilate that their legs might be broken, and [that] they might be taken away.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ekeinou tou ekeinos ho

pd Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
sabbatou hrwthsan ton sabbaton erOtaO ho

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
pilaton ina pilatos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THE
DAY
OF-that
THE
SABBATH
THEY-ask ask skelh skelos

n_ Nom Pl n
THE
PILATE
THAT
kateagwsin katagnumi
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
kai arqwsin kai airO

Conj vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-DOWN-FRACTURING OF-them they-may-be-fracturing
THE
LEGS
AND
THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-LIFTED they-may-be-being-taken-away men men

Part
19:32 hlqon
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
stratiwtai kai tou stratiOtEs kai ho

n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Gen Sg m
prwtou prOtos
a_ Gen Sg m
CAME
THEN THE
WARriors soldiers skelh skelos

n_ Acc Pl n
AND
OF-THE
INDEED BEFORE-most first-one tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
32 Then came the soldiers, and brake the legs of the first, and of the other which was crucified with him.
kateaxan katagnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
allou allos
a_ Gen Sg m
sustaurwqentos sustauroO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
THEY-DOWN-FRACTURE THE fracture autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
LEGS
AND
OF-THE
other other-one
OF-THE the
BEING-TOGETHER-impalED being-crucified-together
to-Him with-him
19:33 epi de
epi
Prep
de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
elqontes erchomai
ws eidon hOs eidO

hdh EdE
Adv
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ON
YET THE
JESUS
COMING
AS
THEY-PERCEIVED ALREADY Him
33 But when they came to Jesus, and saw that he was dead already, they brake not his legs:
teqnhkota thnEskO
ou ou
Part Neg
kateaxan katagnumi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
skelh skelos
n_ Acc Pl n
HAVING-DIED
NOT
THEY-DOWN-FRACTURE OF-Him they-fracture twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
LEGS
19:34 all eis

alla
Conj
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
stratiwtwn logch stratiOtEs logchE

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pleuran enuxen pleura nussO

but
ONE
OF-THE
WARriors soldiers
to-lance-head OF-Him
THE
side
PUNCTURES pierces
34 But one of the soldiers with a spear pierced his side, and forthwith came there out blood and water.

euqus euthus
Adv
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
kai udwr kai hudOr

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
AND
OUT-CAME came-out
straightway BLOOD
AND
water
19:35 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ewrakws horaO
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m Att
memarturhken kai alhqinh autou martureO kai alEthinos autos

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
THE
one-HAVING-SEEN one-having-seen
HAS-witnessED has-testified
AND
TRUE
OF-him
IS
35 And he that saw [it] bare record, and his record is true: and he knoweth that he saith true, that ye might believe.
AV
John 19
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marturia kai ekeinos marturia kai ekeinos

n_ Nom Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg m
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
oti alhqh hoti alEthEs

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
WH
witness testimony
NA
AND
that-one that-one
HAS-PERCEIVED that is-aware
TRUE truth
he-IS-sayING he-is-telling
THAT AND also
YOU(p) ye
pisteuhte
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
19:36 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

Conj pd Nom Pl n
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ostoun osteon
n_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
BECAME occurred suntribhsetai suntribO

vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
for
these THAT THE these-things autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
WRITing scripture
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED BONE may-be-being-fulfilled
NOT
36 For these things were done, that the scripture should be fulfilled, A bone of him shall not be broken.
SHALL-BE-beING-crushED OF-Him
19:37 kai palin etera

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
heteros
a_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oyontai optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
37 And again another scripture saith, They shall look on him whom they pierced.
AND
AGAIN
DIFFERENT WRITing scripture
IS-sayING
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING INTO WHOM they-shall-be-seeing-him
exekenthsan ekkenteO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-stab
NA
19:38 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hrwthsen ton erOtaO ho

pilaton iwshf pilatos iOsEph

n_ Acc Sg m ni proper
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
after
YET these asks these-things maqhths mathEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
WH
PILATE
NA
JOSEPH
THE
FROM
arimaqaias wn arimathaia eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
tou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kekrummenos kruptO
de de
Conj
38 . And after this Joseph of Arimathaea, being a disciple of Jesus, but secretly for fear of the Jews, besought Pilate that he might take away the body of Jesus: and Pilate gave [him] leave. He came therefore, and took the body of Jesus.
ARIMATHEA
BEING
LEARNer disciple fobon phobos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
JESUS
HAVING-been-HID having-been-hidden to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
YET
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ina ioudaios hina

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
arh airO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
THRU THE because-of tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
FEAR
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-LIFTING THE he-should-be-taking-away pilatos hlqen pilatos erchomai

BODY
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai epetreyen o kai epitrepO ho

oun oun
Conj
kai hren kai airO

OF-THE
JESUS
AND
permits permits-him
THE
PILATE
he-CAME
THEN AND
LIFTS takes-away
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
BODY
OF-Him
19:39 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai nikodhmos o kai nikodEmos ho

elqwn erchomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
nuktos nux
n_ Gen Sg f
CAME
YET AND also
Nicodemus
THE
WH
NA
TOWARD Him
OF-NIGHT
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
prwton prOtos
a_ Acc Sg n
ferwn pherO
eligma
migma migma
n_ Acc Sg n
smurnhs kai alohs smurna kai aloE

ws hOs
Adv
39 And there came also Nicodemus, which at the first came to Jesus by night, and brought a mixture of myrrh and aloes, about an hundred pound [weight].
THE
BEFORE-most CARRYING first bringing ekaton hekaton

ni numeral
MIXTURE
OF-MYRRH
AND
OF-ALOE aloe
AS about
litras litra
n_ Acc Pl f
POUNDS HUNDRED pounds-troy
19:40 elabon
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai edhsan kai deO

auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
oqoniois othonion
n_ Dat Pl n
THEY-GOT
THEN THE
BODY
OF-THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-BIND
it
to-SHEETS (dim) to-swathings
40 Then took they the body of Jesus, and wound it in linen clothes with the spices, as the manner of the Jews is to bury.
AV
John 19 - John 20
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl n
arwmatwn kaqws arOma kathOs

n_ Gen Pl n Adv
eqos ethos
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois ioudaios
a_ Dat Pl m
WITH
THE
SPICES
according-AS CUSTOM
IS
to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
entafiazein entaphiazO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-IN-sepulcherING to-be-burying
19:41 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
opou hopou
Adv
estaurwqh stauroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
khpos kEpos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
WAS there-was khpw kEpos

n_ Dat Sg m
YET IN
THE
PLACE
THE-?-where He-WAS-impalED GARDEN wheree he-was-crucified oudepw oudepO

Adv
AND
IN
THE
41 Now in the place where he was crucified there was a garden; and in the garden a new sepulchre, wherein was never man yet laid.
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Nom Sg n
kainon kainos
a_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
GARDEN
memorial-vault NEW tomb
IN
WHICH
NOT-YET-as-yet NOT-YET-ONE WAS not-as-yet no-one
teqeimenos tithEmi
HAVING-been-PLACED
19:42 ekei oun

ekei
Adv
oun
Conj
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraskeuhn twn paraskeuE ho

ioudaiwn oti ioudaios hoti

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
eggus hn eggus eimi

there
THEN THRU THE because-of mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Nom Sg n
preparation
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
that NEAR seeing-that
WAS
42 There laid they Jesus therefore because of the Jews'preparation [day]; for the sepulchre was nigh at hand.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
memorial-vault THEY-PLACE THE tomb
JESUS
AV
John 20
20:1 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn maria sabbaton maria

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
magdalhnh ercetai magdalEnE erchomai

n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
to-THE
YET ONE one-day skotias skotia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
SABBATHS
MARY
THE
MAGDALENE
IS-COMING
. The first [day] of the week cometh Mary Magdalene early, when it was yet dark, unto the sepulchre, and seeth the stone taken away from the sepulchre.
prwi prOi
Adv
eti eti
Adv
oushs eimi
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai blepei kai blepO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
morning OF-DARKness STILL BEING in-the-morning liqon lithos

n_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
IS-lookING is-observing
THE
hrmenon airO
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
STONE
HAVING-been-LIFTED OUT OF-THE having-been-taken-away oun oun

Conj
memorial-vault tomb pros pros

Prep
20:2 trecei
trechO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg

simwna petron simOn petros

kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
she-IS-RACING THEN AND
IS-COMING
TOWARD SIMON
Peter
AND
TOWARD THE
allon allos
a_ Acc Sg m
maqhthn on mathEtEs hos

efilei phileO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai legei kai legO

autois hran autos airO

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
Then she runneth, and cometh to Simon Peter, and to the other disciple, whom Jesus loved, and saith unto them, They have taken away the Lord out of the sepulchre, and we know not where they have laid him.
other
LEARNer disciple kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
WHOM
WAS-FOND was-fond-of
THE
JESUS
AND
IS-sayING she-is-saying
to-them
THEY-LIFT they-take-away
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mnhmeiou mnEmeion
n_ Gen Sg n
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
pou pou
Part Int
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
Master Lord
OUT OF-THE
NOT
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-where THEY-PLACE we-are-aware where ?
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
20:3 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
maqhths kai hrconto mathEtEs kai erchomai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
Peter therefore went forth, and that other disciple, and came to the sepulchre.
OUT-CAME came-out eis eis

Prep
THEN THE
Peter
AND
THE
other
LEARNer disciple
AND
THEY-CAME
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
INTO THE
memorial-vault tomb de de
Conj
20:4 etrecon
trechO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
omou homou
Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
maqhths proedramen mathEtEs protrechO

RACED
YET THE
TWO
LIKEwise AND alike
THE
other
LEARNer disciple
BEFORE-RUNS runs-before
So they ran both together: and the other disciple did outrun Peter, and came first to the sepulchre.
tacion tachus
Adv Con
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m

prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
SWIFTerly OF-THE more-swiftly
Peter
AND
CAME
BEFORE-most INTO THE first ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
memorial-vault tomb ou ou
Part Neg
20:5 kai parakuyas

kai
Conj
parakuptO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
blepei blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
keimena keimai
oqonia othonion
n_ Acc Pl n
mentoi mentoi
Conj
AND
BESIDE-BENDing peering-in
he-IS-lookING LYING he-is-observing
THE
SHEETS (dim) NOT swathings
howbeit
And he stooping down, [and looking in], saw the linen clothes lying; yet went he not in.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he-INTO-CAME he-entered
20:6 ercetai
erchomai
oun oun
Conj
kai simwn kai simOn

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
akolouqwn akoloutheO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

IS-COMING
THEN AND also mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
SIMON
Peter
followING
to-him him keimena keimai
AND
INTO-CAME he-entered
Then cometh Simon Peter following him, and went into the sepulchre, and seeth the linen clothes lie,
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kai qewrei kai theOreO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
oqonia othonion
n_ Acc Pl n
INTO THE
IS-beholdING THE he-is-beholding
SHEETS (dim) LYING swathings
AV
John 20
20:7 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
soudarion o soudarion hos

n_ Acc Sg n pr Nom Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f

ou ou
Part Neg
AND
THE
handkerchief
WHICH
WAS
ON
THE
HEAD
OF-Him
NOT
And the napkin, that was about his head, not lying with the linen clothes, but wrapped together in a place by itself.
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl n
oqoniwn othonion
n_ Gen Pl n
keimenon keimai
alla cwris alla chOris

Conj Adv
entetuligmenon entulissO
eis eis
Prep
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
WITH
THE
SHEETS (dim) LYING swathings
but
apart-from HAVING-been-IN-FOLDED INTO ONE having-been-folded-up
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
PLACE
20:8 tote oun

tote
Adv
oun
Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
elqwn erchomai
then
THEN INTO-CAME entered eis eis

Prep
AND also
THE
other
LEARNer disciple
THE
Then went in also that other disciple, which came first to the sepulchre, and he saw, and believed.
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai eiden kai eidO

kai episteusen kai pisteuO

BEFORE-most INTO THE first
he-PERCEIVED AND
BELIEVES
20:9 oudepw
oudepO
Adv
gar hdeisan gar eidO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
grafhn oti dei graphE hoti deO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
For as yet they knew not the scripture, that he must rise again from the dead.
NOT-YET-as-yet for not-as-yet nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED THE they-were-aware-of
WRITing scripture
that
Him
OUT
anasthnai anistEmi
vn 2Aor Act
OF-DEAD-ones TO-UP-STAND of-dead-ones to-rise
20:10 aphlqon
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
palin pros palin pros

Adv Prep
autous oi autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai mathEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
10 Then the disciples went away again unto their own home.
THEY-FROM-CAME THEN AGAIN came-away
TOWARD them themselves tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
THE
LEARNers disciples exw exO

Adv
20:11 maria
maria
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
eisthkei histEmi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
klaiousa klaiO
ws oun hOs oun

Adv Conj
MARY
YET HAD-STOOD stood parekuyen parakuptO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWARD THE
memorial-vault OUT LAMENTING tomb outside mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
AS
THEN
11 . But Mary stood without at the sepulchre weeping: and as she wept, she stooped down, [and looked] into the sepulchre,
eklaien klaiO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
she-LAMENTED she-BESIDE-BENDS INTO THE she-peers
memorial-vault tomb en en
Prep
20:12 kai qewrei

kai
Conj
theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
leukois kaqezomenous leukos kathezomai

a_ Dat Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
AND
IS-beholdING
TWO
MESSENGERS IN
WHITE(p)
beING-seatED
ONE
TOWARD
12 And seeth two angels in white sitting, the one at the head, and the other at the feet, where the body of Jesus had lain.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kefalh kai ena kephalE kai heis

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
posin pous
n_ Dat Pl m
opou hopou
Adv
ekeito keimai
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
HEAD
AND
ONE
TOWARD THE
FEET
THE-?-where LAY wheree was-laid
THE
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
BODY
OF-THE
JESUS
20:13 kai legousin auth

kai
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg f
ekeinoi gunai ekeinos gunE

pd Nom Pl m n_ Voc Sg f
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
klaieis klaiO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
ARE-sayING
to-her
those those-ones kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
WOMAN !
ANY why ?
YOU-ARE-LAMENTING she-IS-sayING to-them
oti hran hoti airO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
pou pou
Part Int
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
13 And they say unto her, Woman, why weepest thou? She saith unto them, Because they have taken away my Lord, and I know not where they have laid him.
that
THEY-LIFT THE they-take-away
Master Lord
OF-ME
AND
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED ?-where THEY-PLACE I-am-aware where ?
AV
John 20
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
20:14 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipousa legO
estrafh strephO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
opisw kai qewrei opisO kai theOreO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
these sayING these-things ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
she-TURNed
INTO THE the(p)
BEHIND
AND
IS-beholdING
THE
14 And when she had thus said, she turned herself back, and saw Jesus standing, and knew not that it was Jesus.
estwta histEmi
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
JESUS
HAVING-STOOD standing auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
AND
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED that she-was-aware gunai gunE

n_ Voc Sg f
JESUS
it-IS
20:15 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
klaieis klaiO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
tina tis
pi Acc Sg m
zhteis zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
IS-sayING
to-her
JESUS
WOMAN !
ANY why ?
YOU-ARE-LAMENTING ANY whom ? estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YOU-ARE-SEEKING
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Nom Sg f
dokousa dokeO
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
khpouros kEpouros
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
15 Jesus saith unto her, Woman, why weepest thou? whom seekest thou? She, supposing him to be the gardener, saith unto him, Sir, if thou have borne him hence, tell me where thou hast laid him, and I will take him away.
that-one that-one(f) ei ei
Cond
SEEMING supposing
that
THE
GARDEN-SEE-er He-IS gardener eipe legO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
IS-sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord ! kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ebastasas auton bastazO autos

moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pou pou
Part Int
eqhkas tithEmi
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IF
YOU
BEAR bear-off arw airO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
Him
to-ME me
?-where YOU-PLACE where ?
Him
AND-I
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
SHALL-BE-LIFTING shall-be-taking-away auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
20:16 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mariam strafeisa maria strephO

ni proper vp 2Aor Pas Nom Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Nom Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
IS-sayING
to-her
JESUS
MARIAM Mary legetai legO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
BEING-TURNED
IS-sayING
to-Him
16 Jesus saith unto her, Mary. She turned herself, and saith unto him, Rabboni; which is to say, Master.
ebraisti rabbouni o hebraisti rhabbouni hos

Adv Aramaic pr Nom Sg m
n_ Voc Sg m
to-HEBREW in-Hebrew
RABBONI
WHICH
IS-beING-said
TEACHer !
20:17 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
aptou haptO
vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
oupw oupO
Adv
gar anabebhka gar anabainO

IS-sayING
to-her
JESUS
NO
OF-ME me de de
Conj
BE-TOUCHING NOT-as-yet for be-you-touching ! pros pros

Prep
I-HAVE-UP-STEPPED I-have-ascended kai kai

Conj
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
poreuou poreuomai
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous mou adelphos egO

17 Jesus saith unto her, Touch me not; for I am not yet ascended to my Father: but go to my brethren, and say unto them, I ascend unto my Father, and your Father; and [to] my God, and your God.
TOWARD THE
FATHER
BE-GOING be-you-going ! pros pros

Prep
YET TOWARD THE
brothers brethren mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
AND
eipe legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
autois anabainw autos anabainO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai patera kai patEr

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
BE-sayING be-you-saying ! kai qeon kai theos

Conj
to-them
I-AM-UP-STEPPING TOWARD THE I-am-ascending kai qeon kai theos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
FATHER
OF-ME
AND
FATHER
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
God
OF-ME
AND
God
OF-YOU(p) of-ye magdalhnh aggellousa magdalEnE aggellO

n_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
20:18 ercetai
erchomai
mariam h maria ho
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais oti mathEtEs hoti

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
IS-COMING
MARIAM Mary kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MAGDALENE
MESSAGING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
that
18 Mary Magdalene came and told the disciples that she had seen the Lord, and [that] he had spoken these things unto her.
ewraka horaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

Conj pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
I-HAVE-SEEN
THE
Master Lord
AND
these He-said these-things
to-her
AV
John 20
20:19 oushs
eimi
oun oun
Conj
oyias opsios
a_ Gen Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
sabbatwn sabbaton
n_ Gen Pl n
kai kai
Conj
OF-BEING
THEN evening
to-THE
DAY
that
THE
ONE one-day
OF-SABBATHS AND
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
qurwn thura
n_ Gen Pl f
kekleismenwn kleiO
opou hopou
Adv
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai dia mathEtEs dia

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
19 . Then the same day at evening, being the first [day] of the week, when the doors were shut where the disciples were assembled for fear of the Jews, came Jesus and stood in the midst, and saith unto them, Peace [be] unto you.
OF-THE
DOORS
HAVING-been-LOCKED THE-?-where WERE wheree ioudaiwn hlqen ioudaios erchomai

THE
LEARNers disciples kai esth kai histEmi

THRU THE because-of eis eis

Prep
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
FEAR
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
CAME
THE
JESUS
AND
STOOD
INTO THE
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
kai legei kai legO

autois eirhnh autos eirEnE

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
MIDst
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
PEACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WH
20:20 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipwn legO
edeixen deiknumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras kai thn cheir kai ho

n_ Acc Pl f Conj t_ Acc Sg f
pleuran pleura
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
this
sayING
He-SHOWS
THE
HANDS
AND
THE
side
20 And when he had so he shewed unto them hands and his side. Then the disciples glad, when saw the Lord.
said, [his] were they
autois ecarhsan autos chairO

pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai idontes mathEtEs eidO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
to-them
WERE-JOYED rejoiced oun oun

Conj
THEN THE
t_ Nom Sg m
PERCEIVING
THE
Master Lord umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
20:21 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
palin eirhnh palin eirEnE

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
kaqws kathOs
Adv
said
THEN to-them
THE
JESUS
AGAIN
PEACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
according-AS
21 Then said Jesus to them again, Peace [be] unto you: as [my] Father hath sent me, even so send I you.
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
pempw pempO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
HAS-commissionED ME
THE
FATHER
AND-I also-I
AM-SENDING
YOU(p) ye pneuma pneuma

n_ Acc Sg n
22 And when he had said this, he breathed on [them], and saith unto them, Receive ye the Holy Ghost:
20:22 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipwn legO
enefushsen kai legei emphusaO kai legO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois labete autos lambanO

AND
this
sayING
He-IN-INFLATES he-exhales
AND
IS-sayING
to-them
BE-YE-GETTING spirit be-ye-getting !
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
HOLY
20:23 an
an
Part
tinwn tis
px Gen Pl m
afhte aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
amartias afewntai hamartia aphiEmi

n_ Acc Pl f vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
EVER OF-ANY YE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING THE of-anyone(p) ye-may-be-forgiving an an

Part
misses sins
THEY-HAVE-been-FROM-LET to-them have-been-forgiven them
23 Whose soever sins ye remit, they are remitted unto them; [and] whose soever [sins] ye retain, they are retained.
tinwn tis
px Gen Pl m
krathte krateO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
kekrathntai krateO
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
EVER OF-ANY YE-MAY-BE-HOLDING THEY-HAVE-been-HELD of-anyone(p)
20:24 qwmas
thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dwdeka o dOdeka ho
legomenos legO
didumos didumos
n_ Nom Sg m
THOMAS
YET ONE
OUT OF-THE
TWO-TEN twelve
THE
twin (Didymus) Didymus
24 But Thomas, one of the twelve, called Didymus, was not with them when Jesus came.
ouk ou
Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg

Prep pp Gen Pl m
ote hlqen hote erchomai

ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
WAS
WITH them
when
CAME
JESUS
20:25 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai ewrakamen mathEtEs horaO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Perf Act 1 Pl Att
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
said
THEN to-him
THE
others others
LEARNers disciples
WE-HAVE-SEEN THE
Master Lord
25 The other disciples therefore said unto him, We have seen the Lord. But he said unto them, Except I shall see in his hands the print of the nails,
AV
John 20
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ean autos ean

pp Dat Pl m Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
idw eidO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
cersin cheir
n_ Dat Pl f
and put my finger into the print of the nails, and thrust my hand into his side, I will not believe.
THE
YET he-said
to-them
IF-EVER NO
I-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING IN
THE
HANDS
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
hlwn hElos
n_ Gen Pl m
kai balw kai ballO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
daktulon daktulos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-Him
THE
type print ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
NAILS
AND
I-SHOULD-BE-CASTING THE should-be-thrusting kai balw kai ballO

FINGER
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
hlwn hElos
n_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME
INTO THE
type print
OF-THE
NAILS
AND
I-SHOULD-BE-CASTING OF-ME should-be-thrusting pisteusw pisteuO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
THE
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pleuran autou pleura autos

ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
HAND
INTO THE
side
OF-Him
NOT
NO
I-SHALL-BE-BELIEVING
20:26 kai meq hmeras oktw

kai
Conj
meta
Prep
hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
oktO
ni numeral
palin hsan palin eimi

Adv vi impf vxx 3 Pl
esw oi esO ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m

kai kai
Conj
AND
after
DAYS
EIGHT
AGAIN
WERE
within
THE
LEARNers disciples twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
OF-Him
AND
qwmas thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
ercetai erchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
qurwn thura
n_ Gen Pl f
kekleismenwn kleiO
26 . And after eight days again his disciples were within, and Thomas with them: [then] came Jesus, the doors being shut, and stood in the midst, and said, Peace [be] unto you.
THOMAS
WITH them
IS-COMING
THE
JESUS
OF-THE
DOORS
HAVING-been-LOCKED
kai esth kai histEmi

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
kai eipen kai legO

eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
AND
STOOD
INTO THE
MIDst
AND
said
PEACE
to-YOU(p) to-ye daktulon sou daktulos su

20:27 eita
eita
Adv
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qwma thOmas
n_ Dat Sg m
fere pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
wde hOde
Adv
THEREAFTER He-IS-sayING
to-THE
THOMAS
BE-CARRYING THE be-you-bringing ! kai fere kai pherO

FINGER
OF-YOU
here
kai ide kai eidO

tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
27 Then saith he to Thomas, Reach hither thy finger, and behold my hands; and reach hither thy hand, and thrust [it] into my side: and be not faithless, but believing.
AND
BE-PERCEIVING THE be-you-perceiving ! eis eis

Prep
HANDS
OF-ME
AND
BE-CARRYING THE be-you-bringing ! ginou ginomai
HAND
OF-YOU
AND
bale ballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pleuran mou pleura egO

kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg m
alla alla
Conj
BE-CASTING INTO THE be-you-thrusting ! pistos pistos

a_ Nom Sg m
side
OF-ME
AND
NO
BE-BECOMING be-you-becoming !
UN-BELIEVing but unbelieving
BELIEVing
20:28 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
qwmas thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
28 And Thomas answered and said unto him, My Lord and my God.
answerED
THOMAS
AND
said
to-Him
THE
Master Lord
OF-ME
AND
THE
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
God
OF-ME
WH NA
20:29 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
ewrakas horaO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
that YOU-HAVE-SEEN ME seeing-that kai pisteusantes kai pisteuO

29 Jesus saith unto him, Thomas, because thou hast seen me, thou hast believed: blessed [are] they that have not seen, and [yet] have believed.
pepisteukas pisteuO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
idontes eidO
YOU-HAVE-BELIEVED HAPPY happy-are
THE-ones the-ones
NO
PERCEIVING
AND
BELIEVing
AV
John 20 - John 21
20:30 polla
polus
a_ Acc Pl n
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
kai alla kai allos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
shmeia epoihsen o sEmeion poieO ho

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
enwpion enOpion
Adv
MANY
INDEED THEN AND also

NA
other
SIGNS
DOES
THE
JESUS
IN-VIEW in-the-sight-of en en
Prep
30 And many other signs truly did Jesus in the presence of his disciples, which are not written in this book:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
a hos
pr Nom Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegrammena graphO
OF-THE the tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
LEARNers disciples bibliw biblion

n_ Dat Sg n
OF-Him
WHICH which(p)
NOT
IS
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg n
THE
SCROLLet this
WH NA
20:31 tauta
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pisteuhte
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
these YET HAS-been-WRITTEN THAT these-things ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
that
31 But these are written, that ye might believe that Jesus is the Christ, the Son of God; and that believing ye might have life through his name.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ina kai hina

Conj Conj
JESUS
IS
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
AND
THAT
pisteuontes zwhn pisteuO zOE

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
echte echO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

BELIEVING
LIFE
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING IN
THE
NAME
OF-Him
AV
John 21
21:1 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
efanerwsen eauton phaneroO heautou

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m
palin palin
Adv
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
after
these makES-APPEAR these-things manifests
Self himself
AGAIN
THE
JESUS
to-THE
. After these things Jesus shewed himself again to the disciples at the sea of Tiberias; and on this wise shewed he [himself].
maqhtais epi ths mathEtEs epi ho

n_ Dat Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs ths thalassa ho

tiberiados efanerwsen tiberias phaneroO

de de
Conj
outws houtOs
Adv
LEARNers disciples
ON
THE
SEA
OF-THE
TIBERIAS
He-makES-APPEAR YET thus he-manifests o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
21:2 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
omou homou
Adv
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai qwmas kai thOmas

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
didumos didumos
n_ Nom Sg m
WERE there-were
LIKEwise SIMON alike apo apo

Prep
Peter
AND
THOMAS
THE
one-beING-said being-said tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
twin (Didymus) Didymus zebedaiou zebedaios

n_ Gen Sg m
kai naqanahl o kai nathanaEl ho

Conj ni proper t_ Nom Sg m
kana kana
ni proper
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias kai oi galilaia kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m
There were together Simon Peter, and Thomas called Didymus, and Nathanael of Cana in Galilee, and the [sons] of Zebedee, and two other of his disciples.
AND
NATHANAEL
THE-one the ek ek
Prep
FROM CANA
OF-THE
GALILEE
AND
THE the-ones
OF-THE
ZEBEDEE
kai alloi kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

duo duo
ni numeral
AND
others
OUT OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-Him
TWO
21:3 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois simwn autos simOn

petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
upagw hupagO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
alieuein halieuO
vn Pres Act
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
IS-sayING
to-them
SIMON
Peter
I-AM-UNDER-LEADING TO-BE-fishING THEY-ARE-sayING I-am-going-away sun sun

Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ercomeqa erchomai

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
exhlqon exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai enebhsan kai embainO

eis eis
Prep
Simon Peter saith unto them, I go a fishing. They say unto him, We also go with thee. They went forth, and entered into a ship immediately; and that night they caught nothing.
to-him
ARE-COMING
AND also
WE
TOGETHER to-YOU togetherwith you nukti nux

n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-OUT-CAME AND they-came-out ouden oudeis

a_ Acc Sg n
THEY-IN-STEPPed INTO stepped-into
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion kai en ploion kai en

epiasan piazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
FLOATer ship de de
Conj
AND
IN
that
WH
THE
NIGHT
NA
THEY-arrest they-net
NOT-YET-ONE nothing esth histEmi

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
21:4 prwias
prOia
n_ Gen Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
ginomenhs
genomenhs ginomai
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
OF-morning YET ALREADY
OF-BECOMING becoming oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
STOOD
JESUS
INTO THE
But when the morning was now come, Jesus stood on the shore: but the disciples knew not that it was Jesus.
aigialon ou aigialos ou
mentoi hdeisan mentoi eidO

maqhtai oti ihsous mathEtEs hoti iEsous

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BEACH
NOT
howbeit
HAD-PERCEIVED THE
NA
LEARNers disciples ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
that
JESUS
it-IS
21:5 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paidia mh paidion mE
n_ Voc Pl n Part Neg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
Then Jesus saith unto them, Children, have ye any meat? They answered him, No.
IS-sayING
THEN to-them
THE
JESUS
little-boys
NO
ANY
prosfagion ecete prosphagion echO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
apekriqhsan autw apokrinomai autos

vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
TOWARD-EATing YE-ARE-HAVING THEY-answerED viand
to-Him him
NOT not eis eis

Prep
21:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois balete autos ballO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
dexia dexios
a_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
THE
YET He-said
to-them
BE-YE-CASTING INTO THE be-ye-casting ! ebalon ballO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
RIGHT
PARTS
OF-THE
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
diktuon kai eurhsete diktuon kai heuriskO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Fut Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
kai ouketi kai ouketi

Conj Adv
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
And he said unto them, Cast the net on the right side of the ship, and ye shall find. They cast therefore, and now they were not able to draw it for the multitude of fishes.
FLOATer ship
THE
NET
AND
YE-SHALL-BE-FINDING THEY-CAST(past) THEN AND
NOT-STILL it not-longer
elkusai iscuon helkuO ischuO

vn Aor Act vi impf Act 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
plhqous twn plEthos ho

icquwn ichthus
n_ Gen Pl m
TO-DRAW
were-STRONG FROM THE they-were-strong
multitude
OF-THE
FISHES
AV
John 21
21:7 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
hgapa agapaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
THEN THE
LEARNer disciple kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
that-one that
WHOM
LOVED
THE
JESUS
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
Therefore that disciple whom Jesus loved saith unto Peter, It is the Lord. Now when Simon Peter heard that it was the Lord, he girt [his] fisher's coat [unto him], (for he was naked,) and did cast himself into the sea.
to-THE
Peter
THE
Master Lord ton ho
it-IS
SIMON
THEN Peter
HEARing
that
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ependuthn diezwsato hn ependutEs diazOnnumi eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar gumnos gar gumnos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
Master Lord
it-IS
THE
ON-IN-SLIP overcoat qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
THRU-GIRDS girds-on
he-WAS
for
NAKED
kai ebalen kai ballO

eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
CASTS
self himself de de
Conj
INTO THE
SEA
21:8 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
ploiariw hlqon ploiarion erchomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
gar hsan gar eimi

THE
YET others others ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
LEARNers disciples ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
to-THE
FLOATer (dim) boat apo apo

Prep
CAME
NOT
for
THEY-WERE
And the other disciples came in a little ship; (for they were not far from land, but as it were two hundred cubits,) dragging the net with fishes.
makran apo makran apo

Adv Prep
alla ws alla hOs

Conj Adv
phcwn pEchus
n_ Gen Pl m
diakosiwn surontes diakosioi surO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
FAR
FROM THE
LAND
but
AS FROM CUBITS about off
TWO-hundred
DRAGGING
THE
diktuon twn diktuon ho

icquwn ichthus
n_ Gen Pl m
NET
OF-THE
FISHES
21:9 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
apebhsan apobainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
blepousin blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
anqrakian anthrakia
n_ Acc Sg f
AS
THEN THEY-FROM-STEPPed INTO THE they-stepped-off
LAND
THEY-ARE-lookING EMBER (charcoal) they-are-observing charcoal-fire kai arton kai artos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
As soon then as they were come to land, they saw a fire of coals there, and fish laid thereon, and bread.
keimenhn keimai
kai oyarion epikeimenon kai opsarion epikeimai

Conj n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg n
LYING being-laid
AND
PROVISION ON-LYING food-fish lying-on-it

WH
AND
BREAD
21:10 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
enegkate apo pherO apo

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oyariwn opsarion
n_ Gen Pl n
10 Jesus saith unto them, Bring of the fish which ye have now caught.
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
CARRY-YE bring-ye !
FROM OF-THE the
PROVISIONS food-fishes
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
epiasate nun piazO nun

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
WHICH
YE-arrest ye-net
NOW
21:11 anebh
anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eilkusen to kai helkuO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
diktuon eis diktuon eis

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
UP-STEPPed went-up ghn gE

n_ Acc Sg f
THEN SIMON
Peter
AND
DRAWS
THE
NET
INTO THE
meston mestos
a_ Acc Sg n
icquwn megalwn ekaton penthkonta triwn ichthus mega hekaton pentEkonta treis
n_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m ni numeral ni numeral n_ Gen Pl m
kai tosoutwn kai tosoutos

Conj pd Gen Pl m
11 Simon Peter went up, and drew the net to land full of great fishes, an hundred and fifty and three: and for all there were so many, yet was not the net broken.
LAND
DISTENDED OF-FISHES GREAT large ouk ou

Part Neg
HUNDRED FIVE-ty fifty diktuon diktuon

n_ Nom Sg n
THREE
AND
OF-so-much so-many
ontwn eimi
vp Pres vxx Gen Pl m
escisqh schizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
BEING of-being
NOT
IS-SPLIT is-rent
WH
THE
NA
NET
21:12 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
deute deute
vm txx vxx 2 Pl
aristhsate oudeis aristaO oudeis

vm Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Sg f
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
HITHER hither-ye !
LUNCH-YE lunch-ye !
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
12 Jesus saith unto them, Come [and] dine. And none of the disciples durst ask him, Who art thou? knowing that it was the Lord.
AV
John 21
NA
de de
Conj
etolma tolmaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn exetasai mathEtEs exetazO

n_ Gen Pl m vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
YET
DARED
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples oti o hoti ho

Conj
TO-OUT-INTERROGATE Him to-inquire-of kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
YOU
ANY who ?
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
eidotes eidO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
ARE you-are
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
Master Lord
it-IS
21:13 ercetai
erchomai
kai lambanei kai lambanO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai didwsin kai didOmi

autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
13 Jesus then cometh, and taketh bread, and giveth them, and fish likewise.
IS-COMING
JESUS
AND
IS-GETTING-UP THE is-taking
BREAD
AND
IS-GIVING is-giving-it
to-them
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
oyarion omoiws opsarion homoiOs

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
AND
THE
PROVISION LIKE-AS food-fish likewise hdh EdE

Adv
21:14 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
triton efanerwqh tritos phaneroO

a_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais egerqeis mathEtEs egeirO

n_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
this
ALREADY third third-time
WAS-made-APPEAR JESUS was-manifested
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
BEING-ROUSED
14 This is now the third time that Jesus shewed himself to his disciples, after that he was risen from the dead.
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones
21:15 ote oun

hote
Adv
oun
Conj
hristhsan legei aristaO legO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Voc Sg m
when
THEN THEY-LUNCH
IS-sayING
to-THE
SIMON
Peter
THE
JESUS
SIMON Simon !
iwannou agapas iOannEs agapaO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pleon polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
toutwn legei houtos legO

pd Gen Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

Part n_ Voc Sg m
15 . So when they had dined, Jesus saith to Simon Peter, Simon, [son] of Jonas, lovest thou me more than these? He saith unto him, Yea, Lord; thou knowest that I love thee. He saith unto him, Feed my lambs.
OF-JOHN
YOU-ARE-LOVING ME
MORE
OF-these
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
YEA yes boske boskO
Master ! Lord ! ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
oti filw hoti phileO

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU
HAVE-PERCEIVED that are-aware mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
I-AM-beING-FOND YOU I-am-being-fond-of
He-IS-sayING
to-him
BE-HERBING THE be-you-grazing !
arnia arnion
n_ Acc Pl n
LAMBkins
OF-ME
21:16 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
palin deuteron simwn palin deuteros simOn

Adv Adv n_ Voc Sg m
iwannou agapas iOannEs agapaO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
He-IS-sayING
to-him
AGAIN
second second-time su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
SIMON Simon ! oidas eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Sg
OF-JOHN
YOU-ARE-LOVING ME
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

Part n_ Voc Sg m

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
16 He saith to him again the second time, Simon, [son] of Jonas, lovest thou me? He saith unto him, Yea, Lord; thou knowest that I love thee. He saith unto him, Feed my sheep.
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
YEA yes
Master ! Lord !
YOU
HAVE-PERCEIVED that are-aware

WH
I-AM-beING-FOND YOU I-am-being-fond-of mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
poimaine poimainO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
probatia
NA
probata probaton
n_ Acc Pl n
He-IS-sayING
to-him
BE-SHEPHERDING THE be-you-shepherding ! autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
sheep sheep(p) iwannou fileis iOannEs phileO

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ME
21:17 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
triton simwn tritos simOn

a_ Acc Sg n n_ Voc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
He-IS-sayING
to-him
THE
third third-time
SIMON Simon !
OF-JOHN
YOU-ARE-beING-FOND ME you-are-being-fond-of to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eluphqh lupeO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
oti eipen hoti legO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
triton fileis tritos phileO

a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Sg
WAS-SORROWED THE was-sorry
Peter
that
He-said
to-him
THE
third third-time
YOU-ARE-beING-FOND you-are-being-fond-of
17 He saith unto him the third time, Simon, [son] of Jonas, lovest thou me? Peter was grieved because he said unto him the third time, Lovest thou me? And he said unto him, Lord, thou knowest all things; thou knowest that I love thee. Jesus saith unto him, Feed my sheep.
AV
John 21
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
WH
eipen
NA
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
ME
AND
he-IS-sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord ! legei legO
ALL all-things
YOU
HAVE-PERCEIVED are-aware-of
WH
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ginwskeis ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ihsous
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YOU
NA
ARE-KNOWING that
I-AM-beING-FOND YOU I-am-being-fond-of ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
WH
IS-sayING
NA
to-him
THE
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
boske boskO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
probatia
probata probaton
n_ Acc Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
JESUS
BE-HERBING THE be-you-grazing ! soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
sheep sheep(p) ote hs hote eimi

OF-ME

amEn
Hebrew
amEn
Hebrew
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
newteros neos
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
ezwnnues seauton kai zOnnumi seautou kai

vi impf Act 2 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m Conj
AMEN verily
AMEN verily
I-AM-sayING
to-YOU
when
YOU-WERE
YOUNGer
YOU-GIRDED
YOURself
AND
periepateis peripateO
vi impf Act 2 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
hqeles thelO
vi impf Act 2 Sg
otan hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
ghrashs gEraskO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU-ABOUT-TROD THE-?-where YOU-WILLED when-EVER YET YOU-MAY-BE-beING-VETERAN walked wheree you-would whenever you-may-be-growing-decrepit ekteneis ekteinO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
18 Verily, verily, I say unto thee, When thou wast young, thou girdedst thyself, and walkedst whither thou wouldest: but when thou shalt be old, thou shalt stretch forth thy hands, and another shall gird thee, and carry [thee] whither thou wouldest not.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras sou cheir su

kai allos kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
WH
zwsei se
WH
NA
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-OUT-STRETCHING THE you-shall-be-stretching-out

NA
HANDS
OF-YOU
AND
other another qeleis thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU
zwsei zOnnumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai oisei kai pherO

opou hopou
Adv
ou ou
Part Neg
SHALL-BE-GIRDING
AND
SHALL-BE-CARRYING THE-?-where NOT wheree shmainwn sEmainO

YOU-ARE-WILLING
21:19 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
poiw poios
pi Dat Sg m
qanatw doxasei thanatos doxazO

n_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Sg
this
YET He-said
SIGNifyING
?-to-THE-WHICH DEATH to-what ? legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-esteemizING he-shall-be-glorifying akolouqei akoloutheO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
19 This spake he, signifying by what death he should glorify God. And when he had spoken this, he saith unto him, Follow me.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai touto kai houtos

Conj pd Acc Sg n
eipwn legO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
God
AND
this
sayING
He-IS-sayING
to-him
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me hgapa agapaO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
20 . Then Peter, turning about, seeth the disciple whom Jesus loved following; which also leaned on his breast at supper, and said, Lord, which is he that betrayeth thee?
21:20 epistrafeis
epistrephO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
blepei blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
maqhthn on mathEtEs hos

BEING-ON-TURNED being-turned-about o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
Peter
THE
LEARNer disciple en en
Prep
WHOM
LOVED
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
akolouqounta os akoloutheO hos

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m
kai anepesen kai anapiptO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
deipnw epi deipnon epi

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
THE
JESUS
followING
WHO
AND also kurie kurios
UP-FALLS leans-back tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
IN
THE
DINner
ON
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sthqos autou stEthos autos

kai eipen kai legO

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Voc Sg m
THE
CHEST
OF-Him
AND
said
Master ! Lord !
ANY who ?
IS
THE
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
one-BESIDE-GIVING YOU one-giving-up
21:21 touton oun

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
oun
Conj
idwn eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
21 Peter seeing him saith to Jesus, Lord, and what [shall] this man [do]?
this-one this-one outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
THEN PERCEIVING
THE
Peter
to-THE
JESUS
Master ! Lord !
de de
Conj
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
this-one this-one
YET ANY what ?
AV
John 21 - Acts 1
21:22 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
qelw thelO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
menein menO
vn Pres Act
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
JESUS
IF-EVER him
I-MAY-BE-WILLING TO-BE-REMAINING
22 Jesus saith unto him, If I will that he tarry till I come, what [is that] to thee? follow thou me.
ews ercomai heOs erchomai

ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
TILL
I-AM-COMING
ANY what ? oun oun

Conj
TOWARD YOU
YOU
to-ME me eis eis

Prep
BE-followING be-you-following ! adelfous oti o adelphos hoti ho

n_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
23 Then went this saying abroad among the brethren, that that disciple should not die: yet Jesus said not unto him, He shall not die; but, If I will that he tarry till I come, what [is that] to thee?
21:23 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
OUT-CAME came-out
THEN this
THE
saying word
INTO THE
brothers brethren autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
that
THE

ouk ou
Part Neg
apoqnhskei ouk apothnEskO ou

vi Pres Act 3 Sg Part Neg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
LEARNer disciple oti ouk hoti ou

Conj
that
NOT
IS-FROM-DYING is-dying all ean alla ean

Conj Cond
NOT
said
YET to-him
THE
JESUS
apoqnhskei apothnEskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
qelw thelO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
menein menO
vn Pres Act
ews heOs
Conj
Part Neg
that
NOT
he-IS-FROM-DYING but he-is-dying

WH
IF-EVER him
NA NA
I-AM-WILLING TO-BE-REMAINING TILL I-may-be-willing pros pros

Prep
NA
ercomai erchomai
ti pros se
WH
WH
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
I-AM-COMING
ANY what ? estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TOWARD YOU
21:24 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
marturwn martureO
peri peri
Prep
toutwn kai houtos kai

pd Gen Pl n Conj
this-one this o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS
THE
LEARNer disciple
THE
one-witnessING one-testifying oti alhqhs hoti alEthEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ABOUT these concerning these-things autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
24 This is the disciple which testifieth of these things, and wrote these things: and we know that his testimony is true.
grayas graphO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
kai oidamen kai eidO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
THE
one-WRITing one-writing
these AND these-things
TRUE
OF-him
THE
marturia estin marturia eimi

n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
witness testimony
IS
21:25 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai alla kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
polla polus
a_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
epoihsen o poieO ho
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
atina hostis
pr Nom Pl n
IS there-is ean ean

Cond
YET AND also
others MANY other-things kaq kata

Prep
WHICH which(p) oud oude

Adv
DOES
THE
JESUS
WHICH-ANY which-any(p) ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
grafhtai graphO
vs Pres Pas 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oimai oiomai
25 And there are also many other things which Jesus did, the which, if they should be written every one, I suppose that even the world itself could not contain the books that should be written. Amen.
IF-EVER MAY-BE-beING-WRITTEN according-to ONE they-may-be-being-written kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
NOT-YET SAME not-yeteven itself grafomena graphO

I-AM-surmisING
THE
cwrhsein
NA
cwrhsai chOreO
vn Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
biblia biblion
n_ Acc Pl n
SYSTEM world
TO-SPACE to-contain
THE
beING-WRITTEN
SCROLLets
AV
Acts 1
Acts
1:1 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
men men
Part
prwton prOtos
a_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
epoihsamhn peri poieO peri

pantwn w qeofile pas O theophilos

a_ Gen Pl n Inj n_ Voc Sg m
THE
INDEED BEFORE-most saying first account hrxato archO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
NA
I-make
ABOUT ALL concerning poiein poieO

vn Pres Act
o!
Theophilus ! (God-FOND) Theophilus !
. The former treatise have I made, O Theophilus, of all that Jesus began both to do and teach,
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
kai didaskein kai didaskO

Conj vn Pres Act
OF-WHICH begins which
THE
JESUS
TO-BE-DOING BESIDES AND bsboth tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
TO-BE-TEACHING
1:2 acri hs
achri
Prep
hos
pr Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
enteilamenos entellomai
vp Aor midD/pasD Nom Sg m
apostolois dia apostolos dia

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
UNTIL WHICH
DAY
directing
to-THE the
THRU spirit through
Until the day in which he was taken up, after that he through the Holy Ghost had given commandments unto the apostles whom he had chosen:
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
exelexato anelhmfqh eklegO analambanO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
HOLY
WHOM whom(p)
He-choosES
He-WAS-UP-GOTTEN he-was-taken-up eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
1:3 ois
hos
pr Dat Pl m
kai paresthsen kai paristEmi

zwnta zaO
meta to meta ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
to-WHOM AND to-whom(p) also auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
He-BESIDE-STANDS Self he-presents himself
LIVING
after
THE
TO-BE-EMOTIONING to-be-suffering
en en
Prep
pollois tekmhriois di polus tekmErion dia

a_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Prep
hmerwn tesserakonta optanomenos hEmera tesserakonta optomai

n_ Gen Pl f ni numeral vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
To whom also he shewed himself alive after his passion by many infallible proofs, being seen of them forty days, and speaking of the things pertaining to the kingdom of God:
Him
IN
MANY
TOKENS
THRU DAYS during peri peri

Prep
FOUR-TY forty
beING-VIEWED-UP being-visualized qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
autois kai legwn autos kai legO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

to-them
AND
sayING telling-them
THE ABOUT THE the-things concerning
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
1:4 kai sunalizomenos

kai
Conj
sunalizO
parhggeilen autois apo paraggellO autos apo

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep
ierosolumwn mh ierosoluma mE
n_ Gen Pl n Part Neg
cwrizesqai chOrizO
vn Pres Pas
AND
beING-TOGETHER-SALTED He-chargES being-foregathered thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-them them
FROM JERUSALEM
NO
TO-BE-SPACizING to-be-departing
alla perimenein alla perimenO

Conj vn Pres Act

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
hkousate akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
And, being assembled together with [them], commanded them that they should not depart from Jerusalem, but wait for the promise of the Father, which, [saith he], ye have heard of me.
but
TO-BE-ABOUT-REMAINING THE to-be-remaining-about for-the
promise
OF-THE
FATHER
WHICH
YE-HEAR
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
1:5 oti
hoti
Conj
iwannhs men iOannEs men

n_ Nom Sg m Part
ebaptisen udati baptizO hudOr

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
that JOHN seeing-that baptisqhsesqe baptizO

vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
INDEED DIPizES baptizes agiw hagios

a_ Dat Sg n
to-water
YOU(p) ye
YET IN
spirit
For John truly baptized with water; but ye shall be baptized with the Holy Ghost not many days hence.
ou ou
Part Neg
meta pollas tautas hmeras meta polus houtos hEmera

Prep a_ Acc Pl f pd Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
SHALL-BE-BEING-DIPizED HOLY shall-be-being-baptized
NOT
after
MANY
these of-these auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
DAYS
1:6 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
sunelqontes sunerchomai
hrwtwn erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
en en
Prep
THE-ones the-ones tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
INDEED THEN TOGETHER-COMING askED coming-together toutw apokaqistaneis thn houtos apokathistEmi ho
pd Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
Him
sayING
Master ! Lord ! israhl israEl

ni proper
IF
IN
. When they therefore were come together, they asked of him, saying, Lord, wilt thou at this time restore again the kingdom to Israel?
cronw chronos
n_ Dat Sg m
basileian tw basileia ho
THE
TIME
this
YOU-ARE-restorING
THE
KINGdom
to-THE
ISRAEL
AV
Acts 1
1:7 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous ouc autos ou

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gnwnai cronous h ginOskO chronos E

vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Pl m Part
He-said
YET
TOWARD them
NOT
OF-YOU(p) it-IS of-ye en en

Prep
TO-KNOW
TIMES
OR
And he said unto them, It is not for you to know the times or the seasons, which the Father hath put in his own power.
kairous ous kairos hos

n_ Acc Pl m pr Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
exousia exousia
n_ Dat Sg f
SEASONS eras
WHICH
THE
FATHER
PLACED
IN
THE
OWN
authority jurisdiction pneumatos ef pneuma epi

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
8
1:8 alla lhmyesqe

alla
Conj
lambanO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
dunamin epelqontos dunamis eperchomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
but
YE-SHALL-BE-GETTING ABILITY ye-shall-be-obtaining power kai esesqe kai eimi

OF-ON-COMING of-coming-on te te
Part
OF-THE
HOLY
spirit
ON
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
martures en martus en
n_ Nom Pl m Prep
ierousalhm kai ierosoluma kai

ni proper Conj
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
But ye shall receive power, after that the Holy Ghost is come upon you: and ye shall be witnesses unto me both in Jerusalem, and in all Judaea, and in Samaria, and unto the uttermost part of the earth.
YOU(p) ye th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
YE-SHALL-BE OF-ME
witnesses
IN
BESIDES JERUSALEM bsboth ghs gE
AND
IN
EVERY entire
ioudaia kai samareia kai ews ioudaia kai samareia kai heOs
n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj Conj
escatou ths eschatos ho

a_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
JUDEA
AND
SAMARIA
AND
TILL OF-LAST as-far-as limits autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
OF-THE
LAND earth kai nefelh kai nephelE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
9
1:9 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
blepontwn blepO
ephrqh epairO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND
these sayING these-things apo apo

Prep
OF-lookING
OF-them
He-WAS-ON-LIFTED AND he-was-lifted-up
CLOUD
And when he had spoken these things, while they beheld, he was taken up; and a cloud received him out of their sight.
upelaben auton hupolambanO autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ofqalmwn autwn ophthalmos autos

UNDER-GOT took-up
Him
FROM THE
VIEWers eyes eis eis

Prep
OF-them
1:10 kai ws atenizontes hsan

kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
atenizO
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon poreuomenou ouranos poreuomai

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND
AS
STRETCHING looking-intently andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
THEY-WERE INTO THE
heaven
OF-GOING
OF-Him
10 And while they looked stedfastly toward heaven as he went up, behold, two men stood by them in white apparel;
kai idou kai idou

duo duo
ni numeral
pareisthkeisan autois en paristEmi autos en

vi Plup Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m Prep
esqhsesin leukais esthEsis leukos

AND
BE-PERCEIVING MEN lo ! kai eipan kai legO

Conj
TWO
HAD-BESIDE-STOOD stand-beside galilaioi ti galilaios tis

n_ Voc Pl m
to-them them
IN
GARMENTS attire
WH
WHITE
1:11 oi
hos
pr Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
esthkate histEmi
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
blepontes
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pi Acc Sg n
WHO
NA
AND also
say
MEN men ! eis eis

Prep
GALILEANS Galileans !
ANY why ? o ho
YE-HAVE-STOOD ye-stand ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
emblepontes emblepO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon outos ouranos houtos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 Which also said, Ye men of Galilee, why stand ye gazing up into heaven? this same Jesus, which is taken up from you into heaven, shall so come in like manner as ye have seen him go into heaven.
t_ Nom Sg m
IN-lookING looking-at analhmfqeis analambanO

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
INTO THE
heaven
this
THE
JESUS
THE
af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon outws eleusetai ouranos houtOs erchomai

n_ Acc Sg m Adv vi Fut midD 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
One-BEING-UP-GOTTEN FROM YOU(p) one-being-taken-up ye tropon eqeasasqe auton tropos theaomai autos
n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor midD 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
INTO THE
heaven
thus
SHALL-BE-COMING WHICH
poreuomenon poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
manner
YE-gaze ye-gaze-at
Him
GOING
INTO THE
heaven
1:12 tote upestreyan eis

tote
Adv
hupostrephO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis
Prep
ierousalhm apo ierosoluma apo

ni proper Prep
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kaloumenou kaleO
vp Pres Pas Gen Sg n
elaiwnos elaiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
then
THEY-reTURN
INTO JERUSALEM
FROM mountain mount
THE
beING-CALLED
OLIVE Olivet
12 . Then returned they unto Jerusalem from the mount called Olivet, which is from Jerusalem a sabbath day's journey.
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eggus ierousalhm sabbatou econ eggus ierosoluma sabbaton echO

Adv ni proper n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
WHICH
IS
NEAR
JERUSALEM
OF-SABBATH
HAVING
WAY
AV
Acts 1
1:13 kai ote eishlqon

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
uperwon huperOon
n_ Acc Sg n
anebhsan anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ou hou
Adv
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
AND
when
THEY-INTO-CAME INTO THE they-entered te te

Part
OVER-apartment THEY-UP-STEPPed where THEY-WERE upper-chamber they-went-up kai iwannhs kai iakwbos kai andreas kai iOannEs kai iakObos kai andreas
Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
katamenontes o katamenO hos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pr Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
DOWN-REMAINING residing
THE
BESIDES Peter
AND
JOHN
AND
JACOBUS James
AND
ANDREW
13 And when they were come in, they went up into an upper room, where abode both Peter, and James, and John, and Andrew, Philip, and Thomas, Bartholomew, and Matthew, James [the son] of Alphaeus, and Simon Zelotes, and Judas [the brother] of James.
filippos kai qwmas philippos kai thOmas

barqolomaios kai maqqaios iakwbos alfaiou bartholomaios kai maththaios iakObos halphaios
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
kai simwn kai simOn

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
Philip
AND
THOMAS
Bartholomew
AND
MATTHEW
JACOBUS James
OF-ALPHEUS AND
SIMON
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
zhlwths kai ioudas zElOtEs kai ioudas

iakwbou iakObos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
BOILer Zealot
AND
JUDAS
OF-JACOBUS of-James proskarterountes omoqumadon th proskartereO homothumadon ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv t_ Dat Sg f
1:14 outoi
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
proseuch proseuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
these
ALL
WERE
perseverING
WH
LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord tou

NA
to-THE
prayer
WH
14 These all continued with one accord in prayer and supplication, with the women, and Mary the mother of Jesus, and with his brethren.
sun sun
Prep
gunaixin kai mariam th gunE kai maria ho

n_ Dat Pl f Conj ni proper t_ Dat Sg f
mhtri mEtEr
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
sun
TOGETHER to-WOMEN togetherwith the-women tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
AND
MARIAM Mary
THE
MOTHER
OF-THE
JESUS
AND
adelfois autou adelphos autos

to-THE the
brothers
OF-Him
1:15 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tautais anastas hEmera houtos anistEmi

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
IN
THE
DAYS
these
UP-STANDing rising oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
Peter
IN
MIDst
OF-THE
WH
15 . And in those days Peter stood up in the midst of the disciples, and said, (the number of names together were about an hundred and twenty,)
adelfwn eipen adelphos legO

n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
te te
Part
onomatwn epi to onoma epi ho

n_ Gen Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ws
brothers brethren
NA
said
WAS there-was
BESIDES THRONG
OF-NAMES
ON
THE
SAME same-place
wsei hOsei
Adv
ekaton eikosi hekaton eikosi

ni numeral n_ Nom Pl m
AS-IF about
HUNDRED TWENTY
1:16 andres adelfoi edei

anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
plhrwqhnai thn plEroO ho

grafhn hn graphE hos

proeipen prolegO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
MEN men ! to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
brothers brethren ! pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
it-WAS-BINDING TO-BE-FILLED to-be-fulfilled agion hagios

a_ Nom Sg n
THE
WRITing scripture
WHICH
BEFORE-said said-before tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
stomatos dauid peri stoma dauid peri

n_ Gen Sg n ni proper Prep
iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
16 Men [and] brethren, this scripture must needs have been fulfilled, which the Holy Ghost by the mouth of David spake before concerning Judas, which was guide to them that took Jesus.
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
THRU MOUTH through sullabousin sullambanO

vp 2Aor Act Dat Pl m
of-DAVID ABOUT JUDAS of-David concerning ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
genomenou ginomai
odhgou hodEgos
n_ Gen Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
one-BECOMING one-becoming
WAY-LEADer to-THE guide kathriqmhmenos katarithmeO

ones-TOGETHER-GETTING JESUS ones-apprehending hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
1:17 oti
hoti
Conj
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kai elacen kai lagchanO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
klhron klEros
n_ Acc Sg m
17 For he was numbered with us, and had obtained part of this ministry.
that beING-DOWN-NUMBERED he-WAS seeing-that being-numbered ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
IN US among
AND
CHANCED-ON THE chanced-upon
LOT allotment
diakonias tauths diakonia houtos

OF-THE
THRU-SERVice this dispensation
AV
Acts 1
1:18 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
ekthsato cwrion ek ktaomai chOrion ek

vi Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n Prep
misqou misthos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
this-one this-man prhnhs prEnEs

a_ Nom Sg m
INDEED THEN ACQUIRES
freehold
OUT OF-HIRE of-wages kai execuqh kai ekcheO

Conj
OF-THE
UN-JUSTness AND injustice panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
18 Now this man purchased a field with the reward of iniquity; and falling headlong, he burst asunder in the midst, and all his bowels gushed out.
genomenos ginomai
elakhsen lakeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mesos mesos
a_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
PRONE to-fall-prone
BECOMING
he-RUPTURES MIDst AND in-the-middle
WAS-POURED-OUT ALL
THE
splagcna autou splagchnon autos

n_ Nom Pl n pp Gen Sg m
INTESTINES
OF-him
1:19 kai gnwston egeneto

kai
Conj
gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
katoikousin katoikeO
ierousalhm wste ierosoluma hOste

ni proper Conj
AND
KNOWN
it-BECAME
to-ALL
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING JERUSALEM ones-dwelling in-Jerusalem

NA
AS-BESIDES so-that akeldamac akeldamach

ni proper
klhqhnai kaleO
vn Aor Pas
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
cwrion ekeino chOrion ekeinos

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
dialektw autwn dialektos autos

19 And it was known unto all the dwellers at Jerusalem; insomuch as that field is called in their proper tongue, Aceldama, that is to say, The field of blood.
TO-BE-CALLED THE
freehold
that
to-THE
OWN
dialect vernacular
OF-them
ACHELDAMACH
tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
cwrion aimatos chOrion haima

this
IS
freehold
OF-BLOOD
1:20 gegraptai
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
biblw biblos
n_ Dat Sg f
yalmwn genhqhtw psalmos ginomai

n_ Gen Pl m vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epaulis epaulis
n_ Nom Sg f
IN
SCROLL
OF-psalms
LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE let-her-be-being-become ! katoikwn katoikeO

ON-COURT domicile auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
20 For it is written in the book of Psalms, Let his habitation be desolate, and let no man dwell therein: and his bishoprick let another take.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
erhmos erEmos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
estw eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
DESOLATE AND
NO
LET-BE let-him-be !
THE
one-DOWN-HOMING IN one-dwelling
her herit
AND
THE
episkophn autou episkopE autos

labetw lambanO
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
ON-NOTing supervision
OF-him
LET-BE-GETTING DIFFERENT-one let-him-be-taking ! different-one oun oun

Conj
1:21 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sunelqontwn sunerchomai
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
andrwn en anEr en
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
cronw chronos
n_ Dat Sg m
it-IS-BINDING must w hos

pr Dat Sg m
THEN OF-THE
ones-TOGETHER-COMING to-US coming-together with-us ef epi

Prep
MEN
IN
EVERY all
TIME
21 Wherefore of these men which have companied with us all the time that the Lord Jesus went in and out among us,
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
to-WHICH which
INTO-CAME came-into
AND
OUT-CAME came-out tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
ON
US
THE
Master Lord
JESUS
1:22 arxamenos
archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
baptismatos iwannou ews ths baptisma iOannEs heOs ho

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
beginning
FROM THE
DIPism baptism martura ths martus ho

OF-JOHN
TILL
THE
DAY
WHICH
anelhmfqh analambanO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
af apo
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
anastasews autou anastasis autos

sun sun
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
22 Beginning from the baptism of John, unto that same day that he was taken up from us, must one be ordained to be a witness with us of his resurrection.
He-WAS-UP-GOTTEN FROM US he-was-taken-up genesqai ginomai

vn 2Aor midD
witness
OF-THE
OF-Him
TOGETHER to-US togetherwith us
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl m
TO-BE-BECOMING ONE
OF-these of-these-men duo duo

ni numeral
1:23 kai esthsan

kai
Conj
histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
iwshf ton iOsEph ho

kaloumenon kaleO
barsabban os barsabbas hos

epeklhqh epikaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND
THEY-STAND TWO they-nominate
JOSEPH
THE
one-beING-CALLED Bar-Sabbas being-called
WHO
WAS-ON-CALLED was-surnamed
23 And they appointed two, Joseph called Barsabas, who was surnamed Justus, and Matthias.
AV
Acts 1 - Acts 2
ioustos kai maqqian ioustos kai maththias

n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
JUSTUS
AND
MATTHIAS
1:24 kai proseuxamenoi eipan

kai
Conj
proseuchomai
vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
kardiognwsta pantwn anadeixon kardiognOstEs pas anadeiknumi

n_ Voc Sg m a_ Gen Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
praying
THEY-say
YOU
Master ! Lord ! duo duo

ni numeral
HEART-KNOWer knower-of-hearts
OF-ALL
UP-SHOW indicate-you !
24 And they prayed, and said, Thou, Lord, which knowest the hearts of all [men], shew whether of these two thou hast chosen,
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
exelexw eklegO
vi Aor Mid 2 Sg
ek ek
Prep

ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
WHOM
YOU-choose
OUT OF-these
THE
TWO
ONE
1:25 labein
lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
diakonias tauths kai apostolhs af diakonia houtos kai apostolE apo

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Prep
TO-BE-GETTING THE to-be-taking hs hos

pr Gen Sg f
PLACE
OF-THE
THRU-SERVice this dispensation ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
commission apostleship idion idios
FROM
25 That he may take part of this ministry and apostleship, from which Judas by transgression fell, that he might go to his own place.
parebh parabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
poreuqhnai eis poreuomai eis

vn Aor pasD Prep
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
a_ Acc Sg m
WHICH
BESIDE-STEPPed JUDAS transgressed
TO-BE-GONE
INTO THE
PLACE
THE
OWN
1:26 kai edwkan

kai
Conj
didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
klhrous autois kai epesen klEros autos kai piptO

n_ Acc Pl m pp Dat Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
klhros klEros
n_ Nom Sg m
epi maqqian kai epi maththias kai

Prep n_ Acc Sg m Conj
AND
THEY-GIVE
LOTS
to-them
AND
FALLS
THE
LOT
ON
MATTHIAS
AND
26 And they gave forth their lots; and the lot fell upon Matthias; and he was numbered with the eleven apostles.
sugkateyhfisqh sugkatapsEphizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
endeka apostolwn hendeka apostolos

ni numeral n_ Gen Pl m
he-IS-TOGETHER-DOWN-PEBBLED WITH he-is-enumerated-with
THE
ONE-TEN eleven
AV
Acts 2
2:1 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
sumplhrousqai sumplEroO
vn Pres Pas
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran ths hEmera ho

penthkosths pentEkostE
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
IN
THE
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-FILLED THE to-be-being-fulfilled omou homou

Adv
DAY
OF-THE
FIVE-tieth Pentecost
. And when the day of Pentecost was fully come, they were all with one accord in one place.
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
THEY-WERE ALL
LIKEwise ON alike afnw ek aphnO ek

Adv Prep
THE
SAME same-place ouranou hcos ouranos Echos

2:2 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
wsper feromenhs hOsper pherO

Adv vp Pres mid/pas Gen Sg f
AND
BECAME there-became biaias biaios

a_ Gen Sg f
suddenly OUT OF-THE
heaven
RESOUND blare oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
AS-EVEN even-as ou hou

Adv
OF-beING-CARRIED carrying
And suddenly there came a sound from heaven as of a rushing mighty wind, and it filled all the house where they were sitting.
pnohs pnoE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai eplhrwsen olon kai plEroO holos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
BLOWing of-blast
FORCible violent
AND
it-FILLS
WHOLE
THE
HOME house
where THEY-WERE
kaqhmenoi kathEmai
sittING
2:3 kai wfqhsan

kai
Conj
optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autois diamerizomenai glwssai wsei puros autos diamerizO glOssa hOsei pur
pp Dat Pl m vp Pres mid/pas Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f Adv n_ Gen Sg n
kai ekaqisen ef kai kathizO epi

AND
WERE-VIEWED to-them were-seen ekaston autwn hekastos autos

a_ Acc Sg m pp Gen Pl m
beING-THRU-PARTED dividing
TONGUES
AS-IF
OF-FIRE
AND
is-seated it-is-seated
ON
And there appeared unto them cloven tongues like as of fire, and it sat upon each of them.
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
ONE
EACH
OF-them
2:4 kai eplhsqhsan

kai
Conj
plEthO (pimplEmi)
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m

kai hrxanto kai archO

lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
eterais heteros
a_ Dat Pl f
AND
THEY-ARE-FILLED ALL
OF-spirit
HOLY
AND
THEY-begin
TO-BE-TALKING to-DIFFERENT to-be-speaking autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
And they were all filled with the Holy Ghost, and began to speak with other tongues, as the Spirit gave them utterance.
glwssais kaqws glOssa kathOs

n_ Dat Pl f Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
edidou didOmi
vi impf Act 3 Sg
apofqeggesqai apophtheggomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
TONGUES languages
according-AS THE
WH NA
spirit
GAVE
TO-BE-FROM-UTTERING to-them to-be-declaiming them eulabeis eulabEs

a_ Nom Pl m
5
2:5 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
en
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm katoikountes ioudaioi andres ierosoluma katoikeO ioudaios anEr

ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
WERE there-were apo apo

Prep
YET
INTO
JERUSALEM
DOWN-HOMING dwelling ouranon ouranos

n_ Acc Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews
MEN
pious
. And there were dwelling at Jerusalem Jews, devout men, out of every nation under heaven.
pantos eqnous pas ethnos

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
upo hupo
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
FROM EVERY
NATION
OF-THE the ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
UNDER THE
heaven
2:6 genomenhs
ginomai
de de
Conj
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths sunhlqen houtos sunerchomai

pd Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
kai kai
Conj
OF-BECOMING of-occurring sunecuqh sugcheO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
YET THE
WH
SOUND
NA
this
TOGETHER-CAME THE came-together eis heis

n_ Nom Sg m
multitude
AND
oti hoti
Conj
hkousen
hkouon akouO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ekastos th hekastos ho
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
dialektw dialektos
n_ Dat Sg f
Now when this was noised abroad, the multitude came together, and were confounded, because that every man heard them speak in his own language.
WAS-confusED that
HEARD
ONE
EACH
to-THE
OWN
dialect vernacular
lalountwn laleO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-TALKING speaking
them
WH WH WH NA
2:7 existanto
existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kai eqaumazon kai thaumazO

legontes legO
ouci idou pantes
ouc ou
Part Neg
THEY-are-OUT-STOOD YET AND they-are-amazed
THEY-MARVELED sayING marveled
NOT
And they were all amazed and marvelled, saying one to another, Behold, are not all these which speak Galilaeans?
AV
Acts 2
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
NA
apantes hapas
a_ Nom Pl m
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
lalountes laleO
galilaioi galilaios
n_ Nom Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING ALL(emph.) lo !
these
ARE
THE
ones-TALKING ones-speaking idia idios

a_ Dat Sg f
GALILEANS
2:8 kai pws hmeis

kai
Conj
pOs
Adv Int
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
akouomen akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ekastos th hekastos ho
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
dialektw hmwn dialektos hemeis

en en
Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
And how hear we every man in our own tongue, wherein we were born?
AND
how how ?
WE
ARE-HEARING EACH
to-THE
OWN
dialect vernacular
OF-US
IN
WHICH
egennhqhmen gennaO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
WE-WERE-generatED we-were-born
2:9 parqoi
parthos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai mhdoi kai mEdos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
kai elamitai kai oi kai elamitEs kai ho

Conj n_ Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
katoikountes katoikeO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
PARTHIANS AND
MEDES
AND
ELAMites
AND
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING THE ones-dwelling kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
Parthians, and Medes, and Elamites, and the dwellers in Mesopotamia, and in Judaea, and Cappadocia, in Pontus, and Asia,
mesopotamian mesopotamia
n_ Acc Sg f
ioudaian te ioudaia te
n_ Acc Sg f Part
kai kappadokian ponton kai kappadokia pontos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg m
MID-RIVER (Mesopotamia) JUDEA Mesopotamia asian asia

n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDES AND
CAPPADOCIA
Pontus (MARINE) AND Pontus
THE
ASIA province-of-Asia
2:10 frugian te
phrugia
n_ Acc Sg f
te
Part
kai pamfulian aigupton kai ta kai pamphulia aiguptos kai ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
libuhs libuE
n_ Gen Sg f
PHRYGIA
BESIDES AND
Pamphylia
EGYPT
AND
THE
PARTS
OF-THE
LIBYA
10 Phrygia, and Pamphylia, in Egypt, and in the parts of Libya about Cyrene, and strangers of Rome, Jews and proselytes,
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kata kata
Prep
kurhnhn kai oi kurEnE kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m
epidhmountes rwmaioi ioudaioi te epidEmeO rhOmaios ioudaios te

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Part
kai kai
Conj
THE
according-to CYRENE
AND
THE
ON-PUBLIC-ING repatriated
ROMANS
JUDA-ans Jews
BESIDES AND bsboth
proshlutoi prosElutos
n_ Nom Pl m
TOWARD-COMers proselytes
2:11 krhtes
krEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai arabes kai araps

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
akouomen akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
lalountwn laleO
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmeterais hEmeteros
ps 1 Dat Pl
11 Cretes and Arabians, we do hear them speak in our tongues the wonderful works of God.
CRETANS
AND
ARABS
WE-ARE-HEARING OF-TALKING speaking tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
them
to-THE
OUR-more our(emph.)
glwssais ta glOssa ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Pl n
megaleia megaleion
a_ Acc Pl n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
TONGUES languages
THE
GREATnesses OF-THE great-things de de

Conj
God
WH NA
2:12 existanto
existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
dihporounto
dihporoun diaporeO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
12 And they were all amazed, and were in doubt, saying one to another, What meaneth this?
are-OUT-STOOD YET ALL they-are-amazed allon allos

a_ Acc Sg m
AND
were-bewilderED they-were-bewildered touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
other
TOWARD
legontes legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
other
sayING
ANY what ? de de
Conj
IS-WILLING
this
TO-BE
2:13 eteroi
heteros
a_ Nom Pl m
diacleuazontes elegon diachleuazO legO

oti gleukous memestwmenoi hoti gleukos mestoO

Conj n_ Gen Sg n vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
13 Others mocking said, These men are full of new wine.
DIFFERENT-ones YET THRU-JEERING different-ones taunting eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
said
that
OF-SWEET of-sweet-wine
HAVING-been-DISTENDED having-been-bloated
THEY-ARE
AV
Acts 2
2:14 staqeis
histEmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
endeka ephren hendeka epairO

ni numeral vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
BEING-STOOD standing fwnhn autou phOnE autos

YET THE
Peter
ONE-TEN eleven
ON-LIFTS lifts-up
THE
kai apefqegxato autois andres kai apophtheggomai autos anEr

Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m n_ Voc Pl m
ioudaioi kai oi ioudaios kai ho

a_ Voc Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
14 . But Peter, standing up with the eleven, lifted up his voice, and said unto them, Ye men of Judaea, and all [ye] that dwell at Jerusalem, be this known unto you, and hearken to my words:
SOUND voice
OF-him
AND
FROM-UTTERS declaims
to-them
MEN men ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
JUDA-ans Jews !
AND
THE
ierousalhm pantes ierosoluma pas

ni proper a_ Nom Pl m
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gnwston estw gnOstos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
ones-DOWN-HOMING JERUSALEM ones-dwelling at-Jerusalem enwtisasqe ta enOtizomai ho

vm Aor midD 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
ALL
this
to-YOU(p) to-ye
KNOWN
LET-BE let-it-be !
AND
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
IN-EARize-YE give-ear-ye !
THE
declarations OF-ME
2:15 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ws umeis gar hOs humeis

Conj Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
upolambanete hupolambanO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
mequousin methuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gar gar
Conj
NOT
for
AS
YOU(p) ye
15 For these are not drunken, as ye suppose, seeing it is [but] the third hour of the day.
ARE-UNDER-GETTING-UP these are-taking-it these-ones hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
ARE-beING-DRUNK it-IS
for
wra hOra
n_ Nom Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
HOUR
third
OF-THE
DAY
2:16 alla touto

alla
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eirhmenon ereO
vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n Att
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
iwhl iOEl
ni proper
16 But this is that which was spoken by the prophet Joel;
but
this
IS
THE
HAVING-been-declarED THRU THE through o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer JOEL prophet qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
17 And it shall come to pass in the last days, saith God, I will pour out of my Spirit upon all flesh: and your sons and your daughters shall prophesy, and your young men shall see visions, and your old men shall dream dreams:
2:17 kai estai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
escatais hmerais legei eschatos hEmera legO

a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND
it-SHALL-BE
IN
THE
LAST
DAYS
IS-sayING
THE
God
ekcew ekcheO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos mou pneuma egO

epi pasan epi pas

Prep a_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
I-SHALL-BE-OUT-POURING FROM THE I-shall-be-pouring-out profhteusousin prophEteuO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
spirit
OF-ME
ON
EVERY all
FLESH
AND
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
qugateres umwn thugatEr humeis

n_ Nom Pl f pp 2 Gen Pl
kai kai
Conj
SHALL-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING THE shall-be-prophesying oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
SONS
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
THE
DAUGHTERS
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
neaniskoi umwn neaniskos humeis

oraseis oyontai horasis optomai

n_ Acc Pl f vi Fut midD 3 Pl
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi umwn presbuteros humeis

a_ Nom Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
YOUTHS
OF-YOU(p) SEEings of-ye visions
SHALL-BE-VIEWING AND shall-be-seeing
THE
SENIORS elders
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
enupniois enupniasqhsontai enupnion enupniazomai

n_ Dat Pl n vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
to-IN-SLEEPS dreams
SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-SLEEPizED shall-be-dreaming epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
2:18 kai ge
kai
Conj
ge
Part
doulous mou doulos egO

kai epi tas kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl f
doulas doulE
n_ Acc Pl f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
AND
SURELY ON
THE
SLAVES men-slaves
OF-ME
AND
ON
THE
SLAVES(f) OF-ME women-slaves pneumatos mou pneuma egO

IN
18 And on my servants and on my handmaidens I will pour out in those days of my Spirit; and they shall prophesy:
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ekeinais ekcew hEmera ekeinos ekcheO

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vi Fut Act 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
THE
DAYS
those
I-SHALL-BE-OUT-POURING FROM THE I-shall-be-pouring-out
spirit
OF-ME
AND
profhteusousin prophEteuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING they-shall-be-prophesying
AV
Acts 2
2:19 kai dwsw

kai
Conj
didOmi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
terata en teras en
n_ Acc Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ouranw anw kai shmeia epi ths ouranos anO kai sEmeion epi ho
n_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Gen Sg f
AND
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING MIRACLES IN
THE
heaven
UP above kapnou kapnos
AND
SIGNS
ON
THE
19 And I will shew wonders in heaven above, and signs in the earth beneath; blood, and fire, and vapour of smoke:
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
katw aima katO haima

Adv n_ Acc Sg n
kai pur kai pur

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
kai atmida kai atmis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
n_ Gen Sg m
LAND earth
DOWN below
BLOOD
AND
FIRE
AND
EXHALATION OF-smoke vapor eis eis

Prep
2:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
metastrafhsetai metastrephO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
skotos kai h skotos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg f
selhnh selEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
THE
SUN
SHALL-BE-BEING-after-TURNED INTO DARKness shall-be-being-converted hmeran kuriou hEmera kurios

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
MOON
INTO
20 The sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, before that great and notable day of the Lord come:
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
prin elqein prin erchomai

Adv vn 2Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
megalhn kai epifanh mega kai epiphanEs

a_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f
BLOOD
ERE
TO-BE-COMING DAY
OF-Master of-Lord
WH
THE
NA
GREAT
AND
ON-APPEARed advent to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
2:21 kai estai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ean
an an
Part
epikaleshtai epikaleO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
it-SHALL-BE
EVERY-one every-one
WHO
EVER
SHOULD-BE-ON-CALLING THE should-be-involking
NAME
21 And it shall come to pass, [that] whosoever shall call on the name of the Lord shall be saved.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
OF-Master of-Lord
2:22 andres israhlitai akousate tous

anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
israElitEs
n_ Voc Pl m
akouO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous ihsoun logos houtos iEsous

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
MEN men !
ISRAELITES Israelites !
HEAR-YE hear-ye !
THE
sayings words apo apo

Prep
these
JESUS
THE
nazwraion andra nazOraios anEr

apodedeigmenon apodeiknumi
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
dunamesin dunamis
n_ Dat Pl f
22 Ye men of Israel, hear these words; Jesus of Nazareth, a man approved of God among you by miracles and wonders and signs, which God did by him in the midst of you, as ye yourselves also know:
NAZARENE
MAN
HAVING-been-FROM-SHOWN FROM THE having-been-demonstrated epoihsen di poieO dia

God
INTO YOU(p) ye o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-ABILITIES to-powerful-deeds en en
Prep
kai terasin kai teras

Conj n_ Dat Pl n
kai shmeiois ois kai sEmeion hos

Conj n_ Dat Pl n pr Dat Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
to-MIRACLES AND miracles umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
to-SIGNS signs
WHICH
DOES
THRU Him through
THE
God
IN
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
MIDst
OF-YOU(p) according-AS SAME of-ye yourselves wrismenh horizO

YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ye-are-aware boulh boulE

n_ Dat Sg f
2:23 touton th
houtos
pd Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kai prognwsei kai prognOsis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
this-One this-one ekdoton dia ekdotos dia

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
to-THE
HAVING-been-definED COUNSEL AND having-been-specified anomwn anomos

a_ Gen Pl m
BEFORE-KNOWledge OF-THE foreknowledge aneilate anaireO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
God
23 Him, being delivered by the determinate counsel and foreknowledge of God, ye have taken, and by wicked hands have crucified and slain:
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
prosphxantes prospEgnumi
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
OUT-GIVen given-up
THRU HAND through o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-UN-LAWed-ones TOWARD-FASTENing YE-UP-LIFT of-lawless-ones gibbeting ye-assassinate qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
2:24 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
anesthsen lusas anistEmi luO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
wdinas tou Odin ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
WHOM
THE
God
UP-STANDS raises hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
LOOSing
THE
travails pangs auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
24 Whom God hath raised having loosed the pains death: because it was possible that he should holden of it.
up, of not be
qanatou kaqoti thanatos kathoti

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
dunaton krateisqai dunatos krateO

a_ Nom Sg n vn Pres Pas
up hupo
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
DEATH
DOWN-that NOT forasmuch-as
WAS it-was eis eis

Prep
ABLE possible auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-beING-HELD Him
UNDER it him it by enwpion mou enOpion egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
25 For David speaketh concerning him, I foresaw the Lord always before my face, for he is on my right hand, that I should not be moved:
2:25 dauid gar legei

dauid
ni proper
gar
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
proorwmhn ton proorizO ho

vi impf Mid 1 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
DAVID
for
IS-sayING
INTO Him
I-BEFORE-SAW I-saw-before
THE
Master Lord
OF-ME me
AV
Acts 2
dia dia
Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
ek ek
Prep
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
saleuqw saleuO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
that OUT OF-RIGHT(p) OF-ME seeing-that touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
He-IS
NA
THAT NO
NA
I-MAY-BE-BEING-SHAKEN
NA
2:26 dia
dia
Prep
hufranqh euphrainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
WH
mou h kardia
WH WH
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
THRU this through hgalliasato h agalliaO ho

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
WAS-gladdenED
THE
HEART
OF-ME
AND
26 Therefore did my heart rejoice, and my tongue was glad; moreover also my flesh shall rest in hope:
glwssa mou glOssa egO

eti eti
Adv
de de
Conj
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
t_ Nom Sg f
exults
THE
TONGUE
OF-ME
STILL YET AND also
THE
FLESH
OF-ME
kataskhnwsei kataskEnoO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
SHALL-BE-DOWN-BOOTHING ON shall-be-tenting
EXPECTATION
2:27 oti ouk

hoti
Conj
ou
Part Neg
egkataleiyeis egkataleipO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
adhn hadEs
n_ Acc Sg m
oude oude
Adv
that
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-abandonING THE you-shall-be-forsaking ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
soul
OF-ME
INTO UN-PERCEIVED NOT-YET unseen nor diafqoran diaphthora

n_ Acc Sg f
27 Because thou wilt not leave my soul in hell, neither wilt thou suffer thine Holy One to see corruption.
dwseis didOmi
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
osion hosios
a_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
YOU-SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
BENIGN-One OF-YOU benign-one odous zwhs hodos zOE

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-PERCEIVING THRU-CORRUPTion to-be-being-aquainted-with decay me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
2:28 egnwrisas
gnOrizO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
plhrwseis plEroO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
eufrosunhs meta euphrosunE meta

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
YOU-KNOWize to-ME you-make-known tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
WAYS paths
OF-LIFE
YOU-SHALL-BE-FILLING ME
OF-gladness
WITH
28 Thou hast made known to me the ways of life; thou shalt make me full of joy with thy countenance.

THE
face
OF-YOU
2:29 andres adelfoi exon

anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
exesti
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
meta parrhsias pros meta parrhEsia pros

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
MEN men ! peri peri

Prep
brothers brethren ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
allowING
TO-BE-sayING WITH
boldness
TOWARD YOU(p) ye kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
patriarcou dauid oti kai eteleuthsen kai etafh patriarchEs dauid hoti kai teleutaO kai thaptO
n_ Gen Sg m ni proper Conj Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
29 Men [and] brethren, let me freely speak unto you of the patriarch David, that he is both dead and buried, and his sepulchre is with us unto this day.
ABOUT THE concerning mnhma mnEma

n_ Nom Sg n
patriarch
DAVID
that
AND also
he-deceasES
AND
WAS-entombed AND
THE
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
acri ths achri ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths houtos
pd Gen Sg f
memorial-tomb OF-him tomb
IS
IN US among uparcwn huparchO

UNTIL THE
DAY
this
2:30 profhths
prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
kai eidws kai eidO

Conj vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
oti orkw hoti horkos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
wmosen omnuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer THEN belongING prophet being-inherently o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
AND
HAVING-PERCEIVED that
to-OATH
SWEARS
to-him
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
karpou karpos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
osfuos autou osphus autos

kaqisai kathizO
vn Aor Act
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
qronon thronos
n_ Acc Sg m
30 Therefore being a prophet, and knowing that God had sworn with an oath to him, that of the fruit of his loins, according to the flesh, he would raise up Christ to sit on his throne;
THE
God
OUT OF-FRUIT
OF-THE
LOIN
OF-him
TO-be-seated ON
THE
THRONE
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
2:31 proidwn
proeidO
elalhsen peri laleO peri

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anastasews tou anastasis ho

cristou oti christos hoti

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
BEFORE-PERCEIVING he-TALKS perceiving-before-this he-speaks
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
that
31 He seeing this before spake of the resurrection of Christ, that his soul was not left in hell, neither his flesh did see corruption.
AV
Acts 2
oute oute
Conj
egkateleifqh eis egkataleipO eis

adhn hadEs
n_ Acc Sg m
oute oute
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
NOT-BESIDES He-WAS-abandonED neither he-was-forsaken eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
INTO UN-PERCEIVED NOT-BESIDES THE unseen nor
FLESH
OF-Him
diafqoran diaphthora
n_ Acc Sg f
PERCEIVED THRU-CORRUPTion was-acquainted-with decay
2:32 touton ton

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
anesthsen o anistEmi ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
32 This Jesus hath God raised up, whereof we all are witnesses.
this
THE
JESUS
UP-STANDS raises
THE
God
OF-WHOM
ALL
WE
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
martures martus
n_ Nom Pl m
ARE
witnesses
2:33 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
oun oun
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
uywqeis hupsoO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
te te
Part
epaggelian epaggelia
n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
RIGHT right-hand
THEN OF-THE
God
BEING-HEIGHTenED THE being-exalted labwn lambanO

BESIDES promise
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
execeen ekcheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
33 Therefore being by the right hand of God exalted, and having received of the Father the promise of the Holy Ghost, he hath shed forth this, which ye now see and hear.
OF-THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
GETTING obtaining
BESIDE THE
FATHER
He-OUT-POURS he-pours-out
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
kai kai
Conj
blepete blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai akouete kai akouO

this
WHICH
YOU(p) ye
AND
ARE-lookING AND are-observing eis eis

Prep
ARE-HEARING
2:34 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar dauid anebh gar dauid anabainO

Conj ni proper vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ouranous legei ouranos legO

de de
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
NOT
for
DAVID
NA
UP-STEPPed ascended
INTO THE
heavens
IS-sayING
YET he
34 For David is not ascended into the heavens: but he saith himself, The LORD said unto my Lord, Sit thou on my right hand,
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kaqou kathEmai
ek ek
Prep
said
THE
Master Lord
to-THE
Master Lord
OF-ME
BE-sittING be-you-sitting !
OUT
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-RIGHT(p) OF-ME
2:35 ews an
heOs
Conj
an
Part
qw tithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m


podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
35 Until I make thy foes thy footstool.
TILL
enemies
OF-YOU
OF-THE
FEET
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-YOU
2:36 asfalws oun

asphalOs
Adv
oun
Conj
ginwsketw ginOskO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
oti kai kurion hoti kai kurios

Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
UN-TOTTERly THEN LET-BE-KNOWING EVERY certainly let-him-be-knowing ! all kai criston epoihsen o kai christos poieO ho
Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
HOME house
of-ISRAEL that of-Israel
AND
Master Lord
Him
36 Therefore let all the house of Israel know assuredly, that God hath made that same Jesus, whom ye have crucified, both Lord and Christ.
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m

ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
AND
ANOINTED Christ
makES
THE
God
this
THE
JESUS
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
estaurwsate stauroO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
impale crucify
AV
Acts 2
2:37 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
katenughsan katanussO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian eipon kardia legO

n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
pros pros
Prep
HEARing hearing-this ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET THEY-WERE-DOWN-PUNCTURED THE they-were-pricked-with-compunction in-the kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
HEART
THEY-said
BESIDES TOWARD
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
loipous apostolous ti loipon apostolos tis

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pi Acc Sg n
poihswmen poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
37 . Now when they heard [this], they were pricked in their heart, and said unto Peter and to the rest of the apostles, Men [and] brethren, what shall we do?
THE
Peter
AND
THE
rest
ANY what ?
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOING MEN men !
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
brothers brethren !
2:38 petros
petros
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
autous metanohsate autos metanoeO

pp Acc Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
NA
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
Peter
YET TOWARD them
after-MIND-YE repent-ye !
WH
he-IS-AVERRING is-averring tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
baptisqhtw baptizO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
ekastos umwn hekastos humeis

en
NA
epi epi
Prep
onomati ihsou onoma iEsous

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
38 Then Peter said unto them, Repent, and be baptized every one of you in the name of Jesus Christ for the remission of sins, and ye shall receive the gift of the Holy Ghost.
LET-BE-BEING-DIPizED EACH let-him-be-being-baptized ! eis eis

Prep
OF-YOU(p) of-ye amartiwn umwn hamartia humeis

ON
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
afesin aphesis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
kai lhmyesqe kai lambanO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dwrean tou dOrea ho

INTO FROM-LETTing OF-THE pardon agiou hagios

a_ Gen Sg n
misses sins
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
YE-SHALL-BE-GETTING THE ye-shall-be-obtaining
gratuity
OF-THE
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
HOLY
spirit
2:39 umin
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
gar estin gar eimi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epaggelia kai tois epaggelia kai ho

n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Dat Pl n
teknois umwn teknon humeis

n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
kai pasin kai pas

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
for
IS
THE
promise
AND
to-THE
offsprings children kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-ALL
39 For the promise is unto you, and to your children, and to all that are afar off, [even] as many as the Lord our God shall call.
eis eis
Prep
makran osous makran hosos

Adv pk Acc Pl m
an an
Part
proskaleshtai proskaleomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE-ones INTO FAR the-ones afar hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
as-many-as EVER SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-CALLING Master should-be-calling-toward-him Lord
THE
God
OF-US
2:40 eterois te
heteros
a_ Dat Pl m
te
Part
logois pleiosin logos polus

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m Cmp
diemarturato kai parekalei diamarturomai kai parakaleO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
DIFFERENT BESIDES to-sayings to-different words legwn legO

MORE
he-THRU-witnessES he-conjures ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
BESIDE-CALLED them entreated
40 And with many other words did he testify and exhort, saying, Save yourselves from this untoward generation.
swqhte sOzO
vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
geneas genea
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
skolias tauths skolios houtos

a_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f
sayING
BE-BEING-SAVED FROM THE be-ye-being-saved ! men men

Part
generation
THE
CROOKED
this
2:41 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
apodexamenoi apodechomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ebaptisqhsan kai baptizO kai

THE the-ones
INDEED THEN ones-FROM-RECEIVing THE welcoming th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
saying word
OF-him
ARE-DIPizED are-baptized
AND
41 Then they that gladly received his word were baptized: and the same day there were added [unto them] about three thousand souls.
proseteqhsan en prostithEmi en
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh yucai ekeinos psuchE

pd Dat Sg f n_ Nom Pl f
wsei trisciliai hOsei trischilioi

Adv n_ Nom Pl f
WERE-addED there-were-added
IN
THE
DAY
that
souls
AS-IF about
THREE-THOUSAND
2:42 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
proskarterountes th proskartereO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
didach twn didachE ho

apostolwn kai th apostolos kai ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
THEY-WERE YET perseverING
to-THE
TEACHing
OF-THE
AND
to-THE
42 . And they continued stedfastly in the apostles'doctrine and fellowship, and in breaking of bread, and in prayers.
AV
Acts 2 - Acts 3
koinwnia th koinOnia ho
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
klasei tou klasis ho

artou artos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
proseucais proseuchE
n_ Dat Pl f
communion fellowship
to-THE
BREAKing OF-THE
BREAD
AND
to-THE
prayers
WH NA
2:43 egineto
ginomai
de de
Conj
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
polla polus
a_ Nom Pl n
de
te te
Part
terata kai teras kai

n_ Nom Pl n Conj
BECAME
YET to-EVERY soul
FEAR
MANY
BESIDES
MIRACLES AND
43 And fear came upon every soul: and many wonders and signs were done by the apostles.
shmeia sEmeion
n_ Nom Pl n
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn egineto apostolos ginomai

SIGNS
THRU THE through oi ho
WH
BECAME occurred
NA
2:44 pantes de
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
pisteusantes
de
Conj
pisteuontes hsan pisteuO eimi

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
NA
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
t_ Nom Pl m
44 And all that believed were together, and had all things common;
ALL
YET THE
NA
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing apanta hapas

a_ Acc Pl n
WERE
ON
THE
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
eicon echO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
koina koinos
a_ Acc Pl n
SAME same-place
AND
THEY-HAD had kthmata ktEma

n_ Acc Pl n
ALL(emph.) COMMON all(emph.)-things kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
2:45 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
uparxeis epipraskon huparxis pipraskO

n_ Acc Pl f vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai diemerizon kai diamerizO

AND
THE
ACQUISITIONS AND
THE
belongings properties creian chreia

n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-disposED-of AND
THEY-THRU-PARTED divided
45 And sold their possessions and goods, and parted them to all [men], as every man had need.
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
kaqoti kathoti
Adv
an an
Part
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
them
to-ALL
DOWN-that EVER ANY forasmuch-as someone hmeran te hEmera te

n_ Acc Sg f Part
need
HAD
2:46 kaq
kata
Prep
proskarterountes omoqumadon en proskartereO homothumadon en

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
according-to DAY
BESIDES perseverING
LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
THE
SACRED-place sanctuary en en
Prep
klwntes klaO
te te
Part
kat kata
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
metelambanon trofhs metalambanO trophE

vi impf Act 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f
46 And they, continuing daily with one accord in the temple, and breaking bread from house to house, did eat their meat with gladness and singleness of heart,
BREAKING
BESIDES according-to HOME
BREAD
THEY-WITH-GOT they-partook
OF-NURTURE IN of-nourishment
agalliasei kai afelothti kardias agalliasis kai aphelotEs kardia

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
exulting exultation
AND
UN-BARK simplicity ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-HEART
2:47 ainountes
aineO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai econtes kai echO

carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
pros pros
Prep
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
PRAISING
THE
God
AND
HAVING
grace favor
TOWARD WHOLE
THE
47 Praising God, and having favour with all the people. And the Lord added to the church daily such as should be saved.
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
prosetiqei tous prostithEmi ho

vi impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
swzomenous sOzO
vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m
kaq kata
Prep
hmeran epi hEmera epi

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
PEOPLE
THE
YET Master Lord
addED
THE
ones-beING-SAVED according-to DAY ones-being-saved
ON
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
THE
SAME same-place
AV
Acts 3
3:1 petros
petros
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kai iwannhs anebainon eis kai iOannEs anabainO eis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
Peter
YET AND
JOHN
UP-STEPPED went-up enathn enatos

a_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE
SACRED-place ON sanctuary
THE
HOUR
. Now Peter and John went up together into the temple at the hour of prayer, [being] the ninth [hour].
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
proseuchs thn proseuchE ho

OF-THE
prayer
THE
NINth
3:2 kai tis

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
cwlos chOlos
a_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
uparcwn huparchO
AND
ANY certain
MAN
LAME
OUT OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER OF-him of-womb kaq kata

Prep
belongING being-inherently quran thura

n_ Acc Sg f
ebastazeto on bastazO hos

vi impf Pas 3 Sg pr Acc Sg m
etiqoun tithEmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
hmeran pros hEmera pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
And a certain man lame from his mother's womb was carried, whom they laid daily at the gate of the temple which is called Beautiful, to ask alms of them that entered into the temple;
was-BORNE
WHOM
THEY-PLACED according-to DAY
TOWARD THE
DOOR
OF-THE
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
legomenhn legO
wraian tou hOraios ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
aitein aiteO
vn Pres Act
elehmosunhn para eleEmosunE para

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
SACRED-place THE sanctuary twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
one-beING-said being-said eis eis

Prep
beautiful
OF-THE
TO-BE-REQUESTING alms
BESIDE
eisporeuomenwn eisporeuomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
ones-INTO-GOING ones-going-into idwn eidO

INTO THE
SACRED-place sanctuary kai iwannhn mellontas kai iOannEs mellO

Conj n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
3:3 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
eisienai eis eiseimi eis

vn Pres vxx Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
Who seeing Peter and John about to go into the temple asked an alms.
WHO
PERCEIVING
Peter
AND
JOHN
beING-ABOUT
TO-INTO-BE INTO THE to-pass-into
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
hrwta erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
elehmosunhn labein eleEmosunE lambanO

SACRED-place askED sanctuary
alms
TO-BE-GETTING to-be-obtaining eis eis

Prep
3:4 atenisas
atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
iwannh eipen iOannEs legO

n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
And Peter, fastening his eyes upon him with John, said, Look on us.
STRETCHing looking-intently bleyon blepO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
YET Peter
INTO him
JOHN
said
eis eis
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
look-YOU look-you !
INTO US
3:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epeicen epechO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois prosdokwn autos prosdokaO

ti tis
px Acc Sg n
par para
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
And he gave heed unto them, expecting to receive something of them.
THE-one the
YET ON-HAD he-attended de de

Conj
to-them
TOWARD-SEEMING ANY hoping something
BESIDE them
TO-BE-GETTING
3:6 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
argurion kai crusion ouc argurion kai chrusion ou

n_ Acc Sg n Conj n_ Acc Sg n Part Neg
uparcei huparchO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
said
YET Peter
SILVER silver-coin didwmi didOmi

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
GOLD gold (dim) tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
NOT
IS-belongING
to-ME
WHICH
YET
Then Peter said, Silver and gold have I none; but such as I have give I thee: In the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth rise up and walk.
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
en en
Prep

cristou tou christos ho

I-AM-HAVING
this
NA
to-YOU
I-AM-GIVING
NA
IN
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
THE
nazwraiou nazOraios
n_ Gen Sg m
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
peripatei peripateO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
NAZARENE
BE-ROUSING be-you-rising ! auton autos
AND
BE-ABOUT-TREADING be-you-walking ! dexias dexios

a_ Gen Sg f
3:7 kai piasas

kai
Conj
piazO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
paracrhma de parachrEma de
Adv Conj
pp Acc Sg m
AND
arresting seizing
him
OF-THE
RIGHT
HAND
he-ROUSES he-raises
him
instantly
YET
And he took him by the right hand, and lifted [him] up: and immediately his feet and ankle bones received strength.
AV
Acts 3
esterewqhsan ai stereoO ho
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
baseis basis
n_ Nom Pl f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
sfudra sphudron
n_ Nom Pl n
WERE-SOLIDifiED were-given-stability
THE
STEPPers insteps
OF-him
AND
THE
ANKLES
3:8 kai exallomenos

kai
Conj
exallomai
esth histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai periepatei kai eishlqen kai peripateO kai eiserchomai

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sun sun
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
AND
OUT-LEAPING leaping-up ieron hieron

n_ Acc Sg n
he-STOOD
AND
ABOUT-TROD walked
AND
INTO-CAME entered
TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
And he leaping up stood, and walked, and entered with them into the temple, walking, and leaping, and praising God.
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
peripatwn peripateO
kai allomenos kai hallomai

kai ainwn kai aineO

INTO THE
SACRED-place ABOUT-TREADING sanctuary walking
AND
LEAPING
AND
PRAISING
THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
God
3:9 kai eiden

kai
Conj
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
peripatounta kai ainounta peripateO kai aineO

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
And all the people saw him walking and praising God:
AND
PERCEIVED
EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
him
AND
PRAISING
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
God
WH NA
3:10 epeginwskon de
epiginOskO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
outos
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
THEY-ON-KNEW they-recognized thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YET him
that
he
WAS
THE-one the-one tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
TOWARD
elehmosunhn kaqhmenos eleEmosunE kathEmai

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
wraia hOraios
a_ Dat Sg f
pulh pulE
n_ Dat Sg f
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
10 And they knew that it was he which sat for alms at the Beautiful gate of the temple: and they were filled with wonder and amazement at that which had happened unto him.
THE
alms
sittING
ON
THE
beautiful
GATE
OF-THE
kai eplhsqhsan kai plEthO (pimplEmi)

qambous kai ekstasews thambos kai ekstasis

n_ Gen Sg n Conj n_ Gen Sg f
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
sumbebhkoti autw sumbainO autos

vp Perf Act Dat Sg n pp Dat Sg m
AND
THEY-ARE-FILLED OF-AWE
AND
OF-OUT-STANDing ON amazement ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
HAVING-befallen
to-him him
11 And as the lame man which was healed held Peter and John, all the people ran together unto them in the porch that is called Solomon's, greatly wondering.
3:11 kratountos
krateO
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn sunedramen iOannEs suntrechO

OF-HOLDING of-holding-himself pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
YET him of-him laos laos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
Peter
AND
THE
JOHN
TOGETHER-RAN ran-together kaloumenh kaleO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
autous epi th autos epi ho

pp Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
stoa stoa
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
EVERY entire
THE
PEOPLE
TOWARD them
ON
THE
portico
THE
one-beING-CALLED being-called
solomwntos ekqamboi solomOn ekthambos

n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
OF-SOLOMON
OUT-AWED overawed de de
Conj
3:12 idwn
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
apekrinato pros apokrinomai pros

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
PERCEIVING perceiving-it israhlitai ti israElitEs tis

n_ Voc Pl m pi Acc Sg n
YET THE
Peter
answers
TOWARD THE
PEOPLE
MEN men ! ws hOs

Adv
qaumazete thaumazO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
epi toutw h epi houtos E

Prep pd Dat Sg n Part
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
atenizete atenizO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
12 . And when Peter saw [it], he answered unto the people, Ye men of Israel, why marvel ye at this? or why look ye so earnestly on us, as though by our own power or holiness we had made this man to walk?
ISRAELITES Israelites ! idia idios

a_ Dat Sg f
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-MARVELING ON
this
OR
to-US
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-STRETCHING AS ye-are-looking-intently auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
dunamei h dunamis E
n_ Dat Sg f Part
eusebeia pepoihkosin tou eusebeia poieO ho

n_ Dat Sg f vp Perf Act Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
vn Pres Act
to-OWN
ABILITY power
OR
devoutness
HAVING-DONE having-made
OF-THE
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING him to-be-walking
AV
Acts 3
3:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai kai
Conj
WH
isaak kai
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
isaak isaak
ni proper
NA
kai kai
Conj
THE
NA NA
God
of-ABRAHAM AND of-Abraham iakwb iakOb

ni proper
THE
God
of-ISAAC AND of-Isaac edoxasen doxazO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

13 The God of Abraham, and of Isaac, and of Jacob, the God of our fathers, hath glorified his Son Jesus; whom ye delivered up, and denied him in the presence of Pilate, when he was determined to let [him] go.
THE
God
of-JACOB THE of-Jacob autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
God
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
esteems glorifies
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paida pais
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
men men
Part
paredwkate kai hrnhsasqe paradidOmi kai arneomai

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor midD 2 Pl
THE
Boy
OF-Him
JESUS
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
INDEED BESIDE-GIVE give-up apoluein apoluO

vn Pres Act
AND
disown
kata kata
Prep
proswpon pilatou krinantos prosOpon pilatos krinO

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg m
according-to face acbefore
OF-PILATE
OF-JUDGing
OF-that-One TO-BE-FROM-LOOSING that-one to-be-releasing-him

14 But ye denied the Holy One and the Just, and desired a murderer to be granted unto you;
3:14 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg m
kai dikaion hrnhsasqe kai hthsasqe andra kai dikaios arneomai kai aiteO anEr
Conj a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor midD 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Mid 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
YOU(p) ye fonea phoneus

n_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
HOLY-One holy-one umin humeis
AND
JUST just-one
disown
AND
YE-REQUEST request
MAN
carisqhnai charizomai
vn Aor Pas
pp 2 Dat Pl
MURDERer TO-BE-gracED to-YOU(p) to-be-surrendered-as-a-favor to-ye
3:15 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
archgon archEgos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
apekteinate on apokteinO hos

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET ORIGIN-LEADer OF-THE inaugurator ek ek

Prep
LIFE
YE-FROM-KILL ye-kill
WHOM
THE
God
15 And killed the Prince of life, whom God hath raised from the dead; whereof we are witnesses.
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
martures esmen martus eimi

ROUSES
OUT OF-DEAD-ones OF-WHICH WE of-dead-ones

NA
witnesses
ARE
3:16 kai
kai
Conj
epi epi
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei tou pistis ho

onomatos autou onoma autos

touton on houtos hos

pd Acc Sg m pr Acc Sg m
AND
ON
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-THE
NAME
OF-Him
this-one this-man autou autos
WHOM
qewreite theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai oidate kai eidO

esterewsen to stereoO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
16 And his name through faith in his name hath made this man strong, whom ye see and know: yea, the faith which is by him hath given him this perfect soundness in the presence of you all.
pp Gen Sg m
YE-ARE-beholdING AND also pistis pistis

n_ Nom Sg f
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED SOLIDifiES ye-are-acquainted-with gives-stability autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
NAME
OF-Him
AND
THE
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
di dia
Prep
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oloklhrian holoklEria
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
BELIEF faith
THE
THRU Him through pantwn umwn pas humeis

GIVES
to-him him
THE
WHOLE-LOT this unimpaired-soundness
apenanti apenanti
Adv
FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-ALL in-front-of all
OF-YOU(p) of-ye oti kata hoti kata

Conj Prep
3:17 kai nun adelfoi oida

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
agnoian agnoia
n_ Acc Sg f
epraxate prassO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
wsper kai hOsper kai

Adv Conj
17 And now, brethren, I wot that through ignorance ye did [it], as [did] also your rulers.
AND
NOW brothers brethren !
according-to UN-KNOWledge YE-PRACTISE AS-EVEN ignorance ye-commit-it even-as
AND also
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
arcontes umwn archOn humeis

THE
chiefs
OF-YOU(p) of-ye de de
Conj
3:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
prokathggeilen prokataggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
stomatos pantwn stoma pas

THE
YET God
WHICH which(p)
He-BEFORE-DOWN-MESSAGES THRU MOUTH announces-before through
OF-ALL
18 But those things, which God before had shewed by the mouth of all his prophets, that Christ should suffer, he hath so fulfilled.
AV
Acts 3
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
paqein paschO
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston autou christos autos

eplhrwsen outws plEroO houtOs

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
THE
BEFORE-AVERers TO-BE-EMOTIONING THE prophets to-be-suffering kai epistreyate kai epistrephO

Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ANOINTED Christ
WH
OF-Him
He-FILLS he-fulfills
thus
3:19 metanohsate oun

metanoeO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
pros
NA
oun
Conj
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
exaleifqhnai exaleiphO
vn Aor Pas
after-MIND-YE repent-ye ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
THEN AND
ON-TURN-YE turn-about-ye ! an an
Part
INTO
THE
TO-BE-OUT-RUBBED to-be-erased anayuxews apo anapsuxis apo

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
19 Repent ye therefore, and be converted, that your sins may be blotted out, when the times of refreshing shall come from the presence of the Lord;
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
amartias (3:20) opws hamartia hopOs

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
elqwsin erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kairoi kairos
n_ Nom Pl m
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
misses sins kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH-how EVER MAY-BE-COMING SEASONS so-that
OF-UP-COOLing of-refreshing
FROM
proswpou tou prosOpon ho

face
OF-THE
Master Lord ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
3:20 kai aposteilh

kai
Conj
apostellO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
prokeceirismenon procheirizomai
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
criston ihsoun christos iEsous

AND
He-MAY-BE-commissionING THE he-may-be-dispatching dei deO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
One-HAVING-been-BEFORE-HANDED to-YOU(p) one-having-been-fixed-upon-beforehand to-ye
20 And he shall send Jesus Christ, which before was preached unto you:
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
3:21 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
ouranon men ouranos men

n_ Acc Sg m Part
dexasqai acri cronwn apokatastasews dechomai achri chronos apokatastasis

vn Aor midD Prep n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg f
WHOM
it-IS-BINDING must
heaven
INDEED TO-RECEIVE
UNTIL TIMES
OF-restoration
pantwn wn pas hos

elalhsen o laleO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
stomatos twn stoma ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
ap apo
Prep
21 Whom the heaven must receive until the times of restitution of all things, which God hath spoken by the mouth of all his holy prophets since the world began.
OF-ALL of-all-things aiwnos aiOn

n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH of-which autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
TALKS speaks
THE
God
THRU MOUTH through
OF-THE
HOLY
FROM
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
eon
OF-Him
BEFORE-AVERers prophets eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
3:22 mwushs men

mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
men
Part
oti profhthn hoti prophEtEs

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anasthsei anistEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
MOSES
INDEED said
NA
that
BEFORE-AVERer to-YOU(p) prophet to-ye twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING Master shall-be-raising-up Lord ws eme hOs egO

Adv pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ek ek
Prep
adelfwn umwn adelphos humeis

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
22 For Moses truly said unto the fathers, A prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you of your brethren, like unto me; him shall ye hear in all things whatsoever he shall say unto you.
THE
God
OF-YOU(p) of-ye kata kata

Prep
OUT OF-THE
brothers brethren an an
Part
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye
ME
OF-Him him umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
akousesqe akouO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
lalhsh laleO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
YE-SHALL-BE-HEARING according-to ALL
as-much-as EVER He-SHOULD-BE-TALKING TOWARD YOU(p) whatever he-should-be-speaking ye htis hostis

pr Nom Sg f
3:23 estai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
akoush akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
it-SHALL-BE
YET EVERY
soul
WHICH-ANY IF-EVER NO which-any ek ek

Prep
SHOULD-BE-HEARING OF-THE the tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
23 And it shall come to pass, [that] every soul, which will not hear that prophet, shall be destroyed from among the people.
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
ekeinou exoleqreuqhsetai ekeinos exolothreuO

pd Gen Sg m vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
BEFORE-AVERer that prophet
SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-WHOLE-RUINED OUT OF-THE shall-be-being-utterly-exterminated oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
PEOPLE
3:24 kai pantes de

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
de
Conj
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
samouhl kai twn samouEl kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Gen Pl m
kaqexhs kathexEs
Adv
osoi hosos
pk Nom Pl m
AND also
ALL
YET THE
BEFORE-AVERers FROM SAMUEL prophets hmeras tautas hEmera houtos

n_ Acc Pl f pd Acc Pl f
AND
OF-THE the-ones
DOWN-next as-many-as consecutively
24 Yea, and all the prophets from Samuel and those that follow after, as many as have spoken, have likewise foretold of these days.
elalhsan kai kathggeilan tas laleO kai kataggellO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
TALK speak
AND also
DOWN-MESSAGE announce
THE
DAYS
these
AV
Acts 3 - Acts 4
3:25 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
diaqhkhs diathEkE
n_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
ARE
WH WH WH
THE
NA
SONS
OF-THE
NA

NA
OF-THE
covenant
o qeos dieqeto
dieqeto diatithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras patEr
n_ Acc Pl m
25 Ye are the children of the prophets, and of the covenant which God made with our fathers, saying unto Abraham, And in thy seed shall all the kindreds of the earth be blessed.
WHICH
covenantED
THE
God
TOWARD THE
FATHERS
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
legwn legO
pros pros
Prep
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
spermati sou sperma su

OF-YOU(p) sayING of-ye

WH
TOWARD ABRAHAM AND

NA
IN
THE
seed
OF-YOU
euloghqhsontai
eneuloghqhsontai eneulogeO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
patriai patria
n_ Nom Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-blessED shall-be-being-blessed-in
ALL
THE
FATHERhoods OF-THE kindreds paida pais

n_ Acc Sg m
LAND earth
26 Unto you first God, having raised up his Son Jesus, sent him to bless you, in turning away every one of you from his iniquities.
3:26 umin
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
prwton prOton
Adv
anasthsas anistEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
BEFORE-most UP-STANDing first raising eulogounta eulogeO

THE
God
THE
Boy
OF-Him
apesteilen auton apostellO autos

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
apostrefein apostrephO
vn Pres Act
ekaston apo hekastos apo

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
commissions
Him
blessING
WH NA
YOU(p) ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
IN
THE
TO-BE-FROM-TURNING EACH to-be-turning-away
FROM
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ponhriwn ponEria
n_ Gen Pl f
umwn
THE
wickednesses
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Acts 4
4:1 lalountwn
laleO
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
epesthsan autois oi ephistEmi autos ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
OF-TALKING of-speaking
WH
YET them of-them

NA
TOWARD THE
PEOPLE
ON-STAND stand-by ierou hieron
to-them them
THE
. And as they spake unto the people, the priests, and the captain of the temple, and the Sadducees, came upon them,
arciereis
iereis hiereus
n_ Nom Pl m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
strathgos tou stratEgos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Gen Sg n
SACRED-ones priests saddoukaioi saddoukaios

n_ Nom Pl m
AND
THE
officer
OF-THE
THE
SADDUCEES
4:2 diaponoumenoi
diaponeomai
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
autous ton autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
beING-THRU-MISERIED being-exasperated kataggellein kataggellO

vn Pres Act
THRU THE because-of en en

Prep
TO-BE-TEACHING them
THE
PEOPLE
AND
Being grieved that they taught the people, and preached through Jesus the resurrection from the dead.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
anastasin thn anastasis ho

ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-DOWN-MESSAGING IN to-be-announcing
THE
JESUS
THE
THE
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones eis eis

Prep
4:3 kai epebalon

kai
Conj
epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autois tas autos ho

ceiras kai eqento cheir kai tithEmi

n_ Acc Pl f Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
thrhsin eis tErEsis eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THEY-ON-CAST(past) to-them they-laid-on them hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
HANDS
AND
THEY-PLACED INTO KEEPing they-were-placed custody
INTO THE
And they laid hands on them, and put [them] in hold unto the next day: for it was now eventide.
aurion aurion
Adv
gar espera gar hespera

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
MORROW WAS it-was
for
EVENING-STAR ALREADY dusk akousantwn ton akouO ho

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
4:4 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
episteusan kai egenhqh pisteuO kai ginomai

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
MANY
NA
YET OF-THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
WH
saying word ws
NA
BELIEVE
AND
WAS-BECOMED was-become
Howbeit many of them which heard the word believed; and the number of the men was about five thousand.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ariqmos arithmos
n_ Nom Sg m
andrwn anEr
n_ Gen Pl m
ws hOs
Adv
ciliades pente chilias pente

n_ Nom Pl f ni numeral
THE
NUMBER
OF-THE
MEN
AS about sunacqhnai sunagO

vn Aor Pas
THOUSAND thousands autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
FIVE
4:5 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
aurion aurion
Adv
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
arcontas kai archOn kai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
. And it came to pass on the morrow, that their rulers, and elders, and scribes,
it-BECAME it-occurred tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
YET ON
THE
MORROW TO-BE-TOGETHER-LED OF-them to-be-gathered grammateis en grammateus en

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
THE
chiefs
AND
presbuterous kai tous presbuteros kai ho

a_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl m
ni proper
THE
SENIORS elders o ho
AND
THE
WRITers scribes
IN
JERUSALEM
4:6 kai annas

kai
Conj
hannas
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kaiafas kai iwannhs kai alexandros kai kai kaiaphas kai iOannEs kai alexandros kai
Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
ANNAS Hannas hsan eimi
THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest genous genos

n_ Gen Sg n
CAIAPHAS
AND
JOHN
AND
ALEXANDER
AND
osoi hosos
pk Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
arcieratikou archieratikos
a_ Gen Sg n
And Annas the high priest, and Caiaphas, and John, and Alexander, and as many as were of the kindred of the high priest, were gathered together at Jerusalem.
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
as-many-as WERE whoever
OUT OF-breed of-race
OF-chief-SACREDic chief-priestly tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
4:7 kai sthsantes

kai
Conj
histEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
epunqanonto punthanomai
en en
Prep
poia poios
pi Dat Sg f
AND
STANDing
them
IN
THE
MIDst
THEY-UP-ASCERTAINED IN they-inquired-to-ascertain umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
?-THE-WHICH what ?
And when they had set them in the midst, they asked, By what power, or by what name, have ye done this?
dunamei h dunamis E
n_ Dat Sg f Part
en en
Prep
poiw poios
pi Dat Sg n
onomati epoihsate touto onoma poieO houtos

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 2 Pl pd Acc Sg n
ABILITY power
OR
IN
?-THE-WHICH NAME what ?
DO
this
YOU(p) ye
AV
Acts 4
4:8 tote petros

tote
Adv
petros
n_ Nom Sg m
plhsqeis plEthO (pimplEmi)

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
then
Peter
BEING-FILLED
OF-spirit
HOLY
said
TOWARD them
Then Peter, filled with the Holy Ghost, said unto them, Ye rulers of the people, and elders of Israel,
arcontes tou archOn ho

n_ Voc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai presbuteroi kai presbuteros

Conj a_ Voc Pl m
chiefs chiefs !
OF-THE
PEOPLE
AND
SENIORS elders ! epi euergesia anqrwpou asqenous en epi euergesia anthrOpos asthenEs en
Prep n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m Prep
9
4:9 ei
ei
Cond
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
shmeron anakrinomeqa sEmeron anakrinO

Adv vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
IF
WE
toDAY
WH
ARE-beING-examinED ON
NA
WELL-ACTion benefaction
OF-human
UN-FIRM infirm
IN
If we this day be examined of the good deed done to the impotent man, by what means he is made whole;
tini tis
pi Dat Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
seswstai
seswtai sOzO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ANY what ?
this-one this-one pasin pas
HAS-been-SAVED
4:10 gnwston estw

gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai panti kai pas

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
a_ Dat Pl m
KNOWN
LET-it-BE let-it-be !
to-ALL
YOU(p) ye
AND
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
PEOPLE
of-ISRAEL that of-Israel
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n


nazwraiou on nazOraios hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
estaurwsate stauroO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
10 Be it known unto you all, and to all the people of Israel, that by the name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth, whom ye crucified, whom God raised from the dead, [even] by him doth this man stand here before you whole.
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ hgeiren egeirO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
NAZARENE
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
impale crucify paresthken paristEmi

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
toutw outos houtos houtos

pd Dat Sg n pd Nom Sg m
WHOM
THE
God
ROUSES
OUT OF-DEAD-ones IN of-dead-ones
this-One this-name
this-one this-man
HAS-BESIDE-STOOD stands-by
enwpion umwn enOpion humeis

Adv pp 2 Gen Pl
ugihs hugiEs
a_ Nom Sg m
OF-YOU(p) SOUND ye estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
4:11 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
liqos lithos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
exouqenhqeis uf umwn exoutheneO hupo humeis

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
this
IS
THE
STONE
THE
One-BEING-scornED being-scorned kefalhn gwnias kephalE gOnia

by
YOU(p) ye
THE
11 This is the stone which was set at nought of you builders, which is become the head of the corner.
oikodomwn oikodomos
n_ Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
genomenos ginomai
eis eis
Prep
ones-HOME-BUILDING THE ones-building
One-BECOMING one-becoming en en
Prep
INTO HEAD
OF-CORNER
4:12 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
allw allos
a_ Dat Sg m
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
swthria oude sOtEria oude

n_ Nom Sg f Adv
gar onoma gar onoma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
AND
NOT
IS there-is upo hupo

Prep
IN
other
NOT-YET-ONE THE any ouranon to ouranos ho

SAVing salvation dedomenon didOmi

NOT-YET for neither en en

Prep
NAME
12 Neither is there salvation in any other: for there is none other name under heaven given among men, whereby we must be saved.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eteron heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
IS there-is en en
Prep
DIFFERENT UNDER THE
heaven
THE
one-HAVING-been-GIVEN IN humans having-been-given among
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
IN
WHICH
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-SAVED US
4:13 qewrountes
theOreO
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
parrhsian kai iwannou kai parrhEsia kai iOannEs kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj
beholdING ones-beholding
YET THE
OF-THE
Peter
boldness
AND
JOHN
AND
katalabomenoi oti anqrwpoi agrammatoi eisin katalambanO hoti anthrOpos agrammatos eimi
vp 2Aor Mid Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
kai idiwtai eqaumazon kai idiOtEs thaumazO

Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
13 Now when they saw the boldness of Peter and John, and perceived that they were unlearned and ignorant men, they marvelled; and they took knowledge of them, that they had been with Jesus.
DOWN-GETTING grasping
that
humans
UN-WRITE illiterate
THEY-ARE
AND
ordinary plain
THEY-MARVELED
AV
Acts 4
epeginwskon te epiginOskO te
vi impf Act 3 Pl Part
autous oti sun autos hoti sun

pp Acc Pl m Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
THEY-ON-KNEW they-recognized
BESIDES them
that
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the sun sun

Prep
JESUS
THEY-WERE
4:14 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
te te
Part
anqrwpon blepontes anthrOpos blepO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
autois estwta autos histEmi

pp Dat Pl m vp Perf Act Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
BESIDES human
lookING observing eicon echO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them anteipein antilegO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
14 And beholding the man which was healed standing with them, they could say nothing against it.
teqerapeumenon ouden therapeuO oudeis

vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg n
one-HAVING-been-curED one-having-been-cured
NOT-YET-ONE THEY-HAD nothing
TO-BE-contradictING
4:15 keleusantes de
keleuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
autous exw tou autos exO ho

pp Acc Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg n
sunedriou apelqein sunedrion aperchomai

n_ Gen Sg n vn 2Aor Act
ORDERing
YET them
OUT
OF-THE
Sanhedrin
TO-BE-FROM-COMING to-be-coming-forth
15 . But when they had commanded them to go aside out of the council, they conferred among themselves,
suneballon sumballO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
THEY-TOGETHER-CAST(past) TOWARD one-another they-parleyed
4:16 legontes
legO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihswmen poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois toutois oti men anthrOpos houtos hoti men

n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m Conj Part
gar gar
Conj
sayING
ANY what ?
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOING to-THE
humans
these
that
INDEED for
gnwston shmeion gegonen gnOstos sEmeion ginomai

a_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
di dia
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ni proper
16 Saying, What shall we do to these men? for that indeed a notable miracle hath been done by them [is] manifest to all them that dwell in Jerusalem; and we cannot deny [it].
KNOWN
SIGN
HAS-BECOME has-occurred dunameqa dunamai
THRU them through arneisqai arneomai
to-ALL
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING JERUSALEM ones-dwelling at-Jerusalem
faneron kai ou phaneros kai ou

a_ Nom Sg n Conj Part Neg
vn Pres midD/pasD
apparent
AND
NOT
WE-ARE-ABLE we-can epi pleion epi polus

Prep
TO-BE-disownING to-be-denying-it dianemhqh dianemO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
4:17 all ina

alla
Conj
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
but
THAT NO
ON
MORE
MAY-BE-BEING-THRU-APPROPRIATED INTO THE it-may-be-being-disseminated lalein laleO

vn Pres Act
PEOPLE
17 But that it spread no further among the people, let us straitly threaten them, that they speak henceforth to no man in this name.
apeilhswmeqa apeileO
vs Aor Mid 1 Pl
autois mhketi autos mEketi

pp Dat Pl m Adv
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
onomati toutw onoma houtos

n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n
WE-SHOULD-BE-threatenING to-them them mhdeni mEdeis

a_ Dat Sg m
NO-NOT-STILL TO-BE-TALKING ON by-no-means-still to-be-speaking
THE
NAME
this
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
to-NO-YET-ONE OF-humans to-any humans
4:18 kai kalesantes autous parhggeilan

kai
Conj
NA
kaleO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autos
pp Acc Pl m
paraggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kaqolou katholou
Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
fqeggesqai phtheggomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
AND
CALLing
them
THEY-charge
WH
THE
NA
DOWN-WHOLE NO sweeping tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-UTTERING
18 And they called them, and commanded them not to speak at all nor teach in the name of Jesus.
mhde mEde
Conj
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
tou
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
NO-YET TO-BE-TEACHING ON nor-yet
THE
NAME
OF-THE
JESUS
4:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai iwannhs apokriqentes eipon kai iOannEs apokrinomai legO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor pasD Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
autous ei autos ei
pp Acc Pl m Cond
THE
YET Peter
AND
JOHN
answerING
said
TOWARD them
IF
19 But Peter and John answered and said unto them, Whether it be right in the sight of God to hearken unto you more than unto God, judge ye.
dikaion estin dikaios eimi


Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
mallon h mallon E
Adv Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
JUST
it-IS
God
OF-YOU(p) TO-BE-HEARING RATHER ye
OR OF-THE than the
AV
Acts 4
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
krinate krinO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
God
JUDGE-YE judge-ye ! dunameqa dunamai

4:20 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar hmeis gar hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
eidamen eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
kai hkousamen mh kai akouO mE

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Pl Part Neg
20 For we cannot but speak the things which we have seen and heard.
NOT
ARE-ABLE can
for
WE
WHICH which(p)
WE-PERCEIVE AND
WE-HEAR hear
NO
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-TALKING
4:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
prosapeilhsamenoi apelusan autous mhden prosapeileO apoluO autos mEdeis

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
euriskontes to heuriskO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
THE-ones the-ones
YET TOWARD-threatening menacing-them
FROM-LOOSE them release ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
NO-YET-ONE FINDING nothing laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
pws kolaswntai pOs kolazO

Adv Int vs Aor Mid 3 Pl
autous dia autos dia

pp Acc Pl m Prep
oti pantes hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
edoxazon doxazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
21 So when they had further threatened them, they let them go, finding nothing how they might punish them, because of the people: for all [men] glorified God for that which was done.
how how ? ton ho
THEY-SHOULD-BE-CHASTENING them
THRU THE because-of
PEOPLE
that
ALL
esteemED glorified
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
gegonoti ginomai
vp 2Perf Act Dat Sg n
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
God
ON
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred pleionwn polus

a_ Gen Pl n Cmp
4:22 etwn
etos
n_ Gen Pl n
gar hn gar eimi

tesserakonta o tesserakonta ho
anqrwpos ef anthrOpos epi

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
22 For the man was above forty years old, on whom this miracle of healing was shewed.
OF-YEARS for
WAS
OF-MORE more-than
FOUR-TY forty ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
human
ON
WHOM
gegonei ginomai
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
shmeion touto sEmeion houtos

iasews iasis
n_ Gen Sg f
HAD-BECOME THE had-occurred
SIGN
this
OF-THE
HEALing
4:23 apoluqentes
apoluO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
idious idios
a_ Acc Pl m
kai aphggeilan kai apaggellO

osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
BEING-FROM-LOOSED YET THEY-CAME being-released pros pros

Prep
TOWARD THE
OWN own(p)
AND
THEY-FROM-MESSAGE as-much-as report whatever
23 . And being let go, they went to their own company, and reported all that the chief priests and elders had said unto them.
autous oi autos ho
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi eipan presbuteros legO

a_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
TOWARD them
THE
THE
SENIORS elders fwnhn pros phOnE pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
say
4:24 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akousantes omoqumadon hran akouO homothumadon airO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE-ones the-ones kai eipan kai legO

Conj
YET HEARing
LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
LIFT lift-up poihsas poieO
SOUND voice ton ho
TOWARD THE
God
despota su despotEs su
n_ Voc Sg m pp 2 Nom Sg
ouranon kai thn ouranos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
24 And when they heard that, they lifted up their voice to God with one accord, and said, Lord, thou [art] God, which hast made heaven, and earth, and the sea, and all that in them is:
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
t_ Acc Sg m
AND
say
OWNer !
YOU
THE
One-making one-making ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
heaven
AND
THE
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai panta thalassa kai pas

n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl n
LAND earth
AND
THE
SEA
AND
ALL
THE
IN
them
4:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
dia dia
Prep

stomatos dauid stoma dauid

THE the-one paidos pais

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
FATHER
OF-US
THRU spirit through ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
HOLY
OF-MOUTH by-mouth kai laoi kai laos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
of-DAVID David
25 Who by the mouth of thy servant David hast said, Why did the heathen rage, and the people imagine vain things?
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eipwn legO
ina hina
Conj
efruaxan eqnh phruassO ethnos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl n
boy
OF-YOU
sayING
THAT ANY why ?
SNORT rage
NATIONS
AND
PEOPLES
AV
Acts 4
emelethsan kena meletaO kenos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl n
meditate
EMPTIES empty-things basileis ths basileus ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
4:26 paresthsan oi
paristEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
arcontes archOn
n_ Nom Pl m
BESIDE-STAND stand-by sunhcqhsan sunagO

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
KINGS
OF-THE
LAND
AND
THE
chiefs
26 The kings of the earth stood up, and the rulers were gathered together against the Lord, and against his Christ.
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kata tou kai kata ho

Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER-LED ON were-gathered cristou autou christos autos

THE
SAME DOWN same-place against
OF-THE the
Master Lord
AND
DOWN against
OF-THE the
ANOINTED Christ
OF-Him
4:27 sunhcqhsan
sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
gar ep gar epi

Conj Prep
alhqeias en alEtheia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg m
WERE-TOGETHER-LED for were-gathered paida pais

n_ Acc Sg m
ON
TRUTH
IN
THE
city
this
ON
THE
HOLY
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
ecrisas chriO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
kai pontios pilatos kai pontios pilatos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
27 For of a truth against thy holy child Jesus, whom thou hast anointed, both Herod, and Pontius Pilate, with the Gentiles, and the people of Israel, were gathered together,
Boy
OF-YOU
JESUS
WHOM
YOU-ANOINT HEROD
BESIDES AND bsboth
Pontius
PILATE
sun sun
Prep
eqnesin ethnos
n_ Dat Pl n
kai laois kai laos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
TOGETHER to-NATIONS AND togetherwith nations
PEOPLES
of-ISRAEL of-Israel ceir cheir

n_ Nom Sg f
4:28 poihsai osa

poieO
vn Aor Act
hosos
pk Acc Pl n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
boulh boulE
n_ Nom Sg f
NA
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
28 For to do whatsoever thy hand and thy counsel determined before to be done.
TO-DO
as-much-as THE whatever genesqai ginomai

vn 2Aor midD
HAND
OF-YOU
AND
THE
COUNSEL
OF-YOU
prowrisen proorizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
BEFORE-SEEizES TO-BE-BECOMING designates-beforehand to-be-occurring
4:29 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
nun kurie nun kurios

Adv n_ Voc Sg m
epide epeidon
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
epi tas epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl f
apeilas autwn apeilE autos

kai dos kai didOmi

AND
THE the(p)
NOW Master ! Lord !
ON-PERCEIVE ON take-notice-you !
THE
threats
OF-them
AND
BE-GIVING be-you-endowing ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
29 And now, Lord, behold their threatenings: and grant unto thy servants, that with all boldness they may speak thy word,
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
doulois sou doulos su

meta parrhsias pashs meta parrhEsia pas

Prep n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE the
SLAVES
OF-YOU
WITH
boldness
NA
EVERY all
TO-BE-TALKING THE to-be-speaking ekteinein ekteinO

vn Pres Act
saying word se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-YOU
4:30 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
iasin iasis
n_ Acc Sg f
IN
THE
THE
HAND
OF-YOU
TO-BE-OUT-STRETCHING YOU to-be-stretching-out tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
INTO HEALing
30 By stretching forth thine hand to heal; and that signs and wonders may be done by the name of thy holy child Jesus.
kai shmeia kai sEmeion

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
kai terata ginesqai kai teras ginomai

Conj n_ Nom Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD
dia dia
Prep
onomatos tou onoma ho

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg m
AND
SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES TO-BE-BECOMING THRU THE to-be-occurring through ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
NAME
OF-THE
HOLY
paidos pais
n_ Gen Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
Boy
OF-YOU
JESUS
4:31 kai dehqentwn

kai
Conj
deomai
vp Aor pasD Gen Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
esaleuqh saleuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
topos topos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
AND
OF-BEING-BOUND of-beseeching
them of-them
WAS-SHAKEN THE
PLACE
IN
WHICH
THEY-WERE
31 And when they had prayed, the place was shaken where they were assembled together; and they were all filled with the Holy Ghost, and they spake
AV
Acts 4
sunhgmenoi sunagO
kai eplhsqhsan kai plEthO (pimplEmi)

apantes tou hapas ho

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos kai pneuma kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
the word of God with boldness.
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-LED AND having-been-gathered elaloun laleO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-FILLED ALL(emph.)
OF-THE
HOLY
spirit
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
meta parrhsias meta parrhEsia

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
THEY-TALKED THE they-spoke
saying word
OF-THE
God
WITH
boldness
4:32 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg n
de de
Conj
plhqous twn plEthos ho

pisteusantwn hn pisteuO eimi

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai yuch kai psuchE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
YET multitude
OF-THE
ones-BELIEVing ones-believing twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
WAS
HEART
AND
soul
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai oude kai oude

Conj Adv
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
uparcontwn autw huparchO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n pp Dat Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
32 . And the multitude of them that believed were of one heart and of one soul: neither said any [of them] that ought of the things which he possessed was his own; but they had all things common.
ONE
AND
NOT-YET ONE not-yeteven autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
ANY
WH
OF-THE
NA
to-him
said
OWN
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
all hn alla eimi

panta
apanta hapas
a_ Nom Pl n
koina koinos
a_ Nom Pl n
TO-BE
but
WAS
to-them
ALL(emph.) all(emph.)-things
COMMON
WH
4:33 kai dunamei megalh apedidoun to

kai
Conj
dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
mega
a_ Dat Sg f
apodidOmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
marturion oi marturion ho
n_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi apostolos
n_ Nom Pl m
tou
AND
WH
to-ABILITY to-power
WH WH
GREAT
WH
FROM-GAVE rendered
NA
THE
NA
witness testimony
THE
NA
NA
33 And with great power gave the apostles witness of the resurrection of the Lord Jesus: and great grace was upon them all.
kuriou ihsou ths anastasews
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anastasews tou anastasis ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
NA
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
te te
Part
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
epi pantas autous epi pas autos

Prep a_ Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m
grace
BESIDES GREAT
WAS
ON
ALL
them
4:34 oude
oude
Adv
gar endehs gar endeEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autois osoi autos hosos

pp Dat Pl m pk Nom Pl m
gar kthtores gar ktEtOr

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
NOT-YET for neither cwriwn chOrion

n_ Gen Pl n
IN-BOUND indigent
ANY
WAS there-was pwlountes pOleO

IN them among eferon pherO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
as-many-as for whoever tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
ACQUIRers
h E
Part
oikiwn oikia
n_ Gen Pl f
uphrcon huparchO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
timas timE
n_ Acc Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
34 Neither was there any among them that lacked: for as many as were possessors of lands or houses sold them, and brought the prices of the things that were sold,
OF-freeholds OR
OF-HOMES belongED of-houses belonged-to
SELLING selling-these
THEY-CARRIED THE they-brought
VALUES price(p)
OF-THE
pipraskomenwn pipraskO
ones-beING-disposED-of ones-being-disposed-of
4:35 kai etiqoun

kai
Conj
tithEmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
para para
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn diedideto apostolos diadidOmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
AND
THEY-PLACED BESIDE THE placed-it an an

Part
FEET
OF-THE
WAS-THRU-GIVEN YET it-was-distributed
35 And laid [them] down at the apostles'feet: and distribution was made unto every man according as he had need.
ekastw kaqoti hekastos kathoti

a_ Dat Sg m Adv
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
eicen echO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
to-EACH
DOWN-that EVER ANY forasmuch-as anyone o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
need
HAD
4:36 iwshf de
iOsEph
ni proper
de
Conj
epiklhqeis epikaleO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
barnabas apo barnabas apo

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn o apostolos hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Nom Sg n
JOSEPH
YET THE
one-BEING-ON-CALLED Barnabas one-being-surnamed
FROM THE
WHICH
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
meqermhneuomenon uios methermEneuO huios

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
paraklhsews paraklEsis
n_ Gen Sg f
leuiths kuprios tw leuitEs kuprios ho

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n
genei genos
n_ Dat Sg n
36 And Joses, who by the apostles was surnamed Barnabas, (which is, being interpreted, The son of consolation,) a Levite, [and] of the country of Cyprus,
IS
SON
OF-BESIDE-CALLing LEVITE of-consolation
CYPRIAN
to-THE
breed race
AV
Acts 4 - Acts 5
4:37 uparcontos
huparchO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
agrou agros
n_ Gen Sg m
pwlhsas pOleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hnegken pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
crhma chrEma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
37 Having land, sold [it], and brought the money, and laid [it] at the apostles'feet.
belongING
WH
to-him
NA
OF-FIELD field tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
SELLing
CARRIES brings twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
money
AND
eqhken tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
para
pros pros
Prep
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
apostolwn apostolos
n_ Gen Pl m
PLACES places-it
TOWARD
THE
FEET
OF-THE
AV
Acts 5
5:1 anhr
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
onomati sun onoma sun

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
sapfirh sapphirE
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki autou gunE autos

. But a certain man named Ananias, with Sapphira his wife, sold a possession,
MAN
YET ANY certain
ANANIAS
to-NAME
TOGETHER to-SAPPHIRA THE with-Sapphira
WOMAN wife
OF-him
epwlhsen kthma pOleO ktEma

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n
SELLS
ACQUISITION
5:2 kai enosfisato apo

kai
Conj
nosphizO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
timhs timE
n_ Gen Sg f
suneiduihs suneideO
vp Perf Act Gen Sg f
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos kai gunE kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
AND
EMBEZZLES
FROM THE
VALUE price para para

Prep
OF-HAVING-been-conscious AND also podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
THE
WOMAN wife
AND
And kept back [part] of the price, his wife also being privy [to it], and brought a certain part, and laid [it] at the apostles'feet.
enegkas pherO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn eqhken apostolos tithEmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
CARRYing bringing
PART
ANY certain o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
BESIDE THE
FEET
OF-THE
PLACES places-it
3
5:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
anania hananias
n_ Voc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eplhrwsen o plEroO ho
said
YET THE
Peter
ANANIAS !
FILLS
THE
But Peter said, Ananias, why hath Satan filled thine heart to lie to the Holy Ghost, and to keep back [part] of the price of the land?
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian sou kardia su

yeusasqai se pseudomai su
vn Aor midD pp 2 Acc Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma to pneuma ho
SATAN (Heb. adversary) THE Satan agion hagios

a_ Acc Sg n
HEART
OF-YOU
TO-FALSify
YOU
THE
spirit
THE
kai nosfisasqai apo kai nosphizO apo

Conj vn Aor Mid Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
timhs timE
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
cwriou chOrion
n_ Gen Sg n
HOLY
AND
TO-EMBEZZLE
FROM THE
VALUE price
OF-THE
freehold
5:4 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
menon menO
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
emenen menO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai praqen kai pipraskO

Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sh sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
NOT(emph.) REMAINING not(emph.) ? exousia uphrcen exousia huparchO

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
to-YOU
it-REMAINED
AND
BEING-disposED-of IN
THE
YOUR
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oti eqou hoti tithEmi

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pragma pragma
n_ Acc Sg n
Whiles it remained, was it not thine own? and after it was sold, was it not in thine own power? why hast thou conceived this thing in thine heart? thou hast not lied unto men, but unto God.
authority right touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
it-belongED
ANY why ?
that
YOU-PLACED
IN
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
THE
PRACTISE matter
ouk ou
Part Neg
eyeusw pseudomai
vi Aor midD 2 Sg
anqrwpois alla tw anthrOpos alla ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
this
NOT
YOU-FALSify you-lie de de
Conj
to-humans
but
to-THE
God
5:5 akouwn
akouO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
logous toutous peswn logos houtos piptO

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
HEARING
YET THE
ANANIAS
THE
sayings words
these
FALLING falling-down akouontas akouO

And Ananias hearing these words fell down, and gave up the ghost: and great fear came on all them that heard these things.
exeyuxen ekpsuchO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg

fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
megas mega
a_ Nom Sg m
epi pantas tous epi pas ho

Prep a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
he-OUT-souls AND gives-up-the-soul
BECAME
FEAR
GREAT
ON
ALL
THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing-it kai exenegkantes kai ekpherO

6
5:6 anastantes
anistEmi
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
newteroi neos
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
sunesteilan sustellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
And the young men arose, wound him up, and carried [him] out, and buried [him].
UP-STANDing rising eqayan thaptO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YET THE
YOUNGer-ones younger-men
THEY-TOGETHER-PUT him enshroud
AND
OUT-CARRYing carrying-out-him
THEY-entomb they-entomb-him
5:7 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ws hOs
Adv
wrwn hOra
n_ Gen Pl f
triwn treis
n_ Gen Pl f
diasthma kai h diastEma kai ho

n_ Nom Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
BECAME it-occurred
YET AS HOURS about of-hours
THREE
THRU-STAND interval
AND
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-him
NO
And it was about the space of three hours after, when his wife, not knowing what was done, came in.
AV
Acts 5
eiduia eidO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gegonos ginomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-aware
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred pros pros

Prep
INTO-CAME entered eipe legO

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
5:8 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ei ei
Cond
tosoutou to tosoutos ho
pd Gen Sg n t_ Acc Sg n
answerED
YET TOWARD her
Peter
to-ME me
IF
OF-so-much
THE
And Peter answered unto her, Tell me whether ye sold the land for so much? And she said, Yea, for so much.
cwrion apedosqe chOrion apodidOmi

n_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Mid 2 Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
nai tosoutou nai tosoutos

Part pd Gen Sg n
freehold
YE-FROM-GAVE THE ye-took-pay de de

Conj
YET said she-said pros pros

Prep
YEA yes ti tis
OF-so-much
5:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
oti sunefwnhqh umin hoti sumphOneO humeis

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
peirasai peirazO
vn Aor Act
pi Nom Sg n
THE
YET Peter
TOWARD her
ANY why ? oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
that
it-WAS-agreED
to-YOU(p) to-ye
TO-try
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma kuriou pneuma kurios

idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
podes pous
n_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
qayantwn thaptO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
Then Peter said unto her, How is it that ye have agreed together to tempt the Spirit of the Lord? behold, the feet of them which have buried thy husband [are] at the door, and shall carry thee out.
THE
spirit
OF-Master of-Lord epi th epi ho

Prep
BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! qura thura

n_ Dat Sg f
FEET
OF-THE
ones-entombing ones-entombing se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai exoisousin kai ekpherO

t_ Dat Sg f
MAN husband
OF-YOU
ON
THE
DOOR
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-CARRYING YOU they-shall-be-carrying-out podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
5:10 epesen
piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
paracrhma pros parachrEma pros

Adv Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai exeyuxen kai ekpsuchO

she-FALLS
YET instantly
TOWARD THE
FEET
OF-him
AND
OUT-souls gives-up-the-soul
eiselqontes de eiserchomai de
vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
neaniskoi euron neaniskos heuriskO

authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
nekran kai exenegkantes nekros kai ekpherO

a_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
10 Then fell she down straightway at his feet, and yielded up the ghost: and the young men came in, and found her dead, and, carrying [her] forth, buried [her] by her husband.
INTO-COMING entering eqayan thaptO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YET THE
YOUTHS
THEY-FOUND her found auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
DEAD
AND
OUT-CARRYing carrying-out-her
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-entomb TOWARD THE they-entomb-her
MAN husband megas mega
OF-her
5:11 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
ef epi
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian kai epi pantas ekklEsia kai epi pas

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Prep a_ Acc Pl m
a_ Nom Sg m
11 And great fear came upon all the church, and upon as many as heard these things.
AND
BECAME
FEAR
GREAT
ON
WHOLE
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
AND
ON
ALL
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
akouontas akouO
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing de de
Conj
these these-things ceirwn twn cheir ho

n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl m
5:12 dia
dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
apostolwn egineto apostolos ginomai

shmeia sEmeion
n_ Nom Pl n
kai terata kai teras

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
THRU YET THE through polla polus

a_ Nom Pl n
HANDS
OF-THE
BECAME occurred
WH
SIGNS
NA
AND
MIRACLES
12 . And by the hands of the apostles were many signs and wonders wrought among the people; (and they were all with one accord in Solomon's porch.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai hsan kai eimi

omoqumadon homothumadon
Adv
pantes
apantes hapas
a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
MANY
IN THE among stoa stoa

n_ Dat Sg f
PEOPLE
AND
THEY-WERE LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord
ALL(emph.)
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
solomwntos solomOn
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
portico
OF-SOLOMON
5:13 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
loipwn oudeis loipon oudeis

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Nom Sg f
etolma tolmaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kollasqai kollaO
vn Pres Pas
autois all emegalunen autos alla megalunO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
13 And of the rest durst no man join himself to them: but the people magnified them.
OF-THE
YET rest rest(p)
NOT-YET-ONE DARED no-one
TO-BE-beING-JOINED to-them
but
magnifiES
AV
Acts 5
autous o autos ho
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
them
THE
PEOPLE
5:14 mallon de
mallon
Adv
de
Conj
prosetiqento pisteuontes tw prostithEmi pisteuO ho

vi impf Pas 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
plhqh plEthos
n_ Nom Pl n
andrwn te anEr te
n_ Gen Pl m Part
RATHER
YET were-addED
to-THE
Master Lord
multitudes
OF-MEN
BESIDES bsboth
14 And believers were the more added to the Lord, multitudes both of men and women.)
kai gunaikwn kai gunE

Conj n_ Gen Pl f
AND
OF-WOMEN women kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
5:15 wste
hOste
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
plateias ekferein plateia ekpherO

n_ Acc Pl f vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
asqeneis kai asthenEs kai

a_ Acc Pl m Conj
AS-BESIDES AND so-that also tiqenai tithEmi

vn Pres Act
INTO THE
BROADS squares
TO-BE-OUT-CARRYING THE to-be-carrying-out ercomenou erchomai

UN-FIRM infirm-ones petrou petros

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
epi klinariwn kai krabattwn ina epi klinidion kai krabattos hina
Prep n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj
kan kan
Cond Con
15 Insomuch that they brought forth the sick into the streets, and laid [them] on beds and couches, that at the least the shadow of Peter passing by might overshadow some of them.
TO-PLACE ON to-place-them h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
cots
WH
AND
PALLETS
NA
THAT OF-COMING
OF-Peter
AND-[IF]-EVER and-if-ever
skia skia
n_ Nom Sg f
episkiasei
episkiash episkiazO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THE
SHADE shadow de de
Conj
SHOULD-BE-ON-SHADING should-be-overshadowing kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
to-ANY any
OF-them
5:16 sunhrceto
sunerchomai
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
perix polewn ierousalhm perix polis ierosoluma

Adv n_ Gen Pl f ni proper
TOGETHER-CAME came-together ferontes pherO

YET AND also
THE
multitude
OF-THE
ABOUT
cities
JERUSALEM of-Jerusalem
asqeneis kai ocloumenous asthenEs kai ochleO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
pneumatwn akaqartwn oitines pneuma akathartos hostis

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Pl m
16 There came also a multitude [out] of the cities round about unto Jerusalem, bringing sick folks, and them which were vexed with unclean spirits: and they were healed every one.
CARRYING bringing
UN-FIRM infirm-ones
AND
ones-beING-molestED UNDER spirits ones-being-molested by
UN-clean unclean
WHO-ANY who-any
eqerapeuonto apantes therapeuO hapas

vi impf Pas 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
were-curED
ALL(emph.)
5:17 anastas
anistEmi
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
UP-STANDing rising h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
YET THE
ALL
THE-ones the-ones
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him zhlou zElos

n_ Gen Sg m
17 . Then the high priest rose up, and all they that were with him, (which is the sect of the Sadducees,) and were filled with indignation,
ousa eimi
airesis twn hairesis ho

saddoukaiwn eplhsqhsan saddoukaios plEthO (pimplEmi)

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
BEING
preference sect tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
OF-THE
SADDUCEES
THEY-ARE-FILLED OF-BOILing of-jealousy apostolous kai eqento apostolos kai tithEmi

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
5:18 kai epebalon

kai
Conj
epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ceiras epi tous cheir epi ho

n_ Acc Pl f Prep t_ Acc Pl m
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
AND
THEY-ON-CAST(past) THE they-laid-on
18 And laid their hands on the apostles, and put them in the common prison.
HANDS
ON
THE
AND
PLACED
them
en en
Prep
thrhsei dhmosia tErEsis dEmosios

IN
KEEP custody
PUBLIC
WH NA
5:19 aggelos
aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
nuktos nux
n_ Gen Sg f
hnoixen
anoixas anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
quras thura
n_ Acc Pl f
MESSENGER YET OF-Master of-Lord ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THRU NIGHT during te te

Part
UP-OPENing opening autous eipen autos legO

THE
DOORS
19 But the angel of the Lord by night opened the prison doors, and brought them forth, and said,
fulakhs phulakE
n_ Gen Sg f
exagagwn exagO
OF-THE
GUARD-house OUT-LEADING jail leading-out
BESIDES them
said he-said
AV
Acts 5
5:20 poreuesqe
poreuomai
kai staqentes kai histEmi

Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
laleite laleO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
20 Go, stand and speak in the temple to the people all the words of this life.
BE-YE-GOING be-ye-going ! panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
AND
BEING-STOOD standing ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
BE-YE-TALKING IN be-ye-speaking ! tauths houtos

pd Gen Sg f
THE
SACRED-place to-THE sanctuary
PEOPLE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
ALL
THE
declarations OF-THE
LIFE
this
5:21 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
upo hupo
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
orqron orthros
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
HEARing hearing-this
YET THEY-INTO-CAME UNDER THE they-entered by o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
EARLY INTO THE early-morning kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
SACRED-place AND sanctuary autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
edidaskon paragenomenos de didaskO paraginomai de

vi impf Act 3 Pl vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
THEY-TAUGHT taught
YET THE
chief-SACRED-one AND chief-priest thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE the-ones
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him uiwn huios

n_ Gen Pl m
21 And when they heard [that], they entered into the temple early in the morning, and taught. But the high priest came, and they that were with him, and called the council together, and all the senate of the children of Israel, and sent to the prison to have them brought.
sunekalesan to sugkaleO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
sunedrion kai pasan sunedrion kai pas

n_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg f
gerousian twn gerousia ho

israhl israEl
ni proper
TOGETHER-CALL call-together
THE
Sanhedrin
AND
EVERY entire
THE
VETERAN senate autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
OF-THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL of-Israel

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
desmwthrion acqhnai desmOtErion agO

n_ Acc Sg n vn Aor Pas
AND
THEY-commission INTO THE they-dispatch de de

Conj
BIND-place prison
TO-BE-LED them to-be-led-forth euron heuriskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
5:22 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
paragenomenoi uphretai ouc paraginomai hupEretEs ou

vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Part Neg
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
22 But when the officers came, and found them not in the prison, they returned, and told,
THE
YET BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along anastreyantes de anastrephO de

subservients deputies aphggeilan apaggellO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
NOT
FOUND
them
IN
THE
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
GUARD-house UP-TURNing jail returning
YET THEY-FROM-MESSAGE they-report desmwthrion euromen desmOtErion heuriskO

5:23 legontes
legO
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
kekleismenon kleiO
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
sayING
that
THE
BIND-place prison
WE-FOUND
HAVING-been-LOCKED IN
EVERY all de de
Conj
asfaleia kai tous asphaleia kai ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Acc Pl m
fulakas estwtas phulax histEmi

n_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Act Acc Pl m
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
qurwn thura
n_ Gen Pl f
anoixantes anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
esw esO
Adv
23 Saying, The prison truly found we shut with all safety, and the keepers standing without before the doors: but when we had opened, we found no man within.
UN-TOTTER security oudena oudeis

a_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
GUARDS
ON
THE
DOORS
UP-OPENing opening
YET within
euromen heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
NOT-YET-ONE WE-FOUND no-one
5:24 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
hkousan tous akouO ho

logous toutous o logos houtos ho

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
strathgos tou stratEgos ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg n
AS
YET THEY-HEAR THE
sayings words
these
THE
BESIDES officer bsboth autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
OF-THE
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
dihporoun diaporeO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
peri peri
Prep
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
an an
Part
24 Now when the high priest and the captain of the temple and the chief priests heard these things, they doubted of them whereunto this would grow.
SACRED-place AND sanctuary genoito ginomai

vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THE
chief-SACRED-ones were-bewilderED ABOUT them chief-priests concerning
ANY what ?
EVER
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING this may-be-becoming of-this
5:25 paragenomenos de
paraginomai
de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois oti idou autos hoti idou

pp Dat Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
YET ANY someone
he-FROM-MESSAGES to-them reports
that
25 Then came one and told them, saying, Behold, the men whom ye put in prison are standing in the temple, and teaching the people.
AV
Acts 5
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
eqesqe tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 2 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
MEN
WHOM
YE-PLACED
IN
THE
GUARD-house ARE jail laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
THE
estwtes histEmi
kai didaskontes ton kai didaskO ho

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
AND
TEACHING
THE
PEOPLE
5:26 tote apelqwn

tote
Adv
aperchomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
strathgos sun stratEgos sun

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
uphretais hgen hupEretEs agO

n_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
then
FROM-COMING coming-forth
THE
officer
TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the gar ton gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
subservients deputies mh mE
Part Neg
LED
26 . Then went the captain with the officers, and brought them without violence: for they feared the people, lest they should have been stoned.
autous ou autos ou
meta bias meta bia

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
efobounto phobeO
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
them
NOT
WITH
FORCE violence
THEY-FEARED
for
THE
PEOPLE
NO
liqasqwsin lithazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEING-STONED
5:27 agagontes
agO
de de
Conj
autous esthsan autos histEmi

pp Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw kai ephrwthsen sunedrion kai eperOtaO

LEADING
YET them
THEY-STAND IN they-stand-them
THE
Sanhedrin
AND
inquirES-of
27 And when they had brought them, they set [them] before the council: and the high priest asked them,
autous o autos ho
n_ Nom Sg m
them
THE
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest
NA
5:28 legwn
legO
ou ou
Part Neg
paraggelia parhggeilamen umin paraggelia paraggellO humeis

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
didaskein didaskO
vn Pres Act
sayING
NOT
charge to-charge
WE-charge
to-YOU(p) ye
NO
TO-BE-TEACHING
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg n
onomati toutw kai idou onoma houtos kai idou

n_ Dat Sg n pd Dat Sg n Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
peplhrwkate thn plEroO ho

vi Perf Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
ni proper
28 Saying, Did not we straitly command you that ye should not teach in this name? and, behold, ye have filled Jerusalem with your doctrine, and intend to bring this man's blood upon us.
ON
THE
NAME
this
AND
BE-PERCEIVING YE-HAVE-FILLED lo ! epagagein epagO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
JERUSALEM
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
didachs umwn didachE humeis

kai boulesqe kai boulomai

ef epi
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE
TEACHing
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
YE-ARE-intendING
TO-BE-ON-LEADING ON to-be-bringing-on
US
THE
BLOOD
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou toutou anthrOpos houtos

OF-THE
Human
this
5:29 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi eipan apostolos legO

peiqarcein peitharcheO
vn Pres Act
answerING
YET Peter
AND
THE
say
TO-BE-yieldING
29 Then Peter and the [other] apostles answered and said, We ought to obey God rather than men.
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
mallon h mallon E
Adv Part
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
to-God
RATHER
OR to-humans than paterwn hmwn patEr hemeis

5:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
God
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
ROUSES
JESUS
WHOM
YOU(p) ye
30 The God of our fathers raised up Jesus, whom ye slew and hanged on a tree.
dieceirisasqe kremasantes epi xulou diacheirizO kremannumi epi xulon

vi Aor Mid 2 Pl vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg n
THRU-HANDize lay-hands-on
HANGing hanging-him
ON
WOOD pole
AV
Acts 5
5:31 touton o
houtos
pd Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
archgon archEgos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai swthra uywsen kai sOtEr hupsoO

Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
this-One this autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THE
God
ORIGIN-LEADer AND inaugurator
SAViour
HEIGHTens exalts
to-THE
RIGHT right-hand amartiwn hamartia

n_ Gen Pl f
31 Him hath God exalted with his right hand [to be] a Prince and a Saviour, for to give repentance to Israel, and forgiveness of sins.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
dounai metanoian tw didOmi metanoia ho

vn 2Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
israhl kai afesin israEl kai aphesis

ni proper Conj n_ Acc Sg f
OF-Him
OF-THE
TO-GIVE
to-THE
ISRAEL
AND
FROM-LETTing OF-misses pardon of-sins pneuma pneuma

n_ Acc Sg n
32 And we are his witnesses of these things; and [so is] also the Holy Ghost, whom God hath given to them that obey him.
5:32 kai hmeis

kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
martures twn martus ho

rhmatwn toutwn kai to rhEma houtos kai ho

n_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n Conj t_ Acc Sg n
AND
WE
ARE
witnesses
OF-THE
declarations
these
AND
THE
spirit
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
peiqarcousin autw peitharcheO autos

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m pp Dat Sg m
THE
HOLY
WHICH
GIVES
THE
God
to-THE
ones-yieldING ones-yielding anelein anaireO

vn 2Aor Act
to-Him
5:33 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akousantes dieprionto akouO diapriO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Pas 3 Pl
kai eboulonto kai boulomai

autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
33 When they heard [that], they were cut [to the heart], and took counsel to slay them.
THE
YET ones-HEARing ones-hearing de de

Conj
were-THRU-SAWN AND were-harrowed en en

Prep
THEY-intendED
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING them to-be-assassinating

34 Then stood there up one in the council, a Pharisee, named Gamaliel, a doctor of the law, had in reputation among all the people, and commanded to put the apostles forth a little space;
5:34 anastas
anistEmi
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw farisaios onomati gamalihl sunedrion pharisaios onoma gamaliEl

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg n ni proper
UP-STANDing rising
YET ANY certain
IN
THE
Sanhedrin
PHARISEE
to-NAME
GAMALIEL
nomodidaskalos timios nomodidaskalos timios

panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
ekeleusen exw keleuO exO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
bracu brachus
a_ Acc Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
LAW-TEACHer teacher-of-the-law
VALUable honored
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
PEOPLE
he-ORDERS orders
OUT BIT outside
THE
anqrwpous poihsai anthrOpos poieO

n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
humans
TO-DO
5:35 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
te te
Part
pros pros
Prep
autous andres autos anEr

pp Acc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m
israhlitai prosecete eautois israElitEs prosechO heautou

n_ Voc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl pf 3 Dat Pl m
epi epi
Prep
he-said
BESIDES TOWARD them
MEN men ! mellete mellO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-YE-heedING be-ye-heeding !
to-selves ON to-yourselves
35 And said unto them, Ye men of Israel, take heed to yourselves what ye intend to do as touching these men.
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois toutois ti anthrOpos houtos tis

n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m pi Acc Sg n
prassein prassO
vn Pres Act
THE
humans
these
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-ABOUT TO-BE-PRACTISING ye-are-being-about to-be-committing qeudas theudas

n_ Nom Sg m
5:36 pro
pro
Prep
gar toutwn twn gar houtos ho

Conj pd Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn anesth hEmera anistEmi

n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
legwn legO
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
BEFORE for
OF-these these w hos

pr Dat Sg m
THE
DAYS
UP-STOOD rose
THEUDAS
sayING
TO-BE
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
prosekliqh prosklinO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
andrwn ariqmos anEr arithmos

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
tetrakosiwn os tetrakosioi hos

n_ Gen Pl n pr Nom Sg m
ANY someone anhreqh anaireO
self himself
to-WHOM
WAS-TOWARD-CLINED OF-MEN was-inclined osoi hosos

pk Nom Pl m
NUMBER
AS OF-FOUR-hundred about four-hundred
WHO
36 For before these days rose up Theudas, boasting himself to be somebody; to whom a number of men, about four hundred, joined themselves: who was slain; and all, as many as obeyed him, were scattered, and brought to nought.
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
epeiqonto peithO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dieluqhsan dialuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
kai egenonto kai ginomai

Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
WAS-UP-LIFTED AND was-assassinated eis eis

Prep
ALL
as-many-as were-PERSUADED to-him
WERE-THRU-LOOSED AND were-disbanded
BECAME
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
INTO NOT-YET-ONE nothing
5:37 meta touton anesth

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Sg m
anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ioudas ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
galilaios en galilaios en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ths hEmera ho

after
this
UP-STOOD rose
JUDAS
THE
GALILEAN
IN
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
37 After this man rose up Judas of Galilee in the days of the taxing, and drew away much people after him: he also perished; and all, [even] as
AV
Acts 5 - Acts 6
apografhs kai apesthsen laon apographE kai aphistEmi laos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m

Adv pp Gen Sg m
kakeinos apwleto kakeinos apollumi

pd Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
many as obeyed him, were dispersed.
FROM-WRITing registration osoi hosos

pk Nom Pl m
AND
FROM-STANDS draws-away autw autos
PEOPLE
BEHIND after
him
AND-that-one and-that-one
was-destroyED AND perished
ALL
epeiqonto peithO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
dieskorpisqhsan diaskorpizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
pp Dat Sg m
as-many-as were-PERSUADED to-him

WH NA
ARE-THRU-SCATTERED are-scattered nun legw nun legO

5:38 kai
kai
Conj
ta
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
aposthte aphistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
AND
THE the(p)
NOW I-AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
BE-YE-FROM-STANDING FROM THE be-ye-withdrawing ! h eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
38 And now I say unto you, Refrain from these men, and let them alone: for if this counsel or this work be of men, it will come to nought:
anqrwpwn toutwn kai afete anthrOpos houtos kai aphiEmi

n_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
autous oti ean autos hoti ean

pp Acc Pl m Conj Cond
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
humans
these
AND
FROM-LET let-ye ! h E
Part
them
that
IF-EVER MAY-BE
OUT OF-humans
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
boulh boulE
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
kataluqhsetai kataluO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THE
COUNSEL
this
OR
THE
ACT work ou ou
Part Neg
this
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED it-shall-be-being-demolished katalusai kataluO

vn Aor Act
5:39 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dunhsesqe dunamai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
IF
YET OUT OF-God
it-IS
NOT
YE-SHALL-BE-ABLE TO-DOWN-LOOSE them to-demolish
39 But if it be of God, ye cannot overthrow it; lest haply ye be found even to fight against God.
mhpote mEpote
Adv
kai qeomacoi kai theomachos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
eureqhte heuriskO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
NO-?-when AND lest-at-some-time also
God-FIGHTers YE-MAY-BE-BEING-FOUND fighters-against-God de de

Conj
5:40 epeisqhsan
peithO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai proskalesamenoi tous kai proskaleomai ho

Conj vp Aor midD Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
apostolous apostolos
n_ Acc Pl m
THEY-ARE-PERSUADED YET to-him
AND
TOWARD-CALLing calling-toward-them epi tw epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg n
THE
commissioners apostles ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
deirantes derO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
parhggeilan mh paraggellO mE
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Part Neg
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act

kai kai
Conj
40 And to him they agreed: and when they had called the apostles, and beaten [them], they commanded that they should not speak in the name of Jesus, and let them go.
SKINNing lashing-them apelusan apoluO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-charge they-charge-them
NO
TO-BE-TALKING ON to-be-speaking
THE
NAME
OF-THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-FROM-LOOSE they-release-them
5:41 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
cairontes chairO
apo apo
Prep

sunedriou sunedrion
n_ Gen Sg n
THE-ones the
INDEED THEN WENT they-went uper huper

Prep
JOYING rejoicing tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
FROM face
OF-THE
Sanhedrin
41 And they departed from the presence of the council, rejoicing that they were counted worthy to suffer shame for his name.
oti kathxiwqhsan hoti kataxioO

onomatos atimasqhnai onoma atimazO

n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Pas
that
THEY-WERE-DOWN-WORTHIED OVER THE they-were-deemed-worthy for-the-sake-of te te

Part
NAME
TO-BE-UN-VALUED to-be-dishonored oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
5:42 pasan
pas
a_ Acc Sg f
hmeran en hEmera en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kat kai kata

Conj Prep
ouk ou
Part Neg
EVERY
BESIDES DAY
IN
THE
according-to HOME
NOT
42 And daily in the temple, and in every house, they ceased not to teach and preach Jesus Christ.
epauonto pauO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
didaskontes kai euaggelizomenoi ton didaskO kai euaggelizO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m

THEY-CEASED TEACHING
AND
WELL-MESSAGizING THE bringing-the-well-message
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AV
Acts 6
6:1 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais tautais plhqunontwn twn hEmera houtos plEthunO ho

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn egeneto mathEtEs ginomai

n_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
IN
YET THE
DAYS
these
OF-multiplyING
OF-THE the
LEARNers disciples
BECAME there-became en en
Prep
goggusmos twn goggusmos ho

ellhnistwn pros hellEnistEs pros

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ebraious oti pareqewrounto hebraios hoti paratheOreO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl
. And in those days, when the number of the disciples was multiplied, there arose a murmuring of the Grecians against the Hebrews, because their widows were neglected in the daily ministration.
MURMURing
OF-THE
GREEKists Hellenists th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
TOWARD THE
HEBREWS
that
THEY-were-BESIDE-beheld IN were-overlooked
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Dat Sg f
kaqhmerinh kathEmerinos
a_ Dat Sg f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
chrai chEra
n_ Nom Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THE
THRU-SERVice THE dispensation
according-to-DAY THE daily oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
WIDOWS
OF-them
6:2 proskalesamenoi de
proskaleomai
de
Conj
dwdeka to dOdeka ho
ni numeral t_ Acc Sg n
plhqos twn plEthos ho

maqhtwn eipan mathEtEs legO

TOWARD-CALLing calling-toward-them ouk ou

Part Neg
YET THE
TWO-TEN twelve
THE
multitude
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THEY-say say qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
Then the twelve called the multitude of the disciples [unto them], and said, It is not reason that we should leave the word of God, and serve tables.
areston estin arestos eimi

hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kataleiyantas ton kataleipO ho

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
PLEASing
it-IS
US
leaving
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
diakonein diakoneO
vn Pres Act
trapezais trapeza
n_ Dat Pl f
TO-BE-THRU-SERVING to-tables to-be-serving tables
6:3 episkeyasqe de
episkeptomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
de
Conj
adelfoi andras ex adelphos anEr ek

n_ Voc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
marturoumenous epta martureO hepta

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m ni numeral
plhreis plErEs
a_ Acc Pl m
YE-ON-NOTE pick-out-ye !
YET brothers brethren !
MEN
OUT OF-YOU(p) beING-witnessED of-ye being-attested epi epi

Prep
SEVEN
FULL
Wherefore, brethren, look ye out among you seven men of honest report, full of the Holy Ghost and wisdom, whom we may appoint over this business.
pneumatos kai sofias ous pneuma kai sophia hos

n_ Gen Sg n Conj n_ Gen Sg f pr Acc Pl m
katasthsomen kathistEmi
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
creias chreia
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths houtos
pd Gen Sg f
OF-spirit
AND
WISDOM of-wisdom th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
WHOM
WE-SHALL-BE-DOWN-STANDING ON THE onover we-shall-be-constituting diakonia diakonia

n_ Dat Sg f
need
this
6:4 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
proseuch kai th proseuchE kai ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
But we will give ourselves continually to prayer, and to the ministry of the word.
WE
YET to-THE
prayer
AND
to-THE
THRU-SERVice OF-THE dispensation
saying word
proskarterhsomen proskartereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
SHALL-BE-perseverING
6:5 kai hresen

kai
Conj
areskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
enwpion pantos tou enOpion pas ho

Adv a_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
plhqous kai plEthos kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
AND
PLEASES
THE
saying word andra anEr

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
OF-EVERY entire
NA
THE
multitude
AND
exelexanto stefanon eklegO stephanos

vi Aor Mid 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
plhrh
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg m
pistews kai pneumatos pistis kai pneuma

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg n
And the saying pleased the whole multitude: and they chose Stephen, a man full of faith and of the Holy Ghost, and Philip, and Prochorus, and Nicanor, and Timon, and Parmenas, and Nicolas a proselyte of Antioch:
THEY-choose
Stephen (WREATH) MAN Stephen
FULL
OF-BELIEF of-faith
AND
OF-spirit
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
kai filippon kai philippos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
kai procoron kai nikanora kai timwna kai parmenan kai prochoros kai nikanOr kai timOn kai parmenas
Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
HOLY
AND
Philip (FOND-HORSE) AND Philip
Prochoros
AND
Nicanor
AND
TIMON
AND
PARMENAS
kai nikolaon kai nikolaos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
proshluton antiocea prosElutos antiocheus

AND
Nicholas (CONQUER-PEOPLE) TOWARD-COMer Nicholas proselyte esthsan histEmi

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ANTIOCHite of-Antioch apostolwn kai proseuxamenoi epeqhkan apostolos kai proseuchomai epitithEmi
n_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Aor midD Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
6
6:6 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m

Adv t_ Gen Pl m
WHOM
THEY-STAND IN-VIEW sight-ofbefore
OF-THE the
AND
praying
THEY-ON-PLACE they-place-on
Whom they set before the apostles: and when they had prayed, they laid [their] hands on them.
AV
Acts 6
autois tas autos ho

ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
to-them them
THE
HANDS
6:7 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
huxanen auxanO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai eplhquneto o kai plEthunO ho

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ariqmos arithmos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
GROWS-UP grows polus polus
AND
was-multipliED multiplied oclos ochlos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
NUMBER
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn en mathEtEs en
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
ierousalhm sfodra ierosoluma sphodra

ni proper Adv
te te
Part
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
And the word of God increased; and the number of the disciples multiplied in Jerusalem greatly; and a great company of the priests were obedient to the faith.
a_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
IN
JERUSALEM
VEHEMENTLY MANY tremendously vast
BESIDES THRONG
OF-THE
ierewn hiereus
n_ Gen Pl m
uphkouon th hupakouO ho
vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
SACRED-ones obeyED priests
to-THE the plhrhs plErEs

a_ Nom Sg m
BELIEF faith caritos kai dunamews epoiei charis kai dunamis poieO
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
6:8 stefanos de
stephanos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
terata kai shmeia teras kai sEmeion

Stephen
YET FULL
OF-grace
AND
OF-ABILITY power
DID
MIRACLES AND
SIGNS
. And Stephen, full of faith and power, did great wonders and miracles among the people.
megala en mega en
a_ Acc Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
GREAT
IN THE among
PEOPLE
6:9 anesthsan de
anistEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sunagwghs sunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
legomenhs legO
vp Pres Pas Gen Sg f
UP-STAND there-rise
YET ANY certain
OF-THE OUT OF-THE of-the-ones kai alexandrewn kai alexandreus

Conj n_ Gen Pl m
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-THE synagogue the kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
one-beING-said being-said kilikias kai kilikia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
libertinwn kai kurhnaiwn libertinos kai kurEnaios

apo apo
Prep
Then there arose certain of the synagogue, which is called [the synagogue] of the Libertines, and Cyrenians, and Alexandrians, and of them of Cilicia and of Asia, disputing with Stephen.
freedmen
AND
OF-CYRENIANS AND
OF-ALEXANDRINES AND of-Alexandrians stefanw stephanos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE-ones FROM CILICIA of-the-ones
AND
asias asia
n_ Gen Sg f
suzhtountes suzEteO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ASIA TOGETHER-SEEKING to-THE province-of-Asia discussing
Stephen
6:10 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
iscuon ischuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
antisthnai th anthistEmi ho
vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati w pneuma hos

n_ Dat Sg n pr Dat Sg n
10 And they were not able to resist the wisdom and the spirit by which he spake.
AND
NOT
THEY-were-STRONG TO-withSTAND
to-THE the
WISDOM
AND
to-THE the
spirit
to-WHICH
elalei laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
he-TALKED he-spoke
6:11 tote upebalon

tote
Adv
hupoballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
andras legontas anEr legO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
oti akhkoamen hoti akouO

Conj vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl Att
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
then
THEY-UNDER-CAST MEN they-suborned blasfhma blasphEmos

a_ Acc Pl n
sayING
that
WE-HAVE-HEARD OF-him him
TALKING speaking
11 Then they suborned men, which said, We have heard him speak blasphemous words against Moses, and [against] God.
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
mwushn kai ton mOusEs kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
declarations HARM-AVERring INTO MOSES blaspheming
AND
THE
God
6:12 sunekinhsan
sugkineO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
presbuterous kai tous presbuteros kai ho

THEY-TOGETHER-STIR BESIDES THE bsboth they-stir-up grammateis kai epistantes grammateus kai ephistEmi
n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
PEOPLE
AND
THE
SENIORS elders kai hgagon kai agO

AND
THE
12 And they stirred up the people, and the elders, and the scribes, and came upon [him], and caught him, and brought [him] to the council,
sunhrpasan sunarpazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
WRITers scribes
AND
ON-STANDing standing-by
THEY-TOGETHER-SNATCH him they-grip
AND
THEY-LED led-him
INTO THE
AV
Acts 6 - Acts 7
sunedrion sunedrion
n_ Acc Sg n
Sanhedrin
6:13 esthsan
histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
marturas yeudeis legontas martus pseudEs legO

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

STAND BESIDES witnesses they-put-to-the-stand ou ou

Part Neg
FALSifyers false
sayING ones-saying
THE
human
this
13 And set up false witnesses, which said, This man ceaseth not to speak blasphemous words against this holy place, and the law:
pauetai pauO
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
lalwn laleO
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
topou topos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg m
NOT
IS-CEASING
TALKING speaking nomou nomos
declarations DOWN against
OF-THE the
PLACE
THE
HOLY
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
this
AND
OF-THE the
LAW
6:14 akhkoamen
akouO
vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl Att
gar autou gar autos

Conj pp Gen Sg m
legontos legO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nazwraios outos nazOraios houtos

WE-HAVE-HEARD for
OF-him him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
sayING
that
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
this
14 For we have heard him say, that this Jesus of Nazareth shall destroy this place, and shall change the customs which Moses delivered us.
katalusei kataluO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton kai allaxei houtos kai allassO

pd Acc Sg m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqh ethos
n_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-DOWN-LOOSING THE shall-be-demolishing a hos

pr Acc Pl n
PLACE
this
AND
SHALL-BE-CHANGING THE
CUSTOMS
paredwken hmin paradidOmi hemeis

mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
WHICH
to-US
MOSES
6:15 kai atenisantes eis

kai
Conj
atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kaqezomenoi kathezomai
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
STRETCHing looking-intently
INTO him
ALL
THE
ones-beING-seatED ones-being-seated
IN
THE
15 And all that sat in the council, looking stedfastly on him, saw his face as it had been the face of an angel.
sunedriw eidon sunedrion eidO

n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

wsei proswpon aggelou hOsei prosOpon aggelos

Adv n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
Sanhedrin
PERCEIVED
THE
face
OF-him
AS-IF
face
OF-MESSENGER
AV
Acts 7
7:1 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
outws ecei houtOs echO

. Then said the high priest, Are these things so?
said
YET THE
chief-SACRED-one IF chief-priest andres anEr

n_ Voc Pl m
these thus these-things
IS-HAVING
7:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
adelfoi kai pateres akousate o adelphos kai patEr akouO ho

n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Voc Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET he-AVERRed
MEN men ! tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
brothers brethren ! patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
AND
FATHERS fathers ! abraam abraam

ni proper
HEAR-YE hear-ye ! onti eimi
THE
God
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
And he said, Men, brethren, and fathers, hearken; The God of glory appeared unto our father Abraham, when he was in Mesopotamia, before he dwelt in Charran,
vp Pres vxx Dat Sg m
OF-THE
esteem glory
WAS-VIEWED to-THE was-seen katoikhsai katoikeO

vn Aor Act
FATHER
OF-US
ABRAHAM to-BEING being carran charrhan

ni proper
IN
THE
mesopotamia prin h mesopotamia prin E

n_ Dat Sg f Adv Part
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
MESOPOTAMIA
ERE
OR
TO-DOWN-HOME him to-dwell auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IN
CHARRAN Haran ek ek
Prep
7:3 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
exelqe exerchomai
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
AND
NA
said
TOWARD him
BE-OUT-COMING OUT OF-THE be-you-coming-out ! sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
LAND
OF-YOU
AND
And said unto him, Get thee out of thy country, and from thy kindred, and come into the land which I shall shew thee.
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
suggeneias suggeneia
n_ Gen Sg f
kai deuro kai deuro

Conj vm txx vxx 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
OUT
OF-THE
TOGETHER-generated OF-YOU relationship
AND
HITHER hither-you !
INTO THE
LAND
WHICH
an an
Part
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
deixw deiknumi
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
EVER to-YOU
I-SHALL-BE-SHOWING
7:4 tote exelqwn

tote
Adv
exerchomai
ek ek
Prep
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
caldaiwn chaldaios
n_ Gen Pl m
katwkhsen katoikeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
carran charrhan
ni proper
kakeiqen kakeithen
Adv Con
then
OUT-COMING coming-out apoqanein apothnEskO

vn 2Aor Act
OUT OF-LAND
OF-CHALDEANS he-DOWN-HOMES IN he-dwells patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
CHARRAN AND-thence Haran auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
meta to meta ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
metwkisen metoikizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Then came he out of the land of the Chaldaeans, and dwelt in Charran: and from thence, when his father was dead, he removed him into this land, wherein ye now dwell.
after
THE
TO-BE-FROM-DYING THE to-be-dying hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
FATHER
OF-him
He-after-HOMizes him he-exiles
INTO THE
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn eis houtos eis

pd Acc Sg f Prep
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
nun katoikeite nun katoikeO

LAND
this
INTO WHICH
YOU(p) ye
NOW ARE-DOWN-HOMING are-dwelling auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
7:5 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
klhronomian en klEronomia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
oude oude
Adv
bhma bEma
n_ Acc Sg n
podos pous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
NOT
GIVES he-gives
to-him him
tenancy allotment-to-enjoy eis eis

Prep
IN
her herit
NOT-YET platform nor-yeteven kai tw kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg n
OF-FOOT
AND
ephggeilato dounai autw epaggellomai didOmi autos

vi Aor midD 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act pp Dat Sg m
katascesin authn kataschesis autos

n_ Acc Sg f pp Acc Sg f
spermati autou sperma autos

And he gave him none inheritance in it, no, not [so much as] to set his foot on: yet he promised that he would give it to him for a possession, and to his seed after him, when [as yet] he had no child.
He-promisES
TO-GIVE
it to-him ontos eimi
INTO DOWN-HAVing tenure autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
her herit
AND
to-THE
seed
OF-him
met auton meta autos

Prep pp Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
teknou teknon
n_ Gen Sg n
vp Pres vxx Gen Sg n
after
him
NOT
OF-BEING
to-him
offspring child oti estai hoti eimi

7:6 elalhsen de
laleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
outws o houtOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
TALKS speaks paroikon paroikos

a_ Nom Sg n
YET thus
THE
God
that
SHALL-BE
THE
seed
OF-him
en en
Prep
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
allotria kai doulwsousin allotrios kai douloO

a_ Dat Sg f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
And God spake on this wise, That his seed should sojourn in a strange land; and that they should bring them into bondage, and entreat [them] evil four hundred years.
BESIDE-HOMer IN sojourner
LAND
other-place alien
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-enSLAVING it
AND
AV
Acts 7
kakwsousin kakoO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
tetrakosia tetrakosioi
n_ Acc Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-EVIL-treatING YEARS shall-be-illtreating-it
FOUR-hundred
7:7 kai to
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
ean ean
Cond
douleusousin douleuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
krinw krinO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
THE
NATION
to-WHICH
IF-EVER THEY-SHALL-BE-SLAVING SHALL-BE-JUDGING I they-should-be-slaving exeleusontai exerchomai

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
And the nation to whom they shall be in bondage will I judge, said God: and after that shall they come forth, and serve me in this place.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai meta tauta kai meta houtos

Conj Prep pd Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
THE
God
said
AND
after
these THEY-SHALL-BE-OUT-COMING AND these-things they-shall-be-coming-out tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
latreusousin latreuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg m
SHALL-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE to-ME shall-be-offering-divine-service
IN
THE
PLACE
this
7:8 kai edwken

kai
Conj
didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
diaqhkhn peritomhs diathEkE peritomE

kai outws egennhsen ton kai houtOs gennaO ho

Conj Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
AND
He-GIVES
to-him him
covenant
OF-ABOUT-CUTTing AND of-circumcision th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
thus
he-generatES he-begets
THE
isaak kai perietemen auton isaak kai peritemnO autos

ni proper Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ogdoh ogdoos
a_ Dat Sg f
kai isaak ton kai isaak ho

Conj ni proper t_ Acc Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
And he gave him the covenant of circumcision: and so [Abraham] begat Isaac, and circumcised him the eighth day; and Isaac [begat] Jacob; and Jacob [begat] the twelve patriarchs.
ISAAC
AND
ABOUT-CUT circumcised
him
to-THE
DAY
THE
EIGHTh
AND
ISAAC
THE
JACOB
kai iakwb tous kai iakOb ho

Conj ni proper t_ Acc Pl m
dwdeka patriarcas dOdeka patriarchEs

AND
JACOB
THE
TWO-TEN twelve
patriarchs
7:9 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
patriarcai zhlwsantes ton patriarchEs zEloO ho

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
iwshf apedonto eis iOsEph apodidOmi eis

ni proper vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl Prep
aigupton kai aiguptos kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
And the patriarchs, moved with envy, sold Joseph into Egypt: but God was with him,
AND
THE
patriarchs
BOILing being-jealous met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
THE of-the
JOSEPH
FROM-GAVE gave-up-him
INTO EGYPT
AND
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
WAS
THE
God
WITH him
7:10 kai exeilato

kai
Conj
exaireO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
paswn twn pas ho

qliyewn thlipsis
n_ Gen Pl f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m

AND
He-OUT-LIFTS him extricates carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
OUT OF-ALL
OF-THE the
CONSTRICTIONS OF-him afflictions
AND
GIVES
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai sofian enantion faraw kai sophia enantion pharaO

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Adv ni proper
basilews aiguptou kai katesthsen basileus aiguptos kai kathistEmi

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
10 And delivered him out of all his afflictions, and gave him favour and wisdom in the sight of Pharaoh king of Egypt; and he made him governor over Egypt and all his house.
to-him him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
grace favor
AND
WISDOM
IN-INSTEAD in-front-of ep epi

Prep
of-PHARAO KING Pharaoh

NA
OF-EGYPT
AND
DOWN-STANDS constitutes oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
hgoumenon hEgeomai
aigupton kai aiguptos kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ef epi
Prep
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
him
one-LEADING governor
ON EGYPT onover
AND
ON onover
WHOLE
THE
HOME house
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-him
7:11 hlqen
erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
limos limos
n_ Nom Sg m
ef epi
Prep
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aigupton kai canaan kai qliyis aiguptos kai chanaan kai thlipsis
n_ Acc Sg f Conj ni proper Conj n_ Nom Sg f
CAME
YET FAMINE
ON
WHOLE
THE
EGYPT
AND
CHANAAN AND Canaan
CONSTRICTION affliction
11 Now there came a dearth over all the land of Egypt and Chanaan, and great affliction: and our fathers found no sustenance.
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
kai ouc kai ou

Conj Part Neg
huriskon heuriskO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
cortasmata oi chortasma ho

GREAT
AND
NOT
THEY-FOUND FODDER-effects found provender
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
AV
Acts 7
7:12 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
iakwb onta iakOb eimi

ni proper vp Pres vxx Acc Pl n
sitia sition
n_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
aigupton exapesteilen aiguptos exapostellO

HEARing
YET JACOB
BEING
GRAINS (dim) INTO EGYPT grain(p)
12 But when Jacob heard that there was corn in Egypt, he sent out our fathers first.
OUT-FROM-PUTS delegates
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras hmwn patEr hemeis

prwton prOton
Adv
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
BEFORE-most first
WH
7:13 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
deuterw deuteros
a_ Dat Sg m
egnwrisqh
NA
anegnwrisqh anagnOrizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
iwshf tois iOsEph ho

ni proper t_ Dat Pl m
adelfois adelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
AND
IN
THE
second second-time tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IS-UP-KNOWizED is-made-known-again faraw to pharaO ho

ni proper t_ Nom Sg n
JOSEPH
to-THE
NA
brothers brethren
13 And at the second [time] Joseph was made known to his brethren; and Joseph's kindred was made known unto Pharaoh.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai faneron egeneto kai phaneros ginomai

Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
genos genos
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-him
AND
apparent
BECAME
to-THE
PHARAO Pharaoh
THE
breed race
OF-THE
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
JOSEPH
7:14 aposteilas
apostellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
iwshf metekalesato iakwb ton iOsEph metakaleO iakOb ho

ni proper vi Aor Mid 3 Sg ni proper t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
commissioning dispatching-them pasan pas

a_ Acc Sg f
YET JOSEPH
WITH-CALLS calls-for en en
Prep
JACOB
THE
FATHER
OF-him
AND
14 Then sent Joseph, and called his father Jacob to [him], and all his kindred, threescore and fifteen souls.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
suggeneian suggeneia
n_ Acc Sg f
yucais ebdomhkonta pente psuchE hebdomEkonta pente

n_ Dat Pl f ni numeral ni numeral
EVERY entire
THE
WH
TOGETHER-generated IN souls relationship among

WH WH WH
SEVENTY
NA NA
FIVE
NA NA NA
7:15
katebh de iakwb
eis aigupton
WH
kai katebh kai katabainO

iakwb eis iakOb eis

ni proper Prep
aigupton aiguptos
n_ Acc Sg f
15 So Jacob went down into Egypt, and died, he, and our fathers,
AND
DOWN-STEPPed JACOB descended
INTO EGYPT
kai eteleuthsen autos kai teleutaO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m

AND
deceasES he-deceases
he
AND
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
7:16 kai meteteqhsan

kai
Conj
metatithEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
sucem kai eteqhsan suchem kai tithEmi

ni proper Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
mnhmati mnEma
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
THEY-WERE-after-PLACED INTO SYCHEM AND they-were-transferred wnhsato Oneomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
THEY-WERE-PLACED IN were-placed twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
memorial-tomb tomb emmwr hemmOr

ni proper
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
abraam abraam
ni proper
timhs timE
n_ Gen Sg f
arguriou para argurion para

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
sucem suchem
ni proper
16 And were carried over into Sychem, and laid in the sepulchre that Abraham bought for a sum of money of the sons of Emmor [the father] of Sychem.
WHICH
purchasES
ABRAHAM OF-VALUE OF-SILVER of-price hggizen eggizO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
BESIDE THE
SONS
of-EMMOR IN of-Hamor
SYCHEM
7:17 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cronos chronos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epaggelias hs epaggelia hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Gen Sg f
wmologhsen homologeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
according-AS YET NEARED drew-near o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
TIME
OF-THE
promise
OF-WHICH avows which kai eplhqunqh en kai plEthunO en

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep
17 . But when the time of the promise drew nigh, which God had sworn to Abraham, the people grew and multiplied in Egypt,
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
huxhsen auxanO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
to-THE
ABRAHAM GROWS
THE
PEOPLE
AND
WAS-multipliED
IN
aiguptw aiguptos
n_ Dat Sg f
EGYPT
WH WH NA NA
7:18 acris ou
achri
Prep
hos
pr Gen Sg m
anesth anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
basileus eteros basileus heteros

ep aigupton
ep epi
Prep
aigupton aiguptos
n_ Acc Sg f
18 Till another king arose, which knew not Joseph.
UNTIL
OF-WHICH UP-STOOD which rose
KING
DIFFERENT
ON EGYPT onover
AV
Acts 7
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdei eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iwshf iOsEph
ni proper
WHO
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED THE had-been-acquainted-with katasofisamenos to katasophizomai ho

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
JOSEPH
7:19 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
genos genos
n_ Acc Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ekakwsen tous kakoO ho

pateras patEr
n_ Acc Pl m
this-one this-one
NA
being-DOWN-WISE dealing-astutely-with tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
breed race ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-US
EVIL-treats illtreats
THE
FATHERS
19 The same dealt subtilly with our kindred, and evil entreated our fathers, so that they cast out their young children, to the end they might not live.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
brefh brephos
n_ Acc Pl n
ekqeta ekthetos
a_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
OF-US
OF-THE
TO-BE-DOING THE to-be-making
BABES
OUT-PLACED OF-them exposed
INTO THE
NO
zwogoneisqai zOogoneO
vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-beING-LIVE-parentED to-be-living
7:20 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
egennhqh gennaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
kai hn kai eimi

asteios tw asteios ho
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
WHICH
SEASON era
WAS-generatED MOSES was-born mhnas mEn

n_ Acc Pl m
AND
WAS
URBANE handsome tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
God
20 In which time Moses was born, and was exceeding fair, and nourished up in his father's house three months:
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
anetrafh anatrephO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
WHO
WAS-UP-NURTURed MONTHS was-reared de de

Conj
THREE
IN
THE
HOME
OF-THE
FATHER
7:21 ekteqentos
ektithEmi
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
aneilato anaireO
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qugathr faraw thugatEr pharaO

n_ Nom Sg f ni proper
kai kai
Conj
OF-BEING-OUT-PLACED YET OF-him of-being-exposed aneqreyato auton anatrephO autos

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
UP-LIFTS lifts-up uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
him
THE
DAUGHTER
of-PHARAO AND of-Pharaoh
21 And when he was cast out, Pharaoh's daughter took him up, and nourished him for her own son.
eauth heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
UP-NURTURES rears
him
to-herself
INTO SON
NA
7:22 kai epaideuqh

kai
Conj
paideuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
aiguptiwn hn aiguptios eimi

a_ Gen Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
AND
WAS-disciplinED MOSES was-trained
IN
EVERY all
WISDOM
OF-EGYPTIANS
WAS
YET
22 And Moses was learned in all the wisdom of the Egyptians, and was mighty in words and in deeds.
dunatos en dunatos en
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
logois kai ergois autou logos kai ergon autos

n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl n pp Gen Sg m
ABLE powerful
IN
sayings words
AND
ACTS works
OF-him
7:23 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
eplhrouto autw plEroO autos

vi impf Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
tesserakontaeths cronos tesserakontaetEs chronos

anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
AS
YET was-FILLED was-completed
to-him
FOUR-TY-YEAR forty-year
TIME
UP-STEPPed it-came-up tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
ON
THE
23 And when he was full forty years old, it came into his heart to visit his brethren the children of Israel.
kardian autou kardia autos

episkeyasqai tous episkeptomai ho

vn Aor midD t_ Acc Pl m

uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
HEART
OF-him
TO-ON-NOTE to-visit tina tis

px Acc Sg m
THE
brothers brethren
OF-him
THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL of-Israel
24 And seeing one [of them] suffer wrong, he defended [him], and avenged him that was oppressed, and smote the Egyptian:
7:24 kai idwn

kai
Conj
eidO
adikoumenon adikeO
hmunato amunomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai epoihsen ekdikhsin kai poieO ekdikEsis

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f
AND
PERCEIVING
ANY someone
beING-injurED
he-SUCCORS AND he-succors-him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
DOES
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kataponoumenw kataponeO
vp Pres Pas Dat Sg m
pataxas patassO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
aiguption aiguptios
a_ Acc Sg m
to-THE
one-beING-DOWN-MISERIED SMITing one-being-harried sunienai suniEmi

vn Pres Act
THE
EGYPTIAN
NA
7:25 enomizen de
nomizO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
he-LAWizED he-inferred
YET TO-understand THE
brothers brethren
OF-him
that
THE
God
25 For he supposed his brethren would have understood how that God by his hand would deliver them: but they understood not.
AV
Acts 7
dia dia
Prep
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
swthrian autois oi sOtEria autos ho

n_ Acc Sg f pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
sunhkan suniEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THRU HAND through
OF-him
IS-GIVING
SAVing salvation hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
to-them
THE
YET NOT
THEY-understand
7:26 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
te te
Part
epioush epeimi
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autois macomenois autos machomai

pp Dat Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
to-THE
BESIDES ON-BEING ensuing
DAY
he-WAS-VIEWED to-them he-was-seen andres anEr

n_ Voc Pl m
ones-FIGHTING ones-fighting adelfoi este adelphos eimi

AND
sunhllassen autous eis sunallassO autos eis

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m Prep
eirhnhn eipwn eirEnE legO

ina hina
Conj
26 And the next day he shewed himself unto them as they strove, and would have set them at one again, saying, Sirs, ye are brethren; why do ye wrong one to another?
he-intercedED-with
them
INTO PEACE
sayING
MEN men !
brothers brethren
YE-ARE
THAT
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
adikeite adikeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
ANY why ?
YE-ARE-injurING one-another
7:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
adikwn adikeO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
plhsion apwsato plEsion apOtheO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipwn legO
THE
YET one-injurING one-injuring se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
NIGH-one associate
FROM-THRUSTS him thrusts-away hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
sayING
27 But he that did his neighbour wrong thrust him away, saying, Who made thee a ruler and a judge over us?
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
katesthsen arconta kai dikasthn ef kathistEmi archOn kai dikastEs epi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ANY who ?
YOU
DOWN-STANDS constitutes me egO
chief
AND
JUSTer justice on hos
ON US onover tropon aneiles tropos anaireO

28 Wilt thou kill me, as thou diddest the Egyptian yesterday?
7:28 mh
mE
Part Neg
anelein anaireO
vn 2Aor Act
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
pp 1 Acc Sg
pr Acc Sg m
NO
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING ME to-be-despatching ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YOU
ARE-WILLING WHICH
manner
YOU-UP-LIFTED you-despatched
ecqes echthes
Adv
aiguption aiguptios
a_ Acc Sg m
YESTERDAY THE
EGYPTIAN
7:29 efugen
pheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw kai egeneto houtos kai ginomai

pd Dat Sg m Conj vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
paroikos paroikos
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
FLED
YET MOSES
IN
THE
saying word duo duo

ni numeral
this
AND
BECAME
BESIDE-HOMer IN sojourner
29 Then fled Moses at this saying, and was a stranger in the land of Madian, where he begat two sons.
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
madiam ou madiam hou

ni proper Adv
egennhsen uious gennaO huios

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Pl m
LAND
MADIAM of-Midian
where he-generatES he-begets
SONS
TWO
7:30 kai plhrwqentwn etwn

kai
Conj
plEroO
vp Aor Pas Gen Pl n
etos
n_ Gen Pl n
tesserakonta wfqh tesserakonta optomai

ni numeral vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
AND
OF-BEING-FILLED of-being-completed orous oros

n_ Gen Sg n
YEARS
FOUR-TY forty en en
Prep
WAS-VIEWED to-him was-seen puros pur

n_ Gen Sg n
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness
30 . And when forty years were expired, there appeared to him in the wilderness of mount Sina an angel of the Lord in a flame of fire in a bush.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
sina sina
ni proper
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
flogi phlox
n_ Dat Sg f
batou batos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
mountain mount de de
Conj
SINA Sinai
MESSENGER IN
BLAZE flame
WH
OF-FIRE
OF-THORN-BUSH
NA
7:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
idwn eidO
eqaumasen
eqaumazen thaumazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
orama horama
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
YET MOSES
PERCEIVING perceiving-it autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
he-MARVELED marveled-at fwnh phOnE

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
sight vision
31 When Moses saw [it], he wondered at the sight: and as he drew near to behold [it], the voice of the Lord came unto him,
prosercomenou proserchomai
de de
Conj
katanohsai egeneto katanoeO ginomai

vn Aor Act vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-TOWARD-COMING of-approaching
YET OF-him
TO-DOWN-MIND to-consider-it twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
BECAME
SOUND voice o ho
OF-Master of-Lord qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
7:32 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
paterwn sou patEr su

abraam abraam
ni proper
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU
THE
God
32 [Saying], I [am] the God of thy fathers, the God of Abraham, and the God of Isaac, and the God of Jacob. Then Moses trembled, and
AV
Acts 7
kai isaak kai iakwb entromos de kai isaak kai iakOb entromos de
Conj ni proper Conj ni proper a_ Nom Sg m Conj
genomenos ginomai
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
etolma tolmaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
durst not behold.
AND
ISAAC
AND
JACOB
IN-TREMBLing YET BECOMING in-a-tremor
MOSES
NOT
DARED
katanohsai katanoeO
vn Aor Act
TO-DOWN-MIND to-consider-it
7:33 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
luson luO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
upodhma twn hupodEma ho

said
YET to-him
THE
Master Lord ef epi

Prep
LOOSE-YOU loose-you ! w hos

pr Dat Sg m
THE
sandal sandals gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
33 Then said the Lord to him, Put off thy shoes from thy feet: for the place where thou standest is holy ground.
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar topos gar topos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
esthkas histEmi
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
agia hagios
a_ Nom Sg f
FEET
OF-YOU
THE
for
PLACE
ON
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-STOOD LAND you-stand
HOLY
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
7:34 idwn
eidO
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kakwsin tou kakOsis ho

laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
PERCEIVING
I-PERCEIVED
THE
EVIL-treating ill-treatment
WH
OF-THE
NA
PEOPLE
OF-ME
OF-THE the
IN
aiguptw kai tou aiguptos kai ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m
stenagmou stenagmos
n_ Gen Sg m
autou
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
hkousa akouO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
kai katebhn kai katabainO

34 I have seen, I have seen the affliction of my people which is in Egypt, and I have heard their groaning, and am come down to deliver them. And now come, I will send thee into Egypt.
EGYPT
AND
OF-THE the
groaning
OF-them
I-HEAR
AND
I-DOWN-STEPPed I-descended eis eis

Prep
exelesqai exaireO
vn 2Aor Mid
autous kai nun deuro autos kai nun deuro

pp Acc Pl m Conj Adv vm txx vxx 2 Sg
aposteilw apostellO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
aigupton aiguptos
n_ Acc Sg f
TO-BE-OUT-LIFTING them to-be-extricating
AND
NOW HITHER hither-you !
I-SHOULD-BE-commissionING YOU I-should-be-dispatching tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
INTO EGYPT
7:35 touton ton

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
mwushn on mOusEs hos

hrnhsanto eipontes arneomai legO

vi Aor midD 3 Pl vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
this
THE
MOSES
WHOM
THEY-disown
sayING
ANY who ? qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
WH
YOU
NA
katesthsen arconta kai dikasthn touton o kathistEmi archOn kai dikastEs houtos ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
kai
kai kai
Conj
35 This Moses whom they refused, saying, Who made thee a ruler and a judge? the same did God send [to be] a ruler and a deliverer by the hand of the angel which appeared to him in the bush.
DOWN-STANDS constitutes
chief
AND
JUSTer justice
this-one this-one sun sun

Prep
THE
God
AND
arconta kai lutrwthn apestalken archOn kai lutrOtEs apostellO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
aggelou aggelos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
chief
AND
LOOSer redeemer autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
HAS-commissionED TOGETHER to-HAND togetherwith hand en en

Prep
OF-MESSENGER THE
ofqentos optomai
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
batw batos
n_ Dat Sg m
one-BEING-VIEWED to-him one-being-seen
IN
THE
THORN-BUSH
WH NA
7:36 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
exhgagen exagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous poihsas autos poieO

pp Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
terata kai shmeia en teras kai sEmeion en

th
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
this-one this-man
OUT-LED led-out
them
DOing
MIRACLES AND
SIGNS
IN
LAND
36 He brought them out, after that he had shewed wonders and signs in the land of Egypt, and in the Red sea, and in the wilderness forty years.
aiguptw kai en aiguptos kai en

n_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep
eruqra qalassh kai en eruthros thalassa kai en

a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
eth etos
n_ Nom Pl n
tesserakonta tesserakonta
ni numeral
EGYPT
AND
IN
RED
SEA
AND
IN
THE
DESOLATE YEARS wilderness eipas legO

FOUR-TY forty uiois huios

n_ Dat Pl m
7:37 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
this
IS
THE
MOSES
THE
one-saying one-saying
to-THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL of-Israel
37 This is that Moses, which said unto the children of Israel, A prophet shall the Lord your God raise up unto you of your brethren, like unto me; him
AV
Acts 7
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anasthsei anistEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
adelfwn umwn adelphos humeis

shall ye hear.
BEFORE-AVERer to-YOU(p) prophet to-ye ws eme hOs egO

Adv pp 1 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING THE shall-be-raising-up
God
OUT OF-THE
brothers brethren
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AS
ME
7:38 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
genomenos ginomai
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia en ekklEsia en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
this
IS
THE
one-BECOMING one-becoming tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
OUT-CALLED IN ecclesia autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
THE
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
aggelou aggelos
n_ Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
orei oros
n_ Dat Sg n
38 This is he, that was in the church in the wilderness with the angel which spake to him in the mount Sina, and [with] our fathers: who received the lively oracles to give unto us:
DESOLATE WITH wilderness sina sina

ni proper
THE
MESSENGER THE
one-TALKING one-speaking os hos

pr Nom Sg m
to-him
IN
THE
mountain mount dounai didOmi

vn 2Aor Act
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m

edexato dechomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
logia logion
n_ Acc Pl n
zwnta zaO
SINA Sinai
WH
AND
NA
OF-THE with-the
FATHERS
OF-US
WHO
RECEIVES
oracles
LIVING
TO-GIVE
umin
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to-US
7:39 w
hos
pr Dat Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hqelhsan uphkooi genesqai thelO hupEkoos ginomai

vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m vn 2Aor midD
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m

alla alla
Conj
to-WHOM
NOT
WILL
obedient
TO-BE-BECOMING THE
FATHERS
OF-US
but
39 To whom our fathers would not obey, but thrust [him] from them, and in their hearts turned back again into Egypt,
apwsanto apOtheO
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
kai estrafhsan en kai strephO en

Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

eis eis
Prep
aigupton aiguptos
n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-FROM-THRUST AND they-thrust-away-him
THEY-TURNed turned
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-them
INTO EGYPT
7:40 eipontes
legO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aarwn poihson aarOn poieO

hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
qeous theos
n_ Acc Pl m
oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
proporeusontai proporeuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
sayING
to-THE
AARON
make make-you ! os hos
to-US us
gods
WHO
SHALL-BE-BEFORE-GOING shall-be-going-before ek ek
Prep
40 Saying unto Aaron, Make us gods to go before us: for [as for] this Moses, which brought us out of the land of Egypt, we wot not what is become of him.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar mwushs gar mOusEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
exhgagen exagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
pr Nom Sg m
OF-US us
THE
for
MOSES
this
WHO
OUT-LED led-out
US
OUT OF-LAND
aiguptou ouk aiguptos ou

oidamen eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
OF-EGYPT
NOT
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ANY we-are-aware what ? tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
BECAME
to-him
7:41 kai emoscopoihsan en

kai
Conj
moschopoieO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
en
Prep
hmerais ekeinais kai anhgagon hEmera ekeinos kai anagO

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Att
qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
THEY-calf-make they-make-calf
IN
THE
DAYS
those
AND
THEY-UP-LED they-led-up
SACRIFICE to-THE
41 And they made a calf in those days, and offered sacrifice unto the idol, and rejoiced in the works of their own hands.
eidwlw kai eufrainonto en eidOlon kai euphrainO en

n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ergois twn ergon ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Pl f
ceirwn autwn cheir autos

idol
AND
THEY-were-glad made-merry o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
ACTS works
OF-THE
HANDS
OF-them
7:42 estreyen de
strephO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai paredwken autous latreuein kai paradidOmi autos latreuO

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
TURNS
YET THE
God
AND
them
TO-BE-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE to-be-offering-divine-service en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
stratia tou stratia ho

ouranou kaqws ouranos kathOs

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
biblw biblos
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
42 . Then God turned, and gave them up to worship the host of heaven; as it is written in the book of the prophets, O ye house of Israel, have ye offered to me slain beasts and sacrifices [by the space of] forty years in the wilderness?
to-THE
host
OF-THE
heaven
SCROLL
OF-THE
AV
Acts 7
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
sfagia sphagion
n_ Acc Pl n
kai qusias kai thusia

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
proshnegkate prospherO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
BEFORE-AVERers NO prophets tesserakonta en tesserakonta en

ni numeral Prep
SLAYed-ones AND slain-victims th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
SACRIFICES YE-TOWARD-CARRY to-ME ye-offer oikos oikos

n_ Nom Sg m
YEARS
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
israhl israEl
ni proper
FOUR-TY forty
IN
THE
DESOLATE HOME wilderness house skhnhn tou skEnE ho

of-ISRAEL of-Israel moloc kai to moloch kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Acc Sg n
7:43 kai anelabete thn

kai
Conj
analambanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
astron astron
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
YE-UP-GOT ye-took-up
WH
THE
NA
BOOTH tabernacle
NA
OF-THE
MOLOCH AND
THE
GLEAMer OF-THE constellation epoihsate poieO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
romfa
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
raifan rhaiphan
ni proper
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
tupous ous tupos hos

n_ Acc Pl m pr Acc Pl m
43 Yea, ye took up the tabernacle of Moloch, and the star of your god Remphan, figures which ye made to worship them: and I will carry you away beyond Babylon.
god
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
RAIPHAN
THE
types models umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
WHICH
YE-make
vn Pres Act
autois kai metoikiw autos kai metoikizO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg Att
epekeina epekeina
Adv
babulwnos babulOn
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-worshipING to-them them
AND
I-SHALL-BE-after-HOMING YOU(p) I-shall-be-exiling ye marturiou hn marturion eimi

n_ Gen Sg n vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ON-OUT-TO-BE OF-BABYLON beyond Babylon tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
7:44 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
skhnh skEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
patrasin hmwn patEr hemeis

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
BOOTH tabernacle kaqws kathOs

Adv
OF-THE
witness testimony
WAS
to-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
IN
THE
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
dietaxato o diatassO ho
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
lalwn laleO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
mwush mOusEs
n_ Dat Sg m
poihsai authn poieO autos

vn Aor Act pp Acc Sg f
44 Our fathers had the tabernacle of witness in the wilderness, as he had appointed, speaking unto Moses, that he should make it according to the fashion that he had seen.
DESOLATE according-AS prescribES wilderness he-prescribes kata kata

Prep
THE
one-TALKING one-speaking ewrakei horaO

to-THE
MOSES
TO-make
her herit
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
according-to THE
type model
WHICH
he-HAD-SEEN
7:45 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
kai eishgagon kai eisagO

diadexamenoi oi diadechomai ho
vp Aor midD Nom Pl m t_ Nom Pl m


Prep n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
WHICH
AND also
THEY-INTO-LED THRU-RECEIVing led-into ones-succeeding-him eqnwn ethnos

n_ Gen Pl n
THE
FATHERS
OF-US
WITH
JESUS Joshua apo apo

Prep
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
katascesei twn kataschesis ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl n
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
exwsen exOtheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
45 Which also our fathers that came after brought in with Jesus into the possession of the Gentiles, whom God drave out before the face of our fathers, unto the days of David;
THE
DOWN-HAVing tenure
OF-THE
NATIONS
WHICH whom(p)
OUT-THRUSTS THE thrusts-out
God
FROM
proswpou twn prosOpon ho


ews twn heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn dauid hEmera dauid

n_ Gen Pl f ni proper
face
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
TILL
OF-THE the
DAYS
of-DAVID of-David kai hthsato eurein kai aiteO heuriskO

Conj vi Aor Mid 3 Sg vn 2Aor Act
46 Who found favour before God, and desired to find a tabernacle for the God of Jacob.
7:46 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
WHO
FOUND
WH
grace favor qew

NA
OF-THE the
God
AND
REQUESTS he-requests
TO-BE-FINDING
skhnwma tw skEnOma ho
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
BOOTH tabernacle
to-THE
HOME house
of-JACOB of-Jacob oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
47 But Solomon built him an house.
7:47 solomwn de
solomOn
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
oikodomhsen autw oikodomeO autos

SOLOMON
YET HOME-BUILDS builds o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-Him him
HOME house ceiropoihtois katoikei cheiropoiEtos katoikeO

a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
7:48 all ouc

alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
uyistos en hupsistos en
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
kaqws kathOs
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
but
NOT
THE
HIGHest-One IN Most-High
HAND-made made-by-hands(p)
IS-DOWN-HOMING according-AS THE is-dwelling
48 Howbeit the most High dwelleth not in temples made with hands; as saith the prophet,
AV
Acts 7
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEFORE-AVERer IS-sayING prophet
7:49 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouranos moi ouranos egO

n_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Dat Sg
qronos thronos
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
kai h
WH
NA
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
NA
de de
Conj
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
upopodion hupopodion
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
heaven
to-ME
THRONE
THE
YET
LAND earth moi egO
UNDER-FOOT footstool legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
49 Heaven [is] my throne, and earth [is] my footstool: what house will ye build me? saith the Lord: or what [is] the place of my rest?
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
poion poios
pi Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
oikodomhsete oikodomeO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
pp 1 Dat Sg
OF-THE
FEET
OF-ME
?-THE-WHICH HOME what ? house topos topos

n_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-beING-HOME-BUILT to-ME shall-be-being-built
IS-sayING
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
katapausews mou katapausis egO

Master Lord
OR
ANY what ? h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
PLACE
OF-THE
DOWN-CEASing stopping
OF-ME
7:50 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
epoihsen tauta poieO houtos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
50 Hath not my hand made all these things?
NOT(emph.) THE not(emph.) ?
HAND
OF-ME
DOES makes
these ALL these-things wsin ous

n_ Dat Pl n
7:51 sklhrotrachloi kai aperitmhtoi kardiais kai tois

sklErotrachElos
a_ Voc Pl m
kai
Conj
aperitmEtos
a_ Voc Pl m
kardia
n_ Dat Pl f
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Pl n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
aei aei
Adv
HARD-NECKS stiff-necked-ones tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
UN-ABOUT-CUT uncircumcised-ones agiw hagios

a_ Dat Sg n
to-HEARTS
AND
to-THE
EARS
YOU(p) ye
ever
51 . Ye stiffnecked and uncircumcised in heart and ears, ye do always resist the Holy Ghost: as your fathers [did], so [do] ye.
antipiptete antipiptO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ws oi hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m

kai kai
Conj
to-THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
ARE-INSTEAD-FALLING AS are-clashing
THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye also
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
YOU(p) ye
7:52 tina
tis
pi Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ediwxan oi diOkO ho

kai kai
Conj
ANY which ? apekteinan apokteinO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers NOT prophets
CHASE persecute peri peri

Prep
THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
prokataggeilantas prokataggellO
vp Aor Act Acc Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eleusews tou eleusis ho

52 Which of the prophets have not your fathers persecuted? and they have slain them which shewed before of the coming of the Just One; of whom ye have been now the betrayers and murderers:
THEY-FROM-KILL THE they-kill dikaiou ou dikaios hos

a_ Gen Sg m pr Gen Sg m
ones-BEFORE-DOWN-MESSAGing ABOUT THE ones-announcing-before concerning nun umeis nun humeis

Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
COMing
OF-THE
prodotai prodotEs
n_ Nom Pl m
kai foneis kai phoneus

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
egenesqe ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 2 Pl
JUST-One just-one
OF-WHOM
NOW YOU(p) ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BEFORE-GIVers AND traitors nomon nomos

n_ Acc Sg m
MURDERERS BECAME
7:53 oitines elabete

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
diatagas aggelwn diatagE aggelos

kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
53 Who have received the law by the disposition of angels, and have not kept [it].
WHO-ANY who-any efulaxate phulassO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl
GOT
THE
LAW
INTO prescription mandate
OF-MESSENGERS AND
NOT
GUARD ye-maintain-it
7:54 akouontes
akouO
de de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
dieprionto diapriO
vi impf Pas 3 Pl
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

kai kai
Conj
HEARING
YET these THEY-were-THRU-SAWN to-THE these-things they-were-harrowed tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
HEARTS
OF-them
AND
54 . When they heard these things, they were cut to the heart, and they gnashed on him with [their] teeth.
ebrucon bruchO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
odontas ep odous epi

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-GNASHED THE gnashed
TEETH
ON
him
AV
Acts 7 - Acts 8
7:55 uparcwn
huparchO
de de
Conj
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg m

atenisas atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
belongING possessing eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET FULL fullness doxan doxa

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-spirit
HOLY
STRETCHing looking-intently ek ek
Prep
INTO THE
heaven
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ihsoun kai iEsous

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
estwta histEmi
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
55 But he, being full of the Holy Ghost, looked up stedfastly into heaven, and saw the glory of God, and Jesus standing on the right hand of God,
he-PERCEIVED esteem glory
OF-God
AND
JESUS
HAVING-STOOD standing tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
OUT OF-RIGHT(p) OF-THE
God
7:56 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
qewrw theOreO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ouranous dihnoigmenous ouranos dianoigO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m
AND
said
BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-beholdING THE lo ! uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
heavens
HAVING-been-THRU-UP-OPENED having-been-opened-up tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
56 And said, Behold, I see the heavens opened, and the Son of man standing on the right hand of God.
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
dexiwn dexios
a_ Gen Pl m
estwta histEmi
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
SON
OF-THE
human
OUT OF-RIGHT(p) HAVING-STOOD standing ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
God
7:57 kraxantes
krazO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh sunescon mega sunechO

a_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai wrmhsan kai hormaO

CRYing
YET to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THEY-pressED THE
EARS
OF-them
AND
THEY-RUSH rush
57 Then they cried out with a loud voice, and stopped their ears, and ran upon him with one accord,
omoqumadon ep homothumadon epi

Adv Prep
LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord
ON
him
7:58 kai ekbalontes

kai
Conj
ekballO
exw exO
Adv
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews eliqoboloun polis lithoboleO

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
martures martus
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
OUT-CASTING casting-out-him ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OUT OF-THE outside imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
city
THEY-STONE-CAST(past) AND they-pelted-with-stones-him tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
witnesses
58 And cast [him] out of the city, and stoned [him]: and the witnesses laid down their clothes at a young man's feet, whose name was Saul.
apeqento apotithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
para para
Prep
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
neaniou neanias
n_ Gen Sg m
kaloumenou kaleO
FROM-PLACED THE put-off saulou saulos

n_ Gen Sg m
GARMENTS OF-them
BESIDE THE
FEET
OF-YOUNG(m) beING-CALLED of-young-man
SAUL ( Heb. ASK ) Saul
7:59 kai eliqoboloun

kai
Conj
lithoboleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
stefanon epikaloumenon kai legonta stephanos epikaleO kai legO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Mid Acc Sg m Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
AND
THEY-STONE-CAST(past) THE they-pelted-with-stones dexai dechomai

vm Aor midD 2 Sg
59 And they stoned Stephen, calling upon [God], and saying, Lord Jesus, receive my spirit.
Stephen
ON-CALLING one-invoking
AND
sayING
Master ! Lord !
ihsou iEsous
n_ Voc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

JESUS !
THE
spirit
OF-ME
7:60 qeis
tithEmi
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
gonata ekraxen gonu krazO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 3 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh kurie mega kurios

a_ Dat Sg f n_ Voc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
PLACING
YET THE
KNEES
he-CRIES
Master ! Lord !
NO
60 And he kneeled down, and cried with a loud voice, Lord, lay not this sin to their charge. And when he had said this, he fell asleep.
sthshs histEmi
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
autois tauthn thn autos houtos ho

pp Dat Pl m pd Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
amartian kai touto hamartia kai houtos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj pd Acc Sg n
eipwn legO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-STANDING to-them
this
THE
missing sin
AND
this
sayING
ekoimhqh koimaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
he-WAS-reposED he-was-put-to-repose
AV
Acts 8
8:1 saulos
saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
suneudokwn suneudokeO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anairesei autou anairesis autos

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
SAUL
YET WAS
TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING to-THE endorsing the hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
UP-LIFTing assassination
OF-him
BECAME there-came-to-be en en
Prep
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
diwgmos megas diOgmos mega

epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian thn ekklEsia ho

. And Saul was consenting unto his death. And at that time there was a great persecution against the church which was at Jerusalem; and they were all scattered abroad throughout the regions of Judaea and Samaria, except the apostles.
YET IN
that
THE
DAY
WH
CHASing persecution de
NA
GREAT
ON
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
IN
ierosolumois pantes ierosoluma pas

n_ Dat Pl n a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
diesparhsan diaspeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
kata kata
Prep
cwras ths chOra ho

JERUSALEM
ALL
YET
WERE-THRU-SOWN according-to THE they-were-dispersed apostolwn apostolos

n_ Gen Pl m
SPACES districts
OF-THE
ioudaias kai samareias plhn ioudaia kai samareia plEn

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
JUDEA
AND
SAMARIA
MOREly OF-THE except the ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
commissioners apostles eulabeis kai epoihsan kopeton eulabEs kai poieO kopetos
a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
2
8:2 sunekomisan
sugkomizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
stefanon andres stephanos anEr

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Nom Pl m
TOGETHER-FETCH YET THE are-pallbearers of-the megan mega

a_ Acc Sg m
Stephen
MEN
pious
AND
THEY-make
STRIKing grieving
And devout men carried Stephen [to his burial], and made great lamentation over him.
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
GREAT
ON him onover de de
Conj
8:3 saulos
saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
elumaineto lumainomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian kata ekklEsia kata

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oikous oikos
n_ Acc Pl m
SAUL
YET LOOSE-MAD-ED devastated surwn surO
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
according-to THE
HOMES
As for Saul, he made havock of the church, entering into every house, and haling men and women committed [them] to prison.
eisporeuomenos eisporeuomai
te te
Part
andras kai gunaikas paredidou anEr kai gunE paradidOmi

n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl f vi impf Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
INTO-GOING going-into fulakhn phulakE

n_ Acc Sg f
DRAGGING dragging-out
BESIDES MEN bsboth
AND
WOMEN
he-BESIDE-GAVE INTO he-gave-over-them
GUARD-house jail
8:4 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
diasparentes dihlqon diaspeirO dierchomai

vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
euaggelizomenoi ton euaggelizO ho

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
. Therefore they that were scattered abroad went every where preaching the word.
THE-ones the-ones
INDEED THEN BEING-THRU-SOWN THRU-CAME WELL-MESSAGizING THE being-dispersed passed-through bringing-the-well-message with-the katelqwn katerchomai
saying word samareias samareia

n_ Gen Sg f
5
8:5 filippos de
philippos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
WH
thn
NA
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
Then Philip went down to the city of Samaria, and preached Christ unto them.
Philip
YET DOWN-COMING coming-down
INTO
THE
city
OF-THE
SAMARIA
ekhrussen autois ton kErussO autos ho

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
PROCLAIMED heralded
to-them
THE
ANOINTED Christ ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
8:6 proseicon de
prosechO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
legomenois legO
vp Pres Pas Dat Pl n
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
filippou philippos
n_ Gen Sg m
heedED
YET THE
THRONGS
to-THE beING-said the-things
by
THE
Philip
And the people with one accord gave heed unto those things which Philip spake, hearing and seeing the miracles which he did.
omoqumadon en homothumadon en
Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
autous kai blepein autos kai blepO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n

LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord epoiei poieO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
IN
THE
TO-BE-HEARING them
AND
TO-BE-lookING THE to-be-observing
SIGNS
WHICH
he-DID
AV
Acts 8
8:7 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
gar twn gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
econtwn echO
pneumata akaqarta bownta pneuma akathartos boaO

n_ Acc Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl n
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
MANY
for
OF-THE
ones-HAVING ones-having polloi polus

a_ Nom Pl m
spirits
UN-clean unclean
IMPLORING
to-SOUND to-voice
megalh exhrconto mega exerchomai

a_ Dat Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
de de
Conj
paralelumenoi paraluO
kai cwloi kai chOlos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
eqerapeuqhsan therapeuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
For unclean spirits, crying with loud voice, came out of many that were possessed [with them]: and many taken with palsies, and that were lame, were healed.
GREAT loud
THEY-OUT-CAME they-came-out de de
Conj
MANY
YET HAVING-been-paralyzED AND ones-having-been-paralyzed cara chara

n_ Nom Sg f
LAME-ones lame-ones
WERE-curED
8:8 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
pollh polus
a_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
And there was great joy in that city.
BECAME came-to-be
YET much
JOY
IN
THE
city
that
8:9 anhr
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
onomati simwn onoma simOn

prouphrcen prouparchO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
MAN
YET ANY certain
to-NAME
SIMON
BEFORE-belongED IN existed-before eqnos ethnos

n_ Acc Sg n
THE
city
mageuwn mageuO
kai existanwn kai existEmi

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
samareias legwn samareia legO

But there was a certain man, called Simon, which beforetime in the same city used sorcery, and bewitched the people of Samaria, giving out that himself was some great one:
MAGIC-ING using-magic einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
AND
OUT-STANDING amazing megan mega
THE
NATION
OF-THE
SAMARIA
sayING
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
a_ Acc Sg m
TO-BE
ANY someone
self himself
GREAT
8:10 w
hos
pr Dat Sg m
proseicon pantes prosechO pas

vi impf Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
mikrou mikros
a_ Gen Sg m
ews megalou legontes heOs mega legO

Conj a_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
to-WHOM whom estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
heedED they-heeded
ALL
FROM LITTLE small qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
GREAT
sayING
this this-man megalh mega

a_ Nom Sg f
10 To whom they all gave heed, from the least to the greatest, saying, This man is the great power of God.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
dunamis tou dunamis ho

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kaloumenh kaleO
IS
THE
ABILITY power autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
OF-THE
god
THE
one-beING-CALLED GREAT one-being-called cronw chronos

n_ Dat Sg m
8:11 proseicon de
prosechO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ikanw hikanos
a_ Dat Sg m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
mageiais mageia
n_ Dat Pl f
heedED they-heeded exestakenai existEmi

vn Perf Act
YET to-him him autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
THRU THE because-of
to-enough TIME considerable
to-THE the
MAGICS
11 And to him they had regard, because that of long time he had bewitched them with sorceries.
TO-HAVE-OUT-STOOD them to-have-amazed
8:12 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
episteusan tw pisteuO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
filippw euaggelizomenw philippos euaggelizO

n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Mid Dat Sg m
peri peri
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias basileia
n_ Gen Sg f
when
YET THEY-BELIEVE
to-THE the
Philip
WELL-MESSAGizING ABOUT THE bringing-the-well-message concerning cristou ebaptizonto christos baptizO

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf Pas 3 Pl
KINGdom
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
onomatos ihsou onoma iEsous

andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
12 But when they believed Philip preaching the things concerning the kingdom of God, and the name of Jesus Christ, they were baptized, both men and women.
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
THEY-were-DIPizED MEN they-were-baptized
te te
Part
kai gunaikes kai gunE

Conj n_ Nom Pl f
BESIDES AND bsboth
WOMEN
8:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
episteusen kai baptisqeis pisteuO kai baptizO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
YET SIMON
AND also
he
BELIEVES
AND
WAS
proskarterwn tw proskartereO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
filippw qewrwn philippos theOreO

n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
te te
Part
shmeia kai dunameis sEmeion kai dunamis

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f
megalas mega
a_ Acc Pl f
13 Then Simon himself believed also: and when he was baptized, he continued with Philip, and wondered, beholding the miracles and signs which were done.
perseverING waiting-on
to-THE the
Philip
beholdING
BESIDES SIGNS
AND
ABILITIES GREAT powerful-deeds
AV
Acts 8
ginomenas ginomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl f
existato existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
BECOMING occurring
is-OUT-STOOD he-is-amazed oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
8:14 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
en en
Prep
ierosolumois apostoloi oti dedektai ierosoluma apostolos hoti dechomai

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Perf midD/pasD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
HEARing
YET THE
IN
JERUSALEM
commissioners apostles apesteilan apostellO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
that
HAS-RECEIVED
THE
14 . Now when the apostles which were at Jerusalem heard that Samaria had received the word of God, they sent unto them Peter and John:
samareia ton samareia ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
autous petron autos petros

pp Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
SAMARIA
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
THEY-commission TOWARD them dispatch
Peter
AND
iwannhn iOannEs
n_ Acc Sg m
JOHN
8:15 oitines katabantes

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
katabainO
proshuxanto peri proseuchomai peri

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
opws hopOs
Adv
labwsin lambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WHO-ANY who-any
THEY-pray pray
WHICH-how THEY-MAY-BE-GETTING so-that they-may-be-obtaining
15 Who, when they were come down, prayed for them, that they might receive the Holy Ghost:

spirit
HOLY
8:16 oudepw
oudepO
Adv
gar hn gar eimi

ep epi
Prep
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
epipeptwkos monon de epipiptO monon de

vp Perf Act Nom Sg n Adv Conj
NOT-YET-as-yet for not-as-yet bebaptismenoi baptizO

it-WAS
ON
NOT-YET-ONE OF-them any onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
HAVING-ON-FALLEN ONLY having-fallen-on kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
YET
16 (For as yet he was fallen upon none of them: only they were baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus.)
uphrcon huparchO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-DIPizED THEY-belongED INTO THE having-been-baptized
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
8:17 tote epetiqesan tas

tote
Adv
epitithEmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras ep cheir epi

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
autous kai elambanon pneuma agion autos kai lambanO pneuma hagios
pp Acc Pl m Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n
17 Then laid they [their] hands on them, and they received the Holy Ghost.
then
THEY-ON-PLACE THE they-place-on de de

Conj
HANDS
ON
them
AND
THEY-GOT-UP they-obtained
spirit
HOLY
8:18 idwn
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
oti dia hoti dia

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epiqesews twn epithesis ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl f
ceirwn cheir
n_ Gen Pl f
PERCEIVING
YET THE
SIMON
that
THRU THE through
ON-PLACing imposition
OF-THE
HANDS
18 And when Simon saw that through laying on of the apostles'hands the Holy Ghost was given, he offered them money,
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn didotai apostolos didOmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma proshnegken pneuma prospherO

autois crhmata autos chrEma

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
IS-beING-GIVEN THE
spirit
he-TOWARD-CARRIES to-them he-offers them exousian tauthn ina exousia houtos hina
n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f Conj
moneys money(p) w hos

pr Dat Sg m
8:19 legwn
legO
dote didOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kamoi kagO
pp 1 Dat Sg Con
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ean ean
Cond
sayING
BE-YE-GIVING AND-to-ME be-ye-giving ! also-to-me tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
authority
this
THAT to-WHOM whom
IF-EVER
19 Saying, Give me also this power, that on whomsoever I lay hands, he may receive the Holy Ghost.
epiqw epitithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ceiras lambanh cheir lambanO

n_ Acc Pl f vs Pres Act 3 Sg

I-MAY-BE-ON-PLACING THE I-may-be-placing-on
HANDS
he-MAY-BE-GETTING-UP spirit he-may-be-obtaining auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
HOLY
8:20 petros
petros
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
argurion sou argurion su

sun sun
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
Peter
YET said
TOWARD him
THE
SILVER
OF-YOU
TOGETHER to-YOU togetherwith you enomisas dia nomizO dia

20 But Peter said unto him, Thy money perish with thee, because thou hast thought that the gift of God may be purchased with money.
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
apwleian oti apOleia hoti

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dwrean tou dOrea ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
MAY-BE
INTO destruction
gratuity
OF-THE
God
YOU-LAWize you-infer
THRU through
AV
Acts 8
crhmatwn ktasqai chrEma ktaomai

n_ Gen Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD
moneys money(p)
TO-BE-ACQUIRING
8:21 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
meris meris
n_ Nom Sg f
oude oude
Adv
klhros klEros
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg m
21 Thou hast neither part nor lot in this matter: for thy heart is not right in the sight of God.
NOT
IS there-is gar kardia gar kardia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
to-YOU
PART
NOT-YET LOT nor estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IN
THE
saying matter tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
this
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
euqeia euthus
a_ Nom Sg f
enanti enanti
Adv
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
for
HEART
OF-YOU
NOT
IS
WELL-PLACED IN-INSTEAD OF-THE straight in-front-of the sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
God
8:22 metanohson oun

metanoeO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
oun
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kakias kakia
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths kai dehqhti houtos kai deomai

pd Gen Sg f Conj vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
after-MIND-YOU repent-you ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THEN FROM THE
EVIL
OF-YOU
this
AND
BE-YOU-BEING-BOUND beseech-you ! epinoia ths epinoia ho

22 Repent therefore of this thy wickedness, and pray God, if perhaps the thought of thine heart may be forgiven thee.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ara ara
Part
afeqhsetai aphiEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE the
Master Lord
IF
CONSEQUENTLY SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-LET to-YOU shall-be-being-forgiven you
THE
ON-MIND notion
OF-THE
kardias sou kardia su

HEART
OF-YOU
8:23 eis
eis
Prep
gar colhn gar cholE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
pikrias pikria
n_ Gen Sg f
kai sundesmon kai sundesmos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
orw horaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
23 For I perceive that thou art in the gall of bitterness, and [in] the bond of iniquity.
INTO for
BILE
OF-BITTERness AND
TOGETHER-BOND OF-UN-JUSTness I-AM-SEEING fetter of-injustice
YOU
onta eimi
BEING
8:24 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dehqhte deomai
vm Aor pasD 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
uper huper
Prep
answerING
YET THE
SIMON
said
BE-BEING-BOUND YOU(p) be-ye-beseeching ! ye epelqh eperchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OVER for-the-sake-of eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
24 Then answered Simon, and said, Pray ye to the Lord for me, that none of these things which ye have spoken come upon me.
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
opws hopOs
Adv
mhden mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg n
ep epi
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
ME
TOWARD THE
Master Lord
WHICH-how NO-YET-ONE MAY-BE-ON-COMING ON so-that nothing may-be-coming-on
ME
OF-WHICH which
eirhkate ereO
YE-HAVE-declarED
8:25 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
diamarturamenoi kai lalhsantes ton diamarturomai kai laleO ho

vp Aor midD Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THE the-ones kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
INDEED THEN ones-THRU-witnessing certifying
AND
TALKing speaking
THE
saying word twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
upestrefon eis hupostrephO eis

ierosoluma pollas te ierosoluma polus te

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Pl f Part
kwmas kOmE
n_ Acc Pl f
samaritwn samaritEs
n_ Gen Pl m
25 And they, when they had testified and preached the word of the Lord, returned to Jerusalem, and preached the gospel in many villages of the Samaritans.
Master Lord
reTURNED
INTO JERUSALEM
MANY
BESIDES VILLAGES OF-THE to-villages
SAMARItans
euhggelizonto euaggelizO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
THEY-WELL-MESSAGizED they-brought-the-well-message
8:26 aggelos
aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
elalhsen pros laleO pros

filippon legwn philippos legO

anasthqi anistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
MESSENGER YET OF-Master of-Lord
TALKS speaks
TOWARD Philip
sayING
BE-UP-STANDING AND be-you-rising !
26 . And the angel of the Lord spake unto Philip, saying, Arise, and go toward the south unto the way that goeth down from Jerusalem unto Gaza,
AV
Acts 8
poreuou poreuomai
kata kata
Prep
meshmbrian epi thn mesEmbria epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
katabainousan katabainO
apo apo
Prep
which is desert.
BE-GOING be-you-going ! ierousalhm eis ierosoluma eis

ni proper Prep
according-to MID-DAY midday gazan gaza

n_ Acc Sg f
ON
THE
WAY road
THE
one-DOWN-STEPPING FROM one-descending
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
erhmos erEmos
a_ Nom Sg f
JERUSALEM
INTO GAZA
this this-one eporeuqh poreuomai

vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
IS
DESOLATE
8:27 kai anastas

kai
Conj
anistEmi
kai idou kai idou

anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
aiqioy aithiops
n_ Nom Sg m
eunoucos eunouchos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
UP-STANDing rising
he-WAS-GONE AND he-went
BE-PERCEIVING MAN lo ! os hos

pr Nom Sg m
ETHIOPIAN
EUNUCH
dunasths kandakhs basilisshs aiqiopwn dunastEs kandakE basilissa aithiops

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Pl m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
epi pashs epi pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
27 And he arose and went: and, behold, a man of Ethiopia, an eunuch of great authority under Candace queen of the Ethiopians, who had the charge of all her treasure, and had come to Jerusalem for to worship,
ABLEr potentate gazhs gaza

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-CANDACE KINGess queen auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
WH
OF-ETHIOPIANS WHO
NA
WAS
ON
EVERY entire
OF-THE the
os
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
elhluqei proskunhswn eis erchomai proskuneO eis

vi Plup Act 3 Sg vp Fut Act Nom Sg m Prep
ni proper
EXCHEQUER OF-her
WH NA
WHO
HAD-COME
worshipING(fut) to-be-worshiping
INTO JERUSALEM
8:28 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de
te te
Part
upostrefwn hupostrephO
kai kaqhmenos kai kathEmai

epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
28 Was returning, and sitting in his chariot read Esaias the prophet.
he-WAS
BESIDES
reTURNING
AND
sittING
ON
THE
armatos autou harma autos

kai aneginwsken ton kai anaginOskO ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
hsaian Esaias
n_ Acc Sg m
chariot
OF-him
AND
read he-read pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
THE
BEFORE-AVERer ISAIAH prophet filippw proselqe philippos proserchomai

n_ Dat Sg m vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
8:29 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
29 Then the Spirit said unto Philip, Go near, and join thyself to this chariot.
said
YET THE
spirit
to-THE
Philip
BE-TOWARD-COMING AND be-you-approaching !
kollhqhti kollaO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
armati harma
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg n
BE-BEING-JOINED to-THE be-you-being-joined !
chariot
this
8:30 prosdramwn
prostrechO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filippos hkousen philippos akouO

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
anaginwskontos hsaian anaginOskO Esaias

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD-RUNNING YET THE running-toward-him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
Philip
HEARS
OF-him him ge ge
Part
readING
ISAIAH
30 And Philip ran thither to [him], and heard him read the prophet Esaias, and said, Understandest thou what thou readest?
profhthn prophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

ara ara
Part Int
ginwskeis ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
THE
BEFORE-AVERer AND prophet
said
CONSEQUENTLY SURELY YOU-ARE-KNOWING WHICH which(p)
anaginwskeis anaginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-readING
8:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pws gar an pOs gar an

Adv Int Conj Part
dunaimhn dunamai
vo Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
THE
YET said he-said me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
how how ?
for
EVER MAY-I-BE-ABLE I-may-be-able ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IF-EVER NO
ANY someone
31 And he said, How can I, except some man should guide me? And he desired Philip that he would come up and sit with him.
odhghsei hodEgeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
parekalesen te parakaleO te
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part
filippon anabanta philippos anabainO

n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
SHALL-BE-WAY-LEADING ME shall-be-guiding kaqisai kathizO

vn Aor Act
he-BESIDE-CALLS he-entreats
BESIDES THE
Philip
UP-STEPPing stepping-up
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
TO-be-seated TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him
AV
Acts 8
8:32 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
perioch periochE
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
grafhs hn graphE hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Acc Sg f
aneginwsken hn anaginOskO eimi

vi impf Act 3 Sg vi impf vxx 3 Sg
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
ws hOs
Adv
THE
YET ABOUT-HAVing OF-THE context
WRITing scripture
WHICH
he-read
WAS
WH
this
AS
probaton epi sfaghn hcqh probaton epi sphagE agO

n_ Nom Sg n Prep n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai ws amnos kai hOs amnos

Conj Adv n_ Nom Sg m
enantion tou enantion ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
keirontos
32 The place of the scripture which he read was this, He was led as a sheep to the slaughter; and like a lamb dumb before his shearer, so opened he not his mouth:
sheep
NA
ON
SLAYing slaughter auton autos
He-WAS-LED
AND
AS
LAMB
IN-INSTEAD in-front-of anoigei anoigO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-THE the to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
keirantos keirO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
afwnos outws ouk aphOnos houtOs ou

a_ Nom Sg m Adv Part Neg
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pp Acc Sg m
one-SHEARing one-shearing
him him it
UN-SOUND soundless
thus
NA
NOT
He-IS-UP-OPENING THE he-is-opening krisis krisis

n_ Nom Sg f
MOUTH
OF-Him
8:33 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tapeinwsei tapeinOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hrqh airO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN
THE
LOWness humiliation tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
OF-Him
THE
JUDGing
OF-Him
WAS-LIFTED was-taken-away ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
33 In his humiliation his judgment was taken away: and who shall declare his generation? for his life is taken from the earth.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
genean autou genea autos

dihghsetai diEgeomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
oti airetai hoti airO

apo apo
Prep
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
generation OF-Him
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-relatING that
IS-beING-LIFTED FROM THE is-being-taken-away
LAND earth
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
LIFE
OF-Him
8:34 apokriqeis
apokrinomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eunoucos tw eunouchos ho
filippw eipen philippos legO

n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
deomai deomai
answerING
YET THE
EUNUCH
to-THE
Philip
said
I-AM-beseechING
34 And the eunuch answered Philip, and said, I pray thee, of whom speaketh the prophet this? of himself, or of some other man?
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
peri peri
Prep
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
peri peri
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
h E
Part
OF-YOU you peri peri

Prep
ABOUT ANY concerning whom eterou heteros

a_ Gen Sg m
THE
BEFORE-AVERer IS-sayING prophet
this
ABOUT self concerning himself
OR
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
ABOUT DIFFERENT ANY concerning someone
8:35 anoixas
anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
filippos to philippos ho
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai arxamenos kai archO

UP-OPENing opening apo apo

Prep
YET THE
Philip
THE
MOUTH
OF-him
AND
beginning
35 Then Philip opened his mouth, and began at the same scripture, and preached unto him Jesus.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
grafhs tauths euhggelisato graphE houtos euaggelizO

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
FROM THE
WRITing scripture
this
he-WELL-MESSAGizES to-him brings-the-well-message kata kata

Prep
THE
JESUS
8:36 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epi ti epi tis

Prep px Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
AS
YET THEY-WENT
according-to THE
WAY road udwr hudOr

n_ Nom Sg n
THEY-CAME
ON
ANY some
water
AND
36 And as they went on [their] way, they came unto a certain water: and the eunuch said, See, [here is] water; what doth hinder me to be baptized?
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eunoucos idou eunouchos idou

ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
kwluei kOluO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
IS-AVERRING THE
EUNUCH
BE-PERCEIVING water lo !
ANY what
IS-FORBIDDING ME is-preventing
baptisqhnai baptizO
vn Aor Pas
8:37
37 And Philip said, If thou believest with all thine heart, thou mayest. And he answered and said, I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.
AV
Acts 8 - Acts 9
8:38 kai ekeleusen sthnai

kai
Conj
keleuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
histEmi
vn 2Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
arma harma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai katebhsan kai katabainO


a_ Nom Pl m Prep
AND
he-ORDERS
TO-STAND THE
chariot
AND
THEY-DOWN-STEPPed both they-descended
INTO
38 And he commanded the chariot to stand still: and they went down both into the water, both Philip and the eunuch; and he baptized him.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
filippos kai o philippos kai ho

eunoucos kai ebaptisen eunouchos kai baptizO

THE
water
THE
BESIDES Philip bsboth
AND
THE
EUNUCH
AND
he-DIPizES he-baptizes
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him
8:39 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
anebhsan anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
udatos pneuma hudOr pneuma

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg n
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hrpasen harpazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
when
YET THEY-UP-STEPPed OUT OF-THE they-stepped-up eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
water
spirit
OF-Master of-Lord
SNATCHES THE snatches-away gar gar

Conj
filippon kai ouk philippos kai ou

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Part Neg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ouketi ouketi
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eunoucos eporeueto eunouchos poreuomai

n_ Nom Sg m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
39 And when they were come up out of the water, the Spirit of the Lord caught away Philip, that the eunuch saw him no more: and he went on his way rejoicing.
Philip
AND
NOT
PERCEIVED
him
NOT-STILL THE any-longer
EUNUCH
he-WENT
for
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cairwn chairO
THE
WAY
OF-him
JOYING rejoicing eis eis

Prep
8:40 filippos de
philippos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
eureqh heuriskO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
azwton kai diercomenos azOtos kai dierchomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
euhggelizeto euaggelizO
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
Philip
YET WAS-FOUND
INTO AZOTUS
AND
THRU-COMING passing-through auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
he-WELL-MESSAGizED he-brought-the-well-message kaisareian kaisareia

n_ Acc Sg f
40 But Philip was found at Azotus: and passing through he preached in all the cities, till he came to Caesarea.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
poleis pasas polis pas

ews tou heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
THE to-the
cities
ALL
TILL
OF-THE the
TO-BE-COMING him
INTO CAESAREA
AV
Acts 9
9:1 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
saulos saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
eti eti
Adv
empnewn empneO
apeilhs kai fonou apeilE kai phonos

eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THE
YET SAUL
STILL IN-BLOWING breathing-out proselqwn proserchomai

OF-threat threat tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
OF-MURDER INTO THE murder
. And Saul, yet breathing out threatenings and slaughter against the disciples of the Lord, went unto the high priest,
maqhtas tou mathEtEs ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
arcierei archiereus
n_ Dat Sg m
LEARNers disciples
OF-THE
Master Lord
to-THE
chief-SACRED-one chief-priest damaskon pros damaskos pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
9:2 hthsato
aiteO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
par para
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epistolas eis epistolE eis

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
he-REQUESTS BESIDE him requests opws hopOs

Adv
letters
INTO DAMASCUS
TOWARD THE
TOGETHER-LEADS synagogues andras te anEr te

n_ Acc Pl m Part
ean ean
Cond
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
eurh heuriskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
ontas eimi
vp Pres vxx Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
And desired of him letters to Damascus to the synagogues, that if he found any of this way, whether they were men or women, he might bring them bound unto Jerusalem.
WHICH-how IF-EVER ANY so-that any-ones gunaikas dedemenous gunE deO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m
he-MAY-BE-FINDING OF-THE
WAY
BEING
MEN
BESIDES AND bsboth
agagh agO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ni proper
WOMEN
HAVING-been-BOUND he-MAY-BE-LEADING INTO JERUSALEM he-may-be-leading-them de de

Conj
9:3 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
poreuesqai egeneto poreuomai ginomai

vn Pres midD/pasD vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eggizein eggizO
vn Pres Act
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
damaskw damaskos
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
YET THE
TO-BE-GOING
BECAME he-came-to-be
him
TO-BE-NEARING to-THE the ek ek

Prep
DAMASCUS
And as he journeyed, he came near Damascus: and suddenly there shined round about him a light from heaven:
exaifnhs te exaiphnEs te
Adv Part
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
perihstrayen periastraptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
suddenly
BESIDES him
ABOUT-GLEAM-FLINGS LIGHT flashes-about epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
OUT OF-THE
heaven
9:4 kai peswn

kai
Conj
piptO
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
fwnhn legousan phOnE legO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
AND
FALLING
ON
THE
LAND earth
he-HEARS
SOUND voice
sayING
to-him
And he fell to the earth, and heard a voice saying unto him, Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou me?
saoul saoul
ni proper
saoul saoul
ni proper
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
diwkeis diOkO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
SAUL ( Heb. ) SAUL ( Heb. ) ANY Saul Saul why ?
ME
YOU-ARE-CHASING you-are-persecuting kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
9:5 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
he-said
YET ANY who ? su su

pp 2 Nom Sg
YOU-ARE
Master ! Lord !
THE
YET I
AM
JESUS
And he said, Who art thou, Lord? And the Lord said, I am Jesus whom thou persecutest: [it is] hard for thee to kick against the pricks.
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
diwkeis diOkO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
WHOM
YOU
ARE-CHASING are-persecuting anasthqi anistEmi

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
9:6 alla
alla
Conj
kai eiselqe kai eiserchomai

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai lalhqhsetai kai laleO

but BE-UP-STANDING AND nevertheless be-you-rising ! soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE be-you-entering ! dei deO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
city
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED it-shall-be-being-spoken
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
And he trembling and astonished said, Lord, what wilt thou have me to do? And the Lord [said] unto him, Arise, and go into the city, and it shall be told thee what thou must do.
to-YOU
WHICH
ANY what andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
YOU
IS-BINDING must
TO-BE-DOING
9:7 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sunodeuontes sunodeuO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eisthkeisan eneoi histEmi enneos

vi Plup Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m
THE
YET MEN
THE the-ones ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
TOGETHER-journeyING to-him journeying-togetherwith him mhdena mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg m
HAD-STOOD stood
DUMBFOUNDed
And the men which journeyed with him stood speechless, hearing a voice, but seeing no man.
akouontes akouO
men men
Part
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
qewrountes theOreO
HEARING
INDEED OF-THE the
SOUND
NO-YET-ONE YET beholdING no-one
AV
Acts 9
9:8 hgerqh
egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
saulos saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
anewgmenwn anoigO
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WAS-ROUSED YET SAUL was-raised ofqalmwn autou ophthalmos autos

FROM THE
LAND earth
OF-HAVING-been-UP-OPENED YET THE of-having-been-opened auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
And Saul arose from the earth; and when his eyes were opened, he saw no man: but they led him by the hand, and brought [him] into Damascus.
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
eblepen blepO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ceiragwgountes de cheiragOgeO de
eishgagon eisagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
VIEWers eyes damaskon damaskos

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-him
NOT-YET-ONE he-lookED nothing he-observed
HAND-LEADING leading-by-the-hand
YET him
THEY-INTO-LED INTO they-led-him-into
DAMASCUS
9:9 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
hmeras treis hEmera treis

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
mh mE
Part Neg
blepwn blepO
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
efagen esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
And he was three days without sight, and neither did eat nor drink.
AND
he-WAS
DAYS
THREE
NO
lookING observing
AND
NOT
he-ATE
NOT-YET nor
epien pinO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
he-DRANK drank
9:10 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
maqhths en mathEtEs en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
damaskw onomati ananias damaskos onoma hananias

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
kai eipen kai legO

WAS there-was pros pros

Prep
YET ANY certain en en

Prep
LEARNer disciple
IN
DAMASCUS
to-NAME
ANANIAS
AND
said
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oramati o horama ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
anania hananias
n_ Voc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
10 . And there was a certain disciple at Damascus, named Ananias; and to him said the Lord in a vision, Ananias. And he said, Behold, I [am here], Lord.
TOWARD him
IN
sight vision kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
THE
Master Lord
ANANIAS !
THE
YET he-said
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
BE-PERCEIVING I lo !
Master ! Lord ! de de
Conj
9:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
WH
anasta
NA
anastas anistEmi
poreuqhti poreuomai
vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
THE
YET Master Lord rumhn rhumE

n_ Acc Sg f
TOWARD him
UP-STANDing rising euqeian euthus

a_ Acc Sg f
YOU-BE-BEING-GONE be-you-being-gone ! en en
Prep
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kaloumenhn kaleO
kai zhthson kai zEteO

oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
iouda ioudas
n_ Gen Sg m
11 And the Lord [said] unto him, Arise, and go into the street which is called Straight, and enquire in the house of Judas for [one] called Saul, of Tarsus: for, behold, he prayeth,
ON
THE
street
THE
one-beING-CALLED WELL-PLACE AND being-called Straight idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
SEEK seek-you !
IN
HOME house
OF-JUDAS
saulon saulos
n_ Acc Sg m
onomati tarsea onoma tarseus

gar proseucetai gar proseuchomai

SAUL
to-NAME
TARSIAN
BE-PERCEIVING for lo ! en en
Prep
he-IS-prayING
9:12 kai eiden

kai
Conj
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
oramati horama
n_ Dat Sg n
ananian onomati eiselqonta hananias onoma eiserchomai

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
he-PERCEIVED MAN
IN
sight vision
ANANIAS
to-NAME
AND
12 And hath seen in a vision a man named Ananias coming in, and putting [his] hand on him, that he might receive his sight.
epiqenta epitithEmi
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras opws cheir hopOs

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
anableyh anablepO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to-him him de de
Conj
THE
HANDS
WHICH-how he-SHOULD-BE-UP-lookING so-that he-should-be-receiving-sight hkousa akouO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
9:13 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
pollwn peri polus peri

a_ Gen Pl m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
answerED
YET ANANIAS
Master ! Lord ! tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
I-HEAR
FROM MANY
ABOUT THE concerning ierousalhm ierosoluma

ni proper
MAN
13 Then Ananias answered, Lord, I have heard by many of this man, how much evil he hath done to thy saints at Jerusalem:
toutou osa houtos hosos

pd Gen Sg m pk Acc Pl n
kaka kakos
a_ Acc Pl n
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
this
as-much-as EVIL how-much evil(p)
to-THE
HOLY-ones OF-YOU saints
he-DOES
IN
JERUSALEM
AV
Acts 9
9:14 kai wde ecei

kai
Conj
hOde
Adv
echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
exousian para exousia para

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
n_ Gen Pl m
dhsai deO
vn Aor Act
pantas tous pas ho

14 And here he hath authority from the chief priests to bind all that call on thy name.
AND
here
he-IS-HAVING authority
BESIDE OF-THE the sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
chief-SACRED-ones TO-BIND chief-priests
ALL
THE
epikaloumenous to epikaleO ho
vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
ones-ON-CALLING ones-invoking
THE
NAME
OF-YOU
9:15 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
poreuou poreuomai
oti skeuos hoti skeuos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
said
YET TOWARD him
THE
Master Lord
that
INSTRUMENT
ekloghs estin eklogE eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
bastasai to bastazO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
15 But the Lord said unto him, Go thy way: for he is a chosen vessel unto me, to bear my name before the Gentiles, and kings, and the children of Israel:
OF-choice
IS
WH
to-ME
this-one this-one te te
Part
OF-THE
TO-BEAR
THE
NAME
OF-ME
enwpion enOpion
Adv
twn
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
kai basilewn uiwn kai basileus huios

Conj n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
te te
Part
israhl israEl
ni proper
OF-NATIONS BESIDES AND bsboth nations gar upodeixw gar hupodeiknumi

KINGS
SONS
BESIDES of-ISRAEL of-Israel auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
9:16 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
osa hosos
pk Acc Pl n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
uper huper
Prep
16 For I will shew him how great things he must suffer for my name's sake.
for
SHALL-BE-UNDER-SHOWING to-him shall-be-intimating paqein paschO

vn 2Aor Act
as-much-as IS-BINDING how-much it-is-binding
him
OVER for-the-sake-of
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
onomatos mou onoma egO

THE
NAME
OF-ME
TO-BE-EMOTIONING to-be-suffering kai eishlqen kai eiserchomai

9:17 aphlqen
aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai epiqeis kai epitithEmi

ep epi
Prep
FROM-CAME came-away auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
YET ANANIAS
AND
INTO-CAME entered saoul saoul

ni proper
INTO THE
HOME house
AND
ON
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras eipen cheir legO

adelfe o adelphos ho
n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
him
THE
HANDS
he-said
SAUL ( Heb. ) brother ! Saul soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
THE
Master Lord odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
HAS-commissionED
17 And Ananias went his way, and entered into the house; and putting his hands on him said, Brother Saul, the Lord, [even] Jesus, that appeared unto thee in the way as thou camest, hath sent me, that thou mightest receive thy sight, and be filled with the Holy Ghost.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ofqeis optomai
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
ME
JESUS
THE
One-BEING-VIEWED to-YOU one-being-seen anableyhs anablepO

vs Aor Act 2 Sg
IN
THE
WAY road
to-WHICH
hrcou erchomai
opws hopOs
Adv
kai plhsqhs kai plEthO (pimplEmi)

pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
YOU-CAME
WHICH-how YOU-SHOULD-BE-UP-lookING AND so-that you-should-be-receiving-sight
SHOULD-BE-BEING-FILLED OF-spirit
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
HOLY
9:18 kai euqews apepesan autou

kai
Conj
eutheOs
Adv
apopiptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ofqalmwn ws lepides anebleyen ophthalmos hOs lepis anablepO

n_ Gen Pl m Adv n_ Nom Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
immediately
FROM-FALL fall-from
OF-him him ebaptisqh baptizO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
FROM THE
VIEWers eyes
AS
PEELS scales
he-UP-looks he-receives-sight
18 And immediately there fell from his eyes as it had been scales: and he received sight forthwith, and arose, and was baptized.
te te
Part

BESIDES AND
UP-STANDing rising
he-IS-DIPizED he-is-baptized trofhn trophE

n_ Acc Sg f
WH
9:19 kai labwn

kai
Conj
eniscuqh
NA
lambanO
eniscusen enischuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
meta meta
Prep
AND
GETTING obtaining
NURTURE nourishment
he-IN-STRONGS he-is-strengthened
BECAME he-came-to-be
YET WITH
19 And when he had received meat, he was strengthened. Then was Saul certain days with the disciples which were at Damascus.
AV
Acts 9
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
damaskw maqhtwn hmeras tinas damaskos mathEtEs hEmera tis

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl f px Acc Pl f
THE
IN
DAMASCUS
LEARNers disciples tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
DAYS
ANY some ekhrussen kErussO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
9:20 kai euqews en

kai
Conj
eutheOs
Adv
en
Prep
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m

Conj pd Nom Sg m
AND
immediately
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS he-PROCLAIMED THE synagogues he-heralded tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
JESUS
that
this-One this-one
20 And straightway he preached Christ in the synagogues, that he is the Son of God.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
IS
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
9:21 existanto
existEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
akouontes akouO
kai elegon kai legO

ouc ou
Part Neg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
are-OUT-STOOD YET ALL are-amazed estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
WH
ones-HEARING ones-hearing en
NA
AND
THEY-said
NOT
this
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
porqhsas portheO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm tous ierosoluma ho

ni proper t_ Acc Pl m
epikaloumenous epikaleO
vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m
21 But all that heard [him] were amazed, and said; Is not this he that destroyed them which called on this name in Jerusalem, and came hither for that intent, that he might bring them bound unto the chief priests?
IS
THE
one-RAVAGing one-ravaging touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
INTO
JERUSALEM
THE
ones-ON-CALLING ones-invoking dedemenous deO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai wde eis kai hOde eis

Conj Adv Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
elhluqei erchomai
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
THE
NAME
this
AND
here
INTO this
he-HAD-COME THAT HAVING-been-BOUND them
agagh agO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
n_ Acc Pl m
he-MAY-BE-LEADING ON
THE
chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests
NA
9:22 saulos
saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
mallon enedunamouto kai sunecunnen mallon endunamoO kai sugcheO

Adv vi impf Pas 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ioudaious ioudaios
a_ Acc Pl m
SAUL
YET RATHER the-more
was-IN-ABLED was-invigorated
AND
confusED threw-into-confusion
THE
JUDA-ans Jews estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
22 But Saul increased the more in strength, and confounded the Jews which dwelt at Damascus, proving that this is very Christ.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
katoikountas en katoikeO en
damaskw sumbibazwn damaskos sumbibazO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m

Conj pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING IN dwelling
DAMASCUS
TOGETHER-STEPPING that deducing
this this-one
IS
THE
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
9:23 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
eplhrounto hmerai plEroO hEmera

vi impf Pas 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl f
ikanai hikanos
a_ Nom Pl f
sunebouleusanto oi sumbouleuO ho
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ioudaios
a_ Nom Pl m
23 . And after that many days were fulfilled, the Jews took counsel to kill him:
AS
YET were-FILLED were-fulfilled auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
DAYS
enough TOGETHER-COUNSEL considerable consult
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
anelein anaireO
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING him to-be-assassinating
9:24 egnwsqh
ginOskO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
saulw saulos
n_ Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epiboulh epiboulE
n_ Nom Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
parethrounto de paratEreO de
vi impf Mid 3 Pl Conj
kai kai
Conj
IS-KNOWN
YET to-THE
SAUL
THE
ON-COUNSEL OF-them plot auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THEY-BESIDE-KEPT they-scrutinized anelwsin anaireO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
YET AND also
24 But their laying await was known of Saul. And they watched the gates day and night to kill him.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
pulas hmeras pulE hEmera

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg f
te te
Part
kai nuktos opws kai nux hopOs

Conj n_ Gen Sg f Adv
THE
GATES
OF-DAY
BESIDES AND bsboth oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
OF-NIGHT
WHICH-how him so-that nuktos dia nux dia

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
THEY-MAY-BE-UP-LIFTING they-may-be-assassinating tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
9:25 labontes
lambanO
de de
Conj

teicous teichos
n_ Gen Sg n
25 Then the disciples took him by night, and let [him] down by the wall in a basket.
GETTING
YET THE
LEARNers disciples
OF-him him
OF-NIGHT
THRU THE through
WALL
AV
Acts 9
kaqhkan kathiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
calasantes en chalaO en
spuridi spuris
n_ Dat Sg f
THEY-DOWN-LET him let-down
LOWERing lowering-him eis eis

Prep
IN
HAMPER
9:26 paragenomenos de
paraginomai
de
Conj
ierousalhm epeirazen kollasqai ierosoluma peirazO kollaO

ni proper vi impf Act 3 Sg vn Pres Pas
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais mathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
YET INTO JERUSALEM
he-triED
TO-BE-beING-JOINED to-THE
LEARNers disciples
efobounto phobeO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteuontes oti estin pisteuO hoti eimi

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
maqhths mathEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
26 And when Saul was come to Jerusalem, he assayed to join himself to the disciples: but they were all afraid of him, and believed not that he was a disciple.
AND
ALL
FEARED
him
NO
BELIEVING
that
he-IS
LEARNer disciple apostolous kai apostolos kai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
27 But Barnabas took him, and brought [him] to the apostles, and declared unto them how he had seen the Lord in the way, and that he had spoken to him, and how he had preached boldly at Damascus in the name of Jesus.
9:27 barnabas de
barnabas
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
epilabomenos epilambanomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hgagen agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
Barnabas
YET ON-GETTING getting-hold-of th ho
him
LED led-him odw hodos

n_ Dat Sg f
TOWARD THE
commissioners apostles ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
dihghsato autois pws en diEgeomai autos pOs en

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv Prep
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
t_ Dat Sg f
relatES
to-them
how
IN
THE
WAY road
he-PERCEIVED THE he-became-acquainted-with tw ho
Master Lord
AND
oti elalhsen autw hoti laleO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
kai pws en kai pOs en

Conj Adv Prep
damaskw eparrhsiasato en damaskos parrhEsiazomai en

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg Prep
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
t_ Dat Sg n
that
NA
He-TALKS he-speaks tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-him
AND
how
IN
DAMASCUS
he-is-bold he-speaks-boldly
IN
THE
NAME
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
JESUS
9:28 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg

Prep pp Gen Pl m
eisporeuomenos eisporeuomai
kai ekporeuomenos kai ekporeuomai

eis eis
Prep
28 And he was with them coming in and going out at Jerusalem.
AND
he-WAS
WITH them
INTO-GOING going-into en en
Prep
AND
OUT-GOING going-out kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
INTO
ierousalhm parrhsiazomenos ierosoluma parrhEsiazomai

ni proper vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

JERUSALEM
beING-bold
IN
THE
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord de de
Conj
29 And he spake boldly in the name of the Lord Jesus, and disputed against the Grecians: but they went about to slay him.
9:29 elalei
laleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
te te
Part
kai sunezhtei kai suzEteO

pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ellhnistas oi hellEnistEs ho
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
he-TALKED he-spoke
BESIDES AND bsboth
TOGETHER-SOUGHT TOWARD THE discussed auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
GREEKists Hellenists
THE-ones the
YET
epeceiroun anelein epicheireO anaireO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vn 2Aor Act
ON-HANDED they-took-in-hand
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING him to-be-assassinating de de

Conj
9:30 epignontes
epiginOskO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi kathgagon adelphos katagO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
kaisareian kai kaisareia kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ON-KNOWING realizing-this exapesteilan exapostellO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
YET THE
brothers brethren tarson tarsos

n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-DOWN-LED him led-down
INTO CAESAREA
AND
30 [Which] when the brethren knew, they brought him down to Caesarea, and sent him forth to Tarsus.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
THEY-OUT-FROM-PUT him they-send-away
INTO TARSUS
9:31 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
ekklhsia kaq ekklEsia kata

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias kai galilaias kai ioudaia kai galilaia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj
THE
INDEED THEN OUT-CALLED DOWN WHOLE ecclesia eirhnhn oikodomoumenh eirEnE oikodomeO
n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f
OF-THE
JUDEA
AND
GALILEE
AND
samareias eicen samareia echO

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai poreuomenh kai poreuomai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
fobw phobos
n_ Dat Sg m
31 Then had the churches rest throughout all Judaea and Galilee and Samaria, and were edified; and walking in the fear of the Lord, and in the comfort of the Holy Ghost, were multiplied.
SAMARIA
HAD
PEACE
beING-HOME-BUILDED AND being-edified
GOING
to-THE
FEAR
AV
Acts 9
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
paraklhsei tou paraklEsis ho

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos eplhquneto pneuma plEthunO

n_ Gen Sg n vi impf Pas 3 Sg
OF-THE
Master Lord
AND
to-THE
BESIDE-CALLing consolation diercomenon dierchomai
OF-THE
HOLY
spirit
was-multipliED
9:32 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
pantwn katelqein pas katerchomai

a_ Gen Pl n vn 2Aor Act
kai kai
Conj
BECAME it-occurred pros pros

Prep
YET Peter
THRU-COMING passing-through tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THRU ALL through
TO-BE-DOWN-COMING AND to-be-coming-down also
32 . And it came to pass, as Peter passed throughout all [quarters], he came down also to the saints which dwelt at Lydda.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
katoikountas ludda katoikeO ludda

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
TOWARD THE
HOLY-ones THE saints de de

Conj
ones-DOWN-HOMING LYDDA ones-dwelling at-Lydda onomati ainean onoma aineas

9:33 euren
heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ekei anqrwpon tina ekei anthrOpos tis

Adv n_ Acc Sg m px Acc Sg m
ex ek
Prep
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
oktw oktO
ni numeral
he-FOUND
YET there
human
ANY certain
to-NAME
ENEAS
OUT OF-YEARS EIGHT
33 And there he found a certain man named Aeneas, which had kept his bed eight years, and was sick of the palsy.
katakeimenon katakeimai
epi krabattou os epi krabattos hos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m pr Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
paralelumenos paraluO
DOWN-LYING lying-down
ON
PALLET
WHO
WAS
HAVING-been-paralyzED
9:34 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ainea aineas
n_ Voc Sg m
iatai iaomai
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
said
to-him
THE
Peter
ENEAS !
IS-HEALING
YOU
JESUS
34 And Peter said unto him, Aeneas, Jesus Christ maketh thee whole: arise, and make thy bed. And he arose immediately.
cristos anasthqi christos anistEmi

kai strwson kai strOnnumi

seautw kai euqews anesth seautou kai eutheOs anistEmi

pf 3 Dat Sg m Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ANOINTED Christ
BE-UP-STANDING AND be-you-rising ! auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
STREW-YOU to-self spread-you-your-pallet ! to-yourself pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
AND
immediately
he-UP-STOOD he-rose kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
9:35 kai eidan

kai
Conj
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ludda ludda
n_ Acc Sg f
sarwna sarOn
n_ Acc Sg m
35 And all that dwelt at Lydda and Saron saw him, and turned to the Lord.
AND
PERCEIVE are-aware-of
him
ALL
THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING LYDDA ones-dwelling at-Lydda
AND
THE
SARON
oitines epestreyan epi ton hostis epistrephO epi ho

pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
WHO-ANY who-any
ON-TURN turn-back iopph ioppE

n_ Dat Sg f
ON
THE
Master Lord maqhtria onomati tabiqa h mathEtria onoma tabitha hos

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Dat Sg n ni proper pr Nom Sg f
36 . Now there was at Joppa a certain disciple named Tabitha, which by interpretation is called Dorcas: this woman was full of good works and almsdeeds which she did.
9:36 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
IN
JOPPA
YET ANY certain legetai legO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
WAS there-was dorkas dorkas

n_ Nom Sg f
LEARNeress disciple(f) auth autos
to-NAME
TABITHA
WHICH
diermhneuomenh diermEneuO
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
plhrhs plErEs
a_ Nom Sg f
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
agaqwn agathos
a_ Gen Pl n
pp Nom Sg f
beING-THRU-TRANSLATED IS-beING-said being-interpreted kai elehmosunwn wn kai eleEmosunE hos

Conj n_ Gen Pl f pr Gen Pl f
Dorcas (GAZELLE) this-one WAS Dorcas this-woman
FULL
OF-ACTS
GOOD
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AND
OF-alms
WHICH
she-DID
9:37 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais ekeinais asqenhsasan authn hEmera ekeinos astheneO autos

n_ Dat Pl f pd Dat Pl f vp Aor Act Acc Sg f pp Acc Sg f
vn 2Aor Act
BECAME it-occurred lousantes louO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
YET IN
THE
DAYS
NA
those
being-UN-FIRM being-infirm en en
Prep
her
37 And it came to pass in those days, that she was sick, and died: whom when they had washed, they laid [her] in an upper chamber.
de de
Conj
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
uperww huperOon
n_ Dat Sg n
BATHing bathing-her
YET THEY-PLACE
her
IN
OVER-apartment upper-chamber iopph ioppE

n_ Dat Sg f
9:38 eggus de
eggus
Adv
de
Conj
oushs eimi
luddas th ludda ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai akousantes oti mathEtEs akouO hoti

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj
NEAR
YET OF-BEING
LYDDA
to-THE
JOPPA
THE
LEARNers disciples
HEARing
that
38 And forasmuch as Lydda was nigh to Joppa, and the disciples had heard that Peter was there, they sent unto him two men, desiring [him] that he
AV
Acts 9
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
apesteilan apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
duo duo
ni numeral
andras pros anEr pros

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
would not delay to come to them.
Peter
IS
IN
her herit oknhshs okneO
THEY-commission TWO dispatch
MEN
TOWARD him
parakalountes mh parakaleO mE
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg
dielqein dierchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ews hmwn heOs hemeis

Conj pp 1 Gen Pl
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
BESIDE-CALLING entreating
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-SLOTH-ING TO-BE-THRU-COMING TILL tillto you-should-be-being-slothful to-be-passing-through petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-US us
39 Then Peter arose and went with them. When he was come, they brought him into the upper chamber: and all the widows stood by him weeping, and shewing the coats and garments which Dorcas made, while she was with them.
9:39 anastas
anistEmi
de de
Conj
sunhlqen sunerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois on autos hos

pp Dat Pl m pr Acc Sg m
paragenomenon paraginomai
UP-STANDing rising anhgagon anagO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Att
YET Peter
TOGETHER-CAME to-them came-togetherwith them
WHOM
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along pasai pas

a_ Nom Pl f
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
uperwon huperOon
n_ Acc Sg n
kai paresthsan autw kai paristEmi autos

ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
chrai chEra
n_ Nom Pl f
THEY-UP-LED they-led-up klaiousai klaiO

INTO THE
OVER-apartment AND upper-chamber
BESIDE-STAND stand-beside
to-him him osa hosos
ALL
THE
WIDOWS
kai epideiknumenai citwnas kai imatia kai epideiknumi chitOn kai himation
Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Pl f n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl n
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
met meta
Prep
pk Acc Pl n
LAMENTING
AND
ON-SHOWING exhibiting h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
TUNICS
AND
GARMENTS as-many-as made whatever
WITH
autwn ousa autos eimi

pp Gen Pl f vp Pres vxx Nom Sg f
dorkas dorkas
n_ Nom Sg f
them
BEING
THE
Dorcas
9:40 ekbalwn
ekballO
de de
Conj
exw exO
Adv
pantas o pas ho
a_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
kai qeis kai tithEmi

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OUT-CASTING ejecting-them
YET OUT ALL outside
THE
Peter
AND
PLACING
THE
gonata proshuxato kai epistreyas gonu proseuchomai kai epistrephO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Aor midD 3 Sg Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tabiqa tabitha
ni proper
40 But Peter put them all forth, and kneeled down, and prayed; and turning [him] to the body said, Tabitha, arise. And she opened her eyes: and when she saw Peter, she sat up.
KNEES
he-prays prays h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
ON-TURNing turning-about hnoixen anoigO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TOWARD THE
BODY
said he-said
TABITHA
anasthqi anistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous auths ophthalmos autos

n_ Acc Pl m pp Gen Sg f
kai idousa kai eidO

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
BE-UP-STANDING THE-one be-you-rising ! the ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET UP-OPENS she-opens
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-her
AND
PERCEIVING
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
anekaqisen anakathizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
Peter
she-is-UP-seated she-sits-up de de
Conj
9:41 dous
didOmi
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
anesthsen authn anistEmi autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg f
fwnhsas phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
GIVING
YET to-her her chras chEra

n_ Acc Pl f
HAND
he-UP-STANDS he-raises authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
her
SOUNDing summoning
YET THE
41 And he gave her [his] hand, and lifted her up, and when he had called the saints and widows, presented her alive.
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
paresthsen paristEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
zwsan zaO
HOLY-ones AND saints
THE
WIDOWS he-BESIDE-STANDS her he-presents egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
LIVING
NA
9:42 gnwston de
gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
de
Conj
kaq kata
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
iopphs kai episteusan ioppE kai pisteuO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
42 And it was known throughout all Joppa; and many believed in the Lord.
KNOWN
YET it-BECAME
DOWN WHOLE
OF-THE
JOPPA
AND
BELIEVE
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
MANY
ON
THE
Master Lord hmeras ikanas hEmera hikanos

9:43 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
meinai menO
vn Aor Act
en en
Prep
iopph ioppE
n_ Dat Sg f
para para
Prep
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
43 And it came to pass, that he tarried many days in Joppa with one Simon a tanner.
it-BECAME he-became
YET DAYS
enough TO-REMAIN IN considerable
JOPPA
BESIDE ANY certain
SIMON
AV
Acts 9 - Acts 10
bursei burseus
n_ Dat Sg m
tanner
AV
Acts 10
10:1 anhr
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
kaisareia onomati kornhlios ekatontarchs ek kaisareia onoma kornElios hekatontarchEs ek

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Prep
MAN
YET ANY certain
IN
CAESAREA
to-NAME
CORNELIUS
OUT
. There was a certain man in Caesarea called Cornelius, a centurion of the band called the Italian [band],
speirhs ths speira ho

kaloumenhs kaleO
italikhs italikos
a_ Gen Sg f
OF-BAND of-squadron
THE
beING-CALLED
OF-ITALY-ic Italian ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
10:2 eusebhs kai foboumenos

eusebEs
a_ Nom Sg m
kai
Conj
phobeO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
sun sun
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
devout
AND
FEARING
THE
God
TOGETHER to-EVERY togetherwith entire law laos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
HOME house
[A] devout [man], and one that feared God with all his house, which gave much alms to the people, and prayed to God alway.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
poiwn poieO
elehmosunas pollas tw eleEmosunE polus ho

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f t_ Dat Sg m
kai deomenos kai deomai

OF-him
DOING
alms
MANY
to-THE
PEOPLE
AND
beseechING
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE the
God
THRU EVERY during all en en

Prep
10:3 eiden
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oramati fanerws wsei peri horama phanerOs hOsei peri

n_ Dat Sg n Adv Adv Prep
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
enathn ths enatos ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
he-PERCEIVED IN
sight vision qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
APPEARly manifestly
AS-IF
ABOUT HOUR
NINth
OF-THE
DAY
He saw in a vision evidently about the ninth hour of the day an angel of God coming in to him, and saying unto him, Cornelius.
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eiselqonta eiserchomai
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai eiponta kai legO

Conj vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
MESSENGER OF-THE
God
TOWARD him
AND
sayING
to-him
kornhlie kornElios
n_ Voc Sg m
CORNELIUS !
10:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
atenisas atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai emfobos genomenos kai emphobos ginomai

Conj a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
THE-one the-one estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YET STRETCHing looking-intently-at kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
to-him him de de
Conj
AND
IN-FEAR affrighted ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
BECOMING
said
ANY what ?
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
proseucai sou proseuchE su

kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
And when he looked on him, he was afraid, and said, What is it, Lord? And he said unto him, Thy prayers and thine alms are come up for a memorial before God.
it-IS
master ! lord !
he-said
YET to-him
THE
prayers
OF-YOU
AND
THE
elehmosunai sou eleEmosunE su

anebhsan eis anabainO eis

mnhmosunon emprosqen mnEmosunon emprosthen

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alms
OF-YOU
UP-STEPPed ascended
INTO REMINDer memorial
God
10:5 kai nun pemyon

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
pempO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
andras eis anEr eis

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
iopphn kai metapemyai simwna tina ioppE kai metapempO simOn tis
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Aor midD 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m px Acc Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
And now send men to Joppa, and call for [one] Simon, whose surname is Peter:
AND
NOW SEND send-you ! petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
MEN
INTO JOPPA
AND
after-SEND send-after-you !
SIMON
ANY certain
WHO
epikaleitai epikaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-ON-CALLED Peter is-being-surnamed
10:6 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
xenizetai para xenizO para

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
simwni simOn
n_ Dat Sg m
bursei burseus
n_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
this-one this-one para para

Prep
IS-LODGizING is-lodging
BESIDE ANY certain
SIMON
tanner
to-WHOM
IS
HOME house
He lodgeth with one Simon a tanner, whose house is by the sea side: he shall tell thee what thou oughtest to do.
qalassan thalassa
n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE SEA
AV
Acts 10
10:7 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
lalwn laleO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
fwnhsas phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AS
YET FROM-CAME came-away twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
MESSENGER THE
one-TALKING one-speaking twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
to-him
SOUNDing summoning
duo duo
ni numeral
oiketwn kai stratiwthn eusebh oiketEs kai stratiOtEs eusebEs

n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
proskarterountwn autw proskartereO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Dat Sg m
And when the angel which spake unto Cornelius was departed, he called two of his household servants, and a devout soldier of them that waited on him continually;
TWO
OF-THE
domestics
AND
WARrior soldier
devout
OF-THE
ones-perseverING ones-waiting-on thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-him him iopphn ioppE

n_ Acc Sg f
8
10:8 kai exhghsamenos apanta autois apesteilen autous eis

kai
Conj
exEgeomai
hapas
a_ Acc Pl n
autos
pp Dat Pl m
apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autos
pp Acc Pl m
eis
Prep
AND
unfolding
ALL(emph.) it-all(emph.) epaurion epaurion

Adv
And when he had declared all [these] things unto them, he sent them to Joppa.
to-them
them
INTO THE
JOPPA
10:9 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
odoiporountwn ekeinwn hodoiporeO ekeinos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
eggizontwn eggizO
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW OF-WAYS-GOING of-journeying petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-those AND of-those-ones
to-THE the
city
OF-NEARING of-ones-drawing-near ekthn hektos

a_ Acc Sg f
. On the morrow, as they went on their journey, and drew nigh unto the city, Peter went up upon the housetop to pray about the sixth hour:
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
dwma dOma
n_ Acc Sg n
proseuxasqai peri proseuchomai peri

vn Aor midD Prep
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
UP-STEPPed went-up
Peter
ON
THE
housetop
TO-pray
ABOUT HOUR
SIXth
10:10 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
prospeinos prospeinos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai hqelen kai thelO

geusasqai paraskeuazontwn de geuomai paraskeuazO de

vn Aor midD vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj
he-BECAME
YET TOWARD-HUNGRY AND ravenous ep epi

Prep
WILLED
TO-TASTE to-taste-food
OF-preparING of-preparing-it
YET
10 And he became very hungry, and would have eaten: but while they made ready, he fell into a trance,
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ekstasis ekstasis
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-them
BECAME
ON
him
OUT-STANDing ecstasy ouranon anewgmenon ouranos anoigO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
10:11 kai qewrei

kai
Conj
theOreO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai katabainon kai katabainO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
skeuos skeuos
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
he-IS-beholdING THE
heaven
HAVING-been-UP-OPENED AND having-been-opened kaqiemenon kathiEmi

DOWN-STEPPING INSTRUMENT descending utensil epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
11 And saw heaven opened, and a certain vessel descending unto him, as it had been a great sheet knit at the four corners, and let down to the earth:
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ws oqonhn megalhn tessarsin arcais hOs othonE mega tessares archE

Adv n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ANY certain
AS
SHEET
GREAT large
to-FOUR
ORIGINals beING-LET-DOWN edges
ON
OF-THE the
LAND earth ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
10:12 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
uphrcen huparchO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tetrapoda kai erpeta ths tetrapous kai herpeton ho

a_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
IN
WHICH
belongED
ALL
THE
FOUR-FOOTS quadrupeds
AND
REPTILES
OF-THE
LAND earth
AND
12 Wherein were all manner of fourfooted beasts of the earth, and wild beasts, and creeping things, and fowls of the air.
peteina peteinon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
heaven
10:13 kai egeneto

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
anastas anistEmi
petre petros
n_ Voc Sg m
quson thuO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
13 And there came a voice to him, Rise, Peter; kill, and eat.
AND
BECAME
SOUND voice
TOWARD him
UP-STANDing rising
Peter !
SACRIFICE sacrifice-you !
AND
fage esthiO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
BE-EATING be-you-eating !
10:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mhdamws mEdamOs
Adv
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
oti oudepote hoti oudepote

Conj Adv
THE
YET Peter
said
NO-YET-SIMULTANEOUS-AS Master ! far-be-it-from-me Lord !
that
NOT-YET-?-when never
14 But Peter said, Not so, Lord; for I have never eaten any thing that is common or unclean.
efagon esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
koinon koinos
a_ Acc Sg n
kai akaqarton kai akathartos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
I-ATE
EVERY eanything
COMMON AND contaminating
UN-clean unclean
AV
Acts 10
10:15 kai fwnh

kai
Conj
phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
palin ek palin ek
Adv Prep
deuterou pros deuteros pros

a_ Gen Sg n Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
SOUND voice
AGAIN
OUT OF-second of-second-time koinou koinoO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
TOWARD him
WHICH which(p)
THE
God
15 And the voice [spake] unto him again the second time, What God hath cleansed, [that] call not thou common.
ekaqarisen su katharizO su
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Nom Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
cleansES
YOU
NO
BE-COMMONING be-you-counting-contaminating ! epi tris epi tris

Prep Adv
10:16 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg

Conj Adv
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
skeuos skeuos
n_ Nom Sg n
16 This was done thrice: and the vessel was received up again into heaven.
this
YET BECAME occurred ouranon ouranos

n_ Acc Sg m
ON
THRice AND
immediately WAS-UP-GOTTEN THE straightway was-taken-up
INSTRUMENT utensil
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
heaven
10:17 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
dihporei diaporeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
an an
Part
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AS
YET IN
self himself eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
was-bewilderED THE
Peter
ANY what ? oi ho
EVER MAY-BE
THE
orama horama
n_ Nom Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
17 Now while Peter doubted in himself what this vision which he had seen should mean, behold, the men which were sent from Cornelius had made enquiry for Simon's house, and stood before the gate,
t_ Nom Pl m
sight vision
WHICH
he-PERCEIVED BE-PERCEIVING THE lo ! upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
MEN
THE
apestalmenoi apostellO
kornhliou dierwthsantes thn kornElios dierOtaO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
ones-HAVING-been-commissionED by ones-having-been-dispatched tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
CORNELIUS
THRU-asking asking-for
THE
HOME house
simwnos epesthsan simOn ephistEmi

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
pulwna pulOn
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
SIMON
THEY-ON-STAND ON stand-by
WH
THE
NA
GATE portal ei ei
Cond
10:18 kai fwnhsantes

kai
Conj
epuqonto
phOneO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
epunqanonto punthanomai
simwn simOn
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
SOUNDing shouting petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-UP-ASCERTAINED they-inquired-to-ascertain enqade enthade

Adv
IF
SIMON
THE
18 And called, and asked whether Simon, which was surnamed Peter, were lodged there.
epikaloumenos epikaleO
xenizetai xenizO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
one-beING-ON-CALLED Peter one-being-surnamed
IN-PLACE-YET IS-LODGizING in-this-place is-lodging dienqumoumenou dienthumeomai

10:19 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
oramatos eipen horama legO

19 . While Peter thought on the vision, the Spirit said unto him, Behold, three men seek thee.
OF-THE
NA
YET Peter
THRU-IN-FEELING being-engrossed pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
ABOUT THE concerning andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
WH
sight vision duo

NA
said
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
treis treis
n_ Nom Pl m
zhtountes zEteO
to-him
THE
spirit
THREE
SEEKING
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
10:20 alla anastas

alla
Conj
anistEmi
katabhqi katabainO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg

sun sun
Prep
autois mhden autos mEdeis

pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
but
UP-STANDing rising oti egw hoti egO

Conj
BE-DOWN-STEPPING AND be-you-descending ! apestalka apostellO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
BE-GOING be-you-going ! autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
NO-YET-ONE nothing
20 Arise therefore, and get thee down, and go with them, doubting nothing: for I have sent them.
diakrinomenos diakrinO
pp 1 Nom Sg
beING-THRU-JUDGED that doubting
HAVE-commissionED them
AV
Acts 10
10:21 katabas
katabainO
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
andras eipen anEr legO

idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
DOWN-STEPPing descending eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
YET Peter
TOWARD THE
MEN
said
BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
zhteite zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
aitia aitia
n_ Nom Sg f
di dia
Prep
21 Then Peter went down to the men which were sent unto him from Cornelius; and said, Behold, I am he whom ye seek: what [is] the cause wherefore ye are come?
AM
WHOM
YE-ARE-SEEKING ANY what ?
THE
cause
THRU WHICH because-of
pareste pareimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
YE-ARE-BESIDE-BEING ye-are-present
10:22 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kornhlios ekatontarchs anhr kornElios hekatontarchEs anEr

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
dikaios dikaios
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THE-ones the foboumenos phobeO
YET say they-say ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
CORNELIUS
MAN
JUST
AND
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
marturoumenos te martureO te
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Part
upo olou hupo holos

Prep a_ Gen Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
22 And they said, Cornelius the centurion, a just man, and one that feareth God, and of good report among all the nation of the Jews, was warned from God by an holy angel to send for thee into his house, and to hear words of thee.
FEARING
THE
God
beING-witnessED being-attested
BESIDES by
WHOLE
OF-THE the
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ecrhmatisqh upo aggelou ioudaios chrEmatizO hupo aggelos

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep n_ Gen Sg m
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg m
metapemyasqai metapempO
vn Aor midD
NATION
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews oikon oikos
IS-apprizED
by
MESSENGER HOLY
TO-after-SEND to-send-after para para

Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai akousai rhmata kai akouO rhEma

Conj vn Aor Act n_ Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
n_ Acc Sg m
YOU
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-him
AND
TO-HEAR
declarations BESIDE YOU
10:23 eiskalesamenos oun

eiskaleO
oun
Conj
autous exenisen autos xenizO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
anastas anistEmi
INTO-CALLing calling-into-them exhlqen exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THEN them
he-LODGizES to-THE he-lodges twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
YET ON-MORROW UP-STANDing rising apo apo

Prep
23 Then called he them in, and lodged [them]. And on the morrow Peter went away with them, and certain brethren from Joppa accompanied him.
sun sun
Prep
autois kai tines autos kai tis

pp Dat Pl m Conj px Nom Pl m
adelfwn twn adelphos ho

iopphs ioppE
n_ Gen Sg f
he-OUT-CAME TOGETHER to-them he-came-away with-them sunhlqon sunerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
ANY some
OF-THE
brothers brethren
OF-THE-ones FROM JOPPA the
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
TOGETHER-CAME to-him came-togetherwith him
10:24 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kaisareian o kaisareia ho
de de
Conj
kornhlios kornElios
n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW he-INTO-CAME INTO THE he-entered prosdokwn prosdokaO

CAESAREA
THE
YET CORNELIUS
24 And the morrow after they entered into Caesarea. And Cornelius waited for them, and had called together his kinsmen and near friends.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
autous sugkalesamenos tous autos sugkaleO ho

pp Acc Pl m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
suggeneis suggenEs
a_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
WAS
TOWARD-SEEMING them hoping-for anagkaious filous anagkaios philos

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
TOGETHER-CALLing calling-together
THE
TOGETHER-generateds OF-him relatives
AND
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THE
necessary intimate
FOND-ones friends tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
10:25 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
sunanthsas sunantaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AS
YET BECAME
OF-THE
TO-BE-INTO-COMING THE to-be-entering epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
Peter
TOGETHER-meeting meeting-with prosekunhsen proskuneO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
25 And as Peter was coming in, Cornelius met him, and fell down at his feet, and worshipped [him].
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kornhlios peswn kornElios piptO

podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
to-him him
THE
CORNELIUS
FALLING
ON
THE
FEET
he-worships worships-him
AV
Acts 10
10:26 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legwn legO
anasthqi anistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai egw kai egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
26 But Peter took him up, saying, Stand up; I myself also am a man.
THE
YET Peter
ROUSES raises
him
sayING
BE-UP-STANDING AND be-you-rising ! also
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
anqrwpos eimi anthrOpos eimi

SAME myself
human
AM
10:27 kai sunomilwn

kai
Conj
sunomileO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai euriskei kai heuriskO

sunelhluqotas sunerchomai
27 And as he talked with him, he went in, and found many that were come together.
AND
TOGETHER-conversING to-him conversing-with him
he-INTO-CAME AND he-entered
IS-FINDING
HAVING-TOGETHER-COME having-come-together
pollous polus
a_ Acc Pl m
MANY many-ones
10:28 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
te te
Part
pros pros
Prep
autous umeis autos humeis

pp Acc Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
epistasqe epistamai
ws aqemiton hOs athemitos

Adv a_ Nom Sg n
he-AVERRed
BESIDES TOWARD them
YOU(p) ye h E
Part
ARE-beING-adeptED AS are-being-versed-in-the-fact how prosercesqai proserchomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
UN-PLACED illicit
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
ioudaiw kollasqai ioudaios kollaO

a_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Pas
allofulw allophulos
a_ Dat Sg m
28 And he said unto them, Ye know how that it is an unlawful thing for a man that is a Jew to keep company, or come unto one of another nation; but God hath shewed me that I should not call any man common or unclean.
it-IS
to-MAN
JUDA-an Jew qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-beING-JOINED OR
TO-BE-TOWARD-COMING to-other-tribe to-be-coming-to another-tribe koinon koinos

a_ Acc Sg m
kamoi kagO
pp 1 Dat Sg Con
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
edeixen deiknumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mhdena mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
akaqarton legein akathartos legO

a_ Acc Sg m vn Pres Act
AND-to-ME
THE
God
SHOWS
NO-YET-ONE COMMON OR no-any contaminating
UN-clean unclean
TO-BE-sayING
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
human
10:29 dio
dio
Conj
kai anantirrhtws kai anantirrhEtOs

Conj Adv
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
metapemfqeis punqanomai metapempO punthanomai

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
THRU-WHICH AND wherefore also tini tis

pi Dat Sg m
UN-INSTEAD-declare-ly I-CAME without-gainsaying
BEING-after-SENT being-sent-after
I-AM-UP-ASCERTAINING THEN I-am-inquiring-to-ascertain
29 Therefore came I [unto you] without gainsaying, as soon as I was sent for: I ask therefore for what intent ye have sent for me?
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
metepemyasqe me metapempO egO

to-ANY to-what ?
saying account
YE-after-SEND ye-send-after
ME
10:30 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kornhlios efh kornElios phEmi

apo apo
Prep
tetarths hmeras tetartos hEmera

mecri tauths ths mechri houtos ho

Adv pd Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
AND
THE
CORNELIUS
AVERRed
FROM FOURth
DAY
UNTO
this
THE
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enathn proseucomenos enatos proseuchomai

a_ Acc Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
30 And Cornelius said, Four days ago I was fasting until this hour; and at the ninth hour I prayed in my house, and, behold, a man stood before me in bright clothing,
HOUR
I-WAS
THE
NINth
prayING
IN
THE
HOME house lampra lampros

a_ Dat Sg f
OF-ME
AND
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
esth histEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
enwpion mou enOpion egO

Adv pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
esqhti esthEs
n_ Dat Sg f
STOOD
OF-ME me
IN
GARMENT SHINing attire splendid h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
10:31 kai fhsin

kai
Conj
phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kornhlie kornElios
n_ Voc Sg m
eishkousqh sou eisakouO su

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg
proseuch kai ai proseuchE kai ho

n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl f
AND
he-IS-AVERRING CORNELIUS ! IS-INTO-HEARD is-averring is-hearkened-to emnhsqhsan mnaomai

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
OF-YOU
THE
prayer
AND
THE
31 And said, Cornelius, thy prayer is heard, and thine alms are had in remembrance in the sight of God.
elehmosunai sou eleEmosunE su


Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alms
OF-YOU
ARE-REMINDED IN-VIEW are-brought-to-remembrance in-sight-of
OF-THE the
God
AV
Acts 10
10:32 pemyon
pempO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
eis eis
Prep
iopphn kai metakalesai simwna os ioppE kai metakaleO simOn hos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm Aor Mid 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg m
epikaleitai epikaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
SEND send-you ! petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
THEN INTO JOPPA
AND
WITH-CALL call-for-you !
SIMON
WHO
IS-beING-ON-CALLED is-being-surnamed qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
xenizetai en xenizO en
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
simwnos bursews para simOn burseus para

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Prep
32 Send therefore to Joppa, and call hither Simon, whose surname is Peter; he is lodged in the house of [one] Simon a tanner by the sea side: who, when he cometh, shall speak unto thee.
Peter
this-one this-one
IS-LODGizING is-lodging epemya pempO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
IN
HOME house se su
OF-SIMON
tanner
BESIDE SEA
10:33 exauths oun

exautEs
Adv
oun
Conj
pros pros
Prep
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
te te
Part
kalws epoihsas kalOs poieO

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Sg
pp 2 Acc Sg
forthwith
THEN I-SEND
TOWARD YOU
YOU
BESIDES IDEALly
DO
paragenomenos nun oun paraginomai nun oun

vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m Adv Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
paresmen pareimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
33 Immediately therefore I sent to thee; and thou hast well done that thou art come. Now therefore are we all here present before God, to hear all things that are commanded thee of God.
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along akousai panta akouO pas

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Pl n
NOW THEN ALL
WE
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-THE the
God
ARE-BESIDE-BEING are-present
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
prostetagmena soi prostassO su

vp Perf Pas Acc Pl n pp 2 Dat Sg
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-HEAR
ALL
THE
HAVING-been-bidden
to-YOU you stoma stoma

n_ Acc Sg n
by
THE
Master Lord ep epi

Prep
10:34 anoixas
anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
UP-OPENing opening
YET Peter
THE
MOUTH
said
ON
TRUTH
34 . Then Peter opened [his] mouth, and said, Of a truth I perceive that God is no respecter of persons:
katalambanomai oti ouk katalambanO hoti ou

vi Pres Mid 1 Sg Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
proswpolhmpths o prosOpolEptEs ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-DOWN-GETTING I-am-grasping
that
NOT
IS
partial-er partial o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
10:35 all en
alla
Conj
en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
eqnei ethnos
n_ Dat Sg n
foboumenos phobeO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
but
IN
EVERY
NATION
THE
one-FEARING one-fearing autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
Him
AND
35 But in every nation he that feareth him, and worketh righteousness, is accepted with him.
ergazomenos ergazomai
dikaiosunhn dektos dikaiosunE dektos

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
workING acting
JUSTice righteousness logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
NA
RECEIVable to-Him acceptable
IS
10:36 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
apesteilen tois apostellO ho

uiois huios
n_ Dat Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
THE
saying word
WHICH
He-commissions he-dispatches ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL of-Israel pantwn kurios pas kurios

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
36 The word which [God] sent unto the children of Israel, preaching peace by Jesus Christ: (he is Lord of all:)
euaggelizomenos eirhnhn dia euaggelizO eirEnE dia

vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f Prep
cristou outos christos houtos

n_ Gen Sg m pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WELL-MESSAGizING bringing-the-well-message
PEACE of-peace
THRU JESUS through to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
ANOINTED Christ
this-One this-one rhma rhEma

n_ Acc Sg n
IS
OF-ALL
Master Lord
37 That word, [I say], ye know, which was published throughout all Judaea, and began from Galilee, after the baptism which John preached;
10:37 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
genomenon ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg n
kaq kata
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye
HAVE-PERCEIVED THE are-aware-of apo apo

Prep
BECOMING
declaration DOWN WHOLE
OF-THE
ioudaias arxamenos ioudaia archO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
galilaias meta to galilaia meta ho

n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Acc Sg n

JUDEA
beginning
FROM THE
GALILEE
after
THE
DIPism baptism
WHICH
ekhruxen iwannhs kErussO iOannEs

PROCLAIMS heralds
JOHN
10:38 ihsoun
iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
nazareq ws ecrisen nazareth hOs chriO

ni proper Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
JESUS
THE
FROM NAZARETH AS
ANOINTS
Him
THE
God
to-spirit
38 How God anointed Jesus of Nazareth with the Holy Ghost and with power: who went about doing good, and healing all that were oppressed of the
AV
Acts 10
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
kai dunamei os kai dunamis hos

Conj n_ Dat Sg f pr Nom Sg m
dihlqen dierchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
euergetwn euergeteO
kai iwmenos kai iaomai

pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
devil; for God was with him.
HOLY
AND
ABILITY to-power
WHO
THRU-CAME WELL-ACTING passed-through being-benefactor diabolou diabolos

a_ Gen Sg m
AND
HEALING
ALL
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
katadunasteuomenous upo tou katadunasteuO hupo ho

vp Pres Pas Acc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
ones-beING-DOWN-ABLED ones-being-tyrannized-over met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
by
THE
THRU-CASTer that Adversary
THE
God
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
WAS
WITH Him
10:39 kai hmeis

kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
martures pantwn wn martus pas hos

n_ Nom Pl m a_ Gen Pl n pr Gen Pl n
te te
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cwra chOra
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
WE we-are
witnesses
OF-ALL
NA
WHICH
He-DOES
IN
BESIDES THE bsboth
SPACE country kremasantes kremannumi

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
39 And we are witnesses of all things which he did both in the land of the Jews, and in Jerusalem; whom they slew and hanged on a tree:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai ioudaios kai

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
en en
Prep
ierousalhm on ierosoluma hos

ni proper pr Acc Sg m
kai aneilan kai anaireO

OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
IN
JERUSALEM
WHOM
AND also
THEY-UP-LIFT HANGing they-assassinate hanging-him
epi xulou epi xulon

Prep n_ Gen Sg n
ON
WOOD pole qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
10:40 touton o
houtos
pd Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
NA
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
40 Him God raised up the third day, and shewed him openly;
this-One this-one edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
God
ROUSES
IN
THE
third
DAY
AND
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
emfanh emphanEs
a_ Acc Sg m
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
GIVES
Him
IN-APPEARed TO-BE-BECOMING disclosed tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
10:41 ou
ou
Part Neg
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
alla martusin tois alla martus ho

Conj n_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
NOT
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
PEOPLE
but
to-witnesses
THE
41 Not to all the people, but unto witnesses chosen before of God, [even] to us, who did eat and drink with him after he rose from the dead.
prokeceirotonhmenois procheirotoneO
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
oitines sunefagomen kai hostis sunesthiO kai

pr Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj
BEFORE-HAVING-been-HAND-STRETCHED by ones-having-been-selected-before sunepiomen sumpinO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
THE
God
to-US
WHO-ANY who-any ek ek
Prep
TOGETHER-ATE ate-together
AND
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
meta to meta ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
anasthnai auton anistEmi autos

nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
TOGETHER-DRANK to-Him drank-together with-him
after
THE
TO-UP-STAND to-rise tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
Him
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones kai diamarturasqai oti kai diamarturomai hoti

Conj vn Aor midD Conj
42 And he commanded us to preach unto the people, and to testify that it is he which was ordained of God [to be] the Judge of quick and dead.
10:42 kai parhggeilen hmin

kai
Conj
paraggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
khruxai kErussO
vn Aor Act
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
He-chargES
to-US us o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-PROCLAIM to-THE to-herald wrismenos horizO

PEOPLE
AND
TO-THRU-witness to-certify kriths kritEs

n_ Nom Sg m
that
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
this this-one zwntwn zaO
IS
THE
One-HAVING-been-definED by one-having-been-specified
THE
God
JUDGer judge
kai nekrwn kai nekros

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
OF-LIVING of-ones-living
AND
OF-DEAD of-dead-ones profhtai prophEtEs

n_ Nom Pl m
10:43 toutw pantes oi

houtos
pd Dat Sg m
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
marturousin afesin martureO aphesis

vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
to-this to-this-one
ALL
THE
BEFORE-AVERers ARE-witnessING prophets are-testifying
FROM-LETTing OF-misses pardon of-sins
43 To him give all the prophets witness, that through his name whosoever believeth in him shall receive remission of sins.
AV
Acts 10 - Acts 11
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pisteuonta pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
TO-BE-GETTING THRU THE to-be-obtaining through auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
NAME
OF-Him
EVERY
THE
INTO
Him
10:44 eti
eti
Adv
lalountos laleO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
epepesen to epipiptO ho
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
STILL TALKING of-speaking pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
Peter
THE
declarations these
ON-FALLS falls-on logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
44 . While Peter yet spake these words, the Holy Ghost fell on all them which heard the word.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
epi pantas tous epi pas ho

Prep a_ Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
akouontas akouO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
spirit
THE
HOLY
ON
ALL
THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing pistoi pistos

a_ Nom Pl f
THE
WH
saying word oi
NA
10:45 kai exesthsan

kai
Conj
existEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
osoi hosos
pk Nom Pl m
AND
WERE-OUT-STOOD THE were-amazed tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
OUT OF-ABOUT-CUTTing ones-BELIEVing of-circumcision believing-ones oti hoti

Conj
as-many-as whoever h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
sunhlqan sunerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
kai epi ta kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
dwrea dOrea
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
45 And they of the circumcision which believed were astonished, as many as came with Peter, because that on the Gentiles also was poured out the gift of the Holy Ghost.
TOGETHER-COME to-THE come-together with-the

WH WH WH
Peter
NA
that AND seeing-that also agiou hagios

a_ Gen Sg n
NA
ON
THE
NATIONS
THE
gratuity
OF-THE
pneumatos tou agiou
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
ekkecutai ekcheO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
HOLY
spirit
HAS-been-OUT-POURED has-been-poured-out glwssais kai megalunontwn ton glOssa kai megalunO ho

n_ Dat Pl f Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
46 For they heard them speak with tongues, and magnify God. Then answered Peter,
10:46 hkouon
akouO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
gar autwn gar autos

Conj pp Gen Pl m
lalountwn laleO
THEY-HEARD for
OF-them them
TALKING speaking petros petros

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
magnifyING
THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
tote apekriqh tote apokrinomai

God
then
answerED
Peter
10:47 mhti
mEti
Part Int
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
udwr hudOr
n_ Acc Sg n
dunatai dunamai
kwlusai tis kOluO tis

vn Aor Act px Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
NO-ANY THE not ?
water
IS-ABLE can
TO-FORBID
ANY anyone
OF-THE
NO
47 Can any man forbid water, that these should not be baptized, which have received the Holy Ghost as well as we?
baptisqhnai toutous oitines to baptizO houtos hostis ho

vn Aor Pas pd Acc Pl m pr Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma to pneuma ho
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ws kai hOs kai

Adv Conj
TO-BE-DIPizED to-be-baptized hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
these these-ones
WHO-ANY who-any
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
GOT obtained
AS
AND also
WE
10:48 prosetaxen
prostassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

cristou baptisqhnai christos baptizO

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas
he-TOWARD-SETS YET to-them he-bids them tote hrwthsan auton tote erOtaO autos
Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
IN
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
48 And he commanded them to be baptized in the name of the Lord. Then prayed they him to tarry certain days.
epimeinai epimenO
vn Aor Act
hmeras tinas hEmera tis

n_ Acc Pl f px Acc Pl f
then
THEY-ask
him
TO-ON-REMAIN DAYS to-stay
ANY some
AV
Acts 11
11:1 hkousan de
akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi kai oi apostolos kai ho

adelfoi oi adelphos ho
ontes eimi
HEAR
YET THE
AND
THE
brothers brethren
THE
ones-BEING ones-being logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
. And the apostles and brethren that were in Judaea heard that the Gentiles had also received the word of God.
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ioudaian oti kai ta ioudaia hoti kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
edexanto ton dechomai ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
according-to THE
JUDEA
that
AND also
THE
NATIONS
RECEIVE
THE
saying word
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
11:2 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm diekrinonto pros ierosoluma diakrinO pros

ni proper vi impf Mid 3 Pl Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
when
YET UP-STEPPed went-up
Peter
INTO JERUSALEM
THRU-JUDGED doubted
TOWARD him
THE the-ones
And when Peter was come up to Jerusalem, they that were of the circumcision contended with him,
ek ek
Prep
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
OUT OF-ABOUT-CUTTing of-circumcision
11:3 legontes
legO
oti hoti
Conj
WH
eishlqen
NA
eishlqes eiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pros pros
Prep
andras akrobustian anEr akrobustia

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
Saying, Thou wentest in to men uncircumcised, and didst eat with them.
sayING
that
WH NA
YOU-INTO-CAME you-entered sunefages sunesthiO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
TOWARD MEN
uncircumcision
econtas echO
kai kai
Conj
sunefagen
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
HAVING
AND
YOU-TOGETHER-ATE you-ate-togetherwith de de
Conj
to-them them legwn legO

4
11:4 arxamenos
archO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
exetiqeto autois kaqexhs ektithEmi autos kathexEs

vi impf Mid 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Adv
beginning
YET Peter
OUT-PLACED expounded-it polei polis

n_ Dat Sg f
to-them
according-to-next sayING consecutively kai eidon kai eidO

But Peter rehearsed [the matter] from the beginning, and expounded [it] by order unto them, saying, I was in the city of Joppa praying: and in a trance I saw a vision, A certain vessel descend, as it had been a great sheet, let down from heaven by four corners; and it came even to me:
11:5 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
en en
Prep
iopph ioppE
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
WAS
IN
city
JOPPA of-Joppa skeuos skeuos

n_ Nom Sg n
prayING
AND
I-PERCEIVED
IN
ekstasei ekstasis
n_ Dat Sg f
orama horama
n_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
ws oqonhn megalhn tessarsin hOs othonE mega tessares

Adv n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Pl f
OUT-STANDing sight ecstasy vision arcais archE

n_ Dat Pl f
DOWN-STEPPING INSTRUMENT ANY descending utensil certain ek ek

Prep
AS
SHEET
GREAT large emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
to-FOUR
kaqiemenhn kathiEmi
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou kai hlqen ouranos kai erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
acris achri
Prep
ORIGINals beING-DOWN-LET OUT OF-THE edges being-let-down
heaven
AND
CAME it-came
UNTIL ME as-far-as ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
11:6 eis
eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
atenisas atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
katenooun katanoeO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
kai eidon kai eidO

tetrapoda ths tetrapous ho

a_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
INTO WHICH
STRETCHing looking-intently qhria thErion

n_ Acc Pl n
I-DOWN-MINDED AND I-considered kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
I-PERCEIVED perceived
THE
FOUR-FOOTS quadrupeds peteina peteinon

n_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
erpeta kai ta herpeton kai ho

n_ Acc Pl n Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
Upon the which when I had fastened mine eyes, I considered, and saw fourfooted beasts of the earth, and wild beasts, and creeping things, and fowls of the air.
LAND earth ouranou ouranos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
WILD-BEASTS AND
THE
REPTILES
AND
THE
heaven
11:7 hkousa
akouO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
kai fwnhs kai phOnE

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
legoushs legO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
anastas anistEmi
petre petros
n_ Voc Sg m
quson thuO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
And I heard a voice saying unto me, Arise, Peter; slay and eat.
I-HEAR
YET AND also
OF-SOUND sayING voice
to-ME
UP-STANDing rising
Peter !
SACRIFICE sacrifice-you !
AV
Acts 11
kai fage kai esthiO

AND
BE-EATING be-you-eating ! de de
Conj
11:8 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
mhdamws mEdamOs
Adv
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
oti koinon hoti koinos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
h E
Part
akaqarton akathartos
a_ Acc Sg n
I-said
YET NO-YET-SIMULTANEOUS-AS Master ! far-be-it-from-me Lord ! eishlqen eiserchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
that
COMMON OR contaminated-thing
UN-clean unclean-thing
But I said, Not so, Lord: for nothing common or unclean hath at any time entered into my mouth.
oudepote oudepote
Adv
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
NOT-YET-?-when INTO-CAME never entered
INTO THE
WH WH
MOUTH
WH
OF-ME
NA NA NA
11:9 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ek deuterou fwnh
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
deuterou deuteros
a_ Gen Sg n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
answerED
YET
SOUND voice qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-second of-second-time mh mE

Part Neg
OUT OF-THE
But the voice answered me again from heaven, What God hath cleansed, [that] call not thou common.
ouranou a ouranos hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekaqarisen su katharizO su
vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 2 Nom Sg
koinou koinoO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
heaven
WHICH which(p) de de
Conj
THE
God
cleansES
YOU
NO
BE-COMMONING be-you-counting-contaminating ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
10 And this was done three times: and all were drawn up again into heaven.
11:10 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi tris epi tris

Prep Adv
kai anespasqh palin apanta eis kai anaspaO palin hapas eis
Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Adv a_ Nom Pl n Prep
this
YET BECAME occurred
ON
THRice AND
IS-UP-PULLED is-pulled-up
AGAIN
ALL(emph.)
INTO THE
ouranon ouranos
n_ Acc Sg m
heaven
11:11 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
exauths treis exautEs treis

Adv n_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
epesthsan epi thn ephistEmi epi ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
AND
BE-PERCEIVING forthwith lo ! apestalmenoi apostellO

THREE
MEN
ON-STAND stand-by
ON
THE
HOME house
IN
11 And, behold, immediately there were three men already come unto the house where I was, sent from Caesarea unto me.
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
hmen eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
apo apo
Prep
kaisareias pros kaisareia pros

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
WHICH
WE-WERE
HAVING-been-commissionED FROM CAESAREA having-been-dispatched de de

Conj
TOWARD ME
11:12 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
vn 2Aor Act
autois mhden autos mEdeis

pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
said
YET THE
spirit
to-ME
TO-BE-TOGETHER-COMING to-them to-be-coming-together with-them kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
NO-YET-ONE nothing kai kai

Conj
12 And the Spirit bade me go with them, nothing doubting. Moreover these six brethren accompanied me, and we entered into the man's house:
diakrinanta hlqon diakrinO erchomai

vp Aor Act Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ex hex
ni numeral
adelfoi outoi adelphos houtos

n_ Nom Pl m pd Nom Pl m
THRU-JUDGing doubting
CAME
YET TOGETHER to-ME togetherwith me oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
AND also
THE
SIX
brothers
these
AND
eishlqomen eis eiserchomai eis

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
WE-INTO-CAME we-entered
INTO THE
HOME house de de
Conj
OF-THE
MAN
WH NA
11:13 aphggeilen
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pws eiden pOs eidO

ton
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
he-FROM-MESSAGES YET to-US he-reports tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
how
he-PERCEIVED
THE
MESSENGER IN
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
staqenta histEmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
kai eiponta kai legO

Conj vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m
aposteilon eis apostellO eis

iopphn kai ioppE kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
13 And he shewed us how he had seen an angel in his house, which stood and said unto him, Send men to Joppa, and call for Simon, whose surname is Peter;
THE
HOME house
OF-him
BEING-STOOD standing
AND
sayING
commission dispatch-you !
INTO JOPPA
AND
metapemyai simwna ton metapempO simOn ho

vm Aor midD 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
epikaloumenon epikaleO
petron petros
n_ Acc Sg m
after-SEND send-after-you !
SIMON
THE
one-beING-ON-CALLED Peter one-being-surnamed
AV
Acts 11
11:14 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
lalhsei laleO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
swqhsh sOzO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
14 Who shall tell thee words, whereby thou and all thy house shall be saved.
WHO
SHALL-BE-TALKING declarations TOWARD YOU shall-be-speaking kai pas kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
IN
WHICH which(p)
SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED you-shall-be-being-saved
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
YOU
AND
EVERY entire tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
HOME house
OF-YOU
11:15 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
arxasqai me archO egO

vn Aor Mid pp 1 Acc Sg
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
epepesen to epipiptO ho
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
15 And as I began to speak, the Holy Ghost fell on them, as on us at the beginning.
IN
YET THE
TO-begin
ME
TO-BE-TALKING ON-FALLS to-be-speaking falls-on hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
THE
spirit
THE
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
ep epi
Prep
autous wsper kai ef autos hOsper kai epi

pp Acc Pl m Adv Conj Prep
en en
Prep
arch archE
n_ Dat Sg f
HOLY
ON
them
AS-EVEN even-as de de
Conj
AND also
ON
US
IN
ORIGINal beginning kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
11:16 emnhsqhn
mnaomai
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

ws elegen hOs legO

iwannhs men iOannEs men

n_ Nom Sg m Part
I-AM-REMINDED YET OF-THE
declaration
OF-THE
Master Lord en en
Prep
AS
He-said
JOHN
INDEED
16 Then remembered I the word of the Lord, how that he said, John indeed baptized with water; but ye shall be baptized with the Holy Ghost.
ebaptisen udati baptizO hudOr

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Sg n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
baptisqhsesqe baptizO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl

DIPizES baptizes
to-water
YOU(p) ye ishn isos
YET SHALL-BE-BEING-DIPizED IN shall-be-being-baptized dwrean edwken dOrea didOmi

spirit
HOLY
11:17 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autois o autos ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ws kai hOs kai

Adv Conj
a_ Acc Sg f
IF
THEN THE
EQUAL
gratuity
GIVES
to-them them
THE
God
AS
AND also hmhn eimi

vi impf vxx 1 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pisteusasin epi ton pisteuO epi ho

vp Aor Act Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston egw christos egO

n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
17 Forasmuch then as God gave them the like gift as [he did] unto us, who believed on the Lord Jesus Christ; what was I, that I could withstand God?
to-US
BELIEVing
ON
THE
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
ANY who ?
WAS I-was
dunatos kwlusai ton dunatos kOluO ho

a_ Nom Sg m vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ABLE
TO-FORBID
THE
God
11:18 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hsucasan hEsuchazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai edoxasan ton kai doxazO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
legontes legO
HEARing
YET these THEY-QUIETize AND these-things they-are-quiet kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
esteemize glorify thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
God
sayING
ara ara
Part
eqnesin o ethnos ho
n_ Dat Pl n t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
18 When they heard these things, they held their peace, and glorified God, saying, Then hath God also to the Gentiles granted repentance unto life.
CONSEQUENTLY AND also edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
to-THE
NATIONS
THE
God
THE
INTO LIFE
GIVES
11:19 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
diasparentes diaspeirO
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE the-ones genomenhs ginomai

INDEED THEN ones-BEING-THRU-SOWN FROM THE being-dispersed epi stefanw dihlqon epi stephanos dierchomai
Prep n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
CONSTRICTION THE affliction kai kuprou kai kupros

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
ews heOs
Conj
foinikhs phoinikE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
19 . Now they which were scattered abroad upon the persecution that arose about Stephen travelled as far as Phenice, and Cyprus, and Antioch, preaching the word to none but unto the Jews only.
BECOMING occurring
ON
Stephen
THRU-CAME TILL OF-PHOENICIA AND passed-through as-far-as Phoenicia lalountes laleO

OF-CYPRUS AND Cyprus monon ioudaiois monon ioudaios

Adv a_ Dat Pl m
antioceias mhdeni antiocheia mEdeis

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
OF-ANTIOCH Antioch
to-NO-YET-ONE TALKING to-no-one speaking
THE
saying word
IF
NO
ONLY
to-JUDA-ans to-Jews
AV
Acts 11
11:20 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
kuprioi kai kurhnaioi oitines kuprios kai kurEnaios hostis

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m pr Nom Pl m
WERE
YET ANY some eis eis

Prep
OUT OF-them
MEN
CYPRIANS
AND
CYRENIANS
WHO-ANY who-any
elqontes erchomai
antioceian elaloun antiocheia laleO

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ellhnistas hellEnistEs
n_ Acc Pl m
20 And some of them were men of Cyprus and Cyrene, which, when they were come to Antioch, spake unto the Grecians, preaching the Lord Jesus.
COMING
INTO ANTIOCH
TALKED spoke kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
AND also
TOWARD THE
GREEKists Hellenists
euaggelizomenoi ton euaggelizO ho

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
WELL-MESSAGizING THE bringing-the-well-message of-the
Master Lord
JESUS
11:21 kai hn
kai
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
ariqmos arithmos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
WAS
HAND
OF-Master of-Lord
WITH them
MANY vast
BESIDES NUMBER
THE
21 And the hand of the Lord was with them: and a great number believed, and turned unto the Lord.
pisteusas pisteuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epestreyen epi ton epistrephO epi ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
one-BELIEVing one-believing
ON-TURNS turns-back de de
Conj
ON
THE
Master Lord eis eis

Prep
11:22 hkousqh
akouO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
wta ous
n_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias ths ekklEsia ho

IS-HEARD
YET THE
saying account
INTO THE
EARS
OF-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia barnaban barnabas

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
oushs eimi
en en
Prep
ierousalhm peri ierosoluma peri

ni proper Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai exapesteilan kai exapostellO

22 Then tidings of these things came unto the ears of the church which was in Jerusalem: and they sent forth Barnabas, that he should go as far as Antioch.
BEING
NA
IN
JERUSALEM
AND
THEY-OUT-FROM-PUT Barnabas they-delegate
dielqein dierchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ews antioceias heOs antiocheia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-THRU-COMING to-be-passing-through
TILL
ANTIOCH
WH NA
11:23 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
paragenomenos kai idwn paraginomai kai eidO

vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WHO
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along ecarh chairO

vi 2Aor pasD 3 Sg
AND
PERCEIVING
THE
grace
THE
23 Who, when he came, and had seen the grace of God, was glad, and exhorted them all, that with purpose of heart they would cleave unto the Lord.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai parekalei kai parakaleO

pantas th pas ho
a_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
proqesei prothesis
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
God
WAS-JOYED rejoiced
AND
BESIDE-CALLED ALL entreated them-all

WH
to-THE
BEFORE-PLACing OF-THE purpose
kardias prosmenein kardia prosmenO

n_ Gen Sg f vn Pres Act
en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
HEART
TO-BE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-be-remaining-in anhr anEr

n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE the agaqos agathos

a_ Nom Sg m
Master Lord pneumatos agiou pneuma hagios

11:24 oti hn
hoti
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kai plhrhs kai plErEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
kai pistews kai pistis

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
that
he-WAS
MAN
GOOD
AND
FULL
OF-spirit
HOLY
AND
OF-BELIEF of-faith
24 For he was a good man, and full of the Holy Ghost and of faith: and much people was added unto the Lord.
kai proseteqh oclos kai prostithEmi ochlos

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
WAS-addED
THRONG
enough to-THE considerable
Master Lord
25 Then departed Barnabas to Tarsus, for to seek Saul:
11:25 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
tarson anazhthsai saulon tarsos anazEteO saulos

n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m
he-OUT-CAME YET INTO TARSUS he-came-away
TO-UP-SEEK to-hunt eis eis

Prep
SAUL
11:26 kai eurwn

kai
Conj
heuriskO
hgagen agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
antioceian egeneto antiocheia ginomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
autois kai autos kai

pp Dat Pl m Conj
AND
FINDING finding-him
he-LED he-led-him
INTO ANTIOCH
it-BECAME
YET to-them
AND also
26 And when he had found him, he brought him unto Antioch. And it came to pass, that a whole year they assembled themselves with the
AV
Acts 11 - Acts 12
eniauton olon eniautos holos

sunacqhnai sunagO
vn Aor Pas
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia kai didaxai oclon ekklEsia kai didaskO ochlos

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg m
ikanon hikanos
a_ Acc Sg m
year
WHOLE
TO-BE-TOGETHER-LED IN to-be-taken-in prwtws prOtOs

Adv
THE
OUT-CALLED AND ecclesia
TO-TEACH
THRONG
enough considerable
church, and taught much people. And the disciples were called Christians first in Antioch.
crhmatisai te chrEmatizO te
vn Aor Act Part
en en
Prep
antioceia tous antiocheia ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas cristianous mathEtEs christianos

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
TO-apprize to-style
BESIDES BEFORE-most-ly IN firstly tautais de houtos de

pd Dat Pl f Conj
ANTIOCH
THE
LEARNers disciples
ANOINTED-ians Christians eis eis

Prep
27 . And in these days came prophets from Jerusalem unto Antioch.
11:27 en
en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais kathlqon apo hEmera katerchomai apo

n_ Dat Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
ierosolumwn profhtai ierosoluma prophEtEs

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Pl m
IN
these
YET THE
DAYS
DOWN-CAME came-down
FROM JERUSALEM
BEFORE-AVERers INTO prophets
antioceian antiocheia
n_ Acc Sg f
ANTIOCH
WH
11:28 anastas
anistEmi
de de
Conj
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
onomati agabos onoma hagabos

eshmainen
UP-STANDing rising
NA
YET ONE
OUT OF-them
to-NAME
AGABUS
eshmanen sEmainO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos limon pneuma limos

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
megalhn mellein mega mellO

a_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act
esesqai eimi
vn Fut vxx
ef epi
Prep
28 And there stood up one of them named Agabus, and signified by the Spirit that there should be great dearth throughout all the world: which came to pass in the days of Claudius Caesar.
SIGNifiES
THRU THE through
spirit
FAMINE
GREAT
TO-BE-beING-ABOUT TO-SHALL-BE ON
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn htis oikoumenE hostis

n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi epi
Prep
klaudiou klaudios
n_ Gen Sg m
WHOLE
THE
beING-HOMED inhabited-earth de de
Conj
WHICH-ANY BECAME which-any occurred
ON CLAUDIUS onunder wrisan horizO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
11:29 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn kaqws mathEtEs kathOs

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
euporeito tis euporeomai tis

vi impf Mid 3 Sg px Nom Sg m
ekastos hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
YET LEARNers disciples diakonian diakonia

n_ Acc Sg f
according-AS thrivED
ANY
define EACH designate-something en en

Prep
29 Then the disciples, every man according to his ability, determined to send relief unto the brethren which dwelt in Judaea:
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
pemyai tois pempO ho

vn Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ioudaia adelfois ioudaia adelphos

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Pl m
OF-them
INTO THRU-SERVice TO-SEND dispensing
to-THE
ones-DOWN-HOMING IN dwelling tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
JUDEA
brothers brethren ceiros cheir

n_ Gen Sg f
30 Which also they did, and sent it to the elders by the hands of Barnabas and Saul.
11:30 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai epoihsan aposteilantes pros kai poieO apostellO pros

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep
presbuterous dia presbuteros dia

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
WHICH
AND also
THEY-DO
TOWARD THE
SENIORS elders
THRU HAND through
barnaba barnabas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai saulou kai saulos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
OF-Barnabas AND
OF-SAUL Saul
AV
Acts 12
12:1 kat
kata
Prep
ekeinon de ekeinos de
pd Acc Sg m Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
epebalen epiballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
basileus tas basileus ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f
according-to that
YET THE
SEASON
ON-CAST put-forth
HEROD
THE
KING
THE
. Now about that time Herod the king stretched forth [his] hands to vex certain of the church.
ceiras kakwsai cheir kakoO

n_ Acc Pl f vn Aor Act
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias ekklEsia
n_ Gen Sg f
HANDS
TO-EVIL-treat ANY to-illtreat some de de

Conj
OF-THE FROM THE of-the-ones
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
2
12:2 aneilen
anaireO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

adelfon iwannou macairh adelphos iOannEs machaira

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg f
And he killed James the brother of John with the sword.
he-UP-LIFTED YET JACOBUS he-assassinated James
THE
brother
OF-JOHN
to-sword
12:3 idwn
eidO
de de
Conj
oti areston estin hoti arestos eimi

Conj a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois proseqeto ioudaios prostithEmi

a_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
PERCEIVING
YET that
PLEASing
it-IS
to-THE
NA
JUDA-ans Jews ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
he-addED he-proceeded hmerai hEmera

n_ Nom Pl f
And because he saw it pleased the Jews, he proceeded further to take Peter also. (Then were the days of unleavened bread.)
vn 2Aor Act
kai petron kai petros

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
TO-BE-TOGETHER-GETTING AND to-be-apprehending also azumwn azumos

a_ Gen Pl n
Peter
THEY-WERE YET
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
UN-FERMENTEDS unleavened-bread(p)
12:4 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
kai piasas kai piazO

eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
paradous paradidOmi
tessarsin tessares
n_ Dat Pl n
WHOM
AND also
arresting
he-PLACED
INTO GUARD-house BESIDE-GIVING jail giving-over-him auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-FOUR
tetradiois stratiwtwn fulassein tetradion stratiOtEs phulassO

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Pl m vn Pres Act
boulomenos boulomai
meta to meta ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
And when he had apprehended him, he put [him] in prison, and delivered [him] to four quaternions of soldiers to keep him; intending after Easter to bring him forth to the people.
FOUR (dim) quaternions pasca pascha

Aramaic
OF-WARriors of-soldiers anagagein anagO

vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-GUARDING him
intendING
after
THE
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
PASSOVER TO-BE-UP-LEADING him to-be-leading-up
to-THE
PEOPLE
12:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ethreito tEreO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
fulakh phulakE
n_ Dat Sg f
proseuch de proseuchE de
n_ Nom Sg f Conj
THE
INDEED THEN Peter
was-KEPT
IN
THE
GUARD-house prayer jail ekklhsias pros ekklEsia pros

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
YET
. Peter therefore was kept in prison: but prayer was made without ceasing of the church unto God for him.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ektenws ektenOs
Adv
ginomenh ginomai
upo ths hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
WAS
OUT-STRETCHly BECOMING earnestly peri peri

Prep
by
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
TOWARD THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
God
ABOUT him concerning hmellen mellO

WH
12:6 ote de
hote
Adv
prosagagein
NA
de
Conj
proagagein proagO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
when
YET WAS-ABOUT
TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING to-be-leading-before o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
him
THE
HEROD
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh hn ekeinos eimi

pd Dat Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Sg
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
koimwmenos koimaO
metaxu duo metaxu duo

Adv ni numeral
And when Herod would have brought him forth, the same night Peter was sleeping between two soldiers, bound with two chains: and the keepers before the door kept the prison.
to-THE
NIGHT
that
WAS
THE
Peter
reposING
between
TWO
stratiwtwn dedemenos stratiOtEs deO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
alusesin halusis
n_ Dat Pl f
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl f
fulakes te phulax te
n_ Nom Pl m Part
pro pro
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
quras thura
n_ Gen Sg f
WARriors soldiers
HAVING-been-BOUND to-UN-LOOSES TWO to-chains
GUARDS
BESIDES BEFORE THE
DOOR
AV
Acts 12
ethroun tEreO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
KEPT
THE
GUARD-house jail aggelos aggelos

n_ Nom Sg m
12:7 kai idou

kai
Conj
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
epesth ephistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai fws kai phOs

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
elamyen lampO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
BE-PERCEIVING MESSENGER OF-Master lo ! of-Lord de de

Conj
ON-STOOD stood-by
AND
LIGHT
SHINES
IN
THE
oikhmati pataxas oikEma patassO

n_ Dat Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pleuran tou pleura ho

petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
And, behold, the angel of the Lord came upon [him], and a light shined in the prison: and he smote Peter on the side, and raised him up, saying, Arise up quickly. And his chains fell off from [his] hands.
room
SMITing
YET THE
side
OF-THE
Peter
he-ROUSES
him
legwn legO
anasta anistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Apo
en en
Prep
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
kai exepesan autou kai ekpiptO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
aluseis halusis
n_ Nom Pl f
ek ek
Prep
sayING
UP-STAND rise-you ! ceirwn cheir

n_ Gen Pl f
IN
SWIFTness AND
OUT-FALL fall-off
OF-him
THE
UN-LOOSES OUT chains
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
OF-THE
HANDS
12:8 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
zwsai zOnnumi
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
kai upodhsai ta kai hupodeO ho

Conj vm Aor Mid 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
said
YET THE
MESSENGER TOWARD him
GIRD gird-yourself ! autw autos
AND
UNDER-BIND bind-on-you !
THE
sandalia sandalion
n_ Acc Pl n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
epoihsen de poieO de
outws kai legei houtOs kai legO

peribalou periballO
vm 2Aor Mid 2 Sg
And the angel said unto him, Gird thyself, and bind on thy sandals. And so he did. And he saith unto him, Cast thy garment about thee, and follow me.
pp Dat Sg m
PLANK-BINDettes OF-YOU soles to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
he-DOES
YET thus
AND
he-IS-sayING
to-him
BE-ABOUT-CASTING be-you-throwing-about !
imation sou himation su

kai akolouqei kai akoloutheO

moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
cloak
OF-YOU
AND
BE-followING to-ME be-you-following ! me hdei eidO

vi Plup Act 3 Sg
12:9 kai exelqwn

kai
Conj
exerchomai
hkolouqei kai ouk akoloutheO kai ou

vi impf Act 3 Sg Conj Part Neg
oti alhqes hoti alEthEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out ginomenon ginomai
he-followED he-followed-him dia dia

Prep
AND
NOT
he-HAD-PERCEIVED that
TRUE
IS
And he went out, and followed him; and wist not that it was true which was done by the angel; but thought he saw a vision.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aggelou aggelos
n_ Gen Sg m
edokei dokeO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
orama horama
n_ Acc Sg n
blepein blepO
vn Pres Act
THE
BECOMING occurring de de
Conj
THRU THE through prwthn prOtos

a_ Acc Sg f
MESSENGER he-SEEMED
YET sight vision
TO-BE-lookING to-be-observing
10 When they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of his own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and forthwith the angel departed from him.
12:10 dielqontes
dierchomai
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai deuteran hlqan kai deuteros erchomai

Conj a_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
THRU-COMING passing-through pulhn pulE

n_ Acc Sg f
YET BEFORE-most GUARD-house AND first jail sidhran thn sidereos ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
second
THEY-COME
ON
THE
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ferousan pherO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
automath automatos
a_ Nom Sg f
GATE
THE
IRON
THE
one-CARRYING one-bringing
INTO THE
city
WHICH-ANY SAME-IMPELLED which-any spontaneously mian heis

n_ Acc Sg f
hnoigh anoigO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
autois kai exelqontes autos kai exerchomai

pp Dat Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
prohlqon proerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
rumhn rhumE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai euqews kai eutheOs

Conj Adv
WAS-UP-OPENed to-them was-opened apesth aphistEmi

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
OUT-COMING coming-out ap apo

Prep
THEY-BEFORE-CAME street they-came-forward autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ONE
AND
immediately
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
FROM-STOOD THE withdrew
MESSENGER FROM him
12:11 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
genomenos ginomai
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
nun oida nun eidO

Adv vi Perf Act 1 Sg
AND
THE
Peter
IN into
self himself
BECOMING becoming
said
NOW I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-aware
11 And when Peter was come to himself, he said, Now I know of a surety, that the Lord hath sent his angel, and hath delivered me out of the hand of
AV
Acts 12
alhqws oti exapesteilen alEthOs hoti exapostellO

Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
Herod, and [from] all the expectation of the people of the Jews.
TRUly
that
OUT-FROM-PUTS delegates ek ek
Prep
THE
Master Lord ths ho
THE
MESSENGER OF-Him
AND
exeilato me exaireO egO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
hrwdou kai pashs hErOdEs kai pas

n_ Gen Sg m Conj a_ Gen Sg f
prosdokias tou prosdokia ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OUT-LIFTS extricates laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
ME
OUT OF-HAND
OF-HEROD
AND
OF-EVERY THE of-all
TOWARD-SEEM hope
OF-THE
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
PEOPLE
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews te te
Part
12:12 sunidwn
suneideO
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
marias maria
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
beING-conscious
BESIDES he-CAME
ON
THE
HOME house ou hou

Adv
OF-THE
MARY
THE
mhtros iwannou tou mEtEr iOannEs ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
epikaloumenou epikaleO
markou markos
n_ Gen Sg m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ikanoi hikanos
a_ Nom Pl m
12 And when he had considered [the thing], he came to the house of Mary the mother of John, whose surname was Mark; where many were gathered together praying.
MOTHER
OF-JOHN
THE
one-beING-ON-CALLED MARK one-being-surnamed kai proseucomenoi kai proseuchomai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
where WERE
enough considerable-ones
sunhqroismenoi sunathroizO
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-CONVENED AND having-been-convened-together
prayING
12:13 krousantos
krouO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pulwnos proshlqen pulOn proserchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
paidiskh paidiskE
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-KNOCKing
YET OF-him
THE at-the
DOOR
OF-THE
GATE portal
TOWARD-CAME maid approached
13 And as Peter knocked at the door of the gate, a damsel came to hearken, named Rhoda.
upakousai onomati rodh hupakouO onoma rhodE

vn Aor Act n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg f
TO-obey
to-NAME
RHODA (Rose) Rhoda thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
12:14 kai epignousa

kai
Conj
epiginOskO
fwnhn tou phOnE ho

petrou petros
n_ Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
AND
ON-KNOWING recognizing ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
SOUND voice
OF-THE
Peter
FROM THE
JOY
NOT
14 And when she knew Peter's voice, she opened not the gate for gladness, but ran in, and told how Peter stood before the gate.
hnoixen anoigO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pulwna eisdramousa de pulOn eistrechO de

n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
estanai histEmi
vn Perf Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
she-UP-OPENS THE she-opens petron petros

n_ Acc Sg m
GATE portal tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
INTO-RUNNING running-in pulwnos pulOn

n_ Gen Sg m
YET she-FROM-MESSAGES TO-HAVE-STOOD THE she-reports to-stand
pro pro
Prep
Peter
BEFORE THE
GATE portal authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
12:15 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
mainh mainomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
diiscurizeto diischurizomai
THE
YET TOWARD her
THEY-say
YOU-ARE-beING-MAD THE
YET she-was-THRU-STRONG she-stoutly-insisted autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
15 And they said unto her, Thou art mad. But she constantly affirmed that it was even so. Then said they, It is his angel.
outws ecein houtOs echO

Adv vn Pres Act
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
thus
TO-BE-HAVING THE-ones the de de

Conj
YET said they-said epemenen epimenO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
THE
MESSENGER it-IS
OF-him
12:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
krouwn krouO
anoixantes anoigO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eidan eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
YET Peter
ON-REMAINED KNOCKING persisted
UP-OPENing opening
YET THEY-PERCEIVE
16 But Peter continued knocking: and when they had opened [the door], and saw him, they were astonished.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai exesthsan kai existEmi

him
AND
THEY-WERE-OUT-STOOD they-were-amazed
AV
Acts 12
12:17 kataseisas
kataseiO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
autois th autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
sigan sigaO
vn Pres Act
dihghsato diEgeomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
WH
autois
gesturing
NA
YET to-them
to-THE
HAND
TO-BE-HUSHING he-relatES
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
pws o pOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exhgagen exagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fulakhs phulakE
n_ Gen Sg f
to-them
how
THE
Master Lord
him
OUT-LED led-out kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
OUT OF-THE
GUARD-house jail kai kai

Conj
17 But he, beckoning unto them with the hand to hold their peace, declared unto them how the Lord had brought him out of the prison. And he said, Go shew these things unto James, and to the brethren. And he departed, and went into another place.
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
te te
Part
apaggeilate iakwbw apaggellO iakObos

vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Dat Sg m
adelfois tauta adelphos houtos

n_ Dat Pl m pd Acc Pl n
he-said
BESIDES FROM-MESSAGE report-ye ! eporeuqh poreuomai

vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
to-JACOBUS AND to-James eteron heteros

a_ Acc Sg m
to-THE
brothers brethren
these AND these-things
exelqwn exerchomai
eis eis
Prep
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
he-WAS-GONE INTO DIFFERENT PLACE he-went de de

Conj
12:18 genomenhs
ginomai
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
taracos tarachos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oligos oligos
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
OF-BECOMING
YET OF-DAY
WAS there-was o ho
DISTURBance NOT
FEW slight
IN THE among
18 Now as soon as it was day, there was no small stir among the soldiers, what was become of Peter.
stratiwtais ti stratiOtEs tis

n_ Dat Pl m pi Nom Sg n
ara ara
Part Int
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
WARriors soldiers
ANY what ? de de
Conj
CONSEQUENTLY THE
Peter
BECAME
12:19 hrwdhs
hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
epizhthsas epizEteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
eurwn heuriskO
anakrinas anakrinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
HEROD
YET ON-SEEKing seeking-for
him
AND
NO
FINDING finding-him apo apo

Prep
examining
THE
fulakas ekeleusen apacqhnai phulax keleuO apagO

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Pas
kai katelqwn kai katerchomai

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
19 And when Herod had sought for him, and found him not, he examined the keepers, and commanded that [they] should be put to death. And he went down from Judaea to Caesarea, and [there] abode.
GUARDS
ORDERS
TO-BE-FROM-LED AND to-be-led-away-them
DOWN-COMING coming-down
FROM THE
JUDEA
INTO
kaisareian dietriben kaisareia diatribO

CAESAREA
he-tarriED he-tarried-there de de
Conj
12:20 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
qumomacwn thumomacheO
turiois kai sidwniois omoqumadon de turios kai sidOnios homothumadon de

n_ Dat Pl m Conj a_ Dat Pl f Adv Conj
he-WAS
YET FEEL-FIGHTING in-fighting-fury pros pros

Prep
to-TYRians
AND
to-SIDONians
YET
parhsan pareimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai peisantes kai peithO

blaston ton blastos ho

epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
THEY-WERE-BESIDE-BEING TOWARD him they-were-present koitwnos tou koitOn ho

AND
PERSUADing
Blastus
THE
ON
OF-THE the
20 . And Herod was highly displeased with them of Tyre and Sidon: but they came with one accord to him, and, having made Blastus the king's chamberlain their friend, desired peace; because their country was nourished by the king's [country].
basilews htounto basileus aiteO

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf Mid 3 Pl
eirhnhn dia eirEnE dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
trefesqai trephO
vn Pres Pas
bed-chamber chamberlain autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
OF-THE
KING
THEY-REQUESTED PEACE
THRU THE because-of
TO-BE-beING-NURTURED to-be-being-nourished
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basilikhs basilikos
a_ Gen Sg f
OF-them
THE
SPACE country hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
FROM THE
WH NA
KINGic king's o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
12:21 takth de
taktos
a_ Dat Sg f
de
Conj
hrwdhs hErOdEs
n_ Nom Sg m
endusamenos esqhta basilikhn enduO esthEs basilikos

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
to-SET
NA
YET DAY
THE
HEROD
IN-SLIPPing dressing
GARMENT attire autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
KINGic royal
21 And upon a set day Herod, arrayed in royal apparel, sat upon his throne, and made an oration unto them.
kai kai
Conj
kaqisas kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
bhmatos edhmhgorei pros bEma dEmEgoreO pros

n_ Gen Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
AND
being-seated
ON
THE
platform dais
he-haranguED harangued
TOWARD them
AV
Acts 12 - Acts 13
12:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
dhmos dEmos
n_ Nom Sg m
epefwnei qeou epiphOneO theos

vi impf Act 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg m
fwnh phOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
anqrwpou anthrOpos
n_ Gen Sg m
22 And the people gave a shout, [saying, It is] the voice of a god, and not of a man.
THE
YET PUBLIC populace
ON-SOUNDED retorted
OF-god
SOUND voice
AND
NOT
OF-human
12:23 paracrhma de
parachrEma
Adv
de
Conj
epataxen auton patassO autos

aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
anq anti
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
instantly
YET SMITES
him
MESSENGER OF-Master of-Lord kai genomenos kai ginomai

Conj
INSTEAD OF-WHICH NOT corresponding-to which skwlhkobrwtos skOlEkobrOtos

a_ Nom Sg m
23 And immediately the angel of the Lord smote him, because he gave not God the glory: and he was eaten of worms, and gave up the ghost.
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
he-GIVES
THE
esteem glory
to-THE
God
AND
BECOMING
WORM-FED food-of-worms
exeyuxen ekpsuchO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
he-OUT-souls he-gives-up-his-soul
12:24 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WH
kuriou
NA
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
huxanen auxanO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai eplhquneto kai plEthunO

Conj vi impf Pas 3 Sg
24 But the word of God grew and multiplied.
THE
YET saying word
OF-THE
God
GROWS-UP grows
AND
was-multipliED
12:25 barnabas de
barnabas
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
kai saulos kai saulos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m

ierousalhm plhrwsantes thn ierosoluma plEroO ho

ni proper vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
Barnabas
YET AND
SAUL
reTURN
INTO JERUSALEM
FILLing completing markon markos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
sumparalabontes sumparalambanO

epiklhqenta epikaleO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
25 And Barnabas and Saul returned from Jerusalem, when they had fulfilled [their] ministry, and took with them John, whose surname was Mark.
THRU-SERVice TOGETHER-BESIDE-GETTING JOHN dispensing taking-along-with-them
THE
one-BEING-ON-CALLED MARK one-being-surnamed
AV
Acts 13
13:1 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
antioceia kata antiocheia kata

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ousan eimi
ekklhsian profhtai ekklEsia prophEtEs

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Pl m
WERE there-were
YET IN
ANTIOCH
according-to THE
BEING
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
BEFORE-AVERers prophets niger niger

ni proper
kai didaskaloi o kai didaskalos ho

Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
barnabas kai sumewn o barnabas kai sumeOn ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj ni proper t_ Nom Sg m
kaloumenos kaleO
. Now there were in the church that was at Antioch certain prophets and teachers; as Barnabas, and Simeon that was called Niger, and Lucius of Cyrene, and Manaen, which had been brought up with Herod the tetrarch, and Saul.
AND
TEACHers
THE
BESIDES Barnabas bsboth
AND
SIMEON
THE
one-beING-CALLED one-being-called tetraarcou tetraarchEs

n_ Gen Sg m
NIGER
kai loukios o kai loukios ho

kurhnaios manahn te kurEnaios manaEn te

n_ Nom Sg m ni proper Part
hrwdou tou hErOdEs ho

AND
LUCIUS
THE
CYRENIAN
MANAEN
BESIDES OF-HEROD
THE
suntrofos suntrophos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai saulos kai saulos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-nursED AND foster-brother
SAUL
13:2 leitourgountwn de
leitourgeO
de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
kai nhsteuontwn eipen kai nEsteuO legO

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-officiatING of-ministering to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
YET OF-them
to-THE
Master Lord dh dE
Part
AND
OF-fastING
said
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
aforisate aphorizO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
barnaban kai barnabas kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
As they ministered to the Lord, and fasted, the Holy Ghost said, Separate me Barnabas and Saul for the work whereunto I have called them.
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
FROM-define-YE BIND to-ME sever-ye ! by-all-means proskeklhmai proskaleomai

vi Perf midD/pasD 1 Sg
THE
Barnabas
AND
saulon saulos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
SAUL
INTO THE
work
WHICH
I-HAVE-TOWARD-CALLED them I-have-called-to tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
13:3 tote nhsteusantes kai proseuxamenoi kai epiqentes

tote
Adv
nEsteuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
kai
Conj
proseuchomai
kai
Conj
epitithEmi
ceiras autois cheir autos

n_ Acc Pl f pp Dat Pl m
then
fasting
AND
praying
AND
THE
HANDS
to-them them
And when they had fasted and prayed, and laid [their] hands on them, they sent [them] away.
apelusan apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-LOOSE they-dismiss-them
13:4 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
ekpemfqentes upo tou ekpempO hupo ho

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg n
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos kathlqon pneuma katerchomai

n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
they
INDEED THEN BEING-OUT-SENT being-sent-out
by
THE
HOLY
spirit
DOWN-CAME came-down
. So they, being sent forth by the Holy Ghost, departed unto Seleucia; and from thence they sailed to Cyprus.
eis eis
Prep
seleukeian ekeiqen te seleukeia ekeithen te

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Part
apepleusan apopleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
kupron kupros
n_ Acc Sg f
INTO SELEUCIA
thence
BESIDES THEY-FROM-FLOAT INTO CYPRUS they-sail-away en en

Prep
13:5 kai genomenoi

kai
Conj
ginomai
salamini kathggellon salamis kataggellO

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
BECOMING coming-to-be en en
Prep
IN
SALAMIS
THEY-DOWN-MESSAGED THE they-announced twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
saying word de de
Conj
OF-THE
And when they were at Salamis, they preached the word of God in the synagogues of the Jews: and they had also John to [their] minister.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
ioudaiwn eicon ioudaios echO

a_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai iwannhn kai iOannEs

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
God
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS OF-THE synagogues
JUDA-ans Jews
THEY-HAD
YET AND also
JOHN
uphrethn hupEretEs
n_ Acc Sg m
subservient deputy
13:6 dielqontes
dierchomai
de de
Conj
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
nhson nEsos
n_ Acc Sg f
acri pafou achri paphos

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
THRU-COMING passing-through
YET WHOLE
THE
ISLAND
UNTIL PAPHOS
THEY-FOUND MAN
ANY certain
And when they had gone through the isle unto Paphos, they found a certain sorcerer, a false prophet, a Jew, whose name [was] Barjesus:
AV
Acts 13
magon magos
n_ Acc Sg m
yeudoprofhthn pseudoprophEtEs
n_ Acc Sg m
ioudaion w ioudaios hos

a_ Acc Sg m pr Dat Sg m
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
WH
barihsous
NA
barihsou bariEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
MAGICian
FALSE-BEFORE-AVERrer JUDA-an false-prophet Jew hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to-WHOM
NAME
BAR-(Aram. SON) -JESUS Bar-Jesus paulw paulos

n_ Dat Sg m
13:7 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqupatw sergiw anthupatos sergios

andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
sunetw sunetos
a_ Dat Sg m
WHO
WAS
proconsul
SERGIUS
PAUL
MAN
intelligent
Which was with the deputy of the country, Sergius Paulus, a prudent man; who called for Barnabas and Saul, and desired to hear the word of God.
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
proskalesamenos barnaban kai saulon proskaleomai barnabas kai saulos

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
epezhthsen akousai ton epizEteO akouO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
this-one this-one logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
Barnabas
AND
SAUL
ON-SEEKS seeks-for
TO-HEAR
THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
saying word
OF-THE
God
13:8 anqistato de
anthistEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
de
Conj
autois elumas autos elumas

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
magos magos
n_ Nom Sg m
outws gar meqermhneuetai houtOs gar methermEneuO

Adv Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
with-STOOD withstood to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
YET to-them them autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
ELYMAS
THE
MAGICian
thus
for
IS-beING-after-TRANSLATED is-being-construed ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
But Elymas the sorcerer (for so is his name by interpretation) withstood them, seeking to turn away the deputy from the faith.
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
zhtwn zEteO
diastreyai ton diastrephO ho

anqupaton apo anthupatos apo

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
THE
NAME
OF-him
SEEKING
TO-THRU-TURN to-pervert
THE
proconsul
FROM THE
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
BELIEF faith
13:9 saulos
saulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai paulos kai paulos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
plhsqeis plEthO (pimplEmi)

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m

atenisas atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
SAUL
YET THE who
AND also
PAUL
BEING-FILLED
OF-spirit
HOLY
STRETCHing looking-intently
Then Saul, (who also [is called] Paul,) filled with the Holy Ghost, set his eyes on him,
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
INTO him
13:10 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
w plhrhs O plErEs
Inj a_ Nom Sg m
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
dolou dolos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai pashs kai pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg f
radiourgias uie rhadiourgia huios

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Voc Sg m
said
o!
FULL
OF-EVERY of-all
FRAUD guile
AND
OF-EVERY DEFT-ACT of-all knavery paush pauO

vi Fut midD 2 Sg
SON !
diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
ecqre echthros
a_ Voc Sg m
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
dikaiosunhs ou dikaiosunE ou
diastrefwn diastrephO
10 And said, O full of all subtilty and all mischief, [thou] child of the devil, [thou] enemy of all righteousness, wilt thou not cease to pervert the right ways of the Lord?
OF-THRU-CASTer enemy ! of-Adversary tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
OF-EVERY JUSTice of-all righteousness

NA
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-CEASING THRU-TURNING perverting euqeias euthus

a_ Acc Pl f
odous hodos
n_ Acc Pl f
WH
tou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
THE
WAYS
OF-THE
Master Lord kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
WELL-PLACED straight kai esh kai eimi

13:11 kai nun idou

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
epi se epi su
Prep pp 2 Acc Sg
tuflos tuphlos
a_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
AND
NOW BE-PERCEIVING HAND lo ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-Master of-Lord acri kairou achri kairos

Prep
ON
YOU
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE BLIND
WH NA
NO
blepwn blepO
hlion hElios
n_ Acc Sg m
paracrhma parachrEma
Adv
de
te te
Part
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
n_ Gen Sg m
11 And now, behold, the hand of the Lord [is] upon thee, and thou shalt be blind, not seeing the sun for a season. And immediately there fell on him a mist and a darkness; and he went about seeking some to lead him by the hand.
lookING observing ep epi

Prep
THE
SUN
UNTIL SEASON instantly appointed-time kai periagwn kai periagO

BESIDES bsboth ezhtei zEteO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
FALLS
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
aclus achlus
n_ Nom Sg f
kai skotos kai skotos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ceiragwgous cheiragOgos
n_ Acc Pl m
ON
him
FOG
AND
DARKness
AND
ABOUT-LEADING going-about
he-SOUGHT
HAND-LEADers ones-to-lead-him-by-the-hand
AV
Acts 13
13:12 tote idwn

tote
Adv
eidO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqupatos to anthupatos ho
gegonos ginomai
episteusen pisteuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
then
PERCEIVING
THE
proconsul
THE
HAVING-BECOME having-occurred
he-BELIEVES believes
12 Then the deputy, when he saw what was done, believed, being astonished at the doctrine of the Lord.
ekplhssomenos epi th ekplEssO epi ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
didach tou didachE ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
beING-astonishED
ON
THE
TEACHing
OF-THE
Master Lord oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
13:13 anacqentes
anagO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pafou paphos
n_ Gen Sg f
peri peri
Prep
paulon hlqon paulos erchomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
BEING-UP-LED setting-out perghn ths pergE ho

YET FROM THE
PAPHOS
THE-ones the-ones
ABOUT PAUL
CAME
INTO
pamfulias iwannhs de pamphulia iOannEs de

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m Conj
apocwrhsas apochOreO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
upestreyen eis hupostrephO eis

13 Now when Paul and his company loosed from Paphos, they came to Perga in Pamphylia: and John departing from them returned to Jerusalem.
PERGA
OF-THE
Pamphylia
JOHN
YET FROM-SPACing departing
FROM them
reTURNS
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
13:14 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
dielqontes dierchomai
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
perghs pergE
n_ Gen Sg f
paregenonto eis paraginomai eis

vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
they
YET THRU-COMING passing-through

WH
FROM THE
NA
PERGA
BESIDE-BECAME came-along eis eis

Prep
INTO ANTIOCH
14 . But when they departed from Perga, they came to Antioch in Pisidia, and went into the synagogue on the sabbath day, and sat down.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pisidian kai pisidia kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
elqontes
eiselqontes eiserchomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
PISIDIA
AND
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD to-THE synagogue
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn ekaqisan sabbaton kathizO

DAY
OF-THE
SABBATHS
THEY-are-seated
13:15 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
anagnwsin tou anagnOsis ho

nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
after
YET THE
reading
OF-THE
LAW
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets andres anEr

n_ Voc Pl m
apesteilan oi apostellO ho
arcisunagwgoi archisunagOgos
n_ Nom Pl m
pros pros
Prep
autous legontes autos legO

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
15 And after the reading of the law and the prophets the rulers of the synagogue sent unto them, saying, [Ye] men [and] brethren, if ye have any word of exhortation for the people, say on.
commission dispatch ei ei
Cond
THE
chiefs-of-TOGETHER-LEAD TOWARD them chiefs-of-the-synagogue en en

Prep
sayING
MEN men ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
brothers brethren ! laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Gen Sg f
pros pros
Prep
IF
ANY
IS there-is
IN
YOU(p) ye
saying word
OF-BESIDE-CALLing TOWARD THE of-entreaty
PEOPLE
legete legO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-sayING be-ye-saying-it !
13:16 anastas
anistEmi
de de
Conj
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kataseisas kai kataseiO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
UP-STANDing rising israhlitai kai oi israElitEs kai ho

n_ Voc Pl m Conj
YET PAUL
AND
gesturing
to-THE
HAND
said
MEN men !
16 Then Paul stood up, and beckoning with [his] hand said, Men of Israel, and ye that fear God, give audience.
foboumenoi phobeO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
akousate akouO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
THE
ones-FEARING ones-fearing tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
God
HEAR hear-ye ! pateras patEr

n_ Acc Pl m
17 The God of this people of Israel chose our fathers, and exalted the people when they dwelt as strangers in the land of Egypt, and with an high arm
13:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou israhl exelexato tous houtos israEl eklegO ho

pd Gen Sg m ni proper vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
THE
God
OF-THE
PEOPLE
this
ISRAEL
choosES
THE
FATHERS
AV
Acts 13
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
uywsen hupsoO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paroikia paroikia
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
aiguptou aiguptos
n_ Gen Sg f
brought he them out of it.
OF-US
AND
THE
PEOPLE
He-HEIGHTENS IN he-exalts exhgagen exagO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
BESIDE-HOMEing IN sojourn auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
LAND
OF-EGYPT
kai meta bracionos uyhlou kai meta brachiOn hupsElos

Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Sg m
autous ex autos ek
pp Acc Pl m Prep
AND
WITH
upper-arm
HIGH
He-OUT-LED he-led-out
them
OUT OF-her of-herit autous en autos en

pp Acc Pl m Prep
13:18 kai ws
kai
Conj
hOs
Adv
tesserakontaeth cronon tesserakontaetEs chronos

etropoforhsen tropophoreO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
18 And about the time of forty years suffered he their manners in the wilderness.
AND
AS FOUR-TY-YEAR about forty-year

NA
TIME
He-NURTURE-CARRIES them he-carries-as-a-nurse epta hepta

ni numeral
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness
19 And when he had destroyed seven nations in the land of Chanaan, he divided their land to them by lot.
13:19
kai kai
Conj
kaqelwn kathaireO
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
canaan kateklhronomhsen chanaan kataklEronomeO

ni proper vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
DOWN-LIFTING pulling-down autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
NATIONS
SEVEN
IN
LAND
CHANAAN He-DOWN-tenants of-Canaan he-occupies
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
LAND
OF-them
13:20 ws
hOs
Adv
etesin tetrakosiois kai penthkonta kai meta tauta etos tetrakosioi kai pentEkonta kai meta houtos
n_ Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n Conj ni numeral Conj Prep pd Acc Pl n
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kritas kritEs
n_ Acc Pl m
AS to-YEARS about ews samouhl heOs samouEl

Conj ni proper
FOUR-hundred
NA
AND
FIVE-ty fifty
AND
after
these
He-GIVES
JUDGers judges
20 And after that he gave [unto them] judges about the space of four hundred and fifty years, until Samuel the prophet.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
SAMUEL
THE
BEFORE-AVERer prophet basilea kai edwken basileus kai didOmi

13:21 kakeiqen hthsanto

kakeithen
Adv Con
aiteO
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl
autois o autos ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AND-thence
THEY-REQUEST KING
AND
GIVES
to-them them
THE
God
THE
21 And afterward they desired a king: and God gave unto them Saul the son of Cis, a man of the tribe of Benjamin, by the space of forty years.
saoul saoul
ni proper
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
kis kis
ni proper
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
fulhs phulE
n_ Gen Sg f
beniamin eth beniamin etos

ni proper n_ Acc Pl n
tesserakonta tesserakonta
ni numeral
SAUL ( Heb. ) SON Saul
of-KIS of-Kis
MAN
OUT OF-tribe
BENJAMIN of-Benjamin
YEARS
FOUR-TY forty basilea w basileus hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Dat Sg m
22 And when he had removed him, he raised up unto them David to be their king; to whom also he gave testimony, and said, I have found David the [son] of Jesse, a man after mine own heart, which shall fulfil all my will.
13:22 kai metasthsas

kai
Conj
methistEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dauid autois eis dauid autos eis

ni proper pp Dat Pl m Prep
AND
after-STANDing deposing
him
He-ROUSES
THE
DAVID
to-them
INTO KING
WH
to-WHOM
kai eipen kai legO

marturhsas martureO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
dauid ton dauid ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iessai iessai
ni proper
andra
AND also
NA
He-said
witnessing testifying kata kata

Prep
I-FOUND
DAVID
THE
OF-THE
JESSE
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian mou kardia egO

os hos
pr Nom Sg m
poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
MAN
according-to THE
HEART
OF-ME
WHO
SHALL-BE-DOING ALL
THE
qelhmata mou thelEma egO

WILLS will(p)
OF-ME
13:23 toutou o
houtos
pd Gen Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
spermatos kat sperma kata

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-this-one of-this-man hgagen agO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
God
FROM THE
seed
according-to promise
23 Of this man's seed hath God according to [his] promise raised unto Israel a Saviour, Jesus:
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
israhl swthra ihsoun israEl sOtEr iEsous

ni proper n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
LED
to-THE
ISRAEL
SAViour
JESUS
AV
Acts 13
13:24 prokhruxantos
prokErussO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
iwannou pro iOannEs pro

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
proswpou ths prosOpon ho

eisodou autou eisodos autos

OF-BEFORE-PROCLAIMing OF-JOHN of-proclaiming-before baptisma metanoias panti baptisma metanoia pas

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f a_ Dat Sg m
BEFORE face personal tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE the israhl israEl

ni proper
INTO-WAY entrance
OF-Him
24 When John had first preached before his coming the baptism of repentance to all the people of Israel.
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
DIPism baptism
OF-after-MIND of-repentance eplhrou plEroO
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
PEOPLE
of-ISRAEL of-Israel elegen legO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
13:25 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
iwannhs ton iOannEs ho

dromon dromos
n_ Acc Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi impf Act 3 Sg
AS
YET FILLED completed
JOHN
THE
RUNning career egw egO
he-said
ANY what ?
ME
uponoeite huponoeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
all idou alla idou

ercetai erchomai
25 And as John fulfilled his course, he said, Whom think ye that I am? I am not [he]. But, behold, there cometh one after me, whose shoes of [his] feet I am not worthy to loose.
pp 1 Nom Sg
YOU-ARE-UNDER-MINDING TO-BE ye-are-suspecting met eme meta egO

Prep pp 1 Acc Sg
NOT
AM
but
BE-PERCEIVING IS-COMING lo ! one-is-coming upodhma twn hupodEma ho

ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
after
ME
OF-WHOM
NOT
I-AM
WORTHY
THE
sandal
OF-THE
FEET
lusai luO
vn Aor Act
TO-LOOSE
13:26 andres adelfoi uioi

anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
huios
n_ Voc Pl m
genous genos
n_ Gen Sg n
abraam abraam
ni proper
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
MEN men ! foboumenoi phobeO
brothers brethren ! ton ho
SONS
OF-breed of-race hmin hemeis
ABRAHAM AND of-Abraham o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE the-ones logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
YOU(p) ye swthrias tauths sOtEria houtos

qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
26 Men [and] brethren, children of the stock of Abraham, and whosoever among you feareth God, to you is the word of this salvation sent.
t_ Acc Sg m
pp 1 Dat Pl
FEARING
THE
God
to-US
THE
saying word
OF-THE
SAVing salvation
this
exapestalh exapostellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
WAS-OUT-FROM-PUT was-dispatched
13:27 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar katoikountes gar katoikeO

en en
Prep
ierousalhm kai oi ierosoluma kai ho

ni proper Conj t_ Nom Pl m
arcontes autwn archOn autos

THE
for
ones-DOWN-HOMING IN ones-dwelling
JERUSALEM
AND
THE
chiefs
OF-them
touton agnohsantes kai tas houtos agnoeO kai ho

pd Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl f
fwnas twn phOnE ho

profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kata kata
Prep
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
27 For they that dwell at Jerusalem, and their rulers, because they knew him not, nor yet the voices of the prophets which are read every sabbath day, they have fulfilled [them] in condemning [him].
this this-one
UN-KNOW ing being-ignorant-of
AND
THE
SOUNDS voices
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers THE prophets
according-to EVERY
sabbaton anaginwskomenas krinantes sabbaton anaginOskO krinO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Acc Pl f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eplhrwsan plEroO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
SABBATH
beING-read
JUDGing judging-him
THEY-FILL they-fulfill-them hthsanto aiteO

vi Aor Mid 3 Pl
13:28 kai mhdemian aitian qanatou eurontes

kai
Conj
mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg f
aitia
n_ Acc Sg f
thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
heuriskO
pilaton anaireqhnai pilatos anaireO

n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Pas
AND
NO-YET-ONE not-one
cause
OF-DEATH
FINDING
THEY-REQUEST PILATE
TO-BE-UP-LIFTED to-be-despatched
28 And though they found no cause of death [in him], yet desired they Pilate that he should be slain.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
13:29 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
etelesan teleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
gegrammena graphO
kaqelontes kathaireO
AS
YET THEY-FINISH ALL they-accomplish
THE
ABOUT Him
HAVING-been-WRITTEN DOWN-LIFTING taking-down-him
29 And when they had fulfilled all that was written of him, they took [him] down from the tree, and laid [him] in a sepulchre.
AV
Acts 13
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
xulou xulon
n_ Gen Sg n
eqhkan tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
FROM THE
WOOD pole de de
Conj
THEY-PLACE INTO memorial-vault they-place-him tomb hgeiren egeirO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
13:30 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
30 But God raised him from the dead:
THE
YET God
ROUSES
Him
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
13:31 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
epi hmeras pleious epi hEmera polus

Prep n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
sunanabasin sunanabainO
vp 2Aor Act Dat Pl m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WHO
WAS-VIEWED ON was-seen galilaias eis galilaia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
DAYS
MORE
to-THE
ones-TOGETHER-UP-STEPPing to-Him ones-ascending-together-with him eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
31 And he was seen many days of them which came up with him from Galilee to Jerusalem, who are his witnesses unto the people.
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ierousalhm oitines ierosoluma hostis

ni proper pr Nom Pl m
nun nun
Adv
martures autou martus autos

FROM THE
GALILEE
INTO JERUSALEM
WHO-ANY who-any
NOW
ARE
witnesses
OF-Him
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE
PEOPLE
13:32 kai hmeis

kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
euaggelizomeqa euaggelizO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras patEr
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
WE
YOU(p) to-ye
ARE-WELL-MESSAGizING THE are-bringing-the-well-message

(13:33)
TOWARD THE
FATHERS
32 And we declare unto you glad tidings, how that the promise which was made unto the fathers,
epaggelian genomenhn epaggelia ginomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg f
oti tauthn o hoti houtos ho

Conj pd Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekpeplhrwken tois ekplEroO ho

vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl n
promise
BECOMING
WH NA NA
that
this
THE
God
HAS-OUT-FILLED has-fully-fulfilled
to-THE
teknois teknon
n_ Dat Pl n
hmwn
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
anasthsas anistEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
offsprings children
OF-them
to-US
UP-STANDing raising gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
JESUS
13:33 ws kai en
hOs
Adv
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
yalmw psalmos
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
deuterw uios deuteros huios

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
AS
AND also su su
IN
THE
psalm
second
SON
OF-ME
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
shmeron gegennhka sEmeron gennaO

se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
33 God hath fulfilled the same unto us their children, in that he hath raised up Jesus again; as it is also written in the second psalm, Thou art my Son, this day have I begotten thee.
pp 2 Nom Sg
ARE
YOU
toDAY
HAVE-generatED YOU have-begotten ek ek

Prep
13:34 oti
hoti
Conj
de de
Conj
anesthsen auton anistEmi autos

nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
mhketi mEketi
Adv
mellonta mellO
that YET UP-STANDS seeing-that he-raises upostrefein eis hupostrephO eis

vn Pres Act Prep
Him
OUT OF-DEAD-ones NO-NOT-STILL beING-ABOUT of-dead-ones by-no-means-longer outws eirhken houtOs ereO
Adv vi Perf Act 3 Sg Att
n_ Acc Sg f
oti dwsw hoti didOmi

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
34 And as concerning that he raised him up from the dead, [now] no more to return to corruption, he said on this wise, I will give you the sure mercies of David.
TO-BE-reTURNING
INTO THRU-CORRUPTion thus decay pista pistos

a_ Acc Pl n
He-HAS-declarED that
I-SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) ye
THE
osia hosios
a_ Acc Pl n
dauid ta dauid ho
ni proper t_ Acc Pl n
BENIGNS of-DAVID THE benignities of-David
BELIEVing faithful eterw heteros

a_ Dat Sg m
13:35 dioti
dioti
Conj
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
dwseis didOmi
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
osion hosios
a_ Acc Sg m
THRU-that AND because-that also sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
IN
DIFFERENT He-IS-sayING different-psalm diafqoran diaphthora

n_ Acc Sg f
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-GIVING THE
BENIGN-One benign-one
35 Wherefore he saith also in another [psalm], Thou shalt not suffer thine Holy One to see corruption.
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
OF-YOU
TO-BE-PERCEIVING THRU-CORRUPTion to-be-being-aquainted-with decay
AV
Acts 13
13:36 dauid men

dauid
ni proper
men
Part
gar idia gar idios

Conj a_ Dat Sg f
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
uphrethsas hupEreteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
boulh boulE
n_ Dat Sg f
DAVID
INDEED for
to-OWN own
generation subserving
to-THE
OF-THE
God
COUNSEL
36 For David, after he had served his own generation by the will of God, fell on sleep, and was laid unto his fathers, and saw corruption:
ekoimhqh koimaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai proseteqh pros kai prostithEmi pros

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras autou patEr autos

kai eiden kai eidO

WAS-reposED AND was-put-to-repose diafqoran diaphthora

n_ Acc Sg f
WAS-addED
TOWARD THE
FATHERS
OF-him
AND
PERCEIVED was-acquainted-with
THRU-CORRUPTion decay
13:37 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
n_ Acc Sg f
37 But he, whom God raised again, saw no corruption.
WHOM
YET THE
God
ROUSES
NOT
PERCEIVED THRU-CORRUPTion he-was-acquainted-with decay toutou umin houtos humeis

pd Gen Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl
38 Be it known unto you therefore, men [and] brethren, that through this man is preached unto you the forgiveness of sins:
13:38 gnwston oun

gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
oun
Conj
estw eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelfoi oti dia adelphos hoti dia

n_ Voc Pl m Conj Prep
KNOWN
THEN LET-it-BE let-it-be !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
MEN men !
brothers brethren !
that
THRU this-One through this-one
to-YOU(p) to-ye
afesis aphesis
n_ Nom Sg f
amartiwn kataggelletai hamartia kataggellO

n_ Gen Pl f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
FROM-LETTing OF-misses pardon of-sins
IS-beING-DOWN-MESSAGED is-being-annouced apo apo

Prep
13:39
WH
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
pantwn wn pas hos

ouk ou
Part Neg
hdunhqhte dunamai
en en
Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
mwusews mOusEs
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
FROM ALL
WHICH of-which o ho
NOT
YE-WERE-enABLED IN ye-could pisteuwn pisteuO

LAW
of-MOSES of-Moses
39 And by him all that believe are justified from all things, from which ye could not be justified by the law of Moses.
dikaiwqhnai (13:39) en dikaioO en

vn Aor Pas Prep
toutw pas houtos pas

pd Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
dikaioutai dikaioO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-JUSTIFIED
IN
this this-one
EVERY
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing eirhmenon ereO
IS-beING-JUSTIFIED
13:40 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
epelqh eperchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
40 Beware therefore, lest that come upon you, which is spoken of in the prophets;
BE-YE-lookING THEN NO be-ye-bewaring ! profhtais prophEtEs

n_ Dat Pl m
MAY-BE-ON-COMING THE may-be-coming-on
HAVING-been-declarED IN
THE
13:41 idete
eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
katafronhtai kai qaumasate kai afanisqhte kataphronEtEs kai thaumazO kai aphanizO
n_ Nom Pl m Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
BE-PERCEIVING THE be-ye-perceiving ! ergon ergon

n_ Acc Sg n
DOWN-DISPOSers despisers egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
MARVEL-YE marvel-ye !
AND
BE-YE-BEING-UN-APPEARizED that be-ye-disappearing ! o hos

pr Acc Sg n
ergazomai ergazomai
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
hmerais umwn hEmera humeis

ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
41 Behold, ye despisers, and wonder, and perish: for I work a work in your days, a work which ye shall in no wise believe, though a man declare it unto you.
ACT work
AM-ACTING am-working ean ean

Cond
IN
THE
DAYS
OF-YOU(p) ACT of-ye work umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
WHICH
NOT
NO
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ekdihghtai ekdiEgeomai
YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING IF-EVER ANY anyone
MAY-BE-OUT-relatING to-YOU(p) may-be-detailing-it to-ye parekaloun parakaleO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
13:42 exiontwn
exeimi
vp 2Aor vxx Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
metaxu sabbaton metaxu sabbaton

Adv n_ Acc Sg n
OF-OUT-BEING of-being-out lalhqhnai laleO

vn Aor Pas
YET them of-them
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED INTO THE they-entreated rhmata rhEma

n_ Acc Pl n
between intervening
SABBATH
42 . And when the Jews were gone out of the synagogue, the Gentiles besought that these words might be preached to them the next sabbath.
autois ta autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
TO-BE-TALKED to-them to-be-spoken
THE
declarations these
AV
Acts 13
13:43 luqeishs
luO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sunagwghs sunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
hkolouqhsan polloi akoloutheO polus

vi Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-BEING-LOOSED YET THE of-being-broken-up of-the kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
TOGETHER-LEAD follow synagogue proshlutwn tw prosElutos ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
MANY
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews barnaba barnabas

n_ Dat Sg m
sebomenwn sebomai
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
43 Now when the congregation was broken up, many of the Jews and religious proselytes followed Paul and Barnabas: who, speaking to them, persuaded them to continue in the grace of God.
AND
OF-THE
REVERING being-reverent
TOWARD-COMers proselytes
to-THE the
PAUL
AND
to-THE the
Barnabas
oitines proslalountes autois epeiqon hostis proslaleO autos peithO

pr Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp Dat Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
autous prosmenein autos prosmenO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti charis
n_ Dat Sg f
WHO-ANY who-any tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD-TALKING speaking-to qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
to-them them
PERSUADED them
TO-BE-TOWARD-REMAINING to-THE to-be-remaining-in the
grace
OF-THE
God
13:44 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg n
de de
Conj
ercomenw erchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg n
sabbatw scedon pasa sabbaton schedon pas

n_ Dat Sg n Adv a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
to-THE
YET COMING
SABBATH
ALMOST
EVERY entire
WH
THE
NA
city
44 And the next sabbath day came almost the whole city together to hear the word of God.
sunhcqh sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
akousai ton akouO ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
WAS-TOGETHER-LED TO-HEAR was-gathered
THE
saying word
OF-THE
Master Lord oclous eplhsqhsan ochlos plEthO (pimplEmi)

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
13:45 idontes
eidO
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi tous ioudaios ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
zhlou zElos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
PERCEIVING
YET THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
THRONGS
THEY-ARE-FILLED OF-BOILing are-filled of-jealousy
AND
antelegon antilegO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
upo paulou hupo paulos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
laloumenois blasfhmountes laleO blasphEmeO

vp Pres Pas Dat Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
45 But when the Jews saw the multitudes, they were filled with envy, and spake against those things which were spoken by Paul, contradicting and blaspheming.
THEY-contradictED to-THE by the-things
PAUL
beING-TALKED being-spoken o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
HARM-AVERRING blaspheming kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
13:46 parrhsiasamenoi te
parrhEsiazomai
te
Part
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
barnabas eipan barnabas legO

n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
being-bold
BESIDES THE bsboth
PAUL
AND
THE
Barnabas
say
to-YOU(p) to-ye epeidh epeidE

Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
anagkaion prwton anagkaios prOton

a_ Nom Sg n Adv
lalhqhnai laleO
vn Aor Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
46 Then Paul and Barnabas waxed bold, and said, It was necessary that the word of God should first have been spoken to you: but seeing ye put it from you, and judge yourselves unworthy of everlasting life, lo, we turn to the Gentiles.
it-WAS
necessary
BEFORE-most TO-BE-TALKED THE first to-be-spoken auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
saying word krinete krinO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
OF-THE
God
ON-IF-BIND since-in-fact aiwniou aiOnios

a_ Gen Sg f
apwqeisqe apOtheO
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
axious axios
a_ Acc Pl m
eautous ths heautou ho

pf 3 Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
YE-ARE-FROM-THRUSTING it him it ye-are-thrusting-away zwhs zOE

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
NOT
WORTHY
YE-ARE-JUDGING selves yourselves eqnh ethnos

n_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
eonian
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
strefomeqa strephO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
LIFE
BE-PERCEIVING WE-ARE-TURNING INTO THE lo ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
NATIONS
13:47 outws gar entetaltai hmin

houtOs
Adv
gar
Conj
entellomai
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
teqeika tithEmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
eis eis
Prep
thus
for
HAS-directED
to-US us einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
THE
Master Lord eis eis

Prep
I-HAVE-PLACED YOU I-have-appointed
INTO
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
swthrian ews sOtEria heOs

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
escatou ths eschatos ho

a_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
47 For so hath the Lord commanded us, [saying], I have set thee to be a light of the Gentiles, that thou shouldest be for salvation unto the ends of the earth.
LIGHT
OF-NATIONS OF-THE
TO-BE
YOU
INTO SAVing salvation
TILL OF-LAST as-far-as limits
OF-THE
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
LAND earth
AV
Acts 13 - Acts 14
13:48 akouonta
akouO
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
ecairon chairO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai edoxazon ton kai doxazO ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
HEARING hearing-this
WH
YET THE
NATIONS
JOYED rejoiced
AND
esteemizED glorified
THE
saying word eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
48 And when the Gentiles heard this, they were glad, and glorified the word of the Lord: and as many as were ordained to eternal life believed.
qeou
NA
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kai episteusan osoi kai pisteuO hosos

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl pk Nom Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
tetagmenoi tassO
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
Master Lord aiwnion aiOnios

a_ Acc Sg f
AND
BELIEVE they-believe
as-many-as WERE whoever
HAVING-been-SET
INTO LIFE
eonian
13:49 diefereto
diapherO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
olhs holos
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
49 And the word of the Lord was published throughout all the region.
was-THRU-CARRIED YET THE was-carried-through cwras chOra

n_ Gen Sg f
saying word
OF-THE
Master Lord
THRU WHOLE through
OF-THE the
SPACE country
13:50 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ioudaioi parwtrunan ioudaios parotrunO

a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
sebomenas sebomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl f
gunaikas tas gunE ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl f
THE
YET JUDA-ans Jews
BESIDE-INSTIGATE THE spur-on prwtous prOtos

a_ Acc Pl m
REVERING being-reverent
WOMEN
THE
euschmonas kai tous euschEmOn kai ho

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai ephgeiran polis kai epegeirO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
diwgmon epi diOgmos epi

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
50 But the Jews stirred up the devout and honourable women, and the chief men of the city, and raised persecution against Paul and Barnabas, and expelled them out of their coasts.
WELL-FIGURED respectable ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
BEFORE-ones OF-THE foremost-men
city
AND
THEY-ON-ROUSE CHASing rouse-up persecution twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
ON
paulon kai barnaban kai exebalon paulos kai barnabas kai ekballO
n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autous apo autos apo

pp Acc Pl m Prep
oriwn horion
n_ Gen Pl n
THE
PAUL
AND
Barnabas
AND
THEY-OUT-CAST(past) them they-ejected
FROM THE
boundaries
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
OF-them
13:51 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ektinaxamenoi ton ektinassO ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
koniorton twn koniortos ho

podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
ep epi
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
51 But they shook off the dust of their feet against them, and came unto Iconium.
THE
YET OUT-QUIVERing shaking-off eis eis

Prep
THE
DUST
OF-THE
FEET
ON
them
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ikonion ikonion
n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-CAME
INTO ICONIUM
13:52 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
te te
Part
maqhtai eplhrounto caras mathEtEs plEroO chara

n_ Nom Pl m vi impf Pas 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f
kai pneumatos agiou kai pneuma hagios

Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
52 And the disciples were filled with joy, and with the Holy Ghost.
THE
BESIDES LEARNers disciples
were-FILLED
OF-JOY
AND
OF-spirit
HOLY
AV
Acts 14
14:1 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
ikoniw kata ikonion kata

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
vn 2Aor Act

pp Acc Pl m Prep
BECAME it-occurred thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YET IN
ICONIUM
according-to THE
SAME
TO-BE-INTO-COMING them to-be-entering pisteusai pisteuO

vn Aor Act
INTO
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai lalhsai outws wste ioudaios kai laleO houtOs hOste
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vn Aor Act Adv Conj
. And it came to pass in Iconium, that they went both together into the synagogue of the Jews, and so spake, that a great multitude both of the Jews and also of the Greeks believed.
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-THE synagogue
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
TO-TALK to-speak
thus
AS-BESIDES TO-BELIEVE so-that
ioudaiwn te ioudaios te
a_ Gen Pl m Part
kai ellhnwn polu kai hellEn polus

Conj n_ Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-JUDA-ans of-Jews
BESIDES AND bsboth de de

Conj
OF-GREEKS
much vast
multitude
14:2 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apeiqhsantes ioudaioi ephgeiran kai ekakwsan tas apeitheO ioudaios epegeirO kai kakoO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
yucas psuchE
n_ Acc Pl f
THE
YET UN-PERSUADing being-stubborn eqnwn ethnos

n_ Gen Pl n
JUDA-ans Jews adelfwn adelphos

n_ Gen Pl m
ON-ROUSE rouse-up
AND
EVIL-treat provoke
THE
souls
But the unbelieving Jews stirred up the Gentiles, and made their minds evil affected against the brethren.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
kata twn kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
NATIONS
DOWN against
OF-THE the
brothers brethren dietriyan parrhsiazomenoi diatribO parrhEsiazomai

vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
14:3 ikanon
hikanos
a_ Acc Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi tw epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
enough INDEED THEN TIME considerable tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
THEY-tarry
beING-bold speaking-boldly logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
ON
THE
Master Lord
marturounti martureO
NA
epi epi
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos autou charis autos

Long time therefore abode they speaking boldly in the Lord, which gave testimony unto the word of his grace, and granted signs and wonders to be done by their hands.
THE
One-witnessING one-witnessing
ON
THE
saying word
OF-THE
grace
OF-Him
didonti didOmi
shmeia kai terata ginesqai sEmeion kai teras ginomai

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ceirwn autwn cheir autos

GIVING granting
SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES TO-BE-BECOMING THRU THE to-be-occurring through plhqos plEthos

n_ Nom Sg n
HANDS
OF-them
14:4 escisqh
schizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai oi polis kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
IS-SPLIT is-rent sun sun

Prep
YET THE
multitude
OF-THE
city
AND
THE the(p)
INDEED WERE
But the multitude of the city was divided: and part held with the Jews, and part with the apostles.
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois oi ioudaios ho
a_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
apostolois apostolos
n_ Dat Pl m
JUDA-ans Jews
THE the(p) ormh hormE

n_ Nom Sg f
YET TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
commissioners apostles kai ioudaiwn sun kai ioudaios sun

Conj a_ Gen Pl m Prep
14:5 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
te te
Part
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
AS
YET BECAME RUSH there-came-to-be onset ubrisai hubrizO

vn Aor Act
OF-THE
NATIONS
BESIDES AND bsboth
OF-JUDA-ans of-Jews
And when there was an assault made both of the Gentiles, and also of the Jews with their rulers, to use [them] despitefully, and to stone them,
arcousin autwn archOn autos

kai liqobolhsai autous kai lithoboleO autos

Conj vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m
chiefs
OF-them
TO-OUTRAGE AND
TO-STONE-CAST to-pelt-with-stones eis eis

Prep
them
14:6 sunidontes
suneideO
katefugon katapheugO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
poleis ths polis ho

lukaonias lustran kai lukaonia lustra kai

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
beING-conscious THEY-DOWN-FLED INTO THE being-conscious-of-it they-fled-for-refuge derbhn kai thn derbE kai ho
cities
OF-THE
LYCAONIA
LYSTRA
AND
They were ware of [it], and fled unto Lystra and Derbe, cities of Lycaonia, and unto the region that lieth round about:
pericwron perichOros
a_ Acc Sg f
DERBE
AND
THE
7
14:7 kakei
kakei
Adv Con
euaggelizomenoi hsan euaggelizO eimi

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
And there they preached the gospel.
AND-there WELL-MESSAGizING THEY-WERE bringing-the-well-message
AV
Acts 14
14:8 kai tis

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
adunatos en adunatos en
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
lustrois tois lustra ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Dat Pl m
posin pous
n_ Dat Pl m
ekaqhto kathEmai
AND
ANY certain ek ek
Prep
MAN
UN-ABLE impotent
IN
LYSTRA
to-THE
FEET
sat
. And there sat a certain man at Lystra, impotent in his feet, being a cripple from his mother's womb, who never had walked:
cwlos chOlos
a_ Nom Sg m

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
oudepote oudepote
Adv
periepathsen peripateO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
LAME
OUT OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER OF-him of-womb

WH
WHO
NOT-YET-?-when ABOUT-TREADS never walks paulou paulos

n_ Gen Sg m
14:9 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
hkouen
NA
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
this-one this-one atenisas atenizO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
HEARS
OF-THE the
PAUL
TALKING speaking
WHO
The same heard Paul speak: who stedfastly beholding him, and perceiving that he had faith to be healed,
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai idwn kai eidO

oti ecei hoti echO

pistin tou pistis ho

swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
STRETCHing looking-intently-at
to-him him
AND
PERCEIVING
that
he-IS-HAVING BELIEF faith epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
TO-BE-SAVED
14:10 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
megalh fwnh mega phOnE

anasthqi anistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
orqos orthos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
10 Said with a loud voice, Stand upright on thy feet. And he leaped and walked.
said
to-GREAT to-loud
SOUND voice
BE-UP-STANDING ON be-you-rising !
THE
FEET
OF-YOU
ERECT upright
AND
hlato hallomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kai periepatei kai peripateO

he-LEAPS
AND
ABOUT-TROD walked ocloi ochlos

n_ Nom Pl m
14:11 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
te te
Part
idontes eidO
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
epoihsen paulos poieO paulos

ephran epairO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
BESIDES THRONGS
PERCEIVING
WHICH
DOES
PAUL
ON-LIFT lift-up
THE
fwnhn autwn phOnE autos

lukaonisti legontes lukaonisti legO

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
qeoi theos
n_ Nom Pl m
omoiwqentes anqrwpois homoioO anthrOpos

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
11 And when the people saw what Paul had done, they lifted up their voices, saying in the speech of Lycaonia, The gods are come down to us in the likeness of men.
SOUND voice
OF-them
LYCAONian to-Lycaonian hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
sayING
THE
gods
BEING-LIKenED in-the-likeness
to-humans
katebhsan katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
DOWN-STEPPed TOWARD US descended
14:12 ekaloun
kaleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
barnaban dia barnabas zeus

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
paulon ermhn paulos hermEs

THEY-CALLED BESIDES THE
Barnabas
ZEUS
THE
YET PAUL
Hermes (TRANSLATOR) Hermes
12 And they called Barnabas, Jupiter; and Paul, Mercurius, because he was the chief speaker.
epeidh epeidE
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
hgoumenos hEgeomai
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
ON-IF-BIND he since-in-fact
WAS
THE
one-LEADING one-leading dios zeus

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE the-one tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
saying
14:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
iereus hiereus
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ontos eimi
pro pro
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
BESIDES SACRED-one OF-THE priest
ZEUS
THE
BEING
BEFORE THE
13 Then the priest of Jupiter, which was before their city, brought oxen and garlands unto the gates, and would have done sacrifice with the people.
polews taurous kai stemmata epi tous polis tauros kai stemma epi ho
n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Pl m
pulwnas enegkas pulOn pherO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
city
BULLS
AND
garlands
ON
THE
GATES portals
CARRYing bringing
TOGETHER to-THE with-the
oclois hqelen ochlos thelO

quein thuO
vn Pres Act
THRONGS he-WILLED willed
TO-BE-SACRIFICING
14:14 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi barnabas kai paulos apostolos barnabas kai paulos

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
diarrhxantes ta diarrhEgnumi ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
YET THE
Barnabas
AND
PAUL
THRU-BURSTing tearing
THE
14 [Which] when the apostles, Barnabas and Paul, heard [of], they rent their clothes, and ran in among the people, crying out,
AV
Acts 14
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
WH
eautwn
NA
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
exephdhsan ekpEdaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
krazontes krazO
GARMENTS
OF-them
THEY-OUT-SPRING INTO THE spring-out ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
THRONG
CRYING
14:15 kai legontes

kai
Conj
legO
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
omoiopaqeis homoiopathEs
a_ Nom Pl m
AND
sayING
MEN men !
ANY why ?
these YE-ARE-DOING AND these-things also apo apo

Prep
WE
LIKE-EMOTIONED of-like-emotions mataiwn mataios

a_ Gen Pl m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
anqrwpoi euaggelizomenoi umas anthrOpos euaggelizO humeis

n_ Nom Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl

15 And saying, Sirs, why do ye these things? We also are men of like passions with you, and preach unto you that ye should turn from these vanities unto the living God, which made heaven, and earth, and the sea, and all things that are therein:
ARE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
humans
WELL-MESSAGizING YOU(p) bringing-the-well-message to-ye zwnta zaO

FROM these
THE
VAINS vain-things
epistrefein epistrephO
vn Pres Act
epi qeon epi theos

Prep n_ Acc Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
epoihsen ton poieO ho

ouranon kai ouranos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
TO-BE-ON-TURNING ON to-be-turning-back thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
God
LIVING
WHO
makES
THE
heaven
AND
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan kai panta thalassa kai pas

n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
THE
LAND earth
AND
THE
SEA
AND
ALL
THE the(p)
IN
them
14:16 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
parwchmenais paroichomai
vp Perf midD/pasD Dat Pl f
geneais eiasen genea eaO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
16 Who in times past suffered all nations to walk in their own ways.
WHO
IN
THE
HAVING-been-BESIDE-GONE-BY generations having-been-bygone odois hodos

n_ Dat Pl f
LEAVES
ALL
THE
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
poreuesqai tais poreuomai ho

vn Pres midD/pasD t_ Dat Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
NATIONS
TO-BE-GOING
THE to-the
WAYS
OF-them
14:17 kaitoi
kaitoi
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
amarturon amarturos
a_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
agaqourgwn agathoergeO
ouranoqen umin ouranothen humeis

Adv pp 2 Dat Pl
AND-THOUGH NOT although uetous didous huetos didOmi

UN-witnessed He without-testimony himself
FROM-LETS he-leaves
GOOD-ACTING acting-good
from-heaven
to-YOU(p) to-ye kai kai

Conj
kai kairous karpoforous empiplwn kai kairos karpophoros emplEmi

Conj n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
17 Nevertheless he left not himself without witness, in that he did good, and gave us rain from heaven, and fruitful seasons, filling our hearts with food and gladness.
WET showers
GIVING
AND
SEASONS
FRUITS-CARRYing fruitful
HAVING-IN-FILLED having-filled
OF-NURTURE AND of-nourishment
eufrosunhs tas euphrosunE ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Pl f

OF-gladness
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye molis katepausan molis katapauO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
14:18 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
legontes legO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oclous tou ochlos ho

mh mE
Part Neg
AND
these sayING these-things autois autos

pp Dat Pl m
HARDLY THEY-DOWN-CEASE THE they-stop
THRONGS
OF-THE
NO
18 And with these sayings scarce restrained they the people, that they had not done sacrifice unto them.
quein thuO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-SACRIFICING to-them
14:19 ephlqan de
eperchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
antioceias kai ikoniou ioudaioi kai peisantes antiocheia kai ikonion ioudaios kai peithO
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ON-COME come-on
YET FROM ANTIOCH
AND
ICONIUM
JUDA-ans Jews exw exO

Adv
AND
PERSUADing
THE
oclous kai liqasantes ochlos kai lithazO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon esuron paulos surO

n_ Acc Sg m vi impf Act 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews polis
n_ Gen Sg f
19 . And there came thither [certain] Jews from Antioch and Iconium, who persuaded the people, and, having stoned Paul, drew [him] out of the city, supposing he had been dead.
THRONGS
AND
STONing
THE
PAUL
THEY-DRAGGED OUT OF-THE they-dragged-him outside
city
nomizontes nomizO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
teqnhkenai thnEskO
vn Perf Act
LAWizING inferring
him
TO-HAVE-DIED
AV
Acts 14
14:20 kuklwsantwn de
kukloO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn auton mathEtEs autos

n_ Gen Pl m pp Acc Sg m
anastas anistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
OF-surROUNDing
YET OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
him
UP-STANDing rising sun sun

Prep
he-INTO-CAME INTO he-entered barnaba eis barnabas eis

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
20 Howbeit, as the disciples stood round about him, he rose up, and came into the city: and the next day he departed with Barnabas to Derbe.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
derbhn derbE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
city
AND
to-THE
ON-MORROW he-OUT-CAME TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith he-came-out the thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
Barnabas
INTO DERBE
14:21 euaggelisamenoi
euaggelizO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
te te
Part
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ekeinhn kai maqhteusantes ikanous ekeinos kai mathEteuO hikanos

pd Acc Sg f Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
being-WELL-MESSAGizED BESIDES THE bringing-the-well-message to-the upestreyan eis hupostrephO eis

city
that
AND
making-LEARNers making-disciples
WH
enough considerable antioceian antiocheia

n_ Acc Sg f
21 And when they preached the gospel to city, and had taught many, returned again to Lystra, [to] Iconium, and Antioch,
had that they and
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
lustran kai eis lustra kai eis

ikonion kai ikonion kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
eis
NA
eis eis
Prep
THEY-reTURN
INTO THE
LYSTRA
AND
INTO ICONIUM
AND
INTO
ANTIOCH
14:22 episthrizontes tas

epistErizO
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
yucas twn psuchE ho

maqhtwn parakalountes emmenein mathEtEs parakaleO emmenO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vn Pres Act
ON-STANDING-fast establishing th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
souls
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
BESIDE-CALLING entreating-them dei deO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-IN-REMAINING to-be-remaining-in eiselqein eiserchomai

vn 2Aor Act
pistei kai oti dia pistis kai hoti dia

n_ Dat Sg f Conj Conj Prep
pollwn qliyewn polus thlipsis

a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
22 Confirming the souls of the disciples, [and] exhorting them to continue in the faith, and that we must through much tribulation enter into the kingdom of God.
to-THE the eis eis

Prep
BELIEF faith thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
AND
that
THRU MANY through qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
CONSTRICTIONS it-IS-BINDING afflictions
US

INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
14:23 ceirotonhsantes de
cheirotoneO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
autois kat autos kata

pp Dat Pl m Prep
ekklhsian presbuterous proseuxamenoi ekklEsia presbuteros proseuchomai

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Pl m vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
HAND-STRETCHing selecting
YET to-them
according-to OUT-CALLED ecclesia autous tw autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
SENIORS elders eis eis

Prep
praying
meta nhsteiwn pareqento meta nEsteia paratithEmi

Prep n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
23 And when they had ordained them elders in every church, and had prayed with fasting, they commended them to the Lord, on whom they believed.
WITH
fasts fastings
THEY-BESIDE-PLACED them they-committed
to-THE
Master Lord
INTO WHOM
pepisteukeisan pisteuO
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
THEY-HAD-BELIEVED
14:24 kai dielqontes

kai
Conj
dierchomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pisidian hlqon pisidia erchomai

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pamfulian pamphulia
n_ Acc Sg f
24 And after they had passed throughout Pisidia, they came to Pamphylia.
AND
THE
PISIDIA
THEY-CAME
INTO THE
Pamphylia
14:25 kai lalhsantes en

kai
Conj
laleO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
en
Prep
pergh pergE
n_ Dat Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
katebhsan katabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
attaleian attaleia
n_ Acc Sg f
25 And when they had preached the word in Perga, they went down into Attalia:
AND
TALKing speaking
IN
PERGA
THE
saying word
THEY-DOWN-STEPPed INTO ATTALIA they-descended hsan eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Pl
14:26 kakeiqen apepleusan

kakeithen
Adv Con
apopleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
antioceian oqen antiocheia hothen

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
paradedomenoi paradidOmi
AND-thence
THEY-FROM-FLOAT INTO ANTIOCH they-sail-away qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH-PLACE THEY-WERE HAVING-been-BESIDE-GIVEN whence having-been-given-over ergon ergon

n_ Acc Sg n
26 And thence sailed to Antioch, from whence they had been recommended to the grace of God for the work which they fulfilled.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti tou charis ho

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
eplhrwsan plEroO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
to-THE
grace
OF-THE
God
INTO THE
work
WHICH
THEY-FILL they-fulfill osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
27 And when they were come, and had gathered the church together, they rehearsed all that God had done with them, and how he had opened the door of
paraginomai
de
Conj
kai sunagagontes kai sunagO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian anhggellon ekklEsia anaggellO

YET AND
TOGETHER-LEADING THE gathering
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
THEY-UP-MESSAGED as-much-as they-informed-them whatever
AV
Acts 14 - Acts 15
epoihsen o poieO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m

Prep pp Gen Pl m
kai oti hnoixen kai hoti anoigO

Conj Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin quran ethnos thura

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Acc Sg f
faith unto the Gentiles.
DOES
THE
God
WITH them
AND
that
He-UP-OPENS to-THE he-opens
NATIONS
DOOR
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-BELIEF of-faith
14:28 dietribon de
diatribO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais mathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
28 And there they abode long time with the disciples.
THEY-tarriED
YET TIME
NOT
FEW brief
LEARNers disciples
AV
Acts 15
15:1 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
katelqontes apo katerchomai apo

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias edidaskon tous ioudaia didaskO ho

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
AND
ANY some-men mh mE
Part Neg
DOWN-COMING coming-down peritmhqhte peritemnO

vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
FROM THE
JUDEA
TAUGHT
THE
brothers brethren
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
eqei ethos
n_ Dat Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
mwusews ou mOusEs ou
. And certain men which came down from Judaea taught the brethren, [and said], Except ye be circumcised after the manner of Moses, ye cannot be saved.
that
IF-EVER NO
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-ABOUT-CUT to-THE ye-may-be-being-circumcised swqhnai sOzO

vn Aor Pas
CUSTOM
to-THE
MOSES
NOT
dunasqe dunamai
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
TO-BE-SAVED
15:2 genomenhs
ginomai
de de
Conj
stasews kai zhthsews ouk stasis kai zEtEsis ou

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg
olighs oligos
a_ Gen Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
OF-BECOMING
YET OF-STANDing AND of-commotion
OF-SEEKing of-questioning
NOT
FEW slight
to-THE
PAUL
AND
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
barnaba pros barnabas pros

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
autous etaxan autos tassO

pp Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
anabainein anabainO
vn Pres Act
paulon kai barnaban kai paulos kai barnabas kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj
When therefore Paul and Barnabas had no small dissension and disputation with them, they determined that Paul and Barnabas, and certain other of them, should go up to Jerusalem unto the apostles and elders about this question.
to-THE
Barnabas
TOWARD them
THEY-SET TO-BE-UP-STEPPING PAUL they-prescribe to-be-going-up pros pros

Prep
AND
Barnabas
AND
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
allous ex allos ek
a_ Acc Pl m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
apostolous kai presbuterous eis apostolos kai presbuteros eis

n_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep
ANY some
others
OUT OF-them
TOWARD THE
AND
SENIORS elders
INTO
ierousalhm peri ierosoluma peri

ni proper Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
zhthmatos toutou zEtEma houtos

JERUSALEM
ABOUT THE concerning men men

Part
SEEK-effect question propemfqentes propempO

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
this
15:3 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
upo ths hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias dihrconto ekklEsia dierchomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
THE the-ones thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
INDEED THEN ones-BEING-BEFORE-SENT by being-sent-forward
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THRU-CAME passed-through epistrofhn twn epistrophE ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl n
te te
Part
foinikhn kai samareian ekdihgoumenoi phoinikE kai samareia ekdiEgeomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
And being brought on their way by the church, they passed through Phenice and Samaria, declaring the conversion of the Gentiles: and they caused great joy unto all the brethren.
THE
BESIDES PHOENICIA
AND
SAMARIA
OUT-relatING detailing tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THE
ON-TURNing turning-about
OF-THE
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
kai epoioun kai poieO

caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
megalhn pasin mega pas

a_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Pl m
adelfois adelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
NATIONS
AND
THEY-made JOY they-docaused eis eis

Prep
GREAT
WH
to-ALL
NA
THE
brothers brethren paredecqhsan paradechomai

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
paraginomai
ierosoluma
de
Conj
ni proper
apo apo
Prep
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YET INTO
JERUSALEM
THEY-WERE-BESIDE-RECEIVED FROM they-were-received presbuterwn anhggeilan presbuteros anaggellO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ekklhsias kai twn ekklEsia kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn kai twn apostolos kai ho

And when they were come to Jerusalem, they were received of the church, and [of] the apostles and elders, and they declared all things that God had done with them.
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
AND
THE
AND
THE
SENIORS elders
THEY-UP-MESSAGE they-inform-them
te te
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
epoihsen met autwn poieO meta autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep pp Gen Pl m
BESIDES as-much-as THE whatever
God
DOES
WITH them
15:5 exanesthsan de
exanistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
airesews twn hairesis ho

n_ Gen Pl m
OUT-UP-STAND rise-up
YET ANY some
OF-THE FROM THE of-the-ones oti dei hoti deO

preference sect peritemnein peritemnO

vn Pres Act
OF-THE
PHARISEES
pepisteukotes legontes pisteuO legO

vp Perf Act Nom Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
autous paraggellein autos paraggellO

But there rose up certain of the sect of the Pharisees which believed, saying, That it was needful to circumcise them, and to command [them] to keep the law of Moses.
HAVING-BELIEVED
sayING
that
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING them to-be-circumcising
TO-BE-chargING to-be-charging-them
AV
Acts 15
te te
Part
threin tEreO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
mwusews mOusEs
n_ Gen Sg m
BESIDES TO-BE-KEEPING THE
LAW
of-MOSES of-Moses apostoloi kai oi apostolos kai ho

15:6 sunhcqhsan
sunagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
te te
Part
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
a_ Nom Pl m
. And the apostles and elders came together for to consider of this matter.
WERE-TOGETHER-LED BESIDES THE were-gathered idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
commissioners apostles toutou houtos

pd Gen Sg m
AND
THE
SENIORS elders
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-PERCEIVING ABOUT THE
saying matter
this
15:7 pollhs de
polus
a_ Gen Sg f
de
Conj
zhthsews genomenhs zEtEsis ginomai

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f
anastas anistEmi
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
OF-much
YET questioning
BECOMING
UP-STANDing rising
Peter
said
TOWARD
autous andres autos anEr

pp Acc Pl m n_ Voc Pl m
adelfoi umeis adelphos humeis

n_ Voc Pl m pp 2 Nom Pl
epistasqe epistamai
oti af hoti apo

Conj Prep
hmerwn arcaiwn en hEmera archaios en

n_ Gen Pl f a_ Gen Pl f Prep
them
MEN men !
brothers brethren !
YOU(p) ye qeos theos
ARE-adeptING that are-being-versed-in-the-fact dia dia

Prep
FROM DAYS
ORIGINals beginning(p)
IN among
And when there had been much disputing, Peter rose up, and said unto them, Men [and] brethren, ye know how that a good while ago God made choice among us, that the Gentiles by my mouth should hear the word of the gospel, and believe.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
exelexato o eklegO ho
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
stomatos mou stoma egO

akousai ta akouO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n
n_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye eqnh ethnos

n_ Acc Pl n
choosES
THE
God
THRU THE through
MOUTH
OF-ME
TO-HEAR
THE
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou kai pisteusai euaggelion kai pisteuO

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vn Aor Act
NATIONS
THE
saying word
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE AND
TO-BELIEVE
15:8 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kardiognwsths qeos kardiognOstEs theos

emarturhsen autois dous martureO autos didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
HEART-KNOWer knower-of-hearts agion hagios

a_ Acc Sg n
God
witnessES testifies
to-them
GIVING
THE
And God, which knoweth the hearts, bare them witness, giving them the Holy Ghost, even as [he did] unto us;
pneuma to pneuma ho
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai hmin kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Dat Pl
spirit
THE
HOLY
to-US
15:9 kai ouqen

kai
Conj
oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
diekrinen diakrinO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
metaxu hmwn metaxu hemeis

Adv pp 1 Gen Pl
te te
Part
kai autwn kai autos

Conj pp Gen Pl m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
And put no difference between us and them, purifying their hearts by faith.
AND
NOT-YET-ONE THRU-JUDGES between nothing discriminates tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
US
BESIDES AND
them
to-THE
BELIEF faith
kaqarisas katharizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m

cleansing
THE
HEARTS
OF-them
15:10 nun oun

nun
Adv
oun
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
peirazete ton peirazO ho

vi Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
epiqeinai epitithEmi
vn 2Aor Act
zugon zugos
n_ Acc Sg m
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
NOW THEN ANY why ? trachlon twn trachElos ho

YE-ARE-tryING
THE
God
TO-ON-PLACE YOKE to-place-on oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
ON
THE
10 Now therefore why tempt ye God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples, which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear?
maqhtwn on mathEtEs hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Acc Sg m
oute oute
Conj

oute oute
Conj
NECK
OF-THE
LEARNers disciples
WHICH
NOT-BESIDES THE neither
FATHERS
OF-US
NOT-BESIDES nor
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
iscusamen bastasai ischuO bastazO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vn Aor Act
WE
are-STRONG
TO-BEAR
15:11 alla dia

alla
Conj
dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos tou charis ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
pisteuomen pisteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
but
THRU THE through
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
WE-ARE-BELIEVING TO-BE-SAVED
11 But we believe that through the grace of the Lord Jesus Christ we shall be saved, even as they.
AV
Acts 15
kaq kata
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
tropon kakeinoi tropos kakeinos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Nom Pl m
according-to WHICH
manner
AND-those and-those-ones to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
15:12 esighsen de
sigaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
kai hkouon kai akouO

barnaba barnabas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai paulou kai paulos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
HUSHES
YET EVERY entire osa hosos

pk Acc Pl n
THE
multitude
AND
THEY-HEARD OF-Barnabas AND Barnabas
OF-PAUL Paul tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
exhgoumenwn exEgeomai
epoihsen o poieO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
shmeia kai terata en sEmeion kai teras en

12 Then all the multitude kept silence, and gave audience to Barnabas and Paul, declaring what miracles and wonders God had wrought among the Gentiles by them.
unfoldING
as-much-as DOES whatever autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
God
SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES IN THE among
eqnesin di ethnos dia

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
NATIONS
THRU them through to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
15:13 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
sighsai autous apekriqh sigaO autos apokrinomai

vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
iakwbos legwn iakObos legO

andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
after
YET THE
TO-HUSH
them
answerED
JACOBUS James
sayING
MEN men !
13 And after they had held their peace, James answered, saying, Men [and] brethren, hearken unto me:
adelfoi akousate mou adelphos akouO egO

n_ Voc Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Gen Sg
brothers brethren !
HEAR ! hear-ye !
OF-ME me prwton prOton

Adv
15:14 sumewn exhghsato kaqws

sumeOn
ni proper
exEgeomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
kathOs
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
epeskeyato episkeptomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
SIMEON
unfolds
according-AS BEFORE-most THE first laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
God
ON-NOTES visits
14 Simeon hath declared how God at the first did visit the Gentiles, to take out of them a people for his name.
labein lambanO
vn 2Aor Act
ex ek
Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

TO-BE-GETTING OUT OF-NATIONS PEOPLE to-be-obtaining
to-THE
NAME
OF-Him
15:15 kai toutw sumfwnousin oi

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Dat Sg n
sumphOneO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
logoi logos
n_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
15 And to this agree the words of the prophets; as it is written,
AND
to-this
ARE-agreeING
THE
sayings words
OF-THE
BEFORE-AVERers according-AS prophets
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN
15:16 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
anastreyw anastrephO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kai anoikodomhsw kai anoikodomeO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
skhnhn dauid skEnE dauid

after
these I-SHALL-BE-UP-TURNING AND these-things I-shall-be-returning kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
WH
I-SHALL-BE-UP-HOME-BUILDING THE I-shall-be-rebuilding

NA
BOOTH tabernacle auths autos
of-DAVID of-David
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
peptwkuian piptO
vp Perf Act Acc Sg f
katestrammena
kateskammena kataskaptO
16 After this I will return, and will build again the tabernacle of David, which is fallen down; and I will build again the ruins thereof, and I will set it up:
pp Gen Sg f
THE
one-HAVING-FALLEN AND having-fallen
THE
HAVING-been-DOWN-DUG having-been-dug-down(p) authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
OF-her of-herit
anoikodomhsw anoikodomeO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kai anorqwsw kai anorthoO

I-SHALL-BE-UP-HOME-BUILDING AND I-shall-be-rebuilding
I-SHALL-BE-UP-ERECTING her herit I-shall-be-re-erecting oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
15:17 opws
hopOs
Adv
an an
Part
ekzhthswsin ekzEteO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
kataloipoi twn kataloipos ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn ton anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
WHICH-how EVER SHOULD-BE-OUT-SEEKING THE so-that should-be-seeking-out kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
leavings left-ones ous hos

pr Acc Pl m
OF-THE
humans
THE
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
ef epi
Prep
epikeklhtai epikaleO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
17 That the residue of men might seek after the Lord, and all the Gentiles, upon whom my name is called, saith the Lord, who doeth all these things.
Master Lord
AND
ALL
THE
NATIONS
ON WHOM onover
HAS-been-ON-CALLED THE has-been-invoked
NAME
AV
Acts 15
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ep epi
Prep
autous legei autos legO

pp Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
poiwn poieO
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
OF-ME
ON
them
IS-sayING
Master Lord
DOING one-doing
these these-things
18 Known unto God are all his works from the beginning of the world.
15:18 gnwsta ap
gnOstos
a_ Nom Pl n
apo
Prep
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
KNOWN known(p)
FROM eon
15:19 dio
dio
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
krinw krinO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
parenoclein tois parenochleO ho

vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
THRU-WHICH I wherefore
AM-JUDGING am-deciding qeon theos
NO
TO-BE-harassING
to-THE the-ones
FROM THE
NATIONS
19 Wherefore my sentence is, that we trouble not them, which from among the Gentiles are turned to God:
epistrefousin epi ton epistrephO epi ho

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
n_ Acc Sg m
ones-ON-TURNING turning-back
ON
THE
God
15:20 alla episteilai

alla
Conj
epistellO
vn Aor Act
autois tou autos ho

pp Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
apecesqai apechomai
vn Pres Mid
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
alisghmatwn alisgEma
n_ Gen Pl n
but
TO-letter to-them to-dispatch-an-epistle eidwlwn kai ths eidOlon kai ho

n_ Gen Pl n Conj t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
TO-BE-FROM-HAVING OF-THE to-be-abstaining kai kai

Conj
NA
CEREMONIAL-POLLUTIONS
20 But that we write unto them, that they abstain from pollutions of idols, and [from] fornication, and [from] things strangled, and [from] blood.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
porneias porneia
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pniktou pniktos
a_ Gen Sg n
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
idols
AND
THE of-the
PROSTITUTION AND
THE of-the
strangled AND strangled-thing
THE of-the
aimatos haima
n_ Gen Sg n
BLOOD
15:21 mwushs gar ek

mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
ek
Prep
genewn genea
n_ Gen Pl f
arcaiwn kata archaios kata

a_ Gen Pl f Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
khrussontas kErussO
MOSES
for
OUT OF-generations ORIGINals ancient(p) en en

Prep
according-to city
THE
ones-PROCLAIMING ones-heralding
21 For Moses of old time hath in every city them that preach him, being read in the synagogues every sabbath day.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
sunagwgais sunagOgE
n_ Dat Pl f
kata kata
Prep
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
sabbaton sabbaton
n_ Acc Sg n
him
IS-HAVING
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEADS according-to EVERY synagogues
SABBATH
anaginwskomenos anaginOskO
beING-read
15:22 tote edoxen

tote
Adv
dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
apostolois kai tois apostolos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
presbuterois sun presbuteros sun

a_ Dat Pl m Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
then
it-SEEMS to-THE it-seems-good
AND
to-THE the
SENIORS elders pemyai eis pempO eis

vn Aor Act Prep
TOGETHER to-WHOLE with-whole antioceian sun antiocheia sun

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia eklexamenous andras ex ekklEsia eklegO anEr ek

n_ Dat Sg f vp Aor Mid Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
22 . Then pleased it the apostles and elders, with the whole church, to send chosen men of their own company to Antioch with Paul and Barnabas; [namely], Judas surnamed Barsabas, and Silas, chief men among the brethren:
THE
OUT-CALLED choosing ecclesia paulw paulos

n_ Dat Sg m
MEN
OUT OF-them
TO-SEND
INTO ANTIOCH
TOGETHER
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai barnaba ioudan kai barnabas ioudas

Conj n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kaloumenon kaleO
barsabban kai silan barsabbas kai silas

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE with-the
PAUL
AND
Barnabas
JUDAS
THE
one-beING-CALLED Bar-Sabbas one-being-called
AND
SILAS
andras hgoumenous anEr hEgeomai

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
adelfois adelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
MEN
LEADING
IN THE among dia dia

Prep
brothers brethren oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
15:23 grayantes
graphO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apostoloi kai oi apostolos kai ho

a_ Nom Pl m
WRITing
THRU HAND through
OF-them
THE
AND
THE
SENIORS elders
23 And they wrote [letters] by them after this manner; The apostles and elders and brethren [send] greeting unto the brethren which are of the
AV
Acts 15
adelfoi tois adelphos ho

kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
antioceian kai surian antiocheia kai suria

kai kilikian adelfois kai kilikia adelphos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Pl m
Gentiles in Antioch and Syria and Cilicia:
brothers brethren tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
to-THE
according-to THE
ANTIOCH
AND
SYRIA
AND
CILICIA
brothers brethren
ex ek
Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
cairein chairO
vn Pres Act
to-THE the
OUT OF-NATIONS TO-BE-JOYING to-be-rejoicing hkousamen oti tines akouO hoti tis
vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj px Nom Pl m
15:24 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
ex ek
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
NA
etaraxan tarassO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ON-IF-BIND WE-HEAR since-in-fact umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
that
ANY some-men
OUT OF-US
OUT-COMING coming-out ois hos

pr Dat Pl m
DISTURB
logois anaskeuazontes tas logos anaskeuazO ho

n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl f
yucas umwn psuchE humeis

ou ou
Part Neg
diesteilameqa diastellO
vi Aor Mid 1 Pl
24 Forasmuch as we have heard, that certain which went out from us have troubled you with words, subverting your souls, saying, [Ye must] be circumcised, and keep the law: to whom we gave no [such] commandment:
YOU(p) ye
to-sayings to-words
UP-INSTRUMENTING dismantling hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
THE
souls
OF-YOU(p) to-WHOM NOT of-ye whom
WE-THRU-PUT we-gave-assignment
25 It seemed good unto us, being assembled with one accord, to send chosen men unto you with our beloved Barnabas and Paul,
15:25 edoxen
dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
genomenois ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Dat Pl m
omoqumadon eklexamenois andras pemyai homothumadon eklegO anEr pempO

Adv vp Aor Mid Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act
it-SEEMS to-US it-seems-good pros pros

Prep
BECOMING to-becoming tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord agaphtois hmwn agapEtos hemeis

a_ Dat Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
choosing
MEN
TO-SEND
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
sun sun
Prep
barnaba kai paulw barnabas kai paulos

n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg m
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
beLOVED beloved-ones tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
OF-US
Barnabas
AND
PAUL
15:26 anqrwpois paradedwkosin

anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
paradidOmi
yucas autwn psuchE autos

uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
onomatos onoma
n_ Gen Sg n
26 Men that have hazarded their lives for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ.
humans
HAVING-BESIDE-GIVEN THE having-given-up hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
souls
OF-them
NAME
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ kai silan kai silas

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
15:27 apestalkamen
apostellO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ioudan ioudas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai autous dia kai autos dia

Conj pp Acc Pl m Prep
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
WE-HAVE-commissionED THEN JUDAS
AND
SILAS
AND
them they
THRU saying through word
27 We have sent therefore Judas and Silas, who shall also tell [you] the same things by mouth.
apaggellontas ta apaggellO ho
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
FROM-MESSAGING reporting
THE
SAME same-things pneumati tw pneuma ho

15:28 edoxen
dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
kai hmin kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Dat Pl
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
pleon polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
it-SEEMS for it-seems-good epitiqesqai epitithEmi

vn Pres Mid
to-THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
AND
to-US
NO-YET-ONE MORE nothing
28 For it seemed good to the Holy Ghost, and to us, to lay upon you no greater burden than these necessary things;
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
baros baros
n_ Acc Sg n
plhn plEn
Adv

pd Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
epanagkes epanagkes
Adv
TO-BE-ON-PLACING to-YOU(p) to-be-placing-on ye
HEAVY burden
MOREly OF-these except these
THE
ON-necessities essentials kai porneias kai porneia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
29 That ye abstain from meats offered to idols, and from blood, and from things strangled, and from fornication: from which if ye keep yourselves, ye shall do well. Fare ye well.
15:29 apecesqai
apechomai
vn Pres Mid
eidwloqutwn kai aimatos kai pniktwn eidOlothuton kai haima kai pniktos
a_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Sg n Conj a_ Gen Pl n
TO-BE-FROM-HAVING OF-idol-SACRIFICES to-be-abstaining ex ek

Prep
AND
OF-BLOOD
AND
OF-strangled AND of-strangled-things errwsqe rhOnnumi

vm Perf Pas 2 Pl
OF-PROSTITUTION
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
diathrountes eautous eu diatEreO heautou eu

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pf 3 Acc Pl m Adv
praxete prassO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
OUT OF-WHICH THRU-KEEPING of-which(p) carefully-keeping
selves yourselves
WELL YE-SHALL-BE-PRACTISING BE-YE-FARE-WELLED ye-shall-be-being-engaged farewell-ye ! kathlqon eis katerchomai eis

15:30 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
apoluqentes apoluO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
antioceian kai antiocheia kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
THE the-ones
INDEED THEN ones-BEING-FROM-LOOSED DOWN-CAME being-dismissed came-down
INTO ANTIOCH
AND
30 So when they were dismissed, they came to Antioch: and when they had gathered the multitude together, they delivered the
AV
Acts 15
sunagagontes sunagO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
plhqos epedwkan plEthos epididOmi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
epistolhn epistolE
n_ Acc Sg f
epistle:
TOGETHER-LEADING THE gathering
multitude
THEY-ON-GIVE THE hand-them epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
letter epistle paraklhsei paraklEsis

n_ Dat Sg f
31 [Which] when they had read, they rejoiced for the consolation.
15:31 anagnontes
anaginOskO
de de
Conj
ecarhsan chairO
vi 2Aor pasD 3 Pl
readING reading-it
YET THEY-WERE-JOYed ON they-rejoiced te te

Part
THE
BESIDE-CALLing consolation profhtai prophEtEs

n_ Nom Pl m
15:32 ioudas
ioudas
n_ Nom Sg m
kai silas kai silas

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
ontes eimi
dia dia
Prep
JUDAS
BESIDES AND bsboth
SILAS
AND also
they
BEFORE-AVERers BEING prophets
THRU through
32 And Judas and Silas, being prophets also themselves, exhorted the brethren with many words, and confirmed [them].
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
pollou parekalesan tous polus parakaleO ho

a_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous kai epesthrixan adelphos kai epistErizO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
saying word
MANY
BESIDE-CALL entreat de de
Conj
THE
brothers brethren
AND
THEY-ON-STAND-fast establish-them twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
33 And after they had tarried [there] a space, they were let go in peace from the brethren unto the apostles.
15:33 poihsantes
poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
apeluqhsan apoluO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
met eirhnhs apo meta eirEnE apo

DOing dospending adelfwn pros adelphos pros

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
YET TIME
THEY-WERE-FROM-LOOSED WITH PEACE they-were-dismissed aposteilantas autous apostellO autos

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m
FROM THE
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
brothers brethren
TOWARD THE
ones-commissioning ones-commissioning
them
15:34
34 Notwithstanding it pleased Silas to abide there still.
. .
.
. .
.
15:35 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kai barnabas dietribon en kai barnabas diatribO en

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
antioceia didaskontes kai antiocheia didaskO kai

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj
PAUL
YET AND
Barnabas
tarriED
IN
ANTIOCH
TEACHING
AND
35 Paul also and Barnabas continued in Antioch, teaching and preaching the word of the Lord, with many others also.
euaggelizomenoi meta kai eterwn euaggelizO meta kai heteros

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m Prep Conj a_ Gen Pl m
pollwn ton polus ho

a_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
WELL-MESSAGizING WITH bringing-the-well-message
AND also
DIFFERENT-ones MANY different-ones pros pros

Prep
THE of-the
saying word
OF-THE
Master Lord
36 . And some days after Paul said unto Barnabas, Let us go again and visit our brethren in every city where we have preached the word of the Lord, [and see] how they do.
15:36 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
tinas tis
px Acc Pl f
hmeras eipen hEmera legO

barnaban paulos barnabas paulos

epistreyantes epistrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
after
YET ANY some
DAYS
said
TOWARD Barnabas
PAUL
ON-TURNing turning-back pasan pas

a_ Acc Sg f
dh dE
Part
episkeywmeqa episkeptomai
vs Aor midD 1 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous kata adelphos kata

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
BIND WE-SHOULD-BE-ON-NOTING THE by-all-means we-should-be-visiting kathggeilamen kataggellO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
brothers brethren kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
according-to city
EVERY
IN
WHICH
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pws ecousin pOs echO

Adv Int vi Pres Act 3 Pl
WE-DOWN-MESSAGE THE we-announce
saying word ebouleto boulomai

OF-THE
Master Lord
how how ?
THEY-ARE-HAVING
15:37 barnabas de
barnabas
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
sumparalabein sumparalambanO
vn 2Aor Act
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
iwannhn iOannEs
n_ Acc Sg m
37 And Barnabas determined to take with them John, whose surname was Mark.
Barnabas
YET intendED
TO-BE-TOGETHER-BESIDE-GETTING AND to-be-taking-along-with-them also
THE
JOHN
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kaloumenon kaleO
markon markos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
one-beING-CALLED MARK one-being-called
AV
Acts 15 - Acts 16
15:38 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
hxiou axioO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
apostanta aphistEmi
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
apo apo
Prep
pamfulias kai pamphulia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
PAUL
YET WORTHIED THE counted-worthy autois eis autos eis

pp Dat Pl m Prep
one-FROM-STANDing FROM them one-withdrawing to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
FROM Pamphylia
AND
38 But Paul thought not good to take him with them, who departed from them from Pamphylia, and went not with them to the work.
mh mE
Part Neg
sunelqonta sunerchomai
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
sumparalambanein sumparalambanO
vn Pres Act
NO
TOGETHER-COMING to-them coming-togetherwith them
INTO THE
work
NO
TO-BE-TOGETHER-BESIDE-GETTING-UP to-be-taking-along-with-them
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
this-one this-one
15:39 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
paroxusmos paroxusmos
n_ Nom Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
apocwrisqhnai apochOrizO
vn Aor Pas
autous ap autos apo

pp Acc Pl m Prep
allhlwn allElOn
pc Gen Pl m
BECAME they-became ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET BESIDE-SHARPening AS-BESIDES TO-BE-FROM-SPACizED them incensed so-as to-recoil barnaban paralabonta ton barnabas paralambanO ho
n_ Acc Sg m vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
FROM one-another
39 And the contention was so sharp between them, that they departed asunder one from the other: and so Barnabas took Mark, and sailed unto Cyprus;
te te
Part
markon markos
n_ Acc Sg m
ekpleusai ekpleO
vn Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
kupron kupros
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
BESIDES Barnabas
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along
THE
MARK
TO-OUT-FLOAT INTO CYPRUS to-sail-off paradoqeis paradidOmi

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
15:40 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epilexamenos silan epilegO silas

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti charis
n_ Dat Sg f
PAUL
YET ON-saying singling-out upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
SILAS
OUT-CAME came-away
BEING-BESIDE-GIVEN to-THE being-given-over
grace
40 And Paul chose Silas, and departed, being recommended by the brethren unto the grace of God.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
adelfwn adelphos
n_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
Master Lord
by
THE
brothers brethren surian suria

n_ Acc Sg f
15:41 dihrceto
dierchomai
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kilikian episthrizwn kilikia epistErizO

tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
41 And he went through Syria and Cilicia, confirming the churches.
he-THRU-CAME he-passed-trough ekklhsias ekklEsia

n_ Acc Pl f
YET THE
SYRIA
AND
THE
CILICIA
ON-STANDING-fast establishing
THE
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias
AV
Acts 16
16:1 kathnthsen de
katantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
kai
NA
de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
eis eis
Prep
derbhn kai eis derbE kai eis

lustran kai idou lustra kai idou

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
he-attains he-arrives-at maqhths tis mathEtEs tis

n_ Nom Sg m
YET
AND also
INTO DERBE
AND
INTO LYSTRA
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ekei onomati timoqeos ekei onoma timotheos

Adv n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
gunaikos ioudaias gunE Ioudaios

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
. Then came he to Derbe and Lystra: and, behold, a certain disciple was there, named Timotheus, the son of a certain woman, which was a Jewess, and believed; but his father [was] a Greek:
px Nom Sg m
LEARNer disciple
ANY certain
WAS
there
to-NAME
Timothy (VALUE-God) SON Timothy
OF-WOMAN
JUDA-an Jewish
pisths patros pistos patEr

a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
ellhnos hellEn
n_ Gen Sg m
BELIEVing
FATHER of-father
YET OF-GREEK Greek en en

Prep
16:2 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
emartureito upo twn martureO hupo ho

vi impf Pas 3 Sg Prep t_ Gen Pl m
lustrois kai ikoniw adelfwn lustra kai ikonion adelphos

n_ Dat Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
Which was well reported of by the brethren that were at Lystra and Iconium.
WHO
was-witnessED was-attested
by
THE
IN
LYSTRA
AND
ICONIUM
brothers brethren kai kai

Conj
3
16:3 touton hqelhsen o

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
thelO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
exelqein exerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
this-one this-one labwn lambanO

WILLS
THE
PAUL
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
TO-BE-OUT-COMING AND to-be-coming-out ontas eimi

perietemen auton peritemnO autos

dia dia
Prep
ioudaious tous ioudaios ho

en en
Prep
Him would Paul have to go forth with him; and took and circumcised him because of the Jews which were in those quarters: for they knew all that his father was a Greek.
GETTING taking-him tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
he-ABOUT-CUT he-circumcised
him
THRU THE because-of
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
ones-BEING ones-being o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
topois ekeinois hdeisan topos ekeinos eidO

n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m vi Plup Act 3 Pl
gar apantes oti ellhn gar hapas hoti hellEn

Conj a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
THE
PLACES
those
THEY-HAD-PERCEIVED for they-were-aware
ALL(emph.)
that
GREEK THE to-the-Greeks
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
uphrcen huparchO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
FATHER
OF-him
belongED
16:4 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
dieporeuonto tas diaporeuomai ho

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl f
poleis paredidosan polis paradidOmi

autois fulassein autos phulassO

pp Dat Pl m vn Pres Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AS
YET THEY-THRU-WENT they-went-through kekrimena krinO
THE
cities
THEY-BESIDE-GIVE to-them they-give-over
TO-BE-GUARDING THE to-be-maintaining
dogmata ta dogma ho
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn kai presbuterwn apostolos kai presbuteros

n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
And as they went through the cities, they delivered them the decrees for to keep, that were ordained of the apostles and elders which were at Jerusalem.
decrees
THE
ones-HAVING-been-JUDGED by having-been-decided
THE
AND
SENIORS elders
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
ierosolumois ierosoluma
n_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE the
IN
JERUSALEM
16:5 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
ekklhsiai ekklEsia
n_ Nom Pl f
estereounto th stereoO ho
vi impf Pas 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
pistei kai eperisseuon pistis kai perisseuO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
And so were the churches established in the faith, and increased in number daily.
THE
INDEED THEN OUT-CALLEDS were-SOLIDifiED ecclesias were-made-stable ariqmw kaq arithmos kata
n_ Dat Sg m Prep
to-THE
BELIEF faith
AND
THEY-exceedED they-superabounded
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
NUMBER
according-to DAY
16:6 dihlqon
dierchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
frugian kai galatikhn cwran phrugia kai galatikos chOra

n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
kwluqentes kOluO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
THEY-THRU-CAME YET THE they-passed-through tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
PHRYGIA
AND
GALATIA-ic Galatian logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
SPACE province en en
Prep
BEING-FORBIDDEN by
. Now when they had gone throughout Phrygia and the region of Galatia, and were forbidden of the Holy Ghost to preach the word in Asia,
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos lalhsai ton pneuma laleO ho

n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Act t_ Acc Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
asia asia
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
HOLY
spirit
TO-TALK to-speak
THE
saying word
IN
THE
ASIA province-of-Asia
AV
Acts 16
16:7 elqontes
erchomai
de de
Conj
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
musian epeirazon eis musia peirazO eis

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf Act 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
biqunian bithunia
n_ Acc Sg f
COMING
YET according-to THE
MYSIA
THEY-triED
INTO THE
BITHYNIA
After they were come to Mysia, they assayed to go into Bithynia: but the Spirit suffered them not.
poreuqhnai kai ouk poreuomai kai ou

vn Aor pasD Conj Part Neg
eiasen eaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autous to autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-GONE
AND
NOT
LEAVES lets thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
them
THE
spirit
OF-JESUS
16:8 parelqontes de
parerchomai
de
Conj
musian katebhsan musia katabainO

eis eis
Prep
trwada trOas
n_ Acc Sg f
And they passing by Mysia came down to Troas.
BESIDE-COMING passing-by
YET THE
NA
MYSIA
THEY-DOWN-STEPPed INTO TROAS they-descended nuktos tw nux ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
16:9 kai orama

kai
Conj
horama
n_ Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
sight vision tis tis
THRU during hn eimi
THE
NIGHT
to-THE
PAUL
WAS-VIEWED MAN was-seen auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
And a vision appeared to Paul in the night; There stood a man of Macedonia, and prayed him, saying, Come over into Macedonia, and help us.
makedwn makedOn
n_ Nom Sg m
estws histEmi
kai parakalwn kai parakaleO

kai kai
Conj
px Nom Sg m
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
MACEDONIAN ANY certain legwn legO

WAS
HAVING-STOOD standing eis eis

Prep
AND
BESIDE-CALLING entreating hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
him
AND
diabas diabainO
makedonian bohqhson makedonia boEtheO

n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Sg
sayING
THRU-STEPPing crossing-over to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
INTO MACEDONIA
help help-you !
to-US us eis eis

Prep
10 And after he had seen the vision, immediately we endeavoured to go into Macedonia, assuredly gathering that the Lord had called us for to preach the gospel unto them.
16:10 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
orama horama
n_ Acc Sg n
eiden eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
euqews ezhthsamen exelqein eutheOs zEteO exerchomai

Adv vi Aor Act 1 Pl vn 2Aor Act
AS
YET THE
sight vision
he-PERCEIVED immediately
WE-SEEK
TO-BE-OUT-COMING INTO to-be-coming-out o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
makedonian sumbibazontes makedonia sumbibazO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
oti proskeklhtai hoti proskaleomai

Conj vi Perf midD/pasD 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
MACEDONIA
TOGETHER-STEPPING that deducing autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
HAS-TOWARD-CALLED US has-called-to
THE
God
vn Aor Mid
TO-WELL-MESSAGize them to-bring-the-well-message to-them
16:11 anacqentes
anagO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
WH
oun
NA
de de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
trwados euqudromhsamen eis trOas euthudromeO eis

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Pl Prep
samoqrakhn samothrakE
n_ Acc Sg f
BEING-UP-LED setting-out th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YET
FROM TROAS
WE-straight-RUN we-run-straight
INTO SAMOTHRACE
11 Therefore loosing from Troas, we came with a straight course to Samothracia, and the next [day] to Neapolis;
de de
Conj
epioush epeimi
eis eis
Prep
nean neos
a_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
YET ON-BEING ensuing-day
INTO Nea- (YOUNG) -polis (city) Nea polis filippous htis philippoi hostis
n_ Acc Sg m pr Nom Sg f
16:12 kakeiqen eis

kakeithen
Adv Con
eis
Prep
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WH
prwth ths meridos
WH
WH
AND-thence
NA
INTO Philippi
NA NA
WHICH-ANY IS which-any makedonias polis makedonia polis

12 And from thence to Philippi, which is the chief city of that part of Macedonia, [and] a colony: and we were in that city abiding certain days.
prwths prOtos
a_ Gen Sg f
meridos ths meris ho

kolwnia hmen kolOnia eimi

n_ Nom Sg f vi impf vxx 1 Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
BEFORE-most of-foremost tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
PART
OF-THE
MACEDONIA
city
COLONY
WE-WERE
YET IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
diatribontes hmeras tinas diatribO hEmera tis

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f px Acc Pl f
this
THE
city
tarryING
DAYS
ANY some ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
16:13 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
te te
Part
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn exhlqomen exw sabbaton exerchomai exO

n_ Gen Pl n vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Adv
pulhs pulE
n_ Gen Sg f
para para
Prep
to-THE
BESIDES DAY
OF-THE
SABBATHS
WE-OUT-CAME OUT OF-THE we-came-out outside
GATE
BESIDE
13 And on the sabbath we went out of the city by a river side, where prayer was wont to be made; and we sat down, and spake unto the women which
AV
Acts 16
potamon ou potamos hou

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
enomizomen proseuchn einai nomizO proseuchE eimi

vi impf Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres vxx
kai kaqisantes kai kathizO

elaloumen tais laleO ho

vi impf Act 1 Pl t_ Dat Pl f
resorted [thither].
river
where WE-LAWizED we-inferred gunaixin gunE

n_ Dat Pl f
prayer
TO-BE
AND
being-seated
WE-TALKED we-spoke
to-THE
sunelqousais sunerchomai
vp 2Aor Act Dat Pl f
TOGETHER-COMING WOMEN coming-together
16:14 kai tis

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
onomati ludia onoma ludia

porfuropwlis polews quateirwn porphuropOlis polis thuateira

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Pl n
AND
ANY certain
WOMAN
to-NAME
LYDIA
PURPLE-SELLer purple-seller(f) hs hos

pr Gen Sg f
OF-city
OF-THYATIRA
sebomenh sebomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
hkouen akouO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
dihnoixen dianoigO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
14 And a certain woman named Lydia, a seller of purple, of the city of Thyatira, which worshipped God, heard [us]: whose heart the Lord opened, that she attended unto the things which were spoken of Paul.
REVERING one-revering(f) thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
God
HEARD
OF-WHOM THE of-whom(f)

NA
Master Lord tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THRU-UP-OPENS opens-up paulou paulos

n_ Gen Sg m
kardian prosecein kardia prosechO

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
laloumenois upo laleO hupo

vp Pres Pas Dat Pl n Prep
THE
HEART
TO-BE-heedING to-THE beING-TALKED the-things being-spoken ebaptisqh kai o baptizO kai ho

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
by
THE
PAUL
16:15 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
parekalesen parakaleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
legousa legO
ei ei
Cond
AS
YET she-IS-DIPizED she-is-baptized me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
AND
THE
HOME household kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-her
she-BESIDE-CALLS sayING she-entreats eiselqontes eis eiserchomai eis

IF
kekrikate krinO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
pisthn tw pistos ho
a_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
15 And when she was baptized, and her household, she besought [us], saying, If ye have judged me to be faithful to the Lord, come into my house, and abide [there]. And she constrained us.
YE-HAVE-JUDGED ME
BELIEVing faithful menete menO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
to-THE
Master Lord
TO-BE
INTO THE
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai parebiasato kai parabiazomai

hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
HOME house
OF-ME
BE-YE-REMAINING AND be-ye-remaining ! de de

Conj
she-BESIDE-FORCES US she-urges hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
16:16 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
poreuomenwn poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
proseuchn paidiskhn proseuchE paidiskE

it-BECAME it-occurred tina tis

px Acc Sg f
YET OF-GOING
OF-US
INTO THE
prayer
maid
ecousan echO
pneuma puqwna pneuma puthOn

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
upanthsai hupantaO
vn Aor Act
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
ergasian pollhn ergasia polus

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
16 . And it came to pass, as we went to prayer, a certain damsel possessed with a spirit of divination met us, which brought her masters much gain by soothsaying:
ANY certain
HAVING
spirit
ASCERTAINer TO-UNDER-meet to-US fortune-teller to-meet us manteuomenh manteuomai

WHO-ANY ACTion who-any income
much vast
pareicen parechO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kuriois auths kurios autos

n_ Dat Pl m pp Gen Sg f
tenderED afforded
to-THE
masters
OF-her
beING-MAD divining
WH
16:17 auth
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
katakolouqousa katakoloutheO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
tw
NA
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai hmin kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Dat Pl
ekrazen krazO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
she
DOWN-followING following-after outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
to-THE the anqrwpoi douloi anthrOpos doulos

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m
PAUL
AND
to-US us tou ho
CRIED
17 The same followed Paul and us, and cried, saying, These men are the servants of the most high God, which shew unto us the way of salvation.
legousa legO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
uyistou hupsistos
a_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
sayING
these
THE
humans
SLAVES
OF-THE
God
THE
HIGHest Most-High
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oitines kataggellousin hostis kataggellO

pr Nom Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
swthrias sOtEria
n_ Gen Sg f
ARE
WHO-ANY who-any de de
Conj
ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) are-announcing to-ye epoiei poieO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
WAY
OF-SAVing of-salvation de de
Conj
16:18 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
epi pollas hmeras diaponhqeis epi polus hEmera diaponeomai

Prep a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vp Aor midD Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
this
YET she-DID
ON
MANY
DAYS
BEING-THRU-MISERIED YET PAUL being-exasperated
AND
18 And this did she many days. But Paul, being grieved, turned and said to the spirit, I command thee in the name of Jesus Christ to come out of her.
AV
Acts 16
epistreyas epistrephO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati eipen pneuma legO

n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
paraggellw soi paraggellO su

en en
Prep

And he came out the same hour.
ON-TURNing turning-about
to-THE
spirit
said
I-AM-chargING
to-YOU you auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
IN
NAME
OF-JESUS
cristou exelqein christos exerchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act
ap apo
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE-OUT-COMING FROM her to-be-coming-out de de

Conj
AND
to-SAME
THE
HOUR
16:19 idontes
eidO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kurioi kurios
n_ Nom Pl m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
oti exhlqen hoti exerchomai

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
PERCEIVING
YET THE
masters
OF-her
that
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
EXPECTATION
19 And when her masters saw that the hope of their gains was gone, they caught Paul and Silas, and drew [them] into the marketplace unto the rulers,
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ergasias autwn ergasia autos

epilabomenoi epilambanomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon kai ton paulos kai ho

silan silas
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
ACTion income
OF-them
ON-GETTING getting-hold-of epi tous epi ho

Prep
THE
PAUL
AND
THE
SILAS
eilkusan eis helkuO eis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agoran agora
n_ Acc Sg f
arcontas archOn
n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-DRAW draw-them
INTO THE
BUY-place ON market
THE
chiefs magistrates strathgois eipan stratEgos legO

n_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
16:20 kai prosagagontes autous tois

kai
Conj
prosagO
autos
pp Acc Pl m
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
AND
TOWARD-LEADING leading-to
them
to-THE
officers
THEY-say
these
THE
20 And brought them to the magistrates, saying, These men, being Jews, do exceedingly trouble our city,
anqrwpoi ektarassousin anthrOpos ektarassO

hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
ioudaioi uparcontes ioudaios huparchO

humans
ARE-OUT-DISTURBING OF-US are-perturbing eqh ethos
THE
city
JUDA-ans to-the-Jews ouk ou

Part Neg
belongING
16:21 kai kataggellousin

kai
Conj
kataggellO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
n_ Acc Pl n
AND also
THEY-ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING CUSTOMS WHICH they-are-announcing oude oude

Adv
NOT
it-IS-allowed
to-US us
21 And teach customs, which are not lawful for us to receive, neither to observe, being Romans.
paradecesqai paradechomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
rwmaiois ousin rhOmaios eimi

a_ Dat Pl m vp Pres vxx Dat Pl m
TO-BE-BESIDE-RECEIVING NOT-YET TO-BE-DOING to-ROMANS to-be-assenting-to nor Romans
BEING
16:22 kai sunepesth

kai
Conj
sunephistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oclos ochlos
n_ Nom Sg m
kat kata
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
strathgoi stratEgos
n_ Nom Pl m
AND
TOGETHER-ON-STOOD THE assailed ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
THRONG
DOWN OF-them against them
AND
THE
officers
22 And the multitude rose up together against them: and the magistrates rent off their clothes, and commanded to beat [them].
perirhxantes autwn perirrhEgnumi autos

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Gen Pl m
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
ekeleuon rabdizein keleuO rhabdizO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vn Pres Act
ABOUT-BURSTing tearing-off
OF-them
WH NA
THE
GARMENTS ORDERED
TO-BE-RODizING to-be-flogging-with-rods-them eis eis

Prep
16:23 pollas
polus
a_ Acc Pl f
de
te te
Part
epiqentes epitithEmi
autois plhgas ebalon autos plEgE ballO

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
MANY
BESIDES
to-them them
BLOWS
THEY-CAST(past) INTO GUARD-house they-cast-them jail autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
23 And when they had laid many stripes upon them, they cast [them] into prison, charging the jailor to keep them safely:
paraggeilantes tw paraggellO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
desmofulaki asfalws desmophulax asphalOs

n_ Dat Sg m Adv
threin tEreO
vn Pres Act
charging
to-THE the
BIND-GUARD warden
UN-TOTTERly TO-BE-KEEPING them securely ebalen ballO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
16:24 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
paraggelian toiauthn labwn paraggelia toioutos lambanO

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m

pp Acc Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WHO
charge
such
GETTING
CASTS
them
INTO THE
24 Who, having received such a charge, thrust them into the inner prison, and made their feet fast in the stocks.
eswteran fulakhn esOteros phulakE

kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
hsfalisato autwn asphalizO autos

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
xulon xulon
n_ Acc Sg n
INTO-more interior
THE
FEET
is-UNTOTTERED secures
OF-them
INTO THE
WOOD stocks
AV
Acts 16
16:25 kata
kata
Prep
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mesonuktion paulos mesonuktion paulos

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
kai silas kai silas

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
MID-NIGHT midnight ephkrownto epakroaomai

PAUL
AND
SILAS
prayING
25 . And at midnight Paul and Silas prayed, and sang praises unto God: and the prisoners heard them.
umnoun humneO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
desmioi desmios
n_ Nom Pl m
HYMNED sang-hymns
THE to-the
God
ON-LISTENED listened-to
YET OF-them them megas mega

a_ Nom Sg m
THE
BOUND-ones prisoners qemelia themelios

n_ Acc Pl n
26 And suddenly there was a great earthquake, so that the foundations of the prison were shaken: and immediately all the doors were opened, and every one's bands were loosed.
16:26 afnw de
aphnO
Adv
de
Conj
seismos egeneto seismos ginomai

wste hOste
Conj
saleuqhnai ta saleuO ho
vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Pl n
suddenly YET QUAKing earthquake tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
BECAME occurred
GREAT
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-SHAKEN so-that

WH
THE
foundations
desmwthriou hnewcqhsan desmOtErion anoigO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
de de
Conj
paracrhma
NA
Adv
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
qurai thura
n_ Nom Pl f
OF-THE
BIND-place prison
WERE-UP-OPENED YET were-opened desma desmos

n_ Nom Pl n
instantly
THE
DOORS
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
kai pantwn ta kai pas ho

Conj a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl n
aneqh aniEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ALL
AND
OF-ALL
THE
BONDS
WAS-UP-LET was-slacked desmofulax kai idwn desmophulax kai eidO

n_ Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
27 And the keeper of the prison awaking out of his sleep, and seeing the prison doors open, he drew out his sword, and would have killed himself, supposing that the prisoners had been fled.
16:27 exupnos de
exupnos
a_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
genomenos ginomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OUT-SLEEP out-of-sleep anewgmenas anoigO

vp Perf Pas Acc Pl f
YET BECOMING
THE
BIND-GUARD warden fulakhs phulakE

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
PERCEIVING
WH NA
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
quras thura
n_ Acc Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
spasamenos spaO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
thn
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-UP-OPENED THE having-been-opened macairan hmellen machaira mellO

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg Att
DOORS
OF-THE
GUARD-house PULLing jail nomizwn nomizO

THE
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
anairein anaireO
vn Pres Act
ekpefeugenai ekpheugO
vn 2Perf Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
sword
he-WAS-ABOUT was-about
self himself
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING LAWizING to-be-despatching inferring
TO-HAVE-OUT-FLED THE to-have-escaped
desmious desmios
n_ Acc Pl m
BOUND-ones prisoners
16:28 efwnhsen de
phOneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
paulos megalh fwnh
WH
WH
NA
de
Conj
megalh fwnh mega phOnE

NA
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
NA
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
28 But Paul cried with a loud voice, saying, Do thyself no harm: for we are all here.
SOUNDS shouts legwn legO

YET
GREAT to-loud praxhs prassO

vs Aor Act 2 Sg
SOUND voice
THE
PAUL
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
seautw kakon seautou kakos

pf 3 Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg n
apantes gar esmen hapas gar eimi

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
sayING
NO-YET-ONE YOU-SHOULD-BE-PRACTISING to-YOURself EVIL nothing you-should-be-committing
ALL(emph.)
for
WE-ARE
enqade enthade
Adv
IN-PLACE-YET in-this-place
16:29 aithsas
aiteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
fwta phOs
n_ Acc Pl n
eisephdhsen kai entromos genomenos eispEdaO kai entromos ginomai

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m
REQUESTing
YET LIGHTS
he-INTO-SPRINGS he-springs-in kai kai

Conj
NA
AND
IN-TREMBLing BECOMING in-a-tremor sila silas

n_ Dat Sg m
29 Then he called for a light, and sprang in, and came trembling, and fell down before Paul and Silas,
prosepesen prospiptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
he-TOWARD-FALLS to-THE prostrates
PAUL
AND
to-THE the efh phEmi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
SILAS
16:30 kai proagagwn

kai
Conj
proagO
autous exw autos exO

pp Acc Pl m Adv
kurioi kurios
n_ Voc Pl m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
30 And brought them out, and said, Sirs, what must I do to be saved?
AND
BEFORE-LEADING preceding
them
OUT AVERRed outside
masters masters !
ANY what ?
ME
AV
Acts 16
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
ina hina
Conj
swqw sOzO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
TO-BE-DOING THAT I-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED
16:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pisteuson epi ton pisteuO epi ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
31 And they said, Believe on the Lord Jesus Christ, and thou shalt be saved, and thy house.
THE
YET THEY-say
BELIEVE believe-you ! kai o kai ho

Conj
ON
THE
Master Lord sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
JESUS
AND
swqhsh sOzO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED YOU
AND
THE
HOME household tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-YOU
WH NA
16:32 kai elalhsan autw

kai
Conj
laleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
qeou
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
sun sun
Prep
32 And they spake unto him the word of the Lord, and to all that were in his house.
AND
THEY-TALK they-speak en en
Prep
to-him
THE
saying word autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
TOGETHER
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
to-ALL with-all
THE-ones IN the-ones
THE
HOME house
OF-him
16:33 kai paralabwn

kai
Conj
paralambanO
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
nuktos elousen nux louO

AND
BESIDE-GETTING taking-aside
them
IN
that
THE
HOUR
OF-THE
NIGHT
WH
he-BATHES
33 And he took them the same hour of the night, and washed [their] stripes; and was baptized, he and all his, straightway.
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
plhgwn kai ebaptisqh autos plEgE kai baptizO autos

n_ Gen Pl f Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp Nom Sg m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apantes
FROM THE off

NA
BLOWS
AND
IS-DIPizED is-baptized
he
AND
THE the-ones
OF-him
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
Adv
ALL
instantly
16:34 anagagwn
anagO
te te
Part

pp Acc Pl m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
pareqhken paratithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
trapezan kai trapeza kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
UP-LEADING leading-up
BESIDES them
INTO THE
HOME house qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
he-BESIDE-PLACES table he-sets-before-them
AND
34 And when he had brought them into his house, he set meat before them, and rejoiced, believing in God with all his house.
hgalliasato panoikei agalliaO panoikei

vi Aor midD 3 Sg Adv
pepisteukws tw pisteuO ho
vp Perf Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
exults
ALL-HOMEly HAVING-BELIEVED with-all-household genomenhs ginomai

to-THE the
God
16:35 hmeras de
hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
de
Conj
apesteilan oi apostellO ho
strathgoi tous stratEgos ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
rabdoucous rhabdouchos
n_ Acc Pl m
35 . And when it was day, the magistrates sent the serjeants, saying, Let those men go.
OF-DAY
YET BECOMING
commission dispatch
THE
officers
THE
ROD-HAVers constables
legontes legO
apoluson tous apoluO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
anqrwpous ekeinous anthrOpos ekeinos

sayING
FROM-LOOSE release-you ! de de
Conj
THE
humans
those
NA
16:36 aphggeilen
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
desmofulax tous desmophulax ho

n_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
logous logos
n_ Acc Pl m
toutous houtos
pd Acc Pl m
pros pros
Prep
FROM-MESSAGES YET THE reports ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BIND-GUARD warden oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
sayings words
these
TOWARD
36 And the keeper of the prison told this saying to Paul, The magistrates have sent to let you go: now therefore depart, and go in peace.
paulon oti apestalkan paulos hoti apostellO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vi Perf Act 3 Pl
strathgoi ina stratEgos hina

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
apoluqhte apoluO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
THE
PAUL
that
HAVE-commissionED THE have-dispatched poreuesqe poreuomai

officers
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-LOOSED ye-may-be-being-released
nun oun nun oun

Adv Conj
en en
Prep
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Dat Sg f
NOW THEN OUT-COMING coming-out
IN
PEACE
AV
Acts 16 - Acts 17
16:37 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous deirantes autos derO

pp Acc Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
dhmosia dEmosios
Adv
THE
YET PAUL
AVERRed
TOWARD them
SKINNing lashing eis eis

Prep
US
PUBLICly
akatakritous anqrwpous rwmaious uparcontas ebalan akatakritos anthrOpos rhOmaios huparchO ballO
a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
fulakhn phulakE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai nun kai nun

Conj Adv
37 But Paul said unto them, They have beaten us openly uncondemned, being Romans, and have cast [us] into prison; and now do they thrust us out privily? nay verily; but let them come themselves and fetch us out.
UN-condemned uncondemned laqra lathra

Adv
humans
ROMANS to-the-Romans
belongING
THEY-CAST they-cast-us
INTO GUARD-house AND jail autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
NOW
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ekballousin ekballO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
gar alla elqontes gar alla erchomai

Conj Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
covertly US surreptitiously exagagetwsan exagO

vm 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-OUT-CASTING NOT they-are-ejecting not
for
but
COMING
they themselves
US
LET-BE-OUT-LEADING let-them-be-leading-out !
16:38 aphggeilan
apaggellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
strathgois oi stratEgos ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Pl m
rabdoucoi ta rhabdouchos ho
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
FROM-MESSAGE YET to-THE report efobhqhsan phobeO

vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
officers
THE
ROD-HAVers constables
THE
declarations these
38 And the serjeants told these words unto the magistrates: and they feared, when they heard that they were Romans.
de de
Conj
akousantes oti rwmaioi eisin akouO hoti rhOmaios eimi

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THEY-WERE-afraid YET HEARing
that
ROMANS
THEY-ARE
16:39 kai elqontes

kai
Conj
erchomai
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
autous kai exagagontes autos kai exagO

pp Acc Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
hrwtwn erOtaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
AND
COMING
THEY-BESIDE-CALL them they-entreat apo apo

Prep
AND
OUT-LEADING leading-out-them
THEY-askED they-asked-them
39 And they came and besought them, and brought [them] out, and desired [them] to depart out of the city.
apelqein aperchomai
vn 2Aor Act
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews polis
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-FROM-COMING FROM THE to-be-coming-away
city
16:40 exelqontes
exerchomai
de de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fulakhs phulakE
n_ Gen Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ludian kai ludia kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
OUT-COMING coming-out idontes eidO

YET FROM THE
GUARD-house THEY-INTO-CAME TOWARD THE jail they-entered adelfous kai exhlqan adelphos kai exerchomai
LYDIA
AND
40 And they went out of the prison, and entered into [the house of] Lydia: and when they had seen the brethren, they comforted them, and departed.
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
PERCEIVING
THEY-BESIDE-CALL THE they-console-them
brothers brethren
AND
THEY-OUT-COME come-away
AV
Acts 17
17:1 diodeusantes de
diodeuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
amfipolin kai thn amphipolis kai ho

apollwnian hlqon apollOnia erchomai

eis eis
Prep
THRU-journeying traversing
YET THE
Amphipolis
AND
THE
APOLLONIA
THEY-CAME
INTO
. Now when they had passed through Amphipolis and Apollonia, they came to Thessalonica, where was a synagogue of the Jews:
qessalonikhn opou thessalonikE hopou

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
THESSALONICA
THE-?-where WAS wheree de de

Conj
TOGETHER-LEAD OF-THE synagogue tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews eishlqen eiserchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
17:2 kata
kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eiwqos ethO
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
pros pros
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
HAVING-CUSTOMED to-THE having-been-customed
PAUL
he-INTO-CAME TOWARD them he-entered grafwn graphE

n_ Gen Pl f
And Paul, as his manner was, went in unto them, and three sabbath days reasoned with them out of the scriptures,
kai epi sabbata tria kai epi sabbaton treis

Conj Prep n_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
dielexato autois apo dialegomai autos apo

vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Pl m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
AND
ON
SABBATHS
THREE
he-THRU-says he-argues
to-them
FROM THE
WRITings scriptures paqein paschO

vn 2Aor Act
3
17:3 dianoigwn
dianoigO
kai paratiqemenos oti ton kai paratithEmi hoti ho

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg m
criston edei christos deO

n_ Acc Sg m vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
THRU-UP-OPENING AND opening-up kai anasthnai ek kai anistEmi ek

Conj vn 2Aor Act Prep
BESIDE-PLACING placing-before-them
that
THE
ANOINTED Christ estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WAS-BINDING must o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-EMOTIONING to-be-suffering
WH
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
kai oti outos kai hoti houtos

Conj Conj pd Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
Opening and alleging, that Christ must needs have suffered, and risen again from the dead; and that this Jesus, whom I preach unto you, is Christ.
AND
TO-UP-STAND to-rise
NA
OUT OF-DEAD-ones AND of-dead-ones ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
that
this this-one
IS
THE
ANOINTED Christ
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kataggellw kataggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
JESUS
WHOM
AM-DOWN-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) am-announcing to-ye kai proseklhrwqhsan kai prosklEroO

17:4 kai tines

kai
Conj
tis
px Nom Pl m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
epeisqhsan peithO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
ANY some
WH
OUT OF-them
NA
ARE-PERSUADED AND
THEY-WERE-TOWARD-alLOTTED to-THE were-allotted-to the sebomenwn sebomai

PAUL
And some of them believed, and consorted with Paul and Silas; and of the devout Greeks a great multitude, and of the chief women not a few.
kai kai
Conj
tw
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
sila silas
n_ Dat Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
te te
Part
ellhnwn plhqos hellEn plEthos

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg n
AND
to-THE the gunaikwn te gunE te

n_ Gen Pl f Part
SILAS
OF-THE
BESIDES REVERING being-reverent ouk ou

Part Neg
GREEKS
multitude
polu polus
a_ Nom Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
prwtwn prOtos
a_ Gen Pl f
oligai oligos
a_ Nom Pl f
MANY vast
OF-WOMEN
BESIDES THE
BEFORE-most NOT foremost
FEW
17:5 zhlwsantes de
zEloO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi kai proslabomenoi twn ioudaios kai proslambanO ho

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
agoraiwn andras agoraios anEr

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
BOILing being-jealous tinas tis

px Acc Pl m
YET THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
TOWARD-GETTING taking-to-themselves thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
BUYS loafers
MEN
ponhrous kai oclopoihsantes eqoruboun ponEros kai ochlopoieO thorubeO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai epistantes kai ephistEmi

But the Jews which believed not, moved with envy, took unto them certain lewd fellows of the baser sort, and gathered a company, and set all the city on an uproar, and assaulted the house of Jason, and sought to bring them out to the people.
ANY some th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
wicked
AND
THRONG-making making-up-mob
THEY-TUMULTED THE made-a-tumult autous proagagein autos proagO

pp Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
city
AND
ON-STANDing standing-by dhmon dEmos

n_ Acc Sg m
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
iasonos ezhtoun iasOn zEteO

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
to-THE the
HOME house
OF-JASON
THEY-SOUGHT them
TO-BE-BEFORE-LEADING INTO THE to-be-leading-before iasona iasOn

n_ Acc Sg m
PUBLIC populace adelfous epi adelphos epi

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
6
17:6 mh
mE
Part Neg
eurontes heuriskO
de de
Conj
autous esuron autos surO

pp Acc Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
kai tinas kai tis

Conj px Acc Pl m
NO
FINDING
YET them
THEY-DRAGGED JASON
AND
ANY some
brothers brethren
ON
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
politarcas bowntes politarchEs boaO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn anastatwsantes oikoumenE anastatoO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
And when they found them not, they drew Jason and certain brethren unto the rulers of the city, crying, These that have turned the world upside down are come hither also;
THE
city-chiefs city-magistrates
IMPLORING
that
THE-ones the-ones
THE
UP-STANDing raising-to-insurrection
AV
Acts 17
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
kai enqade kai enthade

Conj Adv
pareisin pareimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
these
AND also
IN-PLACE-YET ARE-BESIDE-BEING in-this-place are-present upodedektai hupodechomai

17:7 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
iaswn iasOn
n_ Nom Sg m

Conj pd Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
apenanti apenanti
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
WHOM
HAS-UNDER-RECEIVED JASON has-entertained
AND
these
ALL
FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE contravening the einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
Whom Jason hath received: and these all do contrary to the decrees of Caesar, saying that there is another king, [one] Jesus.
dogmatwn kaisaros prassousin dogma kaisar prassO

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
basilea eteron basileus heteros

legontes legO
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
decrees
OF-CEASAR
ARE-PRACTISING KING
DIFFERENT sayING
TO-BE
JESUS
17:8 etaraxan
tarassO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
politarcas akouontas politarchEs akouO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
And they troubled the people and the rulers of the city, when they heard these things.
THEY-DISTURB YET THE
THRONG
AND
THE
city-chiefs city-magistrates tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
HEARING
these these-things loipwn loipon

a_ Gen Pl m
9
17:9 kai labontes

kai
Conj
lambanO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ikanon hikanos
a_ Acc Sg n
para para
Prep
iasonos kai twn iasOn kai ho

And when they had taken security of Jason, and of the other, they let them go.
AND
GETTING obtaining autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
THE
enough bail
BESIDE OF-THE the
JASON
AND
OF-THE the
rest rest(p)
apelusan apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-FROM-LOOSE them they-release
17:10 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
adelfoi euqews dia adelphos eutheOs dia

n_ Nom Pl m Adv Prep
nuktos exepemyan ton nux ekpempO ho

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
te te
Part
paulon paulos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET brothers brethren silan silas

n_ Acc Sg m
immediately
THRU NIGHT through
OUT-SEND send-out
THE
BESIDES PAUL bsboth sunagwghn sunagOgE

n_ Acc Sg f
10 . And the brethren immediately sent away Paul and Silas by night unto Berea: who coming [thither] went into the synagogue of the Jews.
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
beroian oitines paragenomenoi eis beroia hostis paraginomai eis

n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Pl m vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
SILAS
INTO BEREA
WHO-ANY who-any
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD synagogue
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn aphesan ioudaios apeimi

a_ Gen Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Pl
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews de de
Conj
FROM-ARE are-away hsan eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Pl
17:11 outoi
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eugenesteroi eugenEs
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
qessalonikh oitines thessalonikE hostis

n_ Dat Sg f pr Nom Pl m
these
YET WERE
more-WELL-generated OF-THE IN more-noble of-the-ones meta pashs meta pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
THESSALONICA
WH
WHO-ANY who-any kaq kata

Prep
edexanto ton dechomai ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
proqumias prothumia
n_ Gen Sg f
to
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
11 These were more noble than those in Thessalonica, in that they received the word with all readiness of mind, and searched the scriptures daily, whether those things were so.
RECEIVE
THE
saying word
WITH
EVERY all ecoi echO
BEFORE-FEELing eagerness tauta houtos

pd Nom Pl n
according-to DAY
anakrinontes tas anakrinO ho

grafas ei graphE ei
n_ Acc Pl f Cond
outws houtOs
Adv
vo Pres Act 3 Sg
examinING
THE
WRITings scriptures oun oun

Conj
IF
it-MAY-BE-HAVING these may-be-having-it
thus
17:12 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
episteusan kai twn pisteuO kai ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Gen Pl f
ellhnidwn gunaikwn hellEnis gunE

n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f
MANY
INDEED THEN OUT OF-them
BELIEVE
AND also
OF-THE
GREEKS Greek
WOMEN
12 Therefore many of them believed; also of honourable women which were Greeks, and of men, not a few.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
euschmonwn kai andrwn ouk euschEmOn kai anEr ou

a_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Part Neg
oligoi oligos
a_ Nom Pl m
THE
WELL-FIGURED respectable
AND
MEN of-men
NOT
FEW
17:13 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qessalonikhs ioudaioi oti kai en thessalonikE ioudaios hoti kai en

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m Conj Conj Prep
AS
YET KNOW
THE
FROM THE
THESSALONICA
JUDA-ans Jews
that
AND also
IN
13 But when the Jews of Thessalonica had knowledge that the word of God was preached of Paul at Berea, they came thither also, and stirred
AV
Acts 17
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
beroia beroia
n_ Dat Sg f
kathggelh kataggellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
up the people.
THE
BEREA
WAS-DOWN-MESSAGed by was-announced kakei kakei

Adv Con
THE
PAUL
THE
saying word
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
saleuontes saleuO
kai tarassontes tous kai tarassO ho

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl m
oclous ochlos
n_ Acc Pl m
God
THEY-CAME
AND-there SHAKING also-there agitating tote ton tote ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg m
AND
DISTURBING
THE
THRONGS
17:14 euqews de
eutheOs
Adv
de
Conj
paulon exapesteilan oi paulos exapostellO ho

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi poreuesqai adelphos poreuomai

n_ Nom Pl m vn Pres midD/pasD
immediately
YET then
THE
PAUL
OUT-FROM-PUT send-away te te
Part
THE
brothers brethren silas silas

n_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-GOING
14 And then immediately the brethren sent away Paul to go as it were to the sea: but Silas and Timotheus abode there still.
ews heOs
Conj
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan upemeinan thalassa hupomenO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
TILL ON as-far-as
THE
SEA
UNDER-REMAIN BESIDES THE remain-behind
BESIDES SILAS bsboth
AND
THE
timoqeos ekei timotheos ekei

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
Timothy
there
17:15 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kaqistanontes ton kathistEmi ho

paulon hgagon paulos agO

n_ Acc Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ews heOs
Conj
aqhnwn athEnai
n_ Gen Pl f
kai kai
Conj
THE-ones the-ones labontes lambanO

YET DOWN-STANDING conducting entolhn pros entolE pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
THE
PAUL
LED led-him kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
TILL OF-ATHENS AND as-far-as Athens timoqeon ina timotheos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
silan silas
n_ Acc Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
15 And they that conducted Paul brought him unto Athens: and receiving a commandment unto Silas and Timotheus for to come to him with all speed, they departed.
GETTING obtaining
direction
TOWARD THE
SILAS
AND
THE
Timothy
THAT AS
tacista elqwsin tachus erchomai

Adv Sup vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exhesan exeimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
SWIFT-most most-quickly
THEY-MAY-BE-COMING TOWARD him
THEY-OUT-ARE they-are-off autous tou autos ho

pp Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
17:16 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
aqhnais ekdecomenou athEnai ekdechomai

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
IN
YET THE
ATHENS
OF-OUT-RECEIVING of-waiting-for pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
them
OF-THE the
PAUL
16 . Now while Paul waited for them at Athens, his spirit was stirred in him, when he saw the city wholly given to idolatry.
parwxuneto paroxunO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
qewrountos theOreO
kateidwlon kateidOlos
a_ Acc Sg f
was-BESIDE-SHARPenED THE was-incited ousan eimi

spirit
OF-him
IN
him
OF-beholdING
DOWN-idolED idol-ridden
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
BEING
THE
city
17:17 dielegeto
dialegomai
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois kai tois ioudaios kai ho

a_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
he-THRU-said he-argued sebomenois sebomai

INDEED THEN IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD to-THE synagogue kata kata

Prep
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
to-THE
17 Therefore disputed he in the synagogue with the Jews, and with the devout persons, and in the market daily with them that met with him.
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
agora agora
n_ Dat Sg f
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
hmeran pros hEmera pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ones-REVERING ones-being-reverent
AND
IN
THE
BUY-place according-to EVERY market
DAY
TOWARD THE
paratugcanontas paratugchanO
ones-BESIDE-HAPPENING-UP ones-happening-along
17:18 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
epikoureiwn kai stoikwn epikoureios kai stoikos

n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
filosofwn philosophos
n_ Gen Pl m
ANY some
YET AND also
OF-THE
Epicureans
AND
Stoics (portico-ics) FOND-WISE-ones Stoic philosophers
18 Then certain philosophers of the Epicureans, and of the Stoicks, encountered him. And some said, What will this babbler say? other some, He
AV
Acts 17
suneballon sumballO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai tines kai tis

Conj px Nom Pl m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
an an
Part
qeloi thelO
vo Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TOGETHER-CAST(past) to-him parleyed spermologos outos spermologos houtos

a_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Sg m
AND
ANY some oi ho
said
ANY what ? de de
Conj
EVER MAY-he-BE-WILLING THE may-be-willing daimoniwn dokei daimonion dokeO

seemeth to be a setter forth of strange gods: because he preached unto them Jesus, and the resurrection.
legein legO
vn Pres Act
xenwn xenos
a_ Gen Pl n
t_ Nom Pl m
seed-collector rook kataggeleus kataggeleus

n_ Nom Sg m
this
TO-BE-sayING THE the-ones oti hoti

Conj
YET OF-LODGed demons of-strange ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
he-IS-SEEMING
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
anastasin anastasis
n_ Acc Sg f
DOWN-MESSENGER TO-BE announcer euhggelizeto euaggelizO

vi impf Mid 3 Sg
that THE seeing-that of-the
JESUS
AND
THE
he-WELL-MESSAGizED he-brought-the-well-message-to-them
17:19 epilabomenoi
epilambanomai
WH
de
NA
te te
Part
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
areion areios
n_ Acc Sg m
pagon pagos
n_ Acc Sg m
ON-GETTING getting-hold hgagon agO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BESIDES
OF-him
ON
THE
AREO (Ares-god of war) PAGUS (hill) Areo pagus h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
19 And they took him, and brought him unto Areopagus, saying, May we know what this new doctrine, whereof thou speakest, [is]?
WH
legontes legO
dunameqa dunamai
gnwnai tis ginOskO tis

vn 2Aor Act pi Nom Sg m
kainh kainos
a_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
THEY-LED they-led-him
NA
sayING
WE-ARE-ABLE we-can laloumenh laleO

TO-KNOW
ANY what ?
THE
NEW
this
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
upo sou hupo su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
didach didachE
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
by
YOU
TEACHing
17:20 xenizonta
xenizO
gar tina gar tis

Conj px Acc Pl n
eisfereis eispherO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
akoas akoE
n_ Acc Pl f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
LODGizING for things-being-strange boulomeqa boulomai

ANY certain
YOU-ARE-INTO-CARRYING INTO THE you-are-bringing-into qelei thelO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
HEARings OF-US hearing(p)
20 For thou bringest certain strange things to our ears: we would know therefore what these things mean.
oun oun
Conj
gnwnai tina ginOskO tis

vn 2Aor Act px Acc Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
WE-ARE-intendING THEN TO-KNOW we-are-being-resolved
ANY what ? kai oi kai ho

Conj
IS-WILLING
these TO-BE these-things eis eis

Prep
17:21 aqhnaioi de
athEnaios
a_ Nom Pl m
de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
epidhmountes xenoi epidEmeO xenos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
t_ Nom Pl m
ATHENIANS
YET ALL
AND
THE
ON-PUBLIC-ING repatriated ti tis

px Acc Sg n
LODGErs guests ti tis
INTO NOT-YET-ONE nothing kainoteron kainos

a_ Acc Sg n
21 (For all the Athenians and strangers which were there spent their time in nothing else, but either to tell, or to hear some new thing.)
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg n
hukairoun eukaireO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
h E
Part
legein legO
vn Pres Act
h E
Part
akouein akouO
vn Pres Act
px Acc Sg n
DIFFERENT WELL-SEASONED OR TO-BE-sayING ANY had-opportunity than something
OR
TO-BE-HEARING ANY something en en

Prep
more-NEW newer areiou areios

n_ Gen Sg m
17:22 staqeis
histEmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pagou pagos
n_ Gen Sg m
BEING-STOOD standing efh phEmi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
YET
THE
PAUL
IN
MIDst center
OF-THE
AREO
PAGUS
22 . Then Paul stood in the midst of Mars'hill, and said, [Ye] men of Athens, I perceive that in all things ye are too superstitious.
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
aqhnaioi kata athEnaios kata

a_ Voc Pl m Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ws deisidaimonesterous umas hOs deisidaimOn humeis

Adv a_ Acc Pl m Cmp pp 2 Acc Pl
he-AVERRed averred qewrw theOreO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
MEN men !
ATHENIANS Athenians !
according-to ALL all-things
AS how
more-DREAD-demoned unusually-religious
YOU(p) ye
I-AM-beholdING
17:23 diercomenos
dierchomai
gar kai anaqewrwn gar kai anatheOreO

Conj Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sebasmata sebasma
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
for
AND
UP-beholdING contemplating
THE
venerations OF-YOU(p) I-FOUND objects-of-veneration of-ye
23 For as I passed by, and beheld your devotions, I found an altar with this inscription, TO THE UNKNOWN GOD. Whom therefore ye ignorantly
AV
Acts 17
kai bwmon kai bOmos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
epegegrapto epigraphO
vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
agnwstw agnOstos
a_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
worship, him declare I unto you.
AND also
PEDESTAL IN
WHICH
HAD-been-ON-WRITTEN to-UN-KNOWN God had-been-inscribed to-unknown touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
THE-One which umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THEN
agnoountes agnoeO
eusebeite eusebeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kataggellw kataggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
UN-KNOWING ones-being-ignorant
YE-ARE-devoutING this-One ye-are-being-devout this qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
AM-DOWN-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) am-announcing to-ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
17:24 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
THE
God
THE
THE
SYSTEM world kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
ALL all-things en en
Prep
THE
IN
24 God that made the world and all things therein, seeing that he is Lord of heaven and earth, dwelleth not in temples made with hands;
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ouranou kai ghs ouranos kai gE

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg f
uparcwn huparchO
ouk ou
Part Neg
it
him it
this-One this-one
OF-heaven
AND
OF-LAND earth
belongING being-inherently
Master Lord
NOT
IN
ceiropoihtois naois cheiropoiEtos naos

katoikei katoikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
HAND-made made-by-hands(p)
TEMPLES
IS-DOWN-HOMING is-dwelling prosdeomenos prosdeomai

17:25 oude
oude
Adv
upo ceirwn anqrwpinwn qerapeuetai hupo cheir anthrOpinos therapeuO

Prep n_ Gen Pl f a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tinos tis
px Gen Sg n
NOT-YET by neither autos autos

pp Nom Sg m
HANDS
OF-human-ones of-humans pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl n
IS-beING-attendED TOWARD-BINDING he-is-being-attended as-if-requiring kai pnohn kai pnoE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
OF-ANY anything
25 Neither is worshipped with men's hands, as though he needed any thing, seeing he giveth to all life, and breath, and all things;
didous didOmi
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
He
GIVING
to-ALL
LIFE
AND
BLOWing breath eqnos ethnos

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
ALL
17:26 epoihsen te
poieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
te
Part
ex ek
Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg n
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
anqrwpwn katoikein anthrOpos katoikeO

n_ Gen Pl m vn Pres Act
epi epi
Prep
He-makES
BESIDES OUT OF-ONE
EVERY
NATION
OF-humans
TO-BE-DOWN-HOMING ON to-be-dwelling
pantos proswpou ths pas prosOpon ho

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
orisas horizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
prostetagmenous kairous kai prostassO kairos kai

vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Conj
26 And hath made of one blood all nations of men for to dwell on all the face of the earth, and hath determined the times before appointed, and the bounds of their habitation;
EVERY all tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
face surface
OF-THE
LAND earth
defining specifying
HAVING-TOWARD-SET ones-having-set
SEASONS
AND
oroqesias ths horothesia ho

katoikias autwn katoikia autos

THE
SEE-PLACES boundaries
OF-THE
DOWN-HOME dwelling qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-them
17:27 zhtein
zEteO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
ara ara
Part
ge ge
Part
yhlafhseian psElaphaO
vo Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-SEEKING THE
God
IF
CONSEQUENTLY SURELY THEY-MAY-STROKE-TOUCH Him they-may-grope-for makran apo makran apo

Adv Prep
27 That they should seek the Lord, if haply they might feel after him, and find him, though he be not far from every one of us:
kai euroien kai heuriskO

Conj vo 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ge kai ge
Conj Part
ou ou
Part Neg
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
ekastou hmwn hekastos hemeis

a_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
AND
MAY-THEY-BE-FINDING AND may-be-finding-him
SURELY NOT
FAR
FROM ONE
EACH
OF-US
uparconta huparchO
One-belongING one-being-inherent
17:28 en
en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
gar zwmen gar zaO

kai kinoumeqa kai esmen kai kineO kai eimi

Conj vi Pres Pas 1 Pl Conj vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
ws kai tines hOs kai tis

Adv Conj px Nom Pl m
IN
Him
for
WE-ARE-LIVING AND
ARE-STIRRING AND are-moving tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
ARE
AS
AND also
ANY some esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
28 For in him we live, and move, and have our being; as certain also of your own poets have said, For we are also his offspring.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kaq kata
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
poihtwn eirhkasin poiEtEs ereO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Pl Att
gar kai genos gar kai genos

Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
according-to YOU(p) ye
poets
HAVE-declarED
OF-THE
for
AND also
breed race
WE-ARE
AV
Acts 17 - Acts 18
17:29 genos
genos
n_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
uparcontes huparchO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ofeilomen opheilO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
nomizein nomizO
vn Pres Act
breed race crusw chrusos

n_ Dat Sg m
THEN belongING being-inherently argurw h arguros E

n_ Dat Sg m Part
OF-THE
God
NOT
WE-ARE-OWING TO-BE-LAWizING we-ought to-be-inferring
h E
Part
liqw lithos
n_ Dat Sg m
caragmati charagma
n_ Dat Sg n
tecnhs kai enqumhsews anqrwpou technE kai enthumEsis anthrOpos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
29 Forasmuch then as we are the offspring of God, we ought not to think that the Godhead is like unto gold, or silver, or stone, graven by art and man's device.
to-GOLD
OR
to-SILVER silver
OR
to-STONE stone omoion homoios

a_ Acc Sg m
to-CARVE-effect OF-ART to-sculpture
AND
OF-IN-FEELing of-sentiment
OF-human
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qeion theios
a_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
THE
divine
TO-BE
LIKE
17:30 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
cronous ths chronos ho

agnoias agnoia
n_ Gen Sg f
uperidwn hupereidon
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
INDEED THEN TIMES

WH NA
OF-THE
UN-KNOWledge OVER-PERCEIVING THE ignorance condoning tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
God
30 And the times of this ignorance God winked at; but now commandeth all men every where to repent:
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
nun nun
Adv
apaggellei
paraggellei paraggellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anqrwpois pantas pantacou anthrOpos pas pantachou

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Adv
THE the(p)
NOW
He-IS-chargING is-charging
to-THE
humans
ALL
EVERY-where everywhere
metanoein metanoeO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-after-MINDING to-be-repenting
17:31 kaqoti
kathoti
Adv
esthsen histEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hmeran en hEmera en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
krinein krinO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn oikoumenE
n_ Acc Sg f
DOWN-that He-STANDS forasmuch-as he-assigns en en

Prep
DAY
IN
WHICH
He-IS-ABOUT TO-BE-JUDGING THE he-is-being-about pistin parascwn pistis parechO

dikaiosunh en dikaiosunE en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
wrisen horizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
31 Because he hath appointed a day, in the which he will judge the world in righteousness by [that] man whom he hath ordained; [whereof] he hath given assurance unto all [men], in that he hath raised him from the dead.
IN
IN
MAN
WHOM
He-definES he-specifies
BELIEF faith
tenderING
to-ALL
anasthsas anistEmi
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
UP-STANDing raising
Him
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones anastasin nekrwn anastasis nekros

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
17:32 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
ecleuazon oi chleuazO ho
vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
HEARing
YET UP-STANDing resurrection sou su
OF-DEAD-ones THE-ones of-dead-ones the-ones peri peri

Prep
INDEED JEERED
THE-ones the-ones
YET
32 . And when they heard of the resurrection of the dead, some mocked: and others said, We will hear thee again of this [matter].
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
akousomeqa akouO
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
toutou kai palin houtos kai palin

pd Gen Sg n Conj Adv
pp 2 Gen Sg
say
WE-SHALL-BE-HEARING OF-YOU you paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT this concerning ek ek

Prep
AND also
AGAIN
17:33 outws o
houtOs
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
33 So Paul among them.
departed
from
thus
THE
PAUL
OUT-CAME came-out
OUT OF-MIDst
OF-them
17:34 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
kollhqentes autw kollaO autos

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
episteusan en pisteuO en
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
ANY some dionusios dionusios

n_ Nom Sg m
YET MEN
WH NA
BEING-JOINED
to-him
BELIEVE
IN WHOM among
AND also
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
areopagiths kai gunh areopagitEs kai gunE

n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
onomati damaris kai onoma damaris kai

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg f Conj
34 Howbeit certain men clave unto him, and believed: among the which [was] Dionysius the Areopagite, and a woman named Damaris, and others with them.
DIONYSIUS
THE
AREOPAGITE
AND
WOMAN
to-NAME
DAMARIS
AND
eteroi heteros
a_ Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
DIFFERENT-ones TOGETHER to-them togetherwith different-ones them
AV
Acts 18
18:1 meta tauta

meta
Prep
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
cwrisqeis chOrizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m MidS
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
aqhnwn hlqen athEnai erchomai

n_ Gen Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
korinqon korinthos
n_ Acc Sg f
. After these things Paul departed from Athens, and came to Corinth;
after
these BEING-SPACizED these-things being-departed tina tis

px Acc Sg m
OUT OF-THE
ATHENS
he-CAME
INTO CORINTH
18:2 kai eurwn

kai
Conj
heuriskO
ioudaion onomati akulan ioudaios onoma akulas

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Acc Sg m
pontikon pontikos
a_ Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
FINDING
ANY certain
JUDA-an Jew apo apo

Prep
to-NAME
AQUILA
Pontus (MARINE-ic) to-THE of-Pontus the
genei genos
n_ Dat Sg n
prosfatws elhluqota prosphatOs erchomai

Adv vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
italias kai priskillan gunaika italia kai priskilla gunE

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
And found a certain Jew named Aquila, born in Pontus, lately come from Italy, with his wife Priscilla; (because that Claudius had commanded all Jews to depart from Rome:) and came unto them.
breed native autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
TOWARD-SLAYly recently dia dia

Prep
HAVING-COME
FROM THE
ITALY
AND
PRISCILLA
WOMAN wife
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
diatetacenai klaudion cwrizesqai diatassO klaudios chOrizO

vn Perf Act n_ Acc Sg m vn Pres Pas
pantas tous pas ho

OF-him
THRU THE because-of ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
TO-HAVE-prescribED
CLAUDIUS
TO-BE-SPACizING ALL to-be-departing
THE
ioudaious apo ioudaios apo

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
rwmhs rhOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
proshlqen proserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
JUDA-ans Jews
FROM THE
ROME
he-TOWARD-CAME to-them he-came-to them emenen menO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
18:3 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
omotecnon einai homotechnos eimi

a_ Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
par para
Prep
autois kai autos kai

pp Dat Pl m Conj
WH
hrgazonto
AND
NA
THRU THE because-of hsan eimi
LIKE-ART like-trade
TO-BE
he-REMAINED BESIDE them
AND
And because he was of the same craft, he abode with them, and wrought: for by their occupation they were tentmakers.
hrgazeto ergazomai
gar skhnopoioi th gar skEnopoios ho

Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
tecnh technE
n_ Dat Sg f
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
workED
THEY-WERE for
BOOTH-makers tentmakers sunagwgh sunagOgE

n_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
ART trade pan pas

a_ Acc Sg n
18:4 dielegeto
dialegomai
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kata kata
Prep
sabbaton epeiqen sabbaton peithO

he-THRU-said he-argued te te
Part
YET IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD according-to EVERY synagogue
SABBATH
PERSUADED he-persuaded
And he reasoned in the synagogue every sabbath, and persuaded the Jews and the Greeks.
ioudaious kai ellhnas ioudaios kai hellEn

a_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m
BESIDES JUDA-ans Jews
AND
GREEKS
18:5 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
kathlqon katerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
makedonias o makedonia ho
te te
Part
silas silas
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AS
YET THEY-DOWN-CAME FROM THE came-down timoqeos suneiceto tw timotheos sunechO ho

n_ Nom Sg m vi impf Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n
MACEDONIA
THE
BESIDES SILAS bsboth paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
And when Silas and Timotheus were come from Macedonia, Paul was pressed in the spirit, and testified to the Jews [that] Jesus [was] Christ.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
diamarturomenos diamarturomai
THE
Timothy
was-pressED
to-THE
saying word
THE
PAUL
THRU-witnessING certifying
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois einai ioudaios eimi

a_ Dat Pl m vn Pres vxx
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m

to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
TO-BE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
18:6 antitassomenwn de
antitassomai
de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai blasfhmountwn ektinaxamenos ta kai blasphEmeO ektinassO ho

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
OF-INSTEAD-SETTING of-resisting imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
YET OF-them
AND
OF-HARM-AVERRING of-blaspheming aima haima

n_ Nom Sg n
OUT-QUIVERing shaking-out epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
THE
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
autous to autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kefalhn kephalE
n_ Acc Sg f
And when they opposed themselves, and blasphemed, he shook [his] raiment, and said unto them, Your blood [be] upon your own heads; I [am] clean: from henceforth I will go unto the Gentiles.
GARMENTS he-said
TOWARD them
THE
BLOOD
OF-YOU(p) ON of-ye ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
HEAD
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kaqaros egw katharos egO

a_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Nom Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun eis nun eis

Adv Prep
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
poreusomai poreuomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
OF-YOU(p) clean of-ye
FROM THE
NOW INTO THE
NATIONS
I-SHALL-BE-GOING
AV
Acts 18
18:7 kai metabas

kai
Conj
metabainO
ekeiqen ekeithen
Adv
WH
hlqen
NA
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
onomati onoma
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
thence
he-INTO-CAME he-entered ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
INTO HOME house ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
OF-ANY to-NAME of-certain-one oikia oikia

n_ Nom Sg f
titiou titios
n_ Gen Sg m
ioustou sebomenou ioustos sebomai

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
. And he departed thence, and entered into a certain [man's] house, named Justus, [one] that worshipped God, whose house joined hard to the synagogue.
TITUS
JUSTUS
one-REVERING one-revering
THE
God
OF-WHOM
THE
HOME house
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
sunomorousa th sunomoreO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
WAS
beING-adjacent
to-THE
TOGETHER-LEAD synagogue episteusen tw pisteuO ho

18:8 krispos de
krispos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
arcisunagwgos archisunagOgos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
sun sun
Prep
CRISPUS
YET THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD BELIEVES chief-of-the-synagogue autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
to-THE the
Master Lord
olw holos
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai polloi kai polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
korinqiwn akouontes korinthios akouO

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
And Crispus, the chief ruler of the synagogue, believed on the Lord with all his house; and many of the Corinthians hearing believed, and were baptized.
to-WHOLE whole
THE
HOME household
OF-him
AND
MANY
OF-THE
CORINTHIANS
HEARING
episteuon kai ebaptizonto pisteuO kai baptizO

vi impf Act 3 Pl Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl
BELIEVED
AND
were-DIPizED were-baptized o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
18:9 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
di dia
Prep
oramatos tw horama ho
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
said
YET THE
Master Lord
IN
NIGHT
THRU sight through vision
to-THE
PAUL
NO
Then spake the Lord to Paul in the night by a vision, Be not afraid, but speak, and hold not thy peace:
fobou phobeO
alla lalei alla laleO

kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
siwphshs siOpaO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
but
BE-TALKING AND be-you-speaking ! eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-beING-SILENT
18:10 dioti
dioti
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
epiqhsetai epitithEmi
vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
THRU-that I because-that soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
AM
WITH
YOU
AND
NOT-YET-ONE SHALL-BE-ON-PLACING no-one shall-be-placing-on estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
10 For I am with thee, and no man shall set on thee to hurt thee: for I have much people in this city.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kakwsai kakoO
vn Aor Act
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
dioti dioti
Conj
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
polus polus
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
to-YOU you th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
TO-EVIL-treat YOU to-illtreat tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
THRU-that PEOPLE because-that
IS there-is
to-ME
MANY much
IN
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
city
this
18:11 ekaqisen de
kathizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
eniauton kai mhnas eniautos kai mEn

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Pl m
ex hex
ni numeral
didaskwn didaskO
en en
Prep
autois ton autos ho

11 And he continued [there] a year and six months, teaching the word of God among them.
he-is-seated
YET year
AND
MONTHS
SIX
TEACHING
IN them among
THE
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
saying word
OF-THE
God
WH
18:12 galliwnos de
galliOn
n_ Gen Sg m
de
Conj
anqupatou ontos anthupatos eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
acaias achaia
n_ Gen Sg f
katepesthsan katephistEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi
OF-GALLIO
WH WH
YET proconsul
NA
BEING
NA
OF-THE
NA
ACHAIA
DOWN-ON-STOOD assaulted paulw paulos

n_ Dat Sg m
ioudaioi omoqumadon
omoqumadon oi homothumadon ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ioudaios
a_ Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
12 . And when Gallio was the deputy of Achaia, the Jews made insurrection with one accord against Paul, and brought him to the judgment seat,
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
to-THE the
PAUL
AND
AV
Acts 18
hgagon agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
bhma bEma
n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-LED
him
ON
THE
platform dais ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
18:13 legontes
legO
oti para hoti para

Conj Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
anapeiqei anapeithO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
13 Saying, This [fellow] persuadeth men to worship God contrary to the law.
sayING
that
BESIDE THE
LAW
IS-UP-PERSUADING this-one is-inducing this-man
THE
anqrwpous sebesqai anthrOpos sebomai

n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres midD/pasD
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
humans
TO-BE-REVERING THE
God
18:14 mellontos
mellO
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
anoigein anoigO
vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-beING-ABOUT
YET THE
PAUL
TO-BE-UP-OPENING THE to-be-opening men men

Part
MOUTH
said
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
galliwn pros galliOn pros

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ioudaious ei ioudaios ei
a_ Acc Pl m Cond
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
adikhma ti adikEma tis

n_ Nom Sg n px Nom Sg n
h E
Part
14 And when Paul was now about to open [his] mouth, Gallio said unto the Jews, If it were a matter of wrong or wicked lewdness, O [ye] Jews, reason would that I should bear with you:
THE
GALLIO
TOWARD THE
JUDA-ans Jews
IF
INDEED it-WAS
injury
ANY some
OR
radiourghma ponhron w ioudaioi kata rhadiourgEma ponEros O ioudaios kata

n_ Nom Sg n a_ Nom Sg n Inj a_ Voc Pl m Prep
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
an an
Part
anescomhn umwn anechomai humeis

vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Pl
DEFT-ACT-effect knavery
wicked
o!
JUDA-ans Jews !
according-to saying EVER I-had-toleratED acon that-account peri peri

Prep
OF-YOU(p) ye
15 But if it be a question of words and names, and [of] your law, look ye [to it]; for I will be no judge of such [matters].
18:15 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
zhthmata estin zEtEma eimi

n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai onomatwn kai nomou kai onoma kai nomos

Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Sg m
IF
YET SEEK-effects questions kaq kata

Prep
it-IS
ABOUT saying concerning word autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
AND
OF-NAMES names egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
OF-LAW law ou ou
Part Neg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
kriths kritEs
n_ Nom Sg m
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
OF-THE the
according-to YOU(p) ye einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING they ye-shall-be-seeing-to-it yourselves
JUDGer judge
OF-these NOT of-these-things
boulomai boulomai
AM-intendING
TO-BE
18:16 kai aphlasen

kai
Conj
apelaunO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autous apo autos apo

pp Acc Pl m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
bhmatos bEma
n_ Gen Sg n
16 And he drave them from the judgment seat.
AND
he-FROM-DRIVES them he-drives-away de de

Conj
FROM THE
platform dais arcisunagwgon archisunagOgos

n_ Acc Sg m
18:17 epilabomenoi
epilambanomai
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
swsqenhn ton sOsthenEs ho

etupton tuptO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ON-GETTING getting-hold-of emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
YET ALL
Sosthenes
THE
chief-of-TOGETHER-LEAD THEY-BEAT(past) chief-of-synagogue they-beat-him toutwn houtos

pd Gen Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
bhmatos kai ouden bEma kai oudeis

n_ Gen Sg n Conj a_ Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
galliwni emelen galliOn melei

n_ Dat Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
17 Then all the Greeks took Sosthenes, the chief ruler of the synagogue, and beat [him] before the judgment seat. And Gallio cared for none of those things.
platform dais eti eti

Adv
AND
NOT-YET-ONE OF-these to-THE none of-these-things hmeras ikanas hEmera hikanos

GALLIO
CARED cared-for adelfois adelphos

n_ Dat Pl m
18 . And Paul [after this] tarried [there] yet a good while, and then took his leave of the brethren, and sailed thence into Syria, and with him Priscilla and Aquila; having shorn [his] head in Cenchrea: for he had a vow.
18:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
prosmeinas prosmenO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
THE
YET PAUL
STILL TOWARD-REMAINing DAYS remaining-with eis eis

Prep
enough to-THE considerable the autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
brothers brethren
apotaxamenos exeplei apotassomai ekpleO

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
surian suria
n_ Acc Sg f
kai sun kai sun

Conj Prep
priskilla kai priskilla kai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
FROM-SETTing taking-leave akulas akulas

n_ Nom Sg m
OUT-FLOATED INTO THE sailed-off en en

Prep
SYRIA
AND
PRISCILLA
AND
keiramenos keirO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
kegcreais thn kegchreai ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn eicen kephalE echO

gar euchn gar euchE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AQUILA
being-SHORN
IN
CENCHREA
THE
HEAD
he-HAD
for
vow
AV
Acts 18
18:19 kathnthsan de
katantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
efeson kakeinous katelipen autou ephesos kakeinos kataleipO autou

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THEY-attain they-arrive-at eiselqwn eiserchomai

YET INTO EPHESUS
AND-those
he-left
OF-SAME he there ioudaiois ioudaios

a_ Dat Pl m
YET
19 And he came to Ephesus, and left them there: but he himself entered into the synagogue, and reasoned with the Jews.
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
dielexato tois dialegomai ho

vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD THRU-says synagogue argues autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
to-THE with-the cronon chronos

n_ Acc Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews ouk ou

Part Neg
18:20 erwtwntwn de
erOtaO
de
Conj
epi pleiona epi polus

Prep a_ Acc Sg m Cmp
meinai menO
vn Aor Act
epeneusen epineuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
20 When they desired [him] to tarry longer time with them, he consented not;
OF-askING of-asking-him
YET OF-them
ON
MORE
TIME
TO-REMAIN NOT
he-ON-NODS he-consents pros pros

Prep
18:21 alla apotaxamenos kai eipwn

alla
Conj
apotassomai
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
kai
Conj
legO
palin anakamyw palin anakamptO

Adv vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
but
FROM-SETTing taking-leave qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
sayING
AGAIN
I-SHALL-BE-UP-BOWING TOWARD YOU(p) I-shall-be-going-back ye efesou ephesos

n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qelontos thelO
anhcqh anagO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
21 But bade them farewell, saying, I must by all means keep this feast that cometh in Jerusalem: but I will return again unto you, if God will. And he sailed from Ephesus.
OF-THE
God
WILLING
he-WAS-UP-LED FROM THE he-set-out eis eis

Prep
EPHESUS
18:22 kai katelqwn

kai
Conj
katerchomai
kaisareian anabas kaisareia anabainO

kai aspasamenos kai aspazomai

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
DOWN-COMING coming-down
INTO CAESAREA
UP-STEPPing going-up
AND
greeting
THE
22 And when he had landed at Caesarea, and gone up, and saluted the church, he went down to Antioch.
ekklhsian katebh ekklEsia katabainO

eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
he-DOWN-STEPPed INTO ANTIOCH he-descended cronon chronos

n_ Acc Sg m
18:23 kai poihsas

kai
Conj
poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
diercomenos dierchomai
kaqexhs kathexEs
Adv
AND
DOing dospending
TIME
ANY some kai frugian kai phrugia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
he-OUT-CAME THRU-COMING he-came-away passing-through

WH
according-to-next consecutively pantas tous pas ho

23 And after he had spent some time [there], he departed, and went over [all] the country of Galatia and Phrygia in order, strengthening all the disciples.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
galatikhn cwran galatikos chOra

sthrizwn
NA
episthrizwn epistErizO
THE
GALATIA-ic Galatian
SPACE province
AND
PHRYGIA
ON-STANDING-fast establishing
ALL
THE
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
LEARNers disciples
18:24 ioudaios de
ioudaios
a_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
apollws onomati alexandreus tw apollOs onoma alexandreus ho

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg n
genei genos
n_ Dat Sg n
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
JUDA-an Jew logios logios

a_ Nom Sg m
YET ANY certain
APOLLOS
to-NAME
ALEXANDRINE Alexandrian en en
to-THE the tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
breed native
MAN
24 . And a certain Jew named Apollos, born at Alexandria, an eloquent man, [and] mighty in the scriptures, came to Ephesus.
kathnthsen eis katantaO eis

efeson dunatos wn ephesos dunatos eimi

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
grafais graphE
n_ Dat Pl f
Prep
scholarly
attains arrives-at hn eimi
INTO EPHESUS
ABLE
BEING
IN
THE
WRITings scriptures kai kai

Conj
25 This man was instructed in the way of the Lord; and being fervent in the spirit, he spake and taught diligently the things of the Lord, knowing only the baptism of John.
18:25 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
kathchmenos katEcheO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
this-one this-one zewn zeO

WAS
HAVING-been-instructED THE
WAY
OF-THE
Master Lord
AND
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati elalei pneuma laleO

n_ Dat Sg n vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai edidasken akribws ta kai didaskO akribOs ho

Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg Adv t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
BOILING being-fervent tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
spirit
he-TALKED he-spoke
AND
TAUGHT
EXACTly accurately
THE ABOUT the-things concerning
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
epistamenos epistamai
monon to monon ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
baptisma iwannou baptisma iOannEs

THE
JESUS
beING-adept being-versed-in
ONLY
THE
DIPism baptism
OF-JOHN
AV
Acts 18 - Acts 19
18:26 outos
houtos
pd Nom Sg m
te te
Part
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
parrhsiazesqai en parrhEsiazomai en
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunagwgh sunagOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
akousantes akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
this-one this-one de de
Conj
BESIDES begins
TO-BE-beING-bold to-be-speaking-boldly
IN
THE
TOGETHER-LEAD HEARing synagogue kai akribesteron autw kai akribOs autos

Conj Adv Con pp Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
priskilla kai akulas priskilla kai akulas

n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg m
proselabonto auton proslambanO autos

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
26 And he began to speak boldly in the synagogue: whom when Aquila and Priscilla had heard, they took him unto [them], and expounded unto him the way of God more perfectly.
YET OF-him him exeqento ektithEmi

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
PRISCILLA
AND
AQUILA
WH
TOWARD-GOT took-to-themselves
WH NA
him
NA
AND
more-EXACTly more-accurately
to-him
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
tou qeou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THEY-OUT-PLACED THE expounded
WAY
OF-THE
God
18:27 boulomenou
boulomai
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
dielqein dierchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
acaian protreyamenoi achaia protrepO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
OF-intendING
YET him of-him tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
TO-BE-THRU-COMING INTO THE to-be-passing-through maqhtais apodexasqai mathEtEs apodechomai

n_ Dat Pl m vn Aor midD
ACHAIA
BEFORE-REVERTing promoting-it
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi egrayan adelphos graphO

n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
27 And when he was disposed to pass into Achaia, the brethren wrote, exhorting the disciples to receive him: who, when he was come, helped them much which had believed through grace:
THE
brothers brethren
WRITE
to-THE
LEARNers disciples tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
TO-FROM-RECEIVE him to-welcome pepisteukosin pisteuO

WHO
paragenomenos sunebaleto paraginomai sumballO

vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos charis
n_ Gen Sg f
TOGETHER-CAST much parleyed gar tois gar ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
to-THE
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED THRU THE ones-having-believed through
grace
18:28 eutonws
eutonOs
Adv
ioudaiois diakathlegceto ioudaios diakatelegchomai

a_ Dat Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
dhmosia epideiknus dEmosios epideiknumi

Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
WELL-STRETCHly for strenuously dia dia

Prep
to-THE the
JUDA-ans Jews ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
he-THRU-DOWN-EXPOSED PUBLICly he-confuted-thoroughly criston ihsoun christos iEsous

ON-SHOWING exhibiting
28 For he mightily convinced the Jews, [and that] publickly, shewing by the scriptures that Jesus was Christ.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
grafwn einai graphE eimi

n_ Gen Pl f vn Pres vxx
THRU THE through
WRITings scriptures
TO-BE
THE
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AV
Acts 19
19:1 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
apollw einai apollOs eimi

en en
Prep
korinqw paulon korinthos paulos

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg m
it-BECAME it-occurred dielqonta dierchomai

YET IN
THE
THE
APOLLOS
WH
TO-BE
NA
IN
CORINTH
PAUL
. And it came to pass, that, while Apollos was at Corinth, Paul having passed through the upper coasts came to Ephesus: and finding certain disciples,
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
anwterika merh anOterikos meros

a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n
elqein
katelqein katerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
efeson ephesos
n_ Acc Sg f
THRU-COMING passing-through kai eurein kai heuriskO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
THE
UPperic upper maqhtas mathEtEs

n_ Acc Pl m
PARTS
TO-BE-DOWN-COMING to-be-coming-down
INTO EPHESUS
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
AND
TO-BE-FINDING ANY some te te

Part
LEARNers disciples pros pros

Prep
19:2 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autous ei autos ei
pp Acc Pl m Cond

elabete lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
pisteusantes pisteuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
said
BESIDES TOWARD them
IF
spirit
HOLY
YE-GOT ye-obtained estin eimi
BELIEVing
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
all alla
Conj
oud oude
Adv
ei ei
Cond
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
hkousamen akouO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
He said unto them, Have ye received the Holy Ghost since ye believed? And they said unto him, We have not so much as heard whether there be any Holy Ghost.
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE-ones the
YET TOWARD him
but NOT-YET IF butnay neither ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
spirit
HOLY
IS there-is de de
Conj
WE-HEAR
19:3 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
te te
Part
eis eis
Prep
oun oun
Conj
ebaptisqhte oi baptizO ho
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
he-said
BESIDES INTO ANY what ?
THEN YE-ARE-DIPizED ye-are-baptized
THE-ones the
YET say they-say
INTO THE
And he said unto them, Unto what then were ye baptized? And they said, Unto John's baptism.
iwannou baptisma iOannEs baptisma

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n
OF-JOHN
Conj
19:4 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
iwannhs ebaptisen baptisma metanoias iOannEs baptizO baptisma metanoia

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
said
YET PAUL
JOHN
DIPizES baptizes
DIPism baptism met auton meta autos

Prep pp Acc Sg m
OF-after-MINDing to-THE of-repentance ina hina

Conj
PEOPLE
legwn legO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ercomenon erchomai
pisteuswsin pisteuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
Then said Paul, John verily baptized with the baptism of repentance, saying unto the people, that they should believe on him which should come after him, that is, on Christ Jesus.
sayING
INTO THE
One-COMING one-coming ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
after
him
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING
tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
this
IS
INTO THE
JESUS
19:5 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
ebaptisqhsan eis baptizO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
When they heard [this], they were baptized in the name of the Lord Jesus.
YET THEY-ARE-DIPizED they-are-baptized autois tou autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
INTO THE
NAME
NA
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
19:6 kai epiqentos

kai
Conj
epitithEmi
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras hlqen cheir erchomai

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
OF-ON-PLACING of-placing-on pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
to-them them agion hagios
OF-THE
PAUL
THE
HANDS
CAME
And when Paul had laid [his] hands upon them, the Holy Ghost came on them; and they spake with tongues, and prophesied.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ep epi
Prep
autous elaloun autos laleO

pp Acc Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
glwssais kai glOssa kai

n_ Dat Pl f Conj
a_ Nom Sg n
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
ON
them
THEY-TALKED BESIDES to-TONGUES they-spoke to-languages
AND
eprofhteuon prophEteuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
BEFORE-AVERRED prophesied
19:7 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
wsei dwdeka hOsei dOdeka

Adv ni numeral
And all the men were about twelve.
WERE
YET THE
ALL
MEN
AS-IF about
TWO-TEN twelve
AV
Acts 19
19:8 eiselqwn
eiserchomai
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunagwghn sunagOgE
n_ Acc Sg f
eparrhsiazeto epi mhnas parrhEsiazomai epi mEn

vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg Prep n_ Acc Pl m
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
INTO-COMING entering dialegomenos dialegomai

YET INTO THE
TOGETHER-LEAD he-was-bold synagogue he-spoke-boldly

NA
ON
MONTHS
THREE
kai peiqwn kai peithO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

. And he went into the synagogue, and spake boldly for the space of three months, disputing and persuading the things concerning the kingdom of God.
THRU-sayING arguing qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
PERSUADING
THE the-things
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
19:9 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
esklhrunonto kai hpeiqoun sklErunO kai apeitheO

vi impf Pas 3 Pl Conj vi impf Act 3 Pl
kakologountes thn kakologeO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
AS
YET ANY some
were-HARDENED
AND
UN-PERSUADED EVIL-sayING were-stubborn speaking-evil-of ap apo

Prep
THE
WAY

Adv t_ Gen Sg n
plhqous apostas plEthos aphistEmi

n_ Gen Sg n vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
afwrisen aphorizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas mathEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
But when divers were hardened, and believed not, but spake evil of that way before the multitude, he departed from them, and separated the disciples, disputing daily in the school of one Tyrannus.
IN-VIEW in-sight-of kaq kata

Prep
OF-THE the
multitude
FROM-STANDing withdrawing en en
Prep
FROM them
he-FROM-definES THE he-severs turannou turannos

n_ Gen Sg m
LEARNers disciples
hmeran dialegomenos hEmera dialegomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
scolh scholE
n_ Dat Sg f
according-to DAY
THRU-sayING arguing de de
Conj
IN
THE
school
OF-MONARCH of-Tyrannus pantas tous pas ho

10 And this continued by the space of two years; so that all they which dwelt in Asia heard the word of the Lord Jesus, both Jews and Greeks.
19:10 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi eth epi etos

Prep n_ Acc Pl n
duo duo
ni numeral
wste hOste
Conj
this
YET BECAME occurred asian asia
ON
YEARS
TWO
AS-BESIDES ALL so-that logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
katoikountas thn katoikeO ho

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
akousai ton akouO ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Acc Sg f
ones-DOWN-HOMING THE ones-dwelling in-the ioudaious te ioudaios te

a_ Acc Pl m Part
ASIA TO-HEAR province-of-Asia
THE
saying word
OF-THE
Master Lord
kai ellhnas kai hellEn

Conj n_ Acc Pl m
JUDA-ans Jews
BESIDES AND bsboth te te

Part
GREEKS
19:11 dunameis
dunamis
n_ Acc Pl f
ou ou
Part Neg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
tucousas tugchanO
vp 2Aor Act Acc Pl f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
epoiei poieO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
11 And God wrought special miracles by the hands of Paul:
ABILITIES BESIDES NOT powerful-deeds twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
THE
HAPPENINGS casual-kinds
THE
God
DID
THRU through
ceirwn paulou cheir paulos

n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m
THE
HANDS
OF-PAUL
19:12 wste
hOste
Conj
kai epi tous kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Pl m
apoferesqai apopherO
vn Pres Pas
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AS-BESIDES AND so-that also crwtos chrOs

n_ Gen Sg m
ON
THE
ones-beING-UN-FIRM TO-BE-beING-FROM-CARRIED FROM THE ones-being-infirm to-be-being-carried-away simikinqia kai apallassesqai simikinthion kai apallassO
n_ Acc Pl n Conj vn Pres Pas
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
soudaria h soudarion E
n_ Acc Pl n Part
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
12 So that from his body were brought unto the sick handkerchiefs or aprons, and the diseases departed from them, and the evil spirits went out of them.
INTEGUMENT OF-him cuticle nosous ta nosos ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Acc Pl n
handkerchiefs
OR
half-girds aprons
AND
TO-BE-FROM-CHANGING FROM them to-be-clearing
THE
te te
Part
ponhra ekporeuesqai ponEros ekporeuomai

a_ Acc Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD
DISEASES
THE
BESIDES spirits
THE
wicked
TO-BE-OUT-GOING to-be-going-out ioudaiwn exorkistwn ioudaios exorkistEs

13 . Then certain of the vagabond Jews, exorcists, took upon them to call over them which had evil spirits the name of the Lord Jesus, saying, We
19:13 epeceirhsan de
epicheireO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
de
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
periercomenwn perierchomai
ON-HAND take-in-hand
YET ANY some
AND also
OF-THE
ABOUT-COMING wandering
JUDA-ans Jews
OUT-OATHists exorcists
AV
Acts 19
onomazein onomazO
vn Pres Act
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
econtas echO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ponhra to ponEros ho
a_ Acc Pl n t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
adjure you by Jesus whom Paul preacheth.
TO-BE-NAMING ON
THE
ones-HAVING ones-having legontes legO
THE
spirits
THE
wicked
THE
NAME
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
orkizw horkizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
sayING
I-AM-OATHizING YOU(p) I-am-adjuring ye
THE by-the
JESUS
WHOM
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
khrussei kErussO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
PAUL
IS-PROCLAIMING is-heralding de de
Conj
19:14 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
skeua skeuas
n_ Gen Sg m
ioudaiou arcierews ioudaios archiereus

epta hepta
ni numeral
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
THEY-WERE YET ANY there-were some poiountes poieO

SCEVA of-Sceva
JUDA-an Jew
OF-chief-SACRED-one SEVEN chief-priest
SONS
this
14 And there were seven sons of [one] Sceva, a Jew, [and] chief of the priests, which did so.
DOING
19:15 apokriqen
apokrinomai
vp Aor pasD Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ponhron eipen ponEros legO

a_ Nom Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autois ton autos ho

15 And the evil spirit answered and said, Jesus I know, and Paul I know; but who are ye?
answerING
YET THE
spirit
THE
wicked
said
to-them
THE
men men
Part
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ginwskw ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
paulon epistamai paulos epistamai

umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
tines tis
pi Nom Pl m
INDEED
JESUS
I-AM-KNOWING AND
THE
PAUL
I-AM-adeptING I-am-being-versed-in
YOU(p) ye
YET ANY who(p) ?
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ARE ye-are
19:16 kai efalomenos

kai
Conj
ephallomai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos ep anthrOpos epi

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
ON-LEAPING leaping-on to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
human
ON
them
IN
WHOM
WAS
THE
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
ponhron katakurieusas amfoterwn iscusen ponEros katakurieuO amphoteroi ischuO

a_ Nom Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kat kata
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
16 And the man in whom the evil spirit was leaped on them, and overcame them, and prevailed against them, so that they fled out of that house naked and wounded.
spirit
THE
wicked
DOWN-mastering getting-the-mastery
OF-both
he-is-STRONG DOWN OF-them is-strong against them ek ek

Prep
wste hOste
Conj
gumnous kai tetraumatismenous ekfugein gumnos kai traumatizO ekpheugO

a_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
AS-BESIDES NAKED so-that ekeinou ekeinos

pd Gen Sg m
AND
HAVING-been-WOUNDED
TO-BE-OUT-FLEEING OUT OF-THE to-be-escaping-them
HOME house
that
19:17 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
gnwston pasin gnOstos pas

a_ Nom Sg n a_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois te ioudaios te
a_ Dat Pl m Part
kai ellhsin tois kai hellEn ho

this
YET BECAME
KNOWN
to-ALL
JUDA-ans Jews
BESIDES AND bsboth
to-GREEKS Greeks
to-THE the
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
efeson kai epepesen fobos ephesos kai epipiptO phobos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
epi pantas autous kai epi pas autos kai

Prep a_ Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m Conj
17 And this was known to all the Jews and Greeks also dwelling at Ephesus; and fear fell on them all, and the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified.
ones-DOWN-HOMING THE ones-dwelling at-the emegaluneto to megalunO ho

vi impf Pas 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
EPHESUS
AND
ON-FALLS falls-on kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
FEAR
ON
ALL
them
AND
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
was-magnifiED
THE
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
AV
Acts 19
19:18 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
te te
Part
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
pepisteukotwn hrconto pisteuO erchomai

vp Perf Act Gen Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
exomologoumenoi kai exomologeO kai

18 And many that believed came, and confessed, and shewed their deeds.
MANY
BESIDES OF-THE
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED CAME ones-having-believed autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
AND
anaggellontes tas anaggellO ho

praxeis praxis
n_ Acc Pl f
UP-MESSAGING informing
THE
PRACTISings OF-them practices twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
19:19 ikanoi
hikanos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
perierga periergos
a_ Acc Pl n
praxantwn prassO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
sunenegkantes sumpherO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
enough YET OF-THE-ones THE considerable-ones of-the-ones biblous katekaion biblos katakaiO
ABOUT-ACTS PRACTISing meddling-arts
TOGETHER-CARRYing THE carrying-together tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
enwpion pantwn kai suneyhfisan enOpion pas kai sumpsEphizO

Adv a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
timas timE
n_ Acc Pl f
19 Many of them also which used curious arts brought their books together, and burned them before all [men]: and they counted the price of them, and found [it] fifty thousand [pieces] of silver.
SCROLLS
THEY-DOWN-BURNED IN-VIEW burned-up-them in-sight-of
OF-ALL all
AND
THEY-TOGETHER-PEBBLE THE they-compute
VALUES value(p)
autwn kai euron autos kai heuriskO

pp Gen Pl f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
arguriou muriadas argurion murias

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Acc Pl m
pente pente
ni numeral
OF-them
AND
THEY-FOUND OF-SILVER MYRIADS (10,000) FIVE found-it of-silver-coins ten-thousands kratos tou kratos ho
19:20 outws kata

houtOs
Adv
kata
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
huxanen auxanO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
20 So mightily grew the word of God and prevailed.
thus
according-to HOLDing might
OF-THE
Master Lord
THE
saying word
GROWS-UP grows
AND
iscuen ischuO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
was-STRONG
19:21 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
eplhrwqh tauta plEroO houtos

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pd Nom Pl n
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
AS
YET WAS-FILLED was-fulfilled thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
these PLACED these-things pondered
THE
PAUL
IN
THE
spirit
dielqwn dierchomai
makedonian kai acaian poreuesqai eis makedonia kai achaia poreuomai eis
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres midD/pasD Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
21 . After these things were ended, Paul purposed in the spirit, when he had passed through Macedonia and Achaia, to go to Jerusalem, saying, After I have been there, I must also see Rome.
THRU-COMING passing-through eipwn legO

THE
MACEDONIA
AND
ACHAIA
TO-BE-GOING
INTO JERUSALEM
oti meta to hoti meta ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg n
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ekei dei ekei deO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai kai
Conj
sayING
that
after
THE
TO-BE-BECOMING ME
there
it-IS-BINDING
ME
AND also
rwmhn rhOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
ROME
TO-BE-PERCEIVING
19:22 aposteilas
apostellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
makedonian duo makedonia duo

n_ Acc Sg f ni numeral
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
diakonountwn autw diakoneO autos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp Dat Sg m
YET INTO THE
MACEDONIA
TWO
OF-THE
ones-THRU-SERVING ones-serving asian asia

n_ Acc Sg f
to-him him
22 So he sent into Macedonia two of them that ministered unto him, Timotheus and Erastus; but he himself stayed in Asia for a season.
timoqeon kai eraston autos timotheos kai erastos autos

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m pp Nom Sg m
epescen epechO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Timothy
AND
ERASTUS
he
has-ON-HAD attended ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
TIME
INTO THE
ASIA province-of-Asia ouk ou

Part Neg
19:23 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kata kata
Prep
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
ekeinon taracos ekeinos tarachos

pd Acc Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
oligos oligos
a_ Nom Sg m
23 And the same time there arose no small stir about that way.
BECAME occurred peri peri

Prep
YET according-to THE
SEASON
that
DISTURBance NOT
FEW slight
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
WAY
AV
Acts 19
19:24 dhmhtrios gar tis

dEmEtrios
n_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
tis
px Nom Sg m
onomati argurokopos poiwn onoma argurokopos poieO

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
naous naos
n_ Acc Pl m
DEMETRIUS
WH
for
NA
ANY certain-man
to-NAME
SILVERsmith
makING
TEMPLES
24 For a certain [man] named Demetrius, a silversmith, which made silver shrines for Diana, brought no small gain unto the craftsmen;
argurous
argurous argureos
a_ Acc Pl m
artemidos pareiceto tois artemis parechO ho

n_ Gen Sg f vi impf Mid 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
tecnitais ouk technitEs ou

n_ Dat Pl m Part Neg
olighn oligos
a_ Acc Sg f
SILVER
OF-ARTEMIS
tenderED afforded
to-THE
ARTisans
NOT
FEW slight
ergasian ergasia
n_ Acc Sg f
ACTion income
19:25 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
sunaqroisas sunathroizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
peri peri
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
toiauta ergatas eipen toioutos ergatEs legO

pd Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WHOM
TOGETHER-CONVENing AND convening-together also
THE
ABOUT THE such the-things tauths ths houtos ho

ACTers workers
said he-said euporia euporia

n_ Nom Sg f
25 Whom he called with the workmen occupation, and said, know that by this craft our wealth.
together of like Sirs, ye we have
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
epistasqe epistamai
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
ergasias h ergasia ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
MEN men ! hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
YE-ARE-adeptING that ye-are-being-versed-in-the-fact estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OUT OF-this
THE
ACTion vocation
THE
WELL-GO thriving
to-US
IS
19:26 kai qewreite

kai
Conj
theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai akouete kai akouO

oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
monon efesou monon ephesos

Adv n_ Gen Sg f
alla scedon alla schedon

Conj Adv
AND
YE-ARE-beholdING AND
ARE-HEARING that
NOT
ONLY
OF-EPHESUS but
ALMOST
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
asias asia
n_ Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
peisas peithO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
metesthsen methistEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
26 Moreover ye see and hear, that not alone at Ephesus, but almost throughout all Asia, this Paul hath persuaded and turned away much people, saying that they be no gods, which are made with hands:
OF-EVERY THE of-entire ikanon hikanos

a_ Acc Sg m
ASIA THE province-of-Asia legwn legO

PAUL
this
PERSUADing
after-STANDS causes-to-stand-aloof dia dia

Prep
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
qeoi theos
n_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ceirwn cheir
n_ Gen Pl f
enough THRONG considerable ginomenoi ginomai

sayING
that
NOT
THEY-ARE
gods
THE-ones the-ones
THRU HANDS through
BECOMING
19:27 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
kinduneuei hmin kinduneuO hemeis

vi Pres Act 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
meros meros
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
apelegmon apelegmos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
ONLY
YET this
IS-DANGERING is-endangering ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
to-US
THE
PART
INTO FROM-EXPOSing confuted eis eis

Prep
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
alla kai to alla kai ho

megalhs qeas mega thea

artemidos ieron artemis hieron

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg n
27 So that not only this our craft is in danger to be set at nought; but also that the temple of the great goddess Diana should be despised, and her magnificence should be destroyed, whom all Asia and the world worshippeth.
TO-BE-COMING but
AND also
THE
OF-THE
GREAT
goddess
ARTEMIS
SACRED-place INTO sanctuary ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
ouqen oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
logisqhnai logizomai
vn Aor Pas
mellein mellO
vn Pres Act
te te
Part
kai kaqaireisqai kai kathaireO

Conj vn Pres Pas
NOT-PLACE TO-BE-accountED TO-BE-beING-ABOUT BESIDES AND nothing to-be-reckoned also megaleiothtos auths megaleiotEs autos
TO-BE-beING-DOWN-LIFTED THE to-be-being-pulled-down

NA
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
olh holos
a_ Nom Sg f
WH
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
asia asia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
WH
magnificence
NA
OF-her
WHOM
WHOLE
THE
ASIA AND province-of-Asia
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oikoumenh sebetai oikoumenE sebomai

n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
THE
IS-REVERING
AV
Acts 19
19:28 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
kai genomenoi kai ginomai

Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m
plhreis qumou plErEs thumos

a_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
ekrazon krazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
legontes legO
HEARing hearing-this megalh mega

a_ Nom Sg f
YET AND
BECOMING
FULL
OF-fury
THEY-CRIED sayING
28 And when they heard [these sayings], they were full of wrath, and cried out, saying, Great [is] Diana of the Ephesians.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
artemis efesiwn artemis ephesios

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
GREAT
THE
ARTEMIS
OF-EPHESIANS
19:29 kai eplhsqh

kai
Conj
h plEthO (pimplEmi) ho
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sugcusews sugchusis
n_ Gen Sg f
wrmhsan te hormaO te
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Part
AND
IS-FILLED
THE
city
OF-THE
TOGETHER-POUR THEY-RUSH confusion gaion gaios

n_ Acc Sg m
BESIDES
omoqumadon eis homothumadon eis

Adv Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qeatron sunarpasantes theatron sunarpazO

n_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
kai aristarcon kai aristarchos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
29 And the whole city was filled with confusion: and having caught Gaius and Aristarchus, men of Macedonia, Paul's companions in travel, they rushed with one accord into the theatre.
INTO THE
gazing-place theater
TOGETHER-SNATCHing GAIUS gripping
AND
Aristarchus
makedonas sunekdhmous makedOn sunekdEmos

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
MACEDONIANS TOGETHER-OUT-PUBLICers OF-PAUL fellow-travelers
19:30 paulou de
paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
de
Conj
boulomenou boulomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dhmon dEmos
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
30 And when Paul would have entered in unto the people, the disciples suffered him not.
OF-PAUL
YET intendING
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE to-be-entering maqhtai mathEtEs

n_ Nom Pl m
PUBLIC populace
NOT
eiwn eaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
LEFT let
him
THE
LEARNers disciples asiarcwn asiarchEs

n_ Gen Pl m
19:31 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
ontes eimi
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
filoi philos
a_ Nom Pl m
ANY some pemyantes pempO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
YET AND also pros pros

Prep
OF-THE
ASIA-chiefs BEING chiefs-of-the-province-of-Asia parekaloun parakaleO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
to-him
FOND-ones friends eis eis

Prep
31 And certain of the chief of Asia, which were his friends, sent unto him, desiring [him] that he would not adventure himself into the theatre.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dounai eauton didOmi heautou

vn 2Aor Act pf 3 Acc Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
SENDing
TOWARD him
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED NO entreated-him
TO-GIVE to-venture
self himself
INTO THE
qeatron theatron
n_ Acc Sg n
19:32 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
allo allos
a_ Nom Sg n
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
ekrazon krazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Nom Sg f
others
INDEED THEN other other-thing kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ANY some
CRIED
WAS
for
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
sugkecumenh sugcheO
pleious polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdeisan eidO
vi Plup Act 3 Pl
tinos tis
pi Gen Sg n
eneka heneken
Adv
32 Some therefore cried one thing, and some another: for the assembly was confused; and the more part knew not wherefore they were come together.
HAVING-been-confusED AND thrown-into-confusion sunelhluqeisan sunerchomai

vi Plup Act 3 Pl
THE
MORE-ones majority
NOT
HAD-PERCEIVED OF-ANY were-aware what ?
on-account-of on-account
THEY-HAD-TOGETHER-COME they-had-come-together
19:33 ek
ek
Prep
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
sunebibasan sumbibazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
alexandron probalontwn alexandros proballO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
OUT YET OF-THE
THRONG
THEY-have-TOGETHER-STEPize ALEXANDER they-unite-on de de

Conj
OF-BEFORE-CASTING of-pushing-forward thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
alexandros kataseisas alexandros kataseiO

ceira cheir
n_ Acc Sg f
33 And they drew Alexander out of the multitude, the Jews putting him forward. And Alexander beckoned with the hand, and would have made his defence unto the people.
him
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
YET ALEXANDER
gesturing
THE
HAND
AV
Acts 19
hqelen thelO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
apologeisqai apologeomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
dhmw dEmos
n_ Dat Sg m
WILLED
TO-BE-FROM-sayING to-THE to-be-making-my-defense de de

Conj
PUBLIC populace fwnh phOnE

n_ Nom Sg f
19:34 epignontes
epiginOskO
oti ioudaios estin hoti ioudaios eimi

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
ON-KNOWING ones-recognizing pantwn pas

a_ Gen Pl m
WH
YET that
NA
JUDA-an Jew epi wras epi hOra

Prep n_ Acc Pl f
he-IS
SOUND voice krazontwn krazO

BECAME
ONE
OUT
34 But when they knew that he was a Jew, all with one voice about the space of two hours cried out, Great [is] Diana of the Ephesians.
wsei
ws hOs
Adv
duo duo
ni numeral
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
artemis artemis
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-ALL
AS about
ON
HOURS
TWO
CRYING
GREAT
THE
ARTEMIS
efesiwn ephesios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-EPHESIANS
WH WH WH WH NA NA NA
19:35 katasteilas de
katastellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton oclon o grammateus
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
grammateus ton grammateus ho

DOWN-PUTTing composing
NA
YET
THE
WRITer scribe
THE
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
efesioi ephesios
a_ Nom Pl m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

anqrwpwn os anthrOpos hos

THRONG
he-IS-AVERRING MEN is-averring men ! ginwskei thn ginOskO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
EPHESIANS ANY any ? polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
for
IS
OF-humans
WHO
35 And when the townclerk had appeased the people, he said, [Ye] men of Ephesus, what man is there that knoweth not how that the city of the Ephesians is a worshipper of the great goddess Diana, and of the [image] which fell down from Jupiter?
ou ou
Part Neg
efesiwn ephesios
a_ Gen Pl m
newkoron neOkoros
a_ Acc Sg f
ousan eimi
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
megalhs mega
a_ Gen Sg f
NOT
IS-KNOWING
THE
OF-EPHESIANS city
TEMPLE-JANITOR BEING temple-janitor(f)
OF-THE
GREAT
artemidos kai tou artemis kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m
diopetous diopetEs
a_ Gen Sg m
ARTEMIS
AND
OF-THE
ZEUS-FALL which-falls-from-Zeus oun oun

Conj
19:36 anantirrhtwn
anantirrhEtos
a_ Gen Pl m
ontwn eimi
vp Pres vxx Gen Pl n
toutwn deon houtos deO

pd Gen Pl n vp Pres im-Act Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-UN-INSTEAD-declared THEN BEING of-not-to-be-gainsaid katestalmenous katastellO

these these-things
BINDING
it-IS
YOU(p) ye
36 Seeing then that these things cannot be spoken against, ye ought to be quiet, and to do nothing rashly.
uparcein huparchO
vn Pres Act
kai mhden kai mEdeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
propetes propetEs
a_ Acc Sg n
prassein prassO
vn Pres Act
HAVING-been-DOWN-PUT TO-BE-belongING AND having-been-composed to-be-possessing
NO-YET-ONE BEFORE-FALLing TO-BE-PRACTISING nothing rash to-be-committing ierosulous hierosulos

a_ Acc Pl m
19:37 hgagete
agO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
gar tous gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
andras toutous oute anEr houtos oute

n_ Acc Pl m pd Acc Pl m Conj
oute oute
Conj
YE-LED
for
THE
MEN
these
NOT-BESIDES SACRED-ATTACHers NOT-BESIDES neither despoilers-of-the-sanctuary nor
37 For ye have brought hither these men, which are neither robbers of churches, nor yet blasphemers of your goddess.
blasfhmountas thn blasphEmeO ho

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
HARM-AVERRING-ones ones-blaspheming
THE
goddess
OF-US
19:38 ei
ei
Cond
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
dhmhtrios kai oi dEmEtrios kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tecnitai ecousin technitEs echO

IF
INDEED THEN DEMETRIUS
AND
THE
ARTisans
ARE-HAVING
pros pros
Prep
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
agoraioi agoraios
a_ Nom Pl m
agontai agO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai anqupatoi eisin kai anthupatos eimi

Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
38 Wherefore if Demetrius, and the craftsmen which are with him, have a matter against any man, the law is open, and there are deputies: let them implead one another.
TOWARD ANY anyone egkaleitwsan egkaleO

vm Pres Act 3 Pl
saying matter
BUYS ARE-beING-LED AND court-sessions are-being-held
proconsuls
ARE there-are
allhlois allElOn
pc Dat Pl m
LET-THEM-BE-indictING to-one-another let-them-be-indicting ! one-another
AV
Acts 19 - Acts 20
19:39 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
peraiterw peraiterO
Adv Con
epizhteite epizEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ennomw ekklhsia ennomos ekklEsia

IF
YET ANY anything
ABOUT-DIFFERENT YE-ARE-ON-SEEKING IN concerning-different-things ye-are-seeking-for
THE
IN-LAWed legal
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
39 But if ye enquire any thing concerning other matters, it shall be determined in a lawful assembly.
epiluqhsetai epiluO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-ON-LOOSED it-shall-be-being-explained
19:40 kai gar kinduneuomen

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
kinduneuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
egkaleisqai egkaleO
vn Pres Pas
stasews peri stasis peri

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
AND also mhdenos mEdeis

a_ Gen Sg n
for
WE-ARE-DANGERING TO-BE-beING-indictED OF-STANDing ABOUT THE we-are-being-in-danger of-commotion concerning aitiou aition
a_ Gen Sg n
toDAY
40 For we are in danger to be called in question for this day's uproar, there being no cause whereby we may give an account of this concourse.
uparcontos huparchO
peri peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
WH
ou
NA
ou ou
Part Neg
dunhsomeqa dunamai
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
OF-NO-YET-ONE cause not-one apodounai logon apodidOmi logos

belongING there-inhering peri peri

Prep
ABOUT WHICH concerning sustrofhs sustrophE

n_ Gen Sg f
NOT
WE-SHALL-BE-ABLE
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
tauths houtos
pd Gen Sg f
TO-FROM-GIVE to-render
saying account
ABOUT THE concerning eipwn legO

TOGETHER-RUN this riot apelusen apoluO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
19:41 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
41 And when he had thus spoken, he dismissed the assembly.
AND
he-FROM-LOOSES THE he-dismisses
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
AV
Acts 20
20:1 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pausasqai ton pauO ho

vn Aor Mid t_ Acc Sg m
qorubon metapemyamenos o thorubos metapempO ho

n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
after
YET THE
TO-be-CEASED
THE
TUMULT
after-SENDing sending-after exhlqen exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
PAUL
. And after the uproar was ceased, Paul called unto [him] the disciples, and embraced [them], and departed for to go into Macedonia.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas kai parakalesas aspasamenos mathEtEs kai parakaleO aspazomai

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Sg m

THE
LEARNers disciples
AND
BESIDE-CALLing consoling
greeting saluting-them
he-OUT-CAME TO-BE-GOING he-came-away
INTO
makedonian makedonia
n_ Acc Sg f
MACEDONIA
20:2 dielqwn
dierchomai
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
ekeina kai parakalesas autous logw ekeinos kai parakaleO autos logos
pd Acc Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg m
THRU-COMING passing-through pollw polus

a_ Dat Sg m
YET THE
PARTS
those
AND
BESIDE-CALLing entreating
them
to-saying to-word
And when he had gone over those parts, and had given them much exhortation, he came into Greece,
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ellada hellas
n_ Acc Sg f
MANY
he-CAME
INTO THE
GREECE
20:3 poihsas
poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
te te
Part
mhnas mEn
n_ Acc Pl m
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
genomenhs ginomai
epiboulhs autw epiboulE autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Dat Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
DOing dospending twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
BESIDES MONTHS
THREE
OF-BECOMING of-becoming-there eis eis

Prep
ON-COUNSEL plot thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-him
by
ioudaiwn mellonti ioudaios mellO

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
anagesqai anagO
vn Pres Pas
surian suria
n_ Acc Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
gnwmhs gnOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
And [there] abode three months. And when the Jews laid wait for him, as he was about to sail into Syria, he purposed to return through Macedonia.
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
to-beING-ABOUT to-being-about
TO-BE-beING-UP-LED INTO THE to-be-being-set-out
SYRIA
he-BECAME he-came-to-be
OF-opinion
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
upostrefein dia hupostrephO dia

vn Pres Act Prep
makedonias makedonia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
TO-BE-reTURNING
THRU MACEDONIA through autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
20:4 suneipeto
sunepomai
de de
Conj
swpatros sOpatros
n_ Nom Sg m
purrou purrhos
n_ Gen Sg m
beroiaios qessalonikewn beroiaios thessalonikeus

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl m
TOGETHER-said YET to-him it-was-arranged-to-meet him de de

Conj
Sopater (SAVE-FATHER) OF-PYRRHUS BEREan Sopater
OF-THESSALONICans of-Thessalonians
aristarcos aristarchos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai sekoundos kai gaios kai sekoundos kai gaios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
derbaios kai timoqeos derbaios kai timotheos

a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
And there accompanied him into Asia Sopater of Berea; and of the Thessalonians, Aristarchus and Secundus; and Gaius of Derbe, and Timotheus; and of Asia, Tychicus and Trophimus.
YET Aristarchus (best-chief) AND Aristarchus asianoi asianos

n_ Nom Pl m
SECUNDUS
AND
GAIUS
DERBEan Derbian
AND
Timothy
de de
Conj
tucikos tuchikos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai trofimos kai trophimos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ASIAns YET Tychicus (HAPPEN) AND ones-of-province-of-Asia Tychicus
Trophimus (NURTURED) Trophimus emenon menO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
20:5 outoi
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
WH
proselqontes
NA
proelqontes proerchomai
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
trwadi trOas
n_ Dat Sg f
These going before tarried for us at Troas.
these
YET
BEFORE-COMING coming-before exepleusamen meta tas ekpleO meta ho

vi Aor Act 1 Pl Prep t_ Acc Pl f
REMAINED remained-for
US
IN
TROAS
20:6 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
hmeras twn hEmera ho

n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl n
azumwn azumos
a_ Gen Pl n
apo apo
Prep
WE
YET OUT-FLOAT sail-off pros pros

Prep
after
THE
DAYS
OF-THE
UN-FERMENTEDS FROM unleavened-bread(p)
filippwn kai hlqomen philippoi kai erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl

pp Acc Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
trwada acris hmerwn pente trOas achri hEmera pente

n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Pl f ni numeral
And we sailed away from Philippi after the days of unleavened bread, and came unto them to Troas in five days; where we abode seven days.
Philippi
WH NA
AND
CAME
TOWARD them
INTO THE
TROAS
UNTIL
DAYS
FIVE
ou
opou hopou
Adv
dietriyamen hmeras epta diatribO hEmera hepta

vi Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Pl f ni numeral
THE-?-where wheree
WE-tarry
DAYS
SEVEN
AV
Acts 20
20:7 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
sabbatwn sunhgmenwn sabbaton sunagO

n_ Gen Pl n vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
klasai klaO
vn Aor Act
IN
YET THE
ONE one-day paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
SABBATHS
OF-HAVING-been-TOGETHER-LED US of-having-been-gathered exienai exeimi

vn Pres vxx
TO-BREAK
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dielegeto dialegomai
autois mellwn autos mellO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
. And upon the first [day] of the week, when the disciples came together to break bread, Paul preached unto them, ready to depart on the morrow; and continued his speech until midnight.
BREAD
THE
PAUL
THRU-said argued te te
Part
to-them
beING-ABOUT
TO-OUT-BE to-THE to-be-off
epaurion epaurion
Adv
pareteinen parateinO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
mecri mesonuktiou mechri mesonuktion

Adv n_ Gen Sg n
ON-MORROW BESIDE-STRETCHED BESIDES THE he-prolonged
saying word en en
Prep
UNTO
MID-NIGHT midnight ou hou

Adv
20:8 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
lampades ikanai lampas hikanos

n_ Nom Pl f a_ Nom Pl f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
uperww huperOon
n_ Dat Sg n
hmen eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
And there were many lights in the upper chamber, where they were gathered together.
WERE there-were sunhgmenoi sunagO

YET SHINErs torches
enough IN considerable
THE
OVER-apartment where WE-WERE upper-chamber
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-LED having-been-gathered
20:9 kaqezomenos
kathezomai
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
neanias neanias
n_ Nom Sg m
onomati eutucos onoma eutuchos

epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
beING-seatED
YET ANY certain upnw hupnos

n_ Dat Sg m
YOUNG(m) young-man baqei bathus

a_ Dat Sg m
to-NAME
Eutychus (WELL-HAPPEN) ON Eutychus tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
quridos kataferomenos thuris katapherO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m
dialegomenou dialegomai
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi epi
Prep
And there sat in a window a certain young man named Eutychus, being fallen into a deep sleep: and as Paul was long preaching, he sunk down with sleep, and fell down from the third loft, and was taken up dead.
window
beING-DOWN-CARRIED to-SLEEP sinking katenecqeis katapherO

vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
DEEP
OF-THRU-sayING of-arguing upnou hupnos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
PAUL
ON
pleion polus
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
MORE
BEING-DOWN-CARRIED FROM THE being-sunk katw katO

Adv
SLEEP
he-FALLS falls
FROM THE
tristegou tristegon
n_ Gen Sg n
kai hrqh kai airO

nekros nekros
a_ Nom Sg m
THREE-EXCLUDer DOWN-below AND third-story down
WAS-LIFTED DEAD was-picked-up paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
20:10 katabas
katabainO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epepesen autw epipiptO autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
kai sumperilabwn kai sumperilambanO

DOWN-STEPPing descending eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YET THE
PAUL
ON-FALLS falls-on gar yuch gar psuchE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
to-him him autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
AND
embracING embracing-him autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
10 And Paul went down, and fell on him, and embracing [him] said, Trouble not yourselves; for his life is in him.
mh mE
Part Neg
qorubeisqe thorubeO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
said
NO
BE-TUMULTING THE be-ye-making-tumult ! de de

Conj
WH
for
soul
OF-him
IN
him
IS
20:11 anabas
anabainO
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
klasas klaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
UP-STEPPing going-up geusamenos geuomai

YET
AND
BREAKing
THE
BREAD
AND
11 When he therefore was come up again, and had broken bread, and eaten, and talked a long while, even till break of day, so he departed.
ef epi
Prep
ikanon hikanos
a_ Acc Sg n
te te
Part
omilhsas homileO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
acris aughs achri augE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
outws exhlqen houtOs exerchomai

TASTing
ON
enough BESIDES conversing considerable ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
UNTIL
RADIANCE thus daybreak
he-OUT-CAME he-came-away ou ou
Part Neg
20:12 hgagon
agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
paida pais
n_ Acc Sg m
zwnta zaO
kai pareklhqhsan kai parakaleO

metriws metriOs
Adv
12 And they brought the young man alive, and were not a little comforted.
THEY-LED
YET THE
boy
LIVING
AND
WERE-BESIDE-CALLED NOT were-consoled
MEASURably
20:13 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
proelqontes epi to proerchomai epi ho

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg n
ploion anhcqhmen epi thn ploion anagO epi ho

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 1 Pl Prep t_ Acc Sg f
asson assos
n_ Acc Sg f
WE
YET BEFORE-COMING coming-before
ON
THE
FLOATer ship
WERE-UP-LED set-out
ON
THE
ASSOS
13 . And we went before to ship, and sailed unto Assos, there intending to take in Paul: for so had he appointed, minding himself to go afoot.
AV
Acts 20
ekeiqen mellontes ekeithen mellO

analambanein analambanO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon outws gar diatetagmenos paulos houtOs gar diatassO

n_ Acc Sg m Adv Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
thence
beING-ABOUT being-about(p) mellwn mellO
TO-BE-UP-GETTING THE to-be-taking-up autos autos

pp Nom Sg m
PAUL
thus
for
HAVING-been-prescribED
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
pezeuein pezeuO
vn Pres Act
WAS it-was
beING-ABOUT
he
TO-BE-FOOTING to-be-going-on-foot hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
20:14 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
suneballen sumballO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
asson assos
n_ Acc Sg f
analabontes auton analambanO autos

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg m
14 And when he met with us at Assos, we took him in, and came to Mitylene.
AS
YET he-TOGETHER-CAST to-US he-came-up-with us eis eis

Prep
INTO THE
ASSOS
UP-GETTING taking-up
him
hlqomen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
mitulhnhn mitulEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
WE-CAME
INTO MITYLENE
20:15 kakeiqen apopleusantes th

kakeithen
Adv Con
apopleO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epioush epeimi
kathnthsamen antikrus katantaO antikrus

vi Aor Act 1 Pl Adv
ciou chios
n_ Gen Sg f
AND-thence
FROM-FLOATing sailing-away
to-THE
ON-BEING ensuing-day samon samos

n_ Acc Sg f
WE-attain we-arrive-at de de
Conj
INSTEAD-SKULL OF-CHIOS abreast hlqomen erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
etera heteros
a_ Dat Sg f
parebalomen eis paraballO eis

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ecomenh echO
eis eis
Prep
15 And we sailed thence, and came the next [day] over against Chios; and the next [day] we arrived at Samos, and tarried at Trogyllium; and the next [day] we came to Miletus.
to-THE
YET DIFFERENT WE-BESIDE-CAST different-day we-put-in
INTO SAMOS
to-THE
YET HAVING being-next-day
WE-CAME
INTO
milhton milEtos
n_ Acc Sg f
MILETUS
20:16 kekrikei
krinO
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
parapleusai thn parapleO ho

efeson opws ephesos hopOs

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
HAD-JUDGED for had-decided genhtai ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THE
PAUL
TO-BESIDE-FLOAT THE to-sail-by th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
EPHESUS
WHICH-how NO so-that gar ei gar ei

Conj Cond
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
cronotribhsai en chronotribeO en
vn Aor Act Prep
asia asia
n_ Dat Sg f
espeuden speudO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
16 For Paul had determined to sail by Ephesus, because he would not spend the time in Asia: for he hasted, if it were possible for him, to be at Jerusalem the day of Pentecost.
MAY-BE-BECOMING to-him it-may-be-becoming dunaton eih dunatos eimi

a_ Nom Sg n vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-TIME-WEAR to-linger autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
IN
THE
ASIA he-was-DILIGENT for province-of-Asia he-hurried penthkosths genesqai pentEkostE ginomai

n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor midD
IF
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran ths hEmera ho

eis eis
Prep
ABLE possible
MAY-it-BE it-may-be
to-him
THE
DAY
OF-THE
TO-BE-BECOMING INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
20:17 apo
apo
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
milhtou pemyas milEtos pempO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
efeson metekalesato tous ephesos metakaleO ho

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Mid 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
17 . And from Miletus he sent to Ephesus, and called the elders of the church.
FROM YET THE
MILETUS
SENDing
INTO EPHESUS
he-WITH-CALLS he-calls-for
THE
presbuterous ths presbuteros ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias ekklEsia
n_ Gen Sg f
SENIORS elders
OF-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia pros pros

Prep
20:18 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
paregenonto paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

AS
YET THEY-BESIDE-BECAME TOWARD him they-came-along apo apo

Prep
he-said
to-them
YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
epistasqe epistamai
prwths prOtos
a_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
af apo
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
epebhn epibainO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
18 And when they were come to him, he said unto them, Ye know, from the first day that I came into Asia, after what manner I have been with you at all seasons,
ARE-adeptING FROM BEFORE-most DAY are-being-versed-in-the-facts first
FROM WHICH
I-ON-STEPPed INTO THE I-stepped-on
AV
Acts 20
asian asia
n_ Acc Sg f
pws meq pOs meta

Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
egenomhn ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
ASIA how province-of-Asia
WITH YOU(p) ye tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
EVERY all
TIME
I-BECAME I-came-to-be
19 Serving the Lord with all humility of mind, and with many tears, and temptations, which befell me by the lying in wait of the Jews:
20:19 douleuwn
douleuO
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
meta pashs meta pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
tapeinofrosunhs kai dakruwn kai tapeinophrosunE kai dakru kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Pl n Conj
SLAVING
to-THE
Master Lord
WITH
EVERY all en en
Prep
humility
AND
TEARS
AND
peirasmwn twn peirasmos ho

sumbantwn sumbainO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
epiboulais twn epiboulE ho

ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
trials
OF-THE the
befallING
to-ME me
IN
THE
ON-COUNSELS plots
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews anaggeilai anaggellO

vn Aor Act
20 [And] how I kept back nothing that was profitable [unto you], but have shewed you, and have taught you publickly, and from house to house,
20:20 ws ouden
hOs
Adv
oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
upesteilamhn twn hupostellO ho

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg t_ Gen Pl n
sumferontwn tou sumpherO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
AS how umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
NOT-YET-ONE I-UNDER-PUT nothing I-shrunk kai didaxai umas kai didaskO humeis
Conj vn Aor Act pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE
beING-expedient
OF-THE
NO
TO-UP-MESSAGE to-inform
dhmosia kai kat dEmosios kai kata

Adv Conj Prep
oikous oikos
n_ Acc Pl m
to-YOU(p) ye
AND
TO-TEACH
YOU(p) ye
PUBLICly
AND
according-to HOMES
20:21 diamarturomenos
diamarturomai
a_ Dat Pl m Part
kai ellhsin thn kai hellEn ho

Conj n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
metanoian metanoia
n_ Acc Sg f
THRU-witnessING certifying kai pistin eis kai pistis eis

to-JUDA-ans to-Jews ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BESIDES AND bsboth hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
to-GREEKS
THE
INTO God
21 Testifying both to the Jews, and also to the Greeks, repentance toward God, and faith toward our Lord Jesus Christ.
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BELIEF faith
INTO THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
20:22 kai nun idou

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
dedemenos deO
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati poreuomai pneuma poreuomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
AND
NOW BE-PERCEIVING HAVING-been-BOUND I lo ! en en

Prep
to-THE
WH
spirit
NA
AM-GOING
22 And now, behold, I go bound in the spirit unto Jerusalem, not knowing the things that shall befall me there:
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm ta ierosoluma ho
ni proper t_ Acc Pl n
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
sunanthsonta sunantaO
vp Fut Act Acc Pl n
emoi
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
INTO JERUSALEM
THE IN the-things
her herit
TOGETHER-meetING meeting-with
to-ME me
NO not
eidws eidO
HAVING-PERCEIVED being-aware
20:23 plhn
plEn
Adv
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
kata kata
Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
diamarturetai diamarturomai
MOREly that except moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
according-to city
THRU-witnessES certifies
23 Save that the Holy Ghost witnesseth in every city, saying that bonds and afflictions abide me.
legon legO
oti desma hoti desmos

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
kai qliyeis kai thlipsis

Conj n_ Nom Pl f
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
menousin menO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
to-ME
sayING
that
BONDS
AND
CONSTRICTIONS ME afflictions for-me thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ARE-REMAINING
20:24 all oudenos

alla
Conj
oudeis
a_ Gen Sg n
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
poioumai poieO
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
timian emautw ws timios emautou hOs

a_ Acc Sg f pf 1 Dat Sg m Adv
but
WH
OF-NOT-YET-ONE saying of-nothing word

NA
I-AM-makING
THE
soul
VALUable precious kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
to-MYself
AS
teleiwsw
teleiwsai teleioO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dromon dromos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
24 But none of these things move me, neither count I my life dear unto myself, so that I might finish my course with joy, and the ministry, which I have received of the Lord Jesus, to testify the gospel of the grace of God.
TO-mature to-perfect elabon lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
RUNning career ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ME
AND
THE
THRU-SERVice WHICH dispensation euaggelion euaggelion

n_ Acc Sg n
para para
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
diamarturasqai to diamarturomai ho
vn Aor midD t_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
I-GOT
BESIDE OF-THE the
Master Lord
JESUS
TO-THRU-witness to-certify
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
AV
Acts 20

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
OF-THE
God
20:25 kai nun idou

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg

Conj Adv
oyesqe optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
NOW BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
HAVE-PERCEIVED that am-aware pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
NOT-STILL YE-SHALL-BE-VIEWING THE not-longer shall-be-seeing khrusswn kErussO

25 And now, behold, I know that ye all, among whom I have gone preaching the kingdom of God, shall see my face no more.
proswpon mou prosOpon egO

en en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
dihlqon dierchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
face
OF-ME
YOU(p) ye
ALL
IN WHOM among
I-THRU-CAME PROCLAIMING I-passed-through heralding
THE
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
KINGdom
20:26 dioti
dioti
Conj
marturomai marturomai
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
shmeron hmera sEmeron hEmera

Adv n_ Dat Sg f
oti kaqaros hoti katharos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
THRU-that I-AM-witnessING because-that I-am-attesting eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IN
THE
toDAY
DAY
that
clean
26 Wherefore I take you to record this day, that I [am] pure from the blood of all [men].
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos pantwn haima pas

I-AM
FROM THE
BLOOD
OF-ALL
20:27 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar upesteilamhn tou gar hupostellO ho

Conj vi Aor Mid 1 Sg t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
anaggeilai anaggellO
vn Aor Act
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
boulhn boulE
n_ Acc Sg f
27 For I have not shunned to declare unto you all the counsel of God.
NOT
for
I-UNDER-PUT I-shrunk umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-THE
NO
TO-UP-MESSAGE EVERY to-inform entire
THE
COUNSEL
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
to-YOU(p) ye tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
20:28 prosecete eautois kai panti

prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
kai
Conj
pas
a_ Dat Sg n
poimniw en poimnion en
n_ Dat Sg n Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
BE-YE-heedING be-ye-heeding ! pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
to-selves AND to-yourselves agion hagios

a_ Nom Sg n
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
flocklet
IN WHICH among thn ho
YOU(p) ye
THE
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
episkopous poimainein episkopos poimainO

n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
28 Take heed therefore unto yourselves, and to all the flock, over the which the Holy Ghost hath made you overseers, to feed the church of God, which he hath purchased with his own blood.
t_ Acc Sg f
spirit
THE
HOLY
PLACED appointed
ON-NOTErs supervisors
TO-BE-SHEPHERDING THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia idiou idios

a_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
periepoihsato dia peripoieO dia

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos tou haima ho

OF-THE
God
WHICH
He-procurES
THRU THE through
BLOOD
OF-THE
OWN own-one mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
29 For I know this, that after my departing shall grievous wolves enter in among you, not sparing the flock.
20:29 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oti eiseleusontai hoti eiserchomai

meta thn meta ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
afixin aphixis
n_ Acc Sg f
HAVE-PERCEIVED that am-aware bareis barus

a_ Nom Pl m
SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING after shall-be-entering mh mE

Part Neg
THE
FROM-REACH OF-ME out-of-reach poimniou poimnion

n_ Gen Sg n
lukoi lukos
n_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
feidomenoi pheidomai
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
WOLVES
HEAVY INTO YOU(p) burdensome ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
WH
NO
SPARING
NA
OF-THE the anasthsontai anistEmi

vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
flocklet
20:30 kai ex
kai
Conj
autwn
ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
lalountes laleO
AND
OUT OF-YOU(p) of-ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SAME selves apospan apospaO

vn Pres Act
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING MEN shall-be-rising tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
TALKING speaking
WH
30 Also of your own selves shall men arise, speaking perverse things, to draw away disciples after them.
diestrammena diastrephO
maqhtas opisw mathEtEs opisO

n_ Acc Pl m Adv
eautwn
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED OF-THE things-having-been-perverted
TO-BE-FROM-PULLING THE to-be-pulling-away
LEARNers disciples
BEHIND after
AV
Acts 20
NA
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
them
20:31 dio
dio
Conj
grhgoreite grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mnhmoneuontes oti trietian mnEmoneuO hoti trietia

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg f
nukta nux
n_ Acc Sg f
kai hmeran ouk kai hEmera ou

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Part Neg
THRU-WHICH BE-YE-watchING rememberING wherefore be-ye-watching ! epausamhn meta dakruwn nouqetwn pauO meta dakru noutheteO
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Prep n_ Gen Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
that
THREE-YEAR NIGHT for-three-years ekaston hekastos

a_ Acc Sg m
AND
DAY
NOT
31 Therefore watch, and remember, that by the space of three years I ceased not to warn every one night and day with tears.
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
I-CEASE
WITH
TEARS
admonishING
ONE
EACH
WH NA
20:32 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
nun paratiqemai nun paratithEmi

Adv vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai tw kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
AND
THE the(p) ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
NOW I-AM-BESIDE-PLACING YOU(p) I-am-committing ye caritos autou charis autos

to-THE
God
AND
to-THE
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
dunamenw dunamai
oikodomhsai kai dounai oikodomeO kai didOmi

vn Aor Act Conj vn 2Aor Act
32 And now, brethren, I commend you to God, and to the word of his grace, which is able to build you up, and to give you an inheritance among all them which are sanctified.
saying word thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
grace
OF-Him
THE
beING-ABLE
TO-HOME-BUILD to-edify pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
AND
TO-GIVE
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
hgiasmenois hagiazO
THE
tenancy IN THE enjoyment-of-the-allotment among the-ones crusiou chrusion

n_ Gen Sg n
HAVING-been-HOLYizED ALL having-been-hallowed oudenos oudeis

a_ Gen Sg m
20:33 arguriou h
argurion
n_ Gen Sg n
E
Part
h E
Part
imatismou himatismos
n_ Gen Sg m
epequmhsa epithumeO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
33 I have coveted no man's silver, or gold, or apparel.
OF-SILVER silver
OR
OF-GOLD (dim) OR gold (dim.)
OF-GARMENTing OF-NOT-YET-ONE I-ON-FEEL vesture no-one's I-covet creiais mou chreia egO
n_ Dat Pl f pp 1 Gen Sg
20:34 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti tais hoti ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
ousin eimi
met meta
Prep
SAME yourselves emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
to-THE
NEEDS
OF-ME
AND
to-THE
ones-BEING ones-being
WITH
34 Yea, ye yourselves know, that these hands have ministered unto my necessities, and to them that were with me.
uphrethsan ai hupEreteO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
ceires cheir
n_ Nom Pl f
autai houtos
pd Nom Pl f
ME
subserve
THE
HANDS
these
20:35 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
upedeixa hupodeiknumi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti outws kopiwntas hoti houtOs kopiaO

Conj Adv vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
antilambanesqai antilambanomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
ALL
I-UNDER-SHOW to-YOU(p) I-intimate to-ye asqenountwn astheneO

that
thus
toilING
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-supportING
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
mnhmoneuein mnEmoneuO
vn Pres Act
te te
Part
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
logwn logos
n_ Gen Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
35 I have shewed you all things, how that so labouring ye ought to support the weak, and to remember the words of the Lord Jesus, how he said, It is more blessed to give than to receive.
OF-THE the
ones-beING-UN-FIRM TO-BE-rememberING BESIDES THE ones-being-infirm eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sayings words
OF-THE
Master Lord lambanein lambanO

vn Pres Act
JESUS
oti autos hoti autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
makarion estin makarios eimi

mallon didonai mallon didOmi

Adv vn Pres Act
h E
Part
that
He
said
HAPPY
it-IS
RATHER
TO-BE-GIVING OR TO-BE-GETTING-UP than to-be-getting gonata autou gonu autos

20:36 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
qeis tithEmi
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sun sun
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
36 . And when he had thus spoken, he kneeled down, and prayed with them all.
AND
PLACING
THE
KNEES
OF-him
TOGETHER to-ALL togetherwith all
autois proshuxato autos proseuchomai

pp Dat Pl m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
them
he-prays
20:37 ikanos
hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
klauqmos egeneto klauthmos ginomai

pantwn kai epipesontes epi ton pas kai epipiptO epi ho

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
37 And they all wept sore, and fell on Paul's neck, and kissed him,
enough YET LAMENTing considerable lamentation
BECAME OF-ALL there-came-to-be
AND
ON-FALLING falling-on
ON
THE
AV
Acts 20 - Acts 21
trachlon tou trachElos ho

paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
katefiloun kataphileO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
NECK
OF-THE
PAUL
THEY-DOWN-FONDED him they-kissed-fondly logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
20:38 odunwmenoi
odunaO
malista epi tw malista epi ho

Adv Prep t_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
eirhkei ereO

Conj Adv
beING-PAINED being-pained(p) mellousin mellO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
RATHERest especially to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ON
THE
saying word
WHICH
he-HAD-declarED that
NOT-STILL not-longer de de
Conj
38 Sorrowing most of all for the words which he spake, that they should see his face no more. And they accompanied him unto the ship.

qewrein theOreO
vn Pres Act
proepempon propempO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THEY-ARE-beING-ABOUT THE
face
OF-him
TO-BE-beholdING THEY-BEFORE-SENT YET him they-sent-forward
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
AV
Acts 21
21:1 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
anacqhnai hmas anagO hEmeis

vn Aor Pas pp 1 Acc Pl
apospasqentas ap apospaO apo

vp Aor Pas Acc Pl m Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
AS
YET BECAME
TO-BE-UP-LED US to-set-out eis eis

Prep
BEING-FROM-PULLED being-pulled-away kw kOs

n_ Acc Sg f
FROM them
euqudromhsantes hlqomen euthudromeO erchomai

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
exhs hexEs
Adv
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
rodon rhodos
n_ Acc Sg f
. And it came to pass, that after we were gotten from them, and had launched, we came with a straight course unto Coos, and the [day] following unto Rhodes, and from thence unto Patara:
straight-RUNNing running-straight kakeiqen eis kakeithen eis

Adv Con Prep
WE-CAME
INTO THE
COOS
to-THE
YET next INTO THE next-day
RHODES
patara patara
n_ Acc Pl n
AND-thence
INTO PATARA
21:2 kai eurontes

kai
Conj
heuriskO
ploion diaperwn ploion diaperaO

eis eis
Prep
foinikhn epibantes phoinikE epibainO

anhcqhmen anagO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
And finding a ship sailing over unto Phenicia, we went aboard, and set forth.
AND
FINDING
FLOATer ship thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ferryING
INTO PHOENICIA
ON-STEPPing stepping-on-board
WE-WERE-UP-LED we-set-out
3
21:3 anafanantes de
anaphainO
de
Conj
kupron kai katalipontes authn kupros kai kataleipO autos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m pp Acc Sg f
euwnumon euOnumos
a_ Acc Sg f
UP-APPEARING looming-up epleomen pleO

vi impf Act 1 Pl
YET THE
CYPRUS
AND
leavING
her herit turon turos

n_ Acc Sg f
left
eis eis
Prep
surian suria
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kathlqomen eis kai katerchomai eis

Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep
ekeise gar to ekeise gar ho

Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Nom Sg n
Now when we had discovered Cyprus, we left it on the left hand, and sailed into Syria, and landed at Tyre: for there the ship was to unlade her burden.
WE-WERE-FLOATING INTO SYRIA we-were-sailing hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
AND
WE-DOWN-CAME INTO TYRE came-down gomon gomos

n_ Acc Sg m
there-ly there
for
THE
FLOATer ship
apofortizomenon ton apophortizomai ho

vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg n t_ Acc Sg m
WAS
FROM-CARRYING unloading de de
Conj
THE
REPLETE cargo hmeras epta hEmera hepta

n_ Acc Pl f ni numeral
21:4 aneurontes
aneuriskO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
maqhtas epemeinamen autou mathEtEs epimenO autou

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Pl Adv
oitines hostis
pr Nom Pl m
UP-FINDING finding-out tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
YET THE
LEARNers disciples dia dia

Prep
WE-ON-REMAIN we-stay
OF-SAME DAYS there
SEVEN
WHO-ANY who-any eis eis

Prep
And finding disciples, we tarried there seven days: who said to Paul through the Spirit, that he should not go up to Jerusalem.
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos mh pneuma mE
epibainein epibainO
vn Pres Act
to-THE
PAUL
said
THRU THE through
spirit
NO
TO-BE-ON-STEPPING INTO to-be-stepping-on-board
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
WH WH NA NA
21:5 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
exartisai hmas
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
exartisai exartizO
vn Aor Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
when
YET it-BECAME
US
TO-OUT-EQUIP to-fit-out pantwn sun pas sun

a_ Gen Pl m Prep
THE
DAYS
eporeuomeqa poreuomai
propempontwn hmas propempO hEmeis

gunaixin kai gunE kai

n_ Dat Pl f Conj
And when we had accomplished those days, we departed and went our way; and they all brought us on our way, with wives and children, till [we were] out of the city: and we kneeled down on the shore, and prayed.
OUT-COMING coming-away
WE-WENT
OF-BEFORE-SENDING US of-sending-forward polews kai qentes polis kai tithEmi

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
ALL
TOGETHER to-WOMEN with-wives ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
AND
teknois ews exw teknon heOs exO

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
gonata epi ton gonu epi ho

n_ Acc Pl n Prep t_ Acc Sg m
to-offsprings children
TILL
OUT OF-THE outside
city
AND
PLACING
THE
KNEES
ON
THE
aigialon proseuxamenoi aigialos proseuchomai

n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
BEACH
praying
WH NA
21:6 aphspasameqa allhlous kai

apaspazomai
vi Aor midD 1 Pl
enebhmen
allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
kai
Conj
anebhmen anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
WE-FROM-greet we-pull-away-from
one-another
AND
WE-UP-STEPPed stepped-up
INTO THE
FLOATer ship
And when we had taken our leave one of another, we took ship; and they returned home again.
AV
Acts 21
pd Nom Pl m Conj

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
those
YET reTURN
INTO THE
OWN own(p) apo apo

Prep
21:7 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ploun ploos
n_ Acc Sg m
dianusantes dianuO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
turou turos
n_ Gen Sg f
kathnthsamen eis katantaO eis

WE
YET THE
FLOATing sailing
THRU-TERMINATing FROM TYRE quitting tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
WE-attain arrive-at
INTO
And when we had finished [our] course from Tyre, we came to Ptolemais, and saluted the brethren, and abode with them one day.
ptolemaida kai aspasamenoi ptolemais kai aspazomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
adelfous emeinamen hmeran mian adelphos menO hEmera heis

n_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
par para
Prep
PTOLEMAIS
AND
greeting
THE
brothers brethren
WE-REMAIN
DAY
ONE
BESIDE
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
them
21:8 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
hlqomen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
kaisareian kai eiselqontes kaisareia kai eiserchomai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW OUT-COMING coming-away oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
WE-CAME
INTO CAESAREA
AND
INTO-COMING entering ek ek
Prep
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
filippou tou philippos ho

euaggelistou ontos euaggelistEs eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
. And the next [day] we that were of Paul's company departed, and came unto Caesarea: and we entered into the house of Philip the evangelist, which was [one] of the seven; and abode with him.
INTO THE
HOME house
OF-Philip
THE
WELL-MESSENGER evangelist
BEING one-being
OUT OF-THE
epta hepta
ni numeral
emeinamen par menO para

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
SEVEN
WE-REMAIN
BESIDE him
21:9 toutw de
houtos
pd Dat Sg m
de
Conj
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
qugateres tessares parqenoi profhteuousai thugatEr tessares parthenos prophEteuO

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl f
And the same man had four daughters, virgins, which did prophesy.
to-this-one to-this-man
YET WERE
DAUGHTERS
FOUR
virgins
ones-BEFORE-AVERRING ones-prophesying apo apo

Prep
21:10 epimenontwn de
epimenO
de
Conj
hmeras pleious hEmera polus

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
kathlqen tis katerchomai tis

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg px Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-ON-REMAINING of-staying profhths prophEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
YET DAYS
MORE
DOWN-CAME came-down
ANY certain
FROM THE
JUDEA
10 And as we tarried [there] many days, there came down from Judaea a certain prophet, named Agabus.
onomati agabos onoma hagabos

BEFORE-AVERer to-NAME prophet
AGABUS
21:11 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai aras kai airO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
zwnhn zOnE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
COMING
TOWARD US
AND
LIFTing picking-up kai tas kai ho

Conj
THE
GIRDle
OF-THE
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
dhsas deO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
ceiras eipen cheir legO

tade hode
pd Acc Pl n
t_ Acc Pl f
PAUL
BINDing
OF-self of-himself pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
THE
FEET
AND
THE
HANDS
he-said
THE-YET now-this h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
11 And when he was come unto us, he took Paul's girdle, and bound his own hands and feet, and said, Thus saith the Holy Ghost, So shall the Jews at Jerusalem bind the man that owneth this girdle, and shall deliver [him] into the hands of the Gentiles.
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS-sayING
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
THE
MAN
OF-WHOM
IS
THE
zwnh zOnE
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
outws dhsousin houtOs deO

Adv vi Fut Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
ierousalhm oi ierosoluma ho
ni proper t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi kai ioudaios kai

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
GIRDle
this
thus
SHALL-BE-BINDING IN
JERUSALEM
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
paradwsousin paradidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ceiras eqnwn cheir ethnos

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-GIVING INTO HANDS they-shall-be-giving-over-him
OF-NATIONS
AV
Acts 21
21:12 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
hkousamen tauta akouO houtos

vi Aor Act 1 Pl pd Acc Pl n
parekaloumen hmeis parakaleO hEmeis

vi impf Act 1 Pl pp 1 Nom Pl
te te
Part
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
entopioi entopios
a_ Nom Pl m
AS
YET WE-HEAR
these BESIDE-CALLED these-things entreated auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WE
BESIDES AND bsboth
THE the-ones
IN-PLACES in-the-place
12 And when we heard these things, both we, and they of that place, besought him not to go up to Jerusalem.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
anabainein anabainO
vn Pres Act
eis eis
Prep
ni proper
OF-THE
NO
TO-BE-UP-STEPPING him to-be-going-up

WH
INTO JERUSALEM
21:13 tote apekriqh

tote
Adv
NA
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
klaiontes klaiO
kai kai
Conj
then
answerED
THE
PAUL
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-DOING LAMENTING
AND
sunqruptontes sunthruptO
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kardian egw kardia egO

n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Nom Sg
gar ou gar ou
Conj Part Neg
monon deqhnai monon deO

Adv vn Aor Pas
alla alla
Conj
13 Then Paul answered, What mean ye to weep and to break mine heart? for I am ready not to be bound only, but also to die at Jerusalem for the name of the Lord Jesus.
TOGETHER-ENERVATING OF-ME unnerving kai apoqanein kai apothnEskO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
THE
HEART
for
NOT
ONLY
TO-BE-BOUND but
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm etoimws ecw ierosoluma hetoimOs echO

ni proper Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg
uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
onomatos onoma
n_ Gen Sg n
AND also tou ho
TO-BE-FROM-DYING INTO JERUSALEM to-be-dying kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
READily readiness
I-AM-HAVING
NAME
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
21:14 mh
mE
Part Neg
peiqomenou peithO
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hsucasamen eipontes hEsuchazO legO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
14 And when he would not be persuaded, we ceased, saying, The will of the Lord be done.
NO
OF-beING-PERSUADED YET him
WE-QUIETize we-are-quiet
sayING
OF-THE
Master Lord
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
ginesqw ginomai
THE
WILL
LET-BE-BECOMING let-it-be-becoming ! tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
21:15 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
hmeras tautas episkeuasamenoi anebainomen eis hEmera houtos episkeuazomai anabainO eis
n_ Acc Pl f pd Acc Pl f vp Aor midD Nom Pl m vi impf Act 1 Pl Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
15 . And after those days we took up our carriages, and went up to Jerusalem.
after
YET THE
DAYS
these
ON-INSTRUMENTing taking-up-our-baggage maqhtwn apo mathEtEs apo

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
WE-UP-STEPPED we-went-up
INTO JERUSALEM
21:16 sunhlqon
sunerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
kaisareias sun kaisareia sun

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
TOGETHER-CAME YET AND came-together also agontes agO

OF-THE LEARNers ones-of-the disciples xenisqwmen xenizO

vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
FROM CAESAREA
TOGETHER to-US togetherwith us kupriw kuprios

n_ Dat Sg m
par para
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
mnaswni tini mnasOn tis

n_ Dat Sg m px Dat Sg m
16 There went with us also [certain] of the disciples of Caesarea, and brought with them one Mnason of Cyprus, an old disciple, with whom we should lodge.
LEADING leading-us arcaiw archaios

a_ Dat Sg m
BESIDE to-WHOM whom maqhth mathEtEs

n_ Dat Sg m
WE-SHOULD-BE-BEING-LODGizED to-Mnason we-should-be-being-lodged
ANY certain
CYPRIAN
ORIGINal LEARNer from-the-beginning disciple
21:17 genomenwn
ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma asmenws ierosoluma asmenOs

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
apedexanto hmas apodechomai hEmeis

vi Aor midD 3 Pl pp 1 Acc Pl
17 And when we were come to Jerusalem, the brethren received us gladly.
OF-BECOMING
YET US
INTO JERUSALEM
GRATIFYingly FROM-RECEIVE with-gratification welcome
US
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
THE
brothers brethren de de
Conj
21:18 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epioush epeimi
eishei eiseimi
vi Plup Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
pros pros
Prep
to-THE
YET ON-BEING ensuing-day
HAD-INTO-BEEN THE had-been-in
PAUL
TOWARD
18 And the [day] following Paul went in with us unto James; and all the elders were present.
AV
Acts 21
iakwbon pantes iakObos pas

te te
Part
paregenonto oi paraginomai ho
vi 2Aor midD 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
a_ Nom Pl m
JACOBUS James
ALL
BESIDES BESIDE-CAME came-along
THE
SENIORS elders kaq kata

Prep
21:19 kai aspasamenos

kai
Conj
aspazomai
autous exhgeito autos exEgeomai

pp Acc Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
ekaston hekastos
a_ Acc Sg n
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
AND
greeting
them
he-unfoldED
according-to ONE
EACH OF-WHICH each-of-the-things which diakonias autou diakonia autos

19 And when he had saluted them, he declared particularly what things God had wrought among the Gentiles by his ministry.
epoihsen o poieO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin dia ethnos dia

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
DOES
THE
God
IN THE among
NATIONS
THRU THE through qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
THRU-SERVice OF-him dispensation te te

Part
21:20 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
akousantes edoxazon ton akouO doxazO ho

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
YET ones-HEARing ones-hearing adelfe posai adelphos posos

n_ Voc Sg m pq Nom Pl f
esteemizED glorified muriades murias

n_ Nom Pl m
THE
God
THEY-said
BESIDES to-him
qewreis theOreO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois twn ioudaios ho

a_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
20 And when they heard [it], they glorified the Lord, and said unto him, Thou seest, brother, how many thousands of Jews there are which believe; and they are all zealous of the law:
YOU-ARE-beholdING brother !
how-many
MYRIADS (10,000) ARE ten-thousands there-are zhlwtai tou zElOtEs ho

IN THE among
JUDA-ans Jews
OF-THE
pepisteukotwn kai pantes pisteuO kai pas

vp Perf Act Gen Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
uparcousin huparchO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED AND ones-having-believed
ALL
BOILers zealots peri peri

Prep
OF-THE
LAW
ARE-belongING are-inherently apo apo

Prep
21 And they are informed of thee, that thou teachest all the Jews which are among the Gentiles to forsake Moses, saying that they ought not to circumcise [their] children, neither to walk after the customs.
21:21 kathchqhsan
katEcheO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
de de
Conj
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
oti apostasian didaskeis hoti apostasia didaskO

THEY-WERE-instructED YET ABOUT YOU concerning mwusews tous mOusEs ho

that
FROM-STANDing apostasy
YOU-ARE-TEACHING FROM
kata kata
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
pantas ioudaious legwn pas ioudaios legO

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
MOSES
THE
according-to THE
NATIONS
ALL
JUDA-ans Jews tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
sayING
NO
peritemnein peritemnO
vn Pres Act
autous ta autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
mhde mEde
Conj
eqesin ethos
n_ Dat Pl n
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING them to-be-circumcising
THE
offsprings children
NO-YET to-THE nor-yet
CUSTOMS TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING to-be-walking oti elhluqas hoti erchomai

22 What is it therefore? the multitude must needs come together: for they will hear that thou art come.
21:22 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pantws akousontai pantOs akouO

Adv vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ANY what ?
THEN it-IS
ALL-ly undoubtedly o hos

pr Acc Sg n
THEY-SHALL-BE-HEARING that
YOU-HAVE-COME
21:23 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
poihson poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
legomen legO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
23 Do therefore this that we say to thee: We have four men which have a vow on them;
this
THEN DO do-you ! econtes echO
WHICH
WH
to-YOU
NA
WE-ARE-sayING ARE
to-US
MEN
tessares euchn tessares euchE

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
af
ef epi
Prep
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
FOUR
vow
HAVING
ON
selves themselves sun sun

Prep
21:24 toutous paralabwn

houtos
pd Acc Pl m
paralambanO
agnisqhti hagnizO
vm Aor Pas 2 Sg
autois kai dapanhson autos kai dapanaO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ep epi
Prep
these
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along xurhsontai xuraO

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
BE-BEING-PURifiED TOGETHER to-them be-you-being-purified ! with-them thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
AND
SPEND ON bear-expenses-you ! pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m

pp Dat Pl m Conj
kefalhn kai gnwsontai kephalE kai ginOskO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut midD 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
them
THAT THEY-SHALL-BE-SHAVING THE
HEAD
AND
SHALL-BE-KNOWING ALL
that
24 Them take, and purify thyself with them, and be at charges with them, that they may shave [their] heads: and all may know that those things, whereof they were informed concerning thee, are nothing; but [that] thou thyself also walkest orderly, and keepest the law.
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
kathchntai katEcheO
vi Perf Pas 3 Pl
peri peri
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
OF-WHICH THEY-HAVE-been-instructED ABOUT YOU of-which(p) concerning
NOT-YET-ONE IS nothing
but
AV
Acts 21
stoiceis stoicheO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
fulasswn phulassO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
YOU-ARE-elementING AND you-are-observing-the-fundamentals also
SAME yourself
GUARDING maintaining
THE
LAW
WH
21:25 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
pepisteukotwn eqnwn pisteuO ethnos

vp Perf Act Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl n
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
apesteilamen
ABOUT YET THE concerning

NA
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED OF-NATIONS WE ones-having-believed fulassesqai phulassO

vn Pres Mid
epesteilamen epistellO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
krinantes krinO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
autous to autos ho
pp Acc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
te te
Part
eidwloquton eidOlothuton
a_ Acc Sg n
letter (verb) dispatch-an-epistle kai aima kai haima

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
JUDGing deciding
TO-BE-beING-GUARDED them
THE
BESIDES idol-SACRIFICE
25 As touching the Gentiles which believe, we have written [and] concluded that they observe no such thing, save only that they keep themselves from [things] offered to idols, and from blood, and from strangled, and from fornication.
kai pnikton kai pniktos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
kai porneian kai porneia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AND
BLOOD
AND
strangled AND strangled-thing paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
PROSTITUTION
21:26 tote o
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paralabwn paralambanO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
andras th anEr ho
n_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
ecomenh echO
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
then
THE
PAUL
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along eishei eiseimi

vi Plup Act 3 Sg
THE
MEN
to-THE
HAVING being-next diaggellwn diaggellO
DAY
sun sun
Prep
autois agnisqeis autos hagnizO

pp Dat Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
26 Then Paul took the men, and the next day purifying himself with them entered into the temple, to signify the accomplishment of the days of purification, until that an offering should be offered for every one of them.
TOGETHER to-them togetherwith them thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
BEING-PURifiED
HAD-INTO-BEEN INTO THE had-been-in
SACRED-place publishING sanctuary proshnecqh prospherO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ekplhrwsin twn ekplErOsis ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Pl f

agnismou ews ou hagnismos heOs hos

n_ Gen Sg m Conj pr Gen Sg m
THE
OUT-FILLing full-completion
OF-THE
DAYS
OF-THE
PURification
TILL
OF-WHICH WAS-TOWARD-CARRIED which was-offered
uper enos huper heis

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
ekastou autwn hekastos autos

a_ Gen Sg m pp Gen Pl m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
prosfora prosphora
n_ Nom Sg f
OVER for
ONE
EACH
OF-them
THE
TOWARD-CARRY offering hmerai hEmera

n_ Nom Pl f
21:27 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
emellon mellO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
epta hepta
ni numeral
sunteleisqai sunteleO
vn Pres Pas
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AS
YET WERE-ABOUT THE
SEVEN
DAYS
TO-BE-beING-concludED THE
FROM THE
asias asia
n_ Gen Sg f
ioudaioi qeasamenoi ioudaios theaomai

a_ Nom Pl m vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
suneceon sugcheO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
27 . And when the seven days were almost ended, the Jews which were of Asia, when they saw him in the temple, stirred up all the people, and laid hands on him,
ASIA JUDA-ans province-of-Asia Jews panta pas

a_ Acc Sg m
gazing gazing-at
him
IN
THE
SACRED-place TOGETHER-POURED sanctuary threw-into-confusion tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai epebalon kai epiballO

ep epi
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ceiras cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
EVERY entire
THE
THRONG
AND
THEY-ON-CAST(past) ON laid-on
him
THE
HANDS
21:28 krazontes
krazO
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
israhlitai bohqeite israElitEs boEtheO

n_ Voc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
CRYING
MEN men !
BE-helpING be-ye-helping !
this
IS
THE
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
topou topos
n_ Gen Sg m
28 Crying out, Men of Israel, help: This is the man, that teacheth all [men] every where against the people, and the law, and this place: and further brought Greeks also into the temple, and hath polluted this holy place.
human
THE
DOWN against
OF-THE the
PEOPLE
AND
OF-THE the te te
Part
LAW
AND
OF-THE the
PLACE
toutou pantas pantach didaskwn houtos pas pantachou didaskO

pd Gen Sg m a_ Acc Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
eti eti
Adv
kai ellhnas eishgagen eis kai hellEn eisagO eis

Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
this
ALL all-men ieron hieron

n_ Acc Sg n
EVERY-SOIL TEACHING everywhere kai kekoinwken kai koinoO

STILL BESIDES AND further also ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
GREEKS
INTO-LED he-led-into
INTO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
THE
HAS-COMMONED THE has-contaminated
HOLY
PLACE
this
AV
Acts 21
21:29 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
gar proewrakotes gar prooraO

Conj vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
trofimon ton trophimos ho

efesion en ephesios en
a_ Acc Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
WERE
for
HAVING-BEFORE-SEEN Trophimus having-seen-before on hos

pr Acc Sg m
THE
EPHESIAN
IN
THE
city
29 (For they had seen before with him in the city Trophimus an Ephesian, whom they supposed that Paul had brought into the temple.)
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
enomizon nomizO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oti eis hoti eis

Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
eishgagen o eisagO ho
TOGETHER to-him togetherwith him paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
WHOM
THEY-LAWizED that they-inferred
INTO THE
SACRED-place INTO-LED sanctuary led-into
THE
PAUL
21:30 ekinhqh
kineO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
te te
Part
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
olh holos
a_ Nom Sg f

sundromh sundromE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WAS-STIRRED BESIDES THE
city
WHOLE
AND
BECAME TOGETHER-RUN OF-THE there-came-to-be running-together auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
30 And all the city was moved, and the people ran together: and they took Paul, and drew him out of the temple: and forthwith the doors were shut.
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai epilabomenoi kai epilambanomai

Conj vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
eilkon helkuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
exw exO
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
PEOPLE
AND
ON-GETTING getting-hold
OF-THE
PAUL
THEY-DREW him
OUT OF-THE outside
kai euqews ekleisqhsan ai kai eutheOs kleiO ho

Conj Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl f
qurai thura
n_ Nom Pl f
AND
immediately
ARE-LOCKED
THE
DOORS
21:31 zhtountwn
zEteO
te te
Part
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
apokteinai anebh apokteinO anabainO

vn Aor Act vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
fasis phasis
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ciliarcw chiliarchos
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-SEEKING of-ones-seeking ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
BESIDES him
TO-FROM-KILL to-kill sugcunnetai sugcheO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
UP-STEPPed came-up ierousalhm ierosoluma

ni proper
ALLEGing allegation
to-THE
THOUSAND-chief captain
31 And as they went about to kill him, tidings came unto the chief captain of the band, that all Jerusalem was in an uproar.
speirhs oti olh speira hoti holos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
BAND squadron
that
WHOLE
IS-beING-confusED JERUSALEM is-thrown-into-confusion stratiwtas kai ekatontarcas katedramen ep stratiOtEs kai hekatontarchEs katatrechO epi
n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
32 Who immediately took soldiers and centurions, and ran down unto them: and when they saw the chief captain and the soldiers, they left beating of Paul.
21:32 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
exauths paralabwn exautEs paralambanO

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
WHO
forthwith
BESIDE-GETTING taking-along idontes eidO

WARriors soldiers
AND
HUNDRED-chiefs centurions kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
DOWN-RAN ran-down stratiwtas stratiOtEs

n_ Acc Pl m
ON
autous oi autos ho
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ciliarcon chiliarchos
n_ Acc Sg m
them
THE
YET PERCEIVING
THE
THOUSAND-chief AND captain
THE
WARriors soldiers
epausanto tuptontes pauO tuptO

vi Aor Mid 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon paulos
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-CEASE
BEATING
THE
PAUL
21:33 tote eggisas

tote
Adv
eggizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
epelabeto autou epilambanomai autos

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg pp Gen Sg m
kai ekeleusen kai keleuO

then
NEARing
THE
THOUSAND-chief ON-GOT captain got-hold kai epunqaneto kai punthanomai

OF-him
AND
ORDERS
deqhnai deO
vn Aor Pas
alusesin halusis
n_ Dat Pl f
dusin duo
n_ Dat Pl f
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
eih eimi
vo Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ti kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg n
33 Then the chief captain came near, and took him, and commanded [him] to be bound with two chains; and demanded who he was, and what he had done.
TO-BE-BOUND to-UN-LOOSES TWO to-be-bound-him to-chains estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
he-ASCERTAINED-UP ANY he-ascertained who ?
he-MAY-BE
AND
ANY what ?
pepoihkws poieO
he-IS
HAVING-DONE
21:34 alloi
allos
a_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
allo allos
a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
epefwnoun en epiphOneO en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oclw ochlos
n_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
others
YET other
ANY something
ON-SOUNDED retorted
IN
THE
THRONG
NO
34 And some cried one thing, some another, among the multitude: and when he could not know the certainty for the tumult, he commanded him to
AV
Acts 21
dunamenou dunamai
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
gnwnai to ginOskO ho
vn 2Aor Act t_ Acc Sg n
asfales dia asphalEs dia

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qorubon thorubos
n_ Acc Sg m
be carried into the castle.
OF-beING-ABLED of-being-able
YET OF-him
TO-KNOW
THE
UN-TOTTER certainty parembolhn parembolE

n_ Acc Sg f
THRU THE because-of
TUMULT
ekeleusen agesqai keleuO agO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vn Pres Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
he-ORDERS
TO-BE-beING-LED him
INTO THE
camp citadel bastazesqai bastazO

vn Pres Pas
21:35 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
anabaqmous sunebh anabathmos sumbainO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
when
YET he-BECAME
ON
THE
UP-STEPS stairs thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
it-befell
TO-BE-beING-BORNE him
35 And when he came upon the stairs, so it was, that he was borne of the soldiers for the violence of the people.
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
stratiwtwn dia stratiOtEs dia

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
bian bia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
by
THE
WARriors soldiers
THRU THE because-of plhqos plEthos

n_ Nom Sg n
FORCE violence
OF-THE
THRONG
21:36 hkolouqei gar to

akoloutheO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
krazontes krazO
aire airO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
36 For the multitude of the people followed after, crying, Away with him.
followED
for
THE
multitude
OF-THE
PEOPLE
CRYING
BE-LIFTING take-away-you !
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
him
21:37 mellwn
mellO
te te
Part
eisagesqai eisagO
vn Pres Pas
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parembolhn o parembolE ho
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
beING-ABOUT
BESIDES TO-BE-beING-INTO-LED INTO THE to-be-being-led-into ciliarcw chiliarchos

n_ Dat Sg m
camp citadel eipein legO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
PAUL
37 And as Paul was to be led into the castle, he said unto the chief captain, May I speak unto thee? Who said, Canst thou speak Greek?
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
pros pros
Prep
IS-sayING
to-THE
THOUSAND-chief IF captain de de
Conj
it-IS-allowed
to-ME me
TO-BE-sayING ANY anything
TOWARD
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ellhnisti ginwskeis hellEnisti ginOskO

YOU
THE
YET he-AVERRed
GREEK
YOU-ARE-KNOWING
21:38 ouk
ou
Part Neg
ara ara
Part Int
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aiguptios o aiguptios ho
pro pro
Prep
NOT
CONSEQUENTLY YOU
ARE
THE
EGYPTIAN
THE
BEFORE

pd Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn anastatwsas kai exagagwn hEmera anastatoO kai exagO

n_ Gen Pl f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
erhmon erEmos
a_ Acc Sg f
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
38 Art not thou that Egyptian, which before these days madest an uproar, and leddest out into the wilderness four thousand men that were murderers?
these
THE
DAYS
UP-STANDing AND raising-an-insurrection sikariwn sikarios

n_ Gen Pl m
OUT-LEADING leading-out
INTO THE
DESOLATE THE wilderness
tetrakiscilious andras twn tetrakischilioi anEr ho

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
FOUR-times-THOUSAND four-thousand
MEN
OF-THE
ASSASSINS
21:39 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
anqrwpos men anthrOpos men

n_ Nom Sg m Part
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ioudaios ioudaios
a_ Nom Sg m
said
YET THE
PAUL
human
INDEED AM
JUDA-an Jewish de de
Conj
tarseus ths tarseus ho

kilikias ouk kilikia ou

ashmou asEmos
a_ Gen Sg f
polews poliths deomai polis politEs deomai

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
39 But Paul said, I am a man [which am] a Jew of Tarsus, [a city] in Cilicia, a citizen of no mean city: and, I beseech thee, suffer me to speak unto the people.
TARSIAN
OF-THE
CILICIA
NOT
OF-UN-SIGNificant city of-insignificant ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
citizen
I-AM-beseechING
YET
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg


vn Aor Act Prep
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
YOU
permit permit-you !
to-ME me
TO-TALK to-speak
TOWARD THE
PEOPLE
AV
Acts 21 - Acts 22
21:40 epitreyantos de
epitrepO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
estws histEmi
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
permitting of-permitting-it
YET OF-him
THE
PAUL
HAVING-STOOD standing law laos

n_ Dat Sg m
ON
THE
anabaqmwn kateseisen th anabathmos kataseiO ho

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pollhs de polus de
a_ Gen Sg f Conj
sighs sigE
n_ Gen Sg f
40 And when he had given him licence, Paul stood on the stairs, and beckoned with the hand unto the people. And when there was made a great silence, he spake unto [them] in the Hebrew tongue, saying,
UP-STEPS stairs genomenhs ginomai
gesturES
to-THE
HAND
to-THE
PEOPLE
OF-much of-vast
YET HUSH
prosefwnhsen prosphOneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ebraidi dialektw legwn hebrais dialektos legO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
BECOMING
he-TOWARD-SOUNDS to-THE he-shouts-to-them
HEBREW
dialect vernacular
sayING
AV
Acts 22
22:1 andres adelfoi kai pateres akousate mou

anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
kai
Conj
patEr
n_ Voc Pl m
akouO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
nuni nuni
Adv
MEN men ! apologias apologia

n_ Gen Sg f
brothers brethren !
AND
FATHERS fathers !
HEAR hear-ye !
OF-ME
THE
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
. Men, brethren, and fathers, hear ye my defence [which I make] now unto you.
NOW
FROM-say defense
22:2 akousantes de
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
de
Conj
oti th hoti ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
ebraidi dialektw prosefwnei hebrais dialektos prosphOneO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg
autois mallon autos mallon

pp Dat Pl m Adv
HEARing
YET that
to-THE
HEBREW
dialect vernacular
he-TOWARD-SOUNDED to-them he-shouted-to them
RATHER the-more
(And when they heard that he spake in the Hebrew tongue to them, they kept the more silence: and he saith,)
parescon parechO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hsucian kai fhsin hEsuchia kai phEmi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEY-had-tenderED QUIETness they-tendered
AND
he-IS-AVERRING
22:3 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ioudaios gegennhmenos ioudaios gennaO

a_ Nom Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tarsw ths tarsos ho

AM
MAN
JUDA-an Jewish de de
Conj
HAVING-been-generatED IN having-been-born th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
TARSUS
OF-THE
kilikias anateqrammenos kilikia anatrephO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
para para
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
CILICIA
HAVING-been-UP-NURTURED YET IN having-been-reared kata kata

Prep
THE
city
this
BESIDE THE
FEET
. I am verily a man [which am] a Jew, born in Tarsus, [a city] in Cilicia, yet brought up in this city at the feet of Gamaliel, [and] taught according to the perfect manner of the law of the fathers, and was zealous toward God, as ye all are this day.
gamalihl pepaideumenos gamaliEl paideuO

ni proper vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
akribeian tou akribeia ho

patrwou nomou patrOos nomos

zhlwths zElOtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
of-GAMALIEL of-Gamaliel uparcwn huparchO
HAVING-been-disciplinED according-to EXACTitude having-been-trained tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
hereditary
LAW
BOILer zealous
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
shmeron sEmeron
Adv
OF-THE
God
according-AS ALL
YOU(p) ye
ARE
toDAY
22:4 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m

odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
ediwxa diOkO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
acri qanatou desmeuwn achri thanatos desmeuO

Prep n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
WHO
this
THE
WAY
I-CHASE I-persecute
UNTIL OF-DEATH death kai gunaikas kai gunE

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
BINDING
AND
And I persecuted this way unto the death, binding and delivering into prisons both men and women.
eis eis
Prep
fulakas phulakE
n_ Acc Pl f
andras te anEr te
n_ Acc Pl m Part
BESIDE-GIVING giving-over
INTO GUARD-houses MEN jails arciereus archiereus

n_ Nom Sg m
BESIDES AND bsboth marturei martureO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WOMEN
22:5 ws kai o
hOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai pan kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AS
AND also
THE
chief-SACRED-one IS-witnessING chief-priest is-testifying wn hos

pr Gen Pl m
to-ME
AND
EVERY entire pros pros

Prep
THE
presbuterion par presbuterion para

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
kai epistolas dexamenos kai epistolE dechomai

Conj n_ Acc Pl f vp Aor midD Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
As also the high priest doth bear me witness, and all the estate of the elders: from whom also I received letters unto the brethren, and went to Damascus, to bring them which were there bound unto Jerusalem, for to be punished.
SENIORship eldership eis eis

Prep
BESIDE WHOM whom(p)
AND also
letters
RECEIVing
TOWARD THE
brothers brethren
damaskon eporeuomhn damaskos poreuomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 1 Sg
axwn agO
vp Fut Act Nom Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
ekeise ontas ekeise eimi

Adv vp Pres vxx Acc Pl m
INTO DAMASCUS
I-WENT
LEADING
AND also
THE-ones the-ones
there-ly there
BEING
dedemenous deO
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm ina ierosoluma hina

ni proper Conj
timwrhqwsin timOreO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
HAVING-been-BOUND INTO JERUSALEM
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-punishED
22:6 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
poreuomenw poreuomai
kai eggizonti kai eggizO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
damaskw peri damaskos peri

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
YET to-ME
to-GOING going
AND
to-NEARING drawing-near
to-THE
DAMASCUS
ABOUT
And it came to pass, that, as I made my journey, and was come nigh unto Damascus about noon, suddenly there shone from heaven a great light
AV
Acts 22
meshmbrian exaifnhs ek mesEmbria exaiphnEs ek

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ouranou periastrayai ouranos periastraptO

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
ikanon hikanos
a_ Nom Sg n
peri peri
Prep
round about me.
MID-DAY midday eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
suddenly
OUT OF-THE
heaven
TO-ABOUT-GLEAM-FLING LIGHT to-flash-about
enough ABOUT considerable
ME
22:7 epesa
piptO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
te te
Part
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
edafos kai hkousa edaphos kai akouO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
legoushs legO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
I-FALL
BESIDES INTO THE
LEVEL flat
AND
I-HEAR
OF-SOUND sayING voice
to-ME
And I fell unto the ground, and heard a voice saying unto me, Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou me?
saoul saoul
ni proper
saoul saoul
ni proper
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
diwkeis diOkO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
SAUL ( Heb. ) SAUL ( Heb. ) ANY Saul Saul why ?
ME
YOU-ARE-CHASING you-are-persecuting ei eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
22:8 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
apekriqhn tis apokrinomai tis

vi Aor midD 1 Sg pi Nom Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
te te
Part
pros pros
Prep
WH
eme
I
NA
YET answerED
ANY who ?
YOU-ARE
Master ! Lord !
He-said
BESIDES TOWARD
And I answered, Who art thou, Lord? And he said unto me, I am Jesus of Nazareth, whom thou persecutest.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nazwraios on nazOraios hos

su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
diwkeis diOkO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ME
AM
JESUS
THE
NAZARENE
WHOM
YOU
ARE-CHASING are-persecuting
9
22:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ontes eimi
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
men men
Part
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
eqeasanto theaomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
THE-ones the-ones thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YET TOGETHER to-ME togetherwith me fwnhn ouk phOnE ou

BEING
THE
INDEED LIGHT
gaze gaze-at
And they that were with me saw indeed the light, and were afraid; but they heard not the voice of him that spake to me.
de de
Conj
hkousan tou akouO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Gen Sg m
lalountos laleO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
YET SOUND voice de de

Conj
NOT
THEY-HEAR OF-THE
One-TALKING one-speaking kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
to-ME
22:10 eipon
legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihsw poieO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
I-said
YET ANY what ? anastas anistEmi
I-SHALL-BE-DOING Master ! Lord ! poreuou poreuomai

THE
YET Master Lord
said
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eis eis
Prep
damaskon kakei damaskos kakei

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Con
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
10 And I said, What shall I do, Lord? And the Lord said unto me, Arise, and go into Damascus; and there it shall be told thee of all things which are appointed for thee to do.
TOWARD ME
UP-STANDing rising peri peri

Prep
YOU-BE-GOING be-you-going ! pantwn wn pas hos

INTO DAMASCUS
AND-there to-YOU
lalhqhsetai laleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
tetaktai soi tassO su

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg pp 2 Dat Sg
poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED ABOUT ALL it-shall-be-being-spoken concerning
WHICH
HAS-been-SET to-YOU
TO-DO
22:11 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
eneblepon apo emblepO apo

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg n
AS
YET NOT
I-IN-lookED I-looked-at
FROM THE
esteem glory moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
OF-THE
LIGHT
that
11 And when I could not see for the glory of that light, being led by the hand of them that were with me, I came into Damascus.
ceiragwgoumenos upo twn cheiragOgeO hupo ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl m
sunontwn suneimi
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
damaskon damaskos
n_ Acc Sg f
beING-HAND-LED being-led-by-the-hand
by
THE-ones the-ones anhr anEr
TOGETHER-BEING to-ME being-togetherwith me eulabhs kata eulabEs kata

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
I-CAME
INTO DAMASCUS
22:12 ananias
hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
marturoumenos martureO
n_ Nom Sg m
ANANIAS
YET ANY certain
MAN
pious
according-to THE
LAW
beING-witnessED being-attested
12 And one Ananias, a devout man according to the law, having a good report of all the Jews which dwelt [there],
upo pantwn twn hupo pas ho

Prep a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
katoikountwn ioudaiwn katoikeO ioudaios

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
by
ALL
OF-THE the
DOWN-HOMING dwelling-there
JUDA-ans Jews
AV
Acts 22
22:13 elqwn
erchomai
pros pros
Prep
WH
eme
NA
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai epistas kai ephistEmi

eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
COMING
TOWARD
ME
AND
ON-STANDing standing-by th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
he-said said
to-ME
13 Came unto me, and stood, and said unto me, Brother Saul, receive thy sight. And the same hour I looked up upon him.
saoul saoul
ni proper
adelfe anableyon adelphos anablepO

kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
wra hOra
n_ Dat Sg f
anebleya eis anablepO eis

SAUL ( Heb. ) brother ! Saul auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
UP-look AND-I receive-sight-you !
to-SAME
THE
HOUR
UP-look look-up
INTO
him
22:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

proeceirisato procheirizomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
THE
YET he-said
THE
God
OF-THE
FATHERS
OF-US
BEFORE-HANDS fixes-upon-beforehand dikaion kai dikaios kai

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg

kai idein kai eidO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
14 And he said, The God of our fathers hath chosen thee, that thou shouldest know his will, and see that Just One, and shouldest hear the voice of his mouth.
YOU
TO-KNOW
THE
WILL
OF-Him
AND
TO-BE-PERCEIVING THE to-be-being-aquainted-with
JUST-One just-one
AND
akousai fwnhn ek akouO phOnE ek

vn Aor Act n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

TO-HEAR
SOUND voice
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
22:15 oti esh

hoti
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
martus martus
n_ Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pros pros
Prep
pantas anqrwpous wn pas anthrOpos hos

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pr Gen Pl n
15 For thou shalt be his witness unto all men of what thou hast seen and heard.
that
YOU-SHALL-BE witness
to-Him
TOWARD ALL
humans
OF-WHICH of-which(p)
ewrakas horaO
kai hkousas kai akouO

YOU-HAVE-SEEN AND
HEAR
22:16 kai nun ti

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
tis
pi Acc Sg n
melleis mellO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
anastas anistEmi
baptisai baptizO
vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
kai apolousai kai apolouO

Conj vm Aor Mid 2 Sg
AND
NOW ANY why ?
YOU-ARE-beING-ABOUT UP-STANDing you-are-defering rising epikalesamenos to epikaleO ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
be-DIPizED AND be-you-baptized ! onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
be-FROM-BATHED be-you-bathed-off !
16 And now why tarriest thou? arise, and be baptized, and wash away thy sins, calling on the name of the Lord.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
amartias sou hamartia su

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
misses sins
OF-YOU
ON-CALLing invoking
THE
NAME
OF-Him
22:17 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
upostreyanti eis hupostrephO eis

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m Prep
ierousalhm kai proseucomenou ierosoluma kai proseuchomai

ni proper Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m
it-BECAME it-occurred mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
YET to-ME
reTURNing
INTO JERUSALEM
AND
OF-prayING
17 And it came to pass, that, when I was come again to Jerusalem, even while I prayed in the temple, I was in a trance;
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
ekstasei ekstasis
n_ Dat Sg f
ME
IN
THE
SACRED-place TO-BE-BECOMING ME sanctuary auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
IN
OUT-STANDing ecstasy kai exelqe kai exerchomai

22:18 kai idein

kai
Conj
eidO
vn 2Aor Act
legonta legO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
speuson speudO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
AND
TO-BE-PERCEIVING Him
sayING
to-ME
BE-DILIGENT hurry-you !
AND
BE-OUT-COMING IN be-you-coming-out ! marturian marturia

n_ Acc Sg f
18 And saw him saying unto me, Make haste, and get thee quickly out of Jerusalem: for they will not receive thy testimony concerning me.
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
ex ek
Prep
ierousalhm dioti ierosoluma dioti

ni proper Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
paradexontai paradechomai
vi Fut midD/pasD 3 Pl
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
SWIFTness OUT of-JERUSALEM of-Jerusalem peri peri

Prep
THRU-that NOT because-that
THEY-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-RECEIVING OF-YOU they-shall-be-assenting-to
witness testimony
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ABOUT ME concerning
AV
Acts 22
22:19 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
epistantai epistamai
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
AND-I
said
Master ! Lord !
they
ARE-adeptING that are-being-versed-in-the-fact tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
WAS
19 And I said, Lord, they know that I imprisoned and beat in every synagogue them that believed on thee:
fulakizwn phulakizO
kai derwn kai derO

kata kata
Prep
sunagwgas sunagOgE
n_ Acc Pl f
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pisteuontas pisteuO
GUARDizING jailing epi se epi su

Prep pp 2 Acc Sg
AND
SKINNING lashing
according-to THE
TOGETHER-LEADS THE synagogues
ON
YOU
22:20 kai ote execunneto

kai
Conj
hote
Adv
ekcheO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
aima haima
n_ Nom Sg n
stefanou tou stephanos ho

marturos sou martus su

kai kai
Conj
AND
when
was-OUT-POURED THE was-shed efestws ephistEmi

BLOOD
OF-Stephen
THE
witness
OF-YOU
AND also
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
kai suneudokwn kai suneudokeO

kai fulasswn kai phulassO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
20 And when the blood of thy martyr Stephen was shed, I also was standing by, and consenting unto his death, and kept the raiment of them that slew him.
SAME myself imatia himation

n_ Acc Pl n
I-WAS
HAVING-ON-STOOD AND standing-by anairountwn auton anaireO autos

TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING AND endorsing-it
GUARDING
THE
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
pp Acc Sg m
GARMENTS OF-THE
ones-UP-LIFTING ones-assassinating pros pros

Prep
him
22:21 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
poreuou poreuomai
oti egw hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
eis eis
Prep
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
makran makran
Adv
21 And he said unto me, Depart: for I will send thee far hence unto the Gentiles.
AND
He-said
TOWARD ME
that
INTO NATIONS
FAR afar
exapostelw exapostellO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
SHALL-BE-OUT-FROM-PUTTING YOU shall-be-delegating
22:22 hkouon
akouO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
acri toutou tou achri houtos ho

Prep pd Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ephran kai epairO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-HEARD YET OF-him him fwnhn autwn phOnE autos

UNTIL this
THE
saying word ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
THEY-ON-LIFT THE they-lift-up toiouton ou toioutos ou

pd Acc Sg m Part Neg
legontes legO
aire airO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
apo apo
Prep
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
22 . And they gave him audience unto this word, and [then] lifted up their voices, and said, Away with such a [fellow] from the earth: for it is not fit that he should live.
SOUND voice
OF-them
sayING
BE-LIFTING take-away-you ! zhn zaO

vn Pres Act
FROM THE
LAND earth
THE
such such-one
NOT
gar kaqhken gar kathEkO

Conj vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
for
it-befittED
him
TO-BE-LIVING
22:23 kraugazontwn te
kraugazO
te
Part
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai riptountwn ta kai rhiptO ho

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
imatia himation
n_ Acc Pl n
kai koniorton kai koniortos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
23 And as they cried out, and cast off [their] clothes, and threw dust into the air,
OF-clamorING
BESIDES them
AND
OF-TOSSING
THE
GARMENTS AND
DUST
ballontwn ballO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aera aEr
n_ Acc Sg m
CASTING
INTO THE
AIR
22:24 ekeleusen o
keleuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
eisagesqai eisagO
vn Pres Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parembolhn parembolE
n_ Acc Sg f
ORDERS
THE
THOUSAND-chief TO-BE-beING-INTO-LED him captain to-be-being-led-into auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
INTO THE
camp citadel
eipas legO
mastixin anetazesqai mastix anetazO

n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Pas
ina hina
Conj
epignw epiginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
24 The chief captain commanded him to be brought into the castle, and bade that he should be examined by scourging; that he might know wherefore they cried so against him.
saying
to-scourges
TO-BE-beING-UP-INTERROGATED him to-be-being-interrogated
THAT he-MAY-BE-ON-KNOWING he-may-be-recognizing
AV
Acts 22
di dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
aitian outws epefwnoun aitia houtOs epiphOneO

n_ Acc Sg f Adv vi impf Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
cause
thus
THEY-ON-SOUNDED to-him they-retorted auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
22:25 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
proeteinan proteinO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
imasin himas
n_ Dat Pl m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
AS
YET THEY-BEFORE-STRETCH him they-stretch-out ekatontarcon o hekatontarchEs ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
STRAPS thongs ei ei
Cond
said
TOWARD THE
estwta histEmi
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpon rwmaion kai anthrOpos rhOmaios kai

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Conj
25 And as they bound him with thongs, Paul said unto the centurion that stood by, Is it lawful for you to scourge a man that is a Roman, and uncondemned?
THE
PAUL
IF
human
ROMAN
AND
akatakriton exestin akatakritos exesti

a_ Acc Sg m vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mastizein mastizO
vn Pres Act
UN-condemned uncondemned
it-IS-allowed
to-YOU(p) ye o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-scourgING
22:26 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ekatontarchs proselqwn hekatontarchEs proserchomai

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
n_ Dat Sg m
HEARing hearing-it aphggeilen apaggellO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
YET THE
HUNDRED-chief centurion ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
to-THE the o ho
THOUSAND-chief captain gar gar

Conj
26 When the centurion heard [that], he went and told the chief captain, saying, Take heed what thou doest: for this man is a Roman.
legwn legO
melleis mellO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
t_ Nom Sg m
he-FROM-MESSAGES sayING reports anqrwpos outos anthrOpos houtos

ANY what ?
YOU-ARE-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-DOING THE
for
rwmaios estin rhOmaios eimi

human
this
ROMAN
IS
22:27 proselqwn
proserchomai
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
lege legO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
TOWARD-COMING approaching su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
YET THE
THOUSAND-chief said captain o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-him
to-ME me
27 Then the chief captain came, and said unto him, Tell me, art thou a Roman? He said, Yea.
rwmaios ei rhOmaios eimi

de de
Conj
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
nai nai
Part
YOU
ROMAN
ARE
THE
YET he-AVERRed
YEA yes pollou kefalaiou thn polus kephalaion ho

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n t_ Acc Sg f
28 And the chief captain answered, With a great sum obtained I this freedom. And Paul said, But I was [free] born.
22:28 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
answerED
YET THE
THOUSAND-chief I captain de de
Conj
OF-much of-vast paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
HEAD (sum) sum egw egO
THE
politeian tauthn ekthsamhn o politeia houtos ktaomai ho

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 1 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
pp 1 Nom Sg
citizenship
this
ACQUIRE
THE
YET PAUL
AVERRed
YET AND also
gegennhmai gennaO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
HAVE-been-generatED have-been-born-so
22:29 euqews oun

eutheOs
Adv
oun
Conj
apesthsan ap aphistEmi apo

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mellontes mellO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
immediately
THEN FROM-STAND withdraw kai o kai ho

Conj
FROM him
THE
ones-beING-ABOUT him ones-being-about efobhqh phobeO

vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
anetazein anetazO
vn Pres Act
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epignous epiginOskO
oti hoti
Conj
29 Then straightway they departed from him which should have examined him: and the chief captain also was afraid, after he knew that he was a Roman, and because he had bound him.
t_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-UP-INTERROGATING AND to-be-interrogating also rwmaios estin rhOmaios eimi

THE
THOUSAND-chief YET WAS-afraid captain hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
that
kai oti auton kai hoti autos

Conj Conj pp Acc Sg m
dedekws deO
ROMAN
he-IS
AND
that
him by-him
he-WAS
HAVING-BOUND
AV
Acts 22 - Acts 23
22:30 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
boulomenos boulomai
asfales to asphalEs ho
a_ Acc Sg n t_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW intendING resolving upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
TO-KNOW
THE
UN-TOTTER certainty
THE
ANY why ?
kathgoreitai katEgoreO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ioudaiwn elusen ioudaios luO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai ekeleusen kai keleuO

he-IS-beING-accusED by
THE
JUDA-ans Jews arciereis archiereus

n_ Acc Pl m
he-LOOSES
him
AND
ORDERS
30 On the morrow, because he would have known the certainty wherefore he was accused of the Jews, he loosed him from [his] bands, and commanded the chief priests and all their council to appear, and brought Paul down, and set him before them.
vn 2Aor Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kai pan kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sunedrion kai sunedrion kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
TO-BE-TOGETHER-COMING THE to-be-coming-together katagagwn katagO

chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests eis eis

Prep
EVERY entire autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
THE
Sanhedrin
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon esthsen paulos histEmi

DOWN-LEADING leading-down
THE
PAUL
he-STANDS INTO them he-stands-him
AV
Acts 23
23:1 atenisas
atenizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
NA
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw eipen sunedrion legO

n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
STRETCHing looking-intently-at adelfoi egw adelphos egO

n_ Voc Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg
YET
THE
PAUL
to-THE the
Sanhedrin
said
MEN men ! qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
. And Paul, earnestly beholding the council, said, Men [and] brethren, I have lived in all good conscience before God until this day.
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
suneidhsei agaqh suneidEsis agathos

pepoliteumai tw politeuomai ho
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
acri achri
Prep
brothers brethren !
to-EVERY conscience to-all hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
GOOD
HAVE-been-citizen
to-THE
God
UNTIL
tauths ths houtos ho

this
THE
DAY
23:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
epetaxen tois epitassO ho

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
And the high priest Ananias commanded them that stood by him to smite him on the mouth.
THE
YET chief-SACRED-one ANANIAS chief-priest autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
enjoins
to-THE the
ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD to-him ones-standing-beside him
tuptein tuptO
vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Acc Sg n
TO-BE-BEATING OF-him
THE
MOUTH
23:3 tote o
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tuptein tuptO
vn Pres Act
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
then
THE
PAUL
TOWARD him
said
TO-BE-BEATING YOU
IS-beING-ABOUT
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
toice toichos
n_ Voc Sg m
kekoniamene koniaO
vp Perf Pas Voc Sg m
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
kaqh kathEmai
vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg Att
Then said Paul unto him, God shall smite thee, [thou] whited wall: for sittest thou to judge me after the law, and commandest me to be smitten contrary to the law?
THE
God
WALL !
HAVING-been-white-washED ! AND having-been-whitewashed ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YOU
ARE-sittING
krinwn krinO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kata kata
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai paranomwn kai paranomeO

keleueis keleuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
JUDGING
ME
according-to THE
LAW
AND
beING-BESIDE-LAW YOU-ARE-ORDERING illegally
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tuptesqai tuptO
vn Pres Pas
ME
TO-BE-beING-BEATEN
23:4 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
parestwtes paristEmi
vp Perf Act Nom Pl m Con
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arcierea archiereus
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
And they that stood by said, Revilest thou God's high priest?
THE
YET ones-HAVING-BESIDE-STOOD say ones-standing-by
THE
chief-SACRED-one OF-THE chief-priest
God
loidoreis loidoreO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
YOU-ARE-say-SPEARING you-are-reviling
23:5 efh
phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
te te
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
hdein eidO
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
adelfoi oti estin adelphos hoti eimi

n_ Voc Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AVERRed
BESIDES THE
PAUL
NOT
I-HAD-PERCEIVED brothers I-was-aware brethren ! laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
that
he-IS
Then said Paul, I wist not, brethren, that he was the high priest: for it is written, Thou shalt not speak evil of the ruler of thy people.
n_ Nom Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar oti arconta tou gar hoti archOn ho

Conj Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
chief-SACRED-one it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for chief-priest ereis ereO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg
that
chief
OF-THE
PEOPLE
OF-YOU
NOT
kakws kakOs
Adv
YOU-SHALL-BE-declarING EVILly
23:6 gnous
ginOskO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
meros meros
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
KNOWING
YET THE
PAUL
that
THE
ONE
PART party
IS
. But when Paul perceived that the one part were Sadducees, and the other Pharisees, he cried out in the council, Men [and] brethren, I
AV
Acts 23
saddoukaiwn to saddoukaios ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
eteron heteros
a_ Nom Sg n
farisaiwn ekrazen pharisaios krazO

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw sunedrion
n_ Dat Sg n
OF-SADDUCEES
THE
YET DIFFERENT OF-PHARISEES he-CRIED cried farisaios eimi pharisaios eimi

IN
THE
Sanhedrin
am a Pharisee, the son of a Pharisee: of the hope and resurrection of the dead I am called in question.
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
adelfoi egw adelphos egO

n_ Voc Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
farisaiwn peri pharisaios peri

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
MEN men !
brothers brethren !
PHARISEE
NA
AM
SON
OF-PHARISEES ABOUT EXPECTATION concerning
kai anastasews nekrwn kai anastasis nekros

Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
krinomai krinO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
AND
UP-STANDing resurrection de de
Conj
OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
WH
I
NA
AM-beING-JUDGED
23:7 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
lalountos
eipontos legO
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
stasis stasis
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
this
YET OF-him
sayING
BECAME STANDing there-came-to-be commotion plhqos plEthos

n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
And when he had so said, there arose a dissension between the Pharisees and the Sadducees: and the multitude was divided.
farisaiwn kai saddoukaiwn kai escisqh pharisaios kai saddoukaios kai schizO
n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
PHARISEES
AND
SADDUCEES
NA
AND
IS-SPLIT is-rent
THE
multitude
23:8 saddoukaioi
saddoukaios
n_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
gar legousin mh gar legO mE

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl Part Neg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
anastasin mhte anastasis mEte

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
SADDUCEES
INDEED
for
ARE-sayING
NO
TO-BE
NO-BESIDES nor
For the Sadducees say that there is no resurrection, neither angel, nor spirit: but the Pharisees confess both.
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
mhte mEte
Conj
pneuma farisaioi de pneuma pharisaios de

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Nom Pl m Conj
omologousin ta homologeO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
amfotera amphoteroi
a_ Acc Pl n
MESSENGER NO-BESIDES spirit nor
PHARISEES
YET ARE-avowING
THE
both
23:9 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kraugh kraugE
n_ Nom Sg f
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
kai anastantes kai anistEmi

tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
grammatewn grammateus
n_ Gen Pl m
BECAME occurred tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
YET clamor
GREAT
AND
UP-STANDing rising
ANY some legontes legO
OF-THE
WRITers scribes kakon kakos

a_ Acc Sg n
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
farisaiwn diemaconto pharisaios diamachomai

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
And there arose a great cry: and the scribes [that were] of the Pharisees'part arose, and strove, saying, We find no evil in this man: but if a spirit or an angel hath spoken to him, let us not fight against God.
OF-THE
PART party en en
Prep
OF-THE
PHARISEES
THEY-THRU-FOUGHT sayING fought-it-out de de

Conj
NOT-YET-ONE EVIL nothing elalhsen autw laleO autos

euriskomen heuriskO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw toutw ei anthrOpos houtos ei

n_ Dat Sg m pd Dat Sg m Cond
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
h E
Part
WE-ARE-FINDING IN
THE
human
this
IF
YET spirit
TALKS speaks
to-him
OR
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
MESSENGER
23:10 pollhs de
polus
a_ Gen Sg f
de
Conj
ginomenhs ginomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg f
stasews fobhqeis stasis phobeO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor pasD Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
OF-much
YET BECOMING occurring o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
STANDing commotion paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
BEING-afraid
THE
THOUSAND-chief NO captain strateuma strateuma

n_ Acc Sg n
diaspasqh diaspaO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
up autwn hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Pl m
ekeleusen to keleuO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
SHOULD-BE-BEING-THRU-PULLED THE should-be-being-pulled-to-pieces kataban katabainO

vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg n
PAUL
by
them
ORDERS
THE
NA
WAR-troop troop eis eis

Prep
10 And when there arose a great dissension, the chief captain, fearing lest Paul should have been pulled in pieces of them, commanded the soldiers to go down, and to take him by force from among them, and to bring [him] into the castle.
arpasai harpazO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
agein agO
vn Pres Act
te te
Part
DOWN-STEPPing descending thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
TO-SNATCH him
OUT OF-MIDst
OF-them
TO-BE-LEADING to-be-leading-him
BESIDES
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
camp citadel
AV
Acts 23
23:11 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epioush epeimi
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
epistas ephistEmi
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to-THE
YET ON-BEING ensuing
NIGHT
ON-STANDing standing-by ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-him him peri peri

Prep
THE
Master Lord eis eis

Prep
said
qarsei tharseO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ws gar diemarturw hOs gar diamarturomai

Adv Conj vi Aor midD 2 Sg
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ierousalhm outws ierosoluma houtOs

ni proper Adv
11 And the night following the Lord stood by him, and said, Be of good cheer, Paul: for as thou hast testified of me in Jerusalem, so must thou bear witness also at Rome.
BE-COURAGE-ING AS be-you-having-courage ! se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
for
YOU-THRU-witness THE you-certify the(p) rwmhn rhOmE

n_ Acc Sg f
ABOUT ME concerning
INTO JERUSALEM
thus
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
marturhsai martureO
vn Aor Act
YOU
it-IS-BINDING must
AND also de de
Conj
INTO ROME
TO-witness to-testify sustrofhn sustrophE

n_ Acc Sg f
23:12 genomenhs
ginomai
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
poihsantes poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ioudaios
a_ Nom Pl m
OF-BECOMING
YET DAY
making
TOGETHER-TURN THE conspiracy mhte mEte

Conj
JUDA-ans Jews piein pinO

vn 2Aor Act
aneqematisan eautous legontes anathematizO heautou legO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
mhte mEte
Conj
ews heOs
Conj
12 . And when it was day, certain of the Jews banded together, and bound themselves under a curse, saying that they would neither eat nor drink till they had killed Paul.
anathematize
selves themselves apokteinwsin apokteinO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
sayING
NO-BESIDES TO-BE-EATING NO-BESIDES TO-BE-DRINKING TILL neither nor ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
paulon paulos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-WHICH THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING THE which they-may-be-killing
PAUL
23:13 hsan
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
de de
Conj
pleious polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
tesserakonta oi tesserakonta ho
ni numeral t_ Nom Pl m

sunwmosian sunOmosia
n_ Acc Sg f
13 And they were more than forty which had made this conspiracy.
WERE there-were poihsamenoi poieO

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
YET MORE more-than
FOUR-TY forty
THE the-ones
this
THE
TOGETHER-SWEARing cabal
making
23:14 oitines proselqontes tois

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
proserchomai
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
n_ Dat Pl m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
presbuterois eipan presbuteros legO

a_ Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
WHO-ANY who-any
to-THE the
to-THE the
SENIORS elders
say
anaqemati aneqematisamen eautous mhdenos anathema anathematizO heautou mEdeis

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m a_ Gen Sg n
geusasqai ews ou geuomai heOs hos

vn Aor midD Conj pr Gen Sg m
14 And they came to the chief priests and elders, and said, We have bound ourselves under a great curse, that we will eat nothing until we have slain Paul.
to-anathema
WE-anathematize
selves ourselves paulon paulos

n_ Acc Sg m
OF-NO-YET-ONE TO-TASTE nothing
TILL
OF-WHICH which
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
WE-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING THE we-may-be-killing
PAUL
23:15 nun oun

nun
Adv
oun
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
emfanisate tw emphanizO ho
vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
n_ Dat Sg m
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
sunedriw sunedrion
n_ Dat Sg n
NOW THEN YOU(p) ye opws hopOs

Adv
IN-APPEARize disclose-ye ! auton autos
to-THE the eis eis

Prep
THOUSAND-chief TOGETHER to-THE captain with-the umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
Sanhedrin
katagagh katagO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ws mellontas hOs mellO

diaginwskein diaginOskO
vn Pres Act
pp Acc Sg m
15 Now therefore ye with the council signify to the chief captain that he bring him down unto you to morrow, as though ye would enquire something more perfectly concerning him: and we, or ever he come near, are ready to kill him.
WHICH-how he-MAY-BE-DOWN-LEADING him so-that he-may-be-leading-down akribesteron ta akribOs ho

Adv Con t_ Acc Pl n
INTO YOU(p) ye hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
AS
beING-ABOUT
TO-BE-investigatING
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eggisai eggizO
vn Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE the(p)
ABOUT him concerning tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
WE
YET BEFORE THE
TO-NEAR him to-draw-near
etoimoi esmen hetoimos eimi

anelein anaireO
vn 2Aor Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
READY
ARE
OF-THE
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING him to-be-assassinating
AV
Acts 23
23:16 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
adelfhs paulou adelphE paulos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enedran enedra
n_ Acc Sg f
HEARing
YET THE
SON
OF-THE
sister
OF-PAUL
THE
ambush
16 And when Paul's sister's son heard of their lying in wait, he went and entered into the castle, and told Paul.
paragenomenos kai eiselqwn paraginomai kai eiserchomai

vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parembolhn aphggeilen parembolE apaggellO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
BESIDE-BECOMING coming-along paulw paulos

n_ Dat Sg m
AND
INTO THE
camp citadel
he-FROM-MESSAGES to-THE reports-it
PAUL
23:17 proskalesamenos de
proskaleomai
de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ekatontarcwn efh hekatontarchEs phEmi

n_ Gen Pl m vi impf vxx 3 Sg
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
WH
PAUL
NA
ONE
OF-THE
HUNDRED-chiefs centurions ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
he-AVERRed averred
17 Then Paul called one of the centurions unto [him], and said, Bring this young man unto the chief captain: for he hath a certain thing to tell him.
neanian neanias
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
apage
apagage apagO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
pros pros
Prep
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YOUNG(m) (man) this young-man gar apaggeilai gar apaggellO

Conj vn Aor Act
BE-FROM-LEADING be-you-leading-away ! ti tis

px Acc Sg n
TOWARD THE
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
he-IS-HAVING for
TO-FROM-MESSAGE ANY to-report something men men

Part
to-him
23:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
paralabwn paralambanO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hgagen agO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
INDEED THEN BESIDE-GETTING taking-along o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
him
LED he-led-him
TOWARD THE
THOUSAND-chief captain hrwthsen erOtaO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai fhsin kai phEmi

desmios paulos desmios paulos

proskalesamenos me proskaleomai egO

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
18 So he took him, and brought [him] to the chief captain, and said, Paul the prisoner called me unto [him], and prayed me to bring this young man unto thee, who hath something to say unto thee.
AND
he-IS-AVERRING THE is-averring

WH
BOUND-one prisoner
NA
PAUL
TOWARD-CALLing calling-to-him agagein agO

vn 2Aor Act
ME
asks asks-me econta echO


neanian
neaniskon neaniskos
n_ Acc Sg m
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
this
THE
YOUTH
TO-BE-LEADING TOWARD YOU
HAVING one-having
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
lalhsai soi laleO su

vn Aor Act pp 2 Dat Sg
ANY something
TO-TALK to-speak
to-YOU
23:19 epilabomenos
epilambanomai
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
kai anacwrhsas kai anachOreO

ON-GETTING taking-hold kat kata

Prep
YET OF-THE
HAND
OF-him
THE
THOUSAND-chief AND captain eceis echO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
UP-SPACing retiring
19 Then the chief captain took him by the hand, and went [with him] aside privately, and asked [him], What is that thou hast to tell me?
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
apaggeilai apaggellO
vn Aor Act
according-to OWN
he-ASCERTAINED-UP ANY inquired-to-ascertain what ?
IS it-is
WHICH
YOU-ARE-HAVING TO-FROM-MESSAGE to-report
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-ME
23:20 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi suneqento ioudaios suntithEmi

a_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
erwthsai se erOtaO su
he-said
YET that
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
TOGETHER-PLACED OF-THE agreed eis eis

Prep
TO-ask
YOU
opws hopOs
Adv
aurion aurion
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon katagaghs paulos katagO

n_ Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sunedrion ws sunedrion hOs

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
20 And he said, The Jews have agreed to desire thee that thou wouldest bring down Paul to morrow into the council, as though they would enquire somewhat of him more perfectly.
WHICH-how MORROW THE so-that tomorrow
PAUL
YOU-MAY-BE-DOWN-LEADING INTO THE you-may-be-leading-down
Sanhedrin
AS
AV
Acts 23
WH
mellwn
NA
mellon mellO
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
akribesteron punqanesqai akribOs punthanomai

Adv Con vn Pres midD/pasD
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
beING-ABOUT
ANY somewhat peisqhs peithO

vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
TO-BE-ASCERTAINING-UP ABOUT him to-ascertain concerning autois enedreuousin gar auton autos enedreuO gar autos
pp Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj pp Acc Sg m
21 But do not thou yield unto them: for there lie in wait for him of them more than forty men, which have bound themselves with an oath, that they will neither eat nor drink till they have killed him: and now are they ready, looking for a promise from thee.
23:21 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
YOU
THEN NO
SHOULD-BE-BEING-PERSUADED to-them
ARE-ambushING
for
him
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
pleious polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
tesserakonta oitines aneqematisan eautous tesserakonta hostis anathematizO heautou

ni numeral pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m
OUT OF-them
MEN
MORE more-than mhte mEte

Conj
FOUR-TY forty piein pinO

vn 2Aor Act
WHO-ANY who-any ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
anathematize
selves themselves auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
mhte mEte
Conj
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
anelwsin anaireO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
NO-BESIDES TO-BE-EATING NO-BESIDES TO-BE-DRINKING TILL neither nor kai nun eisin kai nun eimi
Conj Adv vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
OF-WHICH THEY-MAY-BE-UP-LIFTING him which they-may-be-assassinating apo apo

Prep
etoimoi prosdecomenoi hetoimos prosdechomai

a_ Nom Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
NOW THEY-ARE
READY
TOWARD-RECEIVING anticipating ciliarcos chiliarchos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
FROM YOU
promise
23:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
apelusen apoluO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
neaniskon paraggeilas neaniskos paraggellO

n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
INDEED THEN THOUSAND-chief FROM-LOOSES THE captain dismisses eklalhsai oti tauta eklaleO hoti houtos
vn Aor Act Conj pd Acc Pl n
YOUTH
WH NA
charging charging-him me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
22 So the chief captain [then] let the young man depart, and charged [him, See thou] tell no man that thou hast shewed these things to me.
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
enefanisas emphanizO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
pros pros
Prep
eme
to-NO-YET-ONE TO-OUT-TALK to-no-one to-speak-out
that
these YOU-IN-APPEARize TOWARD these-things you-disclose

WH
ME
23:23 kai proskalesamenos

kai
Conj
tinas duo
WH
NA
proskaleomai
duo duo
ni numeral
NA
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ekatontarcwn hekatontarchEs
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
TWO
ANY certain
OF-THE
HUNDRED-chiefs centurions ews heOs

Conj
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
etoimasate stratiwtas diakosious opws hetoimazO stratiOtEs diakosioi hopOs

vm Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Adv
poreuqwsin poreuomai
vs Aor pasD 3 Pl
23 And he called unto [him] two centurions, saying, Make ready two hundred soldiers to go to Caesarea, and horsemen threescore and ten, and spearmen two hundred, at the third hour of the night;
he-said
make-READY make-ready-ye !
WARriors soldiers
TWO-hundred
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-GONE TILL so-that they-may-be-being-gone as-far-as triths tritos

a_ Gen Sg f
kaisareias kai ippeis kaisareia kai hippeus

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Pl m
ebdomhkonta kai dexiolabous diakosious apo hebdomEkonta kai dexiolabos diakosioi apo
ni numeral Conj n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
OF-CAESAREA Caesarea wras hOra

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
HORSEmen SEVENTY
AND
RIGHT-GETTers slingers
TWO-hundred
FROM third
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
nuktos nux
n_ Gen Sg f
HOUR
OF-THE
NIGHT
23:24 kthnh
ktEnos
n_ Acc Pl n
te te
Part
parasthsai paristEmi
vn Aor Act
ina hina
Conj
epibibasantes ton epibibazO ho

paulon paulos
n_ Acc Sg m
ACQUISITIONS BESIDES TO-BESIDE-STAND THAT ON-STEPizing beasts to-present mounting diaswswsin diasOzO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
PAUL
24 And provide [them] beasts, that they may set Paul on, and bring [him] safe unto Felix the governor.
pros pros
Prep
fhlika phElix
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
hgemona hEgemOn
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-SHOULD-BE-THRU-SAVING TOWARD FELIX they-should-be-saving-through-him
THE
LEADer governor ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
23:25 grayas
graphO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
epistolhn ecousan epistolE echO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg f
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
25 And he wrote a letter after this manner:
WRITing
letter
HAVING
THE
type model
this
23:26 klaudios lusias

klaudios
n_ Nom Sg m
lusias
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kratistw hgemoni fhliki kratistos hEgemOn phElix

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
cairein chairO
vn Pres Act
26 Claudius Lysias unto the most excellent governor Felix [sendeth] greeting.
CLAUDIUS
LYSIAS
to-THE
most-HOLDing most-mighty
LEADer governor
FELIX
TO-BE-JOYING to-be-rejoicing
AV
Acts 23
23:27 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
touton sullhmfqenta houtos sullambanO

pd Acc Sg m vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn kai ioudaios kai

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
THE
MAN
this
BEING-TOGETHER-GOTTEN by being-apprehended up autwn hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Pl m
THE
JUDA-ans Jews tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
AND
mellonta mellO
anaireisqai anaireO
vn Pres Pas
epistas ephistEmi
sun sun
Prep
27 This man was taken of the Jews, and should have been killed of them: then came I with an army, and rescued him, having understood that he was a Roman.
beING-ABOUT
TO-BE-beING-UP-LIFTED by to-be-being-assassinated
them
ON-STANDing standing-by
strateumati exeilamhn maqwn strateuma exaireO manthanO

n_ Dat Sg n vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
oti rwmaios estin hoti rhOmaios eimi

WAR-troop troop
I-OUT-LIFT I-extricate
LEARNING
that
ROMAN
he-IS
23:28 boulomenos
boulomai
te te
Part
epignwnai thn epiginOskO ho

aitian di aitia dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
enekaloun egkaleO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
intendING
WH
BESIDES TO-ON-KNOW to-get-to-know

WH WH WH
THE
WH
cause charge
NA

NA NA
THEY-indictED
28 And when I would have known the cause wherefore they accused him, I brought him forth into their council:
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kathgagon eis to sunedrion autwn
kathgagon eis katagO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
to-him him
NA
I-DOWN-LED I-led-down-him
NA
INTO THE
sunedrion autwn sunedrion autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Pl m
Sanhedrin
OF-them
23:29 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
egkaloumenon peri egkaleO peri

vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m Prep
zhthmatwn tou zEtEma ho

n_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WHOM
I-FOUND
beING-indictED
ABOUT SEEK-effects concerning questions desmwn econta desmos echO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
OF-THE
LAW
OF-them
29 Whom I perceived to be accused of questions of their law, but to have nothing laid to his charge worthy of death or of bonds.
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
axion axios
a_ Acc Sg n
qanatou h thanatos E
n_ Gen Sg m Part
egklhma egklEma
n_ Acc Sg n
NO-YET-ONE YET WORTHY nothing deserving
OF-DEATH death de de
Conj
OR
OF-BONDS bonds
HAVING
indictment
23:30 mhnuqeishs
mEnuO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
epiboulhs epiboulE
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
esesqai eimi
vn Fut vxx
exauths exautEs
Adv
OF-BEING-DIVULGED YET to-ME
OF-ON-COUNSEL INTO THE of-plot kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
MAN
TO-SHALL-BE forthwith
epemya pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
paraggeilas paraggellO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kathgorois legein katEgoros legO

30 And when it was told me how that the Jews laid wait for the man, I sent straightway to thee, and gave commandment to his accusers also to say before thee what [they had] against him. Farewell.
I-SEND I-send-him
NA
TOWARD YOU
charging
AND also epi sou epi su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
to-THE the
accusers
TO-BE-sayING
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
THE the(p)
TOWARD him
ON
YOU
23:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
stratiwtai kata stratiOtEs kata

n_ Nom Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
diatetagmenon diatassO
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
THE
INDEED THEN WARriors soldiers paulon hgagon paulos agO

n_ Acc Sg m
according-to THE
HAVING-been-prescribED to-them
31 Then the soldiers, as it was commanded them, took Paul, and brought [him] by night to Antipatris.
analabontes ton analambanO ho

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
nuktos eis nux eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
antipatrida antipatris
n_ Acc Sg f
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
UP-GETTING taking-up
THE
PAUL
LED led-him easantes eaO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
THRU NIGHT through tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
INTO THE
ANTIPATRIS
23:32 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
ippeis hippeus
n_ Acc Pl m
apercesqai aperchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
sun sun
Prep
32 On the morrow they left the horsemen to go with him, and returned to the castle:
to-THE
YET ON-MORROW LEAVing
THE
HORSEmen TO-BE-FROM-COMING TOGETHER togetherwith to-be-coming-away
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
to-him him
THEY-reTURN
INTO THE
camp citadel
AV
Acts 23 - Acts 24
23:33 oitines eiselqontes eis

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
eiserchomai
eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kaisareian kai anadontes kaisareia kai anadidOmi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WHO-ANY who-any
INTO THE
CAESAREA
AND
UP-GIVING giving-up
THE
33 Who, when they came to Caesarea, and delivered the epistle to the governor, presented Paul also before him.
epistolhn tw epistolE ho
hgemoni paresthsan hEgemOn paristEmi

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
paulon autw paulos autos

n_ Acc Sg m pp Dat Sg m
letter
to-THE
LEADer governor de de
Conj
THEY-BESIDE-STAND AND present also ek ek

Prep
THE
PAUL
to-him
23:34 anagnous
anaginOskO
kai eperwthsas kai eperOtaO

poias poios
pi Gen Sg f
eparceias estin eparcheia eimi

kai kai
Conj
readING reading-it puqomenos punthanomai

YET AND
inquiring-of inquiring
OUT OF-?-THE-WHICH prefecture of-which ?
he-IS
AND
34 And when the governor had read [the letter], he asked of what province he was. And when he understood that [he was] of Cilicia;
oti apo hoti apo

Conj Prep
kilikias kilikia
n_ Gen Sg f
ASCERTAINING
that
FROM CILICIA
23:35 diakousomai
diakouO
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
efh phEmi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
otan hotan
Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
kathgoroi sou katEgoros su

I-SHALL-BE-THRU-HEARING OF-YOU I-shall-be-giving-a-hearing you paragenwntai paraginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
he-AVERRed
when-EVER AND whenever also
THE
accusers
OF-YOU
35 I will hear thee, said he, when thine accusers are also come. And he commanded him to be kept in Herod's judgment hall.
keleusas keleuO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
praitwriw tou praitOrion ho

hrwdou hErOdEs
n_ Gen Sg m
MAY-BE-BESIDE-BECOMING ORDERing may-be-coming-along fulassesqai phulassO

vn Pres Mid
IN
THE
PRETORIUM
OF-THE
HEROD
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TO-BE-beING-GUARDED him
AV
Acts 24
24:1 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
pente hmeras katebh pente hEmera katabainO

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
ananias hananias
n_ Nom Sg m
meta meta
Prep
after
YET FIVE
DAYS
DOWN-STEPPed THE descended
chief-SACRED-one ANANIAS chief-priest
WITH
presbuterwn tinwn presbuteros tis

a_ Gen Pl m px Gen Pl m
kai rhtoros tertullou tinos kai rhEtOr tertullos tis

Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m px Gen Sg m
oitines enefanisan tw hostis emphanizO ho

pr Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
. And after five days Ananias the high priest descended with the elders, and [with] a certain orator [named] Tertullus, who informed the governor against Paul.
SENIORS elders
ANY some
AND
declarer orator
TERTULLUS
ANY certain
WHO-ANY who-any
IN-APPEARize disclose
to-THE
hgemoni kata tou hEgemOn kata ho

n_ Dat Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
LEADer governor
DOWN against
OF-THE the de de
Conj
PAUL
WH NA
24:2 klhqentos
kaleO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
autou
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
vn Pres Act
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-BEING-CALLED YET
OF-him
begins
TO-BE-accusING THE to-be-accusing-him sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
tertullos legwn tertullos legO

(24:3)
pollhs eirhnhs tugcanontes dia polus eirEnE tugchanO dia

a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep
kai kai
Conj
And when he was called forth, Tertullus began to accuse [him], saying, Seeing that by thee we enjoy great quietness, and that very worthy deeds are done unto this nation by thy providence,
TERTULLUS
sayING
OF-much much tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
PEACE
HAPPENING-UP happening-upon toutw dia houtos dia

pd Dat Sg n Prep
THRU YOU through ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
diorqwmatwn ginomenwn diorthOma ginomai

n_ Gen Pl n vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Pl n
eqnei ethnos
n_ Dat Sg n
shs sos
ps 2 Gen Sg
THRU-ERECTments reforms pronoias pronoia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-BECOMING becoming
to-THE
NATION
this
THRU THE through
YOUR
BEFORE-MINDing forethought
24:3 panth
pantE
Adv
te te
Part
kai pantacou apodecomeqa kai pantachou apodechomai

Conj Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
kratiste kratistos
a_ Voc Sg m
fhlix phElix
n_ Voc Sg m
meta meta
Prep
We accept [it] always, and in all places, most noble Felix, with all thankfulness.
EVERYly BESIDES AND in-every-way bsboth pashs pas

a_ Gen Sg f
EVERY-SOIL everywhere
WE-ARE-FROM-RECEIVING most-HOLDer ! FELIX we-are-welcoming-it most-mighty ! Felix !
WITH
eucaristias eucharistia
n_ Gen Sg f
EVERY all
thanking thankfulness de de
Conj
24:4 ina
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
epi pleion epi polus

Prep a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
egkoptw egkoptO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
parakalw parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
akousai akouO
vn Aor Act
THAT YET NO
ON
MORE
YOU
I-MAY-BE-hinderING I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING TO-HEAR I-am-entreating epieikeia epieikeia

n_ Dat Sg f
Notwithstanding, that I be not further tedious unto thee, I pray thee that thou wouldest hear us of thy clemency a few words.
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
suntomws suntomOs
Adv
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sh sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
YOU
OF-US us
TOGETHER-CUTly to-THE concisely gar ton gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
YOUR
leniency
24:5 eurontes
heuriskO
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
touton loimon houtos loimos

pd Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
kai kinounta kai kineO

staseis stasis
n_ Acc Pl f
FINDING
for
THE
MAN
this
PESTILENCE AND
STIRRING one-stirring
STANDings insurrections
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois tois ioudaios ho

a_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn prwtostathn te oikoumenE prOtostatEs te

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg m Part
For we have found this man [a] pestilent [fellow], and a mover of sedition among all the Jews throughout the world, and a ringleader of the sect of the Nazarenes:
to-ALL
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
according-to THE
BEFORE-STANDer ringleader
BESIDES
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nazwraiwn airesews nazOraios hairesis

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
OF-THE
NAZARENES
preference sect ieron hieron

n_ Acc Sg n
24:6 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
epeirasen bebhlwsai on peirazO bebEloO hos

vi impf Act 3 Sg vn Aor Act pr Acc Sg m
kai ekrathsamen kai krateO

WHO
AND also
THE
SACRED-place tries sanctuary
TO-profane
WHOM
AND also
WE-HOLD we-lay-hold
Who also hath gone about to profane the temple: whom we took, and would have judged according to our law.
AV
Acts 24
24:7
But the chief captain Lysias came [upon us], and with great violence took [him] away out of our hands,
. .
.
. .
.
24:8 par
para
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
dunhsh dunamai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
anakrinas anakrinO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
pantwn toutwn pas houtos

a_ Gen Pl n pd Gen Pl n
BESIDE OF-WHICH YOU-SHALL-BE-ABLE SAME whom yourself epignwnai wn epiginOskO hos

vn 2Aor Act pr Gen Pl n
examining
OF-these these-things
Commanding his accusers to come unto thee: by examining of whom thyself mayest take knowledge of all these things, whereof we accuse him.
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
kathgoroumen autou katEgoreO autos

vi Pres Act 1 Pl pp Gen Sg m
TO-ON-KNOW to-recognize
OF-WHICH WE
ARE-accusING
OF-him him ioudaioi faskontes ioudaios phaskO

24:9 sunepeqento
sunepitithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
outws houtOs
Adv
And the Jews also assented, saying that these things were so.
TOGETHER-ON-PLACED YET AND agreed also ecein echO

vn Pres Act
THE
JUDA-ans Jews
ALLEGING
these thus these-things
TO-BE-HAVING
24:10 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
te te
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
neusantos neuO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hgemonos hEgemOn
n_ Gen Sg m
answerED
BESIDES THE
PAUL
OF-NODDing
to-him
THE
LEADer governor eqnei ethnos

n_ Dat Sg n
legein legO
vn Pres Act
ek ek
Prep
pollwn etwn polus etos

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
onta eimi
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
krithn kritEs
n_ Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
toutw houtos
pd Dat Sg n
10 . Then Paul, after that the governor had beckoned unto him to speak, answered, Forasmuch as I know that thou hast been of many years a judge unto this nation, I do the more cheerfully answer for myself:
TO-BE-sayING OUT OF-MANY to-be-sayspeaking epistamenos epistamai

YEARS
BEING
YOU
JUDGer judge
to-THE
NATION
this
euqumws euthumOs
Adv
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
emautou apologoumai emautou apologeomai

pf 1 Gen Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
beING-adept being-versed-in-the-fact
WELL-FEELingly THE cheerfully the(p) sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
ABOUT MYself concerning
I-AM-FROM-sayING I-am-defending pleious polus

a_ Nom Pl f Cmp
24:11 dunamenou
dunamai
epignwnai oti ou epiginOskO hoti ou

vn 2Aor Act Conj Part Neg
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
OF-beING-ABLED of-being-able hmerai hEmera

n_ Nom Pl f
YOU
TO-ON-KNOW to-recognize anebhn anabainO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
that
NOT
MORE
ARE
to-ME
11 Because that thou mayest understand, that there are yet but twelve days since I went up to Jerusalem for to worship.
dwdeka af dOdeka apo

ni numeral Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
proskunhswn eis proskuneO eis

vp Fut Act Nom Sg m Prep
ni proper
DAYS
TWO-TEN twelve
FROM WHICH
I-UP-STEPPed worshipING(fut) I-went-up to-be-worshiping ierw hieron

n_ Dat Sg n
INTO JERUSALEM
24:12 kai oute

kai
Conj
oute
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pros pros
Prep
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
AND
NOT-BESIDES IN neither h E
Part
THE
SACRED-place THEY-FOUND ME sanctuary oclou ochlos

n_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD ANY anyone oute oute

Conj
12 And they neither found me in the temple disputing with any man, neither raising up the people, neither in the synagogues, nor in the city:
dialegomenon dialegomai
epistasin poiounta epistasis poieO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
THRU-sayING arguing sunagwgais sunagOgE

n_ Dat Pl f
OR
ON-STANDing concourse kata kata

Prep
makING
OF-THRONG NOT-BESIDES IN nor polin polis

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
oute oute
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
TOGETHER-LEADS NOT-BESIDES according-to THE synagogues nor
city
24:13 oude
oude
Adv
vn Aor Act
dunantai dunamai
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
peri peri
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
nuni kathgorousin nuni katEgoreO

13 Neither can they prove the things whereof they now accuse me.
NOT-YET TO-BESIDE-STAND THEY-ARE-ABLE nor to-present-evidence they-can
to-YOU
ABOUT WHICH concerning
NOW
THEY-ARE-accusING
AV
Acts 24
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME me
24:14 omologw
homologeO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti kata hoti kata

Conj Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
I-AM-avowING YET this
to-YOU
that
according-to THE
WAY
WHICH
THEY-ARE-sayING they-are-terming pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl n
airesin outws latreuw hairesis houtOs latreuO

n_ Acc Sg f Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
patrww qew patrOos theos

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
14 But this I confess unto thee, that after the way which they call heresy, so worship I the God of my fathers, believing all things which are written in the law and in the prophets:
preference sect tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
thus
I-AM-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE to-THE
hereditary hereditay en en
Prep
God
BELIEVING
to-ALL all
kata kata
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
profhtais prophEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
gegrammenois graphO
THE
according-to THE
LAW
AND
THE
IN
THE
BEFORE-AVERers HAVING-been-WRITTEN prophets hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
24:15 elpida
elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
ecwn echO
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
EXPECTATION HAVING
INTO THE
God
WHICH
AND also
they themselves
these
15 And have hope toward God, which they themselves also allow, that there shall be a resurrection of the dead, both of the just and unjust.
prosdecontai prosdechomai
anastasin mellein anastasis mellO

esesqai eimi
vn Fut vxx
dikaiwn te dikaios te
a_ Gen Pl m Part
kai adikwn kai adikos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
ARE-TOWARD-RECEIVING UP-STANDing are-anticipating resurrection
TO-BE-beING-ABOUT TO-SHALL-BE OF-JUST to-be-impending of-just-ones askw askeO

BESIDES AND bsboth
OF-UN-JUST of-unjust-ones
16 And herein do I exercise myself, to have always a conscience void of offence toward God, and [toward] men.
24:16 en
en
Prep
toutw kai autos houtos kai autos

pd Dat Sg n Conj pp Nom Sg m
aproskopon aproskopos
a_ Acc Sg f
suneidhsin ecein suneidEsis echO

IN
this
AND also qeon theos
SAME myself
I-AM-EXERTING
UN-TOWARD-STRIKE conscience no-stumbling-block pantos pas

a_ Gen Sg n
TO-BE-HAVING
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
anqrwpous dia anthrOpos dia

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
n_ Acc Sg m
TOWARD THE
God
AND
THE
humans
THRU EVERY during all eis eis

Prep
24:17 di
dia
Prep
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
de de
Conj
pleionwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n Cmp
elehmosunas poihswn eleEmosunE poieO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Fut Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
17 Now after many years I came to bring alms to my nation, and offerings.
THRU YEARS through mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
YET MORE
alms
makING doing
INTO THE
NATION
paregenomhn paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
kai prosforas kai prosphora

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
OF-ME
I-BESIDE-BECAME AND I-came-along ais hos

pr Dat Pl f
TOWARD-CARRIES offerings me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
24:18 en
en
Prep
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hgnismenon hagnizO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
meta meta
Prep
IN
WHICH
THEY-FOUND ME
HAVING-been-PURifiED IN
THE
SACRED-place NOT sanctuary asias asia

n_ Gen Sg f
WITH
18 Whereupon certain Jews from Asia found me purified in the temple, neither with multitude, nor with tumult.
oclou ochlos
n_ Gen Sg m
oude oude
Adv
meta qorubou tines meta thorubos tis

Prep n_ Gen Sg m px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaioi ioudaios
a_ Nom Pl m
THRONG
NOT-YET WITH nor edei deO
TUMULT
ANY YET FROM THE there-were-certain pareinai pareimi

vn Pres vxx
ASIA JUDA-ans province-of-Asia Jews ei ei

Cond
24:19 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
epi sou epi su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
kai kathgorein kai katEgoreO

Conj vn Pres Act
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
19 Who ought to have been here before thee, and object, if they had ought against me.
WHOM
it-WAS-BINDING ON
YOU
TO-BE-BESIDE-BEING AND to-be-present
TO-BE-accusING IF to-be-accusing-me
ANY anything
ecoien echO
vo Pres Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
MAY-THEY-BE-HAVING TOWARD ME they-may-be-having
24:20 h
E
Part
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
eipatwsan ti legO tis

vm 2Aor Act 3 Pl px Acc Sg n
euron heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
adikhma stantos adikEma histEmi

n_ Acc Sg n vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OR
they themselves
these
LET-say let-them-say !
ANY what
THEY-FOUND injury
OF-STANDing
OF-ME
20 Or else let these same [here] say, if they have found any evil doing in me, while I stood before the council,
AV
Acts 24
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
sunedriou sunedrion
n_ Gen Sg n
ON
THE
Sanhedrin
24:21 h
E
Part
peri peri
Prep
mias heis
n_ Gen Sg f
tauths fwnhs houtos phOnE

pd Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
ekekraxa en krazO en
autois estws autos histEmi

pp Dat Pl m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
OR
ABOUT ONE concerning
this
SOUND voice egw egO
WHICH
I-OUT-CRY I-cry-out
IN them among shmeron ef sEmeron epi

Adv Prep
HAVING-STOOD standing umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
oti peri hoti peri

Conj Prep
anastasews nekrwn anastasis nekros

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
krinomai krinO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
21 Except it be for this one voice, that I cried standing among them, Touching the resurrection of the dead I am called in question by you this day.
pp 1 Nom Sg
that
ABOUT UP-STANDing concerning resurrection
OF-DEAD-ones I of-dead-ones fhlix phElix

n_ Nom Sg m
AM-beING-JUDGED toDAY
ON
OF-YOU(p) ye ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
22 . And when Felix heard these things, having more perfect knowledge of [that] way, he deferred them, and said, When Lysias the chief captain shall come down, I will know the uttermost of your matter.
24:22 anebaleto de
anaballomai
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
de
Conj
autous o autos ho
akribesteron eidws akribOs eidO

Adv Con vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
UP-CAST made-postpone peri peri

Prep
YET them
THE
FELIX
more-EXACTly more-accurately lusias lusias

n_ Nom Sg m
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-acquainted-with the(p) ciliarcos chiliarchos

n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
odou hodos
n_ Gen Sg f
eipas legO
otan hotan
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT THE concerning katabh katabainO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WAY
saying
when-EVER LYSIAS whenever ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
THE
diagnwsomai diaginOskO
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
kaq kata
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
MAY-BE-DOWN-STEPPING I-SHALL-BE-investigatING THE may-be-coming-down
according-to YOU(p) affairs of-ye auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
24:23 diataxamenos tw
diatassO
vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ekatontarch threisqai hekatontarchEs tEreO

n_ Dat Sg m vn Pres Pas
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
te te
Part
prescribing
to-THE
TO-BE-beING-KEPT him
TO-BE-HAVING BESIDES
anesin anesis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai mhdena kai mEdeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
kwluein kOluO
vn Pres Act
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
idiwn idios
a_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
uphretein hupEreteO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
23 And he commanded a centurion to keep Paul, and to let [him] have liberty, and that he should forbid none of his acquaintance to minister or come unto him.
UP-LETTing AND ease
NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-FORBIDDING OF-THE no-one to-be-preventing hmeras tinas hEmera tis

n_ Acc Pl f px Acc Pl f
OWN own(p)
OF-him
TO-BE-subservING to-him
24:24 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
paragenomenos o paraginomai ho
vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
fhlix phElix
n_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
drousillh drousilla
n_ Dat Sg f
after
YET DAYS
ANY some
THE
FELIX
TOGETHER to-DRUSILLA togetherwith Drusilla paulon kai paulos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
24 And after certain days, when Felix came with his wife Drusilla, which was a Jewess, he sent for Paul, and heard him concerning the faith in Christ.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki oush gunE eimi

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres vxx Dat Sg f
ioudaia metepemyato ton Ioudaios metapempO ho

a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
THE
OWN
WOMAN wife peri peri

Prep
BEING
JUDA-an Jewess eis eis

Prep
he-after-SENDS he-sends-after
THE
PAUL
AND
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
HEARS
OF-him him
ABOUT THE concerning de de

Conj
INTO ANOINTED Christ peri peri

Prep
JESUS
BELIEF faith
25 And as he reasoned of righteousness, temperance, and judgment to come, Felix trembled, and answered, Go thy way for this time; when I have a convenient season, I will call for thee.
24:25 dialegomenou
dialegomai
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
dikaiosunhs kai egkrateias kai tou dikaiosunE kai egkrateia kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THRU-sayING of-arguing krimatos tou krima ho

YET him
ABOUT JUSTice concerning righteousness emfobos genomenos emphobos ginomai

a_ Nom Sg m vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m
AND
IN-HOLDing self-control fhlix phElix

n_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
mellontos mellO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
JUDGment
THE
IN-FEAR affrighted
BECOMING
THE
FELIX
answerED
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
nun econ nun echO

Adv vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
poreuou poreuomai
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
metalabwn metalambanO
metakalesomai metakaleO
vi Fut Mid 1 Sg
THE
NOW HAVING
SEASON occasion
YET WITH-GETTING being-given
I-SHALL-BE-WITH-CALLING I-shall-be-calling-for
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
AV
Acts 24 - Acts 25
24:26 ama
hama
Adv
kai elpizwn kai elpizO

oti crhmata doqhsetai hoti chrEma didOmi

Conj n_ Acc Pl n vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
WH
autw
SIMULTANEOUS AND at-the-same-time also

NA
EXPECTING
that
moneys money(p)
SHALL-BE-BEING-GIVEN
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
dio dio
Conj
kai puknoteron auton kai puknos autos

Conj a_ Acc Sg n Cmp pp Acc Sg m
26 He hoped also that money should have been given him of Paul, that he might loose him: wherefore he sent for him the oftener, and communed with him.
to-him him
by
THE
PAUL
more-FREQUENT more-frequently
him
metapempomenos metapempO
wmilei homileO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
after-SENDING sending-after
he-conversED to-him
24:27 dietias
dietia
n_ Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
plhrwqeishs elaben plEroO lambanO

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
diadocon diadochos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
fhlix phElix
n_ Nom Sg m
porkion porkios
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-TWO-YEAR YET BEING-FILLED of-two-years being-fulfilled fhston qelwn phEstos thelO

GOT
THRU-RECEIVer THE successor tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
FELIX
PORCIUS
27 But after two years Porcius Festus came into Felix'room: and Felix, willing to shew the Jews a pleasure, left Paul bound.
te te
Part
carita kataqesqai charis katatithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor Mid
ioudaiois o ioudaios ho
a_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
fhlix phElix
n_ Nom Sg m
FESTUS
WILLING
BESIDES grace favor
TO-DOWN-PLACE to-THE to-curry-with the
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
FELIX
katelipen ton kataleipO ho

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
paulon dedemenon paulos deO

left
THE
PAUL
HAVING-been-BOUND
AV
Acts 25
25:1 fhstos
phEstos
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
epibas epibainO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eparceia meta treis eparcheia meta treis

n_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Acc Pl f
hmeras anebh hEmera anabainO

eis eis
Prep
FESTUS
THEN ON-STEPPing stepping-on kaisareias kaisareia

n_ Gen Sg f
to-THE the
prefecture
after
THREE
DAYS
UP-STEPPed went-up
INTO
. Now when Festus was come into the province, after three days he ascended from Caesarea to Jerusalem.
ierosoluma apo ierosoluma apo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
JERUSALEM
FROM CAESAREA
25:2 enefanisan te
emphanizO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
te
Part
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
prwtoi prOtos
a_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
BESIDES to-him
THE
THE
BEFORE-mosts OF-THE foremost-ones
Then the high priest and the chief of the Jews informed him against Paul, and besought him,
ioudaiwn kata tou ioudaios kata ho

a_ Gen Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai parekaloun kai parakaleO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
JUDA-ans Jews
DOWN against
OF-THE the carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
PAUL
AND
THEY-BESIDE-CALLED him they-entreated opws hopOs

Adv
25:3 aitoumenoi
aiteO
kat kata
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
metapemyhtai metapempO
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
REQUESTING
grace favor
DOWN OF-him against him
WHICH-how he-SHOULD-BE-after-SENDING him so-that he-should-be-sending-after auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
INTO
And desired favour against him, that he would send for him to Jerusalem, laying wait in the way to kill him.
ierousalhm enedran poiountes ierosoluma enedra poieO

ni proper n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
anelein anaireO
vn 2Aor Act
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
JERUSALEM
ambush
makING
TO-BE-UP-LIFTING him to-be-assassinating apekriqh apokrinomai

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
according-to THE
WAY
25:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
fhstos phEstos
n_ Nom Sg m
threisqai tEreO
vn Pres Pas
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon eis paulos eis

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
THE
INDEED THEN FESTUS
answerED
TO-BE-beING-KEPT THE
PAUL
INTO
But Festus answered, that Paul should be kept at Caesarea, and that he himself would depart shortly [thither].
kaisareian eauton kaisareia heautou

n_ Acc Sg f pf 3 Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
mellein mellO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
ekporeuesqai ekporeuomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
CAESAREA
self he-himself oun oun

Conj
YET TO-BE-beING-ABOUT IN
SWIFTness TO-BE-OUT-GOING to-be-going-out dunatoi sugkatabantes dunatos sugkatabainO

a_ Nom Pl m vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m
25:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
THE-ones the-ones estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEN IN YOU(p) among ye tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
he-IS-AVERRING ABLE
TOGETHER-DOWN-STEPPing IF stepping-down-togetherwith-me
ANY anything
Let them therefore, said he, which among you are able, go down with [me], and accuse this man, if there be any wickedness in him.
en en
Prep
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
atopon kathgoreitwsan autou atopos katEgoreO autos

a_ Nom Sg n vm Pres Act 3 Pl pp Gen Sg m
IS there-is
IN
THE
MAN
UN-PLACE amiss
LET-THEM-BE-accusING let-them-be-accusing !
OF-him him oktw oktO

ni numeral
25:6 diatriyas
diatribO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
autois hmeras ou autos hEmera ou

pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg
pleious polus
a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
h E
Part
deka deka
ni numeral
tarrying
YET IN them among eis eis

Prep
DAYS
NOT
MORE more-than kaqisas kathizO
EIGHT
OR
TEN
katabas katabainO
kaisareian th kaisareia ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
epaurion epaurion
Adv
epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
bhmatos bEma
n_ Gen Sg n
And when he had tarried among them more than ten days, he went down unto Caesarea; and the next day sitting on the judgment seat commanded Paul to be brought.
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
INTO CAESAREA
to-THE
ON-MORROW being-seated
ON
THE
platform dais
ekeleusen ton keleuO ho

paulon acqhnai paulos agO

n_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Pas
he-ORDERS
THE
PAUL
TO-BE-LED to-be-led-forth autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
25:7 paragenomenou
paraginomai
de de
Conj
periesthsan auton periistEmi autos

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl pp Acc Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
apo apo
Prep
ierosolumwn ierosoluma
n_ Gen Pl n
OF-BESIDE-BECOMING YET OF-him of-coming-along katabebhkotes katabainO

ABOUT-STAND stand-about kai barea kai barus

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
him
THE
FROM JERUSALEM
ioudaioi polla ioudaios polus

a_ Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
aitiwmata kataferontes a aitiOma katapherO hos

n_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl n
And when he was come, the Jews which came down from Jerusalem stood round about, and laid many and grievous complaints against Paul, which they could not prove.
HAVING-DOWN-STEPPED JUDA-ans having-descended Jews
MANY
AND
HEAVY
causes charges
DOWN-CARRYING bringing-against-him
WHICH which(p)
AV
Acts 25
ouk ou
Part Neg
iscuon ischuO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
apodeixai apodeiknumi
vn Aor Act
NOT
THEY-were-STRONG TO-FROM-SHOW to-demonstrate paulou paulos

n_ Gen Sg m
25:8 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
apologoumenou apologeomai
oti oute hoti oute

Conj Conj
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
PAUL
FROM-sayING defending eis eis

Prep
that
NOT-BESIDES INTO THE neither oute oute

Conj
LAW
OF-THE
ioudaiwn oute ioudaios oute

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ieron hieron
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
kaisara ti kaisar tis

n_ Acc Sg m px Acc Sg n
hmarton hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
While he answered for himself, Neither against the law of the Jews, neither against the temple, nor yet against Caesar, have I offended any thing at all.
JUDA-ans Jews
NOT-BESIDES INTO THE nor fhstos phEstos

n_ Nom Sg m
SACRED-place NOT-BESIDES INTO CAESAR sanctuary nor tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
ANY anything
I-missED I-sinned
9
25:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qelwn thelO
ioudaiois carin ioudaios charis

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
kataqesqai katatithEmi
vn 2Aor Mid
THE
FESTUS
YET WILLING
to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews eis eis

Prep
grace favor
TO-DOWN-PLACE to-curry-with
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qeleis thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ierosoluma anabas ierosoluma anabainO

But Festus, willing to do the Jews a pleasure, answered Paul, and said, Wilt thou go up to Jerusalem, and there be judged of these things before me?
answerING
to-THE the
PAUL
said
YOU-ARE-WILLING INTO JERUSALEM
UP-STEPPing going-up
ekei peri ekei peri

Adv Prep
toutwn kriqhnai houtos krinO

pd Gen Pl n vn Aor Pas
ep epi
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
there
ABOUT these concerning these-things de de

Conj
TO-BE-JUDGED ON
ME
WH WH WH WH WH NA
25:10 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
estws epi tou bhmatos kaisaros
epi epi
Prep
said
NA NA
YET THE
NA
PAUL
NA
ON
10 Then said Paul, I stand at Caesar's judgment seat, where I ought to be judged: to the Jews have I done no wrong, as thou very well knowest.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
bhmatos kaisaros estws bEma kaisar histEmi

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ou hou
Adv
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
OF-THE the
platform dais
OF-CEASAR
WH
I-AM
NA
where ME
it-IS-BINDING
krinesqai krinO
vn Pres Pas
ioudaious ouden ioudaios oudeis

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
hdikhka
hdikhsa adikeO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ws kai su hOs kai su

Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
TO-BE-beING-JUDGED JUDA-ans Jews kallion kallion

Adv Con
NOT-YET-ONE nothing
I-injure
AS
AND also
YOU
epiginwskeis epiginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
more-IDEALly ARE-ON-KNOWING most-ideally are-recognizing
25:11 ei
ei
Cond
men men
Part
oun oun
Conj
adikw adikeO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai axion kai axios

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
qanatou pepraca thanatos prassO

n_ Gen Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
IF
INDEED THEN I-AM-injurING
AND
WORTHY deserving ei ei
Cond
OF-DEATH
I-HAVE-PRACTISED ANY I-have-committed anything estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT
paraitoumai paraiteomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
vn 2Aor Act
de de
Conj
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
11 For if I be an offender, or have committed any thing worthy of death, I refuse not to die: but if there be none of these things whereof these accuse me, no man may deliver me unto them. I appeal unto Caesar.
I-AM-refusING
THE
TO-BE-FROM-DYING IF to-be-dying oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
YET NOT-YET-ONE IS nothing there-is dunatai dunamai

OF-WHICH these these-ones
kathgorousin mou katEgoreO egO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 1 Gen Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
autois carisasqai autos charizomai

pp Dat Pl m vn Aor midD
ARE-accusING
OF-ME me
NOT-YET-ONE ME no-one
IS-ABLE can
to-them
TO-grace to-surrender-as-a-favor
kaisara epikaloumai kaisar epikaleO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
CAESAR
I-AM-ON-CALLING I-am-appealing-to fhstos phEstos

n_ Nom Sg m
25:12 tote o
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sullalhsas sullaleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
sumbouliou sumboulion
n_ Gen Sg n
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
then
THE
FESTUS
TOGETHER-TALKing WITH conferring
THE
TOGETHER-COUNSEL answerED council
12 Then Festus, when he had conferred with the council, answered, Hast thou appealed unto Caesar? unto Caesar shalt thou go.
AV
Acts 25
kaisara epikeklhsai kaisar epikaleO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Perf Mid 2 Sg
epi kaisara poreush epi kaisar poreuomai

Prep n_ Acc Sg m vi Fut midD 2 Sg
CAESAR
YOU-HAVE-been-ON-CALLED ON you-have-appealed-to
CAESAR
YOU-SHALL-BE-GOING
25:13 hmerwn de
hEmera
n_ Gen Pl f
de
Conj
diagenomenwn tinwn agrippas o diaginomai tis agrippas ho

vp 2Aor midD Gen Pl f px Gen Pl f n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
basileus kai bernikh basileus kai bernikE

n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
13 . And after certain days king Agrippa and Bernice came unto Caesarea to salute Festus.
OF-DAYS
YET THRU-BECOMING elapsing
ANY some
AGRIPPA
THE
KING
AND
Bernice
kathnthsan eis katantaO eis

kaisareian aspasamenoi kaisareia aspazomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fhston phEstos
n_ Acc Sg m
attain arrive-at
INTO CAESAREA
greeting
THE
FESTUS
25:14 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
pleious polus
a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
hmeras dietribon ekei o hEmera diatribO ekei ho

n_ Acc Pl f vi impf Act 3 Pl Adv t_ Nom Sg m
fhstos phEstos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
basilei basileus
n_ Dat Sg m
AS
YET MORE
DAYS
THEY-tarriED
there
THE
FESTUS
to-THE
KING
14 And when they had been there many days, Festus declared Paul's cause unto the king, saying, There is a certain man left in bonds by Felix:
aneqeto anatithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kata kata
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon legwn paulos legO

anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
UP-PLACED submitted
THE
according-to THE affairs of-the
PAUL
sayING
MAN
ANY certain
IS there-is
kataleleimmenos upo fhlikos desmios kataleipO hupo phElix desmios

vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
HAVING-been-left
by
FELIX
BOUND-one prisoner mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
25:15 peri
peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
genomenou ginomai
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma enefanisan oi ierosoluma emphanizO ho

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl m
ABOUT WHOM concerning arciereis archiereus

n_ Nom Pl m
OF-BECOMING
ME
INTO JERUSALEM
THE
15 About whom, when I was at Jerusalem, the chief priests and the elders of the Jews informed [me], desiring [to have] judgment against him.
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
presbuteroi twn presbuteros ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn aitoumenoi ioudaios aiteO

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
kat kata
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests katadikhn katadikE

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
SENIORS elders
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
REQUESTING
DOWN OF-him against him
DOWN-JUSTice conviction
25:16 pros
pros
Prep
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
apekriqhn oti ouk apokrinomai hoti ou

vi Aor midD 1 Sg Conj Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eqos ethos
n_ Nom Sg n
rwmaiois rhOmaios
a_ Dat Pl m
TOWARD WHOM
I-answerED
that
NOT
it-IS
CUSTOM
to-ROMANS
carizesqai charizomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
anqrwpon prin h anthrOpos prin E

n_ Acc Sg m Adv Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kathgoroumenos kata katEgoreO kata

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
16 To whom I answered, It is not the manner of the Romans to deliver any man to die, before that he which is accused have the accusers face to face, and have licence to answer for himself concerning the crime laid against him.
TO-BE-gracING ANY to-be-surrendering-as-a-favor proswpon ecoi prosOpon echO

n_ Acc Sg n vo Pres Act 3 Sg
human
ERE
OR THE than
one-beING-accusED one-being-accused te te
Part
according-to
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kathgorous topon katEgoros topos

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
apologias apologia
n_ Gen Sg f
face
MAY-he-BE-HAVING THE may-be-having peri peri

Prep
accusers
PLACE position
BESIDES OF-FROM-say of-defense
laboi lambanO
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
egklhmatos egklEma
n_ Gen Sg n
MAY-he-BE-GETTING ABOUT THE concerning
indictment
NA
25:17 sunelqontwn
sunerchomai
oun oun
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
enqade enthade
Adv
anabolhn mhdemian anabolE mEdeis

OF-TOGETHER-COMING THEN of-coming-together poihsamenos th poieO ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
OF-them
IN-PLACE-YET UP-CAST in-this-place postponement epi tou epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
NO-YET-ONE not-one
exhs hexEs
Adv
kaqisas kathizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
bhmatos ekeleusa acqhnai bEma keleuO agO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Sg vn Aor Pas
17 Therefore, when they were come hither, without any delay on the morrow I sat on the judgment seat, and commanded the man to be brought forth.
making
to-THE
next being-seated next-day
ON
THE
platform dais
I-ORDER
TO-BE-LED to-be-led-forth
AV
Acts 25
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MAN
25:18 peri
peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
staqentes histEmi
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kathgoroi oudemian katEgoros oudeis

n_ Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg f
aitian eferon aitia pherO

ABOUT WHOM concerning wn hos

pr Gen Pl n
BEING-STOOD standing-up
THE
accusers
NOT-YET-ONE cause not-one charge
THEY-CARRIED brought
18 Against whom when the accusers stood up, they brought none accusation of such things as I supposed:
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
upenooun huponoeO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
ponhrwn ponEros
a_ Gen Pl n
OF-WHICH I which
UNDER-MINDED OF-wickeds suspected of-wicked-things tina tis

px Acc Pl n
25:19 zhthmata de
zEtEma
n_ Acc Pl n
de
Conj
peri peri
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
idias idios
a_ Gen Sg f
deisidaimonias eicon deisidaimonia echO

pros pros
Prep
SEEK-effects questions auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
YET ANY certain tinos tis
ABOUT THE concerning ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
OWN
DREAD-demonism religion on hos

pr Acc Sg m
THEY-HAD
TOWARD
19 But had certain questions against him of their own superstition, and of one Jesus, which was dead, whom Paul affirmed to be alive.
kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
teqnhkotos thnEskO
efasken phaskO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
px Gen Sg m
him
AND
ABOUT ANY concerning certain
JESUS
HAVING-DIED
WHOM
ALLEGED
THE
PAUL
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-LIVING
25:20 aporoumenos
aporeO
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
peri peri
Prep
toutwn zhthsin elegon houtos zEtEsis legO

pd Gen Pl n n_ Acc Sg f vi impf Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
beING-perplexED
YET I
THE
ABOUT these concerning these-things
SEEKing questioning
said
IF
20 And because I doubted of such manner of questions, I asked [him] whether he would go to Jerusalem, and there be judged of these matters.
bouloito boulomai
vo Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg

ierosoluma kakei ierosoluma kakei

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Con
krinesqai krinO
vn Pres Pas
peri peri
Prep
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
MAY-he-BE-intendING TO-BE-GOING he-may-be-intending
INTO JERUSALEM
AND-there TO-BE-beING-JUDGED ABOUT these concerning these-things eis eis

Prep
25:21 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
epikalesamenou thrhqhnai auton epikaleO tEreO autos

vp Aor Mid Gen Sg m vn Aor Pas pp Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
YET PAUL
ON-CALLing appealing ekeleusa threisqai keleuO tEreO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-KEPT
him
INTO THE
OF-THE
21 But when Paul had appealed to be reserved unto the hearing of Augustus, I commanded him to be kept till I might send him to Caesar.
sebastou diagnwsin sebastos diagnOsis

a_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ews ou heOs hos

Conj pr Gen Sg m
anapemyw anapempO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
venerated emperor auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
THRU-KNOWing I-ORDER investigation pros pros

Prep
TO-BE-beING-KEPT him
TILL
OF-WHICH I-SHALL-BE-UP-SENDING which I-shall-be-sending-up
kaisara kaisar
n_ Acc Sg m
him
TOWARD CAESAR
25:22 agrippas de
agrippas
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fhston eboulomhn phEstos boulomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi impf midD/pasD 1 Sg
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AGRIPPA
YET TOWARD THE
FESTUS
I-intendED
AND also
SAME myself
OF-THE the
22 Then Agrippa said unto Festus, I would also hear the man myself. To morrow, said he, thou shalt hear him.
anqrwpou akousai aurion anthrOpos akouO aurion

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Adv
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
akoush akouO
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
human
TO-HEAR
MORROW he-IS-AVERRING YOU-SHALL-BE-HEARING OF-him tomorrow him elqontos erchomai

25:23 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oun oun
Conj
epaurion epaurion
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agrippa kai ths agrippas kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
bernikhs meta bernikE meta

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
to-THE
THEN ON-MORROW OF-COMING
THE
AGRIPPA
AND
THE
Bernice
WITH
pollhs fantasias kai eiselqontwn eis polus phantasia kai eiserchomai eis
a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
akroathrion sun akroatErion sun

n_ Acc Sg n Prep
te te
Part
much
APPEARance pageantry
AND
INTO THE
LISTEN-PLACE audience-chamber
TOGETHER BESIDES
23 And on the morrow, when Agrippa was come, and Bernice, with great pomp, and was entered into the place of hearing, with the chief captains, and principal men of the city, at Festus'commandment Paul was brought forth.
AV
Acts 25 - Acts 26
ciliarcois chiliarchos
n_ Dat Pl m
kai andrasin tois kai anEr ho

kat kata
Prep
exochn exochE
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
polews kai polis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
THOUSAND-chiefs AND captains
MEN
THE
according-to OUT-HAVing OF-THE prominent o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
city
AND
keleusantos tou keleuO ho

fhstou hcqh phEstos agO

paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-ORDERing
THE of-the o ho
FESTUS
WAS-LED was-led-forth fhstos phEstos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
PAUL
25:24 kai fhsin

kai
Conj
phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
agrippa basileu kai pantes agrippas basileus kai pas

n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
IS-AVERRING THE
FESTUS
AGRIPPA Agrippa ! qewreite theOreO
KING !
AND
ALL
THE
sumparontes sumpareimi
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
touton peri houtos peri

pd Acc Sg m Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-BESIDE-BEING to-US being-present-togetherwith us apan hapas

a_ Nom Sg n
MEN men ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
YE-ARE-beholdING
WH
this-one this-man
NA
ABOUT WHOM concerning moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
24 And Festus said, King Agrippa, and all men which are here present with us, ye see this man, about whom all the multitude of the Jews have dealt with me, both at Jerusalem, and [also] here, crying that he ought not to live any longer.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhqos plEthos
n_ Nom Sg n
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
enetucen
enetucon entugchanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
ALL(emph.) THE entire(emph.) te te

Part
multitude
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews bowntes boaO

pled
to-ME
IN
ierosolumois kai enqade ierosoluma kai enthade

mh mE
Part Neg
dein deO
vn Pres im-Act
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
BESIDES JERUSALEM bsboth zhn zaO

vn Pres Act
AND
IN-PLACE-YET IMPLORING in-this-place
NO
TO-BE-BINDING him must
mhketi mEketi
Adv
TO-BE-LIVING NO-NOT-STILL by-no-means-longer
25:25 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
katelabomhn mhden katalambanO mEdeis

vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg a_ Acc Sg n
axion axios
a_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
qanatou pepracenai thanatos prassO

n_ Gen Sg m vn Perf Act
YET DOWN-GOT grasped de de

Conj
NO-YET-ONE WORTHY nothing deserving
him
OF-DEATH
TO-HAVE-PRACTISED to-have-committed pempein pempO

vn Pres Act
25 But when I found that he had committed nothing worthy of death, and that he himself hath appealed to Augustus, I have determined to send him.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
toutou epikalesamenou ton houtos epikaleO ho

pd Gen Sg m vp Aor Mid Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
sebaston ekrina sebastos krinO

a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
OF-SAME of-himself
YET OF-this this-man ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
ON-CALLing appealing-to asfales ti asphalEs tis

a_ Acc Sg n px Acc Sg n
THE
venerated emperor tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
I-JUDGE I-decide kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-SENDING to-be-sending-him ouk ou

Part Neg
25:26 peri
peri
Prep
grayai graphO
vn Aor Act
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ABOUT WHOM concerning dio dio

Conj
UN-TOTTER certainty
ANY
TO-WRITE to-THE
master lord
NOT
I-AM-HAVING
prohgagon auton proagO autos

ef epi
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai malista epi sou kai malista epi su

Conj Adv Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
basileu agrippa basileus agrippas

n_ Voc Sg m n_ Voc Sg m
26 Of whom I have no certain thing to write unto my lord. Wherefore I have brought him forth before you, and specially before thee, O king Agrippa, that, after examination had, I might have somewhat to write.
THRU-WHICH I-BEFORE-LED wherefore I-led-before opws hopOs

Adv
him
ON
YOU(p) ye
AND
RATHERest especially
ON
YOU
KING !
AGRIPPA Agrippa !
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
anakrisews genomenhs anakrisis ginomai

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f
scw echO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
grayw graphO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
WHICH-how OF-THE so-that
UP-JUDGing examination
BECOMING occurring dokei dokeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-HAVING ANY something desmion mh desmios mE

I-SHALL-BE-WRITING
25:27 alogon
alogos
a_ Nom Sg n
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
pemponta pempO
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
kat kata
Prep
UN-logical irrational autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
for
to-ME
it-IS-SEEMING SENDING
BOUND-one prisoner
NO
AND also
THE
DOWN against
27 For it seemeth to me unreasonable to send a prisoner, and not withal to signify the crimes [laid] against him.
aitias shmanai aitia sEmainO

n_ Gen Pl f vn Aor Act
OF-him him
causes charges
TO-SIGNify
AV
Acts 26
26:1 agrippas
agrippas G67 n_ Nom Sg m AGRIPPA de de G1161 Conj YET pros pros G4314 Prep TOWARD ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE paulon paulon G3972 n_ Acc Sg m PAUL efh ephE G5346 vi Impf vxx 3 Sg AVERRed epitrepetai epitrepetai G2010 vi Pres Pas 3 Sg it-IS-beING-permittED soi soi G4671 pp 2 Dat Sg to-YOU
1
. Then Agrippa said unto Paul, Thou art permitted to speak for thyself. Then Paul stretched forth the hand, and answered for himself:
uper huper G5228 Prep OVER for-the-sake-of thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE
seautou seautou G4572 pf 2 Gen Sg m YOURself
legein legein G3004 vn Pres Act TO-BE-sayING to-be-sayspeaking
tote tote G5119 Adv then
paulos paulos G3972 n_ Nom Sg m PAUL
apelogeito apelogeito G626 vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg FROM-said made-his-defense
ekteinas ekteinas G1614 vp Aor Act Nom Sg f OUT-STRETCHing stretching-out
ceira cheira G5495 n_ Acc Sg f HAND
26:2 peri
peri G4012 Prep ABOUT concerning
pantwn pantOn G3956 a_ Gen Pl n ALL
wn hOn G3739 pr Gen Pl n OF-WHICH of-which(p)
egkaloumai egkaloumai G1458 vi Pres Pas 1 Sg I-AM-beING-indictED
upo hupo G5259 Prep by
ioudaiwn ioudaiOn G2453 a_ Gen Pl m JUDA-ans Jews
basileu basileu G935 n_ Voc Sg m KING !
agrippa agrippa G67 n_ Voc Sg m AGRIPPA Agrippa ! sou sou G4675 pp 2 Gen Sg OF-YOU you
I think myself happy, king Agrippa, because I shall answer for myself this day before thee touching all the things whereof I am accused of the Jews:
hghmai hEdEmai G2233 vi Perf midD/pasD 1 Sg I-HAVE-deemED
emauton emauton G1683 pf 1 Acc Sg m MYself
makarion makarion G3107 a_ Acc Sg m HAPPY
mellwn mellOn G3195 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m beING-ABOUT
apologeisqai apologeisthai G626 vn Pres midD/pasD TO-BE-FROM-sayING to-be-making-my-defense
epi epi G1909 Prep ON
shmeron sEmeron G4594 Adv toDAY
26:3 malista
malista G3122 Adv RATHERest especially kata kata G2596 Prep according-to
gnwsthn gnOstEn G1109 n_ Acc Sg m KNOWer expert
onta onta G5607 vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m BEING
se se G4571 pp 2 Acc Sg YOU
eidws eidOs G1492 vp Perf Act Nom Sg m HAVING-PERCEIVED
pantwn pantOn G3956 a_ Gen Pl m OF-ALL
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl n THE
Especially [because I know] thee to be expert in all customs and questions which are among the Jews: wherefore I beseech thee to hear me patiently.
ioudaious ioudaious G2453 a_ Acc Pl m JUDA-ans Jews makroqumws makrothumOs G3116 Adv FAR-FEEL-ly patiently men men G3303 Part INDEED
eqwn ethOn G1485 n_ Gen Pl n CUSTOMS
te te G5037 Part BESIDES
zhthmatwn zEtEmatOn G2213 n_ Gen Pl n SEEK-effects questions
dio dio G1352 Conj THRU-WHICH wherefore
deomai deomai G1189 vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg I-AM-beseechING
sou sou G4675 pp 2 Gen Sg OF-YOU you
akousai akousai G191 vn Aor Act TO-HEAR
mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME me mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE ek ek G1537 Prep OUT neothtos neotEtos G3503 n_ Gen Sg f OF-YOUTH thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE ap ap G575 Prep FROM
4
26:4 thn
tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE
oun oun G3767 Conj THEN
biwsin biOsin G981 n_ Acc Sg f livelihooding course-of-life en en G1722 Prep IN among
My manner of life from my youth, which was at the first among mine own nation at Jerusalem, know all the Jews;
archs archEs G746 n_ Gen Sg f ORIGINal beginning
genomenhn genomenEn G1096 vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg f BECOMING coming-to-be pantes pantes G3956 a_ Nom Pl m ALL
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg n THE
eqnei ethnei G1484 n_ Dat Sg n NATION
en en G1722 Prep IN
ierosolumois ierosolumois G2414 n_ Dat Pl n JERUSALEM
isasin isasin G2467 vi Perf Act 3 Pl HAVE-PERCEIVED are-acquainted-with
oi hoi G3588 t_ Nom Pl m THE
ioudaioi ioudaioi G2453 a_ Nom Pl m JUDA-ans Jews anwqen anOthen G509 Adv UP-PLACE from-the-very-first ean ean G1437 Cond IF-EVER qelwsin thelOsin G2309 vs Pres Act 3 Pl THEY-MAY-BE-WILLING marturein marturein G3140 vn Pres Act TO-BE-witnessING to-be-testifying oti hoti G3754 Conj that
5
26:5 proginwskontes
proginOskontes G4267 vp Pres Act Nom Pl m BEFORE-KNOWING knowing-before-this
Which knew me from the beginning, if they would testify, that after the most straitest sect of our religion I lived a Pharisee.
Translation : AV
Acts 26
kata kata G2596 Prep according-to thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE akribestathn akribestatEn G196 a_ Acc Sg f Sup most-EXACT strictest airesin hairesin G139 n_ Acc Sg f preference sect ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE hmeteras hEmeteras G2251 ps 1 Gen Pl OUR-more our(emph.) qrhskeias thrEskeias G2356 n_ Gen Sg f RITUAL ezhsa ezEsa G2198 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-LIVE
farisaios pharisaios G5330 n_ Nom Sg m PHARISEE
26:6 kai
kai G2532 Conj AND
nun nun G3568 Adv NOW
ep ep G1909 Prep ON
elpidi elpidi G1680 n_ Dat Sg f EXPECTATION
ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE
pros pros G4314 Prep TOWARD
tous tous G3588 t_ Acc Pl m THE
pateras pateras G3962 n_ Acc Pl m FATHERS
epaggelias epaggelias G1860 n_ Gen Sg f promise
And now I stand and am judged for the hope of the promise made of God unto our fathers:
genomenhs genomenEs G1096 vp 2Aor midD Gen Sg f BECOMING
qeou theou G2316 n_ Gen Sg m God
esthka hestEka G2476 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-STOOD I-stand
krinomenos krinomenos G2919 vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m beING-JUDGED
26:7 eis
eis G1519 Prep INTO
hn hEn G3739 pr Acc Sg f WHICH
dwdekafulon dOdekaphulon G1429 n_ Nom Sg n TWO-TEN-tribe twelve-tribes elpizei elpizei G1679 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-EXPECTING
hmwn hEmOn G2257 pp 1 Gen Pl OF-US
en en G1722 Prep IN
ekteneia ekteneia G1616 n_ Dat Sg f OUT-STRETCH earnest
nukta nukta G3571 n_ Acc Sg f NIGHT
Unto which [promise] our twelve tribes, instantly serving [God] day and night, hope to come. For which hope's sake, king Agrippa, I am accused of the Jews.
hmeran hEmeran G2250 n_ Acc Sg f DAY
latreuon latreuon G3000 vp Pres Act Nom Sg n offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE
katanthsai katantEsai G2658 vn Aor Act TO-attain
hs hEs G3739 pr Gen Sg f WHICH
elpidos elpidos G1680 n_ Gen Sg f EXPECTATION
egkaloumai egkaloumai G1458 vi Pres Pas 1 Sg I-AM-beING-indictED
agrippa agrippa G67 n_ Voc Sg m AGRIPPA !
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m THE
ioudaiwn ioudaiOn G2453 a_ Gen Pl m JUDA-ans Jews ei ei G1487 Cond IF o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE qeos theos G2316 n_ Nom Sg m God nekrous nekrous G3498 a_ Acc Pl m DEAD-ones dead-ones
8
26:8 ti
ti G5101 pi Acc Sg n ANY why ? egeirei egeirei G1453 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-ROUSING
apiston apiston G571 a_ Acc Sg m UN-BELIEVing unbelievable
krinetai krinetai G2919 vi Pres Pas 3 Sg IS-beING-JUDGED it-is-being-judged
par par G3844 Prep BESIDE
Why should it be thought a thing incredible with you, that God should raise the dead?
26:9 egw
men men G3303 Part INDEED
edoxa edoxa G1380 vi Aor Act 1 Sg SEEM suppose polla polla G4183 a_ Acc Pl n MANY much
emautw emautO G1683 pf 1 Dat Sg m to-MYself myself enantia enantia G1727 a_ Acc Pl n IN-INSTEAD contrary
onoma onoma G3686 n_ Acc Sg n NAME
ihsou iEsou G2424 n_ Gen Sg m OF-JESUS
I verily thought with myself, that I ought to do many things contrary to the name of Jesus of Nazareth.
nazwraiou nazOraiou G3480 n_ Gen Sg m NAZARENE
dein dein G1163 vn Pres im-Act TO-BE-BINDING
praxai praxai G4238 vn Aor Act TO-PRACTISE to-commit kai kai G2532 Conj AND pollous pollous G4183 a_ Acc Pl m MANY twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m OF-THE agiwn hagiOn G40 a_ Gen Pl m HOLY-ones saints exousian exousian G1849 n_ Acc Sg f authority
10 Which thing I also did in Jerusalem: and many of the saints did I shut up in prison, having received authority from the chief priests; and when they were put to death, I gave my voice against [them].
26:10 o
ho G3739 pr Acc Sg n WHICH
epoihsa epoiEsa G4160 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-DO
en en G1722 Prep IN
ierosolumois ierosolumois G2414 n_ Dat Pl n JERUSALEM
fulakais phulakais G5438 n_ Dat Pl f GUARDhouses jails
katekleisa katekleisa G2623 vi Aor Act 1 Sg DOWN-LOCK lock-up
thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m OF-THE the
arcierewn archiereOn G749 n_ Gen Pl m chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests
Translation : AV
Acts 26
labwn labOn G2983 vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m GETTING obtaining anairoumenwn anairoumenOn G337 vp Pres Pas Gen Pl m OF-beING-UP-LIFTED of-being-despatched pasas pasas G3956 a_ Acc Pl f ALL te te G5037 Part BESIDES autwn autOn G846 pp Gen Pl m OF-them kathnegka katEnegka G2702 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-DOWN-CARRY I-deposit yhfon psEphon G5586 n_ Acc Sg f PEBBLE ballot timwrwn timOrOn G5097 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m punishING autous autous G846 pp Acc Pl m them
11 And I punished them oft in every synagogue, and compelled [them] to blaspheme; and being exceedingly mad against them, I persecuted [them] even unto strange cities.
26:11 kai
kai G2532 Conj AND
kata kata G2596 Prep according-to
sunagwgas sunagOgas G4864 n_ Acc Pl f TOGETHER-LEADS synagogues
pollakis pollakis G4178 Adv MANY-times often
hnagkazon Enagkazon G315 vi Impf Act 1 Sg I-necessitatED I-compelled-them ediwkon ediOkon G1377 vi Impf Act 1 Sg I-CHASED I-persecuted-them
blasfhmein blasphEmein G987 vn Pres Act TO-BE-HARM-AVERRING to-be-blaspheming ews heOs G2193 Conj TILL as-far-as kai kai G2532 Conj AND also kai kai G2532 Conj AND also eis eis G1519 Prep INTO
perissws perissOs G4057 Adv exceedingly
emmainomenos emmainomenos G1693 vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m beING-IN-MAD being-exceedingly-mad
autois autois G846 pp Dat Pl m to-them
exw exO G1854 Adv OUT outside
poleis poleis G4172 n_ Acc Pl f cities
26:12 en
en G1722 Prep IN among kai kai G2532 Conj AND
ois hois G3739 pr Dat Pl n WHICH
poreuomenos poreuomenos G4198 vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m GOING
damaskon damaskon G1154 n_ Acc Sg f DAMASCUS
met met G3326 Prep WITH
exousias exousias G1849 n_ Gen Sg f authority
12 . Whereupon as I went to Damascus with authority and commission from the chief priests,
epitrophs epitropEs G2011 n_ Gen Sg f permission
ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f THE
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m OF-THE the thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE
arcierewn archiereOn G749 n_ Gen Pl m chief-SACRED-ones chief-priests odon hodon G3598 n_ Acc Sg f WAY road eidon eidon G1492 vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg I-PERCEIVED basileu basileu G935 n_ Voc Sg m KING ! ouranoqen ouranothen G3771 Adv from-heaven uper huper G5228 Prep OVER above
13 At midday, O king, I saw in the way a light from heaven, above the brightness of the sun, shining round about me and them which journeyed with me.
26:13 hmeras
hEmeras G2250 n_ Gen Sg f OF-DAY
meshs mesEs G3319 a_ Gen Sg f MIDst of-midst
lamprothta lamprotEta G2987 n_ Acc Sg f SHINE brightness emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg to-ME me
hliou hEliou G2246 n_ Gen Sg m SUN
perilamyan perilampsan G4034 vp Aor Act Acc Sg n ABOUT-SHINing shining-about
fws phOs G5457 n_ Acc Sg n LIGHT
tous tous G3588 t_ Acc Pl m THE-ones the-ones
sun sun G4862 Prep TOGETHER togetherwith
poreuomenous poreuomenous G4198 vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m GOING
26:14 pantwn
pantOn G3956 a_ Gen Pl m OF-ALL
katapesontwn katapesontOn G2667 vp 2Aor Act Gen Pl m DOWN-FALLING falling-down me me G3165 pp 1 Acc Sg ME kai kai G2532 Conj AND
hmwn hEmOn G2257 pp 1 Gen Pl US of-us
ghn gEn G1093 n_ Acc Sg f LAND earth
hkousa Ekousa G191 vi Aor Act 1 Sg I-HEAR
fwnhn phOnEn G5456 n_ Acc Sg f SOUND voice
lalousan lalousan G2980 vp Pres Act Acc Sg f TALKING speaking saoul saoul G4549 ni proper SAUL ( Heb. ) Saul
legousan legousan G3004 vp Pres Act Acc Sg f sayING
th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f to-THE
ebraidi hebraidi G1446 n_ Dat Sg f HEBREW
dialektw dialektO G1258 n_ Dat Sg f dialect vernacular kentra kentra G2759 n_ Acc Pl n PIERCers goads
saoul saoul G4549 ni proper SAUL ( Heb. ) Saul
14 And when we were all fallen to the earth, I heard a voice speaking unto me, and saying in the Hebrew tongue, Saul, Saul, why persecutest thou me? [it is] hard for thee to kick against the pricks.
ti ti G5101 pi Acc Sg n ANY why ?
diwkeis diOkeis G1377 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-CHASING you-are-persecuting tis tis G5101 pi Nom Sg m ANY who ?
sklhron sklEron G4642 a_ Nom Sg n HARD
soi soi G4671 pp 2 Dat Sg to-YOU
laktizein laktizein G2979 vn Pres Act TO-BE-KICKING
26:15 egw
eipon eipon G2036 vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg said
ei ei G1488 vi Pres vxx 2 Sg YOU-ARE
kurie kurie G2962 n_ Voc Sg m Master ! Lord !
eipen eipen G2036 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg said
15 And I said, Who art thou, Lord? And he said, I am Jesus whom thou persecutest.
Translation : AV
Acts 26
egw egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I eimi eimi G1510 vi Pres vxx 1 Sg AM ihsous iEsous G2424 n_ Nom Sg m JESUS on hon G3739 pr Acc Sg m WHOM su su G4771 pp 2 Nom Sg YOU diwkeis diOkeis G1377 vi Pres Act 2 Sg ARE-CHASING are-persecuting tous tous G3588 t_ Acc Pl m THE podas podas G4228 n_ Acc Pl m FEET sou sou G4675 pp 2 Gen Sg OF-YOU eis eis G1519 Prep INTO touto touto G5124 pd Acc Sg n this
16 But rise, and stand upon thy feet: for I have appeared unto thee for this purpose, to make thee a minister and a witness both of these things which thou hast seen, and of those things in the which I will appear unto thee;
26:16 alla anasthqi

alla G235 Conj but anastEthi G450 vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg BE-UP-STANDING be-you-rising ! soi soi G4671 pp 2 Dat Sg to-YOU
sthqi stEthi G2476 vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg BE-STANDING be-you-standing !
gar gar G1063 Conj for
wfqhn OphthEn G3700 vi Aor Pas 1 Sg I-WAS-VIEWED I-was-seen
proceirisasqai procheirisasthai G4400 vn Aor midD TO-be-BEFORE-HANDED to-fix-upon-beforehand te te G5037 Part BESIDES
uphrethn hupEretEn G5257 n_ Acc Sg m subservient deputy soi soi G4671 pp 2 Dat Sg to-YOU
martura martura G3144 n_ Acc Sg m witness
eides eides G1492 vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg YOU-PERCEIVED
wn hOn G3739 pr Gen Pl n OF-WHICH
ofqhsomai ophthEsomai G3700 vi Fut Pas 1 Sg I-SHALL-BE-BEING-VIEWED I-shall-be-being-seen tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m OF-THE laou laou G2992 n_ Gen Sg m PEOPLE
26:17 exairoumenos
exairoumenos G1807 vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m OUT-LIFTING extricating ous hous G3739 pr Acc Pl m WHOM nun nun G3568 Adv NOW se se G4571 pp 2 Acc Sg YOU
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl n OF-THE
eqnwn ethnOn G1484 n_ Gen Pl n NATIONS
17 Delivering thee from the people, and [from] the Gentiles, unto whom now I send thee,
apostellw apostellO G649 vi Pres Act 1 Sg I-AM-commissionING am-commissioning autwn autOn G846 pp Gen Pl m OF-them kai kai G2532 Conj AND epistreyai epistrepsai G1994 vn Aor Act TO-ON-TURN to-turn-about-them epi epi G1909 Prep ON apo apo G575 Prep FROM skotous skotous G4655 n_ Gen Sg n DARKness eis eis G1519 Prep INTO fws phOs G5457 n_ Acc Sg n LIGHT
18 To open their eyes, [and] to turn [them] from darkness to light, and [from] the power of Satan unto God, that they may receive forgiveness of sins, and inheritance among them which are sanctified by faith that is in me.
26:18 anoixai
anoixai G455 vn Aor Act TO-UP-OPEN to-open kai kai G2532 Conj AND ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f THE of-the
ofqalmous ophthalmous G3788 n_ Acc Pl m VIEWers eyes exousias exousias G1849 n_ Gen Sg f authority
satana satana G4567 n_ Gen Sg m SATAN (adversary) Satan amartiwn hamartiOn G266 n_ Gen Pl f OF-misses of-sins eis eis G1519 Prep INTO eme eme G1691 pp 1 Acc Sg ME
qeon theon G2316 n_ Acc Sg m God
labein labein G2983 vn 2Aor Act TO-BE-GETTING
autous autous G846 pp Acc Pl m them
afesin aphesin G859 n_ Acc Sg f FROM-LETTing pardon th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f THE
klhron klEron G2819 n_ Acc Sg m LOT allotment
en en G1722 Prep IN among
tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl m THE
hgiasmenois hEgiasmenois G37 vp Perf Pas Dat Pl m ones-HAVING-been-HOLYizED ones-having-been-hallowed
pistei pistei G4102 n_ Dat Sg f to-BELIEF to-faith
26:19 oqen
hothen G3606 Adv WHICH-PLACE whence optasia optasia G3701 n_ Dat Sg f VIEW apparition
agrippa agrippa G67 n_ Voc Sg m AGRIPPA Agrippa !
egenomhn egenomEn G1096 vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg I-BECAME
apeiqhs apeithEs G545 a_ Nom Sg m UN-PERSUADable stubborn
th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f to-THE
ouraniw ouraniO G3770 a_ Dat Sg f heavenly
19 Whereupon, O king Agrippa, I was not disobedient unto the heavenly vision:
26:20 alla
alla G235 Conj but
tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl m to-THE-ones to-the-ones
en en G1722 Prep IN
damaskw damaskO G1154 n_ Dat Sg f DAMASCUS
prwton prOton G4412 Adv BEFORE-most first
ierosolumois ierosolumois G2414 n_ Dat Pl n to-JERUSALEM in-Jerusalem
pasan pasan G3956 a_ Acc Sg f EVERY entire
20 But shewed first unto them of Damascus, and at Jerusalem, and throughout all the coasts of Judaea, and [then] to the Gentiles, that they
Translation : AV
Acts 26
te te G5037 Part BESIDES thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE cwran chOran G5561 n_ Acc Sg f SPACE province kai kai G2532 Conj AND ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE ioudaias ioudaias G2449 n_ Gen Sg f JUDEA kai kai G2532 Conj AND tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl n to-THE eqnesin ethnesin G1484 n_ Dat Pl n NATIONS aphggellon apEggellon G518 vi Impf Act 1 Sg I-FROM-MESSAGED I-reported metanoias metanoias G3341 n_ Gen Sg f after-MIND repentance
should repent and turn to God, and do works meet for repentance.
metanoein metanoein G3340 vn Pres Act TO-BE-after-MINDING to-be-repenting-them erga erga G2041 n_ Acc Pl n ACTS
epistrefein epistrephein G1994 vn Pres Act TO-BE-ON-TURNING to-be-turning-back
qeon theon G2316 n_ Acc Sg m God
axia axia G514 a_ Acc Pl n WORTHY
prassontas prassontas G4238 vp Pres Act Acc Pl m PRACTISING engaging-in toutwn toutOn G5130 pd Gen Pl n OF-these these-things me me G3165 pp 1 Acc Sg ME oi hoi G3588 t_ Nom Pl m THE ioudaioi ioudaioi G2453 a_ Nom Pl m JUDA-ans Jews sullabomenoi sullabomenoi G4815 vp 2Aor Mid Nom Pl m TOGETHER-GETTING apprehending en en G1722 Prep IN tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg n THE
21 For these causes the Jews caught me in the temple, and went about to kill [me].
26:21 eneka
heneka G1752 Adv on-account-of
ierw hierO G2411 n_ Dat Sg n SACRED-place sanctuary
epeirwnto epeirOnto G3987 vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Pl THEY-attemptED attempted oun oun G3767 Conj THEN
diaceirisasqai diacheirisasthai G1315 vn Aor Mid TO-be-THRU-HANDizED to-lay-hands-on-me ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE the para para G3844 Prep BESIDE tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m THE qeou theou G2316 n_ Gen Sg m God acri achri G891 Prep UNTIL ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f THE
22 Having therefore obtained help of God, I continue unto this day, witnessing both to small and great, saying none other things than those which the prophets and Moses did say should come:
26:22 epikourias
epikourias G1947 n_ Gen Sg f ON-JUVENILE of-assistance hmeras hEmeras G2250 n_ Gen Sg f DAY tauths tautEs G3778 pd Gen Sg f this
tucwn tuchOn G5177 vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m HAPPENING
esthka hestEka G2476 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-STOOD I-stand
marturoumenos marturoumenos G3140 vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m witnessING
mikrw mikrO G3398 a_ Dat Sg m to-LITTLE to-small
te te G5037 Part BESIDES bsboth
megalw megalO G3173 a_ Dat Sg m to-GREAT
ouden ouden G3762 a_ Acc Sg n NOT-YET-ONE nothing
ektos ektos G1622 Adv OUTside
legwn legOn G3004 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m sayING
te te G5037 Part BESIDES bsboth
oi hoi G3588 t_ Nom Pl m THE
profhtai prophEtai G4396 n_ Nom Pl m BEFORE-AVERers prophets
elalhsan elalEsan G2980 vi Aor Act 3 Pl TALK speak
mellontwn mellontOn G3195 vp Pres Act Gen Pl n OF-beING-ABOUT of-impending-things
ginesqai ginesthai G1096 vn Pres midD/pasD TO-BE-BECOMING to-be-occurring
mwshs mOsEs G3475 n_ Nom Sg m MOSES
26:23 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
paqhtos pathEtos G3805 a_ Nom Sg m EMOTION(adj) suffering
cristos christos G5547 n_ Nom Sg m ANOINTED Christ
ei ei G1487 Cond IF
prwtos prOtos G4413 a_ Nom Sg m BEFORE-most first-one law laO G2992 n_ Dat Sg m PEOPLE
ex ex G1537 Prep OUT
anastasews anastaseOs G386 n_ Gen Sg f OF-UP-STANDing of-resurrection tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl n to-THE
nekrwn nekrOn G3498 a_ Gen Pl m OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones
23 That Christ should suffer, [and] that he should be the first that should rise from the dead, and should shew light unto the people, and to the Gentiles.
fws phOs G5457 n_ Acc Sg n LIGHT
mellei mellei G3195 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-beING-ABOUT he-is-being-about de de G1161 Conj YET
kataggellein kataggellein G2605 vn Pres Act TO-BE-DOWN-MESSAGING to-be-announcing autou autou G846 pp Gen Sg m OF-him
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m to-THE
eqnesin ethnesin G1484 n_ Dat Pl n NATIONS
26:24 tauta
tauta G5023 pd Acc Pl n these these-things fwnh phOnE G5456 n_ Dat Sg f SOUND voice
apologoumenou apologoumenou G626 vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg m FROM-sayING defending paule paule G3972 n_ Voc Sg m PAUL !
fhstos phEstos G5347 n_ Nom Sg m FESTUS
megalh megalE G3173 a_ Dat Sg f to-GREAT to-loud
24 . And as he thus spake for himself, Festus said with a loud voice, Paul, thou art beside thyself; much learning doth make thee mad.
efh ephE G5346 vi Impf vxx 3 Sg AVERRed
mainh mainE G3105 vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg YOU-ARE-beING-MAD
ta ta G3588 t_ Nom Pl n THE
polla polla G4183 a_ Nom Pl n much
grammata grammata G1121 n_ Nom Pl n WRITings scripture(p)
Translation : AV
Acts 26
manian manian G3130 n_ Acc Sg f MADNESS peritrepei peritrepei G4062 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-ABOUT-REVERTING is-deranging de de G1161 Conj YET ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT mainomai mainomai G3105 vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg I-AM-beING-MAD fhsin phEsin G5346 vi Pres vxx 3 Sg IS-AVERRING kratiste kratiste G2903 a_ Voc Sg m MOST-HOLDing ! most-mighty ! fhste phEste G5347 n_ Voc Sg m FESTUS ! all all G235 Conj but
25 But he said, I am not mad, most noble Festus; but speak forth the words of truth and soberness.
26:25 o
ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE
alhqeias alEtheias G225 n_ Gen Sg f OF-TRUTH
swfrosunhs sOphrosunEs G4997 n_ Gen Sg f sanity
rhmata rEmata G4487 n_ Acc Pl n declarations
apofqeggomai apophtheggomai G669 vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg I-AM-FROM-UTTERING I-am-declaiming o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE basileus basileus G935 n_ Nom Sg m KING pros pros G4314 Prep TOWARD on hon G3739 pr Acc Sg m WHOM kai kai G2532 Conj AND also
26 For the king knoweth of these things, before whom also I speak freely: for I am persuaded that none of these things are hidden from him; for this thing was not done in a corner.
26:26 epistatai
epistatai G1987 vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg IS-adeptING is-being-adept parrhsiazomenos parrEsiazomenos G3955 vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m beING-bold
toutwn toutOn G5130 pd Gen Pl n these these-things
lalw lalO G2980 vi Pres Act 1 Sg I-AM-TALKING I-am-speaking
lanqanein lanthanein G2990 vn Pres Act TO-BE-beING-OBLIVIOUS-UP to-be-eluding ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT
auton auton G846 pp Acc Sg m him
ti ti G5100 px Acc Sg n ANY
toutwn toutOn G5130 pd Gen Pl n OF-these of-these-things gwnia gOnia G1137 n_ Dat Sg f CORNER
ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT
peiqomai peithomai G3982 vi Pres Pas 1 Sg I-AM-beING-PERSUADED
en en G1722 Prep IN
pepragmenon pepragmenon G4238 vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n HAVING-been-PRACTISED having-been-committed
touto touto G5124 pd Nom Sg n this
26:27 pisteueis
pisteueis G4100 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-BELIEVING
agrippa agrippa G67 n_ Voc Sg m AGRIPPA Agrippa !
tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl m to-THE the
profhtais prophEtais G4396 n_ Dat Pl m BEFORE-AVERers prophets
oida oida G1492 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-aware
27 King Agrippa, believest thou the prophets? I know that thou believest.
pisteueis pisteueis G4100 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-BELIEVING
26:28 o
agrippas agrippas G67 n_ Nom Sg m AGRIPPA
paulon paulon G3972 n_ Acc Sg m PAUL
en en G1722 Prep IN
oligw oligO G3641 a_ Dat Sg n FEW brief
28 Then Agrippa said unto Paul, Almost thou persuadest me to be a Christian.
peiqeis peitheis G3982 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-PERSUADING
cristianon christianon G5546 n_ Acc Sg m ANOINTED-ian Christian
genesqai genesthai G1096 vn 2Aor midD TO-BE-BECOMING
26:29 o
paulos paulos G3972 n_ Nom Sg m PAUL
eipen eipen G2036 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg said
euxaimhn euxaimEn G2172 vo Aor midD 1 Sg MAY-I-wish
qew theO G2316 n_ Dat Sg m God
en en G1722 Prep IN
29 And Paul said, I would to God, that not only thou, but also all that hear me this day, were both almost, and altogether such as I am, except these bonds.
oligw oligO G3641 a_ Dat Sg n FEW brief
en en G1722 Prep IN
pollw pollO G4183 a_ Dat Sg n MANY much
ou ou G3756 Part Neg NOT
monon monon G3440 Adv ONLY
alla alla G235 Conj but
pantas pantas G3956 a_ Acc Pl m ALL
tous tous G3588 t_ Acc Pl m THE
Translation : AV
Acts 26 - Acts 27
akouontas akouontas G191 vp Pres Act Acc Pl m ones-HEARING ones-hearing eimi eimi G1510 vi Pres vxx 1 Sg AM mou mou G3450 pp 1 Gen Sg OF-ME me shmeron sEmeron G4594 Adv toDAY genesqai genesthai G1096 vn 2Aor midD TO-BE-BECOMING toioutous toioutous G5108 pd Acc Pl m such such(p) opoios hopoios G3697 a_ Nom Sg n what-kind kagw kagO G2504 pp 1 Nom Sg Con AND-I also-I
parektos parektos G3924 Adv BESIDE-OUTed outside tauta tauta G5023 pd Acc Pl n these these-things
twn tOn G3588 t_ Gen Pl m OF-THE
desmwn desmOn G1199 n_ Gen Pl m BONDS
toutwn toutOn G5130 pd Gen Pl m these
26:30 kai
kai G2532 Conj AND
eipontos eipontos G2036 vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m OF-sayING
anesth anestE G450 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg UP-STOOD rose oi hoi G3588 t_ Nom Pl m THE
basileus basileus G935 n_ Nom Sg m KING
30 And when he had thus spoken, the king rose up, and the governor, and Bernice, and they that sat with them:
hgemwn hEdemOn G2232 n_ Nom Sg m LEADer governor
bernikh bernikE G959 n_ Nom Sg f Bernice
sugkaqhmenoi sugkathEmenoi G4775 vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m ones-TOGETHER-sittING ones-sitting-together
autois autois G846 pp Dat Pl m to-them with-them oti hoti G3754 Conj that
31 And when they were gone aside, they talked between themselves, saying, This man doeth nothing worthy of death or of bonds.
26:31 kai
kai G2532 Conj AND
anacwrhsantes anachOrEsantes G402 vp Aor Act Nom Pl m UP-SPACing retiring qanatou thanatou G2288 n_ Gen Sg m OF-DEATH axion axion G514 a_ Acc Sg n WORTHY deserving tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m to-THE
elaloun elaloun G2980 vi Impf Act 3 Pl THEY-TALKED they-spoke h E G2228 Part OR desmwn desmOn G1199 n_ Gen Pl m OF-BONDS
legontes legontes G3004 vp Pres Act Nom Pl m sayING
prassei prassei G4238 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-PRACTISING is-committing
anqrwpos anthrOpos G444 n_ Nom Sg m human
outos houtos G3778 pd Nom Sg m this
26:32 agrippas de
agrippas G67 n_ Nom Sg m AGRIPPA de G1161 Conj YET
fhstw phEstO G5347 n_ Dat Sg m FESTUS
apolelusqai apolelusthai G630 vn Perf Pas TO-HAVE-been-FROM-LOOSED to-have-been-released kaisara kaisara G2541 n_ Acc Sg m CAESAR
edunato edunato G1410 vi Impf midD/pasD 3 Sg was-ABLE could
32 Then said Agrippa unto Festus, This man might have been set at liberty, if he had not appealed unto Caesar.
anqrwpos anthrOpos G444 n_ Nom Sg m human
outos houtos G3778 pd Nom Sg m this
ei ei G1487 Cond IF
epekeklhto epekeklEto G1941 vi Plup midD 3 Sg he-HAD-ON-CALLED he-had-appealed-to
Translation : AV
Acts 27
27:1 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
ekriqh krinO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
apoplein apopleO
vn Pres Act
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
italian italia
n_ Acc Sg f
AS
YET it-WAS-JUDGED OF-THE it-was-decided ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
TO-BE-FROM-FLOATING US to-be-sailing-away paulon kai tinas paulos kai tis

n_ Acc Sg m Conj px Acc Pl m
INTO THE
ITALY
paredidoun paradidOmi
vi impf Act 3 Pl
te te
Part
eterous desmwtas ekatontarch heteros desmOtEs hekatontarchEs

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m n_ Dat Sg m
. And when it was determined that we should sail into Italy, they delivered Paul and certain other prisoners unto [one] named Julius, a centurion of Augustus'band.
THEY-BESIDE-GAVE THE they-gave-over
BESIDES PAUL bsboth
AND
ANY some
DIFFERENT
BONDers prisoners
to-HUNDRED-chief to-centurion
onomati iouliw speirhs sebasths onoma ioulios speira sebastos

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
to-NAME
JULIUS
OF-BAND of-squadron de de
Conj
OF-venerated imperial adramutthnw mellonti adramuttEnos mellO

a_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Dat Sg m
27:2 epibantes
epibainO
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
plein pleO
vn Pres Act
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ON-STEPPing stepping-on-board kata kata

Prep
YET to-FLOATer to-ADRAMYTTIUM to-ship of-Adramyttium asian asia

n_ Acc Sg f
beING-ABOUT
TO-BE-FLOATING INTO THE to-be-sailing sun sun

Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
topous anhcqhmen topos anagO

ontos eimi
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
And entering into a ship of Adramyttium, we launched, meaning to sail by the coasts of Asia; [one] Aristarchus, a Macedonian of Thessalonica, being with us.
according-to THE
ASIA PLACES province-of-Asia
WE-WERE-UP-LED OF-BEING we-set-out
aristarcou makedonos qessalonikews aristarchos makedOn thessalonikeus

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
Aristarchus
MACEDONIAN
THESSALONICAn
27:3 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
te te
Part
etera heteros
a_ Dat Sg f
kathcqhmen katagO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
sidwna filanqrwpws te sidOn philanthrOpOs te

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Part
to-THE
BESIDES DIFFERENT WE-WERE-DOWN-LED INTO SIDON different-day we-were-landing ioulios tw ioulios ho

FOND-humanly humanely
BESIDES
And the next [day] we touched at Sidon. And Julius courteously entreated Paul, and gave [him] liberty to go unto his friends to refresh himself.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulw paulos
n_ Dat Sg m
crhsamenos chraomai
epetreyen pros epitrepO pros

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
filous philos
a_ Acc Pl m
THE
JULIUS
to-THE the
PAUL
USing
he-permits permits-him
TOWARD THE
FOND-ones friends
poreuqenti poreuomai
vp Aor pasD Dat Sg m
epimeleias tucein epimeleia tugchanO

to-BEING-GONE
OF-ON-CARE of-care
TO-BE-HAPPENING casual upepleusamen hupopleO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
27:4 kakeiqen anacqentes

kakeithen
Adv Con
anagO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kupron dia kupros dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND-thence
BEING-UP-LED setting-out enantious enantios

a_ Acc Pl m
WE-UNDER-FLOAT THE we-sail-under-the-lee-of
CYPRUS
THRU THE because-of
THE
And when we had launched from thence, we sailed under Cyprus, because the winds were contrary.
anemous einai anemos eimi

n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
WINDS
TO-BE
IN-INSTEAD contrary(p) pelagos to pelagos ho

27:5 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
te te
Part
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kilikian kai pamfulian kilikia kai pamphulia

THE
BESIDES OCEAN
THE
according-to THE acoff mura mura

ni proper
CILICIA
AND
Pamphylia
And when we had sailed over the sea of Cilicia and Pamphylia, we came to Myra, [a city] of Lycia.
diapleusantes kathlqomen eis diapleO katerchomai eis

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
lukias lukia
n_ Gen Sg f
THRU-FLOATing sailing-through
WE-DOWN-CAME INTO MYRA we-came-down eurwn heuriskO

OF-THE
LYCIA
27:6 kakei
kakei
Adv Con
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarchs ploion alexandrinon pleon hekatontarchEs ploion alexandrinos pleO

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Act Acc Sg n
AND-there FINDING
THE
HUNDRED-chief centurion hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
FLOATer ship auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
ALEXANDRIAN
FLOATING sailing
And there the centurion found a ship of Alexandria sailing into Italy; and he put us therein.
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
italian enebibasen italia embibazO

eis eis
Prep
INTO THE
ITALY
he-IN-have-STEPS US has-step-on-board
INTO it
AV
Acts 27
27:7 en
en
Prep
ikanais hikanos
a_ Dat Pl f
de de
Conj
hmerais braduploountes kai molis genomenoi hEmera braduploeO kai molis ginomai
n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj Adv vp 2Aor midD Nom Pl m
kata kata
Prep
IN
enough YET DAYS considerable knidon mh knidos mE

TARDY-FLOATING sailing-tardily hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
AND
HARDLY BECOMING
according-to acoff thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prosewntos proseaO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anemou anemos
n_ Gen Sg m
upepleusamen hupopleO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
And when we had sailed slowly many days, and scarce were come over against Cnidus, the wind not suffering us, we sailed under Crete, over against Salmone;
THE
CNIDUS
NO
OF-TOWARD-LEAVING US of-leaving-toward-it
THE
WIND
WE-UNDER-FLOAT THE we-sail-under-the-lee-of
krhthn kata krEtE kata

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
salmwnhn salmOnE
n_ Acc Sg f
CRETE
according-to SALMONE acoff Salome paralegomenoi paralegomai

27:8 molis te
molis
Adv
te
Part
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
hlqomen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
HARDLY BESIDES BESIDE-LAYING skirting kaloumenon kaleO

her herit
WE-CAME
WH WH
INTO PLACE
WH
ANY certain
NA
And, hardly passing it, came unto a place which is called The fair havens; nigh whereunto was the city [of] Lasea.
kalous limenas w kalos limEn hos

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pr Dat Sg m
eggus eggus
Adv
hn polis lasea
polis polis
n_ Nom Sg f
NA
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
beING-CALLED
NA
IDEAL
LAKES Harbors
to-WHICH
NEAR
city
WAS
lasaia lasaia
n_ Nom Sg f
LASEA of-Lasea
27:9 ikanou
hikanos
a_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
cronou chronos
n_ Gen Sg m
diagenomenou diaginomai
kai ontos kai eimi

Conj vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
hdh EdE
Adv
episfalous episphalEs
a_ Gen Sg m
of-enough YET TIME of-considerable tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THRU-BECOMING elapsing to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
BEING of-being
ALREADY OF-ON-TOTTERing hazardous parelhluqenai parerchomai

vn 2Perf Act
Now when much time was spent, and when sailing was now dangerous, because the fast was now already past, Paul admonished [them],
ploos ploos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
nhsteian hdh nEsteia EdE

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
THE
FLOATing sailing o ho
THRU THE because-of paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
AND also
THE
fast
ALREADY TO-HAVE-BESIDE-COME to-have-passed-by
parhnei paraineO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
exhortED THE exhorted-them
PAUL
27:10 legwn
legO
autois andres autos anEr

pp Dat Pl m n_ Voc Pl m
qewrw theOreO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti meta ubrews kai pollhs hoti meta hubris kai polus
Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Gen Sg f
sayING
to-them
MEN men !
I-AM-beholdING that
WITH
OUTRAGE damage
AND
much
10 And said unto them, Sirs, I perceive that this voyage will be with hurt and much damage, not only of the lading and ship, but also of our lives.
zhmias zEmia
n_ Gen Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
monon tou monon ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
fortiou kai tou phortion kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
alla kai twn alla kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Gen Pl f
yucwn psuchE
n_ Gen Pl f
FINE (forfeit) NOT forfeit hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
ONLY
OF-THE
load lading ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
OF-THE
FLOATer ship
but
AND also
OF-THE
souls
mellein mellO
vn Pres Act
esesqai eimi
vn Fut vxx
ploun ploos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-US
TO-BE-ABOUT TO-SHALL-BE THE to-be-being-about de de

Conj
FLOATing sailing kubernhth kai tw kubernEtEs kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg m
27:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarchs tw hekatontarchEs ho
nauklhrw nauklEros
n_ Dat Sg m
mallon mallon
Adv
THE
YET HUNDRED-chief centurion h E

Part
to-THE
STEERer navigator legomenois legO

AND
to-THE
NAUTICAL-LOT RATHER charterer-of-the-ship
11 Nevertheless the centurion believed the master and the owner of the ship, more than those things which were spoken by Paul.
epeiqeto peithO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
upo paulou hupo paulos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
was-PERSUADED OR to-THE than to-the(p)
by
PAUL
beING-said
27:12 aneuqetou
aneuthetos
a_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
limenos uparcontos limEn huparchO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
paraceimasian oi paracheimasia ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Pl m
OF-UN-WELL-PLACED YET THE of-unfit
LAKE harbor
TOWARD BESIDE-WINTER wintering
THE
12 . And because the haven was not commodious to winter in, the more part advised to depart thence also, if by any means they might attain to
AV
Acts 27
pleiones polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
eqento tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
boulhn anacqhnai ekeiqen eipws boulE anagO ekeithen eipOs

n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Pas Adv Cond _P
dunainto dunamai
vo Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
MORE majority
PLACED
COUNSEL
TO-BE-UP-LED thence to-set-out paraceimasai paracheimazO

vn Aor Act
IF-how MAY-THEY-BE-ABLE if-somehow they-may-be-able limena limEn

n_ Acc Sg m
Phenice, [and there] to winter; [which is] an haven of Crete, and lieth toward the south west and north west.
katanthsantes eis katantaO eis

foinika phoinix
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
krhths bleponta krEtE blepO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
attaining arriving-at kata kata

Prep
INTO Phoenix (PALM) TO-BESIDE-WINTER LAKE Phoenix to-winter harbor liba lips
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
CRETE
lookING
kai kata kai kata

Conj Prep
cwron chOros
n_ Acc Sg m
according-to SOUTH-WEST AND actoward southwest
according-to NORTH-WEST actoward northwest notou notos

n_ Gen Sg m
27:13 upopneusantos de
hupopneO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
de
Conj
doxantes dokeO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
proqesews prothesis
n_ Gen Sg f
kekrathkenai krateO
vn Perf Act
UNDER-BLOW ing of-blowing-gently arantes airO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
YET OF-SOUTH SEEMing of-south-wind supposing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
BEFORE-PLACing TO-HAVE-HELD purpose
13 And when the south wind blew softly, supposing that they had obtained [their] purpose, loosing [thence], they sailed close by Crete.
asson parelegonto asson paralegomai

Adv vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
krhthn krEtE
n_ Acc Sg f
LIFTing weighing-anchor
CLOSE
THEY-BESIDE-LAYED THE they-skirted-along de de

Conj
CRETE
27:14 met ou
meta
Prep
ou
Part Neg
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
ebalen ballO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kat kata
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
anemos anemos
n_ Nom Sg m
tufwnikos o tuphOnikos ho
14 But not long after there arose against it a tempestuous wind, called Euroclydon.
after
NOT
MANY much
YET CASTS
DOWN her against herit
WIND
HURRICANE
THE
kaloumenos kaleO
eurakulwn eurakulOn
n_ Nom Sg m
beING-CALLED
EAST-NORTHer Northeaster de de
Conj
27:15 sunarpasqentos
sunarpazO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
dunamenou dunamai
OF-BEING-TOGETHER-SNATCHED YET THE of-being-gripped antofqalmein antophthalmeO

vn Pres Act
FLOATer ship
AND
NO
beING-ABLE
15 And when the ship was caught, and could not bear up into the wind, we let [her] drive.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
anemw anemos
n_ Dat Sg m
epidontes epididOmi
eferomeqa pherO
vi impf Pas 1 Pl
TO-BE-INSTEAD-VIEWING to-THE to-be-luffing
WIND
ON-GIVING giving-up-her
WE-were-CARRIED we-were-carried-along kauda iscusamen kauda ischuO

27:16 nhsion
nEsion
n_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
upodramontes kaloumenon hupotrechO kaleO

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n
molis molis
Adv
ISLET
YET ANY certain
UNDER-RUNNING running-under ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
beING-CALLED
CAUDA
WE-are-STRONG HARDLY
16 And running under a certain island which is called Clauda, we had much work to come by the boat:
perikrateis genesqai perikratEs ginomai

a_ Nom Pl m vn 2Aor midD
skafhs skaphE
n_ Gen Sg f
ABOUT-HOLD hold-off(p)
TO-BE-BECOMING OF-THE
DUG-out skiff upozwnnuntes to hupozOnnumi ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
27:17 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
arantes airO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
bohqeiais ecrwnto boEtheia chraomai

n_ Dat Pl f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
WHICH
LIFTing hoisting te te
Part
helps stays mh mE
Part Neg
THEY-USED
UNDER-GIRDING undergirding ekpeswsin ekpiptO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
FLOATer ship
foboumenoi phobeO
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
surtin surtis
n_ Acc Sg f
17 Which when they had taken up, they used helps, undergirding the ship; and, fearing lest they should fall into the quicksands, strake sail, and so were driven.
FEARING
BESIDES NO
INTO THE
DRAG THEY-SHOULD-BE-OUT-FALLING Syrtis-quicksand they-should-be-falling
calasantes to chalaO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
skeuos skeuos
n_ Acc Sg n
outws eferonto houtOs pherO

Adv vi impf Pas 3 Pl
LOWERing
THE
INSTRUMENT thus gear ceimazomenwn cheimazO

THEY-were-CARRIED they-were-carried-along hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
27:18 sfodrws de
sphodrOs
Adv
de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
exhs hexEs
Adv
ekbolhn ekbolE
n_ Acc Sg f
epoiounto poieO
vi impf Mid 3 Pl
18 And we being exceedingly tossed with a tempest, the next [day] they lightened the ship;
VEHEMENTly tremendously
YET OF-beING-WINTERED US of-being-tossed-by-the-tempest
THE to-the
next OUT-CASTing THEY-DID next-day jettison
AV
Acts 27
27:19 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
autoceires thn autocheir ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
skeuhn skeuE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
erriyan rhiptO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
19 And the third [day] we cast out with our own hands the tackling of the ship.
AND
THE to-the
third third-day de de
Conj
SAME-HANDS with-own-hands mhte mEte

Conj
THE
INSTRUMENT OF-THE gear
FLOATer ship
THEY-TOSS they-toss-over hmeras hEmera

n_ Acc Pl f
20 And when neither sun nor stars in many days appeared, and no small tempest lay on [us], all hope that we should be saved was then taken away.
27:20 mhte
mEte
Conj
hliou hElios
n_ Gen Sg m
astrwn astron
n_ Gen Pl n
epifainontwn epi pleionas epiphainO epi polus

vp Pres Act Gen Pl n Prep a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
NO-BESIDES YET OF-SUN neither ceimwnos te cheimOn te

n_ Gen Sg m Part
NO-BESIDES OF-GLEAMERS ON-APPEARING nor of-constellations making-advent oligou oligos

a_ Gen Sg m
ON
MORE
DAYS
ouk ou
Part Neg
epikeimenou epikeimai
loipon perihreito loipon periaireO

a_ Acc Sg n vi impf Pas 3 Sg
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-WINTER of-tempest pasa pas

a_ Nom Sg f
BESIDES NOT
FEW slight
ON-LYING lying-on-us hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
rest further
was-ABOUT-LIFTED EXPECTATION was-taken-from-about
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
swzesqai sOzO
vn Pres Pas
EVERY all
OF-THE
TO-BE-beING-SAVED US
27:21 pollhs te
polus
a_ Gen Sg f
te
Part
asitias uparcoushs asitia huparchO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg f
tote staqeis tote histEmi

Adv vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
OF-much
BESIDES UN-GRAIN abstinence eipen legO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
belongING being-inherent men men

Part
then
BEING-STOOD standing
THE
PAUL
IN
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
w andres O anEr
Inj n_ Voc Pl m
peiqarchsantas moi peitharcheO egO

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m pp 1 Dat Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
21 . But after long abstinence Paul stood forth in the midst of them, and said, Sirs, ye should have hearkened unto me, and not have loosed from Crete, and to have gained this harm and loss.
MIDst
OF-them
said
it-WAS-BINDING INDEED o !
MEN men !
yielding
to-ME
NO
anagesqai anagO
vn Pres Pas
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
krhths kerdhsai te krEtE kerdainO te

n_ Gen Sg f vn Aor Act Part
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ubrin hubris
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn kai houtos kai

pd Acc Sg f Conj
TO-BE-beING-UP-LED FROM THE to-be-being-set-out thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
CRETE
TO-GAIN
BESIDES THE
OUTRAGE this damage
AND also
zhmian zEmia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
FINE (forfeit) forfeit nun parainw nun paraineO

27:22 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
euqumein euthumeO
vn Pres Act
apobolh apobolE
n_ Nom Sg f
gar yuchs gar psuchE

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
AND
THE the(p) estai eimi
NOW I-AM-exhortING YOU(p) ye ex ek

Prep
TO-BE-WELL-FEELING FROM-CASTing for to-be-being-cheerful casting-away tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
OF-soul
22 And now I exhort you to be of good cheer: for there shall be no loss of [any man's] life among you, but of the ship.
oudemia oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
plhn plEn
Adv
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE SHALL-BE not-one
OUT OF-YOU(p) MOREly OF-THE of-ye more-than the gar moi gar egO
Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
FLOATer ship tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
27:23 paresth
paristEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
23 For there stood by me this night the angel of God, whose I am, and whom I serve,
BESIDE-STOOD for there-stood-beside eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
NA
to-ME me w hos
this
THE
NIGHT
OF-THE
God
OF-WHOM whose
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kai latreuw kai latreuO

aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
pr Dat Sg m
AM
to-WHOM
AND also
I-AM-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE MESSENGER
27:24 legwn
legO
mh mE
Part Neg
fobou phobeO
paule paulos
n_ Voc Sg m
kaisari kaisar
n_ Dat Sg m
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
sayING
NO
PAUL !
to-CEASAR YOU
it-IS-BINDING must qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
24 Saying, Fear not, Paul; thou must be brought before Caesar: and, lo, God hath given thee all them that sail with thee.
parasthnai paristEmi
vn 2Aor Act
kai idou kai idou

kecaristai charizomai
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pantas tous pas ho

TO-BESIDE-STAND AND to-stand-before pleontas pleO

BE-PERCEIVING HAS-gracED to-YOU lo ! has-granted-graciously you
THE
God
ALL
THE
meta sou meta su

Prep pp 2 Gen Sg
ones-FLOATING ones-sailing
WITH
YOU
AV
Acts 27
27:25 dio
dio
Conj
euqumeite euthumeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
andres anEr
n_ Voc Pl m
pisteuw pisteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti outws hoti houtOs

Conj Adv
25 Wherefore, sirs, be of good cheer: for I believe God, that it shall be even as it was told me.
THRU-WHICH BE-YE-WELL-FEELING MEN wherefore be-ye-being-cheerful ! men ! estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
I-AM-BELIEVING for
to-THE the
God
that
thus
kaq kata
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
tropon lelalhtai tropos laleO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
it-SHALL-BE
according-to WHICH
manner
it-HAS-been-TALKED to-ME it-has-been-spoken hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
27:26 eis
eis
Prep
nhson nEsos
n_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
ekpesein ekpiptO
vn 2Aor Act
26 Howbeit we must be cast upon a certain island.
INTO ISLAND
YET ANY certain
it-IS-BINDING
US
TO-BE-OUT-FALLING to-be-falling-off diaferomenwn diapherO

27:27 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
tessareskaidekath nux tessareskaidekatos nux

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
AS
YET FOUR-AND-TENth fourteenth adria adrias

n_ Dat Sg m
NIGHT
BECAME
OF-beING-THRU-CARRIED US of-cruising-about of-us oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kata kata
Prep
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
nuktos upenooun nux huponoeO

nautai nautEs
n_ Nom Pl m
27 But when the fourteenth night was come, as we were driven up and down in Adria, about midnight the shipmen deemed that they drew near to some country;
THE
ADRIA
according-to MIDst middle tina tis

px Acc Sg f
OF-THE
NIGHT
UNDER-MINDED THE suspected
mariners
prosagein prosagO
vn Pres Act
autois cwran autos chOra

TO-BE-TOWARD-LEADING ANY to-be-nearing some
to-them them euron heuriskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
SPACE country orguias orguia

n_ Acc Pl f
27:28 kai bolisantes

kai
Conj
bolizO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
eikosi eikosi
n_ Nom Pl m
bracu brachus
a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
diasthsantes kai diistEmi kai

AND
CASTizing sounding
THEY-FOUND EXTENDED-LIMBS TWENTY fathoms euron heuriskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
BIT
YET THRU-STANDing being-interval
AND
28 And sounded, and found [it] twenty fathoms: and when they had gone a little further, they sounded again, and found [it] fifteen fathoms.
palin bolisantes palin bolizO

Adv vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
orguias orguia
n_ Acc Pl f
dekapente dekapente
ni numeral
AGAIN
CASTizing sounding
THEY-FOUND EXTENDED-LIMBS TEN-FIVE fathoms fifteen te te

Part
27:29 foboumenoi
phobeO
mh mE
Part Neg
pou pou
Part
kata kata
Prep
traceis topous trachus topos

FEARING
BESIDES NO lest ek ek
Prep
?-where according-to ROUGH somewhere
PLACES
29 Then fearing lest we should have fallen upon rocks, they cast four anchors out of the stern, and wished for the day.
ekpeswmen ekpiptO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
prumnhs riyantes prumna rhiptO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
agkuras tessaras huconto agkura tessares euchomai

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-OUT-FALLING OUT OF-STERN we-should-be-falling-off hmeran genesqai hEmera ginomai

n_ Acc Sg f vn 2Aor midD
TOSSing pitching
ANCHORS
FOUR
THEY-wishED
DAY
TO-BE-BECOMING
27:30 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
nautwn zhtountwn nautEs zEteO

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
fugein pheugO
vn 2Aor Act
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ploiou ploion
n_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE
YET mariners
SEEKING
TO-BE-FLEEING OUT OF-THE
FLOATer ship
AND
calasantwn thn chalaO ho

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
skafhn eis skaphE eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan profasei thalassa prophasis

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
ws ek hOs ek
Adv Prep
30 And as the shipmen were about to flee out of the ship, when they had let down the boat into the sea, under colour as though they would have cast anchors out of the foreship,
OF-LOWERing
THE
DUG-out skiff
INTO THE
SEA
to-BEFORE-APPEARance AS to-pretense
OUT
prwrhs prOra
n_ Gen Sg f
agkuras mellontwn agkura mellO

n_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
ekteinein ekteinO
vn Pres Act
OF-BEFORE-GUSH ANCHORS of-prow
beING-ABOUT
TO-BE-OUT-STRETCHING to-be-stretching-out tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
27:31 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ekatontarch kai tois hekatontarchEs kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl m
stratiwtais stratiOtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
said
THE
PAUL
to-THE
AND
to-THE
WARriors soldiers
31 Paul said to the centurion and to the soldiers, Except these abide in the ship, ye cannot be saved.
AV
Acts 27
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
meinwsin menO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
ou ou
Part Neg
IF-EVER NO
these
SHOULD-BE-REMAINING IN
THE
FLOATer ship
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-SAVED NOT
dunasqe dunamai
ARE-ABLE can
27:32 tote apekoyan oi

tote
Adv
apokoptO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
stratiwtai ta stratiOtEs ho
scoinia ths schoinion ho

n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
skafhs kai skaphE kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
32 Then the soldiers cut off the ropes of the boat, and let her fall off.
then
FROM-STRIKE THE strike-off authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
WARriors soldiers
THE
RUSHES ropes
OF-THE
DUG-out skiff
AND
eiasan eaO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ekpesein ekpiptO
vn 2Aor Act
THEY-LEAVE her they-let
TO-BE-OUT-FALLING to-be-falling-off ou hos

pr Gen Sg n
27:33 acri de
achri
Prep
de
Conj
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
hmellen mellO
ginesqai ginomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
parekalei parakaleO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
UNTIL YET OF-WHICH DAY which apantas metalabein hapas metalambanO

a_ Acc Pl m vn 2Aor Act
WAS-ABOUT
TO-BE-BECOMING BESIDE-CALLED THE entreated
PAUL
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
legwn legO
tessareskaidekathn shmeron tessareskaidekatos sEmeron

a_ Acc Sg f Adv
33 And while the day was coming on, Paul besought [them] all to take meat, saying, This day is the fourteenth day that ye have tarried and continued fasting, having taken nothing.
ALL(emph.)
TO-BE-WITH-GETTING OF-NURTURE sayING to-be-partaking of-nourishment diateleite diateleO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
FOUR-AND-TENth fourteenth mhqen mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
toDAY
hmeran prosdokwntes asitoi hEmera prosdokaO asitos

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
proslabomenoi proslambanO
vp 2Aor Mid Nom Pl m
DAY
TOWARD-SEEMING being-apprehensive
UN-GRAIN abstinent
YE-ARE-THRU-FINISHING NO-PLACE TOWARD-GETTING ye-are-being-constantly nothing taking-to umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
27:34 dio
dio
Conj
parakalw parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
metalabein metalambanO
vn 2Aor Act
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar pros gar pros

Conj Prep
THRU-WHICH I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YOU(p) wherefore I-am-entreating ye ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-WITH-GETTING OF-NURTURE this to-be-partaking of-nourishment oudenos oudeis

a_ Gen Sg m
for
TOWARD
34 Wherefore I pray you to take [some] meat: for this is for your health: for there shall not an hair fall from the head of any of you.
umeteras swthrias uparcei humeteros sOtEria huparchO

ps 2 Gen Sg n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar umwn gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
qrix thrix
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE the
YOUR-more of-yours(emph.)
SAVing salvation
IS-belongING
OF-NOT-YET-ONE for of-not-one
OF-YOU(p) HAIR of-ye
FROM THE
kefalhs apoleitai kephalE apollumi

n_ Gen Sg f vi 2Fut Mid 3 Sg
HEAD
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED shall-be-perishing de de
Conj
27:35 eipas
legO
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
kai labwn kai lambanO

arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
eucaristhsen tw eucharisteO ho
saying
YET these AND these-things
GETTING taking
BREAD
he-thanks
to-THE the
35 And when he had thus spoken, he took bread, and gave thanks to God in presence of them all: and when he had broken [it], he began to eat.
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
enwpion pantwn kai klasas enOpion pas kai klaO

Adv a_ Gen Pl m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hrxato archO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
esqiein esthiO
vn Pres Act
God
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-ALL all de de
Conj
AND
BREAKing breaking-it pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
he-begins
TO-BE-EATING
27:36 euqumoi
euthumos
a_ Nom Pl m
genomenoi ginomai
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
proselabonto trofhs proslambanO trophE

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl n_ Gen Sg f
36 Then were they all of good cheer, and they also took [some] meat.
WELL-FEELing YET BECOMING cheerful
ALL
AND also en en
Prep
they
TOWARD-GOT took-to ploiw ploion

n_ Dat Sg n
WH
OF-NURTURE nourishment
NA
27:37 hmeqa
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
de de
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
yucai psuchE
n_ Nom Pl f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ws
diakosiai diakosioi
n_ Nom Pl f
37 And we were in all in the ship two hundred threescore and sixteen souls.
WE-WERE
YET THE
ALL
souls
IN
THE
FLOATer ship
TWO-hundred
ebdomhkonta ex hebdomEkonta hex

SEVENTY
SIX
AV
Acts 27
27:38 koresqentes de
korennumi
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
de
Conj
trofhs trophE
n_ Gen Sg f
ekoufizon to kouphizO ho
vi impf Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ekballomenoi ton ploion ekballO ho

n_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
BEING-SATED
YET OF-NURTURE THEY-BUOYED of-nourishment qalassan thalassa

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
FLOATer ship
CASTING-OUT
THE
38 And when they had eaten enough, they lightened the ship, and cast out the wheat into the sea.
siton sitos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
GRAIN
INTO THE
SEA
27:39 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
epeginwskon kolpon de epiginOskO kolpos de

vi impf Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg m Conj
when
YET DAY
BECAME
THE
LAND
NOT
THEY-ON-KNEW they-recognized ebouleuonto bouleuO

BOSOM gulf ei ei
Cond
YET
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
katenooun econta katanoeO echO

vi impf Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
aigialon eis aigialos eis

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
39 And when it was day, they knew not the land: but they discovered a certain creek with a shore, into the which they were minded, if it were possible, to thrust in the ship.
ANY certain
DOWN-MINDED considered
WH
HAVING
NA
BEACH
INTO WHICH
THEY-COUNSELLED IF they-planned
dunainto dunamai
vo Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
ekswsai
exwsai exOtheO
vn Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploion ploion
n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-MAY-BE-ABLE
TO-OUT-THRUST to-thrust-out
THE
FLOATer ship eis eis

Prep
27:40 kai tas

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
agkuras perielontes eiwn agkura periaireO eaO

n_ Acc Pl f vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qalassan ama thalassa hama

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
AND
THE
ANCHORS
ABOUT-LIFTING taking-from-about-it twn ho
THEY-LEFT INTO THE they-left-them
SEA
SIMULTANEOUS at-the-same-time ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
anentes aniEmi
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
zeukthrias zeuktEria
n_ Acc Pl f
phdaliwn kai eparantes pEdalion kai epairO

n_ Gen Pl n Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
40 And when they had taken up the anchors, they committed [themselves] unto the sea, and loosed the rudder bands, and hoised up the mainsail to the wind, and made toward shore.
t_ Gen Pl n
UP-LETTING slacking artemwna th artemOn ho

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YOKE-instruments OF-THE lashings pneoush pneO

vp Pres Act Dat Sg f
rudders
AND
ON-LIFTing hoisting aigialon aigialos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
kateicon katechO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
t_ Dat Sg f
SUSPEND foresail
to-THE
BLOWING breeze eis eis

Prep
THEY-DOWN-HAD INTO THE they-kept-course topon topos

n_ Acc Sg m
BEACH
27:41 peripesontes de
peripiptO
de
Conj
diqalasson epekeilan dithalassos epikellO

a_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
naun naus
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
ABOUT-FALLING falling-into h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
YET INTO PLACE
THRU-SEA with-a-channel emeinen menO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THEY-ON-PROPEL THE they-run-aground asaleutos h asaleutos ho

a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
NAUTICAL AND craft de de

Conj
men men
Part
prwra prOra
n_ Nom Sg f
ereisasa ereidO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
prumna prumna
n_ Nom Sg f
41 And falling into a place where two seas met, they ran the ship aground; and the forepart stuck fast, and remained unmoveable, but the hinder part was broken with the violence of the waves.
THE
INDEED BEFORE-GUSH STICKing prow upo ths hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
REMAINS
NA NA
UN-SHAKable unshakable
THE
YET STERN
elueto luO
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
bias bia
n_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
kumatwn kuma
n_ Gen Pl n
was-LOOSED by was-broken-up
THE
FORCE violence
OF-THE
BILLOWS
27:42 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
de de
Conj
stratiwtwn boulh stratiOtEs boulE

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg f
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
desmwtas desmOtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
YET WARriors soldiers mh mE

Part Neg
COUNSEL
BECAME
THAT THE
BONDers prisoners
42 And the soldiers'counsel was to kill the prisoners, lest any of them should swim out, and escape.
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ekkolumbhsas diafugh ekkolumbaO diapheugO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING NO they-may-be-killing lest
ANY anyone
OUT-SWIMMing swimming-out
MAY-BE-THRU-FLEEING may-be-fleeing-away diaswsai diasOzO

vn Aor Act
27:43 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ekatontarchs boulomenos hekatontarchEs boulomai

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paulon paulos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET HUNDRED-chief centurion
intendING
TO-THRU-SAVE THE to-save-through tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
PAUL
ekwlusen autous tou kOluO autos ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
boulhmatos ekeleusen te boulEma keleuO te

n_ Gen Sg n vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part
dunamenous dunamai
43 But the centurion, willing to save Paul, kept them from [their] purpose; and commanded that they which could swim should cast [themselves] first [into the sea], and get to land:
FORBIDS prevents
them
OF-THE
COUNSEL-effect intention
he-ORDERS
BESIDES THE
ones-beING-ABLE ones-being-able
AV
Acts 27 - Acts 28
kolumban kolumbaO
vn Pres Act
aporiyantas prwtous aporrhiptO prOtos

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
exienai exeimi
vn Pres vxx
TO-BE-SWIMMING FROM-TOSSing diving
BEFORE-most ON first men men

Part
THE
LAND
TO-OUT-BE to-be-off de de
Conj
27:44 kai tous

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
loipous ous loipon hos

epi sanisin ous epi sanis hos

Prep n_ Dat Pl f pr Acc Pl m
epi tinwn epi tis

Prep px Gen Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
AND
THE
rest rest(p) ploiou ploion

n_ Gen Sg n
WHOM whom(p)
INDEED ON
PLANKS
WHOM whom(p)
YET ON
ANY something epi thn epi ho

Prep
OF-THE of-the(p)
44 And the rest, some on boards, and some on [broken pieces] of the ship. And so it came to pass, that they escaped all safe to land.
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kai outws egeneto kai houtOs ginomai

Conj Adv vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
pantas diaswqhnai pas diasOzO

a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Pas
t_ Acc Sg f
FROM THE
FLOATer ship
AND
thus
BECAME
ALL
TO-BE-THRU-SAVED ON to-be-saved-through
THE
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
LAND
AV
Acts 28
28:1 kai diaswqentes

kai
Conj
diasOzO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
tote epegnwmen oti tote epiginOskO hoti

Adv vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj
WH
melithnh
NA
melith melitE
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
nhsos nEsos
n_ Nom Sg f
. And when they were escaped, then they knew that the island was called Melita.
AND
BEING-THRU-SAVED then being-saved-through
WE-ON-KNEW we-recognized
that
MELITA
THE
ISLAND
kaleitai kaleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-CALLED
28:2 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
te te
Part
barbaroi barbaros
a_ Nom Pl m
pareicon ou parechO ou
vi impf Act 3 Pl Part Neg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tucousan tugchanO
vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg f
filanqrwpian philanthrOpia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
BESIDES BARBARIANS tendered
NOT
THE
HAPPENING casual
FONDness-of-humanity philanthropy dia dia

Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ayantes haptO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
gar puran gar pura

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
proselabonto pantas hmas proslambanO pas hEmeis

vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl a_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Acc Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
And the barbarous people shewed us no little kindness: for they kindled a fire, and received us every one, because of the present rain, and because of the cold.
to-US us ueton huetos

n_ Acc Sg m
TOUCHing kindling ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
for
FIRE
THEY-TOWARD-GOT ALL they-took-in kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
US
THRU THE because-of
efestwta ephistEmi
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
yucos psuchos
n_ Acc Sg n
WET shower
THE
HAVING-ON-STOOD AND being-imminent de de

Conj
THRU THE because-of paulou paulos

n_ Gen Sg m
cold
28:3 sustreyantos
sustrephO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
fruganwn ti phruganon tis

n_ Gen Pl n px Acc Sg n
plhqos kai plEthos kai

n_ Acc Sg n Conj
OF-TOGETHER-TURNing YET THE of-twisting-together of-the epiqentos epitithEmi

PAUL
KINDLING of-kindling apo apo

Prep
ANY certain qermhs thermE

n_ Gen Sg f
multitude quantity
AND
And when Paul had gathered a bundle of sticks, and laid [them] on the fire, there came a viper out of the heat, and fastened on his hand.
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
puran pura
n_ Acc Sg f
ecidna echidna
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
exelqousa exerchomai
OF-ON-PLACING of-placing-on-it kaqhyen kathaptO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ON
THE
FIRE
VIPER
FROM THE
WARMTH
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
DOWN-TOUCHES OF-THE fastens-on the
HAND
OF-him
28:4 ws de
hOs
Adv
de
Conj
eidon eidO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
barbaroi barbaros
a_ Nom Pl m
kremamenon kremannumi
vp Pres Mid Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qhrion thErion
n_ Acc Sg n
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AS
YET PERCEIVED
THE
BARBARIANS beING-HANGED hanging
THE
WILD-BEAST OUT OF-THE
ceiros cheir
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
allhlous elegon allElOn legO

pc Acc Pl m vi impf Act 3 Pl
pantws foneus pantOs phoneus

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
And when the barbarians saw the [venomous] beast hang on his hand, they said among themselves, No doubt this man is a murderer, whom, though he hath escaped the sea, yet vengeance suffereth not to live.
HAND
OF-him
TOWARD one-another
THEY-said
ALL-ly undoubtedly ek ek
Prep
MURDERer
IS
THE

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
diaswqenta diasOzO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs h thalassa ho
dikh dikE
n_ Nom Sg f
human
this
WHOM
BEING-THRU-SAVED OUT OF-THE being-saved-through
SEA
THE
JUSTice
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
ouk ou
Part Neg
eiasen eaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-LIVING NOT
LEAVES lets oun oun

Conj
28:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
apotinaxas apotinassO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qhrion thErion
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pur pur
n_ Acc Sg n
epaqen paschO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
And he shook off the beast into the fire, and felt no harm.
THE
INDEED THEN FROM-QUIVERing twitching kakon kakos

a_ Acc Sg n
THE
WILD-BEAST INTO THE
FIRE
he-EMOTIONED he-suffered
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE EVIL nothing
28:6 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
prosedokwn prosdokaO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
mellein mellO
vn Pres Act
pimprasqai pimprEmi
vn Pres Pas
h E
Part
THE
YET THEY-TOWARD-SEEMED him they-were-apprehensive
TO-BE-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-beING-INFLAMED OR to-be-becoming-inflamed
Howbeit they looked when he should have swollen, or fallen down dead suddenly: but after they had looked a great while, and saw no harm come
AV
Acts 28
katapiptein katapiptO
vn Pres Act
afnw nekron aphnO nekros

Adv a_ Acc Sg m
epi polu epi polus

Prep a_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
prosdokwntwn kai prosdokaO kai

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj
to him, they changed their minds, and said that he was a god.
TO-BE-DOWN-FALLING suddenly DEAD to-be-falling-down qewrountwn mhden theOreO mEdeis

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
ON
much
YET OF-them
TOWARD-SEEMING being-apprehensive
AND
atopon atopos
a_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ginomenon ginomai
metabalomenoi metaballO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
OF-beholdING
NO-YET-ONE UN-PLACED INTO him nothing amiss auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
BECOMING
after-CASTING retracting
elegon legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THEY-said
him
TO-BE
god
28:7 en
en
Prep
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
peri peri
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ekeinon uphrcen ekeinos huparchO

pd Acc Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
cwria chOrion
n_ Nom Pl n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IN
YET THE ABOUT THE the-regions ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
PLACE
that
belongED
freeholds
to-THE
WH
prwtw prOtos
a_ Dat Sg m
nhsou nEsos
n_ Gen Sg f
onomati popliw os onoma poplios hos

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
anadexamenos hmas anadechomai hEmeis

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
hmeras
In the same quarters were possessions of the chief man of the island, whose name was Publius; who received us, and lodged us three days courteously.
BEFORE-most OF-THE foremost-man

WH
ISLAND
to-NAME
PUBLIUS
WHO
UP-RECEIVing receiving
US
treis
NA
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl f
NA
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
filofronws philophronOs
Adv
exenisen xenizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THREE
DAYS
FOND-DISPOSEDly LODGizES amiably lodges-us ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
28:8 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
popliou puretois kai dusenteriw poplios puretos kai dusenterion

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Sg f
BECAME it-occurred
YET THE
FATHER
OF-THE
PUBLIUS
to-fevers
AND
to-ILL-entrails to-dysenteries kai kai

Conj
sunecomenon katakeisqai sunechO katakeimai

vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
pros pros
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
And it came to pass, that the father of Publius lay sick of a fever and of a bloody flux: to whom Paul entered in, and prayed, and laid his hands on him, and healed him.
beING-pressED
TO-BE-DOWN-LYING TOWARD WHOM to-be-lying-down tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
PAUL
INTO-COMING entering auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
AND
proseuxamenos epiqeis proseuchomai epitithEmi

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m

iasato iaomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
praying
ON-PLACING placing-on genomenou ginomai
THE
WH
HANDS
NA
to-him
he-HEALS heals loipoi loipon
him
28:9 toutou de
houtos
pd Gen Sg n
kai
de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
a_ Nom Pl m
OF-this
YET BECOMING occurring
AND also
THE
rest rest(p)
THE the-ones
IN
THE
So when this was done, others also, which had diseases in the island, came, and were healed:
nhsw nEsos
n_ Dat Sg f
econtes echO
asqeneias proshrconto kai eqerapeuonto astheneia proserchomai kai therapeuO

n_ Acc Pl f vi impf midD/pasD 3 Pl Conj vi impf Pas 3 Pl
ISLAND
HAVING
TOWARD-CAME approached
AND
were-curED
28:10 oi
hos
pr Nom Pl m
kai pollais timais etimhsan hmas kai polus timE timaO hEmeis
Conj a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp 1 Acc Pl
kai anagomenois epeqento kai anagO epitithEmi

Conj vp Pres Pas Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
WHO
AND also
to-MANY
VALUES honors
THEY-VALUE honor
US
AND
to-UP-LEADING to-ones-setting-out
THEY-ON-PLACED they-placed-on-board
10 Who also honoured us with many honours; and when we departed, they laded [us] with such things as were necessary.
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
creias chreia
n_ Acc Pl f
THE the(p)
TOWARD THE
needs
28:11 meta de
meta
Prep
de
Conj
treis treis
n_ Acc Pl m
mhnas mEn
n_ Acc Pl m
anhcqhmen anagO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
en en
Prep
ploiw ploion
n_ Dat Sg n
parakeceimakoti paracheimazO
vp Perf Act Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
after
YET THREE
MONTHS
WE-WERE-UP-LED IN we-set-out
FLOATer ship
HAVING-BESIDE-WINTERED IN having-wintered
11 . And after three months we departed in a ship of Alexandria, which had wintered in the isle, whose sign was Castor and Pollux.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nhsw nEsos
n_ Dat Sg f
alexandrinw parashmw alexandrinos parasEmos

dioskourois dioskouroi
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
ISLAND
ALEXANDRIAN
to-BESIDE-SIGN ZEUS-JUVENILES to-ensign Dioscuri
AV
Acts 28
28:12 kai katacqentes eis

kai
Conj
katagO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
eis
Prep
surakousas epemeinamen hmeras treis surakousai epimenO hEmera treis

n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
12 And landing at Syracuse, we tarried [there] three days.
AND
BEING-DOWN-LED landing
INTO SYRACUSE
WE-ON-REMAIN we-stay
DAYS
THREE
28:13 oqen
hothen
Adv
perielontes kathnthsamen eis periaireO katantaO eis

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Pl Prep
rhgion rhEgion
n_ Acc Sg n
kai meta mian kai meta heis

Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
WHICH-PLACE ABOUT-LIFTING whence taking-from-about-it epigenomenou epiginomai

WE-attain we-arrive-at
INTO RHEGIUM
AND
after
ONE
DAY
13 And from thence we fetched a compass, and came to Rhegium: and after one day the south wind blew, and we came the next day to Puteoli:
notou notos
n_ Gen Sg m
deuteraioi hlqomen deuteraios erchomai

a_ Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
potiolous potioloi
n_ Acc Pl m
OF-ON-BECOMING of-coming-on
SOUTH second-day of-south-wind second-day
WE-CAME
INTO PUTEOLI
28:14 ou
hou
Adv
eurontes heuriskO
adelfous pareklhqhmen adelphos parakaleO

par para
Prep
autois epimeinai autos epimenO

pp Dat Pl m vn Aor Act
where FINDING
brothers brethren
WE-WERE-BESIDE-CALLED BESIDE to-them we-were-entreated them thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
TO-ON-REMAIN to-stay
14 Where we found brethren, and were desired to tarry with them seven days: and so we went toward Rome.
hmeras epta hEmera hepta

kai outws eis kai houtOs eis

Conj Adv Prep
rwmhn rhOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
hlqamen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl
DAYS
SEVEN
AND
thus
INTO THE
ROME
WE-COME
28:15 kakeiqen oi
kakeithen
Adv Con
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi akousantes ta adelphos akouO ho

n_ Nom Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
peri peri
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
hlqan erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
AND-thence
THE
brothers brethren acris achri

Prep
HEARing
THE the(p)
ABOUT US
COME
INTO
apanthsin hmin apantEsis hemeis

n_ Acc Sg f pp 1 Dat Pl
appiou appios
n_ Gen Sg m
forou phoron
n_ Gen Sg n
kai triwn kai treis

Conj n_ Gen Pl f
tabernwn ous tabernai hos

n_ Gen Pl f pr Acc Pl m
15 And from thence, when the brethren heard of us, they came to meet us as far as Appii forum, and The three taverns: whom when Paul saw, he thanked God, and took courage.
FROM-meeting meeting idwn eidO
to-US us o ho
UNTIL APPII as-far-as paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
FORUM
AND
OF-THREE TAVERNS Three qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
WHOM
eucaristhsas tw eucharisteO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qarsos tharsos
n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Nom Sg m
PERCEIVING
THE
PAUL
thanking
to-THE the epetraph epitrepO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
God
GOT took paulw paulos

n_ Dat Sg m
COURAGE
28:16 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
eishlqomen eis eiserchomai eis

rwmhn rhOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
menein menO
vn Pres Act
when
YET WE-INTO-CAME we-entered eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
INTO ROME
it-WAS-permitted to-THE
PAUL
TO-BE-REMAINING
kaq kata
Prep
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
fulassonti phulassO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
stratiwth stratiOtEs
n_ Dat Sg m
16 And when we came to Rome, the centurion delivered the prisoners to the captain of the guard: but Paul was suffered to dwell by himself with a soldier that kept him.
according-to self acby himself
TOGETHER to-THE with-the de de

Conj
GUARDING
him
WARrior soldier tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
28:17 egeneto
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
meta hmeras treis meta hEmera treis

Prep n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
sugkalesasqai auton sugkaleO autos

vn Aor Mid pp Acc Sg m
ontas eimi
BECAME it-occurred twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
YET after
DAYS
THREE
TO-TOGETHER-CALL to-call-together de de
Conj
him
THE
ones-BEING ones-being pros pros

Prep
ioudaiwn prwtous ioudaios prOtos

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
sunelqontwn sunerchomai
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews andres anEr

n_ Voc Pl m
BEFORE-most OF-TOGETHER-COMING YET them foremost of-coming-together of-them adelfoi ouden adelphos oudeis
n_ Voc Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
he-said
TOWARD them
17 . And it came to pass, that after three days Paul called the chief of the Jews together: and when they were come together, he said unto them, Men [and] brethren, though I have committed nothing against the people, or customs of our fathers, yet was I delivered prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
enantion poihsas enantios poieO

a_ Acc Sg n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
MEN men ! tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
brothers brethren !
NOT-YET-ONE IN-INSTEAD nothing contrary
DOing
to-THE
PEOPLE
OR
to-THE
eqesin ethos
n_ Dat Pl n
patrwois desmios ex patrOos desmios ek

a_ Dat Pl n n_ Nom Sg m Prep
ierosolumwn paredoqhn ierosoluma paradidOmi

n_ Gen Pl n vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
CUSTOMS THE
hereditaries hereditary(p) rwmaiwn rhOmaios

a_ Gen Pl m
BOUND-one prisoner
OUT OF-JERUSALEM
WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN INTO THE was-given-up
ceiras twn cheir ho

HANDS
OF-THE
ROMANS
AV
Acts 28
28:18 oitines anakrinantes me

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
anakrinO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eboulonto boulomai
apolusai apoluO
vn Aor Act
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
WHO-ANY who-any
examining
ME
intendED
TO-FROM-LOOSE THRU THE to-release-me because-of emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
18 Who, when they had examined me, would have let [me] go, because there was no cause of death in me.
mhdemian aitian qanatou uparcein mEdeis aitia thanatos huparchO

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
NO-YET-ONE not-one
cause
OF-DEATH
TO-BE-belongING IN to-be-existing
ME
28:19 antilegontwn de
antilegO
de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn hnagkasqhn ioudaios anagkazO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
epikalesasqai kaisara ouc epikaleO kaisar ou

vn Aor Mid n_ Acc Sg m Part Neg
OF-contradictING
YET OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
I-AM-necessitatED TO-ON-CALL I-am-compelled to-appeal-to ti tis

px Acc Sg n
CAESAR
NOT
19 But when the Jews spake against [it], I was constrained to appeal unto Caesar; not that I had ought to accuse my nation of.
ws tou hOs ho
Adv t_ Gen Sg n
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ecwn echO
vn Pres Act
AS
OF-THE
NATION
OF-ME
HAVING
ANY anything
TO-BE-accusING
28:20 dia
dia
Prep
tauthn oun houtos oun

pd Acc Sg f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aitian parekalesa umas aitia parakaleO humeis

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
kai kai
Conj
THRU this because-of proslalhsai proslaleO

vn Aor Act
THEN THE
cause
I-BESIDE-CALL I-call-beside tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-PERCEIVING AND to-be-perceiving-ye alusin halusis

n_ Acc Sg f
eneken heneken
Adv
gar ths gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
israhl thn israEl ho

ni proper t_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
20 For this cause therefore have I called for you, to see [you], and to speak with [you]: because that for the hope of Israel I am bound with this chain.
TO-TOWARD-TALK on-account-of for to-speak-to-ye perikeimai perikeimai

OF-THE the
EXPECTATION OF-THE
ISRAEL
THE
UN-LOOSE this chain
I-AM-beING-ABOUT-LAID I-am-being-laid-about
28:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eipan legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oute oute
Conj
grammata peri gramma peri

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
THE-ones the sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
YET TOWARD him
say they-say
WE
NOT-BESIDES WRITings neither letters
ABOUT concerning twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
edexameqa apo dechomai apo

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ioudaias oute ioudaia oute

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
paragenomenos tis paraginomai tis

vp 2Aor midD Nom Sg m px Nom Sg m
21 And they said unto him, We neither received letters out of Judaea concerning thee, neither any of the brethren that came shewed or spake any harm of thee.
YOU
RECEIVE
FROM THE
JUDEA
NOT-BESIDES BESIDE-BECOMING nor coming-along peri peri

Prep
ANY
OF-THE
adelfwn aphggeilen adelphos apaggellO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
h E
Part
elalhsen ti laleO tis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg px Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ponhron ponEros
a_ Acc Sg n
brothers brethren
FROM-MESSAGES OR reports de de
Conj
TALKS speaks para para

Prep
ANY anything sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
ABOUT YOU concerning akousai a akouO hos

vn Aor Act pr Acc Pl n
wicked
28:22 axioumen
axioO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
froneis phroneO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
peri peri
Prep
WE-ARE-WORTHYING YET BESIDE YOU we-are-counting-it-worthwhile men men

Part
TO-HEAR
WHICH which(p)
YOU-ARE-beING-DISPOSed ABOUT concerning oti pantacou hoti pantachou

Conj Adv
22 But we desire to hear of thee what thou thinkest: for as concerning this sect, we know that every where it is spoken against.
gar ths gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
airesews tauths gnwston hmin hairesis houtos gnOstos hemeis

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
INDEED for
THE
preference sect
this
KNOWN
to-US
it-IS
that
EVERY-SOIL everywhere
antilegetai antilegO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
it-IS-beING-contradictED
28:23 taxamenoi
tassO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
hmeran hlqon hEmera erchomai

pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
xenian xenia
n_ Acc Sg f
SETTing
YET to-him
DAY
CAME
TOWARD him
INTO THE
LODGing
pleiones polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
exetiqeto ektithEmi
vi impf Mid 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
MORE more(p)
to-WHOM he-OUT-PLACED THRU-witnessING he-expounded certifying
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
23 . And when they had appointed him a day, there came many to him into [his] lodging; to whom he expounded and testified the kingdom of God, persuading them concerning Jesus, both out of the law of Moses, and [out of] the prophets, from morning till evening.
AV
Acts 28
peiqwn peithO
te te
Part
autous peri autos peri

pp Acc Pl m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
te te
Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
PERSUADING
BESIDES them
ABOUT THE concerning apo apo

Prep
JESUS
FROM BESIDES OF-THE bsboth the
LAW
mwusews kai twn mOusEs kai ho

profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
prwi prOi
Adv
ews esperas heOs hespera

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
of-MOSES of-Moses
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers FROM morning TILL prophets epeiqonto peithO

vi impf Pas 3 Pl
OF-EVENING-STAR dusk oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
28:24 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
legomenois legO
de de
Conj
hpistoun apisteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
24 And some believed the things which were spoken, and some believed not.
AND
THE
INDEED were-PERSUADED to-THE beING-said they-were-persuaded to-the-things de de

Conj
THE
YET UN-BELIEVED they-disbelieved

25 And when they agreed not among themselves, they departed, after that Paul had spoken one word, Well spake the Holy Ghost by Esaias the prophet unto our fathers,
28:25 asumfwnoi
asumphOnos
a_ Nom Pl m
ontes eimi
pros pros
Prep
allhlous apeluonto allElOn apoluO

pc Acc Pl m vi impf Mid 3 Pl
UN-TOGETHER-SOUNDS YET BEING disagreements eipontos legO

TOWARD one-another
THEY-were-FROM-LOOSED they-were-dismissed pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
rhma rhEma
n_ Acc Sg n
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
oti kalws to hoti kalOs ho

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
OF-sayING
THE
PAUL
declaration ONE
that
IDEALly
THE
spirit
THE
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
elalhsen dia laleO dia

hsaiou Esaias
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
profhtou prophEtEs
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras umwn patEr humeis

HOLY
TALKS speaks
THRU ISAIAH through poreuqhti poreuomai

vm Aor pasD 2 Sg
THE
BEFORE-AVERer TOWARD THE prophet ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
26 Saying, Go unto this people, and say, Hearing ye shall hear, and shall not understand; and seeing ye shall see, and not perceive:
28:26 legwn
legO
pros pros
Prep
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton kai eipon houtos kai legO

pd Acc Sg m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
sayING
BE-BEING-GONE TOWARD THE be-you-being-gone ! kai ou kai ou

Conj Part Neg
PEOPLE
this
AND
say say-you !
akoh akoE
n_ Dat Sg f
akousete akouO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
sunhte suniEmi
vs 2Aor vxx 2 Pl
kai blepontes kai blepO

to-HEARing YE-SHALL-BE-HEARING AND
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-understandING AND
lookING observing
bleyete blepO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
idhte eidO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-SHALL-BE-lookING AND ye-shall-be-observing
NOT
NO
YE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
28:27 epacunqh
pachunO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou kai tois houtos kai ho

pd Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Pl n
wsin ous
n_ Dat Pl n
IS-STOUTenED for
THE
HEART
OF-THE
PEOPLE
this
AND
to-THE
EARS
barews hkousan kai tous bareOs akouO kai ho

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Acc Pl m

ekammusan mhpote kammuO mEpote

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv
HEAVIly
THEY-HEAR AND
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-them
THEY-shut
NO-?-when lest-at-some-time akouswsin akouO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
27 For the heart of this people is waxed gross, and their ears are dull of hearing, and their eyes have they closed; lest they should see with [their] eyes, and hear with [their] ears, and understand with [their] heart, and should be converted, and I should heal them.
idwsin eidO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ofqalmois kai tois ophthalmos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Pl n
wsin ous
n_ Dat Pl n
kai kai
Conj
VIEWers eyes
AND
to-THE
EARS
THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING AND should-be-hearing kai iasomai kai iaomai

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia sunwsin kardia suniEmi

n_ Dat Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai epistreywsin kai epistrephO

to-THE
HEART
THEY-MAY-BE-understandING AND may-be-understanding
THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING AND should-be-turning-about
I-SHALL-BE-HEALING
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
them
WH WH NA NA
28:28 gnwston oun

gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
umin estw
oun
Conj
estw eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti tois hoti ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin ethnos
n_ Dat Pl n
KNOWN
THEN
LET-it-BE let-it-be !
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
to-THE
NATIONS
28 Be it known therefore unto you, that the salvation of God is sent unto the Gentiles, and [that] they will hear it.
AV
Acts 28 - Romans 1
apestalh apostellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swthrion tou sOtErios ho

a_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
kai akousontai kai akouO

WAS-commissioned this was-dispatched
THE
SAVing salvation
OF-THE
God
they
AND
SHALL-BE-HEARING
28:29
29 And when he had said these words, the Jews departed, and had great reasoning among themselves.
. .
.
. .
.
28:30 enemeinen
emmenO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
dietian olhn dietia holos

en en
Prep
idiw idios
a_ Dat Sg m
misqwmati kai apedeceto misthOma kai apodechomai

n_ Dat Sg n Conj vi impf midD/pasD 3 Sg
he-IN-REMAINS YET TWO-YEAR he-remains-in two-years pantas tous pas ho

WHOLE
IN
OWN
HIRED (house) hired-house
AND
FROM-RECEIVED he-welcomed
30 . And Paul dwelt two whole years in his own hired house, and received all that came in unto him,
eisporeuomenous pros eisporeuomai pros

vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ALL
THE
ones-INTO-GOING ones-going-in thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
TOWARD him
28:31 khrusswn
kErussO

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai didaskwn kai didaskO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
PROCLAIMING heralding peri peri

Prep
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
AND
TEACHING
THE the(p)
31 Preaching the kingdom of God, and teaching those things which concern the Lord Jesus Christ, with all confidence, no man forbidding him.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meta pashs christos meta pas

n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Sg f
parrhsias akwlutws parrhEsia akOlutOs

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH
EVERY all
boldness
UN-FORBIDly unforbidden
AV
John 11
11:1 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
asqenwn astheneO
lazaros apo lazaros apo

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
bhqanias ek bEthania ek
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kwmhs kOmE
n_ Gen Sg f
WAS there-was marias maria

n_ Gen Sg f
YET ANY certain-man ths ho
beING-UN-FIRM being-infirm
LAZARUS
FROM BETHANY
OUT OF-THE
VILLAGE
. Now a certain [man] was sick, [named] Lazarus, of Bethany, the town of Mary and her sister Martha.
kai marqas kai martha

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
adelfhs auths adelphE autos

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-MARY
AND
OF-MARTHA THE Martha de de

Conj
sister
OF-her
11:2 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
mariam h maria ho
aleiyasa aleiphO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
murw muron
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
WAS it-was ekmaxasa ekmassO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
YET MARIAM Mary tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
one-RUBBing one-rubbing tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
THE
Master Lord hs hos
to-ATTAR
AND
(It was [that] Mary which anointed the Lord with ointment, and wiped his feet with her hair, whose brother Lazarus was sick.)
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
pr Gen Sg f
OUT-WIPing wiping-off
THE
FEET
OF-Him
to-THE
HAIR hairs
OF-her
OF-WHOM THE
brother
lazaros hsqenei lazaros astheneO

LAZARUS
was-UN-FIRM was-infirm ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
11:3 apesteilan oun

apostellO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun
Conj
adelfai pros adelphE pros

n_ Nom Pl f Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legousai legO
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
Therefore his sisters sent unto him, saying, Lord, behold, he whom thou lovest is sick.
commission dispatch ide eidO

vm Aor Act 2 Sg
THEN THE
sisters
TOWARD Him
sayING
Master ! Lord !
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
fileis phileO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
asqenei astheneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BE-PERCEIVING WHOM lo !
YOU-ARE-beING-FOND IS-beING-UN-FIRM you-are-being-fond-of is-being-infirm de de

Conj
11:4 akousas
akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
HEARing hearing-it estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YET THE
JESUS
said
this
THE
UN-FIRMness NOT infirmity qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
When Jesus heard [that], he said, This sickness is not unto death, but for the glory of God, that the Son of God might be glorified thereby.
pros pros
Prep
qanaton all uper ths thanatos alla huper ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
IS
TOWARD DEATH
but
OVER for uios huios
THE
esteem glory qeou theos
OF-THE
God
THAT
doxasqh doxazO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
SHOULD-BE-BEING-esteemizED THE should-be-being-glorified
SON
OF-THE
God
THRU it through herit adelfhn auths adelphE autos

11:5 hgapa
agapaO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marqan kai thn martha kai ho

kai kai
Conj
Now Jesus loved Martha, and her sister, and Lazarus.
LOVED
YET THE
JESUS
THE
MARTHA
AND
THE
sister
OF-her
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
lazaron lazaros
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
LAZARUS
11:6 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
hkousen akouO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
oti asqenei hoti astheneO

tote men tote men

Adv Part
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
AS
THEN He-HEARS
that
he-IS-beING-UN-FIRM then he-is-being-infirm hmeras hEmera

n_ Acc Pl f
INDEED He-REMAINS IN
WHICH
When he had heard therefore that he was sick, he abode two days still in the same place where he was.
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
duo duo
ni numeral
He-WAS
to-PLACE place
TWO
DAYS
11:7 epeita
epeita
Adv
meta touto meta houtos

Prep pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
maqhtais agwmen mathEtEs agO

n_ Dat Pl m vs Pres Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Then after that saith he to [his] disciples, Let us go into Judaea again.
ON-THEREAFTER after thereupon
this
He-IS-sayING
to-THE
LEARNers disciples
WE-MAY-BE-LEADING INTO THE we-may-be-going
AV
John 11
ioudaian palin ioudaia palin

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
JUDEA
AGAIN
11:8 legousin autw

legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai rabbi nun ezhtoun mathEtEs rhabbi nun zEteO

n_ Nom Pl m Hebrew Adv vi impf Act 3 Pl
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
liqasai oi lithazO ho
ARE-sayING
to-Him
THE
LEARNers disciples
RABBI
NOW SOUGHT
YOU
TO-STONE
THE
[His] disciples say unto him, Master, the Jews of late sought to stone thee; and goest thou thither again?
ioudaioi kai palin upageis ioudaios kai palin hupagO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ekei ekei
Adv
JUDA-ans Jews
AND
AGAIN
YOU-ARE-UNDER-LEADING there you-are-going-away ouci ouchi

Part Int
11:9 apekriqh
apokrinomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
dwdeka wrai dOdeka hOra

ni numeral n_ Nom Pl f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ean ean
Cond
answerED
JESUS
NOT(emph.) TWO-TEN not(emph.) ? twelve en en

Prep
HOURS
ARE there-are ou ou
Part Neg
OF-THE
DAY
IF-EVER
Jesus answered, Are there not twelve hours in the day? If any man walk in the day, he stumbleth not, because he seeth the light of this world.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
peripath peripateO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
ANY anyone fws phOs

n_ Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN may-be-walking tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
DAY
NOT
THE
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou blepei houtos blepO

LIGHT
OF-THE
SYSTEM world tis tis

px Nom Sg m
this
he-IS-lookING he-is-observing en en
Prep
11:10 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
peripath peripateO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nukti nux
n_ Dat Sg f
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
10 But if a man walk in the night, he stumbleth, because there is no light in him.
IF-EVER YET ANY anyone to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
MAY-BE-ABOUT-TREADING IN may-be-walking estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
NIGHT
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
LIGHT
NOT
IS
IN
him
11:11 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai meta touto kai meta houtos

Conj Prep pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois lazaros o autos lazaros ho

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
these He-said these-things filos philos

a_ Nom Sg m
AND
after
this
He-IS-sayING
to-them
LAZARUS
THE
11 These things said he: and after that he saith unto them, Our friend Lazarus sleepeth; but I go, that I may awake him out of sleep.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kekoimhtai koimaO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
alla poreuomai alla poreuomai

ina hina
Conj
exupnisw exupnizO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
FOND-one friend
OF-US
HAS-been-reposED but has-repose oun oun

Conj
I-AM-GOING
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-SLEEPizING him I-should-be-awakening-out-of-sleep kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
11:12 eipan
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
maqhtai autw mathEtEs autos

n_ Nom Pl m pp Dat Sg m
ei ei
Cond
kekoimhtai koimaO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
12 Then said his disciples, Lord, if he sleep, he shall do well.
say
THEN THE
LEARNers disciples
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
IF
he-HAS-been-reposED he-has-repose
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED
11:13 eirhkei
ereO
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou autou thanatos autos

pd Nom Pl m Conj
HAD-declarED
YET THE
JESUS
DEATH
OF-him
those
YET
13 Howbeit Jesus spake of his death: but they thought that he had spoken of taking of rest in sleep.
edoxan dokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oti peri hoti peri

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
koimhsews tou koimEsis ho

upnou hupnos
n_ Gen Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
SEEM suppose
that

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
LIE-ing repose autois o autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
OF-THE
SLEEP
14 Then said Jesus unto them plainly, Lazarus is dead.
11:14 tote oun

tote
Adv
oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
parrhsia lazaros apeqanen parrhEsia lazaros apothnEskO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
then
THEN said
to-them
THE
JESUS
to-boldness
LAZARUS
FROM-DIED died
AV
John 11
11:15 kai cairw

kai
Conj
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
pisteushte pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
hmhn eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
AND
THRU YOU(p) because-of ye pros pros

Prep
THAT YE-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that NOT seeing-that auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
I-WAS
15 And I am glad for your sakes that I was not there, to the intent ye may believe; nevertheless let us go unto him.
ekei alla agwmen ekei alla agO

Adv Conj vs Pres Act 1 Pl
there
but
WE-MAY-BE-LEADING TOWARD him we-may-be-going oun oun

Conj
11:16 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
qwmas thOmas
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
didumos didumos
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
summaqhtais summathEtEs
n_ Dat Pl m
said
THEN THOMAS
THE
twin (Didymus) to-THE Didymus met autou meta autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-LEARNers fellow-disciples
16 Then said Thomas, which is called Didymus, unto his fellowdisciples, Let us also go, that we may die with him.
agwmen agO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
ina hina
Conj
apoqanwmen apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
MAY-BE-LEADING AND may-be-going also
WE
THAT WE-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING WITH Him we-may-be-dying o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
11:17 elqwn
erchomai
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
euren heuriskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tessaras hdh tessares EdE

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
hmeras hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
17 . Then when Jesus came, he found that he had [lain] in the grave four days already.
COMING
THEN THE
JESUS
FOUND
him
FOUR
ALREADY DAYS
econta echO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
mnhmeiw mnEmeion
n_ Dat Sg n
HAVING
IN
THE
NA
memorial-vault tomb h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
11:18 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
bhqania eggus twn bEthania eggus ho

n_ Nom Sg f Adv t_ Gen Pl n
ierosolumwn ws ierosoluma hOs

n_ Gen Pl n Adv
apo apo
Prep
18 Now Bethany was nigh unto Jerusalem, about fifteen furlongs off:
WAS
YET
THE
BETHANY
NEAR
OF-THE the
JERUSALEM
AS FROM about off
stadiwn dekapente stadion dekapente

n_ Gen Pl n ni numeral
stadia
TEN-FIVE fifteen de de
Conj
11:19 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn elhluqeisan pros ioudaios erchomai pros

a_ Gen Pl m vi Plup Act 3 Pl Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
marqan kai martha kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
MANY
YET OUT OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
HAD-COME
TOWARD THE
MARTHA
AND
19 And many of the Jews came to Martha and Mary, to comfort them concerning their brother.
mariam ina maria hina

ni proper Conj
paramuqhswntai paramutheomai
vs Aor midD 3 Pl

pp Acc Pl f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
adelfou adelphos
n_ Gen Sg m
MARIAM Mary
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-CLOSING them they-should-be-comforting oun oun

Conj
ABOUT THE concerning ercetai erchomai
brother
11:20 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
uphnthsen hupantaO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
THEN MARTHA
AS
she-HEARS
that
JESUS
IS-COMING
UNDER-meets meets
20 Then Martha, as soon as she heard that Jesus was coming, went and met him: but Mary sat [still] in the house.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mariam de maria de
ni proper Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
ekaqezeto kathezomai
to-Him him
MARIAM Mary
YET IN
THE
HOME house marqa martha

n_ Nom Sg f
was-seatED
NA
11:21 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
21 Then said Martha unto Jesus, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother had not died.
said
THEN THE
MARTHA
TOWARD
THE
JESUS
Master ! Lord !
IF
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
wde ouk hOde ou

Adv Part Neg
an an
Part

YOU-WERE
here
NA
NOT
EVER FROM-DIED died kai nun oida kai nun eidO

Conj Adv vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THE
brother
OF-ME
11:22
alla alla
Conj
oti osa hoti hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl n
an an
Part
aithsh aiteO
vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
22 But I know, that even now, whatsoever thou wilt ask of God, God will give [it] thee.
but
AND NOW I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that even I-am-aware
as-much-as EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-REQUESTING whatever you-should-be-requesting-of
AV
John 11
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
SHALL-BE-GIVING to-YOU
THE
God
11:23 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Fut Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

23 Jesus saith unto her, Thy brother shall rise again.
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING THE shall-be-rising oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
brother
OF-YOU
11:24 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f
oti anasthsetai hoti anistEmi

en en
Prep
24 Martha saith unto him, I know that he shall rise again in the resurrection at the last day.
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
MARTHA
he-SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING IN he-shall-be-rising
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
anastasei en anastasis en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

THE
IN
THE
LAST
DAY
11:25 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
anastasis kai anastasis kai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
said
to-her
THE
JESUS
AM
THE
UP-STANDing resurrection apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
25 Jesus said unto her, I am the resurrection, and the life: he that believeth in me, though he were dead, yet shall he live:
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kan kan
Cond Con
THE
LIFE
THE
INTO ME
AND-[IF]-EVER he-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING even-if-ever he-may-be-dying
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-LIVING
11:26 kai pas

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
zwn zaO

eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
26 And whosoever liveth and believeth in me shall never die. Believest thou this?
AND
EVERY
THE
one-LIVING one-living aiwna aiOn

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BELIEVING
INTO ME
NOT
NO
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pisteueis pisteuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING INTO THE may-be-dying
eon
YOU-ARE-BELIEVING this
11:27 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

Part n_ Voc Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
pepisteuka oti su pisteuO hoti su

vi Perf Act 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
she-IS-sayING to-Him
YEA yes
Master ! Lord ! uios huios

n_ Nom Sg m
HAVE-BELIEVED
that
YOU
ARE
27 She saith unto him, Yea, Lord: I believe that thou art the Christ, the Son of God, which should come into the world.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
THE the-one
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
ercomenos erchomai
COMING
11:28 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
eipousa legO
aphlqen aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai efwnhsen mariam thn kai phOneO maria ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg ni proper t_ Acc Sg f
adelfhn adelphE
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
this
sayING
she-FROM-CAME AND she-came-away o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
SOUNDS summons
MARIAM Mary
THE
sister
28 And when she had so said, she went her way, and called Mary her sister secretly, saying, The Master is come, and calleth for thee.
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
laqra eipousa lathra legO

Adv vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg f
didaskalos parestin didaskalos pareimi

kai fwnei kai phOneO

OF-her
covertly
sayING
THE
TEACHer
IS-BESIDE-BEING AND is-being-present
He-IS-SOUNDING is-summoning
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
AV
John 11
11:29 ekeinh
ekeinos
pd Nom Sg f
de de
Conj

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
hgerqh egeirO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tacu tachus
Adv
kai hrceto kai erchomai

pros pros
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
29 As soon as she heard [that], she arose quickly, and came unto him.
YET AS
she-HEARS
she-WAS-ROUSED SWIFTLY AND was-roused ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
CAME
TOWARD Him
11:30 oupw
oupO
Adv
de de
Conj
elhluqei o erchomai ho
vi Plup Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kwmhn kOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
all hn alla eimi

eti eti
Adv
NOT-as-yet YET HAD-COME
THE
JESUS
INTO THE
VILLAGE
but
WAS
STILL
30 Now Jesus was not yet come into the town, but was in that place where Martha met him.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
opou hopou
Adv

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marqa martha
n_ Nom Sg f
IN
THE
PLACE
THE-?-where UNDER-meets wheree meets ioudaioi oi ioudaios ho

to-Him him
THE
MARTHA
11:31 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
oun oun
Conj
ontes eimi

Prep pp Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
THEN JUDA-ans Jews authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
ones-BEING ones-being thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
WITH her
IN
THE
HOME house
AND
paramuqoumenoi paramutheomai
idontes eidO
mariam oti tacews anesth maria hoti tacheOs anistEmi

ni proper Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
31 The Jews then which were with her in the house, and comforted her, when they saw Mary, that she rose up hastily and went out, followed her, saying, She goeth unto the grave to weep there.
BESIDE-CLOSING comforting exhlqen exerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
her
PERCEIVING
THE
MARIAM Mary
that
SWIFTly quickly
she-UP-STOOD AND she-rose eis eis

Prep
hkolouqhsan auth akoloutheO autos

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg f
doxantes dokeO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
oti upagei hoti hupagO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OUT-CAME came-out mnhmeion mnEmeion

n_ Acc Sg n
THEY-follow follow ina hina

Conj
to-her her
SEEMing supposing ekei ekei

Adv
that
she-IS-UNDER-LEADING INTO THE she-is-going-away
klaush klaiO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
memorial-vault THAT she-SHOULD-BE-LAMENTING there tomb
11:32 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
mariam ws hlqen maria hOs erchomai

ni proper Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
opou hopou
Adv
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
idousa eidO
THE
THEN MARIAM Mary epesen piptO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AS
she-CAME
THE-?-where WAS wheree podas pous

n_ Acc Pl m
JESUS
PERCEIVING
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
legousa legO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
32 Then when Mary was come where Jesus was, and saw him, she fell down at his feet, saying unto him, Lord, if thou hadst been here, my brother had not died.
Him
FALLS
OF-Him
TOWARD THE
FEET
sayING
to-Him
Master ! Lord !
IF
hs eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Sg
wde ouk hOde ou

Adv Part Neg
an an
Part
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
YOU-WERE
here
NOT
EVER OF-ME
FROM-DIED died authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
brother
11:33 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ws eiden hOs eidO

klaiousan klaiO
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
sunelqontas sunerchomai
JESUS
THEN AS
He-PERCEIVED her
LAMENTING
AND
THE
TOGETHER-COMING coming-togetherwith
33 . When Jesus therefore her weeping, and the Jews weeping which came with he groaned in the spirit, was troubled,
saw also her, and
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
ioudaious klaiontas ioudaios klaiO

enebrimhsato tw embrimaomai ho
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati kai etaraxen pneuma kai tarassO

to-her her eauton heautou
JUDA-ans Jews
LAMENTING
IN-THUNDERS mutters
to-THE
spirit
AND
DISTURBS
pf 3 Acc Sg m
Self himself
11:34 kai eipen

kai
Conj
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pou pou
Part Int
teqeikate tithEmi
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
34 And said, Where have ye laid him? They said unto him, Lord, come and see.
AND
He-said
?-where YE-HAVE-PLACED him where ? kai ide kai eidO

Master ! Lord !
ercou erchomai
AND
AV
John 11
11:35 edakrusen o
dakruO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
35
Jesus wept.
weeps
THE
JESUS
11:36 elegon
legO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi ide ioudaios eidO

a_ Nom Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
pws efilei pOs phileO

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
36 Then said the Jews, Behold how he loved him!
said
THEN THE
JUDA-ans Jews eipan legO
BE-PERCEIVING how lo ! ouk ou

Part Neg
He-WAS-FOND him he-was-fond-of outos houtos

pd Nom Sg m
11:37 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
edunato dunamai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ANY some anoixas anoigO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
YET OUT OF-them
say
NOT
was-ABLE could
this this-man
THE
37 And some of them said, Could not this man, which opened the eyes of the blind, have caused that even this man should not have died?
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous tou ophthalmos ho

tuflou poihsai ina tuphlos poieO hina

a_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act Conj

Conj pd Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
One-UP-OPENing one-opening apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-THE
BLIND blind-man
TO-DO to-make
THAT AND also
this-one this-man
NO
SHOULD-BE-FROM-DYING may-be-dying
11:38 ihsous
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
palin embrimwmenos palin embrimaomai

en en
Prep
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
ercetai erchomai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
JESUS
THEN AGAIN
beING-IN-THUNDERED muttering
IN
Self himself epekeito epikeimai
IS-COMING
INTO THE
38 Jesus therefore again groaning in himself cometh to the grave. It was a cave, and a stone lay upon it.
mnhmeion mnEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
sphlaion kai liqos spElaion kai lithos

n_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
memorial-vault WAS tomb it-was
YET CAVE
AND
STONE
was-ON-LAID was-laid-on liqon lithos

n_ Acc Sg m
ON
it
11:39 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
arate airO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IS-sayING
THE
JESUS
LIFT-YE THE take-away-ye ! kurie kurios

n_ Voc Sg m
STONE
IS-sayING
to-Him
THE
adelfh tou adelphE ho

teteleuthkotos marqa teleutaO martha

vp Perf Act Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
ozei ozO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tetartaios tetartaios
a_ Nom Sg m
39 Jesus said, Take ye away the stone. Martha, the sister of him that was dead, saith unto him, Lord, by this time he stinketh: for he hath been [dead] four days.
sister
OF-THE
HAVING-deceasED one-having-deceased
MARTHA
Master ! Lord !
ALREADY he-IS-ODORING FOURth he-is-smelling fourth-day
gar estin gar eimi

for
it-IS
11:40 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
IS-sayING
to-her
THE
JESUS
NOT
I-said
to-YOU
that
IF-EVER
40 Jesus saith unto her, Said I not unto thee, that, if thou wouldest believe, thou shouldest see the glory of God?
pisteushs pisteuO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
oyh optomai
vi Fut midD 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
YOU-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING YOU-SHOULD-BE-VIEWING THE you-should-be-seeing
esteem glory de de
Conj
OF-THE
God
11:41 hran
airO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
hren airO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THEY-LIFT THEN THE they-take-away ofqalmous anw kai eipen ophthalmos anO kai legO
n_ Acc Pl m Adv Conj
STONE
THE
YET JESUS
LIFTS
THE
pater patEr
n_ Voc Sg m
eucaristw soi eucharisteO su

oti hkousas hoti akouO

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
41 Then they took away the stone [from the place] where the dead was laid. And Jesus lifted up [his] eyes, and said, Father, I thank thee that thou hast heard me.
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
VIEWers eyes
UP
AND
said
FATHER !
I-AM-thankING
to-YOU you
that
YOU-HEAR
OF-ME me
42 And I knew that thou hearest me always: but because of the people which stand by I said [it], that they may believe that thou hast sent me.
11:42 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
hdein eidO
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
oti pantote mou hoti pantote egO

akoueis akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
YET HAD-PERCEIVED that was-aware
always
OF-ME me
YOU-ARE-HEARING but
THRU because-of
AV
John 11
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oclon ochlos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
periestwta periistEmi
eipon legO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pisteuswsin pisteuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
THE
THRONG
THE
ones-HAVING-ABOUT-STOOD I-said standing-about I-said-it
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING that
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU
ME
commission
11:43 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
eipwn legO
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
megalh ekraugasen lazare mega kraugazO lazaros

a_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Voc Sg m
deuro deuro
vm txx vxx 2 Sg
exw exO
Adv
43 And when he thus had spoken, he cried with a loud voice, Lazarus, come forth.
AND
these sayING these-things o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-SOUND GREAT to-voice loud teqnhkws thnEskO

He-clamors
LAZARUS !
HITHER hither-you ! kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
OUT outside
44 And he that was dead came forth, bound hand and foot with graveclothes: and his face was bound about with a napkin. Jesus saith unto them, Loose him, and let him go.
11:44 exhlqen
exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
dedemenos deO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
OUT-CAME came-out
THE
one-HAVING-DIED one-having-died kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
HAVING-been-BOUND THE
FEET
AND
THE
ceiras keiriais cheir keiria

n_ Acc Pl f n_ Dat Pl f
oyis opsis
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
soudariw periededeto soudarion perideO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Plup Pas 3 Sg
HANDS
to-SHEARings AND to-winding-sheets

WH
THE
WH
VIEW OF-him countenance

NA
to-handkerchief
NA
HAD-been-ABOUT-BOUND had-been-bound-about lusate luO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
ihsous autois
autois o autos ho
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
IS-sayING
to-them
THE
JESUS
LOOSE-YE loose-ye !
him
AND
afete aphiEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
upagein hupagO
vn Pres Act
FROM-LET let-ye !
him
TO-BE-UNDER-LEADING to-be-going-away oun oun

Conj
11:45 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn oi ioudaios ho
elqontes erchomai
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mariam maria
ni proper
MANY
THEN OUT OF-THE

WH NA
JUDA-ans Jews
THE
ones-COMING ones-coming
TOWARD THE
MARIAM Mary
45 . Then many of the Jews which came to Mary, and had seen the things which Jesus did, believed on him.
kai qeasamenoi kai theaomai

Conj vp Aor midD Nom Pl m
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
epoihsen episteusan eis poieO pisteuO eis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Pl Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
AND
Conj
WHICH which(p) ex ek
Prep
He-DOES
THEY-BELIEVE believe pros pros

Prep
INTO Him
11:46 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
aphlqon aperchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
farisaious kai eipan pharisaios kai legO

ANY some autois a autos hos

pp Dat Pl m
YET OUT OF-them
FROM-CAME came-away
TOWARD THE
PHARISEES
AND
say told
46 But some of them went their ways to the Pharisees, and told them what things Jesus had done.
epoihsen ihsous poieO iEsous

pr Acc Pl n
to-them them
WHICH DOES which-things oun oun

Conj
JESUS
11:47 sunhgagon
sunagO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi sunedrion kai pharisaios sunedrion kai

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg n Conj
TOGETHER-LED THEN THE gathered elegon legO

vi impf Act 3 Pl
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests oti hoti

Conj
THE
PHARISEES
Sanhedrin
AND
47 Then gathered the chief priests and the Pharisees a council, and said, What do we? for this man doeth many miracles.
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
poioumen poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos polla anthrOpos polus

n_ Nom Sg m a_ Acc Pl n
poiei poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THEY-said said shmeia sEmeion

n_ Acc Pl n
ANY what ?
WE-ARE-DOING that this seeing-that
THE
human
MANY
IS-DOING
SIGNS
11:48 ean
ean
Cond
afwmen aphiEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
outws pantes houtOs pas

Adv a_ Nom Pl m
pisteusousin pisteuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-FROM-LETTING Him we-should-be-leaving
thus
ALL
SHALL-BE-BELIEVING INTO Him
48 If we let him thus alone, all [men] will believe on him: and the Romans shall come and take away both our place and nation.
AV
John 11
kai eleusontai kai erchomai

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
rwmaioi kai arousin rhOmaios kai airO

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Pl
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
SHALL-BE-COMING THE
ROMANS
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-LIFTING OF-US shall-be-taking-away
AND
THE
PLACE
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
NATION
11:49 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kaiafas arciereus kaiaphas archiereus

wn eimi
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ONE
YET ANY certain
OUT OF-them
CAIAPHAS
chief-SACRED-one BEING chief-priest oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
OF-THE
49 And one of them, [named] Caiaphas, being the high priest that same year, said unto them, Ye know nothing at all,
eniautou ekeinou eipen eniautos ekeinos legO

n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

ouk ou
Part Neg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
year
that
said
to-them
YOU(p) ye
NOT
HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-YET-ONE are-aware-of anything ina hina

Conj
11:50 oude
oude
Adv
logizesqe logizomai
oti sumferei hoti sumpherO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT-YET YE-ARE-accountING that neither ye-are-reckoning apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
it-IS-beING-expedient to-YOU(p) to-ye laou laos

n_ Gen Sg m
THAT ONE
human
50 Nor consider that it is expedient for us, that one man should die for the people, and that the whole nation perish not.
uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eqnos ethnos
n_ Nom Sg n
MAY-BE-FROM-DYING OVER THE may-be-dying for-the-sake-of apolhtai apollumi

vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
PEOPLE
AND
NO
WHOLE
THE
NATION
SHOULD-BE-beING-destroyED should-be-perishing
11:51 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
af apo
Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
alla arciereus alla archiereus

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
this
YET FROM self himself
NOT
he-said
but
chief-SACRED-one BEING chief-priest ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
51 And this spake he not of himself: but being high priest that year, he prophesied that Jesus should die for that nation;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eniautou ekeinou eprofhteusen oti emellen eniautos ekeinos prophEteuO hoti mellO
n_ Gen Sg m pd Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
vn Pres Act
OF-THE
year
that
he-BEFORE-AVERS he-prophesies
that
WAS-ABOUT
JESUS
uper huper
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n
NATION
11:52 kai ouc

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
uper tou huper ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
eqnous ethnos
n_ Gen Sg n

Adv Conj Conj
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
NOT
OVER for
THE
NATION
ONLY
but
THAT AND also
THE

Prep
OF-THE
52 And not for that nation only, but that also he should gather together in one the children of God that were scattered abroad.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
dieskorpismena diaskorpizO
sunagagh sunagO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
God
THE
ones-HAVING-been-THRU-SCATTERED MAY-BE-TOGETHER-LEADING INTO ONE having-been-scattered he-may-be-gathering ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
11:53 ap
apo
Prep
ekeinhs oun ekeinos oun

pd Gen Sg f Conj
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ebouleusanto ina bouleuO hina

vi Aor midD 3 Pl Conj
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
53 Then from that day forth they took counsel together for to put him to death.
FROM that
THEN THE
DAY
THEY-COUNSEL they-plan
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-FROM-KILLING they-may-be-killing
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
Him
11:54 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ouketi ouketi
Adv
parrhsia periepatei en parrhEsia peripateO en

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf Act 3 Sg Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois ioudaios
a_ Dat Pl m
THE
THEN JESUS
NOT-STILL to-boldness not-longer
ABOUT-TROD walked
IN THE among
JUDA-ans Jews
54 Jesus therefore walked no more openly among the Jews; but went thence unto a country near to the wilderness, into a city called Ephraim, and there
AV
John 11 - John 12
alla aphlqen alla aperchomai

ekeiqen eis ekeithen eis

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
cwran chOra
n_ Acc Sg f
eggus ths eggus ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
erhmou erEmos
a_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
efraim ephraim
ni proper
continued with his disciples.
but
FROM-CAME came-away
thence
INTO THE
SPACE country
NEAR
OF-THE the
DESOLATE INTO EPHRAIM wilderness
legomenhn legO
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
kakei kakei
Adv Con
emeinen menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
maqhtwn mathEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
beING-said
city
AND-there He-REMAINS WITH
THE
LEARNers disciples ioudaiwn kai anebhsan polloi ioudaios kai anabainO polus
a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Pl m
55 And the Jews'passover was nigh at hand: and many went out of the country up to Jerusalem before the passover, to purify themselves.
11:55 hn
eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
eggus to eggus ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WAS
YET NEAR
THE
PASSOVER OF-THE
JUDA-ans Jews pasca pascha

Aramaic
AND
UP-STEPPed went-up
MANY
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma ek ierosoluma ek
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
cwras chOra
n_ Gen Sg f
pro pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
agniswsin hagnizO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
INTO JERUSALEM
OUT OF-THE
SPACE country
BEFORE THE
PASSOVER THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-PURifyING
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
selves themselves
11:56 ezhtoun
zEteO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai elegon kai legO

met allhlwn en meta allElOn en

Prep pc Gen Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
THEY-SOUGHT THEN THE
JESUS
AND
THEY-said said umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
WITH one-another
IN
THE
56 Then sought they for Jesus, and spake among themselves, as they stood in the temple, What think ye, that he will not come to the feast?
ierw hieron
n_ Dat Sg n
esthkotes histEmi
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
SACRED-place HAVING-STOOD sanctuary standing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ANY what ?
it-IS-SEEMING to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
NOT
NO
He-MAY-BE-COMING INTO
eorthn heortE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
FESTIVAL
11:57 dedwkeisan de
didOmi
vi Plup Act 3 Pl Att
de
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
n_ Nom Pl m
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
farisaioi entolas ina pharisaios entolE hina

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Conj
HAD-GIVEN
YET THE
chief-SACRED-ones AND chief-priests pou pou

Part Int
THE
PHARISEES
directions
THAT
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
gnw ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mhnush mEnuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
opws hopOs
Adv
57 Now both the chief priests and the Pharisees had given a commandment, that, if any man knew where he were, he should shew [it], that they might take him.
IF-EVER ANY anyone piaswsin piazO

vs Aor Act 3 Pl
MAY-BE-KNOWING ?-where He-IS where ? auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
he-SHOULD-BE-DIVULGING WHICH-how he-should-be-divulging-it so-that
AV
Romans 1
Romans
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
ihsou cristou
WH
NA
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
NA
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
klhtos klEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
apostolos apostolos
n_ Nom Sg m
PAUL
SLAVE
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ eis eis

Prep
CALLED
commissioner apostle
. Paul, a servant of Jesus Christ, called [to be] an apostle, separated unto the gospel of God,
afwrismenos aphorizO
n_ Acc Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-FROM-definED INTO WELL-MESSAGE OF-God severed
1:2 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
proephggeilato dia proepaggellomai dia

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
grafais agiais graphE hagios

(Which he had promised afore by his prophets in the holy scriptures,)
WHICH
He-BEFORE-promisES he-promises-before tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THRU THE through autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
BEFORE-AVERers OF-Him prophets tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
WRITings scriptures
HOLY
1:3 peri
peri
Prep
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
genomenou ginomai
ek ek
Prep
spermatos dauid sperma dauid

ABOUT THE concerning kata kata

Prep
SON
OF-Him
THE
One-BECOMING one-becoming
OUT OF-seed
of-DAVID of-David
Concerning his Son Jesus Christ our Lord, which was made of the seed of David according to the flesh;
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
according-to FLESH
1:4 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
orisqentos horizO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
dunamei kata dunamis kata

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
One-BEING-definED SON one-being-designated ex ek

Prep
OF-God
IN
ABILITY power ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
according-to spirit
And declared [to be] the Son of God with power, according to the spirit of holiness, by the resurrection from the dead:
agiwsunhs hagiOsunE
n_ Gen Sg f
anastasews nekrwn anastasis nekros

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Pl m

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-HOLY-TOGETHERness OUT OF-UP-STANDing of-holiness of-resurrection hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-DEAD-ones JESUS of-dead-ones
ANOINTED Christ
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
1:5 di
dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
elabomen carin lambanO charis

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
kai apostolhn eis kai apostolE eis

upakohn pistews en hupakoE pistis en

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Prep
THRU WHOM through pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl n
WE-GOT we-obtained
grace
AND
commission apostleship
INTO obedience
OF-BELIEF of-faith
IN among
By whom we have received grace and apostleship, for obedience to the faith among all nations, for his name:
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin uper ethnos huper

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

ALL
THE
NATIONS
OVER THE for-the-sake-of kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
NAME
OF-Him
1:6 en
en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
klhtoi klEtos
a_ Nom Pl m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
Among whom are ye also the called of Jesus Christ:
IN WHOM(p) ARE among
AND also
YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
CALLED-ones OF-JESUS called-ones rwmh rhOmE

n_ Dat Sg f
ANOINTED Christ klhtois agiois klEtos hagios

a_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
7
1:7 pasin
pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ousin eimi
agaphtois qeou agapEtos theos

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
to-ALL
THE
ones-BEING ones-being kai eirhnh kai eirEnE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
IN
ROME
beLOVED
OF-God
CALLED
HOLY-ones saints ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
To all that be in Rome, beloved of God, called [to be] saints: Grace to you and peace from God our Father, and the Lord Jesus Christ.
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai kuriou kai kurios

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Romans 1
1:8 prwton
prOton
Adv
men men
Part
eucaristw tw eucharisteO ho
vi Pres Act 1 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
dia dia
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
BEFORE-most INDEED I-AM-thankING first peri peri

Prep
to-THE the
God
OF-ME
THRU JESUS through kataggelletai kataggellO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ANOINTED Christ en en
Prep
. First, I thank my God through Jesus Christ for you all, that your faith is spoken of throughout the whole world.

oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
olw holos
a_ Dat Sg m
ABOUT ALL concerning tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) IS-beING-DOWN-MESSAGED IN of-ye is-being-annouced
WHOLE
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
SYSTEM world gar mou gar egO

Conj pp 1 Gen Sg
1:9 martus
martus
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
latreuw latreuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
witness
for
OF-ME
IS
THE
God
to-WHOM
I-AM-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati mou pneuma egO

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
euaggeliw euaggelion
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
For God is my witness, whom I serve with my spirit in the gospel of his Son, that without ceasing I make mention of you always in my prayers;
THE
spirit
OF-ME
IN
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
SON
OF-Him
AS how
adialeiptws mneian adialeiptOs mneia

Adv n_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
poioumai poieO
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
UN-intermittingly unintermittingly
REMINDer OF-YOU(p) I-AM-makING mention of-ye proseucwn mou proseuchE egO

n_ Gen Pl f pp 1 Gen Sg
1:10 pantote epi twn

pantote
Adv
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Gen Pl f
deomenos deomai
ei ei
Cond
pws pOs
Part
hdh EdE
Adv
always
ON
THE
prayers
OF-ME
beseechING
IF
how ALREADY somehow at-length elqein erchomai

vn 2Aor Act
10 Making request, if by any means now at length I might have a prosperous journey by the will of God to come unto you.
pote pote
Part
euodwqhsomai euodoO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
qelhmati tou thelEma ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
?-when I-SHALL-BE-BEING-WELL-WAYED IN some-time I-shall-be-being-prospered pros pros

Prep
THE
WILL
OF-THE
God
TO-BE-COMING
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
1:11 epipoqw
epipotheO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar idein gar eidO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
metadw metadidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
carisma charisma
n_ Acc Sg n
I-AM-ON-LONGING for I-am-longing umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
TO-BE-PERCEIVING YOU(p) ye to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THAT ANY some umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
I-MAY-BE-WITH-GIVING grace-effect I-may-be-sharing gracious-gift
11 For I long to see you, that I may impart unto you some spiritual gift, to the end ye may be established;
pneumatikon eis pneumatikos eis

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
sthricqhnai stErizO
vn Aor Pas
to-YOU(p) to-ye
spiritual
INTO THE
TO-BE-STOOD-fast YOU(p) to-be-established ye en en

Prep
1:12 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
sumparaklhqhnai sumparakaleO
vn Aor Pas
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
this
YET IS
TO-BE-TOGETHER-BESIDE-CALLED IN YOU(p) to-be-consoled-together among ye te te

Part
THRU THE through
IN
12 That is, that I may be comforted together with you by the mutual faith both of you and me.
allhlois pistews umwn allElOn pistis humeis

pc Dat Pl m n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
kai emou kai egO

Conj pp 1 Gen Sg
one-another
BELIEF faith qelw thelO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-YOU(p) BESIDES AND bsboth of-ye de de

Conj
OF-ME
1:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
adelfoi oti pollakis proeqemhn adelphos hoti pollakis protithEmi

n_ Voc Pl m Conj Adv vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg
NOT
I-AM-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye pros pros

Prep
TO-BE-UN-KNOWING brothers to-be-being-ignorant brethren ! acri tou achri ho

Prep
that
MANY-times often
I-BEFORE-PLACED I-purposed tina tis

px Acc Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai ekwluqhn kai kOluO

deuro ina deuro hina

Adv Conj
13 Now I would not have you ignorant, brethren, that oftentimes I purposed to come unto you, (but was let hitherto,) that I might have some fruit among you also, even as among other Gentiles.
t_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye
AND
I-WAS-FORBIDDEN UNTIL THE was-prevented
HITHER
THAT ANY some
AV
Romans 1
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
scw echO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
loipois eqnesin loipon ethnos

FRUIT
I-SHOULD-BE-HAVING AND also
IN YOU(p) among ye
according-AS AND
IN THE among
rest rest(p)
NATIONS
1:14 ellhsin te
hellEn
n_ Dat Pl m
te
Part
kai barbarois kai barbaros

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
sofois te sophos te
a_ Dat Pl m Part
kai anohtois kai anoEtos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
ofeileths opheiletEs
n_ Nom Sg m
to-GREEKS
BESIDES AND bsboth
to-BARBARIANS to-WISE barbarians
BESIDES AND bsboth
to-UN-MINDing OWEr foolish debtor
14 I am debtor both to the Greeks, and to the Barbarians; both to the wise, and to the unwise.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
I-AM
1:15 outws to
houtOs
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kat kata
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
proqumon prothumos
a_ Nom Sg n
kai umin kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
rwmh rhOmE
n_ Dat Sg f
thus
THE
according-to ME
BEFORE-FEEL AND eagerness also
to-YOU(p) to-ye
15 So, as much as in me is, I am ready to preach the gospel to you that are at Rome also.
THE the-ones
IN
ROME
vn Aor Mid
TO-WELL-MESSAGize to-bring-the-well-message
1:16 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar epaiscunomai gar epaischunomai

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
dunamis gar qeou dunamis gar theos

n_ Nom Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT
for
I-AM-beING-ON-VILED THE I-am-being-ashamed of-the tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
WELL-MESSAGE ABILITY power ioudaiw te ioudaios te

a_ Dat Sg m Part
for
OF-God
WH
IS it-is
eis eis
Prep
swthrian panti sOtEria pas

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Sg m
pisteuonti pisteuO
prwton
16 . For I am not ashamed of the gospel of Christ: for it is the power of God unto salvation to every one that believeth; to the Jew first, and also to the Greek.

NA
to-EVERY
THE
to-JUDA-an to-Jew
BESIDES
prwton prOton
Adv
kai ellhni kai hellEn

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
BEFORE-most first
AND
to-GREEK
1:17 dikaiosunh gar qeou

dikaiosunE
n_ Nom Sg f
gar
Conj
theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
apokaluptetai apokaluptO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
pistews eis pistis eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
JUSTice righteousness kaqws kathOs

Adv
for
OF-God
IN
it
IS-beING-FROM-COVERED OUT OF-BELIEF is-being-revealed of-faith dikaios dikaios

a_ Nom Sg m
INTO BELIEF faith
17 For therein is the righteousness of God revealed from faith to faith: as it is written, The just shall live by faith.
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
pistews zhsetai pistis zaO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THE
YET JUST-one just-one qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith ap apo

Prep
SHALL-BE-LIVING
1:18 apokaluptetai
apokaluptO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
gar orgh gar orgE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
ouranou epi pasan ouranos epi pas

n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Acc Sg f
asebeian asebeia
n_ Acc Sg f
IS-beING-FROM-COVERED for is-being-revealed kai adikian kai adikia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
INDIGNATION OF-God
FROM heaven
ON
EVERY all
UN-REVERence irreverence
anqrwpwn twn anthrOpos ho

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian en alEtheia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
adikia adikia
n_ Dat Sg f
katecontwn katechO
18 For the wrath of God is revealed from heaven against all ungodliness and unrighteousness of men, who hold the truth in unrighteousness;
AND
UN-JUSTness OF-humans injustice to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE the-ones
THE
TRUTH
IN
UN-JUSTness DOWN-HAVING injustice retaining en en

Prep
1:19 dioti
dioti
Conj
gnwston gnOstos
a_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
faneron estin phaneros eimi

autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
THRU-that THE because-that o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
KNOWN OF-THE which-is-known
God
apparent
IS
IN them among
19 . Because that which may be known of God is manifest in them; for God hath shewed [it] unto them.
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
gar autois efanerwsen gar autos phaneroO

Conj pp Dat Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
God
for
to-them
makES-APPEAR manifests-it apo apo

Prep
1:20 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
gar aorata gar aoratos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ktisews kosmou ktisis kosmos

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
poihmasin poiEma
n_ Dat Pl n
THE
for
UN-SEEN OF-Him invisible-things
FROM CREATION
OF-SYSTEM to-THE of-world
achievements
20 For the invisible things of him from the creation of the world are clearly seen, being understood by the things that are made, [even] his eternal
AV
Romans 1
nooumena noeO
vp Pres Pas Nom Pl n
kaqoratai kathoraO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
te te
Part
aidios aidios
a_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
dunamis kai dunamis kai

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
power and Godhead; so that they are without excuse:
beING-MINDED being-apprehended qeioths eis theiotEs eis

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
IS-beING-DOWN-SEEN THE is-being-descried to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
BESIDES UN-PERCEIVed OF-Him imperceptible
ABILITY power
AND
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
autous anapologhtous autos anapologEtos

pp Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
divinity
INTO THE
TO-BE
them
UN-FROM-said defenseless qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
1:21 dioti
dioti
Conj
gnontes ginOskO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouc ou
Part Neg
ws qeon hOs theos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
edoxasan doxazO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
h E
Part
THRU-that KNOWING because-that ones-knowing
THE
God
NOT
AS
God
THEY-esteemize OR they-glorify kai eskotisqh kai skotizO

hucaristhsan all emataiwqhsan eucharisteO alla mataioO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
dialogismois autwn dialogismos autos

21 Because that, when they knew God, they glorified [him] not as God, neither were thankful; but became vain in their imaginations, and their foolish heart was darkened.
THEY-thank thank-him h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
but
THEY-WERE-made-VAIN IN
THE
OF-them
AND
IS-DARKenED
asunetos autwn asunetos autos

a_ Nom Sg f pp Gen Pl m
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
OF-them
HEART
1:22 faskontes
phaskO
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
sofoi sophos
a_ Nom Pl m
emwranqhsan mOrainO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
22 Professing themselves to be wise, they became fools,
ALLEGING alleging-themselves
TO-BE
WISE
THEY-ARE-made-INSIPID they-are-made-stupid tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
1:23 kai hllaxan

kai
Conj
allassO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
afqartou aphthartos
a_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
omoiwmati homoiOma
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
THEY-CHANGE THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
UN-CORRUPTible God incorruptible
IN
LIKEness
eikonos fqartou eikOn phthartos

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou kai peteinwn anthrOpos kai peteinon

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Pl n
kai tetrapodwn kai tetrapous

Conj a_ Gen Pl n
kai erpetwn kai herpeton

Conj n_ Gen Pl n
23 And changed the glory of the uncorruptible God into an image made like to corruptible man, and to birds, and fourfooted beasts, and creeping things.
OF-image
OF-CORRUPTible human
AND
OF-flyers AND of-flying-creatures qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-FOUR-FOOTEDS AND quadrupeds en en

Prep
OF-REPTILES reptiles
24 Wherefore God also gave them up to uncleanness through the lusts of their own hearts, to dishonour their own bodies between themselves:
1:24 dio
dio
Conj
paredwken autous o paradidOmi autos ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
epiqumiais twn epithumia ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
THRU-WHICH BESIDE-GIVES wherefore gives-over kardiwn autwn kardia autos

them
THE
God
IN
THE
ON-FEELings lusts ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
eis eis
Prep
akaqarsian tou akatharsia ho

atimazesqai atimazO
vn Pres mid/pas
swmata autwn sOma autos

HEARTS
OF-them
INTO UN-cleanness uncleanness
OF-THE
TO-BE-beING-UN-VALUED THE to-be-dishonoring
BODIES
OF-them
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
IN them among themselves
1:25 oitines methllaxan thn

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
metallassO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian tou alEtheia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
yeudei pseudos
n_ Dat Sg n
kai kai
Conj
WHO-ANY those-who
after-CHANGE alter
THE
TRUTH
OF-THE
God
IN
THE
FALSEhood AND lie os hos

pr Nom Sg m
25 Who changed the truth of God into a lie, and worshipped and served the creature more than the Creator, who is blessed for ever. Amen.
esebasqhsan kai elatreusan sebazomai kai latreuO

vi Aor midD 3 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ktisei ktisis
n_ Dat Sg f
para para
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ktisanta ktizO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
ARE-REVERED are-venerated estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
offer-DIVINE-SERVICE to-THE
CREATION BESIDE THE
One-CREATing one-creating
WHO
euloghtos eis eulogEtos eis

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas amhn aiOn amEn

n_ Acc Pl m Hebrew
IS
blessed
INTO THE
eons
AMEN
1:26 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n

qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
paqh pathos
n_ Acc Pl n
atimias atimia
n_ Gen Sg f
them
THE
God
INTO EMOTIONS OF-UN-VALUE passions of-dishonor
26 For this cause God gave them up unto vile affections: for even their women did change the natural use into that which is against nature:
AV
Romans 1
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
te te
Part
gar qhleiai autwn gar thElus autos

Conj a_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Pl m
methllaxan thn metallassO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
fusikhn crhsin phusikos chrEsis

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
BESIDES for
females
OF-them
after-CHANGE alter
THE
natural
USing use
INTO THE
para para
Prep
fusin phusis
n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE nature
1:27 omoiws te
homoiOs
Adv
te
Part
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
arsenes afentes arsEn aphiEmi

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
fusikhn crhsin phusikos chrEsis

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
LIKE-AS likewise
BESIDES AND also
THE
MALES
FROM-LETTING leaving autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
natural
USing use
OF-THE
qhleias exekauqhsan thElus ekkaiomai

a_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
orexei orexis
n_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
allhlous arsenes en allElOn arsEn en

pc Acc Pl m n_ Nom Pl m Prep
27 And likewise also the men, leaving the natural use of the woman, burned in their lust one toward another; men with men working that which is unseemly, and receiving in themselves that recompence of their error which was meet.
female
WERE-OUT-BURNED IN were-inflamed
THE
craving
OF-them
INTO one-another
MALES
IN
arsesin thn arsEn ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
aschmosunhn katergazomenoi aschEmosunE katergazomai

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
antimisqian hn antimisthia hos

MALES
THE
indecency
DOWN-ACTING effecting en en
Prep
AND
THE
INSTEAD-HIRE retribution
WHICH
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
planhs autwn planE autos

eautois apolambanontes heautou apolambanO

pf 3 Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
WAS-BINDING must-be
OF-THE
STRAYing deception ouk ou

Part Neg
OF-them
IN
selves themselves
FROM-GETTING getting-back ecein echO

vn Pres Act
1:28 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
edokimasan ton dokimazO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
epignwsei epignOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
according-AS NOT
THEY-test
THE
God
TO-BE-HAVING IN to-be-having-him poiein poieO

vn Pres Act
ON-KNOWledge recognition ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n

qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
adokimon noun adokimos nous

mh mE
Part Neg
28 And even as they did not like to retain God in [their] knowledge, God gave them over to a reprobate mind, to do those things which are not convenient;
BESIDE-GIVES gives-over kaqhkonta kathEkO
them
THE
God
INTO UN-tested disqualified
MIND
TO-BE-DOING THE NO the-things
vp Pres im-Act Acc Pl n
befittING
1:29 peplhrwmenous pash

plEroO
pas
a_ Dat Sg f
adikia adikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ponhria pleonexia kakia ponEria pleonexia kakia

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
mestous fqonou mestos phthonos

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-FILLED
to-EVERY UN-JUSTness wickedness to-all injustice dolou dolos

n_ Gen Sg m
MORE-HAVing greed
EVIL
DISTENDED
OF-ENVY
fonou phonos
n_ Gen Sg m
eridos eris
n_ Gen Sg f
kakohqeias yiquristas kakoEtheia psithuristEs

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Pl m
29 Being filled with all unrighteousness, fornication, wickedness, covetousness, maliciousness; full of envy, murder, debate, deceit, malignity; whisperers,
OF-MURDER OF-STRIFE OF-FRAUD murder strife guile
EVIL-CUSTOM depravity
WHISPERers
1:30 katalalous qeostugeis ubristas uperhfanous alazonas

katalalos
a_ Acc Pl m
theostugEs
a_ Acc Pl m
hubristEs
n_ Acc Pl m
huperEphanos
a_ Acc Pl m
alazOn
n_ Acc Pl m
efeuretas kakwn epheuretEs kakos

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Gen Pl n
DOWN-TALKers vilifiers
God-DETESTers detesters-of-God
OUTRAGers
OVER-APPEARing proud
OSTENTATIOUS ON-FINDers inventors
OF-EVILS of-evil-things
30 Backbiters, haters of God, despiteful, proud, boasters, inventors of evil things, disobedient to parents,
goneusin apeiqeis goneus apeithEs

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
to-parents
UN-PERSUADable stubborn anelehmonas aneleEmOn

a_ Acc Pl m
31 Without understanding, covenantbreakers, without natural affection, implacable, unmerciful:
1:31 asunetous asunqetous astorgous

asunetos
a_ Acc Pl m
asunthetos
a_ Acc Pl m
astorgos
a_ Acc Pl m
perfidious
UN-NATURAL-AFFECTIONate UN-MERCIFUL without-natural-affection unmerciful qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
1:32 oitines to
hostis
pr Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dikaiwma tou dikaiOma ho

epignontes epiginOskO
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WHO-ANY those-who
THE
JUST-effect just-statute
OF-THE
God
that
THE the-ones
THE
32 Who knowing the judgment of God, that they which commit such things are worthy of death, not only do the same, but have pleasure in them that
AV
Romans 1 - Romans 2
toiauta prassontes toioutos prassO

pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
axioi axios
a_ Nom Pl m
qanatou eisin thanatos eimi

n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
monon auta monon autos

Adv pp Acc Pl n
poiousin poieO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
do them.
such such-things
ones-PRACTISING committing
WORTHY deserving
OF-DEATH
ARE
NOT
ONLY
them
ARE-DOING
alla kai suneudokousin alla kai suneudokeO

Conj Conj vi Pres Act 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
prassousin prassO
but
AND also
THEY-ARE-TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING to-THE are-endorsing the
ones-PRACTISING ones-committing-them
AV
Romans 2
2:1 dio
dio
Conj
anapologhtos ei anapologEtos eimi

w anqrwpe pas O anthrOpos pas

Inj n_ Voc Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
krinwn krinO
THRU-WHICH UN-FROM-said wherefore defenseless en en

Prep
YOU-ARE
o!
human !
EVERY
THE
one-JUDGING one-judging ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
gar krineis gar krinO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
seauton katakrineis seautou katakrinO

. Therefore thou inexcusable, O whosoever thou art judgest: for wherein judgest another, condemnest thyself; for that judgest doest the things.
art man, that thou thou thou same
IN
WHICH
for
YOU-ARE-JUDGING THE
DIFFERENT YOURself different-one krinwn krinO

YOU-ARE-DOWN-JUDGING THE you-are-condemning
gar auta gar autos

Conj pp Acc Pl n
prasseis prassO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
for
SAME YOU-ARE-PRACTISING THE same-things you-are-committing de de

Conj
one-JUDGING one-judging krima krima

n_ Nom Sg n
2:2 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that we-are-aware alhqeian epi tous alEtheia epi ho

n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Acc Pl m
THE
JUDGment
OF-THE
God
IS
according-to
But we are sure that the judgment of God is according to truth against them which commit such things.
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
toiauta prassontas toioutos prassO

pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
TRUTH
ON
THE-ones the-ones de de
Conj
THE
such such-things
PRACTISING committing krinwn krinO

2:3 logizh
logizomai
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
w anqrwpe o O anthrOpos ho
Inj n_ Voc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
YOU-ARE-accountING YET this you-are-reckoning on-this toiauta prassontas toioutos prassO

pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
o!
human !
THE
one-JUDGING one-judging oti su hoti su

Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
THE-ones the-ones ekfeuxh ekpheugO

vi Fut midD 2 Sg
THE
And thinkest thou this, O man, that judgest them which do such things, and doest the same, that thou shalt escape the judgment of God?
kai poiwn kai poieO

auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
such such-things to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
PRACTISING committing krima krima

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
DOING one-doing
SAME that same-things
YOU
SHALL-BE-OUT-FLEEING shall-be-escaping
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
JUDGment OF-THE
God
2:4 h
E
Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ploutou ths ploutos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
crhstothtos autou chrEstotEs autos

kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
anochs anochE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
OR
OF-THE the
RICHES
OF-THE
kindness
OF-Him
AND
OF-THE the
tolerance AND forbearance
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
makroqumias katafroneis makrothumia kataphroneO

agnown agnoeO
oti to hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
crhston tou chrEstos ho

Or despisest thou the riches of his goodness and forbearance and longsuffering; not knowing that the goodness of God leadeth thee to repentance?
OF-THE the qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
FAR-FEELing patience eis eis

Prep
YOU-ARE-despisING UN-KNOWING being-ignorant agei agO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
that
THE
kind kindness
OF-THE
metanoian se metanoia su
n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Acc Sg
God
INTO after-MIND repentance de de

Conj
YOU
IS-LEADING
2:5 kata
kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sklhrothta sou sklErotEs su

kai ametanohton kardian kai ametanoEtos kardia

Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
according-to YET THE in-accord-with qhsaurizeis thEsaurizO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
HARDness
OF-YOU
AND
UN-after-MINDED unrepentant orghs orgE

n_ Gen Sg f
HEART
But after thy hardness and impenitent heart treasurest up unto thyself wrath against the day of wrath and revelation of the righteous judgment of God;
seautw orghn seautou orgE

pf 3 Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
YOU-ARE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-YOURself INDIGNATION IN you-are-hoarding apokaluyews dikaiokrisias tou apokalupsis dikaiokrisia ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
DAY
OF-INDIGNATION AND
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
FROM-COVERing revelation
OF-JUST-JUDGment
OF-THE
God
2:6 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
apodwsei apodidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ekastw kata hekastos kata

a_ Dat Sg m Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
Who will render to every man according to his deeds:
WHO
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-EACH shall-be-paying each-one
according-to THE in-accord-with
ACTS
OF-him
AV
Romans 2
2:7 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
men men
Part
kaq kata
Prep
upomonhn hupomonE
n_ Acc Sg f
ergou ergon
n_ Gen Sg n
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg n
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
kai timhn kai timE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
to-THE-ones INDEED according-to UNDER-REMAINing OF-ACT to-the-ones endurance afqarsian aphtharsia

n_ Acc Sg f
GOOD
esteem glory
AND
VALUE honor
AND
To them who by patient continuance in well doing seek for glory and honour and immortality, eternal life:
zhtousin zEteO
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
UN-CORRUPTion ARE-SEEKING incorruption
LIFE
eonian
2:8 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
eriqeias kai apeiqousin eritheia kai apeitheO

n_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Pres Act Dat Pl m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia peiqomenois alEtheia peithO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Mid Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
to-THE-ones YET OUT OF-STRIFE to-the-ones of-faction th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
AND
UN-PERSUADING to-THE being-stubborn
TRUTH
beING-PERSUADED YET
But unto them that are contentious, and do not obey the truth, but obey unrighteousness, indignation and wrath,
adikia adikia
n_ Dat Sg f
orgh orgE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai qumos kai thumos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
UN-JUSTness INDIGNATION AND injustice
fury
2:9 qliyis
thlipsis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai stenocwria epi pasan kai stenochOria epi pas

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep a_ Acc Sg f
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
anqrwpou tou anthrOpos ho

CONSTRICTION AND affliction katergazomenou katergazomai

CRAMP-SPACE distress to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ON
EVERY
soul
OF-human
OF-THE the kai ellhnos kai hellEn

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
Tribulation and anguish, upon every soul of man that doeth evil, of the Jew first, and also of the Gentile;
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
ioudaiou te ioudaios te
a_ Gen Sg m Part
prwton prOton
Adv
one-DOWN-ACTING one-effecting
THE
EVIL
OF-JUDA-an of-Jew kai eirhnh kai eirEnE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
BESIDES BEFORE-most AND bsboth first tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
OF-GREEK
2:10 doxa
doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
kai timh kai timE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
ergazomenw ergazomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
esteem glory
YET AND
VALUE honor
AND
PEACE
to-EVERY
THE
one-ACTING one-working
THE
10 But glory, honour, and peace, to every man that worketh good, to the Jew first, and also to the Gentile:
agaqon ioudaiw te agathos ioudaios te

a_ Acc Sg n a_ Dat Sg m Part
prwton prOton
Adv
kai ellhni kai hellEn

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
GOOD
to-JUDA-an to-Jew
BESIDES BEFORE-most AND bsboth first
to-GREEK
2:11 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

proswpolhmyia para prosOpolEpsia para

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
11 For there is no respect of persons with God.
NOT
for
IS there-is
partiality
BESIDE THE
God
2:12 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
gar anomws hmarton gar anomOs hamartanO

Conj Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
anomws kai apolountai anomOs kai apollumi

Adv Conj vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
kai osoi kai hosos

Conj pk Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
as-many-as for whoever nomw nomos

n_ Dat Sg m
UN-LAW-ly without-law dia dia

Prep
missED sinned nomou nomos

n_ Gen Sg m
UN-LAW-ly without-law
AND also
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED AND shall-be-perishing
as-many-as IN whoever
12 For as many as have sinned without law shall also perish without law: and as many as have sinned in the law shall be judged by the law;
hmarton hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kriqhsontai krinO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
LAW
missED sinned gar oi gar ho

Conj
THRU LAW through
SHALL-BE-BEING-JUDGED
2:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
akroatai nomou akroatEs nomos

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
dikaioi para dikaios para

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
all alla
Conj
t_ Nom Pl m
NOT
for
THE
LISTENers
OF-LAW
JUST just-ones
BESIDE
THE
God
but
13 (For not the hearers of the law [are] just before God, but the doers of the law shall be justified.
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
poihtai nomou poiEtEs nomos

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiwqhsontai dikaioO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
THE
DOers
OF-LAW
SHALL-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED
2:14 otan
hotan
Conj
gar eqnh gar ethnos

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
econta echO
fusei phusis
n_ Dat Sg f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
when-EVER for whenever nomou nomos

n_ Gen Sg m
NATIONS
THE
NO
LAW
HAVING
to-nature
THE OF-THE the-things eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
14 For when the Gentiles, which have not the law, do by nature the things contained in the law, these, having not the law, are a law unto themselves:
poiwsin poieO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
econtes echO
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
LAW
MAY-BE-DOING these
LAW
NO
HAVING
to-selves ARE to-themselves
LAW
AV
Romans 2
2:15 oitines endeiknuntai to

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
endeiknumi
vi Pres Mid 3 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
grapton en graptos en
a_ Acc Sg n Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
WHO-ANY who-any
ARE-IN-SHOWING are-displaying
THE
ACT work autwn autos
OF-THE
LAW
WRITten
IN
THE

summarturoushs summartureO
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
suneidhsews kai metaxu suneidEsis kai metaxu

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv
15 Which shew the work of the law written in their hearts, their conscience also bearing witness, and [their] thoughts the mean while accusing or else excusing one another;)
pp Gen Pl m
HEARTS
OF-them
OF-TOGETHER-witnessING them of-testifying-together of-them
THE
conscience
AND
between
allhlwn twn allElOn ho

pc Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
logismwn kathgorountwn h logismos katEgoreO E

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Part
kai apologoumenwn kai apologeomai

one-another
OF-THE the
WH WH
logics reasonings
NA
accusING
NA
OR
AND also
FROM-sayING defending-them o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
2:16 en
en
Prep
h hmera
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
ote hote
Adv
krinei krinO
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
IN
DAY
when
SHALL-BE-JUDGING
THE
God
THE
16 In the day when God shall judge the secrets of men by Jesus Christ according to my gospel.
krupta kruptos
a_ Acc Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn kata anthrOpos kata

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
dia dia
Prep
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
HIDDen OF-THE hidden-things ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
humans
according-to THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-ME
THRU ANOINTED through Christ
JESUS
2:17 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
ioudaios eponomazh ioudaios eponomazO

a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 2 Sg
kai epanapauh kai epanapauomai

nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
17 . Behold, thou art called a Jew, and restest in the law, and makest thy boast of God,
IF
YET YOU
JUDA-an Jew qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
ARE-beING-ON-NAMED AND are-being-denominated
ARE-ON-restING are-resting-on
to-LAW law
AND
kaucasai kauchaomai
en en
Prep
ARE-BOASTING
IN
God
2:18 kai ginwskeis to

kai
Conj
ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
qelhma kai dokimazeis ta thelEma kai dokimazO ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vi Pres Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
diaferonta diapherO
AND
ARE-KNOWING THE
WILL
AND
ARE-testING
THE THRU-CARRYING the-things being-of-consequence
18 And knowest [his] will, and approvest the things that are more excellent, being instructed out of the law;
kathcoumenos ek katEcheO ek
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
beING-instructED
OUT OF-THE
LAW
2:19 pepoiqas
peithO
vi 2Perf Act 2 Sg
te te
Part
seauton odhgon seautou hodEgos

pf 3 Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
tuflwn fws tuphlos phOs

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
YOU-HAVE-confidence BESIDES YOURself you-have-confidence-in skotei skotos

n_ Dat Sg n
WAY-LEADer TO-BE guide
LIGHT
OF-THE-ones IN of-the-ones
19 And art confident that thou thyself art a guide of the blind, a light of them which are in darkness,
DARKness
2:20 paideuthn afronwn

paideutEs
n_ Acc Sg f
aphrOn
a_ Gen Pl m
didaskalon nhpiwn econta didaskalos nEpios echO

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
morfwsin morphOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
discipliner
OF-UN-DISPOSed TEACHer of-imprudent-ones
OF-minors
HAVING
THE
FORMing form
20 An instructor of the foolish, a teacher of babes, which hast the form of knowledge and of the truth in the law.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
gnwsews kai ths gnOsis kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias en alEtheia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
KNOWledge
AND
OF-THE the
TRUTH
IN
THE
LAW
2:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
didaskwn didaskO
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
seauton ou seautou ou
pf 3 Acc Sg m Part Neg
didaskeis didaskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE the-one
THEN one-TEACHING teaching
DIFFERENT YOURself different-one
NOT
ARE-TEACHING THE you-are-teaching
21 Thou therefore which teachest another, teachest thou not thyself? thou that preachest a man should not steal, dost thou steal?
AV
Romans 2
khrusswn kErussO
mh mE
Part Neg
kleptein kleptO
vn Pres Act
klepteis kleptO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
one-PROCLAIMING one-heralding
NO
TO-BE-stealING YOU-ARE-stealING
2:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
legwn legO
mh mE
Part Neg
moiceuein moicheuO
vn Pres Act
moiceueis moicheuO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-sayING one-saying ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
NO
TO-BE-ADULTERING YOU-ARE-ADULTERING THE to-be-committing-adultery you-are-committing-adultery
22 Thou that sayest a man should not commit adultery, dost thou commit adultery? thou that abhorrest idols, dost thou commit sacrilege?
bdelussomenos bdelussomai
eidwla ierosuleis eidOlon hierosuleO

one-ABOMINATING one-abominating
THE
idols
YOU-ARE-SACRED-ATTACHING you-are-despoiling-the-sanctuary dia dia

Prep
2:23 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
kaucasai kauchaomai
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parabasews parabasis
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
WHO
IN
LAW
ARE-BOASTING
THRU THE through
BESIDE-STEPPing OF-THE transgression
LAW
23 Thou that makest thy boast of the law, through breaking the law dishonourest thou God?
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
atimazeis atimazO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
THE
God
YOU-ARE-UN-VALUING you-are-dishonoring gar onoma gar onoma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
2:24 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
blasfhmeitai blasphEmeO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
THE
for
NAME
OF-THE
God
THRU YOU(p) because-of ye
IS-beING-HARM-AVERRED IN is-being-blasphemed among
24 For the name of God is blasphemed among the Gentiles through you, as it is written.
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin kaqws ethnos kathOs

n_ Dat Pl n Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
THE
NATIONS
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN
2:25 peritomh
peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
men men
Part
gar wfelei gar OpheleO

ean ean
Cond
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
prasshs prassO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
ABOUT-CUTTing INDEED for circumcision parabaths parabatEs

n_ Nom Sg m
IS-benefitING
IF-EVER LAW
YOU-MAY-BE-PRACTISING IF-EVER YET
25 For circumcision verily profiteth, if thou keep the law: but if thou be a breaker of the law, thy circumcision is made uncircumcision.
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
hs eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
peritomh peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
akrobustia gegonen akrobustia ginomai

n_ Nom Sg f vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
BESIDE-STEPPer OF-LAW transgressor
YOU-MAY-BE
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing OF-YOU circumcision dikaiwmata tou dikaiOma ho

n_ Acc Pl n
uncircumcision
HAS-BECOME
2:26 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
akrobustia ta akrobustia ho
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
IF-EVER THEN THE
uncircumcision
THE
JUST-effects just-requirements eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
LAW
26 Therefore if the uncircumcision keep the righteousness of the law, shall not his uncircumcision be counted for circumcision?
fulassh phulassO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ouc ou
Part Neg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
akrobustia autou akrobustia autos

peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
logisqhsetai logizomai
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
MAY-BE-GUARDING NOT may-be-maintaining
THE
uncircumcision
OF-him
INTO ABOUT-CUTTing SHALL-BE-BEING-accountED circumcision shall-be-being-reckoned nomon nomos

n_ Acc Sg m
2:27 kai krinei

kai
Conj
krinO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
fusews phusis
n_ Gen Sg f
akrobustia ton akrobustia ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Acc Sg m
telousa teleO
AND
SHALL-BE-JUDGING THE
OUT OF-NATURE uncircumcision
THE
LAW
FINISHING accomplishing
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
grammatos kai peritomhs gramma kai peritomE

parabathn parabatEs
n_ Acc Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
27 And shall not uncircumcision which is by nature, if it fulfil the law, judge thee, who by the letter and circumcision dost transgress the law?
YOU
THE-one the
THRU WRITing through letter en en

Prep
AND
ABOUT-CUTTing BESIDE-STEPPer OF-LAW circumcision transgressor oude oude

Adv
2:28 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fanerw ioudaios estin phaneros ioudaios eimi

a_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
NOT
for
THE
IN
THE
apparent
JUDA-an Jew
IS
NOT-YET THE nor-yet
IN
28 For he is not a Jew, which is one outwardly; neither [is that] circumcision, which is outward in the flesh:
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fanerw en phaneros en
a_ Dat Sg n Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
peritomh peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
apparent
IN
FLESH
ABOUT-CUTTing circumcision
AV
Romans 2 - Romans 3
2:29 all o
alla
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kruptw ioudaios kai peritomh kruptos ioudaios kai peritomE

a_ Dat Sg n a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kardias en kardia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
but
THE
IN
THE
HIDDen
JUDA-an Jew o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
ABOUT-CUTTing OF-HEART circumcision ex ek

Prep
IN
pneumati ou pneuma ou
n_ Dat Sg n Part Neg
grammati ou gramma hos

n_ Dat Sg n pr Gen Sg m
epainos ouk epainos ou

anqrwpwn all ek anthrOpos alla ek

29 But he [is] a Jew, which is one inwardly; and circumcision [is that] of the heart, in the spirit, [and] not in the letter; whose praise [is] not of men, but of God.
spirit
NOT
WRITing to-letter
WHOSE of-whom
THE
ON-PRAISE applause
NOT
OUT OF-humans
but
OUT
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
AV
Romans 3
3:1 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
perisson tou perissos ho

ioudaiou h ioudaios E
a_ Gen Sg m Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
wfeleia Opheleia
n_ Nom Sg f
. What advantage then hath the Jew? or what profit [is there] of circumcision?
ANY what ? ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THEN THE
excessive prerogative
OF-THE
JUDA-an Jew
OR
ANY what ?
THE
benefit
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
ABOUT-CUTTing circumcision kata kata

Prep
3:2 polu
polus
a_ Nom Sg n
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
tropon prwton tropos prOton

n_ Acc Sg m Adv
men men
Part
gar gar
Conj
oti episteuqhsan hoti pisteuO

Much every way: chiefly, because that unto them were committed the oracles of God.
MANY much ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
according-to EVERY
manner
BEFORE-most INDEED first
for
that
THEY-WERE-BELIEVED they-were-entrusted-with
logia logion
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
oracles
OF-THE
God
3:3 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
gar ei gar ei
Conj Cond
hpisthsan apisteO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apistia autwn apistia autos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ANY what ? pistin pistis

n_ Acc Sg f
for
IF
THEY-UN-BELIEVE ANY disbelieve some katarghsei katargeO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
NO
THE
UN-BELIEF unbelief
OF-them
THE
For what if some did not believe? shall their unbelief make the faith of God without effect?
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
BELIEF OF-THE faithfulness
God
SHALL-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING shall-be-nullifying ginesqw ginomai

3:4 mh
mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
alhqhs alEthEs
a_ Nom Sg m
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING LET-BE-BECOMING let-him-be-becoming !

WH
YET THE
God
TRUE
EVERY
YET
anqrwpos yeusths anthrOpos pseustEs

kaqaper
NA
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
opws hopOs
Adv
an an
Part
God forbid: yea, let God be true, but every man a liar; as it is written, That thou mightest be justified in thy sayings, and mightest overcome when thou art judged.
human
FALSifier liar en en
Prep
DOWN-AS according-as tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN WHICH-how EVER so-that kai nikhseis kai nikaO

dikaiwqhs dikaioO
vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
logois sou logos su

en en
Prep
YOU-MAY-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED IN
THE
sayings
OF-YOU
AND
YOU-SHALL-BE-CONQUERING IN shall-be-conquering
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
krinesqai krinO
vn Pres Pas
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
THE
TO-BE-beING-JUDGED YOU
3:5 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
adikia adikia
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiosunhn sunisthsin dikaiosunE sunistEmi

ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
IF
YET THE
UN-JUSTness OF-US injustice mh mE

Part Neg
OF-God
JUSTice righteousness o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IS-TOGETHER-STANDING ANY is-commending what ? epiferwn epipherO

But if our unrighteousness commend the righteousness of God, what shall we say? [Is] God unrighteous who taketh vengeance? (I speak as a man)
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
adikos adikos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WE-SHALL-BE-declarING NO
UN-JUST unjust
THE
God
THE
One-ON-CARRYING THE one-bringing-on
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
kata kata
Prep
anqrwpon legw anthrOpos legO

INDIGNATION according-to human
I-AM-sayING I-am-saying-it epei pws krinei epei pOs krinO

Conj Adv Int vi Fut Act 3 Sg / vi Pres Act 3 Sg
3:6 mh
mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
God forbid: for then how shall God judge the world?
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING since else
how how ?
SHALL-BE-JUDGING
THE
God
THE
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
SYSTEM world
AV
Romans 3
3:7 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
alhqeia tou alEtheia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
emw emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
yeusmati pseusma
n_ Dat Sg n
IF
YET THE
TRUTH
OF-THE
God
IN
THE
MY
FALSEhood lie ws amartwlos hOs hamartOlos

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
For if the truth of God hath more abounded through my lie unto his glory; why yet am I also judged as a sinner?
eperisseusen eis perisseuO eis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eti eti
Adv
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
exceeds superabounds krinomai krinO

vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
INTO THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
ANY why ?
STILL AND-I also-I
AS
misser sinner
AM-beING-JUDGED
WH NA
3:8 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
blasfhmoumeqa blasphEmeO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
kai
kai kai
Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
AND
NO
according-AS WE-ARE-beING-HARM-AVERRED we-are-being-calumniated tines tis

px Nom Pl m
AND
according-AS
fasin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
legein legO
vn Pres Act
oti poihswmen hoti poieO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kaka kakos
a_ Acc Pl n
ina hina
Conj
And not [rather], (as we be slanderously reported, and as some affirm that we say,) Let us do evil, that good may come? whose damnation is just.
THEY-ARE-AVERRING ANY are-averring some elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
US
TO-BE-sayING that
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOING THE
EVIL evil(p)
THAT
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Nom Pl n
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
krima krima
n_ Nom Sg n
endikon estin endikos eimi

MAY-BE-COMING THE
GOOD good(p) proecomeqa proechO
WHOSE(p) THE of-whom(p) ou ou

Part Neg
JUDGment
IN-JUST fair
IS
3:9 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
pantws prohtiasameqa gar ioudaious pantOs proaitiaomai gar ioudaios

Adv vi Aor midD 1 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl m
ANY what ? te te
Part
THEN WE-ARE-BEFORE-HAVING NOT we-are-being-privileged
ALL-ly undoubtedly
WE-BEFORE-cause we-previously-charge
for
JUDA-ans Jews
What then? are we better [than they]? No, in no wise: for we have before proved both Jews and Gentiles, that they are all under sin;
kai ellhnas pantas uf kai hellEn pas hupo

Conj n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Prep
amartian einai hamartia eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres vxx
BESIDES AND bsboth
GREEKS
ALL
UNDER missing sin oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
TO-BE
3:10 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dikaios dikaios
a_ Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
10 As it is written, There is none righteous, no, not one:
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN that

NA
NOT
IS there-is
JUST just-one ouk ou

Part Neg
NOT-YET ONE not-yeteven

NA
3:11 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
suniwn suniEmi
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 There is none that understandeth, there is none that seeketh after God.
NOT
IS there-is ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
one-understandING one-understanding
NOT
IS there-is
THE
ekzhtwn ekzEteO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
one-OUT-SEEKING one-seeking-out
THE
God
NA
3:12 pantes exeklinan ama

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ekklinO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
hama
Adv
hcrewqhsan achreioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ALL
OUT-CLINE avoid-him
SIMULTANEOUS THEY-WERE-UN-USed NOT at-the-same-time they-were-useless

WH
IS there-is
THE
12 They are all gone out of the way, they are together become unprofitable; there is none that doeth good, no, not one.
poiwn poieO
crhstothta chrEstotEs
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk estin
WH
NA
ouk ou
Part Neg
NA
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ews enos heOs heis

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
one-DOING one-doing
kindness
NOT
IS there-is autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
TILL OF-ONE tilleven one tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
3:13 tafos
taphos
n_ Nom Sg m
anewgmenos anoigO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
larugx larugx
n_ Nom Sg m
glwssais autwn glOssa autos

sepulcher
HAVING-been-UP-OPENED THE having-been-opened aspidwn upo aspis hupo

n_ Gen Pl f Prep
LARYNX throat ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-them
to-THE
TONGUES
OF-them
13 Their throat [is] an open sepulchre; with their tongues they have used deceit; the poison of asps [is] under their lips:
edoliousan ios dolioO ios

vi impf Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Sg m
ceilh cheilos
n_ Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THEY-deFRAUD
VENOM
OF-ASPS
UNDER THE
LIPS
OF-them
AV
Romans 3
3:14 wn
hos
pr Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
stoma stoma
n_ Nom Sg n
aras ara
n_ Gen Sg f
kai pikrias kai pikria

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
gemei gemO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
14 Whose mouth [is] full of cursing and bitterness:
OF-WHOM THE of-whom(p)
MOUTH
OF-EXECRATION AND of-imprecation autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
BITTERness IS-beING-REPLETE is-being-crammed aima haima

n_ Acc Sg n
15 Their feet [are] swift to shed blood:
3:15 oxeis
oxus
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
podes pous
n_ Nom Pl m
ekceai ekcheO
vn Aor Act
SHARP
THE
FEET
OF-them
TO-POUR-OUT BLOOD to-shed en en

Prep
3:16 suntrimma kai talaipwria

suntrimma
n_ Nom Sg n
kai
Conj
talaipOria
n_ Nom Sg f
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
odois hodos
n_ Dat Pl f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
16 Destruction and [are] in their ways:
misery
crushing bruise
AND
WEIGHT-CALLOUSness IN wretchedness egnwsan ginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
WAYS
OF-them
3:17 kai odon

kai
Conj
hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
eirhnhs ouk eirEnE ou

17 And the way of peace have they not known:
AND
WAY
OF-PEACE
NOT
THEY-KNOW
3:18 ouk
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
apenanti apenanti
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ofqalmwn autwn ophthalmos autos

18 There is no fear of God before their eyes.
NOT
IS there-is
FEAR
OF-God
FROM-IN-INSTEAD OF-THE in-front-of the o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-them
3:19 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
oti osa hoti hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl n
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
t_ Dat Pl m
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that we-are-aware nomw nomos

n_ Dat Sg m
as-much-as THE whatever stoma stoma

n_ Nom Sg n
LAW
IS-sayING
to-THE-ones IN to-the-ones
THE
lalei laleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
fragh phrassO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai upodikos kai hupodikos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
19 . Now we know that what things soever the law saith, it saith to them who are under the law: that every mouth may be stopped, and all the world may become guilty before God.
LAW
it-IS-TALKING THAT EVERY it-is-speaking pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
MOUTH
MAY-BE-beING-BARRED AND
UNDER-JUST subject-to-the-just-verdict
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
MAY-BE-BECOMING EVERY entire
THE
SYSTEM world ou ou
Part Neg
to-THE
God
3:20 dioti
dioti
Conj
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiwqhsetai dikaioO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
enwpion enOpion
Adv
THRU-that OUT OF-ACTS because-that of-works autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OF-LAW
NOT not
SHALL-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED EVERY at-all
FLESH
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
20 Therefore by the deeds of the law there shall no flesh be justified in his sight: for by the law [is] the knowledge of sin.
dia dia
Prep
gar nomou gar nomos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
epignwsis amartias epignOsis hamartia

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
OF-Him him
THRU for through
LAW
ON-KNOWledge OF-missing recognition of-sin dikaiosunh qeou dikaiosunE theos

3:21 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
cwris chOris
Adv
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
pefanerwtai phaneroO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
marturoumenh martureO
NOW
YET apart-from LAW
OF-God
HAS-been-made-APPEAR beING-witnessED has-been-manifested being-attested
21 But now the righteousness of God without the law is manifested, being witnessed by the law and the prophets;
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
profhtwn prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
by
THE
LAW
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers prophets pistews pistis

n_ Gen Sg f
WH
3:22 dikaiosunh de
dikaiosunE
n_ Nom Sg f
de
Conj
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ihsou
NA
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou eis christos eis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
JUSTice righteousness pantas tous pas ho

YET OF-God
THRU BELIEF through faith gar estin gar eimi

OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
INTO
22 Even the righteousness of God [which is] by faith of Jesus Christ unto all and upon all them that believe: for there is no difference:
pisteuontas ou pisteuO ou
vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Part Neg
diastolh diastolE
n_ Nom Sg f
ALL
THE
NOT
for
IS there-is
distinction
3:23 pantes gar hmarton

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai usterountai ths kai hustereO ho

Conj vi Pres Pas 3 Pl t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
23 For all have sinned, and come short of the glory of God;
ALL
for
missED sinned
AND
ARE-WANTING
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
God
AV
Romans 3
3:24 dikaioumenoi dwrean th

dikaioO
dOrean
Adv
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cariti dia charis dia

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
apolutrwsews apolutrOsis
n_ Gen Sg f
24 Being justified freely by his grace through the redemption that is in Christ Jesus:
beING-JUSTIFIED
gratuitously
to-THE
OF-Him
grace
THRU THE through
FROM-LOOSening deliverance
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
cristw ihsou christos iEsous

OF-THE the
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
NA
3:25 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
proeqeto protithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ilasthrion hilastErion
n_ Acc Sg n
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
WHOM
BEFORE-PLACED THE purposed tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
God
PROPITIATION-place THRU propitiatory-shelter through eis eis

Prep
THE
pistews en pistis en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
aimati haima
n_ Dat Sg n
endeixin ths endeixis ho

dikaiosunhs autou dikaiosunE autos

25 Whom God hath set forth [to be] a propitiation through faith in his blood, to declare his righteousness for the remission of sins that are past, through the forbearance of God;
BELIEF faith dia dia

Prep
IN
THE
OF-Him
BLOOD
INTO IN-SHOWing display
OF-THE
OF-Him
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paresin paresis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
progegonotwn proginomai
vp Perf Act Gen Pl n
amarthmatwn hamartEma
n_ Gen Pl n
THRU THE because-of
BESIDE-LETTing OF-THE passing-over anoch anochE

n_ Dat Sg f
BEFORE-HAVING-BECOME miss-effects having-occurred-before penalties-of-sins pros pros

Prep
3:26 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

dikaiosunhs dikaiosunE
n_ Gen Sg f
IN
THE
tolerance OF-THE forbearance tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
God
TOWARD THE
IN-SHOWing display auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OF-THE
26 To declare, [I say], at this time his righteousness: that he might be just, and the justifier of him which believeth in Jesus.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
nun nun
Adv
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
dikaion kai dikaios kai

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
OF-Him
IN
THE
NOW SEASON current era ek ek

Prep
INTO THE
TO-BE
Him
JUST
AND
dikaiounta dikaioO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pistews ihsou pistis iEsous

One-JUSTIFYING one-justifying
THE-one the-one h ho
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith
OF-JESUS
3:27 pou
pou
Part Int
oun oun
Conj
kauchsis exekleisqh kauchEsis ekkleiO

n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
poiou poios
pi Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
t_ Nom Sg f
?-where THEN THE where ? ouci ouchi

Part Neg
BOASTing
it-IS-OUT-LOCKED THRU ?-THE-WHICH LAW it-is-debarred through what ?
OF-THE
ACTS works
27 Where [is] boasting then? It is excluded. By what law? of works? Nay: but by the law of faith.
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
NOT(emph.) but
THRU LAW through
OF-BELIEF of-faith pistei anqrwpon cwris pistis anthrOpos chOris

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg m Adv
3:28 logizomeqa
logizomai
gar dikaiousqai gar dikaioO

Conj vn Pres Pas
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
28 Therefore we conclude that a man is justified by faith without the deeds of the law.
WE-ARE-accountING for we-are-reckoning
TO-BE-beING-JUSTIFIED to-BELIEF to-faith qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
human
apart-from ACTS works
OF-LAW
3:29 h
E
Part
monon ouci monon ouchi

Adv Part Int
kai eqnwn kai ethnos

Conj n_ Gen Pl n
nai kai eqnwn nai kai ethnos

Part Conj n_ Gen Pl n
OR
OF-JUDA-ans of-Jews eis heis
THE
God
ONLY
NOT(emph.) AND not(emph.) ? also
OF-NATIONS YEA yes
AND also
OF-NATIONS
29 [Is he] the God of the Jews only? [is he] not also of the Gentiles? Yes, of the Gentiles also:
3:30 eiper
eiper
Cond _P
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
dikaiwsei dikaioO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ek ek
Prep
n_ Nom Sg m
IF-EVEN ONE if-so-be-that
THE
God
WHO
SHALL-BE-JUSTIFYING ABOUT-CUTTing OUT Circumcision
30 Seeing [it is] one God, which shall justify the circumcision by faith, and uncircumcision through faith.
pistews kai akrobustian dia pistis kai akrobustia dia

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-BELIEF of-faith
AND
uncircumcision
THRU THE through dia dia

Prep
BELIEF faith ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
3:31 nomon
nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
oun oun
Conj
katargoumen katargeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
pistews mh pistis mE
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
31 Do we then make void the law through faith? God forbid: yea, we establish the law.
LAW
THEN WE-ARE-DOWN-UN-ACTING THRU THE we-are-nullifying through
BELIEF faith
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
AV
Romans 3 - Romans 4
alla nomon alla nomos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
istanomen histEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
but butnay
LAW
WE-ARE-STANDING-UP we-are-sustaining
AV
Romans 4
4:1 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
NA
eurhkenai heuriskO
vn Perf Act
abraam abraam
ni proper
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
propatora propatOr
n_ Acc Sg m
ANY what ? hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING
TO-HAVE-FOUND
ABRAHAM THE
BEFORE-FATHER forefather
. What shall we say then that Abraham our father, as pertaining to the flesh, hath found?
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-US
according-to FLESH
4:2 ei
ei
Cond
gar abraam gar abraam

Conj ni proper
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
edikaiwqh dikaioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kauchma all ou kauchEma alla ou

n_ Acc Sg n Conj Part Neg
pros pros
Prep
IF
for
ABRAHAM OUT OF-ACTS
WAS-JUSTIFIED he-IS-HAVING BOAST
but
NOT
TOWARD
For if Abraham were justified by works, he hath [whereof] to glory; but not before God.
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
God
4:3 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
episteusen de pisteuO de
abraam abraam
ni proper
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
ANY what ? elogisqh logizomai

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
for
THE
WRITing scripture eis eis

Prep
IS-sayING
BELIEVES
YET ABRAHAM to-THE the
God
AND
For what saith the scripture? Abraham believed God, and it was counted unto him for righteousness.
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
dikaiosunhn dikaiosunE
n_ Acc Sg f
it-IS-accountED to-him it-is-reckoned
INTO JUSTice righteousness ergazomenw ergazomai

4:4 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
misqos misthos
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
logizetai logizomai
kata kata
Prep
Now to him that worketh is the reward not reckoned of grace, but of debt.
to-THE-one YET ACTING to-the-one working carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
HIRE wage
NOT
IS-beING-accountED is-being-reckoned
according-to
alla kata alla kata

Conj Prep
ofeilhma opheilEma
n_ Acc Sg n
grace favor
but
according-to debt
4:5 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ergazomenw ergazomai
pisteuonti pisteuO
de de
Conj
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
dikaiounta dikaioO
to-THE-one YET NO to-the-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
ACTING working logizetai logizomai

BELIEVING
YET ON
THE
One-JUSTIFYING one-justifying
But to him that worketh not, but believeth on him that justifieth the ungodly, his faith is counted for righteousness.
asebh asebEs
a_ Acc Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
UN-REVERent IS-beING-accountED irreverent is-being-reckoned
THE
BELIEF faith ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
OF-him
INTO JUSTice righteousness anqrwpou anthrOpos

n_ Gen Sg m
6
4:6 kaqaper
kathaper
Adv
kai dauid legei kai dauid legO

Conj ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg
makarismon tou makarismos ho

DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND even-as also w hos

pr Dat Sg m
DAVID
IS-sayING
THE
HAPPYing happiness
OF-THE
human
Even as David also describeth the blessedness of the man, unto whom God imputeth righteousness without works,
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
logizetai logizomai
dikaiosunhn cwris dikaiosunE chOris

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
to-WHOM
THE
God
is-accountING is-reckoning afeqhsan aphiEmi

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
JUSTice righteousness anomiai anomia

n_ Nom Pl f
apart-from ACTS
4:7 makarioi wn
makarios
a_ Nom Pl m
hos
pr Gen Pl m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
kai wn kai hos

Conj pr Gen Pl m
epekalufqhsan epikaluptO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
[Saying], Blessed [are] they whose iniquities are forgiven, and whose sins are covered.
HAPPY happy-ones ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
OF-WHOM WERE-FROM-LET THE of-whom(p) were-pardoned
UN-LAWnesses AND lawlessnesses
OF-WHOM WERE-ON-COVERED of-whom(p) were-covered-over
amartiai hamartia
n_ Nom Pl f
THE
misses sins ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
4:8 makarios anhr

makarios
a_ Nom Sg m
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
logishtai logizomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
amartian hamartia
n_ Acc Sg f
Blessed [is] the man to whom the Lord will not impute sin.
HAPPY
MAN
OF-WHOM
NOT
NO
SHOULD-BE-accountING Master should-be-reckoning Lord
missing sin
AV
Romans 4
4:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
makarismos oun makarismos oun

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
h E
Part
kai epi thn kai epi ho

THE
HAPPYing happiness
THEN this
ON
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing OR Circumcision abraam abraam

ni proper
AND also
ON
THE
akrobustian legomen akrobustia legO

gar elogisqh tw gar logizomai ho

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
. [Cometh] this blessedness then upon the circumcision [only], or upon the uncircumcision also? for we say that faith was reckoned to Abraham for righteousness.
uncircumcision
WE-ARE-sayING for
IS-accountED is-reckoned
to-THE
ABRAHAM THE
BELIEF faith
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
4:10 pws oun

pOs
Adv Int
oun
Conj
elogisqh logizomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
peritomh peritomE
n_ Dat Sg f
onti eimi
h E
Part
en en
Prep
akrobustia ouk akrobustia ou

en en
Prep
how how ? peritomh peritomE

n_ Dat Sg f
THEN it-IS-accountED IN it-is-reckoned all en alla en

Conj Prep
ABOUT-CUTTing BEING circumcision
OR
IN
uncircumcision
NOT
IN
10 How was it then reckoned? when he was in circumcision, or in uncircumcision? Not in circumcision, but in uncircumcision.
akrobustia akrobustia
n_ Dat Sg f
ABOUT-CUTTing but circumcision
IN
uncircumcision
4:11 kai shmeion elaben

kai
Conj
sEmeion
n_ Acc Sg n
lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
sfragida ths sphragis ho

n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
SIGN
he-GOT he-obtained en en
Prep
OF-ABOUT-CUTTing SEAL of-circumcision akrobustia eis akrobustia eis

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
OF-THE
JUST-TOGETHERness OF-THE righteousness auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
pistews ths pistis ho

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
BELIEF faith twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE the
IN
THE
uncircumcision
INTO THE
TO-BE
him
FATHER
NA
OF-ALL
11 And he received the sign of circumcision, a seal of the righteousness of the faith which [he had yet] being uncircumcised: that he might be the father of all them that believe, though they be not circumcised; that righteousness might be imputed unto them also:
pisteuontwn di pisteuO dia

akrobustias eis akrobustia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
logisqhnai logizomai
vn Aor Pas
kai kai
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing dikaiosunhn dikaiosunE

n_ Acc Sg f
THRU uncircumcision through
INTO THE
TO-BE-accountED to-be-reckoned
AND also
to-them
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
JUSTice righteousness peritomhs peritomE

n_ Gen Sg f
4:12 kai patera

kai
Conj
patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
ek ek
Prep
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
monon alla kai monon alla kai

Adv Conj Conj
AND
FATHER
OF-ABOUT-CUTTing to-THE-ones NOT of-Circumcision to-the-ones tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
OUT OF-ABOUT-CUTTing ONLY of-Circumcision en en

Prep
but
AND also
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
stoicousin stoicheO
icnesin ths ichnos ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
akrobustia pistews tou akrobustia pistis ho

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
12 And the father of circumcision to them who are not of the circumcision only, but who also walk in the steps of that faith of our father Abraham, which [he had] being [yet] uncircumcised.
to-THE
ones-elementING to-THE ones-observing-the-fundamentals hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
TRACES footprints
OF-THE
IN
uncircumcision
BELIEF faith
OF-THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
FATHER
OF-US
ABRAHAM
4:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epaggelia tw epaggelia ho
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
h E
Part
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
spermati sperma
n_ Dat Sg n
NOT
for
THRU LAW through klhronomon klEronomos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
promise
to-THE
ABRAHAM OR
to-THE
seed
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
n_ Gen Sg f
13 For the promise, that he should be the heir of the world, [was] not to Abraham, or to his seed, through the law, but through the righteousness of faith.
OF-him
THE
tenant him enjoyer-of-the-allotment
TO-BE
OF-SYSTEM but of-world
THRU JUSTice through righteousness
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-BELIEF of-faith
AV
Romans 4
4:14 ei
ei
Cond
gar oi gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
klhronomoi klEronomos
n_ Nom Pl m
kekenwtai kenoO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
IF
for
THE-ones the-ones
OUT OF-LAW
tenants HAS-been-EMPTIED THE enjoyers-of-the-allotment has-been-made-void
BELIEF faith
AND
14 For if they which are of the law [be] heirs, faith is made void, and the promise made of none effect:
kathrghtai katargeO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epaggelia epaggelia
n_ Nom Sg f
HAS-been-DOWN-UN-ACTED THE has-been-nullified
promise
4:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar nomos gar nomos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
katergazetai katergazomai
ou hou
Adv
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
15 Because the law worketh wrath: for where no law is, [there is] no transgression.
THE
for
LAW
INDIGNATION IS-DOWN-ACTING is-producing
where YET NOT
IS
LAW
oude oude
Adv
parabasis parabasis
n_ Nom Sg f
NOT-YET BESIDE-STEPPing neither transgression
4:16 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ek ek
Prep
pistews ina pistis hina

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
kata kata
Prep
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
bebaian bebaios
a_ Acc Sg f

t_ Acc Sg f
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
THAT according-to grace in-accord-with spermati ou sperma ou

INTO THE
TO-BE
confirmed
epaggelian panti epaggelia pas

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
16 Therefore [it is] of faith, that [it might be] by grace; to the end the promise might be sure to all the seed; not to that only which is of the law, but to that also which is of the faith of Abraham; who is the father of us all,
THE
promise
to-EVERY to-entire
THE
seed
NOT
to-THE-one OUT OF-THE to-the-one os hos

pr Nom Sg m
LAW
monon alla kai tw monon alla kai ho

Adv Conj Conj t_ Dat Sg n
ek ek
Prep
pistews abraam pistis abraam

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
ONLY
but
AND also
to-THE-one OUT OF-BELIEF to-the-one of-faith
of-ABRAHAM WHO of-Abraham
IS
FATHER
OF-ALL
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-US
4:17 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti patera hoti patEr

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
pollwn eqnwn polus ethnos

teqeika tithEmi
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
FATHER
OF-MANY
NATIONS
I-HAVE-PLACED YOU I-have-appointed nekrous nekros

a_ Acc Pl m
katenanti katenanti
Adv
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
episteusen qeou pisteuO theos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
zwopoiountos tous zOopoieO ho

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl m
17 . (As it is written, I have made thee a father of many nations,) before him whom he believed, [even] God, who quickeneth the dead, and calleth those things which be not as though they were.
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-WHICH he-BELIEVES facing which kai kalountos kai kaleO

Conj vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
OF-God God onta eimi

THE
One-LIVE-makING one-vivifying
THE
DEAD-ones dead-ones
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
ws onta hOs eimi

Adv vp Pres vxx Acc Pl n
AND
One-CALLING calling par para

Prep
THE NO the-things elpida elpis

n_ Acc Sg f
BEING
AS
BEING
4:18 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ep epi
Prep
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
episteusen eis pisteuO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
WHO
BESIDE EXPECTATION ON beyond patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
EXPECTATION BELIEVES
INTO THE
TO-BE-BECOMING
18 Who against hope believed in hope, that he might become the father of many nations, according to that which was spoken, So shall thy seed be.
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pollwn eqnwn polus ethnos

kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eirhmenon ereO

Adv vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
him
FATHER
OF-MANY
NATIONS
according-to THE
HAVING-been-declarED thus
SHALL-BE
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
seed
OF-YOU
4:19 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
asqenhsas astheneO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei katenohsen to pistis katanoeO ho

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg n
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
NO
being-UN-FIRM being-infirm
to-THE
BELIEF faith
he-DOWN-MINDS THE he-considers
OF-self of-selfhim
BODY
19 And being not weak in faith, he considered not his own body now dead, when he was about an hundred years old, neither yet the deadness of
AV
Romans 4 - Romans 5
hdh EdE
Adv
nenekrwmenon ekatontaeths pou nekroO hekatontaetEs pou

vp Perf Pas Acc Sg n a_ Nom Sg m Part
uparcwn huparchO
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
Sara's womb:
ALREADY
HAVING-been-DEAD
HUNDRED-YEAR hundred-years
?-where belongING somewhere-about being-inherently
AND
THE
nekrwsin ths nekrOsis ho

mhtras sarras mEtra sarrha

DEADening
OF-THE
matrix
OF-SARAH
4:20 eis
eis
Prep
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
diekriqh diakrinO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
apistia apistia
n_ Dat Sg f
INTO YET THE
promise
OF-THE
God
NOT
WAS-THRU-JUDGED to-THE was-doubted tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
UN-BELIEF unbelief
20 He staggered not at the promise of God through unbelief; but was strong in faith, giving glory to God;
all enedunamwqh th alla endunamoO ho

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
pistei dous pistis didOmi

n_ Dat Sg f vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
but
he-WAS-IN-ABLED he-was-invigorated
to-THE
BELIEF faith
GIVING
esteem glory
to-THE
God
4:21 kai plhroforhqeis oti o

kai
Conj
plErophoreO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
hoti
Conj
hos
pr Acc Sg n
ephggeltai epaggellomai
dunatos estin dunatos eimi

kai poihsai kai poieO

Conj vn Aor Act
21 And being fully persuaded that, what he had promised, he was able also to perform.
AND also
BEING-FULL-worn being-fully-assured kai kai

Conj
that
WHICH
He-HAS-promisED
ABLE
He-IS
AND also
TO-DO
4:22 dio
dio
Conj
elogisqh logizomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
22 And therefore it imputed to him righteousness.
was for
THRU-WHICH wherefore
AND also
it-IS-accountED to-him it-is-reckoned de de

Conj
INTO JUSTice righteousness monon oti elogisqh monon hoti logizomai

Adv Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
4:23 ouk
ou
Part Neg
egrafh graphO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
di dia
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
23 . Now it was not written for his sake alone, that it was imputed to him;
NOT
WAS-WRITten it-was-written
YET THRU him because-of hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
ONLY
that
it-IS-accountED to-him it-is-reckoned logizesqai logizomai

vn Pres Pas
4:24 alla kai di

alla
Conj
kai
Conj
dia
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
mellei mellO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
but
AND also
THRU US because-of
to-WHOM it-IS-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-beING-accountED to-THE to-be-being-reckoned the egeiranta egeirO

vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
24 But for us also, to whom it shall be imputed, if we believe on him that raised up Jesus our Lord from the dead;
pisteuousin epi ton pisteuO epi ho

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Prep t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ON
THE
One-ROUSing one-rousing dia dia

Prep
JESUS
THE
Master Lord
OF-US

25 Who was delivered for our offences, and was raised again for our justification.
4:25 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
paredoqh paradidOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata hmwn paraptOma hemeis

kai hgerqh kai egeirO

WHO
WAS-BESIDE-GIVEN THRU THE was-given-up because-of thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-US
AND
WAS-ROUSED
dia dia
Prep
dikaiwsin hmwn dikaiOsis hemeis

THRU THE because-of
JUSTifying
OF-US
AV
Romans 5
5:1 dikaiwqentes oun

dikaioO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
oun
Conj
ek ek
Prep
pistews eirhnhn pistis eirEnE

WH
ecwmen
NA
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
pros pros
Prep
. Therefore being justified by faith, we have peace with God through our Lord Jesus Christ:
BEING-JUSTIFIED
THEN OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith dia dia

Prep
PEACE
WE-ARE-HAVING
TOWARD
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
God
THRU THE through kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
5:2 di
dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
prosagwghn eschkamen prosagOgE echO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Act 1 Pl
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THRU WHOM through carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
AND also
THE
TOWARD-LEAD access esthkamen histEmi

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
WE-HAVE-HAD we-have
to-THE
BELIEF faith ep epi

Prep
INTO THE
By whom also we have access by faith into this grace wherein we stand, and rejoice in hope of the glory of God.
tauthn en houtos en
pd Acc Sg f Prep
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
kai kaucwmeqa kai kauchaomai

elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
grace
this
IN
WHICH
WE-HAVE-STOOD AND we-stand
WE-ARE-BOASTING ON we-are-glorying
EXPECTATION OF-THE
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
esteem glory
OF-THE
God
5:3 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
alla kai kaucwmeqa alla kai kauchaomai

Conj Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
qliyesin thlipsis
n_ Dat Pl f
eidotes eidO
NOT
ONLY only-so
YET but
AND also
WE-ARE-BOASTING IN we-are-glorying
THE
CONSTRICTIONS HAVING-PERCEIVED afflictions
And not only [so], but we glory in tribulations also: knowing that tribulation worketh patience;
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
qliyis thlipsis
n_ Nom Sg f
upomonhn hupomonE
n_ Acc Sg f
that
THE
CONSTRICTION UNDER-REMAINing IS-DOWN-ACTING affliction endurance is-producing de de

Conj
5:4 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Nom Sg f
dokimhn h dokimE ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
dokimh dokimE
n_ Nom Sg f
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
And patience, experience; and experience, hope:
THE
YET UNDER-REMAINing testedness endurance de de

Conj
THE
YET testedness
EXPECTATION
5:5 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
kataiscunei oti kataischunO hoti

vi Pres Act 3 Sg Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
YET EXPECTATION NOT
IS-DOWN-VILING is-mortifying
that THE seeing-that dia dia

Prep
LOVE
OF-THE
God
And hope maketh not ashamed; because the love of God is shed abroad in our hearts by the Holy Ghost which is given unto us.
ekkecutai ekcheO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
kardiais hmwn kardia hemeis


tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
HAS-been-OUT-POURED IN has-been-poured-out doqentos didOmi

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
THE
HEARTS
OF-US
THRU spirit through
HOLY
THE
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
BEING-GIVEN
WH WH
to-US
NA NA
5:6
ei ge
eti eti
Adv
gar gar
Conj
cristos ontwn christos eimi

n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Gen Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
asqenwn eti asthenEs eti

a_ Gen Pl m Adv
kata kata
Prep
. For when we were yet without strength, in due time Christ died for the ungodly.
STILL for
ANOINTED Christ
OF-BEING
US of-us
UN-FIRM infirm
STILL according-to in-accord-with
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
uper huper
Prep
asebwn asebEs
a_ Gen Pl m
apeqanen apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
SEASON era
OVER UN-REVERent FROM-DIED for-the-sake-of irreverent died dikaiou tis dikaios tis
a_ Gen Sg m px Nom Sg m
5:7 molis gar uper

molis
Adv
gar
Conj
huper
Prep
apoqaneitai apothnEskO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
uper huper
Prep
gar tou gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
HARDLY for
OVER JUST for-the-sake-of just-man tis tis

px Nom Sg m
ANY anyone
SHALL-BE-FROM-DYING OVER for shall-be-dying for-the-sake-of apoqanein apothnEskO

vn 2Aor Act
THE
For scarcely for a righteous man will one die: yet peradventure for a good man some would even dare to die.
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg m
taca tacha
Adv
kai tolma kai tolmaO

GOOD good-man
SWIFT ANY perhaps someone
AND MAY-BE-DARING TO-BE-FROM-DYING even to-be-dying
AV
Romans 5
5:8 sunisthsin
sunistEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
agaphn eis agapE eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
IS-TOGETHER-STANDING YET THE is-commending oti hoti

Conj
OF-Self of-selfhim
LOVE
INTO US
THE
God
But God commendeth his love toward us, in that, while we were yet sinners, Christ died for us.
eti eti
Adv
amartwlwn ontwn hamartOlos eimi

a_ Gen Pl m vp Pres vxx Gen Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
cristos uper christos huper

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
apeqanen apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
that STILL OF-missers seeing-that sinners
BEING of-being
US of-us
ANOINTED Christ tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
OVER US for-the-sake-of aimati haima

n_ Dat Sg n
FROM-DIED died
9
5:9 pollw
polus
a_ Dat Sg m
oun oun
Conj
mallon dikaiwqentes nun en mallon dikaioO nun en

Adv vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Adv Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to-much much
THEN RATHER
BEING-JUSTIFIED
NOW IN
THE
BLOOD
OF-Him
Much more then, being now justified by his blood, we shall be saved from wrath through him.
swqhsomeqa sOzO
vi Fut Pas 1 Pl
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
orghs orgE
n_ Gen Sg f
WE-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED THRU Him through
FROM THE
INDIGNATION
5:10 ei
ei
Cond
gar ecqroi gar echthros

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ontes eimi
kathllaghmen katallassO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
IF
for
enemies
BEING
WE-WERE-conciliatED to-THE
God
THRU THE through
10 For if, when we were enemies, we were reconciled to God by the death of his Son, much more, being reconciled, we shall be saved by his life.
qanatou tou thanatos ho

uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
mallon katallagentes mallon katallassO

Adv vp 2Aor Pas Nom Pl m
DEATH
OF-THE
SON
OF-Him
to-much much zwh zOE

n_ Dat Sg f
RATHER
BEING-conciliatED
swqhsomeqa sOzO
vi Fut Pas 1 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
WE-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED IN
THE
LIFE
OF-Him
5:11 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
alla kai kaucwmenoi alla kai kauchaomai

Conj Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
NOT
ONLY only-so hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
YET but
AND also
WH
BOASTING glorying
NA
IN
THE
God
THRU THE through nun thn nun ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg f
11 And not only [so], but we also joy in God through our Lord Jesus Christ, by whom we have now received the atonement.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
THRU WHOM through
NOW THE
katallaghn elabomen katallagE lambanO

conciliation
WE-GOT we-obtained touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
5:12 dia
dia
Prep
wsper di hOsper dia

Adv Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou h anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
amartia eis hamartia eis

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THRU this because-of kosmon kosmos

n_ Acc Sg m
AS-EVEN even-as kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
THRU ONE through ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
human
THE
missing sin
INTO THE
12 Wherefore, as by one man sin entered into the world, and death by sin; and so death passed upon all men, for that all have sinned:
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
amartias o hamartia ho
qanatos kai outws eis thanatos kai houtOs eis

n_ Nom Sg m Conj Adv Prep
SYSTEM world
INTO-CAME entered
AND
THRU THE through
missing sin
THE
DEATH
AND
thus
INTO
pantas anqrwpous o pas anthrOpos ho

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
qanatos dihlqen thanatos dierchomai

ef epi
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
hmarton hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ALL
humans
THE
DEATH
THRU-CAME ON passed-through en en
Prep
WHICH
ALL
missED sinned ouk ou

Part Neg
WH
5:13 acri gar nomou

achri
Prep
gar
Conj
nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
amartia hn hamartia eimi

n_ Nom Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Sg
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
amartia de hamartia de
n_ Nom Sg f Conj
ellogatai
13 (For until the law sin was in the world: but sin is not imputed when there is no law.
UNTIL for
NA
LAW
missing sin mh mE
Part Neg
WAS
IN
SYSTEM world
missing sin
YET NOT
ellogeitai ellogeO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ontos eimi
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
IS-beING-imputED is-being-taken-into-account
NO
OF-BEING
LAW
AV
Romans 5
5:14 alla
alla
Conj
ebasileusen o basileuO ho
qanatos apo thanatos apo

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
adam adam
ni proper
mecri mwusews kai epi mechri mOusEs kai epi

Adv n_ Gen Sg m Conj Prep
but reigns nevertheless tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
DEATH
FROM ADAM
UNTO
MOSES
AND
ON onover
mh mE
Part Neg
amarthsantas epi tw hamartanO epi ho

vp Aor Act Acc Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg n
omoiwmati ths homoiOma ho

parabasews parabasis
n_ Gen Sg f
adam adam
ni proper
14 Nevertheless death reigned from Adam to Moses, even over them that had not sinned after the similitude of Adam's transgression, who is the figure of him that was to come.
THE-ones the-ones os hos

pr Nom Sg m
NO
missing sinning tupos tupos

n_ Nom Sg m
ON
THE
LIKEness
OF-THE
BESIDE-STEPPing of-ADAM transgression of-Adam
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mellontos mellO
WHO
IS
type
OF-THE
beING-ABOUT one-being-about
WH
5:15 all ouc

alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
ws to hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
paraptwma outws paraptOma houtOs

n_ Nom Sg n Adv
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
carisma ei charisma ei
n_ Nom Sg n Cond
but
NOT
AS
THE
BESIDE-FALL offense
thus
AND also polloi polus

a_ Nom Pl m
THE
grace-effect IF gracious-gift mallon mallon

Adv
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
paraptwmati oi paraptOma ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Nom Pl m
apeqanon pollw apothnEskO polus

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Dat Sg m
15 But not as the offence, so also [is] the free gift. For if through the offence of one many be dead, much more the grace of God, and the gift by grace, [which is] by one man, Jesus Christ, hath abounded unto many.
for
to-THE
OF-THE
ONE
BESIDE-FALL offense qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
MANY
FROM-DIED died cariti th charis ho

n_ Dat Sg f
to-much much tou ho
RATHER
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
dwrea dOrea
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
t_ Dat Sg f
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
grace
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
gratuity
IN
grace
to-THE the
OF-THE
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ihsou anthrOpos iEsous


n_ Gen Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pollous eperisseusen polus perisseuO

ONE
Human
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ enos heis

n_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
MANY
exceeds superabounds dwrhma to dOrEma ho

5:16 kai ouc

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
ws di hOs dia
Adv Prep
amarthsantos to hamartanO ho
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
men men
Part
gar gar
Conj
AND
NOT
AS
THRU ONE through eis eis

Prep
missing sinning to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE
gratuity
THE
INDEED for
krima krima
n_ Nom Sg n
ex ek
Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
katakrima katakrima
n_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
carisma ek charisma ek
n_ Nom Sg n Prep
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n
16 And not as [it was] by one that sinned, [so is] the gift: for the judgment [was] by one to condemnation, but the free gift [is] of many offences unto justification.
JUDGment
OUT OF-ONE
INTO DOWN-JUDGment THE condemnation dikaiwma dikaiOma

n_ Acc Sg n
YET grace-effect OUT OF-MANY gracious-gift
paraptwmatwn eis paraptOma eis

n_ Gen Pl n Prep
INTO JUST-effect just-award tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
5:17 ei
ei
Cond
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
paraptwmati o paraptOma ho
qanatos ebasileusen thanatos basileuO

IF
for
to-THE
OF-THE
ONE
BESIDE-FALL offense thn ho
THE
DEATH
reigns
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
mallon oi mallon ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
perisseian ths perisseia ho

caritos charis
n_ Gen Sg f
17 For if by one man's offence death reigned by one; much more they which receive abundance of grace and of the gift of righteousness shall reign in life by one, Jesus Christ.)
t_ Acc Sg f
THRU THE through kai kai

Conj
WH WH
ONE
to-much much
NA
RATHER
NA
THE-ones the-ones ths ho
THE
excess superabundance
OF-THE
grace
ths dwreas
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
dwreas dOrea
n_ Gen Sg f
dikaiosunhs lambanontes en dikaiosunE lambanO en

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep
t_ Gen Sg f
AND
OF-THE the basileusousin dia basileuO dia

vi Fut Act 3 Pl Prep
gratuity
OF-THE
JUSTice righteousness cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
GETTING-UP obtaining
IN
zwh zOE
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
LIFE
SHALL-BE-reignING
THRU THE through ws di hOs dia

Adv Prep
ONE
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ pantas anqrwpous eis pas anthrOpos eis

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
18 Therefore as by the offence of one [judgment came] upon all men to condemnation; even so by the righteousness of one [the free gift came] upon all
5:18 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
paraptwmatos eis paraptOma eis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
CONSEQUENTLY THEN AS
THRU ONE through
BESIDE-FALL offense
INTO ALL
humans
INTO
AV
Romans 5 - Romans 6
katakrima katakrima
n_ Acc Sg n
outws kai di houtOs kai dia

Adv Conj Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiwmatos eis dikaiOma eis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
pantas anqrwpous eis pas anthrOpos eis

men unto justification of life.
DOWN-JUDGment thus condemnation dikaiwsin zwhs dikaiOsis zOE

AND also
THRU ONE through
JUST-effect just-award
INTO ALL
humans
INTO
JUSTifying
OF-LIFE
5:19 wsper gar dia

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parakohs tou parakoE ho

enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou amartwloi anthrOpos hamartOlos

n_ Gen Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
AS-EVEN even-as
for
THRU THE through oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
disobedience
OF-THE
ONE
human
missers sinners enos heis

n_ Gen Sg m
19 For as by one man's disobedience many were made sinners, so by the obedience of one shall many be made righteous.
katestaqhsan kathistEmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
outws kai dia houtOs kai dia

Adv Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
upakohs tou hupakoE ho

WERE-DOWN-STOOD THE were-constituted
MANY
thus
AND also
THRU THE through
obedience
OF-THE
ONE
dikaioi katastaqhsontai dikaios kathistEmi

a_ Nom Pl m vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
JUST-ones just
SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-STOOD THE shall-be-being-constituted de de

Conj
MANY
5:20 nomos
nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
pareishlqen pareiserchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
pleonash pleonazO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
paraptwma ou paraptOma hou

n_ Nom Sg n Adv
de de
Conj
LAW
YET BESIDE-INTO-CAME THAT SHOULD-BE-MOREizING THE crept-in should-be-increasing amartia upereperisseusen h hamartia huperperisseuO ho
n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
BESIDE-FALL offense
where YET
20 Moreover the law entered, that the offence might abound. But where sin abounded, grace did much more abound:
epleonasen h pleonazO ho
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
MOREizES increases
THE
missing sin
OVER-exceeds superexceeds
THE
grace
5:21 ina
hina
Conj
wsper ebasileusen h hOsper basileuO ho

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
amartia en hamartia en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qanatw outws kai thanatos houtOs kai

n_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj
THAT AS-EVEN even-as h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
reigns
THE
missing sin
IN
THE
DEATH
thus
AND also ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
21 That as sin hath reigned unto death, even so might grace reign through righteousness unto eternal life by Jesus Christ our Lord.
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
basileush basileuO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
dikaiosunhs eis dikaiosunE eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion dia aiOnios dia

a_ Acc Sg f Prep
THE
grace
SHOULD-BE-reignING THRU JUSTice through righteousness kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
INTO LIFE
eonian
THRU JESUS through

hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
AV
Romans 6
6:1 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
epimenwmen epimenO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
amartia ina hamartia hina

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
. What shall we say then? Shall we continue in sin, that grace may abound?
ANY what ? caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING WE-MAY-BE-ON-REMAINING to-THE we-may-be-persisting pleonash pleonazO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
missing sin
THAT THE
grace
SHOULD-BE-MOREizING should-be-increasing genoito ginomai

vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
6:2 mh
mE
Part Neg
oitines apeqanomen th hostis apothnEskO ho

pr Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
amartia pws eti hamartia pOs eti

n_ Dat Sg f Adv Int Adv
God forbid. How shall we, that are dead to sin, live any longer therein?
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING WHO-ANY who-any en en

Prep
FROM-DIED we-died
to-THE
missing sin
how how ?
STILL
zhsomen zaO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
WE-SHALL-BE-LIVING IN
her herit oti osoi hoti hosos

Conj pk Nom Pl m
6:3 h
E
Part
agnoeite agnoeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ebaptisqhmen eis baptizO eis

criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
WH
ihsoun
OR
NA
YE-ARE-UN-KNOWING that ye-are-being-ignorant eis eis

Prep
as-many-as WE-ARE-DIPizED we-are-baptized
INTO ANOINTED Christ
Know ye not, that so many of us as were baptized into Jesus Christ were baptized into his death?
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qanaton autou thanatos autos

ebaptisqhmen baptizO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
JESUS
INTO THE
DEATH
OF-Him
WE-ARE-DIPizED are-baptized dia dia

Prep
6:4 sunetafhmen
sunthaptO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Pl
oun oun
Conj
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
baptismatos eis baptisma eis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
WE-WERE-TOGETHER-entombed THEN to-Him we-were-entombed-together with-him qanaton ina thanatos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THRU THE through nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
DIPism baptism dia dia

Prep
INTO THE
wsper hgerqh hOsper egeirO

Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
cristos ek christos ek
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
Therefore we are buried with him by baptism into death: that like as Christ was raised up from the dead by the glory of the Father, even so we also should walk in newness of life.
DEATH
THAT AS-EVEN even-as
WAS-ROUSED ANOINTED Christ en en

Prep
OUT OF-DEAD-ones THRU THE of-dead-ones through peripathswmen peripateO

vs Aor Act 1 Pl
esteem glory
OF-THE
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
outws kai hmeis houtOs kai hEmeis

kainothti zwhs kainotEs zOE

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
FATHER
thus
AND also
WE
IN
NEWness
OF-LIFE
SHOULD-BE-ABOUT-TREADING should-be-walking qanatou autou thanatos autos

5
6:5 ei
ei
Cond
gar sumfutoi gar sumphutos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
gegonamen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
omoiwmati tou homoiOma ho

IF
for
TOGETHER-planted WE-HAVE-BECOME to-THE planted-together anastasews esomeqa anastasis eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 1 Pl
LIKEness
OF-THE
DEATH
OF-Him
For if we have been planted together in the likeness of his death, we shall be also [in the likeness] of [his] resurrection:
alla alla
Conj
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
but AND nevertheless also
OF-THE
WE-SHALL-BE
6:6 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ginwskontes oti o ginOskO hoti ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
palaios hmwn palaios hemeis

anqrwpos sunestaurwqh anthrOpos sustauroO

this
KNOWING
that
THE
OLD
OF-US
human
WAS-TOGETHER-impalED was-crucified-togetherwith-him mhketi mEketi

Adv
Knowing this, that our old man is crucified with [him], that the body of sin might be destroyed, that henceforth we should not serve sin.
ina hina
Conj
katarghqh katargeO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias tou hamartia ho

THAT MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-UN-ACTED THE may-be-being-nullified douleuein douleuO

vn Pres Act
BODY
OF-THE
missing sin
OF-THE
NO-NOT-STILL by-no-means-still
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
amartia hamartia
n_ Dat Sg f
TO-BE-SLAVING US
to-THE
missing sin dedikaiwtai dikaioO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
6:7 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar apoqanwn gar apothnEskO

apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias hamartia
n_ Gen Sg f
For he that is dead is freed from sin.
THE
for
one-FROM-DYING one-dying
HAS-been-JUSTIFIED FROM THE
missing sin
AV
Romans 6
6:8 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
apeqanomen sun apothnEskO sun

cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
pisteuomen pisteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
oti kai hoti kai

Conj Conj
Now if we be dead with Christ, we believe that we shall also live with him:
IF
YET WE-FROM-DIED we-died
TOGETHER to-ANOINTED WE-ARE-BELIEVING that togetherwith Christ autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
AND also
suzhsomen suzaO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
WE-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LIVING to-Him we-shall-be-living-together with-him
6:9 eidotes
eidO
oti cristos egerqeis hoti christos egeirO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ouketi ouketi
Adv
apoqnhskei apothnEskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ANOINTED Christ
BEING-ROUSED
OUT OF-DEAD-ones NOT-STILL IS-FROM-DYING of-dead-ones not-longer is-dying
Knowing that Christ being raised from the dead dieth no more; death hath no more dominion over him.
qanatos autou thanatos autos

ouketi ouketi
Adv
kurieuei kurieuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
DEATH
OF-Him
NOT-STILL IS-masterING not-longer is-being-lord amartia apeqanen efapax o hamartia apothnEskO ephapax hos
n_ Dat Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Adv pr Acc Sg n
6:10 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
gar apeqanen th gar apothnEskO ho

Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
de de
Conj
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
10 For in that he died, he died unto sin once: but in that he liveth, he liveth unto God.
WHO for in-whichthat zh zaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
FROM-DIED he-died qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
missing sin
FROM-DIED he-died
ON-ONCE once-for-all
WHO YET IS-LIVING in-whichthat he-is-living
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IS-LIVING he-is-living
to-THE
God
WH NA

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
logizesqe logizomai
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
einai
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
nekrous men nekros men

a_ Acc Pl m Part
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
BE-accountING be-ye-reckoning ! de de
Conj
selves yourselves qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE
DEAD
INDEED
11 Likewise reckon ye also yourselves to be dead indeed unto sin, but alive unto God through Jesus Christ our Lord.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
amartia zwntas hamartia zaO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep

to-THE
missing sin oun oun

Conj
LIVING
YET to-THE
God
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
6:12 mh
mE
Part Neg
basileuetw basileuO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
amartia en hamartia en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
qnhtw thnEtos
a_ Dat Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
swmati eis sOma eis

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
NO
THEN LET-BE-reignING THE let-her-be-reigning ! upakouein tais hupakouO ho

vn Pres Act t_ Dat Pl f
missing sin
IN
THE
DYing mortal
OF-YOU(p) BODY of-ye
INTO
12 Let not sin therefore reign in your mortal body, that ye should obey it in the lusts thereof.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
epiqumiais autou epithumia autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg n
THE
TO-BE-obeyING to-THE the paristanete paristEmi

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ON-FEELings lusts ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-it
6:13 mhde
mEde
Conj
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
opla hoplon
n_ Acc Pl n
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
NO-YET BE-YE-BESIDE-STANDING-UP THE nor-yet be-ye-presenting !
MEMBERS OF-YOU(p) IMPLEMENTS OF-UN-JUSTness to-THE of-ye of-injustice qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
amartia alla parasthsate eautous tw hamartia alla paristEmi heautou ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vm Aor Act 2 Pl pf 3 Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
wsei ek hOsei ek
Adv Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
13 Neither yield ye your members [as] instruments of unrighteousness unto sin: but yield yourselves unto God, as those that are alive from the dead, and your members [as] instruments of righteousness unto God.
missing sin zwntas zaO
but
BESIDE-STAND-YE present-ye ! kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
selves yourselves umwn humeis
to-THE
God
AS-IF
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
opla hoplon
n_ Acc Pl n
dikaiosunhs tw dikaiosunE ho
pp 2 Gen Pl
LIVING
AND
THE
MEMBERS OF-YOU(p) IMPLEMENTS OF-JUSTice of-ye of-righteousness ou ou

Part Neg
to-THE
God
6:14 amartia gar umwn

hamartia
n_ Nom Sg f
gar
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kurieusei kurieuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gar este gar eimi

upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
missing sin alla upo alla hupo

Conj Prep
for
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
SHALL-BE-masterING NOT shall-be-being-lord
for
YE-ARE
UNDER LAW
14 For sin shall not have dominion over you: for ye are not under the law, but under grace.
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
but
UNDER grace
AV
Romans 6
6:15 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
amarthswmen hamartanO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
alla upo alla hupo

Conj Prep
ANY what ? carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
THEN WE-SHOULD-BE-missING that NOT we-should-be-sinning seeing-that genoito ginomai

vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
WE-ARE
UNDER LAW
but
UNDER
15 What then? shall we sin, because we are not under the law, but under grace? God forbid.
mh mE
Part Neg
grace
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
6:16 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti w hoti hos

Conj pr Dat Sg n
paristanete paristEmi
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eautous doulous eis heautou doulos eis

pf 3 Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
to-WHOM
YE-ARE-BESIDE-STANDING-UP selves ye-are-presenting yourselves htoi Etoi

Conj
SLAVES
INTO
upakohn douloi hupakoE doulos

w hos
pr Dat Sg n
upakouete hupakouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
amartias eis hamartia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
qanaton h thanatos E
n_ Acc Sg m Part
16 Know ye not, that to whom ye yield yourselves servants to obey, his servants ye are to whom ye obey; whether of sin unto death, or of obedience unto righteousness?
obedience
SLAVES
YE-ARE
to-WHOM whom
YE-ARE-obeyING OR-to-THE OF-missing whether of-sin
INTO DEATH
OR
upakohs hupakoE
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-obedience INTO JUSTice righteousness
6:17 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti hte hoti eimi

douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias uphkousate hamartia hupakouO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 2 Pl
grace thanks-be de de
Conj
YET to-THE
God
that
YE-WERE
SLAVES
OF-THE
missing sin
YE-obey
17 But God be thanked, that ye were the servants of sin, but ye have obeyed from the heart that form of doctrine which was delivered you.
ek ek
Prep
kardias eis kardia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
paredoqhte paradidOmi
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
didachs didachE
n_ Gen Sg f
YET OUT OF-HEART
INTO WHICH
YE-WERE-BESIDE-GIVEN type ye-were-given-over ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-TEACHing
6:18 eleuqerwqentes de
eleutheroO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
amartias edoulwqhte th hamartia douloO ho

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Pas 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
dikaiosunh dikaiosunE
n_ Dat Sg f
18 Being then made free from sin, ye became the servants of righteousness.
BEING-FREED
YET FROM THE
missing sin thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
YE-ARE-enSLAVED to-THE
JUSTice righteousness wsper hOsper

Adv
19 I speak after the manner of men because of the infirmity of your flesh: for as ye have yielded your members servants to uncleanness and to iniquity unto iniquity; even so now yield your members servants to righteousness unto holiness.
6:19 anqrwpinon legw

anthrOpinos
a_ Acc Sg n
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dia dia
Prep
asqeneian ths astheneia ho

sarkos umwn sarx humeis

human as-a-human
I-AM-sayING THRU THE I-am-saying-this because-of melh melos

n_ Acc Pl n
UN-FIRMness infirmity doula doulos

a_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
FLESH
OF-YOU(p) AS-EVEN of-ye even-as
gar paresthsate ta gar paristEmi ho

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
akaqarsia kai th akatharsia kai ho

for
YE-BESIDE-STAND ye-present
WH
THE
WH WH
MEMBERS OF-YOU(p) SLAVES of-ye

NA
to-THE
UN-cleanness uncleanness
AND
to-THE
anomia anomia
n_ Dat Sg f
eis thn anomian
eis eis
Prep
NA
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
NA
anomian anomia
n_ Acc Sg f
outws nun parasthsate houtOs nun paristEmi

Adv Adv vm Aor Act 2 Pl
UN-LAWness lawlessness ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
INTO THE
UN-LAWness lawlessness
thus
NOW BESIDE-STAND-YE present-ye !
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
doula doulos
a_ Acc Pl n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dikaiosunh eis dikaiosunE eis

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
agiasmon hagiasmos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MEMBERS OF-YOU(p) SLAVES of-ye hte eimi

vi impf vxx 2 Pl
to-THE
INTO HOLYing hallowing th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
20 For when ye were the servants of sin, ye were free from righteousness.
6:20 ote gar douloi

hote
Adv
gar
Conj
doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias eleuqeroi hte hamartia eleutheros eimi

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m vi impf vxx 2 Pl
when
for
SLAVES
YE-WERE
OF-THE
missing sin
FREE
YE-WERE
to-THE
n_ Dat Sg f
6:21 tina
tis
pi Acc Sg m
oun oun
Conj
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
eicete echO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
tote ef tote epi

Adv Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
nun epaiscunesqe nun epaischunomai

Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ANY what ?
THEN FRUIT
YE-HAD
then
ON
WHICH
NOW YE-ARE-beING-ON-VILED THE ye-are-being-ashamed
21 What fruit had ye then in those things whereof ye are now ashamed? for the end of those things [is] death.
AV
Romans 6 - Romans 7
gar telos gar telos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ekeinwn ekeinos
pd Gen Pl m
qanatos thanatos
n_ Nom Sg m
for
FINISH OF-those DEATH consummation of-those-things eleuqerwqentes eleutheroO

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
6:22 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias doulwqentes de hamartia douloO de

n_ Gen Sg f vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
NOW
YET BEING-FREED
FROM THE
missing sin eis eis

Prep
BEING-enSLAVED
YET to-THE
22 But now being made free from sin, and become servants to God, ye have your fruit unto holiness, and the end everlasting life.
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
agiasmon to hagiasmos ho
de de
Conj
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
God
YE-ARE-HAVING THE
FRUIT
OF-YOU(p) INTO HOLYing of-ye hallowing
THE
YET FINISH consummation
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
LIFE
eonian
6:23 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
gar oywnia gar opsOnion

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias qanatos to hamartia thanatos ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
carisma charisma
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
for
PROVISION-PURCHASES OF-THE ration(p) zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
missing sin
DEATH
THE
YET grace-effect gracious-gift hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
23 For the wages of sin [is] death; but the gift of God [is] eternal life through Jesus Christ our Lord.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
aiwnios en aiOnios en
a_ Nom Sg f Prep

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
God
LIFE
eonian
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
AV
Romans 7
7:1 h
E
Part
agnoeite agnoeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
adelfoi ginwskousin gar nomon adelphos ginOskO gar nomos

n_ Voc Pl m vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
OR
YE-ARE-UN-KNOWING brothers ye-are-being-ignorant brethren ! kurieuei kurieuO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to-ones-KNOWING to-ones-knowing
for
LAW
I-AM-TALKING that I-am-speaking zh zaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
. Know ye not, brethren, (for I speak to them that know the law,) how that the law hath dominion over a man as long as he liveth?
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ef anthrOpos epi

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
LAW
IS-masterING is-being-lord
OF-THE
human
ON
as-much-as TIME
he-IS-LIVING
7:2 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar upandros gunh gar hupandros gunE

Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
zwnti zaO
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
dedetai deO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
for
UNDER-MAN in-wedlock
WOMAN
to-THE
LIVING
MAN
HAS-been-BOUND to-LAW is-bound apo apo

Prep
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kathrghtai katargeO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
For the woman which hath an husband is bound by the law to [her] husband so long as he liveth; but if the husband be dead, she is loosed from the law of [her] husband.
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-FROM-DYING THE may-be-dying nomou nomos

n_ Gen Sg m
MAN
she-HAS-been-DOWN-UN-ACTED FROM THE she-is-exempt
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
LAW
OF-THE
MAN
7:3 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
zwntos zaO
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
moicalis crhmatisei moichalis chrEmatizO

n_ Nom Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
CONSEQUENTLY THEN OF-LIVING
THE
MAN
ADULTERess
SHALL-BE-apprizING IF-EVER she-shall-be-being-styled o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
ean ean
Cond
de de
Conj
apoqanh apothnEskO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
So then if, while [her] husband liveth, she be married to another man, she shall be called an adulteress: but if her husband be dead, she is free from that law; so that she is no adulteress, though she be married to another man.
she-MAY-BE-BECOMING to-MAN
DIFFERENT IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-FROM-DYING THE may-be-dying tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
MAN
eleuqera estin eleutheros eimi

apo apo
Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
moicalida moichalis
n_ Acc Sg f
FREE
she-IS
FROM THE
LAW
OF-THE
NO
TO-BE
her
ADULTERess
genomenhn ginomai
vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg f
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
BECOMING on-becoming
to-MAN
DIFFERENT
7:4 wste
hOste
Conj

n_ Voc Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
eqanatwqhte thanatoO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
AS-BESIDES brothers so-that brethren ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
OF-ME
AND also
YOU(p) ye to ho
WERE-(caused-to)-DIE to-THE were-put-to-death genesqai ginomai

vn 2Aor midD
LAW
THRU through
swmatos tou sOma ho


n_ Gen Sg m Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eterw heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
t_ Acc Sg n
Wherefore, my brethren, ye also are become dead to the law by the body of Christ; that ye should be married to another, [even] to him who is raised from the dead, that we should bring forth fruit unto God.
THE
BODY
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
INTO THE
TO-BE-BECOMING YOU(p) ye tw ho
to-DIFFERENT to-different-one qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
egerqenti egeirO
vp Aor Pas Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
karpoforhswmen karpophoreO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
t_ Dat Sg m
THE the-one
OUT OF-DEAD-ones BEING-ROUSED of-dead-ones en en

Prep
THAT WE-SHOULD-BE-FRUIT-CARRYING to-THE we-should-be-bearing-fruit ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
God
7:5 ote gar hmen

hote
Adv
gar
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
paqhmata twn pathEma ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl f
amartiwn ta hamartia ho
n_ Gen Pl f t_ Nom Pl n
when
for
WE-WERE
IN
THE
FLESH
THE
EMOTIONS passions melesin hmwn melos hemeis

n_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE
misses sins to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE-ones the
For when we were in the flesh, the motions of sins, which were by the law, did work in our members to bring forth fruit unto death.
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
enhrgeito en energeO en
vi impf Mid 3 Sg Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eis eis
Prep
pp 1 Gen Pl
THRU THE through
LAW
IN-ACTED operated qanatw thanatos

n_ Dat Sg m
IN
THE
MEMBERS
OF-US
INTO THE
karpoforhsai tw karpophoreO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Dat Sg m
TO-FRUIT-CARRY to-bear-fuit
to-THE
DEATH
AV
Romans 7
7:6 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
kathrghqhmen katargeO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
apoqanontes en apothnEskO en
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
NOW
YET WE-WERE-DOWN-UN-ACTED FROM THE we-were-exempted wste hOste

Conj
LAW
NA
FROM-DYING dying en en
Prep
IN
WHICH
kateicomeqa katechO
vi impf Pas 1 Pl
douleuein douleuO
vn Pres Act
WH
hmas
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kainothti pneumatos kainotEs pneuma

But now we are delivered from the law, that being dead wherein we were held; that we should serve in newness of spirit, and not [in] the oldness of the letter.
WE-were-DOWN-HAD AS-BESIDES TO-BE-SLAVING we-were-retained so-that kai ou kai ou

Conj Part Neg
US
IN
NEWness
OF-spirit
palaiothti grammatos palaiotEs gramma

AND
NOT
OLDness to-oldness oun oun

Conj
OF-WRITing of-letter o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
7:7 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
amartia mh hamartia mE
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ANY what ? alla thn alla ho

Conj
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING THE
LAW
missing sin dia dia

Prep
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
amartian ouk hamartia ou

egnwn ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
te te
Part
gar gar
Conj
. What shall we say then? [Is] the law sin? God forbid. Nay, I had not known sin, but by the law: for I had not known lust, except the law had said, Thou shalt not covet.
t_ Acc Sg f
but
THE
missing sin hdein eidO
NOT
I-KNEW
IF
NO
THRU LAW through nomos nomos

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
BESIDES for
epiqumian ouk epithumia ou

ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
elegen legO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
vi Plup Act 1 Sg
ON-FEELing coveting
NOT
I-HAD-PERCEIVED IF I-had-been-aware-of
NO
THE
LAW
said
NOT
epiqumhseis epithumeO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-ON-FEELING you-shall-be-coveting
7:8 aformhn
aphormE
n_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
labousa lambanO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
amartia dia hamartia dia

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
entolhs kateirgasato entolE katergazomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg
FROM-RUSH YET GETTING incentive en en

Prep
THE
missing sin
THRU THE through
direction precept
DOWN-ACTS produces
But sin, taking occasion by the commandment, wrought in me all manner of concupiscence. For without the law sin [was] dead.
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
epiqumian cwris epithumia chOris

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
gar nomou gar nomos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
amartia nekra hamartia nekros

IN
ME
EVERY ON-FEELing all-manner-of coveting de de

Conj
apart-from for
LAW
missing sin
DEAD
7:9 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ezwn zaO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
cwris chOris
Adv
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
pote elqoushs pote erchomai

Part vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg f
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
entolhs entolE
n_ Gen Sg f
YET LIVED
apart-from LAW
?-when once apeqanon apothnEskO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
OF-COMING
YET OF-THE
direction precept
For I was alive without the law once: but when the commandment came, sin revived, and I died.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
amartia anezhsen egw hamartia anazaO egO

n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
THE
missing sin
UP-LIVES revives moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
YET FROM-DIED died entolh h entolE hos

n_ Nom Sg f pr Nom Sg f
7:10 kai eureqh

kai
Conj
heuriskO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
qanaton thanatos
n_ Acc Sg m
10 And the commandment, which [was ordained] to life, I found [to be] unto death.
AND
WAS-FOUND it-was-found
to-ME
THE
direction precept
WHO which
INTO LIFE
this
INTO DEATH
7:11 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar amartia aformhn gar hamartia aphormE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
labousa lambanO
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
entolhs exhpathsen entolE exapataO

11 For sin, taking occasion by the commandment, deceived me, and by it slew [me].
THE
for
missing sin auths autos

pp Gen Sg f
FROM-RUSH GETTING incentive apekteinen apokteinO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THRU THE through
direction precept
OUT-SEDUCES deludes
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kai di kai dia

Conj Prep
ME
AND
THRU her through herit o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
FROM-KILLS kills-me men men

Part
7:12 wste
hOste
Conj
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
agios hagios
a_ Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
entolh agia entolE hagios

kai kai
Conj
12 Wherefore the law [is] holy, and the commandment holy, and just, and good.
INDEED LAW
HOLY
AND
THE
direction precept
HOLY
AND
AV
Romans 7
dikaia dikaios
a_ Nom Sg f
kai agaqh kai agathos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
JUST
AND
GOOD
7:13 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
agaqon agathos
a_ Nom Sg n
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
qanatos mh thanatos mE
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
THE
THEN GOOD
to-ME
BECAME
DEATH
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING but
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
amartia ina hamartia hina

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
fanh phainO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
amartia dia hamartia dia

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
agaqou agathos
a_ Gen Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
13 Was then that which is good made death unto me? God forbid. But sin, that it might appear sin, working death in me by that which is good; that sin by the commandment might become exceeding sinful.
THE
missing sin
THAT it-MAY-BE-APPEARING missing sin qanaton ina thanatos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THRU THE through kaq kata

Prep
GOOD
to-ME
katergazomenh katergazomai
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
uperbolhn amartwlos h huperbolE hamartOlos ho

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
DOWN-ACTING is-producing amartia dia hamartia dia

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
DEATH
THAT MAY-BE-BECOMING according-to OVER-CAST inordinate entolhs entolE

n_ Gen Sg f
misser sinner
THE
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
missing sin
THRU THE through
direction precept gar oti o gar hoti ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg m
7:14 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
pneumatikos estin pneumatikos eimi

egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
14 . For we know that the law is spiritual: but I am carnal, sold under sin.
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for we-are-aware sarkinos eimi sarkinos eimi

that
THE
LAW
spiritual
IS
YET
pepramenos pipraskO
upo hupo
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
amartian hamartia
n_ Acc Sg f
FLESHic fleshy
AM
HAVING-been-disposED-of UNDER THE
missing sin ou ou
Part Neg
7:15 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
gar katergazomai gar katergazomai

ou ou
Part Neg
ginwskw ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar o gar hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
15 For that which I do I allow not: for what I would, that do I not; but what I hate, that do I.
WHICH
for
I-AM-DOWN-ACTING NOT I-am-effecting misw miseO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-KNOWING NOT
for
WHICH
I-AM-WILLING this
prassw prassO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
all o alla hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-PRACTISING but
WHICH
I-AM-HATING
this
I-AM-DOING
7:16 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
sumfhmi sumphEmi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
16 If then I do that which I would not, I consent unto the law that [it is] good.
IF
YET WHICH
NOT
I-AM-WILLING this
I-AM-DOING
I-AM-TOGETHER-AVERRING to-THE I-am-conceding
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti kalos hoti kalos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
LAW
that
IDEAL
WH
7:17 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
ouketi ouketi
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
katergazomai katergazomai
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
alla h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
enoikousa
17 Now then it is no more I that do it, but sin that dwelleth in me.
NOW
NA
YET NOT-STILL I not-longer en en

Prep
AM-DOWN-ACTING am-effecting amartia hamartia

n_ Nom Sg f
it
but
THE
oikousa oikeO
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
HOMING making-its-home
IN
ME
missing sin oikei oikeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
7:18 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
gar oti ouk gar hoti ou

Conj Conj Part Neg
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for I-am-aware th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
that
NOT
IS-HOMING IN is-making-its-home gar qelein gar thelO

Conj vn Pres Act
ME
this
IS
IN
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
agaqon to agathos ho
a_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
parakeitai parakeimai
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
18 For I know that in me (that is, in my flesh,) dwelleth no good thing: for to will is present with me; but [how] to perform that which is good I find not.
THE
FLESH
OF-ME
GOOD
THE
for
TO-BE-WILLING IS-BESIDE-LYING is-lying-beside
to-ME me
THE
AV
Romans 7
de de
Conj
katergazesqai katergazomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
YET TO-BE-DOWN-ACTING THE to-be-effecting
IDEAL
NOT
7:19 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar o gar hos

Conj pr Acc Sg n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
agaqon alla o agathos alla hos

a_ Acc Sg n Conj pr Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
19 For the good that I would I do not: but the evil which I would not, that I do.
NOT
for
WHICH
I-AM-WILLING I-AM-DOING
GOOD
but
WHICH
NOT
I-AM-WILLING
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
prassw prassO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
EVIL
this
I-AM-PRACTISING
NA
7:20 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ouketi ouketi
Adv
20 Now if I do that I would not, it is no more I that do it, but sin that dwelleth in me.
IF
YET WHICH
NOT
I-AM-WILLING
this
AM-DOING
NOT-STILL not-longer amartia hamartia

n_ Nom Sg f
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
katergazomai katergazomai
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
alla h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
oikousa oikeO
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
AM-DOWN-ACTING am-effecting ara ara

Part
it
but
THE
HOMING making-its-home tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IN
ME
missing sin emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
7:21 euriskw
heuriskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
qelonti thelO
poiein poieO
vn Pres Act
21 I find then a law, that, when I would do good, evil is present with me.
I-AM-FINDING CONSEQUENTLY THE
LAW
to-THE
WILLING
to-ME me
TO-BE-DOING
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
oti emoi hoti egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kakon kakos
a_ Nom Sg n
parakeitai parakeimai
THE
IDEAL
that
to-ME me
THE
EVIL
IS-BESIDE-LYING is-lying-beside tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
7:22 sunhdomai
sunEdomai
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kata kata
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
esw esO
Adv
22 For I delight in the law of God after the inward man:
I-AM-beING-TOGETHER-gratifiED for I-am-being-gratified-with anqrwpon anthrOpos

n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE the
LAW
OF-THE
God
according-to THE
within
human
7:23 blepw
blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
melesin mou melos egO

n_ Dat Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg
antistrateuomenon antistrateuomai
I-AM-lookING YET DIFFERENT LAW I-am-observing tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
IN
THE
MEMBERS
OF-ME
INSTEAD-WARRING warring-with
WH
23 But I see another law in my members, warring against the law of my mind, and bringing me into captivity to the law of sin which is in my members.
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai aicmalwtizonta me kai aichmalOtizO egO

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
en
NA
en en
Prep
to-THE the tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
LAW
OF-THE
MIND
OF-ME
AND
capturizING leading-into-captivity en en
Prep
ME
IN
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias tw hamartia ho
onti eimi
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
melesin mou melos egO

n_ Dat Pl n pp 1 Gen Sg
THE
LAW
OF-THE
missing sin
THE
BEING
IN
THE
MEMBERS
OF-ME
7:24 talaipwros
talaipOros
a_ Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg

n_ Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
rusetai rhuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
24 O wretched man that I am! who shall deliver me from the body of this death?
WEIGHT-CALLOUSed I wretched swmatos tou sOma ho

human
ANY who ?
ME
SHALL-BE-rescuING OUT OF-THE
qanatou toutou thanatos houtos

BODY
OF-THE
WH
DEATH
NA
this
7:25 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
de
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
grace thanks-be
YET
to-THE
God
THRU JESUS through
ANOINTED Christ
THE
Master Lord
25 I thank God through Jesus Christ our Lord. So then with the mind I myself serve the law of God; but with the flesh the law of sin.
AV
Romans 7 - Romans 8
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ara ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
men men
Part
noi nous
n_ Dat Sg m
douleuw nomw douleuO nomos

vi Pres Act 1 Sg n_ Dat Sg m
OF-US
CONSEQUENTLY THEN SAME myself th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
INDEED MIND
AM-SLAVING
to-LAW
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
amartias hamartia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-God
to-THE
YET FLESH
to-LAW
OF-missing of-sin
AV
Romans 8
8:1 ouden
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
ara ara
Part
nun katakrima nun katakrima

Adv n_ Nom Sg n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep

NOT-YET-ONE CONSEQUENTLY NOW DOWN-JUDGment to-THE-ones IN nothing condemnation to-the-ones
Prep
JESUS
. [There is] therefore now no condemnation to them which are in Christ Jesus, who walk not after the flesh, but after the Spirit. For the law of the Spirit of life in Christ Jesus hath made me free from the law of sin and death.
8:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar nomos gar nomos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos ths pneuma ho

zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f

THE
for
LAW
OF-THE
spirit
OF-THE
LIFE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
hleuqerwsen se eleutheroO su
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias kai tou hamartia kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
FREES
YOU
FROM THE
LAW
OF-THE
missing sin
AND
OF-THE the dia dia

Prep
DEATH
8:3 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar adunaton tou gar adunatos ho

Conj a_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
hsqenei astheneO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
for
UN-ABLE impossible qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
LAW
IN
WHICH
it-WAS-UN-FIRM THRU THE it-was-infirm through en en

Prep
sarkos o sarx ho
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
pemyas pempO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
omoiwmati homoiOma
n_ Dat Sg n
For what the law could not do, in that it was weak through the flesh, God sending his own Son in the likeness of sinful flesh, and for sin, condemned sin in the flesh:
FLESH
THE
God
THE
OF-Self of-selfhim
SON
SENDing
IN
LIKEness
sarkos sarx
n_ Gen Sg f
amartias kai peri hamartia kai peri

amartias katekrinen thn hamartia katakrinO ho

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
amartian en hamartia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OF-FLESH OF-missing of-sin sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
DOWN-JUDGES condemns
THE
missing sin
IN
THE
FLESH
8:4 ina
hina
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dikaiwma dikaiOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
THAT THE
JUST-effect OF-THE just-requirement
LAW
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED IN may-be-being-fulfilled pneuma pneuma

n_ Acc Sg n
US
THE-ones NO the-ones
That the righteousness of the law might be fulfilled in us, who walk not after the flesh, but after the Spirit.
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
peripatousin alla kata peripateO alla kata

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Conj Prep
according-to FLESH in-accord-with
ABOUT-TREADING are-walking sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
but
according-to spirit in-accord-with ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
8:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar kata gar kata

Conj Prep
ontes eimi
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos fronousin sarx phroneO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE-ones the-ones oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
for
according-to FLESH in-accord-with pneuma ta pneuma ho

n_ Acc Sg n
BEING
THE OF-THE the-things pneumatos pneuma

n_ Gen Sg n
FLESH
ARE-beING-DISPOSed
For they that are after the flesh do mind the things of the flesh; but they that are after the Spirit the things of the Spirit.
de de
Conj
kata kata
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
t_ Acc Pl n
THE-ones the-ones
YET according-to spirit in-accord-with gar fronhma ths gar phronEma ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
spirit
8:6 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sarkos qanatos to sarx thanatos ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
fronhma tou phronEma ho

n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
t_ Gen Sg f
For to be carnally minded [is] death; but to be spiritually minded [is] life and peace.
THE
for
DISPOSition
OF-THE
FLESH
DEATH
THE
YET DISPOSition
OF-THE
pneumatos zwh pneuma zOE

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Nom Sg f
kai eirhnh kai eirEnE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
spirit
LIFE
AND
PEACE
8:7 dioti
dioti
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fronhma ths phronEma ho

sarkos ecqra sarx echthra

eis eis
Prep
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
gar gar
Conj
THRU-that THE because-that nomw nomos

n_ Dat Sg m
DISPOSition
OF-THE
FLESH
enmity
INTO God
to-THE
for
Because the carnal mind [is] enmity against God: for it is not subject to the law of God, neither indeed can be.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouc ou
Part Neg
upotassetai hupotassO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
oude oude
Adv
gar dunatai gar dunamai

LAW
OF-THE
God
NOT
it-IS-beING-UNDER-SET NOT-YET for it-is-being-subject neither
it-IS-ABLE
AV
Romans 8
8:8 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
ontes eimi
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
aresai areskO
vn Aor Act
ou ou
Part Neg
dunantai dunamai
So then they that are in the flesh cannot please God.
THE-ones the-ones
YET IN
FLESH
BEING
God
TO-PLEASE NOT
ARE-ABLE
8:9 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
alla en alla en
Conj Prep
pneumati eiper pneuma eiper

n_ Dat Sg n Cond
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
YOU(p) ye qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
YET NOT
ARE
IN
FLESH
but
IN
spirit
IF-EVEN spirit if-so-be-that ouk ou

Part Neg
oikei oikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
pneuma cristou pneuma christos

ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
But ye are not in the flesh, but in the Spirit, if so be that the Spirit of God dwell in you. Now if any man have not the Spirit of Christ, he is none of his.
OF-God
IS-HOMING IN is-making-its-home ouk ou

Part Neg
YOU(p) ye autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
IF
YET ANY anyone
spirit
OF-ANOINTED NOT of-Christ
IS-HAVING
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
this-one this-one
NOT
IS
OF-Him
8:10 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
cristos en christos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
men men
Part
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
nekron nekros
a_ Nom Sg n
dia dia
Prep
amartian hamartia
n_ Acc Sg f
IF
YET ANOINTED Christ de de

Conj
IN
YOU(p) ye dia dia

Prep
THE
INDEED BODY
DEAD
THRU missing because-of sin
10 . And if Christ [be] in you, the body [is] dead because of sin; but the Spirit [is] life because of righteousness.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET spirit
LIFE
THRU JUSTice because-of righteousness tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
8:11 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
egeirantos egeirO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
IF
YET THE
spirit
OF-THE
One-ROUSing one-rousing
WH
THE
WH
JESUS
WH

WH
oikei oikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
egeiras egeirO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ek nekrwn criston ihsoun
11 But if the Spirit of him that raised up Jesus from the dead dwell in you, he that raised up Christ from the dead shall also quicken your mortal bodies by his Spirit that dwelleth in you.
IS-HOMING IN is-making-its-home
WH
YOU(p) ye
NA
THE
NA
NA
zwopoihsei
WH
kai
criston ek christos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
NA
zwopoihsei zOopoieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
NA
kai kai
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
qnhta thnEtos
a_ Acc Pl n
ANOINTED Christ swmata umwn sOma humeis

OUT OF-DEAD-ones SHALL-BE-makING-LIVE AND of-dead-ones shall-be-vivifying also enoikountos autou enoikeO autos
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n pp Gen Sg m
THE
DYing mortal
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pneumatos en pneuma en
n_ Gen Sg n Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
BODIES
OF-YOU(p) THRU THE of-ye through oun oun

Conj
IN-HOMING making-its-home
OF-Him
spirit
IN
YOU(p) ye tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
12 Therefore, brethren, we are debtors, not to the flesh, to live after the flesh.
8:12 ara
ara
Part
adelfoi ofeiletai esmen adelphos opheiletEs eimi

n_ Voc Pl m n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
CONSEQUENTLY THEN brothers brethren ! kata kata

Prep
OWErs debtors
WE-ARE
NOT
to-THE
FLESH
OF-THE
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
according-to FLESH in-accord-with
TO-BE-LIVING
8:13 ei
ei
Cond
gar kata gar kata

Conj Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
zhte zaO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
mellete mellO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
vn Pres Act
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
IF
for
according-to FLESH in-accord-with praxeis praxis

n_ Acc Pl f
YE-ARE-LIVING YE-ARE-ABOUT TO-BE-FROM-DYING IF ye-are-being-about to-be-dying tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
YET
13 For if ye live after the flesh, ye shall die: but if ye through the Spirit do mortify the deeds of the body, ye shall live.
pneumati tas pneuma ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Pl f
swmatos qanatoute sOma thanatoO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
zhsesqe zaO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
to-spirit
THE
PRACTISings OF-THE practices
BODY
YE-ARE-(causing-to)-DIE YE-SHALL-BE-LIVING ye-are-putting-to-death outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
8:14 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
gar pneumati qeou gar pneuma theos

Conj n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
agontai agO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
14 For as many as are led by the Spirit of God, they are the sons of God.
as-many-as for whoever
to-spirit
OF-God
ARE-beING-LED these
SONS
OF-God
ARE
AV
Romans 8
8:15 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar elabete gar lambanO

pneuma douleias palin eis pneuma douleia palin eis

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Adv Prep
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
alla elabete alla lambanO

pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
NOT
for
YE-GOT
spirit
OF-SLAVery
AGAIN
INTO FEAR
but
YE-GOT
spirit
15 For ye have not received the spirit of bondage again to fear; but ye have received the Spirit of adoption, whereby we cry, Abba, Father.
uioqesias huiothesia
n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
krazomen krazO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
abba abba
ni proper
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-SON-PLACing IN of-sonship
WHICH
WE-ARE-CRYING ABBA
THE
FATHER
8:16 auto
autos
pp Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
summarturei summartureO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati hmwn pneuma hemeis

oti hoti
Conj
16 The Spirit itself beareth witness with our spirit, that we are the children of God:
SAME itself esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
THE
spirit
IS-TOGETHER-witnessING to-THE is-testifying-together with-the
spirit
OF-US
that
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
WE-ARE
offsprings children de de
Conj
OF-God
8:17 ei
ei
Cond
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
kai klhronomoi kai klEronomos

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
klhronomoi klEronomos
n_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
IF
YET offsprings children
AND also de de
Conj
tenants tenants INDEED OF-God enjoyers-of-an-allotment enjoyers-of-an-allotment eiper eiper

Cond
17 . And if children, then heirs; heirs of God, and joint-heirs with Christ; if so be that we suffer with [him], that we may be also glorified together.
sugklhronomoi sugklEronomos
a_ Nom Pl m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
sumpascomen sumpaschO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ina hina
Conj
kai kai
Conj
TOGETHER-tenants YET OF-ANOINTED IF-EVEN WE-ARE-TOGETHER-EMOTIONING THAT AND joint-enjoyers-of-the-allotment of-Christ if-so-be-that we-are-suffering-together also sundoxasqwmen sundoxazO
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-BEING-TOGETHER-glorifiED we-should-be-being-glorified-together
8:18 logizomai
logizomai
gar oti ouk gar hoti ou

Conj Conj Part Neg
axia axios
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
paqhmata tou pathEma ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
nun nun
Adv
kairou kairos
n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-accountING I-am-reckoning pros pros

Prep
for
that
NOT
WORTHY deserving
THE
EMOTIONS sufferings eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
NOW SEASON current era
18 For I reckon that the sufferings of this present time [are] not worthy [to be compared] with the glory which shall be revealed in us.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mellousan mellO
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
apokalufqhnai apokaluptO
vn Aor Pas
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
TOWARD THE
beING-ABOUT
esteem glory
TO-BE-FROM-COVERED INTO US to-be-revealed ktisews thn ktisis ho

8:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar apokaradokia ths gar apokaradokia ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
apokaluyin twn apokalupsis ho

uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
THE
for
premonition
OF-THE
CREATION
THE
FROM-COVERing unveiling
OF-THE
SONS
19 For the earnest expectation of the creature waiteth for the manifestation of the sons of God.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
apekdecetai apekdechomai
OF-THE
God
IS-FROM-OUT-RECEIVING is-awaiting gar mataiothti h gar mataiotEs ho

Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
8:20 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ktisis ktisis
n_ Nom Sg f
upetagh hupotassO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
ouc ou
Part Neg
ekousa hekon
a_ Nom Sg f
alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
to-THE
for
VAIN-ity vanity ef epi

Prep
THE
CREATION WAS-UNDER-SET NOT was-subjected
voluntarily
but
THRU because-of
20 For the creature was made subject to vanity, not willingly, but by reason of him who hath subjected [the same] in hope,
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
upotaxanta hupotassO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
One-UNDER-SETTing ON one-subjecting-herit h ho
EXPECTATION
8:21 oti kai auth

hoti
Conj
kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg f
ktisis ktisis
n_ Nom Sg f
eleuqerwqhsetai apo eleutheroO apo

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
douleias douleia
n_ Gen Sg f
t_ Nom Sg f
that
AND also
SAME itself eis eis

Prep
THE
CREATION SHALL-BE-BEING-FREED
FROM THE
SLAVery
21 Because the creature itself also shall be delivered from the bondage of corruption into the glorious liberty of the children of God.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fqoras phthora
n_ Gen Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eleuqerian ths eleutheria ho

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
teknwn tou teknon ho

OF-THE
CORRUPtion INTO THE
FREEdom
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
offsprings children
OF-THE
AV
Romans 8
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
8:22 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
gar oti pasa gar hoti pas

Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ktisis ktisis
n_ Nom Sg f
sustenazei sustenazO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for we-are-aware sunwdinei sunOdinO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
that
EVERY entire nun nun

Adv
THE
CREATION IS-TOGETHER-groanING AND is-groaning-together
22 For we know that the whole creation groaneth and travaileth in pain together until now.
acri tou achri ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
IS-TOGETHER-travailING UNTIL THE is-travailing-together
NOW
8:23 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
alla kai autoi alla kai autos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
aparchn tou aparchE ho

pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
NOT
ONLY only-so
YET but
WH
AND also
NA
SAME THE we-ourselves kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
first-fruit firstfruit en en
Prep
OF-THE
spirit
econtes echO
hmeis
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
eautois stenazomen uioqesian heautou stenazO huiothesia

pf 3 Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
23 And not only [they], but ourselves also, which have the firstfruits of the Spirit, even we ourselves groan within ourselves, waiting for the adoption, [to wit], the redemption of our body.
HAVING
WE
AND also
SAME ourselves
IN
selves ourselves
ARE-groanING
SON-PLACing sonship
apekdecomenoi apekdechomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apolutrwsin tou apolutrOsis ho

swmatos hmwn sOma hemeis

n_ Gen Sg n pp 1 Gen Pl
FROM-OUT-RECEIVING awaiting
THE
FROM-LOOSening deliverance eswqhmen sOzO

vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
OF-THE
BODY
OF-US
8:24 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gar elpidi gar elpis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
blepomenh blepO
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-THE
for
EXPECTATION WE-WERE-SAVED EXPECTATION YET beING-lookED being-observed gar blepei gar blepO
NOT
IS
24 For we are saved by hope: but hope that is seen is not hope: for what a man seeth, why doth he yet hope for?
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
elpizei elpizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
EXPECTATION WHICH
for
ANY anyone
he-IS-EXPECTING he-is-expecting-it elpizomen elpizO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
8:25 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
blepomen blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
di dia
Prep
upomonhs hupomonE
n_ Gen Sg f
25 But if we hope for that we see not, [then] do we with patience wait for [it].
IF
YET WHICH
NOT
WE-ARE-lookING WE-ARE-EXPECTING THRU UNDER-REMAINing we-are-observing through endurance
apekdecomeqa apekdechomai
WE-ARE-FROM-OUT-RECEIVING we-are-awaiting-it
8:26 wsautws de
hOsautOs
Adv
de
Conj
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
sunantilambanetai th sunantilambanomai ho
vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg f
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Dat Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
AS-SAMEly similarly to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
YET AND also
THE
spirit
IS-TOGETHER-supportING is-aiding kaqo katho

Adv
to-THE the ouk ou
UN-FIRMness OF-US infirmity oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
gar ti gar tis

Conj pi Acc Sg n
proseuxwmeqa proseuchomai
vs Aor midD 1 Pl
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
26 . Likewise the Spirit also helpeth our infirmities: for we know not what we should pray for as we ought: but the Spirit itself maketh intercession for us with groanings which cannot be uttered.
Part Neg
THE
for
ANY what ? to ho
WE-SHOULD-BE-prayING according-to-WHICH IS-BINDING according-to-what it-must-be pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
NOT
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED we-are-aware
alla auto alla autos

Conj pp Nom Sg n
uperentugcanei stenagmois alalhtois huperentugchanO stenagmos alalEtos

vi Pres Act 3 Sg n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
t_ Nom Sg n
but
SAME itself
THE
spirit
IS-OVER-pleadING is-pleading-for-us tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
to-groanings
UN-TALKED inarticulate ti tis

pi Nom Sg n
8:27 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
eraunwn ereunaO
kardias oiden kardia eidO

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fronhma phronEma
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
YET One-SEARCHING one-searching pneumatos oti kata pneuma hoti kata

n_ Gen Sg n Conj Prep
THE
HEARTS
HAS-PERCEIVED ANY is-aware what ?
THE
DISPOSition
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
entugcanei uper entugchanO huper

vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
27 And he that searcheth the hearts knoweth what [is] the mind of the Spirit, because he maketh intercession for the saints according to [the will of] God.
OF-THE
spirit
that
according-to God in-accord-with
it-IS-pleadING
OVER HOLY-ones for-the-sake-of saints
AV
Romans 8
8:28 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
oti tois hoti ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
agapwsin agapaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that we-are-aware sunergei sunergeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH WH
to-THE
THE
God
ALL
28 And we know that all things work together for good to them that love God, to them who are the called according to [his] purpose.
o qeos
eis eis
Prep
agaqon tois agathos ho

a_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Pl m
kata kata
Prep
proqesin prothesis
n_ Acc Sg f
klhtois klEtos
a_ Dat Pl m
IS-TOGETHER-ACTING is-working-together ousin eimi

INTO GOOD
to-THE-ones according-to BEFORE-PLACing CALLED to-the-ones purpose called-ones
BEING
8:29 oti ous

hoti
Conj
hos
pr Acc Pl m
proegnw proginOskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai prowrisen kai proorizO

summorfous ths summorphos ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
eikonos eikOn
n_ Gen Sg f
that
WHOM whom(p) uiou huios

n_ Gen Sg m
He-BEFORE-KNEW AND he-foreknew also autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
He-BEFORE-SEEizES conFORMED he-designates-beforehand to-be-conformed einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
OF-THE
image
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
a_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
29 . For whom he did foreknow, he also did predestinate [to be] conformed to the image of his Son, that he might be the firstborn among many brethren.
OF-THE
SON
OF-Him
INTO THE
TO-BE
Him
BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH IN firstborn among
pollois adelfois polus adelphos

MANY
Conj
8:30 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
prowrisen proorizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
toutous kai ekalesen kai ous houtos kai kaleO kai hos
pd Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj pr Acc Pl m
ekalesen kaleO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WHOM whom(p)
YET He-BEFORE-SEEizES these he-designates-beforehand de de

Conj
AND also
He-CALLS
AND
WHOM whom(p)
He-CALLS
toutous kai edikaiwsen ous houtos kai dikaioO hos

pd Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pr Acc Pl m
edikaiwsen toutous kai edoxasen dikaioO houtos kai doxazO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pd Acc Pl m Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
30 Moreover whom he did predestinate, them he also called: and whom he called, them he also justified: and whom he justified, them he also glorified.
these
AND also
He-JUSTIFIES
WHOM whom(p)
YET He-JUSTIFIES
these
AND also o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
He-esteemizES he-glorifies uper huper

Prep
31 . What shall we then say to these things? If God [be] for us, who [can be] against us?
8:31 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
pros pros
Prep
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ei ei
Cond
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANY what ? hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING TOWARD these IF these-things kaq kata

Prep
THE
God
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
US
ANY who ? ge ge
Part
DOWN OF-US against us tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
8:32 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
idiou idios
a_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
efeisato pheidomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
alla uper alla huper

Conj Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
WHO
SURELY OF-THE the
OWN
SON
NOT
SPARES
but
OVER US for-the-sake-of ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
32 He that spared not his own Son, but delivered him up for us all, how shall he not with him also freely give us all things?
pantwn paredwken auton pas paradidOmi autos

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp Acc Sg m
pws ouci pOs ouchi

Adv Int Part Int
kai sun kai sun

Conj Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
ALL
Him
how how ?
NOT(emph.) AND not(emph.) ? also
THE
ALL all-things
to-US us
carisetai charizomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-gracING he-shall-be-graciously-granting
8:33 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
egkalesei egkaleO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kata eklektwn kata eklektos

Prep a_ Gen Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dikaiwn dikaioO
33 Who shall lay any thing to the charge of God's elect? [It is] God that justifieth.
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-indictING DOWN against o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
OF-chosen-ones OF-God chosen-ones
God
THE
One-JUSTIFYING one-justifying o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
34 Who [is] he that condemneth? [It is] Christ that died, yea rather, that is risen again, who is even at the right hand of God, who also maketh
8:34 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
katakrinwn katakrinO
vp Pres Act Nom Sg m / vp Fut Act Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ANY who ?
THE
One-DOWN-JUDGING one-condemning
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
AV
Romans 8 - Romans 9
apoqanwn apothnEskO
mallon de mallon de
Adv Conj
egerqeis egeirO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
WH
ek nekrwn
WH
WH
os
NA
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
NA
kai kai
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
intercession for us.
One-FROM-DYING one-dying en en
Prep
RATHER
YET BEING-ROUSED one-being-roused qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
WHO
AND also
IS
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai entugcanei uper kai entugchanO huper

Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
IN
RIGHT right-hand
OF-THE
God
WHO
AND also apo apo

Prep
IS-pleadING
OVER US for-the-sake-of cristou qliyis christos thlipsis

35 Who shall separate us from the love of Christ? [shall] tribulation, or distress, or persecution, or famine, or nakedness, or peril, or sword?
8:35 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
cwrisei chOrizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs tou agapE ho

ANY what ? h E
Part
US
SHALL-BE-SPACizING FROM THE shall-be-separating diwgmos h diOgmos E

n_ Nom Sg m Part
LOVE
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
CONSTRICTION affliction macaira machaira

n_ Nom Sg f
stenocwria h stenochOria E
n_ Nom Sg f Part
limos limos
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
gumnoths h gumnotEs E
n_ Nom Sg f Part
kindunos h kindunos E
n_ Nom Sg m Part
OR
CRAMP-SPACE distress
OR
CHASing persecution
OR
FAMINE
OR
NAKEDness
OR
DANGER
OR
sword
8:36 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti eneken hoti heneken

Conj Adv
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
qanatoumeqa thanatoO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
olhn holos
a_ Acc Sg f
on-account-of OF-YOU you
WE-ARE-beING-(causED-to)-DIE WHOLE we-are-being-put-to-death
36 As it is written, For thy sake we are killed all the day long; we are accounted as sheep for the slaughter.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran elogisqhmen hEmera logizomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
ws probata sfaghs hOs probaton sphagE

Adv n_ Nom Pl n n_ Gen Sg f
THE
DAY
WE-ARE-accountED AS we-are-reckoned toutois pasin houtos pas

pd Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n
sheep sheep(p)
OF-SLAYing of-slaughter dia dia

Prep
8:37 all en
alla
Conj
en
Prep
upernikwmen hupernikaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agaphsantos hmas agapaO hEmeis

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
37 Nay, in all these things we are more than conquerors through him that loved us.
but IN butnay
these these-things
ALL
WE-ARE-OVER-CONQUERING THRU THE we-are-more-than-conquering through qanatos oute thanatos oute

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
One-LOVing one-loving zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
US
8:38 pepeismai
peithO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
gar oti oute gar hoti oute

Conj Conj Conj
oute oute
Conj
I-HAVE-been-PERSUADED for
that
NOT-BESIDES DEATH neither oute oute

Conj
NOT-BESIDES LIFE nor oute oute

Conj
NOT-BESIDES nor mellonta mellO

38 For I am persuaded, that neither death, nor life, nor angels, nor principalities, nor powers, nor things present, nor things to come,
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
oute oute
Conj
arcai archE
n_ Nom Pl f
enestwta enistEmi
vp Perf Act Nom Pl n
MESSENGERS NOT-BESIDES ORIGINals NOT-BESIDES HAVING-IN-STOOD NOT-BESIDES beING-ABOUT nor sovereignties nor things-being-present nor things-impending oute oute
Conj
dunameis dunamis
n_ Nom Pl f
NOT-BESIDES ABILITIES nor powers
8:39 oute
oute
Conj
uywma hupsOma
n_ Nom Sg n
oute oute
Conj
baqos bathos
n_ Nom Sg n
oute oute
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
ktisis ktisis
n_ Nom Sg f
etera heteros
a_ Nom Sg f
NOT-BESIDES HEIGHT nor dunhsetai dunamai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
NOT-BESIDES DEPTH nor apo apo

Prep
NOT-BESIDES ANY nor agaphs tou agapE ho

CREATION DIFFERENT
39 Nor height, nor depth, nor any other creature, shall be able to separate us from the love of God, which is in Christ Jesus our Lord.
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
cwrisai chOrizO
vn Aor Act
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
SHALL-BE-ABLE US
TO-SPACE-ize FROM THE to-separate tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
LOVE
OF-THE
God
OF-THE the
IN

kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
AV
Romans 9
9:1 alhqeian legw

alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
cristw ou christos ou
yeudomai pseudomai
summarturoushs summartureO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
TRUTH
IN
Prep
NOT
I-AM-FALSifyING I-am-lying
OF-TOGETHER-witnessING to-ME of-testifying-together with-me
. I say the truth in Christ, I lie not, my conscience also bearing me witness in the Holy Ghost,
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
suneidhsews mou suneidEsis egO


THE
conscience
OF-ME
IN
spirit
HOLY
9:2 oti luph

hoti
Conj
lupE
n_ Nom Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
kai adialeiptos odunh kai adialeiptos odunE

Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
That I have great heaviness and continual sorrow in my heart.
that
SORROW
to-ME
IS
GREAT
AND
UN-intermittent unintermittent
PAIN
to-THE
HEART
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
9:3 hucomhn
euchomai
gar anaqema einai gar anathema eimi

Conj n_ Nom Sg n vn Pres vxx
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
I-wishED wished uper huper

Prep
for
anathema
TO-BE
SAME myself twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
FROM THE
ANOINTED Christ kata kata

Prep
For I could wish that myself were accursed from Christ for my brethren, my kinsmen according to the flesh:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
adelfwn mou adelphos egO

suggenwn suggenEs
a_ Gen Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
brothers brethren
OF-ME
THE
TOGETHER-generateds OF-ME relatives h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
according-to FLESH
9:4 oitines eisin

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
israhlitai wn israElitEs hos

n_ Nom Pl m pr Gen Pl m
uioqesia huiothesia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
WHO-ANY who-any ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
ARE
ISRAELITES
SON-PLACing AND sonship latreia latreia

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
esteem glory
AND
diaqhkai kai h diathEkE kai ho

n_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Nom Sg f
nomoqesia kai h nomothesia kai ho

kai ai kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
Who are Israelites; to whom [pertaineth] the adoption, and the glory, and the covenants, and the giving of the law, and the service [of God], and the promises;
THE
covenants
AND
THE
LAW-PLACing legislation
AND
THE
DIVINE-SERVICE AND
THE
epaggeliai epaggelia
n_ Nom Pl f
promises
9:5 wn
hos
pr Gen Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres kai ex patEr kai ek

n_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos to christos ho
kata kata
Prep
OF-WHOM THE of-whom(p) sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
FATHERS
AND
OUT OF-WHOM THE of-whom(p) pantwn qeos pas theos

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
THE
according-to
Whose [are] the fathers, and of whom as concerning the flesh Christ [came], who is over all, God blessed for ever. Amen.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
epi epi
Prep

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas aiOn
n_ Acc Pl m
FLESH
THE
One-BEING one-being
ON ALL onover
God
blessed
INTO THE
eons
amhn amEn
Hebrew
AMEN
9:6 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oion hoios
pk Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
oti ekpeptwken o hoti ekpiptO ho

Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
NOT
WHICH-WHICH YET that such-as oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
HAS-OUT-FALLEN has-lapsed outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
NOT
. Not as though the word of God hath taken none effect. For they [are] not all Israel, which are of Israel:
gar pantes gar pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ex ek
Prep
israhl israEl
ni proper
israhl israEl
ni proper
for
ALL
THE-ones the-ones oti eisin hoti eimi

Conj
OUT of-ISRAEL these of-Israel these-ones sperma sperma

n_ Nom Sg n
ISRAEL
9:7 oud
oude
Adv
abraam abraam
ni proper
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
all en alla en
Conj Prep
isaak isaak
ni proper
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
NOT-YET that neither
THEY-ARE are
seed
of-ABRAHAM ALL of-Abraham
offsprings children
but
IN
ISAAC
Neither, because they are the seed of Abraham, [are they] all children: but, In Isaac shall thy seed be called.
AV
Romans 9
klhqhsetai kaleO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED to-YOU
seed
9:8 tout
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos tauta sarx houtos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
this
IS
NOT
THE
offsprings children
OF-THE
FLESH
these

Prep
OF-THE
That is, They which are the children of the flesh, these [are] not the children of God: but the children of the promise are counted for the seed.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alla ta alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epaggelias logizetai epaggelia logizomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
sperma sperma
n_ Acc Sg n
God
but
THE
offsprings children
OF-THE
promise
He-IS-accountING he-is-reckoning kata kata

Prep
INTO seed
9:9 epaggelias gar o

epaggelia
n_ Gen Sg f
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
OF-promise
for
THE
saying word th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
this
according-to THE
SEASON
this
For this [is] the word of promise, At this time will I come, and Sara shall have a son.
eleusomai erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
kai estai kai eimi

sarra sarrha
n_ Dat Sg f
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-COMING AND
SHALL-BE to-THE there-shall-be
SARAH
SON
9:10 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
alla kai rebekka ex alla kai rhebekka ek

Conj Conj n_ Nom Sg f Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
koithn ecousa koitE echO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg f
isaak isaak
ni proper
NOT
ONLY only-so patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
YET but
AND also
REBECCA
OUT OF-ONE
LIE-ing bed
HAVING one-having
ISAAC
10 And not only [this]; but when Rebecca also had conceived by one, [even] by our father Isaac;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
FATHER
OF-US
9:11 mhpw
mEpO
Adv
gar gennhqentwn gar gennaO

Conj vp Aor Pas Gen Pl m
mhde mEde
Conj
praxantwn prassO
vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
agaqon h agathos E
a_ Acc Sg n Part
faulon ina phaulos hina

a_ Acc Sg n Conj
NO-as-yet for not-as-yet h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
OF-BEING-generatED NO-YET OF-PRACTISing being-born nor practising ekloghn proqesis eklogE prothesis
ANY anything
GOOD
OR
FOUL bad
(9:12)
THAT
kat kata
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
menh menO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ex ek
Prep
11 (For [the children] being not yet born, neither having done any good or evil, that the purpose of God according to election might stand, not of works, but of him that calleth;)
THE
according-to choice
BEFORE-PLACing OF-THE purpose kalountos kaleO

God
MAY-BE-REMAINING
NOT
OUT
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
all ek alla ek
Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-ACTS
but
OUT OF-THE
One-CALLING one-calling oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
9:12 erreqh
ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
douleusei douleuO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
elassoni elasson
a_ Dat Sg m
12 It was said unto her, The elder shall serve the younger.
it-WAS-declarED to-her
WH NA
that
THE
GREATER
SHALL-BE-SLAVING to-THE
INFERIOR
9:13
kaqaper
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
iakwb hgaphsa iakOb agapaO

ni proper vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
hsau Esau
ni proper
13 As it is written, Jacob have I loved, but Esau have I hated.
according-AS
JACOB
I-LOVE
THE
YET ESAU
emishsa miseO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
I-HATE
9:14 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
adikia adikia
n_ Nom Sg f
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
14 . What shall we say then? [Is there] unrighteousness with God? God forbid.
ANY what ? genoito ginomai

vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING NO
UN-JUSTness BESIDE THE injustice
God
NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
AV
Romans 9
9:15 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
mwusei gar legei mOusEs gar legO

n_ Dat Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
elehsw eleaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
an an
Part
to-THE
MOSES
for
He-IS-sayING
I-SHALL-BE-beING-MERCIFUL-to WHOM
EVER
15 For he saith to Moses, I will have mercy on whom I will have mercy, and I will have compassion on whom I will have compassion.
elew eleaO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
kai oiktirhsw kai oiktirO

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
an an
Part
oiktirw oiktirO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
I-MAY-BE-beING-MERCIFUL AND
I-SHALL-BE-PITYING WHOM
EVER I-MAY-BE-PITYING
9:16 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qelontos thelO
oude oude
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
trecontos trechO
alla alla
Conj
CONSEQUENTLY THEN NOT
OF-THE
one-WILLING one-willing
NOT-YET OF-THE nor
one-RACING one-racing
but
16 So then [it is] not of him that willeth, nor of him that runneth, but of God that sheweth mercy.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
elewntos eleaO
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
beING-MERCIFUL
God
9:17 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
faraw oti eis pharaO hoti eis

ni proper Conj Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
IS-sayING
for
THE
WRITing scripture
to-THE
PHARAO Pharaoh en en
Prep
that
INTO SAME this selfsame-thing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
exhgeira exegeirO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
opws hopOs
Adv
endeixwmai endeiknumi
vs Aor Mid 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
dunamin mou dunamis egO

17 For the scripture saith unto Pharaoh, Even for this same purpose have I raised thee up, that I might shew my power in thee, and that my name might be declared throughout all the earth.
I-OUT-ROUSE YOU I-rouse-up kai opws kai hopOs

Conj Adv
WHICH-how I-SHOULD-BE-IN-SHOWING IN so-that I-should-be-displaying to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
YOU
THE
ABILITY power en en
Prep
OF-ME
diaggelh diaggellO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
WHICH-how SHOULD-BE-beING-THRU-MESSAGED THE so-that should-be-being-published
NAME
OF-ME
IN
EVERY entire
THE
gh gE
n_ Dat Sg f
LAND earth
9:18 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eleei eleaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
CONSEQUENTLY THEN WHOM
He-IS-WILLING He-IS-beING-MERCIFUL-to WHOM
YET He-IS-WILLING
18 Therefore hath he mercy on whom he will [have mercy], and whom he will he hardeneth.
sklhrunei sklErunO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
He-IS-HARDENING
NA
9:19 ereis
ereO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oun oun
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eti eti
Adv
memfetai memphomai
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
gar gar
Conj
19 Thou wilt say then unto me, Why doth he yet find fault? For who hath resisted his will?
YOU-SHALL-BE-declarING to-ME you-shall-be-protesting boulhmati boulEma

n_ Dat Sg n
THEN ANY why ? anqesthken anthistEmi

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
THEN
STILL He-IS-BLAMING
to-THE the
for
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
COUNSEL-effect OF-Him intention
ANY who ?
HAS-with-STOOD has-withstood su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
9:20 w anqrwpe menounge

O
Inj
anthrOpos
n_ Voc Sg m
menounge
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o!
human !
INDEED-THEN-SURELY YOU to-be-sure qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
ANY who ? erei ereO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ARE
THE
20 Nay but, O man, who art thou that repliest against God? Shall the thing formed say to him that formed [it], Why hast thou made me thus?
antapokrinomenos tw antapokrinomai ho
vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plasma plasma
n_ Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
one-INSTEAD-answerING one-answering-again plasanti plassO

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
to-THE
God
NO
SHALL-BE-declarING THE shall-be-protesting
MOLD-effect to-THE which-is-molded
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
epoihsas outws poieO houtOs

vi Aor Act 2 Sg Adv
One-MOLDing one-molding
ANY why ?
ME
YOU-make
thus
AV
Romans 9
9:21 h
E
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
exousian o exousia ho
kerameus tou kerameus ho

phlou pElos
n_ Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
OR
NOT
IS-HAVING
authority right
THE
potter
OF-THE
MUD clay o hos
OUT OF-THE
21 Hath not the potter power over the clay, of the same lump to make one vessel unto honour, and another unto dishonour?
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
furamatos poihsai o phurama poieO hos

n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Act pr Acc Sg n
men men
Part
eis eis
Prep
timhn timE
n_ Acc Sg f
skeuos skeuos
n_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
pr Acc Sg n
SAME
KNEADing
TO-make
WHICH
INDEED INTO VALUE honor
INSTRUMENT WHICH vessel
YET INTO
atimian atimia
n_ Acc Sg f
UN-VALUE dishonor
9:22 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
qelwn thelO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
endeixasqai thn endeiknumi ho

vn Aor Mid t_ Acc Sg f
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
IF
YET WILLING
THE
God
TO-IN-SHOW to-display en en
Prep
THE
INDIGNATION AND
gnwrisai gnOrizO
vn Aor Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dunaton autou dunatos autos

a_ Acc Sg n pp Gen Sg m
hnegken pherO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
pollh polus
a_ Dat Sg f
makroqumia skeuh makrothumia skeuos

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Pl n
22 [What] if God, willing to shew [his] wrath, and to make his power known, endured with much longsuffering the vessels of wrath fitted to destruction:
TO-KNOWize THE to-make-known orghs orgE

n_ Gen Sg f
ABLE power
OF-Him
CARRIES
IN
much
FAR-FEELing patience
INSTRUMENTS vessels
kathrtismena katartizO
eis eis
Prep
apwleian apOleia
n_ Acc Sg f
OF-INDIGNATION HAVING-been-DOWN-EQUIPPED INTO destruction having-been-adapted
9:23
NA
kai kai
Conj
ina hina
Conj
gnwrish gnOrizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
plouton ths ploutos ho

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
epi epi
Prep
AND also skeuh skeuos

n_ Acc Pl n
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-KNOWizING THE he-should-be-making-known eleous eleos

n_ Gen Sg n
RICHES
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
ON
23 And that he might make known the riches of his glory on the vessels of mercy, which he had afore prepared unto glory,
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
prohtoimasen proetoimazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
INSTRUMENTS OF-MERCY WHICH vessels
He-BEFORE-makES-READY INTO esteem he-makes-ready-beforehand glory ou ou

Part Neg
9:24 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
kai ekalesen hmas kai kaleO hEmeis

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
monon ex monon ek
Adv Prep
ioudaiwn alla kai ex ioudaios alla kai ek

a_ Gen Pl m Conj Conj Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
24 Even us, whom he hath called, not of the Jews only, but also of the Gentiles?
WHOM
AND also
He-CALLS
US
NOT
ONLY
OUT OF-JUDA-ans of-Jews ton ho
but
AND also ou ou
Part Neg
OUT OF-NATIONS
9:25 ws kai en
hOs
Adv
kai
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
wshe legei hOsEe legO

kalesw kaleO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
t_ Acc Sg m
AS
AND also mou egO
IN
THE
HOSEA
He-IS-sayING
I-SHALL-BE-CALLING THE
NOT
PEOPLE
OF-ME
25 . As he saith also in Osee, I will call them my people, which were not my people; and her beloved, which was not beloved.
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
hgaphmenhn agapaO
hgaphmenhn agapaO
pp 1 Gen Sg
PEOPLE
OF-ME
AND
THE
NOT
HAVING-been-LOVED HAVING-been-LOVED beloved beloved ou hou

Adv
9:26 kai estai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
erreqh ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
WH
autois
NA
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
AND
it-SHALL-BE
IN
THE
PLACE
where it-WAS-declarED
to-them
NOT
laos laos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
ekei klhqhsontai ekei kaleO

Adv vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
zwntos zaO
26 And it shall come to pass, [that] in the place where it was said unto them, Ye [are] not my people; there shall they be called the children of the living God.
PEOPLE
OF-ME
YOU(p) ye krazei krazO
there
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-CALLED SONS
OF-God
LIVING
9:27 hsaias
Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
uper tou huper ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
israhl ean israEl ean

ni proper Cond
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ariqmos arithmos
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ISAIAH
YET IS-CRYING
OVER
THE
ISRAEL
IF-EVER MAY-BE
THE
NUMBER
27 Esaias also crieth concerning Israel, Though the number of the children of Israel be as the sand of the sea, a remnant shall be saved:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
uiwn huios
n_ Gen Pl m
israhl israEl
ni proper
ws h hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
ammos ammos
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs to thalassa ho
upoleimma hupoleimma
n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
SONS
of-ISRAEL AS of-Israel
THE
SAND
OF-THE
SEA
THE
residue
AV
Romans 9 - Romans 10
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
9:28 logon
logos
n_ Acc Sg m
gar suntelwn gar sunteleO

kai suntemnwn kai suntemnO

poihsei poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
saying accounting ghs gE

n_ Gen Sg f
for
TOGETHER-FINISHING AND being-conclusive
TOGETHER-CUTTING SHALL-BE-DOING Master being-concise Lord
ON
THE
28 For he will finish the work, and cut [it] short in righteousness: because a short work will the Lord make upon the earth.
LAND earth
9:29 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
proeirhken proereO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
hsaias Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
sabawq egkatelipen sabaOth egkataleipO

Hebrew vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
according-AS HAS-BEFORE-declarED ISAIAH has-declared-before sperma ws sodoma an sperma hOs sodoma an

n_ Acc Sg n Adv n_ Nom Pl n Part
IF
NO
Master Lord
Sabaoth
abandonED conserved wmoiwqhmen homoioO

vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
29 And as Esaias said before, Except the Lord of Sabaoth had left us a seed, we had been as Sodoma, and been made like unto Gomorrha.
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
egenhqhmen ginomai
vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
kai ws gomorra kai hOs gomorrha

an an
Part
to-US us
seed
AS
SODOM
EVER WE-WERE-BECOMED AND we-were-become oti eqnh hoti ethnos

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
AS
GOMORRAH EVER WE-WERE-LIKenED
9:30 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eroumen ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
diwkonta diOkO
ANY what ?
THEN WE-SHALL-BE-declarING that
NATIONS
THE
NO
CHASING pursuing ek ek
Prep
dikaiosunhn katelaben dikaiosunhn dikaiosunhn de dikaiosunE katalambanO dikaiosunE dikaiosunE de

n_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
30 . What shall we say then? That the Gentiles, which followed not after righteousness, have attained to righteousness, even the righteousness which is of faith.
DOWN-GOT overtook diwkwn diOkO
JUSTice righteousness nomon nomos

n_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith ouk ou

Part Neg
9:31 israhl de
israEl
ni proper
de
Conj
dikaiosunhs eis dikaiosunE eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
efqasen phthanO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ISRAEL
YET CHASING pursuing ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
LAW
OF-JUSTice of-righteousness ek ek
Prep
INTO LAW
NOT
OUTSTRIPS
31 But Israel, which followed after the law of righteousness, hath not attained to the law of righteousness.
9:32 dia
dia
Prep
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
pistews all ws ex pistis alla hOs ek

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
prosekoyan proskoptO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THRU ANY because-of what ? tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
that NOT seeing-that
but
AS
OUT OF-ACTS of-works
THEY-TOWARD-STRIKE they-stumble
32 Wherefore? Because [they sought it] not by faith, but as it were by the works of the law. For they stumbled at that stumblingstone;
liqw lithos
n_ Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
proskommatos proskomma
n_ Gen Sg n
to-THE
STONE
OF-THE
TOWARD-STRIKE stumbling idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
9:33 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
tiqhmi tithEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
siwn siOn
ni proper
liqon lithos
n_ Acc Sg m
proskommatos proskomma
n_ Gen Sg n
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-PLACING IN lo ! I-am-laying kai petran skandalou kai o kai petra skandalon kai ho
Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg m
SION
STONE
OF-TOWARD-STRIKE of-stumbling
33 As it is written, Behold, I lay in Sion a stumblingstone and rock of offence: and whosoever believeth on him shall not be ashamed.
pisteuwn pisteuO
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
AND
ROCK
OF-SNARE
AND
THE
ON
Him
NOT
kataiscunqhsetai kataischunO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-DOWN-VILED shall-be-being-disgraced
AV
Romans 10
10:1 adelfoi h
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
men men
Part
eudokia eudokia
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
emhs emos
ps 1 Gen Sg
kardias kai h kardia kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f
dehsis deEsis
n_ Nom Sg f
. Brethren, my heart's desire and prayer to God for Israel is, that they might be saved.
brothers brethren ! pros pros

Prep
THE
INDEED WELL-SEEMing OF-THE delight uper huper

Prep
MY
HEART
AND
THE
petition
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
swthrian sOtEria
n_ Acc Sg f
TOWARD THE
God
OVER them for-the-sake-of
INTO SAVing salvation qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
10:2 marturw
martureO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar autois oti zhlon gar autos hoti zElos

Conj pp Dat Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ecousin echO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
kat kata
Prep
For I bear them record that they have a zeal of God, but not according to knowledge.
I-AM-witnessING for I-am-testifying epignwsin epignOsis

n_ Acc Sg f
to-them
that
BOILing zeal
OF-God
THEY-ARE-HAVING but
NOT
according-to in-accord-with
ON-KNOWledge recognition
10:3 agnoountes
agnoeO
gar thn gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiosunhn kai thn dikaiosunE kai ho

idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
UN-KNOWING being-ignorant-of
NA
for
THE
OF-THE
God
JUSTice righteousness th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
THE
OWN
n_ Acc Sg f
zhtountes zEteO
sthsai histEmi
vn Aor Act
dikaiosunh tou dikaiosunE ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouc ou
Part Neg
For they being ignorant of God's righteousness, and going about to establish their own righteousness, have not submitted themselves unto the righteousness of God.
JUSTice righteousness upetaghsan hupotassO

vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
SEEKING
TO-STAND to-THE to-establish
OF-THE
God
NOT
THEY-WERE-UNDER-SET they-were-subjected
10:4 telos
telos
n_ Nom Sg n
gar nomou gar nomos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
cristos eis christos eis

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
dikaiosunhn panti dikaiosunE pas

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pisteuonti pisteuO
For Christ [is] the end of the law for righteousness to every one that believeth.
FINISH for consummation
OF-LAW
ANOINTED Christ
WH
INTO JUSTice righteousness thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-EVERY
THE
one-BELIEVING one-believing ek ek
Prep
WH
10:5 mwushs gar grafei

mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
oti
gar
Conj
graphO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
dikaiosunhn thn dikaiosunE ho

nomou o
WH
MOSES
WH
for
NA
IS-WRITING
NA NA NA
THE of-the oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
NA
THE
NA
OUT
For Moses describeth the righteousness which is of the law, That the man which doeth those things shall live by them.
poihsas
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
WH
LAW
NA
that
THE
DOing
them
human
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
auth
autois autos
pp Dat Pl n
SHALL-BE-LIVING IN
them
10:6 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
pistews dikaiosunh outws legei pistis dikaiosunE houtOs legO

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
eiphs legO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
THE
YET OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith kardia sou kardia su

thus
IS-sayING
NO
YOU-MAY-BE-sayING IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
anabhsetai anabainO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon tout ouranos houtos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx
But the righteousness which is of faith speaketh on this wise, Say not in thine heart, Who shall ascend into heaven? (that is, to bring Christ down [from above]:)
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-UP-STEPPING INTO THE shall-be-ascending
heaven
this
IS
criston katagagein christos katagO

n_ Acc Sg m vn 2Aor Act
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE-DOWN-LEADING to-be-leading-down tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
10:7 h
E
Part
katabhsetai katabainO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
abusson tout abussos houtos

n_ Acc Sg f pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx
criston ek christos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
Or, Who shall descend into the deep? (that is, to bring up Christ again from the dead.)
OR
ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-DOWN-STEPPING INTO THE shall-be-descending
abyss
this
IS
ANOINTED Christ
OUT
AV
Romans 10
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
anagagein anagO
vn 2Aor Act
OF-DEAD-ones TO-BE-UP-LEADING of-dead-ones to-be-leading-up
10:8 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eggus sou eggus su

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
but
ANY what ?
it-IS-sayING
NEAR
OF-YOU you
THE
declaration
IS
IN
THE
But what saith it? The word is nigh thee, [even] in thy mouth, and in thy heart: that is, the word of faith, which we preach;
stomati sou stoma su

kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
MOUTH
OF-YOU
AND
IN
THE
HEART
OF-YOU
this
IS
THE
declaration
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews o pistis hos

khrussomen kErussO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
WHICH
WE-ARE-PROCLAIMING we-are-heralding
WH
10:9 oti ean

hoti
Conj
ean
Cond
omologhshs homologeO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
to rhma
WH
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
stomati sou stoma su

WH
oti
that
WH
IF-EVER YOU-SHOULD-BE-avowING
WH NA NA
IN
THE
MOUTH
OF-YOU
That if thou shalt confess with thy mouth the Lord Jesus, and shalt believe in thine heart that God hath raised him from the dead, thou shalt be saved.
kurios ihsous
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai pisteushs kai pisteuO

en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
Master Lord sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
JESUS
AND
YOU-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING IN should-be-believing hgeiren egeirO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
HEART
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
swqhsh sOzO
vi Fut Pas 2 Sg
OF-YOU
that
THE
God
Him
ROUSES
OUT OF-DEAD-ones YOU-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED of-dead-ones omologeitai homologeO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
10:10 kardia gar pisteuetai

kardia
n_ Dat Sg f
gar
Conj
pisteuO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
dikaiosunhn stomati de dikaiosunE stoma de

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Dat Sg n Conj
eis eis
Prep
to-HEART for
it-IS-beING-BELIEVED INTO JUSTice righteousness
to-MOUTH
YET it-IS-beING-avowED INTO
10 For with the heart man believeth unto righteousness; and with the mouth confession is made unto salvation.
swthrian sOtEria
n_ Acc Sg f
SAVing salvation
10:11 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pisteuwn pisteuO
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
11 For the scripture saith, Whosoever believeth on him shall not be ashamed.
IS-sayING
for
THE
WRITing scripture
EVERY
THE
ON
Him
NOT
kataiscunqhsetai kataischunO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-DOWN-VILED shall-be-being-disgraced
10:12 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

diastolh ioudaiou te diastolE ioudaios te

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Sg m Part
kai ellhnos o kai hellEn ho

Conj n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
gar gar
Conj
NOT
for
IS there-is
distinction
OF-JUDA-an Jew eis eis

Prep
BESIDES AND
OF-GREEK Greek
THE
for
12 . For there is no difference between the Jew and the Greek: for the same Lord over all is rich unto all that call upon him.
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pantwn ploutwn pas plouteO

pantas tous pas ho

epikaloumenous auton epikaleO autos

vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m pp Acc Sg m
SAME same-one
Master Lord
OF-ALL
beING-RICH
INTO ALL
THE
ones-ON-CALLING ones-invoking onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
Him
10:13 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar os gar hos

Conj pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
epikaleshtai epikaleO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
13 For whosoever shall call upon the name of the Lord shall be saved.
EVERY every-one swqhsetai sOzO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
for
WHO
EVER SHOULD-BE-ON-CALLING THE should-be-involking
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
AV
Romans 10
10:14 pws oun

pOs
Adv Int
oun
Conj
epikaleswntai epikaleO
vi Aor Mid 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
episteusan pws de pisteuO pOs de

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Int Conj
how how ?
THEN THEY-SHOULD-BE-ON-CALLING INTO WHOM they-should-be-invoking-him ou hos

pr Gen Sg m
NOT
THEY-BELIEVE
how how ?
YET
pisteuswsin pisteuO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
hkousan pws de akouO pOs de

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Adv Int Conj
akouswsin akouO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
cwris chOris
Adv
14 How then shall they call on him in whom they have not believed? and how shall they believe in him of whom they have not heard? and how shall they hear without a preacher?
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BELIEVING OF-WHOM they-should-be-believing-in-him khrussontos kErussO

NOT
THEY-HEAR how how ?
YET THEY-SHOULD-BE-HEARING apart-from
PROCLAIMING one-heralding
10:15 pws de
pOs
Adv Int
de
Conj
khruxwsin kErussO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
apostalwsin apostellO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
how how ?
WH
YET THEY-SHOULD-BE-PROCLAIMING IF-EVER NO they-should-be-heralding

NA
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEING-commissionED
kaqaper
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ws wraioi hOs hOraios

Adv a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
podes pous
n_ Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
15 And how shall they preach, except they be sent? as it is written, How beautiful are the feet of them that preach the gospel of peace, and bring glad tidings of good things!
according-AS
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN AS how
NA
beautiful
THE
FEET
OF-THE
euaggelizomenwn euaggelizO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
agaqa agathos
a_ Acc Pl n
ones-WELL-MESSAGizING ones-bringing-a-well-message
THE of-the
GOOD good-things euaggeliw euaggelion

n_ Dat Sg n
10:16 all ou
alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
uphkousan tw hupakouO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg n
hsaias Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
gar legei gar legO

but
NOT
ALL
obey
to-THE the akoh akoE

n_ Dat Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE ISAIAH
for
IS-sayING
16 But they have not all obeyed the gospel. For Esaias saith, Lord, who hath believed our report?
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
episteusen th pisteuO ho
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
Master ! Lord !
ANY who ?
BELIEVES
to-THE the pistis pistis

n_ Nom Sg f
HEARing tidings akohs akoE
OF-US
10:17 ara
ara
Part
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ex ek
Prep
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
akoh akoE
n_ Nom Sg f
dia dia
Prep
rhmatos rhEma
n_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg f
17 So then faith [cometh] by hearing, and hearing by the word of God.
CONSEQUENTLY THE
BELIEF faith
OUT OF-HEARing THE of-tidings
YET HEARing tidings
THRU declaration through
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ
10:18 alla legw

alla
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
ouk ou
Part Neg
hkousan menounge akouO menounge

eis eis
Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
but
I-AM-sayING
NO
NOT
THEY-HEAR INDEED-THEN-SURELY INTO EVERY to-be-sure entire kai eis kai eis
Conj Prep
THE
LAND earth
18 But I say, Have they not heard? Yes verily, their sound went into all the earth, and their words unto the ends of the world.
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
fqoggos autwn phthoggos autos

n_ Nom Sg m pp Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
perata ths peras ho

oikoumenhs oikoumenE
n_ Gen Sg f
OUT-CAME came-out ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
THE
UTTERance
OF-them
AND
INTO THE
ends
OF-THE
rhmata rhEma
n_ Nom Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
THE
declarations OF-them
10:19 alla legw

alla
Conj
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
israhl ouk israEl ou

ni proper Part Neg
egnw ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
but
I-AM-sayING
NO
ISRAEL
NOT
KNEW
BEFORE-most MOSES first eqnei ethnos

n_ Dat Sg n
IS-sayING
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
parazhlwsw parazEloO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ep epi
Prep
ouk ou
Part Neg
ep epi
Prep
eqnei ethnos
n_ Dat Sg n
asunetw asunetos
a_ Dat Sg n
19 But I say, Did not Israel know? First Moses saith, I will provoke you to jealousy by [them that are] no people, [and] by a foolish nation I will anger you.
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-BOILING YOU(p) shall-be-provoking-to-jealousy ye
ON
NOT
NATION
ON NATION onover
AV
parorgiw parorgizO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-INDIGNANTING YOU(p) I-shall-be-vexing ye
10:20 hsaias
Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
apotolma apotolmaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai legei kai legO

eureqhn heuriskO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
NA
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ISAIAH
YET IS-FROM-DARING AND is-very-daring emfanhs emphanEs

a_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
I-WAS-FOUND
IN
THE-ones ME the-ones eperwtwsin eperOtaO

20 But Esaias is very bold, and saith, I was found of them that sought me not; I was made manifest unto them that asked not after me.
mh mE
Part Neg
zhtousin zEteO
egenomhn ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
NO
SEEKING
IN-APPEARed I-BECAME disclosed de de

Conj
to-THE-ones ME to-the-ones olhn holos

a_ Acc Sg f
NO
inquirING inquiring-of
21 But to Israel he saith, All day long I have stretched forth my hands unto a disobedient and gainsaying people.
10:21 pros
pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
israhl legei israEl legO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran exepetasa tas hEmera ekpetannumi ho

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl f
TOWARD YET THE
ISRAEL
He-IS-sayING
WHOLE
THE
DAY
I-OUT-EXPAND I-spread-out
THE

pros pros
Prep
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
apeiqounta apeitheO
kai antilegonta kai antilegO

HANDS
OF-ME
TOWARD PEOPLE
UN-PERSUADING being-stubborn
AND
contradictING
AV
Romans 11
11:1 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
apwsato apOtheO
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
I-AM-sayING
THEN NO
FROM-THRUSTS THE thrusts-away
God
THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
NO
. I say then, Hath God cast away his people? God forbid. For I also am an Israelite, of the seed of Abraham, [of] the tribe of Benjamin.
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai gar egw kai gar egO

Conj Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
israhliths eimi israElitEs eimi

ek ek
Prep
spermatos abraam sperma abraam

MAY-it-BE-BECOMING AND also fulhs phulE

n_ Gen Sg f
for
ISRAELITE
AM
OUT OF-seed
beniamin beniamin
ni proper
OF-tribe
of-BENJAMIN of-Benjamin apwsato apOtheO

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
11:2 ouk
ou
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
laon laos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
NOT
FROM-THRUSTS THE thrusts-away h E

Part
God
THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
WHOM
proegnw proginOskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
hlia Elias
n_ Dat Sg m
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
God hath not cast away his people which he foreknew. Wot ye not what the scripture saith of Elias? how he maketh intercession to God against Israel, saying,
He-BEFORE-KNEW OR he-foreknew
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED IN
ELIAS Elijah
ANY what ?
IS-sayING
THE
WRITing scripture
ws entugcanei tw hOs entugchanO ho

Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
israhl israEl
ni proper
AS
he-IS-pleadING
to-THE
God
DOWN against sou su
OF-THE the
ISRAEL
11:3 kurie
kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
qusiasthria sou thusiastErion su

pp 2 Gen Sg
Master ! Lord !
THE
BEFORE-AVERers OF-YOU prophets upeleifqhn hupoleipO

vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
THEY-FROM-KILL THE they-kill monos monos

a_ Nom Sg m
SACRIFICE-places altars thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-YOU
Lord, they have killed thy prophets, and digged down thine altars; and I am left alone, and they seek my life.
kateskayan kagw kataskaptO kagO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg Con
kai zhtousin kai zEteO

yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-DOWN-DIG AND-I they-dig-down mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
WAS-UNDER-LACKED ONLY was-reserved alone
AND
THEY-ARE-SEEKING THE
soul
OF-ME
11:4 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
crhmatismos katelipon emautw chrEmatismos kataleipO emautou

n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pf 1 Dat Sg m
but
ANY what ?
IS-sayING
to-him
THE
apprisement
I-left
to-MYself
But what saith the answer of God unto him? I have reserved to myself seven thousand men, who have not bowed the knee to [the image of] Baal.
eptakiscilious heptakischilioi
a_ Acc Pl m
andras oitines ouk anEr hostis ou

n_ Acc Pl m pr Nom Pl m Part Neg
ekamyan gonu kamptO gonu

vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Acc Sg n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
baal baal
ni proper
SEVEN-times-THOUSAND MEN seven-thousand
WHO-ANY who-any tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
NOT
BOW
KNEE
to-THE
BAAL
11:5 outws oun

houtOs
Adv
oun
Conj
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
nun nun
Adv
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
leimma leimma
n_ Nom Sg n
kat kata
Prep
ekloghn caritos eklogE charis

thus
THEN AND also
IN
THE
NOW SEASON current era
remnant
according-to choice
OF-grace
Even so then at this present time also there is a remnant according to the election of grace.
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
HAS-BECOME there-has-come-to-be
11:6 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
cariti ouketi charis ouketi

n_ Dat Sg f Adv
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
epei h epei ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
ouketi ouketi
Adv
ginetai ginomai
IF
YET to-grace
NOT-STILL OUT OF-ACTS not-longer of-works
since else
THE
grace
NOT-STILL IS-BECOMING not-longer is-coming-to-be
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
And if by grace, then [is it] no more of works: otherwise grace is no more grace. But if [it be] of works, then is it no more grace: otherwise work is no more work.
grace
AV
Romans 11
11:7 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
epizhtei epizEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
israhl touto israEl houtos

ni proper pd Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
epetucen epitugchanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
ANY what ? eklogh eklogE

n_ Nom Sg f
THEN WHICH
IS-ON-SEEKING ISRAEL is-seeking-for de de

Conj
this
NOT
it-ON-HAPPENED THE she-encountered
YET
What then? Israel hath not obtained that which he seeketh for; but the election hath obtained it, and the rest were blinded
epetucen epitugchanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
epwrwqhsan pOroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
choice
WH
ON-HAPPENED THE encountered-it kaqaper

NA
YET rest rest(p) gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
WERE-CALLOUSED
11:8
kaqws kathOs
Adv
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
according-AS
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN GIVES
to-them them kai wta kai ous

Conj
THE
God
spirit
katanuxews ofqalmous tou katanuxis ophthalmos ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
blepein blepO
vn Pres Act
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
(According as it is written, God hath given them the spirit of slumber, eyes that they should not see, and ears that they should not hear;) unto this day.
n_ Acc Pl n
OF-DOWN-NIGHT of-stupor akouein akouO

vn Pres Act
VIEWers eyes ews ths heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
NO
TO-BE-lookING AND to-be-observing
EARS
OF-THE
NO
shmeron hmeras sEmeron hEmera

Adv n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-HEARING TILL
OF-THE the
toDAY
DAY
11:9 kai dauid legei

kai
Conj
dauid
ni proper
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
genhqhtw ginomai
vm Aor pasD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
trapeza autwn trapeza autos

eis eis
Prep
pagida kai pagis kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
AND
DAVID
IS-sayING
LET-BE-BEING-BECOME THE let-her-be-being-become !
table
OF-them
INTO FASTENer AND trap
And David saith, Let their table be made a snare, and a trap, and a stumblingblock, and a recompence unto them:
eis eis
Prep
qhran thEra
n_ Acc Sg f
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
skandalon kai eis skandalon kai eis

antapodoma autois antapodoma autos

INTO mesh
AND
INTO SNARE
AND
INTO repayment
to-them
11:10 skotisqhtwsan
skotizO
vm Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ofqalmoi autwn ophthalmos autos

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
blepein blepO
vn Pres Act
kai kai
Conj
10 Let their eyes be darkened, that they may not see, and bow down their back alway.
LET-BE-BEING-DARKenED THE let-them-be-being-darkened ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
VIEWers eyes pantos pas

a_ Gen Sg m
OF-them
OF-THE
NO
TO-BE-lookING AND to-be-observing
nwton nOtos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
dia dia
Prep
sugkamyon sugkamptO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
THE
BACK
OF-them
TOGETHER-BOW bow-together-you ! peswsin piptO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
11:11 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
eptaisan ina ptaiO hina

mh mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
I-AM-sayING
THEN NO
THEY-TRIP
THAT THEY-SHOULD-BE-FALLING NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
alla tw alla ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
paraptwmati h paraptOma ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg f
swthria tois sOtEria ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin eis ethnos eis

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
11 I say then, Have they stumbled that they should fall? God forbid: but [rather] through their fall salvation [is come] unto the Gentiles, for to provoke them to jealousy.
but
to-THE
OF-them
BESIDE-FALL offense
THE
SAVing salvation
to-THE
NATIONS
INTO THE
parazhlwsai parazEloO
vn Aor Act
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
TO-BESIDE-BOIL them to-provoke-to-jealousy
11:12 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
paraptwma autwn paraptOma autos

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Pl m
ploutos kosmou ploutos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
htthma hEttEma
n_ Nom Sg n
IF
YET THE
BESIDE-FALL offense posw posos
OF-them
RICHES
OF-SYSTEM AND of-world
THE
DIMINISH discomfiture
12 Now if the fall of them [be] the riches of the world, and the diminishing of them the riches of the Gentiles; how much more their fulness?
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ploutos eqnwn ploutos ethnos

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Pl n
mallon to mallon ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma autwn plErOma autos

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Pl m
pq Dat Sg n
OF-them
RICHES
OF-NATIONS to-how-much RATHER how-much legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
FILLing complement men men

Part
OF-them
11:13 umin
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin ef ethnos epi

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
YET I-AM-sayING
to-THE
NATIONS
ON
as-much-as INDEED THEN AM
13 For I speak to you Gentiles, inasmuch as I am the apostle of the Gentiles, I magnify mine office:
AV
Romans 11
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
apostolos thn apostolos ho

diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
doxazw doxazO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-NATIONS commissioner apostle
THE
THRU-SERVice OF-ME dispensation mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
I-AM-esteemizING I-am-glorifying thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
11:14 ei
ei
Cond
pws pOs
Part Int
parazhlwsw parazEloO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kai swsw kai sOzO

IF
how I-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-BOILING OF-ME somehow I-should-be-provoking-to-jealousy ex ek

Prep
THE
FLESH
AND
I-SHOULD-BE-SAVING should-be-saving
14 If by any means I may provoke to emulation [them which are] my flesh, and might save some of them.
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ANY some
OUT OF-them
11:15 ei
ei
Cond
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
apobolh apobolE
n_ Nom Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
katallagh kosmou katallagE kosmos

tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IF
for
THE
FROM-CASTing OF-them casting-away mh mE

Part Neg
conciliation
OF-SYSTEM ANY of-world what ?
THE
15 For if the casting away of them [be] the reconciling of the world, what [shall] the receiving [of them be], but life from the dead?
proslhmyis proslEpsis
n_ Nom Sg f
ei ei
Cond
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
TOWARD-GETTing IF taking-back
NO
LIFE
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones agia hagios

a_ Nom Sg f
11:16 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
aparch aparchE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
furama phurama
n_ Nom Sg n
kai ei kai ei
Conj Cond
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
riza rhiza
n_ Nom Sg f
IF
YET THE
first-fruit firstfruit kladoi klados

n_ Nom Pl m
HOLY
AND also
THE
KNEADing
AND
IF
THE
ROOT
16 For if the firstfruit [be] holy, the lump [is] also [holy]: and if the root [be] holy, so [are] the branches.
agia hagios
a_ Nom Sg f
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
HOLY
AND also de de
Conj
THE
boughs
11:17 ei
ei
Cond
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kladwn exeklasqhsan su klados ekklaO su

n_ Gen Pl m vi Aor Pas 3 Pl pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
agrielaios agrielaios
n_ Nom Sg f
IF
YET ANY some
OF-THE
boughs
ARE-OUT-BROKEN are-broken-out
YOU
YET FIELD-OLIVE wild-olive ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
wn eimi
enekentrisqhs en egkentrizO en
autois kai sugkoinwnos autos kai sugkoinOnos

pp Dat Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
rizhs rhiza
n_ Gen Sg f
17 And if some of the branches be broken off, and thou, being a wild olive tree, wert graffed in among them, and with them partakest of the root and fatness of the olive tree;
BEING
ARE-IN-PIERCED are-grafted piothtos ths piotEs ho

IN them among elaias elaia

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
TOGETHER-communioner OF-THE joint-participant
ROOT
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
egenou ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 2 Sg
OF-THE
FATness
OF-THE
OLIVE
YOU-BECAME became twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
11:18 mh
mE
Part Neg
katakaucw katakauchaomai
kladwn ei klados ei
n_ Gen Pl m Cond
de de
Conj
katakaucasai katakauchaomai
ou ou
Part Neg
NO
YOU-BE-DOWN-BOASTING OF-THE be-you-vaunting ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
boughs
IF
YET YOU-ARE-DOWN-BOASTING NOT you-are-vaunting riza rhiza

n_ Nom Sg f
18 Boast not against the branches. But if thou boast, thou bearest not the root, but the root thee.
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
rizan rhiza
n_ Acc Sg f
bastazeis alla h bastazO alla ho

vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg f
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
THE
ROOT
ARE-BEARING
but
THE
ROOT
YOU
11:19 ereis
ereO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
oun oun
Conj
exeklasqhsan kladoi ekklaO klados

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl n_ Nom Pl m
ina hina
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
egkentrisqw egkentrizO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
19 Thou wilt say then, The branches were broken off, that I might be graffed in.
YOU-SHALL-BE-declarING THEN ARE-OUT-BROKEN are-broken-out
boughs
THAT I
MAY-BE-IN-PIERCED may-be-grafted-in th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
11:20 kalws th
kalOs
Adv
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
apistia exeklasqhsan apistia ekklaO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
pistei esthkas pistis histEmi

n_ Dat Sg f vi Perf Act 2 Sg
IDEALly
to-THE
UN-BELIEF unbelief
THEY-ARE-OUT-BROKEN YOU they-are-broken-out alla fobou alla phobeO

YET to-THE
BELIEF faith
HAVE-STOOD stand
20 Well; because of unbelief they were broken off, and thou standest by faith. Be not highminded, but fear:
mh mE
Part Neg
uyhla hupsElos
a_ Acc Pl n
fronei phroneO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
NO
HIGH high(p)
YOU-BE-beING-DISPOSed but be-you-being-disposed !
YOU-BE-FEARING be-you-fearing !
AV
Romans 11
11:21 ei
ei
Cond
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kata kata
Prep
fusin phusis
n_ Acc Sg f
kladwn ouk klados ou

efeisato pheidomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
21 For if God spared not the natural branches, [take heed] lest he also spare not thee.
IF
NA
for
NA
THE
God
OF-THE the sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
according-to nature
boughs
NOT
SPARES
mh mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
oude oude
Adv
feisetai pheidomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
no
somehow
NOT-YET OF-YOU neither you oun oun

Conj
He-SHALL-BE-SPARING
11:22 ide
eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
crhstothta kai apotomian qeou chrEstotEs kai apotomia theos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
epi men epi men

Prep Part
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
BE-PERCEIVING THEN kindness be-you-perceiving ! pesontas piptO

AND
FROM-CUTTing severity
OF-God
ON
INDEED THE
apotomia apotomia
n_ Nom Sg f
epi de epi de
Prep Conj
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
crhstoths qeou chrEstotEs theos

ean ean
Cond
22 Behold therefore the goodness and severity of God: on them which fell, severity; but toward thee, goodness, if thou continue in [his] goodness: otherwise thou also shalt be cut off.
ones-FALLING ones-falling epimenhs epimenO

vs Pres Act 2 Sg
FROM-CUTTing ON severity th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YET YOU
kindness
OF-God
IF-EVER
crhstothti epei kai su chrEstotEs epei kai su

n_ Dat Sg f Conj Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ekkophsh ekkoptO
vi 2Fut Pas 2 Sg
YOU-MAY-BE-ON-REMAINING to-THE you-may-be-persisting
kindness
since else
AND also
YOU
SHALL-BE-beING-OUT-STRIKen shall-be-being-hewn-out apistia apistia

n_ Dat Sg f
23 And they also, if they abide not still in unbelief, shall be graffed in: for God is able to graff them in again.
11:23 kakeinoi de
kakeinos
pd Nom Pl m
de
Conj
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
epimenwsin epimenO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND-those also-those
YET IF-EVER NO
THEY-MAY-BE-ON-REMAINING to-THE they-may-be-persisting o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
UN-BELIEF unbelief qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
egkentrisqhsontai egkentrizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
dunatos gar estin dunatos gar eimi

a_ Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
palin egkentrisai palin egkentrizO

Adv vn Aor Act
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-PIERCED ABLE shall-be-being-grafted-in autous autos

pp Acc Pl m
for
IS
THE
God
AGAIN
TO-IN-PIERCE to-graft-in
them
11:24 ei
ei
Cond
gar su gar su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kata kata
Prep
fusin phusis
n_ Acc Sg f
exekophs ekkoptO
vi 2Aor Pas 2 Sg
agrielaiou agrielaios
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
IF
for
YOU
OUT THE of-the
according-to nature
WERE-OUT-STRIKen OF-FIELD-OLIVE AND were-hewn-out wild-olive mallon outoi mallon houtos

Adv pd Nom Pl m
para para
Prep
fusin phusis
n_ Acc Sg f
enekentrisqhs eis egkentrizO eis

kallielaion posw kallielaios posos

n_ Acc Sg f pq Dat Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
24 For if thou wert cut out of the olive tree which is wild by nature, and wert graffed contrary to nature into a good olive tree: how much more shall these, which be the natural [branches], be graffed into their own olive tree?
BESIDE nature
ARE-IN-PIERCED are-grafted
INTO IDEAL-OLIVE cultivated-olive-tree th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
to-how-much RATHER how-much elaia elaia

n_ Dat Sg f
these
THE-ones the-ones
kata kata
Prep
fusin phusis
n_ Acc Sg f
egkentrisqhsontai egkentrizO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
according-to nature in-accord-with
SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-PIERCED to-THE shall-be-being-grafted-in umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
OWN
OLIVE olive-tree musthrion touto mustErion houtos

25 For I would not, brethren, that ye should be ignorant of this mystery, lest ye should be wise in your own conceits; that blindness in part is happened to Israel, until the fulness of the Gentiles be come in.
11:25 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar qelw gar thelO

agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
adelfoi to adelphos ho
n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
NOT
for
I-AM-WILLING YOU(p) ye
WH
TO-BE-UN-KNOWING brothers to-be-being-ignorant brethren !
THE of-the
CLOSE-KEEP secret apo apo

Prep
this
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
hte eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
en
NA
par para
Prep
eautois fronimoi oti pwrwsis heautou phronimos hoti pOrOsis

pf 3 Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE
BESIDE
selves yourselves to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
DISPOSed prudent
that
CALLOUSness FROM PART
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
israhl gegonen israEl ginomai

ni proper vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
acris ou achri hos

Prep pr Gen Sg m
plhrwma twn plErOma ho

n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
to-THE
ISRAEL
HAS-BECOME
UNTIL
WHICH
THE
FILLing complement
OF-THE
NATIONS
eiselqh eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-INTO-COMING may-be-entering
AV
Romans 11
11:26 kai outws pas

kai
Conj
houtOs
Adv
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
israhl swqhsetai israEl sOzO

ni proper vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
AND
thus
EVERY all ek ek
Prep
ISRAEL
SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN
26 And so all Israel shall be saved: as it is written, There shall come out of Sion the Deliverer, and shall turn away ungodliness from Jacob:
hxei hEkO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
siwn siOn
ni proper
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ruomenos rhuomai
apostreyei apostrephO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
asebeias asebeia
n_ Acc Pl f
SHALL-BE-ARRIVING OUT of-SION THE of-Sion apo apo

Prep
One-rescuING one-rescuing
He-SHALL-BE-FROM-TURNING UN-REVERence he-shall-be-turning-away irreverence
iakwb iakOb
ni proper
FROM JACOB
11:27 kai auth

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg f
autois h autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
par para
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
diaqhkh otan diathEkE hotan

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
afelwmai aphaireO
vs 2Aor Mid 1 Sg
27 For this [is] my covenant unto them, when I shall take away their sins.
AND
this
to-them
THE
BESIDE ME
covenant
when-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-FROM-LIFTING whenever I-should-be-eliminating
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f

THE
misses sins
OF-them
11:28 kata
kata
Prep
men men
Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
ecqroi echthros
a_ Nom Pl m
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kata kata
Prep
de de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
according-to INDEED THE
WELL-MESSAGE enemies
28 As concerning the gospel, [they are] enemies for your sakes: but as touching the election, [they are] beloved for the fathers'sakes.
ekloghn agaphtoi dia eklogE agapEtos dia

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pateras patEr
n_ Acc Pl m
choice
beLOVED beloved(p)
THRU THE because-of
FATHERS
11:29 ametamelhta gar ta

ametamelEtos
a_ Nom Pl n
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
carismata kai h charisma kai ho

n_ Nom Pl n Conj t_ Nom Sg f
klhsis klEsis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
29 For the gifts and calling of God [are] without repentance.
UN-after-CARED unregretted
for
THE
grace-effects gracious-gifts
AND
THE
CALLing
OF-THE
God
11:30 wsper gar umeis

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
pote hpeiqhsate tw pote apeitheO ho

Part vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
nun de nun de
Adv Conj
hlehqhte eleaO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
AS-EVEN even-as th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
for
YOU(p) ye
?-when once
UN-PERSUADE are-stubborn
to-THE
God
NOW YET YE-WERE-MERCIED were-shown-mercy
30 For as ye in times past have not believed God, yet have now obtained mercy through their unbelief:
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl m
apeiqeia apeitheia
n_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
OF-these UN-PERSUADableness of-these-ones stubbornness nun hpeiqhsan nun apeitheO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Pl
11:31 outws kai outoi

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
umeterw eleei humeteros eleos

ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg n
ina hina
Conj
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
thus
WH NA
AND also nun nun

Adv
these
NOW UN-PERSUADE to-THE are-stubborn
YOUR-more of-yours
MERCY
THAT AND also
they
31 Even so have these also now not believed, that through your mercy they also may obtain mercy.
nun
elehqwsin eleaO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
NOW
MAY-BE-BEING-MERCIED may-be-being-shown-mercy gar o gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
11:32 sunekleisen
sugkleiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pantas eis pas eis

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
apeiqeian apeitheia
n_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
32 For God hath concluded them all in unbelief, that he might have mercy upon all.
TOGETHER-LOCKS for locks-up-together tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
God
THE
ALL
INTO UN-PERSUADableness THAT stubbornness
pantas elehsh pas eleaO

a_ Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
ALL
He-SHOULD-BE-beING-MERCIFUL-to
11:33 w baqos
O
Inj
bathos
n_ Nom Sg n
ploutou kai sofias kai gnwsews qeou ploutos kai sophia kai gnOsis theos
n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
ws anexeraunhta hOs anexeraunEtos

Adv a_ Nom Pl n
o!
DEPTH
OF-RICHES
AND
WISDOM
AND
KNOWledge
OF-God
AS how
UN-OUT-SEARCHable inscrutable
33 . O the depth of the riches both of the wisdom and knowledge of God! how unsearchable [are] his judgments, and his ways past
AV
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
krimata autou krima autos

kai anexicniastoi ai kai anexichniastos ho

Conj a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl f
odoi hodos
n_ Nom Pl f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
finding out!
THE
JUDGments
OF-Him
AND
UN-OUT-TRACEable untraceable kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
WAYS
OF-Him
11:34 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
gar egnw gar ginOskO

noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
sumboulos sumboulos
n_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
34 For who hath known the mind of the Lord? or who hath been his counsellor?
ANY who ? egeneto ginomai

vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
for
KNEW
MIND
OF-Master of-Lord
OR
ANY who ?
TOGETHER-COUNSELor OF-Him adviser
BECAME
11:35 h
E
Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
proedwken autw prodidOmi autos

kai antapodoqhsetai autw kai antapodidOmi autos

Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
35 Or who hath first given to him, and it shall be recompensed unto him again?
OR
ANY who ? ex ek
Prep
BEFORE-GIVES gives-first autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
to-Him
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-repaid it-shall-be-being-repaid kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
to-him
11:36 oti
hoti
Conj
kai di kai dia

Conj Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
that OUT OF-Him seeing-that h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
AND
THRU Him through
AND
INTO Him
THE
ALL
to-Him
36 For of him, and through him, and to him, [are] all things: to whom [be] glory for ever. Amen.
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas amhn aiOn amEn

n_ Acc Pl m Hebrew
THE
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
AMEN
AV
Romans 12
12:1 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi dia adelphos dia

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
oiktirmwn tou oiktirmos ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING THEN YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye parasthsai paristEmi

vn Aor Act
brothers brethren !
THRU THE through zwsan zaO
PITIES
OF-THE
WH WH
God
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
swmata umwn sOma humeis

qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
agian hagios
a_ Acc Sg f
tw qew
. I beseech you therefore, brethren, by the mercies of God, that ye present your bodies a living sacrifice, holy, acceptable unto God, [which is] your reasonable service.
TO-BESIDE-STAND THE to-present

WH
BODIES
NA
OF-YOU(p) SACRIFICE LIVING of-ye

NA
HOLY
euareston
NA
euareston euarestos
a_ Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
logikhn latreian logikos latreia

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
WELL-PLEASing to-THE
God
THE
logical
DIVINE-SERVICE OF-YOU(p) of-ye toutw alla houtos alla

pd Dat Sg m Conj
2
12:2 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
suschmatizesqe suschEmatizO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
NO
BE-YE-beING-TOGETHER-FIGURED to-THE be-ye-being-configured ! th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
eon
this
but
metamorfousqe metamorphoO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
anakainwsei tou anakainOsis ho

noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dokimazein dokimazO
vn Pres Act
And be not conformed to this world: but be ye transformed by the renewing of your mind, that ye may prove what [is] that good, and acceptable, and perfect, will of God.
BE-YE-beING-after-FORMED to-THE be-ye-being-transformed ! umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
UP-NEWing renewing qelhma thelEma

n_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
MIND
INTO THE
TO-BE-testING
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agaqon agathos
a_ Nom Sg n
kai euareston kai euarestos

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
kai kai
Conj
YOU(p) ye
ANY what ?
THE
WILL
OF-THE
God
THE
GOOD
AND
WELL-PLEASing AND
teleion teleios
a_ Nom Sg n
mature perfect
12:3 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos ths charis ho

doqeishs didOmi
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-sayING
for
THRU THE through umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
grace
THE
BEING-GIVEN
to-ME
to-EVERY
THE
onti eimi
en en
Prep
mh mE
Part Neg
uperfronein huperphroneO
vn Pres Act
par para
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
For I say, through the grace given unto me, to every man that is among you, not to think [of himself] more highly than he ought to think; but to think soberly, according as God hath dealt to every man the measure of faith.
BEING one-being fronein phroneO

vn Pres Act
IN YOU(p) among ye
NO
TO-BE-beING-OVER-DISPOSed BESIDE WHICH to-be-overweening beyond eis eis

Prep
it-IS-BINDING
alla fronein alla phroneO

Conj vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swfronein sOphroneO
vn Pres Act
ekastw ws hekastos hOs

a_ Dat Sg m Adv
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED but
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED INTO THE
TO-BE-beING-sane to-EACH
AS
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
emerisen metron pistews merizO metron pistis

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
THE
God
PARTS
MEASURE OF-BELIEF of-faith eni heis

n_ Dat Sg n
12:4 kaqaper
kathaper
Adv
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
swmati polla sOma polus

n_ Dat Sg n a_ Acc Pl n
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN for even-as melh melos

n_ Nom Pl n
IN
ONE
BODY
MANY
MEMBERS WE-ARE-HAVING THE
YET
For as we have many members in one body, and all members have not the same office:
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ou ou
Part Neg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
praxin praxis
n_ Acc Sg f
MEMBERS ALL
NOT
THE
SAME
IS-HAVING
PRACTISing function esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
12:5 outws oi
houtOs
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
cristw to christos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
So we, [being] many, are one body in Christ, and every one members one of another.
thus
THE
MANY
ONE
BODY
WE-ARE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
THE
YET
kaq kata
Prep
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
allhlwn allElOn
pc Gen Pl m
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
DOWN ONE according-to
OF-one-another MEMBERS
AV
Romans 12
12:6 econtes
echO
de de
Conj
carismata kata charisma kata

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
HAVING
YET grace-effects gracious-gifts profhteian prophEteia

n_ Acc Sg f
according-to THE in-accord-with kata kata

Prep
grace
THE
BEING-GIVEN
to-US
Having then gifts differing according to the grace that is given to us, whether prophecy, [let us prophesy] according to the proportion of faith;
diafora eite diaphoros eite

a_ Acc Pl n Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
analogian ths analogia ho

pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
excelling
IF-BESIDES BEFORE-AVERment according-to THE whether prophecy in-accord-with diakonian diakonia

n_ Acc Sg f
UP-saying analogy eite eite

Conj
OF-THE
BELIEF faith en en
Prep
7
12:7 eite
eite
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
didaskwn didaskO
Or ministry, [let us wait] on [our] ministering: or he that teacheth, on teaching;
IF-BESIDES THRU-SERVice IN or dispensing th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
THE
THRU-SERVice IF-BESIDES THE dispensation or
TEACHING one-teaching
IN
didaskalia didaskalia
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
TEACHing
12:8 eite
eite
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
parakalwn parakaleO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paraklhsei o paraklEsis ho
metadidous metadidOmi
en en
Prep
IF-BESIDES THE or aplothti haplotEs

n_ Dat Sg f
BESIDE-CALLING one-entreating
IN
THE
BESIDE-CALLing entreaty o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
WITH-GIVING one-sharing en en
Prep
IN
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
proistamenos en proistEmi en
vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m Prep
spoudh spoudE
n_ Dat Sg f
elewn eleaO
Or he that exhorteth, on exhortation: he that giveth, [let him do it] with simplicity; he that ruleth, with diligence; he that sheweth mercy, with cheerfulness.
UN-COMPOUND THE generosity ilarothti hilarotEs

n_ Dat Sg f
BEFORE-STANDING one-presiding
IN
DILIGENCE THE
one-beING-MERCIFUL IN one-being-merciful
GLEE
12:9 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
anupokritos apostugountes to anupokritos apostugeO ho

a_ Nom Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
ponhron kollwmenoi ponEros kollaO

a_ Acc Sg n vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
THE
LOVE
UN-hypocritical unfeigned
FROM-DETESTING abhorring
THE
wicked
beING-JOINED clinging
[Let] love be without dissimulation. Abhor that which is evil; cleave to that which is good.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
agaqw agathos
a_ Dat Sg n
to-THE
GOOD
12:10 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
filadelfia philadelphia
n_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
allhlous filostorgoi allElOn philostorgos

pc Acc Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
timh timE
n_ Dat Sg f
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
to-THE
FOND-brotherness INTO one-another brotherly-affection
FOND-NATURAL-AFFECTIONS to-THE fondly-affectionate
VALUE honor
one-another
10 [Be] kindly affectioned one to another with brotherly love; in honour preferring one another;
prohgoumenoi proEgeomai
BEFORE-LEADING deeming-first
12:11 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
spoudh spoudE
n_ Dat Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
oknhroi tw oknEros ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati zeontes pneuma zeO

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
11 Not slothful in business; fervent in spirit; serving the Lord;
to-THE
DILIGENCE NO not
SLOTHful
to-THE
spirit
BOILING being-fervent
to-THE
Master Lord
douleuontes douleuO
SLAVING
12:12 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
cairontes chairO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qliyei thlipsis
n_ Dat Sg f
upomenontes hupomenO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
12 Rejoicing in hope; patient in tribulation; continuing instant in prayer;
to-THE
EXPECTATION JOYING rejoicing
to-THE the
CONSTRICTION UNDER-REMAINING to-THE affliction enduring
proseuch proskarterountes proseuchE proskartereO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
prayer
perseverING
AV
Romans 12
12:13 tais
ho
t_ Dat Pl f
creiais twn chreia ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
koinwnountes thn koinOneO ho

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
filoxenian diwkontes philoxenia diOkO

13 Distributing to the necessity of saints; given to hospitality.
to-THE
needs
OF-THE
HOLY-ones communionING saints contributing

NA
THE
FOND-LODGE hospitality kai mh kai mE

Conj
CHASING pursuing
14 Bless them which persecute you: bless, and curse not.
12:14 eulogeite tous

eulogeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
diwkontas diOkO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eulogeite eulogeO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
Part Neg
BE-YE-blessING THE be-ye-blessing ! katarasqe kataraomai

ones-CHASING ones-persecuting
YOU(p) ye
BE-YE-blessING AND be-ye-blessing !
NO
BE-DOWN-EXECRATING be-ye-cursing !
12:15 cairein
chairO
vn Pres Act
meta cairontwn meta chairO

Prep vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
klaiein klaiO
vn Pres Act
meta klaiontwn meta klaiO

Prep vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
15 Rejoice with them that do rejoice, and weep with them that weep.
TO-BE-JOYING WITH to-be-rejoicing
ones-JOYING ones-rejoicing eis eis

Prep
TO-BE-LAMENTING WITH
ones-LAMENTING ones-lamenting ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
12:16 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
allhlous fronountes allElOn phroneO

pc Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
uyhla hupsElos
a_ Acc Pl n
fronountes phroneO
THE
SAME
INTO one-another
beING-DISPOSed-to NO
THE
HIGH high(p)
beING-DISPOSed-to
16 [Be] of the same mind one toward another. Mind not high things, but condescend to men of low estate. Be not wise in your own conceits.
alla tois alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
tapeinois sunapagomenoi tapeinos sunapagO

a_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
fronimoi par phronimos para

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
but
to-THE
LOW humble(p)
beING-TOGETHER-FROM-LED NO being-led-away-with
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming !
DISPOSed prudent
BESIDE
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
selves yourselves
12:17 mhdeni
mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
anti anti
Prep
kakou kakos
a_ Gen Sg n
apodidontes pronooumenoi kala apodidOmi pronoeO kalos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl n
enwpion enOpion
Adv
17 Recompense to no man evil for evil. Provide things honest in the sight of all men.
to-NO-YET-ONE EVIL to-no-one pantwn anqrwpwn pas anthrOpos

INSTEAD OF-EVIL
FROM-GIVING rendering
BEFORE-MINDING making-provision
IDEAL ideal(p)
IN-VIEW in-the-sight-of
OF-ALL all
humans
12:18 ei
ei
Cond
dunaton to dunatos ho
a_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
meta pantwn anqrwpwn eirhneuontes meta pas anthrOpos eirEneuO

Prep a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
IF
ABLE possible
THE
OUT OF-YOU(p) WITH of-ye
18 If it be possible, as much as lieth in you, live peaceably with all men.
ALL
humans
beING-at-PEACE
12:19 mh
mE
Part Neg
eautous ekdikountes agaphtoi alla dote heautou ekdikeO agapEtos alla didOmi
pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Voc Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
NO
selves yourselves gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
OUT-JUSTING avenging gar emoi gar egO

Conj
beLOVED beloved(p) !
but
PLACE
to-THE
19 Dearly beloved, avenge not yourselves, but [rather] give place unto wrath: for it is written, Vengeance [is] mine; I will repay, saith the Lord.
orgh orgE
n_ Dat Sg f
ekdikhsis egw ekdikEsis egO

n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Nom Sg
antapodwsw legei antapodidOmi legO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pp 1 Dat Sg
INDIGNATION it-HAS-been-WRITTEN for
to-ME
SHALL-BE-repayING
IS-sayING
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
Master Lord
12:20 alla ean

alla
Conj
ean
Cond
peina peinaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ecqros echthros
a_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ywmize psOmizO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
but
IF-EVER MAY-BE-HUNGERING THE
enemy
OF-YOU
BE-YOU-MORSELizING him be-you-giving-the-morsel ! anqrakas anthrax

n_ Acc Pl m
20 Therefore if thine enemy hunger, feed him; if he thirst, give him drink: for in so doing thou shalt heap coals of fire on his head.
ean ean
Cond
diya dipsaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
potize potizO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gar poiwn gar poieO

IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-THIRSTING BE-YOU-DRINKizING him be-you-giving-to-drink !
this
for
DOING in-doing
EMBERS
AV
puros pur
n_ Gen Sg n
swreuseis sOreuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f

OF-FIRE
YOU-SHALL-BE-HEAPING ON
THE
HEAD
OF-him
12:21 mh
mE
Part Neg
nikw nikaO
vm Pres Pas 2 Sg
upo hupo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
kakou kakos
a_ Gen Sg n
alla nika alla nikaO

en en
Prep
21 Be not overcome of evil, but overcome evil with good.
NO
BE-YOU-beING-CONQUERED UNDER THE be-you-being-conquered ! by agaqw agathos

a_ Dat Sg n
EVIL
but
BE-YOU-CONQUERING IN be-you-conquering !
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
THE
GOOD
THE
EVIL
AV
Romans 13
13:1 pasa
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Nom Sg f
exousiais uperecousais upotassesqw exousia huperechO hupotassO

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Act Dat Pl f vm Pres Mid 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

EVERY
soul
to-authorities
beING-superior
LET-BE-beING-UNDER-SET NOT let-her-be-being-subject ! de de

Conj
for
IS there-is tetagmenai tassO

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl f
. Let every soul be subject unto the higher powers. For there is no power but of God: the powers that be are ordained of God.
exousia ei exousia ei
n_ Nom Sg f Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
upo hupo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
ousai eimi
vp Pres vxx Nom Pl f
upo hupo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
authority
IF
NO
UNDER God
THE
YET BEING ones-being
UNDER God
HAVING-been-SET
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THEY-ARE are
13:2 wste
hOste
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
antitassomenos th antitassomai ho
vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
exousia th exousia ho
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
one-INSTEAD-SETTING one-resisting de de
Conj
to-THE the
authority
to-THE the
OF-THE
God
Whosoever therefore resisteth the power, resisteth the ordinance of God: and they that resist shall receive to themselves damnation.
diatagh anqesthken oi diatagE anthistEmi ho

n_ Dat Sg f vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Pl m
anqesthkotes eautois anthistEmi heautou

vp Perf Act Nom Pl m pf 3 Dat Pl m
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
lhmyontai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
prescription mandate
HAS-with-STOOD has-withstood
THE-ones the-ones
YET HAVING-with-STOOD having-withstood eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
to-selves JUDGment SHALL-BE-GETTING to-themselves tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
13:3 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar arcontes ouk gar archOn ou

Conj n_ Nom Pl m Part Neg
fobos phobos
n_ Nom Sg m
agaqw agathos
a_ Dat Sg n
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
alla alla
Conj
THE
for
chiefs magistrates qeleis thelO

vi Pres Act 2 Sg
NOT
ARE
FEAR
to-THE
GOOD
ACT
but
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kakw kakos
a_ Dat Sg n
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
fobeisqai phobeO
vn Pres midD/pasD
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exousian to exousia ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon agathos
a_ Acc Sg n
For rulers are not a terror to good works, but to the evil. Wilt thou then not be afraid of the power? do that which is good, and thou shalt have praise of the same:
to-THE
EVIL
YOU-ARE-WILLING YET NO
TO-BE-FEARING THE
authority
THE
GOOD
poiei poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai exeis kai echO

epainon ex epainos ek
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
YOU-BE-DOING AND be-you-doing !
YOU-SHALL-BE-HAVING ON-PRAISE OUT OF-her applause of-herit estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
13:4 qeou
theos
n_ Gen Sg m
gar diakonos gar diakonos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon ean agathos ean

a_ Acc Sg n Cond
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-God
for
THRU-SERVitor it-IS servant fobou phobeO

to-YOU
INTO THE
GOOD
IF-EVER YET THE
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
poihs poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gar eikh gar eikE

Conj Adv
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
macairan forei machaira phoreO

For he is the minister of God to thee for good. But if thou do that which is evil, be afraid; for he beareth not the sword in vain: for he is the minister of God, a revenger to [execute] wrath upon him that doeth evil.
EVIL
YOU-MAY-BE-DOING BE-FEARING be-you-fearing ! gar diakonos gar diakonos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
for
SIMULATEly THE feignedly orghn orgE

n_ Acc Sg f
sword
it-IS-wearING
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ekdikos ekdikos
a_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
OF-God
for
THRU-SERVitor it-IS servant
OUT-JUSTer INTO INDIGNATION to-THE-one THE avenger to-the-one
EVIL
prassonti prassO
PRACTISING committing
13:5 dio
dio
Conj
anagkh anagkE
n_ Nom Sg f
upotassesqai hupotassO
vn Pres Mid
ou ou
Part Neg
monon dia monon dia

Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
alla alla
Conj
Wherefore [ye] must needs be subject, not only for wrath, but also for conscience sake.
THRU-WHICH necessity wherefore kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
TO-BE-beING-UNDER-SET NOT to-be-being-subject
ONLY
THRU THE because-of
INDIGNATION but
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
suneidhsin suneidEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND also
THRU THE because-of touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
conscience
13:6 dia
dia
Prep
gar kai forous teleite gar kai phoros teleO

Conj Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
leitourgoi gar qeou leitourgos gar theos

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
for
AND also
taxes
YE-ARE-FINISHING officials ye-are-settling ministers
for
OF-God
THEY-ARE
For for this cause pay ye tribute also: for they are God's ministers, attending continually upon this very thing.
AV
Romans 13
eis eis
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
proskarterountes proskartereO
INTO SAME this same-thing
perseverING being-perpetuated pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
13:7 apodote
apodidOmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
ofeilas tw opheilE ho
n_ Acc Pl f t_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
foron phoros
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
foron phoros
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-YE-FROM-GIVING to-ALL be-ye-rendering ! tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
THE
OWED dues telos telos

n_ Acc Sg n
to-THE-one THE to-the-one tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
tax
THE
tax
. Render therefore to all their dues: tribute to whom tribute [is due]; custom to whom custom; fear to whom fear; honour to whom honour.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE-one THE to-the-one tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
FINISH tribute timhn timE

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
FINISH tribute timhn timE

n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE-one THE to-the-one
FEAR
THE
FEAR
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
to-THE-one THE to-the-one
VALUE honor mhden mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
THE
VALUE honor ei ei
Cond
13:8 mhdeni
mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
ofeilete opheilO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
allhlous agapan allElOn agapaO

pc Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-NO-YET-ONE NO-YET-ONE BE-YE-OWING IF to-no-one anything be-ye-owing ! gar agapwn gar agapaO
NO
THE
one-another
TO-BE-LOVING THE-one the
Owe no man any thing, but to love one another: for he that loveth another hath fulfilled the law.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
peplhrwken plEroO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
for
LOVING one-loving
THE
DIFFERENT-one LAW different-one moiceuseis moicheuO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg
HAS-FILLED has-fulfilled ou ou
Part Neg
13:9 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar ou gar ou
Conj Part Neg
foneuseis phoneuO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
THE
for
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-ADULTERING NOT you-shall-be-committing-adultery epiqumhseis epithumeO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-MURDERING NOT
kleyeis kleptO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
kai ei kai ei
Conj Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
etera heteros
a_ Nom Sg f
entolh en entolE en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
YOU-SHALL-BE-stealING NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-ON-FEELING AND you-shall-be-coveting en en

Prep
IF
ANY
DIFFERENT direction precept agaphseis agapaO

vi Fut Act 2 Sg
IN
For this, Thou shalt not commit adultery, Thou shalt not kill, Thou shalt not steal, Thou shalt not bear false witness, Thou shalt not covet; and if [there be] any other commandment, it is briefly comprehended in this saying, namely, Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw anakefalaioutai houtos anakephalaioO

pd Dat Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
saying
this
IS-UP-HEADING it-is-being-summed-up
IN
THE

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg

Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
NIGH-one associate
OF-YOU
AS
YOURself
13:10 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
plhsion kakon plEsion kakos

Adv a_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
ergazetai ergazomai
plhrwma oun plErOma oun

n_ Nom Sg n Conj
10 Love worketh no ill to his neighbour: therefore love [is] the fulfilling of the law.
THE
LOVE
to-THE
NIGH-one associate
EVIL
NOT
IS-ACTING is-working
FILLing complement
THEN
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-LAW
THE
LOVE
13:11 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
eidotes eidO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti wra hoti hOra

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
hdh EdE
Adv
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ex ek
Prep
AND also upnou hupnos

n_ Gen Sg m
this
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-aware-of
SEASON era
that
HOUR
ALREADY YOU(p) ye ote hote

Adv
OUT
11 . And that, knowing the time, that now [it is] high time to awake out of sleep: for now [is] our salvation nearer than when we believed.
egerqhnai egeirO
vn Aor Pas
nun gar egguteron hmwn nun gar egguteron hemeis

Adv Conj Adv pp 1 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
swthria h sOtEria E
n_ Nom Sg f Part
OF-SLEEP
TO-BE-ROUSED NOW for
NEARER
OF-US
THE
SAVing salvation
OR when than
episteusamen pisteuO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-BELIEVE
AV
13:12 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
nux nux
n_ Nom Sg f
proekoyen h prokoptO ho
de de
Conj
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
hggiken eggizO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
apoqwmeqa apotithEmi
vs 2Aor Mid 1 Pl
THE
NIGHT
progressES
THE
YET DAY
HAS-NEARED WE-SHOULD-BE-FROM-PLACING has-drawn-near we-should-be-putting-off de de

Conj
12 The night is far spent, the day is at hand: let us therefore cast off the works of darkness, and let us put on the armour of light.
oun oun
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
skotous enduswmeqa skotos enduO

n_ Gen Sg n vs Aor Mid 1 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
opla hoplon
n_ Acc Pl n
THEN THE
ACTS
OF-THE
DARKness
WE-SHOULD-BE-IN-SLIPPING should-be-putting-on
YET
THE
IMPLEMENTS
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
LIGHT
13:13 ws en
hOs
Adv
en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
euschmonws peripathswmen euschEmonOs peripateO

Adv vs Aor Act 1 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
kwmois kOmos
n_ Dat Pl m
kai kai
Conj
AS
IN
DAY
WELL-FIGUREly respectably koitais koitE

n_ Dat Pl f
WE-SHOULD-BE-ABOUT-TREADING NO we-should-be-walking eridi eris

n_ Dat Sg f
to-REVELries AND
13 Let us walk honestly, as in the day; not in rioting and drunkenness, not in chambering and wantonness, not in strife and envying.
meqais methE
n_ Dat Pl f
mh mE
Part Neg
kai aselgeiais mh kai aselgeia mE

Conj n_ Dat Pl f Part Neg
kai zhlw kai zElos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
DRUNKennesses NO drunkenness(p)
to-LIE-ings AND to-chambering(p)
to-wantonnesses wantonness(p) ihsoun iEsous
NO
to-STRIFE AND
to-BOILing jealousy sarkos sarx

n_ Gen Sg f
14 But put ye on the Lord Jesus Christ, and make not provision for the flesh, to [fulfil] the lusts [thereof].
13:14 alla endusasqe ton

alla
Conj
enduO
vm Aor Mid 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
criston kai ths christos kai ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Acc Sg m
but
IN-SLIP-YE put-on-ye ! mh mE
Part Neg
THE
Master Lord eis eis

Prep
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AND
OF-THE
FLESH
pronoian pronoia
n_ Acc Sg f
poieisqe poieO
vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
epiqumias epithumia
n_ Acc Pl f
BEFORE-MINDing NO provision
INTO ON-FEELings lusts
AV
Romans 14
14:1 ton
ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE de de G1161 Conj YET asqenounta asthenounta G770 vp Pres Act Acc Sg m one-beING-UN-FIRM being-infirm th tE G3588 t_ Dat Sg f to-THE pistei pistei G4102 n_ Dat Sg f BELIEF faith proslambanesqe proslambanesthe G4355 vm Pres Mid 2 Pl BE-YE-TOWARD-GETTING be-ye-taking-to-yourselves ! mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO eis eis G1519 Prep INTO
1
. Him that is weak in the faith receive ye, [but] not to doubtful disputations.
diakriseis diakriseis G1253 n_ Acc Pl f THRU-JUDGing discrimination(p)
dialogismwn dialogismOn G1261 n_ Gen Pl m OF-THRU-accounts of-reasonings men men G3303 Part INDEED pisteuei pisteuei G4100 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-BELIEVING fagein phagein G5315 vn 2Aor Act TO-BE-EATING panta panta G3956 a_ Acc Pl n ALL all-things o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the de de G1161 Conj YET asqenwn asthenOn G770 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m beING-UN-FIRM one-being-infirm
2
14:2 os
hos G3739 pr Nom Sg m WHO
For one believeth that he may eat all things: another, who is weak, eateth herbs.
lacana lachana G3001 n_ Acc Pl n GREENS
esqiei esthiei G2068 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-EATING
14:3 o
esqiwn esthiOn G2068 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m one-EATING one-eating
ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE-one the-one
esqionta esthionta G2068 vp Pres Act Acc Sg m EATING
exouqeneitw exoutheneitO G1848 vm Pres Act 3 Sg LET-him-BE-scornING let-him-be-scorning !
Let not him that eateth despise him that eateth not; and let not him which eateth not judge him that eateth: for God hath received him.
o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one qeos theos G2316 n_ Nom Sg m God
esqiwn esthiOn G2068 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m EATING
ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE-one the-one
esqionta esthionta G2068 vp Pres Act Acc Sg m EATING
krinetw krinetO G2919 vm Pres Act 3 Sg LET-him-BE-JUDGING let-him-be-judging !
proselabeto proselabeto G4355 vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg TOWARD-GOT took-to-himself ei ei G1488 vi Pres vxx 2 Sg ARE o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE krinwn krinOn G2919 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m one-JUDGING one-judging piptei piptei G4098 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-FALLING is-falling allotrion allotrion G245 a_ Acc Sg m other-placed another's oikethn oiketEn G3610 n_ Acc Sg m domestic-(servant) domestic de de G1161 Conj YET
4
14:4 su
su G4771 pp 2 Nom Sg YOU
tis tis G5101 pi Nom Sg m ANY who ?
Who art thou that judgest another man's servant? to his own master he standeth or falleth. Yea, he shall be holden up: for God is able to make him stand.
idiw idiO G2398 a_ Dat Sg m OWN
kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m Master
sthkei stEkei G4739 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-STANDING-firm he-is-standing o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE
h E G2228 Part OR
staqhsetai stathEsetai G2476 vi Fut Pas 3 Sg he-SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD he-shall-be-being-made-to-stand
dunatos dunatos G1415 a_ Nom Sg m ABLE
qeos theos G2316 n_ Nom Sg m God
sthsai stEsai G2476 vn Aor Act TO-STAND to-make-stand
14:5 os
hos G3739 pr Nom Sg m WHO
krinei krinei G2919 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-JUDGING is-deciding en en G1722 Prep IN
par par G3844 Prep BESIDE
os hos G3739 pr Nom Sg m WHO
krinei krinei G2919 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-JUDGING is-deciding
One man esteemeth one day above another: another esteemeth every day [alike]. Let every man be fully persuaded in his own mind.
pasan pasan G3956 a_ Acc Sg f EVERY
ekastos hekastos G1538 a_ Nom Sg m EACH each-one
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m THE
idiw idiO G2398 a_ Dat Sg m OWN
noi noi G3563 n_ Dat Sg m MIND
plhroforeisqw plErophoreisthO G4135 vm Pres Pas 3 Sg LET-BE-beING-FULL-worn let-him-be-being-fully-assured ! fronei phronei G5426 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-beING-DISPOSed is-being-disposed-to-it kai kai G2532 Conj AND o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one
6
14:6 o
fronwn phronOn G5426 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m one-beING-DISPOSed-to one-being-disposed-to
kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m to-Master to-Lord
He that regardeth the day, regardeth [it] unto the Lord; and he that regardeth not the day, to the Lord he doth not regard [it]. He that eateth,
Translation : AV
Romans 14
mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO fronwn phronOn G5426 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m beING-DISPOSed-to thn tEn G3588 t_ Acc Sg f THE hmeran hEmeran G2250 n_ Acc Sg f DAY kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m to-Master to-Lord ou hou G3756 Part Neg NOT fronei phronei G5426 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-beING-DISPOSed he-is-being-disposed-to-it qew theO G2316 n_ Dat Sg m God kai kai G2532 Conj AND o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one
eateth to the Lord, for he giveth God thanks; and he that eateth not, to the Lord he eateth not, and giveth God thanks.
esqiwn esthiOn G2068 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m EATING one-eating mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO
esqiei esthiei G2068 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-EATING is-eating ouk ouk G3756 Part Neg NOT
eucaristei eucharistei G2168 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-thankING
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m to-THE the
esqiwn esthiOn G2068 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m EATING
esqiei esthiei G2068 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-EATING
eucaristei eucharistei G2168 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-thankING
14:7 oudeis
oudeis G3762 a_ Nom Sg m NOT-YET-ONE not-one apoqnhskei apothnEskei G599 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-FROM-DYING is-dying
eautw heautO G1438 pf 3 Dat Sg m to-self to-himself
zh zE G2198 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-LIVING
oudeis oudeis G3762 a_ Nom Sg m NOT-YET-ONE no-one
eautw heautO G1438 pf 3 Dat Sg m to-self to-himself
For none of us liveth to himself, and no man dieth to himself.
14:8 ean
zwmen zOmen G2198 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-MAY-BE-LIVING
kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m Master Lord ean ean G1437 Cond IF-EVER
zwmen zOmen G2198 vi Pres Act 1 Pl WE-ARE-LIVING
For whether we live, we live unto the Lord; and whether we die, we die unto the Lord: whether we live therefore, or die, we are the Lord's.
apoqnhskwmen apothnEskOmen G599 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING we-may-be-dying ean ean G1437 Cond IF-EVER te te G5037 Part BESIDES
kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m Master Lord
apoqnhskomen apothnEskomen G599 vi Pres Act 1 Pl WE-ARE-FROM-DYING we-are-dying kuriou kuriou G2962 n_ Gen Sg m Master Lord
zwmen zOmen G2198 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-MAY-BE-LIVING
apoqnhskwmen apothnEskOmen G599 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING we-may-be-dying gar gar G1063 Conj for cristos christos G5547 n_ Nom Sg m ANOINTED Christ
esmen esmen G2070 vi Pres vxx 1 Pl WE-ARE
14:9 eis
eis G1519 Prep INTO
apeqanen apethanen G599 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg FROM-DIED died
anesth anestE G450 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg UP-STOOD rose
anezhsen anezEsen G326 vi Aor Act 3 Sg UP-LIVES revives
For to this end Christ both died, and rose, and revived, that he might be Lord both of the dead and living.
nekrwn nekrOn G3498 a_ Gen Pl m OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones
zwntwn zOntOn G2198 vp Pres Act Gen Pl m LIVING-ones of-ones-living
kurieush kurieusE G2961 vs Aor Act 3 Sg He-SHOULD-BE-masterING he-should-be-being-lord ton ton G3588 t_ Acc Sg m THE adelfon adelphon G80 n_ Acc Sg m brother sou sou G4675 pp 2 Gen Sg OF-YOU h E G2228 Part OR kai kai G2532 Conj AND also su su G4771 pp 2 Nom Sg YOU
10 But why dost thou judge brother? or why dost thou at nought thy brother? for shall all stand before judgment seat of Christ.
14:10 su
su G4771 pp 2 Nom Sg YOU
krineis krineis G2919 vi Pres Act 2 Sg ARE-JUDGING
thy set we the
exouqeneis exoutheneis G1848 vi Pres Act 2 Sg ARE-scornING
adelfon adelphon G80 n_ Acc Sg m brother
sou sou G4675 pp 2 Gen Sg OF-YOU
pantes pantes G3956 a_ Nom Pl m ALL
parasthsomeqa parastEsometha G3936 vi Fut midD 1 Pl WE-SHALL-BE-beING-BESIDE-STOOD we-shall-be-being-presented
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg n to-THE
bhmati bEmati G968 n_ Dat Sg n platform dais
cristou christou G5547 n_ Gen Sg m ANOINTED Christ
Translation : AV
Romans 14
14:11 gegraptai
gegraptai G1125 vi Perf Pas 3 Sg it-HAS-been-WRITTEN gar gar G1063 Conj for zw zO G2198 vi Pres Act 1 Sg AM-LIVING egw egO G1473 pp 1 Nom Sg I legei legei G3004 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-sayING kurios kurios G2962 n_ Nom Sg m Master Lord oti hoti G3754 Conj that emoi emoi G1698 pp 1 Dat Sg to-ME
11 For it is written, [As] I live, saith the Lord, every knee shall bow to me, and every tongue shall confess to God.
kamyei kampsei G2578 vi Fut Act 3 Sg SHALL-BE-BOWING
pan pan G3956 a_ Nom Sg n EVERY
gonu gonu G1119 n_ Nom Sg n KNEE
pasa pasa G3956 a_ Nom Sg f EVERY
glwssa glOssa G1100 n_ Nom Sg f TONGUE
exomologhsetai exomologEsetai G1843 vi Fut Mid 3 Sg SHALL-BE-OUT-avowING shall-be-acclaiming
14:12 ara
ara G686 Part CONSEQUENTLY
ekastos hekastos G1538 a_ Nom Sg m EACH
eautou heautou G1438 pf 3 Gen Sg m self himself
logon logon G3056 n_ Acc Sg m saying account
dwsei dOsei G1325 vi Fut Act 3 Sg SHALL-BE-GIVING
12 So then every one of us shall give account of himself to God.
14:13 mhketi
mEketi G3371 Adv NO-NOT-STILL by-no-means-still to to G3588 t_ Acc Sg n THE mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO
krinwmen krinOmen G2919 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-SHOULD-BE-JUDGING
krinate krinate G2919 vm Aor Act 2 Pl JUDGE-YE decide-ye !
mallon mallon G3123 Adv RATHER
13 Let us not therefore judge one another any more: but judge this rather, that no man put a stumblingblock or an occasion to fall in [his] brother's way.
tiqenai tithenai G5087 vn Pres Act TO-PLACE
proskomma proskomma G4348 n_ Acc Sg n TOWARD-STRIKE stumbling-block
adelfw adelphO G80 n_ Dat Sg m brother
h E G2228 Part OR
skandalon skandalon G4625 n_ Acc Sg n SNARE
14:14 oida
oida G1492 vi Perf Act 1 Sg I-HAVE-PERCEIVED
pepeismai pepeismai G3982 vi Perf Pas 1 Sg I-HAVE-been-PERSUADED have-been-persuaded ei ei G1487 Cond IF mh mE G3361 Part Neg NO
en en G1722 Prep IN
kuriw kuriO G2962 n_ Dat Sg m Master Lord
ihsou iEsou G2424 n_ Dat Sg m JESUS
ouden ouden G3762 a_ Nom Sg n NOT-YET-ONE nothing koinon koinon G2839 a_ Acc Sg n COMMON contaminating
14 I know, and am persuaded by the Lord Jesus, that [there is] nothing unclean of itself: but to him that esteemeth any thing to be unclean, to him [it is] unclean.
koinon koinon G2839 a_ Nom Sg n COMMON contaminating einai einai G1511 vn Pres vxx TO-BE
di di G1223 Prep THRU through
eautou heautou G1438 pf 3 Gen Sg m self itself koinon koinon G2839 a_ Nom Sg n COMMON contaminating dia dia G1223 Prep THRU because-of
logizomenw logizomenO G3049 vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Sg m one-accountING one-reckoning
ti ti G5100 px Acc Sg n ANY anything
ekeinw ekeinO G1565 pd Dat Sg m to-that-one to-that-one de de G1161 Conj YET
14:15 ei
ei G1487 Cond IF
brwma brOma G1033 n_ Acc Sg n FOOD
adelfos adelphos G80 n_ Nom Sg m brother
lupeitai lupeitai G3076 vi Pres Pas 3 Sg IS-SORROWING
ouketi ouketi G3765 Adv NOT-STILL not-longer ekeinon ekeinon G1565 pd Acc Sg m that-one that-one
15 But if thy brother be grieved with [thy] meat, now walkest thou not charitably. Destroy not him with thy meat, for whom Christ died.
agaphn agapEn G26 n_ Acc Sg f LOVE
peripateis peripateis G4043 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-ABOUT-TREADING you-are-walking ou hou G3739 pr Gen Sg m WHOM cristos christos G5547 n_ Nom Sg m ANOINTED Christ
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg n to-THE
brwmati brOmati G1033 n_ Dat Sg n FOOD
apollue apollue G622 vm Pres Act 2 Sg BE-destroyING be-you-destroying !
uper huper G5228 Prep OVER for-the-sake-of
apeqanen apethanen G599 vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg FROM-DIED died
Translation : AV
Romans 14
14:16 mh
mE G3361 Part Neg NO blasfhmeisqw blasphEmeisthO G987 vm Pres Pas 3 Sg LET-BE-beING-HARM-AVERRED let-it-be-being-calumniated ! gar gar G1063 Conj for estin estin G2076 vi Pres vxx 3 Sg IS oun oun G3767 Conj THEN umwn humOn G5216 pp 2 Gen Pl OF-YOU(p) of-ye to to G3588 t_ Acc Sg n THE agaqon agathon G18 a_ Acc Sg n GOOD
16 Let not then your good be evil spoken of:
14:17 ou
ou G3756 Part Neg NOT
basileia basileia G932 n_ Nom Sg f KINGdom
brwsis brOsis G1035 n_ Nom Sg f FEEDing food
posis posis G4213 n_ Nom Sg f DRINKing drink
17 For the kingdom of God is not meat and drink; but righteousness, and peace, and joy in the Holy Ghost.
dikaiosunh dikaiosunE G1343 n_ Nom Sg f JUSTice righteousness
eirhnh eirEnE G1515 n_ Nom Sg f PEACE
en en G1722 Prep IN
pneumati pneumati G4151 n_ Dat Sg n spirit
agiw hagiO G40 a_ Dat Sg n HOLY
14:18 o
ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m to-THE
en en G1722 Prep IN
toutois toutois G5125 pd Dat Pl n these these-things tois tois G3588 t_ Dat Pl m to-THE
douleuwn douleuOn G1398 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m SLAVING
cristw christO G5547 n_ Dat Sg m ANOINTED Christ
euarestos euarestos G2101 a_ Nom Sg m WELL-PLEASing
18 For he that in these things serveth Christ [is] acceptable to God, and approved of men.
dokimos dokimos G1384 a_ Nom Sg m tested attested ta ta G3588 t_ Acc Pl n THE the(p)
anqrwpois anthrOpois G444 n_ Dat Pl m humans
14:19 ara
ara G686 Part CONSEQUENTLY
eirhnhs eirEnEs G1515 n_ Gen Sg f PEACE
diwkwmen diOkOmen G1377 vs Pres Act 1 Pl WE-SHOULD-BE-CHASING we-should-be-pursuing
ta ta G3588 t_ Acc Pl n THE the(p)
19 Let us therefore follow after the things which make for peace, and things wherewith one may edify another.
oikodomhs oikodomEs G3619 n_ Gen Sg f HOME-BUILDing edification
ths tEs G3588 t_ Gen Sg f OF-THE the
14:20 mh
mE G3361 Part Neg NO
eneken heneken G1752 Adv on-account-of
brwmatos brOmatos G1033 n_ Gen Sg n OF-FOOD food
katalue katalue G2647 vm Pres Act 2 Sg BE-YOU-DOWN-LOOSING be-you-demolishing ! kakon kakon G2556 a_ Nom Sg n EVIL
ergon ergon G2041 n_ Acc Sg n work
20 For meat destroy not the work of God. All things indeed [are] pure; but [it is] evil for that man who eateth with offence.
panta panta G3956 a_ Nom Pl n ALL
kaqara kathara G2513 a_ Nom Pl n clean
anqrwpw anthrOpO G444 n_ Dat Sg m human
tw tO G3588 t_ Dat Sg m THE-one the-one
dia dia G1223 Prep THRU through
proskommatos proskommatos G4348 n_ Gen Sg n TOWARD-STRIKE stumbling
esqionti esthionti G2068 vp Pres Act Dat Sg m EATING
14:21 kalon
kalon G2570 a_ Nom Sg n IDEAL
fagein phagein G5315 vn 2Aor Act TO-BE-EATING
krea krea G2907 n_ Acc Pl n MEATS meat(p)
mhde mEde G3366 Conj NO-YET nor-yet
piein piein G4095 vn 2Aor Act TO-BE-DRINKING
oinon oinon G3631 n_ Acc Sg m WINE
mhde mEde G3366 Conj NO-YET nor-yet h hE G2228 Part OR
21 [It is] good neither to eat flesh, nor to drink wine, nor [any thing] whereby thy brother stumbleth, or is offended, or is made weak.
en en G1722 Prep IN
w hO G3739 pr Dat Sg n WHICH
adelfos adelphos G80 n_ Nom Sg m brother
proskoptei proskoptei G4350 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-TOWARD-STRIKING is-stumbling
h hE G2228 Part OR
skandalizetai skandalizetai G4624 vi Pres Pas 3 Sg IS-beING-SNARED
asqenei asthenei G770 vi Pres Act 3 Sg IS-beING-UN-FIRM is-being-weakened
Translation : AV
14:22 su
su G4771 pp 2 Nom Sg YOU pistin pistin G4102 n_ Acc Sg f BELIEF faith eceis echeis G2192 vi Pres Act 2 Sg YOU-ARE-HAVING are-having o ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the-one kata kata G2596 Prep according-to sauton sauton G4572 pf 2 Acc Sg m Con YOURself ece eche G2192 vm Pres Act 2 Sg BE-YOU-HAVING be-you-having ! eauton heauton G1438 pf 3 Acc Sg m self himself en en G1722 Prep IN enwpion enOpion G1799 Adv IN-VIEW in-sight-of w hO G3739 pr Dat Sg n WHICH
22 Hast thou faith? have [it] to thyself before God. Happy [is] he that condemneth not himself in that thing which he alloweth.
tou tou G3588 t_ Gen Sg m OF-THE the
makarios makarios G3107 a_ Nom Sg m HAPPY happy-is
krinwn krinOn G2919 vp Pres Act Nom Sg m JUDGING
dokimazei dokimazei G1381 vi Pres Act 3 Sg he-IS-testING he-is-attesting
14:23 o
ho G3588 t_ Nom Sg m THE-one the ouk ouk G3756 Part Neg NOT ek ek G1537 Prep OUT
diakrinomenos diakrinomenos G1252 vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m beING-THRU-JUDGED one-doubting pan pan G3956 a_ Nom Sg n EVERY everything
fagh phagE G5315 vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg he-MAY-BE-EATING
katakekritai katakekritai G2632 vi Perf Pas 3 Sg HAS-been-DOWN-JUDGED is-condemned ek ek G1537 Prep OUT pistews pisteOs G4102 n_ Gen Sg f OF-BELIEF of-faith
oti hoti G3754 Conj that seeing-that amartia hamartia G266 n_ Nom Sg f missing sin
23 And he that doubteth is damned if he eat, because [he eateth] not of faith: for whatsoever [is] not of faith is sin.
pistews pisteOs G4102 n_ Gen Sg f OF-BELIEF of-faith
o ho G3739 pr Nom Sg n WHICH
Translation : AV
Romans 15
15:1 ofeilomen de
opheilO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de
Conj
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dunatoi ta dunatos ho
a_ Nom Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
asqenhmata twn asthenEma ho

adunatwn adunatos
a_ Gen Pl m
ARE-OWING ought bastazein bastazO

vn Pres Act
YET WE
THE
ABLE
THE
UN-FIRM-effects infirmities
OF-THE
UN-ABLE impotent
. We then that are strong ought to bear the infirmities of the weak, and not to please ourselves.
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
eautois areskein heautou areskO

pf 3 Dat Pl m vn Pres Act
TO-BE-BEARING AND
NO
to-selves ourselves tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-PLEASING
15:2 ekastos hmwn

hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
plhsion aresketw plEsion areskO

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon pros agathos pros

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
Let every one of us please [his] neighbour for [his] good to edification.
EACH
OF-US
to-THE the
NIGH-one associate
LET-him-BE-PLEASING INTO THE let-him-be-pleasing !
GOOD
TOWARD
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
HOME-BUILDing edification
15:3 kai gar o

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos ouc christos ou

eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
hresen areskO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
alla kaqws alla kathOs

Conj Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
AND also oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
for
THE
ANOINTED Christ
NOT
to-self himself
PLEASES
but
For even Christ pleased not himself; but, as it is written, The reproaches of them that reproached thee fell on me.
oneidismoi twn oneidismos ho

oneidizontwn se oneidizO su
vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 2 Acc Sg
epepesan ep epipiptO epi

eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
REPROACHES
OF-THE
ones-REPROACHING ones-reproaching
WH
YOU
ON-FALL fall-on eis eis

Prep
ON
ME
15:4 osa
hosos
pk Nom Pl n
gar proegrafh gar prographO

panta
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeteran didaskalian hEmeteros didaskalia

ps 1 Acc Sg n_ Acc Sg f
as-much-as for whatever egrafh graphO

vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
WAS-BEFORE-WRITTen was-written-before dia dia

Prep
INTO THE
OUR-more our(emph.)
TEACHing
ina hina
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
upomonhs hupomonE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
paraklhsews twn paraklEsis ho

For whatsoever things were written aforetime were written for our learning, that we through patience and comfort of the scriptures might have hope.
WAS-WRITten
THAT THRU THE through elpida elpis

n_ Acc Sg f
UNDER-REMAINing AND endurance ecwmen echO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
THRU THE through
OF-THE
grafwn thn graphE ho

n_ Gen Pl f t_ Acc Sg f
WRITings scriptures
THE
EXPECTATION WE-MAY-BE-HAVING
15:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
upomonhs hupomonE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
YET God
OF-THE
UNDER-REMAINing AND endurance fronein phroneO

vn Pres Act
OF-THE the en en
Prep
BESIDE-CALLing consolation allhlois kata allElOn kata

pc Dat Pl m Prep
. Now the God of patience and consolation grant you to be likeminded one toward another according to Christ Jesus:
dwh didOmi
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
MAY-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) may-he-be-granting ! ye ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
SAME
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED IN to-be-being-disposed-to
one-another
according-to ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
15:6 ina
hina
Conj
omoqumadon en homothumadon en
Adv Prep
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
stomati doxazhte stoma doxazO

n_ Dat Sg n vs Pres Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THAT LIKE-FEEL with-one-accord patera patEr

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
ONE
MOUTH
YE-MAY-BE-esteemizING THE ye-may-be-glorifying cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
God
AND
That ye may with one mind [and] one mouth glorify God, even the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
FATHER
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
15:7 dio
dio
Conj
proslambanesqe proslambanO
vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
allhlous kaqws allElOn kathOs

pc Acc Pl m Adv
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
. Wherefore receive ye one another, as Christ also received us to the glory of God.
THRU-WHICH BE-YE-TOWARD-GETTING one-another wherefore be-ye-taking-to-yourselves !
THE
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Romans 15
proselabeto proslambanO
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
WH
hmas
NA
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD-GOT took-to-himself
YOU(p) ye
INTO esteem glory
OF-THE
God
15:8 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar criston diakonon gar christos diakonos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
gegenhsqai ginomai
vn Perf Pas
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
uper huper
Prep
I-AM-sayING
for
ANOINTED Christ eis eis

Prep
THRU-SERVitor TO-HAVE-BECOME OF-ABOUT-CUTTing OVER servant of-Circumcision for-the-sake-of bebaiwsai tas bebaioO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl f
Now I say that Jesus Christ was a minister of the circumcision for the truth of God, to confirm the promises [made] unto the fathers:
alhqeias qeou alEtheia theos

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
epaggelias twn epaggelia ho

paterwn patEr
n_ Gen Pl m
TRUTH
OF-God
INTO THE
TO-confirm
THE
promises
OF-THE
FATHERS
15:9 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
uper huper
Prep
eleous eleos
n_ Gen Sg n
doxasai doxazO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
THE
YET NATIONS
OVER MERCY for-the-sake-of touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
TO-esteemize THE to-glorify soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
God
according-AS
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
exomologhsomai exomologeO
vi Fut Mid 1 Sg
en en
Prep
eqnesin kai tw ethnos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Dat Sg n
And that the Gentiles might glorify God for [his] mercy; as it is written, For this cause I will confess to thee among the Gentiles, and sing unto thy name.
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THRU this because-of onomati sou onoma su

I-SHALL-BE-OUT-avowING to-YOU I-shall-be-acclaiming you
IN NATIONS among
AND
to-THE
yalw psallO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
NAME
OF-YOU
I-SHALL-BE-STROKING I-shall-be-playing-music eufranqhte euphrainO

vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
15:10 kai palin legei

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eqnh ethnos
n_ Voc Pl n
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
10 And again he saith, Rejoice, ye Gentiles, with his people.
AND
AGAIN
He-IS-sayING
BE-YE-BEING-gladdenED NATIONS be-making-merry-ye ! panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
WITH
THE
PEOPLE
OF-Him
15:11 kai palin aineite

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
aineO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
11 And again, Praise the Lord, all ye Gentiles; and laud him, all ye people.
AND
AGAIN
BE-PRAISING ALL be-ye-praising ! pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
THE
NATIONS
THE
Master Lord
AND
epainesatwsan auton epaineO autos

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
laoi laos
n_ Nom Pl m
LET-THEM-ON-PRAISE let-them-laud !
Him
ALL
THE
PEOPLES
15:12 kai palin hsaias

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
Esaias
n_ Nom Sg m
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
riza rhiza
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
iessai kai iessai kai

ni proper Conj
AND
AGAIN
ISAIAH
IS-sayING
SHALL-BE THE there-shall-be eqnwn ethnos

n_ Gen Pl n
ROOT
OF-THE
JESSE
AND
12 And again, Esaias saith, There shall be a root of Jesse, and he that shall rise to reign over the Gentiles; in him shall the Gentiles trust.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anistamenos anistEmi
arcein archO
vn Pres Act
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
elpiousin elpizO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl Att
THE
One-UP-STANDING one-rising de de
Conj
TO-BE-chiefING OF-NATIONS ON to-be-being-chief ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
Him
NATIONS
SHALL-BE-EXPECTING shall-be-relying pashs pas

a_ Gen Sg f
15:13 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
plhrwsai plEroO
vo Aor Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
THE
YET God
OF-THE
EXPECTATION MAY-BE-FILLING YOU(p) may-he-be-filling ! ye eis eis

Prep
OF-EVERY JOY of-all en en

Prep
AND
13 . Now the God of hope fill you with all joy and peace in believing, that ye may abound in hope, through the power of the Holy Ghost.
eirhnhs en eirEnE en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pisteuein pisteuO
vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
perisseuein perisseuO
vn Pres Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OF-PEACE peace elpidi elpis

n_ Dat Sg f
IN
THE
TO-BE-BELIEVING INTO THE
TO-BE-exceedING YOU(p) to-be-superabounding ye
IN
THE
en en
Prep
dunamei pneumatos agiou dunamis pneuma hagios

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
EXPECTATION IN
ABILITY power
OF-spirit
HOLY
15:14 pepeismai
peithO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
de de
Conj

kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
I-HAVE-been-PERSUADED YET brothers have-been-persuaded brethren !
OF-ME
AND also
SAME myself
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye
14 . And I myself also am persuaded of you, my brethren, that ye also are full of goodness, filled with all knowledge, able also to
AV
Romans 15
oti kai autoi hoti kai autos

mestoi mestos
a_ Nom Pl m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
agaqwsunhs peplhrwmenoi pashs agathOsunE plEroO pas

n_ Gen Sg f vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m a_ Gen Sg f
WH
ths
admonish one another.
that
NA
AND also ths ho
SAME yourselves
DISTENDED ARE bulging ye-are
OF-GOODness
HAVING-been-FILLED OF-EVERY of-all
gnwsews dunamenoi gnOsis dunamai

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
kai allhlous nouqetein kai allElOn noutheteO

Conj pc Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE the
KNOWledge
beING-ABLE
NA
AND also de de
Conj
one-another
TO-BE-admonishING
15:15
WH
tolmhroterws
tolmhroteron tolmEroteron
Adv
egraya graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apo apo
Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
ws hOs
Adv
more-DARE-ing-AS more-daringly epanamimnhskwn umas epanamimnEskO humeis

vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl
YET I-WRITE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
FROM PART
AS
WH
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
apo
15 Nevertheless, brethren, I have written the more boldly unto you in some sort, as putting you in mind, because of the grace that is given to me of God,
OF-ON-UP-REMINDING prompting
NA
YOU(p) ye qeou theos
THRU THE because-of
grace
THE
BEING-GIVEN
to-ME
upo hupo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m
UNDER by
THE
God
15:16 eis
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
leitourgon cristou leitourgos christos

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
INTO THE
TO-BE
ME
official minister tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
NATIONS
ierourgounta to hierourgeO ho
vp Pres Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
16 That I should be the minister of Jesus Christ to the Gentiles, ministering the gospel of God, that the offering up of the Gentiles might be acceptable, being sanctified by the Holy Ghost.
SACRED-ACTING acting-as-a-priest prosfora prosphora

n_ Nom Sg f
THE of-the twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
God
THAT MAY-BE-BECOMING THE
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
euprosdektos euprosdektos
a_ Nom Sg f
hgiasmenh hagiazO
en en
Prep

TOWARD-CARRY OF-THE offering
NATIONS
WELL-TOWARD-RECEIVED HAVING-been-HOLYizED IN well-received having-been-hallowed kauchsin en kauchEsis en

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
spirit
HOLY
15:17 ecw
echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
I-AM-HAVING
THEN
THE
BOASTing
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE the(p)
TOWARD THE
17 . I have therefore whereof I may glory through Jesus Christ in those things which pertain to God.
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
God
15:18 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar tolmhsw ti gar tolmaO tis

Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg px Acc Sg n
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
ou ou
Part Neg
kateirgasato cristos katergazomai christos

vi Aor midD 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
for
I-AM-DARING
ANY
TO-BE-TALKING OF-WHICH NOT to-be-speaking logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
DOWN-ACTS effects
ANOINTED Christ
18 For I will not dare to speak of any of those things which Christ hath not wrought by me, to make the Gentiles obedient, by word and deed,
di dia
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
eis eis
Prep
upakohn eqnwn hupakoE ethnos

kai ergw kai ergon

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
THRU ME through
INTO obedience
OF-NATIONS to-saying to-word en en

Prep
AND
to-ACT work
WH
15:19 en
en
Prep
dunamei shmeiwn kai teratwn dunamis sEmeion kai teras

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl n Conj n_ Gen Pl n
dunamei pneumatos dunamis pneuma

agiou
IN
NA
ABILITY power
OF-SIGNS
AND
OF-MIRACLES IN miracles apo apo

Prep
ABILITY power
OF-spirit
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
wste hOste
Conj
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ierousalhm kai kuklw ierosoluma kai kuklO

ni proper Conj n_ Dat Sg m
mecri tou mechri ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg n
19 Through mighty signs and wonders, by the power of the Spirit of God; so that from Jerusalem, and round about unto Illyricum, I have fully preached the gospel of Christ.
OF-God
AS-BESIDES ME so-that
FROM JERUSALEM
AND
to-AROUND UNTO around cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
illurikou peplhrwkenai to illurikon plEroO ho

n_ Gen Sg n vn Perf Act t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ILLYRICUM
TO-HAVE-FILLED to-have-completed
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Romans 15
15:20 outws de
houtOs
Adv
de
Conj
filotimoumenon philotimeomai
euaggelizesqai euaggelizO
vn Pres Mid
ouc ou
Part Neg
opou hopou
Adv
wnomasqh onomazO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
thus
YET beING-ambitious
TO-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING NOT to-be-bringing-the-well-message
THE-?-where IS-NAMED wheree
20 Yea, so have I strived to preach the gospel, not where Christ was named, lest I should build upon another man's foundation:
cristos ina christos hina

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ep epi
Prep
allotrion qemelion oikodomw allotrios themelios oikodomeO

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vs Pres Act 1 Sg
ANOINTED Christ
THAT NO
ON
other-placed another's
foundation
WH
I-MAY-BE-HOME-BUILDING I-may-be-building
WH WH WH WH WH
15:21 alla kaqws

alla
Conj
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oyontai ois ouk anhggelh peri autou
but
NA
NA NA NA NA NA
21 But as it is written, To whom he was not spoken of, they shall see: and they that have not heard shall understand.
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
anhggelh anaggellO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
peri peri
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
oyontai optomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
kai oi kai hos

Conj pr Nom Pl m
to-WHOM NOT to-whom(p) ouk ou

Part Neg
it-WAS-UP-MESSAGed ABOUT Him it-was-informed concerning sunhsousin suniEmi

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-VIEWING they-shall-be-seeing
AND
WHO who(p)
akhkoasin akouO
vi 2Perf Act 3 Pl Att
NOT
HAVE-HEARD
THEY-SHALL-BE-understandING
15:22 dio
dio
Conj
kai enekoptomhn ta kai egkoptO ho

Conj vi impf Pas 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
I-was-hinderED
THE
much
OF-THE
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye klimasin toutois klima houtos

n_ Dat Pl n pd Dat Pl n
22 . For which cause also I have been much hindered from coming to you.
15:23 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
mhketi mEketi
Adv
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
ecwn echO
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
NOW
YET NO-NOT-STILL PLACE by-no-means-still ecwn echO

HAVING
IN
THE
regions
these
WH
23 But now having no more place in these parts, and having a great desire these many years to come unto you;
epipoqian de epipothia de
n_ Acc Sg f Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
ikanwn
ON-LONGing longing
NA
YET HAVING
OF-THE
FROM
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
MANY
YEARS
15:24 ws an
hOs
Adv
an
Part
poreuwmai poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
spanian elpizw spania elpizO

gar diaporeuomenos gar diaporeuomai

AS
EVER I-MAY-BE-GOING
INTO THE
SPAIN
I-AM-EXPECTING for
THRU-GOING going-through umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
qeasasqai umas theaomai humeis

vn Aor midD pp 2 Acc Pl
kai uf kai hupo

Conj Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
propemfqhnai propempO
vn Aor Pas
ekei ean ekei ean

Adv Cond
prwton prOton
Adv
24 Whensoever I take my journey into Spain, I will come to you: for I trust to see you in my journey, and to be brought on my way thitherward by you, if first I be somewhat filled with your [company].
TO-gaze to-gaze-upon apo apo

Prep
YOU(p) ye
AND
UNDER YOU(p) by ye
TO-BE-BEFORE-SENT there to-be-sent-forward
IF-EVER OF-YOU(p) BEFORE-most of-ye first
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
emplhsqw emplEmi
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
FROM PART
I-SHOULD-BE-BEING-IN-FILLED I-should-be-being-filled poreuomai poreuomai

15:25 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm diakonwn ierosoluma diakoneO

ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
25 But now I go unto Jerusalem to minister unto the saints.
NOW
YET I-AM-GOING
INTO JERUSALEM
THRU-SERVING dispensing
to-THE
HOLY-ones saints
26 For it hath pleased them of Macedonia and Achaia to make a certain contribution for the poor saints which are at Jerusalem.
15:26 eudokhsan gar makedonia kai acaia

eudokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
gar
Conj
makedonia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai
Conj
achaia
n_ Nom Sg f
koinwnian tina koinOnia tis

n_ Acc Sg f px Acc Sg f
poihsasqai eis poieO eis

vn Aor Mid Prep
WELL-SEEM it-delights tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
for
MACEDONIA
AND
ACHAIA
communion contribution en en
Prep
ANY some
TO-be-DONE to-make
INTO
ptwcous twn ptOchos ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ni proper
THE
POOR-ones poor
OF-THE
HOLY-ones OF-THE saints the
IN
JERUSALEM
AV
Romans 15
15:27 eudokhsan
eudokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
gar kai ofeiletai eisin gar kai opheiletEs eimi

Conj Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ei ei
Cond
gar tois gar ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
pneumatikois pneumatikos
a_ Dat Pl n
THEY-WELL-SEEM for they-are-delighted autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
AND
OWErs debtors eqnh ethnos

n_ Nom Pl n
THEY-ARE
OF-them
IF
for
to-THE
spirituals spiritual-things
ekoinwnhsan ta koinOneO ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Pl n
ofeilousin opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
sarkikois sarkikos
a_ Dat Pl n
27 It hath pleased them verily; and their debtors they are. For if the Gentiles have been made partakers of their spiritual things, their duty is also to minister unto them in carnal things.
OF-them
communion participate
THE
NATIONS
THEY-ARE-OWING AND they-ought also
IN
THE
FLESHics fleshly-things
leitourghsai autois leitourgeO autos

vn Aor Act pp Dat Pl m
TO-officiate to-minister
to-them
15:28 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
epitelesas kai sfragisamenos autois ton epiteleO kai sphragizO autos ho

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton houtos
pd Acc Sg m
this
THEN ON-FINISHing performing di dia

Prep
AND
SEALing
to-them
THE
FRUIT
this
28 When therefore I have performed this, and have sealed to them this fruit, I will come by you into Spain.
apeleusomai aperchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
spanian spania
n_ Acc Sg f
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-COMING THRU YOU(p) I-shall-be-coming-away through ye
INTO SPAIN
15:29 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
oti ercomenos hoti erchomai

pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
plhrwmati plErOma
n_ Dat Sg n
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that I-am-aware eulogias eulogia

n_ Gen Sg f
COMING in-coming
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
IN
FILLing
29 And I am sure that, when I come unto you, I shall come in the fulness of the blessing of the gospel of Christ.
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
eleusomai erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
OF-blessedness OF-ANOINTED I-SHALL-BE-COMING of-blessing of-Christ
15:30 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye cristou kai dia christos kai dia
brothers brethren !
THRU THE through
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs tou agapE ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos sunagwnisasqai pneuma sunagOnizomai

n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor midD
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
en en
Prep
30 . Now I beseech you, brethren, for the Lord Jesus Christ's sake, and for the love of the Spirit, that ye strive together with me in [your] prayers to God for me;
ANOINTED Christ tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
AND
THRU THE through
LOVE
OF-THE
spirit
TO-TOGETHER-CONTEND to-ME to-struggle-together with-me qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
proseucais uper proseuchE huper

n_ Dat Pl f Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THE
prayers
OVER ME for-the-sake-of apo apo

Prep
TOWARD THE
God
15:31 ina
hina
Conj
rusqw rhuomai
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apeiqountwn apeitheO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ioudaia kai ioudaia kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-BEING-rescuED FROM THE
ones-UN-PERSUADING IN being-stubborn
THE
JUDEA
AND
31 That I may be delivered from them that do not believe in Judaea; and that my service which [I have] for Jerusalem may be accepted of the saints;
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
ierousalhm euprosdektos ierosoluma euprosdektos

ni proper a_ Nom Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
THE
THRU-SERVice OF-ME dispensation
THE
INTO JERUSALEM
WELL-TOWARD-RECEIVED to-THE well-received
HOLY-ones saints
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BECOMING
15:32 ina
hina
Conj
en en
Prep
cara chara
n_ Dat Sg f
elqwn erchomai
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
dia dia
Prep
qelhmatos qeou thelEma theos

THAT IN
JOY
COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
32 That I may come unto you with joy by the will of God, and may with you be refreshed.
THRU WILL through
OF-God
sunanapauswmai sunanapauomai
vs Aor midD 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
I-SHOULD-BE-TOGETHER-restING to-YOU(p) I-should-be-resting-together with-ye
AV
15:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs meta pantwn umwn eirEnE meta pas humeis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
amhn amEn
Hebrew
33 Now the God of peace [be] with you all. Amen.
THE
YET God
OF-THE
PEACE
WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) AMEN of-ye
AV
Romans 16
16:1 sunisthmi
sunistEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
foibhn thn phoibE ho

adelfhn hmwn adelphE hemeis

ousan eimi
I-AM-TOGETHER-STANDING YET to-YOU(p) I-am-commending to-ye kai kai

Conj
PHOEBE
THE
sister
OF-US
BEING
. I commend unto you Phebe our sister, which is a servant of the church which is at Cenchrea:
diakonon diakonos
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias ths ekklEsia ho

en en
Prep
kegcreais kegchreai
n_ Dat Pl f
AND also
THRU-SERVitor OF-THE servant(f)

WH
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
WH NA
OF-THE the
NA
IN
CENCHREA
16:2 ina
hina
Conj
prosdexhsqe authn
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
prosdexhsqe prosdechomai
vs Aor midD 2 Pl
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
THAT
her
YE-SHOULD-BE-TOWARD-RECEIVING ye-should-be-receiving auth autos

pp Dat Sg f
IN
Master Lord umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
axiws axiOs
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
kai parasthte kai paristEmi

en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
an an
Part
That ye receive her in the Lord, as becometh saints, and that ye assist her in whatsoever business she hath need of you: for she hath been a succourer of many, and of myself also.
WORTHIly OF-THE
MAY-BE-BESIDE-STANDING to-her may-be-standing-by her prostatis prostatis

n_ Nom Sg f
IN
WHICH
EVER OF-YOU(p) ye kai kai

Conj
crhzh chrEzO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
pragmati kai gar auth pragma kai gar autos

n_ Dat Sg n Conj Conj pp Nom Sg f
pollwn egenhqh polus ginomai

a_ Gen Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
she-MAY-BE-needING to-PRACTISE matter emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
AND also
for
she
BEFORE-STAND OF-MANY patroness
WAS-BECOMED AND was-become
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-ME
SAME myself tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
16:3 aspasasqe priskan kai akulan

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
priska
n_ Acc Sg f
kai
Conj
akulas
n_ Acc Sg m
sunergous sunergos
a_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
Greet Priscilla and Aquila my helpers in Christ Jesus:
greet-YE greet-ye ! ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
PRISCA
AND
AQUILA
THE
TOGETHER-ACTers OF-ME fellow-workers
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
16:4 oitines uper

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
huper
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
trachlon upeqhkan trachElos hupotithEmi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
WHO-ANY who-any ois hos

pr Dat Pl m
OVER THE for-the-sake-of egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
soul
OF-ME
THE
OF-selves NECK of-themselves ai ho

t_ Nom Pl f
UNDER-PLACE jeopardize ekklhsiai ekklEsia

n_ Nom Pl f
Who have for my life laid down their own necks: unto whom not only I give thanks, but also all the churches of the Gentiles.
ouk ou
Part Neg
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
eucaristw alla kai pasai eucharisteO alla kai pas

vi Pres Act 1 Sg Conj Conj a_ Nom Pl f
to-WHOM NOT whom(p) twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
ONLY
AM-thankING
but
AND also
ALL
THE
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE
NATIONS
16:5 kai thn

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kat kata
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ekklhsian aspasasqe epaineton ekklEsia aspazomai epainetos

n_ Acc Sg f vm Aor midD 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
according-to HOME house os hos
OF-them
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
greet-YE greet-ye ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
Epanetus (ON-PRAISE) Epanetus asias asia

n_ Gen Sg f
Likewise [greet] the church that is in their house. Salute my wellbeloved Epaenetus, who is the firstfruits of Achaia unto Christ.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agaphton mou agapEtos egO

a_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
aparch aparchE
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
pr Nom Sg m
THE
beLOVED
OF-ME
WHO
IS
first-fruit firstfruit ekopiasen eis kopiaO eis

OF-THE
ASIA INTO ANOINTED province-of-Asia Christ

6
16:6 aspasasqe marian htis

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
maria
n_ Acc Sg f
hostis
pr Nom Sg f
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
Greet Mary, who bestowed much labour on us.
greet-YE greet-ye !
MARY
WHO-ANY much who-any
toils
INTO YOU(p) ye suggeneis suggenEs

a_ Acc Pl m
16:7 aspasasqe andronikon

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
andronikos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai iounian tous kai iounias ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
greet-YE greet-ye !
Andronicus (MAN-CONQUERER) AND Andronicus
JUNIA Junias
THE
TOGETHER-generateds OF-ME relatives
AND
Salute Andronicus and Junia, my kinsmen, and my fellowprisoners, who are of note among the apostles, who also were in Christ before me.
AV
Romans 16
sunaicmalwtous mou sunaichmalOtos egO

oitines eisin hostis eimi

pr Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
epishmoi episEmos
a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
apostolois apostolos
n_ Dat Pl m
TOGETHER-captives fellow-captives oi hos

pr Nom Pl m
OF-ME
WHO-ANY who-any
ARE
ON-SIGN-ones IN THE notable among en en

Prep
kai pro kai pro

Conj Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
gegonan ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Pl Con
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
WHO
AND also
BEFORE ME
HAVE-BECOME
IN
Prep
16:8 aspasasqe ampliaton ton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
ampliatos
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m

kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
Greet Amplias my beloved in the Lord.
greet-YE greet-ye !
AMPLIATOS
THE
beLOVED
OF-ME
IN
Master Lord cristw kai stacun christos kai stachus

n_ Dat Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
9
16:9 aspasasqe ourbanon ton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
ourbanos
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
sunergon sunergos
a_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
Salute Urbane, our helper in Christ, and Stachys my beloved.
greet-YE greet-ye ! ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
URBANUS
THE
TOGETHER-ACTer OF-US fellow-worker
IN
ANOINTED Christ
AND
Stachys

THE
beLOVED
OF-ME
16:10 aspasasqe apellhn ton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
apellEs
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dokimon en dokimos en
a_ Acc Sg m Prep
cristw aspasasqe tous christos aspazomai ho

n_ Dat Sg m vm Aor midD 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
10 Salute Apelles approved in Christ. Salute them which are of Aristobulus'[household].
greet-YE greet-ye ! aristoboulou aristoboulos

n_ Gen Sg m
APELLES
THE
tested attested
IN
ANOINTED Christ
greet-YE greet-ye !
THE-ones the-ones
OUT OF-THE of-the-ones
Aristobulus (best-COUNSEL) of-Aristobulus
16:11 aspasasqe hrwdiwna ton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
hErOdiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
suggenh suggenEs
a_ Acc Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
aspasasqe tous aspazomai ho

vm Aor midD 2 Pl t_ Acc Pl m
ek ek
Prep
greet-YE greet-ye ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
HERODION
THE
TOGETHER-generated OF-ME relative en en

Prep
greet-YE greet-ye !
THE-ones the-ones
OUT
11 Salute Herodion my kinsman. Greet them that be of the [household] of Narcissus, which are in the Lord.
narkissou tous narkissos ho

ontas eimi
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE Narcissus of-the-ones of-Narcissus
THE
IN
Master Lord tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
16:12 aspasasqe trufainan

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
truphaina
n_ Acc Sg f
kai trufwsan kai truphOsa

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
kopiwsas kopiaO
vp Pres Act Acc Pl f
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
greet-YE greet-ye !
Tryphena (ENERVATE) AND Tryphena
Tryphosa (ENERVATE) THE Tryphosa polla polus

a_ Acc Pl n
ones-toilING ones-toiling(f)
IN
Master Lord
12 Salute Tryphena and Tryphosa, who labour in the Lord. Salute the beloved Persis, which laboured much in the Lord.
aspasasqe persida thn aspazomai persis ho

vm Aor midD 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
agaphthn htis agapEtos hostis

a_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg f
ekopiasen en kopiaO en
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
greet-YE greet-ye !
PERSIS
THE
beLOVED
WHO-ANY much who-any kuriw kurios
toils
IN
Master Lord mhtera autou mEtEr autos

13 Salute Rufus chosen in the Lord, and his mother and mine.
16:13 aspasasqe roufon ton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
rhouphos
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eklekton en eklektos en
a_ Acc Sg m Prep
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Dat Sg m
greet-YE greet-ye ! kai emou kai egO

Conj pp 1 Gen Sg
RUFUS
THE
chosen
IN
Master Lord
AND
THE
MOTHER
OF-him
AND
OF-ME
16:14 aspasasqe asugkriton

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
asugkritos
n_ Acc Sg m
flegonta phlegOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ermhn hermEs
n_ Acc Sg m
patroban erman patrobas hermas

kai kai
Conj
greet-YE greet-ye ! tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
Asyncritus (Incomparable) Phlegon (BLAZing) Hermes (TRANSLATOR) PATROBAS Asyncritus Phlegon Hermes autois adelfous autos adelphos
pp Dat Pl m n_ Acc Pl m
HERMAS
AND
14 Salute Asyncritus, Phlegon, Hermas, Patrobas, Hermes, and the brethren which are with them.
sun sun
Prep
THE
brothers brethren
AV
Romans 16
16:15 aspasasqe filologon

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
philologos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai ioulian nhrea kai ioulia nEreus

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
adelfhn autou adelphE autos

greet-YE greet-ye !
Philologos (FOND-say) AND Philologos sun sun

Prep
JULIA
NEREUS
AND
THE
sister
OF-him
15 Salute Philologus, and Julia, Nereus, and his sister, and Olympas, and all the saints which are with them.
kai olumpan kai tous kai olumpas kai ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl m
autois pantas agious autos pas hagios

pp Dat Pl m a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
AND
OLYMPAS
AND
THE
ALL
HOLY-ones saints aspazontai aspazomai

16:16 aspasasqe allhlous en

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
en
Prep
filhmati agiw philEma hagios

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
greet-YE greet-ye ! ekklhsiai ekklEsia

n_ Nom Pl f
one-another
IN
FOND-effect kiss
HOLY
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye
16 Salute one another with an holy kiss. The churches of Christ salute you.
THE
pasai pas
a_ Nom Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OUT-CALLEDS ALL ecclesias
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
16:17 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
adelfoi skopein adelphos skopeO

n_ Voc Pl m vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
dicostasias kai dichostasia kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
brothers brethren !
TO-BE-NOTING THE-ones the-ones umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
TWO-STANDS dissensions poiountas poieO

AND
skandala para skandalon para

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
didachn hn didachE hos

emaqete manthanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
17 . Now I beseech you, brethren, mark them which cause divisions and offences contrary to the doctrine which ye have learned; and avoid them.
THE
SNARES
BESIDE THE
TEACHing
WHICH
YOU(p) ye
LEARNED
makING
AND
ekklinete ekklinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ap apo
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
BE-YE-OUT-CLINING FROM them be-ye-avoiding !
16:18 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar toioutoi tw gar toioutos ho

Conj pd Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
cristw ou christos ou
douleuousin alla douleuO alla

THE
for
such such(p)
to-THE
Master Lord ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-US
ANOINTED Christ
NOT
ARE-SLAVING
but
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
koilia kai dia koilia kai dia

crhstologias kai eulogias chrEstologia kai eulogia

18 For they that are such serve not our Lord Jesus Christ, but their own belly; and by good words and fair speeches deceive the hearts of the simple.
to-THE
OF-selves CAVITY of-themselves bowel tas ho
AND
THRU THE through
kind-saying compliment akakwn akakos

a_ Gen Pl m
AND
blessedness adulation
exapatwsin exapataO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
kardias twn kardia ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THEY-ARE-OUT-SEDUCING THE are-deluding
HEARTS
OF-THE
UN-EVIL innocent ef epi

Prep
16:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar umwn gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
upakoh eis hupakoE eis

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
pantas afiketo pas aphikneomai

a_ Acc Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oun oun
Conj
cairw chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
for
OF-YOU(p) obedience of-ye sofous sophos

a_ Acc Pl m
INTO ALL
WH
FROM-REACHED ON YOU(p) onover ye reached-out einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
THEN I-AM-JOYING I-am-rejoicing
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
men
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon akeraious de agathos akeraios de

a_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Pl m Conj
19 For your obedience is come abroad unto all [men]. I am glad therefore on your behalf: but yet I would have you wise unto that which is good, and simple concerning evil.
I-AM-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
WISE
TO-BE
INTO THE
GOOD
UN-blended artless
YET
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
INTO THE
EVIL
16:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs suntriyei eirEnE suntribO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
satanan satanas
n_ Acc Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
THE
YET God
OF-THE
PEACE
SHALL-BE-crushING THE
SATAN (adversary) UNDER Satan kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
20 And the God of peace shall bruise Satan under your feet shortly. The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you. Amen.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
FEET
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
SWIFTness THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
AV
Romans 16
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
WITH YOU(p) ye
16:21 aspazetai
aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
timoqeos o timotheos ho
sunergos sunergos
a_ Nom Sg m
WH
mou
NA
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai kai
Conj
IS-greetING
YOU(p) ye
Timothy
THE
TOGETHER-ACTer fellow-worker oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
OF-ME
AND
21 . Timotheus my workfellow, and Lucius, and Jason, and Sosipater, my kinsmen, salute you.
loukios kai iaswn loukios kai iasOn

kai swsipatros kai sOsipatros

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
suggeneis suggenEs
a_ Nom Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
LUCIUS
AND
JASON
AND
Sosipater (SAVE-FATHER) THE Sosipater egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
TOGETHER-generateds OF-ME relatives grayas graphO

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
16:22 aspazomai
aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tertios o tertios ho
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
epistolhn epistolE
n_ Acc Sg f
22 I Tertius, who wrote [this] epistle, salute you in the Lord.
AM-greetING
YOU(p) ye
TERTIUS
THE
one-WRITing one-writing
THE
letter epistle
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
Master Lord umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
16:23 aspazetai
aspazomai
gaios gaios
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
xenos xenos
a_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai olhs kai holos

Conj a_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IS-greetING
YOU(p) ye
GAIUS
THE
LODGer host
OF-ME
AND
OF-WHOLE OF-THE the polews kai polis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
23 Gaius mine host, and of the whole church, saluteth you. Erastus the chamberlain of the city saluteth you, and Quartus a brother.
ekklhsias aspazetai ekklEsia aspazomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
erastos o erastos ho
oikonomos ths oikonomos ho

OUT-CALLED ecclesia
IS-greetING
YOU(p) ye adelfos adelphos

n_ Nom Sg m
ERASTUS
THE
OF-THE
city
AND
kouartos o kouartos ho
QUARTUS
THE
brother
16:24
24 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you all. Amen.
. .
.
. .
.
.
WH NA
16:25
tw
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
dunamenw dunamai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
sthrixai stErizO
vn Aor Act
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
to-THE
YET One-beING-ABLE one-being-able kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
TO-STAND-fast according-to THE to-establish in-accord-with cristou kata christos kata

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
khrugma kErugma
n_ Acc Sg n
apokaluyin apokalupsis
n_ Acc Sg f
25 . Now to him that is of power to stablish you according to my gospel, and the preaching of Jesus Christ, according to the revelation of the mystery, which was kept secret since the world began,
WELL-MESSAGE OF-ME
AND
THE
PROCLAMATION OF-JESUS heralding
ANOINTED Christ
according-to FROM-COVERing in-accord-with revelation
musthriou mustErion
n_ Gen Sg n
cronois aiwniois sesighmenou chronos aiOnios sigaO

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m vp Perf Pas Gen Sg n
OF-CLOSE-KEEP to-TIMES of-secret
eonian
HAVING-been-HUSHED
16:26 fanerwqentos de
phaneroO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m
de
Conj
nun dia nun dia

Adv Prep
te te
Part
grafwn profhtikwn kat graphE prophEtikos kata

n_ Gen Pl f a_ Gen Pl m Prep
epitaghn epitagE
n_ Acc Sg f
BEING-made-APPEAR being-manifested tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YET NOW THRU BESIDES WRITings through scriptures eis eis

Prep
BEFORE-AVERic prophetic panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
according-to injunction
aiwniou qeou aiOnios theos

upakohn pistews eis hupakoE pistis eis

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
26 But now is made manifest, and by the scriptures of the prophets, according to the commandment of the everlasting God, made known to all nations for the obedience of faith:
OF-THE
eonian
God
INTO obedience
OF-BELIEF of-faith
INTO ALL
THE
NATIONS
AV
Romans 16 - 1Corinthians 1
gnwrisqentos gnOrizO
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
BEING-KNOWizED being-made-known
16:27 monw
monos
a_ Dat Sg m
sofw sophos
a_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
NA
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
to-ONLY
WISE
God
THRU JESUS through

WH
ANOINTED Christ
to-WHOM
THE
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas aiOn
n_ Acc Pl m
amhn
NA
amhn amEn
Hebrew
27 To God only wise, [be] glory through Jesus Christ for ever. Amen. <<[Written to the Romans from Corinthus, [and sent] by Phebe servant of the church at Cenchrea.]>>
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
AMEN
AV
1Corinthians 1
1Corinthians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
klhtos klEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
apostolos apostolos
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
ihsou cristou
WH
NA
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
NA
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
PAUL
CALLED
commissioner apostle kai swsqenhs o kai sOsthenEs ho

OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ adelfos adelphos

n_ Nom Sg m
THRU through
. Paul, called [to be] an apostle of Jesus Christ through the will of God, and Sosthenes [our] brother,

WILL
OF-God
AND
Sosthenes
THE
brother
1:2 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia tou ekklEsia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oush eimi
en en
Prep
korinqw korinthos
n_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
OUT-CALLED OF-THE ecclesia en en

Prep
God
THE
one-BEING one-being klhtois agiois klEtos hagios

IN
CORINTH
hgiasmenois hagiazO

sun sun
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
Unto the church of God which is at Corinth, to them that are sanctified in Christ Jesus, called [to be] saints, with all that in every place call upon the name of Jesus Christ our Lord, both theirs and ours:
HAVING-been-HOLYizED IN to-ones-having-been-hallowed epikaloumenois to epikaleO ho

vp Pres Mid Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
ANOINTED Christ onoma onoma

n_ Acc Sg n
JESUS
CALLED
HOLY-ones TOGETHER to-ALL saints with-all hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou en christos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
ones-ON-CALLING ones-invoking panti pas

a_ Dat Sg m
THE
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
IN
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai hmwn kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Gen Pl
EVERY
PLACE
OF-them
AND
OF-US
1:3 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
Grace [be] unto you, and peace, from God our Father, and [from] the Lord Jesus Christ.
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:4 eucaristw tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
NA
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pantote peri pantote peri

Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
epi epi
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
I-AM-thankING
to-THE the qeou theos
God
OF-ME
always
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye en en

Prep
ON THE onover
I thank my God always on your behalf, for the grace of God which is given you by Jesus Christ;
cariti tou charis ho

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
doqeish didOmi
vp Aor Pas Dat Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

n_ Gen Sg m
grace
OF-THE
God
THE
BEING-GIVEN
Prep
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
1:5 oti en
hoti
Conj
en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
eploutisqhte en ploutizO en
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai pash kai pas

Conj a_ Dat Sg f
that
IN
EVERY everything
YE-ARE-enRICHED
IN
Him
IN
EVERY all
saying expression
AND
EVERY all
That in every thing ye are enriched by him, in all utterance, and [in] all knowledge;
gnwsei gnOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
KNOWledge
1:6 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
marturion tou marturion ho

cristou ebebaiwqh christos bebaioO

en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
Even as the testimony of Christ was confirmed in you:
according-AS THE
witness testimony mh mE
Part Neg
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
WAS-confirmED IN YOU(p) among ye carismati apekdecomenous charisma apekdechomai

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
7
1:7 wste
hOste
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ustereisqai en hustereO en
vn Pres Pas Prep
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg n
AS-BESIDES YOU(p) so-that ye
So that ye come behind in no gift; waiting for the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ:
NO
TO-BE-WANTING to-be-deficient
IN
NO-YET-ONE grace-effect any gracious-gift
FROM-OUT-RECEIVING awaiting
AV
1Corinthians 1
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apokaluyin tou apokalupsis ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
FROM-COVERing unveiling
OF-THE
Master Lord umas humeis
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ anegklhtous en anegklEtos en

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
1:8 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai bebaiwsei kai bebaioO

ews telous heOs telos

Conj n_ Gen Sg n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pp 2 Acc Pl
WHO
AND also tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-confirmING YOU(p) ye kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
TILL
OF-FINISH UN-indictable consummation unimpeachable cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
Who shall also confirm you unto the end, [that ye may be] blameless in the day of our Lord Jesus Christ.
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
DAY
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ eklhqhte kaleO

vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
1:9 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
di dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
koinwnian tou koinOnia ho

BELIEVing faithful uiou huios

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
God
THRU WHOM through cristou tou christos ho

YE-WERE-CALLED INTO communion fellowship kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God [is] faithful, by whom ye were called unto the fellowship of his Son Jesus Christ our Lord.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
SON
OF-Him
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
THE
Master Lord tou ho
OF-US
1:10 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
adelfoi dia adelphos dia

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
onomatos tou onoma ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg n
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
brothers brethren ! to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THRU THE through auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou ina christos hina

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
leghte legO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
THAT THE
SAME YE-MAY-BE-sayING ALL same-thing de de

Conj
AND
NO
10 . Now I beseech you, brethren, by the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, that ye all speak the same thing, and [that] there be no divisions among you; but [that] ye be perfectly joined together in the same mind and in the same judgment.
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
scismata hte schisma eimi

n_ Nom Pl n vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
kathrtismenoi katartizO
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
MAY-BE there-may-be autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
IN YOU(p) among ye noi nous

n_ Dat Sg m
SPLITS schisms th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YE-MAY-BE
YET HAVING-been-DOWN-EQUIPPED IN attuned
THE
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
gnwmh gnOmE
n_ Dat Sg f
SAME
MIND
AND
IN
THE
SAME
opinion
1:11 edhlwqh
dEloO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl

upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
clohs chloE
n_ Gen Sg f
it-WAS-made-EVIDENT for
to-ME
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye
brothers brethren !
OF-ME
by
THE the-ones
OF-Chloe
11 For it hath been declared unto me of you, my brethren, by them [which are of the house] of Chloe, that there are contentions among you.
oti erides hoti eris

Conj n_ Nom Pl f
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
that
STRIFES
IN YOU(p) among ye de de
Conj
ARE there-are oti ekastos umwn hoti hekastos humeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
1:12 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
men men
Part
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
I-AM-sayING
YET this
that
EACH
OF-YOU(p) IS-sayING of-ye de de

Conj
INDEED AM
12 Now this I say, that every one of you saith, I am of Paul; and I of Apollos; and I of Cephas; and I of Christ.
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
apollw apollOs
n_ Gen Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
khfa kEphas
n_ Gen Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-PAUL
YET of-APOLLOS I of-Apollos o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
YET of-CEPHAS of-Cephas paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
YET OF-ANOINTED of-Christ umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
1:13 memeristai
merizO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
cristos mh christos mE
estaurwqh uper stauroO huper

h E
Part
HAS-been-PARTED THE
ANOINTED Christ
NO
PAUL
WAS-impalED was-crucified
13 Is Christ divided? was Paul crucified for you? or were ye baptized in the name of Paul?
OR
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
ebaptisqhte baptizO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
INTO THE
NAME
OF-PAUL
YE-ARE-DIPizED ye-are-baptized
AV
1Corinthians 1
1:14 eucaristw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
NA
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
NA
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
oti oudena hoti oudeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ebaptisa ei baptizO ei
vi Aor Act 1 Sg Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
I-AM-thankING
to-THE the
God
that
NOT-YET-ONE OF-YOU(p) I-DIPize not-one of-ye I-baptize
14 . I thank God that I baptized none of you, but Crispus and Gaius;
IF
NO
krispon kai gaion krispos kai gaios

CRISPUS
AND
GAIUS
1:15 ina
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
oti eis hoti eis

Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
emon emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
ebaptisqhte baptizO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
15 Lest any should say that I had baptized in mine own name.
THAT NO
ANY anyone
MAY-BE-sayING that
INTO THE
MY
NAME
YE-ARE-DIPizED ye-are-baptized ei ei
Cond
16 And I baptized also the household of Stephanas: besides, I know not whether I baptized any other.
1:16 ebaptisa de
baptizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
de
Conj
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
stefana oikon stephanas oikos

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
loipon loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
I-DIPize I-baptize tina tis

px Acc Sg m
YET AND also
THE
Stephanas
HOME household
rest NOT furthermore
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED IF I-am-aware
allon allos
a_ Acc Sg m
ebaptisa baptizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ANY
other
I-DIPize I-baptize cristos baptizein christos baptizO

n_ Nom Sg m vn Pres Act
1:17 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar apesteilen me gar apostellO egO

alla euaggelizesqai alla euaggelizO

Conj vn Pres Mid
NOT
for
commissions
ME
Part Neg
TO-BE-DIPizING but to-be-baptizing o ho
TO-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING to-be-bringing-the-well-message stauros tou stauros ho

17 . For Christ sent me not to baptize, but to preach the gospel: not with wisdom of words, lest the cross of Christ should be made of none effect.
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
kenwqh kenoO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
NOT
IN
WISDOM
OF-sayING of-word
THAT NO
MAY-BE-BEING-EMPTIED THE may-be-being-made-void
pale cross
OF-THE
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
staurou tois stauros ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Pl m
men men
Part
apollumenois apollumi
vp Pres mid/pas Dat Pl m
THE
saying word estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
for
THE
OF-THE
pale cross hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
to-THE
INDEED ones-beING-destroyED ones-perishing estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
18 For the preaching of the cross is to them that perish foolishness; but unto us which are saved it is the power of God.
mwria mOria
n_ Nom Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
swzomenois sOzO
vp Pres Pas Dat Pl m
dunamis qeou dunamis theos

INSIPIDity stupidity
IS
to-THE
YET ones-beING-SAVED US ones-being-saved to-us thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ABILITY power sofian twn sophia ho

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-God
it-IS
1:19 gegraptai
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar apolw gar apollumi

sofwn sophos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
t_ Gen Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-destroyING THE
WISDOM
OF-THE
WISE
AND
THE
19 For it is written, I will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and will bring to nothing the understanding of the prudent.
sunesin sunesis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
sunetwn aqethsw sunetos atheteO

a_ Gen Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
understanding OF-THE
intelligent
I-SHALL-BE-UN-PLACING I-shall-be-repudiating grammateus pou grammateus pou

1:20 pou
pou
Part Int
sofos sophos
a_ Nom Sg m
pou pou
Part Int
suzhthths suzEtEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg m
?-where WISE where ? wise-one ouci ouchi

Part Int
?-where WRITer where ? scribe o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
?-where TOGETHER-SEEKer OF-THE where ? discusser thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
eon
this
20 Where [is] the wise? where [is] the scribe? where [is] the disputer of this world? hath not God made foolish the wisdom of this world?
emwranen mOrainO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
sofian tou sophia ho

kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
NOT(emph.) makES-INSIPID THE not(emph.) ? makes-stupid
God
THE
WISDOM
OF-THE
SYSTEM world egnw ginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
1:21 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
ON-IF-BIND for since-in-fact
IN
THE
WISDOM
OF-THE
God
NOT
KNEW
THE
SYSTEM world
21 For after that in the wisdom of God the world by wisdom knew not God, it pleased God by the foolishness of preaching to save them that believe.
AV
1Corinthians 1
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sofias ton sophia ho

n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
eudokhsen o eudokeO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THRU THE through mwrias tou mOria ho

n_ Gen Sg f
WISDOM
THE
God
WELL-SEEMS delights
THE
God
THRU THE through
khrugmatos swsai tous kErugma sOzO ho

n_ Gen Sg n vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m
pisteuontas pisteuO
t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
PROCLAMATION
TO-SAVE THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing kai ellhnes sofian zhtousin kai hellEn sophia zEteO
Conj n_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Pl
22 For the Jews require a sign, and the Greeks seek after wisdom:
1:22 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
kai ioudaioi shmeia aitousin kai ioudaios sEmeion aiteO

Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ON-IF-BIND AND since-in-fact
JUDA-ans Jews
SIGNS
ARE-REQUESTING AND
GREEKS
WISDOM
ARE-SEEKING
1:23 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
khrussomen kErussO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
criston estaurwmenon christos stauroO

ioudaiois men ioudaios men

a_ Dat Pl m Part
skandalon skandalon
n_ Acc Sg n
WE
YET ARE-PROCLAIMING ANOINTED are-heralding Christ de de

Conj
HAVING-been-impalED to-JUDA-ans having-been-crucified to-Jews
INDEED SNARE
23 But we preach Christ crucified, unto the Jews a stumblingblock, and unto the Greeks foolishness;
eqnesin ethnos
n_ Dat Pl n
mwrian mOria
n_ Acc Sg f
to-NATIONS YET INSIPIDity stupidity
1:24 autois de
autos
pp Dat Pl m
de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
klhtois klEtos
a_ Dat Pl m
a_ Dat Pl m Part
kai ellhsin criston qeou kai hellEn christos theos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
to-them
YET THE the-ones
ones-CALLED JUDA-ans called Jews sofian sophia

n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDES AND bsboth
GREEKS
ANOINTED Christ
OF-God
24 But unto them which are called, both Jews and Greeks, Christ the power of God, and the wisdom of God.
dunamin kai qeou dunamis kai theos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ABILITY power
AND
OF-God
WISDOM
1:25 oti to
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
mwron mOros
a_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
sofwteron twn sophos ho

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn estin anthrOpos eimi

n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
that
THE
INSIPID stupidity asqenes tou asthenEs ho

a_ Nom Sg n
OF-THE
God
WISER
OF-THE
humans
IS
25 Because the foolishness of God is wiser than men; and the weakness of God is stronger than men.
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
iscuroteron twn ischuros ho

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
UN-FIRM weakness
OF-THE
God
STRONGER
OF-THE
humans
1:26 blepete
blepO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
gar thn gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
klhsin umwn klEsis humeis

adelfoi oti ou adelphos hoti ou

n_ Voc Pl m Conj Part Neg
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
sofoi sophos
a_ Nom Pl m
YE-ARE-lookING for be-ye-observing ! kata kata

Prep
THE
CALLing
OF-YOU(p) brothers of-ye brethren !
that
NOT
MANY
WISE
26 For ye see your calling, brethren, how that not many wise men after the flesh, not many mighty, not many noble, [are called]:
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
dunatoi ou dunatos ou
a_ Nom Pl m Part Neg
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
eugeneis eugenEs
a_ Nom Pl m
according-to FLESH
NOT
MANY
ABLE powerful kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
MANY
WELL-generateds noble qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
1:27 alla ta
alla
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mwra mOros
a_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
exelexato o eklegO ho
ina hina
Conj
but
THE
INSIPID OF-THE stupidity(p) tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
SYSTEM world
choosES
THE
God
THAT
kataiscunh kataischunO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
sofous kai ta sophos kai ho

a_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl n
asqenh asthenEs
a_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
exelexato eklegO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
27 But God hath chosen the foolish things of the world to confound the wise; and God hath chosen the weak things of the world to confound the things which are mighty;
He-MAY-BE-DOWN-VILING THE he-may-be-disgracing o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WISE
AND
THE
UN-FIRM OF-THE weakness(p) iscura ischuros

a_ Acc Pl n
SYSTEM world
choosES
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
kataiscunh kataischunO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
God
THAT He-MAY-BE-DOWN-VILING THE he-may-be-disgracing agenh agenEs

a_ Acc Pl n
STRONG
1:28 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
exouqenhmena exoutheneO
exelexato eklegO
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
AND
THE
UN-generated OF-THE ignoble
SYSTEM world
AND
THE
ones-HAVING-been-scornED choosES contemptible
28 And base things of the world, and things which are despised, hath God chosen, [yea], and things which are not, to bring to nought things that
AV
1Corinthians 1 - 1Corinthians 2
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
WH
kai
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
onta eimi
ina hina
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
onta eimi
are:
THE
God
THE-ones NO the(p)
BEING
THAT THE the(p)
ones-BEING being
katarghsh katargeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
He-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING he-should-be-discarding
1:29 opws
hopOs
Adv
mh mE
Part Neg
kauchshtai kauchaomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
29 That no flesh should glory in his presence.
WHICH-how NO so-that
SHOULD-BE-BOASTING EVERY at-all de de

Conj
FLESH
IN-VIEW in-sight-of os hos
OF-THE the
God
1:30 ex
ek
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
en en
Prep

egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
pr Nom Sg m
OUT OF-Him
YET YOU(p) ye apo apo

Prep
ARE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
WHO
WAS-BECOMED was-become
30 But of him are ye in Christ Jesus, who of God is made unto us wisdom, and righteousness, and sanctification, and redemption:
sofia sophia
n_ Nom Sg f
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dikaiosunh te dikaiosunE te
n_ Nom Sg f Part
kai agiasmos kai apolutrwsis kai hagiasmos kai apolutrOsis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
WISDOM
to-US
FROM God
t_ Nom Sg m
BESIDES AND
HOLYing hallowing en en
AND
31 That, according as it is written, He that glorieth, let him glory in the Lord.
1:31 ina
hina
Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kaucwmenos kauchaomai
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
Prep
THAT according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THE
one-BOASTING one-boasting
IN
Master Lord
kaucasqw kauchaomai
LET-him-BE-BOASTING let-him-be-boasting !
AV
1Corinthians 2
2:1 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
elqwn erchomai
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi hlqon adelphos erchomai

n_ Voc Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
kaq kata
Prep
AND-I
COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye sofias sophia

n_ Gen Sg f
brothers brethren ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
CAME
NOT
according-to
. And I, brethren, when I came to you, came not with excellency of speech or of wisdom, declaring unto you the testimony of God.
uperochn logou huperochE logos

h E
Part
kataggellwn kataggellO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
musthrion tou mustErion ho

superiority
OF-saying of-word
OR
OF-WISDOM DOWN-MESSAGING to-YOU(p) announcing to-ye
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
2:2 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ekrina gar krinO

ti tis
px Acc Sg n
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
for
I-JUDGE I-decide
ANY anything
TO-PERCEIVE IN YOU(p) among ye
IF
NO
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
For I determined not to know any thing among you, save Jesus Christ, and him crucified.
kai touton estaurwmenon kai houtos stauroO

Conj pd Acc Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg m
AND
this-One this-one
HAVING-been-impalED having-been-crucified en en
Prep
2:3 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
fobw phobos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tromw tromos
n_ Dat Sg m
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
egenomhn ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
And I was with you in weakness, and in fear, and in much trembling.
AND-I
IN
UN-FIRMness AND weakness
IN
FEAR
AND
IN
TREMBLing much
BECAME
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
2:4 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
khrugma kErugma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
AND
WH
THE
WH
saying word
WH
OF-ME
NA
AND
THE
NA
PROCLAMATION OF-ME heralding sofias sophia

n_ Gen Sg f
NA
NOT
IN
And my speech and my preaching [was] not with enticing words of man's wisdom, but in demonstration of the Spirit and of power:
peiqois sofias logois
peiqois peithos
a_ Dat Pl m
logois logos
n_ Dat Pl m
all en alla en
Conj Prep
apodeixei apodeixis
n_ Dat Sg f
PERSUASIVES persuasive pneumatos kai dunamews pneuma kai dunamis

OF-WISDOM
sayings words
but
IN
FROM-SHOW demonstration
OF-spirit
AND
OF-ABILITY of-power pistis pistis

n_ Nom Sg f
2:5 ina
hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
anqrwpwn all en anthrOpos alla en

THAT THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) NO of-ye
That your faith should not stand in the wisdom of men, but in the power of God.
MAY-BE
IN
WISDOM
OF-humans
but
IN
dunamei qeou dunamis theos

ABILITY power
OF-God
2:6 sofian de
sophia
n_ Acc Sg f
de
Conj
laloumen laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
teleiois sofian de teleios sophia de

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
WISDOM
YET WE-ARE-TALKING IN THE-ones mature we-are-speaking among the twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
WISDOM
YET NOT
OF-THE
eon
toutou oude houtos oude

pd Gen Sg m Adv
arcontwn tou archOn ho

aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou twn houtos ho

pd Gen Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
. Howbeit we speak wisdom among them that are perfect: yet not the wisdom of this world, nor of the princes of this world, that come to nought:
this
NOT-YET OF-THE neither
chiefs
OF-THE
eon
this
THE
katargoumenwn katargeO
ones-beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED ones-being-discarded
AV
1Corinthians 2
2:7 alla laloumen

alla
Conj
laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
sofian en sophia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
musthriw thn mustErion ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg f
apokekrummenhn apokruptO
but
WE-ARE-TALKING OF-God we-are-speaking prowrisen proorizO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WISDOM
IN
CLOSE-KEEP secret twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
one-HAVING-been-FROM-HID having-been-concealed doxan doxa

n_ Acc Sg f
But we speak the wisdom of God in a mystery, [even] the hidden [wisdom], which God ordained before the world unto our glory:
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pro pro
Prep
aiwnwn eis aiOn eis

n_ Gen Pl m Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
WHICH
BEFORE-SEEizES THE designates-beforehand oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
God
BEFORE THE
eons
INTO esteem glory
OF-US
2:8 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
arcontwn tou archOn ho

aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou egnwken houtos ginOskO

pd Gen Sg m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
gar gar
Conj
WHICH
NOT-YET-ONE OF-THE not-one ouk ou

Part Neg
chiefs
OF-THE
eon
this
HAS-KNOWN IF
for
Which none of the princes of this world knew: for had they known [it], they would not have crucified the Lord of glory.
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
an an
Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
estaurwsan stauroO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
THEY-KNOW
NOT
EVER THE
Master Lord a hos
OF-THE
esteem glory
THEY-impale they-crucify eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
2:9 alla kaqws

alla
Conj
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ofqalmos ouk ophthalmos ou

kai ous kai ous

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
pr Acc Pl n
but
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN WHICH which(p) hkousen akouO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
VIEWer eye
NOT
PERCEIVED
WH
AND
NA
EAR
ouk ou
Part Neg
kai epi kardian anqrwpou ouk kai epi kardia anthrOpos ou

Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m Part Neg
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
osa
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
But as it is written, Eye hath not seen, nor ear heard, neither have entered into the heart of man, the things which God hath prepared for them that love him.
NOT
HEARS
AND
ON
HEART
OF-human
NOT
UP-STEPPed ascended auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
WHICH which(p)
htoimasen o hetoimazO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agapwsin agapaO
makES-READY
THE
WH
God
NA
to-THE
Him
2:10 hmin
hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
gar
de de
Conj
apekaluyen o apokaluptO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
to-US
YET
FROM-COVERS reveals erauna ereunaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
God
THRU THE through baqh bathos

n_ Acc Pl n
spirit
10 But God hath revealed [them] unto us by his Spirit: for the Spirit searcheth all things, yea, the deep things of God.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar pneuma gar pneuma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
for
spirit
ALL
IS-SEARCHING AND THE even anqrwpwn ta anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
DEPTHS
OF-THE
God
2:11 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
gar oiden gar eidO

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpou ei anthrOpos ei
n_ Gen Sg m Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ANY who ? pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
for
HAS-PERCEIVED OF-humans is-acquainted-with anqrwpou to anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
THE(p)
OF-THE
human
IF
NO
THE
11 For what man knoweth the things of a man, save the spirit of man which is in him? even so the things of God knoweth no man, but the Spirit of God.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
outws kai ta houtOs kai ho

Adv Conj t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
spirit
OF-THE
human
THE
IN
it him pneuma pneuma

n_ Nom Sg n
thus
AND also
THE(p)
OF-THE
God
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
egnwken ginOskO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-KNOWN IF no-one
NO
THE
spirit
OF-THE
God
2:12 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma tou pneuma ho

kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
elabomen alla to lambanO alla ho

vi 2Aor Act 1 Pl Conj t_ Acc Sg n
WE
YET NOT
THE
spirit
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
GOT obtained ta ho
but
THE
12 Now we have received, not the spirit of the world, but the spirit which is of God; that we might know the things that are freely given to us of God.
pneuma to pneuma ho
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
eidwmen eidO
vs Perf Act 1 Pl
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Acc Pl n
spirit
THE
OUT OF-THE
God
THAT WE-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE the(p)
by
THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
carisqenta charizomai
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl n
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
God
BEING-gracED to-US being-graciously-given
AV
2:13 a
hos
pr Acc Pl n
kai laloumen kai laleO

ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
didaktois anqrwpinhs sofias logois all didaktos anthrOpinos sophia logos alla
a_ Dat Pl m a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f n_ Dat Pl m Conj
WHICH which(p) en en
Prep
AND also
WE-ARE-TALKING NOT we-are-speaking
IN
TEACHed taught
OF-human
WISDOM
sayings words
but
didaktois pneumatos pneumatikois pneumatika sugkrinontes didaktos pneuma pneumatikos pneumatikos sugkrinO
a_ Dat Pl m n_ Gen Sg n a_ Dat Pl n a_ Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
13 Which things also we speak, not in the words which man's wisdom teacheth, but which the Holy Ghost teacheth; comparing spiritual things with spiritual.
IN
TEACHed words-taught
OF-spirit
to-spirituals to-spiritual-words
spirituals spiritual-things ta ho
TOGETHER-JUDGING matching tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
2:14 yucikos de
psuchikos
a_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
anqrwpos ou anthrOpos ou
decetai dechomai

t_ Acc Pl n
soulish
YET human
NOT
IS-RECEIVING
THE OF-THE the-things dunatai dunamai

spirit
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
mwria mOria
n_ Nom Sg f
gar autw gar autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
gnwnai ginOskO
vn 2Aor Act
oti hoti
Conj
14 But the natural man receiveth not the things of the Spirit of God: for they are foolishness unto him: neither can he know [them], because they are spiritually discerned.
God
for
to-him
it-IS
AND
NOT
he-IS-ABLE
TO-KNOW that to-know-them
pneumatikws anakrinetai pneumatikOs anakrinO

Adv vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
spiritually
it-IS-beING-examinED
WH NA
2:15 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
pneumatikos anakrinei pneumatikos anakrinO

a_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
men
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
up hupo
Prep
15 But he that is spiritual judgeth all things, yet he himself is judged of no man.
THE
YET spiritual-one spiritual-one anakrinetai anakrinO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-examinING
THE
ALL
he
YET by
oudenos oudeis
a_ Gen Sg m
NOT-YET-ONE IS-beING-examinED no-one
2:16 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
gar egnw gar ginOskO

noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
sumbibasei sumbibazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ANY who ? hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
for
KNEW
MIND
OF-Master of-Lord ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
WHO
SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-STEPPING Him shall-be-deducing
16 For who hath known the mind of the Lord, that he may instruct him? But we have the mind of Christ.
de de
Conj
noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
WE
YET MIND
OF-ANOINTED ARE-HAVING of-Christ
AV
1Corinthians 3
3:1 kagw
kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
adelfoi ouk adelphos ou

n_ Voc Pl m Part Neg
hdunhqhn dunamai
vi Aor pasD 1 Sg Att
lalhsai umin laleO humeis

vn Aor Act pp 2 Dat Pl
ws pneumatikois all hOs pneumatikos alla

Adv a_ Dat Pl m Conj
AND-I
brothers brethren !
NOT
WAS-enABLED could cristw christos

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-TALK to-speak
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AS
to-spirituals to-spiritual-ones
but
. And I, brethren, could not speak unto you as unto spiritual, but as unto carnal, [even] as unto babes in Christ.
ws sarkinois ws nhpiois en hOs sarkinos hOs nEpios en

Adv a_ Dat Pl m Adv a_ Dat Pl m Prep
AS
to-FLESHy to-fleshy-ones
AS
to-minors
IN
ANOINTED Christ brwma brOma

n_ Acc Sg n
3:2 gala
gala
n_ Acc Sg n
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
epotisa potizO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
oupw oupO
Adv
gar edunasqe gar dunamai

all alla
Conj
oude oude
Adv
MILK
WH
YOU(p) ye
NA
I-DRINKize NOT I-give-to-drink nun dunasqe nun dunamai

Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
FOOD
NOT-as-yet for
YE-were-ABLE
but NOT-YET butnay not-yeteven
I have fed you with milk, and not with meat: for hitherto ye were not able [to bear it], neither yet now are ye able.
eti
eti eti
Adv
STILL
NOW YE-ARE-ABLE
3:3 eti
eti
Adv
gar sarkikoi este gar sarkikos eimi

Conj a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
opou hopou
Adv
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
zhlos zElos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai eris kai eris

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
STILL for
FLESHic fleshly
YE-ARE
THE-?-where for wheree kai kata kai kata

Conj Prep
IN YOU(p) among ye
BOILing jealousy
AND
STRIFE
For ye are yet carnal: for whereas [there is] among you envying, and strife, and divisions, are ye not carnal, and walk as men?
ouci ouchi
Part Int
sarkikoi este sarkikos eimi

anqrwpon peripateite anthrOpos peripateO

NOT(emph.) FLESHic not(emph.) ? fleshly
YE-ARE
AND
according-to human
YE-ARE-ABOUT-TREADING are-walking men men

Part
3:4 otan
hotan
Conj
gar legh gar legO

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
eteros heteros
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
For while one saith, I am of Paul; and another, I [am] of Apollos; are ye not carnal?
when-EVER for whenever egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
MAY-BE-sayING ANY anyone ouk ou

Part Neg
INDEED AM
OF-PAUL
DIFFERENT YET different-one
apollw apollOs
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpoi este anthrOpos eimi

of-APOLLOS NOT of-Apollos oun oun

Conj
humans
YE-ARE
3:5 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
apollws ti apollOs tis

n_ Nom Sg m pi Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
diakonoi diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
di dia
Prep
ANY what ? wn hos

pr Gen Pl m
THEN IS
APOLLOS
ANY what ?
YET IS
PAUL
THRU-SERVitors THRU servants through
. Who then is Paul, and who [is] Apollos, but ministers by whom ye believed, even as the Lord gave to every man?
episteusate kai ekastw ws o pisteuO kai hekastos hOs ho

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj a_ Dat Sg m Adv t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WHOM whom(p)
YE-BELIEVE
AND
to-EACH
AS
THE
Master Lord
GIVES
3:6 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
efuteusa apollws epotisen alla o phuteuO apollOs potizO alla ho

vi Aor Act 1 Sg n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
huxanen auxanO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
I have planted, Apollos watered; but God gave the increase.
plant
APOLLOS
DRINKizES irrigates futeuwn phuteuO
but
THE
God
GROWS-it-UP makes-it-grow-up oute oute

Conj
3:7 wste
hOste
Conj
oute oute
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AS-BESIDES NOT-BESIDES THE so-that neither potizwn potizO

one-plantING one-planting auxanwn auxanO

IS
ANY anything
NOT-BESIDES THE nor
So then neither is he that planteth any thing, neither he that watereth; but God that giveth the increase.
all o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
one-DRINKizING one-irrigating
but
THE
GROWING-it-UP God one-making-it-grow-up de de

Conj
3:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
futeuwn phuteuO
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
potizwn potizO
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
ekastos hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-plantING one-planting idion idios

a_ Acc Sg m
YET AND
THE
one-DRINKizING one-irrigating kata kata

Prep
ONE ARE for-one-thing idion idios

a_ Acc Sg m
EACH
Now he that planteth and he that watereth are one: and every man shall receive his own reward according to his own labour.
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
lhmyetai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kopon kopos
n_ Acc Sg m
YET THE
OWN
HIRE wages
SHALL-BE-GETTING according-to THE
OWN
toil
AV
1Corinthians 3
3:9 qeou
theos
n_ Gen Sg m
gar esmen gar eimi

sunergoi sunergos
a_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
gewrgion qeou geOrgion theos

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
oikodomh oikodomE
n_ Nom Sg f
OF-God
for
WE-ARE
TOGETHER-ACTers OF-God fellow-workers
LAND-ACT farm
OF-God
HOME-BUILDing building
For we are labourers together with God: ye are God's husbandry, [ye are] God's building.
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
YE-ARE
3:10 kata
kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ws sofos hOs sophos

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
according-to THE
grace
OF-THE
God
THE
BEING-GIVEN being-granted
to-ME
AS
WISE
arcitektwn qemelion eqhka architektOn themelios tithEmi

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epoikodomei epoikodomeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ekastos de hekastos de
a_ Nom Sg m Conj
10 According to the grace of God which is given unto me, as a wise masterbuilder, I have laid the foundation, and another buildeth thereon. But let every man take heed how he buildeth thereupon.
chief-ARTisan foreman blepetw blepO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
foundation
I-PLACE
other another
YET IS-ON-HOME-BUILDING EACH is-building-on-it each-one
YET
pws epoikodomei pOs epoikodomeO

LET-BE-lookING how let-him-be-bewaring !
he-IS-ON-HOME-BUILDING he-is-building-on-it oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
3:11 qemelion gar allon

themelios
n_ Acc Sg m
gar
Conj
allos
a_ Acc Sg m
dunatai dunamai
qeinai tithEmi
vn 2Aor Act
para para
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
11 . For other foundation can no man lay than that is laid, which is Jesus Christ.
foundation
for
other
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one can estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-PLACE BESIDE THE to-lay cristos christos

n_ Nom Sg m
keimenon keimai
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
one-LYING one-being-laid
WHICH
IS
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ qemelion themelios

n_ Acc Sg m
WH
3:12 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
epoikodomei epoikodomeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epi ton epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg m
crusion argurion
WH
IF
NA
YET ANY anyone

NA
IS-ON-HOME-BUILDING ON is-building-on
THE
foundation
12 Now if any man build upon this foundation gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, stubble;
cruson chrusos
n_ Acc Sg m
arguron arguros
n_ Acc Sg m
liqous timious xula lithos timios xulon

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl n
corton chortos
n_ Acc Sg m
kalamhn kalamE
n_ Acc Sg f
GOLD
SILVER
STONES
VALUable precious
WOOD wood(p)
FODDER grass
REED straw h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
3:13 ekastou to
hekastos
a_ Gen
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
faneron genhsetai phaneros ginomai

a_ Nom Sg n vi Fut midD 3 Sg
gar hmera gar hEmera

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
OF-EACH of-each-one dhlwsei dEloO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
work
apparent
SHALL-BE-BECOMING THE
for
DAY
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
puri pur
n_ Dat Sg n
apokaluptetai apokaluptO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai ekastou to kai hekastos ho

Conj a_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
13 Every man's work shall be made manifest: for the day shall declare it, because it shall be revealed by fire; and the fire shall try every man's work of what sort it is.
SHALL-BE-makING-EVIDENT that shall-be-making-evident-it opoion hopoios

a_ Nom Sg n
IN
FIRE
it-IS-beING-FROM-COVERED AND it-is-being-revealed

WH
OF-EACH of-each-one
THE
work
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pur pur
n_ Nom Sg n
auto
NA
auto autos
pp Nom Sg n
dokimasei dokimazO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
what-kind
it-IS
THE
FIRE
it
SHALL-BE-testING
3:14 ei
ei
Cond
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
menei menO
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
epoikodomhsen misqon epoikodomeO misthos

14 If any man's work abide which he hath built thereupon, he shall receive a reward.
IF
OF-ANY of-anyone
THE
work
SHALL-BE-REMAINING
WHICH
he-ON-HOME-BUILDS he-builds-on-it
HIRE wages
lhmyetai lambanO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
he-SHALL-BE-GETTING
3:15 ei
ei
Cond
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Nom Sg n
katakahsetai katakaiO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
zhmiwqhsetai zEmioO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
IF
OF-ANY of-anyone
THE
work
SHALL-BE-beING-DOWN-BURNED he-SHALL-BE-BEING-FINED he shall-be-being-burned-up he-shall-be-forfeiting-it
15 If any man's work shall be burned, he shall suffer loss: but he himself shall be saved; yet so as by fire.
AV
1Corinthians 3
de de
Conj
swqhsetai sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
outws de houtOs de
Adv Conj
ws dia hOs dia

Adv Prep
puros pur
n_ Gen Sg n
YET SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED thus
YET AS
THRU FIRE through qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
3:16 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti naos hoti naos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
WH WH WH
TEMPLE
NA
OF-God
YE-ARE
NA NA
AND
THE
spirit
16 . Know ye not that ye are the temple of God, and [that] the Spirit of God dwelleth in you?
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en umin oikei
oikei oikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-THE
God
IS-HOMING IN is-making-its-home ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
YOU(p) ye fqeirei phtheirO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
3:17 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
fqerei phtheirO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
IF
ANY anyone
THE
TEMPLE
OF-THE
God
IS-CORRUPTING SHALL-BE-CORRUPTING
17 If any man defile the temple of God, him shall God destroy; for the temple of God is holy, which [temple] ye are.
touton o houtos ho
pd Acc Sg m t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar naos gar naos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
agios hagios
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
this-one this-one oitines hostis

pr Nom Pl m
THE
God
THE
for
TEMPLE
OF-THE
God
HOLY
IS
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
WHICH-ANY ARE which-any
YOU(p) ye eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
3:18 mhdeis
mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
exapatatw exapataO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
sofos sophos
a_ Nom Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
en en
Prep
NO-YET-ONE self no-one himself umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
LET-BE-OUT-SEDUCING IF let-him-be-deluding ! aiwni aiOn

n_ Dat Sg m
ANY anyone genesqw ginomai
IS-SEEMING is-presuming
WISE
TO-BE
IN among
18 . Let no man deceive himself. If any man among you seemeth to be wise in this world, let him become a fool, that he may be wise.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
toutw mwros houtos mOros

pd Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
vm 2Aor midD 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye sofos sophos
IN
THE
eon
this
INSIPID stupid
LET-him-BE-BECOMING THAT he-MAY-BE-BECOMING let-him-be-becoming !
a_ Nom Sg m
WISE
3:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar sofia gar sophia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou mwria houtos mOria

pd Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
for
WISDOM
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
BESIDE THE
God
19 For the wisdom of this world is foolishness with God. For it is written, He taketh the wise in their own craftiness.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
drassomenos drassomai
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
sofous en sophos en
a_ Acc Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
IS
THE
One-CLUTCHING one-clutching
THE
WISE
IN
THE
panourgia autwn panourgia autos

cleverness craftiness
OF-them
3:20 kai palin kurios

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ginwskei tous ginOskO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
dialogismous twn dialogismos ho

sofwn sophos
a_ Gen Pl m
oti hoti
Conj
20 And again, The Lord knoweth the thoughts of the wise, that they are vain.
AND
AGAIN
Master Lord
IS-KNOWING
THE
OF-THE
WISE
that
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
mataioi mataios
a_ Nom Pl m
THEY-ARE
VAIN
3:21 wste
hOste
Conj
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
kaucasqw kauchaomai
en en
Prep
anqrwpois panta anthrOpos pas

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl n
gar umwn gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AS-BESIDES NO-YET-ONE LET-BE-BOASTING so-that no-one let-him-be-boasting !
IN
humans
ALL
for
OF-YOU(p) IS of-ye
21 . Therefore let no man glory in men. For all things are yours;
AV
3:22 eite
eite
Conj
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
eite eite
Conj
apollws eite apollOs eite

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
khfas kEphas
n_ Nom Sg m
eite eite
Conj
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
eite eite
Conj
IF-BESIDES PAUL whether zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
IF-BESIDES APOLLOS or qanatos eite thanatos eite

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
IF-BESIDES CEPHAS or eite eite

Conj
IF-BESIDES SYSTEM or world mellonta mellO

IF-BESIDES or
22 Whether Paul, or Apollos, or Cephas, or the world, or life, or death, or things present, or things to come; all are yours;
eite eite
Conj
enestwta enistEmi
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
LIFE
IF-BESIDES DEATH or
IF-BESIDES HAVING-IN-STOOD IF-BESIDES beING-ABOUT or things-being-present or things-impending
ALL
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
3:23 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
cristos de christos de
n_ Nom Sg m Conj
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
23 And ye are Christ's; and Christ [is] God's.
YOU(p) ye
YET OF-ANOINTED ANOINTED of-Christ Christ
YET OF-God
AV
1Corinthians 4
4:1 outws hmas

houtOs
Adv
hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
logizesqw logizomai
anqrwpos ws uphretas cristou anthrOpos hOs hupEretEs christos

n_ Nom Sg m Adv n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
thus
US
LET-BE-accountING let-him-be-reckoning ! qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
human
AS
OF-ANOINTED AND of-Christ
. Let a man so account of us, as of the ministers of Christ, and stewards of the mysteries of God.
oikonomous musthriwn oikonomos mustErion

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Pl n
HOME-LAWers administrators
OF-CLOSE-KEEPS OF-God of-secrets zhteitai zEteO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
4:2 wde loipon

hOde
Adv
loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
oikonomois ina oikonomos hina

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
Moreover it is required in stewards, that a man be found faithful.
here
rest it-IS-beING-SOUGHT IN furthermore
THE
THAT BELIEVing faithful
ANY any-such
eureqh heuriskO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BEING-FOUND
4:3 emoi
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
elaciston estin elachistos eimi

a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
uf umwn hupo humeis

Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
anakriqw anakrinO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
h E
Part
upo hupo
Prep
to-ME
YET INTO INFERIOR-most least all oude alla oude

Conj Adv
it-IS
THAT by
YOU(p) ye
I-MAY-BE-BEING-examinED OR
by
But with me it is a very small thing that I should be judged of you, or of man's judgment: yea, I judge not mine own self.
anqrwpinhs hmeras anthrOpinos hEmera

emauton anakrinw emautou anakrinO

human of-human
DAY
but
NOT-YET MYself neither
I-AM-examinING
4:4 ouden
oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
gar emautw sunoida gar emautou suneideO

Conj pf 1 Dat Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Sg
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
en en
Prep
toutw dedikaiwmai houtos dikaioO

pd Dat Sg n vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE for of-nothing o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-MYself
I-HAVE-been-conscious but I-have-been-conscious me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
NOT
IN
this
I-HAVE-been-JUSTIFIED
For I know nothing by myself; yet am I not hereby justified: but he that judgeth me is the Lord.
de de
Conj
anakrinwn anakrinO
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
YET One-examinING one-examining mh mE

Part Neg
ME
Master Lord ti tis

px Acc Sg n
IS
4:5 wste
hOste
Conj
pro pro
Prep
kairou kairos
n_ Gen Sg m
krinete krinO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AS-BESIDES NO so-that kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
BEFORE SEASON
ANY anything ta ho
BE-YE-JUDGING TILL be-ye-judging ! krupta kruptos

a_ Acc Pl n
EVER MAY-BE-COMING THE
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai fwtisei kai phOtizO

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
skotous kai skotos kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
t_ Acc Pl n
Therefore judge nothing before the time, until the Lord come, who both will bring to light the hidden things of darkness, and will make manifest the counsels of the hearts: and then shall every man have praise of God.
Master Lord
WHO
AND also
SHALL-BE-LIGHTenING THE shall-be-illuminating boulas boulE

n_ Acc Pl f
HIDDen OF-THE hidden-things
DARKness
AND
fanerwsei phaneroO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
kardiwn kai tote o kardia kai tote ho

n_ Gen Pl f Conj Adv t_ Nom Sg m
epainos epainos
n_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-makING-APPEAR THE shall-be-manifesting genhsetai ginomai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
COUNSELS OF-THE
HEARTS
AND
then
THE
ON-PRAISE applause
ekastw apo hekastos apo

a_ Dat Sg m Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-BECOMING to-EACH to-each-one
FROM THE
God
4:6 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
adelfoi meteschmatisa eis adelphos metaschEmatizO eis

n_ Voc Pl m vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep
emauton kai apollwn di emautou kai apollOs dia

pf 1 Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
these YET brothers these-things brethren ! ina hina

Conj
I-after-FIGURE I-transfer-in-a-figure to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
INTO MYself
AND
APOLLOS
THRU YOU(p) because-of ye ina hina

Conj
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
maqhte manthanO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
uper a huper hos

Prep pr Nom Pl n
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
And these things, brethren, I have in a figure transferred to myself and [to] Apollos for your sakes; that ye might learn in us not to think [of men] above that which is written, that no one of you be puffed up for one against another.
THAT IN
US
YE-MAY-BE-LEARNING THE
NO
OVER above
WHICH which(p)
HAS-been-WRITTEN THAT NO
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
uper tou huper ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
fusiousqe phusioO
vs Pres Pas 2 Pl
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
eterou heteros
a_ Gen Sg m
ONE
OVER
THE
ONE
YE-MAY-BE-beING-INFLATED DOWN ye-may-be-being-puffed-up against
OF-THE the
AV
1Corinthians 4
4:7 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
gar se gar su
Conj pp 2 Acc Sg
diakrinei diakrinO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
ANY who ? elabes lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
for
YOU
IS-THRU-JUDGING ANY is-making-to-discriminate what ? ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
YET YOU-ARE-HAVING WHICH
NOT
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
kai elabes kai lambanO

kaucasai kauchaomai
ws mh hOs mE
Adv Part Neg
labwn lambanO
. For who maketh thee to differ [from another]? and what hast thou that thou didst not receive? now if thou didst receive [it], why dost thou glory, as if thou hadst not received [it]?
YOU-GOT you-obtained
IF
YET AND also
YOU-GOT you-obtained este eimi
ANY why ? hdh EdE

Adv
YOU-ARE-BOASTING AS
NO
GETTING obtaining-it hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
8
4:8 hdh
EdE
Adv
kekoresmenoi korennumi
eplouthsate cwris plouteO chOris

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ALREADY HAVING-been-SATED YE-ARE sated ebasileusate kai ofelon ge basileuO kai ophelon ge
vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Inj Part
ALREADY YE-are-RICH
apart-from US
Now ye are full, now ye are rich, ye have reigned as kings without us: and I would to God ye did reign, that we also might reign with you.
ebasileusate ina basileuO hina


Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-reign
AND
OWE-YOU would-that !
SURELY YE-reign
THAT AND also
WE
to-YOU(p) with-ye
sumbasileuswmen sumbasileuO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
SHOULD-BE-TOGETHER-reignING should-be-reigning-together
4:9 dokw
dokeO
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
apostolous escatous apostolos eschatos

I-AM-SEEMING I-am-supposing
for
THE
God
US
THE
commissioners apostles tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
LAST
apedeixen ws epiqanatious oti qeatron egenhqhmen apodeiknumi hOs epithanatios hoti theatron ginomai
vi Aor Act 3 Sg Adv a_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg n vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
For I think that God hath set forth us the apostles last, as it were appointed to death: for we are made a spectacle unto the world, and to angels, and to men.
FROM-SHOWS AS demonstrates aggelois aggelos

n_ Dat Pl m
ON-DEATHed death-doomed
that
WE-WERE-BECOMED to-THE we-were-become
SYSTEM world
AND
kai anqrwpois kai anthrOpos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
to-MESSENGERS AND
to-humans
4:10 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
mwroi mOros
a_ Nom Pl m
dia dia
Prep
criston umeis christos humeis

n_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
fronimoi phronimos
a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
cristw hmeis christos hEmeis

n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Nom Pl
WE
INSIPID-ones THRU ANOINTED stupid because-of Christ de de

Conj
YOU(p) ye endoxoi endoxos

a_ Nom Pl m
YET DISPOSED-ones IN prudent hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
ANOINTED Christ
WE
asqeneis umeis asthenEs humeis

iscuroi umeis ischuros humeis

de de
Conj
atimoi atimos
a_ Nom Pl m
10 We [are] fools for Christ's sake, but ye [are] wise in Christ; we [are] weak, but ye [are] strong; ye [are] honourable, but we [are] despised.
UN-FIRM weak
YOU(p) ye
YET STRONG
YOU(p) ye
IN-esteemed WE glorious
YET UN-VALUed dishonored kai diywmen kai dipsaO

4:11 acri ths

achri
Prep
ho
t_ Gen Sg f
arti arti
Adv
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
kai peinwmen kai peinaO

kai kai
Conj
UNTIL THE
at-PRESENT HOUR
AND also
WE-ARE-HUNGERING AND
WE-ARE-THIRSTING AND are-thirsting
11 Even unto this present hour we both hunger, and thirst, and are naked, and are buffeted, and have no certain dwellingplace;
gumniteuomen gumnEteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai kolafizomeqa kai kolaphizO

kai astatoumen kai astateO

WE-ARE-beING-NAKED AND are-being-naked
WE-ARE-beING-FROM-CHASTENED AND are-being-buffeted ergazomenoi ergazomai

WE-ARE-UN-STANDING are-being-unsettled
12 And labour, working with our own hands: being reviled, we bless; being persecuted, we suffer it:
4:12 kai kopiwmen

kai
Conj
kopiaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
idiais cersin loidoroumenoi idios cheir loidoreO

a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
AND
WE-ARE-toilING workING are-toiling diwkomenoi diOkO

to-THE
OWN
HANDS
beING-say-SPEARED being-reviled
eulogoumen eulogeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
anecomeqa anechomai
WE-ARE-blessING beING-CHASED being-persecuted
WE-ARE-toleratING we-are-bearing-with-it ws perikaqarmata hOs perikatharma

Adv n_ Nom Pl n
4:13 dusfhmoumenoi parakaloumen

dusphEmeO
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
beING-ILL-AVERRED being-calumniated
WE-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING AS we-are-entreating
ABOUT-cleanse-effects OF-THE offscourings
SYSTEM world
13 Being defamed, we intreat: we are made as the filth of the world, [and are] the offscouring of all things unto this day.
AV
1Corinthians 4
egenhqhmen ginomai
vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
pantwn periyhma pas peripsEma

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg n
ews arti heOs arti

Conj Adv
WE-WERE-BECOMED OF-ALL we-were-become of-all-things
ABOUT-STROKE-effect TILL scum umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
at-PRESENT
4:14 ouk
ou
Part Neg
entrepwn entrepO
grafw graphO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
all ws tekna alla hOs teknon

Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
agaphta agapEtos
a_ Nom Pl n
NOT
WH
abashING to-be-abashing
NA
YOU(p) ye
14 . I write not these things to shame you, but as my beloved sons I warn [you].
I-AM-WRITING these but these-things
AS
offsprings children
OF-ME
beLOVED
nouqetwn
nouqetwn noutheteO
admonishING
4:15 ean
ean
Cond
gar murious gar murioi

Conj a_ Acc Pl m
paidagwgous echte paidagOgos echO

n_ Acc Pl m vs Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
cristw all christos alla

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
IF-EVER for
MYRIADS boy-LEADERS ten-thousands escorts
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING IN
ANOINTED Christ
but NOT nevertheless umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
pollous pateras en polus patEr en

gar cristw ihsou gar christos iEsous

Conj n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou egw euaggelion egO

n_ Gen Sg n pp 1 Nom Sg
15 For though ye have ten thousand instructors in Christ, yet [have ye] not many fathers: for in Christ Jesus I have begotten you through the gospel.
MANY
FATHERS
IN
for
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THRU THE through
WELL-MESSAGE I
YOU(p) ye
egennhsa gennaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
generate beget
4:16 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
mimhtai mou mimEtEs egO

ginesqe ginomai
16 Wherefore I beseech you, be ye followers of me.
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING THEN YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye
IMITATors
OF-ME
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
4:17 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
epemya pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
timoqeon os timotheos hos

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
teknon teknon
n_ Nom Sg n
I-SEND
to-YOU(p) to-ye kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
Timothy
WHO
IS
OF-ME
offspring child odous hodos

n_ Acc Pl f
agaphton kai piston en agapEtos kai pistos en

a_ Acc Sg n Conj a_ Acc Sg n Prep
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
anamnhsei anamimnEskO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
17 . For this cause have I sent unto you Timotheus, who is my beloved son, and faithful in the Lord, who shall bring you into remembrance of my ways which be in Christ, as I teach every where in every church.
beLOVED
AND
BELIEVing faithful en en
Prep
IN
Master Lord ihsou iEsous
WHO
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-UP-REMINDING THE shall-be-reminding of-the pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
WAYS
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
pantacou en pantachou en
Adv Prep
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-ME
THE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
according-AS EVERY-SOIL everywhere
IN
EVERY
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
didaskw didaskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-TEACHING
4:18 ws mh
hOs
Adv
mE
Part Neg
ercomenou erchomai
de de
Conj
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
efusiwqhsan tines phusioO tis

vi Aor Pas 3 Pl px Nom Pl m
AS
NO
OF-COMING
YET OF-ME
TOWARD YOU(p) ye ean ean

Cond
18 Now some are puffed up, as though I would not come to you.
WERE-INFLATED were-puffed-up kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
ANY some
19 But I will come to you shortly, if the Lord will, and will know, not the speech of them which are puffed up, but the power.
4:19 eleusomai
erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
de de
Conj
tacews pros tacheOs pros

Adv Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qelhsh thelO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-COMING YET SWIFTly
TOWARD YOU(p) ye logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
IF-EVER THE
Master Lord
SHOULD-BE-WILLING
kai gnwsomai kai ginOskO

ou ou
Part Neg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
pefusiwmenwn phusioO
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
AND
I-SHALL-BE-KNOWING NOT
THE
saying word
OF-THE
ones-HAVING-been-INFLATED but ones-having-been-puffed-up
THE
dunamin dunamis
n_ Acc Sg f
ABILITY power
AV
4:20 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
all en alla en
Conj Prep
dunamei dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
20 For the kingdom of God [is] not in word, but in power.
NOT
for
IN
saying word en en
THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
but
IN
ABILITY power en en
Prep
4:21 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
rabdw rhabdos
n_ Dat Sg f
elqw erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
h E
Part
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
Prep
ANY what ?
YE-ARE-WILLING IN
ROD
I-MAY-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye
21 What will ye? shall I come unto you with a rod, or in love, and [in] the spirit of meekness?
OR
IN
LOVE
pneumati te pneuma te
n_ Dat Sg n Part
prauthtos prautEs
n_ Gen Sg f
spirit to-spirit
BESIDES OF-MEEKness
AV
1Corinthians 5
5:1 olws akouetai

holOs
Adv
akouO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
porneia porneia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai toiauth porneia kai toioutos porneia

Conj pd Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
WHOLly actually oude oude

Adv
IS-beING-HEARD IN YOU(p) it-is-being-heard among ye tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
PROSTITUTION AND
such
PROSTITUTION WHICH-ANY which-any tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
eqnesin wste ethnos hOste

n_ Dat Pl n Conj
gunaika tina gunE tis

n_ Acc Sg f px Acc Sg f
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
. It is reported commonly [that there is] fornication among you, and such fornication as is not so much as named among the Gentiles, that one should have his father's wife.
NOT-YET IN THE not-yeteven among
NATIONS
AS-BESIDES WOMAN so-that wife este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ANY someone
OF-THE
FATHER
TO-BE-HAVING
5:2 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
pefusiwmenoi phusioO
kai ouci kai ouchi

Conj Part Int
mallon epenqhsate ina mallon pentheO hina

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj
AND
YOU(p) ye
HAVING-been-INFLATED ARE having-been-puffed-up ek ek

Prep
AND
NOT(emph.) RATHER not(emph.) ? to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
YE-MOURN
THAT
And ye are puffed up, and have not rather mourned, that he that hath done this deed might be taken away from among you.
arqh airO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
praxas prassO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-BEING-LIFTED OUT OF-MIDst may-be-being-taken-away
OF-YOU(p) THE-one of-ye the-one tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
THE
ACT
this
PRACTISing committing de de
Conj
5:3 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
men men
Part
gar apwn gar apeimi

Conj vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
swmati parwn sOma pareimi

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
INDEED for
FROM-BEING being-absent
to-THE
BODY
BESIDE-BEING being-present
YET to-THE
pneumati hdh pneuma EdE

n_ Dat Sg n Adv
kekrika krinO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ws parwn hOs pareimi

Adv vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
outws touto houtOs houtos

Adv pd Acc Sg n
For I verily, as absent in body, but present in spirit, have judged already, as though I were present, [concerning] him that hath so done this deed,
spirit
ALREADY HAVE-JUDGED AS
THE-one the-one
thus
this
katergasamenon katergazomai
vp Aor midD Acc Sg m
DOWN-ACTing effecting
5:4 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
sunacqentwn sunagO
vp Aor Pas Gen Pl m
IN
THE
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
OF-BEING-TOGETHER-LED of-being-gathered dunamei tou dunamis ho

In the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, when ye are gathered together, and my spirit, with the power of our Lord Jesus Christ,
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg n
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pneumatos sun pneuma sun

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-YOU(p) AND ye hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-THE the
MY of-me
spirit
ABILITY power
OF-THE
Master Lord
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-US
JESUS
5:5 paradounai ton

paradidOmi
vn 2Aor Act
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
toiouton tw toioutos ho
pd Acc Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
satana satanas
n_ Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
oleqron olethros
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos sarx
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BESIDE-GIVE THE to-give-up ina hina

Conj
such
to-THE
SATAN (adversary) INTO WHOLE-RUIN OF-THE Satan extermination th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
FLESH
To deliver such an one unto Satan for the destruction of the flesh, that the spirit may be saved in the day of the Lord Jesus.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
swqh sOzO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
THAT THE
spirit
MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED IN
THE
DAY
OF-THE
Master Lord oti mikra hoti mikros

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
5:6 ou
ou
Part Neg
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kauchma umwn kauchEma humeis

n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
zumh zumE
n_ Nom Sg f
NOT
IDEAL
THE
BOAST
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
Your glorying [is] not good. Know ye not that a little leaven leaveneth the whole lump?
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware
LITTLE
FERMENT leaven
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
furama zumoi phurama zumoO

WHOLE
THE
KNEADing
IS-FERMENTING is-leavening palaian zumhn palaios zumE

5:7 ekkaqarate thn

ekkathairO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
hte eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
neon neos
a_ Nom Sg n
furama phurama
n_ Nom Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
OUT-clean clean-out-ye !
THE
OLD
FERMENT THAT YE-MAY-BE leaven
YOUNG fresh
KNEADing
according-AS
. Purge out therefore the old leaven, that ye may be a new lump, as ye are unleavened. For even Christ our passover is sacrificed for us:
AV
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
azumoi azumos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai gar to kai gar ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pasca pascha
Aramaic
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
etuqh thuO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
YE-ARE
UN-FERMENTED AND unleavened also eortazwmen heortazO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
for
THE
PASSOVER OF-US
WAS-SACRIFICED ANOINTED Christ en en

Prep
5:8 wste
hOste
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
zumh zumE
n_ Dat Sg f
palaia mhde palaios mEde

a_ Dat Sg f Conj
zumh zumE
n_ Dat Sg f
kakias kakia
n_ Gen Sg f
AS-BESIDES WE-MAY-BE-FESTIVALizING NO so-that we-may-be-keeping-the-festival kai ponhrias kai ponEria

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
IN
FERMENT OLD leaven
NO-YET IN nor-yet
FERMENT OF-EVIL leaven
all en alla en
Conj Prep
azumois azumos
a_ Dat Pl n
eilikrineias kai alhqeias eilikrineia kai alEtheia

Therefore let us keep the feast, not with old leaven, neither with the leaven of malice and wickedness; but with the unleavened [bread] of sincerity and truth.
AND
OF-wickedness but wickedness umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
UN-FERMENTEDS OF-sincerity unleavened-bread(p) th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
AND
TRUTH
5:9 egraya
graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
epistolh mh epistolE mE
sunanamignusqai sunanamignumi
vn Pres Mid
pornois pornos
n_ Dat Pl m
I-WRITE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
. I wrote unto you in an epistle not to company with fornicators:
IN
THE
letter epistle
NO
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-UP-MIXED to-paramours to-be-commingling-with paramours kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
5:10 ou
ou
Part Neg
pantws tois pantOs ho

Adv t_ Dat Pl m
pornois tou pornos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
toutou h houtos E
pd Gen Sg m Part
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pleonektais pleonektEs
n_ Dat Pl m
NOT
ALL-ly altogether h E
Part
to-THE with-the
paramours
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
this
OR
to-THE the tou ho
MORE-HAVers greedy kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
kai arpaxin kai harpax

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
eidwlolatrais epei wfeilete ara eidOlolatrEs epei opheilO ara

n_ Dat Pl m Conj vi impf Act 2 Pl Part
ek ek
Prep
10 Yet not altogether with the fornicators of this world, or with the covetous, or extortioners, or with idolaters; for then must ye needs go out of the world.
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
SNATCHers OR extortionate
idolaters
since else
YE-OWED ye-ought
CONSEQUENTLY OUT OF-THE
SYSTEM world
exelqein exerchomai
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-OUT-COMING to-be-coming-out
5:11 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
egraya graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
vn Pres Mid
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
NOW YET I-WRITE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NO
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-UP-MIXED IF-EVER ANY to-be-commingling-with anyone h E

Part
brother
onomazomenos h onomazO eimi

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Part / vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
pornos pornos
n_ Nom Sg m
pleonekths h pleonektEs E
n_ Nom Sg m Part
eidwlolatrhs h eidOlolatrEs E
n_ Nom Sg m Part
11 But now I have written unto you not to keep company, if any man that is called a brother be a fornicator, or covetous, or an idolater, or a railer, or a drunkard, or an extortioner; with such an one no not to eat.
beING-NAMED
MAY-BE he-may-be mequsos h methusos E

n_ Nom Sg m Part
paramour
OR
MORE-HAVer greedy
OR
idolater
OR
loidoros h loidoros E
a_ Nom Sg m Part
arpax harpax
a_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
toioutw mhde toioutos mEde

pd Dat Sg m Conj
sunesqiein sunesthiO
vn Pres Act
say-SPEARer reviler
OR
DRUNKard
OR
SNATCHer extortioner
to-THE the
such such-one
NO-YET TO-BE-TOGETHER-EATING not-yeteven to-be-eating-togetherwith ouci ouchi

Part Int
5:12 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
exw exO
Adv
krinein krinO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
esw umeis esO humeis

Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
ANY what ? krinete krinO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
for
to-ME
THE-ones the-ones
OUT TO-BE-JUDGING NOT(emph.) THE-ones outside not(emph.) ? the-ones
within
YOU(p) ye
12 For what have I to do to judge them also that are without? do not ye judge them that are within?
ARE-JUDGING
5:13 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
de de
Conj
exw exO
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
krinei krinO
exarate exairO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ponhron ponEros
a_ Acc Sg m
THE-ones the-ones ex ek
Prep
YET OUT THE outside autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
God
IS-JUDGING
OUT-LIFT expel-ye !
THE
wicked wicked-one
13 But them that are without God judgeth. Therefore put away from among yourselves that wicked person.
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OUT OF-YOU(p) SAME of-ye selves
AV
1Corinthians 6
6:1 tolma
tolmaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
pragma pragma
n_ Acc Sg n
ecwn echO
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
IS-DARING
ANY anyone
OF-YOU(p) PRACTISE HAVING of-ye matter adikwn kai ouci adikos kai ouchi
a_ Gen Pl m Conj Part Int
TOWARD THE
. Dare any of you, having a matter against another, go to law before the unjust, and not before the saints?
krinesqai krinO
vn Pres Pas
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
TO-BE-beING-JUDGED ON
OF-THE the
UN-JUST unjust oti oi hoti ho

Conj
AND
NOT(emph.) ON not(emph.) ? agioi hagios

a_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE the
HOLY-ones saints krinousin krinO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
6:2 h
E
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
t_ Nom Pl m
OR
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware krinetai krinO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
THE
HOLY-ones THE saints kosmos kosmos

n_ Nom Sg m
SYSTEM world este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
SHALL-BE-JUDGING AND
ei ei
Cond
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anaxioi anaxios
a_ Nom Pl m
krithriwn kritErion
n_ Gen Pl n
Do ye not know that the saints shall judge the world? and if the world shall be judged by you, are ye unworthy to judge the smallest matters?
IF
IN
YOU(p) ye
IS-beING-JUDGED THE
SYSTEM world
UN-WORTHY YE-ARE unworthy
OF-JUDGE-instruments of-tribunals
elacistwn elachistos
a_ Gen Pl n
INFERIOR-most least
6:3 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti aggelous hoti aggelos

Conj n_ Acc Pl m
krinoumen krinO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
mhti mEti
Part Int
ge ge
Part
biwtika biOtikos
a_ Acc Pl n
Know ye not that we shall judge angels? how much more things that pertain to this life?
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware oun oun

Conj
MESSENGERS WE-SHALL-BE-JUDGING NO-ANY SURELY livelihoodic not ? life's-affairs ean ean

Cond
6:4 biwtika men

biOtikos
a_ Acc Pl n
men
Part
krithria kritErion
n_ Acc Pl n
echte echO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
exouqenhmenous exoutheneO
livelihoodic life's-affairs en en
Prep
INDEED THEN JUDGE-instruments IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-HAVING THE tribunals ekklhsia toutous kaqizete ekklEsia houtos kathizO
n_ Dat Sg f pd Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ones-HAVING-been-scornED being-contemptible
If then ye have judgments of things pertaining to this life, set them to judge who are least esteemed in the church.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
IN
THE
OUT-CALLED these ecclesia entrophn umin entropE humeis

YE-ARE-seatING
6:5 pros
pros
Prep
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
outws ouk houtOs ou

Adv Part Neg
eni eni
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
TOWARD abashment
to-YOU(p) to-ye os hos

pr Nom Sg m
I-AM-sayING thus I-am-saying-this dunhsetai dunamai

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
NOT
IN-IS there-is ana meson ana mesos

Prep
IN YOU(p) among ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
I speak to your shame. Is it so, that there is not a wise man among you? no, not one that shall be able to judge between his brethren?
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
sofos sophos
a_ Nom Sg m
diakrinai diakrinO
vn Aor Act
adelfou adelphos
n_ Gen Sg m
a_ Acc Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE WISE not-one wise-man autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
WHO
SHALL-BE-ABLE TO-THRU-JUDGE UP to-adjudicate
MIDst
OF-THE
brother brethren
OF-him
6:6 alla adelfos meta adelfou krinetai

alla
Conj
adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
meta
Prep
adelphos
n_ Gen Sg m
krinO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg

Conj pd Nom Sg n
epi apistwn epi apistos

Prep a_ Gen Pl m
But brother goeth to law with brother, and that before the unbelievers.
but
brother
WITH
WH
brother
NA
IS-beING-JUDGED AND is-suing olws holOs

Adv
this
ON
UN-BELIEVing-ones unbelievers oti krimata hoti krima

Conj n_ Acc Pl n
7
6:7 hdh
EdE
Adv
men men
Part
oun
oun oun
Conj
htthma hEttEma
n_ Nom Sg n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ALREADY INDEED
THEN
WHOLly DIMINISH to-YOU(p) absolutely discomfiture to-ye ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
it-IS
that
JUDGments lawsuits dia dia

Prep
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
meq meta
Prep
eautwn dia heautou dia

pf 3 Gen Pl m Prep
ouci ouchi
Part Int
mallon adikeisqe mallon adikeO

Now therefore there is utterly a fault among you, because ye go to law one with another. Why do ye not rather take wrong? why do ye not rather [suffer yourselves to] be defrauded?
YE-ARE-HAVING WITH selves withamong yourselves ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
NOT(emph.) RATHER not(emph.) ?
YE-ARE-beING-injurED THRU because-of
ouci ouchi
Part Int
mallon apostereisqe mallon apostereO

ANY what ?
NOT(emph.) RATHER not(emph.) ?
YE-ARE-beING-deprivED ye-are-being-cheated
AV
1Corinthians 6
6:8 alla umeis

alla
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
adikeite kai apostereite kai touto adikeO kai apostereO kai houtos
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj pd Acc Sg n
adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
but
YOU(p) ye ouk ou
Part Neg
Nay, ye do wrong, and defraud, and that [your] brethren.
ARE-injurING
AND
ARE-deprivING are-cheating
AND
this
brothers to-brethren
9
6:9 h
E
Part
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti adikoi hoti adikos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
basileian ou basileia ou
OR
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware mh mE

Part Neg
UN-JUST unjust-ones
OF-God
KINGdom
NOT
klhronomhsousin klEronomeO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
planasqe planaO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
oute oute
Conj
pornoi pornos
n_ Nom Pl m
oute oute
Conj
. Know ye not that the unrighteous shall not inherit the kingdom of God? Be not deceived: neither fornicators, nor idolaters, nor adulterers, nor effeminate, nor abusers of themselves with mankind,
SHALL-BE-tenantING NO shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of eidwlolatrai oute eidOlolatrEs oute

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
BE-beING-STRAYED NOT-BESIDES paramours be-ye-being-deceived ! neither moicoi moichos

n_ Nom Pl m
NOT-BESIDES nor arsenokoitai arsenokoitEs

n_ Nom Pl m
oute oute
Conj
malakoi oute malakos oute

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
idolaters
NOT-BESIDES ADULTERers NOT-BESIDES SOFT-ones nor nor catamites kleptai oute kleptEs oute
n_ Nom Pl m Conj
NOT-BESIDES sodomites nor mequsoi ou methusos ou

6:10 oute
oute
Conj
pleonektai ou pleonektEs ou
loidoroi loidoros
a_ Nom Pl m
ouc ou
Part Neg
NOT-BESIDES thieves nor
NOT-BESIDES MORE-HAVers nor greedy-ones klhronomhsousin klEronomeO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
NOT
DRUNKards
NOT
say-SPEARers NOT revilers
10 Nor thieves, nor covetous, nor drunkards, nor revilers, nor extortioners, shall inherit the kingdom of God.
arpages basileian qeou harpax basileia theos

a_ Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
SNATCHers KINGdom extortioners
OF-God
SHALL-BE-tenantING shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of hte eimi

vi impf vxx 2 Pl
6:11 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
alla apelousasqe alla apolouO

Conj vi Aor Mid 2 Pl
alla hgiasqhte alla hagiazO

alla alla
Conj
AND
these
ANY some en en
Prep
YE-WERE
but
YE-are-FROM-BATHED but ye-are-bathed-off kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
WH
YE-ARE-HOLYizED but ye-are-hallowed ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
11 And such were some of you: but ye are washed, but ye are sanctified, but ye are justified in the name of the Lord Jesus, and by the Spirit of our God.
edikaiwqhte dikaioO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

hmwn
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
YE-WERE-JUSTIFIED IN
THE
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati tou pneuma ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
IN
THE
spirit
OF-THE
God
OF-US
6:12 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ALL
to-ME me
IS-allowed
but
NOT
ALL
IS-beING-expedient ALL
to-ME me
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
exousiasqhsomai exousiazO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
upo hupo
Prep
tinos tis
px Gen Sg n
12 . All things are lawful unto me, but all things are not expedient: all things are lawful for me, but I will not be brought under the power of any.
IS-allowed
but
NOT
SHALL-BE-BEING-authorityizED UNDER ANY shall-be-being-put-under-its-authority by anything koilia kai h koilia kai ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg f
6:13 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
brwmata th brOma ho
n_ Nom Pl n t_ Dat Sg f
koilia koilia
n_ Nom Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
brwmasin o brOma ho
n_ Dat Pl n t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THE
FOODS
to-THE
CAVITY bowel
AND
THE
CAVITY bowel
to-THE
FOODS
THE
YET
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai tauthn kai tauta kai houtos kai houtos

Conj pd Acc Sg f Conj pd Acc Pl n
katarghsei katargeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
13 Meats for the belly, and the belly for meats: but God shall destroy both it and them. Now the body [is] not for fornication, but for the Lord; and the Lord for the body.
God
AND also
this
AND
these
SHALL-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING THE shall-be-discarding kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
YET BODY
NOT
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
porneia porneia
n_ Dat Sg f
alla tw alla ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati sOma
n_ Dat Sg n
to-THE
PROSTITUTION but
to-THE
Master Lord
AND
THE
Master Lord
to-THE
BODY
6:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai hmas kai hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Acc Pl
exegerei exegeirO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
14 And God hath both raised up the Lord, and will also raise up us by his own power.
THE
YET God
AND also
THE
Master Lord
ROUSES
AND
US
SHALL-BE-OUT-ROUSING shall-be-rousing-up
AV
1Corinthians 6
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
dunamews autou dunamis autos

THRU THE through
ABILITY power oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
OF-Him
6:15 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oti ta hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
swmata umwn sOma humeis

n_ Nom Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware oun oun

Conj
THE
BODIES
OF-YOU(p) MEMBERS OF-ANOINTED IS of-ye of-Christ pornhs pornE

n_ Gen Sg f
aras airO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou poihsw christos poieO

n_ Gen Sg m vs Aor Act 1 Sg
15 Know ye not that your bodies are the members of Christ? shall I then take the members of Christ, and make [them] the members of an harlot? God forbid.
LIFTing taking-away melh melos

n_ Acc Pl n
THEN THE
MEMBERS OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
I-SHOULD-BE-makING OF-PROSTITUTE I-should-be-making-them
mh mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
MEMBERS NO
WH NA
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
6:16
h E
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kollwmenos kollaO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pornh pornE
n_ Dat Sg f
Part
OR
NOT
THE
one-beING-JOINED one-being-joined oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
to-THE
PROSTITUTE
16 What? know ye not that he which is joined to an harlot is one body? for two, saith he, shall be one flesh.
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
esontai gar fhsin eimi gar phEmi

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
duo duo
ni numeral
eis eis
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
ONE
BODY
IS
SHALL-BE
for
He-IS-AVERRING THE
TWO
INTO FLESH
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
ONE
6:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kollwmenos kollaO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
17 But he that is joined unto the Lord is one spirit.
THE
YET one-beING-JOINED one-joining thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-THE
Master Lord
ONE
spirit
IS
6:18 feugete
pheugO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
porneian porneia
n_ Acc Sg f
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
amarthma o hamartEma hos

n_ Nom Sg n pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
BE-FLEEING be-ye-fleeing !
THE
PROSTITUTION EVERY
miss-effect penalty-of-sin o ho
WHICH
IF-EVER SHOULD-BE-DOING
18 Flee fornication. Every sin that a man doeth is without the body; but he that committeth fornication sinneth against his own body.
anqrwpos ektos tou anthrOpos ektos ho

n_ Nom Sg m Adv t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos estin sOma eimi

de de
Conj
porneuwn porneuO
eis eis
Prep
t_ Nom Sg m
human
OUTside
OF-THE
BODY
IS
THE
YET one-PROSTITUTING INTO one-committing-prostitution
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
amartanei hamartanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
OWN
BODY
IS-missING is-sinning oti to hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
6:19 h
E
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
naos naos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
OR
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware pneumatos estin pneuma eimi

n_ Gen Sg n
THE
BODY
OF-YOU(p) TEMPLE of-ye apo apo

Prep
OF-THE
IN
19 What? know ye not that your body is the temple of the Holy Ghost [which is] in you, which ye have of God, and ye are not your own?
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye este eimi
HOLY
spirit
IS
WHICH
YE-ARE-HAVING FROM God
AND
NOT
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
YE-ARE
OF-selves your-selfown gar timhs gar timE

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
6:20 hgorasqhte
agorazO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
doxasate dh doxazO dE
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati sOma
n_ Dat Sg n
YE-ARE-BOUGHT for
OF-VALUE esteemize-YE of-price glorify-ye !
BIND THE by-all-means
God
IN
THE
BODY
20 For ye are bought with a price: therefore glorify God in your body, and in your spirit, which are God's.
AV
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
1Corinthians 7
7:1 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
wn hos
pr Gen Pl n
egrayate kalon graphO kalos

vi Aor Act 2 Pl a_ Nom Sg n
anqrwpw gunaikos mh anthrOpos gunE mE

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg
aptesqai haptO
vn Pres Mid
ABOUT YET WHICH concerning
YE-WRITE
IDEAL
to-human
OF-WOMAN woman eautou heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg m
NO
TO-BE-TOUCHING
. Now concerning the things whereof ye wrote unto me: [It is] good for a man not to touch a woman. Nevertheless, [to avoid] fornication, let every man have his own wife, and let every woman have her own husband.
7:2 dia
dia
Prep
de de
Conj
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
porneias porneia
n_ Acc Pl f
ekastos thn hekastos ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika ecetw gunE echO

kai kai
Conj
THRU YET THE because-of ekasth hekastos

a_ Nom Sg f
PROSTITUTIONS EACH each-man andra anEr

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
OF-self of-himself
WOMAN wife
LET-BE-HAVING AND let-him-be-having !
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
ecetw echO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
EACH(f) THE each-woman
OWN
MAN husband anhr anEr
LET-BE-HAVING let-her-be-having ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
7:3 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki o gunE ho
ofeilhn apodidotw opheilE apodidOmi

omoiws de homoiOs de
Adv Conj
kai kai
Conj
n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
WOMAN wife gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
MAN husband andri anEr

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
OWED due
LET-BE-FROM-GIVING LIKE-AS let-him-be-rendering ! likewise
YET AND also
Let the husband render unto the wife due benevolence: and likewise also the wife unto the husband.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
to-THE
MAN husband idiou idios

a_ Gen Sg n
7:4 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos ouk sOma ou

exousiazei exousiazO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
alla o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
WOMAN wife
OF-THE
OWN
BODY
NOT
IS-authority-izING but is-having-jurisdiction idiou idios

a_ Gen Sg n
THE
The wife hath not power of her own body, but the husband: and likewise also the husband hath not power of his own body, but the wife.
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
omoiws de homoiOs de
Adv Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos ouk sOma ou

MAN husband
LIKE-AS likewise
YET AND also
THE
MAN husband
OF-THE
OWN
BODY
NOT
exousiazei exousiazO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
alla h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
IS-authority-izING but is-having-jurisdiction
THE
WOMAN wife mhti mEti

Part Int
WH
7:5 mh
mE
Part Neg
apostereite allhlous ei apostereO allElOn ei

vm Pres Act 2 Pl pc Acc Pl m Cond
an
NA
an an
Part
ek ek
Prep
sumfwnou sumphOnon
a_ Gen Sg n
NO
BE-YE-deprivING be-ye-depriving ! kairon kairos

n_ Acc Sg m
one-another
IF
NO-ANY no-anysometime th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
EVER
OUT OF-TOGETHER-SOUND of-agreement
pros pros
Prep
ina hina
Conj
scolashte scholazO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
proseuch kai palin epi to proseuchE kai palin epi ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj Adv Prep t_ Acc Sg n
Defraud ye not one the other, except [it be] with consent for a time, that ye may give yourselves to fasting and prayer; and come together again, that Satan tempt you not for your incontinency.
TOWARD SEASON period auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
THAT YE-SHOULD-BE-LEISURING to-THE ye-should-be-having-leisure ina hina

Conj
prayer
AND
AGAIN
ON
THE
hte eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
peirazh peirazO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
SAME
YE-MAY-BE
THAT NO
WH
MAY-BE-tryING YOU(p) ye
NA
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) THRU Satan because-of
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
akrasian akrasia
n_ Acc Sg f
umwn
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
UN-HOLD incontinence de de
Conj
OF-YOU(p) of-ye legw legO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
7:6 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kata kata
Prep
suggnwmhn suggnOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
kat kata
Prep
epitaghn epitagE
n_ Acc Sg f
But I speak this permission, [and] not commandment.
by of
this
YET I-AM-sayING
according-to TOGETHER-opinion NOT concession
7:7 qelw
thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
pantas anqrwpous einai pas anthrOpos eimi

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
ws kai emauton alla ekastos hOs kai emautou alla hekastos

Adv Conj pf 1 Acc Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-WILLING YET ALL
humans
TO-BE
AS
AND also men men

Part
MYself
but
EACH
For I would that all men were even as I myself. But every man hath his proper gift of God, one after this manner, and another after that.
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
carisma ek charisma ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o hos
pr Nom Sg m
outws o houtOs hos

Adv pr Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
outws houtOs
Adv
OWN
IS-HAVING
grace-effect OUT OF-God gracious-gift
WHO
INDEED thus
WHO
YET thus
AV
1Corinthians 7
7:8 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agamois agamos
n_ Dat Pl m
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
chrais kalon chEra kalos

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Nom Sg n
autois ean autos ean

pp Dat Pl m Cond
I-AM-sayING
YET to-THE
UN-MARRIED AND unmarried(p)
to-THE the
WIDOWS
IDEAL
to-them
IF-EVER
I say therefore to the unmarried and widows, It is good for them if they abide even as I.
meinwsin menO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ws kagw hOs kagO

Adv pp 1 Nom Sg Con
THEY-SHOULD-BE-REMAINING AS
AND-I even-I gamhsatwsan kreitton gar estin gameO kreittOn gar eimi
vm Aor Act 3 Pl a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WH
7:9 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
egkrateuontai egkrateuomai
gamein
But if they cannot contain, let them marry: for it is better to marry than to burn.
IF
NA
YET NOT
THEY-ARE-IN-HOLDING LET-THEM-MARRY they-are-controlling-themselves let-them-marry ! purousqai puroO

vn Pres Pas
better
for
it-IS
gamhsai gameO
vn Aor Act
h E
Part
TO-MARRY
OR TO-BE-beING-FIRED than to-be-being-on-fire de de

Conj
7:10 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
gegamhkosin gameO
paraggellw ouk paraggellO ou

vi Pres Act 1 Sg Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
alla o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE-ones YET HAVING-MARRIED I-AM-chargING to-the gunaika apo gunE apo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
NOT
but
THE
Master Lord
10 . And unto the married I command, [yet] not I, but the Lord, Let not the wife depart from [her] husband:
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
cwrisqhnai chOrizO
vn Aor Pas MidS
WOMAN wife
FROM MAN husband de de

Conj
NO
TO-BE-SPACEizED to-be-separated menetw menO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
7:11 ean
ean
Cond
kai cwrisqh kai chOrizO

Conj vi Aor Pas 3 Sg MidS
agamos agamos
n_ Nom Sg f
h E
Part
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
IF-EVER YET AND also katallaghtw katallassO

vm 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
she-MAY-BE-BEING-SPACEizED LET-BE-REMAINING UN-MARRIED OR she-may-be-being-separated let-her-be-remaining ! unmarried kai andra kai anEr
Conj n_ Acc Sg m
to-THE
MAN husband
11 But and if she depart, let her remain unmarried, or be reconciled to [her] husband: and let not the husband put away [his] wife.
gunaika mh gunE mE
afienai aphiEmi
vn Pres Act
LET-her-BE-BEING-conciliatED AND let-her-be-being-conciliated !
MAN husband
WOMAN wife egw egO
NO
TO-FROM-LET to-leave o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
7:12 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
loipois legw loipon legO

a_ Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ouc ou
Part Neg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
pp 1 Nom Sg
to-THE
YET rest rest(p)
AM-sayING
NOT
THE
Master Lord
IF
ANY
12 But to the rest speak I, not the Lord: If any brother hath a wife that believeth not, and she be pleased to dwell with him, let him not put her away.
adelfos gunaika ecei adelphos gunE echO

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
apiston apistos
a_ Acc Sg f
kai auth kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg f
suneudokei suneudokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
brother
WOMAN wife
IS-HAVING
UN-BELIEVing AND unbelieving mh mE

Part Neg
she
IS-TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING is-approving authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
oikein oikeO
vn Pres Act

Prep pp Gen Sg m
afietw aphiEmi
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
TO-BE-HOMING WITH him to-be-making-a-home
NO
NA NA
LET-him-BE-FROM-LETTING her let-him-be-leaving ! ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
7:13 kai gunh

kai
Conj
WH
htis
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
apiston apistos
a_ Acc Sg m

Conj pd Nom Sg m
AND
WOMAN wife
IF
ANY
IS-HAVING
MAN husband mh mE
Part Neg
UN-BELIEVing AND unbelieving
this-one this-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
13 And the woman which hath an husband that believeth not, and if he be pleased to dwell with her, let her not leave him.
suneudokei suneudokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oikein oikeO
vn Pres Act

Prep pp Gen Sg f
afietw aphiEmi
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-TOGETHER-WELL-SEEMING TO-BE-HOMING WITH her is-approving to-be-making-a-home andra anEr

n_ Acc Sg m
NO
LET-her-BE-FROM-LETTING THE let-her-be-leaving !
MAN husband
7:14 hgiastai
hagiazO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gunaiki kai gunE kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
HAS-been-HOLYizED for has-been-hallowed
THE
MAN husband
THE
UN-BELIEVing IN unbelieving
THE
WOMAN wife
AND
14 For the unbelieving husband is sanctified by the wife, and the unbelieving wife is sanctified by the husband: else were your children unclean;
AV
1Corinthians 7
hgiastai hagiazO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
adelfw epei adelphos epei

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
but now are they holy.
HAS-been-HOLYizED THE has-been-hallowed ara ara

Part
WOMAN wife tekna teknon

n_ Nom Pl n
THE
UN-BELIEVing IN unbelieving akaqarta estin akathartos eimi

a_ Nom Pl n
THE
brother
since else agia hagios

a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
nun de nun de
Adv Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
CONSEQUENTLY THE
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) UN-clean of-ye unclean(p)
IS
NOW YET HOLY holy(p) ou ou

Part Neg
it-IS
7:15 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg m
cwrizetai cwrizesqw chOrizO chOrizO

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
dedoulwtai douloO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
IF
YET THE
UN-BELIEVing-one IS-SPACEizING unbeliever is-separating h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
LET-BE-beING-SPACEizED NOT let-him-be-separating ! toioutois en toioutos en

pd Dat Pl n Prep
HAS-been-enSLAVED
15 But if the unbelieving depart, let him depart. A brother or a sister is not under bondage in such [cases]: but God hath called us to peace.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
adelfos h adelphos E
n_ Nom Sg m Part
adelfh en adelphE en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
de de
Conj
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Dat Sg f
keklhken kaleO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
THE
brother
OR
THE
sister
IN
THE
such such-cases
IN
YET PEACE
HAS-CALLED
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye
THE
God
7:16 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar oidas gar eidO

gunai gunE
n_ Voc Sg f
ei ei
Cond
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
swseis sOzO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
h E
Part
ANY what ? ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
for
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED WOMAN ! you-are-aware wife ! aner anEr

n_ Voc Sg m
IF
THE
MAN husband
YOU-SHALL-BE-SAVING OR
16 For what knowest thou, O wife, whether thou shalt save [thy] husband? or how knowest thou, O man, whether thou shalt save [thy] wife?
oidas eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
ei ei
Cond
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika swseis gunE sOzO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 2 Sg
ANY what ?
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED MAN ! you-are-aware husband ! mh mE

Part Neg
IF
THE
NA
WOMAN wife emerisen merizO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU-SHALL-BE-SAVING
7:17 ei
ei
Cond
ekastw ws hekastos hOs

a_ Dat Sg m Adv
WH
memeriken
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ekaston ws hekastos hOs

a_ Acc Sg m Adv
IF
NO
to-EACH
AS
PARTS parts-it outws peripateitw houtOs peripateO

THE
Master Lord
EACH
AS
17 . But as God hath distributed to every man, as the Lord hath called every one, so let him walk. And so ordain I in all churches.
keklhken o kaleO ho
vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai outws en kai houtOs en

Conj Adv Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
HAS-CALLED THE has-called-him
God
thus
LET-him-BE-ABOUT-TREADING AND let-him-be-walking !
thus
IN
THE
ekklhsiais pasais diatassomai ekklEsia pas diatassO

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
ALL
I-AM-prescribING
7:18 peritetmhmenos
peritemnO
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eklhqh kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
epispasqw epispaomai
en en
Prep
akrobustia akrobustia
n_ Dat Sg f
HAVING-been-ABOUT-CUT ANY having-been-circumcised anyone keklhtai kaleO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
WAS-CALLED NO
LET-him-BE-beING-ON-PULLED IN let-him-be-being-de-circumcised !
uncircumcision
18 Is any man called being circumcised? let him not become uncircumcised. Is any called in uncircumcision? let him not be circumcised.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
peritemnesqw peritemnO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
HAS-been-CALLED ANY anyone
NO
LET-him-BE-beING-ABOUT-CUT let-him-be-being-circumcised ! estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
7:19 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
peritomh peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
akrobustia ouden akrobustia oudeis

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg n
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing NOT-YET-ONE IS circumcision nothing alla thrhsis entolwn qeou alla tErEsis entolE theos
Conj n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
uncircumcision
NOT-YET-ONE nothing
19 Circumcision is nothing, and uncircumcision is nothing, but the keeping of the commandments of God.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
but
KEEPing
OF-directions of-precepts klhsei h klEsis hos

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-God
7:20 ekastos en
hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eklhqh kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
menetw menO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
pr Dat Sg f
20 Let every man abide in the same calling wherein he was called.
EACH each-one
IN
THE
CALLing
to-WHICH he-WAS-CALLED IN
this
LET-him-BE-REMAINING let-him-be-remaining !
AV
1Corinthians 7
7:21 doulos
doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
eklhqhs kaleO
vi Aor Pas 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
meletw melei
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
all ei alla ei
Conj Cond
kai dunasai kai dunamai

SLAVE
YOU-WERE-CALLED NO
to-YOU you
LET-BE-CARING but let-it-be-causing-care !
IF
AND also
YOU-ARE-ABLE
21 Art thou called [being] a servant? care not for it: but if thou mayest be made free, use [it] rather.
eleuqeros genesqai eleutheros ginomai

a_ Nom Sg m vn 2Aor midD
mallon crhsai mallon chraomai

Adv vm Aor midD 2 Sg
FREE
TO-BE-BECOMING RATHER
YOU-USE use-you-it ! doulos doulos

n_ Nom Sg m
7:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
klhqeis kaleO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
apeleuqeros kuriou apeleutheros kurios

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE-one the-one omoiws o homoiOs ho

Adv
for
IN
Master Lord
BEING-CALLED
SLAVE
FROM-FREED freedman estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-Master of-Lord cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
IS
22 For he that is called in the Lord, [being] a servant, is the Lord's freeman: likewise also he that is called, [being] free, is Christ's servant.
eleuqeros klhqeis eleutheros kaleO

a_ Nom Sg m vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
LIKE-AS likewise
THE-one the-one
FREE
BEING-CALLED
SLAVE
IS
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
23 Ye are bought with a price; be not ye the servants of men.
7:23 timhs
timE
n_ Gen Sg f
hgorasqhte agorazO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
OF-VALUE YE-ARE-BOUGHT NO of-price
SLAVES
OF-humans
7:24 ekastos en
hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
eklhqh kaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
adelfoi en adelphos en
n_ Voc Pl m Prep
toutw menetw houtos menO

pd Dat Sg n vm Pres Act 3 Sg
para para
Prep
24 Brethren, let every man, wherein he is called, therein abide with God.
EACH each-one qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
IN
WHICH
he-WAS-CALLED brothers brethren !
IN
this
LET-him-BE-REMAINING BESIDE let-him-be-remaining !
God
7:25 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
parqenwn parthenos
n_ Gen Pl f
epitaghn kuriou epitagE kurios

ouk ou
Part Neg
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gnwmhn de gnOmE de
n_ Acc Sg f Conj
ABOUT YET THE concerning didwmi didOmi

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
virgins (or celibates) injunction virgins upo hupo

Prep
OF-Master of-Lord pistos pistos

a_ Nom Sg m
NOT
I-AM-HAVING
opinion
YET
ws hlehmenos hOs eleaO

Adv vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
25 . Now concerning virgins I have no commandment of the Lord: yet I give my judgment, as one that hath obtained mercy of the Lord to be faithful.
I-AM-GIVING
AS
HAVING-been-MERCIED UNDER Master one-having-obtained-mercy by Lord oun oun

Conj
BELIEVing faithful dia dia

Prep
TO-BE
7:26 nomizw
nomizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
uparcein huparchO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enestwsan enistEmi
vp Perf Act Acc Sg f
I-AM-LAWizING THEN this I-am-inferring anagkhn oti kalon anagkE hoti kalos
n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg n
IDEAL
TO-BE-belongING THRU THE to-be-being-inherent because-of outws einai houtOs eimi

Adv vn Pres vxx
HAVING-IN-STOOD being-present
26 I suppose therefore that this is good for the present distress, [I say], that [it is] good for a man so to be.
anqrwpw to anthrOpos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg n
necessity
that
IDEAL
to-human
THE
thus
TO-BE
7:27 dedesai
deO
vi Perf Pas 2 Sg
gunaiki mh gunE mE
zhtei zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
lusin lusis
n_ Acc Sg f
lelusai luO
vi Perf Pas 2 Sg
apo apo
Prep
YOU-HAVE-been-BOUND to-WOMAN to-wife gunaikos mh gunE mE

NO
BE-SEEKING LOOSing YOU-HAVE-been-LOOSED FROM be-you-seeking ! to-be-loosed
27 Art thou bound unto a wife? seek not to be loosed. Art thou loosed from a wife? seek not a wife.
zhtei zEteO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
WOMAN wife
NO
BE-SEEKING WOMAN be-you-seeking ! wife kai gamhshs kai gameO

7:28 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
ouc ou
Part Neg
hmartes hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai ean kai ean

Conj Cond
ghmh gameO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
IF-EVER YET AND also

WH
YOU-SHOULD-BE-MARRYING NOT
YOU-missED you-sinned qliyin thlipsis

n_ Acc Sg f
AND
IF-EVER MAY-BE-MARRYING
NA
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
parqenos ouc parthenos ou

hmarten hamartanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
28 But and if thou marry, thou hast not sinned; and if a virgin marry, she hath not sinned. Nevertheless such shall have trouble in the flesh: but I spare you.
THE
virgin
NOT
she-missED she-sinned
CONSTRICTION YET to-THE affliction
FLESH
AV
1Corinthians 7
exousin echO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
toioutoi egw toioutos egO

pd Nom Pl m pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
feidomai pheidomai
SHALL-BE-HAVING THE
such such(p)
YET OF-YOU(p) AM-SPARING ye kairos kairos

n_ Nom Sg m
7:29 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
fhmi phEmi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
adelfoi o adelphos ho
n_ Voc Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
sunestalmenos sustellO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
this
YET I-AM-AVERRING brothers brethren ! loipon loipon

a_ Nom Sg n
THE
SEASON era
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-PUT IS having-been-limited econtes echO

29 But this I say, brethren, the time [is] short: it remaineth, that both they that have wives be as though they had none;
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ina hina
Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
econtes echO
gunaikas ws mh gunE hOs mE

n_ Acc Pl f Adv Part Neg
THE
rest furthermore
THAT AND also
THE-ones the-ones
HAVING
WOMEN wives
AS
NO
HAVING having-them
wsin eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
MAY-BE
7:30 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
klaiontes klaiO
ws mh hOs mE
Adv Part Neg
klaiontes klaiO
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
cairontes chairO
ws hOs
Adv
AND
THE
ones-LAMENTING ones-lamenting kai oi kai ho

Conj
AS
NO
LAMENTING
AND
THE
ones-JOYING ones-rejoicing
AS
30 And they that weep, as though they wept not; and they that rejoice, as though they rejoiced not; and they that buy, as though they possessed not;
mh mE
Part Neg
cairontes chairO
agorazontes ws mh agorazO hOs mE

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Adv Part Neg
katecontes katechO
t_ Nom Pl m
NO
JOYING rejoicing
AND
THE
ones-BUYING ones-buying ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AS
NO
DOWN-HAVING retaining katacrwmenoi katachraomai

31 And they that use this world, as not abusing [it]: for the fashion of this world passeth away.
7:31 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
crwmenoi chraomai
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
ws mh hOs mE
Adv Part Neg
AND
THE
ones-USING ones-using gar to gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
THE
SYSTEM world
AS
NO
DOWN-USING using-up-it
paragei paragO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
schma schEma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou houtos
pd Gen Sg m
IS-BESIDE-LEADING for is-passing-by
THE
FIGURE fashion
OF-THE
SYSTEM world o ho
this
7:32 qelw
thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
amerimnous einai amerimnos eimi

agamos agamos
n_ Nom Sg m
merimna merimnaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
UN-anxious without-worry pws aresh pOs areskO

Adv Int
TO-BE
THE
UN-MARRIED IS-beING-anxious one-unmarried is-being-solicitous-about kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
32 But I would have you without carefulness. He that is unmarried careth for the things that belong to the Lord, how he may please the Lord:
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
Master Lord de de
Conj
how how ?
he-SHOULD-BE-PLEASING to-THE the merimna merimnaO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
Master Lord tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
7:33 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gamhsas gameO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
pws pOs
Adv Int
THE
YET one-MARRYing one-marrying th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
IS-beING-anxious THE OF-THE is-being-solicitous-about the-things
SYSTEM world
how how ?
33 But he that is married careth for the things that are of the world, how he may please [his] wife.
aresh areskO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
gunaiki gunE
n_ Dat Sg f
he-SHOULD-BE-PLEASING to-THE the

n_ Nom Sg f
7:34 kai memeristai

kai
Conj
merizO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agamos agamos
n_ Nom Sg f
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
parqenos parthenos
n_ Nom Sg f
AND
HAS-been-PARTED AND is-parted ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
THE
WOMAN
THE
UN-MARRIED AND unmarried agia hagios

a_ Nom Sg f
THE
WH
virgin
NA
merimna merimnaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai
kai kai
Conj
IS-beING-anxious THE OF-THE is-being-solicitous-about the-things tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
Master Lord
THAT she-MAY-BE
HOLY
AND
34 There is difference [also] between a wife and a virgin. The unmarried woman careth for the things of the Lord, that she may be holy both in body and in spirit: but she that is married careth for the things of the world, how she may please [her] husband.
swmati kai tw sOma kai ho

n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Dat Sg m
pneumati h pneuma ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
gamhsasa gameO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
merimna merimnaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-THE
BODY
AND
to-THE
spirit
THE
YET one-MARRYing one-marrying(f)
IS-beING-anxious THE is-being-solicitous-about the-things
AV
1Corinthians 7
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
pws aresh pOs areskO

Adv Int vs Aor Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
SYSTEM world de de
Conj
how how ? pros pros

Prep
she-SHOULD-BE-PLEASING to-THE the to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
MAN husband sumforon legw sumphoron legO

a_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
7:35 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ouc ou
Part Neg
ina hina
Conj
this
YET TOWARD THE
OF-YOU(p) SAME sameown of-ye alla pros alla pros

Conj Prep
expedience
I-AM-sayING
NOT
THAT
brocon brochos
n_ Acc Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
epibalw epiballO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
euschmon euschEmOn
a_ Acc Sg n
kai euparedron kai euparedron

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
35 And this I speak for your own profit; not that I may cast a snare upon you, but for that which is comely, and that ye may attend upon the Lord without distraction.
NOOSE
to-YOU(p) to-ye kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
I-SHOULD-BE-ON-CASTING but I-should-be-casting-on aperispastws aperispastOs

Adv
TOWARD THE
WELL-FIGURED AND respectable
assiduous
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
Master Lord de de
Conj
UN-distractedly undistractedly tis tis

px Nom Sg m
7:36 ei
ei
Cond
aschmonein aschEmoneO
vn Pres Act
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
parqenon autou parthenos autos

nomizei nomizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
IF
YET ANY anyone uperakmos huperakmos

a_ Nom Sg m
TO-BE-beING-indecent ON
THE
virgin
OF-him
IS-inferrING is-inferring-it qelei thelO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IF-EVER
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai outws ofeilei kai houtOs opheilO

Conj Adv vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ginesqai ginomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
36 . But if any man think that he behaveth himself uncomely toward his virgin, if she pass the flower of [her] age, and need so require, let him do what he will, he sinneth not: let them marry.
she-MAY-BE
OVER-POINTED AND over-her-meridian ouc ou

Part Neg
thus
IS-OWING it-ought
TO-BE-BECOMING WHICH to-be-occurring
IS-WILLING he-is-willing
poieitw poieO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
amartanei gameitwsan hamartanO gameO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 3 Pl
LET-BE-DOING NOT let-him-be-doing !
IS-missING he-is-sinning esthken histEmi

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
LET-THEM-BE-MARRYING let-them-be-marrying ! en en
Prep
7:37 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f

edraios mh hedraios mE
a_ Nom Sg m Part Neg
ecwn echO
WHO
YET HAS-STOOD stands ecei echO
IN
THE
HEART
OF-him
SETTLED
NO
HAVING
anagkhn exousian de anagkE exousia de

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Conj
peri peri
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
idiou idios
a_ Gen Sg n
qelhmatos kai touto thelEma kai houtos

n_ Gen Sg n Conj pd Acc Sg n
37 Nevertheless he that standeth stedfast in his heart, having no necessity, but hath power over his own will, and hath so decreed in his heart that he will keep his virgin, doeth well.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
necessity
authority
YET IS-HAVING
OWN
WILL
AND
this
kekriken krinO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
kardia threin kardia tEreO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
parqenon kalws parthenos kalOs

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
HAS-JUDGED IN has-decided poihsei poieO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
OWN
HEART
TO-BE-KEEPING THE
OF-self of-selfhim
virgin
IDEALly
SHALL-BE-DOING
7:38 wste
hOste
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
gamizwn gamizO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
parqenon kalws poiei parthenos kalOs poieO

AS-BESIDES AND so-that also kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
THE
one-MARRYizING THE one-giving-in-marriage
OF-self of-selfhim
virgin
IDEALly
IS-DOING
38 So then he that giveth [her] in marriage doeth well; but he that giveth [her] not in marriage doeth better.
mh mE
Part Neg
gamizwn gamizO
kreisson poihsei kreisson poieO

AND
THE the-one
NO
MARRYizING giving-in-marriage ef epi

Prep
better
SHALL-BE-DOING
7:39 gunh
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
dedetai deO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
WOMAN wife ean ean

Cond
HAS-been-BOUND ON is-bound koimhqh koimaO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
as-much-as TIME whatever o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IS-LIVING
THE
MAN husband w hos

pr Dat Sg m
OF-her
de de
Conj
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
eleuqera estin eleutheros eimi

qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
39 . The wife is bound by the law as long as her husband liveth; but if her husband be dead, she is at liberty to be married to whom she will; only in the Lord.
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-BEING-reposED THE may-be-reposing
MAN husband
FREE
she-IS
to-WHOM
she-IS-WILLING
AV
gamhqhnai gameO
vn Aor Pas
monon en monon en
Adv Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-MARRIED ONLY
IN
Master Lord estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
7:40 makariwtera de
makarios
a_ Nom Sg f Cmp
de
Conj
ean ean
Cond
outws meinh houtOs menO

Adv vs Aor Act 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
HAPPY-more happier emhn emos

ps 1 Acc Sg
YET she-IS
IF-EVER thus
WH NA
she-SHOULD-BE-REMAINING according-to THE
40 But she is happier if she so abide, after my judgment: and I think also that I have the Spirit of God.
gnwmhn dokw gnOmE dokeO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Sg Con
gar
de de
Conj
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
pneuma qeou pneuma theos

ecein echO
vn Pres Act
MY
opinion
AM-SEEMING I-am-presuming
YET
AND-I also-I
spirit
OF-God
TO-BE-HAVING
AV
1Corinthians 8
8:1 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eidwloqutwn oidamen eidOlothuton eidO

a_ Gen Pl n vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti pantes hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
gnwsin gnOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
ABOUT YET THE concerning ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
idol-SACRIFICES
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
ALL
KNOWledge
. Now as touching things offered unto idols, we know that we all have knowledge. Knowledge puffeth up, but charity edifieth.
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gnwsis gnOsis
n_ Nom Sg f
fusioi phusioO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
oikodomei oikodomeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
KNOWledge IS-INFLATING THE is-puffing-up dokei dokeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YET LOVE
IS-HOME-BUILDING is-edifying egnw ginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8:2 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
egnwkenai ginOskO
vn Perf Act
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
oupw oupO
Adv
kaqws kathOs
Adv
IF
ANY anyone
TO-HAVE-KNOWN ANY anything
NOT-as-yet KNEW he-knew
according-AS
And if any man think that he knoweth any thing, he knoweth nothing yet as he ought to know.
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gnwnai ginOskO
vn 2Aor Act
it-IS-BINDING
TO-KNOW
8:3 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
agapa agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
outos houtos
pd Nom Sg m
egnwstai ginOskO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
up autou hupo autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
But if any man love God, the same is known of him.
IF
YET ANY anyone ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
IS-LOVING
THE
God
this-one this-one
HAS-been-KNOWN by is-known
Him
8:4 peri
peri
Prep
brwsews oun brOsis oun

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eidwloqutwn oidamen eidOlothuton eidO

a_ Gen Pl n vi Perf Act 1 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
ABOUT THE concerning ouden oudeis

a_ Nom Sg n
FEEDing
THEN OF-THE
idol-SACRIFICES
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that we-are-aware qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
eidwlon en eidOlon en
n_ Nom Sg n Prep
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai oti oudeis kai hoti oudeis

Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg f
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
. As concerning therefore the eating of those things that are offered in sacrifice unto idols, we know that an idol [is] nothing in the world, and that [there is] none other God but one.
NOT-YET-ONE idol nothing
IN
SYSTEM world
AND
that
NOT-YET-ONE God
IF
NO
ONE
8:5 kai gar eiper

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
eiper
Cond
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
legomenoi legO
qeoi theos
n_ Nom Pl m
eite eite
Conj
en en
Prep
ouranw eite ouranos eite

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
AND for even epi ghs epi gE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
IF-EVEN ARE if-so-be-that there-are wsper eisin hOsper eimi

ones-beING-said ones-being-said qeoi theos

n_ Nom Pl m
gods
IF-BESIDES IN whether
heaven
IF-BESIDES or
For though there be that are called gods, whether in heaven or in earth, (as there be gods many, and lords many,)
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kai kurioi kai kurios

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ON
LAND earth
WH
AS-EVEN even-as
NA
ARE there-are hmin hemeis
gods
MANY
AND
masters lords o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
MANY
8:6
all
all alla
Conj
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
pp 1 Dat Pl
but nevertheless ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
to-US
ONE
God
THE
FATHER
OUT OF-WHOM
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai eis kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
But to us [there is but] one God, the Father, of whom [are] all things, and we in him; and one Lord Jesus Christ, by whom [are] all things, and we by him.
THE
ALL
AND
WE
INTO Him
AND
ONE
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
di dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THRU WHOM through
THE
ALL
AND
WE
THRU Him through tines tis

px Nom Pl m
8:7 all ouk

alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gnwsis gnOsis
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunhqeia sunEtheia
n_ Dat Sg f
ews heOs
Conj
but
NOT
IN
ALL
THE
KNOWledge ANY some(p)
YET to-THE
TOGETHER-CUSTOM TILL usage suneidhsis suneidEsis

n_ Nom Sg f
arti arti
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
eidwlou ws eidwloquton esqiousin kai h eidOlon hOs eidOlothuton esthiO kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Adv a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres Act 3 Pl Conj t_ Nom Sg f
. Howbeit [there is] not in every man that knowledge: for some with conscience of the idol unto this hour eat [it] as a thing offered unto an idol; and their conscience being weak is defiled.
at-PRESENT OF-THE
idol
AS
idol-SACRIFICE
ARE-EATING
AND
THE
conscience
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
asqenhs ousa asthenEs eimi

a_ Nom Sg f vp Pres vxx Nom Sg f
molunetai molunO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
OF-them
UN-FIRM weak
BEING
IS-beING-POLLUTED
AV
8:8 brwma
brOma
n_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
parasthsei paristEmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
oute oute
Conj
ean ean
Cond
FOOD
YET US
NOT
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-STANDING to-THE shall-be-giving-a-standing-with the ean ean

Cond
God
NOT-BESIDES IF-EVER neither perisseuomen perisseuO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
But meat commendeth us not to God: for neither, if we eat, are we the better; neither, if we eat not, are we the worse.
mh mE
Part Neg
fagwmen esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
usteroumeqa oute hustereO oute

vi Pres Pas 1 Pl Conj
fagwmen esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
NO
WE-MAY-BE-EATING WE-ARE-WANTING NOT-BESIDES IF-EVER WE-MAY-BE-EATING WE-ARE-exceedING we-are-being-in-want nor we-are-superabounding de de

Conj
8:9 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
exousia umwn exousia humeis

auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
proskomma proskomma
n_ Nom Sg n
YE-BE-lookING YET NO be-ye-bewaring ! lest genhtai ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
how THE somehow asqenesin asthenEs

a_ Dat Pl m
authority right
OF-YOU(p) this of-ye
TOWARD-STRIKE stumbling-block
But take heed lest by any means this liberty of yours become a stumblingblock to them that are weak.
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
MAY-BE-BECOMING to-THE
UN-FIRMS weak-ones idh eidO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WH
8:10 ean
ean
Cond
gar tis gar tis

Conj px Nom Sg m
se
NA
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
econta echO
IF-EVER for
ANY anyone
MAY-BE-PERCEIVING
YOU
THE
gnwsin gnOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
eidwleiw katakeimenon eidOleion katakeimai

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Sg m
ouci ouchi
Part Int
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
suneidhsis autou suneidEsis autos

10 For if any man see thee which hast knowledge sit at meat in the idol's temple, shall not the conscience of him which is weak be emboldened to eat those things which are offered to idols;
KNOWledge IN
idol-shrine
DOWN-LYING lying-down oikodomhqhsetai oikodomeO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
NOT(emph.) THE not(emph.) ? eis eis

Prep
conscience
OF-him
asqenous ontos asthenEs eimi

a_ Gen Sg m vp Pres vxx Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eidwloquta eidOlothuton
a_ Acc Pl n
UN-FIRM weak esqiein esthiO

vn Pres Act
BEING
SHALL-BE-BEING-HOME-BUILDED INTO THE shall-be-being-inured
THE
idol-SACRIFICES
TO-BE-EATING
8:11 apollutai
apollumi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
asqenwn astheneO
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sh sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
gnwsei gnOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
11 And through thy knowledge shall the weak brother perish, for whom Christ died?
IS-beING-destroyED for is-perishing adelfos di adelphos dia

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
THE
one-beING-UN-FIRM IN one-being-weak cristos apeqanen christos apothnEskO

THE
to-YOUR your
KNOWledge THE
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
brother
THRU WHOM because-of
ANOINTED Christ
FROM-DIED died tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
8:12 outws de
houtOs
Adv
de
Conj
amartanontes eis hamartanO eis

adelfous kai tuptontes adelphos kai tuptO

n_ Acc Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
thus
YET missING in-sinning
INTO THE
brothers brethren
AND
BEATING
OF-them
12 But when ye sin so against the brethren, and wound their weak conscience, ye sin against Christ.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
suneidhsin asqenousan eis suneidEsis astheneO eis

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg f Prep
criston amartanete christos hamartanO

THE
conscience
beING-UN-FIRM being-weak ei ei
Cond
YE-ARE-missING ye-are-sinning adelfon mou adelphos egO

8:13 dioper
dioper
Conj
brwma brOma
n_ Nom Sg n
skandalizei ton skandalizO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
THRU-WHICH-EVEN IF wherefore fagw esthiO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
FOOD
IS-SNARING
THE
brother
OF-ME
NOT
NO
13 Wherefore, if meat make my brother to offend, I will eat no flesh while the world standeth, lest I make my brother to offend.
krea kreas
n_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon mou adelphos egO

I-MAY-BE-EATING MEATS meat(p) skandalisw skandalizO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
INTO THE
eon
THAT NO
THE
brother
OF-ME
I-SHOULD-BE-SNARING
AV
1Corinthians 9
9:1 ouk
ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
eleuqeros ouk eleutheros ou

eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
apostolos ouci apostolos ouchi

ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NOT
I-AM
FREE
NOT
I-AM
commissioner apostle ergon ergon

n_ Nom Sg n
NOT(emph.) JESUS not(emph.) ? umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
. Am I not an apostle? am I not free? have I not seen Jesus Christ our Lord? are not ye my work in the Lord?
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eoraka horaO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
en en
Prep
Master Lord kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-US
I-HAVE-SEEN NOT
THE
work
OF-ME
YOU(p) ye
ARE
IN
Master Lord
9:2 ei
ei
Cond
allois ouk allos ou

eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
apostolos alla apostolos alla

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
ge ge
Part
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IF
to-others
NOT
I-AM
but SURELY to-YOU(p) nevertheless to-ye este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
I-AM
THE
If I be not an apostle unto others, yet doubtless I am to you: for the seal of mine apostleship are ye in the Lord.
gar sfragis mou gar sphragis egO

Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
apostolhs umeis apostolE humeis

n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Nom Pl
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
for
SEAL
OF-MY of-me emh emos

ps 1 Nom Sg
THE of-the
commission apostleship
YOU(p) ye eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
ARE
IN
Master Lord auth houtos

pd Nom Sg f
3
9:3 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
apologia tois apologia ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
anakrinousin estin anakrinO eimi

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
. Mine answer to them that do examine me is this,
THE
MY
FROM-say defense ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
to-THE-ones ME to-the-ones exousian fagein exousia esthiO

examinING
IS
this
9:4 mh
mE
Part Neg
ouk ou
Part Neg
kai pein kai pinO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
Have we not power to eat and to drink?
NO
NOT
WE-ARE-HAVING authority right ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
TO-BE-EATING AND
TO-BE-DRINKING
9:5 mh
mE
Part Neg
ouk ou
Part Neg
exousian adelfhn gunaika periagein exousia adelphE gunE periagO

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vn Pres Act
ws kai hOs kai

Adv Conj
NO
NOT
WE-ARE-HAVING authority right apostoloi kai oi apostolos kai ho

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
sister
WOMAN wife
TO-BE-ABOUT-LEADING AS to-be-leading-about kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
AND also
Have we not power to lead about a sister, a wife, as well as other apostles, and [as] the brethren of the Lord, and Cephas?
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi tou adelphos ho

kai khfas kai kEphas

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Pl m
THE
rest rest(p) monos monos

a_ Nom Sg m
commissioners apostles egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
AND
THE
brothers
OF-THE
Master Lord
AND
CEPHAS
9:6 h
E
Part
kai barnabas ouk kai barnabas ou

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Part Neg
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
exousian mh exousia mE
vn Pres midD/pasD
Or I only and Barnabas, have not we power to forbear working?
OR
ONLY
AND
Barnabas
NOT
ARE-HAVING authority right pote pote

Part
NO
TO-BE-workING
9:7 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
strateuetai idiois strateuO idios

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg a_ Dat Pl m
oywniois opsOnion
n_ Dat Pl n
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
futeuei phuteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ANY who ?
IS-WARRING
to-OWN
PROVISION-PURCHASES ?-when ANY rations at-any-time who ? autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
IS-plantING
NA
ampelwna kai ton ampelOn kai ho

karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
esqiei esthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
h E
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
Who goeth a warfare any time at his own charges? who planteth a vineyard, and eateth not of the fruit thereof? or who feedeth a flock, and eateth not of the milk of the flock?
Part
VINEyard
AND
THE
FRUIT
OF-it of-himit tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
NOT
IS-EATING
OR
ANY who ? esqiei esthiO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
poimainei poimainO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
poimnhn poimnE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
galaktos ths gala ho

poimnhs ouk poimnE ou

IS-SHEPHERDING SHEEP-herd AND is-tending flock
OUT OF-THE
MILK
OF-THE
SHEEP-herd NOT flock nomos nomos
IS-EATING
9:8 mh
mE
Part Neg
kata kata
Prep
anqrwpon tauta anthrOpos houtos

n_ Acc Sg m pd Acc Pl n
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
n_ Nom Sg m
Say I these things as a man? or saith not the law the same also?
NO
according-to human
these I-AM-TALKING OR these-things I-am-speaking
AND also
THE
LAW
these these-things
ou ou
Part Neg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
IS-sayING
AV
1Corinthians 9
9:9 en
en
Prep
gar tw gar ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg m
mwusews nomw mOusEs nomos

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
WH
fimwseis
IN
NA
for
THE
of-MOSES of-Moses boun bous

n_ Acc Sg m
LAW
For it is written in the law of Moses, Thou shalt not muzzle the mouth of the ox that treadeth out the corn. Doth God take care for oxen?
khmwseis kEmoO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
alownta aloaO
mh mE
Part Neg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
bown bous
n_ Gen Pl m
melei melei
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
YOU-SHALL-BE-CURBING
OX
THRESHING
NO
OF-THE
OXEN
to-THE
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
God
9:10 h
E
Part
di dia
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
pantws legei pantOs legO

di dia
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
gar egrafh gar graphO

oti hoti
Conj
OR
THRU US because-of ep epi

Prep
ALL-ly undoubtedly o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THRU US because-of arotrian arotriaO

vn Pres Act
for
it-WAS-WRITten that
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
arotriwn arotriaO
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
alown aloaO
10 Or saith he [it] altogether for our sakes? For our sakes, no doubt, [this] is written: that he that ploweth should plow in hope; and that he that thresheth in hope should be partaker of his hope.
IS-OWING ought ep epi

Prep
ON
EXPECTATION THE
one-PLOWING one-plowing
TO-BE-PLOWING AND
THE
one-THRESHING one-threshing
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
metecein metechO
vn Pres Act
ON
EXPECTATION OF-THE
TO-BE-WITH-HAVING to-be-partaking ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
9:11 ei
ei
Cond
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
pneumatika espeiramen mega pneumatikos speirO mega

a_ Acc Pl n vi Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Nom Sg n
ei ei
Cond
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
IF
WE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
spirituals spiritual(p)
SOW
GREAT great-thing
IF
WE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
11 If we have sown unto you spiritual things, [is it] a great thing if we shall reap your carnal things?
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
sarkika sarkikos
a_ Acc Pl n
qerisomen therizO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
THE
FLESHic(p) SHALL-BE-reapING fleshly-things alloi allos

a_ Nom Pl m
9:12 ei
ei
Cond
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
exousias metecousin exousia metechO

ou ou
Part Neg
mallon hmeis mallon hEmeis

Adv pp 1 Nom Pl
IF
others
OF-THE
OF-YOU(p) authority of-ye right
ARE-WITH-HAVING NOT are-partaking
RATHER
WE
all alla
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecrhsameqa th chraomai ho
vi Aor midD 1 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
exousia tauth exousia houtos

alla panta alla pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
stegomen stegO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ina hina
Conj
12 If others be partakers of [this] power over you, [are] not we rather? Nevertheless we have not used this power; but suffer all things, lest we should hinder the gospel of Christ.
but NOT nevertheless mh mE

Part Neg
WE-USE
to-THE the
authority right tw ho
this
but
ALL
WE-ARE-EXCLUDING THAT we-are-forgoing cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
tina tis
px Acc Sg f
egkophn dwmen egkopE didOmi

n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Dat Sg n
NO
ANY
hindrance
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING to-THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
WH
9:13 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
iera hieron
a_ Acc Pl n
ta
NOT
NA
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware ek ek

Prep
THE-ones the-ones
THE
SACRED(p) workING sacred-things tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ierou hieron
n_ Gen Sg n
esqiousin oi esthiO ho
qusiasthriw thusiastErion
n_ Dat Sg n
13 Do ye not know that they which minister about holy things live [of the things] of the temple? and they which wait at the altar are partakers with the altar?
THE the-things
OUT OF-THE
SACRED-place ARE-EATING sanctuary
THE-ones the-ones
to-THE
paredreuontes tw paredreuO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
qusiasthriw summerizontai thusiastErion summerizomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
BESIDE-SETTLING settling-beside
to-THE the
SACRIFICE-place altar kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
ARE-TOGETHER-PARTING are-having-portion-with to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
9:14 outws kai o

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dietaxen tois diatassO ho

n_ Acc Sg n
thus
AND also
THE
Master Lord
prescribES
to-THE-ones THE to-the-ones
WELL-MESSAGE
14 Even so hath the Lord ordained that they which preach the gospel should live of the gospel.
AV
1Corinthians 9
kataggellousin kataggellO
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou zhn euaggelion zaO

n_ Gen Sg n vn Pres Act
ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING OUT OF-THE announcing
WELL-MESSAGE TO-BE-LIVING
9:15 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
kecrhmai chraomai
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg n
toutwn houtos
pd Gen Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
egraya graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
YET NOT
HAVE-USED
NOT-YET-ONE OF-these NOT any of-these-things emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
I-WRITE
YET these these-things
ina hina
Conj
outws genhtai houtOs ginomai

Adv vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
mallon apoqanein mallon apothnEskO

Adv vn 2Aor Act
15 . But I have used none of these things: neither have I written these things, that it should be so done unto me: for [it were] better for me to die, than that any man should make my glorying void.
THAT thus
it-MAY-BE-BECOMING IN
ME
IDEAL
for
to-ME
RATHER
h E
Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kauchma mou kauchEma egO

oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
kenwsei kenoO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
OR THE than
BOAST
OF-ME
NOT-YET-ONE SHALL-BE-EMPTYING anyone shall-be-making-void ouk ou

Part Neg
9:16 ean
ean
Cond
gar euaggelizwmai gar euaggelizO

Conj vs Pres Mid 1 Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kauchma anagkh kauchEma anagkE

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg f
gar gar
Conj
IF-EVER for
I-MAY-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING NOT I-may-be-bringing-the-well-message ouai gar moi ouai gar egO

Inj Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
IS it-is ean ean

Cond
to-ME
BOAST
necessity
for
16 For though I preach the gospel, I have nothing to glory of: for necessity is laid upon me; yea, woe is unto me, if I preach not the gospel!
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
epikeitai epikeimai
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
to-ME me
IS-ON-LYING is-lying-on
WOE woe !
for
to-ME
IS it-is
IF-EVER NO
euaggeliswmai euaggelizO
vs Aor Mid 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING I-should-be-bringing-the-well-message
9:17 ei
ei
Cond
gar ekwn gar hekon

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
prassw prassO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
misqon misthos
n_ Acc Sg m
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
akwn akOn
a_ Nom Sg m
IF
for
voluntarily
this
I-AM-PRACTISING HIRE I-am-engaging-in wages
I-AM-HAVING
IF
YET UN-voluntarily involuntarily
17 For if I do this thing willingly, I have a reward: but if against my will, a dispensation [of the gospel] is committed unto me.
oikonomian pepisteumai oikonomia pisteuO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
HOME-LAW administration
I-HAVE-been-BELIEVED I-have-been-entrusted-with oun oun

Conj
9:18 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
misqos misthos
n_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
euaggelizomenos euaggelizO
ANY what ? adapanon adapanos

a_ Acc Sg n
THEN OF-ME
IS
THE
HIRE wage eis eis

Prep
THAT WELL-MESSAGizING in-bringing-the-well-message to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
qhsw tithEmi
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
katacrhsasqai katachraomai
vn Aor midD
18 What is my reward then? [Verily] that, when I preach the gospel, I may make the gospel of Christ without charge, that I abuse not my power in the gospel.
UN-SPENT I-SHOULD-BE-PLACING THE without-expense th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE INTO THE
NO
TO-DOWN-USE to-use-up
exousia mou exousia egO

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
n_ Dat Sg n
THE
authority
OF-ME
IN
THE
WELL-MESSAGE
9:19 eleuqeros gar wn

eleutheros
a_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
eimi
ek ek
Prep
pantwn pasin pas pas

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
emauton edoulwsa ina emautou douloO hina

pf 1 Acc Sg m vi Aor Act 1 Sg Conj
FREE
for
BEING
OUT OF-ALL
to-ALL
MYself
I-enSLAVE
THAT
19 . For though I be free from all [men], yet have I made myself servant unto all, that I might gain the more.
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pleionas polus
a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
kerdhsw kerdainO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
THE
MORE
I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING
9:20 kai egenomhn

kai
Conj
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ioudaiois ws ioudaios ina ioudaios hOs ioudaios hina

a_ Dat Pl m Adv a_ Nom Sg m Conj
ioudaious kerdhsw ioudaios kerdainO

AND
I-BECAME
to-THE
JUDA-ans Jews
AS
JUDA-an Jew
THAT JUDA-ans Jews
I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING
20 And unto the Jews I became as a Jew, that I might gain the Jews; to them that are under the law, as under the law, that I might gain them that are under
AV
1Corinthians 9
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
ws upo hOs hupo

Adv Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
wn eimi
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
the law;
to-THE-ones UNDER LAW to-the-ones ina hina

Conj
AS
UNDER LAW
NO
BEING
SAME myself
UNDER LAW
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
kerdhsw kerdainO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
THAT THE-ones the-ones
UNDER LAW
I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING
9:21 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anomois ws anomos anomos hOs anomos

a_ Dat Pl m Adv a_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
wn eimi
anomos anomos
a_ Nom Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
all ennomos alla ennomos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
to-THE UN-LAWed to-the-ones without-law cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
AS
UN-LAWed without-law
NO
BEING
UN-LAWed without-law
OF-God
but
IN-LAWed legally
21 To them that are without law, as without law, (being not without law to God, but under the law to Christ,) that I might gain them that are without law.
ina hina
Conj
kerdanw kerdainO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
anomous anomos
a_ Acc Pl m
OF-ANOINTED THAT I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING THE of-Christ the-ones
UN-LAWed without-law tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
9:22 egenomhn
ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
asqenesin asqenhs ina asthenEs asthenEs hina

a_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m Conj
asqeneis kerdhsw asthenEs kerdainO

I-BECAME
to-THE
UN-FIRM weak panta pas
UN-FIRM weak ina hina

Conj
THAT THE
UN-FIRM weak swsw sOzO
I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING
22 To the weak became I as weak, that I might gain the weak: I am made all things to all [men], that I might by all means save some.
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
gegona ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
pantws tinas pantOs tis

Adv px Acc Pl m
a_ Nom Pl n
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
to-THE
ALL
I-HAVE-BECOME ALL
THAT ALL-ly undoubtedly to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
ANY some ina hina

Conj
I-SHOULD-BE-SAVING
9:23 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dia dia
Prep
n_ Acc Sg n
sugkoinwnos sugkoinOnos
a_ Nom Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg n
23 And this I do for the gospel's sake, that I might be partaker thereof with [you].
ALL
YET I-AM-DOING
THRU THE because-of
WELL-MESSAGE THAT TOGETHER-communioner OF-it joint-participant
genwmai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 1 Sg
I-MAY-BE-BECOMING
9:24 ouk
ou
Part Neg
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
stadiw trecontes stadion trechO

pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
NOT
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware de de

Conj
THE-ones the-ones to ho
IN
stadium
RACING
ALL
INDEED
24 . Know ye not that they which run in a race run all, but one receiveth the prize? So run, that ye may obtain.
trecousin eis trechO heis

vi Pres Act 3 Pl n_ Nom Sg m
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
brabeion outws trecete brabeion houtOs trechO

n_ Acc Sg n Adv vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
t_ Acc Sg n
ARE-RACING
ONE
YET IS-GETTING-UP THE is-obtaining
prize
thus
BE-RACING be-ye-racing !
THAT
katalabhte katalambanO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING ye-may-be-grasping-it
9:25 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agwnizomenos agOnizomai
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
egkrateuetai ekeinoi men egkrateuomai ekeinos men

vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg pd Nom Pl m Part
oun oun
Conj
EVERY
YET THE
one-CONTENDING one-contending
ALL IS-IN-HOLDING in-all-things is-controlling-himself hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
those
INDEED THEN
25 And every man that striveth for the mastery is temperate in all things. Now they [do it] to obtain a corruptible crown; but we an incorruptible.
ina hina
Conj
fqarton phthartos
a_ Acc Sg m
stefanon labwsin stephanos lambanO

n_ Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
afqarton aphthartos
a_ Acc Sg m
THAT CORRUPTible WREATH
THEY-MAY-BE-GETTING WE they-may-be-obtaining outws trecw houtOs trechO

YET UN-CORRUPTible incorruptible-one adhlws adElOs

Adv
9:26 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
toinun toinun
Part
ws ouk hOs ou
Adv Part Neg
outws pukteuw ws houtOs pukteuO hOs

Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg Adv
26 I therefore so run, not as uncertainly; so fight I, not as one that beateth the air:
to-THE-NOW thus now-then aera aEr

n_ Acc Sg m
AM-RACING
AS
NOT
UN-EVIDENTly thus dubious
I-AM-FISTING I-am-boxing
AS
ouk ou
Part Neg
derwn derO
NOT
AIR
SKINNING punching
AV
9:27 alla upwpiazw mou

alla
Conj
hupOpiazO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
kai doulagwgw kai doulagOgeO

Conj vi Pres Act 1 Sg Con
mh mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
but
I-AM-belaborING OF-ME
THE
BODY
AND
I-AM-SLAVE-LEADING NO am-leading-into-slavery-it lest
how somehow
27 But I keep under my body, and bring [it] into subjection: lest that by any means, when I have preached to others, I myself should be a castaway.
allois khruxas allos kErussO

a_ Dat Pl m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
adokimos genwmai adokimos ginomai

a_ Nom Sg m vs 2Aor midD 1 Sg
to-others
PROCLAIMing heralding
SAME myself
UN-tested disqualified
I-MAY-BE-BECOMING
AV
1Corinthians 10
10:1 ou
ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umas gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
adelfoi oti oi adelphos hoti ho

n_ Voc Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
pateres patEr
n_ Nom Pl m
NOT
I-AM-WILLING for
YOU(p) ye thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
TO-BE-UN-KNOWING brothers to-be-being-ignorant brethren ! nefelhn hsan nephelE eimi

n_ Acc Sg f vi impf vxx 3 Pl
that
THE
FATHERS
. Moreover, brethren, I would not that ye should be ignorant, how that all our fathers were under the cloud, and all passed through the sea;
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
qalasshs thalassa
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-US
ALL
UNDER THE
CLOUD
WERE
AND
ALL
THRU THE through
SEA
dihlqon dierchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THRU-CAME passed-through
10:2 kai pantes eis

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
mwushn mOusEs
n_ Acc Sg m
WH
ebaptisanto
NA
ebaptisqhsan baptizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
And were all baptized unto Moses in the cloud and in the sea;
AND
ALL
INTO THE
MOSES
IN
THE
nefelh kai en nephelE kai en

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qalassh thalassa
n_ Dat Sg f
CLOUD
AND
IN
THE
WH
SEA
WH NA NA
10:3 kai pantes

kai
Conj
to auto
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
pneumatikon brwma pneumatikos brOma

a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
efagon esthiO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
And did all eat the same spiritual meat;
AND
ALL
THE
SAME
spiritual
FOOD
ATE
10:4 kai pantes to

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
pneumatikon epion pneumatikos pinO

a_ Acc Sg n vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
poma poma
n_ Acc Sg n
epinon pinO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
AND
ALL
THE
SAME
spiritual
DRANK
DRINK
THEY-DRANK for
OUT
And did all drink the same spiritual drink: for they drank of that spiritual Rock that followed them: and that Rock was Christ.
pneumatikhs akolouqoushs petras h pneumatikos akoloutheO petra ho

a_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Sg f
petra petra
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-spiritual
followING
ROCK
THE
ROCK
YET WAS
THE
ANOINTED Christ
5
10:5 all ouk

alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pleiosin polus
a_ Dat Pl m Cmp
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eudokhsen o eudokeO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
but
NOT
IN
THE
MORE majority th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
OF-them
WELL-SEEMS delights
THE
God
But with many of them God was not well pleased: for they were overthrown in the wilderness.
katestrwqhsan katastrOnnumi
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
gar en gar en
Conj Prep
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
THEY-WERE-DOWN-STREWN for they-were-strewn-along
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness egenhqhsan ginomai

vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
10:6 tauta
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
tupoi tupos
n_ Nom Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
these YET types these-things epiqumhtas kakwn epithumEtEs kakos

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Gen Pl n
OF-US
WERE-BECOMED INTO THE were-become kakeinoi epequmhsan kakeinos epithumeO

pd Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
NO
TO-BE
US
. Now these things were our examples, to the intent we should not lust after evil things, as they also lusted.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
ON-FEELers lusters
OF-EVILS according-AS AND-those of-evil-things also-those eidwlolatrai ginesqe eidOlolatrEs ginomai

n_ Nom Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
ON-FEEL lust kaqws kathOs

Adv
10:7 mhde
mEde
Conj
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
wsper hOsper
Adv
NO-YET idolaters nor-yet gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! laos laos
according-AS ANY some fagein esthiO

vn 2Aor Act
OF-them
AS-EVEN even-as kai kai

Conj
Neither be ye idolaters, as [were] some of them; as it is written, The people sat down to eat and drink, and rose up to play.
ekaqisen o kathizO ho
kai pein kai pinO

Conj vn 2Aor Act
n_ Nom Sg m
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN is-seated
THE
PEOPLE
TO-BE-EATING AND
TO-BE-DRINKING AND
anesthsan anistEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
paizein paizO
vn Pres Act
THEY-STAND-UP TO-BE-sportING they-rise
AV
1Corinthians 10
10:8 mhde
mEde
Conj
porneuwmen porneuO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eporneusan porneuO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
kai epesan kai piptO

NO-YET WE-MAY-BE-PROSTITUTING according-AS ANY nor-yet we-may-be-committing-prostitution some mia heis

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-them
PROSTITUTE AND commit-prostitution
THEY-FALL fall
Neither let us commit fornication, as some of them committed, and fell in one day three and twenty thousand.
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
eikosi eikosi
n_ Nom Pl m
treis treis
n_ Nom Pl m
ciliades chilias
n_ Nom Pl f
to-ONE
DAY
TWENTY
THREE
THOUSAND thousands
WH
10:9 mhde
mEde
Conj
ekpeirazwmen ekpeirazO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion
NA
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
NO-YET WE-MAY-BE-OUT-tryING THE nor-yet we-may-putting-on-trial epeirasan kai upo twn peirazO kai hupo ho
vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl m
ANOINTED Christ apwllunto apollumi

vi impf Mid 3 Pl
according-AS ANY some
OF-them
Neither let us tempt Christ, as some of them also tempted, and were destroyed of serpents.
ofewn ophis
n_ Gen Pl m
try try-him
AND
by
THE
serpents
were-destroyED perished tines tis

px Nom Pl m
10:10 mhde
mEde
Conj
gogguzete gogguzO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kaqaper kathaper
Adv
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
egoggusan kai apwlonto gogguzO kai apollumi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
NO-YET BE-YE-MURMURING DOWN-WHICH-EVEN ANY nor-yet be-ye-murmuring ! even-as some upo tou hupo ho
Prep t_ Gen Sg m
OF-them
MURMUR
AND
were-destroyED perished
10 Neither murmur ye, as some of them also murmured, and were destroyed of the destroyer.
oloqreutou olothreutEs
n_ Gen Sg m
by
THE
WHOLE-RUINer exterminator de de
Conj
10:11 tauta
houtos
pd Nom Pl n
tupikws sunebainen tupikOs sumbainO

ekeinois egrafh ekeinos graphO

pd Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
nouqesian nouthesia
n_ Acc Sg f
these YET typically these-things hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
TOGETHER-STEPS to-those befalls those telh telos

n_ Nom Pl n
it-WAS-WRITten YET TOWARD admonition
eis eis
Prep
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aiwnwn kathnthken aiOn katantaO

n_ Gen Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg
11 Now all these things happened unto them for ensamples: and they are written for our admonition, upon whom the ends of the world are come.
OF-US
INTO WHOM whom(p) o ho
THE
FINISHES OF-THE consummations dokwn dokeO

eons
HAS-attainED
10:12 wste
hOste
Conj
estanai histEmi
vn Perf Act
blepetw blepO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
t_ Nom Sg m
12 Wherefore let him that thinketh he standeth take heed lest he fall.
AS-BESIDES THE so-that pesh piptO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
one-SEEMING one-supposing
TO-HAVE-STOOD LET-him-BE-lookING NO to-stand let-him-be-bewaring !
he-SHOULD-BE-FALLING
10:13 peirasmos umas

peirasmos
n_ Nom Sg m
humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
eilhfen lambanO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
anqrwpinos pistos anthrOpinos pistos

de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
trial
YOU(p) ye os hos
pr Nom Sg m
NOT
HAS-GOTTEN IF has-taken umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
NO
human what-is-human
BELIEVing faithful
YET THE
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
easei eaO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
peirasqhnai uper o peirazO huper hos

vn Aor Pas Prep pr Acc Sg n
dunasqe dunamai
God
WHO
NOT
SHALL-BE-LEAVING YOU(p) ye tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-triED
OVER above
WHICH
YE-ARE-ABLE
13 There hath no temptation taken you but such as is common to man: but God [is] faithful, who will not suffer you to be tempted above that ye are able; but will with the temptation also make a way to escape, that ye may be able to bear [it].
alla poihsei alla poieO

sun sun
Prep
peirasmw kai thn peirasmos kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ekbasin tou ekbasis ho

but
SHALL-BE-makING TOGETHER to-THE togetherwith the upenegkein hupopherO

vn 2Aor Act
trial
AND also
THE
OUT-STEP sequel
OF-THE
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
TO-BE-enABLED
TO-BE-UNDER-CARRYING to-be-undergoing-it agaphtoi agapEtos

a_ Voc Pl m
10:14 dioper
dioper
Conj
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
feugete pheugO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eidwlolatrias eidOlolatreia
n_ Gen Sg f
14 Wherefore, my dearly beloved, flee from idolatry.
THRU-WHICH-EVEN beLOVED-ones OF-ME wherefore beloved(p) !
BE-FLEEING be-ye-fleeing !
FROM THE
idolatry
AV
1Corinthians 10
10:15 ws fronimois
hOs
Adv
phronimos
a_ Dat Pl m
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
krinate krinO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
fhmi phEmi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
15 . I speak as to wise men; judge ye what I say.
AS
to-DISPOSED-ones I-AM-sayING to-prudent-ones I-am-saying-it pothrion ths potErion ho

JUDGE judge-ye !
YOU(p) ye
WHICH
I-AM-AVERRING
10:16 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
eulogias o eulogia hos

eulogoumen eulogeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ouci ouchi
Part Int
koinwnia koinOnia
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
DRINK-cup cup tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
blessedness blessing
WHICH
WE-ARE-blessING NOT(emph.) communion not(emph.) ? arton artos

n_ Acc Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg

cristou ton christos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
klwmen klaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
16 The cup of blessing which we bless, is it not the communion of the blood of Christ? The bread which we break, is it not the communion of the body of Christ?
IS
OF-THE
BLOOD
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
BREAD
WHICH
WE-ARE-BREAKING
ouci ouchi
Part Int
koinwnia tou koinOnia ho

swmatos tou sOma ho

cristou estin christos eimi

NOT(emph.) communion not(emph.) ?
OF-THE
BODY
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
IS
10:17 oti eis

hoti
Conj
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
artos artos
n_ Nom Sg m
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar gar
Conj
that
ONE
BREAD
ONE
BODY
THE
MANY
WE-ARE
THE
for
17 For we [being] many are one bread, [and] one body: for we are all partakers of that one bread.
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
artou artos
n_ Gen Sg m
metecomen metechO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ALL
OUT OF-THE
ONE
BREAD
ARE-WITH-HAVING we-are-partaking sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
10:18 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
israhl kata israEl kata

ni proper Prep
ouc ou
Part Neg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
esqiontes esthiO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
BE-lookING THE be-ye-observing ! qusias thusia

n_ Acc Pl f
ISRAEL
according-to FLESH
NOT
THE
ones-EATING ones-eating
THE
18 Behold Israel after the flesh: are not they which eat of the sacrifices partakers of the altar?
koinwnoi tou koinOnos ho

a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
qusiasthriou eisin thusiastErion eimi

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
SACRIFICES communioners participants
OF-THE
ARE
10:19 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
fhmi phEmi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
oti eidwloquton ti hoti eidOlothuton tis

Conj a_ Nom Sg n px Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h E
Part
oti eidwlon hoti eidOlon

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
ANY what ? ti tis

px Nom Sg n
THEN I-AM-AVERRING that
idol-SACRIFICE
ANY anything
IS
OR
that
idol
19 What say I then? that the idol is any thing, or that which is offered in sacrifice to idols is any thing?
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ANY anything
IS
WH WH
10:20 all oti a

alla
Conj
hoti
Conj
hos
pr Acc Pl n
quousin thuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ta eqnh
daimoniois kai ou daimonion kai ou

n_ Dat Pl n Conj Part Neg
but
that
WH
WHICH which(p)
THEY-ARE-SACRIFICING
NA
to-demons
AND
NOT
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
quousin
quousin thuO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
koinwnous koinOnos
a_ Acc Pl m
20 But I [say], that the things which the Gentiles sacrifice, they sacrifice to devils, and not to God: and I would not that ye should have fellowship with devils.
to-God
THEY-ARE-SACRIFICING
NOT
I-AM-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
daimoniwn ginesqai daimonion ginomai

n_ Gen Pl n vn Pres midD/pasD
OF-THE
demons
TO-BE-BECOMING
10:21 ou
ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
pothrion kuriou potErion kurios

pinein pinO
vn Pres Act
kai pothrion daimoniwn kai potErion daimonion

Conj n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Pl n
NOT
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
DRINK-cup cup
OF-Master of-Lord
TO-BE-DRINKING AND
DRINK-cup cup
of-demons
21 Ye cannot drink the cup of the Lord, and the cup of devils: ye cannot be partakers of the Lord's table, and of the table of devils.
ou ou
Part Neg
dunasqe dunamai
trapezhs kuriou trapeza kurios

metecein metechO
vn Pres Act
kai trapezhs daimoniwn kai trapeza daimonion

Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Pl n
NOT
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can
OF-table
OF-Master of-Lord
TO-BE-WITH-HAVING AND to-be-partaking
OF-table
of-demons
AV
1Corinthians 10
10:22 h
E
Part
parazhloumen parazEloO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
iscuroteroi autou ischuros autos

a_ Nom Pl m Cmp pp Gen Sg m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
22 Do we provoke the Lord to jealousy? are we stronger than he?
OR
WE-ARE-BESIDE-BOILING THE we-are-provoking-to-jealousy exestin exesti

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
Master Lord panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
NO
STRONGER-ones stronger
OF-Him
WE-ARE
10:23 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
exestin exesti
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
all alla
Conj
ALL
IS-allowed
but
NOT
ALL
IS-beING-expedient ALL
IS-allowed
but
23 . All things are lawful for me, but all things are not expedient: all things are lawful for me, but all things edify not.
ou ou
Part Neg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
oikodomei oikodomeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
ALL
IS-HOME-BUILDING is-edifying to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
10:24 mhdeis
mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
zhteitw zEteO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
alla to alla ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eterou heteros
a_ Gen Sg m
24 Let no man seek his own, but every man another's [wealth].
NO-YET-ONE THE no-one
OF-self of-himself en en
Prep
LET-BE-SEEKING but let-him-be-seeking !
THE
OF-THE
DIFFERENT-one different-one anakrinontes anakrinO

25 Whatsoever is sold in the shambles, [that] eat, asking no question for conscience sake:
10:25 pan
pas
a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
makellw makellon
n_ Dat Sg n
pwloumenon esqiete pOleO esthiO

vp Pres Pas Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
EVERY everything dia dia

Prep
THE
IN
BUTCHER-place beING-SOLD meat-market
NO-YET-ONE examinING nothing
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
THRU THE because-of
conscience
10:26 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
gh gE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma auths plErOma autos

n_ Nom Sg n pp Gen Sg f
26 For the earth [is] the Lord's, and the fulness thereof.
OF-THE
Master Lord
for
THE
LAND earth twn ho
AND
THE
FILLing
OF-her of-herit poreuesqai poreuomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
27 If any of them that believe not bid you [to a feast], and ye be disposed to go; whatsoever is set before you, eat, asking no question for conscience sake.
10:27 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
kalei kaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
apistwn apistos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai qelete kai thelO

t_ Gen Pl m
IF
ANY anyone to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
IS-CALLING is-inviting
YOU(p) ye
OF-THE
UN-BELIEVing-ones AND unbelievers mhden mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
YE-ARE-WILLING TO-BE-GOING
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
paratiqemenon paratithEmi
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
esqiete esthiO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
anakrinontes dia anakrinO dia

EVERY everything thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THE
beING-BESIDE-PLACED to-YOU(p) being-placed-before ye
NO-YET-ONE examinING nothing
THRU because-of
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
conscience
10:28 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
ieroquton hierothutos
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
IF-EVER YET ANY anyone esqiete esthiO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
MAY-BE-sayING this
SACRED-SACRIFICE IS
NO
di dia
Prep
ekeinon ton ekeinos ho

mhnusanta mEnuO
vp Aor Act Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
28 But if any man say unto you, This is offered in sacrifice unto idols, eat not for his sake that shewed it, and for conscience sake: for the earth [is] the Lord's, and the fulness thereof:
THRU that because-of that-one legw legO
THE
one-DIVULGing one-divulging-it ouci ouchi

Part Neg
AND
THE
conscience
10:29 suneidhsin de
suneidEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
de
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
eterou heteros
a_ Gen Sg m
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
conscience
YET I-AM-sayING
NOT(emph.) THE
OF-self of-yourself krinetai krinO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
but
THE
OF-THE
29 Conscience, I say, not thine own, but of the other: for why is my liberty judged of another [man's] conscience?
ina hina
Conj
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
eleuqeria mou eleutheria egO

upo allhs hupo allos

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
suneidhsews suneidEsis
n_ Gen Sg f
THAT ANY what ?
for
THE
FREEdom
OF-ME
IS-beING-JUDGED by is-being-decided ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
OF-other other
conscience
10:30 ei
ei
Cond
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
cariti charis
n_ Dat Sg f
metecw metechO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
blasfhmoumai blasphEmeO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
uper huper
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
IF
to-grace AM-WITH-HAVING ANY with-gratitude am-partaking what ?
I-AM-beING-HARM-AVERRED OVER WHICH I-am-being-calumniated for-the-sake-of
30 For if I by grace be a partaker, why am I evil spoken of for that for which I give thanks?
AV
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eucaristw eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AM-thankING am-giving-thanks oun oun

Conj
10:31 eite
eite
Conj
esqiete esthiO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eite eite
Conj
pinete pinO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eite eite
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
31 Whether therefore ye eat, or drink, or whatsoever ye do, do all to the glory of God.
IF-BESIDES THEN YE-ARE-EATING IF-BESIDES YE-ARE-DRINKING IF-BESIDES ANY whether or are-drinking or anything panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
YE-ARE-DOING
eis eis
Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ALL
INTO esteem glory
OF-God
BE-DOING be-ye-doing ! kai ellhsin kai th kai hellEn kai ho

Conj n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
10:32 aproskopoi
aproskopos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai ioudaiois ginesqe kai ioudaios ginomai

Conj a_ Dat Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
32 Give none offence, neither to the Jews, nor to the Gentiles, nor to the church of God:
UN-stumbling AND no-stumbling-blocks tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
to-JUDA-ans to-Jews
AND
to-GREEKS
AND
to-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
10:33 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
areskw areskO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
zhtwn zEteO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
according-AS AND-I also-I
ALL to-ALL in-all-things all twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
AM-PLEASING NO
SEEKING
THE
33 Even as I please all [men] in all [things], not seeking mine own profit, but the [profit] of many, that they may be saved.
emautou sumforon alla to emautou sumphoron alla ho

pf 1 Gen Sg m a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n
pollwn ina polus hina

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
swqwsin sOzO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
OF-MYself
expedience
but
THE
OF-THE
MANY
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED
AV
1Corinthians 11
11:1 mimhtai mou

mimEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ginesqe ginomai
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
. Be ye followers of me, even as I also [am] of Christ.
IMITATors
OF-ME
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! de de
Conj
according-AS AND-I also-I mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ memnhsqe mnaomai

vi Perf Pas 2 Pl
11:2 epainw
epaineO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oti panta hoti pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
kai kaqws kai kathOs

Conj Adv
I-AM-ON-PRAISING YET YOU(p) I-am-applauding ye paredwka paradidOmi

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
that
ALL
OF-ME
YE-HAVE-been-REMINDED AND ye-remember
according-AS
Now I praise you, brethren, that ye remember me in all things, and keep the ordinances, as I delivered [them] to you.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
paradoseis katecete paradosis katechO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 2 Pl
I-BESIDE-GIVE to-YOU(p) I-give-over-them to-ye
THE
traditions
YE-ARE-DOWN-HAVING are-retaining oti pantos hoti pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg m
11:3 qelw
thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kefalh o kephalE ho
n_ Nom Sg f t_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye cristos estin christos eimi

TO-PERCEIVE that to-be-aware
OF-EVERY
MAN
THE
HEAD
THE
But I would have you know, that the head of every man is Christ; and the head of the woman [is] the man; and the head of Christ [is] God.
kefalh de kephalE de
n_ Nom Sg f Conj
gunaikos o gunE ho
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kefalh de kephalE de
n_ Nom Sg f Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
IS
HEAD
YET OF-WOMAN
THE
MAN
HEAD
YET OF-THE
cristou o christos ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
THE
God
11:4 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
profhteuwn prophEteuO
kata kefalhs kata kephalE

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
EVERY
MAN
prayING
OR
BEFORE-AVERRING DOWN prophesying
OF-HEAD
Every man praying or prophesying, having [his] head covered, dishonoureth his head.
ecwn echO
kataiscunei thn kataischunO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f

HAVING
IS-DOWN-VILING is-disgracing de de
Conj
THE
HEAD
OF-him
11:5 pasa
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
proseucomenh proseuchomai
h E
Part
profhteuousa akatakaluptw th prophEteuO akatakaluptos ho

vp Pres Act Nom Sg f a_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Sg f
EVERY
YET WOMAN
prayING
OR
BEFORE-AVERRING prophesying en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
to-UN-DOWN-COVER to-uncovered kai to kai ho

Conj
THE
kefalh kataiscunei thn kephalE kataischunO ho

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn auths kephalE autos

gar estin gar eimi

But every woman that prayeth or prophesieth with [her] head uncovered dishonoureth her head: for that is even all one as if she were shaven.
t_ Nom Sg n
HEAD
IS-DOWN-VILING is-disgracing th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THE
HEAD
OF-her
ONE
for
it-IS
AND
THE
auto autos
pp Nom Sg n
exurhmenh xuraO
SAME
THE to-the gar ou gar ou

Conj
to-HAVING-been-SHAVED having-been-shaven katakaluptetai katakaluptO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
11:6 ei
ei
Cond
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai keirasqw kai keirO

Conj vm Aor Mid 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
aiscron aischros
a_ Nom Sg n
Part Neg
IF
for
NOT
IS-beING-DOWN-COVERED WOMAN is-covering keirasqai keirO

vn Aor Mid
AND also
LET-her-be-SHORN IF let-her-be-shorn !
YET VILE shame
For if the woman be not covered, let her also be shorn: but if it be a shame for a woman to be shorn or shaven, let her be covered.
gunaiki to gunE ho
n_ Dat Sg f t_ Nom Sg n
h E
Part
xurasqai xuraO
vn Pres Pas
katakaluptesqw katakaluptO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
to-WOMAN
THE
TO-BE-beING-SHORN OR
TO-BE-beING-SHAVEN LET-her-BE-beING-DOWN-COVERED let-her-be-covering ! katakaluptesqai katakaluptO

vn Pres Pas
11:7 anhr
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
gar ouk gar ou

Conj Part Neg
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn kephalE
n_ Acc Sg f
MAN
INDEED for
NOT
it-IS-OWING ought uparcwn huparchO
TO-BE-beING-DOWN-COVERED THE to-be-covering h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
HEAD
For a man indeed ought not to cover [his] head, forasmuch as he is the image and glory of God: but the woman is the glory of the man.
eikwn eikOn
n_ Nom Sg f
kai doxa kai doxa

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
image
AND
esteem glory
OF-God
THE
WOMAN
YET esteem glory
OF-MAN
AV
1Corinthians 11
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
11:8 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
gunaikos alla gunh gunE alla gunE

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Nom Sg f
ex ek
Prep
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
For the man is not of the woman; but the woman of the man.
NOT
for
IS
MAN
OUT OF-WOMAN
but
WOMAN
OUT OF-MAN
11:9 kai gar ouk

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ou
Part Neg
ektisqh ktizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
gunaika alla gunh gunE alla gunE

dia dia
Prep
Neither was the man created for the woman; but the woman for the man.
AND also ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
for
NOT
IS-CREATED
MAN
THRU THE because-of
WOMAN
but
WOMAN
THRU because-of
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
MAN
11:10 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
exousian ecein exousia echO

epi epi
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
10 For this cause ought the woman to have power on [her] head because of the angels.
THRU this because-of kefalhs dia kephalE dia

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
IS-OWING ought tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
WOMAN
authority
TO-BE-HAVING ON THE onover
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
HEAD
THRU THE because-of oute oute

Conj
MESSENGERS
11:11 plhn
plEn
Adv
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
cwris chOris
Adv
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
oute oute
Conj
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
cwris chOris
Adv
gunaikos gunE
n_ Gen Sg f
MOREly NOT-BESIDES WOMAN however neither en en

Prep
apart-from MAN
NOT-BESIDES MAN nor
apart-from WOMAN
11 Nevertheless neither is the man without the woman, neither the woman without the man, in the Lord.
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
Master Lord gunh gunE

n_ Nom Sg f
11:12 wsper gar h

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
outws kai o houtOs kai ho

anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
AS-EVEN even-as dia dia

Prep
for
THE
WOMAN
OUT OF-THE
MAN
thus
AND also
THE
MAN
12 For as the woman [is] of the man, even so [is] the man also by the woman; but all things of God.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos ta gunE ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THRU THE through
WOMAN
THE
YET ALL
OUT OF-THE
God
11:13 en
en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
autois krinate autos krinO

pp Dat Pl m vm Aor Act 2 Pl
prepon prepO
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gunaika akatakalupton gunE akatakaluptos

IN
YOU(p) ye qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
13 Judge in yourselves: is it comely that a woman pray unto God uncovered?
them selves
JUDGE judge-ye !
BEHOOVING
it-IS
WOMAN
UN-DOWN-COVERED uncovered
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
proseucesqai proseuchomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
to-THE
God
TO-BE-prayING
11:14 oude
oude
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fusis phusis
n_ Nom Sg f
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
didaskei didaskO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oti anhr hoti anEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
ean ean
Cond
NOT-YET THE not-yeteven koma komaO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
nature
SAME itself estin eimi
IS-TEACHING YOU(p) ye
that
MAN
INDEED IF-EVER
14 Doth not even nature itself teach you, that, if a man have long hair, it is a shame unto him?
atimia atimia
n_ Nom Sg f
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
MAY-BE-TRESSING UN-VALUE to-him may-be-having-tresses dishonor
it-IS
11:15 gunh
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
ean ean
Cond
koma komaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oti hoti
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
WOMAN
YET IF-EVER MAY-BE-TRESSING esteem may-be-having-tresses glory
to-her
it-IS
15 But if a woman have long hair, it is a glory to her: for [her] hair is given her for a covering.
AV
1Corinthians 11
komh komE
n_ Nom Sg f
anti anti
Prep
peribolaiou dedotai peribolaion didOmi

n_ Gen Sg n vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
WH
auth
NA
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
TRESSES
INSTEAD OF-ABOUT-CAST of-clothing de de

Conj
HAS-been-GIVEN
to-her her einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
11:16 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
filoneikos philoneikos
a_ Nom Sg m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
toiauthn toioutos
pd Acc Sg f
IF
YET ANY anyone ouk ou

Part Neg
IS-SEEMING is-presuming ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
FOND-CONQUERor TO-BE rivalrous oude oude

Adv
WE
such
16 But if any man seem to be contentious, we have no such custom, neither the churches of God.
sunhqeian sunEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
ekklhsiai ekklEsia
n_ Nom Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-CUSTOM NOT usage
ARE-HAVING NOT-YET THE neither epainw epaineO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OUT-CALLEDS OF-THE ecclesias oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
God
11:17 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
paraggellwn ouk paraggellO ou

vp Pres Act Nom Sg m Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kreisson kreisson
a_ Acc Sg n
this
YET chargING
NOT
I-AM-ON-PRAISING that I-am-applauding
NOT
INTO THE
better
17 . Now in this that I declare [unto you] I praise [you] not, that ye come together not for the better, but for the worse.
alla eis alla eis

Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hsson hEsson
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
sunercesqe sunerchomai
but
INTO THE
DIMINISHly discomfiture men men

Part
YE-ARE-TOGETHER-COMING ye-are-coming-together umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
11:18 prwton
prOton
Adv
gar sunercomenwn gar sunerchomai

en en
Prep
ekklhsia akouw ekklEsia akouO

BEFORE-most INDEED for first scismata en schisma en

n_ Acc Pl n Prep
OF-TOGETHER-COMING of-coming-together
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye ti tis

px Acc Sg n
OUT-CALLED I-AM-HEARING ecclesia pisteuw pisteuO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
18 For first of all, come together in the hear that there be among you; and believe it.
when ye church, I divisions I partly
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
uparcein huparchO
vn Pres Act
kai meros kai meros

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
SPLITS schisms
IN
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-belongING AND to-be-existing
PART
ANY some einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
I-AM-BELIEVING
11:19 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gar kai aireseis en gar kai hairesis en

Conj Conj n_ Nom Pl f Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ina hina
Conj
kai kai
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
dokimoi dokimos
a_ Nom Pl m
it-IS-BINDING it-must-be
for
AND also en en
preferences sects umin humeis
IN YOU(p) among ye
TO-BE
THAT
AND also
THE the-ones
tested-ones qualified
19 For there must be also heresies among you, that they which are approved may be made manifest among you.
faneroi genwntai phaneros ginomai

a_ Nom Pl m vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
Prep
pp 2 Dat Pl
apparent
MAY-BE-BECOMING IN YOU(p) among ye oun oun

Conj
11:20 sunercomenwn
sunerchomai
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kuriakon kuriakos
a_ Acc Sg n
OF-TOGETHER-COMING of-coming-together deipnon fagein deipnon esthiO

THEN OF-YOU(p) ON of-ye
THE
SAME NOT same-place
it-IS
Master(adj) Lord's
20 When ye come together therefore into one place, [this] is not to eat the Lord's supper.
DINner
TO-BE-EATING
11:21 ekastos gar to

hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
deipnon prolambanei deipnon prolambanO

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
kai kai
Conj
EACH each-one os hos

pr Nom Sg m
for
THE
OWN
DINner
IS-BEFORE-GETTING IN is-getting-before mequei methuO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
TO-BE-EATING AND
21 For in eating every one taketh before [other] his own supper: and one is hungry, and another is drunken.
men men
Part
peina peinaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
WHO
INDEED IS-HUNGERING WHO is-being-hungry gar oikias ouk gar oikia ou

Conj n_ Acc Pl f Part Neg
YET IS-beING-DRUNK is-being-drunk eis eis

Prep
11:22 mh
mE
Part Neg
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
esqiein esthiO
vn Pres Act
kai pinein kai pinO

Conj vn Pres Act
h E
Part
NO
for
HOMES
NOT
YE-ARE-HAVING INTO THE
TO-BE-EATING AND
TO-BE-DRINKING OR
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias tou ekklEsia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
katafroneite kai kataiscunete kataphroneO kai kataischunO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
22 What? have ye not houses to eat and to drink in? or despise ye the church of God, and shame them that have not? What shall I say to you? shall I praise you in this? I praise [you] not.
OF-THE the
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
OF-THE
God
YE-ARE-despisING
AND
YE-ARE-DOWN-VILING THE-ones are-mortifying the-ones
NO
AV
1Corinthians 11
econtas echO
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eipw legO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
epainesw epaineO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
toutw ouk houtos ou

pd Dat Sg n Part Neg
HAVING
ANY what ?
I-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU(p) to-ye
I-SHALL-BE-ON-PRAISING YOU(p) I-shall-be-applauding ye
IN
this
NOT
epainw epaineO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-ON-PRAISING I-am-applauding
11:23 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar parelabon apo gar paralambanO apo

Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai paredwka umin kai paradidOmi humeis

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
oti hoti
Conj
for
BESIDE-GOT accepted ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
FROM THE
Master Lord nukti nux

n_ Dat Sg f
WHICH
AND also
I-BESIDE-GIVE to-YOU(p) I-give-over to-ye elaben lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
that
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
paredideto paradidOmi
vi impf Pas 3 Sg
23 . For I have received of the Lord that which also I delivered unto you, That the Lord Jesus the [same] night in which he was betrayed took bread:
THE
Master Lord
JESUS
IN
THE
NIGHT
to-WHICH He-was-BESIDE-GIVEN GOT he-was-given-up took
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
BREAD
11:24 kai eucaristhsas eklasen

kai
Conj
eucharisteO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
klaiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai eipen kai legO

touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND
thanking giving-thanks to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
He-BREAKS breaks-it umwn humeis
AND
said
this
OF-ME
IS
THE
24 And when he had given thanks, he brake [it], and said, Take, eat: this is my body, which is broken for you: this do in remembrance of me.
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
uper huper
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
anamnhsin anamnEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
pp 2 Gen Pl
BODY
THE
this
INTO THE
MY
UP-REMINDing recollection touto houtos

pd Nom Sg n
25 After the same manner also [he took] the cup, when he had supped, saying, This cup is the new testament in my blood: this do ye, as oft as ye drink [it], in remembrance of me.
11:25 wsautws kai to

hOsautOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pothrion meta to potErion meta ho

n_ Nom Sg n Prep t_ Acc Sg n
deipnhsai legwn deipneO legO

vn Aor Act vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
AS-SAMEly similarly to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
AND also
THE
DRINK-cup cup kainh kainos

a_ Nom Sg f
after
THE
TO-DINE
sayING
this
pothrion h potErion ho
n_ Nom Sg n t_ Nom Sg f
diaqhkh estin diathEkE eimi

n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
emw emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
aimati haima
n_ Dat Sg n
THE
DRINK-cup cup poieite poieO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
THE
NEW
covenant
IS
IN
THE
MY
BLOOD
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
osakis hosakis
Adv
ean ean
Cond
pinhte pinO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
anamnhsin anamnEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
this
as-many-times IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING INTO THE as-often-as esqihte esthiO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
MY
UP-REMINDing recollection
26 For as often as ye eat this bread, and drink this cup, ye do shew the Lord's death till he come.
11:26 osakis
hosakis
Adv
gar ean gar ean

Conj Cond
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
touton kai to houtos kai ho

pd Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg n
as-many-times for as-often-as pothrion pinhte potErion pinO

n_ Acc Sg n vs Pres Act 2 Pl
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-EATING THE
BREAD
this
AND
THE
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qanaton tou thanatos ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
kataggellete kataggellO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
DRINK-cup cup acris ou achri hos

Prep
YE-MAY-BE-DRINKING THE may-be-drinking elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
DEATH
OF-THE
Master Lord
YE-ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING ye-are-announcing
pr Gen Sg m
UNTIL
WHICH
He-MAY-BE-COMING
11:27 wste
hOste
Conj
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
an an
Part
esqih esthiO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
pinh pinO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AS-BESIDES WHO so-that pothrion tou potErion ho

EVER MAY-BE-EATING THE
BREAD
OR
MAY-BE-DRINKING THE
27 Wherefore whosoever shall eat this bread, and drink [this] cup of the Lord, unworthily, shall be guilty of the body and blood of the Lord.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
anaxiws anaxiOs
Adv
enocos enochos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
swmatos kai tou sOma kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n Conj t_ Gen Sg n
DRINK-cup cup
OF-THE
Master Lord
UN-WORTHIly liable unworthily
SHALL-BE
OF-THE
BODY
AND
OF-THE
AV

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
BLOOD
OF-THE
Master Lord anqrwpos eauton anthrOpos heautou

n_ Nom Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m
11:28 dokimazetw de
dokimazO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
kai outws ek kai houtOs ek

Conj Adv Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
artou artos
n_ Gen Sg m
LET-BE-testING let-him-be-testing ! esqietw esthiO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
YET human
self himself
AND
thus
OUT OF-THE
BREAD
28 But let a man examine himself, and so let him eat of [that] bread, and drink of [that] cup.
kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pothriou pinetw potErion pinO

n_ Gen Sg n vm Pres Act 3 Sg
LET-BE-EATING AND let-him-be-eating !
OUT OF-THE
DRINK-cup cup
LET-BE-DRINKING let-him-be-drinking ! krima krima

n_ Acc Sg n
11:29 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar esqiwn gar esthiO

kai pinwn kai pinO

eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
esqiei esthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
THE
for
one-EATING one-eating diakrinwn diakrinO

AND
DRINKING
JUDGment to-self to-himself
IS-EATING
AND
29 For he that eateth and drinketh unworthily, eateth and drinketh damnation to himself, not discerning the Lord's body.
pinei pinO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
IS-DRINKING
NO
THRU-JUDGING discriminating touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
THE
BODY
11:30 dia
dia
Prep
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
asqeneis kai arrwstoi asthenEs kai arrhOstos

kai koimwntai kai koimaO

THRU this because-of ikanoi hikanos

a_ Nom Pl m
IN YOU(p) among ye
30 For this cause many [are] weak and sickly among you, and many sleep.
MANY
UN-FIRM infirm
AND
UN-FARE-WELLS AND ailing
ARE-reposING
enough considerable-number
11:31 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
eautous diekrinomen heautou diakrinO

pf 3 Acc Pl m vi impf Act 1 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
an an
Part
ekrinomeqa krinO
vi impf Pas 1 Pl
31 For if we would judge ourselves, we should not be judged.
IF
YET selves ourselves de de

Conj
WE-THRU-JUDGED NOT we-adjudicated upo hupo

Prep
WH
EVER WE-were-JUDGED
11:32 krinomenoi
krinO
tou
NA
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
paideuomeqa paideuO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
ina hina
Conj
beING-JUDGED
YET UNDER by tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
Master Lord
WE-ARE-beING-disciplinED THAT
32 But when we are judged, we are chastened of the Lord, that we should not be condemned with the world.
mh mE
Part Neg
sun sun
Prep
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
katakriqwmen katakrinO
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
NO
SYSTEM world
WE-MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-JUDGED we-may-be-being-condemned sunercomenoi sunerchomai

11:33 wste
hOste
Conj

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
fagein esthiO
vn 2Aor Act
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
33 Wherefore, my brethren, when ye come together to eat, tarry one for another.
AS-BESIDES brothers so-that brethren ! ekdecesqe ekdechomai

OF-ME
TOGETHER-COMING when-coming-together
INTO THE
TO-BE-EATING one-another
BE-YE-OUT-RECEIVING be-ye-waiting-for !
11:34 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
peina peinaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
esqietw esthiO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
IF
ANY anyone
MAY-BE-HUNGERING IN may-be-being-hungry ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
HOME
LET-BE-EATING THAT NO let-him-be-eating ! ws an hOs an

Adv Part
INTO JUDGment
34 And if any man hunger, let him eat at home; that ye come not together unto condemnation. And the rest will I set in order when I come.
sunerchsqe sunerchomai
de de
Conj
loipa loipon
a_ Acc Pl n
elqw erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
diataxomai diatassO
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
YE-MAY-BE-TOGETHER-COMING THE ye-may-be-coming-together
YET rest rest(p)
AS
EVER I-MAY-BE-COMING I-SHALL-BE-prescribING
AV
1Corinthians 12
12:1 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
pneumatikwn adelfoi ou pneumatikos adelphos ou

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Voc Pl m Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
ABOUT YET THE concerning
spirituals spiritual-things oti ote eqnh hoti hote ethnos

Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl n
brothers brethren ! hte eimi
NOT
I-AM-WILLING YOU(p) ye ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
. Now concerning spiritual [gifts], brethren, I would not have you ignorant.
TO-BE-UN-KNOWING to-be-being-ignorant
2
12:2 oidate
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
pros pros
Prep
eidwla ta eidOlon ho
vi impf vxx 2 Pl
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED that ye-are-aware afwna aphOnos

a_ Acc Pl n
when
NATIONS YE-WERE of-the-nations
TOWARD THE
idols
THE
Ye know that ye were Gentiles, carried away unto these dumb idols, even as ye were led.
ws an hOs an
Adv Part
hgesqe agO
vi impf Pas 2 Pl
apagomenoi apagO
UN-SOUND AS voiceless
EVER YE-were-LED
beING-FROM-LED-ones being-led-away umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
12:3 dio
dio
Conj
gnwrizw gnOrizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
pneumati qeou pneuma theos

THRU-WHICH I-AM-KNOWizING to-YOU(p) wherefore I-am-making-known to-ye lalwn laleO

that
NOT-YET-ONE IN no-one kai oudeis kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
spirit
OF-God
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anaqema ihsous anathema iEsous

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
eipein legO
vn 2Aor Act
Wherefore I give you to understand, that no man speaking by the Spirit of God calleth Jesus accursed: and [that] no man can say that Jesus is the Lord, but by the Holy Ghost.
TALKING speaking kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
IS-sayING
anathema
JESUS
AND
NOT-YET-ONE IS-ABLE no-one
TO-BE-sayING
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep

Master Lord
JESUS
IF
NO
IN
spirit
HOLY
12:4 diaireseis de
diairesis
n_ Nom Pl f
de
Conj
carismatwn eisin charisma eimi

n_ Gen Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
auto autos
pp Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
Now there are diversities of gifts, but the same Spirit.
apportionments
YET OF-grace-effects of-gracious-gifts
THEY-ARE there-are eisin eimi
THE
YET SAME
spirit
12:5 kai diaireseis diakoniwn

kai
Conj
diairesis
n_ Nom Pl f
diakonia
n_ Gen Pl f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
And there are differences of administrations, but the same Lord.
AND
apportionments
OF-THRU-SERVices THEY-ARE of-services there-are
AND
WH
THE
WH NA
SAME
NA
Master Lord de de
Conj
12:6 kai diaireseis energhmatwn eisin

kai
Conj
kai o
diairesis
n_ Nom Pl f
energEma
n_ Gen Pl n
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
And there are diversities of operations, but it is the same God which worketh all in all.
AND
apportionments
OF-IN-ACT-effects of-operations ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THEY-ARE there-are en en
Prep
THE
YET
SAME
God
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
energwn energeO
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
THE
One-IN-ACTING one-operating
THE
ALL
IN
ALL
12:7 ekastw de
hekastos
a_ Dat Sg m
de
Conj
didotai didOmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fanerwsis tou phanerOsis ho

pneumatos pros pneuma pros

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
But the manifestation of the Spirit is given to every man to profit withal.
to-EACH to-each-one sumferon sumpherO

YET IS-beING-GIVEN THE
APPEARing manifestation
OF-THE
spirit
TOWARD THE
beING-expedient
12:8 w
hos
pr Dat Sg m
men men
Part
gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos didotai pneuma didOmi

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
sofias sophia
n_ Gen Sg f
to-WHOM
INDEED for
THRU THE through gnwsews gnOsis

n_ Gen Sg f
spirit
IS-beING-GIVEN saying word to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
OF-WISDOM
For to one is given by the Spirit the word of wisdom; to another the word of knowledge by the same Spirit;
allw allos
a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
to-other to-another
YET saying word
OF-KNOWledge according-to THE
SAME
spirit
12:9 eterw
heteros
a_ Dat Sg m
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
pneumati allw pneuma allos

n_ Dat Sg n a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
carismata iamatwn charisma iama

n_ Nom Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
To another faith by the same Spirit; to another the gifts of healing by the same Spirit;
to-DIFFERENT BELIEF to-different-one faith
IN
THE
SAME
spirit
to-other to-another
YET grace-effects gracious-gifts
OF-HEALth of-health(p)
AV
1Corinthians 12
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
IN
THE
ONE
spirit
12:10 allw
allos
a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
energhmata dunamewn energEma dunamis

n_ Nom Pl n n_ Gen Pl f
allw allos
a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
profhteia prophEteia
n_ Nom Sg f
allw allos
a_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
to-other to-another
YET IN-ACT-effects operations
OF-ABILITIES to-other of-powerful-deeds to-another genh genos

n_ Nom Pl n
YET
BEFORE-AVERment to-other prophecy to-another de de

Conj
YET
diakriseis pneumatwn eterw diakrisis pneuma heteros

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Gen Pl n a_ Dat Sg m
glwsswn allw glOssa allos

n_ Gen Pl f a_ Dat Sg m
ermhneia hermEneia
n_ Nom Sg f
glwsswn glOssa
n_ Gen Pl f
10 To another the working of miracles; to another prophecy; to another discerning of spirits; to another [divers] kinds of tongues; to another the interpretation of tongues:
THRU-JUDGing discrimination(p)
OF-spirits
to-DIFFERENT breeds to-different-one species(p) energei energeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
OF-TONGUES to-other of-languages to-another en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
YET TRANSLATion OF-TONGUES of-languages auto autos

pp Nom Sg n
12:11 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
ALL
YET these
IS-IN-ACTING THE is-operating ekastw kaqws hekastos kathOs

a_ Dat Sg m Adv
ONE
AND
THE
SAME
spirit
11 But all these worketh that one and the selfsame Spirit, dividing to every man severally as he will.
diairoun diaireO
idia idios
a_ Dat Sg f
bouletai boulomai
apportionING
OWN
to-EACH
according-AS it-IS-intendING he-is-intending swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
12:12 kaqaper
kathaper
Adv
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai melh kai melos

Conj n_ Acc Pl n
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN for even-as ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
BODY
ONE
IS
AND
MEMBERS MANY
12 . For as the body is one, and hath many members, and all the members of that one body, being many, are one body: so also [is] Christ.
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos polla sOma polus

n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Pl n
onta eimi
vp Pres vxx Nom Pl n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
IS-HAVING
ALL
YET THE
MEMBERS OF-THE
BODY
MANY
BEING
ONE
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n

cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
IS
BODY
thus
AND also
THE
ANOINTED Christ pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
12:13 kai gar en

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
en
Prep
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
pneumati hmeis pneuma hEmeis

n_ Dat Sg n pp 1 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
AND also
for
IN
ONE
spirit
WE
ALL
INTO ONE
BODY
ebaptisqhmen eite baptizO eite

ioudaioi eite ioudaios eite

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
ellhnes eite hellEn eite

n_ Nom Pl m Conj
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
eite eite
Conj
13 For by one Spirit are we all baptized into one body, whether [we be] Jews or Gentiles, whether [we be] bond or free; and have been all made to drink into one Spirit.
IF-BESIDES JUDA-ans whether Jews en heis

n_ Acc Sg n
IF-BESIDES GREEKS or
IF-BESIDES SLAVES whether
IF-BESIDES or
eleuqeroi kai pantes eleutheros kai pas

pneuma epotisqhmen pneuma potizO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
FREE
AND
ALL
ONE
spirit
ARE-DRINKizED are-made-to-imbibe estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
12:14 kai gar to

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
melos melos
n_ Nom Sg n
alla polla alla polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
14 For the body is not one member, but many.
AND also
for
THE
BODY
NOT
IS
ONE
MEMBER
but
MANY
12:15 ean
ean
Cond
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pous pous
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ceir cheir
n_ Nom Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
IF-EVER MAY-BE-sayING THE
FOOT
that NOT seeing-that para para

Prep
I-AM
HAND
NOT
15 If the foot shall say, Because I am not the hand, I am not of the body; is it therefore not of the body?
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos ou sOma ou
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
I-AM
OUT OF-THE
BODY
NOT
BESIDE this
NOT
it-IS
OUT OF-THE
swmatos sOma
n_ Gen Sg n
BODY
AV
1Corinthians 12
12:16 kai ean

kai
Conj
ean
Cond
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ous ous
n_ Nom Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ofqalmos ouk ophthalmos ou

AND
IF-EVER MAY-BE-sayING THE
EAR
that NOT seeing-that para para

Prep
I-AM
VIEWer eye ek ek
Prep
NOT
16 And if the ear shall say, Because I am not the eye, I am not of the body; is it therefore not of the body?
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos ou sOma ou
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
I-AM
OUT OF-THE
BODY
NOT
BESIDE this
NOT
it-IS
OUT OF-THE
swmatos sOma
n_ Gen Sg n
BODY
12:17 ei
ei
Cond
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
ofqalmos pou ophthalmos pou

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
akoh akoE
n_ Nom Sg f
ei ei
Cond
olon holos
a_ Nom Sg n
IF
WHOLE
THE
BODY
VIEWer eye
?-where THE where ?
HEARing
IF
WHOLE
17 If the whole body [were] an eye, where [were] the hearing? If the whole [were] hearing, where [were] the smelling?
akoh akoE
n_ Nom Sg f
pou pou
Part Int
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
osfrhsis osphrEsis
n_ Nom Sg f
HEARing
?-where THE where ?

WH
SCENT
12:18
nun
NA
nuni nuni
Adv
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
ekaston hekastos
a_ Nom Sg n
NOW
YET THE
God
PLACED
THE
MEMBERS ONE
EACH
18 But now hath God set the members every one of them in the body, as it hath pleased him.
autwn en autos en
pp Gen Pl n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati kaqws sOma kathOs

n_ Dat Sg n Adv
hqelhsen thelO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-them
IN
THE
BODY
WH
according-AS He-WILLS
NA
12:19 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
ta
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
melos melos
n_ Nom Sg n
pou pou
Part Int
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
19 And if they were all one member, where [were] the body?
IF
YET WAS
THE
ALL
ONE
MEMBER
?-where THE where ?
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
BODY
NA
12:20 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
polla polus
a_ Nom Pl n
men men
Part
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
20 But now [are they] many members, yet but one body.
NOW YET MANY
INDEED
WH
MEMBERS ONE
NA
YET BODY
12:21 ou
ou
Part Neg
dunatai dunamai
de
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ofqalmos eipein ophthalmos legO

n_ Nom Sg m vn 2Aor Act
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
NOT
IS-ABLE can ouk ou

Part Neg
YET
THE
VIEWer eye
TO-BE-sayING to-THE
HAND
21 And the eye cannot say unto the hand, I have no need of thee: nor again the head to the feet, I have no need of you.
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
palin h palin ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
kefalh tois kephalE ho

n_ Nom Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
posin pous
n_ Dat Pl m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
need
OF-YOU
NOT
I-AM-HAVING
OR
AGAIN
THE
HEAD
to-THE
FEET
need
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
I-AM-HAVING
12:22 alla pollw mallon ta

alla
Conj
polus
a_ Dat Sg n
mallon
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
dokounta dokeO
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos sOma
n_ Gen Sg n
but butnay
to-much much
RATHER
THE
SEEMING being-supposed
MEMBERS OF-THE
BODY
22 Nay, much more those members of the body, which seem to be more feeble, are necessary:
asqenestera uparcein asthenEs huparchO

a_ Nom Pl n Cmp vn Pres Act
anagkaia estin anagkaios eimi

a_ Nom Pl n vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
more-UN-FIRM weaker
TO-BE-belongING necessary to-be-being-inherently necessary(p)
IS
AV
1Corinthians 12
12:23 kai a
kai
Conj
hos
pr Acc Pl n
dokoumen dokeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
atimotera atimos
a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos toutois timhn sOma houtos timE

n_ Gen Sg n pd Dat Pl n n_ Acc Sg f
AND
WHICH which(p)
WE-ARE-SEEMING more-UN-VALUED TO-BE we-are-supposing more-dishonored kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl n
OF-THE
BODY
to-these these euschmosunhn euschEmosunE

n_ Acc Sg f
VALUE honor
perissoteran peritiqemen perissos peritithEmi

a_ Acc Sg f Cmp vi Pres Act 1 Pl
aschmona hmwn aschEmon hemeis

a_ Nom Pl n pp 1 Gen Pl
23 And those [members] of the body, which we think to be less honourable, upon these we bestow more abundant honour; and our uncomely [parts] have more abundant comeliness.
more-excessive more-exceeding
WE-ARE-ABOUT-PLACING AND we-are-investing-with
THE
indecents indecent(p)
OF-US
WELL-FIGURE-TOGETHERness respectability
perissoteran ecei perissos echO

a_ Acc Sg f Cmp vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-HAVING
12:24 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
euschmona euschEmOn
a_ Nom Pl n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
alla o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET WELL-FIGURED OF-US respectable(p) to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
NOT
need
IS-HAVING
but
THE
God
sunekerasen sugkerannumi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
usteroumenw perissoteran dous hustereO perissos didOmi

vp Pres Pas Dat Sg m a_ Acc Sg f Cmp vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
24 For our comely [parts] have no need: but God hath tempered the body together, having given more abundant honour to that [part] which lacked:
TOGETHER-blends THE blends-together timhn timE

n_ Acc Sg f
BODY
to-THE
one-WANTING being-deficient
GIVING
VALUE honor
12:25 ina
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
scisma schisma
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati alla to sOma alla ho

n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
uper huper
Prep
THAT NO
MAY-BE there-may-be
SPLIT schism ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
IN
THE
BODY
but
THE
SAME
25 That there should be no schism in the body; but [that] the members should have the same care one for another.
allhlwn merimnwsin allElOn merimnaO

pc Gen Pl n vs Pres Act 3 Pl
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
one-another
MAY-BE-beING-anxious THE may-be-being-solicitous pascei paschO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
MEMBERS
12:26 kai eite

kai
Conj
eite
Conj
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
melos melos
n_ Nom Sg n
sumpascei sumpaschO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
AND
IF-BESIDES IS-EMOTIONING ONE whether is-suffering eite eite

Conj
MEMBER
NA
IS-TOGETHER-EMOTIONING ALL is-sympathizing melos melos

n_ Nom Sg n
THE
26 And whether one member suffer, all the members suffer with it; or one member be honoured, all the members rejoice with it.
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
doxazetai doxazO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
en heis
n_ Nom Sg n
sugcairei sugchairO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
MEMBERS IF-BESIDES IS-beING-esteemizED or is-being-esteemed ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
ONE
MEMBER
IS-TOGETHER-JOYING ALL is-rejoicing-togetherwith-it
melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
THE
MEMBERS
12:27 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai melh kai melos

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
ek ek
Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
YOU(p) ye
27 . Now ye are the body of Christ, and members in particular.
YET ARE
BODY
OF-ANOINTED AND of-Christ o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
MEMBERS OUT OF-PART
12:28 kai ous

kai
Conj
hos
pr Acc Pl m
men men
Part
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia prwton ekklEsia prOton

n_ Dat Sg f Adv
AND also
WHOM whom(p)
INDEED PLACED
THE
God
IN
THE
OUT-CALLED BEFORE-most ecclesia first dunameis dunamis

n_ Acc Pl f
apostolous deuteron profhtas apostolos deuteros prophEtEs

n_ Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Pl m
triton didaskalous epeita tritos didaskalos epeita

Adv n_ Acc Pl m Adv
28 And God hath set some in the church, first apostles, secondarily prophets, thirdly teachers, after that miracles, then gifts of healings, helps, governments, diversities of tongues.
commissioners apostles epeita epeita

Adv
second
BEFORE-AVERers third prophets
TEACHers
ON-THEREAFTER ABILITIES thereupon powers glwsswn glOssa

n_ Gen Pl f
carismata iamatwn antilhmyeis kubernhseis genh charisma iama antilEpsis kubernEsis genos
n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Pl n n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl n
ON-THEREAFTER grace-effects thereupon gracious-gifts
OF-HEALth of-health(p)
INSTEAD-GETS supports
STEERings pilotage(p)
breeds species(p)
OF-TONGUES of-languages
AV
12:29 mh
mE
Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
apostoloi mh apostolos mE
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
profhtai prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
didaskaloi didaskalos
n_ Nom Pl m
29 [Are] all apostles? [are] all prophets? [are] all teachers? [are] all workers of miracles?
NO
ALL
commissioners apostles dunameis dunamis

n_ Nom Pl f
NO
ALL
BEFORE-AVERers NO prophets
ALL
TEACHers
mh mE
Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
NO
ALL
ABILITIES powers pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
12:30 mh
mE
Part Neg
carismata ecousin charisma echO

n_ Nom Pl n vi Pres Act 3 Pl
iamatwn mh iama mE
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
glwssais lalousin glOssa laleO

n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Pl
30 Have all the gifts of healing? do all speak with tongues? do all interpret?
NO
ALL
grace-effects gracious-gifts diermhneuousin diermEneuO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ARE-HAVING OF-HEALth of-health(p)
NO
ALL
to-TONGUES languages
ARE-TALKING are-speaking
mh mE
Part Neg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
NO
ALL
ARE-THRU-TRANSLATING are-interpreting de de
Conj
12:31 zhloute
zEloO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
carismata ta charisma ho
meizona mega
a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
kai eti kai eti

Conj Adv
kaq kata
Prep
31 But covet earnestly the best gifts: and yet shew I unto you a more excellent way.
BE-BOILING YET THE be-ye-being-zealous ! for-the uperbolhn odon huperbolE hodos

grace-effects gracious-gifts
THE
GREATer
AND
STILL according-to in-accord-with
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
deiknumi deiknumi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
OVER-CAST transcendence
WAY path
to-YOU(p) ye
I-AM-SHOWING
AV
1Corinthians 13
13:1 ean
ean
Cond
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
glwssais twn glOssa ho

anqrwpwn lalw anthrOpos laleO

n_ Gen Pl m vs Pres Act 1 Sg
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
IF-EVER to-THE
TONGUES languages ecw echO

vs Pres Act 1 Sg
OF-THE
humans
I-MAY-BE-TALKING AND I-may-be-speaking calkos chalkos

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
MESSENGERS
. Though I speak with the tongues of men and of angels, and have not charity, I am become [as] sounding brass, or a tinkling cymbal.
agaphn de agapE de
n_ Acc Sg f Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
gegona ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
hcwn EcheO
h E
Part
kumbalon kumbalon
n_ Nom Sg n
LOVE
YET NO
I-AM-HAVING
I-HAVE-BECOME COPPER
RESOUNDING
OR
cymbal
alalazon alalazO
SCREAMING clanging
13:2
WH
kan
NA
kai ean kai ean

Conj Cond
NA
ecw echO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
profhteian prophEteia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai eidw kai eidO

Conj vs Perf Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
IF-EVER
I-MAY-BE-HAVING BEFORE-AVERment AND prophecy thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
I-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE may-be-perceiving

NA
musthria mustErion
n_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
kai pasan kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Sg f
gnwsin gnOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
WH
kan
NA
kai ean kai ean

Conj Cond
ecw echO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
And though I have [the gift of] prophecy, and understand all mysteries, and all knowledge; and though I have all faith, so that I could remove mountains, and have not charity, I am nothing.
CLOSE-KEEPS ALL secrets pasan pas

a_ Acc Sg f
AND
EVERY all
THE
KNOWledge
WH
AND
NA
IF-EVER
I-MAY-BE-HAVING
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin wste pistis hOste

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
orh oros
n_ Acc Pl n
meqistanein
meqistanai methistEmi
vn Pres Act
agaphn de agapE de
n_ Acc Sg f Conj
EVERY all mh mE
Part Neg
THE
BELIEF faith
AS-BESIDES mountains so-as eimi eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
TO-after-STAND to-transport
LOVE
YET
ecw echO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
ouqen oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
NO
I-MAY-BE-HAVING NOT-YET-ONE I-AM I-am-having nothing ywmisw psOmizO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
13:3 kan
kan
Cond Con
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
uparconta huparchO
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
WH
kan
NA
kai kai
Conj
AND-[IF]-EVER I-SHOULD-BE-MORSELizING ALL and-if-ever I-should-be-morseling-out

NA
THE
belongINGS possessions ina hina

Conj
OF-ME
AND
And though I bestow all my goods to feed [the poor], and though I give my body to be burned, and have not charity, it profiteth me nothing.
ean ean
Cond
paradw paradidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kauchswmai kauchaomai
vs Aor midD 1 Sg
agaphn de agapE de
n_ Acc Sg f Conj
IF-EVER
I-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING THE I-may-be-giving-up ecw echO

vs Pres Act 1 Sg
BODY
OF-ME
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-BOASTING LOVE
YET
mh mE
Part Neg
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
wfeloumai OpheleO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
NO
I-AM-HAVING
NOT-YET-ONE I-AM-beING-benefitED nothing makroqumei crhsteuetai makrothumeO chrEsteuomai

vi Pres Act 3 Sg vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
13:4 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
zhloi zEloO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
NA
LOVE
NA
IS-FAR-FEELING is-being-patient ou ou
Part Neg
IS-beING-kind
THE
LOVE
NOT
IS-BOILING is-being-jealous
. Charity suffereth long, [and] is kind; charity envieth not; charity vaunteth not itself, is not puffed up,
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
perpereuetai perpereuomai
ou ou
Part Neg
fusioutai phusioO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
THE
LOVE
NOT
IS-braggING
NOT
IS-beING-INFLATED is-being-puffed-up ou ou
Part Neg
13:5 ouk
ou
Part Neg
aschmonei aschEmoneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
zhtei zEteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eauths heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg f
paroxunetai paroxunO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
NOT
IS-beING-indecent NOT
IS-SEEKING
THE the(p)
OF-herself of-self
NOT
IS-beING-BESIDE-SHARPenED is-being-incensed
Doth not behave itself unseemly, seeketh not her own, is not easily provoked, thinketh no evil;
ou ou
Part Neg
logizetai logizomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
NOT
is-accountING is-taking-account-of cairei chairO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
EVIL
13:6 ou
ou
Part Neg
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
adikia adikia
n_ Dat Sg f
sugcairei sugchairO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Dat Sg f
Rejoiceth not in iniquity, but rejoiceth in the truth;
NOT
IS-JOYING is-rejoicing
ON
THE
UN-JUSTness IS-TOGETHER-JOYING YET to-THE injustice is-rejoicing-togetherwith the
TRUTH
AV
13:7 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
stegei stegO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
pisteuei pisteuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
elpizei elpizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
upomenei hupomenO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
Beareth all things, believeth all things, hopeth all things, endureth all things.
ALL
IS-EXCLUDING ALL is-forgoing agaph agapE

n_ Nom Sg f
IS-BELIEVING ALL
IS-EXPECTING ALL
IS-UNDER-REMAINING is-enduring
8
13:8 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
oudepote oudepote
Adv
piptei piptO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eite eite
Conj
de de
Conj
profhteiai prophEteia
n_ Nom Pl f
THE
LOVE
NOT-YET-?-when IS-FALLING never is-lapsing eite eite

Conj
IF-BESIDES YET BEFORE-AVERments whether prophecies eite eite

Conj
katarghqhsontai katargeO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
glwssai pausontai glOssa pauO

n_ Nom Pl f vi Fut midD 3 Pl
gnwsis gnOsis
n_ Nom Sg f
. Charity never faileth: but whether [there be] prophecies, they shall fail; whether [there be] tongues, they shall cease; whether [there be] knowledge, it shall vanish away.
THEY-SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-UN-ACTED IF-BESIDES TONGUES they-shall-be-being-discarded or languages katarghqhsetai katargeO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
THEY-SHALL-BE-CEASING IF-BESIDES KNOWledge or
it-SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-UN-ACTED it-shall-be-being-discarded
13:9 ek
ek
Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
gar ginwskomen gar ginOskO

kai ek kai ek
Conj Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
profhteuomen prophEteuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
For we know in part, and we prophesy in part.
OUT OF-PART for of-instalment
WE-ARE-KNOWING AND
OUT OF-PART WE-ARE-BEFORE-AVERRING of-instalment we-are-prophesying ek ek

Prep
13:10 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
teleion to teleios ho
a_ Acc Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-COMING THE whenever katarghqhsetai katargeO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
mature maturity
THE
OUT OF-PART of-instalment
10 But when that which is perfect is come, then that which is in part shall be done away.
SHALL-BE-BEING-DOWN-UN-ACTED shall-be-being-discarded
13:11 ote hmhn

hote
Adv
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
nhpios nEpios
a_ Nom Sg m
elaloun laleO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
ws nhpios hOs nEpios

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
efronoun phroneO
vi impf Act 1 Sg

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
when
I-WAS
minor
I-TALKED I-spoke
AS
minor
I-was-DISPOSED AS
minor
11 When I was a child, I spake as a child, I understood as a child, I thought as a child: but when I became a man, I put away childish things.
elogizomhn logizomai

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
ote gegona hote ginomai

Adv vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
anhr anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
kathrghka katargeO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
I-accountED I-reckoned tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AS
minor
when
I-HAVE-BECOME MAN
I-HAVE-DOWN-UN-ACTED THE I-have-discarded the(p)
nhpiou nEpios
a_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
minor
13:12 blepomen
blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
gar arti gar arti

Conj Adv
di dia
Prep
esoptrou en esoptron en
n_ Gen Sg n Prep
ainigmati tote de ainigma tote de

n_ Dat Sg n Adv Conj
proswpon prosOpon
n_ Acc Sg n
WE-ARE-lookING for we-are-observing pros pros

Prep
at-PRESENT THRU INTO-VIEWer through mirror ginwskw ginOskO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
IN
ENIGMA
then
YET face
12 For now we see through a glass, darkly; but then face to face: now I know in part; but then shall I know even as also I am known.
proswpon arti prosOpon arti

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
ek ek
Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
tote de tote de
Adv Conj
epignwsomai epiginOskO
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
TOWARD face
at-PRESENT I-AM-KNOWING OUT OF-PART then of-instalment
YET I-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING I-shall-be-recognizing
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai epegnwsqhn kai epiginOskO

I-AM-ON-KNOWN I-am-recognized menei menO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
13:13 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tria treis
n_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
NOW
YET IS-REMAINING BELIEF faith de de

Conj
EXPECTATION LOVE
THE
THREE
these
13 And now abideth faith, hope, charity, these three; but the greatest of these [is] charity.
meizwn mega
a_ Nom Sg f Cmp
toutwn h houtos ho
pd Gen Pl f t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
GREATER greatest
YET OF-these
THE
LOVE
AV
1Corinthians 14
14:1 diwkete
diOkO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn zhloute agapE zEloO

n_ Acc Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
pneumatika mallon de pneumatikos mallon de

a_ Acc Pl n Adv Conj
ina hina
Conj
. Follow after charity, and desire spiritual [gifts], but rather that ye may prophesy.
BE-CHASING THE be-ye-pursuing ! profhteuhte prophEteuO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
LOVE
BE-BOILING YET THE be-ye-being-zealous ! for-the
spirituals spiritual-things
RATHER
YET THAT
YE-MAY-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING ye-may-be-prophesying
14:2 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar lalwn gar laleO

glwssh glOssa
n_ Dat Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
anqrwpois lalei anthrOpos laleO

alla qew alla theos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
THE
for
one-TALKING one-speaking
to-TONGUE NOT to-language lalei laleO
to-humans
but
to-God
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
gar akouei gar akouO

pneumati de pneuma de
n_ Dat Sg n Conj
musthria mustErion
n_ Acc Pl n
For he that speaketh in an [unknown] tongue speaketh not unto men, but unto God: for no man understandeth [him]; howbeit in the spirit he speaketh mysteries.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one
IS-HEARING
to-spirit
YET he-IS-TALKING CLOSE-KEEPS he-is-speaking secrets anqrwpois lalei anthrOpos laleO

14:3 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai paraklhsin kai paraklEsis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET one-BEFORE-AVERRING to-humans one-prophesying
HOME-BUILDing AND edification
But he that speaketh unto edification, and and comfort.
prophesieth men [to] exhortation,
kai paramuqian kai paramuthia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AND
BESIDE-CLOSE comfort lalwn laleO

14:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
glwssh glOssa
n_ Dat Sg f
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
oikodomei oikodomeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
THE
to-TONGUE self to-language himself
IS-HOME-BUILDING THE is-edifying
YET
He that speaketh in an [unknown] tongue edifieth himself; but he that prophesieth edifieth the church.
ekklhsian oikodomei ekklEsia oikodomeO

one-BEFORE-AVERRING OUT-CALLED one-prophesying ecclesia
IS-HOME-BUILDING is-edifying lalein laleO

vn Pres Act
14:5 qelw
thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
pantas umas pas humeis

a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
glwssais mallon de glOssa mallon de

n_ Dat Pl f Adv Conj
ina hina
Conj
I-AM-WILLING YET ALL
YOU(p) ye meizwn mega

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
TO-BE-TALKING to-TONGUES to-be-speaking to-languages de de

Conj
RATHER
YET THAT
profhteuhte prophEteuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
I would that ye all spake with tongues, but rather that ye prophesied: for greater [is] he that prophesieth than he that speaketh with tongues, except he interpret, that the church may receive edifying.
YE-MAY-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING GREATER ye-may-be-prophesying lalwn laleO

YET THE
one-BEFORE-AVERRING OR THE one-prophesying than diermhneuh diermEneuO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
glwssais ektos ei glOssa ektos ei

n_ Dat Pl f Adv Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OUTside
IF
NO
he-MAY-BE-THRU-TRANSLATING THAT THE he-may-be-interpreting
ekklhsia oikodomhn ekklEsia oikodomE

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
labh lambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
OUT-CALLED HOME-BUILDing MAY-BE-GETTING ecclesia edification
14:6 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
adelfoi ean adelphos ean

n_ Voc Pl m Cond
elqw erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
glwssais lalwn glOssa laleO

NOW YET brothers brethren ! ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye ean ean

Cond
TALKING speaking h E
Part
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
wfelhsw OpheleO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
lalhsw laleO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
. Now, brethren, if I come unto you speaking with tongues, what shall I profit you, except I shall speak to you either by revelation, or by knowledge, or by prophesying, or by doctrine?
ANY what ?
YOU(p) ye
I-SHALL-BE-benefitING IF-EVER NO
to-YOU(p) to-ye
I-SHOULD-BE-TALKING OR IN I-should-be-speaking either h E

Part
WH
apokaluyei h apokalupsis E
n_ Dat Sg f Part
en en
Prep
gnwsei gnOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
h E
Part
en en
Prep
n_ Dat Sg f
en
NA
en en
Prep
didach didachE
n_ Dat Sg f
OR
IN
KNOWledge OR
IN
BEFORE-AVERment OR prophecy
IN
TEACHing
AV
1Corinthians 14
14:7 omws ta
homOs
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ayuca apsuchos
a_ Nom Pl n
fwnhn didonta phOnE didOmi

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl n
eite eite
Conj
aulos aulos
n_ Nom Sg m
eite eite
Conj
kiqara kithara
n_ Nom Sg f
LIKE-AS THE likewise ean ean

Cond
UN-souleds SOUND soulless-things
GIVING
IF-BESIDES FLAGEOLET IF-BESIDES LYRE whether flute or dw didOmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
diastolhn tois diastolE ho

n_ Acc Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
fqoggois mh phthoggos mE
n_ Dat Pl m Part Neg
pws gnwsqhsetai pOs ginOskO

Adv Int vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
And even things without life giving sound, whether pipe or harp, except they give a distinction in the sounds, how shall it be known what is piped or harped?
IF-EVER distinction
to-THE
UTTERances
NO
MAY-BE-GIVING how it-may-be-giving how ?
SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN THE
auloumenon auleO
h E
Part
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kiqarizomenon kitharizO
FLAGEOLETING fluting
OR
THE
LYREING lyre-playing salpigx fwnhn dw salpigx phOnE didOmi

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
14:8 kai gar ean

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ean
Cond
adhlon adElos
a_ Acc Sg f
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
paraskeuasetai paraskeuazO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
For if the trumpet give an uncertain sound, who shall prepare himself to the battle?
AND also eis eis

Prep
for
IF-EVER UN-EVIDENT TRUMPET dubious
SOUND
MAY-BE-GIVING ANY who ?
SHALL-BE-beING-preparED shall-be-preparing-himself
polemon polemos
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO BATTLE

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
glwsshs ean glOssa ean

n_ Gen Sg f Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
eushmon eusEmos
a_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
THRU THE through
TONGUE language to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
IF-EVER NO
WELL-SIGNED saying intelligible expression esesqe eimi

vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
So likewise ye, except ye utter by the tongue words easy to be understood, how shall it be known what is spoken? for ye shall speak into the air.
dwte didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
pws gnwsqhsetai pOs ginOskO

Adv Int vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
laloumenon laleO
gar eis gar eis

Conj Prep
YE-MAY-BE-GIVING how how ? aera aEr

n_ Acc Sg m
SHALL-BE-BEING-KNOWN THE it-shall-be-being-known
YE-SHALL-BE for
INTO
lalountes laleO
AIR
TALKING speaking tucoi tugchanO

vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
14:10 tosauta ei
tosoutos
pd Nom Pl n
ei
Cond
genh genos
n_ Nom Pl n
fwnwn phOnE
n_ Gen Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
en en
Prep
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
so-much so-many ouden oudeis

a_ Nom Sg n
IF
it-MAY-BE-HAPPENING breeds it-may-be-happeniing species(p)
OF-SOUNDS ARE there-are
IN
SYSTEM world
AND
10 There are, it may be, so many kinds of voices in the world, and none of them [is] without signification.
afwnon aphOnos
a_ Nom Sg n
NOT-YET-ONE UN-SOUND nothing is-soundless
14:11 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
eidw eidO
vs Perf Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dunamin ths dunamis ho

fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
esomai eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
IF-EVER THEN NO
I-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING THE
ABILITY import lalwn laleO
OF-THE
SOUND
I-SHALL-BE
11 Therefore if I know not the meaning of the voice, I shall be unto him that speaketh a barbarian, and he that speaketh [shall be] a barbarian unto me.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
lalounti laleO
barbaros kai o barbaros kai ho

a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
barbaros barbaros
a_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
BARBARIAN
AND
THE
IN
ME
BARBARIAN

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
epei zhlwtai este epei zElOtEs eimi

Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
pneumatwn pros pneuma pros

n_ Gen Pl n Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
thus
AND also ths ho
YOU(p) ye
since
BOILers zealots
YE-ARE
OF-spirits of-spiritual-things perisseuhte perisseuO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
TOWARD THE
12 Even so ye, forasmuch as ye are zealous of spiritual [gifts], seek that ye may excel to the edifying of the church.
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsias zhteite ekklEsia zEteO

n_ Gen Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
t_ Gen Sg f
HOME-BUILDing OF-THE edification
OUT-CALLED ecclesia lalwn laleO
BE-SEEKING THAT YE-MAY-BE-exceedING be-ye-seeking ! ye-may-be-superabounding glwssh glOssa

n_ Dat Sg f
14:13 dio
dio
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
proseucesqw proseuchomai
ina hina
Conj
THRU-WHICH THE wherefore
to-TONGUE LET-BE-prayING to-language let-him-be-praying !
THAT
13 Wherefore let him that speaketh in an [unknown] tongue pray that he may interpret.
AV
1Corinthians 14
diermhneuh diermEneuO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
he-MAY-BE-THRU-TRANSLATING he-may-be-interpreting
14:14 ean
ean
Cond
gar gar
Conj
proseucwmai proseuchomai
glwssh glOssa
n_ Dat Sg f
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
proseucetai proseuchomai
IF-EVER
for
I-MAY-BE-prayING
to-TONGUE THE to-language
spirit
OF-ME
IS-prayING
14 For if I pray in an [unknown] tongue, my spirit prayeth, but my understanding is unfruitful.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
nous nous
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
akarpos estin akarpos eimi

THE
YET MIND
OF-ME
UN-FRUITful IS unfruitful proseuxomai proseuchomai

vi Fut midD 1 Sg
14:15 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati proseuxomai pneuma proseuchomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Fut midD 1 Sg
de de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
ANY what ? tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THEN it-IS
I-SHALL-BE-prayING to-THE
spirit
I-SHALL-BE-prayING YET AND also

WH
noi nous
n_ Dat Sg m
yalw psallO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati yalw pneuma psallO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Fut Act 1 Sg
de
NA
de de
Conj
kai kai
Conj
15 . What is it then? I will pray with the spirit, and I will pray with the understanding also: I will sing with the spirit, and I will sing with the understanding also.
to-THE
MIND
I-SHALL-BE-STROKING to-THE I-shall-be-playing-music
spirit
I-SHALL-BE-STROKING I-shall-be-playing-music
YET
AND also
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
noi nous
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
MIND
14:16 epei ean

epei
Conj
ean
Cond
euloghs eulogeO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
pneumati o pneuma ho
anaplhrwn anaplEroO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
since else topon topos

n_ Acc Sg m
IF-EVER YOU-MAY-BE-blessING
IN
spirit
THE
one-UP-FILLING one-filing-up amhn epi th amEn epi ho

Hebrew Prep t_ Dat Sg f
THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
idiwtou pws erei idiOtEs pOs ereO

n_ Gen Sg m Adv Int vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sh sos
ps 2 Dat Sg
16 Else when thou shalt bless with the spirit, how shall he that occupieth the room of the unlearned say Amen at thy giving of thanks, seeing he understandeth not what thou sayest?
PLACE
OF-THE
ordinary plain-person ti tis
how how ?
he-SHALL-BE-declarING THE
AMEN
ON
THE
YOUR
eucaristia epeidh eucharistia epeidE

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
legeis legO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
pi Acc Sg n
thanking thanksgiving
ON-IF-BIND ANY since-in-fact what ? men men

Part
YOU-ARE-sayING NOT
he-HAS-PERCEIVED he-is-aware eteros heteros

a_ Nom Sg m
14:17 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
gar kalws eucaristeis all o gar kalOs eucharisteO alla ho

Conj Adv vi Pres Act 2 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
17 For thou verily givest thanks well, but the other is not edified.
YOU
INDEED for
IDEALly
ARE-thankING are-giving-thanks
but
THE
DIFFERENT-one NOT different-one
oikodomeitai oikodomeO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-beING-HOME-BUILDED is-being-edified
14:18 eucaristw tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m

mallon glwssais lalw mallon glOssa laleO

Adv n_ Dat Pl f vi Pres Act 1 Sg
18 I thank my God, I speak with tongues more than ye all:
I-AM-thankING
to-THE the
God
OF-ALL
OF-YOU(p) RATHER of-ye more
to-TONGUES to-languages noi nous

n_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-TALKING I-am-speaking mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
14:19 alla en
alla
Conj
en
Prep
ekklhsia qelw ekklEsia thelO

pente logous tw pente logos ho

ni numeral n_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
but
IN
OUT-CALLED I-AM-WILLING FIVE ecclesia h E

Part
sayings words murious murioi

a_ Acc Pl m
to-THE
MIND
OF-ME
TO-TALK to-speak
ina hina
Conj
kai allous kathchsw kai allos katEcheO

Conj a_ Acc Pl m vs Aor Act 1 Sg
logous en logos en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
glwssh glOssa
n_ Dat Sg f
19 Yet in the church I had rather speak five words with my understanding, that [by my voice] I might teach others also, than ten thousand words in an [unknown] tongue.
THAT AND also
others
I-SHOULD-BE-instructING OR MYRIADS sayings than ten-thousands words paidia paidion

n_ Nom Pl n
IN
TONGUE language alla th alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg f
14:20 adelfoi mh
adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
fresin phrEn
n_ Dat Pl f
kakia kakia
n_ Dat Sg f
brothers brethren !
NO
little-boys
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming !
to-THE
DISPOSition but disposition(p)
to-THE
EVIL
20 Brethren, be not children in understanding: howbeit in malice be ye children, but in understanding be men.
AV
1Corinthians 14
nhpiazete nEpiazO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
de de
Conj
fresin phrEn
n_ Dat Pl f
teleioi ginesqe teleios ginomai

a_ Nom Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
BE-minorING to-THE be-ye-being-minors !
YET DISPOSition mature disposition(p) gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
BE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! oti en hoti en

Conj Prep
14:21 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
eteroglwssois kai en heteroglOssos kai en

a_ Dat Pl m Conj Prep
ceilesin cheilos
n_ Dat Pl n
IN
THE
LAW
IN
DIFFERENT-TONGUES different-languages
AND
IN
LIPS
eterwn heteros
a_ Gen Pl m
lalhsw laleO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw kai oud houtos kai oude

pd Dat Sg m Conj Adv
outws houtOs
Adv
21 . In the law it is written, With [men of] other tongues and other lips will I speak unto this people; and yet for all that will they not hear me, saith the Lord.
OF-DIFFERENT I-SHALL-BE-TALKING to-THE of-different-peoples I-shall-be-speaking eisakousontai eisakouO

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
PEOPLE
this
AND
NOT-YET thus neither
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
THEY-SHALL-BE-INTO-HEARING OF-ME they-shall-be-hearkening
IS-sayING
Master Lord ou ou
Part Neg
14:22 wste
hOste
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
glwssai eis glOssa eis

n_ Nom Pl f Prep
shmeion eisin sEmeion eimi

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin pisteuO
AS-BESIDES THE so-that alla tois alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
TONGUES languages h ho
INTO SIGN
ARE
NOT
to-THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing apistois apistos

a_ Dat Pl m
apistois apistos
a_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
n_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
alla alla
Conj
22 Wherefore tongues are for a sign, not to them that believe, but to them that believe not: but prophesying [serveth] not for them that believe not, but for them which believe.
t_ Nom Sg f
but
to-THE
UN-BELIEVing-ones THE unbelievers
YET BEFORE-AVERment NOT prophecy
to-THE
UN-BELIEVing-ones but unbelievers
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin pisteuO
to-THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing oun oun

Conj
14:23 ean
ean
Cond
sunelqh sunerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ekklhsia olh ekklEsia holos

epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
IF-EVER THEN MAY-BE-TOGETHER-COMING THE may-be-coming-together kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
OUT-CALLED WHOLE ecclesia de de

Conj
ON
THE
SAME same-place
lalwsin laleO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
glwssais eiselqwsin glOssa eiserchomai

n_ Dat Pl f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
idiwtai h idiOtEs E
n_ Nom Pl m Part
apistoi apistos
a_ Nom Pl m
23 If therefore the whole church be come together into one place, and all speak with tongues, and there come in [those that are] unlearned, or unbelievers, will they not say that ye are mad?
AND
ALL
MAY-BE-TALKING to-TONGUES may-be-speaking to-languages
MAY-BE-INTO-COMING YET ordinary OR may-be-entering plain-persons
UN-BELIEVing-ones unbelievers
ouk ou
Part Neg
erousin ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oti mainesqe hoti mainomai

NOT
THEY-SHALL-BE-declarING that
YE-ARE-beING-MAD
14:24 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
profhteuwsin prophEteuO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
eiselqh eiserchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
apistos apistos
a_ Nom Sg m
IF-EVER YET ALL
MAY-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING MAY-BE-INTO-COMING YET ANY may-be-prophesying may-be-entering some upo pantwn anakrinetai hupo pas anakrinO
Prep a_ Gen Pl m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
UN-BELIEVing-one unbeliever
24 But if all prophesy, and there come in one that believeth not, or [one] unlearned, he is convinced of all, he is judged of all:
h E
Part
idiwths elegcetai idiOtEs elegchO

upo pantwn hupo pas

Prep a_ Gen Pl m
OR
ordinary plain-person
he-IS-beING-EXPOSED by
ALL
he-IS-beING-examinED by
ALL
14:25 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
krupta kruptos
a_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kardias autou kardia autos

fanera phaneros
a_ Nom Pl n
ginetai ginomai
kai outws kai houtOs

Conj Adv
THE
HIDDen OF-THE hidden-things
HEART
OF-him
apparent
IS-BECOMING
AND
thus
peswn piptO
epi proswpon proskunhsei epi prosOpon proskuneO

Prep n_ Acc Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
apaggellwn apaggellO
oti hoti
Conj
25 And thus are the secrets of his heart made manifest; and so falling down on [his] face he will worship God, and report that God is in you of a truth.
FALLING
ON
face
he-SHALL-BE-worshipING to-THE the en en

Prep
God
FROM-MESSAGING that reporting
ontws o ontOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
BEINGly really
THE
God
IN YOU(p) among ye
IS
AV
1Corinthians 14
14:26 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
adelfoi otan adelphos hotan

n_ Voc Pl m Conj
sunerchsqe sunerchomai
ekastos hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
ANY what ? yalmon ecei psalmos echO

n_ Acc Sg m
THEN it-IS
brothers brethren !
when-EVER YE-MAY-BE-TOGETHER-COMING EACH whenever ye-may-be-coming-together each-one apokaluyin ecei apokalupsis echO
didachn ecei didachE echO

glwssan ecei glOssa echO

26 . How is it then, brethren? when ye come together, every one of you hath a psalm, hath a doctrine, hath a tongue, hath a revelation, hath an interpretation. Let all things be done unto edifying.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
psalm
IS-HAVING
TEACHing
IS-HAVING
FROM-COVERing revelation oikodomhn oikodomE

n_ Acc Sg f
IS-HAVING
TONGUE language
IS-HAVING
ermhneian ecei hermEneia echO

panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
pros pros
Prep
ginesqw ginomai
TRANSLATion
IS-HAVING
ALL
TOWARD HOME-BUILDing LET-BE-BECOMING edification let-it-be-occurring ! lalei laleO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
14:27 eite
eite
Conj
glwssh glOssa
n_ Dat Sg f
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
duo duo
ni numeral
h E
Part
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pleiston polus
a_ Acc Sg n
IF-BESIDES to-TONGUE ANY besides-if to-language anyone treis treis

n_ Nom Pl m
according-to TWO
OR
THE
MOST
27 If any man speak in an [unknown] tongue, [let it be] by two, or at the most [by] three, and [that] by course; and let one interpret.
kai ana meros kai ana meros

Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg n
kai eis kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
diermhneuetw diermEneuO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THREE
AND
UP
PART instalment mh mE
Part Neg
AND also
ONE
LET-BE-THRU-TRANSLATING let-him-be-interpreting ! en en
Prep
14:28 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
diermhneuths sigatw diermEneutEs sigaO

n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
ekklhsia eautw ekklEsia heautou

n_ Dat Sg f pf 3 Dat Sg m
IF-EVER YET NO
MAY-BE there-may-be kai tw kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg m
THRU-TRANSLATer interpreter qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
LET-him-BE-HUSHING IN let-him-be-hushing !
OUT-CALLED to-self ecclesia to-himself
28 But if there be no interpreter, let him keep silence in the church; and let him speak to himself, and to God.
de de
Conj
laleitw laleO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
YET LET-him-BE-TALKING AND let-him-be-speaking !
to-THE
God
14:29 profhtai
prophEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
duo duo
ni numeral
h E
Part
treis treis
n_ Nom Pl m
laleitwsan laleO
vm Pres Act 3 Pl
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
alloi allos
a_ Nom Pl m
29 Let the prophets speak two or three, and let the other judge.
BEFORE-AVERers YET TWO prophets diakrinetwsan diakrinO

vm Pres Act 3 Pl
OR
THREE
LET-BE-TALKING AND let-them-be-speaking !
THE
others
LET-BE-THRU-JUDGING let-them-be-discriminating !
14:30 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
allw allos
a_ Dat Sg m
apokalufqh apokaluptO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
kaqhmenw kathEmai
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
30 If [any thing] be revealed to another that sitteth by, let the first hold his peace.
IF-EVER YET to-other to-another sigatw sigaO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED sittING it-may-be-being-revealed sitting-by
THE
BEFORE-most first
LET-BE-HUSHING let-him-be-hushing !
14:31 dunasqe
dunamai
gar kaq gar kata

Conj Prep
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
profhteuein prophEteuO
vn Pres Act
ina hina
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
31 For ye may all prophesy one by one, that all may learn, and all may be comforted.
YE-ARE-ABLE ye-can manqanwsin manthanO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
for
according-to ONE
ALL
TO-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING THAT ALL to-be-prophesying
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
parakalwntai parakaleO
vs Pres Pas 3 Pl
MAY-BE-UP-LEARNING AND may-be-learning
ALL
MAY-BE-beING-BESIDE-CALLED may-be-being-consoled profhtais prophEtEs

n_ Dat Pl m
14:32 kai pneumata profhtwn

kai
Conj
pneuma
n_ Nom Pl n
prophEtEs
n_ Gen Pl m
upotassetai hupotassO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
32 And the spirits of the prophets are subject to the prophets.
AND
spirits
OF-BEFORE-AVERers to-BEFORE-AVERers IS-beING-UNDER-SET of-prophets to-prophets is-being-subject akatastasias akatastasia

n_ Gen Sg f
14:33 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar estin gar eimi

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
alla eirhnhs ws en alla eirEnE hOs en

Conj n_ Gen Sg f Adv Prep
33 For God is not [the author] of confusion, but of peace, as in all churches of the saints.
NOT
for
IS
OF-UN-DOWN-STANDing THE of-turbulence
God
but
OF-PEACE
AS
IN
AV
pasais tais pas ho

ekklhsiais twn ekklEsia ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
ALL
THE
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias gunaikes en gunE en

n_ Nom Pl f Prep
OF-THE
HOLY-ones saints ekklhsiais sigatwsan ekklEsia sigaO

n_ Dat Pl f vm Pres Act 3 Pl
14:34 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
ou ou
Part Neg
gar epitrepetai gar epitrepO

THE
WOMEN
IN
THE
LET-BE-HUSHING NOT let-them-be-hushing ! kaqws kathOs

Adv
for
it-IS-beING-permittED
autais lalein autos laleO

pp Dat Pl f vn Pres Act
alla upotassesqwsan alla hupotassO

Conj vm Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
34 . Let your women keep silence in the churches: for it is not permitted unto them to speak; but [they are commanded] to be under obedience, as also saith the law.
to-them
TO-BE-TALKING but to-be-speaking
LET-THEM-BE-beING-UNDER-SET according-AS AND let-them-be-being-subject ! also
THE
LAW
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-sayING
WH NA
14:35 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
manqanein
maqein manthanO
vn 2Aor Act
qelousin thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
IF
YET ANY anything andras eperwtatwsan anEr eperOtaO

n_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 3 Pl
TO-BE-LEARNING
ARE-WILLING IN they-are-willing
HOME
THE
35 And if they will learn any thing, let them ask their husbands at home: for it is a shame for women to speak in the church.
idious idios
a_ Acc Pl m
aiscron gar estin aischros gar eimi

a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gunaiki lalein gunE laleO

en en
Prep
OWN
MEN husbands
LET-THEM-BE-inquirING-of VILE let-them-be-inquiring-of ! shame
for
it-IS
to-WOMAN
TO-BE-TALKING IN to-be-speaking
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
14:36 h
E
Part
af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
exhlqen exerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
h E
Part
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
OR
FROM YOU(p) ye
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
OUT-CAME came-out
OR
INTO YOU(p) ye
36 . What? came the word of God out from you? or came it unto you only?
monous kathnthsen monos katantaO

ONLY
it-attains
14:37 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
profhths prophEtEs
n_ Nom Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
h E
Part
pneumatikos epiginwsketw pneumatikos epiginOskO

a_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
IF
ANY anyone grafw graphO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
IS-SEEMING is-presuming umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
BEFORE-AVERer TO-BE prophet estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OR
spiritual
LET-him-BE-ON-KNOWING let-him-be-recognizing !
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
oti kuriou hoti kurios

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
entolh entolE
n_ Nom Sg f
37 If any man think himself to be a prophet, or spiritual, let him acknowledge that the things that I write unto you are the commandments of the Lord.
WHICH which(p)
I-AM-WRITING to-YOU(p) to-ye de de

Conj
that
OF-Master of-Lord
it-IS
direction precept
38 But if any man be ignorant, let him be ignorant.
14:38 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
agnoei agnoeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
agnoeitai agnoeO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IF
YET ANY anyone
IS-UN-KNOWING he-IS-beING-UN-KNOWN is-being-ignorant he-is-being-ignoranted

WH
14:39 wste
hOste
Conj
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
mou
NA
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
zhloute zEloO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
profhteuein prophEteuO
vn Pres Act
39 Wherefore, brethren, covet to prophesy, and forbid not to speak with tongues.
AS-BESIDES brothers so-that brethren ! kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg n
OF-ME
BE-BOILING THE be-ye-being-zealous ! glwssais glOssa

n_ Dat Pl f
TO-BE-BEFORE-AVERRING to-be-prophesying
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
mh mE
Part Neg
kwluete kOluO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
AND
THE
TO-BE-TALKING NO to-be-speaking de de
Conj
BE-FORBIDDING to-TONGUES be-ye-forbidding ! to-languages taxin taxis

n_ Acc Sg f
14:40 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
euschmonws kai kata euschEmonOs kai kata

Adv Conj Prep
ginesqw ginomai
40 Let all things be decently and in order.
done
ALL
YET WELL-FIGUREly respectably
AND
according-to order
LET-BE-BECOMING let-it-be-occurring !
AV
1Corinthians 15
15:1 gnwrizw
gnOrizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
n_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
euhggelisamhn euaggelizO
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg
I-AM-KNOWizING YET to-YOU(p) I-am-making-known to-ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
brothers brethren ! w hos
THE
WELL-MESSAGE WHICH
I-WELL-MESSAGize I-bring-the-well-message
. Moreover, brethren, I declare unto you the gospel which I preached unto you, which also ye have received, and wherein ye stand;
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai parelabete en kai paralambanO en

Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
kai esthkate kai histEmi

pr Dat Sg n
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WHICH
AND also
YE-BESIDE-GOT ye-accepted
IN
WHICH
AND also
YE-HAVE-STOOD ye-stand logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
15:2 di
dia
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
kai swzesqe kai sOzO

tini tis
px Dat Sg m
euhggelisamhn euaggelizO
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ei ei
Cond
THRU WHICH through katecete katechO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
AND also
YE-ARE-beING-SAVED to-ANY to-what mh mE

Part Neg
saying
I-WELL-MESSAGize to-YOU(p) I-bring-the-well-message to-ye
IF
By which also ye are saved, if ye keep in memory what I preached unto you, unless ye have believed in vain.
ektos ei ektos ei
Adv Cond
eikh eikE
Adv
episteusate pisteuO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-ARE-DOWN-HAVING OUTside ye-are-retaining
IF
NO
SIMULATEly YE-BELIEVE feignedly prwtois prOtos

a_ Dat Pl m
15:3 paredwka gar umin

paradidOmi
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
gar
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai parelabon oti cristos kai paralambanO hoti christos

Conj vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m
I-BESIDE-GIVE for I-give-over apeqanen uper apothnEskO huper


t_ Gen Pl f
IN BEFORE-mosts WHICH among first-things amartiwn hmwn hamartia hemeis

AND also
I-BESIDE-GOT I-accepted
that
ANOINTED Christ
For I delivered unto you first of all that which I also received, how that Christ died for our sins according to the scriptures;
kata kata
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas graphE
n_ Acc Pl f
FROM-DIED died
misses sins
OF-US
according-to THE
WRITings scriptures hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
15:4 kai oti etafh

kai
Conj
hoti
Conj
thaptO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
kai oti eghgertai kai hoti egeirO

Conj Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
trith tritos
a_ Dat Sg f
And that he was buried, and that he rose again the third day according to the scriptures:
AND
that
He-WAS-entombed AND
that
He-HAS-been-ROUSED to-THE
DAY
THE
third
kata kata
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
grafas graphE
n_ Acc Pl f
according-to THE
WRITings scriptures khfa kEphas

n_ Dat Sg m
15:5 kai oti wfqh

kai
Conj
hoti
Conj
optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
eita eita
Adv
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
dwdeka dOdeka
ni numeral
And that he was seen of Cephas, then of the twelve:
AND
that
He-WAS-VIEWED to-CEPHAS THEREAFTER to-THE he-was-seen wfqh optomai

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
TWO-TEN twelve wn hos

pr Gen Pl m
6
15:6 epeita
epeita
Adv
epanw pentakosiois adelfois efapax ex epanO pentakosioi adelphos ephapax ek

Adv n_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Adv Prep
ON-THEREAFTER He-WAS-VIEWED ON-UP thereupon he-was-seen over oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
to-FIVE-hundred
Conj
ON-ONCE at-once
OUT OF-WHOM
After that, he was seen of above five hundred brethren at once; of whom the greater part remain unto this present, but some are fallen asleep.
pleiones polus
a_ Nom Pl m Cmp
menousin menO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ews arti heOs arti

Conj Adv
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
ekoimhqhsan koimaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
THE
MORE majority
ARE-REMAINING TILL
at-PRESENT ANY some eita eita

Adv
YET WERE-reposED were-put-to-repose apostolois pasin apostolos pas

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
7
15:7 epeita
epeita
Adv
wfqh optomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
iakwbw iakObos
n_ Dat Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
After that, he was seen of James; then of all the apostles.
ON-THEREAFTER He-WAS-VIEWED to-JACOBUS THEREAFTER to-THE thereupon he-was-seen to-James
ALL
15:8 escaton de
eschatos
a_ Acc Sg m
de
Conj
pantwn wsperei tw pas hOsperei ho

a_ Gen Pl m Adv t_ Dat Sg n
ektrwmati wfqh ektrOma optomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
kamoi kagO
pp 1 Dat Sg Con
And last of all he was seen of me also, as of one born out of due time.
LAST
YET OF-ALL
AS-EVEN-IF even-as-if o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
abortion premature-birth
He-WAS-VIEWED AND-to-ME he-was-seen also-to-me apostolwn os apostolos hos

15:9 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar eimi gar eimi

elacistos twn elachistos ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
for
AM
THE
INFERIOR-most least
OF-THE
commissioners apostles ediwxa diOkO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
WHO
NOT
For I am the least of the apostles, that am not meet to be called an apostle, because I persecuted the church of God.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
kaleisqai kaleO
vn Pres Pas
apostolos dioti apostolos dioti

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
AM
enough competent
TO-BE-beING-CALLED commissioner apostle
THRU-that I-CHASE because-that I-persecute
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
AV
1Corinthians 15
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
God
15:10 cariti de
charis
n_ Dat Sg f
de
Conj
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to-grace
YET OF-God
I-AM
WHICH
I-AM
AND
THE
grace
OF-Him
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
kenh kenos
a_ Nom Sg f
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
alla perissoteron autwn alla perissos autos

Conj a_ Acc Sg m Cmp pp Gen Pl m
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
10 But by the grace of God I am what I am: and his grace which [was bestowed] upon me was not in vain; but I laboured more abundantly than they all: yet not I, but the grace of God which was with me.
THE
INTO ME
NOT
EMPTY for-naught de de
Conj
WAS-BECOMED but was-become caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
more-excessive more-exceedingly tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-them
NA
ALL
ekopiasa ouk kopiaO ou

vi Aor Act 1 Sg Part Neg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
alla h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
h hos
pr Nom Sg f
I-toil
NOT
YET but
THE
grace
OF-THE
God
WHICH
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
TOGETHER to-ME togetherwith me
15:11 eite
eite
Conj
oun oun
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
eite eite
Conj
ekeinoi outws khrussomen ekeinos houtOs kErussO

pd Nom Pl m Adv vi Pres Act 1 Pl

Conj Adv
11 Therefore whether [it were] I or they, so we preach, and so ye believed.
IF-BESIDES THEN I whether episteusate pisteuO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl
IF-BESIDES those or
thus
WE-ARE-PROCLAIMING AND we-are-heralding
thus
YE-BELIEVE
15:12 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
cristos khrussetai christos kErussO

oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
eghgertai egeirO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
pws pOs
Adv Int
IF
YET ANOINTED Christ umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IS-beING-PROCLAIMED that is-being-heralded tines tis

px Nom Pl m
OUT OF-DEAD-ones He-HAS-been-ROUSED how of-dead-ones how ? ouk ou

Part Neg
12 . Now if Christ be preached that he rose from the dead, how say some among you that there is no resurrection of the dead?
legousin en legO en
oti anastasis nekrwn hoti anastasis nekros

Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ARE-sayING
IN YOU(p) among ye de de
Conj
ANY some
that
UP-STANDing resurrection ouk ou

Part Neg
OF-DEAD-ones NOT of-dead-ones oude oude

Adv
IS there-is
13 But if there be no resurrection of the dead, then is Christ not risen:
15:13 ei
ei
Cond
anastasis nekrwn anastasis nekros

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
cristos eghgertai christos egeirO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
IF
YET UP-STANDing resurrection de de

Conj
OF-DEAD-ones NOT of-dead-ones eghgertai egeirO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
IS there-is kenon kenos

a_ Nom Sg n
NOT-YET ANOINTED neither Christ ara ara

Part
HAS-been-ROUSED
NA
15:14 ei
ei
Cond
cristos ouk christos ou

kai kai
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
14 And if Christ be not risen, then [is] our preaching vain, and your faith [is] also vain.
IF
YET ANOINTED Christ hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
NOT
HAS-been-ROUSED EMPTY for-naught kai h kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg f
CONSEQUENTLY
WH NA
AND also
THE
khrugma kErugma
n_ Nom Sg n
kenh kenos
a_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
PROCLAMATION OF-US heralding
EMPTY for-naught de de
Conj
AND
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) of-ye qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
15:15 euriskomeqa
heuriskO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
kai yeudomartures tou kai pseudomartur ho

Conj n_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
emarturhsamen martureO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-ARE-beING-FOUND YET AND also kata kata

Prep
FALSE-witnesses
OF-THE
God
that WE-witness seeing-that we-testify ouk ou

Part Neg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti hgeiren hoti egeirO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston on christos hos

hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
15 Yea, and we are found false witnesses of God; because we have testified of God that he raised up Christ: whom he raised not up, if so be that the dead rise not.
DOWN OF-THE according-to the eiper eiper

Cond
God
that
He-ROUSES
THE
ANOINTED Christ
WHOM
NOT
He-ROUSES
ara ara
Part
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
egeirontai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
IF-EVEN CONSEQUENTLY DEAD-ones NOT if-so-be-that dead-ones
ARE-beING-ROUSED
AV
1Corinthians 15
15:16 ei
ei
Cond
gar nekroi gar nekros

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
egeirontai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
oude oude
Adv

16 For if the dead rise not, then is not Christ raised:
IF
for
DEAD-ones NOT dead-ones cristos ouk christos ou

ARE-beING-ROUSED NOT-YET ANOINTED neither Christ eghgertai egeirO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
HAS-been-ROUSED
WH
15:17 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
mataia mataios
a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
estin
IF
YET ANOINTED Christ este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
NOT
HAS-been-ROUSED VAIN
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
17 And if Christ be not raised, your faith [is] vain; ye are yet in your sins.
eti eti
Adv
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

STILL YE-ARE
IN
THE
misses sins
OF-YOU(p) of-ye en en
Prep
15:18 ara
ara
Part
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
koimhqentes koimaO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
cristw apwlonto christos apollumi

n_ Dat Sg m vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
18 Then they also which are fallen asleep in Christ are perished.
CONSEQUENTLY AND also
THE
ones-BEING-reposED IN ones-being-put-to-repose tauth houtos

pd Dat Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
were-destroyED perished esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
15:19 ei
ei
Cond
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
cristw hlpikotes christos elpizO

n_ Dat Sg m vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
monon monon
Adv
19 If in this life only we have hope in Christ, we are of all men most miserable.
IF
IN
THE
LIFE
this
IN
ANOINTED Christ
HAVING-EXPECTED WE-ARE having-expectation
ONLY
eleeinoteroi pantwn anqrwpwn esmen eleeinos pas anthrOpos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m Cmp a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
more-MERCYable more-forlorn
OF-ALL
humans
WE-ARE
15:20 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj

ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
aparch aparchE
n_ Nom Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
NOW
YET ANOINTED Christ
HAS-been-ROUSED OUT OF-DEAD-ones first-fruit of-dead-ones firstfruit
OF-THE
20 . But now is Christ risen from the dead, [and] become the firstfruits of them that slept.
kekoimhmenwn koimaO
ones-HAVING-been-reposED having-been-put-to-repose
15:21 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
gar di gar dia

Conj Prep
anqrwpou qanatos kai di anthrOpos thanatos kai dia

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj Prep
anqrwpou anastasis anthrOpos anastasis

21 For since by man [came] death, by man [came] also the resurrection of the dead.
ON-IF-BIND for since-in-fact nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
THRU human through
DEATH
AND also
THRU human through
15:22 wsper gar en

hOsper
Adv
gar
Conj
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
adam adam
ni proper
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
apoqnhskousin outws kai en apothnEskO houtOs kai en

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
22 For as in Adam all die, even so in Christ shall all be made alive.
AS-EVEN even-as
for
IN
THE
ADAM
ALL
ARE-FROM-DYING are-dying
thus
AND also
IN
THE
cristw pantes christos pas

n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Pl m
zwopoihqhsontai zOopoieO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
ANOINTED Christ
ALL
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-to-LIVE shall-be-being-vivified en en
Prep
15:23 ekastos de
hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
idiw idios
a_ Dat Sg m
tagmati aparch tagma aparchE

cristos epeita christos epeita

n_ Nom Sg m Adv
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
EACH
YET IN
THE
OWN
SET class autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
Firstfruit
ANOINTED Christ
ON-THEREAFTER THE thereupon the-ones
23 But every man in his own order: Christ the firstfruits; afterward they that are Christ's at his coming.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
IN
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-Him presence otan hotan

Conj
15:24 eita
eita
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
paradidw paradidOmi
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
basileian basileia
n_ Acc Sg f
THEREAFTER THE
FINISH when-EVER He-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GIVING THE consummation whenever he-may-be-giving-up
KINGdom
24 Then [cometh] the end, when he shall have delivered up the kingdom to God, even the Father; when he shall have put down all rule and all
AV
1Corinthians 15
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai patri kai patEr

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
katarghsh katargeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
archn archE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
authority and power.
to-THE
God
AND
FATHER
when-EVER He-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING EVERY whenever he-should-be-nullifying all
ORIGINal AND sovereignty
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
exousian kai dunamin exousia kai dunamis

EVERY all
authority
AND
ABILITY power basileuein acris ou basileuO achri hos

vn Pres Act Prep pr Gen Sg m
15:25 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gar auton gar autos

Conj pp Acc Sg m
qh tithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
25 For he must reign, till he hath put all enemies under his feet.
IS-BINDING
for
Him
TO-BE-reignING
UNTIL
WHICH
He-MAY-BE-PLACING ALL
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ecqrous upo echthros hupo

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
enemies
UNDER THE
FEET
OF-Him
15:26 escatos ecqros

eschatos
a_ Nom Sg m
echthros
a_ Nom Sg m
katargeitai katargeO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qanatos thanatos
n_ Nom Sg m
26 The last enemy [that] shall be destroyed [is] death.
LAST
enemy
IS-beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED THE is-being-abolished upo hupo

Prep
DEATH
15:27 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
gar upetaxen gar hupotassO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
otan hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
eiph legO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ALL
for
He-UNDER-SETS UNDER THE he-subjects dhlon dElos

a_ Nom Sg n
FEET
OF-Him
when-EVER YET He-MAY-BE-sayING whenever upotaxantos hupotassO

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
oti panta hoti pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
upotetaktai hupotassO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
oti ektos tou hoti ektos ho

Conj Adv t_ Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
27 For he hath put all things under his feet. But when he saith all things are put under [him, it is] manifest that he is excepted, which did put all things under him.
that
ALL
HAS-been-UNDER-SET EVIDENT has-been-subjected panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
that
OUTside
OF-THE
One-UNDER-SETTing to-Him one-subjecting
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
ALL
15:28 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
upotagh hupotassO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tote tote
Adv
kai kai
Conj
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
when-EVER YET MAY-BE-BEING-UNDER-SET to-Him whenever may-be-being-subjected o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
THE
ALL
then
AND also ta ho
SAME shimself panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
upotaghsetai hupotassO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
upotaxanti hupotassO
vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
28 And when all things shall be subdued unto him, then shall the Son also himself be subject unto him that put all things under him, that God may be all in all.
t_ Acc Pl n
THE
SON
SHALL-BE-BEING-UNDER-SET to-THE shall-be-being-subjected o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
One-UNDER-SETTing to-Him one-subjecting panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
THE
ALL
ina hina
Conj
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
THAT MAY-BE
THE
God
THE
ALL
IN
ALL
15:29 epei ti
epei
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
poihsousin poieO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
baptizomenoi uper baptizO huper

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ei ei
Cond
since else olws holOs

Adv
ANY what ?
SHALL-BE-DOING THE
ones-beING-DIPizED OVER THE ones-baptizing for-the-sake-of ti tis

pi Acc Sg n
DEAD-ones IF dead-ones uper huper

Prep
29 Else what shall they do which are baptized for the dead, if the dead rise not at all? why are they then baptized for the dead?
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
egeirontai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
kai baptizontai kai baptizO

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
WHOLly DEAD-ones NOT absolutely dead-ones
ARE-beING-ROUSED ANY why ?
AND also
THEY-ARE-beING-DIPizED OVER them they-are-baptizing for-the-sake-of

30 And why stand jeopardy every hour?
15:30 ti
tis
pi Acc Sg n

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
kinduneuomen pasan kinduneuO pas

vi Pres Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Sg f
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
we
in
ANY why ?
AND also
WE
ARE-DANGERING are-being-in-danger nh nE
Part
EVERY
HOUR
WH
15:31 kaq
kata
Prep
hmeran apoqnhskw hEmera apothnEskO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
umeteran kauchsin humeteros kauchEsis

ps 2 Acc Sg n_ Acc Sg f
adelfoi
31 I protest by your rejoicing which I have in Christ Jesus our Lord, I die daily.
according-to DAY
I-AM-FROM-DYING BY I-am-dying
THE
YOUR-more of-yours
BOASTing
AV
1Corinthians 15
NA
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
brothers brethren !
WHICH
I-AM-HAVING
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
Master Lord moi egO
OF-US
15:32 ei
ei
Cond
kata kata
Prep
anqrwpon eqhriomachsa anthrOpos thEriomacheO

en en
Prep
efesw ephesos
n_ Dat Sg f
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pp 1 Dat Sg
IF
according-to human
I-WILD-BEAST-FIGHT IN I-fight-wild-beasts egeirontai egeirO

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
EPHESUS ANY what ?
to-ME
THE
ofelos ophelos
n_ Nom Sg n
ei ei
Cond
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
ouk ou
Part Neg
fagwmen esthiO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
kai piwmen kai pinO

aurion aurion
Adv
32 If after the manner of men I have fought with beasts at Ephesus, what advantageth it me, if the dead rise not? let us eat and drink; for to morrow we die.
benefit
IF
DEAD-ones NOT dead-ones
ARE-beING-ROUSED WE-MAY-BE-EATING AND
WE-MAY-BE-DRINKING MORROW may-be-drinking tomorrow
gar apoqnhskomen gar apothnEskO

for
WE-ARE-FROM-DYING we-are-dying planasqe planaO

vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
15:33 mh
mE
Part Neg
fqeirousin phtheirO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
hqh Ethos
n_ Acc Pl n
crhsta omiliai chrEstos homilia

a_ Acc Pl n n_ Nom Pl f
kakai kakos
a_ Nom Pl f
33 Be not deceived: evil communications corrupt good manners.
NO
BE-beING-STRAYED ARE-CORRUPTING CUSTOMS kind be-ye-being-deceived ! characters
conversations EVIL
15:34 eknhyate dikaiws kai mh

eknEphO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
dikaiOs
Adv
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
amartanete agnwsian hamartanO agnOsia

vm Pres Act 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg f
gar qeou gar theos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
OUT-sober sober-up-ye ! ecousin echO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
JUSTly
AND
NO
BE-missING be-ye-sinning ! lalw laleO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
UN-KNOWledge for ignorance
OF-God
ANY some
34 Awake to righteousness, and sin not; for some have not the knowledge of God: I speak [this] to your shame.
pros pros
Prep
entrophn umin entropE humeis

ARE-HAVING TOWARD abashment
to-YOU(p) to-ye tis tis

px Nom Sg m
I-AM-TALKING I-am-speaking-this pws egeirontai pOs egeirO

Adv Int vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
15:35 alla erei

alla
Conj
ereO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
poiw poios
pi Dat Sg n
but
SHALL-BE-declarING ANY shall-be-protesting someone
how how ?
ARE-beING-ROUSED THE
DEAD-ones ?-to-THE-WHICH dead-ones to-what ?
35 . But some [man] will say, How are the dead raised up? and with what body do they come?
de de
Conj
swmati ercontai sOma erchomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
YET BODY
THEY-ARE-COMING
15:36 afrwn
aphrOn
a_ Voc Sg m
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
speireis speirO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
zwopoieitai zOopoieO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
36 [Thou] fool, that which thou sowest is not quickened, except it die:
UN-DISPOSED YOU imprudent-one ! apoqanh apothnEskO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
WHICH
YOU-ARE-SOWING NOT are-sowing
IS-beING-made-to-LIVE IF-EVER NO is-being-vivified
it-MAY-BE-FROM-DYING it-may-be-dying
15:37 kai o
kai
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg n
speireis speirO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
genhsomenon ginomai
vp Fut midD Acc Sg n
AND
WHICH
YOU-ARE-SOWING NOT
THE
BODY
THE
SHALL-BE-BECOMING shall-be-coming-to-be h E
Part
37 And that which thou sowest, thou sowest not that body that shall be, but bare grain, it may chance of wheat, or of some other [grain]:
speireis speirO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
alla gumnon alla gumnos

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
kokkon kokkos
n_ Acc Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tucoi tugchanO
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
sitou sitos
n_ Gen Sg m
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
YOU-ARE-SOWING but
NAKED
KERNEL
IF
MAY-BE-HAPPENING OF-GRAIN may-it-be-happening of-wheat
OR
OF-ANY some
OF-THE
loipwn loipon
a_ Gen Pl m
rest rest(p)
15:38 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
didwsin didOmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
hqelhsen kai ekastw thelO kai hekastos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj a_ Dat Sg n
38 But God giveth it a body as it hath pleased him, and to every seed his own body.
THE
YET God
IS-GIVING
to-it it
BODY
according-AS He-WILLS
AND
to-EACH
AV
1Corinthians 15
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
spermatwn idion sperma idios

n_ Gen Pl n a_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE
seeds
OWN
BODY
15:39 ou
ou
Part Neg
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
auth autos
pp Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
alla allh alla allos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
men men
Part
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
NOT
EVERY all de de
Conj
FLESH
THE
SAME
FLESH
but
other another
INDEED OF-humans
39 All flesh [is] not the same flesh: but [there is] one [kind of] flesh of men, another flesh of beasts, another of fishes, [and] another of birds.
allh allos
a_ Nom Sg f
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
kthnwn ktEnos
n_ Gen Pl n
allh allos
a_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
pthnwn allh ptEnon allos

a_ Gen Pl n a_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
icquwn ichthus
n_ Gen Pl m
other another
YET FLESH
OF-ACQUISITIONS other of-beasts another
YET FLESH
OF-flyers
other another men men

Part
YET OF-FISHES
15:40 kai swmata epourania kai swmata epigeia

kai
Conj
sOma
n_ Nom Pl n
epouranios
a_ Nom Pl n
kai
Conj
sOma
n_ Nom Pl n
epigeios
a_ Nom Pl n
alla etera alla heteros

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
AND
BODIES
ON-heavenly celestial
AND
BODIES
ON-LAND(p) but terrestrial h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
DIFFERENT INDEED THE
40 [There are] also celestial bodies, and bodies terrestrial: but the glory of the celestial [is] one, and the [glory] of the terrestrial [is] another.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
epouraniwn doxa epouranios doxa

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Nom Sg f
etera heteros
a_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
epigeiwn epigeios
a_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE
ON-heavenlies celestial doxa doxa

n_ Nom Sg f
esteem glory hliou hElios
DIFFERENT YET THE
OF-THE
ON-LAND terrestrial doxa doxa

n_ Nom Sg f
41 [There is] one glory of the sun, and another glory of the moon, and another glory of the stars: for [one] star differeth from [another] star in glory.
15:41 allh
allos
a_ Nom Sg f
kai allh kai allos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
selhnhs kai allh selEnE kai allos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f
n_ Gen Sg m
other another asterwn astEr

n_ Gen Pl m
esteem glory asthr astEr

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-SUN
AND
other another
esteem glory en en
Prep
OF-MOON
AND
other another
esteem glory
gar asteros diaferei gar astEr diapherO

Conj n_ Gen Sg m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-GLEAMers GLEAMer of-stars star
for
GLEAMer of-star
IS-THRU-CARRYING IN is-excelling nekrwn nekros

a_ Gen Pl m
esteem glory speiretai speirO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
15:42 outws kai h

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
anastasis twn anastasis ho

en en
Prep
fqora phthora
n_ Dat Sg f
thus
AND also en en
Prep
THE
OF-THE
DEAD-ones it-IS-beING-SOWN IN dead-ones it-is-being-sown
CORRUPTion
42 So also [is] the resurrection of the dead. It is sown in corruption; it is raised in incorruption:
egeiretai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
afqarsia aphtharsia
n_ Dat Sg f
it-IS-beING-ROUSED IN
UN-CORRUPTion incorruption en en
Prep
15:43 speiretai
speirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
atimia atimia
n_ Dat Sg f
egeiretai egeirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
speiretai speirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Dat Sg f
43 It is sown in dishonour; it is raised in glory: it is sown in weakness; it is raised in power:
it-IS-beING-SOWN IN it-is-being-sown egeiretai egeirO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
UN-VALUE it-IS-beING-ROUSED IN dishonor
esteem glory
it-IS-beING-SOWN IN it-is-being-sown
UN-FIRMness infirmity
en en
Prep
dunamei dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
it-IS-beING-ROUSED IN
ABILITY power swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
15:44 speiretai
speirO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
yucikon egeiretai psuchikos egeirO

a_ Nom Sg n vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
pneumatikon ei pneumatikos ei
a_ Nom Sg n Cond
it-IS-beING-SOWN BODY it-is-being-sown estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
soulish
it-IS-beING-ROUSED BODY
spiritual
IF
44 It is sown a natural body; it is raised a spiritual body. There is a natural body, and there is a spiritual body.
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
yucikon estin psuchikos eimi

kai pneumatikon kai pneumatikos

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
IS there-is
BODY
soulish
IS there-is
AND also egeneto ginomai
spiritual spiritual-one o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
15:45 outws kai gegraptai

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpos adam anthrOpos adam

n_ Nom Sg m ni proper
eis eis
Prep
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
thus
AND also zwsan zaO
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN BECAME
THE
BEFORE-most human first pneuma zwopoioun pneuma zOopoieO

ADAM
INTO
45 And so it is written, The first man Adam was made a living soul; the last Adam [was made] a quickening spirit.
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
escatos adam eschatos adam

a_ Nom Sg m ni proper
eis eis
Prep
soul
LIVING
THE
LAST
ADAM
INTO spirit
makING-LIVE vivifying
AV
1Corinthians 15
15:46 all ou
alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
prwton prOton
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneumatikon alla to pneumatikos alla ho

a_ Nom Sg n Conj t_ Nom Sg n
yucikon epeita psuchikos epeita

a_ Nom Sg n Adv
but
NOT
BEFORE-most THE first
spiritual
but
THE
soulish
ON-THEREAFTER thereupon
46 Howbeit that [was] not first which is spiritual, but that which is natural; and afterward that which is spiritual.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneumatikon pneumatikos
a_ Nom Sg n
THE
spiritual
15:47 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
coikos choikos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
deuteros anqrwpos deuteros anthrOpos

47 The first man [is] of the earth, earthy: the second man [is] the Lord from heaven.
THE
BEFORE-most human first
OUT OF-LAND of-earth
SOILish
THE
second
human
ex ek
Prep
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
OUT OF-heaven
15:48 oios
hoios
pk Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
coikos choikos
a_ Nom Sg m
toioutoi kai oi toioutos kai ho

pd Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
coikoi choikos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai oios kai hoios

Conj pk Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE-WHICH THE such-as
SOILish soilish-one
such
AND also epouranioi epouranios

a_ Nom Pl m
THE the-ones
SOILish-ones AND soilish
THE-WHICH THE such-as
48 As [is] the earthy, such [are] they also that are earthy: and as [is] the heavenly, such [are] they also that are heavenly.
epouranios toioutoi kai oi epouranios toioutos kai ho

a_ Nom Sg m pd Nom Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ON-heavenly Celestial-One
such
AND also
THE the-ones
ON-heavenly-ones celestial eikona tou eikOn ho

15:49 kai kaqws

kai
Conj
kathOs
Adv
eforesamen thn phoreO ho

coikou choikos
a_ Gen Sg m
WH
foreswmen
AND
NA
according-AS WE-wear
THE
image
OF-THE
SOILish soilish-one
49 And as we have borne the image of the earthy, we shall also bear the image of the heavenly.
foresomen phoreO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
eikona tou eikOn ho

epouraniou epouranios
a_ Gen Sg m
WE-SHALL-BE-wearING
AND also fhmi phEmi
THE
image
OF-THE
ON-heavenly Celestial-One kai aima kai haima

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
15:50 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
adelfoi oti sarx adelphos hoti sarx

n_ Voc Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
basileian qeou basileia theos

vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
this
YET I-AM-AVERRING brothers brethren ! dunatai dunamai

that
FLESH
AND
BLOOD
KINGdom in-kingdom thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-God
50 Now this I say, brethren, that flesh and blood cannot inherit the kingdom of God; neither doth corruption inherit incorruption.
klhronomhsai ou klEronomeO ou
vn Aor Act Part Neg
oude oude
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
fqora phthora
n_ Nom Sg f
afqarsian aphtharsia
n_ Acc Sg f
TO-tenant to-enjoy-an-allotment klhronomei klEronomeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NOT
IS-ABLE
NOT-YET THE neither
CORRUPTion THE of-the
UN-CORRUPTion incorruption
IS-tenantING is-enjoying-the-allotment
15:51 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
musthrion umin mustErion humeis

n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
koimhqhsomeqa koimaO
vi Fut Pas 1 Pl
BE-PERCEIVING CLOSE-KEEP lo ! secret pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
51 . Behold, I shew you a mystery; We shall not all sleep, but we shall all be changed,
ALL
NOT
WE-SHALL-BE-BEING-reposED we-shall-be-being-put-to-repose
de de
Conj
allaghsomeqa allassO
vi 2Fut Pas 1 Pl
ALL
YET WE-SHALL-BE-beING-CHANGED
15:52 en
en
Prep
atomw en atomos en
a_ Dat Sg n Prep
riph rhipE
n_ Dat Sg f
ofqalmou en ophthalmos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
escath salpiggi eschatos salpigx

IN
UN-CUT instant
IN
wink twinkle
OF-VIEWer of-eye
IN
THE
LAST
TRUMPET trump afqartoi aphthartos

a_ Nom Pl m
salpisei salpizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
gar kai oi gar kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Nom Pl m
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
egerqhsontai egeirO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
52 In a moment, in the twinkling of an eye, at the last trump: for the trumpet shall sound, and the dead shall be raised incorruptible, and we shall be changed.
He-SHALL-BE-TRUMPETING for
AND
THE
DEAD-ones SHALL-BE-BEING-ROUSED UN-CORRUPTible AND dead-ones incorruptible
AV
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
allaghsomeqa allassO
vi 2Fut Pas 1 Pl
WE
SHALL-BE-beING-CHANGED
15:53 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
fqarton phthartos
a_ Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
endusasqai enduO
vn Aor Mid
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
it-IS-BINDING must to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
for
THE
CORRUPTible this
TO-BE-beING-IN-SLIPPED UN-CORRUPTion AND to-be-putting-on incorruption aqanasian athanasia

n_ Acc Sg f
53 For this corruptible must put on incorruption, and this mortal [must] put on immortality.
qnhton thnEtos
a_ Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
endusasqai enduO
vn Aor Mid
THE
DYing mortal de de
Conj
this
TO-BE-beING-IN-SLIPPED UN-DEATH to-be-putting-on immortality

NA
15:54 otan
hotan
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
fqarton phthartos
a_ Nom Sg n
NA
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
NA
endushtai enduO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
NA
n_ Acc Sg f
NA
kai kai
Conj
when-EVER YET THE whenever

NA
CORRUPTible this
SHOULD-BE-beING-IN-SLIPPED UN-CORRUPTion AND should-be-putting-on incorruption

WH
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
qnhton thnEtos
a_ Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
endushtai enduO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
thn
aqanasian tote athanasia tote

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
54 So when this corruptible shall have put on incorruption, and this mortal shall have put on immortality, then shall be brought to pass the saying that is written, Death is swallowed up in victory.
THE
DYing mortal o ho
this
SHOULD-BE-beING-IN-SLIPPED should-be-putting-on logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
UN-DEATH immortality katepoqh katapinO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
then
genhsetai ginomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gegrammenos graphO
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-BECOMING THE
saying word
THE
HAVING-been-WRITTEN WAS-DOWN-DRUNK THE was-swallowed-up
qanatos eis thanatos eis

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
nikos nikos
n_ Acc Sg n
DEATH
INTO CONQUEST victory sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
15:55 pou
pou
Part Int
qanate thanatos
n_ Voc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
nikos nikos
n_ Nom Sg n
pou pou
Part Int
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
qanate thanatos
n_ Voc Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kentron kentron
n_ Nom Sg n
55 O death, where [is] thy sting? O grave, where [is] thy victory?
?-where OF-YOU where ?
DEATH !
THE
CONQUEST ?-where OF-YOU victory where ? qanatou h thanatos ho

n_ Gen Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
DEATH !
THE
PIERCer sting dunamis dunamis

n_ Nom Sg f
56 The sting of death [is] sin; and the strength of sin [is] the law.
15:56 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
kentron tou kentron ho

amartia h hamartia ho
de de
Conj
THE
YET PIERCer sting
OF-THE
DEATH
THE
missing sin
THE
YET ABILITY power
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias o hamartia ho
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
missing sin de de
Conj
THE
LAW
15:57 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
didonti didOmi
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
nikos nikos
n_ Acc Sg n
dia dia
Prep
57 But thanks [be] to God, which giveth us the victory through our Lord Jesus Christ.
to-THE
YET God
grace thanks-be ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE the
to-US us
THE
CONQUEST THRU victory through
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ agaphtoi edraioi ginesqe agapEtos hedraios ginomai

a_ Voc Pl m a_ Nom Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
15:58 wste
hOste
Conj

ametakinhtoi ametakinEtos
a_ Nom Pl m
AS-BESIDES brothers so-that brethren ! perisseuontes en perisseuO en

OF-ME
beLOVED beloved ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SETTLED
UN-WITH-STIRred unmovable oti hoti

Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
pantote eidotes pantote eidO

Adv vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
58 . Therefore, my beloved brethren, be ye stedfast, unmoveable, always abounding in the work of the Lord, forasmuch as ye know that your labour is not in vain in the Lord.
exceedING superabounding o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
THE
work
OF-THE
Master Lord kenos kenos

a_ Nom Sg m
always
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware
kopos kopos
n_ Nom Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
toil
OF-YOU(p) NOT of-ye
IS
EMPTY for-naught
IN
Master Lord
AV
1Corinthians 16
16:1 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
logeias ths logeia ho

eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
wsper dietaxa hOsper diatassO

Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
ABOUT YET THE concerning ekklhsiais ths ekklEsia ho

LAYing collection
OF-THE the
INTO THE
HOLY-ones AS-EVEN saints even-as poihsate poieO

vm Aor Act 2 Pl
I-prescribe
to-THE
. Now concerning the collection for the saints, as I have given order to the churches of Galatia, even so do ye.
galatias outws kai umeis galatia houtOs kai humeis

n_ Gen Sg f Adv Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
OF-THE
GALATIA
thus
AND also
YOU(p) ye
DO do-ye ! par para

Prep
16:2 kata
kata
Prep
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
sabbatou ekastos umwn sabbaton hekastos humeis

n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
tiqetw tithEmi
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
according-to ONE one-day qhsaurizwn thEsaurizO

OF-SABBATH
EACH
OF-YOU(p) BESIDE self of-ye himself euodwtai euodoO

vs Pres Pas 3 Sg
LET-BE-PLACING let-him-be-laying ! ina hina

Conj
Upon the first [day] of the week let every one of you lay by him in store, as [God] hath prospered him, that there be no gatherings when I come.
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
otan hotan
Conj
PLACING-INTO-MORROW WHICH in-store elqw erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ANY
IF-EVER MAY-BE-BEING-WELL-WAYED THAT NO he-may-be-being-prospered
when-EVER whenever
tote logeiai ginwntai tote logeia ginomai

Adv n_ Nom Pl f vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
I-MAY-BE-COMING then
LAYings collections
MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-occurring ous hos

pr Acc Pl m
16:3 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
paragenwmai paraginomai
vs 2Aor midD 1 Sg
ean ean
Cond
dokimashte dokimazO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
di dia
Prep
epistolwn epistolE
n_ Gen Pl f
when-EVER YET I-MAY-BE-BESIDE-BECOMING WHOM whenever I-may-be-coming-along whom(p) toutous pemyw houtos pempO
pd Acc Pl m vi Fut Act 1 Sg
IF-EVER YE-SHOULD-BE-testING THRU letters ye-should-be-attesting through thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
And when I come, whomsoever ye shall approve by [your] letters, them will I send to bring your liberality unto Jerusalem.
apenegkein apopherO
vn 2Aor Act
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
ni proper
these
I-SHALL-BE-SENDING TO-BE-FROM-CARRYING THE to-be-carrying-away de de

Conj
grace
OF-YOU(p) INTO JERUSALEM of-ye emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
4
16:4 ean
ean
Cond
axion axios
a_ Nom Sg n
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kame kagO
pp 1 Acc Sg Con
poreuesqai sun poreuomai sun

And if it be meet that I go also, they shall go with me.
IF-EVER YET WORTHY worthwhile poreusontai poreuomai

vi Fut midD 3 Pl
it-MAY-BE
OF-THE
AND-ME also-me
TO-BE-GOING
TOGETHER to-ME with-me
THEY-SHALL-BE-GOING
16:5 eleusomai
erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
otan hotan
Conj
makedonian dielqw makedonia dierchomai

I-SHALL-BE-COMING YET TOWARD YOU(p) ye makedonian gar diercomai makedonia gar dierchomai
n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
when-EVER MACEDONIA whenever
I-MAY-BE-THRU-COMING I-may-be-passing-through
. Now I will come unto you, when I shall pass through Macedonia: for I do pass through Macedonia.
MACEDONIA
for
I-AM-THRU-COMING I-am-passing-through de de
Conj
16:6 pros
pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tucon tugchanO
vp 2Aor Act Acc Sg n
WH
katamenw h
WH
NA
paramenw paramenO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
NA
h E
NA
kai kai
Conj
Part
TOWARD YOU(p) ye paraceimasw paracheimazO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
YET HAPPENING perchance ina hina

Conj
I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-REMAINING OR I-shall-be-abiding me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
AND also
And it may be that I will abide, yea, and winter with you, that ye may bring me on my journey whithersoever I go.
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
propemyhte propempO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
ou hou
Adv
ean ean
Cond
I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-WINTERING THAT YOU(p) shall-be-wintering ye poreuwmai poreuomai

ME
SHOULD-BE-BEFORE-SENDING where IF-EVER should-be-sending-forward
I-MAY-BE-GOING
16:7 ou
ou
Part Neg
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umas gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
arti arti
Adv
en en
Prep
parodw parodos
n_ Dat Sg f
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
elpizw elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
NOT
I-AM-WILLING for
YOU(p) ye
at-PRESENT IN
BESIDE-WAY TO-BE-PERCEIVING I-AM-EXPECTING on-way
For I will not see you now by the way; but I trust to tarry a while with you, if the Lord permit.
AV
1Corinthians 16
gar cronon gar chronos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
epimeinai epimenO
vn Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ean ean
Cond
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
for
TIME
ANY some
TO-ON-REMAIN TOWARD YOU(p) to-stay ye
IF-EVER THE
Master Lord
epitreyh epitrepO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
SHOULD-BE-permittING
16:8 epimenw
epimenO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
efesw ephesos
n_ Dat Sg f
ews ths heOs ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
penthkosths pentEkostE
n_ Gen Sg f
But I will tarry at Ephesus until Pentecost.
I-SHALL-BE-ON-REMAINING YET IN I-shall-be-staying
EPHESUS TILL
OF-THE the
9
16:9 qura
thura
n_ Nom Sg f
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
anewgen anoigO
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
megalh mega
a_ Nom Sg f
kai energhs kai antikeimenoi kai energEs kai antikeimai

Conj a_ Nom Sg f Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
For a great door and effectual is opened unto me, and [there are] many adversaries.
DOOR
for
to-ME
HAS-UP-OPENED GREAT has-opened
AND
IN-ACTing operative
AND
polloi polus
a_ Nom Pl m
MANY
16:10 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
timoqeos blepete timotheos blepO

n_ Nom Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ina hina
Conj
afobws genhtai aphobOs ginomai

Adv vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
IF-EVER YET MAY-BE-COMING Timothy
BE-YE-lookING THAT UN-FEARly be-ye-looking-to-it ! fearlessly kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
he-MAY-BE-BECOMING
WH NA
10 . Now if Timotheus come, see that he may be with you without fear: for he worketh the work of the Lord, as I also [do].
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
gar ergon gar ergon

Conj n_ Acc Sg n
ergazetai ergazomai
ws hOs
Adv
egw
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
THE
for
work
OF-Master of-Lord
he-IS-workING
AS
AND-I also-I auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
16:11 mh
mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
exouqenhsh exoutheneO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
propemyate de propempO de
vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj
en en
Prep
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Dat Sg f
NO
ANY anyone
THEN him
SHOULD-BE-scornING BEFORE-SEND send-forward-ye ! ekdecomai ekdechomai

YET him
IN
PEACE
11 Let no man therefore despise him: but conduct him forth in peace, that he may come unto me: for I look for him with the brethren.
ina hina
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
gar auton gar autos

Conj pp Acc Sg m
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
THAT he-MAY-BE-COMING TOWARD ME
I-AM-OUT-RECEIVING for I-am-awaiting
him
WITH
THE
adelfwn adelphos
n_ Gen Pl m
brothers brethren
16:12 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
apollw tou apollOs ho

adelfou polla adelphos polus

parekalesa auton parakaleO autos

ina hina
Conj
ABOUT YET APOLLOS concerning elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
brother
much
I-BESIDE-CALL I-entreat
him
THAT
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
meta twn meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
adelfwn kai pantws ouk adelphos kai pantOs ou

n_ Gen Pl m Conj Adv Part Neg
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
12 As touching [our] brother Apollos, I greatly desired him to come unto you with the brethren: but his will was not at all to come at this time; but he will come when he shall have convenient time.
he-MAY-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye qelhma thelEma

n_ Nom Sg n
WITH
THE
Conj
AND
ALL-ly undoubtedly
NOT
it-WAS
ina hina
Conj
nun elqh nun erchomai

eleusetai erchomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
otan hotan
Conj
eukairhsh eukaireO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
WILL his-will
THAT NOW he-MAY-BE-COMING he-SHALL-BE-COMING YET when-EVER it-SHOULD-BE-WELL-SEASONING whenever he-should-be-having-an-opportunity en en

Prep
16:13 grhgoreite sthkete

grEgoreO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
stEkO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei andrizesqe pistis andrizomai

n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
krataiousqe krataioO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
13 . Watch ye, stand fast in the faith, quit you like men, be strong.
BE-STANDING-firm IN be-ye-standing-firm ! en en
Prep
THE
BELIEF faith
BE-MAN-izING be-ye-being-manly !
BE-beING-staunch be-ye-being-staunch !
14 Let all your things be done with charity.
16:14 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
ginesqw ginomai
ALL all-things
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
LOVE
LET-BE-BECOMING let-it-be-occurring !
AV
1Corinthians 16
16:15 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi oidate adelphos eidO

n_ Voc Pl m vi Perf Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikian oikia
n_ Acc Sg f
stefana stephanas
n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye oti estin hoti eimi

brothers brethren ! acaias achaia

n_ Gen Sg f
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE ye-are-acquainted-with kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
HOME house agiois hagios
OF-Stephanas
aparch aparchE
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
etaxan tassO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
15 I beseech you, brethren, (ye know the house of Stephanas, that it is the firstfruits of Achaia, and [that] they have addicted themselves to the ministry of the saints,)
a_ Dat Pl m
that
it-IS
first-fruit firstfruit
OF-THE
ACHAIA
AND
INTO THRU-SERVice to-THE service
HOLY-ones THEY-SET saints
eautous heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
selves themselves
16:16 ina
hina
Conj

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
upotasshsqe hupotassO
vs Pres Pas 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
toioutois kai panti toioutos kai pas

pd Dat Pl m Conj a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THAT AND also sunergounti sunergeO

YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-beING-UNDER-SET to-THE may-be-being-subject
such such(p)
AND
to-EVERY
THE
16 That ye submit yourselves unto such, and to every one that helpeth with [us], and laboureth.
kai kopiwnti kai kopiaO

one-TOGETHER-ACTING AND one-co-operating-with-us
toilING one-toiling parousia parousia

n_ Dat Sg f
16:17 cairw
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
stefana stephanas
n_ Gen Sg m
kai fortounatou kai acaikou kai phortounatos kai achaikos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-JOYING I-am-rejoicing oti to hoti ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg n
YET ON
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-Stephanas AND presence aneplhrwsan anaplEroO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
OF-FORTUNATUS Fortunatus
AND
OF-ACHAICUS Achaicus
17 I am glad of the coming of Stephanas and Fortunatus and Achaicus: for that which was lacking on your part they have supplied.
umeteron usterhma outoi humeteros husterEma houtos

ps 2 Acc Sg n_ Acc Sg n pd Nom Pl m
that
THE
YOUR-more of-yours
WANT deficiency
these these-men emon emos

ps 1 Acc Sg
UP-FILL fill-up umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
16:18 anepausan
anapauO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma kai to pneuma kai ho

n_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg n
epiginwskete epiginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
THEY-UP-CEASE for they-soothe tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
THE
MY
spirit
AND
THE
OF-YOU(p) BE-YE-ON-KNOWING THEN of-ye be-ye-recognizing !
18 For they have refreshed my spirit and yours: therefore acknowledge ye them that are such.
toioutous toioutos
pd Acc Pl m
THE
such such(p) umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
16:19 aspazontai
aspazomai
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
ekklhsiai ekklEsia
n_ Nom Pl f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
asias asia
n_ Gen Sg f
aspazetai aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye
THE
OUT-CALLEDS OF-THE ecclesias sun sun

Prep
ASIA IS-greetING province-of-Asia th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
YOU(p) ye autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
19 . The churches of Asia salute you. Aquila and Priscilla salute you much in the Lord, with the church that is in their house.
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
akulas akulas
n_ Nom Sg m
kai priska kai priska

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kat kata
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
IN
Master Lord
much
AQUILA
AND
PRISCA
according-to HOME house
OF-them
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
16:20 aspazontai
aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi pantes adelphos pas

aspasasqe allhlous en aspazomai allElOn en

vm Aor midD 2 Pl pc Acc Pl m Prep
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye
20 All the brethren greet you. Greet ye one another with an holy kiss.
THE
brothers brethren
ALL
greet-YE greet-ye !
one-another
IN
filhmati agiw philEma hagios

FOND-effect kiss
HOLY
16:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aspasmos th aspasmos ho
emh emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
21 The salutation of [me] Paul with mine own hand.
THE
greeting salutation
to-THE
MY
HAND
OF-PAUL
AV
16:22 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
filei phileO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
htw eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
anaqema marana anathema maranatha

n_ Nom Sg n Aramaic
22 If any man love not the Lord Jesus Christ, let him be Anathema Maranatha.
IF
ANY anyone
NOT
IS-beING-FOND THE is-being-fond-of
Master Lord
LET-him-BE let-him-be !
anathema
MARANA Maran
qa maranatha
Aramaic
THA atha
16:23 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
23 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you.
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
WITH YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
16:24 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
meta pantwn umwn meta pas humeis

Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl

THE
LOVE
OF-ME
WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
24 My love [be] with you all in Christ Jesus. Amen. <<[The first [epistle] to the Corinthians was written from Philippi by Stephanas and Fortunatus and Achaicus and Timotheus.]>>
AV
2Corinthians 1
2Corinthians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
apostolos cristou apostolos christos

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep

kai timoqeos kai timotheos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
PAUL
commissioner apostle adelfos th adelphos ho

OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ ekklhsia tou ekklEsia ho

THRU WILL through qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-God
AND
Timothy
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
oush eimi
en en
Prep
korinqw korinthos
n_ Dat Sg f
. Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God, and Timothy [our] brother, unto the church of God which is at Corinth, with all the saints which are in all Achaia:
THE
brother
to-THE
OUT-CALLED OF-THE ecclesia pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
God
THE
one-BEING one-being olh holos

a_ Dat Sg f
IN
CORINTH
sun sun
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ousin eimi
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
acaia achaia
n_ Dat Sg f
HOLY-ones ALL saints kai eirhnh kai eirEnE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THE
ones-BEING ones-being qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
IN
WHOLE
THE
ACHAIA
1:2 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apo apo
Prep
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Grace [be] to you and peace from God our Father, and [from] the Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:3 euloghtos o
eulogEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pathr kai patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
blessed
THE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
. Blessed [be] God, even the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of mercies, and the God of all comfort;
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
oiktirmwn kai qeos oiktirmos kai theos

n_ Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
THE
FATHER
OF-THE
PITIES
AND
God
OF-EVERY BESIDE-CALLing of-all consolation qliyei thlipsis

n_ Dat Sg f
1:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
parakalwn parakaleO
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
epi pash epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
One-BESIDE-CALLING US one-consoling hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
ON
EVERY
THE
CONSTRICTION OF-US affliction qliyei thlipsis

n_ Dat Sg f
INTO THE
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
parakalein parakaleO
vn Pres Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
Who comforteth us in all our tribulation, that we may be able to comfort them which are in any trouble, by the comfort wherewith we ourselves are comforted of God.
TO-BE-enABLED to-enable
US
TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLING THE-ones to-be-consoling the-ones parakaloumeqa parakaleO

vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
IN
EVERY
CONSTRICTION THRU THE affliction through qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
paraklhsews hs paraklEsis hos

autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
WHICH
WE-ARE-beING-BESIDE-CALLED SAME we-are-being-consoled ourselves perisseuei perisseuO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
by
THE
God
1:5 oti
hoti
Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
paqhmata tou pathEma ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Sg m

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
that according-AS IS-exceedING THE seeing-that is-superabounding outws dia houtOs dia
Adv Prep
EMOTIONS sufferings kai h kai ho

Conj
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
INTO US
For as the sufferings of Christ abound in us, so our consolation also aboundeth by Christ.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou perisseuei christos perisseuO

paraklhsis hmwn paraklEsis hemeis

t_ Nom Sg f
thus
THRU THE through de de

Conj
ANOINTED Christ
IS-exceedING AND is-superabounding also uper huper

Prep
THE
BESIDE-CALLing consolation umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-US
1:6 eite
eite
Conj
qlibomeqa thlibO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
paraklhsews kai paraklEsis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
IF-BESIDES YET WE-ARE-beING-CONSTRICTED OVER THE whether we-are-being-afflicted for-the-sake-of swthrias eite sOtEria eite
n_ Gen Sg f Conj
OF-YOU(p) BESIDE-CALLing of-ye consolation ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND
parakaloumeqa parakaleO
vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
uper huper
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
n_ Gen Sg f
And whether we be afflicted, [it is] for your consolation and salvation, which is effectual in the enduring of the same sufferings which we also suffer: or whether we be comforted, [it is] for your consolation and salvation.
SAVing salvation
IF-BESIDES WE-ARE-beING-BESIDE-CALLED OVER THE or-whether we-are-being-consoled for-the-sake-of
OF-YOU(p) BESIDE-CALLing of-ye consolation
AV
2Corinthians 1
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
energoumenhs en energeO en
vp Pres Mid Gen Sg f Prep
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
autwn paqhmatwn wn autos pathEma hos

pp Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n pr Gen Pl n
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE the hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
IN-ACTING operating pascomen paschO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
IN
UNDER-REMAINing OF-THE endurance elpis elpis

n_ Nom Sg f
SAME
EMOTIONS sufferings bebaia bebaios

a_ Nom Sg f
WHICH
AND also
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
uper umwn huper humeis

Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
WE
ARE-EMOTIONING AND are-suffering
THE
EXPECTATION OF-US
confirmed OVER is-confirmed
YOU(p) ye
7
1:7 eidotes
eidO
oti ws koinwnoi este hoti hOs koinOnos eimi

Conj Adv a_ Nom Pl m vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
paqhmatwn outws kai pathEma houtOs kai

n_ Gen Pl n Adv Conj

t_ Gen Sg f
AS
YE-ARE
OF-THE
EMOTIONS sufferings
thus
AND also
. And our hope of you [is] stedfast, knowing, that as ye are partakers of the sufferings, so [shall ye be] also of the consolation.
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
BESIDE-CALLing consolation gar qelomen gar thelO

1:8 ou
ou
Part Neg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
adelfoi uper ths adelphos huper ho

n_ Voc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
NOT
for
WE-ARE-WILLING YOU(p) ye genomenhs ginomai

TO-BE-UN-KNOWING brothers to-be-being-ignorant brethren ! th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
OVER
THE
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
asia asia
n_ Dat Sg f
oti kaq hoti kata

Conj Prep
uperbolhn uper huperbolE huper

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
For we would not, brethren, have you ignorant of our trouble which came to us in Asia, that we were pressed out of measure, above strength, insomuch that we despaired even of life:
OF-US
THE
one-BECOMING becoming wste hOste

Conj
IN
THE
ASIA that province-of-Asia hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
according-to OVER-CAST inordinate kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
OVER above
dunamin ebarhqhmen dunamis bareO

exaporhqhnai exaporeomai
vn Aor Pas
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
ABILITY
WE-WERE-HEAVIED AS-BESIDES TO-BE-OUT-perplexED US we-were-burdened so-that to-be-despairing en en

Prep
AND also
OF-THE
TO-BE-LIVING
1:9 alla autoi

alla
Conj
autos
pp Nom Pl m
eautois to heautou ho
pf 3 Dat Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
apokrima tou apokrima ho

qanatou eschkamen ina thanatos echO hina

n_ Gen Sg m vi Perf Act 1 Pl Conj
but
SAME samewe
IN
selves ourselves wmen eimi

vs Pres vxx 1 Pl
THE
answer rescript
OF-THE
DEATH
WE-HAVE-HAD have tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THAT
But we had the sentence of death in ourselves, that we should not trust in ourselves, but in God which raiseth the dead:
mh mE
Part Neg
pepoiqotes peithO
ef epi
Prep
eautois all epi tw heautou alla epi ho

pf 3 Dat Pl m Conj Prep t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
NO
HAVING-confidence
WE-MAY-BE
ON
selves ourselves
but
ON
THE
God
THE
egeironti egeirO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
nekrous nekros
a_ Acc Pl m
One-ROUSING one-rousing
THE
DEAD-ones dead-ones thlikoutou tElikoutos

pd Gen Sg m
1:10 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
qanatou errusato thanatos rhuomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor midD/pasD 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai rusetai kai rhuomai

eis eis
Prep
WHO
OUT OF-THE-PRIME-SAME DEATH of-such-proportions hlpikamen elpizO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
rescuES
US
AND
SHALL-BE-rescuING INTO
10 Who delivered us from so great a death, and doth deliver: in whom we trust that he will yet deliver [us];
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
kai eti kai eti

Conj Adv
rusetai rhuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
WHOM
WE-HAVE-EXPECTED we-rely-on
that
AND also
STILL He-SHALL-BE-rescuING
1:11 sunupourgountwn
sunupourgeO
kai umwn kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
uper huper
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dehsei ina deEsis hina

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
ek ek
Prep
OF-TOGETHER-UNDER-ACTING AND of-assisting-together also pollwn proswpwn to polus prosOpon ho

a_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n t_ Nom Sg n
OF-YOU(p) OVER US ye for-the-sake-of hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
to-THE
petition
THAT OUT
eis eis
Prep
carisma dia charisma dia

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
pollwn eucaristhqh polus eucharisteO

a_ Gen Pl n vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
11 Ye also helping together by prayer for us, that for the gift [bestowed] upon us by the means of many persons thanks may be given by many on our behalf.
OF-MANY
faces
THE
INTO US
grace-effect THRU MANY gracious-gift through
He-MAY-BE-BEING-thankED
uper huper
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
AV
2Corinthians 1
1:12 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar kauchsis hmwn gar kauchEsis hemeis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Pl
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
marturion ths marturion ho

THE
for
BOASTing
OF-US
WH
this
IS
NA
THE
witness testimony
OF-THE
suneidhsews hmwn suneidEsis hemeis

oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
agiothti
aplothti haplotEs
n_ Dat Sg f
kai eilikrineia tou kai eilikrineia ho

Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
12 . For our rejoicing is this, the testimony of our conscience, that in simplicity and godly sincerity, not with fleshly wisdom, but by the grace of God, we have had our conversation in the world, and more abundantly to you-ward.
conscience
OF-US
that
IN
UN-COMPOUND singleness sarkikh all en sarkikos alla en

a_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep
AND
sincerity
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
cariti qeou charis theos

anestrafhmen anastrephO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Pl
God
AND
NOT
IN
WISDOM
FLESHic fleshly
but
IN
grace
OF-God
WE-UP-TURNed (behaved) we-behaved-ourselves
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
perissoterws de perissoterOs de
Adv Conj
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
IN
THE
SYSTEM world gar alla gar allos

Conj
more-exceedingly more-superabundantly grafomen graphO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
YET TOWARD YOU(p) ye umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
1:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
all h alla E
Conj Part
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
anaginwskete h anaginOskO E
vi Pres Act 2 Pl Part
kai kai
Conj
a_ Acc Pl n
NOT
for
other WE-ARE-WRITING to-YOU(p) other-things to-ye elpizw elpizO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
but
OR WHICH than
YE-ARE-readING
OR
AND also
13 For we write none other things unto you, than what ye read or acknowledge; and I trust ye shall acknowledge even to the end;
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
oti ews telous hoti heOs telos

Conj Conj n_ Gen Sg n
epignwsesqe epiginOskO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
YE-ARE-ON-KNOWING I-AM-EXPECTING YET that are-recognizing
TILL
OF-FINISH YE-SHALL-BE-ON-KNOWING consummation ye-shall-be-recognizing merous meros

n_ Gen Sg n
1:14 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
kai epegnwte hmas kai epiginOskO hEmeis

Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
oti kauchma umwn hoti kauchEma humeis

Conj n_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
according-AS AND also kaqaper kathaper

Adv
YE-ON-KNEW ye-recognized
US
FROM PART
that
BOAST glorying tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-YOU(p) WE-ARE of-ye kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
WH
14 As also ye have acknowledged us in part, that we are your rejoicing, even as ye also [are] ours in the day of the Lord Jesus.

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
hmwn
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND even-as also

NA
YOU(p) ye
OF-US
IN
THE
DAY
OF-THE
Master Lord
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-US
JESUS
1:15 kai tauth th

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Dat Sg f
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pepoiqhsei eboulomhn pepoithEsis boulomai

n_ Dat Sg f vi impf midD/pasD 1 Sg
proteron proteron
Adv
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
AND
to-this
THE
WH
confidence
NA
I-intendED
BEFORE-more TOWARD YOU(p) formerly ye
TO-BE-COMING
15 . And in this confidence I was minded to come unto you before, that ye might have a second benefit;
ina hina
Conj
deuteran deuteros
a_ Acc Sg f
caran
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
schte echO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
THAT second
grace
YE-SHOULD-BE-HAVING
1:16 kai di
kai
Conj
dia
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
dielqein dierchomai
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
makedonian kai palin apo makedonia kai palin apo

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv Prep
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
THRU YOU(p) through ye pros pros

Prep
TO-BE-THRU-COMING INTO MACEDONIA to-be-passing-through umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
AND
AGAIN
FROM MACEDONIA
16 And to pass by you into Macedonia, and to come again out of Macedonia unto you, and of you to be brought on my way toward Judaea.
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
kai uf umwn kai hupo humeis

Conj Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
propemfqhnai propempO
vn Aor Pas
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ioudaian ioudaia
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
by
YOU(p) ye mhti mEti

Part Int
TO-BE-BEFORE-SENT INTO THE to-be-sent-forward ara ara

Part Int
JUDEA
1:17 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
boulomenos boulomai
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
elafria ecrhsamhn h elaphria chraomai E

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor midD 1 Sg Part
this
THEN intendING
NO-ANY CONSEQUENTLY to-THE not ? the sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
LIGHTness
I-USE
OR
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
bouleuomai bouleuO
kata kata
Prep
bouleuomai bouleuO
ina hina
Conj
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
par para
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
17 When I therefore was thus minded, did I use lightness? or the things that I purpose, do I purpose according to the flesh, that with me there should be yea yea, and nay nay?
WHICH which(p)
I-AM-COUNSELLING I-am-planning
according-to FLESH
I-AM-COUNSELLING I-am-planning
THAT MAY-BE it-may-be
BESIDE ME
AV
2Corinthians 1
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
nai nai kai to nai nai kai ho

Part Part Conj t_ Nom Sg n
ou ou
Part Neg
ou ou
Part Neg
THE
YEA yes
YEA yes de de
Conj
AND
THE
NOT not qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
NOT not oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
1:18 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pros pros
Prep
18 But [as] God [is] true, our word toward you was not yea and nay.
BELIEVing faithful umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
YET THE
God
that
THE
saying word
OF-US
THE
TOWARD
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
nai kai ou nai kai ou

Part Conj Part Neg
YOU(p) ye
NOT
IS
YEA yes qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
NOT not
WH
1:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
gar uios gar huios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
cristos ihsous
WH
NA
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
NA
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
OF-THE
God
for
SON
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
di dia
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
khrucqeis kErussO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
di dia
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai silouanou kai kai silouanos kai

Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj
19 For the Son of God, Jesus Christ, who was preached among you by us, [even] by me and Silvanus and Timotheus, was not yea and nay, but in him was yea.
THE the-one
IN YOU(p) among ye
THRU US through
BEING-PROCLAIMED THRU ME being-heralded through alla nai en alla nai en

Conj Part Prep
AND
SILVANUS
AND
timoqeou ouk timotheos ou

egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
nai kai ou nai kai ou

Part Conj Part Neg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
Timothy
NOT
BECAME
YEA yes
AND
NOT not en en
Prep
but
YEA yes to ho
IN
Him
HAS-BECOME
1:20 osai
hosos
pk Nom Pl f
gar epaggeliai qeou gar epaggelia theos

Conj n_ Nom Pl f n_ Gen Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
nai dio nai dio

Part Conj
kai di kai dia

Conj Prep
t_ Nom Sg n
as-many-as for whatever autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
promises
OF-God
IN
Him
THE
YEA yes di dia

Prep
THRU through
20 For all the promises of God in him [are] yea, and in him Amen, unto the glory of God by us.
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
amhn tw amEn ho
Hebrew t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
pros pros
Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
Him
THE
AMEN
to-THE
God
TOWARD esteem glory sun sun

Prep
THRU US through eis eis

Prep
1:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
bebaiwn bebaioO
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
criston kai crisas christos kai chriO

n_ Acc Sg m Conj vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THE
YET One-confirmING one-confirming qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
US
TOGETHER to-YOU(p) togetherwith ye
21 Now he which stablisheth us with you in Christ, and hath anointed us, [is] God;
AND
One-ANOINTing one-anointing
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
US
God
WH NA
1:22
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai sfragisamenos hmas kai sphragizO hEmeis

Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
kai dous kai didOmi

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arrabwna arrhabOn
n_ Acc Sg m
22 Who hath also sealed us, and given the earnest of the Spirit in our hearts.
THE the-one tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
AND also
One-SEALing sealing
US
AND
GIVING
THE
EARNEST
n_ Gen Sg n Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

OF-THE
spirit
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-US
1:23 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
martura ton martus ho

qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
epikaloumai epi thn epikaleO epi ho

vi Pres Mid 1 Sg Prep t_ Acc Sg f
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
yuchn psuchE
n_ Acc Sg f
YET witness
THE
God
AM-ON-CALLING am-invoking hlqon erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ON
THE
MY
soul
23 Moreover I call God for a record upon my soul, that to spare you I came not as yet unto Corinth.
oti feidomenos hoti pheidomai

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ouketi ouketi
Adv
eis eis
Prep
korinqon korinthos
n_ Acc Sg f
that
SPARING
OF-YOU(p) NOT-STILL I-CAME ye not-longer umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
INTO CORINTH
1:24 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti kurieuomen hoti kurieuO

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews alla sunergoi pistis alla sunergos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Nom Pl m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
NOT
that
WE-ARE-masterING OF-YOU(p) THE we-are-being-lord of-ye of-the
BELIEF faith
but
TOGETHER-ACTers WE-ARE fellow-workers
24 Not for that we have dominion over your faith, but are helpers of your joy: for by faith ye stand.
AV
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gar pistei esthkate gar pistis histEmi

Conj n_ Dat Sg f vi Perf Act 2 Pl
OF-THE
JOY
OF-YOU(p) to-THE of-ye
for
BELIEF faith
YE-HAVE-STOOD ye-stand
AV
2Corinthians 2
2:1 ekrina
krinO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
gar emautw touto gar emautou houtos

Conj pf 1 Dat Sg m pd Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
palin en palin en
Adv Prep
luph lupE
n_ Dat Sg f
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
I-JUDGE I-decide elqein erchomai

vn 2Aor Act
for
to-MYself
this
THE
NO
AGAIN
IN
SORROW TOWARD YOU(p) ye
. But I determined this with myself, that I would not come again to you in heaviness.
TO-BE-COMING
2:2 ei
ei
Cond
gar egw gar egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
lupw lupeO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai tis kai tis

Conj pi Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
eufrainwn euphrainO
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
IF
for
AM-SORROWING am-making-sorry lupoumenos lupeO

YOU(p) ye ex ek
Prep
AND also emou egO
ANY who ?
THE
gladdenING one-gladdening
ME
For if I make you sorry, who is he then that maketh me glad, but the same which is made sorry by me?
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pp 1 Gen Sg
IF
NO
THE
one-beING-SORROWED OUT OF-ME one-being-made-sorry touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
2:3 kai egraya

kai
Conj
graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
elqwn erchomai
luphn lupE
n_ Acc Sg f
scw echO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
I-WRITE
this
SAME THAT NO same-thing me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
COMING
SORROW I-SHOULD-BE-HAVING
af apo
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
edei deO
vi impf im-Act 3 Sg
cairein chairO
vn Pres Act
pepoiqws peithO
epi pantas umas epi pas humeis

Prep a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
oti hoti
Conj
And I wrote this same unto you, lest, when I came, I should have sorrow from them of whom I ought to rejoice; having confidence in you all, that my joy is [the joy] of you all.
FROM WHOM whom(p) h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
it-WAS-BINDING ME
TO-BE-JOYING HAVING-confidence to-be-rejoicing estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ON
ALL
YOU(p) ye
that
emh emos
ps 1 Nom Sg
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f

THE
to-ME my
JOY
OF-ALL
OF-YOU(p) IS of-ye kai sunochs kardias egraya kai sunochE kardia graphO
Conj n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Sg
2:4 ek
ek
Prep
gar pollhs qliyews gar polus thlipsis

Conj a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
dia dia
Prep
pollwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n
OUT for
OF-much
CONSTRICTION AND affliction luphqhte lupeO

vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
pressure
OF-HEART
I-WRITE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THRU MANY through
dakruwn ouc dakru ou

ina hina
Conj
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn ina agapE hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
gnwte ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
For out of much affliction and anguish of heart I wrote unto you with many tears; not that ye should be grieved, but that ye might know the love which I have more abundantly unto you.
TEARS
NOT
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BEING-SORROWED but ye-may-be-being-made-sorrowful perissoterws eis perissoterOs eis

Adv Prep
THE
LOVE
THAT YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
WHICH
I-AM-HAVING
more-exceedingly more-superabundantly leluphken lupeO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
INTO YOU(p) ye ouk ou

Part Neg
2:5 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
leluphken lupeO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
alla apo alla apo

Conj Prep
merous meros
n_ Gen Sg n
ina hina
Conj
IF
YET ANY anyone epibarw epibareO

vs Pres Act 1 Sg
HAS-SORROWED NOT has-caused-sorrow pantas umas pas humeis

ME
he-HAS-SORROWED but he-made-sorry
FROM PART
THAT
. But if any have caused grief, he hath not grieved me, but in part: that I may not overcharge you all.
mh mE
Part Neg
NO
I-MAY-BE-ON-HEAVYING ALL I-may-be-burdening tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
YOU(p) ye epitimia auth epitimia houtos

2:6 ikanon
hikanos
a_ Nom Sg n
toioutw h toioutos ho
pd Dat Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
Sufficient to such a man [is] this punishment, which [was inflicted] of many.
enough
to-THE
such
THE
rebuke
this
THE
by
THE
pleionwn polus
a_ Gen Pl m Cmp
MORE majority
2:7 wste
hOste
Conj
tounantion tounantion
Adv Con
NA
mallon mallon
Adv
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
carisasqai charizomai
vn Aor midD
kai parakalesai mh kai parakaleO mE

Conj vn Aor Act Part Neg
AS-BESIDES THE-IN-INSTEAD so-that on-the-contrary
RATHER
YOU(p) ye
TO-grace AND to-deal-graciously
TO-BESIDE-CALL to-console
NO lest
So that contrariwise ye [ought] rather to forgive [him], and comfort [him], lest perhaps such a one should be swallowed up with overmuch
AV
2Corinthians 2
pws pOs
Part
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
perissotera luph perissos lupE

a_ Dat Sg f Cmp n_ Dat Sg f
katapoqh katapinO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
toioutos toioutos
pd Nom Sg m
sorrow.
how to-THE somehow
more-excessive
SORROW MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-DRUNK THE may-be-being-swallowed-up umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
such
2:8 dio
dio
Conj
parakalw parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kurwsai kuroO
vn Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
agaphn agapE
n_ Acc Sg f
THRU-WHICH I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YOU(p) wherefore I-am-entreating ye
Wherefore I beseech you that ye would confirm [your] love toward him.
TO-SANCTION INTO him to-ratify ina hina

Conj
LOVE
2:9 eis
eis
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gar kai egraya gar kai graphO

Conj Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg
gnw ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dokimhn umwn dokimE humeis

ei ei
Cond
eis eis
Prep
INTO this
for
AND also
I-WRITE
THAT I-MAY-BE-KNOWING THE
testedness
OF-YOU(p) IF of-ye
INTO
For to this end also did I write, that I might know the proof of you, whether ye be obedient in all things.
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
uphkooi este hupEkoos eimi

ALL all-things
obedient
YE-ARE
2:10 w
hos
pr Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
carizesqe charizomai
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
kai gar egw kai gar egO

Conj Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
to-WHOM
YET ANY anything ei ei

Cond
YE-ARE-gracING AND-I ye-are-dealing-graciously also-I kecarismai charizomai

AND also umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
for
WHICH in-which proswpw cristou prosOpon christos

kecarismai charizomai
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
di dia
Prep
en en
Prep
10 To whom ye forgive any thing, I [forgive] also: for if I forgave any thing, to whom I forgave [it], for your sakes [forgave I it] in the person of Christ;
I-HAVE-gracED IF have-dealt-graciously
ANY anything
I-HAVE-gracED THRU YOU(p) I-have-dealt-graciously because-of ye upo hupo

Prep
IN
face
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ ou ou
Part Neg
2:11 ina
hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
pleonekthqwmen pleonekteO
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
satana satanas
n_ Gen Sg m
gar autou gar autos

Conj pp Gen Sg m
11 Lest Satan should get an advantage of us: for we are not ignorant of his devices.
THAT NO
WE-MAY-BE-BEING-MORE-HAD UNDER THE we-may-be-being-overreached by agnooumen agnoeO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
SATAN (adversary) NOT Satan
for
OF-him
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
nohmata noEma
n_ Acc Pl n
THE of-the
MINDS WE-ARE-UN-KNOWING apprehensions we-are-being-ignorant de de

Conj
2:12 elqwn
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
trwada eis trOas eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
COMING on-coming kai quras kai thura

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
YET INTO THE
TROAS
INTO THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
12 . Furthermore, when I came to Troas to [preach] Christ's gospel, and a door was opened unto me of the Lord,
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
anewgmenhs anoigO
vp Perf Pas Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
OF-DOOR door
to-ME
HAVING-been-UP-OPENED IN having-been-opened anesin anesis

n_ Acc Sg f
Master Lord tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
2:13 ouk
ou
Part Neg
eschka echO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati mou pneuma egO

mh mE
Part Neg
eurein heuriskO
vn 2Aor Act
NOT
I-HAVE-HAD I-have titon titos

n_ Acc Sg m
UP-LETTing to-THE ease
spirit
OF-ME
to-THE
NO
TO-BE-FINDING
13 I had no rest in my spirit, because I found not Titus my brother: but taking my leave of them, I went from thence into Macedonia.
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon mou adelphos egO

alla apotaxamenos autois exhlqon alla apotassomai autos exerchomai

Conj vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m pp Dat Pl m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ME
TITUS
THE
brother
OF-ME
but
FROM-SETTing taking-leave
to-them
I-OUT-CAME I-came-away
INTO
makedonian makedonia
n_ Acc Sg f
MACEDONIA
2:14 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pantote qriambeuonti hmas pantote thriambeuO hEmeis

Adv vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
YET God
grace thanks-be osmhn osmE

n_ Acc Sg f
to-THE-One always the-one
TRIUMPHING-over giving-triumph
US
IN
THE
cristw kai thn christos kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
gnwsews autou gnOsis autos

fanerounti phaneroO
di dia
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
14 Now thanks [be] unto God, which always causeth us to triumph in Christ, and maketh manifest the savour of his knowledge by us in every place.
ANOINTED Christ
AND
THE
ODOR
OF-THE
KNOWledge
OF-Him
to-makING-APPEAR THRU US is-manifesting through
IN
AV
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
EVERY
PLACE
2:15 oti cristou

hoti
Conj
christos
n_ Gen Sg m
euwdia euOdia
n_ Nom Sg f
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
swzomenois sOzO
kai kai
Conj
that
OF-ANOINTED WELL-ODOR WE-ARE of-Christ fragrance apollumenois apollumi

to-THE
God
IN
THE
ones-beING-SAVED AND ones-being-saved
15 For we are unto God a sweet savour of Christ, in them that are saved, and in them that perish:
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
IN
THE
ones-beING-destroyED ones-perishing men men

Part
2:16 ois
hos
pr Dat Pl m
osmh osmE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
qanaton ois thanatos hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
osmh osmE
n_ Nom Sg f
ek ek
Prep
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
to-WHOM INDEED ODOR to-whom(p) eis eis

Prep
OUT OF-DEATH
INTO DEATH
to-WHOM YET ODOR to-whom(p)
OUT OF-LIFE
16 To the one [we are] savour of death unto death; to the other the savour of unto life. And who sufficient for these things?
the and life [is]
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
ikanos hikanos
a_ Nom Sg m
INTO LIFE
AND
TOWARD these these(p) ws oi hOs ho

Adv
ANY who ?
enough competent polloi polus

a_ Nom Pl m
2:17 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar esmen gar eimi

kaphleuontes ton kapEleuO ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Pl m
NOT
for
WE-ARE
AS
THE
MANY majority
PEDDLING ones-peddling qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
saying word qeou theos
OF-THE
17 For we are not as many, which corrupt the word of God: but as of sincerity, but as of God, in the sight of God speak we in Christ.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
all ws ex alla hOs ek

Conj Adv Prep
eilikrineias all ws ek eilikrineia alla hOs ek

n_ Gen Sg f Conj Adv Prep
katenanti katenanti
Adv
en en
Prep
n_ Gen Sg m
God
but
AS
OUT OF-sincerity
but
AS
OUT OF-God
DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-God in-sight
IN
cristw laloumen christos laleO

n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ANOINTED Christ
WE-ARE-TALKING we-are-speaking
AV
2Corinthians 3
3:1 arcomeqa
archO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
palin eautous sunistanein palin heautou sunistEmi

Adv pf 3 Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
h E
Part
mh mE
Part Neg
crhzomen chrEzO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ws hOs
Adv
WE-ARE-beginnING AGAIN
selves ourselves
TO-BE-TOGETHER-STANDING OR to-be-commending umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
NO
WE-ARE-needING AS
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
sustatikwn sustatikos
a_ Gen Pl m
epistolwn pros epistolE pros

n_ Gen Pl f Prep
h E
Part
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
. Do we begin again to commend ourselves? or need we, as some [others], epistles of commendation to you, or [letters] of commendation from you?
ANY some
OF-TOGETHER-STAND letters commendatory epistolh hmwn epistolE hemeis

TOWARD YOU(p) ye umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
OR
OUT OF-YOU(p) of-ye en en

Prep
3:2 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
eggegrammenh eggraphO
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
kardiais kardia
n_ Dat Pl f
THE
letter
OF-US
YOU(p) ye
Ye are our epistle written in our hearts, known and read of all men:
ARE
HAVING-been-IN-WRITTEN IN having-been-engraven
THE
HEARTS
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ginwskomenh kai anaginwskomenh upo pantwn anqrwpwn ginOskO kai anaginOskO hupo pas anthrOpos
vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f Prep a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
OF-US
beING-KNOWN
AND
beING-read
by
ALL
humans
3:3 faneroumenoi
phaneroO
oti este hoti eimi

epistolh cristou epistolE christos

diakonhqeisa diakoneO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg f
uf hmwn hupo hemeis

Prep pp 1 Gen Pl
beING-made-APPEAR that being-manifested eggegrammenh eggraphO

YE-ARE
letter
OF-ANOINTED BEING-THRU-SERVED by of-Christ being-dispensed zwntos zaO

US
ou ou
Part Neg
melani melan
a_ Dat Sg n
alla pneumati qeou alla pneuma theos

Conj n_ Dat Sg n n_ Gen Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
en en
Prep
[Forasmuch as ye are] manifestly declared to be the epistle of Christ ministered by us, written not with ink, but with the Spirit of the living God; not in tables of stone, but in fleshy tables of the heart.
HAVING-been-IN-WRITTEN NOT having-been-engraven plaxin liqinais all en plax lithinos alla en

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f Conj Prep
to-ink
but
to-spirit
OF-God
LIVING
NOT
IN
plaxin kardiais sarkinais plax kardia sarkinos

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
tablets
STONE
but
IN
tablets
to-HEARTS
FLESHy fleshy(p) dia dia

Prep
3:4 pepoiqhsin de
pepoithEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
de
Conj
toiauthn ecomen toioutos echO

pd Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou pros christos pros

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
And such trust have we through Christ to God-ward:
confidence
YET such
WE-ARE-HAVING THRU THE through
ANOINTED Christ
TOWARD THE
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
God
3:5 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti af hoti apo

Conj Prep
eautwn ikanoi heautou hikanos

pf 3 Gen Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
logisasqai ti logizomai tis

vn Aor midD px Acc Sg n
ws ex hOs ek
Adv Prep
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
NOT
that
FROM selves ourselves ikanoths hmwn hikanotEs hemeis

n_ Nom Sg f
enough competent ek ek
Prep
WE-ARE
TO-account to-reckon qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
ANY anything
AS
OUT OF-selves of-ourselves
Not that we are sufficient of ourselves to think any thing as of ourselves; but our sufficiency [is] of God;
all h alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
pp 1 Gen Pl
but
THE
enough-ness competency
OF-US
OUT OF-THE
God
3:6 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai ikanwsen kai hikanoO

hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
diakonous diakonos
n_ Acc Pl m
kainhs kainos
a_ Gen Sg f
diaqhkhs ou diathEkE ou
grammatos gramma
n_ Gen Sg n
WHO
AND also
makES-enough US makes-competent
THRU-SERVitors OF-NEW dispensers

WH
covenant
NA
NOT
OF-WRITing of-letter to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
. Who also hath made us able ministers of the new testament; not of the letter, but of the spirit: for the letter killeth, but the spirit giveth life.
alla pneumatos to alla pneuma ho

Conj n_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
gar gramma gar gramma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
apokteinei
apoktennei apokteinO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
but
OF-spirit
THE
for
WRITing letter
IS-FROM-KILLING is-killing
THE
YET
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
zwopoiei zOopoieO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
spirit
IS-makING-LIVE is-vivifying de de
Conj
3:7 ei
ei
Cond
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou en thanatos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
grammasin entetupwmenh gramma entupoO

n_ Dat Pl n vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f
IF
YET THE
DEATH
IN
WRITings letters
HAVING-been-IN-BEATEN having-been-chiseled
But if the ministration of death, written [and] engraven in stones, was glorious, so that the children of Israel could not stedfastly behold the face of
AV
2Corinthians 3
liqois lithos
n_ Dat Pl m
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
wste hOste
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
atenisai atenizO
vn Aor Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
Moses for the glory of his countenance; which [glory] was to be done away:
to-STONES WAS-BECOMED IN was-become israhl israEl

ni proper
esteem glory
TO-BE-enABLED
TO-STRETCH THE to-look-intently tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
SONS
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon mwusews dia prosOpon mOusEs dia

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
proswpou prosOpon
n_ Gen Sg n
of-ISRAEL INTO THE of-Israel autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
face
of-MOSES of-Moses
THRU THE because-of
esteem glory
OF-THE
face
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
katargoumenhn katargeO
OF-him
THE
one-beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED vanishing mallon h mallon ho

Adv t_ Nom Sg f
3:8 pws ouci

pOs
Adv Int
ouchi
Part Int
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos estai pneuma eimi

n_ Gen Sg n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
how how ?
NOT(emph.) RATHER not(emph.) ? gar gar

Conj
WH
How shall not the ministration of the spirit be rather glorious?
THE
THRU-SERVice OF-THE dispensation ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
spirit
SHALL-BE
IN
esteem glory mallon mallon

Adv
9
3:9 ei
ei
Cond
NA
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
katakrisews doxa katakrisis doxa

pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
IF
for
to-THE
THRU-SERVice OF-THE dispensation ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
DOWN-JUDGing condemnation
esteem glory
to-much much
RATHER
For if the ministration of condemnation [be] glory, much more doth the ministration of righteousness exceed in glory.
perisseuei h perisseuO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
dikaiosunhs doxh dikaiosunE doxa

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Dat Sg f
IS-exceedING
THE
THRU-SERVice OF-THE dispensation dedoxastai doxazO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
to-esteem to-glory en en
Prep
3:10 kai gar ou

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ou
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
dedoxasmenon doxazO
toutw tw houtos ho
pd Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg n
AND also merei meros

n_ Dat Sg n
for
NOT
HAS-been-esteemizED THE has-been-glorified ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-been-esteemizED IN having-been-glorified
this
THE
10 For even that which was made glorious had no glory in this respect, by reason of the glory that excelleth.
eineken heneken
Adv
uperballoushs doxhs huperballO doxa

vp Pres Act Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
PART particular
on-account OF-THE on-account-of the gar to gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg n
OVER-CASTING transcending
esteem glory dia dia

Prep
3:11 ei
ei
Cond
katargoumenon katargeO
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
mallon to mallon ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg n
IF
for
THE
beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED THRU esteem vanishing through glory doxh doxa

n_ Dat Sg f
to-much much
RATHER
THE
11 For if that which is done away [was] glorious, much more that which remaineth [is] glorious.
menon menO
en en
Prep
one-REMAINING remaining
IN
esteem glory oun oun

Conj
3:12 econtes
echO
toiauthn elpida toioutos elpis

pd Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
pollh polus
a_ Dat Sg f
parrhsia crwmeqa parrhEsia chraomai

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
12 . Seeing then that we have such hope, we use great plainness of speech:
HAVING
THEN such
EXPECTATION much
boldness
WE-ARE-USING
3:13 kai ou
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
kaqaper kathaper
Adv
mwushs mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
etiqei tithEmi
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kalumma kalumma
n_ Acc Sg n
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon prosOpon
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
NOT
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN MOSES even-as to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
PLACED he-placed tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
COVER-effect ON covering uious huios

n_ Acc Pl m
THE
face
13 And not as Moses, [which] put a vail over his face, that the children of Israel could not stedfastly look to the end of that which is abolished:
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
mh mE
Part Neg
atenisai atenizO
vn Aor Act
israhl israEl
ni proper
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
OF-him
TOWARD THE
NO
TO-STRETCH THE to-look-intently
SONS
of-ISRAEL INTO THE of-Israel
FINISH consummation
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
katargoumenou katargeO
vp Pres Pas Gen Sg n
OF-THE
beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED vanishing ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
3:14 alla epwrwqh

alla
Conj
pOroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
nohmata noEma
n_ Nom Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
acri gar ths achri gar ho

Prep Conj t_ Gen Sg f
shmeron hmeras sEmeron hEmera

Adv n_ Gen Sg f
but
WAS-CALLOUSED THE
MINDS OF-them apprehensions
UNTIL for
THE
toDAY
DAY
14 But their minds were blinded: for until this day remaineth the same vail untaken away in the reading of the old testament; which [vail]
AV
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
auto autos
pp Nom Sg n
kalumma kalumma
n_ Nom Sg n
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
anagnwsei ths anagnOsis ho

palaias diaqhkhs palaios diathEkE

is done away in Christ.
THE
SAME
COVER-effect ON covering
THE
reading
OF-THE
OLD
covenant
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
anakaluptomenon oti en anakaluptO hoti en

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Conj Prep
cristw katargeitai christos katargeO

n_ Dat Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
IS-REMAINING NO
beING-UP-COVERED being-uncovered
that
IN
ANOINTED Christ
it-IS-beING-DOWN-UN-ACTED it-is-vanishing kalumma kalumma

n_ Nom Sg n
3:15 all ews shmeron hnika

alla
Conj
heOs
Conj
sEmeron
Adv
hEnika
Adv
an an
Part
anaginwskhtai mwushs anaginOskO mOusEs

vs Pres Pas 3 Sg n_ Nom Sg m
epi thn epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Sg f
15 But even unto this day, when Moses is read, the vail is upon their heart.
but
TILL
toDAY
IF-EVER-REACH EVER MAY-BE-beING-read
MOSES
COVER-effect ON covering
THE
kardian autwn kardia autos

keitai keimai
HEART
OF-them
IS-LYING
3:16 hnika
hEnika
Adv
de de
Conj
ean ean
Cond
epistreyh epistrephO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
periaireitai periaireO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
16 Nevertheless when it shall turn to the Lord, the vail shall be taken away.
IF-EVER-REACH YET IF-EVER it-SHOULD-BE-ON-TURNING TOWARD Master it-should-be-turning-back Lord to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
IS-beING-ABOUT-LIFTED is-being-taken-from-about-it
kalumma kalumma
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
COVER-effect covering de de
Conj
3:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ou hou
Adv
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
17 Now the Lord is that Spirit: and where the Spirit of the Lord [is], there [is] liberty.
THE
YET Master Lord eleuqeria eleutheria

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
spirit
IS
where YET THE
spirit
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-Master of-Lord
FREEdom
3:18 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
anakekalummenw anakaluptO
vp Perf Pas Dat Sg n
proswpw thn prosOpon ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg f
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
WE
YET ALL
to-HAVING-been-UP-COVERED face to-uncovered authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
THE
esteem glory apo apo

Prep
OF-Master of-Lord eis eis

Prep
katoptrizomenoi thn katoptrizO ho

vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
eikona metamorfoumeqa eikOn metamorphoO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
18 But we all, with open face beholding as in a glass the glory of the Lord, are changed into the same image from glory to glory, [even] as by the Spirit of the Lord.
DOWN-VIEWING mirroring doxan doxa

n_ Acc Sg f
THE into-the
SAME
image
WE-ARE-beING-after-FORMED FROM esteem are-being-transformed glory
INTO
kaqaper kathaper
Adv
apo apo
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
esteem glory
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN FROM Master even-as Lord
spirit
AV
2Corinthians 4
4:1 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
econtes echO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn kaqws houtos kathOs

pd Acc Sg f Adv
hlehqhmen eleaO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
. Therefore seeing we have this ministry, as we have received mercy, we faint not;
THRU this because-of ouk ou

Part Neg
HAVING
THE
THRU-SERVice this dispensation
according-AS WE-WERE-MERCIED we-were-shown-mercy
egkakoumen egkakeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
NOT
WE-ARE-IN-EVILING we-are-being-despondent krupta kruptos

a_ Acc Pl n
4:2 alla apeipameqa ta

alla
Conj
apeipon
vi 2Aor Mid 1 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
aiscunhs mh aischunE mE
peripatountes en peripateO en
but
WE-FROM-say we-spurn
THE
HIDDen OF-THE hidden-things ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
VILEness shame tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
NO
ABOUT-TREADING walking alla th alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg f
IN
panourgia mhde panourgia mEde

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
dolountes doloO
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
NO-YET FRAUDING nor-yet adulterating
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
but
to-THE
But have renounced the hidden things of dishonesty, not walking in craftiness, nor handling the word of God deceitfully; but by manifestation of the truth commending ourselves to every man's conscience in the sight of God.
fanerwsei ths phanerOsis ho

alhqeias sunistanontes alEtheia sunistEmi

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
eautous pros heautou pros

pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
APPEARing manifestation
OF-THE
TRUTH
TOGETHER-STANDING-UP selves commending ourselves qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
TOWARD EVERY
conscience
anqrwpwn enwpion tou anthrOpos enOpion ho

n_ Gen Pl m Adv t_ Gen Sg m
OF-humans
IN-VIEW in-sight-of de de
Conj
OF-THE the
God
4:3 ei
ei
Cond
kai estin kai eimi

kekalummenon kaluptO
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
n_ Nom Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
But if our gospel be hid, it is hid to them that are lost:
IF
YET AND also
IS
HAVING-been-COVERED THE covered kekalummenon kaluptO

WELL-MESSAGE OF-US
IN
THE
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ones-beING-destroyED it-IS ones-perishing
HAVING-been-COVERED covered qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
4:4 en
en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
toutou etuflwsen ta houtos tuphloO ho

pd Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl n
IN
WHOM whom(p) twn ho
THE
god
OF-THE
eon
this
BLINDS
THE
nohmata noEma
n_ Acc Pl n
apistwn apistos
a_ Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
augasai augazO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
fwtismon tou phOtismos ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg n
In whom the god of this world hath blinded the minds of them which believe not, lest the light of the glorious gospel of Christ, who is the image of God, should shine unto them.
t_ Gen Pl m
MINDS OF-THE apprehensions euaggeliou ths euaggelion ho

n_ Gen Sg n
UN-BELIEVing INTO THE unbelieving doxhs doxa

n_ Gen Sg f
NO
TO-be-RADIANT THE to-irradiate-them estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
LIGHTing illumination eikwn eikOn

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou os christos hos

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
WHO
IS
image
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
WH WH NA NA
4:5 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar eautous khrussomen gar heautou kErussO

Conj pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
alla alla
Conj
criston ihsoun
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOT
for
selves ourselves
WE-ARE-PROCLAIMING but we-are-heralding doulous umwn doulos humeis

JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
For we preach not ourselves, but Christ Jesus the Lord; and ourselves your servants for Jesus'sake.
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
eautous de heautou de
pf 3 Acc Pl m Conj
dia dia
Prep
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
Master Lord
selves ourselves
YET SLAVES
OF-YOU(p) THRU JESUS of-ye because-of eipwn legO

4:6 oti o
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
skotous skotos
n_ Gen Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Acc Sg n
lamyei lampO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
that
THE
God
THE
One-sayING one-saying
OUT OF-DARKness LIGHT
SHALL-BE-SHINING
For God, who commanded the light to shine out of darkness, hath shined in our hearts, to [give] the light of the knowledge of the glory of God
AV
2Corinthians 4
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
elamyen lampO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

pros pros
Prep
fwtismon ths phOtismos ho

gnwsews gnOsis
n_ Gen Sg f
in the face of Jesus Christ.
WHO
SHINES
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-US
TOWARD LIGHTing illumination

NA
OF-THE
KNOWledge
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
proswpw prosOpon
n_ Dat Sg n
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
God
IN
face
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
7
4:7 ecomen
echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qhsauron thEsauros
n_ Acc Sg m
touton en houtos en
pd Acc Sg m Prep
ostrakinois skeuesin ostrakinos skeuos

WE-ARE-HAVING YET THE
PLACED-INTO-MORROW this treasure dunamews h dunamis eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
IN
EARTHENWARE earthen qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
INSTRUMENTS vessels kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
But we have this treasure in earthen vessels, that the excellency of the power may be of God, and not of us.
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
uperbolh ths huperbolE ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ex ek
Prep
THAT THE
OVER-CAST OF-THE transcendence
ABILITY power
MAY-BE
OF-THE
God
AND
NO
OUT
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-US
4:8 en
en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
qlibomenoi thlibO
all ou alla ou
Conj Part Neg
stenocwroumenoi aporoumenoi stenochOreO aporeO

vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
IN
EVERY everything
beING-CONSTRICTED but being-afflicted
NOT
beING-CRAMP-SPACED being-distressed
beING-perplexED
but
NOT
. [We are] troubled on every side, yet not distressed; [we are] perplexed, but not in despair;
exaporoumenoi exaporeomai
beING-OUT-perplexED despairing
4:9 diwkomenoi
diOkO
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
egkataleipomenoi kataballomenoi all ouk egkataleipO kataballO alla ou

vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg
Persecuted, but not forsaken; cast down, but not destroyed;
beING-CHASED being-persecuted apollumenoi apollumi

vp Pres mid/pas Nom Pl m
but
NOT
beING-abandonED being-forsaken
beING-DOWN-CAST being-cast-down
but
NOT
beING-destroyED perishing
4:10 pantote thn

pantote
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
nekrwsin tou nekrOsis ho

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati periferontes sOma peripherO

always
THE
DEADening
OF-THE
JESUS
IN
THE
BODY
ABOUT-CARRYING carrying-about
10 Always bearing about in the body the dying of the Lord Jesus, that the life also of Jesus might be made manifest in our body.
ina hina
Conj
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati hmwn sOma hemeis

THAT AND also
THE
LIFE
OF-THE
JESUS
IN
THE
BODY
OF-US
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR may-be-being-manifested
4:11 aei gar hmeis

aei
Adv
gar
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
zwntes zaO
eis eis
Prep
qanaton paradidomeqa thanatos paradidOmi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres Pas 1 Pl
dia dia
Prep
ever
for
WE
THE
LIVING ones-living zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
INTO DEATH
ARE-beING-BESIDE-GIVEN THRU are-being-given-up because-of en en

Prep
11 For we which live are alway delivered unto death for Jesus'sake, that the life also of Jesus might be made manifest in our mortal flesh.
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
fanerwqh phaneroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
JESUS
THAT AND also sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
THE
LIFE
OF-THE
JESUS
MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR IN may-be-being-manifested
THE
qnhth thnEtos
a_ Dat Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
DYing mortal
FLESH
OF-US
AV
4:12 wste
hOste
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qanatos en thanatos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
energeitai h energeO ho
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
12 So then death worketh in us, but life in you.
DEATH
IN
US
IS-IN-ACTING is-operating
THE
YET LIFE
IN
YOU(p) ye
13 We having the same spirit of faith, according as it is written, I believed, and therefore have I spoken; we also believe, and therefore speak;
4:13 econtes
echO
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
pneuma ths pneuma ho

pistews kata pistis kata

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
HAVING
YET THE
SAME
spirit
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
according-to THE in-accord-with pisteuomen dio pisteuO dio

gegrammenon graphO
episteusa dio pisteuO dio

elalhsa laleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
HAVING-been-WRITTEN I-BELIEVE
THRU-WHICH I-TALK wherefore I-speak
AND also
WE
ARE-BELIEVING
THRU-WHICH wherefore
kai laloumen kai laleO

AND also
WE-ARE-TALKING we-are-speaking oti o hoti ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
4:14 eidotes
eidO
egeiras egeirO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
WH
kurion
NA
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware kai hmas kai hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Acc Pl
THE
One-ROUSing one-rousing egerei egeirO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
THE
Master Lord sun sun

Prep
JESUS
14 Knowing that he which raised up the Lord Jesus shall raise up us also by Jesus, and shall present [us] with you.
sun sun
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai parasthsei kai paristEmi

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
AND also
US
TOGETHER to-JESUS togetherwith Jesus gar panta gar pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
SHALL-BE-ROUSING AND
SHALL-BE-BESIDE-STANDING TOGETHER to-YOU(p) togetherwith shall-be-presenting-us ye caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
4:15 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pleonasasa dia pleonazO dia

vp Aor Act Nom Sg f Prep
THE
for
ALL
THAT THE
grace
MORE-izing increasing thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
THRU through tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
15 For all things [are] for your sakes, that the abundant grace might through the thanksgiving of many redound to the glory of God.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
pleionwn polus
a_ Gen Pl n Cmp
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eucaristian perisseush eucharistia perisseuO

n_ Acc Sg f vs Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
MORE majority
THE
SHOULD-BE-exceedING INTO THE should-be-superabounding
esteem glory
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
4:16 dio
dio
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
egkakoumen egkakeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
all ei alla ei
Conj Cond
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
exw exO
Adv
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
THRU-WHICH NOT wherefore diafqeiretai diaphtheirO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
WE-ARE-IN-EVILING but we-are-being-despondent all alla

Conj
IF
AND THE even
OUT OF-US outward hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
human
16 For which cause we faint not; but though our outward man perish, yet the inward [man] is renewed day by day.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
esw hmwn esO hemeis

Adv pp 1 Gen Pl
anakainoutai anakainoO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
kai hmera kai hEmera

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
IS-beING-THRU-CORRUPTED but THE is-decaying nevertheless
within
OF-US us
IS-beING-UP-NEW-ED DAY is-being-renewed

NA
AND
DAY
4:17 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar parautika elafron ths gar parautika elaphros ho

Conj Adv a_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
qliyews thlipsis
n_ Gen Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kaq kata
Prep
THE
for
momentary
LIGHT lightness
OF-THE
CONSTRICTION affliction doxhs doxa

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-US
according-to
17 For our light affliction, which is but for a moment, worketh for us a far more exceeding [and] eternal weight of glory;
uperbolhn eis huperbolE eis

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
uperbolhn aiwnion baros huperbolE aiOnios baros

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg n n_ Acc Sg n
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
OVER-CAST transcendence
INTO OVER-CAST transcendence
eonian
HEAVY burden ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-esteem IS-DOWN-ACTING of-glory is-producing alla ta alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
to-US
4:18 mh
mE
Part Neg
skopountwn hmwn skopeO hemeis

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m pp 1 Gen Pl
blepomena blepO
mh mE
Part Neg
blepomena blepO
NO
NOTING of-noting gar blepomena gar blepO

Conj
OF-US
THE the(p)
beING-lookED being-observed ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
but
THE the(p)
NO
beING-lookED being-observed aiwnia aiOnios

a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
proskaira proskairos
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
blepomena blepO
18 While we look not at the things which are seen, but at the things which are not seen: for the things which are seen [are] temporal; but the things which are not seen [are] eternal.
THE the(p)
for
beING-lookED being-observed
TOWARD-SEASONS THE temporary the(p)
YET NO
beING-lookED being-observed
eonian
AV
2Corinthians 5
5:1 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
gar oti ean gar hoti ean

Conj Conj Cond
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epigeios hmwn epigeios hemeis

a_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Pl
oikia oikia
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
skhnous skEnos
n_ Gen Sg n
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for we-are-aware kataluqh kataluO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
that
IF-EVER THE
ON-LAND terrestrial qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-US
HOME house oikian oikia

n_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
BOOTH tabernacle
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ek ek
Prep
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
aceiropoihton acheiropoiEtos
a_ Acc Sg f
. For we know that if our earthly house of [this] tabernacle were dissolved, we have a building of God, an house not made with hands, eternal in the heavens.
MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-LOOSED HOME-BUILDing OUT OF-God may-be-being-demolished building aiwnion en aiOnios en

a_ Acc Sg f Prep
WE-ARE-HAVING HOME house
UN-HAND-made not-made-by-hands
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
eonian
IN
THE
heavens
5:2 kai gar en

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
en
Prep
toutw stenazomen houtos stenazO

pd Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
oikhthrion hmwn oikEtErion hemeis

n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ex ek
Prep
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND also
for
IN
this
WE-ARE-groanING THE
HOME-place habitation
OF-US
THE
OUT OF-heaven
For in this we groan, earnestly desiring to be clothed upon with our house which is from heaven:
ependusasqai ependuO
vn Aor Mid
epipoqountes epipotheO
TO-be-ON-IN-SLIPPED ON-LONGING to-be-dressed-with longing
5:3 ei
ei
Cond
ge ge
Part
kai kai
Conj
WH
endusamenoi
NA
ekdusamenoi ekduO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
gumnoi gumnos
a_ Nom Pl m
eureqhsomeqa heuriskO
vi Fut Pas 1 Pl
If so be that being clothed we shall not be found naked.
IF
SURELY AND also ontes eimi

OUT-SLIPPing stripping en en
Prep
NOT
NAKED
WE-SHALL-BE-BEING-FOUND
5:4 kai gar oi

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
skhnei skEnos
n_ Dat Sg n
stenazomen baroumenoi stenazO bareO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
ef epi
Prep
AND also w hos

pr Dat Sg n
for
THE
IN
THE
BOOTH tabernacle
ARE-groanING we-are-groaning ina hina

Conj
beING-HEAVIED being-burdened
ON
ou ou
Part Neg
qelomen thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ekdusasqai ekduO
vn Aor Mid
all ependusasqai alla ependuO

Conj vn Aor Mid
For we that are in [this] tabernacle do groan, being burdened: not for that we would be unclothed, but clothed upon, that mortality might be swallowed up of life.
WHICH
NOT
WE-ARE-WILLING TO-be-OUT-SLIPPED but to-be-stripped to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
TO-be-ON-IN-SLIPPED THAT to-be-dressed zwhs zOE

n_ Gen Sg f
katapoqh katapinO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
qnhton thnEtos
a_ Nom Sg n
upo ths hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-DRUNK THE may-be-being-swallowed-up
DYing mortal
by
THE
LIFE
5:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
katergasamenos hmas katergazomai hEmeis

vp Aor midD Nom Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
YET One-DOWN-ACTing one-producing hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
US
INTO SAME
this
God
THE
Now he that hath wrought us for the selfsame thing [is] God, who also hath given unto us the earnest of the Spirit.
dous didOmi
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
arrabwna tou arrhabOn ho

n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
to-US us oun oun

Conj
THE
EARNEST
OF-THE
spirit
5:6 qarrountes
tharrheO
pantote kai eidotes pantote kai eidO

Adv Conj vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
oti endhmountes en hoti endEmeO en

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
havING-COURAGE
THEN always
AND
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
IN-PUBLIC-ING being-at-home
IN
THE
Therefore [we are] always confident, knowing that, whilst we are at home in the body, we are absent from the Lord:
swmati ekdhmoumen sOma ekdEmeO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Pl
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
BODY
WE-ARE-OUT-PUBLIC-ING FROM THE we-are-being-away-from-home pistews gar peripatoumen pistis gar peripateO
n_ Gen Sg f Conj vi Pres Act 1 Pl
Master Lord ou ou
Part Neg
5:7 dia
dia
Prep
dia dia
Prep
eidous eidos
n_ Gen Sg n
(For we walk by faith, not by sight:)
THRU BELIEF through faith
for
WE-ARE-ABOUT-TREADING NOT we-are-walking de de

Conj
THRU PERCEPtion through mallon ekdhmhsai mallon ekdEmeO

Adv vn Aor Act
5:8 qarroumen
tharrheO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai eudokoumen kai eudokeO

ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
WE-ARE-havING-COURAGE YET AND
WE-ARE-WELL-SEEMING RATHER are-delighting
TO-OUT-PUBLIC OUT OF-THE to-be-away-from-home
We are confident, [I say], and willing rather to be absent from the body, and to be present with the Lord.
AV
2Corinthians 5
swmatos kai endhmhsai pros sOma kai endEmeO pros

n_ Gen Sg n Conj vn Aor Act Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
BODY
AND
TO-IN-PUBLIC to-be-at-home
TOWARD THE
Master Lord endhmountes eite endEmeO eite

5:9 dio
dio
Conj
kai filotimoumeqa kai philotimeomai

eite eite
Conj
ekdhmountes ekdEmeO
Wherefore we labour, that, whether present or absent, we may be accepted of him.
THRU-WHICH AND wherefore also euarestoi euarestos

a_ Nom Pl m
WE-ARE-beING-ambitious IF-BESIDES IN-PUBLIC-ING whether being-at-home einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
IF-BESIDES OUT-PUBLIC-ING or being-away-from-home
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WELL-PLEASing to-Him
TO-BE
5:10 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
gar pantas hmas gar pas hEmeis

Conj a_ Acc Pl m pp 1 Acc Pl
fanerwqhnai phaneroO
vn Aor Pas
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
THE
for
ALL
US
TO-BE-made-APPEAR it-IS-BINDING to-be-manifested must komishtai komizO

vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the dia dia

Prep
bhmatos tou bEma ho

cristou ina christos hina

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
ekastos ta hekastos ho
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
10 For we must all appear before the judgment seat of Christ; that every one may receive the things [done] in [his] body, according to that he hath done, whether [it be] good or bad.
platform dais
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ a hos

pr Acc Pl n
THAT SHOULD-BE-beING-requitED EACH
THE the(p)
THRU THE through
swmatos pros sOma pros

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
epraxen prassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eite eite
Conj
agaqon eite agathos eite

a_ Acc Sg n Conj
faulon phaulos
a_ Acc Sg n
BODY
TOWARD WHICH which(p) oun oun

Conj
it-PRACTISES IF-BESIDES GOOD he-practises whether ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IF-BESIDES FOUL or bad kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
5:11 eidotes
eidO
fobon phobos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpous peiqomen anthrOpos peithO

n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
HAVING-PERCEIVED THEN THE being-aware of-the qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
FEAR
OF-THE
Master Lord de de
Conj
humans
WE-ARE-PERSUADING
de de
Conj
pefanerwmeqa phaneroO
vi Perf Pas 1 Pl
elpizw elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
suneidhsesin suneidEsis
n_ Dat Pl f
11 Knowing therefore the terror of the Lord, we persuade men; but we are made manifest unto God; and I trust also are made manifest in your consciences.
to-God
YET WE-HAVE-been-made-APPEAR I-AM-EXPECTING YET AND we-have-been-made-manifest also pefanerwsqai phaneroO

vn Perf Pas
IN
THE
consciences
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) TO-HAVE-been-made-APPEAR of-ye to-have-been-made-manifest
5:12 ou
ou
Part Neg
palin eautous sunistanomen palin heautou sunistEmi

Adv pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
alla aformhn alla aphormE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
NOT
AGAIN
selves ourselves
WE-ARE-TOGETHER-STANDING-UP to-YOU(p) we-are-commending to-ye ina hina

Conj
but
FROM-RUSH incentive pros pros

Prep
didontes didOmi
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kauchmatos uper hmwn kauchEma huper hemeis

n_ Gen Sg n Prep pp 1 Gen Pl
echte echO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
12 . For we commend not ourselves again unto you, but give you occasion to glory on our behalf, that ye may have somewhat to [answer] them which glory in appearance, and not in heart.
GIVING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
OF-BOAST
OVER
US
THAT YE-MAY-BE-HAVING TOWARD THE-ones the-ones kardia kardia

n_ Dat Sg f
IN
proswpw kaucwmenous prosOpon kauchaomai

n_ Dat Sg n vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
en en
Prep
face
BOASTING
AND
NO
IN
HEART
5:13 eite
eite
Conj
gar exesthmen gar existEmi

qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
eite eite
Conj
swfronoumen sOphroneO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
IF-BESIDES for whether
WE-WERE-OUT-STOOD to-God we-were-beside-ourselves tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IF-BESIDES WE-ARE-beING-sane to-YOU(p) whether to-ye hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
13 For whether we be beside ourselves, [it is] to God: or whether we be sober, [it is] for your cause.
5:14 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar agaph gar agapE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
cristou sunecei christos sunechO

krinantas krinO
vp Aor Act Acc Pl m
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
THE
for
LOVE
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
IS-pressING is-constraining
US
JUDGing
this
that
14 For the love of Christ constraineth us; because we thus judge, that if one died for all, then were all dead:
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
uper huper
Prep
pantwn apeqanen ara pas apothnEskO ara

a_ Gen Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Part
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
apeqanon apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
ONE
OVER ALL for-the-sake-of
FROM-DIED died
CONSEQUENTLY THE
ALL
FROM-DIED died
AV
5:15 kai uper

kai
Conj
huper
Prep
pantwn apeqanen pas apothnEskO

ina hina
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
zwntes zaO
mhketi mEketi
Adv
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
AND
OVER ALL for-the-sake-of alla tw alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg m
He-FROM-DIED THAT THE he-died uper huper

Prep
ones-LIVING ones-living apoqanonti apothnEskO

NO-NOT-STILL to-selves by-no-means-still to-themselves kai egerqenti kai egeirO

Conj vp Aor Pas Dat Sg m
zwsin zaO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
15 And [that] he died for all, that they which live should not henceforth live unto themselves, but unto him which died for them, and rose again.
SHOULD-BE-LIVING but
to-THE-One OVER them to-the-one for-the-sake-of apo apo

Prep
FROM-DYING dying oidamen eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Pl
AND
BEING-ROUSED
5:16 wste
hOste
Conj
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nun oudena nun oudeis

Adv a_ Acc Sg m
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
ei ei
Cond
AS-BESIDES WE so-that kai egnwkamen kai ginOskO

FROM THE
NOW NOT-YET-ONE HAVE-PERCEIVED according-to FLESH no-one are-acquainted-with criston alla christos alla
n_ Acc Sg m Conj
IF
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
nun ouketi nun ouketi

Adv Adv
ginwskomen ginOskO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
16 . Wherefore henceforth know we no man after the flesh: yea, though we have known Christ after the flesh, yet now henceforth know we [him] no more.
AND WE-HAVE-KNOWN according-to FLESH even
ANOINTED Christ
but NOW NOT-STILL WE-ARE-KNOWING nevertheless not-longer we-are-knowing-him ktisis ktisis

n_ Nom Sg f
5:17 wste
hOste
Conj
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
cristw kainh christos kainos

n_ Dat Sg m a_ Nom Sg f
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
arcaia archaios
a_ Nom Pl n
parhlqen parerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
AS-BESIDES IF so-that idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
ANY anyone
IN
ANOINTED Christ
NEW
CREATION THE
ORIGINals primitive(p)
BESIDE-CAME passed-by
17 Therefore if any man [be] in Christ, [he is] a new creature: old things are passed away; behold, all things are become new.
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
kaina kainos
a_ Nom Pl n
BE-PERCEIVING it-HAS-BECOME NEW lo ! has-become new(p)
5:18 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
katallaxantos hmas katallassO hEmeis

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m pp 1 Acc Pl
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
THE
YET ALL
OUT OF-THE
God
THE
One-conciliating one-conciliating ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
US
to-Self to-himself
18 And all things [are] of God, who hath reconciled us to himself by Jesus Christ, and hath given to us the ministry of reconciliation;
dia dia
Prep
cristou kai dontos christos kai didOmi

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
katallaghs katallagE
n_ Gen Sg f
THRU ANOINTED through Christ
AND
GIVING
to-US us en en
Prep
THE
conciliation
5:19 ws oti qeos

hOs
Adv
hoti
Conj
theos
n_ Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
cristw kosmon christos kosmos

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
katallasswn eautw katallassO heautou

vp Pres Act Nom Sg m pf 3 Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
AS how
that
God
WAS
IN
ANOINTED Christ
SYSTEM world
conciliatING
to-Self to-himself
NO
logizomenos logizomai
autois ta autos ho
pp Dat Pl m t_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata autwn paraptOma autos

kai qemenos kai tithEmi

Conj vp 2Aor Mid Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
19 To wit, that God was in Christ, reconciling the world unto himself, not imputing their trespasses unto them; and hath committed unto us the word of reconciliation.
accountING reckoning ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
to-them
THE
OF-them
AND
beING-PLACED placing
IN
US
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
katallaghs katallagE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
saying word
OF-THE
conciliation
5:20 uper
huper
Prep
cristou oun christos oun

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
presbeuomen presbeuO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ws tou hOs ho
Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
parakalountos parakaleO
OVER ANOINTED for-the-sake-of Christ di dia

Prep
THEN WE-ARE-embassy-ING AS we-are-being-ambassadors uper huper

Prep
OF-THE
God
BESIDE-CALLING entreating tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
20 Now then we are ambassadors for Christ, as though God did beseech [you] by us: we pray [you] in Christ's stead, be ye reconciled to God.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
deomeqa deomai
cristou katallaghte christos katallassO

n_ Gen Sg m vm 2Aor Pas 2 Pl
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
THRU US through
WE-ARE-beseechING OVER ANOINTED for-the-sake-of Christ mh mE

Part Neg
BE-BEING-conciliatED to-THE be-ye-being-conciliated ! hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
God
5:21 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
gnonta ginOskO
amartian uper hamartia huper

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
amartian epoihsen ina hamartia poieO hina

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj
THE-One the-one hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
NO
KNOWING
missing sin
OVER US for-the-sake-of en en
Prep
missing sin
DOES he-makes
THAT
21 For he hath made him [to be] sin for us, who knew no sin; that we might be made the righteousness of God in him.
genwmeqa ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 1 Pl
dikaiosunh qeou dikaiosunE theos

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
WE
MAY-BE-BECOMING JUSTice righteousness
OF-God
IN
Him
AV
2Corinthians 6
6:1 sunergountes de
sunergeO
de
Conj
kai parakaloumen kai parakaleO

mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg n
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
TOGETHER-ACTING working-together tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
YET AND also
WE-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING NO we-are-entreating
INTO EMPTY for-naught
THE
grace
. We then, [as] workers together [with him], beseech [you] also that ye receive not the grace of God in vain.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dexasqai umas dechomai humeis

vn Aor midD pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE
God
TO-RECEIVE
YOU(p) ye dektw dektos

a_ Dat Sg m
6:2 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar kairw gar kairos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
ephkousa sou epakouO su

vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp 2 Gen Sg
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
swthrias sOtEria
n_ Gen Sg f
He-IS-sayING
for
to-SEASON RECEIVable I-ON-HEAR acceptable I-reply idou idou

vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
OF-YOU to-you
AND
IN
DAY
OF-SAVing of-salvation nun nun

Adv
ebohqhsa soi boEtheO su

nun kairos nun kairos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
a_ Nom Sg m
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
(For he saith, I have heard thee in a time accepted, and in the day of salvation have I succoured thee: behold, now [is] the accepted time; behold, now [is] the day of salvation.)
I-help
to-YOU you swthrias sOtEria

n_ Gen Sg f
BE-PERCEIVING NOW SEASON lo ! era
WELL-TOWARD-RECEIVED BE-PERCEIVING NOW most-acceptable lo !
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
DAY
OF-SAVing of-salvation mhdeni mEdeis

a_ Dat Sg n
6:3 mhdemian en
mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg f
en
Prep
didontes didOmi
proskophn proskopE
n_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
mwmhqh mOmaomai
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
Giving no offence in any thing, that the ministry be not blamed:
NO-YET-ONE no-one h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
IN
NO-YET-ONE GIVING anything
TOWARD-STRIKE THAT NO cause-to-stumble
MAY-BE-BEING-FLAWED may-be-being-found-flaws-with
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
THRU-SERVice service panti pas

a_ Dat Sg n
WH
6:4 all en
alla
Conj
sunistanontes
NA
en
Prep
sunistantes sunistEmi
eautous ws qeou heautou hOs theos

pf 3 Acc Pl m Adv n_ Gen Sg m
but
IN
EVERY everything en en
Prep
TOGETHER-STANDING commending pollh polus

a_ Dat Sg f
selves ourselves
AS
OF-God
But in all [things] approving ourselves as the ministers of God, in much patience, in afflictions, in necessities, in distresses,
diakonoi diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
qliyesin thlipsis
n_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep
anagkais en anagkE en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
stenocwriais stenochOria
n_ Dat Pl f
THRU-SERVitors IN servants
UNDER-REMAINing much endurance fulakais phulakE

n_ Dat Pl f
IN
CONSTRICTIONS IN afflictions
necessities
IN
CRAMP-SPACES distresses
5
6:5 en
en
Prep
plhgais en plEgE en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
en en
Prep
akatastasiais en akatastasia en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
kopois en kopos en
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
agrupniais en agrupnia en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
In stripes, in imprisonments, in tumults, in labours, in watchings, in fastings;
IN
BLOWS
IN
GUARDhouses IN jails
UN-DOWN-STANDings IN turbulences
toils
IN
vigils
IN
nhsteiais nEsteia
n_ Dat Pl f
fasts
6:6 en
en
Prep
agnothti en hagnotEs en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
gnwsei gnOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
makroqumia en makrothumia en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
crhstothti en chrEstotEs en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep

IN
PUREness
IN
KNOWledge IN
IN
kindness
IN
spirit
HOLY
By pureness, by knowledge, by longsuffering, by kindness, by the Holy Ghost, by love unfeigned,
en en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
anupokritw anupokritos
a_ Dat Sg f
IN
LOVE
UN-hypocritical unfeigned alhqeias en alEtheia en

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
6:7 en
en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
dunamei qeou dunamis theos

dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
oplwn hoplon
n_ Gen Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IN
saying word
OF-TRUTH
IN
ABILITY power
OF-God
THRU THE through
IMPLEMENTS OF-THE
By the word of truth, by the power of God, by the armour of righteousness on the right hand and on the left,
dikaiosunhs twn dikaiosunE ho

dexiwn kai aristerwn dexios kai aristeros

a_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE
RIGHT right(p)
AND
best (left) of-left(p)
AV
2Corinthians 6
6:8 dia
dia
Prep
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
kai atimias dia kai atimia dia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f Prep
dusfhmias kai eufhmias dusphEmia kai euphEmia

ws planoi hOs planos

Adv a_ Nom Pl m
kai kai
Conj
By honour and dishonour, by evil report and good report: as deceivers, and [yet] true;
THRU esteem through glory alhqeis alEthEs

a_ Nom Pl m
AND
UN-VALUE dishonor
THRU ILL-AVERment through defamation
AND
WELL-AVERment AS renown
STRAYers deceivers
AND
TRUE
6:9 ws agnooumenoi
hOs
Adv
agnoeO
kai epiginwskomenoi ws apoqnhskontes kai idou kai epiginOskO hOs apothnEskO kai idou
Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AS
beING-UN-KNOWN being-unknown
AND
beING-ON-KNOWN being-recognized
AS
FROM-DYING dying
AND
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
As unknown, and [yet] well known; as dying, and, behold, we live; as chastened, and not killed;
zwmen zaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ws paideuomenoi kai mh hOs paideuO kai mE

Adv vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg
qanatoumenoi thanatoO
WE-ARE-LIVING AS
beING-disciplinED
AND
NO
beING-(caused-to)-DIE being-put-to-death ws ptwcoi pollous de hOs ptOchos polus de

Adv a_ Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Conj
6:10 ws lupoumenoi
hOs
Adv
lupeO
aei de aei de
Adv Conj
cairontes chairO
ploutizontes ploutizO
AS
beING-SORROWED ever sorrowing econtes echO

YET JOYING rejoicing kai panta kai pas

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
AS
POOR-ones poor
MANY
YET enRICHING
10 As sorrowful, yet alway rejoicing; as poor, yet making many rich; as having nothing, and [yet] possessing all things.
ws mhden hOs mEdeis

Adv a_ Acc Sg n
katecontes katechO
AS
NO-YET-ONE HAVING nothing stoma stoma

n_ Nom Sg n
AND
ALL
DOWN-HAVING retaining pros pros

Prep
6:11 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
anewgen anoigO
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
korinqioi korinthios
a_ Voc Pl m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
MOUTH
OF-US
HAS-UP-OPENED TOWARD YOU(p) is-open ye
11 . O [ye] Corinthians, our mouth is open unto you, our heart is enlarged.
CORINTHIANS THE Corinthians !
HEART
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
peplatuntai platunO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
OF-US
HAS-been-BROADenED
6:12 ou
ou
Part Neg
stenocwreisqe stenochOreO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
stenocwreisqe stenochOreO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
12 Ye are not straitened in us, but ye are straitened in your own bowels.
NOT
YE-ARE-beING-CRAMP-SPACED IN ye-are-being-distressed
US
YE-ARE-beING-CRAMP-SPACED YET IN ye-are-being-distressed
THE
splagcnois umwn splagchnon humeis

n_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Gen Pl
compassions
Conj
6:13 thn
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
antimisqian ws teknois legw antimisthia hOs teknon legO

n_ Acc Sg f Adv n_ Dat Pl n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
platunqhte platunO
vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
13 Now for a recompence in the same, (I speak as unto [my] children,) be ye also enlarged.
THE
YET SAME
INSTEAD-HIRE recompense
AS
to-offsprings to-children
I-AM-sayING BE-BEING-BROADENED AND I-am-saying-this be-ye-being-broadened ! also
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
YOU(p) ye
6:14 mh
mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
eterozugountes apistois heterozugeO apistos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
gar metoch gar metochE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
NO
DIFFERENT-YOKING being-diversely-yoked h E
Part
to-UN-BELIEVing-ones ANY to-unbelievers what ? pros pros

Prep
for
WITH-HAVing partnership
dikaiosunh kai anomia dikaiosunE kai anomia

tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
koinwnia fwti koinOnia phOs

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Dat Sg n
skotos skotos
n_ Acc Sg n
14 Be ye not unequally yoked together with unbelievers: for what fellowship hath righteousness with unrighteousness? and what communion hath light with darkness?
to-JUSTice to-righteousness
AND
UN-LAWness OR lawlessness sumfwnhsis sumphOnEsis

n_ Nom Sg f
ANY what ?
communion
to-LIGHT
TOWARD DARKness
6:15 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
beliar h beliar E
ni proper Part
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
meris meris
n_ Nom Sg f
ANY what ?
YET TOGETHER-SOUNDing OF-ANOINTED TOWARD BELIAR agreement of-Christ Belial
OR
ANY what ?
PART
15 And what concord hath Christ with Belial? or what part hath he that believeth with an infidel?
AV
pistw pistos
a_ Dat Sg m
meta apistou meta apistos

Prep a_ Gen Sg m
to-one-BELIEVing WITH to-believer
one-UN-BELIEVing unbeliever sugkataqesis sugkatathesis

n_ Nom Sg f
6:16 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
naw naos
n_ Dat Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
meta eidwlwn hmeis meta eidOlon hEmeis

Prep n_ Gen Pl n pp 1 Nom Pl
gar gar
Conj
ANY what ? naos naos

n_ Nom Sg m
YET TOGETHER-DOWN-PLACing to-TEMPLE OF-God concurrence qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
WITH
idols
WE
for
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
zwntos zaO
kaqws kathOs
Adv
eipen legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
oti hoti
Conj
16 And what agreement hath the temple of God with idols? for ye are the temple of the living God; as God hath said, I will dwell in them, and walk in [them]; and I will be their God, and they shall be my people.
TEMPLE
OF-God
ARE
LIVING
according-AS said
THE
God
that
enoikhsw enoikeO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
autois kai emperipathsw autos kai emperipateO

pp Dat Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kai esomai kai eimi

autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
I-SHALL-BE-IN-HOMING IN I-shall-be-making-my-home-in qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
them
AND
I-SHALL-BE-IN-ABOUT-TREADING AND I-shall-be-walking-among-them laos laos

n_ Nom Sg m
I-SHALL-BE
OF-them
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
esontai mou eimi egO

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl pp 1 Gen Sg
God
AND
they
SHALL-BE
OF-ME
PEOPLE
6:17 dio
dio
Conj
exelqate ek exerchomai ek
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai aforisqhte kai aphorizO

Conj vm Aor Pas 2 Pl
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
THRU-WHICH OUT-COME wherefore come-out-ye ! kai akaqartou mh kai akathartos mE

Conj a_ Gen Sg n Part Neg
OUT OF-MIDst
OF-them
AND
BE-BEING-FROM-definED IS-sayING be-ye-being-severed ! umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
Master Lord
17 Wherefore come out from among them, and be ye separate, saith the Lord, and touch not the unclean [thing]; and I will receive you,
aptesqe haptO
vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
eisdexomai eisdechomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
AND
OF-UN-clean unclean-thing
NO
BE-YE-TOUCHING AND-I be-ye-touching ! eis eis

Prep
SHALL-BE-INTO-RECEIVING YOU(p) shall-be-admitting ye esesqe eimi

vi Fut vxx 2 Pl
6:18 kai esomai

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
eis eis
Prep
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
AND
I-SHALL-BE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
INTO FATHER
AND
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE
to-ME
INTO SONS
AND
18 And will be a Father unto you, and ye shall be my sons and daughters, saith the Lord Almighty.
qugateras legei thugatEr legO

n_ Acc Pl f vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pantokratwr pantokratOr
n_ Nom Sg m
DAUGHTERS
IS-sayING
Master Lord
ALL-HOLDer Almighty
AV
2Corinthians 7
7:1 tautas oun

houtos
pd Acc Pl f
oun
Conj
econtes echO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
epaggelias agaphtoi kaqariswmen epaggelia agapEtos katharizO

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Voc Pl m vs Aor Act 1 Pl
these
THEN HAVING
THE
promises
WE-SHOULD-BE-cleansING
eautous apo heautou apo

pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
molusmou sarkos molusmos sarx

kai pneumatos epitelountes kai pneuma epiteleO

Conj n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
. Having therefore these promises, dearly beloved, let us cleanse ourselves from all filthiness of the flesh and spirit, perfecting holiness in the fear of God.
selves ourselves
FROM EVERY
POLLUTing pollution fobw phobos

n_ Dat Sg m
OF-FLESH AND
OF-spirit
ON-FINISHING completing
agiwsunhn hagiOsunE
n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
HOLY-TOGETHERness IN holiness
FEAR
OF-God
7:2 cwrhsate
chOreO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
oudena oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
hdikhsamen oudena adikeO oudeis

vi Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Sg m
efqeiramen oudena phtheirO oudeis

vi Aor Act 1 Pl a_ Acc Sg m
SPACE-YE US make-ye-room-for ! epleonekthsamen pleonekteO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
NOT-YET-ONE WE-injure no-one
NOT-YET-ONE WE-CORRUPT no-one
NOT-YET-ONE no-one
Receive us; we have wronged no man, we have corrupted no man, we have defrauded no man.
WE-MORE-HAVE we-overreach
7:3 pros
pros
Prep
katakrisin ou katakrisis ou
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
proeirhka proereO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
gar oti en gar hoti en

Conj Conj Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
TOWARD DOWN-JUDGing condemnation kardiais hmwn kardia hemeis

NOT
I-AM-sayING I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED for I-am-saying-this I-have-declared-before eis eis

Prep
that
IN
THE
I speak not [this] to condemn [you]: for I have said before, that ye are in our hearts to die and live with [you].
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sunapoqanein sunapothnEskO
vn 2Aor Act
kai suzhn kai suzaO

Conj vn Pres Act
HEARTS
OF-US
YE-ARE
INTO THE
TO-BE-TOGETHER-FROM-DYING AND to-be-dying-together umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
TO-BE-TOGETHER-LIVING to-be-living-together
4
7:4 pollh
polus
a_ Nom Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
parrhsia pros parrhEsia pros

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
pollh polus
a_ Nom Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kauchsis uper umwn kauchEsis huper humeis

n_ Nom Sg f Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
much
to-ME
boldness
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
much
to-ME
BOASTing
OVER
YOU(p) ye
Great [is] my boldness of speech toward you, great [is] my glorying of you: I am filled with comfort, I am exceeding joyful in all our tribulation.
peplhrwmai plEroO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paraklhsei uperperisseuomai paraklEsis huperperisseuO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cara chara
n_ Dat Sg f
epi pash epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Sg f
I-HAVE-been-FILLED to-THE I-have-been-filled-full th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
BESIDE-CALLing consolation hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
I-AM-beING-OVER-exceedED to-THE I-am-superexceeding
JOY
ON
EVERY all
qliyei thlipsis
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
CONSTRICTION OF-US affliction hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
7:5 kai gar elqontwn

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
erchomai
eis eis
Prep
makedonian oudemian makedonia oudeis

eschken echO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
anesin anesis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND for even h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
OF-COMING
OF-US
INTO MACEDONIA
NOT-YET-ONE HAS-HAD
UP-LETTing ease eswqen esOthen

Adv
. For, when we were come into Macedonia, our flesh had no rest, but we were troubled on every side; without [were] fightings, within [were] fears.
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
all en alla en
Conj Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
qlibomenoi thlibO
exwqen exOthen
Adv
macai machE
n_ Nom Pl f
THE
FLESH
OF-US
but
IN
EVERY everything
beING-CONSTRICTED OUT-PLACE FIGHTings INTO-PLACE being-afflicted outside inside
foboi phobos
n_ Nom Pl m
FEARS
7:6 all o
alla
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
parakalwn parakaleO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
tapeinous parekalesen hmas tapeinos parakaleO hEmeis

a_ Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
but
THE
One-BESIDE-CALLING THE one-consoling th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
LOW humble
BESIDE-CALLS consoles
US
THE
Nevertheless God, that comforteth those that are cast down, comforted us by the coming of Titus;
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
titou titos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
IN
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-TITUS presence
AV
2Corinthians 7
7:7 ou
ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
alla kai en alla kai en

Conj Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paraklhsei paraklEsis
n_ Dat Sg f
NOT
ONLY
YET IN
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-him presence umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
but
AND also
IN
THE
BESIDE-CALLing consolation epipoqhsin epipothEsis

n_ Acc Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
pareklhqh parakaleO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
anaggellwn anaggellO
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
And not by his coming only, but by the consolation wherewith he was comforted in you, when he told us your earnest desire, your mourning, your fervent mind toward me; so that I rejoiced the more.
to-WHICH he-WAS-BESIDE-CALLED ON YOU(p) onover ye he-was-consoled ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
UP-MESSAGING informing zhlon zElos

n_ Acc Sg m
to-US us uper huper

Prep
THE
OF-YOU(p) ON-LONGing of-ye longing wste hOste

Conj
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
odurmon ton odurmos ho

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
OF-YOU(p) PAIN-GUSH of-ye anguish
THE
OF-YOU(p) BOILing of-ye zeal
OVER ME for-the-sake-of
AS-BESIDES ME so-that
mallon carhnai mallon chairO

Adv vn 2Aor pasD
RATHER
TO-JOY to-rejoice kai eluphsa kai lupeO

7:8 oti ei
hoti
Conj
ei
Cond
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
epistolh ou epistolE ou
metamelomai metamelomai
ei ei
Cond
kai kai
Conj
that
IF
AND I-SORROW even I-make-sorry blepw blepO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
YOU(p) ye
NA
IN
THE
letter epistle
NOT
I-AM-after-CARING I-am-regretting-it ei ei
Cond
IF
AND even
metemelomhn metamelomai
gar gar
Conj
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
epistolh ekeinh epistolE ekeinos

kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
For though I made you sorry with a letter, I do not repent, though I did repent: for I perceive that the same epistle hath made you sorry, though [it were] but for a season.
I-after-CARED I-regretted wran hOra

n_ Acc Sg f
I-AM-lookING I-am-observing
for
that
THE
letter epistle
that
IF
AND TOWARD even
eluphsen umas lupeO humeis

HOUR
SORROWS makes-sorry
YOU(p) ye ouc ou
Part Neg
7:9 nun cairw

nun
Adv
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti eluphqhte hoti lupeO

all oti eluphqhte alla hoti lupeO

Conj Conj vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
NOW I-AM-JOYING I-am-rejoicing
NOT
that
YE-WERE-SORROWED but ye-were-made-sorry gar kata gar kata

Conj Prep
that
YE-WERE-SORROWED INTO ye-were-made-sorry en en

Prep
metanoian eluphqhte metanoia lupeO

qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg n
zhmiwqhte zEmioO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
Now I rejoice, not that ye were made sorry, but that ye sorrowed to repentance: for ye were made sorry after a godly manner, that ye might receive damage by us in nothing.
after-MIND repentance ex ek
Prep
YE-WERE-SORROWED for ye-were-made-sorry
according-to God
THAT IN
NO-YET-ONE YE-MAY-BE-BEING-FINED nothing ye-may-be-suffering-forfeit
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OUT OF-US
7:10 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar kata gar kata

Conj Prep
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
luph lupE
n_ Nom Sg f

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
swthrian ametamelhton sOtEria ametamelEtos

THE
for
according-to God
SORROW
after-MIND repentance luph lupE

n_ Nom Sg f
UN-after-CARED unregretted
10 For godly sorrow worketh repentance to salvation not to be repented of: but the sorrow of the world worketh death.
ergazetai ergazomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
qanaton katergazetai thanatos katergazomai

IS-ACTING is-working
THE
YET OF-THE
SYSTEM world to ho
SORROW
DEATH
IS-DOWN-ACTING is-producing luphqhnai lupeO

vn Aor Pas
7:11 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
gar auto gar autos

Conj pp Nom Sg n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
kata kata
Prep
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
poshn posos
pq Acc Sg f
t_ Nom Sg n
BE-PERCEIVING for lo ! kateirgasato umin katergazomai humeis

vi Aor midD 3 Sg
SAME same-thing
this
THE
according-to God
TO-BE-SORROWED how-much to-be-made-sorry
spoudhn alla apologian alla aganakthsin alla fobon spoudE alla apologia alla aganaktEsis alla phobos
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
pp 2 Dat Pl
it-DOWN-ACTS it-produces
to-YOU(p) to-ye
DILIGENCE
but butnay
FROM-say defense
but butnay
resenting
but butnay sunesthsate sunistEmi

vi Aor Act 2 Pl
FEAR
11 For behold this selfsame thing, that ye sorrowed after a godly sort, what carefulness it wrought in you, yea, [what] clearing of yourselves, yea, [what] indignation, yea, [what] fear, yea, [what] vehement desire, yea, [what] zeal, yea, [what] revenge! In all [things] ye have approved yourselves to be clear in this matter.
alla epipoqhsin alla zhlon alla epipothEsis alla zElos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
alla ekdikhsin en alla ekdikEsis en

panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
but butnay
ON-LONGing longing
but butnay
BOILing zeal
but butnay
IN
EVERY everything
YE-TOGETHER-STAND ye-commend
AV
eautous agnous einai heautou hagnos eimi

pf 3 Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pragmati pragma
n_ Dat Sg n
selves yourselves
PURE
TO-BE
to-THE
PRACTISE matter umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
7:12 ara
ara
Part
ei ei
Cond
kai egraya kai graphO

ouc ou
Part Neg
eneken heneken
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
adikhsantos adikeO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
CONSEQUENTLY IF
WH
AND I-WRITE even eneken heneken

Adv
to-YOU(p) to-ye
NOT
one-injuring one-injuring tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
all
oude oude
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
adikhqentos all eneken adikeO alla heneken

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg m Conj Adv
12 . Wherefore, though I wrote unto you, [I did it] not for his cause that had done the wrong, nor for his cause that suffered wrong, but that our care for you in the sight of God might appear unto you.
NOT-YET on-account-of OF-THE neither the fanerwqhnai phaneroO

vn Aor Pas
one-BEING-injurED one-being-injured thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
but
on-account-of OF-THE the hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
spoudhn umwn spoudE humeis

uper huper
Prep
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
TO-BE-made-APPEAR THE to-be-manifested enwpion tou enOpion ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
DILIGENCE
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-THE the
God
7:13 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
parakeklhmeqa parakaleO
vi Perf Pas 1 Pl
epi de epi de
Prep Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
paraklhsei hmwn paraklEsis hemeis

WE-HAVE-been-BESIDE-CALLED ON we-have-been-consoled epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
YET THE
OF-US
perissoterws mallon ecarhmen perissoterOs mallon chairO

Adv Adv vi 2Aor pasD 1 Pl
cara chara
n_ Dat Sg f
titou titos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti anapepautai hoti anapauO

13 Therefore we were comforted in your comfort: yea, and exceedingly the more joyed we for the joy of Titus, because his spirit was refreshed by you all.
more-exceedingly
RATHER
WE-JOYed we-rejoiced apo apo

Prep
ON
THE
JOY
OF-TITUS
that
HAS-been-UP-CEASED has-been-soothed
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m

THE
spirit
OF-him
FROM ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye kekauchmai kauchaomai

7:14 oti ei
hoti
Conj
ei
Cond
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m

Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
kathscunqhn kataischunO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
all alla
Conj
that
IF
ANY
to-him
OVER
YOU(p) ye
I-HAVE-BOASTED
NOT
I-WAS-DOWN-VILED but I-was-disgraced kauchsis hmwn kauchEsis hemeis

ws panta hOs pas

Adv a_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
alhqeia elalhsamen umin alEtheia laleO humeis

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
outws kai h houtOs kai ho

14 For if I have boasted any thing to him of you, I am not ashamed; but as we spake all things to you in truth, even so our boasting, which [I made] before Titus, is found a truth.
AS
ALL
NA
IN
TRUTH
WE-TALK we-speak
to-YOU(p) to-ye
thus
AND also
THE
BOASTing
OF-US
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epi titou epi titos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
alhqeia egenhqh alEtheia ginomai

n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
THE
ON
TITUS
TRUTH
WAS-BECOMED was-become perissoterws eis perissoterOs eis

Adv Prep
7:15 kai ta
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
splagcna autou splagchnon autos

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
AND
THE
compassions
OF-him
more-exceedingly more-superabundantly
INTO YOU(p) ye
IS
anamimnhskomenou anamimnEskO
vp Pres Mid Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

upakohn ws meta fobou hupakoE hOs meta phobos

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Prep n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
15 And his inward affection is more abundant toward you, whilst he remembereth the obedience of you all, how with fear and trembling ye received him.
OF-HAVING-been-UP-REMINDED THE having-a-recollection of-the tromou tromos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ALL
OF-YOU(p) obedience of-ye
AS
WITH
FEAR
AND
edexasqe auton dechomai autos

vi Aor midD 2 Pl pp Acc Sg m
TREMBLing YE-RECEIVE
him
7:16 cairw
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
qarrw tharrheO
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
that
IN
EVERY everything
I-AM-havING-COURAGE IN
YOU(p) ye
16 I rejoice therefore that I have confidence in you in all [things].
AV
2Corinthians 8
8:1 gnwrizomen
gnOrizO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
adelfoi thn adelphos ho

n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WE-ARE-KNOWizING YET to-YOU(p) we-are-making-known to-ye dedomenhn didOmi

brothers brethren !
THE
grace
OF-THE
God
THE
. Moreover, brethren, we do you to wit of the grace of God bestowed on the churches of Macedonia;
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
ekklhsiais ths ekklEsia ho

n_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-been-GIVEN IN having-been-bestowed
THE
OF-THE
MACEDONIA
8:2 oti en
hoti
Conj
en
Prep
pollh polus
a_ Dat Sg f
dokimh qliyews dokimE thlipsis

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
perisseia perisseia
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
that
IN
much
testedness OF-CONSTRICTION THE test of-affliction baqous bathos

n_ Gen Sg n
excess OF-THE superabundance eperisseusen eis perisseuO eis

JOY
OF-them
How that in a great trial of affliction the abundance of their joy and their deep poverty abounded unto the riches of their liberality.
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
kata kata
Prep
ptwceia autwn ptOcheia autos

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploutos ploutos
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
THE
according-to DEPTH corresponding aplothtos autwn haplotEs autos

POVERTY of-poverty
OF-them
exceeds superabounds
INTO THE
RICHES
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
UN-COMPOUND generosity
OF-them
8:3 oti kata

hoti
Conj
kata
Prep
dunamin marturw dunamis martureO

kai para kai para

Conj Prep
dunamin auqairetoi dunamis authairetos

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Pl m
that
according-to ABILITY
I-MAY-BE-witnessING AND I-am-testifying
BESIDE ABILITY beyond hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
self-preferences of-own-accord thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
For to [their] power, I bear record, yea, and beyond [their] power [they were] willing of themselves; Praying us with much intreaty that we would receive the gift, and [take upon us] the fellowship of the ministering to the saints.
8:4 meta pollhs paraklhsews deomenoi

meta
Prep
polus
a_ Gen Sg f
paraklEsis
n_ Gen Sg f
deomai
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
WITH
much
BESIDE-CALLing entreaty
beseechING
OF-US us tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
THE
grace
AND
THE
koinwnian ths koinOnia ho

diakonias ths diakonia ho

eis eis
Prep
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
OF-THE
THRU-SERVice OF-THE service the
INTO THE
HOLY-ones saints prwton prOton

Adv
8:5 kai ou
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
hlpisamen alla eautous edwkan elpizO alla heautou didOmi

vi Aor Act 1 Pl Conj pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
NOT
according-AS WE-EXPECT
but
selves themselves
GIVE they-give
BEFORE-most to-THE first
Master Lord
And [this they did], not as we hoped, but first gave their own selves to the Lord, and unto us by the will of God.
kai hmin kai hemeis

Conj pp 1 Dat Pl
dia dia
Prep

AND
to-US
THRU WILL through to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
OF-God
8:6 eis
eis
Prep
parakalesai hmas parakaleO hEmeis

titon titos
n_ Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
proenhrxato proenarchomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
outws houtOs
Adv
INTO THE
TO-BESIDE-CALL to-entreat eis eis

Prep
US
TITUS
THAT according-AS he-BEFORE-undertakES thus he-undertakes-before carin charis

n_ Acc Sg f
Insomuch that we desired Titus, that as he had begun, so he would also finish in you the same grace also.
kai epitelesh kai epiteleO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
AND also
he-SHOULD-BE-ON-FINISHING INTO YOU(p) he-should-be-completing ye panti pas

a_ Dat Sg n
AND also
THE
grace
this
8:7 all wsper en

alla
Conj
hOsper
Adv
en
Prep
perisseuete perisseuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pistei kai logw pistis kai logos

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg m
kai gnwsei kai gnOsis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
kai kai
Conj
but
AS-EVEN even-as spoudh spoudE

n_ Dat Sg f
IN
EVERY everything
YE-ARE-exceedING to-BELIEF ye-are-superabounding to-faith ex ek

Prep
AND
to-saying to-word ina hina

Conj
AND
to-KNOWledge AND
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
kai th kai ho
Conj t_ Dat Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
. Therefore, as ye abound in every [thing, in] faith, and utterance, and knowledge, and [in] all diligence, and [in] your love to us, [see] that ye abound in this grace also.
to-EVERY DILIGENCE AND to-all cariti perisseuhte charis perisseuO

n_ Dat Sg f vs Pres Act 2 Pl
to-THE
OUT OF-US
IN
YOU(p) ye
LOVE
THAT AND also
IN
this
THE
grace
YE-MAY-BE-exceedING ye-may-be-superabounding
AV
2Corinthians 8
8:8 ou
ou
Part Neg
kat kata
Prep
epitaghn legw epitagE legO

alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eterwn heteros
a_ Gen Pl m
spoudhs kai spoudE kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
NOT
I-AM-sayING but I-am-saying-this
THRU THE through dokimazwn dokimazO

OF-DIFFERENT DILIGENCE of-different-ones
AND also
I speak not by commandment, but by occasion of the forwardness of others, and to prove the sincerity of your love.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
umeteras agaphs gnhsion humeteros agapE gnEsios

ps 2 Gen Sg n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Sg n
THE
OF-THE
YOUR-more of-yours(emph.) gar thn gar ho

Conj
LOVE
genuine testING genuineness tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
8:9 ginwskete
ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
cristou
t_ Acc Sg f
YE-ARE-KNOWING for
NA
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti di hoti dia

Conj Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eptwceusen plousios wn ptOcheuO plousios eimi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
For ye know the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, that, though he was rich, yet for your sakes he became poor, that ye through his poverty might be rich.
ANOINTED Christ th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
that
He-is-POOR he-becomes-poor
RICH
BEING
THAT YOU(p) ye
ekeinou ekeinos
pd Gen Sg m
ptwceia plouthshte ptOcheia plouteO

n_ Dat Sg f vs Aor Act 2 Pl
to-THE
OF-that-One POVERTY of-that-one
SHOULD-BE-beING-RICH
8:10 kai gnwmhn en

kai
Conj
gnOmE
n_ Acc Sg f
en
Prep
toutw didwmi houtos didOmi

pd Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
sumferei sumpherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
oitines hostis
pr Nom Pl m
AND
opinion
IN
this
I-AM-GIVING
this
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IS-beING-expedient WHO-ANY who-any proenhrxasqe apo proenarchomai apo

10 And herein I give [my] advice: for this is expedient for you, who have begun before, not only to do, but also to be forward a year ago.
ou ou
Part Neg
monon to monon ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
poihsai alla kai to poieO alla kai ho

vn Aor Act Conj Conj t_ Acc Sg n
qelein thelO
vn Pres Act
NOT
ONLY
THE
TO-DO
but
AND also
THE
TO-BE-WILLING BEFORE-undertake undertake-before
FROM
perusi perusi
Adv
OTHER-SIDE year-past
8:11 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
poihsai epitelesate opws poieO epiteleO hopOs

vn Aor Act vm Aor Act 2 Pl Adv
kaqaper kathaper
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
NOW
YET AND also tou ho
THE
TO-DO
ON-FINISH-YE complete-ye ! outws kai to houtOs kai ho

Adv Conj
WHICH-how DOWN-WHICH-EVEN THE so-that even-as epitelesai ek epiteleO ek

vn Aor Act Prep
11 Now therefore perform the doing [of it]; that as [there was] a readiness to will, so [there may be] a performance also out of that which ye have.
proqumia prothumia
n_ Nom Sg f
qelein thelO
vn Pres Act
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
t_ Nom Sg n
BEFORE-FEELing OF-THE eagerness ecein echO

vn Pres Act
TO-BE-WILLING thus
AND also
THE
TO-ON-FINISH to-complete
OUT OF-THE
TO-BE-HAVING
8:12 ei
ei
Cond
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
proqumia prothumia
n_ Nom Sg f
prokeitai prokeimai
kaqo katho
Adv
ean ean
Cond
ech echO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
IF
for
THE
BEFORE-FEELing IS-BEFORE-LYING eagerness is-lying-before ou ou

Part Neg
according-to-WHICH IF-EVER MAY-BE-HAVING according-to-what he-may-be-having ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
12 For if there be first a willing mind, [it is] accepted according to that a man hath, [and] not according to that he hath not.
a_ Nom Sg m
kaqo katho
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
WELL-TOWARD-RECEIVable NOT most-acceptable
according-to-WHICH NOT according-to-what umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
he-IS-HAVING
8:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ina gar hina

Conj Conj
allois anesis allos anesis

a_ Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg f
qliyis thlipsis
n_ Nom Sg f
all ex alla ek
Conj Prep
isothtos en isotEs en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
NOT
for
THAT others to-others kairw kairos

n_ Dat Sg m
UP-LETTing to-YOU(p) ease to-ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
13 For [I mean] not that other men be eased, and ye burdened:
CONSTRICTION but affliction to ho
OUT OF-EQUALity
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nun nun
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
perisseuma eis perisseuma eis

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
ekeinwn usterhma ekeinos husterEma

pd Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg n
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
NOW SEASON current occasion
THE
OF-YOU(p) excess of-ye superabundance
INTO THE
OF-those
WANT
AV
2Corinthians 8
8:14 ina
hina
Conj
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
ekeinwn perisseuma genhtai ekeinos perisseuma ginomai

pd Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg n vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THAT AND also
THE
OF-those
excess superabundance isoths isotEs

n_ Nom Sg f
MAY-BE-BECOMING INTO THE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
usterhma opws husterEma hopOs

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
14 But by an equality, [that] now at this time your abundance [may be a supply] for their want, that their abundance also may be [a supply] for your want: that there may be equality:
WANT
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BECOMING EQUALity so-that there-may-be-becoming gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
8:15 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
epleonasen kai o pleonazO kai ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj t_ Nom Sg m
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN THE the-one to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THE with-the
much
NOT
MOREizES increases
AND
THE the-one
15 As it is written, He that [had gathered] much had nothing over; and he that [had gathered] little had no lack.
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
hlattonhsen elattoneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE with-the
FEW
NOT
is-INFERIOR lessens qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
8:16 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
WH
didonti
NA
donti didOmi
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
grace thanks-be
YET to-THE
God
THE
One-GIVING one-imparting kardia titou kardia titos

THE
SAME
16 . But thanks [be] to God, which put the same earnest care into the heart of Titus for you.
spoudhn uper spoudE huper

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
DILIGENCE
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye men men

Part
IN
THE
HEART
OF-TITUS
8:17 oti thn

hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraklhsin edexato paraklEsis dechomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor midD 3 Sg
spoudaioteros de spoudaios de
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp Conj
uparcwn huparchO
that
THE
INDEED BESIDE-CALLing entreaty pros pros

Prep
he-RECEIVES
more-DILIGENT
YET belongING being-inherently
17 For indeed he accepted the exhortation; but being more forward, of his own accord he went unto you.
auqairetos exhlqen authairetos exerchomai

a_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
self-preference of-his-own-accord
he-OUT-CAME TOWARD YOU(p) he-came-out ye de de

Conj
8:18 sunepemyamen
sumpempO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl

Prep pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon ou adelphos hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epainos en epainos en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
WE-TOGETHER-SEND YET WITH him we-send-together-with tw ho

t_ Dat Sg n
THE
brother
OF-WHOM
THE
ON-PRAISE applause
IN
18 And we have sent with him the brother, whose praise [is] in the gospel throughout all the churches;
n_ Dat Sg n
dia dia
Prep
paswn twn pas ho

ekklhsiwn ekklEsia
n_ Gen Pl f
THE
WELL-MESSAGE THRU ALL through monon de monon de

Adv Conj
OF-THE the
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
8:19 ou
ou
Part Neg
alla kai ceirotonhqeis alla kai cheirotoneO

Conj Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
ekklhsiwn ekklEsia
n_ Gen Pl f
NOT
ONLY only-so
YET but
AND also
WH
BEING-HAND-STRETCHED by one-being-selected
NA
THE
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sunekdhmos sunekdEmos
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en
sun sun
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti tauth charis houtos

19 And not [that] only, but who was also chosen of the churches to travel with us with this grace, which is administered by us to the glory of the same Lord, and [declaration of] your ready mind:
TOGETHER-OUT-PUBLICer OF-US fellow-traveler diakonoumenh diakoneO

TOGETHER togetherwith pros pros

Prep
to-THE the
NA
grace
this
THE
uf hmwn hupo hemeis

Prep pp 1 Gen Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
beING-THRU-SERVED by being-dispensed kai proqumian kai prothumia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
US
TOWARD THE
OF-SAME himself
THE of-the
Master Lord
esteem glory
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
AND
BEFORE-FEELing OF-US eagerness mh mE

Part Neg
8:20 stellomenoi touto

stellomai
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
mwmhshtai mOmaomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
PUTTING putting-so
this
NO
ANY anyone
US in us
SHOULD-BE-beING-FLAWED IN should-be-finding-flaws
THE
20 Avoiding this, that no man should blame us in this abundance which is administered by us:
AV
adrothti hadrotEs
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
diakonoumenh diakoneO
uf hmwn hupo hemeis

Prep pp 1 Gen Pl
EXUBERANCE this
to-THE the
beING-THRU-SERVED by being-dispensed gar kala gar kalos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
US
8:21 pronooumen
pronoeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
monon enwpion kuriou monon enOpion kurios

Adv Adv n_ Gen Sg m
alla kai enwpion alla kai enOpion

Conj Conj Adv
WE-ARE-BEFORE-MINDING for we-are-providing anqrwpwn anthrOpos

n_ Gen Pl m
IDEAL ideal(p)
NOT
ONLY
IN-VIEW OF-Master in-the-sight-of Lord
but
AND also
IN-VIEW in-the-sight-of
21 Providing for honest things, not only in the sight of the Lord, but also in the sight of men.
OF-humans humans
8:22 sunepemyamen
sumpempO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
autois ton autos ho

adelfon hmwn adelphos hemeis

on hos
pr Acc Sg m
edokimasamen en dokimazO en
WE-TOGETHER-SEND YET to-them we-send-together-with them
THE
brother
OF-US
WHOM
WE-test
IN
pollois pollakis spoudaion onta polus pollakis spoudaios eimi

a_ Dat Pl n Adv a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres vxx Acc Sg m
nuni de nuni de
Adv Conj
polu polus
a_ Acc Sg n
spoudaioteron spoudaios
Adv
22 And we have sent with them our brother, whom we have oftentimes proved diligent in many things, but now much more diligent, upon the great confidence which [I have] in you.
MANY many-things
MANY-times often
DILIGENT
BEING
NOW
YET much
more-DILIGENT
pepoiqhsei pollh pepoithEsis polus

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to-confidence
much
THE
INTO YOU(p) ye titou titos

n_ Gen Sg m
8:23 eite
eite
Conj
uper huper
Prep
koinwnos emos koinOnos emos

n_ Nom Sg m ps 1 Nom Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
sunergos sunergos
a_ Nom Sg m
IF-BESIDES OVER TITUS whether for-the-sake-of eite eite

Conj
communioner mate
MY
AND
INTO YOU(p) ye cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-ACTer fellow-worker
adelfoi hmwn adelphos hemeis

apostoloi ekklhsiwn apostolos ekklEsia

n_ Nom Pl m n_ Gen Pl f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
23 Whether [any do enquire] of Titus, [he is] my partner and fellowhelper concerning you: or our brethren [be enquired of, they are] the messengers of the churches, [and] the glory of Christ.
IF-BESIDES brothers or brethren
OF-US
OF-OUT-CALLEDS esteem of-ecclesias glory kai hmwn kai hemeis

Conj
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ kauchsews uper kauchEsis huper

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
24 Wherefore shew ye to them, and before the churches, the proof of your love, and of our boasting on your behalf.
8:24 thn
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oun oun
Conj

agaphs umwn agapE humeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
THEN IN-SHOWing display eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
LOVE
NA
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
OF-US
BOASTing
OVER
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
WH
endeixasqe
endeiknumenoi endeiknumi
eis eis
Prep
proswpon twn prosOpon ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl f
YOU(p) ye
INTO them
beING-IN-SHOWN is-being-displayed
INTO face
OF-THE
ekklhsiwn ekklEsia
n_ Gen Pl f
AV
2Corinthians 9
9:1 peri
peri
Prep
men men
Part
gar ths gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
diakonias ths diakonia ho

eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
perisson moi perissos egO

a_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg
ABOUT INDEED for concerning estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
THRU-SERVice THE dispensation umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
INTO THE
HOLY-ones excessive saints superfluous
to-ME
. For as touching the ministering to the saints, it is superfluous for me to write to you:
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
grafein graphO
vn Pres Act
IS it-is
THE
TO-BE-WRITING to-YOU(p) to-ye gar thn gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
9:2 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
proqumian prothumia
n_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f

Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
kaucwmai kauchaomai
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for I-am-aware-of makedosin makedOn

n_ Dat Pl m
THE
BEFORE-FEELing OF-YOU(p) WHOM eagerness of-ye of-which pareskeuastai apo paraskeuazO apo
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg Prep
OVER
YOU(p) ye
I-AM-BOASTING
oti acaia hoti achaia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
perusi perusi
Adv
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
zhlos zElos
n_ Nom Sg n
For I know the forwardness of your mind, for which I boast of you to them of Macedonia, that Achaia was ready a year ago; and your zeal hath provoked very many.
to-MACEDONIANS that
ACHAIA
HAS-been-preparED
FROM OTHER-SIDE AND year-past
THE
OF-YOU(p) BOILing of-ye zeal
hreqisen erethizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pleionas polus
a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
STRIFES (provokES) THE provokes
MORE majority adelfous ina adelphos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
9:3 epemya
pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
kauchma hmwn kauchEma hemeis

to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
uper huper
Prep
I-SEND
YET THE
brothers brethren en en
Prep
THAT NO
THE
BOAST boasting
OF-US
THE
OVER
Yet have I sent the brethren, lest our boasting of you should be in vain in this behalf; that, as I said, ye may be ready:
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kenwqh kenoO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
merei meros
n_ Dat Sg n
toutw ina houtos hina

pd Dat Sg n Conj
kaqws kathOs
Adv
elegon legO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-BEING-EMPTIED IN may-be-being-made-void
THE
PART particular
this
THAT according-AS I-said
pareskeuasmenoi hte paraskeuazO eimi

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
HAVING-been-preparED prepared
YE-MAY-BE
9:4 mh
mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
ean ean
Cond
elqwsin erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
makedones kai eurwsin makedOn kai heuriskO

n_ Nom Pl m Conj vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
NO lest umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
how IF-EVER MAY-BE-COMING TOGETHER to-ME somehow with-me aparaskeuastous kataiscunqwmen aparaskeuastos kataischunO
a_ Acc Pl m vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
MACEDONIANS AND
THEY-MAY-BE-FINDING may-be-finding
WH
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
legwmen
Lest haply if they of Macedonia come with me, and find you unprepared, we (that we say not, ye) should be ashamed in this same confident boasting.
YOU(p) ye
NA
UN-preparED unprepared umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
MAY-BE-BEING-DOWN-VILED WE may-be-being-disgraced en en
Prep
THAT NO
legw legO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
upostasei hupostasis
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
I-MAY-BE-sayING I-should-be-saying
YOU(p) ye
IN
THE
UNDER-STANDing this assumption adelfous ina adelphos hina

n_ Acc Pl m Conj
5
9:5 anagkaion oun

anagkaios
a_ Acc Sg n
oun
Conj
hghsamhn hEgeomai
vi Aor midD 1 Sg
parakalesai tous parakaleO ho

vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl m
necessary
THEN I-deem I-deem-it eis eis

Prep
TO-BESIDE-CALL to-entreat umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
THE
brothers brethren
THAT
proelqwsin proerchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
kai prokatartiswsin kai prokatartizO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THEY-MAY-BE-BEFORE-COMING INTO YOU(p) they-may-be-coming-before ye proephggelmenhn eulogian umwn proepaggellomai eulogia humeis
vp Perf midD/pasD Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BEFORE-DOWN-EQUIPPING THE should-be-adjusting-beforehand outws ws eulogian houtOs hOs eulogia

Adv Adv n_ Acc Sg f
Therefore I thought it necessary to exhort the brethren, that they would go before unto you, and make up beforehand your bounty, whereof ye had notice before, that the same might be ready, as [a matter of] bounty, and not as [of] covetousness.
tauthn etoimhn einai houtos hetoimos eimi

pd Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f vn Pres vxx
beING-BEFORE-promisED blessedness being-promised-before bounty kai mh kai mE

Conj Part Neg
OF-YOU(p) this of-ye
READY
TO-BE
thus
AS
blessedness bounty
ws pleonexian hOs pleonexia

Adv n_ Acc Sg f
AND
NO
AS
MORE-HAVing greed
AV
2Corinthians 9
9:6 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
feidomenws feidomenws kai qerisei pheidomenOs pheidomenOs kai therizO

Adv Adv Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
this
YET THE
one-SOWING one-sowing ep epi

Prep
SPARingly
SPARingly
AND also
SHALL-BE-reapING
. But this [I say], He which soweth sparingly shall reap also sparingly; and he which soweth bountifully shall reap also bountifully.
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
eulogiais ep eulogia epi

n_ Dat Pl f Prep
eulogiais kai qerisei eulogia kai therizO

n_ Dat Pl f Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
AND
THE
ON
blessednesses bountiful
ON
blessednesses bountiful
AND also
SHALL-BE-reapING
9:7 ekastos kaqws

hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
kathOs
Adv
prohrhtai proaireomai
vi Perf Mid 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia mh kardia mE
ek ek
Prep
luphs lupE
n_ Gen Sg f
h E
Part
ex ek
Prep
EACH
according-AS he-HAS-BEFORE-LIFTED to-THE he-has-proposed ilaron hilaros

a_ Acc Sg m
HEART
NO
OUT OF-SORROW OR
OUT
Every man according as he purposeth in his heart, [so let him give]; not grudgingly, or of necessity: for God loveth a cheerful giver.
anagkhs anagkE
n_ Gen Sg f
gar dothn gar dotEs

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
agapa agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-necessity GLEEful of-compulsion
for
GIVer
IS-LOVING
THE
God
9:8 dunatei
dunateO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
perisseusai eis perisseuO eis

vn Aor Act Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
IS-beING-ABLE YET THE
God
EVERY all
grace
TO-exceed to-lavish
INTO YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
THAT IN
And God [is] able to make all grace abound toward you; that ye, always having all sufficiency in all [things], may abound to every good work:
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
pantote pasan pantote pas

Adv a_ Acc Sg f
autarkeian autarkeia
n_ Acc Sg f
econtes echO
perisseuhte perisseuO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
EVERY everything ergon ergon

n_ Acc Sg n
always
EVERY all
SAME-SUFFICiency HAVING contentment
YE-MAY-BE-exceedING INTO EVERY ye-may-be-superabounding
agaqon agathos
a_ Acc Sg n
ACT work
GOOD
9:9 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
gegraptai graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
eskorpisen edwken skorpizO didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg vi Aor Act 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
penhsin h penEs ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
according-AS it-HAS-been-WRITTEN He-SCATTERS
He-GIVES
to-THE
DRUDGES
THE
(As it is written, He hath dispersed abroad; he hath given to the poor: his righteousness remaineth for ever.
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-Him
eon
WH NA
9:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
epicorhgwn epichorEgeO
sperma
sporon sporos
n_ Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
speironti speirO
kai arton kai artos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
THE
YET One-supplyING one-supplying
seed
to-THE
one-SOWING one-sowing sporon sporos

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BREAD
eis eis
Prep
brwsin corhghsei brOsis chorEgeO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Fut Act 3 Sg
kai plhqunei kai plEthunO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai kai
Conj
10 Now he that ministereth seed to the sower both minister bread for [your] food, and multiply your seed sown, and increase the fruits of your righteousness;)
INTO FEEDing food auxhsei auxanO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
He-SHALL-BE-furnishING AND
He-SHALL-BE-multiplyING THE shall-be-multiplying dikaiosunhs dikaiosunE

n_ Gen Sg f
seed
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
genhmata ths genEma ho

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
He-SHALL-BE-GROWING THE shall-be-making-grow
product product(p)
OF-THE
JUST-TOGETHERness OF-YOU(p) righteousness of-ye aplothta haplotEs

n_ Acc Sg f
9:11 en
en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
ploutizomenoi eis ploutizO eis

pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
di dia
Prep
IN
EVERY everything
beING-enRICHED
INTO EVERY all qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
UN-COMPOUND WHICH-ANY IS-DOWN-ACTING generosity which-any is-producing
THRU through
11 Being enriched in every thing to all bountifulness, which causeth through us thanksgiving to God.
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eucaristian tw eucharistia ho
US
to-THE
God
9:12 oti h
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
diakonia diakonia
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
leitourgias tauths ou leitourgia houtos ou

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f Part Neg
monon estin monon eimi

that
THE
this
NOT
ONLY
IS
12 For the administration of this service not only supplieth the want of the saints, but is abundant also by many thanksgivings unto God;
AV
prosanaplhrousa ta prosanaplEroO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Sg f t_ Acc Pl n
usterhmata twn husterEma ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
alla kai perisseuousa dia alla kai perisseuO dia

Conj Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg f Prep
TOWARD-UP-FILLING replenishing
THE
WANTS
OF-THE
HOLY-ones but saints
AND also
exceedING superabounding
THRU through
pollwn eucaristiwn tw polus eucharistia ho

a_ Gen Pl f n_ Gen Pl f t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
much many
thankings thankgivings ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
to-THE
God
9:13 dia
dia
Prep
dokimhs ths dokimE ho

diakonias tauths doxazontes diakonia houtos doxazO

n_ Gen Sg f pd Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THRU THE through epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
testedness
OF-THE
THRU-SERVice this dispensation eis eis

Prep
esteemizING glorifying to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THE
God
upotagh hupotagE
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
omologias umwn homologia humeis

n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
13 Whiles by the experiment of this ministration they glorify God for your professed subjection unto the gospel of Christ, and for [your] liberal distribution unto them, and unto all [men];
ON
THE
UNDER-SETTing OF-THE subjection ths ho
avowal
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
cristou kai aplothti christos kai haplotEs

n_ Gen Sg m Conj n_ Dat Sg f
koinwnias eis koinOnia eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
autous kai eis autos kai eis

pp Acc Pl m Conj Prep
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
t_ Gen Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
AND
to-UN-COMPOUND OF-THE to-generosity dehsei uper deEsis huper

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
communion contribution umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
INTO them
AND
INTO ALL
9:14 kai autwn

kai
Conj
autos
pp Gen Pl m
epipoqountwn umas epipotheO humeis

dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
OF-them
to-petition
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-ON-LONGING longing-for ef epi

Prep
YOU(p) ye
14 And by their prayer for you, which long after you for the exceeding grace of God in you.
THRU THE because-of
uperballousan carin huperballO charis

vp Pres Act Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grace
OF-THE
God
ON
YOU(p) ye dwrea dOrea

n_ Dat Sg f
15 Thanks [be] unto God for his unspeakable gift.
9:15 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
anekdihghtw autou anekdiEgEtos autos

a_ Dat Sg f pp Gen Sg m
grace thanks-be
to-THE
God
ON
THE
UN-detailed indescribable
OF-Him
gratuity
AV
2Corinthians 10
10:1 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
parakalw parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
prauthtos prautEs
n_ Gen Sg f
SAME myself
YET I
PAUL
AM-BESIDE-CALLING YOU(p) am-entreating ye kata kata

Prep
THRU THE through
MEEKness
kai epieikeias tou kai epieikeia ho

Conj n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
cristou os christos hos

proswpon men prosOpon men

n_ Acc Sg n Part
tapeinos en tapeinos en
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
. Now I Paul myself beseech you by the meekness and gentleness of Christ, who in presence [am] base among you, but being absent am bold toward you:
AND
leniency
OF-THE
Conj
WHO
according-to face
INDEED LOW humble
IN among
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apwn apeimi
qarrw tharrheO
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye
FROM-BEING being-absent de de
Conj
YET I-AM-havING-COURAGE INTO YOU(p) am-having-courage ye to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
10:2 deomai
deomai
mh mE
Part Neg
parwn pareimi
qarrhsai tharrheO
vn Aor Act
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pepoiqhsei pepoithEsis
n_ Dat Sg f
I-AM-beseechING
YET THE
NO
BESIDE-BEING being-present tous ho
TO-have-COURAGE to-THE
confidence
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
logizomai logizomai
tolmhsai epi tinas tolmaO epi tis

vn Aor Act Prep px Acc Pl m
logizomenous logizomai
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ws hOs
Adv
But I beseech [you], that I may not be bold when I am present with that confidence, wherewith I think to be bold against some, which think of us as if we walked according to the flesh.
t_ Acc Pl m
WHICH to-which kata kata

Prep
I-AM-accountING I-am-reckoning sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
TO-DARE
ON
ANY
THE
accountING ones-reckoning
US
AS
peripatountas peripateO
according-to FLESH
ABOUT-TREADING walking gar peripatountes ou gar peripateO ou

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Part Neg
10:3 en
en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
strateuomeqa strateuO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
For though we walk in the flesh, we do not war after the flesh:
IN
FLESH
for
ABOUT-TREADING walking ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
NOT
according-to FLESH
WE-ARE-WARRING
10:4 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
gar opla gar hoplon

Conj n_ Nom Pl n
strateias hmwn strateia hemeis

ou ou
Part Neg
sarkika alla dunata sarkikos alla dunatos

a_ Nom Pl n Conj a_ Nom Pl n
THE
for
IMPLEMENTS OF-THE weapons pros pros

Prep
WAR warfare
OF-US
NOT
FLESHic(p) fleshly
but
ABLE(p) powerful
(For the weapons of our warfare [are] not carnal, but mighty through God to the pulling down of strong holds;)
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kaqairesin ocurwmatwn kathairesis ochurOma

to-THE
God
TOWARD DOWN-LIFTing pulling-down
OF-BULWARKS
10:5 logismous kaqairountes kai pan

logismos
n_ Acc Pl m
kathaireO
kai
Conj
pas
a_ Acc Sg n
uywma hupsOma
n_ Acc Sg n
epairomenon kata ths epairO kata ho

vp Pres Mid Acc Sg n Prep t_ Gen Sg f
logics reasonings gnwsews tou gnOsis ho

n_ Gen Sg f
DOWN-LIFTING pulling-down qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
EVERY
HEIGHT
beING-ON-LIFTED being-elevated
DOWN against
OF-THE the thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
kai aicmalwtizontes pan kai aichmalOtizO pas

Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg n
nohma noEma
n_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
Casting down imaginations, and every high thing that exalteth itself against the knowledge of God, and bringing into captivity every thought to the obedience of Christ;
t_ Gen Sg m
KNOWledge
OF-THE
God
AND
capturizING leading-into-captivity
EVERY
MIND INTO THE apprehension
upakohn tou hupakoE ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
obedience
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ ekdikhsai pasan ekdikeO pas

vn Aor Act a_ Acc Sg f
10:6 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
etoimw econtes hetoimos echO

a_ Dat Sg n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
parakohn otan parakoE hotan

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
And having in a readiness to revenge all disobedience, when your obedience is fulfilled.
AND
IN
READY readiness
HAVING
TO-OUT-JUST to-avenge upakoh hupakoE

n_ Nom Sg f
EVERY
disobedience
when-EVER whenever
plhrwqh plEroO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED OF-YOU(p) THE may-be-being-completed of-ye
obedience
10:7 ta
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kata kata
Prep
proswpon blepete prosOpon blepO

n_ Acc Sg n vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
pepoiqen peithO
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
THE the(p)
according-to face
YE-ARE-lookING IF ye-are-looking-at
ANY anyone
HAS-confidence to-self to-himself
. Do ye look on things after the outward appearance? If any man trust to himself that he is Christ's, let him of himself think this again, that, as he [is]
AV
2Corinthians 10
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
logizesqw logizomai
palin ef palin epi

Adv Prep
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
oti kaqws hoti kathOs

Conj Adv
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
Christ's, even so [are] we Christ's.
OF-ANOINTED TO-BE of-Christ cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
this
LET-him-BE-accountING AGAIN let-him-be-reckoning !
ON
self himself
that
according-AS he
outws kai hmeis houtOs kai hEmeis

OF-ANOINTED thus of-Christ
AND also
NA
WE
10:8 ean
ean
Cond
WH
te
te te
Part
gar perissoteron ti gar perissos tis

Conj a_ Acc Sg n Cmp px Acc Sg n
kauchswmai kauchaomai
vs Aor midD 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
IF-EVER
BESIDES
for
more-excessive more-excessively edwken didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ANY somewhat
I-SHOULD-BE-BOASTING ABOUT concerning eis eis

Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
exousias hmwn exousia hemeis

hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
For though I should boast somewhat more of our authority, which the Lord hath given us for edification, and not for your destruction, I should not be ashamed:
THE
authority
OF-US
WHICH
GIVES
THE
Master Lord
INTO HOME-BUILDing AND edification
ouk ou
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
kaqairesin umwn kathairesis humeis

ouk ou
Part Neg
aiscunqhsomai aischunO
vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
NOT
INTO DOWN-LIFTing pulling-down mh mE

Part Neg
OF-YOU(p) NOT ye
I-SHALL-BE-BEING-VILED I-shall-be-being-put-to-shame ekfobein ekphobeO

vn Pres Act
10:9 ina
hina
Conj
doxw dokeO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
ws an hOs an
Adv Part
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
That I may not seem as if I would terrify you by letters.
THAT NO
I-SHOULD-BE-SEEMING AS
EVER TO-BE-OUT-FEARING YOU(p) to-be-terrifying ye
THRU THE through
epistolwn epistolE
n_ Gen Pl f
letters epistles
10:10 oti
hoti
Conj
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
epistolai men epistolE men

n_ Nom Pl f Part
fhsin phEmi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
bareiai kai iscurai h barus kai ischuros ho

a_ Nom Pl f Conj a_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
that THE seeing-that parousia parousia

n_ Nom Sg f
letters epistles
INDEED he-IS-AVERRING HEAVY weighty logos logos
AND
STRONG
THE
YET
10 For [his] letters, say they, [are] weighty and powerful; but [his] bodily presence [is] weak, and [his] speech contemptible.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos asqenhs kai o sOma asthenEs kai ho

n_ Gen Sg n a_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
exouqenhmenos exoutheneO
n_ Nom Sg m
BODY
UN-FIRM weak o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
saying expression
HAVING-been-scornED to-be-scorned esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
10:11 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
logizesqw logizomai
toioutos oti oioi toioutos hoti hoios

pd Nom Sg m Conj pk Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
this
LET-BE-accountING let-him-be-reckoning ! di dia

Prep
THE
such such-one
that
THE-WHICH WE-ARE such-as
to-THE
11 Let such an one think this, that, such as we are in word by letters when we are absent, such [will we be] also in deed when we are present.
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
epistolwn apontes epistolE apeimi

n_ Gen Pl f vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
toioutoi kai parontes toioutos kai pareimi

pd Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
saying word
THRU letters through epistles gar tolmwmen gar tolmaO

FROM-BEING being-absent egkrinai egkrinO

vn Aor Act
such
AND also
to-THE
ACT
10:12 ou
ou
Part Neg
h E
Part
sugkrinai sugkrinO
vn Aor Act
eautous tisin heautou tis

pf 3 Acc Pl m px Dat Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
NOT
for
WE-ARE-DARING TO-IN-JUDGE OR to-judge-by alla autoi alla autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
TO-TOGETHER-JUDGE selves to-compare ourselves en en

Prep
to-ANY to-some
OF-THE-ones of-the-ones kai kai

Conj
eautous sunistanontwn heautou sunistEmi

pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
eautois eautous metrountes heautou heautou metreO

pf 3 Dat Pl m pf 3 Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
12 . For we dare not make ourselves of the number, or compare ourselves with some that commend themselves: but they measuring themselves by themselves, and comparing themselves among themselves, are not wise.
selves themselves
TOGETHER-STANDING-UP but commending eautous eautois heautou heautou

pf 3 Acc Pl m pf 3 Dat Pl m
they
IN
selves themselves
selves themselves
MEASURING
AND
sugkrinontes sugkrinO
ou ou
Part Neg
suniasin suniEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
TOGETHER-JUDGING selves comparing themselves
to-selves NOT to-themselves eis eis

Prep
ARE-understandING
10:13 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ametra ametros
a_ Acc Pl n
kauchsomeqa kauchaomai
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
alla kata alla kata

Conj Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
WE
YET NOT
INTO THE
UN-MEASURED SHALL-BE-BOASTING but immeasurably(p)
according-to THE
13 But we will not boast of things without [our] measure, but according to the measure of the rule which God hath distributed to us, a measure to
AV
metron tou metron ho

kanonos ou kanOn hos

n_ Gen Sg m pr Gen Sg m
emerisen hmin merizO hemeis

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
metrou metron
n_ Gen Sg n
reach even unto you.
MEASURE OF-THE
RULE range
OF-WHICH PARTS which
to-US
THE
God
OF-MEASURE measure
efikesqai acri ephikneomai achri

vn 2Aor midD Prep
kai umwn kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
TO-ON-REACH UNTIL AND to-reach-on as-far-as also
YOU(p) ye efiknoumenoi ephikneomai

10:14 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ws mh gar hOs mE

Conj Adv Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
uperekteinomen huperekteinO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
NOT
for
AS
NO
ON-REACHING reaching-on efqasamen phthanO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
INTO YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
WE-ARE-OVER-OUT-STRETCHING we-are-overstretching euaggeliw euaggelion

n_ Dat Sg n
eautous acri heautou achri

pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
gar kai umwn gar kai humeis

Conj Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
14 For we stretch not ourselves beyond [our measure], as though we reached not unto you: for we are come as far as to you also in [preaching] the gospel of Christ:
selves ourselves
UNTIL for as-far-as eis eis

Prep
AND YOU(p) even ye ametra ametros

a_ Acc Pl n
WE-OUTSTRIP IN we-outstrip-others kaucwmenoi kauchaomai
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
15 Not boasting of things without [our] measure, [that is], of other men's labours; but having hope, when your faith is increased, that we shall be enlarged by you according to our rule abundantly,
10:15 ouk
ou
Part Neg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
allotriois kopois allotrios kopos

NOT
INTO THE
UN-MEASURED BOASTING immeasurably(p) auxanomenhs auxanO

IN
other-placed-ones toils others' en en

Prep
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
econtes echO
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews umwn pistis humeis

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
EXPECTATION YET HAVING
OF-beING-GROWN-UP OF-THE of-growing ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) IN YOU(p) of-ye among ye
megalunqhnai kata megalunO kata

vn Aor Pas Prep
kanona kanOn
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
perisseian perisseia
n_ Acc Sg f
TO-BE-magnifiED
according-to THE
RULE range umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-US
INTO excess superabundance ouk ou

Part Neg
10:16 eis
eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
uperekeina huperekeina
Adv
vn Aor Mid
en en
Prep
allotriw kanoni allotrios kanOn

a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m
INTO THE the(p) eis eis

Prep
OVER-OUT-TO-BE OF-YOU(p) TO-WELL-MESSAGize NOT beyond ye to-bring-the-well-message
IN
other-placed another's
RULE range
16 To preach the gospel in the [regions] beyond you, [and] not to boast in another man's line of things made ready to our hand.
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
etoima kauchsasqai hetoimos kauchaomai

a_ Acc Pl n vn Aor midD
INTO THE
READY ready(p) de de
Conj
TO-BOAST
10:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kaucwmenos kauchaomai
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
kaucasqw kauchaomai
17 But he that glorieth, let him glory in the Lord.
THE
YET one-BOASTING one-boasting gar o gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
IN
Master Lord
LET-him-BE-BOASTING let-him-be-boasting ! ekeinos ekeinos

pd Nom Sg m
10:18 ou
ou
Part Neg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
sunistanwn sunistEmi
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
dokimos alla dokimos alla

a_ Nom Sg m Conj
18 For not he that commendeth himself is approved, but whom the Lord commendeth.
NOT
for
THE-one the-one kurios kurios
self himself
TOGETHER-STANDING-UP that-one commending that-one
IS
tested qualified
but
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sunisthsin sunistEmi
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
n_ Nom Sg m
WHOM
THE
Master Lord
IS-TOGETHER-STANDING is-commending
AV
2Corinthians 11
11:1 ofelon aneicesqe

ophelon
Inj
anechomai
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
afrosunhs aphrosunE
n_ Gen Sg f
alla kai alla kai

Conj Conj
. Would to God ye could bear with me a little in [my] folly: and indeed bear with me.
OWE-YOU would-that ! anecesqe anechomai
YE-toleratED ye-did-bear-with mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
LITTLE
ANY
OF-UN-DISPOSition but butnay imprudence
AND
BE-YE-toleratING be-ye-bearing-with !
OF-ME me gar umas gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
11:2 zhlw
zEloO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
zhlw zElos
n_ Dat Sg m
hrmosamhn gar umas harmozO gar humeis

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
andri anEr
n_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-BOILING for I-am-being-jealous parqenon agnhn parthenos hagnos

YOU(p) over-ye
OF-God
to-BOILing to-jealousy
I-CONNECT I-betroth
for
YOU(p) ye
to-ONE
MAN
For I am jealous over you with godly jealousy: for I have espoused you to one husband, that I may present [you as] a chaste virgin to Christ.
vn Aor Act
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
virgin
PURE chaste
TO-BESIDE-STAND to-THE to-present de de

Conj
ANOINTED Christ ofis ophis

n_ Nom Sg m
11:3 foboumai
phobeO
mh mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
ws o hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
exhpathsen euan exapataO heua

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f
en en
Prep
I-AM-FEARING
YET NO lest
how AS somehow fqarh phtheirO

vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE
serpent
OUT-SEDUCES deludes nohmata noEma

n_ Nom Pl n
EVE
IN
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
panourgia autou panourgia autos

ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
apo apo
Prep
But I fear, lest by any means, as the serpent beguiled Eve through his subtilty, so your minds should be corrupted from the simplicity that is in Christ.
THE
OF-him of-himit
SHOULD-BE-BEING-CORRUPTED THE
MINDS OF-YOU(p) FROM apprehensions of-ye eis eis

Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
aplothtos haplotEs
n_ Gen Sg f
kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
agnothtos hagnotEs
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
UN-COMPOUND singleness men men

Part
AND
THE
PUREness
OF-THE the allon allos

a_ Acc Sg m
INTO THE
ANOINTED Christ khrussei kErussO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
11:4 ei
ei
Cond
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ercomenos erchomai
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
IF
INDEED for
THE
other another lambanete lambanO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
JESUS
IS-PROCLAIMING WHOM is-heralding ouk ou

Part Neg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ekhruxamen h kErussO E
pneuma eteron pneuma heteros

o hos
pr Acc Sg n
elabete lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
h E
Part
For if he that cometh preacheth another Jesus, whom we have not preached, or [if] ye receive another spirit, which ye have not received, or another gospel, which ye have not accepted, ye might well bear with [him].
NOT
WE-PROCLAIM we-herald
OR
spirit
DIFFERENT YE-ARE-GETTING-[UP] WHICH ye-are-obtaining ouk ou

Part Neg
NOT
YE-GOT ye-obtained
OR
n_ Acc Sg n
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
edexasqe kalws anecesqe dechomai kalOs anechomai

vi Aor midD 2 Pl Adv vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
WELL-MESSAGE DIFFERENT WHICH
NOT
YE-RECEIVE
IDEALly
YE-ARE-toleratING ye-are-bearing-with-him uper lian apostolwn huper lian apostolos

Prep Adv n_ Gen Pl m
5
11:5 logizomai
logizomai
gar mhden gar mEdeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
usterhkenai hustereO
vn Perf Act
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
. For I suppose I was not a whit behind the very chiefest apostles.
I-AM-accountING I-am-reckoning
for
NO-YET-ONE TO-HAVE-WANTED OF-THE in-nothing to-be-deficient logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
OVER
VERY
commissioners apostles gnwsei gnOsis

n_ Dat Sg f
11:6 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
kai idiwths tw kai idiOtEs ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
all alla
Conj
ou ou
Part Neg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
all en alla en
Conj Prep
IF
YET AND ordinary even plain-person fanerwsantes en phaneroO en

to-THE
saying expression eis eis

Prep
but NOT nevertheless
to-THE
KNOWledge but
IN
But though [I be] rude in speech, yet not in knowledge; but we have been throughly made manifest among you in all things.
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
EVERY everything
APPEARing being-made-manifest
IN
ALL
INTO YOU(p) ye ina hina

Conj
11:7 h
E
Part
amartian epoihsa hamartia poieO

emauton tapeinwn emautou tapeinoO

pf 1 Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
uywqhte hupsoO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
OR
missing sin
I-DO
MYself
makING-LOW in-humbling qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
THAT YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-BEING-HEIGHTenED may-be-being-exalted
Have I committed an offence in abasing myself that ye might be exalted, because I have preached to you the gospel of God freely?
oti hoti
Conj
dwrean to dOrean ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
n_ Acc Sg n
euhggelisamhn umin euaggelizO humeis

vi Aor Mid 1 Sg pp 2 Dat Pl
that gratuitously seeing-that
THE
OF-THE
God
WELL-MESSAGE I-WELL-MESSAGize I-bring-the-well-message
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AV
2Corinthians 11
11:8 allas ekklhsias esulhsa

allos
a_ Acc Pl f
ekklEsia
n_ Acc Pl f
sulaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
labwn lambanO
oywnion opsOnion
n_ Acc Sg n
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
I robbed other churches, taking wages [of them], to do you service.
other
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias diakonian diakonia

n_ Acc Sg f
I-ATTACH (legally) GETTING I-despoil
PROVISION-PURCHASE TOWARD THE rations
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) THRU-SERVice of-ye dispensing
11:9 kai parwn

kai
Conj
pareimi
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai usterhqeis kai hustereO

ou ou
Part Neg
katenarkhsa katanarkaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
BESIDE-BEING being-present to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
AND
BEING-in-WANT
NOT
I-am-DOWN-NUMB I-am-an-encumbrance adelfoi adelphos

n_ Nom Pl m
ouqenos oudeis
a_ Gen Sg m
gar usterhma mou gar husterEma egO

Conj n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
prosaneplhrwsan oi prosanaplEroO ho
OF-NOT-YET-ONE THE of-anyone elqontes erchomai

for
WANT wants
OF-ME
TOWARD-UP-FILL replenish abarh abarEs

a_ Acc Sg m
THE
brothers brethren ethrhsa tEreO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
And when I was present with you, and wanted, I was chargeable to no man: for that which was lacking to me the brethren which came from Macedonia supplied: and in all [things] I have kept myself from being burdensome unto you, and [so] will I keep [myself].
apo apo
Prep
makedonias kai en makedonia kai en

panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
emauton umin emautou humeis

pf 1 Acc Sg m pp 2 Dat Pl
COMING
FROM MACEDONIA
AND
IN
EVERY everything
UN-HEAVY MYself not-burdensome
to-YOU(p) to-ye
I-KEEP
kai thrhsw kai tEreO

AND
I-SHALL-BE-KEEPING shall-be-keeping alhqeia cristou alEtheia christos

11:10 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oti h hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
kauchsis auth kauchEsis houtos

ou ou
Part Neg
IS
TRUTH
OF-ANOINTED IN of-Christ eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
that
THE
BOASTing
this
NOT
10 As the truth of Christ is in me, no man shall stop me of this boasting in the regions of Achaia.
fraghsetai phrassO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
klimasin ths klima ho

n_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
acaias achaia
n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-beING-BARRED INTO ME
IN
THE
regions
OF-THE
ACHAIA
11:11 dia
dia
Prep
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
agapw agapaO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
11 Wherefore? because I love you not? God knoweth.
that NOT seeing-that
I-AM-LOVING
YOU(p) ye ina hina

Conj
THE
God
HAS-PERCEIVED is-aware thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
12 But what I do, that I will do, that I may cut off occasion from them which desire occasion; that wherein they glory, they may be found even as we.
11:12 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
poiw poieO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai poihsw kai poieO

ekkoyw ekkoptO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
WHICH
YET I-AM-DOING
AND
I-SHALL-BE-DOING THAT I-SHOULD-BE-OUT-STRIKING THE shall-be-doing I-should-be-striking-off aformhn aphormE

n_ Acc Sg f
aformhn aphormE
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
qelontwn thelO
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
kaucwntai kauchaomai
FROM-RUSH OF-THE incentive eureqwsin heuriskO

vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ones-WILLING ones-willing kaqws kathOs

Adv
FROM-RUSH THAT IN incentive kai hmeis kai hEmeis

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
WHICH
THEY-ARE-BOASTING
THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-FOUND according-AS AND also
WE
11:13 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar toioutoi yeudapostoloi ergatai dolioi gar toioutos pseudapostolos ergatEs dolios
Conj pd Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
metaschmatizomenoi metaschEmatizO
THE
for
such
FALSE-commissioners false-apostles
ACTers workers
FRAUDulent beING-after-FIGURED being-transfigured
13 For such [are] false apostles, deceitful workers, transforming themselves into the apostles of Christ.
eis eis
Prep
apostolous cristou apostolos christos

n_ Acc Pl m n_ Gen Sg m
INTO commissioners apostles
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ qauma thauma

n_ Nom Sg n
11:14 kai ou
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
metaschmatizetai eis metaschEmatizO eis

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg Prep
14 And no marvel; for Satan himself is transformed into an angel of light.
AND
NOT
MARVEL
SAME shimself
for
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) IS-beING-after-FIGURED Satan is-being-transfigured
INTO
AV
2Corinthians 11
aggelon aggelos
n_ Acc Sg m
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
MESSENGER OF-LIGHT
11:15 ou
ou
Part Neg
mega mega
a_ Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
ei ei
Cond
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
diakonoi diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
metaschmatizontai ws metaschEmatizO hOs

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl Adv
NOT
GREAT great-thing
THEN IF
AND also
THE
THRU-SERVitors OF-him servants telos telos

n_ Nom Sg n
ARE-beING-after-FIGURED are-being-transfigured kata kata

Prep
AS
15 Therefore [it is] no great thing if his ministers also be transformed as the ministers of righteousness; whose end shall be according to their works.
diakonoi diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
dikaiosunhs wn dikaiosunE hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Gen Pl m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
THRU-SERVitors OF-JUSTice dispensers of-righteousness autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
OF-WHOM THE
FINISH SHALL-BE consummation
according-to THE
ACTS
OF-them
11:16 palin legw

palin
Adv
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
doxh dokeO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
afrona aphrOn
a_ Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ei ei
Cond
AGAIN
I-AM-sayING
NO
ANY anyone
ME
SHOULD-BE-SEEMING UN-DISPOSED TO-BE should-be-presuming imprudent dexasqe dechomai

vm Aor midD 2 Pl
IF
16 . I say again, Let no man think me a fool; if otherwise, yet as a fool receive me, that I may boast myself a little.
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ge ge
Part
kan kan
Cond Con
ws afrona hOs aphrOn

Adv a_ Acc Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ina hina
Conj
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
mikron mikros
a_ Acc Sg n
YET NO
SURELY AND-[IF]-EVER AS even-if-ever kauchswmai kauchaomai

vs Aor midD 1 Sg
UN-DISPOSED RECEIVE-YE imprudent receive-ye !
ME
THAT AND-I also-I
LITTLE
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ANY some
SHOULD-BE-BOASTING
11:17 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
kata kata
Prep
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
all ws en alla hOs en

Conj Adv Prep
afrosunh en aphrosunE en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep
WHICH
I-AM-TALKING NOT I-am-speaking upostasei hupostasis

n_ Dat Sg f
according-to Master in-accord-with Lord ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
I-AM-TALKING but I-am-speaking
AS
IN
imprudence
IN
17 That which I speak, I speak [it] not after the Lord, but as it were foolishly, in this confidence of boasting.
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kauchsews kauchEsis
n_ Gen Sg f
this
THE
UNDER-STANDing OF-THE assumption kaucwntai kauchaomai

BOASTing
WH
11:18 epei polloi

epei
Conj
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
kata kata
Prep
thn
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
18 Seeing that many glory after the flesh, I will glory also.
since
MANY
ARE-BOASTING
according-to
FLESH
AND-I also-I
kauchsomai kauchaomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
SHALL-BE-BOASTING
11:19 hdews
hEdeOs
Adv
gar anecesqe gar anechomai

twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
afronwn aphrOn
a_ Gen Pl m
fronimoi ontes phronimos eimi

19 For ye suffer fools gladly, seeing ye [yourselves] are wise.
GRATIFYly for with-relish
YE-ARE-toleratING ye-are-bearing-with gar ei gar ei

Conj Cond
OF-THE the
UN-DISPOSED DISPOSED imprudent prudent katadouloi katadouloO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
BEING
11:20 anecesqe
anechomai
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
katesqiei katesthiO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YE-ARE-toleratING for ye-are-bearing-with-it ei ei

Cond
IF
ANY-one anyone ei ei
Cond
YOU(p) ye
IS-DOWN-SLAVING IF is-enslaving ei ei
Cond
ANY-one anyone eis eis

Prep
IS-DOWN-EATING is-devouring proswpon prosOpon

n_ Acc Sg n
20 For ye suffer, if a man bring you into bondage, if a man devour [you], if a man take [of you], if a man exalt himself, if a man smite you on the face.
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
lambanei lambanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
epairetai epairO
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
IF
ANY-one anyone derei derO
IS-GETTING-UP IF is-obtaining
ANY-one anyone
IS-beING-ON-LIFTED IF is-elevating-himself
ANY-one anyone
INTO face
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye
IS-SKINNING is-lashing
AV
2Corinthians 11
11:21 kata
kata
Prep
atimian legw atimia legO

ws oti hmeis hOs hoti hEmeis

hsqenhkamen astheneO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
d de
Conj
an an
Part
according-to UN-VALUE dishonor tis tis

px Nom Sg m
I-AM-sayING AS I-am-saying-this
that
WE
HAVE-been-UN-FIRM IN have-been-weak kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
WHICH
YET EVER
tolma tolmaO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
afrosunh legw aphrosunE legO

tolmw tolmaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
21 I speak as concerning reproach, as though we had been weak. Howbeit whereinsoever any is bold, (I speak foolishly,) I am bold also.
ANY anyone
IS-DARING
IN
imprudence
I-AM-sayING I-am-saying-it
I-AM-DARING am-daring
AND-I I-also kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
11:22 ebraioi
hebraios
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
israhlitai eisin israElitEs eimi

sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
abraam abraam
ni proper
HEBREWS
THEY-ARE
AND-I I-also
ISRAELITES
THEY-ARE
AND-I I-also
seed
22 . Are they Hebrews? so [am] I. Are they Israelites? so [am] I. Are they the seed of Abraham? so [am] I.
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
THEY-ARE
AND-I I-also cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
11:23 diakonoi
diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
parafronwn paraphroneO
lalw laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
uper huper
Prep
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
THRU-SERVitors OF-ANOINTED THEY-ARE servants of-Christ en en

Prep
BEING-BESIDE-DISPOSED I-AM-TALKING OVER I being-insane I-am-speaking above-them perissoterws en perissoterOs en

Adv Prep
kopois kopos
n_ Dat Pl m
perissoterws en perissoterOs en
Adv Prep
fulakais phulakE
n_ Dat Pl f
plhgais plEgE
n_ Dat Pl f
23 Are they ministers of Christ? (I speak as a fool) I [am] more; in labours more abundant, in stripes above measure, in prisons more frequent, in deaths oft.
IN
toils more-exceedingly weariness(p)
IN
GUARDhouses more-exceedingly jails
IN
BLOWS
uperballontws en huperballontOs en
Adv Prep
qanatois pollakis thanatos pollakis

n_ Dat Pl m Adv
OVER-CAST-ly inordinately
IN
DEATHS
MANY-times often mian heis

n_ Acc Sg f
11:24 upo ioudaiwn pentakis tesserakonta para

hupo
Prep
ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
pentakis
Adv
tesserakonta
ni numeral
para
Prep
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
24 Of the Jews five times received I forty [stripes] save one.
by
JUDA-ans Jews
FIVE-times
FOUR-TY forty
BESIDE ONE besidesave tris tris

Adv
I-GOT
11:25 tris
tris
Adv
errabdisqhn rhabdizO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
apax eliqasqhn hapax lithazO

Adv vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
enauaghsa nauageO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
nucqhmeron en nuchthEmeron en
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
THRice I-AM-RODizED ONCE I-am-flogged-with-rods tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-STONizED THRICE I-NAUTICAL-WRECK NIGHT-DAY I-am-stoned I-am-in-a-shipwreck a-night-and-a-day
IN
25 Thrice was I beaten with rods, once was I stoned, thrice I suffered shipwreck, a night and a day I have been in the deep;
buqw buthos
n_ Dat Sg m
pepoihka poieO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
THE
SUBMERGED I-HAVE-DONE marsh I-have-dospent kindunois ek kindunos ek

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
26 [In] journeyings often, [in] perils of waters, [in] perils of robbers, [in] perils by [mine own] countrymen, [in] perils by the heathen, [in] perils in the city, [in] perils in the wilderness, [in] perils in the sea, [in] perils among false brethren;
11:26 odoiporiais pollakis kindunois potamwn kindunois lhstwn

hodoiporia
n_ Dat Pl f
pollakis
Adv
kindunos
n_ Dat Pl m
potamos
n_ Gen Pl m
kindunos
n_ Dat Pl m
lEstEs
n_ Gen Pl m
to-WAYS-GOES to-journeys genous genos

n_ Gen Sg n
MANY-times often
to-DANGERS
OF-rivers
to-DANGERS
OF-ROBBERS to-DANGERS
OUT
kindunois ex kindunos ek
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
kindunois en kindunos en
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
polei polis
n_ Dat Sg f
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
erhmia erEmia
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-breed of-race
to-DANGERS
OUT OF-NATIONS to-DANGERS
IN
city
to-DANGERS
IN
DESOLATE wilderness
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
qalassh kindunois en thalassa kindunos en

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Pl m Prep
yeudadelfois pseudadelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
to-DANGERS
IN
SEA
to-DANGERS
IN FALSE-brothers among false-brethren limw limos

n_ Dat Sg m
11:27 kopw
kopos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai mocqw kai mochthos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
agrupniais pollakis en agrupnia pollakis en

n_ Dat Pl f Adv Prep
kai diyei kai dipsos

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
en en
Prep
to-toil
AND
LABOR
IN
vigils
MANY-times often kai gumnothti kai gumnotEs

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
IN
FAMINE
AND
THIRST
IN
27 In weariness and painfulness, in watchings often, in hunger and thirst, in fastings often, in cold and nakedness.
nhsteiais pollakis en nEsteia pollakis en

n_ Dat Pl f Adv Prep
yucei psuchos
n_ Dat Sg n
fasts
MANY-times often
IN
cold
AND
NAKEDness
AV
11:28 cwris
chOris
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
parektos parektos
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epistasis moi epistasis egO

n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Dat Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kaq kata
Prep
hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
apart-from THE the(p) h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
BESIDE-OUTed THE outside
ON-STANDing coming-upon
to-ME me
THE
according-to DAY
28 Beside those things that are without, that which cometh upon me daily, the care of all the churches.
merimna paswn twn merimna pas ho

n_ Nom Sg f a_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Pl f
ekklhsiwn ekklEsia
n_ Gen Pl f
THE
anxiety solicitude
OF-ALL
OF-THE the
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias asqenw astheneO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
11:29 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg m
asqenei astheneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
skandalizetai kai ouk skandalizO kai ou

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Conj Part Neg
29 Who is weak, and I am not weak? who is offended, and I burn not?
ANY-one who ? egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
IS-beING-UN-FIRM AND is-being-weak
NOT
I-AM-beING-UN-FIRM ANY I-am-being-weak who ?
IS-beING-SNARED
AND
NOT
puroumai puroO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
AM-beING-FIRED am-being-on-fire kaucasqai kauchaomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
11:30 ei
ei
Cond
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
asqeneias astheneia
n_ Gen Sg f
WH
mou
NA
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
30 If I must needs glory, I will glory of the things which concern mine infirmities.
IF
TO-BE-BOASTING IS-BINDING it-is-binding
THE the(p)
OF-THE
UN-FIRMness weakness
OF-ME
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-BOASTING
11:31 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pathr kai patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
HAS-PERCEIVED THE is-aware yeudomai pseudomai

31 The God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, which is blessed for evermore, knoweth that I lie not.
wn eimi

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas oti ou aiOn hoti ou

n_ Acc Pl m Conj Part Neg
One-BEING one-being
blessed
INTO THE
eons
that
NOT
I-AM-FALSifyING I-am-lying basilews efrourei basileus phroureO

n_ Gen Sg m vi impf Act 3 Sg
11:32 en
en
Prep
damaskw o damaskos ho
eqnarchs areta ethnarchEs haretas

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
IN
DAMASCUS
THE
ethnarch
ARETAS of-Aretas
OF-THE the
KING
GARRISONED THE
32 In Damascus the governor under Aretas the king kept the city of the Damascenes with a garrison, desirous to apprehend me:
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
damaskhnwn piasai me damaskEnos piazO egO

a_ Gen Pl m vn Aor Act pp 1 Acc Sg
city
OF-DAMASCENES TO-arrest
ME
11:33 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
quridos en thuris en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
sarganh sarganE
n_ Dat Sg f
ecalasqhn chalaO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
teicous kai teichos kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
33 And through a window in a basket was I let down by the wall, and escaped his hands.
AND
THRU window through
IN
WICKER-basket I-AM-LOWERED THRU THE through
WALL
AND
exefugon tas ekpheugO ho

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Acc Pl f
ceiras autou cheir autos

I-OUT-FLED I-escaped
THE
HANDS
OF-him
AV
2Corinthians 12
12:1 kaucasqai
kauchaomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
sumferon sumpherO
men men
Part
eleusomai erchomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
TO-BE-BOASTING IS-BINDING it-is-binding
NOT
beING-expedient
INDEED I-SHALL-BE-COMING YET INTO
. It is not expedient for me doubtless to glory. I will come to visions and revelations of the Lord.
optasias kai apokaluyeis kuriou optasia kai apokalupsis kurios

n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f n_ Gen Sg m
VIEWS apparitions
AND
FROM-COVERings revelations
OF-Master of-Lord cristw pro christos pro

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
12:2 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
etwn etos
n_ Gen Pl n
dekatessarwn eite dekatessares eite

n_ Gen Pl n Conj
en en
Prep
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED human I-am-acquainted-with swmati ouk sOma ou

IN
ANOINTED Christ
BEFORE YEARS
TEN-FOUR fourteen
IF-BESIDES IN whether oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
eite eite
Conj
ektos tou ektos ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos ouk sOma ou

I knew a man in Christ above fourteen years ago, (whether in the body, I cannot tell; or whether out of the body, I cannot tell: God knoweth;) such an one caught up to the third heaven.
BODY
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED IF-BESIDES OUTside I-am-aware or oiden eidO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
OF-THE the ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BODY
NOT
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED I-am-aware ouranou ouranos

n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
arpagenta harpazO
vp 2Aor Pas Acc Sg m
toiouton ews tritou toioutos heOs tritos

pd Acc Sg m Conj a_ Gen Sg m
THE
God
HAS-PERCEIVED BEING-SNATCHED is-aware ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THE
such such-one
TILL
OF-third third
heaven
12:3 kai oida

kai
Conj
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
toiouton anqrwpon eite toioutos anthrOpos eite

pd Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m Conj
en en
Prep
swmati eite sOma eite

n_ Dat Sg n Conj
AND
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE I-am-acquainted-with tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
such
WH WH
human
NA NA
IF-BESIDES IN whether oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
BODY
IF-BESIDES or qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
And I knew such a man, (whether in the body, or out of the body, I cannot tell: God knoweth;)
cwris chOris
Adv
swmatos sOma
n_ Gen Sg n
ouk oida
ouk ou
Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
apart-from THE
BODY
NOT
THE
God
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
HAS-PERCEIVED is-aware
12:4 oti hrpagh

hoti
Conj
harpazO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
paradeison kai hkousen paradeisos kai akouO

arrhta arrhEtos
a_ Acc Pl n
rhmata rhEma
n_ Acc Pl n
that
he-WAS-SNATCHed INTO THE he-was-snatched-away ouk ou

Part Neg
PARK paradise
AND
HEARS
UN-declarable declarations ineffable
How that he was caught up into paradise, and heard unspeakable words, which it is not lawful for a man to utter.
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
exon exesti
anqrwpw lalhsai anthrOpos laleO

n_ Dat Sg m vn Aor Act
WHICH
NOT
allowING
to-human
TO-TALK to-speak uper de huper de

Prep Conj
12:5 uper tou

huper
Prep
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
toioutou kauchsomai toioutos kauchaomai

pd Gen Sg m vi Fut midD 1 Sg
emautou ou emautou ou
Of such an one will I glory: yet of myself I will not glory, but in mine infirmities.
OVER
THE
such such-one ei ei
Cond
I-SHALL-BE-BOASTING OVER
YET MYself
NOT
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
asqeneiais astheneia
n_ Dat Pl f
I-SHALL-BE-BOASTING IF
NO
IN
THE
UN-FIRMnesses infirmities esomai eimi

vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
12:6 ean
ean
Cond
gar qelhsw gar thelO

kauchsasqai ouk kauchaomai ou

vn Aor midD Part Neg
afrwn aphrOn
a_ Nom Sg m
alhqeian gar alEtheia gar

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
IF-EVER for
I-SHOULD-BE-WILLING TO-BOAST
NOT
I-SHALL-BE
UN-DISPOSED TRUTH imprudent logishtai logizomai

vs Aor midD 3 Sg
for
erw ereO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
feidomai pheidomai
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
uper huper
Prep
For though I would desire to glory, I shall not be a fool; for I will say the truth: but [now] I forbear, lest any man should think of me above that which he seeth me [to be], or [that] he heareth of me.
I-SHALL-BE-declarING I-AM-SPARING I-am-reticent o hos

pr Acc Sg n
YET NO
ANY anyone
NA
INTO ME
SHOULD-BE-accountING OVER should-be-reckoning above ex ek

Prep
blepei blepO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
h E
Part
akouei akouO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
WHICH
he-IS-lookING ME he-is-observing of-me
OR
IS-HEARING
ANY anything
OUT OF-ME
AV
2Corinthians 12
12:7 kai th
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
uperbolh twn huperbolE ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl f
apokaluyewn dio apokalupsis dio

n_ Gen Pl f Conj
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
AND also
to-THE
OVER-CAST OF-THE transcendence edoqh didOmi

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
FROM-COVERings revelations moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
THRU-WHICH THAT NO wherefore th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
uperairwmai uperairO
vs Pres Pas 1 Sg
skoloy skolops
n_ Nom Sg m
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
And lest I should be exalted above measure through the abundance of the revelations, there was given to me a thorn in the flesh, the messenger of Satan to buffet me, lest I should be exalted above measure.
I-MAY-BE-beING-OVER-LIFTED WAS-GIVEN to-ME I-may-be-being-lifted-up there-was-given satana satanas

n_ Gen Sg m
SPLINTER
to-THE
FLESH
MESSENGER
ina hina
Conj
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
kolafizh kolaphizO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
uperairwmai uperairO
vs Pres Pas 1 Sg
OF-SATAN (adversary) THAT ME of-Satan
he-MAY-BE-FROM-CHASTENING THAT NO he-may-be-buffeting ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
I-MAY-BE-beING-OVER-LIFTED I-may-be-being-lifted-up aposth aphistEmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
8
12:8 uper
huper
Prep
toutou tris houtos tris

pd Gen Sg m Adv
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
parekalesa ina parakaleO hina

For this thing I besought the Lord thrice, that it might depart from me.
OVER this for-the-sake-of ap apo

Prep
THRice THE
Master Lord
THAT it-SHOULD-BE-FROM-STANDING it-should-be-withdrawing
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
FROM ME
12:9 kai eirhken

kai
Conj
ereO
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
arkei arkeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar gar
Conj
AND
He-HAS-declarED to-ME
IS-SUFFICING to-YOU is-being-sufficient hdista hEdista

Adv
THE
grace
OF-ME
THE
for
dunamis en dunamis en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
asqeneia astheneia
n_ Dat Sg f
teleitai teleO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
mallon kauchsomai mallon kauchaomai

Adv vi Fut midD 1 Sg
en en
Prep
And he said unto me, My grace is sufficient for thee: for my strength is made perfect in weakness. Most gladly therefore will I rather glory in my infirmities, that the power of Christ may rest upon me.
ABILITY power tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
IN
UN-FIRMness IS-beING-maturED most-GRATIFY-ly THEN RATHER infirmity is-being-perfected with-the-greatest-relish

NA
I-SHALL-BE-BOASTING IN I-shall-be-glorifying eme egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
asqeneiais astheneia
n_ Dat Pl f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ina hina
Conj
episkhnwsh episkEnoO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ep epi
Prep
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
dunamis dunamis
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
UN-FIRMnesses infirmities cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ME
THAT SHOULD-BE-ON-BOOTHING ON ME onover should-be-tabernacling-over
THE
ABILITY power
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ eudokw eudokeO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
12:10 dio
dio
Conj
en en
Prep
asqeneiais en astheneia en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
ubresin hubris
n_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep
anagkais en anagkE en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
THRU-WHICH I-AM-WELL-SEEMING IN wherefore I-am-delighting diwgmois kai stenocwriais uper diOgmos kai stenochOria huper
n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl f Prep
UN-FIRMnesses infirmities
IN
OUTRAGES IN
necessities
IN
cristou otan christos hotan

n_ Gen Sg m Conj
gar asqenw gar astheneO

tote tote
Adv
10 Therefore I take pleasure in infirmities, in reproaches, in necessities, in persecutions, in distresses for Christ's sake: for when I am weak, then am I strong.
CHASE-ings persecutions
AND
CRAMP-SPACES distresses
OVER ANOINTED for-the-sake-of Christ
when-EVER for whenever
I-MAY-BE-beING-UN-FIRM then I-may-be-being-weak
dunatos eimi dunatos eimi

ABLE powerful
I-AM
12:11 gegona
ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
afrwn aphrOn
a_ Nom Sg m
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hnagkasate egw anagkazO egO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Nom Sg
gar wfeilon gar opheilO

uf hupo
Prep
I-HAVE-BECOME UN-DISPOSED YOU(p) imprudent ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
ME
necessitate compel
for
OWED ought
by
sunistasqai sunistEmi
vn Pres Pas
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
gar usterhsa twn gar hustereO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg t_ Gen Pl m
uper lian huper lian

Prep Adv
11 . I am become a fool in glorying; ye have compelled me: for I ought to have been commended of you: for in nothing am I behind the very chiefest apostles, though I be nothing.
YOU(p) ye
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-STOOD NOT-YET-ONE for to-be-being-commended in-nothing kai ouden kai oudeis

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
I-WANT I-am-deficient
OF-THE
OVER
VERY
apostolwn ei apostolos ei
n_ Gen Pl m Cond
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
IF
AND NOT-YET-ONE I-AM even nothing
AV
2Corinthians 12
12:12 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
men men
Part
shmeia sEmeion
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
apostolou kateirgasqh en apostolos katergazomai en

n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Pas 3 Sg Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
THE
INDEED SIGNS
OF-THE
WH NA
commissioner apostle te te
Part
IS-DOWN-ACTED is-produced
IN YOU(p) among ye
IN
EVERY all
12 Truly the signs of an apostle were wrought among you in all patience, in signs, and wonders, and mighty deeds.
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
shmeiois sEmeion
n_ Dat Pl n
te
kai terasin kai dunamesin kai teras kai dunamis

Conj n_ Dat Pl n Conj n_ Dat Pl f
UNDER-REMAINing to-SIGNS endurance
BESIDES
AND
MIRACLES
AND
ABILITIES powerful-deeds loipas ekklhsias loipon ekklEsia

13 For what is it wherein ye were inferior to other churches, except [it be] that I myself was not burdensome to you? forgive me this wrong.
12:13 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
gar estin gar eimi

o hos
pr Acc Sg n
hsswqhte hEttaomai
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
uper tas huper ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl f
ANY anything ei ei
Cond
for
IS there-is
WHICH in-which egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
YE-WERE-DIMINISHED OVER ye-were-discomfited above ou ou

Part Neg
THE
rest rest(p) carisasqe charizomai

vm Aor midD 2 Pl
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
oti autos hoti autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
katenarkhsa katanarkaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
IF
NO
that
SAME myself
NOT
DOWN-NUMB OF-YOU(p) grace-YE to-ME am-an-encumbrance of-ye deal-graciously-ye-with ! me
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
adikian adikia
n_ Acc Sg f
tauthn houtos
pd Acc Sg f
THE
UN-JUSTness this injustice triton touto tritos houtos

a_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n
12:14 idou
idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
etoimws ecw hetoimOs echO

elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai kai
Conj
BE-PERCEIVING third lo ! third-time ou ou

Part Neg
this
READily readiness ou ou
Part Neg
I-AM-HAVING
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
katanarkhsw katanarkaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
gar zhtw gar zEteO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
alla umas alla humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
14 Behold, the third time I am ready to come to you; and I will not be burdensome to you: for I seek not yours, but you: for the children ought not to lay up for the parents, but the parents for the children.
NOT
I-SHALL-BE-DOWN-NUMBING NOT I-shall-be-being-an-encumbrance ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
for
I-AM-SEEKING THE
OF-YOU(p) but of-ye
YOU(p) ye
NOT
gar ofeilei gar opheilO

tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
goneusin qhsaurizein goneus thEsaurizO

alla oi alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
for
IS-OWING ought tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
THE
offsprings children
to-THE
parents
TO-BE-PLACING-INTO-MORROW but to-be-hoarding
THE
goneis goneus
n_ Nom Pl m
teknois teknon
n_ Dat Pl n
parents
to-THE
offsprings children de de
Conj
12:15 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
hdista hEdista
Adv
dapanhsw dapanaO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
kai ekdapanhqhsomai kai ekdapanaO

uper huper
Prep
YET GRATIFY-ly SHALL-BE-SPENDING AND with-the-greatest-relish yucwn umwn psuchE humeis

SHALL-BE-BEING-OUT-SPENT OVER shall-be-being-bankrupted for-the-sake-of

WH
15 And I will very gladly spend and be spent for you; though the more abundantly I love you, the less I be loved.
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ei ei
Cond
perissoterws umas perissoterOs humeis

Adv pp 2 Acc Pl
agapw
NA
agapwn agapaO
THE
souls
OF-YOU(p) IF of-ye agapwmai agapaO

vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
more-exceedingly
YOU(p) ye
LOVING one-loving
hsson hEsson
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
DIMINISHly
I-AM-beING-LOVED
12:16 estw
eimi
vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
katebarhsa umas katabareO humeis

alla uparcwn alla huparchO

panourgos panourgos
n_ Nom Sg m
LET-it-BE let-it-be ! dolw dolos

n_ Dat Sg m
YET I
NOT
DOWN-HEAVY overburden
YOU(p) ye
but
clever crafty
16 But be it so, I did not burden you: nevertheless, being crafty, I caught you with guile.
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
to-FRAUD to-guile
YOU(p) ye tina tis
I-GOT
12:17 mh
mE
Part Neg
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
apestalka apostellO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
px Acc Sg m
NO
ANY anyone
OF-WHOM I-HAVE-commissionED TOWARD YOU(p) I-have-dispatched ye
17 Did I make a gain of you by any of them whom I sent unto you?
THRU him through
AV
epleonekthsa umas pleonekteO humeis

I-MORE-HAVE I-overreach
YOU(p) ye kai sunapesteila kai sunapostellO

12:18 parekalesa titon

parakaleO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
titos
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon mhti adelphos mEti

TITUS
AND
I-TOGETHER-commission THE I-dispatch-together-with-him ou ou

Part Neg
brother
NO-ANY not ?
epleonekthsen umas pleonekteO humeis

titos titos
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
pneumati periepathsamen pneuma peripateO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Act 1 Pl
18 I desired Titus, and with [him] I sent a brother. Did Titus make a gain of you? walked we not in the same spirit? [walked we] not in the same steps?
MORE-HAS overreaches ou ou
Part Neg
YOU(p) ye
TITUS
NOT
to-THE
SAME
spirit
WE-ABOUT-TREAD we-walk
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
autois icnesin autos ichnos

pp Dat Pl n n_ Dat Pl n
NOT
to-THE
SAME
TRACES footprints oti umin hoti humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
12:19 palai dokeite

palai
Adv
dokeO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
apologoumeqa apologeomai
katenanti katenanti
Adv
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
OLD of-old
YE-ARE-SEEMING that ye-are-presuming ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
Conj
WE-ARE-FROM-sayING DOWN-IN-INSTEAD OF-God we-are-defending-ourselves facing God agaphtoi uper agapEtos huper
a_ Voc Pl m Prep
IN
19 Again, think ye that we excuse ourselves unto you? we speak before God in Christ: but [we do] all things, dearly beloved, for your edifying.
cristw laloumen christos laleO

panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ
WE-ARE-TALKING THE we-are-speaking
YET ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
oikodomhs oikodomE
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-HOME-BUILDing edification
12:20 foboumai
phobeO
gar mh gar mE
Conj Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
elqwn erchomai
ouc ou
Part Neg
oious hoios
pk Acc Pl n
qelw thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-FEARING
for
NO lest
how COMING somehow on-coming eureqw heuriskO

vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
NOT
THE-WHICH I-AM-WILLING such-as oion hoios

pk Acc Sg m
eurw heuriskO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
I-MAY-BE-FINDING YOU(p) ye mh mE
Part Neg
AND-I
MAY-BE-BEING-FOUND to-YOU(p) to-ye qumoi thumos

n_ Nom Pl m
THE-WHICH NOT such-as
YE-ARE-WILLING
20 For I fear, lest, when I come, I shall not find you such as I would, and [that] I shall be found unto you such as ye would not: lest [there be] debates, envyings, wraths, strifes, backbitings, whisperings, swellings, tumults:
pws pOs
Part
eris eris
n_ Nom Sg f
zhlos zElos
n_ Nom Sg m
eriqeiai katalaliai yiqurismoi fusiwseis eritheia katalalia psithurismos phusiOsis

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl f
NO lest
how STRIFE somehow
BOILing jealousy
furies fury(p)
STRIFES factions
DOWN-TALKS vilifications
WHISPERings
INFLATings puffing-up(p)
akatastasiai akatastasia
n_ Nom Pl f
UN-DOWN-STANDings turbulences
12:21 mh
mE
Part Neg
palin elqontos palin erchomai

Adv vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tapeinwsh tapeinoO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
NO
AGAIN
OF-COMING
OF-ME
SHALL-BE-makING-LOW ME shall-be-humbling pollous twn polus ho

THE
God
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai penqhsw kai pentheO

prohmarthkotwn proamartanO
OF-ME
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
AND
I-SHALL-BE-MOURNING MANY for-many
OF-THE
ones-HAVING-BEFORE-missED ones-having-sinned-before kai aselgeia kai aselgeia

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
21 [And] lest, when I come again, my God will humble me among you, and [that] I shall bewail many which have sinned already, and have not repented of the uncleanness and fornication and lasciviousness which they have committed.
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
metanohsantwn epi th metanoeO epi ho

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m Prep t_ Dat Sg f
akaqarsia kai porneia akatharsia kai porneia

AND
NO
OF-after-MINDing of-repenting epraxan prassO

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
ON
THE
AND
PROSTITUTION AND
wantonness
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
WHICH
THEY-PRACTISE they-commit
AV
2Corinthians 13
13:1 triton touto

tritos
a_ Acc Sg n
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ercomai erchomai
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
epi stomatos duo epi stoma duo

Prep n_ Gen Sg n ni numeral
marturwn martus
n_ Gen Pl m
third third-time kai triwn kai treis

Conj n_ Gen Pl m
this
I-AM-COMING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye pan pas

a_ Nom Sg n
ON
MOUTH
OF-TWO of-two
witnesses
. This [is] the third [time] I am coming to you. In the mouth of two or three witnesses shall every word be established.
staqhsetai histEmi
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
rhma rhEma
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
OF-THREE SHALL-BE-BEING-STOOD EVERY three shall-be-being-made-to-stand kai prolegw kai prolegO

declaration
13:2 proeirhka
proereO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
ws parwn hOs pareimi

Adv vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
deuteron kai deuteros kai

a_ Nom Sg n Conj
I-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED AND I-have-declared-before apwn apeimi

I-AM-BEFORE-sayING AS am-predicting prohmarthkosin proamartanO

BESIDE-BEING when-being-present kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
THE
SECOND second-time
AND
nun tois nun ho

Adv t_ Dat Pl m
loipois pasin loipon pas

oti hoti
Conj
I told you before, and foretell you, as if I were present, the second time; and being absent now I write to them which heretofore have sinned, and to all other, that, if I come again, I will not spare:
FROM-BEING being-absent ean ean

Cond
NOW to-THE
ones-HAVING-BEFORE-missED AND ones-having-sinned-before to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
to-THE
rest rest(p)
to-ALL all
that
elqw erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
palin ou palin ou
Adv Part Neg
feisomai pheidomai
vi Fut midD 1 Sg
IF-EVER I-MAY-BE-COMING INTO THE
AGAIN
NOT
I-SHALL-BE-SPARING
13:3 epei dokimhn zhteite

epei
Conj
dokimE
n_ Acc Sg f
zEteO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
lalountos laleO
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
since
testedness test ouk ou

Part Neg
YE-ARE-SEEKING OF-THE
IN
ME
TALKING speaking en en
Prep
OF-ANOINTED WHO Christ
Since ye seek a proof of Christ speaking in me, which to you-ward is not weak, but is mighty in you.
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
asqenei astheneO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
alla dunatei alla dunateO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
INTO YOU(p) ye
NOT
IS-beING-UN-FIRM but is-being-weak
IS-beING-ABLE IN YOU(p) is-being-powerful among ye alla alla

Conj
13:4 kai gar estaurwqh ex

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
stauroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ek
Prep
asqeneias astheneia
n_ Gen Sg f
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
dunamews qeou dunamis theos

AND for even
He-WAS-impalED OUT OF-UN-FIRMness but IS-LIVING he-was-crucified of-weakness nevertheless he-is-living asqenoumen astheneO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
OUT OF-ABILITY of-power sun sun

Prep
OF-God
kai gar hmeis kai gar hEmeis

Conj Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
alla zhsomen alla zaO

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ek ek
Prep
For though he was crucified through weakness, yet he liveth by the power of God. For we also are weak in him, but we shall live with him by the power of God toward you.
AND also
for
WE
ARE-beING-UN-FIRM IN are-being-weak
WH
Him
NA NA
but
WE-SHALL-BE-LIVING TOGETHER to-Him with-him
OUT
dunamews qeou dunamis theos

eis umas
WH
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-ABILITY of-power
OF-God
INTO YOU(p) ye este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
13:5 eautous peirazete ei

heautou
pf 3 Acc Pl m
peirazO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ei
Cond
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei eautous dokimazete h pistis heautou dokimazO E

n_ Dat Sg f pf 3 Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl Part
selves yourselves ouk ou

Part Neg
BE-YE-tryING be-ye-trying !
IF
YE-ARE
IN
THE
BELIEF faith cristos en christos en

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
selves yourselves umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
BE-YE-testING be-ye-testing ! ei ei
Cond
OR
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eautous oti ihsous heautou hoti iEsous

pf 3 Acc Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
mhti mEti
Part Int
Examine yourselves, whether ye be in the faith; prove your own selves. Know ye not your own selves, how that Jesus Christ is in you, except ye be reprobates?
NOT
YE-ARE-ON-KNOWING selves ye-are-recognizing yourselves
that
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
IN
YOU(p) ye
IF
NO-ANY no-anysomewhat
adokimoi este adokimos eimi

YE-ARE
13:6 elpizw
elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
oti gnwsesqe hoti ginOskO


Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
adokimoi adokimos
a_ Nom Pl m
But I trust that ye shall know that we are not reprobates.
I-AM-EXPECTING YET that
YE-SHALL-BE-KNOWING that
WE
NOT
ARE
UN-tested disqualified kakon kakos

a_ Acc Sg n
13:7 eucomeqa
euchomai
de de
Conj
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
poihsai umas poieO humeis

mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
WE-ARE-wishING
YET TOWARD THE
God
NO
TO-DO
YOU(p) ye
EVIL
NO-YET-ONE anything
. Now I pray to God that ye do no evil; not that we should appear approved, but that ye should do that which is honest, though we be as reprobates.
AV
2Corinthians 13
ouc ou
Part Neg
ina hina
Conj
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
dokimoi fanwmen dokimos phainO

a_ Nom Pl m vs 2Aor Pas 1 Pl
all ina alla hina

Conj Conj
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
NOT
THAT WE
tested qualified de de
Conj
MAY-BE-APPEARING but
THAT YOU(p) ye
THE
IDEAL
poihte poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ws adokimoi wmen hOs adokimos eimi

Adv a_ Nom Pl m vs Pres vxx 1 Pl
MAY-BE-DOING WE
YET AS
UN-tested disqualified ti tis

px Acc Sg n
MAY-BE
13:8 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar dunameqa gar dunamai

kata ths kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias alla uper alEtheia alla huper

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
For we can do nothing against the truth, but for the truth.
NOT
for
WE-ARE-ABLE
ANY anything
DOWN against
OF-THE the
TRUTH
but
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
TRUTH
13:9 cairomen
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
gar otan gar hotan

Conj Conj
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
asqenwmen astheneO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
dunatoi hte dunatos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
WE-ARE-JOYING for we-are-rejoicing touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
when-EVER WE whenever thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
MAY-BE-beING-UN-FIRM YOU(p) may-be-being-weak ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
YET ABLE powerful
MAY-BE
For we are glad, when we are weak, and ye are strong: and this also we wish, [even] your perfection.
kai eucomeqa kai euchomai

katartisin katartisis
n_ Acc Sg f
this
AND also
WE-ARE-wishING
THE
OF-YOU(p) DOWN-EQUIPPing of-ye adjustment apwn apeimi

13:10 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
grafw graphO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
parwn pareimi
mh mE
Part Neg
THRU this because-of apotomws crhswmai apotomOs chraomai

Adv
these FROM-BEING these-things being-absent kata kata

Prep
I-AM-WRITING THAT BESIDE-BEING being-present exousian hn exousia hos

NO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
10 Therefore I write these things being absent, lest being present I should use sharpness, according to the power which the Lord hath given me to edification, and not to destruction.
vs Aor midD 1 Sg
FROM-CUTly severity moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-USING according-to THE
authority
WHICH
THE
Master Lord
GIVES
eis eis
Prep
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
kaqairesin kathairesis
n_ Acc Sg f
to-ME me
INTO HOME-BUILDing AND edification
NOT
INTO DOWN-LIFTing pulling-down katartizesqe katartizO

vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
13:11 loipon
loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
adelfoi cairete adelphos chairO

parakaleisqe parakaleO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
rest brothers furthermore brethren ! auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
BE-YE-JOYING BE-YE-beING-DOWN-EQUIPPED BE-YE-beING-BESIDE-CALLED THE be-ye-rejoicing ! be-ye-being-adjusted ! be-ye-being-entreated ! eirhneuete eirEneuO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
11 . Finally, brethren, farewell. Be perfect, be of good comfort, be of one mind, live in peace; and the God of love and peace shall be with you.
froneite phroneO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs kai agapE kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
SAME
BE-YE-beING-DISPOSed BE-YE-beING-at-PEACE AND be-ye-being-disposed ! be-ye-being-at-peace ! meq meta

Prep
THE
God
OF-THE
LOVE
AND
eirhnhs estai eirEnE eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
PEACE of-peace
SHALL-BE
WITH YOU(p) ye agiw hagios

a_ Dat Sg n
13:12 aspasasqe allhlous en

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
en
Prep
filhmati philEma
n_ Dat Sg n
12 Greet one another with an holy kiss.
greet-YE greet-ye !
one-another
IN
HOLY
FOND-effect kiss agioi hagios

a_ Nom Pl m
13:13 (13:12) aspazontai

aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
13
All the saints salute you.
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye tou ho
THE
HOLY-ones ALL saints ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
WH
13:14 (13:13) h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou
NA
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AND
14 The grace of the Lord Jesus Christ, and the love of God, and the communion of the Holy Ghost, [be] with you all. Amen. <<[The second [epistle]
AV
2Corinthians 13 - Galatians 1
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
koinwnia tou koinOnia ho

agiou hagios
a_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
LOVE
OF-THE
God
AND
THE
communion
OF-THE
HOLY
spirit
to the Corinthians was written from Philippi, [a city] of Macedonia, by Titus and Lucas.]>>

WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Galatians 1
Galatians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
apostolos ouk apostolos ou

ap apo
Prep
anqrwpwn oude anthrOpos oude

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
di dia
Prep
anqrwpou alla dia anthrOpos alla dia

PAUL
NOT
FROM humans
NOT-YET THRU human neither through egeirantos egeirO

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
but
THRU through
. Paul, an apostle, (not of men, neither by man, but by Jesus Christ, and God the Father, who raised him from the dead;)
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou kai qeou christos kai theos

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AND
God
FATHER
THE
Him
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones galatias galatia

n_ Gen Sg f
2
1:2 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi tais adelphos ho

n_ Nom Pl m t_ Dat Pl f

And all the brethren which are with me, unto the churches of Galatia:
AND
THE-ones the
TOGETHER to-ME togetherwith me kai eirhnh kai eirEnE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
ALL
brothers brethren qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
OF-THE
GALATIA
1:3 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apo apo
Prep
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Grace [be] to you and peace from God the Father, and [from] our Lord Jesus Christ,
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:4 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dontos didOmi
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
uper huper
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
amartiwn hmwn hamartia hemeis

opws hopOs
Adv
THE
One-GIVING one-giving hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
Self himself ek ek
Prep
OVER THE for-the-sake-of tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
misses sins tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-US
WHICH-how so-that ponhrou kata ponEros kata

a_ Gen Sg m Prep
Who gave himself for our sins, that he might deliver us from this present evil world, according to the will of God and our Father:
exelhtai exaireO
vs 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
enestwtos enistEmi
He-MAY-BE-OUT-LIFTING US he-may-be-extricating to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OUT OF-THE
eon
THE
HAVING-IN-STOOD wicked present
according-to

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai patros kai patEr

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
WILL
OF-THE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-US
1:5 w
hos
pr Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas twn aiOn ho

aiwnwn amhn aiOn amEn

n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
To whom [be] glory for ever and ever. Amen.
to-WHOM
THE
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
OF-THE
eons
AMEN
1:6 qaumazw
thaumazO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oti outws tacews metatiqesqe hoti houtOs tacheOs metatithEmi

Conj Adv Adv vi Pres mid/pas 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kalesantos kaleO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
I-AM-MARVELING that
thus
WH
SWIFTly
NA
YE-ARE-beING-after-PLACED FROM THE ye-are-being-transferred eis eis

Prep
CALLing one-calling
. I marvel that ye are so soon removed from him that called you into the grace of Christ unto another gospel:
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
cariti charis
n_ Dat Sg f
cristou
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye
IN
grace
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
INTO DIFFERENT WELL-MESSAGE
1:7 o
hos
pr Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
allo allos
a_ Nom Sg n
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
WHICH
NOT
IS
other another kai qelontes kai thelO

Conj
IF
NO
ANY some
ARE
THE
Which is not another; but there be some that trouble you, and would pervert the gospel of Christ.
tarassontes umas tarassO humeis

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
metastreyai to metastrephO ho
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ones-DISTURBING ones-disturbing cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
AND also
WILLING
TO-after-TURN to-distort
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Galatians 1
1:8 alla kai ean

alla
Conj
kai
Conj
ean
Cond
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
h E
Part
aggelos aggelos
n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
ouranou ouranos
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
euaggelishtai
but
NA
AND also
IF-EVER WE
OR
MESSENGER OUT OF-heaven
But though we, or an angel from heaven, preach any other gospel unto you than that which we have preached unto you, let him be accursed.
euaggelizhtai euaggelizO
vs Pres Mid 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
par para
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
euhggelisameqa umin euaggelizO humeis

vi Aor Mid 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
anaqema anathema
n_ Nom Sg n
SHOULD-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING should-be-bringing-a-well-message estw eimi

vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye
BESIDE WHICH
WE-WELL-MESSAGize we-bring-the-well-message
to-YOU(p) to-ye
anathema
LET-him-BE let-him-be !
1:9 ws proeirhkamen
hOs
Adv
proereO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
kai arti kai arti

Conj Adv
palin legw palin legO

ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
AS
WE-HAVE-BEFORE-declarED AND we-have-declared-before par para

Prep
at-PRESENT AGAIN
I-AM-sayING
IF
ANY anyone
YOU(p) ye
As we said before, so say I now again, If any [man] preach any other gospel unto you than that ye have received, let him be accursed.
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
parelabete anaqema estw paralambanO anathema eimi

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl n_ Nom Sg n vm Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS-WELL-MESSAGizING BESIDE WHICH is-bringing-a-well-message
YE-BESIDE-GOT ye-accepted
anathema
LET-him-BE let-him-be ! qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
1:10 arti
arti
Adv
gar anqrwpous peiqw gar anthrOpos peithO

Conj n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
zhtw zEteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
at-PRESENT for
humans
I-AM-PERSUADING OR
THE
God
OR
I-AM-SEEKING
10 . For do I now persuade men, or God? or do I seek to please men? for if I yet pleased men, I should not be the servant of Christ.
anqrwpois areskein anthrOpos areskO

ei ei
Cond
eti eti
Adv
anqrwpois hreskon anthrOpos areskO

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
an an
Part
to-humans humans hmhn eimi

vi impf vxx 1 Sg
TO-BE-PLEASING IF
STILL to-humans humans
I-PLEASED
OF-ANOINTED SLAVE of-Christ
NOT
EVER
I-WAS
1:11 gnwrizw
gnOrizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
euaggelisqen euaggelizO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg n
I-AM-KNOWizING for I-am-making-known up emou hupo egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
to-YOU(p) to-ye estin eimi
brothers brethren ! kata kata

Prep
THE
WELL-MESSAGE THE
BEING-WELL-MESSAGizED being-brought-the-well-message
11 But I certify you, brethren, that the gospel which was preached of me is not after man.
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
anqrwpon anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
by
ME
that
NOT
it-IS
according-to human in-accord-with anqrwpou parelabon auto anthrOpos paralambanO autos

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg n
1:12 oude
oude
Adv
gar egw gar egO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg
para para
Prep
oute oute
Conj
edidacqhn didaskO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
NOT-YET for neither alla di alla dia

Conj Prep
BESIDE human
BESIDE-GOT accepted cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
it
NOT-BESIDES I-WAS-TAUGHT nor I-was-taught-it
12 For I neither received it of man, neither was I taught [it], but by the revelation of Jesus Christ.
apokaluyews ihsou apokalupsis iEsous

but
THRU FROM-COVERing through revelation
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ anastrofhn anastrophE

n_ Acc Sg f
1:13 hkousate gar thn

akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg
pote en pote en
Part Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ioudaismw oti ioudaismos hoti

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
YE-HEAR
for
THE of-the
MY
UP-TURNing (behaviour) ?-when behavior once thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
IN
THE
JUDA-ism Judaism kai eporqoun kai portheO

that
13 For ye have heard of my conversation in time past in the Jews'religion, how that beyond measure I persecuted the church of God, and wasted it:
kaq kata
Prep
uperbolhn ediwkon huperbolE diOkO

ekklhsian tou ekklEsia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
according-to OVER-CAST inordinate authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
I-CHASED I-persecuted
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
OF-THE
God
AND
RAVAGED
her herit
AV
Galatians 1
1:14 kai proekopton en

kai
Conj
prokoptO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ioudaismw uper pollous sunhlikiwtas en ioudaismos huper polus sunElikiOtEs en

n_ Dat Sg m Prep a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m Prep
AND
I-progressED
IN
THE
JUDA-ism Judaism
OVER above
MANY
TOGETHER-PRIMErs contemporaries twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
genei genos
n_ Dat Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
perissoterws zhlwths uparcwn perissoterOs zElOtEs huparchO

Adv n_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
patrikwn patrikos
a_ Gen Pl m
14 And profited in the Jews'religion above many my equals in mine own nation, being more exceedingly zealous of the traditions of my fathers.
THE
breed race
OF-ME
more-exceedingly
BOILer zealot
OF-THE
FATHER-ics of-fathers
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
paradosewn paradosis
n_ Gen Pl f
OF-ME
traditions
1:15 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
eudokhsen eudokeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aforisas aphorizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ek ek
Prep
when
YET it-WELL-SEEMS it-delights mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
THE
God
THE
One-FROM-defining ME one-severing ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OUT
15 But when it pleased God, who separated me from my mother's womb, and called [me] by his grace,

kai kalesas kai kaleO

dia dia
Prep

OF-CAVITY OF-MOTHER OF-ME of-womb
AND
CALLing calling-me autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
THRU THE through en en

Prep
grace
OF-Him
1:16 apokaluyai
apokaluptO
vn Aor Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ina hina
Conj
euaggelizwmai euaggelizO
vs Pres Mid 1 Sg
TO-FROM-COVER THE to-unveil auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
SON
OF-Him
IN
ME
THAT I-MAY-BE-WELL-MESSAGizING I-may-be-bringing-the-well-message sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
16 To reveal his Son in me, that I might preach him among the heathen; immediately I conferred not with flesh and blood:
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin euqews ou ethnos eutheOs ou

n_ Dat Pl n Adv Part Neg
prosaneqemhn prosanatithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg
kai aimati kai haima

Conj n_ Dat Sg n
Him of-him
IN THE among anhlqon anerchomai

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
NATIONS
immediately
NOT
I-TOWARD-UP-PLACED to-FLESH I-submitted-it tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
AND
BLOOD
1:17 oude
oude
Adv
eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma pros ierosoluma pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
pro pro
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
apostolous apostolos
n_ Acc Pl m
NOT-YET I-UP-CAME neither I-came-up alla aphlqon alla aperchomai

INTO JERUSALEM
TOWARD THE the-ones
BEFORE ME
17 Neither went I up to Jerusalem to them which were apostles before me; but I went into Arabia, and returned again unto Damascus.
eis eis
Prep
arabian kai palin upestreya eis arabia kai palin hupostrephO eis
n_ Acc Sg f Conj Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg Prep
damaskon damaskos
n_ Acc Sg f
but
I-FROM-CAME INTO ARABIA I-came-away meta meta

Prep
WH
AND
WH
AGAIN
NA
I-reTURN
NA
INTO DAMASCUS
1:18 epeita
epeita
Adv
tria eth
eth etos
n_ Acc Pl n
tria treis
n_ Acc Pl n
anhlqon anerchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
n_ Acc Sg f
ON-THEREAFTER after thereupon istorhsai historeO

vn Aor Act
YEARS
THREE
I-UP-CAME I-came-up
INTO JERUSALEM
18 Then after three years I went up to Jerusalem to see Peter, and abode with him fifteen days.
khfan kEphas
n_ Acc Sg m
kai epemeina pros kai epimenO pros

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hmeras dekapente hEmera dekapente

TO-PERCEIVE-declare CEPHAS to-relate-my-story to-Cephas
AND
I-ON-REMAIN TOWARD him I-stay eidon eidO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
DAYS
TEN-FIVE fifteen ei ei
Cond
1:19 eteron
heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
apostolwn ouk apostolos ou

mh mE
Part Neg
iakwbon iakObos
n_ Acc Sg m
19 But other of the apostles saw I none, save James the Lord's brother.
DIFFERENT YET OF-THE different-one ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
commissioners apostles kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
I-PERCEIVED IF I-became-acquainted-with
NO
JACOBUS James
adelfon tou adelphos ho

THE
brother
OF-THE

pp 2 Dat Pl
1:20 a
hos
pr Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
grafw graphO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
idou idou
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
WHICH which(p) yeudomai pseudomai
YET I-AM-WRITING to-YOU(p) to-ye
20 Now the things which I write unto you, behold, before God, I lie not.
BE-PERCEIVING IN-VIEW lo ! in-sight-of
OF-THE the
God
that
NOT
AV
Galatians 1 - Galatians 2
1:21 epeita
epeita
Adv
hlqon erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
klimata ths klima ho

surias suria
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
WH
ths
21 Afterwards I came into the regions of Syria and Cilicia;
ON-THEREAFTER I-CAME thereupon

NA
INTO THE
regions
OF-THE
SYRIA
AND
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kilikias kilikia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE the
CILICIA
1:22 hmhn
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Sg
de de
Conj
agnooumenos agnoeO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
proswpw tais prosOpon ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Pl f

ioudaias ioudaia
n_ Gen Sg f
22 And was unknown by face unto the churches of Judaea which were in Christ:
I-WAS
YET beING-UN-KNOWN being-unknown cristw christos

n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
face
to-THE
OF-THE
JUDEA
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
en en
Prep
THE
IN
ANOINTED Christ akouontes akouO

1:23 monon de
monon
Adv
de
Conj
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
diwkwn diOkO
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
pote nun pote nun

Part Adv
ONLY
YET HEARING
THEY-WERE that
THE
one-CHASING one-persecuting
US
?-when once
NOW
23 But they had heard only, That he which persecuted us in times past now preacheth the faith which once he destroyed.
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin hn pistis hos

pote eporqei pote portheO

Part vi impf Act 3 Sg
IS-WELL-MESSAGizING THE is-bringing-the-well-message of-the
BELIEF faith emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
WHICH
?-when once qeon theos
he-RAVAGED
1:24 kai edoxazon

kai
Conj
doxazO
vi impf Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
24 And they glorified God in me.
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THEY-esteemizED IN they-glorified
ME
THE
God
AV
Galatians 2
2:1 epeita
epeita
Adv
dia dia
Prep
dekatessarwn etwn dekatessares etos

n_ Gen Pl n n_ Gen Pl n
palin anebhn palin anabainO

eis eis
Prep
ierosoluma meta ierosoluma meta

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ON-THEREAFTER THRU TEN-FOUR thereupon through fourteen barnaba barnabas

n_ Gen Sg m
YEARS
AGAIN
I-UP-STEPPed INTO JERUSALEM I-went-up
WITH
. Then fourteen years after I went up again to Jerusalem with Barnabas, and took Titus with [me] also.
sumparalabwn sumparalambanO
kai titon kai titos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m
Barnabas
TOGETHER-BESIDE-GETTING AND taking-along-with-me also de de

Conj
TITUS
2:2 anebhn
anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kata kata
Prep
apokaluyin kai aneqemhn apokalupsis kai anatithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Mid 1 Sg
autois to autos ho
n_ Acc Sg n
I-UP-STEPPed YET according-to FROM-COVERing I-went-up in-accord-with revelation o hos

pr Acc Sg n
AND
I-UP-PLACED submitted
to-them
THE
WELL-MESSAGE
khrussw kErussO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin kat ethnos kata

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
dokousin dokeO
And I went up by revelation, and communicated unto them that gospel which I preach among the Gentiles, but privately to them which were of reputation, lest by any means I should run, or had run, in vain.
WHICH
I-AM-PROCLAIMING IN THE I-am-heralding among pws pOs

Part
NATIONS
according-to OWN
YET to-THE
ones-SEEMING ones-being-of-repute
mh mE
Part Neg
eis eis
Prep
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg m
trecw trechO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
edramon trechO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
NO lest
how INTO EMPTY somehow for-naught titos titos

n_ Nom Sg m
I-MAY-BE-RACING OR
I-RAN ran emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
2:3 all oude

alla
Conj
oude
Adv
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sun sun
Prep
ellhn hellEn
n_ Nom Sg m
wn eimi
hnagkasqh anagkazO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
But neither Titus, who was with me, being a Greek, was compelled to be circumcised:
but
NOT-YET TITUS not-yeteven
THE who
GREEK
BEING
IS-necessitatED is-compelled
peritmhqhnai peritemnO
vn Aor Pas
TO-BE-ABOUT-CUT to-be-circumcised
2:4 dia
dia
Prep
de de
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pareisaktous yeudadelfous oitines pareishlqon pareisaktos pseudadelphos hostis pareiserchomai

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m pr Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THRU YET THE because-of kataskophsai thn kataskopeO ho

BESIDE-INTO-LED ones-smuggled-in
FALSE-brothers false-brethren hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
WHO-ANY who-any ecomen echO

vi Pres Act 1 Pl
BESIDE-INTO-CAME crept-in en en
Prep
eleuqerian hmwn eleutheria hemeis


And that because of false brethren unawares brought in, who came in privily to spy out our liberty which we have in Christ Jesus, that they might bring us into bondage:
TO-DOWN-NOTE to-spy-out ina hina

Conj
THE
FREEdom
OF-US
WHICH
WE-ARE-HAVING IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
katadoulwsousin katadouloO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THAT US
THEY-SHALL-BE-DOWN-SLAVING they-shall-be-enslaving oude oude

Adv
2:5 ois
hos
pr Dat Pl m
pros pros
Prep
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
eixamen eikO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
upotagh hupotagE
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Nom Sg f
to-WHOM NOT-YET TOWARD HOUR not-yeteven tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
WE-SIMULATE to-THE
UNDER-SETTing THAT THE subjection umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
TRUTH
To whom we gave place by subjection, no, not for an hour; that the truth of the gospel might continue with you.
euaggeliou diameinh euaggelion diamenO

n_ Gen Sg n vs Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE SHOULD-BE-THRU-REMAINING TOWARD YOU(p) should-be-continuing ye de de

Conj
2:6 apo
apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
dokountwn dokeO
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
opoioi hopoios
a_ Nom Pl m
pote hsan pote eimi

Part vi impf vxx 3 Pl
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
FROM YET OF-THE the moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
ones-SEEMING TO-BE ones-being-of-repute proswpon prosOpon

n_ Acc Sg n
ANY somewhat
what-kind
?-when once
THEY-WERE NOT-YET-ONE nothing lambanei lambanO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
diaferei diapherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou ou anthrOpos ou
But of these who seemed to be somewhat, (whatsoever they were, it maketh no matter to me: God accepteth no man's person:) for they who seemed [to be somewhat] in conference added nothing to me:
to-ME
IS-THRU-CARRYING face is-being-of-consequence aspect gar oi gar ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
THE
God
OF-human
NOT
IS-GETTING-UP is-taking-up
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
dokountes dokeO
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
prosaneqento prosanatithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Pl
to-ME
for
THE
ones-SEEMING NOT-YET-ONE THEY-TOWARD-UP-PLACED ones-being-of-repute nothing submitted
AV
Galatians 2
2:7 alla tounantion idontes

alla
Conj
tounantion
Adv Con
eidO
oti pepisteumai hoti pisteuO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
but
THE-IN-INSTEAD on-the-contrary
PERCEIVING
that
I-HAVE-been-BELIEVED THE I-have-been-entrusted-with peritomhs peritomE

n_ Gen Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
But contrariwise, when they saw that the gospel of the uncircumcision was committed unto me, as [the gospel] of the circumcision [was] unto Peter;
akrobustias kaqws akrobustia kathOs

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
petros petros
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
uncircumcision
according-AS Peter
OF-THE
ABOUT-CUTTing Circumcision eis eis

Prep
2:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar energhsas gar energeO

petrw petros
n_ Dat Sg m
apostolhn ths apostolE ho

peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
enhrghsen energeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THE
for
One-IN-ACTing one-operating ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-Peter
INTO commission apostleship
OF-THE
ABOUT-CUTTing IN-ACTS Circumcision operates
kai emoi kai egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
eis eis
Prep
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
(For he that wrought effectually in Peter to the apostleship of the circumcision, the same was mighty in me toward the Gentiles:)
AND also
to-ME
INTO THE
NATIONS
2:9 kai gnontes

kai
Conj
ginOskO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
iakwbos kai khfas iakObos kai kEphas

AND
KNOWING
THE
grace
THE
BEING-GIVEN
to-ME
JACOBUS James edwkan didOmi

vi Aor Act 3 Pl
AND
CEPHAS
kai iwannhs oi kai iOannEs ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
dokountes dokeO
stuloi stulos
n_ Nom Pl m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
dexias dexios
a_ Acc Pl f
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai kai
Conj
And when James, Cephas, and John, who seemed to be pillars, perceived the grace that was given unto me, they gave to me and Barnabas the right hands of fellowship; that we [should go] unto the heathen, and they unto the circumcision.
AND
JOHN
THE
ones-SEEMING COLUMNS ones-being-supposed pillars hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
TO-BE
RIGHT THEY-GIVE right-hand(p) give autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
to-ME
AND
barnaba koinwnias ina barnabas koinOnia hina

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Conj
eis eis
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
Barnabas
OF-communion of-fellowship
THAT WE
INTO THE
NATIONS
they
YET INTO THE
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ABOUT-CUTTing Circumcision
2:10 monon twn

monon
Adv
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ptwcwn ina ptOchos hina

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
mnhmoneuwmen mnEmoneuO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai espoudasa auto kai spoudazO autos

Conj vi Aor Act 1 Sg pp Acc Sg n
ONLY
OF-THE the poihsai poieO

vn Aor Act
POOR-ones poor
THAT WE-MAY-BE-rememberING WHICH
AND also
I-am-DILIGENT I-endeavor
SAME same-thing
10 Only [they would] that we should remember the poor; the same which I also was forward to do.
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
this
TO-DO
2:11 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
khfas kEphas
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
antioceian kata antiocheia kata

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
proswpon autw prosOpon autos

n_ Acc Sg n pp Dat Sg m
when
YET CAME
CEPHAS
INTO ANTIOCH
according-to face
to-him him
11 . But when Peter was come to Antioch, I withstood him to the face, because he was to be blamed.
antesthn oti kategnwsmenos anthistEmi hoti kataginOskO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
I-with-STOOD I-withstood
that
HAVING-been-DOWN-KNOWN he-WAS self-censured gar elqein gar erchomai

Conj vn 2Aor Act
2:12 pro
pro
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tinas tis
px Acc Pl m
apo apo
Prep
iakwbou meta twn iakObos meta ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
BEFORE OF-THE the sunhsqien sunesthiO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
for
TO-BE-COMING ANY some hlqon erchomai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
FROM JACOBUS James
WITH
THE
NATIONS
ote de hote de
Adv Conj
upestellen kai afwrizen hupostellO kai aphorizO

vi impf Act 3 Sg Conj vi impf Act 3 Sg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
12 For before that certain came from James, he did eat with the Gentiles: but when they were come, he withdrew and separated himself, fearing them which were of the circumcision.
he-TOGETHER-ATE when he-ate-together foboumenos phobeO

YET THEY-CAME
he-UNDER-PUT he-shrank-back
AND
FROM-definED self severed himself
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ek ek
Prep
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
FEARING
THE-ones the-ones
OUT OF-ABOUT-CUTTing of-Circumcision
AV
Galatians 2
2:13 kai sunupekriqhsan autw

kai
Conj
sunupokrinomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
ioudaioi wste ioudaios hOste

a_ Nom Pl m Conj
kai kai
Conj
AND
TOGETHER-hypocrite play-hypocrite-with
to-him him
AND also autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
THE
rest rest(p) upokrisei hupokrisis

n_ Dat Sg f
JUDA-ans Jews
AS-BESIDES AND so-that also
13 And the other dissembled likewise with insomuch that Barnabas was carried away with dissimulation.
Jews him; also their
barnabas sunaphcqh barnabas sunapagO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
Barnabas
WAS-TOGETHER-FROM-LED OF-them was-led-away-with oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
to-THE the
hypocrisy
2:14 all ote eidon

alla
Conj
hote
Adv
eidO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
orqopodousin orthopodeO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
but
when
I-PERCEIVED
that
NOT
THEY-ARE-ERECT-FOOTING TOWARD THE they-are-correct-in-their-attitude khfa kEphas

n_ Dat Sg m
TRUTH
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou eipon euaggelion legO

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
Prep
pantwn ei pas ei
a_ Gen Pl m Cond
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE I-said
to-THE
CEPHAS
WH
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-ALL in-front-of all

NA
IF
YOU
14 But when I saw that they walked not uprightly according to the truth of the gospel, I said unto Peter before [them] all, If thou, being a Jew, livest after the manner of Gentiles, and not as do the Jews, why compellest thou the Gentiles to live as do the Jews?
ioudaios uparcwn ioudaios huparchO

a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
eqnikws ethnikOs
Adv
kai kai
Conj
ouk
ouci ouchi
Part Neg
ioudaikws zhs ioudaikOs zaO

pws pOs
Adv Int
JUDA-an Jew ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
belongING being-inherently eqnh ethnos

n_ Acc Pl n
NATION-icly AND as-the-nations ioudaizein ioudaizO

vn Pres Act
NOT(emph.)
JUDA-icly as-Jew
ARE-LIVING
how how ?
anagkazeis anagkazO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
THE
NATIONS
YOU-ARE-necessitatING TO-BE-JUDAizING you-are-compelling ioudaioi kai ouk ioudaios kai ou

a_ Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg
2:15 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
fusei phusis
n_ Dat Sg f
ex ek
Prep
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
amartwloi hamartOlos
a_ Nom Pl m
15 We [who are] Jews by nature, and not sinners of the Gentiles,
WE
to-nature
JUDA-ans Jews
WH
AND
NA
NOT
OUT OF-NATIONS missers sinners dikaioutai dikaioO

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
2:16 eidotes
eidO
de
de de
Conj
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
anqrwpos ex anthrOpos ek
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
HAVING-PERCEIVED
YET
that
NOT
WH
IS-beING-JUSTIFIED human
WH NA NA
OUT OF-ACTS of-works cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
dia dia
Prep
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
cristou ihsou
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
OF-LAW
IF-EVER NO
THRU BELIEF through faith episteusamen ina pisteuO hina

OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ ek ek
Prep
AND also pistews pistis

n_ Gen Sg f
16 Knowing that a man is not justified by the works of the law, but by the faith of Jesus Christ, even we have believed in Jesus Christ, that we might be justified by the faith of Christ, and not by the works of the law: for by the works of the law shall no flesh be justified.
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
eis eis
Prep

dikaiwqwmen dikaioO
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
WE
INTO ANOINTED Christ kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
JESUS
BELIEVE
THAT WE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith oti ex hoti ek

Conj Prep
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
OF-ANOINTED AND of-Christ dikaiwqhsetai dikaioO

vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
NOT
OUT OF-ACTS of-works pasa pas

a_ Nom Sg f
OF-LAW
that
OF-LAW
NOT not
sarx sarx
n_ Nom Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED EVERY at-all
FLESH
2:17 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
zhtountes zEteO
dikaiwqhnai en dikaioO en
vn Aor Pas Prep
cristw eureqhmen christos heuriskO

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
IF
YET SEEKING
TO-BE-JUSTIFIED
IN
ANOINTED Christ
WE-WERE-FOUND AND also mh mE

Part Neg
SAME ourselves
17 But if, while we seek to be justified by Christ, we ourselves also are found sinners, [is] therefore Christ the minister of sin? God forbid.
amartwloi ara hamartOlos ara

a_ Nom Pl m Part Int
cristos amartias diakonos christos hamartia diakonos

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
missers sinners
CONSEQUENTLY ANOINTED Christ gar a gar hos

Conj pr Acc Pl n
OF-missing of-sin tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
THRU-SERVitor NO dispenser
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING
2:18 ei
ei
Cond
katelusa kataluO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
palin oikodomw palin oikodomeO

parabathn parabatEs
n_ Acc Sg m
emauton emautou
pf 1 Acc Sg m
18 For if I build again the things which I destroyed, I make myself a transgressor.
IF
for
WHICH which(p)
I-DOWN-LOOSE these AGAIN I-demolish these-things
I-AM-HOME-BUILDING BESIDE-STEPPer MYself I-am-building transgressor
AV
sunistanw sunistEmi
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
I-AM-TOGETHER-STANDING-UP I-am-commending
2:19 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
apeqanon ina apothnEskO hina

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg Conj
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
zhsw zaO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
19 For I through the law am dead to the law, that I might live unto God.
for
THRU LAW through
to-LAW
FROM-DIED died zw zaO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THAT to-God
I-SHOULD-BE-LIVING
2:20 cristw
christos
n_ Dat Sg m
sunestaurwmai sustauroO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
de de
Conj
ouketi ouketi
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
zh zaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
to-ANOINTED I-HAVE-been-TOGETHER-impalED I-AM-LIVING Christ I-have-been-crucified-togetherwith emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
YET NOT-STILL I not-longer sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
IS-LIVING
YET IN
cristos o christos hos

n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
nun zw nun zaO

en en
Prep
en en
Prep
pistei zw pistis zaO

th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
20 I am crucified with Christ: nevertheless I live; yet not I, but Christ liveth in me: and the life which I now live in the flesh I live by the faith of the Son of God, who loved me, and gave himself for me.
ME
ANOINTED Christ uiou huios

n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH
YET NOW I-AM-LIVING
IN
FLESH
IN
BELIEF faith
I-AM-LIVING
to-THE the
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agaphsantos me agapaO egO

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
kai paradontos kai paradidOmi

Conj vp 2Aor Act Gen Sg m
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
God
THE
One-LOVing one-loving
ME
AND
BESIDE-GIVING giving-up
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
uper huper
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
Self himself
OVER ME for-the-sake-of aqetw atheteO

2:21 ouk
ou
Part Neg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ei ei
Cond
gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
I-AM-UN-PLACING THE I-am-repudiating
grace
OF-THE
God
IF
for
THRU LAW through
21 I do not frustrate the grace of God: for if righteousness [come] by the law, then Christ is dead in vain.
dikaiosunh ara dikaiosunE ara

n_ Nom Sg f Part
cristos dwrean apeqanen christos dOrean apothnEskO

n_ Nom Sg m Adv vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
CONSEQUENTLY ANOINTED Christ
gratuitously
FROM-DIED died
AV
Galatians 3
3:1 w anohtoi galatai tis

O
Inj
anoEtos
a_ Voc Pl m
galatEs
n_ Voc Pl m
tis
pi Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ebaskanen ois baskainO hos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg pr Dat Pl m
kat kata
Prep
n_ Acc Pl m
o!
UN-MINDing foolish !
GALATIANS ANY Galatians ! who ?
YOU(p) ye
BEWITCHES
to-WHOM according-to VIEWers to-whom(p) eyes
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
cristos proegrafh christos prographO

n_ Nom Sg m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
estaurwmenos stauroO
. O foolish Galatians, who hath bewitched you, that ye should not obey the truth, before whose eyes Jesus Christ hath been evidently set forth, crucified among you?
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WAS-BEFORE-WRITTen HAVING-been-impalED was-portrayed having-been-crucified maqein manthanO

vn 2Aor Act
3:2 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
monon qelw monon thelO

af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
this
ONLY
I-AM-WILLING TO-BE-LEARNING FROM YOU(p) ye h E

Part
OF-LAW
THE
This only would I learn of you, Received ye the Spirit by the works of the law, or by the hearing of faith?
pneuma elabete pneuma lambanO

ex ek
Prep
akohs akoE
n_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
spirit
YE-GOT
OR
OUT OF-HEARing OF-BELIEF of-faith enarxamenoi enarchomai

3:3 outws anohtoi este

houtOs
Adv
anoEtos
a_ Nom Pl m
eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
pneumati nun sarki pneuma nun sarx

n_ Dat Sg n Adv n_ Dat Sg f
Are ye so foolish? having begun in the Spirit, are ye now made perfect by the flesh?
thus
UN-MINDing foolish
YE-ARE
undertaking
to-spirit
NOW to-FLESH
epiteleisqe epiteleO
vi Pres mid/pas 2 Pl
YE-ARE-beING-ON-FINISHED ye-are-being-completed
3:4 tosauta epaqete

tosoutos
pd Acc Pl n
paschO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
eikh eikE
Adv
ei ei
Cond
ge ge
Part
kai eikh kai eikE

Conj Adv
Have ye suffered so many things in vain? if [it be] yet in vain.
so-much
YE-EMOTIONED SIMULATEly IF SURELY AND ye-suffered feignedly since also oun oun
Conj
SIMULATEly feignedly dunameis dunamis

n_ Acc Pl f
5
3:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
epicorhgwn epichorEgeO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma kai energwn pneuma kai energeO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
THE the-one en en
Prep
THEN One-supplyING supplying ex ek

Prep
to-YOU(p) ye h E
Part
THE
spirit
AND
IN-ACTING operating
ABILITIES powerful-works
He therefore that ministereth to you the Spirit, and worketh miracles among you, [doeth he it] by the works of the law, or by the hearing of faith?
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ex ek
Prep
akohs akoE
n_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
IN YOU(p) among ye
OUT OF-ACTS of-works abraam abraam

ni proper
OF-LAW
OR
OUT OF-HEARing OF-BELIEF of-faith qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
3:6 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
episteusen tw pisteuO ho
kai elogisqh kai logizomai

autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
. Even as Abraham believed God, and it was accounted to him for righteousness.
according-AS ABRAHAM BELIEVES
to-THE the
God
AND
it-IS-accountED to-him it-is-reckoned
INTO
n_ Acc Sg f
3:7 ginwskete
ginOskO
ara ara
Part
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
pistews outoi pistis houtos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Nom Pl m
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
Know ye therefore that they which are of faith, the same are the children of Abraham.
BE-YE-KNOWING be-ye-knowing ! eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
CONSEQUENTLY that
THE-ones the-ones
these
SONS
abraam abraam
ni proper
ARE
of-ABRAHAM of-Abraham de de
Conj
3:8 proidousa
proeidO
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
oti ek hoti ek
Conj Prep
pistews dikaioi pistis dikaioO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
BEFORE-PERCEIVING YET THE perceiving-before o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
WRITing scripture
that
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith abraam abraam

ni proper
IS-JUSTIFYING THE
NATIONS
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
proeuhggelisato proeuaggelizomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oti eneuloghqhsontai hoti eneulogeO

en en
Prep
And the scripture, foreseeing that God would justify the heathen through faith, preached before the gospel unto Abraham, [saying], In thee shall all nations be blessed.
THE
God
He-BEFORE-WELL-MESSAGizES to-THE brings-before-well-message
ABRAHAM that
SHALL-BE-BEING-IN-blessED IN shall-be-being-blessed-in
AV
Galatians 3
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
YOU
ALL
THE
NATIONS
3:9 wste
hOste
Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
pistews eulogountai pistis eulogeO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
sun sun
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
pistw pistos
a_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
So then they which be of faith are blessed with faithful Abraham.
AS-BESIDES THE-ones so-that the-ones
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith ergwn ergon

n_ Gen Pl n
ARE-beING-blessED TOGETHER to-THE with-the eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
BELIEVing
ABRAHAM
3:10 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
gar ex gar ek
Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
kataran katara
n_ Acc Sg f
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
as-many-as for whoever gegraptai graphO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
OF-LAW
ARE
UNDER DOWN-EXECRATION ARE curse pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
gar oti epikataratos gar hoti epikataratos

Conj Conj a_ Nom Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
emmenei emmenO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
10 For as many as are of the works of the law are under the curse: for it is written, Cursed [is] every one that continueth not in all things which are written in the book of the law to do them.
that
ON-DOWN-EXECRATED EVERY accursed every-one en en

Prep
WHO
NOT
IS-IN-REMAINING to-ALL is-remaining-in all poihsai auta poieO autos

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
gegrammenois graphO
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
bibliw biblion
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THE HAVING-been-WRITTEN IN the-things
THE
SCROLLet OF-THE
LAW
OF-THE
TO-DO
them
3:11 oti de
hoti
Conj
de
Conj
en en
Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
oudeis oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
dikaioutai dikaioO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
para para
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
dhlon dElos
a_ Nom Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
that
YET IN
LAW
NOT-YET-ONE IS-beING-JUSTIFIED BESIDE THE no-one pistews zhsetai pistis zaO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut midD 3 Sg
God
EVIDENT is-evident
that
11 But that no man is justified by the law in the sight of God, [it is] evident: for, The just shall live by faith.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dikaios dikaios
a_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
THE
JUST-one just-one de de
Conj
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith nomos nomos

n_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-LIVING
3:12 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ek ek
Prep
pistews all o pistis alla ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Nom Sg m
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
12 And the law is not of faith: but, The man that doeth them shall live in them.
THE
YET LAW
NOT
IS
but
THE
one-DOing one-doing
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
zhsetai zaO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl n
them
SHALL-BE-LIVING IN
them
3:13 cristos hmas

christos
n_ Nom Sg m
hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
exhgorasen ek exagorazO ek
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
kataras katara
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ genomenos ginomai
US
OUT-BUYS reclaims hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
OUT OF-THE
DOWN-EXECRATION OF-THE curse oti gegraptai hoti graphO

LAW
13 Christ hath redeemed us from the curse of the law, being made a curse for us: for it is written, Cursed [is] every one that hangeth on a tree:
uper huper
Prep
katara katara
n_ Nom Sg f
epikataratos epikataratos
a_ Nom Sg m
BECOMING
OVER US for-the-sake-of o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
DOWN-EXECRATION that curse epi xulou epi xulon

Prep n_ Gen Sg n
it-HAS-been-WRITTEN ON-DOWN-EXECRATED accursed
pas pas
a_ Nom Sg m
kremamenos kremannumi
EVERY
THE
one-beING-HANGED ON one-hanging ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WOOD pole eulogia tou eulogia ho

3:14 ina
hina
Conj
eis eis
Prep
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
abraam abraam
ni proper
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
en en
Prep
THAT INTO THE

WH WH NA
NATIONS
THE
NA
blessedness OF-THE blessing ina hina

Conj
ABRAHAM MAY-BE-BECOMING IN
ihsou cristw

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
14 That the blessing of Abraham might come on the Gentiles through Jesus Christ; that we might receive the promise of the Spirit through faith.
ANOINTED Christ labwmen lambanO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
JESUS
THAT THE
promise
OF-THE
spirit
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
WE-MAY-BE-GETTING THRU THE we-may-be-obtaining through
BELIEF faith
AV
Galatians 3
3:15 adelfoi kata

adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
kata
Prep
anqrwpon legw anthrOpos legO

omws anqrwpou kekurwmenhn homOs anthrOpos kuroO

Conj n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f
brothers brethren !
according-to human
I-AM-sayING LIKE-AS OF-human I-am-saying-this likewise h E

Part
HAVING-been-SANCTIONED having-been-ratified
15 Brethren, I speak after the manner of men; Though [it be] but a man's covenant, yet [if it be] confirmed, no man disannulleth, or addeth thereto.
diaqhkhn oudeis diathEkE oudeis

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
aqetei atheteO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
epidiatassetai epidiatassomai
covenant
NOT-YET-ONE IS-UN-PLACING OR no-one is-repudiating de de

Conj
IS-ON-prescribING is-modifying-it ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
3:16 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
erreqhsan ereO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
epaggeliai kai tw epaggelia kai ho

n_ Nom Pl f Conj t_ Dat Sg n
spermati autou sperma autos

to-THE
YET ABRAHAM WERE-declarED THE
promises
AND
to-THE
seed
OF-him
16 Now to Abraham and his seed were the promises made. He saith not, And to seeds, as of many; but as of one, And to thy seed, which is Christ.
ou ou
Part Neg
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl n
spermasin ws epi pollwn all ws ef sperma hOs epi polus alla hOs epi
n_ Dat Pl n Adv Prep a_ Gen Pl n Conj Adv Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
NOT
He-IS-sayING
AND
to-THE
seeds
AS
ON
MANY
but
AS
ON
ONE
AND
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
spermati sou sperma su

os hos
pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
seed
OF-YOU
WHO which
IS
ANOINTED Christ upo tou hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
3:17 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
diaqhkhn prokekurwmenhn diathEkE prokuroO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Pas Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
this
YET I-AM-sayING
covenant
HAVING-been-BEFORE-SANCTIONED by having-been-ratified-before gegonws ginomai

THE
God
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
meta tetrakosia kai triakonta eth meta tetrakosioi kai triakonta etos
Prep n_ Acc Pl n Conj ni numeral n_ Acc Pl n
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
ouk ou
Part Neg
17 And this I say, [that] the covenant, that was confirmed before of God in Christ, the law, which was four hundred and thirty years after, cannot disannul, that it should make the promise of none effect.
THE
after
FOUR-hundred
AND
THREE-TY thirty
YEARS
HAVING-BECOME
LAW
NOT
akuroi akuroO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
katarghsai katargeO
vn Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
IS-UN-SANCTIONING INTO THE is-invalidating
TO-DOWN-UN-ACT THE to-nullify h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
promise
3:18 ei
ei
Cond
gar ek gar ek
Conj Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
klhronomia klEronomia
n_ Nom Sg f
ouketi ouketi
Adv
ex ek
Prep
epaggelias tw epaggelia ho
IF
for
OUT OF-LAW
THE
tenancy NOT-STILL OUT OF-promise enjoyment-of-the-allotment not-longer o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
to-THE
18 For if the inheritance [be] of the law, [it is] no more of promise: but God gave [it] to Abraham by promise.
de de
Conj
abraam abraam
ni proper
di dia
Prep
epaggelias kecaristai epaggelia charizomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Perf midD/pasD 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
YET ABRAHAM THRU promise through
HAS-gracED THE has-graciously-granted-it nomos nomos

n_ Nom Sg m
God
WH
3:19 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
parabasewn parabasis
n_ Gen Pl f
carin charin
Adv
proseteqh acris prostithEmi achri

an
ANY what ?
NA
THEN THE
LAW
OF-THE
BESIDE-STEPPings grace WAS-addED transgressions on-behalf it-was-added w hos

pr Dat Sg m
UNTIL
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
ephggeltai epaggellomai
diatageis diatassO
di dia
Prep
19 . Wherefore then [serveth] the law? It was added because of transgressions, till the seed should come to whom the promise was made; [and it was] ordained by angels in the hand of a mediator.
WHICH
MAY-BE-COMING THE
seed
to-WHOM
He-HAS-promisED
BEING-prescribED
THRU through
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
mesitou mesitEs
n_ Gen Sg m
MESSENGERS IN
HAND
OF-MIDer of-mediator ouk ou

Part Neg
3:20 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
mesiths enos mesitEs heis

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
20 Now a mediator is not [a mediator] of one, but God is one.
THE
YET MIDer mediator
OF-ONE
NOT
IS there-is
THE
YET God
ONE
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
AV
Galatians 3
3:21 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
oun oun
Conj
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
kata twn kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
epaggeliwn epaggelia
n_ Gen Pl f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
THEN LAW
DOWN against
OF-THE the
promises
OF-THE
God
NO
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
gar edoqh gar didOmi

nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dunamenos dunamai
zwopoihsai zOopoieO
vn Aor Act
21 [Is] the law then against the promises of God? God forbid: for if there had been a law given which could have given life, verily righteousness should have been by the law.
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING IF
WH WH
for
NA
WAS-GIVEN
NA
LAW
THE
beING-ABLE
TO-make-LIVE to-vivify
ontws ontOs
Adv
en nomw
ek ek
Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
an an
Part
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
BEINGly really
OUT OF-LAW
EVER WAS
THE
JUSTice righteousness upo hupo

Prep
3:22 alla sunekleisen

alla
Conj
sugkleiO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
amartian ina hamartia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
but
TOGETHER-LOCKS THE locks-up-together pistews ihsou pistis iEsous

n_ Gen Sg f
WRITing scripture
THE
ALL
UNDER missing sin tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THAT THE
22 But the scripture hath concluded all under sin, that the promise by faith of Jesus Christ might be given to them that believe.
epaggelia ek epaggelia ek
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
cristou doqh christos didOmi

n_ Gen Sg m vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
pisteuousin pisteuO
n_ Gen Sg m
promise
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
MAY-BE-BEING-GIVEN to-THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing efrouroumeqa phroureO

vi impf Pas 1 Pl
23 But before faith came, we were kept under the law, shut up unto the faith which should afterwards be revealed.
3:23 pro
pro
Prep
de de
Conj
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pistin upo pistis hupo

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
BEFORE OF-THE the sugkleiomenoi sugkleiO

YET TO-BE-COMING THE
BELIEF faith
UNDER LAW
WE-were-GARRISONED
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
mellousan mellO
pistin apokalufqhnai pistis apokaluptO

n_ Acc Sg f vn Aor Pas
beING-TOGETHER-LOCKED INTO THE being-locked-up-together
beING-ABOUT
BELIEF faith
TO-BE-FROM-COVERED to-be-revealed gegonen ginomai

vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
3:24 wste
hOste
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
paidagwgos hmwn paidagOgos hemeis

eis eis
Prep
criston ina christos hina

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
ek ek
Prep
LAW
boy-LEADER escort
OF-US
HAS-BECOME
THAT OUT
24 Wherefore the law was our schoolmaster [to bring us] unto Christ, that we might be justified by faith.
pistews dikaiwqwmen pistis dikaioO

n_ Gen Sg f vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
OF-BELIEF of-faith
WE-MAY-BE-BEING-JUSTIFIED
3:25 elqoushs
erchomai
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews ouketi pistis ouketi

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
upo hupo
Prep
paidagwgon esmen paidagOgos eimi

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
25 But after that faith is come, we are no longer under a schoolmaster.
OF-COMING
YET OF-THE
BELIEF faith
NOT-STILL UNDER boy-LEADER not-longer escort este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
WE-ARE
3:26 pantes gar uioi

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
huios
n_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
26 For ye are all the children of God by faith in Christ Jesus.
ALL
for
SONS
OF-God
YE-ARE
THRU THE through
BELIEF faith
IN
ANOINTED Christ
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
JESUS
3:27 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
gar eis gar eis

Conj Prep
criston ebaptisqhte criston enedusasqe christos baptizO christos enduO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Pas 2 Pl n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor Mid 2 Pl
27 For as many of you as have been baptized into Christ have put on Christ.
as-many-as for
ARE-DIPizED ye-are-baptized ellhn hellEn
ANOINTED Christ ouk ou

Part Neg
IN-SLIP ye-put-on eni eni

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
3:28 ouk
ou
Part Neg
eni eni
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ioudaios oude ioudaios oude

a_ Nom Sg m Adv
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
oude oude
Adv
n_ Nom Sg m
NOT
IN-IS there-is-in eni eni
JUDA-an Jew
NOT-YET GREEK nor-yet arsen arsEn

n_ Nom Sg n
NOT
IN-IS there-is-in
SLAVE
NOT-YET nor-yet eis heis

n_ Nom Sg m
28 There is neither Jew nor Greek, there is neither bond nor free, there is neither male nor female: for ye are all one in Christ Jesus.
eleuqeros ouk eleutheros ou

kai qhlu kai thElus

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar umeis gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
FREE
NOT
IN-IS there-is-in
MALE
AND
female
ALL
for
YOU(p) ye
ONE
AV
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
en en
Prep

ARE
IN
ANOINTED Christ umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
JESUS
3:29 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ara ara
Part
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
abraam abraam
ni proper
sperma sperma
n_ Nom Sg n
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
IF
YET YOU(p) ye
29 And if ye [be] Christ's, then are ye Abraham's seed, and heirs according to the promise.
OF-ANOINTED CONSEQUENTLY OF-THE of-Christ
ABRAHAM seed
YE-ARE
kat kata
Prep
epaggelian klhronomoi epaggelia klEronomos

according-to promise
tenants enjoyers-of-the-allotment
AV
Galatians 4
4:1 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
ef epi
Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg m
cronon chronos
n_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
nhpios nEpios
a_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
I-AM-sayING
YET ON
as-much-as TIME
THE
tenant minor enjoyer-of-an-allotment pantwn wn pas eimi

a_ Gen Pl m
IS
. Now I say, [That] the heir, as long as he is a child, differeth nothing from a servant, though he be lord of all;
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
diaferei diapherO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
doulou kurios doulos kurios

NOT-YET-ONE he-IS-THRU-CARRYING OF-SLAVE in-nothing he-is-being-of-more-consequence-than slave
master
OF-ALL
BEING
4:2 alla upo

alla
Conj
hupo
Prep
epitropous estin epitropos eimi

n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai oikonomous acri ths kai oikonomos achri ho

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
proqesmias prothesmia
n_ Gen Sg f
But is under tutors and governors until the time appointed of the father.
but
UNDER permitters guardians patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
IS
AND
UNTIL THE
BEFORE-PLACEment time-purposed
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
FATHER
4:3 outws kai hmeis

houtOs
Adv
kai
Conj
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ote hmen hote eimi

Adv vi impf vxx 1 Pl
nhpioi nEpios
a_ Nom Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
stoiceia tou stoicheion ho

n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg m
thus
AND also hmeqa eimi
WE
when
WE-WERE
minors
UNDER THE
elements
OF-THE
Even so we, when we were children, were in bondage under the elements of the world:
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
dedoulwmenoi douloO
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
SYSTEM world
WERE
HAVING-been-enSLAVED
4:4 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma tou plErOma ho

cronou chronos
n_ Gen Sg m
exapesteilen o exapostellO ho
when
YET CAME
THE
FILLing
OF-THE
TIME
OUT-FROM-PUTS delegates
THE
But when the fulness of the time was come, God sent forth his Son, made of a woman, made under the law,
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
genomenon ginomai
ek ek
Prep
gunaikos genomenon gunE ginomai

n_ Gen Sg f vp 2Aor midD Acc Sg m
upo hupo
Prep
God
THE
SON
OF-Him
BECOMING
OUT OF-WOMAN
BECOMING
UNDER
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
LAW
4:5 ina
hina
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
exagorash exagorazO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
uioqesian huiothesia
n_ Acc Sg f
To redeem them that were under the law, that we might receive the adoption of sons.
THAT THE-ones the-ones apolabwmen apolambanO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
UNDER LAW
He-SHOULD-BE-OUT-BUYING THAT THE he-should-be-reclaiming
SON-PLACing place-of-a-son
WE-MAY-BE-FROM-GETTING we-may-be-getting
4:6 oti
hoti
Conj
de de
Conj
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
uioi huios
n_ Nom Pl m
exapesteilen o exapostellO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Acc Sg n
that YET YE-ARE seeing-that tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
SONS
OUT-FROM-PUTS delegates tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
God
THE
spirit
And because ye are sons, God hath sent forth the Spirit of his Son into your hearts, crying, Abba, Father.
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
kardias hmwn kardia hemeis

krazon krazO
abba abba
ni proper
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
SON
OF-Him
INTO THE
HEARTS
OF-US
CRYING
ABBA
THE
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
FATHER
4:7 wste
hOste
Conj
ouketi ouketi
Adv
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
alla uios alla huios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
de de
Conj
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AS-BESIDES NOT-STILL YOU-ARE so-that not-longer
SLAVE
but
SON
IF
YET SON
AND also
Wherefore thou art no more a servant, but a son; and if a son, then an heir of God through Christ.
AV
Galatians 4
n_ Nom Sg m
dia dia
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tenant THRU God enjoyer-of-an-allotment through
4:8 alla tote men

alla
Conj
tote
Adv
men
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
eidotes eidO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
edouleusate tois douleuO ho

vi Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
fusei phusis
n_ Dat Sg f
but
then
INDEED NOT
HAVING-PERCEIVED God having-perception-of
YE-SLAVE
to-THE to-nature to-the-ones
. Howbeit then, when ye knew not God, ye did service unto them which by nature are no gods.
mh mE
Part Neg
ousin eimi
qeois theos
n_ Dat Pl m
NO
BEING
gods
4:9 nun de
nun
Adv
de
Conj
gnontes ginOskO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
mallon de mallon de
Adv Conj
gnwsqentes upo qeou ginOskO hupo theos

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m
pws pOs
Adv Int
NOW YET KNOWING
God
RATHER
YET BEING-KNOWN
by
God
how how ? palin palin

Adv
epistrefete epistrephO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
palin epi ta palin epi ho

Adv Prep t_ Acc Pl n
asqenh kai ptwca stoiceia ois asthenEs kai ptOchos stoicheion hos
a_ Acc Pl n Conj a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Pl n pr Dat Pl n
But now, after that ye have known God, or rather are known of God, how turn ye again to the weak and beggarly elements, whereunto ye desire again to be in bondage?
YE-ARE-ON-TURNING AGAIN ye-are-turning-back anwqen anOthen

Adv
WH
ON
NA
THE
UN-FIRM infirm
AND
POOR
elements
to-WHICH AGAIN to-which(p)
douleusai
douleuein douleuO
vn Pres Act
qelete thelO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
UP-PLACE anew
TO-BE-SLAVING
YE-ARE-WILLING
4:10 hmeras parathreisqe

hEmera
n_ Acc Pl f
paratithEmi
vi Pres Mid 2 Pl
kai mhnas kai mEn

Conj n_ Acc Pl m
kai kairous kai eniautous kai kairos kai eniautos

Conj n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m
10 Ye observe days, and months, and times, and years.
DAYS
YE-ARE-BESIDE-KEEPING AND ye-are-scrutinizing umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
MONTHS
AND
SEASONS
AND
years
4:11 foboumai
phobeO
mh mE
Part Neg
pws pOs
Part
eikh eikE
Adv
kekopiaka eis kopiaO eis

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
I-AM-FEARING
YOU(p) for-ye
NO lest
how SIMULATEly I-HAVE-toilED somehow feignedly oti kagw hoti kagO

Conj pp 1 Nom Sg Con
INTO YOU(p) ye adelfoi deomai adelphos deomai

n_ Voc Pl m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
11 I am afraid of you, lest I have bestowed upon you labour in vain.
4:12 ginesqe
ginomai
ws egw hOs egO

Adv pp 1 Nom Sg
ws umeis hOs humeis

Adv pp 2 Nom Pl
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
AS
that
AND-I also-I
AS
YOU(p) ye
12 . Brethren, I beseech you, be as I [am]; for I [am] as ye [are]: ye have not injured me at all.
brothers brethren !
I-AM-beseechING
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
hdikhsate adikeO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-YOU(p) NOT-YET-ONE ME ye in-nothing
YE-injure
4:13 oidate
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
oti di hoti dia

Conj Prep
asqeneian ths astheneia ho

sarkos euhggelisamhn sarx euaggelizO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Mid 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that ye-are-aware to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THRU UN-FIRMness during infirmity
OF-THE
FLESH
I-WELL-MESSAGize to-YOU(p) I-bring-the-well-message to-ye
13 Ye know how through infirmity of the flesh I preached the gospel unto you at the first.
proteron proteron
a_ Acc Sg n
THE
BEFORE-more formerly peirasmon umwn peirasmos humeis

4:14 kai ton

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
exouqenhsate exoutheneO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
AND
THE
trial
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
THE
FLESH
OF-ME
NOT
YE-scorn
14 And my temptation which was in my flesh ye despised not, nor rejected; but received me as an angel of God, [even] as Christ Jesus.
oude oude
Adv
exeptusate alla ws aggelon ekptuO alla hOs aggelos

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Adv n_ Acc Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
edexasqe me dechomai egO

ws criston hOs christos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
NOT-YET YE-OUT-SPIT neither ye-loathe-it ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
but
AS
MESSENGER OF-God
YE-RECEIVE
ME
AS
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AV
Galatians 4
4:15 pou
pou
Part Int
oun oun
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
makarismos umwn makarismos humeis

marturw martureO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ei hoti ei
Conj Cond
dunaton dunatos
a_ Nom Sg n
?-where THEN THE where ? tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
HAPPYing happiness
OF-YOU(p) I-AM-witnessING for of-ye I-am-testifying
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
IF
ABLE possible
ofqalmous umwn ophthalmos humeis

exoruxantes edwkate moi exorussO didOmi egO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 2 Pl pp 1 Dat Sg
15 Where is then the blessedness ye spake of? for I bear you record, that, if [it had been] possible, ye would have plucked out your own eyes, and have given them to me.
THE
VIEWers eyes
OF-YOU(p) OUT-EXCAVATing of-ye gouging-out ecqros echthros

a_ Nom Sg m
YE-GIVE ye-give-them
to-ME
4:16 wste
hOste
Conj
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
gegona ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
alhqeuwn alEtheuO
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
AS-BESIDES enemy so-that
OF-YOU(p) I-HAVE-BECOME beING-TRUE of-ye by-being-true umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye qelousin thelO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
16 Am I therefore become your enemy, because I tell you the truth?
4:17 zhlousin
zEloO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
kalws alla ekkleisai umas kalOs alla ekkleiO humeis

Adv Conj vn Aor Act pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
THEY-ARE-BOILING YOU(p) they-are-being-zealous over-ye autous zhloute autos zEloO

pp Acc Pl m vs Pres Act 2 Pl
NOT
IDEALly
but
TO-OUT-LOCK YOU(p) to-debar ye
THEY-ARE-WILLING THAT
17 . They zealously affect you, [but] not well; yea, they would exclude you, that ye might affect them.
them over-them
YE-MAY-BE-BOILING ye-may-be-being-zealous de de
Conj
4:18 kalon
kalos
a_ Nom Sg n
zhlousqai zEloO
vn Pres Pas
en en
Prep
kalw kalos
a_ Dat Sg n
pantote kai mh pantote kai mE

Adv Conj Part Neg
monon en monon en
Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
IDEAL
YET TO-BE-BOILING IN to-be-being-zealous me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
IDEAL
always
AND
NO
ONLY
IN
THE
18 But [it is] good to be zealously affected always in [a] good [thing], and not only when I am present with you.
pareinai pareimi
vn Pres vxx
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
TO-BE-BESIDE-BEING ME to-be-present
TOWARD YOU(p) ye mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
4:19
WH
teknia
NA
tekna teknon
n_ Voc Pl n
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
palin wdinw palin OdinO

mecris ou mechri hos

Adv pr Gen Sg m
19 . My little children, of whom I travail in birth again until Christ be formed in you,
offsprings children ! morfwqh morphoO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
OF-ME
WHOM AGAIN with-whom umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
I-AM-PAINING UNTO I-am-travailing until
WHOM which-season
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
MAY-BE-BEING-FORMED ANOINTED Christ
IN
YOU(p) ye pros pros

Prep
4:20 hqelon
thelO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
pareinai pareimi
vn Pres vxx
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
arti arti
Adv
kai allaxai kai allassO

Conj vn Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
I-WILLED
YET TO-BE-BESIDE-BEING TOWARD YOU(p) to-be-present ye oti aporoumai hoti aporeO

Conj vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
at-PRESENT AND just-now
TO-CHANGE THE
20 I desire to be present with you now, and to change my voice; for I stand in doubt of you.
fwnhn mou phOnE egO

en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
SOUND voice
OF-ME
that
I-AM-beING-perplexED IN
YOU(p) ye qelontes thelO

4:21 legete
legO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
21 . Tell me, ye that desire to be under the law, do ye not hear the law?
BE-YE-sayING to-ME be-ye-telling ! me ouk ou

Part Neg
THE-ones the-ones
UNDER LAW
WILLING
TO-BE
THE
LAW
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
NOT
YE-ARE-HEARING
4:22 gegraptai
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar oti abraam gar hoti abraam

Conj Conj ni proper
duo duo
ni numeral
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
escen echO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
that
ABRAHAM TWO
SONS
has-HAD had
ONE
OUT OF-THE
22 For it is written, that Abraham had two sons, the one by a bondmaid, the other by a freewoman.
paidiskhs kai ena paidiskE kai heis

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eleuqeras eleutheros
a_ Gen Sg f
maid
AND
ONE
OUT OF-THE
FREE free-woman
AV
Galatians 4
4:23 all o
alla
Conj
WH
men
NA
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
men men
Part
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
paidiskhs kata paidiskE kata

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
but
THE the-one o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
INDEED
OUT OF-THE
maid
according-to FLESH
23 But he [who was] of the bondwoman was born after the flesh; but he of the freewoman [was] by promise.
gegennhtai gennaO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eleuqeras di eleutheros dia

a_ Gen Sg f Prep
epaggelias epaggelia
n_ Gen Sg f
HAS-been-generatED THE has-been-begotten the-one
YET OUT OF-THE
FREE free-woman
THRU promise through gar eisin gar eimi

4:24 atina
hostis
pr Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
allhgoroumena autai allEgoreO houtos

vp Pres Pas Nom Pl n pd Nom Pl f
duo duo
ni numeral
diaqhkai diathEkE
n_ Nom Pl f
WHICH-ANY IS which-any(p) mia heis

n_ Nom Sg f
allegorizING
these for these-women eis eis

Prep
ARE
TWO
covenants
24 Which things are an allegory: for these are the two covenants; the one from the mount Sinai, which gendereth to bondage, which is Agar.
men men
Part
apo apo
Prep
orous oros
n_ Gen Sg n
sina sina
ni proper
douleian gennwsa douleia gennaO

htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ONE one(f) agar hagar

ni proper
INDEED FROM mountain mount
SINA Sinai
INTO SLAVery
generatING
AGAR Hagar
4:25 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
agar hagar
ni proper
sina sina
ni proper
oros oros
n_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
arabia arabia
n_ Dat Sg f
sustoicei sustoicheO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
YET AGAR Hagar
SINA Sinai
mountain mount
IS
IN
THE
ARABIA
IS-TOGETHER-ROW-ING it-is-in-line-with
25 For this Agar is mount Sinai in Arabia, and answereth to Jerusalem which now is, and is in bondage with her children.
de de
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
nun ierousalhm douleuei nun ierosoluma douleuO

Adv ni proper vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar meta twn gar meta ho

Conj Prep t_ Gen Pl n
teknwn auths teknon autos

n_ Gen Pl n pp Gen Sg f
YET to-THE the
NOW JERUSALEM
she-IS-SLAVING for she-is-being-in-slavery
WITH
THE
offsprings children estin eimi
OF-her
4:26 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
anw ierousalhm eleuqera estin anO ierosoluma eleutheros eimi

Adv ni proper a_ Nom Sg f vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
mhthr mEtEr
n_ Nom Sg f
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
26 But Jerusalem which is above is free, which is the mother of us all.
THE
YET UP above
JERUSALEM
FREE
IS
WHO-ANY IS who-any
MOTHER
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-US
4:27 gegraptai
graphO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
gar eufranqhti gar euphrainO

steira steiros
n_ Voc Sg f
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
tiktousa tiktO
YOU-BE-BEING-gladdenED STERILE THE-one be-you-being-glad ! one-barren ! the-one h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
NOT
BRINGING-FORTH
rhxon rhEgnumi
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
kai bohson kai boaO

ouk ou
Part Neg
wdinousa OdinO
oti polla hoti polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
27 For it is written, Rejoice, [thou] barren that bearest not; break forth and cry, thou that travailest not: for the desolate hath many more children than she which hath an husband.
BURST AND burst-forth-you ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
IMPLORE implore-you !
THE-one the-one
NOT
PAINING travailing ecoushs echO

that
MANY
THE
offsprings children
erhmou erEmos
a_ Gen Sg f
mallon h mallon E
Adv Part
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-THE
WH
DESOLATE RATHER desolate-woman hmeis

NA
OR OF-THE one-HAVING than the-woman having adelfoi kata adelphos kata

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
THE
MAN husband
WH
4:28
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
isaak epaggelias tekna isaak epaggelia teknon

ni proper n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl n
esmen
YOU(p) ye
NA
28 Now we, brethren, as Isaac was, are the children of promise.
according-to ISAAC
OF-promise
offsprings children
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
ARE
4:29 all wsper tote o

alla
Conj
hOsper
Adv
tote
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
gennhqeis gennaO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
ediwken diOkO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
but
AS-EVEN even-as
then
THE-one the-one
according-to FLESH
BEING-generatED
CHASED persecuted
THE-one the-one
29 But as then he that was born after the flesh persecuted him [that was born] after the Spirit, even so [it is] now.
AV
kata kata
Prep
pneuma outws kai nun pneuma houtOs kai nun

n_ Acc Sg n Adv Conj Adv
according-to spirit
thus
AND also h ho
NOW
4:30 alla ti
alla
Conj
tis
pi Acc Sg n
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
ekbale ekballO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paidiskhn kai paidiskE kai

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
t_ Nom Sg f
but
ANY what ? uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
IS-sayING
THE
WRITing scripture
BE-OUT-CASTING THE be-you-casting-out ! klhronomhsei klEronomeO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
maid
AND
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
gar mh gar mE
Conj Part Neg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
30 Nevertheless what saith the scripture? Cast out the bondwoman and her son: for the son of the bondwoman shall not be heir with the son of the freewoman.
THE
SON
OF-her
NOT
for
NO
SHALL-BE-tenantING THE shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment eleuqeras eleutheros

a_ Gen Sg f
SON
OF-THE
paidiskhs meta tou paidiskE meta ho

n_ Gen Sg f Prep t_ Gen Sg m
uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
maid
WITH
THE
SON
OF-THE
FREE free-woman paidiskhs tekna paidiskE teknon

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl n
4:31 dio
dio
Conj

esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
alla ths alla ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
eleuqeras eleutheros
a_ Gen Sg f
31 So then, brethren, we are not children of the bondwoman, but of the free.
THRU-WHICH brothers wherefore brethren !
NOT
WE-ARE
OF-maid
offsprings children
but
OF-THE
FREE free-woman
AV
Galatians 5
5:1 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
eleuqeria hmas eleutheria hEmeis

n_ Dat Sg f pp 1 Acc Pl
cristos hleuqerwsen sthkete christos eleutheroO stEkO

n_ Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
to-THE
FREEdom
US
ANOINTED Christ
FREES
BE-STANDING-firm THEN AND be-ye-standing-firm !
NO
. Stand fast therefore in the liberty wherewith Christ hath made us free, and be not entangled again with the yoke of bondage.
palin zugw palin zugos

Adv n_ Dat Sg m
douleias enecesqe douleia enechO

n_ Gen Sg f vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
AGAIN
to-YOKE
OF-SLAVery
BE-YE-IN-HAVING be-ye-being-enthralled ! paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
5:2 ide
eidO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ean hoti ean

Conj Cond
peritemnhsqe peritemnO
vs Pres Pas 2 Pl
BE-PERCEIVING I lo ! cristos umas christos humeis

n_ Nom Sg m pp 2 Acc Pl
PAUL
AM-sayING
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Behold, I Paul say unto you, that if ye be circumcised, Christ shall profit you nothing.
that
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-ABOUT-CUTTING ye-may-be-circumcising
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
wfelhsei OpheleO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
ANOINTED Christ
YOU(p) ye
NOT-YET-ONE SHALL-BE-benefitING nothing de de

Conj
5:3 marturomai
marturomai
palin panti palin pas

Adv a_ Dat Sg m
anqrwpw peritemnomenw oti ofeileths anthrOpos peritemnO hoti opheiletEs

n_ Dat Sg m vp Pres Pas Dat Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
I-AM-witnessING I-am-attesting estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
YET AGAIN
to-EVERY
human
beING-ABOUT-CUT one-circumcising
that
OWEr debtor
For I testify again to every man that is circumcised, that he is a debtor to do the whole law.
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
poihsai poieO
vn Aor Act
he-IS
WHOLE
THE
LAW
TO-DO
5:4 kathrghqhte
katargeO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
apo apo
Prep
cristou oitines en christos hostis en

n_ Gen Sg m pr Nom Pl m Prep
nomw nomos
n_ Dat Sg m
dikaiousqe dikaioO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
YE-WERE-DOWN-UN-ACTED FROM ANOINTED ye-were-exempted Christ caritos exepesate charis ekpiptO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor Act 2 Pl
WHO-ANY who-any
IN
LAW
ARE-beING-JUSTIFIED OF-THE
Christ is become of no effect unto you, whosoever of you are justified by the law; ye are fallen from grace.
grace
YE-OUT-FALL ye-fall-out gar pneumati ek gar pneuma ek

Conj n_ Dat Sg n Prep
5:5 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
pistews elpida pistis elpis

dikaiosunhs apekdecomeqa dikaiosunE apekdechomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
For we through the Spirit wait for the hope of righteousness by faith.
WE
for
to-spirit
WH
OUT OF-BELIEF of-faith ihsou

NA
EXPECTATION OF-JUSTice of-righteousness oute oute

Conj
ARE-FROM-OUT-RECEIVING are-awaiting ti tis

px Acc Sg n
5:6 en
en
Prep
gar cristw gar christos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
peritomh peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
iscuei ischuO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IN
for
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
NOT-BESIDES ABOUT-CUTTing ANY neither circumcision anything agaphs energoumenh agapE energeO
n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Mid Nom Sg f
IS-beING-STRONG is-availing
For in Jesus Christ neither circumcision availeth any thing, nor uncircumcision; but faith which worketh by love.
oute oute
Conj
akrobustia alla pistis akrobustia alla pistis

di dia
Prep
NOT-BESIDES uncircumcision nor
but
BELIEF faith umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
THRU LOVE through enekoyen egkoptO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
beING-IN-ACTED operating
NA
5:7 etrecete kalws tis

trechO
vi impf Act 2 Pl
kalOs
Adv
tis
pi Nom Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia mh alEtheia mE
YE-RACED
IDEALly
ANY who ?
YOU(p) ye
Ye did run well; who did hinder you that ye should not obey the truth?
hinders
to-THE
TRUTH
NO
peiqesqai peithO
vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-beING-PERSUADED
5:8 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
peismonh ouk peismonE ou

ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kalountos kaleO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
This persuasion [cometh] not of him that calleth you.
THE
PERSUAsion
NOT
OUT OF-THE
One-CALLING one-calling
YOU(p) ye
9
5:9 mikra
mikros
a_ Nom Sg f
zumh zumE
n_ Nom Sg f
olon holos
a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
furama zumoi phurama zumoO

A little leaven leaveneth the whole lump.
LITTLE
FERMENT leaven
WHOLE
THE
KNEADing
IS-FERMENTING is-leavening
AV
Galatians 5
5:10 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
pepoiqa peithO
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
oti ouden hoti oudeis

Conj a_ Acc Sg n
allo allos
a_ Acc Sg n
HAVE-confidence INTO YOU(p) ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IN
Master Lord
that
NOT-YET-ONE other in-nothing otherwise bastasei bastazO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
10 I have confidence in you through the Lord, that ye will be none otherwise minded: but he that troubleth you shall bear his judgment, whosoever he be.
fronhsete phroneO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj
tarasswn tarassO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
YE-SHALL-BE-beING-DISPOSed THE
YET one-DISTURBING one-disturbing
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE-BEARING THE
JUDGment
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
WHO-ANY who-any
IF-EVER he-MAY-BE
5:11 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
adelfoi ei adelphos ei
n_ Voc Pl m Cond
peritomhn peritomE
n_ Acc Sg f
eti eti
Adv
khrussw kErussO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
eti eti
Adv
YET brothers brethren ! ara ara

Part
IF
ABOUT-CUTTing STILL I-AM-PROCLAIMING ANY circumcision I-am-heralding why ? kathrghtai katargeO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
STILL
11 And I, brethren, if I yet preach circumcision, why do I yet suffer persecution? then is the offence of the cross ceased.
diwkomai diOkO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
skandalon tou skandalon ho

staurou stauros
n_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-beING-CHASED CONSEQUENTLY HAS-been-DOWN-UN-ACTED THE I-am-being-persecuted has-been-nullified
SNARE
OF-THE
pale cross
12 I would they were even cut off which trouble you.
5:12 ofelon kai apokoyontai

ophelon
Inj
kai
Conj
apokoptO
vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anastatountes anastatoO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
OWE would-that !
AND also
SHALL-BE-beING-FROM-STRUCK THE-ones shall-be-strucking-off-themselves the eleuqeria eklhqhte eleutheria kaleO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
UP-STANDING YOU(p) ones-raising-to-insurrection ye thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
5:13 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
gar ep gar epi

Conj Prep
adelfoi monon mh adelphos monon mE

n_ Voc Pl m Adv Part Neg
eleuqerian eleutheria
n_ Acc Sg f
YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
for
ON
FREEdom
WERE-CALLED brothers brethren ! alla dia alla dia

Conj Prep
ONLY
NO
THE
FREEdom
13 . For, brethren, ye have been called unto liberty; only [use] not liberty for an occasion to the flesh, but by love serve one another.
aformhn aphormE
n_ Acc Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs douleuete allhlois agapE douleuO allElOn

n_ Gen Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl pc Dat Pl m
INTO FROM-RUSH to-THE incentive
FLESH
but
THRU THE through en en

Prep
LOVE
BE-SLAVING be-ye-slaving !
to-one-another
5:14 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar pas gar pas

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
peplhrwtai en plEroO en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
THE
for
EVERY entire ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
LAW
IN
ONE
saying word ws seauton hOs seautou

Adv pf 3 Acc Sg m
IN
THE
14 For all the law is fulfilled in one word, [even] in this; Thou shalt love thy neighbour as thyself.
agaphseis agapaO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg

Adv pp 2 Gen Sg
NIGH-one associate
OF-YOU
AS
YOURself
5:15 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
allhlous daknete allElOn daknO

pc Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai katesqiete kai katesthiO

blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
up hupo
Prep
IF
YET one-another
YE-ARE-BITING AND
YE-ARE-DOWN-EATING BE-YE-lookING NO are-devouring be-ye-bewaring !
by
15 But if ye bite and devour one another, take heed that ye be not consumed one of another.
allhlwn analwqhte allElOn analiskO

pc Gen Pl m vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
one-another
YE-MAY-BE-BEING-UP-CONSUMED ye-may-be-being-consumed de de
Conj
5:16 legw
legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pneumati peripateite pneuma peripateO

n_ Dat Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai epiqumian sarkos kai epithumia sarx

Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
16 [This] I say then, Walk in the Spirit, and ye shall not fulfil the lust of the flesh.
I-AM-sayING
YET to-spirit
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING AND be-ye-walking !
ON-FEELing lust
OF-FLESH NOT
NO
teleshte teleO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
SHOULD-BE-FINISHING ye-should-be-consummating
5:17 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar sarx gar sarx

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
epiqumei epithumeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kata tou kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos to pneuma ho
n_ Gen Sg n t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
THE
for
FLESH
IS-ON-FEELING DOWN is-lusting against
OF-THE the
spirit
THE
YET spirit
17 For the flesh lusteth against the Spirit, and the Spirit against the flesh: and these are contrary the one to the other: so that ye cannot do the things
AV
Galatians 5
kata ths kata ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos tauta sarx houtos

n_ Gen Sg f pd Nom Pl n
gar allhlois antikeitai gar allElOn antikeimai

Conj pc Dat Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
ean ean
Cond
that ye would.
DOWN against
OF-THE the
FLESH
these
for
IS-opposING
THAT NO
WHICH which(p)
IF-EVER
qelhte thelO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
poihte poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
YE-MAY-BE-WILLING these
YE-MAY-BE-DOING
5:18 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
pneumati agesqe pneuma agO

n_ Dat Sg n vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
upo hupo
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
18 But if ye be led of the Spirit, ye are not under the law.
IF
YET to-spirit
YE-ARE-beING-LED NOT
YE-ARE
UNDER LAW
5:19 fanera
phaneros
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Nom Pl n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos atina sarx hostis

n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
apparent apparent(p) porneia porneia

n_ Nom Sg f
YET IS
THE
ACTS works
OF-THE
FLESH
WHICH-ANY IS which-any(p)
19 Now the works of the flesh are manifest, which are [these]; Adultery, fornication, uncleanness, lasciviousness,
akaqarsia aselgeia akatharsia aselgeia

PROSTITUTION UN-cleanness uncleanness
wantonness
5:20 eidwlolatria farmakeia ecqrai eris

eidOlolatreia
n_ Nom Sg f
pharmakeia
n_ Nom Sg f
echthra
n_ Nom Pl f
eris
n_ Nom Sg f
zhlos zElos
n_ Nom Sg m
qumoi thumos
n_ Nom Pl m
eriqeiai dicostasiai eritheia dichostasia

n_ Nom Pl f n_ Nom Pl f
20 Idolatry, witchcraft, hatred, variance, emulations, wrath, strife, seditions, heresies,
idolatry
DRUGging enchantment
enmities
STRIFE
BOILing jealousy
furies
STRIFES factions
TWO-STANDS dissensions
aireseis hairesis
n_ Nom Pl f
preferences sects
5:21 fqonoi
phthonos
n_ Nom Pl m
meqai methE
n_ Nom Pl f
kwmoi kOmos
n_ Nom Pl m
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
omoia homoios
a_ Nom Pl n
toutois a houtos hos

pd Dat Pl n pr Acc Pl n
prolegw prolegO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ENVIES
DRUNKennesses REVELries
AND
THE
LIKE like(p) ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
to-these
WHICH which(p)
I-AM-BEFORE-sayING I-am-predicting basileian basileia

n_ Acc Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
proeipon prolegO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
oti oi hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
toiauta prassontes toioutos prassO

pd Acc Pl n vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
21 Envyings, murders, drunkenness, revellings, and such like: of the which I tell you before, as I have also told [you] in time past, that they which do such things shall not inherit the kingdom of God.
to-YOU(p) to-ye qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
according-AS I-BEFORE-said that I-predicted ou ou

Part Neg
THE-ones the-ones
THE
such such-things
PRACTISING committing
KINGdom
klhronomhsousin klEronomeO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
OF-God
NOT
SHALL-BE-tenantING shall-be-enjoying-the-allotment-of de de
Conj
5:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
karpos karpos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos estin pneuma eimi

agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
22 But the fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace, longsuffering, gentleness, goodness, faith,
THE
YET FRUIT
OF-THE
spirit
IS
LOVE
JOY
PEACE
makroqumia crhstoths agaqwsunh pistis makrothumia chrEstotEs agathOsunE pistis

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
kindness
GOODness
BELIEF faithfulness toioutwn ouk toioutos ou

pd Gen Pl n Part Neg
5:23 prauths egkrateia kata twn

prautEs
n_ Nom Sg f
egkrateia
n_ Nom Sg f
kata
Prep
ho
t_ Gen Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
23 Meekness, temperance: against such there is no law.
MEEKness
IN-HOLDing self-control de de
Conj
DOWN against
OF-THE the
WH
such such-things
NA
NOT
IS there-is thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
LAW
5:24 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
estaurwsan stauroO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
24 And they that are Christ's have crucified the flesh with the affections and lusts.
THE-ones the-ones sun sun

Prep
YET OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
FLESH
impale crucify
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
paqhmasin kai tais pathEma kai ho

n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Dat Pl f
epiqumiais epithumia
n_ Dat Pl f
EMOTIONS passions
AND
THE
ON-FEELings lusts
AV
5:25 ei
ei
Cond
zwmen zaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
pneumati pneumati kai stoicwmen pneuma pneuma kai stoicheO

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg n Conj vs Pres Act 1 Pl
25 If we live in the Spirit, let us also walk in the Spirit.
IF
WE-MAY-BE-LIVING to-spirit
to-spirit
AND also
WE-MAY-BE-elementING we-may-be-observing-the-fundamentals
26 Let us not be desirous of vain glory, provoking one another, envying one another.
5:26 mh
mE
Part Neg
ginwmeqa ginomai
kenodoxoi kenodoxos
a_ Nom Pl m
allhlous prokaloumenoi allhlois allElOn prokaleomai allElOn

pc Acc Pl m vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m pc Dat Pl m
NO
WE-MAY-BE-BECOMING EMPTY-esteemed one-another vainglorious
BEFORE-CALLING challenging
fqonountes phthoneO
ENVYING
AV
Galatians 6
6:1 adelfoi ean

adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
ean
Cond
kai prolhmfqh kai prolambanO

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tini tis
px Dat Sg n
paraptwmati paraptOma
n_ Dat Sg n
brothers brethren ! umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
IF-EVER AND also
MAY-BE-BEING-BEFORE-GOTTEN human may-be-being-overtaken ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
IN
ANY some
BESIDE-FALL offense pneumati pneuma

n_ Dat Sg n
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pneumatikoi katartizete pneumatikos katartizO

a_ Nom Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
toiouton en toioutos en
pd Acc Sg m Prep
. Brethren, if a man be overtaken in a fault, ye which are spiritual, restore such an one in the spirit of meekness; considering thyself, lest thou also be tempted.
YOU(p) ye
THE the-ones
spiritual-ones spiritual
BE-DOWN-EQUIPPING THE be-ye-attuning ! seauton mh seautou mE

pf 3 Acc Sg m Part Neg
such such-one peirasqhs peirazO

vs Aor Pas 2 Sg
IN
spirit
prauthtos skopwn prautEs skopeO

kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
OF-MEEKness
NOTING
YOURself
NO
AND also
YOU
MAY-BE-BEING-triED
WH
6:2 allhlwn
allElOn
pc Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
barh baros
n_ Acc Pl n
bastazete bastazO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl

Conj Adv
anaplhrwsate
Bear ye one another's burdens, and so fulfil the law of Christ.
OF-one-another THE
NA
HEAVIES burdens ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
BE-YE-BEARING AND be-ye-bearing ! nomon nomos

n_ Acc Sg m
thus
anaplhrwsete anaplEroO
vi Fut Act 2 Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-UP-FILLING ye-shall-be-filling-up
THE
LAW
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ mhden mEdeis

a_ Nom Sg n
6:3 ei
ei
Cond
gar dokei gar dokeO

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
wn eimi
For if a man think himself to be something, when he is nothing, he deceiveth himself.
IF
for
IS-SEEMING ANY is-supposing-himself anyone eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
TO-BE
ANY anything
NO-YET-ONE BEING nothing
frenapata phrenapataO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
he-IS-imposING-on self himself
6:4 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
dokimazetw dokimazO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
WH
ekastos
NA
ekastos hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai tote kai tote

Conj Adv
THE
YET ACT work monon monos

a_ Acc Sg m
OF-self of-himself to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
LET-BE-testING let-him-be-testing ! kauchma exei kauchEma echO

EACH each-one kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
AND
then
But let every man prove his own work, and then shall he have rejoicing in himself alone, and not in another.
eis eis
Prep
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
eteron heteros
a_ Acc Sg m
INTO self himself
ONLY alone
THE
BOAST
SHALL-BE-HAVING AND he-shall-be-having
NOT
INTO THE
5
6:5 ekastos gar to

hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
fortion bastasei phortion bastazO

For every man shall bear his own burden.
EACH each-one
for
THE
OWN
load
SHALL-BE-BEARING
6:6 koinwneitw
koinOneO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kathcoumenos ton katEcheO ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kathcounti katEcheO
Let him that is taught in the word communicate unto him that teacheth in all good things.
LET-BE-communionING YET THE let-him-be-contributing ! en en

Prep
one-beING-instructED one-being-instructed
THE in-the
saying word
to-THE
one-instructING one-instructing
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
agaqois agathos
a_ Dat Pl n
IN
ALL
GOOD good-things planasqe planaO

vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
6:7 mh
mE
Part Neg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
mukthrizetai o muktErizO hos

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg pr Acc Sg n
gar ean gar ean

Conj Cond
Be not deceived; God is not mocked: for whatsoever a man soweth, that shall he also reap.
NO
BE-YE-beING-STRAYED God be-ye-being-deceived ! anqrwpos touto anthrOpos houtos

n_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Sg n
NOT
IS-beING-NOSED is-being-sneered-at
WHICH
for
IF-EVER
speirh speirO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kai qerisei kai therizO

MAY-BE-SOWING human
this
AND also eis eis

Prep
he-SHALL-BE-reapING
6:8 oti o
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
speirwn speirO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos sarx
n_ Gen Sg f
that
THE
INTO THE
FLESH
OF-self of-selfhim
OUT OF-THE
FLESH
For he that soweth to his flesh shall of the flesh reap corruption; but he that soweth to the Spirit shall of the Spirit reap life everlasting.
AV
Galatians 6
qerisei therizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
fqoran phthora
n_ Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
speirwn speirO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma ek pneuma ek
n_ Acc Sg n Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
SHALL-BE-reapING CORRUPtion THE
YET one-SOWING one-sowing aiwnion aiOnios

a_ Acc Sg f
INTO THE
spirit
OUT OF-THE
pneumatos qerisei pneuma therizO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Fut Act 3 Sg
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
spirit
SHALL-BE-reapING LIFE
eonian
6:9 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
poiountes poieO
mh mE
Part Neg
egkakwmen egkakeO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
gar idiw gar idios

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
And let us not be weary in well doing: for in due season we shall reap, if we faint not.
THE
YET IDEAL
DOING in-doing ekluomenoi ekluO

NO
WE-MAY-BE-IN-EVILING to-SEASON for we-may-be-being-despondent
OWN
qerisomen therizO
vi Fut Act 1 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
WE-SHALL-BE-reapING NO
OUT-LOOSING fainting ws kairon hOs kairos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
WH
6:10 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
ecwmen
NA
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ergazwmeqa ergazomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
CONSEQUENTLY THEN AS
SEASON occasion pros pros

Prep
WE-ARE-HAVING
WE-ARE-workING
THE
10 As we have therefore opportunity, let us do good unto all [men], especially unto them who are of the household of faith.
agaqon pros agathos pros

a_ Acc Sg n Prep
pantas malista de pas malista de

a_ Acc Pl m Adv Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oikeious oikeios
a_ Acc Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
GOOD
TOWARD ALL
RATHERest specially
YET TOWARD THE
HOME-be-ers OF-THE family-members th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
BELIEF faith ceiri cheir

n_ Dat Sg f
11 . Ye see how large a letter I have written unto you with mine own hand.
6:11 idete
eidO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
phlikois umin pElikos humeis

a_ Dat Pl n pp 2 Dat Pl
grammasin egraya gramma graphO

emh emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
BE-PERCEIVING PRIME lo ! to-what-big
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WRITings letters
I-WRITE
to-THE
MY
HAND
6:12 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
qelousin euproswphsai en thelO euprosOpeO en

vi Pres Act 3 Pl vn Aor Act Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
anagkazousin umas anagkazO humeis

vi Pres Act 3 Pl pp 2 Acc Pl
as-many-as ARE-WILLING TO-WELL-face whoever to-put-on-fair-face peritemnesqai peritemnO

vn Pres Pas
IN
FLESH
these
ARE-necessitatING are-compelling cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
WH
YOU(p) ye mh mE
Part Neg
monon ina monon hina

Adv Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
staurw tou stauros ho

ihsou
12 As many as desire to make a fair shew in the flesh, they constrain you to be circumcised; only lest they should suffer persecution for the cross of Christ.
TO-BE-beING-ABOUT-CUT ONLY to-be-being-circumcised diwkwntai diOkO

vs Pres Pas 3 Pl
THAT to-THE
pale cross
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
NO
THEY-MAY-BE-beING-CHASED they-may-be-being-persecuted
6:13 oude
oude
Adv
gar oi gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
peritemnomenoi peritemnO
autoi autos
pp Nom Pl m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
fulassousin alla phulassO alla

NOT-YET for not-yeteven qelousin thelO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THE
ones-beING-ABOUT-CUT they ones-circumcising peritemnesqai peritemnO

vn Pres Pas
LAW
ARE-GUARDING are-maintaining umetera sarki humeteros sarx

ps 2 Dat Sg n_ Dat Sg f
but
13 For neither they themselves who are circumcised keep the law; but desire to have you circumcised, that they may glory in your flesh.
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THEY-ARE-WILLING YOU(p) ye kauchswntai kauchaomai

vs Aor midD 3 Pl
TO-BE-beING-ABOUT-CUT THAT IN to-be-being-circumcised
THE
YOUR-more of-yours
FLESH
THEY-SHOULD-BE-BOASTING
6:14 emoi
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
de de
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
genoito ginomai
vo 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kaucasqai kauchaomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
staurw stauros
n_ Dat Sg m
to-ME
YET NO
MAY-it-BE-BECOMING TO-BE-BOASTING IF
NO
IN
THE
pale cross
14 But God forbid that I should glory, save in the cross of our Lord Jesus Christ, by whom the world is crucified unto me, and I unto the world.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou di christos dia

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kosmos kosmos
n_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
THRU WHOM through which
to-ME
SYSTEM world
AV
Galatians 6 - Ephesians 1
estaurwtai kagw stauroO kagO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg Con
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
HAS-been-impalED AND-I has-been-crucified
to-SYSTEM to-world ti tis

px Acc Sg n
6:15 oute
oute
Conj
gar peritomh gar peritomE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
oute oute
Conj
akrobustia alla kainh akrobustia alla kainos

n_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg f
NOT-BESIDES for neither ktisis ktisis

n_ Nom Sg f
ABOUT-CUTTing ANY circumcision anything
IS
NOT-BESIDES uncircumcision nor
but
NEW
15 For in Christ Jesus neither circumcision availeth any thing, nor uncircumcision, but a new creature.
CREATION
6:16 kai osoi

kai
Conj
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kanoni kanOn
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw stoichsousin houtos stoicheO

pd Dat Sg m vi Fut Act 3 Pl
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
ep epi
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
AND
as-many-as to-THE whoever
RULE
this
SHALL-BE-elementING PEACE shall-be-observing-the-fundamentals qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
ON
them
16 And as many as walk according to this rule, peace [be] on them, and mercy, and upon the Israel of God.
kai eleos kai eleos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kai epi ton kai epi ho

Conj Prep t_ Acc Sg m
israhl tou israEl ho

AND
MERCY
AND also
ON
THE
ISRAEL
OF-THE
God
6:17 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg n
loipou loipon
a_ Gen Sg n
kopous kopos
n_ Acc Pl m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
parecetw parechO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar ta gar ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
rest
toils to-ME weariness(p) me ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
NO-YET-ONE LET-BE-tenderING I no-one let-him-be-affording ! swmati mou sOma egO

for
THE
17 From henceforth let no man trouble me: for I bear in my body the marks of the Lord Jesus.
stigmata tou stigma ho

en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
bastazw bastazO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
PRICKS brand-marks
OF-THE
JESUS
IN
THE
BODY
WH
OF-ME
NA
AM-BEARING
6:18 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meta christos meta

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord adelfoi amhn adelphos amEn

n_ Voc Pl m Hebrew
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH
18 Brethren, the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with your spirit. Amen. <<[To [the] Galatians written from Rome.]>>
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos umwn pneuma humeis

THE
spirit
OF-YOU(p) brothers of-ye brethren !
AMEN
AV
Ephesians 1
Ephesians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
PAUL
commissioner apostle ousin eimi

OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ en en

Prep
THRU WILL through en en

Prep
OF-God
to-THE
HOLY-ones saints
. Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God, to the saints which are at Ephesus, and to the faithful in Christ Jesus:
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
efesw ephesos
n_ Dat Sg f
kai pistois kai pistos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m

THE-ones BEING the ones-being
IN
EPHESUS
AND
to-BELIEVing(p) IN to-believers patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
JESUS
1:2 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Grace [be] to you, and peace, from God our Father, and [from] the Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:3 euloghtos o
eulogEtos
a_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pathr kai patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
blessed blessed-be cristou o christos ho

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
. Blessed [be] the God and Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, who hath blessed us with all spiritual blessings in heavenly [places] in Christ:
euloghsas eulogeO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
eulogia pneumatikh en eulogia pneumatikos en

n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
t_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
THE
One-blessing one-blessing cristw christos

n_ Dat Sg m
US
IN
EVERY
blessing
spiritual
IN THE among
epouraniois en epouranios en
a_ Dat Pl n Prep
ON-heavenlies celestial-ones
IN
Prep
1:4 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
exelexato hmas eklegO hEmeis

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
pro pro
Prep

einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
according-AS He-choosES
US
IN
Him
BEFORE DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM TO-BE disruption of-world en en

Prep
According as he hath chosen us in him before the foundation of the world, that we should be holy and without blame before him in love:
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
kai amwmous kai amOmos

Conj a_ Acc Pl m
katenwpion autou katenOpion autos

Prep pp Gen Sg m
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
US
HOLY-ones AND holy
UN-FLAWED-ones DOWN-IN-VIEW flawless in-sight eis eis

Prep
OF-Him
IN
LOVE
1:5 proorisas
proorizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
uioqesian dia huiothesia dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
BEFORE-SEEizing US designating-beforehand kata kata

Prep
INTO SON-PLACing place-of-a-son tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
THRU JESUS through
ANOINTED Christ
INTO Him
Having predestinated us unto the adoption of children by Jesus Christ to himself, according to the good pleasure of his will,
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eudokian eudokia
n_ Acc Sg f
qelhmatos autou thelEma autos

WELL-SEEMing OF-THE delight ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
WILL
OF-Him
1:6 eis
eis
Prep
epainon doxhs epainos doxa

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f

hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
ecaritwsen hmas charitoO hEmeis

en en
Prep
INTO ON-PRAISE OF-esteem OF-THE laud of-glory tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
grace
OF-Him
WHICH
gracES he-graces
US
IN
To the praise of the glory of his grace, wherein he hath made us accepted in the beloved.
hgaphmenw agapaO
THE
One-HAVING-been-LOVED Beloved w hos

pr Dat Sg m
1:7 en
en
Prep
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apolutrwsin dia apolutrOsis dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
aimatos autou haima autos

IN
WHOM
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
THRU THE through
BLOOD
OF-Him
In whom we have redemption through his blood, the forgiveness of sins, according to the riches of his grace;
AV
Ephesians 1
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
afesin aphesis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
paraptwmatwn kata paraptOma kata

n_ Gen Pl n Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploutos ths ploutos ho

caritos charis
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
FROM-LETTing OF-THE forgiveness
RICHES
OF-THE
grace
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
1:8 hs
hos
pr Gen Sg f
eperisseusen eis perisseuO eis

hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai fronhsei kai phronEsis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
Wherein he hath abounded toward us in all wisdom and prudence;
WHICH
He-lavishES
INTO US
IN
EVERY all
WISDOM
AND
DISPOSition prudence kata kata

Prep
9
1:9 gnwrisas
gnOrizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg n

KNOWizing making-known thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-US
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
OF-THE
WILL
OF-Him
Having made known unto us the mystery of his will, according to his good pleasure which he hath purposed in himself:
eudokian eudokia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
proeqeto protithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
THE
WELL-SEEMing OF-Him delight oikonomian tou oikonomia ho

n_ Acc Sg f
WHICH
He-BEFORE-PLACED IN he-purposed
Him
1:10 eis
eis
Prep
plhrwmatos twn plErOma ho

kairwn kairos
n_ Gen Pl m
anakefalaiwsasqai ta anakephalaioO ho
vn Aor midD t_ Acc Pl n
t_ Gen Sg n
INTO HOME-LAW administration panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
FILLing complement
OF-THE
SEASONS eras
TO-UP-HEAD to-head-up epi ths epi ho

Prep
THE
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw ta christos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
epi tois epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois kai ta ouranos kai ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj t_ Acc Pl n
10 That in the dispensation of the fulness of times he might gather together in one all things in Christ, both which are in heaven, and which are on earth; [even] in him:
t_ Gen Sg f
ALL
IN
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE the(p)
ON
THE
heavens
AND
THE the(p)
ON
OF-THE the
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
LAND earth
1:11 en
en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
NA
(1:11)
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
kai eklhrwqhmen kai klEroO

proorisqentes proorizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
kata kata
Prep
IN
Him
IN
WHOM
AND also
WE-WERE-LOTTED BEING-BEFORE-SEEizED according-to our-lot-was-cast being-designated-beforehand thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
proqesin prothesis
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
energountos kata energeO kata

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Prep
boulhn tou boulE ho

11 In whom also we have obtained an inheritance, being predestinated according to the purpose of him who worketh all things after the counsel of his own will:
BEFORE-PLACing OF-THE-One THE purpose of-the-one qelhmatos autou thelEma autos

ALL
IN-ACTING operating
COUNSEL
OF-THE
WILL
OF-Him
1:12 eis
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
epainon doxhs epainos doxa

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
12 That we should be to the praise of his glory, who first trusted in Christ.
INTO THE
TO-BE
US
INTO ON-PRAISE OF-esteem OF-Him laud of-glory tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
THE
prohlpikotas proelpizO
en en
Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
ones-HAVING-BEFORE-EXPECTED IN ones-having-a-prior-expectancy
THE
ANOINTED Christ logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
1:13 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
akousantes ton akouO ho

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias to alEtheia ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg n
IN
WHOM
AND also
YOU(p) ye
HEARing
THE
saying word
OF-THE
TRUTH
THE
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
swthrias umwn sOtEria humeis

en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
kai pisteusantes esfragisqhte kai pisteuO sphragizO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
13 In whom ye also [trusted], after that ye heard the word of truth, the gospel of your salvation: in whom also after that ye believed, ye were sealed with that holy Spirit of promise,
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
SAVing salvation
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
WHOM
AND also
BELIEVing
YE-ARE-SEALED
AV
Ephesians 1
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pneumati ths pneuma ho

epaggelias tw epaggelia ho
n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg n
agiw hagios
a_ Dat Sg n
to-THE
spirit
OF-THE
promise
THE
HOLY
1:14 o
hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
arrabwn ths arrhabOn ho

klhronomias klEronomia
n_ Gen Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
apolutrwsin apolutrOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
WHICH
IS
EARNEST
OF-THE
tenancy OF-US enjoyment-of-the-allotment doxhs doxa

n_ Gen Sg f
INTO FROM-LOOSening deliverance
14 Which is the earnest of our inheritance until the redemption of the purchased possession, unto the praise of his glory.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
peripoihsews eis peripoiEsis eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
epainon ths epainos ho

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
procuring
INTO ON-PRAISE OF-THE laud kagw kagO

pp 1 Nom Sg Con
esteem glory thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-Him
1:15 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
akousas akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kaq kata
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
pistin en pistis en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
THRU this because-of tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
AND-I also-I ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
HEARing
NA
THE
NA
according-to YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
BELIEF faith
IN
15 . Wherefore I also, after I heard of your faith in the Lord Jesus, and love unto all the saints,
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn thn agapE ho

pantas tous pas ho

agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
THE
Master Lord
JESUS
AND
THE
LOVE
THE
INTO ALL
THE
HOLY-ones saints epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
16 Cease not to give thanks for you, making mention of you in my prayers;
1:16 ou
ou
Part Neg
pauomai pauO
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
eucaristwn eucharisteO
uper huper
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
mneian mneia
n_ Acc Sg f
poioumenos poieO
NOT
I-AM-CEASING thankING giving-thanks
REMINDer makING mention
ON
OF-THE the
proseucwn mou proseuchE egO

prayers
OF-ME
1:17 ina
hina
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
THAT THE
God
OF-THE

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
THE
FATHER
17 That the God of our Lord Jesus Christ, the Father of glory, may give unto you the spirit of wisdom and revelation in the knowledge of him:
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
dwh didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg / vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pneuma sofias pneuma sophia

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f
kai apokaluyews en kai apokalupsis en

OF-THE
esteem glory
MAY-BE-GIVING
to-YOU(p) ye
spirit
OF-WISDOM AND
IN
epignwsei epignOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ON-KNOWledge OF-SAME realization of-him
1:18 pefwtismenous
phOtizO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ofqalmous ths ophthalmos ho

kardias kardia
n_ Gen Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
HAVING-been-enLIGHTenED THE
VIEWers eyes h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
HEART
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
INTO THE
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tis tis
pi Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
klhsews autou klEsis autos

18 The eyes of your understanding being enlightened; that ye may know what is the hope of his calling, and what the riches of the glory of his inheritance in the saints,
TO-PERCEIVE YOU(p) ye tis tis

pi Nom Sg m
ANY what ?
IS
THE
EXPECTATION OF-THE
CALLing
OF-SAME of-him en en
Prep
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ANY what ? tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
THE
RICHES
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
tenancy SAME enjoyment-of-the-allotment of-him
IN among
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
THE
HOLY-ones saints to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
1:19 kai ti
kai
Conj
tis
pi Nom Sg n
uperballon huperballO
megeqos ths megethos ho


eis eis
Prep
AND
ANY what ?
THE
GREATness
OF-THE
ABILITY power
OF-SAME of-him
INTO
19 And what [is] the exceeding greatness of his power to us-ward who believe, according to the working of his mighty power,
AV
Ephesians 1 - Ephesians 2
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pisteuontas kata pisteuO kata

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
energeian tou energeia ho

kratous ths kratos ho

US
THE
IN-ACTion operation
OF-THE
HOLDing might
OF-THE
iscuos ischus
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
STRENGTH OF-SAME of-him
1:20 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
WH
enhrghken
NA
enhrghsen energeO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw egeiras christos egeirO

n_ Dat Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
WHICH
IN-ACTS he-operates kai kaqisas kai kathizO

IN
THE
Prep
ROUSing
Him
OUT
20 Which he wrought in Christ, when he raised him from the dead, and set [him] at his own right hand in the heavenly [places],
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
epouraniois epouranios
a_ Dat Pl n
OF-DEAD-ones AND of-dead-ones
seating seating-him archs archE
IN
RIGHT right-hand
OF-Him
IN THE among
21 Far above all principality, and power, and might, and dominion, and every name that is named, not only in this world, but also in that which is to come:
1:21 uperanw pashs

huperanO
Adv
pas
a_ Gen Sg f
kai exousias kai dunamews kai kuriothtos kai kai exousia kai dunamis kai kuriotEs kai
Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj
n_ Gen Sg f
OVER-UP up-over
OF-EVERY ORIGINal AND every sovereignty
authority
AND
ABILITY power tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
masterdom lordship
AND
pantos onomatos onomazomenou ou pas onoma onomazO ou

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n vp Pres Pas Gen Sg n Part Neg
monon en monon en
Adv Prep
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
toutw alla kai houtos alla kai

pd Dat Sg m Conj Conj
EVERY
NAME
beING-NAMED
NOT
ONLY
IN
THE
eon
this
but
AND also
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
mellonti mellO
IN
THE
beING-ABOUT one-impending upetaxen upo hupotassO hupo

1:22 kai panta

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai auton kai autos

Conj pp Acc Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
ALL
UNDER-SETS subjects th ho
UNDER THE
FEET
OF-Him
AND
Him
GIVES
22 And hath put all [things] under his feet, and gave him [to be] the head over all [things] to the church,
kefalhn uper panta kephalE huper pas

n_ Acc Sg f Prep a_ Acc Pl n
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
t_ Dat Sg f
HEAD
OVER
ALL
to-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
1:23 htis
hostis
pr Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n

n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
23 Which is his body, the fulness of him that filleth all in all.
WHICH-ANY IS which-any panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
THE
BODY
OF-Him
THE
FILLing complement
OF-THE of-the-one
THE
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
plhroumenou plEroO
vp Pres Mid Gen Sg m Tra
ALL
IN
ALL
beING-FILLED completing
AV
Ephesians 2
2:1 kai umas

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ontas eimi
nekrous tois nekros ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Pl n
paraptwmasin kai tais paraptOma kai ho

n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Dat Pl f
amartiais hamartia
n_ Dat Pl f
AND
YOU(p) ye
. And you [hath he quickened], who were dead in trespasses and sins;
BEING
DEAD
to-THE
AND
THE
misses sins
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
2:2 en
en
Prep
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
pote periepathsate kata pote peripateO kata

Part vi Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
IN
WHICH
?-when once
YE-ABOUT-TREAD ye-walk ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
eon
OF-THE
SYSTEM world tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
toutou kata houtos kata

pd Gen Sg m Prep
arconta ths archOn ho

exousias tou exousia ho

aeros aEr
n_ Gen Sg m
Wherein in time past ye walked according to the course of this world, according to the prince of the power of the air, the spirit that now worketh in the children of disobedience:
this
chief
OF-THE
authority jurisdiction tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE
AIR
OF-THE

nun energountos en nun energeO en

Adv vp Pres Act Gen Sg n Prep
uiois huios
n_ Dat Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
apeiqeias apeitheia
n_ Gen Sg f
spirit
OF-THE the ois hos

pr Dat Pl m
NOW IN-ACTING operating pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
IN
THE
SONS
OF-THE
UN-PERSUADableness stubbornness tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
2:3 en
en
Prep

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
anestrafhmen anastrephO
vi 2Aor Pas 1 Pl
pote en pote en
Part Prep
n_ Dat Pl f
IN WHOM among ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
AND also
WE
ALL
UP-TURNed (behaved) ?-when behaved-ourselves once ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
IN
THE
ON-FEELings lusts
sarkos hmwn sarx hemeis

poiountes poieO
qelhmata ths thelEma ho

sarkos kai twn sarx kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj t_ Gen Pl f
Among whom also we all had our conversation in times past in the lusts of our flesh, fulfilling the desires of the flesh and of the mind; and were by nature the children of wrath, even as others.
OF-THE
FLESH
OF-US
DOING
THE
WILLS will(p) orghs orgE

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
FLESH
AND
OF-THE
dianoiwn dianoia
n_ Gen Pl f
kai hmeqa kai eimi

tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
fusei phusis
n_ Dat Sg f
ws kai oi hOs kai ho

loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
THRU-MINDS AND comprehension(p)
WE-WERE
offsprings children
to-nature
OF-INDIGNATION AS
AND THE even dia dia

Prep
rest rest(p) thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
2:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
plousios wn plousios eimi

a_ Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
eleei eleos
n_ Dat Sg n
pollhn polus
a_ Acc Sg f
. But God, who is rich in mercy, for his great love wherewith he loved us,
THE
YET God
RICH
BEING
IN
MERCY
THRU THE because-of
much vast
agaphn autou agapE autos

hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
hgaphsen hmas agapaO hEmeis

LOVE
OF-Him
WHICH LOVES with-which he-loves hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
US
2:5 kai ontas

kai
Conj
eimi
nekrous tois nekros ho

a_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Pl n
paraptwmasin sunezwopoihsen paraptOma suzOopoieO

AND also tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
BEING
US
DEAD
to-THE
He-makES-TOGETHER-LIVE vivifies-together-us
Even when we were dead in sins, hath quickened us together with Christ, (by grace ye are saved;)
cristw cariti este christos charis eimi

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
seswsmenoi sOzO
to-THE with-the
ANOINTED Christ
to-grace
YE-ARE
ones-HAVING-been-SAVED having-been-saved tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
2:6 kai sunhgeiren

kai
Conj
sunegeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
kai sunekaqisen en kai sugkathizO en

epouraniois en epouranios en
a_ Dat Pl n Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
He-TOGETHER-ROUSES AND rouses-together-us
TOGETHER-seats seats-together-us
IN THE among
IN
ANOINTED Christ
And hath raised [us] up together, and made [us] sit together in heavenly [places] in Christ Jesus:
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
JESUS
2:7 ina
hina
Conj
endeixhtai endeiknumi
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
aiwsin tois aiOn ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
epercomenois eperchomai
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-IN-SHOWING IN he-should-be-displaying
THE
eons
THE
ON-COMING oncoming
THE
That in the ages to come he might shew the exceeding riches of his grace in [his] kindness toward us through Christ Jesus.
AV
Ephesians 2
uperballon huperballO


en en
Prep
crhstothti ef chrEstotEs epi

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
RICHES
OF-THE
grace
OF-Him
IN
kindness
ON
US
IN

ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
2:8 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
gar cariti este gar charis eimi

Conj n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
seswsmenoi sOzO
dia dia
Prep
pistews kai touto pistis kai houtos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg n
ouk ou
Part Neg
to-THE
for
grace
YE-ARE
ones-HAVING-been-SAVED THRU BELIEF saved through faith dwron dOron

n_ Nom Sg n
AND
this
NOT
For by grace are ye saved through faith; and that not of yourselves: [it is] the gift of God:
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
OUT OF-YOU(p) OF-God of-ye
THE
oblation approach-present mh mE
Part Neg
2:9 ouk
ou
Part Neg
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
ina hina
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
kauchshtai kauchaomai
vs Aor midD 3 Sg
Not of works, lest any man should boast.
NOT
THAT NO
ANY anyone
SHOULD-BE-BOASTING
2:10 autou
autos
pp Gen Sg m
gar esmen gar eimi

poihma poiEma
n_ Nom Sg n
ktisqentes ktizO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
en en
Prep

epi ergois epi ergon

Prep n_ Dat Pl n
OF-Him
for
WE-ARE
achievement BEING-CREATED
IN
Prep
JESUS
ON
ACTS works
10 For we are his workmanship, created in Christ Jesus unto good works, which God hath before ordained that we should walk in them.
agaqois ois agathos hos

a_ Dat Pl n pr Dat Pl n
prohtoimasen proetoimazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
autois autos
pp Dat Pl n
GOOD
WHICH
BEFORE-makES-READY THE makes-ready-beforehand
God
THAT IN
them
peripathswmen peripateO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
WE-SHOULD-BE-ABOUT-TREADING we-should-be-walking
2:11 dio
dio
Conj
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oti pote umeis hoti pote humeis

Conj Part pp 2 Nom Pl
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
THRU-WHICH BE-YE-rememberING that wherefore be-ye-remembering ! legomenoi legO

?-when once ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye
THE
NATIONS
IN
FLESH
THE
akrobustia upo akrobustia hupo

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
legomenhs legO
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
11 . Wherefore remember, that ye [being] in time past Gentiles in the flesh, who are called Uncircumcision by that which is called the Circumcision in the flesh made by hands;
ones-beING-said ones-being-said ceiropoihtou cheiropoiEtos

a_ Gen Sg f
uncircumcision
UNDER THE by
ABOUT-CUTTing IN Circumcision
FLESH
HAND-made made-by-hands
2:12 oti hte

hoti
Conj
eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
ekeinw cwris ekeinos chOris

pd Dat Sg m Adv
cristou aphllotriwmenoi ths christos apallotrioO ho

n_ Gen Sg m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
that
YE-WERE
to-THE
SEASON era
that
apart-from ANOINTED Christ twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
HAVING-been-estrangED having-been-alienated epaggelias epaggelia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
politeias tou politeia ho

israhl kai xenoi israEl kai xenos

ni proper Conj a_ Nom Pl m
diaqhkwn ths diathEkE ho

n_ Gen Pl f t_ Gen Sg f
12 That at that time ye were without Christ, being aliens from the commonwealth of Israel, and strangers from the covenants of promise, having no hope, and without God in the world:
citizenship
OF-THE
ISRAEL
AND
LODGErs guests
OF-THE
covenants
OF-THE
promise
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
mh mE
Part Neg
econtes echO
kai aqeoi kai atheos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
EXPECTATION NO
HAVING
AND
UN-Gods IN without-God(p) umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
THE
SYSTEM world makran makran

Adv
13 But now in Christ Jesus ye who sometimes were far off are made nigh by the blood of Christ.
2:13 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
en en
Prep

oi hos
pr Nom Pl m
pote ontes pote eimi

Part vp Pres vxx Nom Pl m
NOW
YET IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
YOU(p) ye
WHO
?-when once
BEING
FAR far-off
AV
Ephesians 2
egenhqhte ginomai
vi Aor pasD 2 Pl
eggus en eggus en
Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
aimati haima
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
WERE-BECOMED NEAR were-become
IN
THE
BLOOD
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
2:14 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
poihsas poieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
He
for
IS
THE
PEACE
OF-US
THE
THE
14 . For he is our peace, who hath made both one, and hath broken down the middle wall of partition [between us];
amfotera en amphoteroi heis

a_ Acc Pl n n_ Acc Sg n
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
mesotoicon tou mesotoichon ho

fragmou lusas phragmos luO

n_ Gen Sg m vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
both
ONE
AND
THE
MID-WALL central-wall sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
BARRIER
LOOSing razing twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
2:15 thn
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ecqran en echthra en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
entolwn en entolE en
n_ Gen Pl f Prep
THE
enmity
IN
THE
FLESH
OF-Him
THE
LAW
OF-THE
directions precepts eis eis

Prep
IN
dogmasin katarghsas dogma katargeO

n_ Dat Pl n vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ina hina
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
ktish ktizO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
15 Having abolished in his flesh the enmity, [even] the law of commandments [contained] in ordinances; for to make in himself of twain one new man, [so] making peace;
decrees
DOWN-UN-ACTing nullifying kainon kainos

a_ Acc Sg m
THAT THE
TWO
He-SHOULD-BE-CREATING IN
Him himself
INTO
ena heis
n_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon poiwn anthrOpos poieO

eirhnhn eirEnE
n_ Acc Sg f
ONE
NEW
human
makING
PEACE
2:16 kai apokatallaxh

kai
Conj
apokatallassO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
amfoterous en amphoteroi en
a_ Acc Pl m Prep
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
swmati tw sOma ho
n_ Dat Sg n t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND
He-SHOULD-BE-reconcilING THE should-be-reconciling staurou apokteinas stauros apokteinO

n_ Gen Sg m
both
IN
ONE
BODY
to-THE
God
16 And that he might reconcile both unto God in one body by the cross, having slain the enmity thereby:
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ecqran en echthra en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
THRU THE through
pale cross
FROM-KILLing killing euhggelisato euaggelizO

vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
THE
enmity
IN
it
2:17 kai elqwn

kai
Conj
erchomai
eirhnhn umin eirEnE humeis

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
makran kai eirhnhn makran kai eirEnE

Adv Conj n_ Acc Sg f
AND
COMING
He-WELL-MESSAGizES PEACE he-brings-the-well-message of-peace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
17 And came and preached peace to you which were afar off, and to them that were nigh.
THE the-ones
FAR afar
AND
PEACE
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
eggus eggus
Adv
to-THE NEAR to-the-ones
2:18 oti di
hoti
Conj
dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prosagwghn oi prosagOgE ho
amfoteroi en amphoteroi en
a_ Nom Pl m Prep
18 For through him we both have access by one Spirit unto the Father.
that
THRU Him through pneumati pros pneuma pros

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
TOWARD-LEAD access
THE
both
IN
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
ONE
spirit
TOWARD THE
FATHER
2:19 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
ouketi ouketi
Adv
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
xenoi xenos
a_ Nom Pl m
kai paroikoi kai paroikos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
alla este alla eimi

CONSEQUENTLY THEN NOT-STILL YE-ARE not-longer sumpolitai sumpolitEs

n_ Nom Pl m
LODGErs guests
AND
BESIDE-HOMErs but sojourners qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
YE-ARE
19 Now therefore ye are no more strangers and foreigners, but fellowcitizens with the saints, and of the household of God;
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
kai oikeioi kai oikeios

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
TOGETHER-citizens OF-THE fellow-citizens
HOME-be-ers OF-THE family-members qemeliw twn themelios ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
God
2:20 epoikodomhqentes epi tw

epoikodomeO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
apostolwn kai profhtwn apostolos kai prophEtEs

BEING-ON-HOME-BUILDED being-built-on
ON
THE
foundation
OF-THE
AND
20 And are built upon the foundation of the apostles and prophets, Jesus Christ himself being the chief corner [stone];
AV
ontos eimi
akrogwniaiou akrogOniaios
a_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
cristou ihsou christos iEsous

OF-BEING
OF-EXTREMITY-CORNER OF-SAME capstone-of-the-corner himself w hos

pr Dat Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
2:21 en
en
Prep
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
oikodomh oikodomE
n_ Nom Sg f
sunarmologoumenh sunarmologeO
auxei auxanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
IN
WHOM
EVERY entire
HOME-BUILDing beING-TOGETHER-CONNECT-LAID IS-GROWING building being-connected-together
INTO TEMPLE
21 In whom all the building fitly framed together groweth unto an holy temple in the Lord:
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
HOLY
IN
Master Lord kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
2:22 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
sunoikodomeisqe sunoikodomeO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
katoikhthrion tou katoikEtErion ho

IN
WHOM
AND also
YOU(p) ye
22 In whom ye also are builded together for an habitation of God through the Spirit.
ARE-beING-TOGETHER-HOME-BUILDED INTO DOWN-HOME-place are-being-built-together dwelling-place
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
God
IN
spirit
AV
Ephesians 3
3:1 toutou carin

houtos
pd Gen Sg n
charin
Adv
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
desmios tou desmios ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
WH
ihsou
. For this cause I Paul, the prisoner of Jesus Christ for you Gentiles,
OF-this
NA
grace I on-behalf uper huper

Prep
PAUL
THE
BOUND-one prisoner
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eqnwn ethnos
n_ Gen Pl n
JESUS
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye ge ge

Part
OF-THE the
NATIONS
3:2 ei
ei
Cond
hkousate thn akouO ho

oikonomian ths oikonomia ho


qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IF SURELY YE-HEAR since doqeishs didOmi

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
THE of-the eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
grace
OF-THE
God
THE
If ye have heard of the dispensation of the grace of God which is given me to you-ward:
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
one-BEING-GIVEN to-ME being-given
INTO YOU(p) ye apokaluyin egnwrisqh moi apokalupsis gnOrizO egO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Pas 3 Sg pp 1 Dat Sg
3:3
oti hoti
Conj
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
musthrion kaqws mustErion kathOs

n_ Acc Sg n Adv
that
according-to FROM-COVERing revelation en en

Prep
IS-KNOWizED is-made-known
to-ME
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret
according-AS
How that by revelation he made known unto me the mystery; (as I wrote afore in few words,
proegraya prographO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
oligw oligos
a_ Dat Sg m
I-BEFORE-WRITE IN I-write-before
FEW brief dunasqe dunamai

3:4 pros
pros
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
anaginwskontes nohsai anaginOskO noeO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m vn Aor Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sunesin sunesis
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
Whereby, when ye read, ye may understand my knowledge in the mystery of Christ)
TOWARD WHICH
ARE-ABLE ye-are-able
ones-readING ones-reading cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
TO-MIND THE to-apprehend
understanding OF-ME
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
musthriw tou mustErion ho

IN
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret eterais heteros

a_ Dat Pl f
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ egnwrisqh tois gnOrizO ho

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg t_ Dat Pl m
3:5 o
hos
pr Nom Sg n
geneais ouk genea ou

n_ Dat Pl f Part Neg
uiois huios
n_ Dat Pl m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
WHICH
to-DIFFERENT generations
NOT
IS-KNOWizED is-made-known
to-THE
SONS
OF-THE
humans
Which in other ages was not made known unto the sons of men, as it is now revealed unto his holy apostles and prophets by the Spirit;
ws nun apekalufqh hOs nun apokaluptO

Adv Adv vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
apostolois autou apostolos autos

kai profhtais kai prophEtEs

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
AS
NOW WAS-FROM-COVERED to-THE it-was-revealed
HOLY
OF-Him
AND
BEFORE-AVERers IN prophets
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
spirit
3:6 einai
eimi
vn Pres vxx
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Acc Pl n
sugklhronoma sugklEronomos
a_ Acc Pl n
kai susswma kai sussOmos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
kai summetoca kai summetochos

Conj a_ Acc Pl n
TO-BE
THE
NATIONS
TOGETHER-tenants AND joint-enjoyers-of-an-allotment dia dia

Prep
TOGETHER-BODY AND joint-body euaggeliou euaggelion

n_ Gen Sg n
TOGETHER-WITH-HAVers joint-partakers
That the Gentiles should be fellowheirs, and of the same body, and partakers of his promise in Christ by the gospel:
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epaggelias en epaggelia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
promise
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THRU THE through thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
WELL-MESSAGE
3:7 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg n
egenhqhn ginomai
vi Aor pasD 1 Sg
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
dwrean ths dOrea ho


OF-WHICH I-WAS-BECOMED THRU-SERVitor according-to THE I-was-become dispenser in-accord-with qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
gratuity
OF-THE
grace
OF-THE
Whereof I was made a minister, according to the gift of the grace of God given unto me by the effectual working of his power.
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doqeishs didOmi
vp Aor Pas Gen Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
energeian ths energeia ho

dunamews dunamis
n_ Gen Sg f
God
THE
one-BEING-GIVEN to-ME being-granted
IN-ACTion operation
OF-THE
ABILITY power
AV
Ephesians 3
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
OF-Him
3:8 emoi
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
elacistoterw pantwn agiwn elachistos pas hagios

a_ Dat Sg m Cmp a_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
edoqh didOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
auth houtos
pd Nom Sg f
to-ME
THE
INFERIOR-most-more less-than-the-least
OF-ALL
HOLY-ones WAS-GIVEN saints was-granted
THE
grace
this
Unto me, who am less than the least of all saints, is this grace given, that I should preach among the Gentiles the unsearchable riches of Christ;
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin euaggelisasqai ethnos euaggelizO

n_ Dat Pl n vn Aor Mid
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
anexicniaston ploutos tou anexichniastos ploutos ho

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
NATIONS
TO-WELL-MESSAGize THE to-bring-the-well-message of-the

NA
UN-OUT-TRACEable untraceable h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
RICHES
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
9
3:9 kai fwtisai

kai
Conj
phOtizO
vn Aor Act
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
tis tis
pi Nom Sg m
oikonomia tou oikonomia ho

musthriou mustErion
n_ Gen Sg n
AND
TO-enLIGHTen
ALL
ANY what ? apo apo

Prep
THE
HOME-LAW administration tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
apokekrummenou apokruptO
vp Perf Pas Gen Sg n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aiwnwn en aiOn en
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
And to make all [men] see what [is] the fellowship of the mystery, which from the beginning of the world hath been hid in God, who created all things by Jesus Christ:
OF-THE the panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
one-HAVING-been-FROM-HID FROM THE having-been-concealed ktisanti ktizO

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
eons
IN
THE
God
THE-One the-one
THE
ALL
CREATing
3:10 ina
hina
Conj
gnwrisqh gnOrizO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
nun tais nun ho

Adv t_ Dat Pl f
arcais archE
n_ Dat Pl f
kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
exousiais en exousia en
n_ Dat Pl f Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-KNOWizED NOW to-THE may-be-being-made-known epouraniois dia epouranios dia

a_ Dat Pl n Prep
ORIGINals AND sovereignties
THE
authorities
IN THE among tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
10 To the intent that now unto the principalities and powers in heavenly [places] might be known by the church the manifold wisdom of God,
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ekklhsias h ekklEsia ho
polupoikilos sofia polupoikilos sophia

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THRU THE through proqesin prothesis

n_ Acc Sg f
OUT-CALLED ecclesia twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
MANY-VARIOUS multifarious
WISDOM
OF-THE
God
3:11 kata
kata
Prep
aiwnwn hn aiOn hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
11 According to the eternal purpose which he purposed in Christ Jesus our Lord:
according-to BEFORE-PLACing OF-THE in-accord-with purpose ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
eons
WHICH
He-makES
IN
THE
ANOINTED Christ
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
JESUS
THE
Master Lord ecomen echO
OF-US
3:12 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
parrhsian kai prosagwghn en parrhEsia kai prosagOgE en

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep
pepoiqhsei dia pepoithEsis dia

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
12 In whom we have boldness and access with confidence by the faith of him.
IN
WHOM
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
boldness
AND
TOWARD-LEAD access
IN
confidence
THRU through
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews autou pistis autos

THE
BELIEF faith
OF-Him
3:13 dio
dio
Conj
aitoumai aiteO
vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
egkakein egkakeO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
qliyesin thlipsis
n_ Dat Pl f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
13 Wherefore I desire that ye faint not at my tribulations for you, which is your glory.
THRU-WHICH I-AM-REQUESTING NO wherefore I-am-requesting-you uper huper

Prep
TO-BE-IN-EVILING IN to-be-being-despondent doxa doxa

n_ Nom Sg f
THE
CONSTRICTIONS OF-ME afflictions
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
WHICH-ANY IS which-any kamptw kamptO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
esteem glory ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-YOU(p) of-ye pros pros

Prep
3:14 toutou carin

houtos
pd Gen Sg n
charin
Adv
gonata mou gonu egO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
14 . For this cause I bow my knees unto the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ,
OF-this
grace I-AM-BOWING THE on-behalf
KNEES
OF-ME
TOWARD THE
FATHER
AV
3:15 ex
ek
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
patria patria
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
ouranois kai epi ghs ouranos kai epi gE

n_ Dat Pl m Conj Prep n_ Gen Sg f
onomazetai onomazO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
15 Of whom the whole family in heaven and earth is named,
OUT OF-WHOM
EVERY
FATHERhood IN kindred umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
heavens
AND
ON
LAND earth
IS-beING-NAMED
3:16 ina
hina
Conj
dw didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THAT He-MAY-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) ye dunamei krataiwqhnai dia dunamis krataioO dia

n_ Dat Sg f vn Aor Pas Prep
according-to THE in-accord-with tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
RICHES
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
16 That he would grant you, according to the riches of his glory, to be strengthened with might by his Spirit in the inner man;
pneumatos autou pneuma autos

eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
esw anqrwpon esO anthrOpos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
to-ABILITY to-power
TO-BE-made-staunch THRU THE through ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
spirit
OF-Him
INTO THE
within
human
3:17 katoikhsai
katoikeO
vn Aor Act
criston dia christos dia

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

TO-DOWN-HOME THE to-dwell
ANOINTED Christ
THRU THE through
BELIEF faith
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
17 That Christ may dwell in your hearts by faith; that ye, being rooted and grounded in love,
3:18 en
en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
errizwmenoi rizoO
kai teqemeliwmenoi (3:18) ina kai themelioO hina

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Conj
IN
LOVE
HAVING-been-ROOTED AND
HAVING-been-foundED grounded sun sun

Prep
THAT
18 May be able to comprehend with all saints what [is] the breadth, and length, and depth, and height;
exiscushte exischuO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
katalabesqai katalambanO
vn 2Aor Mid
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
YE-SHOULD-BE-beING-OUT-STRONG TO-BE-DOWN-GETTING TOGETHER to-ALL ye-should-be-being-strong to-be-grasping with-all to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
THE
HOLY-ones ANY saints what ?
platos kai mhkos platos kai mEkos

n_ Nom Sg n Conj n_ Nom Sg n
kai uyos kai hupsos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
kai baqos kai bathos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
THE
BREADTH
AND
LENGTH
AND
HEIGHT
AND
DEPTH
3:19 gnwnai te
ginOskO
vn 2Aor Act
te
Part
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
uperballousan ths huperballO ho

vp Pres Act Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
gnwsews agaphn tou gnOsis agapE ho

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-KNOW
BESIDES THE
OVER-CASTING transcending eis eis

Prep
OF-THE the
KNOWledge
LOVE
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
19 And to Christ, knowledge, filled with God.
know the love of which passeth that ye might be all the fulness of
ina hina
Conj
plhrwqhte plEroO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED INTO EVERY ye-may-be-being-completed entire
THE
FILLing complement
OF-THE
God
3:20 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
dunamenw dunamai
uper panta huper pas

Prep a_ Acc Pl n
poihsai uper ekperissou wn poieO huper ekperissOs hos

vn Aor Act Prep Adv pr Gen Pl n
to-THE
YET One-beING-ABLE one-being-able h E

Part
OVER above kata kata

Prep
ALL
TO-DO
OVER above
OUT-excessive extravagantly
WHICH which(p)
20 Now unto him that is able to do exceeding abundantly above all that we ask or think, according to the power that worketh in us,
aitoumeqa aiteO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
nooumen noeO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dunamin thn dunamis ho

energoumenhn en energeO en
vp Pres Mid Acc Sg f Prep
WE-ARE-REQUESTING OR
ARE-MINDING according-to THE are-apprehending
ABILITY power
THE
one-IN-ACTING operating
IN
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
US
3:21 autw
autos
pp Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia kai en ekklEsia kai en


eis eis
Prep
pasas pas
a_ Acc Pl f
to-Him
THE
esteem glory tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
OUT-CALLED AND ecclesia aiwnwn amhn aiOn amEn

n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
INTO ALL
21 Unto him [be] glory in the church by Christ Jesus throughout all ages, world without end. Amen.
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
geneas genea
n_ Acc Pl f
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
THE
generations OF-THE
eon
OF-THE
eons
AMEN
AV
Ephesians 4
4:1 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
desmios en desmios en
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
axiws axiOs
Adv
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING THEN YOU(p) I-am-entreating ye peripathsai peripateO

vn Aor Act
THE
BOUND-one prisoner
IN
Master Lord
WORTHIly
. I therefore, the prisoner of the Lord, beseech you that ye walk worthy of the vocation wherewith ye are called,
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
klhsews hs klEsis hos

eklhqhte kaleO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
TO-ABOUT-TREAD OF-THE to-walk
CALLing
OF-WHICH YE-WERE-CALLED with-which

2
4:2 meta pashs

meta
Prep
pas
a_ Gen Sg f
tapeinofrosunhs kai prauthtos meta makroqumias tapeinophrosunE kai prautEs meta makrothumia
n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f
. With all lowliness and meekness, with longsuffering, forbearing one another in love;
WITH
EVERY all
humility
AND
MEEKness
WITH
anecomenoi anechomai
allhlwn en allElOn en
pc Gen Pl m Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
toleratING bearing-with
one-another
IN
LOVE
4:3 spoudazontes threin

spoudazO
tEreO
vn Pres Act
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enothta tou henotEs ho

n_ Gen Sg n Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
Endeavouring to keep the unity of the Spirit in the bond of peace.
beING-DILIGENT endeavoring sundesmw sundesmos

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-KEEPING THE
ONEness unity
OF-THE
spirit
IN
THE
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs eirEnE
n_ Gen Sg f
TOGETHER-BOND OF-THE tie
PEACE
WH NA
4:4 en
heis
n_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
kai en kai heis

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai
kai kai
Conj
eklhqhte kaleO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
[There is] one body, and one Spirit, even as ye are called in one hope of your calling;
ONE
BODY
AND
ONE
spirit
according-AS
AND also
YE-WERE-CALLED IN
mia heis
n_ Dat Sg f
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
klhsews umwn klEsis humeis

ONE
EXPECTATION OF-THE
CALLing
OF-YOU(p) of-ye en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
4:5 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
mia heis
n_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
baptisma baptisma
n_ Nom Sg n
One Lord, one faith, one baptism,
ONE
Master Lord qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
ONE
BELIEF faith
ONE
DIPism baptism epi epi

Prep
4:6 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pathr kai patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
pantwn o pas ho
pantwn kai dia pas kai dia

a_ Gen Pl m Conj Prep
pantwn pas
a_ Gen Pl m
One God and Father of all, who [is] above all, and through all, and in you all.
ONE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-ALL
THE the-one
ON ALL onover
AND
THRU ALL through
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
AND
IN
ALL
WH NA
4:7 eni
heis
n_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
ekastw hmwn hekastos hemeis

a_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
edoqh didOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
kata kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
But unto every one of us is given grace according to the measure of the gift of Christ.
to-ONE
YET EACH
OF-US
WAS-GIVEN
THE
grace
metron ths metron ho

dwreas tou dOrea ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
MEASURE OF-THE
gratuity
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ eis eis

Prep
4:8 dio
dio
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
anabas anabainO
uyos hupsos
n_ Acc Sg n
hcmalwteusen aicmalwsian aichmalOteuO aichmalOsia

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f
THRU-WHICH He-IS-sayING wherefore

WH
UP-STEPPing ascending
INTO HEIGHT high anqrwpois anthrOpos

n_ Dat Pl m
He-capturES
captivity
Wherefore he saith, When he ascended up on high, he led captivity captive, and gave gifts unto men.
kai
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
domata tois doma ho

n_ Acc Pl n t_ Dat Pl m
He-GIVES
GIFTS
to-THE
humans
AV
Ephesians 4
4:9 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
anebh anabainO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
oti kai katebh hoti kai katabainO

Conj Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
THE
YET He-UP-STEPPed ANY he-ascended what ? katwtera katOteros

a_ Acc Pl n Cmp
WH
IS it-is ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
IF
NO
that
AND also
He-DOWN-STEPPed INTO he-descended
(Now that he ascended, what is it but that he also descended first into the lower parts of the earth?
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
merh
NA
merh meros
n_ Acc Pl n
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
DOWN-more lower katabas katabainO

PARTS
OF-THE
LAND earth kai o kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Sg m
4:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anabas anabainO
uperanw huperanO
Adv
THE
One-DOWN-STEPPing SAME one-descending ouranwn ina ouranos hina

n_ Gen Pl m Conj
IS
AND also ta ho
THE
One-UP-STEPPing one-ascending panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
OVER-UP up-over
10 He that descended is the same also that ascended up far above all heavens, that he might fill all things.)
pantwn twn pas ho

plhrwsh plEroO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-ALL all
OF-THE the
heavens
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-FILLING THE he-should-be-completing tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
ALL
4:11 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
men men
Part
apostolous tous apostolos ho

de de
Conj
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
SAME same-one
GIVES
THE the-ones de de
Conj
INDEED commissioners apostles
THE the-ones
YET BEFORE-AVERers THE prophets the-ones
11 And he gave some, apostles; and some, prophets; and some, evangelists; and some, pastors and teachers;
de de
Conj
euaggelistas euaggelistEs
n_ Acc Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
poimenas kai didaskalous poimEn kai didaskalos

n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Pl m
YET WELL-MESSENGERS THE evangelists the-ones
YET SHEPHERDS pastors
AND
TEACHers
4:12 pros
pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
katartismon twn katartismos ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
eis eis
Prep
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
diakonias diakonia
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
TOWARD THE
DOWN-EQUIPPing adjusting
OF-THE
HOLY-ones INTO ACT saints work
OF-THRU-SERVice INTO of-dispensing
12 For the perfecting of the saints, for the work of the ministry, for the edifying of the body of Christ:
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos tou sOma ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
HOME-BUILDing OF-THE upbuilding
BODY
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
4:13 mecri katanthswmen

mechri
Adv
katantaO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
enothta ths henotEs ho

pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
UNTO until kai ths kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg f
WE-SHOULD-BE-attainING THE
ALL
INTO THE
ONEness unity eis eis

Prep
OF-THE
BELIEF faith teleion eis teleios eis

a_ Acc Sg m Prep
epignwsews tou epignOsis ho

uiou huios
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
13 Till we all come in the unity of the faith, and of the knowledge of the Son of God, unto a perfect man, unto the measure of the stature of the fulness of Christ:
AND
OF-THE
ON-KNOWledge realization
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
God
INTO MAN
mature
INTO
metron hlikias tou metron hElikia ho

n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
plhrwmatos tou plErOma ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
MEASURE OF-PRIME of-stature
OF-THE
FILLing complement nhpioi nEpios

a_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ kai periferomenoi kai peripherO

Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
4:14 ina
hina
Conj
mhketi mEketi
Adv
wmen eimi
vs Pres vxx 1 Pl
kludwnizomenoi kludOnizomai
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
THAT NO-NOT-STILL WE-MAY-BE by-no-means-still anemw anemos

n_ Dat Sg m
minors
beING-SURGizED surging-hither-and-thither kubeia kubeia

n_ Dat Sg f
AND
beING-ABOUT-CARRIED to-EVERY being-carried-about panourgia panourgia

n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
didaskalias en didaskalia en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn en anthrOpos en
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
14 That we [henceforth] be no more children, tossed to and fro, and carried about with every wind of doctrine, by the sleight of men, [and] cunning craftiness, whereby they lie in wait to deceive;
WIND
OF-THE
TEACHing
IN
THE
CUBE (dice) OF-THE caprice
humans
IN
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
meqodeian ths methodeia ho

planhs planE
n_ Gen Sg f
TOWARD THE
WITH-WAY systematizing en en
Prep
OF-THE
STRAYing deception auxhswmen auxanO

vs Aor Act 1 Pl
4:15 alhqeuontes de
alEtheuO
de
Conj
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
eis eis
Prep
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
beING-TRUE
YET IN
LOVE
WE-SHOULD-BE-GROWING INTO Him we-should-be-making-grow
THE
ALL
15 But speaking the truth in love, may grow up into him in all things, which is the head, [even] Christ:
AV
Ephesians 4
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kefalh cristos kephalE christos

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg m
WHO
IS
THE
HEAD
ANOINTED Christ swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
4:16 ex
ek
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
sunarmologoumenon sunarmologeO
kai kai
Conj
OUT OF-WHOM
EVERY entire dia dia

Prep
THE
BODY
beING-TOGETHER-CONNECT-LAID AND being-articulated-together ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
sumbibazomenon sumbibazO
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
afhs haphE
n_ Gen Sg f
epicorhgias kat epichorEgia kata

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
energeian energeia
n_ Acc Sg f
16 From whom the whole body fitly joined together and compacted by that which every joint supplieth, according to the effectual working in the measure of every part, maketh increase of the body unto the edifying of itself in love.
beING-TOGETHER-STEPizED THRU EVERY being-united through en en

Prep
TOUCH OF-THE assimilation thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
supply
according-to IN-ACTion in-accord-with operation swmatos poieitai sOma poieO

n_ Gen Sg n vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
metrw metron
n_ Dat Sg n
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
ekastou merous hekastos meros

a_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg n
auxhsin tou auxEsis ho

IN
MEASURE OF-ONE
EACH
PART
THE
GROWTH
OF-THE
BODY
IS-beING-made is-making
eis eis
Prep
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
INTO HOME-BUILDing OF-self upbuilding of-itself
IN
LOVE
4:17 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oun oun
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai marturomai kai marturomai

en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
mhketi mEketi
Adv
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
this
THEN I-AM-sayING
AND
I-AM-witnessING am-attesting eqnh ethnos
IN
Master Lord peripatei peripateO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
NO-NOT-STILL YOU(p) by-no-means-still ye en en

Prep
17 . This I say therefore, and testify in the Lord, that ye henceforth walk not as other Gentiles walk, in the vanity of their mind,
vn Pres Act
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
mataiothti mataiotEs
n_ Dat Sg f
n_ Nom Pl n
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING according-AS AND to-be-walking also tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
NATIONS
IS-ABOUT-TREADING IN is-walking
VAIN-ity vanity
noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl n
OF-THE
MIND
OF-them
4:18 eskotwmenoi
skotoO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
dianoia dianoia
n_ Dat Sg f
ontes eimi
aphllotriwmenoi ths apallotrioO ho

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-been-DARKenED to-THE
THRU-MIND BEING comprehension thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-estrangED estranged thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-THE
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep
agnoian agnoia
n_ Acc Sg f
ousan eimi
en en
Prep
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
18 Having the understanding darkened, being alienated from the life of God through the ignorance that is in them, because of the blindness of their heart:
LIFE
OF-THE
God
THRU THE because-of ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
UN-KNOWledge THE ignorance
BEING
IN
them
dia dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pwrwsin pOrOsis
n_ Acc Sg f

THRU THE because-of
CALLOUSness OF-THE
HEART
OF-them
4:19 oitines aphlghkotes

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
apalgeO
eautous paredwkan th heautou paradidOmi ho

pf 3 Acc Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Dat Sg f
aselgeia eis aselgeia eis

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
ergasian ergasia
n_ Acc Sg f
WHO-ANY who-any akaqarsias akatharsia

n_ Gen Sg f
HAVING-FROM-PINED selves being-past-feeling themselves pashs pas

a_ Gen Sg f
BESIDE-GIVE give-up
to-THE
wantonness
INTO ACTion vocation
19 Who being past feeling have given themselves over unto lasciviousness, to work all uncleanness with greediness.
en en
Prep
pleonexia pleonexia
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-UN-cleanness EVERY of-uncleanness all
IN
MORE-HAVing greed outws emaqete houtOs manthanO

4:20 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ouc ou
Part Neg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
20 But ye have not so learned Christ;
YOU(p) ye
YET NOT
thus
LEARNED
THE
ANOINTED Christ edidacqhte didaskO

vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
4:21 ei
ei
Cond
ge ge
Part
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
hkousate kai en akouO kai en

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
21 If so be that ye have heard him, and have been taught by him, as the truth is in Jesus:
IF SURELY Him since
YE-HEAR
AND
IN
Him
YE-WERE-TAUGHT according-AS IS were-taught
AV
Ephesians 4
alhqeia en alEtheia en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
TRUTH
IN
THE
JESUS
4:22 apoqesqai
apotithEmi
vn 2Aor Mid
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
proteran proteros
a_ Acc Sg f
anastrofhn anastrophE
n_ Acc Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
TO-BE-FROM-PLACING YOU(p) to-be-putting-off ye palaion anqrwpon ton palaios anthrOpos ho

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
according-to THE
BEFORE-more UP-TURNing (behaviour) THE former behavior kata kata

Prep
22 That ye put off concerning the former conversation the old man, which is corrupt according to the deceitful lusts;
fqeiromenon phtheirO
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
epiqumias ths epithumia ho

OLD
human
THE
one-beING-CORRUPTED according-to THE one-being-corrupted in-accord-with
ON-FEELings desires
OF-THE
apaths apatE
n_ Gen Sg f
SEDUCtion
4:23 ananeousqai
ananeoO
vn Pres Pas
de de
Conj
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
23 And be renewed in the spirit of your mind;
TO-BE-beING-UP-YOUNGED YET to-THE to-be-being-rejuvenated
spirit
OF-THE
MIND
OF-YOU(p) of-ye kata kata

Prep
4:24 kai endusasqai

kai
Conj
enduO
vn Aor Mid
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kainon kainos
a_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon ton anthrOpos ho

qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
TO-BE-beING-IN-SLIPPED THE to-be-putting-on en en

Prep
NEW
human
THE
according-to God in-accord-with
24 And that ye put on the new man, which after God is created in righteousness and true holiness.
ktisqenta ktizO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg m
dikaiosunh kai osiothti ths dikaiosunE kai hosiotEs ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
BEING-CREATED
IN
AND
BENIGNity
OF-THE
TRUTH
4:25 dio
dio
Conj
apoqemenoi apotithEmi
vp 2Aor Mid Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
yeudos laleite pseudos laleO

n_ Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl
alhqeian ekastos meta alEtheia hekastos meta

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Nom Sg m Prep
THRU-WHICH FROM-PLACING wherefore putting-off tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
FALSEhood YE-BE-TALKING TRUTH lie be-ye-speaking ! allhlwn allElOn

pc Gen Pl m
EACH
WITH
25 Wherefore putting away lying, speak every man truth with his neighbour: for we are members one of another.
plhsion autou plEsion autos

Adv pp Gen Sg m
oti esmen hoti eimi

melh melos
n_ Nom Pl n
THE
NIGH-one associate
OF-him
that
WE-ARE
OF-one-another MEMBERS
4:26 orgizesqe
orgizO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
amartanete o hamartanO ho
vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Nom Sg m
hlios hElios
n_ Nom Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
26 Be ye angry, and sin not: let not the sun go down upon your wrath:
YE-ARE-beING-INDIGNANTED AND ye-are-being-indignant epiduetw epiduO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
NO
YE-ARE-missING ye-are-sinning parorgismw parorgismos

n_ Dat Sg m
THE
SUN
NO
epi epi
Prep
NA
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
LET-BE-ON-SLIPPING ON let-him-be-sinking !
THE
BESIDE-INDIGNATION OF-YOU(p) vexation of-ye tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
4:27 mhde
mEde
Conj
didote didOmi
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
topon topos
n_ Acc Sg m
diabolw diabolos
a_ Dat Sg m
27 Neither give place to the devil.
NO-YET BE-GIVING nor-yet be-ye-giving !
PLACE
to-THE
THRU-CASTer Adversary kleptetw kleptO

vm Pres Act 3 Sg
4:28 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kleptwn kleptO
mhketi mEketi
Adv
mallon de mallon de
Adv Conj
kopiatw kopiaO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
one-stealING one-stealing tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
NO-NOT-STILL LET-BE-stealING RATHER by-no-means-still let-him-be-stealing !

NA
YET LET-him-BE-toilING let-him-be-toiling ! ech echO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
ergazomenos ergazomai
idiais idios
a_ Dat Pl f
cersin to cheir ho
n_ Dat Pl f t_ Acc Sg n
agaqon ina agathos hina

a_ Acc Sg n Conj
28 Let him that stole steal no more: but rather let him labour, working with [his] hands the thing which is good, that he may have to give to him that needeth.
workING
to-THE
OWN
HANDS
THE
GOOD
THAT he-MAY-BE-HAVING
metadidonai metadidOmi
vn Pres Act
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
econti echO
TO-BE-WITH-GIVING to-THE-one need to-be-sharing with-the-one
HAVING
AV
4:29 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
sapros sapros
a_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
stomatos umwn stoma humeis

mh mE
Part Neg
ekporeuesqw ekporeuomai
EVERY at-all alla ei alla ei

Conj Cond
saying word tis tis

px Nom Sg m
ROTten tainted agaqos agathos

a_ Nom Sg m
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-YOU(p) NO of-ye creias chreia

n_ Gen Sg f
LET-BE-OUT-GOING let-him-be-issuing ! dw didOmi

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
oikodomhn oikodomE
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ina hina
Conj
29 Let no corrupt communication proceed out of your mouth, but that which is good to the use of edifying, that it may minister grace unto the hearers.
but
IF
ANY
GOOD
TOWARD HOME-BUILDing OF-THE edification
need
THAT it-MAY-BE-GIVING
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
akouousin akouO
grace
to-THE
ones-HEARING ones-hearing lupeite lupeO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
4:30 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma to pneuma ho
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
AND
NO
BE-YE-SORROWING THE be-ye-causing-sorrow ! to-the
spirit
THE
HOLY
OF-THE
God
IN
30 And grieve not the holy Spirit of God, whereby ye are sealed unto the day of redemption.
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
esfragisqhte eis sphragizO eis

hmeran apolutrwsews hEmera apolutrOsis

WHICH
YE-ARE-SEALED
INTO DAY
OF-FROM-LOOSening of-deliverance kai orgh kai orgE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
4:31 pasa
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
pikria pikria
n_ Nom Sg f
kai qumos kai thumos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kai kraugh kai kraugE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kai blasfhmia kai blasphEmia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
EVERY all arqhtw airO

vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
BITTERness AND
fury
AND
INDIGNATION AND anger pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
clamor
AND
HARM-AVERment calumny
31 Let all bitterness, and wrath, and anger, and clamour, and evil speaking, be put away from you, with all malice:
af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
sun sun
Prep
kakia kakia
n_ Dat Sg f
LET-BE-BEING-LIFTED FROM YOU(p) let-it-be-being-taken-away ! ye
TOGETHER to-EVERY EVIL togetherwith all malice allhlous crhstoi eusplagcnoi allElOn chrEstos eusplagchnos
pc Acc Pl m a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
4:32 ginesqe
ginomai
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
carizomenoi charizomai
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! eautois heautou

pf 3 Dat Pl m
YET
INTO one-another
kind
WELL-compassionate gracING tenderly-compassionate dealing-graciously en en

Prep
32 And be ye kind one to another, tenderhearted, forgiving one another, even as God for Christ's sake hath forgiven you.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
cristw ecarisato christos charizomai

n_ Dat Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-selves according-AS AND among-yourselves also
THE
God
IN
ANOINTED Christ
gracES to-YOU(p) he-deals-graciously with-ye
AV
Ephesians 5
5:1 ginesqe
ginomai
oun oun
Conj
mimhtai tou mimEtEs ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ws tekna hOs teknon

Adv n_ Nom Pl n
agaphta agapEtos
a_ Nom Pl n
. Be ye therefore followers of God, as dear children;
THEN IMITATors
OF-THE
God
AS
offsprings children
beLOVED
WH
5:2 kai peripateite

kai
Conj
peripateO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
cristos hgaphsen christos agapaO

umas
AND
NA
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING IN be-ye-walking !
LOVE
according-AS AND also uper huper

Prep
WH
THE
NA
ANOINTED Christ hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
LOVES
And walk in love, as Christ also hath loved us, and hath given himself for us an offering and a sacrifice to God for a sweetsmelling savour.
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai paredwken eauton kai paradidOmi heautou

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pf 3 Acc Sg m
umwn
prosforan prosphora
n_ Acc Sg f
kai kai
Conj
US
AND
BESIDE-GIVES gives-up qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
Self himself osmhn osmE

n_ Acc Sg f
OVER for-the-sake-of euwdias euOdia

n_ Gen Sg f
US
TOWARD-CARRY AND offering
qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
SACRIFICE to-THE
God
INTO ODOR
OF-WELL-ODOR fragrant h E
Part
5:3 porneia
porneia
n_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
kai akaqarsia pasa kai akatharsia pas

Conj n_ Nom Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
pleonexia mhde pleonexia mEde

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
onomazesqw onomazO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
PROSTITUTION YET AND
UN-cleanness uncleanness prepei prepO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
EVERY all agiois hagios

a_ Dat Pl m
OR
MORE-HAVing greed
NO-YET LET-it-BE-beING-NAMED not-yeteven
. But fornication, and all uncleanness, or covetousness, let it not be once named among you, as becometh saints;
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
IN YOU(p) among ye
according-AS IS-BEHOOVING
to-HOLY-ones to-saints eutrapelia eutrapelia

n_ Nom Sg f
5:4 kai aiscroths kai mwrologia h

kai
Conj
aischrotEs
n_ Nom Sg f
kai
Conj
mOrologia
n_ Nom Sg f
E
Part
a hos
pr Nom Pl n
ouk ou
Part Neg
anhken anEkO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
AND
VILEness
AND
INSIPID-saying stupid-speaking
OR
WELL-REVERTing WHICH insinuendo which(p)
NOT
proper is-proper
but
Neither filthiness, nor foolish talking, nor jesting, which are not convenient: but rather giving of thanks.
mallon eucaristia mallon eucharistia

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
RATHER
thanking thanksgiving gar iste gar eidO

Conj vm Perf Act 2 Pl
5:5 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
ginwskontes oti pas ginOskO hoti pas

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
pornos pornos
n_ Nom Sg m
h E
Part
akaqartos h akathartos E
a_ Nom Sg m Part
this
for
YE-ARE-PERCEIVING KNOWING
that
EVERY at-all ecei echO
paramour
OR
UN-clean-one unclean en en
OR
pleonekths o pleonektEs hos

n_ Nom Sg m pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eidwlolatrhs ouk eidOlolatrEs ou

n_ Acc Sg f
For this ye know, that no whoremonger, nor unclean person, nor covetous man, who is an idolater, hath any inheritance in the kingdom of Christ and of God.
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
Prep
MORE-HAVer greedy-person th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
WHO
IS
idolater
NOT not
IS-HAVING
tenancy IN enjoyment-of-the-allotment

cristou kai qeou christos kai theos

THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
AND
God of-God logois dia logos dia

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
5:6 mhdeis
mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
apatatw apataO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
kenois kenos
a_ Dat Pl m
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
gar ercetai gar erchomai

NO-YET-ONE YOU(p) no-one ye h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
LET-BE-SEDUCING to-EMPTY let-be-seducing ! tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
sayings words
THRU these for because-of these-things uious huios

n_ Acc Pl m
IS-COMING
Let no man deceive you with vain words: for because of these things cometh the wrath of God upon the children of disobedience.
orgh orgE
n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
apeiqeias apeitheia
n_ Gen Sg f
THE
INDIGNATION OF-THE
God
ON
THE
SONS
OF-THE
UN-PERSUADableness stubbornness
7
5:7 mh
mE
Part Neg
oun oun
Conj
ginesqe ginomai
summetocoi summetochos
a_ Nom Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
Be not ye therefore partakers with them.
NO
THEN BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming !
TOGETHER-WITH-HAVers OF-them joint-partakers with-them nun de nun de

Adv Conj
5:8 hte
eimi
vi impf vxx 2 Pl
gar pote skotos gar pote skotos

Conj Part n_ Nom Sg n
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
ws tekna hOs teknon

Adv n_ Nom Pl n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
YE-WERE
for
?-when once
DARKness
NOW YET LIGHT
IN
Master Lord
AS
offsprings children
OF-LIGHT
For ye were sometimes darkness, but now [are ye] light in the Lord: walk as children of light:
AV
Ephesians 5
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING be-ye-walking !
5:9 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar karpos gar karpos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
agaqwsunh kai dikaiosunh kai agathOsunE kai dikaiosunE kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f Conj
(For the fruit of the Spirit [is] in all goodness and righteousness and truth;)
THE
for
FRUIT
OF-THE
LIGHT
IN
EVERY all
GOODness
AND
AND
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Dat Sg f
TRUTH
5:10 dokimazontes ti
dokimazO
tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
euareston euarestos
a_ Nom Sg n
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
10 Proving what is acceptable unto the Lord.
testING
ANY what ?
IS
Master Lord akarpois tou akarpos ho

a_ Dat Pl n t_ Gen Sg n
11 And have no fellowship with the unfruitful works of darkness, but rather reprove [them].
5:11 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
sugkoinwneite sugkoinOneO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ergois tois ergon ho

AND
NO
BE-YE-TOGETHER-communionING to-THE be-ye-being-joint-participants ! kai elegcete kai elegchO

ACTS
THE
UN-FRUITful unfruitful
OF-THE
skotous mallon de skotos mallon de

n_ Gen Sg n Adv Conj
DARKness
RATHER
YET AND also
BE-EXPOSING be-ye-exposing-them ! up hupo

Prep
5:12 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
gar krufh ginomena gar kruphE ginomai

Conj Adv vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl n
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
aiscron estin aischros eimi

kai kai
Conj
THE for of-the-things legein legO

vn Pres Act
HIDDen
BECOMING(p) occurring(p)
12 For it is a shame even to speak of those things which are done of them in secret.
UNDER them by
VILE shame
IS it-is
AND even
TO-BE-sayING to-be-sayspeaking
5:13 ta
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
de de
Conj
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
elegcomena elegchO
upo hupo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
faneroutai phaneroO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
THE
YET ALL
beING-EXPOSED
UNDER THE by estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
LIGHT
IS-beING-made-APPEAR EVERY is-made-manifest everything
13 But all things that are reproved are made manifest by the light: for whatsoever doth make manifest is light.
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
faneroumenon phaneroO
fws phOs
n_ Nom Sg n
for
THE
beING-made-APPEAR LIGHT making-manifest legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS
5:14 dio
dio
Conj
egeire egeirO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kaqeudwn katheudO
kai anasta kai anistEmi

Conj vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg Apo
ek ek
Prep
THRU-WHICH He-IS-sayING wherefore twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
BE-ROUSING THE be-you-rousing ! soi su
one-DOWN-LOUNGING AND one-drowsing o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
UP-STAND rise-you !
OUT
14 Wherefore he saith, Awake thou that sleepest, and arise from the dead, and Christ shall give thee light.
nekrwn kai epifausei nekros kai epiphauskO

a_ Gen Pl m Conj vi Fut Act 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
pp 2 Dat Sg
OF-THE
DEAD dead-ones
AND
SHALL-BE-ON-APPEARING YOU shall-be-dawning-on
THE
Part Neg
5:15 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
akribws pws peripateite akribOs pOs peripateO

Adv Adv vi Pres Act 2 Pl
ws asofoi hOs asophos

Adv a_ Nom Pl m
all ws alla hOs

Conj Adv
15 See then that ye walk circumspectly, not as fools, but as wise,
BE-YE-lookING THEN EXACTly be-ye-observing ! accurately sofoi sophos

a_ Nom Pl m
how
YE-ARE-ABOUT-TREADING NO ye-are-walking
AS
UN-WISE unwise
but
AS
WISE
5:16 exagorazomenoi ton

exagorazO
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti ai hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl f
hmerai hEmera
n_ Nom Pl f
ponhrai eisin ponEros eimi

a_ Nom Pl f vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
16 Redeeming the time, because the days are evil.
OUT-BUYING reclaiming
THE
SEASON era
that
THE
DAYS
wicked
ARE
AV
Ephesians 5
5:17 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
ginesqe ginomai
afrones alla suniete aphrOn alla suniEmi

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
17 Wherefore be ye not unwise, but understanding what the will of the Lord [is].
THRU this because-of to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
NO
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
imprudent
but
BE-understandING ANY be-ye-understanding ! what ?
qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
WILL
OF-THE
Master Lord oinw oinos

n_ Dat Sg m
5:18 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
mequskesqe methuskO
vn Pres Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
aswtia alla asOtia alla

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
18 And be not drunk with wine, wherein is excess; but be filled with the Spirit;
AND
NO
BE-YE-beING-DRUNK to-WINE
IN
WHICH
IS
UN-SAVing profligacy
but
plhrousqe plEroO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
pneumati pneuma
n_ Dat Sg n
BE-YE-beING-FILLED IN be-ye-being-filled !
spirit
NA
5:19 lalountes
laleO
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
yalmois kai umnois kai wdais pneumatikais psalmos kai humnos kai OdE pneumatikos
n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
TALKING speaking adontes adO

to-selves to-yourselves kai yallontes kai psallO

IN
psalms
AND
HYMNS
AND
SONGS
spiritual
19 Speaking to yourselves in psalms and hymns and spiritual songs, singing and making melody in your heart to the Lord;
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia umwn kardia humeis

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
SINGING
AND
STROKING playing-music
to-THE
HEART
OF-YOU(p) to-THE of-ye
Master Lord kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
20 Giving thanks always for all things unto God and the Father in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ;
5:20 eucaristountes pantote uper

eucharisteO
pantote
Adv
huper
Prep
pantwn en pas en
a_ Gen Pl n Prep

thankING giving-thanks hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
always
OVER ALL for-the-sake-of all-things qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
IN
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou tw christos ho
n_ Gen Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
kai patri kai patEr

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
to-THE
God
AND
FATHER
5:21 upotassomenoi allhlois en

hupotassO
allElOn
pc Dat Pl m
en
Prep
fobw phobos
n_ Dat Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
21 . Submitting yourselves one to another in the fear of God.
beING-UNDER-SET being-subject
to-one-another
IN
FEAR
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
22 Wives, submit yourselves unto your own husbands, as unto the Lord.
5:22 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
gunaikes tois gunE ho

n_ Nom Pl f t_ Dat Pl m
idiois idios
a_ Dat Pl m
andrasin ws tw anEr hOs ho

n_ Dat Pl m Adv t_ Dat Sg m
THE
WOMEN wives
to-THE
OWN
MEN husbands
AS
to-THE
Master Lord cristos christos

n_ Nom Sg m
23 For the husband is the head of the wife, even as Christ is the head of the church: and he is the saviour of the body.
5:23 oti anhr

hoti
Conj
anEr
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kefalh ths kephalE ho

gunaikos ws kai o gunE hOs kai ho

n_ Gen Sg f Adv Conj t_ Nom Sg m
that
MAN husband
IS
HEAD
OF-THE
WOMAN wife tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
AS
AND THE even
ANOINTED Christ
kefalh ths kephalE ho

ekklhsias autos ekklEsia autos

n_ Gen Sg f pp Nom Sg m
swthr sOtEr
n_ Nom Sg m
swmatos sOma
n_ Gen Sg n
HEAD
OF-THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
SAME he
SAViour
OF-THE
BODY
5:24 alla
alla
Conj
ws h hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
ekklhsia upotassetai ekklEsia hupotassO

n_ Nom Sg f vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw outws kai ai christos houtOs kai ho

n_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj t_ Nom Pl f
but AS nevertheless gunaikes tois gunE ho

n_ Nom Pl f t_ Dat Pl m
THE
OUT-CALLED IS-beING-UNDER-SET to-THE ecclesia is-being-subject panti pas

a_ Dat Sg n
ANOINTED Christ
thus
AND also
THE
24 Therefore as the church is subject unto Christ, so [let] the wives [be] to their own husbands in every thing.
andrasin en anEr en
n_ Dat Pl m Prep
WOMEN wives
to-THE
MEN husbands
IN
ALL everything tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
5:25 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
agapate agapaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
gunaikas kaqws gunE kathOs

n_ Acc Pl f Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
25 Husbands, love your wives, even as Christ also loved the church, and gave himself for it;
THE
MEN husbands
THE
WOMEN wives
THE
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Ephesians 5
hgaphsen thn agapaO ho

vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian kai eauton ekklEsia kai heautou

n_ Acc Sg f Conj pf 3 Acc Sg m
paredwken uper paradidOmi huper

auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
LOVES
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia agiash hagiazO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
AND
Self himself
BESIDE-GIVES gives-up tw ho
OVER her for-the-sake-of herit loutrw tou loutron ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg n
5:26 ina
hina
Conj
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kaqarisas katharizO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
udatos en hudOr en
n_ Gen Sg n Prep
t_ Dat Sg n
26 That he might sanctify and cleanse it with the washing of water by the word,
THAT her herit rhmati rhEma

n_ Dat Sg n
He-SHOULD-BE-HOLYizING cleansing he-should-be-hallowing cleansing-it
to-THE
BATH
OF-THE
water
IN
declaration
5:27 ina
hina
Conj
parasthsh paristEmi
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
eautw heautou
pf 3 Dat Sg m
endoxon thn endoxos ho

a_ Acc Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian mh ekklEsia mE
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-STANDING SAME should-be-presenting he ecousan echO

to-Self to-himself twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
IN-esteemed THE glorious
OUT-CALLED ecclesia h eimi
NO
27 That he might present it to himself a glorious church, not having spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing; but that it should be holy and without blemish.
spilon spilos
n_ Acc Sg m
h E
Part
rutida h rhutis E
n_ Acc Sg f Part
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
toioutwn all ina toioutos alla hina

pd Gen Pl n Conj Conj
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
HAVING
SPOT
OR
wrinkle
OR
ANY
OF-THE the
such such-things
but
THAT it-MAY-BE
agia hagios
a_ Nom Sg f
kai amwmos kai amOmos

Conj a_ Nom Sg f
HOLY
AND
UN-FLAWed flawless kai kai

Conj
5:28 outws ofeilousin

houtOs
Adv
opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
andres anEr
n_ Nom Pl m
agapan agapaO
vn Pres Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
eautwn gunaikas heautou gunE

pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl f
thus
ARE-OWING ought
AND also
THE
MEN husbands agapwn agapaO
TO-BE-LOVING THE
OF-selves selfown
WOMEN wives
28 So ought men to love their wives as their own bodies. He that loveth his wife loveth himself.
ws ta hOs ho
Adv t_ Acc Pl n
eautwn swmata o heautou sOma ho

pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl n t_ Nom Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
gunaika eauton gunE heautou

n_ Acc Sg f pf 3 Acc Sg m
AS
THE
OF-selves selfown
BODIES
THE
one-LOVING one-loving
THE
OF-self of-himself
WOMAN wife
self himself
agapa agapaO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-LOVING
5:29 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
gar pote gar pote

Conj Part
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
emishsen alla ektrefei miseO alla ektrephO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai kai
Conj
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one qalpei thalpO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
?-when THE at-any-time kaqws kathOs

Adv
OF-self of-himself
FLESH
HATES
but
IS-OUT-NURTURING AND is-nurturing
29 For no man ever yet hated his own flesh; but nourisheth and cherisheth it, even as the Lord the church:
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
cristos thn christos ho

ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
IS-cherishING
her herit
according-AS AND also esmen eimi

vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
THE
ANOINTED Christ
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
30 For we are members of his body, of his flesh, and of his bones.
5:30 oti melh

hoti
Conj
melos
n_ Nom Pl n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
swmatos autou sOma autos

that
MEMBERS WE-ARE
OF-THE
BODY
OF-Him
5:31 anti
anti
Prep

anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
INSTEAD OF-this corresponding-to this
THE
FATHER
AND
THE
31 For this cause shall a man leave his father and mother, and shall be joined unto his wife, and they two shall be one flesh.
mhtera kai proskollhqhsetai mEtEr kai proskollaO

n_ Acc Sg f Conj vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

kai esontai kai eimi

MOTHER
AND
SHALL-BE-BEING-TOWARD-JOINED TOWARD THE shall-be-being-joined-to eis eis

Prep
WOMAN wife
OF-him
AND
SHALL-BE
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
duo duo
ni numeral
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
mian heis
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
TWO
INTO FLESH
ONE
AV
5:32 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
musthrion touto mustErion houtos

mega mega
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
32 This is a great mystery: but I speak concerning Christ and the church.
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret
WH
this
NA
GREAT
IS
YET AM-sayING INTO I-am-saying-this
criston kai christos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
eis
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
ANOINTED Christ
AND
INTO
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia ena heis

n_ Acc Sg m
5:33 plhn
plEn
Adv

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kaq kata
Prep
ekastos thn hekastos ho

a_ Nom Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
gunaika gunE
n_ Acc Sg f
MOREly AND moreover also
YOU(p) ye
THE the(p) ws eauton hOs heautou

Adv
according-to ONE
EACH
THE
OF-self of-himself
WOMAN wife ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
33 Nevertheless let every one of you in particular so love his wife even as himself; and the wife [see] that she reverence [her] husband.
outws agapatw houtOs agapaO

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
ina hina
Conj
fobhtai phobeO
pf 3 Acc Sg m
thus
BE-LOVING AS let-him-be-loving !
self himself
THE
YET WOMAN wife
THAT she-MAY-BE-FEARING THE
andra anEr
n_ Acc Sg m
MAN husband
AV
Ephesians 6
6:1 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n
upakouete tois hupakouO ho

vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Dat Pl m
goneusin umwn goneus humeis

en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar gar
Conj
. Children, obey your parents in the Lord: for this is right.
THE
offsprings children dikaion dikaios

a_ Nom Sg n
BE-obeyING be-ye-obeying !
to-THE the
parents
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
IN
Master Lord
this
for
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
IS
JUST
6:2 tima
timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
mhtera htis mEtEr hostis

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
Honour thy father and mother; (which is the first commandment with promise;)
BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring ! entolh prwth entolE prOtos

FATHER
OF-YOU
AND
THE
MOTHER
en en
Prep
epaggelia epaggelia
n_ Dat Sg f
direction precept
BEFORE-most IN first eu eu
Adv
promise
6:3 ina
hina
Conj
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
kai esh kai eimi

makrocronios epi ths makrochronios epi ho

a_ Nom Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg f
That it may be well with thee, and thou mayest live long on the earth.
THAT WELL to-YOU
it-MAY-BE-BECOMING AND
YOU-SHOULD-BE FAR-TIME long-time
ON
OF-THE the
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
LAND earth
6:4 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres mh patEr mE
parorgizete parorgizO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
alla alla
Conj
AND
THE
FATHERS
NO
BE-making-BESIDE-INDIGNANT THE be-ye-vexing !
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) but of-ye
And, ye fathers, provoke not your children to wrath: but bring them up in the nurture and admonition of the Lord.
ektrefete ektrephO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
paideia kai nouqesia kuriou paideia kai nouthesia kurios

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Sg m
BE-OUT-NURTURING them be-ye-rearing !
IN
discipline
AND
admonition
OF-Master of-Lord sarka sarx

n_ Acc Sg f
6:5 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m

kata kata
Prep
kuriois meta fobou kurios meta phobos

n_ Dat Pl m Prep n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THE
SLAVES
BE-obeyING be-ye-obeying ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
according-to FLESH
masters
WITH
FEAR
AND
tromou tromos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
aplothti haplotEs
n_ Dat Sg f

ws tw hOs ho
Adv t_ Dat Sg m
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
Servants, be obedient to them that are [your] masters according to the flesh, with fear and trembling, in singleness of your heart, as unto Christ;
TREMBLing IN
UN-COMPOUND OF-THE singleness
HEART
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye
to-THE
ANOINTED Christ cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
6
6:6 mh
mE
Part Neg
kat kata
Prep
ofqalmodoulian ws anqrwpareskoi all ws douloi ophthalmodoulia hOs anthrOpareskos alla hOs doulos
n_ Acc Sg f Adv a_ Nom Pl m Conj Adv n_ Nom Pl m
NO
according-to eye-SLAVery
AS
human-PLEASErs
but
AS
SLAVES
Not with eyeservice, as menpleasers; but as the servants of Christ, doing the will of God from the heart;
poiountes poieO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
DOING
THE
WILL
OF-THE
God
OUT OF-soul
6:7 met eunoias douleuontes ws tw

meta
Prep
eunoia
n_ Gen Sg f
douleuO
hOs
Adv
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
With good will doing service, as to the Lord, and not to men:
WITH WELL-MIND SLAVING good-humor
AS
to-THE
Master Lord
AND
NOT
to-humans
6:8 eidotes
eidO
oti ekastos ean hoti hekastos ean

Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
poihsh poieO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
agaqon touto agathos houtos

a_ Acc Sg n pd Acc Sg n
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware komisetai komizO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
EACH each-one
IF-EVER ANY
SHOULD-BE-DOING GOOD
this for-this
Knowing that whatsoever good thing any man doeth, the same shall he receive of the Lord, whether [he be] bond or free.
para para
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
eite eite
Conj
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
eite eite
Conj
eleuqeros eleutheros
a_ Nom Sg m
he-SHALL-BE-beING-requitED BESIDE Master Lord
IF-BESIDES SLAVE whether
IF-BESIDES FREE or
AV
Ephesians 6
6:9 kai oi
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kurioi kurios
n_ Nom Pl m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
poieite poieO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
pros pros
Prep
autous anientes autos aniEmi

pp Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
masters
THE
SAME same(p)
TOWARD them
UP-LETTING being-lax kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
apeilhn eidotes apeilE eidO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
oti kai hoti kai

Conj Conj
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
kai umwn kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Gen Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
And, ye masters, do the same things unto them, forbearing threatening: knowing that your Master also is in heaven; neither is there respect of persons with him.
threat
AND OF-them as-well-as
AND
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye par para

Prep
Master
IS
en en
Prep
ouranois kai proswpolhmyia ouk ouranos kai prosOpolEpsia ou

n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
IN
heavens
AND
partiality
NOT
IS there-is kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
BESIDE Him
6:10 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg n
loipou loipon
a_ Gen Sg n
endunamousqe endunamoO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
kratei kratos
n_ Dat Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
10 . Finally, my brethren, be strong in the Lord, and in the power of his might.
OF-THE
rest
BE-beING-IN-ABLED IN be-ye-being-invigorated !
Master Lord
AND
IN
THE
HOLDing might
OF-THE
iscuos ischus
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
STRENGTH OF-Him
6:11 endusasqe thn

enduO
vm Aor Mid 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
panoplian panoplia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
IN-SLIP-YE put-on-ye ! umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
THE
EVERY-IMPLEMENT OF-THE panoply tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
God
TOWARD THE
TO-BE-enABLED
11 Put on the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to stand against the wiles of the devil.
sthnai histEmi
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
meqodeias tou methodeia ho

diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
TO-STAND TOWARD THE to-stand-up estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WITH-WAYS stratagems h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
OF-THE
THRU-CASTer Adversary pros pros

Prep
6:12 oti ouk

hoti
Conj
ou
Part Neg
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
palh palE
n_ Nom Sg f
aima haima
n_ Acc Sg n
kai sarka kai sarx

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
alla alla
Conj
that
NOT
IS
to-US
THE
WRESTLing TOWARD BLOOD
AND
FLESH
but
pros pros
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
arcas archE
n_ Acc Pl f
pros pros
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
exousias pros exousia pros

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kosmokratoras tou kosmokratOr ho

n_ Acc Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
12 For we wrestle not against flesh and blood, but against principalities, against powers, against the rulers of the darkness of this world, against spiritual wickedness in high [places].
TOWARD THE
ORIGINals TOWARD THE sovereignties ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
authorities
TOWARD THE
SYSTEM-HOLDers world-mights tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE
skotous toutou pros skotos houtos pros

n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg m Prep
pneumatika ths pneumatikos ho

a_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Sg f
ponhrias en ponEria en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
DARKness
this
TOWARD THE
spiritual spiritual-forces
OF-THE
wickedness
IN THE among
epouraniois epouranios
a_ Dat Pl n
6:13 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
analabete analambanO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
panoplian panoplia
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
THRU this because-of dunhqhte dunamai

vs Aor midD 2 Pl
BE-UP-GETTING THE be-ye-taking-up ! antisthnai en anthistEmi en

vn 2Aor Act Prep
EVERY-IMPLEMENT OF-THE panoply hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
God
THAT
13 Wherefore take unto you the whole armour of God, that ye may be able to withstand in the evil day, and having done all, to stand.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ponhra kai apanta ponEros kai hapas

a_ Dat Sg f Conj a_ Acc Pl n
YE-MAY-BE-enABLED TO-withSTAND
IN
THE
DAY
THE
wicked
AND
ALL(emph.)
katergasamenoi sthnai katergazomai histEmi

vp Aor midD Nom Pl m vn 2Aor Act
DOWN-ACTing having-effected
TO-STAND
6:14 sthte
histEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
oun oun
Conj
perizwsamenoi thn perizOnnumi ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
osfun osphus
n_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
alhqeia kai alEtheia kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
BE-STANDING THEN being-ABOUT-GIRDED be-ye-standing ! girded-about
THE
LOIN
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
TRUTH
AND
14 Stand therefore, having your loins girt about with truth, and having on the breastplate of righteousness;
AV
Ephesians 6
endusamenoi ton enduO ho

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
qwraka ths thOrax ho

n_ Gen Sg f
IN-SLIPPing having-put-on
THE
CUIRASS
OF-THE
JUSTice righteousness en en
Prep
6:15 kai upodhsamenoi tous

kai
Conj
hupodeO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
etoimasia tou hetoimasia ho

euaggeliou ths euaggelion ho

15 And your feet shod with the preparation of the gospel of peace;
AND
UNDER-BINDing sandaled
OF-THE the
FEET
IN
READIness
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
eirhnhs eirEnE
n_ Gen Sg f
PEACE
6:16 en
en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
analabontes ton analambanO ho

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
qureon thureos
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
IN
ALL
UP-GETTING taking-up panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
THE
(large) shield OF-THE large-shield tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
BELIEF faith ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
IN
WHICH
16 Above all, taking the shield of faith, wherewith ye shall be able to quench all the fiery darts of the wicked.
dunhsesqe dunamai
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
belh belos
n_ Acc Pl n
ponhrou ponEros
a_ Gen Sg m
pepurwmena puroO
YE-SHALL-be-ABLED ALL ye-shall-be-able sbesai sbennumi

vn Aor Act
THE
CASTS arrows
OF-THE
wicked-one wicked-one
THE
ones-HAVING-been-FIRED being-fiery(p)
TO-EXTINGUISH
6:17 kai thn

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
perikefalaian tou perikephalaia ho

swthriou dexasqe sOtErios dechomai

a_ Gen Sg n vm Aor midD 2 Pl
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
macairan machaira
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
THE
ABOUT-HEAD helmet
OF-THE
SAVing salvation rhma rhEma

n_ Nom Sg n
RECEIVE-YE receive-ye ! qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE
sword
17 And take the helmet of salvation, and the sword of the Spirit, which is the word of God:
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos o pneuma hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
OF-THE
spirit
WHICH
IS
declaration
OF-God
6:18 dia
dia
Prep
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
proseuchs kai dehsews proseucomenoi proseuchE kai deEsis proseuchomai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
kairw kairos
n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
THRU EVERY during
prayer
AND
petition
prayING
IN
EVERY
SEASON occasion
IN
18 Praying always with all prayer and supplication in the Spirit, and watching thereunto with all perseverance and supplication for all saints;
pneumati kai eis pneuma kai eis

n_ Dat Sg n Conj Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
agrupnountes en agrupneO en
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
proskarterhsei kai dehsei proskarterEsis kai deEsis

spirit
AND
INTO SAME it
beING-vigilant
IN
EVERY all
TOWARD-HOLDing perseverance
AND
petition
peri peri
Prep
pantwn twn pas ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-THE the emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
HOLY-ones saints ina hina

Conj
6:19 kai uper

kai
Conj
huper
Prep
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
doqh didOmi
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
anoixei anoixis
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
AND
OVER ME for-the-sake-of en en
Prep
THAT to-ME
MAY-BE-BEING-GIVEN saying may-be-being-granted expression to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
IN
WH
UP-OPENing OF-THE opening tou euaggeliou

WH
19 . And for me, that utterance may be given unto me, that I may open my mouth boldly, to make known the mystery of the gospel,
stomatos mou stoma egO

parrhsia gnwrisai parrhEsia gnOrizO

n_ Dat Sg f vn Aor Act
musthrion mustErion
n_ Acc Sg n
MOUTH
NA NA
OF-ME
IN
boldness
TO-KNOWize THE to-make-known
CLOSE-KEEP secret
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
6:20 uper
huper
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg n
presbeuw presbeuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
alusei halusis
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
parrhsiaswmai parrhEsiazomai
vs Aor midD 1 Sg
OVER WHICH for-the-sake-of
I-AM-embassy-ING IN I-am-being-an-ambassador
UN-LOOSE THAT IN chain
it
I-SHOULD-BE-beING-bold
20 For which I am an ambassador in bonds: that therein I may speak boldly, as I ought to speak.
AV
Ephesians 6 - Philippians 1
ws dei hOs deO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
AS
it-IS-BINDING
ME
TO-TALK to-speak kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
6:21 ina
hina
Conj
de de
Conj
eidhte eidO
vs Perf Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
kat kata
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
THAT YET MAY-BE-PERCEIVING AND may-be-being-acquainted-with also prassw prassO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg

pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
according-to ME affairs of-me
ANY what ?
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
gnwrisei gnOrizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tucikos o tuchikos ho
agaphtos adelfos kai agapEtos adelphos kai

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj
21 But that ye also may know my affairs, [and] how I do, Tychicus, a beloved brother and faithful minister in the Lord, shall make known to you all things:
I-AM-PRACTISING ALL I-am-engaging-in pistos pistos

a_ Nom Sg m
SHALL-BE-KNOWizING to-YOU(p) shall-be-making-known to-ye en en

Prep
Tychicus
THE
beLOVED
brother
AND
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
BELIEVing faithful
THRU-SERVitor IN servant epemya pempO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
Master Lord pros pros

Prep
6:22 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
gnwte ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WHOM
I-SEND
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
INTO SAME this same-thing tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THAT YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING THE
22 Whom I have sent unto you for the same purpose, that ye might know our affairs, and [that] he might comfort your hearts.
peri peri
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai parakalesh kai parakaleO


ABOUT US concerns of-us
AND
he-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-CALLING THE he-should-be-consoling adelfois kai agaph adelphos kai agapE

n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg f
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
6:23 eirhnh
eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
meta pistews apo meta pistis apo

patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
PEACE
to-THE
brothers brethren cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
LOVE
WITH
BELIEF faith
FROM God
FATHER
AND
23 Peace [be] to the brethren, and love with faith, from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ meta pantwn twn meta pas ho

6:24 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
agapwntwn agapaO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
grace
WITH
ALL
OF-THE the
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
24 Grace [be] with all them that love our Lord Jesus Christ in sincerity. Amen. <<[To [the] Ephesians written from Rome, by Tychicus.]>>
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston en christos en
n_ Acc Sg m Prep
afqarsia aphtharsia
n_ Dat Sg f
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
IN
UN-CORRUPTion incorruption
AV
Philippians 1
Philippians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai timoqeos douloi kai timotheos doulos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Pl m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
PAUL
AND
Timothy
SLAVES

Prep
to-ALL
THE
HOLY-ones IN saints
. Paul and Timotheus, the servants of Jesus Christ, to all the saints in Christ Jesus which are at Philippi, with the bishops and deacons:

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ousin eimi
filippois sun philippoi sun

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
episkopois kai episkopos kai

n_ Dat Pl m Conj
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
to-THE the
IN
Philippi
TOGETHER to-ON-NOTErs togetherwith supervisors
AND
diakonois diakonos
n_ Dat Pl m
THRU-SERVitors servants
1:2 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
Grace [be] unto you, and peace, from God our Father, and [from] the Lord Jesus Christ.
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:3 eucaristw tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
epi pash epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mneia mneia
n_ Dat Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
. I thank my God upon every remembrance of you,
I-AM-thankING
to-THE the pash pas
God
OF-ME
ON
EVERY
THE
REMINDer OF-YOU(p) remembrance of-ye meta caras meta chara

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
4
1:4 pantote en
pantote
Adv
en
Prep
dehsei mou deEsis egO

uper huper
Prep

a_ Dat Sg f
always
IN
EVERY
petition
OF-ME
OF-YOU(p) WITH of-ye
Always in every prayer of mine for you all making request with joy,
JOY
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dehsin poioumenos deEsis poieO

n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m
THE
petition
makING
1:5 epi th
epi
Prep
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
koinwnia umwn koinOnia humeis

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
prwths prOtos
a_ Gen Sg f
ON
THE
communion contribution nun nun

Adv
For your fellowship in the gospel from the first day until now;
WELL-MESSAGE FROM THE
BEFORE-most first
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
acri tou achri ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg m
DAY
UNTIL THE
NOW
1:6 pepoiqws
peithO
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oti o hoti ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
enarxamenos enarchomai
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
HAVING-confidence
SAME
this
that
THE
WH
One-undertaking one-undertaking ihsou cristou

WH NA
IN
YOU(p) ye
NA
work
Being confident of this very thing, that he which hath begun a good work in you will perform [it] until the day of Jesus Christ:
agaqon epitelesei agathos epiteleO

acris hmeras achri hEmera

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
GOOD
SHALL-BE-ON-FINISHING UNTIL shall-be-performing-it estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
DAY
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
1:7 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
dikaion emoi dikaios egO

a_ Nom Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg
fronein phroneO
vn Pres Act
uper pantwn huper pas

Prep a_ Gen Pl m
according-AS it-IS
JUST
to-ME
this
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED OVER
ALL
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia umas kardia humeis

n_ Dat Sg f pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
te te
Part
. Even as it is meet for me to think this of you all, because I have you in my heart; inasmuch as both in my bonds, and in the defence and confirmation of the gospel, ye all are partakers of my grace.
OF-YOU(p) THRU THE of-ye because-of
TO-BE-HAVING ME
IN
THE
HEART
YOU(p) ye
IN
BESIDES bsboth
AV
Philippians 1
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
desmois mou desmos egO

kai en kai en
Conj Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
apologia kai bebaiwsei tou apologia kai bebaiOsis ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
BONDS
OF-ME
AND
IN
THE
FROM-saying defense
AND
confirmation
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
sugkoinwnous sugkoinOnos
a_ Acc Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos pantas umas charis pas humeis

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
ontas eimi
TOGETHER-communioners OF-ME joint-participants
OF-THE
grace
ALL
YOU(p) ye
BEING
1:8 martus
martus
n_ Nom Sg m
gar mou gar egO

Conj pp 1 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ws epipoqw hOs epipotheO


en en
Prep
witness
for
OF-ME
THE
God
AS how
I-AM-ON-LONGING ALL I-am-longing-for
YOU(p) ye
For God is my record, how greatly I long after you all in the bowels of Jesus Christ.
IN
splagcnois cristou splagchnon christos

n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
compassions
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ proseucomai proseuchomai

1:9 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
agaph agapE
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
eti eti
Adv
mallon kai mallon mallon kai mallon

Adv Conj Adv
AND
this
I-AM-prayING
THAT THE
LOVE
OF-YOU(p) STILL RATHER of-ye more
AND
RATHER more
. And this I pray, that your love may abound yet more and more in knowledge and [in] all judgment;
perisseuh perisseuO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
epignwsei epignOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
kai pash kai pas

Conj a_ Dat Sg f
aisqhsei aisthEsis
n_ Dat Sg f
MAY-BE-exceedING IN may-be-superabounding
ON-KNOWledge AND realization
EVERY to-all ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
SENSing sensibility diaferonta diapherO

1:10 eis
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dokimazein umas dokimazO humeis

vn Pres Act pp 2 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
hte eimi
vs Pres vxx 2 Pl
eilikrineis eilikrinEs
a_ Nom Pl m
INTO THE
TO-BE-testING
YOU(p) ye
THE ones-THRU-CARRYING THAT YE-MAY-BE the-things being-of-consequence
sincere
10 That ye may approve things that are excellent; that ye may be sincere and without offence till the day of Christ;
kai aproskopoi kai aproskopos

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
hmeran cristou hEmera christos

AND
UN-stumbling INTO DAY no-stumbling-blocks
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ dikaiosunhs ton dikaiosunE ho

1:11 peplhrwmenoi karpon

plEroO
karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
dia dia
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-FILLED FRUIT filled-with kai epainon qeou kai epainos theos

Conj n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
OF-JUSTice of-righteousness
THE
THRU JESUS through
ANOINTED Christ
INTO esteem glory
11 Being filled with the fruits of righteousness, which are by Jesus Christ, unto the glory and praise of God.
AND
ON-PRAISE OF-God laud de de

Conj
1:12 ginwskein
ginOskO
vn Pres Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
boulomai boulomai
adelfoi oti ta adelphos hoti ho

n_ Voc Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl n
kat kata
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
TO-BE-KNOWING YET YOU(p) ye mallon eis mallon eis

Adv Prep
I-AM-intendING
brothers brethren !
that
THE
12 . But I would ye should understand, brethren, that the things [which happened] unto me have fallen out rather unto the furtherance of the gospel;
prokophn tou prokopE ho

euaggeliou elhluqen euaggelion erchomai

n_ Gen Sg n vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
RATHER
INTO progress
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE HAS-COME has-come-to-be fanerous en phaneros en

a_ Acc Pl m Prep
1:13 wste
hOste
Conj
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
desmous mou desmos egO

cristw genesqai christos ginomai

n_ Dat Sg m vn 2Aor midD
en en
Prep
13 So that my bonds in Christ are manifest in all the palace, and in all other [places];
AS-BESIDES THE so-that olw holos

a_ Dat Sg n
BONDS
OF-ME
apparent
IN
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE-BECOMING IN
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
praitwriw kai tois praitOrion kai ho

n_ Dat Sg n Conj t_ Dat Pl m
loipois pasin loipon pas

WHOLE
THE
PRETORIUM
AND
to-THE
rest rest(p)
ALL
1:14 kai tous

kai
Conj
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
pleionas polus
a_ Acc Pl m Cmp
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
adelfwn en adelphos en
n_ Gen Pl m Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
pepoiqotas peithO
vp 2Perf Act Acc Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
AND
THE
MORE majority
OF-THE
brothers brethren
IN
Master Lord
HAVING-confidence to-THE
14 And many of the brethren in the Lord, waxing confident by my bonds, are much more bold to speak the word without fear.
AV
Philippians 1
desmois mou desmos egO

perissoterws tolman perissoterOs tolmaO

Adv vn Pres Act
afobws ton aphobOs ho

Adv t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
WH
tou qeou
WH
BONDS
OF-ME
more-exceedingly
TO-BE-DARING UN-FEARly fearlessly
THE
saying word
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-TALKING to-be-speaking
1:15 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
men men
Part
kai dia kai dia

Conj Prep
fqonon kai erin phthonos kai eris

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg f
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
kai di kai dia

Conj Prep
15 Some indeed preach Christ even of envy and strife; and some also of good will:
ANY some eudokian eudokia

n_ Acc Sg f
INDEED AND THRU ENVY even because-of ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
AND
STRIFE
ANY some
YET AND also
THRU because-of
criston khrussousin christos kErussO

WELL-SEEMing THE delight
ANOINTED Christ ex ek
Prep
ARE-PROCLAIMING are-heralding oti eis hoti eis

Conj Prep
1:16 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
men men
Part
agaphs eidotes agapE eidO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
apologian tou apologia ho

n_ Gen Sg n
THE the-ones keimai keimai
INDEED OUT OF-LOVE
INTO FROM-saying defense
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
16 The one preach Christ of contention, not sincerely, supposing to add affliction to my bonds:
I-AM-LYING I-am-being-located
1:17 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ex ek
Prep
eriqeias ton eritheia ho

criston kataggellousin christos kataggellO

ouc ou
Part Neg
agnws hagnOs
Adv
17 But the other of love, knowing that I am set for the defence of the gospel.
THE the-ones oiomenoi oiomai
YET OUT OF-STRIFE of-faction qliyin thlipsis

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
ANOINTED Christ tois ho
ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING NOT are-announcing desmois mou desmos egO

PUREly
egeirein egeirO
vn Pres Act
t_ Dat Pl m
surmisING
CONSTRICTION TO-BE-ROUSING to-THE affliction gar plhn gar plEn

Conj Adv
BONDS
OF-ME
1:18 ti
tis
pi Nom Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tropw tropos
n_ Dat Sg m
eite eite
Conj
profasei prophasis
n_ Dat Sg f
eite eite
Conj
ANY what ?
for
MOREly that to-EVERY moreover seeing-that
manner method kai en kai en

Conj Prep
IF-BESIDES to-BEFORE-APPEARance IF-BESIDES whether to-pretense or toutw cairw houtos chairO

pd Dat Sg n vi Pres Act 1 Sg
alhqeia cristos kataggelletai alEtheia christos kataggellO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
kai kai
Conj
18 What then? notwithstanding, every way, whether in pretence, or in truth, Christ is preached; and I therein do rejoice, yea, and will rejoice.
to-TRUTH
ANOINTED Christ
IS-beING-DOWN-MESSAGED AND is-being-annouced also
IN
this
but AND nevertheless
carhsomai chairO
vi 2Fut pasD 1 Sg
I-SHALL-BE-JOYING I-shall-be-rejoicing
1:19 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
gar oti touto gar hoti houtos

Conj Conj pd Nom Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
apobhsetai apobainO
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
swthrian dia sOtEria dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for I-am-aware ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
that
this
to-ME
SHALL-BE-FROM-STEPPING INTO SAVing shall-be-eventuating salvation pneumatos ihsou pneuma iEsous

THRU through
19 For I know that this shall turn to my salvation through your prayer, and the supply of the Spirit of Jesus Christ,
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
dehsews kai epicorhgias tou deEsis kai epichorEgia ho

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg n
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
OF-YOU(p) petition of-ye thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
AND
supply
OF-THE
spirit
OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
20 According to my earnest expectation and [my] hope, that in nothing I shall be ashamed, but [that] with all boldness, as always, [so] now also Christ shall be magnified in my body, whether [it be] by life, or by death.
1:20 kata
kata
Prep
apokaradokian kai elpida apokaradokia kai elpis

mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
oudeni oudeis
a_ Dat Sg n
according-to THE in-accord-with aiscunqhsomai aischunO

vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
premonition
AND
EXPECTATION OF-ME
that
IN
NOT-YET-ONE nothing
all en alla en
Conj Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
parrhsia ws pantote kai nun parrhEsia hOs pantote kai nun

n_ Dat Sg f Adv Adv Conj Adv
I-SHALL-BE-BEING-VILED but I-shall-be-being-put-to-shame
IN
EVERY all
boldness
AS
always
AND also
NOW
AV
Philippians 1
megalunqhsetai megalunO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
n_ Nom Sg m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati mou sOma egO

eite eite
Conj
dia dia
Prep
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
SHALL-BE-BEING-magnifiED ANOINTED Christ eite eite

Conj
IN
THE
BODY
OF-ME
IF-BESIDES THRU LIFE whether through
dia dia
Prep
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
IF-BESIDES THRU DEATH or through
1:21 emoi
egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
zhn zaO
vn Pres Act
cristos kai to christos kai ho

n_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg n
vn 2Aor Act
kerdos kerdos
n_ Nom Sg n
21 . For to me to live [is] Christ, and to die [is] gain.
to-ME
for
THE
TO-BE-LIVING ANOINTED Christ zhn zaO

vn Pres Act
AND
THE
TO-BE-FROM-DYING GAIN to-be-dying karpos karpos

n_ Nom Sg m
1:22 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ergou ergon
n_ Gen Sg n
kai kai
Conj
22 But if I live in the flesh, this [is] the fruit of my labour: yet what I shall choose I wot not.
IF
YET THE
TO-BE-LIVING IN
FLESH
this
to-ME
FRUIT
OF-work
AND
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
airhsomai haireomai
vi Fut Mid 1 Sg
ou ou
Part Neg
gnwrizw gnOrizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ANY what ?
I-SHALL-BE-preferrING NOT
I-AM-KNOWizING I-am-making-known twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
1:23 sunecomai
sunechO
vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
de de
Conj
ek ek
Prep
duo duo
ni numeral
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
epiqumian ecwn epithumia echO

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
I-AM-beING-pressED YET OUT OF-THE
TWO
THE
ON-FEELing yearning
WH
HAVING
NA
INTO THE
23 For I am in a strait betwixt two, having a desire to depart, and to be with Christ; which is far better:
analusai analuO
vn Aor Act
kai sun kai sun

Conj Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg n
gar
gar gar
Conj
mallon kreisson mallon kreisson

Adv a_ Nom Sg n
TO-UP-LOOSE AND to-be-solution
TOGETHER to-ANOINTED TO-BE togetherwith Christ epimenein epimenO

vn Pres Act
NA
much
for
RATHER
better
1:24 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
anagkaioteron di anagkaios dia

a_ Nom Sg n Cmp Prep
24 Nevertheless to abide in the flesh [is] more needful for you.
THE
YET TO-BE-ON-REMAINING to-be-staying
IN
THE
FLESH
more-necessary
THRU because-of
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye
1:25 kai touto

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
pepoiqws peithO
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oti menw hoti menO

kai kai
Conj
AND
this
HAVING-confidence
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED that I-am-aware umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
I-SHALL-BE-REMAINING AND
25 And having this confidence, I know that I shall abide and continue with you all for your furtherance and joy of faith;
paramenw paramenO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
prokophn kai caran prokopE kai chara

I-SHALL-BE-BESIDE-REMAINING to-ALL shall-be-abiding-with all ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
OF-YOU(p) progress of-ye
AND
JOY
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
BELIEF faith to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
1:26 ina
hina
Conj
kauchma umwn kauchEma humeis

perisseuh perisseuO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep

en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
THAT THE
BOAST glorying emhs emos

ps 1 Gen Sg
OF-YOU(p) MAY-BE-exceedING IN of-ye may-be-superabounding umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
IN
ME
26 That your rejoicing may be more abundant in Jesus Christ for me by my coming to you again.
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parousias palin pros parousia palin pros

n_ Gen Sg f Adv Prep
THRU THE through
MY
BESIDE-BEING presence tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
AGAIN
TOWARD YOU(p) ye cristou politeuesqe christos politeuomai

n_ Gen Sg m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
1:27 monon axiws

monon
Adv
axiOs
Adv
euaggeliou tou euaggelion ho

ina hina
Conj
eite eite
Conj
ONLY
WORTHIly OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
BE-beING-citizens be-ye-being-citizens !
THAT IF-BESIDES whether
27 . Only let your conversation be as it becometh the gospel of Christ: that whether I come and see you, or else be absent, I may hear of your affairs, that
AV
Philippians 1 - Philippians 2
elqwn erchomai
kai idwn kai eidO

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eite eite
Conj
apwn apeimi
akouw akouO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
ye stand fast in one spirit, with one mind striving together for the faith of the gospel;
COMING
AND
PERCEIVING
YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
IF-BESIDES FROM-BEING or being-absent eni heis

n_ Dat Sg n
I-MAY-BE-HEARING THE the-things yuch psuchE

n_ Dat Sg f
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
oti sthkete hoti stEkO

pneumati mia pneuma heis

n_ Dat Sg n n_ Dat Sg f
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye sunaqlountes sunathleO

that
YE-ARE-STANDING-firm IN
ONE
spirit
ONE
soul
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei tou pistis ho

n_ Gen Sg n
TOGETHER-COMPETING to-THE competing-together
BELIEF faith en en
Prep
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
1:28 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
pturomenoi pturO
mhdeni mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg n
upo hupo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
antikeimenwn antikeimai
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
AND
NO
beING-STARTLED
IN
NO-YET-ONE UNDER THE anything by de de

Conj
WHICH-ANY which-any apo apo

Prep
28 And in nothing terrified your adversaries: which is them an evident token perdition, but to you salvation, and that of God.
by to of of
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
autois endeixis apwleias umwn autos endeixis apOleia humeis

pp Dat Pl m n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
swthrias kai touto sOtEria kai houtos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pd Nom Sg n
IS
to-them
IN-SHOWing proof
OF-destruction
OF-YOU(p) YET OF-SAVing of-ye of-salvation
AND
this
FROM
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
1:29 oti umin

hoti
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ecarisqh charizomai
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
uper huper
Prep
cristou ou christos ou
monon to monon ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
that
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IS-gracED THE it-is-graciously-granted alla kai to alla kai ho

OVER ANOINTED for-the-sake-of Christ uper huper

Prep
NOT
ONLY
THE
INTO
29 For unto you it is given in the behalf of Christ, not only to believe on him, but also to suffer for his sake;
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
pisteuein pisteuO
vn Pres Act
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pascein paschO
vn Pres Act
Him
TO-BE-BELIEVING but
AND also
THE
OVER Him for-the-sake-of oion hoios

pk Acc Sg m
TO-BE-EMOTIONING to-be-suffering en en
Prep
1:30 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
agwna agOn
n_ Acc Sg m
econtes echO
eidete eidO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kai nun kai nun

Conj Adv
30 Having the same conflict which ye saw in me, and now hear [to be] in me.
THE
SAME
CONTEST struggle
HAVING
THE-WHICH YE-PERCEIVED IN such-as
ME
AND
NOW
akouete akouO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
ARE-HEARING IN ye-are-hearing
ME
AV
Philippians 2
2:1 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
oun oun
Conj
paraklhsis en paraklEsis en
n_ Nom Sg f Prep
cristw ei christos ei
n_ Dat Sg m Cond
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
paramuqion agaphs ei paramuthion agapE ei

n_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Cond
IF
ANY
THEN BESIDE-CALLing consolation
IN
ANOINTED Christ tis tis

px Nom Sg m
IF
ANY
BESIDE-CLOSE comfort
OF-LOVE
IF
. If [there be] therefore consolation in Christ, if comfort of love, if fellowship of the Spirit, if bowels and mercies,
any any any any
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
koinwnia pneumatos ei koinOnia pneuma ei

n_ Nom Sg f n_ Gen Sg n Cond
splagcna kai oiktirmoi splagchnon kai oiktirmos

n_ Nom Pl n Conj n_ Nom Pl m
ANY
communion
OF-spirit
IF
ANY
compassions compassion(p) ina hina

Conj
AND
PITIES pity(p) fronhte phroneO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
2
2:2 plhrwsate mou

plEroO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
caran chara
n_ Acc Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
FILL-YE fill-full-ye ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
OF-ME
THE
JOY
THAT THE
SAME
YE-MAY-BE-beING-DISPOSed
Fulfil ye my joy, that ye be likeminded, having the same love, [being] of one accord, of one mind.
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
agaphn econtes agapE echO

sumyucoi sumpsuchos
a_ Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
en heis
n_ Acc Sg n
fronountes phroneO
THE
SAME
LOVE
HAVING
TOGETHER-souls THE joined-in-soul kata kata

Prep
ONE one-thing
beING-DISPOSed being-disposed-to
3
2:3 mhden
mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
kat kata
Prep
eriqeian mhde eritheia mEde

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
kenodoxian alla th kenodoxia alla ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Dat Sg f
NO-YET-ONE according-to STRIFE nothing
NO-YET according-to EMPTY-esteem nor-yet vainglory
but
to-THE
[Let] nothing [be done] through strife or vainglory; but in lowliness of mind let each esteem other better than themselves.
tapeinofrosunh allhlous hgoumenoi tapeinophrosunE allElOn hEgeomai

n_ Dat Sg f pc Acc Pl m vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
uperecontas eautwn huperechO heautou

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pf 3 Gen Pl m
humility
one-another
deemING
WH NA
beING-superior
OF-selves of-one's-self(p) alla alla

Conj
WH
2:4 mh
mE
Part Neg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
ekastoi
ekastos hekastos
a_ Nom Sg m
skopountes skopeO
kai
NA
kai kai
Conj
Look not every man on his own things, but every man also on the things of others.
NO
THE the(p) eterwn heteros

a_ Gen Pl m
OF-selves of-one's-self(p) ekastoi hekastos

a_ Nom Pl m
EACH each-one
NOTING
but
AND also
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
THE the(p)
OF-DIFFERENT EACH of-different-ones each(p) froneite phroneO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
2:5 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
kai en kai en
Conj Prep

Let this mind be in you, which was also in Christ Jesus:
this
BE-YE-beING-DISPOSed IN YOU(p) be-ye-being-disposed ! among ye en en

Prep
WHICH
AND also ouc ou

Part Neg
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
2:6 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
morfh morphE
n_ Dat Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
uparcwn huparchO
arpagmon hghsato harpagmos hEgeomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi Aor midD 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
Who, being in the form of God, thought it not robbery to be equal with God:
WHO
IN
FORM
OF-God
NOT
SNATCHing pillaging
deems deems-it
THE
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
isa isos
a_ Nom Pl n
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE
EQUAL to-God equal-things eauton heautou

pf 3 Acc Sg m
2:7 alla
alla
Conj
ekenwsen morfhn doulou labwn kenoO morphE doulos lambanO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg m vp 2Aor Act Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
omoiwmati homoiOma
n_ Dat Sg n
but Self nevertheless himself anqrwpwn genomenos anthrOpos ginomai

n_ Gen Pl m
EMPTIES
FORM
OF-SLAVE
GETTING taking
IN
LIKEness
But made himself of no reputation, and took upon him the form of a servant, and was made in the likeness of men:
kai schmati eureqeis kai schEma heuriskO

Conj n_ Dat Sg n vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
ws anqrwpos hOs anthrOpos

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
OF-humans
BECOMING
AND
to-FIGURE to-fashion
BEING-FOUND
AS
human
2:8 etapeinwsen eauton

tapeinoO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
genomenos ginomai
uphkoos mecri qanatou qanatou de hupEkoos mechri thanatos thanatos de

a_ Nom Sg m Adv n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m Conj
He-makES-LOW he-humbles staurou stauros

n_ Gen Sg m
Self himself
BECOMING
obedient
UNTO
DEATH
DEATH
YET yeteven
And being found in fashion as a man, he humbled himself, and became obedient unto death, even the death of the cross.
OF-pale of-cross
AV
Philippians 2
2:9 dio
dio
Conj
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
uperuywsen kai ecarisato autw huperupsoO kai charizomai autos

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi Aor midD 3 Sg pp Dat Sg m
THRU-WHICH AND wherefore also to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THE
God
Him
OVER-HEIGHTens highly-exalts
AND
gracES
to-Him him
Wherefore God also hath highly exalted him, and given him a name which is above every name:
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
uper pan huper pas

Prep a_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
THE with-the
NAME
THE
OVER above
EVERY
NAME
2:10 ina
hina
Conj
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
gonu gonu
n_ Nom Sg n
kamyh kamptO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
epouraniwn epouranios
a_ Gen Pl m
THAT IN
THE
NAME
OF-JESUS
EVERY
KNEE
SHOULD-BE-BOWING OF-ON-heavenlies of-celestial-ones
10 That at the name of Jesus every knee should bow, of [things] in heaven, and [things] in earth, and [things] under the earth;
kai epigeiwn kai epigeios

Conj a_ Gen Pl n
kai katacqoniwn kai katachthonios

Conj a_ Gen Pl m
AND
OF-ON-LANDS AND of-terrestrial-ones
OF-DOWN-TERRANEAN of-subterranean-ones oti kurios hoti kurios

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
2:11 kai pasa

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
glwssa exomologhshtai glOssa exomologeO

n_ Nom Sg f vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
cristos eis christos eis

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
AND
EVERY
TONGUE
SHOULD-BE-OUT-avowING that should-be-acclaiming
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
INTO
11 And [that] every tongue should confess that Jesus Christ [is] Lord, to the glory of God the Father.
doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
esteem glory
OF-God
FATHER
WH
2:12 wste
hOste
Conj
agaphtoi mou agapEtos egO

a_ Voc Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
kaqws kathOs
Adv
pantote uphkousate mh pantote hupakouO mE

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl Part Neg
ws
AS-BESIDES beLOVED so-that beloved(p) !

NA
OF-ME
according-AS always
YE-obey
NO
ws hOs
Adv
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
monon alla nun pollw mallon en monon alla nun polus mallon en
Adv Conj Adv a_ Dat Sg n Adv Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
12 . Wherefore, my beloved, as ye have always obeyed, not as in my presence only, but now much more in my absence, work out your own salvation with fear and trembling.
AS
IN
THE
BESIDE-BEING OF-ME presence meta fobou meta phobos

Prep n_ Gen Sg m
ONLY
but
NOW much
RATHER
IN
THE
apousia apousia
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
kai tromou kai tromos

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautwn swthrian heautou sOtEria

pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
FROM-BEING OF-ME absence katergazesqe katergazomai

WITH
FEAR
AND
TREMBLing THE
OF-selves your-selfown
SAVing salvation
BE-YE-DOWN-ACTING be-ye-effecting !
2:13 qeos
theos
n_ Nom Sg m
gar estin gar eimi

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
energwn energeO
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
qelein thelO
vn Pres Act
God
for
IS it-is
THE
One-IN-ACTING one-operating ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
IN
YOU(p) ye
13 For it is God which worketh in you both to will and to do of [his] good pleasure.
AND
THE
TO-BE-WILLING
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Sg n
energein energeO
vn Pres Act
uper huper
Prep
eudokias eudokia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
THE
TO-BE-IN-ACTING OVER THE to-be-operating for-the-sake-of poieite poieO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
WELL-SEEMing delight
14 . Do all things without murmurings and disputings:
2:14 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
cwris chOris
Adv
goggusmwn kai dialogismwn goggusmos kai dialogismos

ALL
BE-YE-DOING be-ye-doing ! genhsqe ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 2 Pl
apart-from MURMURings without amemptoi amemptos

a_ Nom Pl m
AND
THRU-accounts reasonings qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
2:15 ina
hina
Conj
kai akeraioi tekna kai akeraios teknon

Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Pl n
amwma amOmos
a_ Nom Pl n
meson mesos
a_ Acc Sg n
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BECOMING UN-BLAMEable AND blameless geneas genea

n_ Gen Sg f
UN-blendED artless en en
Prep
offsprings children ois hos

pr Dat Pl m
OF-God
UN-FLAWed MIDst flawless ws hOs

Adv
skolias kai diestrammenhs skolios kai diastrephO

a_ Gen Sg f Conj vp Perf Pas Gen Sg f
fainesqe phainO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
15 That ye may be blameless and harmless, the sons of God, without rebuke, in the midst of a crooked and perverse nation, among whom ye shine as lights in the world;
OF-generation CROOKED
AND
HAVING-been-THRU-TURNED IN WHICH having-been-perverted among whom(p)
YE-ARE-APPEARING AS
AV
Philippians 2
fwsthres en phOstEr en
n_ Nom Pl m Prep
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
LIGHTers luminaries
IN
SYSTEM world epecontes epechO

2:16 logon
logos
n_ Acc Sg m
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
eis eis
Prep
kauchma emoi kauchEma egO

n_ Acc Sg n pp 1 Dat Sg
eis eis
Prep
hmeran cristou hEmera christos

oti hoti
Conj
saying word ouk ou

Part Neg
OF-LIFE
ON-HAVING having-on edramon trechO

vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
INTO BOAST glorying oude oude

Adv
to-ME
INTO DAY
OF-ANOINTED that of-Christ
16 Holding forth the word of life; that I may rejoice in the day of Christ, that I have not run in vain, neither laboured in vain.
eis eis
Prep
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg n
ekopiasa kopiaO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
NOT
INTO EMPTY for-naught
I-RAN
NOT-YET INTO EMPTY neither for-naught epi th epi ho

Prep t_ Dat Sg f
I-toil
2:17 alla ei
alla
Conj
ei
Cond
kai spendomai kai spendO

qusia thusia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai leitourgia ths kai leitourgia ho

Conj n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Sg f
but
IF
AND I-AM-beING-LIBATIONED ON even I-am-being-a-libation cairw chairO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
SACRIFICE AND
OF-THE
17 Yea, and if I be offered upon the sacrifice and service of your faith, I joy, and rejoice with you all.

kai sugcairw kai sugchairO

pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) I-AM-JOYING of-ye I-am-rejoicing de de

Conj
AND
I-AM-TOGETHER-JOYING to-ALL I-am-rejoicing-together with-all cairete chairO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
YOU(p) ye moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
18 For the same cause also do ye joy, and rejoice with me.
2:18 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
kai sugcairete kai sugchairO

THE
YET SAME
AND also en en
Prep
YOU(p) ye
BE-JOYING AND be-ye-rejoicing ! ihsou iEsous

n_ Dat Sg m
BE-TOGETHER-JOYING to-ME be-ye-rejoicing-together ! with-me ina hina

Conj
19 But I trust in the Lord Jesus to send Timotheus shortly unto you, that I also may be of good comfort, when I know your state.
2:19 elpizw
elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
timoqeon tacews pemyai umin timotheos tacheOs pempO humeis

n_ Acc Sg m Adv vn Aor Act pp 2 Dat Pl
I-AM-EXPECTING YET IN
Master Lord
JESUS
Timothy
SWIFTly quickly peri peri

Prep
TO-SEND
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THAT
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
euyucw eupsucheO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
gnous ginOskO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
AND-I I-also
MAY-BE-WELL-soulING KNOWING may-be-being-of-good-cheer gar ecw gar echO

THE
ABOUT YOU(p) concerns of-ye gnhsiws ta gnEsiOs ho

Adv t_ Acc Pl n
2:20 oudena
oudeis
a_ Acc Sg m
isoyucon isopsuchos
a_ Acc Sg m
ostis hostis
pr Nom Sg m
peri peri
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
NOT-YET-ONE for no-one merimnhsei merimnaO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
I-AM-HAVING
EQUAL-souled WHO-ANY equally-sensitive who-any
genuinely
THE
ABOUT YOU(p) concerns of-ye
20 For I have no man likeminded, who will naturally care for your state.
SHALL-BE-beING-anxious shall-be-being-solicitous
2:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar ta gar ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
eautwn zhtousin heautou zEteO

pf 3 Gen Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WH
cristou ihsou
WH
21 For all seek their own, not the things which are Jesus Christ's.
THE
NA NA
ALL
for
THE the(p)
OF-selves selfown
ARE-SEEKING NOT
THE the(p)
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-JESUS
Conj
2:22 thn
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
dokimhn autou dokimE autos

ginwskete ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti ws patri hoti hOs patEr

Conj Adv n_ Dat Sg m
teknon teknon
n_ Nom Sg n
sun sun
Prep
THE
YET testedness
OF-him
YE-ARE-KNOWING that
AS
to-FATHER offspring child
22 But ye know the proof of him, that, as a son with the father, he hath served with me in the gospel.
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
edouleusen eis douleuO eis

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
to-ME me
he-SLAVES
INTO THE
WELL-MESSAGE
2:23 touton men

houtos
pd Acc Sg m
men
Part
oun oun
Conj
elpizw elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
pemyai ws an pempO hOs an

vn Aor Act Adv Part
afidw aphoraO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
this-one this-one
INDEED THEN I-AM-EXPECTING TO-SEND
AS
EVER I-MAY-BE-FROM-PERCEIVING THE I-may-be-seeing-through the-things
23 Him therefore I hope to send presently, so soon as I shall see how it will go with me.
AV
Philippians 2
peri peri
Prep
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
exauths exautEs
Adv
ABOUT ME concerning
forthwith
2:24 pepoiqa
peithO
vi 2Perf Act 1 Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
oti kai autos hoti kai autos

Conj Conj pp Nom Sg m
tacews eleusomai tacheOs erchomai

Adv vi Fut midD 1 Sg
24 But I trust in the Lord that I also myself shall come shortly.
I-HAVE-confidence YET IN
Master Lord
that
AND also
SAME myself
SWIFTly quickly ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
I-SHALL-BE-COMING
2:25 anagkaion de
anagkaios
a_ Acc Sg n
de
Conj
hghsamhn hEgeomai
vi Aor midD 1 Sg
epafroditon epaphroditos
n_ Acc Sg m
adelfon kai sunergon adelphos kai sunergos

n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg m
necessary
YET I-deem I-deem-it
Epaphroditus (ON-charming) THE Epaphroditus umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
brother
AND
TOGETHER-ACTer fellow-worker creias chreia

n_ Gen Sg f
kai sustratiwthn mou kai sustratiOtEs egO

Conj n_ Acc Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
de de
Conj
apostolon kai leitourgon ths apostolos kai leitourgos ho

n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
25 Yet I supposed it necessary to send to you Epaphroditus, my brother, and companion in labour, and fellowsoldier, but your messenger, and he that ministered to my wants.
AND
TOGETHER-WARrior fellow-soldier
OF-ME
OF-YOU(p) YET commissioner of-ye apostle
AND
official minister
OF-THE
need
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pemyai pros pempO pros

vn Aor Act Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-ME
TO-SEND
TOWARD YOU(p) ye hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
2:26 epeidh
epeidE
Conj
epipoqwn epipotheO

WH
idein
kai adhmonwn kai adEmoneO

ON-IF-BIND ON-LONGING since-in-fact longing-for dioti dioti

Conj
he-WAS
ALL
YOU(p) ye
AND
beING-depressed
26 For he longed after you all, and was full of heaviness, because that ye had heard that he had been sick.
hkousate oti hsqenhsen akouO hoti astheneO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg
THRU-that YE-HEAR because-that
that
he-is-UN-FIRM he-is-infirm
WH
2:27 kai gar hsqenhsen paraplhsion

kai
Conj
qanatou
NA
gar
Conj
astheneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
paraplEsion
Adv
qanatw thanatos
n_ Dat Sg m
alla o alla ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND also hlehsen eleaO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
for
he-is-UN-FIRM he-is-infirm auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
BESIDE-NIGH very-nigh auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
to-DEATH
but
THE
God
27 For indeed he was sick nigh unto death: but God had mercy on him; and not on him only, but on me also, lest I should have sorrow upon sorrow.
ouk ou
Part Neg
de de
Conj
monon monos
a_ Acc Sg m
alla kai eme alla kai egO

Conj Conj pp 1 Acc Sg
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
luphn lupE
n_ Acc Sg f
is-MERCIFUL-to him
NOT
him to-him
YET ONLY
but
AND also
ME to-me
THAT NO
SORROW
epi luphn epi lupE

Prep n_ Acc Sg f
scw echO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
ON
SORROW I-SHOULD-BE-HAVING
2:28 spoudaioterws oun

spoudaiOs
Adv Con
oun
Conj
epemya pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ina hina
Conj
idontes eidO
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
palin palin
Adv
more-DILIGENTly
THEN I-SEND
him
THAT PERCEIVING
him
AGAIN
28 I sent him therefore the more carefully, that, when ye see him again, ye may rejoice, and that I may be the less sorrowful.
carhte chairO
vs 2Aor pasD 2 Pl
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
alupoteros alupos
a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
w eimi
vs Pres vxx 1 Sg
YE-MAY-BE-JOYING AND-I ye-may-be-rejoicing
more-UN-SORROWed MAY-BE more-sorrow-free oun oun

Conj
2:29 prosdecesqe
prosdechomai
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
meta pashs meta pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
29 Receive him therefore in the Lord with all gladness; and hold such in reputation:
BE-YE-TOWARD-RECEIVING THEN him be-ye-receiving ! toioutous entimous ecete toioutos entimos echO
pd Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
IN
Master Lord
WITH
EVERY all
JOY
AND
THE
such such(p)
IN-VALUED held-in-honor dia dia

Prep
BE-HAVING be-ye-having ! to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
2:30 oti
hoti
Conj
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
WH
kuriou
NA
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
mecri qanatou hggisen mechri thanatos eggizO

Adv n_ Gen Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg
that THRU THE seeing-that because-of
work
UNTO
DEATH
he-NEARS he-draws-near
30 Because for the work of Christ he was nigh unto death, not regarding his life, to supply your lack of service toward me.
AV
paraboleusamenos th paraboleuomai ho
vp Aor midD Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
yuch psuchE
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
anaplhrwsh anaplEroO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
usterhma husterEma
n_ Acc Sg n
BESIDE-CASTing risking ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
to-THE the me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
soul
THAT he-SHOULD-BE-UP-FILLING THE he-should-be-filling-up
OF-YOU(p) WANT of-ye
pros pros
Prep
leitourgias leitourgia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
TOWARD ME
AV
Philippians 3
3:1 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
loipon loipon
a_ Nom Sg n

cairete chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
THE
rest
brothers brethren ! emoi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
OF-ME
BE-JOYING IN be-ye-rejoicing !
Master Lord de de
Conj
THE
SAME same(p)
. Finally, my brethren, rejoice in the Lord. To write the same things to you, to me indeed [is] not grievous, but for you [it is] safe.
grafein graphO
vn Pres Act
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
men men
Part
ouk ou
Part Neg
oknhron umin oknEros humeis

a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Dat Pl
asfales asphalEs
a_ Nom Sg n
TO-BE-WRITING to-YOU(p) to-ye
to-ME
INDEED NOT
SLOTHful irksome
to-YOU(p) to-ye
YET UN-TOTTERing security

2
3:2 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kunas kuOn
n_ Acc Pl m
blepete blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kakous ergatas blepete kakos ergatEs blepO

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
Beware of dogs, beware of evil workers, beware of the concision.
BE-YE-lookING THE be-ye-bewaring-of ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
dogs
BE-YE-lookING THE be-ye-bewaring-of !
EVIL
ACTers workers
BE-YE-lookING be-ye-bewaring-of !
katatomhn katatomE
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
DOWN-CUTTing maimcision gar esmen gar eimi

3:3 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
peritomh peritomE
n_ Nom Sg f
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pneumati qeou pneuma theos

WE
for
ARE
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing THE circumcision the-ones en en

Prep
to-spirit
OF-God
For we are the circumcision, which worship God in the spirit, and rejoice in Christ Jesus, and have no confidence in the flesh.
latreuontes latreuO
kai kaucwmenoi kai kauchaomai


kai ouk kai ou

Conj Part Neg
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE AND
BOASTING glorying
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AND
NOT
IN
FLESH
pepoiqotes peithO
HAVING-confidED having-confidence
3:4 kaiper
kaiper
Conj
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
ecwn echO
pepoiqhsin kai en pepoithEsis kai en

sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
dokei dokeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
AND-EVEN I
HAVING
confidence
AND also mallon mallon

Adv
IN
FLESH
IF
ANY
. Though I might also have confidence in the flesh. If any other man thinketh that he hath whereof he might trust in the flesh, I more:
allos allos
a_ Nom Sg m
pepoiqenai peithO
vn 2Perf Act
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
other other-one
TO-HAVE-confidence IN
FLESH
RATHER
3:5 peritomh
peritomE
n_ Dat Sg f
oktahmeros ek oktaEmeros ek
a_ Nom Sg m Prep
genous genos
n_ Gen Sg n
israhl israEl
ni proper
fulhs phulE
n_ Gen Sg f
beniamin beniamin
ni proper
ebraios hebraios
a_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
ABOUT-CUTTing EIGHT-DAY to-circumcision eighth-day ebraiwn hebraios

a_ Gen Pl m
OUT OF-breed of-race farisaios pharisaios

n_ Nom Sg m
of-ISRAEL tribe of-Israel of-tribe
of-BENJAMIN HEBREW of-Benjamin
OUT
Circumcised the eighth day, of the stock of Israel, [of] the tribe of Benjamin, an Hebrew of the Hebrews; as touching the law, a Pharisee;
kata kata
Prep
nomon nomos
n_ Acc Sg m
OF-HEBREWS according-to LAW
PHARISEE
3:6 kata
kata
Prep
zhlos zElos
n_ Acc Sg n
diwkwn diOkO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekklhsian kata ekklEsia kata

n_ Acc Sg f Prep

en en
Prep
according-to BOILing zeal nomw nomos

n_ Dat Sg m
CHASING persecuting amemptos amemptos

a_ Nom Sg m
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia
according-to JUSTice righteousness
THE
IN
Concerning zeal, persecuting the church; touching the righteousness which is in the law, blameless.
genomenos ginomai
LAW
WH
BECOMING
NA
UN-BLAMEable blameless atina hostis

pr Nom Pl n
3:7
alla
alla alla
Conj
hn eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
kerdh kerdos
n_ Nom Pl n
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hghmai hEgeomai
But what things were gain to me, those I counted loss for Christ.
but
WHICH-ANY WAS which-any(p) criston zhmian christos zEmia

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg f
to-ME
GAIN gain(p)
these
I-HAVE-deemED
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THRU THE because-of
ANOINTED Christ
FINE (forfeit) forfeit
AV
Philippians 3
3:8 alla menounge

alla
Conj
menounge
Part
kai hgoumai kai hEgeomai

panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
zhmian zEmia
n_ Acc Sg f
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
but
INDEED-THEN-SURELY AND to-be-sure also ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
I-AM-deemING
ALL
FINE (forfeit) TO-BE forfeit tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THRU THE because-of mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
uperecon huperechO
gnwsews cristou gnOsis christos

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
Yea doubtless, and I count all things [but] loss for the excellency of the knowledge of Christ Jesus my Lord: for whom I have suffered the loss of all things, and do count them [but] dung, that I may win Christ,
beING-superior superiority on hos

pr Acc Sg m
OF-THE
KNOWledge
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ
THE
Master Lord skubala ina skubalon hina

n_ Acc Pl n Conj
OF-ME
THRU because-of
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ezhmiwqhn kai hgoumai zEmioO kai hEgeomai

vi Aor Pas 1 Sg Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
WHOM
THE
ALL
I-WAS-FINED I-forfeited
AND
I-AM-deemING I-am-deeming-it
REFUSE
THAT ANOINTED Christ
kerdhsw kerdainO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
I-SHOULD-BE-GAINING
3:9 kai eureqw

kai
Conj
heuriskO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
ecwn echO
emhn emos
ps 1 Acc Sg

AND
MAY-BE-BEING-FOUND IN
Him
NO
HAVING
MY
JUSTice righteousness ek ek
Prep
THE
ek ek
Prep
nomou nomos
n_ Gen Sg m
alla thn alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
dia dia
Prep
pistews cristou pistis christos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
n_ Acc Sg f
. And be found in him, not having mine own righteousness, which is of the law, but that which is through the faith of Christ, the righteousness which is of God by faith:
OUT OF-LAW
but
THE
OF-ANOINTED THE of-Christ
OUT OF-God
epi th epi ho
Prep t_ Dat Sg f
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
ON
THE
BELIEF faith gnwnai auton ginOskO autos

3:10 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
dunamin ths dunamis ho

anastasews autou anastasis autos

kai kai
Conj
OF-THE
WH
TO-KNOW
NA
Him
NA
AND
THE
NA
ABILITY power twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE
OF-Him
AND
10 That I may know him, and the power of his resurrection, and the fellowship of his sufferings, being made conformable unto his death;
koinwnian
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
koinwnian koinOnia
n_ Acc Sg f
paqhmatwn autou pathEma autos

summorfizomenos summorphizO
THE
OF-THE
EMOTIONS sufferings
OF-Him
beING-conFORMED conforming
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qanatw autou thanatos autos

to-THE
DEATH
OF-Him
3:11 ei
ei
Cond
pws pOs
Part Int
katanthsw katantaO
vs Aor Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
exanastasin exanastasis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
11 If by any means I might attain unto the resurrection of the dead.
IF
how I-SHOULD-BE-attainING INTO THE somehow oti hdh hoti EdE

Conj Adv
OUT-UP-STANDing THE out-resurrection teteleiwmai teleioO

vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
OUT OF-DEAD-ones of-dead-ones de de

Conj
3:12 ouc
ou
Part Neg
elabon lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
h E
Part
hdh EdE
Adv
diwkw diOkO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ei ei
Cond
kai kai
Conj
NOT
that
ALREADY I-GOT I-obtained ef epi

Prep
OR
ALREADY I-HAVE-been-maturED I-AM-CHASING YET IF have-been-perfected I-am-pursuing cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND also
katalabw katalambanO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
kai katelhmfqhn upo kai katalambanO hupo

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
12 Not as though I had already attained, either were already perfect: but I follow after, if that I may apprehend that for which also I am apprehended of Christ Jesus.
I-MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING ON I-may-be-grasping
WHICH
AND also
I-WAS-DOWN-GOT I-was-grasped
NA
UNDER ANOINTED by Christ logizomai logizomai

JESUS
3:13 adelfoi egw

adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
emauton emautou
pf 1 Acc Sg m
WH
oupw
ou ou
Part Neg
kateilhfenai katalambanO
vn Perf Act
brothers brethren ! en heis

n_ Nom Sg n
MYself
NOT
AM-accountING am-reckoning tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
TO-HAVE-DOWN-GOT to-have-grasped de de
Conj
de de
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
men men
Part
opisw epilanqanomenos opisO epilanthanomai

Adv
13 Brethren, I count not myself to have apprehended: but [this] one thing [I do], forgetting those things which are behind, and reaching forth unto those things which are before,
ONE one-thing
YET THE INDEED BEHIND the-things
ON--forgettING[-UP] forgetting
to-THE YET IN-TOWARD-PLACE to-the-things in-front
AV
Philippians 3
epekteinomenos epekteinomai
beING-ON-OUT-STRETCHED stretching-out
3:14 kata
kata
Prep
skopon skopos
n_ Acc Sg m
diwkw diOkO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
brabeion ths brabeion ho

anw klhsews tou anO klEsis ho

Adv n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
14 I press toward the mark for the prize of the high calling of God in Christ Jesus.
according-to goal
I-AM-CHASING INTO THE I-am-pursuing
prize
OF-THE
UP above
CALLing
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep

God
IN
ANOINTED Christ oun oun

Conj
JESUS
3:15 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
teleioi touto teleios houtos

a_ Nom Pl m pd Acc Sg n
fronwmen phroneO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
kai ei kai ei
Conj Cond
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
eterws heterOs
Adv
as-many-as THEN mature are-mature froneite phroneO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
this
WE-MAY-BE-beING-DISPOSED AND we-may-be-being-disposed-to o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
IF
ANY in-anything
DIFFERENTly
15 . Let us therefore, as many as be perfect, be thus minded: and if in any thing ye be otherwise minded, God shall reveal even this unto you.

Conj pd Acc Sg n
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
apokaluyei apokaluptO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
YE-ARE-beING-DISPOSED AND also
this
THE
God
to-YOU(p) to-ye autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
SHALL-BE-FROM-COVERING shall-be-revealing
16 Nevertheless, whereto we have already attained, let us walk by the same rule, let us mind the same thing.
3:16 plhn
plEn
Adv
eis eis
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
efqasamen phthanO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
stoicein stoicheO
vn Pres Act
MOREly INTO WHICH moreover
WE-OUTSTRIP to-THE we-outstrip-others mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
SAME
TO-BE-elementING to-be-observing-the-fundamentals tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
3:17 summimhtai
summimEtEs
n_ Nom Pl m
ginesqe ginomai
adelfoi kai skopeite adelphos kai skopeO

n_ Voc Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
outws houtOs
Adv
TOGETHER-IMITATORS OF-ME imitators-together peripatountas kaqws peripateO kathOs

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Adv
BE-YE-BECOMING be-ye-becoming ! ecete echO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
brothers brethren ! hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
AND
BE-YE-NOTING THE-ones be-ye-noting ! the-ones
thus
17 . Brethren, be followers together of me, and mark them which walk so as ye have us for an ensample.
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
according-AS YE-ARE-HAVING type model gar peripatousin gar peripateO

US
3:18 polloi
polus
a_ Nom Pl m
ous hos
pr Acc Pl m
pollakis elegon pollakis legO

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
nun de nun de
Adv Conj
kai kai
Conj
MANY
for
ARE-ABOUT-TREADING WHOM MANY-times are-walking of-whom(p) often tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
I-said I-told
to-YOU(p) ye
NOW YET AND also
18 (For many walk, of whom I have told you often, and now tell you even weeping, [that they are] the enemies of the cross of Christ:
klaiwn klaiO
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ecqrous echthros
a_ Acc Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
staurou tou stauros ho

cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
LAMENTING
I-AM-sayING I-am-telling-it to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
THE the-ones
enemies OF-THE being-enemies apwleia wn apOleia hos

n_ Nom Sg f pr Gen Pl m
pale cross o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
3:19 wn
hos
pr Gen Pl m
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
koilia koilia
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
OF-WHOM THE of-whom(p) h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
FINISH destruction consummation en en

Prep
OF-WHOM THE of-whom(p) oi ho

t_ Nom Pl m
god
THE
CAVITY bowel
AND
19 Whose end [is] destruction, whose God [is their] belly, and [whose] glory [is] in their shame, who mind earthly things.)
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
aiscunh autwn aischunE autos

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
epigeia epigeios
a_ Acc Pl n
fronountes phroneO
THE
esteem glory
IN
THE
VILEness shame
OF-them
THE-ones the-ones
THE
ON-LAND(p) beING-DISPOSed-to terrestrial-things ex ek

Prep
3:20 hmwn
hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
gar to gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
politeuma en politeuma en
n_ Nom Sg n Prep
ouranois uparcei ouranos huparchO

ou hou
Adv
kai kai
Conj
OF-US
for
THE
citizenship realm kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
IN
heavens
IS-belongING OUT OF-WHICH AND is-being-inherent also
20 For our conversation is in heaven; from whence also we look for the Saviour, the Lord Jesus Christ:
swthra apekdecomeqa sOtEr apekdechomai

n_ Acc Sg m vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
SAViour
ARE-FROM-OUT-RECEIVING Master we-are-awaiting Lord metaschmatisei metaschEmatizO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
3:21 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Acc Sg n
tapeinwsews hmwn tapeinOsis hemeis

WHO
SHALL-BE-after-FIGURING THE shall-be-transfiguring
BODY
OF-THE
LOWness humiliation
OF-US
21 Who shall change our vile body, that it may be fashioned like unto his glorious body, according to the working whereby he is able even to
AV
summorfon tw summorphos ho
a_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Sg n
swmati ths sOma ho

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
energeian energeia
n_ Acc Sg f
subdue all things unto himself.
conFORMED
to-THE
BODY
OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-Him
according-to THE in-accord-with ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
IN-ACTion operation
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
dunasqai dunamai
vn Pres midD/pasD
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
kai upotaxai kai hupotassO

Conj vn Aor Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
OF-THE
TO-BE-enABLED to-enable
Him
AND TO-UNDER-SET to-Him even to-subject to-himself
THE
ALL
AV
Philippians 4
4:1 wste
hOste
Conj

agaphtoi kai epipoqhtoi cara agapEtos kai epipothEtos chara

a_ Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m n_ Nom Sg f
kai stefanos kai stephanos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
AS-BESIDES brothers so-that brethren ! mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
OF-ME
beLOVED
AND
ON-LONGed longed-for
JOY
AND
WREATH
. Therefore, my brethren dearly beloved and longed for, my joy and crown, so stand fast in the Lord, [my] dearly beloved.
outws sthkete houtOs stEkO

en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
agaphtoi agapEtos
a_ Voc Pl m
OF-ME
thus
BE-STANDING-firm IN be-ye-standing-firm ! parakalw parakaleO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
Master Lord
beLOVED beloved(p) ! parakalw parakaleO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
4:2 euodian
euodia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai suntuchn kai suntuchE

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
I beseech Euodias, and beseech Syntyche, that they be of the same mind in the Lord.
Euodia (WELL-WAY) I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING AND Euodia I-am-entreating auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
Syntyche (TOGETHER-HAPPEN) I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING THE Syntyche I-am-entreating
fronein phroneO
vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
SAME
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED IN
Master Lord gnhsie gnEsios

a_ Voc Sg m
4:3 nai erwtw

nai
Part
erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai se kai su
Conj pp 2 Acc Sg
suzuge suzugos
a_ Voc Sg m
sullambanou sullambanO
vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
autais aitines autos hostis

pp Dat Pl f pr Nom Pl f
YEA yes en en
Prep
I-AM-askING
AND also
YOU
genuine genuine !
TOGETHER-YOKE BE-TOGETHER-GETTING to-SAME yokefellow ! be-you-helping ! them (f) moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
WHO-ANY who-any
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
n_ Dat Sg n
sunhqlhsan sunathleO
vi Aor Act 3 Pl
meta kai klhmentos kai twn meta kai klEmEs kai ho

Prep Conj n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Gen Pl m
And I intreat thee also, true yokefellow, help those women which laboured with me in the gospel, with Clement also, and [with] other my fellowlabourers, whose names [are] in the book of life.
IN
THE
WELL-MESSAGE TOGETHER-COMPETE to-ME compete-together with-me mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
WITH
AND also
CLEMENT
AND
OF-THE the
loipwn sunergwn loipon sunergos

a_ Gen Pl m a_ Gen Pl m
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
onomata en onoma en
n_ Nom Pl n Prep
biblw biblos
n_ Dat Sg f
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
rest rest(p)
TOGETHER-ACTers OF-ME fellow-workers en en

Prep
NAMES
IN
SCROLL
OF-LIFE
4:4 cairete
chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
pantote palin erw pantote palin ereO

Adv Adv vi Fut Act 1 Sg
cairete chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
Rejoice in the Lord alway: [and] again I say, Rejoice.
BE-YE-JOYING IN be-ye-rejoicing !
Master Lord
always
AGAIN
I-SHALL-BE-declarING BE-JOYING be-ye-rejoicing ! pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
4:5 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
epieikes umwn epieikEs humeis

a_ Nom Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
gnwsqhtw ginOskO
vm Aor Pas 3 Sg
anqrwpois o anthrOpos ho
n_ Dat Pl m t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
lenient lenience
OF-YOU(p) LET-BE-BEING-KNOWN to-ALL of-ye let-it-be-being-known !
Let your moderation be known unto all men. The Lord [is] at hand.
humans
THE
Master Lord
eggus eggus
Adv
NEAR
4:6 mhden
mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
merimnate merimnaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
all en alla en
Conj Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
proseuch kai th proseuchE kai ho

dehsei deEsis
n_ Dat Sg f
NO-YET-ONE BE-YE-beING-anxious but nothing be-ye-worrying-about ! meta eucaristias ta meta eucharistia ho

Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Pl n
IN
EVERY everything umwn humeis
THE to-the
prayer
AND
THE
petition
Be careful for nothing; but in every thing by prayer and supplication with thanksgiving let your requests be made known unto God.
aithmata aitEma
n_ Acc Pl n
gnwrizesqw gnOrizO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pp 2 Gen Pl
WITH
THE
REQUEST-effects OF-YOU(p) LET-BE-beING-KNOWizED TOWARD THE requests of-ye let-it-be-being-made-known !
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
God
4:7 kai h
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
uperecousa huperechO
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
PEACE
OF-THE
God
THE
one-beING-superior EVERY being-superior-to nohmata noEma

n_ Acc Pl n
MIND mental-state en en
Prep
And the peace of God, which passeth all understanding, shall keep your hearts and minds through Christ Jesus.
frourhsei phroureO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f

kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
SHALL-BE-GARRISONING THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
THE
apprehensions OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
ANOINTED Christ
AV
Philippians 4
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
JESUS
4:8 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
loipon loipon
a_ Nom Sg n
adelfoi osa adelphos hosos

n_ Voc Pl m pk Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
alhqh alEthEs
a_ Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Nom Pl n
semna semnos
a_ Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Nom Pl n
THE
rest
brothers brethren ! agna hagnos

a_ Nom Pl n
as-much-as IS whatever prosfilh prosphilEs

a_ Nom Pl n
TRUE
as-much-as GRAVE whatever eufhma euphEmos

a_ Nom Pl n
as-much-as whatever areth aretE

n_ Nom Sg f
dikaia dikaios
a_ Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Nom Pl n
osa hosos
pk Nom Pl n
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg f
JUST
as-much-as PURE whatever tis tis

px Nom Sg m
as-much-as TOWARD-FOND as-much-as WELL-AVERred IF whatever agreeable whatever renowned logizesqe logizomai
ANY
VALOR virtue
Finally, brethren, whatsoever things are true, whatsoever things [are] honest, whatsoever things [are] just, whatsoever things [are] pure, whatsoever things [are] lovely, whatsoever things [are] of good report; if [there be] any virtue, and if [there be] any praise, think on these things.
kai ei kai ei
Conj Cond
epainos tauta epainos houtos

n_ Nom Sg m pd Acc Pl n
AND
IF
ANY
ON-PRAISE applause
these
BE-YE-accountING be-ye-taking-into-account ! en en
Prep
4:9 a
hos
pr Acc Pl n
kai emaqete kai manthanO

kai parelabete kai hkousate kai eidete kai paralambanO kai akouO kai eidO
Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
WHICH which(p) tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
AND also
YE-LEARNED AND
YE-BESIDE-GOT accepted qeos theos
AND
YE-HEAR hear
AND
YE-PERCEIVED IN perceived meq meta

Prep
ME
Those things, which ye have both learned, and received, and heard, and seen in me, do: and the God of peace shall be with you.
prassete prassO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs estai eirEnE eimi

n_ Gen Sg f vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
n_ Nom Sg m
these
BE-YE-PRACTISING AND be-ye-practising ! de de

Conj
THE
God
OF-THE
PEACE
SHALL-BE
WITH YOU(p) ye uper huper

Prep
10 . But I rejoiced in the Lord greatly, that now at the last your care of me hath flourished again; wherein ye were also careful, but ye lacked opportunity.
4:10 ecarhn
chairO
vi 2Aor pasD 1 Sg
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
megalws oti hdh megalOs hoti EdE

Adv Conj Adv
pote pote
Part
aneqalete to anathallO ho
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
I-WAS-JOYED I-rejoiced emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
YET IN
Master Lord ef epi

Prep
GREATly
that
ALREADY ?-when UP-BLOOMED at-length for-once ye-blossomed hkaireisqe akaireomai

THE
OVER
fronein phroneO
vn Pres Act
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
kai efroneite kai phroneO

de de
Conj
ME
TO-BE-beING-DISPOSED ON
WHICH
AND also
YE-were-DISPOSED YE-were-UN-SEASONED YET you-lacked-occasion egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
4:11 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti kaq hoti kata

Conj Prep
usterhsin legw husterEsis legO

gar emaqon gar manthanO

en en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
NOT
that
according-to WANTing want einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
I-AM-sayING
for
LEARNED
IN
WHICH which(p)
11 Not that I speak in respect of want: for I have learned, in whatsoever state I am, [therewith] to be content.
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
autarkhs autarkEs
a_ Nom Sg m
I-AM
SAME-SUFFICed TO-BE content kai tapeinousqai kai tapeinoO

Conj vn Pres Pas
4:12 oida
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
oida eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
kai perisseuein kai perisseuO

Conj vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED AND I-am-aware kai en kai en

Conj Prep
TO-BE-beING-made-LOW I-HAVE-PERCEIVED AND to-be-being-humbled I-am-aware kai cortazesqai kai chortazO

Conj vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-exceedING IN to-be-superabounding kai kai

Conj
EVERY everything
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
memuhmai mueO
vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
kai peinan kai peinaO

Conj vn Pres Act
12 I know both how to be abased, and I know how to abound: every where and in all things I am instructed both to be full and to be hungry, both to abound and to suffer need.
AND
IN ALL among
I-HAVE-been-initiatED AND I-have-been-intiated kai ustereisqai kai hustereO

Conj vn Pres Pas
TO-BE-beING-satisfiED AND
TO-BE-HUNGERING AND
perisseuein perisseuO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-exceedING AND to-be-superabounding
TO-BE-WANTING to-be-being-in-want en en
Prep
4:13 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
iscuw ischuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
endunamounti me endunamoO egO

vp Pres Act Dat Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg
13 I can do all things through Christ which strengtheneth me.
ALL
I-AM-beING-STRONG IN
THE
One-IN-ABLING one-invigorating
ME
4:14 plhn
plEn
Adv
kalws epoihsate sugkoinwnhsantes mou kalOs poieO sugkoinOneO egO

Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl vp Aor Act Nom Pl m pp 1 Gen Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
qliyei thlipsis
n_ Dat Sg f
MOREly IDEALly moreover
YE-DO
TOGETHER-communioning joint-contributing
OF-ME
THE to-the
14 Notwithstanding ye have well done, that ye did communicate with my affliction.
AV
Philippians 4
4:15 oidate
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
de de
Conj

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
filipphsioi oti en philippEsios hoti en

n_ Voc Pl m Conj Prep
arch archE
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg n
HAVE-PERCEIVED YET AND are-aware also ote exhlqon hote exerchomai

YOU(p) ye
Philippians Philippians ! moi egO
that
IN
ORIGINal beginning
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
apo apo
Prep
makedonias oudemia makedonia oudeis

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
ekklhsia ekoinwnhsen eis ekklEsia koinOneO eis

n_ Nom Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
15 Now ye Philippians know also, that in the beginning of the gospel, when I departed from Macedonia, no church communicated with me as concerning giving and receiving, but ye only.
pp 1 Dat Sg
when
FROM MACEDONIA
NOT-YET-ONE to-ME not-one mh mE

Part Neg
OUT-CALLED communions ecclesia participates monoi monos

a_ Nom Pl m
INTO
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
dosews kai lhmyews ei dosis kai lEmpsis ei

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Cond
umeis humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
saying matter
OF-GIVing
AND
OF-GETTing getting
IF
NO
YOU(p) ye
ONLY
4:16 oti kai en

hoti
Conj
kai
Conj
en
Prep
qessalonikh kai apax kai dis eis thessalonikE kai hapax kai dis eis
n_ Dat Sg f Conj Adv Conj Adv Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
16 For even in Thessalonica ye sent once and again unto my necessity.
that
AND also
IN
THESSALONICA
AND
ONCE
AND
twice
INTO THE
need
to-ME
epemyate pempO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
YE-SEND
4:17 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti epizhtw hoti epizEteO

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
doma doma
n_ Acc Sg n
alla epizhtw alla epizEteO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
karpon karpos
n_ Acc Sg m
17 Not because I desire a gift: but I desire fruit that may abound to your account.
NOT
that
I-AM-ON-SEEKING THE I-am-seeking-for logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
GIFT
but
I-AM-ON-SEEKING THE I-am-seeking-for
FRUIT
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pleonazonta eis pleonazO eis

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
MOREizING increasing de de
Conj
INTO saying account panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
OF-YOU(p) of-ye peplhrwmai plEroO

vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
4:18 apecw
apechO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
kai perisseuw kai perisseuO

dexamenos dechomai
para para
Prep
I-AM-FROM-HAVING YET ALL I-am-collecting epafroditou epaphroditos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
I-AM-exceedING I-HAVE-been-FILLED RECEIVing I-am-superabounding I-have-been-filled-full osmhn osmE

n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
par para
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
euwdias euOdia
n_ Gen Sg f
qusian thusia
n_ Acc Sg f
dekthn dektos
a_ Acc Sg f
18 But I have all, and abound: I am full, having received of Epaphroditus the things [which were sent] from you, an odour of a sweet smell, a sacrifice acceptable, wellpleasing to God.
Epaphroditus (ON-charming) THE BESIDE OF-YOU(p) ODOR Epaphroditus the-things ye euareston euarestos
a_ Acc Sg f
OF-WELL-ODOR SACRIFICE RECEIVable fragrant acceptable
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
God
4:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
plhrwsei plEroO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kata kata
Prep
THE
YET God
OF-ME
SHALL-BE-FILLING EVERY
need
OF-YOU(p) according-to of-ye in-accord-with
19 But my God shall supply all your need according to his riches in glory by Christ Jesus.
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ploutos autou ploutos autos

en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep

THE
RICHES
OF-Him
IN
esteem glory
IN
JESUS
4:20 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai patri kai patEr

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas aiOn
n_ Acc Pl m
t_ Nom Sg f
20 . Now unto God and our Father [be] glory for ever and ever. Amen.
to-THE
YET God
AND
FATHER
OF-US
THE
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m

n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
OF-THE
eons
AMEN
4:21 aspasasqe panta

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
pas
a_ Acc Sg m
agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep

aspazontai aspazomai
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
greet-YE greet-ye !
EVERY
HOLY-one saint
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye
21 Salute every saint in Christ Jesus. The brethren which are with me greet you.
THE
AV
Philippians 4 - Colossians 1
sun sun
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
brothers brethren umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
4:22 aspazontai
aspazomai
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
agioi hagios
a_ Nom Pl m
malista de malista de
Adv Conj
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ARE-greetING
YOU(p) ye
22 All the saints salute you, chiefly they that are of Caesar's household.
ALL
THE
HOLY-ones RATHERest saints especially
YET THE the-ones
OUT OF-THE
kaisaros oikias kaisar oikia

CEASAR of-Ceasar
HOME house caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
4:23 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meta tou christos meta ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg m
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH
THE
spirit
23 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you all. Amen. <<[To [the] Philippians written from Rome, by Epaphroditus.]>>
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Colossians 1
Colossians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep

kai timoqeos kai timotheos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
. Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God, and Timotheus [our] brother,
PAUL
commissioner apostle adelfos adelphos

n_ Nom Sg m
THRU WILL through
OF-God
AND
Timothy
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
THE
brother
1:2 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
kolossais agiois kolossai hagios

n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl m
kai pistois adelfois en kai pistos adelphos en

Conj a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Prep
cristw caris christos charis

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-THE
IN
COLOSSE
HOLY
AND
BELIEVing
brothers brethren
IN
ANOINTED Christ
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
To the saints and faithful brethren in Christ which are at Colosse: Grace [be] unto you, and peace, from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
1:3 eucaristoumen tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
. We give thanks to God and the Father of our Lord Jesus Christ, praying always for you,
WE-ARE-thankING
WH NA
to-THE the
God
FATHER
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
cristou
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m

Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ
always
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye en en

Prep
prayING
WH
1:4 akousantes thn

akouO
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin umwn pistis humeis


kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn agapE
n_ Acc Sg f
hn
HEARing on-hearing
WH
THE of-the
NA
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye eis eis

Prep
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AND
THE
LOVE
Since we heard of your faith in Christ Jesus, and of the love [which ye have] to all the saints,
ecete
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
NA
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
pantas tous pas ho

agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
WHICH
YE-ARE-HAVING
INTO ALL
THE
HOLY-ones saints umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
1:5 dia
dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apokeimenhn apokeimai
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois ouranos
n_ Dat Pl m
THRU THE because-of hn hos

pr Acc Sg f
EXPECTATION THE
one-beING-reservED being-reserved logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
to-YOU(p) to-ye
IN
THE
heavens
For the hope which is laid up for you in heaven, whereof ye heard before in the word of the truth of the gospel;
prohkousate en proakouO en
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias tou alEtheia ho

n_ Gen Sg n
WHICH
YE-BEFORE-HEAR ye-hear-before parontos pareimi
IN
THE
saying word umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE
TRUTH
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
1:6 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg n
eis eis
Prep
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
vp Pres vxx Gen Sg n
OF-THE the estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
one-BESIDE-BEING INTO YOU(p) being-present ye
IN
EVERY entire kai en kai en

Conj
THE
SYSTEM world umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
karpoforoumenon kai auxanomenon karpophoreO kai auxanO

vp Pres Mid Nom Sg n Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
kaqws kathOs
Adv
af apo
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
Which is come unto you, as [it is] in all the world; and bringeth forth fruit, as [it doth] also in you, since the day ye heard [of it], and knew the grace of God in truth:
Prep
IS it-is hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
beING-FRUIT-CARRIED bearing-fruit
AND
beING-GROWN-UP growing carin charis
according-AS AND also tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IN YOU(p) among ye en en
Prep
FROM WHICH
hkousate kai epegnwte thn akouO kai epiginOskO ho

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Conj vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
alhqeia alEtheia
n_ Dat Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
DAY
YE-HEAR
AND
ON-KNEW realized apo apo

Prep
THE
grace
OF-THE
God
IN
TRUTH
1:7 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
emaqete manthanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
epafra epaphras
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
agaphtou sundoulou agapEtos sundoulos

hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
according-AS YE-LEARNED FROM EPAPHRAS THE ye-learned-it
beLOVED
TOGETHER-SLAVE OF-US fellow-slave
WHO
As ye also learned of Epaphras our dear fellowservant, who is for you a faithful minister of Christ;
AV
Colossians 1
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
uper huper
Prep
WH
hmwn
NA
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
IS
BELIEVing faithful
OVER for-the-sake-of hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
YOU(p) ye thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THRU-SERVitor OF-THE servant umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ pneumati pneuma

n_ Dat Sg n
8
1:8 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kai dhlwsas kai dEloO

agaphn en agapE en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
Who also declared unto us your love in the Spirit.
THE-one the-one
AND also
making-EVIDENT
to-US
THE
OF-YOU(p) LOVE of-ye hmeras hEmera

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
spirit
1:9 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
af apo
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
hkousamen ou akouO ou
vi Aor Act 1 Pl Part Neg
pauomeqa pauO
vi Pres Mid 1 Pl
THRU this because-of uper huper

Prep
AND also
WE
FROM WHICH
DAY
WE-HEAR
NOT
ARE-CEASING
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai aitoumenoi kai aiteO

Conj vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
ina hina
Conj
plhrwqhte plEroO
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
. For this cause we also, since the day we heard [it], do not cease to pray for you, and to desire that ye might be filled with the knowledge of his will in all wisdom and spiritual understanding;
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye epignwsin epignOsis

n_ Acc Sg f
prayING
AND
REQUESTING
THAT YE-MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED THE ye-may-be-being-filled-full-with sofia sophia

n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
kai sunesei kai sunesis

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
pneumatikh pneumatikos
a_ Dat Sg f
ON-KNOWledge OF-THE realization
WILL
OF-Him
IN
EVERY all eis eis

Prep
WISDOM
AND
understanding spiritual
1:10 peripathsai
peripateO
vn Aor Act
axiws axiOs
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
areskeian en areskeia en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
TO-ABOUT-TREAD WORTHIly OF-THE to-walk agaqw agathos

a_ Dat Sg n
Master Lord
INTO EVERY all th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
PLEASing
IN
EVERY
ACT work
10 That ye might walk worthy of the Lord unto all pleasing, being fruitful in every good work, and increasing in the knowledge of God;
karpoforountes kai auxanomenoi karpophoreO kai auxanO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
epignwsei epignOsis
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
GOOD
FRUIT-CARRYING bearing-fruit pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
AND
beING-GROWN-UP growing
to-THE
ON-KNOWledge OF-THE realization to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
God
1:11 en
en
Prep
dunamei dunamoumenoi kata dunamis dunamoO kata

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep
kratos ths kratos ho

doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
IN
EVERY all eis eis

Prep
ABILITY power pasan pas

a_ Acc Sg f
beING-made-ABLE being-endued upomonhn hupomonE

n_ Acc Sg f
HOLDing might
OF-THE
esteem glory
11 Strengthened with all might, according to his glorious power, unto all patience and longsuffering with joyfulness;
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai makroqumian meta caras kai makrothumia meta chara

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f
OF-Him
INTO EVERY all
UNDER-REMAINing AND endurance patri patEr

n_ Dat Sg m
WITH
JOY
1:12 eucaristountes tw
eucharisteO
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
ikanwsanti hikanoO
vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
thankING giving-thanks merida tou meris ho

to-THE
FATHER
THE
One-making-enough YOU(p) one-making-competent ye en en

Prep
INTO THE
12 . Giving thanks unto Father, which hath made meet to be partakers of inheritance of the saints light:
the us the in
klhrou klEros
n_ Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
fwti phOs
n_ Dat Sg n
PART
OF-THE
LOT allotment
OF-THE
HOLY-ones IN saints ek ek
Prep
THE
LIGHT
1:13 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
errusato rhuomai
vi Aor midD/pasD 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
exousias tou exousia ho

skotous kai skotos kai

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
WHO
rescuES
US
OUT OF-THE
authority jurisdiction uiou huios

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
DARKness
AND
13 Who hath delivered us from the power of darkness, and hath translated [us] into the kingdom of his dear Son:
metesthsen eis methistEmi eis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs autou agapE autos

after-STANDS transports-us
INTO THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
SON
OF-THE
LOVE
OF-Him
1:14 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
apolutrwsin thn apolutrOsis ho

afesin aphesis
n_ Acc Sg f
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
amartiwn hamartia
n_ Gen Pl f
14 In whom we have redemption through his blood, [even] the forgiveness of sins:
IN
WHOM
WE-ARE-HAVING THE
FROM-LOOSening deliverance qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
FROM-LETTing OF-THE pardon aoratou aoratos

a_ Gen Sg m
misses sins
15 Who is the image of the invisible God, the firstborn of every creature:
1:15 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
eikwn eikOn
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WHO
IS
Image
OF-THE
God
THE
UN-SEEN invisible
AV
Colossians 1
prwtotokos prOtotokos
a_ Nom Sg m
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
ktisews ktisis
n_ Gen Sg f
BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH OF-EVERY CREATION firstborn
1:16 oti en
hoti
Conj
en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ektisqh ktizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ouranois kai epi ths ouranos kai epi ho

n_ Dat Pl m Conj Prep t_ Gen Sg f
that
IN
Him
IS-CREATED
THE
ALL
IN
THE
heavens
AND
ON
THE
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
orata horatos
a_ Nom Pl n
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
aorata eite aoratos eite

a_ Nom Pl n Conj
qronoi thronos
n_ Nom Pl m
eite eite
Conj
kuriothtes kuriotEs
n_ Nom Pl f
16 For by him were all things created, that are in heaven, and that are in earth, visible and invisible, whether [they be] thrones, or dominions, or principalities, or powers: all things were created by him, and for him:
LAND earth eite eite

Conj
THE
SEEN visible(p) eite eite

Conj
AND
THE
UN-SEEN invisible(p)
IF-BESIDES THRONES whether panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
IF-BESIDES masterdoms or lordships kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
arcai archE
n_ Nom Pl f
exousiai ta exousia ho
n_ Nom Pl f t_ Nom Pl n
di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
IF-BESIDES ORIGINals IF-BESIDES authorities or sovereignties or ektistai ktizO

vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
THE
ALL
THRU Him through
AND
INTO Him
HAS-been-CREATED
1:17 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
pro pro
Prep
pantwn kai ta pas kai ho

a_ Gen Pl m Conj t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
17 And he is before all things, and by him all things consist.
AND
He
IS
BEFORE ALL
AND
THE
ALL
IN
Him
sunesthken sunistEmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
HAS-TOGETHER-STOOD has-cohesion
1:18 kai autos

kai
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kefalh tou kephalE ho

swmatos ths sOma ho

ekklhsias ekklEsia
n_ Gen Sg f
AND
He
IS
WH
THE
HEAD
OF-THE
BODY
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia nekrwn ina nekros hina

a_ Gen Pl m Conj
18 And he is the head of the body, the church: who is the beginning, the firstborn from the dead; that in all [things] he might have the preeminence.
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
arch archE
n_ Nom Sg f
prwtotokos prOtotokos
a_ Nom Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
WHO
IS
ORIGINal beginning en en
Prep
BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH OUT OF-THE firstborn
DEAD dead-ones
THAT
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
prwteuwn prOteuO
MAY-BE-BECOMING IN
ALL
He
BEFORE-most-beING being-first to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
1:19 oti en
hoti
Conj
en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eudokhsen pan eudokeO pas

vi Aor Act 3 Sg a_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma katoikhsai plErOma katoikeO

n_ Nom Sg n vn Aor Act
19 For it pleased [the Father] that in him should all fulness dwell;
that
IN
Him
WELL-SEEMS delights
EVERY entire
THE
FILLing complement panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
TO-DOWN-HOME to-dwell auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
1:20 kai di
kai
Conj
dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
apokatallaxai ta apokatallassO ho
vn Aor Act t_ Acc Pl n
eis eis
Prep
eirhnopoihsas eirEnopoieO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
AND
THRU Him through
TO-reconcile
THE
ALL
INTO Him
PEACE-making making-peace eite eite

Conj
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n

staurou autou stauros autos

di dia
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
20 And, having made peace through the blood of his cross, by him to reconcile all things unto himself; by him, [I say], whether [they be] things in earth, or things in heaven.
THRU THE through epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
BLOOD
OF-THE
pale cross ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-Him
THRU Him through ouranois ouranos

n_ Dat Pl m
IF-BESIDES THE whether the(p)
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
eite eite
Conj
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ON
OF-THE the
LAND earth
IF-BESIDES THE or the(p) pote ontas pote eimi

Part vp Pres vxx Acc Pl m
IN
THE
heavens
1:21 kai umas

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
aphllotriwmenous kai ecqrous th apallotrioO kai echthros ho

vp Perf Pas Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
dianoia dianoia
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
YOU(p) ye
?-when once
BEING
HAVING-been-estrangED estranged
AND
enemies
to-THE
THRU-MIND comprehension
21 And you, that were sometime alienated and enemies in [your] mind by wicked works, yet now hath he reconciled
AV
Colossians 1
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
ergois tois ergon ho

ponhrois nuni de ponEros nuni de

a_ Dat Pl n Adv Conj
apokathllaxen apokatallassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
IN
THE
ACTS
THE
wicked
NOW
YET He-reconcilES
1:22 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
swmati ths sOma ho

sarkos autou sarx autos

dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou parasthsai thanatos paristEmi

n_ Gen Sg m vn Aor Act
IN
THE
BODY
OF-THE
FLESH
OF-Him
THRU THE through
DEATH
TO-BESIDE-STAND to-present
22 In the body of his flesh through death, to present you holy and unblameable and unreproveable in his sight:
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
kai amwmous kai anegklhtous katenwpion autou kai amOmos kai anegklEtos katenOpion autos
Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m Prep pp Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye
HOLY
AND
UN-FLAWed flawless
AND
UN-indictable unimpeachable
DOWN-IN-VIEW in-sight
OF-Him
1:23 ei
ei
Cond
ge ge
Part
epimenete epimenO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei teqemeliwmenoi kai edraioi kai pistis themelioO kai hedraios kai
n_ Dat Sg f vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Conj a_ Nom Pl m Conj
IF SURELY YE-ARE-ON-REMAINING to-THE since ye-are-persisting mh mE

Part Neg
BELIEF faith
HAVING-been-foundED grounded tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
AND
SETTLED
AND
metakinoumenoi apo metakineO apo

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
euaggeliou ou euaggelion hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Gen Sg n
hkousate akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Pl
NO
beING-after-STIRRED being-removed khrucqentos kErussO

vp Aor Pas Gen Sg n
FROM THE
EXPECTATION OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-WHICH YE-HEAR which upo hupo

Prep
23 If ye continue in the faith grounded and settled, and [be] not moved away from the hope of the gospel, which ye have heard, [and] which was preached to every creature which is under heaven; whereof I Paul am made a minister;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
ktisei ktisis
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ouranon ou ouranos hos

n_ Acc Sg m pr Gen Sg n
THE
one-BEING-PROCLAIMED IN being-heralded egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
EVERY entire
CREATION THE
UNDER THE
heaven
OF-WHICH
egenomhn ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
BECAME
PAUL
THRU-SERVitor dispenser paqhmasin uper pathEma huper

n_ Dat Pl n Prep
1:24 nun cairw

nun
Adv
chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai antanaplhrw kai antanaplEroO

NOW I-AM-JOYING I-am-rejoicing ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
IN
THE
EMOTIONS sufferings qliyewn thlipsis

n_ Gen Pl f
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
I-AM-INSTEAD-UP-FILLING am-filling-up th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
usterhmata twn husterEma ho

n_ Acc Pl n t_ Gen Pl f
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
24 Who now rejoice in my sufferings for you, and fill up that which is behind of the afflictions of Christ in my flesh for his body's sake, which is the church:
THE
WANTS deficiencies tou ho

t_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
CONSTRICTIONS OF-THE afflictions o hos

pr Nom Sg n
IN
THE
FLESH
OF-ME
uper huper
Prep
swmatos autou sOma autos

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Nom Sg f
t_ Nom Sg f
BODY
OF-Him
WHICH
IS
THE
OUT-CALLED ecclesia oikonomian tou oikonomia ho

25 Whereof I am made a minister, according to the dispensation of God which is given to me for you, to fulfil the word of God;
1:25 hs
hos
pr Gen Sg f
egenomhn ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
OF-WHICH BECAME
THRU-SERVitor according-to THE dispenser in-accord-with moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
plhrwsai ton plEroO ho

logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
God
THE
one-BEING-GIVEN to-ME being-granted
INTO YOU(p) ye
TO-FILL to-complete
THE
saying word
OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
God
1:26 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
musthrion to mustErion ho
apokekrummenon apokruptO
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aiwnwn kai apo aiOn kai apo

THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret genewn genea

n_ Gen Pl f
THE
one-HAVING-been-FROM-HID FROM THE having-been-concealed tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
eons
AND
FROM
26 [Even] the mystery which hath been hid from ages and from generations, but now is made manifest to his saints:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
nun de nun de
Adv Conj
efanerwqh phaneroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
generations NOW YET WAS-made-APPEAR to-THE was-made-manifest
HOLY-ones OF-Him saints
AV
Colossians 1 - Colossians 2
1:27 ois
hos
pr Dat Pl m
hqelhsen o thelO ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
gnwrisai gnOrizO
vn Aor Act
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n

to-WHOM WILLS to-whom(p) doxhs doxa

n_ Gen Sg f
THE
God
TO-KNOWize ANY to-make-known what ? tois ho

t_ Dat Pl n
THE
RICHES
OF-THE
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
musthriou toutou en mustErion houtos en

n_ Gen Sg n pd Gen Sg n Prep
eqnesin o ethnos hos

n_ Dat Pl n pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
27 To whom God would make known what [is] the riches of the glory of this mystery among the Gentiles; which is Christ in you, the hope of glory:
esteem glory en en
Prep
OF-THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret elpis elpis
this
IN THE among ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
NATIONS
WHICH
IS
ANOINTED Christ
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
n_ Nom Sg f
IN YOU(p) among ye
THE
EXPECTATION OF-THE
esteem glory nouqetountes panta noutheteO pas

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
1:28 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
hmeis hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
kataggellomen kataggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
anqrwpon kai anthrOpos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
WHOM
WE
ARE-DOWN-MESSAGING admonishING are-announcing anqrwpon en anthrOpos en

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
EVERY
human
AND
28 Whom we preach, warning every man, and teaching every man in all wisdom; that we may present every man perfect in Christ Jesus:
didaskontes panta didaskO pas

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Acc Sg m
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
parasthswmen paristEmi
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
TEACHING
EVERY
human
IN
EVERY all
WISDOM
THAT WE-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-STANDING we-should-be-presenting
panta pas
a_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpon teleion en anthrOpos teleios en

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
EVERY
human
mature
IN
ANOINTED Christ agwnizomenos agOnizomai

1:29 eis
eis
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai kopiw kai kopiaO

kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
energeian autou energeia autos

INTO WHICH
AND also
I-AM-toilING
CONTENDING struggling en en
Prep
IN-ACTion operation
OF-Him
29 Whereunto I also labour, striving according to his working, which worketh in me mightily.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
energoumenhn en energeO en
vp Pres Mid Acc Sg f Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
dunamei dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
THE
IN-ACTING operating
IN
ME
IN
ABILITY power
AV
Colossians 2
2:1 qelw
thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar umas gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Acc Pl
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
hlikon hElikos
a_ Acc Sg m
agwna agOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
uper huper
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai kai
Conj
I-AM-WILLING for
YOU(p) ye
TO-PERCEIVE PRIME stupendous kai osoi kai hosos

Conj pk Nom Pl m
CONTEST struggle
I-AM-HAVING
OVER YOU(p) for-the-sake-of ye proswpon mou prosOpon egO

n_ Acc Sg n
AND
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
laodikeia laodikeia
n_ Dat Sg f
ouc ou
Part Neg
eorakan horaO
vi Perf Act 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
. For I would that ye knew what great conflict I have for you, and [for] them at Laodicea, and [for] as many as have not seen my face in the flesh;
pp 1 Gen Sg
THE-ones the-ones en en
Prep
IN
Laodicea (PEOPLE-JUST) AND Laodicea
as-many-as NOT whoever
HAVE-SEEN
THE
face
OF-ME
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
FLESH
2:2 ina
hina
Conj
paraklhqwsin parakaleO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
ai ho
t_ Nom Pl f
kardiai autwn kardia autos

n_ Nom Pl f pp Gen Pl m
sumbibasqentes sumbibazO
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-BESIDE-CALLED THE may-be-being-consoled kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
HEARTS
OF-them
BEING-TOGETHER-STEPPED IN being-united sunesews eis sunesis eis

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
LOVE
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n

plhroforias ths plErophoria ho

epignwsin epignOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
That their hearts might be comforted, being knit together in love, and unto all riches of the full assurance of understanding, to the acknowledgement of the mystery of God, and of the Father, and of Christ;
AND
INTO EVERY all
RICHES
OF-THE
FULL-wearing assurance cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
understanding
INTO ON-KNOWledge realization
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
musthriou tou mustErion ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret w hos

pr Dat Sg n
OF-THE
God
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
2:3 en
en
Prep
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
qhsauroi thEsauros
n_ Nom Pl m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sofias kai sophia kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
In whom are hid all the treasures of wisdom and knowledge.
IN
WHOM
ARE
ALL
THE
PLACED-INTO-MORROWS OF-THE treasures
WISDOM
AND
gnwsews gnOsis
n_ Gen Sg f
apokrufoi apokruphos
a_ Nom Pl m
OF-KNOWledge FROM-HIDDEN knowledge concealed
2:4 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
mhdeis mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
paralogizhtai paralogizomai
en en
Prep
piqanologia pithanologia
n_ Dat Sg f
this
I-AM-sayING
THAT NO-YET-ONE YOU(p) no-one ye sarki sarx

n_ Dat Sg f
. And this I say, lest any man should beguile you with enticing words.
MAY-BE-beING-BESIDE-accountED IN may-be-beguiling alla tw alla ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg n
PERSUADE-saying persuasive-words umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
5
2:5 ei
ei
Cond
gar kai th gar kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Dat Sg f
apeimi apeimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
pneumati sun pneuma sun

n_ Dat Sg n Prep
IF
for
AND to-THE even cairwn chairO

FLESH
I-AM-FROM-BEING but I-am-being-absent umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
to-THE
spirit
TOGETHER to-YOU(p) togetherwith ye kai to kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg n
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
kai blepwn kai blepO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
taxin taxis
n_ Acc Sg f
For though I be absent in the flesh, yet am I with you in the spirit, joying and beholding your order, and the stedfastness of your faith in Christ.
I-AM
JOYING rejoicing eis eis

Prep
AND
lookING observing
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
order
AND
THE
sterewma ths stereOma ho

criston pistews umwn christos pistis humeis

n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f pp 2 Gen Pl
SOLIDity stability
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) of-ye ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
2:6 ws oun
hOs
Adv
oun
Conj
parelabete ton paralambanO ho

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m

kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
As ye have therefore received Christ Jesus the Lord, [so] walk ye in him:
AS
THEN YE-BESIDE-GOT ye-accepted
THE
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
master Lord
IN
Him
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING be-ye-walking !
2:7 errizwmenoi
rizoO
kai epoikodomoumenoi en kai epoikodomeO en

Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai bebaioumenoi th kai bebaioO ho

Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
HAVING-been-ROOTED AND
beING-ON-HOME-BUILT being-built-up
IN
Him
AND
beING-confirmED
to-THE
Rooted and built up in him, and stablished in the faith, as ye have been taught, abounding therein with thanksgiving.
AV
Colossians 2
pistei kaqws pistis kathOs

n_ Dat Sg f Adv
edidacqhte didaskO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
perisseuontes perisseuO
WH
en auth
WH
en en
Prep
eucaristia eucharistia
n_ Dat Sg f
BELIEF faith
according-AS YE-WERE-TAUGHT exceedING superabounding mh mE

Part Neg
IN
thanking thanksgiving dia dia

Prep
2:8 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sulagwgwn sulagOgeO
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
YE-BE-lookING NO be-ye-bewaring !
ANY anyone
YOU(p) ye
SHALL-BE
THE
one-LEADING-ATTACHED THRU THE one-despoiling through paradosin twn paradosis ho

Beware lest any man spoil you through philosophy and vain deceit, after the tradition of men, after the rudiments of the world, and not after Christ.
filosofias kai kenhs philosophia kai kenos

n_ Gen Sg f Conj a_ Gen Sg f
apaths kata apatE kata

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
FOND-WISDOM philosophy kata kata

Prep
AND
EMPTY
SEDUCtion
according-to THE in-accord-with kosmou kosmos

n_ Gen Sg m
tradition
OF-THE
humans
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
stoiceia tou stoicheion ho

kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
kata kata
Prep
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
elements
OF-THE
SYSTEM world pan pas

a_ Nom Sg n
AND
NOT
according-to ANOINTED in-accord-with Christ qeothtos theotEs

n_ Gen Sg f
9
2:9 oti en
hoti
Conj
en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
katoikei katoikeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
plhrwma ths plErOma ho

For in him dwelleth all the fulness of the Godhead bodily.
that
IN
Him
IS-DOWN-HOMING EVERY is-dwelling entire
THE
FILLing complement
OF-THE
deity
swmatikws sOmatikOs
Adv
BODily
2:10 kai este

kai
Conj
eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
peplhrwmenoi os plEroO hos

vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kefalh kephalE
n_ Nom Sg f
10 And ye are complete in him, which is the head of all principality and power:
AND
YE-ARE
IN
Him
HAVING-been-FILLED WHO complete
IS
THE
HEAD
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
archs archE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai exousias kai exousia

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
OF-EVERY ORIGINal AND sovereignty
authority
2:11 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
kai perietmhqhte kai peritemnO

peritomh peritomE
n_ Dat Sg f
aceiropoihtw en acheiropoiEtos en
a_ Dat Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
IN
WHOM
AND also tou ho
YE-WERE-ABOUT-CUT to-ABOUT-CUTTing UN-HAND-made ye-were-circumcised to-circumcision not-made-by-hands swmatos ths sOma ho

IN
THE
apekdusei apekdusis
n_ Dat Sg f
sarkos en sarx en
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
peritomh peritomE
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
11 In whom also ye are circumcised with the circumcision made without hands, in putting off the body of the sins of the flesh by the circumcision of Christ:
t_ Gen Sg n
FROM-OUT-SLIPPing OF-THE stripping-off cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
BODY
OF-THE
FLESH
IN
THE
ABOUT-CUTTing OF-THE circumcision
ANOINTED Christ
2:12 suntafentes
sunthaptO
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
WH
baptismati
NA
baptismw baptismos
n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
BEING-TOGETHER-entombED to-Him being-entombed-together with-him kai sunhgerqhte kai sunegeirO

IN
THE
DIPPing baptism pistews ths pistis ho

IN
WHICH
12 Buried with him in baptism, wherein also ye are risen with [him] through the faith of the operation of God, who hath raised him from the dead.
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
energeias tou energeia ho

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND also tou ho
YE-WERE-TOGETHER-ROUSED THRU THE ye-were-roused-together through egeirantos egeirO

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
BELIEF faith
OF-THE
IN-ACTion operation
OF-THE
God
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
t_ Gen Sg m
THE
Him

NA
2:13 kai umas

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
nekrous ontas nekros eimi

a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres vxx Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
paraptwmasin kai th paraptOma kai ho

n_ Dat Pl n Conj t_ Dat Sg f
AND also
YOU(p) ye
DEAD
BEING
IN
THE
AND
to-THE the
13 . And you, being dead in your sins and the uncircumcision of your flesh, hath he quickened together with him, having forgiven you
AV
Colossians 2
akrobustia ths akrobustia ho

sarkos umwn sarx humeis

sunezwopoihsen suzOopoieO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
sun sun
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
all trespasses;
uncircumcision
OF-THE
FLESH
OF-YOU(p) He-TOGETHER-makES-LIVE YOU(p) of-ye he-vivifies-together ye ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
TOGETHER to-Him with-him
carisamenos charizomai
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
paraptwmata paraptOma
n_ Acc Pl n
gracing to-US dealing-graciously-with us
ALL
THE
BESIDE-FALLS offenses ceirografon tois cheirographon ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Dat Pl n
2:14 exaleiyas
exaleiphO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kaq kata
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
dogmasin o dogma hos

n_ Dat Pl n pr Nom Sg n
OUT-RUBBing erasing hn eimi

vi impf vxx 3 Sg
THE
DOWN OF-US against us hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
HAND-WRITing handwriting hrken airO
to-THE
decrees
WHICH
14 Blotting out the handwriting of ordinances that was against us, which was contrary to us, and took it out of the way, nailing it to his cross;
upenantion hupenantios
a_ Nom Sg n
kai auto kai autos

Conj pp Acc Sg n
ek ek
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
mesou mesos
a_ Gen Sg n
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
WAS
UNDER-IN-INSTEAD to-US hostile tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
AND
it
HAS-LIFTED OUT OF-THE has-taken-away
MIDst
proshlwsas auto prosEloO autos

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg n
staurw stauros
n_ Dat Sg m
TOWARD-NAILing nailing-to
it
to-THE
pale cross arcas archE

n_ Acc Pl f
2:15 apekdusamenos tas

apekduomai
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
exousias edeigmatisen exousia deigmatizO

en en
Prep
FROM-OUT-SLIPPing stripping-off
THE
ORIGINals AND sovereignties
THE
authorities
He-SHOWizES IN he-makes-a-show-of-them
15 [And] having spoiled principalities and powers, he made a shew of them openly, triumphing over them in it.
parrhsia qriambeusas parrhEsia thriambeuO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
autous en autos en
pp Acc Pl m Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
boldness
TRIUMPHing triumphing-over oun oun

Conj
them
IN
it
2:16 mh
mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
krinetw krinO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
brwsei kai en brOsis kai en

posei posis
n_ Dat Sg f
h E
Part
en en
Prep
NO
THEN ANY anyone eorths heortE

n_ Gen Sg f
YOU(p) ye neomhnias neomEnia

n_ Gen Sg f
LET-BE-JUDGING IN let-him-be-judging ! h E
Part
FEEDing food
AND
IN
DRINKing drink
OR
IN
16 . Let no man therefore judge you in meat, or in drink, or in respect of an holyday, or of the new moon, or of the sabbath [days]:
merei meros
n_ Dat Sg n
h E
Part
sabbatwn sabbaton
n_ Gen Pl n
PART particulars
OF-FESTIVAL OR
OF-YOUNG-MONTH OR of-new-moon skia skia

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-SABBATHS
2:17 a
hos
pr Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
mellontwn mellO
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
17 Which are a shadow of things to come; but the body [is] of Christ.
WHICH which(p) cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
IS
SHADE shadow
OF-THE
beING-ABOUT things-impending
THE
YET BODY
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
2:18 mhdeis
mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
katabrabeuetw katabrabeuO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
qelwn thelO
en en
Prep
tapeinofrosunh kai tapeinophrosunE kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
NO-YET-ONE YOU(p) no-one ye qrhskeia twn thrEskeia ho

LET-BE-DOWN-UMPIRING WILLING let-him-be-arbitrating-against ! a hos

pr Acc Pl n
IN
humility
AND
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
eoraken horaO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
embateuwn embateuO
eikh eikE
Adv
fusioumenos phusioO
18 Let no man beguile you of your reward in a voluntary humility and worshipping of angels, intruding into those things which he hath not seen, vainly puffed up by his fleshly mind,
RITUAL
OF-THE
MESSENGERS WHICH which(p) ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
he-HAS-SEEN IN-STEPPING to-parade
SIMULATEly beING-INFLATED feignedly being-puffed-up
upo hupo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
sarkos autou sarx autos

UNDER THE by
MIND
OF-THE
FLESH
OF-him
2:19 kai ou
kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
kratwn krateO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kefalhn ex kephalE ek
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
swma sOma
n_ Nom Sg n
AND
NOT
HOLDING
THE
HEAD
OUT OF-WHOM
EVERY entire
THE
BODY
19 And not holding the Head, from which all the body by joints and bands having nourishment ministered, and knit together, increaseth with
AV
dia dia
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
afwn haphE
n_ Gen Pl f
kai sundesmwn kai sundesmos

Conj n_ Gen Pl m
epicorhgoumenon kai sumbibazomenon epichorEgeO kai sumbibazO

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
the increase of God.
THRU THE through auxei auxanO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
TOUCH AND assimilation thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
TOGETHER-BONDS beING-suppliED ligaments qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
beING-TOGETHER-STEPizED being-united
auxhsin tou auxEsis ho

IS-GROWING
THE in-the
GROWTH
OF-THE
God
2:20 ei
ei
Cond
apeqanete sun apothnEskO sun

cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
stoiceiwn tou stoicheion ho

kosmou kosmos
n_ Gen Sg m
IF
YE-FROM-DIED ye-died ws zwntes hOs zaO

Adv
TOGETHER to-ANOINTED FROM THE with-Christ en en

Prep
elements
OF-THE
SYSTEM world
20 Wherefore if ye be dead with Christ from the rudiments of the world, why, as though living in the world, are ye subject to ordinances,
ti tis
pi Acc Sg n
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
dogmatizesqe dogmatizO
vi Pres Pas 2 Pl
ANY why ?
AS
LIVING
IN
SYSTEM world mhde mEde

Conj
YE-ARE-beING-decreED ye-are-being-subject-to-decrees geush geuomai

vs Aor midD 2 Sg
2:21 mh
mE
Part Neg
ayh haptO
vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
mhde mEde
Conj
qighs thigganO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Sg
21 (Touch not; handle not;
taste
not;
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-TOUCHING NO-YET SHOULD-BE-TASTING NO-YET YOU-MAY-BE-IMPINGING nor-yet you-should-be-tasting nor-yet you-may-be-coming-into-contact estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
2:22 a
hos
pr Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
eis eis
Prep
fqoran phthora
n_ Acc Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
apocrhsei kata apochrEsis kata

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
WHICH IS which-things
ALL
INTO CORRUPtion to-THE
FROM-USE use
22 Which all are to perish with the using;) after the commandments and doctrines of men?
entalmata kai didaskalias twn entalma kai didaskalia ho

n_ Acc Pl n Conj n_ Acc Pl f t_ Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
directions
AND
TEACHings
OF-THE
humans
2:23 atina
hostis
pr Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
men men
Part
econta echO
sofias sophia
n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
eqeloqrhskia kai ethelorEskia kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
WHICH-ANY IS which-any(p) tapeinofrosunh tapeinophrosunE

n_ Dat Sg f
saying expression kai kai

Conj
INDEED HAVING
OF-WISDOM IN
WILL-RITUAL wilful-ritual pros pros

Prep
AND
afeidia apheidia
n_ Dat Sg f
swmatos ouk sOma ou

en en
Prep
timh timE
n_ Dat Sg f
tini tis
px Dat Sg f
23 Which things have indeed a shew of wisdom in will worship, and humility, and neglecting of the body; not in any honour to the satisfying of the flesh.
humility
AND
UN-SPARing OF-BODY not-sparing
NOT
IN
VALUE
ANY
TOWARD
plhsmonhn plEsmonE
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
sarkos sarx
n_ Gen Sg f
FULL-REMAINing OF-THE surfeiting
FLESH
AV
Colossians 3
3:1 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
sunhgerqhte sunegeirO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
cristw ta christos ho
n_ Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl n
anw zhteite anO zEteO

ou hou
Adv
IF
THEN YE-WERE-TOGETHER-ROUSED to-THE ye-were-roused-togetherwith the cristos estin christos eimi

ANOINTED Christ tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE the(p)
UP above
YE-BE-SEEKING where be-ye-seeking !
. If ye then be risen with Christ, seek those things which are above, where Christ sitteth on the right hand of God.
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kaqhmenos kathEmai
THE
ANOINTED Christ
IS
IN
RIGHT right-hand mh mE
Part Neg
OF-THE
God
sittING
3:2 ta
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
anw froneite anO phroneO

ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
Set your affection on things above, not on things on the earth.
THE the(p)
UP above
BE-YE-beING-DISPOSed NO be-ye-being-disposed ! zwh zOE

n_ Nom Sg f
THE the(p) umwn humeis
ON
OF-THE the
LAND earth tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
3:3 apeqanete gar kai h

apothnEskO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
gar
Conj
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kekruptai sun kruptO sun

cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
For ye are dead, and your life is hid with Christ in God.
pp 2 Gen Pl
YE-FROM-DIED ye-died en en
Prep
for
AND
THE
LIFE
OF-YOU(p) HAS-been-HID of-ye
ANOINTED Christ
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
IN
THE
God
WH NA
3:4 otan
hotan
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
cristos fanerwqh christos phaneroO

n_ Nom Sg m vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
zwh zOE
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
when-EVER THE whenever tote kai umeis tote kai humeis

ANOINTED Christ sun sun

Prep
MAY-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR THE may-be-being-manifested autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
LIFE
OF-YOU(p) of-ye doxh doxa

n_ Dat Sg f
When Christ, [who is] our life, shall appear, then shall ye also appear with him in glory.
fanerwqhsesqe phaneroO
vi Fut Pas 2 Pl
en en
Prep
then
AND also
YOU(p) ye
TOGETHER to-Him with-him ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
SHALL-BE-BEING-made-APPEAR IN shall-be-manifested ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
esteem glory porneian porneia

n_ Acc Sg f
3:5 nekrwsate oun

nekroO
vm Aor Act 2 Pl
oun
Conj
melh melos
n_ Acc Pl n
epi ths epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg f
ghs gE
n_ Gen Sg f
akaqarsian akatharsia
n_ Acc Sg f
make-YE-DEAD deaden-ye ! paqos pathos

n_ Acc Sg n
THEN THE
MEMBERS THE
ON
OF-THE the
LAND earth
PROSTITUTION UN-cleanness uncleanness estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
epiqumian kakhn epithumia kakos

kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
pleonexian htis pleonexia hostis

eidwlolatria eidOlolatreia
n_ Nom Sg f
. Mortify therefore your members which are upon the earth; fornication, uncleanness, inordinate affection, evil concupiscence, and covetousness, which is idolatry:
EMOTION passion
ON-FEELing desire a hos

pr Acc Pl n
EVIL
AND
THE
MORE-HAVing greed orgh orgE

n_ Nom Sg f
WHICH-ANY IS which-any tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
idolatry
NA NA
3:6 di
dia
Prep
ercetai erchomai
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
epi tous epi ho

Prep t_ Acc Pl m
For which things'sake the wrath of God cometh on the children of disobedience:
THRU WHICH because-of which(p)

NA
IS-COMING
THE
INDIGNATION OF-THE
God
ON
THE
uious huios
n_ Acc Pl m
NA
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
NA
apeiqeias apeitheia
n_ Gen Sg f
SONS
OF-THE
UN-PERSUADableness stubbornness kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
3:7 en
en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl m
periepathsate pote ote ezhte peripateO pote hote zaO

vi Aor Act 2 Pl Part Adv vi impf Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
toutois houtos
pd Dat Pl n
IN WHOM among whom(p)
AND also
YOU(p) ye
In the which ye also walked some time, when ye lived in them.
ABOUT-TREAD walk kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
?-when once ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
when
YE-LIVED
IN
these these-things kakian kakia

n_ Acc Sg f
8
3:8 nuni de
nuni
Adv
de
Conj
apoqesqe apotithEmi
vm 2Aor Mid 2 Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
qumon thumos
n_ Acc Sg m
NOW
YET BE-FROM-PLACING AND be-ye-putting-away ! also aiscrologian ek aischrologia ek

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
YOU(p) ye tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
THE
ALL all-these
INDIGNATION fury anger
EVIL malice
. But now ye also put off all these; anger, wrath, malice, blasphemy, filthy communication out of your mouth.
blasfhmian blasphEmia
n_ Acc Sg f
stomatos umwn stoma humeis

HARM-AVERment VILE-saying calumny obscenity
OUT OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-YOU(p) of-ye palaion anqrwpon palaios anthrOpos

9
3:9 mh
mE
Part Neg
yeudesqe pseudomai
vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
allhlous apekdusamenoi ton allElOn apekduomai ho

pc Acc Pl m vp Aor midD Nom Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
Lie not one to another, seeing that ye have put off the old man with his deeds;
NO
BE-YE-FALSifyING INTO one-another be-ye-lying !
FROM-OUT-SLIPPing stripping-off
THE
OLD
human
AV
Colossians 3
sun sun
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
praxesin autou praxis autos

n_ Dat Pl f pp Gen Sg m
PRACTISings OF-SAME practices of-him neon neos

a_ Acc Sg m
3:10 kai endusamenoi ton

kai
Conj
enduO
vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
anakainoumenon eis anakainoO eis

vp Pres Pas Acc Sg m Prep
epignwsin epignOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
AND
IN-SLIPPing putting-on eikona tou eikOn ho

n_ Acc Sg f
THE
YOUNG
THE
one-beING-UP-NEW-ED being-renewed
INTO ON-KNOWledge recognition
10 And have put on the new [man], which is renewed in knowledge after the image of him that created him:
kat kata
Prep
ktisantos ktizO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
t_ Gen Sg m
according-to image to-accord-with
OF-THE
One-CREATing one-creating ellhn hellEn

n_ Nom Sg m
SAME him kai ioudaios peritomh kai ioudaios peritomE

Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg f
3:11 opou
hopou
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
eni eni
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kai akrobustia kai akrobustia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
THE-?-where NOT wheree barbaros skuqhs barbaros skuthEs

IN-IS there-is-in doulos doulos

n_ Nom Sg m
GREEK
AND
JUDA-an Jew
NA
ABOUT-CUTTing AND Circumcision ta ho

t_ Nom Pl n
uncircumcision
11 Where there is neither Greek nor Jew, circumcision nor uncircumcision, Barbarian, Scythian, bond [nor] free: but Christ [is] all, and in all.
eleuqeros alla eleutheros alla

a_ Nom Sg m Conj
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
BARBARIAN
SCYTHIAN
SLAVE
FREE
but
THE
ALL
AND
IN
ALL
cristos christos
n_ Nom Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
3:12 endusasqe oun

enduO
vm Aor Mid 2 Pl
oun
Conj
ws eklektoi tou hOs eklektos ho

Adv a_ Nom Pl m t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
agioi hagios
a_ Nom Pl m
kai hgaphmenoi kai agapaO

IN-SLIP-YE put-on-ye !
THEN AS
chosen chosen(p)
OF-THE
God
HOLY-ones AND holy
HAVING-been-LOVED beloved
12 . Put on therefore, as the elect of God, holy and beloved, bowels of mercies, kindness, humbleness of mind, meekness, longsuffering;
splagcna oiktirmou crhstothta tapeinofrosunhn prauthta makroqumian splagchnon oiktirmos chrEstotEs tapeinophrosunE prautEs makrothumia
n_ Acc Pl n n_ Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
compassions
OF-PITY
kindness
humility
MEEKness
FAR-FEELing patience ean ean

Cond
3:13 anecomenoi
anechomai
allhlwn allElOn
pc Gen Pl m
kai carizomenoi kai charizomai

eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
toleratING bearing-with pros pros

Prep
OF-one-another AND one-another ech echO

vs Pres Act 3 Sg
gracING dealing-graciously kai o kai ho

Conj
to-selves IF-EVER ANY among-yourselves anyone kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
13 Forbearing one another, and forgiving one another, if any man have a quarrel against any: even as Christ forgave you, so also [do] ye.
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
momfhn kaqws momphE kathOs

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
ecarisato charizomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD ANY anyone umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
MAY-BE-HAVING BLAME complaint
THE
Master Lord
gracES deals-graciously-with
outws kai umeis houtOs kai humeis

to-YOU(p) ye
thus
AND also de de
Conj
YOU(p) ye toutois thn houtos ho

pd Dat Pl n t_ Acc Sg f
3:14 epi
epi
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
agaphn o agapE hos

n_ Acc Sg f pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
sundesmos sundesmos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
14 And above all these things [put on] charity, which is the bond of perfectness.
ON ALL onover teleiothtos teleiotEs

n_ Gen Sg f
YET to-these these
THE
LOVE
WHICH
IS
TOGETHER-BOND OF-THE tie
maturity
3:15 kai h
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou brabeuetw christos brabeuO

n_ Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

AND
THE
PEACE
OF-THE
Prep
WH
LET-BE-UMPIRING IN let-her-be-arbitrating !
NA
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
15 And let the peace of God rule in your hearts, to the which also ye are called in one body; and be ye thankful.
eis eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
kai eklhqhte kai kaleO

eni
eni heis
n_ Dat Sg n
swmati kai eucaristoi sOma kai eucharistos

n_ Dat Sg n Conj a_ Nom Pl m
INTO WHICH
AND also
YE-WERE-CALLED IN
ONE
BODY
AND
thankful-ones thankful
AV
Colossians 3
ginesqe ginomai
3:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou enoikeitw christos enoikeO

n_ Gen Sg m vm Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
plousiws en plousiOs en
Adv Prep
THE
saying word sofia sophia

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
LET-BE-IN-HOMING IN let-him-be-indwelling !
YOU(p) ye
RICHly
IN
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
didaskontes kai nouqetountes eautous yalmois umnois wdais didaskO kai noutheteO heautou psalmos humnos OdE
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pf 3 Acc Pl m n_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl f
16 Let the word of Christ dwell in you richly in all wisdom; teaching and admonishing one another in psalms and hymns and spiritual songs, singing with grace in your hearts to the Lord.
EVERY all
WISDOM
TEACHING
NA
AND
admonishING
selves yourselves en en
Prep
to-psalms
HYMNS to-hymns
SONGS to-songs
pneumatikais en pneumatikos en
a_ Dat Pl f Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti adontes charis adO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f

spiritual
IN
THE
grace
SINGING
IN
THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
God
3:17 kai pan

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Acc Sg n
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
poihte poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
h E
Part
en en
Prep
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
AND
EVERY everything en en
Prep
WHICH
ANY
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-DOING IN
saying word
OR
IN
ACT
17 And whatsoever ye word or deed, [do] all name of the Lord Jesus, thanks to God and the by him.
do in in the giving Father
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
eucaristountes tw eucharisteO ho
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
di dia
Prep
ALL
IN
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
JESUS
thankING giving-thanks
to-THE
God
FATHER
THRU through
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
Him
3:18 ai
ho
t_ Nom Pl f
gunaikes upotassesqe gunE hupotassO

n_ Nom Pl f vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
andrasin ws anhken anEr hOs anEkO

n_ Dat Pl m Adv vi impf Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
18 . Wives, submit yourselves unto your own husbands, as it is fit in the Lord.
THE
WOMEN wives andres anEr

n_ Nom Pl m
BE-YE-beING-UNDER-SET to-THE be-ye-being-subject ! agapate agapaO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
MEN husbands
AS
proper is-proper
IN
Master Lord pros pros

Prep
19 Husbands, love [your] wives, and be not bitter against them.
3:19 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
gunaikas kai mh gunE kai mE

n_ Acc Pl f Conj Part Neg
pikrainesqe pikrainO
vm Pres Pas 2 Pl
THE
MEN husbands
THE
WOMEN wives
AND
NO
BE-YE-beING-BITTER TOWARD be-ye-being-bitter !
autas autos
pp Acc Pl f
them
3:20 ta
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Nom Pl n

goneusin kata goneus kata

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar gar
Conj
20 Children, obey [your] parents in all things: for this is well pleasing unto the Lord.
THE
offsprings children estin eimi
BE-obeyING be-ye-obeying ! en en
Prep
to-THE the
parents
this
for
euareston euarestos
a_ Nom Sg n
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
WELL-PLEASing IS
IN
Master Lord ereqizete erethizO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
3:21 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
pateres mh patEr mE
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
FATHERS
NO
BE-YE-STRIVING THE be-ye-provoking !
offsprings children
OF-YOU(p) THAT NO of-ye
21 Fathers, provoke not your children [to anger], lest they be discouraged.
aqumwsin athumeO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-UN-FEELING they-may-be-being-disheartened
AV
3:22 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
upakouete kata hupakouO kata

vm Pres Act 2 Pl Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kata kata
Prep
sarka sarx
n_ Acc Sg f
kuriois kurios
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
SLAVES
WH
BE-obeyING be-ye-obeying !

NA
to-THE the
according-to FLESH
masters
22 Servants, obey in all things [your] masters according to the flesh; not with eyeservice, as menpleasers; but in singleness of heart, fearing God:
mh mE
Part Neg
en en
Prep
ofqalmodouliais
ofqalmodoulia ophthalmodoulia
n_ Dat Sg f
ws anqrwpareskoi all en hOs anthrOpareskos alla en

Adv a_ Nom Pl m Conj Prep
NO
IN
eye-SLAVery
AS
human-PLEASErs
but
IN
aplothti haplotEs
n_ Dat Sg f
kardias foboumenoi kardia phobeO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
UN-COMPOUND OF-HEART singleness
FEARING
THE
Master Lord ergazesqe ergazomai

3:23 o
hos
pr Acc Sg n
ean ean
Cond
poihte poieO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
ek ek
Prep
yuchs psuchE
n_ Gen Sg f
ws tw hOs ho
Adv t_ Dat Sg m
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
23 And whatsoever ye do, do [it] heartily, as to the Lord, and not unto men;
WHICH
IF-EVER YE-MAY-BE-DOING OUT OF-soul
BE-YE-ACTING be-ye-working !
AS
to-THE
Master Lord
AND
ouk ou
Part Neg
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
NOT
to-humans
3:24 eidotes
eidO
oti apo hoti apo

Conj Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
apolhmyesqe apolambanO
vi Fut midD 2 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
antapodosin antapodosis
n_ Acc Sg f

t_ Gen Sg f
FROM Master Lord tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
YE-SHALL-BE-FROM-GETTING THE ye-shall-be-getting cristw douleuete christos douleuO

repaying compensation
24 Knowing that of the Lord ye shall receive the reward of the inheritance: for ye serve the Lord Christ.
n_ Gen Sg f
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
tenancy to-THE enjoyment-of-an-allotment gar adikwn gar adikeO

Master Lord komisetai komizO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
ANOINTED Christ
YE-ARE-SLAVING
3:25 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
hdikhsen kai ouk adikeO kai ou

THE
for
one-injurING one-injuring
SHALL-BE-beING-requitED WHICH shall-be-being-requited-for
he-injurES
AND
NOT
25 But he that doeth wrong shall receive for the wrong which he hath done: and there is no respect of persons.
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
proswpolhmyia prosOpolEpsia
n_ Nom Sg f
IS there-is
partiality
AV
Colossians 4
4:1 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kurioi kurios
n_ Nom Pl m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
dikaion kai thn dikaios kai ho

a_ Acc Sg n Conj t_ Acc Sg f
isothta tois isotEs ho

doulois parecesqe doulos parechO

n_ Dat Pl m vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
THE
masters
THE
JUST
AND
THE
EQUALity equitable en en
Prep
to-THE
SLAVES
BE-tenderING be-ye-tendering !
. Masters, give unto [your] servants that which is just and equal; knowing that ye also have a Master in heaven.
eidotes eidO
oti kai umeis hoti kai humeis

Conj Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ouranw ouranos
n_ Dat Sg m
AND also
YOU(p) ye
ARE-HAVING Master
IN
heaven
4:2 th
ho
t_ Dat Sg f
proseuch proskartereite proseuchE proskartereO

n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Pl
grhgorountes en grEgoreO en
auth autos
pp Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
eucaristia eucharistia
n_ Dat Sg f
. Continue in prayer, and watch in the same with thanksgiving;
to-THE
prayer
BE-YE-TOWARD-HOLDING watchING be-ye-persevering ! ama hama

Adv
IN
SAME herit o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
IN
3
4:3 proseucomenoi
proseuchomai
kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
prayING
SIMULTANEOUS AND at-the-same-time also hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
ABOUT US concerning logou logos

n_ Gen Sg m
THAT THE
God
Withal praying also for us, that God would open unto us a door of utterance, to speak the mystery of Christ, for which I am also in bonds:
anoixh anoigO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
quran thura
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
lalhsai to laleO ho

SHOULD-BE-UP-OPENING to-US should-be-opening cristou di christos dia

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
DOOR
OF-THE
saying word
TO-TALK to-speak
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret
OF-THE
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai dedemai kai deO

ANOINTED Christ
THRU WHICH because-of fanerwsw phaneroO

vs Aor Act 1 Sg
AND also
I-HAVE-been-BOUND
4:4 ina
hina
Conj
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ws dei hOs deO

me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
lalhsai laleO
vn Aor Act
That I may make it manifest, as I ought to speak.
THAT I-SHOULD-BE-makING-APPEAR it I-should-be-making-manifest
AS
IS-BINDING it-is-binding tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
ME
TO-TALK to-speak kairon kairos

n_ Acc Sg m
4:5 en
en
Prep
sofia sophia
n_ Dat Sg f
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
pros pros
Prep
exw exO
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
exagorazomenoi exagorazO
. Walk in wisdom toward them that are without, redeeming the time.
IN
WISDOM
BE-YE-ABOUT-TREADING TOWARD THE-ones be-ye-walking ! the-ones umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
OUT THE outside
SEASON era hrtumenos artuO
OUT-BUYING reclaiming eidenai eidO

vn Perf Act
6
4:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
pantote en pantote en
Adv Prep
cariti alati charis halas

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg n
THE
saying word
OF-YOU(p) always of-ye umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
IN
grace
to-SALT
HAVING-been-seasonED TO-PERCEIVE seasoned
Let your speech [be] alway with grace, seasoned with salt, that ye may know how ye ought to answer every man.
pws dei pOs deO

eni heis
n_ Dat Sg m
ekastw apokrinesqai hekastos apokrinomai

a_ Dat Sg m vn Pres midD/pasD
how
IS-BINDING it-is-binding kat kata

Prep
YOU(p) ye eme egO
to-ONE one
to-EACH each
TO-be-answerING
4:7 ta
ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
gnwrisei gnOrizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tucikos o tuchikos ho
pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
ALL
SHALL-BE-KNOWizING to-YOU(p) shall-be-making-known to-ye diakonos diakonos

n_ Nom Sg m
Tychicus
THE
. All my state shall Tychicus declare unto you, [who is] a beloved brother, and a faithful minister and fellowservant in the Lord:
agaphtos adelfos kai pistos agapEtos adelphos kai pistos

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
kai sundoulos kai sundoulos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
beLOVED
brother
AND
BELIEVing faithful umas humeis
THRU-SERVitor AND servant eis eis

Prep
TOGETHER-SLAVE IN fellow-slave touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
Master Lord ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
8
4:8 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
epemya pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
pros pros
Prep
auto autos
pp Acc Sg n
ina hina
Conj
gnwte ginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
pp 2 Acc Pl
WHOM
I-SEND
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
INTO SAME this same-thing tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THAT YE-MAY-BE-KNOWING THE the(p)
Whom I have sent unto you for the same purpose, that he might know your estate, and comfort your hearts;
peri peri
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai parakalesh kai parakaleO


ABOUT US concerning
AND
he-SHOULD-BE-BESIDE-CALLING THE he-should-be-consoling tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
9
4:9 sun
sun
Prep
onhsimw onEsimos
n_ Dat Sg m
pistw pistos
a_ Dat Sg m
kai agaphtw adelfw os kai agapEtos adelphos hos

Conj a_ Dat Sg m n_ Dat Sg m pr Nom Sg m
TOGETHER to-Onesimus (PROFITable) THE with-Onesimus
BELIEVing faithful
AND
beLOVED
brother
WHO
With Onesimus, a faithful and beloved brother, who is [one] of you. They shall make known unto you all things which [are done] here.
AV
Colossians 4
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
gnwrisousin gnOrizO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
wde hOde
Adv
IS
OUT OF-YOU(p) ALL of-ye all-things umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THEY-SHALL-BE-KNOWizING THE they-shall-be-making-known the(p)
here
4:10 aspazetai
aspazomai
aristarcos o aristarchos ho
sunaicmalwtos mou sunaichmalOtos egO

a_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
kai markos kai markos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
IS-greetING
YOU(p) ye
Aristarchus
THE
TOGETHER-captive fellow-captive elabete lambanO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-ME
AND
Mark
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aneyios barnaba anepsios barnabas

peri peri
Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
entolas ean entolE ean

n_ Acc Pl f Cond
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
10 Aristarchus my fellowprisoner saluteth you, and Marcus, sister's son to Barnabas, (touching whom ye received commandments: if he come unto you, receive him;)
THE
COUSIN
OF-Barnabas ABOUT WHOM concerning dexasqe dechomai

vm Aor midD 2 Pl
YE-GOT ye-obtained
directions
IF-EVER he-MAY-BE-COMING
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
RECEIVE-YE receive-ye ! o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
him
4:11 kai ihsous

kai
Conj
iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
legomenos legO
ioustos oi ioustos ho
n_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Pl m
ontes eimi
ek ek
Prep
AND
JESUS
THE
one-beING-said one-being-said monoi monos

a_ Nom Pl m
JUSTUS
THE
OUT
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
outoi houtos
pd Nom Pl m
sunergoi sunergos
a_ Nom Pl m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
11 And Jesus, which is called Justus, who are of the circumcision. These only [are my] fellowworkers unto the kingdom of God, which have been a comfort unto me.
OF-ABOUT-CUTTing these of-Circumcision oitines egenhqhsan hostis ginomai

pr Nom Pl m vi Aor pasD 3 Pl
ONLY
TOGETHER-ACTers INTO THE fellow-workers parhgoria parEgoria

n_ Nom Sg f
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
WHO-ANY who-any
WERE-BECOMED to-ME were-become umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
solace
WH
4:12 aspazetai
aspazomai
epafras o epaphras ho
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou
IS-greetING
NA
YOU(p) ye
EPAPHRAS
THE the-one
OUT OF-YOU(p) SLAVE of-ye uper huper

Prep
OF-ANOINTED of-Christ tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
pantote agwnizomenos pantote agOnizomai

umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
proseucais proseuchE
n_ Dat Pl f
12 Epaphras, who is [one] of you, a servant of Christ, saluteth you, always labouring fervently for you in prayers, that ye may stand perfect and complete in all the will of God.
JESUS
always
CONTENDING struggling
IN
THE
prayers
ina hina
Conj
staqhte histEmi
vs Aor Pas 2 Pl
teleioi kai peplhroforhmenoi en teleios kai plErophoreO en

a_ Nom Pl m Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
qelhmati tou thelEma ho

THAT YE-MAY-BE-BEING-STOOD mature ye-may-be-standing qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
AND
HAVING-been-FULL-worn being-fully-assured
IN
EVERY all
WILL
OF-THE
God
4:13 marturw
martureO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar autw gar autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
oti ecei hoti echO

polun polus
a_ Acc Sg m
ponon ponos
n_ Acc Sg m

Prep pp 2 Gen Pl
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
I-AM-witnessING for I-am-testifying en en

Prep
to-him
that
he-IS-HAVING much
MISERY
OVER
YOU(p) ye
AND
OF-THE the-ones
13 For I bear him record, that he hath a great zeal for you, and them [that are] in Laodicea, and them in Hierapolis.
laodikeia laodikeia
n_ Dat Sg f
kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
ierapolei hierapolis
n_ Dat Sg f
IN
Laodicea (PEOPLE-JUST) AND Laodicea umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE the-ones loukas loukas
IN
Hierapolis (SACRED-city) Hierapolis o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
4:14 aspazetai
aspazomai
iatros iatros
n_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agaphtos kai dhmas agapEtos kai dEmas

a_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
IS-greetING
YOU(p) ye en en
Prep
14 Luke, the beloved physician, and Demas, greet you.
LUKE
THE
HEALer physician
THE
beLOVED
AND
DEMAS
4:15 aspasasqe tous

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
laodikeia adelfous kai numfan laodikeia adelphos kai numpha

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Pl m Conj n_ Acc Sg m
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
kat kata
Prep
greet-YE greet-ye !
THE
IN
Laodicea
brothers brethren
AND
NYMPHA
AND
THE
according-to
15 Salute the brethren which are in Laodicea, and Nymphas, and the church which is in his house.
AV
Colossians 4 - 1Thessalonians 1
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
auths autos
pp Gen Sg f
ekklhsian ekklEsia
n_ Acc Sg f
HOME house
OF-her
OUT-CALLED ecclesia anagnwsqh anaginOskO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
4:16 kai otan

kai
Conj
hotan
Conj
par para
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
epistolh poihsate ina epistolE poieO hina

n_ Nom Sg f vm Aor Act 2 Pl Conj
kai kai
Conj
AND
when-EVER SHOULD-BE-BEING-read BESIDE YOU(p) whenever ye laodikewn ekklhsia anagnwsqh laodikeus ekklEsia anaginOskO
n_ Gen Pl m n_ Dat Sg f vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
THE
letter epistle ek ek
Prep
make docause-you !
THAT AND also
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
laodikeias ina laodikeia hina

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
16 And when this epistle is read among you, cause that it be read also in the church of the Laodiceans; and that ye likewise read the [epistle] from Laodicea.
IN
THE
OF-Laodiceans
OUT-CALLED SHOULD-BE-BEING-read AND ecclesia it-should-be-being-read
THE
OUT OF-Laodicea
THAT

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
anagnwte anaginOskO
vs 2Aor Act 2 Pl
AND also
YOU(p) ye
MAY-BE-readING
4:17 kai eipate

kai
Conj
legO
vm 2Aor Act 2 Pl
arcippw blepe archippos blepO

n_ Dat Sg m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
parelabes paralambanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
AND
say-YE say-ye ! ina hina

Conj
to-Archippus
YOU-BE-lookING THE be-you-looking-to !
THRU-SERVice WHICH service
YOU-BESIDE-GOT IN you-accepted
17 And say to Archippus, Take heed to the ministry which thou hast received in the Lord, that thou fulfil it.
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
authn autos
pp Acc Sg f
plhrois plEroO
vs Pres Act 2 Sg
Master Lord
THAT SAME herit
YOU-MAY-BE-FILLING you-may-be-fulfilling emh emos

ps 1 Dat Sg
4:18 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
paulou paulos
n_ Gen Sg m
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
THE
greeting salutation caris charis
to-THE
MY
HAND
OF-PAUL
BE-YE-rememberING OF-ME be-ye-remembering !
THE
desmwn h desmos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
18 The salutation by the hand of me Paul. Remember my bonds. Grace [be] with you. Amen. <<[Written from Rome to Colossians by Tychicus and Onesimus.]>>
n_ Nom Sg f
BONDS
THE
grace
WITH YOU(p) ye
AV
1Thessalonians 1
1Thessalonians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai silouanos kai timoqeos th kai silouanos kai timotheos ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia qessalonikewn en ekklEsia thessalonikeus en

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl m Prep
PAUL
AND
SILVANUS
AND
Timothy
to-THE
OUT-CALLED OF-THESSALONICans ecclesia of-Thessalonians umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
IN
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
kai kuriw kai kurios

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
cristw caris christos charis


Conj n_ Nom Sg f
. Paul, and Silvanus, and Timotheus, unto the church of the Thessalonians [which is] in God the Father and [in] the Lord Jesus Christ: Grace [be] unto you, and peace, from God our Father, and the Lord Jesus Christ.
God
FATHER
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
AND
PEACE
1:2 eucaristoumen tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m

Adv Prep

mneian mneia
n_ Acc Sg f
WE-ARE-thankING
to-THE the
God
always
OF-YOU(p) REMINDer of-ye mention
. We give thanks to God always for you all, making mention of you in our prayers;
poioumenoi poieO
epi twn epi ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl f
proseucwn hmwn proseuchE hemeis

makING
ON
OF-THE the
prayers
OF-US
1:3 adialeiptws mnhmoneuontes umwn

adialeiptOs
Adv
mnEmoneuO
humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
ergou ergon
n_ Gen Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews kai pistis kai

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
UN-intermittingly unintermittingly tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
rememberING
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
ACT work
OF-THE
BELIEF faith elpidos elpis

n_ Gen Sg f
AND
kopou kopos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
agaphs kai ths agapE kai ho

upomonhs hupomonE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
Remembering without ceasing your work of faith, and labour of love, and patience of hope in our Lord Jesus Christ, in the sight of God and our Father;
THE
toil
OF-THE
LOVE
AND
THE
UNDER-REMAINing OF-THE endurance tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
EXPECTATION OF-THE
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou emprosqen christos emprosthen

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the upo hupo

Prep
God
AND
FATHER
OF-US
1:4 eidotes
eidO
adelfoi hgaphmenoi adelphos agapaO

n_ Voc Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ekloghn eklogE
n_ Acc Sg f
Knowing, brethren beloved, your election of God.
HAVING-PERCEIVED brothers brethren ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
HAVING-been-LOVED UNDER beloved by
THE
God
THE
choice
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
1:5 oti to
hoti
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
n_ Nom Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ouk ou
Part Neg
egenhqh ginomai
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
monon monon
Adv
that
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-US
NOT
WAS-BECOMED INTO YOU(p) was-become ye kai kai

Conj
NA
IN
saying word
ONLY
alla kai en alla kai en

Conj Conj Prep
dunamei kai en dunamis kai en


en en
Prep
plhroforia pollh plErophoria polus

For our gospel came not unto you in word only, but also in power, and in the Holy Ghost, and in much assurance; as ye know what manner of men we were among you for your sake.
but
AND also
IN
ABILITY power
AND
IN
spirit
HOLY
AND
NA
IN
FULL-wearing assurance umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
much
kaqws kathOs
Adv
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oioi hoios
pk Nom Pl m
egenhqhmen ginomai
vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
en en
Prep
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
according-AS YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE-WHICH WE-WERE-BECOMED ye-are-aware such-as we-were-become
IN among
YOU(p) ye

6
1:6 kai umeis

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
mimhtai hmwn mimEtEs hemeis

egenhqhte ginomai
vi Aor pasD 2 Pl
kai tou kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
dexamenoi dechomai
AND
YOU(p) ye logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
IMITATors
OF-US
WERE-BECOMED AND were-become pollh polus

a_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
Master Lord
RECEIVing
. And ye became followers of us, and of the Lord, having received the word in much affliction, with joy of the Holy Ghost:
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
en en
Prep
qliyei thlipsis
n_ Dat Sg f

Prep n_ Gen Sg f

THE
saying word
IN
CONSTRICTION much affliction
WITH
JOY
OF-spirit
HOLY
AV
1Thessalonians 1 - 1Thessalonians 2
1:7 wste
hOste
Conj
genesqai ginomai
vn 2Aor midD
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tupon tupos
n_ Acc Sg m
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin en pisteuO en
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AS-BESIDES TO-BE-BECOMING YOU(p) so-that ye makedonia kai en makedonia kai en

So that ye were ensamples to all that believe in Macedonia and Achaia.
type model
to-ALL
THE
IN
THE
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
acaia achaia
n_ Dat Sg f
MACEDONIA
AND
IN
THE
ACHAIA
1:8 af
apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
gar exhchtai gar exEcheO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
FROM YOU(p) ye monon en monon en

Adv Prep
for
HAS-been-OUT-RESOUNDED THE has-been-sounded-forth makedonia kai makedonia kai

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
NA
saying word acaia achaia
OF-THE
Master Lord panti pas
NOT
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
NA
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
all en alla en
Conj Prep
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
For from you sounded out the word of the Lord not only in Macedonia and Achaia, but also in every place your faith to God-ward is spread abroad; so that we need not to speak any thing.
n_ Dat Sg f
a_ Dat Sg m
ONLY
IN
THE
MACEDONIA
AND
IN
THE
ACHAIA
but
IN
EVERY
PLACE
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
exelhluqen wste exerchomai hOste

vi Perf Act 3 Sg Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
THE
BELIEF faith ecein echO

vn Pres Act
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
TOWARD THE
God
HAS-OUT-COME has-come-out
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
lalein laleO
vn Pres Act
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
need
TO-BE-HAVING US
TO-BE-TALKING ANY to-be-speaking of-anything hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
1:9 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar peri gar peri

Conj Prep
apaggellousin apaggellO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
opoian hopoios
a_ Acc Sg f
eisodon escomen eisodos echO

pros pros
Prep
they
for
ABOUT US concerning
ARE-FROM-MESSAGING what-kind INTO-WAY are-reporting what-kind-of entrance ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
WE-have-HAD TOWARD
For they themselves shew of us what manner of entering in we had unto you, and how ye turned to God from idols to serve the living and true God;
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai pws epestreyate pros kai pOs epistrephO pros

Conj Adv vi Aor Act 2 Pl Prep
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
eidwlwn eidOlon
n_ Gen Pl n
YOU(p) ye
AND
how
YE-ON-TURN ye-turn-back zwnti zaO
TOWARD THE
God
FROM THE
idols
douleuein douleuO
vn Pres Act
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai alhqinw kai alEthinos

Conj a_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-SLAVING to-God
LIVING
AND
TRUE
1:10 kai anamenein

kai
Conj
anamenO
vn Pres Act
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ek ek
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ouranwn on ouranos hos

n_ Gen Pl m pr Acc Sg m
AND
TO-BE-UP-REMAINING THE to-be-waiting-for ek ek

Prep
SON
OF-Him
OUT OF-THE
heavens
WHOM
10 And to wait for his Son from heaven, whom he raised from the dead, [even] Jesus, which delivered us from the wrath to come.
hgeiren egeirO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
nekrwn ihsoun nekros iEsous

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
ruomenon rhuomai
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
He-ROUSES
OUT
OF-THE
DEAD dead-ones
JESUS
THE
One-rescuING one-rescuing
US
OUT OF-THE
orghs orgE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ercomenhs erchomai
vp Pres midD/pasD Gen Sg f
INDIGNATION THE
COMING
AV
1Thessalonians 2
2:1 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar oidate gar eidO

adelfoi thn adelphos ho

n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
eisodon hmwn eisodos hemeis

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pros pros
Prep
. For yourselves, brethren, know our entrance in unto you, that it was not in vain:
SAME yourselves umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
for
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED brothers ye-are-aware brethren ! kenh kenos

a_ Nom Sg f
THE
INTO-WAY entrance
OF-US
THE
TOWARD
oti ou hoti ou
Conj Part Neg
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye
that
NOT
EMPTY for-naught
it-HAS-BECOME
2:2 alla
alla
Conj
propaqontes kai ubrisqentes propaschO kai hubrizO

vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m Conj vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
en en
Prep
filippois philippoi
n_ Dat Pl m
but BEFORE-sufferING but-though suffering-before eparrhsiasameqa en parrhEsiazomai en

AND
BEING-OUT-RAGED according-AS YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED IN being-outraged ye-are-aware qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
Philippi
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

vn Aor Act Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
But even after that we had suffered before, and were shamefully entreated, as ye know, at Philippi, we were bold in our God to speak unto you the gospel of God with much contention.
WE-are-bold
IN
THE
God
OF-US
TO-TALK to-speak
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
THE
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
agwni agOn
n_ Dat Sg m
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
God
IN
much vast ouk ou

Part Neg
CONTEST struggle ek ek
Prep
2:3 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar paraklhsis hmwn gar paraklEsis hemeis

Conj n_ Nom Sg f pp 1 Gen Pl
planhs planE
n_ Gen Sg f
oude oude
Adv
ex ek
Prep
akaqarsias akatharsia
n_ Gen Sg f
For our exhortation [was] not of deceit, nor of uncleanness, nor in guile:
THE
for
OF-US
NOT
OUT OF-STRAYing NOT-YET OUT OF-UN-cleanness of-deception nor-yet of-uncleanness
oude oude
Adv
en en
Prep
dolw dolos
n_ Dat Sg m
NOT-YET IN nor-yet
FRAUD guile dedokimasmeqa upo dokimazO hupo

vi Perf Pas 1 Pl Prep
2:4 alla kaqws

alla
Conj
kathOs
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
pisteuqhnai to pisteuO ho
vn Aor Pas t_ Acc Sg n
but
according-AS WE-HAVE-been-testED
UNDER THE by ouc ou

Part Neg
God
TO-BE-BELIEVED THE to-be-entrusted-with alla qew alla theos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
But as we were allowed of God to be put in trust with the gospel, even so we speak; not as pleasing men, but God, which trieth our hearts.
n_ Acc Sg n
outws laloumen houtOs laleO

ws anqrwpois areskontes hOs anthrOpos areskO

Adv n_ Dat Pl m vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
WELL-MESSAGE thus
WE-ARE-TALKING NOT we-are-speaking
AS
to-humans humans
PLEASING
but
to-God God
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
dokimazonti tas dokimazO ho

vp Pres Act Dat Sg m t_ Acc Pl f
kardias hmwn kardia hemeis

THE
One-testING one-testing
THE
HEARTS
OF-US
2:5 oute
oute
Conj
gar pote gar pote

Conj Part
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
kolakeias egenhqhmen kolakeia ginomai

n_ Gen Sg f vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
NOT-BESIDES for neither oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
?-when IN at-any-time oute oute

Conj
saying expression
NA
OF-FLATTERY
WE-WERE-BECOMED according-AS we-were-become pleonexias pleonexia

n_ Gen Sg f
For neither at any time used we flattering words, as ye know, nor a cloke of covetousness; God [is] witness:
en en
Prep
profasei prophasis
n_ Dat Sg f
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
martus martus
n_ Nom Sg m
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED NOT-BESIDES ye-are-aware neither
IN
BEFORE-APPEARance OF-MORE-HAVing God pretense of-greed anqrwpwn doxan anthrOpos doxa

n_ Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg f
witness
2:6 oute
oute
Conj
zhtountes zEteO
ex ek
Prep
oute oute
Conj
af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
oute oute
Conj
NOT-BESIDES SEEKING neither ap apo

Prep
OUT OF-humans
esteem glory barei baros

n_ Dat Sg n
NOT-BESIDES FROM YOU(p) neither ye einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
NOT-BESIDES nor apostoloi apostolos

n_ Nom Pl m
Nor of men sought we glory, neither of you, nor [yet] of others, when we might have been burdensome, as the apostles of Christ.
allwn allos
a_ Gen Pl m
(2:7)
dunamenoi dunamai
en en
Prep
ws cristou hOs christos

Adv n_ Gen Sg m
FROM others
beING-ABLE
IN
HEAVY burden
TO-BE
AS
OF-ANOINTED commissioners of-Christ apostles trofos qalph trophos thalpO

n_ Nom Sg f vs Pres Act 3 Sg
7
2:7 alla egenhqhmen

alla
Conj
ginomai
vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
nhpioi nEpios
a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ws ean hOs ean

Adv Cond
but
WE-WERE-BECOMED minors we-were-become
IN
MIDst
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye
. But we were gentle among you, even as a nurse cherisheth her children:
IF-EVER nurse
MAY-BE-cherishING
AV
1Thessalonians 2
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
eauths heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg f
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
THE
OF-self of-herself
offsprings children umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
2:8 outws omeiromenoi

houtOs
Adv
homeiromai
eudokoumen eudokeO
vi impf Act 1 Pl
metadounai umin metadidOmi humeis

vn 2Aor Act pp 2 Dat Pl
ou ou
Part Neg
thus
beING-LIKE-GUSHED being-ardently-attached-to euaggelion euaggelion

n_ Acc Sg n
OF-YOU(p) WE-ARE-WELL-SEEMING TO-WITH-GIVE ye we-are-delighting to-share-with qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
to-YOU(p) ye
NOT
monon to monon ho
Adv t_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
alla kai tas alla kai ho

Conj Conj t_ Acc Pl f
eautwn yucas dioti heautou psuchE dioti

pf 3 Gen Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Conj
So being affectionately desirous of you, we were willing to have imparted unto you, not the gospel of God only, but also our own souls, because ye were dear unto us.
ONLY
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
God
but
AND also
THE
OF-selves our-selfown
souls
THRU-that because-that
agaphtoi hmin agapEtos hemeis

a_ Nom Pl m pp 1 Dat Pl
egenhqhte ginomai
vi Aor pasD 2 Pl
beLOVED
to-US
YE-WERE-BECOMED ye-were-become gar adelfoi ton gar adelphos ho

Conj n_ Voc Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
2:9 mnhmoneuete
mnEmoneuO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kopon kopos
n_ Acc Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
mocqon nuktos mochthos nux

YE-ARE-rememberING for
brothers brethren !
THE
toil
OF-US
AND
THE
LABOR
OF-NIGHT night
kai hmeras kai hEmera

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
pros pros
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
epibarhsai epibareO
vn Aor Act
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
For ye remember, brethren, our labour and travail: for labouring night and day, because we would not be chargeable unto any of you, we preached unto you the gospel of God.
AND
OF-DAY day
workING
TOWARD THE
NO
TO-be-ON-HEAVY ANY to-be-burdensome to-any qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
ekhruxamen eis kErussO eis

umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
WE-PROCLAIM we-herald
INTO YOU(p) ye
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
God
2:10 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
martures kai o martus kai ho

qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ws osiws hOs hosiOs

Adv Adv
kai dikaiws kai amemptws kai dikaiOs kai amemptOs

Conj Adv Conj Adv

pp 2 Dat Pl
witnesses
AND
THE
God
AS how
BENIGNly AND
JUSTly
AND
UN-BLAMEably blamelessly
10 Ye [are] witnesses, and God [also], how holily and justly and unblameably we behaved ourselves among you that believe:
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin egenhqhmen pisteuO ginomai

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m vi Aor pasD 1 Pl
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing oidate eidO

vi Perf Act 2 Pl
WE-WERE-BECOMED we-were-become ws ena hOs heis

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
2:11 kaqaper
kathaper
Adv
ekaston umwn hekastos humeis

a_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
ws pathr hOs patEr

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED AS even-as ye-are-aware how eautou heautou

pf 3 Gen Sg m
ONE
EACH
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye
FATHER
offsprings children
11 As ye know how we exhorted and comforted and charged every one of you, as a father [doth] his children,
(2:12)
parakalountes umas parakaleO humeis

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
kai paramuqoumenoi kai paramutheomai

OF-self of-himself
BESIDE-CALLING consoling eis eis

Prep
YOU(p) ye to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
AND
BESIDE-CLOSING comforting umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
2:12 kai marturomenoi

kai
Conj
marturomai
vn Pres Act
axiws axiOs
Adv
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
AND
witnessING attesting tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
INTO THE
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING YOU(p) to-be-walking ye eis eis

Prep
12 That ye would walk worthy of God, who hath called you unto his kingdom and glory.
WORTHIly OF-THE
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kalountos kaleO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
basileian kai doxan basileia kai doxa

God
THE
One-CALLING one-calling touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
OF-self of-selfhim
KINGdom
AND
esteem glory
13 . For this cause also thank we God without ceasing, because, when ye received the word of God which ye heard of us, ye received [it] not [as] the word of men, but as it is in truth, the word of God, which effectually worketh also in you that believe.
2:13 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
eucaristoumen tw eucharisteO ho
vi Pres Act 1 Pl t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
adialeiptws adialeiptOs
Adv
AND
AND also
WE
ARE-thankING
to-THE the tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
God
UN-intermittingly unintermittingly edexasqe ou dechomai ou

vi Aor midD 2 Pl Part Neg
oti paralabontes logon hoti paralambanO logos

Conj vp 2Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
akohs akoE
n_ Gen Sg f
par para
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
that
BESIDE-GETTING in-accepting
saying word
OF-HEARing BESIDE US
OF-THE
God
YE-RECEIVE
NOT
AV
1Thessalonians 2
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
anqrwpwn alla kaqws anthrOpos alla kathOs

n_ Gen Pl m Conj Adv
WH
alhqws estin
WH
NA
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
NA
alhqws alEthOs
Adv
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
saying word qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-humans
but
according-AS
IS it-is umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
TRUly
saying word
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai energeitai en kai energeO en

Conj vi Pres Mid 3 Sg Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteuousin pisteuO
OF-God
WHICH
AND also
IS-IN-ACTING is-operating
IN
YOU(p) ye
THE
ones-BELIEVING ones-believing ekklhsiwn tou ekklEsia ho

2:14 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
gar mimhtai egenhqhte gar mimEtEs ginomai

Conj n_ Nom Pl m vi Aor pasD 2 Pl
adelfoi twn adelphos ho

n_ Voc Pl m t_ Gen Pl f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
YOU(p) ye twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
for
IMITATors
WERE-BECOMED brothers were-become brethren ! th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
OF-THE
God
ouswn eimi
vp Pres vxx Gen Pl f
en en
Prep
ioudaia en ioudaia en
n_ Dat Sg f Prep

oti ta hoti ho
Conj t_ Acc Pl n
auta autos
pp Acc Pl n
14 For ye, brethren, became followers of the churches of God which in Judaea are in Christ Jesus: for ye also have suffered like things of your own countrymen, even as they [have] of the Jews:
OF-THE the
IN
THE
JUDEA
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
that
THE
SAME
epaqete paschO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Pl

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
upo hupo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
idiwn idios
a_ Gen Pl m
sumfuletwn kaqws sumphuletEs kathOs

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
kai autoi kai autos

Conj pp Nom Pl m
YE-EMOTIONED AND YOU(p) ye-suffered even ye upo hupo

Prep
UNDER THE by
OWN
TOGETHER-tribes fellow-tribesmen
they
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
ioudaiwn ioudaios
a_ Gen Pl m
UNDER THE by
JUDA-ans Jews kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
2:15 twn
ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
apokteinantwn ihsoun apokteinO iEsous

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
profhtas prophEtEs
n_ Acc Pl m
kai kai
Conj
OF-THE the-ones hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
AND also
THE
Master Lord
ones-FROM-KILLing killing mh mE
Part Neg
JESUS
AND
THE
BEFORE-AVERers AND prophets anqrwpois anthrOpos

n_ Dat Pl m
15 Who both killed the Lord Jesus, and their own prophets, and have persecuted us; and they please not God, and are contrary to all men:
ekdiwxantwn kai qew ekdiOkO kai theos

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m Conj n_ Dat Sg m
areskontwn areskO
kai pasin kai pas

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
US
OF-OUT-CHASing banishing
AND
to-God
NO
OF-PLEASING pleasing
AND
to-ALL
humans
enantiwn enantios
a_ Gen Pl m
OF-IN-INSTEAD are-contrary
2:16 kwluontwn hmas

kOluO
hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
eqnesin lalhsai ina ethnos laleO hina

n_ Dat Pl n vn Aor Act Conj
swqwsin sOzO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
OF-FORBIDDING forbidding to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
US
to-THE
NATIONS
TO-TALK to-speak
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-SAVED INTO
16 Forbidding us to speak to the Gentiles that they might be saved, to fill up their sins alway: for the wrath is come upon them to the uttermost.
anaplhrwsai autwn anaplEroO autos

vn Aor Act pp Gen Pl m
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
amartias pantote efqasen hamartia pantote phthanO

n_ Acc Pl f Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
ep epi
Prep
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
THE
TO-UP-FILL to-fill-up orgh orgE

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-them
THE
misses sins
always
OUTSTRIPS
YET ON
them
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
telos telos
n_ Acc Sg n
THE
INDIGNATION INTO FINISH consummation de de

Conj
2:17 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
adelfoi aporfanisqentes af adelphos aporphanizO apo

n_ Voc Pl m vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
pros pros
Prep
kairon kairos
n_ Acc Sg m
wras hOra
n_ Gen Sg f
WE
BEING-FROM-BEREAVED being-bereaved-from
FROM YOU(p) ye
TOWARD SEASON period
OF-HOUR
proswpw ou prosOpon ou
kardia perissoterws espoudasamen to kardia perissoterOs spoudazO ho

n_ Dat Sg f Adv vi Aor Act 1 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon umwn prosOpon humeis

n_ Acc Sg n pp 2 Gen Pl
17 . But we, brethren, being taken from you for a short time in presence, not in heart, endeavoured the more abundantly to see your face with great desire.
to-face
NOT
to-HEART more-exceedingly
WE-are-DILIGENT endeavor
THE
face
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
en en
Prep
pollh polus
a_ Dat Sg f
epiqumia epithumia
n_ Dat Sg f
TO-BE-PERCEIVING IN
much
ON-FEELing yearning
AV
2:18 dioti
dioti
Conj
hqelhsamen elqein thelO erchomai

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
men men
Part
paulos paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai apax kai hapax

Conj Adv
THRU-that WE-WILL because-that
TO-BE-COMING TOWARD YOU(p) ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
INDEED PAUL
AND ONCE even
18 Wherefore we would have come unto you, even I Paul, once and again; but Satan hindered us.
kai dis kai enekoyen hmas kai dis kai egkoptO hEmeis
Conj Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
satanas satanas
n_ Nom Sg m
AND twice even
AND
hinders
US
THE
SATAN (Heb. adversary) Satan h E

Part
2:19 tis
tis
pi Nom Sg f
gar hmwn gar hemeis

Conj pp 1 Gen Pl
elpis elpis
n_ Nom Sg f
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
h E
Part
stefanos kauchsews h stephanos kauchEsis E

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f Part
ouci ouchi
Part Int
ANY who ? kai umeis kai humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
for
OF-US
EXPECTATION OR
JOY
OR
WREATH
OF-BOASTing of-glorying en en
Prep
OR
NOT(emph.) not(emph.) ?
19 For what [is] our hope, or joy, or crown of rejoicing? [Are] not even ye in the presence of our Lord Jesus Christ at his coming?
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
AND YOU(p) even ye parousia parousia

n_ Dat Sg f
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
IN
THE
OF-Him
2:20 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
gar este gar eimi

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
doxa doxa
n_ Nom Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
cara chara
n_ Nom Sg f
20
For ye are our glory and joy.
YOU(p) ye
for
ARE
THE
esteem glory
OF-US
AND
THE
JOY
AV
1Thessalonians 3
3:1 dio
dio
Conj
mhketi mEketi
Adv
stegontes stegO
eudokhsamen kataleifqhnai en eudokeO kataleipO en

vi Aor Act 1 Pl vn Aor Pas Prep
aqhnais athEnai
n_ Dat Pl f
THRU-WHICH NO-NOT-STILL EXCLUDING wherefore by-no-means-longer refraining monoi monos

a_ Nom Pl m
WE-WELL-SEEM it-seems-well-for-us
TO-BE-left
IN
ATHENS
. Wherefore when we could no longer forbear, we thought it good to be left at Athens alone;
ONLY alone
3:2 kai epemyamen timoqeon ton

kai
Conj
pempO
vi Aor Act 1 Pl
timotheos
n_ Acc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
adelfon hmwn adelphos hemeis

kai kai
Conj
WH
diakonon
AND
NA
WE-SEND
Timothy
THE
brother
OF-US
AND
sunergon sunergos
a_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
n_ Dat Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
And sent Timotheus, our brother, and minister of God, and our fellowlabourer in the gospel of Christ, to establish you, and to comfort you concerning your faith:
TOGETHER-ACTer fellow-worker to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-THE
God
IN
THE
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
INTO
sthrixai stErizO
vn Aor Act
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai parakalesai uper kai parakaleO huper

Conj vn Aor Act Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

THE
TO-STAND-fast YOU(p) to-establish ye mhdena mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg m
AND
TO-BESIDE-CALL to-console en en
Prep
OVER THE for-the-sake-of qliyesin thlipsis

n_ Dat Pl f
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) of-ye gar gar

Conj
3
3:3 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sainesqai sainO
vn Pres Pas
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
tautais autoi houtos autos

pd Dat Pl f pp Nom Pl m
THE
NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-beING-SWAYED IN no-one oti eis hoti eis

Conj Prep
THE
CONSTRICTIONS these afflictions
SAME yourselves
for
That no man should be moved by these afflictions: for yourselves know that we are appointed thereunto.
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
keimeqa keimai
INTO this
WE-ARE-LYING we-are-being-located hmen eimi

vi impf vxx 1 Pl
3:4 kai gar ote pros

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
hote
Adv
pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
proelegomen umin prolegO humeis

vi impf Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
oti mellomen hoti mellO

AND for even qlibesqai thlibO

vn Pres Pas
when
TOWARD YOU(p) ye kaqws kathOs

Adv
WE-WERE
WE-BEFORE-said we-predicted
to-YOU(p) to-ye
that
WE-ARE-beING-ABOUT
For verily, when we were with you, we told you before that we should suffer tribulation; even as it came to pass, and ye know.

kai oidate kai eidO

TO-BE-beING-CONSTRICTED according-AS AND to-be-being-afflicted also
it-BECAME
AND
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED ye-are-aware epemya pempO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
3:5 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
kagw kagO
pp 1 Nom Sg Con
mhketi mEketi
Adv
stegwn stegO
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THRU this because-of gnwnai thn ginOskO ho

AND-I also-I pistin umwn pistis humeis

NO-NOT-STILL EXCLUDING by-no-means-longer refraining mh mE

Part Neg
I-SEND
INTO THE
pws pOs
Part
epeirasen umas peirazO humeis

vi impf Act 3 Sg pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
peirazwn peirazO
For this cause, when I could no longer forbear, I sent to know your faith, lest by some means the tempter have tempted you, and our labour be in vain.
TO-KNOW
THE
BELIEF faith
OF-YOU(p) NO of-ye lest o ho
how tries somehow kopos kopos

n_ Nom Sg m
YOU(p) ye hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THE
one-tryING one-trying
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
kenon kenos
a_ Acc Sg n
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
INTO EMPTY for-naught de de

Conj
MAY-BE-BECOMING THE
toil
OF-US
3:6 arti
arti
Adv
elqontos erchomai
timoqeou pros timotheos pros

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
af apo
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kai kai
Conj
at-PRESENT YET COMING of-coming euaggelisamenou euaggelizO

vp Aor Mid Gen Sg m
OF-Timothy
TOWARD US
FROM YOU(p) ye agaphn umwn agapE humeis

AND
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin kai thn pistis kai ho

kai oti kai hoti

Conj Conj
. But now when Timotheus came from you unto us, and brought us good tidings of your faith and charity, and that ye have good remembrance of us always, desiring greatly to see us, as we also [to see] you:
OF-WELL-MESSAGizing to-US of-bringing-the-well-message ecete echO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
THE of-the
BELIEF faith
AND
THE
LOVE
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
that
mneian mneia
n_ Acc Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
agaqhn pantote epipoqountes hmas agathos pantote epipotheO hEmeis

a_ Acc Sg f Adv vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pp 1 Acc Pl
idein eidO
vn 2Aor Act
YE-ARE-HAVING REMINDer OF-US remembrance
GOOD
always
ON-LONGING longing
US
TO-BE-PERCEIVING
AV
1Thessalonians 3
kaqaper kathaper
Adv

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND even-as also
WE
YOU(p) ye adelfoi ef adelphos epi

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
3:7 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
pareklhqhmen parakaleO
vi Aor Pas 1 Pl
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
epi pash epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
THRU this because-of anagkh kai qliyei anagkE kai thlipsis

WE-WERE-BESIDE-CALLED brothers we-were-consoled brethren ! hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
ON YOU(p) onover ye umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
ON
EVERY all
THE
Therefore, brethren, we were comforted over you in all our affliction and distress by your faith:
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews pistis
n_ Gen Sg f
necessity
AND
CONSTRICTION OF-US affliction ean ean

Cond
THRU THE through umeis humeis

pp 2 Nom Pl
OF-YOU(p) BELIEF of-ye faith en en

Prep
3:8 oti nun zwmen

hoti
Conj
nun
Adv
zaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
sthkete stEkO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
For now we live, if ye stand fast in the Lord.
that
NOW WE-ARE-LIVING IF-EVER YOU(p) ye gar eucaristian dunameqa gar eucharistia dunamai
Conj n_ Acc Sg f
ARE-STANDING-firm IN
Master Lord antapodounai peri antapodidOmi peri

vn 2Aor Act Prep
9
3:9 tina
tis
pi Acc Sg f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
ANY what ? umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
for
thanking thanksgiving th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
WE-ARE-ABLE
to-THE
God
TO-repay
ABOUT concerning emprosqen emprosthen

Prep
For what thanks can we render to God again for you, for all the joy wherewith we joy for your sakes before our God;
epi pash epi pas

Prep a_ Dat Sg f
cara chara
n_ Dat Sg f
h hos
pr Dat Sg f
cairomen chairO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
di dia
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
ON
EVERY all
THE
JOY
WHICH
WE-ARE-JOYING THRU YOU(p) we-are-rejoicing because-of ye
IN-TOWARD-PLACE in-front-of
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-THE the
God
OF-US
3:10 nuktos kai hmeras uper ekperissou deomenoi

nux
n_ Gen Sg f
kai
Conj
hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
huper
Prep
ekperissOs
Adv
deomai
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
OF-NIGHT night idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
AND
OF-DAY day
OVER
beseechING
INTO THE
10 Night and day praying exceedingly that we might see your face, and might perfect that which is lacking in your faith?
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
proswpon kai katartisai prosOpon kai katartizO

n_ Acc Sg n Conj vn Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
usterhmata ths husterEma ho

TO-BE-PERCEIVING OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye pistews umwn pistis humeis

face
AND
TO-DOWN-EQUIP THE to-adjust
WANTS deficiencies
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
Conj
3:11 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai pathr kai patEr

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
SAME shimself ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
YET THE
God
AND
FATHER
OF-US
AND
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
11 . Now God himself and our Father, and our Lord Jesus Christ, direct our way unto you.
kateuqunai kateuthunO
vo Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
odon hodos
n_ Acc Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
JESUS
MAY-He-BE-DOWN-straightenING THE may-he-be-directing ! de de

Conj
WAY
OF-US
TOWARD YOU(p) ye th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
3:12 umas
humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pleonasai pleonazO
vo Aor Act 3 Sg
kai perisseusai kai perisseuO

Conj vo Aor Act 3 Sg
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
YOU(p) ye eis eis

Prep
YET THE
Master Lord
MAY-BE-MORE-izING AND may-he-be-increasing !
MAY-BE-exceeding to-THE may-he-be-superabounding ! eis eis

Prep
LOVE
12 And the Lord make you to increase and abound in love one toward another, and toward all [men], even as we [do] toward you:
allhlous kai eis allElOn kai eis

pc Acc Pl m Conj Prep
pantas kaqaper pas kathaper

a_ Acc Pl m Adv

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
INTO one-another
AND
INTO ALL
DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND even-as also umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
WE
INTO YOU(p) ye agiwsunh hagiOsunE

n_ Dat Sg f
13 To the end he may stablish your hearts unblameable in holiness before God, even our Father, at the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ with all his
3:13 eis
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
sthrixai stErizO
vn Aor Act
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kardias amemptous en kardia amemptos en

n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Prep
INTO THE
TO-STAND-fast OF-YOU(p) THE to-establish of-ye
HEARTS
UN-BLAMEable unblamable
IN
HOLY-TOGETHERness holiness
AV
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
saints.
IN-TOWARD-PLACE OF-THE in-front-of the kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
God
AND
FATHER
OF-US
IN
THE

NA
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
meta pantwn twn meta pas ho

agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
amhn amEn
Hebrew
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
WITH
ALL
OF-THE the
HOLY-ones OF-Him saints
AMEN
AV
1Thessalonians 4
4:1 loipon
loipon
a_ Nom Sg n
NA
oun oun
Conj
adelfoi erwtwmen adelphos erOtaO

n_ Voc Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai parakaloumen kai parakaleO

en en
Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
rest
WH
THEN
NA
brothers brethren ! kaqws kathOs

Adv
WE-ARE-askING YOU(p) ye parelabete par paralambanO para

AND
WE-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING IN are-entreating to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
Master Lord
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
ina
ina hina
Conj
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
pws dei pOs deO

. Furthermore then we beseech you, brethren, and exhort [you] by the Lord Jesus, that as ye have received of us how ye ought to walk and to please God, [so] ye would abound more and more.
JESUS
THAT
according-AS YE-BESIDE-GOT ye-accepted kai areskein kai areskO

Conj vn Pres Act
BESIDE OF-US us kaqws kathOs

Adv
THE
how
it-IS-BINDING must
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
vn Pres Act
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai peripateite kai peripateO

YOU(p) ye ina hina

Conj
TO-BE-ABOUT-TREADING AND to-be-walking perisseuhte perisseuO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
TO-BE-PLEASING to-God God
YE-ARE-ABOUT-TREADING ye-are-walking
mallon mallon
Adv
THAT YE-MAY-BE-exceedING RATHER ye-may-be-superabounding yet-rathermore
4:2 oidate
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
gar tinas paraggelias edwkamen umin gar tis paraggelia didOmi humeis
Conj pi Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED for ye-are-aware ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
ANY what ?
charges
WE-GIVE
to-YOU(p) to-ye
For ye know what commandments we gave you by the Lord Jesus.
THRU THE through
Master Lord
JESUS
4:3 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar estin gar eimi

qelhma thelEma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
agiasmos umwn hagiasmos humeis

this
for
IS
WILL
OF-THE
God
THE
HOLYing hallowing
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
For this is the will of God, [even] your sanctification, that ye should abstain from fornication:
apecesqai apechomai
vn Pres Mid
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
porneias porneia
n_ Gen Sg f
TO-BE-FROM-HAVING YOU(p) to-be-abstaining ye
FROM THE
PROSTITUTION
4:4 eidenai
eidO
vn Perf Act
ekaston umwn hekastos humeis

a_ Acc Sg m pp 2 Gen Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
skeuos skeuos
n_ Acc Sg n
ktasqai ktaomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
en en
Prep
agiasmw hagiasmos
n_ Dat Sg m
TO-PERCEIVE EACH to-be-aware kai timh kai timE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
OF-YOU(p) THE of-ye
That every one of you should know how to possess his vessel in sanctification and honour;
OF-self of-himself
INSTRUMENT TO-BE-ACQUIRING IN vessel to-be-acquiring-it
HOLYing hallowing
AND
VALUE honor en en
Prep
4:5 mh
mE
Part Neg
paqei pathos
n_ Dat Sg n
epiqumias epithumia
n_ Gen Sg f
kaqaper kathaper
Adv
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
Not in the lust of concupiscence, even as the Gentiles which know not God:
NO
IN
EMOTION passion ton ho
OF-ON-FEELing DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND of-lust even-as also qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
NATIONS
THE
NO
eidota eidO
t_ Acc Sg m
HAVING-PERCEIVED THE being-acquainted-with
God
4:6 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
uperbainein huperbainO
vn Pres Act
kai pleonektein kai pleonekteO

Conj vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
pragmati ton pragma ho

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Acc Sg m
THE
NO
TO-BE-OVER-STEPPING AND to-be-circumventing dioti dioti

Conj
TO-BE-MORE-HAVING IN to-be-overreaching peri peri

Prep
THE
PRACTISE matter
THE

ekdikos ekdikos
a_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
pantwn toutwn kaqws pas houtos kathOs

a_ Gen Pl m pd Gen Pl m Adv
kai kai
Conj
That no [man] go beyond and defraud his brother in [any] matter: because that the Lord [is] the avenger of all such, as we also have forewarned you and testified.
brother
OF-him
THRU-that OUT-JUSTer Master because-that avenger Lord kai diemarturameqa kai diamarturomai
OF-these these
proeipamen umin prolegO humeis

vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
WE-BEFORE-say to-YOU(p) we-say-before to-ye
AND
WE-THRU-witness certify
AV
1Thessalonians 4
4:7 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ekalesen hmas gar kaleO hEmeis

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
epi akaqarsia all en epi akatharsia alla en

Prep n_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep
agiasmw hagiasmos
n_ Dat Sg m
For God hath not called us unto uncleanness, but unto holiness.
NOT
for
CALLS
US
THE
God
ON
but
IN
HOLYing hallowing alla ton alla ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
8
4:8 toigaroun
toigaroun
Part
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
aqetwn atheteO
ouk ou
Part Neg
anqrwpon aqetei anthrOpos atheteO

to-THE-for-THEN THE surely-in-consequence-then qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
UN-PLACING one-repudiating didonta didOmi

NOT
human
IS-UN-PLACING but is-repudiating to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THE
He therefore that despiseth, despiseth not man, but God, who hath also given unto us his holy Spirit.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NA
kai kai
Conj
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma autou pneuma autos

agion hagios
a_ Acc Sg n
eis eis
Prep
God
THE
AND also
One-GIVING giving
THE
spirit
OF-Him
THE
HOLY
INTO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye
4:9 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
filadelfias ou philadelphia ou
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
ecete echO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
grafein graphO
vn Pres Act
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
ABOUT YET OF-THE concerning the autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
FOND-brotherness brotherly-affection
NOT
need
YE-ARE-HAVING TO-BE-WRITING to-YOU(p) to-ye to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
. But as touching brotherly love ye need not that I write unto you: for ye yourselves are taught of God to love one another.
gar umeis gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
qeodidaktoi este theodidaktos eimi

eis eis
Prep
agapan agapaO
vn Pres Act
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
SAME yourselves
for
YOU(p) ye
God-TAUGHT taught-by-God auto autos

pp Acc Sg n
ARE
INTO THE
TO-BE-LOVING one-another
4:10 kai gar poieite

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
pantas tous pas ho

adelfous adelphos
n_ Acc Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
en en
Prep
olh holos
a_ Dat Sg f
AND also th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
for
YE-ARE-DOING SAME it
INTO ALL
THE
brothers brethren
THE
IN
WHOLE
10 And indeed ye do it toward all the brethren which are in all Macedonia: but we beseech you, brethren, that ye increase more and more;
makedonia parakaloumen makedonia parakaleO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi perisseuein adelphos perisseuO

n_ Voc Pl m vn Pres Act
mallon mallon
Adv
THE
MACEDONIA
WE-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) we-are-entreating ye hsucazein hEsuchazO

vn Pres Act
brothers brethren !
TO-BE-exceedING RATHER to-be-superabounding yet-rathermore ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
4:11 kai filotimeisqai

kai
Conj
philotimeomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
kai prassein kai prassO

Conj vn Pres Act
idia idios
a_ Acc Pl n
kai kai
Conj
AND
TO-BE-beING-ambitious TO-BE-QUIETizING AND to-be-being-quiet tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
NA
TO-BE-PRACTISING THE to-be-being-engaged kaqws kathOs

Adv
OWN AND own-things parhggeilamen paraggellO

vi Aor Act 1 Pl
11 And that ye study to be quiet, and to do your own business, and to work with your own hands, as we commanded you;
vn Pres midD/pasD
idiais idios
a_ Dat Pl f
cersin umwn cheir humeis

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
TO-BE-workING
to-THE
OWN
HANDS
OF-YOU(p) according-AS to-YOU(p) of-ye ye tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
WE-charge
4:12 ina
hina
Conj
peripathte peripateO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
euschmonws pros euschEmonOs pros

Adv Prep
exw exO
Adv
kai mhdenos kai mEdeis

Conj a_ Gen Sg n
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
THAT YE-MAY-BE-ABOUT-TREADING WELL-FIGUREly ye-may-be-walking respectably echte echO

vs Pres Act 2 Pl
TOWARD THE-ones the-ones
OUT AND outside
NO-YET-ONE need of-nothing
12 That ye may walk honestly toward them that are without, and [that] ye may have lack of nothing.
YE-MAY-BE-HAVING
4:13 ou
ou
Part Neg
qelomen thelO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
agnoein agnoeO
vn Pres Act
adelfoi peri adelphos peri

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
NOT
WE-ARE-WILLING YET YOU(p) ye ina hina

Conj
TO-BE-UN-KNOWING brothers to-be-being-ignorant brethren ! kaqws kathOs

Adv
ABOUT THE concerning kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
13 . But I would not have you to be ignorant, brethren, concerning them which are asleep, that ye sorrow not, even as others which have no hope.
koimwmenwn koimaO
mh mE
Part Neg
luphsqe lupeO
vs Pres Pas 2 Pl
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ones-reposING ones-reposing mh mE
Part Neg
THAT NO
YE-MAY-BE-beING-SORROWED according-AS AND ye-may-sorrow also
THE
rest rest(p)
THE the(p)
econtes echO
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
NO
HAVING
EXPECTATION
AV
4:14 ei
ei
Cond
gar pisteuomen gar pisteuO


Conj n_ Nom Sg m
apeqanen kai anesth apothnEskO kai anistEmi

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg

IF
for
WE-ARE-BELIEVING that
JESUS
FROM-DIED died tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
AND
UP-STOOD rose axei agO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
thus
AND also sun sun

Prep
THE
14 For if we believe that Jesus died and rose again, even so them also which sleep in Jesus will God bring with him.
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
koimhqentas koimaO
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl m
dia dia
Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
God
THE
ones-BEING-reposED THRU THE ones-being-put-to-repose through
JESUS
SHALL-BE-LEADING TOGETHER shall-be-leading-forth
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
to-Him with-him
4:15 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gar umin gar humeis

Conj pp 2 Dat Pl
legomen legO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m

Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
this
for
to-YOU(p) to-ye
WE-ARE-sayING IN
saying word thn ho
OF-Master of-Lord
that
WE
THE
zwntes zaO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
perileipomenoi eis perileipO eis

vp Pres pasD Nom Pl m Prep
parousian tou parousia ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
15 For this we say unto you by the word of the Lord, that we which are alive [and] remain unto the coming of the Lord shall not prevent them which are asleep.
t_ Acc Sg f
LIVING
THE
ones-survivING ones-surviving tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
INTO THE
Master Lord
NOT
mh mE
Part Neg
fqaswmen phthanO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
koimhqentas koimaO
vp Aor Pas Acc Pl m
NO
SHOULD-BE-OUTSTRIPPING THE
ones-BEING-reposED ones-being-put-to-repose en en
Prep
4:16 oti autos

hoti
Conj
autos
pp Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
keleusmati keleusma
n_ Dat Sg n
en en
Prep
fwnh phOnE
n_ Dat Sg f
arcaggelou archaggelos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
that
SAME shimself
THE
Master Lord katabhsetai katabainO

vi Fut midD 3 Sg
IN
ORDER-effect IN shout-of-command ap apo

Prep
SOUND voice
OF-chief-MESSENGER AND
en en
Prep
salpiggi qeou salpigx theos

ouranou kai oi ouranos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Nom Pl m
nekroi nekros
a_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
16 For the Lord himself shall descend from heaven with a shout, with the voice of the archangel, and with the trump of God: and the dead in Christ shall rise first:
IN
TRUMPET
OF-God
SHALL-BE-DOWN-STEPPING FROM heaven shall-be-descending prwton prOton

Adv
AND
THE
DEAD dead-ones
IN
cristw anasthsontai christos anistEmi

n_ Dat Sg m vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
ANOINTED Christ
SHALL-BE-UP-STANDING BEFORE-most shall-be-rising first hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
4:17 epeita
epeita
Adv
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
zwntes zaO
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
perileipomenoi ama perileipO hama

vp Pres pasD Nom Pl m Adv
ON-THEREAFTER WE thereupon sun sun

Prep
THE
LIVING
THE
ones-survivING ones-surviving
SIMULTANEOUS at-the-same-time kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
autois arpaghsomeqa autos harpazO

pp Dat Pl m vi 2Fut Pas 1 Pl
en en
Prep
nefelais eis nephelE eis

n_ Dat Pl f Prep
apanthsin tou apantEsis ho

17 Then we which are alive [and] remain shall be caught up together with them in the clouds, to meet the Lord in the air: and so shall we ever be with the Lord.
TOGETHER to-them with-them eis eis

Prep
SHALL-BE-BEING-SNATCHED IN shall-be-being-snatched-away
CLOUDS
INTO meeting
OF-THE
Master Lord
aera aEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai outws pantote sun kai houtOs pantote sun

Conj Adv Adv Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
esomeqa eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Pl
INTO AIR
AND
thus
always
TOGETHER to-Master togetherwith Lord allhlous en allElOn en

pc Acc Pl m Prep
WE-SHALL-BE
4:18 wste
hOste
Conj
parakaleite parakaleO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
logois toutois logos houtos

n_ Dat Pl m pd Dat Pl m
18 Wherefore comfort another with these words.
one
AS-BESIDES BE-YE-BESIDE-CALLING one-another so-that be-ye-consoling !
IN
THE
sayings words
these
AV
1Thessalonians 5
5:1 peri
peri
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
cronwn kai twn chronos kai ho

kairwn kairos
n_ Gen Pl m
adelfoi ou adelphos ou
creian chreia
n_ Acc Sg f
. But of the times and the seasons, brethren, ye have no need that I write unto you.
ABOUT YET THE concerning ecete echO

vi Pres Act 2 Pl
TIMES
AND
THE
SEASONS eras
brothers brethren !
NOT
need
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
grafesqai graphO
vn Pres Pas
YE-ARE-HAVING to-YOU(p) to-ye
TO-BE-beING-WRITTEN
5:2 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar akribws oidate gar akribOs eidO

Conj Adv vi Perf Act 2 Pl
oti hmera hoti hEmera

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ws klepths en hOs kleptEs en

Adv n_ Nom Sg m Prep
SAME yourselves nukti nux

n_ Dat Sg f
for
EXACTly accurately
DAY
OF-Master of-Lord
AS
thief
IN
For yourselves know perfectly that the day of the Lord so cometh as a thief in the night.
outws ercetai houtOs erchomai

NIGHT
thus
IS-COMING it-is-coming legwsin legO

vs Pres Act 3 Pl
5:3 otan
hotan
Conj
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai asfaleia tote aifnidios kai asphaleia tote aiphnidios

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Adv a_ Nom Sg m
autois autos
pp Dat Pl m
when-EVER THEY-MAY-BE-sayING PEACE whenever

WH
AND
UN-TOTTER security
then
UN-APPEAR-PERCEIVED to-them unawares them wdin Odin

n_ Nom Sg f
epistatai
NA
efistatai ephistEmi
vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
oleqros olethros
n_ Nom Sg m
wsper h hOsper ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
en en
Prep
gastri gastEr
n_ Dat Sg f
For when they shall say, Peace and safety; then sudden destruction cometh upon them, as travail upon a woman with child; and they shall not escape.
IS-beING-ON-STOOD is-standing-by ecoush echO

WHOLE-RUIN AS-EVEN extermination even-as ekfugwsin ekpheugO

vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
THE
travail pang
to-THE
IN
BELLY
kai ou kai ou
Conj Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
HAVING
AND
NOT
NO
THEY-MAY-BE-OUT-FLEEING they-may-be-escaping este eimi

vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
5:4 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj

en en
Prep
skotei ina skotos hina

n_ Dat Sg n Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
hmera hEmera
n_ Nom Sg f
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
ws hOs
Adv
YOU(p) ye
WH

NA
NOT
ARE
IN
DARKness THAT THE
DAY
YOU(p) ye
But ye, brethren, are not in darkness, that that day should overtake you as a thief.
AS
kleptas
klepths kleptEs
n_ Nom Sg m
katalabh katalambanO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
thief
MAY-BE-DOWN-GETTING may-be-overtaking uioi huios

n_ Nom Pl m
5:5 pantes gar umeis

pas
a_ Nom Pl m
gar
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
fwtos phOs
n_ Gen Sg n
este eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Pl
kai uioi kai huios

Conj n_ Nom Pl m
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
ALL
for
YOU(p) ye
SONS
OF-LIGHT
ARE
AND
SONS
OF-DAY
NOT
Ye are all the children of light, and the children of the day: we are not of the night, nor of darkness.
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
nuktos oude nux oude

n_ Gen Sg f Adv
skotous skotos
n_ Gen Sg n
WE-ARE
OF-NIGHT
NOT-YET OF-DARKness nor mh mE

Part Neg
5:6 ara
ara
Part
oun oun
Conj
kaqeudwmen katheudO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
ws oi hOs ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
alla alla
Conj
. Therefore let us not sleep, as [do] others; but let us watch and be sober.
CONSEQUENTLY THEN NO
WE-MAY-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING AS we-may-be-drowsing
THE
rest rest(p)
but
grhgorwmen grEgoreO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
kai nhfwmen kai nEphO

WE-MAY-BE-watchING AND
WE-MAY-BE-beING-sober may-be-being-sober nuktos kaqeudousin nux katheudO

5:7 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar kaqeudontes gar katheudO

kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
mequskomenoi methuskO
THE
for
ones-DOWN-LOUNGING OF-NIGHT ones-drowsing
ARE-DOWN-LOUNGING AND are-drowsing
THE
ones-beING-DRUNK ones-being-drunk
For they that sleep sleep in the night; and they that be drunken are drunken in the night.
nuktos mequousin nux methuO

OF-NIGHT
ARE-beING-DRUNK
AV
1Thessalonians 5
5:8 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
ontes eimi
nhfwmen nEphO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
endusamenoi qwraka pistews enduO thOrax pistis

vp Aor Mid Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m n_ Gen Sg f
WE
YET OF-DAY
BEING
MAY-BE-beING-sober IN-SLIPPing putting-on swthrias sOtEria

n_ Gen Sg f
CUIRASS
OF-BELIEF of-faith
But let us, who are of the day, be sober, putting on the breastplate of faith and love; and for an helmet, the hope of salvation.
kai agaphs kai perikefalaian elpida kai agapE kai perikephalaia elpis
Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
AND
LOVE
AND
ABOUT-HEAD helmet hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
EXPECTATION OF-SAVing of-salvation o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
5:9 oti ouk

hoti
Conj
ou
Part Neg
eqeto tithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 3 Sg
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
orghn orgE
n_ Acc Sg f
alla eis alla eis

Conj Prep
that
NOT
PLACED appointed
US
THE
God
INTO INDIGNATION but

WH
INTO
For God hath not appointed us to wrath, but to obtain salvation by our Lord Jesus Christ,
peripoihsin swthrias dia peripoiEsis sOtEria dia

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou
procuring
NA
OF-SAVing of-salvation
THRU THE through
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
5:10 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
apoqanontos apothnEskO
WH
peri
NA
uper huper
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
eite eite
Conj
grhgorwmen grEgoreO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
10 Who died for us, that, whether we wake or sleep, we should live together with him.
THE
One-FROM-DYING one-dying kaqeudwmen katheudO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
OVER for-the-sake-of ama hama

Adv
US
THAT IF-BESIDES WE-MAY-BE-watchING whether autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
eite eite
Conj
sun sun
Prep
zhswmen zaO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
IF-BESIDES WE-MAY-BE-DOWN-LOUNGING SIMULTANEOUS TOGETHER to-Him or may-be-drowsing at-the-same-time with-him
WE-SHOULD-BE-LIVING
5:11 dio
dio
Conj
parakaleite parakaleO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
allhlous kai oikodomeite allElOn kai oikodomeO

pc Acc Pl m Conj vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
THRU-WHICH BE-YE-BESIDE-CALLING one-another wherefore be-ye-consoling ! ena heis

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
BE-YE-HOME-BUILDING ONE be-ye-edifying !
THE
11 . Wherefore comfort yourselves together, and edify one another, even as also ye do.
kaqws kathOs
Adv
kai poieite kai poieO

ONE
according-AS AND also de de

Conj
YE-ARE-DOING
5:12 erwtwmen
erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi eidenai adelphos eidO

n_ Voc Pl m vn Perf Act
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
kopiwntas kopiaO
en en
Prep
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
kai kai
Conj
WE-ARE-askING YET YOU(p) ye proistamenous umwn proistEmi humeis

vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
brothers brethren ! kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-PERCEIVE THE
ones-toilING ones-toiling
IN YOU(p) among ye
AND
12 And we beseech you, brethren, to know them which labour among you, and are over you in the Lord, and admonish you;
en en
Prep
kai nouqetountas umas kai noutheteO humeis

Conj vp Pres Act Acc Pl m pp 2 Acc Pl
BEFORE-STANDING presiding
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
Master Lord
AND
admonishING
YOU(p) ye agaph agapE

n_ Dat Sg f
5:13 kai hgeisqai

kai
Conj
hEgeomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
autous uper ekperissou en autos huper ekperissOs en

pp Acc Pl m Prep Adv Prep
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
AND
TO-BE-deemING
them
OVER above en en
Prep
IN
LOVE
THRU THE because-of
work
13 And to esteem them very highly in love for their work's sake. [And] be at peace among yourselves.
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
eirhneuete eirEneuO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
OF-them
BE-YE-beING-at-PEACE IN selves be-ye-being-at-peace ! among yourselves de de

Conj
5:14 parakaloumen
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi nouqeteite adelphos noutheteO

tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ataktous ataktos
a_ Acc Pl m
WE-ARE-BESIDE-CALLING YET YOU(p) we-are-entreating ye paramuqeisqe paramutheomai

brothers brethren !
BE-YE-admonishING THE be-ye-admonishing ! twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
disorderly
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
oligoyucous antecesqe oligopsuchos antechomai

a_ Acc Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Pl
asqenwn makroqumeite asthenEs makrothumeO

a_ Gen Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Pl
14 Now we exhort you, brethren, warn them that are unruly, comfort the feebleminded, support the weak, be patient toward all [men].
BE-BESIDE-CLOSE-ING THE be-ye-comforting !
FEW-souls fainthearted
BE-upholdING be-ye-upholding !
THE
UN-FIRM infirm
BE-FAR-FEELING be-ye-being-patient !
AV
1Thessalonians 5
pros pros
Prep
pantas pas
a_ Acc Pl m
TOWARD ALL
5:15 orate
horaO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
kakon kakos
a_ Acc Sg n
anti anti
Prep
kakou kakos
a_ Gen Sg n
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
apodw apodidOmi
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
BE-SEEING be-ye-seeing ! pantote to pantote ho

Adv
NO
ANY anyone
EVIL
INSTEAD OF-EVIL
NA
to-ANY to-anyone
MAY-BE-FROM-GIVING but may-be-rendering pantas pas

a_ Acc Pl m
15 See that none render evil for evil unto any [man]; but ever follow that which is good, both among yourselves, and to all [men].
agaqon diwkete agathos diOkO

a_ Acc Sg n vm Pres Act 2 Pl
kai kai
Conj
eis eis
Prep
allhlous kai eis allElOn kai eis

pc Acc Pl m Conj Prep
t_ Acc Sg n
always
THE
GOOD
BE-YE-CHASING be-ye-pursuing !
AND
INTO one-another
AND
INTO ALL
5:16 pantote cairete

pantote
Adv
16
. Rejoice evermore.
chairO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
always
BE-JOYING be-ye-rejoicing !
17
5:17 adialeiptws proseucesqe

adialeiptOs
Adv
Pray without ceasing.
proseuchomai
UN-intermittingly unintermittingly
BE-YE-prayING be-ye-praying ! eucaristeite touto eucharisteO houtos

vm Pres Act 2 Pl pd Nom Sg n
5:18 en
en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
gar qelhma gar thelEma

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep

eis eis
Prep
18 In every thing give thanks: for this is the will of God in Christ Jesus concerning you.
IN
EVERY everything
BE-YE-thankING be-ye-giving-thanks !
this
for
WILL
OF-God
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
INTO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
YOU(p) ye
5:19 to
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pneuma mh pneuma mE
sbennute sbennumi
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
19
Quench not the Spirit.
THE
spirit
NO
BE-YE-EXTINGUISHING be-ye-quenching ! exouqeneite exoutheneO

vm Pres Act 2 Pl
20
5:20 profhteias
prophEteia
n_ Acc Pl f
mh mE
Part Neg
Despise not prophesyings.
BEFORE-AVERments NO prophecies
BE-YE-scornING be-ye-scorning !
NA
5:21 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
WH
de
de de
Conj
dokimazete to dokimazO ho
vm Pres Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg n
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg n
katecete katechO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
21 Prove all things; hold fast that which is good.
ALL
YET
BE-testING be-ye-testing ! ponhrou ponEros

a_ Gen Sg n
THE
IDEAL
BE-YE-DOWN-HAVING be-ye-retaining !
22 Abstain from all appearance of evil.
5:22 apo
apo
Prep
pantos eidous pas eidos

apecesqe apechomai
vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
FROM EVERY
PERCEPtion OF-wicked BE-YE-FROM-HAVING of-wicked-thing be-ye-abstaining ! o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
5:23 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs agiasai eirEnE hagiazO

n_ Gen Sg f vo Aor Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oloteleis holotelEs
a_ Acc Pl m
SAME shimself
YET THE
God
OF-THE
PEACE
MAY-He-BE-HOLYizING YOU(p) may-he-be-hallowing ! ye yuch psuchE

n_ Nom Sg f
WHOLE-FINISH wholly swma sOma

n_ Nom Sg n
kai oloklhron kai holoklEros

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
kai to kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg n
23 . And the very God of peace sanctify you wholly; and [I pray God] your whole spirit and soul and body be preserved blameless unto the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
WHOLE-LOTTed OF-YOU(p) THE unimpaired of-ye th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
spirit
AND
THE
soul
AND
THE
BODY
amemptws en amemptOs en
Adv Prep
parousia parousia
n_ Dat Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
UN-BLAMEably blameless thrhqeih tEreO

vo Aor Pas 3 Sg
IN
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
MAY-BE-BEING-KEPT may-it-be-being-kept !
AV
5:24 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kalwn kaleO
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
kai poihsei kai poieO

24 Faithful [is] he that calleth you, who also will do [it].
BELIEVing faithful
THE
One-CALLING one-calling kai kai

Conj
YOU(p) ye peri peri

Prep
WHO
AND also
SHALL-BE-DOING shall-be-doing-it
25
5:25 adelfoi proseucesqe

adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
proseuchomai
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
Brethren, pray for us.
brothers brethren !
AND also
ABOUT US concerning filhmati agiw philEma hagios

26 Greet all the brethren with an holy kiss.
5:26 aspasasqe tous

aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Pl
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
adelfous pantas en adelphos pas en

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m Prep
greet-YE greet-ye !
THE
brothers brethren ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
ALL
IN
FOND-effect kiss
HOLY
5:27 enorkizw
enorkizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
anagnwsqhnai thn anaginOskO ho

epistolhn pasin epistolE pas

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Dat Pl m
I-AM-IN-OATHizING YOU(p) I-am-adjuring-by ye tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
27 I charge you by the Lord that this epistle be read unto all the holy brethren.
THE
Master Lord
TO-BE-read
THE
letter epistle
to-ALL
adelfois adelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
THE
brothers brethren caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
5:28 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meq christos meta

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH YOU(p) ye
28 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you. Amen. <<[The first [epistle] to the Thessalonians was written from Athens.]>>
AV
2Thessalonians 1
2Thessalonians
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai silouanos kai timoqeos th kai silouanos kai timotheos ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Dat Sg f
ekklhsia qessalonikewn en ekklEsia thessalonikeus en

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Gen Pl m Prep
PAUL
AND
SILVANUS
AND
Timothy
to-THE
OUT-CALLED OF-THESSALONICans ecclesia of-Thessalonians
IN
. Paul, and Silvanus, and Timotheus, unto the church of the Thessalonians in God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ:
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
patri patEr
n_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai kuriw kai kurios

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord apo apo

Prep
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ patros patEr

n_ Gen Sg m
NA
1:2 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
Grace unto you, and peace, from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
1:3 eucaristein ofeilomen

eucharisteO
vn Pres Act
opheilO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m

Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Voc Pl m
TO-BE-thankING
WE-ARE-OWING to-THE we-ought the estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
God
always
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
brothers brethren ! umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
kaqws kathOs
Adv
axion axios
a_ Nom Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
uperauxanei huperauxanO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kai
Conj
We are bound to thank God always for you, brethren, as it is meet, because that your faith groweth exceedingly, and the charity of every one of you all toward each other aboundeth;
according-AS WORTHY meet pleonazei h pleonazO ho

vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
IS it-is agaph agapE

n_ Nom Sg f
that IS-OVER-GROWING-UP THE seeing-that is-flourishing enos heis

n_ Gen Sg m
BELIEF faith eis eis

Prep
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye allhlous allElOn

pc Acc Pl m
ekastou pantwn umwn hekastos pas humeis

a_ Gen Sg m a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
IS-MOREizING is-increasing
THE
LOVE
ONE of-one en en
Prep
OF-EACH each umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-ALL
OF-YOU(p) INTO one-another of-ye tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
1:4 wste
hOste
Conj
autous hmas autos hEmeis

pp Acc Pl m pp 1 Acc Pl
egkaucasqai en egkauchaomai en
ekklhsiais tou ekklEsia ho

n_ Dat Pl f t_ Gen Sg m
AS-BESIDES SAME so-that ourselves qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
US
IN
YOU(p) ye
TO-IN-BOAST to-glory umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
IN
THE
OUT-CALLEDS ecclesias pasin pas

a_ Dat Pl m
OF-THE
So that we ourselves glory in you in the churches of God for your patience and faith in all your persecutions and tribulations that ye endure:
uper huper
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
upomonhs hupomonE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai pistews en kai pistis en

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
God
UNDER-REMAINing OF-YOU(p) AND endurance of-ye qliyesin thlipsis

n_ Dat Pl f
BELIEF faith
IN
ALL
THE
diwgmois umwn diOgmos humeis

kai tais kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl f
ais hos
pr Dat Pl f
anecesqe anechomai
OF-YOU(p) AND of-ye
THE
CONSTRICTIONS WHICH afflictions
YE-ARE-toleratING ye-are-bearing-with eis eis

Prep
1:5 endeigma ths

endeigma
n_ Nom Sg n
ho
t_ Gen Sg f
dikaias krisews tou dikaios krisis ho

a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
kataxiwqhnai kataxioO
vn Aor Pas
IN-SHOW display umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
OF-THE
JUST
JUDGing
OF-THE
God
INTO THE
TO-BE-DOWN-WORTHIED to-deem-worthy
. [Which is] a manifest token of the righteous judgment of God, that ye may be counted worthy of the kingdom of God, for which ye also suffer:
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
uper huper
Prep
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
kai pascete kai paschO

YOU(p) ye
OF-THE
KINGdom
OF-THE
God
OVER WHICH for-the-sake-of
AND also
YE-ARE-EMOTIONING ye-are-suffering umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
6
1:6 eiper
eiper
Cond
dikaion para dikaios para

a_ Nom Sg n Prep
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
antapodounai tois antapodidOmi ho

vn 2Aor Act t_ Dat Pl m
qlibousin thlibO
IF-EVEN JUST if-so-be-that it-is-just qliyin thlipsis

n_ Acc Sg f
BESIDE God
TO-repay
to-THE
ones-CONSTRICTING YOU(p) ones-afflicting ye
Seeing [it is] a righteous thing with God to recompense tribulation to them that trouble you;
AV
2Thessalonians 1
1:7 kai umin

kai
Conj
humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
qlibomenois thlibO
anesin anesis
n_ Acc Sg f
meq meta
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
AND
to-YOU(p) to-ye
THE
ones-beING-CONSTRICTED UP-LETTing WITH US ones-being-afflicted ease kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
IN
THE
And to you who are troubled rest with us, when the Lord Jesus shall be revealed from heaven with his mighty angels,
apokaluyei tou apokalupsis ho

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
ap apo
Prep
ouranou met aggelwn ouranos meta aggelos

n_ Gen Sg m Prep n_ Gen Pl m
dunamews dunamis
n_ Gen Sg f
FROM-COVERing unveiling autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
FROM heaven
WITH MESSENGERS OF-ABILITY of-power
OF-Him
1:8 en
en
Prep
puri pur
n_ Dat Sg n
flogos didontos phlox didOmi

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Sg m
ekdikhsin tois ekdikEsis ho

mh mE
Part Neg
eidosin eidO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
IN
FIRE
OF-BLAZE of-flame mh mE
Part Neg
GIVING dealing-out
to-THE NO to-the-ones tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-PERCEIVED God being-acquainted-with kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
In flaming fire taking vengeance on them that know not God, and that obey not the gospel of our Lord Jesus Christ:
kai tois kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Pl m
upakouousin tw hupakouO ho
vp Pres Act Dat Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
n_ Dat Sg n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
THE NO to-the-ones
ARE-obeyING obeying tisousin tinO

vi Fut Act 3 Pl
to-THE the
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
1:9 oitines dikhn

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
dikE
n_ Acc Sg f
oleqron olethros
n_ Acc Sg m
aiwnion apo aiOnios apo

a_ Acc Sg m Prep

WHO-ANY who-any kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
JUSTice
SHALL-BE-incurrING WHOLE-RUIN eonian of-extermination ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
FROM face
OF-THE
Who shall be punished with everlasting destruction from the presence of the Lord, and from the glory of his power;
kai apo kai apo

Conj Prep
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
iscuos ischus
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
Master Lord
AND
FROM THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
STRENGTH OF-Him
1:10 otan
hotan
Conj
elqh erchomai
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
endoxasqhnai en endoxazO en
vn Aor Pas Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
agiois hagios
a_ Dat Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
when-EVER He-MAY-BE-COMING TO-BE-IN-esteemED whenever to-be-glorified-in qaumasqhnai en thaumazO en

vn Aor Pas Prep
IN
THE
HOLY-ones OF-Him saints episteuqh pisteuO

vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND
10 When he shall come to be glorified in his saints, and to be admired in all them that believe (because our testimony among you was believed) in that day.
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pisteusasin oti pisteuO hoti

vp Aor Act Dat Pl m Conj
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
marturion marturion
n_ Nom Sg n
TO-BE-MARVELED IN to-be-marveled-at hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
ALL
THE
ones-BELIEVing ones-believing hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
that WAS-BELIEVED THE seeing-that
witness testimony
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ekeinh ekeinos
pd Dat Sg f
OF-US
ON
YOU(p) ye
IN
THE
DAY
that
1:11 eis
eis
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai proseucomeqa pantote peri kai proseuchomai pantote peri

Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Pl Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
INTO WHICH
AND also
WE-ARE-prayING
always
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
THAT YOU(p) ye kai plhrwsh kai plEroO

axiwsh axioO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
klhsews o klEsis ho
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
11 . Wherefore also we pray always for you, that our God would count you worthy of [this] calling, and fulfil all the good pleasure of [his] goodness, and the work of faith with power:
SHOULD-BE-countING-WORTHY OF-THE
CALLing
THE
God
OF-US
AND
SHOULD-BE-FILLING should-be-fulfilling
pasan pas
a_ Acc Sg f
eudokian eudokia
n_ Acc Sg f
agaqwsunhs kai ergon agathOsunE kai ergon

n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg n
n_ Gen Sg f Prep
dunamei dunamis
n_ Dat Sg f
EVERY
WELL-SEEMing OF-GOODness delight endoxasqh endoxazO

vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
AND
work
OF-BELIEF of-faith onoma onoma

n_ Nom Sg n
IN
ABILITY power kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
1:12 opws
hopOs
Adv
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
WHICH-how MAY-BE-BEING-IN-esteemED THE so-that may-be-being-glorified en en

Prep
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord tou ho
OF-US
JESUS
12 That the name of our Lord Jesus Christ may be glorified in you, and ye in him, according to the grace of our God and the Lord Jesus Christ.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl

Conj pp 2 Nom Pl
en en
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
carin charis
n_ Acc Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
t_ Gen Sg m
IN
YOU(p) ye
AND
YOU(p) ye
IN
Him
grace
OF-THE
God
OF-US
AV

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AV
2Thessalonians 2
2:1 erwtwmen
erOtaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
adelfoi uper adelphos huper

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parousias tou parousia ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
WE-ARE-askING YET YOU(p) ye

WH
brothers brethren !
OF-THE
Master Lord auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
. Now we beseech you, brethren, by the coming of our Lord Jesus Christ, and [by] our gathering together unto him,
hmwn
NA
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou kai hmwn christos kai hemeis

n_ Gen Sg m Conj pp 1 Gen Pl
episunagwghs episunagOgE
n_ Gen Sg f
ep epi
Prep
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AND
OF-US
ON-TOGETHER-LEADing ON assembling apo apo

Prep
Him
2:2 eis
eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
tacews saleuqhnai umas tacheOs saleuO humeis

Adv vn Aor Pas pp 2 Acc Pl
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
noos nous
n_ Gen Sg m
mhde mEde
Conj
INTO THE
NO
SWIFTly quickly dia dia

Prep
TO-BE-SHAKEN
YOU(p) ye
FROM THE
MIND
NO-YET nor-yet mhte mEte

Conj
That ye be not soon shaken in mind, or be troubled, neither by spirit, nor by word, nor by letter as from us, as that the day of Christ is at hand.
qroeisqai throeO
vn Pres Pas
mhte mEte
Conj
pneumatos mhte pneuma mEte

n_ Gen Sg n Conj
dia dia
Prep
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
di dia
Prep
TO-BE-beING-ALARMED NO-BESIDES THRU spirit noeither through epistolhs ws di epistolE hOs dia
n_ Gen Sg f Adv Prep
NO-BESIDES THRU saying noor through word hmera hEmera

n_ Nom Sg f
NO-BESIDES THRU noor through tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ws oti enesthken h hOs hoti enistEmi ho

Adv Conj vi Perf Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg f
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
letter epistle
AS
THRU US through umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
AS
that
HAS-IN-STOOD THE is-present kata kata

Prep
DAY
OF-THE
Master Lord
3
2:3 mh
mE
Part Neg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
exapathsh exapataO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
mhdena mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg m
tropon oti ean tropos hoti ean

n_ Acc Sg m Conj Cond
NO
ANY anyone elqh erchomai

vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
YOU(p) ye h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
SHOULD-BE-OUT-SEDUCING according-to NO-YET-ONE manner should-be-deluding any method apostasia apostasia

n_ Nom Sg f
that
IF-EVER
mh mE
Part Neg
prwton prOton
Adv
kai apokalufqh kai apokaluptO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
. Let no man deceive you by any means: for [that day shall not come], except there come a falling away first, and that man of sin be revealed, the son of perdition;
NO
MAY-BE-COMING THE
FROM-STANDing BEFORE-most AND apostasy first o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED THE may-be-being-unveiled apwleias apOleia

n_ Gen Sg f
anqrwpos ths anthrOpos ho

anomias anomia
n_ Gen Sg f
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
human
OF-THE
UN-LAWness THE lawlessness
SON
OF-THE
destruction
2:4 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
antikeimenos antikeimai
kai uperairomenos epi kai uperairO epi

Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
legomenon legO
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
THE
one-opposING one-opposing wste hOste

Conj
AND
beING-OVER-LIFTED lifting-up-himself eis eis

Prep
ON EVERY onover all tou ho
beING-said
god
h E
Part
sebasma sebasma
n_ Acc Sg n
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
naon naos
n_ Acc Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kaqisai kathizO
vn Aor Act
Who opposeth and exalteth himself above all that is called God, or that is worshipped; so that he as God sitteth in the temple of God, shewing himself that he is God.
t_ Gen Sg m
OR
venerated AS-BESIDES him object-of-veneration so-that oti estin hoti eimi

Conj
INTO THE
TEMPLE
OF-THE
God
TO-be-seated
apodeiknunta eauton apodeiknumi heautou

vp Pres Act Acc Sg m pf 3 Acc Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
FROM-SHOWING demonstrating
self himself
that
he-IS
God
2:5 ou
ou
Part Neg
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
oti eti hoti eti

Conj Adv
wn eimi
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
elegon legO
vi impf Act 1 Sg
NOT
YE-ARE-rememberING that
STILL BEING
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
Remember ye not, that, when I was yet with you, I told you these things?
these I-said these-things I-told
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
to-YOU(p) ye
2:6 kai nun to

kai
Conj
nun
Adv
ho
t_ Acc Sg n
katecon katechO
oidate eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
apokalufqhnai apokaluptO
vn Aor Pas
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
And now ye know what withholdeth that he might be revealed in his time.
AND
NOW THE
WH
DOWN-HAVING detaining
NA
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED INTO THE ye-are-aware kairw kairos

n_ Dat Sg m
TO-BE-FROM-COVERED him to-be-unveiled
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
autou
eautou heautou
pf 3 Gen Sg m
IN
THE
OF-self of-himself
SEASON era
AV
2Thessalonians 2
2:7 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
gar musthrion hdh gar mustErion EdE

Conj n_ Nom Sg n Adv
energeitai ths energeO ho

vi Pres Mid 3 Sg t_ Gen Sg f
anomias anomia
n_ Gen Sg f
monon o monon ho
Adv t_ Nom Sg m
THE
for
CLOSE-KEEP secret arti arti

Adv
ALREADY IS-IN-ACTING is-operating mesou mesos

a_ Gen Sg n
OF-THE
UN-LAWness ONLY lawlessness
THE
For the mystery of iniquity doth already work: only he who now letteth [will let], until he be taken out of the way.
katecwn katechO
ews ek heOs ek
Conj Prep
genhtai ginomai
vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
one-DOWN-HAVING at-PRESENT TILL one-detaining
OUT OF-MIDst
it-MAY-BE-BECOMING may-be-becoming anomos anomos

a_ Nom Sg m
2:8 kai tote apokalufqhsetai

kai
Conj
tote
Adv
apokaluptO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
then
SHALL-BE-BEING-FROM-COVERED THE shall-be-being-unveiled anelei anaireO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
UN-LAWed lawless-one
WHOM
THE
Master Lord kai kai

Conj
ihsous iEsous
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n

n_ Dat Sg n t_ Gen Sg n

And then shall that Wicked be revealed, whom the Lord shall consume with the spirit of his mouth, and shall destroy with the brightness of his coming:
JESUS
SHALL-BE-UP-LIFTING to-THE shall-be-despatching th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
spirit
OF-THE
MOUTH
OF-Him
AND
katarghsei katargeO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
epifaneia epiphaneia
n_ Dat Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
parousias autou parousia autos

SHALL-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING to-THE shall-be-discarding
ON-APPEARance OF-THE advent parousia parousia

n_ Nom Sg f
OF-Him
2:9 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
kat kata
Prep
energeian tou energeia ho

satana satanas
n_ Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
OF-WHOM
IS
THE
BESIDE-BEING according-to IN-ACTion presence in-accord-with operation
OF-THE
SATAN (adversary) IN Satan
[Even him], whose coming is after the working of Satan with all power and signs and lying wonders,
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
dunamei kai shmeiois kai terasin yeudous dunamis kai sEmeion kai teras pseudos
n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Pl n Conj n_ Dat Pl n n_ Gen Sg n
EVERY all
ABILITY power
AND
SIGNS
AND
MIRACLES
OF-FALSEhood
2:10 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
apath apatE
n_ Dat Sg f
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
anq anti
Prep
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
AND
IN
EVERY
SEDUCtion OF-UN-JUSTness to-THE of-injustice alhqeias ouk alEtheia ou

ones-beING-destroyED INSTEAD OF-WHICH ones-perishing corresponding-to which(p) eis eis

Prep
10 And with all deceivableness of unrighteousness in them that perish; because they received not the love of the truth, that they might be saved.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn ths agapE ho

edexanto dechomai
vi Aor midD 3 Pl
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
swqhnai sOzO
vn Aor Pas
autous autos
pp Acc Pl m
THE
LOVE
OF-THE
TRUTH
NOT
THEY-RECEIVE INTO THE
TO-BE-SAVED them
2:11 kai dia

kai
Conj
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
pempei pempO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
autois o autos ho
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
energeian planhs energeia planE

eis eis
Prep
11 And for this cause God shall send them strong delusion, that they should believe a lie:
AND
IS-SENDING
to-them them yeudei pseudos

n_ Dat Sg n
THE
God
IN-ACTion operation
OF-STRAYing INTO of-deception
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
pisteusai autous tw pisteuO autos ho

vn Aor Act pp Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg n
THE
TO-BELIEVE
them
to-THE the pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
FALSEhood
2:12 ina
hina
Conj
kriqwsin krinO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
pisteusantes th pisteuO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia alla alEtheia alla

n_ Dat Sg f Conj
THAT MAY-BE-BEING-JUDGED ALL
THE the-ones
NO
ones-BELIEVing believing
to-THE the
TRUTH
but
12 That they all might be damned who believed not the truth, but had pleasure in unrighteousness.
eudokhsantes th eudokeO ho
vp Aor Act Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
adikia adikia
n_ Dat Sg f
WELL-SEEMing delighting
to-THE
UN-JUSTness injustice qew theos

n_ Dat Sg m
2:13 hmeis
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
ofeilomen eucaristein tw opheilO eucharisteO ho

vi Pres Act 1 Pl vn Pres Act t_ Dat Sg m

Adv Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
WE
YET ARE-OWING ought
TO-BE-thankING
to-THE the oti hoti

Conj
God
always
ABOUT YOU(p) concerning ye o ho

t_ Nom Sg m
adelfoi hgaphmenoi adelphos agapaO

n_ Voc Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
upo hupo
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
eilato haireomai
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
13 . But we are bound to give thanks alway to God for you, brethren beloved of the Lord, because God hath from the beginning chosen you to salvation through sanctification of the Spirit and belief of the truth:
brothers brethren !
HAVING-been-LOVED UNDER Master beloved by Lord
that prefers seeing-that
YOU(p) ye
THE
God
AV
WH
ap archs
WH
NA
aparchn aparchE
n_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
swthrian en sOtEria en
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
agiasmw pneumatos kai pistei hagiasmos pneuma kai pistis

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Gen Sg n Conj n_ Dat Sg f
first-fruit firstfruit alhqeias alEtheia

n_ Gen Sg f
IN
HOLYing hallowing
OF-spirit
AND
BELIEF to-faith
OF-TRUTH
NA
2:14 eis
eis
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
kai kai
Conj
ekalesen umas kaleO humeis

dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
euaggeliou hmwn euaggelion hemeis

eis eis
Prep
INTO WHICH
AND also tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
He-CALLS
YOU(p) ye hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
THRU THE through ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
WELL-MESSAGE OF-US
INTO
14 Whereunto he called you by our gospel, to the obtaining of the glory of our Lord Jesus Christ.
peripoihsin doxhs peripoiEsis doxa

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
procuring
OF-esteem OF-THE of-glory oun oun

Conj
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
2:15 ara
ara
Part
adelfoi sthkete adelphos stEkO

kai krateite kai krateO

paradoseis paradosis
n_ Acc Pl f
CONSEQUENTLY THEN brothers brethren ! as hos

pr Acc Pl f
BE-STANDING-firm AND be-ye-standing-firm ! dia dia

Prep
BE-YE-HOLDING THE be-ye-holding-to ! di dia

Prep
traditions
15 Therefore, brethren, stand fast, and hold the traditions which ye have been taught, whether by word, or our epistle.
edidacqhte didaskO
vi Aor Pas 2 Pl
eite eite
Conj
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
eite eite
Conj
epistolhs hmwn epistolE hemeis

WHICH
YE-WERE-TAUGHT IF-BESIDES THRU saying whether through word de de

Conj
IF-BESIDES THRU letter or through epistle ihsous iEsous

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-US
2:16 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
cristos kai christos kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
SAME shimself o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
YET THE
Master Lord o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
AND
THE
God
pathr patEr
n_ Nom Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
agaphsas agapaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
kai dous kai didOmi

n_ Acc Sg f
16 . Now our Lord Jesus Christ himself, and God, even our Father, which hath loved us, and hath given [us] everlasting consolation and good hope through grace,
THE
FATHER
OF-US
THE
One-LOVing one-loving cariti charis

n_ Dat Sg f
US
AND
GIVING giving-us
aiwnian kai elpida aiOnios kai elpis

a_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg f
agaqhn en agathos en
a_ Acc Sg f Prep
eonian
AND
EXPECTATION GOOD
IN
grace
2:17 parakalesai
parakaleO
vo Aor Act 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kardias kai sthrixai kardia kai stErizO

n_ Acc Pl f Conj vo Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
MAY-He-BE-BESIDE-CALLING OF-YOU(p) THE may-he-be-consoling ! of-ye ergw ergon

n_ Dat Sg n
17 Comfort your hearts, and stablish you in every good word and work.
HEARTS
AND
MAY-He-STAND-fast IN may-he-establish !
EVERY
kai logw kai logos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
agaqw agathos
a_ Dat Sg n
ACT work
AND
saying word
GOOD
AV
2Thessalonians 3
3:1 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
loipon loipon
a_ Nom Sg n
adelfoi peri adelphos peri

n_ Voc Pl m Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
THE
rest furthermore kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
brothers brethren !
ABOUT US concerning kaqws kathOs

Adv
THAT THE
saying word umas humeis

pp 2 Acc Pl
. Finally, brethren, pray for us, that the word of the Lord may have [free] course, and be glorified, even as [it is] with you:
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
trech trechO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
kai doxazhtai kai doxazO

kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
OF-THE
Master Lord
MAY-BE-RACING AND
MAY-BE-beING-esteemED according-AS AND may-be-being-glorified also apo apo

Prep
TOWARD YOU(p) ye
2
3:2 kai ina

kai
Conj
hina
Conj
rusqwmen rhuomai
vs Aor Pas 1 Pl
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
atopwn atopos
a_ Gen Pl m
kai ponhrwn anqrwpwn kai ponEros anthrOpos

Conj a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
AND
THAT WE-SHOULD-BE-BEING-rescuED FROM THE
UN-PLACED AND abnormal
wicked
humans
And that we may be delivered from unreasonable and wicked men: for all [men] have not faith.
ou ou
Part Neg
gar pantwn h gar pas ho

Conj a_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Sg f
pistis pistis
n_ Nom Sg f
NOT
for
OF-ALL
THE
BELIEF faith o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
3:3 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
sthrixei stErizO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
kai kai
Conj
BELIEVing faithful fulaxei phulassO

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
YET IS
THE
Master Lord ponhrou ponEros

a_ Gen Sg m
WHO
SHALL-BE-STANDING-fast YOU(p) shall-be-establishing ye
But the Lord is faithful, who shall stablish you, and keep [you] from evil.
AND
apo apo
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-GUARDING FROM THE shall-be-guarding-you
wicked wicked-one kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
3:4 pepoiqamen
peithO
vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
ef epi
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
oti a hoti hos

Conj pr Acc Pl n
paraggellomen paraggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai kai
Conj
WE-HAVE-confidence YET IN
Master Lord
ON
YOU(p) ye
that
WHICH which(p)
WE-ARE-chargING
AND also
And we have confidence in the Lord touching you, that ye both do and will do the things which we command you.
poieite poieO
vi Pres Act 2 Pl
kai poihsete kai poieO

YE-ARE-DOING AND
YE-SHALL-BE-DOING shall-be-doing kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
3:5 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
kateuqunai kateuthunO
vo Aor Act 3 Sg
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
kardias eis kardia eis

n_ Acc Pl f Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
THE
YET Master Lord qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
MAY-He-BE-DOWN-straightenING OF-YOU(p) THE may-he-be-directing ! of-ye kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
HEARTS
INTO THE
And the Lord direct your hearts into the love of God, and into the patient waiting for Christ.
agaphn tou agapE ho

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
upomonhn hupomonE
n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
LOVE
OF-THE
God
AND
INTO THE
UNDER-REMAINing OF-THE endurance onomati tou onoma ho

ANOINTED Christ kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
NA
3:6 paraggellomen de
paraggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
de
Conj
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
adelfoi en adelphos en
n_ Voc Pl m Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
WE-ARE-chargING
YET to-YOU(p) ye
brothers brethren !
IN
NAME
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou stellesqai umas christos stellomai humeis

n_ Gen Sg m vn Pres Mid pp 2 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
adelfou ataktws adelphos ataktOs

n_ Gen Sg m Adv
. Now we command you, brethren, in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, that ye withdraw yourselves from every brother that walketh disorderly, and not after the tradition which he received of us.
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE-PUTTING
YOU(p) FROM EVERY yourselves thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
brother
disorderly
WH
peripatountos kai mh peripateO kai mE

vp Pres Act Gen Sg m Conj Part Neg
kata kata
Prep
paradosin hn paradosis hos

parelabete
NA
AND
NO
according-to THE in-accord-with hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
tradition
WHICH
parelabosan paralambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
par para
Prep
THEY-BESIDE-GET they-accept
BESIDE US
3:7 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
gar oidate gar eidO

pws dei pOs deO

mimeisqai mimeomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
SAME yourselves
for
YE-HAVE-PERCEIVED how ye-are-aware
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-IMITATING US
that
NOT
For yourselves know how ye ought to follow us: for we behaved not ourselves disorderly among you;
AV
2Thessalonians 3
htakthsamen en atakteO en
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
WE-are-disorderly
IN YOU(p) among ye efagomen para esthiO para

3:8 oude
oude
Adv
dwrean arton dOrean artos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
tinos tis
px Gen Sg m
all en alla en
Conj Prep
kopw kopos
n_ Dat Sg m
kai mocqw kai mochthos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
NOT-YET gratuitously neither
BREAD
WE-ATE
BESIDE ANY anyone pros pros

Prep
but
IN
toil
AND
LABOR
Neither did we eat any man's bread for nought; but wrought with labour and travail night and day, that we might not be chargeable to any of you:
nuktos kai hmeras nux kai hEmera

to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mh mE
Part Neg
epibarhsai epibareO
vn Aor Act
tina tis
px Acc Sg m
OF-NIGHT night umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
AND
OF-DAY day
workING
TOWARD THE
NO
TO-be-ON-HEAVY ANY to-be-burdensome to-any
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
3:9 ouc
ou
Part Neg
oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
ecomen echO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
exousian all ina exousia alla hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj Conj
eautous tupon heautou tupos

pf 3 Acc Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
dwmen didOmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
NOT
that
NOT
WE-ARE-HAVING authority right mimeisqai mimeomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
but
THAT selves ourselves
type model
WE-MAY-BE-GIVING
Not because we have not power, but to make ourselves an ensample unto you to follow us.
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
to-YOU(p) ye
INTO THE
TO-BE-IMITATING US
3:10 kai gar ote hmen

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
hote
Adv
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
pros pros
Prep
umas humeis
pp 2 Acc Pl
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
parhggellomen umin paraggellO humeis

vi impf Act 1 Pl pp 2 Dat Pl
oti ei hoti ei
Conj Cond
AND for even tis tis

px Nom Sg m
when
WE-WERE
TOWARD YOU(p) ye ergazesqai ergazomai

vn Pres midD/pasD
this
WE-chargED
to-YOU(p) ye
that
IF
10 For even when we were with you, this we commanded you, that if any would not work, neither should he eat.
ou ou
Part Neg
qelei thelO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
mhde mEde
Conj
esqietw esthiO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
ANY anyone
NOT
IS-WILLING
TO-BE-workING
NO-YET LET-him-BE-EATING neither let-him-be-eating ! umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
3:11 akouomen
akouO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
gar tinas gar tis

Conj px Acc Pl m
peripatountas en peripateO en
ataktws mhden ataktOs mEdeis

Adv a_ Acc Sg n
WE-ARE-HEARING for
ANY some
ABOUT-TREADING are-walking
IN YOU(p) among ye
disorderly
NO-YET-ONE nothing
11 For we hear that there are some which walk among you disorderly, working not at all, but are busybodies.
ergazomenous ergazomai
alla periergazomenous alla periergazomai

Conj vp Pres midD/pasD Acc Pl m
workING
but
ABOUT-ACTING are-meddling en en
Prep
3:12 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
toioutois paraggellomen kai parakaloumen toioutos paraggellO kai parakaleO

pd Dat Pl m vi Pres Act 1 Pl Conj vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
YET such such(p)
WE-ARE-chargING
AND
ARE-BESIDE-CALLING IN are-entreating ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
Master Lord
JESUS
12 Now them that are such we command and exhort by our Lord Jesus Christ, that with quietness they work, and eat their own bread.
cristw ina christos hina

n_ Dat Sg m Conj
meta hsucias ergazomenoi meta hEsuchia ergazomai

Prep n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m
eautwn heautou
pf 3 Gen Pl m
arton artos
n_ Acc Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
THAT WITH
QUIETness
workING
THE
OF-selves BREAD of-themselves
esqiwsin esthiO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-MAY-BE-EATING
3:13 umeis
humeis
pp 2 Nom Pl
de de
Conj
adelfoi mh adelphos mE
egkakhshte egkakeO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
kalopoiountes kalopoieO
13 But ye, brethren, be not weary in well doing.
YOU(p) ye
YET brothers brethren ! tis tis

px Nom Sg m
NO
SHOULD-BE-IN-EVIL-ING IDEAL-DOING should-be-being-despondent in-ideal-doing logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
3:14 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ouc ou
Part Neg
upakouei tw hupakouO ho
vi Pres Act 3 Sg t_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epistolhs epistolE
n_ Gen Sg f
IF
YET ANY anyone
NOT
IS-obeyING
to-THE the
saying word
OF-US
THRU THE through
letter epistle
14 And if any man obey not our word by this epistle, note that man, and have no company with him, that he may be ashamed.
AV
2Thessalonians 3 - 1Timothy 1
touton shmeiousqe houtos sEmeioO

pd Acc Sg m vm Pres Mid 2 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
vn Pres Mid
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
this
BE-YE-beING-SIGNED NO let-it-be-a-sign-to-ye !
TO-BE-beING-TOGETHER-UP-MIXED to-him to-be-commingling-with him
THAT
entraph entrepO
vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
he-MAY-BE-beING-abashed
3:15 kai mh
kai
Conj
mE
Part Neg
ws ecqron hOs echthros

Adv a_ Acc Sg m
hgeisqe hEgeomai
alla nouqeteite alla noutheteO

ws adelfon hOs adelphos

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
15 Yet count [him] not as an enemy, but admonish [him] as a brother.
AND
NO
AS
enemy
BE-deemING be-ye-deeming-him ! kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
but
BE-YE-admonishING AS be-ye-admonishing-him !
brother
3:16 autos
autos
pp Nom Sg m
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eirhnhs dwh eirEnE didOmi

n_ Gen Sg f vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
SAME shimself eirhnhn dia eirEnE dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
YET THE
Master Lord en en
Prep
OF-THE
PEACE
MAY-He-BE-GIVING to-YOU(p) may-he-be-giving ! ye kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
16 . Now the Lord of peace himself give you peace always by all means. The Lord [be] with you all.
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
tropw tropos
n_ Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m

PEACE
IN
EVERY
manner means
THE
Master Lord paulou paulos

n_ Gen Sg m
WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye shmeion en sEmeion en

n_ Nom Sg n Prep
17 The salutation of Paul with mine own hand, which is the token in every epistle: so I write.
3:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
emh emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THE
greeting salutation
to-THE
MY
HAND
OF-PAUL
WHICH
IS
SIGN
IN
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
epistolh outws grafw epistolE houtOs graphO

n_ Dat Sg f Adv vi Pres Act 1 Sg
EVERY
letter epistle caris charis
thus
I-AM-WRITING
3:18 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meta pantwn umwn christos meta pas humeis

n_ Gen Sg m Prep a_ Gen Pl m pp 2 Gen Pl
n_ Nom Sg f
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
18 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with you all. Amen. <<[The second [epistle] to the Thessalonians was written from Athens.]>>
AV
1Timothy 1
1Timothy
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kat kata
Prep
epitaghn qeou epitagE theos

swthros sOtEr
n_ Gen Sg m
PAUL
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-God
SAViour
. Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the commandment of God our Saviour, and Lord Jesus Christ, [which is] our hope;
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
kai cristou ihsou kai christos iEsous

Conj n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
OF-US
AND
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
EXPECTATION OF-US
1:2 timoqew gnhsiw teknw

timotheos
n_ Dat Sg m
gnEsios
a_ Dat Sg n
teknon
n_ Dat Sg n
en en
Prep
pistei caris pistis charis

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Sg f
eleos eleos
n_ Nom Sg m
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to-Timothy
genuine
offspring child
IN
BELIEF faith tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
grace
MERCY
PEACE
FROM God
Unto Timothy, [my] own son in the faith: Grace, mercy, [and] peace, from God our Father and Jesus Christ our Lord.
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
FATHER
AND
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
Master Lord
OF-US
1:3 kaqws
kathOs
Adv
parekalesa se parakaleO su
prosmeinai prosmenO
vn Aor Act
en en
Prep
efesw ephesos
n_ Dat Sg f
poreuomenos poreuomai
eis eis
Prep
according-AS I-BESIDE-CALL I-entreat makedonian ina makedonia hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
YOU
TO-TOWARD-REMAIN IN to-remain-in tisin tis

px Dat Pl m
EPHESUS GOING when-going
INTO
As I besought thee to abide still at Ephesus, when I went into Macedonia, that thou mightest charge some that they teach no other doctrine,
paraggeilhs paraggellO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
eterodidaskalein heterodidaskaleO
vn Pres Act
MACEDONIA
THAT YOU-SHOULD-BE-chargING ANY some prosecein prosechO

vn Pres Act
NO
TO-BE-DIFFERENTLY-TEACHING to-be-teaching-differently aitines hostis

pr Nom Pl f
1:4 mhde
mEde
Conj
muqois kai genealogiais aperantois muthos kai genealogia aperantos

n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
ekzhthseis ekzEtEsis
n_ Acc Pl f
NO-YET TO-BE-heedING to-myths nor-yet myths parecousin mallon h parechO mallon E

vi Pres Act 3 Pl Adv Part
AND
to-generate-sayings genealogies
to-UN-OTHER-SIDE WHICH-ANY OUT-SEEKings interminable which-any exactions en en

Prep
Neither give heed to fables and endless genealogies, which minister questions, rather than godly edifying which is in faith: [so do].
oikonomian qeou oikonomia theos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
ARE-tenderING are-affording
RATHER
OR HOME-LAW than administration ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-God
THE
IN
BELIEF faith agaph agapE

n_ Nom Sg f
1:5 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
telos telos
n_ Nom Sg n
paraggelias estin paraggelia eimi

ek ek
Prep
kaqaras kardias katharos kardia

THE
YET FINISH OF-THE consummation
charge
IS
LOVE
OUT OF-clean
HEART
. Now the end of the commandment is charity out of a pure heart, and [of] a good conscience, and [of] faith unfeigned:
kai suneidhsews agaqhs kai pistews anupokritou kai suneidEsis agathos kai pistis anupokritos
Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f
AND
conscience
GOOD
AND
BELIEF faith
UN-hypocritical unfeigned eis eis

Prep
1:6 wn
hos
pr Gen Pl f
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
astochsantes exetraphsan astocheO ektrepO

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
mataiologian mataiologia
n_ Acc Sg f
From which some having swerved have turned aside unto vain jangling;
OF-WHICH ANY from-which some
deviating swerving einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
WERE-OUT-REVERTed INTO VAIN-saying were-turned-aside vain-prating noountes noeO

1:7 qelontes
thelO
nomodidaskaloi mh nomodidaskalos mE
mhte mEte
Conj
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
WILLING
TO-BE
LAW-TEACHers teachers-of-the-law peri peri

Prep
NO
MINDING apprehending
NO-BESIDES WHICH noeither which(p)
Desiring to be teachers of the law; understanding neither what they say, nor whereof they affirm.
legousin legO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
mhte mEte
Conj
tinwn diabebaiountai tis diabebaioomai

pi Gen Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-sayING NO-BESIDES ABOUT ANY noor concerning what(p) ?
THEY-ARE-THRU-confirmING they-are-insisting o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
1:8 oidamen
eidO
vi Perf Act 1 Pl
de de
Conj
oti kalos hoti kalos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
nomos nomos
n_ Nom Sg m
ean ean
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
But we know that the law [is] good, if a man use it lawfully;
WE-HAVE-PERCEIVED YET that we-are-aware
IDEAL
THE
LAW
IF-EVER ANY anyone
it
him it
AV
1Timothy 1
nomimws crhtai nomimOs chraomai

Adv vs Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
LAWfully
IS-USING
1:9 eidws
eidO
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oti dikaiw nomos hoti dikaios nomos

Conj a_ Dat Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
keitai keimai
anomois anomos
a_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
HAVING-PERCEIVED this being-aware-of kai anupotaktois kai anupotaktos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
that
to-JUST to-the-just
LAW
NOT
IS-LYING is-being-laid-down
to-UN-LAWed YET to-the-lawless
asebesin asebEs
a_ Dat Pl m
kai amartwlois anosiois kai hamartOlos anosios

Conj a_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
kai bebhlois kai bebElos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
Knowing this, that the law is not made for a righteous man, but for the lawless and disobedient, for the ungodly and for sinners, for unholy and profane, for murderers of fathers and murderers of mothers, for manslayers,
AND
to-UN-UNDER-SETters to-UN-REVERers AND insubordinate the-irreverent kai mhtrolwais kai mEtrolOas

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
to-missers sinners
to-UN-BENIGN AND the-malign
to-profane profane
patrolwais patrolOas
n_ Dat Pl m
androfonois androphonos
n_ Dat Pl m
to-FATHER-THRESHers AND thrashers-of-fathers
to-MOTHER-THRESHers to-MAN-MURDERers thrashers-of-mothers homicides kai ei kai ei

Conj Cond
1:10 pornois
pornos
n_ Dat Pl m
arsenokoitais andrapodistais yeustais epiorkois arsenokoitEs andrapodistEs pseustEs epiorkos

n_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m a_ Dat Pl m
ti tis
px Nom Sg n
to-paramours to-sodomites paramours sodomites eteron heteros

a_ Nom Sg n
to-kidnapers kidnapers
to-FALSifiers liars
to-ON-OATHers AND perjurers
IF
ANY
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ugiainoush hugiainO
didaskalia antikeitai didaskalia antikeimai

n_ Dat Sg f vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg
10 For whoremongers, for them that defile themselves with mankind, for menstealers, for liars, for perjured persons, and if there be any other thing that is contrary to sound doctrine;
DIFFERENT to-THE different-thing the
beING-SOUND
TEACHing
IS-opposING
1:11 kata
kata
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
makariou qeou makarios theos

o hos
pr Acc Sg n
according-to THE in-accord-with episteuqhn egw pisteuO egO

vi Aor Pas 1 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg
WELL-MESSAGE OF-THE
esteem glory
OF-THE
HAPPY
God
WHICH
11 According to the glorious gospel of the blessed God, which was committed to my trust.
WAS-BELIEVED was-entrusted
1:12 carin
charis
n_ Acc Sg f
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
endunamwsanti me endunamoO egO

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m pp 1 Acc Sg

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
grace gratitude kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
I-AM-HAVING
to-THE-One IN-ABLing to-the one-invigorating me egO

pp 1 Acc Sg
ME
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
12 . And I thank Christ Jesus our Lord, who hath enabled me, for that he counted me faithful, putting me into the ministry;
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
oti piston hoti pistos

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
hghsato hEgeomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
qemenos tithEmi
eis eis
Prep
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
Master Lord
OF-US
that
BELIEVing faithful onta eimi
ME
He-deems
beING-PLACED assigning-me
INTO THRU-SERVice service

13 Who was before a blasphemer, and a persecutor, and injurious: but I obtained mercy, because I did [it] ignorantly in unbelief.
1:13 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
proteron proteron
Adv
blasfhmon kai diwkthn kai ubristhn alla blasphEmos kai diOktEs kai hubristEs alla
a_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THE
BEFORE-more BEING formerly oti hoti

Conj
HARM-AVERer calumniator epoihsa poieO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
AND
CHASer persecuter
AND
OUTRAGer
but
hlehqhn eleaO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
agnown agnoeO
en en
Prep
apistia apistia
n_ Dat Sg f
I-WAS-MERCIED that UN-KNOWING I-was-shown-mercy seeing-that being-ignorant
I-DO I-do-it caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
IN
UN-BELIEF unbelief kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
1:14 uperepleonasen de
huperpleonazO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
meta pistews kai meta pistis kai

Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj
OVER-MOREizES overwhelms agaphs ths agapE ho

YET THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
WITH
BELIEF faith
AND
14 And the grace of our Lord was exceeding abundant with faith and love which is in Christ Jesus.
en en
Prep

LOVE
OF-THE the o ho
IN
ANOINTED Christ logos logos
JESUS
1:15 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai pashs kai pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg f
apodochs axios apodochE axios

oti cristos ihsous hoti christos iEsous

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
t_ Nom Sg m
n_ Nom Sg m
BELIEVing faithful
THE
saying
AND
OF-EVERY welcome of-all
WORTHY
that
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
15 This [is] a faithful saying, and worthy of all acceptation, that Christ Jesus came into the world to save sinners; of whom I am chief.
AV
1Timothy 1 - 1Timothy 2
hlqen erchomai
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
amartwlous swsai wn hamartOlos sOzO hos

a_ Acc Pl m vn Aor Act pr Gen Pl m
prwtos prOtos
a_ Nom Sg m
eimi eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Sg
CAME
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
missers sinners
TO-SAVE OF-WHOM BEFORE-most AM foremost
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
1:16 alla dia

alla
Conj
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
hlehqhn eleaO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
en en
Prep
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
prwtw prOtos
a_ Dat Sg m
endeixhtai endeiknumi
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
but

t_ Acc Sg f
I-WAS-MERCIED THAT IN I-was-shown-mercy apasan hapas

a_ Acc Sg f
ME
BEFORE-most SHOULD-BE-IN-SHOWING foremost should-be-displaying upotupwsin twn hupotupOsis ho

cristos ihsous christos iEsous

makroqumian pros makrothumia pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
16 Howbeit for this cause I obtained mercy, that in me first Jesus Christ might shew forth all longsuffering, for a pattern to them which should hereafter believe on him to life everlasting.
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
EVERY(emph.) FAR-FEELing all(emph.) patience ep epi

Prep
TOWARD pattern
OF-THE
mellontwn mellO
pisteuein pisteuO
vn Pres Act
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
eis eis
Prep
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
aiwnion aiOnios
a_ Acc Sg f
ones-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-BELIEVING ON ones-being-about
Him
INTO LIFE
eonian
1:17 tw
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
de de
Conj
basilei twn basileus ho

n_ Dat Sg m t_ Gen Pl m
aiwnwn afqartw aiOn aphthartos

n_ Gen Pl m a_ Dat Sg m
aoratw monw aoratos monos

a_ Dat Sg m a_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
to-THE
YET KING
OF-THE
eons
UN-CORRUPTible UN-SEEN incorruptible invisible aiwnwn amhn aiOn amEn

n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
ONLY
God
17 Now unto the King eternal, immortal, invisible, the only wise God, [be] honour and glory for ever and ever. Amen.
timh timE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai doxa kai doxa

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas twn aiOn ho

VALUE honor
AND
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
OF-THE
eons
AMEN
1:18 tauthn thn

houtos
pd Acc Sg f
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraggelian paratiqemai paraggelia paratithEmi

n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Mid 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
teknon timoqee kata teknon timotheos kata

n_ Voc Sg n n_ Voc Sg m Prep
this
THE
charge
I-AM-BESIDE-PLACING to-YOU I-am-committing se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
offspring child !
Timothy !
according-to
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
proagousas proagO
vp Pres Act Acc Pl f
epi epi
Prep
profhteias prophEteia
n_ Acc Pl f
ina hina
Conj
strateuh strateuO
vs Pres Mid 2 Sg
en en
Prep
autais autos
pp Dat Pl f
18 . This charge I commit unto thee, son Timothy, according to the prophecies which went before on thee, that thou by them mightest war a good warfare;
THE
BEFORE-LEADING ON YOU onover preceding kalhn kalos

a_ Acc Sg f
BEFORE-AVERments THAT YOU-MAY-BE-WARRING IN prophecies
them
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
strateian strateia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
IDEAL
WAR warfare pistin kai agaqhn suneidhsin hn pistis kai agathos suneidEsis hos
n_ Acc Sg f Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f pr Acc Sg f
1:19 ecwn
echO
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
apwsamenoi apOtheO
HAVING
BELIEF faith
AND
GOOD
conscience
WHICH
ANY some
FROM-THRUSTing thrusting-away
19 Holding faith, and a good conscience; which some having put away concerning faith have made shipwreck:
peri peri
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin enauaghsan pistis nauageO

ABOUT THE aboutas-to
BELIEF faith estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
THEY-NAUTICAL-WRECK have-made-shipwreck umenaios kai alexandros ous humenaios kai alexandros hos
n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Pl m
1:20 wn
hos
pr Gen Pl m
paredwka tw paradidOmi ho
OF-WHOM IS
HYMENEUS
AND
ALEXANDER
WHOM whom(p)
I-BESIDE-GIVE to-THE I-give-up
20 Of whom is Hymenaeus and Alexander; whom I have delivered unto Satan, that they may learn not to blaspheme.
satana satanas
n_ Dat Sg m
ina hina
Conj
paideuqwsin paideuO
vs Aor Pas 3 Pl
mh mE
Part Neg
blasfhmein blasphEmeO
vn Pres Act
SATAN (adversary) THAT THEY-MAY-BE-BEING-disciplinED NO Satan they-may-be-being-trained
TO-BE-HARM-AVERRING to-be-calumniating
AV
1Timothy 2
2:1 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
oun oun
Conj
prwton prOton
Adv
pantwn poieisqai dehseis proseucas enteuxeis pas poieO deEsis proseuchE enteuxis
a_ Gen Pl n vn Pres Pas n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING THEN BEFORE-most OF-ALL I-am-entreating first eucaristias uper eucharistia huper
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
TO-be-DONE to-be-made
petitions
prayers
pleadings
. I exhort therefore, that, first of all, supplications, prayers, intercessions, [and] giving of thanks, be made for all men;
pantwn anqrwpwn pas anthrOpos

thankings thanksgiving(p)
humans
2:2 uper
huper
Prep
basilewn kai pantwn twn basileus kai pas ho

n_ Gen Pl m Conj a_ Gen Pl m t_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
uperoch huperochE
n_ Dat Sg f
ontwn eimi
ina hina
Conj
hremon Eremos
a_ Acc Sg m
OVER KINGS for-the-sake-of kai hsucion bion kai hEsuchios bios

Conj a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
AND
ALL
OF-THE the-ones en en
IN
superiority BEING superior-station pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
THAT MILD
For kings, and [for] all that are in authority; that we may lead a quiet and peaceable life in all godliness and honesty.
diagwmen diagO
vs Pres Act 1 Pl
eusebeia kai semnothti eusebeia kai semnotEs

Prep
AND
QUIET
livelihood life kalon kalos

a_ Nom Sg n
WE-MAY-BE-THRU-LEADING IN we-may-be-leading
EVERY all
devoutness
AND
GRAVity
2:3 touto
houtos
pd Nom Sg n
kai apodekton enwpion tou kai apodektos enOpion ho

Conj a_ Nom Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg m
swthros hmwn sOtEr hemeis

n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
For this [is] good and acceptable in the sight of God our Saviour;
this
IDEAL
AND
welcome
IN-VIEW OF-THE in-the-sight-of the swqhnai sOzO

vn Aor Pas
SAViour
OF-US
God
2:4 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
pantas anqrwpous qelei pas anthrOpos thelO

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
epignwsin epignOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
Who will have all men to be saved, and to come unto the knowledge of the truth.
WHO
ALL
humans
IS-WILLING
TO-BE-SAVED AND
INTO ON-KNOWledge OF-TRUTH realization
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
TO-BE-COMING
2:5 eis
heis
n_ Nom Sg m
gar qeos gar theos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
eis heis
n_ Nom Sg m
kai mesiths qeou kai mesitEs theos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
kai anqrwpwn anqrwpos kai anthrOpos anthrOpos

Conj n_ Gen Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
For [there is] one God, and one mediator between God and men, the man Christ Jesus;
ONE
for
God
ONE
AND
Mediator
OF-God
AND
OF-humans humans
Human
cristos ihsous christos iEsous

ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
2:6 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dous didOmi
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
antilutron antilutron
n_ Acc Sg n
uper huper
Prep
pantwn to pas ho
a_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg n
marturion marturion
n_ Acc Sg n
Who gave himself a ransom for all, to be testified in due time.
THE
One-GIVING one-giving idiois idios

a_ Dat Pl m
Self himself
INSTEAD-LOOSener OVER ALL correspondent-ransom for-the-sake-of
THE
witness testimony
kairois kairos
n_ Dat Pl m
to-SEASONS OWN to-eras
2:7 eis
eis
Prep
o hos
pr Acc Sg n
eteqhn tithEmi
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
khrux kErux
n_ Nom Sg m
kai apostolos alhqeian legw kai apostolos alEtheia legO

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Sg
INTO WHICH
WAS-PLACED I was-appointed
PROCLAIMer AND herald en en

Prep
TRUTH
Whereunto I am ordained a preacher, and an apostle, (I speak the truth in Christ, [and] lie not;) a teacher of the Gentiles in faith and verity.
ou ou
Part Neg
yeudomai pseudomai
didaskalos eqnwn didaskalos ethnos

n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl n
pistei kai alhqeia pistis kai alEtheia

NOT
TEACHer
OF-NATIONS IN
BELIEF faith
AND
TRUTH
2:8 boulomai
boulomai
oun oun
Conj
proseucesqai tous proseuchomai ho

vn Pres midD/pasD t_ Acc Pl m
andras en anEr en
n_ Acc Pl m Prep
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg m
topw topos
n_ Dat Sg m
epairontas epairO
I-AM-intendING
THEN TO-BE-prayING
THE
WH
MEN
IN
NA
EVERY
PLACE
ON-LIFTING lifting-up
I will therefore that men pray every where, lifting up holy hands, without wrath and doubting.
osious ceiras cwris hosios cheir chOris

a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl f Adv
orghs orgE
n_ Gen Sg f
kai kai
Conj
dialogismwn
dialogismou dialogismos
n_ Gen Sg m
BENIGN
HANDS
apart-from INDIGNATION AND anger
THRU-account reasoning
AV
2:9 wsautws
hOsautOs
Adv
NA
kai kai
Conj
gunaikas en gunE en
n_ Acc Pl f Prep
katastolh kosmiw meta aidous kai katastolE kosmios meta aidOs kai
n_ Dat Sg f a_ Dat Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f Conj
AS-SAMEly similarly
AND also
WOMEN
IN
raiment
SYSTEMly decorous
WITH
MODESTY AND
swfrosunhs kosmein sOphrosunE kosmeO

n_ Gen Sg f vn Pres Act
eautas mh heautou mE
pf 3 Acc Pl f Part Neg
en en
Prep
plegmasin kai crusiw h plegma kai chrusion E

n_ Dat Pl n Conj n_ Dat Sg n Part
margaritais margaritEs
n_ Dat Pl m
. In like manner also, that women adorn themselves in modest apparel, with shamefacedness and sobriety; not with broided hair, or gold, or pearls, or costly array;
sanity
TO-BE-SYSTEMING selves to-be-adorning themselves imatismw polutelei himatismos polutelEs

NO
IN
BRAIDS
AND
GOLD gold (dim)
OR
PEARLS
h E
Part
OR
GARMENTing vesture
MUCH-FINISHed costly prepei prepO

vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
2:10 all o
alla
Conj
hos
pr Nom Sg n
gunaixin epaggellomenais qeosebeian gunE epaggellomai theosebeia

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres midD/pasD Dat Pl f n_ Acc Sg f
di dia
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
10 But (which becometh women professing godliness) with good works.
but
WHICH
IS-BEHOOVING
to-WOMEN
promisING professing
God-REVERence THRU ACTS reverence-for-God through works
agaqwn agathos
a_ Gen Pl n
GOOD
2:11 gunh
gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
hsucia hEsuchia
n_ Dat Sg f
manqanetw manthanO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
upotagh hupotagE
n_ Dat Sg f
11 Let the woman learn in silence with all subjection.
WOMAN
IN
QUIETness LET-BE-UP-LEARNING IN let-her-be-learning ! de de

Conj
EVERY all oude oude

Adv
UNDER-SETTing subjection auqentein authenteO

vn Pres Act
2:12 didaskein
didaskO
vn Pres Act
gunaiki ouk gunE ou

epitrepw epitrepO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
all alla
Conj
TO-BE-TEACHING YET to-WOMAN woman einai eimi

vn Pres vxx
NOT
I-AM-permittING NOT-YET TO-BE-domineerING OF-MAN nor-yet
but
12 But I suffer not a woman to teach, nor to usurp authority over the man, but to be in silence.
en en
Prep
hsucia hEsuchia
n_ Dat Sg f
TO-BE
IN
QUIETness
2:13 adam
adam
ni proper
gar prwtos gar prOtos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
eplasqh plassO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
eita eita
Adv
eua heua
n_ Nom Sg f
13 For Adam was first formed, then Eve.
ADAM
for
BEFORE-most WAS-MOLDED THEREAFTER EVE first ouk ou

Part Neg
2:14 kai adam

kai
Conj
adam
ni proper
hpathqh apataO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
exapathqeisa exapataO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg f
en en
Prep
parabasei parabasis
n_ Dat Sg f
AND
ADAM
NOT
WAS-SEDUCED THE
YET WOMAN
BEING-OUT-SEDUCED IN being-deluded
BESIDE-STEPPing transgression
14 And Adam was not deceived, but the woman being deceived was in the transgression.
gegonen ginomai
vi 2Perf Act 3 Sg
HAS-BECOME
2:15 swqhsetai
sOzO
vi Fut Pas 3 Sg
de de
Conj
dia dia
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
teknogonias ean teknogonia ean

n_ Gen Sg f Cond
meinwsin menO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
she-SHALL-BE-BEING-SAVED YET THRU THE through en en

Prep
offspring-parenting child-bearing
IF-EVER THEY-SHOULD-BE-REMAINING
15 Notwithstanding she shall be saved in childbearing, if they continue in faith and charity and holiness with sobriety.
pistei kai agaph pistis kai agapE

kai agiasmw meta swfrosunhs kai hagiasmos meta sOphrosunE

Conj n_ Dat Sg m Prep n_ Gen Sg f
IN
BELIEF faith
AND
LOVE
AND
HOLYing hallowing
WITH
sanity
AV
1Timothy 3
3:1 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
episkophs oregetai episkopE oregO

n_ Gen Sg f vi Pres Mid 3 Sg
kalou kalos
a_ Gen Sg n
ergou ergon
n_ Gen Sg n
BELIEVing faithful epiqumei epithumeO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
saying
IF
ANY anyone
ON-NOTing supervision
IS-cravING
OF-IDEAL ideal
work
. This [is] a true saying, If a man desire the office of a bishop, he desireth a good work.
he-IS-ON-FEELING he-is-desiring
3:2 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
oun oun
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
episkopon anepilhmpton einai episkopos anepilEptos eimi

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
mias heis
n_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos gunE
n_ Gen Sg f
it-IS-BINDING must andra anEr

n_ Acc Sg m
THEN THE
ON-NOTEr supervisor
irreprehensible
TO-BE
OF-ONE
WOMAN wife
A bishop then must be blameless, the husband of one wife, vigilant, sober, of good behaviour, given to hospitality, apt to teach;
nhfalion swfrona kosmion filoxenon didaktikon nEphalios sOphrOn kosmios philoxenos didaktikos
n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
MAN husband
sober
sane
SYSTEMed decorous
FOND-LODGer hospitable
TEACH-ic apt-to-teach afilarguron aphilarguros

a_ Acc Sg m
3
3:3 mh
mE
Part Neg
paroinon paroinos
a_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
plhkthn alla epieikh amacon plEktEs alla epieikEs amachos

n_ Acc Sg m Conj a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
NO
BESIDE-WINEr NO toper idiou idios

a_ Gen Sg m
BLOWer quarrelsome
but
lenient
UN-FIGHTer UN-FOND-of-SILVER pacific not-fond-of-money econta echO

Not given to wine, no striker, not greedy of filthy lucre; but patient, not a brawler, not covetous; One that ruleth well his own house, having his children in subjection with all gravity;
3:4 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
kalws proistamenon tekna kalOs proistEmi teknon

Adv vp Pres Mid Acc Sg m n_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
OF-THE the upotagh hupotagE

n_ Dat Sg f
OWN
HOME household
IDEALly
offsprings HAVING his-children
IN
meta pashs meta pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
semnothtos semnotEs
n_ Gen Sg f
UNDER-SETTing WITH subjection
EVERY all tou ho
GRAVity
3:5 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
idiou idios
a_ Gen Sg m
oikou oikos
n_ Gen Sg m
prosthnai proistEmi
vn 2Aor Act
ouk ou
Part Neg
oiden eidO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
pws pOs
Adv Int
t_ Gen Sg m
IF
YET ANY anyone qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE the
OWN
HOME household
TO-BEFORE-STAND NOT to-preside
HAS-PERCEIVED how is-aware how ?
(For if a man know not how to rule his own house, how shall he take care of the church of God?)
ekklhsias ekklEsia
n_ Gen Sg f
epimelhsetai epimeleomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
OF-OUT-CALLED OF-God ecclesia
he-SHALL-BE-ON-CARING he-shall-be-caring-for mh mE
Part Neg
3:6 mh
mE
Part Neg
neofuton ina neophutos hina

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
tufwqeis tuphoO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
eis eis
Prep
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
empesh empiptO
vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
Not a novice, lest being lifted up with pride he fall into the condemnation of the devil.
NO
YOUNG-plant novice
THAT NO
BEING-conceitED
INTO JUDGment he-SHOULD-BE-IN-FALLING OF-THE he-should-be-falling-in
diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
3:7 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kai marturian kalhn kai marturia kalos

Conj n_ Acc Sg f a_ Acc Sg f
ecein echO
vn Pres Act
apo apo
Prep
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
exwqen exOthen
Adv
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
it-IS-BINDING
YET AND also
witness testimony
IDEAL
TO-BE-HAVING FROM THE-ones the-ones diabolou diabolos

a_ Gen Sg m
OUT-PLACE THAT NO outside
Moreover he must have a good report of them which are without; lest he fall into reproach and the snare of the devil.
eis eis
Prep
oneidismon empesh oneidismos empiptO

n_ Acc Sg m vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai pagida tou kai pagis ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f t_ Gen Sg m
INTO REPROACH
he-SHOULD-BE-IN-FALLING AND he-should-be-falling-in wsautws semnous hOsautOs semnos

Adv a_ Acc Pl m
FASTENer OF-THE trap dilogous dilogos

a_ Acc Pl m
THRU-CASTer Adversary oinw oinos

n_ Dat Sg m
3:8 diakonous
diakonos
n_ Acc Pl m
mh mE
Part Neg
mh mE
Part Neg
pollw polus
a_ Dat Sg m
THRU-SERVitors AS-SAMEly servants similarly prosecontas mh prosechO mE

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Part Neg
GRAVE NO must-be-grave
TWO-saying NO double-tongued
to-WINE
much
. Likewise [must] the deacons [be] grave, not doubletongued, not given to much wine, not greedy of filthy lucre;
aiscrokerdeis aischrokerdEs
a_ Acc Pl m
heedING being-addicted
NO
VILE-GAINers avaricious
AV
1Timothy 3
3:9 econtas
echO
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
musthrion ths mustErion ho

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
kaqara suneidhsei katharos suneidEsis

Holding the mystery of the faith in a pure conscience.
HAVING
THE
CLOSE-KEEP secret
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
IN
clean clear
conscience
3:10 kai outoi

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
dokimazesqwsan prwton dokimazO prOton

vm Pres Pas 3 Pl Adv
eita eita
Adv
diakoneitwsan diakoneO
vm Pres Act 3 Pl
AND also
these
YET LET-BE-beING-testED let-them-be-being-tested !
BEFORE-most THEREAFTER LET-THEM-BE-THRU-SERVING first let-them-be-serving !
10 And let these also first be proved; then let them use the office of a deacon, being [found] blameless.
anegklhtoi ontes anegklEtos eimi

BEING
3:11 gunaikas wsautws semnas

gunE
n_ Acc Pl f
hOsautOs
Adv
semnos
a_ Acc Pl f
mh mE
Part Neg
diabolous nhfalious pistas en diabolos nEphalios pistos en

a_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl f Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
11 Even so [must their] wives [be] grave, not slanderers, sober, faithful in all things.
WOMEN their-wives
AS-SAMEly similarly estwsan eimi
GRAVE NO must-be-grave mias heis

n_ Gen Sg f
THRU-CASTers adversaries
sober
BELIEVing faithful
IN
ALL all-things
12 Let the deacons be the husbands of one wife, ruling their children and their own houses well.
3:12 diakonoi
diakonos
n_ Nom Pl m
gunaikos andres gunE anEr

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Pl m
teknwn teknon
n_ Gen Pl n
kalws proistamenoi kalOs proistEmi

Adv vp Pres Mid Nom Pl m
vm Pres vxx 3 Pl
THRU-SERVitors LET-THEM-BE servants let-them-be ! kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
OF-ONE
WOMAN wife
MEN husbands
offsprings IDEALly their-children
idiwn idios
a_ Gen Pl m
oikwn oikos
n_ Gen Pl m
AND
OF-THE the
OWN
HOMES households eautois heautou

pf 3 Dat Pl m
3:13 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
gar kalws diakonhsantes baqmon gar kalOs diakoneO bathmos

Conj Adv vp Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Acc Sg m
peripoiountai kai peripoieO kai

vi Pres Mid 3 Pl Conj
THE-ones the-ones
for
IDEALly
THRU-SERVing serving pistei th pistis ho

STEP rank en en
Prep
to-selves IDEAL to-themselves
ARE-procurING
AND
pollhn parrhsian en polus parrhEsia en

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep

13 For they that have used the office of a deacon well purchase to themselves a good degree, and great boldness in the faith which is in Christ Jesus.
much
boldness
IN
BELIEF faith grafw graphO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
THE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
WH WH NA
3:14 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
elpizwn elpizO
elqein erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros se
pros pros
Prep
14 . These things write I unto thee, hoping to come unto thee shortly:
these to-YOU these-things

NA
I-AM-WRITING EXPECTING
TO-BE-COMING
TOWARD
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
tacei tachos
n_ Dat Sg n
YOU
IN
SWIFTness
3:15 ean
ean
Cond
de de
Conj
bradunw bradunO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
ina hina
Conj
eidhs eidO
vs Perf Act 2 Sg
pws dei pOs deO

en en
Prep
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
IF-EVER YET I-MAY-BE-TARDYING THAT YOU-MAY-BE-PERCEIVING how I-may-be-being-tardy qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
it-IS-BINDING
IN
HOME house
anastrefesqai anastrephO
vn Pres Pas
htis hostis
pr Nom Sg f
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ekklhsia qeou ekklEsia theos

zwntos zaO
15 But if I tarry long, that thou mayest know how thou oughtest to behave thyself in the house of God, which is the church of the living God, the pillar and ground of the truth.
OF-God
TO-BE-UP-TURNING (behavING) WHICH-ANY IS to-be-behaving which-any kai edraiwma ths kai hedraiOma ho
Conj n_ Nom Sg n t_ Gen Sg f
OUT-CALLED OF-God ecclesia
LIVING
stulos stulos
n_ Nom Sg m
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
COLUMN pillar
AND
SETTLE base
OF-THE
TRUTH
3:16 kai omologoumenws mega

kai
Conj
homologoumenOs
Adv
mega
a_ Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
eusebeias musthrion eusebeia mustErion

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg n
AND
avowedly
GREAT
IS
THE
OF-THE
devoutness
CLOSE-KEEP secret aggelois aggelos

n_ Dat Pl m
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
efanerwqh phaneroO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
edikaiwqh dikaioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
pneumati wfqh pneuma optomai

n_ Dat Sg n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
16 And without controversy great is the mystery of godliness: God was manifest in the flesh, justified in the Spirit, seen of angels, preached unto the Gentiles, believed on in the world, received up into glory.
WHO
WAS-made-APPEAR IN was-manifested
FLESH
WAS-JUSTIFIED IN
spirit
WAS-VIEWED to-MESSENGERS was-seen
AV
ekhrucqh kErussO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
eqnesin episteuqh ethnos pisteuO

n_ Dat Pl n vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
kosmw kosmos
n_ Dat Sg m
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
en en
Prep
doxh doxa
n_ Dat Sg f
WAS-PROCLAIMED IN NATIONS was-heralded among
WAS-BELIEVED IN
SYSTEM world
WAS-UP-GOTTEN IN was-taken-up
esteem glory
AV
1Timothy 4
4:1 to
ho
t_ Nom Sg n
de de
Conj
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
rhtws legei rhEtOs legO

oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
usterois kairois husteros kairos

THE
YET spirit
declarely explicitly tines tis

px Nom Pl m
IS-sayING
that
IN
subsequent
SEASONS eras
aposthsontai aphistEmi
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews prosecontes pneumasin planois kai pistis prosechO pneuma planos kai
n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n Conj
. Now the Spirit speaketh expressly, that in the latter times some shall depart from the faith, giving heed to seducing spirits, and doctrines of devils;
SHALL-BE-FROM-STANDING ANY shall-be-withdrawing some didaskaliais daimoniwn didaskalia daimonion

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Pl n
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
heedING giving-heed
to-spirits
STRAYed deceiving
AND
to-TEACHings teachings
of-demons
4:2 en
en
Prep
upokrisei yeudologwn kekausthriasmenwn thn hupokrisis pseudologos kaustEriazO ho

n_ Dat Sg f a_ Gen Pl m vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
idian idios
a_ Acc Sg f
n_ Acc Sg f
Speaking lies in hypocrisy; having their conscience seared with a hot iron;
IN
hypocrisy
OF-FALSE-sayings of-false-expressions
HAVING-been-BURNerizED having-been-cauterized
THE
OWN
conscience
4:3 kwluontwn gamein

kOluO
gameO
vn Pres Act
apecesqai apechomai
vn Pres Mid
brwmatwn a brOma hos

n_ Gen Pl n pr Acc Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
FORBIDDING
TO-BE-MARRYING TO-BE-FROM-HAVING OF-FOODS to-be-abstaining metalhmyin meta eucaristias tois metalEpsis meta eucharistia ho
n_ Acc Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
WHICH
THE
God
ektisen ktizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
pistois pistos
a_ Dat Pl m
kai epegnwkosin kai epiginOskO

Conj vp Perf Act Dat Pl m
Forbidding to marry, [and commanding] to abstain from meats, which God hath created to be received with thanksgiving of them which believe and know the truth.
CREATES
INTO partaking
WITH
to-THE ones-BELIEVing AND to-the-ones believing
HAVING-ON-KNOWN realizing
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
TRUTH
4:4 oti
hoti
Conj
pan pas
a_ Nom Sg n
ktisma ktisma
n_ Nom Sg n
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kalon kalos
a_ Nom Sg n

Conj a_ Nom Sg n
apoblhton meta apoblEtos meta

a_ Nom Sg n Prep
that EVERY seeing-that
CREATURE OF-God
IDEAL
AND
NOT-YET-ONE FROM-CAST nothing to-be-cast-away
WITH
For every creature of God [is] good, and nothing to be refused, if it be received with thanksgiving:
eucaristias lambanomenon eucharistia lambanO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Pas Nom Sg n
beING-UP-GOTTEN being-taken gar dia gar dia

Conj Prep
4:5 agiazetai
hagiazO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
logou logos
n_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai enteuxews kai enteuxis

Conj n_ Gen Sg f
For it is sanctified by the word of God and prayer.
it-IS-beING-HOLYizED for it-is-being-hallowed
THRU saying through word tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OF-God
AND
pleading
4:6 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
upotiqemenos hupotithEmi
adelfois kalos adelphos kalos

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Sg m
esh eimi
vi Fut vxx 2 Sg
diakonos diakonos
n_ Nom Sg m
these beING-UNDER-PLACED to-THE these-things suggesting cristou christos

n_ Gen Sg m
brothers brethren
IDEAL
YOU-SHALL-BE THRU-SERVitor servant pistews kai ths pistis kai ho

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
entrefomenos tois entrephO ho

vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m t_ Dat Pl m
logois ths logos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
. If thou put the brethren in remembrance of these things, thou shalt be a good minister of Jesus Christ, nourished up in the words of faith and of good doctrine, whereunto thou hast attained.
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ kalhs kalos

a_ Gen Sg f
IN-NURTURING fostering
to-THE
sayings words
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
AND
OF-THE
didaskalias h didaskalia hos

n_ Gen Sg f pr Dat Sg f
parhkolouqhkas parakoloutheO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
IDEAL
TEACHing
WHICH
YOU-HAVE-BESIDE-followED you-have-fully-followed gumnaze gumnazO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
4:7 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
de de
Conj
bebhlous kai grawdeis muqous paraitou bebElos kai graOdEs muthos paraiteomai
a_ Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Pl m n_ Acc Pl m vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
de de
Conj
But refuse profane and old wives'fables, and exercise thyself [rather] unto godliness.
THE
YET profane
AND
CRONES old-womanish
myths
BE-refusING be-you-refusing !
BE-exercisING YET be-you-exercising !
seauton pros seautou pros

pf 3 Acc Sg m Prep
eusebeian eusebeia
n_ Acc Sg f
YOURself
TOWARD devoutness
AV
1Timothy 4
4:8 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar swmatikh gumnasia pros gar sOmatikos gumnasia pros

Conj a_ Nom Sg f n_ Nom Sg f Prep
oligon oligos
a_ Acc Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
wfelimos h Ophelimos ho
a_ Nom Sg m t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
THE
for
BODY-ic bodily panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
exercise
TOWARD FEW few-thing
IS
beneficial
THE
YET
eusebeia pros eusebeia pros

n_ Nom Sg f Prep
wfelimos estin Ophelimos eimi

epaggelian ecousa epaggelia echO

zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
For bodily exercise profiteth little: but godliness is profitable unto all things, having promise of the life that now is, and of that which is to come.
devoutness
TOWARD ALL
beneficial
IS
promise
HAVING
OF-LIFE
THE
nun kai ths nun kai ho

Adv Conj t_ Gen Sg f
melloushs mellO
NOW AND
OF-THE the o ho
beING-ABOUT impending logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
4:9 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
kai pashs kai pas

Conj a_ Gen Sg f
apodochs axios apodochE axios

This [is] a faithful saying and worthy of all acceptation.
t_ Nom Sg m
BELIEVing faithful
THE
saying
AND
OF-EVERY welcome of-all
WORTHY
4:10 eis
eis
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
gar kopiwmen gar kopiaO

kai agwnizomeqa kai agOnizomai

oti hlpikamen hoti elpizO

epi qew epi theos

Prep n_ Dat Sg m
INTO this
for
WE-ARE-toilING AND
WE-ARE-CONTENDING that are-contending
WE-HAVE-EXPECTED ON we-rely-on
God
zwnti zaO
os hos
pr Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
swthr sOtEr
n_ Nom Sg m
pantwn anqrwpwn malista pistwn pas anthrOpos malista pistos

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m Adv a_ Gen Pl m
10 For therefore we both labour and suffer reproach, because we trust in the living God, who is the Saviour of all men, specially of those that believe.
LIVING
WHO
IS
SAViour
OF-ALL
humans
OF-ones-BELIEVing of-believing-ones
11 These things command and teach.
4:11 paraggelle
paraggellO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
kai didaske kai didaskO

BE-YOU-chargING these AND be-you-charging ! these-things
BE-YOU-TEACHING be-you-teaching ! neothtos katafroneitw alla tupos neotEs kataphroneO alla tupos
n_ Gen Sg f vm Pres Act 3 Sg Conj n_ Nom Sg m
4:12 mhdeis
mEdeis
a_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ginou ginomai
NO-YET-ONE OF-YOU no-one twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
THE
YOUTH
LET-BE-despisING let-him-be-despising ! anastrofh anastrophE

n_ Dat Sg f
but
type model en en
Prep
BE-YOU-BECOMING be-you-becoming ! pistei en pistis en

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
12 Let no man despise thy youth; but be thou an example of the believers, in word, in conversation, in charity, in spirit, in faith, in purity.
pistwn pistos
a_ Gen Pl m
en en
Prep
logw logos
n_ Dat Sg m
en en
Prep
en en
Prep
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
agneia hagneia
n_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
ones-BELIEVing IN believing-ones
saying word
IN
UP-TURNing (behaviour) IN behavior th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
LOVE
IN
BELIEF faith
IN
PURity
4:13 ews ercomai

heOs
Conj
erchomai
prosece prosechO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
anagnwsei th anagnOsis ho
paraklhsei th paraklEsis ho
13 Till I come, give attendance to reading, to exhortation, to doctrine.
TILL
I-AM-COMING
BE-YOU-heedING to-THE be-you-heeding !
reading
to-THE
to-THE
n_ Dat Sg f
TEACHing
4:14 mh
mE
Part Neg
amelei ameleO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
carismatos o charisma hos

n_ Gen Sg n pr Nom Sg n
edoqh didOmi
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
NO
BE-YOU-UN-CARING OF-THE be-you-neglecting ! the
IN
YOU
grace-effect gracious-gift ceirwn tou cheir ho

n_ Gen Pl f
WHICH
WAS-GIVEN
to-YOU
14 Neglect not the gift that is in thee, which was given thee by prophecy, with the laying on of the hands of the presbytery.
dia dia
Prep
profhteias prophEteia
n_ Gen Sg f
meta epiqesews twn meta epithesis ho

Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Gen Pl f
presbuteriou presbuterion
n_ Gen Sg n
t_ Gen Sg n
THRU BEFORE-AVERment WITH through prophecy
ON-PLACing imposition en en
Prep
OF-THE
HANDS
OF-THE
SENIORship eldership sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
4:15 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
meleta meletaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
toutois isqi houtos eimi

pd Dat Pl n vm Pres vxx 2 Sg
ina hina
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
prokoph prokopE
n_ Nom Sg f
these BE-YOU-meditatING IN on-these-things be-you-meditating ! fanera phaneros

a_ Nom Sg f
these
YOU-BE be-you !
THAT OF-YOU
THE
progress
15 Meditate upon these things; give thyself wholly to them; that thy profiting may appear to all.
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
apparent
MAY-BE
to-ALL
AV
4:16 epece
epechO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
seautw kai th seautou kai ho

pf 3 Dat Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
didaskalia epimene didaskalia epimenO

n_ Dat Sg f vm Pres Act 2 Sg

pp Dat Pl m pd Acc Sg n
BE-YOU-ON-HAVING to-YOURself AND be-you-attending ! gar poiwn gar poieO

to-THE
TEACHing
BE-YOU-ON-REMAINING to-them be-you-persisting ! kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
this
16 Take heed unto thyself, and unto the doctrine; continue in them: for in doing this thou shalt both save thyself, and them that hear thee.
kai seauton swseis kai seautou sOzO

Conj pf 3 Acc Sg m vi Fut Act 2 Sg
akouontas akouO
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
for
DOING in-doing
AND
YOURself
YOU-SHALL-BE-SAVING AND
THE
OF-YOU you
AV
1Timothy 5
5:1 presbuterw mh
presbuteros
a_ Dat Sg m
mE
Part Neg
epiplhxhs epiplEssO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
alla parakalei alla parakaleO

ws patera hOs patEr

Adv n_ Acc Sg m
. Rebuke not an elder, but intreat [him] as a father; [and] the younger men as brethren;
to-SENIOR elderly-man
NO
YOU-SHOULD-BE-upbraidING but
BE-BESIDE-CALLING AS be-you-entreating-him !
FATHER
newterous ws adelfous neos hOs adelphos

a_ Acc Pl m Cmp Adv n_ Acc Pl m
YOUNGER younger-men
AS
brothers brethren pash pas

a_ Dat Sg f
5:2 presbuteras ws mhteras newteras ws adelfas en

presbuteros
a_ Acc Pl f
hOs
Adv
mEtEr
n_ Acc Pl f
neos
a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
hOs
Adv
adelphE
n_ Acc Pl f
en
Prep
agneia hagneia
n_ Dat Sg f
SENIORS(f) elder-women
AS
MOTHERS
YOUNGER(f) AS younger-women ontws chras ontOs chEra

Adv n_ Acc Pl f
The elder women as mothers; the younger as sisters, with all purity.
sisters
IN
EVERY all
PURity
5:3 chras
chEra
n_ Acc Pl f
tima timaO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
. Honour widows that are widows indeed.
WIDOWS BE-VALUING THE be-you-honoring ! the-ones
BEINGly really tekna teknon

n_ Acc Pl n
WIDOWS
5:4 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
chra chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
h E
Part
ekgona ekgonon
a_ Acc Pl n
ecei echO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
manqanetwsan manthanO
vm Pres Act 3 Pl
IF
YET ANY
WIDOW
offsprings children oikon oikos

n_ Acc Sg m
OR
OUT-parents IS-HAVING descendants
LET-THEM-BE-UP-LEARNING let-them-be-learning ! apodidonai apodidOmi

vn Pres Act
prwton prOton
Adv
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
idion idios
a_ Acc Sg m
eusebein eusebeO
vn Pres Act
kai amoibas kai amoibE

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
But if any widow have children or nephews, let them learn first to shew piety at home, and to requite their parents: for that is good and acceptable before God.
BEFORE-most THE first tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OWN
HOME household
TO-BE-beING-devout AND to-be-being-devoted
RECIPROCAtion TO-BE-FROM-GIVING to-be-paying qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
progonois progonos
n_ Dat Pl m
touto houtos
pd Nom Sg n
gar estin gar eimi

apodekton enwpion tou apodektos enOpion ho

a_ Nom Sg n Adv t_ Gen Sg m
to-THE
BEFORE-parents this progenitors de de

Conj
for
IS
welcome
IN-VIEW in-sight-of hlpiken elpizO

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
OF-THE the epi epi

Prep
God
WH
5:5 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ontws chra ontOs chEra

Adv n_ Nom Sg f
kai memonwmenh kai monoO

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Sg f
ton
THE the-one qeon theos

n_ Acc Sg m
YET BEINGly really kai prosmenei kai prosmenO

WIDOW
AND
HAVING-been-ONLY-ED she-HAS-EXPECTED ON being-alone relies-on dehsesin kai tais deEsis kai ho

n_ Dat Pl f Conj t_ Dat Pl f
Now she that is a widow indeed, and desolate, trusteth in God, and continueth in supplications and prayers night and day.
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
proseucais nuktos kai proseuchE nux kai

n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Sg f Conj
God
AND
IS-TOWARD-REMAINING to-THE is-remaining-in the
petitions
AND
to-THE the
prayers
OF-NIGHT night
AND
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-DAY day
5:6 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
de de
Conj
spatalwsa spatalaO
zwsa zaO
teqnhken thnEskO
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
But she that liveth in pleasure is dead while she liveth.
THE
YET one-SQUANDERING LIVING one-being-prodigal(f) paraggelle paraggellO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
HAS-DIED
5:7 kai tauta

kai
Conj
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
ina hina
Conj
anepilhmptoi wsin anepilEptos eimi

a_ Nom Pl m vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
And these things give in charge, that they may be blameless.
AND also
these BE-YOU-chargING THAT irreprehensible these-things be-you-charging ! de de

Conj
THEY-MAY-BE
5:8 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
idiwn idios
a_ Gen Pl m
kai malista oikeiwn kai malista oikeios

Conj Adv a_ Gen Pl m
ou ou
Part Neg
pronoei pronoeO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
IF
YET ANY anyone
OF-THE
OWN own(p)
AND
RATHERest especially apistou apistos

a_ Gen Sg m
HOME-be-ers NOT of-family-members ceirwn cheirOn

a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
IS-BEFORE-MINDING is-providing
But if any provide not for his own, and specially for those of his own house, he hath denied the faith, and is worse than an infidel.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin hrnhtai pistis arneomai

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf midD 3 Sg
kai estin kai eimi

THE
BELIEF faith
HAS-disownED AND he-has-disowned
IS
OF-UN-BELIEVing-one WORSE of-unbeliever elatton etwn elasson etos

a_ Nom Sg n n_ Gen Pl n
5:9 chra
chEra
n_ Nom Sg f
katalegesqw katalegO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
exhkonta gegonuia hexEkonta ginomai

ni numeral vp 2Perf Act Nom Sg f
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
WIDOW
LET-BE-beING-DOWN-said NO let-her-be-being-listed !
INFERIOR less
OF-YEARS SIX-TY sixty
HAVING-BECOME having-becomebeen
OF-ONE
Let not a widow be taken into the number under threescore years old, having been the wife of one man,
AV
1Timothy 5
andros anEr
n_ Gen Sg m
gunh gunE
n_ Nom Sg f
MAN
WOMAN wife ergois kalois marturoumenh ei ergon kalos martureO ei

n_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n vp Pres Pas Nom Sg f Cond
5:10 en
en
Prep
eteknotrofhsen teknotropheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
exenodochsen xenodocheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ei ei
Cond
IN
ACTS
IDEAL
beING-witnessED being-attested ei ei
Cond
IF
she-offspring-NOURISHES IF she-nourishes-children ephrkesen eparkeO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
she-LODGer-RECEIVES IF she-is-hospitable ei ei
Cond
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
podas pous
n_ Acc Pl m
eniyen niptO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
qlibomenois thlibO
panti pas
a_ Dat Sg n
ergw ergon
n_ Dat Sg n
10 Well reported of for good works; if she have brought up children, if she have lodged strangers, if she have washed the saints'feet, if she have relieved the afflicted, if she have diligently followed every good work.
OF-HOLY-ones FEET of-saints agaqw agathos

a_ Dat Sg n
she-WASHES IF
ones-beING-CONSTRICTED she-ON-SUFFICES IF ones-being-afflicted she-relieves
to-EVERY
ACT work
ephkolouqhsen epakoloutheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
GOOD
she-ON-follows she-follows-up chras chEra

n_ Acc Pl f
5:11 newteras de
neos
a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
de
Conj
paraitou paraiteomai
otan hotan
Conj
gar katastrhniaswsin gar katastrEniaO

YOUNGER
YET WIDOWS BE-refusING be-you-refusing ! qelousin thelO

vi Pres Act 3 Pl
when-EVER for whenever
THEY-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-indulgING they-should-be-being-restive-against
11 But the younger widows refuse: for when they have begun to wax wanton against Christ, they will marry;
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
cristou gamein christos gameO

OF-THE the
ANOINTED Christ
TO-BE-MARRYING THEY-ARE-WILLING
5:12 ecousai
echO
krima krima
n_ Acc Sg n
oti hoti
Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
prwthn prOtos
a_ Acc Sg f
pistin hqethsan pistis atheteO

12 Having damnation, because they have cast off their first faith.
HAVING
JUDGment that THE seeing-that de de

Conj
BEFORE-most BELIEF first faith
THEY-UN-PLACE they-repudiate tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
5:13 ama
hama
Adv
kai argai kai argos

Conj a_ Nom Pl f
manqanousin manthanO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
periercomenai perierchomai
oikias oikia
n_ Acc Pl f
SIMULTANEOUS YET AND at-the-same-time also ou ou

Part Neg
UN-ACTive THEY-ARE-UP-LEARNING ABOUT-COMING idle-ones(f) they-are-learning wandering-about alla kai fluaroi kai periergoi alla kai phluaros kai periergos
Conj Conj a_ Nom Pl f Conj a_ Nom Pl m
THE
HOMES
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
argai argos
a_ Nom Pl f
lalousai laleO
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
mh mE
Part Neg
13 And withal they learn [to be] idle, wandering about from house to house; and not only idle, but tattlers also and busybodies, speaking things which they ought not.
NOT
ONLY
YET UN-ACTive but idle
AND also
babblers gossips
AND
ABOUT-ACTers TALKING meddlers speaking
THE the(p)
NO
deonta deO
vp Pres im-Act Acc Pl n
BINDING
5:14 boulomai
boulomai
oun oun
Conj
newteras neos
a_ Acc Pl f Cmp
gamein gameO
vn Pres Act
teknogonein teknogoneO
vn Pres Act
oikodespotein oikodespoteO
vn Pres Act
I-AM-intendING
THEN YOUNGER(f) TO-BE-MARRYING TO-BE-offspring-parentING TO-BE-HOME-OWNING younger-widows to-be-bearing-children to-be-managing-the-household didonai didOmi
vn Pres Act
14 I will therefore that the younger women marry, bear children, guide the house, give none occasion to the adversary to speak reproachfully.
mhdemian aformhn mEdeis aphormE

tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
antikeimenw antikeimai
loidorias loidoria
n_ Gen Sg f
carin charin
Adv
NO-YET-ONE nothing
FROM-RUSH TO-BE-GIVING to-THE incentive gar tines gar tis

Conj px Nom Pl m
one-opposING one-opposing opisw tou opisO ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
OF-say-SPEARing grace reviling favoring satana satanas

n_ Gen Sg m
15 For some are already turned aside after Satan.
5:15 hdh
EdE
Adv
exetraphsan ektrepO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
ALREADY for
ANY some pisth pistos

a_ Nom Sg f
WERE-OUT-REVERTed BEHIND were-turned-aside after ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
THE
SATAN (adversary) Satan autais kai mh autos kai mE

pp Dat Pl f Conj Part Neg
16 If any man or woman that believeth have widows, let them relieve them, and let not the church be charged; that it may relieve them that are widows indeed.
5:16 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
chras chEra
n_ Acc Pl f
eparkeitw eparkeO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
IF
ANY
BELIEVing(f) IS-HAVING believing-woman h ho

t_ Nom Sg f
WIDOWS LET-her-BE-ON-SUFFICING to-them let-her-be-relieving ! them tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
AND
NO
bareisqw bareO
vm Pres Pas 3 Sg
ekklhsia ina ekklEsia hina

n_ Nom Sg f Conj
ontws chrais eparkesh ontOs chEra eparkeO

Adv n_ Dat Pl f vs Aor Act 3 Sg
LET-BE-beING-HEAVIED THE let-her-be-being-burdened !
OUT-CALLED THAT to-THE ecclesia the-ones
BEINGly really
WIDOWS
it-SHOULD-BE-ON-SUFFICING sheit-should-be-relieving
AV
1Timothy 5
5:17 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
kalws proestwtes kalOs proistEmi

Adv vp Perf Act Nom Pl m
presbuteroi diplhs timhs presbuteros diplous timE

a_ Nom Pl m a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f
THE
IDEALly
HAVING-BEFORE-STOOD SENIORS ones-having-presided elders malista oi malista ho

Adv t_ Nom Pl m
OF-double
VALUE honor logw logos

n_ Dat Sg m
17 . Let the elders that rule well be counted worthy of double honour, especially they who labour in the word and doctrine.
axiousqwsan axioO
vm Pres Pas 3 Pl
kopiwntes kopiaO
en en
Prep
kai didaskalia kai didaskalia

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
LET-BE-beING-countED-WORTHY RATHERest let-them-be-being-counted-worthy ! especially
THE
ones-toilING ones-toiling alownta aloaO
IN
saying word ou ou
Part Neg
AND
TEACHing
5:18 legei
legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
boun bous
n_ Acc Sg m
fimwseis phimoO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
IS-sayING
for
THE
WRITing scripture
OX
THRESHING
NOT
YOU-SHALL-BE-MUZZLING AND
18 For the scripture saith, Thou shalt not muzzle the ox that treadeth out the corn. And, The labourer [is] worthy of his reward.
axios axios
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ergaths tou ergatEs ho

misqou misthos
n_ Gen Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
WORTHY
THE
ACTer worker
OF-THE
HIRE wages
OF-him
5:19 kata presbuterou kathgorian mh

kata
Prep
presbuteros
a_ Gen Sg m
katEgoria
n_ Acc Sg f
mE
Part Neg
paradecou paradechomai
ektos ei ektos ei
Adv Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
epi epi
Prep
19 Against an elder receive not an accusation, but before two or three witnesses.
DOWN against duo duo

ni numeral
OF-SENIOR elder triwn treis

n_ Gen Pl m
accusation
NO
BE-BESIDE-RECEIVING OUTside be-you-be-assenting-to !
IF
NO
ON
h E
Part
marturwn martus
n_ Gen Pl m
TWO
OR
THREE
WH
witnesses
5:20 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
de
amartanontas enwpion pantwn elegce hamartanO enOpion pas elegchO

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m Adv a_ Gen Pl m vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ina hina
Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
20 Them that sin rebuke before all, that others also may fear.
THE
ones-missING ones-sinning fobon phobos

n_ Acc Sg m
IN-VIEW OF-ALL in-the-sight-of all
BE-EXPOSING THAT AND be-you-exposing ! also
THE
loipoi loipon
a_ Nom Pl m
ecwsin echO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
rest rest(p)
FEAR
MAY-BE-HAVING
5:21 diamarturomai
diamarturomai

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

kai twn kai ho

Conj t_ Gen Pl m
I-AM-THRU-witnessING IN-VIEW OF-THE I-am-conjuring in-the-sight-of the eklektwn aggelwn eklektos aggelos
God
AND
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
AND
OF-THE the
ina hina
Conj
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
fulaxhs phulassO
vs Aor Act 2 Sg
cwris chOris
Adv
prokrimatos prokrima
n_ Gen Sg n
21 I charge [thee] before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ, and the elect angels, that thou observe these things without preferring one before another, doing nothing by partiality.
chosen
MESSENGERS THAT these YOU-SHOULD-BE-GUARDING apart-from BEFORE-JUDGing these-things prejudice poiwn poieO
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
kata kata
Prep
prosklisin prosklisis
n_ Acc Sg f
NO-YET-ONE DOING nothing
according-to TOWARD-CLINing bias epitiqei epitithEmi

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
5:22 ceiras tacews mhdeni

cheir
n_ Acc Pl f
tacheOs
Adv
mEdeis
a_ Dat Sg m
mhde mEde
Conj
koinwnei koinOneO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
amartiais hamartia
n_ Dat Pl f
HANDS
SWIFTly too-quickly
to-NO-YET-ONE BE-ON-PLACING NO-YET BE-communionING to-misses no-one be-you-placing-on ! nor-yet be-you-participating ! to-sins threi tEreO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
22 Lay hands suddenly on no man, neither be partaker of other men's sins: keep thyself pure.
allotriais seauton agnon allotrios seautou hagnos

a_ Dat Pl f pf 3 Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
other-placed-ones YOURself of-others
PURE
BE-KEEPING be-you-keeping ! alla oinw alla oinos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
5:23 mhketi
mEketi
Adv
udropotei hudropoteO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
oligw oligos
a_ Dat Sg m
crw chraomai
dia dia
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
NO-NOT-STILL BE-water-DRINKING but no-longer-only be-you-drinking-water ! stomacon kai tas stomachos kai ho
n_ Acc Sg m Conj t_ Acc Pl f
WINE
FEW
BE-USING be-you-using !
THRU THE because-of
23 Drink no longer water, but use a little wine for thy stomach's sake and thine often infirmities.
puknas puknos
a_ Acc Pl f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
asqeneias astheneia
n_ Acc Pl f
stomach
AND
THE
FREQUENT OF-YOU
UN-FIRMnesses infirmities
AV
5:24 tinwn
tis
px Gen Pl m
anqrwpwn ai anthrOpos ho
n_ Gen Pl m t_ Nom Pl f
amartiai prodhloi hamartia prodElos

eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
proagousai proagO
eis eis
Prep
OF-ANY of-some krisin krisis

n_ Acc Sg f
humans
THE
misses sins
BEFORE-EVIDENT ARE taken-for-granted
BEFORE-LEADING INTO preceding-them
24 Some men's sins are open beforehand, going before to judgment; and some [men] they follow after.
tisin tis
px Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
kai epakolouqousin kai epakoloutheO

JUDGing
to-ANY to-some
YET AND also
THEY-ARE-ON-followING they-are-following-up erga ergon

n_ Nom Pl n
5:25 wsautws kai ta

hOsautOs
Adv
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
kala kalos
a_ Nom Pl n
prodhla prodElos
a_ Nom Pl n
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
allws allOs
Adv
AS-SAMEly similarly econta echO

AND also
THE
ACTS
THE
IDEAL
BEFORE-EVIDENT AND taken-for-granted
THE the(p)
otherwise
25 Likewise also the good works [of some] are manifest beforehand; and they that are otherwise cannot be hid.
krubhnai ou kruptO ou
vn 2Aor Pas Part Neg
dunantai dunamai
HAVING having-it
TO-BE-HID
NOT
ARE-ABLE can
AV
1Timothy 6
6:1 osoi
hosos
pk Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
upo hupo
Prep
zugon zugos
n_ Acc Sg m
douloi doulos
n_ Nom Pl m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
idious idios
a_ Acc Pl m
despotas pashs despotEs pas

n_ Acc Pl m a_ Gen Sg f
as-many-as ARE whoever timhs timE

n_ Gen Sg f
UNDER YOKE
SLAVES
THE
OWN
OWNers
OF-EVERY of-all qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
. Let as many servants as are under the yoke count their own masters worthy of all honour, that the name of God and [his] doctrine be not blasphemed.
axious axios
a_ Acc Pl m
hgeisqwsan hEgeomai
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Nom Sg n
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
VALUE honor h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
WORTHY
LET-THEM-BE-deemING THAT NO let-them-be-deeming !
THE
NAME
OF-THE
God
AND
didaskalia blasfhmhtai didaskalia blasphEmeO

n_ Nom Sg f vs Pres Pas 3 Sg
THE
TEACHing
MAY-BE-beING-HARM-AVERRED may-be-being-blasphemed pistous pistos

a_ Acc Pl m
6:2 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
econtes echO
despotas mh despotEs mE
n_ Acc Pl m Part Neg
katafroneitwsan oti kataphroneO hoti

vm Pres Act 3 Pl Conj
THE the-ones
YET ones-BELIEVing HAVING believing
OWNers
NO
LET-THEM-BE-despisING let-them-be-despising-them ! pistoi eisin pistos eimi

a_ Nom Pl f
that seeing-that kai kai

Conj
adelfoi eisin adelphos eimi

alla mallon douleuetwsan alla mallon douleuO

Conj Adv vm Pres Act 3 Pl
oti hoti
Conj
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
And they that have believing masters, let them not despise [them], because they are brethren; but rather do [them] service, because they are faithful and beloved, partakers of the benefit. These things teach and exhort.
brothers brethren
THEY-ARE
but
RATHER
LET-THEM-BE-SLAVING that BELIEVing let-them-be-slaving-for-them ! seeing-that
THEY-ARE
AND
agaphtoi oi agapEtos ho
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
euergesias antilambanomenoi tauta euergesia antilambanomai houtos

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres midD/pasD Nom Pl m pd Acc Pl n
didaske didaskO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai kai
Conj
beLOVED
THE
OF-THE
WELL-ACTion benefaction
supportING being-supported
these BE-YOU-TEACHING AND these-things be-you-teaching !
parakalei parakaleO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
BE-BESIDE-CALLING be-you-entreating !
6:3 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
eterodidaskalei heterodidaskaleO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
kai mh kai mE
Conj Part Neg
prosercetai proserchomai
ugiainousin logois hugiainO logos

vp Pres Act Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m
IF
ANY anyone tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
IS-DIFFERENT-TEACHING AND is-teaching-differently kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
NO
IS-TOWARD-COMING to-beING-SOUND is-approaching kat kata

Prep
sayings words
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou kai th christos kai ho

n_ Gen Sg m Conj t_ Dat Sg f
eusebeian eusebeia
n_ Acc Sg f
If any man teach otherwise, and consent not to wholesome words, [even] the words of our Lord Jesus Christ, and to the doctrine which is according to godliness;
to-THE the
OF-THE
Master Lord
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
AND
to-THE
according-to devoutness in-accord-with
n_ Dat Sg f
TEACHing
6:4 tetufwtai
tuphoO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
epistamenos epistamai
alla noswn alla noseO

peri peri
Prep
he-HAS-been-SMOULDERED NO-YET-ONE beING-adept he-is-conceited nothing being-versed-in zhthseis kai logomacias ex zEtEsis kai logomachia ek
n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f Prep
but
beING-DISEASED being-morbid fqonos phthonos

n_ Nom Sg m
ABOUT
He is proud, knowing nothing, but doting about questions and strifes of words, whereof cometh envy, strife, railings, evil surmisings,
wn hos
pr Gen Pl f
ginetai ginomai
eris eris
n_ Nom Sg f
blasfhmiai blasphEmia
n_ Nom Pl f
SEEKings questionings uponoiai huponoia

n_ Nom Pl f
AND
say-FIGHTing controversies
OUT OF-WHICH IS-BECOMING of-which(p)
ENVY
STRIFE
HARM-AVERments calumnies
ponhrai ponEros
a_ Nom Pl f
UNDER-MINDS wicked suspicions
6:5 diaparatribai
diaparatribE
n_ Nom Pl f
diefqarmenwn diaphtheirO
anqrwpwn ton anthrOpos ho

n_ Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
noun nous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THRU-BESIDE-WEARings HAVING-been-THRU-CORRUPTED OF-humans altercations of-decadent apesterhmenwn ths apostereO ho

vp Perf Pas Gen Pl m t_ Gen Sg f
THE
MIND
AND
Perverse disputings of men of corrupt minds, and destitute of the truth, supposing that gain is godliness: from such withdraw thyself.
alhqeias nomizontwn alEtheia nomizO

n_ Gen Sg f vp Pres Act Gen Pl m
porismon einai porismos eimi

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
eusebeian eusebeia
n_ Acc Sg f
HAVING-been-deprivED deprived
OF-THE
TRUTH
LAWizING inferring
capital
TO-BE
THE
devoutness
AV
1Timothy 6
6:6 estin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
de de
Conj
porismos megas porismos mega

h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
eusebeia meta autarkeias eusebeia meta autarkeia

n_ Nom Sg f Prep n_ Gen Sg f
. But godliness with contentment is great gain.
it-IS is
YET capital
GREAT
THE
devoutness
WITH
SAME-SUFFICiency contentment exenegkein ekpherO

vn 2Aor Act
7
6:7 ouden
oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
gar eishnegkamen eis gar eispherO eis

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kosmon kosmos
n_ Acc Sg m
oti oude hoti oude

Conj Adv
For we brought nothing into [this] world, [and it is] certain we can carry nothing out.
NOT-YET-ONE for nothing ti tis

px Acc Sg n
WE-INTO-CARRY we-carry-into
INTO THE
SYSTEM world
that
NOT-YET TO-BE-OUT-CARRYING neither to-be-carrying-out
dunameqa dunamai
ANY anything
WE-ARE-ABLE we-can de de
Conj
6:8 econtes
echO
diatrofas diatrophE
n_ Acc Pl f
kai skepasmata toutois arkesqhsomeqa kai skepasma houtos arkeO

Conj n_ Acc Pl n pd Dat Pl n vi Fut Pas 1 Pl
And having food and raiment let us be therewith content.
HAVING
YET THRU-NURTURE AND sustenance de de

Conj
SHELTER-effectS to-these protective-covering
WE-SHALL-BE-BEING-SUFFICED
6:9 oi
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
boulomenoi boulomai
ploutein plouteO
vn Pres Act
empiptousin eis empiptO eis

peirasmon kai peirasmos kai

n_ Acc Sg m Conj
THE
YET ones-intendING ones-intending
TO-BE-beING-RICH ARE-IN-FALLING are-falling-in
INTO trial
AND
But they that will be rich fall into temptation and a snare, and [into] many foolish and hurtful lusts, which drown men in destruction and perdition.
pagida kai epiqumias pollas anohtous kai blaberas aitines pagis kai epithumia polus anoEtos kai blaberos hostis
n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f Conj a_ Acc Pl f pr Nom Pl f
buqizousin buthizO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
FASTENer AND trap tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
ON-FEELings desires
MANY
UN-MINDing foolish
AND
HARMful
WHICH-ANY ARE-SUBMERGING which-any are-swamping
anqrwpous eis anthrOpos eis

n_ Acc Pl m Prep
oleqron olethros
n_ Acc Sg m
kai apwleian kai apOleia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
THE
humans
INTO WHOLE-RUIN AND extermination gar pantwn twn gar pas ho

Conj a_ Gen Pl n t_ Gen Pl n
destruction
6:10 riza
rhiza
n_ Nom Sg f
kakwn kakos
a_ Gen Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
filarguria philarguria
n_ Nom Sg f
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
ROOT
for
OF-ALL
OF-THE the
EVILS
IS
THE
FONDness-of-SILVER OF-WHICH fondness-for-money which
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
oregomenoi oregO
apeplanhqhsan apoplanaO
vi Aor Pas 3 Pl
apo apo
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews kai eautous pistis kai heautou

n_ Gen Sg f Conj pf 3 Acc Pl m
10 For the love of money is the root of all evil: which while some coveted after, they have erred from the faith, and pierced themselves through with many sorrows.
ANY some
cravING
WERE-FROM-STRAYED FROM THE were-led-astray
BELIEF faith
AND
selves themselves
periepeiran odunais pollais peripeirO odunE polus

vi Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Pl f a_ Dat Pl f
ABOUT-PROBE try-on-all-sides
to-PAINS to-pain(p) de de
Conj
MANY much tauta houtos

pd Acc Pl n
6:11 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
w anqrwpe qeou O anthrOpos theos

Inj n_ Voc Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
feuge pheugO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
diwke diOkO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
n_ Acc Sg f
YOU
YET o !
human !
OF-God
these BE-FLEEING these-things be-you-fleeing ! praupaqian praupathia

n_ Acc Sg f
BE-CHASING YET JUSTice be-you-pursuing ! righteousness
11 But thou, O man of God, flee these things; and follow after righteousness, godliness, faith, love, patience, meekness.
eusebeian pistin agaphn upomonhn eusebeia pistis agapE hupomonE

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
devoutness
BELIEF faith
LOVE
UNDER-REMAINing MEEK-EMOTION endurance suffering-with-meekness kalon kalos

a_ Acc Sg m
6:12 agwnizou
agOnizomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agwna agOn
n_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
pistews epilabou pistis epilambanomai

n_ Gen Sg f vm 2Aor midD 2 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
BE-YOU-CONTENDING THE be-you-contending ! aiwniou zwhs aiOnios zOE

IDEAL
CONTEST
OF-THE
BELIEF faith
BE-ON-GETTING OF-THE be-you-getting-hold ! kalhn kalos

a_ Acc Sg f
eis eis
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
eklhqhs kaleO
vi Aor Pas 2 Sg
kai wmologhsas thn kai homologeO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 2 Sg t_ Acc Sg f
12 Fight the good fight of faith, lay hold on eternal life, whereunto thou art also called, and hast professed a good profession before many witnesses.
eonian
LIFE
INTO WHICH
YOU-WERE-CALLED AND
YOU-avow
THE
IDEAL
omologian enwpion pollwn marturwn homologia enOpion polus martus

n_ Acc Sg f Adv a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
avowal
IN-VIEW OF-MANY in-the-sight-of many
witnesses
AV
1Timothy 6
6:13 paraggellw
paraggellO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
WH
soi
NA
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-chargING
to-YOU you panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
God
THE
zwogonountos ta zOogoneO ho
vp Pres Act Gen Sg m t_ Acc Pl n

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
marturhsantos epi martureO epi

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m Prep
13 . I give thee charge in the sight of God, who quickeneth all things, and [before] Christ Jesus, who before Pontius Pilate witnessed a good confession;
One-LIVE-parentING one-causing-to-live
THE
ALL
AND
ANOINTED of-Christ omologian homologia

n_ Acc Sg f
JESUS
THE
One-witnessing one-testifying
ON
pontiou pilatou thn pontios pilatos ho

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg m t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f
Pontius
PILATE
THE
IDEAL
avowal
6:14 thrhsai se
tEreO
vn Aor Act
su
pp 2 Acc Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
entolhn aspilon entolE aspilos

anepilhmpton mecri ths anepilEptos mechri ho

a_ Acc Sg f Adv t_ Gen Sg f
TO-KEEP
YOU
THE
direction precept hmwn hemeis

pp 1 Gen Pl
UN-SPOTTed irreprehensible unspotted ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
UNTO
THE
14 That thou keep [this] commandment without spot, unrebukeable, until the appearing of our Lord Jesus Christ:
epifaneias epiphaneia
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ON-APPEARance OF-THE advent
Master Lord idiois idios

a_ Dat Pl m
OF-US
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
6:15 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
kairois kairos
n_ Dat Pl m
deixei deiknumi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
makarios kai monos makarios kai monos

a_ Nom Sg m Conj a_ Nom Sg m
dunasths dunastEs
n_ Nom Sg m
WHOM which o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to-SEASONS OWN to-eras
SHALL-BE-SHOWING THE
HAPPY
AND
ONLY
ABLEr Potentate
15 Which in his times he shall shew, [who is] the blessed and only Potentate, the King of kings, and Lord of lords;

basileuontwn kai kurios basileuO kai kurios

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
kurieuontwn kurieuO
THE
KING
OF-THE
ones-reignING ones-being-king
AND
Master Lord
OF-THE
ones-masterING ones-being-lord aprositon aprositos

a_ Acc Sg n
16 Who only hath immortality, dwelling in the light which no man can approach unto; whom no man hath seen, nor can see: to whom [be] honour and power everlasting. Amen.
6:16 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
ecwn echO
aqanasian fws athanasia phOs

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg n
oikwn oikeO
THE
ONLY only-one eiden eidO

vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
One-HAVING having oudeis oudeis

a_ Nom Sg f
UN-DEATH immortality
LIGHT in-light idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
HOMING making-his-home
UN-TOWARD inaccessible w hos

pr Dat Sg m
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
anqrwpwn oude anthrOpos oude

n_ Gen Pl m Adv
dunatai dunamai
WHOM
PERCEIVED
NOT-YET-ONE OF-humans not-one aiwnion amhn aiOnios amEn

a_ Nom Sg n Hebrew
NOT-YET TO-BE-PERCEIVING IS-ABLE nor can
to-WHOM
timh timE
n_ Nom Sg f
kai kratos kai kratos

Conj n_ Nom Sg n
VALUE honor
AND
HOLDing might
eonian
AMEN
6:17 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
plousiois en plousios en
a_ Dat Pl m Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
nun nun
Adv
aiwni aiOn
n_ Dat Sg m
paraggelle paraggellO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
to-THE the-ones
RICH-ones rich
IN
THE
NOW eon current
BE-YOU-chargING NO be-you-charging ! epi ploutou adhlothti all epi qew epi ploutos adElotEs alla epi theos
Prep n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg f Conj Prep n_ Dat Sg m
uyhlofronein hupsElophroneO
vn Pres Act
mhde mEde
Conj
hlpikenai elpizO
vn Perf Act
17 Charge them that are rich in this world, that they be not highminded, nor trust in uncertain riches, but in the living God, who giveth us richly all things to enjoy;
TO-BE-beING-HIGH-DISPOSed NO-YET TO-HAVE-EXPECTED ON to-be-being-haughty nor-yet to-rely-on tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
RICHES of-riches
UN-EVIDENT dubiousness
but
ON
God
pareconti parechO
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
plousiws eis plousiOs eis

Adv Prep
apolausin apolausis
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
One-tenderING one-tendering
to-US us
ALL all-things en en
RICHly
INTO FROM-ENJOYment enjoyment

18 That they do good, that they be rich in good works, ready to distribute, willing to communicate;
6:18 agaqoergein
agathoergeO
vn Pres Act
ploutein plouteO
vn Pres Act
ergois kalois eumetadotous einai ergon kalos eumetadotos eimi

n_ Dat Pl n a_ Dat Pl n a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
Prep
TO-BE-GOOD-ACTING TO-BE-beING-RICH IN to-be-doing-good-acts koinwnikous koinOnikos

a_ Acc Pl m
ACTS
IDEAL
WELL-WITH-GIVers liberal
TO-BE
communioners contributers
AV
6:19 apoqhsaurizontas
apothEsaurizO
eautois heautou
pf 3 Dat Pl m
qemelion kalon themelios kalos

eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
mellon mellO
ina hina
Conj
FROM-PLACING-INTO-MORROW to-selves foundation treasuring-up to-themselves epilabwntai epilambanomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Pl
IDEAL
INTO THE
beING-ABOUT which-is-impending
THAT
19 Laying up in themselves a good against the time to they may lay hold life.
store for foundation come, that on eternal
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ontws zwhs ontOs zOE

Adv n_ Gen Sg f
THEY-MAY-BE-ON-GETTING OF-THE they-may-be-getting-hold
BEINGly really
LIFE
6:20 w timoqee thn

O
Inj
timotheos
n_ Voc Sg m
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraqhkhn parathEkE
n_ Acc Sg f
fulaxon phulassO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ektrepomenos tas ektrepO ho

vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m t_ Acc Pl f
bebhlous bebElos
a_ Acc Pl f
o!
Timothy !
THE
BESIDE-PLACED GUARD which-is-committed-to-you guard-you ! ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OUT-REVERTING turning-aside-from
THE
profane
20 O Timothy, keep that which is committed to thy trust, avoiding profane [and] vain babblings, and oppositions of science falsely so called:
kenofwnias kai antiqeseis kenophOnia kai antithesis

yeudwnumou gnwsews pseudOnumos gnOsis

EMPTY-SOUNDS prattlings
AND
INSTEAD-PLACings OF-THE antipathies epaggellomenoi epaggellomai

FALSE-NAMED falsely-named peri peri

Prep
KNOWledge
6:21 hn
hos
pr Acc Sg f
tines tis
px Nom Pl m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin hstochsan h pistis astocheO ho

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl t_ Nom Sg f
WHICH
ANY some umwn humeis

pp 2 Gen Pl
promisING are-professing
BELIEF faith
THEY-deviate they-swerve
THE
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
meq meta
Prep
21 Which some professing have erred concerning the faith. Grace [be] with thee. Amen. <<[The first to Timothy was written from Laodicea, which is the chiefest city of Phrygia Pacatiana.]>>
grace
WITH YOU(p) ye
AV
2Timothy 1
2Timothy
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
dia dia
Prep

kat kata
Prep
PAUL
commissioner apostle ths ho

Prep
THRU WILL through
OF-God
. Paul, an apostle of Jesus Christ by the will of God, according to the promise of life which is in Christ Jesus,
epaggelian zwhs epaggelia zOE


t_ Gen Sg f
promise
OF-LIFE
THE
IN
ANOINTED Christ caris charis

n_ Nom Sg f
JESUS
1:2 timoqew agaphtw teknw

timotheos
n_ Dat Sg m
agapEtos
a_ Dat Sg m
teknon
n_ Dat Sg n
eleos eleos
n_ Nom Sg m
eirhnh eirEnE
n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
to-Timothy
beLOVED
offspring child
grace
MERCY
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
AND
To Timothy, [my] dearly beloved son: Grace, mercy, [and] peace, from God the Father and Christ Jesus our Lord.
cristou ihsou christos iEsous

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
Master Lord tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-US
1:3 carin
charis
n_ Acc Sg f
ecw echO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
w hos
pr Dat Sg m
latreuw latreuO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
apo apo
Prep
progonwn progonos
n_ Gen Pl m
grace gratitude en en
Prep
I-AM-HAVING
to-THE
God
to-WHOM
I-AM-offerING-DIVINE-SERVICE FROM BEFORE-parents my-ancestors thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
kaqara suneidhsei ws adialeipton ecw katharos suneidEsis hOs adialeiptos echO

a_ Dat Sg f n_ Dat Sg f Adv a_ Acc Sg f vi Pres Act 1 Sg
peri peri
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
mneian mneia
n_ Acc Sg f
I thank God, whom I serve from [my] forefathers with pure conscience, that without ceasing I have remembrance of thee in my prayers night and day;
IN
clean clear tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
conscience
AS
UN-intermittent unintermittent
I-AM-HAVING
THE
REMINDer remembrance
en en
Prep
dehsesin mou deEsis egO

n_ Dat Pl f pp 1 Gen Sg
nuktos kai hmeras nux kai hEmera

IN
THE
petitions
OF-ME
OF-NIGHT night idein eidO

vn 2Aor Act
AND
OF-DAY day sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
1:4 epipoqwn
epipotheO
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
memnhmenos mnaomai
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
dakruwn dakru
n_ Gen Pl n
Greatly desiring to see thee, being mindful of thy tears, that I may be filled with joy;
ON-LONGING longing-for ina hina

Conj
YOU
TO-BE-PERCEIVING HAVING-been-REMINDED OF-YOU remembering
THE
TEARS
caras chara
n_ Gen Sg f
plhrwqw plEroO
vs Aor Pas 1 Sg
THAT OF-JOY
I-MAY-BE-BEING-FILLED I-may-be-being-filled-full labwn lambanO

1:5 upomnhsin
hupomnEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
anupokritou pistews htis anupokritos pistis hostis

a_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Sg f
UNDER-REMINDer GETTING reminder enwkhsen enoikeO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
OF-THE
IN
YOU
UN-hypocritical unfeigned lwidi lOis

n_ Dat Sg m
BELIEF faith kai th kai ho

Conj t_ Dat Sg f
WHICH-ANY which-any mhtri mEtEr

n_ Dat Sg f
prwton prOton
Adv
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mammh mammE
n_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
When I call to remembrance the unfeigned faith that is in thee, which dwelt first in thy grandmother Lois, and thy mother Eunice; and I am persuaded that in thee also.
IN-HOMES BEFORE-most IN makes-its-home first sou su

pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
GRANDMOTHER OF-YOU
LOIS
AND
THE in-the
MOTHER
eunikh pepeismai eunikE peithO

n_ Dat Sg f vi Perf Pas 1 Sg
de de
Conj
oti kai en hoti kai en

Conj Conj Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
OF-YOU
Eunice
I-HAVE-been-PERSUADED YET that
AND also se su
IN
YOU
1:6 di
dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
aitian anamimnhskw aitia anamimnEskO

anazwpurein anazOpureO
vn Pres Act
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
carisma charisma
n_ Acc Sg n
pp 2 Acc Sg
THRU WHICH because-of tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
cause
I-AM-UP-REMINDING YOU I-am-reminding estin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-BE-UP-LIVE-FIRING THE to-be-rekindling dia dia

Prep
grace-effect gracious-gift
. Wherefore I put thee in remembrance that thou stir up the gift of God, which is in thee by the putting on of my hands.
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
o hos
pr Nom Sg n
en en
Prep
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epiqesews twn epithesis ho

OF-THE
God
WHICH
IS
IN
YOU
THRU THE through
ON-PLACing imposition
OF-THE
AV
2Timothy 1
ceirwn mou cheir egO

HANDS
OF-ME
1:7 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar edwken gar didOmi

hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
pneuma deilias alla dunamews kai pneuma deilia alla dunamis kai
n_ Acc Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Conj n_ Gen Sg f Conj
For God hath not given us the spirit of fear; but of power, and of love, and of a sound mind.
NOT
for
GIVES
to-US us
THE
God
spirit
OF-DREAD of-timidity
but
OF-ABILITY of-power
AND
agaphs kai swfronismou agapE kai sOphronismos

OF-LOVE
AND
OF-sanity
1:8 mh
mE
Part Neg
oun oun
Conj
epaiscunqhs epaischunomai
vs Aor pasD 2 Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
marturion tou marturion ho

kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
mhde mEde
Conj
NO
THEN MAY-YOU-BE-BEING-ON-VILED THE you-may-be-being-ashamed of-the ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
witness testimony
OF-THE
Master Lord tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
OF-US
NO-YET nor-yet
eme egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
desmion autou desmios autos

alla sugkakopaqhson alla sugkakopatheO

n_ Dat Sg n
Be not thou therefore ashamed of the testimony of our Lord, nor of me his prisoner: but be thou partaker of the afflictions of the gospel according to the power of God;
ME of-me kata kata

Prep
THE
BOUND-one prisoner
OF-Him
but
YOU-TOGETHER-EVIL-EMOTION to-THE suffer-you-evil-with ! the
WELL-MESSAGE
dunamin qeou dunamis theos

according-to ABILITY in-accord-with power
OF-God
1:9 tou
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
swsantos sOzO
vp Aor Act Gen Sg m
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
kai kalesantos kai kaleO

klhsei klEsis
n_ Dat Sg f
agia hagios
a_ Dat Sg f
ou ou
Part Neg
kata kata
Prep
THE
One-SAVing one-saving erga ergon

n_ Acc Pl n
US
AND
CALLing calling-us idian idios

a_ Acc Sg f
to-CALLing HOLY
NOT
according-to in-accord-with thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
alla kata alla kata

Conj Prep
proqesin prothesis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai carin kai charis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
Who hath saved us, and called [us] with an holy calling, not according to our works, but according to his own purpose and grace, which was given us in Christ Jesus before the world began,
THE
ACTS
OF-US
but
according-to OWN in-accord-with pro pro

Prep
BEFORE-PLACing AND purpose
grace
THE
doqeisan didOmi
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep

cronwn aiwniwn chronos aiOnios

BEING-GIVEN
to-US
IN
ANOINTED Christ nun dia nun dia

Adv Prep
JESUS
BEFORE TIMES
eonian
1:10 fanerwqeisan
phaneroO
vp Aor Pas Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
epifaneias epiphaneia
n_ Gen Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

BEING-made-APPEAR YET NOW THRU THE being-manifested through cristou ihsou christos iEsous
ON-APPEARance OF-THE advent ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
SAViour
OF-US
katarghsantos men katargeO men

vp Aor Act Gen Sg m Part
qanaton fwtisantos de thanatos phOtizO de

n_ Acc Sg m vp Aor Act Gen Sg m Conj
zwhn zOE
n_ Acc Sg f
10 But is now made manifest by the appearing of our Saviour Jesus Christ, who hath abolished death, and hath brought life and immortality to light through the gospel:
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
DOWN-UN-ACTing one-abolishing dia dia

Prep
INDEED THE
DEATH
enLIGHTening illuminating
YET LIFE
kai afqarsian kai aphtharsia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
n_ Gen Sg n
AND
UN-CORRUPTion THRU THE incorruption through o hos

pr Acc Sg n
WELL-MESSAGE
1:11 eis
eis
Prep
eteqhn tithEmi
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
khrux kErux
n_ Nom Sg m
kai apostolos kai didaskalos kai apostolos kai didaskalos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m Conj n_ Nom Sg m
11 Whereunto I am appointed a preacher, and an apostle, and a teacher of the Gentiles.
INTO WHICH
WAS-PLACED I was-appointed
PROCLAIMer AND herald pascw paschO

vi Pres Act 1 Sg
AND
TEACHer
1:12 di
dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
aitian kai tauta aitia kai houtos

n_ Acc Sg f Conj pd Acc Pl n
all ouk alla ou

Conj Part Neg
epaiscunomai epaischunomai
THRU WHICH because-of oida eidO

vi Perf Act 1 Sg
cause
AND also
these I-AM-EMOTIONING but these-things I-am-suffering kai pepeismai kai peithO

NOT
I-AM-beING-ON-VILED I-am-being-ashamed oti dunatos estin hoti dunatos eimi

gar w gar hos

Conj pr Dat Sg m
pepisteuka pisteuO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
12 For the which cause I also suffer these things: nevertheless I am not ashamed: for I know whom I have believed, and am persuaded that he is able to keep that which I have committed unto him against that day.
I-HAVE-PERCEIVED for I-am-aware
to-WHOM whom
I-HAVE-BELIEVED AND
I-HAVE-been-PERSUADED that
ABLE
He-IS
AV
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
paraqhkhn parathEkE
n_ Acc Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
fulaxai eis phulassO eis

vn Aor Act Prep
ekeinhn thn ekeinos ho

hmeran hEmera
n_ Acc Sg f
THE
BESIDE-PLACED OF-ME which-is-committed to-me
TO-GUARD
INTO that
THE
DAY
1:13 upotupwsin ece

hupotupOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
echO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ugiainontwn logwn hugiainO logos

vp Pres Act Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
par para
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
hkousas akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
pattern
BE-HAVING be-you-having ! th ho
OF-beING-SOUND
sayings words
OF-WHICH BESIDE ME which
YOU-HEAR
13 Hold fast the form of sound words, which thou hast heard of me, in faith and love which is in Christ Jesus.
en en
Prep
pistei kai agaph pistis kai agapE

en en
Prep

t_ Dat Sg f
IN
BELIEF faith
AND
LOVE
THE
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
1:14 thn
ho
t_ Acc Sg f
kalhn kalos
a_ Acc Sg f
paraqhkhn parathEkE
n_ Acc Sg f
fulaxon phulassO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
dia dia
Prep

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
THE
IDEAL
BESIDE-PLACED GUARD which-is-committed-to-you guard-you ! hmin hemeis

pp 1 Dat Pl
THRU spirit through
HOLY
THE
14 That good thing which was committed unto thee keep by the Holy Ghost which dwelleth in us.
enoikountos en enoikeO en
vp Pres Act Gen Sg n Prep
one-IN-HOMING making-its-home
IN
US
1:15 oidas
eidO
vi Perf Act 2 Sg
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
oti apestrafhsan hoti apostrephO

Conj vi 2Aor Pas 3 Pl
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED this you-are-aware-of asia asia

n_ Dat Sg f
that
WERE-FROM-TURNED ME were-turned-from
ALL
THE-ones the-ones
IN
THE
15 . This thou knowest, that all they which are in Asia be turned away from me; of whom are Phygellus and Hermogenes.
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
fugelos kai ermogenhs phugelos kai hermogenEs

ASIA OF-WHOM IS province-of-Asia of-whom(p)
PHYGELLUS AND
Hermogenes
1:16 dwh
didOmi
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
onhsiforou onEsiphoros
n_ Gen Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
MAY-BE-GIVING MERCY may-he-be-granting ! oti pollakis me hoti pollakis egO

Conj Adv pp 1 Acc Sg
THE
Master Lord kai thn kai ho

Conj
to-THE
OF-Onesiphorus (PROFIT-CARRYING) HOME of-Onesiphorus household mou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
16 The Lord give mercy unto the house of Onesiphorus; for he oft refreshed me, and was not ashamed of my chain:
aneyuxen anapsuchO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
alusin halusis
n_ Acc Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
vi Aor pasD 3 Sg
t_ Acc Sg f
that
MANY-times often
ME
he-UP-COOLS AND he-refreshes en en

Prep
THE of-the
UN-LOOSE OF-ME chain
NOT
WAS-ON-VILED was-ashamed kai euren kai heuriskO

17 But, when he was in Rome, he sought me out very diligently, and found [me].
1:17 alla genomenos

alla
Conj
ginomai
rwmh rhOmE
n_ Dat Sg f
spoudaiws ezhthsen me spoudaiOs zEteO egO

Adv vi Aor Act 3 Sg pp 1 Acc Sg
but
BECOMING coming-to-be autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
IN
ROME
DILIGENTly
he-SEEKS
ME
AND
FOUND found-me en en
Prep
18 The Lord grant unto him that he may find mercy of the Lord in that day: and in how many things he ministered unto me at Ephesus, thou knowest very well.
1:18 dwh
didOmi
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
eurein heuriskO
vn 2Aor Act
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
para para
Prep
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
MAY-BE-GIVING to-him may-he-be-granting ! ekeinh th ekeinos ho

THE
Master Lord en en
Prep
TO-BE-FINDING MERCY
BESIDE Master Lord su su

pp 2 Nom Sg
IN
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
kai osa kai hosos

Conj pk Acc Pl n
efesw ephesos
n_ Dat Sg f
dihkonhsen diakoneO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
beltion beltion
Adv
that
THE
DAY
AND
as-many-as IN how-much
EPHESUS he-THRU-SERVES more-CASTing YOU he-serves quite-well
ginwskeis ginOskO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
ARE-KNOWING
AV
2Timothy 2
2:1 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
oun oun
Conj
teknon mou teknon egO

n_ Voc Sg n pp 1 Gen Sg
endunamou endunamoO
vm Pres Pas 2 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
cariti th charis ho
en en
Prep
. Thou therefore, my son, be strong in the grace that is in Christ Jesus.
YOU
THEN offspring child !
OF-ME
BE-beING-IN-ABLED IN be-you-being-invigorated !
THE
grace
THE
IN

ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
2:2 kai a
kai
Conj
hos
pr Acc Pl n
hkousas akouO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
par para
Prep
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
dia dia
Prep
pollwn marturwn tauta polus martus houtos

a_ Gen Pl m n_ Gen Pl m pd Acc Pl n
AND
WHICH YOU-HEAR which-things
BESIDE ME
THRU MANY through
witnesses
these
And the things that thou hast heard of me among many witnesses, the same commit thou to faithful men, who shall be able to teach others also.
paraqou paratithEmi
vi 2Aor Mid 2 Sg
pistois pistos
a_ Dat Pl m
anqrwpois oitines ikanoi anthrOpos hostis hikanos

n_ Dat Pl m pr Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
esontai kai eterous eimi kai heteros

vi Fut vxx 3 Pl Conj a_ Acc Pl m
BE-YOU-BESIDE-PLACING to-BELIEVing humans be-you-committing ! to-faithful didaxai didaskO

vn Aor Act
WHO-ANY who-any
enough competent
SHALL-BE
AND also
DIFFERENT-ones different-ones
TO-TEACH
2:3 sugkakopaqhson
sugkakopatheO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ws kalos hOs kalos

Adv a_ Nom Sg m
stratiwths cristou stratiOtEs christos

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
Thou therefore endure hardness, as a good soldier of Jesus Christ.
YOU-TOGETHER-EVIL-EMOTION AS suffer-evil-you-with-me !
IDEAL
WARrior soldier tais ho

t_ Dat Pl f
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
2:4 oudeis
oudeis
a_ Nom Sg f
strateuomenos empleketai strateuO emplekO

vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
biou bios
n_ Gen Sg m
pragmateiais pragmateia
n_ Dat Pl f
NOT-YET-ONE WARRING no-one one-warring ina hina

Conj
IS-beING-IN-BRAIDED to-THE is-being-involved
OF-THE
livelihood
PRACTISES business(p)
No man that warreth entangleth himself with the affairs of [this] life; that he may please him who hath chosen him to be a soldier.
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
stratologhsanti aresh stratologeO areskO

vp Aor Act Dat Sg m vs Aor Act 3 Sg
THAT to-THE the
One-WAR-saying one-enlisting-him de de
Conj
he-SHOULD-BE-PLEASING
2:5 ean
ean
Cond
kai aqlh kai athleO

tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
stefanoutai stephanoO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
ean ean
Cond
mh mE
Part Neg
IF-EVER YET AND also nomimws aqlhsh nomimOs athleO

Adv vs Aor Act 3 Sg
MAY-BE-COMPETING ANY may-be-competing-in-the-games anyone
NOT
IS-beING-WREATHED IF-EVER NO he-is-being-given-a-wreath
And if a man also strive for masteries, [yet] is he not crowned, except he strive lawfully.
LAWfully
he-SHOULD-BE-COMPETING
2:6 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kopiwnta kopiaO
gewrgon geOrgos
n_ Acc Sg m
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
prwton prOton
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
karpwn karpos
n_ Gen Pl m
The husbandman that laboureth must be first partaker of the fruits.
THE
toilING
LAND-ACTer IS-BINDING farmer must
BEFORE-most OF-THE first
FRUITS
metalambanein metalambanO
vn Pres Act
TO-BE-WITH-GETTING to-be-partaking
2:7 noei
noeO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
o hos
pr Nom Sg m
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dwsei didOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
gar soi gar su

Conj pp 2 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
Consider what I say; and the Lord give thee understanding in all things.
BE-MINDING WHICH be-you-apprehending ! sunesin sunesis

n_ Acc Sg f
I-AM-sayING
SHALL-BE-GIVING for
to-YOU you
THE
Master Lord
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
understanding IN
ALL
2:8 mnhmoneue
mnEmoneuO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
criston eghgermenon christos egeirO

ek ek
Prep
nekrwn nekros
a_ Gen Pl m
ek ek
Prep
spermatos sperma
n_ Gen Sg n
BE-YOU-rememberING JESUS be-you-remembering !
ANOINTED Christ
HAVING-been-ROUSED OUT OF-DEAD OUT OF-seed one-having-been-roused of-dead-ones
. Remember that Jesus Christ of the seed of David was raised from the dead according to my gospel:
AV
2Timothy 2
dauid kata dauid kata

ni proper Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
n_ Acc Sg n
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
of-DAVID according-to THE of-David
WELL-MESSAGE OF-ME
2:9 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
kakopaqw kakopatheO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
mecri desmwn ws kakourgos alla o mechri desmos hOs kakourgos alla ho

Adv n_ Gen Pl m Adv a_ Nom Sg m Conj t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
IN
WHICH
I-AM-EVIL-EMOTIONING UNTO I-am-suffering-evil ou ou

Part Neg
BONDS
AS
EVIL-ACTer malefactor
but
THE
saying word
Wherein I suffer trouble, as an evil doer, [even] unto bonds; but the word of God is not bound.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
dedetai deO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
OF-THE
God
NOT
HAS-been-BOUND is-bound panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
2:10 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
upomenw hupomenO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
dia dia
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
eklektous ina eklektos hina

a_ Acc Pl m Conj
kai kai
Conj
THRU this because-of autoi autos

pp Nom Pl m
ALL
I-AM-UNDER-REMAINING THRU THE I-am-enduring because-of ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THAT AND also aiwniou aiOnios

a_ Gen Sg f
10 Therefore I endure all things for the elect's sakes, that they may also obtain the salvation which is in Christ Jesus with eternal glory.
swthrias tucwsin sOtEria tugchanO

n_ Gen Sg f vs 2Aor Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep

meta doxhs meta doxa

Prep n_ Gen Sg f
they
OF-SAVing salvation o ho
MAY-BE-HAPPENING OF-THE may-be-happening-upon the logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
IN
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
WITH
esteem glory
eonian
2:11 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
ei ei
Cond
gar sunapeqanomen gar sunapothnEskO

kai kai
Conj
t_ Nom Sg m
11 [It is] a faithful saying: For if we be dead with [him], we shall also live with [him]:
BELIEVing faithful suzhsomen suzaO

vi Fut Act 1 Pl
THE
saying
IF
for
WE-TOGETHER-FROM-DIED AND we-died-together also
WE-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-LIVING we-shall-be-living-together
2:12 ei
ei
Cond
upomenomen hupomenO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
kai sumbasileusomen kai sumbasileuO

ei ei
Cond
arnhsomeqa arneomai
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
kakeinos kakeinos
pd Nom Sg m
12 If we suffer, we shall also reign with [him]: if we deny [him], he also will deny us:
IF
WE-ARE-UNDER-REMAINING AND we-are-enduring also hmas hEmeis

pp 1 Acc Pl
WE-SHALL-BE-TOGETHER-reignING IF we-shall-be-reigning-together
WE-ARE-disownING AND-that-One we-are-disowing also-that-one
arnhsetai arneomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
SHALL-BE-disownING US shall-be-disowing
2:13 ei
ei
Cond
apistoumen apisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
ekeinos ekeinos
pd Nom Sg m
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
menei menO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
arnhsasqai gar eauton arneomai gar heautou

vn Aor midD Conj pf 3 Acc Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
13 If we believe not, [yet] he abideth faithful: he cannot deny himself.
IF
WE-ARE-UN-BELIEVING that-One we-are-being-unfaithful that-one
BELIEVing faithful
IS-REMAINING TO-disown
for
Self himself
NOT
dunatai dunamai
He-IS-ABLE he-can
2:14 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
upomimnhske hupomimnEskO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
these BE-UNDER-REMINDING THRU-witnessING of-these-things be-you-reminding-them ! conjuring-them logomacein logomacheO

vn Pres Act
IN-VIEW in-sight-of
OF-THE the
God
NO
ep epi
Prep
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
crhsimon epi katastrofh twn chrEsimos epi katastrophE ho

a_ Acc Sg n Prep n_ Dat Sg f t_ Gen Pl m
akouontwn akouO
14 . Of these things put [them] in remembrance, charging [them] before the Lord that they strive not about words to no profit, [but] to the subverting of the hearers.
TO-BE-say-FIGHTING ON to-be-engaging-in-controversy
NOT-YET-ONE USEful nothing
ON
DOWN-TURNing upsetting tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
OF-THE
15 Study to shew thyself approved unto God, a workman that needeth not to be ashamed, rightly dividing the word of truth.
2:15 spoudason
spoudazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
seauton dokimon parasthsai seautou dokimos paristEmi

pf 3 Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vn Aor Act
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
ergathn ergatEs
n_ Acc Sg m
BE-YOU-DILIGENT YOURself endeavor-you !
tested qualified
TO-BESIDE-STAND to-THE to-present logon logos

n_ Acc Sg m
God
ACTer worker
anepaiscunton orqotomounta ton anepaischuntos orthotomeO ho

a_ Acc Sg m vp Pres Act Acc Sg m t_ Acc Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
UN-ON-VILED unashamed
ERECT-CUTTING correctly-partitioning
THE
saying word
OF-THE
TRUTH
AV
2Timothy 2
2:16 tas
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
de de
Conj
bebhlous kenofwnias periistaso bebElos kenophOnia periistEmi

a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
epi pleion epi polus

gar gar
Conj
THE
YET profane
EMPTY-SOUNDS prattlings asebeias asebeia

n_ Gen Sg f
be-YOU-ABOUT-STANDING ON be-you-standing-aloof-from !
MORE
for
16 But shun profane [and] vain babblings: for they will increase unto more ungodliness.
prokoyousin prokoptO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
THEY-SHALL-BE-progressING UN-REVERence irreverence
2:17 kai o
kai
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
ws gaggraina nomhn hOs gaggraina nomE

Adv n_ Nom Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
exei echO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
wn hos
pr Gen Pl m
17 And their word will eat as doth a canker: of whom is Hymenaeus and Philetus;
AND
THE
saying word
OF-them
AS
GANGRENE
pasture
SHALL-BE-HAVING OF-WHOM of-whom(p)
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
umenaios kai filhtos humenaios kai philEtos

IS
HYMENEUS
AND
Philetus (FOND) Philetus alhqeian hstochsan legontes alEtheia astocheO legO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Aor Act 3 Pl vp Pres Act Nom Pl m
NA
2:18 oitines peri

hostis
pr Nom Pl m
peri
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
WHO-ANY who-any
TRUTH
deviate swerve
sayING
THE
18 Who concerning the truth have erred, saying that the resurrection is past already; and overthrow the faith of some.
anastasin hdh anastasis EdE

n_ Acc Sg f Adv
gegonenai ginomai
vn 2Perf Act
kai anatrepousin kai anatrepO

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
tinwn tis
px Gen Pl m
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
ALREADY TO-HAVE-BECOME AND to-have-occurred
ARE-UP-REVERTING THE are-subverting qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-ANY of-some esthken histEmi

vi Perf Act 3 Sg
BELIEF faith ecwn echO

19 . Nevertheless the foundation of God standeth sure, having this seal, The Lord knoweth them that are his. And, Let every one that nameth the name of Christ depart from iniquity.
2:19 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
mentoi stereos qemelios tou mentoi stereos themelios ho

Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg m
THE
howbeit
SOLID
foundation
OF-THE
God
HAS-STOOD stands ontas eimi

HAVING
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
sfragida tauthn egnw sphragis houtos ginOskO

n_ Acc Sg f pd Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
kai kai
Conj
THE
SEAL
this
KNEW
Master Lord pas pas

a_ Nom Sg m
THE
ones-BEING ones-being onomazwn onomazO

OF-Him
AND
aposthtw aphistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 3 Sg
apo apo
Prep
adikias adikia
n_ Gen Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
LET-BE-FROM-STANDING FROM UN-JUSTness EVERY let-him-be-withdrawing ! injustice kuriou kurios

n_ Gen Sg m
THE
one-NAMING one-naming
THE
NAME
OF-Master of-Lord
2:20 en
en
Prep
megalh de mega de
a_ Dat Sg f Conj
oikia oikia
n_ Dat Sg f
ouk ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
monon skeuh monon skeuos

Adv n_ Nom Pl n
crusa chruseos
a_ Nom Pl n
kai argura kai argureos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
IN
GREAT
YET HOME house
NOT
IS there-is kai a kai hos

Conj
ONLY
INSTRUMENTS GOLDen utensils eis eis

Prep
AND
SILVER
20 But in a great house there are not only vessels of gold and of silver, but also of wood and of earth; and some to honour, and some to dishonour.
alla kai xulina alla kai xulinos

Conj Conj a_ Nom Pl n
kai ostrakina kai ostrakinos

Conj a_ Nom Pl n
men men
Part
timhn timE
n_ Acc Sg f
a hos
pr Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
eis eis
Prep
pr Nom Pl n
but
AND also
WOODen
AND
EARTHENWARE AND
WHICH which(p)
INDEED INTO VALUE honor
WHICH which(p)
YET INTO
atimian atimia
n_ Acc Sg f
UN-VALUE dishonor
2:21 ean
ean
Cond
oun oun
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ekkaqarh ekkathairO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
apo apo
Prep
toutwn estai houtos eimi

pd Gen Pl n vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
IF-EVER THEN ANY anyone skeuos skeuos

n_ Nom Sg n
SHOULD-BE-OUT-cleanING self should-be-purging himself hgiasmenon hagiazO

FROM these
he-SHALL-BE
eis eis
Prep
timhn timE
n_ Acc Sg f
eucrhston tw euchrEstos ho
a_ Nom Sg n t_ Dat Sg m
despoth eis despotEs eis

n_ Dat Sg m Prep
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
21 If a man therefore purge himself from these, he shall be a vessel unto honour, sanctified, and meet for the master's use, [and] prepared unto every good work.
INSTRUMENT INTO VALUE utensil honor
HAVING-been-HOLYizED WELL-USEful having-been-hallowed useful
to-THE
OWNer
INTO EVERY
AV
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
agaqon htoimasmenon agathos hetoimazO

a_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Nom Sg n
ACT
GOOD
HAVING-been-made-READY
2:22 tas
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
de de
Conj
newterikas epiqumias feuge neOterikos epithumia pheugO

a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vm Pres Act 2 Sg
diwke diOkO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
de de
Conj
dikaiosunhn pistin dikaiosunE pistis

THE
YET YOUNGer-ic youthful
ON-FEELings desires
BE-FLEEING be-you-fleeing !
BE-CHASING YET JUSTice be-you-pursuing ! righteousness kurion kurios

n_ Acc Sg m
BELIEF faith
22 . Flee also youthful lusts: but follow righteousness, faith, charity, peace, with them that call on the Lord out of a pure heart.
agaphn eirhnhn meta twn agapE eirEnE meta ho

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Gen Pl m
epikaloumenwn ton epikaleO ho

vp Pres Mid Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg m
ek ek
Prep
kaqaras kardias katharos kardia

LOVE
PEACE
WITH
THE
ones-ON-CALLING ones-invoking
THE
Master Lord
OUT OF-clean
HEART
2:23 tas
ho
t_ Acc Pl f
de de
Conj
mwras kai apaideutous zhthseis paraitou mOros kai apaideutos zEtEsis paraiteomai
a_ Acc Pl f Conj a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
eidws eidO
oti hoti
Conj
23 But foolish and unlearned questions avoid, knowing that they do gender strifes.
THE
YET INSIPID stupid macas machE

n_ Acc Pl f
AND
UN-disciplined crude
SEEKings questionings
gennwsin gennaO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
THEY-ARE-generatING FIGHTings
2:24 doulon de
doulos
n_ Acc Sg m
de
Conj
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ou ou
Part Neg
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
macesqai machomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
alla hpion alla Epios

Conj a_ Acc Sg m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
pros pros
Prep
SLAVE
YET OF-Master of-Lord
NOT
it-IS-BINDING must
TO-BE-FIGHTING but
GENTLE
TO-BE
TOWARD
24 And the servant of the Lord must not strive; but be gentle unto all [men], apt to teach, patient,
pantas didaktikon anexikakon pas didaktikos anexikakos

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m
ALL
TEACH-ic apt-to-teach
UN-OUT-EVILed bearing-with-evil tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
2:25 en
en
Prep
prauthti paideuonta prautEs paideuO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
antidiatiqemenous mhpote antidiatithemai mEpote

vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m Adv
IN
MEEKness
disciplinING training autois o autos ho

pp Dat Pl m
THE
ones-antagonizING ones-antagonizing qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
NO-?-when seeing-whether epignwsin epignOsis

n_ Acc Sg f
25 In meekness instructing those that oppose themselves; if God peradventure will give them repentance to the acknowledging of the truth;
dwh didOmi
vo 2Aor Act 3 Sg / vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
alhqeias alEtheia
n_ Gen Sg f
t_ Nom Sg m
MAY-BE-GIVING
to-them them
THE
God
after-MIND repentance tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
INTO ON-KNOWledge OF-TRUTH realization pagidos pagis

n_ Gen Sg f
26 And [that] they may recover themselves out of the snare of the devil, who are taken captive by him at his will.
2:26 kai ananhywsin

kai
Conj
ananEphO
vs Aor Act 3 Pl
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
diabolou diabolos
a_ Gen Sg m
AND
THEY-SHALL-BE-UP-not-DRINKING OUT OF-THE they-shall-be-sobering-up up hupo

Prep
OF-THE
THRU-CASTer FASTENer Adversary trap
ezwgrhmenoi zOgreO
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
ekeinou qelhma ekeinos thelEma

pd Gen Sg m n_ Acc Sg n
HAVING-been-LIVE-CAUGHT UNDER him having-been-caught-alive by
INTO THE
OF-that of-that-one
WILL
AV
2Timothy 3
3:1 touto
houtos
pd Acc Sg n
de de
Conj
ginwske ginOskO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
oti en hoti en
Conj Prep
escatais hmerais ensthsontai eschatos hEmera enistEmi

a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f vi Fut midD 3 Pl
kairoi kairos
n_ Nom Pl m
. This know also, that in the last days perilous times shall come.
this
YET BE-KNOWING that be-you-knowing !
IN
LAST
DAYS
SHALL-BE-IN-STANDING SEASONS shall-be-being-present periods
calepoi chalepos
a_ Nom Pl m
FEROCIOUS perilous
3:2 esontai gar oi

eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Pl
gar
Conj
ho
t_ Nom Pl m
anqrwpoi filautoi anthrOpos philautos

filarguroi philarguros
a_ Nom Pl m
alazones alazOn
n_ Nom Pl m
uperhfanoi huperEphanos
a_ Nom Pl m
SHALL-BE
for
THE
humans
FOND-of-selves FOND-of-SILVER OSTENTATIOUS OVER-APPEARing selfish fond-of-money proud acaristoi anosioi acharistos anosios
For men shall be lovers of their own selves, covetous, boasters, proud, blasphemers, disobedient to parents, unthankful, unholy,
blasfhmoi blasphEmos
a_ Nom Pl m
goneusin apeiqeis goneus apeithEs

n_ Dat Pl m a_ Nom Pl m
HARM-AVERers to-parents calumniators
UN-PERSUADable UN-grateful stubborn ungrateful aspondoi aspondos

a_ Nom Pl m
UN-BENIGN malign akrateis akratEs

a_ Nom Pl m
3:3 astorgoi
astorgos
a_ Nom Pl m
diaboloi diabolos
a_ Nom Pl m
anhmeroi afilagaqoi anEmeros aphilagathos

UN-NATURAL-AFFECTION UN-LIBATIONers THRU-CASTers UN-controllable UN-MILD without-natural-affection implacable adversaries uncontrollable fierce
UN-FOND-of-GOOD averse-to-the-good mallon h mallon E

Adv Part
Without natural affection, trucebreakers, false accusers, incontinent, fierce, despisers of those that are good, Traitors, heady, highminded, lovers of pleasures more than lovers of God;
3:4 prodotai
prodotEs
n_ Nom Pl m
propeteis propetEs
a_ Nom Pl m
tetufwmenoi tuphoO
filhdonoi philEdonos
a_ Nom Pl m
filoqeoi philotheos
a_ Nom Pl m
BEFORE-GIVers BEFORE-FALLing HAVING-been-SMOULDERED FOND-of-GRATIFication RATHER traitors rash conceited fond-of-own-gratification
OR FOND-of-God than fond-of-God

5
3:5 econtes
echO
morfwsin eusebeias thn morphOsis eusebeia ho

n_ Acc Sg f n_ Gen Sg f t_ Acc Sg f
de de
Conj
dunamin auths dunamis autos

hrnhmenoi arneomai
vp Perf midD/pasD Nom Pl m
Having a form of godliness, but denying the power thereof: from such turn away.
HAVING
FORMing form
OF-devoutness
THE
YET ABILITY power
OF-SAME of-herit
HAVING-disownED denying
kai toutous apotrepou kai houtos apotrepO

Conj pd Acc Pl m vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
AND also
these
BE-FROM-REVERTING be-you-shunning ! oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
3:6 ek
ek
Prep
toutwn gar eisin houtos gar eimi

pd Gen Pl m Conj vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
endunontes endunO
eis eis
Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
oikias kai oikia kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj
OUT OF-these
for
ARE
THE
ones-IN-SLIPPING ones-slipping-in
INTO THE
HOMES
AND
For of this sort are they which creep into houses, and lead captive silly women laden with sins, led away with divers lusts,
aicmalwtizontes gunaikaria seswreumena aichmalOtizO gunaikarion sOreuO

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m n_ Acc Pl n vp Perf Pas Acc Pl n
amartiais agomena hamartia agO

n_ Dat Pl f vp Pres Pas Acc Pl n
n_ Dat Pl f
capturizING are-leading-into-captivity poikilais poikilos

a_ Dat Pl f
little-WOMEN
HAVING-been-HEAPED to-misses heaped to-sins
beING-LED
to-ON-FEELings to-lusts
VARIOUS
3:7 pantote manqanonta kai mhdepote

pantote
Adv
manthanO
kai
Conj
mEdepote
Adv
eis eis
Prep
epignwsin epignOsis
n_ Acc Sg f
alhqeias elqein alEtheia erchomai

Ever learning, and never able to come to the knowledge of the truth.
always
LEARNING-UP learning
AND
NO-YET-?-when INTO ON-KNOWledge OF-TRUTH yet-not-at-any-time realization
TO-BE-COMING
dunamena dunamai
beING-ABLE
3:8 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
tropon de tropos de
n_ Acc Sg m Conj
iannhs iannEs
n_ Nom Sg m
kai iambrhs kai iambrEs

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
antesthsan mwusei outws kai anthistEmi mOusEs houtOs kai

vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl n_ Dat Sg m Adv Conj
WHICH by-which outoi houtos

pd Nom Pl m
manner method
YET JANNES
AND
JAMBRES
with-STAND withstand
MOSES
thus
AND also noun nous

n_ Acc Sg m
Now as Jannes and Jambres withstood Moses, so do these also resist the truth: men of corrupt minds, reprobate concerning the faith.
anqistantai anthistEmi
vi Pres Mid 3 Pl
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
alhqeia anqrwpoi katefqarmenoi alEtheia anthrOpos kataphtheirO

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Pl m vp Perf Pas Nom Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
these
ARE-with-STANDING THE are-withstanding
TRUTH
humans
beING-DOWN-CORRUPTED THE of-being-depraved
MIND
AV
2Timothy 3
adokimoi peri adokimos peri

a_ Nom Pl m Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
BELIEF faith epi pleion epi polus

3:9 all ou
alla
Conj
ou
Part Neg
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
gar anoia gar anoia

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
but
NOT
THEY-SHALL-BE-progressING ON
MORE
THE
for
UN-MIND folly
OF-them
But they shall proceed no further: for their folly shall be manifest unto all [men], as theirs also was.
ekdhlos ekdElos
a_ Nom Sg m
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl m
ws kai h hOs kai ho

ekeinwn egeneto ekeinos ginomai

pd Gen Pl m vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
OUT-EVIDENT SHALL-BE obvious
to-ALL
AS
AND also
THE
OF-those
BECAME
3:10 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
parhkolouqhsas mou parakoloutheO egO

vi Aor Act 2 Sg pp 1 Gen Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
didaskalia th didaskalia ho
agwgh agOgE
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
YOU
YET BESIDE-follow fully-follow th ho

t_ Dat Sg f
OF-ME me
to-THE
TEACHing
THE
LEADing motive
THE
10 . But thou hast fully known my doctrine, manner of life, purpose, faith, longsuffering, charity, patience,
proqesei prothesis
n_ Dat Sg f
pistei th pistis ho
makroqumia th makrothumia ho
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
BEFORE-PLACing to-THE purpose the
BELIEF faith
to-THE the
to-THE the moi egO
LOVE
to-THE the
UNDER-REMAINing endurance en en
Prep
3:11 tois
ho
t_ Dat Pl m
diwgmois tois diOgmos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl n
paqhmasin oia pathEma hoios

n_ Dat Pl n pr Nom Pl n
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
antioceia antiocheia
n_ Dat Sg f
pp 1 Dat Sg
to-THE the en en
Prep
to-THE the
EMOTIONings sufferings
THE-WHICH to-ME such-as
BECAME occurred kai ek kai ek

Conj Prep
IN
ANTIOCH
ikoniw en ikonion en
n_ Dat Sg n Prep
lustrois oious lustra hoios

n_ Dat Pl n pk Acc Pl n
diwgmous uphnegka diOgmos hupopherO

pantwn me pas egO

a_ Gen Pl m pp 1 Acc Sg
11 Persecutions, afflictions, which came unto me at Antioch, at Iconium, at Lystra; what persecutions I endured: but out of [them] all the Lord delivered me.
IN
ICONIUM
IN
LYSTRA
THE-WHICH CHASE-ings such-as persecutions kurios kurios

n_ Nom Sg m
I-UNDER-CARRY AND I-undergo
OUT OF-ALL of-them-all
ME
errusato rhuomai
vi Aor midD/pasD 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
rescuES
THE
Master Lord oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
3:12 kai pantes de

kai
Conj
pas
a_ Nom Pl m
de
Conj
qelontes thelO
WH
zhn eusebws
WH
NA
eusebws zhn eusebOs zaO

Adv vn Pres Act
NA
en en
Prep
12 Yea, and all that will live godly in Christ Jesus shall suffer persecution.
AND
ALL
YET THE
devoutly
TO-BE-LIVING
IN

diwcqhsontai diOkO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
SHALL-BE-BEING-CHASED shall-be-being-persecuted anqrwpoi kai gohtes anthrOpos kai goEs

n_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m
3:13 ponhroi de
ponEros
a_ Nom Pl m
de
Conj
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
epi to epi ho
Prep t_ Acc Sg n
ceiron cheirOn
a_ Acc Sg n
13 But evil men and seducers shall wax worse and worse, deceiving, and being deceived.
wicked
YET humans
AND
swindlers
SHALL-BE-progressING ON shall-be-waxing
THE
WORSE
planwntes planaO
kai planwmenoi kai planaO

Conj vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
STRAYING deceiving
AND
beING-STRAYED being-deceived mene menO

vm Pres Act 2 Sg
3:14 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
en en
Prep
ois hos
pr Dat Pl n
emaqes manthanO
vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
kai epistwqhs kai pistoO

eidws eidO
YOU
YET BE-REMAINING IN be-you-remaining ! emaqes manthanO

vi 2Aor Act 2 Sg
WHICH which(p)
YOU-LEARNED AND
YOU-WERE-BELIEVED HAVING-PERCEIVED were-entrusted being-aware
14 But continue thou in the things which thou hast learned and hast been assured of, knowing of whom thou hast learned [them];
para para
Prep
tinwn tis
pi Gen Pl m
BESIDE ANY whom(p) ?
YOU-LEARNED you-learned-it brefous brephos

n_ Gen Sg n
NA
3:15 kai oti apo

kai
Conj
hoti
Conj
apo
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
iera hieron
a_ Acc Pl n
grammata oidas gramma eidO

n_ Acc Pl n vi Perf Act 2 Sg
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
AND
that
FROM BABE
THE
SACRED(p) WRITings sacred scriptures
YOU-HAVE-PERCEIVED THE you-are-acquainted-with the(p)
15 And that from a child thou hast known the holy scriptures, which are able to make thee wise unto salvation through faith which is in Christ Jesus.
AV
dunamena dunamai
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
sofisai sophizO
vn Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
swthrian dia sOtEria dia

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
pistews ths pistis ho

en en
Prep
beING-ABLE
YOU
TO-make-WISE INTO SAVing salvation
THE
IN

ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
3:16 pasa
pas
a_ Nom Sg f
grafh graphE
n_ Nom Sg f
qeopneustos kai wfelimos pros theopneustos kai Ophelimos pros

a_ Nom Sg f Conj a_ Nom Sg m Prep
didaskalian pros didaskalia pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
EVERY all
WRITing scripture
God-spirited inspired-by-God
AND
beneficial
TOWARD TEACHing
TOWARD
16 All scripture [is] given by inspiration of God, and [is] profitable for doctrine, for reproof, for correction, for instruction in righteousness:
elegmon pros elegmos pros

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
epanorqwsin pros epanorthOsis pros

n_ Acc Sg f Prep
paideian thn paideia ho

en en
Prep
n_ Dat Sg f
EXPOSing exposure
TOWARD ON-UP-ERECTing correction artios artios

a_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD discipline
THE
IN
JUSTice righteousness pan pas

a_ Acc Sg n
17 That the man of God may be perfect, throughly furnished unto all good works.
3:17 ina
hina
Conj
h eimi
vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpos pros anthrOpos pros

n_ Nom Sg m Prep
THAT EQUIPPED
MAY-BE
THE
OF-THE
God
human
TOWARD EVERY
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
agaqon exhrtismenos agathos exartizO

a_ Acc Sg n vp Perf Pas Nom Sg m
ACT
GOOD
HAVING-been-OUT-EQUIPPED fitted-out
AV
2Timothy 4
4:1 diamarturomai
diamarturomai

Adv t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
I-AM-THRU-witnessING IN-VIEW OF-THE I-am-conjuring-you in-the-sight-of the mellontos mellO

God
AND
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
THE
. I charge [thee] therefore before God, and the Lord Jesus Christ, who shall judge the quick and the dead at his appearing and his kingdom;
krinein krinO
vn Pres Act
zwntas zaO
kai nekrous kai thn kai nekros kai ho

Conj a_ Acc Pl m Conj t_ Acc Sg f
epifaneian epiphaneia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
One-beING-ABOUT one-being-about kai thn kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg f
TO-BE-JUDGING LIVING ones-living
AND
DEAD dead-ones
AND
THE
ON-APPEARance OF-Him advent

AND
THE
KINGdom
OF-Him
4:2 khruxon
kErussO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
episthqi ephistEmi
vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
eukairws eukairOs
Adv
akairws akairOs
Adv
elegxon elegchO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
PROCLAIM-YOU THE herald-you !
saying word
BE-ON-STANDING WELL-SEASONly UN-SEASONly EXPOSE be-you-standing-by-it ! opportunely inopportunely expose-you ! pash pas
a_ Dat Sg f
Preach the word; be instant in season, out of season; reprove, rebuke, exhort with all longsuffering and doctrine.
epitimhson parakaleson en epitimaO parakaleO en

vm Aor Act 2 Sg vm Aor Act 2 Sg Prep
makroqumia kai didach makrothumia kai didachE

rebuke rebuke-you !
BESIDE-CALL entreat-you ! gar kairos gar kairos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
IN
EVERY all
AND
TEACHing
4:3 estai
eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
ote ths hote ho

Adv t_ Gen Sg f
ugiainoushs didaskalias ouk hugiainO didaskalia ou

vp Pres Act Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f Part Neg
SHALL-BE
for
SEASON era
when
THE
beING-SOUND
TEACHing
NOT
anexontai anechomai
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
alla kata alla kata

Conj Prep
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
idias idios
a_ Acc Pl f
epiqumias eautois epithumia heautou

n_ Acc Pl f pf 3 Dat Pl m
For the time will come when they will not endure sound doctrine; but after their own lusts shall they heap to themselves teachers, having itching ears;
THEY-SHALL-BE-toleratING but
OWN
ON-FEELings desires thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
to-selves to-themselves
episwreusousin episOreuO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
didaskalous knhqomenoi didaskalos knEthO

n_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Pl m
akohn akoE
n_ Acc Sg f
THEY-SHALL-BE-ON-HEAPING TEACHers they-shall-be-heaping-up
beING-TICKLED THE being-tickled-of-them akohn akoE

n_ Acc Sg f
HEARing
4:4 kai apo

kai
Conj
apo
Prep
men men
Part
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f

apostreyousin apostrephO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
epi de epi de
Prep Conj
And they shall turn away [their] ears from the truth, and shall be turned unto fables.
AND
FROM INDEED THE
TRUTH
THE
HEARing THEY-SHALL-BE-FROM-TURNING ON hearing-of-them they-shall-be-turning-away
YET
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
muqous ektraphsontai muthos ektrepO

n_ Acc Pl m vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl
THE
myths
THEY-SHALL-BE-beING-OUT-REVERTED shall-be-being-turned-aside de de
Conj
4:5 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
nhfe nEphO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
kakopaqhson ergon kakopatheO ergon

vm Aor Act 2 Sg n_ Acc Sg n
poihson poieO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
YOU
YET BE-beING-sober IN be-you-being-sober ! thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
ALL all-things sou su
EVIL-EMOTION suffer-evil-you !
work
DO do-you !
But watch thou in all things, endure afflictions, do the work of an evangelist, make full proof of thy ministry.
euaggelistou euaggelistEs
n_ Gen Sg m
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
plhroforhson plErophoreO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
pp 2 Gen Sg
OF-WELL-MESSENGER THE of-evangelist
THRU-SERVice OF-YOU service spendomai spendO

vi Pres Pas 1 Sg
FULL-wear fully-discharge-you ! kairos kairos

n_ Nom Sg m
4:6 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
gar hdh gar EdE

Conj Adv
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
analusews analusis
n_ Gen Sg f
For I am now ready to be offered, and the time of my departure is at hand.
for
ALREADY AM-beING-LIBATIONED AND
THE
SEASON period
OF-THE
UP-LOOSing dissolution
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
efesthken ephistEmi
vi Perf Act 3 Sg
OF-ME
HAS-ON-STOOD is-imminent kalon kalos

a_ Acc Sg m
4:7 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
agwna agOn
n_ Acc Sg m
hgwnismai agOnizomai
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
dromon dromos
n_ Acc Sg m
teteleka teleO
vi Perf Act 1 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
I have fought a good fight, I have finished [my] course, I have kept the faith:
THE
IDEAL
CONTEST
I-HAVE-CONTENDED THE
RUNning career
I-HAVE-FINISHED THE
AV
2Timothy 4
pistin tethrhka pistis tEreO

n_ Acc Sg f vi Perf Act 1 Sg
BELIEF faith
I-HAVE-KEPT
4:8 loipon
loipon
a_ Acc Sg n
apokeitai apokeimai
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
dikaiosunhs stefanos on dikaiosunE stephanos hos

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Nom Sg m pr Acc Sg m
rest IS-beING-reservED furthermore apodwsei apodidOmi

vi Fut Act 3 Sg
to-ME
THE
OF-THE
WREATH
WHICH
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
hmera hEmera
n_ Dat Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
dikaios dikaios
a_ Nom Sg m
Henceforth there is laid up for me a crown of righteousness, which the Lord, the righteous judge, shall give me at that day: and not to me only, but unto all them also that love his appearing.
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-ME shall-be-paying kriths kritEs

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
Master Lord
IN
that
THE
DAY
THE
JUST
ou ou
Part Neg
monon de monon de
Adv Conj
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
alla kai pasin alla kai pas

Conj Conj a_ Dat Pl m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
hgaphkosin agapaO
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
JUDGer judge
NOT
ONLY
YET to-ME
but
AND also
to-ALL
THE
ones-HAVING-LOVED THE ones-having-loved
epifaneian epiphaneia
n_ Acc Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ON-APPEARance OF-Him advent
4:9 spoudason elqein

spoudazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
erchomai
vn 2Aor Act
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
tacews tacheOs
Adv
. Do thy diligence to come shortly unto me:
BE-DILIGENT endeavor-you !
WH
SWIFTly quickly
NA
4:10 dhmas
dEmas
n_ Nom Sg m
gar me gar egO

Conj pp 1 Acc Sg
egkateleipen
egkatelipen egkataleipO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
agaphsas agapaO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nun nun
Adv
DEMAS
for
ME
abandonED forsook eis eis

Prep
LOVing
THE
NOW current eis eis

Prep
10 For Demas hath forsaken me, having loved this present world, and is departed unto Thessalonica; Crescens to Galatia, Titus unto Dalmatia.
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eporeuqh kai poreuomai

qessalonikhn krhskhs thessalonikE krEskEs

eis eis
Prep
galatian titos galatia titos

eon
AND
WAS-GONE went
INTO THESSALONICA
CRESCENS INTO GALATIA
TITUS
INTO
dalmatian dalmatia
n_ Acc Sg f
DALMATIA
4:11 loukas
loukas
n_ Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
monos monos
a_ Nom Sg m
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
markon markos
n_ Acc Sg m
analabwn analambanO
age agO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
LUKE
IS
ONLY
WITH ME
MARK
UP-GETTING taking-up diakonian diakonia

n_ Acc Sg f
BE-LEADING be-you-leading-him !
11 Only Luke is with me. Take Mark, and bring him with thee: for he is profitable to me for the ministry.
meta seautou estin meta seautou eimi

Prep pf 3 Gen Sg m vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
gar moi gar egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
eucrhstos eis euchrEstos eis

a_ Nom Sg m Prep
WITH
YOURself yourself
IS he-is
for
to-ME
WELL-USEful useful
INTO THRU-SERVice service

12 And Tychicus have I sent to Ephesus.
4:12 tucikon de
tuchikos
n_ Acc Sg m
de
Conj
apesteila eis apostellO eis

efeson ephesos
n_ Acc Sg f
Tychicus
YET I-commission I-dispatch failonhn on phailonEs hos

n_ Acc Sg m
INTO EPHESUS
WH NA
4:13 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
apeleipon
apelipon apoleipO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
trwadi para trOas para

n_ Dat Sg f Prep
karpw karpos
n_ Dat Sg m
pr Acc Sg m
THE
BARK traveling-cloak
WHICH
I-FROM-LACKED I-left kai ta kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl n
IN
TROAS
BESIDE Carpus
13 The cloke that I left at Troas with Carpus, when thou comest, bring [with thee], and the books, [but] especially the parchments.
ercomenos erchomai
fere pherO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
biblia biblion
n_ Acc Pl n
malista tas malista ho

Adv t_ Acc Pl f
membranas membrana
n_ Acc Pl f
COMING in-coming
BE-YOU-CARRYING AND be-you-bringing ! calkeus chalkeus

n_ Nom Sg m
THE
SCROLLets RATHERest especially moi egO

pp 1 Dat Sg
THE
PARCHMENTS vellums
14 Alexander the coppersmith did me much evil: the Lord reward him according to his works:
4:14 alexandros o
alexandros
n_ Nom Sg m
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
polla polus
a_ Acc Pl n
kaka kakos
a_ Acc Pl n
enedeixato endeiknumi
vi Aor Mid 3 Sg
ALEXANDER
THE
COPPERsmith MANY much
to-ME
EVILS evil(p)
IN-SHOWS displays
AV
2Timothy 4
apodwsei apodidOmi
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
kata kata
Prep
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
erga ergon
n_ Acc Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
SHALL-BE-FROM-GIVING to-him shall-be-paying him
THE
Master Lord
according-to THE in-accord-with lian lian

Adv
ACTS
OF-him
4:15 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
kai su kai su
Conj pp 2 Nom Sg
fulassou phulassO
vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
gar antesth gar anthistEmi

tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
hmeterois hEmeteros
ps 1 Dat Pl
15 Of whom be thou ware also; for he hath greatly withstood our words.
WHOM
AND also
YOU
BE-GUARDING VERY for be-you-guarding-against ! very-much
he-withSTOOD to-THE he-has-withstood the
OUR-more of-ours(emph.)
logois logos
n_ Dat Pl m
sayings words
4:16 en
en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
prwth prOtos
a_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
apologia oudeis apologia oudeis

n_ Dat Sg f a_ Nom Sg f
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
paregeneto paraginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
alla alla
Conj
IN
THE
BEFORE-most OF-ME first

WH
FROM-saying defense
NA
NOT-YET-ONE to-ME no-one mh mE

Part Neg
BESIDE-BECAME but came-along
16 . At my first answer no man stood with me, but all [men] forsook me: [I pray God] that it may not be laid to their charge.
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
egkateleipon
egkatelipon egkataleipO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
autois logisqeih autos logizomai

pp Dat Pl m vo Aor pasD 3 Sg
ALL
ME
abandonED forsook de de
Conj
NO
to-them
MAY-it-BE-BEING-accountED may-it-be-being-reckoned ! ina hina

Conj
4:17 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
paresth paristEmi
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
kai enedunamwsen me kai endunamoO egO

di dia
Prep
THE
YET Master Lord to ho

t_ Nom Sg n
to-ME me
BESIDE-STOOD AND stood-beside
IN-ABLES he-invigorates kai akouswsin kai akouO

ME
THAT THRU through panta pas

a_ Nom Pl n
emou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
khrugma kErugma
n_ Nom Sg n
plhroforhqh plErophoreO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
17 Notwithstanding the Lord stood with me, and strengthened me; that by me the preaching might be fully known, and [that] all the Gentiles might hear: and I was delivered out of the mouth of the lion.
ME
THE
PROCLAMATION MAY-BE-BEING-FULL-worn AND heralding may-be-being-fully-discharged stomatos leontos stoma leOn

SHOULD-BE-HEARING ALL
THE
eqnh ethnos
n_ Nom Pl n
kai errusqhn ek kai rhuomai ek

NATIONS
AND
I-AM-rescuED OUT OF-MOUTH
OF-LION
4:18 rusetai
rhuomai
vi Fut midD 3 Sg
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
apo apo
Prep
pantos ergou pas ergon

ponhrou kai ponEros kai

a_ Gen Sg n Conj
SHALL-BE-rescuING ME
THE
Master Lord
FROM EVERY
ACT work
wicked
AND
swsei sOzO
vi Fut Act 3 Sg
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
epouranion w epouranios hos

a_ Acc Sg f pr Dat Sg m
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
18 And the Lord shall deliver me from every evil work, and will preserve [me] unto his heavenly kingdom: to whom [be] glory for ever and ever. Amen.
He-SHALL-BE-SAVING INTO THE shall-be-saving-me doxa doxa

n_ Nom Sg f
KINGdom
OF-Him
THE
to-WHOM
THE
eis eis
Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
aiwnas twn aiOn ho


n_ Gen Pl m Hebrew
esteem glory
INTO THE
eons
OF-THE
eons
AMEN
4:19 aspasai
aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Sg
priskan kai akulan priska kai akulas

n_ Acc Sg f Conj n_ Acc Sg m
kai ton kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
onhsiforou onEsiphoros
n_ Gen Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
19 Salute Prisca and Aquila, and the household of Onesiphorus.
greet greet-you !
PRISCA
AND
AQUILA
AND
THE
OF-Onesiphorus (PROFIT-CARRYING) HOME of-Onesiphorus household

WH
4:20 erastos emeinen

erastos
n_ Nom Sg m
menO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
korinqw trofimon de korinthos trophimos de

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg m Conj
apeleipon
NA
apelipon apoleipO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
20 Erastus abode at Corinth: but Trophimus have I left at Miletum sick.
ERASTUS
REMAINS
IN
CORINTH
Trophimus
YET
I-FROM-LACKED I-left
IN
milhtw asqenounta milEtos astheneO

n_ Dat Sg f vp Pres Act Acc Sg m
MILETUS
beING-UN-FIRM being-infirm ceimwnos elqein cheimOn erchomai

n_ Gen Sg m vn 2Aor Act
4:21 spoudason pro

spoudazO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
pro
Prep
aspazetai aspazomai
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
euboulos kai euboulos kai

n_ Nom Sg m Conj
BE-DILIGENT endeavor-you !
BEFORE WINTER
TO-BE-COMING IS-greetING
YOU
Eubulus
AND
21 Do thy diligence to come before winter. Eubulus greeteth thee, and Pudens, and Linus, and Claudia, and all the brethren.
AV
2Timothy 4 - Titus 1
poudhs poudEs
n_ Nom Sg m
kai linos kai linos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kai klaudia kai oi kai klaudia kai ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg f Conj t_ Nom Pl m
adelfoi adelphos
n_ Nom Pl m
WH
pantes
NA
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
PUDENS
AND
LINUS
AND
CLAUDIA
AND
THE
brothers brethren h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
ALL
4:22 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
kurios kurios
n_ Nom Sg m
meta tou meta ho

Prep t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos sou pneuma su

caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
meq meta
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
THE
Master Lord
WITH
THE
spirit
OF-YOU
THE
grace
WITH YOU(p) ye
22 The Lord Jesus Christ [be] with thy spirit. Grace [be] with you. Amen. <<[The second [epistle] unto Timotheus, ordained the first bishop of the church of the Ephesians, was written from Rome, when Paul was brought before Nero the second time.]>>
AV
Titus 1
Titus
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
doulos doulos
n_ Nom Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
apostolos de apostolos de
n_ Nom Sg m Conj
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou kata christos kata

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
PAUL
SLAVE
OF-God
YET OF-JESUS
ANOINTED Christ kat kata

Prep
according-to BELIEF in-accord-with faith eusebeian eusebeia

n_ Acc Sg f
eklektwn eklektos
a_ Gen Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai epignwsin kai epignOsis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
alhqeias ths alEtheia ho

. Paul, a servant of God, and an apostle of Jesus Christ, according to the faith of God's elect, and the acknowledging of the truth which is after godliness;
OF-chosen-ones OF-God of-chosen-ones
AND
ON-KNOWledge OF-TRUTH realization aiwniou hn aiOnios hos

a_ Gen Sg f pr Acc Sg f
THE
according-to devoutness
1:2 ep
epi
Prep
elpidi elpis
n_ Dat Sg f
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
ephggeilato o epaggellomai ho
vi Aor midD 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
ayeudhs qeos apseudEs theos

In hope of eternal life, which God, that cannot lie, promised before the world began;
ON
EXPECTATION OF-LIFE
eonian
WHICH
promisES
THE the-one
UN-FALSE not-lying
God
pro pro
Prep
cronwn aiwniwn chronos aiOnios

BEFORE TIMES
eonian
1:3 efanerwsen
phaneroO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
de de
Conj
kairois kairos
n_ Dat Pl m
idiois idios
a_ Dat Pl m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
logon logos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
khrugmati o kErugma hos

n_ Dat Sg n pr Acc Sg n
He-makES-APPEAR YET to-SEASONS OWN manifests to-eras episteuqhn egw pisteuO egO
vi Aor Pas 1 Sg pp 1 Nom Sg
THE
saying word
OF-Him
IN
PROCLAMation
WHICH with-which
kat kata
Prep
epitaghn tou epitagE ho


qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
But hath in due times manifested his word through preaching, which is committed unto me according to the commandment of God our Saviour;
WAS-BELIEVED was-entrusted
OF-THE
SAViour
OF-US
God
1:4 titw
titos
n_ Dat Sg m
gnhsiw teknw gnEsios teknon

kata kata
Prep
koinhn pistin caris koinos pistis charis

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f n_ Nom Sg f

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
to-TITUS
genuine
offspring child
according-to COMMON BELIEF faith tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
grace
AND
PEACE
FROM God
To Titus, [mine] own son after the common faith: Grace, mercy, [and] peace, from God the Father and the Lord Jesus Christ our Saviour.
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m


FATHER
AND
ANOINTED Christ
JESUS
WH
THE
NA
SAViour
OF-US
1:5 toutou carin

houtos
pd Gen Sg n
apeleipon
charin
Adv
apelipon apoleipO
vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
en en
Prep
krhth krEtE
n_ Dat Sg f
ina hina
Conj
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
OF-this
grace on-behalf epidiorqwsh epidiorthoO

vs Aor Mid 2 Sg
I-FROM-LACKED I-left
YOU
IN
CRETE
THAT THE
leiponta leipO
kai katasthshs kai kathistEmi

kata kata
Prep
polin polis
n_ Acc Sg f
. For this cause left I thee in Crete, that thou shouldest set in order the things that are wanting, and ordain elders in every city, as I had appointed thee:
LACKING lacking(p)
YOU-SHOULD-BE-ON-THRU-ERECTING AND you-should-be-amending soi su

pp 2 Dat Sg
SHOULD-BE-DOWN-STANDING according-to city should-be-constituting
presbuterous ws egw presbuteros hOs egO

a_ Acc Pl m Adv pp 1 Nom Sg
dietaxamhn diatassO
vi Aor Mid 1 Sg
SENIORS elders
AS
to-YOU
prescribe
1:6 ei
ei
Cond
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anegklhtos mias anegklEtos heis

a_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg f
gunaikos anhr gunE anEr

tekna teknon
n_ Acc Pl n
IF
ANY anyone
IS
UN-indictable unimpeachable mh mE
Part Neg
OF-ONE
WOMAN wife h E
Part
MAN husband
offsprings children
. If any be blameless, the husband of one wife, having faithful children not accused of riot or unruly.
ecwn echO
pista pistos
a_ Acc Pl n
en en
Prep
kathgoria aswtias katEgoria asOtia

anupotakta anupotaktos
a_ Acc Pl n
HAVING
BELIEVing NO
IN
accusation
OF-UN-SAVing OR of-profligacy
UN-UNDER-SET insubordinate ws qeou hOs theos

Adv n_ Gen Sg m
1:7 dei
deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
gar ton gar ho

Conj t_ Acc Sg m
episkopon anegklhton einai episkopos anegklEtos eimi

n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m vn Pres vxx
oikonomon oikonomos
n_ Acc Sg m
IS-BINDING must
for
THE
ON-NOTEr supervisor
TO-BE
AS
OF-God
For a bishop must be blameless, as the steward of God; not selfwilled, not soon angry, not given to wine, no striker, not given to filthy
AV
Titus 1
mh mE
Part Neg
auqadh authadEs
a_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
orgilon orgilos
a_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
paroinon paroinos
a_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
plhkthn mh plEktEs mE
lucre;
NO
self-GRATIFYing NO given-to-self-gratification
INDIGNANTer NO irritable
BESIDE-WINEr NO toper
BLOWer quarrelsome
NO
aiscrokerdh aischrokerdEs
a_ Acc Sg m
VILE-GAINer avaricious
1:8 alla filoxenon filagaqon swfrona dikaion osion

alla
Conj
philoxenos
a_ Acc Sg m
philagathos
a_ Acc Sg m
sOphrOn
a_ Acc Sg m
dikaios
a_ Acc Sg m
hosios
a_ Acc Sg m
egkrath egkratEs
a_ Acc Sg m
But a lover of hospitality, a lover of good men, sober, just, holy, temperate;
but
FOND-LODGer hospitable
FOND-of-GOOD sane fond-of-good tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
JUST
BENIGN
IN-HELD self-controlled logou logos

n_ Gen Sg m
1:9 antecomenon
antechomai
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
didachn pistou didachE pistos

n_ Acc Sg f a_ Gen Sg m
ina hina
Conj
upholdING
OF-THE the
according-to THE
TEACHing
OF-BELIEVing saying faithful word didaskalia th didaskalia ho

THAT
Holding fast the faithful word as he hath been taught, that he may be able by sound doctrine both to exhort and to convince the gainsayers.
dunatos h dunatos eimi

kai parakalein kai parakaleO

Conj vn Pres Act
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ugiainoush hugiainO
ABLE
he-MAY-BE
AND
TO-BE-BESIDE-CALLING IN to-be-entreating
THE
TEACHing
THE
beING-SOUND
kai tous kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl m
antilegontas elegcein antilegO elegchO

vp Pres Act Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
AND
THE
ones-contradictING ones-contradicting gar polloi gar polus

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
TO-BE-EXPOSING
NA
1:10 eisin
eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
kai kai
Conj
anupotaktoi mataiologoi kai frenapatai anupotaktos mataiologos kai phrenapatEs

a_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl m Conj n_ Nom Pl m
ARE
for
MANY
AND even
UN-UNDER-SET insubordinate
VAIN-sayers vain-praters
AND
impostors
10 For there are many unruly and vain talkers and deceivers, specially they of the circumcision:
malista oi malista ho
Adv t_ Nom Pl m
ek ek
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
peritomhs peritomE
n_ Gen Sg f
THE the-ones dei deO
OUT OF-THE
ABOUT-CUTTing Circumcision oitines olous hostis holos

pr Nom Pl m a_ Acc Pl m
1:11 ous
hos
pr Acc Pl m
epistomizein epistomizO
vn Pres Act
oikous oikos
n_ Acc Pl m
anatrepousin anatrepO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
WHOM
it-IS-BINDING
TO-BE-ON-MOUTHizING WHO-ANY to-be-gagging who-any mh mE

Part Neg
WHOLE
HOMES ARE-UP-REVERTING households are-subverting
11 Whose mouths must be stopped, who subvert whole houses, teaching things which they ought not, for filthy lucre's sake.
didaskontes a didaskO hos

vp Pres Act Nom Pl m pr Acc Pl n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
aiscrou kerdous carin aischros kerdos charin

a_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg n Adv
TEACHING
WHICH which(p) tis tis
NO
IS-BINDING
OF-VILE of-sordid idios idios

a_ Nom Sg m
GAIN
grace on-behalf profhths prophEtEs

n_ Nom Sg m
1:12 eipen
legO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ex ek
Prep
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
autwn autos
pp Gen Pl m
krhtes krEs
n_ Nom Pl m
aei aei
Adv
px Nom Sg m
said
ANY certain-one qhria thErion
OUT OF-them
OWN
OF-them
BEFORE-AVERer CRETANS prophet
ever
12 One of themselves, [even] a prophet of their own, said, The Cretians [are] alway liars, evil beasts, slow bellies.
yeustai kaka pseustEs kakos

n_ Nom Pl m a_ Nom Pl n
gasteres argai gastEr argos

n_ Nom Pl n
FALSifiers liars
EVIL
WILD-BEASTS BELLIES
UN-ACTive idle alhqhs alEthEs

a_ Nom Sg f
1:13 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
marturia auth marturia houtos

estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
di dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
aitian elegce aitia elegchO

THE
witness testimony
this
IS
TRUE

WH
cause
BE-EXPOSING be-you-exposing ! pistei pistis

n_ Dat Sg f
13 This witness is true. Wherefore rebuke them sharply, that they may be sound in the faith;
autous apotomws ina autos apotomOs hina

pp Acc Pl m Adv Conj
ugiainwsin hugiainO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
en
NA
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
them
FROM-CUTly severely
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-beING-SOUND
IN
THE
BELIEF faith
14 Not giving heed to Jewish fables, and commandments of men, that turn from the truth.
1:14 mh
mE
Part Neg
prosecontes ioudaikois muqois kai entolais anqrwpwn prosechO ioudaikos muthos kai entolE anthrOpos
vp Pres Act Nom Pl m a_ Dat Pl m n_ Dat Pl m Conj n_ Dat Pl f n_ Gen Pl m
NO
heedING
to-JUDAic Jewish
myths
AND
directions precepts
OF-humans
AV
Titus 1 - Titus 2
apostrefomenwn thn apostrephO ho

vp Pres Mid Gen Pl m t_ Acc Sg f
alhqeian alEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
FROM-TURNING ones-turning-from
THE
TRUTH
1:15 panta
pas
a_ Nom Pl n
kaqara katharos
a_ Nom Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
kaqarois tois katharos ho

a_ Dat Pl m t_ Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
memiammenois miainO
kai apistois kai apistos

Conj a_ Dat Pl m
ALL
clean
to-THE clean to-the-ones
to-THE YET HAVING-been-DEFILED AND to-the-ones autwn autos

pp Gen Pl m
UN-BELIEVing unbelieving
15 Unto the pure all things [are] pure: but unto them that are defiled and unbelieving [is] nothing pure; but even their mind and conscience is defiled.
ouden oudeis
a_ Nom Sg n
kaqaron alla memiantai katharos alla miainO

a_ Nom Sg n Conj vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kai o kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
nous nous
n_ Nom Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
NOT-YET-ONE clean nothing suneidhsis suneidEsis

n_ Nom Sg f
but
HAS-been-DEFILED OF-them
AND
THE
MIND
AND
THE
conscience
1:16 qeon
theos
n_ Acc Sg m
omologousin homologeO
vi Pres Act 3 Pl
eidenai eidO
vn Perf Act
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
de de
Conj
ergois arnountai ergon arneomai

n_ Dat Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Pl
bdeluktoi bdeluktos
a_ Nom Pl m
God
THEY-ARE-avowING TO-PERCEIVE to-THE to-be-acquainted-with kai apeiqeis kai apeithEs

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
YET ACTS
THEY-ARE-disownING ABOMINABLE they-are-denying-it agaqon adokimoi agathos adokimos

a_ Acc Sg n a_ Nom Pl m
16 They profess that they know God; but in works they deny [him], being abominable, and disobedient, and unto every good work reprobate.
ontes eimi
kai pros kai pros

Conj Prep
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
BEING
AND
UN-PERSUADable AND stubborn
TOWARD EVERY
ACT
GOOD
AV
Titus 2
2:1 su
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
lalei laleO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
prepei prepO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ugiainoush hugiainO
n_ Dat Sg f
. But speak thou the things which become sound doctrine:
YOU
YET BE-TALKING what be-you-speaking ! which(p)
IS-BEHOOVING
to-THE
beING-SOUND
TEACHing
2:2 presbutas nhfalious einai

presbutEs
n_ Acc Pl m
nEphalios
a_ Acc Pl m
eimi
vn Pres vxx
semnous swfronas ugiainontas th semnos sOphrOn hugiainO ho

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Pl m vp Pres Act Acc Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
pistei pistis
n_ Dat Sg f
That the aged men be sober, grave, temperate, sound in faith, in charity, in patience.
SENIORS aged-men th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
sober
TO-BE
GRAVE
sane
beING-SOUND
to-THE
BELIEF faith
agaph agapE
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
upomonh hupomonE
n_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
LOVE
to-THE
UNDER-REMAINing endurance katasthmati ieroprepeis katastEma hieroprepes

n_ Dat Sg n a_ Acc Pl f
2:3 presbutidas wsautws en

presbutis
n_ Acc Pl f
hOsautOs
Adv
en
Prep
mh mE
Part Neg
diabolous diabolos
a_ Acc Pl f
WH
mhde
SENIOResses aged-women
NA
AS-SAMEly similarly pollw polus

a_ Dat Sg m
IN
demeanor
SACRED-BEHOOVES NO as-becomes-the-sacred kalodidaskalous kalodidaskalos

a_ Acc Pl f
THRU-CASTers adversaries
The aged women likewise, that [they be] in behaviour as becometh holiness, not false accusers, not given to much wine, teachers of good things;
mh mE
Part Neg
oinw oinos
n_ Dat Sg m
dedoulwmenas douloO
vp Perf Pas Acc Pl f
NO
to-WINE
much
HAVING-been-enSLAVED IDEAL-TEACHers enslaved teachers-of-the-ideal tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
2:4 ina
hina
Conj
swfronizwsin sOphronizO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
neas neos
a_ Acc Pl f
filandrous philandros
n_ Acc Pl f
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
filoteknous philoteknos
a_ Acc Pl f
THAT THEY-MAY-BE-saneING THE they-may-be-bringing-to-sense
YOUNG(f) FOND-of-MEN TO-BE young-women fond-of-their-husbands
FOND-of-offsprings fond-of-their-children idiois idios

a_ Dat Pl m
That they may teach the young women to be sober, to love their husbands, to love their children, [To be] discreet, chaste, keepers at home, good, obedient to their own husbands, that the word of God be not blasphemed.
2:5 swfronas agnas

sOphrOn
a_ Acc Pl f
hagnos
a_ Acc Pl f
oikourgous agaqas upotassomenas tois oikourgos agathos hupotassO ho

a_ Acc Pl f a_ Acc Pl f vp Pres Pas Acc Pl f t_ Dat Pl m
andrasin anEr
n_ Dat Pl m
sane
PURE chaste o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
HOME-ACTers workers-at-home logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
GOOD
beING-UNDER-SET being-subject blasfhmhtai blasphEmeO

vs Pres Pas 3 Sg
to-THE
OWN
MEN husbands
ina hina
Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
THAT NO
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
MAY-BE-beING-HARM-AVERRED may-be-being-blasphemed swfronein sOphroneO

vn Pres Act
6
2:6 tous
ho
t_ Acc Pl m
newterous wsautws parakalei neos hOsautOs parakaleO

a_ Acc Pl m Cmp Adv vm Pres Act 2 Sg
Young men likewise exhort to be sober minded.
THE
YOUNGER younger-men panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
AS-SAMEly similarly
BE-BESIDE-CALLING TO-BE-beING-sane be-you-entreating ! tupon tupos

n_ Acc Sg m
2:7 peri
peri
Prep
seauton parecomenos seautou parechO

pf 3 Acc Sg m vp Pres Mid Nom Sg m
kalwn kalos
a_ Gen Pl n
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ABOUT ALL aboutas-to
YOURself
tenderING
type model
OF-IDEAL
ACTS
IN
THE
In all things shewing thyself a pattern of good works: in doctrine [shewing] uncorruptness, gravity, sincerity,
didaskalia afqorian didaskalia aphthoria

n_ Dat Sg f n_ Acc Sg f
semnothta semnotEs
n_ Acc Sg f
TEACHing
UN-CORRUPTion GRAVity with-uncorruptness ugih hugiEs

a_ Acc Sg m
2:8 logon
logos
n_ Acc Sg m
akatagnwston ina akatagnOstos hina

a_ Acc Sg m Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
enantias entraph enantios entrepO

a_ Gen Sg f vs 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
saying word mhden mEdeis

a_ Acc Sg n
SOUND
UN-censurable uncensurable legein legO

vn Pres Act
THAT THE the-one peri peri

Prep
OUT IN-INSTEAD of-contrary faulon phaulos

a_ Acc Sg n
MAY-BE-beING-abashed
Sound speech, that condemned; that he the contrary part ashamed, having no to say of you.
cannot be that is of may be evil thing
ecwn echO
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
NO-YET-ONE HAVING nothing
TO-BE-sayING ABOUT US concerning despotais upotassesqai despotEs hupotassO

n_ Dat Pl m vn Pres Mid
BAD
2:9 doulous idiois

doulos
n_ Acc Pl m
idios
a_ Dat Pl m
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
euarestous einai euarestos eimi

SLAVES
to-OWN
OWNers
TO-BE-beING-UNDER-SET IN to-be-being-subject
ALL all-things
WELL-PLEASing
TO-BE
[Exhort] servants to be obedient unto their own masters, [and] to please [them] well in all [things]; not answering again;
mh mE
Part Neg
antilegontas antilegO
NO
contradictING
AV
Titus 2 - Titus 3
2:10 mh
mE
Part Neg
nosfizomenous alla pasan nosphizO alla pas

vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m Conj a_ Acc Sg f
pistin pistis
n_ Acc Sg f
endeiknumenous agaqhn ina endeiknumi agathos hina

vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg f Conj
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
NO
EMBEZZLING
but
EVERY all
BELIEF IN-SHOWING faithfulness displaying qeou theos

n_ Gen Sg m
GOOD
THAT THE
10 Not purloining, but shewing all good fidelity; that they may adorn the doctrine of God our Saviour in all things.
didaskalian thn didaskalia ho

tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m

kosmwsin kosmeO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
en en
Prep
pasin pas
a_ Dat Pl n
TEACHing
THE
OF-THE
SAViour
OF-US
God
THEY-MAY-BE-SYSTEM-ING IN they-may-be-adorning swthrios pasin sOtErios pas

a_ Nom Sg m a_ Dat Pl m
ALL all-things
11 . For the grace of God that bringeth salvation hath appeared to all men,
2:11 epefanh
epiphainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
gar h gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
anqrwpois anthrOpos
n_ Dat Pl m
ON-APPEARed for made-its-advent
THE
grace
OF-THE
God
SAVing
to-ALL
humans
2:12 paideuousa
paideuO
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ina hina
Conj
arnhsamenoi arneomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
asebeian asebeia
n_ Acc Sg f
kai tas kai ho

Conj t_ Acc Pl f
kosmikas kosmikos
a_ Acc Pl f
disciplinING training
US
THAT disowning
THE
UN-REVERence AND irreverence
THE
SYSTEMic worldly tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
12 Teaching us that, denying ungodliness and worldly lusts, we should live soberly, righteously, and godly, in this present world;
epiqumias swfronws kai dikaiws kai eusebws zhswmen epithumia sOphronOs kai dikaiOs kai eusebOs zaO
n_ Acc Pl f Adv Conj Adv Conj Adv vs Aor Act 1 Pl
en en
Prep
nun nun
Adv
ON-FEELings desires aiwni aiOn

n_ Dat Sg m
sanely
AND
JUSTly
AND
devoutly
WE-SHOULD-BE-LIVING IN
THE
NOW current
eon
2:13 prosdecomenoi
prosdechomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
makarian elpida makarios elpis

kai epifaneian kai epiphaneia

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
TOWARD-RECEIVING anticipating tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
THE
HAPPY
EXPECTATION AND ON-APPEARance OF-THE even advent

WH
esteem glory
13 Looking for that blessed hope, and the glorious appearing of the great God and our Saviour Jesus Christ;
megalou qeou mega theos

kai swthros hmwn kai sOtEr hemeis

Conj n_ Gen Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
cristou ihsou
WH
NA
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-THE
NA
GREAT
God
AND
SAViour
OF-US
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
2:14 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
eauton heautou
pf 3 Acc Sg m
uper huper
Prep
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
ina hina
Conj
lutrwshtai lutroO
vs Aor Mid 3 Sg
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
apo apo
Prep
WHO
GIVES
Self himself kai kaqarish kai katharizO

OVER US for-the-sake-of eautw heautou

pf 3 Dat Sg m
THAT He-SHOULD-BE-LOOSenING US he-should-be-redeeming laon laos

n_ Acc Sg m
FROM
14 Who gave himself for us, that he might redeem us from all iniquity, and purify unto himself a peculiar people, zealous of good works.
pashs pas
a_ Gen Sg f
anomias anomia
n_ Gen Sg f
periousion zhlwthn kalwn periousios zElOtEs kalos

a_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Gen Pl n
EVERY all ergwn ergon

n_ Gen Pl n
UN-LAWness AND lawlessness
SHOULD-BE-cleansING to-Self to-himself
PEOPLE
ABOUT-BEING
BOILer zealous
OF-IDEAL
ACTS
2:15 tauta
houtos
pd Acc Pl n
lalei laleO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
kai parakalei kai parakaleO

kai elegce kai elegchO

meta pashs meta pas

Prep a_ Gen Sg f
epitaghs epitagE
n_ Gen Sg f
these BE-TALKING AND of-these-things be-you-speaking ! mhdeis mEdeis

a_ Nom Sg m
BE-BESIDE-CALLING AND be-you-entreating !
BE-EXPOSING WITH be-you-exposing !
EVERY
injunction
15 . These things speak, and exhort, and rebuke with all authority. Let no man despise thee.
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
perifroneitw periphroneO
vm Pres Act 3 Sg
NO-YET-ONE YOU no-one
LET-BE-slightING let-him-be-slighting !
AV
Titus 3
3:1 upomimnhske
hupomimnEskO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
autous arcais autos archE

pp Acc Pl m n_ Dat Pl f
exousiais upotassesqai exousia hupotassO

n_ Dat Pl f vn Pres Mid
peiqarcein peitharcheO
vn Pres Act
BE-UNDER-REMINDING them be-you-reminding ! pros pros

Prep
to-ORIGINals to-authorities to-sovereignties agaqon etoimous einai agathos hetoimos eimi

a_ Acc Sg n a_ Acc Pl m vn Pres vxx
TO-BE-beING-UNDER-SET TO-BE-yieldING to-be-being-subject
. Put them in mind to be subject to principalities and powers, to obey magistrates, to be ready to every good work,
pan pas
a_ Acc Sg n
ergon ergon
n_ Acc Sg n
TOWARD EVERY
ACT work
GOOD
READY
TO-BE
3:2 mhdena
mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg m
blasfhmein blasphEmeO
vn Pres Act
amacous amachos
a_ Acc Pl m
einai eimi
vn Pres vxx
epieikeis pasan epieikEs pas

a_ Acc Pl m a_ Acc Sg f
endeiknumenous endeiknumi
vp Pres Mid Acc Pl m
NO-YET-ONE TO-BE-HARM-AVERRING UN-FIGHTers TO-BE no-one to-be-calumniating pacific prauthta pros prautEs pros
n_ Acc Sg f Prep
lenient
EVERY all
IN-SHOWING displaying
To speak evil of no man, to be no brawlers, [but] gentle, shewing all meekness unto all men.
pantas anqrwpous pas anthrOpos

MEEKness
TOWARD ALL
humans
3:3 hmen
eimi
vi impf vxx 1 Pl
gar pote kai hmeis gar pote kai hEmeis

Conj Part Conj pp 1 Nom Pl
anohtoi apeiqeis anoEtos apeithEs

planwmenoi planaO
douleuontes douleuO
WE-WERE were
for
?-when once
AND also
WE
UN-MINDing foolish
UN-PERSUADable beING-STRAYED stubborn being-deceived kai fqonw kai phthonos

Conj n_ Dat Sg m
SLAVING
epiqumiais kai hdonais epithumia kai hEdonE

n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Dat Pl f
poikilais en poikilos en
a_ Dat Pl f Prep
kakia kakia
n_ Dat Sg f
diagontes diagO
stughtoi stugEtos
a_ Nom Pl m
For we ourselves also were sometimes foolish, disobedient, deceived, serving divers lusts and pleasures, living in malice and envy, hateful, [and] hating one another.
to-ON-FEELings to-desires misountes miseO
AND
GRATIFICations VARIOUS
IN
EVIL malice
AND
ENVY
THRU-LEADING leading-on
DETESTable
allhlous allElOn
pc Acc Pl m
HATING
one-another
3:4 ote de
hote
Adv
de
Conj
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
crhstoths kai h chrEstotEs kai ho

filanqrwpia philanthrOpia
n_ Nom Sg f
epefanh epiphainO
vi 2Aor Pas 3 Sg
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
But after that the kindness and love of God our Saviour toward man appeared,
when
YET THE
kindness
AND
THE
FONDness-of-humanity ON-APPEARed OF-THE fondness-for-humans made-its-advent

qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
SAViour
OF-US
God
3:5 ouk
ou
Part Neg
ex ek
Prep
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
en en
Prep
dikaiosunh a dikaiosunE hos

n_ Dat Sg f pr Acc Pl n
epoihsamen hmeis poieO hEmeis

vi Aor Act 1 Pl pp 1 Nom Pl
alla alla
Conj
NOT
OUT OF-ACTS of-works to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
THE the(p)
IN
JUSTice righteousness eswsen sOzO

vi Aor Act 3 Sg
WHICH
DO
WE
but
kata kata
Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
dia dia
Prep
loutrou paliggenesias kai loutron paliggenesia kai

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Sg f Conj
Not by works of righteousness which we have done, but according to his mercy he saved us, by the washing of regeneration, and renewing of the Holy Ghost;
according-to THE
OF-Him
MERCY
He-SAVES
US
THRU BATH through
OF-AGAIN-BECOMing AND of-renascence
anakainwsews pneumatos agiou anakainOsis pneuma hagios

n_ Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
UP-NEWing renewal
OF-spirit
HOLY
3:6 ou
hos
pr Gen Sg n
execeen ekcheO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ef epi
Prep
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
plousiws dia plousiOs dia

Adv Prep
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m

Which he shed on us abundantly through Jesus Christ our Saviour;
OF-WHICH He-OUT-POURS ON which he-pours-out swthros hmwn sOtEr hemeis

US
RICHly
THRU JESUS through
ANOINTED Christ
THE
SAViour
OF-US
3:7 ina
hina
Conj
dikaiwqentes th dikaioO ho
vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m t_ Dat Sg f
ekeinou cariti klhronomoi ekeinos charis klEronomos

pd Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg f n_ Nom Pl m
genhqwmen ginomai
vs Aor pasD 1 Pl
THAT BEING-JUSTIFIED
to-THE
OF-that of-that-one
grace
tenants WE-MAY-BE-BEING-BECOME enjoyers-of-the-allotment
That being justified by his grace, we should be made heirs according to the hope of eternal life.
AV
Titus 3
kat kata
Prep
elpida elpis
n_ Acc Sg f
zwhs zOE
n_ Gen Sg f
aiwniou aiOnios
a_ Gen Sg f
according-to EXPECTATION OF-LIFE
eonian
3:8 pistos
pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
kai peri kai peri

Conj Prep
toutwn boulomai houtos boulomai

pd Gen Pl n vi Pres midD/pasD 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
BELIEVing faithful
THE
saying
AND
ABOUT these concerning these-things kalwn kalos

a_ Gen Pl n
I-AM-intendING
YOU
diabebaiousqai diabebaioomai
vn Pres midD/pasD
ina hina
Conj
frontizwsin phrontizO
vs Pres Act 3 Pl
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
proistasqai proistEmi
vn Pres Mid
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
[This is] a faithful saying, and these things I will that thou affirm constantly, that they which have believed in God might be careful to maintain good works. These things are good and profitable unto men.
TO-BE-THRU-confirmING THAT MAY-BE-beING-DISPOSizED OF-IDEAL to-be-being-insistent may-be-being-concerned pepisteukotes pisteuO

ACTS
TO-BEFORE-STAND THE to-preside anqrwpois anthrOpos

n_ Dat Pl m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
tauta houtos
pd Nom Pl n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
kala kalos
a_ Nom Pl n
kai wfelima tois kai Ophelimos ho

Conj a_ Nom Pl n t_ Dat Pl m
ones-HAVING-BELIEVED to-God ones-having-believed God
these IS these-things
IDEAL
WH
AND
NA
beneficial
to-THE
humans
3:9 mwras de
mOros
a_ Acc Pl f
de
Conj
zhthseis kai genealogias kai zEtEsis kai genealogia kai

n_ Acc Pl f Conj n_ Acc Pl f Conj
erin
ereis eris
n_ Acc Pl f
kai macas kai machE

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
nomikas nomikos
a_ Acc Pl f
INSIPID stupid
YET SEEKings questionings eisin eimi
AND
generate-sayings genealogies
AND
STRIFES
AND
FIGHTings LAWic about-law
. But avoid foolish questions, and genealogies, and contentions, and strivings about the law; for they are unprofitable and vain.
periistaso periistEmi
vm Pres Mid 2 Sg
gar anwfeleis kai mataioi gar anOphelEs kai mataios

Conj a_ Nom Pl f Conj a_ Nom Pl m
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
be-YOU-ABOUT-STANDING THEY-ARE be-you-standing-aloof-from !
for
UN-beneficial without-benefit
AND
VAIN
3:10 airetikon anqrwpon meta mian

hairetikos
a_ Acc Sg m
anthrOpos
n_ Acc Sg m
meta
Prep
heis
n_ Acc Sg f
kai deuteran nouqesian paraitou kai deuteros nouthesia paraiteomai

Conj a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f vm Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
10 A man that is an heretick after the first and second admonition reject;
preferer sectarian
human
WITH after
ONE
AND
second
admonition
11 Knowing that he that is such is subverted, and sinneth, being condemned of himself.
3:11 eidws
eidO
oti exestraptai hoti ekstrephO

o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
toioutos kai amartanei toioutos kai hamartanO

pd Nom Sg m Conj vi Pres Act 3 Sg
HAVING-PERCEIVED that being-aware wn eimi

HAS-been-OUT-TURNED THE has-been-turned-out
such such-one
AND
IS-missING is-sinning
autokatakritos autokatakritos
a_ Nom Sg m
BEING
self-DOWN-JUDGed self-condemned pemyw pempO

vi Fut Act 1 Sg
3:12 otan
hotan
Conj
arteman pros artemas pros

n_ Acc Sg m Prep
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
h E
Part
tucikon spoudason tuchikos spoudazO

n_ Acc Sg m vm Aor Act 2 Sg
when-EVER I-SHALL-BE-SENDING ARTEMAS whenever elqein erchomai

vn 2Aor Act
TOWARD YOU
OR
Tychicus
BE-DILIGENT endeavor-you ! paraceimasai paracheimazO

vn Aor Act
12 When I shall send Artemas unto thee, or Tychicus, be diligent to come unto me to Nicopolis: for I have determined there to winter.
pros pros
Prep
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eis eis
Prep
nikopolin nikopolis
n_ Acc Sg f
ekei gar kekrika ekei gar krinO

Adv Conj vi Perf Act 1 Sg
INTO Nicopolis (CONQUER-city) there Nicopolis
for
I-HAVE-JUDGED TO-BESIDE-WINTER I-have-decided to-winter ina hina

Conj
3:13 zhnan
zEnas
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
nomikon kai apollwn spoudaiws propemyon nomikos kai apollOs spoudaiOs propempO
a_ Acc Sg m Conj n_ Acc Sg m Adv vm Aor Act 2 Sg
mhden mEdeis
a_ Acc Sg n
ZENAS
THE
LAWyer
AND
APOLLOS
DILIGENTly
BEFORE-SEND THAT NO-YET-ONE send-forward-you ! nothing
13 Bring Zenas the lawyer and Apollos on their journey diligently, that nothing be wanting unto them.
autois leiph autos leipO

pp Dat Pl m vs Pres Act 3 Sg
to-them
MAY-BE-LACKING
3:14 manqanetwsan
manthanO
vm Pres Act 3 Pl
de de
Conj
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
hmeteroi hEmeteros
ps 1 Nom Pl
kalwn kalos
a_ Gen Pl n
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
proistasqai proistEmi
vn Pres Mid
eis eis
Prep
LET-THEM-BE-UP-LEARNING YET AND let-them-be-learning ! also tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
THE
OUR-more OF-IDEAL our (emph.)-ones wsin eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Pl
ACTS
TO-BEFORE-STAND INTO to-preside
14 And let ours also learn to maintain good works for necessary uses, that they be not unfruitful.
anagkaias creias ina anagkaios chreia hina

a_ Acc Pl f n_ Acc Pl f Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
akarpoi akarpos
a_ Nom Pl m
THE
necessary
needs
THAT NO
THEY-MAY-BE UN-FRUITful unfruitful
AV
Titus 3 - Philemon 1
3:15 aspazontai
aspazomai
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
met emou meta egO

Prep pp 1 Gen Sg
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
aspasai aspazomai
vm Aor midD 2 Sg
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ARE-greetING
YOU
THE the-ones pistei h pistis ho

n_ Dat Sg f
WITH ME
ALL
greet-YOU greet-you !
THE
filountas phileO
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
en en
Prep
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f

t_ Nom Sg f
15 All that are with me salute thee. Greet them that love us in the faith. Grace [be] with you all. Amen. <<[It was written to Titus, ordained the first bishop of the church of the Cretians, from Nicopolis of Macedonia.]>>
ones-beING-FOND US ones-being-fond-of
IN
BELIEF faith
THE
grace
WITH
ALL
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Philemon 1
Philemon
1:1 paulos
paulos
n_ Nom Sg m
desmios cristou desmios christos

ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
kai timoqeos o kai timotheos ho

adelfos adelphos
n_ Nom Sg m
PAUL
BOUND-one prisoner tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
AND
Timothy
THE
brother
. Paul, a prisoner of Jesus Christ, and Timothy [our] brother, unto Philemon our dearly beloved, and fellowlabourer,
filhmoni philEmOn
n_ Dat Sg m
agaphtw kai sunergw agapEtos kai sunergos

a_ Dat Sg m Conj a_ Dat Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl
to-Philemon (FOND) THE to-Philemon
beLOVED
AND
TOGETHER-ACTer OF-US fellow-worker sustratiwth hmwn sustratiOtEs hemeis

n_ Dat Sg m pp 1 Gen Pl
1:2 kai apfia

kai
Conj
apphia
n_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
adelfh kai arcippw tw adelphE kai archippos ho

n_ Dat Sg f Conj n_ Dat Sg m t_ Dat Sg m
kai kai
Conj
AND
to-APPHIA THE
sister
AND
to-Archippus
THE
TOGETHER-WARrior OF-US fellow-soldier
AND
And to [our] beloved Apphia, and Archippus our fellowsoldier, and to the church in thy house:
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kat kata
Prep
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ekklhsia ekklEsia
n_ Dat Sg f
to-THE
according-to HOME house umin humeis

pp 2 Dat Pl
OF-YOU
OUT-CALLED ecclesia apo apo

Prep
1:3 caris
charis
n_ Nom Sg f

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
patros patEr
n_ Gen Sg m
hmwn hemeis
pp 1 Gen Pl

Conj n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
grace
to-YOU(p) to-ye
Grace to you, and peace, from God our Father and the Lord Jesus Christ.
AND
PEACE
FROM God
FATHER
OF-US
AND
Master Lord
JESUS
cristou christos
n_ Gen Sg m
ANOINTED Christ
1:4 eucaristw tw
eucharisteO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
ho
t_ Dat Sg m
qew theos
n_ Dat Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
pantote mneian pantote mneia

Adv n_ Acc Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
poioumenos poieO
epi epi
Prep
I thank my God, making mention of thee always in my prayers,
I-AM-thankING
to-THE the
God
OF-ME
always
REMINDer OF-YOU mention
makING
ON
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
proseucwn mou proseuchE egO

THE
prayers
OF-ME
WH
1:5 akouwn
akouO
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn kai thn agapE kai ho

pistin hn pistis hos

eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
eis
HEARING
NA
OF-YOU
THE
LOVE
AND
THE
BELIEF faith
WHICH
YOU-ARE-HAVING
Hearing of thy love and faith, which thou hast toward the Lord Jesus, and toward all saints;
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
kurion kurios
n_ Acc Sg m
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
kai eis kai eis

Conj Prep
pantas tous pas ho

agious hagios
a_ Acc Pl m
TOWARD
THE
Master Lord
JESUS
AND
INTO ALL
THE
HOLY-ones saints energhs genhtai energEs ginomai

a_ Nom Sg f vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
1:6 opws
hopOs
Adv
h ho
t_ Nom Sg f
koinwnia ths koinOnia ho

pistews sou pistis su

en en
Prep
WHICH-how THE so-that epignwsei epignOsis

n_ Dat Sg f
OF-THE
WH
BELIEF faith
NA
OF-YOU
IN-ACTing operative eis eis

Prep
MAY-BE-BECOMING IN
That the communication of thy faith may become effectual by the acknowledging of every good thing which is in you in Christ Jesus.
pantos agaqou pas agathos

a_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
tou
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg n
en en
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
criston christos
n_ Acc Sg m
ON-KNOWledge OF-EVERY realization
GOOD good-thing
THE
IN
US
INTO ANOINTED Christ agaph agapE

n_ Dat Sg f
1:7 caran
chara
n_ Acc Sg f
gar pollhn escon gar polus echO

Conj a_ Acc Sg f vi 2Aor Act 1 Sg
kai paraklhsin epi th kai paraklEsis epi ho

Conj n_ Acc Sg f Prep t_ Dat Sg f
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
oti hoti
Conj
JOY
for
much
I-have-HAD
AND
ON
THE
LOVE
OF-YOU
that
For we have great joy and consolation in thy love, because the bowels of the saints are refreshed by thee, brother.
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
splagcna twn splagchnon ho

n_ Nom Pl n t_ Gen Pl m
agiwn hagios
a_ Gen Pl m
anapepautai anapauO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
dia dia
Prep
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
adelfe adelphos
n_ Voc Sg m
THE
compassions
OF-THE
HOLY-ones HAS-been-UP-CEASED THRU YOU saints has-been-soothed through
brother !
AV
Philemon 1
1:8 dio
dio
Conj
pollhn en polus en
a_ Acc Sg f Prep
cristw parrhsian ecwn christos parrhEsia echO

n_ Dat Sg m n_ Acc Sg f vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
epitassein soi epitassO su

vn Pres Act pp 2 Dat Sg
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THRU-WHICH much wherefore anhkon anEkO

IN
ANOINTED Christ
boldness
HAVING
TO-BE-enjoinING
YOU
THE
. Wherefore, though I might be much bold in Christ to enjoin thee that which is convenient,
proper being-proper
1:9 dia
dia
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
agaphn mallon parakalw agapE mallon parakaleO

toioutos wn toioutos eimi

pd Nom Sg m vp Pres vxx Nom Sg m
ws hOs
Adv
THRU THE because-of paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
LOVE
RATHER
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING such I-am-entreating such-one ihsou iEsous

n_ Gen Sg m
BEING
AS
Yet for love's sake I rather beseech [thee], being such an one as Paul the aged, and now also a prisoner of Jesus Christ.
presbuths nuni de presbutEs nuni de

n_ Nom Sg m Adv Conj
kai desmios cristou kai desmios christos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Sg m
PAUL
SENIOR aged-man
NOW
YET AND also peri peri

Prep
BOUND-one prisoner tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
OF-ANOINTED JESUS of-Christ emou egO

pp 1 Gen Sg
1:10 parakalw
parakaleO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
teknou on teknon hos

egennhsa en gennaO en
10 I beseech thee for my son Onesimus, whom I have begotten in my bonds:
I-AM-BESIDE-CALLING YOU I-am-entreating tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OF-ME
offspring child
WHOM
I-generate I-beget
IN
desmois onhsimon desmos onEsimos

n_ Dat Pl m n_ Acc Sg m
THE
BONDS
Onesimus (PROFITable) Onesimus acrhston nuni de achrEstos nuni de

a_ Acc Sg m Adv Conj
NA
1:11 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
pote soi pote su

Part pp 2 Dat Sg
kai kai
Conj
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
kai emoi kai egO

Conj pp 1 Dat Sg
11 Which in time past was to thee unprofitable, but now profitable to thee and to me:
THE
?-when once
to-YOU
UN-USE useless
NOW
YET
AND
to-YOU
AND
to-ME
eucrhston euchrEstos
a_ Acc Sg m
WELL-USE useful
1:12 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
anepemya soi anapempO su

auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
tout houtos
pd Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
ema emos
ps 1 Nom Pl
splagcna splagchnon
n_ Nom Pl n
12 Whom I have sent again: thou therefore receive him, that is, mine own bowels:
WHOM
I-UP-SEND I-send-back egw egO

pp 1 Nom Sg
to-YOU
him
this
IS
THE
MY
compassions
1:13 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
eboulomhn boulomai
pros pros
Prep
emauton katecein emautou katechO

pf 1 Acc Sg m vn Pres Act
ina hina
Conj
uper huper
Prep
WHOM
intendED
TOWARD MYself
TO-BE-DOWN-HAVING THAT OVER to-be-retaining for-the-sake-of desmois tou desmos ho

n_ Dat Pl m t_ Gen Sg n
13 Whom I would have retained with me, that in thy stead he might have ministered unto me in the bonds of the gospel:
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
diakonh diakoneO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
n_ Gen Sg n
YOU
to-ME me de de
Conj
he-MAY-BE-THRU-SERVING IN he-may-be-serving ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
BONDS
OF-THE
WELL-MESSAGE
1:14 cwris
chOris
Adv
shs sos
ps 2 Gen Sg
gnwmhs ouden gnOmE oudeis

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Acc Sg n
hqelhsa thelO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
poihsai ina poieO hina

vn Aor Act Conj
mh mE
Part Neg
ws hOs
Adv
apart-from YET THE
YOUR
opinion
NOT-YET-ONE I-WILL nothing h eimi

vs Pres vxx 3 Sg
TO-DO
THAT NO
AS
14 But without thy mind would I do nothing; that thy benefit should not be as it were of necessity, but willingly.
kata kata
Prep
anagkhn to anagkE ho
n_ Acc Sg f t_ Nom Sg n
agaqon agathos
a_ Nom Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
alla kata alla kata

Conj Prep
ekousion hekousion
a_ Acc Sg n
according-to necessity compulsion
THE
GOOD
OF-YOU
MAY-BE
but
according-to voluntary
1:15 taca gar dia

tacha
Adv
gar
Conj
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ecwrisqh chOrizO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
wran hOra
n_ Acc Sg f
ina hina
Conj
aiwnion auton aiOnios autos

a_ Acc Sg m pp Acc Sg m
15 For perhaps he therefore departed for a season, that thou shouldest receive him for ever;
SWIFT for perhaps apechs apechO

vs Pres Act 2 Sg
he-IS-SPACEizED TOWARD HOUR he-is-separated
THAT eonian
him
YOU-MAY-BE-FROM-HAVING you-may-be-collecting-as-repayment
AV
Philemon 1
1:16 ouketi
ouketi
Adv
ws doulon all uper doulon adelfon agaphton malista emoi hOs doulos alla huper doulos adelphos agapEtos malista egO
Adv n_ Acc Sg m Conj Prep n_ Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m a_ Acc Sg m Adv pp 1 Dat Sg
NOT-STILL AS not-longer posw posos

pq Dat Sg n
SLAVE
but
OVER above kai en kai en

Conj Prep
SLAVE
brother
beLOVED
to-ME
de de
Conj
mallon soi mallon su

Adv pp 2 Dat Sg
sarki sarx
n_ Dat Sg f
kai en kai en
Conj Prep
kuriw kurios
n_ Dat Sg m
16 Not now as a servant, but above a servant, a brother beloved, specially to me, but how much more unto thee, both in the flesh, and in the Lord?
how-much
YET RATHER
to-YOU
AND
IN
FLESH
AND
IN
Master Lord auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
1:17 ei
ei
Cond
oun oun
Conj
me egO
pp 1 Acc Sg
eceis echO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
koinwnon proslabou koinOnos proslambanO

a_ Acc Sg m vm 2Aor Mid 2 Sg
ws eme hOs egO

Adv pp 1 Acc Sg
17 If thou count me therefore a partner, receive him as myself.
IF
THEN ME
YOU-ARE-HAVING communioner mate hdikhsen se adikeO su

BE-TOWARD-GETTING him be-you-taking-to-yourself ! touto houtos

pd Acc Sg n
AS
ME
1:18 ei
ei
Cond
de de
Conj
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
h E
Part
ofeilei opheilO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
emoi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
elloga ellogeO
vm Pres Act 2 Sg
18 If he hath wronged thee, or oweth [thee] ought, put that on mine account;
IF
YET ANY in-anything paulos paulos

n_ Nom Sg m
he-injurES
YOU
OR
IS-OWING
this
to-ME
BE-YOU-imputING be-you putting-on-account ! ina hina

Conj
19 I Paul have written [it] with mine own hand, I will repay [it]: albeit I do not say to thee how thou owest unto me even thine own self besides.
1:19 egw
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
egraya graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
emh emos
ps 1 Dat Sg
ceiri cheir
n_ Dat Sg f
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
apotisw apotinO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
PAUL
WRITE
to-THE
MY
HAND
SHALL-BE-FROM-VALUING THAT shall-be-refunding-it
mh mE
Part Neg
legw legO
vs Pres Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
oti kai seauton moi hoti kai seautou egO

Conj Conj pf 3 Acc Sg m pp 1 Dat Sg
prosofeileis prosopheilO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
NO
I-MAY-BE-sayING to-YOU
that
AND YOURself even onaimhn onEmi

vo 2Aor midD 1 Sg
to-ME me en en
Prep
ARE-TOWARD-OWING you-are-owing kuriw kurios

n_ Dat Sg m
1:20 nai adelfe egw

nai
Part
adelphos
n_ Voc Sg m
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
anapauson anapauO
vm Aor Act 2 Sg
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
20 Yea, brother, let me have joy of thee in the Lord: refresh my bowels in the Lord.
YEA
brother !
OF-YOU
MAY-BE-PROFITING IN
Master Lord
UP-CEASE-YOU OF-ME soothe-you !
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
splagcna en splagchnon en
n_ Acc Pl n Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
THE
compassions
IN
ANOINTED Christ upakoh sou hupakoE su

1:21 pepoiqws
peithO
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
egraya graphO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
soi su
pp 2 Dat Sg
eidws eidO
oti kai hoti kai

Conj Conj
HAVING-confidence
to-THE
obedience
OF-YOU
I-WRITE
to-YOU
AND even
21 Having confidence in thy obedience I wrote unto thee, knowing that thou wilt also do more than I say.
uper a huper hos

Prep pr Acc Pl n
legw legO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
poihseis poieO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
OVER above
WHICH which(p)
I-AM-sayING
YOU-SHALL-BE-DOING
1:22 ama
hama
Adv
de de
Conj
kai etoimaze kai hetoimazO

moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
xenian xenia
n_ Acc Sg f
elpizw elpizO
vi Pres Act 1 Sg
gar oti dia gar hoti dia

Conj Conj Prep
SIMULTANEOUS YET AND at-the-same-time also twn ho

t_ Gen Pl f
BE-READYizING to-ME be-you-making-ready ! carisqhsomai charizomai

vi Fut Pas 1 Sg
LODGing
I-AM-EXPECTING for
that
THRU through
22 But withal prepare me also a lodging: for I trust that through your prayers I shall be given unto you.
proseucwn umwn proseuchE humeis

umin humeis
pp 2 Dat Pl
THE
prayers
OF-YOU(p) I-SHALL-BE-BEING-gracED to-YOU(p) of-ye I-shall-be-being-graciously-granted to-ye se su

pp 2 Acc Sg
1:23 aspazetai
aspazomai
epafras o epaphras ho
sunaicmalwtos mou sunaichmalOtos egO

a_ Nom Sg m pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
cristw christos
n_ Dat Sg m
23 There salute thee Epaphras, my fellowprisoner in Christ Jesus;
IS-greetING
YOU
EPAPHRAS
THE
TOGETHER-captive fellow-captive
OF-ME
IN
ANOINTED Christ
ihsou iEsous
n_ Dat Sg m
JESUS
1:24 markos
markos
n_ Nom Sg m
aristarcos dhmas aristarchos dEmas

loukas loukas
n_ Nom Sg m
oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
sunergoi sunergos
a_ Nom Pl m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
24 Marcus, Aristarchus, Demas, Lucas, my fellowlabourers.
Mark
Aristarchus
DEMAS
LUKE
THE
TOGETHER-ACTers OF-ME fellow-workers
AV
Philemon 1 - Hebrews 1
1:25 h
ho
t_ Nom Sg f
caris charis
n_ Nom Sg f
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
ihsou iEsous
n_ Gen Sg m
cristou meta tou christos meta ho

n_ Gen Sg m Prep t_ Gen Sg n
pneumatos pneuma
n_ Gen Sg n
THE
grace
OF-THE
Master Lord
JESUS
ANOINTED Christ
WITH
THE
spirit
25 The grace of our Lord Jesus Christ [be] with your spirit. Amen. <<[Written from Rome to Philemon, by Onesimus a servant.]>>
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
OF-YOU(p) of-ye
AV
Hebrews 1
Hebrews
1:1 polumerws kai polutropws palai o
polumerOs
Adv
kai
Conj
polutropOs
Adv
palai
Adv
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
lalhsas laleO
vp Aor Act Nom Sg m
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
MANY-PARTly by-many-portions patrasin en patEr en

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
AND
MANY-mannerly by-many-modes profhtais prophEtEs

n_ Dat Pl m
of-OLD
THE
God
TALKing speaking
to-THE
. God, who at sundry times and in divers manners spake in time past unto the fathers by the prophets,
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
ep epi
Prep
escatou twn eschatos ho

a_ Gen Sg m t_ Gen Pl f
hmerwn toutwn elalhsen hEmera houtos laleO

n_ Gen Pl f pd Gen Pl f vi Aor Act 3 Sg
FATHERS
IN
THE
BEFORE-AVERers ON prophets
LAST-one last-one
OF-THE
DAYS
these
TALKS speaks
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
en en
Prep
uiw huios
n_ Dat Sg m
to-US
IN
SON
1:2 on
hos
pr Acc Sg m
eqhken tithEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
klhronomon klEronomos
n_ Acc Sg m
pantwn di pas dia

a_ Gen Pl n Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
kai epoihsen tous kai poieO ho

Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Acc Pl m
WHOM
He-PLACES he-appoints
tenant OF-ALL enjoyer-of-the-allotment
THRU WHOM through
AND also
He-makES
THE
Hath in these last days spoken unto us by [his] Son, whom he hath appointed heir of all things, by whom also he made the worlds;
aiwnas aiOn
n_ Acc Pl m
eons
1:3 os
hos
pr Nom Sg m
wn eimi
apaugasma apaugasma
n_ Nom Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
kai carakthr ths kai charaktEr ho

Conj n_ Nom Sg m t_ Gen Sg f
WHO
BEING
FROM-RADIANCE OF-THE effulgence ferwn pherO

esteem glory
AND
CARVing emblem tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
OF-THE
upostasews autou hupostasis autos

te te
Part
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
rhmati rhEma
n_ Dat Sg n
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
Who being the brightness of [his] glory, and the express image of his person, and upholding all things by the word of his power, when he had by himself purged our sins, sat down on the right hand of the Majesty on high;
UNDER-STANDing assumption
OF-Him
CARRYING carrying-on kaqarismon twn katharismos ho

n_ Acc Sg m
BESIDES THE
ALL
to-THE
declaration OF-THE

amartiwn poihsamenos ekaqisen en hamartia poieO kathizO en

n_ Gen Pl f vp Aor Mid Nom Sg m vi Aor Act 3 Sg Prep
dexia dexios
a_ Dat Sg f
t_ Gen Pl f
ABILITY power ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
OF-Him
cleansing
OF-THE
misses sins
making
is-seated
IN
RIGHT right-hand
megalwsunhs megalOsunE
n_ Gen Sg f
en en
Prep
uyhlois hupsElos
a_ Dat Pl n
OF-THE
GREAT-TOGETHERness IN majesty
HIGHS heights twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
1:4 tosoutw kreittwn genomenos

tosoutos
pd Dat Sg m
kreittOn
a_ Nom Sg m
ginomai
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
osw hosos
pk Dat Sg n
diaforwteron diaphoros
a_ Acc Sg n Cmp
to-so-much so-much par para

Prep
better
BECOMING
OF-THE
MESSENGERS to-as-much-as more-excelling inasmuch more-excellent
. Being made so much better than the angels, as he hath by inheritance obtained a more excellent name than they.
autous keklhronomhken onoma autos klEronomeO onoma

pp Acc Pl m vi Perf Act 3 Sg n_ Acc Sg n
BESIDE them
He-HAS-tenantED he-enjoys-the-allotment gar eipen gar legO

NAME of-name twn ho

t_ Gen Pl m
1:5 tini
tis
pi Dat Sg m
pote pote
Part
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
to-ANY to-whom ? su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
for
He-said
?-when OF-THE at-any-time se su
MESSENGERS SON
OF-ME
ARE
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
shmeron gegennhka sEmeron gennaO

kai palin egw kai palin egO

Conj Adv pp 1 Nom Sg
esomai eimi
vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
For unto which of the angels said he at any time, Thou art my Son, this day have I begotten thee? And again, I will be to him a Father, and he shall be to me a Son?
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU
toDAY
HAVE-generatED YOU have-begotten estai eimi

vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
AND
AGAIN
SHALL-BE
to-Him
eis eis
Prep
patera patEr
n_ Acc Sg m
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
eis eis
Prep
uion huios
n_ Acc Sg m
INTO FATHER
AND
He
SHALL-BE
to-ME
INTO SON
AV
Hebrews 1
1:6 otan
hotan
Conj
de de
Conj
palin eisagagh palin eisagO

ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
a_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
when-EVER YET AGAIN whenever oikoumenhn legei oikoumenE legO

He-MAY-BE-INTO-LEADING THE he-may-be-leading-into
BEFORE-most-BROUGHT-FORTH INTO THE firstborn pantes pas

a_ Nom Pl m
And again, when he bringeth in the firstbegotten into the world, he saith, And let all the angels of God worship him.
kai proskunhsatwsan autw kai proskuneO autos

Conj vm Aor Act 3 Pl pp Dat Sg m
aggeloi aggelos
n_ Nom Pl m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
He-IS-sayING
AND
LET-worship let-them-worship ! aggelous aggelos

n_ Acc Pl m
to-Him him legei legO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
ALL
MESSENGERS OF-God
1:7 kai pros

kai
Conj
pros
Prep
men men
Part
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
poiwn poieO
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
AND
TOWARD INDEED THE
MESSENGERS He-IS-sayING
THE
One-makING one-making puros pur

n_ Gen Sg n
THE
And of the angels he saith, Who maketh his angels spirits, and his ministers a flame of fire.
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
pneumata kai tous pneuma kai ho

leitourgous autou leitourgos autos

floga phlox
n_ Acc Sg f
MESSENGERS OF-Him
spirits blasts uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
AND
THE
officials ministers qronos thronos

n_ Nom Sg m
OF-Him
OF-FIRE
BLAZE flame eis eis

Prep
8
1:8 pros
pros
Prep
de de
Conj
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
TOWARD YET THE

WH
SON
WH
THE
NA
THRONE
NA
OF-YOU
THE
God
INTO
But unto the Son [he saith], Thy throne, O God, [is] for ever and ever: a sceptre of righteousness [is] the sceptre of thy kingdom.
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
aiwna aiOn
n_ Acc Sg m
tou aiwnos
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
aiwnos aiOn
n_ Gen Sg m
kai h kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg f
rabdos rhabdos
n_ Nom Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
THE
eon
OF-THE
WH
eon
NA
AND
THE
ROD scepter
OF-THE
euquthtos rabdos euthutEs rhabdos

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
basileias basileia
n_ Gen Sg f
autou
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
straightness rectitude
ROD scepter
OF-THE
KINGdom
OF-YOU
1:9 hgaphsas dikaiosunhn kai emishsas anomian

agapaO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
dikaiosunE
n_ Acc Sg f
kai
Conj
miseO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
anomia
n_ Acc Sg f
dia dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
ecrisen chriO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
YOU-LOVE
t_ Nom Sg m
AND
YOU-HATE hate sou su
UN-LAWness THRU this lawlessness because-of elaion elaion

n_ Acc Sg n
ANOINTS
YOU
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
agalliasews para agalliasis para

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
Thou hast loved righteousness, and hated iniquity; therefore God, [even] thy God, hath anointed thee with the oil of gladness above thy fellows.
pp 2 Gen Sg
THE
God
THE
God
OF-YOU
OLIVE-oil with-oil
OF-exulting of-exultation
BESIDE THE beyond
metocous sou metochos su

WITH-HAVers partners
OF-YOU
1:10 kai su
kai
Conj
su
pp 2 Nom Sg
kat kata
Prep
arcas archE
n_ Acc Pl f
kurie kurios
n_ Voc Sg m
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
ghn gE
n_ Acc Sg f
eqemeliwsas kai erga themelioO kai ergon

vi Aor Act 2 Sg Conj n_ Nom Pl n
AND
YOU
according-to ORIGINals Master ! beginnings Lord ! eisin eimi

vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
THE
LAND earth
found
AND
works
10 And, Thou, Lord, in the beginning hast laid the foundation of the earth; and the heavens are the works of thine hands:
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl f
ceirwn sou cheir su

oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
ouranoi ouranos
n_ Nom Pl m
OF-THE
HANDS
OF-YOU
ARE
THE
heavens
1:11 autoi
autos
pp Nom Pl m
apolountai apollumi
vi Fut Mid 3 Pl
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
diameneis diamenO
vi Pres Act 2 Sg
kai pantes kai pas

Conj a_ Nom Pl m
ws imation hOs himation

Adv n_ Nom Sg n
11 They shall perish; but thou remainest; and they all shall wax old as doth a garment;
they
SHALL-BE-beING-destroyED YOU shall-be-perishing
YET ARE-THRU-REMAINING AND are-continuing
ALL
AS
cloak
palaiwqhsontai palaioO
vi Fut Pas 3 Pl
SHALL-BE-BEING-OLDED shall-be-being-aged
1:12 kai wsei peribolaion elixeis

kai
Conj
hOsei
Adv
peribolaion
n_ Nom Sg n
helissO
vi Fut Act 2 Sg
autous ws imation kai autos hOs himation kai

pp Acc Pl m Adv n_ Acc Sg n Conj
AND
AS-IF
ABOUT-CAST clothing
YOU-SHALL-BE-WHIRLING them you-shall-be-rolling-up
AS
cloak
AND also
12 And as a vesture shalt thou fold them up, and they shall be changed: but thou art the same, and thy years shall not fail.
AV
Hebrews 1 - Hebrews 2
allaghsontai allassO
vi 2Fut Pas 3 Pl
su su
pp 2 Nom Sg
de de
Conj
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
autos autos
pp Nom Sg m
ei eimi
vi Pres vxx 2 Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
eth etos
n_ Nom Pl n
THEY-SHALL-BE-beING-CHANGED YOU
YET THE
SAME
ARE
AND
THE
YEARS
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
ouk ou
Part Neg
ekleiyousin ekleipO
vi Fut Act 3 Pl
OF-YOU
NOT
SHALL-BE-OUT-LACKING shall-be-defaulting tina tis

pi Acc Sg m
1:13 pros
pros
Prep
de de
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
eirhken ereO
pote pote
Part
kaqou kathEmai
ek ek
Prep
TOWARD ANY which ? dexiwn mou dexios egO

YET OF-THE
MESSENGERS He-HAS-declarED ?-when YOU-BE-sittING at-any-time be-you-sitting ! tous ho

t_ Acc Pl m
OUT
13 But to which of the angels said he at any time, Sit on my right hand, until I make thine enemies thy footstool?
ews an heOs an
Conj Part
qw tithEmi
vs 2Aor Act 1 Sg


OF-RIGHT of-right(p) podwn pous

n_ Gen Pl m
OF-ME
TILL
enemies
OF-YOU
OF-THE
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
FEET
OF-YOU
1:14 ouci
ouchi
Part Int
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
eisin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Pl
leitourgika pneumata eis leitourgikos pneuma eis

a_ Nom Pl n n_ Nom Pl n Prep
diakonian diakonia
n_ Acc Sg f
apostellomena apostellO
NOT(emph.) ALL not(emph.) ? dia dia

Prep
THEY-ARE
official ministering klhronomein klEronomeO

vn Pres Act
spirits
INTO THRU-SERVice beING-commissionED service swthrian sOtEria

n_ Acc Sg f
14 Are they not all ministering spirits, sent forth to minister for them who shall be heirs of salvation?
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
mellontas mellO
THRU THE because-of
ones-beING-ABOUT TO-BE-tenantING SAVing ones-being-about to-be-enjoying-the-allotment of-salvation
AV
Hebrews 2
2:1 dia
dia
Prep
touto houtos
pd Acc Sg n
dei deO
vi Pres im-Act 3 Sg
perissoterws prosecein perissoterOs prosechO

Adv vn Pres Act
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl n
akousqeisin akouO
vp Aor Pas Dat Pl n
THRU this because-of mhpote mEpote

Adv
it-IS-BINDING
more-exceedingly
TO-BE-heedING US
to-THE to-the(p)
BEING-HEARD
. Therefore we ought to give the more earnest heed to the things which we have heard, lest at any time we should let [them] slip.
pararuwmen pararrheO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
NO-?-when WE-MAY-BE-BESIDE-GUSHING lest-at-some-time we-may-be-drifting-by
2:2 ei
ei
Cond
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
di dia
Prep
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
lalhqeis laleO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
egeneto ginomai
vi 2Aor midD 3 Sg
bebaios bebaios
a_ Nom Sg m
kai kai
Conj
IF
for
THE
THRU MESSENGERS BEING-TALKED through being-spoken kai parakoh kai parakoE

Conj n_ Nom Sg f
saying word
BECAME
confirmed
AND
For if the word spoken by angels was stedfast, and every transgression and disobedience received a just recompence of reward;
pasa pas
a_ Nom Sg f
parabasis parabasis
n_ Nom Sg f
elaben lambanO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
endikon misqapodosian endikos misthapodosia

EVERY
BESIDE-STEPPing AND transgression
disobedience GOT obtained
IN-JUST fair
HIRE-FROM-GIVing reward
3
2:3 pws hmeis

pOs
Adv Int
hEmeis
pp 1 Nom Pl
ekfeuxomeqa ekpheugO
vi Fut midD 1 Pl
thlikauths tElikoutos
pd Gen Sg f
amelhsantes swthrias htis ameleO sOtEria hostis

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m n_ Gen Sg f pr Nom Sg f
how how ? archn archE

n_ Acc Sg f
WE
SHALL-BE-OUT-FLEEING OF-THE-PRIME-SAME UN-CARing shall-be-escaping of-such-proportions neglecting laleisqai laleO

vn Pres Pas
OF-SAVing salvation upo twn hupo ho

Prep t_ Gen Pl m
WHICH-ANY which-any akousantwn akouO

vp Aor Act Gen Pl m
labousa lambanO
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
kuriou kurios
n_ Gen Sg m
How shall we escape, if we neglect so great salvation; which at the first began to be spoken by the Lord, and was confirmed unto us by them that heard [him];
ORIGINal beginning eis eis

Prep
GETTING obtaining
TO-BE-beING-TALKED THRU THE to-be-being-spoken through
Master Lord
by
THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing-him
hmas hEmeis
pp 1 Acc Pl
ebebaiwqh bebaioO
vi Aor Pas 3 Sg
INTO US
WAS-confirmED
2:4 sunepimarturountos tou

sunepimartureO
ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
shmeiois te sEmeion te
n_ Dat Pl n Part
kai terasin kai teras

Conj n_ Dat Pl n
kai kai
Conj
OF-TOGETHER-ON-witnessING of-corroborating
OF-THE
God
to-SIGNS
BESIDES AND bsboth
to-MIRACLES AND miracles thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
poikilais dunamesin kai pneumatos agiou poikilos dunamis kai pneuma hagios
a_ Dat Pl f n_ Dat Pl f Conj n_ Gen Sg n a_ Gen Sg n
merismois kata merismos kata

n_ Dat Pl m Prep
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
God also bearing [them] witness, both with signs and wonders, and with divers miracles, and gifts of the Holy Ghost, according to his own will?
to-VARIOUS
ABILITIES powerful-deeds
AND
OF-spirit
HOLY
to-PARTings partings
according-to THE
OF-Him
qelhsin thelEsis
n_ Acc Sg f
WILLing will
2:5 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar aggelois gar aggelos

Conj n_ Dat Pl m
upetaxen hupotassO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
oikoumenhn thn oikoumenE ho

mellousan mellO
peri peri
Prep
. For unto the angels hath he not put in subjection the world to come, whereof we speak.
NOT
for
to-MESSENGERS He-UNDER-SETS THE he-subjects
THE
ABOUT concerning
hs hos
pr Gen Sg f
laloumen laleO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
WHICH
WE-ARE-TALKING we-are-speaking pou pou

Part
2:6 diemarturato de
diamarturomai
vi Aor midD 3 Sg
de
Conj
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
legwn legO
ti tis
pi Nom Sg n
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
anqrwpos anthrOpos
n_ Nom Sg m
THRU-witnessES certifies oti mimnhskh hoti mimnEskO

YET ?-where ANY somewhere someone autou autos

pp Gen Sg m
sayING
ANY what ?
IS
human
But one in a certain place testified, saying, What is man, that thou art mindful of him? or the son of man, that thou visitest him?
h E
Part
uios huios
n_ Nom Sg m
anqrwpou oti episkepth anthrOpos hoti episkeptomai

n_ Gen Sg m Conj vi Pres midD/pasD 2 Sg
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
that
YOU-ARE-beING-REMINDED OF-him you-are-being-mindful auton autos

pp Acc Sg m
OR
SON
OF-human
that
YOU-ARE-ON-NOTING him you-are-visiting doxh doxa

n_ Dat Sg f
2:7 hlattwsas
elattoO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
bracu brachus
a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
par para
Prep
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
kai timh kai timE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
YOU-make-INFERIOR him
BIT
ANY some
BESIDE MESSENGERS to-esteem to-glory
AND
to-VALUE honor
Thou madest him a little lower than the angels; thou crownedst him with glory and honour, and didst set him over the works of thy hands:
AV
Hebrews 2
estefanwsas auton stephanoO autos

WH
kai katesthsas auton epi ta erga twn ceirwn sou
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
WH
YOU-WREATHE
him
2:8 panta
pas
a_ Acc Pl n
upetaxas hupotassO
vi Aor Act 2 Sg
upokatw hupokatO
Adv
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl m
podwn pous
n_ Gen Pl m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
gar gar
Conj
ALL
YOU-UNDER-SET UNDER-DOWN OF-THE you-subject underneath the autw autos

pp Dat Sg m
FEET
OF-him
IN
THE
for
upotaxai hupotassO
vn Aor Act
ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
ouden oudeis
a_ Acc Sg n
afhken aphiEmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
anupotakton nun anupotaktos nun

a_ Acc Sg n Adv
Thou hast put all things in subjection under his feet. For in that he put all in subjection under him, he left nothing [that is] not put under him. But now we see not yet all things put under him.
TO-UNDER-SET to-subject de de
Conj
to-him
THE
ALL
NOT-YET-ONE He-FROM-LETS to-him nothing he-leaves ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
UN-UNDER-SET unsubject
NOW
oupw oupO
Adv
orwmen horaO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
upotetagmena hupotassO
YET NOT-as-yet WE-ARE-SEEING to-him
THE
ALL
HAVING-been-UNDER-SET having-been-subjected hlattwmenon elattoO

2:9 ton
ho
t_ Acc Sg m
de de
Conj
bracu brachus
a_ Acc Sg n
ti tis
px Acc Sg n
par para
Prep
aggelous aggelos
n_ Acc Pl m
blepomen blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
THE the-one ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
YET BIT
ANY some
BESIDE MESSENGERS HAVING-been-made-INFERIOR WE-ARE-lookING we-are-observing qanatou doxh thanatos doxa

n_ Gen Sg m n_ Dat Sg f
dia dia
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
paqhma tou pathEma ho

kai timh kai timE

Conj n_ Dat Sg f
But we see Jesus, who was made a little lower than the angels for the suffering of death, crowned with glory and honour; that he by the grace of God should taste death for every man.
JESUS
THRU THE because-of opws hopOs

Adv
EMOTION suffering
OF-THE
DEATH
to-esteem to-glory
AND
to-VALUE honor geushtai geuomai

vs Aor midD 3 Sg
estefanwmenon stephanoO
cariti qeou charis theos

uper huper
Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
HAVING-been-WREATHED WHICH-how to-grace having-been-wreathed so-that qanatou thanatos

n_ Gen Sg m
OF-God
OVER EVERY for-the-sake-of every-one
He-SHOULD-BE-TASTING
OF-DEATH death
2:10 eprepen
prepO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
gar autw gar autos

Conj pp Dat Sg m
di dia
Prep
on hos
pr Acc Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
kai di kai dia

Conj Prep
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
it-BEHOOVED for
to-Him him
THRU WHOM because-of eis eis

Prep
THE
ALL
AND
THRU WHOM through ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
pollous uious polus huios

doxan doxa
n_ Acc Sg f
agagonta agO
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
archgon archEgos
n_ Acc Sg m
10 . For it became him, for whom [are] all things, and by whom [are] all things, in bringing many sons unto glory, to make the captain of their salvation perfect through sufferings.
ALL
MANY
SONS
INTO esteem glory
LEADING
THE
ORIGIN-LEADer OF-THE inaugurator
swthrias autwn sOtEria autos

dia dia
Prep
paqhmatwn teleiwsai pathEma teleioO

n_ Gen Pl n vn Aor Act
SAVing salvation
OF-them
THRU EMOTIONS through sufferings gar agiazwn gar hagiazO

TO-mature to-perfect kai oi kai ho

Conj t_ Nom Pl m
2:11 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
te te
Part
agiazomenoi hagiazO
ex ek
Prep
enos heis
n_ Gen Sg m
THE
BESIDES for
One-HOLYizING one-hallowing aitian ouk aitia ou

AND
THE
ones-beING-HOLYizED OUT OF-ONE ones-being-hallowed adelfous autous kalein adelphos autos kaleO
n_ Acc Pl m pp Acc Pl m vn Pres Act
11 For both he that sanctifieth and they who are sanctified [are] all of one: for which cause he is not ashamed to call them brethren,
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
di dia
Prep
hn hos
pr Acc Sg f
epaiscunetai epaischunomai
ALL are-all
cause
NOT
He-IS-beING-ON-VILED brothers he-is-being-ashamed brethren to ho

t_ Acc Sg n
them
TO-BE-CALLING
2:12 legwn
legO
apaggelw apaggellO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
onoma onoma
n_ Acc Sg n
sou su
pp 2 Gen Sg
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
adelfois adelphos
n_ Dat Pl m
sayING
I-SHALL-BE-FROM-MESSAGING THE I-shall-be-reporting
NAME
OF-YOU
to-THE
brothers brethren
12 Saying, I will declare thy name unto my brethren, in the midst of the church will I sing praise unto thee.
AV
Hebrews 2
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
en en
Prep
mesw mesos
a_ Dat Sg n
ekklhsias ekklEsia
n_ Gen Sg f
umnhsw humneO
vi Fut Act 1 Sg
se su
pp 2 Acc Sg
OF-ME
IN
MIDst
OF-OUT-CALLED I-SHALL-BE-HYMNING YOU of-ecclesia I-shall-be-singing-hymns to-you esomai eimi

vi Fut vxx 1 Sg
2:13 kai palin egw

kai
Conj
palin
Adv
egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
pepoiqws peithO
ep epi
Prep
autw autos
pp Dat Sg m
kai palin idou kai palin idou

Conj Adv vm 2Aor Act 2 Sg
AND
AGAIN
SHALL-BE
HAVING-confidence
ON
Him
AND
AGAIN
BE-PERCEIVING lo !
13 And again, I will put my trust in him. And again, Behold I and the children which God hath given me.
egw egO
pp 1 Nom Sg
kai ta kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl n
paidia paidion
n_ Nom Pl n
a hos
pr Acc Pl n
moi egO
pp 1 Dat Sg
edwken didOmi
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
AND
THE
little-boys-girls WHICH little-boys-and-girls which(p) paidia paidion

n_ Nom Pl n
to-ME
GIVES
THE
God
2:14 epei oun

epei
Conj
oun
Conj
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
kekoinwnhken aimatos kai sarkos koinOneO haima kai sarx

vi Perf Act 3 Sg n_ Gen Sg n Conj n_ Gen Sg f
kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
since
THEN THE
little-boys-girls HAS-communionED little-boys-and-girls has-participated twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
OF-BLOOD
AND
OF-FLESH AND also
He
paraplhsiws metescen paraplEsiOs metechO

autwn ina autos hina

pp Gen Pl n Conj
dia dia
Prep
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
14 . Forasmuch then as the children are partakers of flesh and blood, he also himself likewise took part of the same; that through death he might destroy him that had the power of death, that is, the devil;
BESIDE-NIGHly very-nigh katarghsh katargeO

vs Aor Act 3 Sg
has-WITH-HAD OF-THE has-partaken ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
SAME same(p) to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
THAT THRU THE through kratos econta kratos echO

n_ Acc Sg n
DEATH
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qanatou thanatos
n_ Gen Sg m
He-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-UN-ACTING THE-one he-should-be-discarding the-one tout houtos

pd Nom Sg n
THE
HOLDing might
HAVING
OF-THE
DEATH
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
diabolon diabolos
a_ Acc Sg m
this
IS
THE
THRU-CASTer Adversary toutous osoi houtos hosos

pd Acc Pl m pk Nom Pl m
2:15 kai apallaxh

kai
Conj
apallassO
vs Aor Act 3 Sg
fobw phobos
n_ Dat Sg m
qanatou dia thanatos dia

n_ Gen Sg m Prep
pantos pas
a_ Gen Sg m
AND
SHOULD-BE-FROM-CHANGING these should-be-clearing zhn zaO

vn Pres Act
as-much-as to-FEAR whoever douleias douleia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-DEATH
THRU EVERY through entire
15 And deliver them who through fear of death were all their lifetime subject to bondage.
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
enocoi enochos
a_ Nom Pl m
hsan eimi
vi impf vxx 3 Pl
THE
TO-BE-LIVING liable
WERE
OF-SLAVery
2:16 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar dhpou gar dEpou

Conj Adv
aggelwn aggelos
n_ Gen Pl m
epilambanetai alla spermatos abraam epilambanomai alla sperma abraam

vi Pres midD/pasD 3 Sg Conj n_ Gen Sg n ni proper
NOT
for
BIND-?-where OF-MESSENGERS it-IS-ON-GETTING-UP assuredly it-is-taking-hold
but
OF-seed
16 For verily he took not on [him the nature of] angels; but he took on [him] the seed of Abraham.
epilambanetai epilambanomai
it-IS-ON-GETTING-UP it-is-taking-hold
2:17 oqen
hothen
Adv
wfeilen opheilO
vi impf Act 3 Sg
kata kata
Prep
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
adelfois omoiwqhnai ina adelphos homoioO hina

n_ Dat Pl m vn Aor Pas Conj
elehmwn eleEmOn
a_ Nom Sg m
WHICH-PLACE He-OWED whence he-ought genhtai ginomai

vs 2Aor midD 3 Sg
according-to ALL all-things arciereus archiereus

n_ Nom Sg m
to-THE the ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
brothers brethren pros pros

Prep
TO-BE-LIKENED to-be-made-like ton ho

t_ Acc Sg m
THAT MERCIful
kai pistos kai pistos

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
eis eis
Prep
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
17 Wherefore in all things it behoved him to be made like unto [his] brethren, that he might be a merciful and faithful high priest in things [pertaining] to God, to make reconciliation for the sins of the people.
He-MAY-BE-BECOMING AND
BELIEVing faithful tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
chief-SACRED-one THE chief-priest the(p) amartias tou hamartia ho

TOWARD THE
God
INTO THE
ilaskesqai hilaskomai
vn Pres Pas
laou laos
n_ Gen Sg m
TO-BE-PROPITIATING THE to-be-making-a-propitiatory-shelter for-the
misses sins autos autos
OF-THE
PEOPLE
2:18 en
en
Prep
w hos
pr Dat Sg n
gar peponqen gar paschO

peirasqeis peirazO
vp Aor Pas Nom Sg m
dunatai dunamai
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
pp Nom Sg m
IN
WHICH
for
HAS-EMOTIONED He has-suffered
BEING-triED
He-IS-ABLE
to-THE the
18 For in that he himself hath suffered being tempted, he is able to succour them that are tempted.
AV
peirazomenois bohqhsai peirazO boEtheO

vp Pres Pas Dat Pl m vn Aor Act
ones-beING-tried
TO-help
AV
Hebrews 3
3:1 oqen
hothen
Adv
adelfoi agioi adelphos hagios

n_ Voc Pl m a_ Voc Pl m
klhsews epouraniou metocoi klEsis epouranios metochos

n_ Gen Sg f a_ Gen Sg f a_ Nom Pl m
katanohsate ton katanoeO ho

vm Aor Act 2 Pl t_ Acc Sg m
WHICH-PLACE brothers whence brethren
HOLY
OF-CALLing
WITH-HAVers DOWN-MIND-YE partners consider-ye ! ihsoun iEsous

n_ Acc Sg m
THE
. Wherefore, holy brethren, partakers of the heavenly calling, consider the Apostle and High Priest of our profession, Christ Jesus;
apostolon kai arcierea apostolos kai archiereus

ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
omologias hmwn homologia hemeis

AND
chief-SACRED-One OF-THE chief-priest tw ho

t_ Dat Sg m
avowal
OF-US
JESUS
3:2 piston onta

pistos
a_ Acc Sg m
eimi
poihsanti poieO
vp Aor Act Dat Sg m
auton autos
pp Acc Sg m
ws kai mwushs hOs kai mOusEs

Adv Conj n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
olw holos
a_ Dat Sg m
Who was faithful to him that appointed him, as also Moses [was faithful] in all his house.
BELIEVing faithful tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
BEING
to-THE
Him
AS
AND also
MOSES
IN
WHOLE
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
THE
HOME house
OF-Him
3:3 pleionos
polus
a_ Gen Sg f Cmp
gar outos gar houtos

Conj pd Nom Sg m
doxhs doxa
n_ Gen Sg f
para para
Prep
mwushn hxiwtai mOusEs axioO

n_ Acc Sg m vi Perf Pas 3 Sg
kaq kata
Prep
oson hosos
pk Acc Sg n
OF-MORE
for
this-One this-one ecei echO

vi Pres Act 3 Sg
esteem glory tou ho

t_ Gen Sg m
BESIDE MOSES besidethan oikou oikos

n_ Gen Sg m
He-HAS-been-WORTHY according-to as-much-as has-been-counted-worthy kataskeuasas auton kataskeuazO autos

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m pp Acc Sg m
For this [man] was counted worthy of more glory than Moses, inasmuch as he who hath builded the house hath more honour than the house.
pleiona polus
a_ Acc Sg f Cmp
timhn timE
n_ Acc Sg f
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
MORE
VALUE honor
IS-HAVING
OF-THE
HOME house
THE
One-constructing one-constructing o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
it
him it
3:4 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar oikos gar oikos

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
kataskeuazetai upo tinos kataskeuazO hupo tis

vi Pres Pas 3 Sg Prep px Gen Sg m
de de
Conj
panta pas
a_ Acc Pl n
For every house is builded by some [man]; but he that built all things [is] God.
EVERY
for
HOME house
IS-beING-constructED
by
ANY someone
THE-One the-one
YET ALL
kataskeuasas qeos kataskeuazO theos

vp Aor Act Nom Sg m n_ Nom Sg m
constructing
God
3:5 kai mwushs men

kai
Conj
mOusEs
n_ Nom Sg m
men
Part
pistos pistos
a_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
olw holos
a_ Dat Sg m
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
oikw oikos
n_ Dat Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ws qerapwn hOs therapOn

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
AND
MOSES
INDEED BELIEVing faithful
IN
WHOLE
THE
HOME house
OF-him
AS
retainer attendant
And Moses verily [was] faithful in all his house, as a servant, for a testimony of those things which were to be spoken after;
eis eis
Prep
marturion twn marturion ho

n_ Acc Sg n t_ Gen Pl n
lalhqhsomenwn laleO
vp Fut Pas Gen Pl n
OF-THE of-the(p)
SHALL-BE-BEING-TALKED shall-be-being-spoken epi epi

Prep
3:6 cristos de
christos
n_ Nom Sg m
de
Conj
ws uios hOs huios

Adv n_ Nom Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
oikon oikos
n_ Acc Sg m
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
ou hos
pr Gen Sg m
oikos oikos
n_ Nom Sg m
esmen eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
ANOINTED Christ hmeis hEmeis

pp 1 Nom Pl
WH
YET AS
NA
SON
ON THE onover thn ho

t_ Acc Sg f
HOME house
OF-Him
OF-WHOM whose
HOME house
ARE
But Christ as a son over his own house; whose house are we, if we hold fast the confidence and the rejoicing of the hope firm unto the end.
ean
eanper ean
Cond
parrhsian kai to parrhEsia kai ho

n_ Acc Sg f Conj t_ Acc Sg n
kauchma ths kauchEma ho

WE
WH
IF-EVER-EVEN that-is-if
WH WH
THE
boldness
AND
THE
BOAST glorying
OF-THE
elpidos elpis
n_ Gen Sg f
mecri telous bebaian
katascwmen katechO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
EXPECTATION
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-HAVING we-should-be-retaining kaqws kathOs

Adv
3:7 dio
dio
Conj
legei legO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
pneuma pneuma
n_ Nom Sg n
to ho
t_ Nom Sg n
agion hagios
a_ Nom Sg n
shmeron ean sEmeron ean

Adv Cond
. Wherefore (as the Holy Ghost saith, To day if ye will hear his voice,
THRU-WHICH according-AS IS-sayING wherefore ths ho

t_ Gen Sg f
THE
spirit
THE
HOLY
toDAY
IF-EVER
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akoushte akouO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
OF-THE the
SOUND voice
OF-Him
YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING
AV
Hebrews 3
3:8 mh
mE
Part Neg
sklhrunhte sklErunO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f

ws en hOs en
Adv Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
parapikrasmw parapikrasmos
n_ Dat Sg m
NO
YE-SHOULD-BE-HARDENING THE
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
Harden not your hearts, as in the provocation, in the day of temptation in the wilderness:
IN
THE
BESIDE-BITTERing embitterment
kata kata
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
hmeran tou hEmera ho

peirasmou en peirasmos en
n_ Gen Sg m Prep
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
according-to THE
DAY
OF-THE
trial
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness ta ho
t_ Acc Pl n
9
3:9 ou
hou
Adv
epeirasan oi peirazO ho

en en
Prep
dokimasia kai eidon dokimasia kai eidO

n_ Dat Sg f Conj vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
where try try-me erga ergon

n_ Acc Pl n
THE
FATHERS
OF-YOU(p) IN of-ye
When your fathers tempted me, proved me, and saw my works forty years.
testing
AND
THEY-PERCEIVED THE were-acquainted-with
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
tesserakonta eth tesserakonta etos

ACTS
OF-ME
FOUR-TY forty proswcqisa prosochthizO

vi Aor Act 1 Sg
YEARS
3:10 dio
dio
Conj
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
genea genea
n_ Dat Sg f
tauth houtos
pd Dat Sg f
kai eipon kai legO

aei aei
Adv
THRU-WHICH I-TOWARD-DISGUST to-THE wherefore I-am-disgusted planwntai planaO

vi Pres Pas 3 Pl
generation this
AND
I-said
ever
10 Wherefore I was grieved with that generation, and said, They do alway err in [their] heart; and they have not known my ways.
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
kardia autoi kardia autos

n_ Dat Sg f pp Nom Pl m
de de
Conj
ouk ou
Part Neg
egnwsan ginOskO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
odous mou hodos egO

THEY-ARE-beING-STRAYED to-THE they-are-straying
HEART
they
YET NOT
KNOW
THE
WAYS
OF-ME
3:11 ws wmosa
hOs
Adv
omnuO
vi Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
orgh orgE
n_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
ei ei
Cond
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
11 So I sware in my wrath, They shall not enter into my rest.)
AS
I-SWEAR
IN
THE
INDIGNATION OF-ME
IF
THEY-SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE they-shall-be-entering
katapausin mou katapausis egO

OF-ME
3:12 blepete
blepO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
adelfoi mhpote adelphos mEpote

n_ Voc Pl m Adv
estai eimi
vi Fut vxx 3 Sg
en en
Prep
tini tis
px Dat Sg m
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
kardia kardia
n_ Nom Sg f
ponhra ponEros
a_ Nom Sg f
BE-YE-lookING brothers be-ye-bewaring ! brethren ! apistias apistia

n_ Gen Sg f
NO-?-when SHALL-BE IN lest-at-some-time there-shall-be aposthnai aphistEmi

vn 2Aor Act
ANY anyone zwntos zaO
OF-YOU(p) HEART of-ye
wicked
12 Take heed, brethren, lest there be in any of you an evil heart of unbelief, in departing from the living God.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
apo apo
Prep
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
OF-UN-BELIEF IN of-unbelief
THE
TO-FROM-STAND FROM God to-withdraw eautous kaq heautou kata

pf 3 Acc Pl m Prep
LIVING
3:13 alla parakaleite

alla
Conj
parakaleO
vm Pres Act 2 Pl
ekasthn hmeran acris ou hekastos hEmera achri hos

a_ Acc Sg f n_ Acc Sg f Prep pr Gen Sg m
to ho
t_ Acc Sg n
but
BE-YE-BESIDE-CALLING selves be-ye-entreating ! yourselves ina hina

Conj
according-to EACH
DAY
UNTIL
WHICH
THE
13 But exhort one another daily, while it is called To day; lest any of you be hardened through the deceitfulness of sin.
shmeron kaleitai sEmeron kaleO

Adv vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
sklhrunqh sklErunO
vs Aor Pas 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
apath apatE
n_ Dat Sg f
toDAY
IS-beING-CALLED THAT NO
MAY-BE-BEING-HARDENED ANY anyone
OUT OF-YOU(p) to-SEDUCtion of-ye
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
amartias hamartia
n_ Gen Sg f
OF-THE
missing sin gar tou gar ho

Conj t_ Gen Sg m
3:14 metocoi
metochos
a_ Nom Pl m
cristou gegonamen christos ginomai

n_ Gen Sg m vi 2Perf Act 1 Pl
eanper ean
Cond
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
archn archE
n_ Acc Sg f
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
WITH-HAVers for partners
OF-THE
ANOINTED Christ
WE-HAVE-BECOME IF-EVER-EVEN THE that-is-if
ORIGINal beginning
OF-THE
14 For we are made partakers of Christ, if we hold the beginning of our confidence stedfast unto the end;
upostasews mecri telous hupostasis mechri telos

n_ Gen Sg f Adv n_ Gen Sg n
bebaian katascwmen bebaios katechO

a_ Acc Sg f vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
UNDER-STANDing assumption
UNTO
FINISH confirmed consummation
WE-SHOULD-BE-DOWN-HAVING we-should-be-retaining
AV
3:15 en
en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
legesqai legO
vn Pres Pas

Adv Cond
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akoushte akouO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
IN
THE
TO-BE-beING-said toDAY
IF-EVER OF-THE the kardias umwn kardia humeis

SOUND voice ws en hOs en

Adv Prep
OF-Him
YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING
15 While it is said, To day if ye will hear his voice, harden not your hearts, as in the provocation.
mh mE
Part Neg
sklhrunhte sklErunO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl
tas ho
t_ Acc Pl f
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg m
parapikrasmw parapikrasmos
n_ Dat Sg m
NO
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) AS of-ye all ou alla ou

Conj
IN
THE
BESIDE-BITTERing embitterment oi ho
t_ Nom Pl m
16 For some, when they had heard, did provoke: howbeit not all that came out of Egypt by Moses.
3:16 tines
tis
px Nom Pl m
gar akousantes parepikranan gar akouO parapikrainO

Conj vp Aor Act Nom Pl m vi Aor Act 3 Pl
pantes pas
a_ Nom Pl m
Part Neg
ANY some exelqontes exerchomai

for
HEARing ones-hearing
THEY-BESIDE-BITTER but embitter-him mwusews mOusEs

n_ Gen Sg m
NOT
ALL
THE
ex ek
Prep
aiguptou dia aiguptos dia

n_ Gen Sg f Prep
ones-OUT-COMING OUT OF-EGYPT ones-coming-out
THRU MOSES through tesserakonta eth tesserakonta etos

3:17 tisin
tis
pi Dat Pl m
de de
Conj
proswcqisen prosochthizO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
ouci ouchi
Part Int
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
amarthsasin hamartanO
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m
to-ANY YET He-TOWARD-DISGUSTS FOUR-TY to-whom ? he-is-disgusted forty wn hos

pr Gen Pl m
YEARS
NOT(emph.) to-THE not(emph.) ?
ones-missing ones-sinning
17 But with whom was he grieved forty years? [was it] not with them that had sinned, whose carcases fell in the wilderness?
ta ho
t_ Nom Pl n
kwla kOlon
n_ Nom Pl n
epesen piptO
vi 2Aor Act 3 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
erhmw erEmos
a_ Dat Sg f
CARCASES FALLS carcasses de de

Conj
IN
THE
DESOLATE wilderness eis eis

Prep
3:18 tisin
tis
pi Dat Pl m
wmosen omnuO
vi Aor Act 3 Sg
mh mE
Part Neg
eiseleusesqai eiserchomai
vn Fut midD
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
katapausin autou katapausis autos

ei ei
Cond
to-ANY YET He-SWEARS NO to-whom ? mh mE

Part Neg
TO-BE-INTO-COMING(fut) INTO THE to-be-entering
OF-Him
IF
18 And to whom sware he that they should not enter into his rest, but to them that believed not?
tois ho
t_ Dat Pl m
apeiqhsasin apeitheO
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m
NO
to-THE
ones-UN-PERSUADing ones-being-stubborn oti ouk hoti ou

Conj Part Neg
3:19 kai blepomen

kai
Conj
blepO
vi Pres Act 1 Pl
hdunhqhsan dunamai
vn 2Aor Act
di dia
Prep
apistian apistia
n_ Acc Sg f
19 So we see that they could not enter in because of unbelief.
AND
WE-ARE-lookING that we-are-observing
NOT
THEY-WERE-enABLED TO-BE-INTO-COMING THRU UN-BELIEF they-could to-be-entering because-of unbelief
AV
Hebrews 4
4:1 fobhqwmen
phobeO
vs Aor pasD 1 Pl
oun oun
Conj
mhpote mEpote
Adv
kataleipomenhs epaggelias eiselqein kataleipO epaggelia eiserchomai

vp Pres Pas Gen Sg f n_ Gen Sg f vn 2Aor Act
WE-MAY-BE-BEING-afraid THEN NO-?-when OF-beING-left lest-at-some-time eis eis

Prep
promise
TO-BE-INTO-COMING to-be-entering usterhkenai hustereO

vn Perf Act
. Let us therefore fear, lest, a promise being left [us] of entering into his rest, any of you should seem to come short of it.
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

dokh dokeO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
umwn humeis
pp 2 Gen Pl
INTO THE
OF-Him
MAY-BE-SEEMING ANY anyone kaqaper kathaper

Adv
OUT OF-YOU(p) TO-HAVE-WANTED of-ye to-be-deficient kakeinoi all ouk kakeinos alla ou
pd Nom Pl m Conj Part Neg
2
4:2 kai gar esmen

kai
Conj
gar
Conj
eimi
vi Pres vxx 1 Pl
euhggelismenoi euaggelizO
AND also
for
WE-ARE
HAVING-been-WELL-MESSAGizED DOWN-WHICH-EVEN AND-those having-been-brought-the-well-message even-as also-those logos logos

n_ Nom Sg m
but
NOT
wfelhsen o OpheleO ho
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
akohs akoE
n_ Gen Sg f
ekeinous mh ekeinos mE
pd Acc Pl m Part Neg
sugkekerasmenous sugkerannumi
For unto us was the gospel preached, as well as unto them: but the word preached did not profit them, not being mixed with faith in them that heard [it].
benefits
THE
saying word
OF-THE
HEARing tidings
those
NO
HAVING-been-TOGETHER-blendED having-been-blended-with
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
pistei tois pistis ho

n_ Dat Sg f t_ Dat Pl m
akousasin akouO
vp Aor Act Dat Pl m
to-THE with-the
BELIEF faith
to-THE
ones-HEARing ones-hearing-it gar eis gar eis

Conj Prep
4:3 eisercomeqa
eiserchomai
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f
katapausin oi katapausis ho
pisteusantes kaqws pisteuO kathOs

vp Aor Act Nom Pl m Adv
WE-ARE-INTO-COMING for we-are-entering eirhken ereO

INTO
THE
DOWN-CEASing stopping orgh orgE

n_ Dat Sg f
THE
ones-BELIEVing ones-believing ei ei
Cond
according-AS
ws wmosa hOs omnuO

Adv vi Aor Act 1 Sg
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
mou egO
pp 1 Gen Sg
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
eis eis
Prep
For we which have believed do enter into rest, as he said, As I have sworn in my wrath, if they shall enter into my rest: although the works were finished from the foundation of the world.
He-HAS-declarED AS
I-SWEAR
IN
THE
INDIGNATION OF-ME
IF
THEY-SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO they-shall-be-entering katabolhs kosmou katabolE kosmos

thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

kaitoi kaitoi
Conj
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
apo apo
Prep
THE
OF-ME
AND-THOUGH OF-THE although the
ACTS works
FROM DOWN-CASTing OF-SYSTEM disruption of-world
genhqentwn ginomai
vp Aor pasD Gen Pl n
BEING-BECOME
4:4 eirhken
ereO
gar pou gar pou

Conj Part
peri peri
Prep
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
ebdomhs outws kai katepausen o hebdomos houtOs kai katapauO ho

a_ Gen Sg f Adv Conj vi Aor Act 3 Sg t_ Nom Sg m
He-HAS-declarED for
?-where ABOUT THE somewhere concerning hmera hEmera

n_ Dat Sg f
SEVENth
thus
AND
DOWN-CEASES stops ergwn ergon

n_ Gen Pl n
THE
For he spake in a certain place of the seventh [day] on this wise, And God did rest the seventh day from all his works.
qeos theos
n_ Nom Sg m
en en
Prep
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
th ho
t_ Dat Sg f
ebdomh apo hebdomos apo

a_ Dat Sg f Prep
pantwn twn pas ho

autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
God
IN
THE
DAY
THE
SEVENth
FROM ALL
OF-THE the eis eis

Prep
ACTS works
OF-Him
4:5 kai en
kai
Conj
en
Prep
toutw palin ei houtos palin ei

pd Dat Sg m Adv Cond
vi Fut midD 3 Pl
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

And in this [place] again, If they shall enter into my rest.
AND
IN
this
AGAIN
IF
THEY-SHALL-BE-INTO-COMING INTO THE they-shall-be-entering tinas tis

px Acc Pl m
DOWN-CEASing stopping authn autos

pp Acc Sg f
OF-ME
4:6 epei oun

epei
Conj
oun
Conj
apoleipetai apoleipO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
kai oi kai ho
Conj t_ Nom Pl m
since
THEN it-IS-beING-FROM-LACKED ANY it-is-being-left for-some euaggelisqentes euaggelizO

vp Aor Pas Nom Pl m
TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO her herit to-be-entering eishlqon di eiserchomai dia

AND
THE the-ones
Seeing therefore it remaineth that some must enter therein, and they to whom it was first preached entered not in because of unbelief:
proteron proteron
Adv
ouk ou
Part Neg
apeiqeian apeitheia
n_ Acc Sg f
BEFORE-more ones-BEING-WELL-MESSAGizED NOT formerly being-brought-the-well-message
INTO-CAME entered
THRU UN-PERSUADableness because-of stubbornness dauid legwn dauid legO

ni proper vp Pres Act Nom Sg m
4:7 palin tina

palin
Adv
tis
px Acc Sg f
orizei horizO
vi Pres Act 3 Sg
hmeran shmeron en hEmera sEmeron en

n_ Acc Sg f Adv Prep
meta meta
Prep
AGAIN
ANY certain
IS-definING DAY he-is-specifying
toDAY
IN
DAVID
sayING
after
Again, he limiteth a certain day, saying in David, To day, after so long a time; as it is said, To day if ye will hear his voice, harden not your hearts.
AV
Hebrews 4
tosouton cronon tosoutos chronos

pd Acc Sg m n_ Acc Sg m
kaqws kathOs
Adv
proeirhtai proereO
vi Perf Pas 3 Sg

Adv Cond
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
fwnhs phOnE
n_ Gen Sg f
so-much
TIME
according-AS HAS-been-BEFORE-declarED toDAY has-been-declared-before mh mE

Part Neg
IF-EVER OF-THE the tas ho

t_ Acc Pl f
SOUND voice
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
akoushte akouO
vs Aor Act 2 Pl
sklhrunhte sklErunO
vs Pres Act 2 Pl

OF-Him
YE-SHOULD-BE-HEARING NO
HEARTS
OF-YOU(p) of-ye elalei laleO

vi impf Act 3 Sg
4:8 ei
ei
Cond
gar autous ihsous gar autos iEsous

Conj pp Acc Pl m n_ Nom Sg m
katepausen ouk katapauO ou

vi Aor Act 3 Sg Part Neg
an an
Part
peri peri
Prep
allhs allos
a_ Gen Sg f
meta meta
Prep
IF
for
them
JESUS Joshua
DOWN-CEASES causes-to-stop
NOT
EVER ABOUT other concerning another
He-TALKED he-spoke
after
For if Jesus had given them rest, then would he not afterward have spoken of another day.
tauta houtos
pd Acc Pl n
hmeras hEmera
n_ Gen Sg f
these DAY these-things
4:9 ara
ara
Part
apoleipetai apoleipO
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
sabbatismos tw sabbatismos ho
law laos
n_ Dat Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
There remaineth therefore a rest to the people of God.
CONSEQUENTLY IS-beING-FROM-LACKED SABBATHism is-being-left sabbatism
to-THE
PEOPLE
OF-THE
God
4:10 o
ho
t_ Nom Sg m
gar eiselqwn gar eiserchomai

eis eis
Prep
thn ho
t_ Acc Sg f

kai autos kai autos

Conj pp Nom Sg m
THE
for
one-INTO-COMING one-entering twn ho

t_ Gen Pl n
INTO THE
DOWN-CEASing stopping wsper apo hOsper apo

Adv Prep
OF-Him
AND also idiwn idios
he
10 For he that is entered into his rest, he also hath ceased from his own works, as God [did] from his.
katepausen apo katapauO apo

ergwn ergon
n_ Gen Pl n
autou autos
pp Gen Sg m
twn ho
t_ Gen Pl n
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
a_ Gen Pl n
DOWN-CEASES stops qeos theos

n_ Nom Sg m
FROM THE
ACTS works
OF-him
AS-EVEN even-as
FROM THE
OWN own(p)
THE
God
4:11 spoudaswmen
spoudazO
vs Aor Act 1 Pl
oun oun
Conj
vn 2Aor Act
eis eis
Prep
ekeinhn thn ekeinos ho

katapausin ina katapausis hina

n_ Acc Sg f Conj
WE-SHOULD-BE-beING-DILIGENT THEN TO-BE-INTO-COMING INTO that we-should-be-endeavoring to-be-entering mh mE

Part Neg
THE
THAT
11 . Let us labour therefore to enter into that rest, lest any man fall after the same example of unbelief.
en en
Prep
tw ho
t_ Dat Sg n
autw autos
pp Dat Sg n
tis tis
px Nom Sg m
upodeigmati pesh hupodeigma piptO

n_ Dat Sg n vs 2Aor Act 3 Sg
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
NO
IN
THE
SAME
ANY anyone
UNDER-SHOW example
SHOULD-BE-FALLING OF-THE
apeiqeias apeitheia
n_ Gen Sg f
UN-PERSUADableness stubbornness
4:12 zwn
zaO
gar o gar ho
Conj t_ Nom Sg m
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
kai energhs kai energEs

Conj a_ Nom Sg m
kai tomwteros kai tomOteros

Conj a_ Nom Sg m Cmp
LIVING
for
THE
saying word
OF-THE
God
AND
IN-ACTING operative
AND
CUT-more keener kai kai

Conj
uper pasan huper pas

Prep a_ Acc Sg f
macairan distomon machaira distomos

kai diiknoumenos kai diikneomai

acri merismou yuchs achri merismos psuchE

Prep n_ Gen Sg m n_ Gen Sg f
OVER above
EVERY
sword
TWO-MOUTHed AND two-edged te te

Part
THRU-REACHING penetrating
UNTIL PARTing
OF-soul
AND
12 For the word of God [is] quick, and powerful, and sharper than any twoedged sword, piercing even to the dividing asunder of soul and spirit, and of the joints and marrow, and [is] a discerner of the thoughts and intents of the heart.
pneumatos armwn pneuma harmos

n_ Gen Sg n n_ Gen Pl m
kai muelwn kai muelos

Conj n_ Gen Pl m
kai kritikos enqumhsewn kai kai kritikos enthumEsis kai

Conj a_ Nom Sg m n_ Gen Pl f Conj
OF-spirit spirit ennoiwn ennoia

n_ Gen Pl f
OF-CONNECTions BESIDES AND bsboth of-articulations kardias kardia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-MARROWS (spinal) AND marrow(p)
JUDGE
OF-IN-FEELings of-sentiments
AND
OF-IN-MINDS OF-HEART thoughts
AV
4:13 kai ouk

kai
Conj
ou
Part Neg
estin eimi
vi Pres vxx 3 Sg
ktisis ktisis
n_ Nom Sg f
afanhs aphanEs
a_ Nom Sg f

Adv pp Gen Sg m
panta pas
a_ Nom Pl n
de de
Conj
gumna gumnos
a_ Nom Pl n
AND
NOT
IS there-is
CREATION UN-APPEARING IN-VIEW not-apparent in-sight-of tois ho

t_ Dat Pl m
OF-SAME him it on hos
ALL
YET NAKED
13 Neither is there any creature that is not manifest in his sight: but all things [are] naked and opened unto the eyes of him with whom we have to do.
kai tetrachlismena kai trachElizO

Conj vp Perf Pas Nom Pl n
ofqalmois autou ophthalmos autos

pros pros
Prep
hmin hemeis
pp 1 Dat Pl
o ho
t_ Nom Sg m
pr Acc Sg m
AND
HAVING-been-NECKizED to-THE having-been-bared
VIEWers eyes
OF-Him
TOWARD WHOM
to-US
THE
logos logos
n_ Nom Sg m
saying account
4:14 econtes
echO
oun oun
Conj
arcierea archiereus
n_ Acc Sg m
megan mega
a_ Acc Sg m
dielhluqota dierchomai
vp 2Perf Act Acc Sg m
tous ho
t_ Acc Pl m
ouranous ouranos
n_ Acc Pl m
HAVING
THEN chief-SACRED-One GREAT chief-priest uion huios

n_ Acc Sg m
HAVING-THRU-COME THE one-having-passed-through kratwmen krateO

vs Pres Act 1 Pl
heavens
14 Seeing then that we have a great high priest, that is passed into the heavens, Jesus the Son of God, let us hold fast [our] profession.
ihsoun iEsous
n_ Acc Sg m
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
tou ho
t_ Gen Sg m
qeou theos
n_ Gen Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
omologias homologia
n_ Gen Sg f
JESUS
THE
SON
OF-THE
God
WE-MAY-BE-HOLDING OF-THE
avowal
4:15 ou
ou
Part Neg
gar ecomen gar echO

arcierea archiereus
n_ Acc Sg m
mh mE
Part Neg
dunamenon dunamai
sumpaqhsai sumpatheO
vn Aor Act
NOT
for
WE-ARE-HAVING chief-SACRED-One NO chief-priest pepeirasmenon peirazO

beING-ABLE
TO-TOGETHER-EMOTION to-sympathize panta pas

a_ Acc Pl n
tais ho
t_ Dat Pl f
asqeneiais hmwn astheneia hemeis

de de
Conj
kata kata
Prep
kaq kata
Prep
omoiothta homoiotEs
n_ Acc Sg f
15 For we have not an high priest which cannot be touched with the feeling of our infirmities; but was in all points tempted like as [we are, yet] without sin.
to-THE
UN-FIRMnesses infirmities amartias hamartia

n_ Gen Sg f
OF-US
One-HAVING-been-triED YET according-to ALL one-having-been-tried
according-to LIKEness
cwris chOris
Adv
apart-from missing sin
4:16 prosercwmeqa
proserchomai
oun oun
Conj
meta parrhsias tw meta parrhEsia ho

Prep n_ Gen Sg f t_ Dat Sg m
qronw thronos
n_ Dat Sg m
ths ho
t_ Gen Sg f
caritos ina charis hina

n_ Gen Sg f Conj
WE-MAY-BE-TOWARD-COMING THEN WITH we-may-be-coming-to labwmen lambanO

vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
boldness
to-THE
THRONE
OF-THE
grace
THAT
16 Let us therefore come boldly unto the throne of grace, that we may obtain mercy, and find grace to help in time of need.
eleos eleos
n_ Acc Sg n
kai carin kai charis

Conj n_ Acc Sg f
eurwmen heuriskO
vs 2Aor Act 1 Pl
eis eis
Prep
eukairon eukairos
a_ Acc Sg f
bohqeian boEtheia
n_ Acc Sg f
WE-MAY-BE-GETTING MERCY we-may-be-obtaining
AND
grace
MAY-BE-FINDING INTO WELL-SEASONED help opportune
AV
Hebrews 5
5:1 pas
pas
a_ Nom Sg m
gar arciereus gar archiereus

Conj n_ Nom Sg m
ex ek
Prep
anqrwpwn lambanomenos uper anthrOpos lambanO huper

n_ Gen Pl m vp Pres Pas Nom Sg m Prep
anqrwpwn anthrOpos
n_ Gen Pl m
EVERY
for
chief-SACRED-one OUT OF-humans chief-priest ta ho

t_ Acc Pl n
beING-GOTTEN-UP being-obtained ina hina

Conj
OVER humans for-the-sake-of
. For every high priest taken from among men is ordained for men in things [pertaining] to God, that he may offer both gifts and sacrifices for sins:
kaqistatai kathistEmi
vi Pres Pas 3 Sg
pros pros
Prep
ton ho
t_ Acc Sg m
qeon theos
n_ Acc Sg m
prosferh prospherO
vs Pres Act 3 Sg
IS-beING-DOWN-STOOD THE is-being-constituted in-the(p) dwra dOron

n_ Acc Pl n
WH
TOWARD THE
NA
God
THAT he-MAY-BE-TOWARD-CARRYING he-may-be-offering uper huper

Prep
te
te te
Part
kai qusias kai thusia

Conj n_ Acc Pl f
amartiwn hamartia
n_ G

Nuevo Testament o Griego Por Palabra

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Nuevo Testament o Griego Por Palabra

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

INTRODUCCIN NUEVO TESTAMENTO GRIEGO Scriveners Textus Receptus 1894 Preparado y editado por Dr. Maurice A. Robinson.

CGTS Concordant Greek Text Sublinear

Parsing Parte del discurso:

Genitivo Gen Dat dativo Acc acusativo Vocativo Voc Persona 1 2 3

Apo Apcope Irr irregular o forma impura Adicional ()

EL NUEVO TESTAMENTO GRIEGO CDIGOS declinacin de sustantivos, CONJUNCIONES Y PARTCULAS

genesews ihsou genesis iEsous

cristou uiou christos huios

dauid uiou dauid huios

of-DAVID SON of-David

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

isaak isaak de isaak isaak de

ABRAHAM generatES begets

YET generatES begets

kai tous kai ho

adelfous autou adelphos autos

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

fares kai ton phares kai ho

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

esrwm esrwm de hesrOm hesrOm de

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

aminadab aminadab de aminadab aminadab de

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

racab boes rhachab boes

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

dauid ton dauid ho

basilea dauid de basileus dauid de

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

OUT OF-THE- one OF-THE of-the-onef

roboam roboam de rhoboam rhoboam de

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

iwsafat iwsafat de iOsaphat iOsaphat de

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets

As engendr a Josafat. Josafat engendr a Joram. Joram engendr a Ozas.

WHNA : Lemma_t 2.0.2 / Parsing 2.0 / CGTS 1.4 / CGES_id 2.1

2008 Scripture4all Foundation - www.scripture4all.org

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

iwaqam iwaqam de iOatham iOatham de

egennhsen ton gennaO ho

YET generatES begets

YET generatES begets